VGKL-Catalogue 17. Edition

Editor: Informationszentrum für Labortechnik GmbH, Am Weidendamm 1a, 10117 Berlin, Germany Managing director: Dr. Andreas Rademacher on behalf of “Verband des Groß- und Außenhandels für Krankenpflege- und Laborbedarf e. V.“ (VGKL), 10117 Berlin, Germany Chairman: Ulrich Windaus, 38678 Clausthal-Zellerfeld, Germany Publisher : Vogel Druck und Medienservice GmbH, 97204 Höchberg, Germany Project Management: Bernd Schäfer, 97204 Höchberg in collaboration with the VGKL-appointed Laboratory Catalogue Commission: Dr. Axel Landgraf, 30855 Langenhagen (Chairman) Dipl.-Ing. Hartmut Dewert, 32289 Rödinghausen Dipl.-Kaufm. Michael Migge, 69123 Heidelberg Dipl.-Betriebsw. Thomas Pilz, 09599 Freiberg Thomas Wichert, 30827 Garbsen Stefan Bandelin, 12207 Berlin all Germany 17 th edition: Copyright 2020 by Informationszentrum für Labortechnik GmbH, 10117 Berlin, Germany. Reprinting, in whole or in part, requires the permission of the publisher. Total circulation: 35,000 copies Total production: Vogel Druck und Medienservice, 97204 Höchberg, Germany Full copyright for the laboratory catalogue belongs to Informationszentrum für Labortechnik GmbH. The catalogue was produced as a joint publica- tion by the companies working together in the Verband des Groß- und Außenhandels für Krankenpflege- und Laborbedarf (Association of Whole sale and Foreign Trade of Nursing and Laboratory Supplies). Only these firms may deliver the catalogue to third parties (customers, consumers, etc.). In this catalogue, property rights (patents, design patents, trade marks, etc.) may not always be identified. If such a reference is missing, this does not imply that a product, product name or trademark is not subject to property rights or that it may be used without permission. The manufacturers/advertisers reserve the right to design changes reflecting the technological progress. All information (technical data, package sizes, scope of delivery etc.) is based on the data received from manufacturers/advertisers. Errors and changes are excepted. In spite of checking the information carefully, we do not take liability for its correctness and completeness. For further information about the products please contact the trader.

TOTALContent Imprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 How to Use the Laboratory Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Overview Knowledge Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Overview Product Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9 CE Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Conversion Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15 – for Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 – for Celcius / Fahrenheit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 – for Water Hardness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 – for Units of Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 – for English to Metric Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 – for Quantities and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Prefixes for Decimal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Greek Numerals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Greek Alphabet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Plastiks and their Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 29 Chemical Resistance of Plastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Physical Properties of the Plastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Cleaning and Maintenance of Plastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Sterilisation of Plastics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Product Group Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Product Group Lab Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Product Group Teaching Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Product Group Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Product Group Glass Construction, Glass Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Product Group Volumetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Product Group Pump Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Product Group Sample Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Product Group Heating Units, Refrigerating Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526 Product Group Stirring, Shaking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645 Product Group Separating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702 Product Group Biotechnology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778 Product Group Measuring Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845 Product Group Optical Investigations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .960 Product Group Control Equipment, Evaluation Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .991 Product Group Special Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .997 Product Group Laboratory Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1054 Index English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098 - 1111 Index German. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112 - 1128

HOW TO USE the Laboratory Catalogue THE WEBCODES co d e b e w WWABC000 Next to many of our articles, you'll find a webcode which indicates that there are ad- ditional products from this manufacturer available on our website. To see them, call up our website and enter the webcode WW... in the Search window. All articles from the manufacturer are indicated, classified by ar- ticle groups. Choose an article group and use the filters to select the products you wish to see. PACKAGING UNITS Please note comments that refer to items affected by this proviso: ‼ Available only in complete standard packs. ‼ Available only in complete rolls or reels. THE INDEX It points directly to the product you are looking for as well as to a group of devices / articles suitable for similar tasks. 4

OVERVIEW Knowledge Pages Plastics and their Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Notes on Cleaning in Ultrasonic Bath. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Machine Preparation of Laboratory Glassware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Sterilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 G lass Apparatus Production for Laboratory, Technical Centres and Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Precise Volumetric Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Ultrasound Homogenisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Direct Heating in the Vacuum Drying Oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Laboratory Circulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Centrifugation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Photometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986 Nitrogen Ditermination acc. to Kjeldahl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 Safe and Secure Storage in the Laboratory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075 5

Product Categories Containers 31 31 Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Scintillation Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Dropping Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Carboys, Rectangular Carboys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Jars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Canisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Culture Vessels see Biotechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 90 Transport, Safety Containers Safety Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Buckets, Cans, Kettles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Baskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Sample Transport, Thermo Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 99 Test Tubes Test Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 101 Beakers, Graduated Beakers Beakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Graduated Beakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 108 Flasks Erlenmeyer Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Other Erlenmeyer Flasks see Biotechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 Round Bottom Flasks, Flat Bottom Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Ground Flasks see Glass Construction and Equipment . . . . . 301 111 Dishes, Crucibles Evaporating Dishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 More Petri Dishes, see Biotechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 Crystallizing Dishes, Petri Dishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Casseroles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Watch Glass Dishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Crucibles, Crucible Lids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Magnesia Grooves, Magnesia Sticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Combustion Tubes, Combustion Boats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Dishes, Bowls, Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Pneumatic Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 124 Desiccators, Accessories Desiccators, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 KC Drying Beads see Lab Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213/214 132 Sample Vials Sample Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 134 Centrifuge Tubes, Racks Centrifuge Tubes, Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 136 Specimen Jars Specimen Jars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Inspection Glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Lab Aids 137 137 Racks, Stands Test Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 6 Test Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Lead Rings, Cork Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 146 Small Parts Containers Storage Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 146 Instruments Spatulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Spoons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Shovels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Pincettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Scissors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Tongs, Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Scalpels, Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 169 Funnels Funnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 173 Tubing, Accessories Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Hoses for Gas Burners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Connectors, Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Stopcocks, Valves, Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Other Valves see Glass Construction, Glass Equipment . . . . 322 190 Stoppers Stoppers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 192 Foils and Bags Foils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 197 Stand Materials Stand Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Lifting Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 207 Recording, Marking, Identification Pens, Labeling Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Identification Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Adhesive Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 212 Aids, Tools Boiling Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Operating Resources, Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Teaching Aids 218 218 Demonstration Aids Demonstration Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene 219 219 Personal Protection, First Aid First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Emergency Showers, Eye Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Protective Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Goggles, Eye Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Mouth Protection, Respiratory Protection . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Gas Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Accessories for Alarm Transmission see Heating and Refrigerating Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Skin Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 242 Cleaning, Disinfection Wipes, Cleaning Cloths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Cleaning Sticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Covering Films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Chemical Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Waste Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 261 Cleaning Aids, Equipment Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Draining Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Rinsing Equipment, Drying Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Ultrasonic Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Laboratory Glassware Cleaners/Disinfectors . . . . . . . . . 277 279 Sterilization Sterilization Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Pipette Boxes, Sterilization Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 Steam Sterilizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glass Construction, 300 Glass Equipment Glass and Grounded Joint Components 301 Ground Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Separatory Funnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Dropping Funnels, Cosing Funnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Distillation Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Separators, Cooling Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Standard Ground and Threaded Components . . . . . . . . 315 Stopcocks, Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Other Valves see Lab Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Miscellaneous Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 339 Special Equipment Gas Distributors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Specimen Preparing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 395 Graduated Vessels Graduated Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Graduated Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 411 Syringes Microliter Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Syringes, Hypodermic Needles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Pump Systems 415 Dosing Devices Dispensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 449 449 Liquid Pumps Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Peristaltic Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Diaphragm Liquid Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Syringe Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 465 Vacuum Technology Water Jet Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Diaphragm Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Rotary Vane Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Pump Stands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Cooling traps see Glass Construction and Equipment . . . . . 313 Vacuum Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 482 482 Sampling Samplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Samplers for Environmental Analysis see Special Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 Sample Preparation 495 Size Reduction Pestles, Mortars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Homogenizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Dispersers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Ultrasonic Homogenizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Mortar Grinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Ball Grinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Universal and Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 521 Sample Splitting Sample Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 . 755 Sieving Systems see Separating Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Extraction Extractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Volumetry 342 343 Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Microliter Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Pipette Tips, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Disposable Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Graduated Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Bulb Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Pipette Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Pipetting Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Heating Units, Refrigerating Units 526 526 Temperature Controllers Burners, Blowers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Hoses for Gas Burners see Lab Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Safety Drying Ovens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Incubators, Cooled Incubators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 7

Product Categories Shaking Equipment, Incubators see Stirring, Shaking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 CO2 Incubators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Vacuum Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Furnaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 Tube Furnaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Incinerators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Metal Block Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Thermomixers see Stirring, Shaking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 Quartz Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Heating Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Heating Mantles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Water Baths, Oil Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Shaking Water Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Immersion Thermostats, Bath Circulators . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Circulator Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Cooling Thermostats and Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622 626 Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units Refrigerators, Upright Freezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Chest Freezers, Upright Freezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 Ice Flake Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 635 Insulating Vessels Nitrogen Stores, Nitrogen Freezing Containers . . . . . . . 635 Dewar Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 Cooling Boxes, Chests, Ice Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 Stirring, Shaking Systems 645 645 Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirring Bars, Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Magnetic Stirrers without Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Magnetic Stirrers with Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Multiple Stirrers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 666 Stirrers Stirring Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Stirrers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 Stirrer Seals, Shafts see Glass Construction, Equipment . . . . . 333 672 Shakers, Incubators Vibratory Shakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 Thermomixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 Shakers, Incubators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Shaking Water Baths see Heating, Refrigerating Units . . . . . 595 Roller Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Roller Incubators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 Overhead Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Separating Systems 702 703 Centrifugation Micro Centrifuges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges . . . . . . . . . . . . 712 Centrifuge Tubes, Racks see Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 721 Filtration Filter Papers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Membrane Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 Syringe Filters, Filter Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734 8 Membrane Filtration Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 Glass Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743 Filtration Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Filter Funnels see Filtration Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Filtering Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 Filtration Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 755 Sieving Sieving Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 Sieving Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Test Sieves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 765 Evaporation Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Rotary Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Freeze Drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 774 Chromatography Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 Thin Layer Chromatography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 Biotechnology 778 778 Molecular Biology Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 784 Electrophoresis Chambers, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 Blotting Papers, Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786 UV Illumination Plates/Transilluminators . . . . . . . . . . . 787 788 Culture Vessels Reaction Vessels, Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Plates, Dishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 Cryo Articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Culture Vessels, Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 Bioreactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 831 Sample Processing Colony Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833 Vacuum Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 Measuring Systems 845 845 Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 Platform Balances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866 Weighing Dishes and Jars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 870 Humidity Moisture Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870 874 Temperature Thermo Stripes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874 Laboratory Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 Ground Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 Digital Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 Infrared Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

892 Density and Concentration Areometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 Areometer Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 Pycnometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 Digital Density Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 899 Electrochemistry pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories . . . . . . . . . 899 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments . . . . . . . . 909 pH Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Conductivity Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936 Oxygen Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 946 Viscosity Viscosimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 951 Melting Point Melting Point Determination Instr . & Accss . . . . . . . . . . . 951 952 Climate Room Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 Other thermometers see Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 955 Gas Flow Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955 Gas Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 956 Time Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 957 Counters Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 957 Mechanics Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 Acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 Optical Investigations 960 960 Microscopy, Histology Dissecting Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960 Microscope Slides, Cover Glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 Embedding, Coloring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Organization Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 Optical Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965 Cold Light Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965 Microscopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 971 Spectroscopy Refractometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971 Polarimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 Calibration Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Photometric Workplaces see Special Analysis . . . . . . . . . . 1025 Photometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Flame Photometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990 Control Equipment, Evaluation Equipment 991 991 Electronic Controllers Electronic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 996 Monitoring Instruments Monitoring Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 Spezial Analysis 997 997 Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs Microbiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Determining of Sulphurous Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Alcohol Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Nitrogen Determination acc . to Kjedahl . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 Milk Investigation, Fat Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004 Water Content Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009 Ethereal Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Packing Testers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Malt Testing Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 Dry Matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 1013 Water, Environment Samplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 Indicator Cards, Test Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations . . . . . . . 1025 Turbidity Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 Sedimenting Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 BOD Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 COD Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041 Residue Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 Waste Water Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047 1052 Medical Investigations Blood Investigation, Capillary Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052 Laboratory Facilities 1054 1054 Work Aids Carts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 Steps, Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057 1057 Furniture Work Benches, Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057 Weighing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 Chairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 1066 Protective Equipment Fume Hoods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066 Table and Filter Fume Extractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068 Safety Work Benches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 Insulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 Safety Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076 1080 Cleanroom Systems PCR-Werkbänke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080 Safety Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 1081 Water Treatment Ion Exchanger Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 Reverse Osmosis Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086 Ultrapure Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 1095 Gas Supply Gas Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095 9

KNOWLEDGE marking CE stands for Communauté européenne, European Commission. CE marking of products allows for free movement of goods within the European Union without any additional formalities and certificates. It is not an official mark. The responsibility for application of the CE mark lies with the manufacturer in the European Union or the importer. Further obligations for distributors are specified in various Directives. There is no “separate” European Directive for laboratory equipment and laboratory fa- cilities. Examples for applicable EU Directives and regulations for laboratory equipment: • Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU • Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2014/30/EU • Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC • Pressure Vessels Directive 2014/29/EU • Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU • Regulation on appliances burning gase- ous fuels 2016/426/EC • Regulation on in-vitro diagnostic medical devices (EU) 2017/746 • Regulation on medical devices (EU) 2017/745 • Other directives and regulations, e.g. Measuring Instruments Directive or Reg- ulation on protective equipment Depending on the intended purpose of the laboratory equipment, the person responsi- ble (manufacturer/importer) determines the intended use and specifies the selection of the applicable directives or regulations with the relevant standards, ideally European standards that have been harmonized. With the CE Declaration of Conformity, the person responsible declares that the prod- uct complies with the applicable standards. The CE mark is affixed to the product or alternatively to its packaging if the product is too small. Detailed instructions for use or operating instructions are a part of the re- spective product. If a directive or regulation is applicable, the CE mark must be affixed; otherwise the product may not be sold. Temperature conversion formulae Conversion to temperature in: °C °K °F °C °C K - 273,15 0,556 °F - 17,8 K °C + 273,15 K 0,556 °F + 255,3 °F 1,8 °C + 32 1,8 K - 459,4 °F °Celcius/Fahrenheit and °Fahrenheit/Celcius conversion tables °C 300 280 260 240 220 200 180 160 °F 572 536 500 464 428 392 356 320 °F 300 280 260 240 220 200 180 160 °C 148,89 137,78 126,67 115,56 104,44 93,33 82,22 71,11 T [°F] = 9/5 · (T [°C] – 32), T [°C] = 5/9 · T [°F] + 32 °C 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 10 °F 284 248 212 176 140 104 68 50 °F 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 10 °C 60,00 48,89 37,78 26,67 15,56 4,44 -6,67 -12,22 °C 0 -10 -20 -40 -60 -80 -100 -120 °F 32 14 -4 -40 -76 -112 -148 -184 °F 0 -10 -20 -40 -60 -80 -100 -120 °C -17,78 -23,33 -28,89 -40,00 -51,11 -62,22 -73,33 -84,44 Conversion factors for water hardness American hardness 1 British hardness 1,201 French hardness 1,716 German hardness 0,961 Russian hardness 6,864 ppm as CaCO3 17,16 0,832 0,583 1,041 0,146 0,058 1 0,700 1,250 0,175 0,070 1,429 1 1,786 0,250 0,100 0,800 0,560 1 0,140 0,400 5,714 4,000 7,144 1 0,400 14,29 10,00 17,85 2,50 1 1° American hardness 1° British hardness 1° French hardness 1° German hardness 1° Russian hardness 1° ppm as CaCO3 10

KNOWLEDGE Conversion factors for units of pressure Pa bar mbar atm (760 Torr) at (kp/cm2) Torr (mm Hg)1) mWS1) 1 Pa 1 bar 1 mbar 1 atm 1 at (kp/cm2) 1 Torr (mm Hg) 1 mWS 1) at 20 °C 1 105 102 1,0133 · 105 0,9807 · 105 1,3332 · 102 9,790 · 103 10-5 1 10-3 1,0133 0,9807 1,3332 · 103 9,790 · 10-2 10-2 103 1 1,0133 · 103 0,9807 · 103 1,3332 97,90 0,9869 · 10-5 0,9869 0,9869 · 10-3 1 0,9678 1,316 · 10-3 9,661 · 10-2 1,0197 · 10-5 1,0197 1,0197 · 10-3 1,0332 1 1,359 · 10-3 9,982 · 10-2 7,528 · 10-3 7,528 · 102 0,7528 7,628 · 102 7,382 · 102 1,0036 73,85 1,022 · 10-4 10,22 1,022 · 10-2 10,35 10,02 1,362 · 10-2 1 Conversion of English to metric units Quantity length area volume volume (capacity for liquids) volume (capacity for dry substances) mass (weight) mass (troy system) density pressure Unit mil inch foot yard mile square inch square foot square yard square mile cubic inch cubic foot cubic yard minim minim fluid oune fluid oune liquid pint liquid pint liquid quart liquid quart gallon gallon barrel dry pint dry quart dry barrel grain dram ounce pound quarter cental (long) hundredweight short hundredweight (long) ton short ton pennyweight troy ounce troy ounce pound/cubic foot pound/cubic inch pound/cubic yard pound/square inch (p.s.i.) pound/square foot inch Hg inch WS Symbol in ft yd mi in2 ft2 yd2 mi2 in3 ft3 yd ozfl ozfl pt pt qt qt gal gal gr dr oz lb qr ctl cwt sh cwt tnl tnsh dwt oz tr oz t lb/ft2 lb/in2 lb/yd2 lb/in2 lb/ft2 in Hg in WS Conversion = 25,40 µm 1 mil = 2,54 cm 1 in = 0,305 m 1 ft = 0,914 m 1 yd = 1,609 km 1 mi = 6,452 cm2 1 in2 = 9,290 dm3 1 ft2 = 0,836 m2 1 yd2 = 2,590 km2 1 mi2 = 16,39 cm3 1 in3 = 28,31 dm3 1 ft3 = 0,765 m3 1 yd3 = 59,19 mm3 1 minim = 61,61 mm3 1 minim = 28,41 cm3 1 ozfl = 29,57 cm3 1 ozfl = 568,30 cm3 1 pt = 473,20 cm3 1 pt = 1,136 dm3 1 qt = 946,40 cm3 1 qt = 4,546 dm3 1 gal = 3,785 dm3 1 gal = 159,00 dm3 1 barrel 1 dry pint = 550,6 cm3 1 dry quart = 1,101 dm3 1 dry barrel = 115,6 dm3 = 64,80 mg 1 gr 1 dr = 1,772 g = 28,35 g 1 oz = 453,60 g 1 lb = 12,70 kg 1 qr = 45,36 kg 1 ctl 1 cwt = 50,80 kg = 45,36 kg 1 sh cwt = 1016,00 kg 1 tnl = 907,20 kg 1 tnsh = 1,555 g 1 dwt 1 oz tr = 31,10 g = 31,10 g 1 oz t = 0,016 g/cm3 1 lb/ft2 = 27,68 g/cm3 1 lb/in2 1 lb/yd2 = 0,593 kg/m3 = 6,895 · 10-2 bar 1 lb/in2 = 6,895 · 10-2 bar) (1 p.s.i. = 4,788 · 10-4 bar 1 lb/ft2 = 3,337 · 10-2 bar 1 in Hg = 2,487 · 10-3 bar 1 in WS Comments applies only in USA equals inch (") applies for GB applies for USA applies for GB applies for USA applies for GB applies for USA applies for GB applies for USA applies for GB applies for USA only for mineral oil applies only in USA applies only in USA applies only in USA applies only in GB applies only in GB applies only in GB applies only in USA applies only in GB applies for precious stones + metals applies for GB applies for USA 11

KNOWLEDGE Quantities and units Quantity Legal units Units no longer approved Name Symbol Name Symbol activity of a radioactive substance equivalent dosage work, mechanical luminous intensity becquerel Bq sievert Sv joule lux J lx Curie Rem Erg Nox Ci rem erg nx Conversion factors/ Relationships 1 Bq 1 Ci = 1 s-1 = 3,7 · 1010 s-1 1 Sv 1 rem = 1 J/kg = 10-2 J/kg Comments SI unit SI unit 1 J 1 erg 1 lx 1 nx = 1 N · m = 1 kg · m2/s2 = 10-7 J SI unit = 1 lm/m2 = 10-3 lx SI unit lens power of optical systems diopter dpt 1 dpt = 1 m-1 (also called refractive power density rotation, specific kilogram divided by cubic meter kg/m3 rad · m2/kg degree degree · dm–1 · g–1 · ml rotational speed pressure rotations divi- ded by seconds rotations divi- ded by minutes s–1 min–1 Pascal Bar Pa bar SI unit usually expressed in g/ml or g/cm3 [a] d l c = a / (l · c) = amount of rotation in degrees = polarimeter tube length in dm = concentration in g/ml SI unit usually expressed in degrees amount of rota- tion caused by 1 g sub- stance in 1 ml solution in a tube 10 cm long) RPM 1 RPM = 1 min–1 = 1/60 s–1 = 1/60 Hz SI unit phys. atmosph. techn. atmosph. techn. atmosph. above atm meter water gage millimeter mercury or torr atm at atü mWG mm Hg torr 1 Pa 1 bar 1 atm 1 at atü 1 mWG 1 mm Hg = 1 N/m2 = 105 Pa = 1,01325 · 105 Pa = 1 kp/cm2 = 0,9807 · 105 Pa = atm + 1 = 9,790 · 103 Pa = 1 Torr = 1,3332 · 102 Pa SI unit also refer to tables “Conversion factors for units of pressure“ and “Conversion of English to metric units energy joule electron volt absorbed dose Gray J eV Gy absorbed dosage rate/power Gray divided by second Gy/s calory Rad Rem cal rd rem 1 J 1 eV 1 cal 1 Gy 1 rd 1 rem = 1 N · m = 1 kg · m2/s = 1 W · s = 1,60219 · 10-19 J = 4,1868 J = 1 J/kg = 0,01 J/kg = 0,01 J/kg SI units SI unit 1 Gy/s = 1 W/kg SI unit extinction coefficient, molarer specific 12 l/mol · cm l/g · cm also called spectral ab- sorption factor (DIN) or in- ternal absorbency (IUPAC)

KNOWLEDGE Quantities and units (continued) Quantity Legal units Units no longer approved Name Symbol Name Symbol Conversion factors/ Relationships Comments field strength, electrical magnetic area flux, magnetic flux density, electrical magnetic volts divided by meters amperes divi- ded by meters V/m A/m square meter m2 weber Wb coulomb divi- ded by square meter tesla C/m2 T Oersted Are Hectare Maxwell Gauss frequency hertz Hz s-1 speed inductance, electrical/electro- magnetic meters divided by seconds kilometers divi- ded by hours m/s km/h henry H ion dose coulomb divi- ded by kilogram C/kg capacitance, electrical farad force newton charge, electrica length (distance, height) coulomb meter power watt F N C m W conductivity, length related siemens divided by centimeter S/cm Internat. henry Röntgen Internat. Farad Pond Dyn Micron Ångström Fermi Zoll Horsepower Oe qm a ha M G Hint R Fint p dyn µ Å f " HP 1 V/m 1 Oe 1 m2 1 a 1 ha 1 Wb 1 M 1 T 1 G = 1 m · kg/s3 · A = 1 W/A · m = 103 4π A/m = 1 m · 1 m = 102 m2 = 104 m2 = 1 V · s = 10-8 Wb = 1 Wb/m2 = 1 V · s/ m2 = 10-4 T 1 Hz =1 s-1 1 km/h = 0,27 m/s 1 H 1 Hint 1 R 1 F 1 Fint 1 N 1 kp 1 dyn = 1 Wb/A = 1 V · s/A = 1 W · s/A2 = 1 Ω · s = 1,00049 H = 2,58 · 10-4 C/kg = 1 C/V = 1 A2 · s/W = 1 s/Ω = 0,99951 F = 1 kg · m/s2 = 9,807 N = 10-5 N 1 C = 1 A · s = 1 J/V 1 µ 1 Å 1 f 1" 1 W 1HP = 10-6 m = 10-10 m = 10-15 m = 25,4 mm = 1 J/s = 0,735 kW 1 S/cm = 1 Ω-1 · cm-1 siemens S 1 S = 1 Ω-1 SI unit SI unit SI unit SI unit SI unit SI unit (formerly magnetic induction) SI unit for periodic cycles SI unit SI unit SI unit SI unitt SI units SI unit (also called quantity of electricity) SI basic unit SI unit SI unit conductivity is conductance divided by length, usually expressed in µS/cm SI units 13

KNOWLEDGE Quantities and units (continued) Quantity Legal units Units no longer approved Name Symbol Name Symbol Conversion factors/ Relationships Comments SI unit SI unit SI basic unit SI unit SI basic unit (only for precious stones) 1 nt 1 sb 1 la 1 ph 1HK 1 IK 1 lm = 1 cd/m2 = 1 cd/cm2 = 1 π sb = 1 π cd/cm2 = 1 lm/cm2 = 0,903 cd = 1,019 cd = 1 cd · sr 1 g 1 t 1 Kt 1 u 1 Dalton = 10–3 kg = 103 kg = 0,2 g = 1,6605 · 10-27 kg = 1,6602 · 10-27 kg illumination candelas divide by square meters cd/m2 luminance, specific lumens divided by square meters lm/m2 luminous intensity candela luminous flux lumen mass (weight as result of weighing) voltage, electrical amount of substance kilogram gram ton metric carat atomic mass unit volt mol cd lm kg g t Kt u V mol Nit Stilb Lambert Phot Hefner candela Internat. candela Dalton Internat. Volt Mol amount Gram-molecule Gram-atom Gram- equivalent proportion of substance amount of sub- stance concen- tration, in relation to equivalents current intensity, electrical mol/l mol/l ampere A temperature kelvin degree Celsius K °C mol/mol % Mol fraction Molarity Molality Normaliy Internat. Ampere Degree kelvin Degree fahrenheit Degree rankine Degree reaumur viscosity, dynamic kinematic 14 Pa · s m2/s Poise Stokes nt sb la ph HK IK gr. amu Vint Mol Mol Tom Val mol/kg val/l Aint °K °F °Rank °R P St 1 V 1 Vint = 1 J/C = 1 W/A = 1,00034 V SI unit, (also electr. potential) SI basic unit 1 mol equsls 6,022 · 1023 particles (atoms, moleules, ions, electroncs, pho tons), i.e. as many elementary units as are contained in 12 g of the nucleotide carbon 12 (Avogadro’s number) (also called amount of sub- stance) 1 A 1 Aint K °C °K °F °Rank °R = 1 C/s = 1,000291 A = °C + 273,15 = ° K - 273,15 = ° K = 1,8 K - 459,4 = 1,8 K = 1,25 °C 1 Pa · s 1 P 1 St = 1 N · s · m2 = 1 kg/s · m = 0,1 Pa · s = 1 cm2/s SI basic unit SI basic unit. refer also to the table “Conversion formulae for temperatures“ (symbol also °R) SI unit SI unit

KNOWLEDGE Quantities and units (continued) Quantity Legal units Units no longer approved Name Symbol Name Symbol volume cubic meter liter m3 l volume flow, volume flux m3/s l/s quantity of heat joule J m3 of timber stacked m3 standard m3 calory ohm resistance, electrical specific Ω Ω ·mm2/m Internat. Ohm cbm cdm Fm Rm Nm cal Ωint Conversion factors/ Relationships 1 m3 1 l 1 Fm 1 Rm 1 Nm = 1 m · 1 m · 1 m = 10-3 m3 = 1 dm = 1 m3 = 1 m3 = 1 m3 1 m3/s 1 l/s = 103 l/s = 106 mm3/s 1 J 1 cal 1 Ω 1 Ωint = 1 N · m = 1 W · s = 4,187 J = 1 V/A = 1 W/A2 = 1 kg · m2/s3 · A2 = 1,00079 Ω Comments SI unit SI unit SI unit SI unit angle, plane spatial time radian perigon degree minute second centesimal degree Steradiant second minute hour day rad ° ‘ " gon sr s min h d 1 rad 1 Vollw. 1° = 1 m/1 m = 57° 17’ 45" = 2 π rad = 360° = π0 180 rad = 1,7453 · 10-2 rad = 2,9089 · 10-4 rad = 4,8481 · 10-6 rad 1π1 200 rad = = 1 m2/1 m2 = 1° 60 = 1’ 60 1’ 1" 1 gon 1 sr sec. min. 1 min 1 h 1 d = 60 s = 60 min = 24 h supplementary SI unit (plane angle = ratio of the arc of a circle to the radius of a circle) supplementary SI unit (spatial angle = ratio of an area cut out from a sphere to the square of the radius of the sphere) SI basic unit 15

KNOWLEDGE Prefixes for decimal multiples and fractions of units Name Atto Femto Piko Nano Mikro Milli Zenti Dezi Deka Hekto Kilo Mega Giga Tera Peta Exa Symbol a f p n µ m c d dc h k M G T P E Power of ten 10–18 10–15 10–12 10–9 10–6 10–3 10–2 10–1 10 102 103 106 109 1012 1015 1018 Decimal number 0,000 000 000 000 000 001 0,000 000 000 000 001 0,000 000 000 001 0,000 000 001 0,000 001 0,001 0,01 0,1 1 000 000 000 000 000 010 1 000 000 000 000 000 100 1 000 000 000 000 001 000 1 000 000 000 001 000 000 1 000 000 001 000 000 000 1 000 001 000 000 000 000 1 001 000 000 000 000 000 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 Greek numerals Einfache Zahlen ein- zwei- drei- wier- fünf- sechs- sieben- acht- neun- zehn- elf- zwölf- móno- di- tri- tétra- pénta- héxa- hépta- ókta- énnéa- déka- héndeka- dódeka- Greek alphabet a β γ δ ε ζ η ϑ Letter Α Β Γ D Ε Ζ Η Θ 16 Name álpha béta gámma délta épsilon zéta éta théta Letter Ι Κ Λ Μ Ν Ξ Ο Π ι κ l μ ν ξ ο π Name jóta káppa lámbda mü nü xi ómikron pi Letter Ρ Σ Τ Υ Φ Χ Ψ Ω ρ σ τ υ ϕ χ ψ ω Name rho sigma tau y´psilon phi chi psi ómega

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Chemical resistance of plastics With regard to chemical stability, plastics are classified as follows: + 0 Very good chemical resistance Good to limited chemical resistance – Poor chemical resistance Within 30 days, continuous exposure to media causes no damage to the plastic. The plastic may remain resistant for years. Within 7-30 days, continuous exposure to media causes minor damage (e.g. swelling, softening, loss of Not suitable for continuous exposure to media. Immediate damage may occur (e.g. loss of mechanical strength, mechanical strength, discolouration), deformation, discolouration, cracking, some of which is reversible. liquification). Chemical resistance of plastics to various substance classes Classes of substances at 20 °C A F P E F T P P E F E F T E P M P P P D H - E P D L - E P C P M O P A P Alcohols, aliphatics Ethers Aldehydes Esters Hydrocarbons, aliphatic Hydrocarbons, aromatic Hydrocarbons, halogenated Ketones Alkalis Acids, strong or concentrated Acids, weak or diluted Oxidising acids, oxidising agents + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + o + + + + + - o o o - - o + + + - + o + o + o o o + + + - + o + o + + o o + + + - + o o o o o o o + + + - + - o - o - - - - - o - + + o - + + + + + - - - o + o + o o o + + - - - N A S + - - - - - - - + - o - A M M P S P C V P F M R N I S M D P E M K F - - o o + - - - + - - - + + - - - - - - - + o o - - - - + - - - + + + - + - + + + + + + - - o - + - o o - - - - + - o - + - o o - - - - o - o - + - + o - - - o + + + o - - + - o o o - o o + o The carefully prepared recommendations listed here are based on technical literature and made available by the manufacturers of raw materials, to provide information and advice. However, nothing can replace suitability tests conducted by the end user under the actual conditions of use. 17

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Chemical stability of plastics Medium PFA/FEP PTFE ETFE PMP PP HDPE LDPE 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C Acetaldehyde Acetic acid (glacial acetic acid), 100% Acetic acid, 50% Acetic anhydride Acetone Acetonitrile Acetophenone Acetyl chloride(acetic acid chloride) Acetylacetone Acrylic acid (2-propenic acid) Acrylonitrile Adipic acid Allyl alcohol (2-propan-1-ol) Aluminium chloride Aluminium hydroxide Amino acids Ammonium chloride Ammonium fluoride Ammonium hydroxide, 30% (ammonia) Ammonium sulphate n-Amyl acetate (pentyl acetate) Amyl alcohol (pentanol) Amyl chloride (chloropentane) Aniline Aqua regia Barium chloride Benzaldehyde Benzene Benzoyl chloride Benzyl alcohol Benzyl chloride Benzylamine Boric acid, 10% Bromine Bromobenzene Bromoform Bromonaphthalene Butanediol 1-Butanol (butyl alcohol) n-Butyl acetate (acetic acid n-butyl ester) Butyl methyl ether Butylamine Butyric acid (butanoic acid) Calcium carbonate Calcium chloride Calcium hydroxide Calcium hypochlorite 18 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + 0 + + + + + + + - + + + + + 0 + + + + + + 0 + + + + 0 0 + + - + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + 0 0 0 0 + - - - + + + + + + + + - 0 + 0 + - - - + 0 + 0 + + + + + 0 + - 0 - + + 0 0 - + - - - + 0 0 - + + + 0 + + + 0 + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + 0 + - + - + + + + 0 0 + - - - + + 0 + - + + + + - 0 + 0 + 0 0 - + + + + + + + + + - + - + - + + 0 0 - + - - - + + 0 0 - + + + + + + + 0 + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + + + 0 0 + - - - + + + 0 0 + + + + 0 + + 0 + 0 0 + + + + + + + + + + 0 + - + - + + + + - + - - - + + + - - + + + + + + + - + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + - + - + + 0 0 0 0 + - - - + + 0 0 - + + + + - 0 + - 0 0 - + + + + + + + + + + - + - 0 - + + - - - - + - - - + + 0 - - + + + +

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE PC POM PA SAN PMMA PS PVC MF NR SI EPDM FKM 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 0 - + - - - - - - - - + 0 - 0 + 0 0 - + - + - 0 - + 0 - - 0 - + - - - 0 - - 0 + + - 0 - - 0 - - - - - - - - + 0 - - + 0 0 - + - + - - - + - - - 0 - + - - - 0 - - - + + - - + - 0 - + + + + - - + + + + + + + 0 + + + + 0 - + + + + + + + + - - + + + + + + + + + + - - - + - - + + 0 + + + + 0 + + + + 0 - + + 0 0 + + - - + + 0 + + + + + + 0 - - 0 + + + - + + 0 0 + + + + 0 + 0 + + 0 - + 0 + - - + + - + - + + + 0 + - + + - - 0 - - + + - - - - - - 0 0 + - - - + - - - - - - - + 0 + 0 + + + + + - + - - - + - - - - - + - - - - - + - - - - + + + + - 0 - - - - - - - + - + 0 + + + 0 + - + - - - + - - - - - + - - - - - 0 - - - - + + 0 + - - - - - - - - - + - + 0 + 0 0 + + + - - - + - - - - - + - - - 0 - - + + + 0 - - - - - - - - - + - + 0 + 0 0 + + + - - - + - - - - - + - - - - - - + + + 0 - - 0 - - - - - - - - + 0 + 0 + + + 0 + - 0 - - - + - - - - - - + - - - - - 0 - - - - + + + + - - 0 - - - - - - - - + 0 + 0 + + + - + - 0 - - - + - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - + + 0 + - + - - - - - - - - + 0 + + + + + + + - 0 - - - + - - - 0 - + - - - 0 - - + 0 + 0 - 0 - - - - - - - - 0 - 0 + + 0 0 0 + - 0 - - - + - - - 0 - + - - - 0 - - + - + - 0 + + + + + - + - 0 - 0 0 - - - - - - + 0 0 + + + - + 0 0 0 - - - + - - - - - - + - - - 0 + - - - - + + + - - 0 - 0 - - - - - - - + - 0 + + + + 0 0 - - - - - + - - - 0 - 0 + - - - - 0 - - 0 - + + 0 0 0 0 - 0 + - + - + - - + + + + + + + + + 0 0 - - - + 0 - - 0 - 0 + - - + 0 0 - - - + + + + - - - - - - - + - - - + + + + + + 0 - - - 0 + - - + - 0 + + + + + 0 + - + - - - 0 + + + + 19

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Chemical stability of plastics Medium PFA/FEP PTFE ETFE PMP PP HDPE LDPE 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Carbon disulphide Carbon tetrachloride Chloroacetaldehyde, 45% Chloroacetic acid (monochloroacetic acid) Chloroacetone Chlorobenzene Chlorobutane Chloroform Chloronaphthalene Chlorosulphonic acid Chromic acid, 10% Chromic acid, 50% Chromic-sulphuric acid Copper sulphate Cresol Cumene (isopropylbenzene) Cyclohexane Cyclohexanone Cyclopentane Decane 1-Decanol Di(ethylene glycol) Dibenzyl ether Dibromoethane Dibutyl phthalate Dichloroacetic acid Dichlorobenzene Dichloroethane Dichloromethane (methylene chloride) Diesel oil (heating oil) Diethanolamine Diethyl ether Diethylamine 1,2 Diethylbenzene Dimethyl sulphoxide (DMSO) Dimethylaniline Dimethylformamide (DMF) 1,4-Dioxane Diphenyl ether 1,2 Ethanediol (ethylene glycol, glycol) Ethanol (ethyl alcohol) Ethanolamine Ethyl acetate (acetic acid ethyl ester) Ethyl methyl ketone (MEK) Ethylbenzene Ethylene oxide Fluoroacetic acid 20 + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 0 + 0 + + + + 0 + 0 + - + + + + 0 + 0 + + + + + + + 0 0 + 0 + + 0 0 + + + 0 + + + + 0 0 + - - + - 0 0 + 0 0 + - - - 0 0 0 + + 0 + + - 0 0 0 - 0 - + + 0 + + 0 - - 0 - - 0 - - - + 0 - + - - - 0 - + 0 + - - - - - 0 - + + 0 + 0 - - - - - - + - 0 - + 0 - + 0 0 0 0 0 0 + + + + 0 0 0 0 + 0 0 0 - + + + + + + + + - 0 - - 0 - - - + 0 - + 0 - - - - + 0 - - - - 0 - - - + + 0 + + 0 0 - - - 0 + - 0 0 + + - + 0 + 0 0 0 0 + + + 0 0 0 0 0 + 0 0 0 0 + + + + + + 0 - 0 - - + - - - + 0 - + - 0 - - - - + - 0 - - - 0 - - - + + + + + + - - 0 - 0 + - 0 0 + + - + - 0 0 - - + 0 0 0 0 0 0 - - - + + + + + + 0 - 0 - - + - - - + 0 - + - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - + + 0 + + + - - 0

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE PC POM PA SAN PMMA PS PVC MF NR SI EPDM FKM 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C - - - - - - - - - - - - + + 0 - - 0 - - + 0 - + - - - - - 0 0 0 - 0 - - - - - - 0 - - - 0 + + - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 - - + - - - - - 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 + 0 - - - - - + 0 - - - - - 0 - - + + + + + + + + - - + + + 0 0 + + - + - + 0 - - - - - 0 - - + - + 0 + - - + + + 0 + + - + - 0 - - - - 0 - - - - + - + + 0 - + 0 0 + + + + 0 0 + + + 0 - - - - - - - - - 0 0 + - 0 + - - - - - - - - - - - + 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 0 0 - + - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - 0 - 0 - - - - 0 - - + - - - - - 0 - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 + - - - - - 0 0 - - 0 - - - - - 0 - - - - - - + 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - + - - + + + + - - - - - 0 + - - 0 - - 0 - - - - 0 - + + - - - 0 - - - 0 - - 0 - 0 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + 0 - - - - - + + + + + + - - - 0 - - - - - - - - 0 - - - - - - 0 + - - - - - - - - 0 - - 0 - - - 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 - - + - - - - - 0 0 0 - 0 - - - - - - 0 - + 0 0 - - + 0 - - - - - - - - 0 + - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - + + 0 0 - - - - - 0 - 0 - 0 0 0 - + + + 0 - - - + + 0 - 0 0 0 + - + + + + + + + - + + + + - 0 - + 0 0 + - - + 0 - - 0 0 0 - - 0 - - 21

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Chemical stability of plastics Medium PFA/FEP PTFE ETFE PMP PP HDPE LDPE 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C Formaldehyde, 40% Formamide Formic acid, 98-100% Gasoline (petroleum spirits) Glycerine Glycolic acid, 70% Heating oil (Diesel oil) Heptane Hexane Hexanoic acid Hexanol Hydrochloric acid, 10% Hydrochloric acid, 20% Hydrochloric acid, 37% Hydrofluoric acid, 40% Hydrofluoric acid, 70% Hydrogen bromide Hydrogen peroxide, 35% Hydroiodic acid Isoamyl alcohol (3-methyl-1-butanol) Isobutanol (isobutyl alcohol) Isooctane Isopropanol (2-propanol) Isopropyl ether Lactic acid (2-hydroxypropionic acid) Lugol’s solution (iodine/potassium iodide solution) Mercury Mercury chloride Methanol Methoxybenzene Methyl butyl ether Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) Methyl formate (formic acid methyl ester) Methyl propyl ketone Methylene chloride (dichloromethane) Mineral oil (motor oil) Monochloroacetic acid Nitric acid, 10% Nitric acid, 30% Nitric acid, 70% Nitrobenzene Oleic acid Oxalic acid Ozone n-Pentane Peracetic acid Perchloric acid Perchloroethylene 22 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + 0 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + 0 0 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + - 0 - + + + 0 - - + + 0 - + + 0 0 + + - 0 - + + + + + 0 + + + + + + - + 0 + + + 0 - 0 - + 0 + - - - + + - - + + + 0 + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + 0 + + + 0 - - + 0 + - + + + 0 + + 0 0 0 + + + + + 0 + + + + + + - + + + + + + 0 0 - + 0 + - - - + - - - + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + + 0 0 + 0 + + + 0 - 0 + 0 + - + + + + + + 0 0 0 + + + + + 0 + + + + + + - + - + + + - - + - + + + - - - + - - - + + + 0 + + 0 0 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + - + - + + + - 0 + 0 + + + 0 - - + 0 + - + + + - + + - - - + + + + + - + + + + + + - + - + + 0 - - 0 - 0 + + 0 - - + - - -

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE PC POM PA SAN PMMA PS PVC MF NR SI EPDM FKM 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C + + 0 + - + - - 0 - - - + + + 0 + - + 0 + + + - - - - - - + 0 + + - - + - - - - 0 0 - + - 0 - - 0 - - - + + + + - + - + + 0 - - - - - - - 0 0 - - + - - - - + - - + 0 + + - - - - - - + + + + + 0 + 0 + 0 0 - + + - + - - - - 0 + - - - + + - - + 0 + + - - - - - - - + + + - 0 + 0 + - + - + - - - - - + - - - 0 + + - + + - + + + - - - - - - - + + - 0 + - 0 0 - - - - - + - - + - - 0 - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + 0 - + - + 0 0 0 + - + 0 0 + + 0 + + 0 - - - - - - + - + 0 - - - + 0 - 0 + 0 - + - + - - - 0 - + - - - + - + + - - - - - - - - 0 - - - - + 0 - 0 - - + + 0 0 0 + + 0 0 0 - - - 0 0 0 - + + - - - - - - - + 0 + 0 - - - + + - 0 - - + - - 0 - - - - - - - - - - + + - - - - - - - + - 0 0 - - - + 0 - - - + - + - - - + + 0 + - 0 + 0 0 0 - + 0 + + 0 - - - - - - + 0 - - - - - + 0 - - - 0 - + - - - + + 0 + - - + 0 - 0 - + - + 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - + 0 - - 0 - 0 + 0 - 0 + 0 0 0 - + + + - 0 - + - + - - - - + + + 0 - - + + 0 - - - - + - - - - - - 0 0 0 - 0 - + - 0 - - - - + 0 0 - - - + 0 - - + + + - - - - - 0 - - - 0 + 0 - 0 + - - - 0 0 0 0 - - 0 - 0 + - + - 0 + + + 0 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 - - - - 0 - - + + - - - 0 0 - - - - - 0 0 + - 0 - 0 - + + + - - - 0 - - 0 - - - - - - 0 + - - - - + 0 0 - + + - - - - + + + 0 - 0 0 + 0 + - + - 0 + + + + - - 0 0 0 - - 0 - - - - + + - 0 - 0 0 - + 0 0 + + + + + + 0 0 - + + 0 + + + - + + + + - - - - - 0 + 0 0 0 - - 0 + + + + 0 23

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Chemical stability of plastics Medium PFA/FEP PTFE ETFE PMP PP HDPE LDPE 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + - 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + - + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + - - + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + 0 0 + + - + + + + + 0 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 0 + + + 0 - - 0 + 0 + + 0 0 + + + + + 0 + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + - - + + + 0 - - 0 + - + + 0 + 0 0 + + + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + - + - 0 + + 0 - - - - + - + + - + + + + + + 0 + 0 + + + + + + + + + + - + - - + + - - - - - + - + + 0 + 0 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + 0 0 + + 0 - 0 0 0 + 0 + + - + + + + + + 0 + 0 + + + + + + + + + + - + - 0 + + 0 - - - - + - + + 0 0 + + + + + + 0 + + + + + + + + + + + + 0 + 0 0 + + 0 - - - 0 + 0 + + - 0 + + + + + - + 0 + + + + + + + + + + - + - - + + - - - - - + - + + Petroleum Petroleum ether Phenol Phenylethanol Phenylhydrazine Phosphoric acid, 85% Piperidine Potassium chloride Potassium dichromate Potassium hydroxide Potassium permanganate Propanol Propionic acid Propylene glycol (propanediol) Pyridine Salicylaldehyde Salicylic acid Silver acetate Silver nitrate Sodium acetate Sodium chloride Sodium dichromate Sodium fluoride Sodium hydroxide Sulphuric acid, 60% Sulphuric acid, 98% Tartaric acid Tetrachloroethylene Tetrahydrofuran (THF) Tetramethylammonium hydroxide Toluene Tri(ethylene glycol) Tri(propylene glycol) Trichloroacetic acid Trichlorobenzene Trichloroethane Trichloroethylene Trichlorotrifluoroethane Triethanolamine Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA) Trifluoroethane Turpentine Urea Xylene Zinc chloride, 10% Zinc sulphate, 10% 24

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE PC POM PA SAN PMMA PS PVC MF NR SI EPDM FKM 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 50 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 20 °C 0 - + + - + 0 - + - 0 + + + + + + - 0 - + - - - + + 0 - - - - - - + + 0 - + + - + - 0 - 0 + + + + - + - 0 - + - - - 0 0 - - - - - - - + + + + - + + + 0 + - + + - 0 0 + + + + + - - + 0 - + + + 0 - - + + + + 0 + + - - + + 0 + - + 0 - 0 0 0 + + + + - - + 0 - + 0 0 - - - + + + 0 - + + - 0 - + - + - + 0 - + + + + + + + + - - 0 - + + - 0 0 0 + + + - - - - - - + 0 - 0 - - 0 - - - - - + 0 0 + + - - - + 0 + + + + + + + - + - - + + - - - - - - 0 + - + + - + 0 0 0 + - - - + 0 + + + 0 + + 0 - + - - + + - - - - - - 0 + - + + + + - - + + + 0 0 - 0 + - + + + - - 0 - - 0 0 - - + + - - 0 - - + + + 0 - 0 + - + 0 + - - 0 - - 0 0 - - + + - - 0 - - - + 0 0 + 0 0 + - - + 0 0 + + + + + - - + - - + + 0 - - - - - - - - + - + + - - - 0 0 0 + - + - - + 0 0 + + 0 + + - - + - - + + - - - - - - - - - + - + + + 0 - + + 0 + + 0 0 0 - 0 0 0 0 + + + + 0 - + - - 0 0 0 - - - + 0 - + + - - - 0 0 0 + + - - - - - 0 0 0 + + + + - - + - - - - - - - - + - - 0 0 - - - 0 - - + 0 0 - + - + - + + + + + + 0 0 - - + - - - 0 + 0 - - 0 - - + - + 0 0 - - - - - + 0 - - 0 - + - + + + 0 + 0 0 0 - - + - - - + + - - - - - + - + + - - - - 0 - + + + + + 0 + - + + + + + + + + - - 0 - - + - + 0 - - 0 0 - - + - + + - - - - + + + + 0 0 + - + 0 - + + + + - + + + - + + + 0 + + + 0 - - 0 + - + 0 - - + + + 0 + + 25

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Physical properties of plastics Plastics Max. temperature for use Brittleness temperature Microwaveability* PFA PTFE FEP ETFE PMP PP PE-HD PE-LD PC POM PA SAN PMMA PS PVC MF NR SI EPDM FKM °C 260 260 205 150 150 125 105 80 125 130 90 70 65 - 95 70 80 120 80 180 130 220 °C -200 -200 -100 -100 0 0 -50 -50 -130 -40 0 -40 -50 -20 -20 -80 -40 -60 -40 -30 yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no - no no no no yes** no no - - * Mind the chemical and temperature suitability! ** Caution necessary when used in a microwave oven: Heating can release amounts of melamine and formaldehyde that can be harmful to health! Density g/cm3 2,17 2,17 2,15 1,70 0,83 0,90 0,95 0,92 1,20 1,42 1,13 1,03 1,18 1,05 1,35 1,50 1,20 1,10 - - 26

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Cleaning and maintenance of plastics All polyolefins, such as PE-LD, PE-HD, PP and PMP, as well as the fluoroplastics PTFE, PFA, FEP and ETFE have water-repellent surfaces that are very durable and easy to clean. For cleaning, depending on the level of contamination, commercially available neutral or alkaline deter- gents can be used. Polycarbonate (PC) labware should not be cleaned with alkaline cleaning agents (> pH 7). Please note that no scrubbing agents or scouring pads should be used for labware made from plastics. Cleaning with dishwashers Labware made from the above-named plastics (except for PE-LD, due to the temperature limit) can be cleaned and dried in a laboratory dishwasher together with other apparatus. Machine cleaning with laboratory dishwashers is gentler to labware than cleaning in an im- mersion bath. The labware is exposed to the cleaning solution for relatively short rinsing periods when sprayed by the jet or injector nozzles. Due to their light weight, we recom- mend securing the apparatus to be washed with washing nets to prevent them from tum- bling in the water jet. Labware is better protected against scratching when the wire baskets in the washing machine are plastic coated. Cleaning in an ultrasonic bath Plastic labware may be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath. However, direct contact with the acoustic membrane should be avoided. Cleaning in trace analysis To avoid contamination with cations and anions in trace analysis, plastic labware should be allowed to stand with a 1N HCl or HNO3 solution for a maximum of 6 hours at room tem- perature, and be rinsed afterwards with purified distilled water. For trace analysis conducted in the concentration range of ng/g (ppb) or pg/g (ppt), containers made of the fluoroplastic PFA are particularly suitable, because they have a smooth surface, are easy to clean without carry-over (memory effects) and interaction with the container material. 27

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Sterilisation of laboratory equipment made of plastics Autoclaving Recommended autoclaving protocol 20 minutes at 121 °C (2 bar), according to DIN EN 285 Autoclaving (steam sterilisation) is defined as the destruction or irreversible inactivation of all reproducible microorganisms under exposure to “saturated steam at a minimum of 120 °C.” (DIN 58946-1, 1987). DIN EN 285 specifies a minimum exposure time (te) of 20 minutes (killing time and safety margin) at a sterilisation temperature of 121 °C. For the correct sterilisation procedure, including biological safety (DIN EN 285), please contact your hygiene specialist. Prior to autoclaving plastic labware, ensure that no soiling or residual contamination remains on the equipment. Otherwise, the residual con- tamination will bake on solidly during the autoclaving process. Even substances that have no effect on the plastic at room temperature can still lead to destruction of the plastic during the autoclaving process. Additionally, microorganisms might not be killed effectively if they are protected by the residual contamination. Notes on autoclaving • Containers with screw tops or stoppers must be open during autoclaving to allow for pressure equalisation ➡ Autoclaving of a closed container will lead to the deformation or destruction of the container • Plastic labware should be stood upright on a level surface during autoclaving to avoid shape deformation. ➡ Plastic labware should not be laid on its side during autoclaving • No mechanical stresses should be present during autoclaving ➡ For example, do not stack items • Do not autoclave any container that contains residual contamination or even rinsing agent • Not all plastics are resistant to steam sterilisation! For example, polycarbonate loses its tensile strength ➡ Mind the temperature limits for the plastics ➡ Autoclavable products are identified with a “121 °C” symbol in this catalogue The surfaces of some plastics can be attacked by chemicals present during autoclaving, which can cause persistent clouding. Some transpar- ent plastics can absorb minute quantities of steam, which can lead to reversible clouding. This clouding disappears upon drying, which can be accelerated through the use of a drying oven. Note! For gas sterilisation, dry heat, and prior to heating in a microwave oven, all closures and stoppers must be removed as well. Heating plastics in microwave ovens Many plastics are suitable for use in microwave ovens. More accurate information can be obtained from the Table “Physical Properties of Plastics” on page 26. In this connection, it is important to be mindful of the chemical and temperature stability of the various plastics, and to ascertain whether the particular article and its contents are compatible with the given temperature. When aggressive acids, alkalis, or sol- vents are to be heated, the use of fluoroplastics is recommended. It is very important to provide for adequate ventilation (e.g., fume hoods). Prior to the use of plastic labware in a microwave oven, the closures and stoppers must be removed from the apparatus. 28

KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE Sterilisation* of plastics Plastics Autoclave 121 °C, te 20 min according to DIN Heated air 160 °C (dry) Gas Chemical (Ethylene oxide) (Formalin, ethanol) β-/γ-radiation 25 kGy PFA PTFE FEP ETFE PMP PP PE-HD PE-LD PC POM PA SAN PMMA PS PVC MF NR SI EPDM FKM yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes1) yes1) no no no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no no no no no no no no - - - yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes * Before sterilisation, labware must be carefully cleaned and rinsed with distilled water. Always remove covers from containers! 1) Frequent autoclaving may reduce mechanical stability! no no no no yes yes (limited) yes yes yes yes (limited) yes no yes yes no no no no - - 29

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories CHAPTER OVERVIEW Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories 31 Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Scintillation Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Dropping Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Carboys, Rectangular Carboys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Jars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Canisters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Culture Vessels see Biotechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Transport, Safety Containers 90 Safety Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Buckets, Cans, Kettles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Baskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Sample Transport, Thermo Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Test Tubes 99 Test Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Beakers, Graduated Beakers 101 Beakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Graduated Beakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Flasks 108 Erlenmeyer Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Other Erlenmeyer Flasks see Biotechnology . . . . . . 821 Round Bottom Flasks, Flat Bottom Flasks . . . . . . 110 Ground Flasks see Glass Construction and Equipment 301 Dishes, Crucibles 111 Evaporating Dishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 More Petri Dishes, see Biotechnology . . . . . . . . . . . . 812 Crystallizing Dishes, Petri Dishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Casseroles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Watch Glass Dishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Crucibles, Crucible Lids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Magnesia Grooves, Magnesia Sticks . . . . . . . . . . 120 Combustion Tubes, Combustion Boats . . . . . . . . 120 Dishes, Bowls, Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Pneumatic Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Desiccators, Accessories 124 Desiccators, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 KC Drying Beads see Lab Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213/214 Sample Vials 132 Sample Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Centrifuge Tubes, Racks 134 Centrifuge Tubes, Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Specimen Jars 136 Specimen Jars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Inspection Glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Vials Micro-Bottles, neoLab® Small bottles made of clear glass with plastic screw cap made of plastic for storing small quantities of liquids or preparations. The two larger bottles have a wide neck and are also suitable for solid substances. co d e b e w WW2NY007 Article Micro-bottles Micro-bottles Micro-bottles Vol. ml 2.5 5 15 Height mm 31 42 45 Ø mm 15 21 27 Neck Ø mm 5 13 16 Order No. 12 01 21006 12 01 21007 12 01 21008 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 31

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WW2NY009 co d e b e w WW7R3305 co d e b e w WW2NY008 ml 2 4 8 12 16 24 30 ml 5 10 15 20 30 50 Vials Vials, neoLab® Volume Sample vials, made of borosilicate glass type I (5.1), clear glass. Completely with plas- tic screw-cap with inlay made of butyl/PTFE, temperature-resistant up to 110°C. PU pc/Pack 100 100 200 200 200 200 100 12 01 27230 12 01 27231 12 01 27232 12 01 27233 12 01 27234 12 01 27235 12 01 27236 Height mm 36 46 61 66 71 86 75 Ø mm 12 15 17 19 21 23 27 Order No. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Screw-Cap Bottles, IDL Screw-cap bottles made of clear glass, complete with screw caps made of Hostalen®, white. Volume approx. Height mm 41 55 45 50 75 90 Ø mm 20 20 27 27 27 30 Lid DIN 18 DIN 18 DIN 25 DIN 25 DIN 25 DIN 25 Order No. 12 00 10541 12 00 10542 12 00 11543 12 00 12050 12 00 13075 12 00 15090 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Autosampler Vials, neoLab® Autosampler vials with thread for screw caps with hole and septum. Septum made of butyl/Teflon for one-time use, septum made of silicone/Teflon is self-sealing and can be pierced several times. Autosampler vials 1.2 ml for autosamplers from Erba, HP, Kontron, Perkin-Elmer, Varian etc. 4.0 ml for autosamplers from WISP.Waters Volume ml 1.2 1.2 4.0 4.0 Colour clear amber clear amber Thread mm 8 8 13 13 Height mm 32 32 45 45 Ø mm 12 12 15 15 Order No. 12 01 27200 12 01 27201 12 01 27210 12 01 27211 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Screw caps (PP), with preassembled septum 1. with septum natural rubber/TEF and butyl/PTFE Temperature-resistant from -40°C up to +120°C, thickness 1.3 mm 2. with septum silicone/PTFE Temperature-resistant from -60°C up to +200°C, thickness 1.5 mm 3. with septum PTFE/silicone/PTFE Temperature-resistant from -60°C up to +200°C, thickness 1.0 mm List of screw caps Designation Septum Natural rubber red-orange/TEF transparent butyl red/PTFE grey silicone white/PTFE red PTFE red/silicone white/PTFE red Cap ND8 with hole Cap ND8 with hole Cap ND8 with hole Cap ND8 with hole Cap ND13 with hole Natural rubber red/TEF transp. Cap ND13 closed Natural rubber red/TEF transp. Cap ND13 with hole Silicone creme/PTFE red Cap ND13 closed Silicone creme/PTFE red Cap ND13 with hole Butyl red/PTFE grey Cap ND13 closed Butyl red/PTFE grey Cap ND13 with hole PTFE red/silicone white/PTFE red Cap ND13 with hole Silicone white/PTFE blue cross recessed Order No. 10 01 70666 10 01 70667 10 01 70668 10 01 70669 10 01 70770 10 01 70771 10 01 70772 10 01 70773 10 01 70774 10 01 70775 10 01 70776 10 01 70777 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 32 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Vials LaboBox racks made of polycarbonate Article 1 for 5 × 10 vials up to 12.5 mm Ø 2 for 5 × 10 vials up to 12.5 mm Ø 3 for 4 × 9 vials up to 15 mm Ø 4 for 4 × 9 vials up to 15 mm Ø Colour transparent blue transparent blue Order No. 24 01 22312 24 01 22333 24 01 22313 24 01 22334 For lidded boxes to hold the racks, see 24 01 22316 and 24 01 22317 neochrom® Chromatography Vials ND8, neoLab® Beaded rim vials ND8 For nearly all common auto samplers. Made of glass of the 1. hydrolytic class. Version 5 Clear glass, flat bottom 6 Clear glass, flat bottom 7 Amber glass, flat bottom 8 Clear glass, round bottom 9 Clear glass, conical AT Clear glass, flat bottom AK Amber glass, flat bottom AL Clear glass, conical AM Amber glass, conical Volume ml 0.8 0.7 0.7 0.3 0.3 1.2 1.2 0.7 0.4 Height × Ø mm 30 × 8.2 40 × 7 40 × 7 31.5 × 5.5 31.5 × 5.5 40 × 8.2 40 × 8.2 40 × 7 30 × 7 Order No. 10 01 70600 10 01 70601 10 01 70602 10 01 70603 10 01 70604 10 01 70605 10 01 70606 10 01 70607 10 01 70609 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Aluminium crimping seals ND8 Colourless varnished, with 4 mm hole. Seals with different septa. 1 3 2 4 co d e b e w WW2NY374 5 6 7 8 9 Septum AN Natural rubber red-orange/TEF transparent, proofed Agilent-quality AO Natural rubber red-orange/TEF transparent AP Red rubber/PTFE beige AQ Silicone white/PTFE red AR PTFE red/silicone white/PTFE red AS PTFE virginal Thickness Shore hard- ness mm 60° shore A 1.0 Order No. 10 01 70610 PU pc/Pack 100 60° shore A 1.0 10 01 70611 45° shore A 1.0 45° shore A 1.0 45° shore A 1.0 53° shore D 0.25 10 01 70623 10 01 70612 10 01 70613 10 01 70615 100 100 100 100 100 AT AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS Thread Vials ND8, narrow mouth For nearly all common autosamplers. Made of borosilicate glass of the 1. hydrolytical class. Version BT Clear glass BK Clear glass, with labelling area BL Amber glass BM Amber glass, with labelling area BN Clear glass, conical Volume ml 2.0 2.0 1.5 2.0 1.1 Height × Ø mm 32 × 12 32 × 12 32 × 11.6 32 × 12 32 × 11.6 Order No. 10 01 81100 10 01 81101 10 01 70657 10 01 81102 10 01 70659 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Micro inserts for thread vials ND8 Micro inserts for vials with narrow opening. Clear glass of the 1. hydrolytical class. BT BK BL BM BN Version BO Conical, 15 mm tip BP Flat bottom BQ Konical with polymer foot BR Conical, 9 mm tip BS Conical CT Metal spring Volume ml 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.05 Height × Ø mm 31 × 5 31 × 5 29 × 5 31 × 5 27.5 × 4 36 × 5 Order No. 10 01 70660 10 01 70661 10 01 70662 10 01 70663 10 01 70664 10 01 70665 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 Continued on next page BO BP BQ BR BS CT co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 33

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Vials Screw-caps ND8 Black screw-caps ND8 made of PP with thread 8-425. Caps with different septa. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AT co d e b e w WW2NY375 AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS BT BK BL BM BN BO BP BQ BR BS CT CK CL CM CN CO 34 Septum 1 Natural rubber red- orange/TEF transparent 2 butyl red/PTFE grey with hole 3 Red rubber/PTFE beige with hole 4 silicone white/PTFE red with hole 5 PTFE red/silicone white/ with hole PTFE red 6 Silicone creme/PTFE 7 Silicone white/PTFE red, red slotted 8 Butyl red/PTFE grey 9 Natural rubber red- orange/TEF transp. Version with hole Thickness Shore hard- ness mm 60° shore A 1.3 55° shore A 1.3 45° shore A 1.0 45° shore A 1.3 45° shore A 1.0 Order No. 10 01 70666 10 01 70667 10 01 81300 10 01 70668 10 01 70669 with hole 55° shore A 1.5 10 01 81301 with hole 45° shore A 1.3 10 01 81302 closed closed 55° shore A 1.3 60° shore A 1.3 10 01 70872 10 01 70873 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 AT Silicone white/PTFE red closed 45° shore A 1.3 10 01 70874 neochrom® Chromatography Vials ND9, neoLab® Short thread vials ND9, wide mouth The wide opening allows an easy filling with viscous substances. Made of borosilicate glass of hydrolytic class 1. Version AK Clear glass AK Clear glass, silanized AL Clear glass, with labelling field AM Amber glass, with labelling field AN Clear glass, with 15 µl inside cone AO micro vial PP transparent AP micro vial PP amber AQ micro vial PP transparent AR PP transparent, filling graduation, Vol. ml 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.1 0.3 0.3 0.7 1.5 Height × Ø mm 32 × 12 32 × 11.6 32 × 12 32 × 12 32 × 11.6 32 × 11.6 32 × 11.6 32 × 11.6 32 × 11.6 Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 01 81025 10 01 70674 10 01 81026 10 01 81027 10 01 70678 10 01 70684 10 01 70685 10 01 70686 10 01 70687 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 bottom inside slightly concave Micro inserts for short thread vials ND9 Micro inserts made of glass of hydrolytic class 1 for short thread vials ND9. Version Useful vol. ml AS Conical, 15 mm tip 0.25 AS Silanized, conical, 15 mm tip 0.1 BT Conical, 12 mm tip 0.3 BK Conical, with polymer foot 0.25 BK Silanized, conical, with polymer foot 0.25 BL Flat bottom 0.35 Height × Ø mm 31 × 6 31 × 6 31 × 6 29 × 5.7 29 × 5.7 31 × 6 Order No. 10 01 70632 10 01 70633 10 01 70634 10 01 70635 10 01 70636 10 01 70637 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 Screw-caps ND9 Coloured screw-caps ND9 made of PP with short thread 9-425 and 6 mm hole. Caps with different septa. Septum BM PTFE virginal BN Natural rubber red-orange/ TEF transparent BO Red Rubber/PTFE beige BP Silicone white/PTFE red BQ PTFE red/silicone white/ BR Silicone white/PTFE blue, BS Silicone white/PTFE red, PTFE red slotted slotted (Y) CT PTFE virginal CK Natural rubber red-orange/ TEF transparent CL Red Rubber/PTFE beige CM Silicone white/PTFE red CN PTFE red/silicone white/ blue blue blue blue blue blue blue black black black black black PTFE red slotted Colour Shore hard- Thickness ness mm 53° shore D 0.2 60° shore A 0.1 45° shore A 0.1 55° shore A 0.1 45° shore A 0.1 Order No. 10 01 70707 10 01 70690 10 01 70693 10 01 70695 10 01 81304 55° shore A 0.1 10 01 70699 55° shore A 0.1 10 01 81305 53° shore D 0.2 60° shore A 0.1 45° shore A 0.1 55° shore A 0.1 45° shore A 0.1 10 01 70709 10 01 70692 10 01 81306 10 01 70697 10 01 81307 CO Silicone white/PTFE blue, black 55° shore A 0.1 10 01 70701 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Vials neochrom® Chromatography Vials ND10, neoLab® Thread vials ND10 Made of borosilicate glass of the 1st hydrolytical class. Version Volume ml 1 Clear glass 1.5 2 Clear glass, with labelling area 2.0 3 Amber glass, with labelling area 2.0 Height × Ø mm 23 × 11.6 23 × 12 23 × 12 Order No. 10 01 81308 10 01 70726 10 01 81111 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 Micro inserts for thread vials ND10 Micro inserts made of glass of hydrolytic class 1 for short thread vials ND10. Version Useful vol. ml 4 Conical, 15 mm tip 0.25 4 Silanized, conical, 15 mm tip 0.1 5 Conical, 12 mm tip 0.3 6 Conical, with polymer foot 0.25 6 Silanized, conical, with polymer foot 0.25 7 Flat bottom 0.35 Height × Ø mm 31 × 6 31 × 6 31 × 6 29 × 5.7 29 × 5.7 31 × 6 Order No. 10 01 70632 10 01 70633 10 01 70634 10 01 70635 10 01 70636 10 01 70637 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 co d e b e w WW2NY376 1 2 3 Screw-caps ND10 Screw-caps ND10 made of PP, with thread 10-425. Screw-caps with different septa. Order No. Septum Version Thickness mm with hole 60° shore A 1.3 Shore hard- ness PU pc/Pack 100 8 natural rubber red- orange/TEF transparent 9 silicone white/PTFE red with hole 45° shore A 1.3 AT silicone white/PTFE with hole 45° shore A 1.5 10 01 70728 10 01 70729 10 01 70730 beige AK PTFE red/silicone white/PTFE red AL silicone white/PTFE blue, slotted AM natural rubber red- orange/TEF transparent with hole 45° shore A 1.0 10 01 70731 with hole 55° shore A 1.5 10 01 70732 closed 60° shore A 1.3 10 01 81309 4 5 6 7 8 9 AT AK AL AM 100 100 100 100 100 neochrom® Chromatography Vials ND11, neoLab® Beaded rim vials ND11 The wide opening allows an easy filling. Made of borosilicate glass of hydrolytic class 1. Order No. Version AN Clear glass AO Clear glass, with labelling field AP Amper glass, with labelling field AQ TPX vial transparent with integrated glass micro insert Volume ml 2.0 2.0 2.0 0.2 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 10 01 81001 10 01 81002 10 01 81003 10 01 70628 co d e b e w WW2NY377 AN AO AP AQ Micro inserts for beaded rim vials ND11 Micro inserts for beaded rim vials ND11, made of borosilicate glass of hydrolytic class 1. Order No. Version AR Conical, 15 mm tip AR Silanized, conical, 15 mm tip AS Conical, 12 mm tip BT Conical, with polymer foot BT Silanized, conical, with polymer foot BK Flat bottom Useful vol. ml 0.25 0.1 0.3 0.25 0.25 Height × Ø mm 31 × 6 10 01 70632 31 × 6 10 01 70633 31 × 6 10 01 70634 29 × 5.7 10 01 70635 29 × 5.7 10 01 70636 0.35 31 × 6 10 01 70637 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 35 Continued on next page AR AS BT BK co d e b e w

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Vials Aluminium crimping seals ND11 Colourless varnished, with 5.5 mm hole. Seals with different septa. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AT AK AL AM AN Septum 1 Natural rubber red-orange/ TEF transparent 2 Natural rubber red-orange/ Butyl red/TEF transp. Shore hard- ness 60° shore A Thickness mm 1.0 Order No. 10 01 81310 PU pc/Pack 100 45° shore A 1.0 10 01 81311 3 Red Rubber/PTFE beige 45° shore A 4 Silicone white/PTFE red 45° shore A 5 Silicone dark blue/PTFE white 45° shore A 6 PTFE red/silicone white/PTFE red 45° shore A 7 Silicone white/PTFE blue, 55° shore A 1.0 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.5 cross recessed 8 Butyl red/PTFE grey 9 PTFE grey/butyl red/PTFE grey AT PTFE virginal 1.3 55° shore A 1.3 55° shore A 53° shore D 0.25 10 01 81312 10 01 81313 10 01 81314 10 01 81315 10 01 81316 10 01 70640 10 01 70641 10 01 70646 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Snapping ring vials ND11 Borosilicate glass of the 1. hydrolytical class. Version Volume ml AK Clear glass 1.5 AL Clear glass, with labelling area 2.0 AM Amber glass, with labelling area 2.0 AN TPX vial transparent with integ- 0.2 rated glass micro insert Order No. Height × Ø mm 32 × 11.6 10 01 70748 32 × 12 10 01 81053 32 × 12 10 01 81054 32 × 11.6 10 01 70628 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 Micro inserts for snapping ring vials ND11 Micro inserts for snapping ring vials ND11, made of borosilicate glass of hydrolytic class 1. Order No. Version Useful vol. ml AO Conical, 15 mm tip 0.25 AO Silanized, conical, 15 mm tip 0.1 AP Conical, 12 mm tip 0.3 AQ Conical, with polymer foot 0.25 AQ Silanized, conical, with polymer foot 0.25 AR Flat bottom 0.35 Height × Ø mm 31 × 6 10 01 70632 31 × 6 10 01 70633 31 × 6 10 01 70634 29 × 5.7 10 01 70635 29 × 5.7 10 01 70636 31 × 6 10 01 70637 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 AO AP AQ AR PE snapping ring caps ND11 Coloured snapping ring caps ND11 made of PE with 6 mm hole. Caps with different septa. Material Shore hard- ness 60° shore A PE, soft Thickness mm 1.0 Order No. 10 01 70751 PU pc/Pack 100 60° shore A PE, hard 1.0 10 01 81319 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Septum AS Natural rubber red- orange/TEF transparent AS Natural rubber red- orange/TEF transparent BK PTFE red/silicone white/ PTFE red PTFE red BL Silicone white/PTFE blue, cross recessed BL Silicone white/PTFE blue, cross recessed red, slotted (Y) BN Silicone white/PTFE red, slotted (Y) BT Red rubber/PTFE beige 45° shore A PE, soft 1.0 BT Red rubber/PTFE beige 45° shore A PE, hard 1.0 BK PTFE red/silicone white/ 1.0 45° shore A PE, soft 10 01 81317 10 01 81320 10 01 70761 45° shore A PE, hard 1.0 10 01 81322 55° shore A PE, soft 1.0 10 01 70758 55° shore A PE, hard 1.0 10 01 81323 BM Silicone white/PTFE red 45° shore A PE, soft 1.3 BM Silicone white/PTFE red 45° shore A PE, hard 1.3 BN Silicone white/PTFE 1.3 45° shore A PE, soft 10 01 70755 10 01 81321 10 01 81318 45° shore A PE, hard 1.3 10 01 81324 AS BT BK BL BM BN 36

Vials neochrom® Chromatography Vials ND13, neoLab® Thread vials ND13 Standard sample vials made of clear or amber glass with wide opening. 4 ml content, thread 13-425. Made of borosilicate glass of the 1. hydrolytical class. Order No. Version Volume ml 4.0 4.0 Height × Ø mm 45 × 17.4 10 01 70764 45 × 17.4 10 01 70765 PU pc/Pack 100 100 1 Clear glass 2 Clear glass, with labelling field and graduation 3 Amber glass 4 Amber glass, with labelling field 4.0 4.0 45 × 17.4 10 01 70766 45 × 17.4 10 01 70767 100 100 and graduation Micro inserts for thread vials ND13 Version 5 Micro insert, clear glass, conical, 15 mm tip 6 Metal spring for micro insert Useful vol. l 0.3 Height × Ø mm 40 × 6 Order No. 10 01 70768 PU pc/Pack 100 10 01 70769 100 Screw-caps ND13 Black screw-caps ND13 made of PP with thread 13-425. With 8.5 mm hole or closed. Caps with different septa. Version with hole Thickness Shore hard- mm ness 60° shore A 1.3 Order No. 10 01 70770 PU pc/Pack 100 with hole 55° shore A 1.5 10 01 70772 9 Butyl red/PTFE grey with hole AT PTFE red/silicone with hole 55° shore A 1.3 45° shore A 1.0 10 01 70774 10 01 70776 with hole 45° shore A 1.3 10 01 51325 with hole 55° shore A 1.5 10 01 70777 closed 60° shore A 1.3 10 01 70771 AN Butyl red/PTFE grey closed AO Silicone creme/ closed 55° shore A 1.3 55° shore A 1.3 10 01 70775 10 01 70773 PTFE red Septum 7 Natural rubber red/ TEF transp. 8 Silicone creme/ PTFE red white/PTFE red AK Silicone dark blue/ PTFE white AL Silicone white/ PTFE blue cross recessed AM Natural rubber red/ TEF transp. Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WW2NY378 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AT AK AL AM AN AO 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 neochrom® Chromatography Vials ND18, neoLab® Fine thread vials ND18 Fine thread vials with thread ND18 made of borosilicate glass of the 1. hydrolytical class with rounded bottom. Version AP Clear glass AQ Amber glass AR Clear glass AS Amber glass Volume ml 10 10 20 20 Height × Ø mm 46 × 22.5 46 × 22.5 75.5 × 22.5 75.5 × 22.5 Order No. 10 01 70840 10 01 70841 10 01 70842 10 01 70843 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 Magnetic screw-caps ND18 Silver, mounted with septa. With 8 mm hole or closed. Caps with different septa co d e b e w WW2NY379 AP AQ AR AS Version with hole Thickness Shore hard- ness mm 45° shore A 1.3 Order No. 10 01 70845 PU pc/Pack 100 BT BK BL BM with hole 55° shore A 1.5 10 01 70846 BL Silicone white/PTFE red with hole BM Butyl red/PTFE grey with hole BN Silicone white/alumini- with hole um foil silver BO Butyl red/PTFE grey closed BP Silicone white/PTFE red closed 45° shore A 1.3 55° shore A 1.6 50° shore A 1.3 55° shore A 1.6 45° shore A 1.3 10 01 70847 10 01 70849 10 01 81326 10 01 70850 10 01 70848 100 100 100 100 100 100 BN BO BP Septum BT Silicone blue transpa- rent/PTFE transp. BK Silicone white/PTFE blue co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 37

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WW2NY380 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AT AK AL AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS Article Vials neochrom® Chromatography Vials ND20, neoLab® Headspace vials ND20 All vials are made of borosilicate glass of the 1. hydrolytical class. Headspace vials are differentiating in the following features: • Volume • Rounded or flat bottom A rounded bottom is more solid during tempering at high insided pressure. The bottle furthermore slides easier into the heating block, if she is inserted by the use of mag- nets. A flat bottom can be needed, if the vials have to run down minimal in the device. • Bevelled headspace rim resp. flat DIN beaded rim A bevelled headspace rim can be required for some special closure systems (Perkin Elmer). However, a sealing shim has more seating on a flat DIN beaded rim. • Neck length (depending on the device) • Clear/amber glass • With/without inscription pad and filling mark Version 1 Clear glass, bottom rounded 2 Clear glass, bottom rounded 3 Amber glass, bottom rounded 4 Clear glass, flat bottom 5 Clear glass, bottom rounded 6 Amber glass, bottom rounded 7 Clear glass, bottom rounded, with labelling area 8 Clear glass, flat bottom 9 Clear glass, bottom rounded AT Amber glass, bottom rounded Volume ml 5.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 Order No. Height × Ø mm 38.2 × 22 10 01 70788 46 × 22.5 10 01 70789 46 × 22.5 10 01 70790 46 × 22.5 10 01 70791 75.5 × 22.5 10 01 70792 75.5 × 22.5 10 01 70793 75.5 × 22.5 10 01 70794 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 20.0 20.0 20.0 75.5 × 22.5 10 01 70795 75.5 × 22.5 10 01 70796 75.5 × 22.5 10 01 70797 100 100 100 Headspace caps ND20 Colourless lacquered, with overpressure protection. Caps with different septa. Septum Thickness Shore hard- ness mm AK Butyl dark blue 50° shore A 3.0 AL Butyl/PTFE grey 50° shore A 3.0 AM Pharma-Fix butyl/PTFE 50° shore A 3.0 AN Silicone blue transp./PTFE transp. 45° shore A 3.0 AO Silicone white/PTFE beige 45° shore A 3.2 AP Silicone white/aluminium foil silver 50° shore A 3.0 Order No. 10 01 70811 10 01 70816 10 01 70821 10 01 70826 10 01 70832 10 01 70834 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 Version Crimp vials ND 20 Crimp cials for CG and HPLC, made of borosilicate glass of hydrolytic class 1. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 AQ Clear glass, flat bottom AR Clear glass, flat bottom AS Clear glass, flat bottom Height × Ø mm 38 × 20 54.5 × 20 101 × 31 Volume ml 5.0 10.0 50.0 10 01 70798 10 01 70799 10 01 70800 Order No. Crimping seals ND20 Crimping seals with different septa. Colour Hole Ø mm 10 silver Septum butyl dark grey Thickness Shore hard- ness mm 50° shore A 3.0 Order No. 10 01 70810 PU pc/Pack 100 BT Aluminium crimping seal BK Middle tear-off seal BL 360° tear-off cap silver BM Aluminium silver crimping seal BN Magnetic crimping seal BO Middle tear-off seal BP 360° tear-off cap silver BQ Aluminium silver crimping seal BT BK BL BM BN BO BP BQ BR BS 38 silver – butyl dark grey 50° shore A 3.0 10 01 70813 – 10 8 butyl dark grey butyl/PTFE grey 50° shore A 3.0 50° shore A 3.0 10 01 70814 10 01 70815 butyl/PTFE grey 50° shore A 3.0 10 01 70817 gold silver – butyl/PTFE grey 50° shore A 3.0 10 01 70818 – 10 butyl/PTFE grey Pharma-Fix butyl/ PTFE 50° shore A 3.0 50° shore A 3.0 10 01 70819 10 01 70820 Continued on next page 100 100 100 100 100 100 100

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Septum Pharma-Fix butyl/ PTFE Pharma-Fix butyl/ PTFE silicone blue transp./ PTFE transp. silicone blue transp./ PTFE transp. silicone blue transp./ PTFE transp. silicone white/PTFE beige silicone white/ aluminium foil silver Thickness Shore hard- ness mm 50° shore A 3.0 Order No. 10 01 70822 PU pc/Pack 100 50° shore A 3.0 10 01 70824 45° shore A 3.0 10 01 70825 45° shore A 3.2 10 01 70827 45° shore A 3.0 10 01 70830 45° shore A 3.2 10 01 70831 50° shore A 3.2 10 01 70833 100 100 100 100 100 100 CT CK CL CM CN Colour Hole Ø mm 8 gold Vials Article BR Magnetic crimping seal BS 360° tear-off cap silver CT Aluminium crimping seal CK Magnetic crim- ping seal silver gold CL 360° tear-off cap silver CM Aluminium crimping seal CN Aluminium crimping seal silver silver – 10 5 – 10 10 Injection Vials, IDL CO Injection vials Also known as snap-cap bottles, made of borosilicate glass of hydrolytic class 1. Clear glass co d e b e w WW7R3306 Volume ml 1.0 1) 4.0 a) 5.0 1) 5.0 b) 10.0 b) 10.0 c) 10.0 1) 20.0 d) 20.0 2) 25.0 1) 50.0 1) 100.0 3) Height mm 32 45 38 38 47 45 55 75 75 65 101 95 Ø mm 11 15 20 22 23 22 20 23 23 30 31 52 Neck Ø mm 11 13 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Order No. 12 00 40001 12 00 40004 12 00 40005 12 00 40006 12 00 40010 12 00 40011 12 00 40012 12 00 40020 12 00 40022 12 00 40025 12 00 40050 12 00 40100 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 88 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) With flat bottom and rim acc. to DIN 58366 part 1. 2) With rounded bottom rim and special snap-fit rim. 3) Made of glass of a hydrolytic class 3. Suitable for autosamplers from the companies: a) Waters, model WISP size 48 specimen tray. b) Carlo-Erba, model HS 250. c) DANI, head-space sampler. d) Perkin-Elmer, head-space sampler 740 and 745. CP Aluminium flanged caps For closing the above vials. The listed cap sizes fit the same diameter. These caps have a hole and are equipped with seal rings. Seal ring color/material Red PTFE-coated rubber Colourless PTFE-coated butyl rubber PTFE-coated butyl rubber PTFE-coated silicone rubber 1) Head-space cap with butyl/PTFE 2) Head-space cap with silicone/PTFE 2) Cap Ø mm 11 13 20 20 20 20 Order No. 12 00 42011 12 00 42013 12 00 42020 12 00 42024 12 00 42026 12 00 42027 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) Special magnetic cap with hole, for Shimadzu head-spacer sampler HSS-2B 2) These caps are particularly ideal for head-space analysis because the aluminium caps have rupture points which prevent the vials from bursting if the pressure rises too high. CO CP Further accessories Article Cap Ø mm Aluminium cap without seal, with hole 20 Aluminium cap without seal, with tear off 20 Stopper made of butyl rubber 20 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 12 00 42021 10 00 40025 12 00 42022 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 39

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories ml 3 5 10 10 15 20 20 25 30 35 40 50 100 Height mm 30 40 32 45 52 55 70 50 75 65 80 100 145 Ø mm 19 19 24 23 24 27 25 30 28 30 30 30 34 Order No. 12 00 20330 12 00 20540 12 00 21032 12 00 21045 12 00 21552 12 00 22055 12 00 22070 12 00 23050 12 00 23075 12 00 23565 12 00 24080 12 00 25099 12 00 29999 PU pc/Pack 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 250 200 200 200 200 100 Vials Tongs, IDL Article 1 Flanging tongs Opening tongs Flanging tongs Opening tongs Flanging tongs Opening tongs Flanging tongs Opening tongs Snap-Cap Bottles, IDL Cap Ø mm 8 8 11 11 13 13 20 20 Order No. 12 00 42051 12 00 42052 12 00 42053 12 00 42054 12 00 42055 12 00 42056 12 00 42057 12 00 42058 Snap-cap bottles made of clear glass, complete with snap-caps made of polyethylene. Volume approx. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Scintillation Vials Glass Scintillation Vials with Screw Cap, neoLab® Low-price vial, suitable also for use as a disposable scintillation vial. Made of thermal-cy- cling-resistant borosilicate glass, according to ASTM standard type I class A. The vials have a flat bottom and a very uniform wall thickness on account of being manufactured from glass tube. Cap with seal insert made of metal foil. 2 Scintillation Vials, 6 ml Welded in a plastic tray, caps added separate. Volume ml 6 Ø mm 17 Height mm 58 Cap mm 15 Order No. 12 01 90615 PU pc/Pack 200 3 Scintillation Vials, 20 ml Caps are screwed on. Autoclavable. Volume: Measures: 20 ml 20 × 61 mm high Cap mm 22 22 24 Cap material Seal Order No. Polypropylene Urea Polypropylene Metal inlay Metal inlay Metal inlay 12 01 90620 12 01 90621 12 01 90622 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 1 co d e b e w co d e b e w WW7R3311 WW7R3304 co d e b e w WW2NY213 2 3 40

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WW2NY214 co d e b e w WW2NY043 co d e b e w WWEQ2211 Scintillation Vials Scintillation Vials made of Plastic with Screw Closure, neoLab® Very economical scintillation vials. Tubes and closures are separately packed in a plastic bag. The screw cap is made of polypropylene and has no additional inserts. Volume ml 6 20 Ø mm 17 26 Height mm 54 60 Cap mm 18 26 Material Order No. HDPE PPN 23 01 90149 10 01 71580 PU pc/Pack 100 1000 Scintillation Tube Racks, neoLab® Made of chemically resistant polypropylene, autoclavable up to 121°C. Sturdy design with 2 carrying handles, for the transportation, storage or preparation of scintillation tubes. Outer dimensions: Mid-level height: Holes: Article Scintillation tube rack 298 × 127 × 95 mm 44 mm 3 rows of 8 holes with 30 mm dia. Order No. 24 01 13107 Bottles Bottle System DURAN® YOUTILITY, DURAN Group / IDL The DURAN Group introduces the new bottle system for the 21st century laboratory. The new YOUTILITY bottle system was developed by the DURAN Group, who originated the screw threaded GL 45 DURAN® borosilicate glass laboratory bottle in 1972. Since then the DURAN® GL 45 Laboratory Bottle has become the bottle of choice for laboratories around the world. Now, the DURAN® YOUTILITY bottle represents a new generation of glass laboratory bottles for use in a wide and diverse range of applications. The innovation does not stop at the improved ergonomic bottle shape, but extends to dedicated accessories that incor- porate many new innovative features to improve handling, sample identification, and ease of use. The new YOUTILITY bottles and accessories help to make laboratory work easier, safer, more economical and fun. DURAN® YOUTILITY Laborflasche GL 45 • Specially shaped gripping zones on both sides of the bottle for easier and safer han- dling. • With the new YOUTILITY bottle thread opening or closing the bottle is significantly faster. The thread is fully compatible with DIN GL 45 closures and other accessories. • The slimmer YOUTILITY bottle shape allows a more optimal use of limited space in autoclaves and laboratory refrigerators. • A pre-defined labelling area is compatible with the dedicated DURAN® self-adhesive • Nominal volume is shown at the top of the easy-to-read graduation scale for fast deter- YOUTILITY bottle labels. mination of the volumes. 250, 500 and 1000 ml. • A range of sequentially sized bottles are available in the four popular volumes of 125, • Glass bottle body is moulded from the tried and tested DURAN® borosilicate 3.3 phar- macopoeial Type 1 neutral glass. DURAN® glass offers very good chemical resistance and high temperature resistance. • The YOUTILITY bottle has an integrated Retrace Code to allow full product traceability. The lot specific certificate of conformance is available at: www.duran-group.com. • Each DURAN® YOUTILITY bottle is supplied as a complete system, with a pouring ring (cyan polypropylene) and a GL 45 cap (cyan polypropylene). DURAN® YOUTILITY Screw Cap GL 45 • The DURAN®YOUTILITY Screw Cap GL 45 is manufactured from a food-grade polypro- pylene and is fully reusable. • Ergonomically shaped screw cap with optimised grooves and ridges for a more efficient and easier tightening or removal, especially with smaller sized or gloved hands. • The faster opening and closing thread of the YOUTILITY screw cap is fully compatible with DIN GL 45 bottle threads. The optimised cap sealing system ensures a liquid tight seal. • The YOUTILITY screw cap has an integrated Retrace Code to provide full product trace- ability. The lot specific certificate of conformance is available at www.duran-group.com. • A pre-defined labelling area on the cap is compatible with the dedicated DURAN® self-adhesive YOUTILITY labels. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 41 Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles DURAN® GL 45 Bottle Tag • The colourful silicone GL 45 Bottle Tags can be easily and securely attached around the • The Bottle Tags are available in many distinct colours for easy customisation and unam- neck of the YOUTILITY bottle. biguous bottle identification. • The elastic Bottle Tags will fit around any DIN GL 45 bottle neck, and can even be applied with the screw cap in place. DURAN® YOUTILITY Labels The YOUTILITY Labels are custom designed for use with the DURAN®YOUTILITY bottle system. A pack contains a roll of 200 label sets (200 bottle (36 × 70 mm) and 200 screw cap labels (30 mm diameter) labels) in a re-sealable, water resistant box. • The labels are manufactured from a tear resistant, matt white, polyester material coated with a high performance adhesive. • The surface will accept a variety of inks, including copier, printer, ballpoint and technical markers. • The labels are chemically resistant with a wide -40°C to +150°C performance range, making them suitable for use in fridges, freezers, autoclaves, incubators and water baths. • Both labels formats feature an autoclave / steam sterilisation Class 1 process indicator (ANSI/AAMI/ISO 11140-1:2005). • The labels are non-toxic, and lead free. • After use the labels may be easily removed by peeling. 1 DURAN® YOUTILITY Complete System Nominal volume 1 2 co d e b e w 42 ml 125 250 500 1000 Height mm 124 158 193 253 Outer Ø mm 55 66 78 93 Order No. 10 21 18128 10 21 18136 10 21 18144 10 21 18154 PU pc/Set 4 4 4 4 Accessories and Replacement Parts Article Material Colour Order No. DURAN® YOUTILITY screw caps GL 45 DURAN® YOUTILITY pou- ring ring GL 45 2 DURAN® YOUTILITY Bot- tle Tag GL 45 polypropyle- ne (PP) polypropyle- ne (PP) silicone cyan cyan 2 × 8 co- lours 10 21 12802 10 21 12808 10 21 12904 PU pc/Pack 10 16 16 DURAN® YOUTILITY Complete System, bottles amber Nominal volume ml 125 250 500 1000 Height mm 124 158 193 253 Outer Ø mm 55 66 78 93 Order No. 10 21 12859 10 21 13658 10 21 14457 10 21 15453 PU pc/Set 4 4 4 4 YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, single-colour Article YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, red YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, orange YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, yellow YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, green YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, blue YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, purple YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, black YOUTILITY Bottle Tags, white Order No. 10 21 12818 10 21 12826 10 21 12834 10 21 12842 10 21 12857 10 21 12867 10 21 12875 10 21 12883 PU pc/Pack 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Laboratory Bottles with Thread, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Laboratory bottles with graduation, ISO 4796-1, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Clear glass according to USP/EP and JP. 1 Without cap and pouring ring Volume Thread GL co d e b e w WWEQ2034 1 3 2 O.D. mm 36 36 46 56 62 70 86 95 101 136 160 182 227 268 288 Height mm 50 70 87 100 110 138 176 203 225 260 295 330 410 445 505 Order No. 10 21 10108 11 21 80114 11 21 80117 11 21 80124 10 21 10129 11 21 80136 11 21 80144 10 21 10153 11 21 80154 11 21 80163 10 21 10162 11 21 80173 11 21 80186 11 21 80188 11 21 80191 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 25 25 32 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 ml 102) 252) 50 1001) 1501) 2501) 5001) 7501) 10001) 20001) 3500 5000 10000 15000 20000 ml 2 With screw cap and pouring ring made of PP (blue) Volume Thread GL Order No. O.D. mm 36 36 46 56 62 70 86 95 101 136 160 182 227 268 288 25 25 32 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 3 102) 252) 50 1001) 1501) 2501) 5001) 7501) 10001) 20001) 3500 5000 10000 15000 20000 1) A bead is molded in the glass on the shoulder of the 100 to 2000 ml size to indicate the nominal capacity level. 2) With a specially formed glass rim for better pouring (hence no need for an additional pouring ring made of plastic). Important: Autoclave these flasks only with a loosely screwed cap (do not close tightly). 10 21 15108 11 21 85114 11 21 85117 11 21 85124 10 21 11129 11 21 85136 11 21 85144 10 21 11153 11 21 85154 11 21 85163 10 21 11162 11 21 85173 11 21 85186 11 21 85188 11 21 85191 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 Height mm 50 74 91 105 114 143 181 207 230 265 299 335 415 450 510 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 43

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWEQ2180 Bottles Laboratory Bottles with Thread, Amber, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Laboratory bottles with graduation, without cap, ISO 4796-1, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Clear glass 1 according to USP/EP/JP. Light shield up to a light wave length of up to 500 nm. External application of the paint ensures unchanged DURAN® characteristics in the interior of the bottle. O.D. mm 36 36 36 46 56 62 70 86 95 101 136 160 182 227 288 Height mm 50 50 70 87 100 110 138 176 203 225 260 295 330 410 505 Thread GL Order No. Vol. ml 102) 103)2) 252) 50 1001) 1501) 2501) 5001) 7501) 10001) 20001) 3500 5000 10000 20000 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 25 25 25 32 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 1) A bead is molded in glass on the shoulder of the 100 to 2000 ml size to indicate the nominal capacity level. 2) With a specially formed glass rim for better pouring (hence no need for an additional pouring ring made of plastic). 3) Complete Important: Autoclave these flasks only with a loosely screwed cap (do not close tightly). Note: This item is for example also available with cap. 10 21 10608 10 21 10609 11 21 80614 11 21 80617 11 21 80624 10 21 10629 11 21 80636 11 21 80644 10 21 10651 11 21 80654 11 21 80663 10 21 10669 11 21 80673 11 21 80686 11 21 80691 co d e b e w WWEQ2035 44 DURAN® Protect, Plastic-Coated Laboratory Bottles with Thread, DURAN Group / IDL DURAN® Protect, plastic-coated, clear Laboratory bottles with graduation, plastic coated, without cap, autoclavable, ISO 4796-1, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). The polyure- thane (PU) plastic coating ensures reliable protection against scratches, shatters and leakage. The maximum permissible temperature is +135°C (max. 30 minutes). Volume ml 102) 252) 50 1001) 1501) 2501) 5001) 7501) 10001) 20001) 3500 5000 10000 15000 20000 Thread GL 25 25 32 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 Outer Ø mm 36 36 46 56 62 70 86 95 101 136 160 182 228 268 289 Height mm 50 70 87 100 110 138 176 203 225 260 295 330 410 445 505 Order No. 10 21 10508 11 21 92676 11 21 92677 11 21 80524 10 21 10529 11 21 80536 11 21 80544 10 21 10551 11 21 80554 11 21 80563 10 21 10569 11 21 80573 10 21 18604 10 21 18801 10 21 19103 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1)A bead is molded in the glass on the shoulder of the 100 to 2000 ml size to indicate the nominal capacity level. 2)With a specially formed glass rim for better pouring (hence no need for an additional pouring ring made of plastic). Important: Autoclave these flasks only with a loosely screwed cap (do not close tightly).

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Vacuum and Pressure Resistant Bottles, DURAN® pressure plus, DURAN Group / IDL 1 Vacuum and Pressure Resistant Bottles, DURAN® pressure plus Laboratory bottles, pressure resistance tested according to DIN ISO 1595. For work in the pressure range from -1 to +1.5 bar, thread GL 45, without cap. Grading in blue for optical differentiation from the regular laboratory bottle. With Retrace Code (Batch Certif- icate of Performance via Internet). Neutral glass / glass type 1 / according to USP/EP. With TÜV/GS marking. Applicable for pressure load: temperature change resistance 30 K, and maximum service temperature +140°C. co d e b e w WWEQ2178 Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 45 45 45 45 O.D. mm 56 70 86 101 Height mm 100 138 176 225 Order No. 10 21 11024 11 21 92234 11 21 92235 11 21 81054 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 For caps and pouring rings see page 46. DURAN® pressure plus Protect Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 45 45 45 45 O.D. mm 56 70 86 101 Height mm 100 138 176 225 Order No. 10 21 11524 10 21 11534 10 21 11544 10 21 11554 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 Vacuum and Pressure Resistant Bottles, Amber, DURAN® pres- sure plus, DURAN Group / IDL Laboratory bottles, acc. to DIN ISO 1595 approved for work in the pressure range from -1 to +1.5 bar , thread GL 45, without cap. Grading in blue for optical differentiation from the regular laboratory bottle. With Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Neutral glass / glass type 1 / according to USP/EP. With TÜV/GS marking. Ap- plicable for pressure load: temperature change resistance 30 K, and maximum service temperature +140°C. co d e b e w WWEQ2189 Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 45 45 45 45 O.D. mm 56 70 86 101 Height mm 100 138 176 225 Order No. 10 21 11624 11 21 94367 11 21 94368 11 21 81654 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 For caps and pouring rings see page 46. Premium Bottles, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Premium bottle complete with premium cap (TpCh260), bottle and cap meets the highest requirements for storing and packaging of products from pharmaceutical, chem- ical and food industries. The cap consists of chemically high-resistant materials and does not contain any colour pigments or colorants. Silicon seal coated with PTFE. Bottle and cap comply with USP / EP (glass type 1 / gray glass filter, cap USP Class VI, seal complies with FDA). Bottle has a resistance to temperature change of 160K (TÜV-certified with GS-sticker), with opposite scaling. Drug Master File (DMF Type III, 19757) registered with FDA. With batch certificate via in- ternet for bottle and cap. co d e b e w WWEQ2191 Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 45 45 45 45 co d e b e w O.D. mm 56 70 86 101 Height mm 100 138 176 225 Order No. 10 21 17075 10 21 17076 10 21 17077 10 21 17078 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 45

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWEQ2185 Bottles Premium Screw Cap, DURAN Group / IDL The Premium Screw Cap made of TpCh260 for DURAN®laboratory glass bottles The universally applicable Premium Screw Cap for all GL 45 threads meets the highest demands for storing and packaging from pharmaceutical, chemical and food industries. This new screw cap is made of a material of highest chemical resistance (TpCh260). In order to prevent the medium from being contaminated in any form, the cap does not contain any colorants or plastic pigments. The pressed-in silicon seal is coated with PTFE on both sides for highest demands on chemical resistance. The matching pouring ring is made from the same material and guarantees non-dripping and safe handling. The Premium Cap is characterized by its temperature resistance ranging from -196°C to +260°C. Due to the high temperature range, this cap is suitable for many sterilization methods such as autoclaving or dry sterilization. The ”Premium Cap“ meets all requirements of both US Pharmacopoeia (USP Class VI) and European Pharmacopoeia (EP). With Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Article Thread GL Screw cap GL 45 Screw cap GL 25 Pouring ring 45 25 45 Ø mm 54 32 Height mm 26 22 4 Order No. 11 29 88679 10 21 18677 11 29 88678 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Screw Caps, DURAN Group / IDL PP caps, with lip seal, autoclavable up to +140°C steam. Thread GL 25 32 45 45 45 45 Thread GL 25 32 45 co d e b e w WWEQ2037 co d e b e w WWEQ2039 co d e b e w WWEQ2212 46 Colour blue blue blue yellow green gray Order No. 11 29 23913 11 29 23919 11 29 23928 11 29 38280 11 29 38286 11 29 38288 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Screw Caps, DURAN Group / IDL Red caps made of PBT, PTFE protected silicone seal, temperature resistant up to 180°C. Colour red red red Order No. 11 29 24013 11 29 24019 11 29 24028 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. DURAN PURE Premium Screw Cap with Lip Seal GL 45, DURAN Group / IDL Thanks to the highly resistant material (PFA), the DURAN PURE Premium screw cap with lip seal GL 45 is perfectly suited for chemically and thermally demanding processes. Due to the very high temperature resistance, it is ideal for difficult sterilisation processes such as hot air or dry heat sterilisation and depyrogenisation at 260°C. The material used com- plies with the FDA requirements (FDA 21 CFR Section 177.1550) and the USP (USP Class VI plastics -121°C). This means that this screw cap is particularly well suited for applica- tions in the pharmaceutical, chemical, and food industry. The Der DURAN PURE Premium screw cap made of PFA is equipped with a cone, i.e. an integrated lip seal, and accord- ingly does not need any additional seal to keep the bottle tightly closed. Furthermore, this feature makes the cap easy to clean and to sterilise. Product features: • Material: PFA; can be used for all GL 45 threads • Produced and packaged under cleanroom conditions class 7 • Excellent temperature resistance from -196°C to +260°C • Ideal for dry heat sterilisation / depyrogenisation • Very high chemical resistance • Complies with FDA 21 CFR Section 177.1550 & USP class VI • Easy to clean and to sterilise • No colour additives (leaching out of colourants excluded) Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Article DURAN PURE Screw Cap GL 45, with lip seal 26 mm high, for DURAN® laboratory glass bottles Order No. 10 21 12892 PU pc/Pack 5 Tamper-Evident Screw Cap, DURAN Group / IDL Tamper-Evident Closure made of PP for DURAN® laboratory glass bottles The tamper-evident closure, made of PP, can be used with all DURAN® labglass bottles with thread GL 45. It is used for safety storing the bottle contents. The cap is screwed tightly to the bottle and after a soft ”click“ the plastic ring is fixed on the bottle neck. When the cap is opened for the first time, the perforation of the plastic ring is broken thus show- ing that the bottle has been opened. The cap is autoclavable and temperature resistant up to +140°C. After the perforation of the plastic ring is broken, the cap may of course still be used as an ”ordinary“ screw cap. co d e b e w WWEQ2187 co d e b e w WWEQ2040 co d e b e w WWEQ2038 co d e b e w WWEQ2193 Colour Thread GL blue/red1) blue/yellow2) 45 45 Ø mm 54 54 Height mm 26 26 Order No. 11 29 17526 10 21 15886 PU pc/Pack 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) With lip seal 2) With PTFE protected seal Pouring Rings made of ETFE, DURAN Group / IDL ETFE pouring rings, temperature resistant up to +180°C, autoclavable. for thread GL Colour red red Order No. 11 29 24419 11 29 24428 PU pc/Pack 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Pouring Rings, DURAN Group / IDL PP pouring rings, autoclavable up to +140°C steam. Thread GL 32 45 32 45 45 45 45 Colour blue blue yellow green gray Order No. 11 29 24219 11 29 24228 11 29 89917 11 29 89911 11 29 89914 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. HPLC Bottles GL 45, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Convenient complete system for the transfer of liquid media. Consists of 4-port screw cap (PP), four screw connections (black, M8 thread), silicone seals and DURAN® Pressure Plus bottle. The bottle is pressure-resistant in the range from -1 to +1.5 bar (TÜV-certified with GS-sticker). The cap has 4 connections, so-called ports. Outer tube diameters of 1.6, 3.0, 3.2 mm can be used. An optional pressure compensation via a sterile membrane filter (0.2 µm) is possible. Unused ports can be sealed with silicone blanking seals. The cap is completely autoclavable. Tmax = 140°C. The system is suitable for application in the field of HPLC or bio-technology and each process which requires a media transfer. Article HPLC bottle, GL 45, 500 ml HPLC bottle, GL 45, 1000 ml Screw cap GL 45, 4 ports complete GL45 screw cap, 4 × M8 screw connections, 12 × sili- cone seals Including silicone seals Spare part set for HPLC screw cap Pressure equalization set (0.2 µm) Spare membrane filter ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 10 21 19821 10 21 19820 10 21 19812 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 10 21 19813 10 21 17801 10 21 19819 1 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 47

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWEQ2214 Bottles DURAN® Connection Cap System GL 45 – Ports, DURAN Group / IDL DURAN® Connection Cap System GL 45, with 3-ports (stainless steel) A sturdy, durable hose connection system for DURAN® GL 45 laboratory and media bot- tles of many sizes. The bottle cap adapter simplifies the transfer of liquids within closed and sterile system. Perfect for laboratories in the chemical, bioscience, and biopharmacy sectors. Applications: • Sterile transfer of liquids between containers • Sampling from large containers into bottles • Bottle cap for connection to laboratory instruments • Connection for spinner bottles and cell culture vessels Features: • The GL 45 connection system is suitable for use with DURAN® GL 45 laboratory bottles from 100 to 20,000 ml. • The three clips at the inside and outside of the cap are suitable for connecting flexible hoses with an inside diameter of 8.sil0 mm, e.g. Sani-Tech® Ultra (ULTRA-C-312) sili- cone hoses (Sani-Tech® is a registered Saint-Gobain trademark). • Thanks to the freely rotating stainless steel centre part, the bottle can be opened without opening the hose connections. • The three top clips are bevelled for easier attachment of the hoses. • Connections and centre piece made of stainless steel type 316L (1.4404 / S31603). • All parts are welded to exclude any hollows and inclusions. • Hygienic, electro-polished surface for efficient cleaning and sterilisation. • The silicone seal and the red GL 45 screw cap made of PBT ensure leak-proof closure of the bottle. • Suitable for a wide temperature range (up to 180°C) • Autoclavable (at 12 °C / 15 minutes) • With retrace code for full traceability Article 1 DURAN® Connection Cap System GL 45 with 3-ports (stainless steel) Overall height mm 145 Order No. 10 21 12804 Spare parts Article DURAN® silicone gasket, 40.5 × 3 mm with 27.5 mm in- DURAN® Screw-caps with aperture, GL 45, PBT, red, ner diamater opening aperture bore 34 mm Order No. 10 21 12805 PU pc/Pack 10 13 29 22710 10 co d e b e w WWEQ2192 Connection System GL 45, DURAN Group / IDL Flexible modular system for safe and sterile media transfer for DURAN® GL 45 labora- tory bottles. The system is available with 2 or 3 so-called ports (connections). 4 different outer diameters of tubes (1.6 mm, 3.0 mm, 3.2 mm, 6.0 mm) can be used, a sterile pres- sure compensation (membrane filter 0.2 µm) is available optionally. Depending on the use, the single parts can be combined in various ways. Unused ports can be provided with a blind cap. All single parts are autoclavable. The system is suitable for application in the field of HPLC or bio-technology and each process where a media transfer is required. Used materials are PP and PTFE. Tmax = +140°C. Article Thread Order No. 1 48 Insert 1.6 mm (I.-Ø) Insert 3.0 mm (I.-Ø) Insert 3.2 mm (I.-Ø) Insert 6.0 mm (I.-Ø) Screw cap GLS 45, 2 port GL 14 Screw cap GLS 45, 3 port GL 14 Screw cap for hose connection Screw cap PBT Pressure equalization set Spare membrane filter GL 45 GL 45 GL 14 GL 14 10 21 19750 10 21 19751 10 21 19814 10 21 19815 10 21 19816 10 21 19817 10 21 19818 10 21 16292 10 21 17799 10 21 19819 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible.

Behälter Flaschen, Ballons, Kanister, Dosen, Zubehör Bottles Screw Cap GL 45 with 2 Hose Connections, DURAN Group / IDL Highly versatile because the screw cap is based on the standard GL 45 thread. Ideal for use with elastic, soft tubing 6 to 9 mm (Viton®, Tygon®, silicone). These are for example used in biotechnology when transferring media with the aid of peristaltic pumps. Two PP hose connections, curved hose connections on the top side, straight connections on the lower side. Optional filter attachment for sterile pressure equalisation available. The grey PP core moves freely and allows the vessel to be changed over without twisting of the firmly attached tubing. Temperature resistant up to +140°C. Autoclavable, dishwasher safe. Typical application: safe transfer of media within a closed and sterile system. PU pc/Pack 2 10 21 12807 Order No. Screw cap GL 45 with 2 hose connections Optimised product design. The EPDM gasket provides Article for effective sealing at the GL 45 bottleneck. Filter top part for pressure equalization ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 10 21 12982 2 BOLA Multiple Distributors for Bottles, Bohlender Multiple Distributors for Bottles consist of a screw cap with GL thread and a movable body with GL-threaded necks. These necks allow the connection of hard-walled tubing or tubes made of glass, plastic or metal by means of BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints (see page 183). The special feature: the body of the distirbutor can be turned independently from the screw cap. This means, that the completely assemled distributor can be removed and fixed on another bottle without the risk of disarranging the tubing. Non-used necks can be closed by means of screw caps. The flowing product is only exposed to PTFE. Technical data: Material Screw Caps: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: GL 25, GL 32, GL45 – PPS black / GLS 80 – PP blue from -20°C to +200°C almost universal co d e b e w WWEQ2207 1 3 1 2 4 1 GL 45 1 GL 45 1 GL 45 1 GL 45 1 GL 45 1 GL 45 1 GL 45 2 GL 32 2 GL 32 2 GL 25 2 GL 25 3 GLS 80 3 GLS 80 4 GL 45 4 GL 45 BOLA multiple distributors for bottle thread Necks Material of the bo- dy PFA 2 × GL 14 PTFE 3 × GL 14 3 × GL 18 PTFE 2 × GL 14 / 1 × GL 25 PTFE PTFE 2 × GL 25 PTFE 3 × GL 25 4 × GL 25 PTFE PTFE 2 × GL 14 PTFE 3 × GL 14 PTFE 2 × GL 14 PTFE 3 × GL 14 4 × GL 18 PTFE 3 × GL 18 / 1 × GL 25 PTFE BOLA multiple distributors with cocks for working temperatures up to 120°C for bottle thread Necks Material of the body PTFE 2 × GL 14 / 2 stopcocks with bore Ø 4 mm 3 × GL 14 / 3 stopcocks with bore Ø 4 mm co d e b e w Order No. for tubing O.D. max. mm 2 × 6.35 22 17 61408 2 × 6.35 22 17 61508 3 × 10.0 22 17 61816 2 × 6.35 / 1 × 14 22 17 61824 2 × 14 10 17 61844 3 × 14 10 17 61847 4 × 14 10 17 61848 2 × 8 10 17 62104 3 × 8 10 17 62108 2 × 6 10 17 61904 3 × 6 10 17 61908 4 × 12.7 10 17 65416 3 × 12.7 / 1 × 14 10 17 65424 for tube/pipe O.D. mm 2 × 6.35 Order No. 22 17 61608 PTFE 3 × 6.35 22 17 61616 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 49

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles BOLA Multiple Distributors for Bottles EX, Bohlender Screw cap black for thread GL 45 made of conductive PPS-EX. Distributor body made of conductive PTFE-EX with GL-threaded necks. Tubes can be inserted through the necks. Connection of tubes and tubing by means of BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints EX. Detailed information in the product description of the identical Multiple Distributors for Bottles. Applications: Drawing or inserting aggressive or pure liquids. Inserting tubing, tubes and probes into jars. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: Vacuum: Conductivity: PTFE-, PPS-EX from -20°C to +250°C ++ very good 10 bar suitable 106 Ohm Necks GL 1 2 × 14 2 3 × 14 for tubing outer Ø mm 2 × 8.0 3 × 8.0 Order No. 10 17 68408 10 17 68508 BOLA HPLC Multiple Distributors for Bottles, Bohlender 3 HPLC Multiple distributors for bottles HPLC Multiple distributors for bottles made of glass-fiber reinforced polypropylene (PP), HPLC distributors for bottles allow up to 4 hoses to be simultaneously connected. With the screw cap, the distributors can be screwed on to any container with a GL 45 thread. As the distributors come standard with all accessories (screw caps, silicone O-rings, seals) for immediate use, all you have to do is decide between the model with or without the stopcock. Version 4 connections 4 connections for tubing outer Ø mm 1.6 – 2.0 and 2.1 – 4.0 6.0 Order No. 22 17 60608 22 17 60808 4 HPLC Multiple distributors for bottles with stopcocks Stopcocks made of FEP. Port on the lower side of the distributor for connecting tubing with I. D. 6 mm. Version 4 connections for tubing outer Ø mm 1.6 – 2.0 und 2.1 – 4.0 Order No. 10 17 60702 BOLA Distributors for Bottles, Bohlender Black screw cap made of PPS for bottle thread GL 45. Without stopcocks: body made of PTFE with 2 or 4 ports with female thread UNF ¼ ″ 28G on upper and lower sides. With stopcocks: body made of PTFE with 2 or 3 ports with female thread UNF ¼ ″ 28G on upper and lower sides and stopcock made of FEP for each port. A possible unevenness of the bottle neck is adjusted by an o-ring behind an elastic sealing lip, and the bottle is closed tightly. The product is only exposed to the body of the distributor. The body of the distrib- utor can be turned independently from the screw cap. This means, that the assembled distributor can be removed completely and fixed on another bottle without the risk of disarranging the tubing. Very good chemical resistance, for working temperatures up to +200°C. Applications: HPLC Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: PTFE, PPS from -15°C to +200°C +++ universal for tubing inner Ø x outer Ø mm 5 0.8 × 1.6 5 1.6 × 3.2 6 0.8 × 1.6 6 1.6 × 3.2 7 0.8 × 1.6 7 1.6 × 3.2 8 0.8 × 1.6 8 1.6 × 3.2 Quantity stop- cocks – – – – 2 2 3 3 Through bore mm 0.8 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8 1.6 0.8 1.6 Connection Order No. 2 × UNF 1/4 ″ 28G 10 17 64502 2 × UNF 1/4 ″ 28G 10 17 64504 4 × UNF 1/4 ″ 28G 10 17 64510 4 × UNF 1/4 ″ 28G 10 17 64512 2 × UNF 1/4 ″ 28G 10 17 64602 2 × UNF 1/4 ″ 28G 10 17 64604 3 × UNF 1/4 ″ 28G 10 17 64611 3 × UNF 1/4 ″ 28G 10 17 64612 1 3 4 5 6 50 2 7 8

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles BOLA multiple distributors for barrels, Bohlender For barrels with female thread. Ideal for drawing or inserting liquids. Movable body with GL-threaded necks. For connecting hard-walled tubing/tubes to the GL threads we rec- ommend BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints (see page 183). The special clou: the body of these distributors can be turned independently from the screw cap. This means that the completely assembled distributor can be removed and fixed an another barrel without the risk of disarranging the tubing. Technical data: Material Body: Material Screw Cap: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: PTFE Glass-fibre reinforced PTFE from -20°C up to +200°C almost universal max. 1 bar for female bar- rel thread R2 ″ R2 ″ Tri-Sure 2 ″ Tri-Sure 2 ″ Necks GL 4 × 18 2 × 18 / 1 × 25 4 × 18 2 × 18 / 1 × 25 for tubing O.D. max. mm 10 2 × 10 / 1 × 14 10 2 × 10 / 1 × 14 Order No. 10 17 69608 10 17 69614 10 17 69809 10 17 69814 BOLA Flexible Distributors, Bohlender Screw cap with thread, distributor body made of PP with hose connectors. The body of the distributor can be turned independently from the screw cap. This means, the assembled tubing will not be disarranged when the distributor is fixed on another bottle. Temperature resistance from 0°C to +110°C. The chemical resistance is very good. Hose connec- tors upper side Screw caps GL 45, PP green Hose connec- tors bottom side 2 × straight 3 × straight 2 × straight 1 2 × bent 2 3 × bent 3 2 × bent Tube connector outer Ø mm 8.8 8.8 10.8 Bore Ø mm Order No. 6 6 7 10 17 60024 10 17 60036 10 17 60048 Screw caps GL 45, PBTP red Hose connectors upper side Hose connectors bottom side 4 3 × stepped, bent 2 × stepped, straight Screw caps GLS 80, PP blue Hose connectors upper side Hose connectors bottom side 5 2 × stepped, bent 6 3 × stepped, bent 2 × stepped, straight 3 × stepped, straight Tube connec- tor outer Ø mm 9/12 Bore Ø mm Order No. 6 10 17 60224 Tube connec- tor outer Ø mm 9/12 9/12 Bore Ø mm Order No. 6 6 10 17 60406 10 17 60412 1 3 5 2 4 6 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 51

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWEQ2198 Bottles Wide Neck Glass Bottles GLS 80, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Laboratory bottle with wide thread (GLS 80; 80 mm AD). Autoclavable and tempera- ture-resistant (cap and pouring ring: +140°C), gray glass / glass type 1 acc. to USP/EP with retrace code and batch certificate via internet. Due to the wide mouth, the bottles are especially suitable for working with powders and granulates. Filling and emptying with liquid media is significantly improved, especially for great volumes. Special thread means opening takes less than a turn. 1 With screw cap and pouring ring made of PP Vol. Thread GLS ml 250 500 1000 2000 3500 5000 10000 20000 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 O.D. mm 95 101 101 136 160 182 227 288 Height mm 105.5 152 222 252 275 314 398 484 Order No. 10 21 13656 10 21 12627 10 21 12713 10 21 12715 10 21 12625 10 21 13949 10 21 13950 10 21 13951 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 Without screw cap and pouring ring Vol. ml 250 500 1000 2000 3500 5000 10000 20000 Thread GLS 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 O.D. mm 95 101 101 136 160 182 227 288 Height mm 105.5 148 218 248 271 310 385 480 Order No. 10 21 13607 10 21 18392 10 21 18424 10 21 18425 10 21 12626 10 21 18426 10 21 18427 10 21 18428 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 2 Wide Neck Glass Bottles Protect GLS 80, DURAN® Plastic coated (PU), completed with screw cap and pouring ring made of PP (blue). Autoclavable and temperature-resistant (cap and pouring ring: +140°C, plastic coating: -30°C to +135°C). Gray glass / glass type 1 according to USP/EP with Retrace Code and Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet. Due to the wide mouth, the bottles are es- pecially suitable for working with powders and granulates. Filling and emptying with liquid media is significantly improved, especially for great volumes. Special thread means open- ing takes less than a turn. Plastic coat serves as protection against scratches, shatters and leakage. Ideal for using dangerous or precious material. In case of outer damage, the coating keeps the glass together. UV protection up to approx. 380 nm wavelength. High transparency. Suitable for microwaving. Vol. ml 250 500 100 2000 3500 5000 Thread GLS 80 80 80 80 80 80 O.D. mm 95 101 101 136 160 182 Height mm 105.5 148 218 248 271 311 Order No. 10 21 13652 10 21 10152 10 21 10163 10 21 10164 10 21 16958 10 21 10165 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 1 Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! 1 2 52

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Wide Neck Glass Bottles GLS 80, Amber, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Laboratory bottle with wide thread (GLS 80; 80 mm AD). Autoclavable and tempera- ture-resistant (cap and pouring ring: +140°C), gray glass / glass type 1 according to USP/ EP with retrace code and batch certificate via internet. Due to the wide mouth, the bottles are especially suitable for working with powders and granulates. Filling and emptying with liquid media is significantly improved, especially for great volumes. Special thread means opening takes less than a turn. Brown-colouring provides light shield of ca. 300-500 mm. Brown-colouring only external, the common interior DURAN® characteristics remain un- changed. co d e b e w WWEQ2199 1 With screw cap and pouring ring made of PP Vol. Thread GLS ml 250 500 1000 2000 3500 5000 10000 20000 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 O.D. mm 95 101 101 136 160 182 227 288 Height mm 105.5 152 222 252 275 314 389 484 Order No. 10 21 13653 10 21 10146 10 21 10147 10 21 10148 10 21 10144 10 21 10149 10 21 10150 10 21 10151 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 Without screw cap and pouring ring Vol. ml 250 500 1000 2000 3500 5000 10000 20000 Thread GLS 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 O.D. mm 95 101 101 136 160 182 227 288 Height mm 105.5 148 218 248 271 310 385 480 Order No. 10 21 13604 10 21 18429 10 21 18430 10 21 18431 10 21 10145 10 21 18432 10 21 18433 10 21 18434 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 DURAN® Wide Neck Bottle GLS 80®, Double Wall, DURAN Group / IDL 1 co d e b e w WWEQ2216 Wide neck bottle, double wall The double-walled DURAN® wide neck bottle GLS 80® is thermally insulated by its inte- grated glass cladding. To regulate the temperature in this DURAN® screw cap bottle, hot or cold liquids can be circulated through the cladding. The double-walled DURAN® bottles are a lockable, flexible alternative to cap-less beakers with cladding. Applications: • Suitable for use as simple, low-cost chemostat or bioreactor with double cladding for • Reaction vessel for temperature-controlled reactions such as enzyme digestion; • Simple stirring reactor system with continuous flow and optional GLS 80® cap compo- cell cultures; nent; • Thermostatic vessel for storing liquids, or highly viscous liquids at a constant tempera- ture – practical for working with endo- or exothermal reagents; • Can be used as large cold trap or cooler with dry ice in the interior container. Features: • Fit for use in a wide temperature range of -40 to +120°C. By means of the white GLS 80® polyethersulfone screw cap (order separately), the application range can be extend- ed to -45 to +180 °C. Laboratory glasses made of DURAN® glass can be used in a temperature range of -196 to +300°C; however, the limit values for heating or cooling must be observed. • Made of DURAN® borosilicate glass 3.3, a material with proven excellent thermal prop- erties and a high resistance to chemical loads. • All components are fully autoclavable. • Available in two practical sizes: 500 and 1000 ml. • The inner diameter of 65 mm of the thread of the GLS 80® wide neck bottle allows for simple and convenient filling and emptying as well as cleaning. • Thanks to its flat bottom, the bottle is suitable for use with magnetic stir bar or the DU- RAN® GLS 80® magnet-stirring cap system. • Compatible with all GLS 80® wide neck connection systems for adding or removing of liquids during processing. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 53 Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles • Easy-to-read scale on the interior vessel • For greater safety, the GL 18 outlet hose connections can be removed. • To ensure even heating or cooling, the position of the 10 mm PTFE inlet / outlet hose Article connections was optimised for constant flow around the cladding. Vol. Total H. ml mm 500 180 1000 270 Double wall DURAN® wide neck bottle GLS 80® Double wall DURAN® wide neck bottle GLS 80® Order No. 10 21 14451 10 21 15456 Accessories 5 pcs./pack polypropylene Article Screw cap GLS 80 with sealing disc White polyethersulfone cap with PTFE-clad cap insert, Membrane screw cap GLS 80 Ventilated cap (blue) for DURAN® GLS 80® made from DURAN® stirred reactor cap incl. anchor-shaped magnetic stirrer and 4 connectors (2×GL 18 and 2×GL 1) DURAN® wide-neck bottle cap for mixing and con- necting, GLS 80® incl. DURAN® KPG agitator shaft WS 10 (L = 410 mm) and 4 connectors (2× GL 18 and 2× GL 14 screw caps) Order No. 10 21 16588 10 21 10168 10 21 10279 10 21 19204 co d e b e w WWEQ2215 DURAN® Baffled Wide Mouth Bottle GLS 80®, DURAN Group / IDL 1 DURAN® baffled wide mouth bottle GLS 80® 1 2 54 During mixing in standard GLS 80® laboratory bottles, the liquid moves in a swirling mo- tion that approximates a solid-body rotation. The entire fluid, and any suspended parti- cles, moves like a carousel. This is a very inefficient flow pattern, and very little mixing actually occurs. By adding three vertical baffles into the inner surface of the DURAN® GLS 80® bottles, the swirling motion is disrupted, and a much more effective mixing oc- curs. The baffles improve the top-to-bottom circulation and produce a greater radial mix- ing. The baffles also offer other advantages such as suppressing the formation of a central vortex, and reducing dead-zones where mixing does not occur. With polypropylene pouring ring and GLS 80® cap. Applications: • Aerating • Dissolving • Emulsifying • Homogenizing • Mixing • Suspending Features: • The baffled GLS 80® bottles are fully compatible with both the DURAN® GLS 80® mag- netic stirrers, and other magnetic stir bars. • Manufactured from DURAN® borosilicate 3.3 glass, renowned for its excellent thermal performance and high resistance to chemical attack. • The bottles are fully autoclavable. • Available in three convenient sizes: 250, 500 and 1.000 ml. • The wide 65 mm inner diameter of the GLS 80® wide mouth provides easy access to the contents, or for cleaning. • The baffles are moulded into the glass side wall of the bottles and form a continuous, smooth inner surface making clean-up easy. • Compatible with full range of wide mouth GLS 80® connection cap systems for liquid addition or removal when mixing with stir bars. • The bottles feature an easy-to-read graduated volume scale. Article DURAN® baffled wide mouth bottle GLS® 250 DURAN® baffled wide mouth bottle GLS® 500 DURAN® baffled wide mouth bottle GLS® 1000 Volume ml Overall height mm 110 153 223 Order No. 10 21 12158 10 21 12157 10 21 12153 Accessories Article 2 DURAN® stirred reactor cap for 250-ml GLS-80® bottles with paddle wheel magnetic stirrer, 4 connections (2 × GL 18 and 2 × GL 14) DURAN® stirred reactor cap for 500- or 1000-ml GLS-80® bottles with anchor-shaped mag- netic stirrer, 4 connections (2 × GL 18 and 2 × GL 14) Order No. 10 21 19107 10 21 10279

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Screw Cap GLS 80, DURAN Group / IDL Cap made of PP, blue, with lip seal, temperature-resistant up to +140°C, autoclavable, for GLS 80 bottles, quick cap (the DURAN® GLS 80 bottle can be opened and closed with only a three-quarter turn). Article Thread GLS Screw cap 80 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. O.D. mm 87 Height mm 40 Order No. 10 21 12716 PU pc/Pack 10 Srew Cap GLS 80, DURAN Group / IDL Screw cap with sealing disc for DURAN® GLS 80 laboratory bottle The special composition of the material used, which is based on polyarylsulphone (PSU compound), the chemical, thermal and mechanical properties of the material are notice- ably improved and adapted to laboratory requirements. Seal coated on both sides with PTFE for high density. The medium only comes into contact with PTFE. No dyes, no colours, no contamination of devices. Tmax= 180°C. Autoclavable/sterilizable. A matching PTFE pouring ring is available. co d e b e w WWEQ2208 Article Screw cap GLS 80 Pouring ring, PTFE Outer Ø mm 86 Height mm 40 6.85 PU Order No. 5 pcs. 10 21 16588 5 pcs. 10 21 16730 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Pouring Rings GLS 80, blue, PP, DURAN Group / IDL PP pouring rings for GLS 80 bottles. Tmax = +140°C Article Thread GLS Pouring ring 80 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Height mm 6.85 Order No. 10 21 10166 PU pc/Pack 10 Narrow Neck Bottles, IDL Narrow-neck bottles with round thread DIN, without screw cap. Matching caps below. co d e b e w WW7R3002 co d e b e w WWEQ2196 co d e b e w WWEQ2197 1 Clear glass Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 2 Amber glass Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread DIN 22 22 25 28 Thread DIN 22 22 25 28 Neck I.D. mm 12.5 12.5 15.5 18.5 Neck I.D. mm 12.5 12.5 15.5 18.5 Order No. 12 00 03024 12 00 03036 12 00 03044 12 00 03054 PU pc/Pack 72 42 35 20 Order No. 12 00 04024 12 00 04036 12 00 04044 12 00 04054 PU pc/Pack 56 42 35 20 2 1 Quantity in standard pack subject to change. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 55

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WW7R3003 Bottles Wide Neck Bottles, IDL Wide neck bottles with round thread DIN, without screw cap. Matching caps below. 1 Wide neck bottles made of clear glass Vol. Thread DIN Neck I.D. mm 21.3 40 40 56.0 Order No. 12 00 05016 12 00 05036 12 00 05044 12 00 05054 PU pc/Pack 126 48 20 18 2 1 Cylindrical bottles made of clear glass Vol. ml 50 100 Thread DIN 40 45 Neck I.D. mm 28.3 36.5 Order No. 12 00 05018 12 00 05024 PU pc/Pack 125 72 32 55 55 68 32 55 55 68 ml 30 250 500 1000 ml 30 250 500 1000 Vol. ml 50 100 2 Wide neck bottles made of amber glass Vol. Thread DIN Neck I.D. mm 21.3 40 40 56.0 Order No. 12 00 06016 12 00 06036 12 00 06044 12 00 06054 PU pc/Pack 126 30 20 12 Cylindrical bottles made of amber glass Thread DIN 40 45 Neck I.D. mm 28.3 33.3 Order No. 12 00 06018 12 00 06024 PU pc/Pack 105 63 Quantity in standard pack subject to change. co d e b e w WW7R3004 Screw Caps DIN 168, IDL Caps DIN 168, made of black molded plastic, with poly insert, suitable for narrow neck and wide neck bottles. DIN 18 22 25 28 32 40 45 55 68 Order No. 10 00 07018 12 00 07022 12 00 07025 12 00 07028 12 00 07032 12 00 07040 12 00 07045 12 00 07055 12 00 07068 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 750 500 400 850 650 380 240 behrotest® Wide Neck Bottles with Screw Cap, Behr 3 berotest® wide-mouth bottles made of clear glass with PTFE-coated screw cap behrotest® clear glass bottles for storage and transport. Due to PTFE-laminated screw caps, ideal for example to take samples. Packaged in reusable 10-pc. cartons with com- partments! Article Thread DIN RK 250 GT RK 500 GT RK 1000 GT 55 55 68 Volume ml 250 500 1000 Order No. 10 48 86013 10 48 86014 10 48 86015 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 Continued on next page co d e b e w WWXKS039 56

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories 4 Bottles berotest® wide-mouth bottles made of amber glass with PTFE-coated screw cap behrotest® amber glass bottles for storage and transport. Due to PTFE-laminated screw caps, ideal for example to take samples. Article Thread DIN RB 250 GT RB 500 GT RB 1000 GT 55 55 68 Volume ml 250 500 1000 Order No. 10 48 86006 10 48 86007 10 48 86008 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Narrow Neck Bottles, Glass, Clear or Brown, Cap with PTFE Coated Inlay, Behr Sampling bottles made from clear or brown glass. Type NK 50 GT NK 100 GT NK 250 GT NK 500 GT NK 1000 GT NB 50 GT NB 100 GT NB 250 GT NB 500 GT NB 1000 GT Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 50 100 250 500 1000 Thread mm 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 Colour Order No. clear clear clear clear clear brown brown brown brown brown 10 48 36017 10 48 36018 10 48 36019 10 48 36020 10 48 36021 10 48 36012 10 48 36013 10 48 36014 10 48 36015 10 48 36016 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 4 co d e b e w WWXKS056 Narrow Neck Square Bottles, with Screw Thread, IDL Square bottles with screw thread, narrow neck with high DIN thread, made of so- da-lime glass, without pouring ring, dust cap and screw cap. Clear glass co d e b e w WW7R3243 Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 32 32 32 45 Ø mm 49 64 77 96 H without cap mm 119 155 186 223 Order No. 12 00 81024 12 00 81036 12 00 81044 12 00 81054 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 Amber glass with pouring ring and dust cap, without screw cap. Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 32 32 32 45 Ø mm 49 64 77 96 H without cap mm 119 155 186 223 Order No. 12 00 81624 12 00 81636 12 00 81644 12 00 81654 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 Originality caps made of PP for square bottles with screw threads, narrow neck, high thread Thread GL 32 45 Colour blue blue Order No. 12 00 85119 12 00 85128 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Safety caps made of PP for square bottles with screw threads, narrow neck with valve, high thread Colour red red Order No. 12 00 85219 12 00 85228 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Thread GL 32 45 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 57

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Wide Neck Square Bottles, with Screw Thread, IDL Square bottles with screw thread, wide neck with thread, made of soda-lime glass, without pouring ring and dust cap, without screw cap. Clear glass Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 32 45 54 60 Amber glass Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 32 45 54 54 Ø mm 49 64 77 97 Ø mm 49 64 77 97 H without cap mm 109 146 173 213 Order No. 12 00 82024 12 00 82036 12 00 82044 12 00 82054 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 H without cap mm 109 146 173 213 Order No. 12 00 82624 12 00 82636 12 00 82644 12 00 82654 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 Originality caps made of PP for square bottles with screw threads, narrow neck Thread GL 32 45 54 60 co d e b e w WW7R3281 Colour blue blue blue blue Order No. 12 00 85319 12 00 85328 12 00 85332 12 00 85335 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 Reagent Bottles, Narrow Neck, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Reagent bottles with narrow neck, ISO 4796-2, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). With standard ground joint and glass flat-head stopper Vol. ml 101) 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 max. O.D. mm 28 36 42 52 70 86 107 134 182 227 288 Height w/o stopper mm 52 64 80 96 130 164 200 248 323 398 492 Neck NS Order No. PU pc/Pack 10/19 12/21 14/15 14/15 19/26 24/29 29/32 29/32 45/40 60/46 60/46 11 21 16508 11 21 16514 11 21 16517 11 21 16524 11 21 16536 11 21 16544 11 21 16554 11 21 16563 11 21 16573 11 21 16586 11 21 16591 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1) Non-DIN and ISO size Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. co d e b e w WWEQ2030 co d e b e w 58

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Reagent Bottles, Wide Neck, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Reagent bottles, wide neck, ISO 4796-2, with standard ground joint, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). 1 With standard ground joint and glass flat-head stopper Vol. Neck NS Order No. co d e b e w WWEQ2024 ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 50001) 100001) 200001) max. O.D. mm 44 52 70 86 107 133 182 229 290 Height w/o stopper mm 79 97 133 163 201 247 358 443 570 24/20 29/22 34/35 45/40 60/46 60/46 85/55 85/55 85/55 11 21 18517 11 21 18524 11 21 18536 11 21 18544 11 21 18554 11 21 18563 11 21 18573 11 21 18586 11 21 18591 2 With standard ground joint, without stopper, ISO 4796-2 Vol. Neck NS Order No. 1) No ISO-standard available. Height w/o stopper mm 79 97 133 163 201 247 358 443 570 1) No ISO-standard available. max. O.D. mm 44 52 70 86 107 133 182 229 290 ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 50001) 100001) 200001) 24/20 29/22 34/35 45/40 60/46 60/46 85/55 85/55 85/55 11 21 18417 11 21 18424 11 21 18436 11 21 18444 11 21 18454 11 21 18463 11 21 18473 11 21 18486 11 21 18491 3 PE plastic stoppers NS 24/29 29/32 34/351) 45/401) 60/461) 85/551) 1) Non DIN-size. Order No. 11 29 20408 11 29 20409 11 29 20411 11 29 20412 11 29 20413 11 29 20416 PU pc/Pack 10 10 1 1 1 1 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 3 2 Reagent Bottles, Narrow Neck, made of Soda-Lime Glass, DURAN Group / IDL Conical shoulder bottles with standard ground joint and glass flat-head stopper, ISO 4796-2. Clear glass co d e b e w WWEQ2181 Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 max. O.D. mm 52 72 89 110 Height w/o stopper mm 96 130 165 200 Neck NS Order No. PU pc/Pack 14/15 19/26 24/29 29/32 12 23 16524 12 23 16536 12 23 16544 12 23 16554 10 10 10 10 Amber glass Height w/o stopper mm 80 96 130 165 200 Neck NS Order No. PU pc/Pack 14/15 14/15 19/26 24/29 29/32 12 23 16817 12 23 16824 10 21 16836 12 23 16844 12 23 16854 10 10 10 10 10 Vol. ml 50 100 250 500 1000 max. O.D. mm 42 52 72 89 110 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 59

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWEQ2190 co d e b e w WWXKS025 Bottles Reagent Bottles, Wide Neck, made of Soda-Lime Glass, DURAN Group / IDL Conical shoulder bottles with standard ground joint (NS) and glass flat-head stopper acc. to ISO 4796-2. Recommended maximum service temperature: 100°C. Temperature change resistance 30 K, hydrolytic class 3. Clear glass Vol. ml 50 100 250 500 1000 max. O.D. mm 44 52 71 86 107 Height w/o stopper mm 79 97 129 164 200 Neck NS Order No. PU pc/Pack 24/20 29/22 34/24 45/40 60/46 12 23 18517 12 23 18524 12 23 18536 12 23 18544 12 23 18554 10 10 10 10 10 Sampling Bottle DIN 12036, Behr Sampling Bottles DIN 12036 Glass sampling bottlesand solid glass stopper behrotest® conforming to DIN 12036 con- ical ground and solid glass stopper with rounded end. Made of 3.3 borosilicate glass. The stopper offer two major advantages: • No formation of air bubbles at the end of the stopper when immersed in the sample. • Low risk of breakage and cracking. Type PFL 500 PFL 1000 PFL 2000 Volume ml 500 1000 2000 Glass Stoppers, behrotest® Type MST 24 MST 29 Ground joint size Order No. 24/29 24/29 29/32 NS size 24/29 29/32 14 48 65027 14 48 65028 14 48 65029 Order No. 13 48 65023 13 48 65024 co d e b e w WWRJN055 Economy Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Economy bottles made of high-density polyethylene (HDPE), bulk packed: Light-weight and user-friendly for uncomplicated applications. Leak-proof. These bottles are intended for general use in laboratory applications where the bottles are not subject to high stress, for example storing of samples and standard working solu- tions like buffers and reagents. Narrow-mouth bottles Economy Cap Ø mm 20 20 24 24 24 24 28 28 38 – 430 38 – 430 10 87 19808 10 87 19812 10 87 19824 22 87 19828 10 87 19832 22 87 19836 10 87 19842 22 87 19844 10 87 19852 22 87 19854 PU pc/Pack 72 72 72 500 72 250 48 125 24 50 Order No. Volume ml 30 60 125 125 250 250 500 500 1000 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 60 Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Wide-neck bottles Economy Cap Ø mm 28 28 28 38 38 43 43 53 53 63 63 Order No. 10 87 19908 10 87 19912 10 87 19916 10 87 19924 22 87 19928 10 87 19932 22 87 19936 10 87 19942 22 87 19944 10 87 19952 22 87 19954 PU pc/Pack 72 72 1000 72 500 72 250 48 125 24 50 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Volume ml 30 60 60 125 125 250 250 500 500 1000 1000 Volume ml 4 8 15 30 60 125 175 250 500 500 1000 Volume ml 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Narrow-Mouth Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of high-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure Cylindrical, all-purpose bottles. Rigid, transparent, with excellent chemical resistance properties. Leakproof. Note: The 500 ml size is also available with an extended neck and a wider mouth (cat. no. 22 87 20030). Cat no. 22 87 20030 and 22 87 20031; with size 38 mm screw closure, fits Eppendorf and Oxford reagent dispensers. co d e b e w WWRJN041 Cap Ø mm 13 20 20 20 20 24 24 24 28 38 38 Order No. 22 87 20021 22 87 20022 22 87 20023 22 87 20024 22 87 20025 22 87 20026 22 87 20027 22 87 20028 22 87 20029 22 87 20030 22 87 20031 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Amber bottles made of high-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure Reduce UV light transmission to help protect light-sensitive liquids. NALGENE amber bottles comply with U.S. Pharmacopoeia 23, 661 requirements for maximum light trans- mission. Useful for storage, shipping and packaging. Leakproof. Cap Ø mm 13 20 20 20 20 24 24 28 38 – 430 Order No. 10 87 20041 10 87 20042 10 87 20043 10 87 20044 10 87 20045 10 87 20046 10 87 20047 10 87 20048 10 87 20049 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Failed to find what you are looking for ? Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 61

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Narrow-Mouth Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of low-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure. These transparent bottles have a greater flexibility and impact resistance than HDPE bottles. Furthermore, they offer a better view of their contents. As LDPE has a very low content of trace elements, this material is particularly well suited for organic trace analysis. Leak- proof. Note: 500 ml bottles are also available with longer neck and wider opening (Order No. 22 87 30036). Cap Ø mm 20 20 20 20 24 24 28 38 – 430 38 – 430 Order No. 10 87 20038 10 87 20039 10 87 30001 10 87 30032 10 87 30033 10 87 30034 10 87 30035 10 87 30036 10 87 30037 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w WWRJN324 co d e b e w WWRJN043 1 co d e b e w 62 WWRJN059 2 Volume ml 8 15 30 60 125 250 500 500 1000 ml 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 1500 Volume ml 2000 4000 Narrow-Mouth Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of polypropylene with polypropylene screw closure. Leak-proof. Auto- clavable. Volume Order No. Cap Ø mm 13 20 20 20 20 24 24 28 38 – 430 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 22 87 20061 22 87 20062 22 87 20063 22 87 20064 22 87 20065 22 87 20066 22 87 20067 22 87 20068 22 87 20069 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Wide-Mouth Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL 1 Bottles made of high-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure Multi-purpose bottles for universal laboratory and sampling use, with wide neck opening for easier filling. Leak-proof. Cap Ø mm 28 28 38 43 53 63 63 Order No. 22 87 21041 22 87 21042 22 87 21043 22 87 21044 22 87 21045 22 87 21046 10 87 21049 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 Large wide-mouth bottles, high-density PE, PP screw closure very suitable for dry chemicals and water samples, leak-proof. Cap Ø mm 100 100 Order No. 10 87 21047 10 87 21048 PU pc/Pack 6 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible.

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Amber Wide-Mouth Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of high-density polyethylene with amber polypropylene screw closure. Protection for light-sensitive substances. Leak-proof. co d e b e w WWRJN056 Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Cap Ø mm 28 28 38 43 53 63 Order No. 22 87 21061 22 87 21062 22 87 21063 22 87 21064 22 87 21065 22 87 21066 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Bottles PE-LD, BRAND Wide neck, amber, opaque, for storage of light-sensitive substances. With screw cap. . Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Diameter mm 39 45 59 75 94 117 Height mm 85 106 140 180 212 264 Thread Order No. GL 32 GL 32 GL 40 GL 50 GL 65 GL 65 10 49 12728 10 49 12738 10 49 12748 10 49 12754 10 49 12762 10 49 12764 Wide-Mouth Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL 1 Bottles made of polypropylene with polypropylene screw closure Autoclavable universal bottles with a particularly wide neck. Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Cap Ø mm 28 28 38 43 53 63 Order No. 22 87 21051 22 87 21052 22 87 21053 22 87 21054 22 87 21055 22 87 21056 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 Large wide-mouth bottles, PP Especially suitable for autoclaving greater volumes. Not leak-proof. Autoclavable. PU pc/Pack 6 6 Cap Ø mm 100 100 10 87 21057 10 87 21058 Order No. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Volume ml 2000 4000 co d e b e w WWQED077 1 co d e b e w WWRJN058 Wide-Mouth Bottle, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of low-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure. Trans- lucent, flexible, with excellent impact resistance. Better visibility to contents than with HDPE bottles. Wide mouth is easy to fill. Suitable for shipping liquids. Leakproof. 2 co d e b e w WWRJN327 Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 co d e b e w Cap Ø mm 28 28 38 43 53 63 Order No. 10 87 21031 10 87 21032 10 87 21033 10 87 21034 10 87 21035 10 87 21036 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 63

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Heavy-Duty Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of high-density polyethylene with white polypropylene screw closure. Large, thick-walled bottles with wide neck opening. Leak-proof. Cap Ø mm 53B 53B 83B Order No. 22 87 21251 22 87 21252 22 87 21253 PU pc/Pack 6 2 1 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Heavy-Duty Bottle, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Heavy-Duty Bottle, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Thick-walled bottles made of polypropylene with TPE seal for extra-rugged service. Withstands vacuum loads at room temperature. Leak-proof, autoclavable and resistant to chemicals. Ideal for use as a storage container for automatic analysis and dispensing systems. Volume Order No. Cap Ø mm 53 53 53 83 83 PU pc/Pack 6 6 2 1 1 22 87 21265 22 87 21261 22 87 21262 22 87 21260 22 87 21263 Volume l 1 2 4 l 0.25 1 2 4 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PTFE Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Narrow-mouth bottles made of PTFE PFA with PFA screw closure. PTFE PFA is the most chemical-resistant fluoropolymer available. It is only susceptible to molten alkali metals and halogenated compounds at elevated temperatures. Best suited for trace anal- ysis and chip production. Leakproof, contact clear, autoclavable, temperature resistant from -270 to +250°C. Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Cap Ø mm 20 20 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 Order No. 22 87 16301 22 87 16302 22 87 16303 22 87 16304 22 87 16305 22 87 16306 Narrow-Mouth Bottles, PFA, VITLAB Transparent.With screw cap with buttress threads made of PFA. Ideal for long-term stor- age of high-purity oxidants, acids, alkalis, as well as hydrocarbons, trace analysis solvents and standards. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 Thread S 28 S 28 S 28 S 28 S 28 Height mm 86 120 160 190 240 Ø mm 37 45 61 76 96 PU Order No. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 22 85 32672 22 85 32677 22 85 32684 22 85 32688 22 85 32692 co d e b e w WWRJN045 co d e b e w WWRJN046 co d e b e w WWRJN075 64

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Brownglass Bottles DIN 18, LAT Brownglass bottles DIN 18 Pharmaceutical or drugstore bottles pursuant to pharmaceutical standard, in practical sets of 10. co d e b e w WWW4U104 Vol. Order No. Vol. Order No. ml 10 20 30 Please order the screw caps and drop-dispensing inserts separately. 10 20 18119 10 20 18219 10 20 18319 10 20 18519 10 20 18619 ml 50 100 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Accessories Article Screw caps, white 10 – 100 ml Driptray, red 10 – 100 ml Order No. 10 20 18036 10 20 18136 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Wide-Mouth Bottles, PFA, VITLAB Transparent. With screw cap made of PFA with buttress threads. Ideal for long-term stor- age of high-purity oxidants, acids, alkalis, as well as hydrocarbons, trace analysis solvents and standards. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Volume ml 250 500 1000 2000 Thread S 40 S 40 S 40 S 40 Height mm 150 179 217 245 Ø mm 61 76 96 130 PU Order No. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 22 85 32784 22 85 32788 22 85 32792 22 85 32796 VITgrip™ Laboratory Bottles, PP, VITLAB The allrounder: Plastic bottle for sampling and storing of liquids in the lab. The VITgrip™ laboratory bottle is characterized by the following properties: • Excellent grip thanks to the innovative design. The slim waist of the VITgrip™ lab bottles greatly improves handling compared to conventional lab bottles. The moulded volume graduations furthermore provide texture for an enhanced grip, especially when working with gloves. • Leakproof1) - The optimized sealing system of the bottle thread and screw cap form a reliable sealing system with an ergonomic shape. • Easy readability - With double-sided moulded graduations, the volume inside the bottle is easy to read with a high accuracy (±5%). • The hydrophobic material and absence of dirt-catching edges allow for smooth pouring of liquids and easy cleaning. • With tamper-evident closure which reliably signals if the bottle is still originally sealed. • Very good chemical resistance against most acids, bases and alcohols. The VITgrip™ laboratory bottles and the enclosed VITLAB® original closures are suitable for contact with food (pursuant to EU Directive No. 10/2011). Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) accord- ing to DIN EN 285. Volume Order No. ml 125 250 500 1000 2000 Height mm 1032) 1492) 1922) 2342) 2782) Bottom Ø mm 54 64 77 97 126 Graduation ml 12.5 25 25 50 100 PU pc/Pack 6 6 6 6 1 1) IMPORTANT NOTE: The term leakproof applies under the following conditions: The VITgrip™ lab bottle is half-filled with distilled water and is closed with the supplied VITLAB® screw closure - after the ring of the tamper-evident closure clicks into place - with a torque of 5 Nm. Subsequently, the bottle is turned upside down and remains, standing on the screw cap, for 15 minutes, without the filled-in water escaping. The test is carried out at room temperature (approx. 20° C) and atmospheric pressure. 2) Height without screw cap 10 85 30194 10 85 30294 10 85 30394 10 85 30494 10 85 30594 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 65

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Polyethylene Bottles, Narrow Neck, KAUTEX Laboratory bottles, PE-LD, natural color, with screw cap (from 2000 ml closed or open), supplied in a bag and shrinkwrapped as a UV product. Laboratory bottles Vol. ml 10 20 30 50 100 200 250 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 Ø mm 26 32 33 37 47 57 61 75 97 120 138 162 Height mm 46 56 67 88 105 131 140 177 223 264 300 355 Thread mm 14 14 14 18 18 18 25 25 28 28 32 40 Order No. 22 52 70500 22 52 70501 22 52 70502 22 52 70503 22 52 70504 22 52 70505 22 52 70506 22 52 70507 22 52 70508 22 52 70509 22 52 70510 22 52 70511 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 50 20 10 10 10 4 1 1 1 Spare Kautex closures, PE-LD, natural colored for bottle volume ml Order No. 10 52 70603 10 52 70604 10 52 70605 10 52 70606 10 52 70607 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Order No. 22 52 72102 22 52 72101 22 52 72100 22 52 72103 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 Order No. 22 52 73350 PU pc/Pack 100 Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 75991 22 52 75992 22 52 70618 22 52 75993 22 52 70619 22 52 75994 100 100 100 100 100 100 bis 30 50 – 200 250 – 500 1000 – 2000 3000 up to 30 50 – 200 250 – 500 1000 – 2000 Dropper closures, PE-LD, natural colored, with tip for bottle volume ml Cap with holding strip, PVC, red Article suitable for all dropper closures Dropper closures, PE-LD, natural colored for bottle volume ml Thread O.D. mm 18 18 25 25 28 28 100 200 250 500 1000 2000 co d e b e w 66 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Narrow Neck Bottles, KAUTEX Chemical bottles made of HDPE with UN approval, rectangular, natural colored or black, without closure. Suitable for transporting hazardous liquids. N.B.: Approval certificates available on request. Uses: • packing • sampling • storing • shipping UN Narrow neck bottles, natural colored Height w/o closure mm 176.5 211.8 282.0 Thread O.D. mm 45 45 45 22 52 84464 22 52 84152 22 52 84153 Neck I.D. mm PU pc/Box Weight g 28.7 28.7 28.7 50 88 163 120 64 26 Order No. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Vol. ml 500 1000 2500 Thread O.D. mm 45 45 45 Height w/o closure mm 176.5 211.8 282.0 Weight g Order No. PU pc/Box 50 88 163 22 52 70096 22 52 70097 22 52 84486 120 64 26 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. UN Narrow neck bottles, black Vol. ml Neck I.D. mm 500 1000 2500 28.7 28.7 28.7 Closures with UN approval Article Light-duty closure, HDPE, black Tamper-evident ring, PTFE insert Bell-type closure, PP, black Tamper-evident ring, PP, red; cup seal, teflon insert Bell-type closure, PP, red, with gas release Tamper-evident ring, PP, red; cup seal, perforated teflon insert ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 10 52 74183 22 52 84162 22 52 84182 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 Polyethylene Bottles, Wide Neck, KAUTEX Laboratory bottles, PE-LD, cylindrical, natural color, with screw cap (contains 2000 ml when closed or open), supplied in a bag and shrinkwrapped as a UV product. Laboratory bottles Vol. ml 50 100 200 250 300 500 750 1000 1500 2000 Ø mm 39 48 59 64 68 77 88 95 108 120 Height mm 77 93 114 120 128 154 173 205 226 247 Thread mm 32 32 40 40 40 50 50 65 65 65 Spare Kautex closures, PE-LD, natural colored for bottle volume ml 50 – 100 200 – 300 500 – 750 1000 – 2000 co d e b e w Order No. 22 52 70528 22 52 70529 22 52 70530 22 52 70531 22 52 70532 22 52 70533 22 52 70534 22 52 70535 22 52 70536 22 52 70537 PU pc/Pack 50 20 10 10 10 10 5 4 4 1 Order No. 10 52 70607 10 52 70608 10 52 70609 10 52 70610 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 67

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Wide Neck Bottles, KAUTEX Wide-neck bottles made of polypropylene (PP), autoclavable up to max. 121°C, nat- ural colored, with graduation, with screw closure. Wide Neck Bottles Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 Ø mm 48 64 77 96 Height mm 94 121 155 206 Thread mm 32 40 50 65 Order No. 22 52 83856 22 52 83859 22 52 83852 22 52 83855 PU pc/Pack 480 260 130 56 Spare hollow-bead closure made of PP, natural colored Vol. ml 50 100 250 350 500 750 1000 1500 2500 4000 Container cross-section mm 36×36 45×45 59×59 60×60 75×75 85×85 85×85 111×111 122×122 142×142 Height w/o closure mm 88.5 101 128 164 161 185 212 209 258 294 Thread O.D. mm 28 32 45 45 54 54 54 80 80 80 Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 76398 22 52 73094 22 52 73095 22 52 71138 22 52 73096 22 52 71140 22 52 73097 22 52 73624 22 52 71143 22 52 71144 700 612 273 190 124 90 81 42 27 15 Wide-neck bottles, white Vol. ml 50 100 250 500 750 1000 1500 2500 4000 Container cross-section mm 36×36 45×45 59×59 75×75 85×85 85×85 111×111 122×122 142×142 Height w/o closure mm 88.5 101 128 161 185 212 209 258 294 Thread O.D. mm 28 32 45 54 54 54 80 80 80 Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 84193 22 52 79206 22 52 79207 22 52 79209 22 52 79210 22 52 79211 22 52 79212 22 52 79213 22 52 79214 700 612 273 124 90 81 42 27 15 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Screw closures made of polypropylene, black, with PE foam insert for bottle volume ml 50 100 250 – 350 500 – 1000 1500 – 4000 22 52 71150 22 52 71152 22 52 71153 22 52 71898 22 52 71155 Order No. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Continued on next page 68 Thread mm 32 40 50 65 Order No. 22 52 83789 22 52 83792 22 52 83791 22 52 83790 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 N.B.: Before autoclaving, unscrew the closure and place it, turned upside down, loose on the bottle. Do not screw tight. Reagent Bottles, Wide Neck, KAUTEX Wide-neck chemical bottles made of PE-HD (hard), available natural colored or white with a variety of closures. (Closures have to be ordered separately.) All sizes, except for 50 ml and 350 ml, are approved for use with hazardous solid materi- als, when used with the matching closures. Wide-neck bottles, natural colors

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Tamper-evident closures made of polypropylene, blue for bottle volume ml 50 100 250 – 350 500 – 1000 1500 – 4000 Order No. 22 52 76304 22 52 73826 22 52 76306 22 52 73199 22 52 73775 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Tamper-evident closures made of polypropylene, red, with PE foam insert for bottle volume ml 50 100 250 – 350 500 – 1000 1500 – 4000 22 52 84198 22 52 83761 22 52 83783 22 52 83691 22 52 83762 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Order No. Screwing aid/wrench for closure sizes 100 to 4000 ml Article Screwing aid Order No. 22 52 85102 Rectangular Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of high-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure. Sturdy wall construction, straight sides, leak-proof. Cap Ø mm 28 38 48 53 63 28 38 48 53 63 Colour Order No. white white white white white brown brown brown brown brown 22 87 20071 22 87 20072 22 87 20073 22 87 20074 22 87 20075 10 87 20091 10 87 20092 10 87 20093 10 87 20094 10 87 20095 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 4 12 12 12 6 4 co d e b e w WWRJN037 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Square Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Square bottles with graduation and pouring ring 1 Bottles made of polycarbonate with polypropylene screw closure, transparent, break-proof, autoclavable, leak-proof. For storing aqueous solutions, Temperature-resistant from -135 to +135°C. co d e b e w WWRJN039 Volume ml 125 250 500 1000 2000 125 250 500 1000 2000 Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Cap Ø mm 20 24 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 53 Order No. 22 87 20155 22 87 20156 22 87 20151 22 87 20152 22 87 20153 22 87 20154 22 87 20157 PU pc/Pack 12 12 6 6 4 4 1 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 Bottles made of polypropylene polypropylene screw closure, contact-clear, autoclavable, resistant to alcohols, acids and bases. Temperature-resistant from -40 to +121°C. Cap Ø mm 20 24 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 Order No. 22 87 20161 22 87 20162 22 87 20163 22 87 20164 22 87 20165 22 87 20166 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 1 2 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 69 Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories 1 Bottles Bottles made of high-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure, break-proof, non-autoclavable, resistant to most chemicals. Temperature-resistant from -100 to +120°C. Cap Ø mm 20 24 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 Order No. 22 87 20181 22 87 20182 22 87 20183 22 87 20184 22 87 20185 22 87 20186 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 Bottles made of polyethylene-terephthalate-copolyester (PETG) with high-density polyethylene screw closure, sterile, for cell cultures and other bio- logical media. Low CO2/O2 permeability. Cell culture media can be stored gas-tight for 6 months without disturbing the pH balance. Transparent, gamma ray sterilized, non-toxic, shatterproof. Packaged in shrink-wrapped trays; no rinsing, autoclaving or drying re- quired. Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Volume ml 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 Cap Ø mm 20 24 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 38 – 430 53 Order No. 22 87 20191 22 87 20192 22 87 20193 22 87 20194 22 87 20195 22 87 20196 22 87 20197 PU pc/Pack 24 24 24 24 12 12 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 Wide-mouth square bottles made of polypropylene with polypropylene closure. PP is resistant to acids, alcohols and bases. Contact-clear bottle provides visible liquid level. Has wide mouth for easy cleaning, sample filling and retrieval. Square shape saves space. Autoclavable / leak-proof. NOTE: Before autoclaving, just set cap or closure on top of the bottle without engaging the threads. Volume ml 60 175 250 500 1000 Cap Ø mm 28 38 43 53 63 Dimensions mm 83 × 37 × 37 106 × 52 × 52 116 × 62 × 62 146 × 75 × 75 181 × 95 × 95 Order No. 10 87 21101 10 87 21102 10 87 21103 10 87 21104 10 87 21105 PU pc/Pack 12 12 72 12 6 4 Wide-mouth square bottles made of high-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure. Square shape saves space; wide mouth is easy to fill. Leak-proof. Volume ml 60 175 250 500 1000 Cap Ø mm 28 38 43 53 63 Dimensions mm 83 × 37 × 37 106 × 52 × 52 116 × 62 × 62 146 × 75 × 75 181 × 95 × 95 Order No. 10 87 21141 10 87 21142 10 87 21143 10 87 21144 10 87 21145 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 6 5 Large wide-mouth square bottles made of polypropylene with polypropylene screw closure. Space-saving bottle features convenient, molded-in handgrips. Excellent for storing and sterilizing contaminated slides and other small lab items. Autoclavable / not leak-proof. NOTE: Before autoclaving, just set cap or closure on top of the bottle without engaging the threads. Volume l 4 Cap Ø mm 100 Dimensions mm 279 × 140 × 140 Order No. 10 87 21221 6 Large wide-mouth square bottles made of high-density polyethylene with polypropylene screw closure. Space-saving bottle features molded-in handgrips for greater convenience and safety when pouring. Excellent for collecting, storing and transporting dry chemicals, environmental samples, reagents and distilled water. Square shape saves space and wide mouth allows easy access to contents. Leak-proof. Volume l 4 Cap Ø mm 100 Dimensions mm 279 × 140 × 140 Order No. 10 87 21230 1 4 6 2 3 5 70

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Wide Neck Square Containers, KAUTEX Vol. Containers made of PVC (hard). (Closures have to be ordered separately.) Wide neck containers, crystal-clear Thread O.D. mm 32 40 50 50 65 80 80 80 Container cross-section mm 38×38 46×46 60×60 68×68 81×81 92×92 98×98 122×122 ml 50 100 200 300 500 750 1000 2000 Height w/o closure mm 60.5 71 88 94 108 120 143 187 Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 70595 22 52 70596 22 52 70597 22 52 71080 22 52 70598 22 52 71082 22 52 70599 22 52 73352 972 480 406 300 162 114 96 44 Wide neck containers, amber transparent Vol. ml 50 100 200 300 500 750 1000 2000 Container cross-section mm 38×38 46×46 60×60 68×68 81×81 92×92 98×98 120×120 Thread O.D. mm 32 40 50 50 65 80 80 80 Height w/o closure mm 60.5 71 88 94 108 120 143 187 Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 70697 22 52 70698 22 52 70699 22 52 71081 22 52 70700 22 52 71083 22 52 70701 22 52 73353 972 480 406 300 162 114 96 44 ml Wide neck containers made of PETG, crystal-clear Height w/o closure mm 60.5 71 88.5 108 144 187 Container cross-section mm 38×38 46×46 60×60 81×81 98×98 122×122 Thread O.D. mm 32 40 50 65 80 80 Vol. 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 74371 22 52 74372 22 52 74373 22 52 74374 22 52 74375 22 52 84404 972 480 406 162 96 44 Screw closures, PP, black for container volume ml 50 100 200 – 300 500 750 – 1000 2000 Order No. 22 52 70750 22 52 70751 22 52 70752 22 52 70753 22 52 70754 22 52 70755 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 behroplast® Bottles, Behr behroplast® bottles made of thermoplastic polyester (PET), food-compatible, light, high resistance to chemicals, largely diffusion-proof, temperature-resistant from -40 to +60°C. 1 PET narrow-neck bottles, crystal clear With blue tamper-evident closure made of polypropylene Volume ml 100 200 250 500 1000 Outer Ø mm 48 55 63 80 90 Outer height mm 94 125 131 180 250 Cap Ø mm 28 28 28 28 28 Order No. 22 48 17001 22 48 17002 22 48 17003 22 48 17005 22 48 17010 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. WWXKS002 co d e b e w 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 71 Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Bottles Wide-neck bottles, crystal clear With white polypropylene closure 1 1 2 co d e b e w WWMUE003 Volume ml 100 250 500 10001) 2000 2500 3000 Outer Ø mm 74 85 88 85 133 135 145 Outer height mm 37 75 107 175 180 210 210 Cap Ø mm 65 65 74 78 95 95 95 Order No. 22 48 18001 22 48 18002 22 48 18005 10 48 18011 22 48 18020 22 48 18025 22 48 18030 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) octagonal 2 PET narrow-neck bottles, amber Transparent, with black closure Volume ml 100 250 500 1000 Outer Ø mm 45 67 82 88 Outer height mm 110 135 146 222 Cap Ø mm 22 22 28 28 Order No. 22 48 19001 22 48 19002 22 48 19005 22 48 19010 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Bottles for Water Sampling, PP, ISOLAB Manufactured from polypropylene for taking, transporting and storing of water samples for microbiological analysis. They can be used for all analysis where a sterile sample is required. Bottles are manufactured at aseptically sterile production halls and then sent to gamma sterilisation. Such informations as lot number, production and expiry dates etc are indi- cated on the packing. Square bottle form offers easy handling and optimum space saving solutions. GL 50 wide bottle neck provides easy filling and pouring. Cap with large ridges with increased grip featured with self lock and internal security ring. Cap inner design ensures hermetical and leak-proof closure. Caps are made of polyethylene. Embossed volume graduations on wall side offer better liquid level viewing. Alternative 2 bottles: • Without sodium thiosulfate • With sodium thiosulfate Bottles with sodium thiosulfate (20 mg/lt – according to ISO/FIS 19458/2006 standard) are ideal for water analysis where chlorine may modify the composition of the sample. Alternative 2 packing: • ”Bulk packed“, where bottles are packed as a group in a box. • ”Single packed“, where bottles are first individually packed in P.E bags and then re- packed in a box. Alternative 2 colors: • Clear bottles • Amber bottles Sterile, bulk packed Volume ml 125 250 500 1000 Volume ml 125 250 500 1000 Dimensions mm PU pc/Pack 57×57×90 60×60×115 70×70×145 90×90×175 180 108 84 30 clear, without sodium thiosulfate Order No. 10 66 40101 10 66 40102 10 66 40103 10 66 40104 clear, with sodium thiosulfate Order No. 10 66 40111 10 66 40112 10 66 40113 10 66 40114 Sterile, single packed Dimensions mm PU pc/Pack 57×57×90 60×60×115 70×70×145 90×90×175 130 72 42 22 clear, without sodium thiosulfate Order No. 10 66 40301 10 66 40302 10 66 40303 10 66 40304 clear, with sodium thiosulfate Order No. 10 66 40311 10 66 40312 10 66 40313 10 66 40314 amber, without sodium thiosulfate Order No. 10 66 40201 10 66 40202 10 66 40203 10 66 40204 amber, without sodium thiosulfate Order No. 10 66 40401 10 66 40402 10 66 40403 10 66 40404 amber, with sodium thiosulfate Order No. 10 66 40211 10 66 40212 10 66 40213 10 66 40214 amber, with sodium thiosulfate Order No. 10 66 40411 10 66 40412 10 66 40413 10 66 40414 72

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWR4Q015 Bottles Aluminium Bottles and Boxes, BÜRKLE Particularly suitable for storage, food, transport or shipment of substances and reference samples that must be free from all contamination. Additional features: can be emptied completely, odorless, impermeable to light, corrosion-resistant. With UN approval for 60 to 5600 ml. Article Bottle Bottle Bottle Bottle Bottle Bottle Bottle Bottle Volume ml 38 60 120 300 600 1200 3000 5600 Bottle Ø mm 35 40 57 57 74 88 161 161 Height mm 70 88 97 160 192 248 215 340 Order No. 38 04 03270 38 04 03271 38 04 03272 38 04 03273 38 04 03274 38 04 03275 10 04 53276 10 04 53277 behroplast® Safety Nets, Behr behroplast® safety nets from polyethylene for covering glass containers. Cut to size with scissors. Package contains 5 m. co d e b e w WWXKS054 Colour red blue yellow green yellow red for Ø mm 6 – 15 12 – 25 20 – 40 30 – 60 50 – 100 90 – 200 Order No. 10 48 93723 10 48 93724 10 48 93725 10 48 93726 10 48 93727 10 48 93728 Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles Wash Bottles, IDL Narrow-neck wash bottle LDPE, round, ecru, leak-proof and with added spray cap LDPE, riser tube ecru. Volume ml Cap Ø mm 100 200 250 500 1000 2000 18 18 25 25 28 28 Thread O.D. mm 18 18 25 25 28 28 Height mm 105 133 140 177 223.5 264 Order No. 10 00 80100 10 00 80200 10 00 80250 10 00 80500 10 00 81000 10 00 82000 co d e b e w WW7R3319 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 73

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWRJN030 co d e b e w WWRJN031 co d e b e w WW2NY017 1 74 Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles Wash Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottle and riser tube made of low-density polyethylene with screw cap and tube holder made of polypropylene. Leak-proof riser tube welded to closure. Cap Ø mm 24 24 28 38 – 430 Order No. 22 87 24013 22 87 24014 22 87 24015 22 87 24016 PU pc/Pack 6 6 6 4 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Wide-Mouth Unitary™ Wash Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of low-density polyethylene with a polypropylene screw closure for fast, clean and easy filling and dispensing of liquids. Made in one piece. Replaceable tip. Leak-proof closure. Volume ml 125 250 500 1000 Volume ml 125 250 500 750 1000 Cap Ø mm 24 38 38 38 43 Order No. 22 87 24021 22 87 24022 22 87 24023 22 87 24024 22 87 24025 PU pc/Pack 6 4 4 4 2 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Colored Wash Bottles, neoLab® Wash bottles made of polyethylene, cylindrical form, good standing stability, colored, complete with likewise colored spray insert for positive identification without mix-ups. Volume ml 500 500 Ø mm 75 75 Colour red blue Order No. 22 01 21074 22 01 21077 Washing Bottles, VITLAB 1 Wash bottles, PE-LD/PP Narrow-/wide-mouth bottles made of PE-LD, transparent. Screw cap and spray tube from PP. Precise spray jet and optimised medium backflow through the continuous and finely drawn tip of the spray tube. Version Thread GL Order No. Volume Material PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PP PP PP PP PP PP Narrow-mouth 18 Narrow-mouth 18 Narrow-mouth 25 Narrow-mouth 25 Narrow-mouth 32 45 Wide-mouth 45 Wide-mouth Wide-mouth 63 Narrow-mouth 25 Narrow-mouth 25 Narrow-mouth 32 45 Wide-mouth 45 Wide-mouth Wide-mouth 63 10 85 31945 10 85 31946 10 85 31949 10 85 31950 10 85 31951 10 85 31937 10 85 31939 10 85 31941 10 85 30949 10 85 30950 10 85 30951 10 85 30937 10 85 30939 10 85 30941 PU pc/Pack 24 24 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 ml 50 100 250 500 1000 250 500 1000 250 500 1000 250 500 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles 2 Wash bottles with imprint, PE-LD/PP Narrow-/ wide-mouth bottles made of PE-LD, transparent. Screw cap and spray tube from PP. Imprinted with ”Distilled Water“ in German, English, French and and Spanish. Precise spray jet and optimised medium backflow through the continuous and finely drawn tip of the spray tube. Upon request, also with other imprints for non-hazardous media according to the REACh Directive. Volume Thread GL Order No. Material Version ml 250 500 1000 250 500 1000 PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD PE-LD Narrow-mouth 25 Narrow-mouth 25 Narrow-mouth 32 45 Wide-mouth 45 Wide-mouth Wide-mouth 63 10 85 31331 10 85 31332 10 85 31333 10 85 31351 10 85 31352 10 85 31353 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 Accessories Screw cap and spray tube with drawn-out tip, made of PP. Precise spray jet and opti- mised medium backflow through the continuous and finely drawn tip of the spray tube. Order No. Article 2 Screw caps with dispensing tube, PP, GL 18 Screw caps with dispensing tube, PP, GL 25 Screw caps with dispensing tube, PP, GL 32 Screw caps with dispensing tube, PP, GL 45 Screw caps with dispensing tube, PP, GL 63 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 24 12 12 12 12 10 85 33300 10 85 33301 10 85 33302 10 85 33303 10 85 33304 Wash Bottles, Coloured, PE-LD/PP, VITLAB Narrow-mouth bottles, PE-LD, four different colours Available in four different colours to facilitate ready identification. Screw cap and spray tube from PP. Precise spray jet and optimised medium backflow through the continuous and finely drawn tip of the spray tube. Volume ml 250 250 250 250 500 500 500 500 1000 1000 1000 1000 Colour Thread GL red green yellow blue red green yellow blue red green yellow blue 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 32 32 32 32 Height w/o wash-bottle cap mm 135 135 135 135 180 180 180 180 221 221 221 221 Ø mm 65 65 65 65 74 74 74 74 92 92 92 92 Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 85 32603 10 85 32605 10 85 32606 10 85 32608 10 85 32703 10 85 32705 10 85 32706 10 85 32708 10 85 32803 10 85 32805 10 85 32806 10 85 32808 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Article Set of coloured wash bottles Vol. ml 500 25 Set: red, green, yellow, Thread GL H w/o wash-bottle cap mm 180 Ø mm 74 Order No. 10 85 32711 Set: red, green, yellow, 1000 32 221 92 10 85 32811 blue blue We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 75

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles Safety Wash Bottles, VITLAB Safety wash bottles with VENT-CAP, narrow-mouth Bottles made from PE-LD (or PP for Acetone and MEK), spray tube from PP. With coloured VENT-CAP which supports easy visual identification of the media. More safety due to the durable safety imprint in accordance to Directive (EC) No. 1272/2008 (GHS), as well as with all important information: • Material name in German, English, French and Spanish • Chemical formula, CAS No., hazard pictogram, signal word • Risk phrases (H phrases), safety phrases (P phrases), as well as NFPA Code Precise spray jet and optimised medium backflow through the continuous and finely drawn tip of the spray tube. Practically no leakage or dripping with the VENT-CAP, the design of which prevents almost all static overpressure. Imprint Volume ml Acetone 250 Acetone 500 Acetone 1000 Acetonitrile 500 Distilled water 250 Distilled water 500 Distilled water 1000 Ethanol 250 Ethanol 500 Ethanol 1000 Ethyl acetate 250 Ethyl acetate 500 Ethyl acetate 1000 Acetic acid 500 Heptane 500 500 i-Hexane 250 Isopropanol 500 Isopropanol 1000 Isopropanol Methanol 250 Methanol 500 Methanol 1000 Methylene chloride 500 Methyl ethyl ketone 500 N,N-Dimethylformamide 500 Pentane 500 Tetrahydrofurane (THF) 500 Toluene 500 Xylene 500 Colour VENT- CAP red red red red blue blue red orange orange red red red red red red red yellow yellow red green green red transp. red red red red red red Order No. 22 85 31829 22 85 32829 10 85 33829 22 85 32969 22 85 31819 22 85 32819 10 85 33819 22 85 31869 22 85 32869 10 85 33869 22 85 31859 22 85 32859 10 85 33859 22 85 32979 22 85 32899 22 85 32909 22 85 31849 22 85 32849 10 85 33849 22 85 31839 22 85 32839 10 85 33839 22 85 32879 22 85 32989 22 85 32889 10 85 33959 22 85 32939 22 85 32949 22 85 32959 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. VENT-CAP wash bottle caps, PP Screw cap and spray tube made of PP. Practically no leakage or dripping with the VENT-CAP screw cap, the design of which prevents almost all static overpressure. Precise spray jet and optimised medium backflow through the continuous and finely drawn tip of the spray tube. for bottle volume ml 250 250 250 250 250 500 500 500 500 500 500 1000 Thread GL Colour Order No. 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 32 red blue green orange yellow transp. red blue green orange yellow red 10 85 34111 10 85 34121 10 85 34131 10 85 34141 10 85 34151 10 85 35102 10 85 35112 10 85 34122 10 85 34132 10 85 34142 10 85 34152 10 85 34213 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 76 Continued on next page ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible.

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles Safety wash bottles with VENT-CAP, wide-mouth Bottles made from PE-LD (or PP for Acetone and MEK), spray tube from PP. With coloured VENT-CAP which supports easy visual identification of the media. More safety due to the durable safety imprint in accordance to Directive (EC) No. 1272/2008 (GHS), as well as with all important information: • Material name in German, English, French and Spanish • Chemical formula, CAS No, hazard pictogram, signal word • Risk Phrases (H phrases), safety phrases (P phrases), as well as NFPA Code Precise spray jet and optimised medium backflow through the continuous and finely drawn tip of the spray tube. Practically no leakage or dripping with the VENT-CAP, the design of which prevents almost all static overpressure. Imprint Volume ml Acetone 250 Acetone 500 Acetone 1000 Acetonitrile 500 Distilled water 250 Distilled water 500 Distilled water 1000 Ethanol 250 Ethanol 500 Ethanol 1000 Ethyl acetate 250 Ethyl acetate 500 Ethyl acetate 1000 Acetic acid 500 Heptane 500 500 i-Hexane 250 Isopropanol 500 Isopropanol 1000 Isopropanol Methanol 250 Methanol 500 Methanol 1000 Methylene chloride 500 Methyl ethyl ketone 500 N,N-Dimethylformamide 500 Pentane 500 Tetrahydrofurane (THF) 500 Toluene 500 Xylene 500 Colour VENT- CAP red red red red blue blue red orange orange red red red red red red red yellow yellow red green green red transp. red red red red red red Order No. 10 85 31829 10 85 32829 10 85 33828 10 85 32969 10 85 31819 10 85 32819 10 85 33818 10 85 31869 10 85 32869 10 85 33868 10 85 31859 10 85 32859 10 85 33858 10 85 32979 10 85 32909 10 85 32899 10 85 31849 10 85 32849 10 85 33848 10 85 31839 10 85 32839 10 85 33838 10 85 32879 10 85 32989 10 85 32889 10 85 31959 10 85 32939 10 85 32949 10 85 32959 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. VENT-CAP wash bottle caps, PP Screw cap and spray tube made of PP. Practically no leakage or dripping with the VENT-CAP screw cap, the design of which prevents almost all static overpressure. Precise spray jet and optimised medium backflow through the continuous and finely drawn tip of the spray tube. for bottle volume ml 250 250 250 250 250 500 500 500 500 500 500 1000 Thread GL Colour Order No. 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 63 red blue green orange yellow transp. red blue green orange yellow red 10 85 34311 10 85 34321 10 85 34331 10 85 34341 10 85 34351 10 85 34302 10 85 34312 10 85 34322 10 85 34332 10 85 34342 10 85 34352 10 85 34413 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 77

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles Wash Bottles, Wide Neck, KAUTEX Wide neck wash bottles made of LDPE, printed with name of contents, round, nat- ural colored, spill-proof, complete with LDPE squirt closure, natural colored riser tube . Name of contents printed in German, English and French. Wear-proof inks. Contents are emptied without residue by the adjustable squirt tube, also when used up- side down. Safety: With the squirt tube pulled up above the level of the contents, no liquid will escape if the temperature fluctuates. Outlet tip with transport guard. Uses: • dosed application • dosed dispensing ACETON, ACETONE, ACÉTONE, cap red Vol. ml 250 500 Ø mm 64 77 Thread O.D. mm 40 50 Height mm 120 154 Order No. 22 52 70020 22 52 70025 PU pc/Pack 10 10 ETHANOL, ETHANOL, ÉTHANOL, cap green Vol. ml 250 500 Ø mm 64 77 Thread O.D. mm 40 50 Height mm 120 154 Order No. 22 52 70016 22 52 70021 PU pc/Pack 10 10 ISOPROPANOL, ISOPROPANOL, ISOPROPANOL, cap yellow Vol. ml 250 500 Ø mm 64 77 Thread O.D. mm 40 50 Height mm 120 154 Order No. 22 52 70017 22 52 70022 PU pc/Pack 10 10 METHANOL, METHANOL, MÉTHANOL, cap orange colored Vol. ml 250 500 Ø mm 64 77 Thread O.D. mm 40 50 Height mm 120 154 Order No. 22 52 70018 22 52 70023 PU pc/Pack 10 10 DESTILLIERTES WASSER, DISTILLED WATER, EAU DISTILÉE, cap blue Vol. ml 250 500 Ø mm 64 77 Thread O.D. mm 40 50 Height mm 120 154 Order No. 22 52 70019 22 52 70024 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Bottles with Sprayer, neoLab® co d e b e w WW2NY193 WW2NY189 1 co d e b e w 78 Light vials with protective cap made of PS and riser tube made of HDPE. Perfect in order to spray small liquid amounts consistently and fine. Pump atomiser with closure DIN 18. Spray angle 35 degree, spray volume 0.05 ml with each pumping process. Order No. Colour Volume ml 10 20 30 50 100 amber amber amber amber amber 12 01 17245 12 01 17246 12 01 17247 12 01 17248 12 01 17249 Sprayers, neoLab® Universal fine-spray atomizer for TLC, lacquering and atomizing spray reagents. Simply fill the container and screw on the cartridge. Article 1 Sprayer Storage vessel made of glass, 150 ml capacity Order No. 85 01 25011 85 01 25012

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles Spray Bottles, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® 1 Spray bottles Unpressurised LDPE bottle with durable hand pump. Applications: in industry, lab, pro- duction, leisure time, household. Suitable for herbicides/pesticides and cleaning agents. • Parts with media contact made of PP, PE and stainless steel • Nozzle diameter 0.6 mm, nozzle infinitely adjustable • Spray volume per stroke: 1.2 ml ± 0.1 Article Spray bottle, 250 ml Spray bottle, 500 ml Spray bottle, 1000 ml Order No. 27 05 50250 27 05 50500 27 05 51000 co d e b e w WWR4Q009 2 Pressure atomizer and accessories The pressure atomizer incorporates a plunger pump which generates an operating pres- sure of about 4 bar. Spraying is subsequently possible without pumping, just by pressing a button. The standard pressure atomizer with short spray nozzle can be additionally supplied with the 30 cm long spraying lance. Parts coming in contact with the contents are PE/PP and FKM, PA fiberglass reinforced, V2A, HDPE. Article Pressure sprayer, 1500 ml Spray lance, 30 cm long Order No. 27 05 52000 27 05 52010 3 Spray bottle Turn ‚n‘ Spray No so with our overhead spray bottle Turn‘n‘Spray. The overhead spray bottle Turn‘n‘Spray features a special technology that allows you to spray from any position. That means you can spray practically and conveniently from any direction. The high-quality, refillable quality spray bottle can be used again and again. • Uninterrupted spraying, even over your head • Parts in contact with media made of PP, PE, silicon and stainless steel • Nozzle diameter 0.6 mm, nozzle is continuously adjustable • Amount sprayed per stroke: 1.2 ml ± 0.1 Contents ml 250 500 1000 Overall height mm 220 240 295 Neck inner Ø mm 18 18 17.5 Order No. 10 04 50251 10 04 50501 10 04 51001 4 Pressure Sprayer Turn‘n‘Spray The practical 360° spray function allows you to spray overhead with the Turn‘n‘Spray pressure sprayer. This means that even hard-to-reach areas can be accessed without any problems. The sprayer can be used in many ways, e.g. for disinfecting and cleaning or for spraying pesticides/herbicides. • Parts with media contact made of HDPE, PP, FKM, V4A • Overhead spray function • Safety valve for overpressure compensation, max. 4 bar • Adjustable spray jet, nozzle diameter 0.8 mm • Capacity 1.5 litres • Liquid temperature range: 0 – 30°C • Extension for 30 cm spray lance available as an accessory Article Pressure sprayer Turn‘n‘Spray, 1500 ml Order No. 10 04 59012 5 Pressure sprayer food The pressure sprayer Food has a transparent window for checking the level at a glance. With rubberised foot ring for safe placement of the bottle. Designed specifically for use in the food industry, the food-safe spray bottle is suitable for spraying various media such as oils, fats, or flavouring substances. Also ideal for spraying cleaning or disinfection agents. • Parts with media contact made of HDPE, PP, VMQ, V2A • Safety valve for overpressure compensation, max. 3 bar • Adjustable spray jet, nozzle diameter 0.8 mm • Capacity 1.2 litres • Liquid temperature range: 0 – 30°C Article Pressure sprayer Food, 1200 ml Order No. 10 04 59013 1 2 3 4 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 79

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Dropping Bottles Dispensing Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL 1 Bottles made of low-density polyethylene with dropping closure and cap made of polypropylene. Leak-proof. Cap Ø mm 20 20 20 24 24 Order No. 22 87 24111 22 87 24112 22 87 24113 22 87 24114 22 87 24115 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 6 Volume ml 15 30 60 125 250 Volume ml 125 250 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 Bottles made of polypropylene copolymer with dropping closure and cap made of blue polypropylene. Autoclavable when filled if tip open. Leak-proof. Cap Ø mm 24 24 Order No. 22 87 24201 22 87 24202 PU pc/Pack 6 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 Dispensing bottle made of PTFE FEP with dropping closure and cap made of Tefzel ETFE. Suitable for dropping almost all chemicals. Adherent closing cap. Autoclavable / PTFE FEP. Volume ml 30 Order No. 10 87 24301 Dispensing Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of LDPE with cap. Leak-proof. NALGENE dispensing bottles enable exact, reliable and reproducible dispensing of bio- logical reagents. They are an excellent alternative to pipettes and other dispensing equip- ment. Vol. Order No. Colour cap ml 4 8 15 4 8 15 4 8 15 15 Ø mm 19.7 19.7 24.5 19.7 19.7 24.5 19.7 19.7 24.5 24.5 Height mm 41.3 52.1 62.1 41.3 52.1 62.1 41.3 52.1 62.1 62.1 natural natural natural white white white natural natural natural white white white white white white white colored colored colored colored 22 87 09125 22 87 09025 22 87 09050 22 87 19125 22 87 19025 22 87 19050 22 87 29125 22 87 29025 22 87 29050 22 87 39050 Dropping Bottles made of Soda-Lime Glass, IDL Conical shoulder bottles made of clear or amber glass, with replaceable standard ground pipette, complete with rubber teat. Material Clear glass Clear glass Amber glass Amber glass Volume ml 50 100 50 100 Order No. 12 00 27017 12 00 27024 12 00 70176 12 00 70246 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 co d e b e w WWRJN034 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWRJN252 co d e b e w WW7R3240 80

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Dropping Bottles Dropping Bottles, IDL Dropping bottles with flat-head stopper co d e b e w WW7R3001 Volume ml 50 100 Material Order No. Clear glass Clear glass 12 00 31705 12 00 31708 Volume ml 50 100 Material Order No. Amber glass Amber glass 12 00 31805 12 00 31808 Dropping Bottles, neoLab® Small dropping bottles, amber glass. Complete with dropping pipette, screw cap and rubber teat. Article Dropping bottle, amber Dropping bottle, amber Dropping bottle, amber Dropping bottle, amber Dropping bottle, amber Volume ml 10 20 30 50 100 Order No. 12 01 17240 12 01 17241 12 01 17242 12 01 17243 12 01 17244 co d e b e w WW2NY005 Carboys, Rectangular Carboys Storage Bottles, BÜRKLE Heavy-walled, robust model with stable carrying handle for safe transport and storage. With blue printed-on liter graduations. The ventilating valve (accessory) allows air to enter the container, in order to prevent the formation of vacuum in it when draining liquid from it. Also other accessories with a 3/4 ″ inner thread/cap nut can be connected to the thread connector. Storage bottles with threaded connector for stopcock co d e b e w WWR4Q035 Carry-handles Order No. Volume l 5 10 25 60 Ø mm 167 206 278 346 Height mm 330 427 580 830 Opening Ø mm 50 50 50 50 1 1 2 2 Accessories Article StopCock spigot Compact spigot Ball valve NW 12 with angled outlet Aearating/deaerating closure for 5 to 60 l bottles Sealing cap 3/4 ″ for threaded socket on the bottom 22 05 40205 22 05 40210 22 05 40225 22 05 40260 Order No. 22 05 30000 10 04 55301 22 05 50001 22 05 41252 22 05 55014 Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 81

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Carboys, Rectangular Carboys Carboys, KAUTEX Carboys made of PE-HD, natural colored. With printed blue volume scale, with and without stopcock connection. Carboys without stopcock connection Vol. l 5 10 25 60 Body Ø mm 167 206 278 346 Neck I.D. mm 50 50 50 50 Height w/o closure mm 330 427 580 830 Carboys with stopcock connection Vol. l 5 10 25 60 Body Ø mm 167 206 278 346 Neck I.D. mm 50 50 50 50 Height w/o closure mm 330 427 580 830 4 Accessories Article 1 Stopcock made of PE-HD, blue 2 Dummy stopper made of PE-HD 3 Stopcock made of PP, blue 4 Adapter for stopcock Wght g 350 495 1250 2500 Wght g 350 495 1250 2500 Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 84131 22 52 84133 22 52 84135 22 52 84136 11 6 5 2 Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 84137 22 52 84132 22 52 84138 22 52 84139 11 6 5 2 Order No. 22 52 76459 22 52 70625 22 52 83794 22 52 83793 Carboys, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Carboy for vacuum applications. Ideal for large waste storage facilities and automatic vacuum collection systems. Economical alternative to stainless steel and glass-fiber rein- forced containers. The plastic is suited for use with foodstuffs, biologically tested to be in compliance with USP Class VI and non-cytotoxic. Not suited for use with positive pressure. Autoclavable and leakproof. Article Carboy PP 20 liter Carboy PP 10 liter Order No. 22 87 22260 22 87 22261 Autoclavable Carboys with Handles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Bottles made of polypropylene with white polypropylene screw closure, TPE seal. Leak-proof. Not recommended for use with hazardous substances. Nominal volume l 10 20 50 Volume approx. l 12 22.5 54 Cap Ø mm 83 83 83 Order No. 22 87 22501 22 87 22502 22 87 22503 3 1 2 co d e b e w WWRJN251 co d e b e w WWRJN050 WWRJN054 5 co d e b e w 82 Carboy Accessories, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL 5 Filling and venting closures Non-sterile, made of polypropylene with TPE seal, TPE caps as well as 2× Nalgene® 550 platinum-hardened silicone tubes (insind and outside). Cap Ø mm 53 83 83 Tubing connectors 3 3 3 Outer Ø mm 6 6 12 Order No. 22 87 21618 22 87 21619 22 87 21620 Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories 6 co d e b e w WWEQ2041 Carboys, Rectangular Carboys Tube fitting Article Order No. 6 Tube fitting with tube connector and thread made of polypropylene with silicone intermediate seal and acetate union nut for screw 22 87 21621 connections or plastic containers for subsequent installation (16 mm bore required). Screwed cap not comprised in the delivery of the retrofit kit. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 2 Aspirator Bottles, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL DURAN®aspirator bottles, neck with DIN thread GL 45, tubulature GL 32, complete with screw cap. silicone gasket, draincock and PTFE spindle. ISO 4796-3. DURAN® aspirator bottles Volume ml 1000 2000 5000 10000 Outer Ø mm 101 136 182 230 Height mm 225 260 330 410 Order No. 11 24 70354 11 24 70363 11 24 70373 11 24 70386 Accessories (replacement Parts) Article Draincock for 1- and 2-l bottle Draincock for 5- and 10-l bottle Screw cap, GL 32 with 20 mm bore Silicone seal for 1- and 2-liter bottle Silicone seal for 5- and 10-liter bottle Jars Order No. 11 24 14703 11 24 14704 13 29 22708 13 29 23610 13 29 23612 PU pc/Pack 1 1 10 10 10 Straight-Side Wide-Mouth Jars, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Wide-mouth jars, from size 125 ml with depression in the polypropylene screw closures for stacking. Leak-proof. Jars made of polycarbonate, transparent, autoclavable co d e b e w WWRJN036 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Jars made of polymethylpentene, transparent, autoclavable ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Jars made of polypropylene, autoclavable Volume ml 15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Volume ml 60 125 250 500 1000 Volume ml 15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 Cap Ø mm 38 43 53 70 70 120 120 Order No. 22 87 21160 22 87 21161 22 87 21162 22 87 21163 22 87 21164 22 87 21165 22 87 21166 PU pc/Pack 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Cap Ø mm 53 70 70 120 120 Order No. 22 87 21172 22 87 21173 22 87 21174 22 87 21175 22 87 21176 PU pc/Pack 4 4 4 4 4 Cap Ø mm 38 43 53 70 70 120 120 Order No. 22 87 21180 22 87 21181 22 87 21182 22 87 21183 22 87 21184 22 87 21185 22 87 21186 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 83

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WW2NY306 Jars HDPE Jars with Screw Cap, neoLab® Round jars made of HDPE, natural, with white screw cap of PP with PE foam inlay. Volume ml 100 250 500 750 1000 Height mm 72.0 87.5 84.0 119.0 154.0 Ø mm 50.0 70.0 99.8 99.8 99.8 Order No. 22 01 32118 22 01 32119 22 01 32120 22 01 32121 22 01 32122 Rectangle Boxes, neoLab® co d e b e w WW2NY025 Rectangular boxes made of crystal-clear polystyrene with tight-closing cover, temper- ature-resistant from -40 to +70°C, for storing samples. Inner dimensions L × W × H mm Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 1 23 01 21520 23 01 21521 23 01 21522 23 01 21523 23 01 21524 23 01 21526 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Round Boxes, Clear, neoLab® 1 With tight-closing sleeve cover Round boxes made of crystal-clear polystyrene with sleeve cover, temperature-resist- ant from -40 to +75°C, for storing samples. I.D. mm Order No. Order No. I.H. mm I.H. mm I.D. mm 49 36 23 01 21504 69 22 23 01 21505 69 40 23 01 21506 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Screw lid jars made of polystyrene for the clear storage of small parts or powdery me- dia. Temperature-resistance: -40°C to +75°C Order No. Order No. Ø Ø H mm mm H mm mm 47 30 10 01 26980 47 40 10 01 26981 47 50 10 01 26982 47 70 10 01 26983 47 90 10 01 26984 47 110 10 01 26985 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 Screw Cap Jars, neoLab® WW2NY020 3 Jars with screw closures, tall form These white polypropylene jars come with tight-closing, red screw closures. Ideal for sample packing or storing liquids or solids, small items, etc. Autoclavable to 121°C. Volume ml 25 60 90 125 250 375 500 625 1000 1250 Height mm 41 56 52 67 78 97 91 114 128 159 Ø mm 31 42 53 53 69 76 90 90 106 106 Order No. 22 01 22177 22 01 22077 22 01 22178 22 01 22078 22 01 22079 22 01 22179 22 01 22180 22 01 22181 22 01 22182 22 01 22183 PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 15 9 9 9 3 3 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Continued on next page 50 × 30 × 16 50 × 30 × 25 57 × 47 × 28 60 × 50 × 25 70 × 15 × 16 325 × 215 × 44 35 13 23 01 21500 34 43 23 01 21501 36 29 23 01 21502 49 16 23 01 21503 2 With screw cap 1 co d e b e w WW2NY024 2 84 co d e b e w 3

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories 4 Jars Screw cap with tamper-evident closure Jars made of HDPE with screwable originality cap, approved as harmless by food regulations. With additional transparent lid. Especially suitable for solid substances and pastes. Material: HDPE UN-approval: packing group I, II und III Volume ml 250 500 780 1000 Height mm 70 103 141 166 Ø mm 99 99 99 99 Order No. 22 01 22060 22 01 22061 22 01 22062 22 01 22063 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 5 Mutipurpose beakers with screw-caps Multi Purpose beakers with screw-caps made of Polypropylene (PP) or polystyrene (PS). For sampling, transport and storage of solid, pasty and liquid samples. • leakproof • with red screw-cap • supplied in non-sterile or sterile, individually packed Volume ml 30 30 60 60 120 120 200 200 200 Material sterile PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PS no yes / single packed no yes / single packed no yes / single packed no yes / single packed yes / single packed labeling area/ graduation no no yes yes yes yes no no no Order No. 10 01 20160 10 01 20161 10 01 20162 10 01 20163 10 01 20164 10 01 20165 10 01 20166 10 01 20167 10 01 20168 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 600 500 500 250 200 150 150 4 5 Ointment Jars PP, Autoclavable, LAT Practical small jars made of PP, autoclavable to up to 121°C. Perfectly suited for applica- tions in the pharmaceutical, chemical and cosmetics sector as well as in drugstores. co d e b e w WWW4U109 Article Ointment jars 10 g / 12 ml Ointment jars 20 g / 25 ml Ointment jars 30 g / 35 ml Ointment jars 50 g / 60 ml Ointment jars 100 g / 125 ml Ointment jars 250 g / 310 ml Ointment jars 500 g / 625 ml Ointment jars 1000 g / 1250 ml Order No. 10 20 12819 10 20 15819 10 20 15919 10 20 10819 10 20 12519 10 20 11019 10 20 12619 10 20 12509 PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 25 9 1 1 Please contact us to ask about conditions for bulk volumes. Dressing Jar with Lid, BOCHEM Lid with handle, stackable. Material 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel Height mm 80 130 130 165 180 Ø mm 102 102 124 124 180 Order No. 10 05 08620 10 05 08621 10 05 08622 10 05 08623 10 05 08624 co d e b e w WWQ7J074 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 85

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWEQ2157 5 6 4 3 1 2 Jars Jars with Lid, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Jars with shoulder (DIN 12340) or without shoulder and overlapping, loose lid with- out knob. Height mm 40 50 60 80 Ø mm 60 80 100 150 Version Order No. without fold1) without fold1) without fold1) without fold1) 12 24 20834 12 24 20841 12 24 20845 12 24 20857 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 Vol. ml 75 175 325 1000 1) Non-DIN size. Canisters Jerrycan Range, KAUTEX Industrial standard jerrycans made of HDPE, natural colored or blue, without clo- sure. Jerrycans 2.5, 3, 5, 10 to 30 l with UN approval. Various types of closure available in addition. Suitable safety funnels made from stainless steel see page 90. Industrial jerrycan, natural colored Vol. l 2 2.5 3 5 6 8 10 20 30 Neck I.D. mm 34.5 34.5 34.5 40.5 34.5 34.5 40.5 48.5 48.5 Thread O.D. mm 45 45 45 50 45 45 50 60 60 L × W × H mm 145×109×196 153×115×208 153×115×240 190×145×251 192×145×294 230×190×270 230×190×310 290×246×385 320×284×435 Vol. l Industrial jerrycan, blue Thread O.D. mm 60 60 60 Neck I.D. mm 48.5 48.5 48.5 20 25 30 L × W × H mm 290×246×385 290×246×450 320×284×435 Wght g 110 125 140 250 265 320 450 950 1250 Wght g 950 1100 1250 Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 52 75939 10 52 75966 22 52 96404 22 52 95815 10 52 75937 10 52 70289 22 52 90643 10 52 76138 10 52 75981 25 25 25 16 16 10 10 6 6 Order No. PU pc/Pack 22 52 96232 22 52 95776 22 52 95785 6 6 6 1 Screw closures made of HDPE, black, with tear-off ring and vent Order No. Order No. for canister vol. l 2 + 2.5 + 3 + 6 + 8 5 + 10 for canister vol. l 2 + 2.5 + 3 + 6 + 8 5 + 10 for canister vol. l 2 + 2.5 + 3 + 6 + 8 5 + 10 for canister vol. l 2 + 2.5 + 3 + 6 + 8 5 + 10 for canister vol. l 20 + 25 + 30 for canister vol. l 20 + 25 + 30 for canister vol. l 20 + 25 + 30 for canister vol. l 20 + 25 + 30 22 52 95898 Order No. 22 52 90477 Order No. 22 52 90472 Order No. 22 52 90480 10 52 75883 22 52 95912 22 52 97893 22 52 95946 22 52 97890 22 52 95901 22 52 95872 22 52 90386 2 Screw closures made of HDPE, black, without tear-off ring Order No. 3 Screw closures made of HDPE, red, without tear-off ring Order No. 4 Screw closures made of HDPE, natural, with stopcock, red Order No. 86 Continued on next page

Canisters Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories 5 Screw closures made of HDPE, white, with dispensing pump for canister vol. l for canister vol. l Order No. 2 + 2.5 + 3 + 6 + 8 5 + 10 20 + 25 + 30 22 52 96921 22 52 90568 22 52 83884 25 30 6 Canister wrench HDPE, for opening and closing Order No. for canister vol. l for canister vol. l 2 + 2.5 + 3 + 6 + 8 22 52 84211 5 + 10 + 20 + 25 + 30 22 52 90465 Order No. 22 52 83885 22 52 83886 Order No. Safety Carboys, behroplast®, Behr White carboy made of polyethylene, with red screw closure For transport and storage of hazardous goods, acc. to German hazardous materials and goods regulations. Suitable for hazardous goods of packing groups II and III. With stamped UN registration number and RAL quality seal for plastic packaging for hazardous goods. Nominal capacity Order No. l 5 10 20 25 30 60 Weight approx. g 280 420 1000 1100 1300 2100 22 48 13005 22 48 13010 22 48 13020 22 48 13025 22 48 13030 22 48 13060 co d e b e w WWXKS028 Canisters, BÜRKLE 7 Wide-neck canister made of HDPE, transparent With wide opening for filling (88 mm dia.) and integral carrying hood. The sizes 5 l and 10 l have an additional vent hole (18 mm dia.) with a small pouring spout. co d e b e w WWR4Q001 Volume l 5 10 22 30 Outer dimensions W × D × H mm Carry- handles 130×290×280 137×310×400 165×365×485 240×365×485 1 1 1 1 Version with threaded connection Order No. 22 05 31101 22 05 31102 22 05 31103 22 05 31104 without threaded connection Order No. 22 05 31201 22 05 31202 22 05 31203 22 05 31204 Accessories Article StopCock spigot Compact spigot Liter scale for 5 l canister, smallest increment 250 ml Liter scale for 10 l canister, smallest increment 250 ml Liter scale for 20 l canister, smallest increment 250 ml Liter scale for 30 l canister, smallest increment 250 ml Order No. 22 05 30000 10 04 55301 22 05 31301 22 05 31302 22 05 31303 22 05 31304 7 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 87

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories co d e b e w WWR4Q036 Canisters Canisters, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® The compact jerrycan is ideal as a space-saving canister with its width of 6.5 cm or 12.5 cm. Different liquids can be stored and decanted in a small space. The compact jerrycan can also be stored lying on its side e.g. in a refrigerator. It is very stable due to ribbed structure and thick sides. Using the support stand (only for 5 l canister) for two or three canisters, any number of canisters can safely be placed in the open. The compact jerrycan can also be used as a settling canister. 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWR4Q057 5 88 6 1 Compact jerrycans PP • 5 l or 10 l • With or without threaded connector 3/4 ″ • PP, transparent • With tamper-proof closure • Canister without stopcock autoclavable • With moulded, indestructible litre graduation • Canister support made of aluminium for secure stand as accessory (only for 5 l canister) • Spigot StopCock with rotatable discharge angle and Compact spigot, which fits canis- ters equipped with glands with threads 3/4”, available as accessory Article Order No. Compact jerrycan without threaded socket, 5 l 22 05 32201 Compact jerrycan without threaded socket, 10 l 10 04 53511 Compact jerrycan with threaded socket, 5 l 22 05 32101 Compact jerrycan with threaded socket, 10 l 10 04 53521 Compact jerrycan set Compact 5 l, with spigot Compact 10 04 53530 Compact jerrycan set Compact 10 l, with spigot Compact 10 04 53531 Compact jerrycan set StopCock 5 l, with spigot 22 05 32205 Compact jerrycan set StopCock 10 l, with spigot 10 04 53501 2 Compact jerrycans, electroconductive The compact jerrycan, made of electrically conductive HDPE, is especially well suited for use in explosion-proof areas. When correctly earthed, it prevents the danger of ignition due to an accumulation of electrostatic charge. The canister thus helps to meet the re- quirements of the ATEX 137, TRBS2153 and CENELEC 50404 guidelines. It can be used for dispensing and storing combustible and highly flammable liquids of explosion groups IIA, IIB and IIC. • 5l or 10 l • With or without threaded connector 3/4 ″ • HDPE, black, anti-static • Canister support made of aluminium for secure stand as accessory (only for 5 l canister) • StopCock PA, electrically conductive available as accessory Article Compact jerrycan electroconductive, without threaded connector, 5 l Compact jerrycan electroconductive, without threaded connector, 10 l Compact jerrycan electroconductive, with threaded connector, 5 l Compact jerrycan electroconductive, with threaded connector, 10 l Compact jerrycan set 5 l, electroconductive Compact jerrycan set 10 l, electroconductive Order No. 10 04 53555 10 04 53525 10 04 53520 10 04 53522 10 04 53505 10 04 53515 Accessories Article 3 Canister support for 2 space-saving canisters Canister support for 3 space-saving canisters 4 StopCock spigot Compact spigot Spigots, BÜRKLE Order No. 22 05 32311 22 05 32312 22 05 30000 10 04 55301 Spigots Drain Siphon StopCock • With rotatable spout, preventing drips • With tapered spout for bottles with narrow openings from dia. 6 to 8 mm • Fits screw threads with G 3/4 ″ • Pressure proof to 2 bar at 20°C without discharge angle • Seals made of PTFE und PE, parts in contact with media made of PP, PE and PTFE Drain Siphon Compact • Compact design, the short discharge does not protrude out over the lower edge of the • The specially optimised design of the discharge forms an even stream of liquid with no • Fits to all containers with G 3/4 ″ connecting threads • PP, PE and PTFE are materials that offer outstanding chemical resistance to acids and container splashing or spattering base Continued on next page

Containers Bottles, Carboys, Canisters, Jars, Accessories Canisters Drain Siphon StopCock PA, electroconductive • Made of polyamide electroconductive, ideally suited for solvents • PTFE seal • Fits to all containers with 3/4 ″ outer thread, and also to 3/4 ″ inner threads • Including adapter for 3/4 ″ inner thread made of PA electroconductive Article 5 StopCock spigot 6 Compact spigot 7 StopCock PA spigot Order No. 22 05 30000 10 04 55301 10 04 52511 7 IBC discharge valves The IBC discharge valve is a sturdy, high-quality ball valve with a hose connection and connection adapter including seal, for standard thread S 60×6 external or 1 ″ external, designed to fit all commonly used European IBC containers. With the appropriate thread, the discharge valve can also be screwed directly onto the original discharge valve that is already on the IBC tank if the original valve is leaking or faulty. In this way the IBC discharge valve ensures fast and reliable residual emptying of the container with good dosing. The discharge valve is an indispensable accessory to ensure a professional connection of the hose or for filling from your IBC container. • 1 ″ flow • Suitable for connection threads S 60×6 external or 1 ″ external • Discharge valve and PP fibreglass-reinforced sealing cap, ball, adapter and PA hose nozzle, PP/POM hose fitting • Max. operating pressure 10 bar (at +20°C) • Max. operating temperature 80°C 8 Article 8 IBC discharge valve with angle discharge IBC discharge valve with 90° hose nozzle and sealing cap. The hose can also be closed with the enclosed sealing cap. Hose nozz- le external Ø 30 mm, suitable for flexible hoses. 9 IBC discharge valve with hose screw connection IBC discharge valve with innovative hose screw connection The ho- se screw connection allows you to attach a wide range of hoses quickly, easily and reliably. No additional hose clamp is needed. Hose fitting, external Ø 25 mm. Order No. 10 04 55342 10 04 55341 9 behroplast® Carboys, Behr behroplast® carboys made of polyethylene with welded stopcock. These carboys keep a tight seal, even after long periods of use. The spout is positioned such that the carboys can be set up on any level surface and stacked. Carboys, white translucent, with stopcock co d e b e w WWXKS003 Volume l 5 10 20 25 30 60 Length cm 19 23 30 30 38 39 Width cm 16 20 23 26 29 35 Height cm 24 30 40 46 40 64 Neck I.D. cm 4.5 4.5 4.8 4.8 4.8 4,8 Order No. 22 48 11005 22 48 11010 22 48 11020 22 48 11025 22 48 11030 10 48 11060 Barrels, LAT Air and water-tight barrels • All barrels are UN-X certified for solid and pasty materials • All barrels are food-compatible • Air and water-tight thanks to rubber seal • Stable when stacked because base and lid fit perfectly on top of each other • Barrels can be closed with compact, tamper-proof lead seal Volume l 3.6 6 10 15 Order No. 22 20 30003 22 20 30006 22 20 30010 22 20 30015 Volume l 26 42 55 68 Order No. 22 20 30026 22 20 30042 22 20 30055 22 20 30068 co d e b e w WWW4U044 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 89

Containers Canisters / Transport, Safety Containers co d e b e w WWXKS053 co d e b e w WWMUE002 Canisters Wide Neck Barrels, HDPE, with Screw Cap and Stopcock, Behr • Easy to clean • Stirring in the container is possible • With welded-in stopcock • With level indicator of PVC Type WF20H WF55H WF110H WFB220H Volume l 20 55 110 220 Ø × H cm 27.4 × 41.7 41 × 52 45.5 × 78.7 58.2 × 98.5 Thread Ø cm 20.3 28.2 39.2 40 Order No. 10 48 15281 10 48 15282 10 48 15283 10 48 21085 Security Seals, ISOLAB Security seals Security seal is used to ensure the safety locking and durability of the product inside the bottles. 4 different colors are used to identify among the seals with identification numbers printed on the seal plate. Article Security seals, blue Security seals, red Security seals, yellow Security seals, green Order No. 10 66 40021 10 66 40022 10 66 40023 10 66 40024 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 Security seal cutter Security seal cutter is a perfect tool to cut security seal wires easily. Article 1 Security seal cutter Order No. 10 66 40025 1 Culture vessels see page 788 Safety Containers Safety Containers, Rötzmeier High-grade stainless steel safety containers, for safe storage, transport and handling of flammable liquids (solvents). All containers conform to TRbF60 (Technical Regulations for Flammable Liquids) require- ments, have explosion protection and a flame barrier. They are made of solid stainless steel V4a / V2a with seals made of PTFE. Dispensing taps and precision dispenser are self-closing, all handles have an ergonomic shape. Safety cans made from stainless steel For inhouse applications. With flame barrier and pressure control valve. Precision dispens- ers are self-closing. Version 2 Type Vol. l 0.5 1 2 5 0.5 1 2 5 H mm 198 230 290 400 178 230 290 400 2 90 0HD 01D 02D 05D 0HK 01K 02K 05K with precision dispenser with precision dispenser with precision dispenser with precision dispenser with screw cap with screw cap with screw cap with screw cap Order No. Ø mm 99 10 39 30006 110 38 39 10001 130 38 39 10002 165 38 39 10005 99 10 39 31006 110 38 39 11001 130 38 39 11002 165 38 39 11005 Continued on next page

Containers Transport, Safety Containers Safety Containers Accessories for safety cans Article Self-closing precision dispenser 1¼ ″ D125 Plug-in funnel TR1 Order No. 38 39 51125 38 39 53001 3 Safety containers made from stainless steel As storage, dispensing and dosing containers. With flame barrier and pressure control valve. Dispensing taps and precision dispensers are self-closing. KDL and KZ types with separate vent. All handles have an ergonomic shape. Type 05KD 10KD 20KDL 05KK 10KK 20KK 05KZ 10KZ 20KZ Version Vol. l 5 with precision dispenser 10 with precision dispenser 20 with precision dispenser 5 with screw cap 10 with screw cap 20 with screw cap with dispensing cock 1½ ″ 5 with dispensing cock 1½ ″ 10 with dispensing cock 1½ ″ 20 H mm 310 380 470 310 380 470 310 380 470 W mm 200 280 345 200 280 345 200 280 345 D mm 130 130 175 130 130 175 130 130 175 Order No. 38 39 20005 38 39 20010 38 39 20020 38 39 21005 38 39 21010 38 39 21020 38 39 22005 38 39 22010 38 39 22020 Accessories for safety containers Article Self-closing dispensing cock 1½ ″ Z150 Self-closing precision dispenser 1½" D150 Plug-in funnel TR2 Order No. 38 39 50150 38 39 51150 38 39 53002 4 Safety storage vessels made from stainless steel As storage and dispensing containers. With flame barrier and pressure control valve. Dispensing taps and precision dispensers are self-closing. ZI types are with resistant contents indicator. The 25 l container is stackable. 100 l and 200 l on request. Type Version 10Z 25Z 50Z 10K 25K 50K 10ZI 25ZI 50ZI 10D with dispensing cock ¾ ″ with dispensing cock ¾ ″ with dispensing cock ¾ ″ with screw cap with screw cap with screw cap with dispensing cock ¾ ″ with dispensing cock ¾ ″ with dispensing cock ¾ ″ with precision dispenser Vol. l 10 25 50 10 25 50 10 25 50 10 H mm 300 530 600 300 530 600 300 530 600 350 Ø mm 260 300 380 260 300 380 260 300 380 260 Order No. 38 39 30010 38 39 30025 38 39 30050 38 39 31010 38 39 31025 38 39 31050 38 39 32010 38 39 32025 38 39 32050 38 39 33010 Accessories for safety storage vessels Article Self-closing dispensing cock ¾ ″ Z 34 Plug-in funnel TR3 Order No. 38 39 52034 38 39 53003 5 Transport containers according to GGVSEB, made from stainless steel UN type approval according to ADR / RID / IMDG / ICAO-TI With flame barrier and screw cap without overpressure valve. Type Article 01T 02T 05T 05KT 10KT 20KTL 10TZ 25TZ Can Can Can Canister Canister Canister Upright vessel Upright vessel Vol. l 1 2 5 5 10 20 10 25 H mm 230 290 400 310 380 470 330 530 Ø mm 110 130 165 200/130 280/130 345/175 260 300 Order No. 38 39 40001 38 39 40002 38 39 40005 38 39 41005 38 39 41010 10 39 31021 10 39 31022 38 39 42025 Accessories for transport containers Article Self-closing dispensing cock 1½" Z1501) Storage block LB 1) for inhouse use only for 25TZ 25TZ Order No. 38 39 50150 38 39 50002 3 4 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 91

Containers Transport, Safety Containers co d e b e w WWMUD013 Safety Containers Transport Safety Container for Hazardous Substances, Berrytec® With different rigid foam molds for safe transport of bottle sizes from 0.5 to 4 liters. The container is made of PP and thus resistant to many chemicals and solvents. It has a stur- dy handle and a cover with locking function which prevents the bottle from dropping when the person carrying the container falls. Article Transport safety container without compartments Compartment for bottles with Ø 150 mm Compartment for bottles with Ø 140 mm Compartment for bottles with Ø 100 mm Compartment for bottles with Ø 80 mm Order No. 10 63 51000 10 63 51010 10 63 51020 10 63 51030 10 63 51040 Waste Disposal/Safety Cans, KGW-Isotherm Disposal cans specially designed for transporting and storing aggressive fluids. A ”ground- ing set“ can also be supplied for storage of flammable liquids. The actual storage chamber consists of a glass globe made of 3.3 borosilicate glass with a screw-on lid which has a PTFE coated silicone seal. A metal jacket protects the glass globe. A large-diameter neck (Ø 90 mm) facilitates filling and emptying of the container. The containers are all fitted with a pressure relief valve. Type Volume l 4 8 15 Grounding set: Price on request. E 0 E 1 E 2 Order No. 38 50 10004 38 50 10008 38 50 10015 Buckets, Cans, Kettles Buckets, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® 1 Industrial buckets For transporting, decanting and mixing. Wide spout give rapid but safe emptying. With metal handle. • White LLDPE • With liter scale • Heavy-walled model Volume l 9 12 17 2 Packaging buckets Ø mm 280 300 340 Height mm 250 280 310 Order No. 10 04 50809 10 04 50812 10 04 50817 For transporting, packaging and storing a variety of materials. Suitable for food industry or building material industry, non-aggressive chemicals, envi- ronmental protection, hospitals, or domestic use. With handle. • White PP • Air-tight closure • Complete with lid Volume l 1 2 3 5 10 Ø mm 132 175 225 225 268 Height mm 131 132 123 194 263 Order No. 23 05 32701 23 05 32702 23 05 32703 23 05 32705 23 05 32710 co d e b e w WWR4Q023 1 2 92

Containers Transport, Safety Containers Buckets, Cans, Kettles Bucket, Stainless Steel, BÜRKLE The bucket is made entirely of high-gloss polished stainless steel. The smooth surface of the stainless steel bucket makes it easy to clean. The rounded, movable handle makes it comfortable to move the bucket. The laboratory bucket is suitable for moving liquids and bulk materials properly, especially in the chemical, pharmaceutical or cosmetic industries, and in the food and animal feed industries. • Stainless steel (1.4301) • High-gloss polished co d e b e w WWR4Q071 Article Bucket, stainless steel Bucket, stainless steel Contents l 10 15 Order No. 10 04 59010 10 04 59015 Buckets, KAUTEX Buckets made of PE-LD, graduated, heavy-walled, sturdy. Buckets without spout, white, with plastic-coated steel handle Order No. Vol. Ø bottom mm 212 Ø opening mm 253 Height mm 279 PU pc/Pack 10 23 52 70585 l l l 10 Vol. 10 Vol. 10 15 Builder‘s bucket without spout, gray, with rust-proof handle Ø bottom mm 212 Ø opening mm 253 Height mm 279 Order No. 23 52 70587 PU pc/Pack 10 Buckets with spout, white, with plastic-coated steel handle Ø bottom mm 193 235 Ø opening mm 280 316 Height mm 300 335 Order No. 23 52 70588 23 52 70589 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Bucket and Lid, VITLAB Buckets, PE-HD. White. Without spout. With division into 1 liter segments. Stable handle with reinforcement in the middle for comfortable carrying. Tightly closing, transparent lid made of PE-LD – please order separately. Suitable for contact with food pursuant to Di- rective (EU) No. 10/2011. Type Bucket Bucket Lid for 5 l Lid for 10 l Volume l 5 10 - - Ø mm 250 290 - - Height mm 240 300 - - Order No. 10 85 39609 10 85 39639 10 85 39629 10 85 39659 PU pc/Pack 1 1 1 1 Bucket with Spout, PP, VITLAB Transparent. With division into 1 liter segments. With stable handle and spout for easy emptying. Highly resistant to chemicals. Without lid. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Volume l 12 15 Ø mm 310 310 Height mm 330 370 Order No. 10 85 39669 10 85 39679 PU pc/Pack 1 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 93

Containers Transport, Safety Containers co d e b e w WWQ7J056 1 2 Buckets, Cans, Kettles Buckets, Containers and Cans, BOCHEM l 1 Buckets made of 18/10 steel, graduated, with handle Volume 10 12 15 Bucket Order No. 38 05 08322 38 05 08323 38 05 08324 Height mm 235 270 305 Ø mm 280 300 310 Lid Order No. 38 05 08332 38 05 08333 38 05 08334 l 2 Buckets made of 18/10 steel, graduated, with base ring and handle Volume Lid Order No. 10 38 05 08332 12 38 05 08333 15 38 05 08334 Bucket Order No. 38 05 08315 38 05 08316 38 05 08317 Height mm 235 270 305 Ø mm 280 300 310 3 Transport containers made of 18/10 steel, with lid and handle Volume Height mm 140 150 180 240 280 300 Order No. 38 05 08300 38 05 08301 38 05 08302 38 05 08304 38 05 08305 38 05 08307 l 1 2 3 5 6 10 Ø mm 100 130 155 175 175 220 3 8 94 4 7 5 4 Graduated cans made of 18/10 steel, spout, drop handle and grip Volume Lid Order No. 10 38 05 08392 15 38 05 08393 Cans Order No. 38 05 08390 38 05 08391 Height mm 250 300 Ø mm 240 270 l 5 Transport cans made of 18/10 steel, handles, upright rim Volume l 20 25 30 50 75 100 150 Container Order No. 38 05 08340 38 05 08341 38 05 08342 38 05 08344 38 05 08346 38 05 08347 38 05 08348 Height mm 375 375 440 550 600 670 670 Ø mm 270 300 300 350 400 450 550 Lid Order No. 38 05 08350 38 05 08351 38 05 08352 38 05 08354 38 05 08356 38 05 08357 38 05 08358 6 Accessories Article 6 NO-DRIP draincock, incl. assembly, 1/2" 7 Tension clamps 18/10 steel, 3 pieces For all types of transport vessels, including assembly Order No. 38 05 08359 38 05 08349 8 Roller trolley Article Roller trolley Supplied without the illustrated container 9 Castors for transport container, 18/10 stainless steel With 4 rubber guide rolls, 2 lockable. Material 18/10 Steel 18/10 Steel 18/10 Steel 18/10 Steel 18/10 Steel Roll-Ø mm 70 70 70 100 100 for 38 05 08341/42 38 05 08344 38 05 08346 38 05 08347 38 05 08348 Order No. 10 05 08004 Order No. 10 05 18341 10 05 18344 10 05 18346 10 05 18347 10 05 18348 9

Buckets, Cans, Kettles Kettles, BOCHEM Kettles made of 18/10 steel with flat ground base for electric/gas ranges Volume l 2.5 4 6 7 9 12 16 20 Ø mm 160 200 200 240 240 260 280 320 Height mm 130 150 200 170 210 240 270 270 Kettle Order No. 38 05 08360 38 05 08361 38 05 08362 38 05 08363 38 05 08364 38 05 08365 38 05 08366 38 05 08367 Lid Order No. 38 05 08370 38 05 08371 38 05 08372 38 05 08373 38 05 08374 38 05 08375 38 05 08376 38 05 08377 Baskets Wire baskets, BOCHEM Special high quality processing at the welding points. 1 Wire baskets round, with handle 18/10 steel, electrolytical polished, round. Material 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel Height mm 80 100 120 160 180 180 180 200 Ø mm 100 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 Mesh width mm 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 2 Wire baskets square, without handle Material 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli 18/10 E-Poli1) 18/10 E-Poli1) 18/10 E-Poli1) Length mm 100 120 120 150 140 150 160 200 180 180 200 200 250 300 400 500 600 Width mm 100 120 120 100 140 150 160 150 180 180 200 200 150 200 300 300 400 Height mm 100 100 120 100 140 150 160 150 150 180 150 200 150 150 200 250 300 Mesh width mm 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 8 × 8 × 1 Order No. 10 05 10050 10 05 10051 10 05 10052 10 05 10053 10 05 10054 10 05 10055 10 05 10056 10 05 10057 Order No. 10 05 10020 10 05 10021 10 05 10022 10 05 10023 10 05 10024 10 05 10025 10 05 10026 10 05 10027 10 05 10028 10 05 10029 10 05 10030 10 05 10031 10 05 10032 10 05 10033 10 05 10071 10 05 10073 10 05 10076 Containers Transport, Safety Containers co d e b e w WWQ7J052 co d e b e w WWQ7J077 1 2 1) with 2 cross-ties More than 20,000 articles in this catalogue – and still more on our website ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 95

Containers Transport, Safety Containers 2 3 1 co d e b e w WWQ7J084 co d e b e w WWJTQ002 WW2NY331 4 co d e b e w 96 Baskets Wire Baskets and Transport Cart, BOCHEM 1 Transport Baskets Transport basket stackable made of 18/10 steel, electrolytical polished. 3 different mesh dimensions. Length mm 600 600 300 600 600 300 600 600 300 Width mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 Height mm 300 150 150 300 150 150 300 150 150 Mesh width mm 10 × 10 × 3 10 × 10 × 3 10 × 10 × 3 20 × 20 × 3 20 × 20 × 3 20 × 20 × 3 35 × 35 × 3 35 × 35 × 3 35 × 35 × 3 Order No. 10 05 17300 10 05 17301 10 05 17302 10 05 17305 10 05 17306 10 05 17307 10 05 17310 10 05 17311 10 05 17312 2 Transport cart for transport baskets 18/10 stainless steel With handle and 4 guide rolls (2 lockable). Material 18/10 stain- less Steel Length mm 603 Width mm 403 Height mm 950 Load capacity max. kg 100 Order No. 10 05 17330 Baskets, LINKER 3 Wire baskets made of welded mesh w 8 mm, d 1 mm, cube shape, with white plastic coating Edge length cm 10 12 14 16 Order No. 39 73 12210 39 73 12212 39 73 12214 39 73 12216 Wire baskets made of stainless steel w 8 mm, d 1 mm, cube shape Edge length cm 10 12 14 16 Order No. 39 73 12310 39 73 12312 39 73 12314 39 73 12316 Edge length cm 18 20 25 30 Edge length cm 18 20 25 30 4 Stainless steel perforated sheet baskets 8 mm square holes, sheet thickness 1 mm, cube shape Edge length cm 10 12 14 Order No. 39 73 12510 39 73 12512 39 73 12514 Edge length cm 16 18 20 Order No. 39 73 12218 39 73 12220 39 73 12225 39 73 12230 Order No. 39 73 12318 39 73 12320 39 73 12325 39 73 12330 Order No. 39 73 12516 39 73 12518 39 73 12520 Aluminium Test Tube Baskets, neoLab® Ideal for washing and storing test tubes! Use these lightweight yet strong baskets with mechanical washers and autoclaves. Durable construction will withstand repeated use in the lab. Size small medium Length × Width × Height mm 152 × 152 × 152 256 × 152 × 152 Order No. 10 01 25090 10 01 25091

Containers Transport, Safety Containers Sample Transport, Thermo Boxes Storage and Shipping Containers, BÜRKLE Containers made of polypropylene (PP) Hard-wearing, largely resistant to chemicals, temperature-resistant from -40 to +90°C. Stackable to a high height, hygienic/water-repelling, smooth easy-to-clean inner walls, food compatible, can be used on roller conveyors, quiet/non-droning, fit exactly on stand- ard pallets, safe handles, available in various sizes, stackable with or without cover, out- side reinforcement ribs for heavy duty. 1 Standard containers, gray To fit Euro standard pallets, without cover, made of PP. co d e b e w WWR4Q005 Volume l 11 17 23 23 38 45 64 80 Outer dimensions L × W × H mm 400×300×120 400×300×180 400×300×220 600×400×120 600×400×180 600×400×220 600×400×320 600×400×420 Inner dimensions L × W × H mm 367×267×116 367×267×176 367×267×216 567×367×114 567×367×176 567×367×216 567×367×316 567×367×416 Weight kg 1.1 1.4 1.9 2.3 3.3 Order No. 23 05 10211 23 05 10217 10 04 50220 23 05 10223 23 05 10238 10 04 50245 23 05 10264 10 04 50280 Covers made of polypropylene (PP), gray Article Lid for Order No. 23 05 10211 and 10217 Lid for Order No. 23 05 10223 to 10264 Order No. 23 05 10301 23 05 10302 All-purpose containers made HPDE, white Practical storage containers with user-friendly dimensions (not acc. to standard pallets). Order No. Volume l 2 29 3 48 4 94 Outer dimensions L × W × H mm 660 × 450 × 130 660 × 450 × 220 660 × 450 × 410 Inner dimensions L × W × H mm 600 × 400 × 120 600 × 400 × 210 600 × 400 × 400 Weight kg 1.9 2.3 4.0 Accessories Article Lid made of polystyrene (PS) White. For all purpose containers 5 Trolley with rollers made of PP/TPD Paload approx. 250 kg. For standard containers with size 600 mm × 400 mm 23 05 10129 23 05 10148 23 05 10194 Order No. 23 05 10195 23 05 10196 Transport Basins, neoLab® Transport Basins Transport and storage containers made of gray ND polyethylene, closed on the base and sides; can be stacked in any way. Compliant with Euronorm sizes. Resistant to many acids and lyes. Temperature-resistant from -30°C to +80°C. Fits into large thermo transport box no. 290117536. Article Transport basin Transport basin Transport basin Transport basin Lid Vol. l 20 40 60 80 Outer L × W × H mm 600 × 400 × 120 600 × 400 × 220 600 × 400 × 320 600 × 400 × 420 600 × 400 Inner L × W × H mm 565 × 365 × 110 565 × 365 × 210 565 × 365 × 320 565 × 365 × 420 Order No. 23 01 21144 23 01 21145 23 01 21146 23 01 21147 23 01 21349 Grid inserts Ideal for transporting medicine jars. Grid height: 8 cm Article Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert for qty bottles 54 × 100 ml 28 × 250 ml 15 × 500 ml Bottle Ø max. mm 55 75 90 Order No. 23 01 17543 23 01 17544 23 01 17545 1 2 4 co d e b e w WW2NY321 3 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 97

Containers Transport, Safety Containers co d e b e w WWXKS005 Sample Transport, Thermo Boxes Sample Carriers, Behr behrotest® sample carriers Containers with label holder for the safe transportation and practical storage of 1-l or 2-l sample bottles according to DIN. behrotest® sample carriers type FTB • light and sturdy • standardized dimensions, hence easy to stack in minimum space • inserts for 1-1 or 2-l bottles provide thermal insulation for sample bottles and keep them upright Article 1 Sample carrier FTB 1/8 Sample carrier FTB 2/6 for 8 1-liter sample bottles according to DIN for 6 2-liter sample bottles according to DIN Order No. 23 48 65021 23 48 65022 3 behrotest® sample carriers type ITB • very effective insulation • holder for cold pack in the lid • insulated walls and insulated lid largely eliminate the effects of ambient temperature Article Sample carrier ITB 1/8 2 Sample carrier ITB 2/6 3 Cold pack to fit the ITB 1/8 and ITB 2/6 for 8 1-liter sample bottles according to DIN for 6 2-liter sample bottles according to DIN Order No. 23 48 65030 23 48 65032 10 48 65031 1 2 co d e b e w Container Carts, neoLab® WW2NY035 2 container carts for all Euro standard containers. Each cart has 4 chromatized ball-bear- ing steering wheels with rubber tyres. Article 3 Container cart made of ABS plastic AOuter dimensions: Inner dimensions: Payload: 630 × 420 mm 600 × 400 mm 150 kg 4 Container cart made of plastic-coated tube Outer dimensions: Inner dimensions: Payload: Tube dia.: 650 × 490 mm 600 × 400 mm 110 kg 28 mm Order No. 23 01 21142 23 01 21143 Safety Bottle Carriers, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Safety bottle carriersmade of linear low-density polyethylene. Simple, safe support for up to 6 half-liter bottles regardless of shape. Bright yellow color for safety. Provides firm support for bottles, virtually eliminating binding and breakage. Sturdy wide handle molded in one piece with the base, providing a comfortable grip even when the carrier is full. Two tabs firmly attach the sliding cover to the base. Injection molding made of linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE), giving it better mechanical strength than low density polyethylene (LDPE) and greater shock resistance than high density polyethylene (HDPE). Full or empty carriers can be stacked. Length × Width × Height mm 349 × 248 × 276 Order No. 23 87 65050 4 3 co d e b e w WWRJN102 98

100

Containers Transport, Safety Containers / Test Tubes Sample Transport, Thermo Boxes Bottle Carrier, BÜRKLE For 6 bottles up to max. 95 mm Ø. PP. Article Bottle carrier, HDPE Order No. 10 04 53616 Safety Bottle Carriers, BOCHEM Safety carriers for laboratory bottles with hinge, closure and silicone seal. Material 18/10 steel 18/10 steel Height mm 140 235 Width mm 100/130 130/160 Volume ml 50 – 250 500 – 1000 Order No. 38 05 18300 38 05 18301 co d e b e w WWR4Q066 co d e b e w WWQ7J064 Test Tubes Test Tubes, Hecht-ASSISTENT Test tubes Elka, AR®-soda-lime glass, round bottom, beaded rim. Service-proven qual- ity, also for use as disposable test tubes. Length and outer diameter quoted as approxi- mate values. Standard wall thickness, beaded rim Length O.D. mm 10 12 14 16 16 16 Order No. 11 18 13001 11 18 13002 11 18 13003 11 18 13005 11 18 13006 11 18 13007 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 Length mm 160 160 180 180 160 200 O.D. mm 16 18 18 20 24 30 Order No. 11 18 13013 11 18 13008 11 18 13009 11 18 13010 11 18 13011 11 18 13012 PU pc/Pack 200 100 100 100 50 50 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Thick wall, approx. 1 mm, smooth rim Length mm 100 100 130 100 120 160 mm 27 35 50 40 70 80 100 75 100 100 Order No. O.D. mm 7 11 18 14000 6 11 18 14001 6 11 18 14002 8 11 18 14003 10.5 11 18 14004 10.5 11 18 14085 10 11 18 14005 12 11 18 14006 12 11 18 14007 14 11 18 14008 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 200 100 200 100 100 Length mm 130 75 85 135 100 160 160 100 180 O.D. mm 14 15 15 15 16 16 16 18 18 Order No. 11 18 14009 11 18 14010 11 18 14011 11 18 14012 11 18 14013 11 18 14014 11 18 14017 11 18 14015 11 18 14016 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 99

101

Containers Test Tubes co d e b e w WWEQ2053 co d e b e w WWEQ2054 1 2 100 Test Tubes Test Tubes, FIOLAX®, DURAN Group / IDL Test tubes with beaded rim. FIOLAX® test tubes have thin walls. They are therefore relatively insensitive to sudden changes of temperature and local heating. O.D. mm 8 10 10 12 12 14 16 16 18 20 20 25 25 30 Length mm 70 75 100 75 100 130 130 160 180 150 180 150 200 200 Wall thickness mm 0.4 – 0.5 0.4 – 0.5 0.4 – 0.5 0.4 – 0.5 0.4 – 0.5 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 – 0.6 0.5 – 0.6 0.5 – 0.6 0.5 – 0.6 0.5 – 0.6 0.6 – 0.7 0.6 – 0.7 0.7 – 0.8 Order No. 11 26 11001 11 26 11003 11 26 11006 11 26 11008 11 26 11011 11 26 11013 11 26 11016 11 26 11021 11 26 11023 11 26 11026 11 26 11028 11 26 11033 11 26 11036 11 26 11038 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Test Tubes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Test tubes with and without beaded rim. DURAN® test tubes have thick walls. They are therefore particularly resistant to mechanical stress and display excellent resistance to thermal shocks. 1 With beaded rim O.D. mm 8 10 10 12 12 13 14 16 16 18 20 20 25 25 30 Length mm 70 75 100 75 100 100 130 130 160 180 150 180 150 200 200 2 Without beaded rim O.D. mm 8 10 10 12 12 13 14 16 16 18 20 20 25 25 30 Length mm 70 75 100 75 100 100 130 130 160 180 150 180 150 200 200 Wall thickness mm 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.4 Order No. 11 26 13001 11 26 13003 11 26 13006 11 26 13008 11 26 13011 10 21 13012 11 26 13013 11 26 13016 11 26 13021 11 26 13023 11 26 13026 11 26 13028 11 26 13033 11 26 13036 11 26 13038 Wall thickness mm 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 0.8 – 1.0 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.4 Order No. 11 26 13101 11 26 13103 11 26 13106 11 26 13108 11 26 13111 10 21 13112 11 26 13113 11 26 13116 11 26 13121 11 26 13123 11 26 13126 11 26 13128 11 26 13133 11 26 13136 11 26 13138 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible.

102

Containers Test Tubes / Beakers, Graduated Beakers PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 co d e b e w WWSU9001 co d e b e w WW4ZV002 co d e b e w WWEQ2001 Test Tubes Disposable Test Tubes, Dinkelberg Analytics OD: 15 mm, L: 140 mm WT: 0.6 mm, smooth rim, AR glass, can also be used with Kapsen- berg caps, in packs of 240 pieces. Article Disposable test tubes ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 11 32 15140 Test Tubes, Hirschmann Test tubes, graduated DURAN®, round bottom, blue graduation, with spout. IN calibrated. Order No. Increment Vol. 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.5 Tol. ± ml 0.06 0.30 0.30 0.30 11 37 80001 11 37 80002 11 37 80003 11 37 80004 As above, but with standard ground Joint (NS) and Poly stopper Order No. Increment NS Vol. 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.5 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 Tol. ± ml 0.06 0.30 0.30 0.30 11 37 80101 11 37 80102 11 37 80103 11 37 80104 ml 10 20 20 25 ml 10 20 20 25 Test Tubes, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass test tubes acc. to DIN 12395, slightly beaded and fused rim. O.D. mm 8 10 12 14 16 L mm 70 100 100 130 160 Beakers Order No. 18 36 71001 18 36 71006 18 36 71011 18 36 71013 18 36 71021 O.D. mm 18 20 30 40 L mm 180 180 200 200 Order No. 18 36 71023 18 36 71028 18 36 71036 18 36 71040 Beakers, Low Form, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Beakers with graduation and spout, DIN 12331, ISO 3819, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Volume ml 51) 101) 25 50 100 150 250 400 600 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 100002) O.D. mm 22 26 34 42 50 60 70 80 90 100 105 132 152 170 217 1) Without graduation. 2) Non-DIN and non-ISO size Height mm 30 35 50 60 70 80 95 110 125 135 145 185 210 270 350 Order No. 11 21 10607 11 21 10608 11 21 10614 11 21 10617 11 21 10624 11 21 10629 11 21 10636 11 21 10641 11 21 10648 11 21 10653 11 21 10654 11 21 10663 11 21 10668 11 21 10673 11 21 10686 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 4 1 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 101

103

Containers Beakers, Graduated Beakers co d e b e w WWEQ2002 co d e b e w WWEQ2003 Beakers Beakers, Tall Form, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Beakers with graduation and spout, DIN 12331, ISO 3819, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Volume ml 50 100 150 250 400 600 800 1000 2000 3000 O.D. mm 38 48 54 60 70 80 90 95 120 135 Height mm 70 80 95 120 130 150 175 180 240 280 Order No. 11 21 11617 11 21 11624 11 21 11629 11 21 11636 11 21 11641 11 21 11648 11 21 11653 11 21 11654 11 21 11663 11 21 11668 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2 Beakers, Tall Form, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Beakers with graduation, without spout, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Per- formance via Internet). Volume ml 50 100 150 250 400 600 1000 O.D. mm 38 48 54 60 70 80 95 Height mm 70 80 95 120 130 150 180 Order No. 11 21 11717 11 21 11724 11 21 11729 11 21 11736 11 21 11741 11 21 11748 11 21 11754 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w WWEQ2210 DURAN® Beakers Super Duty, DURAN Group / IDL DURAN® beakers, low form with spout, Super Duty, with reinforced rim Compared to the standard DURAN® beaker, the products of the Super Duty range have a significantly increased mechanical sturdiness due to increased uniform wall thickness. The reinforced, sturdy rim is another advantage as it further increases the shock resist- ance and notably reduces the risk of breakage. Accordingly, this extension of the DURAN® portfolio offers the user optimum safety when these products are used under heavy me- chanical strain, for example with frequent cleaning, but also with the general handling in the laboratory. Thanks to their longer useful life resulting from increased shock resistance, the Super Duty glassware is economically more efficient. To avoid thermal stressing of the glass, uniform and slow heating of Super Duty products is recommended. When working at very high temperatures, or if rapid temperature changes are expected, standard DU- RAN® beakers should be used, as these are characterized by excellent thermal shock resistance. However, the mechanical sturdiness of these DURAN® standard products is limited compared with the Super Duty range. Super Duty beaker with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). 1 Super Duty, low form Volume ml 150 250 400 600 1000 2000 5000 Super Duty, tall form Volume ml 150 250 600 Order No. 10 21 13729 10 21 13736 10 21 13741 10 21 13748 10 21 13754 10 21 13763 10 21 13773 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 Order No. 10 21 12908 10 21 13605 10 21 14806 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 1 102

104

Containers Beakers, Graduated Beakers co d e b e w WWEQ2005 Beakers Filtering Jars, Heavy Wall, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Filtering jars with graduation and spout. Volume ml 100 150 250 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 100001) 150001) 200001) 1) Without graduation. O.D. mm 52 54 70 89 105 135 157 182 225 260 285 Height mm 85 93 94 124 160 195 205 256 340 390 430 Order No. 11 21 13124 11 21 13129 11 21 13136 11 21 13144 11 21 13154 11 21 13163 11 21 13168 11 21 13173 11 21 13186 11 21 13188 11 21 13191 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 4 1 1 1 1 Beakers, can be Tempered, Landgraf Beaker with temperature stabilizing jacket for direct temperature control of liquids. The beaker may be connected to a thermostat. Use the graded inner beaker for easy volume control The beaker bottom is V-shaped for optimum application of oval magnetic stirring cores; without stirrer. co d e b e w WWHXJ024 Article Beaker, can be tempered, 100 ml Beaker, can be tempered, 150 ml Beaker, can be tempered, 250 ml Beaker, can be tempered, 500 ml Beaker, can be tempered, 800 ml Beaker, can be tempered, 1000 ml Beaker, can be tempered, 2000 ml Order No. 10 67 22010 10 67 22015 10 67 22025 10 67 22050 10 67 22080 10 67 22100 10 67 22220 Beakers, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass beakers acc. to DIN. 1 Low form, DIN 12332 Vol. Ø mm H mm Order No. ml 5 22 31 18 36 10007 10 26 36 18 36 10008 25 34 48 18 36 10014 50 42 59 18 36 10017 100 51 71 18 36 10024 150 58 81 18 36 10029 2 Tail form, DIN 12331 Vol. Ø mm H mm Order No. ml 50 38 69 18 36 10117 100 47 85 18 36 10124 150 53 95 18 36 10129 250 62 112 18 36 10136 400 72 130 18 36 10141 Vol. Order No. Ø mm H mm ml 250 69 95 18 36 10036 400 80 110 18 36 10041 600 90 126 18 36 10048 800 98 135 18 36 10053 1000 106 148 18 36 10054 2000 132 185 18 36 10063 Vol. Order No. Ø mm H mm ml 600 82 148 18 36 10148 800 86 170 18 36 10153 1000 95 180 18 36 10154 2000 120 240 18 36 10163 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 103

105

Containers Beakers, Graduated Beakers co d e b e w WWQED044 Beakers Beakers made of Plastic, BRAND 1 Beakers, low form, PP High clarity, with blue printed scale. To ISO 7056. With graduation, beaded rim and spout. Cleaning at temperatures below 60°C is recommended to preserve marks and inscrip- tions. Graduation ml 2 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 50 100 200 250 500 H mm 36 50 60 70 80 95 112 118 127 147 187 212 247 Ø max. mm 30 38 47 55 66 77 87 94 100 120 149 170 203 Order No. 10 49 87602 10 49 89420 10 49 89428 10 49 89438 10 49 87610 10 49 89448 10 49 89452 10 49 89454 10 49 89456 10 49 89462 10 49 89464 10 49 89466 10 49 89470 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 1) supplementing ISO 7056 2 Beakers, low form, PMP Transparent, with blue printed scale. To ISO 7056. With graduation, beaded rim and spout. Cleaning at temperatures below 60°C is recommended to preserve marks and inscrip- tions. Graduation ml 2 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 50 100 200 250 500 H mm 36 50 60 70 80 95 112 118 127 147 187 212 247 Ø max. mm 30 38 47 55 66 77 87 94 100 120 149 170 203 Order No. 10 49 87502 23 49 89369 23 49 89376 23 49 89380 10 49 87510 23 49 89386 23 49 89387 23 49 89390 23 49 89391 23 49 89395 23 49 89396 23 49 89397 23 49 89398 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 1) supplementing ISO 7056 Volume ml 101) 25 50 100 1501) 250 4001) 500 6001) 1000 2000 30001) 5000 Volume ml 101) 25 50 100 1501) 250 4001) 500 6001) 1000 2000 30001) 5000 Volume ml 101)2) 252) 502) 100 1501) 250 4001) 500 6001) 1000 2000 3000 5000 Graduated Beakers, VITLAB Graduated beakers, PP, with embossed blue graduations Highly transparent. With clearly legible raised scale with blue embossing pursuant to ISO 7056. To protect the embossing, cleaning at a temperature of max. 60°C is recommended. Conditionally autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) pursuant to DIN EN 285. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Graduation ml 2 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 50 100 200 250 500 Height mm 36 50 60 70 80 95 112 118 127 147 187 212 247 Ø mm 30 38 47 55 66 77 87 94 100 120 149 170 203 Order No. 23 85 13159 23 85 13169 23 85 13176 23 85 13180 23 85 13181 23 85 13186 23 85 13187 23 85 13190 23 85 13191 23 85 13194 23 85 13196 23 85 13197 23 85 13198 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 1) Variant in addition to ISO 7056 2) Blue embossed scale not raised Continued on next page 1 2 104

106

Beakers Graduated beakers, PMP Crystal clear. With easily readable, printed red scale. To preserve markings, cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. Containers Beakers, Graduated Beakers Volume ml 101) 25 50 100 1501) 250 4001) 500 6001) 1000 2000 3000 5000 Graduation ml 2 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 50 100 200 250 500 Height mm 36 50 60 70 80 95 112 118 127 147 187 212 247 Ø mm 30 38 47 55 66 77 87 94 100 120 149 170 203 Order No. 23 85 13359 23 85 13369 23 85 13376 23 85 13380 23 85 13381 23 85 13386 23 85 13387 23 85 13390 23 85 13391 23 85 13394 23 85 13396 23 85 13397 23 85 13398 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 1) Variant in addition to ISO 7056 Graduated Beakers, VITLAB 1 Graduated beakers, PFA Transparent. With a raised scale. Excellent chemical resistance and very high thermal stability from -200 to +260°C. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Volume ml 25 50 100 250 500 1000 Graduation ml 5 10 20 50 100 100 Height mm 50 59 72 96 122 141 Ø mm 32 39 50 67 88 109 PU 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. Order No. 23 85 13269 23 85 13276 23 85 13280 23 85 13286 23 85 13290 23 85 13294 2 Graduated beakers, PMP, raised scale Order No. Crystal clear. With a raised scale. According ISO 7056. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Graduation ml 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 50 100 200 250 500 10 85 36069 10 85 36079 10 85 36089 10 85 36099 10 85 36109 10 85 36119 10 85 36189 10 85 36129 10 85 36149 10 85 36159 10 85 36169 10 85 36179 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 Height mm 50 60 70 80 95 112 118 127 147 187 212 247 Ø mm 38 47 55 66 77 87 94 100 120 149 170 203 Volume ml 25 50 100 1501) 250 4001) 500 6001) 1000 2000 3000 5000 1) Variant in addition to ISO 705 3 Graduated beakers, PP, raised scale Highly transparent. With a raised scale. According ISO 7056. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Volume ml 25 50 100 1501) 250 4001) 500 6001) 1000 2000 3000 5000 Graduation ml 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 50 100 200 250 500 Height mm 50 60 70 80 95 112 118 127 147 187 212 247 Ø mm 38 47 55 66 77 87 94 100 120 149 170 203 Order No. 10 85 37069 10 85 37079 10 85 37089 10 85 37099 10 85 37109 10 85 37119 10 85 37189 10 85 37129 10 85 37149 10 85 37159 10 85 37169 10 85 37179 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 1) Variant in addition to ISO 705 1 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 105

107

Containers Beakers, Graduated Beakers co d e b e w WW2VA007 Graduated Beakers Laboratory Mug and Bowl with Periodic Table, Labor-Pilz Made of genuine porcelain (Freiberger Porzellan), dishwater suitable. Article Laboratory mug with periodic table Laboratory bowl with periodic table Contents ml 275 700 Order No. 10 47 43011 10 47 43012 Moonlab Beakers made of Plastics, neoLab® 1 Without handle Vol. 1 ml 50 100 250 600 H mm 59 73 94 128 H mm 73 94 128 150 Order No. 10 01 40038 10 01 40039 10 01 40040 10 01 40041 Order No. 10 01 40046 10 01 40047 10 01 40048 10 01 40049 Vol. ml 1000 2000 5000 10000 Vol. ml 2000 5000 10000 H mm 150 192 263 328 H mm 192 263 330 Order No. 10 01 40042 10 01 40043 10 01 40044 10 01 40045 Order No. 10 01 40050 10 01 40051 10 01 40052 2 With handle Vol. ml 100 250 600 1000 Graduated Beakers with Handle, BRAND co d e b e w WW2NY353 2 co d e b e w WWQED045 3 106 Volume Made from high clarity PP. Blue printed scale. The ergonomic handle allows comfortable and save grip, the functional spout minimizes spills. Cleaning at temperatures below 60°C is recommended to preserve marks and inscriptions. Ø max. mm 40 50 74 92 117 152 172 204 Graduation ml 2 2 5 10 20 50 50 100 23 49 40476 23 49 40480 23 49 40486 23 49 40489 23 49 40493 23 49 40496 23 49 40497 23 49 40498 PU pc/Pack 24 24 12 12 6 6 6 6 H mm 70 80 120 140 181 213 242 270 Order No. ml 50 100 250 500 3 1000 2000 3000 5000 Graduated Beakers, VITLAB Graduated beakers, PP, blue raised scale Highly transparent. With easily readable, raised, embossed blue scale, and stable, easy- grip handle. To preserve markings, do not clean at temperatures exceeding 60°C. Conditionally autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 Graduation ml 2 2 5 10 10 20 50 50 Height mm 70 80 120 140 181 213 242 270 Ø mm 40 50 74 92 117 152 172 204 Order No. 23 85 12176 23 85 12179 23 85 12185 23 85 12189 23 85 12192 23 85 12196 23 85 12197 23 85 12198 PU pc/Pack 24 24 12 12 6 6 6 6 Continued on next page

108

Containers Beakers, Graduated Beakers Graduated Beakers Graduated beakers, PP, raised scale Highly transparent. With a raised scale and stable, easy-grip handle. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 Graduation ml 2 2 5 10 10 20 50 50 Height mm 70 80 120 140 181 213 242 270 Ø mm 40 50 74 92 117 152 172 204 Order No. 10 85 32376 10 85 32379 10 85 32385 10 85 32389 10 85 32392 10 85 32396 10 85 32397 10 85 32398 PU pc/Pack 24 24 12 12 6 6 6 6 Graduated beakers, PP, stackable Highly transparent. With stable handle and easily readable, printed black scale on both sides. This makes the volume easily readable for right- and left-handed users. Handle with groove for better draining of the water in the dishwasher. To preserve markings, cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. For autoclaving we recommend the design with raised graduations. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Volume ml 250 500 1000 2000 3000 Graduation ml 5 10 10 20 50 Height mm 115 140 167 212 242 Ø mm 75 97 125 148 170 Order No. 10 85 32285 23 85 12289 23 85 12292 23 85 12296 23 85 12297 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 Graduated Beakers, coloured, PP, VITLAB Graduated beakers in four different colours Stackable. Transparent, with stable handle and easily readable, printed scale on both sides. Therefore, the volume is equally visible for left- and right handers. Handle with groove for better draining of the water in the dishwasher. To preserve markings, cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. Suitable for contact with food pursuant to Direc- tive (EU) No. 10/2011. Colour red blue yellow green blue yellow green red Volume ml 500 500 500 500 1000 1000 1000 1000 Graduation ml 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Height mm 140 140 140 140 167 167 167 167 Ø mm 100 100 100 100 125 125 125 125 Order No. 10 85 31942 10 85 31943 10 85 31944 10 85 31947 10 85 32942 10 85 32943 10 85 32944 10 85 32945 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Set of graduated beakers in four different colours Article Set graduated beakers, blue, yellow, red, green, 500 ml Set graduated beakers, blue, yellow, red, green, 1000 ml Order No. 10 85 31911 10 85 32911 Collectors, PP or SAN, VITLAB With a raised scale. Volume 2000 ml. With stable, easy-grip handle and white PC lid. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EC) No. 10/2011. Type Cons ml Collector 2000 Collector 2000 Collector 2000 Graduation ml 20 20 20 Mat. Scale SAN embossed PP embossed PP embossed/ blue H mm Order No. Ø mm 150 220 10 85 39788 150 220 10 85 39789 150 220 10 85 39780 Cover – – PC – – – 10 85 39779 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 6 6 6 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 107

109

Volume ml 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 Ø mm 50 65 80 100 120 150 180 Height mm 60 85 110 130 180 180 210 without spout Order No. 38 05 08520 38 05 08521 38 05 08522 38 05 08523 38 05 08524 38 05 08525 38 05 08526 Graduated beakers made of 18/10 steel, with spout, handle Volume ml 3 1000 2000 Ø mm 100 130 Height mm 140 170 with spout Order No. 38 05 08530 38 05 08531 38 05 08532 38 05 08533 38 05 08534 38 05 08535 38 05 08536 Order No. 38 05 08640 38 05 08642 Graduated beakers made of 18/10 steel, with spout, handle, standing foot Order No. Volume ml 2 500 1000 1500 2000 Ø mm 115 140 150 160 Height mm 115 160 160 185 38 05 08660 38 05 08661 38 05 08662 38 05 08663 Graduated beakers made of 18/10 steel, conicale shape, with spout, handle Volume ml 500 3 1000 2000 Ø mm 125 135 175 Height mm 95 120 145 Order No. 10 05 08650 10 05 08651 10 05 08652 Containers Beakers, Graduated Beakers / Flasks co d e b e w WWQ7J055 Graduated Beakers Beakers, BOCHEM Beakers made of 18/10 steel, without handle, with contact bottom ml Volume 1 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 Ø mm 50 65 80 100 120 150 180 Height mm 60 85 110 130 180 180 210 with pour rim Order No. 38 05 08500 38 05 08501 38 05 08502 38 05 08503 38 05 08504 38 05 08505 38 05 08506 with spout Order No. 38 05 08510 38 05 08511 38 05 08512 38 05 08513 38 05 08514 38 05 08515 38 05 08516 Beakers made of 18/10 steel, with handle, with contact bottom 2 co d e b e w WWEQ2006 1 3 108 Erlenmeyer Flasks Erlenmeyer Flasks, Narrow Neck, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Erlenmeyer flasks with graduation, DIN ISO 1773, with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Volume ml 25 50 100 1251) 1501) 2001) 250 3001) 500 800 1000 2000 3000 5000 Neck O.D. mm 22 22 22 28 28 34 34 34 34 42 42 50 52 52 Flask max. outer Ø mm 42 51 64 67 74 79 85 87 105 120 131 166 187 220 Height mm 75 90 105 112 118 131 145 156 180 200 220 280 310 365 Order No. PU pc/Pack 11 21 21614 11 21 21617 11 21 21624 10 21 11628 10 21 11627 11 21 21632 11 21 21636 11 21 21639 11 21 21644 10 21 11653 11 21 21654 11 21 21663 11 21 21668 11 21 21673 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2 1 1) Non-DIN ISO size.

110

Containers Flasks co d e b e w WWEQ2007 co d e b e w WWEQ2008 Erlenmeyer Flasks Erlenmeyer Flasks, Wide Neck, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Erlenmeyer flasks with graduation, DIN ISO 24450, with Retrace Code (Batch Certifi- cate of Performance via Internet). Volume ml 251) 50 100 2001) 250 3001) 500 1000 20001) Neck O.D. mm 31 34 34 50 50 50 50 50 72 Flask max. outer Ø mm 43 51 64 79 85 87 105 131 153 Height mm 70 85 105 131 140 156 175 220 276 Order No. PU pc/Pack 11 21 22614 11 21 22617 11 21 22624 11 21 22632 11 21 22636 11 21 22639 11 21 22644 11 21 22654 11 21 22663 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1) Non-DIN EN ISO size. Erlenmeyer Flasks, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Erlenmeyer flasks with DIN threads and graduation, with red PBT-caps With Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Volume ml 100 250 500 1000 Thread GL 25 32 32 32 Flask max. outer Ø mm 64 85 105 131 Height mm 109 149 180 225 Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 21 15324 10 21 15336 10 21 15344 10 21 15354 10 10 10 10 co d e b e w WWEQ2209 Erlenmeyer Flasks, Super Duty, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Compared to the standard DURAN® Erlenmeyer flask, the products of the Super Duty range have a significantly increased mechanical sturdiness due to greater uniform wall thickness. The reinforced, sturdy rim is another advantage as it further increases the shock resistance and notably reduces the risk of breakage. Accordingly, this extension of the DURAN® portfolio offers the user optimum safety when these products are used under heavy mechanical strain, for example with frequent cleaning, but also with the general handling in the laboratory. Thanks to their longer useful life resulting from increased shock resistance, the Super Duty glassware is economically more efficient. To avoid thermal stressing of the glass, uniform and slow heating of Super Duty products is recommended. When working at very high temperatures, or if rapid temperature changes are expected, standard DURAN® Erlenmeyer flasks should be used, as these are characterized by ex- cellent thermal shock resistance. However, the mechanical sturdiness of these DURAN® standard products is limited compared with the Super Duty range. Super Duty Erlenmey- er flask with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). 1 Erlenmeyer flasks, narrow neck, Super Duty with reinforced rim Volume Order No. 2 Erlenmeyer flasks, wide neck, Super Duty with reinforced rim Volume Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 2 10 21 11714 10 21 11717 10 21 11724 10 21 11736 10 21 11744 10 21 11754 10 21 11763 10 21 11773 10 21 12724 10 21 12736 10 21 12744 10 21 12754 ml 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 5000 ml 100 250 500 1000 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 109

111

Containers Flasks co d e b e w WWQVD161 Erlenmeyer Flasks Erlenmeyer Flasks with Screw Cap, Rettberg Erlenmeyer Flasks made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with DIN standard PBT screw caps with PTFE coated seal (up to +200°C). Also available with four baffles. Thread GL Flask Volume approx. ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 5000 N B: When placing in autoclave, screw the cap on loosely. Do not screw tight. Version without baffles Order No. 13 40 18017 13 40 18024 13 40 18036 13 40 18044 13 40 18054 13 40 18064 13 40 18068 13 40 18073 outer Ø mm 51 64 85 105 131 166 187 220 Height mm 89 109 145 181 225 285 315 370 with baffles Order No. 10 70 18117 10 70 18124 10 70 18136 10 70 18144 10 70 18154 10 70 18164 10 70 18168 10 70 18173 25 25 32 32 32 45 45 45 Erlenmeyer Flasks, VITLAB 1 Erlenmeyer flasks, GL 45, PMP with red screw cap, PP Highly transparent. Perfect for use as a receiver vessel for titration. Well suited for storage and cultivation of cell cultures. Due to its higher break resistance, the plastic Erlenmeyer flask is far safer than glass flasks for use in incubator shakers. Suitable for microwave ovens. To preserve markings, cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. Volume ml 75 125 250 500 1000 Graduation ml 10 20 50 100 200 Order No. 10 85 36695 10 85 36796 10 85 36895 10 85 36995 10 85 37095 PU pc/Pack 6 6 6 6 4 2 Erlenmeyer flasks, GL 45, PP with blue scew cap, PP Highly transparent. Well suited for storage and cultivation of cell cultures. Due to its high- er break resistance, the plastic Erlenmeyer flask is far safer than glass flasks for use in incubator shakers. Suitable for microwave ovens. To preserve markings, cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EC) No. 10/2011. Volume ml 75 125 250 500 1000 Graduation ml 10 20 50 100 200 Order No. 10 85 36941 10 85 34941 10 85 38941 10 85 39941 10 85 35941 PU pc/Pack 6 6 6 6 4 Other erlenmeyer flasks see page 821 Round Bottom Flasks, Flat Bottom Flasks Flat Bottom Flasks, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Flat bottom flasks, wide neck, beaded rim, DIN EN ISO 24450. Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 20001) 2000 Neck O.D. mm 34 34 50 50 50 76 50 Flask O.D. mm 51 64 85 105 131 166 166 Height mm 90 105 138 163 190 230 230 Order No. 11 21 73117 11 21 73124 11 21 73136 11 21 73144 11 21 73154 11 21 73163 11 21 73164 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1) Non-DIN EN ISO size. Flasks with neck Ø 76 mm have a reinforced rim. 1 2 110 co d e b e w WWEQ2017

112

Round Bottom Flasks, Flat Bottom Flasks Round Bottom Flasks, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Round bottom flasks, narrow neck, beaded rim, DIN ISO 1773. Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 20001) 30001) 4000 50001) 60001) 10000 120001) 200002) Neck O.D. mm 26 26 34 34 42 42 50 52 50 51 65 65 76 1) Non-ISO size. 2) ASTM E 1403. Flask with neck Ø 65 mm and over have a reinforced rim. Flask O.D. mm 51 64 85 105 131 166 185 207 223 236 279 295 345 Height mm 95 110 144 168 200 260 260 290 305 355 380 380 515 Order No. 11 21 72117 11 21 72124 11 21 72136 11 21 72144 11 21 72154 11 21 72164 11 21 72168 11 21 72171 11 21 72173 11 21 72177 11 21 72186 10 21 12187 11 21 72191 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Rounded Bottom Flasks, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass round-bottom flasks with beaded rim, DIN 12347. RE form, narrow neck Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 O.D. neck approx. mm 22 22 34 34 42 50 Flask Ø approx. mm 51 64 85 105 131 166 RW form, wide neck Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 O.D. neck approx. mm 34 34 50 50 65 76 Flask Ø approx. mm 51 64 85 105 131 165 Height mm 105 115 145 175 210 260 Height mm 105 115 145 175 210 260 Order No. 18 36 20017 18 36 20024 18 36 20036 18 36 20044 18 36 20054 18 36 20063 Order No. 18 36 21017 18 36 21024 18 36 21036 18 36 21044 18 36 21054 18 36 21063 Ground flasks see page 301 Evaporating Dishes Evaporating Dishes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Evaporating dishes with spout, DIN 12336. Containers Flasks / Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WWEQ2010 co d e b e w WWEQ2044 Rim O.D. mm 501) 601) 702) 802) 95 115 140 190 230 Height mm 25 30 35 45 55 65 80 100 130 Volume ml 15 45 60 90 170 320 600 1500 2500 Order No. 11 21 30132 11 21 30134 11 21 30138 11 21 30141 11 21 30144 11 21 30149 11 21 30154 11 21 30159 11 21 30163 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1) Without print 2) Without labelling field co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 111

113

Containers Dishes, Crucibles Evaporating Dishes Evaporating Dishes, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass evaporating dishes with spout acc. to DIN 12336. Vol. ml 10 15 45 60 Ø mm 40 50 60 70 H mm 18 25 30 35 Order No. 18 36 51001 18 36 51002 18 36 51003 18 36 51004 Vol. ml 90 170 320 600 Ø mm 80 95 115 140 H mm 45 55 65 80 Order No. 18 36 51005 18 36 51006 18 36 51007 18 36 51008 co d e b e w WW7R3284 Evaporating Dishes, Hard Porcelain, IDL Evaporating dishes with spout, form A, flat bottom, DIN 12903, glazed except outside base. Ø mm 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 240 300 Height mm 9 11 13 20 22 27 35 55 65 60 Vol. approx. ml 5 10 20 40 80 270 450 1100 1750 2500 Order No. 21 00 12204 21 00 12205 21 00 12206 21 00 12208 21 00 12210 21 00 12212 21 00 12216 21 00 12220 10 00 12225 21 00 12230 PU pc/Pack 30 30 30 20 20 20 10 1 3 1 co d e b e w WW7R3283 Evaporating Dishes, Hard Porcelain, IDL Evaporating dishes with spout, form B, hemispherical, DIN 12903. Ø mm 401) 501) 631) 801) 1001) 1151) 1602) 2002) 2502) 3102) Height mm 16 20 25 34 40 47 64 80 86 110 Vol. approx. ml 10 20 40 75 180 310 640 1000 2200 3400 Order No. 21 00 11104 21 00 11105 21 00 11106 21 00 11108 21 00 11110 21 00 11112 21 00 11116 21 00 11120 21 00 11125 21 00 11131 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 50 10 5 1 1 1 1) glazed in- and outside 2) glazed except outside base WW7R3285 co d e b e w 112 Incinerating Dishes, Glazed, Hard Porcelain, IDL Incinerating dishes, glazed except the outer surface of the bottom. Ø mm 40 50 60 Height mm 21 25 31 Vol. approx. ml 15 30 60 Order No. 21 00 11004 21 00 11005 21 00 11007 PU pc/Pack 40 30 20

114

Evaporating Dishes Incinerating Dishes, Glazed, Hard Porcelain, IDL Incinerating dishes, conical, rectangular, glazed except outside base. Length mm 48 55 70 96 Width mm 26 42 46 55 Height mm 10 16 13 16 Order No. 21 00 11205 21 00 11206 21 00 11207 21 00 11209 PU pc/Pack 30 20 20 10 Evaporating Bowls, BOCHEM Evaporating bowls made of pure nickel (99,5%), spherical, with spout ml Vol. Ø mm Height mm 1 30 50 25 50 60 30 80 70 35 Order No. 38 05 08020 38 05 08021 38 05 08022 ml Vol. Ø mm Height mm 100 80 40 250 100 50 Order No. 38 05 08023 38 05 08024 Evaporating bowls made of pure nickel (99,5%), with lid ml Vol. Ø mm 2 45 55 45 60 Height mm 19 16 Order No. 38 05 08060 38 05 08061 Evaporating Bowls, BOCHEM Ø mm Vol. ml 73 70 100 90 Height mm 19 16 Order No. 38 05 08062 10 05 08065 3 Vol. Evaporating bowls made of 18/10 steel, tall form Vol. Order No. Ø mm Height ml mm 125 70 35 250 85 45 500 110 55 38 05 08560 38 05 08561 38 05 08562 ml Ø mm Height mm 1000 140 70 2000 160 105 5000 200 160 Order No. 38 05 08563 38 05 08564 38 05 08565 4 Vol. ml 50 75 Evaporating bowls made of 18/10 steel, low form Ø mm 60 70 Height mm 20 20 Order No. 38 05 08570 38 05 08571 Vol. ml 100 Ø mm 80 Height mm 20 Order No. 38 05 08572 Dishes, Apparatus Platinum, Dr. Wieland Mat. Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 H mm Ø mm Vol. ml 35 50 25 35 50 25 50 60 30 50 60 30 90 70 35 90 70 35 150 80 40 150 80 40 200 90 45 200 90 45 250 100 50 250 100 50 Wght g 14 14 22 22 32 32 48 48 65 65 90 90 Dish Order No. 34 34 00222 34 34 01222 34 34 00223 34 34 01223 34 34 00224 34 34 01224 34 34 00225 34 34 01225 34 34 00226 34 34 01226 34 34 00227 34 34 01227 Lid Order No. 34 34 00280 34 34 01280 34 34 00281 34 34 01281 34 34 00282 34 34 01282 34 34 00283 34 34 01283 34 34 00284 34 34 01284 34 34 00285 34 34 01285 Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WW7R3286 co d e b e w 2 co d e b e w WWQ7J044 1 WWQ7J046 3 4 co d e b e w WW19X021 Also available in platinum/gold 95/5! The dishes are available with or without spout! Final price includes all costs, incl. precious metal, processing losses and up to 10% de- viation in quoted weights. We reserve the right to adjust prices to substantial changes in day market prices. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 113

115

Containers Dishes, Crucibles Evaporating Dishes Evaporating Dishes, PFA, VITLAB With snap-on lid, PE. For contamination free sample preparation and efficient transporta- tion. Due to a conical depression in the middle of the base very small amounts of a solvent are adequate to absorb the evaporated samples. co d e b e w co d e b e w WWEQ2045 WWEQ2046 Volume ml 25 50 Ø mm 50 50 Height mm 25 54 PU 1 pcs. 1 pcs. Order No. 23 85 10327 23 85 10337 For more petri dishes, see page 812 Crystallizing Dishes, Petri Dishes Crystalizing Dishes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Crystalizing dishes with spout, DIN 12338. O.D. mm 401) 501) 601) 70 80 95 115 140 190 230 1) Without print Height mm 25 30 35 40 45 55 65 75 90 100 Volume ml 20 40 60 100 150 300 500 900 2000 3500 Order No. 11 21 31124 11 21 31132 11 21 31134 11 21 31138 11 21 31141 11 21 31144 11 21 31149 11 21 31154 11 21 31159 11 21 31163 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Crystalizing Dishes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Crystalizing dishes without spout, DIN 12337. O.D. mm 401) 501) 601) 70 80 95 115 140 190 230 1) Without print Height mm 25 30 35 40 45 55 65 75 90 100 Volume ml 20 40 60 100 150 300 500 900 2000 3500 Order No. 11 21 31324 11 21 31332 11 21 31334 11 21 31338 11 21 31341 11 21 31344 11 21 31349 11 21 31354 11 21 31359 11 21 31363 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Crystallizing Dishes, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass crystallizing dishes acc. to DIN 12338/12337. Vol. O.D. ml mm 20 40 40 50 60 60 100 70 H mm 25 30 35 40 Order No. 18 36 74024 18 36 74032 18 36 74034 18 36 74038 114 ml Vol. O.D. mm 150 80 300 95 500 115 H mm 45 55 65 Order No. 18 36 74041 18 36 74044 18 36 74049

116

Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WWEQ2143 Crystallizing Dishes, Petri Dishes Steriplan Petri Dishes, DURAN Group / IDL STERIPLAN petri dishes made of soda-lime glass. O.D. mm 40 60 80 90 100 100 100 120 150 180 200 200 Height mm 12 15 15 15 10 15 20 20 25 30 30 45 Order No. 19 23 75539 19 23 75540 19 23 75542 10 21 15543 19 23 75545 19 23 75546 19 23 75548 19 23 75551 19 23 75552 19 23 75556 19 23 75559 19 23 75561 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. DUROPLAN Petri Dishes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL These petri dishes are made of DURAN® borosilicate glass. They are superior to other types because they allow even distribution of culture media and distortion-free transpar- ency. (Base and lid are microscopic flat outside and inside, no bubbles and no smearing). Autoclavable. co d e b e w WWEQ2142 Outer Ø mm 60 80 100 100 120 150 Height mm 20 20 15 20 20 26,5 Outer Ø dish mm 54.5 74 94 94 114 143 Total height (dish with cover) mm 22 22 17 22 22 32 Order No. PU pc/Pack 19 21 75541 19 21 75543 19 21 75546 19 21 75548 19 21 75551 19 21 75553 10 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Petri Dishes, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Petri dishes acc. to DIN 12339, ground rim. Upper dish (overlapping lid) Order No. O.D. mm 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 O.H. mm 6 6 6 6 12 12 12 Lower dish (to fit lid) O.D. mm 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 O.H. mm 8 8 8 8 15 15 20 co d e b e w 18 36 75001 18 36 75003 18 36 75005 18 36 75007 18 36 75009 18 36 75011 18 36 75013 Order No. 18 36 75101 18 36 75103 18 36 75105 18 36 75107 18 36 75109 18 36 75111 18 36 75113 O.D. mm 60 70 80 90 100 120 O.D. mm 55 65 75 85 95 115 O.H. mm 12 12 12 12 12 15 O.H. mm 20 20 20 20 20 20 Order No. 18 36 75015 18 36 75017 18 36 75019 18 36 75021 18 36 75023 18 36 75025 Order No. 18 36 75115 18 36 75117 18 36 75119 18 36 75121 18 36 75123 18 36 75125 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 115

117

Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WWQ7J076 co d e b e w WW7R3297 Crystallizing Dishes, Petri Dishes Petri Dishes with Cover, BOCHEM Material 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel Ø mm 100 60 75 90 120 Height mm 15 20 20 20 20 Order No. 10 05 08541 10 05 08635 10 05 08636 10 05 08637 10 05 08638 Casseroles Casseroles, Hard Porcelain, IDL Order No. Casseroles with spout and porcelain handle, DIN 12907, glazed except rim. PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 1 1 1 Vol. approx. ml 80 140 290 500 1300 2600 21 00 13306 21 00 13308 21 00 13310 21 00 13312 21 00 13316 21 00 13320 Height mm 36 46 58 70 97 110 Ø mm 63 80 102 127 160 215 Watch Glass Dishes Watch Glass Dishes, DURAN Group / IDL Watch glass dishes made of soda-lime glass, fused rim. DIN 12341. O.D. mm 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 120 125 150 200 250 co d e b e w WWEQ2048 Order No. 11 23 32124 11 23 32132 11 23 32134 11 23 32138 11 23 32141 11 23 32143 11 23 32146 11 23 32151 11 23 32152 11 23 32157 11 23 32161 11 23 32166 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 Watch Glass Dishes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL DURAN® watch glass dishes, fused rim. DIN 12341. O.D. mm 40 50 60 80 100 125 150 200 250 Order No. 11 21 32124 11 21 32132 11 21 32134 11 21 32141 11 21 32146 11 21 32152 11 21 32157 11 21 32161 11 21 32166 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 co d e b e w WWEQ2047 116

118

Watch Glass Dishes Watch Glass Dishes, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass watch glass dishes acc. to DIN 12341. O.D. mm 40 50 60 70 Curv. radius mm 58 58 58 65 Order No. 18 36 76004 18 36 76005 18 36 76006 18 36 76007 O.D. mm 80 100 125 Curv. radius mm 74 102 130 Order No. 18 36 76008 18 36 76010 18 36 76012 Crucibles, Crucible Lids Crucibles, Hard Porcelain, IDL Crucibles in low, medium-high and high form, DIN 12 904, without lid, glazed. Ø Height mm mm 1 30 20 35 23 40 26 45 29 501) 32 60 38 70 47 2 35 28 40 32 45 36 50 40 60 50 70 60 3 30 38 35 44 40 51 46 58 51 65 60 79 Vol. approx. ml 8 11 20 25 40 65 95 13 20 38 50 90 150 15 24 40 50 85 140 Form low low low low low low low medium high medium high medium high medium high medium high medium high high high high high high high Order No. 21 00 14430 21 00 14435 21 00 14440 21 00 14445 21 00 14450 21 00 14460 21 00 14470 21 00 15436 21 00 15441 21 00 15446 21 00 15451 21 00 15461 21 00 15471 21 00 16432 21 00 16437 21 00 16442 21 00 16447 21 00 16452 21 00 16462 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 100 100 100 100 100 50 100 100 100 50 50 25 1) Conradson Crubcible according to ASTM D 189-65 Crucible Lids, Hard Porcelain, IDL Crucible lids to fit crucibles, DIN 12904. Ø mm 35 43 46 52 60 70 75 DIN 12904 yes yes yes no no no yes Order No. 21 00 17402 21 00 17403 21 00 17404 21 00 17405 21 00 17406 10 00 17408 21 00 17407 PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 Flour Incineration Dishes, Hard Porcelain, IDL Flour incineration dishes acc. to Professor Mohs, glazed except outside base. 1 2 3 co d e b e w WW7R3289 Ø mm 56 Height mm 23 Vol. approx. ml 30 Order No. 21 00 28059 PU pc/Pack 100 Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WW7R3288 co d e b e w WW7R3287 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 117

119

Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WW7R3291 Crucibles, Crucible Lids Incinerating Dishes, Glazed, Hard Porcelain, IDL Incinerating dishes, flat bottom, glazed except the outer surface of the bottom. Bottom Ø mm 37 42 48 Height mm 10 11 12 Vol. approx. ml 8 10 15 Order No. 21 00 11305 21 00 11306 21 00 11307 PU pc/Pack 40 40 30 3 Crucibles, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass crucibles acc. to DIN 12904. 1 Low Form Vol. ml 6 11 15 25 Ø mm 30 35 40 45 H mm 19 22 25 28 Order No. 18 36 60101 18 36 60102 18 36 60103 18 36 60104 2 Medium Form Vol. H mm 28 32 36 Ø mm 35 40 45 ml 15 20 38 Order No. 18 36 60201 18 36 60202 18 36 60203 3 Tail Form Vol. Ø mm 30 35 40 ml 15 24 40 H mm 38 44 50 Order No. 18 36 60301 18 36 60302 18 36 60303 Vol. ml 29 50 85 Ø mm 50 60 70 Vol. ml 49 90 150 Vol. ml 50 75 120 Ø mm 50 60 70 Ø mm 45 50 60 H mm 32 38 44 H mm 40 48 56 H mm 56 62 75 Order No. 18 36 60105 18 36 60106 18 36 60107 Order No. 18 36 60204 18 36 60205 18 36 60206 Order No. 18 36 60304 18 36 60305 18 36 60306 Crucible Caps, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass crucible caps, to fit the above quartz glass crucibles. Inner Ø mm 34 39 44 49 Order No. 18 36 61001 18 36 61002 18 36 61003 18 36 61004 Inner Ø mm 54 64 74 Order No. 18 36 61005 18 36 61006 18 36 61007 Coking Crucibles, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass crucibles with ground on cap, Dr. Rademacher type. Ø mm 27 25 Height mm 45 38 Weight with lid g 27 – 29 10 – 14 (acc. to ISO regulationt) Order No. 18 36 50001 18 36 50002 2 1 118

120

Crucibles, Crucible Lids Incineration Boxes, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass incineration boxes, rectangular Length mm 30 55 50 50 Width mm 30 25 40 40 Order No. 18 36 80001 18 36 80003 18 36 80005 18 36 80007 Length mm 55 60 65 Width mm 45 30 35 Order No. 18 36 80009 18 36 80011 18 36 80013 Melting Crucibles, BOCHEM Melting crucibles made of pure nickel (99.5%), wall 0.5 mm thick Volume ml 5 10 15 25 30 50 70 130 270 Ø mm 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 80 Height mm 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 80 Melting crucible Order No. 32 05 08100 32 05 08101 32 05 08102 32 05 08103 32 05 08104 32 05 08105 32 05 08106 32 05 08107 32 05 08109 Lid Order No. 32 05 08180 32 05 08181 32 05 08182 32 05 08183 32 05 08184 32 05 08185 32 05 08186 32 05 08187 32 05 08189 Melting crucibles made of pure nickel (99.5%), wall 1.0 mm thick Lid Order No. 32 05 08182 32 05 08183 32 05 08184 32 05 08185 32 05 08186 32 05 08187 32 05 08189 Melting crucible Order No. 32 05 08122 32 05 08123 32 05 08124 32 05 08125 32 05 08126 32 05 08127 10 05 08129 Volume ml 15 25 30 50 70 130 270 Height mm 30 35 40 45 50 60 80 Ø mm 30 35 40 45 50 60 80 Melting crucibles made of pure nickel (99.5%), wall 1.5 mm thick Lid Order No. 32 05 08185 Melting crucible Order No. 10 05 08145 Volume ml 50 Height mm 45 Ø mm 45 Melting crucibles made of pure nickel (99.5%), wall 2.0 mm thick Lid Order No. 32 05 08184 32 05 08186 32 05 08187 Melting crucible Order No. 32 05 08164 32 05 08166 32 05 08167 Volume ml 30 70 130 Height mm 40 50 60 Ø mm 40 50 60 Crucibles, Apparatus Platinum, Dr. Wieland Mat. Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Apparatus platinum Platinum/Iridium 97/3 Vol. ml 15 15 20 20 25 25 30 30 40 40 Ø mm 28 28 30 30 35 35 35 35 40 40 H mm 32 32 35 35 37 37 40 40 45 45 Wght g 12 12 17 17 21 21 25 25 30 30 Crucible Order No. 34 34 00104 34 34 01104 34 34 00105 34 34 01105 34 34 00106 34 34 01106 34 34 00107 34 34 01107 34 34 00108 34 34 01108 Lid Order No. 34 34 00260 34 34 01260 34 34 00261 34 34 01261 34 34 00262 34 34 01262 34 34 00263 34 34 01263 34 34 00264 34 34 01264 Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WWQ7J022 co d e b e w WW19X022 Also available in platinum/gold 95/5! Micro-crucibles and micro-dishes on request. Final price includes all costs, incl. precious metal, processing losses and up to 10% de- viation in quoted weights. We reserve the right to adjust prices to substantial changes in day market prices. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 119

121

Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WWKEF023 co d e b e w WW7R3008 Crucibles, Crucible Lids LabQua Racks, Schlee LabQua Racks for crucibles: Made of Thermax® stainless steel, heat resistant to 1100°C Article LabQua rack for 4 crucibles, acc. to ISO LabQua rack for 4 crucibles, acc. to Rademacher LabQua rack for 6 crucibles, acc. to ISO LabQua rack for 6 crucibles, acc. to Rademacher Dimensions mm 90×70×55 90×70×55 110×90×55 110×90×55 Bore Ø mm 25 27 25 27 Order No. 10 34 49003 10 34 49005 10 34 49006 10 34 49007 Magnesia Grooves, Magnesia Sticks Magnesia Grooves, IDL Packed in cases. Width mm 9 Length mm 100 Order No. 21 00 00052 PU pc/Pack 10 co d e b e w WW7R3007 Magnesia Sticks, IDL For verifying the presence of salts by flame reaction. Packed in cases. Article Magnesia sticks Order No. 21 00 00047 PU pc/Pack 25 Combustion Tubes, Combustion Boats Combustion Tubes, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass combustion tubes, Grote-Krekeler type, with 2 frits and 1 aperture plate. Without side tube stub. Without side tube stub Outer Ø mm 20 20 20 20 Overall L mm 460 500 550 750 NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 Without side tube stub, with chips Outer Ø mm 20 20 20 20 Overall L mm 460 500 550 750 NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 KS 19/9 19/9 19/9 19/9 KS 19/9 19/9 19/9 19/9 Order No. 18 36 79011 18 36 79031 18 36 79051 18 36 79071 Order No. 18 36 79013 18 36 79033 18 36 79053 18 36 79073 120

122

Containers Dishes, Crucibles Combustion Tubes, Combustion Boats Combustion Boats, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass combustion boats with or without handle, semi-circular. mm Length 30 50 50 78 78 100 200 300 Width mm Height mm 10 12 15 18 20 25 40 50 5 5 6 8 8 12 19 24 Version with handle Order No. 18 36 81011 18 36 81031 18 36 81051 18 36 81071 18 36 81091 18 36 81111 18 36 81131 18 36 81151 without handle Order No. 18 36 81012 18 36 81032 18 36 81052 18 36 81072 18 36 81092 18 36 81112 18 36 81132 18 36 81152 Dishes, Bowls, Trays Laboratory Trays II, Hecht-ASSISTENT Designed for taking to hospital beds. With special allowance for photometric Hb. Laboratory trays II consisting of: 1 white plastic bottom 1 Plexiglas top, 3-fold 2 amber wide-neck bottles with matte marking area 1 amber narrow-neck bottle with matte marking area 1 reagent tube rack made of Plexiglas for 24 tubes Article Laboratory tray II Order No. 23 18 91002 Trays and Bowls for Tools, neoLab® Melamine resin holders for the laboratory worktop. High chemical resistance. Available as tray or bowl. Cover made of transparent polystyrene. Important when you are working with poisonous or pathogenic substances. Trays co d e b e w WW2NY034 Width × Depth × Height cm 36 × 24 × 2 30 × 19 × 2 24 × 18 × 2 43 × 29 × 2 27 × 21 × 2 19 × 15 × 2 Bowls Width × Depth × Height cm 35 × 25 × 10 29 × 16 × 3 35 × 24 × 4 29 × 16 × 6 21 × 11 × 3 Weight g 400 245 160 708 200 102 Weight g 810 240 572 536 132 Weight g 195 g 140 g 192 g 138 g 74 g Order No. 23 01 23840 23 01 23841 23 01 23842 23 01 23850 23 01 23851 23 01 23852 Order No. 23 01 23844 23 01 23845 23 01 23853 23 01 23854 23 01 23855 Order No. 23 01 23846 23 01 23847 23 01 23856 23 01 23857 23 01 23858 Covers fits Dish No. 23 01 23844 Dish No. 23 01 23845 Dish No. 23 01 23853 Dish No. 23 01 23854 Dish No. 23 01 23855 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 121

123

Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WWR4Q003 co d e b e w WWR4Q002 122 Dishes, Bowls, Trays Laboratory Dishes, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® All-purpose dishes/chemical containment trays made of polypropylene (PP) White, resist flexing, unbreakable, with sturdy round rim, largely resistant to acids and caustic solutions, temperature-resistant from -0°C to +60°C, easy to clean, hygienic, food compatible, stackable when empty to save space. Made by injection molding, not by deep drawing. Not suitable for hot cabinet or dishwasher. For multiple uses: as containment trays for aggressive substances, experiment trays, in- strument holder, medicine trays, photographic development basins, display trays. Vol. l 0.5 1.5 3.0 10.0 21.0 39.0 Outer dimensions L × W × H mm 180×230× 42 250×310× 65 310×370× 75 420×520×120 534×634×140 648×846×160 Bottom I.L. mm 130 180 240 300 400 500 Bottom I.W. mm 180 240 300 400 500 700 Order No. 23 05 71130 23 05 71180 23 05 71240 23 05 71300 23 05 71400 10 04 51501 Laboratory dishes set Laboratory dishes set small comprising 0.5 l, 1.5 l, 3 l and 10 l laboratory dishes. Laboratory dishes set large comprising 0.5 l, to 39.0 l laboratory dishes. See table of laboratory dishes for dimensions. Article Laboratory dishes set small Laboratory dishes set large Order No. 23 05 71495 10 04 51496 Photographic Dishes, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® Photographic dishes made of polyvinylchloride (PVC), temperature-resistant up to +60°C. Available in shallow and deep form, with or without ribs, in a choice of 3 attractive high-gloss colors – white, red and black. These heavy-wall dishes are break-proof and largely resistant to acids and caustic solutions (unsuitable for solvents). Also ideal for use as universal laboratory and storage trays, particularly when color coding is desirable. Shallow form Colour white white white white white white white black black black black black black red red red red red red red Photo size cm 10×15 13×18 18×24 24×30 30×40 40×50 50×60 10×15 13×18 18×24 24×30 30×40 40×50 50×60 10×15 13×18 18×24 24×30 30×40 50×60 Dish size at top cm 15×20 18×23 24×32 32×37 37×47 48×58 59×68 15×20 18×23 24×32 32×37 37×47 48×58 59×68 15×20 18×23 24×32 32×37 37×47 59×68 Height cm 3,0 4,0 5,0 5,0 6,0 6,0 7,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 5,0 6,0 6,0 7,0 3,0 4,0 5,0 5,0 6,0 7,0 Version with ribs Order No. 23 05 70211 23 05 70311 23 05 70411 23 05 70511 23 05 70611 23 05 70711 23 05 70212 23 05 70312 23 05 70412 23 05 70612 23 05 70712 23 05 70313 23 05 70413 without ribs Order No. 23 05 70121 23 05 70221 23 05 70321 23 05 70421 23 05 70521 23 05 70621 23 05 70721 23 05 70122 23 05 70222 23 05 70322 23 05 70422 23 05 70522 23 05 70722 23 05 70123 23 05 70223 23 05 70323 23 05 70423 23 05 70523 23 05 70723 Continued on next page

124

Dishes, Bowls, Trays Deep form Colour white white white white white black black black red red red red red Photo size cm Dish size at top cm Height cm 18×24 24×30 30×40 40×50 50×60 18×24 24×30 30×40 40×50 50×60 30×40 40×50 50×60 26×34 33×39 43×53 52×61 63×73 26×34 33×39 43×53 52×61 63×73 43×53 52×61 63×73 8.5 10,0 10.5 11,0 11,0 8.5 10,0 10.5 11,0 11,0 10.5 11,0 11,0 Version with ribs Order No. 23 05 70531 23 05 70631 23 05 70731 23 05 70532 23 05 70632 23 05 70633 23 05 70733 without ribs Order No. 23 05 70341 23 05 70441 23 05 70541 23 05 70641 23 05 70741 23 05 70342 23 05 70442 23 05 70542 23 05 70642 23 05 70742 23 05 70543 23 05 70643 23 05 70743 Photographic Dishes, BOCHEM Photographic dishes made of 18/10 steel L mm 190 250 260 320 W mm 140 180 190 260 H mm 50 60 50 60 Order No. 38 05 08700 38 05 08701 38 05 08702 38 05 08703 L × W = base dimensions L mm 350 400 500 W mm 240 270 330 H mm 70 80 100 Order No. 38 05 08704 38 05 08705 38 05 08706 Instrument Trays with Cover, BOCHEM Material 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel Length × Width × Height mm 210 × 150 × 40 240 × 180 × 40 270 × 210 × 40 300 × 240 × 40 360 × 300 × 40 Order No. 10 05 08630 10 05 08631 10 05 08632 10 05 08633 10 05 08634 Dishes, BOCHEM Dishes made of 18/10 steel, beaded rim. Vol. Ø mm Height ml mm 1000 165 75 2000 220 75 3000 240 95 Order No. 38 05 08590 38 05 08591 38 05 08592 Vol. Ø mm Height ml mm 4500 260 120 6000 305 120 11000 380 135 Order No. 38 05 08593 38 05 08594 38 05 08596 Containers Dishes, Crucibles co d e b e w WWQ7J051 co d e b e w WWQ7J075 co d e b e w WWQ7J049 Bowls, PP, VITLAB White. Round. With broad, stable edge and circumferential standing ring on the bottom. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Vol. l 0.9 1.7 2.9 4.3 6.6 9.2 13.4 Ø mm 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 co d e b e w Height mm 70 80 100 120 130 150 180 Order No. 10 85 34259 10 85 34269 10 85 34279 10 85 34289 10 85 34299 10 85 34309 10 85 34319 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 3 3 3 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 123

125

Containers Dishes, Crucibles / Desiccators, Accessories co d e b e w WW7R3225 Pneumatic Vessels Aquariums / Pneumatic Tanks, IDL Rectangular aquariums / tanks, ground rim, soda-lime glass H × L × W mm 150 × 300 × 220 150 × 150 × 100 180 × 180 × 130 200 × 200 × 150 Order No. 12 00 19323 12 00 34420 12 00 34432 12 00 34441 H × L × W mm 220 × 250 × 180 240 × 300 × 220 260 × 360 × 230 Order No. 12 00 34451 12 00 34454 12 00 34464 co d e b e w WWEQ2090 co d e b e w WWEQ2094 co d e b e w WWEQ2095 1 124 2 3 Desiccators, Accessories Desiccators, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Vacuum desiccators, designed for use under full vacuum. With NOVUS standard ground (NS) tubulature in the lid, with stopcock, with flat flange, DIN 12491. DN 100 150 200 250 300 Tubing NS 24/29 24/29 24/29 24/29 24/29 Flange I.D. mm 119 172 224 274 332 Flange O.D. mm 153 ±2 215 ±2 270 ±2 320 ±2 380 ±2 Order No. 12 24 78246 12 24 78257 12 24 78261 12 24 78266 12 24 78269 Desiccators with Knobbed Lid, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Desiccators with knobbed lid. Designed for use under full vacuum. DIN 12491. DN 100 150 200 250 300 Flange I.D. mm 119 172 224 274 332 Flange O.D. mm 153 ±2 215 ±2 270 ±2 320 ±2 380 ±2 Order No. 12 24 78146 12 24 78157 12 24 78161 12 24 78166 12 24 78169 Desiccator Accessories, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL 1 Desiccator lower parts, DURAN® with flat flange, without connection, for lids of all types, DIN 12491. DN 100 150 200 Order No. 12 24 77046 12 24 77057 12 24 77061 DN 250 300 Order No. 12 24 77066 12 24 77069 2 Desiccator lower parts, DURAN® with flat flange, with standard ground (NS 24/29), tubulature, type NOVUS, DIN 12491. DN 100 150 200 Order No. 12 24 77146 12 24 77157 12 24 77161 DN 250 300 Order No. 12 24 77166 12 24 77169 3 Desiccator lower parts, DURAN® with flat flange, threaded connection GL 32, type MOBILEX, DIN 12491. DN 150 200 Order No. 12 24 77257 12 24 77261 DN 250 300 Order No. 12 24 77266 12 24 77269 Continued on next page

126

Containers Desiccators, Accessories 4 5 7 6 8 9 AT AL AN AK AM AO co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 125 Desiccators, Accessories 4 Desiccator lower parts, DURAN® with ring-grooved flange, suitable for all lids. DN 200 5 Desiccator lids, DURAN® with knob, suitable for all lower parts, DIN 12491. DN 250 300 Order No. 12 24 41046 12 24 41057 12 24 41061 DN 100 150 200 6 Desiccator lids, DURAN® Order No. 12 24 77361 Order No. 12 24 41066 12 24 41069 with connecting tubulature NOVUS 24/29 for standard ground stopcocks, type NOVUS, DIN 12491. Order No. 12 24 42066 12 24 42069 DN 250 300 DN 100 150 200 Order No. 12 24 42046 12 24 42057 12 24 42061 7 Desiccator lids, DURAN® with special tubulature 24/29 with groove, suitable for safety outlet type WERTEX. DN 150 Order No. 12 24 43057 DN 250 Order No. 12 24 43066 8 Desiccator lids, DURAN® with screw thread connection, type MOBILEX, DIN 12491. DN 150 200 Order No. 12 24 44057 12 24 44061 DN 250 300 Order No. 12 24 44066 12 24 44069 O-rings suitable for desiccators, made of silicone (VMQ), for articles since 1996. DN 150 200 9 O-rings Order No. 12 29 21557 12 29 21561 DN 250 Order No. 12 29 21566 spare parts, suitable for desiccators, made of silicon (VMQ). Tmax = 200°C. DN 150 200 Order No. 12 29 22457 12 29 22460 DN 250 Order No. 12 29 22466 AT Screw cap, PBT with pierced aperture for threaded connections, type MOBILEX Thread GL 32 AK Seal with pierced aperture for MOBILEX threaded connectors. Thread GL 32 AL Cap, PBT with seal for threaded connections, type MOBILEX Thread GL 32 Order No. 13 29 22708 PU pc/Pack 10 Order No. 13 29 23612 PU pc/Pack 10 Order No. 11 29 24019 PU pc/Pack 10 AM Desiccator plates made of metal, DIN EN 10143 DN DN 250 100 150 300 200 Order No. 12 29 08046 12 29 08057 12 29 08061 AN Desiccator plates made of porcelain DN 100 150 200 Order No. 12 29 72546 12 29 72557 12 29 72561 DN 250 300 AO Stopcock with PTFE spindle With standard ground (NS) cone 24/29 for side tubulature. for Type NOVUS Order No. 12 29 08066 12 29 08069 Order No. 12 29 72566 12 29 72569 Order No. 12 24 79803 Continued on next page

127

Containers Desiccators, Accessories 1 Desiccators, Accessories Stopcock with PTFE spindle With standard ground (NS) cone 24/29 for tubulature lid. for Type NOVUS 1 2 2 Stopcock with PTFE spindle For threaded connectors. for Type MOBILEX 3 Stopper with standard ground (NS) joint 24/29 For safety connectors, typ WERTEX. NS 24/29 Order No. 12 24 79904 Order No. 12 24 79703 Order No. 12 24 79603 3 4 co d e b e w WWEQ2091 5 7 6 co d e b e w WWEQ2092 8 9 co d e b e w WWEQ2093 126 Vacuum Desiccators, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Vacuum desiccators, designed for use under full vacuum. Lower part with standard ground (NS) side tubulature and stopcock, lid with knob, with- out inserts (for inserts see page 124). Available only as individual parts. Tubing NS Flange I.D. Article DN 4 Lid 100 Lid 150 Lid 200 Lid 250 Lid 300 5 Bottom part 100 Bottom part 150 Bottom part 200 Bottom part 250 Bottom part 300 6 Stopcock – – – – – – 24/29 24/29 24/29 24/29 24/29 24/29 mm 119 172 224 274 332 119 172 224 274 332 – Flange O.D. mm 153 ±2 215 ±2 270 ±2 320 ±2 380 ±2 153 ±2 215 ±2 270 ±2 320 ±2 380 ±2 – Order No. 12 24 41046 12 24 41057 12 24 41061 12 24 41066 12 24 41069 12 24 77146 12 24 77157 12 24 77161 12 24 77166 12 24 77169 12 24 79803 Vacuum Desiccators, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Vacuum desiccators with WERTEX safety stopper NS 24/29 in the lid, without inserts (for inserts see page 124). Available only as individual parts. Designed for use under full vacuum. Article 7 Lid Lid 8 Bottom part Bottom part 9 Stopper DN 150 250 150 250 – Flange I.D. mm 172 274 172 274 – Flange O.D. mm 215 ±2 320 ±2 215 ±2 320 ±2 – Order No. 12 24 43057 12 24 43066 12 24 77057 12 24 77066 12 24 79603 Vacuum Desiccators, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Vacuum desiccators with MOBILEX thread in the lid and lower part, with stopcock. Available only as individual parts. Designed for use under full vacuum. Lids and lower parts Article Lid Lid Lid Lid Bottom part Bottom part Bottom part Bottom part Stopcock DN 150 200 250 300 150 200 250 300 Flange I.D. mm 172 224 274 332 172 224 274 332 Flange O.D. mm 215 ±2 270 ±2 320 ±2 380 ±2 215 ±2 270 ±2 320 ±2 380 ±2 Order No. 12 24 44057 12 24 44061 12 24 44066 12 24 44069 12 24 77257 12 24 77261 12 24 77266 12 24 77269 Article Stopcock with PTFE spindle Order No. 12 24 79703 Continued on next page

128

Desiccators, Accessories Caps and seal Article Screw cap for side connection Seal Screw cap for lid Order No. 13 29 22708 13 29 23612 11 29 24019 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 Desiccator Plates, Hard Porcelain, IDL Desiccator plates, DIN 12911, with numerous small holes of approx. 5 mm dia. and central hole of 20 mm dia. Ø mm 90 140 190 235 280 Height mm 7.9 8.9 9.4 10.6 10.6 Order No. 21 00 22709 21 00 22714 21 00 22719 21 00 22723 21 00 22728 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 Containers Desiccators, Accessories co d e b e w WW7R3293 Desiccator Plates, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Unbreakable, autoclavable desiccator plates made from a light green ceramic-met- al composite. Greater resistance to thermal shock than porcelain. Fire-polished, corrosion-resistant, inert, non-stick glass surface bonded to metal. The plates are marked with numbered quadrants for easy location of crucibles and other containers. Outer Ø mm 230 Order No. 23 87 53123 Vacuum Desiccators, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Transparent 250 mm polycarbonate cover, body and stopcock made of polypropyl- ene, PTFE TFE plug. Will not shatter or implode even at full vacuum when used accord- ing to the instructions packed with the product. Body is impervious to acids, bases and all usual desiccants. Convenient vacuum connection on body makes cover easy to han- dle. Straight-bore design eliminates stopcock leakage. The stopcock can be used with 6.4 mm I.D. vacuum tubing. No need to draw a vacuum to make cover airtight - just grease the sealing lip.Recessed rim on cover keeps grease off bench top when cover is set down. Takes any standard 230 mm desiccator plate. Ø mm 330 Height mm 245 Inner height above plate max. mm 145 Order No. 23 87 53100 Non-autoclavable co d e b e w WWRJN100 co d e b e w WWRJN097 Vacuum Desiccators, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Transparent desiccators made of polycarbonate without the illustrated accessories, lightweight, unbreakable, for vacuum and normal pressure applications. No danger of implosion when used properly. Silicone O-ring assures an airtight seal; no need to use grease. Withstands a vacuum of 711 mm Hg for 24 hours. Vacuum connection possibili- ties on lid and body. Takes any standard 230 mm desiccator plate, with stopcock made of PTFE co d e b e w WWRJN098 Ø mm 280 N.B.: Do not autoclave when close or under vacuum! (Make sure the stopcock is open). 23 87 53110 Height mm 330 Order No. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 127

129

Containers Desiccators, Accessories 1 2 3 4 Desiccators, Accessories SICCO Maxi Desiccators, Bohlender Its job is to keep moisture-sensitive products dry, protected, and free of dust. This is achieved through the use of SILICA gel, whose absorbent properties considerably reduce the relative humidity inside the desiccator. The unit is sealed from the outside via a lined foam rubber gasket door. For better stability, the Maxi has a reinforced aluminium frame. The door has a magnet lock for convenience. The desiccator comes as standard with a digital hygrometer, four variable-height, stainless steel shelves, usable with up to 16 shelves, and one or more floor pans for the desiccant. Mounted on four wheels, the unit can be moved around with ease. Parking brakes prevent slippage. Technical data: 311 litres Capacity: 30 kg Weight: 160 kg Total all-over load: normal pressure Pressure load: -20 to +70°C Temperature resistance: Outer dimensions (W×H×D): Maxi 1 – 1 chamber / 1 door: 540 × 1150 × 530 mm Maxi 2 – 2 chambers / 2 doors: 540 × 1150 × 530 mm Inner dimensions (W×H×D): Maxi 1 – 1 chamber / 1 door: 495 × 1030 × 510 mm Maxi 2 – 2 chambers / 2 doors: 495 × 502 × 510 mm SICCO Maxi – desiccator PMMA enclosures, transparent Article 1 Maxi 1 Maxi 2 SICCO Maxi – desiccator Protect PMMA enclosures, orange, reduced light incidence Article 2 Maxi 1 Protect Maxi 2 Protect SICCO Maxi – desiccator Black PMMA enclosures, black, opaque to visible and UV light Article 3 Maxi 1 Black Maxi 2 Black SICCO Maxi – desiccator Antistatik Bluish transparent PC ESD, antistatically Article Maxi 1 Antistatik 4 Maxi 2 Antistatik Order No. 23 17 18521 23 17 18531 Order No. 10 17 62707 10 17 62807 Order No. 10 17 63608 10 17 63707 Order No. 10 17 62207 10 17 62307 SICCO Super-Maxi 1-Desiccator Two connections for gas filling including quick couplings with self-sealing valves and hose 5 Article 5 Super-Maxi 1 Order No. 10 17 63201 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical 128

130

Containers Desiccators, Accessories Desiccators, Accessories SICCO Star Desiccators, Bohlender SICCO Star Desiccators Desiccators with gentle magnetic lock. Just as suitable for the storage of sensitive prod- ucts such as electronic components and for keeping electrical or optical appliances that need to be protected against high air humidity. Rubber seal all the way round. A reinforced aluminum frame enhances the Star‘s stability. The integrated, easy-to-read digital preci- sion hygrometer comes as standard, as do the four variably adjustable removable shelves (can be expanded to max. 26 shelves), a floor tray and desiccant. 1 2 Technical data: 51 l Capacity liters: 7 kg Weight: 30 kg Total all-over load: Normal pressure Pressure load: -20 to +70°C Temperature resistance: Outer dimensions W×H×D: 310 × 525 × 375 mm Usable interior space W×H×D: 2260 × 480 × 330 mm Article 1 SICCCO Star desiccator PMMA enclosures, transparent 2 SICCO Star-Desiccator Protect PMMA enclosures, orange, reduced light incidence 3 SICCCO Star desiccator Black PMMA enclosures, black, opaque to visible and UV light 4 SICCCO Star desiccator Antistatic PC ESD enclosures, bluish transparent, antistatically 5 SICCO Star-Vitrum Desiccator Panels made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Technical data: 6 SICCO Auto-Star-Desiccator Automatic drying 7 SICCO Super Star-desiccator Two connections for gas filling with quick couplings Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: clear borosilicate glass 3.3 -20°C to +150°C Order No. 23 17 18717 10 17 67907 10 17 69107 10 17 61007 10 17 64107 10 17 67707 10 17 67507 3 4 5 6 7 SICCO Star-Desiccator Horizontal, Bohlender Including two shelves made of acrylic glass, tray, hygrometer and desiccant, usable with up to 13 shelves, stackable, door opens forward. • Reinforced aluminium frame with acrylic panels • Door with magnetic catch and circular rubber seal • Non slip rubber feet • Easy to read electronic hygrometer • Variable height shelves made of acrylic glass • Telescopic shelves • Desiccant tray • Silica gel included Especially suitable for wide products such as A3 sheets or conductor boards. SICCO Desiccators are designed for storing or drying humidity sensitive products using silica gel. The tight fitting door protects the contents from contamination from the atmos- phere. The controlled environment inside the desiccators are ideal for storing reference materials, retained samples, metallographic specimen, tobacco and DNA-samples. Technical data: Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: Use: Stand: Maximum all-over load per shelf: Total all-over load: clear PMMA from -20°C to +70°C normal pressure rubber feet 1,5 kg 30 kg Outer dimensions W × H × D mm 525×340×375 Usable interior space W × H × D mm 480×260×330 Useful volume l 42 Total volume l 45 Weight kg 7 Order No. 10 17 69907 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 129

131

Containers Desiccators, Accessories 1 2 3 4 5 6 Desiccators, Accessories SICCO Big-Star-Desiccator, Bohlender SICCO Big-Star desiccator Desiccators are designed to keep products susceptible to humidity dry in a safe, protect- ed, and dust-free environment. This goal is achieved by the addition of silica gel. SICCO desiccators are sealed by a circumferential rubber gasket. For added stability, the Big-Stars have a reinforced aluminium frame. The integrated digital hygrometer is easy to read; it comes as a standard, just as the four variably adjustable stainless steel interme- diate shelves (max. 8 shelves can be fitted) and a drying tray. Technical data: 156 liters Interior volume: 18 kg Gewicht: 80 kg Total all-over load: normal pressure Pressure load: from -20°C to +70°C Temperature resistance: 540 × 1150 × 530 mm Outer dimensions (W×H×D): Usable interior space (W×H×D): 495 × 1030 × 510 mm Article 1 SICCO Big-Star-desiccator PMMA enclosures, transparent 2 SICCO Big-Star-desiccator Protect PMMA enclosures, orange, reduced light incidence 3 SICCO Big-Star-desiccator Black PMMA enclosures, black, opaque to visible and UV light 4 SICCO Big-Star-desiccator Antistatik Bluish transparent PC ESD, antistatically. 5 SICCO Big-Star-Vitrum-Desiccator Heat-resistant borosilicate glass 3.3, temperature resistance -70°C to +150°C 6 SICCO Auto-Big-Star-desiccator Automatic drying Order No. 10 17 69607 10 17 62607 10 17 63907 10 17 62507 10 17 64407 10 17 69407 SICCO Big-Star-Desiccator Low, Bohlender Especially suitable for wide products, for storing moisture-sensitive reference materials, retained samples, etc.. Placement in shelves due to low height. Drying with silica-gel (optionally available). • Aluminium frame with panels made of clear acrylic glass (PMMA) • Door with magnetic catch and circular rubber seal • Telescopic shelves (optional up to 5 pieces) • Non slip rubber feet • Stackable Delivery: 1 hygrometer, 1 shelf made of perforated stainless steel with aluminium rails, 1 desiccant tray. Technical data: Temperature resistance: Use: All-over load per shelf: Total all-over load: -20°C to +70°C normal pressure max. 30 kg 80 kg Outer dimensions W × H × D mm 550×330×580 Usable interior space W × H × D mm 495×250×540 Useful volume l 91 Weight approx. kg 13 Order No. 10 17 69707 Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! 130

132

Containers Desiccators, Accessories Desiccators, Accessories SICCO Tower-Star-Desiccator, Bohlender Including four shelves made of acrylic glass, tray, hygrometer anddesiccant, usable with up to 38 shelves, stackable. • Reinforced aluminium frame with acrylic panels • Door with magnetic catch and circular rubber seal • Non slip rubber feet • Easy to read electronic hygrometer • Variable height shelves made of acrylic glass • Telescopic shelves • Desiccant tray • Silica gel included SICCO Desiccators are designed for storing or drying humidity sensitive products using silica gel. The tight fitting door protects the contents from contamination from the atmos- phere. The controlled environment inside the desiccators are ideal for storing reference materials, retained samples, metallographic specimen, tobacco and DNA-samples. Technical data: Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: Use: Stand: Maximum all-over load per shelf: Total all-over load: clear PMMA from -20°C to +70°C normal pressure rubber feet 10 kg 40 kg Outer dimensions W × H × D mm 310×375×375 Usable interior space W × H × D mm 260×690×330 Useful volume l 60 Total volume l 63 Weight kg 8 Order No. 10 17 63807 SICCO Vacuum-Desiccator, Bohlender Solid walls of 25 mm thickness, circular silicone gasket, vacuum gauge, V 1880-04 includ- ing two shelves, usable with up to three shelves, V 1880-08 including three shelves, usa- ble with up to five shelves, and V 1880-12 including four shelves, usable with up to seven shelves. • Clear acrylic panels, interior is visible from all sides • Circular silicone seal • Non slip rubber feet • Variable height shelves • Vacuum gauge (0-760 mm of mercury) • Vacuum up to 0,0001 Torr • Two needle valves with O.D. 9,0 mm SICCO Vacuum Desiccators are suitable for storing sensitive products in a vacuum. The vacuum inside the desiccator ensures rapid drying of the stored products. These systems allow storage in an oxygen and carbon dioxide free environment and are, for example, suitable for storage of semiconductor samples. Technical data: Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: Use: Stand: Excess length of valves and vacuum gauge: 100 mm Maximum all-over load per shelf: clear PMMA from -20°C to +70°C vacuum up to 0,0001 Torr rubber feet 9 kg Outer dimensions W × H × D mm 300×340×300 300×440×300 315×550×310 Useful volume l Usable interior space W × H × D mm 260×260×260 17.5 260×360×260 24.5 265×460×260 31.5 Total volume l 17.5 24.5 31.5 Weight kg 15 18 27 Load capacity max. kg 30 40 50 Order No. 10 17 68804 10 17 68808 10 17 68812 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 131

133

Containers Desiccators, Accessories / Sample Vials Desiccators, Accessories SICCO Mini 1 Premium Desiccators, Bohlender These desiccators are designed to keep small parts susceptible to humidity dry in a safe, protected, and dust-free environment. This goal is achieved by the addition of silica gel. The desiccator is sealed by a circumferential rubber gasket. The handy-sized Mini units have non-slip rubber feet and are easy to stack. The integrated digital hygrometer is easy to read; it is comprised in the delivery as a standard, just as two intermediate shelves made of PMMA and a small jar of silica gel. Technical data: Capacity: 6.2 l Weight: 0.9 kg Total all-over load: 3 kg Pressure load: normal pressure Temperature resistance: -35°C to +70°C 221 × 183 × 214 mm Outer dimensions (W×H×D): Usable interior space (W×H×D): 212 × 162 × 180 mm Article 1 SICCO Mini 1 – Premium desiccator Polycarbonate (PC) enclosures, transparent 2 SICCO Mini 1 – Premium desiccator Protect Polycarbonate (PC) enclosures, orange 3 SICCO Mini 1 – Premium desiccator Black PMMA enclosures, black, opaque to visible and UV light 4 SICCO Mini-Desiccator Mobile Premium With practical handle 5 SICCO Mini-Desiccator for Gas Filling Premium Two connections for gas filling including quick couplings with self-sealing valves and hose Order No. 10 17 69501 10 17 69426 10 17 69406 10 17 61986 10 17 61996 KC drying beads see page 213/214 Sample Vials Disposable Sample Containers, Gamma Sterilized, BOESECKE Disposable Sample Containers made of PP, closure PE, 125 ml, gamma sterilized, with safety and writing label. Article Disposable Sample Containers, gamma sterilized ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 10 65 10125 PU pc/Pack 250 Sample Vials with Closure, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Sample vials with tight-fitting snap closures made of low-density polyethylene. Volume ml 5 12 18 28 50 75 Ø mm 24 27 27 27 37 37 Height mm 25 36 53 85 71 107 Order No. 22 87 62501 22 87 62503 22 87 62505 22 87 62507 22 87 62509 22 87 62511 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 4 1 3 5 co d e b e w WW11M002 co d e b e w WWRJN035 132

134

Sample Vials Sample Containers, PP, VITLAB Transparent. With snap-on lid made of PE-LD. Conical shape. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EC) No. 10/2011. Containers Sample Vials Height mm 25 57 97 110 Ø mm 20 22 30 50 Order No. 22 85 00101 22 85 00110 22 85 00119 22 85 00122 PU pc/Pack 25 25 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Volume ml 5 18 50 160 Volume ml 1 2,5 5 8 7 20 25 35 Sample Containers, PE-LD, VITLAB Transparent. With attached snap-on lid made of PE-LD. Height mm 32 32 50 57 32 74 52 74 Ø mm 8 14 15 17 23 25 31 31 Order No. 22 85 00201 22 85 00204 22 85 00207 22 85 00210 22 85 00213 22 85 00216 22 85 00219 22 85 00222 PU pc/Pack 500 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Sample Containers, PFA, VITLAB With screw cap made of PFA. Cylindrical, tall shape. Ideal for sample collection, transport and storage of samples. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Volume ml 30 60 90 180 Ø mm 38 38 54 54 Height mm 54 90 62 112 Thread GL PU Order No. 40 40 56 56 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 22 85 13024 22 85 13034 22 85 13044 22 85 13054 Sample Tubes, PFA, VITLAB Sample tubes made from PFA for sample preparation and for use in autosampler racks. With or without individually calibrated ring mark at 10 ml with GL 25 screw cap made from PFA or PE stopper. Ø mm 16 16 22 22 Ring mark at ml – 10 – 10 – Stopper – Screw cap GL 25 Height mm 110 110 110 110 Order No. 22 85 10370 10 85 30375 10 85 30385 22 85 10380 Volume ml 12 12 15 15 Lid co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 133

135

Containers Centrifuge Tubes, Racks co d e b e w WWRJN117 co d e b e w WWEQ2050 2 3 WWFNK001 6 4 5 1 co d e b e w 134 Centrifuge Tubes, Racks Centrifuge Bottles, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Autoclavable centrifuge bottles made of polypropylene copolymer with polypropyl- ene screw closure. Translucent bottles have excellent chemical resistance. Strong and rigid. Sealing cap available for 1000-ml capacity bottles. When using the 250-ml bottle in the Sorvall GSA rotor, use the NALGENE centrifuge bottle adapter. Order No. 23 87 31202 is designed for use with IEC rotors. Before autoclaving, set closure on top of the bottle without engaging the threads. The 2000-ml bottle is also available as a sterile version; for both variants, the support adapter (Art. No. 75007686) is required, see picture. For prop- er performance these bottles must be filled to at least 80% of the total capacity, except for Order No. 23 87 31203, which must NOT be filled to more than 75% of total capacity. Order No. Volume ml 250 500 500 1000 1000 2000 2000 (steril) load capacity up to g 13200 4800 (for IEC rotors) 4800 7100 7100 (for IEC rotors) 7333 (for H-12000 rotors) 7333 (for H-12000 rotors) PU pc/Pack 4 4 4 4 4 6 24 23 87 31201 23 87 31202 23 87 31203 23 87 31204 23 87 31205 10 87 31206 10 87 31207 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. N.B.: An adapter is essential for Sorvall GSA rotors (see Order No. 23 87 31250). Centrifuge Tubes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL 1 Centrifuge tubes with round bottom, DIN 58970 (Part 2) Ø Order No. Height mm 100 100 100 100 115 100 147 mm 12 16 24 34 401) 44 561) 2 Centrifuge tube with conical bottom, angle 30° Ø Volume ml 6 12 25 50 80 80 250 mm 16 3 Centrifuge tubes with conical bottom, angle 60° Ø Volume ml 12 Height mm 100 Height mm 100 100 Volume ml 25 50 mm 24 34 1) Non-DIN size PU pc/Pack 50 50 10 10 10 10 10 11 21 60110 11 21 60111 11 21 60114 11 21 60117 11 21 60124 11 21 60126 11 21 60136 Order No. 11 24 26309 PU pc/Pack 50 Order No. 11 21 61114 11 21 61117 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Centrifuge Tubes, Starke Article 4 ASTM centrifuge tubes, 37 mm Ø, cylindrical, with conical bot- Order No. 11 59 04955 tom, according to ASTM D 91 and ASTM D 96, 8 in., 100 ml Graduation: 0 to 1 ml : 0.05 ml, 1 to 2 ml : 0.10 ml, 2 to 3 ml : 0.20 ml, 3 ot 5 ml : 0.5 ml, 5 to 10 ml : 1 ml, 10 to 25 ml : 5 ml, 25 to 100 ml : 25 ml. Also available with brown graduation and small beading. Article 5 ASTM centrifuge tubes, pear-shaped, with cylindrical bottom Order No. 11 59 04956 part, according to ASTM D 96, 100 ml Graduation: 0 to 1.5 ml : 0.1 ml, 1.5 to 3.0 ml : 0.5 ml, 3.0 to 5.0 ml : 0.5 ml, 5.0 to 10.0 ml : 1 ml, 10 to 25 ml : 5 ml, 25 to 100 ml : 25 ml. Article 6 ASTM centrifuge tubes, 44 mm Ø, cylindrical, with conical Order No. 11 59 04957 bottom part, according to ASTM D 96, 6 in., 100 ml Graduation: 0 to 0.5 ml : 0.05 ml, 0.5 to 2 ml : 0.10 ml, 2 to 3 ml : 0.20 ml, 3 to 5 ml : 0.5 ml, 5 to 10 ml : 1 ml, 10 to 25 ml : 5 ml, with markings at 50 and 100 ml. All made of borosilicate glass 3.3

136

Containers Centrifuge Tubes, Racks co d e b e w WWW4U098 co d e b e w WW2NY330 co d e b e w WW2NY173 Centrifuge Tubes, Racks Centrifuge Tubes with Thread, LAT Centrifuge tubes with thread Thick-walled centrifuge tubes with thread, made of borosilicate glass. ml Volume 9 9 23 45 75 75 240 Ø mm Height mm NS 16 16 24 34 40 44 56 100 100 100 100 115 100 147 GL14 GL18 GL25 GL25 GL32 GL32 GL45 Bottom conical Order No. 10 20 10151 10 20 10152 10 20 10153 10 20 10154 10 20 10155 10 20 10156 10 20 10157 round Order No. 10 20 10161 10 20 10162 10 20 10163 10 20 10164 10 20 10165 10 20 10166 10 20 10167 Centrifuge Tube Racks, neoLab® 5 interlocking plastic racks for 50 ml centrifuge tubes in a set. Each rack can be used as stand-alone rack. Molded circular base ring keeps conical or round-bottom tubes in place. Autoclavable. The set consists of one rack in blue, green, yellow, pink and orange colour. Dimensions: 53 × 70 × 67 mm Article Rack for centrifuge tubes 50 ml Order No. 10 01 26612 PU pc/Pack 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Centrifuge Tube Racks, neoLab® Centrifuge tube racks made of epoxy-coated wire, autoclavable, for conical 50 ml centrifuge tubes type ”Blue Max“ and for 250 ml centrifuge flasks. Compartment size mm compartments Order No. Ø 30 60 × 60 30 × 30 30 × 30 30 × 30 39 01 13108 39 01 62130 39 01 13110 39 01 13111 39 01 13112 Quantity 1 2 × 3 2 × 4 4 × 4 6 × 6 Outer dimensions L × W × H mm Ø 67 × 67 208 × 135 × 102 147 × 80 × 89 158 × 150 × 92 229 × 229 × 89 Centrifuge Tubes, Neubert-Glas Cylindrical with conical end, standard-ground neck, no stopper, Boro 3.3 Centrifuge tubes, non-graduated Volume ml 10 10 15 Graduation ml - - - Outer dimensions mm 17×1.2×120 17×1.2×120 17×1.2×155 NS 12.5/21 14.5/23 14.5/23 Centrifuge tubes, blue, graduated Volume ml 10 10 15 Graduation ml 1/10 1/10 1/10 Outer dimensions mm 17×1.2×120 17×1.2×120 17×1.2×155 NS 12.5/21 14.5/23 14.5/23 Other sizes available on request. Order No. 11 11 43112 11 11 43114 11 11 43115 Order No. 11 11 43212 11 11 43214 11 11 43215 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 135

137

Containers Specimen Jars co d e b e w WWEQ2158 co d e b e w WWEQ2182 co d e b e w 136 Specimen Jars Specimen Jars, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Specimen jars with ground-in knobbed lid. Volume approx. ml 80 175 460 530 890 1875 1150 2675 1575 3475 Height mm 63 103 103 153 153 153 203 203 253 253 Ø mm 65 65 115 90 115 162 115 162 115 162 Order No. 12 24 20902 12 24 20909 12 24 20911 12 24 20924 12 24 20926 12 24 20928 12 24 20938 12 24 20939 12 24 20949 12 24 20950 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Specimen Jars, Neubert-Glas Specimen jars with foot, cover with ground joint and handle, 3.3 borosilicate glass Ø Order No. Height mm 60 100 80 120 mm 60 12 11 70960 60 12 11 70965 80 12 11 70980 80 12 11 70984 Other sizes available on request. Ø mm 100 100 100 Height mm 100 150 200 Order No. 12 11 70990 12 11 70992 12 11 70995 Inspection Glasses DURAN® Specimenjar, DURAN Group / IDL Sample glasses, cylindrical, standing on stopper. Vol. ml 100 300 600 750 1200 Ø mm 52 69 81 90 100 H mm 135 163 214 240 253 Ground Ø mm 34.5 45 50 60 60 Order No. 12 21 58024 12 21 58039 12 21 58048 12 21 58051 12 21 58058 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

138

Lab Aids Racks, Stands CHAPTER OVERVIEW Racks, Stands 137 Test Vials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Test Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Lead Rings, Cork Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Small Parts Containers 146 Storage Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Instruments 146 Spatulas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Spoons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Shovels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Pincettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Scissors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Tongs, Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Scalpels, Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Funnels 169 Funnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Tubing, Accessories 173 Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Hoses for Gas Burners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Connectors, Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Test Vials Combi-Racks for Microtubes, neoLab® Stopcocks, Valves, Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Other Valves see Glass Construction, Glass Equipment 322 Stoppers 190 Stoppers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Foils and Bags 192 Foils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Stand Materials 197 Stand Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Lifting Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Recording, Marking, Identification 207 Pens, Labeling Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Identification Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Adhesive Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Aids, Tools 212 Boiling Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Operating Resources, Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Racks made of PP, autoclavable. Front for 1.5 ml and 2 ml tubes, rear for 0.5 ml tubes, 96 wells. Dimensions: 210 × 115 × 28 mm (L × W × D) Combi-Racks, 96 wells Article Combi-Rack Combi-Rack Combi-Rack Combi-Rack Combi-Rack Combi-Rack Combi-Rack Accessories Article Lid made of PP Colour yellow orange red violet blue green transparent Order No. 29 01 22570 29 01 22571 29 01 22572 29 01 22573 29 01 22574 29 01 22575 29 01 22576 Order No. 29 01 22595 Combi Racks, neoLab® Rack with snap-fit lid for 96 microtubes on one side or 96 reaction vessels 1.5 – 2.0 ml on the other side. Safe to carry with wide gripper bars on either side. Material: polypropylene Dimensions: 246 × 121 × 50 mm Article Combi rack with snap-fit lid Combi rack with snap-fit lid Combi rack with snap-fit lid Combi rack with snap-fit lid Colour nature blue yellow green Order No. 29 01 21835 10 01 21836 10 01 21837 10 01 21838 co d e b e w WW2NY197 co d e b e w WW2NY292 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 137

139

Lab Aids Racks, Stands co d e b e w co d e b e w WW2NY237 WW2NY207 2 1 3 co d e b e w WW2NY041 Test Vials Aluminium Blocks for Tubes, neoLab® Aluminum blocks for tempering tubes and PCR microtubes. Ideal for all temperature-crit- ical work. Practical microtitration format, handy and compact. Uniform temperature dis- tribution in the block. Fits all tubes and PCR microtubes from leading manufacturers. Material: solid aluminium Dimensions: 118 × 80 × 30 mm Quantity wells 96 (8 × 12) 24 (4 × 6) 24 (4 × 6) 24 (4 × 6) 30 (5 × 6) 8 (2 × 4) for 0.2 ml PCR tubes 1.5 / 2 ml test tubes 2.2 ml test tubes 1+2 ml cryo tubes 0.5 ml test tubes 5 ml test tubes Order No. 29 01 78005 29 01 78006 29 01 78007 29 01 78008 29 01 78009 10 01 78004 LaboBox-System, neoLab® 1 The racks At the heart of the LaboBox®-System are the racks for reaction flasks, microtubes, cryo-tubes or test tubes, which can also be used as bench stands. The bottoms are closed. For ease of identification, the wells are numbered and lettered. The rack has two handles on the sides for carrying. The racks can with stand temperatures of -130°C to +130°C and can be autoclaved. Material: PC Dimensions: 164 × 76 × 28 mm (L×W×H) for Colour blue blue blue transparent transparent Reation vessels 1.5 ml Reation vessels 1.5 ml Vials up to 12.5 mm Ø Vials up to 12.5 mm Ø Vials up to 15.0 mm Ø Vials up to 15.0 mm Ø transparent Hole conical conical cylindrical cylindrical cylindrical cylindrical Places Order No. 5 × 12 5 × 12 5 × 10 5 × 10 4 × 9 4 × 9 24 01 22311 24 01 22332 24 01 22312 24 01 22333 24 01 22313 24 01 22334 2 The cases Stackable LaboBox®cases with covers to encase the LaboBox® racks, in two different height sizes. Simply choose the cases according to the loading height of the rack. The taller case is also suitable for slides 76 × 45 mm. The cases are autoclavable, suitable for cryo-use, and withstand temperatures of -130°C to +130°C. Material: PC, transpar- ent Colour transparent transparent Inner height mm 39 49 L × W × H mm 170 × 83 × 43 170 × 83 × 55 Order No. 24 01 22316 24 01 22317 3 The magazine There‘s room to transport and store all types of racks in the LaboBox®System slot- in magazine. Each level in the magazine takes two cases one behind the other, 3 or 4 levels high depending on the height of the cases. Material: Polypropylene, not suitable for cryo-use Colour white Length × Width × Height mm 185 × 175 × 200 Order No. 24 01 22318 Microtube Racks, neoLab® Acrylic glass racks, model Klinikum Heidelberg, for Eppendorf microtubes, glued and screwed together, for heavy duty. For microtubes 1.5 ml Width mm 50 50 100 125 Width mm 50 100 Height mm 50 50 50 50 Height mm 50 50 Order No. 24 01 15136 24 01 15137 24 01 15138 24 01 15139 Order No. 24 01 15134 24 01 15135 Continued on next page 4 Quantity wells 2 × 12 2 × 6 4 × 12 6 × 12 Length mm 262 132 262 262 4 138 For microtubes 0.5 ml Quantity wells 2 × 12 4 × 12 Length mm 262 262

140

Lab Aids Racks, Stands co d e b e w WW2NY266 Test Vials For microtubes 2.2 ml Quantity wells 2 × 12 4 × 12 Length mm 262 262 For microtubes 5.0 ml Quantity wells 2 × 8 Length mm 224 Width mm 50 100 Width mm 50 Height mm 50 50 Height mm 55 Order No. 24 01 15129 24 01 15130 Order No. 10 01 15125 Microtube Racks, neoLab® Rack fits 1.5 ml and 2 ml Eppendorf microtubes and cryovials, with 8 × 8 slots, square. Simply insert the tiers into the side panels. Fits perfectly into the neoRack system (part number 23 01 22999), so it is very well suited for stacking when filled with tubes. Sturdy bottom so that you can firmly press down caps, alphanumeric marking on openings. Material: Dimensions: Rows: Hole Ø: Article neoRack® neoRack® PP, autoclavable at 121°C 143 × 143 × 34 mm high 8 × 8 12,7 mm Colour red/white red/yellow Places 8 × 8 8 × 8 Order No. 29 01 21642 29 01 21643 co d e b e w WW2NY195 Racks for Microtubes, neoLab® Racks for microtubes, 1.5/2.0 and 5.0 ml • autoclavable up to 121°C, made of PP • with numbered wells Colour fits red yellow green blue yellow 1.5/2.0 ml 1.5/2.0 ml 1.5/2.0 ml 1.5/2.0 ml 5.0 ml Places 2 × 10 2 × 10 2 × 10 2 × 10 2 × 8 Length mm 210 210 210 210 250 Height mm 50 50 50 50 45 Width mm 73 73 73 73 80 Order No. 29 01 21969 29 01 21975 29 01 21976 29 01 21973 10 01 21900 Top Racks for Microtubes, neoLab® Rack made of polypropylene With grip bars • 80 wells for microtube sizes 1.5 and 2 ml • temperature-resistant from -80 to +125°C, autoclavable Dimensions: 225 × 65 × 28 mm (L × W × H) red Colour yellow orange violet blue green natural colored/transparent Accessories Article Box with lid, for 1 Top-Rack Order No. 29 01 22560 29 01 22561 29 01 22562 29 01 22563 29 01 22564 29 01 22565 29 01 22566 Order No. 10 01 22569 co d e b e w WW2NY198 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 139

141

Lab Aids Racks, Stands co d e b e w WWQED039 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWQED040 Test Vials Microcentrifuge Tube Racks, BRAND 1 Microcentrifuge tube racks PP. Microcentrifuge tube racks are stackable, with alphanumerical positions. Racks are made of PP (fdensity 1,2 g/cm3), will not float in waterbath. Operating temperature -20 to 90°C. Autoclavable at 121°C, (2 bar) acc. DIN EN 285. Sturdy construction racks are supplied in two-pieces for convenient and permanent assembly. Available in four different colors. L × W × H: 265 × 126 × 38 mm. Packs of 5. for Ø up to mm 11 11 11 13 13 13 29 49 43550 29 49 43551 29 49 43552 29 49 43600 29 49 43601 29 49 43602 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 5 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 8 × 16 8 × 16 8 × 16 6 × 14 6 × 14 6 × 14 white blue red white blue red Order No. Positions Colour 2 Microcentrifuge tube rack, PP, grey Numbered positions for 20 microcentrifuge tubes, 1.5 ml. Autoclavable (121°C), (2 bar) acc. DIN EN 285 Positions 20 Length × Width × Height mm 210 × 70 × 37 Order No. 10 49 80605 3 adapter 0,5 ml for microcentrifuge tube rack, PP, grey PP. Microcentrifuge tube racks can be equipped with inserts to accommodate 0.5 ml microcentrifuge tubes. Easy permanent assembly. Pack of 20. Article 0.5 ml adapter Order No. 10 49 80608 PU pc/Pack 20 PC. Mini coolers are designed to protect a wide range of solutions (enzymes, DNA, RNA, cell suspensions) by helping to maintain freezer temperatures on the lab bench. Durable polycarbonate filled with non-toxic gel. Mini coolers hold twelve 0.5 ml to 2.0 ml tubes. Order No. Colour Duration min 4 Mini cooler Maintained temperature °C 0 -20 -70 60 60 45 red yellow white 10 49 14930 10 49 14935 10 49 14940 Test Tubes Test Tube Racks, BRAND PP. Versatile and inexpensive racks for common diameters test tubes. Sturdy construc- tion, stackable. Test tube racks are made of PP (filled PP, density 1,2 g/cm3), will not float in waterbath. Alphanumerical positions for clear sample identification. Wide spaces be- tween positions. Operating temperature -20 to 90°C. Autoclavable at 121°C. Racks are supplied in three-pieces for convenient and permanent assembly. Six sizes each available in four different colors. for Ø up to Positions mm 13 13 13 16 16 16 18 18 18 L × W × H mm 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 29 49 43400 29 49 43401 29 49 43402 29 49 43460 29 49 43461 29 49 43462 29 49 43410 29 49 43411 29 49 43412 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 × 14 6 × 14 6 × 14 5 × 11 5 × 11 5 × 11 5 × 11 5 × 11 5 × 11 white blue red white blue red white blue red Colour Order No. 140 Continued on next page

142

Test Tubes Lab Aids Racks, Stands for Ø up to mm 20 20 20 25 25 25 30 30 30 Positions 4 × 10 4 × 10 4 × 10 4 × 8 4 × 8 4 × 8 3 × 7 3 × 7 3 × 7 L × W × H mm 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 75 265 × 126 × 88 265 × 126 × 88 265 × 126 × 88 265 × 126 × 88 265 × 126 × 88 265 × 126 × 88 Colour Order No. white blue red white blue red white blue red 29 49 43420 29 49 43421 29 49 43422 29 49 43430 29 49 43431 29 49 43432 29 49 43440 29 49 43441 29 49 43442 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Test Tube Racks, Hecht-ASSISTENT 1 Test tube racks made of Plexiglas® with number at each hole, one level Article For 12 tubes up to approx. 13 mm Ø, without rods For 6 tubes up to approx. 18 mm Ø, without rods For 12 tubes up to approx. 18 mm Ø, without rods For 24 tubes up to approx. 18 mm Ø, without rods For 33 tubes up to approx. 18 mm Ø, without rods (Takata rack) For 12 tubes up to approx. 18 mm Ø, with 6 rods Order No. 24 18 08070 24 18 08086 24 18 08082 24 18 08084 24 18 08083 24 18 08092 2 Test tube racks made of polystyrene Article For 12 tubes up to approx. 20 mm Ø, without rods 3 Test tube racks made of wire with white plastic coating for test and centrifuge tubes Article For 12 tubes up to approx. 17 mm Ø, height approx. 80 mm For 24 tubes up to approx. 17 mm Ø, height approx. 80 mm For 36 tubes up to approx. 17 mm Ø, height approx. 80 mm For 48 tubes up to approx. 17 mm Ø, height approx. 80 mm For 48 tubes up to approx. 13 mm Ø, height approx. 40 mm (4 rows of 12 holes) Order No. 24 18 08140 Order No. 24 18 08152 24 18 08154 24 18 08156 24 18 08158 24 18 08160 1 2 3 Unwire™ -Test Tube Half-Racks, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Autoclavable racks based on RESMER manufacturing technology, half the size of the Unwire™ test tube racks 24 87 59701 to 59746. co d e b e w WWRJN128 Colour red white blue green white blue green white blue green white blue white blue green red red red Quantity wells 6×6 6×6 6×6 6×6 6×6 6×6 6×6 6×6 4×5 4×5 4×5 4×5 4×4 4×4 3×3 3×3 3×3 3×3 co d e b e w Tubing Ø mm 13 13 13 13 16 16 16 16 20 20 20 20 25 25 30 30 30 30 L × W × H mm 102×102×56 102×102×56 102×102×56 102×102×56 126×126×68 126×126×68 126×126×68 126×126×68 128×103×83 128×103×83 128×103×83 128×103×83 122×122×75 122×122×75 109×109×84 109×109×84 109×109×84 109×109×84 Order No. 24 87 59811 24 87 59814 24 87 59815 24 87 59816 24 87 59821 24 87 59824 24 87 59825 24 87 59826 24 87 59831 24 87 59834 24 87 59835 24 87 59836 24 87 59851 10 87 59854 24 87 59841 24 87 59844 24 87 59845 24 87 59846 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 141

143

Lab Aids Racks, Stands co d e b e w WWRJN130 Test Tubes Unwire™ -Test Tube Racks, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Autoclavable racks based on RESMER TECHNOLOGY or enhanced chemical-resist- ant polypropylene in various colors. Alphanumeric identification of holes on the upper tier. Racks of same size are stackable. Will not float in water bath. Wire-free design elim- inates rust and risk of injury. Racks made of polyketone Colour red red white orange yellow blue green white orange yellow blue green white orange yellow blue green white orange yellow blue green white orange yellow blue green red red red Quantity wells 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 4×10 8×3 8×3 8×3 8×3 8×3 8×3 Tubing Ø mm 13 13 13 13 13 13 16 16 16 16 16 16 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 25 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 Length × Width × Height mm 200×102×57 200×102×57 200×102×57 200×102×57 200×102×57 200×102×57 248×127×70 248×127×70 248×127×70 248×127×70 248×127×70 248×127×70 250×102×83 250×102×83 250×102×83 250×102×83 250×102×83 250×102×83 300×121×92 300×121×92 300×121×92 300×121×92 300×121×92 300×121×92 283×108×83 283×108×83 283×108×83 283×108×83 283×108×83 283×108×83 Order No. 24 87 59701 24 87 59702 24 87 59703 24 87 59704 24 87 59705 24 87 59706 24 87 59711 24 87 59712 24 87 59713 24 87 59714 24 87 59715 24 87 59716 24 87 59721 24 87 59722 24 87 59723 24 87 59724 24 87 59725 24 87 59726 24 87 59731 24 87 59732 24 87 59733 24 87 59734 24 87 59735 24 87 59736 24 87 59741 24 87 59742 24 87 59743 24 87 59744 24 87 59745 24 87 59746 Racks made of polypropylene Colour Quantity red white blue green white green red blue wells 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 6×12 Tubing Ø mm 13 13 13 13 16 16 16 16 Length × Width × Height mm 200×102×57 200×102×57 200×102×57 200×102×57 248×127×70 248×127×70 248×127×70 248×127×70 Order No. 24 87 59761 24 87 59762 24 87 59763 24 87 59764 24 87 59771 24 87 59773 24 87 59774 10 87 59772 co d e b e w WWQ7J091 1 142 Test Tube Stands, Detachable, BOCHEM • The frame is detachable • Space-saving transport possible • Displayed model is for test tubes with Ø 17 mm Custom-made models are possible on request. Ø mm 17 17 17 1 18/10 stainless steel 145×52×90 18/10 stainless steel 278×52×90 18/10 stainless steel 287×97×90 Length × Width × Height mm Material Type Places Order No. 2×6 2×12 4×12 12 24 48 10 05 08240 10 05 08241 10 05 08242

144

Test Tubes Test Tube Racks, LINKER 1 Racks with plastic coating Can temporarily withstand temperatures of up to 150°C. co d e b e w WWJTQ003 Lab Aids Racks, Stands Quantity rows Order No. Compartment size mm 14 × 14 14 × 14 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 22 × 22 22 × 22 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 Height mm 40 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 100 100 70 70 70 70 70 70 100 100 100 100 mm 14 × 14 14 × 14 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 18 × 18 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 26 × 26 Height mm 40 70 40 70 70 70 70 70 70 100 100 100 100 100 70 70 70 70 100 100 100 100 4 × 12 4 × 12 2 × 6 2 × 10 2 × 12 4 × 6 3 × 12 4 × 12 10 × 10 2 × 12 4 × 12 2 × 6 2 × 12 2 × 6 2 × 12 3 × 12 4 × 12 2 × 6 2 × 12 3 × 12 4 × 12 4 × 12 4 × 12 4 × 12 2 × 6 2 × 12 4 × 6 3 × 12 4 × 12 10 × 10 2 × 12 4 × 6 3 × 12 4 × 12 10 × 10 2 × 6 2 × 12 3 × 12 4 × 12 2 × 6 2 × 12 3 × 12 4 × 12 2 Racks made of stainless steel, electrochemically polished Compartment size Quantity rows 39 73 11816 39 73 11826 39 73 11831 39 73 11832 39 73 11833 39 73 11834 39 73 11835 39 73 11836 39 73 11837 39 73 11843 39 73 11846 39 73 11851 39 73 11853 39 73 11861 39 73 11863 39 73 11865 39 73 11866 39 73 11871 39 73 11873 39 73 11875 39 73 11876 Order No. 39 73 11916 10 73 01918 39 73 11926 39 73 11931 39 73 11933 39 73 11934 39 73 11935 39 73 11936 39 73 11937 39 73 11943 39 73 11944 39 73 11945 39 73 11946 39 73 11947 39 73 11961 39 73 11963 39 73 11965 39 73 11966 39 73 11971 39 73 11973 39 73 11975 39 73 11976 1 2 co d e b e w WW2NY218 3 8 4 Combi Vial Racks, neoLab® All sides of the rack can be used individually. Material: PP, temperature-resistant from -90°C to +121°C, autoclavable. • 4 holes 30 mm dia. for 50 ml tubes • 12 holes 20 mm dia. for 15 ml tubes • 32 holes 12 mm dia. for test tubes 1.5 and 2.0 ml • 32 holes 10 mm dia. for test tubes 0.5 ml Dimensions: 180 × 90 × 52 cm (L × W × H) Article 3 Combi vial rack 4 Combi vial rack 5 Combi vial rack 6 Combi vial rack 7 Combi vial rack 8 Combi vial rack Combi vial rack Extrapack, 6 pc./pack Colour transparent yellow green blue pink orange colored sorted Order No. 24 01 22685 24 01 22686 24 01 22687 24 01 22688 24 01 22689 24 01 22690 10 01 22693 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 6 7 5 143

145

Lab Aids Racks, Stands co d e b e w WW2NY042 1 2 co d e b e w WW2NY220 co d e b e w WWZ71008 co d e b e w 144 Test Tubes Test Tube Racks, neoLab® Acrylic glass racks, model Klinikum Heidelberg, glued and screwed together, for heavy duty. 1 1-level version Quantity wells 2 × 5 2 × 6 2 × 10 2 × 12 3 × 12 4 × 12 2 × 5 2 × 6 2 × 10 2 × 12 3 × 12 4 × 12 2 2-level version Quantity wells 2 × 6 2 × 10 Hole Ø mm 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 Hole Ø mm 18 18 Length mm 132 155 272 322 322 322 132 155 272 322 322 322 Length mm 155 272 Width mm 64 64 64 64 83 120 64 64 64 64 83 120 Width mm 64 64 Height mm 57 57 57 57 57 57 77 77 77 77 77 77 Height mm 145 145 Order No. 24 01 15101 24 01 15102 24 01 15103 24 01 15104 24 01 15105 24 01 15106 24 01 15110 24 01 15111 24 01 15112 24 01 15113 24 01 15114 24 01 15115 Order No. 24 01 15121 24 01 15122 Test Tube Racks, neoLab® Polypropylene test tube rack, square, for all standard microtube sizes. The racks are open at the front. There are openings in the side and back panels. The tiers of the rack are inserted into the side - back panel and locked in placed. Extremely stable design, very simple construction makes them easy to assembly. Alphanumeric marking at the openings, stackable. The side / back panel and the lowest tier are blue on all size racks. Both upper tiers that hold the microtubes are color coded by size. Dimensions: 146 × 146 × 70 mm high for jar Ø mm Order No. Places Colour 13 mm 16 mm 20 mm 25 mm 30 mm 9 × 9 7 × 7 6 × 6 5 × 5 4 × 4 orange yellow green white red 24 01 21630 24 01 21631 24 01 21632 24 01 21633 24 01 21634 Test Tube Racks, Wagner & Munz Made of blue PP in two versions: for 12 and for 24 tubes. Their advantage is that they are unbreakable and sterilizable (autoclavable) up to + 120°C. Article Test tube rack, for 12 tubes up to 18 mm Ø Test tube rack, for 24 tubes up to 18 mm Ø Order No. 24 62 50740 24 62 50750 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

146

1 2 3 Lab Aids Racks, Stands co d e b e w WW2NY406 co d e b e w WWQ7J073 Test Tubes neoLabLine Multifunctional Rack, neoLab® neoLabLine Multifunctional rack neoLabLine multifunctional rack - the rack with many possibilities. Suitable for tubes with a diameter of 12 to 30 mm or cans with a diameter of max. 50 mm. Depending on the equipment, a different number of seats is available. The positions of the individual compartments are designed so that tubes with screw cap fit perfectly next to each other without hindering each other. At the bottom of the rack, there are matching holes for each tube position so that all tubes stand securely in all positions. The height of the compartments can be adjusted and each compartment is alphanumerically coded. The coding can be continued via 2 connected racks. This connection is made using brackets (accessories). The multifunctional rack can also be used with only one grid insert, instead of 2. (Then you need a support frame as an accessory for stabilization). The multifunctional racks for tubes with 13 mm diameter are available with capacities of 50 and 72. The multi-function racks art. no. 10 01 62602/10 01 62603 with a capacity of 50 places have the tubes arranged in such a way that the distance between the tubes is greater than the multifunction racks art. no. 10 01 62600/10 01 62601 with a capacity of 72 places. The multifunctional rack is also available as a basket (item number 10 01 62610 / 10 01 62611). With the accessories handle, support frame and clamps (item number 10 01 62612 / 10 01 62613) a rack can be converted into a basket. • stackable • autoclavable Article Colour Multifunctional rack Multifunctional rack Multifunctional rack Multifunctional rack 1 Multifunctional rack Multifunctional rack Multifunctional rack 2 Multifunctional rack 3 Multifunctional rack Multifunctional rack Multifunctional rack, only basket blue Multifunctional rack, only basket yellow blue yellow blue yellow blue yellow blue yellow blue yellow Capacity pc 72×12–13 mm Ø 72×12–13 mm Ø 50x12–13 mm Ø 50x12–13 mm Ø 50×16 mm Ø 50×16 mm Ø 18×30 mm Ø 18×30 mm Ø 8×50 mm Ø 8×50 mm Ø Accessories Article Hand strap, belts and clips for multifunction rack, blue Hand strap, belts and clips for multifunction rack, yellow Order No. 10 01 62600 10 01 62601 10 01 62602 10 01 62603 10 01 62604 10 01 62605 10 01 62606 10 01 62607 10 01 62608 10 01 62609 10 01 62610 10 01 62611 Order No. 10 01 62612 10 01 62613 Lead Rings, Cork Rings Stabilizing Ring, BOCHEM Stabilizing ring for Erlenmeyers or flasks, PVC coated. Material 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel Ø mm 50 70 100 Weight g 207 340 470 Order No. 10 05 05660 10 05 05661 10 05 05662 Lead Rings, Vinyl Coated, neoLab® Lead rings for weighing down glass vessels in a water bath. Reduces glass breakage and escaping chamicals. Vinyl-coated to be particularly resistant to chemicals. Type closed closed closed closed closed open open open Inner Ø mm 18 48 51 57 70 50 70 100 co d e b e w fits cylinder 5-10 ml flask 125-500 ml flask 250-1000 ml flask 500-1000 ml flask 1000-4000 ml flask 50-250 ml bottle 100-500 ml flask 200-500 ml bottle 1000-2000 ml flask 750-1500 ml Weight g 165 237 454 681 908 650 900 1200 Order No. 31 01 61010 31 01 61011 31 01 61012 31 01 61013 31 01 61014 10 01 31625 10 01 31627 10 01 31630 co d e b e w WW2NY226 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 145

147

Lab Aids Stands / Small Parts Containers / Instruments Lead Rings, Cork Rings Cork Rings, IDL Rings made of cork for placing underneath round bottom flasks, top quality. Order No. O.D. mm 80 110 140 170 I.D. mm 30 60 90 120 Height mm 30 30 30 30 for flask size ml 100 250 – 500 1000 – 2000 2000 – 5000 24 00 20080 24 00 20110 24 00 20140 24 00 20170 Storage Boxes Storage Containers for Vials, neoLab® co d e b e w WW2NY027 With divider insert with 5 × 10 compartments for vials with max. 12 mm Ø, with tight-clos- ing cover. Overall size: 140 × 70 × 40 mm high Suitable for: Autosampler tubes 1,2 ml Micro-tubes 1,5 ml PP conic vials Article Storage container made of crystal clear polystyrene Storage container made of polypropylene, autoclavable Order No. 23 01 27209 23 01 21535 co d e b e w WW2NY028 co d e b e w WW7R3013 WWQ7J024 co d e b e w 1 146 Collection Containers, neoLab® Made of crystal-clear polystyrene, complete with hinged lid and divider, tempera- ture-resistant from -40 to +70°C, with 2 rows of 10 compartments. Overall size: Compartment: 77 × 27 × 38 mm deep 300 × 170 × 45 mm high Article Collection box with 20 compartments Order No. 23 01 21540 Spatulas Spatulas, BOCHEM mm L Order No. Twin spatulas made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished Blade L mm 300 75 350 85 400 100 500 100 Blade L mm 1 130 40 150 45 185 50 210 60 250 70 Blade W mm 9 9 9 11 11 33 05 03100 33 05 03101 33 05 03102 33 05 03103 33 05 03104 L mm Blade W mm 16 16 16 20 Order No. 33 05 03105 33 05 03106 33 05 03107 33 05 03108 Twin spatulas made of pure nickel (99,5%), polished L mm Blade L mm 130 40 150 45 185 50 Blade W mm 9 9 9 Order No. 33 05 03110 33 05 03111 33 05 03112 L mm Blade L mm 210 55 250 60 Blade W mm 11 11 Order No. 33 05 03113 33 05 03114 Twin spatulas made of 18/10 steel, PTFE coated L Order No. L mm Blade L mm 150 45 185 50 Blade W mm 9 9 33 05 03700 33 05 03701 Blade L mm 210 55 mm Blade W mm 11 Order No. 33 05 03702 Continued on next page

148

Spatulas Micro-spatulas made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished Lab Aids Instruments L mm Blade L mm 2 100 30 130 40 130 40 150 40 130 40 150 40 185 50 Blade W mm 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 Order No. 33 05 03010 33 05 03011 33 05 03014 33 05 03015 33 05 03017 33 05 03018 33 05 03019 L mm Blade L mm 130 40 150 40 185 50 210 55 150 40 185 50 210 55 Micro-spatulas made of pure nickel (99,5%), polished L mm Blade L mm 130 40 150 50 Blade W mm 8 8 Order No. 33 05 03047 33 05 03053 L Blade L mm 220 55 mm Micro-spatulas made of 18/10 steel, PTFE coated Blade W mm 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 Order No. 33 05 03021 33 05 03022 33 05 03023 33 05 03024 33 05 03025 33 05 03026 33 05 03027 Blade W mm 8 Order No. 33 05 03057 L mm Blade L mm 150 40 185 50 Blade W mm 3 4 Order No. 33 05 03710 33 05 03711 L mm Blade L mm 185 50 210 55 Blade W mm 5 6 Order No. 33 05 03712 33 05 03713 Twin spatulas made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, 2 ends curved in spoon form Order No. Order No. L L mm Blade L mm 3 130 10 185 10 210 12 150 15 Blade W mm 5 5 5 7 33 05 03180 33 05 03181 33 05 03182 33 05 03183 mm Blade L mm 200 17 250 20 180 25 210 25 Blade W mm 7 7 7 12 33 05 03184 33 05 03185 33 05 03186 33 05 03187 Twin spatulas made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, one end curved in spoon form Order No. Order No. L L mm Blade L mm 4 130 10 185 10 210 12 180 25 Blade W mm 5 5 5 8 33 05 03210 33 05 03211 33 05 03212 33 05 03213 mm Blade L mm 210 25 230 25 235 25 Blade W mm 12 12 18 33 05 03214 33 05 03215 33 05 03216 Twin spatulas made of 18/10 steel, PTFE coated, one end curved in spoon form L mm Blade L mm 4 180 25 210 25 Blade W mm 8 12 Order No. 33 05 03720 33 05 03721 L Blade L mm 230 25 mm Blade W mm 12 Order No. 33 05 03722 Spatulas made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, one end curved in spoon form Order No. Order No. L L mm Blade L mm 5 130 10 185 10 210 12 Blade W mm 5 5 5 33 05 03200 33 05 03201 33 05 03202 mm Blade L mm 180 25 210 25 Blade W mm 8 12 33 05 03203 33 05 03204 Mortar spatulas made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, 10 mm round material, very stury, polished L mm Blade L mm 6 150 40 200 40 250 60 Blade W mm 20 20 25 Order No. 33 05 03260 33 05 03261 33 05 03262 L mm Blade L mm 300 60 400 60 Blade W mm 25 25 Order No. 33 05 03263 33 05 03264 mm L Order No. Micro-spades made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished Blade L mm 185 50 185 50 210 60 210 60 Blade L mm 7 130 40 130 40 150 45 150 45 Blade W mm 4 9 4 9 33 05 03300 33 05 03301 33 05 03302 33 05 03303 L mm Blade W mm 4 9 4 9 Order No. 33 05 03304 33 05 03305 33 05 03306 33 05 03307 Micro-spade made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, PTFE coated L mm 150 Blade L mm 45 Blade W mm 9 Order No. 33 05 03740 Continued on next page co d e b e w 2 3 4 5 6 7 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 147

149

Lab Aids Instruments 1 2 co d e b e w 3 WWQ7J025 4 co d e b e w WWQ7J027 5 6 co d e b e w WWR4Q074 8 7 148 Spatulas Micro-spoons made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished Spoon L × W mm 9 × 5 9 × 5 7 × 5 6 × 4 5 × 3 Blade W mm 5 5 5 5 5 Blade L mm 40 40 40 45 45 Wire Ø mm 2.5 2.5 2 1.5 1.5 L mm 1 150 180 150 150 150 Order No. 33 05 03340 33 05 03341 33 05 03342 33 05 03343 33 05 03344 2 Double spatula made of titanium Titanium is particularly suitable for applications where high corrosion-resistance, strength and low weight are important. The metal has a white-metallic shine, featuring light weight as well as high strength, ductility, corrosion resistance and thermal resistance. Due to the complicated production process, titanium is ten times as expensive as normal steel. Tita- nium is resistant to diluted sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, solutions containing chloride, cold nitric acid as well as most organic acids and alkaline solutions, such as sodium hy- droxide. Material Order No. Titanium Length mm 210 Blade length mm 60 Blade width mm 11 Ø mm 4 10 05 03910 Dosing Spatulas for Powder, BOCHEM Dosing spatula Article 3 Dosing spatula made of 18/10 steel, plastic handle Length 190 mm, blade 50 × 12 mm. Dosing of powder and the like by turning the knurled wheel. Order No. 33 05 33540 Powder spatula Article 4 Powder spatula made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished spade dimensions 40 × 10 mm, 170 mm long Order No. 33 05 03360 Pharmacist Spatulas, BOCHEM 5 Pharmacist spatulas made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished with flexible non-rusting blade and wooden shaft Length mm 165 190 230 250 Blade size mm 75 × 14 100 × 18 130 × 20 150 × 22 Order No. 33 05 03490 33 05 03491 33 05 03492 33 05 03493 Length mm 275 310 365 415 Blade size mm 165 × 27 200 × 32 250 × 38 300 × 42 Order No. 33 05 03494 33 05 03495 33 05 03496 33 05 03497 Pharmacist spatula made of 18/10 steel, PTFE coated Blade size mm 130 × 20 Order No. 33 05 03760 6 Length mm 230 Spoon Spatulas Stainless Steel, BÜRKLE The spatula-spoon can be used in many different applications. The double-sided mul- ti-purpose spoon is a spoon on one side and a spatula on the other. This makes it possi- ble to sample and process a variety of media such as powders, granulates, pastes and liquids. The spoon side of the spoon-spatula holds 4 ml or 11 ml respectively. Manufactured from a single piece of stainless steel, the spoon-spatula has no edges, crevices or undercuts. Because of this, product residue or cleaning agents cannot be deposited and the possibility of cross-contamination or impurities is excluded. That makes the poly-spoon ideal for use in chemistry, the pharmaceutical industry, cosmetics and the food industry. • Stainless steel (1.4301) • High-gloss polished • Double-sided function Article 7 Spoon spatula, length 180 mm, 4 ml 8 Spoon spatula, length 300 mm, 11 ml Order No. 10 04 56022 10 04 56025

150

Lab Aids Instruments Spatulas Micro Spatula Stainless Steel, BÜRKLE The micro spatula can be used for reliably measuring, sampling or processing small amounts of powder, chemicals, pastes, creams or active ingredients. The laboratory scoop is made of stainless steel and is manufactured entirely without edges, crevices or undercuts. This excludes the possibility of impurities or cross-contamination, since no product residue or cleaning agents can be deposited. The micro spatula is ideal for use in the pharmaceutical industry as well as food & bever- age and cosmetics. • Stainless steel (1.4301) • High-gloss polished • Contents 1.25 ml Article Micro spatula stainless steel, length 170 mm, 1.25 ml Order No. 10 04 56001 co d e b e w WWR4Q072 Micro Spoon Spatula, RSG Rostfrei-Schneidwerkzeuge GmbH Micro spoon spatula made of stainless steel 1.4301, available in different lengths and two widths. Length Order No. mm 100 150 185 210 300 400 150 185 210 Width mm 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 24 25100 10 24 25150 10 24 25185 10 24 25210 10 24 25300 10 24 25400 10 24 27150 10 24 27185 10 24 27210 co d e b e w WW9SQ004 co d e b e w WW9SQ005 Spatula Set, RSG Rostfrei-Schneidwerkzeuge GmbH Spatula set in sheath (leather substitute), 7pcs. inside, stainless steel 18/10 Content: • 1 Tweezers, blunt, straight, 145 mm • 1 Micro spoon spatula, 150/5 mm • 1 Double spatula, 150/9 mm • 1 Micro powder spatula, 150/4 mm • 1 Micro spoon spatula, 150/7 mm • 1 Powder spatula, 150/9 mm • 1 Micro double spatula, 150/4 mm Article Spatula set in sheath Order No. 10 24 20105 Spetulas and Scissors Set, ISOLAB A practical set of 6 most common and frequently used spatulas all manufactured from high quality, chemical and corrosion resistant AISI 304 grade stainless steel. Set consists of one of each micro spoon / curved and ground / chattaway spatula with all 180 mm length and dissecting forcep / blunt - sharp scissors with 160 mm length. All spatulas are placed into suitable holding pockets of the wallet that keeps the spatulas away from disorder and exterior effects. co d e b e w WWMUE004 Article Spatula set Empty wallet co d e b e w Order No. 10 66 40500 10 66 40501 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 149

151

Lab Aids Instruments co d e b e w WWQ7J028 1 2 co d e b e w WWR4Q073 3 3 co d e b e w WWQED080 Spatulas Section Lifters, BOCHEM 1 Section lifters made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, with hardwood handle, rigid blade Length mm 150 150 Blade size mm 50 × 10 50 × 15 Order No. 33 05 03530 33 05 03531 Length mm 150 Blade size mm 50 × 20 Order No. 33 05 03532 Section lifters made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, with hardwood handle, fexible blade Length mm 150 150 Blade size mm 50 × 10 50 × 15 Order No. 33 05 03535 33 05 03536 Length mm 150 Blade size mm 50 × 20 Order No. 33 05 03537 2 Section lifters made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, blade and handle made of stain- less steel, fexible blade Length mm 150 150 Blade size mm 50 × 10 50 × 15 Order No. 33 05 03445 33 05 03446 Length mm 150 Blade size mm 50 × 20 Order No. 33 05 03447 Palette Knife Spatulas Stainless Steel, BÜRKLE Similar to a pallet or dispensing chemist‘s spatula, this palette knife spatula is suitable for applying or distributing viscous media such as pastes and creams, or for spreading them smoothly. The high-quality stainless steel spatula is manufactured entirely from one piece, with no edges or crevices. That makes cleaning easier and prevents product residue and cleaning agents from accumulating. • Stainless steel (1.4301) • Manufactured from a single piece • Very sturdy Article 3 Patette knife spatula stainless steel, L×W 200 × 21 mm 4 Patette knife spatula stainless steel, L×W 250 × 25 mm Order No. 10 04 56010 10 04 56012 Sealing Paddle for Sealing Films, BRAND To securely and easily apply self-adhesive films. The sealing paddle helps to attach the film to the plate with a uniform pressure. Especially suited for plates with raised rim. Article Sealing paddle for sealing films Order No. 10 49 71381 PU pc/Pack 2 Spoons Spoons and Spatulas, Hammacher / IDL Weighing spoons Material 5 Wironit Wironit 6 Wironit Form with spatula end with spatula end with spatula end Chemical spoons Material 7 Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit 8 Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Form single-ended single-ended single-ended single-ended single-ended double-ended double-ended double-ended double-ended double-ended 5 6 7 8 AK AL 150 Length mm Spoon W × L m Order No. 150 180 150 33 51 13010 33 51 13013 33 51 13016 15 × 30 15 × 30 16 × 26 Length mm Spoon W × L mm Order No. 150 180 210 250 300 150 180 210 250 300 33 51 13019 33 51 13022 33 51 13025 33 51 13028 33 51 13031 33 51 13034 33 51 13037 33 51 13040 33 51 13043 33 51 13046 20 × 25 24 × 32 27 × 35 30 × 40 35 × 45 20 × 25 24 × 32 27 × 35 30 × 40 35 × 45 Continued on next page

152

Spoons Laboratory spoon Length mm 9 195 Weighing scoop Length mm AT 170 Weighing spatulas Spoon dimensions mm 60 × 44 Shovel size mm 10 × 40 Material AK Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Width mm 6 9 9 9 Length mm 120 150 180 210 Micro weighing spatulas Material AL Wironit Wironit Wironit Width mm 4 4 5 Length mm 130 150 180 Ø mm 2.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 Ø mm 2 2 2 Micro spatulas Order No. 10 51 14319 Order No. 10 51 11217 Order No. 33 51 13049 33 51 13052 33 51 13055 33 51 13058 Order No. 33 51 13061 33 51 13064 33 51 13067 Width mm Length mm Ø mm Order No. Material AM Wironit Wironit Wironit AN Wironit Wironit Wironit Form single-ended 5 single-ended 5 single-ended 5 double-ended 5 double-ended 5 double-ended 5 130 185 210 130 185 210 Twin spatulas Material AO Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit AP Wironit Wironit Wironit Width mm 4 6 9 11 9 11 9 11 12 13 12 10 9 Length mm 120 120 150 150 180 180 210 210 240 300 210 180 150 Micro twin spatulas Material AQ Wironit Wironit Width mm 4 5 Length mm 150 180 2 2 2 2 2 2 Ø mm 2.0 2.5 3.5 4.0 3.5 4.0 3.5 4.0 4.0 5.0 4.0 3.5 3.5 Ø mm 2 2 33 51 13070 33 51 13073 33 51 13076 33 51 13079 33 51 13082 33 51 13085 Order No. 33 51 13088 33 51 13091 33 51 13094 33 51 13097 33 51 13100 33 51 13103 33 51 13106 33 51 13109 33 51 13112 33 51 13115 33 51 13118 33 51 13121 33 51 13124 Order No. 33 51 13127 33 51 13130 Lab Aids Instruments AM AN AO AP AQ AR AS BT BK BL 9 AT Micro spatulas Material AR Wironit Wironit AS Wironit Wironit BT Wironit Wironit Form single-ended single-ended single-ended single-ended curved in spoon shape curved in spoon shape Micro powder spatulas Width mm Length mm Order No. 2 3 4 5 4 5 33 51 13133 33 51 13136 33 51 13139 33 51 13142 33 51 13154 33 51 13157 140 140 140 140 140 140 Material BK Wironit Wironit Wironit Micro spoons Material BL Wironit co d e b e w Width mm 3 4 5 Length mm 140 140 140 Order No. 33 51 13145 33 51 13148 33 51 13151 Width mm 5 Length mm 140 Order No. 33 51 13160 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 151

153

Lab Aids Instruments Spoons Mixing spatulas Material 1 Wironit 2 Wironit 3 Wironit 4 Wironit 5 Wironit Form single-ended single-ended double-ended double-ended double-ended Separating spatulas Material 6 Wironit Length mm Spatula W × L mm Order No. 155 155 180 180 180 33 51 13168 33 51 13169 33 51 13175 33 51 13178 33 51 13181 5 × 30 5 × 30 5 × 30 6 × 30 7 × 30 Length mm Spatula W × L mm Order No. 175 33 51 13172 3 × 30 Micro spatulas with metal haft 1 2 6 3 54 7 Material 7 Wironit Spatula knifes Material 8 rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible 9 rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible AT rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible Spoon spatulas Length mm Spatula W × L mm Order No. 150 33 51 13184 10 × 55 Overall length approx. mm Spatula W × L mm Order No. 180 205 230 180 205 230 180 205 230 10 – 15 × 80 10 – 18 × 105 10 – 20 × 130 10 – 17 × 80 12 – 20 × 105 13 – 23 × 130 11 – 21 × 80 11 – 24 × 105 11 – 24 × 130 33 51 13187 33 51 13190 33 51 13193 33 51 13205 33 51 13208 33 51 13211 33 51 13214 33 51 13217 33 51 13220 Material AK Wironit Wironit Wironit Length mm Spoon W × L mm Spatula width mm Order No. 150 180 210 33 51 13223 33 51 13226 33 51 13229 25 × 35 25 × 35 25 × 35 15 – 20 18 – 22 20 – 24 8 9 AT Twin spoons Material AL Wironit Wironit Wironit Spatula knifes Material AM Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Mixing spatula Material AN Wironit Length mm 150 180 210 Spoon W × L mm 25 × 35 25 × 35 25 × 35 Order No. 33 51 13232 33 51 13235 33 51 13238 Width mm Length mm Spatula length mm Order No. 18 18 18 20 20 20 33 51 13241 33 51 13244 33 51 13247 33 51 13250 33 51 13253 33 51 13256 180 200 220 250 275 295 90 110 125 150 180 195 Form double-ended Length mm 190 Order No. 33 51 13259 AK AL AM AN Mixing and laboratory spatula Material AO Plastic Length mm 160 mm Order No. 10 51 13260 Continued on next page 152

154

Spoons Alginate spatula Material AP Wironit Section lifter Material AQ Wironit Wironit Wironit Width mm Length mm Spatula length mm Order No. 30 33 51 13262 210 115 Width mm Length mm Spatula length mm Order No. 8 10 15 33 51 13265 33 51 13268 33 51 13271 155 155 155 55 55 55 Pharmacist spatulas Material Order No. Spatula length mm 80 105 130 160 180 210 AR rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible rust-proof, flexible Wironit (material number 1.4301) is a special alloy and exhibits the following advantages: rust-proof, nonmagnetically, acid-proof. Rust-proof material: material number 1.4024 33 51 13274 33 51 13277 33 51 13280 33 51 13283 33 51 13286 33 51 13289 Overall length approx. mm 160 190 220 255 285 310 Lab Aids Instruments AO AP AQ AR Spoons and Spatulas, Hammacher / IDL Digalski spatulas (stirring rod) Material AS Wironit BT Wironit Length mm 150 190 Leg length mm 25 45 Micro-spatulas with black plastic handle BK Material rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof BL Material rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof Length mm 160 160 160 160 Spatula length mm 45 45 45 45 Length mm 160 160 160 160 Spatula length mm 45 45 45 45 Micro powder spatulas with plastic handle Form offset 10° Spatula width mm 3 4 5 6 Spatula width mm 3 4 5 6 Vibrations aptual with acid-proof plastic handle with extra-fine and slender working part Material BM PTFE-coated Inoculation Rods Length mm 220 Order No. 33 51 27110 33 51 27115 Order No. 33 51 27163 33 51 27164 33 51 27165 33 51 27166 Order No. 33 51 27263 33 51 27264 33 51 27265 33 51 27266 Order No. 10 51 27220 AS BT BK BL BM Article BN Inoculation rod (Drigalski) made of Wironit, triangular, 195 mm, Ø 4 mm 33 51 25007 Wironit (material number 1.4301) is a special alloy and exhibits the following advantages: rust-proof, nonmagnetically, acid-proof. Rust-proof material: material number 1.4024 Order No. BN Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 153

155

Lab Aids Instruments co d e b e w WWQ7J026 Spoons Laboratory and Chemical Spoons, BOCHEM Spoons made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 154 Spoon dimen- sions mm 1 30 × 16 2 30 × 15 Length mm 200 150 Order No. 33 05 03370 33 05 03380 Spoon dimen- sions mm 20 × 10 Poly-spoons made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished Spoon dimen- sions mm 3 15 × 35 15 × 35 15 × 35 15 × 35 15 × 35 Length mm 150 180 210 250 300 Order No. 33 05 03400 33 05 03401 33 05 03402 33 05 03403 33 05 03404 Spoon dimen- sions mm 28 × 65 28 × 65 28 × 65 28 × 65 Length mm 150 Order No. 33 05 03385 Length mm 210 250 300 400 Order No. 33 05 03410 33 05 03411 33 05 03412 33 05 03413 Chemical spoons made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, with spatula handle Spoon dimen- Spoon dimen- Order No. Order No. Length mm 120 150 180 sions mm 33 05 03420 33 05 03421 33 05 03422 28×40 35×50 41×55 Length mm 210 250 300 33 05 03423 33 05 03424 33 05 03425 sions mm 4 23×31 27×38 28×40 Chemical spoons made of pure nickel (99,5%), polished Spoon dimen- sions mm 23×31 27×38 Length mm 120 150 Order No. 33 05 03430 33 05 03431 Spoon dimen- sions mm 28×40 28×40 Length mm 180 210 Order No. 33 05 03432 33 05 03433 Chemical spoons made of 18/10 steel, PTFE coated Spoon dimensions mm 28×40 Length mm 180 Order No. 33 05 03750 Chemical spoons made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, single-ended Spoon dimen- sions mm 5 22×30 22×30 29×40 Length mm 120 150 180 Order No. 33 05 03450 33 05 03451 33 05 03452 Spoon dimen- sions mm 29×40 35×48 35×48 Length mm 210 250 300 Order No. 33 05 03453 33 05 03454 33 05 03455 Chemical spoons made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, double-ended Order No. Spoon dimen- Order No. sions mm Spoon dimen- Length mm 6 17×23 + 22×30 120 17×23 + 22×30 150 22×30 + 29×40 180 33 05 03460 33 05 03461 33 05 03462 sions mm Length mm 22×30 + 29×40 210 29×40 + 29×48 250 29×40 + 29×48 300 33 05 03463 33 05 03464 33 05 03465 Chemical spoons made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, with spade Spoon dimen- sions mm 7 22×30 22×30 29×40 Length mm 120 150 180 Order No. 33 05 03470 33 05 03471 33 05 03472 Spoon dimen- sions mm 29×40 35×48 35×48 Length mm 210 250 300 Order No. 33 05 03473 33 05 03474 33 05 03475 Laboratory spoons made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished Spoon dimen- sions mm 8 26×40 31×45 38×55 Length mm 120 135 180 Order No. 33 05 03480 33 05 03481 33 05 03482 Spoon dimen- sions mm 45×60 70×85 Length mm 195 280 Order No. 33 05 03483 33 05 03484 9 Chemical spoon made of titanium Titanium is particularly suitable for applications where high corrosion-resistance, strength and low weight are important. The metal has a white-metallic shine, featuring light weight as well as high strength, ductility, corrosion resistance and thermal resistance. Due to the com- plicated production process, titanium is ten times as expensive as normal steel. Titanium is resistant to diluted sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, solutions containing chloride, cold nitric acid as well as most organic acids and alkaline solutions, such as sodium hydroxide. Material Length mm Titanium 180 Blade length mm 32 Blade width mm 22 Ø mm 1 Spoon dimen- sions mm 40×28 Order No. 10 05 03920

156

Lab Aids Instruments Spoons Portioning Ladle, BOCHEM Made of 18/10 stainless steel, ml indication reached with filling until rim. Material 18/10 stainless steel 18/10 stainless steel 18/10 stainless steel Volume ml 125 250 500 Order No. 10 05 03805 10 05 03806 10 05 03807 co d e b e w WWQ7J089 Disposable Measuring and Dosing Spoons, BÜRKLE With the measuring and dosing spoons, small quantities of powder, granulates and liquids can be accurately measured and dosed. For exact measuring, excess medium is scraped off at the upper edge of the spoon. The holding capacity is embossed on the handle. The flat front edge of the measuring spoon is ideal for picking up medium from the bottom of the container or for reaching into the corners of the container for thorough emptying of residual content. Thanks to its flat bottom, the measuring spoon can be put down without spilling the contents. The disposable measuring spoon is also suitable as a sample spoon for taking small sample quantities. Since the plastic measuring spoon is designed for single use, they are disposed of after use so that cross-contamination or contamination is excluded. The measuring and dosing spoons are suitable for accurate measuring in the chemical, pharmaceutical, cosmetics, feed, as well as food & beverage industries. • With scrape-off edge • Designed for single use • Produced in the cleanroom (cleanroom class 7) • Individual packaging and sterilization as an option • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations ml 1 Dosing spoons, PS, white Vol. 0.5 1.0 2.5 5.0 10.0 15.0 25.0 50.0 PU pc/Pack sterile no Order No. 100 10 04 54002 100 10 04 54006 100 10 04 54008 100 10 04 54010 100 10 04 54012 100 10 04 54014 100 10 04 54016 100 10 04 54018 yes Order No. 10 04 54005 10 04 54007 10 04 54009 10 04 54011 10 04 54013 10 04 54015 10 04 54017 10 04 54019 2 Measuring spoons, blue These measuring spoons are blue, a colour which does not occur naturally in food. There- fore, should a spoon or parts of a spoon get into a production machine, they are easily visible and can be reliably detected by visual inspection. ml Volume 0.5 1.0 2.5 5.0 10.0 15.0 25.0 50.0 PU pc/Pack sterile no Order No. 100 10 04 54044 100 10 04 54046 100 10 04 54048 100 10 04 54050 100 10 04 54052 100 10 04 54054 100 10 04 54056 100 10 04 54058 yes Order No. 10 04 54045 10 04 54047 10 04 54049 10 04 54051 10 04 54053 10 04 54055 10 04 54057 10 04 54059 3 Measuring spoons, blue detectable In addition to the blue colour, the material of these measuring spoons has a special addi- tive which makes them detectable by metal detectors or in an X-ray examination. Thus, even though the spoons are made of plastic, they can be removed via the usual contam- inant separation systems. Order No. Vol. ste- rile ml 0.5 yes 10 04 54085 1.0 yes 10 04 54087 2.5 yes 10 04 54089 5.0 yes 10 04 54091 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 ste- rile Order No. Vol. ml 10.0 yes 10 04 54093 15.0 yes 10 04 54095 25.0 yes 10 04 54097 50.0 yes 10 04 54099 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 co d e b e w WWR4Q075 1 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 155 Continued on next page

157

Lab Aids Instruments Spoons Measuring spoon set • PS • White or blue • Set of measuring spoons in eight sizes • Holding capacity: 0.5; 1.0; 2.5; 5.0; 10; 15; 25; and 50 ml Article Set of measuring spoons, PS, white (8 spoons, 0.5 – 50 ml) Set of measuring spoons, PS, blue (8 spoons, 0.5 – 50 ml) Order No. 10 04 54120 10 04 54125 Shovels Measuring Scoops, PP, VITLAB White. Also suitable as weighing scoops. With precision formed filling edge and comfort- able, stable handle. Easily readable volume quantities on the upper side of the handle. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Contents ml 2 5 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 Length mm 60 82 100 135 160 200 260 315 385 Order No. 10 85 34391 10 85 34392 10 85 34393 10 85 34394 10 85 34395 10 85 34396 10 85 34397 10 85 34398 10 85 34399 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 Measuring Scoops, coloured, PP, VITLAB Measuring scoops in different colours. Also suitable as weighing scoops. With precisely formed filling edge and comfortable, stable handle. Easily readable volume specification on the upper side of the handle. Suitable for food stuffs according to EU directive No. 10/2011. Colour red red ultramarine red grey black yellow blue green ultramarine ultramarine Set, 9 colours (incl. white), per 1 scoop light blue Volume ml 50 50 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 250 250 100 Order No. 10 85 35940 10 85 35950 10 85 36940 10 85 36943 10 85 36944 10 85 36946 10 85 36950 10 85 36952 10 85 36955 10 85 36956 10 85 37941 10 85 37950 10 85 36911 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 1 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w 156 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

158

Shovels Scoops, IDL Volume Polyethylene scoops, white, high density. Length mm 115 135 185 215 250 310 350 ml 15 25 65 110 150 350 750 Shovels, IDL Shovels made of aluminium, cast type. Overall L approx. mm 65 85 135 155 185 210 Volume g 5 10 40 60 90 130 Order No. 33 00 08814 33 00 08815 33 00 08816 33 00 08817 33 00 08818 33 00 08819 Weighing Shovels, BOCHEM Order No. 22 00 00015 22 00 00025 22 00 00063 22 00 00110 22 00 00150 22 00 00350 22 00 00500 Volume g 250 375 450 800 1500 2500 Order No. 33 00 08820 33 00 08821 33 00 08822 33 00 08823 33 00 08824 33 00 08825 Overall L approx. mm 250 290 310 350 400 430 Weighing shovels made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished Shovel size mm 105 × 31 120 × 31 Shovel size mm 70 × 31 90 × 31 33 05 03600 33 05 03601 mm 235 250 Length Order No. Length mm 200 220 Weighing shovels made of 18/10 steel, PTFE coated Length mm 235 Shovel size mm 105 × 31 Order No. 33 05 03602 33 05 03603 Order No. 33 05 08265 Chemical Shovels, BOCHEM Chemical shovels made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished. Overall length mm 190 250 320 350 370 Bowl length mm 100 145 190 230 250 Ø mm 50 75 105 120 150 Volume l 0.12 0.45 1.00 1.50 2.00 Order No. 33 05 08800 33 05 08801 33 05 08802 33 05 08803 33 05 08804 Lab Aids Instruments co d e b e w WW7R3213 co d e b e w WW7R3010 co d e b e w WWQ7J029 co d e b e w WWQ7J030 Chemical Shovels, Heavy Model, BOCHEM Chemical shovels made of 18/10 steel, material 4301. Handle welded. Qualified for food. Overall length mm 215 310 350 390 450 Shovel length mm 100 160 200 220 300 Ø mm 40 82 102 120 160 Volume l 0,15 0,25 0,50 1,00 2,00 Order No. 10 05 08809 10 05 08810 10 05 08811 10 05 08812 10 05 08813 co d e b e w WWQ7J078 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 157

159

Lab Aids Instruments co d e b e w WWQ7J080 Shovels Pharma Scoop, BOCHEM 1 Pharma scoop made of 18/10 steel, handle soldered Overall length mm 220 280 Shovel length mm 120 165 Ø mm 50 75 Order No. 10 05 08830 10 05 08831 1 2 2 Pharma scoops made of 18/10 steel Seamless fixed handle, extremly high processing. With hanging loop. Qualified for food. Material Overall length mm 18/10 stainless steel 215 18/10 stainless steel 230 18/10 stainless steel 245 18/10 stainless steel 350 Shovel size mm 120×60 140×75 155×85 220×130 Volume ml 100 200 250 500 Order No. 10 05 08835 10 05 08836 10 05 08837 10 05 08838 Scoops, BOCHEM Scoops made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished. co d e b e w WWQ7J031 Volume ml 200 220 1000 1400 Ø mm 90 100 160 180 3 4 5 6 87 Pincettes Forceps, Hammacher / IDL Forceps, simple design Form Material 3 rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof 4 rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof pointed, straight pointed, straight pointed, straight pointed, straight pointed, straight pointed, straight pointed, curved pointed, curved pointed, curved pointed, curved pointed, curved pointed, curved Micro-forceps Material 5 rust-proof 6 rust-proof Form anatomical anatomical Holding forceps for tissue and tumors Material 7 Wironit 8 Wironit Length mm 90 90 9 AT AK AL AM AN Titanium dissecting forceps, simple design Material 9 Titanium AT Titanium Form anatomical anatomical 158 Length mm 105 115 130 145 160 200 105 115 130 145 160 200 Length mm 120 150 Outer Ø mm 3 6 Length mm 110 105 Order No. 33 05 08741 33 05 08742 33 05 08744 33 05 08745 Order No. 33 51 27305 33 51 27315 33 51 27330 33 51 27345 33 51 27360 33 51 27370 33 51 27405 33 51 27415 33 51 27430 33 51 27445 33 51 27460 33 51 27470 Order No. 33 51 27520 33 51 27550 Order No. 33 51 27693 33 51 27696 Order No. 33 51 27710 33 51 27705 Continued on next page

160

Lab Aids Instruments AO AP AQ AR AS BT BK BL BM BN BO BP BQ BR BS CT CK CL CM CN Length mm 200 200 200 200 Length mm 150 150 Length mm 155 Length mm 120 140 160 120 140 160 Length mm 105 105 105 105 Length mm 120 130 145 160 180 200 250 Length mm 105 105 160 160 160 160 Length mm 105 115 130 105 115 130 Length mm 200 Order No. 33 51 27820 33 51 27822 33 51 27824 33 51 27826 Order No. 33 51 10010 33 51 10013 Order No. 33 51 10016 Order No. 33 51 10022 33 51 10025 33 51 10028 33 51 10031 33 51 10034 33 51 10037 Order No. 33 51 10046 33 51 10049 33 51 10052 33 51 10109 Order No. 33 51 10055 33 51 10058 33 51 10061 33 51 10064 33 51 10067 33 51 10070 33 51 10073 Order No. 33 51 10076 33 51 10079 33 51 10080 33 51 10082 33 51 10083 33 51 10085 Order No. 33 51 10088 33 51 10091 33 51 10094 33 51 10097 33 51 10100 33 51 10103 Order No. 33 51 10106 Length mm 100 100 Order No. 33 51 10112 33 51 10115 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 159 Pincettes Titanium forceps, simple design Material AK Titanium AL Titanium AM Titanium AN Titanium Form anatomical, straight anatomical, curved pointed, straight pointed, curved Staining forceps Material Form AO Wironit Wironit smooth tips fluted tips Laboratory forcep Material AP Wironit Working forceps Material AQ Wironit Wironit Wironit AR Wironit Wironit Wironit Form fluted tips Form pointed pointed pointed blunt blunt blunt Micro-dissecting forceps Form Material AS Wironit BT Wironit BK Wironit BL Wironit straight curved curved angled Anatomical forceps Material BM Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Cover glass forceps Material Form BN rust-proof BO Wironit BP rust-proof BQ Wironit BR rust-proof BS Wironit curved, crossed straight, crossed curved, crossed with fixing spring Micro-dissecting forceps Form Material straight, with pin straight, with pin straight, with pin curved, with pin curved, with pin curved, with pin CT Wironit Wironit Wironit CK Wironit Wironit Wironit Forcep Material CL rust-proof Light-weight forceps Material Form CM Clock spring steel strip blunt CN Clock spring steel strip pointed co d e b e w

161

Lab Aids Instruments 3 4 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 AT AK AM co d e b e w WW2NY092 AP AL AN AO AQ AR AS 160 Pincettes Anatomical micro-forceps Form Material rust-proof rust-proof straight curved Length mm 175 175 Order No. 10 51 10121 10 51 10122 Laboratory forceps with plastic coated tips For a safe gripping of smallest parts. Sterilizable, heat resistant up to 130°C. Order No. Form Model 1 HSC 525-30 2 HSC 524-16 Holders angled angled Article 3 Stand for tweezers, 140 × 140 × 120 mm 4 Ergo Brush holder Length mm 300 165 10 51 10131 10 51 10132 Order No. 10 51 16400 10 51 16300 Wironit (material number 1.4301) is a special alloy and exhibits the following advantages: rust-proof, nonmagnetically, acid-proof. Rust-proof material: material number 1.4024 Forceps, neoLab® Original Swiss DUMONT forceps Highest precision, hand-forged from Inox stainless steel with ultra-fine tips for biology, electronic microscopy, and and wherever top quality is important. Individually packed in a case. Article 5 Dumont pincette 6 Dumont pincette 7 Dumont pincette 8 Dumont pincette 9 Dumont pincette AT Dumont pincette AK Dumont pincette Type No. 1, straight No. 2, straight No. 3c, straight No. 5, straight No. 7, curved No. 4, straight No. 3, straight Order No. 33 01 21030 33 01 21031 33 01 21032 33 01 21033 33 01 21034 33 01 21035 33 01 21036 Antistatic forceps acc. to DIN 53 482 Made of antistatic Vestamide with 20% fiberglass reinforcement. Good rigidity and prac- tically unbreakable. The forceps are electrically conductive. Excellent chemical resistance to acids and lyes. Temperature resistance: Total length: Color: Width up to 180°C 120 mm black Order No. Form Tip mm AL 6 mm AM 3 mm AN 2 mm AO 1 mm AP 1 mm straight straight straight straight curved without teeth with teeth without teeth with teeth without teeth 33 01 21215 33 01 21216 33 01 21217 33 01 21218 33 01 21219 DUMONT forceps made of Dumoxel® Original high-precision Swiss Dumont forceps, forged from Dumoxel® stainless steel. Du- moxel® precision forceps are extremely sturdy, autoclavable, easy to repair, and require very little maintenance. As a rule, the Dumoxel® forceps have 4 – 6 times the useful life of forceps made of Inox alloys. The difference is due to the higher corrosion resistance and the softness of the material. This makes the forceps easier to repair. The matte finishes reduces reflections when working under the microscope. Delivery: Individually, with tip protector, and in a box with hinged lid. Tip style Surface AQ standard AQ biology AR standard AR biology AS standard AS biology polished polished matt matt polished matt Tip thickness mm 0.08 0.02 0.06 0.01 0.10 0.03 Tip width mm 0.13 0.06 0.10 0.05 0.17 0.07 Length mm 110 110 110 110 115 115 Order No. 10 01 21042 10 01 21043 10 01 21044 10 01 21045 10 01 21046 10 01 21047

162

Lab Aids Instruments 1 2 3 Pincettes Tweezers Set, RSG Rostfrei-Schneidwerkzeuge GmbH Tweezers set, filled with 4 parts, in a case with press stud. Content: • Special tweezer, bent, 120 mm • Tweezer straight blunt, 130 mm • Tweezer with guide pin, straight/pointed, 130 mm • Cover glass tweezer, bent, 115 mm Including tweezers guide book Article Tweezers set, 4 parts Order No. 10 24 20120 co d e b e w WW9SQ006 Forceps, Stainless Steel, BÜRKLE The sturdy stainless steel tweezers are ideal for use in laboratories. Ends with a fluted internal structure ensure reliable handling of different samples. The fluted handle offers a good grip. The laboratory tweezers are suitable for use in precise work in chemistry, the pharmaceutical industry, cosmetics and food & beverage. • stainless steel (1.4301) • available in three sizes: 105 mm, 130 mm und 160 mm • three different types: sharp/bent, sharp/straight, blunt/straight co d e b e w WWR4Q076 1 Forceps stainless steel sharp/bent Article Forceps, stainless steel, sharp, bent form, 105 mm Forceps, stainless steel, sharp, bent form, 130 mm Forceps, stainless steel, sharp, bent form, 160 mm 2 Forceps stainless steel sharp/straight Article Forceps, stainless steel, sharp, straight form, 105 mm Forceps, stainless steel, sharp, straight form, 130 mm Forceps, stainless steel, sharp, straight form, 160 mm 3 Forceps stainless steel blunt/straight Article Forceps, stainless steel, blunt, straight form, 105 mm Forceps, stainless steel, blunt, straight form, 130 mm Forceps, stainless steel, blunt, straight form, 160 mm Order No. 10 04 58611 10 04 58612 10 04 58614 Order No. 10 04 58620 10 04 58622 10 04 58624 Order No. 10 04 58630 10 04 58632 10 04 58634 Forceps, BOCHEM Forceps made of 18/10 steel, self-clamping Material 4 polished 5 polished Form very pointed very pointed, curved Length mm 120 120 Order No. 33 05 01640 33 05 01641 Cover glass forceps made of 18/10 steel Material 6 polished 7 PTFE coated Form curved curved Width point mm 6 6 Length mm 105 105 Order No. 33 05 01722 33 05 01830 Weight forcep made of 18/10 steel Material 8 polished Version Plastic tip Length mm 100 Order No. 33 05 01740 co d e b e w WWQ7J023 4 5 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 161 Continued on next page 7 8

163

Lab Aids Instruments 1 3 5 8 AN AO AP AQ AR AS 162 2 4 6 7 Pincettes Forceps made of 18/10 steel Material Form 1 polished polished polished polished polished polished polished polished 2 PTFE coated PTFE coated PTFE coated 3 polished polished polished polished PTFE coated PTFE coated PTFE coated 4 polished polished polished PTFE coated PTFE coated PTFE coated 5 polished polished PTFE coated PTFE coated 6 polished 7 PTFE coated 8 polished PTFE coated blunt blunt blunt blunt blunt blunt blunt blunt blunt blunt blunt pointed, without guide-pin pointed, without guide-pin pointed, without guide-pin pointed, without guide-pin pointed, with guide-pin pointed, with guide-pin pointed, with guide-pin pointed, curved, with guide-pin pointed, curved, with guide-pin pointed, curved, with guide-pin pointed, curved pointed, curved pointed, curved very pointed very pointed very pointed very pointed very pointed very pointed very pointed, curved very pointed, curved Length mm 105 115 130 145 160 200 250 300 115 130 145 105 115 130 145 115 130 145 115 130 145 115 130 145 120 130 120 130 105 105 105 105 Order No. 33 05 01000 33 05 01001 33 05 01002 33 05 01003 33 05 01004 33 05 01005 33 05 01006 33 05 01007 33 05 01800 33 05 01801 33 05 01802 33 05 01010 33 05 01011 33 05 01012 33 05 01013 33 05 01810 33 05 01811 33 05 01812 33 05 01020 33 05 01021 33 05 01022 33 05 01820 33 05 01821 33 05 01822 33 05 01600 33 05 01601 33 05 01860 33 05 01861 33 05 01610 33 05 01865 33 05 01620 33 05 01867 Forceps made of titanium Material AN Titanium AO Titanium Form blunt pointed, without guide-pin Length mm 115 115 Order No. 10 05 01900 10 05 01910 Precision forceps made of titanium Material AP Titanium AQ Titanium AR Titanium Form Length mm extra pointed, without ridges 105 curved, extra pointed, without ridges 105 extra pointed, without ridges 130 Order No. 10 05 01930 10 05 01940 10 05 01950 Precision forceps ”De Bakey“ made of titanium Material AS Titanium Length mm 160 Order No. 10 05 01960 Forceps made of PMP, VITLAB Forceps made of PMP, white, pointed, elastic, very good recovery. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Colour white white Length mm 115 145 Order No. 33 85 00115 33 85 00145 PU pc/Pack 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible.

164

Pincettes Disposable Forceps, BÜRKLE Designed for precise laboratory operations, the disposable forceps are ideal for gripping, holding and moving small items such as pieces of fine tissue, small objects or solid sam- ples. The knurled handles ensure easy and safe handling as well as highly accurate work- ing. The light-weight disposable plastic forceps provide for working without fatigue. Produced under cleanroom conditions, the forceps meet the highest standards and prevent cross-contamination or soiling of the sample to be examined. The laboratory forceps are suitable for the chemical, pharmaceutical, cosmetics, and food industry as well as applications in science. • Three models: pointed/angled, pointed/straight, wide tip • Designed for single use • Produced in the cleanroom (cleanroom class 7) • Individual packaging and sterilization as an option • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations • Overall length 130 mm 1 Forceps PS, white Version Sharp, bent form Sharp Wide tip PU pc/Pack sterile no Order No. 100 10 04 57840 100 10 04 57841 100 10 04 57842 yes Order No. 10 04 57940 10 04 57941 10 04 57942 2 Disposable forceps, blue These disposable forceps are blue, a colour which does not occur naturally in food. There- fore, should a pair of forceps or parts of them get into a production machine, they are easily visible and can be reliably detected by visual inspection. Version Sharp, bent form Sharp Wide tip sterile Order No. yes yes yes 10 04 57850 10 04 57851 10 04 57852 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 3 Sterile forceps, blue, detectable In addition to the blue colour, the material of these disposable forceps has a special ad- ditive which makes them detectable by metal detectors or in an X-ray examination. Thus, even though the forceps are made of plastic, they can be removed via the usual contam- inant separation systems. Version Sharp, bent form Sharp Wide tip sterile Order No. yes yes yes 10 04 57860 10 04 57861 10 04 57862 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 Disposable Forceps, ISOLAB Manufactured under germ-free gamma sterile conditions with extreme sterility control from ABS. Certified as ”DNase, RNase and pyrogen-free“ since sterilised by gamma irra- diation after production step. Individually single packed with lot number, production date and expiry date printed on the package. Article Disposable forceps Order No. 10 66 40502 Scissors Universal Scissor, BOCHEM Plastic handle outside, persistant metal handle inside and therefore very robust. Material rust-proof Overall length approx. mm 190 Cutting length mm 40 Order No. 33 05 04250 Lab Aids Instruments co d e b e w WWR4Q077 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWMUE005 co d e b e w WWQ7J069 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 163

165

Lab Aids Instruments co d e b e w WWQ7J081 Scissors Dressing Scissor, BOCHEM Material Titanium Overall length mm 140 Cutting length mm 45 Order No. 10 05 04109 Scissors, Hammacher / IDL Micro-scissors Material Form 1 rust-proof 2 rust-proof 3 rust-proof 4 rust-proof 5 rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof straight (Vanas) curved (Vanas) straight straight curved straight curved Scissors for physiology Material 6 Wironit Wironit Wironit 7 Wironit Wironit Wironit Form straight, pointed/blunt straight, pointed/blunt straight, pointed/blunt curved, pointed/blunt curved, pointed/blunt curved, pointed/blunt Micro-dissecting scissors Material Form 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 98 AT AK 8 Wironit 9 Wironit AT Wironit straight, pointed/pointed slightly curved, pointed/pointed very curved, pointed/pointed AL AM Ligature and artery scissors Material Form Length mm 80 80 105 110 110 140 140 Length mm 130 145 160 130 145 160 Length mm 110 110 110 Length mm 110 Length mm 145 145 160 160 105 105 Length mm 110 110 105 105 115 115 Length mm 115 130 145 115 130 145 Order No. 33 51 14022 33 51 14025 33 51 14034 10 51 14041 10 51 14043 10 51 14052 10 51 14054 Order No. 33 51 14055 33 51 14058 33 51 14061 33 51 14064 33 51 14067 33 51 14070 Order No. 33 51 14073 33 51 14076 33 51 14079 Order No. 33 51 14088 Order No. 33 51 14097 33 51 14100 10 51 15101 10 51 15102 10 51 15104 10 51 15105 Order No. 33 51 14103 33 51 14106 10 51 14110 10 51 14111 10 51 14112 10 51 14113 Order No. 10 51 14125 10 51 14126 10 51 14127 10 51 14128 10 51 14129 10 51 14130 Continued on next page AK Wironit straight, pointed/blunt Dissecting scissors Form straight curved straight curved straight, pointed/pointed curved, pointed/pointed Material AL Wironit AM Wironit AN rust-proof AO rust-proof AP rust-proof AQ rust-proof Scissors for microscopy Material AR rust-proof AS rust-proof BT rust-proof BK rust-proof BT rust-proof BK rust-proof Form straight curved straight, pointed curved, pointed straight, pointed curved, pointed Operating scissors, standard Material BL rust-proof BL rust-proof BL rust-proof BM rust-proof BM rust-proof BM rust-proof Form straight, pointed/blunt straight, pointed/blunt straight, pointed/blunt straight, pointed/pointed straight, pointed/pointed straight, pointed/pointed AP AQ AR AS AO BT AN BK BL BM BO BP BQ BN 164

166

Lab Aids Instruments BS CT CN CL CM CO BR CK Scissors Operating scissors, delicate Material Form BN rust-proof BO rust-proof rust-proof straight, pointed/pointed straight, pointed/pointed curved, pointed/pointed Length mm 130 140 140 Preparation scissors, with extra large grip rings, Super Cut Material Form BP stainless steel straight BQ stainless steel curved Laboratory scissors Form BR straight BS CT Universal scissor Material CK rust-proof Universal scissors Length mm 115 115 Length mm 145 120 180 Length mm 180 Material CL Handle covered with plastic Length mm 145 Working scissors Material CM nickel-plated Length mm 160 Order No. 10 51 10813 10 51 14131 10 51 14132 Order No. 10 51 14011 10 51 14012 Order No. 33 51 14109 33 51 14118 33 51 14121 Order No. 33 51 14115 Order No. 33 51 14133 Order No. 33 51 14157 Suture and ligature scissors (Spencer), sterilizable Model CN HSB 287-11 Form angled Length mm 115 Order No. 10 51 14161 Tissue scissors Form CO curved, pointed/pointed Length mm 90 mm Order No. 10 51 14165 Wironit (material number 1.4301) is a special alloy and exhibits the following advantages: rust-proof, nonmagnetically, acid-proof. Rust-proof material: material number 1.4024 Attention! All scissors are deliverable also with ”Micro-Toothing“, i.e. easy cutting, no slipping off. The colour of the handles can vary. Tongs, Holders Test Tube Clamps, IDL Test tube clamps made of wood, with wire spring Article Test tube holder, medium, up to 20 mm Ø Test tube holder, large, up to 30 mm Ø Test tube holder XXL, up to approx. 30 mm Ø extreme strong spring, length approx. 230 mm Order No. 37 00 00102 37 00 00103 10 00 00105 co d e b e w WW7R3201 Failed to find what you are looking for ? Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 165

167

Lab Aids Instruments Tongs, Holders Crucible Tongs, Hammacher / IDL Wironit (material number 1.4301) is a special alloy and exhibits the following advantages: • rust-proof • nonmagnetically • acid-proof 4 3 Universal tongs Material 1 Wironit 2 Wironit Length mm 255 195 Special gripping tongs for lead pots Material 3 Wironit Angle length mm 70 4 Tongs for isotope vials with special holder Material Length mm 250 Angle length mm 100 Wironit 1 2 e co d e co d b b e w e w WWQ7J034 Order No. 33 51 27010 33 51 27020 Order No. 33 51 27030 Order No. 33 51 27060 Order No. 33 05 02103 33 05 02104 33 05 02105 33 05 02106 Order No. 10 05 02110 Crucible Tongs with ridges, BOCHEM Order No. 5 Length Crucible tongs made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished Wire Ø mm 5.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 33 05 02099 33 05 02100 33 05 02101 33 05 02102 Wire Ø mm 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 mm 300 400 500 600 mm 160 200 220 250 Length Crucible tongs made of pure nickel (99,5%), polished Length mm 200 Wire Ø mm 4.0 6 Length mm 200 Crucible tongs made of 18/10 steel, point PTFE coated Wire Ø mm 4.5 Order No. 33 05 02400 Length mm 250 Wire Ø mm 4.5 Order No. 33 05 02401 7 Crucible tong made of titanium Titanium is particularly suitable for applications where high corrosion-resistance, strength and low weight are important. The metal has a white-metallic shine, featuring light weight as well as high strength, ductility, corrosion resistance and thermal resistance. Due to the complicated production process, titanium is ten times as expensive as normal steel. Tita- nium is resistant to diluted sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, solutions containing chloride, cold nitric acid as well as most organic acids and alkaline solutions, such as sodium hy- droxide. Material Order No. Titanium Length mm 220 Wire Ø mm 4.5 10 05 02910 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. 5 6 7 co d e b e w 166

168

Tongs, Holders Laboratory Tongs, BOCHEM Laboratory tongs made of 18/10 steel, material 4301, polished, points polyamid coated Flask tongs Nominal Ø Order No. mm 1 20 30 40 50 60 2 15 – 60 Length mm 250 250 250 250 250 230 Wire Ø mm 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 Beaker tongs covered with silicone tube Nominal Ø mm 3 55 – 100 4 25 – 100 Length mm 250 250 Wire Ø mm 6.0 6.0 Beaker tongs, temperature-insulated with ceramic Nominal Ø mm 5 60 – 100 Length mm 300 Wire Ø mm 6.0 Sample tongs Length mm 6 220 Wire Ø mm 6.0 33 05 02179 33 05 02180 33 05 02181 33 05 02182 33 05 02183 33 05 02250 Order No. 33 05 02190 33 05 02200 Order No. 33 05 02220 Order No. 33 05 02240 Lab Aids Instruments co d e b e w WWQ7J035 1 2 3 4 5 6 co d e b e w WWQ7J082 Multipurpuse Tong, BOCHEM Multipurpuse tong made of 18/10 steel. 9 pieces. Including belt bag. Material 18/10 steel Length mm 100 Order No. 10 05 12240 Scalpels, Knives Blades, neoLab® Blades with grip bar, razor-sharp. Ideal for scraping DC plates, for making sections, for cleaning away residues, for shaving etc. e co d e co d b b e w e w WW2NY098 Article Blades with grip bar Blades with grip bar Cutting width mm 40 57 Order No. 33 01 27110 33 01 27111 PU pc/Pack 5 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 167

169

Lab Aids Instruments Scalpels, Knives Foil Knives, Hammacher / IDL Foil Knives 3 4 Article 1 Foil knife with aluminium handle, with blade 26004 2 Foil knife with aluminium handle, with blade 26044 Order No. 33 51 26001 33 51 26041 6 7 1 5 2 Spare blades Article 3 Spare blades for foil knife 26001 4 Spare blades for foil knife 26001 5 Spare blades for foil knife 26001 6 Spare blades for foil knife 26041 7 Spare blades for foil knife 26041 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 33 51 26004 33 51 26007 33 51 26019 33 51 26044 33 51 26047 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 BRAUN Disposable Scalpels, IDL CUTFIX® Disposable scalpels, gamma-ray sterilized, individually packed to be sterile. With double precision ground joint, secure blade seat. Packs of 10. Figure 8 10 9 11 AT 12 AK 15 AL 20 Order No. 29 42 00101 29 42 00102 29 42 00103 29 42 00104 29 42 00105 Figure AM 21 AN 22 AO 23 AP 24 Order No. 29 42 00106 29 42 00107 29 42 00108 29 42 00109 AP AO 9 AK AL AM AT AN 8 CN CO AR AS BT Knives and Scalpels, Hammacher / IDL Cartilage knives Version AQ with scraper without scraper Scalpelsfor microscopy Length mm 180 180 Material AR Wironit AS Wironit BT Wironit BK Wironit Scalpel handle Material BL rust-proof Length mm 125 120 125 120 Blade length mm 26 20 22 20 Length mm 135 Interchangeable blades for scalpel handle 33 51 18061 Order No. 33 51 18016 33 51 18019 Order No. 33 51 18025 33 51 18028 33 51 18031 33 51 18037 Order No. 33 51 18061 Figure Form BM 10 BN 11 BO 12 BP 15 bellied pointed/angled sickle-bellied bellied Cutting length approx. mm 23 18 13 10 Order No. 33 51 18064 33 51 18067 33 51 18070 33 51 18073 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Scalpel handle Material BQ rust-proof Length mm 135 Order No. 33 51 18076 Continued on next page AQ BK 168

170

BR 20 BS 21 CT 22 CK 23 CL 24 CM 25 Scalpels, Knives Interchangeable blades for scalpel handle 33 51 18061 Figure Form bellied bellied bellied pointed pointed pointed/angled Cutting length approx. mm 25 30 35 30 35 22 Order No. 33 51 18079 33 51 18082 33 51 18085 33 51 18088 33 51 18091 33 51 18094 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Scalpel Blade Removers Article CN Scalpel blade remover Kling-EX made of Wironit Order No. 33 51 28050 Razor blades Article CO Razor blades Safety scalpel handle Article CP Safety scalpel handle No. 3 Order No. 33 51 18103 PU pc/Pack 10 Length mm 125 Order No. 10 51 18125 Lab Aids Instruments / Funnels BM BN BR BS CT BL BO BP BQ CK CL CM Wironit (material number 1.4301) is a special alloy and exhibits the following advantages: rust-proof, nonmagnetically, acid-proof. Rust-proof material: material number 1.4024 CP Wipers Wipers, neoLab® Wipers for removing gluey, viscous or adhesive substances from beakers or cylindrical containers. co d e b e w WW2NY054 CQ co d e b e w WWEQ2018 Article Order No. CQ Rubber wipers with wooden handle, 2 pieces in a set 27 01 15200 Wiping surface 70×120 and 50×80 mm CR Silicone wiper, small, red, with stainless steel handle 27 01 15203 Wiping surface 60×30 mm, total length 20 cm Silicone wiper, medium, black, with stainless steel handle 10 01 15206 Wiping surface 90×50 mm, total length 26 cm CS Silicone wiper, large, white, with stainless steel handle 27 01 15205 Wiping surface 120×75 mm, total length 32 cm Funnels Funnels, Short Stem, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Funnel with short stem, DIN ISO 4798. Rim O.D. mm 35 451) 55 701) 80 100 1201) 150 1801) 2001) 3001) Stem length mm 35 45 55 70 80 100 120 150 150 175 175 Stem O.D. mm 6 6 8 8 10 10 16 16 20 26 30 H mm 60 80 95 125 140 180 210 265 290 325 409 matching paper filter Ø mm 45 – 55 55 – 70 70 – 90 110 – 125 125 – 150 150 – 185 185 – 240 240 – 270 270 – 320 320 – 385 500 Order No. PU pc/Pack 11 21 35123 11 21 35128 11 21 35133 11 21 35138 11 21 35141 11 21 35146 11 21 35151 11 21 35157 11 21 35159 11 21 35161 11 21 35169 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1) Non-DIN ISO size. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 169 CRCS

171

Lab Aids Funnels Funnels co d e b e w WWEQ2021 Analytical Funnels, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Analytical funnels for for rapid filtration. Rim O.D. mm 65 80 110 Stem L mm 150 150 180 Stem O.D. mm 9 9 9 Stem I.D. mm 3 3 3 H mm 200 210 265 matching round filter Ø mm 70 – 90 110 – 125 150 – 185 Order No. PU pc/Pack 11 21 33137 11 21 33141 11 21 33148 10 10 10 Analytical Funnels, PP, VITLAB Transparent. With long stem and grooves. Rigidified by a thickened edge. Rapid flow due to a steep 60° angle. Volume ml 50 100 225 Ø mm 50 72 91 Outlet length mm 150 143 145 Outlet Ø mm 5 5 5 Order No. 10 85 30162 10 85 30164 10 85 30165 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 Urbanti Funnels, PMP, VITLAB Crystal clear. The spiral-shaped ribs increase the rate of filtration and prevent the trapping of air between the filter paper and the funnel. With long stem. Volume approx. ml 30 80 250 630 1800 Ø mm 51 70 100 140 196 Length mm 195 210 198 247 315 Outlet Ø mm 3 3 7 10 20 Order No. 23 85 16205 23 85 16207 23 85 16210 23 85 16214 23 85 16219 PU pc/Pack 6 6 4 3 2 Funnels, Short Stem, Soda-Lime, IDL Funnels, angle 60°, with short stem. Rim O.D. mm 35 45 55 70 80 100 Stem length mm 35 45 55 70 80 100 Stem O.D. mm 6 7 8 9 9 10 Order No. 11 00 35123 11 00 35128 11 00 35133 11 00 35138 11 00 35141 11 00 35146 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 co d e b e w WW7R3242 170

172

Funnels Funnels, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass funnels acc. to DIN 12445. Funnel Ø mm 35 45 55 70 80 100 150 Stem L mm 35 45 55 70 80 100 150 Stem I.D. mm 3 3 5 5 6 6 12 Order No. 18 36 73003 18 36 73004 18 36 73005 18 36 73007 18 36 73008 18 36 73010 18 36 73015 Powder Funnels, DURAN® or Soda-Lime Glass, DURAN Group / IDL Powder funnels with short wide stem Material Ø Height mm 60 72 79 94 105 140 170 DURAN®-Glass DURAN®-Glass DURAN®-Glass DURAN®-Glass DURAN®-Glass DURAN®-Glass DURAN®-Glass Order No. 11 21 35433 11 21 35438 11 21 35441 11 21 35446 11 21 35451 11 21 35455 11 21 35461 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 Funnels, IDL 1 Funnels made of polypropylene Ø Order No. 23 00 47005 23 00 47010 23 00 47015 23 00 47020 Ø mm 100 120 150 Length mm 155 180 220 Order No. 23 00 47025 23 00 47030 23 00 47035 2 Funnels made of polypropylene, fast draining off due to steep 60° angel Ø Order No. Order No. Ø mm 350 Length mm 440 23 00 47050 23 00 47040 23 00 47045 3 Powder funnels transparent, made of polypropylene Ø Order No. Ø mm 120 150 Length mm 110 138 Order No. 23 00 48035 23 00 48040 23 00 48020 23 00 48025 23 00 48030 mm 55 70 80 100 120 160 200 mm 30 40 50 75 mm 200 250 mm 65 80 100 Length mm 45 65 85 110 Length mm 200 260 Length mm 68 75 94 Lab Aids Funnels co d e b e w WWEQ2153 co d e b e w WW7R3094 1 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 171

173

Lab Aids Funnels Funnels Half-Round Funnels, PP, VITLAB Transparent. For multi-neck flasks, laterally flattened, suitable for standard joint necks of various sizes. Suitable for the filling of liquid or powdered reagents into a reaction flask, especially for loading of multi-neck flasks during a reaction. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. for ground joint NS 14/23 19/26 29/32 Length mm 75 95 135 Order No. 23 85 16114 23 85 16119 23 85 16129 PU pc/Pack 10 10 5 Funnels, BOCHEM 1 Funnels made of 18/10 steel, 60° a, tube conical shape Funnel Ø Tubing Ø mm 13/17 13/17 21/27 Overall H mm 115 145 260 Tube length mm 50 80 90 Order No. 38 05 08840 38 05 08842 38 05 08845 1) without handle mm 801) 120 250 mm 120 155 200 250 2 Funnels made of 18/10 steel with straight outlet tube, 60° a, especially for powder Funnel Ø Order No. Tubing Ø mm 20 30 30 30 Overall H mm 135 140 175 200 Tube length mm 60 60 60 60 3 Mini funnel made of 18/10 stainless steel Drawed seamless Material 18/10 stainless steel 18/10 stainless steel 18/10 stainless steel 18/10 stainless steel Hole Ø mm 4 6 8 10 38 05 08720 38 05 08721 38 05 08722 38 05 08723 Order No. 10 05 08855 10 05 08856 10 05 08857 10 05 08858 BOLA Buchner Funnel, Bohlender Made of PTFE. Two-part version demountable in upper and lower part for easy cleaning and removal of filter cake. Suitable for vacuum filtration. Nominal sizes and dimensions as per DIN 12 905. Suitable for commercial filter papers (not included in the scope of deliv- ery). Universal chemical resistance, the medium is only exposed to PTFE. Applications: For suspension of solids. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Autoclave: Vacuum: PTFE from -200°C to +250°C +++ universal 121° suitable Nominal size acc. to DIN 45 55 70 90 Volume ml 50 75 135 290 for filter paper Ø mm 45 55 70 90 Total height mm 94 117 142 165 Order No. 10 17 65402 10 17 65404 10 17 65406 10 17 65408 co d e b e w WWQ7J054 1 2 3 172

174

Lab Aids Funnels / Tubing, Accessories Funnels Funnels, Stainless Steel, BÜRKLE The stainless steel funnel can be used to pour and transfer free-flowing powders, liquids and slightly viscous media easily. An air channel on the discharge tube ensures a com- plete, unobstructed flow. Depending on the diameter, this pouring aid is suitable for dis- pensing applications, from small amounts in laboratories to large quantities in industry. Larger versions of the funnel feature a handle to ensure easy handling. • Stainless steel AISI 304 (1.4301) • Air channel for unobstructed flow co d e b e w WWR4Q078 Outer Ø mm 60 100 Order No. 10 04 59641 10 04 59643 Outer Ø mm 150 300 Order No. 10 04 59645 10 04 59648 Tubing Tube Cutters, Rettberg Article Tube cutter (type 2012) for cutting laboratory tubing of all types (except metal tu- bes). For outer diameters of up to 28 mm, with replaceab- le blade Spare blades for tube cutter (packs of 3) Order No. 10 70 00141 10 70 00142 co d e b e w WWQVD150 Tubing, Deutsch & Neumann Tubing made of natural rubber (NR), red, smooth, spec. weight 1,16 – 1,20 g/cm3. 25-m reels, hardness: 50 Shore A, temperature resistant from -30°C to +60°C. I.D. mm 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 O.D. mm 5 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 17 21 28 Wall mm 1 1.5 1.5 2 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 2.5 3 4 Order No. 27 34 30305 27 34 30407 27 34 30508 27 34 30509 27 34 30609 27 34 30610 27 34 30711 27 34 30812 27 34 30913 27 34 31014 27 34 31217 27 34 31521 27 34 32028 PU m/Roll 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Minimum order quantity 5 meters and in 5-meter-steps! Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 173

175

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories Tubing Vacuum Tubing, Deutsch & Neumann Tubing made of natural rubber (NR), red, smooth, spec. weight 1,16 – 1,20 g/cm3. 25-m reels, hardness: 50 Shore A, temperature resistant from -30°C to +60°C. I.D. mm 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 10 10 12 O.D. mm 12 15 14 16 15 17 18 20 20 26 22 Wall mm 4 5 4 5 4 5 5 6 5 8 5 Order No. 27 34 40412 27 34 40515 27 34 40614 27 34 40616 27 34 40715 27 34 40717 27 34 40818 27 34 40820 27 34 41020 27 34 41026 27 34 41222 PU m/Roll 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Minimum order quantity 5 meters and in 5-meter-steps! Tubing, Deutsch & Neumann Tubing made of silicone rubber (VMQ), meets the following standards: BFR XV, FDA CFR 21§ 177.2600, EP-Europ. Pharmacopoeia. Test for biocompatibility according to ISO 10993-1, transparent, durometer 60 Shore A, temperature range -60°C to +200°C, short periods up to +260°C. I.D. mm 0.5 1 1 1.5 1.5 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 12 O.D. mm 2.5 1.8 3 3.5 4 4 6 5 6 7 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 8 9 10 10 11 10 11 12 13 13 14 16 16 Wall mm 1 0.4 1 1 1.25 1 2 1 1.5 2 1 1.5 2 1 1.5 2 2.5 1 1.5 2 1.5 2 1 1.5 2 2 1.5 2 3 2 Order No. 27 34 60061 27 34 60003 27 34 60004 27 34 60008 27 34 60068 27 34 60011 27 34 60012 27 34 60015 27 34 60016 27 34 60017 27 34 60019 27 34 60020 27 34 60021 27 34 60023 27 34 60024 27 34 60025 27 34 60085 27 34 60026 27 34 60027 27 34 60028 27 34 60029 27 34 60030 27 34 60090 27 34 60031 27 34 60032 27 34 60036 27 34 60037 27 34 60038 27 34 60040 27 34 60042 PU m/Roll 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Minimum order quantity 5 meters and in 5-meter-steps! 174

176

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories Tubing Vacuum Tubing, Deutsch & Neumann Tubing made of silicone rubber (VMQ), meets the following standards: BFR XV, FDA CFR 21§ 177.2600, EP-Europ. Pharmacopoeia. Test for biocompatibility according to ISO 10993-1, transparent, durometer 60 Shore A, temperature range -60°C to +200°C, short periods up to +260°C. I.D. mm 5 6 7 7 8 8 10 O.D. mm 15 12 13 15 16 18 20 Wall mm 5 3 3 4 4 5 5 Order No. 27 34 70515 27 34 70612 27 34 70713 27 34 70715 27 34 70816 27 34 70818 27 34 71020 PU m/Roll 15 25 25 25 25 15 15 Minimum order quantity 5 meters and in 5-meter-steps! Tubing, IDL Tubing made of PVC, transparent. The PVC tube is perfectly suited for laboratory applica- tions for its resistance to chemicals, acids, bases, as well as for its flexibility, high trans- parency and excellent ageing resistance. Heat-proof up to 60°C. co d e b e w WW7R3270 I.D. mm 1 1.5 2 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 12 12 13 16 18 18 19 22 30 40 Wall mm 0.4 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1.5 1.5 2 1 1.5 2 1.5 2 1.5 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 4 3 4.5 5 Order quantity only in 5-meter-steps! O.D. mm 1.8 2.1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 14 16 18 19 20 22 24 27 28 39 50 Order No. 27 00 33118 27 00 33121 27 00 33203 27 00 33304 27 00 33405 27 00 33406 27 00 33407 27 00 33508 27 00 33509 27 00 33608 27 00 33609 27 00 33610 27 00 33710 27 00 33711 27 00 33811 27 00 33812 27 00 33912 27 00 33913 27 00 34014 27 00 35216 27 00 35218 27 00 35319 27 00 35620 27 00 35822 27 00 35824 27 00 35927 27 00 36228 27 00 37039 27 00 38050 PU m/Roll 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 175

177

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories co d e b e w WW7R3271 Tubing Tubing, IDL PVC tubing with reinforcing webbing These tubes have a layer of non-slip, embedded synthetic fiber between the inner tube and outer jacket, allowing the tubes to be highly pressure resistant throughout a wide temperature range. With glass clear construction, flow-through media can be easily ob- served. Exceptional chemical resistance and non-aging characteristics. Also very resist- ant to oil and petrol. I.D. mm 6 8 10 12 13 16 25 O.D. mm 12 14 16 21 20 24 34 Wall mm 3 3 3 4.5 3.5 4 4.5 Op. pressure bar 251) 241) 211) 171) 161) 151) 101) Order No. 27 00 43612 27 00 43814 27 00 44016 27 00 44221 27 00 44320 27 00 44624 27 00 45534 PU m/Roll 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 1) Based on water at 20°. Order quantity only in 5-meter-steps! BOLA Tubing made of Fluoroplastics (PTFE, FEP and PFA), Bohlender BOLA Tubing Fluoroplastic tubing are perfect for aggressive and pure liquids or gases. They are free from extractable agents, resistant to irradiation and weather, physiologically safe, flame retardant according to UL94V0 and they have very good sliding characteristics as well as a non-adhesive surface. Bending radius1): Minimum radius at room temperature of 23° C / Burst pressure2): com- puted value at 23°C. Recommendation: Restriction of the maximum working pressure to 25% of the burst pressure. Technical data: Materials: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: PTFE (white) / PFA/FEP (transparent, pore-free) PTFE/PFA :-200°C to +260°C / FEP:-200°C to +205°C almost universal Minimum order quantity m 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 PTFE Order No. 27 17 30004 10 17 61009 27 17 30005 27 17 30032 27 17 30006 10 17 61016 27 17 30033 10 17 61020 27 17 30036 10 17 61024 27 17 30009 10 17 61028 27 17 30011 27 17 30012 10 17 61034 27 17 30016 27 17 30041 10 17 61046 27 17 30020 27 17 30023 10 17 61062 27 17 30026 PFA Order No. 10 17 61102 10 17 61104 10 17 61106 10 17 61110 10 17 61114 10 17 61118 10 17 61124 10 17 61130 FEP Order No. 27 17 81504 27 17 81508 27 17 81512 27 17 81520 10 17 61528 27 17 81536 27 17 81548 27 17 81560 Inner Ø ap- prox. mm 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.9 2.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 Outer Ø ap- prox. mm 1.0 1.6 (1/16 ″) 1.6 (1/16 ″) 1.6 (1/16 ″) 2.0 3.0 1.8 2.1 3.0 2.4 3.2 (1/8 ″) 2.5 3.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 Burst pres- sure2) bar 140 308 140 140 280 76 70 46 140 70 140 44 70 140 46 70 64 56 46 35 70 28 ‼ Please note the minimum order quantity. 0.8 (1/32 ″) 1.6 (1/16 ″) 1.6 (1/16 ″) 4.35 (11/64 ″) 6.35 (1/4 ″) 5.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 Bending ra- dius1) mm 4 5 7 8 9 8 8 14 12 14 13 20 18 16 32 36 40 49 64 100 72 144 7,0 8.0 10.0 12.0 12.0 176

178

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories Tubing BOLA Antistatic Explosion Proofness Tubing, Bohlender A - The black tubing has a very good conducting capacity. It is typically used in antistat- ic applications. This tubing is made of an Antistatic Compound which only contains pure PTFE and very fine coal parts. The excellent chemical resistance of PTFE remains almost the same. (Exception: substances with a high reactivity to coal). The load resistance is at least 10 MOhm/m. B - The Zebra Tubing with black PFA conducting stripes on surface is made of high-puri- ty PFA. Thanks to the shielding effect of the conducting PFA this tubing is ideal to prevent fires that could occur due to sparking between an atmosphere of transported flammable gases and the exterior surface of the tube. Version 1 A A A A A A A A A 2 B B B B B Inner Ø mm 0.8 1.6 2 4 4.35 6 8 10 12 2 4 6 8 10 Outer Ø mm 1.6 3.2 3 6 6.35 8 10 12 14 3 6 8 10 12 Min. order qty m 10 10 10 5 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 Order No. 10 17 62710 10 17 62726 10 17 62730 24 17 82740 10 17 62742 24 17 82750 24 17 82760 24 17 82764 10 17 62768 10 17 65530 10 17 65540 10 17 65550 10 17 65560 10 17 65564 1 2 BOLA Flexible Tubing, Bohlender Corrugated tubing with circular corrugations around the longitudinal axis and cylindrical tubing ends with a length of 40 mm which can for example be connected directly to fit- tings, stopcocks or hose connectors. Together with BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints, the connection is absolutely tight and suitable for vacuum. • flexible to highly flexible • tight bending radius only causes little cross-section reduction • non-porous • translucent • ideal for connections under vibrations • usable with a small bending radius • for compensation of thermal expansions • for easy handling of liquids Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Transparency: Vacuum: PFA from -270°C to +260°C +++ universal transparent suitable Tubing size NW 4.5 NW 8 NW 10 NW 13 NW 8 NW 10 NW 13 NW 13 NW 10 NW 8 NW 10 Inner Ø tubing end mm 2 6 8 10 6 8 10 10 8 6 8 Outer Ø tu- bing end mm 4 8 10 12 8 10 12 12 10 8 10 Bending radius1) mm 5 15 18 23 15 18 23 23 18 15 18 Pressure max. bar 1.7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Length m 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 0.25 0.25 Order No. 10 17 62201 10 17 62202 10 17 62204 10 17 62206 10 17 62220 10 17 62222 10 17 62224 10 17 62264 10 17 62260 10 17 62292 10 17 62293 1) Bending radius: minimum bending radius in mm at a room temperature of 23°C co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 177

179

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories Tubing BOLA Flanged Tubing, Bohlender Flanged PTFE tubing with black tube end fittings UNF ¼ ″ 28 G made of PP and washers made of PA. The tubing is ready for use. Applications: Connection to BOLA distributors for bottles or BOLA chromatography adaptors. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: PTFE, PA from 0°C to +100°C +++ universal 30 bar Tubing inner Ø × outer Ø mm 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) Overall length mm 100 250 500 750 1000 100 250 500 750 1000 Order No. 10 17 64002 10 17 64004 10 17 64006 10 17 64008 10 17 64010 10 17 64021 10 17 64022 10 17 64024 10 17 64026 10 17 64028 Tubing, Deutsch & Neumann Tubing made of Viton (fluoroelastomer rubber - FPM), black, temperature-resistant from -10 to 250°C. 25-m reels. Good resistance to ozone and weather influences, as well as to petrol and mineral oils. I.D. mm 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 10 O.D. mm 6 7 8 10 9 11 10 12 13 12 Wall mm 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 Order No. 27 34 80406 27 34 80507 27 34 80608 27 34 80610 27 34 80709 27 34 80711 27 34 80810 27 34 80812 27 34 80913 27 34 81012 PU m/Roll 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Minimum order quantity 5 meters and in 5-meter-steps! Hoses for Gas Burners Safety Gas Hose, Deutsch & Neumann DVGW Reg. No. DG-4607AU2366 D&N, with end sleeves and reinforcement. For gas burn- ers meeting DIN 30 665 and all gases meeting DVGW Work Code G 260. Working pressure up to 100 mbar. Length m 0.50 0.60 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 3.00 Sleeve Ø L.W. mm 10 +0/-1 10 +0/-1 10 +0/-1 10 +0/-1 10 +0/-1 10 +0/-1 10 +0/-1 10 +0/-1 Order No. 27 34 86050 27 34 86060 27 34 86075 27 34 86100 27 34 86125 27 34 86150 27 34 86200 27 34 86300 178

180

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories Hoses for Gas Burners Gas Hose for Gas Burners, Deutsch & Neumann According to DIN 30664, Part 1, DIN-DVGW Reg. No. NG-4607AU2362 D&N, without jacket and reinforcement. Reels 36 to 44 m. For all gases meeting DVGW-Work Code G 260. Working pressure 100 mbar. I.D. mm 10 O.D. mm 14 Wall mm 2 Order No. 27 34 85010 PU m/Roll 36 Connectors, Clips Flow indicator, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® made of SAN for aqueous solutions or PMP (TPX/polymethylpentene) sterilizable, with good chemical resistance. Pressure loading max. 2 bar. Fits tubes from 6 to 11 mm in diameter. Material Colour SAN SAN SAN red blue black Order No. 27 05 26001 27 05 26002 27 05 26003 Material Colour PMP PMP PMP red blue black Order No. 27 05 25001 27 05 25002 27 05 25003 Tubing Fittings, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® Tubing connectors made of PP and PVDF, hose couplings made of PE. Tubing connectors are used to extend, connect, branch off, combine, or repair hoses. The tubing connectors made PVDF have an excellent chemical resistance, are tempera- ture resistant up to +160°C, can be sterilized and are food-safe. co d e b e w WWR4Q007 co d e b e w WWR4Q044 2 1 Angle form, PP Tube I.D. mm 3 – 5 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 13 – 15 2 T-form, PP Tube inner Ø mm 3 – 5 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 13 – 15 3 Y-form, PP Tube inner Ø mm 3 – 5 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 13 – 15 co d e b e w PU pc/Pack PP Order No. 10 27 05 53205 10 27 05 53210 10 27 05 53215 10 27 05 53220 10 27 05 53225 10 27 05 53230 PU pc/Pack PP Order No. 10 27 05 52800 10 27 05 52803 10 27 05 52805 10 27 05 52810 10 27 05 52815 10 27 05 52820 PU pc/Pack PP Order No. 10 27 05 52900 10 27 05 52903 10 27 05 52905 10 27 05 52907 10 27 05 52910 10 27 05 52915 PVDF Order No. 10 04 51304 10 04 51306 10 04 51308 10 04 51310 10 04 51312 10 04 51314 PVDF Order No. 10 04 51104 10 04 51106 10 04 51108 10 04 51110 10 04 51112 10 04 51114 PVDF Order No. 10 04 51204 10 04 51206 10 04 51208 10 04 51210 10 04 51212 10 04 51214 1 3 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 179 Continued on next page

181

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories 2 4 6 1 3 5 7 co d e b e w WW2NY052 180 Connectors, Clips Cross form, PP, PVDF 1 Tube inner Ø mm 3 – 5 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 13 – 15 PU pc/Pack PP Order No. 10 27 05 53105 10 27 05 53110 10 27 05 53115 10 27 05 53120 10 27 05 53125 10 27 05 53130 Straight nozzles, PP 2 Tube inner Ø mm 3 – 5 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 13 – 15 PU pc/Pack PP Order No. 10 27 05 52605 10 27 05 52610 10 27 05 52615 10 27 05 52620 10 27 05 52625 10 27 05 52630 PVDF Order No. 10 04 51704 10 04 51706 10 04 51708 10 04 51710 10 04 51712 10 04 51714 PVDF Order No. 10 04 51005 10 04 51006 10 04 51008 10 04 51010 10 04 51012 10 04 51014 Conical nozzles, PP 3 Tube I.D. mm 3 – 5 5 – 7 7 – 10 Order No. 27 05 52250 27 05 52255 27 05 52260 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 4 Tube I.D. Reduced nozzles, PP Order No. mm 4–8/8–12 4–8/12–16 27 05 52550 27 05 52555 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Tube I.D. mm 9 – 12 11 – 14 13 – 15 Order No. 27 05 52265 27 05 52270 27 05 52275 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 Tube I.D. mm 8–12/12–16 Order No. 27 05 52560 PU pc/Pack 10 5 Tube inner Ø 4 – 17 mm 6 Tube I.D. mm 3 – 5 5 – 7 7 – 10 Universal fittings with tube connectors, PP PU pc/Pack PP Order No. 27 05 52400 10 PVDF Order No. 10 04 50417 Connectors with nozzles, PE Order No. 27 05 52350 27 05 52355 27 05 52360 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 Tube I.D. mm 9 -12 11 – 14 13 – 16 Order No. 27 05 52365 27 05 52370 27 05 52375 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 Assortment, PP Connectors for all needs. 68 of the most common tube connectors (universal straight, T-form, Y-form, X-form, angle form and reduced). All in a practical case, always to hand. Order No. 27 05 52500 Article 7 Assortment Tubing Connectors, Miniature, neoLab® Special tubing connectors made of polypropylene, also for small tube diameters. Pre- cision nipples ensure that the tubes sit securely and without leaks. Sizes refer to the tube inner diameter. for tube inner Ø mm Order No. 2 × 1.0 – 2.0 1 × 1.0 – 2.0, 1 × 2.0 – 3.5 1 × 1.5 – 2.5 / 1 × 2.0 – 3.5 2 × 6.0 – 7.0 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 27 01 21800 27 01 21801 27 01 21802 27 01 21805

182

Connectors, Clips T-Type Tubing Connectors, Miniature, neoLab® Special T-pieces made of polypropylene, also for small tube diameters. Precision nip- ples ensure that the tubes sit securely and without leaks. Sizes refer to the tube inner di- ameter. Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories co d e b e w WW2NY051 co d e b e w WW2NY050 7 1 2 8 3 4 5 AT 6 AK 9 for tube inner Ø mm 1.0 – 2.0 1.5 – 2.5 2.0 – 3.5 3.5 – 4.5 4.0 – 5.5 6.0 – 7.0 7.5 – 10.0 Order No. 27 01 21810 27 01 21811 27 01 21812 27 01 21813 27 01 21814 27 01 21815 27 01 21816 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Tubing Couplings, neoLab® Thermoplastic quick-release couplings made of polypropylene or Delrin acetal for the leak-free and reliable connection of plastic tubing for liquids, air and gas. Temperature resistant 0°C to +71°C for PP models with EPDM seal, -40°C to +82°C for models made from Acetal or PP with Buna-N- seal. Quick couplings without shut-off Ø inch 1 1/8 1 1/4 2 1/8 2 1/4 3 1/4 3 5/16 3 3/8 4 1/4 4 3/8 Version Material Male part Male part Male part, angle part Male part, angle part Male part Male part Male part Male part, angle part Male part, angle part PP PP Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal for tube I.D. mm 3.2 6.4 4.8 6.4 6.4 7.9 9.5 6.4 9.5 Order No. 27 01 21864 27 01 21865 27 01 21866 27 01 21867 27 01 21871 27 01 21872 27 01 21873 27 01 21874 27 01 21875 Quick couplings with shut-off Ø Version inch Female part 5 1/8 Female part 5 1/4 6 1/4 Female part 6 5/16 Female part 6 3/8 Female part 7 1/16 Male part 7 1/8 Male part 7 3/16 Male part 8 1/4 Male part 8 5/16 Male part 8 3/8 Male part 9 9 Material PP PP Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal for tube I.D. mm 3.2 6.4 6.4 7.9 9.5 1.6 3.2 4.8 6.4 7.9 9.5 1.6 4.0 Order No. 27 01 21862 27 01 21863 27 01 21868 27 01 21869 27 01 21870 27 01 20864 27 01 20865 27 01 20866 27 01 20870 27 01 20871 27 01 20872 27 01 20860 27 01 21861 Subminiature quick-release coupler PP Subminiature quick-release coupler PP Clamp coupler with shut-off Ø inch AT AT 5/32 AT 1/4 AK 1/4 AK AK Ø mm 4 8 10 Version Material Female part Female part Female part Female part Female part Female part Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal Acetal for outer/inner Ø mm 4 × 2 4 × 2.5 6.4 × 4.3 6.4 × 4.3 8 × 6 10 × 8 Order No. 27 01 20861 27 01 20862 27 01 20863 27 01 20867 27 01 20868 27 01 20869 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 181 Continued on next page

183

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 AT 7 AK AL AM AN AO AP Connectors, Clips Quick couplings with shut-off, PP Non-leaking quick couplings 3/8 ฀ and 1/2 ฀ coupling connector for tubes and screw connections • High chemical resistance • Within each size independent of the connector exchangeable • Easy and quick handling • Operating pressure up to 4.2 bar • Temperature range from 0°C to 110°C • Type-tested Version Order No. Ø inch for tube I.D. mm 6.5 9.6 6.5 9.6 9.6 12.7 1 1/4 coupling with barbed hose connection, female 2 1/4 coupling with barbed hose connection, female 3 1/4 coupling with male thread 1/4 ″, female 4 1/4 coupling with male thread 3/8 ″, female 5 1/4 plug nozzle with barbed hose connection, male 6 1/4 plug nozzle with barbed hose connection, male 7 1/4 plug nozzle with male thread 3/8 ″, male 7 1/4 plug nozzle with male thread 1/4 ″, male 8 3/8 coupling with barbed hose connection, female 9 3/8 coupling with barbed hose connection AT 3/8 coupling with male thread 3/8 ″, female AT 3/8 coupling with male thread 1/2 ″, female AK 3/8 coupling with unscrewable barbed hose connection, female 9.6 AL 3/8 coupling with unscrewable barbed hose connection 12.7 AM 3/8 plug nozzle with barbed hose connection, male 9.6 AN 3/8 plug nozzle with barbed hose connection, male 12.7 AO 3/8 plug nozzle with male thread 3/8 ″, male AP 3/8 plug nozzle with male thread 1/2 ″, male 10 01 20800 10 01 20801 10 01 20802 10 01 20803 10 01 20804 10 01 20805 10 01 20806 10 01 20816 10 01 20807 10 01 20808 10 01 20809 10 01 20817 10 01 20810 10 01 20811 10 01 20812 10 01 20813 10 01 20814 10 01 20815 AQ AR Quick couplings 2-in-1 without shut-off With the 2-in-1 quick coupling, two separate flow paths can easily be connected or dis- connected with a single click. The freely rotating quick coupling prevents kinking of the tubes. AS BT BK BL BM BN BO BP BQ BR BS 182 Ø mm AQ 2× 1.6 2× 3.3 AR 2× 1.7 2× 3.3 Version Female part Female part Male part Male part Order No. 10 01 20828 10 01 20829 10 01 20830 10 01 20831 Quick couplings 6-in-1 without shut-off With the 6-in-1 quick coupling, six separate flow paths can easily be connected or dis- connected with a single click. The freely rotating quick coupling prevents kinking of the tubes. Ø mm AS 6× 1.7 6× 3.3 BT 6× 1.7 6× 3.3 Version Female part Female part Male part Male part Order No. 10 01 20832 10 01 20833 10 01 20834 10 01 20835 Quick couplings Mini The mini quick couplings are the smallest quick couplings with shut-off available on the market. The lock-out allows for drip-free disconnection of the houses. The freely rotating quick coupling prevents kinking of the tubes. Version Female part Female part Female part Male part Male part Male part Ø BK 3.3 mm BL Inner thread 1/4-28 Outer thread 1/4-28 BM 3.3 mm BN Inner thread 1/4-28 BO Outer thread 1/4-28 Order No. 10 01 20818 10 01 20819 10 01 20820 10 01 20821 10 01 20822 10 01 20823 Quick couplings Duo With the Duo quick coupling, two separate flow paths can easily be connected or discon- nected independently of each other. For disconnecting, press the shut-off on the left- or right-hand side. Or press the centre of the shut-off to separate the two flow paths simul- taneously. Ø mm BP 6.5 BQ 9.6 BR 6.5 BS 9.6 Version Female part Female part Male part Male part Order No. 10 01 20824 10 01 20825 10 01 20826 10 01 20827 Continued on next page

184

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories CT CK CL Connectors, Clips Screw caps with quick coupling for GL45 laboratory bottles The GL45 screw cap with integrated tube connection. The tube can be connected via quick coupling, plug-in sleeve or tube clip. The GL45 screw cap additionally comprises a polyethylene foam seal and a hydrophobic ventilation filter. Ø CT 1/4 ″ CK 1/4 ″ CL 6.5 mm Version Female part Male part with olive Order No. 10 01 20836 10 01 20837 10 01 20838 BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints, Bohlender for th- read GL Red screw cap made of glass-fibre reinforced ETFE, inner parts consisting of a v-ring (ETFE), a tapered ring and a sealing ring (both PTFE) as well as an o-ring for tubing diam- eters under 3 mm. The medium is only exposed to PTFE. Perfect for connecting equipment and fittings with GL threads with hard-walled tubing or tubes made of glass, plastic oder metal. for tube/ pipe outer Ø mm 4.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14,0 CM Screw joints complete Order No. 10 17 69004 10 17 69006 10 17 69008 10 17 69012 10 17 69016 10 17 69017 10 17 69020 10 17 69028 10 17 69030 10 17 69032 10 17 69033 10 17 69036 10 17 69062 10 17 69306 CN Inner part separately Order No. 10 17 69704 10 17 69706 10 17 69709 10 17 69713 10 17 69716 10 17 69718 10 17 69720 10 17 69728 10 17 69730 10 17 69732 10 17 69734 10 17 69736 10 17 69762 10 17 69806 CO Screw cap separately Order No. 10 17 66004 10 17 66004 10 17 66004 10 17 66008 10 17 66008 10 17 66008 10 17 66008 10 17 66012 10 17 66012 10 17 66012 10 17 66016 10 17 66016 10 17 66004 10 17 66004 (1/8 ″)-3.2 (1/8 ″)-3.2 (1/4 ″)-6.35 (1/16 ″)-1.6 14 14 14 18 18 18 18 25 25 25 25 25 14 14 CM CN CO BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints EX, Bohlender Screw cap made of conductive black PPS-EX reinforced with glass fibres, inner parts made of conductive PTFE-EX. Applications: Connecting equipment and fittings with GL threads with hard-walled tubing or tubes made of glass, plastic or metal. Fixing probes, thermometers, dip tubes or cables in reaction vessels. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: Vacuum: Conductivity: PTFE-, PPS-EX from -200°C to +250°C ++ very good 10 bar suitable 106 Ohm for tubing outer Ø mm 4 6 4 6 8 10 8 10 12 14 co d e b e w Thread GL 14 14 18 18 18 18 25 25 25 25 Order No. 10 17 64066 10 17 64074 10 17 64146 10 17 64154 10 17 64162 10 17 64174 10 17 64262 10 17 64274 10 17 64280 10 17 64290 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 183

185

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories Connectors, Clips BOLA GL Tube Fittings Elbow EX, Bohlender Tube fitting elbow-shaped made of PTFE-EX, two connections with GL thread. Connec- tion of tubing or tube with BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints EX. Applications: For distributing liquids or gases. As reduction for connecting different di- ameters of tubes or tubing. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: Vacuum: Conductivity: PTFE-EX from -200°C to +250°C ++ very good 10 bar suitable 106 Ohm Thread GL 14 18 25 Through bore mm 6.5 10.5 14.5 Length without screw joint mm 37 39 51 Wrench size square mm 20 20 27 Order No. 10 17 65814 10 17 65818 10 17 65825 BOLA GL Tube Fittings EX, Bohlender Straight tube fitting made of PTFE-EX, two connections with GL thread. Connection of tubing or tube with BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints EX. Applications: For distributing liquids or gases. As reduction for connecting different di- ameters of tubes or tubing. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: Vacuum: Conductivity: PTFE-EX from -200°C to +250°C ++ very good 10 bar suitable 106 Ohm Thread GL 14 18 25 Through bore mm 6.5 10.5 14.5 Length without screw joint mm 50 50 56 Wrench size square mm 15 19 27 Order No. 10 17 65614 10 17 65618 10 17 65625 BOLA GL Tube Fittings T EX, Bohlender Tube fitting T-shaped made of PTFE-EX, three connections with GL thread. Connection of tubing or tube with BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints EX. Applications: For distributing liquids or gases. As reduction for connecting different di- ameters of tubes or tubing. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: Vacuum: Conductivity: PTFE-EX from -200°C to +250°C ++ very good 10 bar suitable 106 Ohm Thread GL 14 18 25 Through bore mm 6.5 10.5 14.5 Length without screw joint mm 50 56 70 Wrench size square mm 20 20 27 Order No. 10 17 65714 10 17 65718 10 17 65725 co d e b e w 184 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

186

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories Connectors, Clips BOLA GL-Tube Fittings, Bohlender BOLA GL fittings are couplings made of PTFE with ”GL“ connecting thread. They are used to connect tubing made from PTFE, PFA, FEP and glass or metal tubes securely to each other. The fittings are resistant to almost all chemicals and temperature-resistant up to approx. +250°C. Operating pressures of up to 10 bar (at room temperature) can be with- stood in combination with BOLA laboratory screw joints. A major advantage is that you can connect hard tubes or pipes with a variety of outside diameters to one single basic part. For easy connection we recommend BOLA laboratory screw joints. These must be ordered separately according to the outside diameter of your chosen tubing, see page 183. BOLA GL-Tube Fittings Version 1 passage passage passage 2 Angle Angle Angle 3 T T T Connection thread GL 14 18 25 14 18 25 14 18 25 Bore mm 6.5 10.5 14.5 6.5 10.5 14.5 6.5 10.5 14.5 Order No. 24 17 53814 24 17 53818 24 17 53825 24 17 53914 24 17 53918 24 17 53925 24 17 54014 10 17 64018 10 17 64025 1 2 3 BOLA Hose Connectors with Sleeve Nut, Bohlender BOLA hose connectors made of PTFE, non-porous surface, with elastic sealing lip and FPM O-ring, screw caps made of glass fiber-reinforced PPS (max. +250°C). The flow media is exposed only to PTFE. 4 Version Thread GL 4 straight straight 5 curved curved 14 18 14 18 Tube connector outer Ø mm 8.7 10.4 8.7 10.4 Order No. 24 17 58102 24 17 58104 24 17 58202 24 17 58204 Tube Clamps, Worm Drive, IDL NORMA worm-drive tube clamps acccording to DIN 3017 made of rust-proof steel (material No. 1.4016) with galvanized worm screw, strip width 9 mm. for clamping range Order No. mm PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 31 00 24001 31 00 24002 10 00 24003 31 00 24004 31 00 24005 31 00 24006 8 – 16 12 – 22 16 – 27 20 – 32 25 – 40 32 – 50 5 co d e b e w WW7R3249 co d e b e w WW7R3248 Tubing Clamps, IDL Order No. NORMA tubing clamps made of rust-protected steel, with cylinder screws, or from strip width 12 mm with slotted hex screw. for O.D. mm 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 31 00 23006 31 00 23007 31 00 23008 31 00 23009 31 00 23010 31 00 23011 31 00 23012 31 00 23013 31 00 23014 31 00 23015 31 00 23016 31 00 23017 31 00 23019 31 00 23020 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Strip W mm 7 7 7 9 9 9 9 9 9 12 12 12 12 12 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 185

187

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories 1 2 3 4 Stopcocks, Valves, Clamps Clamps/Forceps, Hammacher / IDL Vascular clamps Material 1 rust-proof 2 rust-proof 3 rust-proof 4 rust-proof Form straight curved straight curved 7 Arterial clamps Material Form Length mm 28 28 35 35 Length mm 90 120 140 120 200 Order No. 33 51 11010 33 51 11013 33 51 11016 33 51 11019 Order No. 33 51 11022 33 51 11025 33 51 11028 33 51 11034 33 51 11038 Length mm 200 180 200 160 150 190 Order No. 33 51 11041 33 51 11043 33 51 11046 33 51 11049 33 51 11052 33 51 11055 5 rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof rust-proof 6 rust-proof straight straight straight anatomical, straight straight AT Tubing clamps Material Form Version straight straight straight straight 7 rust-proof 8 rust-proof rust-proof 9 rust-proof AT rust-proof rust-proof The colour of the plastic coating can vary. Rust-proof material: material number 1.4024 smooth jaw plastic-coated plastic-coated wide jaw 5 6 8 9 co d e b e w WWQ7J093 co d e b e w WW7R3220 186 Titanium Tube Clamps, Selftension, BOCHEM Titanium is particularly suitable for applications where high corrosion-resistance, strength and low weight are important. The metal has a white-metallic shine, featuring light weight as well as high strength, ductility, corrosion resistance and thermal resistance. Titanium is resistant to diluted sulphuric acid, hydrochloric acid, solutions containing chloride, cold nitric acid as well as most organic acids and alkaline solutions, such as caustic soda. Material Titanium Length mm 140/40 Order No. 10 05 02900 Wilo Clamps, IDL Tubing clamps or pinck cocks, open at the side, sturdy construction. Made of galva- nized steel, passivated, temperature-resistant up to 150°C. Clamp width mm 10 15 20 30 Order No. 31 00 13010 31 00 13015 31 00 13020 31 00 13021 PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50

188

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories co d e b e w WW7R3239 Stopcocks, Valves, Clamps Tubing Clamps KT, IDL Made of thermoplastic polyester (PBT). Infinitely variable control of flow rates through tubes with just one finger. for tube O.D. up to mm 4.5 6 10 14 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 31 00 10045 31 00 10060 31 00 10100 31 00 10140 red yellow blue red Order No. Colour Clamps, USBECK Article 1 Table clamp aluminium powdercoated, for rods up to 13 mm Ø, for benches up to 60 mm, hinged screws 2 Rubber belt clamp cam type closure, cork lined jaws, capacity Ø 60 – 170 mm, rod Ø 10 mm Cylinder Holder for Gas Cylinders, USBECK • aluminium, powdercoated • for gas cylinders • up to 230 mm Ø • safety belt • with snap buckle • cross holes 6,5 mm • for wall fixing • for benches up to 65 mm Article Cylinder holder for gas cylinders Spare belt for cylinder holder Order No. 10 64 22050 10 64 22825 Order No. 10 64 22070 10 64 22071 1 co d e b e w WWTVV002 2 co d e b e w WWTVV003 Tubing Clamps stop-it, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® co d e b e w WWR4Q045 3 Tubing Clamps stop-it By means of the micro set screw, a sensitive flow regulation or complete stop is possible at the existing hose connections by means of the hose clamp stop-it. Continuously ad- justable, the hose is squeezed against the stable steel hook. The stop-it models are made of PVDF, are heat-resistant to up to 140°C and can be opened and closed in each position (Easy-Click). • Sizes from 1 to 20 mm • Colour coding with 4 fresh colours • Easy-Click-lock 3 Tube Ø max. mm up to 10 up to 15 up to 20 up to 10 up to 15 up to 20 Colour Order No. red 10 04 59102 red 10 04 59152 red 10 04 59202 yellow 10 04 59104 yellow 10 04 59154 yellow 10 04 59204 Tube Ø max. mm up to 10 up to 15 up to 20 up to 10 up to 15 up to 20 Colour Order No. blue blue blue green green green 10 04 59105 10 04 59155 10 04 59205 10 04 59106 10 04 59156 10 04 59206 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 187 Continued on next page

189

Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories 1 co d e b e w WW7R3262 co d e b e w WWRJN158 2 3 co d e b e w WWR4Q043 188 1 Stopcocks, Valves, Clamps Tubing clamps, metal Tubing clamps can regulate or stop the flow through of tubings that carry fluids or gases. Step-less flow regulation: The knurled screw allows very fine stepless flow control. The flow can also be shut off completely and that also with already existing hose connections. The fully adjustable pressure plate squeezes the hose against the stable steel hook. The hose is compressed over a wide area, in order to prevent it from being damaged. Stop-it can be mounted on hoses after they have been connected. Stop-it metal is extremely heat resistant and robust due to the materials galvanised steel and aluminium. The hose clamp is available in four different sizes up to a maximum hose diameter of 30 mm. Tube Ø max. mm 10 15 Order No. 10 04 59510 10 04 59515 Tube Ø max. mm 20 30 Order No. 10 04 59520 10 04 59530 Air Shutter, IDL • For exact controlling of air or gas throughout • Proven on distillations with boiling capillaries • No need to make capillary threads • Body made of plastic, needle with fine thread made of brass • Tapered tip, suitable for fitting thin tube • Inserted Gaco ring ensures absolute gas tightness by pressing in NS sleeve 14.5/23 Article Air controller HM-2 Order No. 27 00 11011 Stopcocks and Three-Way Stopcocks, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Polypropylene Autoclavable stopcocks with PTFE TFE plugs Connectors for tubes with 6,4 to 9,5 mm I.D. Bore mm 2 2 4 3 2 4 Version Two-way stopcock Two-way stopcock Three-way stopcocks, T-shape Three-way stopcocks, T-shape Order No. 27 87 64601 27 87 64602 27 87 64701 27 87 64702 2- and 3-Way Valves, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® Two and three-way valves are used for transfer of liquids or gases in order to release the flow, to block it or to change its direction. Article Mat. 2-way valve 2-way valve 2-way valve 2-way valve 3-way valve 3-way valve 3-way valve 3-way valve 2-way valve 2-way valve 2-way valve 2-way valve 3-way valve 3-way valve 3-way valve 3-way valve PP/PE red/white PP/PE red/white PP/PE red/white PP/PE red/white PP/PE red/white PP/PE red/white PP/PE red/white PP/PE red/white PVDF transparent PVDF transparent PVDF transparent PVDF transparent PVDF transparent PVDF transparent PVDF transparent PVDF transparent Tube I.D. mm 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 5 – 7 7 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 Order No. 27 05 24001 27 05 24002 27 05 24003 10 04 54004 27 05 23101 27 05 23102 27 05 23103 10 04 53104 27 05 21001 27 05 21002 27 05 21003 10 04 51004 27 05 23001 27 05 23002 27 05 23003 10 04 53004

190

Stopcocks, Valves, Clamps Non-Return Valves, BÜRKLE Retaining valve with embossed directional arrow or printed in black. With conical nozzles. Various uses. • Resistant to compression max. 4 bar • Operating temperature +0 to +40°C • With PP valve ball, on request also with ball made of stainless steel or PTFE for Ø Order No. mm 6 – 8 8 – 10 10 – 14 6 – 8 8 – 10 10 – 14 10 04 54060 10 04 54080 10 04 50100 10 04 54106 10 04 54108 10 04 54110 embossed embossed embossed black black black Imprint BOLA Miniature 3-Way Stopcocks, Bohlender 3-way stopcock with ”L“-shaped or ”T“-shaped bore and three connections. Available either with three female threads UNF ¼ ″ 28G or with two female threads UNF ¼ ″ 28G and one male thread UNF ¼ ″ 28G. Total height including stopcock plug made of FEP: 20 mm. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: PTFE, FEP from -200°C to +205°C +++ universal 8 bar for tubing i. Ø x o. Ø mm 1 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 2 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 0.8 × 1.6 (1/32 ″×1/16 ″) 1 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) 2 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) 1.6 × 3.2 (1/16 ″×1/8 ″) Connections female thread Connections male thread Bore shape stopcock 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 L T L T L T L T Overall length mm 32 32 42 42 32 32 42 42 Order No. 10 17 63102 10 17 63106 10 17 63110 10 17 63114 10 17 63104 10 17 63108 10 17 63112 10 17 63116 Lab Aids Tubing, Accessories co d e b e w WWR4Q065 1 2 BOLA Pressure-Relief Valve with Manual Ventilation, Bohlender Pressure control valve with adjustable opening pressure. For preventing pressure drop during filling. Body made of PTFE with two connections with GL 18 thread, valve made of PPS with toggle for manual ventilation by pulling and adjusting screw with counternut for adjusting and fixing of requested pressure in a range between 0.1 and 10 bar. Universal chemical resistance, the flowing product is only exposed to PTFE. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: PTFE, PPS -20°C to +250°C universal factory setting 1.5 bar Connection thread GL 18 Through bore mm 6 Outer dimensions L × D × H mm 88×54×116 Order No. 10 17 68318 Other valves see page 322 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 189

191

Lab Aids Stoppers co d e b e w WW7R3245 co d e b e w WW7R3012 Stoppers BOLA Stoppers, Bohlender Made of PTFE, with ground joint and sealing rings on the outside; knurled or hexagonal grip. Compared with glass stoppers, they are easily removable and can be used without grease. The stoppers can expand under heat which might lead to a breaking of the ground joint sockets. For closing ground joint parts. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: PTFE from -200°C to +250°C +++ universal Article BOLA Stopper NS 14/23 BOLA Stopper NS 29/32 Minimum order quantity pc 3 3 Order No. 10 17 63604 10 17 63607 Poly Stoppers, IDL Stoppers with standard ground joint (NS) made of polyethylene, with fluting for good sealing effect, embossed size marking, indifferent to nearly all lyes and acids, tempera- ture-resistant up to ca. 125°C. Ground joint size 7/16 10/19 12/21 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 34/35 45/40 Cork Stoppers, IDL Order No. 24 00 39105 24 00 39110 24 00 39112 24 00 39114 24 00 39119 24 00 39124 24 00 39129 24 00 39134 24 00 39145 Height mm 16 16 16 17 18 20 20 22 22 22 22 22 22 23 26 26 26 26 Ø at top mm 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Ø at bottom mm 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 Order No. 24 00 11101 24 00 11102 24 00 11103 24 00 11104 24 00 11105 24 00 11106 24 00 11107 24 00 11108 24 00 11109 24 00 11110 24 00 11111 24 00 11112 24 00 11113 24 00 11114 24 00 11115 24 00 11116 24 00 11117 24 00 11118 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 co d e b e w 190 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

192

Stoppers Stoppers acc. to DIN 12871, Deutsch & Neumann Lab Aids Stoppers O.D. mm B Ø mm H mm O.D. mm Holes Natural rubber gray NR 3.5 5 8 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 14 14 14 17 17 17 18 18 18 21 21 21 23 23 23 26 26 26 29 29 29 31 31 31 36 41 47 50.5 56 60 64.5 71 79 87 94 6.5 15 20 9 12 20 14.5 20 14.5 20 16.5 20 16.5 20 20 18 20 18 18 20 25 22 25 22 25 22 30 24 24 30 30 24 30 27 30 27 30 27 29 30 30 29 30 29 30 32 30 32 32 30 30 35 30 35 30 35 35 38 35 38 38 35 40 44 40 49 55 40 59.5 45 65 45 70 50 75.5 55 60 83 65 92 100 65 65 107 - - - - 3 - 3 - 3 3 - 4 4 - 4 4 - 5 5 - 5 5 - 6 6 - 6 6 - 7 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - 1 - 1 2 - 1 2 - 1 2 - 1 2 - 1 2 - 1 2 - 1 2 - 1 2 - - - - - - - - - - - Order No. 24 34 10101 24 34 10102 24 34 10103 24 34 10104 24 34 10105 24 34 10106 24 34 10107 24 34 10108 24 34 10109 24 34 10110 24 34 10111 24 34 10112 24 34 10113 24 34 10114 24 34 10115 24 34 10116 24 34 10117 24 34 10118 24 34 10119 24 34 10120 24 34 10121 24 34 10122 24 34 10123 24 34 10124 24 34 10125 24 34 10126 24 34 10127 24 34 10128 24 34 10129 24 34 10130 24 34 10131 24 34 10132 24 34 10133 24 34 10134 24 34 10135 24 34 10136 24 34 10137 24 34 10138 24 34 10139 24 34 10140 24 34 10141 24 34 10142 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 25 25 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 Silicone VMQ Order No. 24 34 14101 24 34 14102 24 34 14103 24 34 14104 24 34 14105 24 34 14106 24 34 14107 24 34 14108 24 34 14109 24 34 14110 24 34 14111 24 34 14112 24 34 14113 24 34 14114 24 34 14115 24 34 14116 24 34 14117 24 34 14118 24 34 14119 24 34 14120 24 34 14121 24 34 14122 24 34 14123 24 34 14124 24 34 14125 24 34 14126 24 34 14127 24 34 14128 24 34 14129 24 34 14130 24 34 14131 24 34 14132 24 34 14133 24 34 14134 24 34 14135 24 34 14136 24 34 14137 24 34 14138 24 34 14139 24 34 14140 24 34 14141 24 34 14142 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 25 25 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 Also available in NR red, NBR black and CR red-brown Silicone Foam Stoppers, neoLab® Same chemical and thermal properties as silicone, but extremely lightweight. Suit- able as a stopper for round containers or necks. Can be drilled as easily as cork. With- stands temperatures from -60°C to +200°C, autoclavable, odor-free and non-toxic. co d e b e w WW2NY219 Height mm 20 22 25 27 30 33 35 40 42 48 52 Ø at bottom mm 8.0 11.0 13.0 15.5 19.0 23.0 28.0 33.0 38.0 44.0 49.0 co d e b e w Ø at top mm 12.0 15.0 17.5 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 46.0 52.0 58.0 Colour Order No. white pink yellow green blue white pink yellow green blue white 24 01 24250 24 01 24251 24 01 24252 24 01 24253 24 01 24254 24 01 24255 24 01 24256 24 01 24257 24 01 24258 24 01 24259 24 01 24260 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 191

193

Lab Aids Stoppers / Foils and Bags co d e b e w WWQVD056 co d e b e w WWQED078 co d e b e w WW2NY158 co d e b e w WW2NY275 192 Stoppers Stoppers, Rettberg Stoppers with conical ground joint, DIN 12252, form C, hollow, made of borosilicate glass 3.3. Ground joint NS 5/13 7.5/16 10/19 12.5/21 14.5/23 Order No. 13 40 39105 13 40 39107 13 40 39110 13 40 39112 13 40 39114 Ground joint NS 19/26 24/29 29/32 34.5/35 45/40 Order No. 13 40 39119 13 40 39124 13 40 39129 13 40 39134 13 40 39145 Joint Stoppers, BRAND Conical joint stopper, amber, Boro 3.3, honed. Ground joint NS 10/19 12/21 14/23 19/26 24/29 Order No. 10 49 14671 10 49 14672 10 49 14673 10 49 14674 10 49 14676 Foils Aluminium Foil, neoLab® Aluminium foil for covering, sealing, packing, etc. Different thickness options. The 60 cm roll fits into a practical holder with tear off mechanism which you can stand up or hang on a wall. Article Order No. Aluminium foil Aluminium foil Aluminium foil, extra thick Aluminium foil, extra thick Aluminium foil, extra thick Aluminium foil, extra thick Aluminium foil, extra thick holder for 60 cm rolls Width cm 30 60 30 45 50 60 60 Thickness mm 0.013 0.021 0.030 0.030 0,030 0.030 0,050 Length m 25 100 100 100 100 100 100 38 01 16596 38 01 16601 38 01 16595 38 01 16597 10 01 16003 38 01 16599 10 01 16598 38 01 16600 Parafilm Dispensers, neoLab® Parafilm Dispensers Dispensers made of Plexiglas for standard reels of Parafilm 10 cm wide. With hinged lid and cutting knife. Film is kept tidy, clean and in view. With improved para- film guide device and smooth moving cutting knife. Dimensions: 12 × 16 × 17 cm (W × L × H) with lid. Article Parafilm dispenser Parafilm dispenser Parafilm dispenser Parafilm dispenser Parafilm Article Parafilm® M Parafilm® M Colour transparent orange blue red Width mm 100 100 Length m 38 75 Order No. 28 01 31010 28 01 31003 28 01 31004 28 01 31008 Order No. 28 01 31011 28 01 31012

194

Lab Aids Foils and Bags Foils Parafilm Dispenser, ISOLAB Perfect tool for safe and easy cutting of 100 mm and 50 mm width parafilms. Keeps the remaining part uneffected from enviromental conditions. Can cut one roll of 100 mm or simultaneously 2 rolls of 50 mm width parafilm. Manufactured from ABS and featured with a double action cutting blade that silides and cuts. The clear hinged lid enables visual control of the remaining parafilm roll. Unique design of the blade holder guarantees easy handling. The cutting blade can easily slide in both directions providing a clean and uninterrupted cut. The cutting blade is embedded in a holding block ensuring finger safety. Article Parafilm dispenser, blue Parafilm dispenser, purple Parafilm dispenser, ruby Order No. 10 66 40600 10 66 40601 10 66 40602 co d e b e w WWMUE006 Sealing Film, BRAND 1 Sealing film Seal-R-film ™ • Protects against evaporation, leakage, and contamination • Easy sealing with 300% elasticity • Lot identification of each roll No more spilling, evaporation, and contamination! Seal-R-film™ sealing film seals beak- ers, flasks, and other vessels. The sealing film can be stretched to three times its original length. This means that Seal- R-film™ always fits, even with irregular shapes. For traceability, each roll has a lot identi- fication. With the BRAND cutter for sealing film you can cut rolls with widths of 50 and 100 mm efficiently and economically and store them cleanly. 0.14 ± 0.02 mm non-toxic > 66°C (151°F) > 288°C (550°F) Technical data: Thickness: Toxicity: Melting point: Boiling point: Continuous service temperature: -20°C to 46°C Elasticity (25°C): Tear strength (25°C): Gas permeability in 24h at room temperature and a pressure of 0.1 MPa: CO2 (carbon dioxide): O2 (oxygen): Water vapor permeability: < 1000 cm³/m² < 350 cm³/m² < 0.8 g/m² 300% 1.5 MPa co d e b e w WWQED081 1 Product BRAND Seal-R-film™ BRAND Seal-R-film™ BRAND Seal-R-film™ BRAND Seal-R-film™ Length m 38 75 75 15 Width mm 100 50 100 500 Order No. 10 49 71620 10 49 71622 10 49 71624 10 49 71626 Sealing Film The handy Cutter is convenient for clean storage and cutting of sealing film such as BRAND Seal-R-film®. Suitable for 50 mm and 100 mm wide rolls. Easy to use: 1. Inserting, 2. Dispensing, 3. Cutting, 4. Taking. 2 Article 2 Cutter for Sealing film co d e b e w Order No. 10 49 71650 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 193

195

Lab Aids Foils and Bags co d e b e w WWR4Q054 2 1 Bags Sterilized Packaging Bag SteriBag, BÜRKLE Appliance 1. Tear off perforated top. 2. To avoid contamination, open bag by spreading pull-tabs apart. 3. Pour sample into bag, either liquid or solid. 4. Grab both pull-tabs of the plastic band to close bag. 5. Twirl the bag 3 or 4 times around the plastic band. 6. Fold both pull- tabs to ward each other. Air-tight and leak-proof closure. 1 Sampling bag SteriBag without labelling area The sterilized sampling bags for samples in chemistry, pharmaceuticals, medicine, veter- inary science and foodstuffs are made of super-polyethylene and consequently are ex- ceptionally tear-proof and leakproof. SteriBag is also distinguished by its safe handling. When used according to instructions, samples are sterile. Integrated safety: The tab-ends are sealed in plastic film to prevent skin injuries. • Sterile, RNase, DNase and pyrogen-free • Can be labelled • Leakproof • Space-saving • Choice of 6 sizes • Transparent • With practical closure to tear-open Article SteriBag SteriBag SteriBag SteriBag SteriBag SteriBag Contents ml 60 150 450 650 800 1650 Width × Length mm 76 × 127 76 × 178 114 × 229 140 × 229 114 × 305 178 × 305 Order No. 10 04 50060 10 04 50180 10 04 50540 10 04 50720 10 04 50810 10 04 51650 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 250 2 Sampling bag SteriBag with labelling area Article SteriBag SteriBag SteriBag SteriBag SteriBag SteriBag Contents ml 60 150 450 650 800 1650 Width × Length mm 76 × 127 76 × 178 114 × 229 140 × 229 114 × 305 178 × 305 Order No. 10 04 50061 10 04 50181 10 04 50541 10 04 50721 10 04 50811 10 04 51651 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 250 3 Sampling bag SteriBag StandUp SteriBag StandUp is a sterile sample bag with a stand-up base. The special bottom un- folds as soon as the bag is filled. This makes SteriBag StandUp stable and able to stand on its own without a separate stand or support, leaving both your hands free to take the sample and fill the bag. The wire bracket at the closure keeps the bag open, making it easy and convenient to fill. The sample bag is the ideal space-saving, unbreakable, inexpensive and sterile replace- ment for bottles and beakers. • Can be used for samples available as liquids, powders, solids and pastes; suitable for foods and can be frozen • The stable standing SteriBag StandUp sample bag is easy and safe to transport • SteriBag StandUp, the sample bag for easy handling of samples Order No. Article Contents ml 400 600 Width × Length mm 229 × 114 229 × 152 PU pc/Pack 500 500 10 04 54440 10 04 54460 SteriBag StandUp SteriBag StandUp 4 Sampling bag SteriBag Blue The sterile sample bag SteriBag Blue is especially suitable for use in the food, feed, and pharmaceutical industries. In order to prevent the risk of foreign bodies in production, the sample bag and the tear-off seal are blue, a colour which does not occur naturally in food. Therefore, should a bag or parts of a bag get into a production machine, they are easily visible and can be reliably detected by visual inspection. The disposable sample bag is approved for contact with food. It is suitable for storing and transporting solid, semi-solid and liquid media. • PE, blue • Leak-tight • With labelling space • Sterile, RNase-, DNase- and pyrogenic free Article SteriBag Blue SteriBag Blue Contents ml 650 1650 Width × Length mm 229 × 140 305 × 178 Order No. 10 04 57008 10 04 57012 PU pc/Pack 500 250 Continued on next page 3 4 194

196

Bags 5 Sampling bag SteriBag Cleanroom The SteriBag Cleanroom sample bag with double packaging can be brought directly into the cleanroom. There are 25 sample bags in each double outer packaging, which can be removed one after the other and are therefore ideal for introduction into the cleanroom. SteriBag Cleanroom is sterile inside and outside. This guarantees contamination-free stor- age and transport of solid, semi-solid and liquid samples. The sample bag is perfect for use in chemical and pharmaceutical applications. • Sterile, double packaging • RNase-, DNase- und pyrogenic free • PE, transparent • Leak-tight • With labelling space Article SteriBag Cleanroom SteriBag Cleanroom Contents ml 800 1650 Width × Length mm 305 × 114 305 × 178 Order No. 10 04 58010 10 04 58012 PU pc/Pack 500 250 6 Sampling bag SteriBag Premium The SteriBag Premium sample bags uniquely combine a high degree of security, sterility, tamper evident closure and traceability, they are used to securely transport and for the storage of samples. After sampling, the sample can be filled directly into the sterile sample bag. The tam- per-evident closure seals the bag liquid-tight and secure. When trying to open the closure again, the word ”STOP“ appears clearly visible. Both the sample bag and the tear-off field are labeled with a unique tracking number, this allows a complete documentation and traceability. SteriBag Premium is suitable for many demanding applications in the food, pharmaceu- tical, medical area as well as in cleanroom or biotechnology sectors. • Sterilised by gamma rays (10-6) • With integrated tamper-proof closure for manipulation evidence • Unique identification via tracking number • Suitable for the use with foodstuffs Contents ml 300 Length × Width mm 200 × 145 Order No. 10 04 54480 PU pc/Pack 100 Sampling bag SteriPlast Kit The sampling set SteriPlast Kit consists of ten sample spatulas or ten sample scoops and ten SteriBag Premium tamper-proof sample bags. Thus the SteriPlast Kit is the ideal combination for sampling where purity and sterility is essential. All parts are sterilised by gamma rays and suitable for use with foodstuffs. The scoops or spatulas are clean room manufactured and individually packed. The sam- ple bag SteriBag Premium has an integrated sealing and is liquid-tight. A unique tracking code on both the bag and the tear-off field guarantees complete documentation and traceability. SteriPlast Kit including scoop 50 ml or spatula 150 mm insertion depth, and SteriBag Premium 300 ml. Version 7 Scoop & bag Spatula & bag Order No. 10 04 58803 10 04 58809 PU pc/Pack 10 10 LDPE-Bags, neoLab® LDPE bags with practical fast closure. Press the bag together to close tightly. Film 0.05 mm thick. Black LDPE-Bags with white label field For light-sensitive samples. 8 Article Plastic bag, black Plastic bag, black Plastic bag, black Plastic bag, black Plastic bag, black Width mm 70 100 120 160 200 Length mm 100 150 170 220 300 Order No. 29 01 17130 29 01 17131 29 01 17132 29 01 17133 29 01 17134 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Lab Aids Foils and Bags 5 6 7 co d e b e w WW2NY305 8 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 195 Continued on next page

197

Lab Aids Foils and Bags 1 2 co d e b e w WW2NY088 3 4 196 Bags Transparent LDPE-Bags with white label field Length mm 60 100 150 170 220 300 Width mm 40 70 100 120 160 200 1 Article Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Order No. 28 01 17089 28 01 17090 28 01 17092 28 01 17094 10 01 17091 28 01 17093 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Transparent LDPE-Bags without label field 2 Article Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Plastic bag Width mm 60 60 80 150 180 220 300 Length mm 80 130 120 220 250 310 400 Order No. 28 01 17120 28 01 17121 28 01 17122 28 01 17123 28 01 17124 28 01 17125 28 01 17126 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Foil Tubing, neoLab® Polyethylene foil tubing, thick, transparent, suitable for welding with foil welders, closed at both sides, on cardboard reel. Width mm 100 150 200 250 300 710 Foil thickness mm 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Order No. 32 01 14011 32 01 14012 32 01 14013 32 01 14014 32 01 14015 32 01 14016 PU m/Roll 100 100 100 100 100 100 Sheet Welders, neoLab® 3 Sheet welder Folio Seals and separates in one operation. High performance air extraction, ideal for packaging all types of goods for freezing. Operation warning light with automatic cut-out. Technical data: Mains supply: Sealing width: 230 V~ / 60 Hz 29 cm Article Sheet welder Folio, complete with 1 reel of sheet Foil tubing for sheet welder 29 cm, 10 m length, pack of 3 Order No. 32 01 21095 32 01 21096 4 Sheet welder Futura Junior For use on the bench, with continuous heat, for wrapping materials of PE, PP and thin laminates with a film thickness of 2 – 15 µm. Depending on the material and the thickness, the film is sealed within 1 – 3 seconds. Takes approx 1 minute for the machine to warm up. Technical data: Seam length: Seam width: Power input: Weight: Article Sheet welder Futura Junior max. 300 mm 1 mm 25 W 2 kg co d e b e w WW2NY087 Order No. 32 01 21097 Continued on next page

198

Lab Aids Foils and Bags / Stand Materials 5 Bags Sheet welder Sealboy For use on benches, manually operated, for wrapping film made of PE and PP and thin laminates with film thickness of 2 – 20 µm. Equipped with timer to set duration and inten- sity of sealing operation and a buzzer to indicate when process is completed. Suitable for permanent operation. Cutter inclusive. Technical data: Sealing length: Sealing width: Power supply: Power requirement: Dimensions (L × W × H): 445 × 140 × 190 mm max. 235 mm 3 mm 230 V/50 Hz 210 W Article Sheet welder Sealboy Accessories for Sealboy Article Table Hinged, makes cutting easier. Assembled dimensions (L × W × H): 330 × 280 × 130 mm Table dispenser incl. sheet holder for a better hold on the foil reel and even feeding of the foil. Stand Components Standbases, DIN 12892, BOCHEM 3 fixed feet, 1 adjustable foot, hole with thread M 10 Standbases made of 18/10 steel Feet with non-slip rubber covering 6 L mm W mm H mm 210 130 3 250 160 3 Wght kg 1.6 1.9 Order No. 31 05 05000 31 05 05001 L mm W mm H mm 300 150 3 315 200 3 Order No. 32 01 21099 Order No. 32 01 21090 32 01 21091 Wght kg 2.0 2.4 Order No. 31 05 05002 31 05 05003 7 Standbases made steel, enameled green Thread M 10, 1 adjustable foot, feet with plastic guard caps L mm H mm W mm Wght kg 180 100 6 0.8 210 130 6 1.3 250 160 6 2.0 300 150 6 2.2 315 200 6 3.0 Order No. 10 05 05030 31 05 05031 31 05 05032 31 05 05033 31 05 05034 8 Bushings for all support rods for rods without thread Material 18/10 steel, dia. 12 mm Malleable iron, painted, dia. 12/13 mm L mm H mm W mm Wght kg 210 130 8 1.8 250 160 8 2.6 315 200 8 4.0 315 200 10 5.0 Order No. 31 05 05035 31 05 05036 31 05 05037 31 05 05038 Order No. 31 05 05014 31 05 05044 LABOMECA® Frame Foot, BOCHEM Frame foot for fastening frame rods to the wall, floor or ceiling. Material Aluminium alloy for rod Ø mm 12 – 13 Ø mm 50 Order No. 31 05 25001 5 co d e b e w WWQ7J002 6 7 8 co d e b e w WWQ7J003 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 197

199

Lab Aids Stand Materials co d e b e w WWQ7J007 co d e b e w WWQ7J006 1 2 3 198 Stand Components LABOMECA® Large Stands, BOCHEM Large stands with H-type foot with 1 hole for rods. Leveling facility on one side of the foot. Stand rod 16 × 1000 mm (1.280 kg) made of stainless steel 18/10 (M12 × 30 mm) Base 420 × 400 mm (8.5 kg) made of cast iron, green-painted Article Large stand with foot in H-form Order No. 31 05 31001 Frame Rods for Standbases, DIN 12893, BOCHEM 1 Frame rods made of 18/10 steel, material 4301 Length mm 500 600 750 1000 1000 1250 1250 1500 1500 With thread M 10 Order No. 31 05 05110 31 05 05111 31 05 05112 31 05 05113 31 05 05116 31 05 05114 31 05 05117 31 05 05115 31 05 05118 Ø mm 12 12 12 12 16 12 16 12 16 2 Frame rods made of aluminium, hard bright grade Length mm 500 600 750 1000 With thread M 10 Order No. 31 05 05130 31 05 05131 31 05 05132 31 05 05133 Ø mm 12 12 12 12 1 Frame rods made of steel, zincked Length mm 500 600 750 1000 1250 1500 Ø mm 12 12 12 12 12 12 With thread M 10 Order No. 31 05 05150 31 05 05151 31 05 05152 31 05 05153 31 05 05154 31 05 05155 Without thread Order No. 31 05 05120 31 05 05121 31 05 05122 31 05 05123 31 05 05126 31 05 05124 31 05 05127 31 05 05125 31 05 05128 Without thread Order No. 31 05 05140 31 05 05141 31 05 05142 31 05 05143 Without thread Order No. 31 05 05160 31 05 05161 31 05 05162 31 05 05163 31 05 05164 31 05 05165 co d e b e w WWQ7J008 Clamp Holders/Frame Clamps, DIN 12895, BOCHEM Different screw types: • Type 1: thumb screw M8/M10 • Type 2: heart screw M6/M8 • Type 3: socket screw M6/M8 • Type 4: safety screw ”heart“ type M8 • Type 5: safety screw ”thumb“ type M10 Article 3 Bosshead 18/10 steel, clamping width 16,5 mm, type 2, M6 Safety bosshead 18/10 steel, clamping width 16,5 mm, same as Fig. 3, type 4, M8 Bosshead malleable cast iron, chromium plated, clamping width 16,5 mm, type 1, M8 Order No. 31 05 05300 31 05 05305 31 05 05360 Continued on next page

200

Stand Components Article Bosshead malleable cast iron, chromium plated, clamping width 20 mm, type 1, M8 Bosshead malleable cast iron, chromium plated, clamping width 36 mm, type 1, M8 Safety bosshead malleable cast iron, chromium plated, clamping width 16,5 mm, same as Fig. 3, type 4, M8 4 Cross-type bosshead 18/10 steel, clamping width 16,5 mm, type 2, M6 Safety cross-type bosshead 18/10 steel, clamping width 16,5 mm, same as Fig. 4, type 4, M8 Cross-type bosshead malleable cast iron, chromium plated, clamping width 16,5 mm, type 1, M8 Safety cross-type bosshead mall. cast iron, chromium plated, clamp. width 16,5 mm, as Fig. 4, type 4, M8 5 Bosshead rotatable 18/10 steel, clamping width 16,5 mm, type 2, M6 Bosshead rotatable malleable cast iron, chromium plated, clamping width 16,5 mm, type 1, M8 6 Bosshead for grids 18/10 steel, clamping width 13 mm, type 2, M6 Bosshead for grids malleable cast iron, chromium plated, clamping width 13,5 mm, type 2, M6 7 Hook-type bosshead 18/10 steel, clamping width 13 mm, type 2, M8 Hook-type bosshead steel, nickel plated, clamping width 13 mm, type 2, M8 8 Bosshead aluminium, clamping width 16,5 mm, type 1, M8 Safety bosshead aluminium, clamping width 16,5 mm, as Fig. 8, type 4, M8 9 Universal bosshead aluminium, clamping width 13 mm, type 1, M8 AT Cross-type bosshead aluminium alloy, clamping width 16,5 mm, type 1, M8 Safety cross-type bosshead aluminium alloy, clamping width 16,5 mm, as Fig. 10, type 4, M8 Cross-type bosshead aluminium alloy, clamping width 27 mm, type 1, M10 Safety cross-type bosshead aluminium alloy, clamping width 27 mm, as Fig. 10, type 5, M10 AK Safety screw M8 made of stainless steel, with rotatable steel button, type 4, length 65 mm Order No. 31 05 05359 31 05 05369 31 05 05365 31 05 05301 31 05 05306 31 05 05361 31 05 05366 31 05 05302 31 05 05362 31 05 05303 31 05 05363 31 05 05304 31 05 05364 31 05 05332 31 05 05337 31 05 05334 31 05 05350 31 05 05356 31 05 05352 31 05 05357 10 05 55250 Bosshead TECHNO, BOCHEM Ideal for supporting overhead stirrers. Material Aluminium Clamp width mm 5 – 22 Thread M8 Angle ° 90 Order No. 10 05 05670 4 5 6 7 8 9 AT AK Lab Aids Stand Materials co d e b e w WWQ7J085 Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 199

201

Lab Aids Stand Materials co d e b e w WW7R3200 2 4 6 1 3 5 7 Stand Components Clamp Holders and Clamps, IDL Clamp holders and clamps made of die-cast zinc, chromium-plated Article 1 Double bosshead with clamping width 5 to 17 mm 2 Double bosshead with extra wide clamping width 30 mm for main frame, 20 mm for side frame 3 Bosshead with clamping width 5 to 15 mm with PVC-coated jaws and 3 wheel screws, for holding frame rods from various directions 4 Burette clamp with PVC-coated jaws Length approx. 210 mm, for diameters between 0 and 45 mm 5 Thermometer clamp with wheel screws Length up to holder approx. 90 mm Order No. 31 00 10010 31 00 10020 31 00 10030 31 00 10050 31 00 10055 Clamp holders and clamps made of duralumin (aluminium alloy) Article 6 Clamp with PVC-coated jaws With 2 wheel screws, length approx. 230 mm, for diameters between 10 and 60 mm 7 Clamp holder ”Trio“ for diameters between 9 and 13 mm 7 Clamp holder ”Trio“ for diameters between 19 and 25 mm Order No. 31 00 10040 31 00 10072 31 00 10074 co d e b e w WWQ7J013 LABOMECA® Frame Clamps, BOCHEM These frame clamps are particularly suitable for sturdy frame walls. Fixing with hexagon socket screws. Frame clamps for fastening frame rods at right angles 9 Material 8 Aluminium alloy 8 18/10 steel 9 Aluminium alloy 9 Aluminium alloy AT Connection bar 360° AK Allen key for rod Ø mm 12-13 × 12-13 12-13 × 12-13 12-13 × 16 16 × 16 for 2× 31 05 21002 Order No. 31 05 21001 31 05 21002 31 05 21003 31 05 21004 10 05 99126 10 05 00995 AT + 2x 8 LABOMECA® Clamp Holders/Frame Clamps, BOCHEM Form Material 18/10 steel Cross bosshead Cross bosshead Aluminium alloy Cross bosshead Aluminium alloy Cross bosshead 18/10 steel Clamp width mm 2.0 – 16 2.0 – 16 8.0 – 27 8.0 – 27 Order No. 31 05 23002 31 05 23003 31 05 23005 31 05 23006 8 8 4 AT co d e b e w 200 WWQ7J014

202

Stand Components Clamps, BOCHEM Clamps with flexible shaft, shaft nickel-plated. Article Mat. 1 Round clamp 2 Burette clamp 3 Angled clamp 4 Three-finger 5 Round clamp Clamp W mm 40 0 – 20 40 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel Aluminium alloy 0 – 30 Aluminium alloy 15 – 65 Shaft Ø mm 12 12 12 8 12 Shaft L mm 290 290 290 220 225 Order No. 31 05 05830 31 05 05850 31 05 05840 31 05 26007 31 05 27001 Other clamps with flexible shaft are also available in request. without the illustrated accessories and clamp holders Retort Clamp MAXI, BOCHEM Finger covered with stabilised glass fibre. Material Length mm Steel chromium plated 400 Shaft length mm 210 Ø mm 80 – 180 Order No. 10 05 05567 LABOMECA® 3- and 4-Finger Clamps, BOCHEM Three-finger clamps Material Shaft 6 Aluminium alloy 7 Aluminium alloy/PVC1) flexible Clamp width mm 0 – 30 12 – 100 Rod Ø mm 8 12 Rod L mm 220 140 Order No. 31 05 26007 31 05 26003 Four-finger clamps Material 8 18/10 steel/silicone1) 35 – 100 Clamp width mm Rod Ø mm 12 Rod L mm 140 Order No. 31 05 26004 1) Span width independently adjustable by 2 regulating screws. LABOMECA® Clamps, BOCHEM Clamps, round jaws, plastic coating Material 9 LABORAL alloy/PVC AT 18/10 steel/silicone 9 LABORAL alloy/PVC AT 18/10 steel/silicone AT LABORAL alloy/PVC Clamp width mm 8 – 30 8 – 30 15 – 65 20 – 75 22 – 70 Rod Ø mm 8 8 12 12 12 Rod L mm 125 125 140 140 140 Order No. 31 05 27005 31 05 27006 31 05 27002 31 05 27003 31 05 27004 Lab Aids Stand Materials co d e b e w WWQ7J010 4 5 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWQ7J016 6 7 8 co d e b e w WWQ7J072 co d e b e w WWQ7J017 9 AT AK Material Clamp, flexible shaft, plastic coating Clamp width mm 15 – 65 AK Aluminium alloy co d e b e w Rod Ø mm 12 Rod L mm 225 Order No. 31 05 27001 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 201

203

Lab Aids Stand Materials 1 Burette Clamps/Stands, neoLab® Stand Components co d e b e w 2 WW2NY045 For all standard burette sizes and for stand rods from 11 to 13 mm dia. One-hand opera- tion, without screws, made completely of plastic. The burette is elastically supported. Easy vertical positioning of the burette for filling or reading. Burette rod 680 mm long, plastic bottom 240 × 240 mm. Article 1 Burette clamp 2 Burette stand Plastic plate with white field and support rod. Supplied without the illustrated accessories 4 Clamps, DIN 12894, BOCHEM Micro clamps, one-sided with shaft Material 3 18/10 steel 4 Steel, galvanised Clamp width mm 0 – 20 0 – 20 Length mm 150 150 Ø mm 10 12 Burette clamps with clamp holder Version Material 5 single-sided single-sided 6 double-sided double-sided 18/10 steel Steel, galvanised 18/10 steel Steel, galvanised Clamp width mm 0 – 20 0 – 20 0 – 20 0 – 20 Order No. 24 01 22240 24 01 22241 Order No. 31 05 05415 31 05 05475 Order No. 31 05 05416 31 05 05476 31 05 05417 31 05 05477 Universal clamps Material 7 18/10 steel Aluminium Clamp width mm 0 – 80 0 – 80 Shaft length mm 150 180 Shaft Ø mm 12 12 Order No. 31 05 05425 31 05 05444 Chain clamps, chain 70 cm Material 8 18/10 steel Steel, galvanised Clamp width mm 50 – 160 50 – 160 Shaft length mm 250 250 Shaft Ø mm 12 12 Order No. 31 05 05424 31 05 05485 Special clamps made of 18/10 steel, finger with silicone coating Version 9 3-finger system AT 4-finger system Clamp width mm 0 – 120 0 – 120 Shaft length mm 190 150 Shaft Ø mm 12 12 Order No. 31 05 05420 31 05 05423 Clamps made of 18/10 steel, electrolytically polished, with cork inlay Jaws AK round/round round/round round/round round/round round/round round/round round/round round/round AL straight/angled straight/angled straight/angled straight/angled straight/angled Clamp width mm 15 25 40 60 80 100 120 150 10 – 15 15 – 25 25 – 40 40 – 60 60 – 80 Shaft length mm 150 150 150 150 180 180 180 180 150 150 150 150 180 Shaft Ø mm 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 10 12 Order No. 31 05 05400 31 05 05401 31 05 05402 31 05 05403 31 05 05404 31 05 05450 31 05 05451 31 05 05452 31 05 05405 31 05 05406 31 05 05407 31 05 05408 31 05 05409 Clamps made of malleable cast iron, painted, with cork inlay Jaws AM round/round Clamp width mm 15 Shaft Ø mm 12 Shaft length mm 150 Order No. 10 05 05460 Continued on next page co d e b e w WWQ7J009 3 5 7 9 AK AM AO 202 6 8 AT AL AN AP

204

Stand Components Clamps made of malleable cast iron, chromium plated, with cork inlay Jaws round/round round/round round/round Clamp width mm 25 40 60 Shaft Ø mm 12 12 12 Shaft length mm 150 150 150 Order No. 31 05 05461 31 05 05462 31 05 05463 Condenser clamp made of malleable cast iron, chromium plated, silicone coated Clamp width mm AN 50 – 100 Length mm 150 Ø mm 10 Order No. 31 05 05474 3-finger-clamps made of aluminium Material AO Al / PVC AP Al / corc AQ Al / PVC Clamp width mm 0 – 70 0 – 100 0 – 125 Overall length approx. mm 140 140 130 Ø mm 8 8 10 Order No. 31 05 05562 31 05 05565 31 05 05566 Burette Clamps, BOCHEM Lab Aids Stand Materials AQ co d e b e w WWQ7J011 Burette clamps made of aluminium two-sided. with roller type fastener and clamp hold- er for rods up to 13 mm dia., clamping range: 0 to 25 mm. Roller spacing 170 mm, rollers made of PVC. Article Burette holder Order No. 31 05 05600 Supplied without the illustrated accessories Burette Clamps, BOCHEM Burette clamp with shaft AR Material Shaft length mm chromium-plated 130 Shaft Ø mm 10 Clamp width mm 4 – 20 Order No. 31 05 05623 co d e b e w WWQ7J066 AR co d e b e w WW7R3199 AS BT AS Material Length mm chromium-plated 115 BT Material Shaft Ø mm chromium-plated 13.5 Burette + thermometer clamp ”AUTOMATIC“ with shaft Shaft Ø mm 8 Clamp width mm 0 – 25 Order No. 31 05 05624 Burette + Thermometer clamp ”AUTOMATIC“ with bosshead (13,5mm) Clamp width mm 0 – 25 Angle ° 90 Order No. 31 05 05625 Support Rings, IDL Outer Ø mm 60 80 100 113 134 Material Steel, galvanized Steel, galvanized Steel, galvanized Steel, galvanized Steel, galvanized Order No. 31 00 20060 31 00 20080 31 00 21100 31 00 20120 31 00 20140 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 203

205

Lab Aids Stand Materials WWQ7J012 1 co d e b e w 2 co d e b e w WWQ7J021 Stand Components Support Rings, BOCHEM 1 Support Rings Material 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel 18/10 steel Steel, galvanized Steel, galvanized Steel, galvanized Steel, galvanized Steel, galvanized 2 Crucible retort ring Wire Ø mm 8 8 10 10 10 8 8 8 8 8 Inner Ø mm 50 70 100 120 140 50 70 100 130 160 Shaft L mm 160 200 220 220 220 160 200 220 220 220 Order No. 31 05 05500 31 05 05501 31 05 05502 31 05 05503 31 05 05504 10 05 05580 10 05 05581 10 05 05582 10 05 05583 10 05 05584 Ideal for clamping of crucibles for heating substances over a gas flame. • Oriental clamp for crucibles, which can be fixed easily by hand according to the used • 3-point-clamp: ring with 3 guide sleeves pointing to the center, the clamping rods inside crucible size: 0 to 70 mm the guide sleeves can be scrolled • Clamping rods: ceramic rods ”Degussit“ (max. 2030°C) • Application with support stands or tripods; with the support stands the distance be- tween the gas flame and crucible bottom can be adjusted • Fits also for platinum crucibles Article Material Crucible retort ring 18/10 stainless steel 0 – 70 10 05 05505 Ø mm Order No. Tripods, DIN 12889, BOCHEM Tripods with plastic guard caps Material Feets 18/10 steel welded 18/10 steel welded 18/10 steel welded 18/10 steel welded Malleable iron, galvanized screwed Malleable iron, galvanized screwed Malleable iron, galvanized screwed Malleable iron, galvanized screwed Inner Ø mm 100 120 140 160 100 120 140 150 Height mm 180 210 210 240 180 210 210 240 Order No. 32 05 05200 32 05 05201 32 05 05202 32 05 05203 32 05 05230 32 05 05231 32 05 05232 32 05 05233 Stainless Steel Stand, USBECK co d e b e w WWTVV004 3 Stainless 4-feet stand • stainless steel • excellent stability • space saving delivery and storage due to dismountable feet • double benefit: Top plate can also be used as a heat-insulating mat Height mm 210 210 210 Length mm 120 160 200 Width mm 120 160 200 4 Accessories Glass ceramic plates • thickness 3.8 mm • chamfered edges • usable above open burner flame Length mm 120 160 200 Width mm 120 160 200 Order No. 10 64 25151 10 64 25152 10 64 25153 Order No. 10 64 25111 10 64 25112 10 64 25113 4 3 204

206

Lab Aids Stand Materials Lifting Platforms Jacks BOY, LAT BOY is an adjustable-height table for supporting oil baths, heating plates, electrical instru- ments, Dewar jars, etc. at the desired height without having to be locked in place. A scissors-type mechanism is used to adjust the height. Manual operation using a rotary knob or motor assist. BOY can simply be placed on a tabletop or can be mounted on a stand up to 16 mm Ø using additional stand plates. It is made of anodized light alloy and is corrosion resistant. Jacks BOY co d e b e w WWW4U007 Order No. 31 20 21100 31 20 21105 31 20 21110 31 20 21115 31 20 21116 31 20 21117 31 20 21118 31 20 21122 31 20 21123 31 20 21124 31 20 21125 Order No. 31 20 22130 31 20 22131 31 20 22132 31 20 22135 31 20 22134 Order No. 31 20 22133 31 20 22177 31 20 22199 Type 100 1 105 2 110 3 115 116 4 116MS 5 118 122 122R 122M 6 122MR Platform size mm 50 × 40 80 × 75 120 × 140 122 × 150 180 × 216 180 × 216 240 × 320 400 × 400 400 × 400 400 × 400 400 × 400 Load capacity kg 10 15 30 40 60 50 70 110 110 90 90 Type 116MS, 122M and 122MR with motor drive Type 122R and 122MR: with rollers Stroke mm 31 – 93 49 – 147 60 – 243 80 – 278 95 – 398 95 – 398 120 – 500 253 – 629 253 – 629 253 – 629 253 – 629 Additional platforms Type 130 131 132 135 134 Platform size mm 200 × 200 300 × 300 180 × 260 320 × 220 400 × 500 for type 110 and 115 110 and 115 110 and 115 110 and 115 118 Accessories Article Platform type 133, size 200 × 200 mm For fastening to frames Frame rod type 177, size 12 × 650 mm For use together with 2 additional platforms size 130 Clap holder type 199 For fastening the BOY 105, 110, 115, 116 lab frames to the frame holder Jacks, BOCHEM Jacks ”MAXI“ made of 18/10 steel Scissor-construction made of 18/10 steel, with setting wheel. PLUS: 30% more height. Platform si- ze mm 160 × 130 200 × 200 Stroke min. mm 75 75 Stroke max. mm 400 400 Operating load dynamic max. kg 7 7 Operating load static max. kg 30 30 Order No. 31 05 11132 31 05 11122 2 4 6 1 3 5 co d e b e w WWQ7J065 Platform si- Jacks ”MAXI“ made of aluminium Green, EPOXI powder-coated, with setting wheel. Scissor-construction made of 18/10 steel. PLUS: 30% more height. Stroke max. mm 400 400 Operating load dynamic max. kg 7 7 Operating load static max. kg 30 30 31 05 11022 31 05 11032 Order No. 160 × 130 200 × 200 ze mm To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 205 Stroke min. mm 75 75 co d e b e w

207

Lab Aids Stand Materials co d e b e w WWQ7J018 2 4 1 3 5 co d e b e w WWQ7J087 6 7 206 Lifting Platforms Jacks, DIN 12897, BOCHEM 1 Jacks made of aluminium, green, powder-coated, with adjusting wheel Platform Order No. size mm Stroke min. mm 100 × 100 55 130 × 160 60 200 × 200 60 240 × 240 60 4 300 × 3001) 90 4 400 × 4001) 90 size mm Stroke min. mm 100 × 100 55 130 × 160 60 200 × 200 60 240 × 240 60 4 300 × 3001) 90 4 400 × 4001) 90 Stroke max. mm 120 275 275 275 470 470 Stroke max. mm 120 275 275 275 470 470 Operating load dynamic max. kg 5 7 7 7 12 15 Operating load static max. kg 10 30 30 30 60 60 Operating load dynamic max. kg 5 7 7 7 12 15 Operating load static max. kg 10 30 30 30 60 60 2 Jacks made of aluminium, blue, anodized, with adjusting wheel Platform Order No. size mm 3 Jacks made of 18/10 steel, polished, with adjusting wheel Platform Operating load static max. kg 10 30 30 30 60 60 Stroke min. mm 100 × 100 55 130 × 160 60 200 × 200 60 240 × 240 60 4 300 × 3001) 90 4 400 × 4001) 90 Operating load dynamic max. kg 5 7 7 7 12 15 Stroke max. mm 120 275 275 275 470 470 1) with adjusting wheel for ratchet. Ratchet inclusive. Jacks made of 18/10 steel, polished, with adjusting wheel Ratchet for adjusting wheel Material 5 18/10 steel Length mm 190 Order No. 10 05 11088 31 05 11015 31 05 11020 31 05 11030 31 05 11040 31 05 11080 31 05 11090 31 05 11016 31 05 11021 31 05 11031 31 05 11041 31 05 11081 31 05 11091 Order No. 31 05 11115 31 05 11120 31 05 11130 31 05 11140 31 05 11180 31 05 11190 Electrical Lift ”Lift 240“, BOCHEM Electrical lab jack of compact design! The ”Lift 240“ comes with motor and control system integrated in the lab jack. Ensuring an absolutely stable stand and wobble-free lifting and lowering, it offers perfect safety. The extremely robust, highly precise scissor technology of 18/10 steel and the electronic components are durably protected using a bellows of chemically resistant PTFE. The design of the electrical ”Lift 240“ is identical with that of the mechanical 240 × 240 mm BOCHEM lab jack. Both variants can be used and replaced in existing structures. An end stop can be manually adjusted at the outside. Technical data: Dimensions, retracted (L×W×H): Max. height: Workspace (L×W): Weight: Lifting speed: Max. lifting of scissor: Max. load capacity (dynamic): Nominal torque: Degree of protection: Supply voltage transformer: Output: Battery remote control: Permissible ambient temperature: Noise emission: Material work space: Material body: Material corrugated bellows: 240 × 240 × 120 mm 300 mm 240 × 240 mm 6 kg 180 mm/min 180 mm 25 kg 8 Nm IP 30 100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz 24 V 3 V, lithium cell CR2430 5 to 45°C less than 40 dB (A) 18/10 stainless steel 18/10 stainless steel PUR Article 6 Electrical lift ”Lift 240“ 7 Remote control for ”Lift 240“ (spare part) Remote control incl. Order No. 10 05 11220 10 05 11230

208

Lab Aids Recording, Marking, Identification Pens, Labeling Systems Markers Edding 3000, IDL Felt markers with fiber tip 1.5 to 3 mm wide for signing, marking etc. Wipe- and wa- ter-proof. Colour Line thickness black 1 blue red mm Order No. 28 00 00010 28 00 00020 28 00 00030 Colour Line thickness green 2 black 3 black mm 1.0 0.75 Order No. 28 00 00040 10 00 08014 10 00 08015 Lab Pens and Markers, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL A special quick-drying black ink, which is highly resistant to chemicals and water, was specially developed for these felt-tip pins to write on PolyPaper®. The pens can be used to permanently record information, and they are also excellent for writing on glass and plastic. The ink remains clearly legible even after repeated autoclaving. Cap with handy clip. Lab markers are the same as the lab pens, except that the marker has a wider felt tip. Article Laboratory pins with narrow tip Laboratory marker with wide felt tip ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 28 87 63100 28 87 63110 PU pc/Pack 4 4 Engraving Device, BOCHEM Article Engraving device for permanent labeling of metal, glass and plastic Engraving through vibration principle, incl. Carrying case with 4 points, 220 Volt, EU-Plug, spare poart points available Solid carbide extra fine engraving point Standard carbide engraving points – 2 pack Standard engraving points for softer material – 5 Pack Abrassive engraving point Order No. 10 05 12601 10 05 12602 10 05 12603 10 05 12604 10 05 12605 Identification Labels PolyPaper labels, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL • Waterproof • Resistant to most chemicals and tearing (Some chemicals may dissolve label adhesive without harming the label paper) • Will stick to plastic and glass • Autoclaveable • Rated to -29°C • Laser and ink jet printer compatible • Accepts a variety of inks including copier, marker, ballpoint, gels, and technical markers (pretest specific inks for suitability prior to use) -does NOT accept pencil • New Feature: formatted for easy set-up in most word processing label printing co d e b e w 2 3 co d e b e w WW7R3164 1 WWRJN162 co d e b e w WWQ7J037 co d e b e w WWRJN163 programs; easy set-up instructions included with each pack Label length mm 22 20 25 13 51 Label width mm 22 38 67 44 102 Order No. 10 87 63191 10 87 63192 10 87 63193 10 87 63194 10 87 63195 PU pc/Pack 800 650 300 800 100 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 207

209

Lab Aids Recording, Marking, Identification co d e b e w WW7R3210 co d e b e w WW5PT025 Identification Labels Labels Blank, IDL According to DIN 12069 C, made of pure white special foil, self-adhesive with black edge, for the user to mark himself. Light-fast, ageing-resistant, washable and largely resistant to acid, lye and alcohol. Not suitably for laser printers. Article Labels 74×37 mm for bottles of 100 ml and bigger Labels 105×52 mm for bottles of 500 ml and bigger Protective covering for 28 00 21092 Protective covering for 28 00 21094 Fiber pen for light-fast marking, blue Order No. 28 00 21092 28 00 21094 28 00 21081 28 00 21083 28 00 22003 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 Safety Labels Danger Labels (GHS), WINLAB® Use harmonized symbols to label your products and warn against hazards! From 01 Dec.2010, it is mandatory that all substances are classified and labeled pursuant to GHS. The world-wide harmonization is based on the United Nations ”Globally Harmonized Sys- tem of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals“ (GHS) for classification and labeling of sustances. As a consequence, the differences in the regulations on transport of hazardous goods and in the regulations for handling hazardous goods no longer apply. WINLAB GHS symbols on sheets of foil Self-adhesive, sticks to smooth undergrounds, suitable for indoor and outdoor use. Water-, oil- and base-resistant, temperature resistant from -25 to +60°C Size 18 × 26 mm (sheet with 30 pc.) Size 26 × 37 mm (sheet with 12 pc.) Danger symbol Explosives GHS 01 Explosives GHS 01 Flammable GHS 02 Flammable GHS 02 Oxidizing GHS 03 Oxidizing GHS 03 Gases under pressure GHS 04 Skin corrosion, serious eye damage GHS 05 Skin corrosion, serious eye damage GHS 05 Acute toxicity GHS 06 Acute toxicity, skin and eye irritation GHS 07 Inscrip- tion Size 18 × 26 mm Order No. Attention 10 03 10010 Danger 10 03 10012 Attention 10 03 10014 Danger 10 03 10016 Attention 10 03 10018 Danger 10 03 10020 Attention 10 03 10022 Attention 10 03 10024 Danger 10 03 10026 Danger 10 03 10028 Attention 10 03 10030 Carcinogenic, mutagenic GHS 08 Carcinogenic, mutagenic GHS 08 Hazardous to the aquatic environment GHS 09 Attention 10 03 10032 Danger 10 03 10034 Attention 10 03 10036 208 26 × 37 mm Order No. 10 03 10060 10 03 10062 10 03 10064 10 03 10066 10 03 10068 10 03 10070 10 03 10072 10 03 10074 10 03 10076 10 03 10078 10 03 10080 10 03 10082 10 03 10084 10 03 10086 Continued on next page

210

Lab Aids Recording, Marking, Identification Safety Labels GHS symbol sets Article GHS symbol set with 5 important symbols Consisting of: GHS 02 Flammables (Attention) / GHS 03 Oxi- dizing (Attention) / GHS 05 Skin corrosion, serious eye damage (Attention) / GHS 06 Acute toxicity (Danger) / GHS 07 Skin and eye irritation (Attention) On film, 30 pc. each, size 18 × 26 mm GHS symbols – complete Full set, consisting of all symbols GHS 01 to GHS 09 (14 sheets of film with Attention and Danger labels) On film, 30 pc. each, size 18 × 26 mm Order No. 10 03 10099 10 03 20099 Prohibition Labels, WINLAB® According to ASR A 1., 3DIN EN ISO 7010 Self-adhesive plastic foil, light-fast, and largely resistant to chemicals. Diameter 200 mm. Article No smoking No naked flames, fire, naked ignition source and no smoking Not drinking water Eating and drinking prohibited Access for unauthorized is prohibited No entry for persons with pacemakers or implanted defibrillators Metal parts of all kinds and watches prohibited Do not extinguish with water Switched on mobile phones prohibited No admittance for persons with metal containing implants Order No. 28 03 31001 28 03 31002 28 03 31005 28 03 31007 28 03 31006 28 03 31008 28 03 31009 28 03 31004 10 03 31012 10 03 31013 Order Labels, WINLAB® Self-adhesive plastic foil, light-fast, and largely resistant to chemicals Diameter 200 mm. According to ASR A 1.3, DIN EN ISO 7010. Article Wear goggles Use a breathing mask Wear a mask Use hand protectors Use a face protector Wear ear protectors Wear a protective apron Wear ear protectors and eye protectors Wear ear protectors and eye protectors Order No. 28 03 32001 28 03 32002 10 03 32012 28 03 32005 28 03 32007 28 03 32004 10 03 32013 10 03 32014 28 03 32009 co d e b e w WW5PT024 co d e b e w WW5PT026 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 209

211

Lab Aids Recording, Marking, Identification co d e b e w WW5PT039 Safety Labels Warning Labels, WINLAB® In compliance with ASR A1.3, DIN EN ISO 7010. Triangular labels made of self-adhesive, light-fast film resistant to most chemicals. Side length 200 mm. Article Bio-hazard Warning about general hazard If applicable, this label must be used together with an additional sign identifying the type of danger. Warning about gas cylinder Warning about hazardous or irritating substances Warning about caustic substances Warning about inflammable substances Warning about fire promoting substances Warning about toxic substances Warning about explosive substances Warning about radioactive or ionising radiation Warning about laser rays Order No. 28 03 13314 28 03 00496 28 03 00589 28 03 17048 28 03 00449 10 03 00450 28 03 00530 28 03 00437 28 03 00426 28 03 00463 28 03 02653 Training Materials, WINLAB® The perfect help for all those who do not constantly deal with hazardous substances symbols and the use of H/P statements. Article Article Information board, H/P statements Information board with all H and P statements according to GHS. A useful help for everybody who works in the warehouse, production, or laboratory, and a valuable teaching tool. Plastic board, 500 × 700 mm Information board, GHS hazard symbols Information board on the topic of hazardous working substances, GHS symbols, plas- tic board, 600 × 400 mm This information board on the topic of hazardous working substances shows the most common GHS hazard symbols. The board helps employees and apprentices/trainees to correctly identify and interpret the GHS hazard symbols. Order No. 10 03 20296 Order No. 10 03 47825 co d e b e w WW5PT028 Adhesive Tapes Adhesive Warning Tapes, neoLab® BIOHAZARD: Yellow adhesive tape with black symbol and inscription TOXIC: Adhesive tape with skull symbol and inscriptin TOXIC CAREFUL RADIOACTIVITY: Yellow adhesive tape with red radioactivity symbol and in- scription Adhesive Warning Tapes Imprint Order No. Width mm 25 25 19 Length mm 66 66 66 28 01 27010 28 01 27011 28 01 17500 Order No. 28 01 17501 co d e b e w WW2NY055 BIOHAZARD TOXIC CAREFUL RADIOACTIVITY Accessories Article Adhesive tape dispenser 210

212

Lab Aids Recording, Marking, Identification Adhesive Tapes Laboratory labeling Tape, neoLab® Specially coated plastic adhesive tape with synthetic adhesive; can be written on with any pen, temperature-resistant from -70 to + 95°C, resistant to moisture. Useful dispens- er with special writing platform is also available. Reels of 55 m, ca. 20 mm wide Article Laboratory labeling tape Adhesive tape dispenser Order No. 28 01 17260 28 01 17261 Adhesive Acrylic Tape, neoLab® Acrylic adhesive insulating and labeling tape, colored, with high adhesion. Indispen- sable in every lab, office and workshop for marking, fixing, insulating and sealing in count- less applications. Reels of 66 m, 19 mm wide. co d e b e w co d e b e w WW2NY056 WW2NY057 co d e b e w WW2NY223 Article Adhesive acrylic tape, yellow Adhesive acrylic tape, green Adhesive acrylic tape, blue Adhesive acrylic tape, red Adhesive tape dispenser neoTape Label, neoLab® Order No. 28 01 23250 28 01 23251 28 01 23252 28 01 23253 28 01 17501 Self-adhesive, colored marking tapes for countless uses, can be marked with a pencil, ball-point, fiber-tip, ink, typewriter, etc. Removable without a trace for use a second time. Resistant to oil, water and acid. Temperature-resistant from -23°C to +121°C. Reels: 12.7 m long, inner diameter: 2,54 cm neoTape, single rolls Colour white yellow green pink red orange blue beige salmon copper rosé violet gray black lavender Width mm 13 Order No. 28 01 26101 28 01 26102 28 01 26103 28 01 26104 28 01 26105 28 01 26106 28 01 26107 28 01 26108 28 01 26109 28 01 26110 28 01 26111 28 01 26112 28 01 26113 28 01 26114 28 01 26118 19 Order No. 28 01 26201 28 01 26202 28 01 26203 28 01 26204 28 01 26205 28 01 26206 28 01 26207 28 01 26208 28 01 26209 28 01 26210 28 01 26211 28 01 26212 28 01 26213 28 01 26214 28 01 26218 25 Order No. 28 01 26221 28 01 26222 28 01 26223 28 01 26224 28 01 26225 28 01 26226 28 01 26227 28 01 26228 28 01 26229 28 01 26230 28 01 26231 28 01 26232 28 01 26233 28 01 26234 28 01 26238 neoTape, assortment packs Article neoTape assortment pack 5 colours, 19 mm wide Colours: white, yellow, green, red, blue neoTape assortment pack 10 colours, 13 mm wide, incl. dis- Order No. 10 01 26200 10 01 26240 penser Colours: white, yellow, green, orange, red, pink, blue, rose, violet, lavender Dispenser Handy dispenser made of resistant plastic, especially suitable for neoTape-label tapes. Article Hand dispenser for 1 roll Suitable for 1 piece of neoTape with a length of 12.7 m or all ad- hesive tapes with a inner Ø of max. 2.54 cm. With 2 spacers and plastic clip for locking. Multitape dispenser for inner Ø 2,54 cm Suitable for up to 15 pieces of neoTape with a length of 12.7 m or all adhesive tapes with a inner Ø of max. 2.54 cm. L×W×H: 25 × 11.4 × 8.6 cm Multitape dispenser for inner Ø 7,6 cm Suitable for neoTape with a length of 55 m or all adhesive tapes with a inner Ø of max. 7.6 cm. L×W×H: 25 × 18.4 × 15.2 cm Order No. 28 01 26250 28 01 26251 10 01 26180 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 211

213

Lab Aids Aids, Tools co d e b e w co d e b e w WWQVD111 WW7R3261 1 2 3 212 Boiling Aids Boiling Rods, Rettberg Article Boiling rod made of borosilicate glass/DURAN Length: approx. 220 mm approx. 6 mm Diameter: Order No. 15 40 00010 Boiling Stones, IDL 1 Boiling stones A for preparative work • For use in aqueous, neutral and base solvents, also under vacuum. • Effective in very small quantities of liquid. • Ready for use again after interruptions. • To prevent surging. Article Boiling stones type A, pack of 250 g/approx. 2400 pieces Order No. 21 00 70001 2 Boiling stones B for analytical work • For distillations in acidic, neutral and base solvents. • Not suitable for vacuum distillations. • Effective in very small quantities of liquid. • Ready for use again after interruptions. • Ceramic product of high purity. Article Boiling stones type B, pack of 200 g/approx. 9000 pieces Order No. 21 00 70002 3 ”Resistent“ boiling stones for preparative and analytical work • In biochemistry, biotechnology, microbiology and microanalysis. • For vacuum and high-vacuum distillations. • Absolute resistance to the strongest acids, lyes, solvents and oxidation agents. • No abrasion and no absorption of substances. • Sterilization by burn-out, softening at 2500°C. • Effective in very small quantities of liquid. Article Boiling stones Resistant, glass 50 g/approx. 1800 pieces Boiling stones Resistant, glass 20 g/approx. 715 pieces Order No. 21 00 70003 21 00 70004 co d e b e w Operating Resources, Aids Label Eliminator, neoLab® Label eliminator for removing labels with ease from wherever they are a nuisance, e.g. on diskettes, printer cylinders, equipment and bottles. WW2NY111 Article Label eliminator, can of 200 ml Order No. 35 01 16247 Oil Pen, Hammacher / IDL • synthetic maintenance oil • 12 ml • vapour permeable and high temperature stability up to 260°C • odourless, transparent and free of silicone • does not leave any brown stains on the instruments • precise dosage by the safety/anti-drip valve Article Oil pen Contents ml 12 Order No. 10 51 99712

214

Operating Resources, Aids Dedusting Spray, Compressed Air Spray, neoLab® Blows away dust. Excellent for cleaning and dust removal on electronic components and dusty precision instruments such as scales, microscopes, etc. Attach the pliable 15 cm capillary tube and point at the dusty area. Non-toxic, non-flammable. Article Contents ml Compressed air spray, Super 200 Compressed air spray, 4 times stronger blowing power 340 Order No. 35 01 16240 10 01 16242 Lab Aids Aids, Tools co d e b e w WW2NY113 Cooling Spray, neoLab® For fast cooling. Cools down to -52°C. For rapid detection of faults in the electronics sector and for testing the operation of thermostats. Cooling spray for dental work and sports. Shock freezing of small samples. Article Cooling spray, can of 200 ml Order No. 35 01 16241 co d e b e w WW2NY114 PTFE Spray, neoLab® Lubrication, anti-seizing and separating agent to perform the most demanding tasks in the laboratory and the workshop. The spray delivers a grease-free, dry film that with- stands temperatures up to 265°C. Suitable for lubricating machine parts, tools and equipment. Good anti-friction action. Prevents adhesion of foreign substances. No soiling or smearing. Article PTFE spray, can of 400 ml Order No. 35 01 21170 co d e b e w WW2NY115 Drying Beads, IDL Drying beads made of alumosilicate gel with indicator orange/colorless • Uniform bead form (bead diameter over 80% 3 to 5 mm), • Good mechanical strength (low abrasion), • Very high adsorption capacity (spec. surface approx. 700 m2), • Long life and good regeneration capability (regeneration at +100°C, max. at +180°C). WW7R3027 co d e b e w The bead shape of the individual particles together with the uniform distribution of bead size guarantees low gas resistance and and trouble-free gas throughput without formation of channels or cavities. Article Drying beads, 1 l Drying beads, 2 l Drying beads, 5 l Drying beads, 10 l co d e b e w Order No. 35 78 01100 35 78 02100 35 78 05100 35 78 10100 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 213

215

Lab Aids Aids, Tools co d e b e w WW2NY014 co d e b e w WW7R3018 co d e b e w WW7R3264 214 Operating Resources, Aids Drying Beads, neoLab® Indicator silica gel adsorbent KC drying beads for moisture control. Spherical silica gel with very high mechanical strength. Free of heavy metal and eco-friendly. A very good visual changing of colour guarantees a clear moisture indication. The level of the moisture absorption is indicated by a change of colour from orange to colourless with an approx. 6 % w/w water content. Even afterwards, the drying beads adsorb water until reaching the maximum absorption capacity. They can be dried again in the drying cabinet with 100°C to 110°C and are then usable again. Grain size: 2 to 5 mm Article Drying beads Drying beads Contents ml 1000 5000 Order No. 12 01 17031 12 01 17035 SICCO Desiccant, Bohlender Dehumidifies the air inside a desiccator. Do not raise the silica gel for more than approx. 10 mm in the tray. 500 g of the desiccant can absorb up to 16 g humidity in 24 hours. Can be regenerated at 90 to 110°C in an oven. Must be stored in a dry, closed and hermeti- cally sealed jar. Silica gel with colour indicator from orange to dark brown and black (does not contain cobalt-II-chloride). Grain size 2.0 to 5.0 mm, loss after drying <=4%. Type Bottle Bottle Canister Weight g 360 720 8000 Budde Joint Grease, Buddeberg Order No. 10 17 69504 10 17 69508 10 17 69512 Budde Joint Grease For all glass joints. Transparent, vacuum tight, water washable and water soluble. Main- tains practically the consistency between -30°C and +200°C, non-solidifying. Compatible with most elastomers. Tube of 80g. Article Budde Joint Grease Order No. 10 14 53296 Joint and Stopcock Grease, IDL Joint and stopcock grease glisseal red N (standard grade) Silicone-free, with excellent resistance to temperature and chemicals, no melting or drip- ping within a range of +40 to 300°C. Easy to remove with deconex. Pack 10 g 60 g 1 kg Order No. 35 00 99010 35 00 99020 35 00 99030 Joint and stopcock grease glisseal blue HV (high vacuum grade) Silicon-free, with very good vacuum resistance. Other properties as for glisseal red N. Easy to remove with deconex. Stable at temperatures of up to 320°C. Pack 10 g 60 g 1 kg Order No. 35 00 99110 35 00 99120 35 00 99130 Rotation Joint Grease, IDL Alsirol rotation joint greasewithout silicone For greasing all rotating glass and metal parts • Food compatible, certified by LGA Bayern • Biodegradable • Excellent adhesion and viscosity • Stable film for reliable long-term applications • Little heat of rotation, even in continuous use • For sealing stirring systems with glass/metal stirrers • Protects rotating, precision ground sleeves and stirring shafts • Resistant to acids and lyes • Operating range -40 to +200°C, vapour pressure up to 0,00001 mbar • Makes glass repairs possible Article Alsirol rotations joint grease, can of 50 ml Order No. 35 00 42004

216

Operating Resources, Aids Joint Grease, IDL KWS joint grease without silicone • Food compatible, certified by LGA Bayern • Biodegradable • Created as a vacuum and high-vacuum grease • Excellent adhesion and viscosity • Resistant to acids and lyes • Operating range -40 to +200°C, vapour pressure up to 0.000001 mbar • Jammed ground joints can be disconnected by heating briefly • No polymerisation, no sticking Article KWS joint grease, can of 30 ml Order No. 35 00 42003 Silicone Grease, Vaseline, neoLab® 1 Bayer silicone grease Article Silicone grease, low viscosity, 35 g Silicone grease, medium viscosity, 35 g Silicone grease, high viscosity, 35 g 2 Vaseline DAB For applying to hands, ground joints, desiccators, etc. Article Vaseline, 50 g Order No. 35 01 12070 35 01 12071 35 01 12072 Order No. 35 01 12075 BASF Joint Grease, neoLab® Water-soluble joint grease, suitable for all ground glass joints, transparent, vacuum-proof, with practically the same consistency from -30 to +200°C, does not gum, can be washed off with water without solvents, no problem for glass blowers, compatible with most elas- tomers, biodegradable, harmless to health in normal use. Article BASF joint grease, 50 g Order No. 35 01 12060 Heat-Transfer Fluids LABOTHERMOL®, neoLab® For oil baths and melting point measuring equipment, for gentle heating, for prevention of overheating, for heat transfer in the lab and workshop, according to requirements. Article 3 LABOTHERMOL® O, heating bath liquid on a mineral oil basis 35 01 16060 dark colored, high resistance to oxidation, canisters of 5 l Operating range: Viscosity at 40°C: Order No. -10 to +280°C 43.5 mm2s-1 (20 cSt.) Article 4 LABOTHERMOL® S, silicone oil heating bath liquid colorless and hence also ideal for melting point measuring equipment. With stabilizing Order No. 35 01 16070 additive, bottles of 1000 ml Operating range: Viscosity at 25°C: 0 to +150°C 1000 cSt. Article 5 LABOTHERMOL® K, safety cold and heat transfer fluid on an alcohol basis Order No. 35 01 16065 nearly colorless, water-soluble and hence washable, canisters of 5 l Operating range: -20 to +150°C >+255°C acc. to DIN 51758 Flashpoint: co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Lab Aids Aids, Tools co d e b e w WW7R3265 co d e b e w WW2NY116 1 2 co d e b e w WW2NY118 co d e b e w WW2NY108 3 5 4 215

217

Lab Aids Aids, Tools Operating Resources, Aids Water Bath Additives BAD-Stabil, neoLab® e co d e co d b b e w e w WW2NY107 Concentrate to prevent build-up of algae, bacteria and fungus in water baths or ther- mostat loops. Add 1 ml BAD-Stabil per liter of water. The blue indicator show the effec- tiveness of the additive. When the blue coloring disappears, renew the bath. Bio-degra- dable, non-toxic, bactericidal, fungicidal. Article Water bath additive BAD-Stabil Bottle of 100 ml for 100 l bath liquid Order No. 35 01 16095 Heating Bath Liquid Budde, Buddeberg Heating bath liquid Budde Use: The crucial advantages of heating bath liquid BUDDE compared to the oils or other organ- ic liquid mainly used are: Accidental spillage of water into the bath does not lead to dan- gerous spitting at temperatures over 100°C, as the water dissolves in the heating bath liquid and subsequently evaporates safely. Heating bath liquid BUDDE can be used con- tinuously as a heating medium up to approx. 170°C. Higher temperatures (below flash point) are possible, but will result in rapid darkening. The low pour point allows the bath liquid also to be used as a cooling medium. Mixtures with 10% to 30% water have proved best for this. Heating bath liquid BUDDE can easily be rinsed away with water which eas- es cleaning of laboratory equipment, e.g. distillation flasks, and also bench or floor if the bath liquid is accidentally spilled. Heating bath liquid BUDDE does not foam when mixed with water. Viscosity on addition of water: Heating bath liquid BUDDE is quite viscous at ambient or low temperatures, and therefore sometimes difficult to dispense. The addition of 10 to 20% water reduces the viscosity and enables easier handling. If the mixture is then heated to 100°C, the water evaporates with- out boiling. Further heating is only shortly delayed by this. Before next heating, water can be added again. • Water solubility: Heating bath liquid BUDDE can be mixed with water in any ratio. The hardness of the water has no effect on the bath liquid. • Chemical character: Modified polyglycolether • Appearance: Clear, colourless or lightly yellowish liquid • Storage time: (unlimited at present knowledge) When stored for long periods (over 2 years) the product may become darker. This does not affect the performance of the product. • Density (DIN 51757, ASTM 1298, 23°C): approx. 1.13 g/cm³ to 1.17 g/cm³ • Flashpoint acc. to DIN EN ISO 2592: > 290°C • Water solubility: Heating bath liquid BUDDE is miscible with water in each ratio. No sus- ceptibility to water hardness in mixed water. • Temperature range: -20°C to +170°C • Water soluble Article Heating bath liquid Budde Tools Order No. 10 14 53852 PU l/Canister 5 HACCP Cutting Board, BOCHEM Made of polyethylene, not toxic, suitable for dish washer, heat resistant up to 90°C, hy- gienic, heavy quality. Material Polyethylene Polyethylene Colour blue white Length × Width × Height mm 610×460×25 610×460×25 Order No. 10 05 12615 10 05 12616 co d e b e w WWQ7J090 Glass Tubing Cutters, BOCHEM Article Glass tubing cutter with hard metal wheel (without glass) Ms-Ni Spare hard metal wheel Order No. 33 05 12210 33 05 12211 co d e b e w WWQ7J063 216

218

Lab Aids Aids, Tools Tools Cork Borer Sets, BOCHEM Cork borer made of nickel-plated brass, with ejector co d e b e w WWQ7J036 Quantity borers 3 6 9 12 15 18 Accessories Borer Ø mm 5.00 – 7.50 8.75 – 11.25 12.50 – 15.00 16.25 – 18.75 20.00 – 22.50 23.75 – 26.25 Order No. 33 05 12430 33 05 12431 33 05 12432 33 05 12433 33 05 12434 33 05 12435 Article Cork borer sharpener for all cork borer tubes up to 27 mm Ø Order No. 33 05 12440 LED LENSER Torches and Head Lamps, Rettberg LED lamps for professionals and users with highest demands. co d e b e w WWQVD179 Order No. 10 70 00218 Article 1 Lamp P7.2 High End Power LED Length 130 mm, weight 175 g, 320 lm, beam range 260 m, burning time up to 50 hours Article 2 Lamp P17 High End Power LED Length 315.5 mm, weight 799 g, 220 lm, beam range 330 m, burning time up to 480 hours Article 3 SEO 5 head lamp 1 x High End Power LED white, 1 x High End Power LED red, rotating head, homogene- ous light (defocused) or focused light, glare-free red LED light, high comfort level, low weight 105 g, washable headband, beam range up to 120 m, 180 lm, burning time up to 25 hours Order No. 10 70 00220 Order No. 10 70 00219 1 2 More LED Lenser products on request 3 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 217

219

Teaching Aids Demonstration Aids co d e b e w WW2VA016 Demonstration Aids Fire Brigade Experimentation Kit, Labor-Pilz Basics of combustion and effect of various fire extinguishing agents The fire brigade developed this experimental to investigate the basics of combustion and the effects of different extinguishing agents. The case has been specifically designed to supplement industrial health and safety trai- ning events in the laboratory, engineering, and production sector with practice experi- ments. Furthermore, many groups of young firefighters use the case for teaching purpo- ses. All the experiments selected for the case can be carried out in classrooms or teaching rooms. The participants can also carry out the experiments themselves to be ready for action in case of emergency. The case comprises detailed instructions as well as all relevant utensils for carrying out 15 different experiments. Chemicals such as baking powder, diesel, petrol, steel wool etc. are not comprised but must be procured by the user via the usual sources. Article Fire brigade experimentation kit Order No. 10 47 44800 co d e b e w 218 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

220

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid CHAPTER OVERVIEW Personal Protection, First Aid 219 First Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Emergency Showers, Eye Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Protective Clothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Goggles, Eye Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Mouth Protection, Respiratory Protection . . . . . 239 Gas Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Accessories for Alarm Transmission see Heating and Refrigerating Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 Gloves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Skin Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Cleaning, Disinfection 242 Wipes, Cleaning Cloths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Cleaning Sticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents . . . . . . . . . 247 Covering Films . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Chemical Binders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Waste Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Cleaning Aids, Equipment 261 Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Draining Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Rinsing Equipment, Drying Equipment . . . . . . . . 265 Ultrasonic Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Laboratory Glassware Cleaners/Disinfectors . . 277 Sterilization 279 Sterilization Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Pipette Boxes, Sterilization Containers . . . . . . . . 279 Steam Sterilizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 KNOWLEDGE Cleaning in Ultrasonic Bath . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 KNOWLEDGE Machine Preparation of Lab Glassware . 277 KNOWLEDGE Sterilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 co d e b e w WW2NY242 First Aid First Aid Kit with Occupational Filling, neoLab® First aid kit with basic supply according to DIN 13 157 and occupational supplemen- tary equipment. The kit is made of orange ABS plastic and is provided with the necessary coloured pictograms. Dimensionally stable, impact-resistant, temperature-resistant, splashproof, dustproof, no servicing required. Wall mounting with 90° stop adjustment. Measures: 40 × 30 × 15 cm The sterile bandaging materials are marked with the CE marking, manufacturing date and a expiry date of 20 years. The additional special contents are the result of different job-re- lated requirements. These are, depending on accident risk and need, e.g. eye rinsing for immediate emergency, respiratory mask, cooling spray, cold pads, disinfection, replanta- tion bag, special bandages, instruments etc.. Article First-aid kit “Science and Research” First aid kit “Laboratory and Chemistry” first aid kit “Galvo” for chemical sectors Order No. 36 01 22109 10 01 22104 36 01 22101 First-Aid Kits, neoLab® Acc. to DIN 13157, plus important additional items such as a rescue blanket, compres- sion bandages, mouth-to-mouth resuscitator, Dermotekt bandages, etc. Dimensions (W × H × D): 310 × 130 × 210 mm Order No. 36 01 22100 co d e b e w WW2NY147 Article First-aid kit co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 219

221

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid co d e b e w WW2NY149 First Aid First-Aid Cupboards, neoLab® Practical bandage cabinet, very solid build. The compact size makes it ideally suited for smaller companies and departments. Made of white painted sheet metal with lockable door. Contents complies with DIN 13157 acc. to ASR A4.3 Dimensions: 302 × 362 × 140 mm (L × W × D) Article First-aid cupboard with contents Order No. 36 01 22102 co d e b e w WWR4Q063 1 co d e b e w WWZTQ001 2 4 220 6 5 Emergency Showers, Eye Baths Eyes Fresh Mini Eyewash Station, BÜRKLE Mini eyewash station ideal for the lab, filling stations or all work places where aggressive substances are used. Eyes Fresh can be attached to any standard cold water tap. For normal use of the tap, just press the button and the function changes back from the eye wash (returns automatically to eyewash-function when the tap is closed). Can be fitted onto taps with M22x1, 1/2 ″ or 3/8 ″ outer thread. With sufficient water pressure provided, performance according to DIN EN 15154-2. Article 1 Eyes Fresh mini eyewash station Order No. 10 04 51510 Eye Wash Bottles, EKASTU 3 EKASTU eye wash bottles Eye wash bottles are used to rinse the eyes in the frame of first aid following an accident involving the eyes. Use of an eye wash bottle does not replace an ophthalmological ex- amination, but can help to minimize injuries. The filled EKASTU eye rinsing bottles are eye wash units without water connection, according to the standard DIN EN 15154-4. All filled eye wash bottles are medical products. The bottles are made of transparent polyethylene (PE) and are leak-proof. The eye funnel optimally encloses the eye socket and at the same time guarantees a safe and protected contact with the eyeball. During rinsing, water col- lects in the funnel, which forms a rinsing bath. Contaminated water flows out through a separate outlet. The EKASTU eye rinsing bottles of the MINI series are ideal for carrying in breast or coat pockets. Article Order No. 2 Eye wash bottle ECO with funnel, full, approx. 600 ml 10 52 37111 3 Eye wash bottle ECO-MINI with funnel, full, approx. 200 ml 10 52 37112 Eye wash bottle ECO with funnel, empty, approx. 600 ml 10 52 37011 Eye wash bottle ECO-MINI with funnel, empty, approx. 200 ml 10 52 37012 4 Eye wash station (EPS), complete 10 52 37999 with 2 EKASTU eye wash bottles approx. 200 + 600 ml Accessories Article Eye wash station (EPS), empty for 2 EKASTU eye wash bottles 5 Wall box with transparent lid for 1 eye wash bottle 6 Wall holder for 1 eye wash bottle Order No. 10 52 37955 36 52 20120 10 52 37950

222

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Emergency Showers, Eye Baths Eye Wash Bottles, WINLAB® Ready within seconds to protect your eyes! This fast, flexible and simple eye wash is a sterile solution (0.9% salt solution) which pre- vents dirt and dust particles or micro-organisms from penetrating further into the eye. The eyewash bottles have an ergonomically shaped eye cover to keep the eyelids open during washing so that the eyewash gets directly to the eye. Unopened bottles keep for up to three years. No maintenance required. Article 1 Small bottle, 200 ml For personal protection kits. 4 DUO Eye wash bottle, 1000 ml with 1,000 ml sodium chloride solution, for simultaneous wash- ing of both eyes 2 Eye wash station, 500 ml With 1 bottle, a practical wall holder and pictures giving direc- tions for use. Approx. 3 minutes rinsing time. 6 Storage box for eye wash bottles WINLAB Midi Box (236×225×125 mm) for storing 200 ml and 500 ml eye wash bottles, also suitable for 500 ml DUO eye wash bottle Order No. 36 43 60001 10 03 60010 36 43 60003 10 03 60011 Neutralizing eye rinse solution For protection in case of accidents with acids and lyes. The eyewash bottle is filled with 4.9% phosphate buffer solution which neutralizes the harmful substances in acids and lyes and, if the eye is washed sufficiently, returns the pH level in the area of the eye to the normal pH of 7.3. Article 3 Small bottle, 200 ml For personal protection kits. 5 DUO Eye wash bottle, 500 ml pH neutral, for simultaneous washing of both eyes Order No. 36 43 60005 10 03 60012 1 1 3 2 co d e b e w WW5PT020 4 5 6 co d e b e w WW5PT060 Eye Wash Station, WINLAB® For optimum first-aid in case of eye accidents. For effective eye washing in just 1 to 2 steps! Complete with a 200 ml sterile pH-NEUTRAL bottle as an effective phosphate buffer in case of accidents involving acids, and 500 ml 0.9% sodium chloride solution for further washing. Article 7 Emergency eye wash station on a wall holder with mirror Thanks to the wall holder with mirror, both bottles are INSTANTLY TO HAND! 8 DUO emergency eye wash station with wall holder Eye wash station DUO for simultaneous washing of both eyes. With a pH-neutral DUO eye wash bottle containing 500 ml of sterile phosphate buffer solution (4.9%) and a DUO eye wash bottle with 1,000 ml sodium chloride solution (0.9%). With wall mount, pictogram, and mirror. Eye emergency care plan is comprised in the delivery. Suitable in particular for use at workstations where the eyes may come into contact with acids, bases, and foreign particles. Order No. 36 43 60008 10 03 60014 7 6 8 9 Emergency eye wash station in a dust-proof wall box for flipping open 36 43 60009 With mirror and separate adhesive sign with directions for use. Wall box 265×227×110 mm (H×W×D), sign 290×90 mm. AT DUO emergency eye wash station in a dust-proof wall box Eye wash station DUO for simultaneous washing of both eyes, supplied in a dust-proof wall box. With a pH-neutral DUO eye wash bottle containing 500 ml of sterile phosphate buffer solution (4.9%) and a DUO eye wash bottle with 1,000 ml sodium chloride solution (0.9%). With wall mount, pictogram, and mirror. Suitable in particular for use at workstations where the eyes may come into contact with acids, bases, and foreign particles. 10 03 60016 9 AT co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 221

223

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid co d e b e w WW5PT021 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 co d e b e w WW5PT035 Emergency Showers, Eye Baths Eye Wash Station, WINLAB® Eye wash station Very easy to use eye wash station in he event of an emergency. When the eye wash station is opened via the large arm lever, flushing begins automatical- ly, thus freeing the individual’s hands so they can hold their eyelids open, for example. The eye wash station must be connected to a cold water line that supplies drinking water. The power of the water stream can be set via a ball valve when mounting. Features: • Extremely wide spray heads that not only cover both eyes, but the entire face (even those models with only one spray head) with a gentle water stream • Supple rubber prevents eyes from being further injured if they come into contact with the molding cycle • Spray heads always remain clean, as cap seals automatically pop off during the wash • Station meets DIN EN 15154-2:2006 Article 1 Compact eye wash station 1/2 IG For connecting to existing outlets. With integrated BALLOFIX ballcock for regulating the Order No. 10 03 00084 jet, plus self-adhesive notice. With 2 shower heads (2 nozzles). Eye wash bottles Manual eye wash stations with locking release lever and shower head. Due to one-hand operation, one hand is free in case of an emergency. With 1.5 m silicon hose covered with stainless steel, integrated flow rate limitation and backflow prevention. Thanks to the 1.5 m tube, the hose can also be used on a reclined person. Article 2 Manual eye wash, with 1 spray head, sprays vertically upwards Version for wall fixing and table fixing 3 Manual eye wash, with 1 spray head, angled by 45° Version for wall fixing and table fixing 4 Manual eye wash, with 2 spray heads, angled by 45° Version for wall fixing and table fixing Order No. 36 43 00080 36 43 00062 10 03 00065 Emergency Showers, Eye Baths Laboratory Aprons, WINLAB® Nova model, made of highly tear resistant, PVC- coated (on both sides) base material, hemmed seams, rot free, well suited for mechanical and chemical stress. Two-piece, fixed apron ties, neck strap infinitely adjustable via patented buckle. Article Apron, green Resistant in particular to acids and lyes. Size 90 × 120 cm. Order No. 36 43 00505 co d e b e w 222 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

224

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Protective Clothing PVC Apron, WINLAB® Standard laboratory aprons made of PVC, with neck and side straps. Smooth edges, no fabric. The straps are fastened in plain PE eyelets. Dimensions: 900 × 1100 mm Thickness: 0.5 mm Article Standard laboratory apron Order No. 36 43 39220 co d e b e w WW5PT036 Student‘s Laboratory Coats, neoLab® co d e b e w WW2NY345 Size 42 44 46 Fashionable students’ laboratory coat at a favourable price, close fit, with lapel collar and slit in the back. • Length 105 cm • 100% cotton, 205 g/m2 • Tab in the back • Long sleeves, with strap for holding the rolled-up sleeve • Hidden snap fasteners • 96°C wash • Dryer-proof 1 For women Size 36 38 40 Order No. 10 01 41580 10 01 41581 10 01 41582 Order No. 10 01 41583 10 01 41584 10 01 41585 2 For men Size 44 46 48 50 Order No. 10 01 41590 10 01 41591 10 01 41592 10 01 41593 Size 52 54 56 Order No. 10 01 41594 10 01 41595 10 01 41596 Laboratory Coats with Cuffs, neoLab® Stylish lab coat with convenient cuffs, slim fit, with lapel collar and back slit. • Length approx. 105 cm • 100% cotton • Belted back • Hidden patent fasteners • Machine washable 96°C • Machine dry 1 2 co d e b e w WW2NY389 For women Size 36 38 40 For men Size 44 46 48 50 co d e b e w Order No. 10 01 41480 10 01 41481 10 01 41482 Order No. 10 01 41490 10 01 41491 10 01 41492 10 01 41493 Size 42 44 46 Size 52 54 56 Order No. 10 01 41483 10 01 41484 10 01 41485 Order No. 10 01 41494 10 01 41495 10 01 41496 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 223

225

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid co d e b e w WW2VA010 Protective Clothing Laboratory Coats, Labor-Pilz Lab coats ladies/men professional lab coats with excellent wear comfort and stylish, figure flattering pattern! • 100% cotton, ca 220 g/m² • Two roomy lower pockets, one chest pocket (all with extra reinforcement) • Suitable for industrial laundering, easy-care-textile and can be washed and boiled at up 95°C • Concealed buttons (snaps) • Longsleeve (1/1 arm), knee-length • Banded collar for the ladies, notched collar for men Model women women women women women women women women Size 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 Order No. 10 47 44732 10 47 44734 10 47 44736 10 47 44738 10 47 44740 10 47 44742 10 47 44744 10 47 44746 Model men men men men men men men men men men Size 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 Order No. 10 47 44840 10 47 44842 10 47 44844 10 47 44846 10 47 44848 10 47 44850 10 47 44852 10 47 44854 10 47 44856 10 47 44858 Protection Overalls, neoLab® Breathable protective coveralls with or without hood. Ideally suitable for type 6 applications (according to EN 13034) and strenuous type 5 applications (EN ISO 13982-1 and 2). With type 4 splash guard. Perfectly suitable for e.g. crime scene investigation, developed in cooperation with the criminal investigation de- partment. • Fell seam for increased liquid protection • Anti-static according to EN 1149-1 • Non-fuzzing • Protection against radioactive dust according to EN 1073-2 • Maskable zipper • Elastic band on hood, sleeves, legs, waist Bursting strength: 167 kPA Meets all requirements to flammability, antistatic, particle penetration, spray test. Article Protection overalls without hood Protection overalls without hood Protection overalls without hood Protection overalls with hood Protection overalls with hood Protection overalls with hood Size M L XL M L XL Order No. 36 01 22170 36 01 22171 36 01 22172 36 01 22174 36 01 22175 36 01 22176 Sleeve Protectors, neoLab® Sleeve protectors in 2 lengths with rubber tie at both ends. For use under laminar flows, also suitable for the food industry. Protects against aggres- sive substances and fine dust. No fluff, resistant to abrasion, active breathing. • PP/PE laminate • water repelling • tear-proof Article Sleeve protectors, short Sleeve protectors, long Length approx. cm 38 58 Order No. 36 01 22480 36 01 22481 PU pc/Pack 50 20 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w WW2NY227 co d e b e w WW2NY280 224

226

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Goggles, Eye Protection Face Shield, EKASTU EKASTU face shield k1 plus DIN EN 166 1 3-S, full protection of the complete face area and unlimited view, robust plastic design, maximum comfort due to low weight (approx. 150 g), visor is made of approx. 1 mm high-quality polycarbonate, visor with special comfort bends, shatterproof and scratch-proof, upward-folding and unbuttoning, resistant to acids and bases, also for fastening to helmet. Article 1 EKASTU face shield k1 plus Spare visor k1 plus Goggles, EKASTU Order No. 36 52 30004 10 52 32604 1 EKASTU-safety eyewear with 100% UV protection with innovative UV 380 techno- logy! co d e b e w WWZTQ002 co d e b e w WWZTQ003 Article 2 Goggles CLARELLO clear DIN EN 166 1-F. Ideal for factory visitors and assembly and laboratory workers. High Order No. 36 52 77395 mechanical strength. Scratch-resistant. Excellent visibility and safety all-round. Also for wearers of spectacles. 2 Article 3 Goggles CARINA KLEIN DESIGN™ 12720 clear DIN EN 166 1-FT. Optimal wearing comfort, fits all faces. Optimal side protection. Ex- Order No. 10 52 37376 cellent field of vision. Scratch-resistant, fog-free. Article 4 Goggles CARINA KLEIN DESIGN™ 12750 clear DIN EN 166 1-FT. Maximum wear comfort. Good side protection. Soft nose pad for Order No. 10 52 37377 greater comfort. Scratch-resistant, fog-free. 4-position adjustable temples. Article 5 Goggles CLAREX clear DIN EN 166 1-FT. Modern styling. Adapts to every shape of head. Outstanding field of Order No. 36 52 77379 vision. Scratch-resistant. Non-fogging. 4-position adjustable temples. Article 6 Goggles CARINA KLEIN DESIGN™ 12710 clear DIN EN 166 1–FT, trendy safety spectacles with additional protection against reflective light and particles, frame internal side with soft component, pull up frame as protection of eyebrows, anti-fogging, anti-scratching, non-reflecting and distortion-free PC visor. Order No. 10 52 37374 Article 7 Goggles CARINA KLEIN DESIGN™ EXTASE clear DIN EN 166 1-FT, maximum wear comfort with unrestricted field of vision, soft, formed Order No. 10 52 37373 nose pad for greater comfort, pleasant and soft temple construction, fashionable and sporty Design, scratch-resistant, fog-free. like model EXTASE clear, only in tinted (also suitably for leisure activities). Article 8 Goggles CARINA KLEIN DESIGN™ EXTASE tinted Article 9 Goggles CARINA KLEIN DESIGN™ coolex clear DIN EN 166 1 – F and DIN EN 170. This sportive model with its dynamic look convinces Order No. 10 52 37389 Order No. 10 52 37375 by premium wearing comfort, low weight, and perfect fit for different head sizes. Soft nose pad and arms made of a two-component material prevent slipping and ensure maximum comfort. 100% UV protection, fog-free and scratch-resistant. Article AT Goggles CARINA KLEIN DESIGN™ PRESTIGE DIN EN 166 1349-BT. Full view goggles against coarse dust and liquid splashes. Clear, scratch-proof, anti-fog lens. Extreme large field of vision. Supreme wearing comfort. Al- so suitable for people who wear glasses and respiratory masks from EKASTU. Order No. 10 52 37383 Article AK Goggles CLARO clear DIN EN 166 1349-BT. Full visibility goggles. For protection against dust and splashes of Order No. 36 52 31007 liquid. Colorless, scratch-resistant replaceable antifog glass element. Large field of vi- sion. Also suitable for people who wear glasses and respiratory masks from EKASTU. 4 6 8 AT 3 5 7 AK 9 Accessories Article AL EKASTU anti-fogging spray (100 ml) Long-term impacted antifogging and cleaning agent additionally antistatic and thus Order No. 36 52 66952 dust-repellent. AL co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 225

227

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Goggles, Eye Protection Goggles, Simplex, neoLab® co d e b e w Plain goggles made of plastic, with large side guards. Universal size, also for wearers of spectacles. In accordance with DIN 58211 and EN 166. WW2NY123 Article Goggles Simplex Order No. 36 01 22073 Goggles, WINLAB® Safety glasses with rubber protection according to DIN EN 166 Better protection for the eyebrows. Fully foam-lined, these glasses offer excellent protec- tion from splashing from above and below. Anti-fog and anti-scratch wraparound lenses with good side protection. Adjustable length and angle of arms. Removable headband for extra comfort and securi- ty. Great wearing comfort, also due to soft adjustable nosepad. Article 1 Safety glasses with rubber protection according to DIN EN 166 Order No. 10 03 50600 Goggles with colored side frames acc. DIN EN166 Extremely light goggles with extraordinarily great eyebrow protection and wearing com- fort due to soft frame with rubber padding, as well as 6-fold angle and 4-fold longitudinal adjustment of the side frames. The inward soft padding offer safe and excellent eyebrow protection! Two modern frames available - colour versions available. Article 2 Soft frame, mint 3 Soft frame, orange Order No. 10 03 93951 10 03 93961 co d e b e w WW5PT031 1 1 2 2 3 Goggles, neoLab® Extra-light protective eyewear (34 g) with unlimited side perception. Frame made of polyamide in 4 modern colours. • Frame length individually adjustable in 4 steps • Shield made of polycarbonate, coated to be scratch-proof • 3-step shield inclination • Integrated side protection UV-protection 2-1,2. DIN EN 166-168 and 170 or 172. DIN certified. co d e b e w WW2NY125 Article Goggles Goggles Spare glass elements (PC) Colour yellow/black blue Order No. 36 01 24177 36 01 24178 36 01 24169 Failed to find what you are looking for ? Give us a call ! 226

228

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid co d e b e w WW2NY124 Goggles, Eye Protection UV Protection Full Vision Goggles, neoLab® The lightweight UV protection full vision goggles provides an absolutely snug, soft, and pinch-free fit. Extremely scratch resistant on the outside (HC), non fogging on the inside (AF). • slips easily over prescription eyewear • optimal ventilation • UV protection 2-1,2 • highest values according to EN 166 standards • light weight goggles Article UV protection full vision goggles Order No. 10 01 22029 UV Goggles i-vo, with Duo Component Technology, neoLab® Duo Component Technology, the latest technology for your eyes! Four comfort cushions of the side frame ensure pressure-free and comfortable wear. Ideal and permanent wearing comfort due to soft components in the sensitive zones. Frame: blue/orange Shields: optidur 3000 UV: scratch-proof, chemical resistant HC-AF: outside extremely scratch-proof, inside with anti-fog Article UV goggles, clear, optidur 3000 UV UV goggles, clear, supravision HC-AF UV goggles, SCT brown, optidur 3000 UV UV protection Order No. 2-1.2 2-1.2 5-2.5 10 01 11611 10 01 11612 10 01 11613 Goggles, WINLAB® Safety glasses with improved technical features and a better look. Wrap-around shield with anti-scratch and anti-fogging coating. Thanks to rubber padding and soft earpieces, the temples perfectly adjust to the shape of the wearer’s face. This avoids disagreeable pressure from excessively tight temples. Length and inclination of the temples can be adjusted. The bridge is soft and adjustable for perfect wearing comfort. co d e b e w WW2NY126 Article Goggles with panoramic lens Order No. 10 03 50701 Panorama Goggles, WINLAB® Plain panorama goggles made of polycarbonate acc. to EN 166. Light-weight, comfortable version, also suitable for wearing over spectacles. Article Panorama goggles Order No. 36 43 50000 co d e b e w WW5PT041 co d e b e w WW5PT049 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 227

229

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid 1 co d e b e w WW5PT048 2 Goggles, Eye Protection Goggles according to DIN EN 166 + 170, WINLAB® Goggles according to DIN EN 166 + 170 Extremely lightweight, comfortable safety goggles designed to be worn over prescription glasses. Scratch-proof polycarbonate shield with large integrated side protection. The area above the eyes is covered as well for additional protection. With soft bridge. Length and inclina- tion of the soft temples are easy to adjust. Article 1 Goggles for spectacle wearers, soft sides Order No. 10 03 53502 Goggles universal type safe + soft Overspecs with excellent safety features and high wearing comfort thanks to: • Rubber padding which safely covers the entire eye area • Length and angle of the arms can be adjusted • Soft padding protects from side impacts • Can be worn over almost all kinds of prescription glasses • Scratch-proof polycarbonate lenses Article 2 Goggles universal type safe + soft Order No. 10 03 90901 co d e b e w WW5PT073 Full Sight Glasses with Elastic Strap acc. to DIN EN 166 + 170, WINLAB® Modern full-sight glasses with excellent all-round sealing effect! The highly effective indirect ventilation system ensures good air circulation, preventing fast fogging of the glass. With extra-wide face contact area and wide elastic head strap for high wearing comfort. The sight glass is made of unbreakable polycarbonate and is highly resistant to fogging. Article Full sight glasses, frame colour anthracite Full sight glasses, frame colour red Order No. 10 03 53503 10 03 53504 Goggle Boxes, WINLAB® Designed to keep your goggles protected, clean, and placed directly where you need to access them. The box protects your goggles with its impact-resistant ABS plastic hous- ing, which comes in signal color with international symbols. The box is very easy to use and can be mounted with adhesive or screws. With new, quick access opening clip. co d e b e w 4 WW5PT032 3 Mini Box (236 × 120 × 120 mm) Article Mini box for goggles (transparent) Mini box for goggles (blue lid) Mini box for a breathing mask Mini box for safety gloves Midi Box (236 × 225 × 125 mm) for goggles (transparent) Article 3 for 4 goggles complete with storage element for 4 pairs of goggles for goggles (blue lid) for ear protectors (blue lid) for ear protectors (blue lid) for a breathing mask (blue lid) for safety gloves (blue lid) 4 Maxi Box (236 × 315 × 200 mm) Article 4 for 12 goggles complete with storage element for 12 pairs of goggles Maxi box for a full-face mask (blue lid) Maxi box for a face visor (blue lid) Order No. 36 43 01000 36 43 01002 36 43 01004 36 43 01006 Order No. 36 43 02000 10 03 08002 36 43 02002 36 43 03002 36 43 04000 36 43 04002 36 43 05002 Order No. 10 03 09002 36 43 06002 36 43 07002 3 228

230

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Mouth Protection, Respiratory Protection Disposable Masks, neoLab® Breathing-proof disposable masks with 2 rubber bands for looping around the ears. Single layer from paper. Article Disposable masks Order No. 36 01 22086 PU pc/Pack 100 co d e b e w WW2NY131 Filtering Facepieces, EKASTU Mandil With paint coded nose clip respective exhalation valve to identify the protection class. Filter masks of the Mandil range (DIN EN 149:2009) stand out owing to their low weight, innovative precast, low breathing resistance and high level of comfort. Article 1 Filtering facepiece Mandil FFP1 Protects against particles of inert substances up to 4 times the critical value. Packs of 12. Article 2 Filtering facepiece Mandil FFP2/V With Cool Down exhale valve. Protects against slightly poisonous and harmful particles Order No. 36 52 41111 Order No. 36 52 11281 up to 10 times the critical value. Packs of 12. Article 3 Filtering facepiece Mandil FFP2/Soft/V Order No. 10 52 32084 Innovative, wide and supple cotton-lined internal sealing lip for high wearing comfort and guaranteed safety. With Cool Down exhalation valve and infinitely ad- justable straps. Protects from harmful / noxious particles to a maximum of ten times the limit value. Package of 5 masks. Article 4 Odour filtering facepiece Mandil FFP2/Combi/V With Cool Down exhale valve. Protects against slightly toxic and harmful particles as well as unpleasant organic odours up to 10 times the critical value, activated charcoal layer included. Packs of 12. Order No. 36 52 11250 Article 5 Filtering facepiece Mandil FFP3/V With Cool Down exhale valve. Protects against poisonous and highly harmful particles up to 30 times the critical value. Wide cotton-lined inner sealing lip and continous ad- justable bands. Packs of 5. Order No. 36 52 12183 cobra foldy in 3D panel design (DIN EN 149:2009). The low breathing resistance and the ultimative wearing comfort point out the cobra foldy series. Single packed in hygienic polybags. Article 6 Filtering facepiece cobra foldy FFP1 Protects against particles of inert substances up to 4 times the critical value. Packs of Order No. 10 52 39210 20. Article 7 Filtering facepiece cobra foldy FFP2/V Protects against slightly poisonous and harmful particles up to 10 times the critical val- Order No. 10 52 39281 ue. With Cool Down exhale valve. Packs of 12. Article 8 Filtering facepiece cobra foldy FFP3/V Protects against poisonous and highly harmful particles up to 30 times the critical val- Order No. 10 52 39283 ue. With Cool Down exhale valve. Packs of 12. co d e b e w WWZTQ004 2 4 3 6 8 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1 5 7 229

231

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid co d e b e w WW19X001 1 2 3 4 5 230 Mouth Protection, Respiratory Protection Respiratory Protection, Dr. Wieland Respiratory protection against respirable dust, liquid and gaseous media. Fine dust masks SMART series single-use fine dust masks. ActivForm® for automatic adjustment to the wearer’s face contours. External structure with DuraMesh® for stability and a long service life. Soft seal in the nose area for additional comfort and fight fit. The strap and clip allows you to hang the mask comfortably around the neck whilst not in use. Optionally with cli- mate valve for additional supply of cool air under the mask for greater breathing and wearing comfort. Silicone-free. Ideal for use in laboratories, tested pursuant to DIN EN 149:2001 and A1:2009, fulfils the requirements of the dolomite dust test. Filter class FFP1: Protection from non-toxic dusts and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 4 × Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV) Filter class FFP2: Protection from hazardous dusts, fumes and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 10 × Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV) Filter class FFP3: Protection from hazardous and carcinogenic dusts and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 30 × Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV) Article Typ 2380, FFP1 D without valve 1 Typ 2385, FFP1 D with valve Typ 2480, FFP2 D without valve 2 Typ 2485, FFP2 D with valve 3 Typ 2505, FFP3 D with valve Other mask types available on request! Order No. 10 58 12380 10 58 12385 10 58 12480 10 58 12485 10 58 12505 PU pc/Pack 20 20 20 20 10 4 Half mask series 7000 with EasyLock® connectors Mask body made of thermoplastic, skin-friendly TPE, optimum distribution of tension on straps. The strap and clip allows you to hang the mask comfortably around the neck whilst not in use. Easy servicing and cleaning thanks to freely accessible components, Easy- Lock® filter system for easy and direct filter assembly. Very low breathing resistance for longer periods of use. Ultra-light mask body, variable size system, sizes S – L, ideal for laboratory applications, tested pursuant to DIN EN 140:1998. Article Mask body series 7000, size S Mask body series 7000, size M Mask body series 7000, size L Full face masks series 9000 available on request! Order No. 10 58 17001 10 58 17002 10 58 17003 5 EasyLock® particulate filters for mask bodys series 7000 and series 9000 EasyLock® filter system for easy and direct filter assembly (two filters required per mask body). Silicone-free, ideal for use in laboratories, tested pursuant to DIN EN 143:2000 and A1:2006. Filter class P1 R: Protection from non-toxic dusts and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 4 × Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV) Filter class P2 R: Protection from hazardous and carcinogenic dusts, fumes and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 10 × Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV), with full face masks up to 15 × MVV Filter class P3 R: Protection from hazardous and carcinogenic dusts, fumes and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 30 × Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV), with full face masks up to 400 × MVV Article Typ 9010, P1 R Typ 9020, P2 R Typ 9030, P3 R Order No. 10 58 19011 10 58 19020 10 58 19030 PU pc/Pack 20 20 12 Continued on next page

232

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Mouth Protection, Respiratory Protection 6 EasyLock® gas filters for mask bodys series 7000 and series 9000 EasyLock® filter system for easy and direct filter assembly (two filters required per mask body). Silicone-free, ideal for use in laboratories, tested pursuant to DIN EN 14387:2004 and A1:2008. Filter class A1: Protection from organic gases (flash point > 65°C, 0.1 Vol.-%) Filter class A2: Protection from organic gases (flash point > 65°C, 0.5 Vol.-%) Filter class ABEK1: Protection from organic gases, inorganic gases, acid gases, and ammonia Filter class AX: Protection from organic gases (flash point < 65°C) Article Typ 9100, A1 Typ 9200, A2 Typ 9400, ABEK1 Typ 9600, AX Other filter types available on request! Order No. 10 58 19100 10 58 19200 10 58 19400 10 58 19600 PU pc/Pack 10 8 10 8 6 7 EasyLock® pre-assembled filters for mask bodys series 7000 and series 9000 EasyLock® filter system for easy and direct filter assembly (two filters required per mask body). Silicone-free, ideal for use in laboratories, tested pursuant to DIN EN 14387:2004 and A1:2008. Filter class A1P2 R: Protection from organic gases (flash point > 65°C, 0.1 Vol.-%), and from hazardous dusts, fumes and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 10 × Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV), with full face masks up to 15 × MVV Filter class A2P3 R: Protection from organic gases (flash point > 65°C, 0.5 Vol.-%), and from hazardous and carcinogenic dusts, fumes and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 30 × Maximal Vol- untary Ventilation (MVV), with full face masks up to 400 × MVV Filter class ABEK1P3 R: Protection from organic gases, inorganic gases, acid gases, and ammonia, as well as from hazardous and carcinogenic dusts, fumes and aerosols on water and oil basis, up to 30 × Maximal Voluntary Ventilation (MVV), with full face masks up to 400 × MVV Article Typ 9120, A1P2 R Typ 9230, A2P3 R Typ 9430, ABEK1P3 R Order No. 10 58 19120 10 58 19230 10 58 19430 PU pc/Pack 8 6 6 Half-Masks, EKASTU Half-masks Article 8 Half-mask Polimask 230 Mask body made of EPDM. Wide, supple inner sealing lips ensure a tight fit. Special Order No. 36 52 32100 design with large field of vision and low breathing resistance. Can also be worn by wearers of spectacles. Article 9 Half-mask Polimask GAMMA/Silicone Anatomically shaped mask body made of skin-friendly silicone. Adapts easily and com- fortably to every shape of face. Exhaled air guided with wearers of spectacles in mind. New-type 4-point strap for optimum weight distribution. Good, tight fit with low weight. Short distance between filter and mask for more comfort. Order No. 36 52 33227 7 8 co d e b e w WWZTQ007 9 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 231 Continued on next page

233

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Mouth Protection, Respiratory Protection Respiratory filters for half-mask Polimask 230 and GAMMA/Silicone 2 Article Order No. 1 Particle filter 230 P3R D1) 36 52 33041 Protection against particles of toxic and highly toxic substances. Packs of 2. Article 2 Combination filter 230 A1-P3R D1) Protection against organic gases and vapors with a boiling point >65°C and particles of Order No. 36 52 33043 toxic and highly toxic substances (P3). Packs of 2. Article 3 Multi-range combination filter 230 A2B2E2K1-P3R D1) Protection against organic gases and vapors with a boiling point >65°C, inorganic gas- Order No. 36 52 33047 es and vapors, sulfur dioxide, ammonia and particles of toxic and highly toxic sub- stances (P3). Packs of 2. 1) D = additionally with dolomite dust test Accessories 4 Article 4 Protective hood 230 made of dust-proof and breathable fleece material. Encloses the complete head, face and neck area, with large window shield made of triacetate. 10 pieces per pack. Order No. 10 52 32082 Respiratory Protection Masks, EKASTU Respiratory protection masks 1 3 5 7 co d e b e w WWZTQ006 6 8 9 Article 5 Half mask Polimask ALFA with standard thread connection according to DIN EN 148-1, anatomically shaped Order No. 10 52 36620 mask body made of particularly skin-friendly silikone. Adapts easily and comfortably to every shape of face. 4-point harness ensures optimum weight distribution. Exhaled air guided with wearers of spectacles in mind. Article 6 Full face mask C 607/Selecta (Class 2) with standard thread connection according to DIN EN 148-1, non-fogging, non-mirror- ing and non-distorting polycarbonate visor with a very large field of vision. Mask body made of skin-friendly, age-proof EPDM to guarantee excellent mechanical and chemi- cal resistance. Order No. 36 52 66611 Respiratory filter with round thread acc. to DIN EN 148-1 Article 7 Screw-in particle filter DIRIN 230 P3R D Protection against particles of toxic and highly toxic substances. Article 8 Combined filter DIRIN 230 A2-P3R D1) Protection against organic gases and vapours with a boiling point > 65°C, as well as Order No. 36 52 33050 Order No. 10 52 32786 particles of toxic and highly toxic substances (P3). Article 9 Multi-range combination filter DIRIN 230 A2B2E2K2-P3R D Protection against organic gases and vapors with a boiling point >65°C, inorganic gas- es and vapors, sulfur dioxide and ammonia, and particles of toxic and highly toxic sub- stances (P3). Order No. 36 52 22782 Article AT Multi-range combination filter DIRIN 230 A2B2E2K2-HG-P3R D1) 36 52 33022 Protection against organic gases and vapors with a boiling point >65°C, inorganic gas- es and vapors, sulfur dioxide, ammonia and mercury vapors and particles of toxic and highly toxic substances (P3). 1) D = additionally with dolomite dust test Order No. Accessories Article AK Mobile wall cabinet for masks With wall fixture. Can be removed for transport. Impact-proof and dust-proof. With transparent door and 2 shelves. For 1 full- face mask or 3 half-face masks, each with filter. Outer dimen- sions (H×W×D) 39.4 × 26.0 × 13.5 cm EKASTU anti-fogging spray (100 ml) EKASTU mask cleaning agent (250 ml) EKASTU mask disinfectant (250 ml) Order No. 36 52 32028 36 52 66952 36 52 66962 36 52 32025 AT AK 232

234

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Gas Detection Systems Gas Detection Systems, Dewert Labortechnik BW Ultra multi-gas warning system The BW Ultra gas detector allows for simultaneous monitoring and indication of up to five gas hazards including carbon dioxide (CO2), oxygen (O2), combustible gases (LEL) and a wide range of other gases. Activated gas detectors automatically carry out an internal diagnosis test every 24 hours (sensors, battery, switching circuit). The BW Ultra is com- patible with the IntelliDoX. Alerting is by means of visual and acoustic alarm (95dB) as well as vibration. Protection class IP 66/68. Technical data: Dimensions: Weight: Approval (excerpt): 148 × 85 × 40 mm 411 g (with clip) ATEX II1G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga Article 1 BW Ultra with pump (yellow) Gas hazard: CO2, H2S, UEG, O2, CO Float probe Chest strap Order No. 10 08 88801 10 08 88802 10 08 50122 2 Single gas detector BW Clip series Up to three years maintenance-free permanent protection from lack of oxygen and from carbon dioxide, hydrogen sulfide or sulfur dioxide. This single-gas detector is available in versions designed for two or three years of operation. It is particularly low-maintenance since it does not require any calibration, change of sensors, or change or charging of batteries. Activated gas detectors automatically carry out an internal diagnosis test every 24 hours. Certified to ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IICT 4 Ga, among others. The BW Clip is compatible with the IntelliDoX. The single-gas detectors are delivered ready for use, complete with shockproof housing, specified sensor, stainless steel croc- odile clip, calibration adapter, and operating instructions. Technical data: Dimensions: 41 × 50 × 87 mm Weight: BW Clip 2 Detector for 2 years 92 g Gas hazard Hydrogen sulphide Hydrogen sulphide Carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide Sulphur dioxide Oxygen BW Clip 3 Detector for 3 years Gas hazard Hydrogen sulphide Hydrogen sulphide Carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide 3 BW Solo Alarm set points 10 ppm / 15 ppm 5 ppm / 10 ppm 35 ppm / 200 ppm 30 ppm / 200 ppm 50 ppm / 200 ppm 5 ppm / 10 ppm 19.5 % / 23.5 % Alarm set points 10 ppm / 15 ppm 5 ppm / 10 ppm 35 ppm / 200 ppm 30 ppm / 200 ppm 50 ppm / 200 ppm Order No. 10 08 24115 10 08 24105 10 08 24235 10 08 24230 10 08 24250 10 08 24205 10 08 24923 Order No. 10 08 36115 10 08 36105 10 08 36235 10 08 36230 10 08 36250 Maintainable single-gas detection system The Honeywell BW Solo is easy to operate and to maintain and comprises a wide range of sensor options. The profile is small and light-weight, the robust design is fit for many years of reliable operation. For general maintenance such as replacing sensors, batteries and filters, no disassembling of the gas detector is required. In the wireless version, the system can be managed via the user’s smartphone. Certified to ATEX Sira18ATEX2243, among others. The single-gas detectors are delivered ready for use, complete with shockproof housing, specified sensor, stainless steel crocodile clip, calibration adapter, and operating instruc- tions. Technical data: Dimensions: 70 × 67 × 36 mm Weight: Article BW Solo – (CO) Standard BW Solo – (H2S) Standard BW Solo – (O2) Standard BW Solo – (CO) Wireless BW Solo – (H2S) Wireless BW Solo – (O2S) Wireless Also available in SO2, NH3, PH3, Cl2, ClO2, NO, NO2, HCN, ETO, O3, H2 configurations Order No. 10 08 88803 10 08 88804 10 08 88805 10 08 88806 10 08 88807 10 08 88808 103 – 116 g, depending on the installed probe co d e b e w WWGZA024 1 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 233 Continued on next page

235

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Gas Detection Systems IntelliDox docking system Automated instrument management system The IntelliDox system combines intelligent docking modules and the device management software to provide automated instrument management for compatible alarm systems. Can be extended to up to five modules, each with its own LCD display and keyboard for independent use. Once the detector is inserted into the docking module, it automatically tests the gas de- tector and sensors while data is transmitted to the system. Efficient transmission of the function tests via Ethernet or USB. The package comprises as a standard: IntelliDox module with factory-installed nest for a specific portable gas detector, integrated fold-in stand/wall mount, brief instructions, Fleet Manager II software CD Technical data: Dimensions: Weight: Data storage: 138 × 362 × 109 mm 1.91 kg 2 GB internal Article IntelliDox docking system for BW Ultra IntelliDox docking system for BW Clip 1 IntelliDox docking system for BW Solo absolute precondition for use of the IntelliDox IntelliDox enabler Kit, EU version Order No. 10 08 88809 10 08 88810 10 08 88811 10 08 88812 Accessories for alarm transmission and quality assurance see page 627 Gloves neoProtect-Nitrile Gloves, Powder-Free, neoLab® Wearable on both hands, powder-free examination gloves made of nitrile. • roughened palm • contains no proteins • tear resistance: 14 Mpa m/m • extensibility: 500% m/m • in compliance with Directive 93/42/ECC, EN 455, AQL 1.5, PSA (EU) 2016/425, EN 420, EN 374 • CE certificate: category III (water-tight gloves protecting the user from chemical hazards) • Medical device class I 1 co d e b e w WW2NY141 2 Length: 240 ± 10 mm Material thickness: Cuff 0.10 mm ± 0.02 mm Hand 0.12 mm ± 0.02 mm Finger 0.16 mm ± 0.03 mm 2 Size Order No. neoProtect-Nitrile gloves, blue PU pc/Pack 100 100 10 01 18101 10 01 18102 S M Size Order No. L XL 10 01 18103 10 01 18104 PU pc/Pack 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 234 3 Size Order No. neoProtect-Nitrile gloves, black PU pc/Pack 100 100 10 01 18300 10 01 18301 S M Size Order No. L XL 10 01 18302 10 01 18303 PU pc/Pack 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible.

236

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Gloves neoLabLine Multismart Dispenser “simple”, neoLab® The universal neoLabLine Multismart dispenser “simple” can be flexibly used for holding gloves, tissues, disposable hoods etc.. Various boxes can be held by 2 sturdy rubber bands. This makes a quick and easy removal of the desired consumables possible. The simple PVC plate can be screwed to the wall, providing a stable base. Contents: • 1 base plate • 4 dowels (S 8) • 4 screws 4.5 × 35 mm • 4 spacers • 10 elastic bands Article neoLabLine Multismart Dispenser “simple” Order No. 10 01 16799 co d e b e w WW2NY405 BRAUN Disposable Gloves, IDL 1 MANUPLAST® Disposable gloves made of transparent polyethylene, non-sterile. Fit both right and left hands. Size Order No. small large ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 36 42 50001 36 42 50002 PU pc/Pack 100 100 2 MANUFIX® sensitive Disposable gloves for special uses. No powder or liquid lubricants thanks to special sur- face treatment. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 VASCO® powdered Disposable latex gloves, non-sterile. With very good sense of touch. Fit both right and left hands. 1 2 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 4 VASCO® Nitril light Thin nitrile examination glove, non-sterile, powder-free, latex-free, lavender-colored. Light glove design for excellent grip sensitivity. Recommended for persons allergic to latex. Suitable for food processing. 3 Order No. 36 42 52101 36 42 52102 36 42 52103 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 Order No. 36 42 52201 36 42 52202 36 42 52203 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 Order No. 10 42 17708 10 42 17716 10 42 17724 10 42 17732 10 42 17740 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 90 Size 6 – 7, small 7 – 8, medium 8 – 9, large Size 6 – 7, small 7 – 8, medium 8 – 9, large Size XS extra-small S small M medium L large XL extra-large Size XS extra-small S small M middle L large XL extra-large ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 5 VASCO® Nitril white Thin nitrile examination gloves, non-sterile, powder-free, latex-free, white. Light glove design for excellent grip sensitivity. Recommended for persons allergic to latex. Suitable for food processing. 4 Order No. 10 42 17902 10 42 17910 10 42 17929 10 42 17937 10 42 17945 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 90 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 235

237

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid co d e b e w WW7R3177 Gloves Protective Gloves, IDL 1 Light-weight powdered gloves made of latex Very thin, flat form for use on right or left hand, particularly flexible latex film for good sense of touch, micro-roughened surface for good wet grip. CE Category I. Size S (6.5) M (7.5) L (8.5) XL (9.5) Size XS (5.5) S (6.5) M (7.5) L (8.5) XL (9.5) Thickness approx. mm 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 Colour natural natural natural natural Length mm 240 240 240 240 Order No. 36 00 10506 36 00 10507 36 00 10508 36 00 10509 PU pc/Box 100 100 100 90 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Powder-free gloves made of latex Particularly reliable grip thanks to new coloring process. With inner coating, extra thin. CE Category I. Thickness approx. mm 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 Colour natural natural natural natural natural Length mm 240 240 240 240 240 Order No. 36 00 10605 36 00 10606 36 00 10607 36 00 10608 36 00 10609 PU pc/Box 100 100 100 100 90 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Powder-free Examination Gloves made of Nitrile Butadiene Rub- ber (NBR), IDL Skin-friendly, pure composition, free from chlorine, without natural rubber latex proteins, produced without vulcanisation accelerator. Technical data: Material: Nitrile-butadiene rubber (NBR), free of latex accelerators powder-free, unsterile mint green flat with rolled rim (ambidexter) 240 mm Type: Colour: Glove shape: Total length pursuant to EN 455-2: Wall thickness (double) in palm area: min. 0.12 mm typ. 0.14 mm Impermeability pursuant to EN 455-1: AQL 1.5 Tear resistance pursuant to EN 455-2: p 6 N Durability in original packaging if stored pursuant to ISO 2230: Sizes: Packaging: Labelling: 3 years XS, S, M, L, XL Available in dispenser carton with 180/200 gloves each, XS, S, M, L 200 / XL 180 gloves each EN 455-1/ -2/ -3/ -4, EN 420, EN ISO 374-1, EN 374-2, EN 16523-1, EN 374-4, ISO EN 374-5, ISO 15223-1 Purpose as set out in MD Directive: Disposal glove for medical purposes class I PPE pursuant to Directive 93/42/EEC: Disposable protective glove category III (protects from chemical action for a limited period of time) Directive (EU) 2017/425 Size XS S M L XL Packing type dispenser box dispenser box dispenser box dispenser box dispenser box Order No. 10 00 10701 10 00 10702 10 00 10703 10 00 10704 10 00 10705 PU pc/Pack 200 200 200 200 180 1 co d e b e w WW7R3357 236

238

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid co d e b e w WW7R3228 Gloves Nitrile Gloves, Disposable, IDL Nitrile gloves, interior with no powdering, light blue, recyclable. Boxes of hundred. • Short-term protection from chemicals • Latex-free, 100% nitrile • Non-sterile • Structured surface of the fingers • Fit both hands • Thickness: 0.10 mm • Length: 240 mm Size ranges: S = 5.0-6.5 M = 7.0-8.0 L = 8.5-9.5 XL = 10.0-11.0 Size Version S M L XL powder-free, mediically suitable powder-free, mediically suitable powder-free, mediically suitable powder-free, mediically suitable ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 36 00 10015 36 00 10017 36 00 10018 36 00 10020 PU pc/Box 100 100 100 100 Chemical-Protective-Gloves, EKASTU M2-PLUS Chemical Protective Gloves Category 3, colour: midnight blue, made of polychloroprene, approx. 31 cm long, anatom- ical shape with good gropeability, sanitised, cotton lined, patterned for a non-slip grip, cotton flocked, high abrasion resistance, resistant to many chemical substances such as acids, bases and organic oils and fats as well as bacteriological contamination, glove can be used universally for laboratory, trade and industry, excellent abrasion resistance and thereby very long service life. Type M2-PLUS M2-PLUS M2-PLUS M2-PLUS Size 7 – 7½ 8 – 8½ 9 – 9½ 10 – 10½ Order No. 36 52 45708 36 52 45709 36 52 45710 36 52 45711 Chemical-Protective-Gloves, EKASTU Category 3, very durable version, colour: green, fully coated with polyvinyl chloride, cotton lined and extremely abrasion-resistant, durable through double-dipping process, protec- tion against mechanical risks and certain chemicals such as fats, oils, most acids and bases. New: Better palpation ability and around up to 50% less tiredness for the hand, maximum abrasion resistance according to DIN EN 388, thereby maximum service life. Type Order No. EKASTU gloves 628 EKASTU gloves 629 EKASTU gloves 635 EKASTU gloves 636 EKASTU gloves 640 EKASTU gloves 660 Length cm 28 28 35 35 40 60 Size 10 9 10 9 10 10 10 52 31628 10 52 31629 10 52 31635 10 52 31636 36 52 46100 36 52 81660 Chemical-Protective-Gloves, EKASTU M3-PLUS Chemical Protective Gloves Category 3, colour: green, made of nitrile perbunan, approx. 31 cm long, anatomical shape with very good gropeability, sanitized, cotton lined, patterned for a non-slip grip, cotton flocked, non-abrasive, resistant to many chemical substances such as oils and fats, pesticide, solvents and fuels as well as bacteriological contamination, max. abrasion resistance according to DIN EN 388, thereby maximum service life. co d e b e w WWZTQ011 co d e b e w WWZTQ010 co d e b e w WWZTQ014 Type M3-PLUS M3-PLUS M3-PLUS M3-PLUS co d e b e w Size 7 – 7½ 8 – 8½ 9 – 9½ 10 – 10½ Order No. 36 52 81120 36 52 81121 36 52 81122 36 52 81123 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 237

239

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Gloves Protective Gloves, LAT Neoprene, high resistance to chemicals, black, short or long models, non-slip profile on palm side, velour interior, sizes S - XL. Length mm 30 30 30 30 40 40 Size S M L XL M L Order No. 36 20 10130 36 20 10230 36 20 10330 36 20 10430 36 20 20140 36 20 20240 Textile Gloves, neoLab® Gloves made of non-fluff perlon or agreeable cotton fabric. Can be used as weighing gloves or under-gloves. Perlon gloves Size 7 8 9 Cotton gloves Size 7 8 9 10 Order No. 36 01 17200 36 01 17201 36 01 17202 Order No. 36 01 17205 36 01 17206 36 01 17207 36 01 17208 Size 10 11 12 Size 11 12 13 Order No. 36 01 17203 36 01 17204 36 01 17190 Order No. 36 01 17209 36 01 17199 36 01 17219 Heat Protective Gloves, WINLAB® Kevlar is a material with universal properties, one of them being a very high resistance to thermal loads. Kevlar can protect against temperatures up to around 300°C (physical contact) and 450 to 500°C (radiant heat). Additionally, this Kevlar glove is very durable and does an excellent job of protecting against cut and puncture injuries. Double knit (two-layer) construction! Length approx. 40 cm, with knitted cuffs for better fit. Article Kevlar gloves (universal size approx. 8 – 10) Order No. 36 43 00090 Heat and Cold Protective Gloves, neoLab® co d e b e w WW2NY136 Five-finger gloves, carbon-silicon fiber knit, for protection against heat and cold. Ma- terial is heat-resistant up to 95°C and withstands cold to -80°C. Sizes: short length up to the wrist and long length up to the elbow (360 mm). Not suitable for liquid nitrogen. EN 407 4/1/4/1. Article Heat/cold protection gloves Heat/cold protection gloves Heat/cold protection gloves Heat/cold protection gloves Form short short long long Size 7 – 8.5 9 – 10 7 – 8.5 9 – 10 Order No. 36 01 24095 36 01 24096 36 01 24075 36 01 24076 co d e b e w co d e b e w WWW4U032 WW2NY139 co d e b e w WW5PT033 238

240

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Gloves Heat and Cold Protective Gloves, WINLAB® Breathable protective gloves, comfortable to wear, with excellent heating protection prop- erties. Features of the protective gloves: • Protection against heat (contact heat up to +250 °C acc. to EN 407) • Protection against cold • Breathable • Good protection against cutting injuries • With cuff as wrist protection Lined with cotton terrycloth Article Heat and cold protective gloves Size 11 Length approx. mm 400 Order No. 10 03 00108 Heat Protective Gloves, WINLAB® Heat protective gloves made of Kevlar loop-knit fabric. With Kevlar felt lining and double Kevlar textile layer for better protection when in contact with heat. Cuffs made of tough aramide fabric. Resistant to up to 500°C for short term. Order No. 36 43 00095 Article Heat protective gloves co d e b e w WW5PT034 co d e b e w WW5PT052 Thermogrip Gloves, neoLab® Good gripping feel, despite high degree of insulation and abrasion resistance. Textile basis, double layer insulated. Gloves protect against mechanical abrasion with nitrile lace, which also gives them a secure grip and a high degree of wear resistance. The gloves can be worn on both the right and left hands, making them very economical. In universal size 9. EN 388 1/2/4/1 Article Thermogrip gloves Order No. 36 01 24210 Protective Gloves and Aprons, IDL CRYO GLOVES® and CRYO APRON® with CE certificate. Protective gloves and aprons provide protection at temperatures of up to -160°C, which makes this gear ideal for working in deep freezers and with cooled liquids, as well as handling dry ice (-72°C) and liquid nitrogen in the gas phase. CRYO GLOVES® come in standard and waterproof versions (WP). WP = 100% waterproof for use with infectious and toxic substances; cryo gloves also have an internal glove made of Teflon. CRYO GLOVES®/CRYO APRON® are registered trademarks. Originals only from Tempshield Inc. CRYO GLOVES® protective gloves, standard version Model 1 Wrist length Wrist length Wrist length Wrist length 2 Forearm length Forearm length Forearm length Forearm length 3 Elbow length Elbow length Elbow length 4 Shoulder length Shoulder length Shoulder length Type WRS WRM WRL WRXL MAS MAM MAL MAXL EBM EBL EBXL SHM SHL SHXL Size small medium large xlarge small medium large xlarge medium large xlarge medium large xlarge Length cm 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 70 70 70 Order No. 36 00 03000 36 00 03002 36 00 03004 36 00 03006 36 00 04000 36 00 04002 36 00 04004 36 00 04006 36 00 05002 36 00 05004 36 00 05006 36 00 07002 36 00 07004 36 00 07006 Caution: Wear protective clothing at cryogenic workplaces. CRYO GLOVES® are not suitable for immersing in liquid nitrogen or other ultra-cold liquids! More models on request. co d e b e w WW2NY138 co d e b e w WW7R3282 4 3 2 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 239

241

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Gloves Protective Gloves HOT HAND®, neoLab® For touching hot beakers and other hot objects. The thick-walled silicone rubber can withstand temperatures ranging from +250°C down to -57°C, while still maintaining its flexibility. Both grip openings (for thumb and finger) fit all sizes of hands. The gripping surface has nubs, making it antislip. With eyelet for hanging up. Article HOT HAND® protective gloves Order No. 36 01 24098 Gloves for Glove Boxes, WINLAB® In three materials: latex, neoprene, butyl. Work gloves fit most glove boxes, 750 mm total length, suitable for Glove-Box cuffs with a diameter of 186 mm. Thickness of gloves 6/10 mm. Materials Latex: general resistance1) against medium- and weak-concentrated acids, diluted leaches as well as some ketonic solvents Neoprene: medium gas permeability, resistant against acids and leaches, oils, limited against aliphat- ic solvents Butyl: mostly gas-impermeable, resistant against ozone, acids and leaches as well as ketonic solvents 1)The areas of usage stated here are just for orientation! They are not absolutele reliable! Please ask your expert dealer for specific resistances. Material Butyl Butyl Size Order No. 8 9 36 43 11138 36 43 11139 Material Latex Latex Neoprene Neoprene Size Order No. 8 9 8 9 36 43 11118 36 43 11119 36 43 11128 36 43 11129 Skin Protection Skinguard Cream Laboderm®, neoLab® The neoLab Laboderm® skin protection lotion has proven its worth 100.000-fold! The lotion was developed especially for sensitive skin and skin stressed by day-to-day laboratory activities. Consisting of high-quality ingredients and UV protection, the Labo- derm® skin proection lotion not only nourishes but also protects. The skin-neutral pH value is particularly gentle for the skin. Through the special recipe the lotion is absorbed quickly and supports the natural regreasing of the skin. The odourless Laboderm® N is particularly gentle without any perfume. A light perfume gives the Laboderm® a pleasant scent. • Dermatologically tested by a specialist • Made in Germany Application: Apply Laboderm skin protection cream to the hands after washing and if necessary. It is also recommended to use the cream before daily work in cold or damp conditions. Article 1 LABODERM® N, 50 ml tube 2 LABODERM®, 50 ml tube Order No. 36 01 16039 36 01 16040 co d e b e w co d e b e w WW2NY211 WW5PT042 co d e b e w WW2NY142 2 1 240

242

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Personal Protection, First Aid Skin Protection Skinguard Cream, Dr. Wieland 1 Stokoderm® 4in1 / Stokoderm® Advanced Protects the skin from oily and aqueous substances with an emulsion base in combination with film formers, wax, and special emulsifying agents. Reduces the strain on the skin by making subsequent washing easier. Scented, silicone-free. co d e b e w Article Stokoderm® Advanced skinguard cream 100 ml tube STOKODERM® 4in1 skinguard cream 1000 ml soft bottle Vario dispenser for all soft bottles STOKO Vario Ultra®, white Order No. 36 34 91600 36 34 91700 36 34 90300 WW19X028 2 Stokolan® Hand & Body moisturising lotion Activating basic care for face and body with long-term moisturizing effect, for normal skin, is absorbed very quickly, pH neutral, special recipe which moistures the skin and pro- motes natural skin regeneration, dermatologically proven skin compatibility, suitable for allergics, free of silicone and parabene, scented. Article Stokolan® Hand & Body 100 ml tube Stokolan® Hand & Body 1000 ml soft bottle Vario dispenser for all soft bottles STOKO Vario Ultra®, white Order No. 10 58 11213 10 58 13376 36 34 90300 3 Stokolan® Classic care cream Regenerating skincare cream for hands and face with high moisturizing effect. Contains urea and glycerine. Also suitable for sensitive skin prone to eczema. ECARF certified. Article Stokolan® Classic 100 ml tube Stokolan® Classic 1000 ml soft bottle Vario dispenser for all soft bottles STOKO Vario Ultra®, white Order No. 10 58 13501 10 58 13502 36 34 90300 Other STOKO® products available on request. 1 2 3 Skinguard Creams, WINLAB® LINDESA skinguard and care products contain beeswax. Beeswax is insoluble in water and many organic solvents. Article LINDESA skinguard cream slightly fat restoring, is quickly absorbed. 50 ml tube LINDESA K skin protection and care cream is quickly absorbed, contains camomile and glycerine. 100 ml tube Order No. 36 43 00450 36 43 00455 co d e b e w WW5PT040 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 241

243

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Wipes, Cleaning Cloths Washing Room Systems, Kimberly-Clark KLEENEX® towels Towel system using AIRFLEX™ material. KLEENEX® towels for a well cared for and stylish hygienic environment. Unlike traditional paper hand towels, the highly absorbent AIRFLEX™ material will not get torn or soggy. Pleasant to use with high moisture absorbency. KLEENEX® Ultra Super-Soft towels Super-soft, brilliant white 3-ply towels, interfold, made from AIRFLEX™ material. Kind to the skin. Soft and highly absorbing. Optimum care and comfort. Ideal for frequent drying of hands. Article Order No. large 21.5 × 41.5 cm, 30 pack of 72 pieces 10 80 06773 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU Pack/ Box 30 KLEENEX® Ultra towels Soft, brilliant white 2-ply towels, interfold, made from AIRFLEX™ material. Kind to the skin. Highly absorbing. Efficient and economical. Optimum quality for every washroom. Article Order No. large, 21.5 × 41.5 cm, 30 pack of 94 pieces 10 80 06772 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU Pack/ Box 30 KLEENEX® folding towels large Soft, white 2-ply towels, made from AIRFLEX™ material. Highly absorbing. Certified for contact with foods. Article Order No. 1 21.5 × 10.6 × 13.0 cm, 15 pack of 124 pieces 10 80 06778 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU Pack/ Box 15 SCOTT® Performance towels Fast-absorbing single-ply towels, AIRFLEX™ material, Efficient drying of hands guaran- teed by high moisture absorbency and good wet strength, 21.5 × 31.5 cm, interfolded. 15 Packs of 212 towels. Article Order No. 2 SCOTT® Performance towels, white 37 80 06661 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU Pack/ Box 15 SCOTT® ESSENTIAL™ folding towels 1-ply, white, AIRFLEX™ technology. Certified for contact with foods. Suitable for Aquar- ius dispenser. Towel large: 31.8 × 20.0 cm Towel small: 21.2 × 20.0 cm Article Order No. 3 Large 20.0 × 10.6 × 13.3 cm, 15 pack of 240 pieces 10 80 06669 4 Small 20.0 × 10.6 × 13.3 cm, 15 pack of 340 pieces, interfold 10 80 06617 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU Pack/ Box 15 15 SCOTT® CONTROL™ folding towels 1-ply, white, AIRFLEX™ technology. Suitable for Aquarius dispenser. Article Order No. 5 21.5 × 10.5 × 13.0 cm, 15 pack of 212 pieces 10 80 06663 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. HOSTESS® NATURA towels Large format Natura quality, white, 2-ply. Article Order No. 6 25 × 50 cm, 20 pack of 84 pieces, C fold, natural 37 80 06812 PU Pack/ Box 15 PU Pack/ Box 20 Continued on next page 1 2 3 4 5 6 242

244

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Wipes, Cleaning Cloths AQUARIUS™ dispensers from Kimberly-Clark Professional • Patented overfill protection prevents overfilling and jamming • Clever sight window Check the fill level at a glance to ensure there are always enough towels • Compact design Small footprint • Covered locking mechanism Can be locked - with our without key, for easy handling and cost control • The hood of the dispenser covers the rear plate Dust and dirt cannot penetrate AQUARIUS™ folded hand towel dispenser – interleaved AQUARIUS™ folded hand towel dispenser – C fold small AQUARIUS™ folded hand towel dispenser – C fold Single-sheet hand towel dispenser from a wide portfolio of dispensers for washroom products which improve hygiene, increase wellbeing, and contribute to keep costs down. Ideal as a folded hand towel dispenser; counteracts contamination and spreading of germs. Our unique patented mechanism prevents overfilling of the dispenser, making it easy to remove a single sheet. This avoids jamming and wastage. Available as an easy-refill dispenser in elegant contemporary design with white high-gloss, easy-clean finish and no dirt or dust traps, a window (so you can see when a refill is need- ed) plus an option for customising the dispenser to match your color scheme. 7 AQUARIUS™ toilet tissue dispenser – folded Single-sheet toilet tissue dispenser from a wide portfolio of dispensers for washroom products which improve hygiene, increase wellbeing, and contribute to keep costs down. Ideal as a folded toilet tissue dispenser; counteracts contamination and spreading of germs. Our unique patented mechanism prevents overfilling of the dispenser, making it easy to remove a single tissue. This avoids jamming and wastage. Available as an easy-refill dispenser in elegant contemporary design with white high-gloss, easy-clean finish and no dirt or dust traps, a window (so you can see when a refill is need- ed) plus an option for customising the dispenser to match your colour scheme. Article 7 AQUARIUS* folded hand towel dispenser – interleaved made of an impact-resistant plastic, white, H 39.9 × W 26.5 × D 13.6 cm AQUARIUS* folded hand towel dispenser - C fold small made of an impact-resistant plastic, white, H 15.9 × W 28.7 × D 14.2 cm AQUARIUS* folded hand towel dispenser - C fold made of an impact-resistant plastic, white, W 31.7 × H 40.7 × D 15 cm 8 AQUARIUS* toilet tissue dispenser – folded made of an impact-resistant plastic, white, H 33.8 × W 16.9 × D 12.3 cm Order No. 10 80 06945 10 80 06956 10 80 06954 10 80 06946 8 Single Sheet Toilet Tissue Kimberly-Clark’s single sheet systems abolish once and for all the problems associated with traditional rolls of toilet paper, such as misuse, high consumption and non-availabil- ity. The dispensers release individual sheets and have a quantity indicator to reduce cost and minimize loss. No need to dispose of empty rolls. Article 9 KLEENEX® Ultra Toilet Tissue Brilliant white, 2-ply, micro-stamping with KLEENEX® pattern, 12.5 × 18.6 cm, 200 sheets per clip ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 10 80 08408 PU Clip/Box 36 9 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 243 Continued on next page

245

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Wipes, Cleaning Cloths Kimberly-Clark washing lotion and foam soap Article Order No. SCOTT® antibacterial hand cleanser Liquid hand cleanser that improve personal hygiene, care for your skin and reduce 10 80 06336 bacteria. Ideal for washrooms in hygiene-critical areas such as healthcare, food processing and food service environments; being kind to skin when hands are washed frequently; re- ducing the risk of contamination, infection and illness; dispensing the ideal amount of soap for each wash, preventing overuse; keeping costs down in areas of moderate use and reducing waste. Available as liquid hand cleanser without any colouring in strong, hygienically sealed 1-litre cassettes that are quick and easy to install, shrink to save space when empty and are recyclable (when the pump’s removed). Article Order No. KLEENEX® standard washing lotion Contains moisturizing and skin-caring additives. Looks after your hands and keeps 37 80 06331 them smooth and supple. 6 refills of 1000 ml, pink, with perfume. Article Order No. 1 KLEENEX® gentle washing lotion Special composition to prevent allergic skin reactions. Particularly suitable wherever 37 80 06333 hands are often washed as part of the daily routine. No perfume or colorants. 6 refills of 1000 ml, transparent, no perfume. PU pc/Pack 6 PU pc/Pack 6 PU pc/Pack 6 Article for frequent use SCOTT® Control foam soap, transparent Article 2 KLEENEX® Luxurious foam hand cleaner, rose For daily use Article Order No. 10 80 06342 Order No. 10 80 06340 PU pc/Pack 6 PU pc/Pack 6 Order No. PU pc/Pack 6 3 KLEENEX® luxury foam hand cleanser, Energy, gelb 10 80 06385 KLEENEX® Fragrant Luxury Foam Hand Cleanser are specifically designed for frequent hand washing. They moisturize the skin and make your hands feel fresh and enriched. 6 refills of 1000 ml. Article Order No. 4 KLEENEX® luxury foam hand cleanser, Fresh, green 10 80 06386 Article Order No. 5 KLEENEX® luxury foam hand cleanser, Joy, rose ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 10 80 06387 PU pc/Pack 6 PU pc/Pack 6 6 AQUARIUS™ hand cleanser dispenser Soap dispensers, from a coordinated range of washroom dispenser products, that pro- mote hygiene, improve comfort and care, and help control costs. Ideal for dispensing either liquid soap or foam for maximum versatility and cost-efficiency; easy refilling, in a high capacity format, offering a smart solution for any washroom envi- ronment. Available as quick-fill dispenser in a sleek and contemporary design, with a white, high- gloss, easy-clean finish and no dirt or dust traps, a window (so you can see when a refill is needed) plus an option for customising the dispenser to match your colour scheme. Article AQUARIUS™ hand cleanser dispenser - cartridge/1 litre optionally with push-button or lockable, made of an impact-resistant plastic, white, H 23.5 × W 11.6 × D 11.4 cm Electronic foam soap dispenser – contact-free made from impact-resistant plastic, white with window, 25 × 15 × 13 cm Order No. 10 80 06948 10 80 02147 Towel baskets Article 7 AQUARIUS™ Towel basket, made of an impact-resistant Order No. 10 80 06993 plastic, white, 68 × 38 × 28 cm, 2 pcs/pack KIMBERLY-CLARK PROFESSIONAL™ offer a range of freestanding waste bins which provide practical and convenient solutions for appropriate waste disposal, keeping areas clean and tidy and promoting user hygiene. Ideal for all commercial environments where a waste bin is required; easy dispensing of waste with a chute style lid designed to make the disposal of waste effortless and without need to touch the bin. Available in 45 litre capacity; ABS impact resistant plastic, providing durability and easy clean surface. Continued on next page 1 2 3 5 7 4 6 244

246

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Wipes, Cleaning Cloths Cleaning Tissue Systems, Kimberly-Clark 1 KIMTECH Science* cleaning tissues Special cleaning wipes for use in the laboratory. Highly absorbent, extremely soft and chemically neutral material. Ideal for wiping up small quantities of fluid and for cleaning pipettes and slides. 2-ply wipes in a practical water-repellent pop-up box with a polyshield to retain lint. Packed in cartons. Article KIMTECH Science* cleaning tissues 15 boxes of 200 wipes, 20.5 × 20 cm, white KIMTECH Science* cleaning tissues 24 boxes of 100 wipes, 21 × 20 cm, white ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 10 80 07558 10 80 07557 PU Box/Pack 15 24 1 2 KIMTECH Science* precision tissues Manufactured using specially treated and extremely absorbent fibres, low in lint-content, and suitable for precision use in sensitive environments for the cleaning of electronic components and contacts, as well as for optical lenses. The finest particles are complete- ly removed from delicate surfaces. Single-ply material in a practical pop-up box with polyshield. Article KIMTECH Science* precision tissues 15 boxes of 196 wipes, 30 × 30 cm KIMTECH Science* precision tissues 30 boxes of 280 wipes, 11 × 21 cm Order No. 37 80 07551 37 80 07552 PU Box/Pack 15 30 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. KIMTECH process wipes Strong wipes, with low lint-content, for cleaning with detergents and solvents. Reusable. Ideal for wiping up oil and grease. Polypropylene. Article Order No. KIMTECH process wipes from a large reel Perforated, embossed, blue, 34 × 38 cm, 500 sheets per roll KIMTECH process wipes folded in quarters, embossed, blue, 49 × 38 cm, 12 polybags of 35 wipes ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 37 80 07643 37 80 07622 WYPALL* L assorted wipes The all-purpose range of wipes for the complete removal of dirt and fluids, made from AIRFLEX* material. Unlike fabric cleaning cloths, every single WYPALL* L wipe is always 100% fresh and ready for use. They provide a convenient, cost-effective cleaning perfor- mance at consistently high quality. For almost all your cleaning needs - from the most demanding to the simplest jobs, wet or dry, for use with grease or oil - there is always the right WYPALL* L wipe to make work noticeably easier. Article WYPALL* L30 ULTRA+ wipes from a large reel Highly absorbent wipes, resistant to tearing even when wet. For soaking up spills Order No. 37 80 07426 quickly and wiping surfaces really clean. Blue, perforated, 3-ply, 750 wipes, 33 × 38 cm. Article WYPALL* L10 EXTRA+ wipes from a large reel Versatile wipes for daily use in cleaning away dirt and liquids. White, perforated, sin- Order No. 37 80 07241 gle-ply, 1000 wipes, 33 × 38 cm Dispenser systems from Kimberly-Clark Article 3 Mobile floor stand for large reels, wide Metal, blue, with refuse sack, 109 × 50 × 74 cm, suitable for large rolls Article 4 Wall holder for large reels, can also be used as a table dispenser 37 80 06146 Metal, blue, suitable for all large rolls Order No. 37 80 06155 Order No. Wall holder (H×W×D): 33 × 51.5 × 30 cm Table dispenser (H×W×D): 50 × 51.5 × 33 cm 3 4 2 3 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 245 Continued on next page

247

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Wipes, Cleaning Cloths KIMTECH WETTASK* DS wipes Reduce the risk of cross contamination in the health sector. A closed wet cleaning tissue system which is safe, simple and reliable. Reduce the use of cleaning tissue and disinfectants. The single sheet dispenser guarantees controlled use of tissue and disinfectant. • use with disinfectant and hygiene cleaners • ideal for taking in liquids • light, soft tissues for cleaning with disinfectants and hygiene cleaners on smooth sur- faces • dispenser for limited use • dispensing bucket is not autoclavable Article 1 KIMTECH WETTASK* DS wipes, small roll perforated, white, 30.5 × 31.5 cm, 6 rolls with 90 wipes KIMTECH WETTASK* 4.5 l dispensing bucket For smaller application sites Article KIMTECH WETTASK* DS wipes, small roll perforated, white, 30.5 × 31.5 cm, 12 rolls with 35 wipes, incl. 1 dispenser box Order No. 10 80 07767 10 80 07919 Order No. 10 80 07732 KLEENEX® ULTRA Multifold Towels with Branding, Kimberly-Clark 2 KLEENEX® ULTRA Multifold hand towels with branding Optimized towel design with embossed KLEENEX® brand for improved image. 2-ply, 23.8 × 20.3 cm, white. 16 packs of 150 towels each, carton with 2,400 towels. Article Order No. KLEENEX® ULTRA Multifold hand towels 10 80 04632 3 AQUARIUS* Multifold hand towel dispenser made of nonbreakable plastic, white Dimensions (H×W×D): 45.10 × 29.40 × 12.00 cm Article AQUARIUS* Multifold towel dispenser PU Pack/Box 16 Order No. 10 80 07023 Cleansing Tissues, IDL Article Cleansing tissues white, 2 layers, 26 × 22 cm, box with 8 × 4 rolls Order No. 10 00 89932 Cleaning Sticks Cotton Sticks, Wooden Spatulas, neoLab® Strong stick with cotton head at one end. For cleaning hard-to-reach places. Wooden spatulas, 150 mm long, 20 mm wide. 290121021 Cotton-head sticks in an autoclavable bag with indicator. Order No. Mat. Article L mm Stem Ø mm 4 Cotton sticks, non-sterile Wood 150 2.5 5 Cotton sticks, sterile Wood 150 2.2 6 Cotton sticks, non-sterile PP 150 2.5 7 Cotton sticks, non-sterile PP 150 4.0 8 Cotton sticks, sterile Alu 150 9 Wood spatula Wood 150 Head Ø mm 4.0-5.5 29 01 21021 4.0–5.5 10 01 21019 4.0-5.5 29 01 21017 10.0-12.0 29 01 21018 2.0 29 01 21022 29 01 21020 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 2 3 co d e b e w WW7R3348 co d e b e w WW2NY064 4 8 9 6 7 5 246

248

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Cleaning Sticks ESD Swabs, neoLab® ESD swabs with a surface resistance of 1 × 106 Ω P Rs P 1 × 1010 Ω. The swabs are made of polyurethane foam with 100 ppi, or of polyester. The head is fastened to the stem without glue. The swabs are suitable for a wide range of applications, such as cleaning lenses, sensors, semiconductors and microchips; they are also fit for use in cleanrooms. co d e b e w WW2NY347 Head Head shape Stem L mm 1 acute 69 2 flat 58 3 acute-conical PU, 10 × 3.3 mm Ø 65 4 flat 60 PE, 8 × 3.2 mm 5 flat PE, 15 × 6.2 mm 145 6 paddel shaped PU, 15 × 6.5 mm 145 PP, 6 × 2.4 mm Ø PU, 12 × 3.5 mm Overall L mm 75 70 75 68 160 160 Order No. 10 01 21057 10 01 21058 10 01 21059 10 01 21060 10 01 21061 10 01 21062 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents TICKOPUR Cleaning Agents, BANDELIN Bio-degradable cleaning and disinfection products especially for use with SONOREX ultrasonic bathes, gentle on items being cleaned and the cleaning tank, enhances ultra- sonic cavitation, can be thinned with water, high yield. Choice of alkali, neutral or acidic, emulsion or non-emulsifying TICKOPUR cleaning agents depending on the cleaning task. 1-l and 2-l bottles, 5-l and 25-l cans. 200-l barrels and other cleaning and disinfecting products on request. co d e b e w WWFH8007 TICKOPUR R 33 - Universal cleaner, EXAM examined Concentrate, dosage 3 – 5%, mild alkaline, pH 9.9 (1%), also suitable for metal alloy, gentle on material, provides corrosion protection. May be corrosive on parts made of pewter and zink. Can be used for dip and wipe cleaning and for cleaning laboratory equip- ment and fixtures. Can be used as contact fluid in an ultrasonic bath. Volume 1 l bottle 7 2 l bottle Order No. 35 07 16001 35 07 16003 Volume 5 l canister 25 l canister Order No. 35 07 16002 35 07 16005 7 TICKOPUR R 30 - Neutral cleaning agent Concentrate, dosing 1 – 5%, neutral, pH 7, suitable for light metals. Pre-testing is re- commded for sensitive materials. Emulsifying, gentle acting, with corrosion protection. Volume 1 l bottle 8 2 l bottle Order No. 35 07 15001 35 07 15003 Volume 5 l canister 25 l canister Order No. 35 07 15002 35 07 15005 TICKOPUR R 27 - Special intensive cleaning agent Concentrate, based on phosphoric acid, dosing 5%, acidic, pH 1.9 at 1%. Removes lime deposits, mineral residues and rust. Not for light metals, pewter and zinc. Special care is required in case of defective chromium plating. Volume 1 l bottle 9 2 l bottle Order No. 35 07 14001 35 07 14003 Volume 5 l canister 25 l canister Order No. 35 07 14002 35 07 14005 9 TICKOPUR RW 77 - Special cleaning agent with ammonia Concentrate, dosing 5%, alkaline, pH 9,9 at 1%, emulsifying, with ammonia, phos- phate-free. Powerful cleaning action with slightly deoxidizing effect. Special care is re- quired in case of light metals. Order No. 35 07 12001 35 07 12003 Volume 5 l canister 25 l canister Order No. 35 07 12002 35 07 12005 Volume 1 l bottle AT 2 l bottle 8 AT co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 247 Continued on next page

249

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents STAMMOPUR 24 - Desinfection and intensive cleaning-certified (VAH/EXAM) Free of aldehydes, chlorine and phenolene. Bactericidal, levurocidal, virucidal against vaccines, BVDV, HBV, HCV, HIV, H5N1. Application 1 – 2%, mildly alkaline, pH 9,4 (1%). With corrosion protection. Very high material compatibility. Volume 1 2 l bottle 5 l canister Order No. 35 07 19002 35 07 19005 Volume 25 l canister Order No. 35 07 19025 1 3 co d e b e w WWQED012 2 4 5 248 TICKOPUR TR 2 - demulsifying - special cleaning agent Concentrate, dosing 0.1 – 5%, acidic, pH 3.6 at 1%, with corrosion protection. Also re- moves mineral contaminants, greases, oil and pigments. Special care is required in case of light metal, pewter and zinc. Order No. 35 07 10103 35 07 10102 Volume 25 l canister Order No. 35 07 10105 Volume 2 2 l bottle 5 l canister TICKOPUR TR 7 - demulsifying universal cleaning agent Concentrate, dosing 0,1 – 5%, mildly alkaline, pH 8,9 at 1%, with corrosion protection, phosphate-free. Can also be used in immersion and wiping processes. Volume 3 2 l bottle 5 l canister Order No. 35 07 10003 35 07 10002 Volume 25 l canister Order No. 35 07 10005 TICKOPUR TR 13 - demulsifying - special cleaning agent Concentrate, dosing 0,1 – 10%, alkaline, pH 11,9 at 1%, not for alloys, tin, zinc. Sili- cate-free. Removes gumming, soot, coking pigments. Volume 25 l canister Order No. 35 07 10205 Order No. 35 07 10203 35 07 10202 Volume 4 2 l bottle 5 l canister TICKOPUR TR 3 - special cleaning agent Concentrate, based on citric acid. Application 5%, weakly acidic, pH 3 at 1%. For non-fer- rous, precious, and light metals. Removes mineral residues, flash rust, greases, oils, and waxes. Volume 1 l bottle 2 l bottle Volume 5 l canister 25 l canister Order No. 10 07 30913 10 07 30923 Order No. 10 07 30935 10 07 30937 Detergents and Disinfectants, BRAND Detergents and disinfecting detergents from BRAND are available for a broad spectrum of applications. Therefore, only a small number of products are needed for a great variety of procedures. Even at low concentrations best results are achieved. All these detergents and disinfecting detergents can be removed without residue. 5 Universal detergents Mucasol® Liquid, alkaline high-performance concentrate for immersion and ultrasonic baths. Uni- versal cleaner for laboratory equipment and instruments made of glass, porcelain, plastic, rubber and metal. Items are cleaned in approx. 10 – 30 minutes, without mechanical help. Mucasol® replaces chromosulfuric acid, is free from chlorine and caustic alkalis, is non-toxic, nonaggressive and biodegradable. Prolonged exposure of zinc and non-ano- dized aluminium surfaces should be avoided. (Mucasol® is also suitable for cleaning by wiping). Ingredients: > 30% phosphates, < 5% anionic surfactants, amphoteric sur- factants, complexing agents, corrosion inhibitors, auxiliary agents. Concentration for use: Ultrasonic bath: 0.2 – 2% (1.4 – 14 ml/l), Immersion bath 0.7 – 3% (5 – 22 ml/l). Article Mucasol® 2-l bottle (2.8 kg) Mucasol® 5-l canister (7 kg) Order No. 35 49 44003 35 49 44005 PU pc/Pack 5 1 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 6 Universal detergents Edisonite® CLASSIC Pulverized alkaline detergent for immersion and ultrasonic baths. Ideal for removal of natural fats and oils, proteins and blood. Use on zinc an non-anodized aluminium is re- stricted. Ingredients: > 30% phosphates, < 5% anionic surfactants, non-ionic surfactants, corrosion inhibitors, auxiliary agents. Concentration for use: 0.5-1% (5-10 g/l). Durable protection against corrosion damage. Article Edisonite® CLASSIC 1-kg tub Edisonite® CLASSIC 5-kg bucket Order No. 35 49 44301 35 49 44205 PU pc/Pack 1 1 Continued on next page

250

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection 7 Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents Universal detergents Edisonite®-SUPER Pulverized, neutral detergent for immersion and ultrasonic baths. Ideal removal of natural fats and oils, proteins and blood. It is recommended for optical glass and alkali-sensitive plastics and rubbers. Ingredients: > 30% phosphates, 5 – 15% anionic surfactants, cor- rosion inhibitors, auxiliary agents.Concentration for use: 0.5 – 1% (5 – 10 g/l). PU pc/Pack 1 1 Edisonite®-SUPER 1-kg tube Edisonite®-SUPER 5-kg bucket 35 49 44361 35 49 44365 Article Order No. Disinfecting detergents Extremely powerful through modern ingredients, wide spectrum of use. Removes con- tamination by blood and proteins and inactivates bacteria, fungi and viruses, especially HBV and HIV, in one operation. Meets requirements of the German Hygiene and Microbi- ology Society. 6 8 Mucocit®-T Instrument disinfection Particularly suited for sensitive instruments. Free of phosphates, aldehydes, phenols and chlorine derivates. The solution has a pleasant, fresh fragrance. CE marked in according to MPG. Ingredients: 100 g Mucocit®-T contain: 3,9 g didecyl-dimethyl-ammonium chloride, 4.5 g alkylpropylendiamine-1,5-bisguanidiniumacetate, 2 g bis(-aminopropyl)-laurylamine, 2.8 g laurylpropylenediamine, 5-15 % non-ionic tenside surfactants, auxiliary agents. Microbiological efficiency / concentration for use: Disinfection of instruments: Bacteria (incl. Tuberculosis and mycobacteria) and fungi with high organic burden accord- ing to DGHM/VAH directives: 1% (10 ml/l) / 1 hour 2% (20 ml/l) / 30 min. 3% (30 ml/l) / 15 min. Limited virucidal efficacy1) (incl. HIV, HBV, HCV): 1% (10 ml/l) / 5 min. Inactivation of rotaviruses: 2% (20 ml/l) / 5 min. 1) As recommended by the RKI, Bundesgesundheitsblatt 01/2004. Chemical and physical specifications: Appearance: Fragrance of the solution: Density (20 °C): pH value (1% solution, 20 °C): clear, blue liquid pleasant fresh smell approx. 1 g/ml approx. 10.5 Article Mucocit®-T 2-l bottle Mucocit®-T 5-l canister Order No. 35 49 44822 35 49 44825 PU pc/Pack 5 1 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 9 Pursept®-A Xpress, surface disinfection Pursept®-A Xpress is a ready-to-use preparation for rapid disinfection and cleaning of surfaces and instruments (e.g., liquid handling instruments). It works in only 15 seconds - even before the surface dries. DGHM tested and RKI compliant. Skin tolerance derma- tologically tested. For RKI compliant use, apply Pursept®-A Xpress full strength to a disposable cloth. Then thoroughly wipe off the area to be disinfected with the wet cloth. Be sure to wipe everything completely. The surface should remain moist during the entire working time. Ingredients: 100 g Pursept®-A Xpress contain: 55 g ethanol, 0.03 g N-alkyl aminopropyl glycine; auxiliary agents. Microbiological efficiency / concentration for use: Surface disinfection: Bacteria and fungi with little organic burden with mechanics acc. to DGHM/VAH direc- tives: 15 seconds. Limited virucidal efficacy1) (incl. HIV, HBV, HCV): 15 seconds. Effectiveness against TbB: 30 seconds. 1) As recommended by the RKI, Bundesgesundheitsblatt 01/2004. Chemical and physical specifications of the active agent solution: Appearance: Fragrance: Density (20 °C): pH value (20 °C): approx. 7.5 Aldehyde-free clear, colorless liquid pleasant fresh smell approx. 0.9 g/cm³ Article Pursept®-A Xpress 1-l bottle, incl. spray top Pursept®-A Xpress 5-l canister Spray top ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 35 49 44830 35 49 44835 35 49 44832 PU pc/Pack 10 1 1 7 8 9 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 249 Continued on next page

251

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection 1 Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents Pursept®-AF disinfection concentrate Cleaning and disinfection of floors, walls and fittings in one operation. The solution has a pleasant, fresh fragrance. Appropriate for use in the foods sector. CE marked in according to MPG. Ingredients/100 g: 12.5 g didecyl-dimethylammoniumchloride, 1.5 g bis(aminopropyl)laurylamine, < 5% NTA, < 5% non-ionic surfactants, auxiliary agents, fragrance substances. Microbiological efficiency / concentration for use: Surface disinfection: Bacteria and fungi with high organic burden according to DGHM/ VAH directives: 0.25% (2.5 ml/l) / 4 hours, 0.5% (5 ml/l) / 1 hour, 1% (10 ml/l) / 30 minutes, 2% (20 ml/l) / 15 minutes. Limited virucidal efficacy1) (incl. HIV, HBV, HCV): 1% (10 ml/l) / 15 minutes. Inactivation of rotaviruses: 0.25% (2.5 ml/l) / 2 minutes. Effectiveness against TbB: 2% (20 ml/l) / 1 hour. 1) As recommended by the RKI, Bundesgesundheitsblatt 01/2004. Chemical and physical specifications: Appearance: Density: pH value (1%): clear, green liquid approx. 1 g/ml approx. 9,5 (1%ig) Article Pursept®-AF 2-l bottle Pursept®-AF 5-l canister Order No. 35 49 44850 35 49 44855 PU pc/Pack 5 3 1 2 4 3 3 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 Pursept® Wipes XL fleece wipes Fleece wipes for impregnation with universal or disinfecting detergents. The lint-free and tear-proof wipes are designed for both optimal disinfectant delivery and excellent contaminant uptake. Due to their size they are particularly suitable to disinfect your workplace, lab table or clean bench quickly and reliably. The wipes can be stored in the convenient dispenser box. For high-volume use, wipes can be soaked with liquid disinfectant directly in the handy dispenser box (lasts up to 28 days). We recommend the usage of the surface disinfecting detergent Pursept®-A Xpress. Technical Information: Fleece wipes made of 100% polyester, dry 70 wipes (230 × 280 mm) per roll Article Order No. PU pc/Pack 6 Pursept® Wipes XL fleece wipes, 6 rolls (70 wipes per 10 49 44870 roll) ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Dispenser box for Pursept® Wipes XL, empty Refillable dispenser box for practical and space-saving storage of Pursept® Wipes XL, a perfect way to keep pre-soaked wipes from drying out. Article Dispenser box for 70 Pursept® Wipes XL fleece wipes Order No. 10 49 44875 4 Disinfection tissues mikrozid® Gentle on surface materials, mikrozid® universal wipes premium are the uncomplicated solution for quick disinfection of surfaces of all types. They are also suitable for sensitive surfaces such as Makrolon, acrylic glass, polysulphone or synthetic leather, as well as surfaces, displays, keyboards, operating panels and touch screens of medical equipment and devices. Ingredients/composition: 100 g solution contain the following active ingredients: 17.4 g Propan-2-ol, 12.6 g ethanol (94% w/w), designation pursuant to Directive (EC) No. 648/2004: < 5% anionic tensides Order No. Article PU pc/Pack 100 Disinfection tissues mikrozid® 10 49 44860 We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! 250

252

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents rea Detergents, Hirschmann Detergent concentrates for the gentle and thorough cleaning of laboratory glassware, porcelain, metal, plastic and rubber. For use in low concentrations in a variety of applica- tions, hence very economical. co d e b e w WW4ZV059 1 rea-pur® Powdery high-speed cleaning agent, 0.5% solution, for immersion and wiping processes. Pack 2-kg box Order No. 35 37 97102 Pack 5-kg bucket Order No. 35 37 97105 2 rea-sol® Liquid high-speed cleaning concentrate, 1% solution, for immersion and wiping pro- cesses. Pack 1 l bottle Order No. 35 37 97201 Pack 5 l canister Order No. 35 37 97205 3 rea-des® 2000 Liquid cleaning and disinfecting concentrate, inactivates HIV and Hepatitis virus, 1% solu- tion, non-foaming. Pack 1 l bottle Order No. 35 37 97311 Pack 5 l canister Order No. 35 37 97315 4 rea-phos® Liquid high-speed cleaning concentrate, 1% solution, phosphate-free. Pack 1 l bottle 5 rea-mat® Order No. 35 37 97401 Powdery high-speed cleaning agent for laboratory dishwashers, non-foaming, 0.1...0.4% solution. Pack 2-kg box Order No. 35 37 97502 Pack 5-kg bucket Order No. 35 37 97505 rea-calc® Liquid lime deposit eliminator, no pungent smells, for stubborn layers and crusts, 2.5% solution. Pack 1 l bottle 6 rea-stabil® Order No. 35 37 97600 Liquid stabilizing concentrate, for example for warm water baths, thermostats and some- thing similar, 0.1% solution. Pack 0.2 l bottle 7 rea-clean® Order No. 35 37 97800 1 3 5 Phosphate-free cleaning concentrate, particularly economical and environmentally friend- ly, fully biodegradable, strong dislodging effect on grease, gentle on materials, for all lab surfaces. Pack 0.5 l spray bottle 1 l refill bottle Order No. 35 37 97900 35 37 97901 Pack 5 l canister Order No. 35 37 97905 rea-son® low foam Special fast cleaning concentrate for ultrasonic cleaning of instruments and devices in all areas of application. Pack 1 l bottle 5 l canister Order No. 10 37 97101 10 37 97105 Pack 10 l canister 30 l canister Order No. 10 37 97110 10 37 97130 7 2 4 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 251

253

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection co d e b e w WW7R3280 2 4 6 252 Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents Cleaning Agents for Automatic Washing Machines, IDL 1 Cleaning agent deconex 21 SOLID Mild alkali main cleaning agent, gentle on instruments and suitable for sensitive materials (zinc and aluminum), defoaming action. Broad range of applications. Removes a wide variety of contaminants. NTA-free Dosing: pH-value: 2 to 5 g/l water approx. 11.4 at 0.3% solution Pack 1.5 kg 10 kg 2 Cleaning agent deconex 21 CLF Same as deconex 21 SOLID, except liquid. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 3 to 10 ml/l water approx. 10.7 at 0.5% solution 1 Pack 6 kg 12 kg Order No. 35 00 90501 35 00 90510 Order No. 35 00 90706 35 00 90712 3 Cleaning powder deconex 22 PF Alkali main cleaner containing no phosphates or surfactants that is gentle on materials. Broad range of applications. Removes a wide variety of contaminants. Great for phos- phate-critical applications and heavy contamination with heavy metals. Good emulsifying and dispersing capability for grease, oil and pigments. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 3 to 10 g/l water approx. 11.5 at 0.5% solution Pack 1.5 kg 10 kg Cleaning agent deconex 22 LIQ-x Same as deconex 22 PF, but liquid. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 5 to 10 ml/l water approx. 11.8 at 0.5% solution 3 Pack 12 kg 4 Cleaning agent deconex 22 HPF-x Same as deconex 22 LIQ, but highly alkaline. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 3 to 10 ml/l water approx. 12.1 at 0.5% solution Pack 6 kg 12 kg Order No. 35 00 90801 35 00 90810 Order No. 35 00 90912 Order No. 35 00 91006 35 00 91012 5 Cleaning powder deconex 24 FORTE High alkali main cleaner for very stubborn contamination. Active chlorine provides good disinfectant action. Good emulsifying and dispersing capability for grease, oil, blood, al- bumen, resin, wax, etc. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 2 to 5 g/l water approx. 12.1 at 0.3% solution Pack 1.5 kg 10 kg 6 Cleaning agent deconex 24 LIQ Same as deconex 24 FORTE, but liquid. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 3 to 10 ml/l water approx. 11.9 at 0.5% solution 5 Pack 7 kg 14 kg Order No. 10 00 92115 35 00 92110 Order No. 35 00 92207 35 00 92214 Continued on next page

254

Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection 7 Cleaning agent deconex 25 ORGANACID Mild acid neutralization and rinsing agent based on organic acids. For neutralization of entrained alkali remnants. Contains no surfactants. Great for phosphate-critical applica- tions. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 1 to 3 ml/l washing solution approx. 3.0 at 0.3% solution Pack 5 kg 10 kg Order No. 35 00 92305 35 00 92310 Cleaning agent deconex 26 MINERALACID Mineral acid based pre-rinse and neutralization agent, surfactant-free, dissolves albumen, organic bases, carbonates and hydroxides to make subsequent alkali cleaning easier. Can also be used to neutralize entrained alkali remnants when high alkali rinsing agents are used. Dissolves lime deposits in washing machines. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 1 to 3 ml/l washing solution approx. 2.0 at 0.3% solution 7 Pack 5 kg 10 kg Order No. 35 00 92407 35 00 92414 8 Cleaning agent deconex 26 PLUS Same as deconex 26 Mineralcid, but highly concentrated. Suitable for neutralizing decon- ex 22 HPF; 24 LIQ and 24 Forte. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 0.5 to 2 ml/l washing solution approx. 2.0 at 0.2% solution Pack 7 kg 12 kg Order No. 35 00 92607 35 00 92612 8 co d e b e w WW7R3019 Cleaning Agents for Manual Cleaning, IDL Suitable for immersion baths and ultrasonic system. Cleaning agent deconex 11 UNIVERSAL Versatile concentrated cleaning agent with good wetting properties and disinfectant action with active chlorine. Also suitable for radioactive decontamination. Can be used as a sub- stitute for a chromic-sulfuric acid mixture. Removes stubborn organic and inorganic dirt such as grease, oil, wax, blood, albumen, dye residue, pigments, silicone, etc. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 2 to 10% in demineralized water approx. 9.8 at 1% solution Pack 1 kg 5 kg 10 kg Order No. 35 00 90101 35 00 90105 35 00 90110 Cleaning agent deconex 12 PA-x Mild alkali, low-phosphate and strong-acting cleaning concentrate with good wetting properties. Very gentle on the skin and on material in sensitive equipment. Also suitable for radioactive decontamination. Highly concentrated and economical. Removes stub- born organic and inorganic dirt such as grease, oil, wax, blood, albumen, dye residue, pigments, silicon, etc. Filtered to 1 µm. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 0.5 to 2% in tap water approx. 11.2 at 1% solution Pack 1.3 kg 7 kg 14 kg Order No. 35 00 90201 35 00 90207 35 00 90214 Cleaning agent deconex 15 PF-x Strong-acting, alkali cleaning concentrate for removal of stubborn dirt. Contains no phos- phates and silicates. Gentle on material and particularly well suited for phosphate-critical applications. Removes stubborn organic and inorganic dirt such as grease, oil, wax, blood, albumen, dye residue, pigments, silicon, etc. Filtered to 1 µm. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 1 to 5% in demineralized water approx. 11.4 at 1% solution Pack 1 kg 5 kg 10 kg co d e b e w Order No. 35 00 90301 35 00 90305 35 00 90310 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 253

255

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents Cleaning agent deconex 16 NT Neutral cleaning concentrate to meet highest demands in research, medicine, biology and chemistry as well as for optical and electronic parts. Contains no phosphates and sili- cates. Suitable for sensitive metal and metal alloy parts including aluminum and zinc. Reliable cleaner for removing lightly adhering organic and inorganic dirt. NTA-free. Dosing: pH-value: 3 to 5% in demineralized water approx. 7 Pack 1 kg 10 kg Order No. 35 00 90401 35 00 90410 Cleaning agent deconex 20 NS-x Very versatile surfactant-free alkali cleaning concentrate for immersion baths and labora- tory washing machines. Suitable for radioactive decontamination. Covers a broad range of applications. Very good emulsifying properties. Removes a very wide range of contam- inants (oil, grease, pigments, dyes, heavy metals, blood and albumen). Filtered to 1 µm. NTA-free. Dosing manual: Dosing machine: 2 to 5% in tap water 3 to 10 ml/L water Pack 5 kg 10 kg Order No. 35 00 91205 35 00 91210 Cleaning Detergent LABOSOL® S, neoLab® Powerful concentrated cleaner for dirty laboratory glass devices, porcelain, instru- ments and materials made of plastic and rubber. Thorough, self-acting cleaner. Does not attack the material being cleaned or the skin. Also suitable for use in ultrasonic cleaners. Use a 0.5 – 2% solution with warm water depending on how dirty the items are. LABO- SOL® S contains no chlorine or caustic potash, is bio-degradable and can be used as a substitute for a chromic-sulfuric acid mixture. Article 1 Labosol® S, 5 liter Labosol® S, 1 liter Volume l 5 1 Order No. 35 01 16090 35 01 16091 Rinsing Detergent LABOSOL® M for Washing Machines, neoLab® Powerful alkali cleaner in powder form for washing machines to remove residue from containers and from devices or instruments in chemical or bacteriological laboratories. Non-foaming. Dosage 1 to 3 g/l. Article 2 Labosol® M Labosol® M Conts kg 10 1 Order No. 35 01 16100 35 01 16102 Hand Disinfectant Sterrillium®, neoLab® 3 Hand disinfectant Sterillium® The classical hand disinfectant. Particularly gentle on the skin, re-moisturizing. Bacte- ricidal, fungicidal, tuberculocidal, virucidal against specific viruses (incl. HBV, HIV, HCV). Effective against herpes simplex virus, influenza A virus, SARS virus, adeno-, polyoma- and rotaviruses. Approx. 3 ml are sufficient for one application. Thoroughly effective against bacteria, fungi, and enveloped viruses. RKI list range A, VAH. 1.5 minutes exposure time for surgical hand disinfection. Extremely skin tolerant also when used regularly. Cannot be sold to physicians, veterinarians, hospitals and dealers in accordance with AMG § 52a. Contents ml 100 500 Order No. 10 01 16092 10 01 16093 Contents ml 1000 5000 Hand disinfectant Sterillium® classic pure 4 Contents 4 ml 100 500 Order No. 10 01 16113 10 01 16114 Contents ml 1000 Order No. 10 01 16094 10 01 16103 Order No. 10 01 16115 Continued on next page co d e b e w WW2NY120 1 2 co d e b e w WW2NY119 co d e b e w WW2NY355 3 254

256

Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents Hand disinfectant Sterillium® Virugard 5 Contents ml 100 500 6 Contents ml 475 Order No. 10 01 16135 10 01 16136 Order No. 10 01 10690 Contents ml 1000 Contents ml 1000 Hand disinfectant Sterillium® Gel pure Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Order No. 10 01 16137 Order No. 10 01 10691 6 5 co d e b e w WW7R3028 7 8 AT 9 co d e b e w WW19X008 Disinfectants, IDL Disinfectant spray and refill solution Ready-to-use disinfectant for disinfection of all types of surfaces and items. Bactericidal, fungicidal and virostatic (HBV, HIV, rotaviruses). Free of formaldehydes, phenols, chlorine, iodine, peroxides, alcohol, and mercury. Ideal also for cleaning the interiors of cleanroom workbenches, disinfection in the field of cell culture, egg incubators, incubators, and for microbiological applications. Suitable for instruments, objects, and the outside of tissue culture dishes. Biodegradable. Article 7 Disinfectant spray, ready for use, 50 ml spray bottle 8 Disinfectant spray, ready for use, 1 l spray bottle 9 Disinfectant wipes AT Disinfectant solution, ready for use, 5 l refill canister Disinfectant solution, ready for use, 10 l refill canister Order No. 35 78 73512 35 78 73612 35 78 73700 35 78 73712 10 78 73722 DWP Monitor Detergent, Dr. Wieland DWP Monitor Detergent • Removes dirt, nicotine and grease • For monitors made of glass and plastic, glass panels, mirrors, lenses of copying ma- • Tried and tested by well-known equipment manufacturers for professional maintenance chines and microfilm readers and cleaning • Spray on or apply a thin coat with a paper wipe, leave to work, wipe dry Article DWP monitor detergent with antistatic agent, 200 ml pump bottle 35 34 10032 Refill bottle 1000 ml 35 34 10054 Order No. DWP Monitor Detergent • Removes ball-point pen marks, ink, felt-tip pen marks, nicotine, marks caused by ink ribbons and carbon paper • For all surfaces made of plastic and enameled metal housings, keyboards, cables • Tried and tested by well-known equipment manufacturers for professional maintenance and cleaning • Spray on or apply a thin coat with a paper wipe, leave to work, wipe dry Article DWP plastic cleaner with antistatic agent, 200 ml pump bottle Refill bottle 1000 ml co d e Order No. 35 34 20032 35 34 20054 b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 255

257

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection co d e b e w WWJSG001 1 2 3 4 5 6 Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents neodisher Cleaners, Dr. Weigert neodisher® EM Detergent component – liquid concentrate Improves the cleaning performance of alkaline and acidic detergents in particular when removing solid particles, paraffins, oils, and greases in aqueous solutions. With emulsify- ing, dispersing, and foam control properties. Conts 5 l Order No. 10 27 63033 Article 1 neodisher® EM neodisher® FA “Classical” alkaline cleaner – liquid concentrate – free of surfactants and oxidants Excellent cleaning properties with high material compatibility. Removes blood, protein, serum, culture medium residues, and gelatin. Conts 5 l Order No. 10 27 61133 Article 2 neodisher® FA neodisher® LaboClean A 8 Alkaline universal detergent – powder – free of surfactants For universal application, excellent cleaning performance and high dirt carrying proper- ties. Removes blood, serum, food residues, pharmaceuticals, dyes, paints, gelatine, and other organic residues. Article 3 neodisher® LaboClean A 8 Conts 10 kg Order No. 10 27 61276 neodisher® LaboClean FLA Alkaline universal detergent – liquid concentrate – free of surfactants, phosphor connections and oxidants. For universal application. Excellent cleaning performance. Removes stubborn oil-based residues and other organic contaminations. Conts 10 l Article 4 neodisher® LaboClean FLA Order No. 10 27 61230 neodisher® LaboClean FT Alkaline detergent – liquid concentrate – with oxidation effect, free of surfactants Specifically for residue-free cleaning of glassware for cell and tissue cultures, pharmacy glass bottles and infusion flasks, utensils for microbiology and nuclear medicine. Re- moves residues of culture media, blood, proteins, radioactive contamination, as well as other organic residues. Article 5 neodisher® LaboClean FT Conts 12 kg Order No. 10 27 61030 neodisher® LaboClean UW Alkaline detergent – powder – free of phosphates Especially suitable for the automated cleaning of laboratory glassware and utensils in water analysis laboratories, in serological institutes and in the phosphates industry, where residues of phosphorous compounds would adulterate analysis results. Article 6 neodisher® LaboClean UW Conts 10 kg Order No. 10 27 61976 neodisher® LM 3 Alkaline detergent – liquid concentrate – free of phosphates For manual cleaning and pre-cleaning of laboratory glass and for cleaning pipettes and viscosimeters in special dishwashers. Particularly well suited for cleaning laboratory glasses water, phosphate, and metal laboratories and for use in labs carrying out enzy- matic and serological examinations. Also for use in machines. Low-foaming. Order No. 10 27 64030 Article 7 neodisher® LM 3 Conts 10 l 7 8 neodisher® MA Alkaline detergent – powder – free of oxidants Excellent cleaning performance combined with high material compatibility. Article 8 neodisher® MA Conts 10 kg Order No. 10 27 61776 neodisher® MediClean forte Alkaline universal detergent – liquid concentrate – contains alkalinity donors, en- zymes and surfactants Excellent material compatibility, universally applicable. Residues of dried and denatured blood are reliably removed. A redeposition of protein residues is prevented. Order No. 10 27 65033 Article 9 neodisher® MediClean forte Conts 5 l Continued on next page 9 256

258

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents neodisher® N Acid neutralising agent and detergent – liquid concentrate – Free of surfactants For neutralising any carried over alkaline residues on laboratory glassware or for acid pre-cleaning resp. cleaning. Lime or other acid-soluble residues are easily removed. Easy to rinse off. Based on phosphoric acid. Article AT neodisher® N AK neodisher® N Conts 5 l 25 kg Order No. 10 27 62133 10 27 62126 neodisher® Z Acid neutralising agent and detergent – liquid concentrate – Free of surfactants and phosphates For neutralising any carried over alkaline residues on laboratory glassware and for remov- ing acid-soluble residues in laboratories where residues of phosphates, nitrogen and sur- factants would adulterate sensitive analyses and where particular gentleness on material is vital. Based on organic acids. Article AL neodisher® Z AM neodisher® Z Conts 5 l 10 l Order No. 10 27 62233 10 27 62230 weigoman® Hand disinfectant – ready-made solution – bactericidal, tuberculocidal, fungicidal, virucidal to a limited degree, effective against rota and noro viruses Alcoholic hand disinfectant for topical application to skin. Excellent skin tolerability, with highly effective lipid replenishers. Suitable for sensitive skin. VAH listed, entered in the IHO list of virucidal products. Dosage by means of the triformin® dispenser 1.0 and the triform- in® dispenser 0.5. AT AK Article AN weigoman® AO weigoman® Conts 500 ml 1000 ml Order No. 10 27 69097 10 27 69059 AL weigoman® perfume-free Hand disinfectant – ready-made solution – baktericidal, tuberculocidal, fungicidal, virucidal to a limited degree, effective against rota and noro viruses Unscented alcoholic hand disinfectant for topical application to skin. Excellent skin toler- ability, with highly effective lipid replenishers. Suitable for sensitive skin. VAH listed, en- tered in the IHO list of virucidal products. Dosage by means of the triformin® dispenser 1.0 and the triformin® dispenser 0.5. AN Article AP weigoman® AQ weigoman® Conts 500 ml 1000 ml Order No. 10 27 69197 10 27 69159 neoform® Rapid Bactericidal, yeasticidal, fungicidal, tuberculocidal, limited spectrum virucidal activ- ity, active against enveloped viruses, active against Norovirus. Alcohol-based solu- tion for disinfecting surfaces of medical devices, surfaces in the laboratory area as well as surfaces and equipment in the pharmaceutical and cosmetics area. Application: wiping method. VAH listed and included in the IHO list of virucidal products. Article AR neoform® Rapid Conts 750 ml Order No. 10 27 64347 neoform® wipes RTF Disposable non-woven wipes dispenser system for the use of surface disinfectants. Disinfection of surfaces, equipment, medical devices and medical inventory in combina- tion with suitable Dr. Weigert surface disinfectants in hospitals, medical practices, old people’s and nursing homes, in chemical and pharmaceutical areas, laboratories as well as in food processing companies and communal kitchens. Also suitable for high-risk ar- eas such as neonatology or haemato-oncology according to VAH recommendation. Ver- satile, approved pursuant to the 4-field test (EN 16615). Article AS neoform® wipes RTF Conts 115 pcs. Order No. 10 27 61388 AR Covering Films Laboratory Mats, Deutsch & Neumann Laboratory mats made of silicone, non-slip, temperature-resistant up to 260°C, availa- ble in the colors red or black. AO AM AP AQ AS Colour red black black red Length mm 250 250 350 350 Width mm 250 250 350 350 Order No. 24 34 20250 24 34 20251 10 34 10350 10 34 10351 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 257

259

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Covering Films Absobent Paper with Polyethylene, Hahnemühle The highly absorbent protective paper 295PE offers total protection of surfaces in the laboratory thanks to its double layer. • Cellulose layer: One layer of pure filter paper enables a large quantity of liquids to be • Polyethylene layer: totally waterproof, prevents liquids from reaching the protected sur- absorbed. face. • The high purity of the filter paper allows for recovery and re-use of the spilled liquid. • Type 295PE weighs 120g/sqm, is 0.2 mm thick and absorbs 110 mg of water per sqm. Grade Weight Order No. Size 295 PE 295 PE 295 PE g/m2 120 120 120 Thickness mm 0.2 0,2 0.2 Packing type 1 roll 1 roll 460 mm × 50 m 1200 mm × 50 m 460 mm × 570 mm 100 sheets 10 15 95865 10 15 95874 10 15 95885 Other sizes on request. High-Tack Mats, Weidner Tack mats for effective dust collection and contamination control for class 100, 10 and nuclear clean rooms. When entering a sterile room, it is the first and second steps that transmit harmful germs, bacteria-infested dust particles and dirt of all types. The coated mat effectively combats this with its powerful adhesive, which traps dirt from shoes, carts and other roller-mounted equipment when passing over the mat. Soiled foils are simply pulled off. Use of the mat inside the isolation rooms prevents germ-infested dust particles from escaping to the outside. 1 box contains 6 mats, each with 40 layers of pull-off foil L × W × H mm 1150 × 450 × 2 Colour white Order No. 36 58 18240 Chemical Binders Mercury Collector, BÜRKLE Bürkle’s mercury collector enables the easy collection of spilt mercury, which can then be used again. The mercury collector is composed of a PE tub. Within the screw cap lid there is a special plastic foam insert. On pressing this foam gently on the spilt mercury, the foam’s pores are opened and the mercury globules are absorbed. When raised, the foam’s pores are sealed again, thus keeping hold of the mercury. The cap is then screwed on the tub, the globules are released again and fall through the perforated separation into the tub. Article 1 Mercury collector Order No. 10 04 58901 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. co d e b e w WW6PB006 co d e b e w WWR4Q056 1 co d e b e w 258

260

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection Chemical Binders WIELA-SAFE Oil and Chemical Binder, Dr. Wieland WIELA-SAFE can be used as a universal chemical binder when dealing with oil and chem- ical accidents on land. Years of practical experience have shown that WIELA-SAFE can also be used on strong- ly reacting and oxidizing substances. Areas of use: Laboratories, haulage companies, chemical companies, service vehicles, transportation of hazardous materials, stores, railways, special waste vehicles, emergen- cy services, etc. Article WIELA-SAFE, 2 l WIELA-SAFE, 5 kg Order No. 36 34 71067 36 34 71073 Contact us to inquire about other container volumes and scale prices! co d e b e w WW19X012 FastSorb Absorbent, Laborgeräte-Süd Absorption agent for oils and chemicals FastSorb 4.0 FastSorb 4.0 is a flowable absorption agent which quickly binds hazardous fluids. This quick binder should be available at every workplace where there is a risk of dangerous leakages. • Tested by TÜV Rheinland pursuant to the method specified by the Federal Institute for • Safe absorption agent in compliance with occupational health and environmental pro- Materials Testing tection regulations Optional wall mount with hand broom and scoop available. Article 1 FastSorb 4.0, 1500 g FastSorb 4.0, 50 l 2 Wall mount Wall mount incl. hand brush with rubber bristles, scoop, plastic bag and mounting kit (FastSorb 4.0 not comprised) Order No. 10 88 10761 10 88 10760 10 88 10762 1 2 Waste Collection BRAUN Waste Bins, IDL MEDIBOX® waste needle bins Special push-off device for safe disposal of needles. Integrated cap. GS label: tested safety The maximum filling volume complies approx. 80% of the total volume of the containers. Order No. Article Max. filling volume l 0.67 2.00 3.90 PU pc/Pack 18 27 25 10 42 13424 10 42 13600 10 42 13618 MEDIBOX® 0.8 liters MEDIBOX® 2.4 liters MEDIBOX® 4.7 liters ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. MBT Plastic Bags, IDL Bags for disposing of infectious material With stand for placing directly where you are working. The bags are hung in the stand. Disposable bags for once-only sterilization. co d e b e w WW7R3065 Article Polypropylene bags For sterilizing in steam autoclaves up to 121°C. Dispenser box of 100 bags. Dimensions (L × W): 300 × 200 mm Stand for polypropylene bags White, with hygienic epoxy resin coating. Dimensions (I.D. × H): 120 × 250 mm Order No. 29 78 11000 29 78 13000 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 259

261

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection co d e b e w WW2NY293 Waste Collection Desktop Rack for Waste Bags, neoLab® Desktop racks for waste bags • Material: Steel wire with impact-resistant epoxy resin coating, high chemical stability. • Sturdy version with tripod and rubber pads Article Desktop rack large Desktop rack small Height cm 35 25 Ø at top cm 18.0 11.5 Ø at bottom cm 21.0 14.8 Order No. 29 01 17028 29 01 17106 Accessories Article PE flat bag for tall racks Waste bags (PP) f. tall racks Biohazard bags (HDPE) f. tall racks Waste bags (PP) for small racks Waste bags (PA) for small racks Dimensions cm 30 × 45 30 × 50 30 × 61 20 × 30 20 × 30 Order No. 29 01 21449 29 01 72100 29 01 31042 29 01 17105 10 01 17104 PU pc/Pack 500 500 100 100 50 BIOHAZARD Bags for Autoclaves, neoLab® For biohazard waste, stable for vapour autoclaving up to 121°C, strong model. Made of HDPE, translucent, with BIOHAZARD-imprint. Not printed made of PP, resistant to vapour sterilisation up to 135°C. co d e b e w WW2NY062 Version 61 × 76 cm, with imprint, HDPE 30 × 61 cm, with imprint, HDPE 61 × 91 cm, with imprint, HDPE 20 × 30 cm, without imprint, PP 30 × 50 cm, without imprint, PP 60 × 80 cm, without imprint, PP 70 × 110 cm, without imprint, PP ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 29 01 31047 29 01 31042 29 01 31043 29 01 17105 29 01 72100 29 01 72101 29 01 72102 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 500 500 350 co d e b e w WW2NY283 Polyethylene Waste Bags, neoLab® The proven waste bags made of PE for every use. • strong and tearproof • not imprinted • colour: blue Contents l 60 120 120 Dimensions cm 57,5 × 100 70 × 110 80 × 100 Foil thickness mm 0,05 0,07 0,05 Order No. 10 01 17095 10 01 17097 10 01 17098 PU pc/Roll 25 25 25 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical 260

262

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning, Disinfection / Cleaning Aids Waste Collection Waste Bag Holders, neoLab® Aluminium-coloured, powder-coated steel rack with 4 steerable smooth-running rolls (50 mm Ø). Elastic bars guarantee protection of the waste bags. Wall deflector made of rubber. Fits under counter tops. Rack open to 3 sides, full bags can be removed with- out problems. Accessories: plastic lid in grey/white with stainless hinge, can be removed easily for cleaning. Pedal bin, rustless Article Waste bag holder, 60 l Waste bag holder, 120 l Plastic flap lid for 60 l-stand Plastic flap lid for 120 l-stand Pedal mechanism for opening W × D × H cm 380 × 380 × 834 470 × 380 × 834 Order No. 10 01 23182 10 01 23183 10 01 23184 10 01 23185 10 01 23186 co d e b e w WW2NY284 Flame Protection Waste Bin, BOCHEM Bins with flame protection. Anti-corrosion finish prevents leaks. With swing lid. Material No. 4301/5, 70 liters, fine-ground surface. Dimensions (W × H × D): 410 × 745 × 310 mm handles left and right, each side +25 mm Waste bin made of chromium-nickel steel co d e b e w WWQ7J058 Article Waste bin made of chromium-nickel steel Waste bags Article PVC waste bags for waste bin, 25 pieces PVC waste bags, BOCHEM Order No. 10 05 11422 Order No. 38 05 11421 Article PVC waste bags for waste bin, 25 pieces Order No. 38 05 11421 co d e b e w WWQ7J092 Brushes Laboratory Brushes Set, neoLab® Brushes for the gentle cleaning of laboratory equipment, special design with plastic-coat- ed wire. Consisting of 10 brushes with dia. 10 to 80 mm, incl. brush with wooden handle and a washing brush. The plastic-coated wire prevents scratching the glass. Article Laboratory brush set, 10 pieces Order No. 37 01 17032 Brushes for Round Bottom Flasks, neoLab® Suitable for universal use. An articulated joint on the brush lets you easily reach the upper inner portion of the flask neck. The shape of the natural bristle brush matches the curvature of the flask allowing you to reach any spot on the inside wall of the flask. The brush fits into any NS 29/32 ground flask from 100 ml volume upwards, and a long wood- en handle provides a good grip. Article Brush for round bottom flask Spare brush Order No. 37 01 16010 37 01 16011 co d e b e w WW2NY153 co d e b e w WW2NY152 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 261

263

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment co d e b e w WW2NY154 Brushes Vat Brushes, neoLab® Article Sturdy cleaning brush with a long handle. Knot-free beechwood body and strong natural bristles guarantee Order No. 37 01 23280 long life and good cleaning results. Length: Brush head width: Bristle height: 45,0 cm 6,5 cm 6,0 cm Article Scrubbing brush without handle Length: 22,0 cm Order No. 37 01 23275 Brushes for Sedimenting Glasses, neoLab® Conical cleaning brush made of horsehair / Nylon, with pencil tip for large conical con- tainers, in particular for Imhoff sedimenting glasses. Galvanized steel wire with angled handle to allow you to rotate the brush in sedimenting glasses. The soft, powerful bristles provide fast, thorough cleaning of glasses even when the glass- es are very dirty. Upper diameter: Total length: Brush length: 13 cm approx. 70 cm approx. 50 cm WW2NY229 Article Cleaning brush for sedimentation vessels Order No. 37 01 23285 co d e b e w co d e b e w WW7R3321 Brushes, IDL Article AP 8 4 6 2 1 3 5 7 AT9 AK AL AM AN AO 1 Pipette brush (pipe cleaner) 2 Test tube brush, head bundle 3 Test tube brush, wool tip 4 Test tube brush, head bundle 5 Test tube brush, wool tip 6 Test tube brush, head bundle 7 Test tube brush, wool tip 8 Bottle brush, head bundle 9 Bottle brush, head bundle AT Bottle brush, head bundle AK Beaker brush, wooden handle AL Beaker brush, wooden handle AM Beaker brush, wooden handle AN Jar brush, horsehair-nylon mix AO Pipe and tube brush AP Screen brush (washing brush), plastic handle 220 Ø 60 L mm 480 250 260 280 280 290 270 390 420 470 390 430 430 630 1000 Brush L × Ø mm 100 × 5 50 × 10 50 × 10 70 × 15 70 × 15 110 × 30 100 × 30 85 × 50 100 × 55 120 × 63 125 × 85/60 140 × 85/60 140 × 100/80 140 × 100/80 150 × 30 Order No. 37 03 10001 37 03 10002 37 03 10003 37 03 10004 37 03 10005 37 03 10006 37 03 10007 37 03 10008 37 03 10009 37 03 10010 37 03 10011 37 03 10012 37 03 10013 37 03 10015 37 03 10014 37 03 10016 AQ 262 “da Vinci” Brushes and Spun Glass Burnishers, DEFET AQ Original brush size, measured at upper edge of ferrule Series 1520L water-color brushes Genuine red marten hair, with very fine tip, seamless silver ferrule, short brown handle (picture shows brush size 6). Size 0 1 2 3 4 5 Order No. 37 26 10000 37 26 10001 37 26 10002 37 26 10003 37 26 10004 37 26 10005 Size 6 8 10 12 14 16 Order No. 37 26 10006 37 26 10008 37 26 10010 37 26 10012 37 26 10014 37 26 10016 Continued on next page

264

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment AR Brushes Series 1570L NOVA water-color brushes Extra fine, gold-colored synthetic fibers, seamless silver ferrule, short green handle (pic- ture shows brush size 8) Size 0 1 2 3 4 5 Order No. 37 26 60000 37 26 60001 37 26 60002 37 26 60003 37 26 60004 37 26 60005 Size 6 8 10 12 14 16 Order No. 37 26 60006 37 26 60008 37 26 60010 37 26 60012 37 26 60014 37 26 60016 AS Series 1587L water-color brushes Light-colored cow ear hair, seamless silver ferrule, short maroon handle (picture shows brush size 4) Size 0 1 2 3 4 5 Order No. 37 26 20000 37 26 20001 37 26 20002 37 26 20003 37 26 20004 37 26 20005 Size 6 8 10 12 14 16 Order No. 37 26 20006 37 26 20008 37 26 20010 37 26 20012 37 26 20014 37 26 20016 BT Series 1990L quill brush pointed Squirrel hair, no metal ferrule, in natural quill (picture shows brush size 1) Size 0 1 2 3 4 Order No. 37 26 30000 37 26 30001 37 26 30002 37 26 30003 37 26 30004 Size 5 6 7 8 9 Order No. 37 26 30005 37 26 30006 37 26 30007 37 26 30008 37 26 30009 BK Series 7179L bristle brush flat White bristles, sheet metal ferrule, long natural handle (picture shows brush size 12) Size 2 4 6 8 10 12 Order No. 37 26 40002 37 26 40004 37 26 40006 37 26 40008 37 26 40010 37 26 40012 Size 14 16 18 20 22 24 Order No. 37 26 40014 37 26 40016 37 26 40018 37 26 40020 37 26 40022 37 26 40024 BL Series 640L glass fiber brush Wound in cotton thread, length 200 mm (picture shows 15 mm diameter) Ø mm 10 15 Order No. 37 26 50010 37 26 50013 Ø mm 20 25 Order No. 37 26 50020 37 26 50025 Draining Racks behroplast® Draining Racks, Behr behroplast® draining racks made of solid PVC, for hanging on or leaning against a wall, with drip tray, gray, incl. screws and dowels. Width cm 40 50 60 Height cm 40 50 60 Rods quantity Order No. 25 50 69 24 48 15035 24 48 15050 24 48 15069 AR AS BT BK BL co d e b e w WWXKS006 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 263

265

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Draining Racks Draining Racks, BRAND Draining racks, PS Integrated wide draining trough. Pegs can be inserted as required. Peg holes are closed at the back - preventing leakage toward the wall. Supplied complete with drain tubing and accessories for wall mounting. W × H: 450 × 630 mm, 72 pegs (Ø 16 mm, L 120 mm) Article Draining rack, PS Accessories For narrow neck vessels (O.D. 6 mm, length 120 mm). 1 set of 11 Article Special rods, PS Order No. 24 49 95105 Order No. 24 49 95111 Draining Racks, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® Plastic draining racks (PVC), largely chemically resistant, breakproof, used in the lab by the thousand and adapted to individual requirements. The sturdy rods can be inserted in the holes as required and clicked in place. Using a combination of three different lengths of rod (60 mm, 100 mm and 150 mm) the rack can be adapted to take any item. The rods can be removed and repositioned at any time. With a removable draining channel plus a connection for a draining tube (to direct the water into the sink). Available in 3 different sizes. Supplied in strong cardboard boxes, complete with peel-off foil to protect from dust and scratching, rods and dowels and wall mounting. 1 Draining racks with channel complete with rods Length Qty rods 100 mm 26 39 56 Qty rods 150 mm 2 4 6 cm 40 50 60 Width cm 40 50 60 Qty rods 60 mm 5 10 15 Rods, replaceable/repositionable Length mm 60 100 1501) Rod Ø mm 6 10 12 1) Rods only usable together with 100 mm. Order No. 24 05 64040 24 05 64050 24 05 64060 Order No. 24 05 64460 24 05 64410 24 05 64415 2 Draining rack, benchtop, with collecting pan complete with rods The draining rack is easy and flexible to set down on a table or working surface. Two large supports with wide bases ensure sufficient stability. Since both sides of the draining board can be used, it provides twice the hanging space. The collecting pan can simply be re- moved for emptying. Length cm 40 50 60 Width cm 40 50 60 Qty rods 60 mm 5 10 15 Qty rods 100 mm 26 39 56 Qty rods 150 mm 2 4 6 Order No. 10 04 53041 10 04 53051 10 04 53061 Draining Racks, Hecht-ASSISTENT 35 × 30 cm Plexiglas® with 23 rods, rear wall white, rods blue Dimensions: Material: Rod arrangement: 1st row with 4 rods 2nd row with 5 rods 3rd and 4th rod with 7 rods each Article Draining rack with draining trough Order No. 24 18 10001 co d e b e w WWQED014 co d e b e w WWR4Q022 264 1 2

266

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Rinsing Equipment, Drying Equipment Air Dryer for Laboratory Glassware, Irmeco For drying various types of laboratory glassware, e.g. bulbs, pipettes, beakers, test tubes, etc. The device has 24 drying pipes with 16 mm diameter, 16 drying pipes with 14 mm diameter and 16 drying pipes with 12 mm diameter. The outlet pipes are made of acid-re- sistant steel. Temperature and timer are set via a rotary switch. It is protected against overheating by a temperature limit fuse. The built-in air filter can be easily dissambled and replaced. co d e b e w WWR5C001 Technical data: Drying mode: Number of drying pipes: Timer: Overall dimensions (W×H×D): 310 × 920 × 320 mm Power supply: Airflow rating: 230 V, 50 Hz 1000 W hot or cold 56 15 – 180 min, and continuous operation Article Air dryer for laboratory glassware Order No. 10 15 85010 Cuvette and Small Vessels Rinser VAKUWASCH, schuett-biotec Cuvette and small vessels rinser VAKUWASCH Polyethylene. Practically unbreakable. The easiest way to clean (e.g. acetone/ethanol) and to dry glass vessels in a few seconds and in one cycle. All you need is a vacuum flask (with rubber stopper with a bore hole and vacuum tube) and a low level of vacuum. Article 1 VAKUWASCH cuvette and small vessels rinser Rubber stopper with hole Suction bottle DURAN®, 500 ml Vacuum tube per meter Order No. 19 31 35001 19 31 35012 19 31 35011 19 31 35013 1 More than 20,000 articles in this catalogue – and still more on our website ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 265

267

KNOWLEDGE NOTES ON CLEANING IN ULTRASONIC BATH What is ultrasound Oscillations with frequencies above 18 kHz (18,000 waves per second) are called ultrasound. These oscillations lead to the generation of millions of small vacuum bubbles in all liquids during the expansion phase. These bubbles implode during the pressure phase and generate highly effective pressure im- pulses. This process is called cavitation. Low frequencies around 20 kHz, which are for example used for cell disruption, generate bubbles of bigger diameters with strong pressure impulses as opposed to higher frequencies around 35 kHz, which are preferably used for intensive and gentle cleaning. For generating the ultrasound, a ultrasonic generator converts the power frequency to the respective frequency of the device and passes it on to the wave systems for generating mechani- cal waves in the liquids. Advantages of ultrasonic cleaning The cavitation has the effect that residue dirt and infectious agents are divulsed from the parts in the liquid, even from cavities and drillings - electronic brushing. Ultrasound cleans within a few minutes and excels in cleanliness compared to manual cleaning. At the same time, it works gently, because mechanical dama- ges such as scratches are avoided. Advantages in chemical engineering and sono-chemistry Cavitation is used for many applications. For example, an emulsion made of oil and water will be finer and more stable under the influence of ultrasound than with any other tech- niques. For sonochemical processes in an ultrasonic bath, the reaction vessel should have a thin-walled bottom. Then, the ultrasonic energy radiating from the bottom of the tank will be effectively transmitted to the reaction vessel. Which ultrasonic bath do I choose? Ultrasonic baths work with 35kHz as cleaning-intensive high frequency. The size and type of the cleaning objects and sample vessels defines the size of the tank and thus the required device type. When selecting the device, the basket dimensions have to be considered. In order to avoid over- loading the device, it is recommended to choose a slightly bigger device. This also provides tolerance for other appli- cations which might be added for future use. The diversity of SONOREX ultrasonic baths, ultrasonic special baths and ultrasonic baths for built-in shows that every user can find the bath that is right for him. Does an ultrasonic bath have to have a heating? Heated cleaning liquids shorten the cleaning time. Stains can be removed quicker in heated liquids. In a laboratory, devices with heatings are usually used for cleaning tasks. Disinfection liquids must not be heated, because this can re- sult in a protein coagulation at 40°C , which makes cleaning and disinfecting more difficult. For this task, devices without heating are used. Which accessories are necessary? The cleaning objects and reaction vessels must never stand on the bottom of the tank. The basket avoids scratches at the cleaning object and the bottom of the tank. Containers for cleaning smaller objects or for working with aggressive solutions are hooked in the hole lid. Which liquids can be used? Direct cleaning: In ultrasonic baths, special substances are used, which have been developed especially for use in ultrasonic baths. Water without cleaners does not clean. Do not use household cleaners or pure desalinated water. Indirect cleaning: Indirect cleaning is carried out in containers or tanks. To transmit the ultrasound in the container, a contract liquid which contains tenside, e.g. water with TICKOPUR, is filled in the tank. To work with acids or if acid residues have to be removed, a plastic tank is to be used. It is not allowed to fill solvents like gasoline, alcohol, acetone etc. directly into the ultrasonic bath because of the flamma- bility and explosion hazard. Checking the cleaning performance of ultrasound devices by means of foil tests It is often of interest to evaluate the performance of an ultrasonic bath. In the standard IEC/TR 60886 (1987-03), procedures for proving the cavitation are explained. Cavitation strength and distribution in a liquid volume can be determined by means of the so-called foil test. A thin aluminum foil is tightened on a frame and then inserted in an ultrasonic bath and exposed to the waves. The emerging erosions of the foil within a defined time (max. 3 min) provide a measurement for the effect of the cavitation. The foils can be stored easily. www.folientest.info 266

268

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment co d e b e w WWFH8001 Ultrasonic Cleaning Ultrasonic Equipment-Survey, BANDELIN 1 SONOREX high power ultrasonic baths for intensive cleaning, degasifying of liquids, process acceleration and sample prepara- tion. 2 SONOREX SUPER ultrasonic baths SweepTec for continuous sound field oscillation. Stainless steel tank with a 9.0 to 90.0 l capacity. Labor-saving workflow starting with the RK 102 H. H models with heating 30 to 80°C. RK 31 H fixed 65°C heating. Rugged stainless steel housing, drip proof, degree of protection IP 32, adjustable temperature range, 35 kHz oscillation system, pulse function, operating voltage 230 V~ (±10 %), optionally 115 V~ (±10 %), 50/60 Hz. High cleaning performance, very deep acting, low noise, refer to page 267. 3 SONOREX DIGITEC digital ultrasonic baths 4-step operation as “plug and clean”, “H” units with heater for 20 to 80°C, adjustable temperature range, with LED for temperature and heating phase. Warning LED for overheating, time setting 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, ± 5 % or continuous operation ( T), DEGAS – freely selectable sound pulse – with LED, Stainless steel housing, spray-water proof, IP 33 protection. Sweep for continuous sound field oscillation, operat- ing voltage 230 V~ (±10 %), optionally 115 V~ (±10 %), 50/60 Hz. Refer to page 267. 4 SONOREX DIGIPLUS ultrasonic baths Power setting 20 to 100%, otherwise like SONOREX DIGITEC. 1 Special baths Gentle cleanign of test sieves: RK 106, RK 1028 C, refer to page 267. Cleaning of long parts: RK/DT 156/BH, RK 170 H Pipette cleaner PR 140 DH for pipettes up to 755 mm, burettes refer to page 272. Fast degasifying of liquids with DEGAS function: SONOREX DIGITEC and SONOREX DIGIPLUS SONOREX TECHNIK – welded tanks volumes up to 230 l and internal length up to 100 cm. Frequency 40 kHz, RM 110 and upwards 25 kHz, refer to page 271. TICKOPUR/STAMMOPUR cleaning agents for use in ultrasonic baths, refer to page 247. 2 SONOPULS ultrasonic homogenizers For homogenisation, disagglomeration, emulgation, suspension, acceleration of chemical reactions or cell disruption. With pulsation circuit continuous amplitude adjustment pro- viding reproducible results, refer to page 205. SONOREX SUPER Ultrasonic Baths, BANDELIN SONOREX SUPER ultrasonic baths • Class I medical device • For aqueous cleaning agents • Stainless steel vibration tanks, volumes 0.9 to 90.0 liters • Drip-proof stainless steel housing • Time setting 1 – 15 min, ± 5 %, or continuous operation ( T) • Ultrasonic frequency 35 kHz • RK 1028 CH and RK 1050 CH welded oscillation tanks made of stainless steel 1.4404 • RK 102 H oscillation tank hard chromium-plated • RK 102 H and up with ball valve drain • H types with heating, adjustable temperature range 30 – 80°C. RK 31 H: heating perma- nently set to 65°C • Pulse function • Operating voltage 230 V~ (±10 %), optionally 115 V~ (±10 %), 50/60 Hz Type RK 31 RK 31 H RK 52 RK 52 H RK 100 RK 100 H RK 102 H RK 103 H RK 106 Ultrasonic max. output W Bath Bath dimensions vol. L × W × D l mm 0.9 160 190 × 85 × 60 190 × 85 × 60 0.9 160 150 × 140 × 100 1.8 240 150 × 140 × 100 1.8 240 240 × 140 × 100 3.0 320 240 × 140 × 100 3.0 320 240 × 140 × 100 3.0 480 240 × 140 × 150 4.0 560 Ø 240 × 130 5.6 480 Ultrasonic nominal power W 40 40 60 60 80 80 120 140 120 Order No. 96 07 21009 96 07 20532 96 07 20552 96 07 20553 96 07 21006 96 07 21007 96 07 23001 96 07 23003 96 07 23004 Ultrasonic max. output corresponds to four times higher value of the ultrasonic nominal power 3 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 267 Continued on next page

269

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Ultrasonic Cleaning co d e b e w WWFH8002 1 2 3 4 5 268 Ultrasonic max. output W Type Bath vol. l Bath dimensions L × W × D mm RK 156 500 × 140 × 100 6.0 640 RK 156 BH 500 × 140 × 150 9.0 860 RK 170 H 1000 × 200 × 200 39.0 1520 RK 255 300 × 150 × 150 5,5 640 1 RK 255 H 300 × 150 × 150 5.5 640 RK 510 300 × 240 × 150 9.7 640 RK 510 H 300 × 240 × 150 9.7 640 RK 512 H 300 × 240 × 200 13.0 860 2 RK 514 325 × 300 × 150 13.5 860 RK 514 H 325 × 300 × 150 13.5 860 RK 514 BH 325 × 300 × 200 18.7 860 RK 1028 500 × 300 × 200 28.0 1200 RK 1028 H 500 × 300 × 200 28.0 1200 RK 1028 C 500 × 300 × 300 45.0 2000 RK 1040 Ø 500 × 195 39.5 1520 RK 1050 600 × 500 × 200 58.0 2400 3 RK 1028 CH 500 × 300 × 300 45.0 1200 4 RK 1050 CH 600 × 500 × 300 90.0 2400 Ultrasonic nominal power W 160 215 380 160 160 160 160 215 215 215 215 300 300 500 380 600 300 600 Order No. 96 07 23027 96 07 23018 96 07 23039 10 07 33066 96 07 23007 96 07 23026 96 07 23008 96 07 23024 96 07 23009 96 07 23016 96 07 23010 96 07 23011 96 07 23012 96 07 23041 96 07 23014 96 07 23015 96 07 23042 96 07 23043 Ultrasonic max. output corresponds to four times higher value of the ultrasonic nominal power 5 SONOREX DIGITEC digital ultrasonic baths • Class I medical device • Mixing of samples • Homogenisation of samples for analysis • Rapid degassing of solvents for HPLC • 4-step operation as “plug and clean” • “H” units with heater for 20 to 80 °C, with adjustable temperature range, with LED for temperature and heating phase • Warning LED for overheating • Time setting 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, ± 5 % or continuous operation ( T) • DEGAS rapid degassing function – freely selectable sound pulse – with LED • Stainless steel housing, spray-water proof, IP 33 protection thanks to permanently con- nected mains cable and liquid-proof front panel • Sweep – continuous sound field oscillation for gentle, even cleaning • RC version with infrared interface • Automatic short-term ultrasound activation during heating to avoid retardation of boil- ing; can be switched off Type • Automatic safety switch-off 12 hours after last button activation • Pulse function • Operating voltage 230 V~ (±10 %), optionally 115 V~ (±10 %), 50/60 Hz • Fill level mark for safe dosing • Outlet valve for easy emptying, one-piece welded outlet elbow Ultrasonic nominal power W 40 40 60 60 80 80 120 140 160 160 160 160 160 215 215 215 215 Bath dimen- sions L × W × D mm DT 31 190×85×60 DT 31 H 190×85×60 DT 52 150×140×100 DT 52 H 150×140×100 DT 100 240×140×100 DT 100 H 240×140×100 DT 102 H 240×140×100 DT 103 H 240×140×150 DT 156 500×140×100 DT 255 300×150×150 DT 255 H 300×150×150 DT 510 300×240×150 DT 510 H 300×240×150 DT 512 H 300×240×200 DT 514 325×300×150 DT 514 H 325×300×150 DT 514 BH 325×300×200 Ultrasonic max. output W 160 160 240 240 320 320 480 560 640 640 640 640 640 860 860 860 860 Bath vol. l 0.9 0.9 1.8 1.8 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 5.5 5.5 9.7 9.7 13.0 13.5 13.5 18.7 Order No. 96 07 33200 96 07 33220 96 07 33205 96 07 33225 96 07 33210 96 07 33230 96 07 33235 96 07 33201 96 07 33275 96 07 33215 96 07 33240 96 07 33245 96 07 33206 96 07 33226 96 07 33250 96 07 33211 96 07 33216 Ultrasonic max. output: corresponds to four times higher value of the ultrasonic nominal power. Accessories as for RK units. SONOREX DIGITEC DT...-RC Units with Infrared Interface Type Bath dimen- sions L × W × D mm 6 DT 102 H-RC 240×140×100 DT 255 H-RC 300×150×150 DT 510 H-RC 300×240×150 DT 514 BH-RC 325×300×200 Ultrasonic max. output W Bath vol. l 3.0 480 5.5 640 9.7 640 18.7 860 Ultrasonic nominal power W 120 160 160 215 Order No. 10 07 33071 10 07 33081 10 07 33091 10 07 33095 Continued on next page

270

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Ultrasonic Cleaning Accessories for Digitec DT...-RC Units Article WINSONIC® DT remote control consisting of: software and infrared adapter IR 1 Order No. 10 07 33090 SONOREX DIGIPLUS DL High-power ultrasonic baths with power control • Cleaning of sensitive materials • Mixing of samples • Homogenizing of samples for analysis • Fast degassing of solvents for HPLC • Power control from 20 to 100% • Heating 20 to 80 °C, with adjustable temperature range, LED • Optical signal in case of excess temperature • Automatic short-time ultrasound during heating up period to avoid delay in boiling – switch-off possible • Time setting 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, ± 5 % or continuous operation ( T) • DEGAS – quick degassing • Sweep – permanent sound field oscillation ensures even and gentle ceaning • Automatical safety shut-down 12 hours after last keypress • Marking of filling level for safe dosage • Drain valve for simple emptying, one-piece welded drain bow • Protection class IP 33 at highest possible level through liquid-tight mains cable and housing front without openings Type Bath dimen- sions L × W × D mm 7 DL 102 H 240×140×100 DL 156 BH 500×140×150 DL 255 H 300×150×150 DL 510 H 300×240×150 DL 512 H 300×240×200 DL 514 BH 325×300×200 DL 1028 H 500×300×200 Bath vol. l 3.0 9.0 5.5 9.7 13.0 18.7 28.0 Ultrasonic max. output W 480 860 640 640 860 860 1200 Ultrasonic nominal power W 120 215 160 160 215 215 300 Order No. 10 07 37180 10 07 37181 10 07 37182 10 07 37183 10 07 37184 10 07 37185 10 07 37186 SONOREX accessories for ultrasonic baths Vessels or items to be cleaned may not be placed on he bottom of the tank! Stainless steel baskets - required accessories - for suspension in the tank. Stainless steel equipment holder, model GH 1 for 1 liter glass columns up to Ø 105 mm, other equipment holders bottom with mesh size 12,5 × 12,5 mm. DE perforated stainless steel cover for holding insert beakers (glass, plastic stainless steel). ES insert strips, hold 4 insert beakers, SH 28 C strainer holder for 5 test sieves. SH 7 = sieve holder for 1 test sieve. Sieve inserts fit insert containers. 6 7 9 AK 8 AT Insert baskets made of stainless steel Type K 08 8 K 3C K 3CL K 6 K 6BL K 7 K 5C 9 K 10 K 10B K 14 K 14B K 28 K 28C K 40 K 50 K 50C fits RK/DT 31/H RK/DT 100/H, RK 102 H, DT 102 H/H-RC, DL 102 H RK/DT 103 H RK/DT 106 RK/DT/DL 156 BH RK 170 H RK 255/H, DT 255/H/H-RC, DL 255 H RK 510/H, DT 510/H/H-RC, DL 510 H RK/DT/DL 512 H RK/DT 514/H RK/DT/DL 514 BH RK/DT 1028/H, DL 1028 H RK 1028 C/CH, DT 1028 CH RK 1040 RK 1050 RK/DT 1050 CH Equipment holder made of stainless steel Type AT GH 1 SH 7 SH 28C AK GH 10 GH 28 fits RK 52/H, DT 52/H RK 100/H, DT 100/H RK 102 H, DT 102 H/H-R RK 103 H, DT 103 H DL 102 H RK 106, DT 106 RK 1028 C/CH, DT 1028 CH RK 510/H, DT 510/H/H-RC, DL 510 H RK/DT 1028/H, RK 1040, DL 1028 H Order No. 96 07 31116 96 07 33025 96 07 33026 96 07 31103 96 07 31113 96 07 31121 96 07 33027 96 07 31105 96 07 31106 96 07 31107 96 07 31108 96 07 31109 96 07 31110 96 07 31119 96 07 31111 96 07 31112 Order No. 96 07 32009 96 07 32000 96 07 31307 96 07 32001 96 07 32005 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 269

271

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment 1 2 3 4 5 6 270 Ultrasonic Cleaning Lids made of stainless steel – when using insert baskets Type D 08 D 52 1 D 100 D 6 D 156 D 170 D 255 D 510 fits RK 31/H, DT 31/H RK 52/H, DT 52/H RK 100/102 H, RK 103 H, DT 100/H, DT 102 H/H-RC, DT 103 H, DL 102 H RK 106, DT 106 RK 156/BH, DT 156 BH, DL 156 BH RK 170 H RK 255/H, DT 255/H/H-RC, DL 255 H RK 510/H, RK 512 H, DT 510/H/H-RC, DT 512 H, DL 510 H, DL 512 H RK 514/H/BH, DT 514/H/BH/BH-RC, DL 514 BH D 514 D 1028 RK 1028/H, DT 1028/H, DL 1028 H D 1028C RK 1028 C/CH, DT 1028 CH mit K 28 C D 40 D 1050 C RK 1050/CH, DT 1050 CH mit K 50 C RK 1040 Order No. 96 07 35016 96 07 33002 96 07 33003 96 07 35005 96 07 33004 96 07 33006 96 07 33007 96 07 33008 96 07 33010 96 07 33011 96 07 33012 96 07 35020 96 07 33013 Positioning lids made of stainless steel for holding insert beakers Type fits DE 8 RK 31/H, DT 31/H DE 52 RK 52/H, DT 52/H 2 DE 100 RK 100/H, RK 102 H, RK 103 H, DT 100/H, DT 102 H/H-RC, DT 103 H, DL 102 H RK 106, DT 106 DE 6 DE 156 RK 156/BH, DT 156/BH, DL 156 BH DE 255 RK 255/H, DL 255 H, DT 255/H/H-RC DE 510 RK 510/H, RK 512 H, DT 510/H/H-RC, DT 512 H, DL 510 H, DL 512 H DE 514 RK 514/H/BH, DT 514/H/BH/BH-RC, DL 514 BH ES 4 RK 1028/H/C/CH, RK 1050/CH, DT 1028/H/CH, DT 1050 CH, DL 1028 H Order No. 96 07 36009 96 07 33016 96 07 33017 96 07 36004 96 07 33040 96 07 33028 96 07 33038 96 07 33039 96 07 36010 Insert beakers With holding ring and plastic cover for SD 06, EB 05 und PD 06, for hanging in perforated stainless steel cover or insert strip. (Type SD 04/SD 05/KB 04 only for RK 31/H and stainless steel perforated lid DE 08). Type SD 06 PD 06 EB 05 SD 09 SD 05 SD 04 KB 04 Version Glas Plastic Stainless steel Glas Glas Glas Plastic Ø mm 84 86 88 91 76 75 76 Height mm 125 125 110 180 150 110 110 Volume ml 600 600 600 1000 600 400 400 Order No. 96 07 36101 96 07 36103 96 07 36102 96 07 36111 96 07 36112 10 07 31113 10 07 31114 Insert baskets KD 0 mesh width 1×1 mm, for small parts, for use in insert beakers. PD 04 floor mesh fabric, mesh width 1×1 mm. Type Version fits 3 KD 0 Stainless steel SD 06/09, EB 05, PD 06 4 PD 04 Plastic KB 04, SD 04, SD 05, SD 06, SD 09, EB 05, PD 06 Order No. Ø mm 75 96 07 36202 60 96 07 36204 5 Mounting clips Made of stainless steel, for holding laboratory flasks in insert baskets, equipment and glass holders made from stainless steel with mesh size up to 12.5 × 12.5 mm. Order No. Use Type EK 10 EK 25 EK 50 EK 100 EK 250 for 10 ml laboratory flasks for 25 ml laboratory flasks for 50 ml laboratory flasks for 100 ml laboratory flasks for 250 ml laboratory flasks Ø mm 31 42 52 65 85 96 07 37010 96 07 37025 96 07 37050 96 07 37100 10 07 37250 6 Adjustable handle 2 pcs., for insert baskets and equipment holder fits Type Order No. GV 3 K 1 C, K 3 C, K 3 CL, K 5 C, K 6 BL 96 07 32879 GV 10 K 10, K 10 B, K 14, K 14 B, K 28, K 28 C, GH 10, GH 28 96 07 32892 Continued on next page

272

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Ultrasonic Cleaning Plastic baskets Bottom perforated, for cleaning parts with delicate surfaces. Type 7 PK 2 C RK 100/H, RK 102 H, DT 100/H, DT 102 H/H-RC, DL 102 H 10 07 33082 Order No. fits Plastic basins with lid – for cleaning in aggressive fluids. KW 3 and KW 5 are temperature resistant to max. 60°C. 7 Type KW 3 fits RK 100/H, RK 102 H, RK 103 H, DT 100/H, DT 102 H/H-RC DT 103 H, DL 102 H KW 5 RK 255/H, DT 255/H/H-RC, DL 255 H KW 10-0 RK 510/H, DT 510/H/H-RC, DL 510 H 8 KW 14 KW 14 B RK 514 BH, DT 514 BH, DT 514 BH/H-RC, DT/RK 514/H DL 514 BH KW 28-0 RK 1028/H/C/CH, DT 1028/H/CH, DL 1028 H, ZE 1031/1032/… DT KW 50-0 RK 1050 KW 50 B-0 DT/RK 1050 CH Order No. 96 07 38100 96 07 38101 96 07 38110 96 07 38102 96 07 38103 96 07 38104 96 07 38105 10 07 38106 SONOREX special accessories for ultrasonic baths in medical applications Stainless steel basket holder KT 30 for insert basket K 29 EM or 1/1 DIN basket. Type KT 30 fits RK 1028/H, DT 1028/H, ZE 1031/1032/ … DT Order No. 10 07 38330 Stainless steel insert baskets 4 × 4 mm mesh width, for placement on a holder Type 9 K 29 EM RK 1028/H DT 1028/H, DT 1058 M, fits ZE 1031/1032/1058/1059/ … DT Order No. 96 07 38302 8 Silicone studded mats For hanging baskets or insert baskets, for non-contact placement of instruments, espe- cially micro instruments. SM 6 and SM 29 two pcs. each. Type fits SM 3 K 3 C SM 5 K 5 C SM 6 K 6 L Order No. 96 07 38503 96 07 38505 96 07 38506 fits Type Order No. SM 14 K 14 EM 96 07 38514 SM 29 K 28/K 29 EM 96 07 38529 9 SONOREX TECHNIK Ultrasonic Baths, BANDELIN SONOREX TECHNIK ultrasonic baths Devices available in different versions. Type “H” with heating 30 – 80°C (on request). Type “U” with ultrasonic or as rinsing tank without heat and ultrasound (on request). Type “UH” ultrasonic with heating. Built-in ultrasonic generator. Types of series RM 16.2 to 75.2 with inclined tank floor. co d e b e w WWFH8005 Frequency:40 kHz, RM 110 and above alternatively 25 kHz Mains: RM 16.2 UH-RM 75.2 UH RM 110 UH-RM 210 UH 230 V Z (±10%), 50–60 Hz 400 V Z (±10%), 50–60 Hz Cekon connector 16 A Welded tank, 2 mm stainless steel, 1.4404 Overflow pocket. Drain. Timer 1 – 15 min or continuous operation. Type Inner L × W × D mm RM 16.2 UH 325×275×200/2101) RM 40.2 UH 480×300×300/3151) RM 75.2 UH 580×500×300/3151) RM 110 UH 600×450×450 RM 180 UH 1000×500×400 RM 210 UH 750×650×500 Ultrasonic Ultra- nominal sonic power max. output W W 1 × 300 1200 1 × 500 2000 1 × 1000 4000 4000 1 × 1000 2 × 4000 2 × 1000 2 × 4000 2 × 1000 Work. fill qty l 13.0 30.0 60.0 110.0 160.0 210.0 Heating cap. W 800 1250 1950 4800 7200 7200 Order No. 96 07 38200 96 07 38210 96 07 38220 96 07 38230 96 07 38250 96 07 38270 1) inclined tank floor Ultrasonic max. output corresponds to four times higher value of the ultrasonic nominal power co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 271 Continued on next page

273

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Ultrasonic Cleaning Accessories for SONOREX TECHNIK ultrasonic baths Insert baskets made from stainless steel Type MK 16 B MK 40 B MK 75 B MK 110 MK 180 MK 210 fits RM 16.2 UH RM 40.2 UH RM 75.2 UH RM 110 UH, RM 112 UH, ZM 112 UHL RM 180 UH, RM 182 UH, ZM 182 UHL RM 210 UH, RM 212 UH, ZM 212 UHL Stainless steel covers fits RM 16.2 UH RM 40.2 UH RM 75.2 UH RM 110 UH, RM 112 UH, ZM 112 UHL RM 180 UH, RM 182 UH, ZM 182 UHL RM 210 UH, RM 212 UH, ZM 212 UHL Type MD 16 MD 40 MD 75 MD 110 MD 180 MD 210 Ultrasonic Pipette Cleaners, BANDELIN Order No. 96 07 38420 96 07 38421 96 07 38422 96 07 38423 96 07 38424 96 07 38425 Order No. 96 07 38440 96 07 38442 96 07 38444 96 07 38446 96 07 38447 96 07 38448 Ultrasonic cleaning of glass and plastic pipettes, burettes and other glass devices. Short cleaning time. No chrome-sulfuric acid. Water soluble cleaning concentrates. Easy to operate, no glass breakage. Fast, intensive, gentle, environmentally friendly. Sound radi- ation surface Ø 150 mm. • For volumetric glass ware and long parts of max. 755 mm length • With heating to help remove greasy residues • Biologically degradable preparations TICKOPUR for gentle dissolving of stubborn grease residues (R 33) or mineral contaminations (TR 3) • Simultaneous cleaning and disinfection with STAMMOPUR 24 in case of contamination with infectious samples • The cleaning fluids are fit for multiple use • Stainless steel tank made of 1.4404 (material thickness 2 mm) • “Sweep” frequency modulation for a highly homogeneous ultrasonic field; gentle on the glass surfaces of the devices; an attack of the graduation and glass abrasion are almost excluded, the process of a volume change of the glass device, compared to manual cleaning with rough sponges or brushes, is greatly reduced. • Can be placed on the floor near a drain • Folding handles for easier transport • Control field – membrane keypad – level and flush with device front – easy to clean by • Select time, DEGAS and optionally temperature at the push of a button – also when wiping the surfaces wearing gloves • Outlet with ball valve for quick and easy draining SONOREX PR 140 DH with heater Technical data: Oscillating tank made from stainless steel, with ball valve drain 150 × 150 × 895 mm Interior dimensions (L×W×D): Operable depth: 850 mm Housing made from stainless steel, handles on sides Outer dimensions without handles and ball valve (L×W×H): Ultrasonic peak output: Ultrasonic nominal output: Ultrasonic frequency: Timer: 330 × 330 × 1003 mm 860 W 215 W 35 kHz Time setting 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, ± 5 % or continuous operation ( T) IP 33 min. 9, max. 18 l 230 V ~ (± 10%), 50/60 Hz DEGAS 20 – 80 °C adjustable temperature range, heating power 700 W Order No. 10 07 32070 Protection class: Pulse function: Tank volume: Operating voltage: Rapid degassing: Heater: Article 1 SONOREX PR 140 DH with heater Ready-to-use set: • Pipette cleaner PR 140 DH • Pipette basket K 140 B • Lid D 140 D • TICKOPUR R 33 – 5 liters • TICKOPUR TR 3 – 1 liters co d e b e w WWFH8004 1 272

274

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment co d e b e w WWFH8009 Ultrasonic Cleaning SONOREX DIGITEC Ultrasonic Baths, BANDELIN SONOREX DIGITEC DT 510 F / DT 1028 F Ultrasonic baths with flat oscillating tubs with fast degassing function for sample preparation • Uniform sonication of samples irrespective of size and arrangement of the flasks • Same power densities in all 2 bath sizes are followed by same results in each one • Homogenizing • Fast degassing of samples at the push of the button • Sample preparation in laboratory flasks • DEGAS • Sweep TICKOPUR R 33: concentrate for producing the contact liquid. Spring clamps EK are necessary to fix the laboratory flasks fast and easy to the flask holder GL. Floating or canting of flasks is prevented. Technical Data: Internal tank dimensions (l×w×d mm): Capacity: External dimensions (l×w×h mm): Ultrasonic peak output: Ultrasonic nominal power: Timer: Operating voltage: DT 1028 F 500×300×65 9.5 l 535×325×205 1280 W 320 W DT 510 F 300×240×65 4.3 l 325×265×195 560 W 140 W 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 30 min, ± 5% or continu- ous operation ( T) 230 V~ (± 10%), 50/60 Hz, alternative 115 V~ (± 10%), 50/60 Hz 1) Corresponds to four times higher value of the ultrasonic nominal power Article 1 SONOREX DIGITEC DT 510 F Basic set: Ultrasonic bath SONOREX DIGITEC DT 510 F, flask holder GL 510 F, 250 ml TICKOPUR R 33 2 SONOREX DIGITEC DT 1028 F Basic set: Ultrasonic bath SONOREX DIGITEC DT 1028 F, 2 flask holders GL 510 F, 250 ml TICKOPUR R 33 Accessories Article Mounting clip for flasks 10 ml, EK 10 Mounting clip for flasks 25 ml, EK 25 Mounting clip for flasks 50 ml, EK 50 Mounting clip for flasks 100 ml, EK 100 Mounting clip for flasks 250 ml, EK 250 Order No. 10 07 33242 10 07 33243 Order No. 96 07 37010 96 07 37025 96 07 37050 96 07 37100 10 07 37250 1 2 WWFH8010 SONOSHAKE, BANDELIN 3 Ultrasonic bath SONOREX DIGITEC DT 1028 F combined with shaking device SA 1028 SONOSHAKE offers a wide range of possible applications for sample preparation in many areas of analysis, for example, in environmental and foodstuffs analytics. Ideal for sonica- tion of samples in laboratory flasks. The samples can be sonicated either for a selected period or in continuous mode. Quick degassing using the DEGAS function is also possi- ble. With four different shaking frequencies, the shaking device enables gentle to vigorous reciprocating motion up to a maximum of 20 mm. Both procedures can be carried out simultaneously or separately. This means that, for example, a sample can be pre-homog- enized at a specified shaking frequency, and then final homogenization can be achieved in a very short time using ultrasound. SONOREX DIGITEC DT 1028 F • Internal tank dimensions: 500 × 300 × 65 mm (l×w×d) • Capacity 9,5 liters • External dimensions: 535 × 325 × 205 mm (l×w×h) • Ultrasonic peak output 1280 W • Sweep • Ultrasonic nominal power 320 W co d e b e w 3 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 273 Continued on next page

275

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Ultrasonic Cleaning Shaking device SA 1028 • Analogue setting: rotary handle for time setting 1 – 15 min., ± 5% or continuous ( T) and shaking frequency, rotary handle for power selector switch for 0, 25, 50, 75 or 100% • Reciprocating motion: settings in 4 steps possible of up to 200 rpm • Constant amplitude of 20 mm independently of loading • Rack easy to remove • Easy mounting of the laboratory clamps EK 10 – 250 (ordering separately) • Shaking platform approx. 410 × 280 mm (l×w) • Mounting of 36 × 10-ml-flasks or 36 × 25-ml-flasks or 18 × 50-ml-flasks or 12 × 100-ml- flasks or 10 × 250-ml-flasks • Required floor space of SONOSHAKE approx. 850 × 360 mm (l×w) The shaking device SA 1028 can also be added to existing SONOREX DIGITEC DT 1028 F ultrasonic baths. Article SONOREX DIGITEC DT 1028 F Basic set: Ultrasonic bath SONOREX DIGITEC DT 1028 F, 2 flask holders GL 510 F, 250 ml TICKOPUR R 33 1 Shaking device SA 1028 Order No. 10 07 33243 10 07 33249 SONOCOOL Ultrasonic Bath with Cooling, BANDELIN 1 co d e b e w WWFH8012 2 Ultrasonic bath SONOCOOL® with cooling for use in pathology and analysis labo- ratories Decalcification of bone tissue in pathology Decalcifying of bone tissue is an important step of histological preparation of samples (e.g. in oncology). Only decalcified samples can be used artefact-free for followed diagnosis. Compared to standard methods, the processing time is extremely shortened. No destroy- ing of the morphologic structure of samples, quantity of aggressive decalcifying liquids is reduced, faster results of diagnosis. Use in analysys laboratories With SONOCOOL® the cathalytic effect of ultrasound can also be used when sonicating temperature-sensitive samples. Exotherm reactions are possible because of the integrat- ed cooling system, processes are faster and more effective. Ready-to-operate set consisting of: Ultrasonic device, sample holder PH 255-11 for 11 inset beakers SD 01.2, lid D 255 G, 20 inset beakers SD 01.2 à 100 ml, TICKOPUR TR 3 (concentrate for producing the contact liquid) - 250 ml Technical Data: Inner tank dimensions: Tank volume: Adjustable bath temperature: 15 – 40°C (at 20°C room temperature) Cooling power: Ultrasonic power: Ultrasonic frequency: Countdown operation: External dimensions: Housing: 200 W 180 W, adjustable in 4 steps 35 kHz, Sweep up to 100 h 360 × 605 × 385 mm (l×w×d) aluminium, coated with flush pulls (grips recessed inside the housing) front left, concealed 1.6 A 230 V~, (±10%) 50/60 Hz 27.5 kg 280 × 150 × 150 mm (l×w×d) 5 litres (contact liquid) Outlet: Current consumption: Mains connection: Weight: Article Ultrasonic bath SONOCOOL Order No. 10 07 33500 Ultrasonic devices, Elma co d e b e w WWH5B001 3 Elmasonic S ultrasonic table top units are available in 13 sizes and provide all most frequently used functions in everyday lab work. Ultrasonic frequency: 37 kHz Features: • Regular mode: Optimized for laboratory applications, e.g. loosening, mixing, dispersing • Sweep function: For faster and more thorough cleaning by a homogeneous ultrasound etc. distribution in the ultrasonic bath • Degas / Autodegas function - Degas: Degasifying of liquids before analysis - Autodegas: Automatic degasifying before start of cleaning; for even cleaning results Continued on next page 2 274

276

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Ultrasonic Cleaning • Start / auto-start option: - Start: manual activation of immediate cleaning process - Autostart: Cleaning process starts when the preselected temperature is reached • Individual temperature preselection • Electronic time control up to 30 min. + permanent operation. Optimized process control by: - display of pre-selected operation time (fix LED) - display of remaining runtime (blinking LED) Bath dimen- sions L × W × D mm Type S 10 /H 190×85×60 S 15 /H 151×137×100 S 30 /H 240×137×100 S 40 /H 240×137×150 S 60 /H 300×151×150 S 70 /H 505×137×100 S 80 /H 505×137×150 S 100 /H 300×240×150 S 120 /H 300×240×200 S 150 505×300×100 S 180 /H 327×300×200 S 300 /H 505×300×200 S 450 H 500×300×300 S 900 H 600×500×300 Bath volume l 0.8 1.75 2.75 4.25 5.75 6.9 9.4 9.5 12.75 14 18 28 45 90 HF out- put Weff 30 35 80 140 150 150 150 150 200 300 200 300 400 800 Version without heating Order No. 10 15 74010 10 15 74015 10 15 74030 10 15 74040 10 15 74060 10 15 74070 10 15 74080 10 15 74100 10 15 74120 10 15 74150 10 15 74180 10 15 74300 with heating Order No. 10 15 72010 10 15 72015 10 15 72030 10 15 72040 10 15 72060 10 15 72070 10 15 72080 10 15 72100 10 15 72120 10 15 72180 10 15 72300 10 15 72450 10 15 72900 4 Elmasonic P ultrasonic units with multi-frequency function, high-performance. Available in 6 sizes. Features: • Self-explanatory digital display, all values clearly legible, target and actual values visible at a glance. • Two frequencies (switchable) in one unit: - 37 kHz ultrasound: for coarse contaminations, for loosening, mixing, dispersing, and degasifying - 80 kHz ultrasound: silent operation, ideal for quiet working areas, for cleaning the in- teriors of e.g. capillaries and all kinds of microstructures. • Regular mode: Laboratory applications as e. g. loosening, mixing, dispersing. • Pulse function: Optional additional “power” by increase of peak capacity. • Sweep function: Distributes the power evenly over the entire unit. • Degas function: For quick degasifying of samples or solvents in the HPLC. • Temperature-controlled auto start for automatic start of the ultrasound when the prese- lected temperature is reached. • Pause function: Interruption of the current ultrasound treatment. All parameters are stopped. Press key 1x to stop the process. Press the key a second time to continue the process with the retained parameters. • Setting the power: 30 – 100% for optimum application of energy for the selected fre- quency for cleaning jobs and laboratory applications. Type Bath dimensions L × W × D mm P 30 H 240×137×100 P 60 H 300×151×150 P 70 H 505×137×100 P 120 H 300×240×200 P 180 H 327×300×200 P 300 H 505×300×200 Bath volume l 3 5.75 6.90 12.75 18 28 HF output Weff Order No. 120/100 180/150 220 330 330 380 10 15 73030 10 15 73060 10 15 73070 10 15 73120 10 15 73180 10 15 73300 5 Elmasonic S 50 R and S 350 R Elmasonic S 50 R and S 50 R “Lab Technology” – for the cleaning of analysing sieves, the degassing of HPLC solvents and the ultrasonic processing of samples. Microproces- sor-controlled ultrasonic modes and special predefined programmes assist every stand- ard laboratory and cleaning application. Features • for easy cleaning of analysing sieves of 200 – 500 mm with program-control ultrasound (Sieve Cleaning) function • integrated special programs for sample preparation for mixing, dissolving, dispersing • effective and simple degassing of samples and HPLC solvents via the preset degas • level marks for working with small vessels and for reducing the water consumption • 37 kHz ultrasonic frequency • user-friendly clearly arranged operating panel • continued and short-period setting operation from 1 to 30 min • LED display for both pre-set and actual temperature, and for the remaining operating time • connection rack for laboratory holder, noise-reduced operation 3 4 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 275 Continued on next page

277

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Ultrasonic Cleaning Elmasonic S 50 R Technical data: Tank internal dimensions (Ø × H): 240 × 130 mm Basket internal dimensions (Ø × H): 220 × 70 mm Max. filling capacity: 5.3 l Elmasonic S 350 R 600 × 245 mm 545 × 70 mm 57.0 l Article Elmasonic S 50 R Elmasonic S 350 R Basket for S 50 R Basket for S 350 R Filter holder for S 50 R Plastic cover Stainless steel cover for S 350 R Plastic cover for beaker Bracket kit Order No. 10 15 75010 10 15 75011 10 15 75021 10 15 75026 10 15 75022 10 15 75023 10 15 75027 10 15 75024 10 15 75025 1 1 Test sieve holder für S 350 R on demand Noise protection box for ultrasonic table top units Available sizes: • M – for Elma 0.8 – 6 liter units • L – for Elma 9 – 13 liter units Features: • Reduces the typical cavitation noises by approx. 20 dBA, achieving a 75% noise reduc- • Suitable for use directly at noise-sensitive workplaces in laboratories, doctor’s surger- tion ies, or workshops • Vapours are removed by suction • Plexiglass hatch The noise protection box M can be used with the following units: Elmasonic S 10; S 15; S 30 / P 30; S40; S 60 / P 60 and all units with similar dimensions. The noise protection box L can be used with the following units: Elmasonic S 100; S 120 / P 120 and all units with similar dimensions. 2 2 Type Noise protection box size M 465×360×415 Noise protection box size L 530×375×520 Outer dimen- sions W × D × H mm Inner dimensions W × D × H mm 380×240×315 440×310×480 Order No. 10 15 71901 10 15 71902 2 Cleaning concentrate Elma Lab Clean Elma Lab Clean A10 — All-purpose cleaner, mild alkaline liquid concentrate Elma Lab Clean A20sf — Surfactant free mild alkaline liquid concentrate Elma Lab Clean A25 — Strong alkaline liquid concentrate Elma Lab Clean N10 — Neutral concentrate Elma Lab Clean S10 — acidic concentrate Elma Lab Clean S20 — Strong acidic concentrate Type Elma Lab Clean A10 pH value (concen- trate) 11.3 Elma Lab Clean N10 Elma Lab Clean S10 Elma Lab Clean A25 8.2 2.5 –14 Elma Lab Clean A20sf 11.5 Elma Lab Clean S20 < 1 Suggested dosage US*: ca. 1–2% DW*: ca. 0.5–1% US*: ca. 2% DW*: ca. 1% US*: ca. 2% DW*: ca. 0.5% US*: ca. 1–2% DW*: ca. 0.5–1% US*: ca. 1% DW*: ca. 0.5% US*: ca. 1–2% DW*: ca. 0.5–1% Delivery containers 1 liter Order No. 10 15 70180 10 15 70075 10 15 70095 10 15 70085 10 15 70055 10 15 70190 2.5 liters Order No. 10 15 70181 10 15 70076 10 15 70096 10 15 70086 10 15 70056 10 15 70191 US* = Ultrasonic unit DW* = Dishwasher 10 liters Order No. 10 15 70182 10 15 70077 10 15 70097 10 15 70087 10 15 70057 10 15 70192 25 liters Order No. 10 15 70183 10 15 70078 10 15 70098 10 15 70088 10 15 70058 10 15 70193 Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! 276

278

KNOWLEDGE MACHINE PREPARATION OF LABORATORY GLASSWARE When machine-cleaning laboratory glass- ware, you need to choose a cleaning system which is capable of adequately removing con- tamination for the use to which the glass ware is put. The cleaning system is comprised of the laboratory washing machine, load carriers and the cleaning program. Cleaning programs The aim of cleaning is to remove contamination adequately from the glassware for the use to which it is put. Therefore it is particularly important when selecting a cleaning program and cleaning agents to have an understanding of the physical and chemical properties of the contamination. The physical and chemical properties of the contami- nation include e.g. solubility in water (pH 2-7-13), chemical change as a result of hydrolysis or oxidation, the melting or deformation point, potential for emulsification, etc. Lab washers The choice of lab washer is based on criteria such as: capacity/charge or the quantity of glassware per day, available space, type of installation (undercounter or free-standing), separation of clean and unclean sides, control program options, etc. Any cleaning program consists of several cycles. The UNIVERSAL Program runs as follows: cold pre-rinse, hot alkaline wash, acid neu- tralization, 1-2 rinses, hot final rinse and drying. This program is suit- able for removing water soluble residues and a variety of organic contamination. For cell and tissue cultures, an oxidizing agent based on hydrogen peroxide or hypochlorite should be added during the alkaline wash cycle. Load carriers To load the glassware in the lab washer, mo- bile units, baskets and inserts are re quired. The geometry of the glassware (dia meter of opening, diameter of body, height of the glassware) will decide whether it can be cleaned and rinsed using injection nozzles or rotating spray arms. Mobile units, baskets and inserts fitted with injection nozzles are required for narrow- necked glassware, e.g. volumetric flasks, round-bottomed flasks and narrow-necked Erlenmeyer flasks. The injection nozzles pro- ject into the glassware and guarantee thor- ough internal cleaning, rinsing and drying. The machine's rotating spray arms clean and rinse the glassware externally. Pipettes are placed in sleeves so that, during the washing/rinsing cycles, water is fed from bottom to top, and for the drying cycle, hot air is fed likewise from bottom to top. Beakers, Petri dishes, wide-necked Erlen- meyer flasks and test tubes are placed in special inserts. These are then placed in the upper and lower baskets. The spray arms on the upper basket and in the machine ensure that glassware is cleaned and rinsed both in- side and out. For laboratory glassware which is soiled and even heavily soiled with grease and paraffin wax (food and petro-chemical industries), the ORGANIC Program works well, as it includes two hot alkaline washes at higher temperatures compared to UNIVERSAL Program. Due to the double hot alkaline wash, the amount of grease and paraffin wax can be better transported from the lab washer. During the first cleaning, an emulsifier can be additionally dosed to emulsify the organic residues. With inorganic contamination (e.g. metal salts) the INORGANIC Pro- gram is preferable, which includes a hot acid pre-wash before the alkaline wash in comparison to UNIVERSAL Program. Acids such as citric acid and phosphoric acid can be used. Author: Dr. rer. nat. Roy Schneider co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 277

279

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Cleaning Aids, Equipment Laboratory Glassware Cleaners/Disinfectors Lab washers of PG 85 series, MIELE Laboratory glassware cleaner PG 8583 For reprocessing laboratory glassware used in analytical experiments in industry, environ- mental and research laboratories. • Reprocessing per cycle: e.g. 128 laboratory flasks, or 196 vials together with up to 64 laboratory flasks, or 98 pipettes together with other laboratory glassware • Powerful circulation pump Qmax. = 500 l/min • TouchControl with 14 programs + 2 free program positions • Drying function EcoDry • Depending on the version, max. two integrated dosing pumps for liquid media (cleaning or neutralisation agent) • Process documentation according to customer’s preferences either via software (with Ethernet module or DataDiary) or via printer (with RS232 module) Laboratory glassware cleaner PG 8583 CD Same as PG 8583, but with: • TouchControl with 15 programs + 2 free program positions • Integrated DryPlus drying function • Two integrated dosing pumps for liquid media (cleaning or neutralisation agent) • Compartment for 2 x 10 l canister or 3 x 5 l canister • Conductivity monitoring Laboratory glassware cleaner PG 8593 Same as PG 8583, but with: • TouchControl with 15 programs + 2 free program positions • Integrated DryPlus drying function • Integrated dosing pump for liquid cleaning agent • Comes with additional external dosing module for liquid media • Conductivity monitoring (depending on model) Miele ProCare Lab process chemicals are suitable for a wide number of applications and designed for optimum reprocessing of laboratory utensils in Miele glassware washers. We will be happy to advise you! Technical data: Water connections: 2× cold, 1× hot, and 1× DI water Freestanding unit (with lid) or as base unit in a row of wall-mounted cabinets Dimensions PG 8583 / 8593 (H×W×D): 835 (820 without lid) × 600 × 600 mm Dimensions PG 8583 CD (H×W×D): 835 (820 without lid) × 900 × 700 mm (600 without lid) Mains connection: 3N AC / 400 V / 50 Hz / 9.3 kW Article Order No. PG 8583 AW/WW/AD/LD 10 53 88302 PG 8583 AW/WW/AD/PD 10 53 88301 PG 8583 AE/WW/AD/LD 10 53 88304 PG 8583 AE/WW/AD/PD 10 53 88303 PG 8583 AE/WW/ADP/LD 10 53 88306 PG 8583 AE/WW/ADP/PD 10 53 88305 PG 8583 AE/WW/AD/LD/OIL 10 53 88371 Article Order No. PG 8583 AE/WW/AD/PD/OIL 10 53 88370 PG 8583 CD AE/WW/AD/CM 10 53 88350 PG 8583 CD AE/WW/ADP/CM 10 53 88351 PG 8583 CD AE/WW/AD/CM/OIL 10 53 88373 PG 8593 AE/WW/ADDOS 10 53 89300 PG 8593 AE/WW/AD/CMDOS 10 53 89302 PG 8593 AE/WW/AD/OILDOS 10 53 89372 AWCasing in white AE Stainless-steel casing LD Liquid dosing ADPAqua Destillata pump AD Aqua Destillata WW Warm water PD Powder dosing OILOil-resistent gaskets CMConductivity Monitoring Accessories The new loading system EasyLoad Article A 150 lower drawer for modules A 151 lower drawer/carriage A 100 upper injection basket for modules A 101 upper basket/carriage 1 A 300/3 module for laboratory glassware 2×4 equipped with 4× A840, 4× A841 2 A 301/5 module for laboratory glassware 3×6 equipped with 9× A 842, 9× A 843 3 A 302/3 module for laboratory glassware 4×8 equipped with 16× A844, 16× A845 A 303 module for pipettes A 304 module for vials A 306/1 module for measuring cylinders A 802 nozzle for injector modules 4 A 860 support grid 2×4 5 A 861 support grid 3×6 6 A 862 support grid 4×8 Order No. 10 53 82400 10 53 82410 10 53 81000 10 53 81010 10 53 86900 10 53 86950 10 53 86960 10 53 83030 10 53 83040 10 53 85210 10 53 88020 10 53 86800 10 53 86810 10 53 86820 Inserts Article AK 12, insert 1/2 for funnels, beakers, wide-mouth glassware Fits in upper and lower basket E 109/1, insert 1/2 for beakers up to 250 ml Fits in lower basket Order No. 96 53 01201 10 53 80901 2 4 6 1 3 5 278

280

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Sterilization Indicators MBT Adhesive Indicator Tapes, IDL For monitoring sterilization processes. Reliable and positive identification of sterilization quality. Article 1 Stericlavable indicator tape, 1 reel of 55 m, 18 mm wide The indicator on the tape changes from light beige to dark brown during steam sterili- Order No. 29 78 55191 zation in autoclaves. It also reacts on the action of pressure and temperature after a minimum time - at 120°C after 20 minutes and at 135°C after 7 minutes. Application: Sensitive sterilization products in steam sterilizers, e.g. culture solutions and the like. Article 2 Hot air indicator tape, 1 reel of 55 m, 18 mm wide The indicator in the tape changes from light green to brown during hot-air sterilization. It also reacts to temperature and time - at 160°C after 60 minutes and at 180°C after 30 minutes. Applications: Non-sensitive equipment and aids. Order No. 29 78 55192 Article 3 Hand dispenser for indicator tape Stable. For reliable dispensing and cutting of the indicator tape. Order No. 29 78 55193 co d e b e w WW7R3068 1 2 3 Pipette Boxes, Sterilization Containers Instrument Cases, BOCHEM Instrument cases made of 18/10 steel, with special lid, stackable. Deep-drawn bot- tom in single piece. Length mm 230 315 Width mm 133 215 Height mm 45 60 Order No. 38 05 08475 38 05 08476 co d e b e w WWQ7J043 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 279

281

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Pipette Boxes, Sterilization Containers Sterilizing Boxes for Petri Dishes, BOCHEM Sterilizing boxes made of 18/10 steel, with frame insert for 100-mm dishes. Capacity dishes 10 Ø mm 120 Height mm 250 Order No. 38 05 08961 co d e b e w WWQ7J042 co d e b e w Insulate Container, 18/10 Stainless Steel, BOCHEM With 3 locking clamps, lid and silicone gasket. Possible over-/underpressure can be compensated through a valve in the lid. WWQ7J088 Material 18/10 stainless steel 18/10 stainless steel 18/10 stainless steel Height cm 16 25 23 Ø cm 24 24 30 Volume l 6.5 10.5 15.5 Order No. 10 05 08085 10 05 08086 10 05 08087 Universal Containers UNICON, schuett-biotec Pure aluminium. Round. With slip-over lid. For the sterilization and storage of pipette tips and small parts made of glass or plastic. Fitting pipette tip inserts on request. Order No. suitable e.g. Type Height mm 115 175 170 Ø mm 120 38 31 51115 120 38 31 51175 170 38 31 51170 UNICON 1 for centrifuge tubes UNICON 2 for test tubes UNICON 3 for accommodating pipette tip insertable racks UNICON 4 for small parts made of glass or plastic 270 170 38 31 51300 co d e b e w WW2NY230 Sterilization Containers, neoLab® Sterilization containers made of stainless steel for steam sterilization and retention of sterility during storage and transport. This neoLab container with valve lid is a mechanical, maintenance-free system. No consumables required. No need to change filters. Non-per- forated as a standard feature: deep-drawn stainless steel ensures that the container will not leak. No leaking welds. Also suitable for autoclaving critical liquid waste. Material: stainless steel (X5 CrNi 18/9-10) Article Autoclaving bath Autoclaving bath Length × Width × Height cm 60 × 30 × 26 30 × 30 × 26 Order No. 38 01 78190 38 01 78191 Pipette Boxes, BOCHEM Pipette boxes made of 18/10 steel, stackable. Silicone coating on the base and in the lid. Sterilizable at 205°C. Raw dimensions: 70 × 70 mm Overall length approx. mm 210 290 340 430 490 Useful length mm 180 257 307 412 458 Order No. 38 05 08870 38 05 08871 38 05 08872 38 05 08873 38 05 08874 co d e b e w WWQ7J041 280

282

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Pipette Boxes, Sterilization Containers Aluminium Pipette Boxes, Square, neoLab® Pipet boxes, aluminium, for storage and sterilisation of glass and plastic pipets. In- cluding lid, length 12 cm and 17 cm respectively. The extra long lid (17 cm) ensures an even larger variability. A protection layer of heat resistant silicone (up to +160°C) covers the inner lid and bottom to protect the pipets. With tread surface for strong grip. Made of deep drawn aluminium, ground dimensions: ca. 65 x 65 mm Cover cm 12 12 12 17 Useful length mm 160 – 250 260 – 340 320 – 410 320 – 470 Order No. 10 01 22093 10 01 22094 10 01 22095 10 01 22096 co d e b e w WW2NY161 Variable Pipette Containers VARICON, schuett-biotec Made of two overlapping aluminium parts, which can be pushed in and out of each other in telescope fashion to match the length/volumina of the pipettes in question. The cover is slipped over the lower part of container to a greater or lesser degree depend- ing on the length of the pipettes. Only one container size for all standard pipettes 280 to 420 mm (RS) and only one contain- er size for all short or pasteur pipettes from 145 to 235 mm (RK). Fitting SILICON silicone insert, made of 2 mm thick silicone rubber. For insertion in VARICON RS (lower part) pipette containers. Design to prevent damage to pipettes caused by sudden shock. Type VARICON RK VARICON RS SILICON silicone insert adjustable length mm 145 – 235 280 – 420 Inner Ø mm 60 60 58 Order No. 38 31 60101 38 31 60100 38 31 60261 Racks for Pipette Containers GESTICON, schuett-biotec Stainless steel rack with fixed angular position. Available in 3 versions. For holding round pipette containers (i.e. VARICON RS) or all types rectangular pipette containers up to 72 × 72 mm. Handy storage solution for pipettes of different sizes at your working place or in the safety cabinet. Type for accommodating GESTICON E4 GESTICON E6 GESTICON E8 4 pipette containers 6 pipette containers 8 pipette containers W × H × D mm 195 × 229 × 235 195 × 315 × 235 195 × 405 × 235 Order No. 38 31 12004 38 31 12006 38 31 24182 Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 281

283

KNOWLEDGE STERILISATION Sterilisation means killing or irreversibly inactivating all fertile micro-organisms. Basically there are two procedures available for thermal inactivation - steam sterilisation and hot-air sterilisation. Why steam sterilisation? The principle of steam sterilisation is based on the thermo instability of micro-organisms and is about 100 years old. The high heat storage capacity of water, the additional heat released during the condensation of steam and the humidity of the steam are the basis of an outstanding germicidal effect. Different from the chemical sterilisation or the sterilisation with hot air, which are only suitable for thermo-stable devices (glass, instruments, etc.), steam sterilisation established itself in micro-biological laboratories because hot air or steam are significantly more efficient than dry heat of the same temperature. Its heat content is higher and the germs, especially arid spores, swell up and thus become more heat-sensitive. The steam "under pressure", which is generated by heating up water in a closed container, condenses at the sterilising good and the released energy leads to cell death or inactivation of viruses by means of protein coagulation. From sample prepara- tion to destruction sterilisation, a steam steriliser (autoclave) can be used in an environmentally friendly manner. Steam can be well controlled in a technical way, it is not toxic, does not strain the environment, does not leave residues on the sterilising good and can be generated at relatively low costs. Sterilisation is a function of temperature and time Only sufficient exposure time of the destruction temperature can ensure sterilisation success. In microbiological labora- tories, the sterilisation time is usually 15 to 20 minutes. It should be noted that liquids and media take much longer to reach the sterilisation temperature due to delayed heat conduction. The sterilisation can only start when the "core sterilisation temperature" has been reached. For liquids this is done by a temperature probe in a reference flask inside the autoclave's chamber. After the residence time is over, the materials in the chamber are sterile. Glass and instruments can be removed quickly once the steam and the pressure have been removed. Liquids should be cooled quickly and without losses. The laboratory staff must never be endan- gered by delayed boiling (explosion-like over-boiling). Procedure - Exhaust The gravitation procedure is one of the procedures that are used. It is a flow procedure during which the saturated steam replaces the air from the sterilisation chamber via an exhaust valve. Generally, the sterilisation always takes place in a saturated steam atmosphere without residue air inside the pressure vessel. Depending on the sterilising good and the micro-organisms, which have to be decontaminated, the work temperature lies at 121°C or 135°C which is about 1.1 respectively 2.2 bar overpressure. In order to attain a safe pressure-temperature correlation, the residue air has to be evacuated carefully (exhaust). During the exhaust phase the chamber insides are not yet sterile (sterilisation temperature and residence time have not been reached yet) and therefore a contaminated steam-air mixture leaves the autoclave. In this case the use of an exhaust air filter is reasonable and even mandatory for some applications. Safety Steam sterilisers should be manufactured in modern produc- tion facilities according to the most recent state-of-the-art technology. The Pressure Container Regulation makes it mandatory to check the following safety elements: • safety valve • pressure monitoring of the max. pressure • automatic door lock • safety thermostat for working space and heating elements Selection criteria • Which statutory regulations have to be met? Law on Genetic Engineering, Federal Epidemic Law, etc. • Are there any other regulations that have to be met? GLP, GMP, etc. • Available space (floor-mounted or table-top unit), which chamber volume is necessary (also for the next 1-2 years)? • Mode of use: sample preparation, liquids, highly infectious material (waste sterilisation) - equipped with exhaust air filter and/or thermo-lock... • Record keeping: integrated printer or software? • Calibration, validation, qualification – which requirements have to be met? • Structural conditions, power, fully desalinated water, dis- posal, etc. • Operational costs, follow-up costs or customer service? • Charging baskets or charging buckets? • Wheels for mobile use? Continued on next page 282

284

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization co d e b e w WWSCB003 Steam Sterilizers Laboratory Autoclaves, CertoClav 1 CertoClav Classic with thermostat control • Ideal for sterilization of unpacked solids without hollow bodies, bottles, instruments and synthetics • Robust construction • Simple operation • 2 temperature ranges • Thermostat control • Integrated timer • Precise processes and perfect results thanks to precision thermostat, control valve and precision manometer with drag indicator Scope of delivery incl. stable instrument plate with feet and minimum water level indicator, power cable Technical data: Ventilation: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: Max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: flow method stainless steel 316L 18 l 260 × 350 mm 125/140°C or 115/121°C 2,7 bar 1300 W, heating integrated in the floor 230 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE Article CertoClav Classic 125°C/140°C CertoClav Classic 115°C/121°C Accessories for CertoClav Classic with thermostat control Article Wire basket with handle (25 cm), stainless steel Service set 2 Exhaust steam tank (5 l) with tube (1.0 m) Exhaust steam tube (1.0 m) Distillation unit for water Order No. 10 22 60174 10 22 60184 Order No. 10 22 60149 10 22 60186 10 22 62020 10 22 62016 10 22 60482 CertoClav EL with thermostat control • Ideal for sterilization of unpacked solids without hollow bodies, bottles, instruments and synthetics • Robust construction • Simple to use • 2 temperature ranges • Thermostat control • High heating capacity • Precise processes and perfect results thanks to precision thermometer, control valve and precision manometer with drag indicator Scope of delivery incl. stable instrument plate with feet and minimum water level indicator, power cable Technical data: Ventilation: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: Max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: flow method 3103 aluminum 12 l or 18 l 240 × 260 mm resp. 240 × 390 mm 125/140°C or 115/121°C 2.7 bar 1900 W, heating integrated in the floor 230 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE 1 2 Article 2 CertoClav EL 12 125/140°C CertoClav EL 12 115/121°C 3 CertoClav EL 18 125/140°C CertoClav EL 18 115/121°C Accessories for CertoClav EL Article Wire basket with handle (23 cm), stainless steel Service set 1 Exhaust steam tank (5 l) with tube (1.0 m) Exhaust steam tube (1.0 m) Distillation unit for water co d e b e w Order No. 10 22 61312 10 22 61313 10 22 61318 10 22 61319 Order No. 10 22 68583 10 22 68599 10 22 62020 10 22 62016 10 22 60482 Continued on next page 3 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 283

285

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization 1 Steam Sterilizers CertoClav MultiControl • Ideal for material testing & quality control, sterilization of liquids and culture media • Microprocessor controlled • Automatic venting • Electronic process control with PT100 temperature sensor • Control unit with LCD display • Time and temperature can be selected individually • Multi-step programs only with PC software Professional version • RS232 port, USB Scope of delivery incl. stable instrument plate with feet and minimum water level indicator, power cable, MC2 control unit, PC software basic version Technical data: Ventilation: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: Max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: fractionated flow process 3103 aluminum 12 l 240 × 260 mm 20°C to 140°C, adjustable 2.7 bar 1900 W, heating integrated in the floor 230 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE Article CertoClav MultiControl 12 Accessories for CertoClav MultiControl ALU Article Wire basket with handle (23 cm), stainless steel Service set 1 Exhaust air filter (0.01 Mikron) Filter cartridge (0.01 Mikron) Exhaust steam tank (5 l) with tube (1.0 m) Exhaust steam tube (1.0 m) PC software Pro Log printer Distillation unit for water Order No. 10 22 62313 Order No. 10 22 68583 10 22 68599 10 22 62010 10 22 62011 10 22 62020 10 22 62016 10 22 60210 10 22 60187 10 22 60482 2 CertoClav MultiControl 2 • Ideal for material testing & quality control, sterilization of liquids and culture media • Microprocessor controlled • Automatic venting • Electronic process control with PT100 temperature sensor • Control unit with LCD display • Time and temperature can be selected individually • Multi-step programs only with Professional version of the PC software • RS232 port, USB, Ethernet, LAN, WiFi • 7 Inch tablet with video assistant Scope of delivery incl. stable instrument plate with feet and minimum water level indicator, MC2 control unit, power cable, PC software basic version Technical data: Ventilation: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: Max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: fractionated flow process stainless steel 316L 18 l 260 × 350 mm 20°C to 140°C, adjustable 2.7 bar 1300 W, heating integrated in the floor 230 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE Article CertoClav MultiControl 2 Accessories for CertoClav MultiControl 2 Article Wire basket with handle (25 cm), stainless steel Service set 2 Exhaust air filter (0.01 Mikron) Filter cartridge (0.01 Mikron) Exhaust steam tank (5 l) with tube (1.0 m) Exhaust steam tube (1.0 m) PC software Pro Log printer Distillation unit for water Order No. 10 22 60175 Order No. 10 22 60149 10 22 60186 10 22 62010 10 22 62011 10 22 62020 10 22 62016 10 22 60210 10 22 60187 10 22 60482 Continued on next page 1 2 284

286

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization 3 3 Steam Sterilizers CertoClav MultiControl 2 Touch • Ideal for material testing & quality control, sterilization of liquids and culture media • Microprocessor controlled • Automatic venting • Electronic process control with PT100 temperature sensor • Control unit with LCD display • Time and temperature can be selected individually • Multi-step programs only with Professional version of the PC software • RS232 port, USB, Ethernet, LAN, WiFi • 7 Inch tablet with video assistant • CertoCloud connection • Automatic documentation (GLP compliant) Scope of delivery incl. stable instrument plate with feet and minimum water level indicator, MC2 control unit, power cable, tablet, PC software basic version Technical data: Ventilation: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: Max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: fractionated flow process stainless steel 316L 18 l 260 × 350 mm 20°C to 140°C, adjustable 2.7 bar 1300 W, heating integrated in the floor 230 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE Article CertoClav MultiControl 2 Touch Accessories for CertoClav MultiControl 2 Touch Article Wire basket with handle (25 cm), stainless steel Service set 2 Exhaust air filter (0.01 Mikron) Filter cartridge (0.01 Mikron) Exhaust steam tank (5 l) with tube (1.0 m) Exhaust steam tube (1.0 m) PC software Pro CertoServer CertoCloud premium license Log printer Distillation unit for water Order No. 10 22 60298 Order No. 10 22 60149 10 22 60186 10 22 62010 10 22 62011 10 22 62020 10 22 62016 10 22 60210 10 22 60508 10 22 60212 10 22 60187 10 22 60482 4 CertoClav Connect • Ideal for material testing & quality control, sterilization of liquids and culture media • Fully automated • Automatic venting • Electric exhaust valve • Optional flexible media sensor (PT100) for autoclaving liquids • Control unit with LCD display • Time and temperature can be selected individually • Ethernet, LAN, WiFi • 7 Inch tablet with video assistant • CertoCloud connection • Automatic documentation (GLP compliant) • Electronic safety locking system Scope of delivery incl. stable instrument plate with feet and minimum water level indicator, tablet, interface boxpower cable Technical data: Ventilation: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: Max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: fractionated flow process stainless steel 316L 18 l 260 × 350 mm 20°C to 140°C, adjustable 2.7 bar 1300 W, heating integrated in the floor 230 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE Article CertoClav Connect Accessories for CertoClav Connect Article Wire basket with handle (25 cm), stainless steel Media sensor CertoServer CertoCloud premium license Order No. 10 22 60176 Order No. 10 22 60149 10 22 60185 10 22 60508 10 22 60212 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 285

287

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization co d e b e w WWSCB004 1 3 286 Steam Sterilizers Laboratory Autoclaves Vacuum Pro, CertoClav Vacuum Pro 12L & 22L • Stand-Alone device – no water connection necessary! • Ideal for sterilization of culture media in bottles and for material testing & quality control • 12 pre-installed programs, 1 of them user definable • Electric door locking system • Water quality sensor • Fast sterilization cycle incl. drying of about 20 minutes • Flexible media sensor (PT1000) • Vacuum pump Made in Germany • Integrated fresh and waste water tanks • Bacteria filter • 7 inch tablet • RS232, RS485, USB, SD card • Ethernet, LAN, WiFi • CertoCloud connection • Automatic documentation (GMP/GLP compliant) • Fully automatic repeat function • Connections for protocol printers, label printers and barcode scanners Scope of delivery incl. tray set with 3 trays, power cable, Quick Connect waste water hose, 7-inch tablet, interface box Technical data: Cooling system: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: Max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: air cooling stainless steel 316L 12 l or 22 l 200 × 360 mm resp. 250 × 450 mm 105°C to 134°C, adjustable 230 kPa 2400 W 220 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE Article 1 CertoClav Vac Pro 12 2 CertoClav Vac Pro 22 Order No. 10 22 60487 10 22 60489 Accessories for CertoClav Vacuum Pro 12L & 22L 2 Article Trays for CertoClav 12 Vac Pro Trays for CertoClav 22 Vac Pro SET wire basket & drip tray for Vac Pro 12 SET wire basket & drip tray for Vac Pro 22 Service Set 3 Bacteria filter Log printer Label printer Barcode reader Distillation unit for water Order No. 10 22 60479 10 22 60481 10 22 60408 10 22 60410 10 22 60495 10 22 60705 10 22 60187 10 22 60502 10 22 60503 10 22 60482 CertoClav Vacuum Pro 45 • Stand-Alone device – no water connection necessary! • Ideal for sterilization of culture media in bottles and for material testing & quality control • 8 pre-installed programs, 1 of them user definable • Electric door locking system • Water quality sensor • Flexible media sensor (PT1000) • Vacuum pump Made in Germany • Integrated fresh and waste water tanks • Bacteria filter • 7 inch tablet • RS232, RS485, USB, SD card • Ethernet, LAN, WiFi • CertoCloud connection • Automatic documentation (GMP/GLP compliant) • Fully automatic repeat function • Connections for protocol printers, label printers and barcode scanners Scope of delivery incl. tray set with 3 trays, power cable, Quick Connect waste water hose, 7-inch tablet, interface box Continued on next page

288

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Steam Sterilizers Technical data: Cooling system: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: Max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: Air cooling stainless steel 316L 45 l 319 × 617 mmx 105°C to 134°C, adjustable 230 kPa 2400 W 220 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE Article 3 CertoClav Vacuum Pro 45 Accessories for CertoClav Vacuum Pro 45 Article Trays for CertoClav 45 Vac Pro SET wire basket & drip tray for Vac Pro 45 Service Set 5 Log printer Label printer Barcode reader Distillation unit for water Order No. 10 22 60610 Order No. 10 22 60404 10 22 60411 10 22 60407 10 22 60187 10 22 60502 10 22 60503 10 22 60482 Laboratory Autoclaves CertoClav Cibus, CertoClav co d e b e w WWSCB006 CertoClav Cibus • Ideal for sterilization of culture media, demineralized water in closed bottles, food, bev- erages and sealed containers • Fully automatic • Flexible media sensor (PT100 temperature sensor) • Time and temperature can be selected individually • Active rapid cooling • Support pressure • Ethernet, LAN, WiFi • 7 Inch tablet with video assistant • CertoCloud connection • Automatic documentation (GLP compliant) Scope of delivery incl. stable instrument plate with feet and minimum water level indicator, tablet, power cable Technical data: Ventilation: Chamber material: Chamber volume: Chamber diameter/depth: Operating temperature: max. operating pressure: Heating capacity: Power supply: Certificate: fractionated flow process stainless steel 316L 18 l 260 × 350 mm 25°C to 140°C, adjustable 2.7 bar 1300 W, heating integrated in the floor 230 V ±10%/50 – 60 Hz CE Article CertoClav Cibus Order No. 10 22 61185 Autoclaves / Steam Sterilizers, HMC Vertical and table-top autoclaves for microbiological tasks: High safety standards and low life cycle costs, convenient and easy to use. You will be provided with detailed safety instructions, for After-sales support is very important to us. Therefore we also bring the autoclave into service and offer service contracts. co d e b e w WWPKJ005 Premium vertical autoclaves of the HG-Series – fulfilling highest demands regar- ding performance and comfort Intuitive operation and enhanced operating comfort with premium user protection. Features at a glance: • Certified according to the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU • Available in 4 sizes with 50, 80, 113 and 130 litres of effective usable volume • Innovative locking system with motorized lid including pressure and temperature moni- toring • Steam generation in the chamber • High energy efficiency and long service life • Rapid cooling for short cooling times • Optionally available with flexible temperature sensor for the sterilization of liquids • Timer function and 4 program groups with 3 subgroups each, including night and pres- sure cooker program, adaptations for customized programs are always possible co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 287 Continued on next page

289

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization 3 2 4 1 Steam Sterilizers • Coasters ensure mobility of the unit • Easy-to-clean plastic surface with rounded corners at contact points (avoids burns and • Electrical, mechanical and constructional factors guarantee the highest level of quality • Does not require any water/waste water installations, except with automatic water sup- concussions) and user protection ply (models HGS and HGD) • With our wide range of accessories from the printer to the media temperature sensor, we can customise our autoclaves to your needs Autoclaves of the HG series with special equipment: HGS autoclaves with integrated steam generator • 113 or 133 litres of effective usable volume • Extremely short heating times due to highly efficient steam generator directly at the chamber • Dynamic multi-directional steam inlet ensures that steam is permanently available • Preheating program • Segmented jacket heating • No heating elements in the boiler • Pyrolytic self-cleaning program • Insulation jacket • Rapid water recooling as a standard • Automatic water infeed and automatic drain HGD autoclaves with steam generator (s. HGS) and additional vacuum pump, directly coupled to boiler • 113 or 133 litres of effective usable volume • Extremely short heating times due to highly efficient steam generator directly at the chamber (s. HGS) • Pre- and drying vacuum for the sterilisation of fabrics, hollow components, tubes, bot- tles, pipettes, glass vessels, all open-pore materials, mixing fractions in garbage bags or filters • Powerful water ring pump (vacuum) saves time and ensures highest level of efficiency HG series, electrical heated directly in the chamber, with rapid cooling system 2 1 Type Chamber volume Useful volume Chamber dim. Ø×H mm 364×482 Outer dim. W×D×H mm 455×691×890 455×691×1030 686×870×930 Space required HG 133 152.2 129 500×656 686×870×1034 465×970×1250 465×970×1390 700×1150×1350 700×1150×1450 HG 113 131.7 108 500×552 HG 80 85.1 76 364×730 HG 50 l 60 l 50.2 3 4 mm W×D×H Weight Power Voltage Working temperature °C 60 – 135 Max. working pressure kg 62 kW 3 2.5 V AC 230/240 bar 73 3.8 AC 230/240 60 – 135 2.5 137 5.8 AC 400 60 – 135 2.5 145 5.8 AC 400 60 – 135 2.5 Documentation Order No. Carriage on request Integrated printer/RS232/ USB (optional) 10 60 52101 Integrated printer/RS232/ USB (optional) 10 60 52102 Integrated print- er/ USB (optional) 10 60 52103 Integrated print- er/ USB (optional) 10 60 52104 HGS series with steam generator and water-cooling Type Chamber volume Useful volume Chamber dim. Ø×H mm 500×576 Outer dim. W×D×H mm 686×870×930 Space required HGS 113 l 131.7 l 113 700×1150×1350 mm W×D×H Weight Power Voltage V AC 400 Working temperature °C 60 – 135 Max. working pressure kg 153 kW 6.8 2.5 bar HGS 133 153.4 133 500×680 686×870×1034 700×1150×1450 161 7.1 AC 400 60 – 135 2.5 Documentation Order No. Carriage on request Integrated printer/ USB (optional) 10 60 52105 Integrated printer/ USB (optional) 10 60 52106 Continued on next page 288

290

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Steam Sterilizers HGD series with vacuum, steam generator and water-cooling Type Chamber volume Useful volume Chamber dim. Ø×H mm 500×576 Outer dim. W×D×H mm 686×870×930 Space required HGD 113 l 131.7 l 113 700×1150×1350 HGD 133 153.4 133 500×680 686×870×1034 700×1150×1450 192 7.1 AC 400 60 – 135 2.5 5 6 mm W×D×H Weight Power Voltage V AC 400 Working temperature °C 60 – 135 Max. working pressure kg 184 kW 6.8 2.5 bar Documentation Order No. Carriage on request Integrated printer/ USB (optional) 10 60 52107 Integrated printer/ USB (optional) 10 60 52108 Options and accessories Article Flexible thermo couple Modular printer Exhaust air filter 5 Lifting device Automatic water supply HG 50 Automatic water supply HG 80 Automatic water supply HG 113/133 GLP Set (printer and exhaust air filter) Validation connection Process documentation SEGO® Soft, 1 license Process documentation SegoSoft®, fully automated documen- tation, data output in graphic or table form, digital preservation in PDF/A1 format with advanced digitale signature Matching loading baskets and buckets available on request. Order No. 10 60 55101 10 60 55116 10 60 55111 10 60 55135 10 60 55112 10 60 55113 10 60 55136 10 60 55130 10 60 55180 10 60 55030 6 Loading baskets / loading buckets Article Inner Ø mm 345 HG 50/80 Loading basket 345 HG 50/80 Loading basket with collecting tub 345 HG 80 Loading basket 345 HG 80 Loading basket with collecting tub 345 HG 50/80 Double basket with tub 345 HG 80 Triple basket with collecting tub 345 HG 50-80 Bucket with hole 345 HG 50-80 Bucket without hole 340 HG 50-80 Bucket without hole (21 litres) 480 HG 113/133 Basket A (small) 480 HG 113/133 Basket A (small) with collecting tub 480 HG 113/133 Basket B (medium) HG 113/133 Basket B (medium) with collecting tub 480 480 HG 113/133 Basket C (tall) 480 HG 113/133 Basket C (tall) with collecting tub HG 113/133 Bucket 490 490 HG 113/133 Bucket with lid Inner height mm 235 235 315 315 460 700 190 190 306 235 235 275 275 325 325 340 340 Order No. 10 60 55109 10 60 55110 10 60 55118 10 60 55123 10 60 55105 10 60 55134 10 60 55107 10 60 55108 10 60 55106 10 60 55124 10 60 55125 10 60 55126 10 60 55127 10 60 55132 10 60 55133 10 60 55128 10 60 55129 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 289

291

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization co d e b e w WWPKJ001 1 290 Steam Sterilizers Steam Sterilizers, HMC Vertical steam sterilizers HV series Easy to use, long service life, premium user protection Features at a glance • Certified according to the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU • Available in 4 sizes with 25, 50, 85 and 110 litres of effective usable volume • Simple, reliable and with a long service life, your perfect choice for standard tasks • Optionally available with flexible temperature sensor for the sterilization of liquids • For all devices up to 110 litres, only a single-phase power supply (220/240 V; 50/60 Hz) is required • Timer function and 3 program groups, maximum 6 programs including pressure cooker program, adaptations for customized programs are always possible • Does not require any water/waste water installations • Coasters ensure mobility of the unit • Easy-to-clean plastic surface with rounded corners at contact points (avoids burns and concussions) user protection • Electrical, mechanical and design factors guarantee the highest level of quality and • With our wide range of accessories from the printer to the media temperature sensor, we can customise our autoclaves to your needs HV 25 l 28 l 25 Type HV 50 54.2 Chamber volume 50 Useful volume 300 × 710 Chamber dim. Ø×H mm 240 × 550 540×530×1040 660×650×1000 660×650×1180 Ou. dimen. W×D×H mm 480×460×950 Space requ. W×D×H mm 495×750×1250 560×810×1400 680×930×1450 680×930×1650 Weight Power Voltage Working temperature °C 60 – 126 Max. working press. bar 1.4 Documentation HV 85 98.8 85 420 × 615 HV 110 123.7 110 420 × 795 kg 41 kW 1.5 V 1.5 57 2.0 2.0 60 – 135 2.2 Integr. printer/ USB (optional) 48 60 20001 71 3.0 3.0 60 – 128 1.6 Integr. printer/ USB (optional) 48 60 20002 81 4.0 4.0 60 – 123 1.2 Integr. printer/ USB (optional) 48 60 20003 Integr. printer/ USB (optional) 48 60 20000 Order No. Carriage on request Options and accessories Article Flexible thermo couple, media probe Built-in printer Air cooling Exhaust air filter for sterilisation Automatic feed water GLP package, with built-in printer and exhaust air filter Lifting gear Process documentation SEGO® Soft, 1 license Process documentation SegoSoft®, fully automated documen- tation, data output in graphic or table form, digital preservation in PDF/A1 format with advanced digitale signature Order No. 48 60 50001 48 60 50003 48 60 50002 48 60 50004 10 60 50017 48 60 50021 10 60 55032 10 60 55030 1 Loading baskets / tubs Article HV 25 loading basket HV 25 loading basket with collecting tub HV 25 loading basket tall with collecting tub HV 50 loading basket HV 50 loading basket with collecting tub HV 50 loading basket tall with collecting tub HV 85 loading basket HV 85 loading basket with collecting tub HV 85/110 loading basket tall with collecting tub HV 110 loading basket HV 110 loading basket with collecting tub HV 25 loading bucket HV 50 loading bucket HV 85 loading bucket, without holes HV 85 loading bucket, 1 row of holes HV 110 loading bucket, without holes HV 110 loading bucket, 2 rows of holes Inner Ø mm 210 210 210 270 270 270 382 382 382 382 382 210 270 390 390 390 390 Inner height mm 255 255 420 215 215 600 278 278 600 373 373 255 220 284 284 372 372 Order No. 48 60 50006 48 60 50027 10 60 50058 48 60 50007 48 60 50028 10 60 50057 48 60 50008 48 60 50029 10 60 50061 48 60 50009 48 60 50030 48 60 50010 48 60 50011 10 60 50012 48 60 50012 10 60 50060 48 60 50013

292

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Steam Sterilizers Steam Sterilizers, HMC Steam sterilizers HMT series Table-top autoclaves – space-saving and convenient Designed for sterilising all heat resistant laboratory instruments if they are suitable for sterilization: B-series autoclaves, e.g. our HMT 260/300 MB with vacuum, drying function and printer HMT 260/300 MB - Premium table-top autoclave: • Certified to 93/42/EEC • Available in 2 sizes with a volume of 24 or 40 litres • Powerful integrated vacuum pump, an essential feature for sterilizing hollow compo- nents • 5 sterilisation programs, fully automatic: Sterilisation of wrapped items: 121°C – 30 min.; 134°C – 15 min. Sterilisation of unwrapped items: 121°C – 15 min.; 134°C – 4 min. Individual temperature selection from 105° – 135 °C Preset prion program • 3 test programs: leakage test, helix test, Bowie-Dick test • Controlled by a microprocessor • Very easy operation with a LCD display • Documentation / data storage via SD card and printer • Drying program, 1 – 60 minutes • 4 litres water tank, to be filled manually or automatically (deionised water) • Modern design, easy maintenance Designed for sterilising instruments of simple design: S-series autoclaves HMT 230/260 FA or 230/260/300 MA. HMT 230/260 FA - for standard tasks: • Certified to 93/42/EEC • Available in 2 sizes with a volume of 16 or 24 litres • 9 sterilisation programs, fully automatic: 121°C – wrapped / unwrapped solid items; with or without drying 135°C – wrapped / unwrapped solid items; with or without drying Liquid program: 121°C, 40 min. • Controlled by a microprocessor • Simple digital display • Water tank • Electromechanical overheating protection • Pressure relief valve • Safety valve • Mechanical pressure-dependent door lock • Reset/emergency button • Easy maintenance Versatile table-top autoclave: HMT 230/260/300 MA • Certified to 93/42/EEC • Available in 3 sizes with a volume of 16, 24 or 40 litres • Powerful integrated vacuum pump, an essential feature for sterilising hollow compo- co d e b e w WWPKJ004 1 nents • 7 sterilization programs, fully automatic: 121°C – wrapped / unwrapped (vacuum) 134°C – wrapped / unwrapped (vacuum) Liquid and prion programs Bowie-Dick test • Controlled by a microprocessor • Progress indicator • Internal water tank • Electromechanical overheating protection • Electronic overpressure protection • Pressure safety valve • Mechanical pressure-dependent door lock • Reset/emergency button • Easy maintenance HMT 230 FA l 16 Type Chamber volume Chamber dim. Ø×H mm 230×410 Out. dimens. W×D×H mm 522×594×410 Weight Power Voltage Water tank Working temperature Max. working pressure bar 2.1 Documentation V AC 220/240 l 4.2 kg 43 kW 1.9 °C 121 or 135 Recorder1) (SD-card)/USB 10 60 52204 Order No. 1) On request Carriage on request co d e b e w 2 2 HMT 230 MA 16 230×410 522×594×410 44 2.0 AC 220/240 4.2 121 or 135 2.1 Recorder1) (SD-card)/USB 10 60 52202 HMT 260 MA 24 260×450 533×655×442 54 2.8 AC 220/240 4.2 121 or 135 2.1 Recorder1) (SD-card)/USB 10 60 52203 HMT 300 MA 40 300×570 620×900×489 68 3.2 AC 220/240 4.2 121 or 135 2.1 Recorder1) (SD-card)/USB 10 60 52212 87 2.7 40 300×570 HMT 260 MB HMT 300 MB 24 260×450 533×655×442 620×766×489 59 2.7 AC 220/240 AC 220/240 4.2 105 – 135 2.1 Printer, SD-card 10 60 52214 10 60 52221 4.2 105 – 135 2.1 Printer, SD-card 1 HMT 260 FA 24 260×450 533×655×442 51 2.4 AC 220/240 4.2 121 or 135 2.1 Recorder1) (SD-card)/USB 10 60 52205 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 291 Continued on next page

293

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Steam Sterilizers Accessories Article Spiral holder 1 Sterilisation boxes Insertion with lid, side panel with lockable perforation. for Length × Width × Height mm 345 × 183 × 130 375 × 215 × 135 500 × 205 × 185 Order No. 10 60 55210 Order No. 10 60 55212 10 60 55217 10 60 55239 co d e b e w WWT3F001 1 2 292 HMT 230 FA/MA HMT 260 FA/MA/MB HMT 300 MA/MB Baskets for HMT 230 FA/MA HMT 260 FA/MA/MB HMT 300 MA/MB HMT 230 FA/MA HMT 260 FA/MA/MB HMT 300 MA/MB Length × Width × Height mm 340 × 180 × 120 370 × 220 × 120 500 × 245 × 160 Order No. 10 60 55236 10 60 55237 10 60 55238 2 Tray frame sets Consisting of a shelf with trays or grids and tray pulling holder. for Length × Width × Height mm 330 × 225 (max.) × 192 (max.) 390 × 250 (max.) × 205 (max.) 550 × 290 (max.) × 245 (max.) Order No. 10 60 55224 10 60 55225 10 60 52054 Steam Sterilizers, SHP Steriltechnik Steam Sterilizer LABOKLAV 25 The compact table top unit with a huge capacity and the performance of a big au- toclave. No feed water or waste water connection required, ven with fast recoolng, just plug it in and start Configuration Basic unit: • 25 l useable chamber volume, table top unit • Chamber size 275 mm diameter and 465 mm length • Up to 5 × 1 l laboratory flasks • Up to 5 kg instruments or waste • Max. permiseable pressure 2.8/-1 bar • Sterilisation temperature 98°C to 135°C • Integrated steam generator • Automatic feed water pump • Motorized quick closing system • Chamber lid made from safety glass with illuminated vision area • Front cover from safety glass with colored illumination (LED) • Thermo locking acc. DIN EN (IEC) 61010-2-40 with flexible media temperature sensor • Fully automated control by up to 10 programmes • All programmes can be individualized and code protected • Integrated feed water tank and condensate tank • RS 485 interface • Internal 4 MB memory chip, stores cycle data of approx. 150 cycles • Validation duct prepared • Heating power 2.0 kW, 230 V Z, 16 A Available options: Fast recooling (air cooling) Vacuum system (single and fractionated pre vacuum, drying vacuum) Combination of cooling and vacuum Technical specifications: Outer dimensions: Dimensions (W×H×D): Required table space: Loading: Instrument or waste: Laboratory flasks, 1 l: Electrical connections: Power connection: Max. power requirements: Average consumtion per cycle: 440 × 540 × 660 mm 440 × 550 mm + 110 mm door overhang 230 V, 50 Hz, 16 A 3350 W 0.75 kW/h max. 5 kg max. 5 Pieces integrated fast cooling system (air cooling) Article Steam Sterilizer LABOKLAV 25 B Basic unit for the sterilisation of liquids, solids and waste Steam Sterilizer LABOKLAV 25 M Steam Sterilizer LABOKLAV 25 V Steam Sterilizer LABOKLAV 25 MV vacuum system and fast cooling system Transport, packing, assembly, introduction LABOKLAV 25 integrated vacuum system (optional) Order No. 10 16 02510 10 16 02511 10 16 02514 10 16 02515 10 16 02599 Continued on next page

294

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Order No. 10 16 03020 10 16 02501 Steam Sterilizers Accessories Article Batch printer for the documentation of all relevant parameters, real paper printer, stored data can be printed out at a later stage Air filtration As the unit is equipped with an air filtration, it is appropriate for use in areas with protection/safety class 2 or higher. Steam Sterilizers, SHP Steriltechnik co d e b e w WWT3F002 Steam Sterilizer LABOKLAV 55 – 195 Installation of the unit as either front- or top loader possible. When set up as front loader the units are stackable. Integrated, separate and powerful steam generator for shorter cycle times. Low in energy consumption due to optimized size of steam generator in relation to cham- ber volume. Steam sterilizer fort he universal use in the laboratory, in full compliance with • DIN 58950 (pharmaceutical applications) • DIN 58951 (laboratory applications) • Pressure Device Directive 2014/68 EU • IEC 61010 – 2 - 40 (Thermo locking device) LABOKLAV 55 – 195 Basic unit with 55, 80, 100, 135, 160 and 195 Litre chamber volume, Useable as either front- or top loader • max. permissible pressure 2,8/-1 bar • sterilization temperature 98 °C to 135 °C • TÜV tested motor-driven safety quick-action lock with lip seal • separate integrated latest-generation steam generator with new technology of 4, 6 or 10 kW heating capacity, according to the chamber volume • integrated storage tank for fully demineralized water for steam generation (for automat- ic or manual filling), level monitoring function • thermo-lock pursuant to TRB 402 and DIN 61010-2-40 • flexible PT100 reference sensor for fluid sterilization (time triggered via media tempera- ture) • gravitation ventilation and pressure change ventilation (waste sterilization) • integrated evaporation condensation, water-cooled, temperature-controlled, adjustable • validation adapters • internal memory chip for storing up to 150 cycles (may be read out later) • RS484 interface for data transmission • collective connection to drain pipe • floor support inside • timer function • housing made of powder-coated steel. Choose between 3 color combinations: blue/ light gray, emerald/light gray, purple/light gray • automatic feed water pump • microprocessor control with 20 pre-assigned programs • individual assignment of all program slots by the user • V4A stainless steel pressure vessel (stainless steel 1.4404 or SS 316L) • units with full double jacket made of stainless steel from version M or V • easy operation • code protected access levels • safety chains for a safe state of the unit • several cycle data can be documented Fast Cooling of liquids All units can be supplied with different cooling versions as an option. The cooling time can be reduced dramatically between 50 and 80%. Main feature to achieve short cooling cycles is the double jacket. VE-Water is pumped through the double jacket during cooling, the full contact surface of the chamber ensures a fast heat transfer into the cooling media. No valuable demineralised cooling water is wasted. The cooling water is fed back into the integrated tank and is reused for the next cycle. Automatic cooling of the VE-Water by means of tap water (heat exchange precept). Vacuum A powerful watering vacuum pump guarantees a fast and secure deaeration of the steri- lisation goods Fractionated or single pre-vacuum programmes are integrated. If ordered with vacuum system vacuum drying is a standard feature. During the drying vacuum hot steam is pulsed through the double jacket to support the drying process. Basic integrated fast coolling integrated fast recooling with counter pressure integrated fast recooling with counter pressure and additional fan Vacuum system Vacuum system, integrated fast recooling Available variants of LABOKLAV 55 – 195 B: M: MS: MSL: V: MV: MSV: Vacuum system, integrated fast recooling with counter pressure MSLV: Vacuum system, integrated fast recooling with counter pressure and additional fan co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 293 Continued on next page

295

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization 80 Cham- ber- vol. l 55 Installation space vertical unit D×W×H1) (Horizontal unit W×H×D) mm Steam Sterilizers Chamber- Type dimen- sions (Ø × T) mm 410×460 740×765×600 (740×600×765) 410×610 740×915×600 (740×600×915) 410×760 740×1065×600 (740×600×1065) Laboklav 55 Laboklav 80 Laboklav 100 Laboklav 135 Laboklav 160 Laboklav 195 Technical changes alloed 1)Total height, loading height less 90 mm 2)Front loading approx. 15% less 510×660 840×965×700 (840×700×965) 510×760 840×1065×700 (840×700×1065) 510×990 840×1215×700 (840×700×1215) 100 135 160 195 Loading capacity2) Electr. requirements Steam genera- tor approx. 9×1 l Schott approx. 18×1 l Schott approx. 27×1 l Schott approx. 30×1 l Schott approx. 45×1 l Schott approx. 45×1 l Schott 4 kW 3N 400V~16A (1N 230V~36A) 4 kW 3N 400V~16A (1N 230V~36A) 6 kW 3N 400V~16A (1N 230V~36A) 10 kW 3N 400V~16A (1N 230V~36A) 10 kW 3N 400V~16A (1N 230V~36A) 10 kW 3N 400V~16A (1N 230V~36A) Order No. 10 16 05510 10 16 05511 10 16 05512 10 16 05513 10 16 05514 10 16 05515 10 16 05516 10 16 05517 10 16 08010 10 16 08011 10 16 08012 10 16 08013 10 16 08014 10 16 08015 10 16 08016 10 16 08017 10 16 01000 10 16 01001 10 16 01002 10 16 01003 10 16 01004 10 16 01005 10 16 01006 10 16 01007 Type 55 B 55 M 55 MS 55 MSL 55 V 55 MV 55 MSV 55 MSLV 80 B 80 M 80 MS 80 MSL 80 V 80 MV 80 MSV 80 MSLV 100 B 100 M 100 MS 100 MSL 100 V 100 MV 100 MSV 100 MSLV Accessories Type 135 B 135 M 135 MS 135 MSL 135 V 135 MV 135 MSV 135 MSLV 160 B 160 M 160 MS 160 MSL 160 V 160 MV 160 MSV 160 MSLV 195 B 195 M 195 MS 195 MSL 195 V 195 MV 195 MSV 195 MSLV Article Printer for LABOKLAV 55 – 195 Integrated printer for the documentation of all relevant prozcess parameters, real paper printer, stored data can be printed out at a later stage Touchdisplay • Operation possible via touch panel or integrated keypad • Documentation available as pdf files via integrated USB port (includes all relevant information such as process and batch data, error messages as well as a graphical analysis which are all combined into a single file protocol for each run) • Internal memory saves up to 15.000 cycles • Network access via LAN to remotely view live data of the process. • Remote maintenance option for safety laboratories BSL 2 and 3 Exhaust air filtration Loading system for LABOKLAV 135/160 Comprises the trolley and the loading slide Loading system for LABOKLAV 195 Comprises the trolley and the loading slide Lifting device for loading and unloading the LABOKLAV 135 - Order No. 10 16 01350 10 16 01351 10 16 01352 10 16 01353 10 16 01354 10 16 01355 10 16 01356 10 16 01357 10 16 01600 10 16 01601 10 16 01602 10 16 01603 10 16 01604 10 16 01605 10 16 01606 10 16 01607 10 16 01950 10 16 01951 10 16 01952 10 16 01953 10 16 01954 10 16 01955 10 16 01956 10 16 01957 Order No. 10 16 02030 10 16 02090 10 16 02010 10 16 00160 10 16 00195 10 16 02040 195 with swivel arm, for loading and unloading heavy material Buckets an baskets made of stainless steel on request 294

296

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization co d e b e w WWQMA002 Steam Sterilizers Horizontal Front-loading Table Top Autoclaves Systec D-Series, Systec Specially designed for the requirements in laboratories, these autoclaves make steriliza- tion processes safe, accurate, reproducible and validatable. Three model ranges with different performance Systec DX For all laboratory applications, including sophisticated state-of-the-art sterilization pro- cesses. With numerous options for validatable sterilization. Systec DE For basic laboratory applications. With limited options for process optimization. Systec DB For simple process applications. No options available for process optimization. Technical data: External dimen. H×W×D in mm Chamber volume in l total / nominal Chamber di- men. Ø×depth in mm 344 × 500 400 × 500 400 × 700 500 × 500 500 × 750 500 × 1000 Heating cap. DE/DB-series kW 3.7 D-45 3.7 D-65 5.5 D-90 3.7 D-100 5.5 D-150 5.5 D-200 Electrical connections for Systec D-23 and D-45: 220 – 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 16 A. Electrical connections for Systec D-65 to D-200: 380 – 400 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 16 A. Other voltages and single-phase available on request. Country-specific deviations are possible. Heating cap. DX-series kW 585×620×755 3.5 630×750×770 9.0 630×750×970 9.0 730×850×805 9.0 730×850×1055 9.0 730×850×1305 9.0 50 / 45 70 / 65 95 / 90 113 / 100 162 / 150 211 / 200 Systec DX Systec DE Systec DB Up to 251) Standard Features Integrated, separate steam generator Internal heating elements within the autoclave chamber Housing, support frame and pressure vessel made of corrosion-resistant stainless steel Temperature and pressure range 140°C, 4 bar (except for Systec D-23) LCD display and fully automatic microprocessor control Number of sterilization programs (Systec DB incl. cleaning program) Code-secured access rights for changing parameters and further safety-relevant intervention Internal memory for storing up to 10 sterilization cycles Timer for starting programs Autofill: automatic demineralized water feed for steam generation Flexible PT-100 temperature sensor Additional temperature sensor in condense exhaust Temperature holding function for liquids after program finish Special program for Durham tubes Calculation of F0 value Special program for waste sterilization with pulsed heat-up for more efficient air exhaust Water-cooled steam exhaust, thermostatically controlled Programmable automatic door-opening on completion of program RS-232 interfaces for external data transmission (network-compatible via adapter) Available options Extension of temperature and pressure ranges to 150 °C / 5 bar (from chamber volume 65 liters and more) Options for process optimization Rapid cooling for efficient and safe cooling of liquids Vacuum system for validatable sterilization of solids and waste materials in disposal bags Superdry: for drying solids (only in combination with optional vacuum system) Exhaust filtration (including condensate inactivation) for safe sterilization of hazardous biological substances Options for documentation Integrated printer for batch documentation Systec ADS documentation software package for comprehensive documentation Data storage on SD card for up to 10,000 sterilization cycles and transmission of data to a PC Systec autoclaves are delivered ready for subsequent installation of all options. Further options and special programs as well as baskets and inserts, transport and loading systems on request. 1) On request • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • + + + + + + + + • • • • 12 • • • • • • • • • • • • + + + + + + • • • • 4 • • + Type Systec DX-45 Systec DE-45 Systec DB-45 Systec DX-65 Systec DE-65 Systec DB-65 Systec DX-90 Systec DE-90 Systec DB-90 Order No. 10 12 91945 10 12 91545 10 12 91910 10 12 92065 10 12 91565 10 12 91920 10 12 92090 10 12 91590 10 12 91930 Type Systec DX-100 Systec DE-100 Systec DB-100 Systec DX-150 Systec DE-150 Systec DB-150 Systec DX-200 Systec DE-200 Systec DB-200 Order No. 10 12 92100 10 12 91600 10 12 91940 10 12 92150 10 12 91650 10 12 91950 10 12 92201 10 12 91700 10 12 91960 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 295

297

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization co d e b e w WWQMA004 1 296 Steam Sterilizers Horizontal Pass-through and Floor-standing Autoclaves, Systec H series, Systec STANDARD FEATURES for Systec H series / Systec H series 2D • Integrated steam generator with AutoFill for automatic supply of demineralised water • Housing and carrying structure made of corrosion-resistant stainless steel (AISI 304) • Pressure vessel made of pharmaceutical stainless steel (AISI 316) • All fittings and valves in the supply lines (from media connection to sterilisation chamber) for demineralised water, steam or compressed air are made of stainless steel. All pipe- lines made of FDA-certified PTFE. • Annular door locking system for extended security • Flexible PT-100 temperature sensor for monitoring the temperature in the sterilisation chamber or in a reference vessel • Temperature and pressure range up to 140°C/4 bar • Additional PT-100 sensor in the condensate outlet for temperature control at the coldest • Water-cooled steam exhaust, thermostatically controlled, to protect the autoclave from place in the autoclav heat cess time by up to 25% in every detail • Extended HMI and PLC with touchscreen control • Optimised HMI for faster navigation/adjustment of processes & settings • Newly developed software for the entire autoclave system (PLC) reduces the total pro- • Up to 100 sterilisation programmes can be added, disabled, or adapted by the operator • Secure access control for adjustment of programmes and parameters • Timer for time-controlled start of sterilisation processes • F0 value can be calculated individually for all liquid programmes • Individual activation of temperature holding function for liquids after end of programme • Special programme for waste sterilisation for fractional heating for more efficient release of air from waste bags (in the absence of the optional vacuum system) • Individual entry of batch information before start of process • Thanks to the extended internal memory, documentation files can be saved for at least 10 years a USB flash drive. • Via the USB connection, documentation files can be downloaded from the autoclav to • All documentation data can be collected directly from the autoclav in PDF and/or CSV file format (MS Excel). Reading the documentation data does not require installation of any proprietary software on a PC. • Complete backup of the autoclav control on a USB stick, including all individual settings • Ethernet interface for connecting the autoclav to a computer network • Time synchronisation with time servers. Internet connection required. • Remote service function. Requires Internet connection and authorisation by the operat- ing company • Systec can adjust all the settings in-house and save them to a configuration file on a USB flash drive for easy and convenient implementation of new configurations by the customer. OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS • Extended temperature and pressure range of up to 150 °C/5 bar • Optionally, up to 5 additional flexible PT-100 temperature sensors are available, each of which can be configured individually. • Extended user control – up to 100 users and groups can be generated. All users or groups can use the same program list, or a single program list with individual pro- grammes and settings. • Personalised electronic certificates for electronic transfer of documentation files • Save to folder: automatic data transfer (via FTP/SFTP) from documentation data. When 21 CFR Part 11 is ordered, AuditTrail data is saved to predefined files on a network drive (server, PC, or other network-based memory devices) FDA 21 CFR Part 11 package (onboard) • All documentation data can be downloaded via a USB flashdrive in PDF and/or CSV file format (MS Excel). The PDF and the CSV files have an electronic signature related to the autoclav which generated the files; it indicates whether the data is valid (i.e. no manip- ulation). Any manipulation will render the files immediately invalid, which is directly indi- cated in the respective electronic signature. • Extended user control – up to 100 users and groups can be generated. All users or groups can use the same program list, or a single program list with individual pro- grammes and settings. Furthermore, every user can be assigned roles (e.g. user, oper- ator, supervisor, administrator, etc.). • Includes the AuditTrail for following up and recording all measures, adjustments and alarms sorted by date, time, and user • Comprises up to five fields for electronic signing of the PDF and/or CSV files on a PC (or other device) capable of executing a PDF or CSV viewer and processing electronic signatures OTHER OPTIONS • FAT / SAT, IQ, OQ and PQ (validation) with extensive GMP-/GLP-compliant documenta- tion available on request • Special programmes such as steam/air mix, pharmacopoeia programmes (1) Test pro- gramm,e for hydrolytic resistence of glassware (European Pharmacopoeia chapter 3.2.1) and United States Pharmacopoeia (USP <660>) 2) Pursuant to chapter 3.2.9 of the European Pharmacopoeia and USP <381>, for testing rubber caps for pharmaceutical jars etc.) and material test programmes are available on request • Customer-specific process evaluation, design and development are available on request Continued on next page

298

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Steam Sterilizers 1 Horizontal Floor-standing Autoclaves, Systec H-Series Specially designed for the requirements in laboratories, these autoclaves make steriliza- tion processes safe, accurate, reproducible and validatable. Autoclaves of the performance category HX can be used for all laboratory applications, even for sophisticated sterilization processes. All additional optional accessories can be fitted to obtain validatable processes. In spite of the high loading capacity, these autoclaves are compact and have a compar- atively low weight. Type Useful space Ø × depth mm 400×500 HX-65 400×750 HX-90 500×500 HX-100 500×750 HX-150 500×1000 HX-200 740×500 HX-210 740×750 HX-320 740×1000 HX-430 740×1250 HX-540 740×1500 HX-650 1000×750 HX-580 1000×1000 HX-780 HX-980 1000×1250 HX-1180 1000×1500 HX-1380 1000×1750 HX-1580 1000×2000 Useful volume total / nominal l 70 / 65 105 / 90 115 / 100 165 / 150 215 / 200 280 / 210 385 / 320 495 / 430 600 / 540 710 / 650 750 / 580 930 / 780 1130 / 980 1325 / 1180 1520 / 1380 1715 / 1580 Net H × W × D weight kg mm 220 1610×704×865 300 1610×704×1065 350 1710×804×900 400 1710×804×1150 450 1710×804×1400 600 1865×944×980 670 1865×944×1230 740 1865×944×1480 810 1865×944×1730 1865×944×1980 880 2025×1269×1340 950 2025×1269×1590 1050 2025×1269×1840 1150 2025×1269×2090 1250 2025×1269×2340 1350 2025×1269×2590 1450 Order No. 10 12 92212 10 12 92213 10 12 92214 10 12 92215 10 12 92216 10 12 92220 10 12 92230 10 12 92240 10 12 92250 10 12 92260 10 12 92270 10 12 92280 10 12 92290 10 12 92300 10 12 92310 10 12 92320 Electrical connections for the Systec HX-65 to HX-200: 380 – 400 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 16 A. Electrical connections for the Systec HX-210 to HX-1580: 380 – 400 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 32 A. Different voltage available upon request. Country-specific deviations are possible. 2 Horizontal Pass-through Autoclaves, Systec H-Series 2D 2 Triple safety aspects • One door only can be opened at a time. If one door is open, the other is automatically locked. remain locked. • If the autoclave is switched off or if no current is available (e.g. power failure), both doors • If the door at the non-sterile side is opened, a sterilization program hast o be performed before the door at the sterile side can be opened. The locking system can be adapted to customers’ wishes. Doors and control panel are made of heat-insulating plastic, the housing completely of stainless steel and the stainless steel edges specially processed for smooth junctions with walls. Operation, however, can be carried out from both sides, the position (open or closed) of the opposite door being indicated on the display. For use under the most stringent clean room and safety conditions • For biological safety laboratories. Fitting as a sterilization and pass-through lock for protecting the external environment. • For clean rooms in laboratories and production facilities as a sterilization and pass- through lock separating sterile and non-sterile areas. Type Useful space Ø × depth mm 400×750 HX-90 2D 500×750 HX-150 2D 500×1000 HX-200 2D 740×750 HX-320 2D 740×1000 HX-430 2D 740×1250 HX-540 2D 740×1500 HX-580 2D 1000×750 HX-650 2D 1000×1000 HX-780 2D HX-980 2D 1000×1250 HX-1180 2D 1000×1500 HX-1380 2D 1000×1750 HX-1580 2D 1000×2000 Useful volume total / nominal l 100 / 90 160 / 150 210 / 200 370 / 320 480 / 430 590 / 540 700 / 650 680 / 580 880 / 780 1075 / 980 1270 / 1180 1465 / 1380 1665 / 1580 H × W × D mm 1610×704×690 1710×804×695 1710×804×950 1865×944×740 1865×944×990 1865×944×1240 2025×1269×785 1865×944×1450 2025×1269×1035 2025×1269×1285 2025×1269×1535 2025×1269×1785 2025×1269×2035 Order No. 10 12 92096 10 12 92156 10 12 92207 10 12 92235 10 12 92245 10 12 92255 10 12 92271 10 12 92265 10 12 92275 10 12 92285 10 12 92295 10 12 92305 10 12 92315 Electrical connections for the Systec HX-90 2D to HX-200 2D: 380 – 400 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 16 A. Electrical connections for the Systec HX-320 2D to HX-1580 2D: 380 – 400 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 32 A. Different voltage available upon request. Country-specific deviations are possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 297

299

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization co d e b e w WWQMA001 Steam Sterilizers Vertical Top-loading Autoclaves Systec V-Series, Systec Specially designed for the requirements in laboratories, these autoclaves make steriliza- tion processes safe, accurate, reproducible and validatable. Three types with diffenent performance categories Systec VX For all laboratory applications even for sophisticated state-of-the-art sterilization process- es. With all possibilities to add additional options for process optimization to enable vali- datable sterilization to be carried out. Systec VE For basic laboratory applications and media sterilization. With limited possibilities to add additional options for process optimization. Systec VB For simple process applications. No options available for process optimization. Technical data: Extern. dimen. H×W×D in mm Chamber volume in l total / nominal Chamber dimen. Ø × depth 344 × 450 344 × 600 400 × 500 400 × 600 400 × 750 500 × 500 500 × 600 500 × 750 Heating cap. VE/VB-series kW 3.6 V-40 3.6 V-55 9.3 V-65 9.3 V-75 9.3 V-95 9.3 V-100 9.3 V-120 9.3 V-150 Electrical connections for Systec V–40 and V–55: 220 – 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 16 A. Electrical connections for Systec V–65 to V–150: 380 – 400 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 16 A. Other voltages and single-phase available on request. Country-specific deviations possi- ble. Heating cap. VX-series kW 950×500×680 3.5 950×500×680 3.5 995×550×780 9.0 995×550×780 9.0 1080×550×780 9.0 985×650×900 9.0 985×650×900 9.0 1115×650×900 9.0 45 / 40 59 / 55 73 / 65 85 / 75 104 / 95 117 / 100 137 / 120 166 / 150 Systec VX Systec VE Systec VB Up to 251) Standard Features Integrated, separate steam generator Internal heating elements within the autoclave chamber Housing, support frame and pressure vessel made of corrosion-resistant stainless steel Temperature and pressure range 140°C, 4 bar LCD display and fully automatic microprocessor control Number of sterilization programs Code-secured access rights for changing parameters and further safety-relevant intervention Internal memory for storing up to 10 sterilization cycles Timer for starting programs Autofill: automatic demineralized water feed for steam generation Flexible PT-100 temperature sensor Additional temperature sensor in condense exhaust Temperature holding function for liquids after program finish Special program for Durham tubes Calculation of F0 value Special program for waste sterilization with pulsed heat-up for more efficient air exhaust Water-cooled steam exhaust, thermostatically controlled Programmable automatic door-opening on completion of program RS-232 interfaces for external data transmission (network-compatible via adapter) Available options Touch-Screen control Extension of temperature and pressure ranges to 150°C / 5 bar (from chamber volume 65 liters and more) Options for process optimization Rapid cooling for efficient and safe cooling of liquids Vacuum system for validatable sterilization of solids and waste materials in disposal bags Superdry: for drying solids (only in combination with optional vacuum system) Exhaust filtration (including condensate inactivation) for safe sterilization of hazardous biological substances Options for documentation Integrated printer for batch documentation Systec ADS documentation software package for comprehensive documentation Data storage on SD card for up to 10,000 sterilization cycles and transmission of data to a PC AuditTrail: unalterable and traceable documentation and conformity to FDA 21 CFR Part 11 2) Systec autoclaves are delivered ready for subsequent installation of all options. Further options and special programs as well as baskets and inserts, transport and loading systems on request. 1) On request 2) For Systec VX-65 up to Systec VX-150 in combination with the optional touch display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • + + + + + + + + + + • • • • 12 • • • • • • • • • • • • + + + + + + • • • • 4 • • + Order No. Type Systec VX-40 10 12 91040 Systec VE-40 10 12 91240 Systec VB-40 10 12 91400 Systec VX-55 10 12 91055 Systec VE-55 10 12 91255 Systec VB-55 10 12 91410 298 Type Order No. Systec VX-95 10 12 91095 Systec VE-95 10 12 91295 Systec VB-95 10 12 91440 Systec VX-100 10 12 91100 Systec VE-100 10 12 91300 Systec VB-100 10 12 91450 Order No. Type Systec VX-65 10 12 91065 Systec VE-65 10 12 91265 Systec VB-65 10 12 91420 Systec VX-75 10 12 91075 Systec VE-75 10 12 91275 Systec VB-75 10 12 91430 Type Order No. Systec VX-120 10 12 91120 Systec VE-120 10 12 91320 Systec VB-120 10 12 91460 Systec VX-150 10 12 91150 Systec VE-150 10 12 91350 Systec VB-150 10 12 91470

300

Safety, Cleaning, Hygiene Sterilization Steam Sterilizers Mediapreparators, Mediaprep, Systec Media preparators of the Mediaprep-Series for preparation and sterilization of microbio- logical media. 10 to 120 Liters nominal volume. Designed for preparation and sterilization of agar-containing nutrient media and other sterile liquids, with microprocessor-controlled fully automatic program sequence. The Systec Mediaprep-Series includes stronger heating elements, rapid cooling, magnetic stirring, inner vessel, temperature controlled door lock, dispensing outlet and inlet port for adding additives. co d e b e w WWQMA003 Characteristics: • Fully automatic microprocessor control incorporating 12 programs • Sterilization temperature pre-selectable up to 136°C / 3.5 bar • Novel automatic door closure with safety-lock system, lip-gasket out of silicone and opening at the push of a button • Temperature- and pressure dependent interlock for the door, inlet port and dispensing • Thermal door lock, controlled by pressure and medium temperature according to Pres- port sure Vessel Regulations chemicals, easy to clean gram sequence • Pressure vessel made of stainless steel (AISI 316), electro polished, resistant against • All sterilization programs with pre-selectable sterilization parameters and automatic pro- • Rapid cooling with recirculating sterile water, heat exchanger and recirculation pump • Sterilization time activation based on medium temperature • Electronic pressure transducer for pressure and temperature regulation • Autofill - automatic de-mineralized water feed for steam generation • Steam exhaust condensation - water-cooled with thermostatic control • Validation port • Start by clock / timer for programmable start-time • Prepared for subsequent printer connection • RS 232 interface for data transfer • Temperature holding program for keeping agar solutions warm • Base plate for vessels, baskets etc. when used as autoclave • Wheels with stop breaks for portable use • Thermal insulation out of Hanno-Tect, no risk of particle dissociation • Support frame and housing out of stainless steel • Safety pressure release valve • Safety cut off at low water level • Safety cut off at excess temperature • Direct electrical heated through strong heating elements for fast heat-up • Continuous mixing through a stirrer on the bottom of the media-vessel, contact free driven by a strong magnetic motor • Permanent temperature control with a PT-100 temperature load sensor, directly inside the media • Inlet-nozzle with safety screw-closure for filling of additives after sterilization • Media removal through a flexible silicone tubing (either by selectable internal pressure inside the chamber and an electronically controlled pinch valve or with an optional per- istaltic pump). Furthermore all filling lines for petri-dishes available on the market or other dispensing devices can be connected, without any exception. The inner filling tube and the dispensing nozzle are sterilized in-line, during the sterilization cycle • Easy cleaning and operational readiness through exchangeable, removable inner vessel. Thereby no risk of cross-contamination between the different batches Type Systec Mediaprep-10 Systec Mediaprep-20 Systec Mediaprep-30 Systec Mediaprep-45 Systec Mediaprep-65 Systec Mediaprep-90 Systec Mediaprep-120 Chamber vol. l 17 30 44 65 90 126 162 Chamber Ø mm 296 296 296 400 400 500 500 Chamber H mm 250 450 650 485 690 610 790 Vol. inner container l 12/10 23/20 34/30 51.3/45 74.5/65 103.5/90 136.1/120 Dimensions in- ner cont. Ø × D mm 270×222 270×422 270×622 380×452 380×657 480×572 480×752 Outer W × H × D mm 480×555×635 715×555×635 915×555×635 1080×550×780 1210×550×780 1110×650×895 1240×650×895 Heating cap. kW 3.6 9.3 9.3 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 Order No. 10 12 91710 10 12 91720 10 12 91730 10 12 91745 10 12 91765 10 12 91790 10 12 91820 Power supply for Systec Mediaprep-10: 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz, 16 A Power supply for Systec Mediaprep-20 and 30: 380-400 V, 50/60 Hz, 16A Power supply for Systec Mediaprep-45, -65, -90, and -120: 380-400 V, 50/60 Hz, 32 A Modification to other voltage available on request Prices for Systec mediapreparators, options and accessories available on request co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 299

301

KNOWLEDGE GLASS APPARATUS PRODUCTION FOR LABORATORY, TECHNICAL CENTRES AND PRODUCTION We produce glass apparatus as one-off productions or in series. Our scope of services includes: • Creating engineering drawings • Handling and processing of glass tubes, glass stirrers and pre- processed parts, connecting the parts to apparatus and devices. • Processing of produced apparatus, e.g. by means of grinding, silver- ing, etching, radiating, setting up scales and labels, volume determina- tion, quality control, voltage tests • Rack construction • Repair of defective glass apparatus and devices Material glass As the glass type which is used most frequently, Borosilicate glass 3.3 or Duran® 8330 is an essential part of labora- tory and chemical systems engineering. It forms the basis for finding customised solutions for specific problems of our customers. Products made of borosilicate 3.3 are known for their stability, their great processability and for their exten- sive insensitiveness against quick changes in temperature. They are corrosion-resistant and act absolutely neutral in almost all chemical fields, even with aggressive chemicals. This characteristics distinguishes them from other materials. For special tasks, other glass types such as soft glass and quartz glass are processes. 300 Continued on next page

302

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components CHAPTER OVERVIEW Glass and Grounded Joint Components 301 Ground Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Separatory Funnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Dropping Funnels, Cosing Funnels . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Distillation Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Separators, Cooling Traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Standard Ground and Threaded Components . 315 Stopcocks, Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Other Valves see Lab Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Miscellaneous Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Special Equipment 339 Gas Distributors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Specimen Preparing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 KNOWLEDGE Glass Apparatus Production . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Ground Flasks Round Bottom Flasks with Ground Joints, Rettberg Round bottom flasks, central neck, standard ground (NS) conical socket, DIN 12348, borosilicate glass 3.3. Volume ml Neck NS Order No. Neck NS Order No. 51) 101) 251) 50 1 100 2501) 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 1) Non-DIN size. 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 13 40 20007 13 40 20108 13 40 20114 13 40 20117 13 40 20124 13 40 20136 13 40 20217 13 40 20224 13 40 20236 13 40 20244 13 40 20254 13 40 20264 13 40 20268 Volume ml 40001) 5000 60001) 250 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 10000 20000 29 29 29 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 13 40 20271 13 40 20273 13 40 20276 13 40 20436 13 40 20444 13 40 20454 13 40 20464 13 40 20468 13 40 20471 13 40 20473 13 40 20476 13 40 20486 13 40 20491 1 co d e b e w WWQVD038 Rounded Bottom Flasks, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass round-bottom flasks with grounded joint, DIN 12348. Narrow neck form Vol. ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 O.D. neck approx. mm 22 22 34 34 34 34 Flask Ø approx. mm 51 64 85 105 131 166 Ground joint NS 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/23 Height mm 105 115 145 175 210 260 Order No. 18 36 22017 18 36 22024 18 36 22036 18 36 22044 18 36 22054 18 36 22063 Wide neck form Vol. ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 O.D. neck approx. mm 34 34 50 50 50 50 Flask Ø approx. mm 51 64 85 105 131 165 Height mm 105 115 145 175 210 260 Ground joint NS 29/32 29/32 45/40 45/40 45/40 45/40 Order No. 18 36 23017 18 36 23024 18 36 23036 18 36 23044 18 36 23054 18 36 23063 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 301

303

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Ground Flasks Round Flasks, PFA, VITLAB Transparent, neck with NS 29/32. Suitable as safety flask for use with rotary evaporators (operation at room temperature) to collect the distilled off liquid. High thermal stability and chemical resistance. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Volume ml 100 250 500 NS 29/32 29/32 29/32 Ø mm 65 88 107 Height mm 117 147 177 Order No. 23 85 18024 23 85 18036 23 85 18044 Flat Bottom Flasks with Ground Joints, Rettberg Erlenmeyer flasks with standard ground (NS) conical socket, DIN 12387, borosilicate glass 3.3. Volume Ground joint NS Height Order No. ml 101) 25 50 100 50 100 2001) 250 3001) 500 1000 2000 250 300 500 1000 2000 ml 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 co d e b e w WWQVD050 1 2 302 14 14 14 14 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 45 45 45 45 45 mm 55 70 85 105 85 105 131 140 156 175 220 280 140 164 175 220 280 Flask Ø mm 30 42 51 64 51 64 79 85 87 105 131 166 85 87 105 131 166 13 40 31108 13 40 31114 13 40 31117 13 40 31124 13 40 31217 13 40 31224 13 40 31232 13 40 31236 13 40 31239 13 40 31244 13 40 31254 13 40 31263 13 40 31436 13 40 31439 13 40 31444 13 40 31454 13 40 31463 1) Non-DIN size With chicanes on request Erlenmeyer Flasks, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass Erlenmeyer flasks with grounded joint, DIN 12387. 1 Narrow neck form Volume Flask Ø mm 42 51 64 85 105 131 166 2 Wide neck form Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 Flask Ø mm 51 64 85 105 131 Height mm 70 85 105 140 175 220 280 Height mm 85 105 140 175 220 Socket NS Order No. 14/23 14/23 14/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 18 36 25014 18 36 25017 18 36 25024 18 36 25036 18 36 25044 18 36 25054 18 36 25063 Socket NS Order No. 29/32 29/32 45/40 45/40 45/40 18 36 26017 18 36 26024 18 36 26036 18 36 26044 18 36 26054

304

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Ground Flasks BOLA Round Bottom Flasks, Bohlender Transparent, non-porous. Made of PFA, temperature resistance from -200°C to +250°C, universal chemical resistance. Contents ml 1 100 1 250 1 500 2 100 2 250 2 500 3 100 3 250 3 500 Total height mm 117 149 177 117 149 177 117 149 177 Ball Ø mm 67 88 107 67 88 107 67 88 107 Middle neck Side necks Order No. 1 × NS14/23 1 × NS29/32 1 × NS29/32 2 × NS14/23 2 × NS29/32 2 × NS29/32 1 × NS 29 1 × NS 29 1 × NS 29 1 × NS 29 1 × NS 29 1 × NS 29 1 × NS 29 — 1 × NS 29 — 1 × NS 29 — 10 17 65512 10 17 65520 10 17 65536 10 17 65612 10 17 65620 10 17 65636 10 17 65806 10 17 65808 10 17 65809 Round Bottom Flasks, Two Necks, Rettberg Round bottom flasks, conical ground sockets, borosilicate glass 3.3. Side neck straight, DIN12392 ml Vol. Middle neck NS 2000 29 501) 29 100 29 250 29 500 29 1000 29 ml Vol. Middle neck NS 2000 29 501) 29 100 29 250 29 500 29 1000 29 Side neck NS 29 14 14 14 14 14 Side neck NS 29 14 14 14 14 14 Order No. 13 40 21264 13 40 21319 13 40 21324 13 40 21336 13 40 21344 13 40 21354 Order No. 13 40 23264 13 40 24219 13 40 24224 13 40 24236 13 40 24244 13 40 24254 4 Vol. Middle neck ml NS 50 14 1001) 14 2501) 14 100 29 250 29 500 29 1000 29 Side neck NS 14 14 14 29 29 29 29 Order No. 13 40 21117 13 40 21124 13 40 21136 13 40 21224 13 40 21236 13 40 21244 13 40 21254 5 Vol. Side neck at 20° angle, DIN 12394 Middle neck ml NS 251) 14 50 14 100 14 250 14 250 29 5001) 29 10001) 29 Side neck NS 14 14 14 14 29 29 29 Order No. 13 40 23113 13 40 23117 13 40 23124 13 40 23136 13 40 23236 13 40 23244 13 40 23254 1) Non-DIN size More sizes available on request 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWQVD039 5 Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 303

305

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components 1 3 co d e b e w co d e b e w WWQVD040 2 co d e b e w 4 WWQVD041 Ground Flasks Round Bottom Flasks, Three Necks, Rettberg Round bottom flasks with three necks, standard ground (NS) conical sockets, boro- silicate glass 3.3. 1 Side necks straight (parallel), DIN 12392 Vol. Order No. Middle neck NS ml 501) 14 1001) 14 2501) 29 500 29 1000 29 2000 29 3000 29 4000 29 501) 29 100 29 Side neck NS 14 14 29 29 29 29 29 29 14 14 Side Middle neck neck NS NS ml 251) 14 14 501) 14 14 1001) 14 14 2501) 29 29 5001) 29 29 10001) 29 29 20001) 29 29 501) 29 14 1001) 29 14 250 29 14 1) Non-DIN size. 13 40 25217 13 40 25225 13 40 25236 13 40 25244 13 40 25254 13 40 25263 13 40 25268 13 40 25271 13 40 26219 13 40 26224 13 40 27213 13 40 27220 13 40 27225 13 40 27236 13 40 27244 13 40 27254 13 40 27263 13 40 28227 13 40 28224 13 40 28236 2 Side necks at 20° angle, DIN 12394 Vol. Order No. Vol. Middle neck NS ml 2501) 29 5001) 29 10001) 29 20001) 29 45 3000 45 4000 5000 45 45 6000 100001) 45 200001) 45 Side neck NS 14 14 14 14 29 29 29 29 29 29 Order No. 13 40 26236 13 40 26244 13 40 26254 13 40 26263 13 40 26468 13 40 26471 13 40 26473 13 40 26477 13 40 26486 13 40 26491 Vol. Middle neck NS ml 29 500 29 1000 2000 29 10001) 45 20001) 45 40001) 45 60001) 45 100001) 45 200001) 45 Side neck NS 14 14 14 29 29 29 29 29 29 Order No. 13 40 28244 13 40 28254 13 40 28263 13 40 28454 13 40 28463 13 40 28471 13 40 28477 13 40 28486 13 40 28491 Nitrogen Flasks, Round Bottom, Rettberg Nitrogen round bottom flasks made of borosilicate glass, DURAN®, with side straight stopcock and hose connection, or with side PTFE high-vacuum valves with fine thread and hose connection. Volume ml 25 50 100 250 500 50 100 250 500 1000 Socket NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 3 Stopcock NS 2.5 mm Order No. 13 40 29114 13 40 29117 13 40 29124 13 40 29136 13 40 29144 13 40 29217 13 40 29224 13 40 29236 13 40 29244 13 40 29254 4 Valve 0 – 3 mm Order No. 10 70 00193 10 70 00194 10 70 00195 10 70 00196 10 70 00197 10 70 00198 10 70 00199 10 70 00200 13 40 29944 13 40 29954 WWQVD043 Nitrogen Tubes, Rettberg Nitrogen round bottom flasks made of borosilicate glass 3.3, non-graduated, round bot- tom, with side straight stopcock and hose connection, or side PTFE valve and hose connection. Nitrogen tubes with cock Ground joint NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 Stopcock NS mm 1.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 5 Cone Order No. 13 40 29308 13 40 29314 13 40 29317 13 40 29324 13 40 29336 13 40 29327 13 40 29337 6 Socket Order No. 13 40 29408 13 40 29414 13 40 29417 13 40 29424 13 40 29436 13 40 29427 13 40 29437 Volume ml 10 25 50 100 250 100 250 Continued on next page 6 5 304

306

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Ground Flasks Nitrogen tubes with PTFE high-vacuum valve with fine thread, graduated 7 Volume ml 10 25 50 100 250 100 250 Ground socket NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 Valve passage mm 0 – 3 0 – 3 0 – 3 0 – 3 0 – 3 0 – 3 0 – 3 Order No. 10 70 00160 10 70 00161 10 70 00162 10 70 00163 10 70 00164 10 70 00165 10 70 00166 8 Nitrogen tubes, thick-walled Thicked-walled nitrogen tubes with high-vacuum valve, for storing air-sensitive sub- stances. Design: Made of borosilicate glass 3.3, valve passage 0 – 8 mm, hose connection A.-Ø 9 mm 7 Article Nitrogene tube, thick-walled, 25 ml Nitrogene tube, thick-walled, 50 ml Nitrogene tube, thick-walled, 100 ml Nitrogene tube, thick-walled, 250 ml Order No. 13 40 29514 13 40 29517 13 40 29524 13 40 29536 9 Nitrogen tubes Non-graduated nitrogen tubes with high-vacuum valve and rectangular sleeve NS 14.5/23, for storing air-sensitive substances. Design: Made of borosilicate glass 3.3, valve passage 0 – 8 mm, hose connection A.-Ø 9 mm Article Nitrogene tube, 25 ml Nitrogene tube, 50 ml Nitrogene tube, 100 ml Nitrogene tube, 250 ml Order No. 10 70 80026 10 70 80027 10 70 80028 10 70 80029 Sulphuration Flask, Neubert-Glas Sulphuration flask made of 3.3 borosilicate glass. Side neck angled NS – 14/23 14/23 14/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 side neck straight NS 14/23 29/32 29/32 14/23 14/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 Middle neck NS 29/32 29/32 45/40 45/40 60/46 71/51 71/51 71/51 71/51 Volume ml 100 200 350 500 750 1500 2500 4000 6000 Side neck angled 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 Order No. 13 11 81024 13 11 81032 13 11 81040 10 11 51515 13 11 81051 13 11 81061 13 11 81066 13 11 81072 13 11 81077 More sizes on request. Separatory Funnels Separatory Funnels, Rettberg Separatory funnels, conical shape, ISO 4800, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, standard ground (NS) polyethylene stopper, standard ground stopcock plug and stopcock plug fastener. Non-graduated with standard ground glass plugs, solid 8 9 co d e b e w WWQVD023 AT Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 40001) 60001) 100001) Stopper NS Cock plug NS 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 45/40 45/40 45/40 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 29.0 29.0 29.0 1) near pear shape, not acc. to ISO co d e b e w Cock plug hole Ø mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 Order No. 11 41 11017 11 41 11024 11 41 11036 11 41 11044 11 41 11054 11 41 11063 11 41 11072 11 41 11077 11 41 11086 Continued on next page AT To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 305

307

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Separatory Funnels Graduated with standard ground glass plugs, solid 1 Volume approx. Stopper NS Cock plug NS Cock plug hole Ø 1 1) near pear shape, not acc. to ISO Graduated with PTFE cock plugs 3 Volume approx. Stopper NS Cock plug NS Cock plug hole Ø 2 3 co d e b e w WWQVD024 4 5 6 7 306 2 Volume Non-graduated with PTFE cock plugs Stopper NS Cock plug NS ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 40001) 60001) 100001) ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 45/40 45/40 45/40 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 29.0 29.0 29.0 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 Cock plug hole Ø mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 Order No. 11 41 12017 11 41 12024 11 41 12036 11 41 12044 11 41 12054 11 41 12063 11 41 12072 11 41 12077 11 41 12086 Separatory Funnels, Rettberg Separatory funnels, conical shape, Squibb type, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with standard ground (NS) polyethylene stopper, standard ground stopcock plug and stopcock plug fastener. Non-graduated with standard ground glass plugs, solid 4 Volume ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Stopper NS Cock plug NS 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 Cock plug hole Ø mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 Order No. 11 41 31017 11 41 31024 11 41 31036 11 41 31044 11 41 31054 11 41 31063 Graduated with standard ground glass plugs, solid 5 Volume approx. Stopper NS Cock plug NS Cock plug hole Ø ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 ml 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 6 Volume Non-graduated with PTFE cock plugs Stopper NS Cock plug NS 19/26 19/26 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 Cock plug hole Ø mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 Order No. 11 41 32017 11 41 32024 11 41 32036 11 41 32044 11 41 32054 11 41 32063 Graduated with PTFE cock plugs 7 Volume approx. Stopper NS Cock plug NS Cock plug hole Ø mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 Order No. 11 41 11117 11 41 11124 11 41 11136 11 41 11144 11 41 11154 11 41 11163 Order No. 11 41 12117 11 41 12124 11 41 12136 11 41 12144 11 41 12154 11 41 12163 Order No. 11 41 31117 11 41 31124 11 41 31136 11 41 31144 11 41 31154 11 41 31163 Order No. 11 41 32117 11 41 32124 11 41 32136 11 41 32144 11 41 32154 11 41 32163

308

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Dropping Funnels, Cosing Funnels Dropping Funnels, Rettberg cylindrical, drain tube with standard ground cone and dropping point, with gradua- tion, approximate readings of sub-volumes, borosilicate glass 3.3. Available in 3 versions: Version A: with solid glass plus with standard ground joint Version B: with PTFE plug with standard ground joint co d e b e w WWQVD061 Vers. Dropping funnels without pressure compensation tube Bore Ø mm 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 Ground joint NS 14 14 14 14 29 29 29 29 29 14 14 14 14 29 29 29 29 29 Plug Ø mm 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 Vol. ml 10 25 50 100 50 100 250 500 1000 10 25 50 100 50 100 250 500 1000 A A A A A A 1 A A A B B B B B B 2 B B B Dropping funnels with pressure compensation tube Vers. A A A A A A 3 A A A B B B B B B 4 B B B Vol. ml 10 25 50 100 50 100 250 500 1000 10 25 50 100 50 100 250 500 1000 Ground joint NS 14 14 14 14 29 29 29 29 29 14 14 14 14 29 29 29 29 29 Plug Ø mm 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 Bore Ø mm 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 Dropping Funnels with Temp. Jacket, Rettberg Order No. 13 40 42108 13 40 42113 13 40 42117 13 40 42124 13 40 42217 13 40 42224 13 40 42236 13 40 42244 13 40 42254 13 40 44108 13 40 44113 13 40 44117 13 40 44124 13 40 44217 13 40 44224 13 40 44236 13 40 44244 13 40 44254 Order No. 13 40 46108 13 40 46113 13 40 46117 13 40 46124 13 40 46217 13 40 46224 13 40 46236 13 40 46244 13 40 46254 13 40 48108 13 40 48113 13 40 48117 13 40 48124 13 40 48217 13 40 48224 13 40 48236 13 40 48244 13 40 48254 ml Socket NS Vol. approx. Dropping funnels with temp. jacket without pressure compensation tube, graduated Borosilicate glass 3.3, hollow glass stopcock, temperature control couplings with screw thread GL 14, cap and plastic tube connector (PP). Stopcock NS 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 Stopcock Ø mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 13 40 41008 13 40 41024 13 40 41036 13 40 41045 13 40 41055 13 40 41063 14.5 29 29 29 29 29 14.5 29 29 29 29 29 5 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Order No. Cone NS ml Socket NS Vol. approx. Dropping funnels with temp. jacket with pressure compensation tube, graduated Borosilicate glass 3.3, hollow glass stopcock, temperature control couplings with screw thread GL 14, cap and plastic tube connector (PP). Stopcock NS 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5 18.8 18.8 Stopcock Ø mm 2.5 2.5 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 13 40 41108 13 40 41124 13 40 41136 13 40 41145 13 40 41155 13 40 41163 14.5 29 29 29 29 29 6 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Order No. Cone NS 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWQVD168 5 6 14.5 29 29 29 29 29 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 307

309

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Bottles Woulfe Bottles, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL co d e b e w WWEQ2150 With 3 necks NS, DIN 12480, vacuum resistant due to the wall thickness and geom- etry. Volume ml 500 1000 2000 5000 Ø mm 87 113 135 185 Necks NS Order No. 19/26 24/29 29/32 34/35 12 24 70944 12 24 70954 12 24 70963 12 24 70973 co d e b e w WWQVD180 co d e b e w WWQVD134 Woulfe Bottles, Rettberg Rettberg Woulfe bottles, safety bottles made of borosilicate glass 3.3, for jobs using vacuum, with plastic coating as splinter and implosion protection, with 2 necks Fittings: Suction tube with non-return valve, dial pressure gauge with 2 scales (1000 to 0 mbar, 760 to 0 mm Hg), integrated vent valve. Volume ml 500 1000 2000 5000 Middle neck GL Side neck GL Order No. 32 32 32 32 18 18 18 18 10 70 00264 10 70 00265 10 70 00266 10 70 00267 Woulfe Bottles, Rettberg Woulfe bottles, Erlenmeyer shape made of borosilicate glass 3.3 (5000 ml bottle), thick walls, for jobs using vacuum, with plastic coating as splinter and implosion protection, glass insert with screw-off plastic hose connections (PP), intermediate piece with vent valve, pressure gauge with 2 scales (1000 to 0 mbar, 760 to 0 mm Hg). Also available with non-return valve at the side. Diameter mm ml Version without non-return valve Order No. 12 70 42044 12 70 42054 12 70 42063 10 70 00089 12 70 42073 12 70 42086 12 70 42088 12 70 42091 with non-return valve Order No. 10 70 42144 10 70 42154 10 70 42163 10 70 42164 10 70 42173 10 70 42186 10 70 42188 10 70 42191 Volume 500 1000 2000 3000 50001) 100001) 150001) 200001) 110 140 170 165 185 240 255 290 1) Bottle shape Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. co d e b e w 308

310

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Bottles Gas Washing Bottles, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Gas washing bottles with screw cap system, Drechsel top, without filter disk, adjust- able immersion height. Gas washing bottles with filter disk Vol. ml 1 500 Thread GL Porosity 45 1 Bowl Ø mm 25 Gas washing bottles without filter disk Thread GL Volume ml 2 500 45 Order No. 11 25 70401 Order No. 11 24 71300 Individual parts: Bottle Article Laboratory bottle, 500 ml (thread GL 45) Tops Article Drechsel top without filter disk Drechsel top with filter disk of porosity 1 Plastic hose connectors Article Plastic tubing connector, straight Screw cap, GL 14 Screw cap, GL 45 VMQ Silicone ring 26 × 42 × 5 mm Order No. 11 21 80144 PU pc/Pack 10 Order No. 11 24 71302 11 25 75401 Order No. 13 29 25506 13 29 22705 13 29 22710 11 29 22825 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 Gas Washing Bottles, Rettberg Gas washing bottle Drechsel type gas washing bottles, DIN 12596, conical standard ground joint size 29, bottle height 200 mm, working height 250 mm, bottles in SBW borosilicate glass 6.5, in- serts in borosilicate glass 3.3 (not included in the scope of delivery). Volume ml 3 100 250 Order No. 11 44 52924 11 44 52936 Volume ml 500 Order No. 11 44 52944 Gas washing bottle insert With cone size 29, borosilicate glass 3.3, uniform overall height 200 mm, DIN 12463. Article 4 Insert without fritted glass 5 Insert with fritted glass, porosity 1 Order No. 11 44 52970 11 44 52972 BOLA Gas Washing Bottles, Bohlender 6 BOLA gas washing bottles Gas washing bottles made of transparent fluoroplastic (PFA), chemically resistant to practically all chemicals, temperature resistant from -270 to +260°C (PFA). The fine porous frits made of fluoroplastic (PTFE) allow optimal bubbling of the gas to be washed. Because the products are unbreakable, a high level of occupational safety is achieved. Each of the gas washing bottles is equipped with 2 connectors made of fluoroplastic (PTFE) (dia. 4 × 6 mm hose for the 250 and 500-ml bottles; dia. 6 × 8 mm hose for the 1000-ml bottle). co d e b e w WWEQ2084 2 4 3 5 co d e b e w WWQVD022 Volume ml 250 500 1000 co d e b e w Height approx. mm 175 200 240 Material Order No. PFA PFA PFA 22 17 11801 22 17 11802 22 17 11803 Continued on next page 6 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 309

311

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components 1 Bottles BOLA scrubber columns Transparent scrubber column made of FEP. Inlet and outlet tube as well as riser tube are made of FEP (5.6 × 8 mm), bottom and top are made of pure PTFE. The standard PTFE frit has a pore size of approx. 3 µm and is screwed on the riser tube with an M8×1 thread. Technical data: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: Outer-Ø of column: Connection for tubing outer-Ø: Flow rate System pressure 0.1 bar: System pressure 0.3 bar: System pressure 0.6 bar: -200°C from +205°C universal no pressure 54 mm 2 × 8 mm A 117-04 (500 ml) 15 l/h 62.5 l/h 130.0 l/h Volume ml 500 1000 Height mm 400 700 A 117-08 (1000 ml) 5 l/h 50 l/h 117.5 l/h Order No. 10 17 61704 10 17 61708 Condensers Condensers, Rettberg 2 Gr. joint Allihn condensers, borosilicate glass 3.3, DIN 12581 Gr. joint Order No. NS Jacket L mm 14.5/231) 160 29/32 250 13 40 83120 13 40 83225 NS 29/321) Jacket L mm 400 Order No. 13 40 83240 Dimroth condensers, borosilicate glass 3.3, DIN 12591 3 Gr. joint NS Jacket L mm 14.5/231) 160 29/32 250 Order No. 13 40 85116 13 40 85225 Gr. joint NS 29/32 Jacket L mm 400 Order No. 13 40 85240 Intensive condensers, borosilicate glass 3.3, DIN 12593 Jacket L mm 160 250 Order No. 13 40 86120 13 40 86225 Gr. joint NS 29/32 Jacket L mm 400 Order No. 13 40 86240 4 Gr. joint NS 14.5/23 29/32 5 Gr. joint Liebig condensers (West condensers), borosilicate glass 3.3, DIN 12576 Order No. Gr. joint Order No. NS 29/32 Jacket L mm 400 13 40 82240 13 40 82116 13 40 82225 NS Jacket L mm 160 250 1) Non-DIN size 14.5/23 29/32 Stainless Steel Condenser and Casing Tube, Rettberg Order No. 13 70 50030 Order No. 10 70 00129 Article Stainless steel condenser with 2 hose shafts and cone NS 29, immersion depth approx. 300 mm Article Stainless steel condenser with 2 hose shafts and cone NS 29, immersion depth approx. 155 mm Article Casing tube for 300 mm Article Casing tube for 155 mm Article PTFE seal to match, knurled, joint NS 29 to match, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, cone and socket NS 29/32, side socket NS 14,5/23 Order No. 10 70 00130 to match, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, cone and socket NS 29/32, side socket NS 14,5/23 Order No. 13 70 50033 Order No. 24 70 10029 1 2 3 4 5 co d e b e w WWQVD080 co d e b e w WWQVD008 310

312

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Columns Distilling Columns, Rettberg 1 Hempel type colunms without glass jacket for simple fractioning, with packing carrier, borosilicate glass 3.3. Gr. joint NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 Filling H I.D. mm mm 15 200 15 300 Order No. 13 40 65214 13 40 65314 Gr. joint NS 29/32 29/32 Filling H I.D. mm mm 30 300 30 500 Order No. 13 40 65329 13 40 65529 2 Hempel type colunms with slip-on glass jacket for simple fractioning, with packing carrier, borosilicate glass 3.3. Gr. joint NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 Filling H I.D. mm mm 15 200 15 300 Order No. 13 40 65614 13 40 65714 Gr. joint NS 29/32 29/32 3 Vigreux colunms with slip-on glass jacket Borosilicate glass 3.3 Gr. joint NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 Filling H I.D. mm mm 15 200 15 300 Order No. 13 40 66215 13 40 66315 Gr. joint NS 29/32 29/32 Filling H I.D. mm mm 30 300 30 500 Order No. 13 40 65829 13 40 65929 Filling H I.D. mm mm 25 300 25 600 Order No. 13 40 66330 13 40 66630 1 2 3 Column Packings, Rettberg 4 4 Ø Glass beads, solid, AR-GLAS® Order No. mm 2 3 4 13 40 69102 13 40 69103 13 40 69104 Ø mm 5 6 Length mm 5 6 Order No. 13 40 69105 13 40 69106 Ø mm 5 6 Order No. 13 40 69205 13 40 69206 5 Length Raschig rings, AR-GLAS® (glass rings) Order No. mm 3 4 Ø mm 3 4 13 40 69203 13 40 69204 Distillation Components Distilling Apparatus, Rettberg Distilling apparatus, complete Made of borosilicate glass 3.3, consisting of the components listed below. Article Distilling apparatus, complete unit Individual components Order No. 13 70 75000 co d e b e w WWQVD073 co d e b e w WWQVD075 5 co d e b e w WWQVD136 Article Distilling link/Claisen type with fused Liebig condenser, 2 standard ground sockets 14.5, 2 × stan- dard ground cones 29, jacket length approx. 330 mm (fitted length ap- prox. 250 mm), condensing up to below the cone at the outlet, conden- sing water connections with unscrewable plastic hose connections (PP) Intermediate receiver Anschütz-Thiele type, with inclined stub, capacity 50 ml, graduated, standard ground cone and socket 29, vacuum connection with un- screwable plastic hose connections (PP). Round bottom flask 250 ml, NS 29 Evaporator flask 1 ltr., middle neck ground joint 29, side neck ground joint 14.5, inclined Stopper with conical ground joint NS 14.5 Gas supply tube, NS 14.5 with PTFE valve Thermometer with standard ground joint with standard ground joint 14.5, 0 to +250°C, fitted length 75 mm Ground retaining device, NS 29 (3 pieces needed) Heater 1000 ml Scissor-type table Stand set Order No. 13 40 75014 13 40 91424 13 40 20236 13 40 24254 13 40 39114 13 40 37211 10 70 00128 13 70 12029 13 70 21110 13 70 75060 13 70 75070 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 311

313

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components e co d e co d b b e w e w WWQVD003 Distillation Components Distilling Controller, Rettberg Manually controlled, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with ground socket 29/32 for a recir- culating condenser, ground cone 29/32 for a distilling column, ground joint-socket 14.5/23 for a thermometer with ground joint (or similar), and side PTFE valve (adjustable) for setting the return flow with ground cone 14.5/23 for a collecting flask. Article Distilling controller Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 13 40 66700 co d e b e w WWQVD070 Distilling Links, Rettberg Distilling links with fused Liebig condenser, borosilicate glass 3.3, standard ground socket size 14, with offset vacuum stub with cone and dropping point. Ground cone NS 14 29 29 Condenser jacket length mm 160 250 400 Order No. 13 40 63214 13 40 63329 13 40 63429 co d e b e w WWQVD072 Distilling Links, Claisen Type, Rettberg Claisen-type distilling links with fused Liebig condenser, 2 standard ground joint-sock- ets14, with offset vacuum stub with dropping point, borosilicate glass 3.3. Ground cone NS 14 29 29 Condenser jacket length mm 160 250 400 Order No. 13 40 64214 13 40 64329 13 40 64429 co d e b e w WWQVD086 1 312 Distilling Receivers, Rettberg Distilling receivers with 1 socket, short outlet, borosilicate glass 3.3. Ground joint NS 1 14 29 Form bent in an angle of 105°C bent in an angle of 105°C Order No. 13 40 90014 13 40 90029 3 2 Vacuum receivers with drip tip and suction tube with ground cone and socket, borosilicate glass 3.3. Ground joint NS 2 14 29 3 14 29 Form straight straight bent in an angle of 105°C bent in an angle of 105°C Order No. 13 40 90114 13 40 90129 13 40 90214 13 40 90229

314

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Distillation Components Stillheads, Rettberg 1 Stillheads borosilicate glass 3.3 with 1 socket and 2 cones Cones NS 14.5/23 29/32 Sockets NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 Order No. 13 40 60914 13 40 60929 2 Two-neck adaptors borosilicate glass 3.3 with 2 sockets and 1 cone, with parallel necks Cones NS 14.5/23 29/32 Sockets NS 14.5/23 29/32 Order No. 13 40 60514 13 40 60529 3 Claisen heads borosilicate glass 3.3 with 2 sockets and 2 cones Cones NS 14.5/23 29/32 Sockets NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 Order No. 13 40 61114 13 40 61129 Bends, Rettberg Ground joint NS at bottom 4 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 5 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 6 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 Ground joint NS on side Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 Socket 14.5/23 Socket 29/32 Socket 29/32 Socket 14.5/23 Angle ° 90 90 75 75 90 90 90 90 Order No. 13 40 61214 13 40 61229 13 40 61314 13 40 61329 13 40 61414 13 40 61429 13 40 61514 13 40 61529 Distilling Receivers, Rettberg side socket Bredt-type distilling receivers inclined receiver, with 4 flasks, incl. clamps, borosilicate glass 3.3. Flask vol. ml 25 50 100 vertical ground joints NS cone/socket 14/23 / 14/23 14/23 / 14/23 29/32 / 29/32 Flask ground joint NS 14/23 14/23 14/23 NS 14/23 14/23 29/32 Individual parts Article Receiver with 1 socket NS 14/23 and 1 cone NS 14/23 Receiver with 1 socket NS 29/32 and 1 cone NS 29/32 Distributor with 1 socket NS 14/23 and 4 cones NS 14/23 Distributor with 1 socket NS 29/32 and 4 cones NS 14/23 Flask NS 14/23, capacity 25 ml Flask NS 14/23, capacity 50 ml 7 Flask NS 14/23, capacity 100 ml Flask NS 14/23, capacity 250 ml Separators, Cooling Traps Cooling Traps, Rettberg Order No. 13 40 91112 13 40 91115 13 40 91110 Order No. 13 40 91214 13 40 91229 13 40 91234 13 40 91239 13 40 20114 13 40 20117 13 40 20124 13 40 20136 co d e b e w WWQVD063 2 1 co d e b e w 3 WWQVD066 4 5 6 co d e b e w WWQVD087 7 Cooling traps made of borosilicate glass 3.3, one-piece, GL 45 with cap at top, side connections with GL 14 threads with caps and plastic hose connectors. Volume approx. ml 250 Dewar vessel to match: page 640, Order No. 17 50 10309. Order No. 13 40 51036 co d e b e w WWQVD085 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 313

315

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Separators, Cooling Traps Cooling Traps, Rettberg co d e b e w WWQVD084 Vol. approx. l 100 1 250 100 2 250 Cooling traps made of borosilicate glass 3.3, two-piece, side connections with hose connectors or ground joints, incl. Keck clamp. side connections Tubing connectors Tubing connectors Cone/socket NS 29 Cone/socket NS 29 Bottom part cone NS 29 45 29 45 Top part socket NS 29 45 29 45 13 40 50024 13 40 50036 13 40 50124 13 40 50136 Order No. 1 2 Dewar vessel to match: page 640, Order No. 17 50 10309. Cooling Traps, Rettberg Cooling Traps Lower section removable, complete unit, suitable for use in vacuum conditions, 3.3 borosilicate glass, capacity approx 500 ml (condensate liquid approx 200 ml). Lower section with small flange, 50 mm, seal and clamp. Upper section with 2 small lateral flanges 16 mm (thick-walled), for fitting to high vacuum leads, metal flange components and similar. Article Cooling trap, 2-piece Cooling trap 2-part with an additional small flange DN 16 (standard flange) for fit- ting a Pirani probe Supplied without the stand shown in the illustration. Accessories Article Clamp-ring holder with rod for fastening the cooling trap to a stand Order No. 13 40 51144 13 40 51244 Order No. 13 40 51410 Cooling Traps, Rettberg Cooling Traps Lower section removable, complete unit, suitable for use in vacuum conditions, boro- silicate glass 3.3, capacity approx 1000 ml (liquid condensate volume approx 500 ml) Lower section with flange DN 60, seal and clamp Upper section with 2 small lateral flanges DN 25 mm (thick-walled), for fitting to high vacuum leads, metal flange components and similar. Article Cooling trap 2-piece Cooling trap 2-part with an additional small flange DN 16 (standard flange) for fitting a Pirani probe Supplied without the stand shown in the illustration. Accessories Order No. 13 40 51154 13 40 51254 Article Clamp-ring holder with rod for fastening the cooling trap on a stand Order No. 13 40 51420 Cooling Trap with Dewar Vessel, KGW-Isotherm The cooling traps KF 29-GL and KFL 29-GL consist of a Dewar vessel Type 12 C or 18 C, the cooling trap with GL 18 glass thread and PTFE-Olive, as well as a plastic top ring. The type KF 29-GL-A and KFL 29-GL-A additionally have a spout GL 32 with a screw cap at the cooling finger. Further sizes and connections available on request. The cold traps are produced solely from borosilicate glass 3.3 (DIN/ISO 3585). Type 3 KF 29-GL KFL 29-GL 4 KF 29-GL-A KFL 29-GL-A Dewar 12 C 18 C 12 C 18 C Condensate volume ml 150 250 150 250 Order No. 10 50 12900 10 50 12901 10 50 12910 10 50 12911 co d e b e w WWQVD169 co d e b e w WWQVD170 3 314 4

316

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Separators, Cooling Traps Cooling Trap made of Stainless Steel, KGW-Isotherm Stainless steel cooling trap with Dewar flask made of borosilicate glass 3.3 type 18C or stainless steel Dewar flask type DSS 2000. To condensate water, solvents, or gases in connection with a vacuum pump. Applications: • Laboratory technology • Medical engineering • Life science • Vacuum engineering Characteristics: • Reliable and easy handling • No stand material for holding the cooling trap necessary • Dewar flasks according to DIN 12492 • Protective casing of Dewar flask made of blue coated metal, aluminum stucco or stain- less steel • For liquid cooling agents, e.g. LN2 (approx. -196°C) • For solid cooling agents CO2 (approx. -77°C) with solvent (CO2 wire basket necessary) Dewar flask type 18 C Technical data: Dewar flask type DSS 2000 Material: (DURAN) borosilicate glass 3.3 ISO 3585 Stainless/nickel chromium steel Coolant capacity: approx. 1.6 liter Coolant compartment: unpressurized Support ring: Cooling trap: Connections: Two-piece: Material: Condensate capacity: 200 ml Pressure range: Pressure: approx. 1.2 liter unpressurized PE, white, two-piece PE, white, two-piece KF54V KF NW 16 KF NW 50 V2A / 1.4301 vacuum to max. 10-6 mbar to max. 3 bar overpressure 1 2 3 Article 1 Cold trap made of stainless steel KF54V with Dewar Vessel made of borosi- 2 Cold trap made of stainless steel KF54V with Dewar Vessel made of stain- licate glass 3.3 less steel 3 CO2 wire basket for cold trap type 18 C for easy handling 3 CO2 wire basket for cold trap type DSS 2000 for easy handling Order No. 10 50 11710 10 50 11711 10 50 11720 10 50 11721 Standard Ground Components, Threaded Components co d e Joint Cones and Sockets, Conical, Rettberg b DIN 12242, made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Joint sockets and cones Ground joint NS 5/13 7/16 10/19 12/21 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 34/35 45/40 60/46 71/51 85/55 100/60 6 Socket Order No. 13 40 11005 13 40 11007 13 40 11010 13 40 11012 13 40 11014 13 40 11019 13 40 11024 13 40 11029 13 40 11034 13 40 11045 13 40 11060 13 40 11071 13 40 11085 13 40 11100 5 Cone Order No. 13 40 11105 13 40 11107 13 40 11110 13 40 11112 13 40 11114 13 40 11119 13 40 11124 13 40 11129 13 40 11134 13 40 11145 13 40 11160 13 40 11171 13 40 11185 13 40 11101 Joint cones with extension 4 Ground joint NS 14/23 19/26 24/29 Order No. 13 40 11314 13 40 11319 13 40 11324 Ground joint NS 29/32 34/35 45/40 Order No. 13 40 11329 13 40 11334 13 40 11345 e w WWQVD034 4 5 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 315

317

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components 2 1 Standard Ground Components, Threaded Components Conical Ground Joints, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass conical ground joints acc. to DIN 12250. 1 Joint-cones NS Tubing Ø mm 5/13 4 7/16 6 10/19 8 12/21 11 14/23 13 19/26 17 24/29 22 2 Joint-sockets NS Tubing Ø mm 5/13 8 7/16 10 10/19 13 12/21 15 14/23 17 19/26 22 24/29 28 Overall L mm 120 120 120 120 120 120 150 Order No. 18 36 30001 18 36 30002 18 36 30003 18 36 30004 18 36 30005 18 36 30006 18 36 30007 Overall L mm 120 120 120 120 120 15 135 Order No. 18 36 30101 18 36 30102 18 36 30103 18 36 30104 18 36 30105 18 36 30106 18 36 30107 NS Tubing Ø mm 29/32 26 34/35 30 45/40 40 60/46 56 71/51 65 85/55 80 Overall L mm 150 150 150 180 200 200 Order No. 18 36 30008 18 36 30009 18 36 30010 18 36 30011 18 36 30012 18 36 30013 NS Tubing Ø mm 29/32 34 34/35 40 45/40 50 60/46 65 71/51 75 85/55 90 Overall L mm 135 150 150 180 200 200 Order No. 18 36 30108 18 36 30109 18 36 30110 18 36 30111 18 36 30112 18 36 30113 co d e b e w WWQVD035 Spherical Joints, DIN 12244, Rettberg made of borosilicate glass 3.3 4 Ground joint KS 13/2 13/5 19/9 29/15 35/201) 40/25 51/30 64/40 1) Non-DIN size 3 Dish Order No. 13 40 12013 13 40 12015 13 40 12019 13 40 12029 13 40 12035 13 40 12040 13 40 12051 13 40 12065 4 Ball Order No. 13 40 12113 13 40 12115 13 40 12119 13 40 12129 13 40 12135 13 40 12141 13 40 12151 13 40 12165 5 Spherical Ground Joints, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass spherical ground joints acc. to DIN 12265. Balls 5 KS Tubing Ø mm 13 8 19 13 29 19 Overall L mm 100 100 120 Order No. 18 36 35013 18 36 35019 18 36 35029 Overall L mm 100 100 120 Order No. 18 36 35113 18 36 35119 18 36 35129 KS Tubing Ø mm 40 30 51 36 64 48 Overall L mm 150 150 150 Order No. 18 36 35040 18 36 35051 18 36 35064 KS Tubing Ø mm 40 30 51 36 64 48 Overall L mm 150 150 150 Order No. 18 36 35140 18 36 35151 18 36 35164 Sockets 6 KS Tubing Ø mm 13 8 19 13 29 19 More than 20,000 articles in this catalogue – and still more on our website ! 3 6 316

318

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Standard Ground Components, Threaded Components PTFE-Seals for Cones and Sockets, Rettberg PTFE seals for cones and sockets made of pure virgin PTFE prevent seizing-up and create a gas-tight and liquid-tight joint between standard ground (NS) glass components. Prac- tical, handy knurled grip allows easy separation of ground glass joints. Vacuum tight without seal grease. for ground joint NS Order No. 10 12.5 14.5 18.8 29.2 34.5 24 70 10010 24 70 10012 24 70 10014 24 70 10018 24 70 10029 24 70 10034 for ground joint NS Order No. 45 60 71 85 100 24 70 10045 24 70 10060 24 70 10070 24 70 10085 24 70 10100 BOLA Joint Sleeves, Bohlender Fluoroplastic (PTFE) ground joint (NS) sleeves, resistant to nearly all chemicals, with- stand temperatures between -200 and +260°C, for gas-tight and liquid-tight standard ground joints, suitable for vacuum up to 0.1 mbar. The grooves on the exterior prevent seizing-up of standard ground joints. The BOLA joint sleeves can easily be detached again and are re-usable. No need for vacuum grease. NS size Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 5 NS size Order No. 45/40 60/46 71/51 85/55 24 17 46010 24 17 46013 24 17 46014 24 17 46015 PU pc/Pack 5 1 1 1 24 17 46004 24 17 46005 24 17 46006 24 17 46007 24 17 46008 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Ground Joint Clamps, IDL Ground joint clamps made of spring steel, nickel-plated for use at very high tempera- tures over 150°C. for ground joint NS 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 34/35 14,5 18,8 24 29,2 co d e b e w WW7R3237 Order No. 13 00 14014 13 00 14019 13 00 14024 13 00 14029 co d e b e w WWQVD112 co d e b e w WWQVD036 Clamps for Conical Joints, Rettberg 1 Clamps for Conical Joints Fork-type clamps for conical joints, CrNi steel, without locking screw. for ground joint NS Order No. for ground joint NS Order No. 14.5 19 24 13 70 30014 13 70 30019 13 70 30024 29 45 Locking screw for all sizes 13 70 30029 13 70 30045 13 70 30145 1 Ground glass joint locking system made from POM Design: • NS 14.5 (max. flanged socket A.-Ø 18 mm): long version suitable for grip collar joint sleeves / short version suitable for disposable joint sleeves • NS 29 (max. flanged socket A.-Ø 34 mm): suitable for grip collar and disposable joint sleeves for ground joint NS 2 14.5, short version 3 14.5, long version 4 29 co d e b e w Order No. 10 70 80050 10 70 80051 10 70 80052 2 3 4 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 317

319

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Standard Ground Components, Threaded Components Clamps for Spherical Joints, Rettberg 1 Clamps for spherical joints Clamps for spherical joints, 18/8 steel, complete with locking screw. for ground joint KS Order No. for ground joint KS Order No. 40 50 65 13 19 28 35 13 70 31013 13 70 31019 13 70 31028 13 70 31035 2 Spherical joint locking system made from POM 19/9 for ground joint KS Order No. 29/15 10 70 80190 more sizes on request Ground Joint Clamps Inox 18/8, LAT 13 70 31040 13 70 31050 13 70 31065 for ground joint KS Order No. 10 70 80191 co d e b e w WWQVD037 1 2 co d e b e w WWW4U067 co d e b e w WW7R3238 318 Ground joint clamp (DBGM) for conical standard ground compounds: • Made of best special Cr-Ni-spring steel wire, thus very temperature- and chemical-re- sistant • Exact, safe fit even in case of tensile loading • Constant elasticity over several years • Hassle-free handling, thus simple, safe mounting and removing • In declared single packaging • Made in Germany Type Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp Ground Joint Clamp for ground joint NS 5 7.5 10 12.5 14.5 19 24 29 34.5 45 Order No. 10 20 10050 10 20 10075 10 20 10100 10 20 10125 10 20 10145 10 20 10190 10 20 10240 10 20 10290 10 20 10345 10 20 10450 Ground Joint Clamps, IDL Ground joint clamps made of polyacetal (POM), Delrin®. Melting point 175°C, heat-resist- ant up to approx. 150°C, very good chemical resistance. • Easy, safe and quick to fit and remove. • Each size in a different color for easy selection. • No glass damage. • No bending, constant shape. • No corrosion. • Cheaper than steel clamps, specially for spherical ground joints. Type KC for conical ground joints for ground joint NS 10 12 14 19 24 29 34 40 45 Colour green violet yellow blue green red orange yellow amber Order No. 13 00 12010 13 00 12012 13 00 12014 13 00 12019 13 00 12024 13 00 12029 13 00 12034 13 00 12040 13 00 12045

320

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Standard Ground Components, Threaded Components Screw Cap System, DURAN Group / IDL Fitting example: Slip the screw cap 1 and the silicone seal (VQM) 2 with the PTFE sleeve over the object (thermometer, tube etc.) to be passed through. The PTFE face has to point to the reaction chamber. Place the screw cap 1 over the silicone seal (VMQ) with the PTFE sleeve and screw it tight on the threaded tube 3. 2 1 co d e b e w WWEQ2096 3 Plastic Caps with DIN Threads, DURAN Group / IDL The plastic caps for laboratory glassware with threads are available in two plastic versions: Closed plastic caps (screw sealing caps) have seals that are fully coated with PTFE. Plas- tic caps with hole (screw connecting caps) are combined with matching silicon seals (VQM) with vulcanized PTFE sleeves for passing through tubes with various diameters. A combination with closed seals (septum) is available for piercing, e.g. for inoculating culture media. All parts can be sterilized. Plastic Screw Caps made of PBT with Aperture, DURAN Group / IDL Red screw caps with centric bore, temperature resistant up to +180°C. Autoclavable. Thread GL 14 18 25 32 45 Bore Ø mm 9.5 11 15 20 34 Order No. 13 29 22705 13 29 22706 13 29 22709 13 29 22708 13 29 22710 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Plastic Hose Connectors, DURAN Group / IDL with silicone seal (VMQ), for screw cap GL 14. Tmax = 140°C. Tubing connectors made of polypropylene O.D. mm 4 8.6 5 8.6 I.D. mm 5 4 Form straight curved Order No. 13 29 25506 13 29 24705 PU pc/Pack 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Accessories Article Order No. Spare seal made of silicone rubber (VMQ) for plastic tu- 13 29 22009 be connector ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 10 4 5 co d e b e w WWEQ2097 co d e b e w WWEQ2099 co d e b e w WWEQ2100 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 319

321

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components co d e b e w Standard Ground Components, Threaded Components Silicone Rubber Sealing Rings, (VMQ), DURAN Group / IDL WWEQ2101 Silicone rubber sealing rings with vulcanized-on PTFE sleeves and with centric bore (for screw caps with aperture). Tmax = +130°C (vapour) and +200°C (dry heat). Thread GL co d e b e w WWEQ2102 co d e b e w 320 WWEQ2104 for screw caps GL ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. O.D. mm 12 16 16 16 22 22 22 29 29 29 29 29 42 42 I.D. mm 6 6 8 10 8 10 12 10 12 14 16 18 26 32 for tube O.D. mm 5.5 – 6.5 5.5 – 6.5 7.5 – 9 9 – 11 7.5 – 9 9 – 11 11 – 13 9 – 11 11 – 13 13 – 15 15 – 17 17 – 19 25 – 27 31 – 33 Order No. 13 29 23406 13 29 23506 13 29 23508 13 29 23510 13 29 23708 13 29 23710 13 29 23712 13 29 23610 13 29 23612 13 29 23614 13 29 23616 13 29 23618 13 29 23826 13 29 23832 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Silicone Rubber Septa (VMQ), DURAN Group / IDL Seals for piercing (septa), for screw caps. Autoclavable. Heat resistance: +130°C (va- pour) and +200°C (dry heat). Thread GL O.D. mm 12 16 22 29 42 Thickness mm 2 2 2 2 3 Order No. 13 29 24605 13 29 24606 13 29 24608 13 29 24609 13 29 24610 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w WWEQ2103 Plastic Screw Caps made of PBT, DURAN Group / IDL Red screw caps with PTFE-coated silicone seals, temperature resistant up to +180°C. Autoclavable. Thread GL ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Silicone Rubber Seals, DURAN Group / IDL Silicone seal (VQM), PTFE-coated, suitable for PBT screw caps. Heat resistance: +130°C (vapour) and +200°C (dry heat). Good chemical resistance due to PTFE coating. Auto- clavable. Order No. 11 29 24008 11 29 24011 11 29 24013 11 29 24019 11 29 24028 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 Order No. 13 29 24808 13 29 24811 13 29 24813 13 29 24819 13 29 24828 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 14 18 18 18 25 25 25 32 32 32 32 32 45 45 14 18 32 25 45 14 18 25 32 45 14 18 25 32 45

322

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Standard Ground Components, Threaded Components BOLA Spherical Ground Joint Sleeves, Bohlender Spherical ground joint sleeves made of PTFE, with gripping ring and sealing rings on the outside, high-vacuum tight sealing (low leak rate: < 0,001 mbar × l/s); solid construc- tion for continued use. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Vacuum: Feature: PTFE from -200°C to +250°C +++ universal suitable reusable SS 13 19 29 35 Order No. 10 17 63402 10 17 63404 10 17 63406 10 17 63408 SS 40 51 64 Order No. 10 17 63412 10 17 63416 10 17 63418 Adapters with Ground Joints, Rettberg Adapters with standard ground (NS) joints, DIN 12257, borosilicate glass 3.3. Ground socket NS 14 29 45 29 Ground cone NS 29 14 29 45 Order No. 13 40 38012 13 40 38021 13 40 38042 13 40 38045 Other types are available on request Ground socket NS 60 29 29 29 Ground cone NS 29 60 71 100 Order No. 13 40 38060 13 40 38063 13 40 38071 13 40 38100 Adapters, Rettberg Cones with ground joint NS and hose connection, made of borosilicate glass 3.3. Ground joint NS Tube 1 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 2 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 3 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 4 Cone 14.5/23 Cone 29/32 5 Socket 14.5/23 Socket 29/32 6 Socket 14.5/23 Socket 29/32 rectangular rectangular straight straight rectangular rectangular rectangular rectangular rectangular rectangular Version Order No. 13 40 39414 13 40 39429 13 40 39614 13 40 39629 with stopcock NS 14.5/2.5 mm 13 40 39514 with stopcock NS 14.5/2.5 mm 13 40 39529 with PTFE- valve 0 – 3 mm 13 40 39814 with PTFE- valve 0 – 3 mm 13 40 39829 with stopcock NS 14.5/2.5 mm 10 70 00178 with stopcock NS 14.5/2.5 mm 10 70 00179 joint cap 10 70 00180 joint cap 10 70 00181 Screw Thread Adapters, Rettberg Screw thread adapters made of borosilicate glass 3.3 with ground cone DIN 12257. Order No. 13 40 01414 13 40 01419 13 40 01429 13 40 01814 13 40 01819 13 40 01829 13 40 02519 13 40 02529 13 40 03229 Thread GL 14 14 14 18 18 18 25 25 32 Cone NS 14/23 19/26 29/32 14/23 19/26 29/32 19/26 29/32 29/32 co d e b e w WWQVD055 co d e b e w WWQVD057 1 2 3 4 5 6 co d e b e w WWQVD149 Accessories, see: screw caps, silicon sealing rings, and septa. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 321

323

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components 2 4 1 3 5 Stopcocks, Valves Stopcocks, Rettberg One-way connecting stopcocks DIN 12541, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with bent tube stubs and plug lock mm Bore Ø 1 1.5 2.5 4 6 2.51) 41) 61) 10 Ground joint NS 10 12.5 14.5 18.8 21.5 12.5 14.5 18.8 29.2 1) Non-DIN size Order No. 1 Glass plugs, solid 2 PTFE stopper 3 Glass plugs, hollow Order No. 13 45 01101 13 45 01102 13 45 01103 13 45 01104 13 45 01106 13 45 01108 13 45 01109 13 45 01107 13 45 01110 Order No. 13 45 01302 13 45 01303 13 45 01304 13 45 01306 13 45 01308 13 45 01309 13 45 01307 13 45 01310 13 45 01203 13 45 01204 13 45 01206 13 45 01210 Two-way stopcocks DIN 12553, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with oblique parallel bores 6 7 co d e b e w WWQVD096 mm Bore Ø 2.5 4 Ground joint NS 14.5 18.8 Three-way stopcocks with T-bore made of borosilicate glass 3.3 mm Bore Ø 2.5 4 Ground joint NS 14.5 18.8 4 Glass plugs, solid 5 PTFE stopper Order No. 13 45 05103 13 45 05104 Order No. 13 45 05303 13 45 05304 6 Glass plugs, solid 7 PTFE stopper Order No. 13 45 06202 13 45 06203 Order No. 13 45 06402 13 45 06403 co d e b e w WWQVD174 8 9 AK 322 AT High-Vacuum Stopcocks, Rettberg High vacuum stopcocks DIN 12545, borosilicate glass 3.3, with glass stopcocks, hollow, replaceable, with bent tube stubs One-way type and angle type Bore Ø mm 2.5 4 6 8 10 15 20 Ground joint NS 14.5 18.8 21.5 24 29.2 45 50 Two-way type and bag type Bore Ø mm 2.5 4 6 8 10 15 20 1) not DIN standard Ground joint NS 14.5 18.8 21.5 24 29.2 45 50 8 One-way type Legs parallel Order No. 13 45 09203 13 45 09204 13 45 09206 13 45 09208 13 45 09210 13 45 09215 13 45 09220 AT Two-way type Legs T-shaped Order No. 13 45 11203 13 45 11204 13 45 11206 13 45 11208 13 45 11210 13 45 11215 13 45 11220 9 Angule type Legs at right angles Order No. 13 45 10203 13 45 10204 13 45 10206 13 45 10208 13 45 10210 13 45 10215 13 45 10220 AK Bag shape straight hole1) Order No. 13 45 12203 13 45 12204 13 45 12206 13 45 12208 13 45 12210

324

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Stopcocks, Valves PTFE Valves, Rettberg Standard version, PTFE spindle with additional sealing ring, glass part in borosilicate glass 3.3, with overturn guard. 1 3 co d e b e w WWQVD098 4 co d e b e w WWQVD097 Valve type 1 Straight valve Straight valve 2 Angled valve Angled valve 3 Burette valve straight 4 Burette valve lateral Passage mm 0 – 3 0 – 6 0 – 3 0 – 6 0 – 3 0 – 3 Tubing O.D. mm 8 10 8 10 8 8 Order No. 13 45 15001 13 45 15006 13 45 15011 13 45 15016 13 45 15021 13 45 15031 Vacuum Valves, Rettberg Adjustable high-vacuum valves with PTFE spindle, borosilicate glass 3.3. Valve type 5 Straight valve 6 Straight valve 6 Straight valve 6 Straight valve 6 Straight valve 6 Straight valve 7 Angle valve 7 Angle valve 7 Angle valve 8 Angled valve 8 Angled valve 8 Angled valve Passage mm 0 – 0.25 0 – 4 0 – 6 0 – 10 0 – 15 0 – 20 0 – 0.25 0 – 4 0 – 6 0 – 10 0 – 15 0 – 20 Stub tube O.D. mm 9 10 10 14 24 32 9 10 10 14 24 32 Order No. 10 70 80082 10 70 80084 10 70 80086 10 70 00172 13 45 16015 10 70 00173 10 70 80182 10 70 80184 10 70 80186 10 70 00171 13 45 16115 10 70 00167 2 5 8 7 6 High-Vacuum Valves, Rettberg High vacuum valves with fine thread, PTFE or glass spindle, glass part made of borosili- cate glass 3.3, glass spindle especially for use in low temperature ranges. 9 co d e b e w WWQVD187 Valve type Straight valve Straight valve Straight valve Straight valve 1) Angled valve Angled valve Angled valve Angled valve 1) Passa- ge mm Stub tube outer Ø mm 0 – 6 0 – 8 0 – 10 0 – 15 0 – 6 0 – 8 0 – 10 0 – 15 9 11 13 20 9 11 13 20 Version 9 PTFE spindle Order No. 10 70 00143 10 70 00144 10 70 00145 10 70 00146 10 70 00105 10 70 00107 10 70 00109 10 70 00108 AT Glass spindle Order No. 10 70 00243 10 70 00244 10 70 00245 10 70 00205 10 70 00207 10 70 00209 1) 15 mm with standard thread AT 9 AT Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 323

325

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Stopcocks, Valves Stopcocks, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg 2 Quartz glass one-and three-way stopcocks acc. to DIN 12541 and DIN 12554. 1 One-way conical stopcocks (cone 1:10) Nominal size Tube stub length approx. mm 100 100 110 120 120 Tube stub length approx. mm 100 120 120 120 Order No. 18 36 78002 18 36 78003 18 36 78004 18 36 78006 18 36 78010 Order No. 18 36 78102 18 36 78104 18 36 78106 18 36 78110 1 2 3 4 6 10 2 4 6 10 Bore mm 1.5 ±0.3 2.5 ±0.3 4.0 ±0.4 6.0 ±0.4 10.0 ±0.5 Bore mm 2.5 ±0.25 4.0 ±0.5 6.0 ±0.5 10.0 ±0.5 2 Three-way stopcocks, T-bore Nominal size BOLA GL 2- and 3-Way Stopcocks, Bohlender T-shaped bore and three connections with GL thread. Cylindrical stopcock plug for good tightness, stop valve with mark of flow direction. Suitable for pressure up to max. 6 bar, or for vacuum. Universal chemical resistance, the flowing product is only exposed to PTFE. For distributing liquids or gases. Quick and easy disconnection of flow. Connection of tubing or tubes by means of BOLA Laboratory Screw Joints Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Pressure: Vacuum: PTFE from -30°C to +150°C +++ universal 6 bar suitable Type 3 2-way 2-way 2-way 4 3-way 3-way 3-way 5 3-way 3-way 3-way Bore shape stopcock Bore Ø mm Connection thread GL I I I L L L T T T 4 6 8 4 6 6 4 4 6 14 18 25 14 18 25 14 18 25 Outer dimensi- ons L × D × H mm 54×20×38 64×30×45 78×40×57 64×47×43 74×57×57 78×59×57 74×57×57 74×57×57 88×69×57 Order No. 24 17 68414 24 17 68418 24 17 68425 24 17 68614 24 17 68618 24 17 68625 24 17 68814 24 17 68818 24 17 68825 4 BOLA Vacuum Adaptor GL, Bohlender D2 D1 Made of PTFE. Pass-through with o-ring made of FKM for safe assembly of standard filter funnels made of glass or plastic on flasks with thread GL 45. Lateral 2-step hose connec- tor made of PTFE for connection to a vacuum pump by means of suitable tubing. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Autoclave: Vacuum: PTFE from -15°C to +200°C +++ universal 121° suitable for thread GL 45 For funnel outlet max. Ø mm 22 2-step hose con- nector D1 outer Ø mm 9 Stufen-Olive D2 outer Ø mm 12 Order No. 10 17 65645 3 5 324

326

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Stopcocks, Valves BOLA Vacuum Adaptor with Ground Joint, Bohlender Made of PTFE. Pass-through with o-ring made of FKM for safe assembly of standard filter funnels made of glass or plastic on vessels and round- bottom flasks with ground joint. Lateral 2-step hose connector made of PTFE for connection to a vacuum pump by means of suitable tubing. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Autoclave: Vacuum: PTFE from -15°C to +200°C +++ universal 121° suitable ground cone NS 14/19 19/26 29/32 45/40 For funnel outlet max. Ø mm 8 11 22 22 2-step hose con- nector D1 outer Ø mm 9 9 9 9 Stufen-Olive D2 outer Ø mm 12 12 12 12 Order No. 10 17 65501 10 17 65502 10 17 65504 10 17 65506 Other valves see page 186 Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories Reaction Vessels, Rettberg Reaction vessels made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with temperature stabilizing ja- cket, cylindrical Outer bottom flat, inner bottom slightly curved, thread GL 80 at top with screwing cap GL 80 (PP), tangential tempering connections GL 18 . Vessel height w/o screw cap approx. mm 185 250 290 10 70 00055 10 70 00056 10 70 00057 Outer Ø approx. mm 130 130 160 Order No. Volume 500 1000 2000 D2 D1 co d e b e w WWQVD175 Supplied without the illustrated accessories Accessories Article Special screw head GL 80 made of PP, middle neck socket NS 29 Pressure compensation top for GL 18 with membrane filter Pressure compensation top for GL 14 with membrane filter lateral connection 2× GL18 and 2× GL14 with screwing caps Order No. 10 70 00058 10 70 00070 10 70 00071 Different tube feed-throughs see under gas distributor system on page 341 Reaction Vessels, Rettberg Cylindrical reaction vessels made of borosilicate glass 3.3, Schott flat flange with annu- lar groove. co d e b e w WWQVD102 Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 2000 2000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 10000 Overall H mm 75 120 110 175 310 200 160 220 270 320 380 350 Accessories: see following pages. flange DN O.D. mm 70 70 110 110 110 130 160 160 160 160 160 215 60 60 100 100 100 120 150 150 150 150 150 200 1 Bottom flat Order No. 13 42 10024 13 42 10036 13 42 10044 13 42 10054 13 42 10063 13 42 10163 13 42 10263 13 42 10268 13 42 10271 13 42 10273 13 42 10276 13 42 10286 2 Bottom round Order No. 13 42 11024 13 42 11036 13 42 11044 13 42 11054 13 42 11063 13 42 11163 13 42 11263 13 42 11268 13 42 11271 13 42 11273 13 42 11276 13 42 11286 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 325

327

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components co d e b e w WWEQ2106 Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories Flat Flange Beakers, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Flange with groove, vacuum resistant due to the wall thickness and geometry. Heat- ing only in a water or oil bath. Into the groove an O-ring seal can the be used. DN Flange Vol. ml full cap. approx. ml 1000 1915 2000 3070 3000 4090 1000 1360 2000 2200 3000 3220 150 150 150 120 120 120 O.D. mm 184 184 184 158 158 158 Beaker O.D. mm 159 153 153 130 130 130 Height mm 120 200 265 125 200 290 perm. operating pressure bar 0.51) 0.51) 0.51) 0.51) 0.51) 0.51) Order No. 13 24 39154 13 24 39163 13 24 39168 13 24 39454 13 24 39463 13 24 39468 1) At max. 250°C. Reaction Vessels, Rettberg Spherical reaction vessels made of borosilicate glass 3.3, Schott flat flange with annular groove. Volume flange DN Order No. ml 2000 4000 6000 10000 20000 100 100 120 150 200 O.D. mm 165 207 236 279 345 Overall H mm 215 250 295 360 440 13 42 12063 13 42 12071 13 42 12176 13 42 12286 13 42 12391 Accessories: see following pages. Flat Flange Flasks, Round Bottom, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Flange with groove, vacuum resistant due to the wall thickness and geometry. Into the groove an O-ring seal can the be used. DN Flange Vol. ml 2000 4000 6000 10000 20000 full cap. approx. ml 2610 4660 6675 11720 21415 100 100 100 100 100 O.D. mm 138 138 138 138 138 Flask O.D. mm 165 206 236 280 350 Height mm 215 265 295 340 410 perm. operating pressure bar 1.01) 1.01) 1.01) 0.51) 0.51) Order No. 13 24 39563 13 24 39571 13 24 39576 13 24 39586 13 24 39591 1) At max. 250°C (temperature difference in the glass wall max. 30°C). Flat Flange Reaction Vessels, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Flange with groove, vacuum resistant due to the wall thickness and geometry. Into the groove an O-ring seal can the be used. Vol. ml 100 250 full cap. approx. ml 195 315 1) At max. 250°C. 60 60 DN Flange O.D. mm 100 100 Vessel Ø Height mm 70 70 mm 85 125 perm. operating pressure bar 2.51) 2.51) Order No. 13 24 39024 13 24 39036 co d e b e w WWQVD104 co d e b e w WWEQ2107 co d e b e w WWEQ2108 326

328

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories Flat Flange Reaction Vessels, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Flange with groove, vacuum resistant due to the wall thickness and geometry. Into the groove an O-ring seal can the be used. Vol. DN Flange full cap. approx. ml ml 500 740 1000 1395 2000 2620 O.D. mm 138 138 138 100 100 100 1) At max. 250°C. 2) Vessel completely cylindrical. Vessel Ø Height mm 1062) 1062) 140 mm 120 205 270 perm. operating pressure bar 1.51) 1.51) 1.51) Order No. 13 24 39044 13 24 39054 13 24 39063 Flat Flange Reaction Vessels, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Flange with groove, vacuum resistant due to the wall thickness and geometry. Into the groove an O-ring seal can the be used. Vol. full cap. approx. ml ml 4000 5765 6000 7320 10000 11935 DN Flange O.D. mm 150 184 150 184 150 184 Vessel Ø Height mm 200 215 240 mm 290 320 410 perm. operating pressure bar 1.01) 1.01) 0.51) Order No. 13 24 39071 13 24 39076 13 24 39086 1) At max. 250°C. Reaction Vessels, Rettberg 1 Cylindrical reaction vessels made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Schott Flat Flange with annular groove, without graduation, round bottom with drain valve, coming off at the side with screw thread and quick release tube connector (PP). flange DN Order No. Volume ap- Outer Ø approx. mm 70 70 110 110 110 130 160 160 160 160 160 215 Overall height without valve approx. mm 75 120 110 175 310 200 160 220 270 320 380 350 13 42 12424 13 42 12436 13 42 12444 13 42 12454 13 42 12463 13 42 12563 13 42 12663 13 42 12668 13 42 12671 13 42 12673 13 42 12676 13 42 12686 1 co d e b e w WWEQ2109 co d e b e w WWEQ2110 co d e b e w WWQVD166 prox. ml 100 250 500 1000 2000 2000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 10000 prox. ml 2000 4000 6000 10000 20000 60 60 100 100 100 120 150 150 150 150 150 200 100 100 120 150 200 co d e b e w 2 Spherical reaction vessels made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Schott Flat Flange with annual groove, without graduation, with drain valve, coming off at the side with screw thread and quick release tube connector (PP). With longer valve shaft, suitable for heating element with hole at base. Volume ap- flange DN Outer Ø approx. mm 165 207 236 279 345 Overall height without valve approx. mm 215 250 295 360 440 Order No. 13 42 12763 13 42 12771 13 42 12776 13 42 12786 13 42 12791 2 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 327

329

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories Reaction Vessels, Rettberg co d e b e w WWQVD105 co d e b e w WWQVD106 co d e b e w WWQVD107 1 328 Reaction vessels with temperature stabilizing jacket, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, cylindrical, flat bottom, interior bottom slightly curved, Schott flat flange with annular groove, without graduation, tangential temperature stabilizing connections, choice of con- nections see below. Vol. ml 100 250 500 1000 2000 2000 2000 4000 6000 10000 20000 flange DN 60 60 100 100 100 120 150 150 150 200 200 O.D. mm 90 90 130 130 130 160 190 190 190 250 350 I.D. mm 60 60 100 100 100 120 150 150 150 215 315 H mm 135 185 200 250 380 300 250 360 480 470 600 with GL thread Order No. 13 42 13241 13 42 13361 13 42 13441 13 42 13541 13 42 13631 13 42 14631 13 42 15631 13 42 15711 13 42 15761 13 42 16861 13 42 16911 w. thick-walled GL 32 Order No. 10 70 13244 10 70 13364 10 70 13444 10 70 13544 10 70 13634 10 70 14634 10 70 15634 10 70 15714 10 70 15764 10 70 16864 10 70 16914 Order No. with final digit 1: Temp. stab. jacket with thread GL 18 Order No. with final digit 4: Temp. stab. jacket with thick-walled GL 32 (adapter accord- ing to list of accessories) Accessories: see following pages Reaction Vessels, Rettberg Reaction vessels with temperature stabilizing jack, made of borosilicate glass 3.3, cylindrical, round bottom, with drain valve low empty space, Schott flat flange with annu- lar groove, without graduation, tangential temperature stabilizing connections, choice of connections: see below. Without distribution ring for temperature stabilizing media Vol. flange ml DN 100 60 250 60 500 100 1000 100 2000 100 3000 100 4000 100 1000 120 2000 120 3000 120 2000 150 3000 150 4000 150 5000 150 6000 150 10000 200 20000 200 I.D. mm temp. H O.D. mm mm 90 60 70 90 60 125 140 100 110 140 100 180 140 100 300 190 150 230 190 150 280 160 120 150 160 120 230 190 150 230 190 150 190 190 150 250 190 150 300 190 150 350 190 150 400 250 200 400 300 240 560 with GL thread Order No. 13 42 22411 13 42 23611 13 42 24411 13 42 25411 13 42 26311 13 42 26811 13 42 27111 13 42 35411 13 42 36311 13 42 36811 13 42 46311 13 42 46811 13 42 47111 13 42 47311 13 42 47611 13 42 58611 13 42 59111 w. thick-walled GL 32 Order No. 10 70 22414 10 70 23614 10 70 24414 10 70 25414 10 70 26314 10 70 26814 10 70 27114 10 70 35414 10 70 36314 10 70 36814 10 70 46314 10 70 46814 10 70 47114 10 70 47314 10 70 47614 10 70 58614 10 70 59114 Order No. with final digit 1: Temp. stab. jacket with thread GL 18 Order No. with final digit 4: Temp. stab. jacket with thick-walled GL 32 (adapter accord- ing to list of accessoriess) Accessories: see following pages Reaction Vessel Lids, Rettberg Flat flange lids made of borosilicate glass 3.3, straight middle neck, side necks at angle of approx. 15° relative to middle neck or straight. 1 With middle neck flange DN 60 60 100 100 100 120 120 150 150 200 200 Middle neck NS 14.5/23 29/32 14.5/23 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 Order No. 13 42 80034 13 42 80035 13 42 80046 13 42 80047 13 42 80048 13 42 80051 13 42 80052 13 42 80057 13 42 80058 13 42 80061 13 42 80062 Continued on next page

330

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories 2 With middle neck and 1 side neck Middle neck NS flange DN 60 60 100 100 100 120 120 150 150 200 200 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 3 With middle neck and 2 side necks Middle neck NS flange DN 60 60 100 100 100 120 120 150 150 200 200 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 Side necks angled NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 Side necks angled NS 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 4 With middle neck and 3 side necks flange DN Middle neck NS Side necks angled NS 14.5/23 (2×) 14.5/23 (2×) 14.5/23 (2×) 29/32 (2×) 29/32 (2×) 29/32 (2×) 29/32 (2×) 29/32 (2×) 29/32 (2×) 29/32 (2×) 29/32 (2×) 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 Side necks straight NS 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 60 60 100 100 100 120 120 150 150 200 200 100 100 120 120 150 150 200 200 Order No. 13 42 81034 13 42 81035 13 42 81046 13 42 81047 13 42 81048 13 42 81051 13 42 81052 13 42 81057 13 42 81058 13 42 81061 13 42 81062 Order No. 13 42 82034 13 42 82035 13 42 82046 13 42 82047 13 42 82048 13 42 82051 13 42 82052 13 42 82057 13 42 82058 13 42 82061 13 42 82062 Order No. 13 42 83034 13 42 83035 13 42 83046 13 42 83047 13 42 83048 13 42 83051 13 42 83052 13 42 83057 13 42 83058 13 42 83061 13 42 83062 2 3 4 5 With middle neck and 3 side necks flange DN Middle neck NS Side necks angled NS 29/32 (3×) 29/32 (3×) 29/32 (3×) 29/32 (3×) 29/32 (3×) 29/32 (3×) 29/32 (3×) 29/32 (3×) 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 29/32 45/40 Side necks straight NS 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) 14.5/23 (1×) Order No. 13 42 84034 13 42 84035 13 42 84046 13 42 84047 13 42 84057 13 42 84058 13 42 84061 13 42 84062 Accessories: see following pages. Also available with other connections on request (e.g. thread, ground spherical joints, flanges etc.). 5 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 329

331

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories BOLA Tri-Clamp Adapters, Bohlender 1 BOLA Tri-Clamp GL adapters Fitting for transition of Tri-Clamp as per DIN 32 676 to a GL-threaded neck. Made of PTFE, temperature resistance -200°C to +250°C, universal chemical resistance. Plate Ø mm 25.5 25.5 25.5 34.0 34.0 34.0 50.5 50.5 50.5 50.5 91.0 91.0 91.0 Nominal size acc. to DIN DN 08 DN 10 DN 10 DN 10 DN 15 DN 20 DN 25 DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 65 DN 65 DN 65 for tube inner Ø mm 8 10 10 10 16 20 26 26 32 38 66 66 66 Thread GL Order No. 14 18 25 14 18 25 14 18 25 45 18 25 45 10 17 60102 10 17 60104 10 17 60106 10 17 60122 10 17 60124 10 17 60126 10 17 60142 10 17 60144 10 17 60146 10 17 60148 10 17 60172 10 17 60174 10 17 60176 BOLA Tri-Clamp multiple distributor Fitting for transition of Tri-Clamp as per DIN 32 676 to two or three GL-threaded necks. Made of PTFE, temperature resistance -200°C to +250°C, universal chemical resistance. Thread GL Bore Ø Order No. Plate Ø mm 25.5 2 34.0 3 50.5 50.5 91.0 Nominal size acc. to DIN DN 10 DN 20 DN 40 DN 40 DN 65 for tube inner Ø mm 10 20 38 38 66 2 × 14 2 × 14 3 × 14 3 × 18 3 × 18 mm 2 × 4.5 2 × 8.5 3 × 8.5 3 × 10.5 3 × 10.5 10 17 61103 10 17 61122 10 17 61142 10 17 61144 10 17 61172 4 BOLA adapter Tri-Clamp hose connector Fitting for transition of Tri-Clamp as per DIN 32 676 to a hose connector. Made of PTFE, temperature resistance -200°C to +250°C, universal chemical resistance. Plate Ø mm 25.5 34.0 50.5 Nominal size acc. to DIN DN 08 DN 10 DN 25 for tube inner Ø mm 8 10 26 Tube connector outer Ø mm 10.4 10.4 16.0 Order No. 10 17 61502 10 17 61522 10 17 61542 5 BOLA Tri-Clamp gaskets Silicone ring with double-sided, elastic washer made of PTFE. Suitable for Tri-Clamp connections as per DIN 32 676. Universal chemical resistance, the flowing product is only exposed to PTFE. Temperature resistance -60°C to +230°C, universal chemical re- sistance. Plate Ø Order No. mm 25.5 25.5 34.0 34.0 34.0 50.5 50.5 50.5 64.0 91.0 Nominal size acc. to DIN DN 08 DN 10 DN 10 DN 15 DN 20 DN 25 DN 32 DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 for tube inner Ø mm 8 10 10 16 20 26 32 38 50 66 10 17 63002 10 17 63004 10 17 63022 10 17 63024 10 17 63026 10 17 63042 10 17 63044 10 17 63046 10 17 63062 10 17 63072 O-Rings for Flat Flange Vessels, DURAN Group / IDL O-rings made of silicone (VMQ), transparent and highly elastic. Tmax = 200°C PU fits flange DN pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 5 Thickness mm 4 4 4 5 5 13 29 22534 13 29 22546 13 29 22551 13 29 22557 13 29 22561 Ø mm 75 110 133 157 215 60 100 120 150 200 Order No. 1 2 3 4 5 5 co d e b e w WWEQ2116 330

332

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories Quick Release Clamps for Flat Flange Vessels, DURAN Group / IDL Stainless steel quick release clamps (with 3 holding segments). fits flange DN 60 100 120 150 200 Order No. 13 29 07134 13 29 07146 13 29 07151 13 29 07157 13 29 07161 Reaction Vessel Accessories, Rettberg Accessories co d e b e w WWEQ2118 co d e b e w WWQVD108 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Order No. 13 42 90001 13 42 90002 10 70 00025 10 70 00026 10 70 00027 10 70 00028 10 70 00029 10 70 00031 10 70 00034 10 70 00036 10 70 00037 10 70 00038 Article 1 Cap GL 14, with tubing connector made of PP, straight 2 Cap GL 18, with tubing connector made of PP, straight 3 Adaption kit GL 18, made of plastic to quickly separate the hose connector without loss of liquids, (temp. -40 to +138°C) for reaction vessels with tempering connection GL 18, tubing connector 11 mm for laboratory hoses I.W. 8 to 10 mm 4 Adaption kit GL 32 to thread M 16×1 (temp. -60 to +200°C) for reaction vessels with tempering connection GL32, e.g. suitable to connect insulated metal hoses, consisting of special coupling cap, seal, stainless steel adapter M16×1 5 Adapter M 16×1 on hose nozzle 8.5 mm, stainless steel Adapter M 16×1 on hose nozzle 11 mm, stainless steel Adapter M 16×1 on hose nozzle 13 mm, stainless steel 6 insulated metal tube (-90 to +150°C), M 16×1, 100 cm long insulated metal tube (-60 to +350°C), M 16×1, 100 cm long 7 Adaption kit GL 32 on glass olive, olive 9 mm for reaction vessels with tempering connection GL 32, for laboratory hoses I.W. 6 to 8 mm, consisting of special coupling cap, seal, glass adapter with tubing connector 9 mm, temp. -60 to +200°C for laboratory hoses I.W. 8 to 10 mm, tubing connector 11 mm Adaption kit GL 32 to glass olive Adaption kit GL 32 to glass olive for laboratory hoses I.W. 16 to 18 mm, tubing connector 19 mm Flange clamps 8 Article for DN 60, stainless steel for DN 100, stainless steel for DN 120, stainless steel for DN 150, stainless steel for DN 200, stainless steel 9 Flange closures Article for hanging in carry-rack, for NW 100 for hanging in carry-rack, for NW 150 for hanging in carry-rack, for NW 200 Order No. 13 42 90234 13 42 90246 13 42 90251 13 42 90257 13 42 90261 Order No. 13 42 90346 13 42 90357 13 42 90361 AT Flange seals for DN 150 DN 200 DN 60 DN 120 DN 100 co d e b e w Version Silicone Order No. 13 42 90457 13 42 90461 13 42 90434 13 42 90451 13 42 90446 Silicone, FEP-coated Order No. 13 42 90557 13 42 90561 13 42 90534 13 42 90551 13 42 90546 AT AT To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 331

333

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components co d e b e w WWQ7J001 1 Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories Supporting Devices for Reaction Vessels, BOCHEM 1 Three-fold holder for Schott flat flanges made of rust-proof special steel (material 1.4571), for alternate removal of vessel and lid. The special quick release closure is designed to join the two flat flanges of the reaction vessel and the lid as well as to provide individual support for the reaction vessel and/or lid. fits flange NW Order No. 13 05 17021 13 05 17023 13 05 17024 100 150 200 2 Article Centering stand holder Order No. 13 05 17031 2 Centering stand holder made of stainless steel with stand rod 300 mm, 15 mm dia., material 18/10, DN 15. co d e b e w WWQVD154 Small Flange Connection System (KF) with Glass Flanges, Rettberg High-vacuum small flange connections made of borosilicate glass 3.3, complete connec- tion system, consisting of: 3 Glass flange, standard acc. to DIN 28403, also suitable for connecting DIN metal flanges 6 5 DN 10 16 25 Order No. 13 40 13010 13 40 13016 13 40 13025 7 8 3 4 4 DN 10 16 25 Glass flange, thick-walled Order No. 13 40 14010 13 40 14016 13 40 14025 DN 40 50 DN 40 50 5 Inner centering ring made of PTFE, with Viton O-ring, acc. to DIN 28403 DN 10 16 25 Order No. 13 40 15010 13 40 15016 13 40 15025 DN 40 50 6 Inner centering ring made of PTFE, with FEP-coated silicone O-ring, acc. to DIN 28403 DN 10 16 25 Order No. 13 40 15110 13 40 15116 13 40 15125 DN 40 50 7 Three-point clamp made of aluminium with stainless steel screws for DN 10 16 25 10 16 25 Order No. 13 40 16010 13 40 16016 13 40 16025 Order No. 13 40 17010 13 40 17016 13 40 17025 for DN 40 50 40 50 8 U-clamp made of plastic, black, with toggle screw (only for standard flanges) for DN for DN Order No. 13 40 13040 13 40 13050 Order No. 13 40 14040 13 40 14050 Order No. 13 40 15040 13 40 15050 Order No. 13 40 15140 13 40 15150 Order No. 13 40 16040 13 40 16050 Order No. 13 40 17040 13 40 17050 9 Smll flange screw fittings for thick-walled and standard small flanges DN 10 16 25 Order No. 10 70 80021 10 70 80022 10 70 80023 DN 40 50 Order No. 10 70 80024 10 70 80025 9 332

334

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components co d e b e w WWQVD014 co d e b e w WWQVD110 2 1 Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories Supporting Constructions for Reaction Vessels, Rettberg Mobile construction made of stainless steel for reaction vessels of up to 6 to 20 ltr. ca- pacity, with 4 steering rollers, brakes, complete with stand (tube dia. 25 mm) for fitting stirrers etc., optionally with flange holder and closure, open at front bottom (to put in collecting vessels). Technical data: Material: Dimensions: cpl. 18/8 steel 75 × 75 × 185 cm (L × W × H) Article Rack without flange holder Rack with flange holder NW 150 Rack with flange holder NW 200 Mobile auxiliary rack 55 × 75 × 185 cm Supplied without the illustrated accessories More racks on request. Order No. 13 42 91200 13 42 91205 13 42 91220 10 70 00212 Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts KPG Stirrer Shafts and KPG Stirrer Bearing, Rettberg KPG Stirrer Shafts made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with moveable PTFE sickle blade, to fit joint-socket size 29, in overall length of 340 mm and more with perforated blade. KPG part Ø mm 10 1 10 10 10 Length mm 310 340 370 440 Order No. 13 70 40031 13 70 40034 13 70 40037 13 70 40044 2 KPG Stirrer Bearing made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with ground-glass joint, grease cup and KPG part. Cone NS 29/32 29/32 45/40 KPG part Ø mm 10 16 16 Installed length mm 135 155 165 Order No. 13 70 40100 10 70 40101 10 70 40102 BUK Magnetic Stirrer Couplings With Ground Joint, Buddeberg A compact design, permanent magnetic coupling allows space-saving installation. Ball bearings ensure rapid, easy replacement to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Magnetic stirrer couplings are available in stainless steel, Hastelloy®, titanium, zirconium and other materials or offering alternative torque levels. Stirring shafts made from similar materials or glass may be fitted. Technical data: Material no.: Temperature: Seals: Bearings: 1.4435 (AISI 316L) max. 240°C Viton Ball bearings stainless steel BUK with ground joint 29/32 3 Type Vol. max. ml BUK K20 S1 500 BUK K40 S1 1000 BUK K60 S1 3000 BUK K90 S1 5000 Viscosity up to mPa/s 500 1500 6000 10000 Torque N/cm 20 40 60 90 Speed rpm 2500 2500 2500 2500 Order No. 13 14 10120 13 14 10140 13 14 10160 13 14 10190 BUK with ground joint 45/40 4 Type BUK K60 S2 5000 BUK K90 S2 10000 Vol. max. ml Visc. up to mPa/s 6000 10000 Torque N/cm 60 90 Speed rpm 2500 2500 Order No. 13 14 10260 13 14 10290 3 4 Drive shaft supplied with 6 mm external square stub and brass adapter Ø 8 mm. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 333 Continued on next page

335

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts Connection couplings VK Connection between magnetic stirer coupling and stirring shaft. 1 Type VK 7 × 8 VK 7 × 10 for stirrer shaft Ø mm 8 10 Order No. 10 14 50362 10 14 50363 Alternativ diamters available on request. Flexible glass stirrer coupling For stirring tasks in glass devices and for compensation of installation inaccuracies. With clamping screw for 6 to 10 mm clamping width. Specification Flex coupling receiver inner diam. 10 mm Type 2 K 10 K 10/13 Flex coupling receiver inner diam. 10/13 mm 3 PK 10 PK 10/13 Flex coupling receiver inner diam. 10/13 mm 4 FK 1 Flex coupling receiver inner diam. 10 mm with clamping pin made of stainless steel Ø 8 mm for the use with chucks Order No. 10 14 50547 10 14 50554 10 14 50585 10 14 50592 10 14 50595 Double cardan coupling DCK 1 With 8 mm dia. hexagonal input drive receiver and 6 mm square socket drive output. Type 5 DCK 1 Specification Stainless steel, L = 110 mm Order No. 10 14 51414 BOLA Stirrer Bearings, Bohlender 6 Type GT Made of borosilicate glass, with GL male thread and PPS screw cap, PTFE shaft guide with adjustable special PTFE/FPM gasket. All parts can be easily exchanged. Order No. Thread GL Cone NS for stirrer shaft Ø mm 8 10 10 29/32 29/32 45/40 25 25 25 Shaft guides incl. special gasket 7 Article Shaft guide for stirrer shaft Ø 8 mm Shaft guide for stirrer shaft Ø 10 mm 24 17 42508 24 17 42509 24 17 42512 Order No. 24 17 42558 24 17 42559 Order No. 10 17 62412 24 17 42413 24 17 42414 8 Type PTFE With adjustable special PTFE/FPM coating Cone NS Thread GL 29/32 29/32 29/32 18 25 25 for stirrer shaft Ø mm 6 8 10 BOLA Stirring Shafts and Additional Blades, Bohlender BOLA stirring shafts are made of a stainless steel shaft with PTFE shell and an all-PTFE stirring unit. The stainless steel core provides the required strength, allowing them to be clamped in the chuck. The medium comes into contact with PTFE only. The stirring shafts are resistant to nearly all chemicals and can be used at high temperatures. Dimensions of the BOLA stirring shafts correspond to (KPG) glass stirring shafts, making them fully interchangeable. Discs 9 Length mm 350 350 350 600 350 600 Shaft Ø mm 6 6 10 10 10 10 Clamp Ø mm 4 4 8 8 8 8 Stirring radius mm 25 38 50 50 75 75 Order No. 10 17 69812 10 17 69816 10 17 69822 10 17 69826 10 17 69832 10 17 69836 Continued on next page 2 4 1 3 5 6 8 7 9 334

336

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts Crescents AT Length Propellers AK Length mm 350 450 350 450 510 600 1000 800 mm 450 350 450 450 450 600 800 600 800 1200 1000 1000 350 350 350 600 Shaft Ø mm 8 8 10 10 10 10 10 16 Clamp Ø mm 6.5 6.5 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 14.0 Stirring radius mm 65 90 90 90 90 90 90 125 Order No. 24 17 37602 24 17 37608 24 17 37612 24 17 37614 24 17 37616 24 17 37618 10 17 67619 10 17 67622 Shaft Ø mm 6 8 8 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 6 6 8 10 Clamp Ø mm 4.0 6.5 6.5 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 14.0 14.0 4.0 4.0 6.5 8.0 Version 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 3-blades 4-blades 4-blades Stirring radius mm 50 75 75 50 75 75 75 140 140 140 140 200 25 40 50 100 Order No. 24 17 37808 24 17 37812 24 17 37814 10 17 67817 24 17 37818 24 17 37820 24 17 37822 24 17 39234 24 17 39240 10 17 69242 10 17 69246 10 17 69264 10 17 68212 10 17 68224 10 17 68418 10 17 68436 Anchors AL Length mm 350 350 450 600 350 450 600 800 800 1000 1200 One paddle AM Length mm 600 1000 Centrifugal AN Length mm 350 450 600 Shaft Ø mm 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 Shaft Ø mm 10 16 Shaft Ø mm 6 10 10 Clamp Ø mm 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 14.0 14.0 Clamp Ø mm 8.0 14.0 Clamp Ø mm 4.0 8.0 8.0 Stirring radius mm 40 × H 35 60 × H 40 80 × H 50 100 × H 60 80 × H 50 80 × H 50 100 × H 60 100 × H 60 130 × H 80 150 × H 120 150 × H 120 Order No. 10 17 68401 24 17 38402 10 17 68406 24 17 38410 10 17 68416 10 17 68417 24 17 38424 10 17 68428 10 17 68448 10 17 68458 10 17 68464 Stirring radius mm 110 140 Order No. 10 17 67908 10 17 67918 Stirring radius mm 50 90 90 Order No. 10 17 67704 10 17 67714 10 17 67716 AO BOLA Solo stirrer shafts Stainless steel shaft, PTFE-coated, with welded-up bottom end. Perfectly suited as basic stirring shaft for fitting with BOLA additional stirrer blades which can be positioned on the shaft with a freely selectable height and sense of rotation. Can also be used for manual stirring. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: PTFE -200°C up to +250°C almost universal AT AK AL AM AN AO Length mm 350 600 800 1000 1200 Ø Shaft mm 10 10 10 10 16 co d e b e w Clamp Ø mm 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 14.0 Order No. 10 17 67408 10 17 67420 10 17 67430 10 17 67434 10 17 67440 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 335

337

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts Additional Blades The ideal addition to the company’s existing stirring shafts with a fixed stirring unit. Addi- tional blades can be freely positioned in height and direction of rotation on any shaft with a diameter of 8 or 10 mm (a matching fork wrench is included with each additional blade). The blades themselves are made of PTFE while the fasteners are made of a special PTFE compound. High chemical and thermal resistance is thus guaranteed. With this “building block system”, users can assemble their very own stirrers as required. Article Propeller, three-blade 1 Propeller, three-blade Maxi propeller, three-blade Propeller, four-blade 2 Propeller, four-blade Propeller, four-blade Propeller, four-blade Propeller, four-blade 3 Anchor Anchor Anchor Blade 4 Blade Blade Blade 5 Impeller 6 Crescent for shaft-Ø mm 8 10 10 8 10 10 10 10 10 10 16 8 10 10 16 10 10 Stirring radius mm 75 75 140 50 100 140 140 200 80 × H 50 100 × H 60 150 × H 120 80 80 110 140 60 90 Order No. 24 17 44008 24 17 44010 24 17 44110 10 17 64808 10 17 64810 10 17 64820 10 17 64836 10 17 64842 24 17 44516 10 17 64520 10 17 64544 24 17 44608 10 17 64610 24 17 44612 10 17 64616 10 17 64308 10 17 64210 BOLA U-Shaped Stirrer Shafts EX, Bohlender PTFE-EX jacketed stainless steel shaft, U-shaped stirrer blade completely made of static dissipative PTFE-EX. Good chemical resistance, the product is only exposed to PTFE. Applications: Strong, tangential flow with high shear rate in the margin area, little sedi- ments on the wall of the vessel. Ideal for mixing viscous liquids. Earthing is made for ex- ample via a stirrer bearing made of PTFE-EX. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Conductivity: Dimensions according to drawing: A = 40 mm, B = 60 mm, C = 25 mm, D = 30 mm PTFE-EX from -200°C to +250°C ++ very good 106 Ohm Length mm 350 Ø Shaft mm 8 Clamp Ø mm 6.5 Order No. 10 17 68402 BOLA Propeller Stirrer Shafts EX, Bohlender PTFE-EX jacketed stainless steel shaft, propeller completely made of static dissipative PTFE-EX with three 45° angled angular blades. Good chemical resistance, the product is only exposed to PTFE-EX. Applications: The product is sucked bottom-up, good axial flow with low shear force. Earthing is made for example via a stirrer bearing made of PTFE-EX. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Conductivity: Dimensions according to drawing: A = 75 mm, B = 18 mm, C = 3 mm PTFE-EX from -200°C to +250°C ++ very good 106 Ohm Length mm 350 Ø Shaft mm 8 Clamp Ø mm 6.5 Order No. 10 17 67812 2 4 6 1 3 5 336

338

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts BOLA Globe Stirrer Couplings, Bohlender Made of POM, a plastic material with a good mechanical strength, powerful transmission of up to 300 Ncm, suitable for a speed of up to 1.200 rounds per minute, maximum mis- alignment of axes 10 mm. • very low centrifugal forces due to low weight • suitable for both left- and right-handed rotation • no resonance • simple assembly by means of screw joints with clamp rings • pivot (length 90 mm) can be shortened by the user Ideal for balancing misalignment of axes between agitator and stirrer shaft, suitable for glass, metal or BOLA stirrer shafts. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: POM from -20°C to +110°C ++ very good Opening for stirrer shaft mm Ø 4.0 Ø 6.5 + 10 Ø 8 +10 Ø 4.0 Ø 8 + 10 Ø 6.5 + 10 inner square SW6 Upper dia. mm Overall length mm Order No. 8 8 8 10 10 10 SW8 190 190 190 190 190 190 180 10 17 69401 10 17 69402 10 17 69403 10 17 69804 24 17 39812 10 17 69808 10 17 69912 BOLA Magnetic Stirrer Heads (P-MRK), Bohlender Ideal stirrer head for PTFE-jacketed stirrer shafts from BOLA. Consisting of capsuled drive shaft (stainless steel) with ball bearings, rotor and lower bearing made of PTFE/PEEK and a hollow shaft made of borosilicate glass. Requires little space due to compact con- struction. No leakage or memory effects due to non-porous, welded rotor. Compression fittings for safe fixing of stirrer shaft and optimum power transmission. Joint-Cone with nut (Safe-Lab) for easy locking and unlocking of the ground joint. Square size 6 mm for accepting an agitator or a stirrer coupling. • gastight stirrer head for perfect vacuum • stirrer shaft’s height adjustable, approx. 40 m • also suitable for shortened stirrer shafts • powerful transmission of up to 90 Ncm • excellent chemical resistance • all products which are exposed to the medium do not contain any metals • no grease required / save to run dry • high speed of up to max. 1.500 rpm • drive shaft fixed for your safety • high durability • easy disassembly of all parts for cleaning • Suitable for all BOLA Stirrer Shafts jacketed with PTFE. Ideal for reactorlids with center • The max. shaft length corresponds to the internal height from the top of the ground joint ground joint. to the vessel bottom. PTFE/compound from -200°C to +250°C +++ universal FDA conform 145 mm 95 mm 50 mm Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Height: Insertion length of shaft: Drive shaft O.D.: With receiver made of borosilicate glass (type 1) For universal chemical resistance. for stirrer shaft Ø mm 8 10 10 for ground joint NS 29/32 29/32 45/40 With receiver made of Hastelloy® (type 2) For improved durability. for stirrer shaft Ø mm 8 10 10 29/32 29/32 45/40 for ground joint NS Order No. 10 17 62024 10 17 62028 10 17 62048 Order No. 10 17 65308 10 17 65310 10 17 65315 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 337

339

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Glass Components, Grounded Joint Components co d e b e w WWQVD177 Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts Stirrer Coupling, Rettberg Double cardan joint for compensation of an angle or axis offset between stirring unit and stirring shaft. Available in synthetic with max. torque of 1.3 Nm, or stainless steel with max. 3.4 Nm. Adapter for glass or metal shafts. Double universal joint – plastic mm Clamp Ø 6.5 8 10 14 Version for metal shafts Order No. 10 70 00271 10 70 00272 10 70 00273 10 70 00274 Double universal joint – stainless steel mm Clamp Ø 6,5 8 10 14 Version for metal shafts Order No. 10 70 00277 10 70 00278 10 70 00279 10 70 00280 for glass shafts Order No. 10 70 00275 10 70 00276 for glass shafts Order No. 10 70 00281 10 70 00282 Miscellaneous Components Bubble Counters, Rettberg Bubble counters with non-return valve for monitoring the flow rate of gases. Article Bubble counter with non-return valve Order No. 13 70 25000 co d e b e w WWQVD093 co d e b e w WWQVD094 Bubble Counters, Rettberg Bubble counter made of borosilicate glass 3.3 for monitoring the flow rate of gases. Article Bubble counter Order No. 13 70 82015 Double-Chamber Gas Bubble Counters, Miethke A recommended safety accessory for monitoring gas reactions and reactions in which gases are produced. Convenient to fill and empty, easy to clean. Compact design, handy size. Built-in return guard. Pressure and vacuum mode operation. Can be plugged in vertical position on any apparatus for use as bubble counter, pres- sure controller for inert gas atmosphere, mercury closure, dry tube, micro gas washing bottle, fermentation tube, etc. Article Double-chamber gas bubble counter, with cone and socket NS 14.5 Double-chamber gas bubble counter, with cone and socket NS 19 Double-chamber gas bubble counter, with cone and socket NS 29 Order No. 13 47 20001 13 47 20002 13 47 20003 338

340

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Grounded Joint Components / Special Equipment Miscellaneous Components Non-Return Valves, LAT A spring-loaded spherical ground joint acts as pressure valve, with tightness guaranteed by a buffer liquid of higher viscosity. The spring pressure is adjustable, but the valve can also be pre-set and lead-sealed to order. Maximum pressure 0,1 bar. Use as a non-return valve under vacuum is possible. An inserted riser tube prevents con- tamination by buffer liquid. Where aggressive media are involved, the spring can be covered with inert fluid. Cone NS 14.5 / 23 19 / 26 29 / 32 14.5 / 23 19 / 26 29 / 32 Standard cock with bore 3 mm 3 mm 3 mm without stopcock without stopcock without stopcock Order No. 13 20 40145 13 20 40219 13 20 40229 13 20 41145 13 20 41219 13 20 41229 Glass Tubing, AR Glass, IDL Glass tubing in lengths of 750 mm, fused ends, in handy 1-kg packs. Outer Ø mm 4 6 7 8 Wall mm 0.9 1.1 1.1 1.1 Tubes pc approx. 70 approx. 32 approx. 27 approx. 22 Order No. 15 00 00004 15 00 00006 15 00 00007 15 00 00008 PU kg/Pack 1 1 1 1 Gas Distributors Nitrogen Distribution Tubes, Rettberg Article 1 Nitrogen distribution tube made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with 5 patented 2-way glass stopcocks Article 2 Nitrogen distribution tube made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with 5 patented 2-way PTFE valves with fine thread and 3 KF16 connections. Complete with blind cover and adapter KF16 to 8 mm olive; plus flange material. Order No. 10 70 00185 Order No. 13 40 30100 co d e b e w WWW4U035 co d e b e w WW7R3006 co d e b e w WWQVD046 1 2 co d e b e w WWQVD048 Vacuum Distributors, Rettberg Vacuum distributors made of borosilicate glass 3.3, with PTFE high-vacuum valves with fine thread, passage 0 to 6 mm, with hose connectors. Article Vacuum distributor Vacuum distributor Vacuum distributor co d e b e w Quantity valves 3 4 5 Order No. 10 70 00182 10 70 00183 10 70 00184 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 339

341

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Special Equipment 3 1 2 Gas Distributors 5 Nitrogen Vacuum Workplaces, Rettberg Nitrogen Vacuum Workplaces made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Complete unit (building kit) consisting of several parts for assembly in various ways (left- or right-hand corner arrangements or in a straight line side by side), consisting of: Article 1 N2/vacuum interchangeable rack 4 two-way stopcocks (hollow) joint 21.5 / 6 mm, with glass hose connections 12 mm. Connection to double cooling trap KF 25 mm. Connection to N2 with link KF 16 mm to hose connection 12 mm. Both connections are interchangeable on the right or left, with dummy cap always placed opposite. Delivered complete with flange materials. Dimensions: Overall height: approx. 19 cm, length: approx. 50 cm. Order No. 13 70 79100 Article 2 Vacuum double cooling trap directly connected, side connections KF 25 mm, lower parts approx. 500 ml capacity with KF 50 mm. Length of lower parts approx. 230 mm. Delivered complete with flange ma- terials. Dimensions: Overall height approx. 45 cm, length approx. 35 cm, assembly height above work top: 32 cm (from bottom of cooling traps). Order No. 13 70 79500 4 6 co d e b e w WWQVD142 co d e b e w WWQVD181 7 340 Article 3 Connecting piece for straight set-ups between interchangeable racks and the double cooling trap 2 × KF 25 mm, with KF 16 mm for Pirani sensor and blind cap. Delivered complete with flange materials. Dimensions: length: approx. 11 cm. Order No. 13 70 79616 Article 4 Connecting piece for corner set-ups between interchangeable racks and the double trap 2 × KF 25 mm, with KF 16 mm for Pirani sensor and blind cap. Delivered complete with flange materials. Dimensions: Length of legs: A = 10 cm, B = 20 cm. Order No. 13 70 79625 Article 5 Vacuum shut-off valve 0-15 mm removable with KF 25 for connecting on the suctions side to the double cooling trap, with additional valve 0 to 6 mm and hose connection Olive 10 mm for vacuum or venting, connection to vacuum line KF 25 mm (e.g. for metal hose), removable link KF 25 mm to hose connection 16 mm (clear width 9 mm). Delivered with flange materials. Order No. 13 70 79715 Optional Article 6 N2/vacuum interchangeable rack 4 two-way valves (vacuum 0 to 12 mm, N2 0 to 6 mm), working connections: 2 × hose 13 mm, 1 × conical joint 14.5, 1 × conical joint 29 (removable with small flanges; other set-ups possible on request). Connection to double cooling trap KF 25 mm. Connection to N2 with link KF 16 mm to hose connection 12 mm. Connections for N2 and vacuum are interchan- geable on the right or left, with dummy cap always placed opposite. Delivered complete with flange materials. Dimensions: Overall height: approx. 25 cm, length: 50 cm Order No. 13 70 79200 Further accessories and spare parts Article Trap bottom, KF 50 mm Pirani vacuum gauge with digital indicator, matching sensor and connecting cable. Set of Dewar vessels suitable for cooling traps, with coating. Working connection with tube connector 12 mm, with glass flange Working connection with cone NS 14.5, with glass flange Working connection with cone NS 29, with glass flange Dummy cap KF 16 mm Dummy cap KF 25 mm Order No. 13 70 79550 13 70 79810 13 70 79820 13 70 79312 13 70 79314 13 70 79329 13 70 79416 13 70 79425 (A variable stand system and suitable tripod materials for assembling the system are available on request.) Nitrogen Vacuum Workplaces, Rettberg Complete unit (installation width approx. 115 cm), consisting of: • Shutoff valve, 0 to 15 mm, removable, with KF16 for suction-side connection to double cooling trap with additional 0 to 8 mm valve and 10 mm olive for vacuum or ventilation • Vacuum double cooling trap directly connected, KF16 connections at the side, bottom elements KF40 with approx. 350 ml volume. Length of bottom elements approx. 210 mm • N2/vacuum manifold KF16 with 5 two-way valves 0 to 8 mm, connection for N2 or vac- uum via KF16 or 10 mm olive Article 7 Complete workstation N2/vacuum interchangeable rack Vacuum double cooling trap Vacuum shut-off valve Order No. 10 70 00222 10 70 00223 10 70 00224 10 70 00225

342

Glass Construction, Glass Equipment Special Equipment Gas Distributors Gas Distributor, Rettberg Distributor made of borosilicate glass 3.3 With 4 PTFE one-way connection valves NS 14.5/2.5 and three-way valve NS 18.8/4, total width approx. 320 mm, all connections GL14 Article 1 Distributors 2 Arc adapter 90° 3 T-piece 4 Adapter GL14 on GL18 Order No. 10 70 00213 10 70 00214 10 70 00215 10 70 00216 More adapters on request. Screw cap for tube feed-through made of PBT with PTFE inner part Inner Ø mm co d e b e w WWQVD182 1 2 3 5 6 4 1.6 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 Version 5 GL 14 Order No. 10 70 00248 10 70 00249 10 70 00269 10 70 00227 10 70 00228 10 70 00230 6 GL 18 Order No. 10 70 00291 10 70 00292 10 70 00226 10 70 00229 10 70 00231 10 70 00232 Specimen Preparing Methods Circulation Apparatus, Rettberg Solvent circulation apparatus Low form, with stainless steel Dimroth condenser, cone size 29, apparatus made of boro- silicate glass 3.3, socket and cone size 29/32, with 2-way PTFE valve with fine thread for return flow and removal, with vapor guide tube in the storage vessel. Suitable for hard boiling media. Additionally equipped with a PTFE throughfeed cock joint size 14.5/4 mm and socket size 14.5 (with septum) for removing very small quantities with a cannula. Article Solvent circulation apparatus Accessories Article Evaporator flask with nitrogen valve, 500 ml Evaporator flask with nitrogen valve, 1000 ml Evaporator flask with nitrogen valve, 2000 ml PTFE seal NS 29/32 7 Receiver flask 100 ml Receiver flask 250 ml Heater 500 ml Heater 1000 ml heater 2000 ml Scissor-type table Stand with holder Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 10 70 00270 Order No. 10 70 00201 10 70 00202 10 70 00204 24 70 10029 13 40 20124 13 40 20136 13 70 21105 13 70 21110 13 70 21120 13 70 21122 13 70 21125 7 co d e b e w WWQVD005 Sublimation Apparatus, Vacuum, Rettberg The vacuum sublimation apparatus made of borosilicate glass 3.3 allows you to effec- tively clean many chemicals and substances which, when heated, pass directly from the solid to the vapor state without first turning into a liquid and solidify again after cooling. The cleaned sublimated can be easily and completely recovered from the conical con- denser at the end of the sublimation operation. Micro-, semi-micro- and macro apparatuses Article 8 Micro apparatus complete, sublimate quantity 1 to 2 g Semi-macro apparatus complete, sublimate quantity 5 to 7 g 9 Macro apparatus complete, sublimate quantity 10 to 25 g Macro apparatus complete, sublimate quantity 10 to 25 g but with removable vacuum connection with KF 16 thick-wall flan- ge and valve 0 to 10 mm Order No. 13 70 22001 13 70 22002 13 70 22003 13 70 22004 Sublimation apparatuses Article AT Sublimation apparatus 100 to 200 gram Vacuum connection with thick-wall flanges KF 40 and valve 0 to 10 mm, complete, sublimate quantity 100 to 200 g, con- densing surface approx. 200 cm2 Order No. 13 70 24001 8 9 co d e b e w WWQVD090 AT co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 341

343

KNOWLEDGE PRECISE VOLUMETRIC MEASUREMENT Precise volumetric measurement A teamwork of error limit, accuracy, coefficient of variation and precision. An illustration of precise and accuracy The dart board simulates the volume range around the centered specified value (center), the black dots simulate the different measured values of a specified volume (nominal or partial volume). Poor accuracy: Hits far off center. Poor reproducibility: Hits widely scattered. Result: These volumetric instru- ments are of inferior quality. Good accuracy: On average, hits are evenly distributed around center. Poor reproducibility: No gross errors, but hits widely scattered. Result: All deviations are "equally probable". Instruments exceeding the permissible limit should be removed from service. Poor accuracy: Although all hits are close together, the center is still missed. Good reproducibility: All hits are close together. Result: Improperly controlled production, with systematic variation. Instruments exceeding the permissible limit should be removed from service. Good accuracy: All hits are near the center. Good reproducibility: All hits are close together. Result: The volumetric instruments have minute systematic errors, narrow scatter; the permissible limit is not ex- hausted. These instruments should remain in service. To describe precision, the term “Error limit” is used for glass volumetric devices, while for liquid handling devices the statistical terms “Accu- racy [%]” and “Coefficient of Variation [%]” have become established. Batch and individual certiﬁcates or DAkkS calibration certiﬁcates can be issued, depending on type of product, to conﬁrm error limits. ➊ Error limit ➍ Partial volumes The term “Error limit” (EL) in the corresponding standards defines the maximum permissible deviation from the specified value. ➋ Accuracy (A) Generally A and CV are related to the nominal volume (Vnominal). These values are in % and have to be converted for partial volumes (Vpart.). In contrast, there is no conversion for partial volumes, if A and CV are stated in volume units (e.g., ml). Accuracy (A) indicates the closeness of measured mean volume to the specified value, i.e., systematic measurement variation. Accuracy is defined as the difference between the measured mean _ volume ( V ) and the specified value (Vspec. ), related to the speciﬁed value in percent. ➎ Error limit of A and CV A good estimate for the error limit (EL) of the instrument, e.g., for the nominal volume ( Vnominal) can be calculated using the values for accuracy and coefficient of variation. ➌ Coefficient of Variation (CV) Coefficient of variation (CV) indicates the closeness of values of re- peated measurements, i.e., random measurement variation. Coefficient of variation is defined as standard deviation in percent, related to the mean volume. ➏ Precision (reproducilibity) It describes the closeness in volume units between the different values in a set of measurements. 1 2 3 4 5 EL ≥ V measured - V spec. A [%] = 342 V - V V spec. spec. · 100 CV [%] = s · 100 V A part. [%] = V nominal V part. · A % nominal EL ≥ A% + 2CV% 100% · V nominal (analog CVpart. [%] ) Continued on next page

344

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids CHAPTER OVERVIEW Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 343 Microliter Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Pipette Tips, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Disposable Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Graduated Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Bulb Pipettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Pipette Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Pipetting Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Graduated Vessels 395 Graduated Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Graduated Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Syringes 411 Microliter Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Syringes, Hypodermic Needles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Dosing Devices 415 Dispensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 KNOWLEDGE Precise Volumetric Measurment . . . . . . . 342 Microliter Pipettes Calibration of Single and Multichannel Pipettes acc. to DIN EN ISO 8655-6, Service Scope of delivery: • incoming goods, check for integrity • previous check to determine function status • function check, cleaning; if necessary greasing of O-rings and seals • adjustment if necessary • calibration according to DIN EN ISO 8655-6; in consideration of the specifications of the manufacturer and standadrs • designation of the pipette with calibration label • creation of a standard-conform test report • packaging Article Single-channel pipette, fixed volume Single-channel pipette, variable volume < 10 µl Single-channel pipette, variable volume > 10 µl Multi-channel pipette (2-8 channels), variable volume Multi-channel pipette (12 channels), variable volume Hand dispenser Burettes and bottle-top dispenser Necessary repairs are assessed on a T&M basis. Order No. 10 99 51010 10 99 51020 10 99 51030 10 99 51040 10 99 51050 10 99 51060 10 99 51070 Micropipette Transferpette® S, BRAND • Efficient: one-hand operation • Flexible: ergonomic design for all hand sizes • Reliable: volume-change protection prevents accidental adjustments The Transferpette® S air displacement pipette allows you to work efficiently and ergonom- ically with both small and large volumes. Low operating forces and a short stroke ensure relaxed pipetting, even during long pipetting series. Due to its perfect ergonomics, the Transferpette® S provides a comfortable grip in any hand position, whether you are right- or left-handed, or have big or small hands. Changing your grip is not necessary, since the microliter pipette provides true one-hand operation: set the volume, pipette, eject the tip. The volume-change protection is also easy to operate with gloves on and protects your set volume against accidental adjustment. The Transferpette® S also features Easy Cali- bration technology, which makes calibration a breeze. Calibration can be carried out with- out tools. A compatibility table shows which tips fit which device, so that you always order the correct pipette tips. co d e b e w WWQED088 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 343 Continued on next page

345

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED088 Microliter Pipettes Overview • Volume range of single-channel pipette: from 0.1 µl to 10 ml • Volume range of multi-channel pipette: from 0.5 µl to 300 µl • Short stroke and low operating forces • Universal tip cone • Completely autoclaving at 121°C • One-hand operation for right- and left-handed users • Color code on volume adjustment wheel, shaft and volume-change protection • Easy insertion and ejection of tips due to O-rings on multi-channel pipettes • Can be calibrated easily and without tools thanks to Easy Calibration technology • Slim shaft for sampling from narrow vessels (centrifuge tubes) • Operating temperature from +15°C to +40°C • Vapor pressure up to 500 mbar • Viscosity up to 260 mPa s 1 2 Single channel micropipette Transferpette® S, fixed-volume, CE-IVD, DE-M Items supplied: Transferpette® S type fixed volume, DE-M marked, with performance certificate, shelf/rack mount, labeling foil, silicone grease Volume µl 10 20 25 50 100 1 200 500 1000 2000 Model Accuracy % 1 F-10 0.8 F-20 0.8 F-25 0,8 F-50 0.6 F-100 0.6 F-200 F-500 0.6 F-1000 0.6 F-2000 0.8 Accuracy µl 0.1 0.16 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.2 3 6 16 Variation coefficient % 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3 Variation coefficient µl 0.05 0.08 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.4 1 2 6 Tip size Order No. 0,5–20 2–200 2–200 2–200 2–200 2–200 50–1000 50–1000 500–5000 10 49 75808 10 49 75816 10 49 75820 10 49 75828 10 49 75838 10 49 75844 10 49 75854 10 49 75862 10 49 75864 Single channel micropipette Transferpette® S, adjustable, CE-IVD, DE-M Items supplied: Transferpette® S type adjustable volume, DE-M marked, with perfor- mance certificate, shelf/rack mount, labeling foil, silicone grease µl Model Volume Accuracy % 0.1–1 2 D-1 0.1–2.5 1.4 D-2,5 0.5–10 1 D-10 2–20 0.8 D-20 5–50 0.8 D-50 10–100 0.6 D-100 2 20–200 D-200 0.6 100–1000 D-1000 0.6 500–5000 D-5000 0.6 1000–10000 D-10000 0.6 Accuracy µl 0.02 0.035 0.1 0.16 0.4 0.6 1.2 6 30 60 Variation coefficient % 1.2 0.7 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Variation coefficient µl 0.012 0.018 0.05 0.08 0.15 0.2 0.4 2 10 20 Tip size Order No. 0.1–20 10 49 75868 0.5–20 10 49 75869 0.5–20 10 49 75870 2–200 10 49 75872 2–200 10 49 75873 2–200 10 49 75874 2–200 10 49 75878 50–1000 10 49 75880 500–5000 10 49 75882 1000–10000 10 49 75884 3 Pipette sets Transferpette® S, adjustable, CE-IVD, DE-M Article Starter-Kit Micro 3 × pipettes (0.1–2,5 µl, 0.5–10 µl, 10–100 µl), 3 × TipBox pipet- te tips (2 × 0.5–20 µl, 2–200 µl), 3 shelf mounts Starter-Kit Midi 3 × pipettes (2–20 µl, 20–200 µl, 100–1000 µl), 3 × TipBox pipet- te tips (2 × 2–200 µl, 50–1000 µl), 3 shelf mount Starter-Kit Macro 3 × pipettes (100–1000 µl, 500–5000 µl, 1000–10000 µl), 3 × TipBox pipette tips (50–1000 µl, 0.5–5 ml, 1-10 ml), 3 shelf mounts Starter-Kit Standard 3 × pipettes (0.5–10 µl, 10–100 µl, 100–1000 µl), 3 × TipBox pipette tips (0.5–20 µl, 2–200 µl, 50–1000 µl), 3 shelf mounts Pipettes package 1 5 × pipettes (0.1–2,5 µl, 0.5-10 µl, 2–20 µl, 20–200 µl, 100–1000 µl), 3 × TipBox pipette tips (0.5–20 µl, 2–200 µl, 50–1000 µl), benchtop rack for 6 pipettes Pipettes package 2 5 × pipettes (0.5–10 µl, 10–100 µl, 20–200 µl, 50–1000 µl, 500–5000 µl), 4 × TipBox pipette tips (0.5–20 µl, 2–200 µl, 50–1000 µl, 0.5–5 ml), benchtop rack for 6 pipettes Order No. 10 49 75890 10 49 75891 10 49 75892 10 49 75893 10 49 75896 10 49 75897 3 344 Continued on next page

346

Microliter Pipettes Multichannel micropipette Transferpette® S -8, adjustable, CE-IVD, DE-M Items supplied: Transferpette® S -8, DE-M marked, supplied with performance certificate, 2 × TipBox filled with pipette tips from BRAND, shelf mount, reagent reservoir, mounting tool, labeling foil, silicone grease and 1 set of sealing rings Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Volume Model Accuracy Accuracy µl M8-10 M8-50 % 0.5–10 1.6 5–50 0.8 10–100 M8-100 0.8 4 20–200 M8-200 0.8 30–300 M8-300 0.6 µl 0.16 0.4 0.8 1.6 1.8 Variation coefficient % 1 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 Variation coefficient µl 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.6 0.9 Tip size Order No. 0.5–20 2–200 2–200 2–200 5–300 10 49 75900 10 49 75906 10 49 75908 10 49 75910 10 49 75912 Volume Model Multichannel micropipette Transferpette® S -12, adjustable, CE-IVD, DE-M Items supplied: Transferpette® S -12, DE-M marked, supplied with performance certifi- cate, 2 × TipBox filled with pipette tips from BRAND, shelf mount, reagent reservoir, mounting tool, labeling foil, silicone grease and 1 set of sealing rings Variation coefficient µl 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.6 0.9 % 0.5–10 1.6 5–10 0.8 10–100 M12-100 0.8 20–200 M12-200 0.8 5 30–300 M12-300 0.6 Variation coefficient % 1 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5–20 2–200 2–200 2–200 5–300 µl 0.16 0.4 0.8 1.6 1.8 M12-10 M12-50 Accuracy Accuracy µl 10 49 75920 10 49 75926 10 49 75928 10 49 75930 10 49 75932 Tip size Order No. 4 Accessories Article 6 Benchtop rack (round) for pipettes Transferpette® S and S -8/-12 10 49 74807 Rack mount for pipettes Transferpette® S and S -8/-12 10 49 74811 Wall mount for pipettes Transferpette® S and S -8/-12 10 49 74812 Order No. Transferpette® electronic Single-/Multichannel Pipettes, BRAND 5 Transferpette® electronic pipettes combines the globally proven properties of mechanical piston operated air displacement pipettes by BRAND with the advantages of an elec tronic device. Features: • The pipette shaft can be unscrewed and is entirely autoclavable (121°C). • Five convenient programs: pipetting, reverse pipetting, mixing, dispensing and GEL • Easy Calibration technique for making quick tool-free adjustments to the Transferpette® • CE mark according to IVD Directive 98/79 EC. Limitations of use: • The Transferpette® electronic is intended for the pipetting of samples within the follow- • Temperature of both the instrument and solution between +15°C and +40°C (59°F to 104°F). Consult the manufacturer for use in temperatures outside of this range. electrophoresis. electronic. ing limitations: • Vapour pressure up to 500 mbar • Viscosity: 260 mPa s 6 co d e b e w WWQED062 Transferpette® electronic DE-M marked and supplied with performance certificate, battery, power supply 100– 240 V/50–60 Hz (not for 14 49 75339 – 14 49 75347) and silicone grease. µl Volume Gradu- ation µl 0.5 – 10 0.01 2 – 20 0.02 10 – 200 0.2 50 – 1000 1.0 250 – 5000 5.0 With power supply unit for Europe Order No. 14 49 75299 14 49 75300 14 49 75303 14 49 75306 14 49 75307 With power supply unit for UK/Ireland Order No. 14 49 75309 14 49 75310 14 49 75313 14 49 75316 14 49 75317 Without power supply unit Order No. 14 49 75339 14 49 75340 14 49 75343 14 49 75346 14 49 75347 Transferpette®-8 electronic DE-M marked and supplied with performance certificate, battery, power supply 100– 240 V/50–60 Hz, device stand, TipBox, refill unit, reagent reservoir, mounting tool, silicone grease and 1 set of sealing rings made of FKM. Volume µl 0,5 – 10 1 – 20 5 – 100 10 – 200 15 – 300 Graduation µl 0.01 0.02 0.1 0.2 0.5 With power supply unit for Europe Order No. 10 49 75399 14 49 75400 14 49 75403 10 49 75404 14 49 75406 With power supply unit for UK/Ireland Order No. 10 49 75409 14 49 75410 14 49 75413 10 49 75414 14 49 75416 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 345 co d e b e w

347

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 1 2 346 co d e b e w WWQJ3001 Volume µl Microliter Pipettes Transferpette®-12 electronic DE-M marked and supplied with performance certificate, battery, power supply 100– 240 V/50–60 Hz, device stand, TipBox, refill unit, reagent reservoir, mounting tool, silicone grease and 1 set of sealing rings made of FKM. With power supply unit for Europe Order No. 10 49 75449 14 49 75450 14 49 75453 10 49 75454 14 49 75456 Order No. 10 49 75459 14 49 75460 14 49 75463 14 49 75466 10 49 75464 With power supply unit for UK/Ireland 0.5 – 10 1 – 20 5 – 100 10 – 200 15 – 300 Graduation µl 0.01 0.02 0.1 0.2 0.5 Accessories 100-240V/50-60Hz Article 1 3-unit charging stand incl. power supply unit Europe /Continent, Order No. 14 49 75390 1 3-unit charging stand incl. power supply unit UK/Ireland, 100-240V/50-60Hz 14 49 75391 Other AC adaptors on request 2 Reagent reservoirs for multichannel pipettes and automatic systems These reagent reservoirs were designed especially for use with automated liquid handling platforms. They can also be used with manual systems. Different partitions, bottom styles and profiles provide broas application flexibility. • ANSI/SLAS standard format Compatible with nearly all liquid handling robots and other automated dispensing systems • 5 different types for use with multichannel pipettes and automatic systems • Excellent stability and chemical resistance made from high-quality polypropylene • Very low dead volume due to pyramid bottoms • Free from RNases and DNases • Autoclavable (121°C, 20 min) • Material PP Specification Order No. 1-column 12-column low profile 4-column 6-column 1-column low profile Bottom shape Working volume ml 220 6 60 40 50 pyramid bottom, 96-well pyramid bottom pyramid bottom pyramid bottom flat bottom 10 49 71450 10 49 71452 10 49 71454 10 49 71456 10 49 71458 PU pc/ Pack 10 10 10 10 10 The indicated volume applies to the use with automated systems Eppendorf Pipettes Reference® 2, Eppendorf Confirmed as user-tested and user-friendly. The TÜV Rheinland found the new PhysioCare Concept Reference pipette to be excep- tionally user-friendly. In the new pipette Eppendorf Reference® 2, the known and proven premium characteris- tics of the “Reference”, such as highest precision, very long useful life and particularly ergonomical design are combined with innovative state-of-the-art technology. This makes it an ideal partner when you intend to achieve optimum pipetting results. New properties: Eppendorf TrackIt, integrated RFID chip with all relevant data relating to the pipette. For the first time, the new Reference 2 is available in multi-channel variants with channel in- dication. With spring loaded tip cone for optimum tip seat for reduced operating effort. The portfolio of the variable 1 channel pipettes has been extended by volume sizes 5 ml and 10 ml. Fixvolume pipette Eppendorf Reference® 2 fix 3 Type 1 µl 2 µl 5 µl 10 µl 10 µl 20 µl 20 µl 25 µl 50 µl 100 µl A P ± Vol. µl % 1 2.5 2 2.0 5 1.5 10 1.0 10 1.0 20 0.8 20 1.0 5 1.0 50 0.7 100 0.6 CV P ± % 1.8 1.2 0.8 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2 Tips ID Color code Version Order No. 10 µl 10 µl 10 µl 10 µl 20 µl 20 µl 200 µl 200 µl 200 µl 200 µl dark grey dark grey mid grey mid grey yellow light grey yellow yellow yellow yellow 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 10 69 50014 10 69 50022 10 69 50030 10 69 90049 10 69 50057 10 69 50065 10 69 50073 10 69 50081 10 69 50090 10 69 50103 Continued on next page

348

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Microliter Pipettes Type A P ± Vol. µl % 200 µl 200 0.6 200 µl 200 0.6 250 µl 250 0.6 500 µl 500 0.6 1000 µl 1000 0.6 2 ml 2000 0.6 2,5 ml 2500 0.6 CV P ± % 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 Tips ID Color code Version Order No. yellow 200 µl 1000 µl blue 1000 µl blue 1000 µl blue 1000 µl blue red 2500 µl 2500 µl red 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 10 69 50111 10 69 50120 10 69 50138 10 69 50146 10 69 50154 10 69 50162 10 69 00170 4 Variable pipettes Eppendorf Reference® 2 variable With color coding and volume labeling for quick identification of the volume/tip size. Round upper part makes it possible to work in every position. 4-digit display for exact volume setting (clearly visible from every angle). Quick and secure volume setting, include volume lock. Fully autoclavable. Movable parts and external edges made from stainless steel equip the pipette with outstanding robustness at potential impact sites and for internal compo- nents. Simple visual adjustment by the user. With label field for individual identification. 3 Type Vol. 0.1–2.5 µl 0.5–10 µl 2–20 µl 2–20 µl 10–100 µl 10–100 µl 0.1 µl 0.25 µl 1.25 µl 2.5 µl 0.5 µl 1 µl 5 µl 10 µl 2 µl 10 µl 20 µl 2 µl 10 µl 20 µl 10 µl 50 µl 100 µl 20 µl 100 µl 200 µl 30 µl 150 µl 300 µl 100–1000 µl 100 µl 500 µl 1000 µl 0,25–2,5 ml 0.25 ml 1.25 ml 2.5 ml 0.5 ml 2.5 ml 5.0 ml 1.0 ml 5.0 ml 10.0 ml 30–300 µl 0,5–5 ml 1–10 ml A P ± % 48.0 12.0 2.5 1.4 8.0 2.5 1.5 1.0 5.0 1.2 1.0 5.0 1.2 1.0 3.0 1.0 0.8 2.5 1.0 0.6 2.5 1.0 0.6 3.0 1.0 0.6 8.0 0.8 0.6 2.4 1.2 0.6 3.0 1.0 0.6 CV P ± % 12.0 6.0 1.5 0.7 5.0 1.8 0.8 0.4 1.5 0.6 0.3 1.5 0.6 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.15 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.3 0.2 0.6 0.2 0.2 3.0 0.2 0.2 0.6 0.25 0.15 0.6 0.2 0.15 Tips ID Color code Version Order No. 10 µl dark grey 1-channel 10 69 40010 20 µl mid grey 1-channel 10 69 40029 20 µl light grey 1-channel 10 69 40037 200 µl yellow 1-channel 10 69 40045 200 µl yellow 1-channel 10 69 40053 200 µl yellow 1-channel 10 69 40061 300 µl orange 1-channel 10 69 40070 1000 µl blue 1-channel 10 69 80088 2500 µl red 1-channel 10 69 40096 5 ml violet 1-channel 10 69 00100 10 ml turquoise 1-channel 10 69 40118 5 Eppendorf Reference® 2, pack of 3 Option 1: 3 pipettes (0.5–10 µl, 10–100 µl, 100–1,000 µl) + 3 re-usable epT.I.P.S.® boxes with 96 pipette tips each Option 2: 3 pipettes (2–20 µl, 20–200 µl, 100–1,000 µl) + 3 re-usable epT.I.P.S.® boxes with 96 pi- pette tips each Option 3: 3 pipettes (0.1–1 ml, 0.5–5 ml, 1–10 ml) with samples of matching pipette tips 4 5 Article Reference® 2, pack of 3, option 1 Reference® 2, pack of 3, option 2 Eppendorf Reference® 2, pack of 3, option 3 Order No. 10 69 20903 10 69 20911 10 69 20920 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 347

349

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 1 co d e b e w WWQJ3002 2 348 Microliter Pipettes Variable pipette Eppendorf Reference® 2, 8- and 12-channel variable 1 Type Vol. µl 0.5–10 µl 0,5 1 5 10 10–100 µl 10 50 100 30–300 µl 30 150 300 0.5–10 µl 0,5 1 5 10 10–100 µl 10 50 100 30–300 µl 30 150 300 A P ± % 12.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 0.8 3.0 1.0 0.6 12.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 0.8 3.0 1.0 0.6 CV P ± % 8.0 5.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 0.8 0.3 1.0 0.5 0.3 8.0 5.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 0.8 0.3 1.0 0.5 0.3 Tips ID Color code mid grey 20 µl Version Order No. 8-channel 10 69 60018 200 µl yellow 8-channel 10 69 60034 300 µl orange 8-channel 10 69 60050 20 µl mid grey 12-channel 10 69 60026 200 µl yellow 12-channel 10 69 60042 300 µl orange 12-channel 10 69 60069 Pipettes Research® plus, Eppendorf Eppendorf sets a new standard in pipetting. The ultra light Eppendorf Research plus pi- pette meets the highest needs in precision and accuracy – combined with ultimate ergo- nomics and increased flexibility. • Volume adjustment: Only a few turns to reach your desired volume (in adjustable-volume • Control button: Very low operating force, colour indicates pipette volume, positioned for • Ejector: Very low operating force, positioned for perfect ergonomics • Volume display: 4 digits, magnifying shape • Secondary adjustment display and opening: Adjust your pipette to a liquid very different • Eppendorf PerfectPiston™: Ultra light piston made of Fortron® (not in 2,5 µl, 10 µl, 5 ml • Quick connection clip: Remove lower part easily (not in 5 ml und 10 ml pipettes) • Spring loaded tip cone: Improved ergonomics, tight fit to the tip (not in 5 ml und 10 ml pipette) perfect ergonomics than water und 10 ml pipettes) pipettes) Multi-channel: • Channel indicator: Use the pipette the same way round – all the time • Remove individual channels: Gain flexibility for individual needs Eppendorf Research® plus, adjustable-volume pipette 2 Type Vol. 0.1–2.5 µl 2–20 µl 2–20 µl 0.5–10 µl 0.1 µl 0.25 µl 1.25 µl 2.5 µl 0.5 µl 1 µl 5 µl 10 µl 2 µl 10 µl 20 µl 2 µl 10 µl 20 µl 10 µl 50 µl 100 µl 20 µl 100 µl 200 µl 30 µl 150 µl 300 µl 100–1000 µl 100 µl 500 µl 1000µl 30–300 µl 20–200 µl 10–100 µl A P ± % 48.0 12.0 2.5 1.4 8.0 2.5 1.5 1.0 5.0 1.2 1.0 5.0 1.2 1.0 3.0 1.0 0.8 2.5 1.0 0.6 2.5 1.0 0.6 3.0 1.0 0.6 CV P ± % 12.0 6.0 1.5 0.7 5.0 1.8 0.8 0.4 1.5 0.6 0.3 1.5 0.6 0.3 1.0 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.3 0.2 0.6 0.2 0.2 Tips ID Color code Version Order No. 10 µl dark grey 1-channel 10 69 30012 20 µl mid grey 1-channel 10 69 30020 20 µl light grey 1-channel 10 69 30098 200 µl yellow 1-channel 10 69 30039 200 µl yellow 1-channel 10 69 30047 200 µl yellow 1-channel 10 69 30055 300 µl orange 1-channel 10 69 30101 1.000 µl blue 1-channel 10 69 30063 Continued on next page

350

Microliter Pipettes Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Type Vol. 0.5–5 ml 0.25–2.5 ml 0.25 ml 1.25 ml 2.50 ml 0.5 ml 2.5 ml 5 ml 1 ml 5 ml 10 ml 1–10 ml Tips ID Color code Version Order No. 2.5 m red 1-channel 10 69 30144 2,5 ml lila 1-channel 10 69 10071 10 ml turquoise 1-channel 10 69 30080 A P ± % 4.8 0.8 0.6 2.4 1.2 0.6 3.0 0.8 0.6 CV P ± % 1.2 0.2 0.2 0.6 0.25 0.15 0.6 0.2 0.15 Eppendorf Research® plus, adjustable-volume, multichannel pipettes 3 Type 0.5–10 µl 30–300 µl 10–100 µl Vol. µl 0.5 µl 1 µl 5 µl 10 µl 10 µl 50 µl 100 µl 30 µl 150 µl 300 µl 120–1200 µl 120 µl 600 µl 1200 µl 0.5 µl 1 µl 5 µl 10 µl 10 µl 50 µl 100 µl 30 µl 150 µl 300 µl 120–1200 µl 120 µl 600 µl 1200 µl 10–100 µl 30–300 µl 0.5–10 µl Tips ID Color code Version Order No. 20 µl mid grey 8-channel 10 69 25010 200 µl yellow 8-channel 10 69 60036 300 µl orange 8-channel 10 69 50052 1200 µl green 8-channel 10 69 50214 20 µl mid grey 12-channel 10 69 50028 200 µl yellow 12-channel 10 69 50044 300 µl orange 12-channel 10 69 50060 1200 µl green 12-channel 10 69 50222 A P ± % 12.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 0.8 3.0 1.0 0.8 6.0 2.7 1.2 12.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 3.0 1.0 0.8 3.0 1.0 0.8 6.0 2.7 1.2 CV P ± % 8.0 5.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 0.8 0.3 1.0 0.5 0.3 0.9 0.4 0.3 8.0 5.0 2.0 1.0 2.0 0.8 0.3 1.0 0.5 0.3 0.9 0.4 0.3 Eppendorf Research® plus, adjustable-volume, multichannel pipettes for 384-well plates Color code Version Order No. Type 4 1–20 µl 5–100 µl 1–20 µl 5 5–100 µl Volume µl 1 µl 2 µl 10 µl 20 µl 5 µl 10 µl 50 µl 100 µl 1 µl 2 µl 10 µl 20 µl 5 µl 10 µl 50 µl 100 µl A P ± % 12 8 4 2 6 3 1.2 1 12 8 4 2 6 3 1.2 1 CV P ± % 8 5 2 1 4 2 0.8 0.6 8 5 2 1 4 2 0.8 0.6 light pink 16-channel 10 69 50079 light yellow 16-channel 10 69 50096 light pink 24-channel 10 69 50087 light yellow 24-channel 10 69 50109 3 5 4 6 Eppendorf Research® plus, fixed-volume pipette 6 Type A P ± Vol. µl % 10 µl 10 1.2 20 µl 20 0.8 10 µl 10 1.2 20 µl 20 1.0 25 µl 25 1.0 50 µl 50 0.7 100 µl 100 0.6 200 µl 200 0.6 200 µl 200 0.6 250 µl 250 0.6 500 µl 500 0.6 1000 µl 1000 0.6 co d e b e w CV P ± % 0.6 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Version Tips ID Color code 1-channel mid grey light grey 1-channel 1-channel yellow 1-channel yellow 1-channel yellow yellow 1-channel 1-channel yellow 1-channel yellow 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 1-channel 20 µl 20 µl 200 µl 200 µl 200 µl 200 µl 200 µl 200 µl 1000 µl blue 1000 µl blue 1000 µl blue 1000 µl blue Order No. 10 69 40016 10 69 40032 10 69 40024 10 69 40040 10 69 40059 10 69 40067 10 69 40075 10 69 40083 10 69 40091 10 69 40105 10 69 41113 10 69 40121 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 349 Continued on next page

351

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 1 1 Microliter Pipettes Eppendorf Research® plus 3-Packs 3 variable-adjustable Eppendorf Research plus pipettes per pack. With matching Eppen- dorf pipette tips! Content of the Research plus3 packs: • Eppendorf Research® plus 3-Pack, option 1: 3 pipettes (0.5 – 10 µl, 10 – 100 µl, 100 – 1,000 µl) + 3 reusable epT.I.P.S.®boxes with 96 pipette tips each • Eppendorf Research®plus 3-Pack, option 2: 3 pipettes (2 – 20 µl, 20 – 200 µl, 100 – 1,000 µl) + 3 reusable epT.I.P.S.® boxes with 96 pipette tips each • Eppendorf Research®plus 3-Pack, option 3: 3 pipettes (0.1 – 1 ml, 0.5 – 5 ml, 1 – 10 ml) with samples of matching pipette tips Article Eppendorf Research® plus 3-Pack, Option 1 Eppendorf Research® plus 3-Pack, Option 2 Eppendorf Research® plus 3-Pack, Option 3 Order No. 10 69 23900 10 69 30918 10 69 30926 co d e b e w WWQJ3031 Eppendorf Xplorer® / Eppendorf Xplorer® plus electronic Pipette, Eppendorf The Eppendorf Xplorer® electronic pipette set new standards for simplicity, precision and reproducibility. • Aspirating and Dispensing rocker: “Up is up and down is down”™ principle • Easy selection of all functions with the practical selection dial • Innovative rocker: When the tip is ejected, the piston automatically returns to zero posi- tion • Quick connection clip: Lower part is easy to remove and maintain • Spring-loaded tip cone provides maximum tightness • Volume and speed precisely and reproducibly adjustable • Adjustable to your work environment and requirements • Channel display: Use the pipette with the same orientation – all the time • Remove the individual channels: Gain more flexibility and safety Additional features of the Eppendorf Xplorer® plus: • On/off switch: Switches the pipette off during longer periods of inactivity • Additional applications: Aspirating, diluting, sequential dispensing and pipetting, re- • Programming: One-time programming of sequences for easier handling of complex pro- verse pipetting cesses • Individual fixed volume setting: Desired volume can be saved • Password protection: Protects programming and adjustment • Archive function: Automatic saving of the last 10 parameter records (can be selected as an option and alternative to the Help function) • Individual speed setting: Sets parameters to your individual working speed • Display of service intervals: Pipette maintenance reminder function, based on time or frequency of use as desired 2 Xplorer plus Order No. 10 69 61708 grey light grey Color code 10 69 10017 Xplorer Order No. 10 69 61015 Eppendorf Xplorer® and Eppendorf Xplorer® plus, single-channel A P ± % 6.0 2.5 1.5 1.0 5.0 1.2 1.0 4.0 2.0 1.0 0.8 2.5 1.0 0.6 5.0 2.5 1.0 0.6 CV P ± % 3.0 1.8 0.8 0.4 1.5 0.6 0.3 2.0 1.0 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.3 0.2 1.4 0.7 0.3 0.2 10 69 61023 10 69 10027 10 69 61031 yellow yellow orange 10 69 10710 10 69 61716 10 69 10720 10 69 61724 2 Type 0.5 – 10 µl 1 – 20 µl 5 – 100 µl 10 – 200 µl 15 – 300 µl Volume µl 0.5 1 5 10 2 10 20 5 10 50 100 20 100 200 15 30 150 300 350 Continued on next page

352

Microliter Pipettes Type 50 – 1000 µl 0.1 – 2.5 ml 0.2 – 5 ml 0.5 – 10 ml Volume µl 50 100 500 1000 250 1250 2500 250 500 2500 5000 500 1000 5000 10000 A P ± % 6.0 3.0 1.0 0.6 4.8 0.8 0.6 4.8 3.0 1.2 0.6 6.0 3.0 0.8 0.6 CV P ± % 1.0 0.6 0.2 0.2 1.2 0.2 0.2 1.2 0.6 0.3 0.15 1.2 0.6 0.2 0.15 Color code blue Xplorer Order No. 10 69 61040 red 10 69 10044 violet 10 69 61058 turquoise 10 69 61066 Eppendorf Xplorer®und Eppendorf Xplorer® plus, 8- and 12-channel Volume µl A P ± % CV P ± % Tips ID Color code Version 8-channel Order No. 10 69 61104 20 µl grey Type Xplorer® 0.5 – 10 µl Xplorer® plus 0,5 – 10 µl Xplorer® 5 –100 µl Xplorer® plus 5 –100 µl Xplorer® 15 – 300 µl Xplorer® plus 15 – 300 µl Xplorer® 50 – 1200 µl Xplorer® plus 50 – 1200 µl 1 5 10 1 5 10 10 50 100 10 50 100 30 150 300 30 150 300 120 600 1200 120 600 1200 5.0 3.0 2.0 5.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 0.8 2.0 1.0 0.8 2.5 1.0 0.6 2.5 1.0 0.6 6.0 2.7 1.2 6.0 2.7 1.2 3.0 1.5 0.8 3.0 1.5 0.8 2.0 0.8 0.25 2.0 0.8 0.25 1.0 0.5 0.25 1.0 0.5 0.25 0.9 0.4 0.3 0.9 0.4 0.3 20 µl grey 10 69 61767 200 µl yellow 10 69 61120 200 µl yellow 10 69 61783 300 µl orange 10 69 61147 300 µl orange 10 69 61805 1200 µl green 10 69 61163 1200 µl green 10 69 61821 Eppendorf Xplorer® and Eppendorf Xplorer® plus, 16- and 24-channel For 384 well plates Type Xplorer® plus 1 – 20 µl Xplorer® plus 5 – 100 µl Volume µl A P ± % CV P ± % 1 2 10 20 5 10 50 100 12 8 4 2 6 3 1.2 1 8 5 2 1 4 2 0.8 0.6 Color code Version 16-channel Order No. 10 69 10778 light pink light yellow 10 69 10792 Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 2 Xplorer plus Order No. 10 69 61732 10 69 10736 10 69 61740 10 69 61759 12-channel Order No. 10 69 61112 10 69 61775 10 69 61139 10 69 61791 10 69 61155 10 69 61813 10 69 61171 10 69 61830 24-channel Order No. 10 69 10779 10 69 10793 Accessories Article Charger Stand 2 Xplorer Charger Carousel 2 for 6 Eppendorf pipettes Order No. 10 69 60031 10 69 60023 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 351

353

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Microliter Pipettes Gilson Pipetman® Microman E, Gilson MICROMAN® E positive displacement pipettes, along with capillary pistons, offers the highest precision when pipetting problem liquids such as oils, cosmetics, blood, glycerol, radioactive samples, RNA, DNA, and more! Working like a syringe, capillary pistons elim- inate the air cushion between the sample and the disposable piston, providing 100% protection against pipette contamination and producing accurate, reproducible, and pre- cise results every time. Improved comfort and ease-of-use: A newly shaped handle, with an added finger hook, rests comfortably in your hand. Fully visible volumeter on the front of the body, so you can easily see the volume while pipetting. Large push button allows you to aspirate and dis- pense with ease. Volume Securing Button allows for easy volume adjustment and minimizes the risk of accidently changing the volume during pipetting cycles. Patented QuickSnap CP fitting system allows you to fit a capillary piston on to MICRO- MAN® E as simply as fitting a standard tip to a standard pipette. • volume range from 1 µl to 1 ml • for PCR and biologic active samples • capillaries and flasks made of chemical-resistant PP • protects from aerosol formation • prevents displacement of samples • integrated release mechanism • sterilised CP are free of RNAse, DNAse, DNA, RNA, proteases Microman® flasks with capillaries (CP) made of non-wetting PP, free of colour additives. Loosely (200 pieces) packed or in TiPack® racks (2 × 96, 10 × 96 or 2 × 91 pieces/pack). Gilson Pipetman® Microman E co d e b e w WWC8F388 Article Gilson Pipetman® Microman E, M10E Gilson Pipetman® Microman E, M25E Gilson Pipetman® Microman E, M50E Gilson Pipetman® Microman E, M100E Gilson Pipetman® Microman E, M250E Gilson Pipetman® Microman E, M1000E Gilson Microman capillary pistons Volume µl 1 – 10 3 – 25 20 – 50 10 – 100 50 – 250 100 – 1000 Order No. 10 01 74301 10 01 74302 10 01 74303 10 01 74304 10 01 74305 10 01 74306 Article for PU Order No. Gilson capillary pistons CP10, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP10ST, sterile, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP10, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP10ST, sterile, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP25 Gilson capillary pistons CP25, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP25ST, sterile, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP50 Gilson capillary pistons CP50, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP50ST, sterile, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP100, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP100ST, sterile, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP100, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP100ST, sterile, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP250 Gilson capillary pistons CP250, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP250ST, sterile, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP1000, TiPack® Rack Gilson capillary pistons CP1000ST, sterile, TiPack® Rack M10 M10 M10 M10 M25 M25 M25 M50 M50 M50 M100 M100 M100 M100 M250 M250 M250 M1000 M1000 2 × 96 10 01 74375 2 × 96 10 01 74459 10 × 96 10 01 74414 10 × 96 10 01 74445 1 × 200 10 01 74370 10 × 96 10 01 74378 6 × 96 10 01 74446 1 × 200 10 01 74371 10 × 96 10 01 74379 6 × 96 10 01 74447 2 × 96 10 01 74377 2 × 96 10 01 74478 10 × 96 10 01 74376 10 × 96 10 01 74449 1 × 200 10 01 74372 10 × 96 10 01 74369 6 × 96 10 01 74448 2 × 91 10 01 74373 2 × 91 10 01 74374 PU pc/Pack 192 192 960 960 200 960 576 200 960 576 192 192 960 960 200 960 576 182 182 co d e b e w WWC8F365 352 Microliter Pipettes Pipetman® G Multi Channel, Gilson Pipetman® G top comfort in Gilson quality now also available as multichannel models • Highly effortless pipetting • Reduction of the force required to eject tips • Colour-coded pushbutton • Reliable pipetting starting from only 10% of the nominal volume • Available volume ranges: 8 PIPETMAN G multichannel models fully cover the range from 8 x 10 µl to 12 x 300 µl. Type P8X10G P12X10G P8X20G P12X20G P8X200G P12X200G P8X300G P12X300G Volume µl 1-10 µl 1-10 µl 2-20 µl 2-20 µl 20-200 µl 20-200 µl 30-300 µl 30-300 µl Order No. 10 01 74260 10 01 74261 10 01 74262 10 01 74263 10 01 74264 10 01 74265 10 01 74266 10 01 74267

354

Microliter Pipettes Microliter Pipettes Pipetman® G, Gilson Pipetman® G Premium comfort in Gilson quality • Pipetting with minimum force • Reduction of tip ejection forces • Tip ejector with clip mechanism • Plastic tip ejectors available as an option All volume ranges available: 8 PIPETMAN G models amply cover the range of 0.2 µl to 10 ml. Type P2G P10G P20G P100G P200G P1000G P5000G P10MLG Roundabout stand for 7 pipettes Volume 0.5 – 2 µl 1 – 10 µl 2 – 20 µl 10 – 100 µl 20 – 200 µl 100 – 1000 µl 1 – 5 ml 1 – 10 ml Order No. 10 01 74415 10 01 74416 10 01 74417 10 01 74418 10 01 74419 10 01 74420 10 01 74421 10 01 74422 10 01 74307 Pipetman® G Kits, Gilson Pipetman® G Starter Kit: • Gilson Pipetman® G P20G, P200G and P1000G • Tips D200 and D1000 in a Tipack rack • 3 single holders • 3 plastic ejectors • 1 Gilson Guide to Pipetting Pipetman® G Micro Volume Kit: • Gilson Pipetman® G P2G, P10G and P100G • Tips DL10 and D200 in a Tipack rack • 3 single holders • 3 plastic ejectors • 1 Gilson Guide to Pipetting Article Pipetman® G Starter Kit Pipetman® G Micro Volume Kit Order No. 10 01 74423 10 01 74424 Microliter Pipettes Pipetman® L, Gilson Greater productivity, more ease of use • Ergonomic design • Light-weight • 3 tip ejector positions – ideal for left- and right-handed users GLP features • Volume lock/unlock mechanisms • Unique 2D identification code • Traceable serial number • Color-coded push buttons Volume 0.2 – 2 µl 1 – 10 µl 2 – 20 µl 20 – 100 µl 20 – 200 µl 200 – 1000 µl 1 – 5 ml 1 – 10 ml Order No. 10 01 74425 10 01 74426 10 01 74427 10 01 74428 10 01 74429 10 01 74430 10 01 74431 10 01 74432 Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWC8F367 co d e b e w WWC8F368 co d e b e w WWC8F369 Type P2L P10L P20L P100L P200L P1000L P5000L P10mlL co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 353

355

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWC8F370 1 Microliter Pipettes Pipetman® L Kits, Gilson Gilson Pipetman® L Starter Kit: • Gilson Pipetman® L P20L, P200L, P1000L • Tips D200 und D1000 im Tipack Rack • 3 single holders • 3 Plastic tip ejectors • 1 User Guide Pipetman L • 1 Two-minute inspection poster • 1 Gilson Guide to Pipetting Gilson Pipetman® L Micro Volume Kit • Gilson Pipetman® L P2L, P10L, P100L • Tips DL10 und D200 im Tipack Rack • 3 single holders • 3 Plastic tip ejectors • 1 User Guide Pipetman L • 1 Two-minute inspection poster • 1 Gilson Guide to Pipetting Article 1 Gilson Pipetman® L Starter Kit Gilson Pipetman® L Micro Volume Kit Order No. 10 01 74443 10 01 74444 Microliter Pipettes Pipetman® L Multi Channel, Gilson co d e b e w • A patented volume locking system meets the current needs of intensive pipette users who desire accuracy and precision without sacrificing comfort. • The volume will not be accidentally changed during pipetting • Is equipped with an innovative tip ejection system which uses a lever arm for all tip models to keep ejection forces to a minimum • The ejection button of the tip ejector can be adjusted for ease of operation of left- and right-handed users • Particularly light-weight WWC8F371 Article Pipetman® L 8×10 L Pipetman® L 12×10 L Pipetman® L 8×20 L Pipetman® L 12×20 L Pipetman® L 8×200 L Pipetman® L 12×200 L Pipetman® L 8×300 L Pipetman® L 12×300 L Volume µl 0.5 – 10 0.5 – 10 2 – 20 2 – 20 20 – 200 20 – 200 20 – 300 20 – 300 Order No. 10 01 74450 10 01 74451 10 01 74452 10 01 74453 10 01 74454 10 01 74455 10 01 74456 10 01 74457 co d e b e w 354 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

356

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWC8F372 co d e b e w WWC8F373 Microliter Pipettes Electronic Microliter Pipettes Pipetman® M connected, Blue- tooth-connectivity, Gilson PIPETMAN® M Connected is a Bluetooth®-enabled programmable electronic pipette. It is as easy to operate as a mechanical pipette. The electronic pipette with guaranteed per- formance, also in Repetitive mode, pursuant to the ISO8655 specifications. Programming of individual protocols (optionally also via PC and the PipettPilot™ app) for reliable pipet- ting. Motorised piston for high reproducibility. The intuitive user interface offers five pipetting modes for a large number of applications: “pipette”, “repetitive”, “mix”, “reverse” and “custom”. Aspiration and dispensing at the click of a button with minimum effort. Combined with the ergonomic design, this ensures extremely comfortable pipetting, reduces fatigue and increases the pipetting efficiency. 20 models are available, from 0.5 µL to 10 ml as single-channel pipette and from 0.5 µL to 1200 µL as multi-channel pipette. GLP functions: • Lockable volume • Colour-coded pushbutton • Service alert Type Volume Order No. M P10M BT connected 0.5 – 10 µl 10 01 74268 M P20M BT connected 2 – 20 µl 10 01 74269 M P100M BT connected 5 – 100 µl 10 01 74270 M P200M BT connected 5 – 200 µl 10 01 74271 M P300M BT connected 10 – 300 µl 10 01 74272 M P1200M BT connected 20 – 1200 µl 10 01 74273 M P5000M BT connected 100 – 5000 µl 10 01 74274 M P10mlM BT connected 0.2 – 10 ml 10 01 74275 Power carousel charging stand for 5 Pipetman M 10 01 74437 Charging adapter and holder for the pipette carousel 10 01 74438 Electronic Microliter Pipettes Pipetman® M connected, Blue- tooth-connectivity, Multi Channel, Gilson PIPETMAN® M Connected is a Bluetooth®-enabled programmable electronic pipette. It is as easy to operate as a mechanical pipette. The electronic pipette with guaranteed per- formance, also in Repetitive mode, pursuant to the ISO8655 specifications. Programming of individual protocols (optionally also via PC and the PipettPilot™ app) for reliable pipet- ting. Motorised piston for high reproducibility. The intuitive user interface offers five pipet- ting modes for a large number of applications: “pipette”, “repetitive”, “mix”, “reverse” and “custom”. Aspiration and dispensing at the click of a button with minimum effort. Combined with the ergonomic design, this ensures extremely comfortable pipetting, reduces fatigue and in- creases the pipetting efficiency. 20 models are available, from 0.5 µL to 10 ml as sin- gle-channel pipette and from 0.5 µL to 1200 µL as multi-channel pipette. GLP functions: • Lockable volume • Colour-coded pushbutton • Service alert Type P8×10M BT connected P12×10M BT connected P8×20M BT connected P12×100M BT connected P8×100M BT connected P12×100M BT connected P8×200M BT connected P12×200M BT connected P8×300M BT connected P12×300M BT connected P8×1200M BT connected P12×1200M BT connected Power carousel charging stand for 5 Pipetman M Charging adapter and holder for the pipette carousel Order No. Volume µl 0.5 – 10 10 01 74276 0.5 – 10 10 01 74277 1 – 20 10 01 74278 1 – 20 10 01 74279 5 – 100 10 01 74280 5 – 100 10 01 74281 5 – 200 10 01 74282 5 – 200 10 01 74283 10 – 300 10 01 74284 10 – 300 10 01 74285 50 – 1200 10 01 74286 50 – 1200 10 01 74287 10 01 74437 10 01 74438 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 355

357

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWEZ6018 co d e b e w WWEZ6028 356 Microliter Pipettes Pipettes Tacta and Picus®, Sartorius Lab Products and Services Tacta mechanical pipettes Tacta is the new premium mechanical pipette with superb comfort and reliability. Tacta makes pipetting effortless and safe, while producing accurate and reliable results time after time. Features: • Ergonomic handle design for comfortable pipetting • Little effort required for pipetting and ejecting • New Optiject soft tip ejection technology loosens tips smoothly and in a controlled way • The unique Sartorius Optilock system offers flexibility for volume changes and locking function • For special liquids, users can easily adjust the pipette for accurate results • 4-digit display for precise and easy volume setting • Safe-Cone filters prevent contamination risks with all models > 10 µl • Only three part to remove for easy cleaning • Length: 199 – 242 mm Type LH-729010 LH-729020 LH-729030 LH-729050 LH-729060 LH-729070 LH-729080 LH-729090 LH-729120 LH-729130 LH-729140 LH-729220 LH-729230 LH-729240 Quantity channels 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 8 8 12 12 12 Volume 0.1 – 3 µl 0.5 – 10 µl 2 – 20 µl 10 – 100 µl 20 – 200 µl 100 – 1000 µl 500 – 5000 µl 1 – 10 ml 0.5 – 10 µl 5 – 100 µl 30 – 300 µl 0.5 – 10 µl 5 – 100 µl 30 – 300 µl Order No. 10 18 62901 10 18 62902 10 18 62903 10 18 62905 10 18 62906 10 18 62907 10 18 62908 10 18 62909 10 18 62912 10 18 62913 10 18 62914 10 18 62922 10 18 62923 10 18 62924 Please enter the webcode WWEZ6018 to see the other variants and accessories in our online catalogue. Picus® NxT Elektronic Pipettes, Sartorius Lab Products and Services Picus® NxT and Picus® are user-friendly electronic pipettes by Sartorius. Exceptionally compact and lightweight, these pipettes have been specially designed to ease your daily workload and protect you from repetitive strain injury (RSI). Excellent ergonomics, efficiency and safety. Benefits: • Comfortable handling and excellent protection from the risk of RSI • Compliance with the strictest laboratory regulations • Acceleration of work processes • Consistently accurate results Model Quantity channels LH-745021 LH-745041 LH-745061 LH-745081 LH-745101 LH-745111 LH-745321 LH-745341 LH-745361 LH-745391 LH-745421 LH-745441 LH-745461 LH-745491 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 Volume µl 0.2 – 10 µl 5 – 120 µl 10 – 300 µl 50 – 1000 µl 100 – 5000 µl 500 – 10000 µl 0.2 – 10 µl 5 – 120 µl 10 – 300 µl 50 – 1200 µl 0.2 – 10 µl 5 – 120 µl 10 – 300 µl 50 – 1200 µl Order No. 10 18 65021 10 18 65041 10 18 65061 10 18 65081 10 18 65101 10 18 65111 10 18 65321 10 18 65341 10 18 65361 10 18 65391 10 18 65421 10 18 65441 10 18 65461 10 18 65491 Please enter the webcode WWEZ6028 to see the other variants and accessories in our online catalogue.

358

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WW4ZG004 co d e b e w WW4ZG005 Microliter Pipettes Single-Channel Pipettes L, ratiolab® Pipette L The PIPETTE L meets all the demands for sterile liquid handling in microbiological and molecularbiological laboratories. It is fully autoclavable and resistant to UV-light. Easy volume setting by turning the pushbutton avoids jamming the gloves in the knurled screw. Low spring forces of pipetting stroke and tip ejector accommodate the daily work without hand fatigue. With ten pipette models the volume range is covered from 0.2 µl up to 10 ml. • perfect measuring results • fully autoclavable and UV-light resistant • volume settings by pushbutton • grooved handle reduces the influence of handwarmth • fatigue free operation because of ergonomic designed handle and reduced spring • adjustable lenght of tip ejector enables the use of any brand of pipette tips • maintenance free, all components ae manufactured either from stainless steel or chem- ical resistant plastics forces nation • filters in the shafts protect the 5 ml and 10 ml pipettes against overfilling and contami- Type L2 L10 L20 L50 L100 L200 L250 L1000 L5000 L10000 Volume µl 0.1 – 2 0.5 – 10 2 – 20 5 – 50 10 – 100 20 – 200 50 – 250 100 – 1000 1000 – 5000 1000 – 10000 Accuracy max. vol. % +1.5 +0.5 +0.8 +0.8 +0.8 +0.6 +0.6 +0.6 +0.5 +0.5 Precision Order No. % < 0.7 < 0.4 < 0.3 < 0.4 < 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.3 < 0.15 < 0.15 < 0.2 10 23 04771 10 23 04772 10 23 04773 10 23 04774 10 23 04775 10 23 04776 10 23 04777 10 23 04778 10 23 04779 10 23 04780 Multichannel Pipettes ME and MT, ratiolab® Multichannel pipette ME/MT The fully autoclavable PIPETTES ME/MT are specially designed for working with gloves under sterile conditions. The volume range from 1 µl to 300 µl is covered by 4 models each in the 8- and 12-channel versions. The patented manifold system ensures individual tight sealing of the pipette tips on each channel. Features: • perfect measuring results • fully autoclavable and UV-light resistant • volume settings by pushbutton avoids snatching the gloves • ergonomic design, handle can be turned to an individual convenient position • patented system makes manual corrections of the tip sealing redundant • maintenance free: all components are manufactured either from stainless steel or chem- ical resistant plastics • each pipette comes with quality certificate, holder and calibration key 1 8-channel-pipette ME Type Volume ME10 ME50 ME200 ME300 µl 1 – 10 5 – 50 20 – 200 50 – 300 2 12-channel-pipette MT Type Volume MT10 MT50 MT200 MT300 µl 1 – 10 5 – 50 20 – 200 50 – 300 co d e b e w Accuracy max. vol. % 2.0 1.6 1.0 1.0 Accuracy max. vol. % 2.0 1.6 1.0 1.0 Precision Order No. % < 1.2 < 0.6 < 0.6 < 0.6 10 23 07064 10 23 07065 10 23 07066 10 23 07067 Precision Order No. % < 1.2 < 0.6 < 0.6 < 0.6 10 23 07068 10 23 07069 10 23 07070 10 23 07071 1 2 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 357

359

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Microliter Pipettes Micropipettes VITLAB® micropipette, VITLAB The VITLAB® piston-operated pipettes are the ideal manual pipettes for demanding lab- oratory applications, and have all the features required by users: robust, with ergonomic shape and simple operation, completely autoclavable, highly accurate with simple calibra- tion. The large pipetting button in the centre ensures a smooth and even piston movement. The ergonomic eject button for rapid tip change is situated at the front, easily accessible for the user‘s thumb. The VITLAB® micropipette is easy to operate for right- and left-handed users. The integrated zoom function of the precise four-digit display as well as the vertical arrangement of the numbers (to be read from top to bottom) ensure that the volume is clearly legible at all times. With adjustment wheel for accurate and easy zoom setting. The volume display is framed by the clearly visible colour code for easy selection of the match- ing pipette tip. If necessary, for example when working with non-aqueous solutions, the pipette can be re-calibrated by means of the integrated function directly in the laboratory. No tools are required for calibration. The corrosion-proof piston and ejector ensure a long useful life. The microliter pipette is fully autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Also available with DAkkS calibration certificate. Scope of delivery: VITLAB® micropipette, silicone oil, sample bag pipette tips, quality certificate and operating manual. Volume µl 0.5 – 10 2 – 20 1 10 – 100 20 – 200 100 – 1000 500 – 5000 1000 – 10000 A P ± % 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 CV P % 0.5 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Tip style µl 20 200 200/300 200/300 1000 5000 10000 Order No. 10 85 34101 10 85 34102 10 85 34104 10 85 34106 10 85 34108 10 85 34110 10 85 34112 Calibrated to deliver “Ex”. Accuracy and coefficient of variation based on the nominal volume (= maximum volume) printed on the instrument, if instrument, environment and distilled water are at the same temperature (20°C), as well as uniform, jerk-free handling. The margins of error are under those specified in DIN EN ISO 8655-2. Volumetric Pipettes with Piston, Hirschmann Labopettor macro, volumetric pipettes with piston, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600 4 sizes, each with 5 fixed volumes for the range 1 to 5000 µl, no air interface between the piston and the liquid, d. h. almost no liquid remains in the tip, highest accuracy regardless the medium, also for liquids with high vapor pressure, for highly viscous media and for media with a high density, multiple use of stiks (pistons) and tips with constant high pre- cision. Materials are resistant to nearly all aggressive media. Stiks and tips can be changed without risk of contamination; same color-coding on the unit, accessories and packaging practically rules out incorrect combinations of the various sizes. Scope of delivery: 1 labopettor macro with 1 stik und 1 tip 3 Volume A P ±1) CV P ±1) µl Entrain- ment1) % 0.5 0.5 1) Relative to the maximum volume % 2 50 – 250 0.8 100 – 500 0.8 % 0.3 0.3 Gradua- tion µl 50 100 Color code black yellow Order No. 14 37 00204 14 37 00205 Labopettor system accessories same color code as the unit, tips up to 50 µl made of glass, over 50 µl made of plastic, stiks made of rust-proof steel, stand for the unit and for storing tips and stiks. co d e b e w WW4ZV018 Type Tips ID Color code Order No. 3 set (stick + tips) set (stick + tips) set (stick + tips) set (stick + tips) 50 – 250 100 – 500 500 – 2500 1000 – 5000 black yellow green red 14 37 50204 14 37 50205 14 37 50206 14 37 50207 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 2 358

360

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWSB5049 Microliter Pipettes Variable Piston Pipettes, Phoenix Instrument • Ergonomic design, little effort required • Suitable for left- and right-handers • Tool for easy recalibration comprised in the delivery • Fully autoclavable (LHP2 only) • Easy volume setting • Easy tip rejection • 2 years warranty Variable piston pipettes LHP1 and LHP2 Model LHP1-V01 LHP1-V05 LHP1-V2 LHP1-V5 LHP1-V10 LHP1-V20 LHP1-V50 LHP1-V100 LHP1-V200 LHP1-V1000 LHP1-V2000 Volume µl 0.1–0.5 0.5–10 2–20 5–50 10–100 20–200 50–200 100–1000 200–1000 1000–5000 2000–10000 Accuracy % 3.00 1.50 1.20 0.90 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.70 0.70 0.60 1.20 Variable piston pipettes LHP2, autoclavable Model LHP2-V01 LHP2-V05 LHP2-V2 LHP2-V5 LHP2-V10 LHP2-V20 LHP2-V50 LHP2-V100 LHP2-V200 LHP2-V1000 Volume µl 0.1–0.5 0.5–10 2–20 5–50 10–100 20–200 50–200 100–1000 200–1000 1000–5000 Accuracy % 3.00 1.50 1.20 0.90 1.00 0.80 0.80 0.70 0.70 0.60 Precision % 3.00 1.50 1.00 0.60 0.40 0.30 0.30 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.30 Precision % 3.00 1.50 1.00 0.60 0.40 0.30 0.30 0.25 0.25 0.30 Order No. 10 13 71011 10 13 71051 10 13 71222 10 13 71550 10 13 71010 10 13 71020 10 13 71050 10 13 71100 10 13 71122 10 13 71110 10 13 71120 Order No. 10 13 72011 10 13 72050 10 13 72020 10 13 72501 10 13 72013 10 13 72200 10 13 72502 10 13 72101 10 13 72220 10 13 72111 Pipettes with fixed volume available on request For all variable pipettes, measurements are carried out in the low, medium, and high vol- ume. For variable pipettes, the accuracy and precision is specified for the mean of the setting range. Accessories Article Pipette tips 0.5 – 20 µl, bag of 1000 pieces Pipette tips 1 – 200 µl yellow, bag of 1000 pieces Pipette tips 100 – 1000 µl blue, bag of 1000 pieces Pipette tips 1.0 – 5.0 ml, bag of 300 pieces Pipette tips 1.0 – 10.0 ml, bag of 100 pieces Linear pipette stand, for 5 pipettes Round pipette stand, for 6 pipettes Order No. 10 13 71111 10 13 71112 10 13 71114 10 13 71116 10 13 71118 10 13 71101 10 13 71102 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 359

361

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED007 1 2 3 360 4 Microliter Pipettes Transferpettor, Positive Displacement Pipettes, BRAND The Transferpettor pipette is ideal for liquids when air displacement pipettes just won‘t work. With these pipettes, the piston is in direct contact with the liquid. Therefore, the instrument is ideal for exact pipetting of highly viscous or foaming media, or media with high density or vapor pressure. There is no need to discard tips after each pipetting op- eration, since residual wetting is negligible. Colour codes of instrument and accessories allow for easy designation. DE-M marked acc. DIN 12300. 1 Transferpettor, type Digital Volume µl 2.5 – 10 5 – 25 10 – 50 20 – 100 100 – 500 200 – 1000 1000 – 5000 2000 – 10000 A P ± % 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 CV P ± % 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Graduation µl 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 1.0 1.0 10.0 10.0 Color code Order No. orange 2 × white green blue green yellow red orange 14 49 71807 14 49 71812 14 49 71817 14 49 72822 14 49 72804 14 49 72806 14 49 72810 14 49 72812 Transferpettor, type Fix Volume µl 1 2 5 10 20 25 50 100 200 A P ± % 4.0 2.5 1.0 1.0 0.8 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.5 CV P ± % 4.0 2.0 0.8 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.2 Graduation µl - - - - - - - - - Color code Order No. white white white orange black 2 × white green blue red 14 49 71842 14 49 71844 14 49 71853 14 49 71858 14 49 71863 14 49 71864 14 49 71868 14 49 71873 14 49 71878 Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Error limits according to the nominal capacity (= maximum volume) indicated on the instrument. A = Accuracy, CV = Coefficient of variation. The error limits are within the limits of DIN EN ISO 8655-2. 2 Accessories Transferpettor station Article Transferpettor station for 4 units Transferpettor station for 2 units for storing 4 units up to 200 µl with accessories for storing 2 units from 0,5 to 10 ml with accessories Order No. 14 49 71960 14 49 72890 3 Transferpettor caps, DE-M marking Color code for volume µl Material Order No. 1/2/3/4/5 10 20 25 50 100/200 white orange black 2 × white green blue/red Glas Glas Glas Glas Glas Glas 14 49 71900 14 49 71902 14 49 71904 14 49 71906 14 49 71908 14 49 71910 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 4 Transferpettor caps, DE-M marking Color code for volume µl Material Order No. 100 – 500 200 – 1000 1000 – 5000 2000 – 10000 green yellow red orange PP PP PP PP 14 49 72852 14 49 72854 14 49 72858 14 49 72860 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Continued on next page PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 50 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10

362

Microliter Pipettes Transferpettor seals, DE-M marking, with plug-on module for volume µl Material Order No. PTFE PTFE PTFE PE PE PE PE 14 49 71920 14 49 71922 14 49 71924 14 49 72864 14 49 72866 14 49 72870 14 49 72872 PU pc/Pack 3 3 3 10 10 10 10 5 20/25 5 50 5 100/200 6 100 – 500 6 200 – 1000 6 1000 – 5000 6 2000 – 10000 Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 5 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Combi pack caps and seals DE-M marking. Packaging unit caps, PP: 2 pieces, seal, PE: 1 piece. for volume µl Color code Order No. 100–500 200–1000 1000–5000 2000–10000 green yellow red orange 10 49 72883 10 49 72884 10 49 72885 10 49 72886 Repetitive Pipette HandyStep® S, BRAND Serial pipetting is quick and easy with the manual HandyStep® S repeating pipette. When used with BRAND PD-Tip syringe tips, the instrument can dispense volumes from 2 µl to 5 ml up to 49 times from a single aspiration. • Stroke length setting wheel with 9 positions – simple one hand adjustment for right and left-handed person • 59 different partial volumes can be set with 10 sizes of PD-Tips • 2-page volume table at the back of the device for quick volume calculation • Easy connection of tips, the PD-Tips are inserted straight from below • Safe tip removal at the push of a button; no need to touch the dispenser tips • Easy-to-read display, no battery required • Innovative plastics for increased resistance to chemicals • Maintenance-free, factory-adjusted • Best results when used with BRAND PD-Tip syringe tips. Combitips® plus, Combitips®, Repet-Tips, Encode™ tips and other compatible pipette tips can be used as well. Ideal for routine or research applications in diagnostics, molecular biology, environmental analysis, and many more. HandyStep® S and PD-tips work on the direct displacement principle. This offers the highest-precision dispensing of liquid media with high viscosity, high density, or high vapor pressure. Items supplied: HandyStep® S, DE-M marked, with serial number, performance cerficate, operating man- ual, shelf/rack mount, 3 PD-Tips: 0.1 ml, 1 ml and 10 ml. Article 7 HandyStep®, incl. shelf/rack mount Shelf/Rack mount for HandyStep® S Order No. 10 49 75110 10 49 75130 co d e b e w WWQED015 7 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 361

363

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED082 Microliter Pipettes Dispenser Tips PD-Tips II, BRAND Dispense with ease – even critical media Save time with automatic size detection The PD-Tips II dispenser tips for efficient, step-by-step dispensing enhance the proven features of the classic BRAND PD-Tips. Thanks to patented size coding, HandyStep® touch and HandyStep® electronic from BRAND automatically detect the tip volume. The tips are also compatible with all other instruments of the HandyStep® family and with repetitive pipettes from other manufactur- ers. The positive displacement principle enables precision work, even with viscous media or media with high vapor pressure. With tightly sealed pistons, the PD-Tips II effectively protect the stepper from aerosols. This prevents contamination and ensures long service life of the instrument. At a glance • Volumes from 0.1 ml to 50 ml • Compatible with different repetitive pipets • Compatible with automatic size detection: HandyStep® touch, HandyStep® electronic, Gilson® Repetman®, Rainin AutoRep™ E • Compatible without automatic size detection: HandyStep® S, HandyStep®, Rainin AutoRep™ S, Rainin AutoRep™ M, Eppendorf® Multipette® 4780 and EDOS® 5221 (the above-mentioned brands are property of their respective owners) • Cleanroom quality • Available in BIO-CERT® quality (free of DNA, RNase, endotoxins and ATP) • Comply with the requirements of ISO 8655 • Delivered with batch certificate • Manufactured from high-quality raw materials (cylinder: PP / Piston: PE-HD, 0.1 ml: LCP) • Adapter for sizes 25 ml and 50 ml included • PD-Tips II cannot be autoclaved; the adapters of the 25 ml and 50 ml sizes can be au- toclaved at 121°C Dispenser tips PD-Tips II, non-sterile, bulk Nom. vol. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 ml 0.1 0.5 1 1.25 2.5 ml 0.1 0.5 1 1.25 2.5 Nom. vol. Order No. 10 49 75700 10 49 75702 10 49 75704 10 49 75706 10 49 75708 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Nom. vol. ml 5 10 12.5 25 50 Order No. 10 49 75710 10 49 75712 10 49 75714 10 49 75716 10 49 75718 Order No. 10 49 75730 10 49 75732 10 49 75734 10 49 75736 10 49 75738 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Nom. vol. ml 5 10 12.5 25 50 Order No. 10 49 75740 10 49 75742 10 49 75744 10 49 75746 10 49 75748 Dispenser tips PD-Tips II, BIO-CERT®, individually wrapped Dispenser tips PD-Tips II, set non-sterile Article Set PD-Tips II 20 pcs. of each size 0.5, 1, 1.25, 2.5, 5, 10 and 12.5 ml, non-sterile, bulk, type encoded Order No. 10 49 75720 PU pc/Set 140 co d e b e w WWQJ3013 1 362 Hand Dispenser, Eppendorf 1 Hand dispenser Multipette® M4 Easy, error-free, ergonomical. The Multipette M4 makes long pipetting series easier and faster. • Light-weight design, ergonomical shape • Perfectly balanced for fatigue-free working • Integrated step counter • Central tip ejection for single-handed operation • 9 different volume sizes (0.1 µl to 50 ml) by Combitips advanced® including holder for wall mounting and/or pipettor carousel Article Multipette® M4 Multipette® M4 starter kit Multipette® M4, Combitip Rack, Combitip Assortmentpack Battery compartment lid Multipette/Repeater M4 Velcro tape for holder Multipette/Repeater Order No. 10 69 82012 10 69 82314 10 69 26108 10 69 26300 Continued on next page

364

Microliter Pipettes Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 2 Generation E The new electronic dispensers Multipette® E3 and E3x with large display and new, intuitive user menu make serial liquid dispensing extremely easy and comfortable. The new elec- tronic dispensers Multipette® E3 and E3x are the follow-up models of the time-proven Multipette® stream and Xstream. • Large colour display: all program functions at a glance, clearly understandable user menu, extremely easy to program • New function “Aspirate and dispense” (“A/D”): Pick up an unknown volume of a liquid and dispense it step by step in preselectable volumes • Extended speed range: more flexibility in picking up and dispensing of liquids • Favourites: 5 methods can be saved for each Combitip size • Personalization: individual dispenser identification in the “Options” menu Article Multipette® E3, with charging cable Multipette® E3x, with charging cable Multipette® E3 Bundle, with seperate charging unit Multipette® E3x Bundle, with seperate charging unit Power supply with power plug adapters Order No. 10 69 87010 10 69 87029 10 69 87371 10 69 87380 10 69 63005 Pipette Tips, Eppendorf Pipette tips Combitips® advanced The Eppendorf Combitips have been completely redesigned and optimized so that they are capable of meeting the increased requirements of a modern laboratory to a greater extent than ever before. The result is the Combitips advanced®. As they offer a wide variety of advantages in comparison with the Combitips plus, we talk about the 360° Evolution! • Combitips advanced are the ideal system components for all Multipettes • The 9 volume sizes (0.1 ml – 50 ml) of the Combitips advanced offer a maximum range of volumes advanced • An individual color coding facilitates the quick identification of the desired Combitips • Elongated tips make it possible to empty all standard laboratory tubes completely • The appropriate purity grade for each application: Eppendorf Quality, PCR clean or Biopur® (packed individually) • The funnel geometry prevents damages to gloves • The new Combitip Rack features optimal single-hand operation 2 co d e b e w WWQJ3015 Type 0.1 ml 0.2 ml 0.5 ml 1 ml 2.5 ml 5 ml 10 ml 10 ml ViscoTip® 25 ml 50 ml Volume µl Color code PU pc/Pack 1 – 20 2 – 40 5 – 100 10 – 200 25 – 500 50 – 1000 100 – 2000 100 – 2000 250 – 5000 5000 – 10000 white light blue violet yellow green blue orange orange red light grey 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Version Eppendorf Quality™ Order No. 10 69 89405 10 69 89413 10 69 89421 10 69 89430 10 69 89448 10 69 89456 10 69 89464 10 69 89502 10 69 89472 10 69 89480 PCR clean Order No. 10 69 89766 10 69 89774 10 69 89782 10 69 89790 10 69 89804 10 69 89812 10 69 89820 10 69 89839 10 69 89847 Biopur® Order No. 10 69 89618 10 69 89626 10 69 89634 10 69 89642 10 69 89650 10 69 89669 10 69 89677 10 69 89685 10 69 89693 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Combitips® advanced assorted pack Contents: 5 Combitips® advanced of each size plus one 25 ml and one 50 ml adapter Article Combitips® advanced assorted pack Combitips advanced® rack Accessories Article Order No. 14 69 69285 10 69 89758 Order No. 25 ml adapter Standard, Eppendorf Quality™, marine blue 14 69 69528 50 ml adapter Standard, Eppendorf Quality™, anthracite 14 69 69161 25 ml adapter Biopur, pack of 7 14 69 69498 50 ml adapter Biopur®, pack of 7 14 69 69480 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 363

365

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Microliter Pipettes Pipette Accessories, Eppendorf co d e b e w WWQJ3010 Pipette holder systems The Eppendorf pipette carousel stand has room for the comfortable and safe storage of six Eppendorf pipettes and/or liquid handling devices. Adapters are available for Multi- pette® M4 and Reference 2. Article 1 Pipette Carousel 2 for 6 Eppendorf pipettes for Eppendorf Research®, Eppendorf Research® plus, Eppen- dorf Reference®, Eppendorf Reference® 2 oder Biomaster®, ad- ditional pipette holders are optionally available Charger Carousel 2 for 6 Eppendorf pipettes for Eppendorf Xplorer® or Eppendorf Xplorer® plus, mains/pow- er adapter included, additional charger shells and pipette hol- ders are opionally available Charger Stand 2 Xplorer for one Eppendorf Xplorer® or Eppendorf Xplorer® plus, opera- ted with mains/power adapter supplied with Eppendorf Xplorer® or Eppendorf Xplorer® plus Charger Stand 2 Multipette® for one Multipette® E3/E3x or Multipette® stream/Xstream, ope- rated with mains/power adapter supplied with Multipette® E3/ E3x or Multipette® stream/Xstream Charger Stand 2 Multipette® M4 for one Multipette® M4, without charging functionality, additio- nal pipette holders are optionally available Supplied without the illustrated accessories Pipette holder and charger shells Order No. 10 69 60015 10 69 60023 10 69 60031 10 69 00040 10 69 60058 Article Pipette Holder 2 for one Eppendorf Research®, Eppendorf Research® plus, Ep- pendorf Reference® 2 or Biomaster®, for Pipette Carousel 2 and Charger Carousel 2 or wall mounting, sticky tape included Pipette Holder 2 Xplorer for one Eppendorf Xplorer®/Xplorer® plus, for Pipette Carousel 2 or wall mounting, sticky tape included, without charging functio- nality Pipette Holder 2 Multipette® Pipette Holder 2, for one Multipette® E3/E3x or Multipette® stream/Xstream, for Pipette Carousel 2 or wall mounting, sticky tape included, without charging functionality Pipette Holder 2 Multipette® M4 for one Multipette® M4, for Pipette Carousel 2 and Charger Ca- rousel 2 or wall mounting, sticky tape included Charger Shell 2 Xplorer for one Eppendorf Xplorer®/Xplorer® plus, for Charger Carousel 2 (with charging functionality) Charger Shell 2 Multipette® for one Multipette® E3/E3x or Multipette® stream/Xstream, for Charger Carousel 2 (with charging functionality) Order No. 10 69 60112 10 69 60120 10 69 60139 10 69 60147 10 69 62007 10 69 63003 Gilson Distriman® Stepper, Gilson Gilson Distriman® Stepper The Distriman® is a directly displacing pipette for multiple pipetting of the same solution quantity. Only 3 different DistriTips® tips are enough to cover a volume range from 1 µl to 1.25 ml. Thereby, an output of the same sample quantity is possible to a minimum of 100 times. The pipetting volume is adjusted on the Distriman® as well the DistriTip® model, so the right quantity is always reliably pipetted. Example: With a DistriTip® type micro (125 µl) you are able to pipet a quantity of 2.8 µl up to 42 times. Article Gilson Distriman® Stepper Order No. 10 01 74380 DistriTips® The DistriTips® are available loosely packed in the 50er pack, as standard tips or sterilised and single packed (ST). The sterilised tips are free of RNAse, DNAse, DNA, RNA and proteases. Article Volume µl DistriTips® Micro 125 µl 2 – 10 µl DistriTips® Micro ST 125 µl, sterile 2 – 10 µl DistriTips® Micro 1250 µl 20 – 100 µl DistriTips® Micro ST 1250 µl, sterile 20 – 100 µl DistriTips® Maxi 12.5 ml DistriTips® Maxi ST 12.5 ml, sterile 200 – 1000 µl 200 – 1000 µl Order No. 10 01 74381 10 01 74382 10 01 74383 10 01 74384 10 01 74385 10 01 74386 PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50 50 50 1 1 co d e b e w WWC8F386 364

366

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Pipette Tips, Accessories Pipettes and Filter Tips, BRAND Pipette tips and filter tips are manufactured by BRAND in a cleanroom under the most modern production conditions, and are automatically rack packed and packaged to en- sure that the tips are of consistently high quality. co d e b e w WWQED068 Quality features • High-purity polypropylene, free from DiHEMDA and oleamide • Manufactured without lubricants • Cadmium-free pigments • Graduation for a quick volume check • All racked tips and filter tips up to 1000 µl are free of DNA (< 40 fg), RNase (< 8.6 fg), endotoxins (< 1 pg) and ATP (< 1 fg) • All sterile tips and their packaging in BIO-CERT® quality: sterile pursuant to ISO 11 137 and the AAMI directives, guaranteed SAL of 10-6, with certificate • TipBox/Rack system: all sizes up to max. 1,000 µl now in 96 format • Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285 • Environmentally friendly packaging systems • CE-marked according to IVD-Directive 98/79 EC • BRAND pipette and filter tips have been tested for BRAND and most pipette models by GILSON®, Thermo Fisher Scientific FINNPIPETTE®, Eppendorf® and BIOHIT®/ sartorius®. The 5 ml tip has been tested for BRAND and Thermo Fisher Scientific FINNPIPETTE® only. The 10 ml tip is suitable for BRAND, Eppendorf® and GILSON®. 1 Ultra Low Retention pipette tips and filter tips (ULR) The surfaces of the Ultra Low Retention tips are produced through a special, patented physicochemical process. The homogeneous, defect-free surface thus producted has extremely low surface tension – over 50% less than PTFE. This significantly reduces sample loss and provides substantially higher reproducibility when working with critical media. • Ideal for biological samples that contain detergents such as Triton® X-100, SDS, Tween etc. • No additives that can be leached out! No siliconization of the surface! • High chemical resistance. Ideal for working with solvents • The tips can be autoclaved at 121°C (2 bar) without damaging the material properties 2Filter tips Non-self-sealing filter tips from BRAND have a PE filter that is free from chemical addi- tives. Permeability is controlled by the combination of pore size and filter length, so that no aerosols can reach the pipette shaft. These filters function with consistent reliability. On the other hand, liquids can pass very slowly should they accidentally contact the filter. Since the filter does not swell as in the case of self-sealing filter tips, the sample can be recovered from the filter by simply actuating the pipettes blow-out function, or by centrif- ugation if necessary. This is clearly an important advantage of non-self-sealing filters, especially when working with valuable samples. As an added advantage, the absence of filter additives protects samples from contamination. Packaging options: 3 Bulk packed in bags, non-sterile All tips and filter tips are produced under supervised state-of-the-art clean-room condi- tions and automatically shrink-wrapped in reclosable bags and packaged in cardboard boxes. The batch number is printed on every bag. 4 + 5 TipBox, non-sterile and sterile, BIO-CERT® • All sizes up to 1,000µl in 96 format • Dual function: hinged and push-on lid. Simply rotate 180° to change closure method • Opening and closing with one hand. The clamping mechanism holds the tip-tray secure- • Transparent window for easy visual inspection • No deflection during tip loading. The tip-tray is fabricated from especially rigid polypro- • Usable with a partially loaded multichannel pipette: The rimless tip-tray border enables problem-free loading of individual pipette tips with multichannel instruments • Colored tip-trays with side panel labeling. The contents of the box are always clearly ly in the box. pylene. visible. 1 3 5 2 4 6 TipRack (racked), sterile and non-sterile, BIO-CERT® Compared to the filled TipBoxes, the amount of waste with the new refill units is reduced by over 20%. All pipette tips and filter tips up to 1000 µl are free of DNA, RNases, endo- toxins and ATP. TipRacks in BIO-CERT® quality are sterile according to ISO 11 137 and the AAMI guidelines, a SAL of 10-6 is obtained. These racks are supplied with a transfer aid that enables simple, contamination-free transfer into a previously sterilized TipBox. All tip-trays are printed on one side with information on the contents. 5 racks of 96 tips each are supplied with a transfer aid for sterile handling when inserting into a previously auto- claved box. 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 365 Continued on next page

367

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 7 1 2 3 4 366 Pipette Tips, Accessories 7 TipStack™, sterile and non-sterile, BIO-CERT® A tip tower containing 5 filled tip-trays and a TipBox constitute the new, space-saving refill system for 20 µl, 200 µl and 1000 µl tips. Tightly sealing spacers prevent the tips from getting stuck together, and ensure them to be free from DNA, RNases, endotoxins and ATP. The sterile TipStacks (BIO-CERT® quality) are supplied with a transfer aid for con- tamination-free use in a previously sterilized TipBox. • All components are recyclable • Reduced amount of waste • Sterilizable and reusable TipBox • High purity of the pipette tips and filter tips • Space-saving design TipBox 5/10 ml, non-sterile The 5 ml and 10 ml tips are only available as a racked tip version in this specially corre- sponding TipBox. Pipette tips, Standard and Ultra Low Retention (ULR) 1 Pipette tips 0.1 – 20 µl Article Type bulk packed Standard bulk packed XXL Standard TipRack Standard TipRack, sterile Standard TipBox Standard TipBox, sterile Standard TipBox ULR TipBox, sterile ULR Packing type Order No. 2 bags of 1000 10 bags of 1000 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32002 10 49 32022 10 49 32102 10 49 32122 10 49 32202 10 49 32222 10 49 32302 10 49 32322 PU pc/Pack 2000 10000 960 960 480 960 480 960 2 Pipette tips 0.5 – 20 µl Article Type Packing type Order No. bulk packed Standard 2 bags of 1000 10 49 32004 bulk packed XXL Standard 10 bags of 1000 10 49 32024 TipRack Standard 10 racks of 96 10 49 32104 TipRack, sterile Standard 10 racks of 96 10 49 32124 TipBox Standard 5 boxes of 96 10 49 32204 TipBox, sterile Standard 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32224 TipStack™ Standard 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32244 TipStack™, sterile Standard 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32264 TipBox ULR 5 boxes of 96 10 49 32304 TipBox, sterile ULR 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32324 TipStack™ 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32344 ULR TipStack™, sterile ULR 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32364 Packing type Order No. 3 Pipette tips 1 – 50 µl Article Type bulk packed Standard bulk packed XXL Standard TipRack Standard TipRack, sterile Standard TipBox Standard TipBox, sterile Standard TipBox ULR TipBox, sterile ULR 2 bags of 1000 10 bags of 1000 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32006 10 49 32026 10 49 32106 10 49 32126 10 49 32206 10 49 32226 10 49 32306 10 49 32326 Order No. 4 Pipette tips 2 – 200 µl (bulk tips, yellow colored) Article Packing type Type bulk packed Standard 1 bag of 1000 10 49 32008 bulk packed XXL Standard 10 bags of 1000 10 49 32028 TipRack Standard 10 racks of 96 10 49 32108 TipRack, sterile Standard 10 racks of 96 10 49 32128 TipBox Standard 5 boxes of 96 10 49 32208 TipBox, sterile Standard 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32228 TipStack™ Standard 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32248 TipStack™, sterile Standard 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32268 TipBox ULR 5 boxes of 96 10 49 32308 TipBox, sterile 10 boxes of 96 ULR 10 49 32328 TipStack™ ULR 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32348 TipStack™, sterile ULR 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32368 PU pc/Pack 2000 10000 960 960 480 960 960 960 480 960 960 960 PU pc/Pack 2000 10000 960 960 480 960 480 960 PU pc/Pack 1000 10000 960 960 480 960 960 960 480 960 960 960 Continued on next page

368

Pipette Tips, Accessories Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Packing type Order No. 5 Pipette tips 5 – 300 µl Article Type bulk packed Standard bulk packed XXL Standard TipRack Standard TipRack, sterile Standard TipBox Standard TipBox, sterile Standard TipBox ULR TipBox, sterile ULR 1 bag of 1000 10 bags of 1000 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 6 Pipette tips 50 – 1000 µl (bulk tips, blue colored) Article Packing type Type 10 49 32010 10 49 32030 10 49 32110 10 49 32130 10 49 32210 10 49 32230 10 49 03103 10 49 32330 Order No. bulk packed Standard 2 bags of 500 10 49 32012 bulk packed XXL Standard 10 bags of 500 10 49 32032 TipRack Standard 10 racks of 96 10 49 32112 TipRack, sterile Standard 10 racks of 96 10 49 32132 TipBox Standard 5 boxes of 96 10 49 32212 TipBox, sterile Standard 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32232 TipStack™ Standard 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32252 TipStack™, sterile Standard 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32272 TipBox ULR 5 boxes of 96 10 49 32312 TipBox, sterile 10 boxes of 96 ULR 10 49 32332 TipStack™ ULR 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32352 TipStack™, sterile ULR 10 racks of 96 + 2 boxes 10 49 32372 PU pc/Pack 1000 10000 960 960 480 960 480 960 PU pc/Pack 1000 5000 960 960 480 960 960 960 480 960 960 960 7 Pipette tips 0,5 – 5 ml Article Type Packing type Order No. bulk packed Standard bulk packed XXL Standard TipBox Standard 1 bag of 200 29 49 02595 non-sterile/bulk, 5 bags of 200 29 49 02600 non-sterile/racked, 1 box of 28 29 49 02605 PU pc/Pack 200 1000 28 8 Pipette tips 1 – 10 ml Article Type Packing type Order No. bulk packed Standard bulk packed XXL Standard TipBox Standard 2 bags of 100 10 bags of 100 1 box of 18 10 49 02603 10 49 02604 10 49 02608 PU pc/Pack 200 1000 18 BRAND filter tips, Standard and Ultra Low Retention (ULR) Non-self-sealing filter tips from BRAND have a PE filter that is free from chemical addi- tives. Permeability is controlled by the combination of pore size and filter length, so that no aerosols can reach the pipette shaft. These filters function with consistent reliability. On the other hand, liquids can pass very slowly should they accidentally contact the filter. Since the filter does not swell as in the case of self-sealing filter tips, the sample can be recovered from the filter by simply actuating the pipettes blow-out function, or by centrif- ugation if necessary. This is clearly an important advantage of non-self-sealing filters, especially when working with valuable samples. As an added advantage, the absence of filter additives protects samples from contamination. 5 7 8 9 6 AT 9 Filter tips 0.1 – 1 µl Article Type bulk packed TipRack TipRack, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ULR ULR AT Filter tips 0.5 – 10 µl Article Type bulk packed TipRack TipRack, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ULR ULR co d e b e w Packing type Order No. 1 bag of 960 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32502 10 49 32602 10 49 32622 10 49 32702 10 49 32722 10 49 32802 10 49 32822 Packing type Order No. 1 bag of 960 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32504 10 49 32604 10 49 32624 10 49 32704 10 49 32724 10 49 32804 10 49 32824 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 480 960 480 960 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 480 960 480 960 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 367

369

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Pipette Tips, Accessories AK Filter tips 1 – 20 µl Article Type bulk packed TipRack TipRack, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ULR ULR AL Filter tips 2 – 20 µl Article Type bulk packed TipRack TipRack, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ULR ULR AM Filter tips 5 – 100 µl Article Type bulk packed TipRack TipRack, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ULR ULR AN Filter tips 5 – 200 µl Article Type bulk packed TipRack TipRack, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ULR ULR AO Filter tips 50 – 1000 µl Article Type bulk packed TipRack TipRack, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile TipBox TipBox, sterile Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard ULR ULR AP TipBox, with tip-tray, empty Packing type Order No. 1 bag of 960 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32506 10 49 32606 10 49 32626 10 49 32706 10 49 32726 10 49 32806 10 49 32826 Packing type Order No. 1 bag of 960 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32508 10 49 32608 10 49 32628 10 49 32708 10 49 32728 10 49 32809 10 49 32829 Packing type Order No. 1 bag of 960 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32510 10 49 32610 10 49 32630 10 49 32710 10 49 32730 10 49 32810 10 49 32830 Packing type Order No. 1 bag of 960 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32512 10 49 32612 10 49 32632 10 49 32712 10 49 32732 10 49 32812 10 49 03145 Packing type Order No. 1 bag of 960 10 racks of 96 10 racks of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 5 boxes of 96 10 boxes of 96 10 49 32514 10 49 32614 10 49 32634 10 49 32714 10 49 32734 10 49 32814 10 49 32834 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 480 960 480 960 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 480 960 480 960 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 480 960 480 960 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 480 960 480 960 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 480 960 480 960 PP. With hinged and push-on lid. Two different sizes. The Box can be stacked and repeat- edly autoclaved at 121°C (2 bar) in compliance with DIN EN 285. The Box can be refilled with the new TipRack (non-sterile) or the new TipRack S (sterile) refill units. Order No. 10 49 32990 10 49 32992 10 49 32994 10 49 32996 Article TipBox, up to 20 µl TipBox, for 200 µl TipBox, for 300 µl TipBox, for 1000 µl AK AM AL AN AO 368 AP

370

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Pipette Tips, Accessories Pipette Tips, Eppendorf Features and Benefits of the entire tip generation: • New tip design enables better access to a wider variety of tips and wells • Ergonomic: New geometry requires less force for attaching and ejecting the tips • Soft, flexible tip cone results in better pipette tip seal • Available in three purity levels (Eppendorf Quality/PCR clean/biopur) co d e b e w WWQJ3038 1 Pipette tips epT.I.P.S.® Standard Order No. Volume • Original, high-quality Eppendorf pipette tips at an attractive price • Packed in re-sealable bags • Available in all tip sizes from 10 µl to 10 ml • 200 µl, 300 µl and 1000 µl tips are color coded, yellow and blue, respectively PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 500 500 300 200 200 0.1 – 10 µl 0.1 – 20 µl 0.5 – 20 µl 2 – 200 µl (2 – 100) 20 – 300 µl 50 – 1000 µl 50 – 1250 µl 50 – 1250 µl 250 – 2500 µl 100 – 5000 µl 0.2 – 5 ml 1 – 10 ml 1 – 10 ml 14 69 00811 14 69 00838 14 69 00854 10 69 90889 10 69 30900 10 69 30927 14 69 00935 10 69 00730 14 69 00951 14 69 00978 10 69 30650 14 69 00765 14 69 00781 Length mm 34 40 46 53 55 71 76 103 115 120 175 165 243 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 Pipette tips epT.I.P.S.® Box • epTIPS Box: Working box full of tips • Guard lid on refill trays enables contamination-free transfer of trays to the working box • System optimized for use with multi-channel pipettes • Far less waste compared to disposable boxes. All components 100% recyclable (epT.I.P.S. Box) Volume µl 0.1 – 10 0.1 – 20 0.5 – 20 2 – 200 (2 – 100) 20 – 300 50 – 1000 50 – 1250 50 – 1250 500 – 2500 100 – 5000 Length mm 34 40 46 53 55 71 76 103 115 120 Order No. 10 69 73010 10 69 73037 10 69 73053 10 69 03070 10 69 73096 10 69 73118 10 69 73134 10 69 73657 10 69 73150 10 69 73177 PU pc/Box 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 48 24 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 Pipette tips epT.I.P.S.® Reloads and epT.I.P.S.® Reloads PCR clean • epTIPS Reloads: Refill trays for the working box • Guard lid on refill trays enables contamination-free transfer of trays to the working box (epT.I.P.S. Box) • Refill trays (epT.I.P.S. Reloads) can be autoclaved in advance • System optimized for use with multi-channel pipettes • The refill system, depending on tip size, is packaged either dual-sided or in stack form • Far less water compared to disposable boxes. All components 100% recyclable Volume µl Length mm PU pc/Pack Type epT.I.P.S. Reloads 1 2 3 0.1 – 10 0.1 – 20 0,5 – 20 2 – 200 20 – 300 50 – 1000 50 – 1250 50 – 1250 500 – 2500 34 40 46 53 55 71 76 103 115 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 480 Order No. 10 69 73371 10 69 73398 10 69 73410 10 69 73436 10 69 73452 10 69 73479 10 69 73495 10 69 73630 10 69 73517 epT.I.P.S. Reloads PCR clean Order No. 10 69 73754 10 69 73770 10 69 73797 10 69 73819 10 69 73835 10 69 73851 10 69 73878 10 69 73649 10 69 73894 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Pack: 10 trays of 96 tips (= 960 tips), or 10 trays of 48 tips (= 480 tips) for 500 – 2500 µl epT.I.P.S. Reloads co d e Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. b e w 369

371

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 1 Pipette Tips, Accessories Pipette tips epTIPS Set • epTIPS Set: 1 working box plus 5 refill trays • Guard lid on refill trays enable contamination-free transfer of trays to the working box (epT.I.P.S. Box) Order No. Volume µl • Refill trays (epT.I.P.S. Reloads) can be autoclaved in advance • System optimized for use with multi-channel pipettes • The refill system, depending on tip size, is packaged either dual-sided or in stack form • Far less waste compared to disposable boxes. All components 100% recyclable PU pc/Set 480 480 480 480 480 480 480 240 10 69 73215 10 69 73231 10 69 73258 10 69 73274 10 69 73290 10 69 73312 10 69 73339 10 69 73355 Length mm 34 40 46 53 55 71 76 115 0.1 – 10 0.1 – 20 0.5 – 20 2 – 200 (2 – 100) 20 – 300 50 – 1000 50 – 1250 500 – 2500 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Set: 1 box incl. 5 trays of 96 tips (= 480 tips), or incl. 5 trays of 48 tips (= 240 tips) 1 1 370 2 2 Pipette tips ep Dualfilter T.I.P.S.® Eppendorf ep Dualfilter T.I.P.S.® are the first filter tips with contamination protection by means of a two-phase-filter. The distinctive, blue-white filter layers detain 100% of all aerosols and bio-molecules. • Double protection by means of two filter layers • Double protection for pipette and specimen • Double protection from aerosols and bio-molecules • Free of PCR inhibitor additives • Sterile, Eppendorf PCR clean and pyrogen-free • IvD-conform • Charge certification Version Volume PCR PCR PCR PCR PCR PCR PCR PCR PCR PCR PCR PCR LoRentention PCR LoRentention PCR LoRentention PCR LoRentention PCR LoRentention PCR LoRentention PCR Forensic Forensic Forensic Forensic PCR PCR 0.1 – 10 µl 0.1 – 10 µl 0.5 – 20 µl 2 – 20 µl 2 – 100 µl 2 – 200 µl 20 – 300 µl 50 – 1000 µl 0.25 – 2.5 ml 50 – 1250 µl 0.1 – 5 ml 0.2 – 5 ml 0.1 – 10 µl 0.5 – 20 µl 2 – 100 µl 2 – 200 µl 20 – 300 µl 50 – 1000 µl 0.1 – 10 µl 2 – 20 µl 2 – 200 µl 50 – 1000 µl 0.1 – 20 µl 2 – 100 µl Length mm 34 40 46 53 53 55 55 76 115 103 120 175 34 46 53 55 55 76 40 53 55 76 42 53 Order No. 10 69 78500 10 69 78519 10 69 78527 10 69 78535 10 69 78543 10 69 78551 10 69 78560 10 69 78578 10 69 78586 10 69 78594 10 69 78616 10 69 78624 10 69 78632 10 69 78640 10 69 78659 10 69 78667 10 69 78675 10 69 78683 10 69 78810 10 69 78829 10 69 78837 10 69 78845 10 69 78853 10 69 78861 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 240 480 120 120 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 3840 3840 Continued on next page ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible.

372

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Pipette Tips, Accessories Pipette tips epT.I.P.S. Racks Biopur • Eppendorf Biopur pipette tips: Highest biological purity, e.g. guaranteed sterile, for 3 RNase-, DNA-, ATP- and pyrogen-free work Volume Order No. Article • Each batch continuously controlled by external laboratory • Batch-related quality certificate available over the Internet ( www.eppendorf.com) • Packed in boxes of 96, 48 or 24 tips (1 pack = 5 boxes) Length mm epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 0.1-20 µl 40 0.1 – 20 µl epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 2-200 µl 53 2 – 200 µl epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 20-300 µl 55 20 – 300 µl epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 50-1000 µl 71 50 – 1000 µl epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 50-1250 µl, 76 mm 50 – 1250 µl 76 epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 50-1250 µl, 103 mm 50 – 1250 µl 103 epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 0.25-2.5 ml 0.25 – 2.5 ml 115 epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 0.1-5 ml 120 0.1 – 5 ml epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 0.2-5 ml 175 0.2 – 5 ml epT.I.P.S.® Biopur, 0.5-10 ml 0.5 – 10 ml 165 10 69 75226 10 69 75234 10 69 75242 10 69 75250 10 69 75269 10 69 75277 10 69 75285 10 69 75293 10 69 75307 10 69 75315 PU pc/Pack 480 480 480 480 480 480 240 120 120 120 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 4 4 Pipette tips epT.I.P.S. Singles Biopur • Eppendorf Biopur pipette tips, individually sealed in blister pack • Batch number and use-by date on each blister pack • Each batch continuously controlled by external laboratory • Batch-related quality certificate available over the Internet (www.eppendorf.com) Volume µl 0.1 – 20 2 – 200 50 – 1000 Length mm 40 53 71 Order No. 14 69 10019 14 69 10035 14 69 10051 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w WWC8F385 Gilson-PIPETMAN® Tips Diamond® in TiPack®, Gilson Original Gilson Diamond® pipette tips in a conveniently filled rack. Save yourself the time-consuming and fussy filling of tips. All tips are made of sturdy polypropylene and autoclavable. Available in different volumes. The tips with volumes between 0.1 and 10 µl are also available as extra-long versions. Gilson TiPack® Rack Article Volume PU Order No. Gilson TiPack® Rack D10 Gilson TiPack® Rack DL10 Gilson TiPack® Rack D200 Gilson TiPack® Rack D300 Gilson TiPack® Rack D1000 200 – 1000 µl Gilson TiPack® Rack D1200 100 – 1200 µl Gilson TiPack® Rack D5000 1 – 5 ml Gilson TiPack® Rack D10ml 1 – 10 ml 0.1 – 10 µl 10 × 96 10 01 74315 long, 0.1 – 20 µl 10 × 96 10 01 74398 10 × 96 10 01 74316 2 – 200 µl 10 × 96 10 01 74338 20 – 300 µl 10 × 96 10 01 74317 10 × 96 10 01 74312 12 × 50 10 01 74400 8 × 30 10 01 74401 Gilson TiPack® Rack, sterile Article PU Order No. Volume µl 0.1 – 10 Gilson TiPack® Rack D10ST 10 × 96 10 01 74313 Gilson TiPack® Rack DL10ST long, 0.1 – 20 10 × 96 10 01 74314 Gilson TiPack® Rack D200ST 2 – 200 10 × 96 10 01 74343 Gilson TiPack® Rack D300ST 20 – 300 10 × 96 10 01 74344 Gilson TiPack® Rack D1000ST 100 – 1000 10 × 96 10 01 74345 Gilson TiPack® Rack D1200ST 100 – 1200 10 × 96 10 01 74346 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 960 960 960 600 240 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 960 960 960 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 371

373

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWC8F383 Pipette Tips, Accessories Gilson Diamond® Filter Tips, Sterile, in Rack, Gilson Original sterile Gilson Diamond® pipette tips with filter in a conveniently filled reload pack. Save yourself the time-consuming and fussy filling of tips. All tips are made of stur- dy polypropylene and autoclavable. Available in different volumes. The tips with volumes between 0.1 and 10 µl are also available as extra-long versions. Article PU Order No. Volume µl 0.1 – 10 Gilson Tipack Rack DF10ST 10 × 96 10 01 74335 Gilson Tipack Rack DFL10ST long, 0.1 – 10 10 × 96 10 01 74403 Gilson Tipack Rack DF30ST 10 × 96 10 01 74404 Gilson Tipack Rack DF100ST 10 – 100 10 × 96 10 01 74405 Gilson Tipack Rack DF200ST 20 – 200 10 × 96 10 01 74406 Gilson Tipack Rack DF300ST 20 – 300 10 × 96 10 01 74339 Gilson Tipack Rack DF1000ST 100 – 1000 10 × 96 10 01 74342 Gilson Tipack Rack DF1200ST 100 – 1200 10 × 96 10 01 74347 2 – 30 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 co d e b e w WWC8F381 co d e b e w WWC8F384 Gilson Diamond® Pipette Tips Reload, Gilson Original Gilson Diamond® pipette tips for all Gilson microlitre pipettes in a reload pack. The reload pack is the easiest and fasted way of filling an empty TiPack box. Environmen- tally friendly thanks to 70% less plastic packaging. The tips are made of transparent polypropylene. For better orientation, the racks are colour-coded. Rack and tips are autoclavable. Remove the reload packaging before autoclaving! Article Gilson Reload Pack DL10 Gilson Reload Pack D200 Gilson Reload Pack D1000 Volume µl 0.1 – 20 2 – 200 100 – 1000 PU Order No. 10 × 96 10 × 96 6 × 96 10 01 74407 10 01 74408 10 01 74409 PU pc/Pack 960 960 576 Gilson-PIPETMAN® Tips Diamond® in TowerPack®, Gilson For those who need more: Original Gilson Diamond® tips for all Gilson microlitre pipettes in the Tower Rack. Save yourself the time-consuming and fussy filling of tips, and ben- efit from the small footprint of the Tower-Rack to save up to 60% of bench space. All Tower Racks are autoclavable at 121°C, 0.1 Mpa, 20 minutes. Tips made of trans- parent polypropylene; each tip is marked in two places to indicate its volume. One universal box which can be used for all Tower Packs simplifies your working pro- cesses. TowerPack®, autoclavable tips Volume µl 0.1 – 10 long, 0.1 – 10 2 – 200 20 – 300 200 – 1000 PU Order No. 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 × 96 7 × 96 10 01 74351 10 01 74352 10 01 74353 10 01 74354 10 01 74355 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 960 672 PU Order No. 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 × 96 7 × 96 10 01 74348 10 01 74349 10 01 74356 10 01 74357 10 01 74358 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 960 672 Order No. 10 01 74350 Accessories Article Gilson box for TowerPack® 372 Article Gilson TowerPack® D10 Gilson TowerPack® DL10 Gilson TowerPack® D200 Gilson TowerPack® D300 Gilson TowerPack® D1000 TowerPack®, sterile tips Article Gilson TowerPack® D10ST Gilson TowerPack® DL10ST Gilson TowerPack® D200ST Gilson TowerPack® D300ST Gilson TowerPack® D1000ST 100 – 1000 Volume µl 0.1 – 10 0.1 – 20 2 – 200 20 – 300

374

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWC8F382 Pipette Tips, Accessories Gilson Diamond® Pipette Tips Blister, Gilson Blister Refill The refill variant for Gilson PIPETMAN® Tips Diamond® in the blister package. Individual- ly packaged racks with colour coding, compatible with the Gilson pipette models. For optimum hygiene and easy handling. Simply remove the top foil of the packaging and transfer the rack – ready-for-use with the tips inserted – into the respective box. Rack and tips are autoclavable. Remove the reload packaging before autoclaving! Article Gilson Blister Refill DL10 Gilson Blister Refill D200 Gilson Blister Refill D300 Gilson Blister Refill D1000 Volume µl 0.1 – 20 2 – 200 20 – 300 100 – 1000 PU Order No. 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 01 74492 10 01 74493 10 01 74494 10 01 74495 PU Set/Pack 960 960 960 960 Blister Refill sterile The refill variant for Gilson PIPETMAN® Tips Diamond®, sterile, in the blister package. Gamma-sterilised, free of traceable RNases, DNases, DNA, RNA, and ATP. Individually packaged racks with colour coding, compatible with the Gilson pipette models. For opti- mum hygiene and easy handling. Simply remove the top foil of the packaging and transfer the rack – ready-for-use with the tips inserted – into the respective box. Article Gilson Blister Refill DL10ST Gilson Blister Refill D200ST Gilson Blister Refill D300ST Gilson Blister Refill D1000ST Volume µl 0.1 – 20 2 – 200 20 – 300 100 – 1000 PU Order No. 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 × 96 10 01 74496 10 01 74497 10 01 74498 10 01 74499 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 960 Blister Refill Filter sterile The refill variant for Gilson PIPETMAN® Filtertips Diamond®, sterile, in the blister package. Filtertips can help to prevent aerosol contaminations. Gamma-sterilised, free of traceable RNases, DNases, DNA, RNA, and ATP. Individually packaged racks with colour coding, compatible with the Gilson pipette models. For optimum hygiene and easy handling. Simply remove the top foil of the packaging and transfer the rack – ready-for-use with the tips inserted – into the respective box. Blister RefillTM Sterile, colour-coded and sealed. 10 trays, individually wrapped with 96 tips each Article PU Order No. 10 × 96 10 01 74464 Gilson Blister Refill DFL10ST 10 × 96 10 01 74465 Gilson Blister Refill DF30ST 10 × 96 10 01 74466 Gilson Blister Refill DF100ST 10 × 96 10 01 74467 Gilson Blister Refill DF200ST Gilson Blister Refill DF300ST 10 × 96 10 01 74468 Gilson Blister Refill DF1000ST 100 – 1000 10 × 96 10 01 74469 Volume µl 0.1 – 20 2 – 30 10 – 100 20 – 200 20 – 300 PU pc/Pack 960 960 960 960 960 960 Gilson Diamond® Pipette Tips in Bag, Gilson Loose tips, the most economical solution: Original Gilson Diamond® pipette tips for all Gilson microlitre pipettes of different volumes. The tips are made of sturdy, transparent poylpropylene. Conveniently packaged in a re-sealable bag. Autoclavable. co d e b e w WWC8F387 EasyPack® Article Volume PU Order No. Gilson EasyPack® D10 Gilson EasyPack® DL10 Gilson EasyPack® D200 Gilson EasyPack® D300 Gilson EasyPack® D1000 200 – 1000 µl Gilson EasyPack® D1200 100 – 1200 µl Gilson EasyPack® D5000 1 – 5 ml Gilson EasyPack® D10ml 1 – 10 ml 0.1 – 10 µl 5 × 200 10 01 74308 long, 0.1 – 10 µl 5 × 200 10 01 74359 5 × 200 10 01 74309 2 – 200 µl 5 × 200 10 01 74399 20 – 300 µl 5 × 200 10 01 74310 5 × 200 10 01 74366 3 × 334 10 01 74311 4 × 50 10 01 74341 EcoPack® Article PU Gilson EcoPack® D10 Gilson EcoPack® DL10 Gilson EcoPack® D200 Gilson EcoPack® D300 Gilson EcoPack® D1000 200 – 1000 Gilson EcoPack® D1200 100 – 1200 Order No. Volume µl 0.1 – 10 10 × 1000 10 01 74334 long, 0.1 – 20 10 × 1000 10 01 74367 10 × 1000 10 01 74336 2 – 200 10 × 1000 10 01 74337 20 – 300 10 × 1000 10 01 74340 10 × 1000 10 01 74368 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1002 200 PU pc/Pack 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 373

375

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WW7R3051 Pipette Tips, Accessories MBT Pipette Tips, IDL MBT pipette tips, loose, suitable for pipettes with matching cone (see column “for man- ufacturers”). Type 1 Super Mini KSU 01 2 Universal KU 015 3 G 200 4 Universal U 300 Volume µl 0.1 – 20 0.5 – 20 2 – 200 5 – 300 5 Universal U 500 50 – 1000 Brand/Eppen- dorf/Gilson/ MBT Brand/Eppen- dorf/Gilson/ MBT/Labsys- tems MBT/Gilson, yellow Brand/Eppen- dorf/Gilson/ MBT/Labsys- tems Brand/Eppen- dorf/Gilson/ MBT/Labsys- tems MBT pipette for manufac- turers* Pieces/ bag Order No. 1000 14 78 02504 1000 14 78 02556 5 500 1000 14 78 00175 14 78 02162 500 14 78 02596 PU Bag/ Box 2 30 10 10 20 7 3 1 2 6 4 5 co d e b e w WW4ZG001 7 8 9 374 6 Macro 500 – 5000 200 14 78 15100 5000 * Brand, Eppendorf, Gilson and Labsystems are registered trade marks. Illustration of tips shows original size. Pipet Tips, ratiolab® µl 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 Length mm 147.60 147.60 147.60 147.60 147.60 147.60 ratiolab® Pipet tips Finntip For pipets Thermo Scientific Finntip® F1 and F2, Pipets Dr. Lange® Order No. Packing type Volume collapsible box 1 × 75 bag 1 × 1000 bag 1 × 3000 bag 1 × 500 rack 1 × 50 rack 1 × 50, sterilized 10 23 00620 10 23 00622 10 23 00623 10 23 00624 10 23 01620 10 23 03620 PU pc/Pack 75 1000 3000 500 50 50 8 ratiolab® Pipet tips Makro For Pipets Gilson® Pipetman®/Neo Volume µl 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 Length mm 119.70 119.70 119.70 Packing type bag 1 × 250 rack 1 × 50 rack 1 × 50, sterilized Order No. 10 23 00630 10 23 01630 10 23 03630 PU pc/Pack 250 50 50 9 Volume ratiolab® Pipet tips Makro II For Pipets Biohit® proline Length mm 126.00 126.00 126.00 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 1000 – 5000 µl Packing type bag 1 × 300 rack 1 × 50 rack 1 × 50, sterilized Order No. 10 23 00650 10 23 01650 10 23 03650 PU pc/Pack 300 50 50 Continued on next page

376

Pipette Tips, Accessories ratiolab® Pipet tips Finntip For Pipets Thermo Scientific Finntip® F1 and F2 AT Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Volume µl 2000 – 10000 2000 – 10000 2000 – 10000 Length mm 150.20 150.20 150.20 Packing type Order No. bag 1 × 100 rack 1 × 25 rack 1 × 25, sterilized 10 23 00640 10 23 01640 10 23 03640 AK ratiolab® Pipet tips For Pipets Biohit® mLINE® and Gilson® Pipetman® Volume µl 1000 – 10000 1000 – 10000 1000 – 10000 Length mm 153.60 153.60 153.60 Packing type Order No. bag 1 × 100 rack 1 × 25 rack 1 × 25, sterilized 10 23 00642 10 23 01642 10 23 03642 PU pc/Pack 100 25 25 PU pc/Pack 100 25 25 AT AK Pipette Tips, PP, non-sterile, VITLAB The tips are produced under the most modern clean-room conditions, and automatically heat-sealed in bags and packed in cartons. The catalogue number, volume range, and lot number of the tips are printed on each bag. The pipette tips have a CE mark according to IVD directive 98/79/EC, and is autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Volume µl 0.5 – 20 2 – 200 50 – 1000 500 – 5000 1000 – 10000 Colour Packing type Order No. colorless yellow blue colorless colorless 10 bags/1000 pc. 10 bags/1000 pc. 10 bags/500 pc. 1 bag/200 pc. 2 bags/100 pc. 10 85 31454 10 85 31456 10 85 31459 10 85 31462 10 85 31464 PU pc/Pack 10000 10000 5000 200 200 Tip-Box with Pipette Tips, PP, VITLAB AL Tip-Box filled with pipette tips, PP, palleted, non-sterile PP box with functionally hinged/snap-on lid. For all volumes up to 1000 µl, in the practical 8x12 size. The pipette tips have a CE mark according to IVD directive 98/79/EC. Box and tips are autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Volume µl Packing type Order No. 0.5 – 20 2 – 200 50 – 1000 5 boxes of 96 tips on a blue mounting plate 5 boxes of 96 tips on a gray mounting plate 10 85 31493 5 boxes of 96 tips on a yellow mounting plate 10 85 31494 10 85 31498 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 AM Tip-Box filled with pipette tips, PP, palleted, non-sterile PP box with fitted lid. Filled with 5 ml tips (28 pc.) or 10 ml tips (18 pc.). The pipette tips have a CE mark according to IVD directive 98/79/EC. Box and tips are autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Volume ml 0.5 – 5 1 – 10 Packing type Order No. 1 box of 28 tips on a natural-colour mounting plate 1 box of 18 tips on a natural-colour mounting plate 10 85 31502 10 85 31509 AL AM co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 375

377

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED072 Pipette Tips, Accessories Pipette Leak Testing Unit (PLT Unit), BRAND Improve process reliability with functional validation of air-displacement pipettes The most frequent cause of inaccuracy in piston-operated pipettes is leakage. This arises from damage either to the seals, pistons, or tip cones. Often not detectable by the naked eye, leaks lead to significant volume errors. The BRAND pipette leak tester (PLT unit) for air displacement pipettes finds even the smallest leaks within seconds. • Limit values for the commercially available single- and multichannel pipettes in the vol- ume range 1 µl to 10 ml are pre-programmed • Testing with and without tips • Test results in seconds • Patented While the PLT unit cannot replace regular gravimetric testing, daily pipette checks can provide a safeguard during the periods between calibrations. Even the smallest leaks are detected! Process reliability for the pipettes is thus significantly improved. Items supplied PLT unit (Pipette Leak Testing Unit) including one adapter each for testing single-chanel air-displacement pipettes with tip (mounted) and without tip, 2 plugs (for instrument vali- dation), 3 replacement PE filters for the pipette adapters, universal AC adapter, quality certificate and operating manual. 1 Article 1 Pipette leak testing unit (PLT unit) Order No. 10 49 03970 Accessories 2 3 5 7 4 6 co d e b e w 376 Article 2 Pipette adapter single-channel for testing single-channel piston-operated pipettes with tips, incl. 1 plug 3 Pipette adapter single-channel for testing single-channel piston-operated pipettes wit- hout tips, incl. 1 plug 4 Pipette adapter multi-channel for testing multi-channel piston-operated pipettes with and without tips, incl. 4 plugs 5 Universal AC adapter input: AC 100 V – 240 V, 50/60 Hz output: DC 6.5 V, 800 mA 6 Filter for pipette adapter Pack of 10 Order No. 10 49 03975 10 49 03976 10 49 03977 10 49 03979 10 49 03978 PLTconnect – software for pipette leak test The optional PLT unit software, also called PLTconnect, is a program to facilitate the doc- umentation of leak tests, which are carried out with the PLT unit from BRAND. Measured values from the test result of the PLT unit will be automatically transferred to the program. The result is displayed as a test certificate and stored in the program. Thus, the documen- tation of your test results will be significantly facilitated. Pack of 1. Article 7 PLTconnect, Software for pipette leak testing unit Order No. 10 49 73980 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

378

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Disposable Pipettes Disposable Pipettes, Pasteur Type, IDL Pasteur pipettes made of LDPE with integrated bellows. Constant drop size guaran- teed. Can be heat sealed and deep-frozen. co d e b e w WW7R3064 1 Small bulb pasteur pipette, graduated Drop size Packing type µl 40 Grad. ml 1 : 0.25 Bulb draw ml 2.2 Order No. 29 78 04212 PU pc/Pack 500 2 1-ml pasteur pipette, graduated 40 40 40 1 : 0.25 1 : 0.25 1 : 0.25 3.4 3.4 3.4 3 Medi pasteur pipette, graduated 41 2 : 0.5 1.8 4 3-ml pasteur pipette, graduated 50 50 50 3 : 0.5 3 : 0.5 3 : 0.5 3.2 3.2 3.2 29 78 04040 individually sterile 29 78 04005 à 10 pcs each, sterile 29 78 04006 500 500 500 29 78 04274 500 29 78 04111 individually sterile 29 78 04112 à 10 pcs each, sterile 29 78 04113 500 500 500 5 Fine-tip pasteur pipette 18 3.3 18 3.3 none none 29 78 04060 individually sterile 29 78 04061 500 400 6 Fine-tip maxi pasteur pipette 22 22 none none 4.8 4.8 à 20 pcs each, sterile 29 78 04234 29 78 04236 400 400 7 Extended fine-tip mini pasteur pipette 20 20 none none 1 1 29 78 04231 individually sterile 29 78 04239 8 Standard micro pasteur pipette 40 40 none none 3.3 3.3 29 78 04020 individually sterile 29 78 04021 400 400 500 500 9 Small pasteur pipette 87 mm 40 none 0.9 AT Long pasteur pipette 225 mm 40 40 none none 2.3 2.3 29 78 04273 500 29 78 04050 individually sterile 29 78 04051 400 400 AK Jumbo pasteur pipette, length 300 mm 50 50 50 none none none 7.3 7.3 7.3 29 78 04263 individually sterile 29 78 04264 à 20 pcs each, sterile 29 78 04266 AL Standard pasteur pipette 50 3.2 50 3.2 50 3.2 none none none AM Maxi pasteur pipette 50 50 none none 4.6 4.6 individually sterile à 20 pcs each, sterile 29 78 04000 29 78 04003 29 78 04002 à 20 pcs each, sterile 29 78 04204 29 78 04206 AN Extended fine-tip standard pasteur pipette 20 20 20 none none none individually sterile à 20 pcs each, sterile 3.5 3.5 3.5 29 78 04635 29 78 04636 29 78 04638 AO Large-volume micro pasteur pipette 52 29 78 04252 52 à 20 pcs each, sterile 29 78 04255 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. none none 8 8 100 100 100 500 500 500 400 400 500 400 500 250 200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AT AK AL AM AN AO co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 377

379

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED089 co d e b e w WW4ZV047 3 4 1 2 378 Disposable Pipettes Pasteur Pipettes Glass, Soda-lime Glass, BRAND Soda-lime-glass. ISO 7712. Long drawn-out capillary tip. Suction end with constriction for a cotton plug. 1.5 ml Withdraw volume: 1 mm Inner Ø tip: Outer Ø: 7 mm Length suction tube: 25 mm Tip mm 45 120 160 210 Length mm 145 225 270 310 Order No. 10 49 47715 10 49 47720 10 49 47725 10 49 47730 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 Pasteur Pipettes Soda-Lime Glass, Hirschmann Disposable pasteur pipettes Disposable pasteur pipettes, with long extended fine tip, acc. to ISO 7712, capillary I.D. of tip approx. 1.0 mm, suction tube approx. 25 mm long with constriction for swab, tube O.D. approx. 7.0 mm. Available in standard packs of 4 × 250 pieces. Order No. Overall length approx. Tip length approx. mm 40 100 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 19 77 34145 19 77 34230 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Disposable pasteur pipettes, plugged Overall length approx. Tip length approx. mm 40 100 Order No. 10 37 35150 10 37 35230 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. mm 150 230 mm 150 230 Volac Disposable Glass Pasteur Pipettes, Poulten & Graf Volac Pasteur pipettes are available in soda-lime glass, borosilicate glass and soda-lime glass with cerium with or without a cotton stopper, in two lengths, sterile or non-sterile. Careful selection of the raw materials and fully automated production ensure the uniform- ity and high product quality of the end products. • Strong wall thickness as standard • Low glass breakage • Uniform end products Volac disposable pasteur pipettes made of soda lime glass PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 250 1000 1000 250 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 Length mm 1 150 2 150 150 3 230 4 230 230 mm 150 150 230 230 mm 150 150 230 230 Length Version unplugged, non-sterile plugged, non-sterile plugged, sterile unplugged, non-sterile plugged, non-sterile plugged, sterile Order No. 10 30 10810 10 30 11810 10 30 12810 10 30 10812 10 30 11812 10 30 12812 Length Volac disposable pasteur pipettes made of borosilicate glass Order No. Version unplugged, non-sterile plugged, non-sterile unplugged, non-sterile plugged, non-sterile 10 30 13810 10 30 14810 10 30 13812 10 30 14812 Volac disposable pasteur pipettes made of soda lime glass with CERIUM Version unplugged, sterile plugged, sterile unplugged, sterile plugged, sterile Order No. 10 30 15810 10 30 16810 10 30 15812 10 30 16812 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000

380

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Disposable Pipettes Drip Pipettes, LAT Drip pipette made of glass, 8 mm diameter, incl. rubber cap. co d e b e w WWW4U042 Length mm 100 150 Order No. 14 20 00100 14 20 00150 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Serological Pipettes, Greiner Bio-One Sterile, cotton-plugged pipettes made of polystyrene Article individually packed individually packed individually packed Sterile pipettes, 1 ml, graduation 0.01 ml Sterile pipettes, 2 ml, graduation 0.01 ml Sterile pipettes, 5 ml, graduation 0.1 ml Sterile pipettes, 5 ml, graduation 0.1 ml 20 packs of 25 Sterile pipettes, 10 ml, graduation 0.1 ml Sterile pipettes, 10 ml, graduation 0.1 ml 25 packs of 25 Sterile pipettes, 25 ml, graduation 0.2 ml Sterile pipettes, 50 ml, graduation 0.5 ml individually packed individually packed individually packed ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 29 47 60418 29 47 71018 29 47 60618 29 47 60610 29 47 60718 29 47 60710 29 47 76018 10 47 68180 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 200 500 200 500 200 100 co d e b e w WWZNZ004 Serological Pipettes, Colour Coded, neoLab® The transparent Moonlab® serological pipettes are manufactured from high-quality poly- styrene in a clean-room environment. The serological pipettes are also sterilised and in- dividually packaged in easy-to-open film/paper peel bags. This prevents contamination of your samples with unwanted substances (RNases, DNases, pyrogens). Cotton buds in the tip ensure protection from unwanted contamination of the pipetting aid. • Colour coding makes it easier to identify the right pipette • Larger pipette volume thanks to the negative scale • Universal tip to ensure precise fit into the pipetting aids co d e b e w WW2NY338 Volume ml 1 2 5 Order No. 10 01 40130 10 01 40131 10 01 40132 PU pc/Pack 500 500 200 Volume ml 10 25 50 Order No. 10 01 40133 10 01 40134 10 01 40135 PU pc/Pack 200 150 100 Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 379

381

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED020 Graduated Pipettes Graduated Pipettes, Class AS, Type 3 (Zero on Top), BRAND Graduated pipettes BLAUBRAND®, class AS, type 3 DE-M marked, made from AR-Glas®. DIN EN ISO 835. Type 3 (zero on top), total delivery. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). 5 sec. waiting time. High contrasts blue enamel graduations and inscriptions, ring marks at major graduations. W= with large suction tube suitable for cotton plugs. Pipettes come with one detailed batch certificate in each original supplier package (0.5 to 10 ml: pack of 12; 20 to 50 ml: pack of 6). Also available with individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate, please inquire. Vol. ml 0.5 1 1 1 W 2 2 2 2 W 5 W 5 W 1 10 W 20 W 25 W 501) W Graduation ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.012) 0.02 0.1 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.5 Error limit ± ml 0.006 0.007 0.007 0.007 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.200 Length ± 10 mm 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 450 450 Order No. 14 49 12721 14 49 12727 14 49 12729 14 49 27327 14 49 12734 14 49 12735 14 49 12737 14 49 27335 14 49 12748 14 49 12749 14 49 12758 14 49 12763 14 49 12766 14 49 12774 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 1) in addition to ISO size 2) in addition to ISO size, not DE-M marked 1 2 Pipette box made of aluminum Pipette box made of aluminum, inner silicone coating. For storage and sterilization of pi- pettes with different length. Article Pipette box, aluminum, 150–200 mm Pipette box, aluminum, 235–305 mm Pipette box, aluminum, 315–385 mm Pipette box, aluminum, 315–485 mm Order No. 10 49 28920 10 49 28925 10 49 28930 10 49 28935 2 co d e b e w WWQED052 3 380 Graduated Pipettes, Class AS/Class B, BRAND 3 Graduated pipettes, BLAUBRAND® ETERNA, class AS, type 3 (zero on top) DE-M marked, with batch number and enclosed batch certificate. AR-Glas®. DIN EN ISO 835. Type 3 (zero on top), total delivery. Calibrated to deliver (Ex). Waiting time 5 seconds. Markings and inscriptions in ETERNA amber stain. On request, also available with indi- vidual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. Volume ml 0.5 1 1 W 2 2 W 5 W 5 W 10 W 20 W 25 W Graduation ml 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.006 0.007 0.007 0.010 0.010 0.030 0.030 0.05 0.10 0.10 Order No. 14 49 28421 14 49 28427 14 49 27427 14 49 28435 14 49 27435 14 49 28448 14 49 28449 14 49 28458 14 49 28463 14 49 28466 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. W = with large suction tube suitable for cotton plugs Continued on next page

382

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 4 Graduated Pipettes Graduated pipettes, BLAUBRAND®, Class AS, type 2 (nominal volume on top) DE-M marked, AR-Glas®. DIN EN ISO 835. Type 2 (nominal volumen on top), total delivery. Calibrated to deliver (Ex). Waiting time 5 seconds. Markings and inscriptions in high con- trast blue enamel. All BLAUBRAND® graduated pipettes are supplied with batch number and one batch identification per packing unit of the manufacturer. On request, also available with individ- ual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. Graduation ml 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.5 Error limit ± ml 0.006 0.007 0.007 0.007 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.030 0.03 0.05 0.10 0.1 0.2 Overall length mm 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 450 450 Order No. 10 49 27816 10 49 27817 10 49 27827 10 49 27818 10 49 27829 10 49 27819 10 49 27828 10 49 27820 10 49 27821 10 49 27822 10 49 27823 10 49 27824 10 49 27825 10 49 27826 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 Volume ml 0.5 1 1 W 1 22) 2 2 W 2 5 W 5 W 10 W 20 W 25 W 501) W Volume ml 5 W 25 W ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) in addition to ISO 2) in addition to ISO size, not DE-M marked W = with large suction tube suitable for cotton plugs 5 Graduated pipettes, BLAUBRAND® ETERNA, class AS, type 2 (nominal volume on top) DE-M marked, AR-Glas®. DIN EN ISO 835. Type 2 (Nominal volume at the top), total de- livery. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Waiting time 5 seconds. Ring mark and inscription in ETERNA amber stain. All BLAUBRAND® graduated pipettes are supplied with a batch number and an accom- panying batch certificate in the original packaging. On request, they are also available with an individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. PU pc/Pack 12 6 Error limit ± ml 0.03 0.1 Graduation ml 0.1 0.1 10 49 27822 10 49 27825 Order No. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. W = with large suction tube suitable for cotton plugs Sale while stocks last. 4 5 6 Graduated pipettes, BLAUBRAND®, USP, class AS, type 2 (nominal volume on top) DE-M marked, AR-Glas®. DIN EN ISO 835. Type 2 (nominal volumen on top), total delivery. Calibrated to deliver (Ex). Waiting time 5 seconds. Markings and inscriptions in high con- trast blue enamel. Incl. USP batch certificate. On request, also available with USP individ- ual certificate. Suitable for cotton plugs. Volume ml 11) 2 5 10 Graduation ml 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.007 0.01 0.02 0.03 1) Error limit USP ± 0.01 ml Overall length mm 360 360 360 360 Order No. 10 49 27506 10 49 27509 10 49 27511 10 49 27513 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 7 Graduated pipettes, SILBERBRAND ETERNA, class B, type 2 (nominal volume on top) AR-Glas®. DIN EN ISO 835. Type 2 (nominal volumen on top), total delivery. Calibrated to deliver (Ex). Markings and inscriptions in ETERNA amber stain. Volume ml 0.5 1 1 21) 2 2 5 W 5 W 10 W 25 W Graduation ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.02 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.006 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.010 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.15 Order No. 10 49 27816 10 49 27002 10 49 27004 10 49 27005 10 49 27006 10 49 27820 10 49 27009 10 49 27010 10 49 27011 10 49 27013 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 1) in addition to ISO size, not DE-M marked W = suitable for cotton plugs 6 7 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 381

383

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED061 1 co d e b e w WW4ZV062 ml 1 1 21) 2 5 W 5 W 1 10 W 20 W 25 W Graduation ml 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.05 0.05 0.08 0.15 0.15 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 10 49 27070 10 49 27071 10 49 27072 10 49 27073 10 49 27075 10 49 27076 10 49 27077 10 49 27078 10 49 27079 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) in addition to ISO size W = with large suction tube suitable for cotton plugs Graduated Pipettes Graduated Pipettes, Class B, Type 3 (Zero On Top), BRAND Graduated pipettes, SILBERBRAND ETERNA, class B, type 3, zero point at the top AR-Glas®. DIN EN ISO 835. Type 3 (Zero point at the top), total delivery. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Ring mark and inscription in ETERNA amber stain. Order No. Volume Quality assurance - assured quality, Hirschmann Volumetric measuring devices by Hirschmann Laborgeräte Today, quality assurance is more than just a motto. Quality is the top priority, all the more so in international competition. Products and services are interchangeable, but quality is a sine qua non. As an indispensable precondition for high-quality work, the bought-in pre-products and the production facilities must be of premium quality and the logistics must be based on long years of experience. Hirschmann Laborgeräte assures quality on several level at once • The company as a whole and in particular the production are DIN EN ISO 9001:2008 certified • As a standard, all glass volumetric measuring devices of class A/AS according to DIN undergo process checks and final inspections. As visible evidence of the inspection process, they have the KB sign which signifies that they successfully passed the com- pliance test pursuant to the German calibration regulations. • As a standard and free of surcharge, all KB products are equipped with a “Dated batch identification” which unambiguously indicates the production batch and year. Hirschmann Laborgeräte offer the following benefits: • Absolutely reliable measuring instruments • Quality symbol visible directly on every device • Suitable for use as test instrument for quality assurance purposes pursuant to DIN EN ISO 9000 ff and GLP • Can be organized in the ‚Test equipment‘ monitoring list • Can be monitored in terms of test intervals or maximum permissible useful life • Traceable also after many years • Documentation-proof For Hirschmann glass volumetric measuring devices of class A/AS, the following addition- al certificates are available beyond the standard scope of the series: Batch quality certicate The certificate indicates the actual mean value of the tested production batch, the stand- ard deviation, and the legally allowed tolerance. Batch quality certificates are available 24/7 directly at www.hirschmannlab.de and can also be procured retrospectively for ex- isting products of under 5 years of age.This time-proven service provides for added se- curity and also protects the environment as you can print easily and free of charge at your own printer only those certificates that you really need; this helps to avoid waste of paper. Quality certificates for an individual device This certificate shows the actual measured value and the measuring inaccuracy of the device as well as the legally allowed tolerance. Measuring instrument and certificate are marked with the identical individual device number. To order a volumetric measuring de- vice of class A/AS with individual certificate, mention the order number XX XX XXXXX of the desired product and additionally the order number for an “Individual quality certificate” USP individual certificate The USP versions of the EM Techcolor volumetric measuring devices are equipped with all the great features of an EM Techcolor instrument, and they offer some additional ben- efits: Each device is tested individually and identified with a serial number to meet the high requirements of the USP standard. As a rule, an individual certificate is comprised free of surcharge in the standard delivery of all Hirschmann Liquid Handling laboratory devices for pipetting, titration, and dosing. 382 Continued on next page

384

Graduated Pipettes DAkkS - recognized all over the world For us, quality consciousness is a fundamental component of our daily work. Not least for this fact, Hirschmann Laborgeräte has been certified by the Deutsche Akkreditierungss- telle (DAkkS) as an accredited calibration laboratory. As such, we have the right to issue internationally recognized DAkkS calibration certificates for volumetric measuring devic- es. This not only documents the tested quality of the products but also is an external sign for the inspection and certified excellence of the quality management system. The DAkkS calibration certificate comprises the measured values and measuring inaccuracy of the tested device in compliance with international standards. For the employees of Hirschmann Laborgeräte, the quality assurance measures in the ongoing production process as well as for the final products are not considered just some red tape but the practical manifestation of our philosophy. For us, quality is top priority. The premium quality of Hirschmann Laborgeräte is a fact you can rely on. This is what we are offering our customers, without any restrictions, with absolute consistency. And we carry out our quality assurance measures to ensure top quality of your own work. Article Individual quality certificate Order No. 14 71 99801 Graduated Pipettes, Hirschmann Pipettes graduated to the tip, tolerances better than Class B, short line graduation, AR- GLAS®, clear glass, acc. to DIN EN ISO 835, type 3, graduation and markings in durable amber stain. EX calibrated. For 5 ml and up, equipped with cotton wool stopper as a standard. Vol. ml 0.5 1 1 21) 2 2 5 5 10 20 25 Gradu- ation ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.02 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Flow time s 2 – 11 2 – 11 2 – 11 2 – 11 2 – 11 2 – 11 5 – 14 5 – 14 5 – 17 9 – 21 9 – 21 Tol. ± ml 0.0075 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.045 0.045 0.075 0.150 0.150 Order No. PU pc/Pack 14 71 11121 14 71 11127 14 71 11129 14 71 11134 14 71 11135 14 71 11137 14 71 11148 14 71 11149 14 71 11158 14 71 11163 14 71 11166 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 1) In addition to DIN size Graduated Pipettes, Hirschmann Graduated pipettes with dated batch identification, zero point at the top, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, graduated to tip, main point ring graduation, AR-GLAS®, clear glass, acc. to DIN EN ISO 835, type 3, graduation and markings in durable amber stain. EX calibrated. Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WW4ZV003 co d e b e w WW4ZV004 Vol. ml 0.5 1 1 21) 2 2 5 5 10 20 25 501) Gradu- ation ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.02 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 Flow time s 4 – 10 4 – 10 4 – 10 4 – 10 4 – 10 4 – 10 7 – 13 7 – 13 7 – 13 11 – 17 11 – 17 11 – 22 Tol. ± Order No. ml 0.006 0.007 0.007 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.2 14 71 11321 14 71 11327 14 71 11329 14 71 11334 14 71 11335 14 71 11337 14 71 11348 14 71 11349 14 71 11358 14 71 11363 14 71 11366 14 71 11373 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 1) In addition to DIN size Flow time: waiting time 5 s. Also available with blue graduation! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 383

385

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WW4ZV005 Graduated Pipettes Graduated Pipettes, Hirschmann Graduated pipettes, not graduated to tip, zero point at the top, with dated batch identification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, AR-GLAS®, clear glass, acc. to DIN EN ISO 835, type 1, graduation and markings in durable amber stain. EX calibrated. For 5 ml and up, equipped with cotton wool stopper as a standard. Gradu- ation ml 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.1 Flow time s 4 – 10 4 – 10 4 – 10 7 – 13 7 – 13 11 – 17 Tol. ± Order No. ml 0.006 0.007 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1 14 71 11721 14 71 11727 14 71 11735 14 71 11748 14 71 11758 14 71 11766 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 Flow time: waiting time 5 s. Vol. ml 0.5 1 2 5 10 25 Vol. ml 0.5 1 2 5 10 25 co d e b e w WW4ZV006 Graduated Pipettes, Hirschmann Graduated pipettes, graduated to tip, Schellbach line, with dated batch identifica- tion, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, class AS, main point ring graduation, AR-GLAS®, clear glass, acc. to DIN EN ISO 835, type 3, graduation and markings in durable blue ceramic stain. EX calibrated. For 5 ml and up, equipped with cotton wool stopper as a standard. Gradu- ation ml 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.1 Flow time s 4 – 10 4 – 10 4 – 10 7 – 13 7 – 13 11 – 17 Tol. ± Order No. ml 0.006 0.007 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1 14 71 12221 14 71 12227 14 71 12235 14 71 12248 14 71 12258 14 71 12266 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 6 Flow time: waiting time 5 s. Graduated Pipettes, Blow-out, Hirschmann Graduated pipettes calibrated to blow-out, graduated to tip, type 4, short line gradu- ation, AR-GLAS®, clear glass, graduation and markings in durable amber stain. EX cali- brated, acc. to DIN EN ISO 835. For 5 ml and up, equipped with cotton wool stopper as a standard. Available while stock lasts. Volume ml 0,51) 2 5 1) In addition to DIN size Graduation ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 Tol. ± ml 0.005 0,01 0,03 Order No. 14 71 13321 14 71 13334 14 71 13349 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 co d e b e w WW4ZV007 384

386

Graduated Pipettes Graduated Pipettes, Hirschmann Graduated pipettes, amber graduated Graduated pipettes, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, with dated batch identification, soda-lime glass (AR), with durable amber or blue stain gradu- ation, type 2, main point ring graduation, zero in tip, graduated to the tip, EX (TD) calibrat- ed, acc. to DIN EN ISO 835, from 5 ml on with a cotton plug end as standard. For these products, a batch certificate is available under www.hirschmannlab.de. As an extra, we are offering the Hirschmann calibration service. Contents ml 1 0.5 1 1 2 2 5 5 10 20 25 Graduation ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.02 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Tolerance ± ml 0.006 0.007 0.007 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.1 Length ± 5 mm 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 450 Order No. 10 37 00329 10 37 00333 10 37 00335 10 37 00341 10 37 00342 10 37 00353 10 37 00354 10 37 00360 10 37 00365 10 37 00370 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 Graduated pipettes, blue graduated Graduated pipettes, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, with dated batch identification, soda-lime glass (AR), durable blue graduation with ceramic colour, type 2, main point ring graduation, zero in tip, graduated to the tip, EX (TD) cali- brated, acc. to DIN EN ISO 835 from 5 ml on with a cotton plug end as standard. Contents ml 2 0.5 1 1 2 2 5 5 10 20 25 Graduation ml 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.02 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Tolerance ± ml 0.006 0.007 0.007 0.01 0.01 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.1 Length ± 5 mm 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 360 450 Order No. 10 37 01329 10 37 01333 10 37 01335 10 37 01341 10 37 01342 10 37 01353 10 37 01354 10 37 01360 10 37 01365 10 37 01370 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 6 Graduated Pipettes with Piston, Hirschmann Graduated pipettes with piston, short line graduation, AR-GLAS®, clear glass, gradua- tion and markings in durable amber stain. EX calibrated. Volume ml 1 2 5 10 20 25 50 Outer Ø mm 0.6 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.3 1.3 1.8 Graduation ml 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 Length mm 335 345 360 385 430 475 530 Order No. 14 71 14127 14 71 14135 14 71 14148 14 71 14158 14 71 14163 14 71 14166 14 71 14173 Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WW4ZV075 1 2 co d e b e w WW4ZV008 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 385

387

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Bulb Pipettes Bulb Pipettes, Class AS, BRAND Bulb pipettes, BLAUBRAND®, class AS, 1 mark DE-M marked, with batch number and batch certificate. Made from AR-Glas®. To DIN EN ISO 648, calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex), total delivery (5 sec. waiting time). Marks and inscriptions in high contrasts blue enamel. Pipettes come with one detailed batch certificate in each original supplier package (0.5 to 2 ml: pack of 12; 2.5 to 100 ml: pack of 6) Also available with individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate, please inquire. Volume ml 0.5 1 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 1 25 30 40 50 100 Error limit ± ml 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.050 0.050 0.080 Length ± 10 mm 300 300 330 330 330 400 400 400 400 440 440 440 510 510 520 520 540 540 585 (±15 mm) Order No. 14 49 12625 14 49 12630 14 49 12638 14 49 12640 14 49 12643 14 49 12644 14 49 12650 14 49 12652 14 49 12653 14 49 12654 14 49 12655 14 49 12660 14 49 12662 14 49 12664 14 49 12669 14 49 12670 14 49 12671 14 49 12676 14 49 12680 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Bulb pipettes, BLAUBRAND®, USP, class AS, 1 mark DE-M marked, made from AR-Glas®, DIN EN ISO 648. Calibrated to deliver (Ex). Marks and inscriptions in high contrasts blue enamel. Incl. detailed USP batch certificate. For USP individual certificate, please inquire. Supplier package (0.5 to 2 ml: pack of 12; 3 to 100 ml: pack of 6) Vol. ml 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 2 25 30 40 50 100 Color code 2 × black blue orange black 2 × red white 2 × orange 2 × green blue black red green yellow blue black white red yellow Error limit ± ml 0.005 0.006 0.006 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.08 Length ± 10 mm 300 300 330 330 400 400 400 400 440 440 440 510 510 520 520 540 540 585 (± 15 mm) Order No. 10 49 30601 10 49 30602 10 49 30603 10 49 30605 10 49 30606 10 49 30607 10 49 30608 10 49 30609 10 49 30610 10 49 30611 10 49 30612 10 49 30613 10 49 30614 10 49 30615 10 49 30616 10 49 30617 10 49 30618 10 49 30619 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1 co d e b e w WWQED021 2 386

388

Bulb Pipettes Bulb Pipettes, Class AS, BRAND Bulb pipettes, BLAUBRAND® ETERNA, class AS, 1 mark DE-M marked, AR-Glas®, DIN EN ISO 648, calibrated to deliver (Ex), waiting time 5 sec- onds, ring marks and inscriptions in ETERNA amber stain (particularly resistant, e.g. for aggressive cleaning methods). Original packs of 6 (up to 2 ml: packs of 12), including batch certificate. On request, also available with individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. Volume ml 1 2 5 10 20 1 25 50 Error limit ± ml 0.008 0.010 0.015 0.020 0.030 0.030 0.05 Length ± 10 mm 300 330 400 440 510 520 540 Order No. 14 49 30530 14 49 30538 14 49 30550 14 49 30560 14 49 30564 14 49 30569 14 49 30576 PU pc/Pack 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 Bulb pipettes, class AS, blue graduation, two marks BLAUBRAND®, AR-GLAS®. DIN EN ISO 648, DE-M marked. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Marks and inscriptions in high contrast blue enamel. All BLAUBRAND® graduated pipettes are supplied with a batch number and an accom- panying batch certificate in the original packaging. On request, they are also available with an individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. Pack of 12 (2.5 to 100 ml: pack of 6). 1 Volume ml 0.5 1 2 3 5 10 15 20 2 25 50 Color code schwarz blau orange schwarz weiß rot grün gelb blau rot Error limit ± ml 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.05 Length ± 10 mm 300 300 330 330 400 440 510 510 520 540 Order No. 10 49 29721 10 49 29722 10 49 29723 10 49 29725 10 49 29727 10 49 29732 10 49 29733 10 49 29734 10 49 29735 10 49 29738 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED053 2 Volumetric Pipettes, Hirschmann Volumetric pipettes, with one ring mark, tolerances better than class B (no waiting time) AR-GLAS®, clear glass, acc. to DIN EN ISO 648, ring mark and printing in durable amber stain. EX calibrated. co d e b e w WW4ZV013 Vol. Tol. ± ml 0.5 1 2 31) 5 10 151) 20 25 50 100 ml 0.008 0.012 0.015 0.015 0.023 0.030 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.075 0.12 1) In addition to DIN size Flow time s 4 – 20 5 – 20 5 – 25 7 – 11 7 – 25 8 – 12 9 – 13 9 – 13 10 – 15 13 – 18 25 – 30 Total L ± 5 Order No. mm 300 325 350 350 410 450 520 520 530 550 600 14 71 21225 14 71 21230 14 71 21238 14 71 21243 14 71 21250 14 71 21260 14 71 21262 14 71 21264 14 71 21269 14 71 21276 14 71 21280 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 387

389

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WW4ZV014 Bulb Pipettes Volumetric Pipettes, Hirschmann Volumetric pipettes, with one ring mark, with dated batch identification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, AR-GLAS®, clear glass, acc. to DIN EN ISO 648, ring mark and printing in durable amber stain. EX calibrated. Waiting time 5 s. Total L ± 5 Order No. Vol. Tol. ± ml 0.5 1 2 2.51) 31) 41) 5 61) 71) 81) 91) 10 151) 20 25 301) 401) 50 100 ml 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.08 Flow time s 6 – 10 7 – 11 7 – 11 7 – 11 7 – 11 9 – 13 9 – 13 9 – 13 9 – 13 11 – 15 11 – 15 11 – 15 12 – 16 12 – 16 15 – 20 15 – 20 20 – 25 20 – 25 20 – 30 mm 300 325 350 350 350 410 410 410 410 450 450 450 520 520 530 530 550 550 600 PU pc/Pack 14 71 21425 14 71 21430 14 71 21438 14 71 21439 14 71 21443 14 71 21444 14 71 21450 14 71 21456 14 71 21457 14 71 21458 14 71 21459 14 71 21460 14 71 21462 14 71 21464 14 71 21469 14 71 21470 14 71 21472 14 71 21476 14 71 21480 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1) In addition to DIN size Also available with blue graduation! co d e b e w WW4ZV016 Volumetric Pipettes, Hirschmann Volumetric pipettes, with volume between 2 ring marks, with dated batch identifica- tion, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, AR-GLAS®, clear glass, acc. to DIN EN ISO 648, ring mark and printing in durable amber stain. EX calibrated. Vol. Tol. ± ml 0.5 1 2 31) 5 10 151) 20 25 50 100 ml 0.005 0.008 0.010 0.010 0.015 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.05 0.08 Flow time s 4 – 82) 5 – 92) 5 – 92) 7 – 112) 7 – 112) 8 – 122) 9 – 132) 9 – 132) 10 – 152) 13 – 182) 25 – 302) Total L ± 5 Order No. mm 300 325 350 350 410 450 520 520 530 550 600 14 71 22025 14 71 22030 14 71 22038 14 71 22043 14 71 22050 14 71 22060 14 71 22062 14 71 22064 14 71 22069 14 71 22076 14 71 22080 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) In addition to DIN size 2) Waiting time 5 s. co d e b e w WW4ZV017 388 Volumetric Pipettes with Piston, Hirschmann Volumetric pipettes with piston, with one ring mark, AR-GLAS®, clear glass, ring mark and printing in durable amber stain. EX calibrated. Volume ml 1 2 5 10 15 20 25 50 Tolerance ± ml 0.008 0.01 0.015 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 Order No. 14 71 24130 14 71 24138 14 71 24150 14 71 24160 14 71 24162 14 71 24164 14 71 24169 14 71 24176

390

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids Bulb Pipettes Dipping Pipettes, neoLab® Dipping pipettes for taking samples in defined volumes from large containers. The pi- pettes are held by their stems and immersed vertically into the medium until the hollow element is full. The sample is removed by tilting. co d e b e w WW2NY015 Volume ml 5 10 1 20 25 50 Order No. 14 01 25700 14 01 25701 14 01 25702 14 01 25703 14 01 25704 Dispensers, Neubert-Glas Automatic tipping mechanism without storage bottle Pipette only, adjusted for EX (TD), with acid and alkali proof marking, NS29/32. Volume NS Order No. Volume ml 1 2 4 5 10 15 Other sizes and joints are available on request. 14 11 50501 14 11 50502 14 11 50504 14 11 50505 14 11 50510 14 11 50515 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 ml 20 25 30 40 50 100 Storage bottle, alone Volume ml 250 500 NS Order No. 29/32 29/32 10 11 50250 10 11 50500 Volume ml 1000 NS Order No. 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 14 11 50520 14 11 50525 14 11 50530 14 11 50540 14 11 50560 14 11 50590 NS Order No. 29/32 14 11 50600 Pipette Racks Pipette Stand, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® Rack for pipettes with two rotatable perforated plates and collection tray. The holders are suitable for up to 40 pipettes of different sizes, for all measuring and full pipettes with max. 80 mm diameter. A collection tray protects the pipette tip and receives any dripping liquid. The pipette stand is suitable for drying and storing of pipettes or also thermometers, test tubes and similar devices on a small footprint. The extra-stable foot ensures that the rack cannot tilt. The innovative magnet construction makes clamping screws redundant and provides for flexible adjustment of the height of the reception plates in a simple one-hand- ed process. With the respective accessories, the laboratory rack can be flexibly adjusted to accom- modate other equipment, for example Imhoff sedimentation funnels or other funnels and hoppers. • PP, steel chromium-plated • Height adjustable to max. 450 mm • 40 slots up to Ø 18 mm Article Pipette stand Version for 40 pipettes Order No. 10 04 56390 Pipette Racks, IDL Pipette rack made of PP. Rotating model, with reinforced base and an additional rotating support level for protecting the pipette tips. With 94 holes in various diameters for grad- uated and volumetric pipettes of all sizes. The racks are not assembled when supplied (assembly is easy). Height mm 470 Ø mm 230 Order No. 25 00 50760 1 co d e b e w WWR4Q067 co d e b e w WW7R3224 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 389

391

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 1 2 co d e b e w WW7R3016 co d e b e w WW7R3017 co d e b e w WW2NY325 390 Pipetting Aids Rubber Bulbs for Small Pipettes, Deutsch & Neumann Pipette suckers made of natural rubber (red) or silicone (transparent). Colour Transparent/white Red Red Red Grade VMQ NR/SBR NR/SBR NR/SBR Volume ml 2 2 5 10 Order No. 27 34 06003 27 34 06004 10 34 10005 10 34 10010 PU pc/Pack 100 100 5 3 Pipette Fillers, IDL PIPO pipette fillers, red, resistant to aging, high resistance to chemicals. Article 1 Standard model For pipettes of up to 100 ml capacity, filling quantity per operation 50 ml. 2 Universal model For non-standardized pipettes up to 100 ml capactiy, filling quantity per operation 50 ml. Order No. 27 00 04701 27 00 04702 Pipette Fillers, IDL A safety pipette filler without bonded joints. Very easy to handle: • Evacuation by automatic valve. • Emptying and filling by pressing on the working point. • Effective cleaning of the inside by removing the automatic valve. Article Pipetting ball FLIP Order No. 27 00 04703 Safety Pipette Filler Howorka Ball®, neoLab® Ultrasafe laboratory aid for universal use. Specially designed opening for immediate sealing effect on all standard tube diameters. No unnecessary valves, awkward air pads or rigid joins. • Aspiration and blowing-out of pipettes, capillary tubes • Pipetting and filtering of organic solvents and viscous substances Easy to clean, autoclavable. Recommended by industry association as a “safe protective device”. Article Howorka-Ball® Howorka-Ball® Volume ml 20 50 Order No. 27 01 31100 27 01 31101 Pipettors Pi-Pump, Glasfirn Pi-Pump pipetter made of acid-proof plastic, well suited for all pipettes. By simply turning the well-placed handwheel with the thumb, a piston is moved inside the device which extracts or discharges liquid in the attached pipette as required. This allows for simple, safe pipetting “by hand”. Accurate dosing from one scale line to the next is guaranteed. Sizes 2, 10 and 25 are equipped with an additional valve which meets the applicable German Federal Weights and Measures regulations for free flowing liquid drainage from discharge pipettes. Size 0 2 10 25 Colour yellow blue green red for pipettes up to ml 0.2 2 10 25 Order No. 27 07 10002 27 07 10020 27 07 10100 27 07 10250

392

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED009 co d e b e w WWQED008 1 2 co d e b e w WW4ZV065 Pipetting Aids micro Pipette Controller, BRAND Micro pipette controller Pipette controller for pipetting with ring-mark disposable micropipettes and other small-volume pipettes up to 1 ml, e.g. blood diluting and blood sugar pipettes with aspi- ration end-Ø max. 5 mm. Autoclavable (121°C). Integrated ejection device for ejecting disposable micropipettes up to 50 µl without touching them. Article micro pipette controller Accessories Article Spare aspiration systems, pack of 3 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 27 49 25800 Order No. 27 49 25805 macro Pipette Controllers, BRAND 1 Macro pipette controllers One single macro pipette controller covers the entire range of bulb and graduated pipettes from 0.1 to 200 ml. The conical silicone adapter offers a secure fit for the different diam- eters. The unique valve system allows for easy compression of the newly designed bellows. The spring loaded lever enables an even more sensitive filling and delivery of liquids. The meniscus is easily adjustable. The unit is fully autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. A hydrophobic membrane filter protects the system from liquid penetration. Scope of delivery: each pipette controller is supplied with a 3 µm spare membrane filter Order No. 27 49 26152 27 49 26154 Order No. 27 49 26100 27 49 26151 Colour Gray Green Colour Blue Magenta 2 Accessories Article Order No. Spare membrane filter 3 µm (PP, PTFE), 1 piece, non-sterile 27 49 26052 Spare membrane filter 3 µm (PP, PTFE), 10 pieces, non-sterile 27 49 26056 Silicone adapter, length 44 mm 27 49 26146 Adapter support (PP), gray, length 49 mm 10 49 26220 Suction bellow (silicone) with screw ring (PP) 10 49 26225 Valve system (PP, PTFE, silicone) 27 49 26128 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Pipettors, Manual, Hirschmann pipetus® junior Manual pipetting takes a new dimension, marked by simplicity, safety, precision and cost effectiveness. For all common pipettes ranging from 0.5 ml to 25 ml (or 0.1 to 200 ml). Compared with other manual pipette controllers, the pipetus junior offers defined aspira- tion of the pipetting medium. Pressing the PUMP button completely extracts approx. 2 ml. By pressing the OUT button, the pipette runs out gravimetrically, whereby the intensity of pressure applied to the button determines the discharge speed. Blow-out pipettes are completely emptied by pressing the BlowOut-button. The built-in hydrophobic PTFE membrane filter offers protection against accidental overfilling. Scope of delivery: pipetus® junior, complete including pipette holder with safety vale and 2 sterile round filters Article pipetus® junior Spare parts for pipetus® junior Article Pipette holder complete for pipetus® junior Pipette holder case Round filter- set (5 pieces) Round filter- set (50 pieces) Round filter- set (100 pieces) Silicone adapter Spacer Wall holder (incl. dowels and screws) Table stand Order No. 27 37 02000 Order No. 27 37 02300 27 37 03701 27 37 03704 10 37 03705 10 37 03706 27 37 03201 27 37 02037 27 37 05600 10 37 05700 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 391

393

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids co d e b e w WWQED010 392 Pipetting Aids Micro Pipetting Aid, Hecht-ASSISTENT Micro-pipetting aid (Mikro-Pipex) For pipetting liquids by using disposable micropipettes with a ring mark as well as other pipettes up to approx. 1 ml. Cone Ø max. 5 mm, autoclavable at +121°C. Contaminated disposable micropipettes up to 50 µl can be dropped without touching by means of the integrated releasing device. The pipetting aid may not be used for capillaries calibrated to contain end to end! Article Micro-Pipex 40558001 Order No. 19 18 17559 Pipette Controller VITLAB maneus®, VITLAB The VITLAB maneus®pipette controller enables both left- and right-handers to operate all normal bulb and graduated pipettes from 0,1 to 200 ml easily and fatigue-free. Its safe and easy handling allows even inexperienced users to adjust the meniscus precisely. With the new design, unscrewing the adapter enables easy and fast replacement of the hydrophobic membrane filter, which protects the instrument against fluid penetration. The valve system is optimised so that liquids can be drawn up simply, without exerting pressure. The highly sensitive filling and discharge of liquids are controlled gently by the pipetting knob. Thus, the suction element provides rapid filling of the pipette (capacity: 50 ml in less than 10 seconds). The discharge bellows are used for the emptying (blow-out) of the pipette. The specially moulded intake cone ensures secure seating for all normal bulb and graduated pipettes (0.1 to 200 ml). The VITLAB maneus® is simple to dismantle, easy to clean, and completely autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. With replacement 3 µm membrane filter and instruction manual. Article Pipette controller VITLAB maneus® Order No. 10 85 30500 Pipette Controllers accu-jet® pro, BRAND All with one hand: Select the delivery mode (gravity delivery/blow-out) and adjust the pi- petting speed using the sensitive pipetting buttons - a great benefit when using small-vol- ume pipettes. Ergonomic handgrip, weight only 190 g, perfectly balanced design - for fatigue-free pipetting even in prolonged operations. the accu-jet®pro is supplied with two battery compartment covers. The second cover enables you to place the instrument inverted on the bench, to avoid contamination of the pipette adapter. • Ergonomic design • Infinitely variable control of the maximum pipetting speed • Rugged, powerful pump for fast filling (50 ml in 10 seconds) • A flashing recharching indicator LED alerts you that the battery is running low. You can work for another two hours before its empty • 8 hours continuous pipetting with a 10 ml pipette without recharging • Corrosion protection through active pressure compensation • A hydrophobic membrane filter and a built-in check valve protect against liquid pene- trating inside • Two modes: gravity delivery or motor-powered blow-out • For glass and plastic pipettes from 0.1 – 200 ml accu-jet® pro pipette controllers Complete with wall support, 2 spare membrane filters (0.2 µl), sterile, nickel-metal hydride battery pack, 2 battery compartment covers, operating manual, AC adapter (100-240 V; 50-60 Hz) Type accu-jet® pro, dark blue 1 accu-jet® pro, magenta accu-jet® pro, green accu-jet® pro, royal blue With charger for Europe (Continent) Order No. 27 49 26300 27 49 26301 27 49 26302 27 49 26303 With charger for UK/Ireland Order No. 27 49 26310 27 49 26311 27 49 26312 27 49 26313 Continued on next page

394

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 1 2 co d e b e w WWQJ3034 co d e b e w WW4ZV057 3 Pipetting Aids Accessories/spare parts Article Order No. Silicone adapter with non-return valve 27 49 26508 Wall holder 27 49 26540 AC adapter, type Europe 27 49 26550 Spare membrane filter, 0.2 µm (red color code), 1 piece, sterile 27 49 26530 Spare membrane filter, 0.2 µm (red color code), 10 pieces, non-sterile 27 49 26535 Spare membrane filter 3 µm (PP, PTFE), 1 piece, non-sterile 27 49 26052 Spare membrane filter 3 µm (PP, PTFE), 10 pieces, non-sterile 27 49 26056 NiMH battery pack 10 49 26630 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Further charger models available on request. Variable Pipettes, Eppendorf Experience a new dimension of electronic pipetting with the new Easypet® 3 pipette controller. The latest technological developments give you complete speed control with the utmost precision. • Intuitive and convenient speed adjustment with just the tips of your fingers • Lightweight, well-balanced and ergonomic design that allows for fatigue-free pipetting • Improved operating time and optical feedback of remaining battery life Eppendorf Easypet® 3 Article 2 Pipette controller Easypet®3 incl. charging set, wall-mounting unit and 2 membrane filters (non-sterile) Order No. 10 69 44300 Accessories Article Membrane filter 0.45 µm, sterile, 5 pcs. Membrane filter 0.2 µm, sterile, 5 pcs. Lithum polymer rechargeable battery, for Easypet® 3 Order No. 14 69 44219 10 69 44306 10 69 65009 Pipettors pipetus®, Hirschmann pipetus®sets new standards in the field of battery operated pipette fillers. It works safe- ly, fast and independently of a power supply, with no cables to get in the way, and is light in weight in spite of all the complex technology involved. For all conventional pipettes from 0.1 up to 200 ml.With optimized ergonomics down to the last detail it is the No. 1 for fa- tigue-free serial pipette filling. Unique is the intelligent charging technology which grants permanent readiness for use and the color display which shows at a glance the chosen setting and the capacity of the batteries. Outstanding features • Ergonomic and light-weight • Unique T.D./blowout switch for absolutely correct volume pipetting with “To Deliver” pipettes as well as with blowout pipettes • Speed switch for preselection between 5 pipetting speeds for maximum or low power and for either fast or more sensitive work (drop-by-drop) • State-of-the-art charging technology with inductive charging in a practical stand (sup- • Permanent battering monitoring by microcontroller, without memory effect • Color display for showing the battery capacity, the preselected speed and the selected • Sufficient working capacity: Depending on use, up to 50 hours of permanent power plied as standard) suction and delivery mode without recharging • Finest meniscus adjustment thanks to superior valve technology • Safety valve to prevent the pipettes overflowing and cause liquid to penetrate the unit • Ergonomic shape for fatigue-free work • Scope of delivery: pipetus® complete with socket charger and inductive charging sta- tion, colour display with indication of battery capacity, with 2 additional sterile round filters, 1 spare pipette holder with safety valve, wall bracket. Pipetting could not be easier, safer, or more convenient. pipetus® Article 3 pipetus® Plug EU, US, UK Order No. 27 37 07200 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 393

395

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids 2 WW4ZV066 1 3 co d e b e w 4 5 6 co d e b e w 394 WW2NY360 Pipetting Aids Spare parts for pipetus® Article Pipette holder complete Pipette holder case Union nut Round filter- set (5 pieces) Round filter- set (50 pieces) Round filter- set (100 pieces) Silicone adapter Safety valve 1 Charger incl. inductive charging station 2 Wall holder (incl. dowels and screws) 3 Table stand Order No. 27 37 03700 27 37 03803 27 37 03802 27 37 03704 10 37 03705 10 37 03706 27 37 03201 27 37 03202 27 37 07503 27 37 05600 10 37 05700 Spare parts for devices manufactured before June 1998 Article Pipette holder complete for pipetus-akku Order No. 27 37 03800 Pipettors, Electric, Hirschmann pipetus® standard The classic pipette controller, proven for over 20 years. Ideal for stationary use. Its safety, precision and versatility marked a new era in pipetting technology. The functional separation of the handle and pump makes the handle very ergonomic and lightweight. For all common pipettes from 0.1 to 100 ml. Correct pipetting with both blow- out and TD calibrated pipettes possible. Pipetting speed is set directly at the pump. Operation is controlled via the IN and OUT buttons, whereby the intensity of the pressure determines the actual pump speed. The built-in safety valve offers protection against accidental overfilling and avoids liquid coming into the handle. The pipetus® standard filter comes with an additional pump-mounted filter. Scope of delivery: pipetus® standard, complete with electrical pump, 1 pipette holder with safety valve and 2 sterile round filters. Also available with additional filter on the pump. Article 4 pipetus® standard pipetus® standard filter Order No. 27 37 03000 27 37 04000 Spare parts for pipetus® standard Article Pipette holder complete Pipette holder case Round filter- set (5 pieces) Round filter- set (50 pieces) Round filter- set (100 pieces) Silicone adapter Safety valve Microfiber filter set for pump part (5 pieces) 5 Pump part without filter 6 Pump part with filter Wall holder (incl. dowels and screws) Table stand Order No. 27 37 03700 27 37 03701 27 37 03704 10 37 03705 10 37 03706 27 37 03201 27 37 03202 27 37 04104 27 37 03400 27 37 04400 27 37 05600 10 37 05700 Sunlab® Pipette Controller, neoLab® Sunlab Pipette Controller for use with pipettes from 0.1 – 100 ml with adjustable speeds. Depending on the viscosity of the liquid, the speed can be set to 8 different levels. The LCD display shows the set speed and the battery status. The pipette control- ler can be placed either vertically or horizontally in the holder (comprised in the delivery), so that the pipette will not touch and contaminate the working surface. Easy for one-hand- ed operation. Can be used while charging. Scope of delivery: • Pipette controller • Lithium-ion battery (charging time approx. 8 hours) • Battery charger (charging time 2-3 hours) • Replaceable filter (0.45 µm pore size) and silicon adapter for different pipettes • 2-positions holder Article Sunlab® pipette controller SU1700 Order No. 10 01 98700

396

Volumetry Pipettes, Pipetting Aids / Graduated Vessels Pipetting Aids Pipette Controllers VITLAB pipeo®, VITLAB For all pipettes from 0.1 to 200 ml. With the VITLAB pipeo® pipette controller, pipette handling is simple and comfortable. The ergonomic handle – very light weight at about 190 grams – and excellent balance all contribute to ease of operation. The speed can be adjusted easily, continuously and exactly with one hand using two buttons. A 50 ml pipette can be filled comfortably in less than ten seconds. The liquid release can be done either by gravity delivery when calibrated “Ex” (to deliver), or in blow out mode using the bat- tery-operated motor. Pipettes are held securely and tightly in the exchangeable adapter. Liquid vapours are purged directly to protect the instrument. The charge level of the recyclable battery is shown by a LED indicator. Defective batteries are easily replaced. To avoid surprises, the LED indicator changes from green to red two hours before the battery must be recharged. The VITLAB pipeo®can still be operated while the battery is being recharged. CE marking pursuant to EU Directives 2004/108/EC, 93/68/EEC; 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEC. Included in delivery: VITLAB pipeo®, battery charger (100–240 V, 50/60 Hz), 4 plug adapters (EU, UK, US/J, AUS), battery, battery compartment cover, two replacement 0.2 µm membrane filters and instruction manual. Article Pipette controller VITLAB pipeo® Order No. 10 85 31501 Graduated Flasks Volumetric Flasks, Hirschmann Volumetric flasks with one mark, with rim, without stopper, with dated batch identi- fication, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, DURAN®, acc. to DIN EN ISO 1042, ring mark and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Order No. Volume ml 5 10 20 25 50 100 200 1 250 500 1000 2000 5000 100001) Tolerance ± ml 0.025 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 0.6 1.2 2 Overall height mm 70 90 110 110 140 170 210 220 260 300 370 470 570 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 14 88 61052 14 88 61060 14 88 61064 14 88 61069 14 88 61076 14 88 61080 14 88 61082 14 88 61086 14 88 61090 14 88 61094 14 88 61097 14 88 61098 14 88 61099 co d e b e w WW4ZV034 1 co d e b e w WW4ZV033 1) In addition to DIN size Volumetric Flasks, Hirschmann Volumetric flasks, trapezoidal, with one mark, with dated batch identification, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, DURAN®, rests steadily on wide and flat bottom, with standard ground joint and poly stopper, acc. to DIN EN ISO 1042, ring mark and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Volume ml 1 2 5 5 10 10 20 25 50 Tolerance ± ml 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.04 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 Overall height mm 60 70 70 70 90 90 110 110 140 Stopper NS Order No. 7/16 7/16 7/16 10/191) 7/16 10/191) 10/19 10/19 12/21 14 90 67030 14 90 67038 14 90 67052 14 90 67053 14 90 67060 14 90 67061 14 90 67064 14 90 67069 14 90 67076 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1) Wide neck co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 395

397

Volumetry Graduated Vessels co d e b e w WW4ZV035 1 2 co d e b e w WW4ZV068 396 co d e b e w WW4ZV069 Graduated Flasks Volumetric Flasks, Hirschmann Volumetric flasks with one mark, with standard ground joint and poly stopper, with dated batch identification, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, DURAN®, acc. to DIN EN ISO 1042, ring mark and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Stopper NS Order No. Volume ml 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 100 100 200 1 250 500 1000 2000 5000 Tolerance ± ml 0.04 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 0.6 1.2 Overall height mm 70 90 90 110 110 140 140 170 170 210 220 260 300 370 470 10/191) 7/16 10/191) 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/231) 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 34/35 14 88 61553 14 88 61556 14 88 61560 14 88 61564 14 88 61569 14 88 61576 14 88 61578 14 88 61580 14 88 61581 14 88 61582 14 88 61586 14 88 61590 14 88 61594 14 88 61597 14 88 61598 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1) Wide neck Volumetric Flasks, Hirschmann Volumetric flasks, DURAN®, standard ground joint, with glass stopper, with dated batch identification, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, high-con- trast blue graduation, DIN EN ISO 1042. Volume ml 5 5 10 10 20 25 25 50 50 100 100 200 2 250 500 1000 1000 2000 5000 100001) Standard ground joint NS 7/16 10/192) 7/16 10/192) 10/19 10/19 12/212) 12/21 14/232) 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 29/322) 24/29 29/32 34/35 45/40 1) In addition to DIN size 2) Wide neck Tolerance ± ml 0.025 0.04 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.6 0.4 0.6 1.2 2 Total height approx. mm 70 70 90 90 110 110 110 140 140 170 170 210 220 260 300 300 370 470 570 Order No. 14 88 63152 14 88 63153 14 88 63160 14 88 63161 14 88 63165 14 88 63170 14 88 63171 14 88 63175 14 88 63178 14 88 63180 14 88 63181 14 88 63185 14 88 63186 14 88 63190 14 88 63192 14 88 63193 14 88 63197 14 88 63198 14 88 63199 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Volumetric Flasks, Hirschmann Volumetric flasks, DURAN®, standard ground joint, without stopper, with dated batch identification, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, high-con- trast blue graduation, DIN EN ISO 1042. Volume ml 5 5 10 10 20 25 25 50 50 100 100 Standard ground joint NS 7/16 10/192) 7/16 10/192) 10/19 10/19 12/212) 12/21 14/232) 12/21 14/23 Tolerance ± ml 0.025 0.04 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.1 Total height approx. mm 70 70 90 90 110 110 110 140 140 170 170 Order No. 14 88 60152 14 88 60153 14 88 60160 14 88 60161 14 88 60165 14 88 60170 14 88 60171 14 88 60175 14 88 60178 14 88 60180 14 88 60181 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Continued on next page

398

Volumetry Graduated Vessels Graduated Flasks Volume ml 200 1 250 500 1000 1000 2000 5000 100001) Standard ground joint NS 14/23 14/23 19/26 29/322) 24/29 29/32 34/35 45/40 1) In addition to DIN size 2) Wide neck Tolerance ± ml 0.15 0.15 0.25 0,6 0.4 0.6 1.2 2,0 Total height approx. mm 210 220 260 300 300 370 470 570 Order No. 14 88 60185 14 88 60186 14 88 60190 14 88 60192 14 88 60193 14 88 60197 14 88 60198 14 88 60199 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Volumetric Flasks, Hirschmann Volumetric flasks with one mark, made of amber glass, with standard ground joint and poly stopper or amber hollow glass stopper, with dated batch identification, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, DURAN®, acc. to DIN EN ISO 1042, ring mark and printing in durable white ceramic stain. Volumetric flasks with poly stopper Volume ml 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 100 100 200 2 250 500 1000 2000 Tolerance ± ml 0.040 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 0.6 Overall height mm 70 90 90 110 110 140 140 170 170 210 220 260 300 370 1) Wide neck Stopper NS Order No. 10/191) 7/16 10/191) 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/231) 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 14 89 40153 14 89 40160 14 89 40161 14 89 40165 14 89 40170 14 89 40175 14 89 40178 14 89 40180 14 89 40181 14 89 40185 14 89 40186 14 89 40190 14 89 40193 14 89 40194 Volumetric flasks with amber hollow glass stopper Volume ml 5 10 10 20 25 50 50 100 100 200 3 250 500 1000 2000 Tolerance ± ml 0.040 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 0.6 Overall height mm 70 90 90 110 110 140 140 170 170 210 220 260 300 370 1) Wide neck Stopper NS Order No. 10/191) 7/16 10/191) 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/231) 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 14 89 40253 14 89 40260 14 89 40261 14 89 40265 14 89 40270 14 89 40275 14 89 40278 14 89 40280 14 89 40281 14 89 40285 14 89 40286 14 89 40290 14 89 40293 14 89 40294 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 co d e b e w WW4ZV036 2 3 Failed to find what you are looking for ? Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 397

399

Volumetry Graduated Vessels co d e b e w WW4ZV037 1 co d e b e w WW4ZV060 co d e b e w WWQED022 2 398 Graduated Flasks Volumetric Flasks, Hirschmann Volumetric flasks, without stopper, with dated batch identification, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, with scale on neck, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. For checking filling levels in accord- ance with pre-packing regulations. Volume ml 20 25 30 40 50 100 200 1 250 300 330 350 500 700 750 1000 Scale ml 18 – 22:0.5 23 – 27:0.5 28 – 32:0.5 37 – 43:0.5 47 – 53:0.5 97 – 103:0.5 195 – 205:0.5 245 – 255:0.5 295 – 305:0.5 323 – 337:0.5 343 – 357:0.5 490 – 510:1.0 690 – 710:1.0 740 – 760:1.0 990 – 1010:1.0 Tolerance ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.25 0.40 0.40 Overall height mm 110 110 125 140 140 170 210 220 240 240 240 260 290 300 300 Order No. 14 92 68002 14 92 68004 14 92 68006 14 92 68008 14 92 68010 14 92 68012 14 92 68014 14 92 68016 14 92 68018 14 92 68020 14 92 68022 14 92 68025 14 92 68030 14 92 68035 14 92 68040 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Volumetric Flasks DURAN, Hirschmann Volumetric flasks, Kohlrausch type, for sugar analysis, blue graduation, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, with dated batch identification. Volume ml 100 200 Tolerance ± ml 1.0 0.15 Overall height mm 170 210 Order No. 14 90 65080 14 90 65082 PU pc/Pack 2 2 Volumetric Flasks, Class A, with PE/PP-Stopper, BRAND Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, class A, DE-M marked, with batch number and en- closed batch certificate. Borosilicate glass 3.3, DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (“In”). Ring mark and in- scription in high contrast blue enamel. With PP stopper (order No. 14 49 66499 and 14 49 66498 with PE stopper). Pack of 2 in original supplier packaging (size 1000 to 10000 ml: pack of 1), incl. one batch certificate. Also available with individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate on request. Volume ml 5 W 10 10 W 20 20 W 25 25 W 50 50 W 100 100 200 2 250 500 1000 1000 W 2000 5000 100001) Error limit ± ml 0.04 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 0.6 0.6 1.2 2.0 W = wide neck 1) in addition to ISO size NS 10/19 7/16 10/19 10/19 12/21 10/19 12/21 12/21 14/23 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 29/32 34/35 45/40 Order No. 14 49 66450 10 49 37241 14 49 66460 14 49 66464 10 49 66465 14 49 66468 14 49 66469 14 49 66475 14 49 66476 14 49 66480 14 49 66481 14 49 66485 14 49 66486 14 49 66490 14 49 66493 14 49 66494 14 49 66497 14 49 66498 14 49 66499 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1

400

Graduated Flasks Volumetric Flasks, with PP Stopper, Class A, BRAND Volume NS Order No. DE-M marked, with batch number and enclosed batch certificate. Boro 3.3, DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (In). Ring marks and inscriptions in ETERNA amber stain (particularly resistant, e.g. for agressive cleaning methods). With PP stopper. Original packs of 2 (from 1000 ml on 1 piece), including batch certificate. On request, also available with individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Error limit ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 0.6 14 49 36850 14 49 36860 14 49 36864 10 49 36846 10 49 36841 14 49 36869 14 49 36875 14 49 36876 14 49 36880 14 49 36882 14 49 36886 14 49 36890 14 49 36894 14 49 36897 10/19 10/19 10/19 12/21 10/19 12/21 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 ml 5 W 10 W 20 20 W 25 25 W 50 50 W 100 200 1 250 500 1000 2000 W = wide neck Volumetric Flasks, Class 1, with Glass Stoppers, BRAND 2 Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, class A, blue graduation DE-M marked, Boro 3.3, DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (In). Ring mark and in- scription in high contrast blue enamel. With glass stopper. All BLAUBRAND® volumetric flasks are delivered with batch number and enclosed one batch certificate per packing unit of the manufacturer. On request, also available with individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. Original packs of 2. Volume ml 5 W 10 W 20 20 W 25 25 W 50 50 W 100 100 200 250 500 1000 2000 5000 Error limit ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.04 0.06 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 0.6 1.2 NS 10/19 10/19 10/19 12/21 10/19 12/21 12/21 14/23 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 34/35 Order No. 10 49 37256 10 49 37267 10 49 37257 10 49 37268 10 49 37258 10 49 37294 10 49 37259 10 49 37288 10 49 37260 10 49 37289 10 49 37261 10 49 37262 10 49 37263 10 49 37264 10 49 37265 10 49 37266 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volumetry Graduated Vessels co d e b e w WWQED056 co d e b e w WWQED074 1 2 3 W = wide neck Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, USP, class A, blue graduation DE-M marked, Boro 3.3, DIN EN ISO 1042.Calibrated to contain (In). Ring mark and in- scription in high contrast blue enamel. With glass stopper. With USP batch certificate. On request also available with USP individual certificate. Original packs of 2 (1000 and 2000 ml: 1 piece). Volume ml 5 10 20 25 50 100 200 250 500 1000 2000 Error limit ± ml 0.02 USP 0.02 USP 0.02 USP 0.03 USP 0.05 USP 0.08 USP 0.10 USP 0.12 USP 0.20 USP 0.30 USP 0.50 USP NS 10/19 10/19 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 Order No. 10 49 36968 10 49 36973 10 49 36975 10 49 36977 10 49 36978 10 49 36979 10 49 36980 10 49 36981 10 49 36982 10 49 36983 10 49 36984 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 399

401

Volumetry Graduated Vessels Graduated Flasks Volumetric Flasks, Amber Glass, Class A, BRAND 1 Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, Class A, amber glass, white graduation, with PP stopper DE-M marked, with batch number and enclosed batch certificate. Boro 3.3, DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (In). Ring marks and inscriptions in high-contrast white enamel. With PP stopper. Original packs of 2, including batch certifi- cate. On request, also available with individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. Volume Order No. NS ml 5 W 10 W 20 20 25 25 50 50 W 100 200 250 500 1000 ml 5 W 10 W 20 25 50 50 W 100 200 250 500 1000 Error limit ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.04 0.06 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 Error limit ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 10/19 10/19 12/21 10/19 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 14 49 37450 14 49 37460 10 49 37412 14 49 37464 10 49 37413 14 49 37469 14 49 37475 14 49 37476 14 49 37480 14 49 37482 14 49 37486 14 49 37490 14 49 37494 10/19 10/19 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 10 49 37438 10 49 37443 10 49 37446 10 49 37447 10 49 37448 10 49 37445 10 49 37449 10 49 37450 10 49 37451 10 49 37452 10 49 37453 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 co d e b e w WWQED054 2 co d e b e w WWQED079 co d e b e w 400 W = wide neck 2 Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, Class A, amber glass, white graduation, glass stoppers DE-M marked, Boro 3.3, DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (In). Ring marks and inscriptions in high-contrast white enamel. With glass stoppers. All BLAUBRAND® volu- metric flasks are with batch number and enclosed batch certificate. On request, also available with individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. Order No. Volume NS W = wide neck Volumetric flasks, PMP, transparent, BRAND With PP stopper. Error limits (EL) according to class A, DIN EN ISO 1042. Class A incl. one batch certificate. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Exposure to temperatures up to 121ºC (autoclaving) will not cause permanently exceeded error limits! Cleaning up to max. 60°C is recommended to preserve marks and inscriptions. Pack of 1. Volume ml 10 W 25 50 100 250 500 1000 Error limit ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.15 0.25 0.4 Ground joint NS 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/23 19/26 19/26 24/29 Height mm 90 108 146 173 225 258 298 Order No. 10 49 36170 10 49 36172 10 49 36174 10 49 36176 10 49 36178 10 49 36180 10 49 36182 W = wide neck, , height = without stopper Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

402

Volumetry Graduated Vessels Graduated Flasks Volumetric Flasks, BRAND 1 Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, class A, trapezoidal DE-M marked, with batch number and enclosed batch certificate. Boro 3.3, DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (In). Ring marks and inscriptions in high contrast blue enamel. With PP stopper. Original packs of 2, including batch certificate. On request, also available with individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate. Volume ml 1 2 5 10 W 20 25 50 Error limit ± ml 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 Ground joint NS Order No. 7/16 7/16 7/16 10/19 10/19 10/19 12/21 14 49 36430 14 49 36438 14 49 36450 14 49 36460 14 49 36464 14 49 36469 14 49 36476 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 co d e b e w WWQED055 W = wide neck 2 Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, class A, PUR Plastic coated PURprotect, DE-M marked. Boro 3.3. DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Ring mark and inscriptions in high contrast blue enamel. With PP stopper. The plain and high quality PUR coating envelops the volumetric flasks like a protection skin. In the event of breakage, the safety coating helps contain the glass fragments. The light blue coating facilitates optical distinction. Suitable for dishwasher (cleaning up to max. 95°C). The maximum operating temperature at dry heat is 135°C (exposure time < 30 min). Frequent autoclaving at 121°C reduces splintering protection. On request, also available with individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certif- icate. Volume ml 50 W 100 200 250 500 1000 Error limit ± ml 0.10 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.4 Ground joint NS Order No. 14/23 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 10 49 36548 10 49 36549 10 49 36550 10 49 36551 10 49 36552 10 49 36553 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 1 W = wide neck 3 Volumetric flasks with 3 marks, BLAUBRAND®, class A, DAkkS-calibrated DE-M marked. Boro 3.3. DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Incl. DAkkS-cer- tificate. Ring mark and inscription in high contrast blue enamel. With PP-stopper. The volumetric flask with 3 marks is used to check the functioning of a dispenser. The mark in the middle shows the nominal volume, the upper and lower marks show the error limits as specified in the table below. If the error limit is exceeded even with repeated measurements, the dispenser is defective. The DKD-calibrated volumetric flask does not replace the gravimetric test of the monitoring of measuring instruments according to ISO 8655. Delivery date to be agreed upon. Further sizes on request. 2 Volume ml 10 25 50 100 upper/lower mark ± ml 0.070 0.175 0.35 0.70 1) enlarged ground joint Neck inner Ø mm 7 ± 1 9 ± 1 11 ± 1 13 ± 1 Ground joint NS 10/191) 10/19 12/21 14/23 Order No. 10 49 38204 10 49 38206 10 49 38208 10 49 38210 4 Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, USP, class A DE-M marked. Boro 3.3. DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (TD, In). Incl. one USP Individual certificate. On request, also available with USP individual certificate. Marks and inscriptions in high contrast blue enamel. With PP-stopper. 1 3 Volume ml 5 10 20 25 50 100 200 250 500 1000 2000 Error limit ± ml 0.02 USP 0.02 USP 0.02 USP 0.03 USP 0.05 USP 0.08 USP 0.10 USP 0.12 USP 0.20 USP 0.30 USP 0.5 USP 1) enlarged ground joint co d e b e w Ground joint NS Order No. 10/191) 10/191) 10/191) 10/19 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 10 49 36938 10 49 36943 10 49 36945 10 49 36947 10 49 36948 10 49 36949 10 49 36950 10 49 36951 10 49 36952 10 49 36953 10 49 36954 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Continued on next page 4 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 401

403

Volumetry Graduated Vessels 1 2 co d e b e w WWQED087 402 1 Graduated Flasks Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, USP, Class A, amber glass, white graduation DE-M marked, Boro 3.3, DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (In). Ring marks and inscriptions in high-contrast white enamel. With glass stoppers. With enclosed USP batch certificate. On request, also available with USP individual certificate. Original pack of 2 (1000 ml: 1 piece). Volume ml 5 10 20 25 50 100 200 250 500 1000 Error limit ± ml 0.02 USP 0.02 USP 0.02 USP 0.03 USP 0.05 USP 0.08 USP 0.10 USP 0.12 USP 0.20 USP 0.30 USP Ground joint NS Order No. 10/19 10/19 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 10 49 37461 10 49 37462 10 49 37463 10 49 37464 10 49 37465 10 49 37467 10 49 37468 10 49 37469 10 49 37470 10 49 37471 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 Volume ml 5 10 20 25 50 100 200 250 500 1000 Ground joint NS Order No. Volumetric flasks, BLAUBRAND®, USP, amber glass, PP-stopper, white graduation BLAUBRAND®, Boro 3.3. DIN EN ISO 1042, DE-M marking. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Marks and inscriptions in high contrast white enamel. Incl. USP batch certificate. On re- quest, also available with USP individual certificate. Pack of 2; 1000 ml: pack of 1. PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Error limit ± ml 0.02 USP 0.02 USP 0.02 USP 0.03 USP 0.05 USP 0.08 USP 0.10 USP 0.12 USP 0.20 USP 0.30 USP 10 49 37481 10 49 37482 10 49 37483 10 49 37484 10 49 37485 10 49 37487 10 49 37488 10 49 37489 10 49 37490 10 49 37491 10/19 10/19 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/23 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 Measuring Flasks BLAUBRAND®, BRAND Class A, Boro 3.3, DE-M, beaded rim, DIN EN ISO 1042. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). All BLAUBRAND® volumetric flasks are delivered with a batch number and batch certifi- cate included in the original packaging. They are also available with individual certificates or DAkkS calibration certificate upon request. Nom. vol. ml 10 20 25 50 100 200 250 500 1000 Error limit ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.15 0,15 0.25 0.40 Accur. class A class A class A class A class A class A class A class A class A Order No. 10 49 37045 10 49 37046 10 49 37047 10 49 37048 10 49 37049 10 49 37050 10 49 37051 10 49 37052 10 49 37053 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Volumetric Flasks, Quartz Glass, QGT Bad Harzburg Quartz glass volumetric flasks acc. to DIN 12664, class AS, with ring mark, conform- ity certified. Volume ml 25 50 100 250 500 1000 Flask Ø mm 40 50 60 80 100 125 Overall H mm 110 140 170 220 260 300 Socket/stopper NS Order No. 10/19 12/21 12/21 14/23 19/26 24/29 18 36 40014 18 36 40017 18 36 40024 18 36 40036 18 36 40044 18 36 40054

404

Volumetry Graduated Vessels Graduated Flasks Volumetric Flasks, Class B, VITLAB Volumetric flasks, PMP, class B Highly transparent. With ring mark individually calibrated to “In”. Class B tolerances ac- cording to DIN EN ISO 1042. Thermal stress up to 121°C (autoclaving) does not perma- nently exceed the tolerance limit. To preserve markings, cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. ml Vol. Tol. ± ml 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.80 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.80 Height mm 90 115 150 180 235 270 310 90 115 150 180 235 270 310 1) with screw cap made of PP 2) with stopper NS made of PP 101) 251) 501) 1 1001) 2501) 5001) 10001) 102) 252) 502) 2 1002) 2502) 5002) 10002) Neck Order No. GL 18 GL 18 GL 18 GL 18 GL 25 GL 25 GL 32 NS 10/19 NS 10/19 NS 12/21 NS 14/23 NS 19/26 NS 19/26 NS 24/29 10 85 31455 10 85 31465 10 85 31472 10 85 31477 10 85 31484 10 85 31488 10 85 31492 10 85 31155 23 85 11165 23 85 11172 23 85 11177 23 85 11184 23 85 11188 23 85 11192 PU pc/Pack 6 6 6 6 5 4 3 6 6 6 6 5 4 3 1 2 Volumetric flasks, PP, class B Highly transparent. With ring mark individually calibrated to “In”. Class B tolerances ac- cording to DIN EN ISO 1042. Thermal stress up to 60°C does not permanently exceed the tolerance limit. To preserve markings, cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. Order No. Neck 3 4 co d e b e w WWMUE001 ml Vol. Tol. ± ml 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.80 0.08 0.08 0.12 0.20 0.30 0.50 0.80 Height mm 90 115 150 180 235 270 310 90 115 150 180 235 270 310 1) with screw cap made of PP 2) with stopper NS made of PP 101) 251) 501) 3 1001) 2501) 5001) 10001) 102) 252) 502) 4 1002) 2502) 5002) 10002) GL 18 GL 18 GL 18 GL 18 GL 25 GL 25 GL 32 NS 10/19 NS 10/19 NS 12/21 NS 14/23 NS 19/26 NS 19/26 NS 24/29 10 85 31255 10 85 31265 10 85 31272 10 85 31277 10 85 31284 10 85 31288 10 85 31292 10 85 31355 10 85 31365 10 85 31372 10 85 31377 10 85 31384 10 85 31388 10 85 31392 PU pc/Pack 6 6 6 6 5 4 3 6 6 6 6 5 4 3 Volumetric Flasks, PP, Class B, ISOLAB Manufactured according to DIN EN ISO 1042 standard from clear polypropylene. Resist- ant to most acids, bases and many commonly used solvents. Calibrated according to DIN/ ISO Class “B” standard. Clear flasks are manufactured from very clear polypropylene resulting high transparency and clear indication of meniscus line. Amber flasks are manufactured from special formu- lated polypropylene preventing UV light penetration into the flask yet still offering high transparency. All volumetric flasks are supplied with a leak-proof PE stopper which ensures perfect closure. For consistent accuracy should not be used with liquids over 60°C or kept under direct sunlight for long periods. Volume ml 25 50 100 250 500 1000 Neck NS 10/19 12/21 14/23 14/23 19/26 24/29 Clear flasks Order No. 10 66 40001 10 66 40002 10 66 40003 10 66 40004 10 66 40005 10 66 40006 Amber flasks Order No. 10 66 40011 10 66 40012 10 66 40013 10 66 40014 10 66 40015 10 66 40016 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 403

405

Volumetry Graduated Vessels Graduated Flasks Volumetric Flasks, PMP, Class A, VITLAB Highly transparent. With ring mark individually calibrated to “In”. Class A tolerances ac- cording to DIN EN ISO 1042. With printed lot number and batch certificate. Thermal stress up to 121°C (autoclaving) does not permanently exceed the tolerance limit. To preserve markings. Cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. Also available with DAkkS calibration certificate or individual certificate. Vol. ml 10 25 50 1 100 250 500 1000 Tol. ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.15 0.25 0.40 Height mm 90 115 150 180 235 270 310 Neck NS Order No. 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/23 19/26 19/26 24/29 10 85 31354 23 85 11365 23 85 11372 23 85 11377 23 85 11384 23 85 11388 23 85 11392 PU pc/Pack 6 6 6 6 5 4 3 Volumetric Flasks, PFA, Class A, VITLAB Highly transparent. Ring mark individually calibrated to “In”. Class A tolerances according to DIN EN ISO 1042. The PFA screw cap guards against contamination. Outstanding chemical resistance, can be used with strong oxidants, highly concentrated acids and alkalis, hydrocarbons, and ketones. With laser-engraved lot number and batch certificate. Thermal stress up to 121°C (auto- claving) does not permanently exceed the tolerance limit. To preserve the ring mark do not clean at temperatures exceeding 60°C. Also available with DAkkS calibration certifi- cate or individual certificate. Vol. ml 10 25 50 100 250 500 Tol. ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.15 0.25 Height mm 90 115 150 180 235 270 Thread GL PU Order No. 18 18 18 18 25 25 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 1 pcs. 10 85 31254 23 85 11265 23 85 11272 23 85 11277 23 85 11284 23 85 11288 Volumetric Flasks UV-protect, PMP, Class A, PP, VITLAB With NS stopper. UV-absorbing, highly transparent. For storage of light-sensitive sub- stances. With ring mark individually calibrated to “In”. Class A tolerances according to DIN EN ISO 1042. With printed lot number and batch certificate. Thermal stress up to 121°C (autoclaving) does not permanently exceed the tolerance limit. To preserve markings, cleaning at no higher than 60°C is recommended. Also avail- able with DAkkS calibration certificate or individual certificate. Volume ml 10 25 50 2 100 250 500 1000 Tolerance ± ml 0.04 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.15 0.25 0.40 Height mm 90 115 150 180 235 270 310 Neck NS Order No. 10/19 10/19 12/21 14/23 19/26 19/26 24/29 10 85 36709 10 85 36719 10 85 36729 10 85 36739 10 85 36749 10 85 36759 10 85 36769 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1 2 We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! 404

406

Graduated Cylinders Graduated Cylinders, Hirschmann Graduated cylinders, low form, with hexagon base and spout, class B, short line grad- uation, DURAN®, with durable amber stain graduation and printing, DIN EN ISO 4788. Volume ml 10 25 50 1 100 250 500 1000 2000 Sub-division ml 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 50.0 Tolerance ± ml 0,3 0,5 1,0 1,0 2,0 5,0 10,0 20,0 Overall height mm 100 125 150 170 220 255 295 345 Order No. 14 93 74060 14 93 74069 14 93 74076 14 93 74079 14 93 74085 14 93 74089 14 93 74093 14 93 74097 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Graduated Cylinders, Hirschmann Graduated cylinders, tall form, with hexagonal glass base and spout, class B, short line graduation, DURAN®, acc. to DIN EN ISO 4788, graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Volume ml 5 10 25 50 2 100 250 500 1000 2000 Sub-division ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 Tolerance ± ml 0.075 0.150 0.375 0.75 0.75 1.50 3.75 7.5 15,0 Overall height mm 115 140 170 200 260 335 390 470 570 Order No. 14 93 70049 14 93 70056 14 93 70068 14 93 70075 14 93 70078 14 93 70084 14 93 70088 14 93 70092 14 93 70096 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Also available with amber graduation! Graduated Cylinders, Hirschmann Graduated cylinders, with spout, DURAN®, tolerances better than class B, short line graduation, with durable amber stain graduation, IN calibrated, DIN EN ISO 4788. Volume ml 5 10 25 50 3 100 250 500 1000 2000 50001) Sub-division ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 50 Tolerance ± ml 0.075 0.15 0.375 0.75 0.75 1.5 3.8 7.5 15.0 37.5 Total height approx. mm 115 140 170 200 260 335 390 470 500 650 Order No. 14 93 70149 14 93 70156 14 93 70168 14 93 70175 14 93 70178 14 93 70184 14 93 70188 14 93 70192 14 93 70196 14 93 70198 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1) in addition to DIN size Graduated Cylinders, Hirschmann 3 Graduated cylinders, high form, with hexagonal base, with dated batch identifica- tion, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, acc. to DIN EN ISO 4788, graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Order No. Volume ml 5 10 25 50 4 100 250 500 1000 2000 Sub-division ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 Tolerance ± ml 0.05 0.10 0.25 0.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 5.0 10.0 Overall height mm 115 140 170 200 260 335 390 470 500 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 14 93 71249 14 93 71256 14 93 71268 14 93 71275 14 93 71278 14 93 71284 14 93 71288 14 93 71292 14 93 71296 Volumetry Graduated Vessels co d e b e w WW4ZV042 1 2 4 co d e b e w WW4ZV038 co d e b e w WW4ZV070 co d e b e w WW4ZV040 Also available with amber graduation! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 405

407

Volumetry Graduated Vessels co d e b e w WW4ZV039 co d e b e w WW4ZV041 1 2 co d e b e w WWQED023 3 406 4 Graduated Cylinders Graduated Cylinders, Hirschmann Graduated cylinders, high form, with plastic base and guard ring, with dated batch identification, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, acc. to DIN EN ISO 4788, graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Volume ml 10 25 50 100 1 250 500 1000 Sub-division ml 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 Tolerance ± ml 0.10 0.25 0.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 5.0 Overall height mm 140 170 200 260 335 390 470 Order No. 14 93 70556 14 93 70568 14 93 70575 14 93 70578 14 93 70584 14 93 70588 14 93 70592 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Graduated Cylinders, Hirschmann Graduated cylinders, tall form, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, with hexagon base, with Schellbach line, main point ring graduation, made of DURAN®, acc. to DIN EN ISO 4788, graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Order No. Volume ml 5 10 25 50 2 100 250 500 1000 2000 Sub-division ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 Tolerance ± ml 0.05 0.10 0.25 0.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 5.0 10.0 Overall height mm 115 140 170 200 260 335 390 470 500 14 93 72049 14 93 72056 14 93 72068 14 93 72075 14 93 72078 14 93 72084 14 93 72088 14 93 72092 14 93 72096 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Graduated Cylinders, Class A, Tall Form, BRAND Graduated cylinders, BLAUBRAND®, class A DE-M marked, with batch number and batch identification. Made of boro 3.3. DIN EN ISO 4788. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Ring marks at major graduations. High contrast blue enamel graduations and inscriptions. With spout and hex- agonal glass base. 2 piece in each original supplier package (size 1000 ml: 1 piece), incl. one detailed batch certificate. Also available with individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate, please inquire. Volume ml 5 10 25 50 3 100 250 500 1000 2000 Graduation ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 Error limit ± ml 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 2.5 5 10 Height mm 115 140 170 200 260 335 365 465 505 Order No. 14 49 32149 14 49 32159 14 49 32168 14 49 32175 14 49 32178 14 49 32184 14 49 32188 14 49 32192 14 49 32196 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Volume Graduated cylinders, BLAUBRAND®-ETERNA, class A DE-M marked, with batch number and batch identification. Made of boro 3.3. DIN EN ISO 4788. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Ring marks at major graduations. ETERNA graduations and inscriptions in amber diffusion stain (particularly resistant to aggressive cleaning methods. With spout and hexagonal glass base. 2 piece in each original supplier package (size 1000 ml: 1 piece), incl. one detailed batch certificate. Also available with individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate, please inquire. Graduation ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 Error limit ± ml 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 2.5 5 10 14 49 32749 14 49 32759 14 49 32768 14 49 32775 14 49 32778 14 49 32784 14 49 32788 14 49 32792 14 49 32796 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Height mm 115 140 170 200 260 335 365 465 505 ml 5 10 25 50 4 100 250 500 1000 2000 Order No. Continued on next page

408

Volumetry Graduated Vessels Graduated Cylinders Graduated cylinders, BLAUBRAND®, class A DE-M marked, with batch number and batch identification. Made from boro 3.3. To DIN EN ISO 4788. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Ring marks at major graduations. High contrast blue enamel graduations and inscriptions. With PP stop- per and hexagonal base. 2 piece in each original supplier package (1000 ml: 1 piece), incl. one detailed batch certificate. Also available with individual certificate, USP individual certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate, please inquire. Volume ml 10 25 50 5 100 250 5001) 10001) Graduation ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 Ground joint NS 10/19 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 34/35 45/40 Height mm 160 190 220 285 350 395 500 Order No. 10 49 32408 10 49 32420 10 49 32428 10 49 32438 10 49 32448 10 49 32454 10 49 32462 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1) with octagonal stopper, PE Graduated cylinders, BLAUBRAND®, USP, class A, graduation blue, high form DE-M marked, made of boro 3.3, DIN EN ISO 4788. Calibrated to contain (In). Ring marks at major graduations. High contrast blue enamel graduations and inscriptions. With spout and hexagonal glass base. Incl. USP batch identification. Also available with USP individual certificate, please in- quire. Packaging unit 2 pieces (5 to 500 ml), 1 piece (1000 ml). 5 6 7 Volume ml 6 5 10 25 50 10 250 7 500 1000 2000 Graduation ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 Error limit ± ml 0.05 0.10 0.17 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 6.0 Height mm 115 140 170 200 260 335 365 465 505 Order No. 10 49 32805 10 49 32808 10 49 32820 10 49 32828 10 49 32838 10 49 32848 10 49 32854 10 49 32862 10 49 32864 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Graduated Cylinders, Class B, High Form, BRAND With embossed scale. Made from high clarity PP. DIN 12681/ISO 6706. Calibrated to contain (In). Perfect cylindrical design and equal graduation marks allow for easy volume reading. Functional spout minimizes spills. Strengthened rim and sturdier base for in- creased stability. Exposure to temperatures up to 80°C will not cause permanent exceeding of error limits. Order No. Volume Graduation ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 Error limit ± ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 H mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 535 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 23 49 35059 23 49 35068 23 49 35075 23 49 35078 23 49 35084 23 49 35088 23 49 35092 23 49 35096 ml 10 25 50 8 100 250 500 1000 2000 Graduated Cylinders, Class B, PP, Tall Form, BRAND With blue printed graduations PP, highly translucent. DIN 12681 / ISO 6706. Calibrated to contain (In). High dimensional stability thanks to reinforced brim. Functional spout prevents dripping. Stands securely on hexagonal nubbed base. Exposure to temperatures up to 80ºC will not cause perma- nent exceeding of error limits. Cleaning temperature below 60°C is recommended to pre- serve marks and inscriptions. Volume ml 10 25 9 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Graduation ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 co d e b e w Error limit ± ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 H mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 535 Order No. 14 49 34859 14 49 34868 14 49 34875 14 49 34878 14 49 34884 14 49 34888 14 49 34892 14 49 34896 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 8 9 co d e b e w WWQED047 co d e b e w WWQED057 407 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website.

409

Volumetry Graduated Vessels 1 co d e b e w WWQED046 co d e b e w WWQED048 2 3 408 Graduated Cylinders Graduated Cylinders, Class A, PMP, Tall Form, BRAND With blue printed scale. Extremely durable, high quality plastics provide excellent chem- ical resistance. PMP, transparent. DIN 12 681 and ISO 6706. Class A are DE-M marked according to “Eichordnung”, the German Federal Weights and Measures Regulations and come with one batch certificate. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). • Perfect cylindrical design and equal graduation marks for easy volume reading. • Strengthened rim increases overall dimensional stability. • Functional spout minimizes spills. • Sturdier base design results in increased stability. • Easy-to-read graduations. • Exposure to temperatures up to 121ºC (autoclaving) will not cause permanent exceeding of error limits! Cleaning temperature below 60°C is recommended to preserve marks and inscriptions. Class A, graduated cylinders be characterized by a very low spread of the measurements. Class A error limits are maintained after 20 washing and 10 sterilization cycles at 121°C. (DIN 12681 requires only 10 washing and 3 sterilization cycles). Volume ml 10 25 1 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Graduation ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 Error limit A ± ml 0.1 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 2.5 5 10 H mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 535 Order No. 23 49 35159 23 49 35168 23 49 35175 23 49 35178 23 49 35184 23 49 35188 23 49 35192 23 49 35196 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Error limit A : Nominal error limits according to DIN 12681 Graduated Cylinders, Class B, High Form, BRAND 2 With blue printed graduation Made from transparent PMP. DIN 12681/ISO 6706. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Perfect cylindrical design and equal graduation marks allow for easy volume reading. Functional spout minimizes spills. Strengthened rim and sturdier base design for increased stability. Exposure to temperatures up to 121ºC (autoclaving) will not cause permanent exceeding of error limits. Cleaning temperature below 60 °C is recommended to preserve marks and inscriptions. For autoclaving, we recommend the design with embossed scale. Volume ml 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Graduation ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 Error limit ± ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 H mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 535 Order No. 23 49 34759 23 49 34768 23 49 34775 23 49 34778 23 49 34784 23 49 34788 23 49 34792 23 49 34796 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 3 With embossed scale Made from transparent PMP. DIN 12681 and ISO 6706. Calibrated to contain (TC, In). Functional spout minimizes spills. Strengthened rim and sturdier base design for in- creased stability. Exposure to temperatures up to 121ºC (autoclaving) will not cause per- manent exceeding of error limits. Autoclavable (121°C). Volume ml 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Graduation ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 Error limit ± ml 0.2 0.5 1 1 2 5 10 20 H mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 535 Order No. 10 49 34908 10 49 34920 10 49 34928 10 49 34938 10 49 34948 10 49 34954 10 49 34962 10 49 34964 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1

410

Volumetry Graduated Vessels Graduated Cylinders Graduated Cylinders, PP, Class B, VITLAB 1 Graduated cylinders with embossed blue graduations Highly transparent. With easily readable, raised, embossed blue scale and ring mark at the primary scale points. Calibrated “In”. Class B tolerances according to DIN 12681/ISO 6706. Hexagonal base with bottom studs provides high stability. Thermal stress up to 80°C does not cause tolerance limits to be permanently exceeded. To preserve markings. do not clean at temperatures exceeding 60°C. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Vol. ml 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Tol. ± ml 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 Grad. ml 0.20 0.50 1.00 1.00 2.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 Height mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 482 Ø mm 15 22 27 33 44 58 69 97 Order No. 23 85 10159 23 85 10168 23 85 10175 23 85 10178 23 85 10184 23 85 10188 23 85 10192 23 85 10196 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 3 2 Graduated cylinders with embossed graduations Highly transparent. With a raised scale and ring mark at the primary scale points calibrat- ed “In”. Class B tolerances according to DIN 12681/ISO 6706. Hexagonal base with bottom studs provides high stability. Thermal stress up to 80°C does not cause tolerance limits to be permanently exceeded. Suitable for contact with foodstuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Vol. ml 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Tol. ± ml 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 Grad. ml 0.20 0.50 1.00 1.00 2.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 Height mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 482 Ø mm 15 22 27 33 44 58 69 97 Order No. 10 85 31159 10 85 31168 10 85 31175 10 85 31178 10 85 31184 10 85 31188 10 85 31192 10 85 31196 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 6 6 6 3 Graduated Cylinders, PMP, DE-M, Class A, VITLAB Highly transparent. DE-M marked. With a raised scale and ring mark at the primary scale points, calibrated “In”. The lot certificate supplied bears the batch number and the actual nominal value ascertained under the test conditions. The resulting deviations from the nominal value fall well under the allowed tolerances of Class A according to DIN 12681 and ISO 6706. With the laser engraved batch number and the year of manufacture. Hexagonal base with bottom studs provides high stability. Thermal stress up to 121°C (autoclaving) does not cause tolerance limits to be permanently exceeded. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Also available with DAkkS calibration certificate or individual certificate. 1 2 Vol. ml 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Tol. ± ml 0.10 0.25 0.50 0.50 1.0 2.5 5.0 10.0 Grad. ml 0.20 0.50 1.00 1.00 2.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 Height mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 482 Ø mm 15 22 27 33 44 58 69 97 Order No. 10 85 34604 23 85 64768 23 85 64875 23 85 64978 23 85 65084 23 85 65188 23 85 65292 23 85 65396 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 409

411

Volumetry Graduated Vessels Graduated Cylinders Graduated Cylinders, PMP, Class A, VITLAB Tall shape. Highly transparent. DE-M marked. With a red imprinted scale, and ring mark at the primary scale points, calibrated ‘In’. The lot certificate supplied bears the batch number and the actual nominal value ascertained under the test conditions. The resulting deviations from the nominal volume fall well below the allowed tolerances of Class A ac- cording to DIN 12681 and ISO 6706. With imprinted batch number and the year of man- ufacture. Hexagonal base with bottom studs provides high stability. To protect the em- bossing, cleaning at a temperature of max. 60°C is recommended. Thus, conditionally autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) pursuant to DIN EN 285. For autoclaving, we recommend the variant with raised graduation. Vol. ml 10 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 Tol. ± ml 0,10 0,25 0,50 0,50 1,00 2,50 5,00 10,00 Grad. ml 0,20 0,50 1,00 1,00 2,00 5,00 10,00 20,00 Height mm 145 170 200 250 315 360 440 535 Ø mm 15 22 27 33 44 58 69 97 Order No. 10 85 36461 10 85 36471 10 85 36481 10 85 36491 10 85 36501 10 85 36511 10 85 36521 10 85 36541 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Graduated Cylinders, PP, Low Form, Class B, VITLAB Highly transparent. With a raised scale, calibrated “In”. Thermal stress up to 80°C does not cause tolerance limits to be permanently exceeded. Suitable for contact with food- stuffs according to ordinance (EU) No. 10/2011. Vol. ml 25 50 100 250 500 1000 Tol. ± ml 0.5 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 20.0 Grad. ml 0.50 1.00 2.00 5.00 10.00 20.00 Height mm 122 142 163 192 218 285 Ø mm 22 27 37 51 67 78 Order No. 23 85 10268 23 85 10275 23 85 10279 23 85 10285 23 85 10289 23 85 10293 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 6 6 6 Graduated Cylinders, Hirschmann Graduated cylinders with hexagon base, standard ground joint and poly stopper, with dated batch identification, class A, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, acc. to DIN EN ISO 4788, graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Volume ml 10 25 50 1 100 250 500 1000 Sub-division ml 0.2 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 5.0 10.0 Tolerance ± ml 0.10 0.25 0.5 0.5 1.0 2.5 5.0 Overall height mm 160 193 226 290 367 425 510 Stopper NS 10/19 14/23 19/26 24/29 29/32 34/35 45/40 Order No. 14 93 75259 14 93 75268 14 93 75275 14 93 75278 14 93 75284 14 93 75288 14 93 75292 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. co d e b e w WW4ZV043 co d e b e w 410

412

Microliter Tips Microliter Syringes, IDL Explanation of codes: The following codes are used to specify the various options. co d e b e w WW7R3273 Volumetry Syringes DS (Digital Syringe): Digital syringes consist of an ergonomically designed holder with LCD and a microliter tip from the 700, 1700 or 7000 Series. The dosing volume is indicated digitally and the cor- rectness of the unit confirmed by a calibration certificate. 1 1 N (Needle): N stands for a glass body with a fixed needle and body element. Not to be heated above 50°C. 2 LTN (Luer Tip Needle): The needle is fixed in a tapered glass body. Not to be heated above 50°C. 2 3 LT (Luer Tip): The syringe has a conical end on the glass body for fixing the needle. Autoclavable at above 100°C (without piston) 4 RN (Removable Needle): The needle can be removed from a connection practically with no empty space. RN stands for a glass body with a piston and an transition piece. Not to be heated above 50°C. 3 5 TLL (Teflon Luer Lock): This type of syringe has a locking device in an addition to the cone. Not to be heated above 50°C. CH (Chaney Adapter): A dosing aid made of steel/aluminium, mounted on the syringe. 4 WG (With Guide = Syring Guide): The guide protects the piston from bending, and from being pushed out to the rear when working against high pressures. Items supplied: N and RN are supplied with needles. LT and TLL are supplied without needles. Gauge: Standard size = Classification of diameter, inner diameter and outer diameter for wires and capillary tubes. Tip type 2 (pst2) Standard tip shape with a polished section of 10-12°, slightly bent inwards (protection against clogging). Ideally suited for gas chromatography. Tip type 3 (pst3) Tip with a polished section of 90°. For accurate dosing with thin layer chromatography and HPLC applications. 5 Tip shape AS (pstAS) With 8° cone polished on the face side. Specifically for GC Autosampler. Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 411 co d e b e w

413

Volumetry Syringes WW7R3276 co d e b e w 1 Microliter Tips Microliter Syringes, Series 1000/1700, IDL Gas and Liquid-tight syringes for GC, LC, serology, biochemistry, for the dispensing of gas or corrosive liquids, and for working against high counter-pressures. Suitable for manual and automated use (diluters/dispensers, autosamplers etc.) Sealed by Teflon pis- ton, gas-tight. Accuracy and reproducibility <1%. pst = point-style Microliter Syringes, Series 1700, Version N, RN type Syringe 1701 1 1702 1705 1710 1725 1750 Vol. Grad. µl µl 10 0.1 25 0.25 50 0.5 100 1.0 250 2.5 500 5 Cannula dimensions L × O.D. × I.D. mm 51×0.47×0.13 51×0.72×0.15 51×0.72×0.15 51×0.72×0.15 51×0.72×0.15 51×0.72×0.41 Can. gauge 26 S 22 S 22 S 22 S 22 S 22 Dead vol. µl 0.52 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 6.73 Vers. N pst 2 Order No. 19 00 17101 19 00 17201 19 00 17301 19 00 17401 19 00 17501 19 00 17601 N pst 3 Order No. 19 00 17105 19 00 17205 19 00 17305 19 00 17405 19 00 17505 19 00 17605 RN pst 2 Order No. 19 00 17102 19 00 17202 19 00 17302 19 00 17402 19 00 17502 19 00 17602 RN pst 3 Order No. 19 00 27103 19 00 27203 19 00 27303 19 00 27403 19 00 27503 19 00 27603 RN without needle Order No. 19 00 17106 19 00 17206 19 00 17306 19 00 17406 19 00 17506 19 00 17606 Microliter Syringes, Series 1700, Version LT, SampleLock, TLL Can. gauge Dead vol. type Syringe 1701 1 1702 1705 1710 1725 1750 Vol. µl 10 25 50 100 250 500 Grad. µl 0.1 0.25 0.5 1.0 2.5 5 Cannula dimensions L × O.D. × I.D. mm 51×0.47×0.13 51×0.72×0.15 51×0.72×0.15 51×0.72×0.15 51×0.72×0.15 51×0.72×0.41 26 S 22 S 22 S 22 S 22 S 22 Vers. LT Order No. 19 00 17103 19 00 17203 19 00 17303 19 00 17403 19 00 17503 19 00 17603 µl 0.52 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 6.73 SampleLock Order No. 19 00 17307 19 00 17407 19 00 17507 19 00 17607 TLL, with piston stop Order No. 19 00 17204 19 00 17304 19 00 17404 19 00 17504 19 00 17604 type Syringe 1001 2 1002 1005 1010 type Syringe 1001 2 1002 1005 1010 2 ml 1 2.5 5 10 Vol. ml 1 2.5 5 10 Vol. Grad. Microliter Syringes, Series 1000, Version LTN Cannula dimensions L × O.D. × I.D. mm 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 Can. gauge 22 22 22 22 Dead vol. µl 6.73 6.73 6.73 6.73 Vers. LTN pst 2 Order No. 19 00 10101 19 00 10201 19 00 10301 19 00 10401 LTN pst 3 Order No. 19 00 10107 19 00 10207 19 00 10307 19 00 10407 LTN pst 5 Order No. 19 00 10108 19 00 10208 19 00 10308 19 00 10408 ml 0.01 0.025 0.05 0.1 Microliter Syringes, Series 1000, Version RN, LT Grad. Cannula dimensions L × O.D. × I.D. mm ml 0.01 51×0.72×0.41 0.025 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 0.05 0.1 51×0.72×0.41 Can. gauge 22 22 22 22 Dead vol. µl 6.73 6.73 6.73 6.73 Vers. RN pst 2 Order No. 19 00 10102 19 00 10202 19 00 10302 19 00 10402 RN without needle LT without needle Order No. 19 00 10109 19 00 10209 19 00 10309 19 00 10409 Order No. 19 00 10103 19 00 10203 19 00 10303 19 00 10403 Can. gauge Dead vol. Microliter Syringes, Series 1000, Version SampleLock, TLL Vers. SampleLock Syringe type Vol. Grad. 1001 2 1002 1005 1010 1025 1050 1100 ml ml 1 0.01 2.5 0.025 0.05 5 0.1 10 0.25 25 50 0.5 1.0 100 Cannula dimen- sions L × O.D. × I.D. mm 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 51×0.72×0.41 µl 6.73 6.73 6.73 6.73 6.73 6.73 6.73 Order No. 19 00 10110 19 00 10210 19 00 10310 19 00 10410 19 00 10510 19 00 10610 19 00 10710 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 TLL, without piston stop without needle Order No. 19 00 10106 19 00 10206 19 00 10306 19 00 10406 19 00 10506 19 00 10606 19 00 10706 TLL, with piston stop, without needle Order No. 19 00 10104 Chaney Adapter (syringe not included) Syringe type 1702 1705 3 1710 1725 1750 3 Vol. µl 25 50 100 250 500 Can. gauge 22 S 22 S 22 S 22 S 22 412 TLL, without flange without needle Order No. 19 00 10505 Order No. 19 00 11702 19 00 11705 19 00 11710 19 00 11725 19 00 11750

414

Volumetry Syringes Syringes, Hypodermic Needles BRAUN Disposable Syringes, IDL 1 INJEKT Disposable syringes with Luer tip. A low-price standard syringe for universal use, tested acc. to DIN 13098. Individually wrapped to be sterile. In packs of 100. Volume Order No. Volume ml 2 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 19 42 12002 19 42 12005 ml 10 20 Order No. 19 42 12010 19 42 12020 2 OMNIFIX® Disposable syringes with Luer tip. With natural rubber piston and double seal; a high-pre- cision syringe for special indications, DIN-tested. Individually wrapped to be sterile. In packs of 100. 1 Volume 3 ml 5 ml 10 ml 20 ml 1 ml, without needle ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 OMNIFIX® Wound and bladder syringes 3-part disposable syringe, with catheter approach. Single sterile packaging. Volume 100 ml 50/60 ml 50/60 ml Equipment Luer-Lock adapter Luer-Lock adapter without adapter Order No. 10 42 13501 10 42 13502 10 42 13503 Order No. 10 42 13003 19 42 13005 19 42 13010 19 42 13020 19 42 13101 4 2 3 4 OMNICAN® For exact dispensing of the smallest units, with rubber piston and double seal. Smooth action and exact dosing. 1 ml with 0.01 ml graduation. With integrated needle 0.30 × 12 mm. In packs of 100. Article OMNICAN F ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 10 42 11502 BRAUN Disposable Hypodermic Needles, IDL STERICAN® Disposable hypodermic needles with transparent Luer-Lock tip. Low-pain punction and minimal trauma thanks to special facet grinding, needle with thin wall. Color code for easy identification; indication-related sizes. Tested acc. to DIN 13097. Individually wrapped to be sterile. In packs of 100. Size Ø 1 2 12 14 Length mm 40 40 30 30 Order No. 19 42 10001 19 42 10002 19 42 10012 19 42 10014 mm 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 Size Ø Length mm 16 17 18 20 mm 0.60 25 0.55 25 0.45 25 0.40 20 Order No. 19 42 10016 19 42 10017 19 42 10018 19 42 10020 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Special needles In packs of 100. Ø mm Length mm 0.4 12 0.45 12 0.3 12 1.1 30 1.1 40 for Order No. Insulin 19 42 11001 Insulin 19 42 11002 G30×½ Insulin 19 42 11012 19 42 11004 19 42 11011 Ø mm Length mm 1.2 40 0.8 50 1.1 50 0.6 60 0.9 70 Order No. 19 42 11005 19 42 11006 19 42 11007 19 42 11008 19 42 11009 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 413

415

Volumetry Syringes Syringes, Hypodermic Needles Glass Syringes, Poulten & Graf FORTUNA® OPTIMA® all-glass syringes, for technical use only! Calibrated cylinders made of clear glass, all parts replaceable, piston end with amber mark, absolutely tight, sterilizable up to 134°C, exactly calibrated scale, indestructible amber graduation (dif- fused), in packs of 1. 1 Glass syringes with Luer glass cone, central Vol. Order No. Vol. ml 1 2 3 5 10 ml 1 2 3 5 10 Grad. ml 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 Grad. ml 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 ml 20 30 50 100 ml 20 30 50 100 Grad. ml 1 1 2 4 Grad. ml 1 1 2 4 Order No. 19 30 63601 19 30 63701 19 30 63801 19 30 63901 Order No. 19 30 63603 19 30 63703 19 30 63803 19 30 63903 19 30 63101 19 30 63201 19 30 63301 19 30 63401 19 30 63501 19 30 63103 19 30 63203 19 30 63303 19 30 63403 19 30 63503 2 GLASS SYRINGES WITH LUER-LOCK CONE, CENTRAL Vol. Order No. Vol. 1 2 High Precision Syringes, FORTUNA®, Poulten & Graf High-precision syringes made of neutral glass, long model, modified precision version in sizes 50 an 100 ml with calibrated cylinder made of clear glass. Screen-printed graduations in diffused amber stain resistant to acids and lyes. One to a pack. 3 Vol. Syringes with capellary tip, I.D. ca. 2,5 mm, O.D. 7,75 mm Grad. ml 1 ml 100 Order No. Vol. 19 30 10031 19 30 10041 Grad. ml 0.5 0.5 Order No. 19 30 10051 ml 25 50 4 Vol. ml 50 5 Volume ml 100 Syringes with attached capillary and stopcock, joint size 12,5, bore 2,5 mm Grad. ml 0.5 Order No. 19 30 10042 Vol. ml 100 Grad. ml 1 Order No. 19 30 10052 Syringe with attached three-way stopcock, joint size 12,5, bore 2,5 mm Graduation ml 1 Order No. 19 30 10053 Cream and Milk Syringes, Dinkelberg Analytics The cream and milk syringes by Dinkelberg analytics are tried and tested in the dairy sector and are used every day in the laboratories. They are made of nickel-plated brass and conformity assessed. In addition to the syringes, we also offer spare glass plungers: Send us your defective syringes, and we‘ll replace defective glass plungers at a reasonable price. Article Cream syringe 5.05 ml, conformity assessed Cream syringe 5.05 ml, conformity assessed, repair exchange Milk syringe 10.75 ml, conformity assessed Cream syringe 10.75 ml, conformity assessed, repair exchange Order No. 10 32 10850 10 32 10851 10 32 10864 10 32 10865 3 4 5 co d e b e w WWSU9055 414

416

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WWQED071 1 • Simple priming by optimized flow channels • Safe volume adjustment with internal scalloped track • Pivoted screw cap – does not disturb dispensing • A field-tested cleaning process before use in trace analysis is described in the operating • If contamination of the bottle contents must be avoided, we recommend using the de- vice without recirculation valve • The 45 mm standard thread plus the included adapters fit most common lab bottles • The valve block can be rotated 360° so that the bottle label always faces the user for valve manual safety Dispensers Dispensette® S Trace Analysis, Bottle Top Dispenser, BRAND 1 Dispensette® S Trace Analysis, bottle top dispenser The Dispensette® bottle-top dispensers is well-known for its wide variety of applications and provides premium dispensing options for the complete spectrum of liquid reagents. The new Dispensette® S Trace Analysis provides outstanding performance for precise volume dispensing of high-purity media for trace analysis. Also dispensing hydrofluoric acid is no problem with the platinum-iridium valve spring. General features of the Dispensette®S Trace Analysis bottle-top dispenser • Parts in contact with media consist of high-purity materials such as PTFE, ETFE, FEP, and PFA. The purest sapphire is used for replaceable valves. Depending on the appli- cation, platinum-iridium alloy or tantalum are available as spring materials. • New discharge tube, no additional sealing rings required, with and without recirculation • Telescoping filling tube adjusts easily to different bottle sizes • Easy disassembly for replacement of the dispensing cartridge Items supplied: Dispensette® S Trace Analysis, DE-M marking, with performance certificate, telescoping filling tube, recirculation tube (optional), mounting tool and bottle adapters GL 28 / S 28 (ETFE), GL 32 (ETFE) and S40 (PTFE). A P ± µl 50 50 CV P % 0.1 10 10 49 64240 0.1 10 10 49 64040 without recirculation valve Order No. Order No. 10 49 64241 10 49 64041 with recirculation valve A P ± % 0.5 0.5 Tantalum Platinum- ml ml 1 – 10 0.2 1 – 10 0.2 Valve spring Vol. Grad. CV P µl Iridium Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Error limits related to the nominal capacity (= maximum volume) indicated on the instrument, obtained when instrument and distilled water are equilibrated at ambient temperature (20°C/68°F). Testing takes place with uniform and smooth dispensing. The error limits of DIN EN ISO 8655-5 are well below. A = Accuracy, CV = Coefficient of variation. Accessories for Dispensette® S Trace Analysis 2 Discharge tubes With and without recirculation valve. Nominal volume 10 ml. Screw cap ETFE. Discharge tube marked with “Pt-Ir” or “Ta”. Pack of 1. 2 4 Valve spring Length mm Platinum-Iridium 105 105 Tantalum without recirculation valve Order No. 10 49 08022 10 49 08024 with recirculation valve Order No. 10 49 08122 10 49 08124 3 Dispensing cartridge with safety ring Nominal volume 10 ml. Calibrated, incl. quality certificate. Pack of 1. Article Dispensing cartridge with safety ring Order No. 10 49 08035 4 Telescoping filling tubes For Dispensette® S Trace Analysis. FEP. Adjusts to various bottle heights. Pack of 1. Length mm 70–140 125–240 195–350 250–480 Order No. 10 49 08210 10 49 08212 10 49 08214 10 49 08216 5 Bottle stand PP. Full plastic construction. Support rod 325 mm, base plate 220 × 160 mm, weight 1130 g. Pack of 1. Article Bottle stand Order No. 10 49 04275 6 Flexible discharge tube with recirculation valve For Dispensette® S, Dispensette® S Organic and Dispensette® S Trace Analysis. PTFE, coiled, length approx. 800 mm, with safety handle. With changeable colored valve lever (color-code red, yellow and grey). Must not be used with HF! Pack of 1. 3 5 Nominal volume ml 2/5/10 Outer Ø mm 3 Inner Ø mm 2 Order No. 10 49 08132 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 415

417

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WWQED003 1 2 3 416 4 Dispensers Dispensette® S, Bottle Top Dispenser, BRAND The bottle top dispenser Dispensette® is number 1 for dosing directly from the storage bottle. It is fully equipped to ensure safe and convenient dosing of fluids. The specifically designed piston makes drawing up and dispensing fluids from the Dispensette® particu- larly smooth and ergonomic. The volume is set easily and fixed safely. The bottle top dispenser Dispensette® has proven its worth in demanding permanent use, also with aggressive media. Three different models are available: Digital: The mechanical volume setting is easy to read and ensures accurate and reproducible volume control. Easy Calibration Technique for calibration adjustment in seconds without tools. A calibration flag indicates changes from factory settings Analog-adjustable: Rapid and safe volume setting with new internal scalloped track. Simple calibration ad- justment with supplied tool. Fixed-volume: For standard applications. Simple calibration adjustment with a supplied tool Ordering information/Items supplied: Dispensette® S / Dispensette® S Organic bottle-top dispenser, DE-M marking, with per- formance certificate, telescoping filling tube, recirculation valve and recirculation tube (optional), mounting tool and adapters of polypropylene. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Error limits according to the nominal capacity (= maximum volume) indicated on the instrument, obtained with instrument and distilled water at equi- librium with ambient temperature at 20°C, and with smooth, steady operation. The error limits are well within the limits of DIN EN ISO 8655-5. A = Accuracy, CV = Coefficient of variation. Model: Dispensette® S: Dispensette® S Organic: Yellow color-code. Ideal for dispensing organic solvents, in- Application: Red color-code. Wide range of practical applications, ideal for dispensing aggressive reagents, including concentrated bases and acids such as H3PO4, H2SO4 (with certain exceptions such as HCl, HNO3, HF, etc.), saline solutions, as well as many organic solvents. cluding chlorinated and fluorinated hydrocarbons (e.g., trichlo- rotrifluoroethane and dichloromethane), acids like concentrat- ed HCl and HNO3 (except HF), trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), tet- rahydrofuran (THF) and peroxides. ml 1 Dispensette® S, Digital, DE-M marking Volume Graduation ml 0.1–1 0.005 0.2–2 0.01 0.5–5 0.02 1–10 0.05 2.5–25 0.1 5–50 0.2 A P ± % 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 CV P % 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 without recirculating valve with recirculating valve Order No. 10 49 46310 10 49 46320 10 49 46330 10 49 46340 10 49 46350 10 49 46360 Order No. 10 49 46311 10 49 46321 10 49 46331 10 49 46341 10 49 46351 10 49 46361 ml 2 Dispensette® S, analog-adjustable, DE-M marking Volume Graduation ml 0.1–1 0.02 0.2–2 0.05 0.5–5 0.1 1–10 0.2 2.5–25 0.5 5–50 1.0 10–100 1.0 without recirculating valve Order No. 10 49 46100 10 49 46120 10 49 46130 10 49 46140 10 49 46150 10 49 46160 10 49 46170 A P ± % 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 CV P % 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 with recirculating valve Order No. 10 49 46101 10 49 46121 10 49 46131 10 49 46141 10 49 46151 10 49 46161 10 49 46171 3 Dispensette® S, fixed-volume, DE-M marking Volume without recirculating valve Order No. with recirculating valve Order No. CV A P P ± % % 0.1 0.5 0.1 0.5 0.1 0.5 0.5 0.1 — — ml 1 2 5 10 choice of fix. vol. 0.5–100 1) please state when ordering 10 49 46210 10 49 46220 10 49 46230 10 49 46240 10 49 46290 10 49 46211 10 49 46221 10 49 46231 10 49 46241 10 49 46291 Continued on next page

418

Dispensers Volumetry Dosing Devices ml 4 Dispensette® S Organic, digital, DE-M marking Graduation 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 A P ± Volume % ml 0.5 0.5–5 1–10 0.5 2.5–25 0.5 0.5 5–50 without recirculating valve Order No. 10 49 43330 10 49 43340 10 49 43350 10 49 43360 CV P % 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 ml 5 Dispensette® S Organic, analog-adjustable, DE-M marking Graduation Volume ml 0.1 0.5–5 1–10 0.2 2.5–25 0.5 5–50 1.0 10–100 1.0 without recirculating valve Order No. 10 49 43130 10 49 43140 10 49 43150 10 49 43160 10 49 43170 A P ± % 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 CV P % 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 6 Dispensette® S Organic, fixed-volume, DE-M marking 1) please state when ordering with recirculating valve Order No. 10 49 43331 10 49 43341 10 49 43351 10 49 43361 with recirculating valve Order No. 10 49 43131 10 49 43141 10 49 43151 10 49 43161 10 49 43171 Volume ml 5 10 choice of fix. vol. 2–100 A P ± % 0.5 0.5 — CV P % 0.1 0.1 — without recirculation valve Order No. with recirculation valve Order No. 10 49 43230 10 49 43240 10 49 43290 10 49 43231 10 49 43241 10 49 43291 Accessories for Dispensette® S / Dispensette® S Organic 7 Discharging tubes for Dispensette® S With and without recirculation valve. Screw cap PP. Pack of 1. ml Nominal volume 1, 2, 5, 10 5, 10 25, 50, 100 25, 50, 100 Version Length mm fine tip 108 standard 108 fine tip 125 standard 125 without recirculation valve with recirculation valve Order No. 10 49 78002 10 49 78005 10 49 78006 10 49 78008 Order No. 10 49 78102 10 49 78104 10 49 78106 10 49 78109 ml Version 8 Discharging tubes for Dispensette® S Organic Nominal volume 5, 10 5, 10 25, 50, 100 25, 50, 100 Length mm fine tip 108 standard 108 fine tip 125 standard 125 without recirculation valve with recirculation valve Order No. 10 49 78012 10 49 78014 10 49 78016 10 49 78019 Order No. 10 49 78112 10 49 78114 10 49 78116 10 49 78119 9 Telescoping filling tubes For Dispensette® S and Dispensette® S Organic. FEP. Adjusts to various bottle heights. Pack of 1. Nominal volume ml 1, 2, 5, 10 1, 2, 5, 10 1, 2, 5, 10 1, 2, 5, 10 25, 50, 100 25, 50, 100 Outer Ø mm 6 6 6 6 7.6 7.6 Length mm 70–140 125–240 195–350 250–480 170–330 250–480 Order No. 10 49 08210 10 49 08212 10 49 08214 10 49 08216 10 49 78218 10 49 78220 AT Flexible discharging tube with recirculation valve For Dispensette® S, Dispensette® S Organic and Dispensette® S Trace Analysis. PTFE, coiled, length 800 mm, with safety handle. With changeable colored valve lever (color- code red, yellow and grey). Must not be used with HF! Pack of 1. Nominal volume ml 2/5/10 25/50/100 Outer Ø mm 3 4.5 Inner Ø mm 2 3 AK Seal for valve block PTFE. For highly volatile reagents. Pack of 1. Article Seal for valve block Order No. 10 49 08132 10 49 78134 Order No. 10 49 74486 AL Bottle stand PP, full plastic material – suitable for use in aggressive environment (e.g. acid fumes in the hood), rod length 325 mm, base plate 220 × 160 mm, weight 1130 g. Article Bottle stand AM Drying tube Inclusive sealing ring. Pack of 1. Article Drying tube Order No. 10 49 04275 Order No. 10 49 77930 6 7 8 AK AM 5 7 8 9 AT AL co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 417

419

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WWQED093 co d e b e w WWQED017 Dispensers Withdrawal System Titrette® Titripac®, BRAND Withdrawal system Titrette® for Titripac® packaging system for ready-to-use volumetric solutions Article Withdrawal system Titrette® Order No. 10 49 77550 Bottle-Top Dispensers, BRAND 1 Bottle-top dispensers, seripettor® The low-cost dispensers for daily routine seripettor® and seripettor® pro are innovative bottle-top dispensers by BRAND featuring specially selected components. A lifting spring enables autonomous filling. In case of wear of the flask seal, the complete dispensing unit can be exchanged easily and hassle-free by the user. Expensive repairs are unnecessary! • Low-cost, exchangeable dispensing unit with strip-off flask seal - a replacement dis- pensing unit is included • Automatic filling - the autonomous lifting effect of the spring presses the flask up. Thus, the dispensing unit is automatically filled. • Volume setting - for error-free setting of the volume, the indicator latches in (rail). • If required, all function parts can be quickly and easily exchanged by the user without tools. The innovative concept of the seripettor® and seripettor® pro reduces the expens- es for cleaning and maintenance to a minimum. • Fits almost all common counter tops. seripettor® For dispensing aqueous solutions, (buffer and vitamin solutions, agar nutrient medium, up to a max. 60°C), weak, dilute acids, alkaline solutions (such as NaOH, KOH and ammonia) and polar solvents (e.g. ethanol, methanol, acetylacetone). seripettor®pro Enhanced area of application – for dispensing acids (such as concentrated HCl), polar solvents (such as acetone), essential oils and UV-sensitive reagents. Items supplied seripettor® / seripettor® pro, discharge tube, filling tube, spare dispensing cartridge and PP adapters (GL 45/32 and GL 45/S40). 1 3 418 2 Model seripettor® seripettor® seripettor® seripettor® pro seripettor® pro seripettor® pro Volume ml 0.2 – 2 1 – 10 2.5 – 25 0.2 – 2 1 – 10 2.5 – 25 Graduation ml 0.04 0.2 0.5 0.04 0.2 0.5 A P ± % 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 CV P % 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Order No. 10 49 72120 14 49 72140 14 49 72150 10 49 72420 10 49 72440 10 49 72450 Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Error limits according to the nominal capacity (= maximum volume) indicated on the instrument, obtained with instrument and distilled water at equi- librium with ambient temperature at 20 °C, and with smooth, steady operation. A = Accu- racy, CV = Coefficient of variation 2 Accessories for seripettor® and seripettor® pro Dispensing cartridges Non-sterile and sterile. Piston (PE), cylinder (PP). Article Dispensing cartridge, 2 ml, non-sterile Dispensing cartridge, 10 ml, non-sterile Dispensing cartridge, 25 ml, non-sterile Dispensing cartridge, 2 ml, sterile (single packed) Dispensing cartridge, 10 ml, sterile (single packed) Dispensing cartridge, 25 ml, sterile (single packed) Order No. 10 49 74501 14 49 74502 14 49 74504 10 49 74505 10 49 74506 10 49 74508 PU pc/Pack 3 3 3 7 7 5 Continued on next page

420

Volumetry Dosing Devices 5 7 Dispensers 3 Flexible discharge tubing PTFE, coiled, length 800 mm, with handle. Not suited for HF and peroxide. Article Discharge tubing, 2 ml + 10 ml Discharge tubing, 25 ml 4 Accessories for seripettor® Order No. 10 49 74522 10 49 74523 Filling tubes PP. Autoclavable design for sterile applications with additional O-rings. Article Filling tube, 250 mm Filling tube, 500 mm Filling tube with O-ring, 250 mm Filling tube with O-ring, 500 mm Order No. 10 49 74532 10 49 74534 10 49 74536 10 49 74538 PU pc/Pack 2 2 1 1 Discharge tube PP, incl. closure cap and EPDM discharge valve. Article Discharge tube, PP, fine tip, 2 ml Discharge tube, PP, Standard, 10 + 25 ml 5 Valve set 1 filling valve (filling valve body, O-ring) 1 discharge valve, 2 seals. Article Valve set 6 Telescoping filling tubes FEP. Adjusts to various bottle heights. Pack of 1. Order No. 10 49 74518 10 49 74520 Order No. 10 49 06790 Length mm 70–140 125–240 195–350 250–480 170–330 250–480 Nominal volume ml 1, 2, 5, 10 1, 2, 5, 10 1, 2, 5, 10 1, 2, 5, 10 25, 50, 100 25, 50, 100 Outer Ø mm 6 6 6 6 7.6 7.6 7 Filling valve with seal Article Filling valve with seal, 2 ml + 10 ml Filling valve with seal, 25 ml Adapter for filling valve with seal Discharge tube with integrated valve with seal. Article Discharge tube 2 ml Discharge tube, 10 ml Discharge tube, 25 ml Adapter for discharge tube with seal Order No. 10 49 08210 10 49 08212 10 49 08214 10 49 08216 10 49 78218 10 49 78220 Order No. 10 49 06697 10 49 06698 10 49 06707 Order No. 14 49 77915 14 49 77916 14 49 77918 10 49 06208 4 6 Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 419

421

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WWQED086 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w 420 Dispensers Repetitive Pipette HandyStep® touch, BRAND Repetitive pipette HandyStep® touch • Simple: touchscreen operation • Easy: compatible with tips from other manufacturers • Efficient: automatic tip ejection Repetitive pipettes are the first choice when it comes to efficient dispensing of long series. Positive displacement pipettes are often the right solution for pipetting viscous media. The new stepper HandyStep® touch from BRAND combines both features. With the touchscreen display, you conveniently swipe back and forth between functions and always have an overview of the essential information on your work steps. Operation is easy, even with protective gloves on. And speaking of easy, the days of manually changing tips are over. On the HandyStep® touch, lightly tapping on the Eject icon on the display is enough to eject the tip. The HandyStep® touch repetitive pipette automatically recognizes the volume of the new BRAND PD- Tips II. This saves time and reduces the risk of error. Tips from many other manufacturers can also be used, providing maximum flexibility. Charging is easy and ef- ficient: simply place the HandyStep® touch in the inductive charging stand and the battery automatically starts charging. Overview • Touchscreen operation with intuitive menu navigation in English, German, Spanish, French and Chinese • HandyStep® touch with the features multi-dispensing, auto-dispensing and pipetting; HandyStep® touch S with the additional features sequential dispensing, multi-aspiration and titration • Automatic size detection of BRAND PD-Tips II • Compatible with PD-Tips prior to the PD-Tips II generation and with tips from many other manufacturers: for example, Encode™ tips, Repet-Tips®, Combitips®, Combitips® plus, Combitips® advanced (the above-mentioned brands are property of their respec- tive owners) • Automatic tip ejection • Variable volume adjustment from 1.0 µl to 50 ml • Easy to clean thanks to smooth surface without grooves and edges • Inductively rechargeable Article HandyStep® touch, white Functions: multi-dispensing, auto-dispensing, pipetting and fa- vourites 1 HandyStep® touch S, black Functions: multi-dispensing, auto-dispensing, pipetting, se- quential dispensing, multi-aspiration, titration and favourites HandyStep® touch package, incl. charging stand, white Functions: multi-dispensing, auto-dispensing, pipetting and fa- vourites HandyStep® touch S package, incl. charging stand, black Functions: multi-dispensing, auto-dispensing, pipetting, se- quential dispensing, multi-aspiration, titration and favourites Order No. 10 49 75200 10 49 75210 10 49 75201 10 49 75211 Accessories Article 2 Charging stand, without universal AC adapter Support stand 3 Universal AC adapter Universal holder 4 Lithium ion battery Order No. 10 49 75220 10 49 75230 10 49 75250 10 49 75235 10 49 75225 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

422

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW4ZV019 1 2 Dispensers Dispensers, Hirschmann ceramus® classic, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600: featuring ceramic piston! ceramus® classic dispensers are high precision bottle dispensers that can be set in fixed increments for reproducible dosage of liquids. Six models cover the volume spectrum between 0.2 ml to 60 ml ab. Ceramic piston All ceramus® classic dispensers feature a special piston made of high-purity Al2O3 ceram- ic. The combination of this unique ceramic piston with a standardized DURAN® glass cylinder provides ideal conditions for best possible fit, guaranteeing long-term safety and precision. Advantages of the ceramic piston: • no wear • no swelling • no thermal problems Operation You simply turn the graduated collar in either direction to set the volume you want. To dispense, pull up the piston to the stop and press down. That‘s all you need to do. Safety Fixed-increment settings guarantee absolutely reproducible dosage. The latching mech- anism effectively prevents inadvertent volume misadjustment. Zero range security locking provides additional protection. A stable protective shell with integrated window provides effective protection against accidental glass breakage. All ceramus® classic dispensers can be steam sterilized up to 121°C / 2 bar if needed. Conformity ceramus® classic has declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600. Additional merits • Suction, ejection, and return valve are made of highly pure AI2O3 ceramic material (99.7%), are inert to the greatest possible extent as well as non-wearing. Easy to replace (mounting wrench supplied) • Guided discharge tube effectively prevents “snip effect” • Screw-doubled suction tube for 100% tightness during suction • Environment-friendly packaging, fully recyclable • Individual certificate with serial number and 12 months warranty • Use of high-grade materials (ECTFE, DURAN® glass, FEP) Scope of delivery ceramus® classic complete with thread A32, 3 thread adapters (A 28, A 45, and S 40), 1 suction hose with union nut, 1 ejector unit, 1 valve mounting wrench, single calibration certificate. 1 Variable volume Volume ml 0.2 – 1 0.4 – 2 1 – 5 2 – 10 5 – 30 10 – 60 Setting steps ml 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.25 0.50 1.00 Accuracy1) % 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 Variation coefficient1) % 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Order No. 14 37 00001 14 37 00002 14 37 00003 14 37 00004 14 37 00005 14 37 00006 1) In relation to the maximum volume. 2 Fixed volume Volume ml Accuracy1) % 1 2 5 10 25 50 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1) In relation to maximum volume. Variation coefficient1) % 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Order No. 14 37 00011 14 37 00012 14 37 00013 14 37 00016 14 37 00020 14 37 00023 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 421

423

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW4ZV032 1 2 3 422 Dispensers ceramus® Dispensers, Hirschmann ceramus®dispenser technology with ceramic piston and recirculation system ceramus® is a highly precise bottle dispenser with a broad range of application for dis- pensing nearly all liquids. Ceramic dispensing piston: ceramus® has a resistant special piston made of high-purity AI2O3. Advantages of the ceramic piston: • no abrasion • no swelling • no thermal problems High resistance to chemicals: • top-grade materials guarantee very high resistance to chemicals Best handling: • user-friendly recirculation system for fast venting without loss of reagent - good ecology and economy • latching setting ring for fast and extremely precise settings • ergonomic handle and excellent sliding properties of the dispensing piston facilitate operation for series dispensings Modern, well arranged design Precision and accuracy: • no re-calibration necessary thanks to a combination of self-latching settings and permanently calibrated volume steps • individual quality certificate acc. to DIN ISO 9000 ff., suitable for use as test equipment • with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600 Exemplary safety and choice of materials: • protective casing helps to prevent breakage of glass cylinders and dispensing bottles • screw-coupled suction tube prevents the formation of air bubbles during aspiration • the device is freely rotatable so the label on the supply bottle is always in view • guided discharge cannula prevents “snip effect” with the dispensing media User-friendliness • Suction, ejection, and return valve are made of highly pure AI2O3 ceramic material (99.7%), are inert to the greatest possible extent as well as non-wearing. Easy to replace (mounting wrench enclosed • Sterilizable with steam, also when fully assembled Additional merits: • Discharge unit available with Luer-Lock connection • Spiral discharge tube available for series dispensings • Venting of bottle via the Luer-Lock connection • Screw-coupled suction tube • Environment-friendly packaging, fully recycleable • 12-month manufacturer‘s warranty Items supplied: • ceramus® complete with thread A45, 3 thread adapters (A 32, A 38, and S 40), 1 suction hose with union nut, 1 ejector unit, 1 valve mounting wrench, single calibration certifi- cate. Special version for problematic media: • ceramus® HF is a special version for dispensing hydrofluoric acid and other aggressive media • Innovative dispensing system made of top-grade materials 1 ceramus® adjustable volume Volume ml 0.2 – 1.0 0.4 – 2.0 1.0 – 5.0 2.0 – 10.0 5.0 – 30.0 10.0 – 60.0 ml 1 2 5 10 25 50 Sub-division ml 0.05 0.05 0.10 0.25 0.50 1.00 Sub-division ml - - - - - - 2 ceramus® fixed volume Volume R % 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 R % 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 CV % 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 CV % 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Order No. 14 37 93120 14 37 93220 14 37 93320 14 37 93420 14 37 93520 14 37 93620 Order No. 14 37 93121 14 37 93221 14 37 93321 14 37 93421 14 37 93521 14 37 93621 Continued on next page

424

Dispensers Volumetry Dosing Devices 3 ceramus® HF Volume ml 2.0 – 10.0 Sub-division ml 0.25 R % 0.6 CV % 0.2 Order No. 14 37 93423 4 Thread adapter, ceramus® Thread adapter made of PP/ETFE for adapting standard internal threads (ceramus®, solarus® und akku-drive®) to bottle external thread. Thread adapter A 45 A 45 A 45 A 45 A 45 A 45 A 45 Accessories to A 28 A 38/430 A 32 A 28 A 38/430 A 38 S 40 Material PP PP ETFE ETFE ETFE ETFE ETFE Order No. 10 37 13523 10 37 13524 14 37 13621 10 37 13623 10 37 13624 14 37 13625 14 37 13627 Order No. for ceramus® classic up to 10 ml Article Discharge valve, ball Al2O3, platinum-iridium spring (HF) 14 37 16028 Discharge valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring 10 37 16010 Discharge valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring for ceramus® and ceramus® classic from 25 ml Suction valve, ball Al2O3, platinum-iridium spring (HF) Suction valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Suction valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Return valve, ball Al2O3, platinum-iridium spring (HF) Return valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Mounting wrench Ejection unit standard complete, with full-length cannula guide, suitable for 14 37 16626 10 37 16615 14 37 16901 14 37 13025 for ceramus® and ceramus® classic from 25 ml for ceramus® classic up to 10 ml 10 37 16015 14 37 16528 10 37 16510 10 37 16515 ceramus® 5 Ejection unit, flexible, spiral-shaped, length approx. 1 m 14 37 13027 Discharge unit, complete, with Luer-Lock connection 14 37 13028 adapter FEP/PP, suitable for all ceramus®-devices and akku-drive® Discharge unit with Luer-Lock connection Suction tube with fitting, 310 mm Suction tube with fitting, 400 mm Return tube with fitting, ceramus® only Bottle support Round filter- set (5 pieces) 10 37 13029 14 37 15005 14 37 15007 14 37 15125 10 37 93960 27 37 03704 4 5 Special Dispensers, Hirschmann The specialists: EM dispenser PP Version with precision-ground glass piston for unproblematic aqueous solutions and for organic media that do not attack polypropylene, available in 2 popular sizes. Operation • “Click-stop-latch mechanism” for reproducible variable volume settings. • Sterilizable to max. 121°C Conformity • With Certificate of Conformity pursuant to DIN 12600 • Manufactured with state-of-the-art production engineering pursuant to DIN ISO 9001 Items supplied: EM-dispenser PP, complete with screw thread A 32, 3 thread adapters (A 28, A 45 and S 40), 1 suction hose with union nut, 1 ejection unit, 1 valve mounting wrench, single calibration certificate. Volume ml 2 – 10 10 – 60 Setting steps ml 0.25 1.00 Accuracy % 0.6 0.6 Variation coefficient1) % 0.2 0.2 Order No. 14 37 34020 14 37 36020 1) Relative to the maximum volume. co d e b e w WW4ZV067 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 423

425

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW4ZV076 1 2 3 424 4 Dispensers opus® dispenser, Hirschmann 1 opus® dispenser Serial dispensing made easy. opus® dispenser for motor-operated dispensing directly out of the text bottle. Available in three volumes (10 ml, 20 ml and 50 ml). In connection with the touch screen and the software opus® dispenser, operation becomes really easy. By means of electronic motor control, opus is a very sensitive precision dispenser and displays great precision also during automatic serial dispensing. • Menu-structured, simple operation by means of index cards on the external, coloured TFT touch screen, which can also be read well in daylight • Various areas of application by using high-quality materials (ECTFE, DURAN® glass, FEP); media-structured parts can be steam-sterilised (121°) • User-friendly feedback system for quick venting without losing the reagent - good for • Up to 9999 dispensing repetitions can be set, pause time between individual dosages • Stepper function – dispensing several, also different volume settings from one cylinder environment and budget selectable to up to 9999 seconds filling (10 ml, 20 ml and 50 ml) saved • Hassle-free, individual calibration possibilities • Individual adjustment possibilities e.g. - Language selection (DE, UK, FR, ES) - Setting the suction speed and dispensing speed in ml/sec (adjustment to viscosity of the medium is possible) • Method memory, up to 9 different settings, e.g. volume, speed, cycle time,... can be • Accessories (selection): - Foot switch to trigger the dispensing process - Connection cable USB interface - Connection cable to touch screen available in 2000 mm and 5000 mm length, special lengths available - System platform made of silicone with bottle holder - Batteries as accessories for optional battery operation • Saving the last settings ensures quick continuing when switching system back on • With declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600 • Quality control according to DIN EN ISO 8655 • Valve seats and ball made of highly pure AL2O3 ceramics (99.7%) Items supplied: opus® dispenser, complete with screw thread A 45, 3 thread adapters (A 32, A 38 and S 40), 1 suction hose with union nut, return hose, dispenser ejection unit, valve mounting wrench, touch screen operating unit “dispenser”, brown light protection window, power pack, Data-Power cable, single calibration certificate. Article opus® dispenser, 10 ml opus® dispenser, 20 ml opus® dispenser, 50 ml Plug EU, US, UK EU, US, UK EU, US, UK R % 0.6 0.6 0.6 CV % 0.2 0.2 0.2 Order No. 10 37 81010 10 37 81020 10 37 81050 Accessories Article opus® system platform, grey Data power cable, length 0.75 m Data power cable, length 2 m Data power cable, length 5 m Connecting cable for serial interface, RS 232 Connecting cable USB Battery pack Screen protectors, 1 pack = 2 pieces Foot switch to trigger the dispensing process Adapter with NS 12/21 filling tube for funnel problem-free filling of medium through a funnel, without unscrewing the basic unit Ground adapter NS 29/32 2 Ejection unit with fine tip for direct reagent extraction from a ground bottle these even finer tips facilitate precision realisation of the finest droplets 3 Base support the base support enables suctioning of the medium directly from separate storage container using a tube the stand clip facilitates use of opus® in a stand assembly 4 Stand clip for fixing the basic unit Window inspection, amber Discharge valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Suction valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Return valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Order No. 10 37 86001 10 37 87001 10 37 87002 10 37 87003 14 37 64005 10 37 64006 10 37 87100 10 37 87200 10 37 64002 10 37 13741 10 37 13742 10 37 13041 10 37 96001 10 37 17003 10 37 86060 10 37 16015 10 37 16515 10 37 16615

426

Dispensers Dispensers FORTUNA® OPTIFIX®, Poulten & Graf Volumetry Dosing Devices Complete dispensing system for practically all applications. The benefits at a glance: • Optimum safety thanks to high-quality materials, excellent resistance even when dis- pensing aggressive media • Visible dispensing process • No sample contamination from metal parts such as springs • Wide volume range up to 500 ml for BASIC and SOLVENT dispensers • Ergonomic finger protection cap with Colour-Code system • Easy-to-move quick adjustment (up to 100 ml), fine adjustment by twisting, suitable for left- and right-hand use coat) firmed • Precision dispensing piston made of glass with PTFE coat (exception: SOLVENT - no • Precision dispensing piston made of glass with (except for model HF which is made of PTFE), plastic-coated, volume easy to read, easy to dismantle for cleaning • High accuracy, pursuant to EN ISO 8655-5, with individual certificate, conformity con- 1 FORTUNA® OPTIFIX® BASIC With PTFE shell on the dispensing piston, patented, 100% corrosion free, no metal or dye extractions. Application: For aqueous solutions, dilute acids and efflorescent substances. ml Vol. Grad. ml 0.1 0.5 – 2 1 – 5 0.1 2 – 10 0.2 5 – 30 0.5 10 – 50 1.0 Order No. 14 30 12002 14 30 12003 14 30 12004 14 30 12005 14 30 12006 Vol. Grad. ml ml 20 – 100 2.0 40 – 200 5.0 60 – 300 5.0 100 – 500 5.0 Order No. 14 30 12007 14 30 12008 14 30 12009 14 30 12010 2 FORTUNA® OPTIFIX® SOLVENT Glass dispensing piston, precision ground. Other technical details as for OPTIFIX® BA- SIC model. Application: Mainly for organic solvents and media that cause PTFE to swell. ml Vol. Grad. ml 0.1 0.5 – 2 1 – 5 0.1 2 – 10 0.2 5 – 30 0.5 10 – 50 1.0 Order No. 14 30 13027 14 30 13033 14 30 13038 14 30 13044 14 30 13048 Vol. Grad. ml ml 20 – 100 2.0 40 – 200 5.0 60 – 300 5.0 100 – 500 5.0 Order No. 14 30 13051 14 30 13053 14 30 13056 14 30 13058 3 FORTUNA® OPTIFIX® SAFETY Glass dispensing piston, PTFE shell, includes lip seal at piston end. Use PTFE adapter only. Application: For strong acids (except HF) and aggressive chemicals. Vol. ml 0.5 – 2 1 – 5 2 – 10 Grad. ml 0.1 0.1 0.2 Order No. 14 30 43000 14 30 43033 14 30 43001 Vol. ml 5 – 30 10 – 50 20 – 100 Grad. ml 0.5 1.0 2.0 Order No. 14 30 43044 14 30 43002 14 30 43051 4 FORTUNA® OPTIFIX® SAFETY S With safety cock, glass dispensing piston, solid PTFE shell, includes lip seal at piston end. A PTFE ball valve in the venting channel of the valve block prevents the escape of acid vapors and smells from the storage container. Use PTFE adapter only. Application: For dosing of fuming acids and other aggressive chemicals. 1 3 2 4 Vol. ml 0.5 – 2 1 – 5 2 – 10 Grad. ml 0.1 0.1 0.2 co d e b e w Order No. 10 30 14027 10 30 14033 10 30 14038 Vol. ml 5 – 30 10 – 50 20 – 100 Grad. ml 0.5 1.0 2.0 Order No. 10 30 14044 10 30 14048 10 30 14051 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 425

427

Volumetry Dosing Devices 1 1 Dispensers FORTUNA UNIVERSAL® OPTIFIX® HF Dispensing cylinder made of pure PTFE. PTFE dispensing piston core, includes lip seal at piston end. A PTFE ball valve in the valve block breather channel prevents the escape of acidic vapor from the supply container. Use PTFE adapter only. Application: Specifically for hydrofluoric acid; suitable for all media that can be dosed with the OPTIFIX® dispensers. Volume ml 1 – 5 2 – 10 5 – 30 10 – 50 Graduation ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1.0 Order No. 10 30 10633 14 30 40000 14 30 40001 10 30 10648 Standard equipment on all models: Dispenser, without bottle, with one PTFE intake suction tube, 2 PTFE GL 40 adapters, GL 45 for SAFETY and HF models, or 2 adapters from PP for BASIC and SOLVENT models, in non-breakable single carton packaging. Conformity certified, a precision certificate listing accuracy and precision is included with every dispenser. Dispenser FORTUNA® POLYFIX®, Poulten & Graf POLYFIX® plastic dispensers with glass dispensing cylinder, coated with polypropylene (PP). For safety reasons, valve block unit cannot be removed. For dispensing of all media to which polypropylene is resistant. The range of POLYFIX® dispensers has been extend- ed by two new models. Now, the POLYFIX® dispenser will be available either with glass piston or PTFE-coated piston, or with clear glass or brown glass cylinder. 2 2 FORTUNA® POLYFIX® dispenser with glass piston Technical data: • Conformity certified • Manufactured acc. to DIN EN ISO 9001 • Precision dispensing piston made of glass • Precision glass cylinder, vacuum calibrated, plastic coated, visible dispensing operation • Finger guard cap of ergonomic design, resistant markings applied by high-tech laser • Smooth and fast adjustment by sliding, fine adjustment for twisting, for left-handed and method right-handed users required on the reagent bottle. polopropylene is resistant) • PP valve block. With the new FIX adapter you can turn the dispenser into any position • Application: For dispensing aqueous solutions and weak acids (for all media to which 3 Volume ml 2 – 10 10 – 50 Graduation ml 0.2 1.0 Order No. 14 30 07038 14 30 07048 Replacement parts Version glass flask, 10 ml glass flask, 50 ml Valve block unit Order No. 14 30 07538 14 30 07548 Spare flask Order No. 14 30 07738 14 30 07748 3 FORTUNA® POLYFIX® Dispenser with PTFE-coated piston As before, but with PTFE coated piston. Application: For dispensing of acids and alkaline solutions that do not attack polypropyl- ene. Volume ml 2 – 10 10 – 50 Graduation ml 0.2 1.0 Order No. 10 30 17138 10 30 17148 Replacement parts Version PTFE coated flask, 10 ml PTFE coated flask, 50 ml Valve block unit Order No. 14 30 07538 14 30 07548 Spare flask Order No. 10 30 17838 10 30 17848 Continued on next page 426

428

4 Dispensers FORTUNA® POLYFIX® Dispenser with amber glass cylinder As before, but with amber dispensing cylinder made of glass. Application: For dispensing light sensitive liquids that do not attack polypropylene. Volume ml 2 – 10 10 – 50 Graduation ml 0.2 1.0 Order No. 10 30 17238 10 30 17248 Replacement parts Version amber glass cylinder, 10 ml amber glass cylinder, 50 ml Valve block unit Order No. 10 30 17938 10 30 17948 Spare flask Order No. 14 30 07738 14 30 07748 Volumetry Dosing Devices 4 5 Automatic Dispensing Station, FORTUNA® OPTIMAT® 3, Poulten & Graf Dispensing station FORTUNA® OPTIMAT® 3 For user-friendly operating comfort and better reading precision, the colored touch screen of the OPTIMAT® dosing station has been greatly enlarged. The revised software provides an even easier handling. Benefits: • Designed for continuous day-in day-out service • Guarantees precision at the highest stage • Dispenses even difficult and aggressive liquids • Extremely robust • Qualified for non-corrosive and non-contaminative dispensing Article Automatic dispensing station FORTUNA® OPTIMAT® 3 suitable for 1 dispensing pump, with RS 232-connection interface Order No. 10 30 11503 6 FORTUNA® OPTIMAT® dispensing pumps For all liquids that can be handled with the OPTIFIX dispensers (incl. strong fuming acids and very abrasive liquids) with the exception of hydrofluoric acid. Intake and discharge tube sets are not included. Volume ml 0 – 2 0 – 10 0 – 30 0 – 50 0 – 100 0 – 200 0 – 300 Graduation ml 0.1 0.2 0.5 1,0 2,0 5,0 5,0 Accuracy % P ± 0.6 P ± 0.6 P ± 0.6 P ± 0.6 P ± 0.6 P ± 0.6 P ± 0.6 Tolerance % P ± 0.2 P ± 0.2 P ± 0.2 P ± 0.2 P ± 0.2 P ± 0.2 P ± 0.2 max. V – ml/s 1.90 3.35 9.60 15.20 24.30 31.30 31.80 Order No. 10 30 12627 10 30 12638 10 30 12644 10 30 12648 10 30 12651 10 30 12653 10 30 12656 7 Intake tube for FORTUNA® OPTIMAT® dispensing pumps Length 1 m, made of PTFE or silicone Volume ml 2/10 30 – 300 30 – 300 Material PTFE PTFE silicone Order No. 10 30 13202 10 30 13204 10 30 13206 Discharge tubes made from PTFE for FORTUNA® OPTIMAT® dispensing pumps 8 Volume 2/10 30 – 300 ml 0.75 m Order No. 10 30 13402 10 30 13404 1.50 m Order No. 10 30 13403 10 30 13405 5 6 7 8 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 427

429

Volumetry Dosing Devices 1 2 428 Dispensers Bottle-Top Dispenser VITLAB® simplex2, VITLAB Simple and safe handling have made this bottle-top dispenser so popular. 1 Bottle-Top Dispenser VITLAB® simplex2 Drawing quantities of liquids from large supply bottles is a daily routine in the lab. This manual task must be carried out quickly, accurately, reproducibly, simply and safely. VITLAB® simplex2 bottle-top dispensers are a family of instruments with proven precision that offer many advantages in routine liquid-handling operations. The positive displace- ment piston in this instrument is equipped with a fluoroplastic (PFA) sealing lip on the cylinder wall. This acts like a windscreen wiper to prevent crystal build-up on the cylinder wall from readily crystallisable media. The glass cylinder is also coated with a plastic material that reduces the risk of splashes should breakage occur. The telescopic filling tube can be adjusted smoothly to the height of the bottle. Since the materials in contact with the media (borosilicate glass, Al2O3 ceramic, FEP, ETFE, PFA, PTFE, PP, platinum-iridium) are resistant to most acids, bases, and solvents, VITLAB® simplex2 bottle-top dispensers can be used in practically any operation. The VITLAB® simplex2 is completely autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Included in delivery: VITLAB® simplex2 with 3 respectively 5 threaded adapters made of PP. Nominal volumes of 2 – 10 ml (screw coupling GL 45) with adapters GL 25, GL 28, GL 32, GL 38, S 40 and telescopic intake tube length 125 to 240 mm. Nominal volumes of 25 – 100 ml (screw coupling GL 45) with adapters GL 32, GL 38, S 40 and telescopic intake tube length 170 to 330 mm. Mounting tool, instruction manual, and quality certificate stating all test values. Volume ml 0.2 – 2.0 0.5 – 5.0 1.0 – 10.0 2.5 – 25.0 5.0 – 50.0 10.0 – 100.0 Graduation ml 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.50 1.00 1.00 A P ± % 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 A P ± µl 10 25 50 125 250 500 CV P % 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 CV P µl 2 5 10 25 50 100 Order No. 10 85 38503 10 85 38504 10 85 38505 10 85 38506 10 85 38507 10 85 38508 Error limits according to DIN EN ISO 8655-5, related to the nominal (maximum) volume marked on the device where the device, environment and distilled H2O are at the same temperature (20°C). Checks are done in accordance with DIN EN ISO 8655-6 with the device filled to capacity and with uniform and jolt-free dosing. 2 Bottle-Top Dispenser VITLAB® simplex2 fix Drawing quantities of liquids from large supply bottles is a daily routine in the lab. This manual task must be carried out quickly, accurately, reproducibly, simply and safely. VITLAB® simplex2 bottle-top dispensers are a family of instruments with proven precision that offer many advantages in routine liquid-handling operations. The positive displace- ment piston in this instrument is equipped with a fluoroplastic (PFA) sealing lip on the cylinder wall. This acts like a windscreen wiper to prevent crystal build-up on the cylinder wall from readily crystallisable media. The glass cylinder is also coated with a plastic material that reduces the risk of splashes should breakage occur. The telescopic filling tube can be adjusted smoothly to the height of the bottle. Since the materials in contact with the media (borosilicate glass, Al2O3 ceramic, FEP, ETFE, PFA, PTFE, platinum-iridium, PP) are resistant to most acids, bases, and solvents, VITLAB® simplex2 bottle-top dispensers can be used in practically any operation. The VITLAB® simplex2 is completely autoclavable at 121 °C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. • Fixed preset volume • Accuracy = ±0.5%, at nominal value 1.0 ml = ±1% • Variations coefficient = 0.1%, at nominal value 1.0 ml = 0.2% Included in delivery: VITLAB® simplex2 fix with 5 threaded adapters made from PP. Nominal volumes of 1 – 10 ml (screw coupling GL 45) with adapters GL 25, GL 28, GL 32, GL 38, S 40 and and telescopic intake tube length 125 to 240 mm. Mounting tool, instruction manual, and quality certificate stating all test values. Volume ml 1.0 5.0 10.0 A P ± % 1,0 0,5 0,5 A P ± µl 10 25 50 CV P % 0,2 0,1 0,1 CV P µl 2 5 10 Order No. 10 85 32502 10 85 37504 10 85 37505 Error limits according to DIN EN ISO 8655-5, related to the nominal (maximum) volume marked on the device where the device, environment and distilled H2O are at the same temperature (20°C). Checks are done in accordance with DIN EN ISO 8655-6 with the device filled to capacity and with uniform and jolt-free dosing. Continued on next page

430

Volumetry Dosing Devices Dispensers 3 Bottle-Top Dispenser VITLAB® genius2 VITLAB® genius2 bottle-top dispensers are a family of instruments with proven precision that offer many advantages in routine liquid-handling operations. VITLAB® genius2 instruments can be used in practically any operation, since the materials that come into in contact with media (borosilicate glass, Al2O3 ceramic, FEP, ETFE, PFA, PTFE, platinum-iridium, PP) are resistant to most acids, bases, and solvents. Reagent loss while ventilating is avoided with the innovative recirculation valve. The simple-to-use cali- bration function helps meet all the requirements for test equipment monitoring without downtime. VITLAB® genius2 is equipped with a positive displacement piston and a fluoroplastic (PFA) sealing lip on the cylinder wall. The latter acts like a windscreen wiper to prevent crystal build-up on the cylinder wall from readily crystallisable media. The glass cylinder is also coated with a plastic material that reduces the risk of splashes should breakage occur. The telescopic filling tube can be adjusted smoothly to different bottle heights. The VITLAB® genius2 is completely autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar) according to DIN EN 285. Included in delivery: VITLAB® genius with 3 respectively 5 threaded adapters made of PP. Nominal volumes of 2 – 10 ml (screw coupling GL 45) with adapters GL 25, GL 28, GL 32, GL 38, S 40 and telescopic intake tube length 125 to 240 mm. Nominal volumes of 25 – 100 ml (screw coupling GL 45) with adapters GL 32, GL 38, S 40 and telescopic intake tube length 170 to 330 mm. Recirculation tube, mounting tool, instruction manual, and quality certificate. ml Volume Graduation ml 0.2 – 2.0 0.05 0.5 – 5.0 0.10 1.0 – 10.0 0.20 2.5 – 25.0 0.50 5.0 – 50.0 1.00 10.0 – 100.0 1.00 Thread GL 45 45 45 45 45 45 A P ± % 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 A P ± µl 10 25 50 125 250 500 CV P % 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 CV P µl 2 5 10 25 50 100 Order No. 10 85 39503 10 85 39504 10 85 39505 10 85 39506 10 85 39507 10 85 39508 3 Error limits according to DIN EN ISO 8655-5, related to the nominal (maximum) volume marked on the device where the device, environment and distilled H2O are at the same temperature (20°C). Checks are done in accordance with DIN EN ISO 8655-6 with the device filled to capacity and with uniform and jolt-free dosing. Drying tube for VITLAB® genius2 und simplex2 PP, transparent, unfilled, with PTFE seal ring. Can be connected directly to the burette. Article Drying tube, PP, unfilled Order No. 10 85 31095 Bottle-Top Dispenser VITLAB® piccolo, VITLAB For dispensing tiny quantities of liquids in all areas of biochemical and medical research. Even the smallest quantities can be dispensed directly from the bottle with the VITLAB® piccolo – a big help, particularly for serial dispensing operations. Special advantage: Disposable tips are unnecessary. This reduces costs. The ergonomic design makes dispensing effortless and stress-free. The VITLAB® piccolo can be operated with only one hand. Use the thumb to depress the volume dispensing button, just as with a pipette, and a reset mechanism refills the volume automatically. The discharge tube can be rotated over 360° so that it is always optimally situated with respect to the bottle label. The bottle-top dispensers VITLAB®piccolo 1 and 2 are primarily used for aqueous and heavily diluted media. Checks are done in accordance with DIN EN ISO 8655-6 with the device filled to capacity and with uniform and jolt-free dosing. • VITLAB®piccolo 1 with a fixed volume • VITLAB®piccolo 2 with two fixed volumes Included in delivery: VITLAB® piccolo 1 or 2 (GL 28 connecting threads), mounting tool, quality certificate and instruction manual. 4 Type piccolo 1 piccolo 1 piccolo 1 piccolo 1 piccolo 1 piccolo 2 piccolo 2 piccolo 2 Volume µl 100 200 250 500 1000 100/250 500/1000 1000/2000 A P ± % 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 co d e b e w 4 CV P % 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.2 Order No. 10 85 31601 10 85 31602 10 85 31603 10 85 31604 10 85 31605 10 85 31606 10 85 31607 10 85 31608 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 429

431

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW4ZV021 co d e b e w WW4ZV023 430 Dispensers Bottle-Top Dispenser VITLAB® TA2, VITLAB The VITLAB® TA2 dispenser was developed specifically to meet the high purity require- ments in trace analysis. By using highly pure materials and employing a special cleaning procedure, well proven in practice, before the application of the dispenser, it is possible to reduce the release of trace metal to the low ppb and for some applications even to the ppt range. The parts that are in contact with media are made of various fluoroplastics (e.g. ETFE, FEP, PFA, PTFE), Al2O3 sapphire, platinum-iridium or tantalum (depending on the version). The outstanding chemical resistance of the materials used makes the new dispenser suitable for applications involving highly concentrated acids and alkalis, such as perchlo- ric acid, acid sulphur, and azotic acid. Choose between two different valve spring systems to match your application: The VITLAB® TA2 with tantalum spring is intended for dosing hydrogen peroxide (H2O2). For applications with sodium hydroxide (max. concentration 30%) and hydrofluoric acid (HF), we recommend the platinum iridium spring. To deep the loss of valuable reagents or sample solutions to a minimum, the dispenser is optionally available with a redosing valve. Included in delivery: VITLAB® TA2 dispenser with adjustable variable volumes, certified compliant according to DIN 12600, with quality certificate, telescoping filling tube, mounting tool, GL 28/S 28 (ETFE), GL 32 (ETFE), and S 40 (PTFE) bottle adapters, and instruction manual. Optional- ly with or without recirculation valve. Volume ml Valve spring 1.0 – 10.0 Pt-Ir 1.0 – 10.0 Pt-Ir 1.0 – 10.0 Ta 1.0 – 10.0 Ta Recirculation no yes no yes Increment ml 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 A P ± % 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 CV P % 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Order No. 10 85 37515 10 85 37525 10 85 37535 10 85 37545 Error limits according to DIN EN ISO 8655-5, based on nominal volume (= maximum volume) printed on the instrument if the instrument, the environment and dist. H2O are at the same temperature (20°C). Testing takes place according DIN EN ISO 8655-6 with a completely filled instrument and with uniform and smooth dispensing. Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Burettes, Hirschmann Burettes with straight stopcock with glass key joint size12.5, with dated batch iden- tification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, clear glass with Schellbachline, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, graduation and printing in blue durable ceramic stain. Volume Graduation Tol. ± ml 10 25 50 ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 1) Waiting time 30 s. ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Flow time s 35 – 451) 35 – 451) 35 – 451) Order No. PU pc/Pack 14 79 41256 14 79 41265 14 79 41272 2 2 2 Burettes, Hirschmann Burettes with lateral stopcock with glass key joint size 12.5, with dated batch iden- tification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, clear glass, with Schellbachline, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, graduation and printing in blue durable ceramic stain. Volume Graduation Tol. ± ml 10 25 50 ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 1) Waiting time 30 s. ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Flow time s 35 – 451) 35 – 451) 35 – 451) Order No. PU pc/Pack 14 79 44256 14 79 44265 14 79 44272 2 2 2

432

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW4ZV024 co d e b e w WW4ZV022 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Burettes, Hirschmann Burettes with lateral valve stopcock with PTFE spindle, with dated batch identifica- tion, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring gradua- tion, DURAN®, clear glass, with Schellbachline, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, graduation and printing in blue durable ceramic stain. Volume Graduation Tol. ± ml 10 25 50 ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 1) Waiting time 30 s. ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Flow time s 35 – 451) 35 – 451) 35 – 451) Order No. PU pc/Pack 14 79 46256 14 79 46265 14 79 46272 2 2 2 Burettes, Hirschmann Burettes with straight valve with PTFE spindle joint size 12.5, with dated batch iden- tification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, clear glass with Schellbachline, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, graduation and printing in blue ceramic stain. Volume Graduation Tol. ± ml 10 25 50 ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 1) Waiting time 30 s. ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Flow time s 35 – 451) 35 – 451) 35 – 451) Order No. PU pc/Pack 14 79 42256 14 79 42265 14 79 42272 2 2 2 Compact Automatic Burettes, BRAND The modular automatic burette concept. • With PTFE stopcock • Fast to dismantle and easy to clean • Simple repair - all individual components replaceable 1 Compact automatic burettes, BLAUBRAND®, with glass bottle, class AS, DE-M co d e b e w WWQED064 marked Boro 3.3, detachable PTFE stopcock. DIN EN ISO 385. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Incl. one batch certificate. Items supplied: Burette tube with Schellbach stripe and automatic zeroing, stopcock with precision tip, filling tube (PVC, transparent), pumphead and 2000 ml bottle (soda-lime glass). Increment Order No. Volume ml 10 25 50 0.02 0.05 0.1 Please order supports, burette clamps and rubber bellows separately. On request, they are available with an USP individual certificate. Error limit ± ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Length mm 775 785 790 10 49 23919 10 49 23920 10 49 23921 2 Compact automatic burettes, BLAUBRAND®, with PE bottle, class AS, DE-M marked Boro 3.3, detachable PTFE stopcock. DIN EN ISO 385. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Incl. one batch certificate. Items supplied: Burette tube with Schellbach stripe and automatic zeroing, stopcock with precision tip, filling tube (PVC, transparent) and 1000 ml PE-bottle with base. 1 Volume ml 10 25 50 Graduation ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Length mm 775 785 790 Order No. 10 49 23813 10 49 23816 10 49 23818 Please order supports, burette clamps and rubber bellows separately. On request, they are available with an USP individual certificate. 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 431 Continued on next page

433

Volumetry Dosing Devices 1 1 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Compact automatic burettes, SILBERBRAND, with PE bottle AR-Glas®, detachable PTFE stopcock. Error limits according to class B, DIN EN ISO 385. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Items supplied: Burette tube with Schellbach stripe and automatic zeroing, stopcock with precision tip, filling tube (PVC, transparent) and 1000 ml PE-bottle with base. Volume ml 101) 251) 501) Graduation ml 0.05 0.1 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.05 0.08 0.1 Length mm 445 520 730 Order No. 10 49 23803 10 49 23806 10 49 23808 1) reduced distance between subdivision marks Please order supports and burette clamps separately. 2 Compact automatic burettes, amber glass, SILBERBRAND, with PE bottle Borosilicate glass 5.4, detachable PTFE stopcock. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). 25 ml: Error limit according to class B, DIN EN ISO 385. 50 ml: DIN EN ISO 385, class B. Items supplied: Burette tube with white graduation and automatic zeroing, stopcock with precision tip, filling tube (PVC, transparent) and brown 1000 ml PE-bottle with base. Volume ml 251) 50 Graduation ml 0.1 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.08 0.1 Length mm 495 780 Order No. 10 49 23826 10 49 23828 1) reduced distance between subdivision marks Please order supports and burette clamps separately. 2 3 Spare burette tubes for Compact automatic burettes with automatic zeroing 3 4 5 6 7 8 432 9 BLAUBRAND®, incl batch certificate. Version BLAUBRAND®, Boro 3.3 BLAUBRAND®, Boro 3.3 BLAUBRAND®, Boro 3.3 SILBERBRAND, AR-Glas® SILBERBRAND, AR-Glas® SILBERBRAND, AR-Glas® SILBERBRAND, amber glass SILBERBRAND, amber glass Volume ml 10 25 50 101) 251) 501) 251) 50 1) reduced distance between subdivision marks Length mm 680 690 695 360 425 635 400 685 Order No. 10 49 23843 10 49 23846 10 49 23848 10 49 23833 10 49 23836 10 49 23838 10 49 23866 10 49 23868 Spare burette stopcock for all Compact burettes and Compact automatic burettes PTFE. With screw couplings and seals, without burette tip. Article 4 Spare burette stopcock, PTFE Order No. 10 49 11805 Spare burette tips for all Compact burettes and Compact automatic burettes for burettes ml 5 clear glass 10 ml clear glass 25 ml clear glass 50 ml amber glass 25 / 50 ml Version clear glass, Boro 3.3 clear glass, Boro 3.3 clear glass, Boro 3.3 amber glass, Boro 5.4 Order No. 10 49 11510 10 49 11511 10 49 11512 10 49 11515 Spare filling tube PVC, transparent. Inner-Ø 5 mm, Outer-Ø 7 mm, length 1 m. Article Spare filling tube, PVC, transparent Order No. 10 49 11525 6 Reservoir bottles, PE-LD Narrow-mouth bottle with tube bushing. Volume ml 500 1000 1000, amber Ø mm 75 94 94 Height mm 180 212 212 Thread GL 25 GL 28 GL 28 Order No. 10 49 29055 10 49 12906 10 49 13026 Continued on next page

434

Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Reservoir bottles, glass Boro 3.3 or soda-lime glass. Available in clear or amber glass. Capacity 2000 ml. 7 Volume ml 2000 2000 2000 2000 Height Ø mm mm 160 200 160 200 160 200 160 200 Ground joint NS 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 Version Order No. Boro 3.3, clear glass 10 49 23310 Boro 3.3, amber glass 10 49 23320 Soda-lime glass, clear glass 10 49 26965 Soda-lime glass, amber glass 10 49 27065 Pumphead for glass reservoir bottle For compact automatic burettes. Boro 3.3. NS 29/32. Fitting length 185 mm. Nozzle outer diameter 7 mm. Article 8 Pump head for glass reservoir bottle, clear glass 9 Pump head for glass reservoir bottle, amber glass Order No. 10 49 23875 10 49 23876 Rubber bellows for automatic burettes Orange colored, single-bulb rubber bellows. With valve and tubing. Article AT Rubber bellows for automatic burettes Joint clip Stainless-steel. Neck size 29/32. Article AK Joint clip Order No. 10 49 23400 Order No. 10 49 55618 Volumetry Dosing Devices AK AM AT AL Burette support for compact automatic burettes Base plate: PP. Rubber feet for stability and protection of table top. Support rod: Steel alloy. Length base plate mm AL 210 Width base plate mm 155 Rod length mm 505 Rod Ø mm 12 Order No. 10 49 23880 Base for bottles AM Article Base for plastic bottles 500 ml Base for plastic bottles 1000 ml Bottle Ø mm 75 94 Order No. 10 49 23725 10 49 23728 Compact Burettes, BRAND The modular automatic burette concept. • With PTFE stopcock • Fast to dismantle and easy to clean • Simple repair - all individual components replaceable Compact burettes, BLAUBRAND® Boro 3.3, removable PTFE stopcock. Class AS, DE-M marked. To DIN EN ISO 385. Cali- brated to deliver (TD, Ex). Items supplied: Burette tube with Schellbach stripe; Stopcock with precision tip. Incl. one batch certificate. Volume ml AN 10 25 50 Graduation ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Length mm 795 800 800 Order No. 10 49 13913 10 49 13916 10 49 13918 Compact burettes, SILBERBRAND AR-Glas®, removable PTFE stopcock. Error limits according to class B, DIN EN ISO 385. Distance between subdivision marks.Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Items supplied: Bu- rette tube with Schellbach stripe; Stopcock with precision tip. co d e b e w WWQED063 Volume ml AO 10 25 50 Graduation ml 0.05 0.1 0.1 co d e b e w Error limit ± ml 0.05 0.08 0.1 Length mm 445 510 710 Order No. 10 49 13903 10 49 13906 10 49 13908 Continued on next page AN AO To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 433

435

Volumetry Dosing Devices 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WW4ZV027 5 434 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Compact burettess, amber glass, SILBERBRAND Borosilicate glass 5.4, removable PTFE stopcock. 25 ml: Error limits according to class B, DIN EN ISO 385. Distance between subdivision marks. 50 ml: To DIN EN ISO 385, class B. Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Items supplied: Burette tube with white graduation; Stop- cock with precision tip. Volume ml 1 25 50 Graduation ml 0.1 0.1 Error limit ± ml 0.08 0.1 Length mm 520 790 Order No. 10 49 13926 10 49 13928 Spare burette tubes for the Compact burette Version 2 BLAUBRAND®, Boro 3.3 BLAUBRAND®, Boro 3.3 BLAUBRAND®, Boro 3.3 SILBERBRAND, AR-Glas® SILBERBRAND, AR-Glas® SILBERBRAND, AR-Glas® SILBERBRAND, amber glass SILBERBRAND, amber glass Volume ml 10 25 50 101) 251) 501) 251) 50 Length mm 700 705 705 350 410 610 425 695 Order No. 10 49 13943 10 49 13946 10 49 13948 10 49 13933 10 49 13936 10 49 13938 10 49 13956 10 49 13958 1) Distance between subdivision marks Spare burette stopcock for all Compact burettes and Compact automatic burettes PTFE. With screw couplings and seals, without burette tip. Article 3 Spare burette stopcock, PTFE Order No. 10 49 11805 Order No. 10 49 11510 10 49 11511 10 49 11512 10 49 11515 Spare burette tips for all Compact burettes and Compact automatic burettes for burettes ml 4 clear glass 10 ml clear glass 25 ml clear glass 50 ml amber glass 25 / 50 ml Version clear glass, Boro 3.3 clear glass, Boro 3.3 clear glass, Boro 3.3 amber glass, Boro 5.4 Micro-Burettes, Hirschmann Micro-burettes acc. to Bang with straight stopcock, glass key with standard ground joint size 12 Stopcock at the filling tube with glass key, with dated batch identification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, with Schellbachline, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385. Graduation and printing in blue durable ceramic stain. Volume Graduation Tol. ± ml 2 5 5 101) ml 0.01 0.02 0.02 ml 0.01 0.01 0.02 1) In addition to DIN size Waiting time 30 s Flow time s 8 – 20 15 – 25 35 – 45 Order No. PU pc/Pack 14 81 48134 14 81 48146 14 81 48156 2 2 2 Micro-burettes acc. to Bang with straight stopcock with PTFE key with standard ground joint size 12 Stopcock at the filling tube with PTFE key joint size 12, with dated batch identifica- tion, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385. Graduation and printing in blue durable ceramic stain, with Schellbachline. Volume Graduation Tol. ± ml 2 5 101) ml 0.01 0.02 0.02 ml 0.01 0.01 0.02 1) In addition to DIN size Waiting time 30 s Flow time s 8 – 20 15 – 25 35 – 45 Order No. PU pc/Pack 14 81 48234 14 81 48246 14 81 48256 2 2 2

436

Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Automatic Burettes, Hirschmann Automatic burettes acc. to Dr. Schilling, with pushbutton dispenser and microscrew, DURAN®, with Schellbach line, fixed zero and plastic foot. Graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW4ZV031 Volume ml 5 10 15 25 50 Graduation ml 0.05 0.05 0.1 0.1 0.1 Supply vessel ml 500 500 1000 1000 1000 Order No. 14 86 49348 14 86 49357 14 86 49361 14 86 49366 14 86 49372 Automatic Burettes, Dr. Schilling, Starke Standard version with butterfly wings,complete with supply bottle and plastic foot. 1 Automatic burette with adjustable zero Vol. Order No. Bottle ml Grad. ml 1/20 500 14 59 21046 1/20 500 14 59 21056 1/10 500 14 59 21061 ml 5 10 15 ml 5 10 15 ml 5 10 15 2 Automatic burette with fixed zero Vol. Order No. Bottle ml Grad. ml 1/20 500 14 59 22046 1/20 500 14 59 22056 1/10 500 14 59 22061 Spare burette with fixed zero Order No. Vol. Grad. ml 1/20 1/20 1/10 14 59 23046 14 59 23056 14 59 23061 Vol. ml 25 50 Vol. ml 25 50 Order No. Bottle ml Grad. ml 1/10 1000 14 59 21066 1/10 1000 14 59 21072 Order No. Bottle ml Grad. ml 1/10 1000 14 59 22066 1/10 1000 14 59 22072 Vol. ml 25 50 Grad. ml 1/10 1/10 Order No. 14 59 23066 14 59 23072 Accessories Article Spare foot made of PE for 500 ml bottles Spare foot made of PE for 1000 ml bottles Burettes also available in amber glass! Order No. 14 59 23100 14 59 23101 1 co d e b e w WWFNK003 2 Burettes, Class B, VITLAB Plastic-coated burette made of borosilicate glass 3.3, tolerances corresponding to DIN ISO 384, Class B. With Schellbach stripes (blue/white) and high-contrast black marking. Calibrated to deliver “Ex”. The burette stopcock turns easily and enables fine titration. The temperature-stable plastic coating on the tube provides splinter protection. Materials: Burette of borosilicate glass 3.3, with PMP/PTFE burette stopcock. Volume ml 25 50 Tolerance ± ml 0.05 0.10 Graduation ml 0.05 0.10 Length mm 800 800 Order No. 10 85 31055 10 85 31056 PU pc/Pack 2 2 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 435

437

Volumetry Dosing Devices 1 2 3 5 4 co d e b e w co d e b e w WW4ZV029 WW4ZV072 436 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Automatic Burettes, Hirschmann 1 Automatic burettes acc. to Pellet, without intermediate stopcock With dated batch identification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, with Schellbachline, lateral precision dis- pensing stopcock with PFTE spindle joint size 12, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, with supply bottle 2000 ml, graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Volume ml 10 25 50 Graduation ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 1) Waiting time 30 s. Tol. ± ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Flow time s 35 – 451) 35 – 451) 35 – 451) Order No. 14 82 53360 14 82 53370 14 82 53375 2 Automatic burettes acc. to Pellet, with intermediate stopcock With dated batch identification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, with Schellbachline, lateral stopcock with glass key joint size NS12, intermediate stopcock with glass key joint size 18.8, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, with supply bottle 2000 ml, graduation and printing in durable blue ceramic stain. Volume ml 10 25 50 Graduation ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 1) Waiting time 30 s. Tol. ± ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Flow time s 35 – 451) 35 – 451) 35 – 451) Order No. 14 82 54156 14 82 54165 14 82 54172 3 Automatic burettes acc. to Pellet, with lateral precision dispensing stopcock with PTFE spindle With dated batch identification, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, main point ring graduation, DURAN®, with Schellbachline, intermediate stopcock with PTFE key joint size 18.8, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, with supply bottle 2000 ml, grad- uation and printing in blue durable ceramic stain. Volume ml 10 25 50 Graduation ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 1) Waiting time 30 s. Tol. ± ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Flow time s 35 – 451) 35 – 451) 35 – 451) Order No. 14 82 54356 14 82 54365 14 82 54372 4 Automatic burettes acc. to Pellet, with intermediate stopcock Class B, line graduation, DURAN®, made of amber glass, lateral stopcock with glass key joint size 12, intermediate stopcock with glass key joint size 18.8, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, with supply bottle 2000 ml, graduation and printing in durable white ceramic stain. Volume ml 10 25 50 Graduation ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 Tol. ± ml 0.03 0.045 0.075 Flow time s 45 – 75 30 – 70 40 – 100 Order No. 14 82 55160 14 82 55170 14 82 55175 5 Automatic burettes acc. to Pellet, with lateral precision dispensing stopcock with PTFE spindle Class B, made of amber glass, intermediate stopcock with PTFE key joint size 18.8, acc. to DIN EN ISO 385, with supply bottle 2000 ml, graduation and printing in white durable ceramic stain. Volume ml 10 25 50 Graduation ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 Tol. ± ml 0.03 0.045 0.75 Flow time s 40 – 75 30 – 70 40 – 100 Order No. 14 82 55360 14 82 55370 14 82 55375 Titrators, Pellet, Hirschmann Titrators acc. to Pellet, brown glass, with intermediate stopcock, DURAN®, class AS, with declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, with dated batch identification, grad- uation and printing in durable white ceramic stain, main point ring graduation, lateral PTFE spindle stopcock, with 2 liter brown glass supply bottle, acc. DIN EN ISO 385. Volume ml 10 25 50 Sub-division ml 0.02 0.05 0.1 Tolerance ± ml 0.02 0.03 0.05 Scale length approx. mm 500 500 500 Order No. 14 82 50360 14 82 50370 14 82 50375

438

Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Titrators, Pellet, Starke Titrators acc. to Pellet, Starke system, with plastic standard ground connecting joint size 29, with adjustable zero point setting, with spindle stopcock and Schellbach line, with 2-l supply bottle. Clear glass, with Schellbach line, without intermediate stopcock, strap-spindle stopcock Volume ml 10 25 Graduation ml 1/50 1/10 Order No. 14 59 31056 14 59 31066 Volume ml 25 50 Graduation ml 1/20 1/10 Order No. 14 59 31067 14 59 31072 Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WWFNK002 1 Clear glass, with Schellbach line, interm. stopcock with PTFE key Volume Volume Order No. ml 10 25 Graduation ml 1/50 1/10 14 59 32056 14 59 32066 ml 25 50 Graduation ml 1/20 1/10 Order No. 14 59 32067 14 59 32072 Amber glass, without intermediate stopcock Volume ml 10 25 Graduation ml 1/50 1/10 Order No. 14 59 33056 14 59 33066 Volume ml 25 50 Graduation ml 1/20 1/10 Order No. 14 59 33067 14 59 33072 Amber glass, intermediate stopcock with PTFE key Volume ml 10 25 Graduation ml 1/50 1/10 Order No. 14 59 34056 14 59 34066 Volume ml 25 50 Graduation ml 1/20 1/10 Order No. 14 59 34067 14 59 34072 1 VITLAB® Dr. Schilling Burettes, VITLAB Burette made of borosilicate glass 3.3, tolerances according to DIN ISO 384 Class B, with high-contrast black markings. Calibrated to deliver “Ex”. Automatic zero setting. The bu- rette stopcock turns easily and enables fine titration. The holding device for the riser pipe serves as additional shock-proofing. The patented VITLAB® symbiotic (DE 10 2005 034 963) offers in addition to the impact protection a thermally stable plastic coating of the glass burette tube. This provides ad- ditional breaking resistance and acts as a splinter protection. Materials: burette of borosilicate glass 3.3, PP filling tube, PMP/PTFE burette stopcock, and PE-LD reservoir bottle. VITLAB® symbiotic, with Schellbach stripes (blue/white) Volume ml 25 50 Tolerance ± ml 0.05 0.10 Graduation ml 0.05 0.10 Height approx. mm 900 900 Bottle ml 1000 1000 Order No. 10 85 31065 10 85 31066 Burette with Schellbach stripes (blue/white), without plastic-coating Volume ml 25 50 Tolerance ± ml 0.05 0.10 Graduation ml 0.05 0.10 Height approx. mm 900 900 Bottle ml 1000 1000 Order No. 10 85 31063 10 85 31064 Burette made of brown glass, without Schellbach stripes, without plastic-coating Volume ml 25 50 Tolerance ± ml 0.05 0.10 Graduation ml 0.05 0.10 Height mm 900 900 Bottle ml 1000 1000 Order No. 10 85 31067 10 85 31068 Atomizer Bulbs, Deutsch & Neumann Atomizer bulbs made of PVC-w, reddish brown. Tubing length 25 cm. Article Size 3, pressure valve Size 5, pressure valve Size 3, suction valve Vol. ml 65 102 65 Order No. 27 34 02003 27 34 02005 27 34 02006 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 437

439

Volumetry Dosing Devices Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Rubber Bulb Set with Net, Deutsch & Neumann Double bulb with hose (length 25 cm), size 5 (102 ml). Article Double bulb made of PVC-w/NR, black Order No. 27 34 01003 co d e b e w WWQED004 Titrette®, Bottle-top Burette, BRAND 1 The first bottle-top burette to satisfy Class A error limits for glass burettes With the Titrette® bottle-top burette, you can titrate quickly and reliably with highest pre- cision, even in close quarters, with no power hookup needed – in the lab, in production, or in the field. The Titrette® bottle-top burette has an innovative new measuring system, so even the error limits of Class A glass burettes per DIN EN ISO 385 are met. If needed it can display 3 decimal places for volumes below 20 ml. • Precise titration within the error limits of Class A for glass burettes. • The operating elements of the bottle top burette Titrette® are clearly structured. • Separate buttons for On/Off, Pause, and CLEAR for cancelling the display, as well as for selecting the function. • High stability due to compact design and light weight. • Slip-proof hand wheels and smooth precision gearing for all titration speeds from rapid to drop-by-drop make handling the device particularly safe and easy. • Easy to dismantle for cleaning, maintenance and part replacement in the lab. • Additional electronic functions: Adjustment with Easy Calibration, Calibration schedule to save a date for the next calibration, Save power with Auto-Power-Off, Change decimal place settings. • PC interface (optional) for a data transmission directly to the PC. • Titrette® SH to determinate the acid content of milk and liquid dairy according to Sox- hlet-Henkel (4 °SH = 1 ml). Items supplied Titrette® bottle-top burette, DE-M marked, performance certificate, telescoping filling tube (170 – 330 mm), recirculation tube, 2 micro batteries (AAA/UM4/LR03), 3 bottle adapters PP (GL 45/32, GL 45/S 40 und GL 32/NS 29/32), 2 amber colored light shield inspection windows, operating manual. (Additional items supplied when ordering the Ti- trette® with PC interface: connector cable (Sub-D plug connector, 9-pin) and a CD with driver software, communication protocol, example application and a special operating manual.) Version Order No. Volume ml 10 25 50 10 25 50 A P ± % 0.10 0.07 0.06 0.10 0.07 0.06 ° SH (25) 0.07 Calibrated to deliver (TD, Ex). Error limits according to the nominal capacity (= maximum volume) indicated on the instrument. A = Accuracy, CV = Coefficient of variation. Standard Standard Standard with RS 232 interface with RS 232 interface with RS 232 interface Soxhlet-Henkel CV P CV P µl % 0.05 5 0.025 6 10 0.02 0.05 5 0.025 6 0.02 10 0.025 6 10 49 60141 10 49 60151 10 49 60161 10 49 60241 10 49 60251 10 49 60261 10 49 60451 A P ± µl 10 18 30 10 18 30 18 Accessories Titrating tube with screw cap and integrated discharge and recirculation valve. Article Titrating tube 10 ml 2 Titrating tube 20/50 ml (from serial number 01K) Order No. 10 49 07525 10 49 07526 Filling valve with olive-shaped nozzle and sealing ring. 2 3 Article 3 Filling valve Order No. 10 49 06636 Continued on next page 1 438

440

Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Inspection window One set colorless and one set amber colored. For protection of light-sensitive media, you can replace the clear inspection windows with the amber colored windows (included). Volumetry Dosing Devices Article 4 Inspection window 5 Piston head Article Piston head for Titrette® 10 ml Piston head for Titrette® 25 ml Piston head for Titrette® 50 ml 6 Dispensing cylinder with valve head for Titrette® 10 ml Titrette® (from serial number 01K) 25 ml Titrette® (from serial number 01K) 50 ml Digital Burettes, Hecht-ASSISTENT Order No. 10 49 06783 Order No. 10 49 07531 10 49 07530 10 49 07532 Order No. 10 49 07533 10 49 77535 10 49 77537 5 4 6 Digital burette M 10 (Contiburette) Certified conformity, without bottle, with thread connection A 32 Complete with: • Bent discharge tube • Suction tube • 2 additional thread adapters A 45 and A 40 • Directions for use Continuous supply and measurement in the most common volume range from 0.01 up to 500 ml – using only one device. Titration of larger volumes of up to max. 9999.99 ml is possible as well. • Calibratrable • Electronic measuring system • Indication to two decimal places • Minimal setting units 10 µl • No glass piston, no valves, minimal dead volume • Self-venting to avoid measuring errors due to trapped gas or air bubbles • Mechanical parts made of highly acid-resistant aluminium oxide (99.7 Al2O3) • Rotates freely on the bottle • Including two batteries AA 1.5 V for approx. 500 operating hours Technical data: Temperature range: +10°C – +40°C Dimensions: Weight: approx. 175 × 93 × 60 mm approx. 360 g Article Digital burette M 10 (Contibürette) Order No. 14 18 00010 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 439

441

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW4ZV071 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Digital Burettes, solarus®, Hirschmann An integrated solar cell provides power to the solarus® digital burette made by Hirschmann Laborgeräte. This means: • no more battery replacement • no more recharging solarus® replaces any glass burette and a variety of motor-driven burettes. A clear digital display eliminates all meniscal reading errors. A modern ergonomic design makes routine titration easier. Available in a 10 ml, 20 ml and a 50 ml version. The media recirculation system (standard equipment) facilitates bleeding, reduces waste of the expensive medium and protects the environment. Easy to replace valves, suction, ejection, and return valve are made of highly pure AL2O3 ceramics (99.7%); they are inert to the greatest possible extent as well as non-wearing. Calibration is simple using “Quick Cal” and factory calibration is stored permanently in the device. Together, this provides scope for very individualized modification. Further features: • Turns freely on the bottle so that the label always faces the user • Easy to read display • Very fine resolution in 0.01 ml increments • Handwheels with soft-touch surface for good grip • Very precise gearing • Clear-cut operation controlled by 2 keys • Switching from default to user-specific calibration • Sturdy discharge unit • With declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600 1 Additional advantages: Serial bidirectional interface for recording titration results, further processing of titration data, and fully automatic setting of a calibration factor when using an electronic balance. 1 Digital burettes, solarus® Items supplied: solarus® with screw thread A 45, 3 thread adapters (PP) A 32, A 38 and S 40, ejection unit, suction hose with union nut, return hose, valve mounting wrench, single calibration cer- tificate. Volume Order No. R % 0.3 0.2 0.2 CV % 0.1 0.1 0.1 ml 10 20 50 10 37 92010 14 37 92020 14 37 92050 Adapter Thread adapter A 45 A 45 A 45 A 45 A 45 A 45 Accessories to A 28 A 38/430 A 32 A 38 S 40 NS 29/32 adapter Material PP PP ETFE ETFE ETFE silicone Order No. 10 37 13523 10 37 13524 14 37 13621 14 37 13625 14 37 13627 10 37 13742 Article Order No. Ejection unit standard 14 37 13025 Dispensing unit titration, variable, with hose holder, 400 mm, FEP 14 37 63004 Discharge unit, complete, with Luer-Lock connection adapter 14 37 13028 Suction tube with fitting, 400 mm 14 37 15007 Connecting cable for serial interface, RS 232 14 37 64005 Connecting cable USB 10 37 64006 Dispensing unit, flexible, spiral shaped 10 37 13026 Window inspection, amber 10 37 86060 Adapter with NS 12/21 filling tube for funnel 10 37 13741 Discharge valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring 10 37 16015 Suction valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring 10 37 16515 Discharge valve, ball Al2O3, platinum-iridium spring (HF) 14 37 16028 Suction valve, ball Al2O3, platinum-iridium spring (HF) 14 37 16528 Return valve, ball Al2O3, platinum-iridium spring (HF) 14 37 16626 Return valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring 10 37 16615 440

442

Volumetry Dosing Devices Burettes, Titrators, Accessories opus - Titration, Hirschmann 1 opus® precision titrator The motor-operated, semi-automatic digital burette for quick titration. opus® for motor-operated titration directly from the test tube. Available in three volumes (10 ml, 20 ml and 50 ml). The settings for the tiration process are made via an intuitive menu at the TFT touch screen. The user interface offers clearly legible and understanda- ble menu functions. Due to electronic motor control, opus® is a very sensitive precision device. co d e b e w WW4ZV077 Features: • Menu-structured, simple user guidance by means of index cards on the external, colour- ed TFT touch screen, which can also be read well in daylight • Various areas of application by using high-quality materials (ECTFE, DURAN® glass, FEP); media-touching parts can be steam-sterilised (121°C) • User-friendly feedback system for quick venting without losing the reagent - good for the environment and the budget • Quick titration and drop titration • Accessories (selection): - Connection cable USB interface - Connection cable to touch screen in 2000 mm and 5000 mm length, special lengths available - System platform made of silicone with bottle holder - Batteries as accessories for optional battery operation • Hassle-free, individual calibration possibilities • Method memory, up to 9 different settings for e.g. volume, speed, cycle time, ... can be saved • Individual adjustment possibilities e.g. - Language selection (DE, UK, FR, ES) - Setting the suction speed and dispensing speed in ml/sec (adjustment to viscosity of the medium) • Saving the last setting ensures quick continuing after switching the device back on • With declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600 • Quality control according to DIN EN ISO 8655 • Valve seats and ball made of highly pure Al2O3 ceramics (99.7%) Items supplied: opus® titration, complete with screw thread A 45, 3 thread adapters (A 32, A 38 and S 40), 1 suction hose with union nut, return hose, titration ejection unit, valve mounting wrench, touch screen operating unit “titration”, brown light protection window, power pack, Data-Power cable, single calibration certificate. Article opus® titration, 10 ml opus® titration, 20 ml opus® titration, 50 ml Plug EU, US, UK EU, US, UK EU, US, UK R % 0.2 0.2 0.2 CV % 0.7 0.7 0.5 Order No. 10 37 82010 10 37 82020 10 37 82050 Accessories (selection) Article opus® system platform, grey Data power cable, length 0.75 m Data power cable, length 2 m Data power cable, length 5 m Connecting cable for serial interface, RS 232 Connecting cable USB Battery pack Screen protectors, 1 pack = 2 pieces Adapter with NS 12/21 filling tube for funnel problem-free filling of medium through a funnel, without unscrewing the basic unit for direct reagent extraction from a ground bottle Ground adapter NS 29/32 Ejection unit with fine tip Window inspection, amber 2 Mouse control, for highly sensitive media handling Dispensing unit titration, variable, with hose holder, these even finer tips facilitate precision realisation of the finest droplets 400 mm, FEP Discharge valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Suction valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Return valve, ball Al2O3, Hastelloy spring Order No. 10 37 86001 10 37 87001 10 37 87002 10 37 87003 14 37 64005 10 37 64006 10 37 87100 10 37 87200 10 37 13741 10 37 13742 10 37 13041 10 37 86060 10 37 64004 14 37 63004 10 37 16015 10 37 16515 10 37 16615 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 441

443

Volumetry Dosing Devices 1 co d e b e w 442 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Burette VITLAB® continuous, VITLAB The VITLAB® continuous bottle-top burette enables continuous titration and is a fast and convenient way of reaching accurate results. The angled display shows 4-position titration volume in large, easily read numbers, which simplifies operation. Turning the two hand wheels supplies the titration medium in a continuous and pulse-free manner via the dou- ble-piston pump (EP 801 982). Filling procedures are not necessary. This innovative tech- nology increases safety; its compact design and low centre of gravity reduce risk of overturning, especially with smaller bottles. The height and length of the discharge tube can be adjusted, making it possible to work safely with both short and tall bottles. The recirculation system prevents the loss of valuable reagent and reduces the risk of splash- es. With its simple-to-use calibration function, VITLAB® continuous fulfils the correspond- ing requirements for test equipment monitoring without instrument downtime. Margins of error are under those specified in the DIN EN ISO 8655-3 standard, even for partial vol- umes. CE marking pursuant to EU Directives 2004/108/EC, 93/68/EEC; 73/23/EEC, 93/68/EEC. Also available with DAkkS calibration certificate. • Continuous supply of titration medium using a double-piston pump • Continuous, precise control of the titration rate with large, easy-grip hand wheels • Simple, medium=specific readjustment / calibration using the keypad • Easily readable, large numbers • Long operating life using two easily-replaced 1.5 V microbatteries • No loss of medium thanks to a recirculation valve • Freely rotatable 360° around the bottle for optimal orientation of the label • Adjustable for various bottle sizes using the corresponding adapter • Telescopic discharge tube which can be adjusted in both height and length • Adjustable telescopic discharge tube suitable for a variety of bottle heights Included in delivery: VITLAB® continuous E/RS, with GL 45 connecting threads and GL 32, GL 38 and S 40 (buttress thread) size PP thread adapters, telescopic filling tube (200 – 350 mm), telescop- ic discharge tube (140 – 220 mm), two 1.5 V microbatteries (LR 03/AAA), instruction manual and quality certificate. Error margins according to DIN EN ISO 8655-3: VITLAB® continuous E at 25 ml: VITLAB® continuous RS at 50 ml: accuracy ±0.2%, variation coefficient 0.1% accuracy ±0.2%, variation coefficient 0.1% Burette continuous E / RS Article Burette VITLAB® continuous E 1 Burette VITLAB® continuous RS Accessories Order No. 10 85 30506 10 85 30507 Article Order No. Bottle, amber glass, coated, round, GL 45, 2500 ml 10 85 31510 Bottle, amber glass, coated, square, GL 45, 1000 ml 10 85 31500 Telescoping intake tube, FEP, ETFE, PTFE, extr. from 200 to 350 mm 10 85 31085 Discharge valve, incl. recirculation valve 10 85 35085 Micro batteries 1,5V (2 pcs.) 10 85 30216 Drying tube, PP, unfilled 10 85 31095 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

444

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW1WS013 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Piston Burettes TITRONIC® 300, SI Analytics Piston burette with 20 or 50 ml dosing unit For manual titration and highly precise dosing. The TITRONIC® 300 can be fully controlled from the PC via a USB or RS-232 interface. Up to 16 burettes can be connected and controlled in a series (“daisy chain” principle). Technical data: Interface: Stirrer connection: Keypad port: Display: Volume display: Display resolution: Dispensing speed: Fill time: Dispensing units: Burette resolution: Dosage accuracy: Power supply: Conformity: CE-mark: 1 × USB A and 1 × USB B, 2 RS-232-C TM 50, power supply directly by the titrator operated by the keys on the unit, hand control element TZ 3880 and with an optional PC keyboard (USB) graphics-enabled TFT display 00.00 to 999.999 ml 0.005 – 0.025 ml (depending on attachment) max. 100 ml/min (with 50 ml dispensing unit) 30 s to 240 s adjustable (time proportional to cylinder volume) 20 ml or 50 ml dispensing units are exchangeable 8,000 systematic measurement deviation 0.15%, random measure- ment deviation 0.05%, determined according to EN ISO 8655, part 3 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz ISO 8655, part 6 EMV: 2004/108/EG; Safety EC-Directive 2006/95 Article TITRONIC® 300 without magnetic stirrer, T 300/20 M1 TITRONIC® 300 basic unit with 20 ml dispensing unit, manual switch, titration clamp, Order No. 10 27 15800 stand rod and power supply 100–240 V Article TITRONIC® 300 without magnetic stirrer, T 300/50 M1 TITRONIC® 300 basic unit with 50 ml dispensing unit, manual switch, titration clamp, Order No. 10 27 15810 stand rod and power supply 100–240 V Article TITRONIC® 300 with magnetic stirrer, T 300/20 M2 TITRONIC® 300 basic unit with 20 ml dispensing unit, manual switch, titration clamp, Order No. 10 27 15820 stand rod, magnetic stirrer TM 50 and power supply 100–240 V Article TITRONIC® 300 with magnetic stirrer, T 300/50 M2 TITRONIC® 300 basic unit with 50 ml dispensing unit, manual switch, titration clamp, Order No. 10 27 15830 stand rod, magnetic stirrer TM 50 and power supply 100–240 V Accessories for TITRONIC® 300 Article TM 50, magnetic stirrer TZ 3835, mini USB keyboard TZ 3830, USB-HUB TZ 3803, amber reagent bottle, 1 l Order No. 10 27 15840 10 27 10410 10 27 10420 10 27 10590 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 443

445

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW1WS018 1 444 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Automatic Titrators TitroLine® 7000, SI Analytics 1 TitroLine® 7000 Compact, titrator with intelligent exchange unit and automatic recognition of unit size and reagent data. Automatic recognition of ID sensors by SI Analytics. Thanks to the state-of-the-art USB and additional RS232 interfaces, connection of print- er, balance and further accessories is possible at the same time. The high-contrast TFT-display allows the easy parameterization and tracking of the titration curve. The following types of titration are possible: • Titrations to pH, mV and µA endpoint (2 EP) • Titrations to two equivalence point (pH und mV) with dynamic or linear titration addition • pH stat titrations • Manual titrations with the controller • Dosing tasks • Preparation of solutions • Number of methods: 50 • Ca-und Mg-hardness • Acidity number (FFA) in edible oils • Saponification number • Hydroxy number • Perchloric acid titrations and other non aqueous titrations Technical data: Measuring input electrode:pH/mV-input with DIN or BNC socket with ID function for au- Measuring input Dead Stop: Measuring input Pt 1000: Temperature sensor input for resistance thermometer Pt tomatic electrode recognition µA-input for double platinum electrode (socket 2 × 4 mm), pole voltage adjustable Interfaces: Stirrer connection: Keyboard connection: Display: Exchangeable burette units: Burette resolution: Dosing accuracy: Mains supply: Conformity: CE mark Technical modifications reserved. 1000 (socket 2 × 4 mm) 3 × USB (2 USB-A and 1 × USB-B) 2 × RS-232-C and 1 × LAN TM 235 or alternative paddle stirrer via USB-A The unit is operated via the keys at the unit, the controller TZ 3880, or optionally via external PC keyboard (USB) 3.5 ″ graphic TFT display 5, 10, 20 or 50 ml exchangeable units with unit size and rea- gent recognition 10,000 increments Systematic error 0.1 – 0.5%, random error 0.05 – 0.07% (de- pending on unit size) in compliance with EN ISO 8655 part 3 100 to 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz ISO 8655, part 6 EMC: 2004/108/EG; safety EC-Directive 2006/95 Article TitroLine® 7000 with 10 ml exchange unit, TL 7000-M1/10 TitroLine® 7000 basic unit with magnetic stirrer TM 235 and 10 ml exchange unit WA 10, incl. brown glass bottle for titration reagent, GL 45 and S 40 bottle adapter, tubes, drip tube, and titration tip TitroLine® 7000 with 20 ml exchange unit, TL 7000-M1/20 TitroLine® 7000 basic unit with magnetic stirrer TM 235 and 20 ml exchange unit WA 20, incl. brown glass bottle for titration reagent, GL 45 and S 40 bottle adapter, tubes, drip tube, and titration tip TitroLine® 7000 with 50 ml exchange unit, TL 7000-M1/50 TitroLine® 7000 basic unit with magnetic stirrer TM 235 and 50 ml exchange unit WA 50, incl. brown glass bottle for titration reagent, GL 45 and S 40 bottle adapter, tubes, drip tube, and titration tip TitroLine® 7000 with 20 ml exchange unit and pH electrode, TL 7000-M2/20 TitroLine® 7000 basic unit with magnetic stirrer TM 235 and 20 ml exchange unit WA 20, incl. brown glass bottle for titration reagent, GL 45 and S 40 bottle adapter, tubes, drip tube, and titration tip. With pH combination electrode and buffer set. Accessories for TitroLine® 7000 Article TM 235, magnetic stirrer 5 ml exchange unit Order No. 10 27 10140 10 27 10150 10 27 10160 10 27 10170 Order No. 10 27 10400 10 27 10300

446

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW1WS023 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Automatic Titrators TitroLine® 7800, SI Analytics TitroLine® 7800 The TitroLine® 7800 is the latest universal instrument for potentiometric titration with an additional measuring input for digital sensors (IDS®). This allows for simultaneous con- nection of e.g. pH and conductivity electrodes and thus for simultaneous measuring. No external conductivity measuring device is required. Furthermore, the TitroLine® 7800 can also be used for volumetric KF titration. The TitroLine® 7800 is characterised by the following features: • Brilliant TFT display which can also be read sidewise • Interchangeable modules and memory for storing all relevant module and reagent data • Large number of interfaces (two USB-A, one USB-B, two RS232 and one LAN interface) for easy communication. • For connection of e.g. USB keyboard, USB printer, barcode reader, USB memory, scales, PC, and other SI Analytics® devices. • Results can be stored via USB connection and LAN connection (in PDF and CSV format), incl. method transfer. • With one analogue and one digital measuring input. Digital measuring input for connect- ing IDS® pH, mV (Redox and others) and LF sensors. • With standard methods for potentiometric and KF titration. Technical data: Measuring input 1: Measuring input 2: Measuring input Dead Stop: Measuring input tempera- ture: Interfaces: Stirrer connection: Keyboard connection: Display: Exchangeable burette units: Burette resolution: Dosing accuracy: Analogue pH/mV-input with electrode socket, according to DIN or BNC socket insert with ID-function for automatic de- tection of the electrode Digital input for connecting IDS® electrodes (pH, mV, LF…) µA-input for double platinum electrode (socket 2 × 4 mm), pole voltage adjustable Temperature sensor input for resistance thermometer Pt 1000 (socket 2 × 4 mm) 3 × USB (2 USB-A and 1 × USB-B) 2 × RS-232-C and 1 × LAN TM 235 or alternative paddle stirrer via USB-A The unit is operated via the keys at the unit, the controller TZ 3880, or optionally via external USB keyboard 3.5 ″ graphic TFT display 5, 10, 20 or 50 ml exchangeable units with unit size and rea- gent recognition 20,000 increments Systematic error 0.15%, random error 0.05 – 0.07% (de- pending on unit size) in compliance with EN ISO 8655 part 3 100 to 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz EMC: 2004/108/EG; safety EC-Directive 2006/95 Mains supply: CE mark: Technical modifications reserved. Article TitroLine® 7800 without magnetic stirrer: TL 7800 Scope of delivery: basic unit without magnetic stirrer, support rod TZ 1510, electrode holder Z 305, USB keyboard TZ 3835 and power supply unit 100-240 V TitroLine® 7800 with magnetic stirrer: TL 7800-M1 Scope of delivery: basic unit with magnetic stirrer TM 235, support rod TZ 1510, electrode holder Z 305, USB keyboard TZ 3835 and power supply unit 100-240 V TitroLine® 7800 with magnetic stirrer and TitriSoft: TL 7800-TitriSoft Scope of delivery: basic unit with magnetic stirrer TM 235, support rod TZ 1510, electrode holder Z 305, USB keyboard TZ 3835, power supply unit 100-240 V and TitriSoft 3.XX Titrators, SI Analytics 1 Automatic titrator TitroLine® 5000 Order No. 10 27 10980 10 27 10990 10 27 11030 Very compact new titrator for straight-cut routine titration. Thanks to standard methods, no programming of methods is required. The results and the titration curve can be docu- mented in compliance with GLP on a printer or USB flashdrive. Suitable for the following titration methods: • pH titration, mV end points (2 EP) • Titration to a turning point (pH and mV) with dynamic or linear titration allowance • Manual titration with hand sensor • Dosing • Number of methods: 5 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 445 Continued on next page

447

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW1WS014 1 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Examples for typical applications of the TitroLine® 5000: • Salt content in food (cheese, soy sauce, ketchup ...) • Total acid in wine and beverages • Acid level in bread and sourdough • Total Kjedahl nitrogen • Alkalinity (p + m value) • FOS/TAC Technical data: Measuring input electrode: pH/mV-input with electrode socket according to DIN or BNC Measuring input Pt 1000: temperature sensor port for resistance thermometer Pt 1000 Interfaces: Stirrer connection: Keypad port: Display: Dispensing units: Burette resolution: Dispensing accuracy: Power supply: Conformity: CE-mark: and NTC 30 KOhm (connection sockets 2 × 4 mm) 1 × USB A and 1 × USB-B, 2 × RS-232-C TM 50, power supply directly by the titrator operated by the keys on the unit, hand control element TZ 3880 and with an optional PC keyboard (USB) graphics-enabled TFT display 20 ml or 50 ml dispensing units are exchangeable 8,000 systematic measurement deviation 0.15%, random measure- ment deviation 0.05%, determined in accordance with DIN EN ISO 8655-6, part 3 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz ISO 8655, part 6 EMV: 2004/108/EG; Safety EC-Directive 2006/95 Order No. 10 27 15760 Article TitroLine® 5000 with 20 ml dosing unit, TL 5000/20 M1 Titrator without electrode, with 20 ml dispensing unit, magnetic stirrer TM 50, manual switch, titration clamp, stand rod and power supply 100–240 V TitroLine® 5000 with 50 ml dosing unit, TL 5000/50 M1 Titrator without electrode, with 50 ml dispensing unit, magnetic stirrer TM 50, manual switch, titration clamp, stand rod and power supply 100–240 V TitroLine® 5000 with 20 ml dosing unit and pH-electrode, TL 5000/20 M2 Titrator with pH combination electrode and buffer set, with 20 ml dispensing unit, magnetic stirrer TM 50, manual switch, tit- ration clamp, stand rod and power supply 100–240 V TitroLine® 5000 with 50 ml dosing unit and pH-electrode, TL 5000/50 M2 Titrator with pH combination electrode and buffer set, with 50 ml dispensing unit, magnetic stirrer TM 50, manual switch, tit- ration clamp, stand rod and power supply 100–240 V Accessories for TitroLine® 5000 Article TM 50, magnetic stirrer TZ 3835, mini USB keyboard TZ 3830, USB-HUB TZ 3803, amber reagent bottle, 1 l 2 TitroLine® 7500 KF 10 27 15770 10 27 15780 10 27 15790 Order No. 10 27 15840 10 27 10410 10 27 10420 10 27 10590 Compact, new, easy to use volumetric KF titrator with intelligent exchange unit and auto- matic recognition of unit size and reagent data. Thanks to the state-of-the-art USB and additional RS232 interfaces, connection of printer, balance and further accessories is possible at the same time. The high-contrast TFT-display allows the easy parameterisation and tracking of the titration curve. Solvent is added and extraction of the titrated solution takes place at the push of a button. TitroLine® 7500 KF 05/10/20: complete modules for titration according to Karl Fischer. Scope of delivery: TitroLine 7500 KF basic device, with exchange unit WA 05, WA 10 or WA 20, titration stand with pump TM 235 KF, titration vessel TZ 1770, micro-double plat- inum electrode KF 1100 with permanent cable and starter kit Technical data: Hardware Interfaces: 3 × USB (2 USB-A and 1 × USB-B) 2 × RS-232-C, 1 × LAN Stirrer connection: TM 235 KF Keypad port: Display: Burette units: Burette resolution: 10,000 steps Dispensing accura- cy: Operation via the key at the unit or optionally via external PC key- board (USB) 3.5 ″ graphic TFT display 5, 10, 20 ml exchanger units with recognition of unit size and rea- gent data Systematic measuring deviation 0.15%, random measuring devia- tion 0.05 - 0.07% (depending on unit size), determined pursuant to EN ISO 8655 part 3 100 - 240 V; 50/60 Hz Continued on next page 446 Power supply:

448

Volumetry Dosing Devices 2 3 ISO 8655, part 6 EMC: 2004/108/EC; EC safety directive 2006/95 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Conformity: CE sign: KF measuring input: Connection for double platinum electrode; pole voltage adjustable Software Downloadable but freely configurable methods for sample titraton, titer determination with water, titer determination with standard solutions, titer determination with sodium tartrate, and blank value analysis (oven and external extraction). 50 methods in total. Automatic drift detection and correction. Extraction time configurable. Statistic func- tions: Mean value, standard deviation, and variance. Printout is configurable (short, standard, GLP). Article TitroLine® 7500 KF 05 TitroLine® 7500 KF 10 TitroLine® 7500 KF 20 Accessories for TitroLine® 7500 KF Article TZ 3863, USB compact printer incl. printer cable 3 TitroLine® 7500 KF trace Order No. 10 27 10710 10 27 10720 10 27 10730 Order No. 10 27 10430 Compact, new, easy to use coulometric titrator for water determination according to Karl Fischer (KF). Thanks to the state-of-the-art USB and additional RS232 interfaces, con- nection of printer, balance and further accessories is possible at the same time. The high-contrast TFT-display allows the easy parameterisation and tracking of the titration curve. Solvent is added and extraction of the titrated solution takes place at the push of a button (modul 2 and 4). Technical data: Hardware Interfaces: 3 × USB (2 USB-A and 1 × USB-B) 2 × RS-232-C, 1 × LAN TM 235 or TM 235 KF Operation via the keys at the unit or optionally via external PC keyboard (USB) 3.5 ″ graphic TFT display 100 – 240 V; 50/60 Hz EMC: 2004/108/EC; EC safety directive 2006/95 1 µg – 100 mg 0.1 µg ± 3 µg at 10 – 1,00 µg 0.3% at > 1 mg ca. 2 mg/min Stirrer connection: Keyboard connection: Display: Power supply: CE sign: Measuring range: Resolution: Precision: max. measuring speed: Software 50 parameterizable methods incl. methods for blank value analysis (e.g. KF oven and external extraction). Automatic drift detection and correction. Extraction time configurable. Statistic functions: Mean value, standard deviation, and relative standard de- viation Short, standard with curve, GLP Printout is configurable: Results can be output in ppm, %, mg, µg, mg/l Article TitroLine® 7500 KF trace, module 1 Complete module for coulometric tritrations acc. to Karl Fischer Scope of delivery: titration unit, generator electrode TZ 1752 without diaphragm + mains cable, magnetic stirrer TM 235, te- lescopic rod, titration vessel TZ 1751, micro-double platinum electrode KF 1150 with permanent cable TitroLine® 7500 KF trace, module 2 Complete module for coulometric tritrations acc. to Karl Fischer Scope of delivery: titration unit, generator electrode TZ 1752 without diaphragm + mains cable, titration stand with pump TM 235 KF, telescopic rod, titration vessel TZ 1754, micro-double platinum electrode KF 1150 with permanent cable TitroLine® 7500 KF trace, module 3 Complete module for coulometric tritrations acc. to Karl Fischer Scope of delivery: titration unit, generator electrode TZ 1753 without diaphragm + mains cable, magnetic stirrer TM 235, te- lescopic rod, titration vessel TZ 1751, micro-double platinum electrode KF 1150 with permanent cable TitroLine® 7500 KF trace, module 4 Complete module for coulometric tritrations acc. to Karl Fischer Scope of delivery: titration unit, generator electrode TZ 1753 without diaphragm + mains cable, titration stand with pump TM 235 KF, telescopic rod, titration vessel TZ 1754, micro-double platinum electrode KF 1150 with permanent cable Accessories for the TitroLine® 7500 KF trace Order No. 10 27 10760 10 27 10770 10 27 10780 10 27 10790 Article TZ 3863, USB compact printer incl. printer cable Order No. 10 27 10430 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 447

449

Volumetry Dosing Devices co d e b e w WW4HV026 2 1 3 4 448 Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Thermo Scientific™ Orion Star™ Titrators of the T900 Series, Thermo Scientific The titrators of the Thermo ScientificTM Orion StarTM T900 series were designed with the specific goal of increasing your productivity in the lab by means of automated titration. These state-of-the-art automated titrators combine electrochemical technologies with a sophisticated reagent dispensing system. Compared to manual processes, this makes titration easier, more reliable, more reproducible, and faster. • User-friendly navigation, from setup over real-time titration analysis to data transfer • Large 5.7 ″ colour touchscreen with indication of titrations, instructions, and Help menus • Generation and saving of up to 10 user-specific methods • Saving of up to 100 titration data records with date/time stamp • Easy data transfer to printer, computer, or USB flash drive Comprised in the scope of delivery for all models: 20 ml burette, stirrer probe, dispens- er probe, standard tubing kit, 1 l plastic bottle, GL38 bottle cap with two ports and drying tube, computer cable, instruction manual on USB flash drive, power pack Technical data: Titration precision: Stirring probe speeds: Temperature range: Burette attachments: Burette resolution: Dosing accuracy: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Power supply: Certification: ±0.5% RSD 250 to 3700 rpm, 5 selectable speeds -5.0 to 100.0°C 10 ml, 20 ml, 50 ml 25,600 microsteps per engine revolution 2 million microsteps over the full stroke range according to ISO 8655-3 406 × 254 × 356 mm 5.67 kg 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz CE, TÜV 3-in-1, FCC, EN/EIC 61326-1, IEC 61010, IP-51 Direct pH measuring mode with mV and temperature Suitable for special acid-base titrations Article Orion Star T910 pH titrator Orion Star T910 pH titrator standard ROSS kit T910 pH titrator including ROSS Ultra pH electrode and ATC probe 1 Orion Star T910 pH titrator Sure-Flow kit T910 pH titrator including ROSS Sure-Flow pH electrode and ATC probe Order No. 10 79 29100 10 79 29101 10 79 29102 Direct measurement mode mV and temperature Suitable for special redox titrations Article 2 Orion Star T920 redox titrator Orion Star T920 redox titrator set T920 redox titrator including redox electrode with glass shaft Order No. 10 79 29200 10 79 29201 Direct measurement mode ion concentration with mV and temperature Suitable for special titrations of the ion concentration as well as tests with Multiple Known Addition (MKA) Article Orion Star T930 ion titrator 3 Orion Star T930 ion titrator set T930 ion titrator set including silver rod electrode and electro- de cable Order No. 10 79 29300 10 79 29301 Direct measuring mode pH, redox or Ion concentration with mV and temperature Suitable for flexible acid base and redox titrations or titrations of the ion concentration Orion Star T940 All-in-One-Titrator Sure-Flow ROSS set T940 all-in-one titrator incl. ROSS Sure-Flow pH electrode and 10 79 29402 ATC probe To see our large portfolio of accessories, please enter webcode WW4HV026 to access our online catalogue. Article Orion Star T940 All-in-One-Titrator 4 Orion Star T940 All-in-One-Titrator standard ROSS kit T940 all-in-one titrator including ROSS Ultra pH electrode and Order No. 10 79 20910 10 79 29401 ATC probe

450

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps CHAPTER OVERVIEW Liquid Pumps 449 Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Peristaltic Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Diaphragm Liquid Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Syringe Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Vacuum Technology 465 Water Jet Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Diaphragm Pumps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Rotary Vane Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Pump Stands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Cooling traps see Glass Construction and Equipment. 313 Vacuum Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 co d e b e w WWR4Q010 Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps Liquid Transfer Pumps, BÜRKLE OTAL liquid transfer pumps can be used with any commercially available container. When inserting the hand pump, the telescopic riser pipe adjusts to the container height. This ensures thorough emptying of residues and makes the hand pump fit for use with different containers. The liquid to be transferred comes into contact with the feed pipes only. • With universal plug made of soft PVC, for container openings 30 – 70 mm Ø • High capacity • As a hand pump for containers of up to 60 litres or as a foot pump for containers of up to 120 litres PP:Resistant to weak acids, lyes, and cleaning agents. PVDF: For acids and lyes, not for heavily oxiydising acids and lyes, resistant to chlorine bleaching Stainless steel: For flame-resistant liquids of hazard class AIII (VbF) – not for acids. 1 OTAL foot pumps Material PP PP PP PVC delivery tubing PVDF Stainless steel 2 OTAL hand pumps Material PP PP PP PVDF Stainless steel PVC delivery tubing PP1) 1 Immersion depth cm 70 70 90 70 70 90 Flow rate l/min 20 26 30 12 20 26 Tubing Ø mm 15 18 22 12 16 18 Order No. 29 05 20115 29 05 20118 29 05 20122 29 05 20312 29 05 24028 29 05 24228 Immersion depth cm 70 70 70 70 90 70 45 Flow rate l/min 14 20 26 20 26 12 4 Tubing Ø mm 12 15 18 16 18 12 10 Order No. 29 05 21112 29 05 21115 29 05 21118 29 05 24128 29 05 24328 29 05 00812 29 05 22100 1) OTAL mini hand pump, for containers up to 10 litres and container openings diam. 20-36 mm. 2 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 449

451

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps 1 2 co d e b e w Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps Disposable Liquid Transfer Pumps, BÜRKLE OTAL® disposable liquid transfer pumps OTAL pump with disposable PE feed pipe, designed for single use. In the OTAL pumps, the medium to be filled comes into contact with the feed pipe only. Designed for single use, the feed pipe is easy to remove and quick to exchange. With common reusable pumps, there is a risk that the liquid to be filled will be contami- nated by the pump – especially if the pump is used for different media or containers and no professional cleaning is carried out before the change. Since the container pump with its small footprint is intended for single use only, time-con- suming and expensive cleaning is redundant, and contaminations are excluded. Use the cutting tool comprised in the delivery to simply adjust the length of the one-piece feed pipe of the liquid transfer pump to the respective container height. This ensures maximum flexibility and thorough emptying of residual content. If required, to outlet of the feed pipe can be cut to length as well. The disposable pump is the perfect solution when extreme purity is required and cleaning is difficult or impossible. • Disposable PE feed pipe, can be reordered in packets of 10 • Cut the disposable feed pipe to the container height at a slight angle • With universal plug made of soft PVC, for container openings 30–70 mm Ø • Scope of delivery: pump ball, universal plug, cutting tool, and 10 disposable feed pipes • Pipe Ø 12 mm, immersion depth 90 cm, capacity approx. 14 l/m Instructions 1. Push the feed pipe into the universal plug and insert the pump ball 2. Cut the feed pipe to the container height at a slight angle 3. Build up pressure by means of the pump ball and transfer the liquid 4. To replace the feed pipe: Cut off the pipe directly below the plug 5. Discard the bottom end of the pipe and pull the top end out of the universal plug 6. Insert the new pipe Order No. 10 04 55811 10 04 55812 Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 WWR4Q079 Article 1 OTAL® disposable foot pump 2 OTAL® disposable hand pump Accessories Article Delivery tube, PE, for OTAL® disposable pumps, Ø 12 mm 10 04 58000 co d e b e w WWR4Q011 4 3 Barrel Hand Pumps, Highgrade Steel, BÜRKLE Barrel hand pumps made of high grade steel: Special precautions are necessary when filling combustible liquids. The filling equipment has to be made of electrically conductive materials, and there has to be an electrically conductive connection between the dispensing and the receiving container. This barrel pump made of stainless steel helps to ensure the safe filling of combustible liquids.The parts in contact with the medium are made of stainless steel (material 1.4301) and PTFE. Electrostatic charging is discharged by an anti-statics set and a barrel threaded connec- tor (accessory). Please follow Ex regulations. Not suitable for acetone! For solvents we recommend the solvent pumps. 3 Barrel hand pumps made of stainless steel with discharge elbow Weight Immersion tube L mm g 360 1560 570 1900 910 2100 Overall length approx. mm 475 685 1030 Immersion tube Ø mm 32 32 32 Order No. 29 05 13000 29 05 13001 29 05 13002 5 450 4 Barrel hand pumps made of stainless steel with discharge tubing and stopcock Immersion tube L Order No. mm 360 570 910 Overall length approx. mm 475 685 1030 Immersion tube Ø mm 32 32 32 Weight g 1560 1900 2100 Continued on next page 29 05 60104 29 05 60105 29 05 60108

452

Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps Accessories Pump Systems Liquid Pumps Article Barrel connector Nickel-plated brass, R 2 ″ internal steel barrel thread Article Barrel connector “Gas-tight” With venting valve and connection socket for gas displacement line. Prevents vapors from escaping. Nickel-plated brass, R 2 ″ internal steel barrel thread Order No. 29 05 13012 Order No. 29 05 13017 Article 5 Antistatics set in case For discharging electrostatic charges: Order No. 29 05 13013 When filling liquids, electrostatic charges may form if the dispensing and the receiving containers are not sufficiently grounded. With many substances these electrostatic charges could result in fires or explosions. Barrel Pumps, PP, BÜRKLE Polypropylene barrel pumps allow for quick transfer of liquids from barrels, cans, and tanks. Thanks to the excellent chemical resistance of PP, transfer of acids, lyes and ag- gressive cleaning agents is possible as well. The barrel pumps are an absolute top-quality product with an excellent finish and long working life – even when the pumps are used with aggressive media. The high quality of the materials used and their finishing have made these pumps bestsellers, with thousands of satisfied customers. co d e b e w WWR4Q012 6 7 • With rigid discharge pipe or flexible PVC discharge tube with cock • Good removal of residual liquid from the barrel, robust industrial quality 6 Barrel pumps PP with discharge pipe Delivery rate/stroke Immersion depth ml mm 500 200 230 650 260 800 1000 300 1250 300 1500 300 Overall length approx. mm 595 740 895 1090 1340 1590 Order No. 29 05 10501 29 05 10651 29 05 10801 29 05 11001 29 05 11251 29 05 11501 Order No. 29 05 20502 29 05 20652 29 05 20802 29 05 21002 29 05 21252 29 05 21502 Order No. 29 05 12111 29 05 12110 10 04 51810 7 Barrel pumps PP with PVC tube and cock Immersion depth mm 500 650 800 1000 1250 1500 Delivery rate/stroke ml 200 230 260 300 300 300 Overall length approx. mm 595 740 895 1090 1340 1590 Accessories Article PVC tube with stopcock, single Discharge elbow, single 8 Drain safety stand Residual liquid from pump tubes or samplers can be reliably coll- ected with the drain safety stand. The safety stand is resistant to diluted bases and acids. The collecting container can be filled with a neutralisation medium which dilutes and neutralises resi- dual liquid. The stand pipe is mounted on the wall with sturdy pipe clamps. The pipe clamps can simply be opened to remove the safety stand. The container for collecting liquid can be unscrewed, making it convenient to replace or empty. Barrel connectors Article Barrel coupling made of PP for R2 ″, steel barrel female thread Barrel coupling made of PP for Mauser 2 ″, coarse female thread Barrel coupling made of PP for Tri-Sure, coarse female thread Barrel stopper made of PVC for container openings with Ø from 40 to 70 mm Order No. 29 05 12113 29 05 12115 29 05 12116 29 05 12114 8 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 451

453

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps 2 1 Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps Barrel Pumps, PTFE, BÜRKLE Due to the high chemical resistance of the medium-contacting parts made of PTFE and FEP, even liquids which attack conventional materials such as PP or PVC can now be safely transferred (except for elemental fluorine) with this barrel pump. The barrel pump is also suitable for transferring ultra-pure liquids. The stopcock prevents hazardous vapours from escaping, and stops dripping after trans- fer. Barrel pump with rigid discharge tube with stopcock made of PTFE or with flexible discharge hose made of PTFE, length of 1.2 m and stopcock made of PVDF. • Immersion tube Ø 32 mm • All valves are made of solid PTFE/PVDF • Top quality – 3 years’ warranty • Barrel screw joints for commercially available containers available as accessories 1 PTFE barrel pump Ultrapure – discharge tube Immersion depth mm 400 600 950 Delivery rate/stroke ml 180 270 400 Immersion tube Ø mm 32 32 32 2 PTFE barrel pump Ultrapure – discharge hose Immersion depth mm 400 600 950 Delivery rate/stroke ml 180 270 400 Immersion tube Ø mm 32 32 32 Order No. 10 04 56040 10 04 56060 10 04 56061 Order No. 10 04 55640 10 04 55660 10 04 55661 Barrel connectors Article Order No. 3 Barrel coupling made of PP for R2 ″, steel barrel female thread 29 05 12113 4 Barrel coupling made of PP for Mauser 2 ″, coarse female thread 29 05 12115 5 Barrel coupling made of PP for Tri-Sure, coarse female thread 29 05 12116 6 Barrel stopper made of PVC for container openings with Ø from 29 05 12114 40 to 70 mm Stainless Steel Pumps, BÜRKLE Foot operated solvent pump made of stainless steel for ultrapure liquids. The medium only comes into contact with stainless steel and PTFE. The barrel screw joint and the stopcock mean that the container and pump can be sealed hermetically to prevent unwanted vapors from escaping after the filling process. • Stepless adjustment of immersion tube length • For ultrapure solvents • Rigid discharge tube with stainless steel/PTFE stopcock or discharge hose • For stainless steel drums with R 2 ″ connecting piece • 5-year warranty Article 7 Foot operated solvent pump with 8 Foot operated solvent pump with discharge tube discharge hose Immersion depth max. cm 95 Flow rate l/min 20 Tubing Ø mm 18 Order No. 10 04 50311 95 20 18 10 04 50330 Hand operated solvent pump For contamination-free removal of organic solvents and flavouring substances. Compat- ible with the stainless steel drums 10 l and 25 l with R 2 ″ fine thread, which are common- ly used in laboratories. The pump is gas-proof and completely lockable by means of 2 ball cocks. Parts which have contact with medium are made of stainless steel, seals made of PTFE. • Stepless adjustment of immersion tube length. Vers. 9 with discharge tube AT for tin-foil canisters Accessories Article Antistatics set in case Immersion D max. cm 60 60 Flow rate l/min Connec. thread Order No. 10 10 10 04 50310 for pull-out spouts 10 04 50320 Order No. 29 05 13013 Continued on next page 3 4 6 5 co d e b e w co d e b e w WWR4Q052 WWR4Q042 7 8 452

454

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps AK AL AK Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps Solvent pump Mini The solvent pump Mini is a hand pump for small containers like flasks and canisters up to approx. 5 liters. All medium-contacting parts of the solvent pump Mini are made out of high quality stain- less steel and PTFE, wich are known for their outstanding chemical resistance and their perfect adequacy for ultra-pure liquids. Due to the conductive materials it is especially appropriate for easily flammable liquids e.g. acetone, isopropanol, ethanol. Article Solvent pump Mini Thread adapter Thread adapter Thread adapter Material Thread Stainless steel/PTFE GL 45 PTFE ETFE ETFE GL 45/S 40 GL 45/GL 38 GL 45/GL 32 Order No. 10 04 50340 10 04 56400 10 04 56402 10 04 56403 9 AT Pump-it Drum Pump, BÜRKLE Canister pump for acids, alkalis and petrochemical liquids. Pump-it is used for emptying canisters, carboys and barrels quickly and safely. Easy to use: an overpressure in the container is created by pressing down the hand lever several times and the shut-off valve is then opened – the liquid flows out. • Barrel connection 64 mm dia. (BSI) • With the adapter set Pump-it fits all commercially available containers • Medium-contacting parts: polypropylene, FKM and PE • Not suitable for hydrochloric acid! Pump-it drum pump AL Article Pump-it drum pump Immersion tube length cm 100 Flow rate l/min 8 Order No. 29 05 00800 Adapter set For all standard container threads. Article Adapter set Order No. 29 05 00820 co d e b e w WWR4Q013 PumpMaster Container Pumps, BÜRKLE The manual pressure pump is suited for drawing off, decanting and emptying canisters and barrels. The hand pump is used to create excess pressure that forces the liquid out of the container. The stopcock also allows extraction of small quantities of liquid. The PumpMaster container pump is mounted on the container using a flexible stopper with a variable and adjustable diameter. No special thread adapters are required. PumpMaster fits all commercial container openings with a diameter from 46.5 mm to 60 mm. The im- mersion tube has a length of 95 cm and it can be shortened depending on the size of the container. PP/PE material. PumpMaster container pump for petrochemical liquids co d e b e w WWR4Q058 AO AN AM Seal Colour AM Nitrile rubber blue grey Flow rate l/min 8 Immersion depth cm 95 Order No. 10 04 52300 PumpMaster container pump for non-aggressive liquids Seal Colour AN EPDM red Flow rate l/min 8 Immersion depth cm 95 Order No. 10 04 52200 PumpMaster for acids and chemical liquids Seal AO FKM Accessories Colour green Flow rate l/min 8 Immersion depth cm 95 Order No. 10 04 52100 Article Discharge hose with shut-off valve for PumpMaster for petroche- Discharge hose with shut-off valve for PumpMaster for aqueous Discharge hose with shut-off valve for PumpMaster for acids and Order No. 10 04 52301 10 04 52201 10 04 52111 mical liquids liquids chemical liquids co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 453

455

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps co d e b e w WWR4Q062 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWR4Q014 Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps Dosing Pump Dosi-Pump, BÜRKLE 5 1 Dosing pumps suitable for barrels, canisters, carboys or bottles, for dosing liquids of different viscosities. Dosing pumps are mounted by you in your existing container closure (see the locating bore table). To do this, a suitable hole is drilled in the cap. Then the pump is inserted through the hole and screwed in place from below. A matching container connection is not included in the scope of delivery. Medium-contacting parts made of PP, PE and stainless steel. Stroke ml 1 4 2 30 3 30 4 100 5 250 Drillhole Ø mm 22 28.5 22.5 28.5 28.5 Immersion depth cm 25 38.5 33.5 29.5 41.5 Order No. 10 04 57004 10 04 57030 10 04 57031 10 04 57101 10 04 57250 Syphons, BÜRKLE Easy-to-use device for the rapid transfer of liquids from a higher container to a lower one. Functions according to the siphoning principle – liquids need only to be primed once. Material 6 LDPE/PVC/PP Immersion depth cm 100 Tube I.D. mm 15 Flow rate l/min 9 Order No. 29 05 26002 6 Electrical Pumps, BÜRKLE co d e b e w WWR4Q041 7 8 454 AkkuPump Innova Bürkle barrel pumps AccuOne and EnergyOne with the unique hybrid system ensure fast, flexible and convenient filling. The pumps are equipped with two different power supply systems: AccuOne, driven by a high-performance rechargeable battery or EnergyOne, with a pow- er cable for direct connection to mains electricity. Innovative new feature: The power supply units are interchangeable! The rechargeable battery or the power supply unit are fitted with a clip lock and are removable. They can be exchanged quickly and easily. Thus AccuOne can also be operated with the power supply cable unit and EnergyOne can be operated with the rechargeable battery. With a replacement rechargeable battery as an accessory, you never have to wait for charging. The drive can also be disconnected quickly and easily from the pump station with a clip lock. This makes it possible to use one drive for filling at several stationary pump stations. AccuOne and EnergyOne are designed for applications in which even very small amounts of liquid can be added to small containers with narrow openings. The TouchPanel features a foil keyboard, sealed against dust, dirt and water. The key- board can be used to regulate the flow rate continuously and precisely from 0.4 litres/min to 12 litres/min. In addition to the discharge tube, a flexible discharge hose with nozzle is available as an option. The light and powerful pumps are made of high-quality materials, PP, PTFE and Hastelloy C, to ensure outstanding chemical resistance. This also makes them suitable for dispensing acids and bases. Please make note of detailed information related to chemical resistance! AccuOne and EnergyOne: Maximum pumping capacity 12 litres/min., discharge con- nection 3/4 ″, parts in contact with media: shaft Hastelloy C, pump station PP, seals PTFE AccuOne: Battery type Li-Ion, voltage 14.4 V, electrical charge 1.5 Ah, rechargeable bat- tery capacity up to 600 litres, weight 750 g EnergyOne: Power supply via 230 V power supply unit, weight 580 g Article Immersion tube L mm 7 AccuOne with battery, rigid discharge tube and charger 500 7 AccuOne with battery, rigid discharge tube and charger 700 7 AccuOne with battery, rigid discharge tube and charger 1000 8 EnergyOne with power supply unit and rigid discharge tube 500 8 EnergyOne with power supply unit and rigid discharge tube 700 8 EnergyOne with power supply unit and rigid discharge tube 1000 Order No. 10 04 51051 10 04 51071 10 04 51101 10 04 52051 10 04 52071 10 04 52101 Accessories on request.

456

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps Peristaltic Pumps rotarus® Pump Family, Hirschmann rotarus® pumps The portfolio of different motors, housings of various protection classes, and intelligent control of the conveyed volumes offers the choice from a consistently designed product family which covers a wide range of applications in laboratory and industry. Motors with 50 and 100 Watt ensure accurate conveyance in speed ranges of 0.2 to 500 revolutions per minute, allowing for exact dosing of highly viscous substances. For pump head and hose detection, RFID technology is used. The setting data for basic parameters can likewise be stored and called up again in this way. The variants rotarus® flow and rotarus® volume are equipped with functions for automatic clogging detection and leak- age monitoring for the hose. co d e b e w WW4ZV078 Type Version stainless steel 1 standard 50 white powder-coated standard 50i standard 100 white powder-coated standard 100i stainless steel flow 50 flow 50i flow 100 flow 100i volume 50 volume 50i volume 100 volume 100i white powder-coated stainless steel white powder-coated stainless steel white powder-coated stainless steel white powder-coated stainless steel Resolution 1/min Speed 1/min 0.2–100 0.1 0.2–100 0.1 0.1 5–500 5–500 0.1 0.2–100 0.1 0.2–100 0.1 0.1 5–500 5–500 0.1 0.2–100 0.1 0.2–100 0.1 0.1 5–500 5–500 0.1 Safety class IP 54 IP 65 IP 54 IP 65 IP 54 IP 65 IP 54 IP 65 IP 54 IP 65 IP 54 IP 65 Order No. 10 37 01322 10 37 01324 10 37 01522 10 37 01524 10 37 01343 10 37 01344 10 37 01542 10 37 01544 10 37 01362 10 37 01364 10 37 01562 10 37 01564 2 rotarus® smart rotarus® smart rounds off the selection of rotarus® pump drives in the basic segment. The control panel on the housing enables simple and rapid configuration of the most important parameters, and the speed can be programmed directly on the unit. Thanks to its small footprint, rotarus® smart can be easily integrated in an existing laboratory environment or production system. Items supplied: rotarus®, external power pack, connection cable for EU, UK, US Techincal data: Flow rate range (depending on pump head): Speed setting: Max. power consuption: Protection class: Weight: Dimensions (D×W×H): Power supply: 190 × 83 × 220 mm 225 × 83 × 220 mm rotarus® smart 30 3.79 – 4200 ml/min rotarus® smart 40 10 – 2300 ml/min 100 – 240 VAC; 50 – 60 Hz 0.1 rpm (steps) 100 W IP43 4.4 kg 4.7 kg Article rotarus® smart 30 rotarus® smart 40 Power rating W 30 W 40 W Speed range 1/min 10 – 350 3 – 200 Order No. 10 37 01132 10 37 01232 rotarus® pump heads The rotarus® program comprises a wide selection of single-channel and multi-channel pump heads. The connection technology of the pump heads has been optimized for quick handling. Quick and easy change of heads, single-handedly and without tools. With adapter for unproblematic use of pump heads by other manufacturers. The rotarus® single-channel pump heads can be cascaded easily: Several single-channel pump heads can be stacked on top of each other and operated with a rotarus® pump. Quantity rollers Gears Ducts Type 3 rotarus® PK 10-16-3 1-channel, WS 1.6 3 4 rotarus® PK 10-16-5 1-channel, WS 1.6 5 rotarus® PK 10-24-3 1-channel, WS 2.4 3 rotarus® MKF 4-8 4-channel 8 5 rotarus® MKF 8-4 8-channel 4 rotarus® MKF 12-8 8 12-channel Individual accessories on request. — — — — — 5:1 Order No. 10 37 02020 10 37 02022 10 37 02021 10 37 08020 10 37 08021 10 37 08022 rotarus® peristaltic pump heads 1-channel Favourably priced pump head made of durable PPS plastic for continuous delivery or precise dosing of target volumes. Pump head can be unlocked for easy insertion of the hose. For connection to the Hirschmann rotarus® drives, one of the two PKF-60 adapter kits is required. Type 6 rotarus® PKF 60-16-3 7 rotarus® PKF 60-24-3 Ducts 1 1 Quantity rollers Tubing 3 3 WT 1.6 mm 10 37 06060 WT 2.4 mm 10 37 06061 Order No. 1 2 3 5 6 4 7 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 455 Continued on next page

457

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps 1 5 3 2 4 6 7 8 9 Peristaltic Pumps rotarus® peristaltic pump heads multichannel Pump head made of durable PPS plastic for continuous delivery or precise dosing of target volumes, with sturdy hose cassettes with screws for precise adjustment of the delivery rate. For connection to the Hirschmann rotarus® drives, one of the two PKF-60 adapter kits is required. Type 1 rotarus® MKF 60-2-8 2 2 rotarus® MKF 60-4-8 4 3 rotarus® MKF 60-8-8 8 Ducts Quantity rollers Tubing 8 8 8 stopper tubing stopper tubing stopper tubing Order No. 10 37 08062 10 37 08063 10 37 08064 rotarus® peristaltic pump heads multichannel New type of pump head made of durable PPS plastic for continuous delivery or precise dosing of target volumes, with sturdy hose cassettes and integrated hose lock as well as fixed distance between rollers and hose bed; for use with standard upmp hoses without stopper in a multi-channel pump head. For connection to the Hirschmann rotarus® drives, one of the two PKF-60 adapter kits is required. Type 4 rotarus® MKF 60-16-2-4 2 5 rotarus® MKF 60-16-2-4 4 Ducts Quantity rollers Tubing Order No. 4 4 WT 1.6 mm 10 37 08565 WT 1.6 mm 10 37 08566 Adapter sets Article 6 rotarus® adapter set PKF 60 for Hirschmann drives 7 rotarus® adapter set PKF 60 for Hirschmann drives with RFID 8 rotarus® adapter set MKF 60 for Hirschmann drives 9 rotarus® adapter set MKF 60 for Hirschmann drives with RFID function function Order No. 10 37 31660 10 37 31661 10 37 31665 10 37 31666 rotarus® smart 30 peristaltic pump set Precise delivery pump with favourably priced pump head made of durable PPS plastic; for easy insertion of the hose by unlocking the pump head, or for use with sturdy hose cassettes and screw for fine adjustment of the delivery in the multi-channel head. Ideal for delivery of low-viscosity media. The speed and the main parameters can be set at a TFT touchscreen directly on the housing. Housing: white Motor type: DC motor Comprised in the scope of delivery: rotarus® smart 30 pump with pump head and match- ing adapter set, power pack with EU, UK, US adapter, and sensor interface. Order No. Article Speed range rpm 10 – 350 Protec- tion type IP 43 10 37 13260 AT rotarus® smart 30 with pump head AK rotarus® smart 30 with pump head 11 – 350 IP 44 10 37 13262 PKF 60-16-3 MKF 60-4-8 rotarus® smart 40 peristaltic pump set Precise delivery pump with favourably priced pump head made of durable PPS plastic; for easy insertion of the hose by unlocking the pump head, or for use with sturdy hose cassettes and screw for fine adjustment of the delivery in the multi-channel head. Ideal also for delivery of higher-viscosity media. The speed and the main parameters can be set at a TFT touchscreen directly on the housing. Housing: white Motor type: DC motor Comprised in the scope of delivery: rotarus® smart 40 pump with pump head and match- ing adapter set, power pack with EU, UK, US adapter, and sensor interface. Order No. Article Speed range rpm 3 – 200 Protec- tion type IP 43 10 37 23261 AT AK AL rotarus® smart 40 with pump head PKF 60-24-3 rotarus® accessories Extensive range of specifically developed accessories for maximum adaptability. Article AM rotarus® pedal switch Keeps both hands free for more freedom of action AN rotarus® mouse For extremely sensitive dosing of substances AO rotarus® system platform Non-skid utility space for the rotarus operating module with cable guide AP rotarus® control unit holder For placement of the operating module on the rotarus Order No. 10 37 31120 10 37 31121 10 37 31161 10 37 31162 Continued on next page AL 456 AR

458

Peristaltic Pumps Pump Systems Liquid Pumps Article AQ rotarus® stacking sid For stacking 2 or more rotarus units AR rotarus® stand holder For use with a stand holder Adapter plate for MASTERFLEX pump heads Adapter plate for ISMATEC pump heads For connection of the units with the serial interface (9-pole) rotarus® KFS, cassette small rotarus® KFS, cassette medium rotarus® data power cabel, 2 m Order No. 10 37 31163 10 37 31170 10 37 31220 10 37 31221 10 37 31250 10 37 31251 10 37 31142 rotarus® data power cabel, 5 m For connection of the units with the serial interface (9-pole) 10 37 31143 rotarus® data power cabel, 10 m For connection of the units with the serial interface (9-pole) 10 37 31144 rotarus® RS232 cabel, 2 m rotarus® USB cabel For connection of the units with the USB interface of the PC 10 37 31145 10 37 31146 rotarus® control cable, 2 m, 3-pole rotarus® control cable analog, 2 m, 5-pole Screw-on set cascading, for 2 single-channel pump heads Screw-on set cascading, for 3 single-channel pump heads 10 37 31147 10 37 31148 10 37 31222 10 37 31223 AM AN AO AP Tubes (selection) Exclusive Hirschmann product with integrated tag for automatic hose detection by means of RFID technology. Saves time and prevents errors in every work. Many other hose sizes and materials available. Type Inner Ø mm Pharmed BPT 2 Stopper 104 1.42 Pharmed BPT 8.0 Tygon 3350 2 Stopper 104 2.79 Tygon 3350 3.2 Tygon 3350 9.5 Wall thickness mm 0.86 1.6 0.86 1.6 2.4 Length m 0.38 7,5 0.38 15 15 PU pc 6 6 Order No. 10 37 13717 10 37 13017 10 37 17725 10 37 17013 10 37 17038 AQ rotarus® fast, Hirschmann rotarus® fast has been designed specifically for combination with positive displacement pump heads. The homogenous geometry of the pump head adaption also facilitates use of all peristaltic pump heads in the rotarus® family. rotarus® fast embodies maximum in- telligence and can be used as a delivery or dispensing pump. As in the entire rotarus® family, the parameters required for this can be programmed in an extremely clear and self-explanatory manner using a TFT touchscreen. The RFID technology detects the fitted pump head, and the rotarus® fast adjusts auto- matically to the appropriate parameters without the intervention of the operator. This en- ables, for example, automatic activation of the maximum speed best suited to the pump head. Thus, the optimum pump head delivery rate is exploited while wear is reduced to a minimum. Items supplied: rotarus® fast, external power pack, connection cable for EU, UK, US, operating module Techical data: Engine power: Speed range: Flow rate range: Speed setting: Max. power consumption: Weight: Dimensions (D×W×H): Power supply: 85 W 50 – 3100 rpm 0.25 – 2304 ml/min (depending on pump head) 0.1 rpm (steps) 150 W 10.1 kg 270 × 100 × 220 mm 100 – 240 VAC; 50 – 60 Hz co d e b e w WW4ZV079 AS Article rotarus® fast 80 AS rotarus® fast 80i co d e b e w Safety class IP54 IP65 Order No. 10 37 01872 10 37 01874 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 457

459

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps co d e b e w WW4ZV081 Peristaltic Pumps rotarus® Swash Plate Piston Pump Heads, Hirschmann Continuous delivery, intelligent control. The delivery of the medium is enabled through the stroke of the piston at an oblique angle to the drive axis. Changing the pump head angle sets the displaced volume. The simultaneous rotation of the piston causes the pump to change from suction to ejection. The exact same volume is conveyed by the piston stroke during each rotation, achieving the same high degree of dispensing precision possible with a piston pump. In combination with the speed, the desired flow rate is reached. The pump head with the piston is available in different materials. Please refer to the material index below to see which versions are available in ceramics or stainless steel for the me- dium to be dispensed or for your application. 1 2 co d e b e w WWXKS032 3 458 Typ Piston size RH 00/0/1 QP Q0/Q1-Q3 Piston mate- rial C = Ceramics K = Kynar (PVDF) C = Ceramics Piston housing material Cylinder mate- rial Options LF = other hose connections, low flow rates W = Connections for rinsing S = Stainless steel SAN = Sani- tary T = Tefzel (ETFE) Y = Carbon S = Stainless steel SAN = Sanitary SAN = Sanitary WT = Connections for rinsing and tem- pering Article rotarus® TKF RH00 CKC-LF 1 rotarus® TKF RH0 CKC rotarus® TKF RH0 CTC rotarus® TKF RH1 CKC rotarus® TKF RH1 CTC 2 rotarus® TKF QP-Q1 CKC rotarus® TKF QP-Q1 CSC rotarus® TKF QP-Q2 CKC rotarus® TKF QP-Q2 CSC rotarus® TKF QP-Q3 CKC rotarus® TKF QP-Q3 CSC Adjustable piston displacement µl 2.5 – 25 5.0 – 50 5.0 – 50 10.0 – 100 10.0 – 100 12.8 – 320 12.8 – 320 28.8 – 720 28.8 – 720 51.2 – 1280 51.2 – 1280 Order No. 10 37 06121 10 37 06141 10 37 06143 10 37 06161 10 37 06163 10 37 06231 10 37 06232 10 37 06251 10 37 06252 10 37 06271 10 37 06272 Peristaltic Pumps, Behr 3 Peristaltic pumps PLP33/PLP66/PLP330/PLP1000 the behrotest peristaltic pumps PLP are suitable for the discontinued transport of watery solutions / non aggressive applications. They find their application in the laboratory, the food industry as well as in the analytical, medicinal or biological field. The RPM (rotation per minute) can be adjusted manually and the flow direction can be amended. These PLP pumps have angle connectors to which tubing can be attached either with or without additional brackets, depending on the tube size. Type PLP33 PLP66 PLP330 PLP1000 Power rating W 10 10 10 10 Flow rate ml/min 7 – 33 17 – 66 66 – 400 250 – 1000 Accessories for PLP33/PLP66/PLP330/PLP1000 for PLP33/PLP66/PLP330/PLP1000, Silikon, length 5 m Article Outer tubing for PLP33/PLP66/PLP330/PLP1000 Exchange tubing pump head Exchange tubing pump head for PLP330/PLP1000, Silikon for PLP33/PLP66, Silikon Order No. 58 48 70102 58 48 70104 58 48 70120 58 48 70160 Order No. 10 48 70946 10 48 70914 10 48 70913 Continued on next page

460

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps Peristaltic Pumps Multi channel peristaltic pump PLP380 For the Dülabo peristaltic pump PLP380 there are different pump heads which can be applied, this results in flexibility in your day to day usage, enabling multiple tubing sizes being applicable. Depending on the tubing material in use, this pump type can be used for various chemicals, korrosive and aggressive as well as sterile solutions. The user friendly membrane keyboard enables the user to regulate the flow speed (RPM) using the switch arrays. Furthermore the user can make use of the special button on the membrane keyboard which activates a “quick flow mode”. Via RS485 or other external adapters for other sig- nals, steering the pump externally is also possible. Additionally a foot switch can be attached to the pump to enable the pumping function as long as the foot switch is acti- vated. Type 4 PLP380 Speed rpm 0.1 - 100 Speed accuracy rpm 0.1 Flow rate ml/min 0.00014 – 380 Order No. 10 48 54739 Pump heads and flowrate for PLP380 Type Speed max. l/min PPH103 600 PPH303 600 Quantity rollers 3 3 Quantity channels 1 1 Flow rate/channel l/min 0.07 – 380 1.7 – 150 Order No. 10 48 54745 10 48 54746 Micro volume tubing Type Speed max. l/min PPH5061 100 PPH5062 100 PPH5064 100 Quantity rollers 6 6 6 Quantity channels 1 2 4 Flow rate/channel l/min 0.000025 – 48 0.000025 – 48 0.000025 – 48 Order No. 10 48 54747 10 48 91218 10 48 55177 Multichannel peristaltic pump PLP2200 For the Dülabo peristaltic pump PLP2200 there are different pump heads which can be applied, this results in flexibility in your day to day usage, enabling multiple tubing sizes being applicable. Depending on the tubing material in use, this pump type can be used for various chemicals, korrosive and aggressive as well as sterile solutions. The user friendly membrane keyboard enables the user to regulate the flow speed (RPM) using the switch arrays. Additionally a foot switch can be attached to the pump to enable the pumping function as long as the foot switch is activated. Furthermore the user can make use of the special button on the membrane keyboard which activates a “quick flow mode”. Via RS485 or other external adapters for other signals, steering the pump externally is also possible. Type 5 PLP2200 Speed rpm 1 – 600 Speed accuracy rpm 1 Flow rate l/min 0.06 – 2200 Order No. 10 48 54742 Pump heads and flowrate for PLP2200 Type Speed max. l/min PPH103 600 PPH303 600 Quantity rollers 3 3 Quantity channels 1 1 Flow rate/channel ml/min 0,07 – 380 1.6 – 1600 Order No. 10 48 54745 10 48 54746 Multichannel peristaltic pump PLP6000 For the Dülabo peristaltic pump PLP6000 with a powerful pump motor there are different pump heads which can be applied, this results in flexibility in your day to day usage, en- abling multiple tubing sizes and variable flowrates being applicable. This pump type has the additional option of attaching “multiple” pump heads to enable multi channel applica- tions for bigger tubing and flowrates. Additionally a foot switch can be attached to the pump to enable the pumping function as long as the foot switch is activated. Depending on the tubing material in use, this pump type can be used for various chemi- cals, korrosive and aggressive as well as sterile solutions. The user friendly membrane keyboard enables the user to regulate the flow speed (RPM) using the switch arrays. Furthermore the user can make use of the special button on the membrane keyboard which activates a “quick flow mode”. Via RS485 or other external adapters for other sig- nals, steering the pump externally is also possible. Type 6 PLP6000 Speed rpm 60 –600 co d e b e w Speed accuracy rpm 1 Flow rate l/min 3.8 – 6000 Order No. 10 48 54744 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 4 5 6 459

461

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps 1 2 Peristaltic Pumps Pumpheads and flowrates for PLP6000 Type Speed max. l/min PPH103 600 PPH303 600 1 PPH603 600 PPH7042 600 Quantity rollers 3 3 3 4 Quantity channels 1 1 1 2 Flow rate/channel ml/min 4.2 – 2200 100 – 1600 200 – 6000 50 – 1800 Order No. 10 48 54745 10 48 54746 10 48 91217 10 48 54750 Accessories for peristaltic pumps PLP380, PLP2000, PLP6000 Interface adapter Volt2 Interface adapter Volt1 Article 2 Foot switch B1 The pump functions are active as long as the foot switch is active. Signal 0 – 5 V Signal 5 – 10 V Signal 4 – 20 mA Signal 0 – 10 kHz Communication interface adapter Signal RS485 Interface adapter mA Interface adapter kHz Order No. 10 48 16107 10 48 16111 10 48 16112 10 48 16113 10 48 16114 10 48 16115 Laboratory peristaltic pumps VLP2100 & VLP6100 The VLP peristaltic pump line is an automated and programmable pump type with dosing and calibrating functions to easen your day to day work in the field of application. The VLP pumps have a 4,3 inch LCD touch display enabling the access to all further programmable features. The RPM flow rate speed can be entered manually on the unit itself or using a external RS485 Adapter or using other signa adapters for enhanced flexibility in the lab. These pump types are not only reliable helpers with their programmable features, they are designed for a maximum precision for micro flow applications as well as for the normal flow rates using standard tubes sizes or microtubing, depending on the pump head in use. These pump types can also be connected with multiple single channel pump heads for a multi channel application on normal tubing sizes. Depending on the tubing material in use, this pump type can be used for various chemicals, korrosive and aggressive as well as sterile solutions. Type Speed rpm Control precision rpm VLP2100 0.1 – 600 0.1 3 VLP6100 0.1 – 600 0.1 Power rating W 50 50 Order No. Flow rate l/min 0.00014 – 933 10 48 02100 0.00014 – 1600 10 48 06100 3 460 4 Pumpheads and flowrates for VLP2100 Specials: PPH5062: 2 tubes can be used at the same time PPH5064 / PPH5068: 4 tubes can be used at the same time Type PPH103 PPH303 4 PPH5061 PPH5062 PPH5064 PPH5068 Quantity rollers 3 3 6 6 6 6 Quantity channels 1 1 1 2 4 8 Flow rate ml/min max. 2200 max. 1600 0.00025 – 48 0.00025 – 48 0.00025 – 48 0.00025 – 48 Flow rate ml/min 0.007 – 1283.33 0.16 – 933.33 0.0014 – 62.28 0.0014 – 62.28 0.0014 – 62.28 0.0014 – 62.28 Order No. 10 48 54745 10 48 54746 10 48 54747 10 48 91218 10 48 55177 10 48 55179 Pumpheads and flowrates for VLP6100 Specials: PPH5062: 2 tubes can be used at the same time PPH5064 / PPH5068: 4 tubes can be used at the same time Type Quantity rollers PPH103 3 PPH303 3 PPH5061 6 PPH5062 6 PPH5064 6 PPH5068 6 Quantity channels 1 1 1 2 4 8 Flow rate ml/min max. 2200 max. 1600 0.00025 – 48 0.00025 – 48 0.00025 – 48 0.00025 – 48 Order No. Flow rate ml/min 0.007 – 1283.33 10 48 54745 0.16 – 933.33 10 48 54746 0.0014 – 62.28 10 48 54747 0.0014 – 62.28 10 48 91218 0.0014 – 62.28 10 48 55177 0.0014 – 62.28 10 48 55179

462

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps Peristaltic Pumps Peristaltic pumps, Landgraf With their different heads and various hose combinations, the Signal Fluid units cover a wide range of applications. Equipped with reliable motors, mature mechanical compo- nents and a solid housing, these pumps offer the perfect solution for all everyday labora- tory needs. Depending on the model series, the pumps are used for basic tasks, contin- uous pump operation, or for dispensing functions. Thanks to the large number of interfac- es, they can be easily integrated into automatic applications. co d e b e w WWHXJ028 Pump drives Model: Max. flow rate ml/min: Max. ducts up to 75 ml/min: Max. heads/ducts > 700 ml/min: Speed control: Time control: Flow calibration: Dispense mode: iPump S 2416 12 2 yes yes no no 6016 n/v 8 yes yes no no iPump S-W iPump L 2416 12 2 yes yes yes no iPump F 2416 12 2 yes yes yes no Type 1 iPump 2S iPump 2L iPump 2F iPump 4S iPump 4L 2 iPump 4F iPump 6S iPump 6S-W iPump 6L iPump 6F Speed up to 200 UPM/ 825 ml/min up to 200 UPM/ 825 ml/min up to 200 UPM/ 825 ml/min up to 400 UPM/ 1710 ml/min up to 400 UPM/ 1710 ml/min up to 400 UPM/ 1710 ml/min up to 600 UPM/ 2416 ml/min up to 600 UPM/ 2416 ml/min up to 600 UPM/ 2416 ml/min up to 600 UPM/ 2416 ml/min Order No. 10 67 23132 10 67 23162 10 67 23182 10 67 23134 10 67 23164 10 67 23184 10 67 23136 10 67 23156 10 67 23166 10 67 23186 1 Pump heads The difference between the pump heads YZ15A and YZ25A is the wall thickness of the respective hoses. The pump head YZ25A allows for higher pressures. Pump head 2 YZ15A YZ25A DG1A DG2A DG4A DG6A DG8A DG12A Compatibility Ducts all pumps all pumps iPump 2-S/L/F iPump 2-S/L/F iPump 2-S/L/F iPump 2-S/L/F iPump 2-S/L/F iPump 2-S/L/F 1 1 1 2 4 6 8 12 Max. flow rate ml/min 2416 1800 75 75 75 75 75 75 Order No. 10 67 23310 10 67 23311 10 67 23211 10 67 23221 10 67 23241 10 67 23261 10 67 23281 10 67 23292 2 Silikon tubes Pharma Grade Matching hoses must be inserted in the pump head. The volume range is determined by the inner diameter of the hose. Inner Ø mm 1.6 3.1 4.8 6.4 7.9 4.8 6.4 Wall thickness mm 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.4 2.4 Roller length m 15 15 15 15 7.5 15 15 Max. flow rate ml/min 180 450 900 1700 2400 900 1800 Order No. 10 67 23406 10 67 23408 10 67 23409 10 67 23410 10 67 23411 10 67 23412 10 67 23413 Minimum order quantity = 3 m Silicon tubes with 3 stoppers for DG1A-DG12A heads, pack. unit 6 tubes with 1 m Inner Ø mm Wall thickness mm 1 1 1 Max. flow rate ml/min 5 20 40 1 2 3 Order No. 10 67 23421 10 67 23422 10 67 23423 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 461

463

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps Peristaltic Pumps Compact Peristaltic Pumps, Phoenix Instrument With the compact peristaltic pumps SP-100 and SP-200, simple dosing tasks can be carried out economically in the laboratory or pilot plant. • OLED display • Antistatic ABS housing • Compact design • Low consumption • RS-485 interface SP-100 / SP-105 Technical data: Voltage: Power: Display: Operation: Speed: Pump rate: Max. no. pump heads: Interface: Analog inputs: Dimensions (W×D×H): Protection class: Weight: Article 1 Compact peristaltic pump SP-100 Compact peristaltic pump SP-105 SP-100 power supply, 12 DC < 10 W OLED turning knob+ push buttons turning knob+ push buttons 0.1 – 150 rpm 0.004 – 63.69 ml/min 1 USB, RS-485 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA 115 × 180 × 125 mm IP31 0.8 kg 0.1 – 350 rpm 0.004 – 149.23 ml/min 1 USB, RS-485 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA 115 × 180 × 125 mm IP31 0.8 kg SP-105 power supply, 12 DC < 10 W OLED Order No. 10 13 71000 10 13 71005 SP-200 / SP-205 Technical data: Voltage: Power: Display: Operation: Speed: Pump rate: Max. no. pump heads: Interface: Analog inputs: Dimensions (W×D×H): Protection class: Weight: Article 2 Compact peristaltic pump SP-200 Compact peristaltic pump SP-205 SP-205 power supply, 12 DC < 20 W OLED SP-200 power supply, 12 DC < 20 W OLED turning knob+ push buttons turning knob+ push buttons 0.1 – 150 rpm 0.08 – 398.27 ml/min 1 USB, RS-485 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA 129 × 190 × 135 mm IP31 1.1 kg 0.1 – 350 rpm 0.08 – 930 ml/min 1 USB, RS-485 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA 129 × 190 × 135 mm IP31 1.1 kg Order No. 10 13 72000 10 13 72051 co d e b e w WWSB5048 Accessories on request Peristaltic Pumps, Phoenix Instrument The peristaltic pumps of the SP-300 and SP-400 series with the available pump heads offer a wide range of different applications in industry, laboratories and universities. They can be individually integrated into different processes via the various inputs and outputs. Operation and control is intuitive via the large LCD displays. • 3.2 ″ LCD display • Calibration possible • RS-485, RS-232 • External control via 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA • Connection possibility for foot switch • Up to 4 pump heads • Low vibration and quiet running Peristaltic pumps SP-300 / SP-305 Technical data: Voltage: Power: Display: Operation: Speed: Pump rate: Max. no. pump heads: Interface: Analog inputs: Dimensions (W×D×H): Protection class: Weight: SP-105 230 V < 50 W 3,2 ″ LCD-Display SP-100 230 V < 50 W 3,2 ″ LCD-Display turning knob+ push buttons turning knob+ push buttons 0.1 – 150 rpm 0.007 – 570 ml/min 4 RS-232, RS-485 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA, impulse 157 × 324 × 237 mm IP31 4.4 kg 0.1 – 350 rpm 0.007 – 1330 ml/min 4 RS-232, RS-485 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA, impulse 157 × 324 × 237 mm IP31 4.4 kg Continued on next page 1 2 co d e b e w WWSB5041 3 462

464

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps Peristaltic Pumps Article 3 Peristaltic pump SP-300 Peristaltic pump SP-305 Peristaltic pumps SP-400 / SP-405 Technical data: Voltage: Power: Display: Operation: Speed: Pump rate: Max. no. pump heads: Interface: Analog inputs: Dimensions (W×D×H): Protection class: Weight: Article 4 Peristaltic pump SP-400 Peristaltic pump SP-405 SP-400 230 V < 50 W 4,3 ″ LCD display touch display 0.1 – 150 rpm 0.007 – 570 ml/min 4 RS-232, RS-485 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA, impulse 157 × 320 × 237 mm IP31 4.4 kg Accessories Article SPE300 Foot switch for SP-300/SP-400 SPE310 Hand-dispenser for SP-400 More accessories on request Diaphragm Liquid Pumps Order No. 10 13 70300 10 13 70305 SP-405 230 V < 50 W 4,3 ″ LCD display touch display 0.1 – 350 rpm 0.007 – 1330 ml/min 4 RS-232, RS-485 0 – 5 V, 4 – 20 mA, impulse 157 × 320 × 237 mm IP31 4.4 kg Order No. 10 13 70400 10 13 70405 Order No. 10 13 73040 10 13 73140 4 Chemically Resistant Diaphragm Liquid Pumps LIQUIPORT®, KNF Neuberger co d e b e w WWKVG006 Chemically resistant diaphragm liquid pumps LIQUIPORT® • Application: Delivery of fluids • Delivery rate from 0.2 to 3 l/min / pressure head up to 40 mWs, suction lift 3 mWC • Self-priming, dry run protected • Pump head available either in material version PP, PVDF or PTFE, PTFE-coated dia- • Housing spray water protected to IP65 • Delivery rate adjustable either manually (Version S) or manually and via external control phragm, valves of FFKM (Version RC) Technical data: Permissible gas temperature: +5 to +80°C Permissible gas and ambient temperature: +5 to +40°C Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: Weight: optionally PP, PVDF or PTFE PTFE-coated FFKM 1.0 kg (NF 100) 1.5 kg (NF 300) 99 × 177 × 130 mm (NF 100) 104 × 188 × 160 mm (NF 300) 5 Dimensions (B×H×T): Type Flow rate l/min 5 NF 100 KT.18 S 0.2 – 1.3 NF 100 TT.18 S 0.2 – 1.3 NF 100 FT.18 S 0.2 – 1.3 5 NF 1.100 KT.18 S 0.2 – 1.3 NF 1.100 TT.18 S 0.2 – 1.3 NF 1.100 FT.18 S 0.2 – 1.3 5 NF 100 KT.18 RC 0.2 – 1.3 NF 100 TT.18 RC 0.2 – 1.3 NF 100 FT.18 RC 0.2 – 1.3 5 NF 1.100 KT.18 RC 0.2 – 1.3 NF 1.100 TT.18 RC 0.2 – 1.3 NF 1.100 FT.18 RC 0.2 – 1.3 6 NF 300 KT.18 S 0.5 – 3.0 NF 300 TT.18 S 0.5 – 3.0 NF 300 FT.18 S 0.5 – 3.0 6 NF 1.300 KT.18 S 0.5 – 3.0 NF 1.300 TT.18 S 0.5 – 3.0 NF 1.300 FT.18 S 0.5 – 3.0 co d e b e w Suction head mWC 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Pressure head mWC 10 10 10 40 40 40 10 10 10 40 40 40 10 10 10 40 40 40 Pump head Order No. PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE 56 62 60010 56 62 60050 56 62 60030 10 62 73699 10 62 73700 10 62 73701 10 62 73702 10 62 73703 10 62 73704 10 62 73705 10 62 73706 10 62 73707 56 62 60020 56 62 60060 56 62 60040 10 62 73687 10 62 73688 10 62 73689 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 6 463

465

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps 3 2 1 4 5 6 464 co d e b e w WWKVG009 Diaphragm Liquid Pumps Type Flow rate l/min 1 NF 300 KT.18 RC 0.5 – 3.0 NF 300 TT.18 RC 0.5 – 3.0 NF 300 FT.18 RC 0.5 – 3.0 1 NF 1.300 KT.18 RC 0.5 – 3.0 NF 1.300 TT.18 RC 0.5 – 3.0 NF 1.300 FT.18 RC 0.5 – 3.0 Suction head mWC 3 3 3 3 3 3 Pressure head mWC 10 10 10 40 40 40 Pump head PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE Order No. 10 62 73690 10 62 73691 10 62 73692 10 62 73693 10 62 73694 10 62 73695 Accessories for chemically resistant diaphragm liquid pumps Article 2 Tripod holder (without tripod and without tripod clamp) 3 Wall mount 4 Foot switch start/stop for RC(P)-version Order No. 10 62 70474 10 62 70473 10 62 75872 Chemically Resistant Diaphragm Dosing Pumps SIMDOS®, KNF Neuberger Chemically-resistant diaphragm dosing pumps • Application: dosing of fluids • Delivery rate 0.03 to 100 ml/min / pressure height 60 mWC, suction height 2 mWC or 3 mWC • Pump head available either in material version PP, PVDF, or PTFE • Diaphragms PTFE-coated, valves of FFKM • Delivery rate adjustable either manually (Version S) or manually and via external control, and including interface RS 232 (Version RC) • Additional safety diaphragm for maximum protection • Comfortable change of the delivery diaphragm: Simply enable the maintenance com- mand stored in the operation program Benefits: • Intuitive operation, easy calibration • Can be set according to the fluid characteristics • Repeatability / reproducibility ± 1% • Self-priming and dry run protected • Hose-proof IP65 • Small overall size Technical data: Flow rate: Pressure height: Suction height: 0.03 to 20 ml/min (SIMDOS 02) 1 to 100 ml/min (SIMDOS 10) 60 mWS 2 mWS (SIMDOS 02) 3 mWS (SIMDOS 10) Permissible media temperature: +5 to +80°C Permissible ambient temperature: +5 to +40°C Weight: Dimensions W×H×D: Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: Article 0.9 kg 93 x 144 x 150 mm optionally PP, PVDF or PTFE PTFE FFKM Type SIMDOS® 02 SIMDOS® 02 5 SIMDOS® 02 SIMDOS® 02 SIMDOS® 02 5 SIMDOS® 02 6 SIMDOS® 10 SIMDOS® 10 SIMDOS® 10 6 SIMDOS® 10 SIMDOS® 10 SIMDOS® 10 FEM 1.02 KT.18 S FEM 1.02 TT.18 S FEM 1.02 FT.18 S FEM 1.02 KT.18RCP FEM 1.02 TT.18RCP FEM 1.02 FT.18RCP FEM 1.10 KT.18 S FEM 1.10 TT.18 S FEM 1.10 FT.18 S FEM 1.10 KT.18RCP FEM 1.10 TT.18RCP FEM 1.10 FT.18RCP Pump head PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE PP PVDF PTFE Order No. 10 62 71281 10 62 71282 10 62 71283 10 62 75467 10 62 76467 10 62 77467 10 62 71181 10 62 71182 10 62 71183 10 62 71184 10 62 71185 10 62 71186 Accessories for chemically-resistant diaphragm dosing pumps Article Tripod holder (without tripod and without tripod clamp) Wall mount Foot switch start/stop for RC(P)-version In-line filter FS 60 T PVDF, mesh size 70 µm, SIMDOS® 02 In-line filter FS 60 X PEEK, mesh size 70 µm, SIMDOS® 02 In-line filter FS 25 T PVDF, mesh size 70 µm, SIMDOS® 10 In-line filter FS 25 X PEEK, mesh size 35 µm, SIMDOS® 10 Order No. 10 62 70474 10 62 70473 10 62 75872 10 62 75210 10 62 75212 10 62 75211 10 62 75213

466

Pump Systems Liquid Pumps / Vacuum Technology Syringe Pumps Syringe Pumps, Landgraf Syringe pumps for syringes up to 60 ml Sturdy units for use in laboratory for constant volume dispensing and dispensing tasks. All common plastic and glass syringes can be used. By combining different syringes and pump rates, depending on the model volumes of 1 µl/h to over 18 l/h can be set. Combine 2 pumps with appropriate valves to achieve a continuous pumping operation. The model LA-120 can be operated simultaneously with 2 syringes of different sizes. The model LA-30 cannot be operated with the accessories. co d e b e w WWHXJ023 Type Quantity syringes LA-30 1 1 LA-110 1 LA-102 1 LA-100 1 LA-120 2 2 LA-160 6 LA-180 8 1 LA-800 1 max. syringe size ml 100 100 100 100 100 60 10 200 max. syringe size ml/h 1600 6120 150 2100 7500 1330 360 18000 RS-232 programmable unit Order No. no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 10 67 20030 10 67 20110 10 67 20130 10 67 20100 10 67 20120 10 67 20160 10 67 20180 10 67 20800 (the units are not permitted for use for clinical purposes on human beings) Accessories Article Foot switch PC connecting cable RS-232 Network cable for connecting several pumps Extension kit for connecting several pumps with each other for continuous pump operation (2 pumps required) Order No. 10 67 20105 10 67 20101 10 67 20103 10 67 20104 1 2 Diaphragm and Piston Pumps Diaphragm Vacuum Pumps LABOPORT®, KNF Neuberger Diaphragm vacuum pumps LABOPORT® • Application: Filtration, SPE, outgassing, fluid extraction via vacuum • Delivery rate max. 1.8 m³/h and a final vacuum of max. 15 mbar abs. • In the N 938.50 KT.18, the two pump heads have a parallel and series connection for extremely fast evacuation • The N 86 KT.18 has a very small footprint (90 × 141 × 164 mm) • PTFE-coated diaphragms for aggressive/corrosive gases and vapours Technical data: Connectors for tube mm: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: ID4 (N 86 KT.18) ID6 (N 816.3 KT.18, N 816.1.2 KT.18) ID10 (N 938.50 KT.18) +5 to +40°C PPS PTFE coated FFPM 3 4 Type 3 N 86 KT.18 4 N 816.3 KT.18 4 N 816.1.2 KT.18 1.8 5 N 938.50 KT.18 1.8 Ultimate vacuum abs. mbar Flow rate1) m3/h 0.33 160 0.96 20 160 15 Over- pressure bar 2.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Weight kg 1.90 3.95 3.95 6.8 Accessories No. Order No. 1/3/4/6/7/8/9/10 56 62 10110 1/4/7/8/11 56 62 10130 11 56 62 10146 2/5/12 10 62 70150 1) at atm. pressure co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Continued on next page 5 co d e b e w WWKVG001 465

467

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology Diaphragm and Piston Pumps Accessories Article Silencer Silencer Hose connector G1/8 ID4 PVDF Hose connector G1/8 ID6 PVDF Hose connector NPT1/8 ID10 PVDF Hose connector G1/8 ID4 PA Hose connector G1/8 ID6 PA Hose connector G1/8 ID8 PA Fine control valve with pressure gauge, Fine control valve with vacuum gauge, Fine control valve with vacuum gauge, Fine control valve with vacuum gauge, pressure side suction side suction side suction side Type Accessories No. 000345 1 007006 2 025671 3 123363 4 112004 5 001936 6 000360 7 004975 8 001786 9 001787 10 057830 11 112432 12 Order No. 56 62 20406 10 62 77006 10 62 75671 10 62 73363 10 62 72004 10 62 71936 10 62 70360 10 62 74975 10 62 71786 10 62 71789 10 62 77830 10 62 72432 Piston Pumps, Welch Vacuum Piston pumps are a reliable partner for physical applications and processes wit vapours. Due to their suitability as vacuum pump or compressor, they are used in a wide range of applications such as filtration, gas sample taking, vacuum drying, and automation engi- neering. By means of the integrated manometers, the vacuum and pressure values can be monitored permanently. These pumps are suitable for dry or aqueous vapour applica- tions only. Benefits: • Dry-run technology for physical applications • Can be used as vacuum pump and compressor • Regulator valve with manometer at suction side • Regulator valve with manometer at pressure side in models with compressor function • Condensate pre-separator to protect the pump from liquid throughput • Silencer for noiseless operation • Feet with suction cups for a safe stand at the workstation Scope of delivery: WOB-L piston pump with manual pressure regulator, vacuum or pressure manometer, exhaust silencer, liquid pre-separator, and mains cable. Power supply: Type Ultimate total pressure Suction rate 50/60 Hz 230 V 50/60 Hz 1 2522 133 mbar m3/h Overpressure max. bar 7.9 W × D × H Weight Order No. kg 5.3 10 92 42522 2534 93 2546 80 2 2581 6.7 1.1/1.3 1.7/2.0 2.3/2.7 4.9/5.9 mm 206×224×254 206×224×254 254×191×229 432×191×305 5.8 5.2 – 5.3 10 92 42534 6.3 10 92 42546 11.2 10 92 42581 co d e b e w WW2MB015 1 2 466 More than 20,000 articles in this catalogue – and still more on our website !

468

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology co d e b e w WWKVG014 Diaphragm and Piston Pumps Diaphragm Vacuum Pump N 920 G, KNF Neuberger Diaphragm vacuum pump N 920 G • Application: outgassing, gel drying, rotation evaporation, distillation, vacuum concen- trator • Delivery rate of 1.26 m³/h and a final vacuum of 2 mbar abs. • High suction capacity above all in the lower vacuum range • Integrated speed control for comfortable manual adjustment of the pump capacity to the requirements of the process • The combination of PPS pump head and PTFE coated diaphragms is perfect for highly aggressive/corrosive gases and vapours • Integrated gas ballast valve Recommendation: Combined with the vacuum controller VC 900 and a control cable, the speed is controlled in accordance with the requirements of the process. Technical data: Connectors for tube mm: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: Dimensions W×H×D: ID10 +5 to +40°C PPS PTFE coated FFPM 158×226×324 mm Type Flow rate1) m3/h 1 N 920 G 1.26 Ultimate vacuum abs. mbar 2 Weight kg 8.5 Order No. 10 62 77335 Accessories Article Silencer Fine control valve with vacuum gauge, suction side Small flange DN16 / G1/8 VC 900 vacuum control unit Connection cable for N 920 G interface, 2 meter Connection cable for N 920 G interface, 5 meter Order No. 10 62 77006 10 62 72432 10 62 76625 10 62 74181 10 62 77757 10 62 77758 1 co d e b e w WWKVG015 Diaphragm Vacuum Pumps LABOPORT® FT / N, KNF Neuberger Diaphragm vacuum pumps LABOPORT® FT • Application: fluid extraction by means of vacuum, outgassing, gel drying, rotary evapo- ration, vacuum concentrator, filtration, distillation • Delivery rate max. 2.04 m³/h and a final vacuum of up to 2 mbar abs. • High vapour and condensate compatibility • The combination of PTFE pump head and PTFE coated diaphragms is perfect for high- ly aggressive/corrosive gases and vapours • The combination of TFM™ PTFE pump head (N 820.3 FT.18, N 840.3 FT.18), PTFE pump head (N 842.3 FT.18) and PTFE coated diaphragms is perfect for highly aggressive/ corrosive gases and vapours • In conformity with ATEX pursuant to ATEX II 2/-G IIB+H2 T3 Gb internal atmosphere atmosphere only (N 820.3 FT.18, N 840.3 FT.18) Technical data: Connectors for tube mm: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: Dimensions (W×H×D): ID10 +5 to +40°C (TFM™) PTFE PTFE coated FFPM 154 × 207 × 312 mm (N 820.3 FT.18) 166 × 226 × 341 mm (N 840.3 FT.18) 167 × 223 × 341 mm (N 842.3 FT.18) 2 3 Type Flow rate1) m3/h 2 N 820.3 FT.18 20 3 N 840.3 FT.18 34 4 N 842.3 FT.18 34 1) at atm. pressure co d e b e w Ultimate vacuum abs. mbar 8 8 2 Weight kg 9.3 12.6 13.4 Accesso- ries No. 2 2 2 Order No. 56 62 40220 56 62 40240 56 62 40260 4 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 467

469

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology co d e b e w WWKVG017 Diaphragm and Piston Pumps KNF Vacuum Pump LABOPORT®, Type N 96, KNF Neuberger Mini diaphragm vacuum pump LABOPORT® N 96 The smallest chemical resistant pump in our new LABOPORT® series, the N 96 combines a high flow rate with a compact design, saving valuable space in the laboratory. Thanks to the manual rotational speed control, the N 96 is quiet, very energy efficient, and can be optimally adjusted in accordance with the application. The next generation of LABOPORT® pumps are equipped with an easy-to-clean surface. Potential applications include filtration, SPE, and liquid aspiration using a vacuum. • Flow rate of 0.3 – 0.42 m3/h, ultimate vacuum of < 130 mbar abs • Very small footprint • Integrated rotational speed control • PTFE-coated diaphragm for use with aggressive/corrosive gases and vapors Technical data: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Material pump head: Material diaphragm: Material valves: Dimensions (W×H×D): +5 to +40°C PPS PTFE-coated FKM 156 × 119 × 75 mm Type Flow rate1) Ultimate vacuum abs. mbar LABOPORT N 96 0.3 – 0.42 < 130 m3/h 1) at atm. pressure Accessories Article N 96 spare part set Tube connector + silencer set included with the pump Overpres- sure bar 2.5 Weight Order No. kg 1.3 10 62 70096 Order No. 10 62 70196 10 62 73456 KNF Vacuum Pumps LABOPORT®, Type N 820 G / N 840 G, KNF Neuberger 1 co d e b e w WWKVG018 Diaphragm vacuum pumps LABOPORT®, Typ N 820 G / N 840 G The N 820 G and N 840 G feature a control knob for manual adjustments of the flow rate, making them well suited to a wide variety of applications. Thanks to the integrated rota- tional speed control, the pumps are quiet, very energy efficient, and can be optimally adjusted in accordance with the application. The chemically resistant diaphragm pumps impress with their very small footprint and save valuable space in the laboratory. The next generation of LABOPORT® pumps are equipped with an easy-to-clean surface. Potential applications include rotary evaporation, distillation, gel drying, degassing, filtra- tion. • Flow rate of up to 2.04 m3/h • Adjustable thanks to integrated rotational speed control • Ultimate vacuum of 6 mbar abs • Combination of TFMTM PTFE pump head and PTFE-coated diaphragm makes the pumps ideal for working with extremely aggressive/corrosive gases and vapors • High level of compatibility with vapor and condensation • Integrated gas ballast valve • 3-color status display: In operation / Stand-by / Error • Expandable: Separators and/or condensers can be purchased and easily fitted. • ATEX-compliant in accordance with II 2/-G IIB+H2 T3 internal atmosphere only • 100% oil-free transfer to ensure uncontaminated transfer, evacuation and compression Tip: When combined with the VC 900 vacuum control unit and a control cable, the rota- tional speed is controlled in accordance with the requirements of the process. Can also be combined with all common vacuum controllers with valve control. Technical data: Hose connections: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Material pump head: Material diaphragm: Material valves: Dimensions (W×H×D): 2 468 Type Flow rate1) m3/h 1 N 820 G 1.2 2 N 840 G 2.04 ID 9.5-8, PVDF +5 to +40 TFM™ PTFE PTFE-coated FFPM N 820 G 163 × 220 × 259 mm N 840 G 177 × 240 × 289 mm Ultimate vacuum abs. mbar 6.0 6.0 bar 0.1 0.1 Overpressure Weight Order No. kg 8.8 11.3 10 62 73452 10 62 75994 Continued on next page

470

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology Diaphragm and Piston Pumps Accessories Article N 820 G spare part set N 840 G spare part set Tube connector Order No. 10 62 77435 10 62 77436 10 62 77278 Diaphragm Vacuum Pumps, KNF Neuberger co d e b e w WWKVG002 Diaphragm Vacuum Pumps LABOPORT® SD • Application: rotary evaporation, distillation, vacuum oven, vacuum concentrator • Delivery rate max. 3.6 m³/h and a final vacuum of up to 4 mbar abs. • Integrated KNF auto-drying system for fast removal of the condensate from the pump heads without any change to the vacuum. This significantly reduces the process time and protects the pump heads. • Resistant to chemicals, and thus suitable for use with highly aggressive/corrosive gases and vapours Technical data: Connectors for tube mm: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: N 820.3 FT.40.18 N 840.3 FT.40.18 ID10 +5 to +40°C TFM™ PTFE PTFE coated FFPM N 860.3 FT.40.18 ID 12 +5 to +40°C PTFE PTFE-beschichtet FFPM Type Flow rate m3/h 1 N 820.3 FT.40.18 1.2 2 N 840.3 FT.40.18 2.04 3 N 860.3 FT.40.18 3.6 Ultimate vacuum abs. mbar 10 10 4 W × D × H Order No. mm 177 × 312 × 220 56 62 48203 189 × 341 × 239 56 62 48403 291 × 331 × 278 10 62 78603 Diaphragm Pumps, Welch Vacuum For dry, oil-free applications in the rough and medium-high vacuum range diaphragm pumps are used world-wide in production, research and science as well as in industry, laboratory and education. As an economically and ecologically superior alternative to water operated vacuum pumps the diaphragm pump range always offers a versatile, practical solution for many diverse applications. • Vacuum distillation and filtration • Vacuum concentration • Vacuum drying • Manipulating and handing systems • Gel drying, etc. Diaphragm pumps offer • different material for chemical (MPC) or physical (MP) processes • different flow rates from 0.6 m³/h to 16 m³/h • final pressures from 75 to < 1 mbar • pressure control using vacuum controler VCB521 Diaphragm pumps are available in complete pump systems - LVS laboratory vacuum systems - with components and materials selected for optimal practical employment in laboratory and industry. Also used as regeneration pumps in combination pumping systems (Chemvac), they fulfill their tasks due to outstanding chemical resistance and stable vacuum parameters. All diaphragm pumps are compactly and functionally designed. Maintenance and service work is fast and easy. Diaphragm pumps guarantee outstanding operation and possess a long life span. They are extremely quiet in operation and work without oil. Diaphragm pumps with ATEX approval are available on request. 1 2 3 co d e b e w WW2MB004 4 Single-stage diaphragm pumps, final vacuum < 75 mbar Weight kg 2.3 6.2 8.9 11.2 18.3 6.3 8.9 11.2 18.3 W × D × H mm 115×165×145 235×140×277 260×162×252 230×265×169 230×380×169 235×140×277 260×162×252 230×265×169 230×380×169 Suction rate m3/h 0.6 0.9 2.3 3.8 8.3 0.9 2.3 3.8 8.3 Type MP 065 E MP 105 E MP 301 E MP 601 E MP 1201 E MPC 110 E MPC 301 E 4 MPC 601 E MPC 1201 E Order No. 10 92 41112 10 92 41142 10 92 41171 56 92 40292 56 92 40392 10 92 41242 10 92 41271 56 92 40492 56 92 40532 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 469

471

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology Diaphragm and Piston Pumps Two-stage diaphragm pumps, final vacuum < 8 mbar Suction rate 3/h W × D × H mm Weight kg Order No. Type 0.5 MP 055 Z 1.0 MP 101 Z 2.3 MP 301 Z 6.8 MP 901 Z 0.5 MPC 095 Z 1.0 1 MPC 101 Z 2.3 MPC 301 Z MPC 901 Z 6.8 MPC 1801 Z 12.0 235×140×277 195×235×145 230×265×169 230×380×169 235×140×277 195×235×145 230×265×169 230×380×169 540×300×240 10 92 41143 56 92 40170 56 92 40282 56 92 40322 10 92 41243 56 92 40171 56 92 40482 56 92 40522 56 92 41552 6.2 6.5 11.2 18.3 6.2 6.5 11.2 18.3 32.8 Three-stage diaphragm pumps, final vacuum < 2 mbar Suction rate 3/h W × D × H mm Weight kg Order No. Type MP 201 T 2.0 MP 601 T 4.5 MPC 201 T 2.0 2 MPC 601 T 4.5 MPC 1201 T 8.3 200×260×150 230×380×169 200×260×150 230×380×169 540×300×240 56 92 40176 56 92 40312 56 92 40177 56 92 40512 56 92 41782 10.3 18.3 10.3 18.3 32.8 Four-stage diaphragm pumps, final vacuum < 1 mbar Type MP 101 V MP 301 V Suction rate 3/h W × D × H mm Weight kg 1.0 2.3 200×260×150 230×380×169 10.3 18.3 Order No. 56 92 40180 56 92 40722 Further models on request. Diaphragm Pumps, VACUUBRAND VACUUBRAND’s aluminum design diaphragm pump is a perfect match for many applica- tions in the laboratory and operations because it is oil-free and whisper quiet, and because it requires so little service. Diaphragms have especially long lives, and hermetically seal the drive space from the pumping chamber to protect mechanical parts from corrosion. The pumps achieve their distinctively high performance from high pumping chamber vol- ume relative to the minimal dead space. Highly flexible FKM double diaphragms with fabric reinforcement guarantee an extremely long diaphragm lifetime. The pumps operate absolutely oil free and do not have any sliding components on the vapor side; in normal operation they are completely free of abrasion. Besides contributing to the long service intervals, the lack of abrasion also eliminates most of the particulate impurities frequently generated on the vacuum side of scroll or piston pumps. Items supplied: Pumping unit completely mounted, ready for use, incl. device cable, with manual. Diaphragm pump ME 1 The ME 1 diaphragm pump offers a compact, high performance and easy to use solution which is perfect for both single and multiple filtrations. This new development, based on the highly successful technology of the diaphragm pump series MD 1, provides a well-proven and extraordinary long diaphragm life time. The functional, space saving and innovative design with visible top mounted power switch ensures convenient and quick operation for day to day lab work. Robust PTFE diaphragms and valves provide optimal chemical resistance. An optional manual control valve with dial gauge enables variable fine adjustment of the pumping speed. Membrane pump MD 1 The oil-free, dry-sealing membrane pump MD 1 is used to evacuate and convey gases up to an excellent final vacuum. Compared to 2-stage membrane pumps, the 3-stage pump with small and very precisely guided level membranes shows a convincing extraction power also when approaching the final vacuum. This pump type is characterized by its particularly smooth running and very long useful life of the membranes. Membrane pump MZ 2 NT With two-stage design for a favourable combination of high extraction power and good final vacuum of up to 7 mbar. The highly flexible FKM double membranes with reinforced fabric ensure a long useful life of the membranes. The new NT series is characterized by further improved output data. M: E: Z: D: V: SYNCHRO: BVC: BVC control G: G for version with glass bottle Ultimate vacuum mbar 100 1.5 7 membrane vacuum pump single-stage, max. 70 mb 2-stage, max. 7 mb 3-stage, max. 1.5 mb 4-stage, max. 0.6 mbar connection for simultaneous operation of two applications Fluid aspiration system BioChem VacuuCenter L × W × H mm 247×121×145 10 18 71072 303×143×163 10 18 71069 243×239×198 10 18 71073 Weight kg 5.0 6.5 11.0 Pumping speed m3/h 0.7 3 ME 1 1.2 5 MD 1 4 MZ 2 NT 2.2 Order No. 4 Type 6 Vacuum regulator valve unit for ME 1 Items supplied: Manual vacuum regulator valve with analogue pressure gauge for dia- phragm pump ME 1, with hose nozzle DN 6/10 mm. Article 6 Regulator valve unit for ME 1 Order No. 10 18 76842 1 2 co d e b e w WWC5C003 3 5 470

472

Rotary Vane Pumps Two-Stage Robust Rotary Vane Pump CRVpro, Welch Vacuum Two-stage rotary vane pumps The Welch CRVpro pumps are high-performance two-stage rotary vane pumps. These robust vacuum pumps impress with their long service life, high reliability and low mainte- nance requirements. Advantages: • Cool running operation for less oil consumption • Coated oil case to slow metal corrosion • Large oil case to reduce the risk of chemical attacks • Anti-suck back valve • Dual voltage Technical data: Ultimate pressure without gas ballast partial: 5 × 10–4 mbar Ultimate pressure without gas ballast total: 2 × 10–3 mbar 7 × 10–2 mbar Ultimate pressure with gas ballast total: DN 16 KF Connection flanges: 50 dB (A) Noise level (50 Hz): 220 – 240 V / 50 Hz or 115 – 230 V / 60 Hz Voltage: Protection: IP44 0.37/0.4 kW Motor speed (50/60 Hz): Dimension (L×W×H): 463 × 157 × 230 mm Type for 1 CRVpro 4 Freeze dryers, Schlenk Lines, industrial applica- tions 2 CRVpro 6 Freeze dryers, vacuum 3 CRVpro 8 Freeze dryers, glove boxes, concentrators, industrial applications vacuum ovens, HVAC in- dustrial applications Pumping speed DIN 28426/part 1; pneurop Hz (FAD) 4 m3/h (67 l/min) Oil ca- pacity ml 1150 Order No. Wght kg 21 10 92 43042 6 m3/h / (100 l/min) 1150 22 10 92 43062 8 m3/h / (133 l/min) 1000 22.5 10 92 43082 Scope of delivery: Rotary vine pump with mains cable, vacuum pump oil, centring rings, clamping rings, and motor overload protection. Accessories Article 4 Oil mist separator AKD 16 5 Oil mist filter OME 10/16 Freeze dryer adapter kit The Freeze Dryer Adapter kit consists of the oil mist separator AKD 16, 2-way ball valve, 1.5 m vacuum hose (PVC) and adap- ter DN16KF / DN25KF. Oil Mist Separator AKD and Filter OME are dedicated to oil mist elimination. These are to be mounted to the exhaust port of rotary vane pump. Other accessories such as filters, traps, hoses, connectors, service kits are available upon request. Order No. 56 92 30883 56 92 70010 10 92 43091 Pump Systems Vacuum Technology co d e b e w WW2MB002 1 2 3 Oil Triple distilled hydrocarbon oil has fewer impurities for increased pump oil life. Designed to resist breakdown at higher RPMs and operating temperatures. Order No. Article Directorr™ Premium vacuum oil, 1 litre Directorr™ Premium vacuum oil, 5 litre 10 92 43092 10 92 43093 PU Liter/Pack 1 5 Packages Scope of delivery: Oil mist separator AKD 16, 2-way valve, hose connector DN16KF-10/8 mm, vacuum hose (1.5 m), oil drain kit. 4 Package CRVpro 4 package CRVpro 6 package CRVpro 8 package co d e b e w Pump CRVpro 4 CRVpro 6 CRVpro 8 Order No. 10 92 43094 10 92 43095 10 92 43096 5 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 471

473

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology co d e b e w WWC5C001 1 2 3 4 5 472 Rotary Vane Pumps Rotary Vane Pumps, VACUUBRAND Rotary vane pumps and rotary vane pumps packages Rotary vane pumps are used wherever it is necessary to have a process vacuum up to 10-3 mbar. VACUUBRAND rotary vane pumps are high-performance, yet compact, and can be equipped with an extensive line of VACUUBRAND accessories. They have an in- novative lubrication system with a built-in oil pump, and have a large oil volume. This extends oil change and service intervals, and protects the pump at start-up. The effective gas ballast feature, with its high-flow gas ballast, supplies high vapor compatibility for water and solvents. VACUUBRAND rotary vane pumps’ volume flow rate is specified at atmospheric pressure, as is customary with PNEUROP®. For process effiency, however, the high volume flow rate of VACUUBRAND pumps under process conditions, as well as a consistently high volume flow rate over a wide pressure range, is the key to your satis- faction in real-world application. After switch-off the aggregate is vacuum-sealed to pro- tect your application from undesired venting and oil back flow. • constriction-free vapor pathway allows high volume flow rates, even when close to the ultimate vacuum • high tolerance for water and solvent vapors, because of the high-volume gas ballast • quiet running and excellent ultimate vacuum, even with gas ballast • active corrosion protection: Oil cycle closes vacuum-tight against the intake of corrosive gases and oil impurities into the reservoir when shut down • new design lubrication circuit, and large usable oil volume provides extended oil change and service intervals • compact design, low weight and easy service with telescopic design Items supplied: Pump oil filled and completely mounted, ready for use, with manual. RZ 2.5: Rotary vane pump, two-stage, power class depending on extraction capacity: 2.5 RE 2.5: Rotary vane pump, single-stage, power class depending on extraction capaci- RZ 6: FO: VS: ty: 2.5 Rotary vane pump, two-stage, power class depending on extraction capacity: 6 Exhaust filter FO are oil mist separators are potects against oil-contaminated air inside or outside of the laboratory V product group Valves, butterfly through-valve design Type Pum- ping speed m3/h 1 RZ 2.5 2.3 RZ 2.5 + FO + VS16 2.3 2 RZ 6 5.7 3 RZ 6 + FO + VS16 5.7 4 RZ 6 + FO + VS16 + 5.7 VACUU.VIEW extended Ultimate vacuum mbar 2×10-3 2×10-3 2×10-3 2×10-3 2×10-3 Weight L × W × H Order No. kg 11.4 11.4 16.4 16.4 16.4 mm 316×125×190 10 18 78120 316×125×190 10 18 78029 370×142×207 10 18 78130 370×142×207 10 18 78039 370×142×207 10 18 78160 Rotary vane pump RE 2.5 The one-stage pumps RE 2.5 are high-performance rotary vane pumps with extra com- pact design and low weight. They are the ideal solution for a wide range of laboratory and process applications that require low ultimate vacuum at medium gas flow rate. Performance features: • high flow rates even at vacuum levels approaching ultimate vacuum • high water vapor tolerance due to efficient gas ballast; very good ultimate vacuum even with gas ballast • vacuum-tight at switch-off; external anti-suckback valve not needed • large oil volume: Long intervals between oil changes • ease of maintenance due to telescopic design Type Pumping speed m3/h 5 RE 2.5 2.3 Ultimate vacuum mbar 3×10-1 Weight kg 10.2 L × W × H mm 316 × 125 × 190 10 18 77150 Order No. Accessories Packages fine vacuum control The packages enable convenient vacuum control in the fine vacuum range down to 10-3 mbar and consist of a VACUU·SELECT vacuum controller, a VACUU·VIEW extended fine vacuum gauge, a VV-B 15C in-line solenoid valve and all necessary small flange compo- nents. Separator inlet side AK R 2.5/6 Separators at the inlet protect pumps from particulates and droplets which may shorten service intervals and even reduce the lifetime and the operating performance of oil-sealed rotary vane pumps. Oil mist filter outlet side FO R 2/2.5/5/6 Exhaust gases from oil-sealed rotary vane pumps always carry a certain quantity of oil mist. This is extremely unpleasant, and even harmful, for those working nearby. VACU- UBRAND oil mist filters separate nearly 100% of oil mist at the ultimate vacuum of the pump. Continued on next page

474

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology co d e b e w WWQVD119 Rotary Vane Pumps Article Package fine vacuum control KF DN 16 Package fine vacuum control KF DN 25 Separator inlet side AK R 2.5 Separator inlet side AK R 6 Oil mist filter outlet side FO R 2/2.5/5/6 Butterfly valve VS 16 Oil B 1 l Pump Stands Vacuum Pump Stand, Rettberg Order No. 10 18 70100 10 18 70110 10 18 78000 10 18 78006 10 18 78003 10 18 78004 10 18 77010 Mobile vacuum pump for fine vacuum Consisting of : Vacuum Unit with rotary vane vacuum pump, exhaust filter, metal vacuum hose with small flanges KF 16 mm, Pirani measuring sensor and digital display unit. High Vacuum Unit, borosilicate glass 3.3, designed for grease-free use, with PTFE valve 0 to 15 mm and additional PTFE valve 0 to 6 mm for aeration or for fore/partial vacuum, 2 condensation traps with glass flanges KF 50 mm, seals and aluminum clamps, all joints with small glass flanges, seals and clamps, suction end with glass flange KF 16 mm, media end with hose shaft 16 mm with glass flange KF 16 mm, connection for Pira- ni measuring sensor. 2 Dewar Vessels, can be lowered and swung out for easy filling. Trolley, complete, stainless steel, on 4 swiveling castors (2 of which can be locked), center shelf load capacity 150 kgs. Technical data: External dimensions (W × D × H): Weight: Power supply: Suction rate: End partial pressure without gas ballast: 4 × 10-4/ mbar End total pressure without gas ballast: End total pressure with gas ballast: Steam compatibilty: 55 × 55 × 115 cm approx 43 kgs 230V, 50Hz 5.6 m3/h 2 × 10-3/ bar 1 × 10-2/ mbar 40 mbar Article Vacuum pump stand for fine vacuum, complete 1 Vacuum pump without electric vacuum components Order No. 56 70 90000 10 70 00006 1 Chemistry Pump Devices with Cold Traps, KGW-Isotherm 2 Chemistry pump device with two cold traps type CP Applications flexible applications in laboratory e.g. for • drying processes • condensation processes • vacuum technology • gas cleaning Advantages • Compact design • Easy handling • Suitable for aggressive mediums • Glass components in Borosilicat 3.3 • O-Ring sealed spherical joints incl. fork clamps • Frame work on wheels • Table board made of stainless steel • Parallel operation with 2 cold traps – On failure of one cold trap the other cold trap keeps • Alternate operation with 1 cold trap – The cold trap in use are chosen by the valve ad- on working. justment. Technical Data: Dewar: Content: Cold trap: Dimensions trolley W × L × H: Weight: type 12 C 1000 ml type S 29 O 500 × 750 × 750 mm 25 kg Type CP1 CP2 Pressure gauge yes no Order No. 10 50 11707 10 50 11708 2 Special versions • 2 cold taps seriel connected • With special joints co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 473 Continued on next page

475

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology 1 Pump Stands Chemistry pump device GP3 with cold trap and pump fork with aeration Type GP3 is a mobile chemistry pump stand with a cold trap and a pump fork with a separate aeration cell. The pump fork has four independently switched vacuum valves and additionally four in- dependently switched aeration valves, so that every sample holder can get individually evacuated or aerated. Through this type of assembling, every sample holder can get disconnected or aerated separately without affecting the vacuum of the other sample holders. Type GP3 has a small flange KF-NW 16 with vacuum manometer. Instead of the vacuum manometer you can also connect an electronic vacuum gauge. The pump stand will be delivered as standard without suitable vacuum pump. Component parts • Rubber hose with small flange KF-NW 16 • Rubber hose for 10mm-olives • Pump-fork support • Vacuum pump (not included in scope of delivery) • Cold trap type KFL 29-GL (CP) • Bulge on Dewar flask’s casing • Pump fork with aeration cell • 6 mm-Produran valve with O-ring seal and GL18-glass screw thread with 10 mm- PTFE-olive • Vacuum flange with manometer • KF-NW 16 with 10mm-olive • Aeration port GL18-glass screw thread with 10 mm-PTFE-olive (angled) • PE-table plate • Aluminum-profile rack • Four lockable guide rolls 1 co d e b e w WWKVG005 2 474 Technical Data: Dewar: Effective capacity with cold trap: Condensate capacity of cold trap: Dimensions trolley W × L × H: Weight: type 18 CAL-S with bulge 2000 ml 250 ml at maximum 500 × 750 × 1100 mm 35 kg Type GP3 Pressure gauge 35 kg Order No. 10 50 11753 Additional versions available on request. Cooling traps see glass construction, glass equipment page 313 Vacuum Systems LABOPORT®, KNF Neuberger • Application: rotary evaporation, distillation • Delivery rate max. 2.04 m³/h and a final vacuum of max. 8 mbar abs. • Vacuum system, comprising a chemicals-resistant diaphragm vacuum pump, base plate, condenser, separator, and vacuum controller • The combination of PTFE pump head and PTFE coated diaphragms is perfect for high- ly aggressive/corrosive gases and vapours Technical data: Connectors for tube mm: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: Dimensions (W×H×D): pneumatic ID10 refrigerant ID8 +5 to +40°C PTFE PTFE coated FFPM 289 × 506 × 397 mm (SC 820) 289 × 506 × 417 mm (SC 840) Type Flow rate m3/h Vacuum pump Base plate Sepa- rator Vacuum controller Con- denser Order No. N 820.3 FT.18 NP810/820 NR800 NC800A NH800 56 62 40620 NR800 NC800A NH800 56 62 40640 N 840.3 FT.18 NP840 2 SC 820 1.2 SC 840 2.04

476

Pump Stands Vacuum Systems LABOBASE®, KNF Neuberger Pump Systems Vacuum Technology Vacuum Systems • Application: central vacuum supply • Delivery rate max. 3.6 m³/h and a final vacuum of max. 4 mbar abs. • For up to ten users • Fully automated vacuum generation system, comprising a chemicals-resistant dia- phragm vacuum pump, base plate, high-power condenser, separator, vacuum control- ler, valves, and control unit • The combination of PTFE pump head and PTFE coated diaphragms is perfect for high- ly aggressive/corrosive gases and vapours Technical data: Connectors for tube mm: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: Dimensions (W×H×D): ID10 +5 to +40°C PTFE PTFE coated FFPM 450 × 515 × 322 mm (SBC 840.40) 314 × 552 × 437 mm (SBC 860.40) Type Flow rate m3/h SBC 840.40 2.04 SBC 860.40 3.6 Accessories Ultimate vacuum abs. mbar 10 4 Wght Vacuum pump Order No. kg 22.9 N 840.3 FT.40.18 10 62 78404 25.3 N 860.3 FT.40.18 10 62 78604 Article Order No. Gas washing bottle 0.5 l 10 62 75886 Control valve, unregulated, for safety cabinets 10 62 78366 Vacuum supply point for control valves, unregulated, for safety cabinets 10 62 78364 Vacuum supply point, unregulated, for installation in laboratory equip- 10 62 78362 ment (PPS) co d e b e w WWKVG004 Vacuum Control Unit VC 900, KNF Neuberger Vacuum control unit VC 900 • Application: rotary evaporation, distillation, central vacuum supply • Easy controlling of the vacuum application • Controller unit with pressure sensors and two-level control valve for installation inde- pendent of the operating unit co d e b e w WWKVG012 Combined with a KNF pump N 920 G, LABOPORT N 820 G or LABOPORT N 840 G and a control cable, the speed is controlled in keeping with the requirements of the process (order the control cable separately). Can also be combined with all commercially available membrane vacuum pumps for control via valve. Technical data operating unit: Housing materials: Power supply: Protection class: Mains voltage: Frequency: Operating current: Dimensions W × H × D: Accuracy of measurement: Measuring limit: Technical data control unit: Hose connections: Plastic Power cord, cable length 150 cm IP30 100 – 240 V 50/60 Hz max. 1.0 A 101 × 181 × 67 mm ± 1 mbar 0 to 1100 mbar abs. Gas in ID 10, PVDF Gas out ID 10, PVDF Venting ID 4, nickel-plated brass 155 × 109 × 60 mm +10 to +40°C Dimensions L × H × W: Permissible media and ambient tem- perature: Weight: Article VC 900 vacuum control unit Accessories 1.2 kg Order No. 10 62 74181 Article Order No. Connection cable for N 920 G interface, 2 meter 10 62 77757 Connection cable for N 920 G interface, 5 meter 10 62 77758 Connection cable for LABOPORT N 820/840 G interface, 2 meter 10 62 73829 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 475

477

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology co d e b e w WWKVG007 Pump Stands Vacuum Pump Systems SC 920 G, SC 950 and SCC 950, KNF Neuberger Vacuum pump systems SC 920 G, SC 950 und SCC 950 • Application: rotary evaporation, distillation • Delivery rate 3 m³/h and a final vacuum of 2 mbar abs. • Remote control for safe operation outside of closed fume cupboards • Automated, precise boiling point detection and boiling point follow-up by means of in- tegrated ramp function • The combination of PPS pump head and PTFE coated diaphragms is perfect for highly aggressive/corrosive gases and vapours • Speed-controlled • Integrated gas ballast valve • SCC 950: Equipped with two controllers for independent and simultaneous operation of two rotary evaporators Technical data: Flow rate at atm. pressure: Ultimate vacuum: Hose connections mm: Permissible media and ambient temperature: Weight: Dimensions B × H × T: 2 3 Pump head: Diaphragm: Valves: Article 1 SC 920 G 2 SC 950 3 SCC 950 Accessories 1.26 m³/h (SC 920 G) 3 m³/h (SC 950, SCC 950) 2 mbar absolut pneumatic ID10 refrigerant ID8 inert gas ID6 (SC 920 G) / ID4 (SC 950, SCC 950) +5 to +40°C 15.2 kg (SC 920 G) 14.5 kg (SC 950) 16.1 kg (SCC 950) 366 × 423 × 294 mm (SC 920 G) 246 × 487 × 313 mm (SC 950) 246 × 487 × 376 mm (SCC 950) PPS PTFE coated FFPM Order No. 10 62 70920 10 62 70950 10 62 71950 Article Coolant valve G 1/2, ID 8 Stand fixture for wireless remote control Wall fixture for wireless remote control for SC 920 G, SC 950 SC 920 G SC 920 G Order No. 10 62 77121 10 62 70132 10 62 70130 Laboratory Vacuum Systems LVS, Welch Vacuum Chemical resistant laboratory vacuum systems The LVS laboratory vacuum systems are compact pump systems for conventional vacu- um distillation. Equipped with a chemical-resistant diaphragm pump they are the ideal solution for numerous applications in chemical laboratories and in research. According to the application, our LVS models can be supplied with or without vacuum control. Three control philosophies are available, the standard version being a chemically resistant solenoid valve with two point control. Operation of the controller has been sim- plified so that it is easy to learn and can also be performed from a PC. Our LVS systems are available with many different features and in numerous versions, enabling them to be adapted without difficulty to countless applications. Your safety is important for us. All components of our pump systems which come into contact with gas are made of high-grade, chemically resistant material. This means that they can even be used to evacuate solvent and acid vapors. Glassware is coated with a clear plastic layer, through which the process can be observed at all times. The high-pressure side of the cooler is insulated. Scope of supply: • Chemically resistant diaphragm pump equipped with gas ballast valve • Pump carrier • Suction side separator with round bottom flask 500 ml • Exhaust side intensive cooler with round bottom flask 500 ml • With safety valve • Ready for installation interconnects • Suction connection for hose DN8 • Power supply 230 V / 50/60 Hz Advantages: • Oil free vacuum • All wetted parts in chemically resistant materials (PTFE or PEEK) • Nearly 100% solvent recovery • Suitable for continuous operation • Long life span Continued on next page 1 co d e b e w WW2MB014 4 476

478

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology 5 co d e b e w WW2MB003 Pump Stands • Compact modular design • Small noise level LVS, for unregulated vacuum Scope of delivery: • Exhaust and suction side separator with round bottom flask 500 ml, intensive cooler not required • Safety valve not required LVS, for one automatic controlled connection Scope of delivery: • Controlled connection • Controller with display, sensor and airing valve Dimensions (W×D×H): 350 × 320 × 440 mm 540 × 330 × 460 mm (LVS 1210 T) Type Ultimate total pressure mbar < 8 4 LVS 110 Z < 8 LVS 310 Z < 2 LVS 210 T LVS 610 T < 2 LVS 1210 T < 2 Suction rate 50/60 Hz m3/h 1.0/1.1 2.3/2.5 2.0/2.2 4.5/4.9 8.3/9.1 Weight kg 12.7 17.8 15.7 24.4 36.3 Order No. 56 92 13024 56 92 13044 56 92 13034 56 92 13054 56 92 13064 LVS ecoflex, one controlled connection via variable pump speed Scope of supply: • Chemically resistant diaphragm pump equipped with gas ballast valve • One controlled connection • Controller with sensor and airing valve Dimensions (W×D×H): 250 × 260 × 435 mm (LVS 105 T – 10 ef) 350 × 320 × 440 mm (LVS 310 Z ef, LVS 210 T ef, LVS 610 T ef) 540 × 330 × 460 mm (LVS 1210 T ef) Ultimate total pressure mbar LVS 310 Z ef < 8 5 LVS 105 T – 10 ef < 2 < 2 LVS 210 T ef LVS 610 T ef < 2 Suction rate 50/60 Hz m3/h 2.6 1.2 2.2 4.9 Wght kg 19.9 9.5 19.0 26.8 56 92 13074 10 92 43184 56 92 13124 56 92 13084 Order No. Type Chemvac Combination Pump Systems, Welch Vacuum Combined Pumping Units Chemvac Combination Pump Systems, ultimate pressure to 2×10-3 mbar The term “combination pump systems” has become established at user level for the combination of rotary van pump and diaphragm pump. Combination pump systems are particularly suitable for evacuation jobs in chemical applications with high condensate loads. For the fine vacuum range in special applications, e.g.: • for aggressive gases and vapors • for evacuation of solvent recovery vapor • for pumping of vapors which are soluable in oil The Chemvac Combination Pump Systems are used for producing fine vacuum. They are corrosion optimized combinations of a two stage rotary vane pump with a chemically resistant diaphragm pump. The rotary vane pump is connected on the intake side to a recipient and evacuates it. With a delay the integrated diaphragm pump evacuates the inside of the oil housing. This vacuum prevents the gases from the working valve of the rotary vane pump from condensing and conveys them through a separator system into the exhaust air. Advantages: • High end vacuum • Long periods between oil changes reduce running coasts and down time • Low corrosive loading of the components • Simple pressure condensation after the chemical resistant diaphragm pump • Cessation of a suction-side cooling trap in most cases • Excellent durability with aggressive applications Scope of delivery: Chemvac Combination Pump System with switch, mains cable and plug, KF small flange connections, clampng and centering rings, oil filling. Suction rate m3/h 5.8 Type P6 Z-101 P12 Z-301 11 P23 Z-301 21 Oil Ultimate pressure mbar 2 × 10-3 2 × 10-3 2 × 10-3 W × D × H mm 500×330×340 590×345×420 590×345×420 Wght kg 25.5 42.5 46 Order No. 10 92 49023 10 92 49024 10 92 49025 Article Ultimate pres- sure at 20°C mbar LABOVAC-14 <10-6 co d e b e w Viscosity at 40°C cST 47.9 Flash point 15°C 257 Density at °C g/ml 0.918 Order No. 56 92 80135 PU Liter/ Pack 1 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 477

479

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology co d e b e w WWC5C002 1 2 Pump Stands Chemistry Diaphragm Pumps and Systems, VACUUBRAND Chemistry diaphragm pumps Typical applications for chemistry diaphragm pumps include evacuating chemically ag- gressive gases and vapors from such equipment as rotary evaporators, vacuum drying cabinets and centrifugal concentrators. Chemistry diaphragm pumps from VACUUBRAND have uncompromising chemistry designs: Due to fluorocompounds they are very resistant to chemical vapors from inlet to exhaust, and are very tolerant of condensate. Our two-, three- and four-stage pumps also have a gas ballast valve that helps to preserve pump performance when working with condensable vapors. Pumping chambers are hermetical- ly separated from the drive space, ensuring long lifetimes of mechanical parts. Most im- portantly, diaphragm pumps are oil-free, for vastly reduced service demands compared with oil-sealed pumps. They eliminate the water waste of water-jet aspirators, and the contaminated waste-oil disposal of rotary vane pumps. Chemistry vacuum system MZ 2C NT +AK+EK The separator at the inlet (AK), made of glass with protective coating, retains particles and liquid droplets. The waste vapor condenser at the outlet (EK) is highly efficient and com- pact. The condenser enables near-100-percent solvent recovery, efficient recycling, and active protection of the environment. Chemistry vacuum system MZ 2C NT +AK SYNCHRO+EK This chemistry vacuum system provides the simultaneous operation of two processes with only one pump. Chemistry pumping unit PC 510 select The pumping units are equipped with a VACUU·SELECT vacuum controller with a solenoid valve for electronic vacuum control. Chemistry pumping unit PC 511 select The PC 511 NT is equipped with an additional manually controlled vacuum port. Check valves help to protect against cross-contamination and interference, permitting simulta- neous operation of two vacuum applications with one pump. Chemistry pumping unit PC 520 select This chemistry vacuum pumping unit is an economic space-saving solution for simulta- neous operation of two independent and electronically controlled vacuum applications with one single pump. Chemistry pumping unit PC 620 select This chemistry vacuum pumping unit is an economic space-saving solution for simulta- neous operation of two independent vacuum applications with one single pump of very high pumping speed. VARIO®chemistry pumping unit PC 3003 VARIO select und PC 3001 VARIO select VARIO chemistry pumping units provide vacuum control by precise and continuous ad- aptation of the diaphragm pump’s motor speed. The integrated vacuum controller is able to perform fully automatic evaporations with the push of a button. The pump’s variable motor speed responds to demand, reducing energy waste and mechanical wear, ensuring unrivalled service life for the diaphragms. M: E: Z: D: V: C: PC: AK: EK: select: with the new VACUU·SELECT vacuum controller membrane vacuum pump single-stage, max. 70 mbar 2-stage, max. 7 mbar 3-stage, max. 1.5 mbar 4-stage, max. 0.6 mbar C=chemistry design pumping station chemicals separator for condensates, suction or pressure side emission condenser 3 Type 1 ME 1C MZ 2C NT MZ 2C NT +AK+EK 2 MZ 2C NT +AK SYNCHRO+EK PC 510 select PC 511 select 3 PC 520 select PC 620 select MD 1C MD 1C +AK+EK 4 PC 3001 VARIO PC 3003 VARIO select select Pumping speed m3/h 0.7 2.0 2.0 Ultimate vacuum mbar 100 7 7 7 7 7 7 1.5 2 2 2 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.4 1.3 1.3 2.0 2.8 Weight L × W × H Order No. kg 5.0 11.1 14.2 14.5 17.2 17.4 17.7 20.6 6.9 10.2 8,2 mm 247×121×145 10 18 71100 243×243×198 10 18 72300 326×243×402 10 18 72600 326×248×402 10 18 72800 418×243×457 10 18 73150 435×243×457 10 18 73250 435×243×457 10 18 73350 435×243×457 10 18 77350 316×143×175 10 18 76600 316×239×405 10 18 76620 303×306×400 10 18 70200 0.6 21.1 419×243×457 10 18 78450 Accessories Article Regulator valve unit for ME/MZ 1C Order No. 10 18 76843 4 478

480

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology co d e b e w WWC5C004 1 Vacuum Measurement Vacuum Gauges and Controller, VACUUBRAND State-of-the-art vacuum gauges for laboratory and industrial operation have to meet high standards in terms of gauge head resistance to chemicals, reliability in rugged applica- tions and operator-friendly interfaces. In addition to dedicated fine or low vacuum gauges, the product portfolio offers the VACUU-VIEW extended, a gauge with an extended meas- uring range (110 – 10-3 mbar). A lot of applications in the laboratory call for electronic vacuum regulation, that is, con- stantly adapting the pump’s volume flow rate to process requirements. The maximum volume flow rate of the unregulated pump can be changed in various ways: • Two-point regulation via suction line valve: The VACUU·SELECT vacuum regulator con- trols the vacuum using the classic method of two-point control by opening and closing a suction line valve • Speed-controlled VARIO vacuum pumps and pump stands: VARIO membrane pumps and chemicals pump stands with VACUU·SELECT regulate the vacuum with high preci- sion and free of hysteresis by adjusting the speed of the membrane pump. • Adaptive regulation for fully automated evaporation – without entering parameters: When “Automatic evaporation” is selected, the vacuum controller VACUU·SELECT au- tomatically detects the boiling pressure of the solvent, or also several boiling points of a solvents mixture, and continuously adapts the vacuum to the process curve – right up to the end of the process. For this option, the gauge must be combined with one of our VARIO pumps. Vacuum gauge VACUU·VIEW extended For the monitoring of your vacuum processes in the rough and fine vacuum range, the vacuum gauges VACUU·VIEW extended are perfect! The heavy duty combination of ce- ramic diaphragm sensor and ceramic jacketed Pirani sensor ensures reliable readings in the wide range from atmosphere down to 10-3 mbar. • Precision and chemical resistance in an exceptionally wide range from atmosphere down to 10<sup>-3</sup> mbar, one gauge only for both rough and fine vacuum • Compact design with integrated sensors for useful setup in laboratory and process • The chemical resistant combination of ceramic diaphragm sensor and ceramic jacketed Pirani sensor ensures a long product life even with aggressive chemicals • Illuminated display, easy to read • Display with menu driven handling, easy to use e.g. for unit settings Technical data: Measuring range: Dimensions (L×W×H): Weight: Rated mains voltage / mains frequency: Plug: Measurement principle: Accuracy of measurement: 0.001 – 1100 mbar/hPa approx. 50 × 62 × 103 mm approx. 0.19 kg 100–230 V/50–60 Hz CEE/CH/UK/US/AUS/CN Ceramic diaphragm sensor + ceramic jack- eted Pirani sensor ± 15% of indicated value in the range from 0.01 – 5 mbar / ± 3 mbar for > 5 mbar Small flange KF DN 16 and hose nozzle DN 6/10 mm Vacuum gauge with integrated vacuum sensors, ready for operation, with kit hose nozzle DN 6/10 mm, wall-plug power sup- ply and manual Temperature coefficient (mbar/hPa/torr/°C): ± 0.2 mbar/hPa/0.15 torr /K Vacuum connection: Items supplied: Article 1 Vacuum gauge VACUU·VIEW extended Order No. 10 18 73210 Vacuum gauge VACUU·VIEW For the monitoring of your vacuum processes in the rough vacuum range, the vacuum gauges VACUU·VIEW are perfect! Chemically resistant ceramic diaphragm sensor for measurement in the rough vacuum range. VACUU·VIEW provides gas-independent pres- sure indication with precise capacitive readout. • Highest precision in the range from atmosphere down to 0.1 mbar, perfect gauge for all rough vacuum applications • Compact design with integrated sensor for useful setup in laboratory and process • Chemically resistant ceramic diaphragm sensor, highly reliable at harsh laboratory con- ditions even in case of aggressive chemicals • Illuminated display, easy to read • Display with menu driven handling easy to use e.g. for unit settings co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 479 Continued on next page

481

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology Vacuum Measurement Technical data: Measuring range: Dimensions (L×W×H): Weight: Rated mains voltage / mains frequency: Plug: Measurement principle: Accuracy of measurement: 0.1 – 1100 mbar/hPa approx. 50 × 62 × 103 mm approx. 0.19 kg 100–230 V/50–60 Hz CEE/CH/UK/US/AUS/CN Ceramic diaphragm (alumina), capacitive, gas indep., absolute pressure < ± 1 mbar/hPa/torr / ± 1 digit (after adjust- ment, constant temp.) Small flange KF DN 16 and hose nozzle DN 6/10 mm Vacuum gauge with integrated vacuum sen- sor, ready for operation, with kit hose nozzle DN 6/10 mm, wall-plug power supply and manual 1 Items supplied: Temperature coefficient (mbar/hPa/torr/°C): < 0.07 mbar/hPa/0.05 torr /K Vacuum connection: Article 1 Vacuum gauge VACUU·VIEW Order No. 10 18 73220 Vacuum gauge DVR 2pro The DVR 2pro has an integrated vacuum sensor made of alumina ceramic with outstand- ing corrosion resistance and superior long-term stability. A particular advantage is its cordless, battery-powered operation. Technical data: Measuring range: Dimensions (L×W×H): Weight: Measurement principle: Ceramic diaphragm (alumina), capacitive, gas indep., absolute 1 – 1060 mbar/hPa 115 × 115 × 90 mm 0.4 kg pressure ±1 mbar/hPa/torr / ±1 digit (after adjustment, constant temp.) Measurement uncertain- ty: Vacuum connection: Items supplied: Small flange KF DN 16 and hose nozzle DN 6/10 mm Vacuum gauge complete with integrated vacuum sensor, in- cluding battery 9 V alkali-manganese, support rod, connecting parts and manual Article 2 Vacuum gauge DVR 2pro Order No. 10 18 72906 VACUU·SELECT Vakuum controller VACUU·SELECT – the interactive controller for all vacuum processes in the lab, with touch display and operator-oriented user interface. VACUU·SELECT works just like a smartphone: Simply select and start the laboratory application via the touch display. The controller automatically manages the vacuum pro- cess – right up to the end. If you select solvent evaporation, VACUU·SELECT detects the boiling point and adapts the vacuum process accordingly. In this way, VACUU·SELECT provides for added comfort and efficiency in the lab. It also allows you to combine and control the application, the vacuum of your choice and other parameters individually, tailored to your needs. Performance features: • control for all common vacuum processes in chemistry labs • graphic user interface simplifies laboratory work • predefined applications save time and guarantee reproducible results • application editor allows easy customization • integrated help function Technical data: Measuring range: Interface: Dimensions (L×W×H): Weight: Rated mains voltage / mains frequency: 100 – 230 V / 50 – 60 Hz Plug: Measurement principle: 0.1 – 1080 mbar/hPa Ethernet / USB (Type A) 152 × 127 × 41 mm 0.745 kg Measurement uncertainty: Vacuum connection: Article 3 VACUU·SELECT Vacuum controller CEE/CH/UK/US/AUS Ceramic diaphragm (alumina), capacitive, gas indep., absolute pressure < ±1 mbar/hPa/torr / ±1 digit (after adjustment, constant temp.) PTFE tubing connection 10/8 mm, hose nozzle DN 6/10 mm, small flange DN 16 Order No. 10 18 77000 Continued on next page 2 480 3

482

Pump Systems Vacuum Technology Vacuum Measurement Vacuum controller bench-top device or for lab scaffold CVC 3000 detect The VACUU·SELECT complete controller provides enhanced process efficiency to appli- cations supported by a vacuum source such as a basic pump or a powerful vacuum network. The VACUU·SELECT controller has you covered. Use manual set-point-control for simple processes, run pre-defined applications at the touch of a button, or create your own application with simple drag-and-drop editing. The controller is available as a bench- top unit, ready for mounting on lab scaffolding, or as a built-in version for lab casework. The integrated controller includes the VACUU·SELECT vacuum controller, a check valve, and a chemical-resistant solenoid isolation valve. The ceramic vacuum sensor and venting valve are built right into the body of the VACUU·SELECT controller. The compact unit is easy to install and setup. With its intuitive, application-based interface, the controller of- fers predefined vacuum processes for all common laboratory applications. In the case of solvent evaporation, it detects the boiling pressure and then holds the pressure level stable using two-point control. Technical data: Measuring range: Measurement principle: Measurement uncertainty: Vacuum connection: Venting valve connection: Dimensions (L×W×H): Weight: Power supply: 1080/810 – 0.1/0.1 mbar/hPa/torr Ceramic diaphragm (alumina), capacitive, gas indep., absolute pressure < ±1 mbar/hPa/torr / ±1 digit (after adjustment, con- stant temp.) Hose nozzle DN 6/10 mm Integrated, hose nozzle DN 4–5 mm 191 × 127 × 187 mm 2 kg 100 - 230 V / ~ 50 - 60 Hz 4 Article 4 VACUU·SELECT Complete controller benchtop device CEE/CH/UK/US/AUS/CN Items supplied: VACUU·SELECT complete controller bench- top device, with solenoid valve, non-return valve, integrated ceramic diaphragm vacuum sensor and venting valve. With power supply, ready to use, with manual. Order No. 10 18 70070 VACUU·SELECT Complete controller for scaffold mounting 10 18 70080 CEE/CH/UK/US/AUS/CN Items supplied: VACUU·SELECT complete controller for lab scaffold mounting, with solenoid valve, non-return valve, integ- rated ceramic diaphragm vacuum sensor and venting valve. With power supply, ready to use, with manual. Vacuum Gauges, Rettberg Article 5 Vacuum manometer With 2 scale ranges (1000-0 mbar/ 760-0 mmHg) complete with adapter to standard Order No. 39 70 10000 ground cone 29/32, suitable for work in the rough vacuum range. Article 6 Vacuum manometer digital Digital vacuum gauge on special lock with thick cone NS29/32, with digital display of the pressure (in bar / psi / MPa), storage of minimum and maximum value, barograph with drag indicator function, battery operated with display of status of battery charging. Order No. 10 70 00004 4-digit display: Accuracy: Protection: -1 to +2 bar 0.5% IP 65 5 6 co d e b e w WWQVD019 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 481

483

Sample Preparation Sampling CHAPTER OVERVIEW Sampling 482 Samplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Samplers for Environmental Analysis see Special Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 Size Reduction 495 Pestles, Mortars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Homogenizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Dispersers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Ultrasonic Homogenizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Mortar Grinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Ball Grinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Universal and Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 Sample Splitting 521 Sample Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Sieving Systems see Separating Systems . . . . . . . . . . 755 Extraction 522 Extractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 KNOWLEDGE Ultrasound Homogenisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Samplers QuickPicker, BÜRKLE The QuickPicker is specially appropriate when bulk goods are withdrawn directly from sacks, bags or open containers. The sample is filled directly into the original sample bot- tles. Easy to handle and to clean. No edges or crevices, no residual sample material. • QuickPicker is delivered complete with 2 sample bottles and cleaning brush • Sampling depth 30 cm, diameter 25 mm, overall length 50 cm, 75 ml volume, made of stainless steel or PP, sample bottles made of PP or LDPE, removable point Sampler QuickPicker Complete with cleaning brush and 2 bottles PP 250 ml Article 1 Sampler Quick Picker AISI 316 Sampler Quick Picker PP Accessories/Sampling bottles Material LDPE PP Colour transparent transparent Volume ml 250 250 Order No. 39 04 32230 10 04 52235 Order No. 39 04 18250 10 04 59250 close-it & close-it food & pharma control seal ensures the tight sealing of punctured sacks/ bags – see page 486. Sampler, BÜRKLE Milky, sampling lance acc. to EN ISO 707. Universal powder and granules sampler made of stainless steel V4A. Developed initially for milk powder samples, conforms to standards of DIN and IDF (Int. Dairy Federation). The collector is inserted into bags or casks and the sample is removed using a semi-cir- cular profile lance. Article Insertion depth mm 385 Overall length approx. mm 480 Milky close-it & close-it food & pharma control seal ensures the tight sealing of punctured sacks/ bags – see page 486. 39 04 63211 Outer Ø approx. mm 28 Vol. approx. ml 150 Order No. 1 co d e b e w WWR4Q017 co d e b e w WWR4Q031 482

484

Sample Preparation Sampling co d e b e w WWR4Q032 Samplers Sampler, BÜRKLE StickProof, sampler for powders in the pharmaceutical industry, made of stainless steel V2A, material 1.4404. The especially slender tip can be inserted easily and deeply. The conical inlet of the tip lets you collect either very small or larger quantities. StickProof is constructed in one piece without edges, grooves or crevices for perfect and easy cleaning. The sample can be filled directly into the sampling bag. Fasten the bag with a sturdy clamp. • Hand grip dia.25 mm • Borehole dia. 20 mm, length of chamber 120 mm • Electropolished surface • Variable sample quantity up to approx. 50 ml StickProof, complete with clamp and 100 PE sampling bags 120 × 170 mm Article StickProof, length 410 mm StickProof, length 1100 mm close-it & close-it food & pharma control seal ensures the tight sealing of punctured sacks/ bags – see page 486. Order No. 39 04 53381 10 04 53382 co d e b e w WWR4Q069 co d e b e w WWR4Q060 Spatula made of Stainless Steel, BÜRKLE Sampling spatula made of stainless steel V4A (1.4404). Thanks to its extra sturdy and solid design, the spatula is also suitable for piercing bags and big-bags and for penetrat- ing solid masses. High-gloss polished and completely welded, the spatula made of pre- mium stainless steel is free of undercuts at all sides. Thus, it is perfectly suited for sam- pling powders, granulates, and pasty substances, above all in the food and pharmaceu- tical industry. • Fully made of stainless steel V4A (1.4404) • Extra sturdy • Easy to clean • Autoclavable • Suitable for flame sterilisation • High-gloss polished Insertion depth mm 188 Overall length mm 300 Volume ml 50 10 04 53831 Order No. Sampler Tubus, BÜRKLE Sampler for pourable bulk goods up to approx. 1 cm in diameter. This makes it possible, for example, to remove hazel nuts, blends of tea, grain or similar items from large sacks. • Also for coarse-grained bulk goods • Made of stainless steel V4A (1.4404) • Special geometry of the tip Corresponds to ISTA standard for seed lengths of 10 mm (wheat, oats) and 5 mm (flax, vetches). Length Order No. cm 1 40 80 close-it & close-it food & pharma control seal ensures the tight sealing of punctured sacks/ bags – see page 486. 10 04 58240 10 04 58280 Ø mm 40 40 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 483 1

485

Sample Preparation Sampling co d e b e w WWR4Q061 1 2 3 484 Samplers Sampler SteriPlast, BÜRKLE Bürkle SteriPlast® products – scoops, spatulas and spoons – are high-quality, ergonom- ically shaped disposable products specifically designed and optimized for sampling. They are manufactured, assembled, and packed individually in Bürkle‘s own clean room, fol- lowed by gamma ray sterilization (min. 10 kGy). 1 SteriPlast® sample scoop The polystyrene sampling scoop SteriPlast® is manufactured in class 7 clean-room (10,000), individually packaged as a disposable product, and sterilised by gamma rays. The sampling scoop is ideal for powders, granulates, and pastes. The scoop with trans- parent lid can be closed immediately after sampling for conserving the sample sterile and free of contamination. • PS, white • Individually packaged and sterilised by gamma rays • Production, assembly and packaging according to clean room class 7 • With EU foodstuffs and FDA approval Contents ml 25 25 50 50 100 100 150 150 250 250 500 500 1000 Version without cover with cover without cover with cover without cover with cover without cover with cover without cover with cover without cover with cover without cover Length mm 141 142 160 161 205 206 216 218 232 235 280 283 332 Order No. 10 04 58100 10 04 58102 10 04 58103 10 04 58104 10 04 58105 10 04 58106 10 04 58107 10 04 58108 10 04 58113 10 04 58114 10 04 58115 10 04 58116 10 04 58119 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2 SteriPlast® sample spoons The polystyrene sampling spoon SteriPlast® is manufactured in class 7 clean-room (10,000), individually packaged as a disposable product, and sterilised by gamma rays. The sampling spoon is available in two sizes: 2.5 ml (teaspoon size) and 10 ml (table spoon size) and is ideal for sampling powders, granulates, pastes, and liquids. • PS, white • Individually packaged and sterilised by gamma rays • Production, assembly and packaging according to clean room class 7 • With EU foodstuffs and FDA approval Contents ml 2.5 10 PU pc/Pack 100 100 10 04 58111 10 04 58112 Order No. Length mm 127 170 3 SteriPlast® sample spatula The polystyrene sampling spatula SteriPlast® is manufactured in class 7 clean-room (10,000), assembled, individually packaged as a disposable product, and sterilised by gamma rays. Thanks to its long, ergonomically shaped sturdy handle and pointed blade, the product - though disposable - is strong enough to pierce containers such as paper or plastic bags. The sampling spatula is ideal for sampling powders, granulates, and pastes. After sampling, the spatula can be closed immediately by means of the transparent clos- ing sleeve, and the sterile sample can be conserved free of contamination. • PS, white • Individually packaged and sterilised by gamma rays • Production, assembly and packaging according to clean room class 7 • With EU foodstuffs and FDA approval Insertion depth mm 150 150 Version without sleeve with sleeve Overall length mm 263 268 Order No. 10 04 58109 10 04 58110 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Continued on next page

486

Sample Preparation Sampling Samplers 4 LaboPlast® and SteriPlast® disposable scrapers The polystyrene scraper SteriPlast® is manufactured in class 7 clean-room (10,000) and individually packaged as a disposable product. Stable and handy disposable scraper. Use the scraper for scraping, smoothing or cleaning and for removing residues. • PS, white • Individually packaged • Production, assembly and packaging according to clean room class 7 • With EU foodstuffs and FDA approval • SteriPlast® sterilised by gamma rays Article LaboPlast® scraper SteriPlast® scraper Length mm 200 × 80 200 × 80 Version Order No. standard 10 04 58030 sterilized, individually 10 04 58130 PU pc/Pack 10 10 5 LaboPlast® and SteriPlast® disposable spatulas Available as 100 pc. large pack, or individually packaged and sterilized by gamma rays • PS • Production, assembly and packaging according to clean room class 7 • With EU foodstuffs and FDA approval • Optionally individually packaged and sterilized by gamma rays Spoon spatula: The spoon spatula is a double-spatula with 0.5 ml spoon and 17 mm spatula blade, total length 178 mm. The spoon spatula serves various purposes, for example as sample spoon, for measuring or transferring small amounts, as scraper, or for mixing and stirring. To be used as disposable product. Resistant to chemicals and corrosion-proof. Micro spatula: Double scoop spatula with rounded ends, content 1.0 and 0.25 ml, total length 180 mm. Use the Micro spatula to sample, transfer, or handle small amounts of chemicals, powder, granulate, pastes, creams or liquids. The stable and practical centre handle makes precise working easy. Article Version Order No. LaboPlast® spoon spatula standard 10 04 58031 SteriPlast® spoon spatula sterilized, individually packaged 10 04 58131 LaboPlast® micro spatula standard 10 04 58032 SteriPlast® micro spatula sterilized, individually packaged 10 04 58132 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 4 5 5 Blue Disposable Sampler for Foodstuffs, BÜRKLE Natural foods do not come with a blue colour. For this reason, blue products or parts thereof would be very easy to find and remove at visual inspection should they ever get into the production. Thus, using blue tools helps to come up to the requirements of the HACCP risk analysis and evaluation in terms of foreign bodies. This is an important precondition particularly in food processing and production as well as in feedingstuff and pharmaceutical industry. • Fit for use in the frame of HACCP/IFS foreign body management • Specifically for the food, feedingstuff, and pharmaceutical industry • PS, blue • Individually packaged and sterilized with gamma rays • Production, assembly and packaging according to clean-room class 7 • Compliant with EU food regulations and FDA regulations Detectable disposable sampling devices In addition to their blue colour, these scoops, spatulas, spoons and scrapers are made of a material with a special additive which makes them visible in metal detectors or at the application of X-rays. Thus, these products can be sorted out via the usual foreign body control systems, even though they are made from plastic. • Traceable via colour scanner, metal detectors or X-rays. 6 SteriPlast® food scoop, blue The food scoop is ideal for powders, granulates, and pastes. co d e b e w WWR4Q068 6 Contents ml 25 50 100 150 250 500 1000 Length mm 141 160 205 216 232 280 332 co d e b e w PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 10 10 04 58301 10 10 04 58305 10 10 04 58313 10 10 04 58319 10 10 04 58203 10 10 04 58207 10 10 04 58215 detectable Order No. 10 04 58303 10 04 58307 10 04 58315 10 04 58201 10 04 58205 10 04 58213 10 04 58219 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 485

487

Sample Preparation Sampling 1 2 co d e b e w WWR4Q033 4 3 486 2 Samplers SteriPlast® spatula for foodstuffs, blue Thanks to its long, ergonomically shaped sturdy handle and pointed blade, the product - though disposable - is strong enough to pierce containers such as paper or plastic bags. The sampling spatula is ideal for sampling powders, granulates, and pastes. detectable Insertion depth mm Order No. 150 10 04 58209 Length mm 263 standard Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 10 04 58309 3 SteriPlast® spoon for foodstuffs The food sampling spoon is available in two sizes: 2.5 ml (teaspoon size) and 10 ml (table spoon size) and is ideal for sampling powders, granulates, pastes, and liquids. Contents ml 2,5 10,0 Length mm 127 170 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 100 10 04 58311 100 10 04 58211 detectable Order No. 10 04 58312 10 04 58212 4 SteriPlast® scraber for foodstuffs Stable and handy disposable scraper. Use the scraper for scraping, smoothing or cleaning and for removing residues. Length × Width 200 × 80 mm PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 10 10 04 58330 detectable Order No. 10 04 58230 SiloSampler, BÜRKLE Silo drills for silo sampling Specially developed to take samples from silo vehicles. When bulk goods are transported great distances (in trucks, railcars etc.), they can demix. If you take a sample from the surface with result may not be representative. Samples can be taken from deeper levels with the silo drill. The drill is screwed into the bulk material manually and only opened at the required depth. Depths of up to 3.5 m can be reached by using extension rods. The silo drill is not only suitable for use in vehicles, it can also be used in numerous bulk material containers in, for example, the pharmaceutical, chemical and food industries. Operation: 1. Drill in the silo drill with the sampling chamber closed 2. Open the chamber at the target point and collect the sample 3. Close the chamber and remove the drill 4. Empty the sample • Manual opening and closing of the sampling chamber • Simple handling • Made of aluminium or AISI 316 stainless steel Total length: 1500 mm Spiral dia.: 90 mm Chamber dia.: 40 mm Volume: 400 ml 2 co d e b e w Article 4 SiloSampler aluminium 5 SiloSampler AISI 304 stainless steel Extension rod AISI 304 1000 mm Order No. 39 04 30101 10 04 50120 39 04 30110 Control Seals, BÜRKLE WWR4Q019 6 Close-it control seals with high adhesion and steam lock Close-it control seals (aluminium backing) which adhere very firmly. Sacks, cartons, etc. which have been pierced and sampled, can be hermetically re-sealed with close-it control seals. Unlike normal labels, close-it control seals also stick firmly to sacks that are coated with powder (plaster, flour etc.). Quality control is easy with the close-it control seal. Avail- able in two sizes. red Colour yellow blue green black white Version printed printed printed printed printed non-printed Dimensions mm 95 × 95 Order No. 39 04 30312 39 04 30314 39 04 30315 39 04 30316 39 04 30311 39 04 30302 150 × 150 Order No. 39 04 31312 39 04 31314 39 04 31315 39 04 31316 39 04 31311 39 04 31302 Continued on next page

488

Samplers Close-it food & pharma control seal with an adhesive approved for use with food- stuffs and FDA 7 Sample Preparation Sampling red Colour yellow blue green black white Version printed printed printed printed printed non-printed Dimensions mm 95 × 95 Order No. 10 04 52017 10 04 52020 10 04 52021 10 04 52022 10 04 52023 10 04 52018 8 Article close-it tape close-it tape food & pharma Close-it tape and Close-it tape food & pharma Width mm 95 Order No. 10 04 50017 10 04 52019 Roll with m 50 50 Accessories 9 Article Dispenser for close-it Fits freels size 95 × 95 mm Dispenser for close-it Fits reels size 150 × 150 mm 150 × 150 Order No. 10 04 53017 10 04 53024 10 04 53021 10 04 53022 10 04 53023 10 04 53018 150 Order No. 10 04 51017 10 04 53019 Order No. 39 04 30306 39 04 31307 6 7 8 9 co d e b e w WWR4Q020 Samplers for All Kinds of Bulk Goods, BÜRKLE Bürkle zone samplers for speedy cross-section samples from sacks, Big-Bags and containers. For sampling bulk goods of all types. Zone samplers with closed, separate chambers al- low you to carry out checks at exactly defined depths. Four types available: • AISI 319 stainless steel/PTFE 25 mm dia. • AISI 319 stainless steel 25 mm dia. • Anodized aluminium 25 mm dia. and 50 mm dia. Properties: • All-layer sampling • Easy cleaning • Color coding Accessories: • Cleaning brush for thorough cleaning of samplers 25 mm and 50 mm diameter. All-layer sampler With open inner tube, no separate chambers, and large sampling volume. For all-layer samples through all the layers of the sample. Material Overall L mm Aluminium 550 Aluminium 850 Aluminium 1500 Aluminium 950 Aluminium 1650 Aluminium 2650 V4A 550 V4A 850 V4A 1500 Insertion depth mm 430 710 1355 850 1500 2500 430 710 1355 Chambers quantity 3 3 5 3 5 7 3 3 5 Chamber vol. ml 70 130 260 880 1700 2900 70 130 260 Tubing Ø mm 25 25 25 50 50 50 25 25 25 Order No. 39 04 31855 39 04 31885 39 04 31815 39 04 31985 39 04 31915 39 04 31925 10 04 52055 10 04 52085 10 04 52150 Multi sampler With several closed chambers, for multi point sampling from several predetermined sam- pling depths. Material Overall L mm Aluminium 550 Aluminium 850 Aluminium 1500 V4A 550 V4A 1500 V4A 850 V4A/PTFE 550 V4A/PTFE 850 V4A/PTFE 1500 co d e b e w Insertion depth mm 430 710 1355 430 1355 710 430 710 1355 Chambers quantity 3 3 5 3 5 3 3 3 5 Chamber vol. ml 14 17 17 14 17 17 14 17 17 Tubing Ø mm 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Order No. 39 04 31755 39 04 31785 39 04 31715 10 04 53055 10 04 53150 10 04 53085 39 04 32855 39 04 32885 39 04 32815 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 487

489

Sample Preparation Sampling Samplers Uno sampler Made of stainless steel V4A/PTFE with a closed sample chamber for point sampling from a predetermined sampling depth. Material Overall L mm V4A/PTFE 550 V4A/PTFE 850 V4A/PTFE 1500 Insertion depth mm 430 710 1355 Chambers quantity 1 1 1 Chamber vol. ml 17 17 17 Tubing Ø mm 25 25 25 Order No. 39 04 32955 39 04 32985 39 04 32915 1 Accessories Article Tube cleaning brush Tube cleaning brush Tube cleaning brush Emptying device Version Ø mm 25 25 50 Material 2 Device with 3 funnels emptying funnel separate V2A V2A Length cm 60 100 100 Length cm 100 Order No. 39 04 30460 39 04 30410 39 04 30411 Order No. 10 04 50030 10 04 50033 close-it & close-it food & pharma control seal ensures the tight sealing of punctured sacks/ bags – see page 486. Liqui/ViscoSampler, BÜRKLE BÜRKLE - LiquiSamplers and ViscoSamplers Ultrapure sample collectors for liquids and high viscosity media. LiquiSampler for liquids, acc. to DIN ISO 15528. Made of ultra-pure and chemically inert PTFE/FEP for contamination-free sampling, or of PP. Practical one-hand operation via pushbutton. With discharge funnel. ViscoSampler for viscous media. Media are drawn up and discharged using the suction flask. Easy cleaning: All surfaces are poreless and without crevices to prevent dirt accumulation. Very easy dismantling and cleaning. All threads are standard round threads established for use in food hygiene. 3 4 co d e b e w co d e b 2w e WWR4Q018 WWR4Q025 LiquiSamplers 3 Material PTFE/FEP, highly transparent PTFE/FEP, highly transparent PTFE/FEP, highly transparent PP, transparent PP, transparent PP, transparent ViscoSamplers 4 Material PTFE/FEP, highly transparent PTFE/FEP, highly transparent PTFE/FEP, highly transparent PP, transparent PP, transparent PP, transparent Length cm 100 200 60 100 200 60 Length cm 100 200 60 100 200 60 Ø mm 32 32 32 32 32 32 Ø mm 32 32 32 32 32 32 Order No. 39 04 50311 39 04 50312 10 04 50313 39 04 53311 39 04 53312 10 04 53313 Order No. 39 04 50331 39 04 50332 10 04 50333 39 04 53331 39 04 53332 10 04 53333 Liquid Sampler, BÜRKLE 1 2 3 3 4 One-handed operation. • Two types available: open with thumb (use your thumb to open the valve) and place onto bottle (place the valve on the sampling vessel to open) 5 6 488 • Made of V4A (1.4404) high-grade steel • 4 sizes Version 5 Open with thumb 5 Open with thumb 6 Place onto bottle 6 Place onto bottle Length cm 46 54 45.5 53.5 Ø mm 32 32 32 32 Volume ml 50 100 50 100 Order No. 39 04 63261 39 04 63262 10 04 53263 10 04 53264

490

Sample Preparation Sampling co d e b e w WWR4Q050 1 Samplers Dip Sampler, BÜRKLE Dip sampler for liquids Easy sampling of liquid samples. Good view through transparent tubes. Upper end with stopcock, lower end with ball valve. • PP, transparent • Dip sampler 100455200 is continuously extractable from 100 cm to 200 cm • All-layer sample and target-point sample possible Function All-layer sample 1. Slowly insert dip sampler in liquid with opened stopcock . 2. Close valve. 3. Remove dip sampler and take sample. Target-point sample 1. Insert dip sampler in target point with closed stopcock. 2. Open stopcock - liquid pours in. 3. Close stopcock. 4. Remove dip sampler, take sample. Volume Order No. ml 1 140 2 280 3 500 Immersion depth cm 50 100 100 – 200 Ø mm 25 25 25 10 04 55050 10 04 55100 10 04 55200 2 3 MiniSampler, BÜRKLE With the MiniSampler the sample liquid only comes into contact with the suction hose and the sample bottle. The possibility of cross-contamination is greatly reduced. Immediately after the sample is taken, the bottles are sealed using an airtight cap and a tamper-evident safety ring. The single use, flexible suction hose can be quickly released, thus ensuring that the sam- ples are never contaminated. If necessary, a new hose can be used for every single sample. Due to its small diameter (8 mm) the hose can reach sampling areas which are otherwise inaccessible. • Also suitable for viscous oils • Complete in a practical transport case co d e b e w WWR4Q026 MiniSampler PE 4 Article MiniSampler PE Content of transport case: Vacuum pump, 10 PE bottles 100 ml, 10 m PE suction hose Ø 6 × 8 mm, 1 hose cutter, 1 hose weight made of stainless steel AISI 304/brass nickel- plated, 20 seal-it bottle seals Order No. 39 04 55301 Accessories for MiniSampler PE Article MiniSampler pump with adapter MiniSampler pump without adapter Adapter MiniSampler for glass thread GL 45 Adapter MiniSampler for sample boxes PFA Tube cutter Sample bottle, PE, 100 ml Sample bottle, PE, 250 ml Extension tube made of PE Suction tube, PE, reel with 100 m Order No. 39 04 55320 10 04 55011 10 04 55029 10 04 55102 39 04 55641 39 04 55324 39 04 55336 39 04 10608 39 04 55608 MiniSampler PTFE 5 Article MiniSampler PTFE Content of transport case: Vacuum pump, 1 sample bottle PFA 180 ml, 5 m PTFE suction hose Ø 6 × 8 mm, 1 hose cutter, 1 stainless steel hose weight made of V2A (1.4301)/brass nickel-plated, 20 seal-it bottle seals Order No. 10 04 50110 Accessories for MiniSampler PTFE Article MiniSampler pump with adapter MiniSampler pump without adapter Adapter MiniSampler for glass thread GL 45 Adapter MiniSampler for sample boxes PFA Tube cutter Sample box PFA, 180 ml Suction hose PTFE on roll 6 × 8 mm, length 5 m Order No. 39 04 55320 10 04 55011 10 04 55029 10 04 55102 39 04 55641 10 04 55018 10 04 54068 4 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 489

491

Sample Preparation Sampling Samplers UniSampler, BÜRKLE co d e b e w WWR4Q028 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWR4Q046 4 490 UniSampler with telescopic lance For sampling of liquids from precisely determined depths. Telescopic suction tube can be varied to a maximum length of 100 cm. Operation 1. Set the desired sampling depth by adjusting the suction lance 2. Attach the sampling bottle to the adapter 3. Lower the suction lance into the medium 4. Create a vacuum with the hand pump and collect the sample 5. Remove the filled sampling bottle, close and label it • PP suction tube, PVC suction hose • Incl. 5 sample bottles PP at 250 ml and 500 ml each, hand vacuum pump and adapter for sample bottles 100 to 1000 ml, 20 seal-it bottle seals in transport case. Order No. 39 04 45611 Article 1 UniSampler with telescopic lance UniSampler with hose Stainless steel hose weight. Sampler for deep, narrow and hard-to-reach spots. The heavy-duty metal tube brings the hose to any desired depth. Once again the samples are collected using a hand-operated pump and transferred directly into sampling bottles to ensure sampling purity. Operation 1. Lower suction hose to desired depth 2. Attach sampling bottle to adapter 3. Create a vacuum with the hand pump and collect the sample 4. Remove the filled sampling bottle and label it • PVC suction hose, 2.50 m long • Incl. sample bottles PP 1000 ml, hand vacuum pump and adapter for sample bottles 100 to 1000 ml, hose weight V2A, 20 seal-it label seals in case Article 2 UniSampler with tube Sample bottle 1000 ml Spare tube PVC, 2.50 m long Order No. 39 04 45612 39 04 45631 39 04 45621 UniSampler “Ex” Specially for combustible liquids of hazard class A I (e.g. gasoline). There is an electrical- ly conductive connection between the glass bottle and both parts are grounded with an earth cable. Operation 1. Connect to ground 2. Lower the suction hose to the required depth 3. Plug the adapter on the sample bottle 4. Create a vacuum with the hand pump and collect the sample 5. Remove, close and label the filled sample bottle • PTB approval D-333-009 618/00 • Incl. 4 m hose (NBR), glass bottle 1000 ml, bottle adapter, bottle stand, vacuum pump, grounding cable and hose weight (brass) in case Article 3 UniSampler “Ex” Sample bottle, glass, 1000 ml Order No. 39 04 45613 39 04 45610 Disposable DispoSampler, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® DispoSampler – for the highest standards in sampling The Bürkle disposable samplers – DispoSampler – are used to take samples of liquids, viscous media, powders and granulates. Target point samples can be taken, all-layer and cross-section samples, as well as small and large sample quantities. Unlike conventional reusable samplers, disposable samp- lers do not need to be cleaned after use. • Cleaning reusable samplers is a demanding and often complicated task, with greasy, strongly adhesive or toxic substances. Sometimes the task is even impossible • Work processes do not have to be interrupted by cleaning • Cross contamination is completely eliminated • The cleaning method does not need to be validated in audits • Time and money are saved Continued on next page

492

Sample Preparation Sampling 4 Samplers MultiDispo Disposable zone samplers for taking samples from multiple layers of the sample material. Suitable for free-fl owing powders and small-grain granulates. The representative all-layer sample can be emptied directly through the open handle into a sample container. • Easy emptying through the opening in the handle (Ø 14 mm) • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilized by gamma rays • Tip Ø 30 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 Volume ml 100 200 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 54442 20 10 04 54450 sterilized Order No. 10 04 54441 10 04 54451 5 ZoneDispo The ZoneDispo disposable all-layer sampler is used in sampling to collect a representative all-layer sample from three different layers. Suitable for free-flowing powders and small- grain granulates. The collected sample can be secured and transported in the closed sampler. • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Tip Ø 30 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 Volume ml 100 200 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 54420 20 10 04 54430 sterilized Order No. 10 04 54421 10 04 54431 5 6 TargetDispo TargetDispo is used to take a target point sample at a position in the sample material that has previously been precisely determined. The sampler pierces into the powder or gran- ulate while closed. When it reaches the sample removal point it is opened and then closed again. In this way a precise target-point sample is obtained. The sample can simply be emptied through the open handle. • Easy emptying through the opening in the handle (Ø 14 mm) • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Tip Ø 30 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 Volume ml 100 200 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 54462 20 10 04 54470 sterilized Order No. 10 04 54461 10 04 54471 7 PowderDispo PowderDispo is the ideal disposable sampler for cross-section samples of powdery or slightly cohesive substances. A complete all-layer sample can be taken from bags or smaller containers with the lance. • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Ø 21 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 300 500 Volume ml 60 100 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 55510 20 10 04 55522 sterilized Order No. 10 04 55511 10 04 55521 6 7 8 DispoPicker Disposable sampler for powders and small-grain bulk materials. Because the tip is closed, the sample material cannot trickle back out of the sample lance. DispoPicker is ideally suited for cross-section samples. • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Ø 21 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 300 500 Volume ml 60 100 co d e b e w PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 55540 20 10 04 55550 sterilized Order No. 10 04 55541 10 04 55551 Continued on next page 8 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 491

493

Sample Preparation Sampling 1 2 3 4 5 492 1 Samplers DispoLance The DispoLance disposable sampler can be used for taking large and small sample quan- tities quickly and easily, directly from bags. The sampler is suitable for free-flowing pow- ders and small-grain granulates. The DispoLance sampler pierces into the container with the sturdy tip and the sample flows through the open inner tube directly into the contain- er or bag that is held underneath. • Variable sample quantity • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Nominal width 14 mm • Ø 21 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 300 500 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 55560 20 10 04 55570 sterilized Order No. 10 04 55561 10 04 55571 2 MicroDispo Quite small sample quantities (10 ml) can be taken with MicroDispo. Especially in phar- maceutical applications it often happens that only a small quantity can or should be ex- tracted for analysis. Using the disposable sampler, precise target point samples can be taken of free-flowing powders and small-grain bulk materials. • Ergonomic handle • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Ø 21 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 Volume ml 10 10 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 52240 20 10 04 52250 sterilized Order No. 10 04 52241 10 04 52251 3 ViscoDispo The ViscoDispo disposable sampler can be used to take samples of high-viscosity media up to 100.000 mPas. The ergonomically shaped handle and the very stable drawbar make it easy to draw even viscous substances. • Ergonomic handle • No seals • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Ø 21 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 Volume ml 100 200 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 53320 20 10 04 53330 sterilized Order No. 10 04 53321 10 04 53331 4 LiquiDispo The LiquiDispo disposable sampler can be used to take samples of liquids from highly liquid to slightly viscous. An ergonomic handle makes it easier to draw the sample: up to 200 ml can be drawn, as with a syringe. • Ergonomic handle • No seals • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Ø 21 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 Volume ml 100 200 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 51120 20 10 04 51130 sterilized Order No. 10 04 51121 10 04 51131 5 DispoPipette Simple disposable sampler for taking samples of low viscosity media. If the DispoPipette is inserted into the liquid opened, an all-layer sample is obtained. If it is closed while it is inserted up to the sampling point and then opened, a target-point sample is obtained. Very easy to operate. With two opening sizes (2,5/5,5 mm) for different viscosities. Continued on next page

494

Sample Preparation Sampling Samplers • All-layer and target point samples possible • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Ø 21 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 Volume ml 100 200 PU pc/Pack sterilized Order No. 20 10 04 55501 20 10 04 55532 standard Order No. 10 04 55500 10 04 55531 6 7 co d e b e w WWR4Q034 8 6 DispoTube The ergonomic handle of the DispoTube makes it easier to work and facilitates a good grip even under difficult conditions, for example with gloves. Disposable sampler for taking samples of liquids. • Ergonomic handle • All-layer and target point samples possible • HDPE • Clean room manufactured, individually packed • Optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Ø 21 mm • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 Volume ml 100 200 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 56620 20 10 04 56630 sterilized Order No. 10 04 56621 10 04 56631 7 DispoSchöpfer DispoSchöpfer is a disposable sampling scoop. The scaled scoop allows for measuring and content indication in 10-ml increments up to 200 ml. An ergonomic handle improves the ease of use, and spouts on both sides make the scoop suitable for left- and right-hand- ed operation. • Scoop 200 ml • Outside Ø 92 mm • Ergonomic handle • HDPE • Clean-room production, individually packed • Gamma ray sterilisation as an option • Pursuant to EU food directives and FDA regulations Length mm 500 1000 PU pc/Pack standard Order No. 20 10 04 56640 20 10 04 56650 sterilized Order No. 10 04 56641 10 04 56651 Vampire Sampler, BÜRKLE Vampire sampler For sampling liquids in the field. Portable, battery-powered hose pump for liquids. Ideal for taking samples from barrels, tanks, wells, water separators and sewage and purification systems. • Easy to clean, liquid only comes into contact with the hose • Independent of mains power, with rechargeable battery and charger • Sampling directly into the original sampling bottle • Suction depth to 5 meters • Also available for contaminated substances or substances containing particles • Good chemical resistance • High delivery rate of up to 2.0 l/min. • Delivered complete with drive unit, pump head, pump hoses (30 cm, Marprene/silicone), suction hose (5 m, PE), hose connec- tor (PP), sample bottle (250 ml, LDPE), bottle basket, two rechargeable batteries and battery charger Article 8 Vampire sampler Accessories Article Pump hose made of marpene Length 1 m, I.D. 5.0 mm, O.D. 8.0 mm Extension tube made of PE Length 10 m, I.D. 6.0 mm, O.D. 8.0 mm Wide-neck sample bottle 250 ml Stainless steel bottle basket for 250 ml bottle Order No. 39 04 13271 Order No. 39 04 10508 39 04 10608 39 04 18250 39 04 15302 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 493

495

Sample Preparation Sampling co d e b e w WWR4Q049 1 co d e b e w WWR4Q064 494 Samplers ProfiSampler, BÜRKLE Vacuum-Sampler for solvents and flammable liquids. Purpose of use Sampling liquids from barrels, tanks, trucks, railway-car, ships, waters, groundwater. • Available with optimised, straight suction tubes for easier sampling. • Transport tubular for organised transport and discard. • Filling level control, reflux automatics and overflow protection by means of the integrat- • Optimised suction volume 200 ml, suction force of 0.5 bar and suction depth up to 5 m/ ed venting valve. water. ProfiSampler Aluminum for solvents and flammable liquids Explosion Categories IIA, IIB and IIC*. With bottle thread GL 45 (in compliance with Schott-glass bottles 100 ml to 1000 ml). During sampling of flammable liquids, the device has to be grounded. Included: Vacuum pump made of aluminium, with feet, venting valve and bottle thread GL 45 with glass bottle 500 ml, 5 suction tubes PA black, 220 cm long, electrically conductive, hose cutter, brass hose weight, 20 seal-it bottle seals, earthing cable *) Please note chemical resistance of the parts in contact with medium. Wear protective clothing! Article 1 ProfiSampler aluminium Suction tube PA black, 220 cm long, electrical conducti- ve, pack of 10 pcs. Order No. 10 04 55110 10 04 51024 BOLA Sampling Pumps, Bohlender Made of polypropylene and PTFE. A pull on the ball handle produces a slight vacuum in the sampling bottle. Due to this vacuum, the sample is sucked into the sampling bottle. All glass bottles with a GL 45 thread can be used as sampling bottles. The pump provides universal chemical resistance since the sample is only exposed to PTFE. • compact construction • usable anywhere (no power or air supply needed) • easy handling • quick and low-risk pumping of ultrapure liquids • volume per stroke 50 ml • for tubing O.D. 6 mm For pumping liquids from sources that are not easily accessible; also suitable for liquids with a high viscosity, e.g. oils Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: PTFE and PP from -10°C to +90°C +++ very good Connection thread GL 18 for bottle volume ml 100 – 2000 Order No. 10 17 62416 Stainless Steel Scoop, BÜRKLE In contrast to conventional scoops, the stainless steel scoops has no openings, undercuts or crevices in which residues could collect. Pore-free finishing produced by high-quality laser welding seams. The stainless steel scoop can be flame-sterilised and can therefore be made completely germ-free. • Scoop made of stainless steel V2A (1.4301), complete with rod • Sterilisable by flame sterilisation or steam sterilisation Article Stainless steel scoop Overall length cm 115 Volume ml 1000 Order No. 10 04 55410

496

Sample Preparation Sampling / Size Reduction co d e b e w WWSU9057 Samplers Spouted Dairy Sample Bailer, Dinkelberg Analytics Stainless steel sprouted dairy sampler bailer. The scoop has a volume of max. 100 ml and a total length of 600 mm. Article Spouted dairy sample bailer Volume ml 100 Overall length mm 600 Order No. 10 32 11755 Samplers for environmental analysis see page 1013 Pestles, Mortars Mortars and Pestles, Hard Porcelain, IDL Mortars with spout, rough interior. Mortars I.D. mm 65 90 130 150 180 240 330 Vol. approx. ml 70 170 400 700 1000 2600 6000 H mm 40 55 65 70 80 100 140 DIN 12906 Order No. no no yes yes yes yes yes 21 00 18506 21 00 18509 21 00 18512 21 00 18515 21 00 18518 21 00 18525 21 00 18533 Pestles acc. to DIN 12906, rough Length mm 115 135 150 175 210 Head Ø mm 24 30 36 42 55 DIN 12906 Order No. no yes yes yes yes 21 00 19507 21 00 19510 21 00 19513 21 00 19516 21 00 19519 PU pc/Pack 20 10 1 1 1 1 1 PU pc/Pack 20 20 10 10 5 Agate Mortars with Pestles, IDL O.D. approx. mm 25 40 50 60 75 100 125 150 200 I.D. approx. mm 20 35 40 50 60 80 105 125 165 Height approx. mm 15 20 25 25 30 40 50 65 80 Vol. approx. ml 2 8 10 13 25 50 100 200 550 Order No. 21 00 00025 21 00 00040 21 00 00050 21 00 00060 21 00 00075 21 00 00100 21 00 00125 21 00 00150 21 00 00200 Mortars, BOCHEM Mortars made of 18/10 steel, with foot Ø mm 100 120 140 160 180 200 Volume ml 250 500 750 1000 1500 2000 Pestle made of 18/10 steel Head Ø mm 28 Shaft Ø mm 24 Overall L mm 140 Order No. 31 05 08930 31 05 08931 31 05 08932 31 05 08933 31 05 08934 31 05 08935 Order No. 31 05 08936 co d e b e w WW7R3292 co d e b e w WWQ7J019 co d e b e w WW7R3307 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 495

497

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Homogenizers Semi-Automatic Homogenizer schuett homgenplus, schuett-biotec Homogenizer drive Potter Elvehjem & Dounce. Reliable homogenising without much effort. For gentle homog- enising of biological samples and tough, hard-to-homogenise tissue in such a way that a large proportion of intact nuclei can be isolated. Highly stable, vibration-free, extremely powerful. Infinitely adjustable electronic speed control. 4-digit digital display. Quick-ac- tion chuck with hollow shaft for fast and easy change of pestle and use of different shaft lengths and diameters. Glass quick-action chuck recommended for glass pestles. Chucks for cooling vessel match Eppendorf® reaction tubes and homogenization tubes (1.5 to 40 ml, Ø 10 to 40 mm). For optimum cooling, the cooler can be filled with ice or ice water. 230 V (115 V as an option), 300 W. Dimensions (W × H × D): Speed control: 300 × 888 × 350 mm 40 – 3.000 rpm Article 1 schuett homgenplus, homogenizer drive, 230 V Scope of delivery: with universal chuck, including cooling con- tainer (1 l) and universal collet chuck set (comprising 6 sizes). Quick-grip chuck for glass pestle Order No. 53 31 01011 53 31 05010 EPPI micro pestles for use test tubes (Pellet) Article Overall L mm 2 EPPI-micro pestle, stainless steel, conical (pack of 1) 100 3 EPPI-micro pestle, PP, conical (pack of 10) 70 4 Quick-grip chuck for EPPI-micro pestle PP Shaft Ø mm 4.9 4.9 Order No. 53 31 00712 53 31 00512 53 31 00612 Glass homogenizer vessels with PTFE pestle Shaft made of stainless steel. Inert. Elastic. With smooth, wax-like, moisture-rejecting surface. Resistant against high temperatures. Volume ml 7 2 7 15 7 40 5 2 5 5 5 10 6 15 5 20 5 30 6 40 5 5 5 10 6 15 5 30 6 40 Glass vessel ty- pe 1 1 1 2 2* 2 1 2 2 1 2* 2* 1 2* 1 Type Order No. conical 10 31 85440 conical 10 31 85441 conical 10 31 85443 cylindrical 10 31 85540 cylindrical 10 31 85541 cylindrical 10 31 85542 cylindrical 10 31 85543 cylindrical 10 31 85544 cylindrical 10 31 85545 cylindrical 10 31 85546 cylindrical, glassfibre reinforced 10 31 85640 cylindrical, glassfibre reinforced 10 31 85641 cylindrical, glassfibre reinforced 10 31 85642 cylindrical, glassfibre reinforced 10 31 85643 cylindrical, glassfibre reinforced 10 31 85644 Glass homogenizer vessels with glass pestle With robust glass shaft. Ground-glass surface in cylindrical/tapered part. Highly efficient with tough tissue. Volume ml 8 2 8 15 8 40 9 8 9 15 AT 40 Glass vessel type Type 1 1 1 3 3 1 conical conical conical cylindrical cylindrical cylindrical Homogenizer-type 1: with overflow flare, with lip Homogenizer-type 2: cylindrical Homogenizer-type 2*: as centrifuge tube Homogenizer-type 3: with overflow flare, without lip Order No. 19 31 05240 19 31 05241 19 31 05243 19 31 05340 19 31 05341 19 31 05343 1 4 3 2 5 6 7 9 496 8 AT

498

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Dispersers Dispersing Systems POLYTRON®, KINEMATICA 1 Hand disperser POLYTRON® PT 1200 E - Eco Line This ergonomic hand disperser is ideally suited for the rapid processing of small sample quantities. The low weight of the PT 1200 E ensures ergonomic work. A tripod is available. The range of aggregates includes diameters from 3 mm for very small volumes up to Ø 12 mm in various special geometries. Our portfolio furthermore comprises Ø 7 and 12 mm disposable plastic versions to prevent contamination, as well as the PT-DA 20/2 X EC aggregate for tablet homogenisation. Overview: • 24 Volt, 100 Watt low-voltage motor with safety transformer • Analogue motor speed control up to 25,000 rpm • Aggregate tips speeds up to approx. 12 m/s • Softstart (after switch-on, for example with preselected speed) • Thermal fuse for overload protection (PTC) • Ergonomic, user-friendly design • Aggregate replacement using one-handed quick-release coupling (type E) • Various models of dispersing aggregates which are Easy-to-Clean Article POLYTRON PT® 1200 E, 230 V (with EU-plug) Order No. 53 74 11200 Dispersing units for POLYTRON® PT 1200 E Article 2 PT-DA 03/2EC-E050 PT-DA 05/2EC-E085 PT-DA 07/2EC-E107 PT-DA 12/2EC-123 3 PT-DA 07/2SYN-E082 disposable unit, sterile packed PT-DA 07/2SYN-E082 disposable unit, non-sterile PT-DA 07/2SYN-E082 disposable unit, non-sterile PT-DA 12/2SYN-E126 disposable unit PT-DA 12/2SYN-E082 disposable unit, non-sterile PT-DA 20/2XEC-E116 Working vol. with water ml 0.05 – 2 0.1 – 5 0.3 – 10 0.3 – 250 0.3 – 10 0.3 – 10 0.3 – 10 0.3 – 250 0.3 – 250 min. 10 ml1) Pieces/ box Order No. 25 25 12 25 10 10 74 03004 10 74 03012 10 74 03031 10 74 03062 10 74 03030 10 74 03037 10 74 03038 10 74 03035 10 74 03036 10 74 03255 1) For a vessel of Ø 22 mm / Volume always depends on vessel diameter Many other special dispersing aggregates are available on request. Stands for PT 1200 E HS 1200 E: Holder system for drive unit, transformer, four dispersing aggregates and two tools ST-P13/320: Stainless steel plate stand incl. silicon anti-skid mat, with height-adjustable holder for accommodating the drive unit and fixing the base station. Article 4 Holding system HS 1200 E 5 Plate stand ST-P13/320 Order No. 53 74 11201 10 74 04007 Hand disperser POLYTRON® PT 1300 D - HighEnd Line This premium-range hand disperser is ideally suited for the rapid processing of small sample quantities. The low weight of the PT 1300 D ensures ergonomic work. Two differ- ent tripods are available. For repetitive and reproducible tasks, the desired speed can be saved. At switch-off, the last speed is saved additionally. This drive can be controlled by means of a PC via USB or RS232 using the KIN software. The range of aggregates in- cludes diameters from 3 mm for very small volumes up to Ø 12 mm in various special geometries. Our portfolio furthermore comprises Ø 7 and 12 mm disposable plastic ver- sions to prevent contamination, as well as the PT-DA 20/2 X EC aggregate for tablet ho- mogenisation. 1 5 2 3 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 497 Continued on next page

499

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Dispersers Overview: • 30 Volt, 100 Watt brushless low-voltage motor with safety transformer • Motor speed digitally adjusted from 2000 to 30000 rpm • Aggregate tip speed up to approx. 14 m/s • Stable motor speeds even during changes of viscosity • Soft start (e.g. with preselected speed, prevents sloshing of the sample) • Thermal fuse (PTC) in case of overload • PC interfaces (RS 232 and USB) • MEMO function for the saved speed • Membrane keypad (easy to clean) • User-friendly design • Aggregate change by means of one-hand quick coupling (type E) • Wide choice of aggregates, very easy to clean and remove (EasyClean) Article POLYTRON® PT 1300 D, 230 V (with EU-plug) 1 Order No. 53 74 01300 Dispersing units for POLYTRON® PT 1300 D Same as for PT 1200 E Stands for PT 1300 S ST-P01/200: Hinge stand (gas spring) incl. holder for dispersing aggregates and tools ST-P22/600: Plate stand with special drive extension for PT 1300 D. Incl. vessel holder with boss head and safety positioning ring Article Hinge stand ST-P01/200 Plate stand ST-P22/600 Order No. 10 74 04010 10 74 04011 2 Stand disperser POLYTRON® PT 2500 E - Eco Line The PT 2500 E is the ideal choice for the budget-conscious lab. Thanks to its powerful performance, it covers a large number of different applications in a volume range of ap- prox. 0.05 to 2500 ml. The electronic control system continuously compares the prese- lected to the actual speed and adjusts it automatically, e.g. if the viscosity changes. The large digital speed display is easy to read. The portfolio of dispersing tools comprises diameters for small volumes from 3 mm to 25 mm. Overview: • Aggregate tip speed up to approx. 32 m/s • Soft start (e.g. with preselected speed, prevents sloshing of the sample) • Thermal fuse (PTC) in case of overload • Stable motor speeds even during changes of viscosity • Aggregate change by means of single-hand quick coupling • Noise-insulated casing • Wide choice of aggregates with EasyClean function • Digital display Article POLYTRON® PT 2500 E, 230 V (with EU-plug) Order No. 10 74 01055 Dispersing units for POLYTRON® PT 2500 E Same aggregates as for PT 1200 E, further diameters/sizes: Article PT-DA 20/2EC-E192 PT-DA 20/2MEC-E192 PT-DA 20/2WEC-E192 PT-DA 20/2XEC-E116 PT-DA 25/2EC-E192 Working vol. with water ml 100 – 2000 100 – 2000 100 – 2000 min. 10 ml1) 100 – 2500 Order No. 10 74 03069 10 74 03263 10 74 03258 10 74 03255 10 74 03264 1) For a vessel of Ø 22 mm / Volume always depends on vessel diameter Stands for PT 2500 E ST-P20/600: Plate stand with two rod design. Boss head for drive unit can not rotate for extra safety 1 2 3 Article Order No. 3 Plate stand ST-P20/600 10 74 04051 Electrical stand ST-P 14/590+500, for PT 3100D/PT 6100 D 10 74 00033 Electrical plate stand ST-P 14/590+500 with a telescope bar for more operator comfort. Including Up/Down button and an- ti-skid mat. The electronic system is designed for environmen- tal temperatures of +5 °C to +40°C and was tested pursuant to EN 60335-1 and UL 962. To be used with POLYTRON® PT 2500 E, PT 10-35 GT, PT 3100 D and PT 6100 D. 230 V (with EU connector) Reduced arm for use of the PT 2500 E with the electrical stand All stands without vessel holder, boss head and safety positioning ring 10 74 03601 498 Continued on next page

500

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Dispersers Vessel holders and safety positioning rings Vessel holder for fixing any mixing/processing tank. Suitable for the safety-stand incl. boss head. The safety ring avoids any uncontrolled downwards movement of the drive unit. Can also be used to fix the working height. Article Vessel holder with guide for ST-P20/600 Safety positioning ring for ST-P20/600 Order No. 10 74 04511 10 74 04531 4 Stand disperser POLYTRON® PT 10-35 GT - Eco Line Budget dispersing system for operating volumes of up to 10 litres. This powerful dispers- er is used in sample preparation, formulation, or scale-up tests. Select from up to 30 different dispersing aggregates in a wide range of geometries, designs, materials, and coatings. The electronic control system continuously compares the preselected to the actual speed and adjusts it automatically, e.g. if the viscosity changes. Overview: • Aggregate tip speed up to approx. 34 m/s • Soft start (e.g. with preselected speed, prevents sloshing of the sample) • Thermal fuse (PTC) in case of overload, blocking protection and acoustic alarm • Stable motor speeds even during changes of viscosity • Aggregate change by means of single-hand quick coupling (type F) • Noise-insulated casing • Wide choice of aggregates with EasyClean function Article POLYTRON® PT 10-35 GT, 230 V (with EU-plug) Order No. 10 74 01104 Dispersing units for POLYTRON® PT 10-35 GT Article Working vol. with water ml PT-DA 05/2EC-F078 0.1 – 5 PT-DA 07/BEC-F101 (BIOTRONA®) 0.3 – 10 PT-DA 07/2EC-F101 0.3 – 10 PT-DA 12/2EC-F154 2.0 – 250 PT-DA 12/2MEC-F154 2.0 – 250 PT-DA 12/2WEC-F154 2.0 – 250 PT-DA 12/BEC-F154 (BIOTRONA®) 2.0 – 250 PT-DA 20/2EC-F193 100 – 2500 PT-DA 20/2MEC-F193 100 – 2500 PT-DA 20/2WEC-F193 100 – 2500 PT-DA 20/BEC-F193 (BIOTRONA®) 100 – 2500 PT-DA 30/2EC-F250 100 – 4000 PT-DA 30/2MEC-F250 100 – 4000 PT-DA 30/2WEC-F250 100 – 4000 PT-DA 30/4EC-F250 100 – 4000 PT-DA 30/DS-F250 (Dissolver) 100 – 4000 PT-DA 36/2EC-F250 200 – 4500 PT-DA 36/BEC-F250 (BIOTRONA®) 200 – 4500 PT-DA 36/2MEC-F250 200 – 4500 PT-DA 36/4EC-F250 200 – 4500 PT-DA 36/2WEC-F250 200 – 4500 Order No. 10 74 03297 10 74 03355 10 74 03298 10 74 03299 10 74 03300 10 74 03301 10 74 03354 10 74 03302 10 74 03303 10 74 03304 10 74 03296 10 74 03305 10 74 03307 10 74 03309 10 74 03311 10 74 03344 10 74 03313 10 74 03314 10 74 03315 10 74 03317 10 74 03319 Stand for PT 10-35 GT ST-P10/600: Plate stand with one rod design. The plate stand allows for easy and safe height adjustment of the drive. The drive is safely attached to the stand and protected against rotating around the extension by means of a new type of boss head clamp/drive extension with an easy-to-use knurled screw. 4 Article Electrical stand ST-P 14/590+500, for PT 3100D/PT 6100 D 10 74 00033 Electrical plate stand ST-P 14/590+500 with a telescope bar Order No. for more operator comfort. Including Up/Down button and an- ti-skid mat. The electronic system is designed for environmen- tal temperatures of +5 °C to +40°C and was tested pursuant to EN 60335-1 and UL 962. To be used with POLYTRON® PT 2500 E, PT 10-35 GT, PT 3100 D and PT 6100 D. 230 V (with EU connector) for use of the PT 10-35 GT with the electrical stand Reduced arm Plate stand ST-P10/600 Vessel holder for ST-P10/600 Safety positioning ring for ST-P10/600 10 74 03602 10 74 04050 10 74 04513 10 74 04535 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 499

501

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Dispersers Dispersing-Systems POLYTRON®, KINEMATICA POLYTRON® PT 3100 D and PT 6100 D - digital high-end laboratory disperser The PT 3100 D/PT 6100 D dispersing system is unique in its class. Applications with the highest demands for reproducibility and scaling up can be efficiently performed with this device. The fully digitized control and regulation system is very easy to operate via the membrane keypad. The clear-cut, brightly illuminated LCD display shows all the parame- ters. With the KIN software comprised in the delivery, various parameters such as speed profiles or times can be specified via PC interface. The results can then be logged in an Excel file. Select from up to 30 different dispersing aggregates in a wide range of geom- etries, designs, materials, and coatings. • Soft start (e.g. with preselected speed, prevents sloshing of the sample) • Integrated overheating, overload, and blocking protection • Stable motor speeds even during changes of viscosity • Easy operation via membrane keyboard • Choose from three operating modes: Standard, Timer, Auto • PC interface (RS-232) for control via KIN software • Aggregate change by means of single-hand quick coupling (type F) • Noise-insulated casing • Digital LCD display with membrane keypad for indication of the process parameters and alarms • Wide choice of aggregates with EasyClean function 3 4 5 Article 1 POLYTRON® PT 3100 D, 230 V (with EU-plug) 2 POLYTRON® PT-MR 6100 D, 230 V (EU-plug) Order No. 10 74 00121 10 74 00110 Dispersing units for PT 3100 D Same as for PT 10-35 GT Dispersing units for PT 6100 D Same as for PT 10-35 GT / PT 3100 D as well as the following ones: Article 3 PT-DA 40/2EC-F250 4 PT-DA 40/2MEC-F250 PT-DA 40/4WEC-F250 PT-DA 45/2EC-F250 5 PT-DA 45/2BEC-F250 (BIOTRONA®) PT-DA 45/2WEC-F250 PT-DA 45/2WEC-F250 PT-DA 50/2EC-F250 PT-DA 50/2MEC-F250 PT-DA 50/2WEC-F250 PT-DA 50/4EC-F250 PT-DA 53/DS-F250 (Dissolver) Order No. 10 74 03320 10 74 03322 10 74 03324 10 74 03325 10 74 03326 10 74 03328 10 74 03329 10 74 03330 10 74 03332 10 74 03334 10 74 03335 10 74 03337 Temperature probe Article Temperature probe Pt100 for PT 3100 D and PT 6100 D Order No. 10 74 00050 Stands for PT 3100 D and PT 6100 D Article 6 H-foot stand ST-F10/600 for PT 3100 D made of anodized aluminum and PTFE coated work table Order No. 10 74 00025 which can be adjusted in height and swung out Electrical stand ST-P 14/590+500, for PT 3100D/PT 6100 D 10 74 00033 Electrical plate stand ST-P 14/590+500 with a telescope bar for more operator comfort. Including Up/Down button and an- ti-skid mat. The electronic system is designed for environmen- tal temperatures of +5 °C to +40°C and was tested pursuant to EN 60335-1 and UL 962. To be used with POLYTRON® PT 2500 E, PT 10-35 GT, PT 3100 D and PT 6100 D. 230 V (with EU connector) Everything for your laboratory – from one source 1 2 6 500

502

KNOWLEDGE SONOPULS ULTRASONIC HOMOGENISERS Selecting the right device The electric power is not suitable to be the only criteria for se lecting an ultrasonic homogeniser. This value only states the pow er of the ultrasonic generator, but not the energy inserted into the sample. The decisive factor for the result of the exposure to sonic waves is the amplitude at the soundradiating surface of the sonotrode with regard to the sample amount to be exposed. Mode of operation Dispersing Ultrasonic generator: Converting the incoming power into ultrasonic power with 20 kHz operating frequency. Ultrasonic converter: Converting the electric energy from the generator into mechani cal waves of the same frequency. Standard horn and booster horn: They enhance the amplitude emitted by the ultrasonic con verter, based on their special design. Probes: As work peaks, they transfer the sonic power into the sample. As microtips, tapered tips or titanium flat tips with a diameter from 2 to 38 mm for different amplitudes and volumes. Probes are made of a very solid titanium alloy. This has the advan tage that they are very stable compared to dynamic alternat ing loads and show great consistency towards aggressive and corrosive media. Particles of solid substances or liquids can be dispersed in an other liquid medium with ultrasonic energy. For example, nano structured powders such as titanium oxide or pyrogenic silica are more and more widely used to produce paints and varnishes or for polishing little body surfaces due to their great specific surface and the therefore increasing chemical reaction potential. At the same time, these substances tend to agglomerate, which worsens flow and wetting behaviour. The pictured agglomer ates can be destroyed with an ultrasonic homogeni ser, while the dispersion is permanently stabilised against a reagglomeration. To analyse the particle size, dispersing is important for the ac curacy of the measurement. The particles can only be detected in the extent in which they appear in the measurement zone as detectable measurement signal. This means that agglomerates which have not been dispersed lead to erroneous measure ments. By means of ultrasound, the particles are divided and prepared for the following measurement. Sample preparation in the laboratory The main area of application of ultrasonic homogenisers is sample preparation. This includes homogenising, emulsifying and suspending different substances, accelerating chemical reactions, disrupting cells as well as extracting cell contents. By means of ultrasonic homogenisers, certain substances can be systematically destroyed, long treatment processes can be shortened and the profits of many reactions can be increased. Because of these advantages, new applications continue to be added. The comparison with other treatment devices in the laboratory such as pebble mills, rotorstator or split homogenisers shows that ultrasonic homogenisers work with higher efficiency and guarantee reproducible results at the same time. During emulsifying with ultrasound, two liquids which cannot be mixed with each other, such as oil and water, are processed into a homo genous liquid (see pict.). Compared to conventional methods with rotors or mills, it is possible to create very disperse emulsions with very low droplet size and very high stability by means of ultrasound. Oil-water emulsification before after The droplets do not form clots or grapes and they do not sedi ment. When using rotors or stirrers, slow stirring often causes an isolation of the liquids, whereas fast stirring leads to undesired air bubbles. Ultrasonic homo genisers are often used in pharma cies for the highquality small production of salves. Disruption of cells and micro-organisms Modern laboratories use ultrasonic homogenisers for disrupting cell walls in order to reach cell contents, e.g. proteins. A part of the energy entered in cell suspension is always converted into heat. In order to avoid thermal damage to the cell contents, the sample is either exposed to sounds cyclically with interruptions (with or without cooling) or only in a cooling container. It is espe cially advantageous to expose microorganisms to sonic waves in rosette cells. These are sonic vessels made of glass, which ensure a permanent circulation of the sample liquid due to their form. If in addition they are placed in an ice bath, the content is efficiently cooled in a rosette cell due to its great glass surface. Homogenisation The technical application areas of ultrasonic homogenisers ranges from paint and varnish productions and homogenisation of sewage and soil samples for analytical purposes to sample preparation for grit size analyses. In environmental laboratories for example, industrial sewage is constantly examined for heavy metals, fats or oils in order to be able to immediately introduce measures in case the concentration is exceeded. For repre sentative water analyses, it is necessary to put the samples in a homogenous state. This is carried out by means of ultrasonic homogenisation within a very short period of time. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 501 www.sonopuls.info

503

Sample Preparation Size Reduction co d e b e w WWFH8008 1 2 3 502 Ultrasonic Homogenizers SONOPULS Ultrasonic Homogenizers, BANDELIN Dia. mm 2 3 6 13 25 HD 2070.2 1 ml – 25 ml 2 ml – 50 ml 5 ml – 100 ml 10 ml – 200 ml HD 2200.2 2 ml – 30 ml 5 ml – 90 ml 10 ml – 350 ml 20 ml – 900 ml 30 ml – 1000 ml Amplitude µmss HD 2070.2/2200.2 285/286 245/308 191/255 93/165 97/170 - /53 Selecting the best SONOPULS ultrasonic homogenizer for your needs The ultrasonic output of an homogenizer depends on the amplitude present at the ultra- sound-emitting surface of the sonotrode. Start with the volume of the sample that is to be subjected to the ultrasound. Use the diameter of the ultrasound vessel into which the sonotrode is to be immersed and the following table to determine the optimum sonotrode amplitude and the correct SONOPULS ultrasonic homogenizer. Titanium sonotrodes in conjunction with the SONOPULS ultrasonic homogenizer Type MS 72 MS 73 KE 76 TT 13 VS 70 T TT 25 Examples: 1 ml liquid in centrifuge vial with 9 mm ID: MS 73 microtip on HD 2070.2. 15 ml liquid in test tube with 12 mm ID: KE 76 conical tip on HD 2070.2. 100 ml liquid in glass beaker with 45 mm ID: TT 13 titanium disk on HD 2200.2. 10 ml sample volume in 50 ml Corning container for bacteria digestion with MS 73 in HD 2200.2 70 ml sample ground cheese in water in RZ 3 for HD 2200.2 with VS 70 T SONOPULS HD 2070.2 and HD 2200.2 Cell disintegration, accelerated reaction, extracting, emulsifying, suspending, homogeniz- ing, degassing of liquids and for the Sonochemie. Controllable, high energy density for the processing and preparation of samples with ultrasound in the biochemistry lab, in research and in small-scale production. Amplitude adjustment with electronic stabilization in a range of 10 – 100% for consistent results. Pulsation of 10 – 100% limits the temperature increase when handling heat-sen- sitive samples. Cooling in pauses between sound pulses. 20 kHz equalized sound. Sound period 1 sec to 99 min. All values appear on the digital display. Proteced against dry-run- ning and constant operation. 230 V (115 V also available). Article 1 SONOPULS HD 2070.2 Ready-to-use set For volumes from 2 ml to 50 ml. Ready-to-use basic model: Ultrasonic generator GM 2070.2, ultrasonic transducer UW 2070, horn SH 70 G with external thread and micro- tip MS 73, dia. 3 mm. 70 W HF power. See table above for other volumes. Stand HG 40 and vessel RZ 2 shown in the illustration are not included in delivery. Order No. 10 07 32451 Article SONOPULS HD 2200.2 Ready-to-use set For volumes from 20 ml to 900 ml. Ready-to-use basic model: Ultrasonic generator GM Order No. 10 07 32531 2200.2, ultrasonic transducer UW 2200, booster horn SH 213 G with external thread and titanium disk TT 13, dia. 13 mm. 200 W HF power. See table above for other volu- mes. Stand HG 40 and vessel RZ 2 shown in the illustration are not included in delivery. Accessories for HD 2070.2 and HD 2200.2 For connecting titanium sonotrodes: Titanium horns instead of SH 70 G/SH 213 G Article SH 219 G Ø 19 mm for UW 2200 SH 225 G Ø 25 mm for UW 2200 Order No. 53 07 02210 53 07 02212 SONOPULS HD 4050 / 4100 / 4200 Technical data: HF generator: W × H × D (mm): Ultrasonic converter: Ø × L (mm): Available sonotrodes Ø (mm): 2/ 3/ 4.5/ 6 HD 4100 GM 4200 HD 4050 GM 4200 150×220×335 150×220×335 UW 50 45 × 175 HD 4200 GM 4200 150×220×335 UW 200 70 × 150 UW 100 70 × 150 2/ 3/ 4.5/ 6/ 9/ 13 3/ 4.5/ 6/ 9/ 13/ 16/ 25 Article Ultrasonic homogenizer SONOPULS HD 4050 for volumes from 0.5 – 100 ml Ready-to-operate set: for volumes from 0.5 ml – 20 ml, ultra- sonic power max. 50 W, ultrasonic generator GM 4200, ultra- sonic converter UW 50, titanium probe TS 102, dia. 2 mm Ultrasonic homogenizer SONOPULS HD 4100 for volumes from 2 – 200 ml Ready-to-operate set: for volumes from 3 – 50 ml, ultrasonic power max. 100 W, ultrasonic generator GM 4200, ultrasonic converter UW 100, standard horn SH 100 G, titanium probe TS 103, dia. 3 mm Order No. 10 07 34050 10 07 34100 Continued on next page

504

Sample Preparation Size Reduction 4 5 8 7 6 AT9 AL AM AN AO 503 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Continued on next page Ultrasonic Homogenizers Article 2 Ultrasonic homogenizer SONOPULS HD 4200 Order No. 10 07 34200 for volumes from 5–1000 ml Ready-to-operate set: for volumes from 20 – 900 ml, ultraso- nic power max. 200 W, ultrasonic generator GM 4200, ultraso- nic converter UW 200, standard horn SH 200 G, titanium pro- be TT 213, dia. 13 mm Ultrasonic homogenizer HD 4400 for sonication of volumes from 100 – 3000 ml on request. Accessories for HD 4050 / 4100 / 4200 Article 3 WINPULS remote control for HD 4050/4100/4200 For process monitoring using a PC with WIN 2000 or WIN XP. Various additional functions such as test logging and user- friendly data storage management (up to 99 memory slots). Set consisting of WINPULS software and IR 1 infrared adapter for RS 232 interface. 4 TM 50 temperature sensor, Ø 1.9 mm 5 TM 100 temperature sensor, Ø 4.0 mm For HD 4050/4100/4200, for measuring the sample temperature from 0 to 120°C. Order No. 53 07 03625 10 07 33733 53 07 03622 Titanium sonotrodes Version Type 6 MS 72 7 MS 73 8 KE 76 9 TT 13 AT TT 25 VS 70 T VS 200 T Micro tip Micro tip Conical tip Titanium disk Titanium disk long long Ø mm 2 3 6 13 25 13 25 for SH 70 G, SH 213 G SH 70 G, SH 213 G SH 70 G, SH 213 G SH 70 G, SH 213 G SH 225 G SH 70 G / SH 213 G SH 225 G Order No. 53 07 03062 53 07 03065 53 07 03068 53 07 05215 53 07 05225 10 07 30494 10 07 30478 Beaker resonator Indirect exposure: Article AK BB 6 for HD 2200.2, 4200, plastic BR 30 for HD 2070, HD 2070.2, HD 2200.2, 4100, 4200, titanium alloy TiAl6V4 Order No. 53 07 03605 53 07 06205 Reaction cup holders Article AL EH 6 Reaction cup holder for BB6 for simultaneous contact-free exposure of up to 6 samp- Order No. 53 07 06206 les. (perforation diameter 11.5 mm) Article AM EH 3.1 Reaction cup holder for BR 30 for simultaneous exposure of pathogenic and toxic ma- terials, with: 1 perforated disc each for 3 x 1.0 ml or 2.0 ml reaction cups, 1 perforated disc ech for 3 × 0.5 ml reaction cup, 1 perforated disc each for 8 × 0.2 ml RPCR cups Order No. 10 07 37527 Cooling vessels With liquid cooling of the sample, made of glass for visual inspection Article AN KG 3, up to 15 ml, for sonotrodes up to Ø 13 mm KG 5, up to 80 ml, for sonotrodes up to Ø 25 mm Order No. 53 07 07003 53 07 07005 Flow-through vessels With cooling jacket, made of glass for visual inspection or of stainless steel Type AO DG 3 Material Volume ml - 15 ml Glas DG 5 - 80 ml Glas for Sonotrodes up to Ø 13 mm HD 2070.2/2200.2/4050/4100/4 200/4400 Sonotrodes up to Ø 25 mm HD 2200.2/4200/4400 Order No. 53 07 07103 53 07 07105 AP DG 4 G Stainless steel HD 2070.2/2200.2/4100/4200 53 07 03608 AK AP

505

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Ultrasonic Homogenizers Exposure vessels made of glass Article Vol. for RZ 1 RZ 2 1 RZ 3 RZ 4 RZ 5 ml 25 Sonotrodes up to Ø 25 mm, HD 2070.2/2200.2/4050/4100/4200 40 Sonotrodes up to Ø 25 mm, HD 2070.2/2200.2/4050/4100/4200 110 Sonotrodes up to Ø 25 mm, HD 2070.2/2200.2/4050/4100/4200/4400 Order No. 10 07 33606 10 07 33607 53 07 07120 390 Sonotrodes up to Ø 25 mm, HD 200.2/4200/4400 10 07 33256 900 Sonotrodes up to Ø 25 mm, HD 200.2/4200/4400 53 07 07121 RZ = Rosette cells Accessories Article Standard ground adapter NA 29 G For NS 29/32 SH 70/213 G Standard ground adapter NA 45 G For NS 45/40 SH 70/213/219/225 G Foot switch remote control TS 8 For HD 2070.2/2200.2/4050/4100/4200/4400 2 Stainless steel stand HG 40 For HD 2070.2/2200.2/4050/4100/4200/4400 WH 40 bracket for HG 40 (Fig. 3) optional AT 40 support table for WH 40 on HG 40 (Fig. 4) optional Order No. 53 07 09029 53 07 09031 53 07 09108 10 07 33681 1 4 3 2 5 co d e b e w WWFH8011 504 Sound-reducing box LS 40 For noise reduction when using ultrasound homogenizers, use of a noise protection box is recommended. Due to the optimized design of the LS 40, a very effective noise reduction by approx. 30 dB-AU is achieved. LED interior lighting and the integrated sight glass allow for optimal process observation during the exposure. The LS 40 is made of stainless steel and equipped with an effective ventilation system. A removable base tray ensures easy cleaning. At the rear of the noise protection box, there is a prepared opening (40×70 mm) for hose feeds or a SONOPULS temperature sensor. An HG 40 holding frame is required to accommodate the SONOPULS ultrasonic con- verters. Article 5 Sound proof box LS 40 For HD 2070.2/2200.2/4050/4100/4200/4400 Article Sound-reducing box LS 4 Order No. 10 07 33682 Order No. 53 07 09301 for HD 2070.2/2200.2/4050/4100/4200 Made of plastic-coated chipboard. Noise reduction by approx. 10 dB-AU. Full-surface plexiglass door enables process observation. SONOPULS mini20 Ultrasonic Homogenizer, BANDELIN Ready-to-operate for volumes from 0.1 ml to 25 ml, consisting of: ultrasonic generator mini20, ultrasonic converter mini20 and microtip MS 2.5, diameter 2.5 mm. Max. 12 W ultrasonic nominal power. Sonotrodes available as an alternative: 1.5/2.0 mm Technical Data: HF generator GM mini20 Dimensions: Weight: Mains supply: Ultrasonic converter UW mini20 Dimensions: Weight: Article Ultrasonic homogenisator SONOPULS mini20 250 x 256 x 154 mm 2.0 kg 230 V~, 50/60 Hz (optionally 115 V~, 50/60 Hz) Ø ca. 50 × 160 mm 270 g Order No. 10 07 33665

506

Sample Preparation Size Reduction 1 co d e b e w WWJMZ001 Ultrasonic Homogenizers Ultrasonic Processors, Hielscher Ultrasonics GmbH High power ultrasonic devices for the use in laboratories: Hielscher ultrasonicators are reliable, user-friendly and extremly flexible. The typical applicatiions include sample preparation, dissolving, mixing, blending and homogenizing, emulsifying, dispersing and deagglomeration, lysis, cell disintegration and extraction, degassing as well as sono- chemical processes. 1 Ultrasonic Homogenizer UP100H set (processor, stand, sonotrode) For direct sonication. Applications: homogenizing and blending, dispersing, emulsifying, lysis and cell disinte- gration, degassing sonochemical processes Advantages: • high intensity • handhold and stand-mounted use • small footprint • reproducible resultsdue to adjustable and controllable amplitude • pulse / cycle mode • dry running protection • further accessories available 100 watts, 30 kHz ultrasonic frequency, automatic frequency tuning, amplitude adjustable from 20 to 100%, pulse mode adjustable from 0 to 100%, dry running protection, portable case, with stand mount & mounting tools, IP40 grade, titanium horn w/ female thread M6 × 0.75, sonotrode MS7 from titanium, tip diameter 7 mm, length 80 mm, for volumes from 10 ml to 250 ml, incl. stainless steel stand ST1-16. Article Ultrasonic homogenizer UP100H set Order No. 10 82 01100 2 VialTweeter set (generator, sound converter, sonotrode) The VialTweeter enables for the simultaneous sonication of up to 10 test tubes/vials and facitltates thereby the preparation of multiple samples at the same time. Intense ultrason- ic power of up to 10 watts per vial is transmitted indirectly via the vessel wall into the medium by which a significanly better sonication than in an ultrasonic bath is achieved. Advantages: • Intense sonication of up to 10 vials simultaneously • Indirect sonication: high ultrasonic energy transmission through vessel wall into the sample • Indirect sonication avoids cross-contamination and sample loss • Reproducible results due to adjustable and controllable amplitude • Adjustable pulse mode from 10 to 100% • Autoclavable block sonotrode UP200ST: 200 watts digital ultrasonic processor, frequency 26 kHz (auto-scan), amplitude 20 – 100%, pulse 10 – 100%, transducer IP65, generator IP51 grade, colored touch-screen, amplitude or power control, countdown (timer): 0.1 sec to 99 days, shutdown when final energy input reached (Ws, Wh, kWh), dry running protected, autom. calibration of the amplitude-dependent idle power, data recording: amplitude, power, time, temperature on internal SD-Card (1 GB), display and remote control via browser on PC/MAC without software installation, remote control via PLC, with temperature sensor, temperature indi- cation: °C/°F (-50°C to 200°C), temperature monitoring, power supply 100-240 V~, 50-60 Hz, carrying case, incl. 3 m network cable VialTweeter: S26d10x10VialT block sonotrode, only for UP200St, for simultaneous sonication of up to 10 Eppendorf Vials, for vials and test tubes of 0.5 ml, 1.0 ml, 1.5 ml or 2.0 ml volume, e.g. 12 × 32 mm, other vial sizes available on request. 2 Article VialTweeter set Order No. 10 82 01126 3 Sonotrode S26d7 (optional for UP200St) For direct sonication with the UP200St in the beaker, made of titanium, Ø 7 mm, approx. length 95mm, male thread M6 × 0.75, for samples from 20 ml up to 500 ml, amplitude ratio approx. 1:2.5. 3 Article Sonotrode S26d7 co d e b e w Order No. 10 82 01026 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 505

507

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Mortar Grinders Mortar Grinder, RETSCH 1 Type RM 200 Application: The Mortar Grinder RM 200 can mix and homogenize powders, suspension and pastes, even those of high viscosity. It substitutes cumbersome hand mortars by a high perfor- mance drive with electronic control. The grinding set can be cooled and heated and is very easy to clean. Grinding sets of various material qualities are available so that the RM 200 can be easily adapted to the respective grinding tasks. Depending on the feed mate- rial, batch sizes from approx. 10 ml to 190 ml can be processed. Features: • dry, wet and cryogenic grinding • reproducible results due to adjustable pestle and scraper pressure • easy exchange of mortar and pestle without tools • closed, dust tight grinding chamber with windows • wide range of materials for contamination free grinding Mortar and pestle made of zirconium oxide, sintered corundum, steel and tungsten car- bide on request. Technical data: Input grain size: Final grain size: Throughput/batch: Dimensions (W×H×D): 400 × 480 × 370 mm Weight: Power supply: 24 kg (without grinding set) 200 – 240 V/50 Hz <8 mm to approx. 10 µm 190 ml Article Mortar mill RM 200, 230 V/50 Hz Mortar and pestle please order separately. 2 Accessories Article Mortar made of hard porcelain Pestle made of hard porcelain Mortar made of agate Pestle made of agate Order No. 10 29 20100 Order No. 53 29 28101 53 29 28102 53 29 28107 53 29 28108 Ball Grinders Planetary Ball Mills classic line (different models), FRITSCH Planetary Ball Mills Ideal for fast, loss-free fine grinding of hard, medium-hard, brittle and fibrous materials – dry or in suspension – in geology, mineralogy, metallurgy, ceramics, material research, mechanical alloying, pharmaceutics, chemistry, biology, and sample preparation for anal- ysis. Sample can be processed from a few milligrams to several kilograms at a wide range of fineness levels down to less than 1 µm. They are especially easy to operate and fast and easy to clean. They are suitable for continuous, heavy duty usage and guarantee safe clamping of the grinding bowls. Matching grinding parts of 7 different materials are avail- able to provide maximum protection against undesired contamination. In addition to size-reduction, Planetary Ball Mills can also be used for mixing and homogenising of emulsions and pastes or for mechanical alloying and activation. Technical data: PULVERISETTE 6 classic line 1 Working stations: Max. feed size: 10 mm Max. sample quantity:225 ml < 1 µm Final fineness: Rotational speed main disk: 100 – 650 rpm Grinding bowl sizes: 80, 250, 500 ml Supply requirements: 100–120/200–240 V/1 Z, Dimensions (W×D×H): 37 × 53 × 50 cm Weight net: 63 kg 50–60 Hz PULVERISETTE 5 classic line model I 4 10 mm 900 ml < 1 µm PULVERISETTE 5 classic line model II 2 10 mm 450 ml < 1 µm 50 – 400 rpm 80, 250, 500 ml 200–240 V/1 Z, 50–60 Hz 120 kg 58 × 67 × 57 cm 100 kg Continued on next page 1 2 co d e b e w WWGF3004 3 506 4

508

Sample Preparation Size Reduction 5 6 Ball Grinders Article 3 Planetary Mono Mill PULVERISETTE 6 classic line 4 Planetary Mill PULVERISETTE 5 classic line, model I Planetary Mill PULVERISETTE 5 classic line, model II Order No. 53 98 06000 10 98 05520 10 98 05620 The Planetary Mill PULVERISETTE 5 classic line, model I and model II is also available in other voltages. FRITSCH also offers a revolutionary Planetary Mill Generation premium line generation for fast high-tech grinding down into the nano range, worldwide unique in operation, perfor- mance and safety - a new reference class, please have a look at Planetary Micro Mill PUL- VERISETTE 7 premium line. Further models of planetary mills on request. Please order grinding bowls and balls sepa- rately. 5 Grinding bowls for Planetary Ball Mills PULVERISETTE 5 / PULVERISETTE 6 classic line Material Hardened, stainless steel Volume ml 80 Order No. 10 98 05419 Sintered corundum 53 98 05405 Zirconium oxide 53 98 05415 Hardmetal tungsten carbide1) 53 98 05409 Adapter for grinding bowls2) 53 98 90112 250 Order No. 10 98 05319 53 98 05305 53 98 05315 53 98 05309 500 Order No. 10 98 05219 53 98 05205 53 98 05215 1) Grinding bowl in a steel casing 2) One grinding bowl holder can hold either 2 x 80 ml bowls or 1 x 80 ml bowl together with a grinding bowl adapter mounted one on top of the other. Grinding bowls are also available in agate and silicon nitride. Special gassing lids for grinding in an inert atmosphere and for mechanical alloying as well as the GTM-system (Gas pressure and temperature measuring system), for measur- ing gas pressure and temperature during the grinding process are available. Grinding balls for grinding balls: PULVERISETTE 5 / PULVERISETTE 6 classic line 6 Material Hardened, stainless steel Sintered corundum Zirconium oxide Hardmetal tungsten carbide Ball Ø mm 10 Order No. 10 98 05611 53 98 05651 53 98 05751 53 98 05671 20 Order No. 10 98 05612 53 98 05652 53 98 05752 53 98 05672 30 Order No. 10 98 05613 53 98 05653 53 98 05753 53 98 05673 40 Order No. 10 98 05614 53 98 05654 53 98 05754 53 98 05674 Grinding bowls are also available in agate and silicon nitride. Grinding balls are also offered in the diameters 0.1 to 3 mm (to achieve a fineness down to the nanometer-range) as well as in 5 mm and 15 mm (have a look at grinding balls for grinding bowls for Planetary Micro MILL PULVERISETTE 7 premium line) Recommended number of grinding balls per grinding bowl for PULVERISETTE 5/ PULVERISETTE 6 classic line Grinding bowl volume/ Useful capacity (sample volume) Ball dia. 5 mm 10 mm 15 mm 20 mm 30 mm 40 mm 500 ml / 80 – 225 ml 2000 100 70 25 8 4 250 ml / 30 – 125 ml 1200 50 45 15 6 – 80 ml / 10 – 30 ml 250 25 10 5 – – Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 507

509

Sample Preparation Size Reduction co d e b e w WWGF3017 Ball Grinders Planetary Ball Mill PULVERISETTE 7 premium line, FRITSCH Planetary Micro Mill PULVERISETTE 7 premium line Ideal for high-performance grinding down into the nano range of hard, medium-hard, brittle and fibrous materials with particularly short grinding time – dry, in suspension, or under inert gas in nanotechnology, geology, mineralogy, metallurgy, ceramics, material research, mechanical alloying/activating, pharmaceutics, chemistry, biology, and sample preparation for analysis. Also ideally suited for highly-efficient mixing and homogenisation of emulsions and pastes. Grinding bowls and balls are available in different sizes to perfectly match the sample volume and the desired final fineness, as well as in different materials – the best protection against undesired contamination. Sunken grinding bowls and the unique SelfLOCK grinding bowl clamping, the check of the grinding bowl fastening inside the mill, the blockage in the event of impermissible operating states or imbalance, and the automatic bowl detection guarantee maximum safety. Technical Data: 5 mm Max. feed size: 60 ml Max. sample quantity: < 100 nm Final fineness: Rotational speed of main disk: 100 – 1100 rpm Rotational speed of grinding bowls: up to 2200 rpm Supply requirements: Dimensions (W × D × H): Weight net: 100 – 120 / 200 – 240 V/1~, 50 – 60 Hz, 1200 Watt 40 × 58 × 36 cm 44 kg Article 1 Planetary Micro Mill PULVERISETTE 7 premium line Order No. 10 98 00750 Grinding bowls and grinding balls must be ordered additionally. Software MillControl for automatic control of the Planetary Micro Mill PULVERISETTE 7 premium line, and valida- tion of the grinding process available on request. For fast high-tech grinding of larger sample quantities (up to 450 ml) down to the nano range, the Planetary Mill PULVERISETTE 5 premium line is available. 45 Order No. 80 Volume ml 20 Order No. 10 98 05498 10 98 05598 10 98 05698 10 98 05798 2 Grinding bowls for Planetary Micro Mill PULVERISETTE 7 premium line Material Hardened, stainless steel1) Sintered corundum1) Zirconium oxide1) Hardmetal tungsten carbide WC1) 1) Grinding bowl in a steel casing Grinding bowls are also available in agate and silicon nitride. Special gassing lids for grinding in an inert atmosphere and for mechanical alloying as well as the EASY GTM - gas pressure and temperature measuring system for controlling the grinding process due to continuous measurement of gas pressure and temperature on request. 10 98 05496 10 98 05596 10 98 05696 10 98 05796 10 98 05497 10 98 05597 10 98 05697 10 98 05797 Order No. 1 2 508 3 3 Grinding balls for Planetary Micro Mill PULVERISETTE 7 premium line Material Hardened, stainless steel Sintered corundum Zirconium oxide 10 98 00527 Hardmetal tungsten carbide 10 98 00508 Ball Ø mm 5 Order No. 10 98 05505 10 Order No. 10 98 05611 53 98 05651 53 98 05751 53 98 05671 15 Order No. 10 98 05515 10 98 01506 10 98 01527 10 98 01508 20 Order No. 10 98 05612 53 98 05652 53 98 05752 53 98 05672 Grinding balls are also available in agate and silicon nitride. Grinding balls are also offered in the diameters 0.1 to 3 mm to achieve a fineness down to the nanometer-range. Recommended number of grinding balls per grinding bowl for PULVERISETTE 7 premium line Grinding bowl volume/ Useful capacity (sample volume) Ball dia. 5 mm 10 mm 15 mm 20 mm 80 ml / 10 – 30 ml 250 25 10 5 45 ml / 3 – 20 ml 180 18 7 – 20 ml / 1 – 9 ml 80 10 – –

510

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Ball Grinders Planetary Ball Mills / High Energy Ball Mills, RETSCH 1 Planetary Ball Mills Type PM 100 / PM 200 / PM 400 Application: Planetary Ball Mills are suitable for mixing and grinding soft, medium-hard, extremely hard, brittle and fibrous materials. They are used whenever high degrees of fineness down to the submicron range are to be achieved in a very shorrt time. In addition to dry and wet grinding, they are also suitable for colloidal grinding and mechanical alloying. Typical materials are minerals, ores, chemicals, ceramics, soils, household and industrial waste etc. Capability characteristics: • Extremely high fineness down to submicron range • 1 / 2 / 4 grinding stations • Grinding jar volumes from 12 ml to 500 ml • Suitable for long-teerm trials and continuous use • Programmable starting time • Power failure backup ensures storage of remaining grinding time • Reproducible results due to digital parameter settings • 10 parameter combinations can be stored • 1-button operation with graphic display • Automatic grinding chamber ventilation for cooling the grinding jars • Grinding jars in 6 sizes and 8 different materials available Technical data: No. of grinding stations: Speed ratio Sun wheel/Grinding jar: Grinding jar: Fees size: Finalgrain size: (depending on product properties and process parameters) Throughput/batch: PM 400 PM 100 4 1 1:-2 1:-2 12 – 500 ml 12 – 500 ml up to 10 mm up to 10 mm up to 4 mm up to 10 mm <1 µm PM 100 CM PM 200 1 1:-1 12 – 500 ml 2 1:-2 12 – 125 ml 2×50 ml <1 µm <1 µm <1 µm 220 ml or 2×20 ml 220 ml or 2×20 ml max. 4×220 ml or 8×20 ml Dimensions (W×H×D) mm:630×415×468 630×415×468 630×415×468 836×1220×780 approx. 86 kg approx. 86 kg approx. 72 kg approx. 290 kg Weight: 230 V/ Power supply: 50-60 Hz 220-230 V/ 50-60 Hz 230 V/ 50-60 Hz 230 V/ 50-60 Hz Article PM 100 PM 100 CM PM 200 PM 400 Order No. 53 29 54001 10 29 21100 53 29 64001 10 29 21400 Scope of supply: Planetary Ball Mill. Grinding jars and grinding balls have to be ordered separately. 1 2 2 Grinding jars “comfort” for PM 100, PM 200, PM 400 and PM 100 CM Material Hardened steel Stainless steel Tungsten carbide Agate Sintered corundum Zirconium oxide Volume ml 50 Order No. 53 29 20145 53 29 20149 53 29 20156 53 29 20139 53 29 20153 53 29 20188 125 Order No. 53 29 20144 53 29 20148 53 29 20155 53 29 20136 53 29 20152 53 29 20187 250 Order No. 53 29 20224 53 29 20223 53 29 20222 53 29 20220 53 29 20221 53 29 20219 Grinding jars 250 and 500 ml not for PM 200. Grinding jars 12 and 25 ml are available on request. Other accessories for grinding jars “comfort” (e.g. adapter for stacking, grinding jar for aeration, safety closing device) are available on request. The Measuring system PM GrindControl for record of pressure and temperature in the grinding jar during grinding is available on request. Grinding balls Material Hardened steel Stainless steel Tungsten carbide Agate Sintered corundum Zirconium oxide Ball Ø mm 10 Order No. 53 29 36859 53 29 36863 53 29 36871 53 29 36867 53 29 46082 53 29 36894 Other sizes available on request. co d e b e w 20 Order No. 53 29 43028 53 29 43032 53 29 46093 53 29 36828 53 29 36854 53 29 43044 Continued on next page 30 Order No. 53 29 36857 53 29 36861 53 29 36869 53 29 36865 53 29 36853 53 29 36892 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 500 Order No. 53 29 20229 53 29 20228 53 29 20225 53 29 20226 53 29 20227 40 Order No. 53 29 36856 53 29 36860 53 29 36868 53 29 36864 53 29 36852 53 29 36891 509

511

Sample Preparation Size Reduction 1 Ball Grinders Recommended ball fillings Grinding bowl nominal vol. ml 50 80 125 250 500 Samples volume ml 5,0 – 20 10 – 35 15 – 50 25 – 120 75 – 220 Max. input grain mm 3 4 4 6 10 Ball filling pcs. Ø 10 mm Ø 20 mm Ø 30 mm Ø 40 mm 10 25 30 50 100 3 5 7 15 25 6 8 4 High energy ball mill Emax Application: The Emax is an entirely new type of ball mill for high energy milling for medium-hard, hard, brittle and fibrous materials. The combination of high friction and impact results in ex- tremely fine particles within the shortest amount of time. Thanks to the cooling system with water, the high energy input is effectively used for the grinding process without overheating the sample. The Emax is capable of continuous grinding operation without interruptions for cooling down. The high energy input in combination with the unique cooling system provides perfect conditions for effective mechanical alloying or grinding down to the nanometer range. Features: • speed of 2000 min-1 allow for ultra-fast and fine pulverization of the sample • controlled water cooling allow for continuous operation without timely cool down breaks • temperature-controlled grinding • narrow particle size distribution thanks to special jar design which improves mixing of the sample • 10 SOPs, 3 sequences and additional information storable • operation with 2 grinding jars with integrated safety closure • range of jar materials allow for contamination free grinding 1 2 510 < 5 mm < 1 µm, for colloidal grinding < 80 nm Technical data: Material feed size1): Final fineness1): Batch size / feed quantity1): max. 2 × 45 ml Power connection: Dimensions (W×H×D): 1)Please note: depending on feed material and instrument configuration/settings 1-phase 625 × 525 × 645 mm Article High energy ball mill Emax Grinding jar, 50 ml, stainless steel Grinding jar, 125 ml, stainless steel Grinding jar, 50 ml, zirconium oxide Grinding jar, 125 ml, zirconium oxide Grinding jar, 50 ml, tungsten carbide Aeration lid for Emax grinding jar 50 ml, stainless steel Aeration lid for Emax grinding jar 125 ml, stainless steel Aeration lid for Emax grinding jar 50 ml, zirconium oxide Aeration lid for Emax grinding jar 125 ml, zirconium oxide Order No. 10 29 22053 10 29 20305 10 29 20313 10 29 20312 10 29 20307 10 29 20317 10 29 20568 10 29 20567 10 29 20569 10 29 20564 Please order grinding balls separately. Please refer to accessories for planetary ball mills. Other grinding ball types for colloid grinding on request. Mixer Mills, RETSCH MM 200 / MM 400 / MM 500 / CryoMill mixer mills Application: Mixer mills are all-round talents in the laboratory. They have been developed expecially for grinding, homogenizing and mixing of small sample amounts within seconds. Further- more, they are perfectly suitable for disruption of biological cells as well as for DNA/RNA extraction. For the MM 400, dust-proof and closed milling containers with screw cap are available, which also enable wet millings and cryogenic grinding. The MM 500 is the first ball mill in the world that, thanks to its high energy input, is suita- ble for efficient wet grinding of samples down to the nanometer range or for mechano- chemical applications without significant heat generation. Performance, operation, appli- cation areas and design of the new MM 500 make this mill a perfect combination of a classic mixer mill and a planetary ball mill! The CryoMill is suitable for cryogenic grinding of materials that cannot be milled at room temperature, or the composition of which would change when milled at room temperature. The integrated conditioning system constantly cools the grinding jar with liquid nitrogen before and during milling. In this way, the sample is embrittled, slightly volatile compo- nents are retained. As the CryoMill can also be operated without cooling, it is fit for uni- Continued on next page

512

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Ball Grinders versal use. Thanks to the patented LN2 supply, direct contact with LN2 is avoided, ensur- ing particularly safe operation. Features of MM 200 / MM 400: • Reproducible, efficient grinding, mixing in homogenizing within seconds • Impact and friction for powerful grinding, up to 20 samples in one go • For dry, wet, and cryogenic grinding (MM 400) • Grinding jar with screw cap for loss-free grinding (MM 400) • 9 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) can be stored • Extensive range of accessories, e.g. grinding jars and ball grinders in various sizes and materials, adapters Features of MM 500: • Suitable for continuous long-term milling processes and efficient short-term milling with a high energy input • Pulverization < 100 nm (depending on product properties and process parameters) • Powerful grinding with 35 Hz • Jars remain conveniently clamped for periodic sample extraction • Choose from 4 different jar materials • 12 standard operating procedures (SOP) can be saved • 4 program cycles with up to 99 repetitions can be saved Features of CryoMill: • Impact and friction at 30 Hz for powerful grinding • Direct user contact with LN2 is avoided thanks to the patented LN2 supply • Autofill system for automatic dosing of the liquid LN2 • Grinding jar with screw cap for loss-free grinding • Clearly structured user interface, 9 SOPs storable • Extensive range of accessories, e.g. LN2 supply, grinding jars and ball grinders in various sizes and materials, adapters 3 4 MM 200 up to 6 mm approx. 10 µm up to 2 × 10 ml 3 – 25 Hz (180 – 1500 min-1) yes / no / no Technical data: Input grain size1): Final grain size1): Discharge1): Digital preselection of vibrational frequency: Dry / Wet / Cryogenic grinding: External dimensions (W×H×D): 371 × 266 × 461 mm 371 × 266 × 461 mm Weight (net): Power supply: 1) Depending on feed material and instrument configuration/settings MM 400 up to 8 mm approx. 5 µm max. 2 × 20 ml 3 – 30 Hz (180 – 1800 min-1) yes / yes / with Kryokit for grinding bowl precooling approx. 25 kg 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz approx. 26 kg Article 2 Mixer mill MM 200 3 Mixer mill MM 400 4 Mixer mill MM 500, 200 – 230 V 4 Mixer mill MM 500, 100 – 120 V 5 Mixer mill CryoMill Order No. 10 29 20200 10 29 20400 10 29 20003 10 29 20004 10 29 20800 6 Material Grinding jars and grinding balls please order separately. IQ/OQ dokumentation on request. Accessories for cryogenic grinding with MM 400 and MM 500 on request. CryoMill: Autofill with LN2 container and safety valve on request. Grinding jars MM 200 Vol. ml Hardened steel 25 10 29 22052 Stainless steel 1.5 10 29 22057 Stainless steel 5 10 29 22059 Stainless steel 10 10 29 22061 Stainless steel 25 10 29 22119 Tungsten carbide 5 10 29 22115 Tungsten carbide 10 10 29 22009 Vol. ml Zirconium oxide 10 Zirconium oxide 25 Agate 5 Agate 10 PTFE 10 PTFE 25 Material Order No. Order No. 10 29 22194 10 29 22195 10 29 22113 10 29 22008 10 29 22184 10 29 22151 Grinding jars MM 400, screw top design 7 Material Order No. Vol. ml Hardened steel 25 53 29 20237 Rust-proof steel 1.5 53 29 20230 Rust-proof steel 5 53 29 20231 Rust-proof steel 10 53 29 20236 Rust-proof steel 25 53 29 20213 Rust-proof steel 35 53 29 20214 Rust-proof steel 50 53 29 20216 Tungsten carbide 10 53 29 20235 co d e b e w Material Order No. Vol. ml Tungsten carbide 25 53 29 20217 Agate 5 53 29 20232 Agate 10 53 29 20233 Zircon oxide 10 53 29 20234 Zircon oxide 25 53 29 20201 Zircon oxide 35 53 29 20215 PTFE 25 10 29 22238 PTFE 35 10 29 22244 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. MM 500 up to 10 mm approx. 0.1 µm up to 2 × 45 ml 3 – 35 Hz (180 – 2100 min-1) yes / yes / yes Kryokit for grinding bowl precooling 690 × 375 × 585 mm 60 kg 100 – 230 V, 50/60 Hz CryoMill up to 8 mm approx. 5 µm max. 20 ml 3 – 30 Hz (180 – 1800 min-1) yes / yes / yes 385 × 370 × 570 mm 40 kg 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 5 6 7 511

513

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Ball Grinders Grinding jars MM 500, Screw-Lock Material Order No. Vol. ml Hardened steel 50 10 29 20463 Hardened steel 80 10 29 20468 Hardened steel 125 10 29 20470 Stainless steel 50 10 29 20447 Stainless steel 80 10 29 20467 Stainless steel 125 10 29 20420 Material Order No. Vol. ml Tungsten carbide 50 10 29 20466 Tungsten carbide 80 10 29 20479 Zircon oxide 50 10 29 20464 Zircon oxide 80 10 29 20417 Zircon oxide 125 10 29 20471 Grinding jars CryoMill, screw top design Order No. Material Material Vol. ml Hardened steel 5 10 29 22300 Hardened steel 25 10 29 22297 Hardened steel 35 10 29 22298 Hardened steel 50 10 29 22299 Rust-proof steel 5 10 29 22290 * for use with adapter 10 29 26272 Order No. Vol. ml Rust-proof steel 10 10 29 22331 Rust-proof steel 25 10 29 22289 Rust-proof steel 35 10 29 22288 Rust-proof steel 50 10 29 22284 PTFE 25 10 29 22309 Accessories for CryoMill Article Autofill with LN2 container and safety valve, 50 litres Connection tube, incl. safety valve for LN2 supply provided by customer Adapter for use of 2/4 grinding jars, 5 ml Adapter for use of 2/4/6 reaction vials, 2 ml Safe-lock reaction vials 2 ml, 1000 pcs. Order No. 10 29 22482 10 29 27101 10 29 26272 10 29 26277 10 29 27491 Grinding balls MM 200 / MM 400 / MM 500 / CryoMill Article Grinding ball, hardened steel, 5 mm Grinding ball, hardened steel, 7 mm Grinding ball, hardened steel, 10 mm Grinding ball, hardened steel, 12 mm Grinding ball, hardened steel, 15 mm Grinding balls, stainless steel, 3 mm, approx. 200 pcs. Grinding balls, stainless steel, 5 mm, approx. 200 pcs. Grinding ball, stainless steel, 5 mm Grinding ball, stainless steel, 7 mm Grinding ball, stainless steel, 10 mm Grinding ball, stainless steel, 12 mm Grinding ball, stainless steel, 15 mm Grinding ball, stainless steel, 20 mm Grinding ball, stainless steel, 25 mm Grinding balls, tungsten carbide, 3 mm, approx. 200 pcs. Grinding balls, tungsten carbide, 5 mm, approx. 200 pcs. Grinding ball, tungsten carbide, 5 mm Grinding ball, tungsten carbide, 7 mm Grinding ball, tungsten carbide, 10 mm Grinding ball, tungsten carbide, 12 mm Grinding ball, tungsten carbide, 15 mm Grinding ball, agate, 12 mm Grinding ball, agate, 5 mm Grinding ball, agate, 7 mm Grinding ball, agate, 10 mm Grinding balls, zirconium oxide, 0.1 mm, 0.5 kg Grinding balls, zirconium oxide, 0.5 mm, 0.5 kg Grinding balls, zirconium oxide, 1 mm, 0.5 kg Grinding balls, zirconium oxide, 3 mm, approx. 200 pcs. Grinding balls, zirconium oxide, 5 mm, approx. 200 pcs. Grinding ball, zirconium oxide, 12 mm Grinding ball, zirconium oxide, 15 mm Grinding ball, zirconium oxide, 20 mm Grinding ball, PTFE, 10 mm Grinding ball, PTFE, 12 mm Grinding ball, PTFE, 15 mm Contact us to ask for other diameters and glass beads. Order No. 53 29 46084 53 29 46085 53 29 36859 53 29 46045 10 29 28108 10 29 25002 10 29 25005 53 29 46087 53 29 46088 53 29 36863 53 29 46046 10 29 28109 53 29 43032 53 29 36805 10 29 25006 10 29 25004 53 29 46090 53 29 46091 53 29 36871 53 29 46047 10 29 28110 53 29 46044 53 29 46094 53 29 46095 53 29 36867 10 29 28805 10 29 28803 10 29 28804 10 29 25007 10 29 25009 53 29 46073 10 29 28113 53 29 43044 10 29 26045 10 29 26043 10 29 28115 512 Continued on next page

514

Ball Grinders Accessories MM 200 / MM 400 / MM 500 for cell disruption Article Adapter MM 200/400 for 5 test tubes 1.5 and 2.0 ml Adapter MM 200/400 for 10 test tubes 0.2 ml Adapter rack MM 400 for 10 standard test tubes 1.5 and Order No. 10 29 28005 10 29 28006 10 29 28008 2.0 ml 10 29 28010 10 29 28009 Adapter MM 400 for 5 standard test tubes 5 ml Adapter for 4 conical centrifuge tubes e.g. for Falcon Tubes, 2 pcs., incl. 20 tubes Grinding balls, stainless steel, 3 mm, approx. 200 pcs. 10 29 25002 Grinding balls, tungsten carbide, 3 mm, approx. 200 pcs. 10 29 25006 Grinding balls, zirconium oxide, 3 mm, approx. 200 pcs. 10 29 25007 Grinding balls, stainless steel, 5 mm, approx. 200 pcs. 10 29 25005 Grinding balls, tungsten carbide, 5 mm, approx. 200 pcs. 10 29 25004 Grinding balls, zirconium oxide, 5 mm, approx. 200 pcs. 10 29 25009 Other dimensions and glass beads available on request. Accessories MM 500 Article Aeration lid for MM 500 grinding jar 50 ml, stainless steel Aeration lid for MM 500 grinding jar 80 ml, stainless steel Aeration lid for MM 500 grinding jar 125 ml, stainless steel Aeration lid for MM 500 grinding jar 50 ml, tungsten carbide Aeration lid for MM 500 grinding jar 80 ml, tungsten carbide Aeration lid for MM 500 grinding jar 50 ml, zirconium oxide Aeration lid for MM 500 grinding jar 80 ml, zirconium oxide Aeration lid for MM 500 grinding jar 125 ml, zirconium oxide Grinding jar stabilization pad Jar wrench for grinding jars Cryo kit for cooling the grinding jars with liquid nitrogen incl. insulated container 4-liter, 2 grinding jar holders, 1 pair of safety glasses Retsch Box for external device control via Retsch App incl. data cable IQ/OQ Documentation for MM 500 Sample Preparation Size Reduction Order No. 10 29 20568 10 29 20688 10 29 20567 10 29 20636 10 29 20693 10 29 20569 10 29 20689 10 29 20564 10 29 26006 10 29 20049 10 29 24003 10 29 20012 10 29 20034 Universal Grinders, Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills Variable Speed Rotor Mill PULVERISETTE 14 classic line, FRITSCH Variable Speed Rotor Mill PULVERISETTE 14 classic line Ideal for fast, effective comminution of soft to medium-hard, brittle, fibrous materials, as well as difficult-to-mill and temperature-sensitive samples. Cryogenic grinding, dispersion and homogenisation are also areas of operation. The Variable Speed Rotor Mill is an ul- tra-centrifugal mill with variable speed setting between 6,000 rpm and 20,000 rpm and automatic speed regulation for constant milling in the areas of analytic, biology, chemistry, agriculture and forestry, foodstuffs, plastics and textiles, pharmaceuticals, environment/ RoHS. For optimal material feeding the Vibratory Feeder LABORETTE 24 (optional) is recommended. co d e b e w WWGF3003 Technical data: Max. feed size: Throughput: Sieve inserts: Final fineness (d50): Rotor speed: Power supply: Dimensions (W×D×H): 31 × 48 × 47 cm Net weight: 10 mm up to 5 l/h 0.08 to 6 mm 40 µm 6,000 to 22,000 rpm 200–240 V/1~, 50–60 Hz, 1100 W 23 kg Article 1 Variable Speed Rotor Mill PULVERISETTE 14 classic line Order No. 10 98 00200 Instrument available in other voltages. Impact rotor and sieve ring must be ordered additionally. FRITSCH also offers a Variable Speed Rotor Mill PULVERISETTE 14 premium line with impact, shearing and cutting comminution in one instrument. The premium line version is especially powerful with up to 22,000 rpm, a max. feed size of up to 15 mm and a sample throughput of up to 15 l/h and more. This mill offers significantly better cooling, absolute- ly safe operation and fast, residue-free cleaning. Ask us. Continued on next page 1 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 513 co d e b e w

515

Sample Preparation Size Reduction 1 2 3 514 Universal Grinders, Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills Impact rotor with 8 ribs, stainless steel Impact rotor with 12 ribs, stainless steel Impact rotor with 24 ribs, stainless steel Accessories for Variable Speed Rotor Mill PULVERISETTE 14 classic line 1 Article Order No. 10 98 08010 10 98 02010 10 98 04010 Sieve ring, trapezoidal perforation 0.08 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 00010 Sieve ring, trapezoidal perforation 0.12 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 01010 Sieve ring, trapezoidal perforation 0.2 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 00201 Sieve ring, trapezoidal perforation 0.5 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 05010 Sieve ring, trapezoidal perforation 0.75 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 08011 Sieve ring, trapezoidal perforation 1 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 01011 Sieve ring, trapezoidal perforation 1.5 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 05011 Sieve ring, trapezoidal perforation 2 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 02001 Sieve ring, square perforation 2 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 02011 Sieve ring, square perforation 4 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 04011 Sieve ring, square perforation 6 mm, stainless steel 316L 10 98 06011 Conversion kit for large quantities 10 98 01000 Vibratory feeder LABORETTE 24 for continuous feeding 10 98 03000 Stand for vibratory feeder LABORETTE 24 10 98 01001 Rotors and sieve rings are also available in others designs and materials. An extensive range of accessories with impact bar, pin insert, sample exhaustion with Cyclone separa- tors and much more is available for your specific application. Ultra Centrifugal Mill, RETSCH Type ZM 200 Application: Gentle, very quick fine milling of soft to medium-hard and thready materials. Ideal e.g. for chemicals, feeding stuff, food, detergent, plastics, fertilisers and pharmaceutical raw and finished products. The ZM 200 is also suitable for cold milling. Features: • Milling gently to material due to two-level rotor-ring sieve system • Powerdrive drive provides better performance with stronger moment of force, also in ca- pacity peaks • Wide revolutions range, adjustable from 6000 to 18000 min -1 • Graphic performance display • Convenient parameter setting via display and ergonomic one-button operation • For sample amounts of a few grams up to 5 litres • Safety plastic housing with automatic lid closing • Electronic safety and diagnostics system • Universally applicable thanks to wide range of accessories Included: Ultra-centrifugal mill with cassette 900 ml. Please order rotor and ring sieves separately. Technical data: Input grain size: Final grain size: Throughput/batch: up to 10 mm approx. 40 µm 300 ml resp. 4500 ml (with cyclone) (depending on product properties and process parameters) Dimensions (W × H × D): 410 × 515 × 365 Weight: Power supply: approx. 38 kg 230 V / 50-60 Hz Article 2 Ultra centrifugal mill ZM 200 Accessories for ZM 200 Article Plug-on rotor, rust-proof steel, 6 teeth Plug-on rotor, rust-proof steel, 12 teeth Plug-on rotor, rust-proof steel, 24 teeth Order No. 53 29 30001 Order No. 53 29 80040 53 29 80041 53 29 80042 Ring sieves 3 Trapezoidal hole mm 0.08 0.12 0.20 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 Order No. 53 29 70231 53 29 70232 53 29 70233 53 29 70234 53 29 70235 53 29 70236 53 29 70237 Trapezoidal hole mm 1.50 2.00 Round hole mm 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 Order No. 53 29 70238 53 29 70239 53 29 70240 53 29 70241 53 29 70242 53 29 70243 Ring sieves with reinforced rim or wear-resistant coating on request. Rotors, ring sieves and cassette for grinding without heavy-metal contamination on request. Continued on next page

516

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Universal Grinders, Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills Accessories for grinding very small quantities Made of corrosion-resistant material. Parts in contact with the product made of steel 1.4404 (316). Consisting of plug-fit rotor with 8 teeth, labyrinth disk and 50 ml cassette. Article Conversion kit for crushing very small quantities Order No. 53 29 86002 Accessories for grinding large quantities Article Cyclone incl. cassette pan with outlet, filter bag, holder, collector 5 l Cyclone incl. cassette pan with outlet, filter bag, holder, collector 3 l Paper filter bag incl. cassette pan with outlet and holder Order No. 53 29 35009 53 29 35010 53 29 10003 Accessories for automatic feeding of materials Article 4 Feeding unit DR 100 Drive unit for 220-240 V/50 Hz, incl. standard feeding kit with push-fit chute 40 mm, Order No. 53 29 70054 hopper and data cable 4 Laboratory Safety Mixer MICROTRON®, KINEMATICA AT Laboratory safety mixer MICROTRON® MB 550 / MB 800 The systems MICROTRON® MB 550 and MICROTRON® MB 800 are specifically designed for mixing, dispersing, homogenizing, emulsifying and crushing of easy-to-cut products. Four different glass processing vessels with a volume of 125 ml, 250 ml, 500 ml and 1000 ml are available. For the MICROTRON® MB 800, stainless steel vessels with a volume of 2000 ml and 4000 ml are available. Both systems are safety laboratory devices: earthed, with double safety insulation, sup- pressed. A safety system prevents unintentional startup and thus risk of injury: The mixer will only start when properly closed with the lid/safety hut. The motor stops automatically when the lid/safety hut is removed. The systems comply with the CE regulations for com- mercial equipment. Both systems are designed for a high workload and constant opera- tional readiness, and they have a small footprint. Please order mixing attachments and safety huts separately. The mixer MICROTRON® MB 550 can only be operated with the safety hut fitted. Technical data: MB 550 Engine power: Speed: Dimensions (Ø×H): 190 × 245 mm Protection class acc. to EN 610335-1 550 W Continuously, 1,000 to 15,000 rpm Continuously, 1,000 to 17,000 rpm 190 × 245 mm MB 800 800 W Article 5 MICROTRON® MB 550 230 V (with EU-plug) 6 MICROTRON® MB 800 230 V (with EU-plug) Order No. 51 74 28001 10 74 08002 7 Mixing attachements High performance stainless steel cutting heads: The 4 – 6 high-grade blades are designed for optimal mixing. Generally suited for intensive and fast processing, also when process- ing high demanding products. Whole cutting head is made from stainless steel, can eas- ily be disassembled and cleaned. • Stainless steel ball bearings • Noiseless and sturdy coupling with dampers • All parts are stainless steel Article for MBA 125 MBA 250 MBA 500 MBA 1000 8 MBA 2000 9 MBA 4000 MB 550 MB 550 MB 550 MB 550 MB 800 MB 800 Material Working volume ml glass 125 glass 250 glass 500 glass 1000 stainless steel 2000 stainless steel 4000 Order No. 51 74 58001 51 74 58004 51 74 58016 51 74 58005 10 74 08011 10 74 08012 Safety huts for MB 550 Safety hoods made of clear polymethylmethacrylate Article MBH 125 safety hut MBH 250 safety hut AT MBH 500 safety hut MBH 1000 safety hut fits MBA 125 MBA 250 MBA 500 MBA 1000 Order No. 51 74 58018 51 74 58017 51 74 58019 51 74 58014 Safety hood must ordered suitably to the mixing attachment. 7 5 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 9 8 515

517

Sample Preparation Size Reduction co d e b e w WWGF3018 1 2 516 Universal Grinders, Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills Knife Mill PULVERISETTE 11, FRITSCH 1 Knife Mill PULVERISETTE 11 The Knife Mill PULVERISETTE 11 is the ideal laboratory mixer for very fast and gentle comminution and homogenisation of moist, oily, fatty as well as of dry, soft, medium-hard and fibrous samples. It’s up to 1250 watt strong motor and its special knife, fitted with four blades, grinds fast and gentle problematic samples with high fat or water content such as meat, gummi bears, chocolate or also hard samples such as dishwasher tabs or toys – perfect for sample preparation in the fields of foodstuffs or animal feed testing, agriculture and forestry, biology, pharmaceuticals and chemistry. Scope of delivery: Equipped with a 1.4 l standard grinding vessel made of autoclavable, transparent and scratch-resistant plastic PC, standard lid made of silicone and the standard knife made of stainless steel. Technical data: Max. feed size: Max. sample quantity: Final fineness (depends on material): < 300 µm Variable speed setting: Supply requirements: Dimensions (W×D×H): Net weight: 2000–10000 rpm, turbo-function with 14000 rpm 200–240 V/1~, 50/60 Hz, 1250 W 32 × 43 × 48 cm 17.6 kg 40 mm 1400 ml Article Knife Mill PULVERISETTE 11 Instrument also available in other voltages. Accessories for Knife Mill PULVERISETTE 11 2 Article Standard grinding vessel, 1.4 litre1) made of autoclavable, transparent and scratch-resistant plastic PC Grinding vessel, 1.4 litre made of autoclavable stainless steel 316L Standard lid for all grinding vessels1) made of autoclavable silicone Vario-Lid system for all grinding vessels autoclavable, with plunger made of plastic PP and reduction sample pusher for moist, liquid and viscous sample materials Reduction sample pusher autoclavable, for dry, solid samples for Vario-Lid system with plunger Special lid autoclavable, for cryogenic comminution with single-use sieve insert for grinding vessel made of stainless steel 316L for Special lid (set= 10 inserts) Single-Use sieve inserts Standard knife1) made of autoclavable stainless steel Sickle knife with serrated blades made of autoclavable stainless steel Order No. 10 98 02000 Order No. 10 98 05116 10 98 06000 10 98 00315 10 98 08000 10 98 08916 10 98 00220 10 98 02400 10 98 02040 10 98 02100 1) included in basic price of the PULVERISETTE 11. Grinding vessels in further materials, sickle knives with different cutting edges and various materials, single-use grinding vessel as well as further accessories are available. Software P-11Control for automatic control of the mill via USB, for editing, saving and managing of the SOPs with grinding report generation is also available. Knife Mills, RETSCH GRINDOMIX GM 200 / GM 300 Application: The Knife Mill Grindomix GM 200 and GM 300 are suitable for quick and gentle grinding and homogenization of foodstuffs. They processes substances with high water, oil or fat content as fast and reliably as dry, soft and medium-hard products. Features: • Efficient homogenization of up to 700 ml sample material thanks to the powerful 1000 W drive (GM 200) • Efficient size reduction of up to 4,500 ml feed quantity due to a powerful 1.1 kW motor (peak power input >3 kW) (GM 300) • Pre- and fine-grinding in one mill: cutting action in regular mode, grinding by impact in reverse mode, pre-grinding in interval mode Continued on next page

518

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Universal Grinders, Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills • Perfect adaptation to application requirements by variable speed from 500 to 4,000 min-1 with an increment of 100 min-1 (GM 300) and 2000 to 10,000 min-1 with an increment of 500 min-1 (GM 200) • Optional gravitation lid for automatic reduction of the grinding chamber volume • 8 SOPs and 4 sequences can be stored • Touch display with access to MyRETSCH web portal with product and application re- lated information Includes: GM 200 complete with 1 litre grinding container of autoclavable plastic, standard lid and knife made of stainless steel GM 300 complete with 5 litre grinding container of autoclavable plastic, standard lid, standard knife made of stainless steel and scraper Technical data: Input grain size: Final grain size: Throughput/batch: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Power supply: Article 1 GRINDOMIX GM 200 2 GRINDOMIX GM 300 GM 200 < 40 mm < 300 µm approx. up to 700 ml 350 × 275 × 392 mm approx. 10 kg 230 V/50-60 Hz GM 300 < 40 mm < 300 µm up to 4500 ml 440 × 340 × 440 mm approx. 30 kg 220 – 230 V/50-60 Hz Order No. 53 29 25101 10 29 25102 Accessories for GRINDOMIX GM 200 for grinding containers made from autoclavable plastic or PP for reducing the chamber volume to 0.5 liter for reducing the chamber volume to 0.25 liter Article Grinding container made of autoclavable plastic, 1 liter Grinding container made of PP, 1 liter Grinding container made of glass, 1 liter Grinding container made of stainless steel, 1 liter Standard lid made of PP Chamber reduction lid of from PP Chamber reduction lid of from PP Gravity lid Gravity lid with overflow tubes Gravity lid Gravity lid with overflow tubes Scraper Knife made of stainless steel Knife made of pure titanium for heavy-metal-free grinding Knife of stainless steel Full metal blades and knife cylinder Knife of stainless steel with serrated blade autoclavable for grinding containers made from glass or steel for grinding containers made of glass or steel for grinding containers made from autoclavable plastic or PP transparent and scratch-resistant, 5 litre, including knife holder transparent and scratch-resistant, 5 litre, without knife holder 3 Accessories GRINDOMIX GM 300 Article Grinding container made of autoclavable plastic Grinding container made of autoclavable plastic Grinding container made of stainless steel 5 litre, including knife holder Grinding container made of stainless steel 5 litre, without knife holder Standard lid made of autoclavable plastic Gravity lid made of autoclavable plastic Gravity lid made of autoclavable plastic with overflow tubes, transparent and scratch-resistant Standard knife made of stainless steel, autoclavable Scraper transparent and scratch-resistant transparent and scratch-resistant Order No. 10 29 23057 53 29 50047 53 29 50046 53 29 50050 10 29 20562 53 29 70310 10 29 20606 53 29 70327 53 29 70323 53 29 70328 53 29 70308 53 29 23001 53 29 60014 10 29 26021 10 29 26049 10 29 26054 Order No. 10 29 22056 10 29 23056 10 29 22055 10 29 23055 10 29 20449 10 29 20465 10 29 20480 10 29 22030 10 29 25702 1 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 517

519

Sample Preparation Size Reduction co d e b e w WWGF3010 Universal Grinders, Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills Cutting Mills (Different Models), FRITSCH 1 Cutting Mills PULVERISETTE 15 and PULVERISETTE 19 Ideal for pre- and fine comminution of soft to medium-hard as well as fibrous or brittle, tough materials. They are essential for the areas of plastics, textiles, agriculture and for- estry, environmental, construction materials, chemistry, foodstuffs and for sample prepa- ration for RoHS analysis. All cutting tools can be removed for cleaning in just a few seconds without tools – unbeat- ably fast, simple and efficient. Variable rotational speeds, different rotors, various knife geometries and replaceable blades ensure maximum flexibility and durability. For con- trolling the abrasion properties, the cutting tools are offered in different materials. The optimum airflow ensures particularly fast cutting and secure protection against clogging. The FRITSCH Cyclone seperators (optional) for sample exhaustion enable simple feeding due to the strong airflow, increase throughput, and reduce the thermal load of the sam- ples. 2 Technical data: Rotor speed: PULVERISETTE 15 2800 / 3400 rpm up to 70 × 70 mm up to 50 l/h 0.25 – 20 mm Max. feed size: Throughput: Sieve inserts: Supply requirements: 400 V / 3 Z / 50–60 Hz Dimensions (W×D×H): 42 × 48 × 69 cm Weight net: Instruments also available in other voltages. 32 kg PULVERISETTE 19 PULVERISETTE 19 300 – 3000 rpm variable 50 – 700 rpm variable up to 70 × 80 mm up to 60 l/h 0.2 – 10 mm 380–460 V / 3 Z / 50–60 Hz 79 kg 44 × 79 × 56 cm 83 kg Article 1 Cutting Mill PULVERISETTE 15 2 Universal Cutting Mill PULVERISETTE 19, variable rotational speed 300–3000 rpm 2 Universal Cutting Mill PULVERISETTE 19, Order No. 10 98 01500 53 98 19000 10 98 04000 variable rotational speed 50–700 rpm Funnel, rotor, sieve inserts/sieve cassettes and collecting vessel must be ordered addi- tionally. Further cutting mills with other rotor speeds and a version completely made of stainless steel are available on request. 3 Accessories for Cutting Mill PULVERISETTE 15 Article Funnel for long and bulk solids Cutting rotor with straight cutting edges and fixed knives made of tool steel Order No. 10 98 01550 10 98 04603 Sieve insert made of stainless steel 316L, trapezoidal perforation 0.25 mm 10 98 01200 Sieve insert made of stainless steel 316L, trapezoidal perforation 0.5 mm 10 98 01210 Sieve insert made of stainless steel 316L, trapezoidal perforation 1 mm 10 98 01230 Sieve insert made of stainless steel 316L, trapezoidal perforation 2 mm 10 98 01250 Sieve insert made of stainless steel 316L, square perforation 4 mm 10 98 02200 Sieve insert made of stainless steel 316L, square perforation 6 mm 10 98 02210 Collecting vessel, 3.5 litres 10 98 04535 Collecting vessel, 60 litres, filter hose 10 98 04560 Universal support stand for free mounting of the cutting mills 10 98 05582 Alternative funnels as well as sieve inserts are available in other perforations. Cutting ro- tors as well as the sieve inserts are also offered in chromium-free steel. 1 4 3 4 Accessories for Universal Cutting Mill PULVERISETTE 19 Article Standard funnel for long and bulk solids Standard rotor with V-cutting edges and fixed knives made of hardened stainless steel Order No. 53 98 19185 53 98 45510 Sieve cassette made of stainless steel 316L, trapezoidal perforation 0.5 mm 53 98 45542 Sieve cassette made of stainless steel 316L, trapezoidal perforation 1 mm 53 98 45544 Sieve cassette made of stainless steel 316L, trapezoidal perforation 2 mm 53 98 45546 Collecting vessel, 3 litres 53 98 45573 Collecting vessel for large quantities, 10 litres 53 98 45570 Universal support stand for free mounting of the cutting mills 10 98 05582 518 Alternative funnels, rotors in other designs and materials, sieve cassettes in other perfo- rations and materials as well as further stands and Cyclone separators in various config- urations for sample exhaustion are available.

520

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Universal Grinders, Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills Cutting Mills, RETSCH 1 Cutting Mills SM 100 / SM 200 / SM 300 Application: Gentle, quick milling of bulky, medium-hard, soft, thready, tenaciously-elastic and tem- perature-sensitive materials. The most powerful model, the SM 300, convinces in particu- lar in case of very difficult mateial, e.g. rubbish, plastic, or electrical scrap. The mills can also be used for biological materials as e.g. wood, roots, bone, plants, and feeding stuff. They may be equipped with different rotors and funnels.With its variable speed, the SM 300 can be perfectly adjusted to the mill material. Features: • 3kW motor with high traction and RES technology for powerful milling (SM 300) • Speed variable from 100 to 3,000 min-1 for perfect adjustment to the mill material (SM 300) • Double cutter bars for optimized cutting force (SM 200, SM 300) • Very quick cleaning thanks to fold-open enclosure (SM 200, SM 300) with smooth sur- faces and push-fit rotor • Bottom sieves with mesh width 0.25 – 20 mm for defined final grain size • Extensive range of accessories: funnels, collecting vessels, rotors, sieves Scope of delivery: SM 100 with 5 l collection vessel. Please order rotor, feed funnel, bottom sieve and frame (optional) separately. SM 200 / SM 300 with 5 l collection vessel and frame. Please order rotor, feed funnel and bottom sieve separately. Versions for heavy metal-free milling available on request. 1 Technical data: Feed size: Final fineness: Feed hopper: Push-fit rotor: Speed RPM: Dimensions (W×H×D) with support: Drive rating: Weight: Power supply: SM 100 SM 200 SM 300 up to 60×80 mm up to 60×80 mm up to 60×80 mm 0.25–20 mm 0.25–20 mm 0.25–20 mm – yes yes yes 1500 min-1 1500 min-1 yes yes variable 100 – 3000 min-1 582×1675×700 mm 1.5 kW 576–1080*×1675×750 mm *depending on hopper position 2.2 kW 3.0 kW approx. 73 kg approx. 90 kg approx. 160 kg 3/N Z 400 V, 50 Hz 3/N Z 400 V, 50 Hz 220 – 230 V, 50/60 Hz Article SM 100, 3/N Z 400 V, 50 Hz SM 200, 3/N Z 400 V, 50 Hz SM 200, 220–230 V, 50 Hz Accessories Order No. 10 29 22727 10 29 22728 10 29 22729 Article Base for SM 100 Universal hopper with plastic plunger for SM 100 Universal hopper with plastic plunger for SM 200/300 Long stock hopper with wooden plunger for SM 100 Long stock hopper with wooden plunger for SM 200/300 6-disc rotor, stainless steel, with reversible cutting tips of tungsten Order No. 10 29 22824 10 29 22785 10 29 22786 10 29 22484 10 29 22483 10 29 22622 carbide Parallel section rotor 10 29 22621 V-rotor for SM 300 10 29 22634 Cyclone, to use with industrial vacuum cleaner (SM 200 & SM 300) 10 29 22604 Collecting receptacle of plastic, 30 litres, incl. adapter and filter hose 10 29 22310 Collecting unit 250/500 ml, incl. 2 wide mouth bottles 10 29 22308 Bottom sieve, trapezoid holes, 0.50 mm 10 29 27313 Bottom sieve, trapezoid holes, 0.75 mm 10 29 27314 Bottom sieve, trapezoid holes, 1.00 mm 10 29 27315 Bottom sieve, trapezoid holes, 1.50 mm 10 29 27316 Bottom sieve, square holes 2.00 mm 53 29 70167 Bottom sieve, square holes 4.00 mm 53 29 70020 Bottom sieve, square holes 6.00 mm 10 29 27022 Bottom sieve, square holes 8.00 mm 53 29 70023 Bottom sieve, square holes 10.00 mm 10 29 27024 Bottom sieve, square holes 20.00 mm 10 29 27062 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 519

521

Sample Preparation Size Reduction Universal Grinders, Analytic al Grinders, Cutting Mills Hammer Mill and Blade Mill POLYMIX®, KINEMATICA 1 Hammer mill and blade mill POLYMIX® PX-MFC 90 D 1 6 2 3 4 5 The PX-MFC 90 D is intended for preparing any kind of dry and fat-free samples in the laboratory. Depending on the respective grinding task, use the hammer grinding attach- ment or the blade grinding attachment. • Blade grinding attachment for cuttable dry, fibrous, stringy and fat-free materials such as wood, straw, dried meat, leather, paper, coal, plastics etc. • Hammer grinding attachment for dry, brittle, fat-free materials such as grains, coffee beans, bones, rocks, ceramics etc. • Sieve inserts with hole diameters 0.2 mm to 6 mm • Safety system prevents start-up while machine is open • Powerful three-phase motor • Grinding chamber with convertible inserts • LED display • Operating volume approx. 300 ml (hopper volume) • 1000 Watt, 3-phase motor for 230 Volt mains • Sieve with 0.2 to 6 mm mesh width • Integrated speed adjustment with LED display for speed and status messages • Low noise level thanks to 3-phase AC motor • Speed adjustable from 50 to 6000 rpm • Motor switches off when casing is opened • Integrated overheating, overload, and blocking protection • Safety tamper for certain materials Article Hammer mill POLYMIX® PX-MFC 90 D Blade mill POLYMIX® PX-MFC 90 D Includes grinding chamber, grinding insert, Ø 2.0 mm screen, sample rack with 12 collect- ing tubes and cleaning tools Order No. 10 74 00021 10 74 00031 Accessories Article 2 Hammer grinding attachment for PX-MFC 90 D 3 Blade grinding attachment for PX-MFC 90 D Sieve insert, mesh size 0.2 mm Sieve insert, mesh size 0.5 mm 4 Sieve insert, mesh size 0.8 mm Sieve insert, mesh size 1.0 mm Sieve insert, mesh size 1.5 mm 5 Sieve insert, mesh size 2.0 mm Sieve insert, mesh size 3.0 mm Sieve insert, mesh size 4.0 mm Sieve insert, mesh size 5.0 mm Sieve insert, mesh size 6.0 mm 6 Stodger tool for stringy materials. Is used for the active feeding of stringy materials via the hop- per, which cannot be fed by its own weight. Order No. 10 74 01001 10 74 01002 53 74 09088 53 74 09089 53 74 09090 53 74 09092 53 74 09093 53 74 09094 53 74 09091 53 74 09105 53 74 09106 53 74 09107 10 74 08001 We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! 520

522

Sample Preparation Sample Splitting co d e b e w WWGF3015 Sample Splitting Rotary Cone Sample Divider LABORETTE 27, FRITSCH Rotary Cone Sample Divider LABORETTE 27 Creates the optimal basis for reliable analysis of a representative sample! Representative samples division is the foundation for every precise analysis. The Rotary Cone Sample Divider LABORETTE 27 achieves due to its unique combination of three methods previ- ously unheard of dividing precision. Variable division ratios and the design in several variants guarantee adaptation to a wide range of applications with a dividing accuracy of up to 99.9 %. For optimal sample feeding the Vibratory Feeder LABORETTE 24 (optional) is recommended. Technical data: Division: Division ratio: Number of fractions: Max. particle size: Max. feed volume: Capacity of sample bottles: Supply requirements: Dimensions (W × D × H): Weight net: of solid samples and suspensions, without modification 1:8 8 10 mm 4,000 ml 32, 250, 500 ml 230 V/1 Z, 50 – 60 Hz 27 × 45 × 46 cm 7.7 kg 1:30 3 2.5 mm 300 ml 15, 20, 30 ml 1:10 10 10 mm 2,500 ml 32, 250 ml Article Rotary Cone Sample Divider LABORETTE 27, 230 V Instrument also available in other voltages. Dividing heads must be ordered additionally. Order No. 54 98 27142 Article Division ratio Accessories for Rotary Cone Sample Divider LABORETTE 27 Sample bottle ml 500 500 250 250 15 15 POM plastic Aluminium POM plastic Aluminium POM plastic PTFE-coated aluminium 1:8 1:8 1:10 1:10 1:30 1:30 Order No. 54 98 27130 54 98 27115 54 98 27515 54 98 27415 54 98 27615 54 98 27215 All dividing heads are delivered inclusive sample bottles and funnels. Sample Splitters, HAVER & BOECKER With the sample divider provided for HAVER particle analysis, highly precise sample preparation is no big challenge. Prepare representative test samples of solid matter or suspensions. Dividing low-flowability materials poses no problems. co d e b e w WWKZV004 1 Rotating Sample Reducer HAVER RPT Splitting channels: 8, 10 or 30 Splitting steps: 3000 per minute Max. feed volume: 4000 ml (RPT 1:8), 2500 ml (RPT 1:10) or 300 ml (RPT 1:30) per run Max. particle size: 10 mm (RPT 1:8 and RPT 1:10) or 2.50 mm (RPT 1:30) Article HAVER RPT 1:8 (8 glass sample bottles) HAVER RPT 1:10 (10 glass sample bottles) HAVER RPT 1:30 (3 glass sample bottles) Order No. 10 16 90991 10 16 90992 10 16 90994 2 Sample splitters HAVER RT 6,3 / RT 12,5 1 rack: 300 × 250 × 270 mm, made of lacquered sheet steel 1 divider: openings depending on models, stainless steel 3 receivers: contents 1.75 litres, made of tinned sheet Article RT 6.3 RT 12.5 Version 12 divisions 6.3 mm / ¼ inch 18 divisions 12.5 mm / ½ inch Order No. 10 16 90292 10 16 90291 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 2 521

523

Sample Preparation Sample Splitting / Extraction Sample Splitting Sample Divider PT 100, RETSCH Application: Rotation sample divider for representative sample division of free-flowing powders and granulates. the procedure guarantees a very high dividing accuracy and reproducibility for both fine and coarse samples to be divided. Features: • Extremely high dividing accuracy • Representative and reproducible dividing results • Automatic material feeding via synchronised assignment device • Simple and easy handling of the sample vessels by means of quick-clamp system Included: PT 100 complete unit incl. 8 dividing crown with quick clamps, 10 wide-mouth bottles 250 ml and assignment device DR 100/40. Technical data: Input grain size: Number of samples: Throughput/batch: Dimensions (W×H×D): 580 × 420 × 910 mm Weight: Power supply: up to 10 mm 8 up to 4000 ml (up to 5000 ml) 33 kg 230 V/50 Hz Article PT 100 complete unit 6- or 10-dividing heads available on request. Order No. 10 29 24005 Sieving systems see page 755 Extractors Compact Soxhlet Extraction Units, Behr Compact systems for the Soxhlet extraction with stand, heating module, mount, hoses and glassware (round-bottom reaction flask, extractor, Dimroth condenser for extraction). Infinitely adjustable heater. • Practical stand for holding the condensers securely between the extractions • Extractor sizes of 30 ml to 1,000 ml • F-models: the use of extractors with a stopcock eliminates the need for any additional distillation after extraction • Condensers with screwed- on tubing nipples Article KEX 30 KEX 70 KEX 100 KEX 30 F KEX 60 F 1 KEX 100 F KEX 250 F KEX 500 F KEX 1000 F KEX 2000 F KEX 5000 F for extraction 30 ml 70 ml 100 ml 30 ml, with cock 60 ml, with cock 100 ml, with cock 250 ml, with cock 500 ml, with cock 1000 ml, with cock 2000 ml, with cock 5000 ml, with cock Order No. 13 48 00520 10 48 41131 13 48 00521 10 48 00541 10 48 41132 13 48 00522 13 48 00536 10 48 00543 10 48 41133 10 48 00545 10 48 00546 behrotest® serial heaters The economical and user-friendly solution for the classic Soxhlet or fat extraction: • Complete with reaction vessels, extraction spacers, and condensers • Energy for each sample position is individually adjustable • Cooling water distributor ensures even cooling at all sample positions • Extractors with the specifically developed siphon tube ensure a uniform extraction pro- cess at all sample positions • Practical stand for holding the condensers securely between extractions • Mounts for holding the extraction spacers after removing the sample vessels • S models: The extractors with stopcock eliminate the need for any additional distillation after extraction • With European earth contact type plug and UK plug Article R 304 R 306 R 304 S R 306 S R 604 for extraction 30 ml 30 ml 30 ml, with cock 30 ml, with cock 60 ml Sample places 4 6 4 6 4 Order No. 10 48 80031 10 48 80032 10 48 80041 10 48 80042 10 48 80051 Continued on next page co d e b e w WWXKS035 1 2 522

524

Extractors Article R 606 R 604 S R 606 S R 104 S 2 R 106 S R 108 S R 254 S R 256 S for extraction 60 ml 60 ml, with cock 60 ml, with cock 100 ml, with cock 100 ml, with cock 100 ml, with cock 250 ml, with cock 250 ml, with cock Sample places 6 4 6 4 6 8 4 6 Order No. 10 48 80052 10 48 80053 10 48 80054 10 48 80023 10 48 80022 10 48 41134 10 48 80033 10 48 80034 behrotest® hydrolysis unit behrotest® hydrolysis – sample preparation for extraction Complete with: • Serial heater • Cooling water distributor with stand for holding the condensers, and tubing • Beaker (600 ml), condenser Article EXR 4 3 EXR 6 Sample places 4 6 Order No. 10 48 18446 10 48 18448 Compact system for hot extraction in accordance with Twisselmann Complete compact extraction system with stand, heating module, mount, hoses and glassware (round-bottom reaction flask, extractor, Dimroth condenser for extraction). Article KEX 100 T for hot extraction in accordance with Twisselmann Order No. 10 48 00537 behrotest® multi-sample extractors for hot extraction in accordance with Twissel- mann Economical and user-friendly units for extraction in accordance with Twisselmann: • each sample position is individually adjustable • cooling water distributor ensures an even cooling at all sample positions • practical stand for holding the condensers securely between the extractions • mounts for holding the spacers after the removal of the sample containers Article R 104 T Serial heating unit Twisselmann extraction, 4 working places 4 R 106 T Serial heating unit Twisselmann extraction, 6 working places 5 R 106 T-FB Serial heating unit Twisselmann extraction, 6 working places with flat bottom flask (FB) Order No. 10 48 80045 10 48 80043 10 48 80046 Hot extraction in accordance with Randall Manual extraction unit for the Randall method. Many times faster than conventional Sox- hlet extraction systems. With 25 extraction thimbles. • Bolted extraction units and safety screen for optimum safety Multi-position extraction units: • Each extraction thimble with sample can be moved separately • The user operates a lever to lower all extraction vessels at a time into the heater cavities and lift them out again max. 1500 W 230 V AC/50 Hz approx. 81 × 55 × 63 approx. 32 kg • Safety screen for extra protection Technical data: Power consumption: Rated voltage: Dimensions in cm (H x W x D): Weight: Article 6 Extraction unit E 4 Four individually controlled sample places Extraction unit E 6 Six individually controlled sample places Extraction thimbles EX 75 HS consistent with EB 75 reaction vessels 10 48 09081 consistent with EB 75 reaction vessels, 25 pcs. EB 75 reaction vessel with thread, for extraction unit E 4 RIP 475, stand for 4 EB 75 reaction vessel 7 RIP 675, stand for 6 EB 75 reaction vessel Order No. 10 48 80049 10 48 02351 10 48 02352 10 48 80050 10 48 31976 Sample Preparation Extraction 5 3 4 6 7 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 523

525

Sample Preparation Extraction co d e b e w WWW4U082 Extractors Solvent Extractors, LAT There are three good reasons for getting an extractor pursuant to Randall: • up to 5 times faster than Soxhlet extraction • less solvent consumption • low costs per analysis Furthermore, the SER 148 offer the user full compliance with IP55. The main field of ap- plication is the determination of the content of soluble products such as fats, softening agents, and pesticides in foods, animal feed, rubber and products made of synthetics, pharmaceutical products, soils, etc. Technical data: Maximum volume per jar: Operating temperature: Sample volume: Solvent recovery: Reproducibility: Interface: 150 ml 100 to 260°C 0.5 – 15 g (usually 2–3 g) 50 – 75% < 1% RS232 Type SER 148/3 SER 148/6 Power input W 500 W 950 W Dimensions mm 480×620×390 700×620×390 Weight kg 30 40 Order No. 10 20 11483 10 20 11486 co d e b e w WW6PB009 Extraction Thimbles, Hahnemühle Cellulose extraction thimbles For reliable and fast analysis in the areas of food control and environmental monitoring. Suitable for Soxhlet-type, Tecator-type or similar devices, to extract certain components out of solid material with an appropriate solvent. • Made of cellulose that is totally free from binding elements, with a minimum content of extractable components • High purity of selected cellulose guarantees reliable and replicable results • The consistent high porosity of the thimbles ensures a fast flow • High fitting accuracy for all available extraction systems Available for two device types: • Type 900: Soxhlet extraction, inner diameter measurement • Type 901: Tecator extraction, outer diameter measurement Technical data: Inner diameter <33 mm >35 mm Wall thickness 1.3 mm 1.7 mm Maximum Temperature 120°C 120°C Ø × H mm Order No. 19 × 90 10 15 99001 22 × 80 10 15 99002 22 × 100 10 15 99030 25 × 60 10 15 99003 25 × 70 10 15 99032 25 × 80 10 15 99005 25 × 100 10 15 99006 28 × 60 10 15 99035 28 × 80 10 15 99026 28 × 100 10 15 99007 30 × 80 10 15 99008 30 × 100 10 15 99009 33 × 60 10 15 99010 PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Other sizes on request. Ø × H mm Order No. 33 × 80 10 15 99011 33 × 90 10 15 99012 33 × 94 10 15 99013 33 × 100 10 15 99024 33 × 118 10 15 99015 33 × 130 10 15 99027 33 × 205 10 15 99023 35 × 150 10 15 99017 40 × 100 10 15 99028 40 × 123 10 15 99018 40 × 150 10 15 99034 43 × 123 10 15 99019 26 (O.-Ø) × 60 10 15 99029 PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Continued on next page 524

526

Sample Preparation Extraction Extractors Glass fibre thimbles Recommended for analysis of particles and aerosols in gases and air. • Made of 100% pure borosilicate fibres, without binding elements • High loading capacity and highly permeable to air • High retention of small particles, >99% according to BS 4400 • Wall thickness 1.5 mm (thimbles with <33 mm diameter) • Good stability at high temperatures up to 500°C • Recommended for hot, moist, and acidic gases Ø × H mm Order No. 19 × 90 10 15 99152 22 × 80 10 15 99153 25 × 100 10 15 99154 26 × 60 10 15 99155 Other sizes on request. PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 Ø × H mm Order No. 30 × 100 10 15 99156 33 × 94 10 15 99157 43 × 123 10 15 99158 PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 Extraction Thimbles, MACHEREY-NAGEL MN 645 - Extraction Thimbles Extraction Thimbles are often used in Soxhlet extractors or automized extractors. These are typically employed, where multiple extraction cycles are required to dissolve the de- sired compound. Extraction units equipped with MN extraction thimbles minimize the hands-on time and ensure a complete extraction. ID × H mm Order No. 8 × 40 10 46 95001 9 × 50 10 46 95002 15 × 50 10 46 95003 15 × 100 10 46 95004 20 × 80 10 46 95005 22 × 80 10 46 95006 23 × 90 10 46 95007 23 × 100 10 46 95008 27 × 60 10 46 95011 27 × 80 10 46 95009 27 × 100 10 46 95010 28 × 80 10 46 95015 28 × 90 10 46 95016 28 × 100 10 46 95013 28 × 120 10 46 95014 29 × 100 10 46 95017 30 × 60 10 46 95019 30 × 80 10 46 95020 30 × 90 10 46 95021 30 × 100 10 46 95023 30 × 150 10 46 95018 31 × 118 10 46 95024 PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 ID × H mm Order No. 31 × 130 10 46 95025 33 × 80 10 46 95051 33 × 94 10 46 95022 33 × 205 10 46 95026 34 × 120 10 46 95027 34 × 150 10 46 95028 38 × 200 10 46 95029 40 × 123 10 46 95031 40 × 150 10 46 95030 43 × 130 10 46 95032 48 × 145 10 46 95033 48 × 200 10 46 95034 48 × 230 10 46 95035 51 × 145 10 46 95036 51 × 180 10 46 95037 55 × 275 10 46 95040 57 × 315 10 46 95038 60 × 180 10 46 95039 68 × 250 10 46 95042 70 × 330 10 46 95043 75 × 160 10 46 95041 PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Racks for Extraction Thimbles, Behr Desktop rack for extraction thimbles with diameters up to 38 mm. Article RIP 4 for 4 extraction thimbles RIP 6 for 6 extraction thimbles Order No. 10 48 02349 10 48 02350 co d e b e w WWXKS055 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 525

527

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers CHAPTER OVERVIEW Temperature Controllers 526 Burners, Blowers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 Hoses for Gas Burners see Lab Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Safety Drying Ovens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Incubators, Cooled Incubators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Shaking Equipment, Incubators see Stirring, Shaking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 CO2 Incubators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Vacuum Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . 551 Furnaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556 Tube Furnaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Incinerators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths . . . . . . . . . . 560 Metal Block Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Thermomixers see Stirring, Shaking Systems . . . . . . . 675 Quartz Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 Heating Tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Heating Mantles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 Water Baths, Oil Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 Shaking Water Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595 Immersion Thermostats, Bath Circulators . . . . . 597 Circulator Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Cooling Thermostats and Condensers . . . . . . . . . 622 Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units 626 Refrigerators, Upright Freezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Chest Freezers, Upright Freezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632 Ice Flake Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Insulating Vessels 635 Nitrogen Stores, Nitrogen Freezing Containers 635 Dewar Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 Cooling Boxes, Chests, Ice Baths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642 KNOWLEDGE Direct Heating in the Vacuum Drying Oven . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 KNOWLEDGE Laboratory Circulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 co d e b e w WWQ7J020 1 2 3 526 4 Burners, Blowers Laboratory Gas Burners, BOCHEM Temperature 1300°C (for all models): brass, nickel-plated, with enameled foot. Models with air controller, DIN 30665 Article 1 Bunsen burner for natural gas Bunsen burner for propane gas 2 Teclu burner for natural gas Teclu burner for propane gas Order No. 32 05 07000 32 05 07010 32 05 07100 32 05 07110 Models with air controller, gas controlled by needle valve, low flame, DIN 30665 Article 3 Bunsen burner for natural gas Bunsen burner for propane gas 4 Teclu burner for natural gas Teclu burner for propane gas Order No. 32 05 07330 32 05 07340 32 05 07400 32 05 07410 Continued on next page

528

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Burners, Blowers Models with air controller, gas contolled by needle valve, low flame Article 5 Bunsen burner for natural gas Bunsen burner for propane gas 6 Teclu burner for natural gas Teclu burner for propane gas 7 Multi-gas Bunsen burner for e.g. natural gas and propane gas 8 Multi-gas Teclu burner for natural gas, propane gas Order No. 32 05 07050 32 05 07060 32 05 07150 32 05 07160 32 05 07360 32 05 07430 Safety burners with air controller, gas controlled by toggle cock, low flame with thermo safety element, bimetal flame sensor and magnet closure Article 9 Multi-gas safety burner for natural gas Multi-gas safety burner for propane gas Order No. 10 05 07511 10 05 07512 Safety burners with air controller, gas controlled by needle valve, low flame Article AT Safety burner for natural gas Safety burner for propane gas Order No. 32 05 07515 32 05 07516 Gas Burners, USBECK Article AK Teclu burner certified to DIN, air regulation, needle valve, T = 1640°C AL Bunsen burner certified to DIN, air regulation, needle valve, T = 1640°C AM Cartridge for Teclu burner and Bunsen burner 220 g / 400 ml, safety valve, capacity 3 h, EN 417:2012, 70% butane / 30% propane Order No. 10 64 21421 10 64 21422 10 64 21430 LABOGAZ® Burner, Hecht-ASSISTENT Article LABOGAZ® burner without cartridge Cartridge with butane gas Order No. 32 18 19010 32 18 19011 for LABOGAZ® burner, with safety valve (cartridge can be remo- ved without risk from the burner at any time when the burner is not being used). Contents approx. 450 g (ca. 880 ml) N.B.: Burners and cartridges are not interchangeable with version No. 1396. 5 6 7 8 9 AT co d e b e w WWTVV001 AM AK AL co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 527

529

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Burners, Blowers Safety Bunsen Burner Flame 100, WLD-TEC The Flame 100 is ideally suited for all flame related applications in the laboratory. The 15 millimeter precision flame allows graduated heating of dental tools as well as safe sterili- zation of microbiological instruments. Flame size and intensity can be adjusted infinitely. The Safety Control System SCS demonstrates extensive safety technology (approved by DIN-DVGW, approval no. NG-2211AS0167). Applicable for natural gas or butane/propane gas. Features / Functions: • Flame activation with a push of a button • Made of high-class stainless steel • SCS Safety Control System with gas safety cut-off: Ignition and flame control, temper- ature and burner Head clogging monitor (BHC), automatic unit switch off, 4h • Removable burner tube • Nozzles for natural gas, propane/butane gas • Holding device for 2 inoculation loop holders • Push fit and threaded connection, gas filter • Power supply: 100 – 240 V (worldwide use), 2 years warranty • Measurements: 98 × 34 × 88 mm (w × h × d) Article 1 Flame 100 with button function Stainless steel foot pedal External IR - motion sensor for touch-free flame activation Tilt adjustment made of stainless steel Windshield made of stainless steel Spray and wax protector Adapter for gas cartridges CV 360 Additional gas cartridge adapters see Fuego SCS series Order No. 10 30 72100 32 30 66402 10 30 76406 10 30 72300 10 30 72600 10 30 72200 10 30 78700 Handheld Laboratory Gas Burner, WLD-TEC Powerjet / Powerjet 2 - mobile laboratory gas burner with piezoelectric ignition The solution for all mobile flame sterilization work in the microbiology or biotechnical fields. The burner is lit as soon as the bar is pressed. The flame can be regulated in size and is extinguished by release of the bar. Additional the bar of the Powerjet / Powerjet 2 is equipped with a locking device. The locking device comprises both, short and long term ranges. Article Powerjet Stainless steel stand for Powerjet (w/o Fig.) 2 Powerjet 2 Order No. 32 30 76005 10 30 76815 32 30 76006 for gas cartridges CG1750 from camping gaz (w/o Fig.) for natural gas, propane/butane gas, with adapter for CV360 gas cartridges and stainless steel stand Hoses for gas burners see page 178 Triangles, IDL Iron wire, nickel, plated, clay tubing Leg length mm 40 50 Order No. 32 00 12700 32 00 12701 Leg length mm 60 70 Order No. 32 00 12702 32 00 12703 1 2 co d e b e w WW7R3214 528

530

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Burners, Blowers Clay Squares, IDL Clay squares for the drying of melting point test specimens 150 × 150 mm clay platelets in squares of 30 × 30 mm, designed to snap off with ease Advantages over clay fragments: • No waste, can be put to maximum use. • No pointed or sharp fracture edges. • No risk of cut or prick wounds. • No risk of splinters in your eyes. • No splinters left on work tops and floors, hence no broken glass due to Erlenmeyer flasks being put down too hard on splinter pieces. • Handy square size is easy to fix in place with your fingers. • Enough room available for marking. co d e b e w WW7R3260 Article Clay platelet in squares of 30 × 30 mm Order No. 21 00 80000 Glass-Ceramic Laboratory Protection Plates, DURAN Group / IDL These protective plates made of CERAN® glass-ceramics not only replace conventional asbestos protection plates, but they also save energy and time because of their high permeability to infrared radiation. The glass-ceramic protection plates are chemically re- sistant and have high temperature resistance in the range -200 to +700°C. co d e b e w WWEQ2177 1 Glass-ceramic laboratory protection plates Platform size mm Order No. 135×135 155×155 175×175 2 Quadrupods for glass ceramic laboratory protection plates made of chrome-nickel 32 23 82153 32 23 82157 32 23 82158 Order No. 1 135×135 155×155 175×175 3 Plate holder for glass ceramic laboratory protection plates made of chrome-nickel 32 29 07753 32 29 07757 32 29 07758 Overall H mm 210 210 220 steel for plate size mm mm steel for plate size mm mm 135×135 155×155 175×175 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 Order No. 32 29 07853 32 29 07857 32 29 07858 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 2 3 co d e b e w WWQVD113 Hot-Air Blower HG 2320 E, Digitally Controlled, Rettberg The powerful HG 2320 E with a rating of 2300 W generates hot air from 80 – 650°C. The highly precise temperature setting is conveniently carried out via joystick. Together with the residual heat indication, the LCD info display provides for additional safety. Four indi- vidually adjustable programs ensure added flexibility. Combined with the various nozzles from the accessories range, the HG 2320 is a perfect choice for processing tempera- ture-critical workpieces. Furthermore, it is easy to service: The cable can be replaced very easily if damaged. Technical data: Power rating: Temperature: Temp. indicator: Air volume: Heating: Thermal fuse: Thermal protective shut-down: Protection class (without protective conductor terminal): Dimensions (L×W×H): Power supply: Weight: Article Hot-air blower type 650 DR 2000 W 80 – 650°C Display in 10°C increments 150 – 500 l/min Ceramic heating yes yes II 253 × 86.5 × 200 mm 230 V, 50/60 Hz 0.755 kg (without power cord ) Order No. 32 70 00650 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 529

531

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WWQGZ007 Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves Universal Drying/Heating Ovens Classic.Line, BINDER Universal drying/heating ovens, ED, FD, FED, FP BINDER universal drying ovens stand for precision and effectiveness. Using them ensures safe sterilization routines, speedy drying, and precise heating. Equipment: • Patented APT.line™ preheating chamber technology • Temperature range: 5°C above room temperature to 300°C • Temperature safety device Cl. 2 (DIN 12880) with visual temperature alarm • Adjustable ventilation by means of rear exhaust duct Ø 50 mm with ventilation flap and front ventilation slide 1 Series ED with natural convection Series FD with circulating air Series FED with circulating air and advanced time functions ED 23 mm 435 mm 495 mm 520 mm 222 mm 330 mm 300 pc 2/3 kg 22 41 40 12091 FP 115 835 705 ED 400 1235 1025 765 1000 800 520 2/10 125 41 40 12075 FP 240 1035 825 FD 23 435 495 520 222 330 300 2/3 33 41 40 13094 FP 400 1235 1025 Type Outer width Outer height (incl. feet/rollers) Outer depth Inner width Inner height Inner depth Shelves (qty standard/max.) Weight Order No. FP 53 rollers) mm 635 620 Type Outer width Outer height (incl. feet/ mm mm 575 mm 400 mm 400 mm 340 2/5 Outer depth Inner width Inner height Inner depth Shelves (qty standard/ max.) pc kg 45 FED 400 1235 1025 765 1000 800 500 2/10 145 10 40 10216 FP 720 1235 1530 865 1000 1200 610 2/15 1 Series FP with program control and forced circulating air 645 600 480 410 2/6 745 800 600 510 2/7 765 1000 800 510 2/10 41 40 10225 62 41 40 10227 98 41 40 10229 145 41 40 10231 184 41 40 10233 Drying and Heating Chambers with Natural Convection Solid. Line, BINDER The new products in the Solid.Line impress with their tried-and-tested BINDER quality and reliability. They are suitable for drying and heating. The features of the Solid.Line are geared towards the application in question and therefore used in research and quality assurance. Series ED-S Features: • Temperature range: ambient temperature +7°C to 250°C • APT.line™ preheating chamber technology • Natural convection • Adjustable exhaust air flap • Controller with timer function Model ED-S 56 ED-S 115 Interior vol. l 62 118 Outer W × H × D mm 614×625×577 764×735×616 Inner W × H × D mm 400×440×350 550×550×390 Order No. 10 40 10014 10 40 10020 Series FD-S Features: • Temperature range: ambient temperature +10°C to 250°C • APT.line™ preheating chamber technology • Forced convection • Adjustable exhaust air flap • Controller with timer function Model FD-S 56 FD-S 115 Interior vol. l 55 106 Outer W × H × D mm 614×625×577 764×35×616 Inner W × H × D mm 400×440×310 550×550×350 Order No. 10 40 10018 10 40 10024 Weight Order No. co d e b e w WWQGZ021 530

532

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves Single- and TwinDISPLAY, Memmert Premium convenience and intelligent function A comparison of the model variants SingleDISPLAY and TwinDISPLAY 1 ControlCOCKPIT 2 ControlCOCKPIT with one TFT display with two TFT displays co d e b e w WW91A011 Available parameters on the ControlCOCK- PIT: temperature (either Celsius or Fahren- heit), fan speed, exhaust air flap position, program runtime, time zones, daylight-sav- ing time One temperature sensor Pt100 DIN class A in a 4-wire circuit Software AtmoCONTROL1) for data read out and programming of the data logger via Ethernet interface (temporary trial ver- sion as free download). USB stick with At- moCONTROL software available as an ac- cessory on request. Ethernet interface on the rear of the appli- ance for reading out the protocol log Double overtemperature protection: Elec- tronic temperature monitoring with freely adjustable monitoring temperature (for U/I/S devices with option A6 TWW/TWB, protection class 3.1 or 2), mechanical tem- perature limiter TB acc. to DIN 12880:2007-05 Available parameters on the ControlCOCK- PIT: temperature (either Celsius or Fahren- heit), relative humidity, light, CO2, pressure, O2, fan speed, exhaust air flap position, program runtime, time zones, daylight-sav- ing time Two Pt100 sensors DIN class A in a 4-wire circuit for mutual monitoring, taking over functions in case of an error HeatBALANCE function for application specific adjustment of heating power dis- tribution (balance) between the upper and lower heating groups in an adjustment range between -50% and +50% (do not apply to size 30, HPP110, IPP110plus, ICP, ICH) Software AtmoCONTROL1) on USB pen drive for programming, managing and transferring of programs via Ethernet inter- face or USB port 1 2 ControlCOCKPIT with USB port for up- loading programs, reading out protocol logs, activating the User-ID function Displaying of already logged protocol data on the ControlCOCKPIT (max 10,000 val- ues correspond to approx. 1 week) Ethernet interface on the rear of the appli- ance for reading out the protocol log and for uploading and implementing programs and for online logging Multiple overtemperature protection: Elec- tronic temperature monitoring TWW/TWB (protection class 3.1 or 2 resp. 3.3 for units with active cooling) and mechanical tem- perature limiter TB (protection class 1) acc. to. DIN 12880:2007-05, AutoSAFETY auto- matically adjusts to the set value within a freely adjustable tolerance range. Setting individual MIN / MAX values for over/un- dertemperature and also for all other pa- rameters such as relative humidity, CO2. Housing made of structured stainless steel, rear wall galvanised sheet steel, operation and parameter setting via ControlCOCKPIT Hot-condition coupler on the rear for single-phase power cable connection according to the country-specific systems and IEC standards Integrated data logger with a memory capacity for minimum 10 years Language setting via ControlCOCKPIT - available languages: German, English, Spanish, French, Polish, Italian, Hungarian, Czech Digital countdown timer with target time input, can be set from 1 minute to 99 days SetpointWAIT function starts the process time only after the setpoint temperature has been reached at all measuring points – optionally also for the recorded temperature values of the Pt100 sensors which can be placed at any position in the interior Setting of three calibration values each for temperature and additional device-specific parameters directly at the ControlCOCKPIT (e.g. relative humidity) 1) Memmert GmbH & Co. KG as a manufacturer clearly identifies its devices which are medical devices in the sense of European law. The AtmoCONTROL software is not a medical device. For all MEMMERT medical products/devices, use as intended is possible without the AtmoCONTROL software. AtmoCONTROL when used in combination with Memmert GmbH & Co.KG is intended for read-out and logging only. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 531

533

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves co d e b e w WW91A001 1 2 532 Universal Oven, Memmert The ovens with the unique ControlCOCKPIT for quick and intuitive operation. For a wide portfolio of applications, ideally in temperature ranges above +50°C. Medical device certification: Memmert universal ovens Um are class I. Until the entry into force of Regulation (EU) 2017/745 (MDR), Memmert Class I medical devices will be placed on the market in ac- cordance with EU Directive 93/42 / EEC. After the regulation comes into force, Memmert will market Class I medical devices in accordance with MDR. In accordance with their intended use, Memmert universal ovens Um may be used for heating and keeping warm fango, silicate and APS packs for physical therapy. All product information below also applies to the medical devices Um. UN and UF ovens N = Natural convection F = Forced air circulation 2 model variants: SingleDISPLAY and TwinDISPLAY (a detailed description of the two variants can be found on page 531) Technical data: Work temperature range: Set temperature range: Setting accuracy: Electrical supply: at least 5°C (UN), at least 10°C (UF) above room tempera- ture up to +300°C +20°C up to +300°C up to 99.9°C: 0.1°C / from 100°C: 0.5°C 230 V up to model size 260, from model size 450 three- phase current 400 V 3 ph N (CEE plug, 16-A version) (other voltages to special order) Available models and sizes with fully insulated stainless steel door: Series UN / UNm1) 2) With natural convection and microprocessor PID control. Type Inner W × H × D Outer W × H × D Vol. approx. l mm UN30 32 585×704×434 UN30m 585×704×434 32 UN55 53 585×784×514 UN55m 585×784×514 53 UN75 74 585×944×514 UN75m 585×944×514 74 UN110 108 745×864×584 UN110m 745×864×584 108 UN160 161 745×1104×584 UN160m 745×1104×584 161 UN260 256 824×1183×684 UN260m 824×1183×684 256 1 UN450 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 UN450m 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 UN750 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 UN750m 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 mm 400×320×250 400×320×250 400×400×330 400×400×330 400×560×330 400×560×330 560×480×400 560×480×400 560×720×400 560×720×400 640×800×500 640×800×500 Wght approx. kg 45 45 57 57 66 66 74 74 96 96 110 110 161 161 217 217 P rating approx. W 1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 2800 2800 3200 3200 3400 3400 58003) 58003) 70003) 70003) Order No. 10 26 03030 10 26 03031 10 26 03055 10 26 03056 10 26 03075 10 26 03076 10 26 03110 10 26 03111 10 26 03160 10 26 03161 10 26 03260 10 26 03261 10 26 03450 10 26 03461 10 26 03750 10 26 03751 Type Inner W × H × D Outer W × H × D Series UF / UFm1) 2) With enforced air circulation and microprocessor PID control. Wght approx. kg 45 45 57 57 66 66 74 74 96 96 110 110 161 161 217 217 252 Vol. approx. l mm UF30 32 585×704×434 UF30m 585×704×434 32 UF55 53 585×784×514 UF55m 585×784×514 53 UF75 74 585×944×514 UF75m 585×944×514 74 UF110 108 745×864×584 UF110m 745×864×584 108 UF160 161 745×1104×584 UF160m 745×1104×584 161 UF260 256 824×1183×684 UF260m 824×1183×684 256 UF450 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 UF450m 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 2 UF750 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 UF750m 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 UF1060 1224×1720×1035 1040×1200×850 1060 mm 400×320×250 400×320×250 400×400×330 400×400×330 400×560×330 400×560×330 560×480×400 560×480×400 560×720×400 560×720×400 640×800×500 640×800×500 Order No. P rating approx. W 1600 10 26 05030 1600 10 26 05031 2000 10 26 05055 2000 10 26 05056 2500 10 26 05075 2500 10 26 05076 2800 10 26 05110 2800 10 26 05111 3200 10 26 05160 3200 10 26 05161 3400 10 26 05260 3400 10 26 05261 58003) 10 26 05450 58003) 10 26 05451 70003) 10 26 05750 70003) 10 26 05751 70003) 10 26 06161 Continued on next page

534

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves Series UNplus / UNmplus1) 2) With natural convection and microprocessor PID control. Type Inner W × H × D Outer W × H × D Vol. approx. l mm mm UN30plus 32 400×320×250 585×704×434 UN30mplus 585×704×434 32 400×320×250 UN55plus 53 400×400×330 585×784×514 UN55mplus 585×784×514 53 400×400×330 UN75plus 74 400×560×330 585×944×514 UN75mplus 585×944×514 74 400×560×330 UN110plus 745×864×584 108 560×480×400 UN110mplus 745×864×584 108 560×480×400 3 UN160plus 161 745×1104×584 560×720×400 UN160mplus 745×1104×584 560×720×400 161 UN260plus 256 824×1183×684 640×800×500 UN260mplus 824×1183×684 640×800×500 256 UN450plus 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 UN450mplus 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 UN750plus 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 UN750mplus 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 Wght approx. kg 45 45 57 57 66 66 74 74 96 96 110 110 161 161 217 217 P rating approx. W 1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 2800 2800 3200 3200 3400 3400 58003) 58003) 70003) 70003) Order No. 10 26 08030 10 26 08031 10 26 08055 10 26 08056 10 26 08075 10 26 08076 10 26 08110 10 26 08111 10 26 08160 10 26 08161 10 26 08260 10 26 08261 10 26 08450 10 26 08451 10 26 08750 10 26 08751 Series UFplus / UFmplus1) 2) With enforced air circulation and microprocessor PID control. Type Inner W × H × D Outer W × H × D Vol. approx. l mm UF30plus 32 585×704×434 UF30mplus 585×704×434 32 UF55plus 53 585×784×514 UF55mplus 585×784×514 53 UF75plus 74 585×944×514 UF75mplus 585×944×514 74 4 UF110plus 108 745×864×584 UF110mplus 745×864×584 108 UF160plus 161 745×1104×584 UF160mplus 745×1104×584 161 UF260plus 256 824×1183×684 UF260mplus 824×1183×684 256 UF450plus 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 UF450mplus 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 UF750plus 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 UF750mplus 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 UF1060plus 1224×1720×1035 1040×1200×850 1060 mm 400×320×250 400×320×250 400×400×330 400×400×330 400×560×330 400×560×330 560×480×400 560×480×400 560×720×400 560×720×400 640×800×500 640×800×500 Wght approx. kg 45 45 57 57 66 66 74 74 96 96 110 110 161 161 217 217 252 P rating approx. W 1600 1600 2000 2000 2500 2500 2800 2800 3200 3200 3400 3400 58003) 58003) 70003) 70003) 70003) Order No. 10 26 06030 10 26 06031 10 26 06055 10 26 06056 10 26 06075 10 26 06076 10 26 06110 10 26 06111 10 26 06160 10 26 06163 10 26 06260 10 26 06261 10 26 06450 10 26 06451 10 26 06750 10 26 06751 10 26 06162 1) External dimensions: Depth without door handle, depth of door handle 56 mm 2) Inner dimensions (depth): On models with enforced air circulation the depth is reduced by 39 mm for the fan. 3) With 400 V and 3 × 230 V o.N., 50/60 Hz. All universal ovens comply with the strict requirements of DIN 12880:2007-05 Accessories for models UN / UNm / UF / UFm / UNplus / UNmplus / UFplus / UFmplus Stainless steel grid (standard version: size 30, 55 and 1060: 1 piece, size 75 to 750: 2 pieces) for type Qty max. Order No. for type Qty max. Order No. 3 4 Stainless steel slide-in drip tray, non-perforated, 15 mm rim (may impair the spatial distribution of the temperature) for type Qty max. Order No. for type Qty max. Order No. 30 3 55/75 4/6 110/160 5/8 10 26 01571 10 26 01572 10 26 01574 260 450/750 8/14 1060 14 9 10 26 01576 10 26 01577 10 26 01579 An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right to make changes in technical specifications. Dimensions subject to confirmation. All performance data are typical mean values for serial devices. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 533 30 3 55/75 4/6 110/160 5/8 30 3 55/75 4/6 110/160 5/8 Stainless steel shelves, perforated for type Qty max. Order No. for type Qty max. Order No. 10 26 01551 10 26 01552 10 26 05008 10 26 01561 10 26 01562 10 26 04031 260 450/750 8/14 1060 14 9 260 450/750 8/14 1060 14 9 10 26 01556 10 26 01557 10 26 01559 10 26 01566 10 26 01567 10 26 01569

535

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves co d e b e w WWSB5042 1 2 Ovens, Phoenix Instrument Natural convection ovens Ideal for everyday use in the processes of drying and sterilization, the natural convection ovens are characterized by a high load capacity and by the accurate temperature con- trol. The possibility to heat the samples up to 300°C allows any type of sterilization process. The minimum heating times, the heating power properly dimensioned and the perfect tightness of the seals, ensure low energy consumption in every application. All models are available as Basic Series and Super Series. Basic Series • 7 programs × 10 program steps • Repeatable work cycles • Large backlit LCD display • Easy to read symbols • Timer and continuous function • Visual and acoustic alarm • Fan speed control • Delay of the program start • Safety temperature to protect the sample SUPER series • New generation of color touch screen displays with user-friendly screens and icons • 8 programs with 8 steps storable • USB flash drive • Easy operation and readability TIN-TN50B / TIN-TN50S 50 litres +300/0.1°C ±3.5°C ±0.5°C 16 min TIN-TN115B / TIN-TN115S 115 litres +300/0.1°C ±3.5°C ±0.5°C 18 min TIN-TN30B Technical data: 30 litres Volume: +200/0.1°C Max. temperature/resolution: Temp. homogeneity at 37°C: ±3.5°C Temperature variation at 37°C: ±0.5°C 14 min Heating time at 37°C: 99:59/continuous operation 99:59/continuous operation 99:59/continuous operation 99:59/continuous operation Timer: Int. dimension (W×H×D): 320×320×285 mm No. of shelves (standard/max): 2/4 Min. distance between shelves:50 mm Max. load of shelves: Voltage/Power: Ext. dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Safety class: TIN-TN200B / TIN-TN200S 200 litres +300/0.1°C ±4°C ±0.7°C 20 min 650×640×495 mm 2/9 50 mm 20 kg 230 V / 2100 W 940×905×660 mm 103 kg 3.1 10 kg 230 V / 700 W 460×685×530 mm 40 kg 3.1 400×420×330 mm 2/5 50 mm 15 kg 230 V / 1000 W 690×635×470 mm 53 kg 3.1 520×495×450 mm 2/6 50 mm 20 kg 230 V / 1900 W 815×750×600 mm 74 kg 3.1 Model 1 TIN-TN30B TIN-TN50B TIN-TN50S TIN-TN115B Order No. 10 13 73080 10 13 75080 10 13 75000 10 13 71150 Model TIN-TN115S 2 TIN-TN200B TIN-TN200S Order No. 10 13 71151 10 13 70200 10 13 70201 Forced air ovens The forced air ovens TIN-TF 50, -TF 120,- TF 200 and -TF 400 control very efficiently the temperature starting from 10°C above ambient temperature up to 300°C. The PID controller, with wide backlit color display, clearly shows in every moment the temperature set and that one inside as well as other parameters. The forced air circulation, adjustable in three levels (High, Medium, Low), guarantees a perfect air replacement and homogeneity of temperature in every parts of the chamber. A through hole of 5 mm diam- eter supplied as standard on the top side of the oven permits to introduce an external probe for the check or certification of the temperature. All models are available as Basic Series and Super Series. Basic Series • 7 programs × 10 program steps • Repeatable work cycles • Large backlit LCD display • Easy to read symbols • Timer and continuous function • Visual and acoustic alarm • Fan speed control • Delay of the program start • Safety temperature to protect the sample SUPER series • New generation of color touch screen displays with user-friendly screens and icons • 8 programs with 8 steps storable, • USB flash drive • Easy operation and readability Continued on next page 3 534

536

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves TIN-TF50B / TIN-TF50S 50 litres +300/0.1°C ±2% TIN-TF120B / TIN-TF120S TIN-TF200B / TIN-TF200S TIN-TF400B / TIN-TF400S 120 litres +300/0.1°C ±2% ±0.3°C 24 min Technical data: Volume: Max. temperature/resolution: Temp. homogeneity at 37°C: Temperature variation at 37°C: ±0.3°C Heating time at 37°C: 20 min 99:59/continuous operation 99:59/continuous operation 99:59/continuous operation 99:59/continuous operation Timer: Int. dimension (W×H×D): 400×415×310 mm No. of shelves (standard/max): 2/5 Min. distance between shelves: 50 mm Max. load of shelves: Voltage/Power: Ext. dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Safety class: 1000×800×500 mm 2/9 50 mm 20 kg 230 V / 3200 W 1285×1060×750 mm 160 kg 3.1 520×530×435 mm 2/7 50 mm 20 kg 230 V / 1900 W 810×750×690 mm 74 kg 3.1 645×650×495 mm 2/9 50 mm 20 kg 230 V / 2400 W 945×870×755 mm 103 kg 3.1 15 kg 230 V / 980 W 690×635×570 mm 54 kg 3.1 200 litres +300/0.1°C ±2% ±0.4°C 30 min 400 litres +300/0.1°C ±2% ±0.5°C 50 min co d e b e w WW4HV023 co d e b e w WWHXJ004 Model 3 TIN-TF50B TIN-TF50S TIN-TF120B TIN-TF120S Order No. 10 13 70500 10 13 70501 10 13 70120 10 13 70121 Model TIN-TF200B TIN-TF200S TIN-TF400B TIN-TF400S Order No. 10 13 70022 10 13 70023 10 13 70040 10 13 70041 Heating and Drying Cabinets, Thermo Scientific The heating cabinets of the Thermo Scientific™ Heratherm™ series are available as tab- letop units with 60, 100, or 180 l interior volume, or as floor units with 400 or 750 l interior volume. Choose between three equipment variants, each of which either with natural convection or air circulation. • Very high energy efficiency, reduced heat dissipation • Programmable timer • Small footprint • Flexible shelf system for double the number of shelves and thus utility space • Excellent spatial and temporal temperature stability • Automatic optical and acoustical overtemperature alarm • Cable duct in rear wall • Very low outer wall temperatures • Easy-to-read vacuum fluorescence display • Convenient programming thanks to intuitive control • Easy to clean thanks to construction free of sharp edges, and tray holder To see our large portfolio of models and accessories, please enter webcode WW4HV023 to access our online catalogue. Laboratory Microwave Equipment, Landgraf Laboratory microwave unit MW 5000 These microwave units are optimized for use in the laboratory. Contrary to household equipment, they have the following characteristics: Exhaust air outlet The exhaust air is removed via an air outlet fitting which can be connected to an air ex- tractor. A condensation cooler can be mounted in the exhaust air stream to condensate vapors over a collection basin. Media fittings Two 13-mm hole connections are included for attaching hoses for feeding in media, ex- tractions, and cooling agents. When a microwave unit is operated with no or very little material loaded in it, the unit may be damaged because the energy is not absorbed. For discharge of excess energy, the laboratory microwave unit 5000 may optionally be equipped with a flow cooler. Magnetic mixer (5100) The microwave unit 5100 is equipped with a centrally arranged magnetic mixer. The ad- justable speed range of the mixer is 50 to 1200 rpm. Technical data: HF power: Internal dimensions (W × D × H): External dimensions (W × D × H): 580 × 530 × 343 mm Air extractor connection: Connected load: Material chamber: Material housing: DN 50 220 – 240 V/ 50 Hz, 1500 W Stainless steel with ceramic base Stainless steel 1000 Watt 370 × 385 × 230 mm, 34 l Article Laboratory microwave unit 5000 Laboratory microwave unit 5100 with magnetic mixer Order No. 10 67 23205 10 67 23206 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 535

537

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, Sterilizers, Microwaves co d e b e w WWQ7T017 co d e b e w WWQGZ019 Temperature control optional Article Temperature control unit PT 100 Accessories Article Continuous cooler Condensation cooler PreeKem Topex, Zefa Order No. 10 67 23204 Order No. 41 67 73130 41 67 73120 New innovative microwave laboratory system by Preekem. Advanced design combined with the accurate temperature and pressure control guarantees better results faster. With a volume of 56 litres, the large chamber has sufficient room for up to 40 sample vessels. The chamber design reflects the microwaves directly on the samples, increasing diges- tion, efficiency, and quality. • Multi-wall explosion-protected steel safety door with video monitoring • Container made of high-quality 3M-DyneonTM TFM and a reinforced glass fiber cover made of Victrex PEEK for a longer useful life • With overpressure valve and safety cap for two-stage overpressure protection • Dual reaction control More accuracy for the measuring results thanks to immersion sensor inside the sam- ples High-temperature melting point sensor for precise real-time pressure measurement • Two IR measurements of the floor temperature per rotor rotation and full vessel contin- uous scanning • Intuitive software solutions - Easy-to-program digestion process: Pre-installed data re- cords for a multitude of samples can quickly be adjusted to your own requirements KJ-100 Rotor KJ-160 Rotor GT-240 Rotor GT-400 Rotor Type 10 Quantity containers ml 100 Tube capacity Max. working pressure psi 900 Max. tolerance pressure psi 2200 Max. operating temp. °C 260 Order No. 40 60 300 1500 200 10 83 21860 16 100 525 1750 240 10 83 23829 15 100 750 1750 250 10 83 21859 10 83 29471 Safety Drying Ovens Drying and Heating Chambers Avantgarde.Line, BINDER BINDER drying chambers with natural convection or forced convection are renowned for their high quality and reliability. Thanks to their extensive redevelopment, these all-round- ers are now even more firmly focused on addressing the requirements involved in drying or heating samples. What’s more, in addition to the new design, convenient operation, and efficiency of these units, the latest APT.line™ technology offers outstanding temper- ature accuracy to give this new generation of incubators real appeal. Equipment: • Temperature range series ED: 5–6°C via RT up to 300°C • Temperature range series FD, FED: 10°C via RT up to 300°C • Controller with LCD display • Electromechanical control of the exhaust air damper • 2 chromium-plated racks • Integrated temperature selection limiter class 2 (DIN 12880) with optical alarm • USB connection for saving the data Series ED: Drying chambers with natural convection Model Interior vol. l ED 56 57 ED 115 114 ED 260 254 ED 720 741 Order No. Outer W × H × D mm 560×625×565 10 40 10333 710×735×605 10 40 10335 810×965×760 10 40 10339 1165×1590×870 1000×1300×570 10 40 10341 Inner W × H × D mm 360×420×380 510×530×425 610×760×550 536 Continued on next page

538

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Safety Drying Ovens Series FD: Drying chambers with forced convection Model Interior vol. l FD 56 60 FD 115 116 FD 260 259 FD 720 741 Order No. Outer W × H × D mm 560×625×565 10 40 10303 710×735×605 10 40 10305 810×965×760 10 40 10309 1165×1590×870 1000×1300×570 10 40 10311 Inner W × H × D mm 400×440×345 550×550×385 650×780×515 Series FED: Heating chambers with forced convection and enhanced timer functions Order No. Model Interior vol. l FED 56 60 FED 115 116 FED 260 259 FED 720 741 Outer W × H × D mm 560×625×565 10 40 10295 710×735×605 10 40 10293 810×965×760 10 40 10299 1165×1590×870 1000×300×570 10 40 10301 Inner W × H × D mm 400×440×345 550×550×385 650×780×515 You will find further model sizes in the Classic.Line Incubators, Cooled Incubators Drying Ovens, LAT Bench-top unit for incubating smeared or dipped slides or conventional petri dishes, incl. insert rack. • 25°C to 45°C • ±1°C • 220 V / 110 V / 12 V • 26 W • Protection class II • Thermometer in the unit • Plexiglas front panel • External W×H×D: 310 × 155 × 168 mm • Internal W×H×D: 220 × 120 × 150 mm Article Drying oven LATURA Order No. 41 80 50000 co d e b e w WWW4U037 co d e b e w WW91A002 Incubators, Memmert Incubators for research, medicine, pharmaceutics, and food technology. Organic materi- al requires particularly gentle heating. For this reason, heating and control of these incu- bators have been optimised specifically for low temperatures of up to +80°C. To avoid overshoots, the temperature is increased within a very narrow range and maintained ac- curately at the setpoint value. • With large area all-round heating • Pre-heating of the fresh air • With interior glass door Medical product certification: Memmert Im incubators are class I. Until the entry into force of Regulation (EU) 2017/745 (MDR), Memmert Class I medical devices will be placed on the market in accordance with EU Directive 93/42 / EEC. After the regulation comes into force, Memmert will market Class I medical devices in accordance with MDR. In accordance with their intended use, Memmert Im incubators may be used for controlling the temperature of flushing and infu- sion solutions and contrast agents. All of the product information below also applies to the medical devices Im. IN and IF incubators N = Natural convection F = Forced air circulation 2 model variants: SingleDISPLAY and TwinDISPLAY (a detailed description of the two variants can be found on page 531) Technical data: Work temperature range: at least 5°C (UN), at least 10°C (UF) bove room temperature up to +80°C +20°C up to +80°C 0.1°C 230 V 50/60 Hz (other voltages to special order) Set temperature range: Setting accuracy: Electrical supply: co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 537 Continued on next page

539

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Type Order No. Incubators, Cooled Incubators Available models and sizes with internal glass door and fully insulated stainless steel external door: Series IN / INm1) 2) With natural convection and microprocessor PID control. Wght approx. kg 48 48 57 57 66 66 76 76 96 96 110 110 161 161 217 217 Vol. Outer W×H×D Inner W×H×D approx. l mm mm 32 585×704×434 400×320×250 32 IN30m 585×704×434 400×320×250 53 IN55 585×784×514 400×400×330 53 IN55m 585×784×514 400×400×330 74 IN75 585×944×514 400×560×330 74 IN75m 585×944×514 400×560×330 108 IN110 745×864×584 560×480×400 108 IN110m 745×864×584 560×480×400 161 IN160 745×1104×584 560×720×400 161 IN160m 745×1104×584 560×720×400 256 IN260 824×1183×684 640×800×500 256 IN260m 824×1183×684 640×800×500 IN450 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 IN450m 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 IN750 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 IN750m 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 10 26 06201 10 26 06301 10 26 06202 10 26 06302 10 26 06203 10 26 06303 10 26 06204 10 26 06304 10 26 06205 10 26 06305 10 26 06206 10 26 06306 10 26 06207 10 26 06307 10 26 06208 10 26 06308 P rating approx. W 1600 1600 1000 1000 1250 1250 1400 1400 1600 1600 1700 1700 1800 1800 2000 2000 1 IN30 Series IF / IFm1) 2) With forced air circulation and microprocessor PID control. Type Inner W×H×D Outer W×H×D Vol. approx. l mm mm 32 400×320×250 IF30 585×704×434 32 400×320×250 IF30m 585×704×434 53 400×400×330 IF55 585×784×514 53 400×400×330 IF55m 585×784×514 74 400×560×330 IF75 585×944×514 74 400×560×330 IF75m 585×944×514 108 560×480×400 IF110 745×864×584 108 560×480×400 IF110m 745×864×584 161 IF160 745×1104×584 560×720×400 161 IF160m 745×1104×584 560×720×400 256 824×1183×684 640×800×500 256 IF260m 824×1183×684 640×800×500 IF450 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 IF450m 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 IF750 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 IF750m 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 2 IF260 Wght approx. kg 48 48 57 57 66 66 76 76 96 96 110 110 161 161 217 217 P rating approx. W 1600 1600 1000 1000 1250 1250 1400 1400 1600 1600 1700 1700 1800 1800 2000 2000 Order No. 10 26 06211 10 26 07211 10 26 06212 10 26 07212 10 26 06213 10 26 07213 10 26 06214 10 26 07214 10 26 06215 10 26 07215 10 26 06216 10 26 07216 10 26 06217 10 26 07217 10 26 06218 10 26 07218 Type Inner W×H×D Outer W×H×D Series INplus / INmplus With natural convection and microprocessor PID control. Wght approx. kg 48 48 57 57 66 66 76 76 96 96 110 110 161 161 217 217 Vol. approx. l mm mm 32 400×320×250 IN30plus 585×704×434 32 400×320×250 IN30mplus 585×704×434 53 400×400×330 IN55plus 585×784×514 53 400×400×330 IN55mplus 585×784×514 74 400×560×330 IN75plus 585×944×514 74 400×560×330 IN75mplus 585×944×514 108 560×480×400 IN110plus 745×864×584 108 560×480×400 IN110mplus 745×864×584 161 IN160plus 745×1104×584 560×720×400 161 IN160mplus 745×1104×584 560×720×400 256 824×1183×684 640×800×500 256 IN260mplus 824×1183×684 640×800×500 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 IN450plus IN450mplus 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 IN750plus IN750mplus 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 3 IN260plus Order No. P rating approx. W 1600 10 26 06221 1600 10 26 07221 1000 10 26 06222 1000 10 26 07222 1250 10 26 06223 1250 10 26 07223 1400 10 26 06224 1400 10 26 07224 1600 10 26 06225 1600 10 26 07225 1700 10 26 06226 1700 10 26 07226 1800 10 26 06227 1800 10 26 07227 2000 10 26 06228 2000 10 26 07228 Continued on next page 1 2 3 538

540

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Incubators, Cooled Incubators Series IFplus / IFmplus1) 2) With forced air circulation and microprocessor PID control. Type Inner W×H×D Outer W×H×D Vol. approx. l mm mm 32 400×320×250 585×704×434 32 400×320×250 IF30mplus 585×704×434 53 400×400×330 IF55plus 585×784×514 53 400×400×330 IF55mplus 585×784×514 74 400×560×330 IF75plus 585×944×514 74 400×560×330 IF75mplus 585×944×514 108 560×480×400 IF110plus 745×864×584 108 560×480×400 IF110mplus 745×864×584 161 IF160plus 745×1104×584 560×720×400 161 IF160mplus 745×1104×584 560×720×400 256 IF260plus 824×1183×684 640×800×500 256 IF260mplus 824×1183×684 640×800×500 IF450plus 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 IF450mplus 1224×1247×784 1040×720×600 449 IF750plus 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 IF750mplus 1224×1720×784 1040×1200×600 749 4 IF30plus Wght approx. kg 48 48 57 57 66 66 76 76 96 96 110 110 161 161 217 217 P rating approx. W 1600 1600 1000 1000 1250 1250 1400 1400 1600 1600 1700 1700 1800 1800 2000 2000 Order No. 10 26 06231 10 26 07231 10 26 06232 10 26 07232 10 26 06233 10 26 07233 10 26 06234 10 26 07234 10 26 06235 10 26 07235 10 26 06236 10 26 07236 10 26 06237 10 26 07237 10 26 06238 10 26 07238 4 1) External dimensions: Depth without door handle, depth of door handle 56 mm 2) Inner dimensions (Depth): On models with forced air circulation the depth is reduced by 39 mm for the fan. All incubators comply with the strict requirements of DIN 12880: 2007-05 Accessories for models IN / INm / IF/ IFm / INplus / INmplus / IFplus / IFmplus Stainless steel grid (standard version: size 30 and 55: 1 piece, size 75 to 750: 2 pieces) for type Qty max. Order No. 260 450/750 8/14 for type Qty max. Order No. 10 26 01556 10 26 01557 9 Stainless steel shelves, perforated for type Qty max. Order No. 30 3 55/75 4/6 110/160 5/8 30 3 55/75 4/6 110/160 5/8 30 3 55/75 4/6 110/160 5/8 10 26 01551 10 26 01552 10 26 05008 10 26 01561 10 26 01562 10 26 04031 10 26 01571 10 26 01572 10 26 01574 for type Qty max. Order No. 260 450/750 8/14 9 10 26 01566 10 26 01567 Stainless steel slide-in drip tray, non-perforated, 15 mm rim (may impair the spatial distribution of the temperature) for type Qty max. Order No. for type Qty max. Order No. 260 450/750 8/14 9 10 26 01576 10 26 01577 An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right to make changes in technical specifications. Dimensions subject to confirmation. All performance data are typical mean values for serial devices. Microbiological Incubators, Thermo Scientific Heratherm™ Microbiological incubators The microbiological incubators of the Thermo Scientific™ Heratherm™ series are availa- ble in four different models with three different convection technologies and in six different sizes with interior volumes between 18 and 700 litres. co d e b e w WW4HV021 • Excellent temperature constancy with automatic alarm in case of temperature deviations to protect your valuable samples • Thanks to the interior glass door, the samples can be observed without affecting the • User-friendly temperature setting with intuitive operating elements and large, easy-to- temperature read display • Rounded corners and easy-to-remove shelves for convenient cleaning • Compact design for a small footprint • Easy to stack – without tools or stacking frame • Efficient use of the interior thanks to a flexible shelf system To see our large portfolio of models and accessories, please enter webcode WW4HV021 to access our online catalogue. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 539

541

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WW91A005 1 2 540 Incubators, Cooled Incubators Cooled Incubators / Storage Cooled Incubators, Memmert Series ICP / ICPeco compressor cooled with TwinDISPLAY (a detailed description of the model variant can be found on page 531) The compressor-cooled incubators with the unique ControlCOCKPIT for quick and intuitive operation. Ideal for temperatures around the freezing point and below. For quick, precise change from heating to cooling phases in ramp operation. Low-noise! Turbulence-free internal air-ventilation, separation of the thermal jacket from the interior prevents the occurrence of drying out the loads through the cooling-device. Highly effi- cient automatic defrosting system. Segment-dependent control of the internal air-venti- lation in 10% steps (from 10 to 100%). 2 stainless steel grids are supplied. Series IPP (SingleDISPLAY) and IPPplus (TwinDISPLAY) Peltier-cooled (a detailed description of the two model variants can be found on page 531) The cooled incubators with the unique ControlCOCKPIT for quick and intuitive oper- ation. With Peltier technology for transition-free heating and cooling within a single sys- tem. Environmentally compatible, low energy consumption. Low vibration and nearly noiseless. Forced ventilation by Peltier fan. Energy-saving, refrigerant-free Peltier heating/cooling system (heat-pump principle). 1 stainless steel grid each is supplied with the model siz- es 30 and 55; on models of sizes 110 to 750 there are 2 stainless steel grids. Series IPS Peltier-cooled with SingleDISPLAY(a detailed description of the model variant can be found on page 531) Sample storage, incubation and cooling in the food industry, medicine, cosmetics in- dustry or pharmacy: The storage cooled incubators with Peltier elements heat and cool seamlessly in one system. Forced ventilation by Peltier fan. Energy-saving, refrigerant-free Peltier heating/cooling system (heat-pump principle). 2 stainless steel grids are comprised in the delivery. Technical Data: Type series ICP/ ICPeco -12°C up to +60°C Work temperature range: Not suitable for permanent storage at minus temperatures. In case of permanent operation, icing of the glass door may occur. Set temperature range: Setting accuracy: Power supply: Type series IPP/ IPPplus Work temperature range without light: 0°C (at least 20°C below room temperature) up -12°C up to +60°C 0.1°C 230 V, 50 Hz (other voltages on request) Arbeitstemperaturbereich mit Licht: Set temperature range: Setting accuracy: Power supply: Type series IPS Work/set temperature range: Setting accuracy: Power supply: Series ICP/ICPeco to +70°C +10°C up to +40°C 0°C up to +70°C 0.1°C 230 V, 50/60 Hz (other voltages on request) +14°C up to +45°C 0.1°C 230 V, 50/60 Hz (other voltages on request) mm Type Outer W×H×D Inner W×H×D Vol. ap- prox. l mm 108 745×1233×584 560×480×400 824×1552×684 640×800×500 256 1224×1467×784 1040×720×600 449 1224×1950×784 1040×1200×600 749 108 ICP110eco 745×1233×584 560×480×400 ICP260eco 824×1552×684 640×800×500 256 ICP450eco 1224×1467×784 1040×720×600 449 ICP750eco 1224×1950×784 1040×1200×600 749 External dimensions: depth without door handle, depth of door handle 56 mm Interior: depth less 33 mm for the fan P rating approx. W 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 Wght approx. kg 113 157 217 249 113 157 217 249 ICP110 ICP260 ICP450 1 ICP750 Order No. 10 26 01101 10 26 02602 10 26 04501 10 26 07501 10 26 01106 10 26 02606 10 26 04506 10 26 07506 Continued on next page

542

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Incubators, Cooled Incubators Series IPP/IPPplus Type Order No. Inner W×H×D Outer W×H×D Vol. approx. l mm mm 32 400×320×250 585×704×506 IPP30 53 400×400×330 585×784×586 IPP55 108 560×480×400 745×864×656 IPP110 640×800×500 256 824×1183×756 IPP260 824×1720×756 640×1200×500 384 IPP410 1224×1720×856 1040×1200×600 749 IPP750 1124×1720×1107 1040×1200×850 1060 IPP1060 32 585×704×506 IPP30plus 400×320×250 53 IPP55plus 585×784×586 400×400×330 108 IPP110plus 745×864×656 560×480×400 2 IPP260plus 824×1183×756 256 640×800×500 IPP410plus 824×1720×756 640×1200×500 384 IPP750plus 1224×1720×856 1040×1200×600 749 IPP1060plus 1124×1720×1107 1040×1200×850 1060 External dimensions: depth without door handle, depth of door handle 56 mm Interior: depth less 10 mm for the fan - Peltier Series IPS P rating approx. W 140 275 550 820 1030 1300 1500 140 275 550 820 1030 1300 1500 Wght approx. kg 40 52 78 114 157 230 255 40 52 78 114 157 230 255 10 26 00303 10 26 00553 10 26 01103 10 26 02603 10 26 04103 10 26 07503 10 26 01063 10 26 00304 10 26 00554 10 26 01104 10 26 02604 10 26 04104 10 26 07504 10 26 01066 Type Outer W×H×D mm Vol. approx. l 256 3 IPS750 1224×1726×874 1040×1200×600 749 Inner W×H×D mm 640×800×500 IPS260 824×1183×774 Wght approx. kg 114 230 P rating approx. W 550 550 Order No. 10 26 02605 10 26 07505 External dimensions: depth without door handle, depth of door handle 56 mm Interior: depth less 10 mm for the fan - Peltier Accessories Stainless steel grids (standard version: size 30 and 55: 1 piece, size 110 to 750: 2 pieces) for type Qty max. 30 3 55/75 4/6 110/160 5/8 260 10 26 01556 450/410/750 8/14/14 10 26 01557 10 26 01551 10 26 01552 10 26 05008 Qty max. 9 Order No. Order No. for type 3 Order No. Stainless steel shelves, perforated for type Qty max. 30 3 55/75 4/6 110/160 5/8 10 26 01561 10 26 01562 10 26 04031 for type Order No. 260 10 26 01566 450/410/750 8/14/14 10 26 01567 Qty max. 9 An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right to make changes in technical specifications. Dimensions subject to confirmation. All performance data are typical mean values for serial devices. Thermo Scientific RI-150 and RI-250 Cooled Incubators, Thermo Scientific The Thermo Scientific RI cooled incubators are available as benchtop or standalone units and ensure precise temperature conditions in a range of 4 to 60°C for sample storing, incubation, quality control and test applications. co d e b e w WW4HV032 • Microprocessor control for precise temperature adjustment • Timer function for automatic switch-on and off • Over and undertemperature alarm as well as overtemperature switch-off • Easy calibration routine • Easily accessible lead-through for inserting monitoring probes or cables • RS232 data interface for temperature monitoring (software not comprised in the scope of delivery) • Flexible shelf system • Glass window • Automatic defrosting Article RI-150, tabletop unit incl. 2 insoles 4 RI-250, floor unit incl. 3 deposits and lockable roll co d e b e w Chamber vol. l 150 Inner W × D × H mm 550×450×615 652×605×1015 10 79 21500 Outer W × D × H mm Order No. 250 550×450×1015 652×605×1415 10 79 22500 4 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 541

543

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Incubators, Cooled Incubators Incubators and Cooling Incubators, BINDER BINDER incubators and cooling incubators stand for optimal incubation and for results that are reproducible in every routine test – even under high batch throughputs in long- term operation. Equipment series BD/BF: • Electronically controlled APT.line™ preheating chamber • Temperature range: from 5°C above room temperature to 100°C • Independent temperature safety device class 3.1 (DIN 12880) with optical and audible temperature alarm • RS 422 interface for use with APT-COM™ DataControlSystem communication software 1 Series BD Incubators with gravity convection Type Interior vol. l BD 23 20 BD 400 400 Outer W × H × D mm 435×495×520 41 40 11087 1235×1025×765 1000×800×500 41 40 11073 Inner W × H × D mm 222×330×277 Order No. Series BF Incubators with forced convection Type Interior vol. l BF 400 400 Outer W × H × D mm 1235×1025×765 1000×800×500 41 40 30241 Inner W × H × D mm Order No. Equipment series KB/KT: • Temperature control through state-of-the-art Peltier cooling system and efficient tubular heating element 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWQGZ003 co d e b e w WWQGZ020 542 • Temperature range KT 4°C to 100°C • Temperature range KB -10°C to 100°C • Variable time and weekday programming • Independent temperature safety device class 3.1 (DIN 12880) with visual and acoustic alarm • Inner glass door 2 Series KB Refrigerated incubators with compressor technology Type Order No. Interior vol. l KB 23 20 KB 53 53 KB 115 115 KB 240 247 KB 400 400 KB 720 698 3 Series KT refrigerated incubator with Peltier technology Type Inner W × H × D Outer W × H × D mm mm 222×330×277 435×620×520 41 40 21056 400×400×330 635×835×580 10 40 10199 600×480×400 835×1025×650 10 40 10397 650×785×485 925×1465×800 10 40 10202 925×1950×805 650×1270×485 10 40 10203 1250×1925×885 970×1250×576 10 40 10204 Interior vol. l 52 102 163 Outer W × H × D mm 660×635×630 860×715×655 860×1025×655 Inner W × H × D mm 400×400×334 600×480×355 600×765×355 Order No. 10 40 10250 10 40 10209 10 40 10289 KT 53 KT 115 KT 170 Incubators Avantgarde.Line, BINDER The completely redesigned Avantgarde.Line incubators with natural convection or forced convection are now the perfect solution when it comes to meeting growth and incubation requirements. With their exceptional efficiency and perfect temperature accuracy thanks to the very latest APT.line™ technology, this new generation of incubators has real appeal. Equipment: • With APT.line technology for homogeneous temperature accuracy • Controller with LCD display • Electromechanical control of the exhaust air damper • Interior door made of safety glass (ESG) • 2 chromium-plated racks • Stackable up to 115 l • Integrated temperature selection limiter class 3.1 (DIN 12880) with optical alarm Series BD: Incubators with natural convection Temperature range: ambient temperature 5°C to 100°C Model BD 56 BD 115 BD 260 Interior vol. l 57 112 253 Outer W×H×D mm 560×625×565 710×735×605 810×965×760 Inner W×H×D mm 360×420×380 510×530×420 610×760×545 Order No. 10 40 11323 10 40 11325 10 40 11329 Continued on next page

544

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Incubators, Cooled Incubators Series BF: Incubators with forced convection Temperature range: ambient temperature 7-8°C to 100°C Model BF 56 BF 115 BF 260 Interior vol. l 59 114 257 Outer W×H×D mm 560×625×565 710×735×605 810×965×760 Inner W×H×D mm 400×440×340 550×550×380 650×780×510 Order No. 10 40 11313 10 40 11315 10 40 11319 You will find further model sizes in the Classic.Line Incubators HettCube 400 / 400 R, HETTICH With its volume and wide range of accessories the HettCube 400 incubator is well suited for all pharmaceutical, research and industrial applications. This unit is available with refrigeration and a temperature range from 0°C to +65°C (HettCube 400 R). Technical data: Outer dimensions (W×D×H): Power supply: Temperature range: Inner volume: Number of trays (scope of delivery): 710 × 825 × 1425 mm 220 – 240 V, 50 – 60 Hz 1 K above ambient temperature to +65°C (HettCube 400) 0°C to +65°C (HettCube 400 R) 310 l 3 (2 standard + 1 HTS) Article HettCube 400 HettCube 400 R Weight kg 117 128 Noise level dB(A) P 41 P 44 Order No. 10 56 16400 10 56 16405 Incubators HettCube 600 / 600 R, HETTICH With the same versatility as the 400 model, the HettCube 600 has a larger interior volume with 152 l more validated usuable space compared to the smaller model. The HettCube 600 is capable of holding up to 1,800 petri dishes. This unit is available with refrigeration and a temperature range from 0°C to +65°C (HettCube 600 R). Technical data: Outer dimensions (W×D×H): Power supply: Temperature range: 710 × 825 × 1990 mm 220 – 240 V, 50 – 60 Hz 1 K above ambient temperature to +65°C (HettCube 600) 0°C to +65°C (HettCube 600 R) 520 l 4 (3 standard + 1 HTS) Inner volume: Number of trays (scope of delivery): Article HettCube 600 HettCube 600 R Weight kg 164 175 Noise level dB(A) P 41 P 44 Order No. 10 56 16600 10 56 16605 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 543

545

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WWSB5043 Incubators, Cooled Incubators Incubators, Phoenix Instrument Natural convection incubators The processes in many typical biological laboratory applications require gentle and con- stant heating of the sample. The temperature distribution in the incubator is achieved by natural air movement. This ensures uniform growth conditions in the interior. The large glass window in the door allows permanent monitoring of the sample without having to open the door, thus avoiding unnecessary temperature loss and temperature fluctuations. The instruments with larger volume are equipped with a double door. All models are avail- able as Basic Series and Super Series. Basic Series • 7 programs × 10 program steps • Repeatable work cycles • Large backlit LCD display • Easy to read symbols • Timer and continuous function - Visual and acoustic alarm • Fan speed control • Delay of the program start • Safety temperature to protect the sample SUPER series • New generation of color touch screen displays with user-friendly screens and icons • 8 programs with 8 steps storable, • USB flash drive • Easy operation and readability TIN-IN35B TIN-IN35S 35 litres +70/0.1°C ±0.4°C ±0.3°C 22 min TIN-IN55B TIN-IN55S 55 litres +70/0.1°C ±0.5°C ±0.3°C 25 min TIN-IN16B TIN-IN16S 16 litres +70/0.1°C ±0.4°C ±0.3°C 18 min 99:59/cont. operation 99:59/cont. operation 99:59/cont. operation 99:59/cont. operation 99:59/cont. operation 270×230×255 mm 2/6 25 mm 5 kg 230 V / 85 W 530×370×400 mm 23 kg 2 360×300×320 mm 2/6 30 mm 7,5 kg 230 V / 125 W 620×440×460 mm 33 kg 2 400×360×385 mm 2/5 50 mm 10 kg 230 V / 250 W 660×500×545 mm 42 kg 2 520×460×500 mm 2/7 50 mm 10 kg 230 V / 350 W 780×610×645 mm 61 kg 2 610×600×575 mm 2/9 50 mm 10 kg 230 V / 600 W 875×755×710 mm 77 kg 2 TIN-IN120B TIN-IN120S 120 litres +70/0.1°C ±0.5°C ±0.3°C 30 min TIN-IN200B TIN-IN200S 200 litres +70/0.1°C ±0.5°C ±0.3°C 35 min Model 1 TIN-IN16B TIN-IN16S 2 TIN-IN35B TIN-IN35S TIN-IN55B Order No. 10 13 71600 10 13 71601 10 13 73500 10 13 73501 10 13 75500 Model TIN-IN55S TIN-IN120B TIN-IN120S 3 TIN-IN200B TIN-IN200S Order No. 10 13 75501 10 13 71206 10 13 71207 10 13 72006 10 13 72007 Forced air incubators Our new forced air incubators control the temperature up to 80°C very efficiently. It’s possible in addition, set a program at 130°C which allows the thermally sterilization of the chamber. The full wide internal glass door ensures perfect observation of samples without unnecessary and expensive heat losses. The forced ventilation, adjustable on three levels (High, Medium, Low) guarantees a perfect air exchange and an excellent temperature homogeneity in all points of the chamber. All models are available as Basic Series and Super Series. Basic Series • 7 programs × 10 program steps • Repeatable work cycles • Large backlit LCD display • Easy to read symbols • Timer and continuous function • Visual and acoustic alarm • Fan speed control • Delay of the program start • Safety temperature to protect the sample SUPER series • New generation of color touch screen displays with user-friendly screens and icons • 8 programs with 8 steps storable, • USB flash drive • Easy operation and readability Continued on next page 1 2 Technical data: Volume: Max. temperature/resolution: Temp. homogeneity at 37°C: Temperature variation at 37°C: Heating time at 37°C: Timer: Int. dimension (W×H×D): No. of shelves (standard/max): Min. distance between shelves: Max. load of shelves: Voltage/Power: Ext. dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Safety class: 3 4 544

546

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Incubators, Cooled Incubators Technical data: Volume: Max. temperature/resolution: Temp. homogeneity at 37°C: Temperature variation at 37°C: Heating time at 37°C: Timer: Int. dimension (W×H×D): No. of shelves (standard/max): Min. distance between shelves: Max. load of shelves: Voltage/Power: Ext. dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Safety class: TIN-IF120B TIN-IF120S 120 litres +80/0.1°C ±0.4°C ±0.1°C 40 min 99:59/cont. operation 520×530×435 mm 2/7 50 mm 20 kg 230 V / 600 W 810×750×690 mm 74 kg 2 TIN-IF200B TIN-IF200S 200 litres +80/0.1°C ±0.4°C ±0.2°C 45 min 99:59/cont. operation 645×650×495 mm 2/9 50 mm 20 kg 230 V / 700 W 945×870×755 mm 103 kg 2 TIN-IF400B TIN-IF400S 400 litres +80/0.1°C ±0.5°C ±0.3°C 55 min 99:59/cont. operation 1000×800×500 mm 2/10 50 mm 20 kg 230 V / 1500 W 1285×1060×750 mm 160 kg 2 Model TIN-IF120B TIN-IF120S TIN-IF200B Order No. 10 13 71212 10 13 71225 10 13 72004 Model TIN-IF200S 4 TIN-IF400B TIN-IF400S Order No. 10 13 72005 10 13 74002 10 13 74003 Shaking equipment, incubators see page 679 CO2 Incubators CO2-Incubators with Hot Air Sterilization, BINDER Series CB: CO2 incubators with hot air sterilization and heat sterilizable CO2 sensor Equipment: • Electronically controlled APT.line™ preheating chamber • Temperature range from 4°C above ambient temperature to 60°C • Intuitive control via touchscreen • Hot-air sterilizable CO₂ sensor with infrared technology • Failsafe CO2 autodiagnosis system for pH protection of the cell cultures • CO₂ gas mixing jet with Venturi effect • Optimised double-pan humidification system with condensation protection Type CB 60 1 CB 170 CB 260 Interior vol. l 53 170 210 Outer W×H×D mm 580×720×545 680×870×715 740×1020×785 Inner W×H×D mm 400×400×330 560×600×505 620×750×575 Order No. 10 40 10088 10 40 10131 10 40 10147 co d e b e w WWQGZ008 1 c o d e b e w WW91A003 CO2 Incubators, Memmert The CO2 incubator ICOmed convinces in terms of safety and user friendliness: Thanks to battery-buffered ControlCOCKPIT, the operating display, logging and CO2 control are fully functional even during a power failure; all parameters are logged fail-safe in conform- ity with FDA requirements. Visual and acoustic alarm as well as additional alarm notifica- tion to mobile phones if the individually adjustable temperature, CO2, O2, or humidity ranges are exceeded. The interior chamber has rounded corners for easy cleaning; togeth- er with all sensors, it can be sterilised at +180°C in a 60-minute programme. The active humidity control ensures optimum protection of cell and tissue cultures. It minimises evaporation in the interior and provides for short recovery times. Medical product certification: Memmert CO2 ICOmed incubators are class IIa medical devices pursuant to EU Directive MDD 93/42/EWG until May 26, 2024 according to the transitional provisions of (EU) 2017/745 - Article 120 (2). In accordance with their intended use, Memmert CO2 ICOmed incubators may be used for generating and maintaining constant ambient conditions for applications of in-vitro fertilisation (IVF), in particular the incubation of oocytes, sperma- tozoons, and zygotes in vessels intended for IVF applications, as well as the genexpres- sion, i.e. the biosynthesis of RNA and proteins. 1 model variant: TwinDISPLAY (a detailed description of the two variants can be found on page 531) co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 545 Continued on next page

547

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers CO2 Incubators Technical data: Working temperature range: at least. 5°C above ambient temperature up to +50°C. Standard sterilisation programme: 60 minutes at 180°C (without removing the sensors) +18°C to +50°C 0.1°C Setting temperature range: Setting accuracy temperature: Setting range active humidity control: 40 to 97% rh and rh-Off Setting accuracy humidity: Setting range CO2: Setting range O2: Setting accuracy CO2: Setting accuracy O2: Power supply: 0.5% rh 0 to 20% 1 to 20% 0.1% 0.1% 230 V, 50/60 Hz (other voltages on request) 1 2 3 4 546 Available models and sizes with heated inner glass door and outer fully insulated stainless steel door: Type series ICOmed Type Outer W×H×D Inner W×H×D mm 1 ICO50med 559×791×521 400×425×330 56 2 ICO105med 719×850×591 560×480×400 107 3 ICO150med 719×1070×591 560×700×400 156 4 ICO240med 759×1180×691 600×810×500 241 mm Vol. approx. l Wght approx. kg 55 75 90 110 P rating approx. W 1000 1300 1500 1650 Order No. 10 26 09050 10 26 09105 10 26 09150 10 26 09240 External dimensions: depth without door handle (door handle depth 56 mm) Inner dimensions: depth minus 35 mm for fan Options for ICOmed models Battery-buffered ControlCOCKPIT Uninterrupted supply for the entire display unit (ControlCOCKPIT) and therefore complete documentation of all parameters even when there is a power failure. The CO2 parameter is continuously regulated. For all sizes. Article Battery-buffered ControlCOCKPIT Order No. 10 26 09302 Automatic switch-over of gas cylinders Two gas connections with quick release connectors. Suitable for all sizes. Article Automatic switch-over of gas cylinders Electropolished interior space Article for size 50 for size 105 for size 150 for size 240 Order No. 10 26 09301 Order No. 10 26 09401 10 26 09402 10 26 09403 10 26 09404 Active microprocessor humidification and dehumidification control (40 – 97% rh) Including digital indication and auto-diagnostic system; ensures even more rapid reaching of set humidity and very short recovery times while avoiding condensate formation. Hu- midity supply with water (only use demineralized / fully demineralized water with a con- ductivity of 5 to 10 µS/cm and a pH value between 5 and 7; from an external tank) by a self-priming pump; integral bacteria block by generating hotsteam, dehumidifying via sterile filter. For all sizes. Article Active microprocessor humidification and dehumidification control (40 – 97% rh) 10 26 09307 Order No. Control of oxygen concentration By introducing nitrogen, adjustment range from 1% to 20% O2, setting accuracy 0,1%. Requires active microprocessor control for humidifying and dehumidifying. Incl. N2 con- nection set: hose with connection coupling and hose clamp. Suitable for all sizes. Article Control of oxygen concentration Order No. 10 26 09306 Peltier cooling unit Allows for an operating temperature of 37°C also with higher environmental temperatures of up to 35°C. Article for size 50 for size 105 for size 150 for size 240 Order No. 10 26 09501 10 26 09502 10 26 09503 10 26 09504 Continued on next page

548

CO2 Incubators Interior doors with glass cut-out Article for size 105 for size 150 for size 240 Accessories for ICOmed models Stainless steel perforated shelves for type 50 105/150 240 max. Qty. 5 6/10 12 Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Order No. 10 26 09522 10 26 09523 10 26 09524 Order No. 10 26 09531 10 26 09532 10 26 09534 An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right to make changes in technical specifications. Dimensions subject to confirmation. All performance data are typical mean values for serial devices. Thermo Scientific™ Heracell™ VIOS160 i CO2 Incubator with Cell Locker™ System, Thermo Scientific co d e b e w WW4HV031 The Thermo Scientific™ Heracell™ VIOS160 i CO2 incubator with the Thermo Scientific™ Cell Locker™ system is an innovative solution which features removable protected cham- bers developed for improved culturing efficiency and enhanced safety for sensitive cul- tures. The incubator chamber is divided into six individual autoclavable polycarbonate chambers, so that each different cell type or project is isolated. Each Cell Locker chamber has two 0.2 µm membrane filters allowing for air circulation while excluding microbial contamination. When one Cell Locker chamber is opened, the others remain intact so that the in-vitro environment is retained. • 165 l interior chamber with 6 segmented gas-tight inner doors and 3 shelves dimen- sioned for 6 individual Cell Locker chambers • THRIVE concept with active air supply ensures homogeneous stable growth conditions and shorter recovery times • Unique integrated water reservoir • Cleanroom class ISO-5 thanks to HEPA filtration • Steri-Run overnight sterilisation cycle at 180°C • iCAN touchscreen with LED display • Temperature drop in the opened Cell Locker chamber 50% lower than in the standard • The Cell Locker system provides a 50% reduction of the gas consumption from one door version with one glass door opening process • Each Cell Locker chamber accommodates 9 × T-75 cell culture vials, 20 × 6-well micro- titer plates or 24 × 96-well microtiter plates • Cell Locker chambers can be manually disinfected or autoclaved Article Heracell VIOS160 i CO2 incubator, 165 l, stainless steel interior 10 79 23125 Heracell VIOS160 i CO2 incubator, 165 l, full copper interior 10 79 22129 Pack with 6 Cell Lockers with stainless steel insert 10 79 26506 Pack with 6 Cell Lockers with copper insert 10 79 27396 To see other models, please enter webcode WW4HV031 to access our online catalogue. Order No. CO2 Incubators, Thermo Scientific Heracell™ VIOS 160i and 250i CO2 Incubators Temperature-controlled incubator with air jacket for cell and tissue cultures with the unique Thermo Scientific™ THRIVE™ concept with active air guidance for short recovery times and homogeneous growth conditions. • Working space made of electropolished stainless steel or as an option antimicrobial solid copper • Cleanroom class ISO-5 thanks to HEPA Filtration • Hot air sterilisation at 180°C, duration < 12 hours • Covered water reservoir, easy to fill and to drain, for maximum relative humidity without condensate formation • iCAN graphic touch screen with integrated data logger • State-of-the-art sturdy maintenance-free sensors, installed directly in the chamber, re- liably monitor the compliance with the target conditions • Standard equipment: autostart routine, water level alarm, USB interface, floating alarm contact, lockable ducts (42 mm Ø), door with three sections, door hinge on right side or optionally on the left, 3 solid copper or stainless steel inserts co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 547 Continued on next page

549

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WW4HV020 CO2 Incubators Technical data: Outer dimensions (W×H×D): Interior dimensions (W×H×D): Volume: Temperature range: CO2 control range: O2 control range: Relative humidity: Power supply: Heracell VIOS 160i 637 × 900 × 880 mm 470 × 607 × 576 mm Heracell VIOS 250i 774 × 968 × 934 mm 607 × 670 × 629 mm 165 l 1 to 20% +3°C above ambient to +55°C 255 l 1 to 20% 1 to 21% or 5 to 90% > 93% rH at 37°C 230 V, 50/60 Hz 230 V, 50/60 Hz Article Heracell VIOS 160i CO2 incubator, single chamber, stainless steel chamber, 165 l, TC-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 160i CO2 incubator, single chamber, copper chamber, 165 l, TC-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 160i CO2 incubator, single chamber, stainless steel chamber, 165 l, IR-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 160i CO2 incubator, single chamber, copper chamber, 165 l, IR-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 160i CO2 incubator, double chamber, stainless steel chamber, 165 l, TC-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 160i CO2 incubator, double chamber, copper chamber, 165 l, TC-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 160i CO2 incubator, double chamber, stainless steel chamber, 165 l, IR-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 160i CO2 incubator, double chamber, copper chamber, 165 l, IR-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 250i CO2 incubator, single chamber, stainless steel chamber, 255 l, TC-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 250i CO2 incubator, single chamber, copper chamber, 255 l, TC-CO2 sensor Heracell VIOS 250i CO2 incubator, single chamber, stainless steel chamber, 255 l, IR-CO2 sensor Order No. 10 79 20287 10 79 20286 10 79 20478 10 79 20476 10 79 25502 10 79 25503 10 79 25515 10 79 25517 10 79 20966 10 79 20965 10 79 20994 Heracell VIOS 250i CO2 incubator, single chamber, copper 10 79 20993 chamber, 255 l, IR-CO2 sensor Please enter the webcode WW4HV020 to see a wide range of options and more incubator models in our online catalogue. co d e b e w WWQGZ005 Vacuum Cabinets Vacuum Drying Ovens, BINDER When it comes to gentle drying, the BINDER vacuum drying oven convinces with its ac- curate temperature control. The patented BINDER expansion rack technology also en- sures optimal heat transfer. The shelves provide flexible position and make the interior of the chamber easy to clean. Equipment: • Temperature range: VD series: ambient temperature +10°C to 220°C, VDL series: ambi- ent temperature +10°C to +110°C • Program-controlled drying monitoring with automatic ventilation at the end of the pro- cess • Spring-mounted safety glass panel with shatter protection • VDL safety concept • Also available as complete system with module and vacuum pump. 1 2 548 Series VD Vacuum drying oven for non-flammable solvents Type VD 23 1 VD 56 VD 115 Interior vol. l 24 55 119 Outer W×H×D mm 523×698×413 638×815×461 743×942×581 Inner W×H×D mm 285×285×295 400×400×343 506×506×460 Order No. 10 40 10001 10 40 10002 10 40 10003 Series VDL Safety vacuum drying oven for flammable solvents Type Interior vol. l VDL 23 24 2 VDL 56 55 VDL 115 119 Outer W×H×D mm 523×698×413 638×815×461 743×942×581 Inner W×H×D mm 285×285×295 400×400×343 506×506×460 Order No. 10 40 10009 10 40 10010 10 40 10012

550

KNOWLEDGE DIRECT HEATING IN THE VACUUM DRYING OVEN Different heating concepts are possible in the vacuum drying process: Air jacket heating on the one hand and direct plate heating on the other hand. Since there is no air to conduct the heat in vacuum processes, direct contact between heater and charge is recommended to achieve good re- sults. For this reason, direct heating in the vacuum drying oven has some advantages compared to traditional air jacket heating: In vacuum drying, it provides for short heating and process times and optimum vacuum dry- ing results thanks to the direct contact to the heating elements (thermal shelves). Good heat transfer, short heating times, excellent temperature distribution values, and precise control of the parameters are major criteria for users of vacuum drying ovens. Memmert direct heating in Memmert vacuum drying ovens, for example, meets all these requirements. In these ovens, the direct heaters are cured on to the bottom of the thermal shelves, protected by an aluminium or stainless steel cover plate. In most cases, shelves for vacuum ovens are by default made of sur- face-finished anodised aluminium or stainless steel to ensure optimum temperature distribution in the vacuum on all separately heated levels. In particular for applications with highly corrosive materials, stainless steel plates should be used. Some vacuum oven manufacturers offer thermal shelves with dedicated Pt100 temperature sensors placed inside the ther- mal shelf in direct vicinity to the charge. A special connector is provided between each shelf and the rear wall so that the thermal shelves can be removed as required and plugged in on different levels. This also signifi- cantly uses the energy consumption. Since the charge is in direct contact with the heating, heat loss is avoided and the charge is heated directly via the thermal shelf. The separate control circuits react precisely to different charge volumes and the humidity of the material and evenly maintain the setpoint temperature. The benefits of direct heating compared to air jacket heating: high energy efficiency and accurate temperature values. Thermal shelves made of aluminium (W.St. 3.3547) or stainless steel (W.St. 1.4404) Integrated Pt100 temperature sensor Good to know: To get premium results from your vacuum drying oven, combine it with a speed- controlled vacuum pump. If another vacuum pump or a central vacuum supply is connected, vacuum control will be effected fully automated via solenoid valves. Silicone heating pad (with housing) Directly heated thermal shelves at Memmert co d e b e w Connector for heater and temperature sensor Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 549

551

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WW91A006 1 2 550 Vacuum Cabinets Vacuum Ovens, Memmert 1 Series VO with TwinDISPLAY (a detailed description of the model variant can be found on page 531) Reliable, comfortable and energy-efficient – that’s how vacuum drying works today. Sep- arately adjustable and directly heated thermoshelves ensure precise temperature control and, thanks to the digital pressure control, the chamber load is dried not only at high speed but also extremely gently in our powerful and robust vacuum drying oven. Multi-Level-Heating & Sensing: intelligent direct heating via individually placeable ther- moshelves with separate sensors guarantees short heating and process times in the Memmert vacuum drying oven. The control circuits react precisely to different loads or humidity and maintain a constant set temperature during vacuum drying. Thanks to the direct contact between the heating and the load, practically no heat loss occurs. Each thermoshelf can be individually calibrated. Together with the speed-controlled vacuum pump, the vacuum oven VO forms an unbeat- ably energy-efficient duo. The pump is perfectly tidied away in the matching base cabine. Technical Data: Work temperature range: Set temperature range: Setting accuracy: Power supply: at least 5°C above room temperature to +200°C +20°C up to +200°C up to 99.9: 0,1°C / from 100°C: 0.5°C 230 V, 50/60 Hz (other voltages on request) Type Outer W×H×D Inner W×H×D mm VO29 550×607×400 385×305×250 29 VO49 550×687×480 385×385×330 49 VO101 710×767×550 545×465×400 101 mm Vol. approx. l Wght approx. kg 55 83 110 P rating approx. W 820 2020 2420 Order No. 41 26 60200 41 26 60400 41 26 60500 External dimensions: depth without door handle, depth of door handle 38 mm Electrical load: with max. number of thermoshelves All vacuum ovens according to DIN 12880:2007-05 Options Premium module Premium module: comprises the switching to inert gas function (for sizes 49 and 101 only), further thermoshelf connections 1 (size 29) or 2 (size 49/101), one additional ther- moshelf (size 49/101) Article for VO29 for VO49 for VO101 Order No. 10 26 06200 10 26 06400 10 26 06500 3 Accessories Thermoshelves aluminium anodized, material 3.3547 (ASTM B209); standard version: 1 piece Article for VO29 for VO49 for VO101 Order No. 10 26 08200 10 26 08400 10 26 08500 Thermoshelves stainless steel No. 1.4404 (ASTM 316 L) for particularly corrosion-prone materials Article for VO29 for VO49 for VO101 Order No. 41 26 61428 41 26 61448 41 26 61458 Noise absorbing vacuum pump module without pump With antivibration metal plate at the bottom to accommodate the vacuum pump, including full-sight glass door, socket, signal cable and connecting hose to the vacuum oven. Article for VO29 for VO49 for VO101 Order No. 41 26 62200 41 26 62400 41 26 62500 Continued on next page

552

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Vacuum Cabinets 2 Noise absorbing vacuum pump module with pump See description above, 230 V, 50 Hz (other voltages upon request) Requires pump control or Premium module at VO. Article for VO29 for VO49 for VO101 Order No. 41 26 63200 41 26 63400 41 26 63500 Vacuum pump with chemical resistant 4-fold membrane With automatic purge process through controller of vacuum oven (signal cable and vac- uum connection - see below - are compulsory). For combination with pump control or Premium module. Article Feed rate approx. 50 Nl/min = 3.0 m³/h for VO29/49/101 Accessories Article Signal line 3 m long, for optimizing pump performance by demand-cont- rolled activation of purge of Memmert pump Vacuum-connecting tube 3 m long, from oven to Memmert pump incl. optimized connec- tion accessories Order No. 10 26 07509 Order No. 41 26 65245 41 26 66245 3 Subframe Tubular steel, black enamelled (for stacking unit consisting of vacuum oven and pump module, total height: 1650 mm) Article for VO29 for VO49 for VO101 Order No. 41 26 67200 41 26 67400 41 26 67500 An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right to make changes in technical specifications. Dimensions subject to confirmation. All performance data are typical mean values for serial devices. Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers Temperature and Humidity Chamber, LAT Stabiliy chamber and frame are perfect for ICH Q1A stability tests. Durability, package tests, accelerated aging for a wide range of applications such as pharmaceutical products / packaging; medical products / packaging; bodycare product; consumers; products and research. Standard equipment • Micro processor PID control panel with color touchscreen 9 ″ • Slot SD card for storage data • Visual and audible alarms • Password protected power switch and settings • 4.3 ″ LCD touchscreen with alarm system • Data Logger with USB port Optional accessories • Water tank • Inner glass door • Safety thermostat • Backup battery • LAN port Technical data: Temperature: Humidity range: Dew point: UR Stability: +10°C to +60°C 20°C to 90°C 5°C to 50°C ± 3% to 5% co d e b e w WWW4U106 Model PH 45 PH 70 PH 140 Vol. l 450 700 1400 co d e b e w Qty shelves 3 4 8 W × D × H mm 700×1000×1730 700×1000×1990 1400×1000×1990 Order No. 10 20 11045 10 20 11170 10 20 11140 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 551

553

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WW91A007 1 co d e b e w WWQGZ001 2 552 Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers Humidity Chambers, Memmert Ramp programming for temperature and humidity, active humidity control, and the precise temperature regulation provide for a controlled, physiologically ideal environment for the simulation of real conditions. Suitable for a wide range of applications from building phys- ics over corrosion tests to biological research. Humidity chamber HCP with TwinDISPLAY (a detailed description of the model va- riant can be found on page 531) This climate chamber offers the full range of comfort, reliability and safety. Thanks to active humidity control from 20% to 95% rh and unsurpassed homogeneity of tempera- ture and humidity over the entire interior, it is ideally suited for environmental testing, en- vironmental simulation, accelerated service life tests and 85/85 tests according to IEC 60068-2-67 and IEC 60068-2-78. The active humidity control ensures an ideal homogeneity of temperature and humidity as well as short recovery times after opening the door in this attractively priced and practi- cally maintenance-free climate chamber. In combination with heating on all six sides, in- cluding heated inner glass door, it also minimises vaporisation in the interior and thus the risk of condensed water dripping onto the test object. An aluminium thermal conductive layer supports optimum temperature distribution and serves as a heat accumulator in case of a temporary power failure. Technical Data: Work temperature range: Set temperature range: Setting accuracy: Setting range active humidity: Setting accuracy active humidity: 0.5% rh Power supply: at least 7°C above room temperature to +90°C +18°C to +90°C 0.1°C 20% rh to 95% rh and rh-Off 230 V / 115 V, 50/60 Hz Type Outer W×H×D Inner W×H×D mm mm HCP50 559×795×521 400×425×330 56 1 HCP105 719×850×591 560×480×400 107 HCP150 719×1070×591 560×700×400 156 HCP240 759×1180×691 600×810×500 241 Vol. approx. l Wght kg 55 75 90 110 Order No. P rating approx. W 230 V: 1520 W 10 26 00508 230 V: 1720 W 10 26 01058 230 V: 1800 W 10 26 01508 230 V: 1840 W 10 26 02408 External dimensions: Depth without door handle, depth of door handle 38 mm. Inner dimensions: Depth is reduced by 25 mm for the fan. Stainless steel shelves, perforated Standard version: size 50: 1 piece, sizes 105 to 240: 2 pieces for type Qty max. Order No. 240 for type Qty max. Order No. 12 10 26 05158 50 105/150 6/10 5 10 26 00158 10 26 07418 Stainless steel grids for type Qty max. Order No. 50 105/150 6/10 5 10 26 03118 10 26 04118 240 for type Qty max. Order No. 12 10 26 05118 An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right to make changes in technical specifications. Dimensions subject to confirmation. All performance data are typical mean values for serial devices. Constant Climate Chambers, BINDER The BINDER constant climate chambers for long-term stable temperature/humidity/light simulation in one chamber. They are ideal for norm-compliant work according to ICH guidelines and work independent of water supply. Equipment: • Electronically controlled APT.line™ preheating chamber with cooling system • Intuitive touchscreen controller • Independent temperature safety device class 3.1 (DIN 12880) with optical and audible temperature alarm • Access port with silicone plug Ø 30 mm, left side • Ethernet interface for communication software APT-COM™ DataControlSystem Series KBF Constant climatic chambers with large temperature and moisture range, temperature range: 0°C to 70°C, moisture range: 10% rel. moisture to 80% rel. moisture Type Interior vol. l KBF 115 102 2 KBF 240 247 KBF 720 700 KBF 1020 1020 Order No. Inner W×H×D Outer W×H×D mm mm 600×483×351 41 40 20093 880×1050×650 925×1460×800 650×785×485 10 40 10105 1250×1925×890 973×1250×576 41 40 20096 1250×1925×1145 976×1250×836 10 40 10326

554

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers Constant Climate Chambers with large Temperature/Humidity Range KBF-S Solid.Line, BINDER co d e b e w WWQGZ022 The new Solid.Line KBF-S climate chamber is a custom-made solution for long-term testing and accelerated stability testing for pharmaceutical products in accordance with the ICH Q1A guideline. The corrosion-free and condensation-free interior also ensures exceptionally stable temperature and moisture levels, even when fully loaded. Features: • Temperature range: 0 °C to 70 °C • Humidity range: 20% to 80% RH • APT.line™ preheating chamber technology • Humidity regulation with capacitive humidity sensor and steam humidification • LCD to display temperature and humidity along with additional information and alarms Order No. Model KBF-S 115 KBF-S 240 KBF-S 720 KBF-S 1020 Interior vol. l 102 247 700 1020 Inner W×H×D Outer W×H×D mm mm 600×483×351 10 40 10370 880×1050×650 650×785×485 10 40 10366 925×1460×800 1250×1925×890 973×1250×576 10 40 10368 1250×1925×1145 976×1250×836 10 40 10372 Constant Climate Chambers, Memmert co d e b e w WW91A008 Constant climate chambers HPP with TwinDISPLAY (a detailed description of the model variant can be found on page 531) The constant climate chamber with the unique ControlCOCKPIT for quick, intuitive operation. Perfect for stability tests, climate-controlled storage and conditioning. Highly economical and maintenance-free. Technical data: Work temperature range size 110 – 1060 without light, without humidity: 0°C (at least 20°C under room temperature) up to +70°C +5°C (at least 20°C under room temperature) up to +70°C without light, with humidity: Work temperature range size 110 – 750 with light, without humidity or with humidity: +15°C up to +40°C Work temperature range size 1400 – 2200 with light, without humidity or with humidity: +15°C (at least 20°C under room temperature) up to +60°C 230 V, 50/60 Hz (other voltages on request) Order No. Power supply: Type Outer dimensions W × H × D mm Vol. Inner dimensi- approx. ons W × H × D l mm HPP110 745×864×656 108 560×480×400 1 HPP260 824×1183×756 256 640×800×500 HPP410 824×1720×756 640×1200×500 384 HPP750 1224×1720×856 1040×1200×600 749 HPP1060 1224×1720×1107 1040×1200×850 1060 2 HPP1400 1435×1913×1007 1250×1450×750 1360 HPP2200 2157x1913x1007 1972x1450x750 2140 Wght approx. kg 77 122 160 208 260 450 493 P rating approx. W 650 920 1300 1500 1600 3100 3500 1 10 26 04110 10 26 04260 10 26 04410 10 26 04750 10 26 04160 10 26 04140 10 26 04220 External dimensions: Depth without door handle, depth of door handle 56 mm. Inner dimensions: Depth is reduced by 10 mm for the fan - Peltier Light modules for HPP110, 260, 410 and 750 10 LED light strips (HPP110), 14 LED light strips (HPP260/410/750) arranged on the side wall of the interior, programme-controlled dimming from 0 to 100% in 1% steps, ramp programming in combination with temperature and humidity Article Order No. for si- ze Cold white light module 6,500 Kelvin 110 Cold white light module 6,500 Kelvin 260 Cold white light module 6,500 Kelvin 410 Cold white light module 6,500 Kelvin 750 Warm white light module 2,700 Kelvin 110 Warm white light module 2,700 Kelvin 260 Warm white light module 2,700 Kelvin 410 Warm white light module 2,700 Kelvin 750 Cold white light module 6,500 Kelvin + warm white 2,700 Kelvin 110 Cold white light module 6,500 Kelvin + warm white 2,700 Kelvin 260 Cold white light module 6,500 Kelvin + warm white 2,700 Kelvin 410 Cold white light module 6,500 Kelvin + warm white 2,700 Kelvin 750 10 26 01087 10 26 01089 10 26 01094 10 26 01090 10 26 01095 10 26 00996 10 26 01097 10 26 01098 10 26 01088 10 26 01091 10 26 01093 10 26 01092 Continued on next page 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 553

555

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers Stainless steel shelves, perforated for type Order No. for ty- 260 10 26 01566 450/410/750 8/14/14 10 26 01567 pe 1060 Qty max. 14 Order No. 10 26 01569 Stainless steel grids Standard version: sizes 110 – 1060: 2 pieces, size 1400: 4 pieces, size 2200: 6 pieces for type Order No. for type Order No. Qty max. 14 1060 10 26 01559 1400/2200 28/42 10 26 01570 110/160 10 26 05008 260 10 26 01556 450/410/750 8/14/14 10 26 01557 Qty max. 9 Qty max. 5/8 9 co d e b e w WW91A010 An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right to make changes in technical specifications. Dimensions subject to confirmation. All performance data are typical mean values for serial devices. Climate Chambers, Memmert The constant climate chamber with the unique ControlCOCKPIT for quick, intuitive operation. Unparalleled homogeneity of temperature and humidity for long-term stability testing. Designed in particular for testing pharmaceuticals according to ICH, Q1A and Q1B, Option 2, and other comparable standards for stability testing of cosmetics and foods. For testing according to ICH Q1B, model ICHL / ICHLeco is equipped with an illumination unit. The model ICH C offers in addition to the standard equipment of the ICH / ICHeco a digitalized electronic CO2 control with a setting range of 0 to 20% CO2 (ICH750: 0 to 10% CO2). With TwinDISPLAY (a detailed description of the model variant can be found on page 531). Technical data: Power supply: Operating temperature range ICH/ICHeco/ ICHL/ICHLeco with humidity and/or light: 230 V, 50/60 Hz +10°C to +60°C +10°C to +50°C -10°C to +60°C Operating temperature range ICH C with and without humidity: Operating temperature range without hu- midity ICH/ICHeco: (not suitable for permanent storage at minus temperatures. In case of permanent opera- tion, icing of the glass door may occur) Operating temperature range without hu- midity ICHL / ICHLeco: Setting temperature range ICH/ICHeco: Setting temperature range ICHL/ICHLeco: 0°C to +60°C Setting temperature range ICH C: Humidity range: 0°C to +60°C -10°C to +60°C +10°C to +50°C 10 to 80 % rh Type Order No. Inner dimensi- ons W × H × D mm ICH110 ICH260 1 ICH750 Wght approx. kg 109 160 249 114 165 254 109 160 249 114 165 254 109 160 249 Vol. Outer dimensi- approx. ons W × H × D l mm 108 745×1233×585 560×480×400 824×1552×685 640×800×500 256 1224×1950×785 1040×1200×600 749 108 ICH110eco 745×1233×585 560×480×400 ICH260eco 824×1552×685 640×800×500 256 ICH750eco 1224×1950×785 1040×1200×600 749 108 ICH110L 745×1233×585 560×480×400 824×1552×685 640×800×500 ICH260L 256 1224×1950×785 1040×1200×600 749 ICH750L 108 ICH110Leco 745×1233×585 560×480×400 ICH260Leco 824×1552×685 640×800×500 256 ICH750Leco 1224×1950×785 1040×1200×600 749 108 ICH110C 745×1233×585 560×480×400 824×1552×685 640×800×500 ICH260C 256 ICH750C 1224×1950×785 1040×1200×600 749 External dimensions: Depth without door handle, depth of door handle 56 mm Inner dimensions: Depth is reduced by 33 mm for the fan. Accessories: For additional stainless steel grids and stainless steel perforated plates, refer to ICP models. An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right of technical modifications. Dimensions are subject to confirmation. All performance characteristics are typical mean values for serial units. 10 26 00110 10 26 00260 10 26 00750 10 26 00111 10 26 00261 10 26 00751 10 26 01110 10 26 01260 10 26 01750 10 26 00112 10 26 00262 10 26 00752 10 26 02110 10 26 02260 10 26 02750 P rating approx. W 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1450 1450 1530 1450 1450 1530 1350 1350 1350 1 554

556

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers Environmental Test Chambers, Memmert Environmental test chamber CTC / Temperature test chamber TTC Simulate the perfect atmosphere for climatic and temperature tests, in particular acc. to DIN EN 60068-2-1, 2-2 and 2-3. Provide for unlimited flexibility for controlled material and function tests as well as for ageing tests. co d e b e w WW91A009 Ventilation and control: • high-performance air fan in working chamber • depending on operation status, automatic adaption of fan speed resp. manual adjust- ment from 10 to 100% • adaptive, fuzzy-supported, multifunctional, digital microprocessor PID-controller • autodiagnostic system with fault indication on temperature and humidity control • 2 Pt100 sensors Class A in 4-wire-circuit, mutually monitoring and taking over the per- formance at the same temperature value • digital 7-day-programme-timer with real time clock, precise minute setting • integrated timer for tempering profiles of up to 40 ramps, each segment adjustable from 1 min. up to 999 hours • digital display (LED) of all set parameters, such as temperature, weekdays, time, humid- ity, fan speed and set-up values - language to be chosen in setup • digital display of set values (resolution: 0.1°C below 99.9°C, 0.5°C above 100°C) and actual values (resolution: 0.1°C) of temperature (LED) • long-term logging (ring store) of all relevant data, GLP-conforming as data logger - 1024 kB • programme stored on power failure • parallel printer interface (incl. real-time clock with date function) for printing logging files, suitable all PCL3-compatible ink-jet printers (USB available via converter, see acces- sories) • USB interface including MEMMERT Software “Celsius” with added functions for pro- gramming and documentation • chip card control incl. one MEMoryCard XL with 32 kB (up to 40 ramps) • incl. works calibration certificate for -20 °C and +160 °C Additional standard equipment for CTC: • active control for humidifying and dehumidifying (10-98% rh) with digital display of rel- ative humidity - resolution of display: 0,5%, setting accuracy: 1% • humidity supply with distilled water from two 10-l- tanks integrated in unit on telescop- ic slide with automatic change over • 2 x 10 l tanks as condensate collector, on telescopic slide • incl. works calibration certificate for +30°C at 60% rh • 1 grid included in the standard scope of delivery 1 Technical data: Temperature range: CTC/TTC without humidity control: from -42°C up to +190°C CTC with humidity control: from +10°C up to +95°C Type Outer W × H × D mm Inner W × H × D mm Vol. ap- prox. l 1 CTC256 898 × 1730 × 1100 640 × 670 × 597 256 TTC256 898 × 1730 × 1100 640 × 670 × 597 256 Wght approx. kg 337 337 P rating approx. W 7000 7000 Order No. 10 26 02561 10 26 02562 Outside dimensions: Width plus 20 mm for silicone plug and 5 mm for interfaces, depth without door lock, door handle depth 50 mm Accessories CTC256 / TTC256 Article Full-sight glass door, heated Stainless steel grid External control and logging package Order No. 10 26 02510 10 26 02513 10 26 02519 An extensive selection of accessories and options is available on request. We reserve the right to make changes in technical specifications. Dimensions subject to confirmation. All performance data are typical mean values for serial devices. Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 555

557

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WWSB5045 1 2 3 556 Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers Climatic Chambers CH-150, CH-250, Phoenix Instrument The climatic chambers are the ideal instrument to do stability and aging test on materials, simulation of environmental conditions and stress test in several fields such as: industry, food, textile, packaging, rubber/plastics, etc. Thanks to the digital control by PID regulator of the temperature and of the humidity per- centage, it’s possible simulate many environmental situations and use of materials, and moreover test the forced aging effects. The external steel door is equipped of a wide glass window that permits the observation of the materials during test. The stainless steel chamber with rounded corners, the shelves and their fixing system completely removable, make the chamber perfectly cleanable. A LED inner lamp for observation of the samples is included. The standard supplied side through hole of 25 mm diameter allows to install probes inside the chamber. Digital backlit alphanumeric LCD screen. Digital timer, clock and date for GLP functions. Standard supplied mini printer for operating and set param- eters output. Safety class 3.1 with double digital limiter of temperature and additional fluid expansion limiter. Technical data: Usable volume: Temperature range: Temperature resolution: Temperature homogeneity in the chamber: Temperature variation on a point: Humidity range: Humidity variation on a point: Timer/programs: CH-150 150 litres 10 – 85°C (without humidity) +10 – 70°C (with humidity) ±0.1°C ± 0.5°C (without humidity) ± 1.5°C (10 ÷ 70°C / 45 ÷ 95% RH) ± 0.2°C (without humidity) ± 0.5°C (10 ÷ 70°C / 45 ÷ 95% RH) 45% – 95% P 2% RH (10 ÷ 70°C / 45 ÷ 95% RH) continuous mode/program 1–100 steps 3.1 230 V / 2200 W 550 × 670 × 405 mm 3/10 CH-250 250 litres -10 – 85°C (without humidity) +10 – 70°C (with humidity) 0.1°C ± 0.5°C (without humidity) ± 1.5°C (10 ÷ 70°C / 45 ÷ 95% RH) ± 0.2°C (without humidity) ± 0.5°C (10 ÷ 70°C / 45 ÷ 95% RH) 45% – 95% P 2% RH (10 ÷ 70°C / 45 ÷ 95% RH) continuous mode/program 1–100 steps 3.1 230 V / 2200 W 600 × 830 × 500 mm 3/12 45 mm Safety class: Voltage/power: Internal dimensions: Number of shelves (standard/ max.): Useful min. distance between shelves: Max. load of self: External dimensions (W×H×D): 690 × 1520 × 790 mm External water tank dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Article 1 Climatic chamber CH-150 2 Climatic chamber CH-250 370 × 340 × 560 mm 145 kg 10 kg 45 mm 10 kg 740 × 1680 × 885 mm 370 × 340 × 560 mm 185 kg Order No. 10 13 71500 10 13 72500 Furnaces High Temperature Furnaces, Nabertherm High Temperature Furnaces, Nabertherm High temperature furnaces series LHT 02/16 – LHT 08/18, version P470 • Tabletop model • Tmax 1600°C, 1650°C, 1750°C, or 1800°C • High-quality molybdenum disilicide heating elements • Dual shell housing made of sheets of textured stainless steel • Compact design with lift door, opening upwards • With controller P 470 with 50 programs each with 40 segments Vol. Type Inner dimensi- ons W×D×H mm Outer dimensions Tmax W×D×H mm °C LHT 02/16 470×630×760+260 1600 90×150×150 LHT 04/16 1600 150×150×150 470×630×760+260 LHT 08/16 1600 150×300×150 470×810×760+260 3 LHT 01/17 D 1650 110×120×120 385×425×525+260 4 LHT 03/17 D 1650 135×155×200 470×630×760+260 LHT 02/17 470×630×760+260 1750 90×150×150 LHT 04/17 1750 150×150×150 470×630×760+260 LHT 08/17 1750 150×300×150 470×810×760+260 LHT 02/18 1800 90×150×150 470×630×760+260 LHT 04/18 1800 150×150×150 470×630×760+260 LHT 08/18 1800 150×300×150 470×810×760+260 l 2 4 8 1 4 2 4 8 2 4 8 Order No. Con- nec. V/kW 230/3.0 10 04 24041 400/5.2 10 04 24042 400/8.0 10 04 24043 230/2.2 10 04 24044 230/3.0 10 04 24045 230/3.0 10 04 24046 400/5.2 10 04 24047 400/8.0 10 04 24048 230/3.6 10 04 24049 400/5.2 10 04 24050 400/9.0 10 04 24051 Outer dimensions incl. opened lift door Continued on next page

558

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Furnaces High temperature furnaces series LHTC 03/14 – LHTCT 08/16, version C450 • Tabletop model • Tmax 1400°C, 1500°C, 1550°C or 1600°C • High-quality SiC rod heating • Dual shell housing made of sheets of textured stainless steel • Optional flap door (LHTC) or or lift door (LHTCT) • With controller C 450 with 10 programs each with 20 segments Type LHTCT 03/14 LHTCT 08/14 LHTCT 03/15 LHTCT 08/15 5 LHTCT 01/16 LHTCT 03/16 LHTCT 08/16 Tmax °C 1400 1400 1500 1500 1550 1600 1600 Inner dimensi- ons W×D×H mm 120×210×120 170×290×170 120×210×120 170×290×170 110×120×120 120×210×120 170×290×170 Outer dimensi- ons W×D×H mm 415×545×490 490×625×540 415×545×490 490×625×540 340×300×460 415×545×490 490×625×540 Vol. l Connec. V/kW Order No. 3 8 3 8 1.5 3 8 400/9 400/13 400/9 400/13 230/3.5 400/9 400/13 10 04 24061 10 04 24062 10 04 24063 10 04 24064 10 04 24065 10 04 24066 10 04 24067 Muffle Furnaces with Flap Door or Lift Door, Nabertherm 4 5 Electrical heated muffle furnaces series L 1/12, L 3/11 – LT 40/12 • Tmax 1100°C or optional with 1200°C • Heating from two sides by ceramic heating plates • Heating from three sides with muffle furnaces L(T)24/11 – L(T)40/11 • Ceramic heating plates with integral heating element which is safeguarded against fumes and splashing, and easy to replace • All the insulation material is classified as non-carcinogenic pursuant to TRGS 905, class 1 or 2 • Housing made of sheets of textured stainless steel • Adjustable air inlet integrated in door and exhaust air outlet in rear wall of furnace • Optional with flap door (L) or lift door (LT) • R7 controller with adjustable holding temperature (L1/12) • B410 controller with 5 programs each with 4 segments or optional C450 with 10 pro- grams each with 20 segments Options: • Chimney, chimney with fan or catalytic converter (except L 1/12) • Over-temperature limit controller with adjustable cutout temperature • Protective gas connection • Manual or automatic gas supply system Type Vers. Tmax Inner dimensi- ons W×D×H mm °C L 1/12 R7 1200 90×115×110 L 3/11 B410 1100 160×140×100 6 L 5/11 B410 1100 200×170×130 L 9/11 B410 1100 230×240×170 L 15/11 B410 1100 230×340×170 L 24/11 B410 1100 280×340×250 L 40/11 B410 1100 320×490×250 7 LT 3/11 B410 1100 160×140×100 LT 5/11 B410 1100 200×170×130 LT 9/11 B410 1100 230×240×170 LT 15/11 B410 1100 230×340×170 LT 24/11 B410 1100 280×340×250 LT 40/11 B410 1100 320×490×250 Outer dimensi- ons W×D×H mm 290×280×430 385×330×405 385×390×460 415×455×455 415×555×515 490×555×580 530×705×580 385×330×405 385×390×460 415×455×455 415×555×515 490×555×580 530×705×580 Vol. l 1 3 5 9 15 24 40 3 5 9 15 24 40 Connec. V/kW Order No. 230/1.5 10 04 21101 230/1.2 10 04 21102 230/2.4 10 04 21103 230/3.0 10 04 21104 230/3.5 10 04 21105 400/4.5 10 04 21106 400/6.0 10 04 21107 230/1.2 10 04 21121 230/2.4 10 04 21122 230/3.0 10 04 21123 230/3.5 10 04 21124 400/4.5 10 04 21125 400/6.0 10 04 21126 Muffle furnaces basic models LE 1/11 – LE 14/11 • Tmax 1100°C, working temperature 1050°C • Heating from two sides from heating elements in quartz glass tubes • Maintenance-friendly replacement of heating elements and insulation • All the insulation material is classified as non-carcinogenic pursuant to TRGS 905, class 1 or 2 • Housing made of sheets of textured stainless steel • Flap door which can also be used as a work platform • Exhaust air outlet in rear wall Options: • Chimney, chimney with fan or catalytic converter (except LE 1/11 and LE 2/11) Type Vers. Tmax Inner dimensi- ons W×D×H mm °C 1100 90×115×110 1100 110×180×110 1100 170×200×170 1100 220×300×220 Vol. l Outer dimensi- ons W×D×H mm 290×280×430 1 330×385×430 2 390×435×490 6 440×535×520 14 Connec. Order No. V/kW 230/1.5 10 04 21131 230/1.8 10 04 21132 230/1.8 10 04 21133 230/2.9 10 04 21134 8 LE 1/11 R7 LE 2/11 R7 9 LE 6/11 R7 LE 14/11 R7 6 7 8 9 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 557

559

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Furnaces Chamber Furnaces for Annealing, Hardening and Brazing, Nabertherm Chamber furnaces with insulating bricks N 7/H - N 87/H designed to withstand harsh use in the laboratory • Tmax 1280°C • Three-sided heating from both sides and the floor • Heating elements on carrier pipes ensure free heat emission and a long useful life • With multi-layer insulation structure for low energy consumption • Substructure comprised in the scope of delivery, models N 7/H - N 17/HR are designed as tabletop models • Parallel swinging door which opens downward • Door movement cushioned by gas pressure damper • Controller version B 400 with 5 programs of 4 segments each, or optionally C 440 with 10 program with 20 segments each Optional: • Annealing boxes with or without protective gas connection • Gassing bag with holder • Charging plates • Hardening tongs and hardening film °C Type Vers. Tmax Inner dimensions W × D × H mm 1 N 7/H B400 1280 250×250×140 N 11/H B400 1280 250×350×140 N 11/HR B400 1280 250×350×140 N 17/HR B400 1280 250×500×140 N 31/H B400 1280 350×350×250 N 41/H B400 1280 350×500×250 2 N 61/H B400 1280 350×750×250 N 87/H B400 1280 350×1000×250 Outer dimensions W × D × H mm 800×650×600 800×750×600 800×750×600 800×900×600 1040×1100×1340 1040×1250×1340 1040×1500×1340 1040×1750×1340 Vol. l 9 11 11 17 30 40 60 87 Connec. V 230 230 400 400 400 400 400 400 Power kW 3.0 3.5 5.5 6.4 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 Order No. 10 04 24001 10 04 24002 10 04 24003 10 04 24004 10 04 24005 10 04 24006 10 04 24007 10 04 24008 Tube Furnaces Programmable Infrared Furnace behr IRF 10, Behr The behr IRF 10 programmable infrared furnace – the optimum solution for many tasks in the laboratory: • Temperature range up to 1150 °C • Extremely short heating period (e.g. from room temperature to 1000 °C in 10 sec) • Up to 5 ramps and 5 heating rates can be programmed optionally. The program controls the individual analysis phases exactly and in a reproducible manner, in the meantime the sample boat remains in the same place • Cooling with heat pipes – no coolant required • Quick cooling down with the heat pipe technique and opening of the kiln • Combustion chamber which can be viewed by the user: The user can push back the upper cylindrical shell (furnace lid) on rollers • The use of silica combustion tubes with different dimensions allows adaptation to dif- ferent applications, sample materials and sample quantities • Two flow meters to connect 2 type of gas, e.g. oxygen and an inert gas • RS232 serial interface • Control via PC possible Article IRF 10, for silica tubes with external diameter of 18 – 20 mm 42 48 90017 IRF 10, for silica tubes with external diameter of 22 – 24 mm 10 48 90041 IRF 10, for silica tubes with external diameter of 26 – 28 mm 10 48 90042 Order No. Tube Furnaces, Nabertherm Compact tube furnace series R 50/250/12 – R 170/1000/13 • Tmax. 1200°C or 1300°C • Working tube of C 530 ceramic including two fibre plugs as standard equipment • Dual shell housing made of sheets of textured stainless steel • Solid state relays provide for lownoise operation • B410 controller with 5 programs each with 4 segments or optional C450 with 10 pro- grams each with 20 segments Options: • Over-temperature limit controller with adjustable cutout temperature • Charge control with temperature measurement in the working tube • Gas supply systems for protective gas or vacuum operation • Three-zoned design (heated length from 500 mm) Continued on next page 1 2 co d e b e w WWXKS038 3 558

560

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Tube Furnaces Type °C mm mm hea- ted L Vers. Tmax Tu- bing O.D. mm Outer dimensi- ons W × D × H L. const. temp. ±5 k single-zoned mm R 50/250/12 B410 1200 434×340×508 50 250 80 R 50/500/12 B410 1200 670×340×508 50 500 170 R 120/500/12 B410 1200 670×410×578 120 500 170 R 170/750/12 B410 1200 920×460×628 170 750 250 R 170/1000/12 B410 1200 1170×460×628 170 1000 330 R 50/250/13 B410 1300 434×340×508 50 250 80 R 50/500/13 B410 1300 670×340×508 50 500 170 R 120/500/13 B410 1300 670×410×578 120 500 170 R 170/750/13 B410 1300 920×460×628 170 750 250 3 R 170/1000/13 B410 1300 1170×460×628 170 1000 330 L. const. temp. ±5 k three-zoned mm — 250 250 375 500 — 250 250 375 500 Tube length Order No. mm 450 700 700 1070 1400 450 700 700 1070 1400 10 04 24101 10 04 24102 10 04 24103 10 04 24104 10 04 24105 10 04 24106 10 04 24107 10 04 24108 10 04 24109 10 04 24110 Tube furnaces with stand for horizontal or vertical operation • Tmax 1100 °C, 1300 °C, or 1500 °C • Compact design • Vertical or horizontal operation freely adjustable • Working height freely adjustable • Operation also possible separate from stand if safety guidelines are observed • B410 controller with 5 programs each with 4 segments or optional C450 with 10 pro- grams each with 20 segments • Working tube made of C 530 ceramic Type Vers. Tmax Tubing O.D. mm 4 RT 50-250/11 B410 1100 350×380×740 50 RT 50-250/13 B410 1300 350×380×740 50 RT 30-200/15 B410 1500 445×475×740 30 Outer dimensi- ons W × D × H mm °C hea- ted L mm 250 250 200 L. const. temp. ±5 k mm 80 80 70 Tube length mm 360 360 360 Order No. 10 04 24121 10 04 24122 10 04 24123 Hinged tube furnaces for horizontal or vertical operation • Tmax 1100°C or 1300°C • Housing made of sheets of textured stainless steel • Frame for vertical operation (RSV) • Split-type design for simple insertion of the working tube • Working tube made of ceramic C 530 • B410 controller with 5 programs each with 4 segments or optional C450 with 10 pro- grams each with 20 segments 4 5 Options: • Over-temperature limit controller with adjustable cutout temperature • Display of inner tube temperature with additional thermocouple • Different gas supply systems for non-flammable or flammable protective or reactive gases and vacuum operation • Three-zoned design (heated length from 500 mm) Type °C mm Vers. Tmax Outer dimensi- ons W × D × H Tu- bing O.D. mm RSH 50/250/11 50 B410 1100 420×375×510 RSH 50/500/11 50 B410 1100 670×375×510 RSH 120/500/11 B410 1100 670×445×580 120 RSH 170/750/11 B410 1100 920×495×630 170 RSH 170/1000/11 B410 1100 1170×495×630 170 RSH 50/250/13 50 B410 1300 420×375×510 5 RSH 50/500/13 50 B410 1300 670×375×510 RSH 120/500/13 B410 1300 670×445×580 120 RSH 170/750/13 B410 1300 920×495×630 170 RSH 170/1000/13 B410 1300 1170×495×630 170 RSV 50/250/11 B410 1100 545×590×975 50 RSV 50/500/11 B410 1100 545×590×1225 50 RSV 120/500/11 B410 1100 615×590×1225 120 RSV 170/750/11 B410 1100 665×590×1475 170 RSV 170/1000/11 B410 1100 665×590×1725 170 RSV 50/250/13 B410 1300 545×590×975 50 RSV 50/500/13 B410 1300 545×590×1225 50 RSV 120/500/13 B410 1300 615×590×1225 120 6 RSV 170/750/13 B410 1300 665×590×1475 170 RSV 170/1000/13 B410 1300 665×590×1725 170 hea- ted L L. const. temp. ±5 k single-zoned mm mm 250 80 500 170 500 170 750 250 1000 330 250 80 500 170 500 170 750 250 1000 330 250 80 500 170 500 170 750 250 1000 330 250 80 500 170 500 170 750 250 1000 330 L. const. temp. ±5 k three-zoned mm — 250 250 375 500 — 250 250 375 500 — 250 250 375 500 — 250 250 375 500 Order No. Tube length mm 650 10 04 24131 850 10 04 24132 850 10 04 24133 1100 10 04 24134 1350 10 04 24135 650 10 04 24136 850 10 04 24137 850 10 04 24138 1100 10 04 24139 1350 10 04 24140 650 10 04 24141 850 10 04 24142 850 10 04 24143 1100 10 04 24144 1350 10 04 24145 650 10 04 24146 850 10 04 24147 850 10 04 24148 1100 10 04 24149 1350 10 04 24150 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 559

561

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Incinerators Rapid Incinerators, Gestigkeit Rapid incinerators for reducing dry and fluid susbstances to ashes in one-off or series operation The operating temperature of 950°C is attained within the space of a few minutes. The upper level, with 8 recesses each with a diameter of 34 mm, can take porcelain crucibles of up to 50 mm diameter for drying, pre-heating and fuming-off. Can also reduce fluid substances to ashes. The uninhibited exposure to oxygen speeds up the incineration process. The tilted position of the crucibles in the lower incineration bed (which has a length of 400 mm) allows excellent observation and access to the contents during oper- ation. Housing made of stainless steel, heating element made of heat-resistant CiNi spe- cial steel. Delivered ready to connect to 1.5 m cable and earthing pin plug. The power supply is automatically cut off when the service panel is opened. P rating W 2500 Voltage V 230 Temperature control Wght kg 7 42 06 50010 Order No. Type 1 SVR/E electronic temp. control continuously adjustable 2 SVD 95/P digital temp. selection SV/II and display like SVR/E, but without temp. control 7 6 230 230 2500 42 06 50011 2500 42 06 50012 Spare heating elements, ready-to-install Type fits EH 400 EH 95 Type SVR/E und SV/II Type SVD 95 Wght kg 1.6 Voltage V 230 P rating W 2500 Order No. 42 06 50100 1.6 230 2500 42 06 50101 Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Heating Plates behrotest® with Metal Safety Grid, Behr Heating Plates behrotest® with Metal Safety Grid Adjustable hotplates for general laboratory use. A metal grid protects the user from inad- vertent contact with the hot surface. Article Ø mm 3 Heating plate behrotest® KP 1 94 Heating plate behrotest® KP 2 145 Heating plate behrotest® KP 3 220 Heating plate behrotest® KP 4 180 Heating cap. W 500 1100 2000 2000 Mains connec. Order No. 230 V 230 V 230 V 230 V 10 48 00504 10 48 00514 10 48 00511 10 48 00513 Top molds for KP 1 Article 4 Top mold AM 100/94 Top mold AM 250/SET Top mold AM 500/SET for 100 ml round bottom flask incl. distance inlay for 250 ml round bottom flask with distance stays for 500 ml round bottom flask with distance stays Top molds for KP 2 Article 5 Top mold AM 1000/145 for 1000 ml round bottom flask incl. distance inlay Order No. 10 48 17701 10 48 17706 10 48 17707 Order No. 10 48 17705 1 2 3 4 560 co d e b e w WWXKS051 Serial heaters behrotest® Serial heaters. Each heater is controlled individually and has a control LED. With holders for the telescope bars available as an option. Article 6 Serial heater HB 4 4 individually adjustable units, Ø 94 mm Serial heater HB 6 6 individually adjustable units, Ø 94 mm Serial heater HB 8 8 individually adjustable units, Ø 94 mm Holder for HB 4 incl. 4 support rods Holder for HB 6 incl. 6 support rods Holder for HB 8 incl. 8 support rods Order No. 10 48 00506 10 48 00507 10 48 00512 10 48 00508 10 48 00509 10 48 00510 Continued on next page 5

562

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Top molds for serial heaters HB 4, HB 6 and HB 8 Maximum capacity in serial heater HB 4: 4 top molds Maximum capacity in serial heater HB 6: 6 top molds Maximum capacity in serial heater HB 8: 8 top molds for 100 ml round bottom flask incl. distance inlay Article 4 Top mold AM 100/94 Top mold AM 250/SET Top mold AM 500/SET for 250 ml round bottom flask with distance stays for 500 ml round bottom flask with distance stays 6 Order No. 10 48 17701 10 48 17706 10 48 17707 Tandem Heaters, Gestigkeit Hotplates are made of smoothly finished cast-iron with central expansion recesses. Overflow edge and cover hood are made of rust-proof stainless steel. Each unit has a screw-in fitting for a supporting retort rod. Designed for a maximum temperature of 400°C, infinitely variable from 10 to 100%. 2 pilot lamps, 230 V AC, 100% duty cycle. Models SGR... can be controlled in addition by a contact thermometer. The customary electronic K thermometers can be attached also directly. Tandem heaters without relay, plate dia. 150 mm Type SG 1 SG 2 SG 3 SG 4 SG 5 SG 6 Quantity heating plates 1 2 3 4 5 6 Outer W × H × D mm 175×160×200 300×160×200 525×160×200 700×160×200 875×160×200 1050×160×200 P rating W 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Wght kg 2.7 5.4 8.1 10.8 13.5 16.2 Order No. 43 06 10681 43 06 10682 43 06 10683 43 06 10684 43 06 10685 43 06 10686 Tandem heaters without relay, plate dia. 85 mm Type 7 SGK 1 SGK 4 SGK 6 Quantity heating plates 1 4 6 Outer W × H × D mm 125×145×155 485×145×155 725×145×155 P rating W 450 1800 2700 Wght kg 1.5 4.8 7.0 Order No. 43 06 10688 43 06 10689 43 06 10690 Tandem heaters with relay and contactor bushing, plate dia. 150 mm Type SGR 1 SGR 2 8 SGR 3 SGR 4 SGR 5 SGR 6 Quantity heating plates 1 2 3 4 5 6 Outer W × H × D mm 175×160×200 350×160×200 525×160×200 700×160×200 875×160×200 1050×160×200 P rating W 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Wght kg 3.0 6.0 9.0 12.0 15.0 18.0 Order No. 43 06 10691 43 06 10692 43 06 10693 43 06 10694 43 06 10695 43 06 10696 Accessories Article Stainless steel support rod ST 12, screw-on, Use Order No. 44 06 48001 12 mm Ø Holder HK3 for contact thermometer 44 06 48015 Silicone cable SK 83 with 3-pole connector for contact thermometer 44 06 48016 8 7 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 561

563

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Multipurpose Heating Baths, Gestigkeit Multipurpose heating baths Features: Tightly soldered tubular heater, PID temperature controller with actual value display, con- tact thermometer bushing, stove-enameled upper jacket, all housing parts made of stain- less steel (bade also spray-painted), screw-in sockets for supporting retort rods with a diameter of 12 mm. Technical data: External dimensions (W × H × D): 310 × 280 × 310 mm Internal bath dia.: Bath depth: Bath capacity: Weight: Power supply: 170/270 mm bottom/top 118 mm 5 l 6.8 kg 230 V Z, 50 Hz Article 1 Multi-purpose heating bath PZ 26-4, up to 400°C Suitable for use as either a fluid, air or sand bath. As bath fillings it is possible to use oils, water, sand or any other filling which will not attack the surface of the bath, which is made of high-grade stainless steel (material No. 1.4301). Order No. 44 06 10203 Article 2 Multi-purpose heating bath PZ 26-7, up to 700°C Same application options except fluid bath, i.e. for use only as a dry, air or sand bath. Order No. 44 06 10205 Both baths are also well-suited for rotary evaporators. Accessories Article Order No. Stainless steel support rod ST 12, screw-on, 12 mm Ø 44 06 48001 Stainless steel ring set RI 24/E, 245 mm Ø 44 06 48004 Stainless steel sand bath dish SA 24, 245 mm Ø, 80 mm high 44 06 48010 Test tube insert RGG 40, for 40 tubes up to 20 mm 44 06 48014 Holder HK3 44 06 48015 For contact or control thermometer Silicone cable SK 83 with 3-pole connector 44 06 48016 For contact thermometer Parts for overtemperature cut-out on request. 1 2 3 562 Multipurpose Heating Baths MULTIHITZ, Gestigkeit MULTIHITZ heating baths for radiant heating of all types of vessels, regardless of form or material. Construction: The bath container is made of high-grade stainless steel with a stainless steel tubular heating element. The upper outer coat is enameled and the base is made of either aluminium or stainless steel. For use as an air, fluid or sandbath Infinitely variable temperature up to 600°C. Can also be controlled in addition by a contact thermometer. Designed in accordance with VDE guidelines. Suitable for continuous op- eration. Ready to connect with 1.8 m cable and earthing contact plug for 230 V AC. Series heaters, can be regulated up to 600°C Type SM 1 SM 2 SM 3 SM 4 SM 5 SM 6 Qty heating plates 1 2 3 4 5 6 Outer W × H × D mm 175×215×200 350×215×200 525×215×200 700×215×200 875×215×200 1050×215×200 Useful Ø mm 147 147 147 147 147 147 Wght kg 2.4 4.7 7.0 9.3 11.6 13.9 P rating W 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Order No. 44 06 42001 44 06 42002 44 06 42003 44 06 42004 44 06 42005 44 06 42006 Series heaters, can be regulated up to 600°C, with relay and contact bushing for each heater Type SMR 1 SMR 2 SMR 3 3 SMR 4 SMR 5 SMR 6 Qty hea- ting plates 1 2 3 4 5 6 Outer W × H × D mm 175×215×200 350×215×200 525×215×200 700×215×200 875×215×200 1050×215×200 Useful Ø mm 147 147 147 147 147 147 Wght kg 2.7 5.3 7.9 10.5 13.1 15.7 P rating W 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 Order No. 44 06 43001 44 06 43002 44 06 43003 44 06 43004 44 06 43005 44 06 43006 without the illustrated accessories Continued on next page

564

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Accessories Article Stainless steel support rod ST 12, screw-on, 12 mm Ø Stainless steel ring set RI 14/E, 145 mm Ø Stainless steel perforated plate LO 41/E, 145 mm Ø Stainless steel sand bath dish SA 14 Holder HK3 For contact or control thermometer Silicone cable SK 83 with 3-pole connector For contact thermometer Order No. 44 06 48001 44 06 48002 44 06 48005 44 06 48008 44 06 48015 44 06 48016 Sand Baths, Gestigkeit Electrical sandbaths with variable temperature control, with or without a thermostatic regulator. Robust construction for continuous performance. Aluminium alloy hotplate. Hotplate corners and edges are subjected to more heat) to guarantee an even temperature over the entire heating surface, which is surrounded a stainless steel frame with a usable height of 50 mm. The sand thus lies directly on the hotplate. Asbestos-free insulation. The housing is constructed from high-grade, stainless steel No.1.4301, whereby the central section has been additionally sprayed in orange. 4 adjustable feet ensure extra stability. Connecting cable approx. 1,7 m long. 230 V/3300 W with earthing contact plug. Sand baths with infinitely variable control Type B mm D mm C mm A mm SD7 360 360 358 358 2200 SD8 360 510 364 514 2850 SD9-230 440 590 442 592 4000 SD9-400 440 590 442 592 4000 P rating W Voltage V 230 230 230 3×400 Temp. °C 370 370 370 370 Wght kg 13 21 27 27 Order No. 44 06 30170 44 06 30180 44 06 30190 44 06 30191 Sand baths with thermostatic control and power controller 10 to 100 W-% P rating W Type B mm C mm D mm A mm ST71 360 360 358 358 1150 1 ST72 360 360 358 358 2200 ST73 360 360 358 358 2200 ST81 360 510 364 514 1800 ST82 360 510 364 514 2850 ST83 360 510 364 514 2850 ST91 440 590 442 592 2000 ST92-230 440 590 442 592 4000 ST92-400 440 590 442 592 4000 ST93-230 440 590 442 592 4000 ST93-400 440 590 442 592 4000 Temp. °C Wght Voltage V kg 230 30 – 110 14 230 50 – 300 14 230 100 – 370 14 230 30 – 110 21 230 50 – 300 21 230 100 – 370 21 230 30 – 110 28 230 50 – 300 28 3×400 50 – 300 28 230 100 – 370 28 3×400 100 – 370 28 Order No. 44 06 30271 44 06 30272 44 06 30273 44 06 30281 44 06 30282 44 06 30283 44 06 30291 44 06 30292 44 06 30392 44 06 30293 44 06 30393 1 Please note: Sand baths have a very low temperature range of 30 to 110°C because sand is a poor conductor of heat. This range is not suitable for boiling purposes. Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 563

565

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Laboratory Heating Bath, Juchheim 1 Laboratory heating bath HB 1500 The HB 1500 heating bath is designed for many different applications. Water, oils or sand can be used as bath filling. 3 different sizes are available. State-of-the art temperature controller with microprocessor included. Features include a measurement circuit monitor for measurement range violations, sensor/cable short-circuiting and sensor/cable break- age. There is absolutely no maintenance required. • Microprocessor controller with 4-digit 7-segment display, 10 mm high, green • Freely parameterizable • With self-optimizing temperature control function • Measurement and control range +0.0 to +250.0°C • Heating power adjustable from 1 to 99% • Overtemperature switch-off at >10K + nominal value • Non-wearing internal sensor on bath bottom • ON/OFF switch, 2-pole, green, illuminated • Can be switched over to an external sensor • Material of bath and housing: stainless steel; front and rear: anodized aluminium Technical data: Bath volume (litres): Bath size Ø/H: Dimensions (W×D×H): Heating power: Weight: Power supply: 2 200/130 mm 290×270×275 mm 360×290×275 mm 370×320×285 mm 1500 W 5.8 kg 230 V/50 Hz 4 240/150 mm 8 280/180 mm 2000 W 7.5 kg 230 V/50 Hz 2000 W 6.5 kg 230 V/50 Hz Article Laboratory heating bath HB 1500 2 L Laboratory heating bath HB 1500 4 L Laboratory heating bath HB 1500 8 L 2 Laboratory heating bath HB 1500/S Order No. 43 57 15003 43 57 15002 43 57 15001 Equipment identical with HB 1500, plus safety temperature limiter via a separate micro- processor control and an internal temperature sensor. All-pole disconnection of the heat- ing if the safety temperature is exceeded. Overtemperature switch-off at >10K + nominal value is not applicable in this version. Article Laboratory heating bath 1500/S 2 L Laboratory heating bath 1500/S 4 L Laboratory heating bath 1500/S 8 L Hot Plates, Gestigkeit Order No. 43 57 15013 43 57 15012 43 57 15011 Electrical hot plates with variable temperature control, with or without a thermostatic regulator. Robust construction for continuous performance. Aluminium alloy hotplate. Asymmetrical heating system (hotplate corners and edges are subjected to more heat) ensure an even temperature over the entire heating surface. Asbestos-free insulation. The housing is constructed from high-grade, stainless steel No. 1.4301, whereby the central section has been additionally sprayed in orange. Four adjustable feet ensure extra stabil- ity. Connecting cable 1,75 m. long. At 230 V~ up to 3200 W with earthing pin plug. Hot plates with infinitely variable control P rating W Order No. C mm Type D mm B mm A mm HD0 300 300 312 312 1800 HD1 350 350 358 358 2200 HE1 290 440 308 458 2400 HD2 350 500 364 514 2850 HD3-230 430 580 442 592 4000 HD3-400 430 580 442 592 4000 Voltage V 230 230 230 230 230 3×400 Temp. °C 370 370 370 370 370 370 Wght kg 10 12 14 19 25 25 43 06 00120 43 06 00121 43 06 00131 43 06 00122 43 06 00123 43 06 00140 Hot plates with thermostatic control and power controller from 10 to 100 W-% Type HT01 3 HT02 HT03 HT11 HT12 HT13 TH11 P rating W D mm C mm B mm A mm 300 300 312 312 1000 300 300 312 312 1800 300 300 312 312 1800 350 350 358 358 1150 350 350 358 358 2200 350 350 358 358 2200 290 440 308 458 1650 Voltage V 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 Wght Temp. °C kg 30 – 110 11 50 – 300 11 100 – 370 11 30 – 110 13 50 – 300 13 100 – 370 13 30 – 110 14 Order No. 43 06 01101 43 06 01102 43 06 01103 43 06 01111 43 06 01112 43 06 01113 43 06 01211 Continued on next page 1 2 3 564

566

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths P rating W Type B mm D mm C mm A mm TH12 290 440 308 458 2400 TH13 290 440 308 458 2400 HT21 350 500 364 514 1800 HT22 350 500 364 514 2850 HT23 350 500 364 514 2850 HT31 430 580 442 592 2000 HT32-230 430 580 442 592 4000 HT32-400 430 580 442 592 4000 HT33-230 430 580 442 592 4000 HT33-400 430 580 442 592 4000 Wght Temp. Voltage °C kg V 50 – 300 14 230 100 – 370 14 230 30 – 110 19 230 50 – 300 19 230 100 – 370 19 230 30 – 110 26 230 230 50 – 300 26 3×400 50 – 300 26 230 100 – 370 26 3×400 100 – 370 26 Order No. 43 06 01212 43 06 01213 43 06 01121 43 06 01122 43 06 01123 43 06 01131 43 06 01132 43 06 01232 43 06 01133 43 06 01233 Please note: The range 30 to 110°C is not suitable for cooking purposes. Hot Plates made of CERAN 500®, Gestigkeit High-duty hot plates made of CERAN®with thermostatic temperature control from +50 to 500°C CERAN® - an extraordinary glass ceramic which is extremely resistant to breakage and changes of temperature, will not distort, infrared transmitting and also hight acid-resistant. Its popularity as a material for hot plates in increasing continually. Features: The low-mass plate is electrically heated over its full surface, and is embedded into a high-grade, stainless steel frame which is mounted on an internally insulated stainless steel housing. The housing is 5 mm bigger all-round than the Ceran plate. Four feet, which can be individually adjusted to an approximate height of 8 mm, ensure wobble-free stand- ing. The overall height when the feet are screwed right in amounts to 98 mm. Types 4 A and 4 SR are equipped with additional sockets for 4 screw-in retort rods with a diameter of 12 mm. The entire temperature control system is accommodated in a sealed pressure-cast alu- minium case with IP 65 protection. The temperature is set on a °C temperature scale from +50 to 500°C and remains constant automatically. Very good control accuracy, e.g. ± 4°C at 100°C to ±2°C at up to 300°C an more, are achieved thanks to the low-mass heating system and fast responding temperature sensor. These small differences are hardly nota- ble in the heated material. Heat up times are very short, e.g. just 8 minutes to 500°C. Series A - Bench-top units with attached control case Type 1 4 A 11 A 2 22 A 33 A 44 A Platform size mm 430×140 280×280 280×430 430×430 430×580 Wght kg 5 5.5 7 9 11.5 P rating W 1500 2000 3000 4400 5700 Voltage V 230 230 230 3×400 3×400 Order No. 43 06 05004 43 06 05011 43 06 05022 43 06 05033 43 06 05044 Series SR - Units with a separate control case for wall mounting Type 4 SR 11 SR 3 22 SR 33 SR 44 SR Platform size mm 430×140 280×280 280×430 430×430 430×580 Wght kg 5 5.5 7 9 11.5 P rating W 1500 2000 3000 4400 5700 Voltage V 230 230 230 3×400 3×400 Order No. 43 06 05204 43 06 05211 43 06 05222 43 06 05233 43 06 05244 The standard length of the cable between the control case and the heater is 1.3 m. Each additional 0.5 m incurs an extra charge equal to 1% of the unit’s price. Please quote re- quired cable length when ordering. Platform size mm Order No. 4 Series EB-C - Flush-mounting units for installing in benches Type P rating W 2000 3000 4400 5700 10 06 05311 10 06 05322 10 06 05333 10 06 05344 Hot plate as flush-mounting unit for installing in benches. Separate controller case for in- stalling behind the bench frame. The standard length of the cable between the hot plate and the controller case is 0.65 m. For more technical specifications go to www.gestigkeit.de. 11 EB-C 350×350 22 EB-C 500×350 33 EB-C 500×500 44 EB-C 650×500 Height approx. mm 120 120 120 120 Heating area mm 260×260 410×260 410×410 560×410 Voltage V 230 230 3×400 3×400 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 565

567

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Heating Plates made of CERAN®, Gestigkeit High-duty hot plate with round heating panel 145 mm in dia., stainless steel housing, controlled by power controller from 10 to 100%, built-in temperature monitor, for temper- atures up to 500°C, Type CT 10. Technical data: External dimensions: Height: Rating: Voltage: Weight: Article High-performance heating plate 200 × 310 mm 90 mm 1200 Watt 230 Volt 2.6 kg Order No. 43 06 05400 Precision Hot Plates, Gestigkeit Hot plates PZ 44 bis 450°C Hot plates with microprocessor control of temperatures from room temperature up to 450°C. The electric heater has 3 power levels (825 – 1650 – 3300 W.) Each level can also be adapted by electronic power outputs in the range from 10 to 100% in order to prevent the temperature being overshot. Temperature levels 1 and 3 heat the plate over its full sur- face. Level 2 (1650 W) heats only the right-hand half of the plate, creating a temperature gradi- ent (40% of the set temperature) to the left-hand half. There is also a bushing to connect a contact thermometer and temperature cut-out. Design: Hot plate made of smoothly finished, solid cast iron GG 15 in low-distortion quality. Hous- ing parts made of stainless steel (material No. 1.4301), bottom section also enameled. Four adjustable feet ensure wobble-free standing. Sturdy construction able to take a maximum load of 150 kg. Ready to connect with 1.7 m cable. Technical data: External dimensions (W × H × D): 320 × 190 × 470 mm Plate size (W × D): Weight: Rating: Temp. control range: Switching difference: 290 × 440 mm 23 kg 3300 W +20 to 450°C ±1 K Article Hot plate PZ 44 for 230 V Hot plate PZ 44 for 2 × 400 V Cable with connector for temperature cut-out, timer, contact thermometer Order No. 43 06 00110 43 06 00111 43 06 00119 Precision Hot Plates, Gestigkeit DIGITAL ELECTRONIC hot plates are designed for continuous and equipped as standard with a built-in temperature limiter adjustable from 30 to 100°C or 50 to 300°C. Because of asymmetrical, quick-reaction, special long-term heating and thermal sensors, as well as output adaptation to the thermal requirements, extremely precise temperatures, with a very good uniform heat are obtained over the complete heating surface. Design: Upper plates are made of efficient heat-conducting aluminium alloy and have a smooth anodized finish. Temperature is regulated by means of a microprocessor temperature controller with digital actual value display. Operating temperatures are preset in 0.1°C divisions up to 99,9°C and in1°C divisions for temperatures over 100°C. All models are fitted with an electronic output regulator allowing the heating output to be adjusted to actual demand. All models are equipped with a bushing to connect either a contact ther- mometer or a time switch. Models PZ 60, HB 110 and HB 300 have screw-in sockets for five 12mm diameter sup- porting rods with a clearance of 125 mm to each other. Hot plates with temperature display Type Platform size mm PZ 28-1 T 280 × 200 PZ 28-2 T 280 × 200 PZ 60 T 610 × 160 1 PZ 35 T 350 × 350 PZ 72 T 580 × 430 Wght kg 6 6 11 13 22 P rating W 500 1100 2000 2200 3300 Temp. range °C 20 – 99.9 20 – 300 20 – 300 20 – 300 20 – 300 Order No. Temp. accur. ± K 0.1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 43 06 47028 43 06 47029 43 06 47121 43 06 47342 43 06 47372 Continued on next page 1 2 3 566 4 5

568

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Type Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Hot plates without temperature display and without relay output Temp. accur. ± K 5 5 Temp. range °C 30 – 110 50 – 300 P rating W 1000 2000 2 HB 110 610 × 160 HB 300 610 × 160 Platform size mm Wght kg 7 7 Order No. 43 06 51511 43 06 51530 Accessoires for type PZ 60, HB 110, HB 300 for contact thermometer for PZ PZ Article Stainless steel support rod ST 12, screw-on, 12 mm Ø Holder HK3 Silicone cable SK 83 with 3-pole connector Hot plates with separator control system Flush-mounting and bench-top units for use with either the 2860 SR bench-top temper- ature controller, the 2860 EB flush-mounting temperature controller or the PR 5 SR pro- gram controller. The hot plate on the PZ 44 ET is made of a special hot plate material casting on account of the high temperature. Except for the PZ 44 ET and the PZ 14 ET, all the units have temperature limiter with an adjustable range from 30 to 110°C and 100 to 350°C respectively. Sensor cable and controller network cable are 1,8 m long and insu- lated with silicone. B mm Con. load W D mm Type C mm A mm PZ14 ET 140 140 100 100 450 PZ28-1 ET 280 200 160 120 500 PZ28-2 ET 280 200 160 120 1100 4 PZ35 ET 250 350 286 286 2200 PZ44 ET1) 440 290 384 234 3300 PZ60 ET 610 160 478 98 2000 PZ72 ET1) 580 430 510 357 3300 1) Also available for 2 × 400 V, N + PE Controller Con. load VAC 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 Order No. Tmax °C 350 43 06 47614 110 43 06 47628 350 43 06 47629 350 43 06 47635 450 43 06 47644 350 43 06 47660 350 43 06 47672 Article 3 Table-top controller Type 2860 SR for PZ 28-1 ET - PZ 72 ET hot plates External W × H × D: 200 × 65 × 280 mm 1,8 m Power cable: 5 Built-in controller Type 2860 EB for PZ 28 ET-1 - PZ 72 ET hot plates External W × H × D: 6 Program controller type PR 5 SR External W × H × D: for PZ 28-1 ET, PZ 28-2 ET, PZ 35 ET, PZ 60 ET 305 × 105 × 210 mm Power cable: Recommended cut-out: 215 × 70 × 168 mm with front panel, no plug 1,8 m 197 × 61 mm (W × H) Order No. 43 06 47901 43 06 47911 43 06 47921 Order No. 44 06 48001 44 06 48015 44 06 48016 6 Storage capacity for max. 5 ramps per temperature profile, 3 temperature profiles; contin- uous display of nominal value and residual time, max. 9 h 59 min. per ramp and dwell time, simple operation, membrane keyboard. All controllers are for a mains voltage of 220 to 240 Volt AC. Precision Hot-Plates, TITAN, 600°C, Gestigkeit High-performance hot plates for temperatures up to 600°C, with a very short heat- ing-up time (600°C in 20 minutes). The extremely efficient insulation allows the appliance to also be used on working surfaces which are not heat-resistant. The insulated hinged lid has been designed to keep heat loss at the absolute minimum. The temperature can either be controlled with a temperature or program regulator. With the temperature regulator the hotplate’s complete heating surface is held at a constant selected temperature. The program regulator allows so-called temperature profiles to be worked with, i.e. selected heating-up, cooling off and stop phases (maximum of 5 stages) can be programmed, whereby each phase can last up to 5 hours 59 minutes. Technical data: Titanium plate size: Const. heating area: Temperature distribution: Voltage: Rating: External dimensions: Height with/without cover: Useful height with cover closed:26 mm Weight with/without cover: 10/8 kg 280 × 200 mm 230 × 160 mm ±2 K 230 Volt 2000 Watt 300 × 350 mm 145/110 mm Article Hot plate made of titanium, with cover, type PZ 28-3TD Hot plate made of titanium, without cover, type PZ 28-3T Temperature controller, type TR 28-3T Program controller, type PR 5-3T Order No. 43 06 00112 43 06 00113 43 06 00117 43 06 00118 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 567

569

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Hot Plates for Rods, Gestigkeit Hot plates for rods for up to 550°C Hot plate made of special hot plate casting, smooth finished, with expansion recess. All housing parts made of stainless steel. Heating power infinitely variable from approx. 10 to 100%. Suitable for continuous operation. Type Plate Ø mm SH 15 150 SH 85 85 Wght kg 1.8 1.0 Con. load W 1000 450 Con. load V 230 230 Con. load Hz 50 50 Order No. 43 06 06115 43 06 06185 without the illustrated accessories Temperature Controllers, Gestigkeit Programmer, PR 5 series The PR 5 microprocessor-controlled ramp regulator is a complex time and temperature controller that can be used for almost all technical heating operations. A program set consisting of 5 ramps is put into operation by pressing the START button. Three parame- ters are necessary to set a ramp: ramp time, constant temperature and constant time. A programmable lead-tim allows the ramp program to be activated up to 99 hours in ad- vance. Three separate programs (temperature profiles) can be stored. The digital display con- stantly indicates the actual temperature and the time remaining before program comple- tion. At the rear of the unit is an earthing-pin socket for connecting the heater, a position- ing prop and a 2-pole main switch, at the front of the unit is a socket for a contact ther- mometers. A temperature selection limiter prevents the operator from selecting dangerous temperatures. Technical data: External W × H × D: Weight: Power supply: Performance: Regulation: 305 × 105 × 180 mm approx. 2,7 kg 220 to 240 V~, 50 to 60 Hz 220 to 240 V~, 50 to 60 Hz, 2000 W switches the load in zero phase, contact free and wear free; choice of two-point or P, PD, PID, whereby the hysteresis (proportional range), differential factor, integral factor and cy- cle time can all be separately selected selectable from 1 to 100%, no loss at the front, with sensor failure protection device with acous- tic signal obtained with actual value correction 4-digit for temperature, 3-digit for time for ramp and constant time 0 to 9 h 59 min Heater output: Sensor connection: Performance alignm.: Displays: Time ranges: Article Program controller PR 5N 1 Program controller PR 5P for NiCr-Ni, -200 to +1550°C, resolution 1 K for Pt 100, -200 to +850°C, resolution 0,1 K For matching temperature sensors, see TR... series temp. controllers Order No. 71 06 00500 71 06 00510 Matching temperature sensors Article NiCr-Ni Temperature probe jacket thermocouple made of Inconel, pliable, with plastic handle, silico- ne cable, connector, potential free, -65 to 1150°C, t09 approx. 3 sec., d = 1,5 mm, I = 150 mm, Type HFN 1150. NiCr-Ni Temperature probe V4A tube, with cable sleeve, silicone cable, connector, potential free, -65 to 1150°C, t09 approx. 3 sec., d = 1,5 mm, I = 200 mm, Type FN 215. Pt-100 Temperature probe V4A tube, with plastic handle, PVC cable, connector (3-wire), -65 to 600°C, t09 approx. 10 sec., d = 3 mm, I = 150 mm, Type HFP 600. Pt-100 Temperature probe V4A tube, with cable sleeve, silicone cable, connector (3-wire), -65 to 600°C, t09 approx. 10 sec., d = 3 mm, I = 300 mm, Type FP 330. Order No. 71 06 11500 71 06 21500 71 06 60000 71 06 33000 1 568

570

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths REC-Ceramic Digital Heating Plate, LAT The REC Heating Plate convinces not only with its innovative and ergonomical design: Not only the ceramic heating plate but also the entire technopolymer housing are abso- lutely resistant to chemicals and very easy to clean. In a matter of minutes, the REC reaches temperatures of up to 550°Celsius. The “Hot Plate Indicator” function remains visible in the display until the temperature of the heating plate dropped to below 50°C. Technical data: Dimensions: Dimensions heating plate: 180 × 180 mm Protection class: Temperature range: Power consumption: Weight: IP 42 RT to 550°C 800 W 3.3 kg 203 × 94 × 344 mm co d e b e w WWW4U081 Article REC-ceramic digital heating plate Insert for round bottom flask 250 ml Insert for round bottom flask 500 ml Insert for round bottom flask 1000 ml Heating Plate, 2 Zones, LAT Order No. 10 20 16510 10 20 16511 10 20 16512 10 20 16513 co d e b e w Dual-circuit Highlight heating element (EGO) with CERAN® glass ceramic hob. Infinitely variable energy-controlled express hot zone. WWW4U026 150/225 mm, switchable 2200 Watt / 60 Hz 230 Volt yes yes 1.5 m with earthing-pin plug set 2.74 kg 325 × 285 × 60 mm Technical data: Heated diameter: Power rating: Nominal voltage: Pilot lamp: Residual heat indicator: Power cable: Weight: Dimensions: Subject to change. Article Heating Plate EGO Hot Zones, LAT Double hot zone with Ceran® glass ceramic top 2 single-circuit Hilight heating elements (EGO) 2 infinitely variable energy-controlled express hot zones Heated diameter: Power rating: Nominal voltage: Pilot lamp Residual heat indicator Stainless steel case Dimensions: Power cable: Subject to change. 145/180 mm 1200/1800 Watt 220/230 Volt 535 × 265 × 75 mm 1.5 m with earthing-pin plug set Order No. 10 20 10210 Article Double hot zone RGK-120 Order No. 43 80 12120 Accessories A mechanical timer is available for all models. Uses: Operation of the hot zones can be limited to up to 30 minutes. Order No. 43 80 15000 co d e b e w WWW4U027 Article Mechanical timer co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 569

571

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WW2NY177 co d e b e w WWXRZ006 1 2 Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths Quick Hot Plate, neoLab® Economic single hot plate, also to be used in laboratories. 7-step power control switch. White fire-enamelled casing. Technical data: Rating: Power supply: Dimensions: Weight: Article 1500 W 220 V~ / 50 Hz 28.5 × 31.5 × 8 cm 3.3 kg Order No. Case Quick hot plate 280 × 315 mm 43 01 23871 Plate Ø mm 180 Infrared Burners, Bühler Lab burners with infrared heating elements for fast heating. Article 1 Infrared burner IRB 1 Heating capacity: Burner area: External dimensions (W×D×H): 100 × 105 × 105 mm 250 W – max. 700°C 60 × 60 mm Order No. 32 61 60600 Basic unit includes: Cross-support Power controller available as an accessory Article 2 Infrared burner IRB 2 With integrated power controller Order No. 32 61 60630 Heating capacity: Burner area: External dimensions (W×D×H): 150 × 150 × 170 mm 800 W – max. 900°C 100 × 100 mm Basic unit includes: Built-in power controller, cross-support Article 3 Infrared burner IRB 6 Modular heater based on IRB 1. Each heating section can be used and controlled indivi- Order No. 32 61 90660 dually. Heating capacity: Burner area: External dimensions (W×D×H): 697 × 305 × 122 mm (without rack stand) 6 × 250 W – each for max. 700°C each 60 × 60 mm 3 Basic unit includes: 6 × IRB 1 with cross-supports, 1 × power controller LR 6 Stand with accessories avialable on request Metal Block Thermostats Incubators, Aerne Analytic The execution of inhibitor tests for milk analysis is one of the key process steps for qual- ity assurance in the milk industry. Incubators are designed for tempering and incubating milk tests. Perfectly suited for BRT and Delvotests. Drilling diameter: 10.9 mm, drilling depth: 25 mm Type Specification Order No. 5B-230A Incubator with 5 slots, analogue 10B-230A Incubator with 10 slots, analogue 24B-230A Incubator with 24 slots, analogue 42B-230A Incubator with 42 slots, analogue 10B-230D Incubator with 10 slots, digital 50B-230D Incubator with 50 slots, digital 100B-230D Incubator with 100 slots, digital 10 64 02305 10 64 02310 10 64 02324 10 64 02342 10 64 02410 10 64 02450 10 64 02490 Note: Other models and versions for various quick tests available on request. Customized versions (number, diameter, and depth of drillings) available on request Accessories for culturing units (on request): Transferpettes, reaction vessels, pipette tips, digital control thermometer, stands for reac- tion vessels, Pasteur Plast pipettes Voltage V 230 230 230 230 230 230 230 WW39Q003 co d e b e w 570

572

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Metal Block Thermostats ThermoStat C, Eppendorf Heating and cooling The ideal device to accurately set and maintain temperatures. Precise temperature control is achieved using optimally balanced heating and cooling elements (peltier technology). The temperature keys provide quick access to five important experimental temperatures (4°C, 16°C, 37°C, 56°C and 95°C). You can also individually store 15 programs. • Excellent temperature accuracy • Precise temperature control from –10°C to 110°C* • Prevent condensation and improve temperature homogeneity with the new ThermoTop • Comprehensive range of program functions *110°C can be set when using 12 mm and cryo SmartBlocks co d e b e w WWQJ3062 Article 1 ThermoStat C Base unit without Eppendorf SmartBlock™, 220 V – 240 V ThermoTop® with condens.protect® technology SmartExtender, 1,5 ml Order No. 10 69 83019 10 69 83003 10 69 80008 1 SmartBlocks™, Eppendorf For the Eppendorf ThermoMixer C and the ThermoStat C, Eppendorf offers a great vari- ety of exchangable SmartBlocks for all commercially available tube formats from 5 µl to 50 ml. • With Eppendorf QuickRelease™ technology for quick and easy changing • With optimated block design for excellent temperature transfer to the sample co d e b e w WWQJ3071 thermoblock for 24 test tubes 0.5 ml Article SmartBlock™ 0.5 ml SmartBlock™ 1.5 ml SmartBlock™ 2.0 ml SmartBlock™ 5 ml thermoblock for 24 test tubes 1.5 ml thermoblock for 24 test tubes 2.0 ml thermoblock for 8 Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml, 8 × 5.0 ml reaction vessels thermoblock for 24 cryo tubes 1.5 – 2.0 ml, all bottom shapes thermoblock for micro test plates and deepwell plates, incl. lid thermoblock for 24 test tubes Ø 11 – 11,9 mm thermoblock for 4 conical vessels 50 ml thermoblock for 8 conical vessels 15 ml SmartBlock™ 15 ml SmartBlock™ 50 ml SmartBlock™ 12 mm SmartBlock™ cryo SmartBlock™ plates SmartBlock™ PCR 96 SmartBlock™ PCR 384 Eppendorf SmartBlock™ DWP 500 Eppendorf SmartBlock™ DWP 1000 thermoblock for PCR plates 96, incl. lid thermoblock for PCR plates 384, incl. lid thermoblock for Eppendorf Deepwell Plates 96/500 µL, incl. lid thermoblock for Eppendorf Deepwell Plate 96/1,000 µL, incl. lid Order No. 10 69 53610 10 69 53600 10 69 53620 10 69 70007 10 69 53660 10 69 53650 10 69 53640 10 69 53670 10 69 53630 10 69 53060 10 69 53070 10 69 60004 10 69 10002 Accessories: Article Transfer Rack 0.5 ml for Eppendorf SmartBlock™ 1.5 ml and Eppendorf SmartBlock™ 2.0 ml Transfer Rack 1.5/2.0 ml for Eppendorf SmartBlock™ 0.5 ml Order No. 10 69 80305 10 69 10151 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 571

573

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Metal Block Thermostats Metal Bloc Thermostats, ETG Metal Bloc Thermostats Metal block thermostats, 2 sizes, hold between 1 or 2 insert blocks for various size reaction vessels and test tubes • Temperature range room temperature to 250°C • Replaceable insert blocks can be fixed in place • Microprocessor control and innovative sensor technology for fast heat-up and high-pre- cision performance • Digital temperature/time control, settings made using membrane keys • Timer function with acoustic signal • Socket for connecting an external temperature sensor • Additional range of customer-specific blocs available on request Technical data: Number of insert blocks Temperature range: Temperature consistency: Heat-up time: Control: Settings: Temperature display: Timer: Timer signal: Dimensions without feet (W × D × H): Dimensions of insert blocks (W × D × H): Line voltage: El. heating capacity: MBT 250-1NT MBT 250-2NT 1 2 25°C to 250°C +/-0.1 K approx. 15 min to reach 100°C approx. 30 min to reach 200°C microprocessor control digital using membrane keys 4-digit, LCD 4-digit, LCD acoustic 240 × 240 × 110 mm 240 × 280 × 110 mm 78 × 115 × 49 mm 230 V, 50/60 Hz 250 W 500 W Type 1 MBT 250-1NT 2 MBT 250-2NT for quantity blocks 1 2 W × D × H mm 240×240×110 240×280×110 Heating cap. W 250 500 Order No. 10 76 12601 10 76 12602 Items included: units without blocks Accessories Article Block Block Block Block Block Block Block Ext. temperature probe MBT PT 100 all models Type MBT 24/10 MBT 24/12 MBT 12/16 MBT 12/19 MBT 40/0-5 40 test tubes 0.5 ml MBT 24/1-5 24 test tubes 1.5 ml MBT 24/2-0 24 test tubes 2.0 ml for 24 tubes with Ø 10 mm 24 tubes with Ø 12 mm 12 tubes with Ø 16 mm 12 tubes with Ø 19 mm Order No. 46 76 22410 46 76 22412 46 76 31216 46 76 31219 46 76 44005 46 76 52415 46 76 52420 46 76 60100 Metal Block Thermostates, Liebisch Metal block thermostats with permanent or exchangeable hating block with standard bore hole diameters of 5 to 41 mm. • Working temperature: ambient temperature up to 450°C, depending on model • Standard bore hole depth: 65 mm • Microprocessor-controlled temperature regulation according to specified method (PID) • Timer function can be set as a standard • Digital with LED display for simultaneous indication of set and actual temperatures, resolution: 0.1°C • Temperature recording: PT 100 (1×) • Temperature stability: <±0.2% • Rated load: 230 Volt, 50/60 Hz All devices are also available with external control box to protect the precise electronic control system from solvent evaporations of aggressive samples. Extensive range of accessories available on request. Labtherm® With fixed heating blocks, Labtherm® is the basic system in the range. 3 Holes Ø Type LT-130-36-5 LT-130-60-5 LT-130-112-5 LT-130-36-10 Working temp. °C RT-130 RT-130 RT-130 RT-130 36 60 112 36 Order No. Dimensions mm mm 5.2 340×230×130 10 83 05014 5.2 450×230×130 10 83 05134 5.2 450×230×130 10 83 04101 10.2 340×230×130 10 83 05101 Continued on next page 1 2 co d e b e w WW2XC001 3 572

574

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Metal Block Thermostats Holes Ø Type Working temp. °C LT-130-60-10 RT-130 LT-130-112-10 RT-130 LT-130-36-11-25t RT-130 LT-130-49-11-25t RT-130 LT-130-36-12 RT-130 LT-130-60-12 RT-130 LT-130-104-12 RT-130 LT-130-36-13 RT-130 LT-130-60-13 RT-130 LT-130-36-16 RT-130 LT-130-60-16 RT-130 LT-130-104-16 RT-130 LT-130-36-17 RT-130 LT-130-60-17 RT-130 LT-130-104-17 RT-130 LT-130-6-41 RT-130 LT-130-15-41 RT-130 LT-200-36-5 RT-200 LT-200-60-5 RT-200 LT-200-36-10 RT-200 LT-200-60-10 RT-200 LT-200-112-10 RT-200 LT-200-36-12 RT-200 LT-200-60-12 RT-200 LT-200-104-12 RT-200 LT-200-36-16 RT-200 LT-200-60-16 RT-200 LT-200-104-16 RT-200 LT-200-36-17 RT-200 LT-200-60-17 RT-200 LT-200-104-17 RT-200 LT-350-36-16 RT-350 LT-350-60-16 RT-350 LT-350-104-16 RT-350 LT-400-36-16 RT-400 LT-400-60-16 RT-400 LT-400-104-16 RT-400 60 112 36 49 36 60 104 36 60 36 60 104 36 60 104 6 15 36 60 36 60 112 36 60 104 36 60 104 36 60 104 36 60 104 36 60 104 Order No. Dimensions mm mm 10.2 450×230×130 10 83 01101 10.2 450×230×130 10 83 06102 11.2 340×230×130 10 83 05022 11,2 450×230×130 10 83 01125 12.2 340×230×130 10 83 05016 12.2 450×230×130 10 83 06103 12.2 450×230×130 10 83 06104 13.2 340×230×130 10 83 05017 13.2 450×230×130 10 83 05137 16.2 340×230×130 46 83 13036 16.2 450×230×130 46 83 13060 16.2 530×290×130 10 83 05258 17.2 340×230×130 10 83 05019 17.2 450×230×130 10 83 05139 17.2 530×290×130 10 83 05259 41.0 340×230×130 10 83 06105 41.0 450×230×130 10 83 06106 5.2 340×230×130 10 83 05114 5.2 450×230×130 10 83 05234 10.2 340×230×130 10 83 07101 10.2 450×230×130 10 83 07102 10.2 450×230×130 10 83 07103 12.2 340×230×130 10 83 07104 12.2 450×230×130 10 83 07105 12.2 450×230×130 10 83 07106 16.2 340×230×130 46 83 20036 16.2 450×230×130 46 83 20060 16.2 530×290×130 10 83 05358 17.2 340×230×130 10 83 05020 17.2 450×230×130 10 83 05140 17.2 530×290×130 10 83 05260 16.2 430×290×160 10 83 05318 16.2 520×290×130 10 83 05438 16.2 580×370×180 10 83 07107 16.2 430×290×160 10 83 08101 16.2 520×290×160 10 83 08102 16.2 580×370×180 10 83 08103 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. 4 Labtherm®-PVC The Labtherm® PVC is intended for determining the thermostability of PVC in accordance with VDE 0472 Testing of cables, wires and flexible cords. Type LT-PVC-210-36-5 RT-210 Working temp. °C Holes 36 Dimensions mm Ø mm 5.2 340×230×130 10 83 06014 Order No. 5 Minitherm® With fixed heating blocks, Minitherm® is the small version of the base system. Order No. Holes Type Working temp. °C MT-130-16-10 RT-130 MT-130-16-11-25 RT-130 MT-130-16-12 RT-130 MT-130-16-13 RT-130 MT-130-16-16 RT-130 MT-130-16-17 RT-130 16 16 16 16 16 16 Dimensions mm Ø mm 10.2 260×180×120 10 83 06107 11.2 260×180×120 10 83 06125 12.2 260×180×120 10 83 05638 13.2 260×180×120 10 83 05637 16.2 260×180×120 10 83 01303 17.2 260×180×120 10 83 05639 3 3 4 5 6 6 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. 6 Type Thermobil® The Thermobil® offers the maximum flexibility in the lab. The interchangeable heating blocks are tailored exactly to the tray, milled from one complete aluminum block. Diame- ters in our standard range extend from 5.2 to 18.2 mm. Dimensions mm 340×230×130 340×230×130 450×230×130 450×230×130 Working temperature °C RT-130 RT-200 RT-130 RT-200 10 83 05001 10 83 05002 10 83 05100 46 83 20056 TM-130-36 TM-200-36 TM-130-56 TM-200-56 Order No. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 573 Continued on next page

575

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers 1 Metal Block Thermostats Control Labtherm®Control-Box The Labtherm® Control-Boxes can substitute the installed microprocessor control unit. They can be used for all Liebisch-Metalblock-Thermostats with a PT100 for external con- trol to protect the precise electronic system from solvent evaporations of aggressive sam- ples. Type LT-R LT-R-T-int Control-box with electronical timer 4-digit Specification Control-box with ramp function Order No. 10 83 06610 10 83 06612 (0-99.99 min/sec / 0-99.99 h/min / 0-999.9 h) Standard control-box for 2 units Control-box with weekly timer 10 83 06620 10 83 06621 LT-R-2 LT-R-W 2 Type Monoblocks for Thermobil® “small block holder” Holes Ø Depth mm 3 4 1 2 5 574 MHB-36-5 36 MHB-EVA-32-5 32 MHB-36-10 36 MHB-EVA-32-10 32 MHB-36-11,2-25tief 36 MHB-EVA-32-11,2-25deep 32 MHB-EVA-32-11.9-20 32 MHB-36-12 36 MHB-EVA-32-12 32 MHB-36-13 36 MHB-EVA-32-13 32 MHB-36-16 36 MHB-EVA-32-16 32 MHB-36-17 36 MHB-EVA-32-17 32 mm 5.2 65 5.2 65 10.2 65 10.2 65 11.2 25 11.2 25 11.9 20 12.2 65 12.2 65 13.2 65 13.2 65 16.2 65 16.2 65 17.2 65 17.2 65 Bottom Block dim. mm Order No. pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01400 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 05400 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01515 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01555 flat 139×139×50 10 83 01520 139×139×50 10 83 01560 flat flat 139×139×50 10 83 01548 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01600 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 00000 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01517 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01557 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01518 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01558 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01519 pointed 139×139×75 10 83 01559 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. 3 Type Monoblocks for Thermobil® “small block holder” for Eppendorf vessels Holes for vessels Block dimensions mm Order No. MHB-56-0,2Ep 56 MHB-36-0,5Ep 36 MHB-EVA-32-0,5Ep 32 MHB-36-1,5Ep 36 MHB-EVA-32-1,5Ep 32 MHB-36-2,0Ep 36 MHB-EVA-32-2,0Ep 32 MHB-36/18-0,5/ 36 MHB-36/18-1,5/ 36 18-1,5Ep 18-2,0Ep Eppendorf 0.2 ml 139×139×50 Eppendorf 0.5 ml 139×139×50 Eppendorf 0.5 ml 139×139×50 Eppendorf 1.5 ml 139×139×50 Eppendorf 1.5 ml 139×139×50 Eppendorf 2.0 ml 139×139×50 Eppendorf 2.0 ml 139×139×50 Eppendorf 0.5 139×139×50 and 1.5 ml Eppendorf 1.5 and 2.0 ml 139×139×50 10 83 01510 10 83 01511 10 83 01551 10 83 01512 10 83 01552 10 83 01513 10 83 01553 10 83 01200 10 83 01113 Monoblocks for Thermobil® “small block holder” for microtiter-plate 4 Type for MHB-96-T-00 MHB-96-T-F MHB-96-T-R MHB-96-T-V MHB-96-T-0,2Ep 96er without bores 96er flat bottom 96er round bottom 96er V-bottom 96er for 0.2ml conical Block dimensions mm 139×139×50 139×139×50 139×139×50 139×139×50 139×139×50 Order No. 10 83 09600 10 83 09610 10 83 09620 10 83 09630 10 83 09640 Monoblocks for Thermobil® “large block holder” 5 Type Holes Ø MHB-EVA-56-5 56 MHB-108-5 108 MHB-EVA-56-10 56 MHB-108-10 108 MHB-EVA-56-11,2-25deep 56 MHB-EVA-56-11 56 MHB-EVA-56-12 56 MHB-89-12 89 MHB-EVA-56-13 56 MHB-89-13 89 MHB-EVA-56-16 56 MHB-EVA-56-17 56 Depth mm mm 5.2 65 5.2 65 10.2 65 10.2 65 11.2 25 11.9 20 12.2 65 12.2 65 13.2 65 13.2 65 16.2 65 17.2 65 Bottom Block dimensions mm pointed 239×139×75 pointed 239×139×75 pointed 239×139×75 pointed 239×139×75 239×139×50 flat flat 239×139×50 pointed 239×139×75 pointed 239×139×75 pointed 239×139×75 pointed 239×139×75 pointed 239×139×75 pointed 239×139×75 Order No. 10 83 03400 10 83 04400 10 83 01535 10 83 04500 10 83 01543 10 83 01542 10 83 01536 10 83 01546 10 83 01537 10 83 01547 46 83 15616 10 83 01539 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. Continued on next page

576

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Metal Block Thermostats Monoblocks for Thermobil® “large block holder” for Eppendorf vessels 6 Type MHB-92-0,2Ep MHB-56-0,5Ep MHB-56-1,5Ep MHB-56-2,0Ep MHB-56/28-0,5/ 28-1,5Ep MHB-56/28-1,5/ 28-2,0Ep Holes for vessels 92 56 56 56 56 56 Eppendorf 0.2 ml Eppendorf 0.5 ml Eppendorf 1.5 ml Eppendorf 2.0 ml Eppendorf 0.5 and 1.5 ml Eppendorf 1.5 and 2.0 ml Block dimensions mm 239×139×50 239×139×50 239×139×50 239×139×50 239×139×50 Order No. 10 83 01530 10 83 01531 10 83 01532 10 83 01533 10 83 01534 239×139×50 10 83 01538 7 Type Monoblocks for Thermobil® “large block holder” for micrititer-plate for MHB-2×96-T-00 MHB-2×96-T-F MHB-2×96-T-R MHB-2×96-T-V MHB-2×96-T-0,2Ep 2× 96er for 0,2ml conical Block dimensions mm 239×139×50 2× 96er without bores 2× 96er with flat bottom 239×139×50 2× 96er with round bottom 239×139×50 239×139×50 2× 96er with V-bottom 239×139×50 Order No. 10 83 00120 10 83 00121 10 83 00122 10 83 00123 10 83 00124 8 Thermobil® Mini Thermobil® Mini is our miniature version for premium flexibility in the lab. With greatest accuracy, the exchangeable Mini monoblocks are adjusted to the block which is milled out of a solid aluminium block. Our standard program covers diameters from 5.2 to 18.2 mm. Type TM-M-130-16 Working temperature °C RT-130 Dimensions mm 260×180×120 Order No. 10 83 05600 Mono blocks for Thermobil® Mini 9 Type Holes Ø MHB-M-EVA-12-0,5Ep 12 MHB-M-EVA-12-1,5Ep 12 MHB-M-EVA-12-2,0Ep 12 MHB-M-EVA-12-10 12 MHB-M-EVA-12-11 12 MHB-M-EVA-12-12 12 MHB-M-EVA-12-13 12 MHB-M-EVA-12-16 12 MHB-M-EVA-12-17 12 Depth mm mm 0.5 ml Epp 32 1.5 ml Epp 32 2.0 ml Epp 32 65 10.2 25 11.2 65 12.2 65 13.2 16.2 65 65 17.2 Bottom Block dimensions mm pointed 99×99×50 pointed 99×99×50 pointed 99×99×50 pointed 99×99×75 flat 99×99×50 pointed 99×99×75 pointed 99×99×75 pointed 99×99×75 pointed 99×99×75 Order No. 10 83 09931 46 83 12150 10 83 09933 10 83 09935 10 83 09942 10 83 09936 10 83 09937 10 83 09938 10 83 09939 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. AT Epptherm® Epptherm® is a special device for the thermostatization of 0.5 / 1.5 / 2.0 ml reaction ves- sels. Type Holes for Order No. Working temp. °C Dimensions mm EPT-130-64-0,2 RT-130 EPT-130-36-0,5 RT-130 EPT-130-36/ RT-130 18-0,5/18-1,5 EPT-130-36-1,5 RT-130 EPT-130-36/ RT-130 18-1,5/18-2,0 EPT-130-36-2,0 RT-130 EPT-130-112-0,2 RT-130 EPT-130-60-0,5 RT-130 EPT-130-60/ RT-130 30-0,5/30-1,5 EPT-130-60-1,5 RT-130 EPT-130-60/ RT-130 30-1,5/30-2,0 EPT-130-60-2,0 RT-130 EPT-130-104-0,5 RT-130 EPT-130-104/ RT-130 52-0,5/52-1,5 EPT-130-104-1,5 RT-130 EPT-130-104/ RT-130 52-1,5/52-2,0 EPT-130-104-2,0 RT-130 64 36 36 36 36 36 112 60 60 60 60 60 104 104 104 104 104 0.2 ml Epp 340×230×130 10 83 00610 0.5 ml Epp 340×230×130 10 83 01610 340×230×130 10 83 05061 0.5 and 1.5 ml Epp 1.5 ml Epp 340×230×130 46 83 13015 1.5 and 340×230×130 10 83 05062 2.0 ml Epp 2.0 ml Epp 340×230×130 10 83 01661 0.2 ml Epp 450×230×130 10 83 00611 0.5 ml Epp 450×230×130 10 83 02611 0.5 and 450×230×130 10 83 03611 1.5 ml Epp 1.5 ml Epp 450×230×130 10 83 05132 450×230×130 10 83 05164 1.5 and 2.0 ml Epp 2.0 ml Epp 450×230×130 46 83 13062 0.5 ml Epp 530×290×130 10 83 05265 0.5 and 530×290×130 10 83 05511 1.5 ml Epp 1.5 ml Epp 530×290×130 10 83 05252 1.5 and 530×290×130 10 83 05266 2.0 ml Epp 2.0 ml Epp 530×290×130 10 83 05253 9 6 7 8 AT AT AT Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 575 Continued on next page

577

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Metal Block Thermostats Test racks Test racks for convenient handling of Eppendorf vessels 0,5 – 2,0 ml. 1 Type EPTG-36-0,5 EPTG-36-1,5/2,0 EPTG-60-0,5 EPTG-60-1,5/2,0 EPTG-104-1,5/2,0 Holes 36 36 60 60 104 Volume ml 0.5 1.5/2.0 0.5 1.5/2.0 1.5/2.0 Order No. 10 83 01611 10 83 01612 10 83 01621 10 83 01622 10 83 01632 1 2 Epptherm® Mini The Epptherm® Mini is a special device for the thermostatization of 0.5 / 1.5 / 2.0 ml re- action vessels. Type Working temp. °C Holes for Dimensions mm Order No. MT-130-16-0,5Ep RT-130 MT-130-16-1,5Ep RT-130 MT-130-16-2,0Ep RT-130 MT-130-16-/ RT-130 8-0,5/8-1,5 MT-130-16-/ RT-130 16 16 16 16 16 0.5 ml Epp 260×180×120 10 83 05631 1.5 ml Epp 260×180×120 10 83 05632 2.0 ml Epp 260×180×120 10 83 05633 0.5/1.5 ml 260×180×120 10 83 05661 Epp 1.5/2.0 ml Epp 260×180×120 10 83 05662 8-1,5/8-2,0 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. 3 Mikrotherm® Specially designed for the thermostatization of microtiter plates. Type for Working temp. °C RT-130 96er without bores RT-130 96er flat bottom RT-130 96er round bottom RT-130 96er V-bottom LT-130-96-T-00 LT-130-96-T-F LT-130-96-T-R LT-130-96-T-V LT-130-2×96-T-00 RT-130 2× 96er without bores LT-130-2×96-T-F RT-130 2× 96er flat bottom LT-130-2×96-T-R RT-130 2× 96er round bottom LT-130-2×96-T-V RT-130 96er V-bottom Order No. 10 83 06310 10 83 06311 10 83 06312 10 83 06313 10 83 06320 10 83 06321 10 83 06322 10 83 06323 4 Evaporator® The Evaporator® is the complete system for efficient sample concentration. It consists of a Labtherm® with permanently installed heater block and the Multiplex valve depot for 32 or 60 sample places. Holes Ø mm 32 (36) 5.2 32 (36) 10.2 32 (36) 11.2 32 (36) 12.2 32 (36) 13.2 32 (36) 16.2 32 (36) 17.2 32 (36) 5.2 32 (36) 10.2 32 (36) 12.2 32 (36) 13.2 32 (36) 16.2 32 (36) 17.2 60 Type Working temp. °C EVTF-130-36-5 RT-130 EVTF-130-36-10 RT-130 EVTF-130-36-11 RT-130 EVTF-130-36-12 RT-130 EVTF-130-36-13 RT-130 EVTF-130-36-16 RT-130 EVTF-130-36-17 RT-130 EVTF-200-36-5 RT-200 EVTF-200-36-10 RT-200 EVTF-200-36-12 RT-200 EVTF-200-36-13 RT-200 EVTF-200-36-16 RT-200 EVTF-200-36-17 RT-200 EVTF-130-60/ RT-130 30-1,5/30-2,0Ep EVTF-130-60-5 RT-130 EVTF-130-60-10 RT-130 EVTF-130-60-11 RT-130 EVTF-130-60-12 RT-130 EVTF-130-60-13 RT-130 EVTF-130-60-16 RT-130 EVTF-130-60-17 RT-130 EVTF-200-60-5 RT-200 EVTF-200-60-10 RT-200 EVTF-200-60-12 RT-200 EVTF-200-60-13 RT-200 EVTF-200-60-16 RT-200 EVTF-200-60-17 RT-200 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 1.5 and 2.0 ml Epp 5.2 10.2 11.2 12.2 13.2 16.2 17.2 5.2 10.2 12.2 13.2 16.2 17.2 Order No. Dimensions mm 340×230×130 10 83 04610 340×230×130 10 83 03610 340×230×130 10 83 06111 340×230×130 10 83 07611 340×230×130 10 83 03613 340×230×130 46 83 13016 340×230×130 10 83 03617 340×230×130 10 83 07621 340×230×130 10 83 03710 340×230×130 10 83 03712 340×230×130 10 83 03713 340×230×130 10 83 08621 340×230×130 10 83 03717 450×230×130 10 83 03831 450×230×130 10 83 06611 450×230×130 10 83 06010 450×230×130 10 83 04611 450×230×130 10 83 06012 450×230×130 10 83 06013 450×230×130 10 83 06016 450×230×130 10 83 06017 450×230×130 10 83 08622 450×230×130 10 83 06110 450×230×130 10 83 08623 450×230×130 10 83 06113 450×230×130 46 83 20016 450×230×130 10 83 06117 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. Continued on next page 1 3 2 3 4 576

578

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers 5 Metal Block Thermostats Evaporator® The Evaporator® is the complete system for efficient sample concentration. It consists of a Thermobil® with replaceable heater block and the Multiplex valve depot for 32 or 56 samples. Type Working temp. °C Holes Ø EVTM-130-32-5 RT-130 EVTM-130-32-10 RT-130 EVTM-130-32-11 RT-130 EVTM-130-32-12 RT-130 EVTM-130-32-13 RT-130 EVTM-130-32-16 RT-130 EVTM-130-32-17 RT-130 EVTM-200-32-5 RT-200 EVTM-200-32-10 RT-200 EVTM-200-32-12 RT-200 EVTM-200-32-13 RT-200 EVTM-200-32-16 RT-200 EVTM-200-32-17 RT-200 EVTM-130-56-5 RT-130 EVTM-130-56/ RT-130 28-1,5/28-2,0Ep EVTM-130-56-10 RT-130 EVTM-130-56-11 RT-130 EVTM-130-56-12 RT-130 EVTM-130-56-13 RT-130 EVTM-130-56-16 RT-130 EVTM-130-56-17 RT-130 EVTM-200-56-5 RT-200 EVTM-200-56-10 RT-200 EVTM-200-56-12 RT-200 EVTM-200-56-13 RT-200 EVTM-200-56-16 RT-200 EVTM-200-56-17 RT-200 mm 5.2 10.2 11.2 12.2 13.2 16.2 17.2 5.2 10.2 12.2 13.2 16.2 17.2 5.2 1.5 and 2.0 ml Epp 10.2 11.2 12.2 13.2 16.2 17.2 5.2 10.2 12.2 13.2 16.2 17.2 Order No. Dimensions mm 340×230×130 10 83 05411 340×230×130 10 83 03210 340×230×130 10 83 03601 340×230×130 10 83 05611 340×230×130 10 83 03213 340×230×130 46 83 13032 340×230×130 10 83 03217 340×230×130 10 83 08624 340×230×130 10 83 03310 340×230×130 10 83 08625 340×230×130 10 83 03313 340×230×130 10 83 03316 340×230×130 10 83 03317 450×230×130 10 83 05612 450×230×130 10 83 03431 450×230×130 10 83 05610 450×230×130 10 83 04311 450×230×130 10 83 06101 450×230×130 10 83 05613 450×230×130 10 83 05616 450×230×130 10 83 05617 450×230×130 10 83 08626 450×230×130 10 83 05710 450×230×130 10 83 08627 450×230×130 10 83 05713 450×230×130 46 83 20017 450×230×130 10 83 05717 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 56 5 6 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. Working temp. °C 6 Evaporator® Mini The Evaporator® Mini is the miniature version of the complete system for efficient sample concentration. It consists of a Minitherm® with permanently installed heater block and the Multiplex valve depot for 16 sample places. Holes Ø Dimensions Order No. Type EVTF-M-130-16-1,5Ep RT-130 16 EVTF-M-130-16-2,0Ep RT-130 16 EVTF-M-130-16-5 RT-130 16 EVTF-M-130-16-11 RT-130 16 EVTF-M-130-16-12 RT-130 16 EVTF-M-130-16-13 RT-130 16 EVTF-M-130-16-16 RT-130 16 EVTF-M-130-16-17 RT-130 16 mm mm 1.5 ml Epp 260×180×120 10 83 09611 2.0 ml Epp 260×180×120 10 83 09612 260×180×120 10 83 09613 5.2 260×180×120 10 83 06948 11.2 260×180×120 10 83 06936 12.2 260×180×120 10 83 06937 13.2 260×180×120 10 83 01306 16.2 260×180×120 10 83 06939 17.2 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. Working temp. °C 7 Evaporator® Mini The Evaporator® Mini is the miniature version of the complete system for efficient sample concentration. It consists of a Thermobil® Mini with replaceable heater block and the Multiplex valve depot for 12 sample places. Holes Ø Dimensions Order No. Type EVTM-M-130-12-1,5Ep RT-130 12 EVTM-M-130-12-2,0Ep RT-130 12 EVTM-M-130-12-5 RT-130 12 EVTM-M-130-12-11 RT-130 12 EVTM-M-130-12-12 RT-130 12 EVTM-M-130-12-13 RT-130 12 EVTM-M-130-12-16 RT-130 12 EVTM-M-130-12-17 RT-130 12 mm mm 1.5 ml Epp 260×180×120 10 83 09614 2.0 ml Epp 260×180×120 10 83 09615 260×180×120 10 83 09616 5.2 11.2 260×180×120 10 83 02601 12.2 260×180×120 10 83 07036 13.2 260×180×120 10 83 07037 16.2 260×180×120 10 83 07038 17.2 260×180×120 10 83 07039 Special versions (number, diameter, and depth of bores) available on request. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Continued on next page 7 577

579

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers 1 Metal Block Thermostats Multiplex-Valve-Unit Multiplex-Valve-Unit for evaporating and concentrating different samples with selected gases. High-adjustable and swivelling to the side for easy sample loading. Incl. frame rod, coupling bracket, unit-clamps, luer-needles and PTFE-hose attachment. 1 Type MPVD-16 MPVD-32 MPVD-60 MPVD-PTFE-16 MPVD-PTFE-32 MPVD-PTFE-60 1 MPVD-96-Mikrotiter MPVD-96-Mikrotiter, 8 sectors lockable MPVD-S-xx Accessories Specification for Minis with up to 16 bores for up to 32 bores for up to 56/60 bores for up to 16 bores with PTFE-coated Luer-Needles for up to 32 bores with PTFE-coated Luer-Needles for up to 56/60 bores with PTFE-coa- ted Luer-Needles with PTFE-coated Luer-Needles for 96er Mikrotiter-plates with PTFE-coated Luer-Needles for 96er Mikrotiter-plates, 8 sectors locka- ble á 12 positions Special version Order No. 10 83 01709 10 83 01710 10 83 01711 10 83 01712 10 83 01713 10 83 01714 10 83 01715 10 83 01716 10 83 01799 1 Specification 3 LT-GK-60 “big crank” 2 LT-KK-32 “little crank” Article Luer-Needles stainless steel 100 mm length, 12 pc./pack. Luer-Needles stainless steel 100 mm length, 16 pc./pack. Luer-Needles stainless steel 50 mm length, 12 pc./pack. Luer-Needles PTFE PTFE-coated, 12 pc./pack. PTFE- hose attachment 16 pc./pack. PTFE- hose attachment 32 pc./pack. Frame rod, complete for the MPVD, incl. adjustable ring, 2x clamps, 3× keys comfortable crank handle wheel for simultaneous stepless turning down of the MPVD comfortable crank handle wheel for simultaneous stepless turning down of the MPVD Conversion kit for upgrading the standard tripod rod to the conveni- ent hand crank Conversion kit for upgrading the standard tripod rod to the conveni- ent hand crank (factory conversion only) chrome for MPVD, incl. screws 10 pieces = 1 PU 10 pieces = 1 PU Luer-Needle attachment Mounting clamps Knurled screws Covering caps 5 Conversion kit MPVD-60 4 Conversion kit MPVD-32 Order No. 10 83 01821 10 83 01717 10 83 01822 10 83 01823 10 83 01810 10 83 01811 10 83 01812 10 83 01813 10 83 01814 10 83 01103 10 83 01104 10 83 01962 10 83 01961 10 83 04471 10 83 01414 6 Covering caps High-quality transparent cover hoods with two stainless steel handles, for use at max. 200°C. suitable for Order No. Type for blocks, dimensions mm LT-AH-100 Minitherm® and Thermobil® Mini 120×120 LT-AH-140 LT-36 and TM-32 139×139 LT-AH-240 LT-60 and TM-56 239×139 10 83 00100 10 83 00140 10 83 00240 7 Covering plates Transparent cover plate with handle for mono-blocks with 50 mm block height (eg. Ep- pendorf, Mikrotiter etc.). Type suitable for TM-AP-100 TM-AP-140 TM-AP-240 TM-Mini TM-32 TM-56 for blocks, dimensions mm 99×99 139×139 239×139 Order No. 10 83 01100 10 83 01140 10 83 01240 8 Rotatherm The Rotatherm® connects temperature control with gentle overhead mixing. With the variably adjustable rotation, the samples are mixed by either regular or permanent rota- tion. The integrated timer makes it possible to programme individual operating steps. The device is available with fixed installed heating blockes or with exchangable heating blocks upon request. Continued on next page 4 5 2 3 6 7 578

580

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Metal Block Thermostats Technical data: Temperature range: Sample places: Drilling diameter: Drilling depth: Drilling bottom: Heating rate: Revolution: Heating power: Operating voltage: Housing dimensions: 650 × 240 × 450 mm RT to +150°C max. 2 × 32 5 to 41 mm max. 90 mm pointed, round or plain upon request up to 50 rpm 1250 Watt 230 Volt Article Rotatherm RT-150-2x... Order No. 10 83 01502 8 co d e b e w WW2NY232 9 AT co d e b e w WWSB5026 neoBlock Heaters Mono and Duo, neoLab® Inexpensive heating block thermostat with large technical advantages and small required space. Its microprocessor keeps data memorized in case of power failure. The temperature sensor can be inserted from either the top or the back of the unit. Features include a 11 mm high digital display for the temperature. Parallel indication of set and actual temperature, and a built-in timer with auto-off function for up to 99.9 hours. A flashing control light indicates afterheat if the instrument is turned off at a heating block temperature of above 60°C. The temperature setting can be changed at any time. The neoBlock Duo was developed on the basis of the small model (46 01 22503). The neoBlock Duo matches 2 aluminium blocks in a row or one large block for microtiter plates (46 01 22512). Technical data: • Timer • After-heat indication at temperatures above 60°C Temperature: Accuracy: Dimensions (L×W×H): Weight: Power supply: RT to 110°C 0,1°C, at 37°C: ±0,2°C, at 110°C: ±0,4°C 16 × 11 × 15 cm Mono 19 × 14 × 15 cm Duo 1,8 kg 230 V/50 Hz Article Order No. 9 DIGI-Block heater Mono 46 01 22503 AT neoBlock heater Duo without block 46 01 22504 Aluminium heating block 6 × 8 mm holes for PCR-tubes 0.2 ml 10 01 22513 Aluminium heating block 24 × 8 mm holes for reaction vessels 0.5 ml 46 01 22505 Aluminium heating block 24 × 10 mm holes for reaction vessels 1.5 ml 46 01 22506 Aluminium heating block 24 × 13 mm holes for test tubers 46 01 22508 Aluminium heating block 6 × 20 mm holes for test tubers 46 01 22509 Aluminium heating block 2 × 4 mm holes for test tubers 10 01 22514 Aluminium heating block non-drilled (fro self-drilling) 46 01 22511 Aluminium heating block solid for MTP (only 1 piece required) 46 01 22512 Dry Bath HB-100, Phoenix Instrument Digital Dry Bath HB100 with various interchangeable heating blocks is ideal for molecular biology, histology, clinical, environmental and industrial laboratories, including melting and boiling point determination, enzyme reactions, incubation and activation of cultures, immunoassays, DNA denaturation, culture media tests, coagulation tests, blood-urea-ni- trogen determinations and in-situ hybridizations. • A broad temperature range to 120°C, for a variety of applications • Continuous and time operation • Various types of optional block are available • Over temperature protection Article Dry bath HB-100 Order No. 10 13 79101 Heating blocks for digital dry bath HB-100 Type Capacity HB-E100 0.2 ml HB-E105 0.5 ml HB-E110 1.5/2 ml HB-E115 5/15 ml HB-E120 50 ml HB-E125 0.2 ml+0.5 ml+1.5/2 ml HB-E130 96 o. 384 Well plate Quantity wells 54 40 40 28 8 each 18 1 Depth Ø mm mm 15 5.4 26.4 8.2 34.7 11 17 48 29.8 48 Order No. 10 13 79102 10 13 79105 10 13 79110 10 13 79115 10 13 79120 10 13 79125 10 13 79130 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 579

581

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Thermomixers see page 675 Quartz Heaters Surface Evaporators, QCS Surface evaporators made of quartz material, for the concentration or evaporation of acids and other liquid chemicals. No vigorous boiling and splashing thanks to indirect heating by means of infrared radiation. Resistant to aggressive media. 230 V, 60Hz. Surface Evaporators Type OV 140 OV 200 Power rating W 700 1000 Ø mm 140 200 Height mm 55 70 Stand with clamp for all types Height mm 520 Evaporating dishes Ø for type mm 160 230 OV 140 OV 200 Footprint mm 300 × 250 Height mm 50 70 Carrier plates made of quartz material for type Support rings made of quartz material for type OV 140 OV 200 OV 140 OV 200 Ø mm 165 225 Ø mm 130 180 Volume cm3 400 1000 Height mm 165 225 Height mm 50 80 Order No. 44 56 05011 44 56 05021 Order No. 44 56 05017 Order No. 44 56 05012 44 56 05022 Order No. 44 56 15032 44 56 15030 Order No. 44 56 15033 44 56 15031 Immersion Heaters, QCS Immersion heaters made of quartz glass Resistant to aggressive media. For heating liquids, acids and chemicals by infrared radiation. Resistant to heat cycles. Also with standard ground joint 34/35 or flange for simple installation in glass appa- ratus. 230 V, 60 Hz. Immersion heater without standard ground joint Type LT 250 LT 500 LT 750 LT 1000 LT 1500 Power rating W 250 500 750 1000 1500 Overall length approx. mm 270 320 420 470 520 heated length mm 100 150 250 300 350 Immersion heater with standard ground joint NS 34/35 Type Power rating LTS 250 LTS 500 LTS 750 LTS 1000 LTS 1500 W 250 500 750 1000 1500 Length from lower edge of standard ground joint mm 180 230 330 380 430 Order No. 44 56 06505 44 56 06515 44 56 06525 44 56 06535 44 56 06545 Order No. 44 56 06555 44 56 06565 44 56 06575 44 56 06585 44 56 06595 580

582

Heating Tapes Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Tapes, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT®-Heating tapes KM-HT-BS30 Highly flexible; no protection against ingress of water; protective metal briding outside (protective conductor); outer sheath in glass silk Max. heating element temperature: 450°C Dimension: Bending radius: Nominal voltage: Preterminated with 1,0 m cold end 30 × 5 mm > 15 mm 230 V AC Length Length Order No. Heating cap. W 125 250 375 500 625 Heating cap. W m 750 0.5 1000 1.0 1250 1.5 1500 2.0 2.5 2000 Other designs of heating tapes, also up to 900°C, on request. 45 91 13005 45 91 13010 45 91 13015 45 91 13020 45 91 13025 m 3.0 4.0 5.0 7.0 10.0 Order No. 45 91 13030 45 91 13040 45 91 13050 45 91 13070 45 91 13100 co d e b e w WWE38002 co d e b e w WWE38003 Heating Cables, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT®-Heating cables KM-HC-G Highly flexible; no protection against ingress of water; with glass-silk braiding Max. heating element temperature: 450°C Dimension: Bending radius: nominal voltage: Preterminated with 2 × 1.5 m cold end Ø 3.5 to 4.5 mm > 5 mm 230 V AC Length m 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 Heating cap. W 75 150 225 300 375 Order No. 45 91 12005 45 91 12010 45 91 12015 45 91 12020 45 91 12025 Length m 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 Heating cap. W 450 600 750 900 Order No. 45 91 12030 45 91 12040 45 91 12050 45 91 12060 Heating cables in other versions, also until 1000°C on request. Heating Mantles Heating Mantles, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT® standard heating mantles KM-G for flask, round bottom Outer jacket in glass silk and flexible glass yarn heating element, which are adapted to the respective vessel shapes and sizes, from 500 ml with 60-mm Ø bottom outlet. Maximum heating element temperature 450°C. 1.5 m power supply (earthed) cable with heating-zone switch and personal protection adapter, nominal voltage 230 V AC. co d e b e w WWE38007 Vol. Heating cap. W Order No. Vol. Order No. Quantity heating zones 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 ml 25 65 50 75 100 120 250 180 500 250 1000 450 2000 600 Special heating mantles with other specifications (voltage, power) available on request. ml 3000 800 4000 900 5000 1200 6000 1400 10000 2000 20000 2200 45 91 95013 45 91 95017 45 91 95024 45 91 95036 45 91 95044 45 91 95054 45 91 95063 45 91 95068 45 91 95071 45 91 95073 45 91 95076 45 91 95086 45 91 95091 Heating cap. W Quantity heating zones 2 2 2 2 2 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 581

583

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Mantles Heating Mantles, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT® high temperature heating mantles KM-GH for flasks, round bottom Designed identical to series KM-G, but the heating element is made of heat-resistant quartz yarn for higher capacities and temperatures. Maximum heating conductor temperature 900°C. 1.5 m power supply (earthed) cable with heating-zone switch and personal protection adapter. Nominal voltage 230 V AC. co d e b e w WWE38010 co d e b e w WWE38012 1 2 co d e b e w WWE38011 Vol. Heating cap. W ml 100 200 250 300 500 500 1000 750 Quantity heating zones 1 2 2 2 Order No. 45 91 96224 45 91 96236 45 91 96244 45 91 96254 Vol. Heating cap. W ml 2000 1200 4000 1800 6000 2500 Quantity heating zones 2 2 2 Order No. 45 91 96263 45 91 96271 45 91 96276 Special heating mantles with other specifications (voltage, power) available on request. Heating Mantles Accessories, SAF Wärmetechnik 1 Tripod KM-DF Made of stainless steel (1.4031), for higher stability of heating mantles from the series KM-G and KM-GH. The heating mantle is hereby on its four clips in the tripod suspended. 2 Supporting ring KM-TR Made of stainless steel (1.4031), for securing heating mantles from the series KM-G and KM-GH in support setups. The heating mantle is able to be suspended on its four clips in the support ring. Volume ml 25 50 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 10000 20000 Tripod Order No. 45 91 19124 45 91 19136 45 91 19144 45 91 19154 45 91 19163 45 91 19168 45 91 19171 45 91 19173 45 91 19176 45 91 19186 45 91 19191 Support ring Order No. 45 91 19213 45 91 19217 45 91 19224 45 91 19236 45 91 19244 45 91 19254 45 91 19263 45 91 19268 45 91 19271 Heating Mantles, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT® metal-cased heating mantles KM-M for flasks, round bottom Flexible heater in a plastic-coated, chemical-resistant metal housing with integrated mains and heating zones switch. Max. heating element temperature 450°C. 1.5 m power supply (earthed) cable with plug and personal protection adapter. Nominal voltage 230 V AC. Vol. Heating cap. W Order No. Vol. Order No. 582 Quantity heating zones 1 1 2 2 2 2 ml 50 55 100 100 250 150 500 200 1000 300 2000 500 Metal-cased heating mantles for glasses or other vessel forms available on request. ml 3000 600 4000 750 5000 860 6000 1000 10000 1400 20000 2000 45 91 91017 45 91 91024 45 91 91029 45 91 91044 45 91 91054 45 91 91063 45 91 91068 45 91 91071 45 91 91073 45 91 91076 45 91 91086 45 91 91091 Heating cap. W Quantity heating zones 2 2 2 2 2 2

584

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Mantles Heating Mantles, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT® Metal-cased heating mantles KM-ME for flasks, round bottom Flexible heater in a plastic-coated, chemical-resistant metal housing with integrated mains and heating zones switch, and additionally with integrated controller for continuous pow- er adjustment. Max. heating element temperature 450°C. 1.5 m supply cable with earth contact type plug and safety switch, nominal voltage 230 V AC. Order No. Vol. Order No. ml 50 55 100 100 250 150 500 200 1000 300 2000 500 Metal-cased heating mantles for glasses or other vessel forms available on request. ml 3000 600 4000 750 5000 860 6000 1000 10000 1400 20000 2000 45 91 92017 45 91 92024 45 91 92036 45 91 92044 45 91 92054 45 91 92063 45 91 92068 45 91 92071 45 91 92073 45 91 92076 45 91 92086 45 91 92091 Heating cap. W Quantity heating zones 2 2 2 2 2 2 Vol. Heating cap. W Quantity heating zones 1 1 2 2 2 2 Heating Mantles, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT®-Multi heating mantles KM-MPE for flasks, round bottom Design and technology identical with series KM-ME, but with a special heater, suitable for three different flask sizes. Max. heating element temperature 450°C, 1.5 m supply cable with earth contact type plug and safety switch, nominal voltage 230 V AC. Volume ml 50 – 250 250 – 1000 1000 – 3000 Heating capacity W 160 350 700 Quantity heating zones 3 3 3 Order No. 45 91 93036 45 91 93054 45 91 93068 Metal-cased heating mantles for glasses or other vessel forms available on request. Heating Mantles, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT® Stirred heating mantles KM-MER for flasks, round bottom Design and technology identical with series KM-ME, but with additional integrated mag- netic stirrer for separate activation (continuously adjustable speed up to 1,600 rpm, stir- ring power 20 W), control lamps for stirring and heating mode. Max. heating element temperature 450°C, 1.5 m supply cable with earth contact type plug and safety switch, nominal voltage 230 V AC. Volume ml 100 250 500 1000 Heating capacity W 100 150 200 300 Quantity heating zones 1 2 2 2 Order No. 10 91 99401 10 91 99402 10 91 99403 10 91 99404 Metal-cased heating mantles for glasses or other vessel forms available on request. Heating Mantles, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT® Stirred heating mantles KM-MEB for flasks, round bottom with corrosion-resistant stainless steel heating bowl in a plasted-coated, chemicals-re- sistant metal housing with integrated mains and heating zone switch and additional inte- grated controller for infinite power adjustment. Max. heating element temperature 450°C, 1.5 m supply cable with earth contact type plug and safety switch, nominal voltage 230 V AC. Volume ml 250 500 1000 2000 Heating capacity W 150 200 300 500 Quantity heating zones 2 2 2 2 Order No. 10 91 98025 10 91 98050 10 91 98100 10 91 98200 Metal-cased heating mantles for glasses or other vessel forms available on request. co d e b e w WWE38018 co d e b e w WWE38019 co d e b e w WWE38024 co d e b e w WWE38023 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 583

585

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WWE38022 co d e b e w co d e b e w WWE38017 WWE38013 Heating Mantles Heating Mantles, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT®-Serial heating units KM-R6 for flasks, round bottom Plastic-coated, chemical-resistant metal housing with six heating positions. Each heating position is seperately controlled. Max. heating element temperature 450°C. 1.5 m power supply (earthed) cable with plug and personal protection adapter. Nominal voltage 230 V AC. Volume ml 100 250 500 1000 Heating capacity W 110 220 330 495 Quantity heating zones 1 1 1 1 Order No. 10 91 99361 10 91 99362 10 91 99363 10 91 99364 Data on flasks and performance applicable per heating positions Contact us to inquire about serial heaters with three heating positions. Support Clamp, SAF Wärmetechnik Support clamp KM-SK Accessories for housing heating mantles and serial heating units For securing a support rod up to Ø 12 mm or for integrating the housing heating mantle in support setups. Article Support clamp KM-SK Order No. 45 91 97001 Power Regulator, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT®-Power regulator KM-L116 Electromechanical, infinitely variable control of the heating capacity by built-in socket Stable plastic housing (W×D×H) 65 × 120 × 55 mm Switching power max. 2950 W (13 A), Nominal voltage 230 V AC Article Power regulator KM-L116 Order No. 45 91 65116 Temperature Controller, SAF Wärmetechnik LabHEAT® Temperature controller KM-RX1001 Microprocessor-controlled tabletop unit with stage clamp, indication of setpoint and ac- tual values in a sturdy plastic housing (H×W×D) 75 × 205 × 140 mm, freely adjustable setting range of up to 1,200°C, PID self-optimation, with ramp function and USB connec- tion for external setting. Input: Pt100 or thermocouples, potential-related switching contact via diode socket Output: Heating via grounding outlet with all-pole fusing Switching capacity max. 2300 W (10 A), system connection 230 V AC LabHEAT® Temperature controller KM-RX1004 Design and technology identical with series KM-RX1001, except for: Temperature sensor connection and potential-related switching contact via terminals Type 1 KM-RX1001 2 KM-RX1004 3 KM-RX1003 Connection Sensor Diode socket Clamps Thermo socket Connection Alarm Diode socket Clamps Clamps Order No. 10 91 91001 10 91 91004 10 91 91003 1 co d e b e w WWE38014 2 3 584

586

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Heating Mantles Temperature Sensors, SAF Wärmetechnik Suitable for temperature regulator KM-RX100 and KM-RX2000, with permanently con- nected compensation line, with or without diode plug. KM-TNF: NiCr-Ni, up to 400°C, flat sensor 0.4 × 15 × 400 mm KM-TNS: NiCr-Ni, up to 1200°C, rod sensor made of Incocell, Ø 1.5 × 300 mm KM-TP2: Pt100, up to 400°C, sheathed element sensor in V2A, Ø 4 × 50 mm KM-TPG: Pt100, up to 250°C, in a glass tube, Ø 6 × 400 mm Type KM-TNF KM-TNS KM-TP2 KM-TPG with diode plug without plug Order No. 45 91 01002 45 91 01003 45 91 01001 10 91 91005 Order No. 45 91 02002 45 91 02003 45 91 02001 10 91 92005 co d e b e w WWE38016 Water Baths, Oil Baths Sunlab® Water Bath, neoLab® The Sunlab® stainless steel water baths are the ideal solution for heating of samples and media. The temperature range can be set from RT +5° C to 99°C. The temperature setting is quick and easy via the digital control panel. After use, the water bath can simply be emptied via a bottom outlet (10 01 08811 and 10 01 08812). • with digital temperature display • incl. flat and sloping lids • with limit alarm Stainless steel Water Bath Article Sunlab® water bath 6 L Sunlab® water bath 10 L Sunlab® water bath 20 L Volume l 6 10 20 L × W × H mm 225×400×370 312×400×370 572×400×370 Order No. 10 01 08810 10 01 08811 10 01 08812 Universal Water Baths, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber co d e b e w WW2NY402 Stainless steel water baths, suitable for fat determination WB 436-D universal water bath (digital): • Digital temperature display (actual value) • Digital setpoint temperature adjustment • PT 100 sensor (platinum sensor) • Overheating protection (even when tank is empty) • Stopwatch (1-100 min.) with acoustic signal • Stainless steel inner and outer casing Use with distilled water if possible. WB 436-A universal water bath (analog): Same as WB 436-D except with analog temperature selection (rotary button), temperature display with thermometer (included), thermostat heating controller. Technical data: Temperature range: Volume: Power supply: Inner dimensions (W×D×H): 300 × 280 × 194 mm Outer dimensions (W×D×H): 331 × 396 × 265 mm Weight: up to 100°C 18 l 230 V / 50 – 60 Hz / 1000 W 10 kg Article 1 Universal water bath WB 436-D 2 Universal water bath WB 436-A Order No. 44 42 03707 44 42 03708 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 585 Continued on next page

587

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Water Baths, Oil Baths Accessories Article Butyrometer stand made of stainless steel, for 36 butyrometers Dimensions (W×D×H): 383 × 325 × 200 mm, diameter of the hole: 27.2 mm Butyrometer tube (closed) Made of brass, for butyrometer stand (art. no. 44 42 03717) Outer diameter, bottom: 27 mm 33 mm Outer diameter, top: 25.8 mm Inner diameter: Length: 170 mm Butyrometer tube (open) Made of brass, for butyrometer stand (art. no. 44 42 03717) Outer diameter, bottom: 27 mm 33 mm Outer diameter, top: Inner diameter: 25.8 mm 170 mm Length: Universal shelf made of stainless steel Dimensions (W×D×H): 280 × 225 × 2 mm, diameter of the hole: 16.9 mm Lid made of stainless steel Dimensions (W×D×H): 350 × 320 × 4 mm Mojonnier stand Made of stainless for 10 Mojonnier tubes Dimensions (W×D×H): 280 × 225 × 227 mm Order No. 44 42 03717 10 42 03766 44 42 03766 44 42 03727 44 42 03747 10 42 03718 Water Baths Eurotherm II, Aerne Analytic Water baths by Aerne Analytic are used for heating and tempering a great variety of lab- oratory samples. The baths are available in different sizes and designs and can be spe- cifically adapted to meet the customer’s requirements. Mains connection: 230V/ 50/60 Hz, temperature range: ambient – 95°C Type AET 5 AET 8 AET 10 AET 11 AET 12 AET 20 AET 30 AET 38 AET 42 AET 50 AET 70 Useful space L × W × H cm 23×12,5×20 23×18×20 23×23×20 38×23×12 39×15×20 39×25×20 39×38×20 88×36×12 44×23×30 60×36×23 100×46×15 Power rating W 500 1000 1000 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 2500 2900 2900 Order No. 10 64 06005 10 64 06008 10 64 06010 10 64 06011 10 64 06012 10 64 06020 10 64 06030 10 64 06038 10 64 06042 10 64 06050 10 64 06070 Customised versions available on request. Options for water baths Eurotherm II (on request): Circulation pump, overflow standpipe, stainless steel/plastic outlet tap, ring insert for lid, two-piece lid, external supply Accessories for water baths Eurotherm II (on request): Flat or slant lid, insertion racks Acid Water Bath Chemietherm, Aerne Analytic For heating and tempering acid or alkaline solutions. The electronic control is arranged in a separate housing and connected to the bath via cable. Thus, the bath can be operated under a fume cupboard while the control components are outside of the critical area. Material: white PP, mains connection 230V/ 50/60 Hz, temperature range: ambient – 85°C Type AET-C Useful space L × W × H cm 23×23×19 Power rating W 900 Order No. 10 64 07001 Customised versions and insert racks available on request. co d e b e w WW39Q005 co d e b e w WW39Q006 586

588

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Water Baths, Oil Baths Magnetic Stirring Water Baths, Aerne Analytic For example for boiling and dissolving culture media in microbiology or other applications. Equipped with magnetic stirrers which are jointly and infinitely variable. Mains connection: 230V/ 50/60 Hz, temperature range: ambient – 95°C Type Specification MRWB 2x2L MRWB 2x5L MRWB 6x1L MRWB 6x2L MRWB 6x5L MRWB 4x5L MRWB 4x2L suitable for 2×2 l bottles suitable for 2×5 l bottles suitable for 6×1 l bottles suitable for 6×2 l bottles suitable for 2×5 l bottles suitable for 4×5 l bottles suitable for 4×2 l bottles Customised versions available on request. Power rating W 1550 2550 2050 3050 3050 3050 3050 Order No. 10 64 08010 10 64 08011 10 64 08012 10 64 08013 10 64 08014 10 64 08015 10 64 08016 Water Baths Ecotherm, Dinkelberg Analytics For decades, these sturdy, long-lived water baths made of white polypropylene (PP) have proven their worth in practical application. They are temperature resistant to 95°C, are easy to operate via a central control element and include a perforated floor plate. Option- ally available with integrated circulation (circulation pumps can be switched on or off) Control: Digital timer with adjustable holding time (0.5 – 99.5 hours), bright LED display with a temperature range of 5°C above ambient temperature up to 95°C, switching accuracy: ± 0.1°C. Safety: Detection of sensor breakage and insufficient water level guarantees a high safety stand- ard. With mechanical overtemperature limiter for switch-off when the maximum operating temperature is reached. Additional safety thanks to timer for freely selectable switch-off. Each water bath is safety-tested and in conformity. Water baths 3 E5 DIET231220v15 DIET231220Uv15 DIET232320v15 DIET232320Uv15 no E10U E5U E10 yes 355×258×170 230×200×150 6.9 4.2 0.5 ± 0.2 10 32 12306 no 355×258×250 230×200×230 10.6 5 1.0 ± 0.4 10 32 12309 yes 355×258×250 230×200×230 10.6 6 1.0 ± 0.2 10 32 12310 1 Model Type Circulation Outer W×H×D mm 355×258×145 Useful W×H×D mm 230×200×125 Useful vol. Wght P rating Control precision °C ± 0.4 Order No. l 5.85 kg 3.3 kW 0.5 10 32 12305 Model Type Circulation Outer W×H×D mm 505×178×250 Useful W×H×D mm 380×120×230 Useful vol. Wght P rating Control precision °C ± 0.4 Order No. 10 32 12311 kg 5 kW 1.0 l 10.5 2 Model Type Circulation Outer W×H×D mm 515×258×315 Useful W×H×D mm 390×200×245 Useful vol. Wght P rating Control precision °C ± 0.4 Order No. l 19.1 kg 6.5 kW 2.2 10 32 12318 4 E11 DIET382312v15 DIET382312Uv15 DIET391520v15 DIET391520Uv15 no E11U E12U E12 yes 505×178×250 380×120×230 10.5 6 1.0 ± 0.2 10 32 12312 no 515×258×170 390×200×150 11.7 5 1.5 ± 0.4 10 32 12313 yes 515×258×170 390×200×150 11.7 6 1.5 ± 0.2 10 32 12314 E19 DIET392420v15 DIET392420Uv15 DIET393820v15 DIET393820Uv15 no E19U E30U E30 yes 515×258×315 390×200×245 19.1 7.5 2.0 ± 0.3 10 32 12317 no 515×258×450 390×200×380 29.6 9 2.5 ± 0.4 10 32 12330 yes 515×258×450 390×200×380 29.6 10 2.5 ± 0.3 10 32 12331 co d e b e w WW39Q007 co d e b e w WWSU9026 2 3 1 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 587 Continued on next page

589

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Water Baths, Oil Baths E38 DIET883612v15 DIET883612Uv15 DIET104615v15 DIET104615Uv15 DIETF403126 no E38U E70U E70 F Model Type Circulation Outer W×H×D mm 1000×178×415 1000×178×415 1000×150×460 Useful W×H×D mm 875×120×360 37.8 Useful vol. 17.5 Wght 3.0 P rating ± 0.6 Control precision °C ± 1.2 Order No. 10 32 12339 l 37.8 kg 16.5 kW 3.0 10 32 12338 yes yes no 1125×280×530 1125×280×530 1000×150×460 1000×150×460 69 19.5 3.0 ± 1.2 10 32 12370 69 20.5 3.0 ± 0.6 10 32 12371 no 405×310×260 – 5 l container 6 1.9 ± 0.4 10 32 12372 Water bath covers Article Type for Order No. Flat cover/PP white, with handle for E5 DIFDO05 E5 44 32 43005 1 Flat cover/PP white, with handle for E10 DIFDO10 E10 / E10U 44 32 43010 Flat cover/PP white, with handle for E11 DIFDO11 E11 / E11U 44 32 43020 Flat cover/PP white, with handle for E19 DIFDO19 E19 / E19U 44 32 43015 2 Sloping cover/PP white, with handle for E19 DISDO19 E19 / E19U 44 32 43110 Sloping cover/PP white, with handle for E30 DISDO30 E30 / E30U 44 32 43125 Hinges for fastening a one-piece inclined lid, DISDOSF E5 to E30 10 32 13126 for installation to water bath Further flat and sloping covers are available for each model Accessories Article 3 Underwater shaker insert for E12 (max. 1), E19 (max. 2), Order No. 44 32 44018 E30 (max. 2) PP, white, for Butyrometer and test tubes, 18 wells, Ø 26 mm 4 ThermoClean DC for all models Water bath stabiliser solution, 100 ml 10 32 14019 Special equipment (can be integrated in any bath on request) Article Drain cock for all models 1/2 ball valve, incl. installation Drain cock for E19 or higher PP, incl. assembly, recommended for water baths of 19 litres and up Order No. 44 32 45010 10 32 15011 4 Magnetic Stirring Water Baths, Dinkelberg Analytics Water baths with two integrated stirring units, for applications such as boiling or dis- solving nutrient substrates in microbiology etc. Baths made of white polypropylene (PP), material thickness 10 mm, withstands temper- atures up to 100°C, electronic regulation, 7-segment LED display to show ACTUAL/NOM- INAL value, UP and DOWN buttons to set NOMINAL value in 0.1°C increments. Temper- ature range: 5°C above ambient temperature to 99.9°C. Triple safety system with integrated temperature limiter, electronic level protection and control system to protect against sensor failure. Comes with two magnetic stirring units integrated into bath base, common continuous regulation, perforated support lid which also centers the bottles, fits SCHOTT laboratory bottles with ISO threads. Magnet stirrers, removal rod and bottles not supplied. ER2 Technical data: Models: External dimensions mm (W×H×D): 485 × 268 × 220 360 × 210 × 200 Useful dimensions mm (W×H×D): 15 l Bath capacity: Weight: 10 kg infinitely variable speed Magnetic stirrer: 2 × 2 l Capacity (bottles): ± 0.1°C Switching accuracy: ± 0.4°C Control accuracy: 1500 W Rating: Power supply: 230 V~/50 Hz Article Magnetic stirrer water bath Rototherm ER2 Type DIETR362120 5 Magnetic stirrer water bath Rototherm ER5 Type DIETR452825 ER5 575 × 338 × 270 450 × 280 × 250 30 l 13 kg 2 × 5 l ± 0.1°C ± 0.4°C 2500 W 230 V~/50 Hz Order No. 44 32 40620 44 32 40625 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWSU9029 5 588

590

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Water Baths, Oil Baths Water Baths, Gestigkeit Water bath W 16 For temperatures up to 110°C. The high-grade, stainless steel bath is built securely into a special steel housing. the temperature is controlled by a thermostat with an accuracy of ±1.5 K and better. A go-dry protection system prevents overheating when there is not enough water in the bath. Additional protection is provided by temperature fuse. the low laying ring-set ena- bles the condensed water to drip back into the bath. Technical data: Internal dimensions: Temperature selection: Rating: Voltage: External dimensions (W × D × H): 220 × 220 × 160 mm Weight: Article Water bath W 16 160 mm dia. × 100 mm 30 to 110 °C 1000 Watt 230 V Order No. 44 06 47016 3 kg Accessories Article Ring set RI 17/E Stainless steel support rod ST 12, screw-on, 12 mm Ø Order No. 44 06 48000 44 06 48001 Hydro Vaporization Water Baths, LAUDA For gentle steaming work with Erlenmeyer flasks, glasses, columns etc. Temperature range from approx. 5°C above ambient to boiling point. Temperature control by tension thermostat, protection of the heating element by overtemperature cut-out. The adjustable water level regulator is a standard feature. The units have the CE mark. Vaporization bath type H 5 V Bath, frame and perforated floor above the heating element made of stainless steel. Sets of rings made of plastic is a standard feature. The square cover frame (W 265 mm x L 265 mm) is removable. Its 9-part set of rings, made of heat-resistant plastic material can be parted. Its diameter can be varied in approx. 20 mm steps (min. 32.5 / max. 173.5 mm). Housing made of electrolytically galvanised sheet steel, powder coated. Adjustable water level regulatoris mounted on the back. For 230 V, 50/60 Hz, 1.0 kW power supply (also available in 115 V; 60 Hz and 100 V; 50/60 Hz). co d e b e w WW18A005 Type Outer W×H×D Vol. approx. l 1 H 5 V 342×180×400 240×120×240 5 Useful W×H×D mm mm Wght approx. kg 9 Connec. kW 1.0 Order No. 10 11 03066 1 Accessories Article Support rod made of stainless steel 316 mm long, 12 mm dia. Order No. 10 11 03039 Water baths for fume hoods type H 11 V und H 19 V Vaporization baths especially for use with fume hoods (digestories). Bath, removable re- cessed lid with holes and perforated floor above the heating element made of stainless steel. The openings in the lid are covered by sets of rings made of heat-resistant plastic material. The standard adjustable water level regulator is mounted on the right-hand side of the bath. For 230 V, 50/60 Hz, 1.5 kW power supply (also available in 115 V; 60 Hz and 100 V; 50/60 Hz). Order No. Type 2 Outer W × H × D mm Qty ope- nings H 11 V 430×155×300 6 2 H 19 V 690×155×300 8 Opening Ø mm 91 111 Useful height mm 100 100 Wght approx. kg 6.1 8.2 Con- nec. kW 1.5 1.5 10 11 03069 10 11 03070 Vaporization water baths H 6 V and H 9 V Bath frame with openings and parted perforated floor plate above the heating element made of stainless steel. Housing made of electrolytically galvanized sheet steel, power coated. The openings in the frame are covered by heatresistant plastic ring sets. A support rod of 600 mm length, 12 mm diameter, made of stainless steel, is behind each opening. Water level regulator is mounted on the left-hand side. For 230 V, 50/60 Hz power supply (also available in 115 V; 60 Hz and 100 V; 50/60 Hz). Type Outer W × H × D mm Qty ope- nings H 6 V 682×190×232 4 3 H 9 V 982×190×232 6 Opening Ø mm 131 131 Useful height mm 90 90 Wght approx. kg 12 16 Con- nec. kW 1.0 1.5 Order No. 10 11 03067 10 11 03068 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 589

591

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Water Baths, Oil Baths Hydro Tissue float bath, LAUDA Special bath for stretching and drying cut tissues for histological, chemical, clinical and bacteriological laboratories. Temperature range from approx. 5°C above ambient to +80°C. The exact temperature control with a constancy of ± 0.5°C guarantees evenly stretched cuttings, which are clear- ly visible in the black anodized bath. The cuttings are carefully dried on the warmed rim of the bath, which is also black anodized. The low 100 mm height of the bath allows comfortable and safe working. Bath interior and housing made of aluminium, housing powder coated. Control thermom- eter with stainless steel holder. The unit has the CE mark. Power supply: 230 V; 50/60 Hz (also available in 115 V; 60 Hz and 100 V; 50/60 Hz). Tissue float bath H 2 P Temp. range up to °C +80 Outer Ø mm 280 Outer height mm 100 Useful Ø mm 200 Useful H mm 60 Wght kg 2 Connec. kW 0.3 Order No. 10 11 03071 Accessories Article Dust cover made of aluminium, black anodized Suppliable as accessory. Order No. 10 11 00040 PURA Water Baths, JULABO PURA water baths The new PURA water baths. Premium quality. Practical. Robust. Users place high demands on modern water baths in terms of functionality and reliability. Above all, a water bath must be trouble-free and low-maintenance in everyday operations. For this reason, JULABO does not only count on proven functions in the new PURA series of water baths, but particularly also on simple, intuitive operation and high material and component quality. The result is functional and high-quality water baths that facilitate regular temperature applications in the laboratory and, thanks to their durable design, can with stand permanent loads without any problems. In addition to their high quality, ease of use and easy-to-read display, PURA water baths offer a number of functions and features that enable efficient use in the laboratory. These include, among other things, an integrated timer and specially designed edge surfaces, which automatically drain condensed fluid back into the bath. Another unique feature is the included, removable platform. Sample containers, which are placed on the platform, are fully immersed and thus optimally tempered. Operating the water bath is straightforward, and the bright, easy to read white LED display can easily be read – also from a distance. Important advantages • Working temperature range1) from +18°C to +99.9°C • Models with bath volumes from 0.8 to 36 liters • Temperature stability2) of ±0.15°C • Heating capacity up to 2 kW • Bright display • Splash-proof protected mains switch • Built-in dry running protection • Specially designed edge surfaces, which drain condensed fluid back into the bath • Removable platform for full immersion of the sample containers (included in the delivery) 1)with counter-cooling/bath cover (accessories) 2)with bath cover (accessories) Type Heating cap. kW 1 PURA 4 0.8 PURA 10 1.2 2 PURA 14 1.8 PURA 22 2 PURA 30 2 Bath ope- ning/depth cm 12×27 / 14 22×27 / 14 33×27 / 14 55×27 / 18 77×27 / 18 Poss. num- ber of test tube racks Filling vol. l 0.8 – 4.5 1 1.4 – 9.5 2 2 – 14 3 3.4 – 25.5 5 7 4.8 – 36 Order No. W × H × Depth cm 21×35×22 10 35 90504 31×35×22 10 35 90510 42×35×22 10 35 90514 64×35×26 10 35 90522 86×35×26 10 35 90530 1 co d e b e w WW18A015 co d e b e w WW2KN013 2 590

592

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Water Baths, Oil Baths Water and Shaking Water Baths, LAUDA LAUDA Hydro: Universal water and shaking water baths from 5 to 100°C The inexpensive, compact water baths for laboratory use stand out for their digital TFT display with simple operation and high reliability. They are optimally equipped for every laboratory application in the form of a typical water bath, a water bath with a circulating function or a shaking water bath, and ensure homogeneous temperature distribution with- out local overheating. The LAUDA Hydro water baths are made of high-quality stainless steel and provide the right bath depth and opening for every application with bath volumes from 4 to 41 liters. They are designed for the needs of biological, medical or biochemical laboratories with excellent temperature homogeneity, optional circulation or a shaking function. co d e b e w WW18A009 All water baths offer a temperature range of up to 100°C, which also permits applications in the boiling temperature range. The water temperature of the bath can be controlled by means of the electronic controller. A timer function can be used to set a switch-on delay and the duration of the operating time, either after a switch-on delay or after reaching the set temperature. The high-contrast 3.5-inch TFT display shows all the settings and oper- ating values. The controller also has an electronic function check with a visual and acous- tic alarm signal in the event of an error. 1 The LAUDA Hydro product range offers the perfect equipment for every laboratory re- quirement with six water baths, two water baths with a circulating function and three shaking water baths. The shaking water baths are specialized for different work processes. The device type H 20 SOW creates a circular motion for the sample whereas the types H 20 S and H 20 SW are designed for a linear, oscillating shaking movement. The built-in speed con- troller enables a load-independent, infinitely variable shaking movement with a soft start. The two shaking water baths H 20 SW and H 20 SOW are equipped with a cooling coil as standard. The temperature range of the shaking water baths can be extended down to +10°C by connecting them to the domestic water supply or to commercially available circulation chillers. All Hydro device types are protected against overheating during dry running by means of a low-water safety device and therefore guarantee reliable continuous operation (Safety class I, NFL). Furthermore, they consist of a corrosion-resistant outer casing made of electrolytically galvanized, powder-coated sheet steel. All the other structural parts of the casing, as well as the tubular heating element, are made of stainless steel. The double-walled, heat-in- sulated cover with internal curvature reliably prevents condensate from dripping back into the system. The recessed operating elements protect the electronics from dripping water and dirt. This increases the service life and ensures a high level of user safety. Water baths LAUDA Hydro 1 H 4 Type Temperature range Temp. accur. ± Heating cap. Bath vol. Bath dimensions W×D×H mm 245×100×165 245×200×165 400×245×165 400×245×225 600×245×165 410×296×335 245×200×165 400×245×165 Order No. 10 23 32900 10 23 32901 10 23 32902 10 23 32903 10 23 32904 10 23 32905 10 23 32906 10 23 32907 H 8 25 – 100 ±0.1 1.0 8 H 16 25 – 100 ±0.1 1.5 16 H 22 25 – 100 ±0.1 1.5 22 H 24 25 – 100 ±0.1 1.5 24 H 41 25 – 100 ±0.1 1.5 41 H 8 A 25 – 100 ±0.1 1.0 8 H 16 A 25 – 100 ±0.1 1.5 16 °C 25 – 100 K ±0.1 kW 0.5 l 4 1 Water shaking baths LAUDA Hydro 2 H 20 S kW 1.5 °C 25 – 99.9 K ±0.1 Type Temperature range Temperature accuracy ± Heating capacity Movement Shaking frequency Shaking amplitude Bath dimensions W×D×H mm 450×300×160 Filling volume Dimensions (W×H×D) Net weight Gross weight Order No. 10 23 32908 mm 715×520×330 min-1 10 – 250 reciprocating kg 28 kg 32 mm 22 l 20 H 20 SW 10 – 99.9 ±0.1 1.5 reciprocating 10 – 250 22 450×300×160 20 715×520×330 30 34 10 23 32909 H 20 SOW 10 – 80 ±0.1 1.5 orbital 10 – 250 14 450×300×160 20 632×500×390 35 40 10 23 32910 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 591

593

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WW91A004 1 2 3 592 Water Baths, Oil Baths Water Baths, Memmert The Memmert water bath is available in six sizes and two power classes. As a supplement to the Basic version intended for straightforward temperature control, the Excellent ver- sion provides for precise test procedures with maximum safety. Here, heating from 3 sides ensures premium temperature homogeneity. For the largest-size water bath model, an optional circulation pump is available for an even more homogeneous water temperature. WNB = water bath, natural circulation, BASIC temperature controller WNE =water bath, natural circulation, EXCELLENT temperature controller WPE =water bath, circulation pump, EXCELLENT temperature controller Standard scope of delivery without cover Control systems: • Micro-processor PID-temperature control with integrated self-diagnostics system to find errors quickly • non-contacting switching element • one Pt100 DIN-class A in 4-conductors measurement • integrated digital clock from 1 min. to 99.59 hrs. for: ON permanent operation WAIT (delays on for duration and limited-time operation) HOLD • digital display (LED) of target and actual temperature (resolution 0.1°C), as well as (re- maining) programme run time • Status-LEDs to monitor programme run Double overheat protection: • in case of error-caused excess temperature, the heating is turned off at ca. 10°C above • mechanic temperature limit TB protection class 1 to turn off heating at 30°C above max. target temperature bath temperature Structure stainless-steel housing: • Substance 1.4301 (ASTM 304), corrosion-resistant Interior - heating concept: • easy-to-handle, stainless steel workspace enforced by deep-drawing ribbing, sub- stance no. 1.4301 (ASTM 304), laser-welded • corrosion-protected, large-sized heating placed on 3 sides Technical data: Operating temperature range: Setting temperature range: Power supply: Temporal temperature deviations: Spatial temperature deviations: min. 5°C (WNB/WNE) 15°C (WPE) above ambi- ent up to +95°C with additional boiling mode (for WPE, only with pump switched off) +10°C to +95°C with additional boiling mode (100°C) 230 V, 50/60 Hz (other voltages on request) ± 0.1 K up to size 29: ± 0.25 K, size 45: ± 0.3 K Available models and sizes: Type series WNB With natural circulation and BASIC temperature controller Type Outer L × W × H with flat (sloping) lid mm 1 WNB7 468×356×238 (337) WNB10 578×356×238 (337) WNB14 578×436×238 (347) 2 WNB22 578×436×296 (405) WNB29 818×516×238 (343) WNB45 818×516×296 (401) Vol. approx. l Inner L×W×H mm 240×210×140 7 350×210×140 10 350×290×140 14 350×290×220 22 590×350×140 29 590×350×220 45 P rating approx. W 1200 1200 1800 2000 2400 2800 Order No. 44 26 30007 44 26 30010 44 26 30014 44 26 30022 44 26 30029 44 26 30045 Type Inner L×W×H Outer L × W × H with flat (sloping) lid mm Type series WNE With natural circulation and EXCELLENT temperature controller P rating approx. W 1200 1200 1800 2000 2400 2800 WNE7 468×356×238 (337) 3 WNE10 578×356×238 (337) 4 WNE14 578×436×238 (347) WNE22 578×436×296 (405) WNE29 818×516×238 (343) WNE45 818×516×296 (401) mm 240×210×140 7 350×210×140 10 350×290×140 14 350×290×220 22 590×350×140 29 590×350×220 45 Vol. approx. l Order No. 10 26 03007 10 26 03010 10 26 03014 10 26 03022 10 26 03029 10 26 03046 Continued on next page

594

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Water Baths, Oil Baths Water bath with circulating pump model WPE 45 With circulation pump and EXCELLENT temperature controller Type Outer L × W × H with flat (sloping) lid mm 5 WPE45 818×516×296 (401) Accessories for water baths: Stainless steel gabled covers Article for WNB/WNE 7 for WNB/WNE 10 for WNB/WNE 14 and 22 for WNB/WNE 29 and 45 Inner L×W×H mm 590×350×220 45 Vol. approx. l P rating approx. W 2800 Order No. 44 26 30145 Order No. 44 26 31207 44 26 31210 44 26 31214 44 26 31229 Peltier cooling unit for water baths for temperatures below room temperature from +10°C. The temperature is regulated by the electronic waterbath controller with a precision of ±0.1 K.Snap-on technology for easy attachment to the bath. Please don’t forget to order the installation and connection kit. For all sizes. Power supply: Effective cooling power: Refrigerant delivery rate: 230 V, 50/60 Hz or 115 V, 60 Hz 115 W 600 ml/min Article Peltier cooling unit CDP115 Order No. 10 26 00115 Shaking device Incl. support frame (for test-tube racks or perforated shelves with support basket) for fit- ting into water baths, with electronic speed control (shaking frequency from 35 to 160 strokes per minute; horizontal back/forth movements). Article 6 Shaking device for WNB/WNE14 and 22 Shaking device for WNB/WNE29 and 45 Order No. 44 26 31500 10 26 01501 Water Baths, Phoenix Instrument Water baths The waterbaths are generally used in the laboratory to maintain the temperature of the samples constant. The waterbaths WB series, thanks to the maximum operating temper- ature of 99°C, meet the different needs of operators and therefore allow them to be used in numerous applications. The models WB 22P and WB-40P are equipped with a recirculation pump to ensures a faster and more uniform temperature distribution. All models are equipped with a drain drop. 6 4 5 co d e b e w WWSB5037 Technical data: Volume: Max. temperature/resolution: Temp. homogeneity at 37°C: Temp. variation at 37°C: Timer: Overheat control: Int. Dimensions (W×H×D): Min. height with hud closed: Voltage/Power: Ext. Dimensions (W×H×D): Maximum capacity: Weight: Safety class: Article 7 WB-12 Water bath WB-22 Water bath WB-22-P Water bath WB-40P Water bath Accessories Article Rack for tubes Ø 13 mm / 20 positions Rack for tubes Ø 18 mm / 20 positions Rack for tubes Ø 31 mm / 5 positions Rack for tubes Ø 56 mm / 8 positions (biberon) Rack for blood bags / 5 positions WB-40P 40 litres WB-22/WB-22-P 22 litres +99/0.1°C / +85/0.1°C +85/0.1°C ±0.5°C ±0.1°C 99:59/continuous Yes 490 × 290 mm 150 mm 230 V / 1100 W WB-12 12 litres +99/0.1°C ±0.5°C ±0.1°C 99:59/continuous Yes 390 × 220 mm 150 mm 230 V / 900 W 480 × 375 × 310 mm 680 × 395 × 310 mm 830 × 390 × 460 mm 4 modules 12 kg 2 ±0.5° ±0.2°C 99:59/continuous Ja 620 × 380 mm 150 mm 230 V / 2200 W 16 modules 28 kg 2 8 modules 18 kg 2 Order No. 10 13 76012 10 13 76022 10 13 76023 10 13 76024 Order No. 10 13 76802 10 13 76812 10 13 76822 10 13 76842 10 13 76852 7 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 593

595

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WW4HV015 2 3 5 1 4 Water Baths, Oil Baths Precision Water Baths, Thermo Scientific Precision general purpose water baths are rugged, high performance baths that are de- signed to maintain water temperature from ambient to 100°C. Ideal for a wide range of lab applications, capacities range from 2 l to 28 l, including shallow models. Over-temperature safety circuitry is designed to prevent thermal runaway, while new auto-on and auto-off timers allow you to optimize operation schedules. Benefit from outstanding chemical and corrosion resistance with epoxy powder-coated exterior, and easily clean the chamber with its seamless stainless-steel interior. Thermo Scientific Precision general purpose water baths • Smaller footprint compared to previous models frees up valuable benchtop space • Advanced microprocessor controller is designed for extended functionality • Protect your work with audible alarms • Conveniently save commonly used settings with four temperature presets • Baths come with clear polycarbonate gable cover diffuser tray drain hose and rubber duck • UL Listed and CE Marked • Stability / Uniformity: ±0.1°C / ±0.2°C • Global Voltage 100–115V/200–230V, 50/60Hz Type Ambient temperature Dimens. without lid L×W×H mm 230×199×233 Chamber volume 1 TSGP02 °C up to 90°C l 2 2 TSGP2S up to 100°C 246×355×232 2 (Shallow) 3 TSGP05 up to 90°C 246×355×232 5 4 TSGP10 up to 100°C 393×383×233 10 5 TSGP20 up to 100°C 392×555×233 20 6 TSGP28 up to 100°C 392×555×282 28 7 TSGP15D up to 100°C 392×587×233 5 & 10 Working range L×W×H mm 138×155×150 153×300×65 154×300×150 301×330×150 297×500×150 297×500×200 Heating capacity Order No. W 200 10 53 32131 300 10 53 32132 300 10 53 32133 800 10 53 32134 1200 10 53 32135 1200 10 53 32136 see TSGP05 and TSGP10 300 & 800 10 53 32137 8 Thermo Scientific Thermal Beads Made of a heat-conducting aluminium alloy, the small beads are an excellent alternative to water. Without the need for a rack, the vials can be placed directly into the bath – this is very practical, particularly for the less common vial formats. • No spilling or evaporation • Reduced risk of contamination • No accessories required – for vials of any size and format • Beads can be chemically disinfected 7 Article Thermal Beads, 4 l Precision general purpose water bath GP 02 2 l bath volume with 4 l Thermal Beads Precision general purpose water bath GP 05 5 l bath volume with 4 l Thermal Beads Precision general purpose water bath GP 10 10 l bath volume with 8 l Thermal Beads Precision dual general purpose water bath GP 15D 5 l and 10 l bath volume with 12 l Thermal Beads Precision general purpose water bath GP 20 20 l baht volume with 16 l Thermal Beads Precision general purpose water bath GP 28 28 l bath volume with 24 l Thermal Beads Order No. 10 53 32161 10 53 32162 10 53 32163 10 53 32164 10 53 32165 10 53 32166 10 53 32167 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. Continued on next page 6 8 co d e b e w 594

596

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Water Baths, Oil Baths Thermo Scientific Precision circulating water baths • Achieve enhanced temperature uniformity with perimeter-directed water flow • Easily clean and maintain bath with coil-free internal design • Optimize scheduling with auto-on and auto-off timers • Accommodate taller labware with new hinged lid and extended height • Help prevent bath overheating and damage with low-fluid protection • Easily operate and monitor with icon-based graphical display • Protect your work with audible alarms • Baths include stainless steel gable covers, diffuser tray, and rubber duck • UL Listed and CE Marked 9 TSCIR19 Type Ambient temperature Dimensions without lid L×W×H mm 394×632×249 Chamber volume Working range L×W×H Heating capacity Order No. 10 53 32138 mm 305×387×192 °C up to 100°C l 19 W 1200 AT TSCIR35 up to 100°C 394×938×249 35 305×692×192 1500 10 53 32139 AK TSCIR89 up to 100°C 546×1160×300 89 483×914×241 1500 10 53 32140 Shaking Water Baths Shaking Water Baths, JULABO JULABO shaking water baths combine shaking with temperature stabilization for applica- tions in biochemistry, chemistry, biology, pharmacology, medicine etc. For high operating comfort there is a seamless, splash-water protected keyboard and a bright display indi- cating up to 5 different values. Advanced microprocessor technology with PID tempera- ture control provides high temperature stability. The built-in timer simplifies time-depend- ent applications. The RS232 interface allows on-line communication with a PC. Sensitive samples in the bath are protected by adjustable high and low temperature warning func- tions. Designed for unsupervised continuous operation. Bath tanks and all parts in contact with the bath liquid made of high-grade stainless steel. Models SW • Bright MULTI-DISPLAY (LED) for 5 values • Splash-proof mains switch • Electronically adjustable shaking frequency • Timer for setting the running time • Adjustable high/low temperature warning functions • On-line communication via built-in RS232 interface • Enhanced temperature stability through integrated circulating pump on model SW23 9 AT AK co d e b e w WW2KN009 AL AM Type Width × Depth × Height Weight Working temperature Temperature accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Shaking frequency Shaking frequency display Shaking amplitude Overtemperature cut-out Bath opening W × D Bath depth H Volume Overtemperature display Safety class Order No. Accessories Article Makrolon lid, hinged co d e b e w AL SW22 cm 70×35×26 kg 19.4 °C 20 – 99.9 °C 0.2 LED W 2000 rpm 20 – 200 LED mm 15 130°C, permanently set cm 50×30 cm 18 l 8 – 20 optical + acoustic S1 44 35 00322 AM SW23 70×35×26 21.4 20 – 99.9 0.02 LED 2000 20 – 200 LED 15 130°C, permanently set 50×30 18 8 – 20 optical + acoustic S1 44 35 00323 Order No. 44 35 00288 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 595

597

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WWSB5044 Shaking Water Baths Shaking Water Bath SB-35, Phoenix Instrument The new Water bath SB35 with linear shaking function. Bath, lid, spring basket and sup- port surface for samples are made entirely of stainless steel. Thanks to the flexibility of the universal spring support it is possible to insert different types of flasks, beakers, balloons or other recipients of different capacities and shapes. Electronic regulation of the temper- ature with PID control and adjustment of the shaking speed by knob. The instrument comes with a practical emptying tube and quick-fit valve for the periodic replacement of the liquid in the tank. The practical basket fixing system allows easy cleaning and main- tenance of the tub. 35 Liter 99/0,1°C Technical data: Tank volume: Max. temperature/resolution: Temperature homogeneity at 37°C: ±1,0°C ±0,5°C Temperature variation at 37°C: 99:59/Dauerbetrieb Timer: 10 – 150 rpm Shaking speed: Amplitude of platform movement: 30 mm Overheating protection: Ja Spring basket dimension (W×H×D): 320 × 115 × 200 mm Min. height with closed lid: Voltage/power: External dimension (W×H×D): Weight: Safety class: 150 mm 230 V / 1250 W 645 × 350 × 355 mm 28 kg 2 Article Shaking water bath SB-35 Order No. 10 13 73502 Precision Shaking Water Baths, Thermo Scientific Precision general purpose water baths are rugged, high performance baths that are de- signed to maintain water temperature from ambient to 100°C. Ideal for a wide range of lab applications, capacities range from 2 L to 28 L, including shallow models. Over-tempera- ture safety circuitry is designed to prevent thermal runaway, while new auto-on and au- to-off timers allow you to optimize operation schedules. Benefit from outstanding chem- ical and corrosion resistance with epoxy powder-coated exterior, and easily clean the chamber with its seamless stainless-steel interior. Precision shaking water baths • Easily clean and maintain bath with the new coil-free design • Optimize scheduling with auto-on and auto-off timers • Help prevent bath overheating and damage with low-fluid protection • Conveniently save commonly used settings with four temperature and shaking speed presets • Help protect your work with audible alarms • Easily operate and monitor with icon-based graphical display • Accommodate taller labware with new hinged lid and extended height • Features next-generation shaker motor • Baths come with stainless steel gable cover, shaking tray, and rubber duck • Adjustable shaking speed from 30 to 200 oscillations per minute • UL Listed and CE Marked • Stability / Uniformity: ±0.1°C / ±0.05°C • Removable tray for work area Type Ambient temperature Dimensions without lid 1 2 3 TSSWB15 °C bis 100°C TSSWB27 bis 100°C TSSWB15S bis 100°C 394×632×249 394×938×249 394×632×249 4 TSDUB15 bis 100°C 394×632×249 L×W×H mm Chamber volume l 15 27 15 (Shallow) 15 Working range L×W×H mm 305×387×193 305×692×193 305×387×193 Bath opening mm 305×387×193 305×692×193 305×387×193 Heating capacity Order No. 10 53 32151 10 53 32152 10 53 32153 W 1200 1200 1500 305×387×193 305×387×193 1200 10 53 32154 1 3 co d e b e w WW4HV016 2 4 596

598

KNOWLEDGE LABORATORY CIRCULATORS Operating temperature range The temperature range which is limited by the elec- tronics. Auxiliary equipment can be used to extend the lower end of the temperature range on tempera- ture circulators. Working temperature range The temperature range within the operating temper- ature range that can be reached by the temperature control system by itself at an ambient temperature of +20°C without auxiliary equipment. Temperature stability Temperature difference between the highest and lowest temperature measured in a laboratory circu- lator or laboratory bath divided by 2. Heating circulator Temperature homogeneity Temperature difference between the highest and lowest temperature measured in the bath vessel. Cooling circulator with integrated refrigera- tion unit Temperature display Temperature displays using LED's are easy to read from any viewing angle, even from a relatively long distance away. In addition to the set- point and actual temperature, the unit should also be able to display high and low temperature warnings. The VFD COMFORT DISPLAY is even more user friendly. For added user comfort, state-of-the-art temperature control systems come with touchscreen displays.. PID and ICC temperature controls The circulator's temperature control device has a significant influence on heating/cooling characteristics. The basic control technology affects the precision and speed of the heating/cooling process. PID controls have proven to be effective in practical application. These controls either op- erate with fixed control parameters (Xp, Tn, Tv), or ideally the parameters can be adjusted manually. The ICC (Intelligent Cascade Control) is cur- rently the most advanced type of control. Cascade technology delivers perfect results. The control parameters are automatically adjusted and optimized for the particular application. ICC devices are integrated into the JULABO HighTech series of circulators. Pump systems Submerged pumps have a proven track record in the field. They operate without significant wear for long periods of time. In addition to maintain- ing circulation in the bath, they permanently supply heating/cooling fluid to objects or systems in the pump circuit. It is important to ensure that sufficient pumping capacity is available, particularly in external applica- tions. Electronically controlled pump pressure can have advantages in many applications (for example when delicate glassware is present). Heating and cooling circulators Laboratory circulators are divided into heating and cooling circulators. Heating circulators only have a heating element and can only operate above the ambient temperature. External cooling solutions (tap water or a refrigeration unit) can be added for temperature control applications below ambient temperature. If cooling work is necessary on a regular basis, the use of a cooling circulator with integrated refrigeration unit is recommended. Depending on the model, temperatures as low as -95°C can be achieved. Cooling circulators have the additional advantage that they can cool quickly at high temperatures without additional equipment. It is also advisable to invest in a cooling circulator if there is a frequent need for quick cooling. One feature of cooling systems is proportional cooling, where an electronic value is used to control cooling output. This solution allows precision control of cooling output, and it also saves energy. Early warning systems improve reliability Most circulators offer warning and protection func- tions. These functions enhance operational reliabil- ity and protect the sample. The upper and lower temperature limits as well as the liquid level need to be monitored. Adjustable limits as well as warn- ing and shut-off functions offer enhanced reliability. JULABO early warning systems (DBGM) offer ad- vanced features. The low-level early warning sys- tem emits an acoustic signal to indicate insufficient heating/cooling fluid before the system shuts down. JULABO early warn- ing system with float and micro switches (DBGM) Classification is defined in DIN 12876-1 Terminology and classification are defined in DIN 12876, and they pro- vide application information. Circulators are divided into the following categories: Class I: Equipment in this class has a fixed temperature limit and fixed low liquid level protection. The devices are only suitable for use with non-flammable liquids. Class III: Equipment in this class has adjustable excess temperature protection and additional low liquid level protection. The devices are suitable for use with flammable liquids. Attaching an external system The following guidelines must be observed when an external system is attached: • Tubing between the circulator and the external system must be as short as possible. It must be well insulated, and measures must be taken to ensure that tubing does not slip off. • Always use a suitable, low-viscosity heating/ cooling liquid (e.g. JULABO Thermal) • Optimize the energy exchange between the circulator and the external system (e.g. avoid bottle necks in the lines). • Ensure that the external sensor has good thermal coupling. Temperature control system with externally connected system Heating/cooling fluids De-ionized water is recommended for working temperatures up to +80°C. Distilled water adsorbs composites from the components, and this can result in corrosion. Special fluids can be used to extend the temperature range, for example JULABO Thermal. These fluids have a significantly lower specific thermal capacity, which is another advan- tage. Consideration must be given to the flash point and fire point during the selection process. The viscosity specified by the circulator manu- facturer must not be exceeded even at low temperatures. Alcohol (e.g. ethanol) has a very low flash point, which means that it is not suitable in some applications. Calculating heating and cooling power The following formula can be used for time-dependent calculations: Q = (m × c × dT) / t Q = required cooling/heating power in kW m = material mass in kg c = specific thermal capacity (water=4.2 / ethanol=2.5 / silicone oil =1.8) dT = required temperature differential in °C t = desired cooling/heating time in seconds The total volume (mass) is made up of the individual volumes (e.g. cir- culator, tubing, reactor jacket and reactor). This simple formula ignores differences in the specific weight of the liquids and power loss factors. Power loss is caused by tubing (length, insulation), double-wall con- tainers (material, thickness and surface area), high ambient temp erature and open applications (surface). A safety margin of 20-30% should be included in the calculation to ensure sufficient heating/cooling perfor- mance. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 597

599

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Immersion Thermostats, Bath Circulators Immersion Circulators, Huber Immersion thermostats are the basic element of numerous combinations of polycar- bonate or stainless steel basins. A universal screw-type clamp is comprised in the delivery for easy mounting of the thermostat on all kinds of existing basins. In connection with a cooling bath, negative temperatures of up to -30°C can be achieved. All models come with a powerful pressure/suction pump and comply with safety class III (FL) for use with combustible liquids. Pump adapters for external heating/cooling and cooling coils for the cooling water connection are available as accessories. Pilot ONE controller: user-friendly, many functions and easily exchangeable with plug- and-play technology. KISS controller: Economically priced and robust with all basic functions, for routine tasks. Technical data: Heating capacity kW Pump pressure max. l/min / bar KISS E: CC-E: CC-E xd: Safety Class1): 2 14 / 0.25 27 / 0.7 22 / 0.4 FL, III Type Temp. range °C 1 KISS E (-30) 25 – 200 0.052) 2 CC-E (-30) 25 – 200 0.012) CC-E xd (-30) 25 – 200 0.012) Temp. accur. ± K Immersion depth mm 150 150 195 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 132 × 163 × 312 132 × 159 × 315 132 × 159 × 360 Order No. 10 59 62004 10 59 62104 10 59 62504 1) FL suitable for use with flammable fluids, III = adjustable high temperature cut-off and low liquid level protection 2) according to DIN 12876, measured in 12-litre stainless steel bath. Bridge Circulators, Huber Bridge circulating thermostats are suitable for heating/cooling any type of bath basins. External systems may be integrated as well via the speed-controlled pressure-suction pump with VPC technology. Use the models with a more powerful heating performance to heat/cool larger bath volumes. The telescopic arm extends to a length of max. 884 millimeters. Type Temp. range °C Heating cap. kW 3 CC-200BX (-20)1) 28 – 200 2.0 4 CC-300BX (-20)1) 28 – 300 3.0/4.0 1) forced external cooling necessary Temp. accur. ± K 0.02 0.02 Pump pressure max. l/min / bar 27 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 Order No. 10 59 60200 10 59 60300 Heating Circulators with Polycarbonate Bath, Huber The transparent polycarbonate baths are suitable for temperatures from 25°C to 100°C (with the optional cooling coil, operating temperatures below ambient temperature are possible). In all models, an immersion thermostat is mounted on a bath bridge. With the addition of a pump adapter, the combinations may be used for externally closed as well as for external- ly open heating/cooling jobs (with option level control). Models with Pilot ONE have a speed-controlled pressure-suction pump. The temperature constancy pursuant to DIN 12876 is 0.02 K with the Compatible Control models, and 0.05 K with the KISS models. Pilot ONE controller: user-friendly, many functions and easily exchangeable with plug- and-play technology. KISS controller: Economically priced and robust with all basic functions, for routine tasks. Technical data: Heating power kW (all models): Pump pressure max. (l/min / bar) CC models: KISS models: Safety Class: 2 27 / 0.7 14 / 0.25 FL, III Type Tmax °C 5 CC-106A 100 6 KISS 106A 100 7 CC-108A 100 8 KISS 108A 100 9 CC-110A 100 AT KISS 110A 100 AK CC-112A 100 AL KISS 112A 100 AM CC-118A 100 AN KISS 118A 100 Bath opening W×D mm 130 × 110 130 × 110 130 × 210 130 × 210 130 × 310 130 × 310 275 × 161 275 × 161 275 × 321 275 × 321 Bath vol. l 6 6 8 8 10 10 12 12 18 18 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 147 × 307 × 330 147 × 307 × 330 147 × 407 × 330 147 × 407 × 330 147 × 507 × 330 147 × 507 × 330 333 × 360 × 335 333 × 360 × 335 333 × 520 × 335 333 × 520 × 335 Order No. 10 59 61061 10 59 61071 10 59 61081 10 59 61091 10 59 61101 10 59 61111 10 59 61121 10 59 61131 10 59 61181 10 59 61191 2 1 3 4 AM AK 9 7 5 AN AL AT 8 6 598

600

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Immersion Thermostats, Bath Circulators Heating Circulators with Stainless Steel Baths, Huber The insulated stainless steel baths are suitable for temperatures up to 200°C. In all mod- els, an immersion thermostat is mounted on a bath bridge. With the addition of a pump adapter, the combinations may be used for externally closed as well as for externally open heating/cooling jobs (with option level control). Models with Pilot ONE have a speed-con- trolled pressure-suction pump. The temperature constancy pursuant to DIN 12876 is 0.02 K with the Compatible Control models, and 0.05 K with the KISS models. Pilot ONE controller: user-friendly, many functions and easily exchangeable with plug- and-play technology. KISS controller: Economically priced and robust with all basic functions, for routine tasks. Technical data: Heating power kW (all models): Pump pressure max. (l/min / bar) CC models: KISS models: 2 27 / 0.7 14 / 0.25 Type CC-208B 1 KISS 208B CC-212B 2 KISS 212B CC-215B 3 KISS 215B CC-220B 4 KISS 220B CC-225B 5 KISS 225B Tmax °C 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Bath opening W × D mm 230 × 127 230 × 127 290 × 152 290 × 152 290 × 152 290 × 152 290 × 329 290 × 329 290 × 329 290 × 329 Bath vol. l 8,5 8,5 12 12 15 15 20 20 25 25 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 290 × 350 × 375 290 × 350 × 375 350 × 375 × 375 350 × 375 × 375 350 × 375 × 425 350 × 375 × 425 350 × 555 × 375 350 × 555 × 375 350 × 555 × 425 350 × 555 × 425 Order No. 10 59 62081 10 59 62091 10 59 62121 10 59 62111 10 59 62151 10 59 62161 10 59 62201 10 59 62211 10 59 62251 10 59 62261 5 4 3 2 1 co d e b e w WW2KN002 Immersion Circulators, JULABO JULABO immersion circulators are available for various bath tanks up to a capacity of 50 liters. They come equipped with a bath clamp that fits onto all tanks with a wall thickness up to 26mm or else on a laboratory stand. This clamp allows fast and problem-free as- sembling for existing as well as new bath tanks. The immersed parts are made of high-quality stainless steel or plastic. Typical applications are sample temperature control, temperature testing of food and beverages, material testing and calibration of thermom- eters and thermal switches. The CORIO series Einhängethermostate CORIO C, CORIO CD and CCORIO CP • Accurate temperature control • CORIO C for internal applications • CORIO CD and CORIO CP for internal and external applications (with accessories) • Particularly silent • Easy to operate • CORIO CD with USB connection • CORIO CP with USB and RS232 interface Type Width × Depth × Height Weight Working temperature Temperature accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Usable immersion depth Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Class division (DIN12876-1) Order No. 6 CORIO C mm 132×160×362 kg 1.9 °C 20 – 100 °C 0.03 LED kW 2 mm 166 l/min 6 bar 0.1 1 10 35 91100 7 CORIO CD 132×160×362 2.6 20 – 150 0.03 LED 2 166 15 0.35 3 10 35 91200 CORIO CP 132×160×362 2.5 20 – 200 0.02 LED 2 160 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 10 35 93000 Continued on next page 6 7 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 599

601

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Immersion Thermostats, Bath Circulators DYNEO DD immersion circulator New temperature control technology for demanding applications DYNEO DD immersion circulators offer maximum flexibility. They are supplied with a sta- ble, sturdy bath attachment clamp and can be fastened to any type of tank of max. 50 litres. The immersion circulators are used for internal and external temperature control, covering an operating temperature range from +20°C to +200°C. The multilingual 3.5-inch color display and unique rotary knob provide for straightforward and intuitive operation. Your advantages • Flexible installation options • For internal and external applications • Powerful and infinitely adjustable pressure pump • Flow rate 23 l/min, pressure 0.6 bar • Easy switching between internal and external circulation • Large color TFT display, multilingual interface • Central rotary knob (controller) simplifies operation • Integrated programmer for 8 x 60 program steps • Integrated external Pt100 connection • USB port • RS232 interface or analog interfaces (optional) 1 co d e b e w WW4HV003 Type Width × Depth × Height Weight Working temperature Temperature accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Usable immersion depth Interface Flow rate Pressure Order No. DYNEO DD 1 cm 13.2 × 16 × 35.5 kg 2.5 °C 20 – 200 °C ±0.01 3.5 ″ TFT Display W 2 mm 160 RS232 l/min 8 – 27 mbar 0.1 – 0.7 10 35 90100 SAHARA Series Heating Bath Circulators with Stainless Steel Bath, Thermo Scientific Various open baths made of stainless steel are available with different bath openings and depths. The temperature control units are fastened to the bath vessel by means of a bath bridge. In select bridges are openings for adding a cooling coil. The immersion coolers EK45 and EK90 are available for all baths by a specially bath bridge. Models with SC150L are highly variable in their filling range. There is a wide selection of accessories for adapting to numerous applications requiring temperature control in the bath. Features • Efficient heating in the bath and for closed systems • Stainless steel baths for heating of RT +13°C up to 200°C • Robust stainless steel bath, perfectly suited for oil as bath fluid • The symmetry allows for turning of the head on the bath in 90° increments • External circulation kit for M16*1 connections, and 8 and 12 mm hose connections comprised in the delivery • Complete with drain tap at the front and carrying grips • Bath lid for S7 and S13 included in the delivery • Complies with CE and RoHS • 3 years warranty Technical data: Type Temperature range Dimensions (H×W×D) Tap water cooling coil Bath capacity1) Work area (D×W×L) Net weight S7 Amb +13 to 200 °C mm 456×235×428 °C l mm 185×154×112 kg +20 to 200 7 10.6 S13 Amb +13 to 200 456×321×428 +20 to 200 11 200×239×112 12.3 S21 Amb +13 to 200 409×381×628 +20 to 200 17 151×297×312 14.2 S45 Amb +13 to 200 556×381×628 +20 to 200 41 300×298×312 20.3 S49 Amb +13 to 200 456×579×746 +20 to 200 51 200×498×430 24.3 Heating bath S7 Order No. Type SC1002) 10 53 32107 SC1502) 10 53 33107 SC150L2) 10 53 34107 AC1503) 10 53 35107 AC2003) 10 53 36107 Heating bath S45 Order No. 10 53 32145 10 53 33145 10 53 34145 10 53 35145 10 53 36145 1) Bath volume varies (depending on the fluid used, temperature range, and items inserted into the reservoir) 2) Voltage 230V/50Hz 3) Voltage 208-230V/50-60Hz Heating bath S13 Order No. 10 53 32113 10 53 33113 10 53 34113 10 53 35113 10 53 36113 Heating bath S21 Order No. 10 53 32121 10 53 33121 10 53 35121 10 53 36121 Heating bath S49 Order No. 10 53 32149 10 53 33149 10 53 34149 10 53 35149 10 53 36149 Continued on next page 600

602

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Immersion Thermostats, Bath Circulators Accessories Article 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 86 test tubes of 10 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 46 test tubes of 16 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 23 test tubes of 25 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack without holes Customer may provide special size holes Universal stainless steel rack 160×145 mm for bath types A25B, A40, S21. Two inserts with different sizes of holes can be varied in height within the rack 2× rack inserts 160×145 mm rack for 86 test tubes of 10 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 160×145 mm rack for 46 test tubes of 16 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 160×145 mm rack for 23 test tubes of 25 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 160×145 mm rack without holes Customer may provide special size holes Stainless steel rack 160×100 mm for bath types S13. Two inserts with different sizes of holes can be va- ried in height within the rack 2× rack inserts 160×100 mm rack for 86 test tubes of 10 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 160×100 mm rack for 46 test tubes of 16 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 160×100 mm rack for 23 test tubes of 25 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 160×100 mm rack without holes Customer may provide special size holes S21 extension bridge for liftplate, stainless steel S21 extension bridge for immersion cooler, stainless steel S49 extension bridge for liftplate and immersion cooler, stainless Order No. 10 53 31603 10 53 31604 10 53 31605 10 53 31606 10 53 31679 10 53 31680 10 53 31681 10 53 31682 10 53 31683 10 53 31626 10 53 31684 10 53 31685 10 53 31686 10 53 31687 10 53 31607 10 53 31677 10 53 31609 steel for S13, S21, S49 including stainless steel lid 10 53 31611 10 53 31613 10 53 31614 Lifting Platform, stainless steel for S21, S45, A10B Lifting Platform, stainless steel for S49 Tap water cooling coil for SC100/150 und AC150/200 Tap water cooling coil, long, for SC150L für S13, S15, S30, S45, S49 10 53 31616 Tap water cooling coil for S7 with SC100/150 10 53 31692 Tap water cooling coil for S7 with SC150L Tap water cooling coil for S7 with AC150/AC200 S21 stainless steel bath lid S49 stainless steel bath lid Autorefill (100-230V/50-60Hz) box without level sensor or bath lid; for operation with multifunction port of 10 53 31638 10 53 31640 10 53 31630 including stainless steel lid including stainless steel lid 10 53 31693 10 53 31694 AC200 heads Solenoid valve (100-230V/50-60Hz) box for e.g. control of tap water cooling coil; for operation with multifunction port of AC200 heads Other accessories (bath fluid, test tube rack, hoses, connectors, etc.) are available. 10 53 31610 SAHARA Series Heating Bath Circulators, Thermo Scientific Inexpensive open-bath circulators, comprised of very rigid baths made of modified PPO (thermally resistant up to 100°C) and the temperature control units STANDARD (SC) and ADVANCED (AC). The baths have integrated grips and supports. The bridge can be used for later fitting of an immersing cooler and a cooling coil. A wide range of accessories is available for adapting the units to the usual standard ap- plications. There are insertable racks for test glassware or plastic tubes as well as height-adjustable platforms for placing vessels of different heights in the bath. Features • Sahara S5P, S14P, S21P polyphenylene oxide baths are particularly well suited for water • Circulator heads can be turned on the bath in any kind of 90° increments (not with the as heating fluid small S5P) • Choose between 3 different bath volumes • All baths have integrated grip ledges • Complies with CE and RoHS • 3 years warranty co d e b e w WW4HV012 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 601 Continued on next page

603

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Immersion Thermostats, Bath Circulators Bath circulators Technical data: Type Temperature range Dimensions (H×W×D) Safety class Bath capacity Net weight With tap water cooling coil added °C Amb. +13 to 100 Amb. +13 to 100 Amb. +13 to 100 mm 160×373×330 l kg °C +20 – 100 330×373×540 1 (NFL) 13 – 21 6.6 +20 – 100 330×373×380 1 (NFL) 8 – 14 6.3 +20 – 100 S5P heated bath S14P heated bath S21P heated bath 1 (NFL) 3 – 5 5.1 Type SC1001) SC1501) AC1502) AC2002) 1) Voltage 230V/50Hz 2) Voltage 208-230V/50-60Hz Heating bath S5P Order No. 10 53 32305 10 53 33305 Heating bath S14P Order No. 10 53 32314 10 53 33314 10 53 35314 10 53 36314 Heating bath S21P Order No. 10 53 32321 10 53 33321 10 53 35321 10 53 36321 Accessories Article Universal stainless steel rack 283×145 mm for bath types A10B, S49. Two inserts with different sizes of holes can be varied in height within the rack 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 86 test tubes of 10 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 46 test tubes of 16 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 23 test tubes of 25 mm Ø 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack without holes Customer may provide special size holes Extension bridge for S14P + S21P liftplate Tap water cooling coil for SC100/150 und AC150/200 Stainless steel bath lid for S5P bath Stainless steel bath lid for S14P bath Stainless steel bath lid for S21P bath Autorefill (100-230V/50-60Hz) box without level sensor or bath lid; for operation with multifunction port for S13, S21, S49 of AC200 heads Solenoid valve (100-230V/50-60Hz) box for e.g. control of tap water cooling coil; for operation with multifunc- tion port of AC200 heads Order No. 10 53 31602 10 53 31603 10 53 31604 10 53 31605 10 53 31606 10 53 31698 10 53 31614 10 53 31620 10 53 31623 10 53 31622 10 53 31630 10 53 31610 Circulator Baths Heating Circulators, Huber Because of their smaller filling volumes, the models CC-104A and KISS 104A (with poly- carbonate bath) and CC-202C und KISS 202C (with stainless steel bath) are particularly suitable for heating smaller external volumes. As a standard, all models are equipped with M16x1 pump connections. Models with Pilot ONE have a speed-controlled pressure-suc- tion pump. The temperature constancy pursuant to DIN 12876 is 0.02 K with the Compat- ible Control models and 0.05 K with the KISS models. Pilot ONE controller: user-friendly, many functions and easily exchangeable with plug- and-play technology. KISS controller: Economically priced and robust with all basic functions, for routine tasks. Technical data: Heating power kW (all models): Pump pressure max. (l/min / bar) CC models: KISS models: 2 27 / 0.7 14 / 0.25 Type Temp. range Bath opening °C mm 1 CC-104A (15) 25 – 100 Ø 25 KISS 104A (15) 25 – 100 Ø 25 2 CC-202C (-30) 45 – 200 Ø 25 KISS 202C (-30) 45 – 200 Ø 25 Bath vol. l 4 4 2 2 Order No. Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 147 × 235 × 330 10 59 61041 147 × 235 × 330 10 59 61051 178 × 260 × 355 10 59 62021 178 × 260 × 355 10 59 62031 1 2 602

604

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Heating Bath Circulators, Huber Heating bath circulators are suitable for temperatures of up to 200°C or 300°C. The Com- patible Control models have an infinitely adjustable pressure and suction pump. The pump pressure can be controlled with an optional pressure sensor. This for example protects your glass equipment from breaking. The units are preferably used for temperature control of externally connected applications. It is also possible to heat objects directly in the open heating bath. Pilot ONE controller: user-friendly, many functions and easily exchangeable with plug- and-play technology. KISS controller: Economically priced and robust with all basic functions, for routine tasks. Technical data: Pump pressure max. (l/min / bar): CC-205B: KISS-205B: CC-304B – CC-315B: Temp. stability acc. to DIN12876: 27 / 0.7 14 / 0.25 25 / 0.7 0.02 K (CC), 0.05 K (KISS) 1 2 3 Type Temp. range °C Bath vol. l CC-205B KISS 205B 1 CC-304B 2 CC-308B 3 CC-315B (-30)1) 45 – 200 (-30)1) 45 – 200 (-20)1) 28 – 300 (-20)1) 28 – 300 (-20)1) 28 – 300 5.0 5.0 5.0 8.5 15 1) forced external cooling necessary Bath depth mm 150 150 155 155 200 Heating cap. kW 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.0 3.0/4.0 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 178 × 337 × 355 178 × 337 × 355 210 × 335 × 392 242 × 404 × 392 335 × 382 × 433 Order No. 10 59 62051 10 59 62061 10 59 60304 10 59 60308 10 59 60315 Compact Refrigerated Circulators Ministat®, Huber Thanks to their small dimensions, these devices fits even in the most confined spaces, for example a fume hood, or can be installed in other units. All three Ministate models are available with air or water cooling. They comply with safety class 3 pursuant to DIN 12876, making them safe for unsupervised permanent operation also at the maximum permissi- ble environmental temperature of 40°C. With powerful, speed-controlled pressure-suction pump for heating/cooling either objects in the bath and/or external applications. Infinitely adjustable pump speed. With the optional pressure sensor, it is possible to control the maximum pressure. VPC (Variable Pressure Control) for optimum circulation to protect sensitive glass objects from breaking. Ultra-short heating and cooling times thanks to small volumes and a powerful heating/cooling performance. Use displacement bodies (available as an option) to reduce the bath volume by half and to increase the effect. Fur- thermore, the active surface of the fluid and thus the fluid absorption is reduced. All models come with Active Cooling Control for active control of cooling performance at maximum temperature, and automatic cooling performance adjustment for economical operation and less waste heat in the laboratory. The bath opening is wide enough to cool/ heat smaller objects directly in the thermostat bath. All components coming into contact with the thermal fluid are made of stainless steel or high-grade plastic. Benefits: • Ergonomical design, small dimensions for small footprint • Pilot ONE with Plug&Play technology • Large color 5.7 ″ TFT touch screen, EASY Control • Connections for RS232, USB, and Ethernet • Infinitely variable pump speed for homogeneous temperature distribution in the bath or best circulation and heat transfer with external systems • Active Cooling Control • Pt100 external sensor connection • Control sensor can be calibrated • Adjustable overtemperature protection and level protection • Safety class III pursuant to DIN 12876-1 • Early warning system for below-minimum level • Pump connections for external temperature control jobs • Bath with opening for heating/cooling smaller objects directly in the bath • Drain tap at the front available as an option Technical data: Pump pressure max. (l/min / bar): 22 / 0.7 6 5 4 Type Temp. range °C 4 Ministat 125 -25 – 150 Ministat 125w -25 – 150 5 Ministat 230 -40 – 200 Ministat 230w -40 – 200 6 Ministat 240 -45 – 200 Ministat 240w -45 – 200 Heating Bath cap. vol. l kW 2.75/1.31) 1.0 2.75/1.31) 1.0 3.2/1.71) 2.0 3.2/1.71) 2.0 4.9/2.81) 2.0 4.9/2.81) 2.0 Order No. Dimensions Cooler cap. at (W×H×D) 20/0/-20/-30°C mm kW 225×370×429 10 59 61251 0.30/0.21/0.05/– 225×370×429 10 59 61252 0.30/0.20/0.10/– 0.42/0.38/0.25/0.14 255×450×476 10 59 62301 0.42/0.38/0.25/0.14 255×450×476 10 59 62302 0.60/0.55/0.35/0.125 300×465×516 10 59 62401 0.60/0.55/0.35/0.125 300×465×516 10 59 62402 All models are equiped as standard with natural refrigerant. 1) with displacement insert co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 603

605

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers 5 8 1 3 6 9 2 4 AT AL AK AM Circulator Baths Compatible Control Refrigeration Circulators, Huber Cooling circulators Combine immersion thermostats with insulated cooling baths to create cost-efficient solutions for cooling and heating objects in a bath at temperatures between -20/-30°C and 200°C. The cooling baths work with a natural refrigerant. With the addition of a pump adapter, the combinations may be used for externally closed as well as for externally open (with option level control) heating/cooling jobs. Models with Pilot ONE have a speed-con- trolled pressure-suction pump. The temperature constancy pursuant to DIN 12876 is 0.02 K with the Compatible Control models, and 0.05 K with the KISS models. Pilot ONE controller: user-friendly, many functions and easily exchangeable with plug- and-play technology. KISS controller: Economically priced and robust with all basic functions, for routine tasks. Technical data: Heating power kW (all models): Pump pressure max. (l/min / bar) CC models: KISS models: 2 27 / 0.7 14 / 0.25 Type Temp. range °C 1 CC-K12 -20 – 200 2 KISS K12 -20 – 200 3 CC-K15 -20 – 200 4 KISS K15 -20 – 200 5 CC-K20 -30 – 200 6 KISS K20 -30 – 200 8 CC-K25 -30 – 200 9 KISS K25 -30 – 200 Bath Cooler cap. at vol. 0/-10/-20°C l kW 12 0.2/0.12/0.05 12 0.2/0.12/0.05 15 0.2/0.12/0.05 0.2/0.12/0.05 15 0.35/0.27/0.16 20 0.35/0.27/0.16 20 0.35/0.27/0.16 25 0.35/0.27/0.16 25 Bath ope- ning W × D mm 290 × 152 290 × 152 290 × 152 290 × 152 290 × 329 290 × 329 290 × 329 290 × 329 Order No. 10 59 61201 10 59 62098 10 59 61503 10 59 61898 10 59 62005 10 59 61398 10 59 62507 10 59 61598 Compatible control refrigeration circulators The K6 models are compact cold-heat-bath thermostats for temperatures between -25 and 200°C. With the integrated circulation pump, the combinations may be used for ex- ternally closed as well as for externally open (with option level control) heating/cooling jobs. The temperature constancy pursuant to DIN 12876 is 0.02 K with the Compatible Control models, and 0.05 K with the KISS models. Pilot ONE controller: user-friendly, many functions and easily exchangeable with plug- and-play technology. KISS controller: Economically priced and robust with all basic functions, for routine tasks. Technical data: Heating power kW (all models): Pump pressure max. (l/min / bar) CC models: KISS models: 2 27 / 0.7 14 / 0.25 Type Temp. range °C AT CC-K6 -25 – 200 AK KISS K6 -25 – 200 AL CC-K6s -25 – 200 AM KISS K6s -25 – 200 Bath Cooler cap. at vol. 0/-10/-20°C l kW 4.5 0.15/0.1/0.05 0.15/0.1/0.05 4.5 0.21/0.15/0.05 4.5 0.21/0.15/0.05 4.5 Bath ope- ning W × D mm 140 × 120 140 × 120 140 × 120 140 × 120 Order No. 10 59 60611 10 59 64598 10 59 60612 10 59 64498 co d e b e w 604 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

606

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Refrigeration Bath Circulators, Huber Huber classical design cryostats with heating/cooling baths meet typical laboratory heat- ing and cooling tasks safely and with reproducible results. A powerful and speed-con- trolled pressure-suction pump allow you to heat or cool objects in the bath or in external applications. The pump speed is infinitely adjustable. With the optional pressure sensor, it is possible to control the maximum pressure. VPC (variable pressure control) for opti- mum circulation to protect sensitive glass objects from breaking. Ultra-short heating and cooling times thanks to small volumes and a powerful heating/cooling performance. Use displacement bodies (available as an option) to reduce the bath volume by half and to increase the effect. Furthermore, the active surface of the fluid and thus the humidity absorption is reduced. All models come with Active Cooling Control for active control of cooling performance at maximum temperature, and automatic cooling performance ad- justment for economical operation and less waste heat in the laboratory. Depending on the model, the units are equipped with carrying grips or castors. Drain tap at the front for easy emptying of the bath fluid. The top cover is heated to prevent formation of ice. Tem- perature constancy pursuant to DIN 12876 = 0.02 K. Benefits: • Ergonomical design, small dimensions for small footprint • Pilot ONE with Plug&Play technology • Hose-proof display • Large color 5.7 ″ TFT touch screen • Connections for RS232, USB, and Ethernet • Infinitely variable pump speed for homogeneous temperature distribution in the bath or best circulation and heat transfer with external systems • Active Cooling Control - automatic cooling at peak temperature in continuous operation • Energy management with cooling capacity adjustment for energy-efficient, environmen- tally compatible operation and less waste heat • Pt100 external sensor connection via 4-conductor Lemosa connector • Control sensor can be calibrated • Adjustable overtemperature protection, level protection • Safety class III/FL pursuant to DIN 12876-1 • Pump connections for temperature control of objects directly in the circulator bath • Temperature-controlled cover plate to prevent condensation and ice formation in the 2 1 bath • Outlet at the front (for frequent fluid change: drain tap available as an option) Type CC-405 CC-405w CC-410 1 CC-410wl CC-415 2 CC-415wl CC-505 CC-505wl CC-508 CC-508w CC-510 CC-510w CC-515 CC-515w CC-520w CC-525w Temp. range °C -40 – 200 -40 – 200 -45 – 200 -45 – 200 -40 – 200 -40 – 200 -50 – 200 -50 – 200 -55 – 200 -55 – 200 -50 – 200 -50 – 200 -55 – 200 -55 – 200 -55 – 200 -55 – 100 Bath volume l 5 5 22/8.51) 22/8.51) 5 5 5 5 5 5 26/151) 18/111) 26/151) 18/111) 17/101) 17/101) Heating capacity kW 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 Pump pressure max. l/min / bar 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 25 / 0.7 1) using displacement insert w = water-cooled refrigerator wl = water-and-air-cooled refrigerator Natural refrigerant available on request. Function variants available via E-grade. Cooler capacity at 100/20/0/-20/-30/-40°C kW 0.7/0.7/0.7/0.45/0.18/0.03 0.7/0.7/0.7/0.45/0.18/0.03 0.8/0.8/0.8/0.5/0.15/0.1 0.8/0.8/0.8/0.5/0.15/0.1 1.2/1.2/1.0/0.6/0.2/0.05 1.2/1.2/1.0/0.6/0.2/0.05 1.2/1.2/1.0/0.6/–/0.15 1.2/1.2/1.0/0.6/–/0.15 1.5/1.5/1.5/1.0/–/0.3 1.5/1.5/1.5/1.0/–/0.3 2.1/2.1/2.1/1.0/–/0.4 2.4/2.4/2.4/1.0/–/0.4 3.3/3.3/3.3/1.6/–/0.6 3.3/3.3/3.3/1.6/–/0.6 5.0/5.0/5.0/3.0/–/1.5 7.0/7.0/5.0/3.0/–/1.5 Order No. 10 59 65041 10 59 64053 10 59 64101 10 59 64103 10 59 64151 10 59 64153 10 59 65051 10 59 65053 10 59 65081 10 59 65082 10 59 65101 10 59 65103 10 59 65151 10 59 65152 10 59 65202 10 59 65252 Failed to find what you are looking for ? Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 605

607

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Temperature control units for industrial application, Huber The dynamic temperature control systems of the Unistat series revolutionized fluid tem- perature control engineering. Unistats are ideal for fast and highly accurate temperature control of external applications, such as reactors, autoclaves, miniplants, pilot systems, reaction calorimeters, or distillation plants. Compared to conventional circulator baths, Unistats convince with their unique thermodynamics for highly accurate and reproducible results. The Unistat technology ensures shortest possible heating and cooling times as well as wide temperature ranges without time-consuming fluid change. Choose from a portfolio of more than 60 models with cooling capacities from 0.7 to 130 kW. Unistat temperature control systems offer a range of professional functions for all types of de- mands. They feature a colored touch screen display with comfortable menu navigation and graphical real-time indication of temperature curves as well as an intelligent cascade temperature control and powerful circulation pumps with speed control, as well as a pro- grammer, ramp function, calendar start, adjustable user menus, sensor calibration, and analog and digital interfaces. 2 1 Type Petite Fleur Petite Fleur w Petite Fleur eo Grande Fleur Grande Fleur w Grande Fleur-eo Grande Fleur w-eo Temp. range °C -40 – 200 -40 – 200 -40 – 200 -40 – 200 -40 – 200 -40 – 200 -40 – 200 Pump pressure max. l/min / bar 25 / 0.9 25 / 0.9 25 / 0.9 47 / 0.9 47 / 0.9 47 / 0.9 47 / 0.9 Type Unistat tango Unistat tango w Unistat tango wl Unistat 405 Unistat 405w Unistat 405wl Unistat 410 Unistat 410w Unistat 425 Unistat 425w Unistat 430 Unistat 430w Unistat 510 Unistat 510w Temp. range °C -45 – 250 -45 – 250 -45 – 250 -45 – 250 -45 – 250 -45 – 250 -45 – 250 -45 – 250 -40 – 250 -40 – 250 -40 – 250 -40 – 250 -50 – 250 -50 – 250 606 Order No. 10 59 61031 10 59 61032 10 59 61033 10 59 61034 10 59 61035 10 59 61036 10 59 61037 Order No. 10 59 61001 10 59 61003 10 59 61002 10 59 64051 10 59 64052 10 59 64901 10 59 60201 10 59 64102 10 59 64251 10 59 64252 10 59 64301 10 59 64302 10 59 65100 10 59 65102 Advantages & functions: • Fast heating and cooling: • Excellent dynamics: Ideal for the implementation of isothermal chemical processes First choice for exothermal reactions in terms of operational safety • Highly accurate and reproducible: For sophisticated temperature control tasks from -125°C to +425°C • Uniquely small dimensions, very compact design; Convincing volume refrigeration capacity [Watt/dm3] • Large temperature range without tedious fluid change: The thermofluid DW-Therm covers temperatures from -90°C to +200°C • Large coloured 5.7 ″ TFT touch screen: Graphics capable, multi-lingual, dialog capable, and very easy to operate • Highest refrigeration capacity density [W/L]: For a highly dynamic temperature change • Flexible communication: With USB and Ethernet interfaces Unistat cooling heating thermostats up to -40°C As a standard, all models come with natural refrigerant. eo ?= for externally open operation Heating capacity kW 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Cooler capacity at 200/20/0/-20/-30°C kW 0.48/0.48/0.45/0.27/0.16 0.48/0.48/0.45/0.27/0.16 0,48/0,48/0,45/0,27/0,16 0.60/0.60/0.60/0.35/0.20 0.60/0.60/0.60/0.35/0.20 0.60/0.60/0.60/0.35/0.20 0.60/0.60/0.60/0.35/0.20 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 260 × 450 × 504 260 × 450 × 504 260 × 450 × 504 295 × 530 × 570 295 × 530 × 570 295 × 530 × 570 295 × 530 × 570 Unistat circulating thermostats up to -55°C w = water-cooled refrigerator wl = water-and-air-cooled refrigerator Cooler capacity at 200/20/0/-20/-30°C kW 0.7/0.7/0.7/0.7/0.4/0.06 0.7/0.7/0.7/0.7/0.4/0.06 0.7/0.7/0.7/0.7/0.4/0.06 1.0/1.0/1.0/1.0/0.6/0.15 1.3/1.3/1.3/1.3/0.7/0.15 1.3/1.3/1.3/1.3/0.7/0.15 1.3/1.5/2.5/1.5/0.8/0.17 1.3/1.5/2.5/1.5/0.8/0.17 2.8/2.8/2.8/2.5/1.9/0.2 2.8/2.8/2.8/2.5/1.6/0.1 3.5/3.5/3.5/3.5/2.2/0.3 3.5/3.5/3.5/3.5/2.2/0.3 5.3/5.3/5.3/5.3/2.8/0.9 5.3/5.3/5.3/5.3/2.8/0.9 Heating capacity kW 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3,0 3.0 1.5/3.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 426 × 327 × 631 426 × 327 × 631 426 × 327 × 631 426 × 327 × 631 426 × 327 × 631 426 × 327 × 631 460 × 554 × 1201 426 × 360 × 631 460 × 554 × 1453 460 × 554 × 1453 460 × 554 × 1453 460 × 554 × 1453 560 × 754 × 1453 460 × 554 × 1453 Pump pressure max. l/min / bar 55 / 0.91) 55 / 0.91) 55 / 0.91) 55 / 0.91) 55 / 0.91) 55 / 0,91) 56 / 0,91) 56 / 0,91) 91 / 1.52) 91 / 1.52) 91 / 1.52) 91 / 1.52) 112 / 1.52) 112 / 1.52) 1) Pressure regulation VPC integrated 2) Pressure regulation VPC via optional bypass Natural refrigerant available on request. Flat-design models available on request. Continued on next page

608

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Unistat circulating thermostats up to -85°C Type 1 Unistat 705 Unistat 705w Unistat 815 2 Unistat 815w Temp. range °C -75 – 250 -75 – 250 -85 – 250 -85 – 250 Pump pressure max. l/min / bar 55 / 0,91) 55 / 0,91) 40 / 0,91) 40 / 0,91) Heating capacity kW 1.5/3.0 1.5/3.0 2 2 Cooler capacity at 250/200/100/0/-20/-40/-60/-80°C kW 0.6/0.6/0.6/0.65/0.6/0.6/0.3/– 0.6/0.6/0.6/0.65/0.6/0.6/0.3/– 1.3/1.3/1.3/1.5/1.5/1.4/1.2/0.2 1.5/1.5/1.5/1.5/1.5/1.4/1.2/0.2 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 425 × 400 × 720 425 × 400 × 720 460 × 604 × 1465 460 × 604 × 1465 Order No. 10 59 67051 10 59 67052 10 59 68151 10 59 68152 1) Pressure regulation VPC integrated Natural refrigerant available on request. Heating circulator for closed systems up to 300°C Type Temp. range °C 3 Chili 65 – 300 Pump pressu- re max. l/min / bar 45 / 0.9 Heating capacity kW 3 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 240 × 427 × 393 Order No. 10 59 62101 Heating Bath Circulators, JULABO 3 co d e b e w CORIO C heating bath circulators Laboratory bath circulators for routine and standard tasks The bath circulators of the CORIO™ series are equipped with high-quality stainless steel tanks or transparent tanks. WW2KN003 CORIO C-B5 stainless steel mm 230×380×410 kg 7.3 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C 20 – 100 Temp. accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Bath opening Bath depth Order No. kW 2 l/min 6 mm 150×150 mm 150 °C 0.03 LED 10 35 91405 CORIO C-BT5 plastics mm 230×380×380 kg 4.8 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C 20 – 100 Temp. accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Bath opening Bath depth Order No. kW 2 l/min 6 mm 150×150 mm 150 °C 0.03 LED 10 35 91305 CORIO C-B13 stainless steel 380×400×420 9.1 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 6 300×180 150 10 35 91413 CORIO C-B17 stainless steel 380×400×470 9.3 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 6 300×180 200 10 35 91417 CORIO C-B19 stainless steel 380×580×420 10.5 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 6 300×350 150 10 35 91419 CORIO C-B27 stainless steel 380×580×470 12 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 6 300×350 200 10 35 91427 CORIO C-BT9 plastics 320×380×380 8.3 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 6 230×150 150 10 35 91309 CORIO C-BT19 plastics 380×580×380 7 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 6 300×350 150 10 35 91319 CORIO C-BT27 plastics 380×580×430 7.2 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 6 300×350 200 10 35 91327 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 607 Continued on next page

609

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths CORIO CD heating circulators with open bath Laboratory bath circulators for routine and standard tasks The bath immersion circulators of the CORIO™ series are equipped with high-quality stainless steel tanks or transparent tanks and pump connections. • Models for internal applications • Bright, white, easy to read display • Very quiet • USB port • Integrated drain screw (for stainless steel tanks, not with B5) 1 CORIO CD-B5 stainless steel mm 230×380×410 kg 8.2 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C 20 – 150 Temp. accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. bar 0.35 mm 150×150 mm 150 °C 0.03 LED kW 2 l/min 15 l 3.5 – 5 10 35 92405 3 CORIO CD-B19 stainless steel mm 380×580×420 kg 11.5 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C 20 – 150 Temp. accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. bar 0.35 mm 300×350 mm 150 °C 0.03 LED kW 2 l 14 – 19 l/min 15 10 35 92419 CORIO CD-B13 stainless steel 380×400×420 9.1 20 – 150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 300×180 150 9 – 13 10 35 92413 2 CORIO CD-B17 stainless steel 380×400×470 9.3 20 – 150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 300×180 200 13 – 17 10 35 92417 4 CORIO CD-B27 stainless steel 380×580×470 13 20 – 150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 300×350 200 17 – 27 10 35 92427 CORIO CD-B33 stainless steel 910×360×430 21 20 – 150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 660×320 150 26 – 39 10 35 92433 CORIO CD-B39 stainless steel mm 540×340×570 kg 18 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C 20 – 150 Temp. accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. bar 0.35 mm 330×300 mm 300 °C 0.03 LED kW 2 l 35 – 41 l/min 15 10 35 92439 CORIO CD-BT5 plastics 230×380×380 5.5 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 150×150 150 3.5 – 5 10 35 92305 CORIO CD-BT19 plastics 380×580×380 8 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 300×350 150 14 – 19 10 35 92319 5 CORIO CD-BT27 plastics 380×580×430 8.1 20 – 100 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 300×350 200 20 – 27 10 35 92327 2 4 5 1 3 608

610

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Heating and Refrigerated Circulators, JULABO JULABO refrigerated and heating circulators for heating and cooling are suitable for ex- ternal temperature tasks and for temperature applications directly in the bath. Models are available in various capacity classes. Powerful circulating pump systems and high heating and cooling capacities guarantee short heat-up an cool-down times. With “Active Cooling Control” up to +200°C. “FP” models are equipped with proportional cooling control for lower energy consumption and heat loss. The inevitable dust accumulation that occurs in refrigeration systems is solved by means of an easily removed venting grill, which allows for easy cleaning. Depending on the model, the units are equipped with handles or castors for an easy transportation. All models have a drain tap on the front allowing the fluid to be drained easily. Typical applications are the temperature control of external, closed con- sumers such as photometers, refractometers, viscosimeters, etc. Temperature applica- tions with small objects in the circulator bath are possible simultaneously. CORIO refrigerated/heating circulator Laboratory bath circulators for routine and standard tasks Refrigerated / heating circulators of the CORIO™ series distinguish themselves with a great price-performance ratio. They are ideal for all standard tasks and routine work in laboratories and industry. • Models for internal and external applications • Bright, white, easy to read display • Very quiet • Easy pump change-over (internal and external circulation) • External pump connections (M16x1) • USB connection • Space-saving cooling coil design yields more usable space in the bath tank • Bath lid and drain tap included • Removable ventilation grid • Refrigeration unit without side vents • Class III (FL) according to DIN 12876-1 Cooling capacity CORIO CD-200F CORIO CD-201F CORIO CD-300F CORIO CD-600F CORIO CD-601F CORIO CD-900F CORIO CD-1000F CORIO CD-1001F -40°C -10°C +20°C -20°C 0.06 kW 0.06 kW 0.11 kW -30°C 0°C 0.22 kW 0.17 kW 0.22 kW 0.16 kW 0.31 kW 0.28 kW 0.6 kW 0.46 kW 0.35 kW 0.18 kW 0.1 kW 0.6 kW 0.46 kW 0.35 kW 0.18 kW 0.07 kW 0.9 kW 0.8 kW 0.55 kW 0.35 kW 0.15 kW 0.01 kW 1 kW 0.98 kW 0.73 kW 0.53 kW 0.25 kW 0.02 kW 1 kW 0.9 kW 0.63 kW 0.35 kW 0.13 kW 0.1 kW co d e b e w WW2KN006 1 2 CORIO CD-200F CORIO CD-201F CORIO CD-300F CORIO CD-600F 2 3 1 kg 26 °C -20 – +150 °C 0.03 LED Type Width × Depth × Height mm 230×380×650 Weight Working temperature Temperature accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Class division (DIN12876-1) Order No. bar 0.35 mm 130×150 mm 150 3 10 35 92701 kW 2 l/min 15 kg 38.5 °C -40 – +150 °C 0.03 LED Type Width × Depth × Height mm 360×460×740 Weight Working temperature Temperature accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Class division (DIN12876-1) Order No. bar 0.35 mm 220×150 mm 200 3 10 35 92705 kW 2 l/min 15 co d e b e w 440×410×440 25 -20 – +150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 130×150 150 3 10 35 92702 240×420×660 28 -25 – +150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 130×150 150 3 10 35 92703 330×470×690 36 -35 – +150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 220×150 150 3 10 35 92704 3 390×620×750 52 -40 – +150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 260×150 200 3 10 35 92706 420×490×700 51.5 -40 – +150 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 220×150 150 3 10 35 92707 Continued on next page 450×640×950 74 -38 – +100 0.03 LED 2 15 0.35 350×410 300 3 10 35 92708 CORIO CD-601F CORIO CD-900F CORIO CD-1000F CORIO CD-1001F To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 609

611

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths CORIO CP refrigerated/heating circulator CORIO CP-200F CORIO CP-201F CORIO CP-300F CORIO CP-600F Edelstahl CORIO CP-601F CORIO CP-900F CORIO CP-1000F CORIO CP-1001F Edelstahl Edelstahl 44 × 41 × 44 25 -20 – +200 ±0.03 0.2 Edelstahl 24 × 42 × 66 28 -25 – +200 ±0.03 0.3 Edelstahl 33 × 47 × 69 35.7 -35 – +200 ±0.03 0.6 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 13 × 15 15 3 – 4 10 35 93702 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 13 × 15 15 3 – 4 10 35 93703 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 22 × 15 15 5 – 7.5 10 35 93704 Edelstahl 39 × 62 × 75 52 -38 – +200 ±0.03 0.9 Edelstahl 42 × 49 × 70 51,5 -50 – +200 ±0.03 1 Edelstahl 45 × 64 × 95 73.7 -38 – +100 ±0.03 1 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 26 × 35 20 21 – 30 10 35 93706 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 22 × 15 15 5 – 7.5 10 35 93707 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 35 × 41 30 42 – 56 10 35 93708 1 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C -20 – +200 Temp. accuracy ± Cooler capacity cm 23 × 39 × 65 kg 26 °C ±0.03 0.2 at 20°C Temperature display Heating capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. kW LED kW 2 l/min 8 – 27 bar 0.1 – 0.7 cm 13 × 15 cm 15 l 3 – 4 10 35 93701 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C -35 – +200 Temp. accuracy ± Cooler capacity cm 36 × 46 × 74 kg 38.5 °C ±0.03 0.6 at 20°C Temperature display Heating capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. kW LED kW 2 l/min 8 – 27 bar 0.1 – 0.7 cm 22 × 15 cm 15 l 8 – 10 10 35 93705 DYNEO DD refrigerated/heating circulator 2 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C -20 – +200 Temp. accuracy ± Cooler capacity cm 23 × 39 × 65 kg 25.7 °C ±0.01 0.2 at 20°C kW DYNEO DD-200F DYNEO DD-201F DYNEO DD-300F DYNEO DD-600F Stainless steel Stainless steel 44 × 41 × 44 24.7 -20 – +200 ±0.01 0.2 Stainless steel 24 × 42 × 66 27.7 -25 – +200 ±0.01 0.3 Stainless steel 33 × 47 × 69 35.7 -35 – +200 ±0.01 0.6 Temperature display Heating capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. 3.5 ″ TFT Display W 2 l/min 8 – 23 bar 0.1 – 0.6 cm 13 × 15 cm 15 l 3 – 4 10 35 91701 3.5 ″ TFT Display 2 8 – 23 0.1 – 0.6 13 × 15 15 3 – 4 10 35 91702 3.5 ″ TFT Display 2 8 – 23 0.1 – 0.6 13 × 15 15 3 – 4 10 35 91730 3.5 ″ TFT Display 2 8 – 23 0.1 – 0.6 22 × 15 15 5 – 7.5 10 35 91704 Continued on next page 1 2 610

612

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers DYNEO DD-601F DYNEO DD-900F DYNEO DD-1000F DYNEO DD-1001F Stainless steel Stainless steel 39 × 62 × 75 51.7 -38 – +200 ±0.01 0.9 Stainless steel 42 × 49 × 70 51.2 -50 – +200 ±0.01 1 Stainless steel 45 × 64 × 95 73.7 -38 – +100 ±0.01 1 Circulator Baths Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature °C -35 – +200 Temp. accuracy ± Cooler capacity cm 36 × 46 × 74 kg 38.2 °C ±0.01 0.6 at 20°C kW Temperature display Heating capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. 3.5 ″ TFT Display W 2 l/min 8 – 23 bar 0.1 – 0.6 cm 22 × 15 cm 20 l 8 – 10 10 35 91705 3.5 ″ TFT Display 2 8 – 23 0.1 – 0.6 26 × 35 20 21 – 30 10 35 91706 3.5 ″ TFT Display 2 8 – 23 0.1 – 0.6 22 × 15 15 5 – 7.5 10 35 91707 3.5 ″ TFT Display 2 8 – 23 0.1 – 0.6 35 × 41 30 42 – 56 10 35 91708 co d e b e w WW2KN007 Heating and Refrigerated Circulators, JULABO The HighTech series HE models • Bright VFD COMFORT DISPLAY for simultaneous indication of internal/external setpoint and actual values • ICC (Intelligent Cascade Control) self-optimizing temperature control • TCF Temperature Control Features for range limiting threshold value setting, co-speed factor and control dynamics • Electronically adjustable pump capacity, incl. illuminated bar display • Pt100 external sensor connection for measurement and control • Integrated programmer for 10 program steps • Optional electronic insert with analog connections for temperature recorder, setpoint encoder etc. • Powerful pressure and suction pump for up to 1.1 bar, electronically adjustable Interface Type Width × Depth × Height Weight Working temperature Temperature accuracy ± Temperature display Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Suction Bath opening W × D Bath depth H Overtemperature cut-out Low level protection Class division (DIN12876-1) Order No. 1 F25-HE cm 23×42×64 kg 32 °C -28 – 200 °C 0.01 VFD RS232 l/min 22 – 26 mbar 400 – 700 mbar 200 – 400 cm 12×14 cm 14 variable yes S3 46 35 92125 F32-HE 31×42×66 38 -35 – 200 0.01 VFD RS232 22 – 26 400 – 700 200 – 400 18×12 15 variable yes S3 46 35 92132 2 FP50-HE 42×49×72 57 -50 – 200 0.01 VFD RS232 22 – 26 400 – 700 200 – 400 18×12 15 variable yes S3 46 35 92150 2 1 We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 611

613

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers co d e b e w WW2KN011 1 3 612 Circulator Baths PRESTO Highly Dynamic Temperature Control Systems, JULABO An entirely new generation of highly dynamic temperature control systems by JULABO. The new PRESTO® systems are designed for precise temperature control as well as rap- id temperature changes, making them ideal for reactor vessels, material stress tests, or temperature simulations. These instruments cover a working temperature of -92 to +250°C with high cooling and heating capacity. Highly efficient components give these instru- ments the ability to compensate for exothermic and endothermic reactions with extraor- dinary speed. Permanent internal monitoring and self-lubricating pumps contribute to the new PRESTO®’s long service life. The integrated 5.7-inch color industrial-grade touch panel is one of the identifying characteristics of the new PRESTO®. It gives the user a clear and well-organized view of important information while greatly improving user-friendli- ness. Once in operation, the new PRESTO® units are whisper quiet and barely audible in a laboratory. The new PRESTO® units are extremely robust and work reliably even if the ambient temperature climbs as high as +40°C. Multiple interfaces permit remote control of the PRESTO® across networks and in superordinated control systems. Closed side panels without ventilation slits reduce the required footprint of the devices to a minimum. Benefits and functions: • Operating temperature range from -92°C to 250°C • Extremely rapid heating and cooling • Heating performance from 1.8 kW to 19 kW • Cooling performance from 0.5 kW to 19 kW • Magnet-coupled pumps (capacity flow rate up to 80 l/min, pump pressure up to 5.5 bar) • Air- or water-cooled • Large, intuitive 5.7 ″ TFT touchscreen • Short service times 2 PRESTO highly dynamic temperature control systems down to -40°C PRESTO A30 and A40/W40 are the entry-level models for the highly dynamic JULABO temperature control system. With a heating performance of up to 2.7 kW and a cooling performance of up to 1.2 kW, these PRESTO systems over an operating temperature range between -40°C and 250°C. The systems are very quiet in operation; thanks to the inte- grated handles and castors, they are easy to move around in the lab. Digital and analog interfaces are included as a standard. Technical data: Temperature stability: External Pt100 sensor connection: yes Digital interfaces: ±0.01 – ±0.05°C Integrated programmer: Pump connections: Display/resolution: RS232, SD-Card, USB, Ethernet, alarm-off, RS485, 2. external Pt100 sensor connection (only A40(W40) 8 × 60 steps M24 × 1.5 5.7 ″ TFT/±0.01°C Cooling capacity A30 A40 W40 0°C 20°C -40°C 200°C -30°C – 0.5 kW 0.5 kW 0.4 kW 0.17 kW 0.05 kW 0.3 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 0.9 kW 0.1 kW 0.6 kW 0.3 kW 0.06 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.0 kW 0.55 kW -20°C Type Temp. range °C 1 A30 -30 – +250 2 A40 -40 – +250 3 W40 -40 – +250 Heating cap. kW 2.7 2.7 2.7 4 Pressure Order No. W × D × H Flow rate mm l/min 25 250×600×620 10 35 92030 16 – 40 0.3 – 1.7 330×600×670 10 35 92040 16 – 40 0.3 – 1.7 330×600×670 10 35 92140 bar 0.5 PRESTO highly dynamic temperature control systems down to -50°C The PRESTO A45 and W50 are the most powerful PRESTO models with one-stage cold control. The systems combine maximum heating and cooling power with strong pumps. In the extended version A45T and W50t, they even have a heating performance of 12 kW. The pump pressure is adjustable and is indicated at the display. Typical applications in- clude temperature control for double-walled reaction vessels, reactor systems, auto- claves, distillations, pilot systems, semiconductor industry etc. Technical data: Temperature stability: External Pt100 sensor connection: yes ±0.05 – ±0.1°C Continued on next page

614

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Digital interfaces: Integrated programmer: Pump connections: Display/resolution: RS232, SD-Card, USB, Ethernet, alarm-off, RS485, 2. external Pt100 sensor connection 8 × 60 steps M30 × 1.5 5.7 ″ TFT/±0.01°C Cooling capacity A45 A45t W50 W50t 200°C 3.4 kW 3.4 kW 7.0 kW 7.0 kW 20°C 3.5 kW 3.5 kW 7.5 kW 7.5 kW 0°C 3.3 kW 3.3 kW 6.5 kW 6.5 kW -20°C 1.8 kW 1.8 kW 3.0 kW 3.0 kW -30°C 1.0 kW 1.0 kW 1.8 kW 1.8 kW -40°C 0.3 kW 0.3 kW 0.6 kW 0.6 kW Type Temp. range °C 4 A45 -45 – +250 A45t -45 – +250 5 W50 -50 – +250 W50t -50 – +250 Heating cap. kW 6 12 6 12 bar mm Pressure Order No. W × D × H Flow rate l/min 25 – 76 0.48 – 3.2 530×665×1260 10 35 92045 25 – 76 0.48 – 3.2 530×665×1260 10 35 92046 25 – 76 0.48 – 3.2 530×665×1260 10 35 92150 25 – 76 0.48 – 3.2 530×665×1260 10 35 92151 PRESTO highly dynamic temperature control systems down to -85°C The devices PRESTO A80 and up use two-stage cold control, allowing them to reach temperatures of -80°C and -85°C respectively. Both models are available with air or water cooling. Air-cooled systems can be flexibly positioned; water-cooled systems, while being even quieter in operation, require a water-cooling connection. Technical data: Temperature stability: ±0.01 – ±0.05°C (A80/A80t/W80/W80t) ±0.05 – ±0.1°C (A85/A85t/W55/W85/W85t) External Pt100 sensor connection: yes Digital interfaces: Integrated programmer: Pump connections: Display/resolution: RS232, SD-Card, USB, Ethernet, alarm-off, RS485, 2. external Pt100 sensor connection 8 × 60 steps M24 × 1.5 (A80/A80t/W80/W80t) M30 × 1.5 (A85/A85t/W55/W85/W85t) 5.7 ″ TFT/±0.01°C 5 6 Cooling capacity A80 A80t W55 W80 W80t A85 A85t W85 W85t 20°C 0°C -20°C -30°C -40°C 200°C -60°C -80°C 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.1 kW 1.1 kW 1.1 kW 0.65 kW 0.1 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.1 kW 1.1 kW 1.1 kW 0.65 kW 0.1 kW 13.5 kW 15 kW 10 kW 4 kW 2.5 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.1 kW 1.1 kW 1.1 kW 0.65 kW 0.1 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.2 kW 1.1 kW 1.1 kW 1.1 kW 0.65 kW 0.1 kW 2.8 kW 2.5 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.2 kW 0.4 kW 2.8 kW 2.5 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.2 kW 0.4 kW 2.8 kW 2.5 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.2 kW 0.4 kW 2.8 kW 2.5 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.4 kW 2.2 kW 0.4 kW Type Temp. range °C 6 A80 -80 – +250 A80t -80 – +250 W55 -80 – +250 W80 -80 – +250 W80t -80 – +250 7 A85 -85 – +250 A85t -85 – +250 W85 -85 – +250 W85t -85 – +250 co d e b e w Heating cap. kW 1.8 3.6 15 @ 400 V 12 @ 208 V 1.8 3.6 6 15 6 15 Flow rate l/min 16 – 40 16 – 40 35 – 80 16 – 40 16 – 40 35 – 80 35 – 80 35 – 80 35 – 80 Pressure W × D × H Order No. bar 0.3 – 1.7 0.3 – 1.7 0.48 – 3.2 @ 400 V 0.48 – 3.0 @ 208 V 0.3 – 1.7 0.3 – 1.7 0.48 – 3.2 0.48 – 3.2 0.48 – 3.2 0.48 – 3.2 mm 430×650×1260 10 35 92080 430×650×1260 10 35 92081 610x855×1250 10 35 91552 430×650×1260 10 35 92180 430×650×1260 10 35 92181 610×1080×1250 10 35 92085 610×1080×1250 10 35 92086 610×1080×1250 10 35 92185 610×1080×1250 10 35 92186 7 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 613

615

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Ultra-Low Refrigerated Circulators, JULABO JULABO ultra-flow refrigerated circulators for heating and cooling are suitable for external temperature applications directly in the circulator bath. Powerful circulating pump sys- tems and high heating an cooling capacities guarantee short heat-up an cool-down times even for large-volume, external consumers. An energy saving feature with only minor loss of heat is provided by the proportional cooling capacity control on the FP models. Models with the type suffix “W” are water-cooled. The units are equipped with handles or castors for an easy transportation. All models have a drain tap on the front allowing the fluid to be drained easily. Additionally the instruments are equipped with an improved insulation to help avoid ice-formation, and have a visual liquid level display. Typical applications are the temperature control of double-walled reaction vessels, autoclaves, miniplant systems, kilo laboratories, freezing point determination, low temperature calibration, petroleum tests, etc. The HighTech series HL and SL models • Bright VFD COMFORT DISPLAY for simultaneous indication of internal/external setpoint and actual values • PID cascade temperature control with highest internal an external temperature stability • Electronically adjustable pump capacity, incl. illuminated bar display • 3-point calibration • Early warning system for low liquid level • Pt100 external sensor connection for measurement and control • Integrated programmer for 10 program steps • LCD DIALOG-DISPLAY, backlit for convenient interactive operation • ICC (Intelligent Cascade Control) self optimizing temperature control • TCF Temperature Control Features for range limiting, threshold value setting, co-speed factor and control dynamics • RS232 / RS485 interface for enhanced online communication and networking • Stakei connector sockets for solenoid valve or HST booster heater with additional 4kW heat output (optional) • Integrated programmer for 6 x 60 program steps • Powerful pressure and suction pump for up to 1.1 bar, electronically adjustable • Optional electronic insert with analog connections for temperature recorder, setpoint co d e b e w WW2KN008 2 4 Order No. 46 35 93553 46 35 93556 10 35 93590 46 35 93591 1 3 614 encoder, etc. Interface Type Width × Depth × Height Weight Working temperature Temperature accuracy ± Temperature display Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Suction Filling opening Ø Bath opening W × D Bath depth H Overtemperature cut-out Low level protection Class division (DIN12876-1) Order No. Type W × D × H Wght Working temp. Temp. accur. ± Temp. display Pump cap. Flow rate Pressure Suction Filling opening Ø Bath depth H Overtemp. cut-out Low level protection Class division cm 7 cm 22 Interface (DIN12876-1) VFD+LCD RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 1 FP89-HL cm 55×60×92 kg 135 °C -90 – 100 °C 0.02 l/min 22 – 26 mbar 400 – 700 mbar 200 – 400 cm cm 13×15 cm 16 variable yes S3 10 35 93589 FP51-SL 46×55×89 90 -51 – 200 0.01 VFD+LCD 22 – 26 400 – 700 200 – 400 18×12 20 variable yes S3 10 35 93551 2 FP52-SL 59×76×116 156 -60 – 100 0.05 VFD+LCD 22 – 26 400 – 700 200 – 400 7 22 variable yes S3 46 35 93552 3 4 FPW52-SL cm 59×76×116 kg 153 °C -60 – 100 °C 0.05 FPW55-SL 59×76×116 163 -60 – 100 0.05 VFD+LCD FP90-SL 59×76×116 195 -90 – 100 0.05 VFD+LCD FPW90-SL 59×76×116 188 -90 – 100 0.05 VFD+LCD VFD+LCD RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 RS232/RS485 l/min 22 – 26 mbar 400 – 700 mbar 200 – 400 variable yes S3 22 – 26 400 – 700 200 – 400 7 23 variable yes S3 22 – 26 400 – 700 200 – 400 7 20 variable yes S3 22 – 26 400 – 700 200 – 400 7 20 variable yes S3

616

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Heating Immersion Circulators, JULABO JULABO heating immersion circulators with stainless steel bath tanks are used for internal an external temperature tasks. They now have increased capacities for temperature ap- plication to larger external systems as well as open systems, making them ideal for exter- nal temperature jobs. Simultaneous temperature applications of smaller objects can also be carried out in the internal bath of the circulator. Models are available in a selection of sizes and with a variety of features. Accessories for these units include Pt100 sensors, thermal bath fluids, and hoses and adapters for connecting to external systems. An inte- grated cooling coil is provided for temperature applications at below or near ambient. CORIO heating circulators Laboratory bath circulators for routine and standard tasks CORIO™ heating immersion circulators offer professional technology for high demands. These devices allow for temperature control either in the internal bath or in a connected external application. • Models for internal and external applications • Bright, white, easy to read display • Very quiet • Easy change between internal and external circulation • USB connection • High-quality stainless steel tanks with bath cover and drain tap • Integrated cooling coil for counter-cooling co d e b e w WW2KN005 1 1 CORIO CD-BC4 CORIO CD-BC6 CORIO CD-BC12 CORIO CD-BC26 stainless steel mm 230×410×420 Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature Temp. accuracy ± Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. kg 8.8 °C 20 – 150 °C ± 0.03 kW 2 l/min 15 bar 0.35 mm 130×150 mm 150 l 3 – 4.5 10 35 92504 stainless steel 240×440×470 10 20 – 150 ± 0.03 2 15 0.35 130×150 200 4.5 – 6 10 35 92506 stainless steel 330×490×470 12.2 20 – 150 ± 0.03 2 15 0.35 220×150 200 8.5 – 12 10 35 92512 stainless steel 390×620×480 19 20 – 150 ± 0.03 2 15 0.35 220×300 200 19 – 26 10 35 92526 The TopTech series with insulated stainless steel bath tanks, flexible pump capacity and an increased oper- ating temperature range of up to +200°C 2 CORIO CP-BC4 CORIO CP-BC6 CORIO CP-BC12 CORIO CP-BC26 Type W × D × H Weight Working temperature Temp. accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. cm 23 × 41 × 42 kg 8.5 °C 20 – 200 °C ±0.02 LED W 2 l/min 8 – 27 mbar 0.1 –0 7 cm 13 × 15 cm 15 l 3 – 4.5 10 35 93504 24 × 44 × 47 10 20 – 200 ±0.02 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 –0 7 13 × 15 20 4.5 – 6 10 35 93506 33 × 49 × 47 12 20 – 200 ±0.02 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 –0 7 22 × 15 20 8.5 – 12 10 35 93512 39 × 62 × 48 19 20 – 200 ±0.02 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 –0 7 26 × 35 20 19 – 26 10 35 93526 2 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 615 Continued on next page

617

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths DYNEO DD heating immersion circulators New temperature control technology for demanding applications DYNEO DD heating circulators for internal and external applications are equipped with closed bath tanks. The tanks are well insulated and include a coil for counter-cooling. An integrated drain tap makes emptying the tank safe and clean. The multilingual 3.5-inch color display and unique rotary knob provide for straightforward and intuitive operation. 1 2 DYNEO DD-BC4 DYNEO DD-BC6 DYNEO DD-BC12 DYNEO DD-BC26 Stainless steel Type Bath tank W × D × H Weight Working temperature Temp. accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Flow rate Pressure Bath opening Bath depth Filling volume Order No. mm 23 × 41 × 42 kg 8.5 °C 20 – 200 °C ±0.01 LED kW 2 l/min 8 – 27 bar 0.1 – 0.7 cm 13 × 15 cm 15 l 3 – 4.5 10 35 91504 Stainless steel 24 × 44 × 47 10 20 – 200 ±0.01 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 13 × 15 20 4.5 – 6 10 35 91506 Stainless steel 33 × 49 × 47 12 20 – 200 ±0.01 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 22 × 15 20 8.5 – 12 10 35 91512 Stainless steel 39 × 62 × 48 19 20 – 200 ±0.01 LED 2 8 – 27 0.1 – 0.7 26 × 35 20 19 – 26 10 35 91526 The HighTech series HE and SE models • Bright VFD COMFORT DISPLAY for simultaneous indication of internal/external setpoint and actual values • ICC (Intelligent Cascade Control) self-optimizing temperature control • TCF Temperature Control Features for range limiting, threshold value setting, co-speed factor and control dynamics • Electronically adjustable pump capacity, incl. illuminated bar display • Pt100 external sensor connection for measurement and control • Integrated programmer for 10 program steps • Optional electronic insert with analog connections for temperature recorder, setpoint • Powerful pressure and suction pump for up to 1.1 bar, electronically adjustable encoder, etc. Interface Type Width × Depth × Height Weight Working temperature Temperature accuracy ± Temperature display Heating capacity Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Suction Bath opening W × D Bath depth H Overtemperature cut-out Low level protection Class division (DIN12876-1) Order No. 3 HE-4 cm 21×42×40 kg 11.0 °C 20 – 250 °C 0.01 VFD display W 2000 RS232 l/min 22 – 26 mbar 400 – 700 max. mbar 200 – 400 max. cm 13×15 cm 15 variable yes S3 46 35 92104 SE-6 21×43×44 13.5 20 – 300 0.01 VFD display 3000 RS232 22 – 26 400 – 700 max. 200 – 400 max. 13×15 20 variable yes S3 46 35 92506 SE-12 30×43×47 14.0 20 – 300 0.01 VFD display 3000 RS232 22 – 26 400 – 700 max. 200 – 400 max. 22×15 20 variable yes S3 46 35 92512 The HighTech series HL and SL models (as HE/SE, plus the following) • LCD DIALOG-DISPLAY, backlit for convenient interactive operation • RS232 / RS485 interface for enhanced online communication and networking • Stakei connector sockets for solenoid valve or HST booster heater with additional 4 kW heat output (optional) • Integrated programmer for 6 x 60 program steps Technical data: Heating immersion circulator HL-4 same as HE-4 Heating immersion circulator SL-6 same as SE-6 Heating immersion circulator SL-12 same as SE-12 5 Article Heating immersion circulator HL-4 4 Heating immersion circulator SL-6 5 Heating immersion circulator SL-12 Order No. 46 35 93104 46 35 93506 46 35 93512 1 2 3 616 4

618

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Circulating Thermostats, A. KRÜSS Optronic 1 Peltier thermostat PT31 The PT31 circulation thermostat is equipped with high-performance functions. The device is ideally suited for applications requiring a temperature range at a constant level. The robust locking mechanism of the PT31 provides a sturdy connection and ensures con- stant temperature control of the medium. The compact and sturdy design does not require much space and can be placed anywhere in the laboratory. Technical data: Temp. control range: 8 – 35°C Accuracy of temp. control: ± 0.2°C Temp. control resolution: Electrical data: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Article Peltier thermostat PT31 0.1°C 100 – 240 V AC, 1.3 A, 50/60 Hz 108 × 199 × 145 mm 1.5 kg Order No. 65 61 20031 for refractometers/polarimeters 2 Circulating thermostat PT80 The PT80 circulation thermostat is an extremely quiet, energy-efficient and handy device that has been specially developed for small temperature control tasks in the laboratory. Fast temperature control is also possible due to the low filling volume of only 250 ml. With an accuracy of ±0.1°C, the PT80 is ideally suited to high laboratory standards for the temperature control of polarimeters and refractometers. The PT80 is also very well equipped for efficient and environmentally friendly cooling of condensers (e.g. Liebig or reflux condensers) in thermal separation processes on a laboratory scale. Technical data: Temp. control range: 5 – 80°C Accuracy of temp. control: ± 0.1°C Temp. control resolution: Pump capacity: Pump pressure: Cooling capacity at 20°C: 40 W 120 W Heating capacity: 100–240 V AC, 2.5 A, 50/60 Hz Electrical data: Dimensions (B×H×T): 170 × 225 × 244 mm Weight: 2.7 kg Article Circulating thermostat PT80 0.1°C 60 l/h 110 mbar Order No. 10 61 10080 LAUDA Loop – Thermoelectric circulation thermostats, LAUDA The device line LAUDA Loop comprises two thermo-electrical (Peltier) circulation thermo- stats for external temperature control. The thermostat is intended for laboratory applica- tions such as temperature control of refractometers, polarimeters, electrophoresis cham- bers, or small bioreactors. • Small footprint • Energy efficient • No cooling agent required • Heating and cooling with the same component, high control accuracy of ±0.1 K • RS-232 interface integrated as a standard • Requires little maintenance • Low weight • Little vibration, quiet operation • 3-button control with bright, high-contrast OLED display • One voltage variant for world-wide use: 100 – 230 V; 50/60 Hz Technical data: Temperature range: Temperature accuracy: ± 0.1 K 4 – 80°C co d e b e w WWY3J011 co d e b e w WW18A011 1 2 3 Type Cooler capacity at 20°C kW 3 L 100 0.1 4 L 250 0.25 Heating capacity kW > 0.1 > 0.25 Order No. W × D × H mm 175×300×265 10 23 39100 260×370×315 10 23 39250 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 617

619

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Heating and Cooling Thermostats Alpha, LAUDA LAUDA Alpha is the cost-effective choice in the area of high-quality LAUDA thermostats in the temperature range from -25 up to 100 °C. The thermostats are suitable for operation with non-flammable liquids (water, water/glycol) and for both internal and external ther- mostating tasks. • 3-keys operation with large and brilliant LED display. Resolution of indication of 0.1°C • Pressure pump with 0.2 bar pressure and 15 l/min pump flow • Pump reduction for reducing the flow rate from 15 to 5 l/min as standard • Temperature range from 25 to 100°C and temperature stabilitiy of ± 0,05 K • Integrated timer function for automatic shut-down of the device • 1-point calibration can be performed by the user • Safety functions such as alarms, warnings and malfunctions are indicated on the LED display co d e b e w 1 Immersion Thermostat Type Temp. range °C 25 – 100 A Heating cap. kW 1.5 Pump pressure bar 0.2 Flow rate l/min 15 Order No. 10 23 30226 WW18A007 Heating thermostats Ty- pe Temp. range °C 1 A 6 25 – 100 A 12 25 – 100 A 24 25 – 100 Heating cap. kW 1.5 1.5 1.5 Bath vol. l 2.5 – 5.5 8 – 12 18 – 25 Bath opening W × D mm 145×161 235×161 295×374 Bath depth mm 150 200 200 Order No. 10 23 30733 10 23 30734 10 23 30735 Accessories for immersion and heating thermostats Article Pump circulation set Cooling coil Accessoires for heating thermostats Article Bath cover set A 6 Bath cover set A 12 Bath cover set A 24 Cooling thermostats Order No. 10 23 32005 10 23 32004 Order No. 10 23 33006 10 23 33007 10 23 33008 Type Heating Temp. cap. range °C kW 2 RA 8 -25 – 100 1.5 RA 12 -25 – 100 1.5 RA 24 -25 – 100 1.5 Bath vol. l Bath ope- Cooler ning W×D power mm kW 0,225 5 – 7.5 165×190 0,325 9.9 – 14.5 300×190 0,425 14 – 22 350×290 Bath depth mm 160 160 160 Order No. 10 23 31907 10 23 31908 10 23 31909 Heating and Cooling Thermostats ECO, LAUDA The LAUDA ECO thermostats are available with two different control heads. The control head Gold offers a colour TFT display, the control head Silver has a monochrome LCD display. A menu navigation in plain text allows easy operation of the devices. Both control heads are equipped with a mini-USB interface as standard. Further interfaces are availa- ble as modules. • Operation via cursor and softkeys • Simultaneous display of set and actual temperature, navigation in plain text • Overtemperature setting via display • Safety class III, FL for flammable liquids • 1-point calibration by the user • Vario pump with six levels, flow rate switch for internal or external circulation • Mini-USB interface as standard Continued on next page 2 co d e b e w WW18A008 3 618 4

620

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths LAUDA ECO immersion thermostats Type 3 Silver 4 Gold Temp. range °C 20 – 200 20 – 200 Temp. accur. ± K 0.01 0.01 Heating cap. kW 2.0 2.6 Flow rate l/min 22 22 Pump pressure bar 0.55 0.55 Order No. 10 23 30277 10 23 30228 Accessories for immersion and heating thermostats Silver and Gold Cooling coil sets For cooling of heating baths Article Cooling coil set small suitable for ECO Silver, ECO Gold, baths up to 6 litres Cooling coil set for ET 15 suitable for ET 15 S, ET 15 G Order No. 10 23 30720 10 23 30719 LAUDA ECO heating thermostats with transparent bath Types ET XX S are equipped with control head Silver, types ET XX G are equipped with control head Gold. All devices except the ET 15 S and ET 15 G are equipped with a cool- ing coil as standard. ET 15 S and ET 15 G are equipped with pump connections* as standard. Temp. accur. ± K Type Temp. range °C ET 6 S 20 – 100 0.01 5 ET 12 S 20 – 100 0.01 ET 15 S 20 – 100 0.01 ET 20 S 20 – 100 0.01 ET 6 G 20 – 100 0.01 ET 12 G 20 – 100 0.01 ET 15 G 20 – 100 0.01 ET 20 G 20 – 100 0.01 Heating cap. kW 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 Bath vol. l 6 12 15 20 6 12 15 20 Bath ope- ning W × D mm 130×285 300×175 275×130 300×350 130×285 300×175 275×130 300×350 Bath depth mm 160 160 310 160 160 160 310 160 Order No. 10 23 30096 10 23 30286 10 23 30288 10 23 30290 10 23 30097 10 23 30287 10 23 30289 10 23 30291 * Silver: 13 mm plastic nipples, Gold: M16×1 thread LAUDA ECO heating thermostats with stainless steel bath Types E XX S are equipped with control head Silver, types E XX G are equipped with control head Gold. All heating thermostats are equipped with a cooling coil as standard. E 4 S and E 4 G ar equipped with a bath cover and pump connections* additionally. 5 6 Type E 4 S E 10 S 6 E 20 S E 25 S E 40 S 7 E 4 G E 10 G E 20 G E 25 G E 40 G Temp. accur. ± K Temp. range °C 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 20 – 200 0.01 Heating cap. kW 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 Bath vol. l 3.5 11 19 25 40 3.5 11 19 25 40 Bath ope- ning W × D mm 135×105 300×190 300×365 300×365 300×613 135×105 300×190 300×365 300×365 300×613 Bath depth mm 150 150 150 200 200 150 150 150 200 200 Order No. 10 23 30736 10 23 30738 10 23 30742 10 23 30744 10 23 30746 10 23 30737 10 23 30739 10 23 30743 10 23 30745 10 23 30747 * Silver: 13 mm plastic nipples, Gold: M16×1 thread Accessories for immersion and heating thermostats Silver and Gold Pump connection sets for thermostating of external applications Article Pump connection set with 13 mm plastic nipples and closing plugs Pump connection set with 16×1 stainless steel connections, screw caps and 13 mm Order No. 10 23 30716 10 23 30717 nipples Bath cover made of stainless steel, one piece with handle 10 23 30133 suitable for E 10, E 15 Bath cover made of stainless steel, one piece with handle 10 23 30134 suitable for E 20, E 25 Bath cover made of stainless steel, three pieces with handle 10 23 30718 suitable for E 40 co d e Continued on next page b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 7 619

621

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths LAUDA ECO cooling thermostats – air cooled 1 co d e b e w WWSB5047 3 co d e b e w WW4HV014 Type Temp. range °C Temp. accur. ± K 1 RE 415 S -15 – 200 0.02 RE 420 S -20 – 200 0.02 RE 630 S -30 – 200 0.02 RE 1050 S -50 – 200 0.02 RE 1225 S -25 – 200 0.02 RE 2025 S -25 – 200 0.02 RE 415 G -15 – 200 0.02 RE 420 G -20 – 200 0.02 RE 630 G -30 – 200 0.02 RE 1050 G -50 – 200 0.02 RE 1225 G -25 – 200 0.02 RE 2025 G -25 – 200 0.02 Heating cap. kW 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 Cooler cap. at 20°C kW 0.18 0.2 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.3 0.18 0.2 0.3 0.7 0.3 0.3 Bath ope- Bath ning W × D vol. mm l 130×105 4 4 130×105 5.7 150×130 200×200 10 200×200 12 300×350 20 4 130×105 4 130×105 5.7 150×130 200×200 10 200×200 12 20 300×350 Bath depth mm 160 160 160 160 200 160 160 160 160 160 200 160 Order No. 10 23 31910 10 23 31940 10 23 31944 10 23 31946 10 23 31948 10 23 31950 10 23 31911 10 23 31941 10 23 31945 10 23 31947 10 23 31949 10 23 31951 Circulation Baths, Phoenix Instrument The new refrigerated/heating circulating baths are suitable for temperature controlling of samples in a wide range of temperatures. All the models are designed for external and internal applications, usable for tests in lab- oratories and industries. Each instrument is standard equipped with a PT100 probe for temperature control in an external circuit. The controller automatically recognizes the pres- ence of the probe and determines the type of work inside or outside the tank. They are equipped with a backlit display for simultaneously displaying of the set temperature, and all other operating parameters. Technical data: Temperature range: Temp. resolution/ setting: Temp. stability at 20°C: Timer: CB5-10 -10 – 100°C CB5-20 -20 – 100°C CB-5-30 -30 – 100°C 0.1°C ±0.3°C 99:59/cont. operation 20°C: 0.37 KW 10°C: 0.33 KW 0°C: 0.30 KW -10°C: 0.22 KW 0.1°C ±0.2°C 99:59/cont. operation 20°C: 0.41 KW 10°C: 0.37 KW 0°C: 0.33 KW -10°C: 0.28 KW -20°C: 0.16 KW 0.1°C ±0.2°C 99:59/cont. operation 20°C: 0.44KW 10°C: 0.40KW 0°C: 0.37KW -10°C: 0.32KW -20°C: 0.20KW -30°C: 0.15KW 0.35 bar 6.5 l/min 5 litres 2 Cooling capacity: Pump pressure: Pump flow rate: Bath volume: Bath opening depth: Dimensions (W×H×D): Voltage/power: Weight: Article 2 Circulation bath CB5-10 3 Circulation bath CB5-20 Circulation bath CB5-30 0.35 bar 6.5 l/min 5 litres 0.35 bar 3.2 l/min 5 litres 150×160×150 mm 150×160×150 mm 150×160×150 mm 290×570×710 mm 380×670×840 mm 380×670×840 mm 220 V / 50 Hz 34 kg 220 V / 50 Hz 54 kg 220 V / 50 Hz 54 kg Order No. 10 13 75101 10 13 75202 10 13 75302 Accel 250/500 Laboratory Chiller, Thermo Scientific Accel laboratory chillers are used primarily for heating and cooling external applications. The small internal volume and the integrated cooling circuit allow for very fast dissipation of heat and heating rate; for working temperatures between +80°C and -10°C. Different configurations are available with 2 different cooling powers, 2 pumps, or USB connection. Functions: • Innovative control algorithm for faster and more reliable temperature control • Large LCD display and intuitive menu control in 3 languages • Up to five programmable set temperatures with RTA (Real Temperature Adjustment) for • Powerful pumps with two-level pump speed adjustment for turbulence reduction (pow- erful suction pump available as an option) • Optional USB interface • Timer with real-time clock for critical applications • New energy-saving concept for minimizing the cooling power in dependence on the • Low noise (58 dBA) • State-of-the-art cooling concept for full cooling power even when the unit is set up in a calibration application corner 620 Continued on next page

622

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths • Combined level indication, filling and draining function at the front • Safety class 1 (NFL) • Complies with CE and RoHS • 2 years warranty Technical data: Heating capacity at 20°C: Cooling capacity at 20°C: Temperature range: Temperature stability: Pump power Max. flow rate: Max. pressure: Pump power suction pump Max. flow rate: Max. pressure: Reservoir: Net weight: Dimensions (H×W×D): Voltage: 2 kW 250 W (Accel 250) / 500 W (Accel 500) -10 to +80°C ±0,1°C 15 l/min 300 mbar 21 l/min 805 mbar 2,8 liters 30 kg 620 × 232 × 487 mm 230 V / 50 Hz Article Accel 250 with force pump + USB Accel 250 with force/suction pump + USB Accel 500 with force pump + USB Accel 500 with force/suction pump + USB Order No. 10 53 33112 10 53 33212 10 53 33122 10 53 33222 ARCTIC Series Refrigerated Bath Circulators, Thermo Scientific Refrigerated circulators are used for controlling the temperature (heating and cooling) of internal or external applications. The built-in compressor circuits enable fast heat remov- al. Working temperatures from -40°C to 200°C are thus possible. Different configurations are available offering various cooling capacities, temperature ranges, and bath volumes. They can be combined with Standard (SC) and Advanced (AC) circulator heads in 2 per- formance levels. Functions • Economy function for low power consumption and economical operation • Low noise • Baths made of robust stainless steel • Circulator heads on the baths can be turned to all sides for greater user comfort • External circulation kit for M16*1 connections, and 8 and 12 mm hose connections • State-of-the-art cooling concept for full cooling power even when the unit is set up in a corner • Drain tap on the front • Integrated carrying grips • Bath lid included in the delivery (except in models A10B and A25B) • Safety class 3 (FL), (SC100 systems = 1 (NFL)) • Complies with CE and RoHS • 3 years warranty thermostat thermostat °C SC100 mm °C SC150 mm °C SC150L mm °C AC150 mm °C AC200 mm Type Temperature range Dimensions (H×W×L) Temperature range Dimensions (H×W×L) Temperature range Dimensions (H×W×L) Temperature range Dimensions (H×W×L) Temperature range Dimensions (H×W×L) Cooling capacity at 20°C °C Bath capacity l mm Work area (D×W×L) Net weight kg thermostat thermostat thermostat A10B -10 to 100 471×429×913 -10 to 100 471×429×913 – – -10 to 150 509×429×913 -10 to 200 509×429×913 250W 17 – 30 201×297×365 44.5 Refrigerated circulator bath A10B Order No. 10 53 32410 10 53 33410 Refrigerated circulator bath A25B Order No. 10 53 32425 10 53 33425 Type SC1001) SC1501) SC150L1) AC1501) AC2001) A10 -10 to 100 632×220×414 -10 to 150 632×220×414 – – -10 to 150 670×220×414 -10 to 200 670×220×414 240W 4 – 6 150×137×124 27.5 A25B -25 to 100 740×324×541 -25 to 150 740×324×541 – – -25 to 150 778×324×541 -25 to 200 778×324×541 500W 13 – 21 233×224×244 42.3 Refrigerated circulator bath A10 Order No. 10 53 32510 10 53 33510 co d e b e w WW4HV006 A25 -25 to 100 711×273×483 -25 to 150 711×273×483 -25 to 150 711×273×483 -25 to 150 749×273×483 -25 to 200 749×273×483 500W 7 – 12 204×173×184 36.1 A40 – – -28 to 150 749×385×519 -28 to 150 749×385×519 -30 to 150 787×385×519 -40 to 200 787×385×519 900W 7 – 12 204×173×184 55.2 10 53 35410 10 53 36410 10 53 35425 10 53 36425 10 53 35510 10 53 36510 1) Voltage 230V/50Hz co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Continued on next page Refrigerated circulator bath A25 Order No. 10 53 32525 10 53 33525 10 53 34525 10 53 35525 10 53 36525 Refrigerated circulator bath A40 Order No. 10 53 33540 10 53 34540 10 53 35540 10 53 36540 621

623

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Circulator Baths Accessories Article Universal stainless steel rack 283×145 mm for bath types A10B, S49. Two inserts with different sizes of holes can be varied in height within the rack Order No. 10 53 31602 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 86 test tubes of 10 mm Ø 10 53 31603 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 46 test tubes of 16 mm Ø 10 53 31604 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack for 23 test tubes of 25 mm Ø 10 53 31605 2× rack inserts 283×145 mm rack without holes 10 53 31606 Customer may provide special size holes Universal stainless steel rack 160×145 mm 10 53 31679 for bath types A25B, A40, S21. Two inserts with different sizes of holes can be varied in height within the rack 2× rack inserts 160×145 mm rack for 86 test tubes of 10 mm Ø 10 53 31680 2× rack inserts 160×145 mm rack for 46 test tubes of 16 mm Ø 10 53 31681 2× rack inserts 160×145 mm rack for 23 test tubes of 25 mm Ø 10 53 31682 2× rack inserts 160×145 mm rack without holes 10 53 31683 Customer may provide special size holes Lifting Platform, stainless steel for S21, S45, A10B 10 53 31611 A10B stainless steel bath lid 10 53 31642 Autorefill (100-230V/50-60Hz) box 10 53 31630 without level sensor or bath lid; for operation with multifunction port of AC200 heads Solenoid valve (100-230V/50-60Hz) box for e.g. control of tap water cooling coil; for operation with multi- function port of AC200 heads Other accessories (bath fluid, test tube rack, hoses, connectors) are available. 10 53 31610 2 1 Cooling Thermostats and Condensers Unichiller® (bench-top), Huber Powerful, budget-friendly Unichiller with OLÉ control for standard applications. Complete- ly re-designed, the Unichillers with OLÉ controller offer a refrigeration capacity of up to 2.5 kW at particularly budget-friendly costs. Thus, the Unichillers are perfect for many standard refrigeration jobs in laboratory and industry. In many applications, the efficient working processes of the chiller reduce water consumption, protecting the environment and reducing the operating costs. All models are equipped with the new OLÉ controller with state-of-the-art OLED display and RS232 and USB connections, as well as optionally with a Pt100 sensor. • Refrigeration capacity max. 2.5 kW • Air- and water-cooled models • Powerful circulation pumps with 40 l/min; 3.5 bar (optional: up to 80 l/min; 5.5 bar) • Compact, robust stainless steel casing • With castors for easy handling • Optionally with heating to +100°C • Optionally with Pilot ONE controller Type Temp. Pump pressure range max. °C l/min / bar Minichiller 280 OLÉ -5 – 40 14 / 0.25 Minichiller 300 OLÉ -20 – 40 (80)1) 14 / 0.25 Minichiller 300w OLÉ -20 – 40 (80)1) 14 / 0.25 Minichiller 600 OLÉ 24 / 0.7 -20 – 40 Minichiller 600w OLÉ -20 – 40 24 / 0,7 Minichiller 900w OLÉ -25 – 40 24 / 0.9 1 Unichiller 007 OLÉ2) 29 / 1.0 -20 – 40 Unichiller 007w OLÉ2) 29 / 1,0 -20 – 40 Unichiller 010 OLÉ2) 29 / 1.0 -20 – 40 Unichiller 010w OLÉ2) 29 / 1,0 -20 – 40 2 Unichiller 012 OLÉ2) -20 – 40 29 / 1.0 Unichiller 012w OLÉ2) 29 / 1.0 -20 – 40 Unichiller 015 OLÉ2) 29 / 1.0 -20 – 40 Unichiller 015w OLÉ2) 29 / 1.0 -20 – 40 Unichiller 022 OLÉ2) 29 / 1.0 -10 – 40 Unichiller 022w OLÉ2) -10 – 40 29 / 1.0 Unichiller 025 OLÉ2) 29 / 1.0 -10 – 40 Unichiller 025w OLÉ2) 29 / 1.0 -10 – 40 Unichiller P007 OLÉ 25 / 2.5 -20 – 40 Unichiller P010 OLÉ 25 / 2.5 -20 – 40 Unichiller P012 OLÉ -20 – 40 25 / 2.5 Unichiller P012w OLÉ -20 – 40 25 / 2.5 Cooler capacity at 15/0/-10°C kW 0.28/0.20/– 0.30/0.20/0.14 0.30/0.20/0.14 0.60/0.50/0.35 0.60/0.50/0.35 0.90/0.70/0.40 0.70/0.55/0.40 0.70/0.55/0.40 1.00/0.80/0.50 1.00/0.80/0.50 1.20/1.00/0.70 1.20/1.00/0.70 1.50/1.00/0.70 1.50/1.00/0.70 2.20/1.60/1.00 2.20/1.60/1.00 2.50/2.00/1.20 2.50/2.00/1.20 0.70/0.55/0.40 1.00/0.80/0.50 1.20/1.00/0.70 1.20/1.00/0.70 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 225 × 360 × 380 225 × 360 × 380 225 × 360 × 380 280 × 490 × 424 280 × 490 × 424 280 × 490 × 424 350 × 496 × 622 350 × 496 × 622 350 × 496 × 622 350 × 496 × 622 420 × 487 × 579 350 × 496 × 622 420 × 487 × 579 350 × 496 × 622 460 × 590 × 743 420 × 487 × 579 460 × 590 × 743 420 × 487 × 579 350 × 496 × 622 350 × 496 × 622 420 × 487 × 579 350 × 496 × 622 Order No. 10 59 60598 10 59 68998 10 59 69098 10 59 69898 10 59 62297 10 59 62198 10 59 61416 10 59 64298 10 59 61417 10 59 62998 10 59 61418 10 59 61425 10 59 61419 10 59 61420 10 59 61421 10 59 61422 10 59 61423 10 59 61424 10 59 66198 10 59 67111 10 59 67300 10 59 67301 Continued on next page 622

624

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Cooling Thermostats and Condensers Type Temp. range °C Unichiller P015 OLÉ -20 – 40 Unichiller P015w OLÉ -20 – 40 Unichiller P022 OLÉ -10 – 40 Unichiller P022w OLÉ -10 – 40 Unichiller P025 OLÉ -10 – 40 Unichiller P025w OLÉ -10 – 40 Pump pressure max. l/min / bar 25 / 2.5 25 / 2.5 25 / 2.5 25 / 2.5 25 / 2.5 25 / 2.5 Cooler capacity at 15/0/-10°C kW 1.50/1.00/0.70 1.50/1.00/0.70 2.20/1.60/1.00 2.20/1.60/1.00 2.50/2.00/1.20 2.50/2.00/1.20v Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 420 × 487 × 579 350 × 496 × 622 460 × 590 × 743 420 × 487 × 579 460 × 590 × 743 420 × 487 × 579 Order No. 10 59 62501 10 59 67501 10 59 66801 10 59 62701 10 59 67001 10 59 62911 1) permissible return temperature +80°C 2) options available on request: heating, natural refrigerants, EO models (for externally open applications) 3) with castors (in the rear) Unichiller® (free standing unit), Huber All free-standing units are equipped with the comfortable touch screen control Pilot ONE. A valve controlled by a stepper motor automatically adjusts the cooling capacity to the current requirement. The intelligent, environmentally friendly energy management reduces the waste heat and thus the operating costs for electricity and cooling water for the wa- ter-cooled models. Smooth-running, speed-controlled liquefier fans minimize the noise of the air-cooled models. The chillers are particularly robust and can handle ambient tem- peratures of up to 40°C. Process thermostats with heater The optionally available heater turns the Unichiller® into a powerful process thermostat in the medium temperature range of -10/-20°C to 100°C at a temperature constant of ±0.1 K. 2 1 Models with air-cooled refrigeration unit Type Unichiller 017T Unichiller 020T Unichiller 025T Unichiller 040T Unichiller 045T Unichiller 055T Unichiller 060T Unichiller 070T Temp. range °C -10 – 40 -20 – 40 -10 – 40 -10 – 40 -20 – 40 -10 – 40 -20 – 40 -10 – 40 Pump pressure max. l/min / bar 25 / 3.0 25 / 3.0 25 / 3.0 26 / 3.0 26 / 3.0 100 / 5.6 80 / 5.6 84 / 5.6 Cooler cap. at 15/0/-10/-20°C kW 1.7/0.9/0.4/– 2.0/2.0/1.5/0.8 2.5/1.2/0.6/– 4.0/2.5/1.1/– 4.5/4.0/2.7/1.4 5.5/2.3/0.8/– 6.0/5.0/2.8/1.4 7.0/4.0/2.3/– Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 450 × 510 × 1231 450 × 510 × 1230 450 × 510 × 1230 500 × 552 × 1451 500 × 552 × 1451 600 × 692 × 1613 600 × 692 × 1613 600 × 790 × 1614 Order No. 10 59 65017 10 59 65020 10 59 65025 10 59 65040 10 59 65045 10 59 65055 10 59 65060 10 59 65065 Optional: Heating 2 kW up to 100°C (against surcharge); natural refrigerants, winter option, outdoor installation available on request EO models (for externally open applications) available on request Models with water-cooled refrigeration unit Type Unichiller 017Tw Unichiller 020Tw 1 Unichiller 025Tw Unichiller 030Tw Unichiller 040Tw Unichiller 055Tw Unichiller 060Tw 2 Unichiller 070Tw Temp. range °C -10 – 40 -20 – 40 -10 – 40 -20 – 40 -10 – 40 -10 – 40 -20 – 40 -10 – 40 Pump pressure max. l/min / bar 25 / 3.0 25 / 3.0 25 / 3.0 26 / 3.0 26 / 3.0 57 / 5.6 80 / 5.6 84 / 5.6 Cooler cap. at 15/0/-10/-20°C kW 1.7/0.9/0.4/– 2.0/2.0/1.5/0.8 2.5/1.2/0.6/– 3.0/3.0/2.0/1.0 4.0/2.5/1.5/– 5.5/4.0/2.0/– 6.0/6.0/3.8/2.1 7.0/4.2/2.5/– Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 400 × 440 × 1100 400 × 440 × 1100 400 × 440 × 1100 400 × 440 × 1100 400 × 440 × 1100 500 × 552 × 1261 500 × 552 × 1261 500 × 552 × 1261 Order No. 10 59 66017 10 59 66020 10 59 66025 10 59 66030 10 59 66040 10 59 66055 10 59 66060 10 59 69101 Optional: Heating 2 kW up to 100°C (against surcharge); natural refrigerants, winter option, outdoor installation available on request EO models (for externally open applications) available on request Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 623

625

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Cooling Thermostats and Condensers Chiller with Low Profile Housing, Huber Type Tempera- ture range °C 1 Unichiller 050 -20 – 40 Unichiller 050w -20 – 40 Unichiller 075 -20 – 40 Unichiller 075w -20 – 40 Cooler capacity at 15/0/-10/-20°C kW -/4.2/3.0/1.8 -/4.2/3.0/1.8 -/6.1/4.0/2.4 -/6.1/4.0/2.4 Dimensions (W×H×D) Order No. mm 740 × 1160 × 1050 10 59 60011 740 × 1160 × 1050 10 59 60012 740 × 1160 × 1050 10 59 60013 740 × 1160 × 1050 10 59 60014 Available on request as an option: heating, pressure-reinforced pump Recirculating Coolers/Chillers, JULABO FL series The FL series offers a new generation of chillers for routine cooling applications within the laboratory and industry. The working temperature range covers -20°C to +40°C, the tem- perature stability of the PID control is ±0.5°C. All units can easily be cleaned and are provided with a splash water proof keypad with LED temperature indication. On the front of the units there is an RS232 interface as well as an alarm shutdown. The filling port is easily accessible placed on the top under a lift-up cover. Another hinged tray serves as a file for the operating manual or other documents concerning the installation. The removible venting grid allows an easy cleaning of the condenser, the drain tap is easily acceable behind the grid. All models include an easily visible level indication. Another advantage is the venting slots are on the front and rear and therefore the units can be placed directly one beside the other (space saving). • Working temperature range from -20°C to +40°C • Permissible temperature in return line +80°C • Cooling capacities from 0.3 to 11 kW • Powerful immersion pumps to 60 l/min, 6 bar • Filling level and pressure indicator • RS232 interface for PC connection 2 FL300 Type Width × Depth × Height cm 25×50×60 Working temperature °C -20 to +40 Temperature accuracy ± °C 0.5 Cooler capacity at 20 / 0 / -10 / -20°C kW 0.3/0.2/0.15/0.1 3 FL601 32×50×60 -20 to +40 0.5 0.6/0.4/0.33/0.2 FL1201 50×76×64 -20 to +40 0.5 1.2/0.9/0.6/0.3 Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Volume Order No. l/min 15 bar 0.35 l 3.0 – 4.5 10 35 90300 40 1.0 5.5 – 8.0 10 35 90601 40 1.0 12.0 – 17.0 10 35 91201 Type Width × Depth × Height cm 50×76×64 Working temperature °C -20 to +40 Temperature accuracy ± °C 0.5 Cooler capacity at 20 / 0 / -10 / -20°C FL1203 kW 1.2/0.8/0.5/0.2 FL1703 50×76×64 -20 to +40 0.5 1.7/1.0/0.75/0.3 4 FL2503 60×76×115 -20 to +40 0.5 2.5/1.5/1.2/0.55 Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Volume Order No. l/min 40 bar 0.5 – 3.0 l 12.0 – 17.0 10 35 91203 40 0.5 – 3.0 12.0 – 17.0 10 35 91703 40 0.5 – 3.0 19.0 – 27.0 10 35 92503 Continued on next page 1 co d e b e w WW2KN010 2 3 624

626

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers Cooling Thermostats and Condensers FL4006 Type Width × Depth × Height cm 60×76×115 Working temperature °C -20 to +40 Temperature accuracy ± °C 0.5 Cooler capacity at 20 / 0 / -10 / -20°C kW 4.0/1.9/0.9/0.05 FL7006 78×85×148 -20 to +40 0.5 7.0/5.5/3.0/1.7 FL11006 78×85×148 -20 to +40 0.5 11.0/7.5/5.0/3.0 Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Volume Order No. l/min 60 bar 0.5 – 6.0 l 19.0 – 27.0 10 35 94006 60 0.5 – 6.0 25.0 – 35.0 10 35 97006 60 0.5 – 6.0 25.0 – 35.0 10 35 91106 F series Recirculating cooler for basic cooling tasks Inexpensive, compact recirculating coolers – the alternative to costly tap water! The compact recirculating coolers of the F series are low-cost models for routine labora- tory applications. The units cool in a temperature range of -10 or 0°C up to +40°C, achiev- ing a temperature stability of ±0.5°C. Having a small footprint and no lateral ventilation slots, they also fit in small laboratory spaces. Thanks to their high efficiency, the F series coolers are an economical and environmentally friendly alternative to cooling with tap water. The low procurement costs of the units will pay off within a very short time. Your benefits: • Environmentally friendly operation with low energy consumption • No lateral ventilation slots, units can be set up side by side • All parts coming into contact with the refrigerant made of stainless steel or high-grade synthetic • Large, powerful LED temperature indication • Compact design, small footprint • Splash-proof membrane keypad • Outlet valve for straightforward draining • Easy to fill • Level indicator 5 6 F500 37.5×44×59 0 – +40 ±0.5 7 F1000 37.5×49×64 0 – +40 ±0.5 0.25/0.22/0.21/0.18/0.09 0.5/0.4/0.3/0.25/— 1/0.7/0.65/0.35/— 4 5 6 Type W × D × H cm 24×40×52 Working temperature °C -10 – +40 Temp. accuracy ± Cooler capacity at °C ±0.5 F250 kW 20/10/5/0/-5°C Pump capacity Flow rate Pressure Volume Order No. l/min 15 bar 0.35 l 1.7 – 2.6 10 35 90250 24 0.5 5 – 7.5 10 35 90500 23 1.0 7 – 9.5 10 35 91000 7 co d e b e w WWKVG011 Chiller C 900, KNF Neuberger • Application: rotary evaporation, distillation • Working temperature range -10 to +40 °C and cooling capacity of 250 W • Compact design and the small footprint • Splash-water proofed membrane keyboard • Easy filling of the unit Technical data: Cooling performance: Filling volume: Refrigerant: Temperature control: Weight: Dimensions W×H×D: Working temperature range: Temperature stability: 250 W 1.7 to 2.6 l R134a PID temperature control 27 kg 235 × 520 × 400 mm -10 to +40°C ± 0,5 Article Chiller C 900 co d e b e w Order No. 10 62 71230 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 625

627

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Temperature Controllers / Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units co d e b e w WW18A006 1 co d e b e w WWXKS059 2 626 Cooling Thermostats and Condensers Circulation Chillers Microcool, LAUDA The Microcool product line offers affordable circulation chillers which function reliably in the operating temperature range of -10 to +40°C. RS-232 interface and alarm contact are standard features. LAUDA Microcool circulation chillers are used wherever reliable and fast operating heat needs to be dissipated during chemical production processes or in technical systems. • Operating element with large LED display and membrane keyboard • Auto-Start-Timer and Auto-Shut-Down-function for timer-based activation and deacti- vation of the circulation chillers • Illuminated window for checking heat transfer liquids condition • Small footprint, compact design • Block pump with magnetic coupling prevents sealing problems • Filling supports on the device at the top of the front for simple and safe filling • RS-232 interface and alarm contact standard • Front grid can be easily removed for easy cleaning of the condenser Technical Data: Working temp. range: Temperature accuracy: -10 to 40°C ±0.5 K Type Cooler capacity at 20°C kW 1 MC 250 0.25 MC 350 0.35 MC 600 0.60 MC 1200 1.20 Pump pres- sure bar 0.35 0.35 1.3 1.3 Flow rate l/min 16 16 35 35 Bath volume l 4 5 8 14 Order No. 10 23 31118 10 23 31119 10 23 31120 10 23 31121 Types marked “W” are water-cooled. Cooling water connection is required. Refrigerators, Upright Freezers Mini Fridge, Behr The mini fridge allows for manual temperature control and is thus perfectly suited for storing the bacterial test kits. A stainless steel rack additionally ensures that the dip slides stand safely. See page 997 for dip slides. Technical data: Temperature range: Inner dimensions: Power consumption: 56 W Capacity: +4°C to +20°C 24 × 23 × 34 cm 19 l Article Mini fridge, electronically adjustable Order No. 10 48 93152 Laboratory Refrigerators and Freezers, Kirsch KIRSCH – reliable cooling for the health care industry and for laboratories. A manufactur- er of premium-quality products since 1865, KIRSCH knows exactly what counts in respect of cooling your sensitive substances. Your benefit: Units that you can fully rely on. General features: Robust, scratch-resistant housing made by ourselves: “Quality made in Germany”. The interior is made of impact-resistant synthetic with moulded supports (undercounter mod- els) or smooth aluminium with a protective coating with height-adjustable support rails (for all stand-alone models of 280 l cooling volume and up). The insulation consists of premi- um-quality environmentally friendly material. The units have lockable doors with hinges that can be changed. The temperature regulation controlled by microprocessor allows for accurate temperature control with safety functions in case of fault. The control is protect- ed with a key switch against manipulation and equipped with a digital display and a minimum/maximum temperature memory. Furthermore, the KIRSCH cooling units have a USB connection for manual data acquisition with the free KIRSCH-DATANET software (only with PRO-ACTIVE) and a floating contact for forwarding alarms. The KIRSCH forced- air cooling provides for even temperature distribution and thus for a uniform storage tem- perature in the entire refrigeration space. Forced-air cooling is optimized for every model and consists of an individually adjusted combination of blower and ventilation plate. Continued on next page

628

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units Refrigerators, Upright Freezers LABEX® – for your safety Laboratory refrigerators and freezers with explosion-proof interior (LABEX® and FROST- ER-LABEX® models) meet the most challenging quality standards and safety require- ments. The design safety has been tested by TÜV SÜD to Directive 2014/34/EU. A test report describes the KIRSCH LABEX® safety concept and makes the LABEX® refrigera- tors and freezers the safest explosion-proof frosters on the market. In the LABEX® models of the PRO-ACTIVE series, safety barriers provide additional safety for the temperature sensors. The interior is made of conductive materials, the integrated circulating-air fans are explosion protected (except for ESSENTIAL FROSTER LABEX 71, FROSTER LABEX 96 PRO-ACTIVE, LABEX 105 PRO-ACTIVE) 3 product lines: 1 ULTIMATE • Touch display, elegant glass design • Convenient operation via capacitive touch display • Remote operation possible • Digital data documentation with KIRSCH Datanet • Access monitoring with log • Operation via touch while wearing laboratory software gloves • Plain-text fault alarms and troubleshooting • Graphic display of the temperature curve and Min/ Max temperature • Fast commissioning • Comprises the benefits of the PRO-ACTIVE line PRO-ACTIVE • Up to 60% reduction of power consumption (de- • Faster reaction to pending faults thanks to pro-ac- pending on model) tive fault alarms • Data records can be read out via USB interface by means of USB thumb drive and software • Minimum temperature deviation in the cooling ESSENTIAL • Entry-level KIRSCH quality • Highest quality and reliability • Robust design • Temperature stability • Flexibility • Maximum safety chamber safety • Matching components ensure premium storage • Comprises the benefits of the ESSENTIAL line Laboratory refrigerators with ignition source-free interior (without recirculating air cooling) Type LABEX® 105 PRO-ACTIVE1) ESSENTIAL LABEX® 1251) Vol. Temp. approx. °C Outer W×D×H cm l 95 +2 – +15 54×54×82 1/2 120 +2 – +12 54×54×81 1/2 Qty drawers/ shelves P in- put W 86 115 Order No. 41 34 04105 10 34 04125 Laboratory refrigerators with explosion-proof interior (with recirculating air cooling) Type Vol. Temp. approx. °C Outer W × D × H cm Qty drawers/ shelves l LABEX® 288 PRO-ACTIVE2) 280 +2 – +15 67×70×124 1/3 LABEX® 288 ULTIMATE2 280 +2 – +15 67×765×131 1/3 LABEX® 340 PRO-ACTIVE2) 330 +2 – +15 67×63×181 2/4 LABEX® 340 ULTIMATE2 330 +2 – +15 67×69×188 2/4 LABEX® 468 PRO-ACTIVE2) 460 +2 – +15 74×75×181 –/6 LABEX® 468 ULTIMATE2) 460 +2 – +15 74×80×188 –/6 P in- put W 100 100 128 128 150 170 Order No. 10 34 04288 10 34 00288 10 34 04340 10 34 00340 10 34 04468 10 34 00468 Laboratory refrigerators without explosion-proof interior (without recirculating air cooling) Type ESSENTIAL LABO 851) ESSENTIAL LABO 1251) Vol. Temp. approx. °C Outer W × D × H cm Qty drawers/ shelves l 80 +2 – +12 47×51×74 1/2 120 +2 – +15 54×54×81 –/2 P in- put W 100 125 Order No. 10 34 00085 10 34 00125 Laboratory refrigerators without explosion-proof interior (with recirculating air cooling) Temp. approx. °C Type Vol. l 3 LABO 100 PRO-ACTIVE1) 95 +2 – +15 LABO 340 PRO-ACTIVE2) 330 +2 – +15 LABO 340 ULTIMATE2 330 +2 – +15 LABO 468 PRO-ACTIVE2) 460 +2 – +15 LABO 468 ULTIMATE2 460 +2 – +15 LABO 520 PRO-ACTIVE2) 500 0 – +15 LABO 520 ULTIMATE2 500 0 – +15 LABO 720 PRO-ACTIVE2) 700 0 – +15 LABO 720 ULTIMATE2 700 0 – +15 LABO 720 CHROMAT PRO-ACTIVE2) 700 +4 – +15 LABO 720 CHROMAT ULTIMATE2) 700 +4 – +15 Qty drawers/ shelves –/2 1/3 –/4 Outer W×D×H cm 54×54×82 67×63×181 67×69×188 74×75×181 74×80×188 77×76×193–196 –/5 77×76×196 77×98×193–196 –/5 77×98×196 77×98×193–196 –/5 77×98×196 Laboratory freezers with explosion-proof interior (without recirculating air cooling) 3 P input W 76 110 110 170 170 250 250 250 250 250 250 Order No. 41 34 00100 10 34 03340 10 34 00341 41 34 03468 10 34 00469 41 34 02520 10 34 00520 41 34 02720 10 34 00720 10 34 02721 10 34 00721 Type Vol. ESSENTIAL FROSTER LABEX® 711) FROSTER LABEX® 96 PRO-ACTIVE1) 1) build-in model, 2) stand-alone model 90 -5 – -25 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 627 Temp. approx. °C Outer W×D×H cm l 70 -15 – -22 47×51×74 1/3 Qty dra- wers/ shelves P in- put W 100 Order No. 10 34 06070 54×54×82 –/3 119 10 34 06095 ULTIMATE and ESSENTIAL models on request. Continued on next page

629

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units Refrigerators, Upright Freezers Laboratory freezers with explosion-proof interior (with recirculating air cooling) Contrary to the products by comparable competitors, all FROSTER-LABEX® models offer the unique combination of explosion-proof interior, forced-air cooling, automatic quick defrosting, and controlled pressure compensation. Type Vol. FROSTER LABEX® 330 PRO-ACTIVE2) FROSTER LABEX® 330 ULTIMATE2) 3 FROSTER LABEX® 530 PRO-ACTIVE2) FROSTER LABEX® 530 ULTIMATE2) FROSTER LABEX® 730 PRO-ACTIVE2) FROSTER LABEX® 730 ULTIMATE2) Temp. approx. °C Outer W × D × H cm l 300 -5 – -30 74×78×159 Qty drawers/ shelves –/4 P in- put W 540 300 -5 – -30 74×78×166 –/4 500 -5 – -30 77×76×193-196 –/5 500 -5 – -30 77×76×196 –/5 700 -5 – -30 77×98×193–196 –/5 700 -5 – -30 77×98×196 –/5 540 550 550 550 550 Order No. 10 34 06320 10t 34 00330 10 34 06520 10 34 00530 10 34 06720 10 34 00730 3 4 Type Laboratory freezers without explosion-proof interior (with recirculating air cooling) With an automatic rapid defrosting system. Outer W × D × H cm Temp. approx. °C Order No. Vol. Qty drawers/ shelves –/4 P in- put W 590 l 300 -5 – -30 74×78×159 FROSTER LABO 330 PRO-ACTIVE2) FROSTER LABO 330 ULTIMATE2) FROSTER LABO 530 PRO-ACTIVE2) FROSTER LABO 530 ULTIMATE2) FROSTER LABO 730 PRO-ACTIVE2) 300 -5 – -30 74×77×166 –/4 500 -5 – -30 77×76×193–196 –/5 500 -5 – -30 77×76×196 –/5 700 -5 – -30 77×98×193–196 –/5 10 34 05320 10 34 00331 41 34 05520 10 34 00531 41 34 05720 10 34 00731 590 605 605 605 605 FROSTER LABO 730 700 -5 – -30 77×97×196 –/5 ULTIMATE2) 1) build-in model, 2) stand-alone model ULTIMATE and ESSENTIAL models on request. 4 Temperature documentation and quality assurance with KIRSCH-DATANET software Complete, simple, reliable, time-saving PC-KIT-NET Allows for connection to a network, incl. KIRSCH-DATANET software for PRO-ACTIVE models (comes as a standard with ULTIMATE models). Monitoring, recording and evaluation of a multitude of technical parameters with PC-KIT- NET (door opening, alarms, temperature curves, technical operating statuses of cooling units, fans etc.) Article PC-KIT-NET (network-compatible version) Order No. 10 34 01675 Kirsch DATALOG For retrofitting automatic temperature documentation and monitoring in units without PRO-ACTIVE or ULTIMATE control incl. software KIRSCH-DATANET and temperature sensor which needs to be integrated into the cooling unit on site. Monitoring and recording of the temperature data and the set alarm limits. Article DATALOG-NET Order No. 10 34 01687 co d e b e w 628 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

630

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units Refrigerators, Upright Freezers Laboratory Refrigerators with Comfort Electronics, LIEBHERR All units have a self-closing door with integrated lock, integrated data memory with min./ max. temperatures, floating contact, RS485 interface, feedthrough for external tempera- ture sensor and a safety temperature limiter (in fridges, prevents temperatures below +2°C in case of failure), acoustic and optical temperature and door opening alarms. The pro- gram portfolio comprises 2 free-standing and 2 under-worktop laboratory fridges, each with insulation and glass door, temperature range adjustable from 3 to 16°C. The dynam- ic cooling system ensures high temperature constancy and an even temperature distribu- tion. The product range is complemented by the laboratory fridge and freezer combination LCv4010 which features 2 separately controllable cooling circuits. co d e b e w WWRVA001 Type Gross volume l LKUv 1610 142 LKUv 16131) 152 LKv 3910 361 LKv 39131) 386 LCv 4010 254 Tempera- ture range °C +3 – +16 +3 – +16 +3 – +16 +3 – +16 -9 – -30, +3 – +16 Outer dimensi- ons W × D × H mm 601×618×820 601×618×820 601×618×1840 601×618×1840 601×618×2000 Connec- tion W 190 190 280 280 280 Order No. 10 45 61610 10 45 61613 10 45 63910 10 45 63913 10 45 64010 1) with glass door and switchable LED lighting Laboratory Refrigerators and Freezers with Professional Elec- tronics, LIEBHERR Equipment: Dynamic cooling, electronic system with plain text display and real-time clock, rollers (two with holding brake), hot-gas defrosting for short defrosting cycles, plas- tic-coated racks and smooth CNS interior tanks, integrated data memory (alarm events and temperature curve), mains-independent current supply to feed the electronics in case of mains failure, infrared interface to external documentation, max. temperature stability and constancy measured pursuant to ISO 60068-3, 3-point calibration. Type Gross volume l LKPv 6520 597 LKPv 65231) 597 LKPv 8420 856 LKPv 1420 1361 LKPv 14231) 1361 LGPv 6520 597 LGPv 8420 856 LGPv 1420 1361 Tempera- ture range °C -2 – +16 0 – +16 -2 – +16 -2 – +16 0 – +16 -10 – -35 -10 – -35 -10 – -26 Connec- Outer dimensi- tion ons W × D × H W mm 370 700×830×2160 370 700×830×2160 790×980×2160 370 1430×830×2160 470 1430×830×2160 560 700×830×2160 740 790×980×2160 840 1430×830×2160 830 Order No. 10 45 66521 10 45 66523 10 45 68420 10 45 61420 10 45 61423 10 45 66522 10 45 68421 10 45 61421 1) with glass door and switchable LED lighting co d e b e w WWRVA003 Medication Refrigerators with Comfort Electronics, LIEBHERR The medication refrigerators pursuant to DIN 58345 offer a wide range of functions: Med- ication refrigerators with Comfort Electronics have a floating contact for alarm forwarding to an external remote alarm system; optical and acoustic temperature alarm give out warnings if the set temperature deviation limits of 2 and 8°C have been exceeded. The gapless plastic interior container is easy to clean. The units are in compliance with DIN 58345 for storing medication at 5ºC. co d e b e w WWRVA004 Type Gross volume l MKUv 1610 142 MKUv 16131) 152 MKv 3910 361 MKv 39131) 386 Outer dimensions W × D × H mm 601×618×820 601×618×820 601×618×1840 601×618×1840 1) with glass door and switchable LED lighting Available on request: each in version H63 incl. drawers Connection W 273 369 309 480 Order No. 10 45 61614 10 45 61615 10 45 63914 10 45 63915 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 629

631

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units Refrigerators, Upright Freezers Laboratory-Pharmacy Refrigerator +2°C – +12°C, LAT Fully sealed, low-noise, high-efficiency hermetical compressor and ventilated condenser (also suitable for use in tropical regions). Forced-air cooling system designed to ensure maximum temperature stability in the fridge, even in case of frequent door opening. The evaporator fan switches off when the door is opened. CFC-free freezing agent R404a or CFC / H-CFC-free natural freezing agent R290 available on request. Standard equipment • Shelves • Four one-way wheels with stabilizing adjustable feet • Power cord with Schüko type plug or British type plug • RFI filter • Password protected power switch and settings • 4.3 ″ LCD touchscreen with alarm system • Data Logger with USB port Optional accessories • Scotch-Brite stainless steel sliding drawers • Plexiglas frontal side • Kit of dividers for drawer • Additional shelf • Weekly temperature chart recorder • Back-up battery • GSM alarm to send SMS alarm messages • DIN 58345 conformity • LAN port • Test hole (Ø 25 mm) • Electric digital key lock Technische Daten: Temperature: Noise: +2°C to +12°C 45 db Model Volume l 1 SB 10 100 2 FS 15 150 FS 20 200 FS 25 250 3 FS 30 300 Quantity shelves 2 2 3 4 5 Weight kg 57 73 82 88 97 Width × Depth × Height mm 600×600×860 600×600×1360 600×600×1560 600×600×1760 600×600×1960 Order No. 10 20 13010 10 20 13015 10 20 13020 10 20 13025 10 20 13030 Special sizes of up to 1,400 litres are available as well. Accessories available on request, please contact us. Explosion-proofed Laboratory Refrigeraters and Freezers with Comfort Electronics, LIEBHERR Designed specifically for storage of explosive and highly flammable substances, for ex- ample in chemical industry, the laboratory range comprises units with explosion-proofed interior in compliance with the safety requirements of EU Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX95); they have been approved by the ATEX Conformity Assessment Institution electro-suisse - SEV. Type Gross volume l LKUexv 1610 141 LKexv 3910 360 LGUex 1500 139 LGex 3410 310 LCexv 4010 254 Tempera- ture range °C +3 – +16 +3 – +16 -9 – -26 -9 – -30 -9 – -30, +3 – +16 Connec- Outer dimensi- tion ons W × D × H W mm 601×618×820 190 601×618×1840 280 601×618×820 190 601×618×1840 280 600×615×2000 280 Order No. 10 45 61611 10 45 63911 10 45 61500 10 45 63410 10 45 64011 co d e b e w WWW4U107 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWRVA002 630

632

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units Refrigerators, Upright Freezers Laboratory Refrigerators with an Explosion-Proof Interior, Lovibond® co d e b e w WWSE2002 The German DGUV 213-850 guideline for laboratories stipulates that interior spaces must be explosion-protected where hazardous, explosive atmospheres can develop (for exam- ple, due to the presence of flammable liquids). The Lovibond® cabinets in the EX range meet the requirements of this guideline and are fully equipped for daily laboratory use. ATEX certified. Technical data: Cooling: Defrost: Temperature: Power supply: Compliance: EX-safety: Powerful compressor unit, mounted on low noise, vibration-free bearings Automatic defrost-condensation drains into a collection bowl within the refrigerator +2°C to 10°C 230 V / 50 Hz CE Spark-free interior Type EX 160 EX 220 EX 300 EX 490 Useful capacity l 160 220 300 490 Outer dimensions H × W × D mm 860 × 600 × 600 1250 × 600 × 610 1640 × 600 × 610 1640 × 730 × 750 Order No. 10 77 12105 10 77 12115 10 77 12125 10 77 12135 Blood Bank Refrigerator +2°C – +6°C, LAT Certified according to Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC Class IIa for storing and pre- serving blood. Available for 64 to 770 blood bags (of 450 ml each). Standard equipment • Shelves • Four one-way wheels with stabilizing adjustable feet • Power cord with Schuko type plug or British type plug • RFI filter • Password protected power switch and settings • 4.3 ″ LCD touchscreen with alarm system • Data Logger with USB port • DIN 58371 conformity • Weekly temperature chart recorder Optional accessories • Digital humidity sensor • Kit of dividers for drawer • GSM alarm to send SMS alarm messages • LAN port • Test hole (Ø 25 mm) • Electric digital key lock Vol. l Model for blood bags 450 ml pc SB 10E 100 64 FS 20E 200 128 FS 30E 300 192 1 PN 52E 520 330 2 AF 140E 1400 770 Noise level dB 45 45 45 49 50 Wght W × D × H Order No. kg 68 94 118 142 194 mm 600×600×860 10 20 10010 600×600×1360 10 20 10020 600×600×1960 10 20 10030 700×800×2040 10 20 10052 1400×800×1990 10 20 11400 co d e b e w 1 WWW4U103 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 631 2

633

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units co d e b e w WWQGZ018 co d e b e w co d e b e w WW4HV033 1 WW4HV034 Chest Freezers, Upright Freezers Ultra-Low Temperature Freezers, Serie UF V, BINDER Environmental compatibility is one of the major benefits of the new BINDER ultra-low temperature freezer: It has the lowest energy consumption in its class and uses environ- mentally friendly refrigeranst. Its multi-level safety concept can be combined individually to match every installation environment. The product range comprises various unit sizes tailored to the requirements in laboratories, well-thought-out options and practical acces- sories – in short, everything which is desirable for reliable long-term storage of valuable and sensitive samples. Equipment: • Temperature range: -90°C to -40°C • Efficient thermal insulation with vacuum insulation panels • Ergonomic door handle • Lowest energy consumption in its class • Powerful cascade compressor cooling unit • Water cooling (depending on variant) • Environmentally friendly refrigerants R-290 and R-170 • Rust-proof interior made completely of stainless steel Type Interior vol. l UF V 500 477 UF V 700 700 Inner W × H × D Outer W × H × D mm mm 606×1300×605 826×1966×938 1110×1966×938 890×1300×605 Order No. 10 40 10347 10 40 10348 Thermo Scientific™ HERAfreeze™ HDE Series Ultra Low Tempe- rature Freezers, Thermo Scientific Environmentally friendly energy-saving freezers with a temperature range of -50 to -86°C. • Maximum temperature recovery time after door has been opened: 24 minutes • Ergonomic design • Very silent operation: under 53 dB (A) • Capacity for 300 – 600 boxes • 5 inner doors and interior with 5 subdivisions for inserts < 24 cm height – compatible with most shelving systems • Natural hydrocarbon-based freezing agents • Water-blown foam insulation avoids harmful chemical emissions and reduces long-term emission of blowing agents • Intuitive touchscreen operation with indication of all relevant data • Datalogger function with safe cloud saving option and smartphone connection Order No. Model HDE 30086 FV 300 HDE 40086 FV 400 1 HDE 50086 FV 500 HDE 60086 FV 600 No. of 5 cm cryoboxes Cap. l 422 549 682 816 Outer W × D × H cm Inner W × D × H cm 45.2×71.9×130.1 58.4×97.7×198.1 10 79 23086 58.8×71.9×130.1 71.9×97.7×198.1 10 79 24086 73.0×71.9×130.1 86.4×97.7×198.1 10 79 25086 87.3×71.9×130.1 100.6×97.7×198.1 10 79 26086 To see other ULT freezer models and accessories, please enter webcode WW4HV033 to access our online catalogue. High performance freezers from the Thermo Scientific™ TSX se- ries, Thermo Scientific The high-performance refrigerators and freezers of the Thermo Scientific™ TSX series are designed for the storage of media, reagents, and other laboratory products. The V-drive increases the speed of the processor to ensure that the temperature is restored quickly after the door has been opened. • Automatic defrosting • Extra silent with a noise level of only 52 dB(A) • Natural refrigerants (R290) • Compatible with wireless monitoring systems and remote alarm contacts • Acoustic and optical alarm • GMP cleanroom class A/ISO 6 (ISO EN 14644-1) compatible with corresponding prepa- ration before installation • Four 2 ″ castors; the two front castors can be locked • Self-closing door with 90° stop • Datalogger available as an option Article TSX 1230 FV -30°C, single door TSX 2330 FV -30°C, single door TSX 3030 FV -30°C, single door 2 TSX 5030 FV -30°C, two doors Outer W×D×H mm Inner W × D × H mm Vol. l 326 619×790×1854 508×554×1331 10 79 21230 650 711×962×1994 610×723×1473 10 79 22332 827 864×962×1994 762×723×1473 10 79 23030 1447 1435×962×1994 1334×723×1473 10 79 25030 Order No. 2 632 To see other refrigerator and freezer models, please enter webcode WW4HV034 to access our online catalogue.

634

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units co d e b e w WWR4Q053 Ice Flake Machines Dry Ice Machine SnowPack®, BÜRKLE SnowPack® enables you to obtain a -79 °C dry ice tablet weighing 50 or 250 g within a few moments, without complicated techno-logy and without electricity! SnowPack® is used in hospitals, universities, schools, institutes, laboratories, in the chemical industry and in materials testing facilities. Examples of use: lowering the temperature in cooling baths or cold traps, pre-cooling tissue samples, ensuring safe transport or embedding biological substances, freezing blood and tissue samples, studies in chemistry, physics and materials technology, etc.. The SnowPack® dry ice machine can be installed on any commercial CO2-bottle with a standpipe (without pressure regulator) (thread W 21.80 × 1/14 ″ acc. to DIN 477 Nr. 6). Article SnowPack® 50 SnowPack® 250 Tablets weight approx. g 50 250 Tablet dia. × H mm 50 × 30 80 × 60 Order No. 10 04 59853 10 04 59852 SCOTSMAN Ice Flakers, HIBU SCOTSMAN automatic ice flakers and ice stores Stainless-steel ice flaker for producing ice flakes for a wide range of applications. Based on a patented ice flaking process. Each flake is saturated, firm and non-sticking. Perfect hygiene, laboratory ice at a constant -0,5°C. Integrated storage container. Electronic con- trol with error diagnosis system. Small wastewater quantities for extra-high economic efficiency. Ideal for production, presentation, medical applications, and laboratories. Water inlet and outlet hose and ice shovel comprised in the delivery. Automatic ice flaker Version identical with EF, with integrated waste water pump. Installation is also possible in cases where the drain is not flush with the floor and at max. 15 meter distance. Technical data: Power supply: Features: Performance: 230 V / 50 Hz / 1 Ph stainless steel, air-cooled ambient temperature 21°C water temperature 10°C 2 years ISO 9001, ICIM SQ 80/0 and CE /96 environment-friendly R134 A and R452 A convertible to fully demineralized water Warranty: Technical standards: Refrigerant: Special features: Type W × D × H 1 AF80 2 AF103 AF124 AF156 3 AF206 EF1031) EF1241) EF1561) EF2061) 4 MF26 MF36 MF46 mm 535×620×797 592×622×997 950×605×789 950×605×1000 950×605×1000 592×622×997 950×605×789 950×605×1000 950×605×1000 563×536×531 563×536×531 538×663×645 H incl. legs mm 890 1078 872 1083 1083 1078 872 1083 1083 - - - Output max. kg/day 67 120 113 150 192 120 113 150 192 114 195 305 Type Ice flake stores for MF models Storage Capacity kg/day 129 181 243 5 SB 193 SB 393 SB 530 1) Requires adapter CBT30EFSD for type MF26/36 MF26/36/461) MF26/36/461) 1 3 2 4 5 Order No. 41 88 00080 10 88 00103 10 88 00124 10 88 00156 10 88 00206 10 88 01103 10 88 01124 10 88 01156 10 88 01206 41 88 01022 41 88 01031 41 88 01041 Order No. 41 88 02193 41 88 02393 10 88 02530 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 633

635

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units Ice Flake Machines Ice Flaker, Manitowoc Ice flakers (suitable for build-in) The powerful ice flakers of the UFP/RFP produce medium volumes of compact granular ice flakes particularly quickly and cost-efficient. The hermetically closed ice production in a vertical evaporation cylinder with interior worm system ensure compliance with the strictest hygiene requirements. HACCP compliant. The ice flakers are designed for an ambient temperature of 10°C to 43°C and by default suitable for fully demineralized water. 2 years warranty. UFP 0200 A UFP 0244 A Equipment UFP series: Stainless steel feet, height-adjustable from 110 to 150 mm, water inlet set and outlet set, ice shovel Technical Data: Performance kg/24h: Storage volume kg: Wattage: Ambient temperature: Refrigerant: Connection V/Hz 1): Weight kg: W×D×H mm: 2) special voltages available on request 500×660×843 500×660×953 738×690×1007 738×690×1173 UFP 0388 A UFP 0399 A 113 20 470 113 30 470 153 40 700 153 55 700 10° – 43° 10° – 43° 10° – 43° 10° – 43° 230/50/1 230/50/1 230/50/1 230/50/1 R 290 R 290 R 290 R 290 67 85 59 94 Model 1 UFP 0244 A 2 UFP 0200 A 3 UFP 0388 A 4 UFP 0399 A Cooling Air Air Air Air Colour silver silver silver silver Order No. 10 17 00244 10 17 00200 10 17 00388 10 17 00399 157 RFP 0320 A Equipment RFP series: water inlet set and outlet set Technical Data: Performance kg/24h: Storage: Wattage: Ambient temperature: Refrigerant: Connection V/Hz 1): Weight kg: W×D×H mm: 2) special voltages available on request 559×599×660 D320/D420 10° – 43° 230/50/1 R 290 830 74 157 830 10° – 43° R 290 230/50/1 74 RFP 0320 W RFP 0620 A RFP 0620 W D320/D420 D320/D420 D320/D420 280 280 1100 10° – 43° R 290 230/50/1 104 1100 10° – 43° R 290 230/50/1 104 559×599×660 559×599×660 559×599×660 Model 5 RFP 0320 A RFP 0320 W 6 RFP 0620 A RFP 0620 W Cooling Material stainless steel air stainless steel water stainless steel air stainless steel water Colour silber silber silber silber Order No. 10 17 00320 10 17 01320 10 17 00620 10 17 01620 7 Storage consistent with RFP series 0320 and 0620 830 157 10° – 43° D320/D420 RFP 0320 A Equipment: height-adjustable feet, ice shovel Technical Data: Performance kg/24h: Storage: Wattage: Ambient temperature: Refrigerant: Connection V/Hz 1): Weight kg: W×D×H mm: 2) special voltages available on request Technical Data: Capacity kg: Weight kg: Dimensions W×D×H mm: 559×599×660 230/50/1 R 290 74 157 830 10° – 43° R 290 230/50/1 74 D 320 95 34 559×864×965 Model D 320 D 420 Material plastic plastic Colour silver silver Accessories Article Ice shovel, big Ice shovel, small Cleaner, 473 ml Disinfectant, 473 ml Capacity ml 2500 900 RFP 0320 W RFP 0620 A RFP 0620 W D320/D420 D320/D420 D320/D420 280 280 1100 10° – 43° R 290 230/50/1 104 1100 10° – 43° R 290 230/50/1 104 559×599×660 559×599×660 559×599×660 D 420 141 49 559×864×1270 Order No. 10 17 02320 10 17 02420 Order No. 10 17 02603 10 17 02593 10 17 05162 10 17 05264 4 1 2 3 5 7 634 6

636

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Refrigerating Units, Freezing Units / Insulating Vessels Ice Flake Machines Ice Flake Machines, ZIEGRA Ziegra ice flakes are ideal for laboratory and hospital use. Available for flake sizes “Stand- ard” and “Micro”. Guaranteed ice temperature -0.5°C; the flakes remain detached and are easy to remove. Robust, hygienic stainless steel surfaces inside and out. High-quality components und state-of-the-art refrigeration technology for optimum reliability and energy saving. Ver- sions for potable and demineralized water available without surcharge. Various special features (for added hygiene, installation accessories) available on request. Technical data: Power supply: Cooling: Protection class: Test marks: Warranty: 1/N/PE Z 230 V/50 Hz air (water cooling also possible) I acc. to DIN 57700 Part 1/VDE 0700 Part 1 GS 2-years within Germany Type Ice/24 h kg 30 1 ZBE 30-10 70 ZBE 70-35 ZBE 110-35 110 2 ZBE 150-100 150 ZBE 150-200 150 2 ZBE 250-100 250 ZBE 250-200 250 2 ZBE 350-100 350 ZBE 350-200 350 Storage kg 10 35 35 100 200 100 200 100 200 External W×H×D cm 40×71×50 46×91×60 46×91×60 70×156×70 70×196×70 70×156×70 70×196×70 70×156×70 70×196×70 P rating W 400 400 600 700 700 1100 1100 1600 1600 Noise level dBA 45 45 47 50 50 51 51 55 55 Order No. 41 66 03010 41 66 07035 41 66 11035 41 66 15100 41 66 15200 41 66 25100 41 66 25200 41 66 35100 41 66 35200 Larger models and special machines on request Nitrogen Stores, Nitrogen Freezing Containers High Capacity Refrigerators, tec-lab GmbH HC series Containers of this series combine the requirement for increased storage capacity with compact external dimensions. The following accessories are available on request: Roller bases: Low-level alarm: R018-8C00 for HCL12, HC20 R033-8C00 for HC34, HC35, VHC35 R034-8C15 for HC20, HC34 R037-8C15 for HC35 R036-8C30 for VHC35 1 2 co d e b e w WWH29003 Type HCL12 HC20 HC34 HC35 VHC35 Capacity 2 ml cryo tubes — 684 684 1020 1260 Working time days 37 54 125 81 81 Ø mm 396 396 478 478 478 H mm 482 615 668 681 681 Order No. 38 16 10012 38 16 10020 38 16 10034 38 16 10035 38 16 10135 More than 20,000 articles in this catalogue – and still more on our website ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 635

637

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels Nitrogen Stores, Nitrogen Freezing Containers Shipping Containers, tec-lab GmbH CX series Containes for the reliable shipping of biological material. A specially developed absorbent absorbs the liquid nitrogen in the CX containers, enabling dry and cryogenic storage of the product. This enhances safety over long distances in particular. The containers com- ply with IATA regulations. New: The removable adsorption material in CXR types permits reliable cleaning - a first for this kind of container. The optional temperature logger allows continuous monitoring and recording of the temperature in the containers. Type series CX co d e b e w WWH29004 co d e b e w WWH29005 co d e b e w WWH29006 636 Type CX100 CXR100 CXR5001) Working time days 21 11 8 1) CXR500 supplied without tower Capacity 2 ml cryo tubes 102 114 500 Ø mm 234 391 391 H mm 467 493 683 Order No. 38 16 20100 38 16 21100 38 16 21500 Accessories Article Tower for 5 cryo boxes Tower for 9 cryo blood bags Temperature logger for CX100 Temperature logger for CXR Temperature logger for CXR100 Type RS30-9C44 CP70-9C18 M380CE M385CE M382CE Order No. 38 16 30944 38 16 70918 38 16 71380 38 16 71385 38 16 71382 Laboratory Systems, tec-lab GmbH LS series The LS series was specially designed to combine convenient storage in cryogenic boxes with high storage capacities and low nitrogen consumption. This gives it low operating costs and long refill intervals. The following accessories are available on request: Roller bases: R033-8C00 for LS750 R05K-8C00 for LS3000, LS4800, LS6000 R036-8C30 for LS750 / RS30K-8C40 for LS3000 R05K-8C26 for LS4800 / RS60-8C40 for LS6000 Low-level alarm: Type LS750 LS3000 LS4800 LS6000 Capacity 2 ml cryo tubes 750 3000 4800 6000 Working time days 80 66 102 120 Ø mm 478 683 683 683 H mm 681 731 892 991 Order No. 38 16 72750 38 16 73000 38 16 74800 38 16 76000 LS3000-LS6000 are available with automatic refill system and licensed in compliance with European medical product laws (93/42/EC). Liquid Nitrogen Dewars, tec-lab GmbH LD series Containers of the LD series are used for the storage of liquid nitrogen but can also be used for work with this medium, e.g. in materials testing. The series includes containers with a storage capacity of 4 to 50 liters. The following accessories are available on request: Withdrawal device: Tipping stand: Roller bases: D250-8C05 for LD25, LD35, LD50 D025-8C00 for LD25, Classic25 R018-8C00 for LD25 R033-8C00 for LD35, LD50 D024-8C02 for Classic25 Type Evaporation rate days l LD4 0.4 LD5 0.77 LD10 0.22 LD25 0.23 Classic25 0.21 LD35 0.23 LD50 0.41 Liquid nitrogen capacity l 4 5 10 25 25 35 50 Ø H Order No. mm 193 193 290 396 394 475 475 mm 432 445 597 655 582 668 823 38 16 81004 38 16 81005 38 16 81010 38 16 81025 38 16 82025 38 16 82035 38 16 82050

638

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels Nitrogen Stores, Nitrogen Freezing Containers High Capacity Refrigerators, tec-lab GmbH 1 Type series K Taylor-Wharton K Series systems are designed to accommodate various inventory control systems. The high capacity makes it possible to hold up to 38,350 2 ml vials. The following accessories are available on request: Automatic level controller M505 and M550 Inventory control systems for vials or blood bags Type Capacity 2 ml cryo tubes 3726 10400 24050 38350 3K 10K 24K 38K LN2 capacity l 48 165 365 590 Work time day 19 33 52 74 Outer Ø Order No. mm 391 587 × 775 864 × 965 1067 × 1397 10 16 73003 10 16 73010 10 16 73024 10 16 73038 2 Type series LABS LABS Series freezers are designed for efficient long-term storage of larger volumes of specimens. With a capacity of up to 93,000 2 ml vials and a storage temperature virtually at the level of the liquid nitrogen temperature even in the gas phase and low nitrogen consumption, the LABS Series sets new industry benchmarks. The following accessories are available on request: Automatic level controller M505 and M550 Inventory control systems for vials or blood bags Type LABS20 LABS38 LABS40 LABS80 LABS94 Capacity 2 ml cryo tubes 19500 37700 41600 79300 93000 LN2 capacity l 407 626 606 1350 1630 Work time day 102 143 135 169 210 Outer Ø Order No. mm 864 1067 1143 1511 1511 10 16 74020 10 16 74038 10 16 74040 10 16 74080 10 16 74094 1 2 co d e b e w WWH29008 Storage and Transport Cylinders, tec-lab GmbH Type series XL These vessels are designed for the requirements of liquid nitrogen storing and can be connected to most large-volume freezers. The following accessories are available on request: Withdrawal hose 1,200 mm, 1,800 mm Phase separator Type XL70PBCE XL120CE XL120PBCE XL180CE XL180PBCE XL240CE XL240PBCE Gross volume l 70 126 126 189 189 250 250 Overall height mm 1115 1350 1350 1280 1280 1510 1510 Outer Ø mm 508 508 508 660 660 660 660 Order No. 10 16 75070 10 16 76070 10 16 75120 10 16 76180 10 16 75180 10 16 76240 10 16 75240 co d e b e w WWH29007 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 637

639

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels co d e b e w WWH29009 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 5 638 Nitrogen Stores, Nitrogen Freezing Containers Cryogenic Protective Equipment, tec-lab GmbH 1 Cryogenic protective gloves Cryokit 400 Cryogenic protection gloves cryokit 400 with CE certificate Cat. 3a provide protection in the ultra-low temperature range. Accordingly, this protection equipment is suitable for working at low temperatures and for handling dry ice (-72°C) and liquid nitrogen (-196°C). Water-tight, forearm-covering (40 cm long). Cryo Gloves by cryokit, for optimum nitrogen handling. With data sheet and instructions for use. Interior insulation: multi-layer polyester fleece 410 g/m² and Polyoleﬁ-Porelle® membrane. Size S (7) M (8) L (9) XL (10) XXL (11) Order No. 10 16 71320 10 16 71286 10 16 71274 10 16 71288 10 16 71289 2 Cryogenic protective gloves Cryokit 550 Cryogenic protection gloves cryokit 400 with CE certificate Cat. 3a provide protection in the ultra-low temperature range. Accordingly, this protection equipment is suitable for working at low temperatures and for handling dry ice (-72°C) and liquid nitrogen (-196°C). Water-tight, forearm-covering (55 cm long). Cryo Gloves by cryokit, for optimum nitrogen handling. With data sheet and instructions for use. Interior insulation: multi-layer polyester fleece 410 g/m² and Polyoleﬁ-Porelle® membrane. Size M (8) L (9) XL (10) XXL (11) Order No. 10 16 71275 10 16 71302 10 16 71303 10 16 71377 3 Cryogenic protective gloves CryoPLUS 400-2.0 Cryogenic waterproof glove made of special coated and laminated blue fabric. Internal insulation ployester fleece (240 g/m²) and polyolefin Porelle® membrane, 15 cm split leath- er, safety cuff with tightening adjustment. Overall length 40 cm. Suitable for all jobs in presence of liquid nitrogen and other cryogenic gases to protect from cold contact and prevent burns in case of leakage of liquid gas. With CE certificate cat. 3a. Size M (8) L (9) XL (10) XXL (11) Order No. 10 16 71276 10 16 71297 10 16 71298 10 16 71299 Cryogenic protective gloves CryoPLUS 400-2.1 Cryogenic waterproof glove made of special coated and laminated blue fabric. Internal insu- lation ployester fleece (240 g/m²) and polyolefin Porelle® membrane. Overall length 38 cm. Suitable for all jobs in presence of liquid nitrogen and other cryogenic gases to protect from cold contact and prevent burns in case of leakage of liquid gas. With CE certificate cat. 3a. Order No. 10 16 71321 10 16 71322 10 16 71323 10 16 71324 10 16 71325 Size S (7) M (8) L (9) XL (10) XXL (11) 4 Cryogenic protective gloves CryoPLUS 55 Cryogenic waterproof glove made of special coated and laminated blue fabric. Internal insulation ployester fleece (240 g/m²) and polyolefin Porelle® membrane. 30 cm cuff. Overall length 55 cm. Suitable for all jobs in presence of liquid nitrogen and other cryo- genic gases to protect from cold contact and prevent burns in case of leakage of liquid gas. With CE certificate cat. 3a. Size M (8) L (9) XL (10) XXL (11) Order No. 10 16 71277 10 16 71300 10 16 71301 10 16 71326 5 Cryogenic gloves Cryo-Lite Water-repellent grain leather cryogenic glove for light industrial application. Internal insu- lation polyester fleece (320 g/m2) and polyolefin film Porelle®, that ensures waterproof- ness. 15 cm split leather, safety cuff with tightening adjustment. Overall length 40 cm. CE certificate cat. 3a. Size M (8) L (9) XL (10) Order No. 10 16 71280 10 16 71330 10 16 71331 Continued on next page

640

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels Nitrogen Stores, Nitrogen Freezing Containers 6 Cryogenic gloves Cryo-HD Cryogenic gloves Cryo HD with CE certificate cat. 3a. Water-repellent grain leather (1.2 mm) cryogenic glove for heavy duty application. Internal insulation polyester fleece (320 g/m2) and polyolefin film Porelle®, that ensures waterproofness. Overall length 40 cm. Order No. 10 16 71281 10 16 71287 Size L (9) XL (10) 7 Cryogenic protective apron Protection from splashes of cryogenic gases. Made with a special extra resistant compos- ite coated fabric, with adjustable clips buckles in the neck and hip area. With CE certificate cat. 3aa. 6 6 Dimensions cm 70 × 90 70 × 110 70 × 120 70 × 135 Order No. 10 16 71278 10 16 71327 10 16 71328 10 16 71329 7 9 8 Cryogenic protection set CRYO Practical carrying case containing: 1 pair of CRYOPLUS gloves size 10, 1 apron T-CRYO LIGHT 70 × 90 cm, 1 pair of overshoes GHETTE CRYO, 1 clear CRYO face shield. Article Cryogenic protection set CRYO Order No. 10 16 71283 9 Cryogenic face shield Face shield for protection from liquid gas splashes. Ergonomic headgear made of analler- gic material. Interchangeable front foam sweatband. Upper band for height adjustment of the cap. adjustment of the head circumference by rack (53 to 61 cm). 90° flip-up through friction. Clear polycarbonate visor (395 × 240 × 2 mm). Article Cryogenic face shield Order No. 10 16 71284 8 Dewar Vessels Dewar Flasks, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL High density polyethylene Dewar flasks, polyethylene covers with polyethylene coated handle. Unbreakable and absolutely safe for handling ice water, dry ice-solvent mixtures, hot water baths and liquid nitrogen. Chemical-resistant HDPE double-walls filled with urethane foam, withstand temperatures from -196 to +100°C. Ventilated, insulating cover, 1, 2 and 4 liter sizes with carrying handle. 10 liter size without handle. Volume l 1 2 4 10 I.D. opening mm 96 122 158 198 I.H. mm 195 231 295 396 Overall H mm 251 282 353 470 Order No. 23 87 41501 23 87 41502 23 87 41503 23 87 41504 co d e b e w WWRJN106 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 639

641

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels Dewar Vessels Dewar Vessels acc. to DIN EN ISO 16496, KGW-Isotherm These Dewar vessels are made of borosilicate glass 3.3 (DIN/ISO 3585), silvered and evacuated. Supplied as standard in a blue, plastic-coated and galvanized iron sheet cover. Type Vol. ap- prox. ml 100 200 300 450 500 750 1250 800 1200 1700 1000 1500 2100 1500 2000 3200 1500 2000 4000 2500 5000 3000 4000 8000 00 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 S21 S22 Ø A ap- prox. mm 40 40 47 47 57 57 57 67 67 67 77 77 77 90 90 90 100 100 100 110 110 138 138 138 Ø B ap- prox. mm 56 56 60 60 70 70 70 80 80 80 95 95 95 115 115 115 120 120 120 130 130 160 160 160 Ø C ap- prox. mm 63 63 72 72 81 81 81 90 90 90 105 105 105 124 124 124 130 130 130 140 140 165 165 165 D ap- prox. mm 90 170 190 270 210 310 500 240 350 500 235 345 500 245 340 600 240 290 600 290 600 230 310 600 E ap- prox. mm 135 215 240 310 260 370 550 295 395 560 290 395 550 300 390 665 300 345 660 345 660 280 375 660 Order No. 17 50 10300 17 50 10330 17 50 10301 17 50 10302 17 50 10303 17 50 10304 17 50 10305 17 50 10306 17 50 10307 17 50 10308 17 50 10309 17 50 10310 17 50 10311 17 50 10312 17 50 10313 17 50 10314 17 50 10315 17 50 10316 17 50 10317 17 50 10318 17 50 10319 17 50 10320 17 50 10321 17 50 10322 Dewar Vessels with Handle, KGW-Isotherm Cylindrical Dewar vessels made of stainless steel with hoop handle and side handle. Dewar vessels from the GSS series are vacuum-insulated and made of rust-proof chro- mium-nickel steel. All vessels have a side handle, and sizes of 1 liter and more also have a removable hoop handle. Type Vol. cm3 GSS 500 500 GSS 1000 1000 GSS 1000 W 1000 GSS 2000 2000 GSS 3000 3000 GSS 6000 6000 I.D. mm 65 85 100 100 184 184 O.D. mm 80 100 104 104 200 200 I.H. mm 180 206 156 285 160 270 O.H. mm 200 225 178 305 190 300 Wght g 520 860 630 1230 1500 2120 Order No. 38 50 00500 38 50 01000 38 50 01001 38 50 02000 38 50 03000 38 50 06000 Dewar Dishes acc. to DIN EN ISO 16496, KGW-Isotherm Dish-shaped Dewar vessels are ideal for tempering round flasks or for freezing small samples. Supplied with an aluminium cover. Type SCH 6 CAL SCH 9 CAL SCH 15 CAL SCH 18 CAL SCH 20 CAL SCH 30 CAL SCH 31 CAL SCH 33 CAL Vol. max. approx. ml 80 120 260 400 800 1600 2700 5300 Ø A mm 67 77 100 110 138 170 200 250 Ø B mm 80 95 120 130 160 205 230 280 Ø C mm 90 110 130 138 170 215 238 292 D mm 40 50 65 70 80 110 125 150 E mm 75 90 110 115 125 145 160 195 Order No. 17 50 80006 17 50 80009 17 50 80015 17 50 80018 17 50 80020 17 50 80030 17 50 80031 17 50 80033 640

642

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels Dewar Vessels Dewar Containers acc. to DIN EN ISO 16496, KGW-Isotherm These Dewar containers are made of borosilicate glass 3.3 (DIN/ISO 3585). Extra tough design with blue plastic-coated cover made of galvanized iron or stainless steel. With thermally insulated plastic lid held by two springs. Detachable carry-handle. The lid has to have a 2 mm hole when the containers are used to transport and store liquid nitrogen or any other gassing refrigerants. Type Vol. Cover made of blue plastic-coated and galvanized iron sheet E ap- prox. mm 215 245 305 385 D ap- prox. mm 150 170 230 310 Ø C ap- prox. mm 132 170 170 170 Ø B ap- prox. mm 120 160 160 160 Ø A ap- prox. mm 100 138 138 138 l 1 2 3 4 26 27 28 29 Order No. 17 50 30261 17 50 30271 17 50 30281 17 50 30291 Cover made of stainless steel Type Vol. 26 27 28 29 l 1 2 3 4 Ø A ap- prox. mm 100 138 138 138 Ø B ap- prox. mm 120 160 160 160 Ø C ap- prox. mm 132 170 170 170 D ap- prox. mm 150 170 230 310 E ap- prox. mm 215 245 305 385 Order No. 17 50 30262 17 50 30272 17 50 30282 17 50 30292 Large Insulating Vessels acc. to DIN EN ISO 16496, KGW-Isotherm These Dewar vessels are made of borosilicate glass 3,3 (DIN/ISO 3585). Large capacity, insulated, with tough cover made of blue, plastic-coated and galvanized iron sheet or structured aluminium. Insulated lid with hoop-shaped carry-handle. Cover made of plastic-coated and galvanized iron sheet Type Vol. Ø A ap- prox. mm 200 200 200 250 250 Ø B ap- prox. mm 230 230 230 280 280 Ø C ap- prox. mm 250 250 250 300 300 D ap- prox. mm 275 350 500 480 620 E ap- prox. mm 385 475 610 615 750 Order No. 17 50 40301 17 50 40311 17 50 40321 17 50 40331 17 50 40341 30 31 32 33 34 30 31 32 33 34 l 7 10 14 21 28 l 7 10 14 21 28 Cover made of structured aluminium Type Vol. Ø A ap- prox. mm 200 200 200 250 250 Ø B ap- prox. mm 230 230 230 280 280 Ø C ap- prox. mm 250 250 250 300 300 D ap- prox. mm 275 350 500 480 620 E ap- prox. mm 385 475 610 615 750 Order No. 17 50 40302 17 50 40312 17 50 40322 17 50 40332 17 50 40342 Spherical Dewar Vessels acc. to DIN EN ISO 16496, KGW-Isotherm These Dewar vessels are made of borosilicate glass 3,3 (DIN/ISO 3585). For storing and transporting liquid nitrogen. With aluminium cover. The glass inserts rest on soft plastic bearings for additional protection from breakage. 1 Spherical Dewar vessels, spare glass inserts for alu covers: Type E ap- prox. mm 265 330 380 400 Ø B ap- prox. mm 50 85 85 95 H ap- prox. mm 70 110 110 85 Ø C ap- prox. mm 165 205 250 310 Ø A ap- prox. mm 30 60 60 65 21 A 22 A 23 A 24 A Vol. l 1 3 5 10 Order No. 17 50 50021 17 50 50022 17 50 50023 17 50 50024 2 Spherical Dewar vessels, with brushed aluminium cover: Type E ap- prox. mm 300 380 450 480 Ø C ap- prox. mm 175 225 260 330 Ø B ap- prox. mm 60 105 105 105 H ap- prox. mm 150 210 275 310 21 AL 22 AL 23 AL 24 AL Vol. l 1 3 5 10 Order No. 17 50 70454 17 50 70468 17 50 70473 17 50 70486 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 641

643

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels co d e b e w WW2NY411 Dewar Vessels Dewar Vessels with Handle acc. to DIN EN ISO 16496, KGW-Isotherm These Dewar vessels are made of borosilicate glass 3.3 (DIN/ISO 3585), silvered and evacuated. Supplied as standard in a blue, plastic-coated and galvanized iron sheet cov- er with handle. Type G 0 G 1 G 2 G 3 G 4 G 6 G 7 G 9 G 10 G 12 G 13 G 15 G 16 G 18 Vol. ap- prox. ml 200 300 450 500 750 800 1200 1000 1500 1500 2000 1500 2000 2500 Ø A ap- prox. mm 40 47 47 57 57 67 67 77 77 90 90 100 100 110 Ø B ap- prox. mm 56 60 60 70 70 80 80 95 95 115 115 120 120 130 Ø C ap- prox. mm 63 72 72 81 81 90 90 105 105 124 124 130 130 140 D ap- prox. mm 170 190 270 210 310 240 350 235 345 245 340 240 290 290 E ap- prox. mm 215 240 310 260 370 295 395 290 395 300 390 300 345 345 Order No. 17 50 20300 17 50 20301 17 50 20302 17 50 20303 17 50 20304 17 50 20306 17 50 20307 17 50 20309 17 50 20310 17 50 20312 17 50 20313 17 50 20315 17 50 20316 17 50 20318 Cooling Boxes, Chests, Ice Baths CellCamper® Maxi Cool Transport Box incl. Aluminium Block, neoLab® With the CellCamper® Maxi cool box, you can transport your cooled samples securely without using ice or another energy source. Thanks to different cooling units covering three temperature ranges (0 to +4°C / -20 to 0°C / -22 to -18°C), the temperatures can be maintained for 5 to 14 hours. Dry ice can be used as an alternative to the cooling units. The CellCamper® Maxi comes with two cooling units and a universal aluminium box which can easily be replaced by two aluminium blocks. With practical shoulder strap for longer-distance transport of cells. The CellCamper® Maxi is designed to prevent toppling of the transported cells, improving the safety and control of cell transport compared to conventional solutions. In case of contamination, the CellCamper® Maxi is easy to clean with alcohol. Scope of delivery: • CellCamper® Maxi • Universal box made of aluminium for various vessels • 2 × cooling unit cool, frozen or ultrafrozen • Shoulder strap • Size (L × W × H): 28 × 21 × 21 cm Article CellCamper® Maxi incl. cooling unit Cool CellCamper® Maxi incl. cooling unit Frozen CellCamper® Maxi incl. cooling unit Ultrafrozen Order No. 10 01 23710 10 01 23711 10 01 23712 CellCamper® Midi Cool Box incl. Aluminium Block, neoLab® With the CellCamper® Midi cool box, you can transport your cooled samples securely without using ice or another energy source. Thanks to different cooling units covering three temperature ranges (0 to +4°C / -20 to 0°C / -22 to -18°C), the temperatures can be maintained for 6 to 14 hours. Dry ice can be used as an alternative to the cooling units. The CellCamper® Midi comes with an aluminium block which has room for 30 vials of 1.5 / 2.0 ml volume; it is equipped with a display to check the temperature. The CellCamper® Midi is designed to prevent toppling of the transported cells, improving the safety and control of cell transport compared to conventional solutions. In case of contamination, the CellCamper® Midi is easy to clean with alcohol. Scope of delivery: • CellCamper® Midi • Aluminium block with temperature scale for 30 × 1.5 / 2.0 ml • Cooling unit Cool, Frozen or Ultrafrozen co d e b e w WW2NY414 Version Cooling unit Cool Cooling unit Frozen Cooling unit Ultrafrozen Temperature range °C 0 – 4 -20 – 0 -22 – -18 Temperature main- tenance duration 14 h 14 h 6 h Order No. 10 01 23713 10 01 23714 10 01 23715 642

644

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels co d e b e w WW2NY415 Cooling Boxes, Chests, Ice Baths CellCamper® Aluminium Blocks, neoLab® CellCamper® aluminium blocks are suitable for use with the CellCamper® Maxi and Midi. These aluminium blocks can usually be used at temperatures of -196 to over 100°C. The temperature distribution over the whole block is very even and deviates by just ± 0.1°C. All aluminium blocks can be cleaned easily with soap or alcohols and are stable under UV light. Article CellCamper® aluminium block 120×0.2 ml PCR CellCamper® aluminium block 35×1.5 ml tubes CellCamper® aluminium block 35×2.0 ml tubes CellCamper® aluminium block 35×2.0 ml cryo vials Order No. 10 01 23719 10 01 23720 10 01 23721 10 01 23722 CellCamper® Cooling Units, neoLab® The cooling units are suitable for use with the CellCamper® Maxi and Midi. The cooliing units cover 3 different temperature zones (0 to +4°C / -20 to 0°C / -22 to -18°C), the tem- peratures can be maintained for 6 to 14 hours. After cooling at -80°C, allow to rest at room temperature for 10 minutes to eliminate the surface temperature. Temperature main- tenance duration 14 h 14 h 6 h Temperature range °C 0 – 4 -20 – 0 -22 – -18 10 01 23716 10 01 23717 10 01 23718 Cool Frozen Ultrafrozen Order No. Type co d e b e w co d e b e w WW2NY413 WW2NY412 CellCamper® Cooling Rack with Gel Filling, neoLab® 1 CellCamper® cooling racks CellCamper® cool racks for storing and cooling samples on the laboratory bench. The cool racks are filled with an inert, non-toxic gel. 2 temperature zones available. • CellCamper® cool rack -20°C: after 3 hours still -10°C. • CellCamper® cool rack 0°C: temperature retention time approx. 5 hours. Autoclave-safe. Article CellCamper® -20°C cryo rack for cryo tubes, PC, 32 places CellCamper® 0°C cryo rack for cryo tubes, PC, 32 places Order No. 10 01 23730 10 01 23731 1 2 CellCamper® cooling racks with colour changing CellCamper® cool racks with colour coding for storing and cooling samples on the labo- ratory bench. These racks keep their temperature of 4°C for approx. 3.5 hours at room temperature (with the lid on). When they heat up, the colour changes clearly from green to yellow. Autoclave-safe. Article CellCamper® colour changing cryo rack for 24 cryo tubes CellCamper® colour changing cryo rack for 96 PCR tubes Order No. 10 01 23732 10 01 23733 2 Cool Packs, neoLab® 3 Cool Packs Cool-Packs filled with special gel, made of sturdy metal-coated PE foil. Long term protec- tion against gel spill, leak-proof. After thawing, contents return to gel state. For laboratory use to protect temperature sensitive samples, tissue, serums, organs, etc. Pre-freeze bags in the deep freezer at -23°C for some hours, until the gel is hard. Reusable, non-toxic. Type 418 597 420 427 Weight g 336 448 672 1344 Length × Width × Depth cm 17 × 10 × 2.5 17 × 17 × 2.0 19 × 14 × 2.5 26 × 19 × 3.0 Order No. 23 01 11400 23 01 11403 23 01 11401 23 01 11402 3 4 Gel packs The neoLab gel packs are ideal for shipping temperature-sensitive products. The gel packs are filled with a hydrous gel, are non-toxic and can be disposed of with household waste. All materials used give the highest standards of robustness and freedom from harmful substances and are approved for the pharmaceutical, laboratory and food sectors. 4 co d e b e w WW2NY238 Weight g 230 Length × Width × Depth cm 13.7 × 14.0 × 2.0 Order No. 10 01 11407 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 643

645

Heating Units, Refrigerating Units Insulating Vessels Cooling Boxes, Chests, Ice Baths Ice Baths, neoLab® Very well insulated ice baths made of double-wall polystyrene. Ice Baths Article 1 Ice bath, small 2 Ice bath, large Inner dimensions W × H × D mm 210 × 70 × 140 350 × 100 × 210 Order No. 23 01 16031 23 01 16030 Aluminium inserts for small ice bath for 2 × 7 reaction vessels 1.5 ml Article Aluminium insert Aluminium insert Aluminium insert with customized drillings. Please indicate diameter, quantity and for 2 × 4 reaction vessels 5 ml, conical bore depth Aluminium inserts for large ice bath for 2 × 12 reaction vessels 1.5 ml Article Aluminium insert Aluminium insert Aluminium insert with customized drillings. Please indicate diameter, quantity and for 8 × 1 reaction vessels 5 ml, conical bore depth. 2 Order No. 23 01 16033 10 01 16037 23 01 16032 Order No. 23 01 16028 10 01 16027 10 01 16029 Cooling Box, BRAND Durable, rigid polyurethane foam. For bench-top cold storage. Excellent insulating prop- erties. Sturdy, octagonal design for improved stability. Tapered side with molded handles and flat lid for easy handling and storage. Suitable for chemical disinfection. Operating temperature -196°C to +95°C. Article Cooling box with lid, PU-foam, stackable, 4.5 l Order No. 10 49 15610 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. co d e b e w WW2NY037 1 co d e b e w WWQED083 co d e b e w 644

646

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers CHAPTER OVERVIEW Magnetic Stirrers 645 Magnetic Stirring Bars, Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Magnetic Stirrers without Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Magnetic Stirrers with Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Multiple Stirrers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Stirrers 666 Stirring Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Stirrers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667 Stirrer Seals, Shafts see Glass Construction, Equipment 333 Shakers, Incubators 672 Vibratory Shakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672 Thermomixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675 Shakers, Incubators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Shaking Water Baths see Heating, Refrigerating Units 595 Roller Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Roller Incubators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 Overhead Mixers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698 Magnetic Stirring Bars, Remover BOLA Magnetic Stirring Bars, Bohlender Magnetic stirring bars with fluoroplastic (PTFE) coating, resistant to practically all chemicals, temperature-resistant from -200 to +260°C. 1 Cylindrical magnetic stirring bars L approx. Order No. L approx. PU pc/Pack Ø approx. mm 2 3 2 3 3 6 4,5 3 4,5 6 6 7 6 mm 5 6 7 8 10 10 12 13 15 15 20 20 25 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 10 17 65000 10 17 65004 10 17 65005 10 17 65007 10 17 65008 10 17 65009 10 17 65011 24 17 35011 24 17 35013 24 17 35014 24 17 35015 24 17 35016 24 17 35018 mm 10 25 10 30 20 30 10 35 20 40 10 40 20 50 10 55 10 60 20 60 10 70 10 80 10 110 Ø approx. mm 7 6 7 6 7 8 8 12 7 9 9 10 27 2 Egg-shaped magnetic stirring bars L approx. Order No. Ø approx. mm 10 12 15 15 24 17 35802 24 17 35804 24 17 35806 24 17 35808 mm 20 25 30 35 PU pc/Pack L approx. mm 3 40 3 50 3 65 3 70 Ø approx. mm 20 20 20 20 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 Triangular magnetic stirring bars L approx. Order No. L approx. PU pc/Pack Ø approx. mm 8 8 15 10 15 mm 20 25 25 35 40 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 24 17 35706 24 17 35709 24 17 35712 24 17 35715 24 17 35718 mm 3 50 3 55 3 80 3 130 3 Ø approx. mm 12 15 16 44 Order No. 10 17 65021 24 17 35020 24 17 35021 10 17 65023 10 17 65024 24 17 35025 24 17 35029 10 17 65034 10 17 65031 10 17 65032 10 17 65033 10 17 65035 10 17 65036 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 3 3 3 3 3 1 Order No. 24 17 35810 24 17 35812 24 17 35814 24 17 35816 PU pc/Pack 1 1 1 1 Order No. 24 17 35721 24 17 35724 24 17 35727 24 17 35730 PU pc/Pack 3 1 1 1 4 Dumbbell-shaped magnetic stirring bars PTFE-encapsulated magnetic core (Alnico 5). Stable discs on both sides provide an ex- cellent stirring. Sliding discs Ø approx. 20 mm, rod Ø ca. 8 mm. Universal chemical re- sistance, temperature-resistant from -200 to +250°C. 1 2 3 4 Length approx. mm 37 55 Order No. 10 17 65903 10 17 65906 PU pc/Pack 3 3 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 645 Continued on next page

647

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers 1 Magnetic Stirring Bars, Remover Power magnetic stirring bars (cylindrical) PTFE-encapsulated magnetic core made of a very strong magnetic material (rare earth magnet samarium-cobalt), torque loads transmitted are about 4 times larger than those of conventional magnetic stirring bars. Universal chemical resistance, temperature-resist- ant from -200 to +250°C. Length approx. mm 20 40 50 Ø approx. mm 8 14 19 Order No. 10 17 66520 10 17 66540 10 17 66550 PU pc/Pack 1 1 1 BOLA Beakerliner, Bohlender PTFE-encapsulated magnetic core (Alnico 5) axially mounted in a guide cage made of PTFE, universal chemical resistance. No shear action on the bottom of the beaker, smooth running in glass beakers also on an uneven bottom. The cage acts like a baffel and thus provides optimum mixing results. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Vacuum: Autoclave: PTFE from -200°C to +250°C +++ universal suitable 121°C for beaker size ml 250, 400 600, 800, 1000 2000 3000, 5000 Outer Ø cage mm 67 74 103 125 Height cage mm 21 29 32 48 Length × Ø stirring bar mm 50 × 8 60 × 9 80 × 10 106 × 25 Order No. 10 17 66208 10 17 66212 10 17 66216 10 17 66220 Stirring Bar ASTEROID 40, 2mag Magnetic stirrer bar, very powerful, for large quantities and/or viscous media, stirring over distances, for unfavorably shaped bottoms, 4 × higher torque, unrivalled increase of mix- ing effect, significantly higher speeds can be reached, no de-magnetization effect, con- cave shape for minimum contact surface while operationally reliable rotation is ensured, 300% less PTFE wear, triangle contour for high shearing load, added mixing effect at lower speeds, smooth and sealed PTFE coating, pursuant to FDA regulations, suitable for steam-sterilization at 121°C, significant power increase for all magnetic stirrers. Technical data: Shape: Cover material: triangular, concave PTFE Article ASTEROID 25 ASTEROID 40 ASTEROID 70 Ø mm 14 28 39 Length mm 25 40 70 Weight kg 0.07 0.12 0.37 Order No. 10 18 54425 10 18 54440 10 18 54471 Magnetic Stirring Bars Set, IDL This set of magnetic stirring bars covers most applications. A selection of bar sizes allows you to choose the correct bar for stirring any medium. Dimensions: 188 × 116 × 34 mm Contents Form cylindrical simple form Dimensions approx. Qty 10 × 6 mm 15 × 6 mm 25 × 7 mm 30 × 7 mm 40 × 7 mm 50 × 8 mm Dimensions approx. Qty 12 × 4,5 mm Contents Form cylindrical with center ring 20 × 6 mm 30 × 6 mm 25 × 8 mm triangular 40 × 14 mm 20 × 10 mm egg-shaped 35 × 15 mm cross-shaped 14 mm dog-bone 37 mm long 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Article Magnetic stirring bar set Norma with bar remover Magnetic stirring bar set Norma without bar remover Order No. 24 00 10010 24 00 10020 1 co d e b e w WWJRM008 co d e b e w WW7R3015 646

648

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirring Bars, Remover Magnetic Stirring Bars Sets, neoLab® 1 Magnetic stirring bar set, 7 sizes 10 Teflon coated magnetic stirring bars in a reusable storage box. Content of set: Dimensions (L × dia.) mm Qty 15 × 6 20 × 7 25 × 7 30 × 7 Article Magnetic stirring bars set, 7 sizes Dimensions (L × dia.) mm Qty 40 × 7 50 × 7 60 × 7 Order No. 24 01 61999 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 Magnetic stirring bars set, 5 sizes 10 magnetic stirring bars, PTFE coated, strong magnetic core, clearly in the case. Content of set: Dimensions (L × Ø) mm Qty 10 × 6 15 × 6 20 × 6 Article Magnetic stirring bars set, 5 sizes Dimensions (L × Ø) mm Qty 25 × 6 30 × 6 Order No. 10 01 61996 2 2 2 2 2 Magnetic Stirring Bars, BRAND 3 Magnetic stirring bars, cylindrical, PTFE Round, smooth surface, for universal applications. L Order No. L O.D. mm mm 2.5 2.5 10 49 37100 3.5 3.5 10 49 37101 5 2 10 49 37102 6 3 10 49 37103 3 8 10 49 37104 4.5 10 49 37105 12 2 7 10 49 37106 8 1.7 10 49 37107 3 10 10 49 37108 3 13 10 49 37109 4.5 10 49 37110 15 1.7 10 49 37111 15 10 6 10 49 37113 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 O.D. mm mm 15 6 20 6 25 6 30 6 35 6 40 8 45 8 50 8 60 9 70 9 80 9 108 27 159 27 Order No. 10 49 37114 10 49 37115 10 49 37120 10 49 37125 10 49 37127 10 49 37130 10 49 37132 10 49 37135 10 49 37140 10 49 37145 10 49 37150 10 49 37155 10 49 37160 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 WW2NY047 co d e b e w 1 2 co d e b e w WWQED085 4 Magnetic stirring bars, cylindrical with pivot ring, PTFE For vessels with slightly uneven bottoms. The pivot ring reduces the contact surface and enables the stirrer to adopt the optimum stirring position. 4 Order No. L O.D. mm mm 8 4 10 49 37404 12 6 10 49 37405 15 6 10 49 37410 20 8 10 49 37415 25 7 10 49 37420 30 7.5 10 49 37425 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 Order No. L O.D. mm mm 3 8 10 49 37427 40 8.5 10 49 37430 45 10 10 49 37432 50 11 10 49 37435 70 10 10 49 37444 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 5 Magnetic stirring bars, crosshead, PTFE Steady spinning position. Excellent stirring action. O.D. mm H mm 5 10 9 20 10 25 Order No. 10 49 37630 10 49 37632 10 49 37634 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 H mm O.D. mm 12 30 15 38 Order No. 10 49 37636 10 49 37638 PU pc/Pack 10 10 6 Magnetic stirring bars, double-ended, PTFE Excellent centering, small contact surface and high turbulence even at low speeds. 6 Length mm 37 54 Outer Ø mm 8 8 co d e b e w Ø plate mm 20 20 Order No. 10 49 37930 10 49 37935 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 3 5 647

649

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirring Bars, Remover Magnetic stirring bars, oval, PTFE Ideal for vessels with round bottom, e.g. round-bottom flasks. 1 L mm O.D. mm 10 5 15 6 20 10 25 12 32 15 Order No. 10 49 37300 10 49 37301 10 49 37302 10 49 37305 10 49 37307 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 L mm O.D. mm 34 15 40 20 50 20 65 20 70 20 Order No. 10 49 37310 10 49 37312 10 49 37315 10 49 37320 10 49 37325 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 2 Magnetic stirring bars, triangular, PTFE Wedge-shaped. Ideal for dissolving solids and mixing of sediments due to scraping ac- tion. Angular surface creates high turbulence even at low speeds. Order No. Order No. L L mm O.D. mm 25 8 25 14 30 10 40 14 10 49 37810 10 49 37812 10 49 37815 10 49 37817 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 mm O.D. mm 50 12 55 14 80 16 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 49 37820 10 49 37822 10 49 37826 3 Magnetic stirring bars, octagonal with pivot ring, PTFE Angular surface creates high turbulence even at low speeds. For vessels with slightly uneven bottoms. The pivot ring reduces the contact surface and enables the stirrer to adopt the optimum position. L mm Order No. O.D. mm 13 10 10 49 37607 15 9.5 10 49 37608 25 9.5 10 49 37610 25 11 10 49 37612 38 9.5 10 49 37615 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 L mm Order No. O.D. mm 38 11 10 49 37617 51 9.5 10 49 37618 51 11 10 49 37620 64 11 10 49 37622 75 14.5 10 49 37625 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 Magnetic stirring bar retriever, magnetic core fully sealed Material 4 PTFE PTFE PTFE 5 PP PP Length mm 150 250 350 300 450 Outer Ø mm 8 8 8 10 10 Order No. 10 49 37700 10 49 37710 10 49 37720 10 49 37750 10 49 37755 BOLA Magnetic Stirring Bar Retrievers, Bohlender Magnetic stirring bar retrievers made of fluoroplastic (PTFE), resistant to practically all chemicals, temperature-resistant -200 to +260°C, with powerful permanent magnet. Length mm 200 250 300 350 400 Magnet mount Ø mm 10 10 10 10 10 FischMAG, IDL Rod Ø mm 8 8 8 8 8 Order No. 24 17 37204 24 17 37206 24 17 37208 24 17 37210 24 17 37212 The laboratory sink is the Bermuda triangle for magnetic stir bars The FischMAG retains almost all commercially available Teflon-coated magnetic stir bars in the laboratory sink. This prevents the loss of the stir bars and the clogging of the sink, which remains fully passable for liquids and residues. The FischMAG consists primarily of polyethylene and polypropylene. It is resistant to diluted acids, lyes, and alcoholic solu- tions. • Temperature resistant from +5 to maximum 60°C • Use commercially available detergent for cleaning • 3 adjustable feet Designation FischMAG FischMAG Colour white black Diameter mm 120 120 Order No. 10 00 58434 10 00 58435 1 3 2 4 5 co d e b e w WW7R3359 648

650

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers without Heater Single Point Stirrers with Integrated Control, 2mag co d e b e w WWJRM002 MIX 1 1 1 – 10.000 ml Technical data: Stirring points: Stirring volume/ stirring point: Speed range: Stirring power (max.): 20 W Power settings: Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H):188 × 230 × 38 mm Weight: Protection class: Operating voltage: 100 – 2000 rpm 4-steps (5/10/15/20 W) Stainless steel 4.2 kg IP 65 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz / 1,5 A MIX 1 eco 1 1 – 3.000 ml 120 – 1400 rpm 10 W – Stainless steel 120 × 120 × 35 mm 1.8 kg IP 65 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz / 0.7 A 2mag MIX 1 100% wear-free magnetic stirrer, without motor. 1 position for max. 10,000 ml, powerful, wide range of speeds from 100 - 2,000 rpm, power can be set in 4 levels for high power for large volumes of viscous material and reduced power for permanent operation without heating. Digital display, SoftStart,sealed stainless steel housing, easy to clean, robust, long service life, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Article 1 Single point stirrer 2mag MIX 1 Order No. 10 18 53001 2mag MIX 1 eco Budget option: Technically identical with MIX 1, but with max. 3,000 ml stirring volume, speed range 120 – 1,400 ml/min., very robust, easy operation via control knob/speed scale. Article 2 Single point stirrer 2mag MIX 1 eco Order No. 10 18 53101 2mag luMIX Motorless, 100% wear-free magnetic stirrer with 1 stirring position und bright luminescent plate, white LEDs, homogenous and non-reflecting illumination, 4-steps adjustable light intensity, up to 3,000 ml, wide speed range 100-2,000 rpm, stirrer power setting (4-steps), digital display, SoftStart, sealed stainless steel housing, easy to clean, robust and reliable, 3 years warranty, Made in Germany. Technical data: Stirring points: Stirring volume/point: Speed range: Stirring power (max.): Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Protection category: Electrical data: luMIX 1 1 – 3,000 ml 100 – 2,000 rpm 20 watts Stainless steel/PMMA 188 × 238 × 44 mm 4.4 kg IP 65 100–240 volts / 50–60 Hz / 1.5 A Article 3 Single point stirrer 2mag luMIX Order No. 10 18 53011 1 2 3 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 649

651

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers co d e b e w WWJRM003 Magnetic Stirrers without Heater Stirring Systems (Submersible) with External Control for Viscous Liquids or Volumes up to 40 liter, 2mag 1 10,000 ml MIXdrive 1 eco MIXdrive 1 1 3,000 ml Technical data: Stirring points: Stirring volume/ stirring point: Stirring power (max.): 10 W Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): 120×120×35 mm 180×180×38 mm 245×375×38 mm Weight: Protection class: Permitted operation conditions: Permitted operation conditions HT: 1.6 kg IP 68 -10°C up to +50°C (at 100% humidity) +50°C in water immersed -30°C up to +200°C (at 100% humidity) +95°C in water immersed 20 W Stainless steel Stainless steel 3.5 kg IP 68 9.4 kg IP 68 9.5 kg IP 68 MIXdrive 6 MIXdrive 15 6 3,000 ml 15 3,000 ml 20 W Stainless steel Stainless steel 20 W 2mag MIXdrive 15 / 15 HT 100% wear-free magnetic stirrer, without motor. 15 positions for 15 × 250 ml cup glasses (tall form), positions spaced at 65 mm, powerful, 100% synchronized, stainless steel housing sealed against water, dust, and germs, IP68, submersible, suitable for CO2 cab- inets, easy to clean, robust, extra long service life, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Choose between 2 different temperature ranges: MIXdrive Basic Version up to +50°C, MIXdrive HT version up to +95°C submersed in water baths und up to +200°C in the oven, customized sizes available on request, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Article Sirring system 2mag MIXdrive 15 Sirring system 2mag MIXdrive 15 HT Order No. 10 18 54015 10 18 54215 2mag MIXdrive 60 / 60 HT Technically identical with MIXdrive 15, but with 60 positions for 60 test tubes, positions spaced at 32.5 mm. Article Rührsystem 2mag MIXdrive 60 Rührsystem 2mag MIXdrive 60 HT Order No. 10 18 54060 10 18 54260 2mag MIXdrive 6 / 6 HT Technically identical with MIXdrive 15, but with 6 positions for 6 × 1,000 ml conical flasks, positions spaced at 130 mm. Article Stirring system 2mag MIXdrive 6 Stirring system 2mag MIXdrive 6 HT Order No. 10 18 54006 10 18 54206 2mag MIXdrive 1 / 1 HT Technically identical with MIXdrive 15, but with 1 position for max. 10,000 ml. Article Stirring system 2mag MIXdrive 1 Stirring system 2mag MIXdrive 1 HT Order No. 10 18 54001 10 18 54201 2mag MIXdrive 1 eco / 1 eco HT Technically identical with MIXdrive 1, but with 1 position for max. 3,000 ml. Small footprint. Article Stirring system 2mag MIXdrive 1 eco Stirring system 2mag MIXdrive 1 eco HT Order No. 10 18 54101 10 18 54301 Combination possibilities of stirring systems: MIXdrive – MIXcontrol MIXdrive (basic) up to +50°C (in air and immersed) MIXdrive 60 MIXdrive 15 MIXdrive 6 MIXdrive 1 MIXdrive (HT) (HT = High Temperature) up to +200°C (in air) up to +95°C (immersed) MIXdrive 1 eco MIXdrive 1 XS MIXdrive 60 HT MIXdrive 15 HT MIXdrive 6 HT MIXdrive 1 HT MIXdrive 1 eco HT MIXdrive 1 XS HT MIXcontrol 40 MIXcontrol 20 MIXcontrol eco MIXcontrol 20 MIXcontrol eco MIXcontrol eco MIXcontrol 40 MIXcontrol 20 MIXcontrol eco MIXcontrol 20 MIXcontrol eco MIXcontrol eco 650 Please order control devices MIXcontrol additionally. Continued on next page

652

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers without Heater Control Devices MIXcontrol For MIXdrive Stirring Drives Technical data: Speed range: Stirring power (max.): Power settings: Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): 65 × 50 × 45 mm Weight: Protection class: Power supply : MIXcontrol eco 100 – 1,200 rpm 10 W – Plastic 0.5 kg IP 20 0.7 A MIXcontrol 40 100 – 2,000 rpm 40 W 10-steps Stainless steel MIXcontrol 20 100 – 1,600 rpm 20 W 4-steps Stainless steel 200 × 155 × 38 mm 200 × 155 × 38 mm 1.9 kg IP 20 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz / 1.5 A 1.9 kg IP 20 1 2 2mag MIXcontrol 40 Efficient control unit for 2 × stirrer drives MIXdrive, powerful 40 Watt stirring perfor- mance, speed range 100–2,000 U/min, jerk-free stirring even at low speed, power can be set in 10 levels (10–100%) for high power for large volumes of viscous material and re- duced power for permanent operation without heating e.g. for incubators, digital display, SoftStart, stainless steel housing, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Article 1 Control device 2mag MIXcontrol 40 Order No. 10 18 59040 2mag MIXcontrol 20 Universal control unit, for 1 × MIXdrive, 20 Watt stirring power, speed range 100–1,600 U/min, power can be set in 4 levels (25–100%), otherwise identical with MIXcontrol 40. Article 2 Control decive 2mag MIXcontrol 20 Order No. 10 18 59020 2mag MIXcontrol eco Budget control unit, for 1 × MIXdrive, 10 Watt stirring power, speed range 100–1,200 U/min, SoftStart, easy operation via control knob/speed scale. 3 Article 3 Control device 2mag MIXcontrol eco Order No. 10 18 59010 Accessories for MIXdrive stirring drives 2mag distriBOX 4 / 8 4-/8-fold distributor for synchronous operation of 4/8 × MIXdrive units at one MIXcontrol 20/40 unit, sealed stainless steel housing. Dimensions: distriBOX 4: 48×48×25 mm, distriBOX 8: 48×92×25 mm Article 4 Distribution box 2mag distriBOX 4 Distribution box 2mag distriBOX 8 5 2mag MIXdrive 1 XL / MIXcontrol XL Order No. 10 18 54904 10 18 54908 2mag MIXdrive 1 XL Ultra flat, strong magnetic stirrer, up to 40 liter, up to +100°C ambient temperature, 3 years warranty, Made in Germany. 2mag MIXcontrol XL Powerful control unit for MIXdrive 1 XL, wide speed range 70–2,000 rpm, jerk-free, even and smooth stirring even at slow speeds, incl. mixWATCH, stirring bar monitoring with fully automatic trim of the maximum reachable speed, for reliable and unattended opera- tion, digital display, 4-step power setting, high power setting for viscous liquids and re- duced power setting for long-term operation without warming effect, adjustable SoftStart for different volumes/viscosities, adjustable interval times for automated restart, Quick- Stop against after-run and glass breakage, RS232, 3 years warranty, Made in Germany. Hint: Please order control unit separately! Technical data: Stirring volume: Stirring power (max.): Speed range: Acceleration: Interval: Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Protection category: Operation conditions: Electrical data: MIXdrive 1 XL 1 – 40 liter 20 watts 70 – 2.000 rpm variable, 10/30/60/120 s variable, 0–240 s Stainless steel 225×225×38 mm 4.0 kg IP 66 +5 to +100°C (at 95% humidity) 24 V Article Stirring system 2mag MIXdrive 1 XL Control decive 2mag MIXcontrol XL MIXcontrol XL 20 watts 70 – 2.000 rpm variable, 10/30/60/120 s variable, 0–240 s Stainless steel 200×155×38 mm 1.9 kg IP 20 100-240 V/1,5 A Order No. 10 18 54601 10 18 59060 Continued on next page 4 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 651

653

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers without Heater 2mag mixBATH Stainless steel bath, for MIXdrive 6/15/60, long service life, sturdy, easy to clean, suitable for immersion thermostats (heating/cooling), exact positioning of stirrer with immersion circulators, identification of stirrer position in the bath. Technical data: Inner dimensions (W×D×H): 277 × 537 × 175 mm Outer dimensions (W×D×H): 318 × 600 × 190 mm Weight: Article 1 Stainless steel bath 2mag mixBATH Order No. 10 18 54950 8.0 kg 1 2mag mixCOVER Chemically resistant, transparent cover (polycarbonate) for mixBATH, for minimization of evaporating effects, different cutouts for immersion thermostat - version MIXdrive 6 und 15 available. Technical data: Material: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Article 2mag mixCOVER for MIXdrive 6 2mag mixCOVER for MIXdrive 15 Polycarbonate 315 × 575 × 8 mm 6.3 kg Order No. 10 18 54806 10 18 54815 2mag mixBATH PC Water bath made of polycarbonate, durable up to +50°C, robust, easy to clean, suitable for MIXdrive 1/6/15/60 as well as MIXdrive 1 XS/1 eco, fitting for immersion thermostats (heating/cooling), easy to clean, exact positioning of the stirrer in the case of use the stirrer under the bath. Technical data: Inner dimensions (W×D×H): 280 × 540 × 178 mm Outer dimensions (W×D×H): 300 × 560 × 198 mm Weight: Article 2 2mag mixBATH PC Order No. 10 18 54085 8.3 kg WWJRM004 Single Point Stirring System With External Control for High Vis- cous Media And Capacity Up To 1.000 Liters, 2mag 4 3 MAXcontrol – FABdrive 1–1000 liters MAXdrive 1 – 250 liters Technical data: Stirring volume/ stirring point: Stirring power (max.): 60 W Speed range: Acceleration: Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): 260×260×68 mm 200×175×51 mm 180×180×75 mm 200×175×51 mm Weight: Protection class: Operating voltage: 100 – 1,200 rpm 100 – 1,200 rpm 100 – 990 rpm variable, 20 – 99 s variable, 20 – 99 s variable, 20 – 99 s variable, 20 – 99 s Stainless steel 4.8 kg 2.0 kg IP 20 IP 65 100 – 240 V/1.5 A 24 V 2.0 kg IP 20 100 – 240 V/1.5 A 100 W 100 – 990 rpm FABcontrol – 9.8 kg IP 65 24 V Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel 60 W 100 W 2mag MAXdrive Very powerful magnetic stirrer, large surface, max. capacity 250 liters, very powerful mag- netic coupling, for highly viscous media, stirring over distances, for thick-bottomed ves- sels / double shell vessels, ideal for integration into procedural plants, maintenance-free drive, speed range 100–1,200 rpm, sealed stainless steel housing, IP65, very robust de- sign, easy to clean, long service life, customized dimensions available on request, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Article 3 Single point stirring system 2mag MAXdrive Order No. 10 18 55001 Necessary accessories: 2mag MAXcontrol Efficient control unit for MAXdrive, powerful 60 Watt stirring performance, speed range 100–1,200 rpm, variable SoftStart for different volumes/viscosities, digital display, Quick- Stop for protection against overtravel and glass breakage, stainless steel housing, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Article 4 Control unit 2mag MAXcontrol Order No. 10 18 59440 Continued on next page 1 2 co d e b e w 652

654

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers without Heater 2mag FABdrive Technically identical with MAXcontrol, but with a more powerful motor/magnet coupling, max. capacity 1,000 liters, housing with small footprint for integration. Article Single point stirring system 2mag FABdrive Order No. 10 18 55101 Necessary accessories: 2mag FABcontrol Technically identical with MAXcontrol, but 100 Watt, speed range 80–990 U/min, indica- tion of actual speed, acoustic alarm when speed falls below limit. Article Control unit 2mag FABcontrol Please order control devices always separately! Order No. 10 18 59442 Single Point Stirring System With External Control For High Vis- cous Media And Capacity Up To 150 Liters, 2mag co d e b e w WWJRM005 maxMIX 1 – 150 liters Technical data: Stirring volume/ stirring point: Stirring power (max.): 40 W Stirring power, levels: 4 levels (5/10/15/20 W) Speed range: 100 – 1,200 rpm Acceleration, levels: variable, 20 – 99 s Interval, levels: – Material housing: Stainless steel Dimensions (W×D×H) mm: 265 × 320 × 68 Weight: Protection class: Operating voltage: MIX 1 XL 500 ml – 40 liters 20 W – 70 – 2,000 rpm adjustable, 20/30/60/120 s adjustable, 0 – 240 s Stainless steel 225 × 280 × 35 4.0 kg IP 64 10.0 kg IP 64 100 – 240 V/50 – 60 Hz/1.5 A 100 – 240 V/50 – 60 Hz/1.5 A 2mag maxMIX Powerful magnetic stirrer, large surface, max. capacity 150 liters, powerful magnetic cou- pling, for highly viscous media, stirring over distances, for thick-bottomed vessels / dou- ble shell vessels, maintenance-free drive, speed range 100 - 1,200 rpm, sealed stainless steel housing, IP64, robust design, easy to clean, integrated 40 Watt control, variable SoftStart for different volumes/viscosities (20–99 s.), digital display, QuickStop for protec- tion against overtravel and glass breakage, stainless steel housing for a long service life, easy to clean, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Article 1 Single point stirring system 2mag maxMIX Order No. 10 18 53501 2mag MIX 1 XL Technically identical with maxMIX but ultra-flat, max. capacity 40 liters, 70 – 2,000 rpm, integrated 20 Watt control, incl. mixWATCH, stirrer bar monitoring function with automat- ic adjustment of the maximum attainable speed for reliable unsupervised stirrer operation, digital display, 4 levels for setting high power for large volumes of viscous material and reduced power for permanent operation without heating, variable SoftStart for different volumes/viscosities, adjustable intervals for re-start, QuickStop for protection against overtravel and glass breakage, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Article 2 Single point stirring system 2mag MIX 1 XL Order No. 10 18 53201 1 2 3 3 Accessory for magnetic stirrer FABdrive, maxMIX and MAXdrive Stainless steel Frame for easy and fast enlargement of surface area and loading capacity of magnetic stirrer series FABdrive, maxMIX and MAXdrive, solid welded construction, easy to clean due to the enclosed construction, high chemical resistance, surface area 500 × 500 mm, loading capacity 1,000 kg. Technical data: Material: Dimensions (W×D×H): 500 × 500 × 70 mm Weight: Article 2mag fabFRAME 2mag maxFRAME co d e fits FABdrive MAXdrive, maxMIX Order No. 10 18 58600 10 18 54850 Continued on next page 9.5 kg b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 653

655

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWJRM006 5 654 Magnetic Stirrers without Heater 2mag – stirring bar SATELLITE 2mag – stirring bar SATELLITE 70 Extremely strong, abrasion-free and wear-free magnetic stirring bar, bearing on a tri- pod-construction, especially for the use in stainless steel vessels and in the case of media containing abrasive particles, e.g. sand or sediments, no direct contact between stirring bar and reaction vessel, therefore steady firm, wear-free, chemical resistance comparable to PTFE, material FDA-conform, recommended magnetic stirrers: 2mag MIX 1 XL and MIXdrive 1 XL. 2mag – stirring bar SATELLITE 140 Identical to SATELLITE 70, but for larger volumes/vessels, recommended magnetic stir- rers: 2mag maxMIX, MAXdrive, FABdrive. Technical data: Shape: Material (cover): Number of bars: Dimension bar (Ø×L): Dimensions tripod: Weight: Article 1 Stirring Bar SATELLITE 70 2 Stirring Bar SATELLITE 140 SATELLITE 140 round, tripod ZEDEX 1 32 × 140 mm Ø 227 mm 0.46 kg SATELLITE 70 round, tripod ZEDEX 2 13 × 70 mm Ø 99 mm 0.15 kg Order No. 10 18 54470 10 18 54490 2mag – Stirring Bar Remover 2mag – Stirring Bar Remover PTFE PTFE-coated flexible stirring bar remover with extremely strong permanent magnet, 70 cm length, chemical resistance also in aggressive media, ideal for fast removal of heavy and big magnetic stirring bars with a weight up to 400 g. 2mag – Stirring Bar Remover XL Extremely strong stirring bar remover with an integrated high energy magnet, for reliable inserting and removing of strong and heavy magnetic stirring bars up to 1 kg, simple handling due to a special stripping mechanism, 100cm length for deep reaction vessels, stainless steel, solid, easy to clean, high chemical resistance. Technical data: Material: Dimensions (Ø×L): Weight: Article 3 2mag – stirring bar remover PTFE 4 2mag – stirring bar remover XL XL Stainless steel 28×1000 mm 1.8 kg PTFE PTFE 15×700 mm 0.5 kg Order No. 10 18 54507 10 18 54510 Stirring Systems For Cell And Tissue Cultures, 2mag 2mag bioMIXdrive Magnetic stirrer with 1/2/3/4 positions, for gentle mixing of cell suspensions and culture broths as well as for viscous cultures, maintenance-free, large surface, 100% jerk-free, speed 5 – 250 rpm, sealed stainless steel housing, water, dust, and germ-tight, IP 68, submergible, easy to clean, robust structure, flat design, suitable for culture bottles with suspended rotating or oscillating stirrer bar systems, individual sizes available on request, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Technical data: Stirring volume: Speed range: Stirring power/stirring point: 6 W Material housing: Adm. operating temp.: 5 – 5,000 ml 5 – 250 rpm Stainless steel -10 bis +50°C (at 100% humidity), +50°C in water immersed IP 68 Stirring places W × D × H Protection class: Model 5 bioMIXdrive 1 bioMIXdrive 2 6 bioMIXdrive 3 bioMIXdrive 4 1 2 3 4 mm 180×180×38 130×270×38 130×410×38 270×270×38 Please order control devices always additionally! 7 Wght kg 2.5 2.9 4.1 5.6 Order No. 10 18 58001 10 18 58002 10 18 58003 10 18 58004 Continued on next page

656

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers without Heater Control devices Technical data: Speed range : Stirring capacity (max.): Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): 200 × 155 × 38 mm 215 × 120 × 57 mm 200 × 155 × 38 mm Weight: Protection class: Operating voltage: bioMIXcontrol S 5 – 250 rpm 4 – 40 W (10 steps) Stainless steel bioMIXcontrol 5 – 250 rpm 4 – 40 W (10 steps) Stainless steel 1.9 kg IP 20 100 – 240 V/50 – 60 Hz/1.5 A 1.9 kg IP 20 bioMIXcontrol 4MS 5 – 250 rpm 6 W (automatic) Stainless steel 1.9 kg IP 20 2mag bioMIXcontrol Controller for 1 × bioMIXdrive 1/2/3/4, speed range 5 – 250 rpm, 10 levels for setting high power for large volumes of viscous material and reduced power for permanent operation without heating, e.g. in CO2 incubators, digital display, SoftStart, stainless steel housing, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. 6 Article 7 Control device 2mag bioMIXcontrol Order No. 10 18 59840 2mag bioMIXcontrol S Technically identical with bioMixcontrol S, but with stackable housing Article 8 Control device 2mag bioMIXcontrol S Order No. 10 18 59850 2mag bioMIXcontrol MS4 Technically identical with bioMixcontrol S, but for 4 × bioMIXdrive 1, individual and inde- pendent setting of speed and ON/OFF function for each stirrer drive, synchronous oper- ation of all drives at the push of a button. 8 Article 9 Control device 2mag bioMIXcontrol 4MS Order No. 10 18 59864 9 co d e b e w WWJRM007 Cell Culture Stirrer With Integrated Control, 2mag Budget magnetic stirrer for gentle mixing of cell suspensions and culture broths as well as for viscous cultures, maintenance-free, large surface, small footprint, 100% jerk-free, speed range 5-250 rpm, 10 levels for setting high power for large volumes of viscous material and reduced power for permanent operation without heating, digital display, SoftStart, sealed stainless steel housing, germ-tight, IP 64, easy to clean, robust structure, flat design, suitable for culture bottles with suspended rotating or oscillating stirrer bar systems, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Note: For use in incubators, we recommend the units of the bioMIXdrive series for their lower heat dissipation. bioMIX 1 1 – 5.000 ml 5 – 250 U/min Technical data: Stirring volume: Speed range: Stirring power (max.): 6 W (10 – 100%, einstellbar) Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): 188 × 230 × 38 mm Weight: Protection class: Stainless steel 3.3 kg IP 64 Article Magnetic stirrer 2mag bioMIX 1 Order No. 10 18 58501 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 655

657

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers co d e b e w WWJRM011 Magnetic Stirrers without Heater MIXdrive MTP Magnetic Stirrers for Microtiter Plates, 2mag MIXdrive MTP Ultra flat, wear-free magnetic stirrer with 6/12/24/96 stirring positions, external steering unit, fully encapsulated and hermetically sealed stainless steel housing, IP68, water-, dust- and germproof, extremely robust construction and performance, easy to clean and maximum resistance, submersible in water- resp. oil baths up to +50°C. Suitable for the use in CO2 incubators and ovens, removable centering pins, suitable for integration into robots, individual dimensions and high temperature versions up to +200°C on request. Please order control unit separately. Technical data: Stirring power (max.): Material housing: Permitted operation conditions: Operating voltage (max.): Dimensions (W×D×H): Protection category: Weight (gross): 10 W stainless steel -10°C up to +50°C in air, +50°C in water 48 VDC 140 × 102 × 26 mm IP68 approx. 1.3 kg Type 6 MTP 12 MTP 24 MTP 96 MTP Stirring places 6 12 24 96 Distance between stirring places mm 39 26 19 9 Stirring volumen per stirring point ml 20 7 3.5 0.5 Order No. 10 18 54306 10 18 54312 10 18 54324 10 18 54396 Type MIXcontrol eco MIXcontrol MTP MIXcontrol MTP RS232 co d e b e w WWJRM012 1 MIXcontrol – Control units for stirring drive MIXdrive MTP MIXcontrol eco Price-optimized control unit, 100 – 1200 rpm, with rotary knob for speed setting and ON/OFF MIXcontrol MTP Stainless steel housing, digital speed indication, 100 – 2,000 rpm, 4-level power setting MIXcontrol MTP RS232 with RS232 interface Speed rpm 100–1200 100–2000 100–2000 Power rating W 10 10 (4-step) 10 (4-step) Dimensions mm 65×50×45 200×155×38 200×155×38 Weight kg 0.5 1.9 1.9 Order No. 10 18 59010 10 18 59025 10 18 59026 Magnetic stirrer atexMIXdrive, 2mag atexMIXdrive Explosion protected with ATEX certificate 1 stirring position, 100% maintenance-free and wear-free by inductive 2mag-Magnet- ic-Drive concept for powerful mixing of solutions, jerk-free stirring even at low speeds. Fully encapsulated and hermetically sealed stainless steel housing, IP68, water-, dust- and germproof. Extremely robust construction and performance, easy to clean and max- imum resistance. Submersible in water- resp. oil baths, suitable for the use in CO2-incu- bators and ovens, temperate range up to +40°C, certified according to ATEX II 2G Ex mb IIC T4 Gb. Please order control unit separately. Technical data: Operation temperature: Material housing: Protection category: -10°C up to +40°C at 100% r.h., +40°C in water stainless steel IP 68 Type 2 1 atexMIXdrive (zone 1) Stirring volume l 0.1 – 10 Weight Dimensions mm kg 180×180×38 3.5 Order No. 10 18 54901 Control units for stirring drive atexMIXdrive Type atexMIXcontrol (zone 1) 2 atexMIXcontrol cleanroom (zone 2) Dimensions mm 360×460×200 210×55×30 Weight kg 18.0 4.5 Order No. 10 18 59920 10 18 59930 656

658

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers without Heater Magnetic Stirrer, IDL MS-12B magnetic stirrer without heater Incl. adapter, 2× non-slip top element (1× white, 1× black) and one magnetic stir bar • Dimensions W × H × D: 130 × 130 × 65 mm • Diameter: 120 mm • Infinitely adjustable • 150 to 2,500 rotations min-1 / 5 Watt • for stirring volumes up of to 1 liter • for magnetic stir bars of max. 30 × 8 mm • max. load capacity 15 kg • Weight 0.6 kg Article Magnetic stirrer MS-12B without heater Order No. 10 00 33115 Magnetic Stirrer RSM-Eco, Phoenix Instrument Customized magnetic stirrer for liquid mixing, suitable for chemical analysis, biology rea- gent mixing, regular laboratory experiments and liquid handling up to 1,5 l volume. • Powerful magnet • Adjustable speed between 300 to 2000 rpm • Chemical resistance surface • Maintenance-free brushless DC-motor • Ultrasilence, vibration-free operation • Shaft included to fit with a PH sensor or sensors for other purposes • 2 years warranty Technical data: Voltage: Power: Max. stirring quantity: Stirring plate: Stirring bar: Material plate: Speed: Speed adjustment: Dimensions: Protection class: Weight: Article Magnetic stirrer RSM-Eco 100 – 240 V 7.2 W 1.5 l H2O Ø 120 mm max. 40 mm ABS 300 – 2000 rpm analog 150 × 145 × 50 mm IP 21 0,3 kg Order No. 10 13 79030 Magnetic Stirrer, Phoenix Instrument • compact construction • sealed housing (IP42) • brushless motor • holder for rod • 2 years warranty Technical data: Voltage: Max. stirring quantity (H₂O): 3 l Stirring bar: Stirring speed: Speed accuracy: Plate size: Dimensions (W×D×H): Protecion class: Weight: 100–240 V max. 50 mm 200 to 1500 rpm 10 rpm Ø 135 mm, plastic 155 × 215 × 75 mm IP 42 0.9 kg co d e b e w WW7R3320 co d e b e w WWSB5032 co d e b e w WWSB5018 1 Article 1 Magnetic stirrer RSM-10A, display analog, scale 2 Magnetic stirrer RSM-10B, display analog, LED • LED-display for precise control of the speed • digital speed regulation Order No. 10 13 74110 10 13 74111 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 657

659

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers co d e b e w WWW4U108 co d e b e w WWJRM009 1 2 658 Magnetic Stirrers without Heater High Volume Magnetic Stirrer MSL 50, LAT The digital magnetic stirrer ensures continuous operation at low or high speed for volumes of up to 50 litres. Designed to meet the highest requirements with its sophisticated pro- gramming options and premium safety. Technical data: User interface: Motor: Plate material: Stirring volume (H2O): Stirring speed range: Stirring accuracy: Timer: Auto reverse: Lock function: Automatic shut down: Dimensions (W×H×D): Ambient temperature: Weight: Article High volume magnetic stirrer MSL 50 digital brushless motor stainless steel up to 50 l 20 – 1000 rpm 5 rpm yes yes yes after 10 sec. 354 × 77 × 369 mm 5°C to 40°C 4 kg Order No. 10 20 15000 Magnetic Stirrers with Heater STIRRING HOTPLATE, 2mag STIRRING HOTPLATE Stirring – Motor-less, 100% wear-free magnetic stirrer, powerful, wide speed range from 100 – 2,000 rpm, 100% synchronous rotation, power setting (4-level) for high performance when stirring large and viscous volumes and reduced power for non-heated permanent operation, digital display, SoftStart. Heating – Heating plate, resistant aluminium alloy, PTFE coated, long useful life, easy to clean, integrated electrical heater, fast heat-up, even temperature distribution, maximum heating temperature +200 °C, independent overtemperature protection. Separate control unit heatMIXcontrol, operation of magnetic stirrer and heater, inde- pendently settable overtemperature limiter, ideal for unsupervised operation e.g. over- night, stainless steel housing, compact, small footprint, connection for external P100 probe, RS232 interface. Technical data: Stirring positions: Stirring positions distance: Stirring volume/stirring point: 1 – 1,500 ml Speed range, stirrer: Stirring power: Material heating plate: Material frame: Temperature range: Over-temperature protection: irreversible Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Protection category: Electrical data: stainless steel +40 to +200°C irreversible 250 × 430 × 75 mm approx. 13 kg IP 20 230 V / 1,200 W STIRRING-HOTPLATE 15 15 65 mm 1 - 1,000 ml 100 – 2,000 rpm 250 × 430 × 75 mm approx. 13 kg IP 20 230 V / 1,200 W 40 W (adustable in 4 steps, 25/50/75/100%) aluminium alloy, PTFE-coated STIRRING-HOTPLATE 6 6 130 mm 100 – 2,000 rpm stainless steel +40 to +200°C Article 2mag STIRRING HOTPLATE 6 Stirring-heating plate combination with 6 stirring positions, universally applicable for miscellaneous vessel sizes and shapes, stirring point dis- tance 130 mm, suitable for 6 × 1,000 ml Erlenmeyer flasks. 1 2mag STIRRING HOTPLATE 15 Stirring-heating plate combination with 15 stirring positions, universally applicable for miscellaneous vessel sizes and shapes, stirring point dis- tance 65 mm, suitable for 15 × 250 ml beaker glasses (tall form) Order No. 10 18 56306 10 18 56315 Accessories External probe sensor Pt100 External probe sensor Pt100 for control unit heatMIXcontrol, temperature sensor for direct controlling of the probe temperature. Techincal data: Pt100 Sensor: Material: Stainless steel Dimensions (D×L): Ø 3 × 150 mm Cable lenght: Weight: 1 m approx. 0.1 kg Continued on next page

660

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers with Heater Article 2 External probe sensor Pt100 Order No. 10 18 56910 Stand Stand for vertical positioning of the control unit heatMIXcontrol, incl. assembling material. Technical data: Material: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Article 3 Stand for heatMIXcontrol Stainless steel 225 × 132 × 150 mm approx. 1.0 kg Order No. 10 18 56950 STIRRING DRYBATH, 2mag STIRRING DRYBATH Stirring – Motor-less, 100% wear-free magnetic stirrer, powerful, wide speed range from 100 – 2,000 rpm, 100% synchronous rotation, power setting (4-level) for high performance when stirring large and viscous volumes and reduced power for non-heated permanent operation, digital display, SoftStart. Heating – Solid, one-piece heating block, resistant aluminium alloy, PTFE coated, long useful life, easy to clean, integrated electrical heater, fast heat-up, even temperature dis- tribution, maximum heating temperature +200 °C, smallest possible temperature gradient in the sample vessels, low-loss energy transfer on all sides, insulated stainless steel frame, low-energy and time-saving heat-up, even temperature distribution, independent over- temperature protection. Separate control unit heatMIXcontrol, operation of magnetic stirrer and heater, inde- pendently settable overtemperature limiter, ideal for unsupervised operation e.g. over- night, stainless steel housing, compact, small footprint, connection for external P100 probe, RS232 interface. Technical data: Stirring positions: Stirring positions distance: Stirring volume: Speed range: Stirring power: Bore holes (Ø×T): Material heating block: Material frame: Temperature: Over-temperature protection: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Protection category: Electrical data: stainless steel +20 to +200°C irreversible 335 × 515 × 150 mm approx. 35.0 kg IP 20 230 Volt / 1.200 Watt stainless steel +20 to +200°C irreversible 280 × 430 × 120 mm approx. 20.0 kg IP 20 230 Volt / 1.200 Watt 15 65 mm 150 ml 100 – 2,000 rpm 15 84 mm 400 ml 100 – 2,000 rpm 71 × 78 mm aluminium alloy, PTFE-coated 40 W (adjustable in 4 steps, 25/50/75/100%) 57.5 × 48 mm Article 2mag STIRRING DRYBATH 15-100 Stirring-heating block combination with 15 stirring positions, 15 bore holes, Ø 57.5 mm, depth 48 mm, distance 65 mm, suitable for 100 ml lab-flasks and for 150 ml beaker glasses 4 2mag STIRRING DRYBATH 15-250 Stirring-heating block combination with 15 stirring positions, 15 bore holes, Ø 71.5 mm, depth 78 mm, distance 84 mm, suitable for 250 ml lab-flasks and for 400 ml beaker glasses Order No. 10 18 56310 10 18 56325 Accessories External probe sensor Pt100 External probe sensor Pt100 for control unit heatMIXcontrol, temperature sensor for direct controlling of the probe temperature. Techincal data: Pt100 Sensor: Material: Stainless steel Dimensions (D×L): Ø 5 × 90 mm Cable lenght: Weight: Article 5 External probe sensor Pt100 1 m approx. 0.1 kg Order No. 10 18 56910 3 co d e b e w WWJRM010 4 5 6 Stand Stand for vertical positioning of the control unit heatMIXcontrol, incl. assembling material. Technical data: Material: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Article 6 Stand for heatMIXcontrol Stainless steel 225 × 132 × 150 mm approx. 1.0 kg Order No. 10 18 56950 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 659

661

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers co d e b e w WW7R3279 co d e b e w WW7R3353 Magnetic Stirrers with Heater Heated Magnetic Stirrer, IDL Magnetic stirrer with heating plate With a highly resistant, ceramic coated heating plate for exceptional chemical resistance, especially against acids and alkalies. The robust aluminium die cast housing is ideal for daily laboratory use. Heavy-duty, electronically controlled motor can be used for both short and long-term tests. Technical data External (W × D × H): Stirring and heating plate: Stirring capacity: Temperature range: Heating power: Speed range: Power supply: 205 × 260 × 110 mm 190 × 190 mm (stainless steel with ceramic coating) max. 10 liters 5°C over RT to 420°C 500 W 60 to 1500 min-1 230 V, 50/60 Hz Article Magnetic stirrer Order No. 51 00 01003 Magnetic Stirrer with Round Heating Plate, Type 2002 LED, IDL Magnetic stirrer in an attractive modern-style casing. • With LED displays for target value and actual value indication of temperature and speed; height of each LED indication 13 mm • Casing made of aluminium casting • With large setting buttons for heater and stirrer • Thanks to the design of the heating plate, penetration of liquids into the interior of the magnetic stirrer is mostly prevented in case of overcooking or toppling • The DC motor has no collector and is maintenance-free • The ceramic coating of the aluminium heater plate allows for excellent heat transfer and protects the heating plate • The integrated PID regulation programme in connection with the Pt1000 sensor provides for optimum temperature control accuracy and stirring speed • The soft motor start-up (even if higher speeds are preselected) prevents the magnetic stirring staff from jumping out Scope of delivery Delivery COMPLETE with magnetic stirring staff and temperature sensor Pt1000. Comes without tripod parts. Technical data: Diameter heating plate: Heating power: Temperature deviation with the use of the Pt1000: Max. stirring volume: Speed range adjustable: Heating temperature range: Warning LED indicator: Dimensions (W×D×H): Voltage: Weight: Protection class: 5 litres from 50 to 1500 rpm from ambient temperature to 310°C when surface is getting warmer than 50°C 150 × 250 × 85 mm 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz 2.5 kg IP 42 135 mm 600 W ±1°C Article Magnetic stirrer with heating plate, type 2002 LED Order No. 10 00 02002 Accessories Article Frame rod with socket and clamp for mounting the temperature sensor Order No. 10 00 02010 Magnetic Stirrer with Square Heating Plate, Type 2005 LED, IDL Magnetic stirrer with modern control panel casing and large heating plate • With LED displays for target value and actual value indication of temperature and speed; height of each LED indication 13 mm • Casing made of aluminium casting • The integrated PID regulation programme in connection with the Pt1000 sensor provides for optimum temperature control accuracy and stirring speed • With large setting buttons for heater and stirrer • Thanks to the design of the heating plate, penetration of liquids into the interior of the magnetic stirrer is mostly prevented in case of overcooking or toppling • Stainless steel heating plate with ceramic coating for high temperatures of up to 550 °C, with excellent mechanical strength 660 Continued on next page

662

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers with Heater • With double overtemperature protection: via the device software, and via the tempera- ture sensor stirring staff from jumping out • The soft motor start-up (even if higher speeds are preselected) prevents the magnetic • Warning light lights up from 50 °C surface temperature • With digital timer, adjustable from 0 to 99 h 59 min Scope of delivery Delivery COMPLETE with magnetic stirring staff and temperature sensor Pt1000. Comes without tripod parts. Technical data: Dimensions heating plate: Material heating plate: Heating power: Temperature deviation: Max. stirring volume: Speed range adjustable: Heating temperature range: Warning LED indicator: Dimensions (W×D×H): Voltage: Protection class: 185 × 185 mm stainless steel, ceramic coated 1000 W up to 100°C ±1°C, >100°C 1% 20 litres from 50 to 1500 rpm from ambient temperature to 310°C when surface is getting warmer than 50°C 220 × 350 × 100 mm 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz IP 42 Article Magnetic stirrer with heating plate, type 2005 LED Order No. 10 00 02005 Accessories Article Frame rod with socket and clamp for mounting the temperature sensor Order No. 10 00 02010 Magnetic Stirrers, Phoenix Instrument Magnetic stirrer RSM-02HSP/HPP • Magnetic stirrer of the latest generation • Stirring capacity 20 Liter • Indicator for hot surface • Stainless steel plate (RSM-02HSP) • Stainless steel plate with porcelain surface (RSM-02HPP) • Heating function, 340°C • Sturdy metal housing (IP 42) • Digital control, backlit display • RS 232 interface • Connector for PT-1000, integrated control function • Automatic deduction of PT-1000 • Comprehensive range of accessories • 2 years warranty Technical data: Voltage: Power: Max. stirring quantity H2O: Max. stirrer bar: Plate Ø: Plate material: RSM-02HSP 200 – 240 V 530 W 20 l 80 mm 135 mm stainless steel 100 – 1500 rpm digital RT +5 – 340 digital yes 160 × 280 × 85 mm IP-42 2.8 Speed: Speed control: Temperature range: Temperature adjustment: RS-232 interface: Dimensions: Protection class: Weight: Article 1 Magnetic stirrer RSM-02 HSP 2 Magnetic stirrer RSM-02 HPP Accessories Article Protective hood for RSM-01/02 without heating plate Protective hood for RSM-01/02 with heating plate PT-1000 for RSM-02 H, -02, -04, -05, -10 Stand kit for PT-1000, RSM-01, -02, -04, -05 Stand kit for RSM-10 Protective hood for RSM10HS/HP Further accessories upon request. RSM-02HPP 200 – 240 V 530 W 20 l 80 mm 135 mm stainless steel with porcelain surface 100 – 1500 rpm digital RT +5 – 340 digital yes 160 × 280 × 85 mm IP-42 2.8 Order No. 10 13 70115 10 13 70116 Order No. 10 13 70340 10 13 70350 10 13 70320 10 13 70330 10 13 74335 10 13 74355 co d e b e w WW7R3354 co d e b e w WWSB5010 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 661

663

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers co d e b e w WWSB5009 1 Magnetic Stirrers with Heater Magnetic Stirrers, Phoenix Instrument Magnetic stirrer RSM-01 • Classical magnetic stirrer in a modern design • Stirring plate stainless steel • Model RSM-01 HS + HP heatable • Robust design (metal housing, IP42) • High stirring power • 2 years warranty Technical data: Model: Voltage: Power consumption: Max. stirring quantity H2O: Max. stirrers: Stirrer plate Ø: Material of stir plate: RSM-01 HS 200 – 240 V 530 W 20 l 80 mm 135 mm stainless steel 50 – 1500 rpm manual RT+5°C – 340°C RPM: Setting of speed: Temperature range: Setting of temperature range: manual Dimensions (W×D×H): Protection class: Weight: Article Magnetic stirrer RSM-01 HS Magnetic stirrer RSM-01 HP 1 Magnetic stirrer RSM-01 S Accessories Article Protective hood for RSM-01/02 without heating plate Protective hood for RSM-01/02 with heating plate Stand kit for PT-1000, RSM-01, -02, -04, -05 Further accessories upon request. Magnetic stirrer with heating, digital • Heating range up to 380°C • Work plate 140 × 140 mm • Maintenance-free, brushless motor • Max stirring volume 5 Liter • Easy-to-read LCD-display • Digital control of speed and temperature • Connector for external temperature sensor Pt-1000 • Built-in temperature control function • 2 years warranty RSM-01 HP 200 – 240 V 530 W 20 l 80 mm 135 mm stainless steeel with porcellain surface 50 – 1500 rpm manual RT+5°C – 340°C manual RSM-01 S 200 – 240 V 30 W 20 l 80 mm 135 mm stainless steel 50 – 1500 rpm manual – – 160×280×85 mm IP42 2.8 kg Order No. 10 13 70112 10 13 73111 10 13 70113 Order No. 10 13 70340 10 13 70350 10 13 70330 160×280×85 mm 160×280×85 mm IP42 2.8 kg IP42 2.8 kg 2 Technical data: Voltage: Power: Max. stirring quantity: Max. stirrer bar: Plate: Plate material: Speed: Speed control: Temperature range: Temperature adjustment: Dimensions: Protection class: Weight: Article 2 Magnetic stirrer RSM-14HP+ 200 – 240 V 530 W 5 l H2O 50 mm 140 × 140 mm aluminium, with porcellain surface 200 – 1500 rpm digital RT +5 – 340°C digital 180 × 320 × 108 mm IP-42 2.2 kg Order No. 10 13 70114 662

664

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Magnetic Stirrers with Heater Magnetic Stirrers, Phoenix Instrument RSM-10HS / RSM-10HP • LED-Display for accurate regulation of speed and temperature • digital controled speed and temperature • indicator for hot surface, even when the stirrer is shut-off • connector for PT-1000 • integrated temperature control function • holder for rod • brushless motor • 2 years warranty Technical data: Voltage: Max. stirring quantity (H₂O): 3 l 200–240 V Stirring bar: Stirring speed: Speed accuracy: Display: Plate size: max. 50 mm 200 to 1500 rpm 10 rpm LED Ø 135 mm Temperature range: RT+5°C to 280°C Temperature accuracy: Control accuracy: Heating power: 1°C ±2°C 500 W Dimensions (W×D×H): 155 × 215 × 100 mm Weight: 1.5 kg Article 1 Magnetic stirrer RSM-10HS Magnetic stirrer RSM-10HP Plate stainless steel porcelain coated Order No. 10 13 74010 10 13 74011 RSM-05H • sturdy full metal housing • backlit digital display or LED • glass ceramic hotplate • selectable safety temperature (RSM-05H) • hot plate warning, even when the stirrer is shut-off (RSM-05H) • connector for PT-1000 (included in scope of delivery) • integrated control function, no contact thermometer necessary • RS232 Interface (RSM-05H) • high stirring volume, up to 20 l with RSM-05H • 2 years warranty Technical data: Voltage: RSM-05H 200–240 V Power: Max. stirring quantity (H2O): 20 l Stirring bar: 1050 W max. 80 mm Plate size: Speed: Temperature range: Safety temperature: Temperature range: RS232: Weight: Article 2 Magnetic stirrer RSM-05H 184 × 184 mm, glass ceramic 100 to 1500 rpm RT+5°C to 550°C 580°C LCD yes 4.4 kg Accessories Article PT-1000 for RSM-02 H, -02, -04, -05, -10 Stand kit for PT-1000, RSM-01, -02, -04, -05 Stand kit for RSM-10 Protective hood for RSM10HS/HP Order No. 10 13 74005 Order No. 10 13 70320 10 13 70330 10 13 74335 10 13 74355 co d e b e w WWSB5019 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 663

665

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers co d e b e w WW1WS017 co d e b e w WW2NY407 1 Magnetic Stirrers with Heater Laboratory Stirrers with Heating and Controlling, SI Analytics Using the SLR laboratory stirrer with heating system, the process of mixing liquids can be selected from careful to intense, and the device can also be used for speedy heating up or controlled temperature adaptation. All functions can be viewed and monitored on the large, clear LCD display. Stirrer and heater can be separately operated by means of hand rotary knobs. The stirrer speed ranges from 100 to 1100 min-1 and can be set in steps of 10 min-1. The heating power can be set in 24 steps and reaches an average heating output of 0.9 kW at step 24. Connecting a Pt 1000 temperature sensor enables the temperature to be controlled between 25°C and 200°C at an accuracy level of ±2° to 5°C as a function of liquid volume, heat capacity and ambient temperature. The display informs the user at intervals of 5 s about the actual and the set temperature. Technical data: Speed: Max. stirring volume: Heater power: Heated zones: Hot plate area: Max. hot plate temperature: Temperature sensor connector: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Article Laboratory stirrer SLR 115 V Laboratory stirrer SLR 230 V 100 to 1100 min-1 10 l water 0.9 kW dia. 155 mm 235 × 235 mm approx. 550°C yes, Pt 1000 370 × 85 × 240 mm approx. 3.8 kg Order No. 51 27 16279 51 27 16373 neoMag® IR – Magnetic Stirrer with Infrared Heating Plate, neoLab® The neoMag® IR – magnetic stirrer with infrared heating plate is ideal for complex heating and mixing applications. Compared to conventional steel heating plates, the IR heating plate has a more efficient heating behaviour with less heat loss and is thus more ecolog- ical. Bright and clear LCD digital display and setting for the working temperature, stirring speed, working time, and safety temperature. The sturdy steel housing ensures that the stirrer sits safely on the bench. Properties: • Advanced microprocessor controlling system guarantees the reliability and temperature • Memory function for stirring speed and setting temperature, convenient for experiments • Direct connection for Pt100 temperature sensor for convenient solution temperature • Sealed outer shell and isolated critical parts design for enhanced longevity even in a harsh laboratory environment • When the temperature of the top plate is above 60, hot-top indicator lights up stability control with fixed conditions Article 1 neoMag® IR 2 neoLabLine dry bath neoLabLine alloy seeds for dry bath, 2 kg infrared hot plate stirrer, 450°C, 1500 rpm for neoMag® IR magnetic stirrer, aluminium with PTFE insulation jacket for filling with aluminium heating pearls Order No. 10 01 06110 10 01 06111 10 01 06112 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. 2 co d e b e w 664

666

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers Multiple Stirrers Multiple Stirrers with Integrated Control, 2mag co d e b e w WWJRM001 MIX 6 6 1 – 3.000 ml Technical data: Stirring points: Stirring point distance: 130 mm Stirring volume/ stirring point: Speed range: Stirring power (max.): Power settings: Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): 245 × 425 × 38 mm Weight: Protection class: Operating voltage: 100 – 2000 rpm 20 W 4-steps (5/10/15/20 W) Stainless steel 9.0 kg IP 65 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz / 1,5 A MIX 15 15 65 mm 1 – 3.000 ml 100 – 2000 rpm 20 W MIX 15 eco 15 65 mm 1 – 1.500 ml 120 – 1200 rpm 10 W – 2mag MIX 15 100% wear-free magnetic stirrer, without motor. 15 positions for 15 × 250 ml cup glasses (tall form), powerful, wide range of speeds from 100-2,000 rpm, 100% synchronized, power can be set in 4 levels for high power for large volumes of viscous material and re- duced power for permanent operation without heating. Digital display, SoftStart,sealed stainless steel housing, easy to clean, robust, long service life, 3 years warranty, made in Germany. Article 1 Multiple magnetic stirrer 2mag MIX 15 Order No. 10 18 53015 2mag MIX 6 Technically identical with MIX 15, but with 6 positions for 6 × 1,000 ml conical flasks, positions spaced at 130 mm. Article 2 Multiple magnetic stirrer 2mag MIX 6 Order No. 10 18 53006 2mag MIX 15 eco Budget option: Technically identical with MIX 15, but without power setting function and reduced power and speed range. Article 3 Multiple magnetic stirrer 2mag MIX 15 eco Order No. 10 18 53115 2mag MIX XL 2mag MIX 12 XL Motorless, 100% wear-free magnetic stirrer with 12 stirring positions, for 12 × 600 ml beaker glasses (tall form), power reserve for 3 liters per position, wide speed range 100- 1,600 rpm, 100% synchronized speed, 4-step power setting, high power setting for vis- cous liquids and reduced power setting for long-term operation without any warming ef- fect, digital display, SoftStart, sealed stainless steel housing, easy to clean, robust and reliable, 3 years warranty, Made in Germany. 2mag MIX 8 XL Identical to MIX 8 XL, but with 8 stirring positions for 8 × 600 ml beaker glasses (high form). 1 2 3 4 Technical data: Stirring points: Stirring point distance: Stirring volume/point: Speed range: Stirring power (max.): Power setting: Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Protection category: Electrical data: MIX 12 XL 12 MIX 8 XL 8 90 mm 1 - 3,000 ml 100 - 1,600 rpm 20 W 4-step (5/10/15/20 W) Stainless steel 185×420×38 mm 7.8 kg IP 65 100–240 volts / 50-60 Hz / 1.5 A 275×420×38 mm 10.2 kg Article 4 Multiposition stirrer 2mag MIX 12 XL 5 Multiposition stirrer 2mag MIX 8 XL co d e b e w Order No. 10 18 53212 10 18 53208 5 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 665

667

Stirring, Shaking Systems Magnetic Stirrers / Stirrers Multiple Stirrers 2mag MIX 4 MS Motorless, 100% wear-free magnetic stirrer with 4 individually and independent con- trolled stirring positions (speed and ON/OFF), for 4 × 2,000 ml Erlenmeyer flasks, pow- er reserve for 3 liter per position, wide speed range 100 – 2,000 rpm, digital display, SoftStart, sealed stainless steel housing, easy to clean, robust and reliable, 3 years war- ranty, Made in Germany. Technical data: Stirring points: Stirring point distance: Stirring volume/point: Speed range: Stirring power (max.): Material housing: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Protection category: Electrical data: 2mag MIX 4 MS 4 140 mm 1 – 3,000 ml 100 – 2,000 rpm 28 W (4×7 W) Stainless steel 245×425×38 mm 9.1 kg IP 65 100–240 volts / 50-60 Hz / 1.5 A Article 1 Multiposition stirrer 2mag MIX 4 MS Order No. 10 18 53404 Multiple Channel Magnetic Stirrers, Phoenix Instrument RSM-03-10 Multiple channel magnetic stirrers RSM-03 • 10-point magnetic stirrer • Heatable, model RMS-03-10KH • Sturdy design (IP42) • Infinitely adjustable speed • Silicon-coated surface • Even distribution of temperature • 2 years warranty Technical data: Model: Voltage (V): Power consumption (W): Number of stirring points: max. stirring quantity (l H2O): Stirrers (max. in mm): Material of stir plate: RSM-03-10KH 200 – 240 490 10 0.4/stirring point 40 Stainless steel with silicone coating 50 – 1100 RPM: manual Setting of speed: RT–120 Temperature range: Setting of temperature range: manual Dimensions (W×D×H mm): Protection class: Weight (kg): 182×552×65 IP42 3.2 Article 2 Multiple magnetic stirrer RSM-03-10KH Multiple magnetic stirrer RSM-03-10K Stirring Rods Stirring Rods, AR-Glas, IDL Stirring rods made of solid glass, round fused ends. RSM-03-10K 200 – 240 20 10 0.4/stirring point 40 Stainless steel with sili- cone coating 50 – 1100 manual – – 182×552×65 IP42 3.2 Order No. 10 13 70311 10 13 70312 Length mm 150 200 250 300 Outer Ø mm 4 5 6 7 Order No. 15 00 01504 15 00 02005 15 00 02506 15 00 03007 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1 co d e b e w WWSB5011 2 co d e b e w WW7R3005 666

668

Stirring, Shaking Systems Stirrers Stirring Rods Stirring Rods, neoLab® Wood stirring bars Wood stirring bars Wood stirring bars 2 Stirring rods made of glass Length mm 150 200 250 300 1 Stirring rods made of wood, for once-only use Article Length mm 250 200 150 Ø mm 6 5 4 Order No. 37 01 17050 37 01 17049 37 01 17048 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Ø mm 4 5 6 7 Order No. 10 01 74000 10 01 74001 10 01 74002 10 01 74003 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w WW2NY151 1 2 Stirrers Stirrers, IDL Laboratory stirrers for all stirring tasks up to the “medium viscosity” range. Handy size, slender design and minimal weight, insertable stirring rods and universal use of stirring tools by means of a precision chuck are all outstanding features of these units. co d e b e w WW7R3185 Stirrer for stirring capacities up to 50 l Electronically controlled, sturdy laboratory stirrer, 18 Ncm, stirring rod non-insertable. Technical Data RE 18: Drive: Speed range: Power output: Torque across the total speed range: Chuck range: Viscosity of medium: Mains voltage: Diameter of arm: Weight: Dimensions (W×D×H): Permanently actuated DC drive 110 to 2000 rpm (RE18) 85 W 18 Ncm (RE18) 0.5 to 10.5 mm RE18 low viscosity medium (runny) 200 V to 250 V, 50/60 Hz 13 mm approx 2.1 kg 65 × 108 × 100 mm (plus 55 mm for chuck) +5°C to +40°C max. 80% relative humidity 100% Permissible ambient temperature: Permissible operating time: Article Stirrer RE 18 Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 51 00 23010 Stirrers for Laboratories, Phoenix Instrument To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 667 3 RSO-20A Analog stirrers RSO-20A / RSO-40A • digital speed readout • stepless speed adjustment • very quiet operation • stick-through stirring shaft • overload protection • 2 years warranty Technical data: Max. stirring quantity (H2O): 20 l Motor rating input: Speed range: Speed display: Max. viscosity: Max. Torgue: Ø Chuck range: Push through shaft: Torgue display: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: RS232: Voltage: 70 W 50 to 2200 rmp, infinitely LED 10,000 mPas 30 Ncm 0.5 to 10 mm yes no 83 × 220 × 186 mm 2.5 kg no 100-240 V Article Stirrer RSO-20A Stirrer RSO-40A co d e b e w RSO-40A 40 l 130 W 50 to 2200 rmp, infinitely LED 50,000 mPas 60 Ncm 0.5 to 10 mm yes no 83 × 220 × 186 mm 3.5 kg no 100-240 V Order No. 10 13 75520 10 13 75540 Continued on next page co d e b e w WWSB5017 3

669

Stirring, Shaking Systems Stirrers 1 RSO-20D Stirrers Digital stirrers RSO-20D / RSO-40D • digital stirrer with LCD-display • micro-processor controled speed accuracy • smooth start procedure • very quiet operation • overload protection • stick-through stirring shaft • selectable display of speed/torgue • RS232 Interface • 2 years warranty Technical data: Max. stirring quantity (H20):20 l Leistungsaufnahme: Speed range: Speed accuracy: Speed display: Max. viscosity: Max. torgue: Ø chuck range: Push through shaft: Torgue display: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: RS232: Voltage: Article Stirrer RSO-20D Stirrer RSO-40D 70 W 50 to 2200 rpm, infinitely ±3 LCD 10.000 mPas 30 Ncm 0.5 to 10 mm yes yes 83 × 220 × 186 mm 2.5 kg yes 100–240 V Accessories Article 2 Plate stand RSO-E 07 plate stand with holding clamp and limiter Propeller stirrer RSO-E 10 with 4 blades, stirrer diameter 50 mm Paddle stirrer RSO-E 11 stirrer diameter 70 mm Propeller stirrer RSO-E 12 with a flexible blade Centrifugal stirrer RSO-E 13 stirrer diameter 90 mm RSO-40D 40 l 130 W 50 to 2200 rpm, infinitely ±3 LCD 50.000 mPas 60 Ncm 0.5 to 10 mm yes yes 83 × 220 × 186 mm 3.5 kg yes 100–240 V Order No. 10 13 75220 10 13 75240 Order No. 10 13 75307 10 13 75310 10 13 75311 10 13 75312 10 13 75313 PLR Compressed Air Laboratory Stirrers With Tachometer, Buddeberg The PLR comporessed air laboratory stirrers with tachometer up to 25 l for use in potentially explosive atmospheres are designed for all kinds of standard mixing tasks. The vane type, air-driven motor offers a high power density and is significantly lighter and smaller than an equivalent electric motor. General specifications: • Operating pressure max. 6 bar • Air consumption 260 l/min at 6 bar • Power output 200 W at 6 bar • Clockwise rotation • ATEX certification in accordance with Directive 2014/34/EU Basic models include: • All-stainless steel housing, grade 1.4305 • Continuously adjustable speed control valve • Analogue tachometer • Support arm Ø 14 mm • Tubing nozzle connector for NW 5 • Output shaft (L x Ø) 26 x 10 mm Technical data: PLR 10 T PLR 11 T PLR 12 T PLR 28 T PLR 13 T ATEX Code II 2G Ex h IIC T4 Gb II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb Viscosity 1000 mPas 50000 mPas 70000 mPas 100000 mPas 150000 mPas Type Volume max. l PLR 10T 3 PLR 11T 20 PLR 12T 25 PLR 28T 25 PLR 13T 25 Idling speed rpm 15000 1800 950 550 80 Torque Nm 0.3 3.5 5.3 10.4 19.8 Order No. 51 14 61010 51 14 61110 51 14 61210 10 14 52810 51 14 61310 All models available as “GA version” featuring exhaust air ducting by means of a separate tubing connector. Connection coupling VK 10 required for the connection to a stirring shaft. 1 2 668

670

Stirring, Shaking Systems Stirrers Stirrers Compressed Air Stirrers, Buddeberg 1 PLR compressed air laboratory stirrers up to 25 l for use in potentially explosive atmospheres PLR compressed air laboratory stirrers are designed for all kinds of standard mixing tasks. The vane type, air-driven motor offers a high power density and is significantly lighter and smaller than an equivalent electric motor. General specifications: • Operating pressure max. 6 bar • Air consumption 260 l/min at 6 bar • Power output 200 W at 6 bar • Clockwise rotation • ATEX certification in accordance with Directive 2014/34/EU Basic models include: • All-stainless steel housing, grade 1.4305 • Continuously adjustable speed control valve • Support arm Ø 14 mm • Tubing nozzle connector • Output shaft (L x Ø) 26 x 10 mm Technical data: PLR 10 PLR 11 PLR 12 PLR 28 PLR 13 Type PLR 10 PLR 11 PLR 12 PLR 28 PLR 13 Vol. max. l 3 20 25 25 25 Viscosity 1000 mPas 50000 mPas 70000 mPas 100000 mPas 150000 mPas Idling speed rpm 15000 1900 1000 580 80 ATEX Code II 2G Ex h IIC T4 Gb II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb Torque Nm 0.3 3.5 5.3 10.4 19.8 Order No. 10 14 52473 10 14 52510 10 14 52602 10 14 52820 10 14 52688 All models available as “GA version” featuring exhaust air ducting by means of a separate tubing connector. Connection coupling VK 10 required for the connection to a stirring shaft. Accesories for compressed air stirrers type PLR Connection couplings VK Fixed-diameter connection for motor and stirring rod. Suitable for use in potentially explo- sive atmospheres. Type 2 VK 10 × 8 VK 10 × 10 for stirrer shaft Ø mm 8 10 Order No. 10 14 57429 10 14 57416 Alternative diameters available on request. Stands Floor stand BS Side length 600 mm, rod Ø 34 mm Wall bracket WS Rod Ø 34 mm, clearance from wall: 200 mm Type 3 BS 1 BS 2 4 WS Specification Floor stand Floor stand Wall bracket Length mm 1000 1500 1000 Order No. 10 14 50868 10 14 50837 10 14 50875 1 2 3 4 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 669

671

Stirring, Shaking Systems Stirrers Stirrers Stirrers, Buddeberg 1 BuddeMix Stirring System This stirring system has been conceived to mix low viscosity fluids as well as highly vis- cous media at slow speeds. Its special design creates inherent dynamic currents to produce perfectly homogeneous mixing results in very little time. Additional components like baffles, bottom bearings, etc. are not needed. Advantages at a glance: • Suitable for low to highly viscous fluids • Stirs media containing solids and fibres without any difficulty • Gentle, low-shear stirring, due to slow stirring speed • Constant product temperature, with no heating effect • Short mixing times as the entire contents of the container are agitated • No air addition, no foaming • No baffles required • Low gear wear due to balanced forces • Minimal power consumption thanks to low speeds and short operation times • Easy cleaning Particularly for potentially explosive atmospheres: • A single stirring zone, near to the container base, ensures easy mixing of settled resi- dues, e.g. in flow-through mixing containers • No baffles required, thus no additional sources of ignition Type Material No. 1 BuddeMix 1 BuddeMix 2 BuddeMix 3 BuddeMix 4 1.14404 1.14404 1.14404 1.14404 Length mm 350 350 550 850 Ø Stirrer mm 60 80 120 150 Ø Shaft mm 10 10 10 10 Order No. 10 14 56001 10 14 56002 10 14 56003 10 14 56004 2 Propeller stirring rotors type PR The 3-blade propellers produce axial flow and reduce shear forces to a minimum, even at high stirring speeds, thanks to their optimised blade design. Recommended for medium to high speed operations. Type PR 2 PR 5 Ø Stirrer mm 55 75 Ø Shaft mm 8 10 Wave length mm 350 550 Order No. 10 14 57001 10 14 57005 All stirring rotors made from stainless steel. Alternative stirrer sizes and/or shaft lengths are available on request. 3 Dissolver stirring rotors type DS Dissolver stirring rotor type DS creates a radial flow with high turbulence. The mixture is drawn from top to bottom. High shear forces are created at the dissolver disk, which provides effective particle reduction. Recommended for medium to high speed opera- tions. Type DS 1 DS 3 DS 6 Ø Stirrer mm 30 50 80 Ø Shaft mm 8 10 10 Wave length mm 350 550 550 Order No. 10 14 57101 10 14 57103 10 14 57106 All stirring rotors made from stainless steel. Alternative stirrer sizes and/or shaft lengths are available on request. 4 Diagonal blade stirring rotors type PSR The 4-blade diagonal blade stirring rotor provides axial flow and creates increasing shear forces at higher stirring speeds. Recommended for medium to high speed operations. Type PSR 1 PSR 3 Ø Stirrer mm 50 100 Ø Shaft mm 8 10 Wave length mm 350 550 Order No. 10 14 57201 10 14 57203 All stirring rotors made from stainless steel. Alternative stirrer sizes and/or shaft lengths are available on request. 1 1 3 4 2 670

672

Stirring, Shaking Systems Stirrers Stirrers Compressed Air Industrial Stirrers, Buddeberg 1 Compressed air floor standing stirrer type BSR 64 Basic models include: • Continuously adjustable speed control valve • Spherical clamping device with support arm Ø 16 mm, length 200 mm • Floor stand with rod (height 1000 mm, width 600 mm) • Bosshead • Tubing clip connector • Silencer • ATEX certification: II 2G Ex h IIC T5 Gb BSR 64/160-A-V W 640 l 200 Type Power rating Volume max. Viscosity approx. mPa/s 20000 Torque Order No. rpm 1600 Nm 4.7 Connection coupling VK 14 required. Idling speed 10 14 54941 BSR 64/65-A-V 640 200 50000 650 9.4 10 14 54958 BSR 64/30-A-V 640 200 100000 300 21 10 14 54965 2 Accessories for compressed air industrial stirrers Connection coupling required to connect motor and stirring shaft. All types made from stainless steel grade 1.4404. Article VK 14 × 10 mm VK 14 × 12 mm VK 14 × 14 mm VK 14 × 20 mm Additional sizes available on request. Order No. 10 14 57058 10 14 56471 10 14 57447 10 14 50790 Stirring rotors for compressed air industrial stirrers Propeller stirring rotor type PR, the 3-blade propellers produce axial flow, and reduce shear forces to a minimum, even at high stirring speeds, thanks to their optimised blade design. Recommended for medium to high speed operations. Model type PR 4 as screw design. Dissolver stirring rotor type DS creates a radial flow with high turbulence. The mixture is drawn from top to bottom. High shear forces are created at the dissolver disk, which provides effective particle reduction. Recommended for medium to high speed opera- tions. BuddeMix stirring systems create inherent dynamic currents to produce perfectly ho- mogeneous mixing results in very little time. This means gentle, low-shear stirring at slow stirring speed. BuddeMix swing-out stirring system SW is specially designed for the use with industri- al drums and containers. Foldable stirrers available for bunghole openings of 2 ″ to 150 mm. Type 3 PR 4 (screw) PR 9 PR 11 4 DS 9 DS 10 5 BuddeMix 6 BuddeMix 7 6 BuddeMix SW 4 Ø Stirrer mm 140 100 150 150 200 170 210 300/44 Ø Shaft mm 10 14 14 14 20 12 14 14 Wave length mm 850 850 1000 1000 1000 550 850 750 Order No. 10 14 51261 10 14 51339 10 14 51353 10 14 51513 10 14 51520 10 14 55290 10 14 55306 10 14 55740 Stirrer seals, shafts see page 333 1 2 4 6 3 3 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 671

673

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WWQJ3068 1 co d e b e w WW2NY334 2 3 672 Vibratory Shakers MixMate®, Eppendorf MixMate is a compact and fascinatingly versatile mixer, which has been developed espe- cially for the quick and controlled mixing of small volumes(5 µl -2 ml) in diverse plate formats and test tubes. The quick and precisely controlled mixing movements (2D mix control) enable homogenous and reproducible mixing of all tube formats with Anti-Spill technology. MixMate is used in almost all application areas in which test tubes, PCR- plates and strips, Deepwell plates and MTPs are used. The integrated vortex-function, with intelligent 2-second lag for ergonomic working, round off the unique profile. • 2DMix-Control: very quick and efficient mixing of small volumes (5 µl -2ml) • 3-in-1 format: mixes plates, test tubes and vortex • Anti-Spill-technology: controlled mixing movements prevent lid sprinkling and spilling • Universal holder enables safe mixing of all MTP-plate formats (up to 96-and 384-Well-for- mat) PCR-plates (skirted, semi-skirted, unskirted) • Tube holders enable controlled mixing of test tubes (0.2 ml to 2.0 ml) and PCR-strips • Pre-programmed direct selection keys: ideally coordinated mixing frequency and dura- tion for each plate type and tube • Vortex-function: touch vortex or continuous vortex for mixing individual tubes • Automatic balance recognition • High stability, even at maximum mixing frequency • User-friendly • IvD-conform Article 1 MixMate®, without tube holders 230 V/50 – 60 Hz (EU) Tube holder 0.5 ml For 24 × 0.5 ml reaction vessels Tube holder 1.5/2.0 ml For 24 × 1.5 ml or 2.0 ml reaction vessels Tube holder 5/15 ml For 8 conical 5/15 ml tubes Tube holder 25/50 ml For 4 conical 30/50 ml tubes Tube holder PCR 96 For 96 × 0.2 ml PCR tubes, PCR strips or 1 × 96-well PCR plate, semi-skirted or unskirted Order No. 10 69 30510 10 69 34121 10 69 34130 10 69 84148 10 69 34156 10 69 34113 Vortex Mixer Genie®, neoLab® Vortex-Genie®, the universal small shaker! • High-speed vortexer • Quick vortexing of problematic samples • Easy to operate • Circular motion, 6 mm orbit • Including rubber plate (inner 2.5 cm Ø) and with 7.6 cm platform • Top pieces easily exchangeable Vortex Genie® 2 Variably adjustable shaking frequency from 600 to 2700 RpM Non-stop function or Press-to-Mix Can be used in cold rooms and incubators Vortex Genie® 2 T As Vortex Genie® 2, but additionally with integrated timer: Press-to-Mix 1-60 sec., oper- ation 1-60 min. or non-stop operation, with automatic stop after end of process. Vortex Genie® 2 Digital As Vortex Genie® 2 T, but additionally with digital control of speed and time. A digital display shows accuracy, reproducibility. Timer function: Press-to-Mix 1-90 sec, operation 1-99 min. or non-stop operation. Dimensions: Weight: Power Supply: 165 × 122 × 165 mm (W × D × H) 4 kg 240 V, 50 Hz Article 2 Vortex Mixer Genie® 2 3 Vortex Mixer Genie® 2 T 4 Vortex Mixer Genie® 2 Digital UpM 600-2700 600-2700 600-2700 Order No. 10 01 70092 10 01 70093 10 01 70094 Continued on next page

674

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Vibratory Shakers Accessories You will need as adapter the shaking plate no. 100170503 for assembling the attach- ments for reaction vessels and microplates. The angle plate order no. 100170512 you will need as adapter for the attachments for test tubes. The elastic bands for shaking of glasses, flasks, bottles or the like are included in delivery of the angle plate. Article Order No. 5 Shaking disk 15 cm Ø, adapter for 100170504/-05 10 01 70503 5 Attachment for 60 test tubes 10 01 70504 6 Attachment for microtitration plates 10 01 70505 7 Attachment for 12 test tubes 9-16 mm Ø 10 01 70506 7 Attachment for 8 test tubes14-29 mm Ø 10 01 70507 7 Attachment for 4 test tubes 29-37 mm Ø 10 01 70508 8 TurboMix® attachment for 12 × 1.5 ml 10 01 70509 9 Alternate standard attachment 10 01 70510 AT Attachment for 4 test tubes 10-17 mm Ø 10 01 70511 AK Recessed platform + 2 elastic bands for glasses, flasks, bottles 10 01 70512 AL Alternate shaking disk 7.5 mm Ø, with rubber disk 10 01 70513 neoVortex, neoLab® neoVortex Vortex mixer with infinitely variable speed from 0 to 2500 rpm or with fixed speed from 2500 rpm. • Press-to-Mix or continuous function • Orbital movement, 4 mm orbit • Specially designed silicone feet and steel base for excellent vibration damping • Sturdy cast casing Technical data: Power output: Power: Ambient temperature: Relative humidity: Voltage: Dimensions (W × H × D): 127 × 130 × 160 mm Weight: Protection class: 10 W 60 W 5 – 40°C max. 80% 200 – 230 W, 50/60 Hz 3.5 kg IP 21 4 6 5 7 AL 9 8 AK AT co d e b e w WW2NY349 Type neoVortex with variable speed neoVortex with fixed speed Speed rpm 0 – 2500 2500 Order No. 10 01 06012 10 01 06013 Accessories Article Spare platform head, Ø 30 mm Support bar Universal holding plate, Ø 100 mm Mount for 48 tubes, Ø 6 mm Mount for 15 tubes, Ø 10 mm Mount for 12 tubes, Ø 12 mm Mount for 8 tubes, Ø 16 mm Mount for 8 tubes, Ø 20 mm Universal attachment for tubes and vials up Order No. with 10 01 96030 10 01 96031 10 01 96032 ...6031/...6032 10 01 96033 ...6031/...6032 10 01 96034 ...6031/...6032 10 01 96035 ...6031/...6032 10 01 96036 ...6031/...6032 10 01 96037 10 01 96038 ...6032 to Ø 99 mm 4 spare suction feet with screws for neo- 10 01 96039 Vortexer ...6012/13 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 673

675

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Vibratory Shakers Ohaus Mini Vortex Mixers, METTLER TOLEDO Sturdy, robust and low-cost • Safe stand, designed for a long service life, robust drive • Choose from digital, analogue, or fixed-speed models • Separate displays for speed and time, all data at a glance (digital models) • Microprocessor-controlled for even mixing (digital models) • Incl. cup and 7.6 cm head (for beakers, flasks,…), stainless steel holder for twelve test tubes (for VXMNPS), with click fastener for easy change of heads. • Ample range of accessory attachments for different tubes Technische Daten: VXMNAL Speed range1): Duty rating: Timer: 1) the maximum speed depends on the accessories used 500 – 2500 U/min 300 – 2500 U/min 2500 U/min intermittent intermittent – – intermittent 1 s – 160 h VXMNDG VXMNFS VXMNPS 500 – 2500 U/min intermittent 1 s – 160 h Article Ohaus mini vortex mixer VXMNAL Analogue Vortex mixer, orbit: 4.9 mm Control: Auto/Off/On, rotary button for speed Ohaus mini vortex mixer VXMNDG Digital Vortex mixer, orbit: 4.9 mm Control: Auto/Standby/On, displays for speed/time, Up/Down adjustment buttons Ohaus mini vortex mixer VXMNFS Fixed-speed Vortex mixer, orbit: 4.9 mm Ohaus mini vortex mixer VXMNPS Digital Vortex mixer with pulse function, orbit: 2.5 mm Control: Auto/Standby/On, displays for speed/time, Up/Down adjustment buttons, pulse button Order No. 10 97 02117 10 97 02124 10 97 02110 10 97 02131 Mini Vortex Mixer Sunlab®, neoLab® Thanks to its compact size, the Sunlab® Mini Vortex Mixer SU1900 does not take up much space in the laboratory. With a shaking frequency of 3000 UpM, it quickly and efficiently mixes samples with a volume of max. 50 ml and a vessel diameter of max. 30 mm. • Small & light-weight (0.55 kg), small footprint • Easy to use • Requires low activation pressure Article Mini Vortex Mixer Order No. 10 01 98900 Vortexmaster Sunlab®, neoLab® With its weight of 4 kg, this heavy Vortexmaster has a firm footing on the worktop, even at high speeds. Holders for reaction vessels (7 × 1.5/2 ml) or micro-titration plates availa- ble as accessories. • With digitally controlled timer and speed • Touch control timed or continuous run • 200 – 3000 rpm • With big LED display • Dimensions: 205 × 155 × 108 mm Article Vortexmaster Microplate holder head Holder head for 7 × 1.5/2 ml reaction vessels Adapter for ...8903 Order No. 10 01 98901 10 01 98902 10 01 98903 10 01 98904 co d e b e w WW2NY358 co d e b e w WW2NY357 674

676

Vibratory Shakers Vortexer, Phoenix Instrument Vortexer RS-VF 10 / RS/VA 10 • Touch or permanent operation • Variable speed from 0-2500 rpm (RS-VA 10) • Anti-slip silicon feet • Various adapters are available for the RS-VA 10 • Sturdy housing • Incl. 1 universal adapter for vessels of max. 30 mm Technical data: Model: Voltage: Power consumption: Shaking movement: Shaking stroke: Speed: Dimensions (W×D×H): Protection class: Weight: Article Vortexer RS-VF 10 1 Vortexer RS-VA 10 RS-VF 10 220 – 230 V 60 W orbital 4 mm 2500 rpm 127 × 160 × 130 mm IP21 3.5 kg Accessories on request. Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WWSB5038 RS-VA 10 220 – 230 V 60 W orbital 4 mm 0 – 2500 rpm 127 × 160 × 130 mm IP21 3.5 kg Order No. 10 13 76010 10 13 76110 1 Thermal Mixers ThermoMixer® C, Eppendorf The Eppendorf ThermoMixer®C combines unique mixing performance with excellent temperature control to consistently guarantee complete, dependable and reproducible test results. Improve your assay results by mixing and incubating samples at the same time. • Excellent mixing performance due to unique 2DMix-Control technology • Prevent condensation and improve temperature homogeneity with the new ThermoTop • Ergonomic design • Eppendorf QuickReleaseTM technology for simple exchange of SmartBlocks • Maximum flexibility due to large selection of exchangeable SmartBlocks • Heating, mixing and cooling in all commercially available tube and plate formats from 5 µl to 50 ml Eppendorf ThermoTop® – The perfect addition Now you can control the temperature of your samples with ease: The new ThermoTop with its unique condens.protect technology reliably prevents condensation formation on the tube lid and wall. The Eppendorf ThermoTop allows for easy, intuitive operation and does not need an additional cable connection. When the ThermoTop is placed on the device, it begins heating immediately. The temperature optimally adapts to the test temperature to ensure that it does not negatively affect the sample. Condensation droplets have no opportunity to form. co d e b e w WWQJ3060 2 Article 2 ThermoMixer® C Base unit without Eppendorf SmartBlock™, 220 V–240 V 3 ThermoTop® with condens.protect® technology SmartExtender, 1,5 ml Order No. 10 69 82015 10 69 83003 10 69 80008 3 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 675

677

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WWQJ3061 1 3 co d e b e w WWQJ3071 Thermal Mixers ThermoMixer® F1.5/FP, Eppendorf These products are perfect for mixing and heating of routine applications. The Eppendorf ThermoMixer® F0.5/F1.5/F2.0 and FP have one fixed holder each for 0.5/1.5/2.0 ml ves- sels and plates. Use the optional heated lid Eppendorf ThermoTop to reliably prevent the formation of condensate in small vessels. Properties and benefits of the Eppendorf ThermoMixer F • Heating and mixing in 0.5/1.5/2.0 ml reaction vessels (F0.5/F1.5/F2.0) or plates (FP) • Up to 1,500 rpm (F1.5/F2.0) or 2,000 rpm (F0.5/FP) for efficient sample mixing • Excellent mixing performance thanks to the unique 2DMix-Control technology • Compatible with Eppendorf ThermoTop (condens.protect®) for sample handling without condensation • Pre-defined temperature buttons (37°C, 42°C, 56°C and 95°C) for simple and intuitive operation • Less waiting thanks to extremely fast heating of up to 18°C/min 2 4 Article 1 ThermoMixer® F0.5 with thermoblock for 24 reaction vessels 0.5 ml, 220 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz 2 ThermoMixer® F1.5 with thermoblock for 24 reaction vessels 1.5 ml, 220 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz 3 ThermoMixer® F2.0 with thermoblock for 24 reaction vessels 2.0 ml, 220 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz 4 ThermoMixer® FP with thermoblock for microplates and deepwell plates, inclu- ding lid, 220 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz Lid for Eppendorf ThermoMixer® F0.5 / F1.5 / F2.0 and FP, for Ep- pendorf SmartBlock™ 0.5 – 2.0 ml, plates, PCR 96, PCR 384 and DWP ThermoTop® with condens.protect® technology SmartExtender, 1,5 ml Order No. 10 69 86010 10 69 84012 10 69 87013 10 69 85016 10 69 30233 10 69 83003 10 69 80008 SmartBlocks™, Eppendorf For the Eppendorf ThermoMixer C and the ThermoStat C, Eppendorf offers a great vari- ety of exchangable SmartBlocks for all commercially available tube formats from 5 µl to 50 ml. • With Eppendorf QuickRelease™ technology for quick and easy changing • With optimated block design for excellent temperature transfer to the sample thermoblock for 24 test tubes 0.5 ml thermoblock for 24 test tubes 1.5 ml Article SmartBlock™ 0.5 ml SmartBlock™ 1.5 ml SmartBlock™ 2.0 ml SmartBlock™ 5 ml thermoblock for 24 test tubes 2.0 ml thermoblock for 8 Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml, 8 × 5.0 ml reaction vessels thermoblock for 24 test tubes Ø 11 – 11,9 mm thermoblock for 4 conical vessels 50 ml thermoblock for 8 conical vessels 15 ml SmartBlock™ 15 ml SmartBlock™ 50 ml SmartBlock™ 12 mm SmartBlock™ cryo SmartBlock™ plates SmartBlock™ PCR 96 SmartBlock™ PCR 384 Eppendorf SmartBlock™ DWP 500 Eppendorf SmartBlock™ DWP 1000 thermoblock for PCR plates 96, incl. lid thermoblock for PCR plates 384, incl. lid thermoblock for Eppendorf Deepwell Plates 96/500 µL, incl. lid thermoblock for Eppendorf Deepwell Plate 96/1,000 µL, incl. lid thermoblock for 24 cryo tubes 1.5 – 2.0 ml, all bottom shapes thermoblock for micro test plates and deepwell plates, incl. lid Order No. 10 69 53610 10 69 53600 10 69 53620 10 69 70007 10 69 53660 10 69 53650 10 69 53640 10 69 53670 10 69 53630 10 69 53060 10 69 53070 10 69 60004 10 69 10002 676 Continued on next page

678

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Thermal Mixers Accessories: Article Transfer Rack 0.5 ml for Eppendorf SmartBlock™ 1.5 ml and Eppendorf SmartBlock™ 2.0 ml Transfer Rack 1.5/2.0 ml for Eppendorf SmartBlock™ 0.5 ml Thermoshaker neoMix, neoLab® Order No. 10 69 80305 10 69 10151 neoMix for tempering and mixing tasks in the laboratory, neoMix Cool with cooling func- tion. Replaceable reaction blocks suitable for vessels from 0.2 to 50 ml or for multiwell plates. Temperature range up to +100°C, where the block temperature homogeneity is included <+0.5°C. The device has a backlit display with plain text display. Delivered WITHOUT temperature control block. To operate the thermal shaker, a temper- ature control block is required as an accessory. Thermoshaker neoMix Technical data: 200 – 1500 rpm Speed: 2 mm Amplitude: 1°C Resolution: ± 0,3°C Temp. accuracy: Heating rate: 9°C/min Cooling rate (neoMix Cool): 5°C/min Height: 170 mm 220 mm Length: 280 mm Width/depth: Weight: 8.5 kg Article 1 Thermomixer with cooling function neoMix Cool 2 Thermomixer neoMix Temperature range -18° below room temperature to +100°C 10 01 70920 Order No. 5°C above room temperature to +100°C 10 01 70921 Accessories Article Reaction exchange block WB PCR, for 96 × 0.2 ml PCR reaction vessels 10 01 70922 10 01 70923 Reaction exchange block WB 0.5 ml, for 54 × 0.5 ml reaction vessels 10 01 70924 Reaction exchange block WB 1.5 ml, for 35 × 1.5 ml reaction vessels 10 01 70925 Reaction exchange block WB 2.0 ml, for 35 × 2.0 ml reaction vessels 10 01 70926 Reaction exchange block WB 0.5/1.5 ml, for 15 × 0.5 + 20 × 1.5 ml reac- Order No. tion vessels Reaction exchange block WB 12 ml, for 24 × 12 ml tubes Reaction exchange block WB 15 ml, for 12 × 15 ml tubes Reaction exchange block WB 50 ml, for 6 × 50 ml tubes Reaction exchange block WB H2O, water bath block Reaction exchange block WB MTP, for 96-well microtiter plate Reaction exchange block WB for Ø 24 × 14 mm Reaction exchange block WB Deep Well, for 96 deep well plates Reaction exchange block WB 5 ml, for 15 × 5 ml reaction vessels 10 01 70927 10 01 70928 10 01 70929 10 01 70930 10 01 70931 10 01 70932 10 01 70933 10 01 70934 Thermo Shaker for Microplates, neoLab® Thermo shaker with circular motion for 2 microtiter plates. • High-precision temperature control, uniform temperature distribution • Digital control of temperature, RPM and time • Memory for user settings • Special anti-vibration system • Maintenance-free motor, suitable for continuous use Technical data: Amplitude (orbital): Timer: RPM: Ambient temperature: Rel. air humidity: Temperature range: Accuracy: Dimensions (W × D × H): 347 × 275 × 115 mm Weight: Connection: 1.5 mm 1 to 999 min./ continuous operation 100 to 1300 +4 to +40°C max. 80% Rt +5 to +60°C +/- 0.1°C 6.2 kg 230 V, 50/60 Hz 1 2 co d e b e w co d e b e w WW2NY404 WW2NY301 Article Thermoshaker for microplates Order No. 10 01 70951 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 677

679

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WWQ7T021 Thermal Mixers Thermal Mixer with and without Cooling Function, Zefa Thermal mixer The thermal mixer TS100 is a thermal mixer with variably adjustable mixing frequency and variable incubation temperature; the TSK100 with cooling function provides for a temper- ature range of 20°C below room temperature to 100°C with a resolution of 0.1°C. Thirteen exchangeable blocks for reaction vessels, Falcon tubes or microtiter plates cover all com- mon laboratory applications. The mixing frequency of 200 rpm to 1,500 rpm (adjustable in increments of 10 rpm) and the 2 mm shaking movement allow gentle or vigorous shak- ing of the samples. Shaking can be permanent, with timer function, or as short-mix. The setpoint and actual values for temperature, mixing frequency and time are indicated in the 2-line display. Via the existing memory function, 5 speed-and-time combinations can be saved. Article Thermal mixer TS 100 Thermal mixer TSK 100 Accessories Article Exchangeable block 96 × 0.2 ml Exchangeable block 54 × 0.5 ml Exchangeable block 35 × 1.5 ml Exchangeable block 35 × 2.0 ml Exchangeable block 15 × 5.0 ml Eppendorf Exchangeable block 20 × 1.5 / 15 × 0.5 ml Exchangeable block 24 × Ø 12 mm Exchangeable block 24 × 5.0 ml round bottom Exchangeable block 12 × Falcon 15 ml Exchangeable block 6 × Falcon 50 ml Bath block 103 × 67 × 30 mm Exchangeable block for microtitreplates 96 Exchangeable block for deep well plates 96 Order No. 10 83 29852 10 83 29853 Order No. 10 83 20838 10 83 20247 10 83 20274 10 83 24572 10 83 20843 10 83 20839 10 83 20840 10 83 20847 10 83 20841 10 83 20842 10 83 20844 10 83 20845 10 83 20846 Ohaus Thermal Shaker with Heating and Cooling Function, METTLER TOLEDO High-speed thermal shakers with heating/cooling function • Premium performance and high, TÜV certified quality at an attractive price. • Intuitive colour touchscreen for easy operation and programming, 6 languages • Easy generation of programmes, pulse/quick mixing mode • USB connection for data logging, saving of programmes and software updates • Valox Cool-Touch housing • Temperature limitation, calibration mode and ramp function • Compatible with Eppendorf-Thermomixer® R-blocks • Block with lid for 1.5 ml tubes comprised in the scope of delivery! Ample accessories Technical data: Speed range: Timer: 300 – 3000 rpm 1 min – 99 h 17°C below ambient – 100°C Model Designation Temperature range Order No. ISTHBLHTS Thermal shaker, orbit 3 mm ambient +4°C – 100°C 10 97 02005 10 97 01998 ISTHBLCTS Cooling thermal shaker, orbit 3 mm Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! 678

680

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Stainless Steel Shaker KM CO2, Bühler Using stainless steel components, the new shaker was especially designed for use in incubators with up to 20% CO2 concentration and up to 95% humidity. This guarantees the optimum development of your cell cultures. co d e b e w WWXRZ007 Technical data: Shaking motion: Shaking platform: Max. load: Shaking speed: Stroke: Runtime: LED display: CO2 concentration: Relative humidity: Ambient temperature: Electrical supply: Heat emission: Standard cable length (KM CO2): Ribbon cable length (KM CO2-FL): Dimensions (W × D × H): Weight: orbital 200 × 295 mm 2 kg 5 – 220 min-1 (adjustable in steps of 5) 20 mm 0 – 99 h 59 min for shaking speed and runtime 20% Z 95% non-condensing 4°C – 45°C 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz max. 4 W 200 cm 120 cm 230 × 340 × 145 mm 7.6 kg Article 1 Stainless steel shaker KM CO2 2 Stainless steel shaker KM CO2 - FL Order No. 10 61 66136 10 61 66137 Scope of delivery: Basic device incl. basic platform and rubber mat (without clamping strips), external control unit. 1 2 Small Shakers, Bühler High-performance miniature shaker with integrated tray. Technical data: Shaking motion: Working surface: Max. load: orbital 200 × 295 mm 2 kg Article 3 Small shaker KM 2 Speed: Shaking amplitude: Runtime: External dimensions: Supply voltage: Order No. 52 61 61130 5 – 220/min, in steps of 5 20 mm 0 – 99 h 59 min 250 × 415 × 145 mm 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz Basic unit includes: Tray with rubber mat Clamping rails or universal trays for spring clips are available as accessories Article Small shaker KM 2 Akku Same as KM 2, but with voltage supply from lead gel battery. Particularly suitable for Order No. 52 61 61350 use in cooling/incubating cabinets. 40 hour minimum running time with battery. co d e b e w WWXRZ001 3 4 Order No. 52 61 61100 100 – 1400/min infinitely variable 3 mm 0 – 120 min or continuous operation 220 × 410 × 110 mm 230 V, 50/60 Hz (115 V on request) Article 4 Microplate shaker TiMix 2 Speed: Shaking amplitude: Timer: External dimensions: Supply voltage: Basic unit includes: Tray for 4 MT plates co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 679

681

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Ohaus Standard Orbital Shaker, METTLER TOLEDO Robust and safe! • Long service life due to robust die-cast housing, stainless steel triple eccentric drive, permanent-lubrication ball bearing, maintenance-free motor, TÜV certificate. • Microplate shaker for max. 4 micro plates or 2 microtube racks • Safe: overload protection, slow start prevents splashing • Tray and non-slip mat comprised in the scope of delivery of orbital shakers • More than 20 easy-to-install accessories Model Designation SHLDMP03DG Microplate shaker Speed rpm 100–1200 1 s – 160 h Timer Capacity 4 microplates or 2 micro-tube racks 3.6 kg Order No. 10 97 01907 10 97 01893 10 97 01900 SHLD0415AL 40–300 – SHLD0403DG Light digital 100–1200 1 s – 160 h 3.6 kg Light ana- logue orbital shaker orbital shaker, 3 mm orbit SHLD0415DG Light digital 40–300 orbital shaker, 15 mm orbit 3.6 kg 1 s – 160 h 10 97 01914 Ohaus Incubating Orbital Shakers, METTLER TOLEDO Top-quality shaker with perfect temperature control • Long service life due to robust die-cast housing, stainless steel triple eccentric drive, permanent-lubrication ball bearing, maintenance-free motor, TÜV certificate. • Safe: overload protection, slow start prevents splashing, indication of “Danger, hot” alarm • User-controlled temperature calibration for sensitive applications • Tray comprised in the scope of delivery, more than 10 easy-to-install accessories Technical data: Speed range: Timer: Temperature range: ambient +5°C to 65°C 100 – 1200 rpm 1 s – 160 h Designation Model ISLD04HDG Incubating orbital shaker ISLDMPHDG Thermal microplate shaker with transpa- rent lid ISLDMPHDGL Thermal microplate shaker with opaque lid Capacity 3.6 kg 4 microplates or 2 micro-tube racks 4 microplates or 2 micro-tube racks Order No. 10 97 01919 10 97 01933 10 97 01926 co d e b e w WW4HV024 1 680 Thermo Scientific™ Solaris™ 2000 and 4000 orbital shakers, Thermo Scientific The new compact Thermo Scientific™ Solaris™ 2000 and 4000 orbital shakers are avail- able in two practical sizes for laboratory tables. They offer a wide range of platforms and the matching clamp kits and test tube racks. They can be used for a large variety of ap- plications in microbiological incubators, warm rooms, environmental chambers or refrig- erators. • Variable speed control from 15 to 525 rpm • Shaking amplitude: 2.54 cm • Operate in temperature ranges of 0° to 40°C at 20 to 80% noncondensing humidity • Feature a maintenance-free, solid-state DC brushless motor • Unbalanced load sensor stops platform motion when excess vibration is detected and triggers visual/audible alarms • Easy programming of speed and runtime Continued on next page

682

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators • The full-colour touchscreen display allows you to clearly view speed and runtimes con- currently • Historical monitoring of alerts, alarms and interaction logs • USB and Ethernet connections for monitoring and data output • Engineered to perform with a reduced noise level • Easy-to-remove platforms and rounded corners make cleaning fast and easy Model Max. load kg 1 Solaris 2000 25 2 Solaris 4000 43 Connection Dimensions wit- hout shelf L×W×H cm 46.9 × 36.4 × 14.1 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz 10 79 22000 64.8 × 57.3 × 17.7 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz 10 79 24000 Order No. To see our large portfolio of models and accessories, please enter webcode WW4HV024 to access our online catalogue. 2 Orbital Shaker, neoLab® • Optimal rotation amplitude for intensive mixing • With digital timer 1 to 999 min. • Suitable for continuous operation • Precision speed control • Rotation: orbital • Ambient temp. +4°C to +55°C • Rel. air humidity (20°C): max. 80% • Acoustic signal after timer has run out • Supplied with 2 magnetic clips Connection: 12 V AC adapter, 1000 mA Platform Amplitude L × W × H Speed mm 168 × 168 mm 20 mm 193 × 170 × 70 rpm 10 – 250 Load capacity max. kg 1.5 Order No. 52 01 70030 co d e b e w WW2NY395 co d e b e w WW2NY318 Orbital Shaker, neoLab® Orbital Shaker • Movements: orbital, reciprocal, and vibrating • Sophisticated motor control system for continuous operation in silence • Precision speed control • With digital timer 1 to 999 min • Acoustic signal when the time is up • Memory for user-defined settings • Programmable mixing modes with up to 4 different movements The Multi Shaker is supplied with 8 magnetic clips and a universal platform. To this, uni- versal stands can be fixed to ensure reliable clamping of bottles etc. The holding rod set consists of 2 rim fixations with clips for putting on the platform, as well as of 4 plastic holding rods for the vessels. Platform Amplitude L × W × H Speed mm mm 410 × 297 10 mm 420 × 310 × 100 50 – 500 rpm Load cap. max. kg 7.0 Order No. 10 01 70950 Accessories Article Rod set for 520170031 Slip resistant mat for 520170031 Adapter platform for 2×4 microtiter plates for 520170031 Adapter made of foam for 12 × 30 mm Ø tubes Adapter made of foam for 24 × 16 mm Ø tubes Spare magnetic clip co d e b e w Order No. 52 01 70032 10 01 70091 10 01 70059 10 01 70072 10 01 70073 10 01 70079 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 681

683

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WWSB5012 1 2 3 682 Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Phoenix Instrument Laboratory shakers RS-OS 10/20 – RS-LS 10/20 • Compact laboratory shaker for a maximum load of 2.5 or 7.5 kg • Illuminated display for setting and indicting speed and time • Extensive range of accessories • Settable safety speed • Control of shaker and indication of data on the PC via RS 232 interface • 2 years warranty Technical data: Model: Voltage (V): Power consumption (W): Shaking movement: Shaking stroke (mm): Max. shaking weight (kg): RPM: Operation: RS-OS 20 100 – 240 30 orbital 10 7.5 100 – 500 Time/continu- ous operation LCD digital RS-OS 10 100 – 240 30 orbital 4 2.5 100 – 800 Time/continu- ous operation LCD digital 340×300×100 420×370×100 340×300×100 420×370×100 IP21 8.1 RS-LS 10 100 – 240 30 linear 4 2.5 100 – 350 Time/continu- ous operation LCD digital RS-LS 20 100 – 240 30 linear 10 7.5 100 – 350 Time/continu- ous operation LCD digital Displaying rpm/time: Setting of rpm/time: Dimensions (W×D×H mm): Protection class: Weight (kg): IP21 13.5 IP21 8.1 IP21 13.5 Article Laboratory shaker RS-OS 10 1 Laboratory shaker RS-OS 20 Laboratory shaker RS-LS 10 Laboratory shaker RS-LS 20 Order No. 10 13 75010 10 13 75020 10 13 75011 10 13 75021 Laboratory shakers RS-OS 5 - RS-LS 5 These analog shakers are characterized by a compact design and an excellent price/per- formance ratio. Delivery comprises the top unit with anti-slip mat and rubber band fasteners. Technical data: Power/Frequency: Speed: Weight: Dimensions (W×D×H): Capacity: Shaking movement: 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz 10 to 200 rmp 3.1 kg 330 × 270 × 110 mm 3 kg RS-OS 5: orbital, 20 mm / RS-LS 5: linear, 20 mm Article 2 Laboratory shaker RS-OS 5 Laboratory shaker RS-LS 5 Accessories laboratory shakers for the reception of Erlenmeyer retaining clips Article Universal bracket incl. tension rollers for OS/LS 10 Baseplate for OS/LS 10 Universal bracket incl. tension rollers for OS/LS 20 Baseplate for OS/LS 20 Retaining clip for 25 ml Erlenmeyer flask Retaining clip for 50 ml Erlenmeyer flask Retaining clip for 100 ml Erlenmeyer flask Retaining clip for 200/250 ml Erlenmeyer flask Retaining clip for 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask for the reception of Erlenmeyer retaining clips Further accessories upon request. Microtitre plate shaker RS-MM 10 • Compact mixer for size 96 microplates • Infinitely adjustable speed • Different adapters are available for RS-MM 10 Technical data: Model: Voltage (V): Power consumption (W): Shaking movement: Shaking stroke (mm): RPM: max. load (kg): Dimensions (W×D×H mm): Protection class: Weight (kg): RS-MM 10 100 – 240 20 orbital 4.5 0 – 1500 0.5 150×80×260 IP21 3 Article 3 Microtitre plate shaker RS-MM 10 Accessories on request. Order No. 10 13 75005 10 13 75006 Order No. 10 13 75100 10 13 75105 10 13 75200 10 13 75205 10 13 75120 10 13 75125 10 13 75130 10 13 75135 10 13 75140 Order No. 10 13 77010 Continued on next page

684

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Rocking- and 3D-Shaker, Phoenix Instrument RS-RR 10 / RS-RD 10 New and powerful shaker for gentle mixing of samples. The adjustment and control of speed and time can be done easily via the LCD-Display with this fully digital version. Delivery comprises the top unit with anti-slip mad and rubber band fasteners. Technical data: Power/Frequency: Angle: Speed: Display: Timer-Function: Run type: Ambient temperature: Protection class: Weight: 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz ±9° 0 to 70 rpm LCD 1 to 1199 min. timer/continuous 4 to 40°C IP 21 9 kg Type Movement Capacity kg 1 RS-RR10 see-saw rocking 10 2 RS-RD10 3D orbital 5 Dimensions (W×H×D) mm 420×360×106 420×360×200 Order No. 10 13 77210 10 13 77110 3 RS-RS 5 / RS-DS 5 These analog shakers are characterized by a compact design and an excellent price/perfor- mance ratio. Delivery comprises the top unit with anti-slip mad and rubber band fasteners. Technical data: Power/Frequency: Angel: Speed: Weight: Dimensions (W×D×H): Capacity: Shaker movement: 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz 7° 5 to 80 rpm 3.2 kg 330 × 270 × 130 mm 3 kg RS-RS 5: seesaw / RS-DS 5: 3D orbital co d e b e w WWSB5013 1 2 Article Shaker RS-RS 5 Shaker RS-DS 5 Compact Shakers, Bühler Order No. 10 13 77205 10 13 77105 3 co d e b e w WWXRZ003 Rugged, reliable shakers for everyday use. Reciprocal motion, analogue or digital control. Matching trays available for all standard applications. Includes basic unit without shaker plate and without tray. Please order the tray that you need. Technical data: Max. load: Frequency range: Amplitude: Working surface: External dimensions (W×D×H): 510 × 490 × 150 mm Supply voltage: 15 kg (KS 15), 5 kg (TiMix 5) 30 – 420/min (KS), 100 – 1400/min (TiMix 5) 17 mm (KS 15), 3 mm (Timix5) 400 × 300 mm 230 V, 50/60 Hz (115 V on request) KS 15 Compact Shaker Article 4 Compact shaker KS 15 A orbital Shaking motion: analog with rotary buttons 0 – 120 min or continuous operation Control: Timer: Article 5 Compact shaker KS 15 A control Shaking motion: orbital “control” with memory for shaking programs and touch-display programmable1) Order No. 52 61 61710 Order No. 52 61 61700 Order No. 52 61 61730 Order No. 52 61 61720 4 7+ 5 7+ Control: Timer: Article 4 Compact shaker KS 15 B Shaking motion: Control: Timer: Article 5 Compact shaker KS 15 B control Shaking motion: reciprocal (horizontal) analog with rotary buttons 0 – 120 min or continuous operation Control: Timer: reciprocal (horizontal) “control” with memory for shaking programs and touch-display programmable1) co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 683 Continued on next page

685

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Tops and accessories for KS 15 models Article 6 Combifix KS Frame rack with 3 clamping rails and rubber mat 7 Universal tray KS Tray with holes with spring clips or test tube racks (clips/racks on request) 8 Incubation hood TH 15 For controlling the temperature of the loaded material between 5°C above room temperature and 50°C. Option: extended tem- perature range up to +60°C on request. TiMix 5 Microplate shaker Order No. 52 61 52071 52 61 51471 52 61 61610 Order No. 52 61 61660 Order No. 52 61 61670 85+ 9 co d e b e w WWXRZ002 AT AK 684 Article 9 TiMix 5 Shaking motion: Control: Timer: Article TiMix 5 control Shaking motion: Control: Timer: accurately orbital analog with rotary buttons 0 – 120 min or continuous operation accurately orbital “control” with memory for shaking programs and touch-display programmable1) Options for TiMix 5 control: Specially for use in automated systems. Defined stop, USB 2.0 interface, control interface. Tops and accessories for TiMix 5 models Article Standard top TiMix 5 Tray with clamping holders for 8 MT plates Extension tray TiMix 5 Tray for an additional 8 MT plates as second level on standard tray Top with maxi pins Tray with stack holder for 3 × 8 standard MT plates one above the other Top with pins For 8 standard microplates Top with metal pins For 48 standard microplates directly stacked about each other For controlling the temperature of the loaded material between Incubation hood TH 15 5°C above room temperature and 50°C. Option: extended tempe- rature range up to +60°C on request. 1) Programmable controller with enhanced functionality! Order No. 52 61 52101 52 61 52102 52 61 52104 10 61 62096 10 61 62125 52 61 61610 Vario Shakers, Bühler Small, reliable bench top shakers with special shaking motion. Technical data: Max. load: External dimensions (W×D×H): 355 × 455 × 195 mm, resp. 355 × 450 × 205 mm Supply voltage: 230 V, 50/60 Hz (115 V on request) 2 kg (KL 2), 10 kg (TL 10/WS 10) “2 in 1” unit that can be switched over at any time from orbital to reciprocal motion. Article AT Combination shaker KL 2 Shaking area: Speed: Shaking amplitude: Timer: Basic unit includes: 300 × 300 mm 30 – 420/min infinitely variable 8 mm 0 – 120 min or continuous operation Tray with 3 clamping rails and rubber mat Article AK Rocking shaker WS 10 Rocking shaker with slow, linear up-and-down motion. Shaking area: Speed: Rocking angle: Timer: Basic unit includes: 340 × 340 mm 1 – 23/min infinitely variable 5° fixed 0 – 120 min or continuous operation Rocking plate with rubber mat. Multi-level rack with 2 additional trays available as an accessory. Article Three-dimensional orbital shaker TL 10 Same as WS 10, but with slow three-dimensional orbital motion. Level inclination gyrating motion can be adjustable from 0° to 9°. Order No. 52 61 61170 Order No. 52 61 61150 Order No. 52 61 61140

686

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WW18A010 I II Shakers, Incubators Shakers, LAUDA Shakers VS 8 LAUDA shakers are available with orbital, reciprocating, rocking or orbital rocking motion. Compact, durable mechanics for reliable continuous operation. Drive system with over- load-protected AC motor, guaranteeing constant speed even in continuous duty and in- dependently of the load. Suitable for use in laboratories, incubation and temperature stabilizing rooms at ambient temperatures between +10°C and +50°C (models VS 8 OE and VS 8 BE up to +60°C). Infinitely adjustable electronic speed control. Gentle starting. The devices are mainte- nance-free and CE marked. Models VS 8 O, VS 8 B, VS 15 / VS 30 microprocessor-controlled: adjustable in steps of 1.0 rpm or 0.5 rpm (VS 15 T and VS 15 R). Housing made of electrolytically galvanized, powder-coated steel sheet. The base plate is made of electrolytically galvanized, powder-coated steel sheet, the shaking platform of anodized aluminium, equipped with four plastic pins for secure attachment of accessory equipment (for nearly all forms of standard laboratory vessels). Model VS 30 O: The base plate is made of electrolytically galvanized steel sheet, with four support rods with screw-type clamps made of stainless steel for secure attachment of accessory equipment. Well arranged control panel for easy operation. I Models with analog control: VS 8 OE / VS 8 BE Timer switch-selectable between time-limited operation up to 60 minutes and continuous operation. Suitable for use in incubators up to +60°C. II Models with digital control: VS 8 O / VS 8 B / VS 15 / VS 30 Microprocessor-controlled, timer: 1 minute to 99:59 hours or continuous operation. Speed and remaining operating time are indicated by two LC displays. An RS 232 interface for data transmission of measurement and control tasks via PC is optionally available on re- quest. Shakers VS 8 OE / VS 8 O with orbital motion and shakers VS 8 BE / VS 8 B with reciprocating motion High-duty, low-noise and space-saving, equally suitable for gentle liquid motion and for vigorous mixing. In daily use in biology and microbiology laboratories and in diagnostic test reactions, in medical diagnostics or analysis, as well as for growing micro-organisms, cell and tissue cultures. Technical data: Exterior dimensions (W×D×H): 350 × 375 × 160 mm Moving platform: Load: Shaking motion: VS 8 OE / VS 8 BE 330 × 330 mm max. 8 kg at even load distribution VS 8 OE: orbital VS 8 BE: reciprocating up to 60 minutes or continuous operation VS 8 OE: 10 mm VS 8 BE: 20 mm VS 8 OE: 20 – 500 rpm VS 8 BE: 20 – 300 rpm VS 8 O / VS 8 B 350 × 355 × 160 mm 330 × 330 mm VS 8 O: orbital VS 8 B: reciprocating 1 min up to 99:59 h or continuous operation VS 8 O: 10 mm VS 8 B: 20 mm VS 8 O: 20 – 500 rpm VS 8 B: 20 – 300 rpm Timer: Shaking amplitude: Shaking frequency: Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: 11/13 kg 230 V, 50–60 Hz, 65 W 11/13 kg Type 1 Typ VS 8 OE 2 Typ VS 8 O Order No. 10 11 03055 10 11 03057 Type 1 Typ VS 8 BE 2 Typ VS 8 B Order No. 10 11 03056 10 11 03058 Supplied without the illustrated accessories. Other voltage variants on request. Shaker VS 15 T with orbital rocking motion For gentle and uniform rocking motion, quiet. Applications mainly in AIDS research, for diagnostic tests with test plates or for growing cell cultures and micro-organisms. (Op- tionally interface RS 232). Technical data: Overall dimensions (W×D×H): 480 × 487 × 160 mm Moving platform: Load: Shaking motion: Timer: Shaking amplitude: Shaking frequency: Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: 450 × 450 mm max. 15 kg at even load distribution three-dimensional, orbital rocking 1 min up to 99:59 hours or continuous operation 3 degrees 2 to 50 rpm 230 V 50/60 Hz, 90 W 19.5/23.5 kg 1 2 Article Shaker type VS 15 T without the illustrated accessories co d e b e w Order No. 10 11 03059 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 685

687

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Shaker VS 15 R with rocking motion For slow and uniform rocking, low noise level. The units create reproducible growth and processing conditions at low speeds for cell cultures and other media. Ideal rising and tumbling of the samples. They have a wide range of applications, e.g. for supply of parallel cultures and cell lines or for staining or discoloration of gels. (3014: optionally with interface RS 232). Technical data: Overall dimensions (W×D×H): 480 × 487 × 160 mm Moving platform: Load: Shaking motion: Timer: Rocking amplitude: Rocking frequency: Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: 450 × 450 mm max. 15 kg at even load distribution rocking 1 min up to 99:59 hours or continuous operation 3 degrees 2 to 50 rpm 230 V (Other voltages on request) 18/21 kg Article Shaker type VS 15 R without the illustrated accessories Order No. 10 11 03060 Shaker VS 15 O with orbital motion For gentle motion and vigorous shaking of liquids, low noise level. Universally applicable. Applications in biochemistry, biotechnology, micorbiology, bacte- riology and virology, above all for growing micro-organisms, cell and tissue cultures. (Op- tionally interface RS 232). Technical data: Overall dimensions (W×D×H): 510 × 625 × 142 mm Moving platform: Load: Shaking motion: Timer: Shaking amplitude: Shaking frequency: Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: 450 × 450 mm max. 15 kg at even load distribution orbital 1 min up to 99:59 hours or continuous operation 30 mm 20 to 300 rpm 230 V 50/60 Hz, 65 W 19.5/23.5 kg Article 1 Shaker type VS 15 O without the illustrated accessories Order No. 10 11 03061 1 2 Shaker VS 15 B with reciprocating motion For vigorous and intensive shaking, low noise level. The shaking platform’s jerky back- and-forth motion creates high turbulence, thus thoroughly mixing the media, e.g. in the production of suspensions and emulsions. Applications e.g. for medical diagnostics, in foodstuffs or environmental analyses. (Optionally interface RS 232). Technical data: Overall dimensions (W×D×H): 480 × 487 × 160 mm Moving platform: Load: Shaking motion: Timer: Shaking amplitude: Shaking frequency: Electrical connection: Net/ gross weight: 450 × 450 mm max. 15 kg at even load distribution reciprocating 1 min up to 99:59 hours or continuous operation 30 mm 20 to 300 rpm 230 V 50/60 Hz, 65 W 19.5/23.5 kg Article 2 Shaker type VS 15 B without the illustrated accessories Order No. 10 11 03062 Shaker VS 30 O with orbital motion With a large shaking tray for accommodating heavier loads, attractive shaking amplitude and variability. Equally suitable for gentle motion as for vigorous mixing. Low noise level, universally applicable, e.g. for analysis or diagnostics in pharmacy, chemistry or biology, plant cultivation and the food industry. (Optionally interface RS 232). Technical data: Overall dimensions (W×D×H): 705 × 607 × 160 mm Moving platform: Load: Shaking motion: Timer: Shaking amplitude: Shaking frequency: 676 × 540 mm max. 30 kg at even load distribution orbital 1 min up to 99:59 hours or continuous operation 32 mm 20 to 250 rpm, when the rack frame is used 20 to 200 rpm 230 V 50/60 Hz, 90 W 38/44 kg Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: Article Shaker type VS 30 O 686 without the illustrated accessories Order No. 10 11 03063 Continued on next page

688

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Accessories for shakers Shaking trays Made of stainless steel, with holes to accommodate clamps for Erlenmeyer flasks and other accessories (see also shaking incubators page 692). Article Tray type A000044 For shakers VS 8, 330 × 330 mm 3 Tray type A000045 For shakers VS 15 and shaking incubator VS 60 OI. 450 × 450 mm Tray type A000047 For shakers VS 30 O and Order No. 52 11 23950 52 11 23966 52 11 23980 3 shaking incubator VS 150 OI, 670 × 537 mm. Made of 3 mm thick, anodized aluminium, with holes to accommodate Erlenmeyer flasks and other accessories. 4 Type Clamps for Erlenmeyer flasks Made of stainless steel, for screwing on to trays A000044, A000045 and A000047. Com- plete with attachment materials (see also shaking incubators page 692). Number of clamps per tray, see table: Shaker VS 8 45 25 16 12 9 9 4 2 for flasks ml 25 50 100 200 250 – 300 500 1000 2000 Shaker VS 15 79 49 36 22 16 12 9 4 Shaker VS 30 O 99 99 50 26 26 26 12 9 52 11 23983 52 11 23984 52 11 23985 52 11 23986 52 11 23987 52 11 23988 52 11 23989 52 11 23990 A000025 A000026 A000027 A000028 A000029 A000030 A000031 A000053 Order No. Insertable rack for test tubes Made of stainless steel, perforated section can be tilted by 90°, with clamping springs for secure grip and silent shaking of glasses; can be screwed on to shaking trays A000044, A000045 and A000047. For shakers VS 8, VS 15 und VS 30 (see also shaking incubators page 692). Capacity each tray: Tray A000044: Tray A000045: Tray A000047: Type A000059: max. 3 racks Type A000060: max. 2 racks Type A000059: max. 6 racks Type A000060: max. 4 racks Type A000059: max. 9 racks Type A000060: max. 8 racks 4 5 Article 5 Type A000059 Type A000060 for max. 24 tubes 12 to 17 mm Ø max. 16 tubes 25 to 29 mm Ø without the illustrated accessories. Order No. 52 11 23953 10 11 03954 6 Clamps for separating funnels Made of stainless steel, for screwing on to shaking trays A000044 and A000045. Clamps Order No. Neck width Type Separatory funnel vol. ml A000054 50 A000055 100 A000056 250 A000057 250 A000058 500 19 / 26 (ISO / Squibb) 19 / 26 (ISO / Squibb) 19 / 26 (ISO / Squibb) 29 / 32 (Conical form) 29 / 32 (ISO / Squibb) 6 / 111) 6 / 111) 4 / 81) 4 / 81) 3 / 61) 52 11 23957 52 11 23958 52 11 23959 10 11 03955 52 11 23956 6 1) Max. number of clamps per shaking tray A000044 / A000045 for shakers VS 8 / VS 15. Other clamps on request. Holding frame for a test plate Made of stainless steel for attachment of a test plate, for screwing on to shaking trays A000044 and A000045. Capacity: A000044 / 4, A00004 / 6 test plates complete with at- tachment materials. For shaking devices VS 8, VS 15 O and VS 15 B (see also shaking incubators VS 45 OI and VS 60 OI page 692). 7 Article 7 Type A000061 without the illustrated accessories co d e b e w Order No. 52 11 23910 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 687

689

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Non-slip rubber mats For the shaking platform. For slow moving, e.g. nutrient solutions in petri dishes and flasks (see also shaking incubator VS 60 OI page 692). Article Type A000042 300 × 300 mm, for shakers VS 8 1 Type A000043 420 × 420 mm, for shakers VS 15 and shaking incubator VS 60 OI Order No. 52 11 23951 52 11 23965 Universal mounts For secure attachment of various shaking objects (see also shaking incubator VS 60 OI page 692). Article Universal mount A000048 For shakers VS 8. With 4 rubber-coated bars. 2 Universal mount A000049 For shakers VS 15 and shaking incubator VS 60 OI. With 6 rub- Order No. 52 11 23952 52 11 23967 ber-coated bars. Universal mount A000050 For shakers VS 30. Consists of 2 longitudinal bars and 6 trans- verse bars. Screw-type clamps are used for adjusting the longi- tudinal bars vertically and the transverse bars horizontally. 52 11 23982 Platform frame With 4 levels, with top rims, three levels removable. Frame and trays made of stainless steel. Distance between trays- 60 mm. Grooved rubber mats on trays to ensure secure grip of objects. Only for shaking devices VS 15 T and VS 15 R. Article 3 Type A000051 Order No. 52 11 23968 Adhesive mat, black Highly adhesive special mat for easy fastening of a wide range of different vessels on tray or shaker table, shaking speed up to approx. 250 rpm (depending on shape and weight of the vessel and size of the shaking amplitude). • Size: 200 × 200 mm, can be cut to size with scissors. • Temperature range: 15 to 60°C. For shakers VS 30 O: can only be used in connection with tray type A000047. Also see LAUDA shaker incubators page 692. 4 Article 4 Adhesive mat, black Type A000041 Order No. 10 11 03949 Shaking Mixers TURBULA T2F, BACHOFEN This machine is a low-noise, maintenance-free unit designed to ensure sterile, hygienic and dust-free operation. The mixing principle allows up to 99% of the vessel volume to be made use of (depending on the substance being mixed). Flexible drive elements and a newly-developed eccentric transmission actuate and control the movements of the mixing basket. The rubber tensioners used for holding the mixing vessel in the basket are available in two configurations. Containers of different shapes and sizes (up to two-liter capacity) can be used as mixing vessels. The desired turning speed is obtained by placing the drive belt onto the drive pulleys in one of five positions. Technical data: Dimensions (W × H × D): 501 × 608 × 393 mm Weight: Load capacity: Container dimensions: max. 130 mm dia. × 215 mm Container capacity: Speeds: 38 kg max. 10 kg Power supply: max. 2 l 20, 30, 42, 62, or 90 min-1 optional infinitely variable 20 to 100 min-1 1 × 230 V/50 Hz/180 W Article Shaking mixer TURBULA® T2F excl. packaging Order No. 52 34 30122 1 2 3 688

690

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Universal Shaker, WINLAB® A truly universal laboratory shaker for different vessels such as Erlenmeyer, volumetric, or other flasks. The universal clamping unit provides for safe fastening of different flask types. The universal shaker is available with orbital or reciprocal motion. Equipped with two LED displays for convenient setting and reading of shaking frequency and time. co d e b e w WW5PT075 Technical data: Dimensions of the universal attachment: 318 × 315 mm Overall dimensions of the shaker: Motor type: Maximum load: Radius of movement: Speed of movement: Time setting: Protection class: Voltage: Article WINLAB universal shaker 450 × 400 × 105 mm (L×B×H) DC motor, brushless 7 kg 10 mm 30 to 500 rpm 0 to 99 h and to 59 min IP 21 240 V Order No. 10 03 03002 Universal Shakers, Bühler Bench top shakers for heavy loads and continuous operation. Available with orbital or reciprocal motion or as “2 in 1”, digital or analogue control. Wide range of matching trays and accessories available. Includes basic unit with shaker plate and rubber mat, without tray stand. co d e b e w WWXRZ004 Technical data: Max. load: Frequency range: Working surface: External dimensions (W×D×H): 680 × 610 × 160 mm Supply voltage: 30 kg 15 – 300/min 560 × 400 mm 230 V, 50/60 Hz (115 V on request) SM 30 Universal shaker Article 1 Universal shaker SM 30 A Shaking motion: Shaking amplitude: Control: Timer: Article 2 Universal shaker SM 30 A control Shaking motion: Shaking amplitude: Control: Timer: Article 1 Universal shaker SM 30 B Shaking motion: Shaking amplitude: Control: Timer: Article 2 Universal shaker SM 30 B control Shaking motion: Shaking amplitude: Control: Timer: Article 1 Universal shaker SM 30 C Shaking motion: Shaking amplitude: Control: Timer: co d e b e w 1 4+ 52+ Order No. 52 61 61010 orbital 26 mm analog with rotary buttons 0 – 120 min or continuous operation Order No. 52 61 61000 orbital 26 mm “control” with memory for shaking programs and touch-display programmable1) Order No. 52 61 61030 reciprocal (horizontal) 30 mm or 46 mm and 50 mm (option) analog with rotary buttons 0 – 120 min or continuous operation Order No. 52 61 61020 reciprocal (horizontal) 30 mm or 46 mm and 50 mm (option) “control” with memory for shaking programs and touch-display programmable1) Order No. 52 61 61050 orbital/reciprocal (swicth selectable) 26 mm analog with rotary buttons 0 – 120 min or continuous operation Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 689

691

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Article 2 Universal shaker SM 30 C control Shaking motion: Shaking amplitude: Control: Timer: orbital/rfeciprocal (switch selectable) 26 mm “control” with memory for shaking programs and touch- display programmable1) Order No. 52 61 61040 Hot plate shaker SM 30 AT control Table-tob shaker with heating plate for mixing of difficult media. Basic equipment: Basic device with heating plate, without rack system. Technical data: Shaking motion: Temperature range: Control accuracy: Max. load: Stroke: Control: Timer: Article 3 Hot plate shaker SM 30 AT control orbital up to 120°C approx. ±1°C 25 kg 26 mm “control” with memory for shaking programs and touch-display programmable1) Order No. 10 61 66200 Tops and accessories for SM 30 models Article Combifix SM Set A Frame rack with 5 clamping rails for upright vessels 4 Combifix SM Set B Frame rack with 4 double clamping rails for tall or lying vessels Combifix SM Set C Frame rack with rails for fastening filter funnels 5 Universal tray SM 2) Tray with holes for spring clips or test tube racks (clips/racks on Order No. 52 61 50154 52 61 50155 52 61 50156 52 61 51472 request) 6 2-level top SM 2) Two-level rack with trays with holes. Suitable fittings on request 7 Incubation hood TH 30 2) For temperature control of the loaded material from 5°C above room temperature to 50°C. Complete with lighting and UV light. Accessories for TH 30 and connection for cooling units on re- quest. Option: extended temperature range up to +60°C on re- quest. 1) Programmable controller with enhanced functionality! 2) not for SM 30 AT control! 52 61 52065 52 61 62000 Large Shakers, Bühler Designed for heavy loads and continuous operation (floor placement only). Choice of or- bital or reciprocal motion. Wide range of accessories for various applications. Includes basic unit without trays or stands. Please order the trays or stands that you need. Technical data: Max. load: Frequency range: Working surface: Control: 75 kg 30 – 200/min 760 × 600 mm “control” with memory for shaking programs and touch-display programmable1) Timer: External dimensions (W×D×H): 1050 × 835 × 250 mm Supply voltage: 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz VKS 75 Multi-flask shaker Article 8 Multi-flask shaker VKS 75 A control Shaking motion: orbital 26 mm Shaking amplitude: Article 9 Multi-flask shaker VKS 75 B control Shaking motion: Shaking amplitude: Order No. 52 61 61110 Order No. 52 61 61120 reciprocal (horizontal) 50 mm or 36, 60, 80 mm (option) Continued on next page 3 6 2 7+ co d e b e w WWXRZ005 8 AT+ 690

692

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Tops and accessories for VKS 75 models Article Oscillating plate VKS Base plate for fastening the VKS Combifix fittings or the VKS uni- Order No. 52 61 52070 versal tray (1-level mode) Combifix VKS Set A Frame rack with 9 clamping rails for upright vessels (1-level mode) AT Combifix VKS Set B Frame rack with 4 double clamping rails for tall or lying vessels (1 -level mode) Combifix VKS Set C Frame rack with rails for fastening filter funnels (1-level mode) Universal tray VKS Tray with holes for spring clips or test tube racks (clips/racks on re- quest) (1-level mode) Top VKS 2-storey 2-level frame rack for high loading capacities. Each level can be loaded with either 1 tray size 760 × 600 mm or with 2 trays size 560 × 400 mm. Suitable trays on request. Distance between levels: 400 mm. Height sufficient for 5000 ml Er- lenmeyer flasks. AK Top VKS Gigant 3-level frame rack for high loading capacities. Each level can be loaded with either 1 tray size 760 × 600 mm or with 2 trays size 560 × 400 mm. Suitable trays on request. Distance between levels: 340 mm. Height sufficient for 3000 ml Er- lenmeyer flasks. 1) Programmable controller with enhanced functionality! 52 61 51487 52 61 51488 52 61 51489 52 61 51474 10 61 62186 52 61 52068 9 AK+ Ohaus Extreme Environment Shaker, METTLER TOLEDO The specialist for incubators and other extreme environments • Reliable with high humidity (up to 100%), CO2 content, temperature • Long service life due to robust die-cast housing, stainless steel triple eccentric drive, permanent-lubrication ball bearing, maintenance-free motor, TÜV certificate • Separate, magnetic display with ribbon cable (passes underneath an incubator door) • Accu-Drive shaker system for high accuracy and reproducibility • RS232 interface (bi-directional) for logging and control • Tray (28 × 33 cm) with non-slip rubber mat comprised in the scope of delivery • More than 50 accessories available to adapt the shaker to your individual requirements Model Speed Timer Temperature range °C Capacity Order No. kg 16 10 97 01816 SHEX1619DG 15 – 500 1 s – 160 h 10 – 60 rpm Failed to find what you are looking for ? Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 691

693

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WW18A013 1 692 Shakers, Incubators Shaking Incubators, LAUDA Shaking incubators VS 45 OI, VS 60 OI und VS 150 OI with orbital motion LAUDA shaking incubators with orbital motion are universally applicable for shaking jobs requiring exactly reproducible orbital motion and temperatures up to +70°C, e.g. for incu- bations, fermentations, homogenizations, chemical and biochemical reactions, enzyme and tissure studies and the cultivation of bacteria cultures. • Temperature range: from 8°C above ambient temperature to +70°C, serial cooling coil for operation below ambient temperature to connect to the water mains or to an external refrigerated circulator • Temperature range (Operation with cooling coil): +20°C to +70°C (dependent on cooling media and ambient temperature) • Temperature constancy (temporal): ± 0.2°C • Temperature regulation: microprocessor-controlled, PID type • Temperature setting and display: via LED display, in steps of 0.1°C • Over-temperature cut-out: electronical / dependent on the set value, to protect the test substances, and electro-mechanically, to protect the unit • Under-temperature cut-out: electronical, max. 9.9°C below set temperature • Shaking motion: orbital, can be switched on and off • Shaking frequency regulation: microprocessor-controlled • Shaking frequency displayand setting: digital - LED • Incubation time:microprocessor-controlled, 1 minute to 999:59 hours • Time display and setting: digital - LED • Fast and exact temperature setting, exact reproducibility of set values, such as temper- ature, shaking frequency and incubation time, due tomicroprocessor-technique • Integrated interface RS 232 for remote control of measuring, controlling and regulating tasks via PC • Optimum temperature distribution throughout the cabinet interior with a ventilator • Electronic function monitoring • Silent and robust shaking mechanism with gentle start-up and even orbital motion, in- dependent of load, set shaking frequency and incubation time • The microprocessor-controlled timer displays continuously the current remaining run- ning time of the incubation time and signals acoustically its expiry • Membrane keyboard with prominent symbols • The units come with the CE mark Model VS 45 OI: Acrylic glass window in the door, approx. 45 l useful volume. Capacity: 2 shaking trays 450 × 300 mm, for vessel height of more than 150 mm, 1 shaking tray. Model VS 60 OI: with lift-up acrylic glass cover, approx. 68 l useful volume. Capacity: 1 shaking tray 450 × 450 mm. Outer housing made of heavy-duty ABS and powder-coat- ed, electrolytically galvanized sheet steel. Model VS 150 OI: Acrylic glass window in both doors, approx. 150 l useful volume. Ca- pacity: 2 shaking trays 674 × 540 mm, for vessel height of more than 180 mm, 1 shaking tray. All models: Outer housing made of powder-coated, electrolytically galvanized sheet steel. Shaking Incubator type VS 45 OI Chamber interior and insides of doors made of stainless steel. Basic equipment includes frame rack for trays. Interior lighting: switchable fluorescent lamp under a scattered light pane. Technical data: Shaking frequency: Shaking amplitude: Load: Volume: 20 to max. 250 rpm 25 mm max. 12 kg approx. 45 l, 2 shaking trays, for vessel height of more than 150 mm, 1 shaking tray Interior dimensions (W×D×H): 450 × 300 × 320 mm Exterior dimensions (W×D×H): 710 × 650 × 710 mm Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: 230 V 50/60 Hz, 0.8 kW 70/80 kg Article Shaking incubator type VS 45 OI Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 52 11 03032 Continued on next page

694

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators 1 Shaking Incubator type VS 60 OI Shaking table with four plastic pins to accommodate the shaking tray, the non-slip mat or the universal mount (accessories) made of aluminium. Technical data: Shaking frequency: Shaking amplitude: Load: Volume: Interior dimensions (W×D×H): 450 × 450 × 338 mm Exterior dimensions (W×D×H): 525 × 686 × 631 mm Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: 20 to max. 250 rpm 30 mm max. 12 kg approx. 68 l, 1 shaking tray 230 V 50/60 Hz, 0.8 kW 41.5/53 kg Article Shaking incubator type VS 60 OI Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 10 11 03052 2 Shaking Incubator type VS 150 OI Chamber interior and insides of doors made of stainless steel. Basic equipment includes frame rack for trays. Interior lighting: switchable fluorescent lamp under a scattered light pane. Technical data: Shaking frequency: Shaking amplitude: Load: Volume: 20 to max. 250 rpm if only bottom tray is loaded, 20 to max. 200 rpm if both trays are loaded 25 mm max. 20 kg approx. 150 l, 2 shaking trays, for vessel height of more than 180 mm, 1 shaking tray Interior dimensions (W×D×H): 674 × 540 × 430 mm Exterior dimensions (W×D×H): 930 × 890 × 820 mm Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: 230 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.8 kW 135/270 kg Article Shaking incubator type VS 150 OI Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 52 11 03033 3 Shaking trays for shaking incubators VS 45 OI, VS 60 OI and VS 150 OI Made of stainless steel (type A000045 und A000046), with holes to accept clamps for Erlenmeyer flasks and other accessories (see also shakers VS 15 (A000045) und VS 30 O (A000047), page 685). Article 2 Tray type A000045 For shakers VS 15 and shaking incubator VS 60 OI. 450 × 450 mm Tray type A000046 For shaking incubator VS 45 OI. 450 × 300 mm Tray type A000047 For shakers VS 30 O and shaking incubator VS 150 OI, 670 × 537 mm. Order No. 52 11 23966 52 11 23970 52 11 23980 Made of 3 mm thick, anodized aluminium, with holes to accommodate Erlenmeyer flasks and other accessories. 3 Clamps for Erlenmeyer flasks Made of stainless steel, to be screwed onto shaking trays A000045, A000046 and A000047. Complete with fixing material (see also shakers page 685). Max. quantity of flask clamps per shaking tray: Tray A000046 52 33 22 15 13 10 6 3 52 11 23983 52 11 23984 52 11 23985 52 11 23986 52 11 23987 52 11 23988 52 11 23989 52 11 23990 for flasks ml 25 50 100 200 250 – 300 500 1000 2000 Tray A000047 99 99 50 26 26 26 12 9 Tray A000045 79 49 36 22 16 12 9 4 Type A000025 A000026 A000027 A000028 A000029 A000030 A000031 A000053 Order No. VS 45 OI (Tablar A000046): From clamps 300 ml only 1 tray applicable VS 150 OI (Tablar A000047): From clamps 1000 ml only 1 tray applicable Other clamps on request co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 693 Continued on next page

695

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Test tube racks Made of stainless steel, perforated part can be tilted by 90°, with clamping springs for secure hold and silent shaking of the tubes, to be screwed on to shaking trays A000045, A000046 and A000047. For incubators VS 45 OI, VS 60 OI und VS 150 OI (see also shak- ers page 685). Capacity each tray: Tray A000045: 1 Tray A000046: Tray A000047: Type A000059: max. 6 racks Type A000060: max. 4 racks Type A000059: max. 3 racks Type A000060: max. 3 racks Type A000059: max. 9 racks Type A000060: max. 8 racks Article 1 Type A000059 Type A000060 for max. 24 tubes 12 to 17 mm Ø max. 16 tubes 25 to 29 mm Ø Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 52 11 23953 10 11 03954 Test plate holding frame Made of stainless steel, for attachment of a test plate, for screwing on to shaking trays A000045 and A000046. Capacity: A000045 / 6, A000046 / 6 test plates. Complete with attachment material (see also shakers VS 8, VS 15 O and VS 15 B, page 685). Order No. 52 11 23910 Article 2 Type A000061 Supplied without the illustrated accessories Non-slip rubber mat for type VS 60 OI For the shaking platform, 420 × 420 mm. For slow moving e.g. of nutritions in petri dishes and culture bottles (see also shakers VS 15 T and VS 15 R, page 685). Article 3 Type A000043 Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 52 11 23965 Universal mount for shaking incubator type VS 60 OI For secure fixing of different shaking objects between the six rubber-coated bars. (see also shakers VS 15, page 685). Article 4 Universal mount A000049 Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 52 11 23967 Adhesive mat, black Highly adhesive special mat for easy fastening of a wide range of different vessels on tray or shaker table, shaking speed up to approx. 250 rpm (depending on shape and weight of the vessel and size of the shaking amplitude). • Size: 200 × 200 mm, can be cut to size with scissors. • Temperature range: 15 to 60°C. For shaker incubator VS 150 OI: can only be used in connection with tray type A000047. Also see shaker VS 30 O, page 685. 5 Article 5 Adhesive mat, black Type A000041 Order No. 10 11 03949 Incubator Shaker, Phoenix Instrument • digital temperature and speed indication • integrated timer • stops automatically when hood is opened • wide choice of accessories • brushless motor • overload protection • easy to operate Technical data: Shaking movement: orbital 20 mm Shake stroke: Max. speed: 40 – 300 rpm Max. load capacity: 5 kg Heating range: RT +5° – 60°C Article Incubator shaker IS-OS 20 Order No. 10 13 77520 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWSB5014 694

696

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Stackable Incubator Shaker, Zefa 1 Incubator Shaker Model ZWYR-D240 co d e b e w WWQ7T015 Premium stackable incubator shakers Model ZWYR-D2401, ZWYR-D2402, ZWYR-D2403 Features: • 5.6 ″ LCD Touchscreen monitor • Folding door with soft-stop mechanism and stop of shaking action when door is opened • 304/1.4301 stainless steel 190-litre interior with rounded inner corners for easier clean- ing inside the chamber • The models are optionally available with moisture and CO2 control • Brushless maintenance-free heavy-duty drive for soft start, quiet running, low-vibration handling of cultures, from 30 – 400 rpm (standard 30 – 300 rpm) • Type of shaking action: circular; vibration amplitude infinitely variable from 1 – 50 mm • Restart after power failure automatically with the most recent settings • Temperature range from 4 – 60°C (on request, from 4 – 80°C), accuracy 0.1°C • Two powerful fans with a performance of 268 m³/h • Programmable with fixed values or up to 9 segment settings, MPC memory, timer 1 – 9,999 minutes • Visual and if required audible alarm, settings adjustable to your individual limit values • To protect the samples, the heating switches off in case of control malfunction • Stop of shaking action in case of overload, vibration and/or door opening • Interior lighting • Tray 800 × 420 mm with threaded hole screening for retaining clamps 50 ml – 5,000 ml, test tube frames, universal multi-spring retainer, holder for microtiter deepwell plates or adhesive tape/film • Connection 220/240 Volt, 50/60 Hz 1 2 920×532×395 1300×950×1310 430 2400 10 83 20779 3 920×532×395 1300×950×1310 630 3600 10 83 20782 Inner dimensions mm 920×532×395 Quantity trays Outer dimensions mm 1300×950×1310 Weight Power rating Order No. 10 83 20770 kg 250 W 1200 2 “ULTIMATE-CELL” stackable incubator shaker USOK 1257 • Intuitive TouchScreen panel, user-friendly and intelligent with autodiagnosis alarm system • QuinDrive Self Balance for an even orbital shaking motion • Extended chamber capacity • Highly precise temperature control system • Direct injection moisturising system • Advanced CO2 regulation with infrared sensor • Photosynthesis LED light • Contamination control • Password protected screen and door-locking mechanism prevent unauthorised access Technical data: Outer dimensions: Inner dimensions: CO2 range: CO2 accuracy: Humidity range: Humidity accuracy: Humidity reproducibility: Tray size: Max. tray load: Speed: Timer: Shaking mode: Shaking amplitudes: Air circulation: Light type: Spectrum: Light intensity: 1320 × 870 × 590 mm 940 × 570 × 480 mm 0 – 20% ± 0,15 40 – 80% RH at 25 – 55°C 1% RH ± 3% RH 850 × 450 mm (included in scope of delivery) 25 kg 30 – 300 rpm variably adjustable 0 – 9999 minutes orbital 12.5 / 25 or 50 mm selectable 360 m³ / hour LED, 50% red, 50% blue red 640 – 660 nm, blue 430 – 450 nm 13,000 lux Article Ultimate Cell Stackable Shaking Incubator USOK 1257 Steam humidification kit Lighting panel white Lighting panel red-blue Base frame Infrared CO2 kit Order No. 10 83 25269 10 83 25292 10 83 25293 10 83 26044 10 83 25290 10 83 25291 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 695 Continued on next page

697

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Incubators Clamps for Erlenmeyer flasks made from stainless steel Article Clamps for Erlenmeyer flask 50 ml Clamps for Erlenmeyer flask 100 ml Clamps for Erlenmeyer flask 250 ml Clamps for Erlenmeyer flask 500 ml Clamps for Erlenmeyer flask 1000 ml Clamps for Erlenmeyer flask 2000 ml Clamps for Erlenmeyer flask 5000 ml Sticky Mat 20 × 20 cm Please enter the webcode WWQ7T015 to see more accessories in our online catalogue Order No. 10 83 25457 10 83 25458 10 83 25459 10 83 25460 10 83 25462 10 83 25463 10 83 29244 10 83 26076 Shaking water baths see page 696 Roller Mixers Multi-Axle Rotating Mixer, Hecht-ASSISTENT CE Multi-axle rotating mixer with 5 synchronous turning, eccentric bearings The 5 synchronous bearings are designed to form a synchronous rotating surface for sample bottles etc. At the same time as being rotated around their longitudinal axis the bottles are rocked back and forth along their bearing surface. These units are designed specially for the uniform mixing of examination samples (e.g. whole blood) for haematological determinations and for the gentle mixing of other cell suspensions. They also prevent the sedimentation of samples (dispersions) of all kinds, e.g. paints, lacquers, oils, cosmetics etc. Technical data: External W × H × D: Roller length: Power supply: 180 × 95 × 430 mm 330 mm 230 V~, 50 Hz with connecting cable and earthing-pin plug 36 rpm Speed: Article Multi-axle rotating mixer with 5 rollers Order No. 52 18 00348 co d e b e w WWXRZ008 1 696 Tube Roller RM 2, Bühler Tube roller RM 2 Space saving tube roller with gentle tilting and rotating motion Basic equipment Basic device with 6 removable plastic rolls and spill tray Loading Capacity (Examples) Suitable for all standard tube sizes, flasks and universal vessels up to 80 mm in diameter thanks to removable rolls Technical data: Motion: Shaking platform: Dimensions of rolls: Number of rolls: Max. load: Shaking speed: Angle of tilt: Stroke at end of rolls: Runtime: Electrical supply: Dimensions (W×D×H): rotating, tilting motion 200 × 300 mm 300 × Ø 32 mm 6 pcs 2 kg 5 – 80 rpm, in steps of 5 3° fixed 15 mm 0 – 99 h 59 min / continuous 100 – 240 V, 50 / 60 Hz 244 × 465 × 115 mm Article 1 Tube roller RM 2 Accessories 2 Article 2 Overhead rack with 12 drillings à Ø 29,5 mm (other drillings on request) Order No. 10 61 68000 Order No. 10 61 60003

698

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WW7R3187 Roller Mixers Multi-Axle Rotating Mixer, IDL Five synchronous rotating PVC rollers provide a uniform gyrating surface for small sample bottles, etc. The sample bottles are simultaneously rotated about their longitudinal axis and rocked back and forth along their contact surface. This device is specially designed for the uniform mixing of research samples (e.g. whole blood) for hematologic determinations and for gentle mixing of other cell suspensions. Additionally, the device prevents probe sedimentation (dispersions) of all kinds, such as colors, paints, oils, cosmetics, etc. Changing of rolls is not possible. RM5F Type Outer dimensions W × D × H mm 480 × 180 × 113 Roller length usable Weight Voltage Power output Speed in no load Max. load Order No. mm 334 kg 3.7 VDC 24 W 25 min-1 40 kg 5 10 00 60207 Tube Roller, Phoenix Instrument The tube roller provides gentle and effective mixing by rocking and rolling action. The adjustment of speed will be done with a knob and a scale. We are offering 2 years warranty. co d e b e w WWSB5016 Technical data: Power supply: Shaking movement: Number of rolls: Speed: Run type: Max. load: Dimensions (D×W×H): Ambient temperature: 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz roll and tilt 6 5 to 70 rpm continuous 4 kg 460 × 260 × 120 mm 4 to 40°C Article Tube roller RS-TR 5 Order No. 10 13 77905 Roller Incubators Hybridisation-Flasks, Rettberg Hybridisation-flasks made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Hybridization flasks made of borosilicate glass 3.3, complete with special polypropylene screw top and special buna N O-ring seal, screw thread GL 45. The flasks should be or- dered according to the sizes indicated below for hybridization incubators as supplied by a variety of manufacturers. co d e b e w WWQVD160 Length approx. mm 300 300 273 250 225 150 Outer Ø approx. mm 50 40 50 40 40 40 Other sizes on request. Inner Ø approx. mm 45 35 45 35 35 35 Order No. 13 41 12300 13 41 14300 13 41 18273 10 70 23250 13 41 19225 13 41 20150 Spare parts Article Special screw cap made of PP for hybridization bottles Special round ring seal made of Perbunan Order No. 13 41 22110 13 41 22120 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 697

699

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators co d e b e w WW18A012 Overhead Mixers Rotating Shakers, LAUDA Special shaker with uniform rotating motion. Versatile, e.g. for mixing and processing of soil samples, powders or viscous substances. Compact, low-wear drive mechanism. Housing made of electrolytically galvanized, pow- der-coated steel sheet. Clearly laid out control panel for easy operation: LED display for speed indication. Rotating rack with lock for easy securing of the sample vessels. Elec- tronic speed control, stepless, constant speed during continuous operation. Rotating rack with ball bearings on both sides, in four planes, each plane with three holding frames to accommodate a max. of 12 flasks/vessels, round or square, up to a diameter of Ø 110 mm and a height of max. 270 mm. A d.c. motor with overload protection drives the unit. Holding frame for safe, secure clamping of the sample vessels, made of stainless steel. The unit can be used in ambient temperatures between +10°C and +40°C. Maintenance free and CE marked. Technical data: Overall dimensions (W×D×H): 770 × 700 × 715 mm Load: Motion: Capacity: Bottle/vessel dimensions: max. 20 kg with uniform load distribution orbital rotating max. 12 bottles/vessels up to max. Ø 110 mm and 1 up to max. 270 mm height, round or square 1 to 20 min-1 230 V, 50/60 Hz, 100 W 62/78 kg Revolutions: Electrical connection: Net/gross weight: Article Rotating shaker type VS 20 OH Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 52 11 33040 Rotating Shakers, neoLab® co d e b e w WW2NY272 Rotating Shakers For overhead mixing-through of samples in test tubes or reaction vessels. The ves- sels are held by the vinyl coated spring steel clamps. The rotating plate can be adjusted to an angle between 27° and 90° and is exchangeable without any trouble. Please order the rotating plate separately. Power connection lead is included. Further rotating plates on request. Power supply: 230 V/50 Hz Speed Display rpm 10 fix without 5 – 50 variabel without 5 – 50 variabel digital (speed, timer) Wght W × D × H mm kg 210×200×220 2.6 210×200×270 3.6 210×200×270 3.8 Order No. 52 01 21175 10 01 21184 10 01 21185 Rotating plate Article Rotating disk for test tubes 1.5/2.0 ml Rotating disk for 20 microtubes 11-15 mm Ø Rotating disk for test tubes 15 ml, 14-18 mm Ø Rotating disk for test tubes 50 ml, 30 mm Ø Adapter fo dual disk support Order No. 52 01 21179 52 01 21176 52 01 21177 10 01 21182 10 01 21183 co d e b e w 698 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

700

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Overhead Mixers Rotator with Vortex Mixer, neoLab® Rotator with variable speed in combination with the advantages of a vortexer. From soft hybridization at low speed to rapid vortexing, the various racks and operating varia- tions make it all possible. Improve your blotting results with the blotting rack. The blotting modes B1 – B4 are spe- cifically designed for western blot protocols (Vibrospin Technology). Rigorously tested, this blotting method has consistently excelled in the sensitivity and specificity of western blots. Transform your rotator with vortexer into a rocking shaker with the rocking platform. • Racks for all receptacles from 0.5 to 50 ml • 34 different programs • 6 variable vortexer programs • 3 additional programs can be stored separately • Maintenance-free motor • Combi Rack can be loaded with 2 × 50 ml, 4 × 15 ml, 8 × 5 ml and 8 × 1.5 ml Technical data: Rotation: Programs: Ambient temperature: Rel. air humidity: Dimensions (W × D × H): 344 × 125 × 168 mm 1.6 kg (without racks) Weight: Connection: 12 V, inc. AC adapter, 1500 mA Rotator with Vortex Mixer 1 to 99 RPM (increments of 1) 34 2 to 50°C max. 80% Article Rotator without rack Racks Article Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack Combination rack Blotting rack Rocking rack Order No. 52 01 70045 Order No. 52 01 70046 10 01 70044 52 01 70047 52 01 70048 52 01 70049 52 01 70050 10 01 70043 10 01 70053 for 10 × 30 mm Ø 0.5 ml Eppis 16 × 16 mm Ø 28 × 13 mm Ø 32 × 11 mm Ø 10, 13, 16, 30 mm Ø 50 ml vials/horizontally Revolver Rotator, neoLab® The rotator is designed for a multitude of mixing jobs in biochemistry, histochemistry, clinical chemistry and molecular biology. Sample vessels of different volumes can be fixed in any intermediate position. Both halves of the paddle can be arranged independently of each other between 0 and 90°. The paddle is easy to fix by means of plug connection without the need for tools. The paddle for 6x50 ml tubes can be inserted in vertical and in horizontal position. Scope of delivery: • Rotator incl. power pack • 2 paddles for 7 × 10/15 ml tubes each • 2 paddles for 7 × 5/7 ml blood sample tubes each • 2 paddles for 15 × 1.5/2.0 ml reaction vessels each • 2 paddles for 21 × 0.5/0.8 ml tubes each • 1 paddle for 6 × 50 ml tubes • 1 additional rotary axis for paddle 6 × 50 mm • 10 spare O-rings Technical data: Dimensions (W×D×H): 225 × 154 × 195 mm Permissible operating temperature: 4 to 60°C at 80% rF Power supply: 230/240 V, 50/60 Hz Revolver Rotator with fixed speed Article Revolver Rotator, fixed speed Speed rpm 18 Weight kg 0.8 Order No. 10 01 96049 Revolver Rotator with variable speed With variable speed and Vortex mode which is automatically enabled every 40 degree in direction of rotation. The combination of rotation and oscillation provides for more efficient sample mixing. co d e b e w WW2NY304 co d e b e w WW2NY390 Article Revolver Rotator, variable speed Display Weight Speed rpm 10 – 40 LED kg 1.2 Order No. 10 01 96050 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 699 Continued on next page

701

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Overhead Mixers Accessories Article Rotation paddle for 7 tubes Rotation paddle for 7 blood sample tubes Rotation paddle for 15 reaction vessels Rotation paddle for 21 tubes Rotation paddle for 6 tubes Tubes ml 10/15 5/7 1.5/2.0 0.5/0.8 50 Order No. 10 01 96051 10 01 96052 10 01 96053 10 01 96054 10 01 96055 PU pc/Pack 2 2 2 2 1 Rotator Digi Mixer Sunlab®, neoLab® The Sunlab® Rotator Digi Mixer is the practical solution for intensive or gentle shak- ing or for inverting of samples in powder or liquid form. Speed, time, and amplitude can be infinitely set in 10 different programs. The large LCD display gives you a clear overview of all parameters. Up to 99 UpM can be set. Easy operation, highly versatile. Thanks to its low weight, the Digi Mixer can easily set up in different locations. Use the Digi Mixer on the workbench, in the cool room, incubator, or safety workbench. The Digi Mixer is designed for temperatures between 4 – 65 °C and a humidity of max. 80% (with 20°C). The scope of delivery of the Digi Mixer comprises the combi rack for 1.5, 5, 15 and 50 ml. Additional racks for reaction vessels of various volumes are available as accesso- ries. They can be shaken vertically, horizontally, or variably. Dimensions: approx. 42 × 15 × 19 cm (L×W×H) Article Rotator Digi Mixer with combirack Rack Rack Rack Rack Rack for tubes ml 1.5 / 2 / 5 / 15 / 50 1.5 / 2 5 / 15 50 5 / 15 50 Places Filling Order No. 30 36 22 12 12 12 variabel 10 01 98801 variabel vertical vertical horizontal horizontal 10 01 98802 10 01 98803 10 01 98804 10 01 98805 10 01 98806 Disk-Mixer and Rotator, Phoenix Instrument Disk-Mixer RS-RD 20 For gentle and effective mixing samples in various tubes and flasks. Adjustment and control of the parameter speed and time can be done easily via the LCD-display. • instrument will be supplied incl. tube holder (RS-RR20) or disk mixer (RS-RD 20) for 50 ml tubes • Dual-Use–rotator RS-RR 20 can also be used as disk mixer • fix stand with anti-slipping feet • backlit display to adjust speed and time • comprehensive range of accessories • 2 years warranty Technical data: Power / frequency: Speed: Timer function: Run type: Ambient temperature: Article 1 Disk mixer RS-RD 20 2 Rotator RS-RR 20 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz 10 to 70 rpm 1 to 1199 Min. timer/continuous 4 to 40°C Disk mixer for RS-RD 20 (accessories) Article Disk modul RSE-RD 05 Disk modul RSE-RD 10 Disk modul RSE-RD 15 Adapter RSE-RD 50 for 60 × 1.5 ml tubes 16 × 15 ml tubes 8 × 50 ml tubes to use several disk moduls Order No. 10 13 75820 10 13 75920 Order No. 10 13 75805 10 13 75810 10 13 75815 10 13 75850 Continued on next page co d e b e w WW2NY361 2 co d e b e w 700 WWSB5015 1

702

Stirring, Shaking Systems Shakers, Incubators Overhead Mixers Tube holders for RS-RR 20 (accessories) for Article Rotator modul RSE-RR 05 48 × 1.5 ml tubes Rotator modul RSE-RR 10 24 × 15 ml tubes Rotator modul RSE-RR 15 24 × 50 ml tubes Rotator modul RSE-RR 25 32 × 1.5 ml tubes Rotator modul RSE-RR 30 16 × 15 ml tubes Rotator modul RSE-RR 35 16 × 50 ml tubes Mixing horizontal horizontal horizontal vertical vertical vertical Order No. 10 13 75905 10 13 75910 10 13 75915 10 13 75925 10 13 75930 10 13 75935 3 4 co d e b e w WWQ7T018 Disk-Mixer and rotator RS-RD 5 / RS-RR 5 These analog rotators are characterized by a compact design and an excellent price/ performance ratio. Delivery comprises the top unit with holding clamps for 1.5/2 ml, 15 ml, and 50 ml tubes. Technical data: Power / frequency: Speed: Article 3 Disk-mixer RS-RD 5 4 Rotator RS-RR 5 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz 10 to 80 rpm Order No. 10 13 75705 10 13 75605 Overhead Shaker MZ40, Zefa The overhead shaker MZ40 is made of solid aluminum and stainless steel and allows for simultaneous treatment of up to 40 samples. Each of the four levels of the MZ40 is equipped with 10 locking devices and a snap-action mechanism matching the size of your bottle or vessel. The samples are treated at 122 Nm shaft power constantly at four revo- lutions per minute. A speed regulator extendable to 1 to 16 rpm is available as an option. A transparent front screen prevents the user from reaching into the machine while the unit is running: When the screen is raised, the unit stops immediately. While the screen is raised, the platform can be moved at the push of a button. Pursuant to the EU Directive “Deutsches Einheitsverfahren zur Wasser-, Abwasser- und Schlammuntersuchung – Bes- timmung der Eluierbarkeit mit Wasser” (German standard methods for the examination of water, waste water and sludge – determination of leachability with water). Bottles/vessels are not comprised in the delivery. • Large robust unit made of seawater-proof aluminium and stainless steel for overhead shaking of sediment and leachate bottles and other vessels • Capacity for max. 40 bottles or vessels of up to 2,000 ml • Speed permanently set to 4 rpm (can be extended to variable speeds as an option) • Sizes (W×D×H) 1450 × 820 × 800 mm • 122 Nm shaft power • Wattage 220 Watt, power consumption 400V/50-60 Hz Article Overhead shaker MZ40 Surcharge for variable speed 1 to 16 revolutions per minute Stacking frame for placing one unit of top of another Order No. 10 83 23318 10 83 23319 10 83 23320 We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 701

703

KNOWLEDGE CENTRIFUGATION As a rule, a mixture has to be separated in order to obtain single components. A simple and widely used separation method is centrifugation. Centrifuges use the centrifugal forces which have an impact on the mixture components during a rotation to accelerate the separation process. Centrifuges whose separation principle is based on the different behaviours of the mixture components in the gravity field are called sedimentation centrifuges. During sedimentation, the different components of a mixtures organise in certain layers. The sinking or sedimentation speed of the components mainly depends on their density. Particles of highest density settle at the bottom. The remaining substances following in the order of decreasing density. Under the influence of natural gravity, the sedimentation can take hours or days. Because the gravitation forces in the cen- trifuge are multiples of gravity, the mixture components separate much quicker. A significant number of different rotor types has been developed for centrifuges. In laboratory centrifuges, fixed-angle rotors and swing-bucket rotors are used most frequently. Both rotor types have specific benefits. The fixed-angle rotor Fixed-angle rotors are almost always solid bodies with smooth and closed surfaces. They have holes where the centrifuging ves- sels are inserted. The sample tubes are in a fixed angle to the ro- tor axes and they keep this angle during cen- trifugation. Due to their design, fixed-angle rotors provide low aerodynamic resistance and can reach higher revolutions than swing-bucket rotors at the same drive capacity. The centrifuged particles first move radially outward, then hit the tilted tube wall after a relatively short distance, and then slide down to the bottom of the tube, driven by grav- ity. Convection streams in the tube additionally contribute to a quicker sedimentation. Therefore, fixed-angle rotors make relatively short centrifug- ing times possible. The swing- bucket rotor In this type of rotor, the pendants swing to up to 90° from the vertical position with increasing rotor revo- lution. Therefore, the centrifuging tubes orientate towards the effective field of grav- ity. The sedimentation process happens to- wards the tube axis, so that the sediment is formed at the bottom of the tube in evenly thick layers. Due to strong aerodynamic resistance, which is caused by the ragged form of the rotors with the swinging pendants, the swing-bucket rotors reach lower revolutions than comparable fixed-angle ro- tors. This and the longer way which the particles in the swing-bucket rotor have to cover to the tube bottom results in longer centrifuging times. Calculation of the centrifugal force The relative centrifugal force (RCF) is a major evaluation criterion of the separation performance of a centrifuge or a rotor. The relative centrifugal force, also called g-number, indicates the factor by which the centrifugal force exceeds the gravitational acceleration. The g-number is only a number and does not have a unit. To determine the RCF, the rotor diameter and the revolution are needed. The following formula is used: RCF = (n/1000)2 x r x 1,118 n = Revolution in min-1 (RPM) r = Radius in mm (= distance between rotor centre and bottom of the centrifuge tube) Important note for practical application: doubling the rotor radius of a centrifuge results in doubling the relative centrifugal force, doub ling the revolution results in quadruplication. 702

704

Separating Systems Centrifugation CHAPTER OVERVIEW Centrifugation 703 Micro Centrifuges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges . . . . . . 712 Centrifuge Tubes, Racks see Containers . . . . . . . . . . 134 Sieving 755 Sieving Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755 Sieving Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756 Test Sieves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760 Filtration 721 Filter Papers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721 Membrane Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730 Syringe Filters, Filter Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734 Membrane Filtration Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740 Glass Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743 Filtration Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746 Filter Funnels see Filtration Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Filtering Flasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750 Filtration Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751 Evaporation 765 Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765 Rotary Evaporators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769 Freeze Drying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771 Chromatography 774 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774 Thin Layer Chromatography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775 KNOWLEDGE Centrifugation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 KNOWLEDGE Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720 Micro Centrifuges Micro Centrifuges, Eppendorf 1 Micro centrifuges MiniSpin® and MiniSpin® plus Product features of the MiniSpin® and MiniSpin® plus centrifuges: • Exceptionally small footprint • Extremely quiet • Maintenance-free drive Additional product features of the MiniSpin® centrifuge: • Includes standard rotor made of anodized aluminum • Max. speed of 13,400 rpm; max. rcf of 12,100 x g Additional product features of the MiniSpin® plus centrifuge: • Max. speed of 14,500 rpm; max. rcf 14,100 x g • rpm/rcf setting as required • Timer can be set up to 99 minutes • Continuous centrifugation possible Article Centrifuge MiniSpin® 230 V/50-60 Hz, incl. standard rotor, anodized aluminium, 45° angle, 12 bores for Order No. 55 69 54520 1.5/2 ml reaction tubes with max. Ø 11 mm, complete with stainless steel lid Article Centrifuge MiniSpin® plus 230 V/50-60 Hz, incl. “F-45-12-11” rotor, in refined black aluminium, 45° angle, 12 bores Order No. 55 69 54530 for 1.5/2 ml reaction tubes with max. Ø 11 mm, complete with stainless steel lid Accessories including rotor cover Article 2 PCR strip rotor F-55-16-5-PCR Rotor cover Stainless steel with knurled nut Adapter For 0.5 ml micro centrifuge tube and 0.6 ml Microtainers®, Order No. 10 69 27007 55 69 02000 55 69 16001 6 pieces Adapter For 0.4 ml micro centrifuge tube, 6 pieces Adapter For 0.2 ml PCR tube, 6 pieces BD Microtainer®: registered trademark of Becton Dickinson 55 69 17008 55 69 15005 co d e b e w WWQJ3039 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 703

705

Separating Systems Centrifugation Micro Centrifuges Micro-centrifuge 5418 R, Eppendorf Centrifuge 5418 R The compact Centrifuge 5418 R has a capacity of 18 × 1.5/2.0 ml vessels and reaches a maximum RCF of 16,873 × g at a revolution of 14,000 1/min. The micro centrifuge is equipped with a aerosol-proof standard rotor, which can be operated without rotor lid for your convenience, without the noise level increasing noticeably. The Centrifuge 5418 R is the perfect solution for customers who require a high-quality centrifuge for processing small samples. Features • 18-place rotor for 1.5/2.0 ml test tubes • Max. 16,873 × g • Quiet operation even without rotor lid • Aerosol-proof standard rotor, certified • Comfortable and intuitive two-button-operation, typical for Eppendorf • Short-spin key • Automatic lid opening after end of procedure • Needs very little space • The patented compressor technology reduces vibrations to a minimum to protect your valuable sample! • Temperature range: 0°C to +40°C • Low access height of 26 cm due to refrigeration unit at the rear of the device • Constant 4°C at max. speed • Fast Temp function for quick pre-cooling of the centrifuge • Constant temperature during permanent cooling when no centrifugation is performed 2 co d e b e w 3 WWQJ3065 including rotor FA-45-18-11 Article 1 Micro-centrifuge 5418 R, 230 V/50-60 Hz (refrigerated) 2 Rotor FA-45-18-11 3 Rotor cover FA-45-18-11 aerosol consistent including rotor cover, aerosol consistent Order No. 10 69 00013 10 69 07005 10 69 08001 Centrifuge 5420 • Non-refrigerated • Keyboard • 230 V/50 – 60 Hz 5 Article 4 Centrifuge 5420, rotor FA-24×2 Centrifuge 5420 G, Rotor FA-24x2 Centrifuge 5420, without rotor Centrifuge 5420 G, without rotor 5 Rotor FA-24x2 Aerosol-tight, for 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml tubes, incl. aerosol-tight rotor lid 6 Rotor F-32x0.2-PCR For 32 × 0.2 ml PCR tubes or 4 × 8 PCR strips, incl. rotor lid Order No. 10 69 42016 10 69 42113 10 69 20210 10 69 80318 10 69 40001 10 69 44007 Micro-centrifuge 5424 R and 5425, Eppendorf Micro-centrifuge 5424 and 5424 R With its four rotors, the variable 24-place micro centrifuge by Eppendorf fits perfectly in every biomolecular laboratory. It meets all requirements for a high-quality, 24-place micro centrifuge. By default, the Micro Centrifuge 5424 is equipped with an aerosol-proof rotor which can be operated without lid for your convenience, without the noise level increasing noticeably. • 24-place-rotor for 1.5/2.0 ml test tubes • Max. 20,238 x g • Very quiet, even without rotor lid • Aerosol-proof standard rotor, certified • Selection between 4 different rotors • Even better chemical resistance by means of special coating • 18-place-kit-rotor for 4 x 8er PCR-vessel strips Continued on next page 1 4 704 6

706

Separating Systems Centrifugation co d e b e w WWQJ3066 Micro Centrifuges • Optional with turning knobs or membrane keyboard • Version with buttons speeds up the setting of parameters • Membrane version facilitates cleaning the display • Automatic lid opening after end of procedure • Low access height Refrigeration features • The patented compressor technology reduces vibrations to a minimum to protect your valuable sample! • Temperature range: -9°C to +40°C • Small footprint and low access height of 26 cm due to refrigeration unit at the rear of the device • Constant 4°C at max. speed • Fast Temp function for quick pre-cooling of the centrifuge, f.e. from Z21°C to 4° in only 8 minutes • Constant temperature during permanent cooling when no centrifugation is performed Article 1 Micro-centrifuge 5424 R, 230 V/50 Hz, knob variant (refrigerated) Including rotor FA-45-24-11 Micro-centrifuge 5424 R, 230 V/50 Hz, foil variant (refrigerated) Including rotor FA-45-24-11 Micro-centrifuge 5424 R, 230 V/50 Hz, knob variant (refrigerated) Without rotor Micro-centrifuge 5424 R, 230 V/50 Hz, foil variant (refrigerated) Including rotor cover, aerosol consistent, coated Including rotor cover, aerosol consistent Without rotor 2 Rotor FA-45-24-11, incl. rotor cover Rotor cover for FA-45-24-11 Aerosol consistent 3 Rotor FA-45-24-11-Special Rotor cover for FA-45-24-11-Special Aerosol consistent, coated 4 Rotor FA-45-18-11-Kit Rotor cover for FA-45-18-11-Kit 5 Rotor FA-45-32-5-PCR Rotor cover for FA-45-32-5-PCR Including rotor cover Including rotor cover Micro-centrifuge 5425 • Non-refrigerated • 230 V/50 – 60 Hz Article Centrifuge 5425, without rotor, keyboard 6 Centrifuge 5425, without rotor, rotary knobs Centrifuge 5425, with rotor, keyboard Centrifuge 5425, with rotor, rotary knobs Rotor FA-24x2 Aerosol-tight, for 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml tubes, incl. aerosol-tight rotor lid Order No. 10 69 40413 10 69 40014 10 69 40618 10 69 40219 10 69 02007 10 69 03003 10 69 00004 10 69 01000 10 69 06002 10 69 07009 10 69 04000 10 69 08005 Order No. 10 69 50310 10 69 50719 10 69 50115 10 69 50514 10 69 50006 Rotor FA-24x2-PTFE Aerosol-tight, with PTFE coating, for 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml tubes, 10 69 53005 incl. aerosol-tight rotor lid Rotor FA-10x5 Aerosol-tight, for 10 × 5.0 ml tubes (snap and screw cap), 10 69 55008 incl. aerosol-tight rotor lid Rotor FA-18x2-Kit Aerosol-tight, for 18 × 1.5/2.0 ml tubes or spin columns, incl. aerosol-tight rotor lid Rotor F-32x0.2-PCR For 32 × 0.2 ml PCR tubes or 4 × 8 PCR strips, incl. rotor lid Rotor S-96x0.2-PCR For 96 × 0.2 ml PCR tubes or 12 × 8 PCR strips, incl. buckets 10 69 78007 10 69 51001 10 69 51204 3 5 1 2 4 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 705

707

Separating Systems Centrifugation co d e b e w WWQJ3072 Micro Centrifuges Micro-centrifuge 5427 R, Eppendorf If there is a demand for high sample throughput, many centrifuges call it a day in regards to capacity. This does not apply to the Centrifuge 5427 R. With a new double-row 48-place rotor it lives up to the increased efficiency requirements with fast running times in a safe and reliable manner. This is supported by an intuitive human interface and design concept which makes for a compelling user comfort and ensures a smooth workflow. For these reasons, the Centrifuge 5427 R becomes the ideal solution for high-end re- search applications. In addition, this microcentrifuge convinces with an innovative compressor technology which—by taking ecological aspects into account—tempers sensible samples precisely to guarantee a proper preparation of your analysis. • New 48-place rotor reduces time expenditure of daily routine works significantly • Short-Spin function allows for quick short centrifugation with pre-selectable rotation speed • Eppendorf QuickLock system for quick rotor lid opening and closing • Very quiet operation due to further improved sound insulation • FastTemp for rapid pre-cooling of the centrifuge, e.g. from 23°C to 4°C in approx. 11 minutes • Continuous cooling keeps the temperature after the run constant – Your samples stay safe • Alternatively to continuous cooling: ECO-shut off of the compressor (adjustable after 1, 2, 4 or 8 hours of non-use) for a lower energy consumption 2 3 5 7 WWQJ3067 1 4 6 8 co d e b e w 706 including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) Article Centrifuge 5427 R 230 V/50-60 Hz, with knobs Centrifuge 5427 R with rotor FA-45-24-11 Centrifuge 5427 R with rotor FA-45-30-11 1 Rotor FA-45-24-11 2 Rotor F-45-30-11, incl. rotor cover including rotor cover 3 Rotor FA-45-30-11 4 Rotor FA-45-48-11 5 Rotor FA-45-24-11-Kit 6 Rotor F-45-48-11 7 Rotor S-24-11-AT Adapter For 0.2 ml PCR tube, 6 pieces Adapter For 0.4 ml micro centrifuge tube, 6 pieces Adapter For 0.5 ml micro centrifuge tube and including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) 0.6 ml Microtainers®, 6 pieces 8 Rotor F-45-48-5-PCR including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) including rotor cover Order No. 10 69 90012 10 69 90217 10 69 90535 10 69 97020 10 69 97080 10 69 97060 10 69 97100 10 69 97040 10 69 97120 10 69 97150 55 69 15005 55 69 17008 55 69 16001 10 69 97140 1) certified aerosol consistent Microcentrifuge 5430 and 5430 R, Eppendorf This versatile 30-place centrifuge is incomparably fast and offers numerous application possibilities due to its wide selection of rotors. The modern and ideally designed control panel is the result of an ergonomics study. This combination of programmable applica- tions and ergonomic control panel makes your daily laboratory work easier and makes concrete application possible. The Centrifuge 5430 and Centrifuge 5430 R offer a versatile choice of high quality aluminium rotors which serve specific applications. In this regard, the eight proven rotor types have been complemented with further especially designed models. Besides the 48-place rotors (1.5/2.0 ml), these include a swing bucket rotor for up to 24 × 2.0 ml tubes. All new aerosol-tight rotors come with Eppendorf QuickLock-seal- ing . The Centrifuge 5430 reaches a maximum RCF of over 30,000 × g. • 30-place centrifuge for 1.5/2.0 test tubes • Unrivalled 30,130 × g • Selection between 8 different rotors, e.g. MTP-rotor, Falcon-rotor • Automatic rotor recognition • Saves up to 50 routine programmes • Menu-operated control in 4 languages • LCD-display with background illumination • Automatic lid opening after end of procedure Additional features of 5430 R centrifuges • Temperature range: -11°C to +40°C • +4°C at max. speed with all rotors Continued on next page

708

Separating Systems Centrifugation Micro Centrifuges • Continuous refrigeration after centrifugation • “Fast Temp” function for fastest-possible reaching the required temperature • “Fast Temp pro” function for pre-cooling the centrifuge to have it ready for startup at the time you need it 10 69 00210 10 69 00414 including rotor FA-45-30-11 including rotor FA-45-30-11 including rotor FA-45-30-11 including rotor FA-45-30-11 10 69 00619 10 69 27754 Order No. 10 69 00216 10 69 00011 10 69 00411 10 69 00615 10 69 00015 including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) 2) Article Centrifuge 5430, foil variant, 230 V Centrifuge 5430, foil variant, 230 V without rotor Centrifuge 5430, knob variant, 230 V Centrifuge 5430, knob variant, 230 V without rotor Centrifuge 5430 R, foil variant, 230 V Centrifuge 5430 R, foil variant, 230 V without rotor Centrifuge 5430 R, knob variant, 230 V Centrifuge 5430 R, knob variant, 230 V without rotor 1 Rotor FA-45-48-11 2 Rotor F-45-48-11 3 Rotor S-24-11-AT 4 Rotor FA-45-30-11 5 Rotor F-45-30-11 6 Rotor FA-45-24-11-Kit 7 Rotor FA-45-24-11-HS 8 Rotor F-45-18-17-Cryo 9 Rotor F-45-64-5-PCR Adapter for rotor F-45-64-5-PCR (set of 4 pcs) AT Rotor F-35-6-30 Adapter 1 x 50 ml Falcon® for F-35-6-30 (set of 2 pcs) Adapter 1 x 15 ml Falcon® for F-35-6-30 (set of 2 pcs) AK A-2-MTP, incl. 2 MTP buckets and rotor cover 10 69 00005 MTP replacement buckets for A-2-MTP (set of 2 pcs) 10 69 22009 including rotor cover and adapter for 15/50 ml tubes including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) 2) including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) including rotor cover, aerosol consistent1) 10 69 17005 10 69 16009 10 69 27000 10 69 03004 10 69 10000 10 69 05007 10 69 14006 10 69 27755 10 69 27757 10 69 27753 10 69 12003 including rotor cover and adapter including rotor cover and adapter including rotor cover2) including rotor cover 10 69 26004 1 3 6 8 AT 2 4 5 7 9 AK 1) Certified aerosol-tight 2) Please contact your local Eppendorf organization or dealer about required software update for your existing devices. Micro Centrifuges, Phoenix Instrument Clinical centrifuge CD-0412 Well-priced, universal centrifuge for all lab and clinical application, fully equipped, easy handling, corresponds with all safety demands. Technical data: Speed: 300 to 4500 min-1, in 100 min-1 steps Max. RCF: Time: Dimensions: Weight: Max. capacity: Noise level: Scope of delivery: 2490 g 0.5 to 99 minutes, continuous 26 × 25 × 14 cm 6 kg 8 × 15 ml, 12 × 10, 7, 5 ml < 56 db inclusive CD04-8-15, CD04-A15, CD04-A15plug Article AL Benchtop centrifuge CD-0412 co d e b e w Order No. 10 13 70412 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. co d e b e w WWSB5021 AL 707

709

Separating Systems Centrifugation Micro Centrifuges Accessories for CD-0412 Article CD04-8-15 rotor, 8 × 15 ml CD04-A15 adapter, 12 pieces CD04-A15plug adapter mat, 12 pieces Order No. 10 13 74815 10 13 74151 10 13 74152 Mini centrifuge CD-1008 Small Mini centrifuge with a fix speed of 7000 rpm. The max. capacity is 8 × 1.5/2 ml. Centrifuge includes two rotors, 8 × 1.5/2 ml und 2 × 8 × 0.2 ml PCR. Available in two different lid colours. Technical data: Speed: Max. RCF: Time: Dimension: Weight: Max. capacity: Scope of delivery: 7000 rpm 2680 g continuous 150 × 150 × 120 mm 0.5 kg 8 × 1.5/2 ml inclusive CD 08-2, CD 02-PCR 8 1 Article 1 Mini centrifuge CD-1008, lid colour blue Mini centrifuge CD-1008, lid colour green Order No. 10 13 71081 10 13 71084 Accessories CD-1008 Article CD08-8-2 rotor, 8 × 1.5/2 ml CD08-2-PCR8 Rotor, 2 × 8 × 0.2 ml PCR CD08-A02 Adapter 2 ml to 0.2 ml, 8 pieces CD08-A05 Adapter 2 ml to 0.5 ml, 8 pieces Micro centrifuge CD-2012 Order No. 10 13 70882 10 13 70828 10 13 70803 10 13 70805 Small, powerful Micro centrifuge. The backlit display and the clear structure of control elements allows an easy operation for the user. The centrifuge corresponds with all safe- ty standards. Technical data: Speed: Max. RCF: Time: Dimensions: Weight: Max. capacity: Scope of delivery: 15000 rpm in 100 rpm steps 15100 g 0.5 to 99 minutes, continuous 260 × 250 × 140 mm 6 kg 12 × 1.5/2 ml inclusive CD12-2P 2 Article 2 Micro centrifuge CD-2012 Order No. 10 13 72012 Accessories for CD-2012 Article CD12-2P rotor with lid, 12 × 1.5/2 ml CD12-A02 adapter 2 ml to 0.2 ml, 24 pieces CD12-A05 adapter 2 ml to 0.5 ml, 24 pieces Order No. 10 13 71220 10 13 71203 10 13 71205 Micro centrifuges CD-3024 High speed Micro centrifuge up to 15000 rpm and a capacity of 24 × 1.5/2 ml or 18 × 5 ml. Comfortable and intuitive operation for the user. The centrifuge corresponds with all safe- ty standards. Technical data: Speed: Max. RCF: Time: Max. capacity: 200 to 15000 rpm in 10 rpm steps 212380 g 0.5 to 99 minutes, continuous 18 × 5 ml, 24 × 2 ml, 36 × 0.5 ml Article 3 Micro centrifuge CD-3024 280×360×270 Dimensions mm Wght kg 12 Temp. range °C — Order No. 10 13 73024 Accessories for CD-3024 Article Order No. CD24-18-5 rotor with lid, 18 × 5 ml, bio-safe 10 13 72418 CD24-24-2 rotor with lid, 24 × 1.5/2 ml, bio-safe 10 13 72424 CD24-36-05 rotor with lid, 36 × 0.5 ml, bio-safe 10 13 72436 CD24-4-PCR8 rotor with lid, 4 × 8 × 0,2 ml PCR, bio-safe 10 13 72448 CD12-A02 adapter 2 ml to 0.2 ml, 24 pieces 10 13 71203 CD12-A05 adapter 2 ml to 0.5 ml, 24 pieces 10 13 71205 CD24-A02-36 adapter 0.5 ml to 0.2 ml, 36 pieces 10 13 72402 Continued on next page 3 708

710

Separating Systems Centrifugation Micro Centrifuges High speed micro centrifuge CD-3024R, refrigerated The refrigerated high speed Micro centrifuge CD-3124R has a capacity of 24 × 2 ml, 18 × 5 ml or 36 × 0.5 ml. Easy handling and control is guaranteed with the backlit LCD-Display and the clear oper- ation panel. For safety reasons the centrifuges are equipped with dual door interlock, self-control of speed and temperature • Centrifuge chamber door with automatic adsorption door lock design • Up to 9 program storage capacity according to experimental needs • Self diagnostic, control of speed and temperature • User-friendly large LCD display shows running information • Powerful cooling capacity compressor • Warranty 2 years Technical data: Speed: Max. RCF: Temperature: Time: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Max. capacity: Noise level: Rotor: Scope of delievry: 200 – 15.000 rpm in 100 rpm Schritten 21,380 g -20 – 40°C 0.5 – 99 minutes, continous 34 × 55 × 28 cm 30 kg 1.5/2 ml × 24, 0.5 ml × 36, PCR 8 × 4, 5 ml × 18 < 56 db 24 × 1.5/2 ml, aerosol save CD24-24-2 Article 4 CD-3124R high-speed microcentrifuge, refrigerated Order No. 10 13 73124 Accessories for CD-3124R Article CD24-18-5 rotor with lid, 18 × 5 ml, bio-safe CD24-24-2 rotor with lid, 24 × 1.5/2 ml, bio-safe CD24-36-05 rotor with lid, 36 × 0.5 ml, bio-safe CD24-4-PCR8 rotor with lid, 4 × 8 × 0,2 ml PCR, bio-safe Order No. 10 13 72418 10 13 72424 10 13 72436 10 13 72448 4 Benchtop Centrifuges MIKRO 200 / 200 R, HETTICH Benchtop centrifuges MIKRO 200 / 200 R The MIKRO 200 are amongst the highest-speed microliter centrifuges in their class. Their range of accessories comprises rotors for microliter, PCR, and cryo tubes. MIKRO 200 achieves a maximum RCF of 21,382 with up to 30 tubes, enabling rapid processing of samples and optimal separation, at low noise levels of 54 dB(A). This unit is available with refrigeration and a temperature range from -10°C to +40°C (MIKRO 200 R). Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Power supply: Connected load: Max. speed: Max. RCF: Max. capacity: Emission/ Immunity: Cooling MIKRO 200 R: 275 × 344 × 260 mm (MIKRO 200) 281 × 553 × 260 mm (MIKRO 200 R) approx. 11.5 kg (MIKRO 200) approx. 28 kg (MIKRO 200 R) 200 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz (MIKRO 200) 200 – 240 V, 50 Hz (MIKRO 200 R) 240 VA (MIKRO 200) 450 VA (MIKRO 200 R) 15000 min-1 21382 30 × 1,5/2,0 ml EN/IEC 61326-1, class B adjustable from -10°C to +40°C, with precooling function and stand-by cooling Article 5 MIKRO 200, benchtop centrifuge without rotor 6 MIKRO 200 R, benchtop refrigerated centrifuge without rotor Order No. 55 56 12400 55 56 12405 Accessories Article Order No. Fixed-angle rotor 2434 for 24 × 1.5/2 ml, with lid bio-containment 10 56 12434 Fixed-angle rotor 2437 for 30 × 1.5/2 ml, with lid bio-containment 10 56 12437 Fixed-angle rotor 2428 for 24 × 0,2 - 1,5/2 ml and Spin Column Kits 10 56 12428 with lid with bio-containment More rotors and accessories on request. 5 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 709

711

Separating Systems Centrifugation co d e b e w WW2NY183 1 2 3 710 Micro Centrifuges Micro Centrifuges, neoLab® Sunlab® Mini-Centrifuge Mini Centrifuge with orange Design for 1.5 and 2 ml tubes (8 pcs.) in the standard rotor. 8 × 0.2 ml PCR tubes (also as strips) in the PCR strip rotor. The fixed RpM of 7000 is reached very quickly and is stabel throughout the period of usage. When opening the lid, the rotor stops almost imediately to reduce the users risk. Due to the optimized acoustic isolation the centrifuge onle reaches a soundlevel of 45 dB. Scope of delivery: • Centrifuge • Rotor for 8 × 1,5/2 ml Reaktionsgefäße • Rotor for 2 × 8 0.2 ml PCR Strips • 8 × Adapter for 2 ml to 0.2 ml PCR • 8 × Adapter for 2 ml to 0.5 ml PCR • Power cable • Manual Technical data: Sunlab model: RpM: RCF: Voltage: Dimensions: Weight: Perm. ambient temp: Perm rel. humidity: Certifications: SU1550 7000 2680 g 100 – 240 V, 50 Hz 150 × 150 × 120 mm 0.6 kg +5 to +40°C 80% DIN EN60529, IP21 Article 1 Sunlab® Mini-Centrifuge Spare adapters 2.0 ml to 0.2 ml PCR Spare adapters 2.0 ml to 0.5 ml PCR Spare rotor for 8 × 1.5/2 ml test tubes Spare rotor for 2 × 8 0.2 ml PCR strips Speed rpm 7000 PU Order No. 10 01 98550 8 pc/Pack 10 01 98551 8 pc/Pack 10 01 98552 10 01 98553 10 01 98554 neoFuge® 8-6K Micro Centrifuge The micro centrifuge neoFuge® 8-6K with a fixed rotation speed of 6000 rpm is the optimal solution if you need to centrifuge again quickly. The neoFuge is particularly suitable for microfiltration, cell separation, centrifugal sedimentation in a tube and simple centrifuging. It takes up little space on the bench due to the slim design. The centrifuge has 8 places for standard 1.5 and 2.0 ml reaction vessels. The scope of delivery also includes adapters for 0.2 and 0.5 ml (PCR) reaction tubes as well as adapters for 8-strip PCR reaction vessels. Four suction cups on the bottom of the centrifuge ensure a firm stand during operation. In addition, the emergency stop function ensures immediate braking of the rotor when opening the lid. Technical data: Dimensions (W × H × D): 157× 115 × 157 mm Capacity: Exchangeable rotor for 2 × 8 × 0.2 ml PCR 8-stripes 8 × 2.0 ml / 1.5 ml / 0.5 / 0.2 ml Article 2 neoFuge® 8-6K micro centrifuge Order No. 10 01 06080 Mini Star centrifuge Mini centrifuge in colorful design with 2 rotors for reaction vessels of different sizes. The black rotor can hold a maximum of 18 vessels of 1.5 to 2.0 ml and from 0.2 to 05 ml. The green rotor is suitable only for PCR strips. The rotors are easy to replace. The bottom of the centrifuge is made of ABS, the cover of polycarbonate. The powerful low-noise motor takes only 5 to 8 seconds to reach the maximum speed. With the cover closed, the rotor comes to a standstill in approx. 10 seconds, and in ap- prox. 3 seconds when the cover is opened. Technical data: Dimensions: Weight: Rotor black: Rotor green: Power input: Maximum speed: Maximum centrifugal force: 2350 g 150 × 170 × 120 mm 0.65 kg 6 × 1.5/2.0 ml, 6 × 0.5 ml and 6 × 0.2 ml tubes 2 × 8 × 0.2 ml strips 85 ~ 250 V / 50 Hz 7200 rpm Article 3 Mini Star centrifuge Order No. 10 01 06020

712

Micro Centrifuges neoLabLine Plate Centrifuge, neoLab® Separating Systems Centrifugation The compact neoLabLine plate centrifuge is the favorable alternative to large devices with extra rotor. Centrifuge PCR, ELISA and microtiter plates as well as PCR reaction tubes strips quickly and easily. Suitable for all standard 96er, 384er well plates skirted or non-skirted. • quiet engine • easy cleaning of the rotor by fast removal • with timer function (up to 10 minutes) • with LED display • with alarm and stop function when opening the lid during operation • acoustic signal sounds after completion and unlocking of the lid Technical data: 230 V Voltage: 140 mm Height: 3.6 kg Weight: 360 mm Length: 290 mm Width/Breadth: white/blue Color: With continuous function: Yes With continuously adjustable rotation speed: Yes Rotational speed: RZB: Article neoLabLine plate centrifuge Order No. 10 01 06081 max. 2200 rpm 480 g for two PCR/microtitreplates or 24 × 0.2 ml PCR strips, 2500 rpm, 850 x g Centrifuge with Vortex Mixer, neoLab® 2 devices in one! Centrifuge with up to 7000 RPM in combination with a vortexer for all reaction vessels. For up to 36 reaction vessels from 0.2 ml (PCR) to 2.0 ml. • Small and quiet to run, saves space • Variable speed from 2000 to 7000 RPM • 3200 RCF at 7000 RPM • 6 different effective vortex programs with varying intensity • Spin-Mix-Spin sequence • Timer can be set from 0.1 to 30 min. Technical data: Dimensions (W × D × H): Weight: Connection: 190 × 170 × 115 mm 1.3 kg 230V/24 V adapter Article Centrifuge with vortexer Speed rpm 2000-7000 Order No. 52 01 70040 Micro Centrifuges, Thermo Scientific Micro centrifuges Pico™ and Fresco™ The Pico and Fresco micro centrifuges offer a wide selection of rotors, have a small foot- print, and allow for a high sample throughput thanks to their short acceleration and brake times (only 12 seconds each). The user-friendly operating panel with its clearly structured display makes programming easy. The lid gives an audible click to indicate that it is safe- ly closed for the complete centrifugation process. Technical data: Pico und Fresco 17 Max. RCF: Max. rotation speed: Temperature range: Dimensions (H × W × D): 21,100 × g 17,000 × g 14,800 min-1 13,300 min-1 -9°C to +40°C (only Fresco models) 225 × 243 × 352 mm (Pico models) 330 × 295 × 445 mm (Fresco models) Pico und Fresco 21 230 V 50/60 Hz incl. 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml rotor with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid incl. 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml rotor with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid incl. dual row rotor 18 × 2.0 /0.5 ml with screw-on lid incl. dual row rotor 18 × 2.0 /0.5 ml with screw-on lid co d e b e w WW2NY403 co d e b e w WW2NY303 co d e b e w WW4HV013 Power supply: Article Micro centrifuge Pico 17 Micro centrifuge Fresco 17 Micro centrifuge Pico 17 Micro centrifuge Pico 17 Micro centrifuge Fresco 17 incl. hematocrit rotor co d e b e w Order No. 10 79 22410 10 79 22420 10 79 22491 10 79 22414 10 79 22423 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 711

713

Separating Systems Centrifugation Micro Centrifuges incl. 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml rotor with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid incl. 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml rotor with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid Article Micro centrifuge Pico 21 Micro centrifuge Fresco 21 Micro centrifuge Pico 21 Micro centrifuge Fresco 21 Micro centrifuge Pico 21 incl. dual row rotor 18 × 2.0 /0.5 ml with screw-on lid incl. dual row rotor 18 × 2.0 /0.5 ml with screw-on lid incl. 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml rotor with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid and dual row rotor 18 × 2.0 /0.5 ml with screw-on lid Micro centrifuge Fresco 21 incl. 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml rotor with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid and dual row rotor 18 × 2.0 /0.5 ml with screw-on lid Accessories Article Rotor 24 × 1.5/2.0 ml, with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid Rotor 36 × 0.5 ml, with screw-on lid Rotor 8 × 8, PCR, with screw-on lid Rotor 4 × 8, PCR, with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid Rotor 18 × 2 ml and 18 × 0.5 ml, dual, with screw-on lid Rotor 10 × 5 ml, with ClickSeal Biocontainment lid Hematocrit rotor (for Pico17) Adapter for 0.5 / 0.6 ml test tubes Adapter for 0.25 / 0.4 ml test tubes Adapter for 0.2 ml PCR test tubes Order No. 10 79 22415 10 79 22425 10 79 22553 10 79 22555 10 79 22475 10 79 22476 Order No. 10 79 23424 10 79 23436 10 79 23489 10 79 23440 10 79 23418 10 79 23465 10 79 23473 10 79 23758 10 79 23759 10 79 23750 co d e b e w WWQJ3044 To see other centrifuge models for a wide range of application, please enter webcode WW4HV013 to access our online catalogue. Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges Benchtop Centrifuges, Rotors, Eppendorf Benchtop Centrifuges 5702, 5702R and 5702RH Centrifuge 5702 was developed to carry out routine centrifugation in small, medical and cell culture labs. Centrifugations. Specific features of centrifuge 5702: • Due to optimized rotor chamber ventilation, the samples become less hot • Lid opens automatically after centrifugation – prevents samples from getting hot, gives easy access to samples 1 2 Specific features of centrifuge 5702 R and RH: Two program keys for saving routine processes FastTemp function for quick pre-cooling • Standby temperature control keeps the centrifuge at the set temperature • ECO switch-off is enabled after 8 hours without operation to save energy and extend the compressor life • Discharge of condensate prevents water from collecting in the chamber Specific features of centrifuge 5702 RH: • Active heating ensures high temperature accuracy over the entire centrifugation Type Wght kg 1 5702, unchilled, without rotor 32×40×24 20 2 5702 R, chilled, without rotor 38×58×26 36 3 5702 RH, heating/cooling, 38×58×26 36 W×D×H cm P input W 200 2380 2380 Order No. Mains connection 230 V/50–60 Hz 55 69 57020 230 V/50–60 Hz 55 69 57030 230 V/50–60 Hz 55 69 57040 without rotor Rotors and accessories 4 × 85 ml swing-bucket rotor A-4-38 • Maximum speed: 3000 × g (4400 1/min) • Standard rotor for centrifugation of blood collection tubes or 15/50 ml Falcon® tubes • Rotor can be operated with round or rectangular buckets - Rotor buckets for tubes 1.5 ml to 85 ml (aerosol-tight caps optionally available) - Rectangular buckets for glass tubes from 5 ml to 25 ml • Broad variety of adapters available to fit all types of blood collection tubes and cell culture tubes 3 712 Article Swing-bucket rotor A-4-38 incl. 4 × 85 ml round beakers 55 69 20003 Swing-bucket rotor without beakers 55 69 40004 Round beakers, 85 ml, 4 pieces 55 69 22006 Rectangular beakers, 90 ml, 4 pieces 55 69 09000 Aerosol-tight caps for round beakers 85 ml, 2 pieces 55 69 21000 Order No. Adapter on request. Continued on next page

714

Separating Systems Centrifugation Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges 4 8 × 15 ml swing-bucket rotor A-8-17 • Maximum speed: 2.800 x g (4.400 rpm) • Economical rotor for centrifugation of 15 ml Falcon® tubes or 15 ml glass tubes • Adapters for 15 ml Falcon® tubes and rubber mat inserts for centrifugation of glass tubes optionally available Article 8 × 15 ml swing-bucket rotor A-8-17, without adapter or Order No. 55 69 00002 rubber mats Adapter for 15 ml Falcon® tubes, 8 pieces Rubber mats for 15 ml, 8 pieces 55 69 02005 55 69 01009 5 30 × 15 ml fixed-angle rotor F-35-30-17 • Maximum speed: 2.750 x g (4.400 rpm) • Fixed angle rotor for 20 x 15 ml Falcon® tubes or 30 x 15 ml glass tubes • Adapters for 15 ml Falcon® tubes/conical tubes and rubber mat inserts for centrifugation of glass tubes comprised in the delivery • Steel sleeves have an interior diameter of 17 mm and a depth of 92 mm Article Fixed-angle rotor 30 × 15 ml incl. 30 steel sleeves for 15 ml tubes, with 20 Falcon® adapters and 30 rubber mats Fixed-angle rotor 10 × 15 ml incl. 10 steel sleeves for 15 ml tubes, with 10 Falcon® adapters and 10 rubber mats Falcon®: registered trademark of Becton Dickinson 6 Fixed-angle rotor F-45-24-11 • Max. RCF: 1770 × g (4400 1/min) • Low-noise centrifugation without rotor lid • Centrifugation of 1.5 ml and 2 ml Eppendorf vessels • Adapter for: 0.2 ml PCR-vessels 0.4 ml centrifuge vessels 0.5 ml micro reaction vessels and 0.6 ml BD Microtainer® • Rotors and adapters are autoclavable (121°C, 20 min) Article Fixed-angle rotor 24 × 1.5/2 ml tubes, without cover Order No. 55 69 04008 55 69 05004 Order No. 10 69 46002 7 Fixed-angle rotor F-45-18-17-Cryo • Max. RCF: 1840 × g (4400 1/min) • Low-noise centrifugation without rotor lid • Rotors and adapters are autoclavable (121 °C, 20 min) • Centrifugation of 1 – 2 ml Cryo-vessels (max. 13 mm Ø, usable with adapter) and screw cap centrifuge vessels (max. 17 mm Ø, directly usable) Article Fixed-angle rotor without cover and adapter Order No. 10 69 47009 Centrifuge bundles for cell culture and clinical applications Whether you need a refrigerated or non-refrigerated centrifuge for low, medium or high-throughput applications, one of these bundles will definitely suit your requirements. The cell culture centrifuge bundles are optimized for swing-bucket rotor applications in standard 15 ml and 50 ml Falcon® tubes. Cell Culture Centrifuge Bundle includes: • Centrifuge 5702, swing-bucket rotor incl. buckets • Four adapters for 15 ml Falcon® tubes (two sets of 2) • Four adapters for 50 ml Falcon® tubes (two sets of 2) The centrifuge bundle for clinical applications is optimized for Centrifuge 5702 R with adapters for 13 and 16 mm blood collection tubes or urine tubes. Clinical Centrifuge Bundle includes: • Centrifuge 5702 R, swing-bucket rotor A-4-38 incl. round buckets • Four adapters for 13 mm blood collection tubes or urine tubes (two sets of 2) • Four adapters for 16 mm blood collection tubes or urine tubes (two sets of 2) Article Centrifuge Bundles for Cell Culture Centrifuge 5702, 230V/50 – 60 Hz with swing-bucket rotor A-4-38 incl. round buckets and 15-/50-ml-Falcon®-adapters Centrifuge Bundles for Clinical applications Centrifuge 5702 R, refrigerated, 230 V / 50 – 60 Hz with swing-bucket rotor A-4-44 incl. rectangular buckets and adapters for 13 mm and 16 mm blood collection or urine tubes Paket 5703000425 Centrifuge 5702 R, refrigerated, with Rotor A-4-38 incl. adap- ters for 15/50 mL conical tubes, 2 sets of 2 adapters, rotary knobs, 230 V/50 – 60 Hz Order No. 10 69 00329 10 69 00322 10 69 30425 4 5 6 7 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 713

715

Separating Systems Centrifugation co d e b e w WWQJ3026 Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges Benchtop Centrifuges 5804/5804 R and 5810/5810 R, Eppendorf Centrifuges 5804 (cooled 5804 R) and 5810 (cooled 5810 R) The two non-refrigerated basic models differ in capacity but are identical in operation. What is decisive are the user’s individual needs. While Centrifuge 5804 has a maximum capacity of 1,000 ml in a swing-bucket rotor, Centrifuge 5810 provides a capacity of 2,000 ml in a swing-bucket rotor. The successful concept of different rotors permits flexible handling of the most diverse tube capacities and shapes. With the swing-bucket and fixed-angle rotors it is possible to centrifuge the vast majority of commercial tubes, MTPs and deepwell plates. The range of accessories has been greatly expanded - and flexibitity increased accordingly - in particular for the swing buck- et rotors A-4-81 and A-4-81-MTP, which enable the centrifuging of up to 28 × 50 ml Fal- con® tubes or up to 16 MTPs in the centrifuges A-4-81 and A-4-81-MTP. Using modular adapters you can adapt your rotor to changing needs. Product features of the centrifuges: • Speed, rcf and radius correction values can be entered by the user • Temperature range from -9 to +40°C (5804 R and 5810 R) • Stand-by refrigeration (5804 R and 5810 R) • Speed can be set from 200 rpm in increments of 10 rpm • Short-spin key with selectable rotational speed • Fast-temp function for rapid cooling of the centrifuge chamber • “at set rpm” for even more reproducible results • 10 acceleration and 10 braking ramps for sensitive sample material Type 5804 without rotor 5804 R without rotor 5810 without rotor 5810 R without rotor W×D×H cm 47×55×34 64×55×34 54×61×35 70×61×35 Wght kg 55 80 68 99 P input W 750 1350 850 1350 Mains connection 230 V/50 Hz 230 V/50 Hz 230 V/50 Hz 230 V/50 Hz Order No. 55 69 58040 55 69 58050 55 69 58100 55 69 58110 Rotors for centrifuges type 5804/5804 R and 5810/5810 R The new generation of swing-bucket and fixed-angel rotors further improves the efficien- cy of the centrifuges 5804 (cooled: 5804 R) and 5810 (cooled: 5810 R). They are charac- terized by their particularly long useful life. Swing-bucket rotors: • Capacities for almost all common tube formats from 1.5 to 500 ml • Aerodynamic design for improved energy efficiency • New Eppendorf QuickLock® caps for single-hand operation Fixed angle rotors: • New Eppendorf QuickLock® caps for ergonomical lid closing • Excellent temperature control. Aluminum for high thermal conductivity • Highly resistant to chemicals • Perfect tube support also with high rotor speed Product features of the adapters for swing-bucket rotors • Commercially available tubes can be centrifuged in the swing-bucket rotors with help of • Flexible modular principle: different tube lengths fit into one adapter • Stable bench-top position, well suited for the processing and preparation of series of the adapters samples • Fully autoclavable (20 min, 121°C) • Easy to take apart and easy to clean Type Version Swing-bucket rotor S-4-72 Swing-bucket rotor A-4-44 Swing-bucket rotor A-4-44 Deepwell plate rotor incl. 4 × 250 ml round beakers incl. 4 × 100 ml rectangular beakers inkl. four 2 × 50 ml beakers incl. 2 deepwell plate suspension gears A-2-DWP Fixed-angle rotor F-34-6-38 Fixed-angle rotor FA-45-6-30 Fixed-angle rotor F-35-48-17 Fixed-angle rotor F-35-48-17 Fixed-angle rotor FA-45-48-11 Fixed-angle rotor FA-45-30-11 Fixed-angle rotor F-45-30-11 Fixed-angle rotor F-45-48-PCR 714 for 6 × 85 ml tubes incl. lid for 6 × 50 ml tubes, incl. aerosol-tight QuickLock® lid incl. 48 steel sleeves for 15 ml tubes, with 40 conical inserts and 48 rubber mats incl. 24 steel sleeves for 15 ml tubes, with 24 conical inserts and rubber mats for 48 × 1.5/2.0 ml tubes, incl. aerosol-tight QuickLock® lid for 30 × 1.5/2.0 ml tubes, aluminium lid, aerosol-tight for 30 × 1.5/2.0 ml tubes, aluminium lid for 6× strips of 8 PCR tubes, 6× strips of 5 PCR tubes or 48×0.2 ml individual PCR tubes Speed max. 1/min 4200 5000 5000 3700 11000 11000 5500 5500 13000 14000 14000 12000 RCF max. × g Order No. 3234 4400 4500 2250 15550 16639 5005 5005 19803 20800 20800 15350 10 69 74607 55 69 09004 10 69 71900 55 69 40009 55 69 27002 10 69 71506 10 69 77200 10 69 77103 10 69 76001 55 69 26006 55 69 15004 55 69 35005 Adapter and accessories for all rotors on request. Continued on next page

716

Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges Rotors only for centrifuges type 5810/5810 R Separating Systems Centrifugation Type Version Speed max. 1/min 3900 RCF max. × g 3214 Order No. 10 69 74000 2568 10 69 54001 3220 2900 3200 2750 3486 10 69 75508 55 69 18007 55 69 25003 10 69 74301 55 69 09008 55 69 11002 10 69 71004 Order No. 10 69 73003 10 69 71805 10 69 70703 Order No. 10 69 71709 10 69 71901 10 69 72000 10 69 72106 10 69 72202 Swing-bucket rotor S-4-104 Swing-bucket rotor S-4-104 Swing-bucket rotor S-4-104 Swing-bucket rotor A-4-81 Swing-bucket rotor A-4-81 Swing-bucket rotor A-4-81 Swing-bucket rotor A-4-62 Swing-bucket rotor A-4-62 Deepwell plate rotor incl. 4 × 250 ml round beakers incl. 4 × plates beaker (aerosol-tight possible) without suspension ears/beakers incl. 4 × 500 ml rectan- gular beakers incl. 4 × MTP/flex sus- pension gears without suspension gears/beakers incl. 4 × 250 ml rectan- gular beakers incl. 4 × MTP suspensi- on gears incl. beakers, aerosol- tight caps and plates 3900 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4500 A-2-DWP-AT Adapter and accessories for all rotors on request. Accessories for rotor A-4-81 Article Buckets for 7 x 50 ml Falcon® test tubes, set of 4 Adapter for 15 ml Falcon® test tubes, set of 7 500 ml wide mouth bottle, set of 2 Adapters Article Adapter for 15 ml Falcon® test tubes, set of 2 Adapter for 10 ml Oak Ridge tubes, set of 2 Adapter for 16 ml Oak Ridge tubes, set of 2 Adapter for 30 ml Oak Ridge tubes, set of 2 Adapter for 35 ml Oak Ridge tubes, set of 2 Cell culture centrifuge bundles Whether you need a refrigerated or non-refrigerated centrifuge for low, medium or high-throughput applications, one of these bundles will definitely suit your requirements. The Cell Culture Centrifuge Bundles are optimized for swing-bucket rotor applications in standard 15 ml and 50 ml conical tubes. Cell Culture Centrifuge Bundle includes: • Centrifuge 5804/ 5804 R oder 5810/ 5810 R • Swing-bucket rotor incl. buckets • Four adapters for 15 ml conical tubes (two sets of 2) • Four adapters for 50 ml conical tubes (two sets of 2) Article Centrifuge 5804, with rotor A-4-44 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 16 × 15 ml / 4 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5804 R, refrigerated, with rotor A-4-44 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 16 × 15 ml / 4 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5804, with rotor S-4-72 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 32 × 15 ml / 16 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5804 R, refrigerated, with rotor S-4-72 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 32 × 15 ml / 16 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5810, with rotor A-4-62 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 36 × 15 ml / 16 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5810 R, refrigerated, with rotor A-4-62 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 36 × 15 ml / 16 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5810, with rotor A-4-81 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 48 × 15 ml / 20 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5810 R, refrigerated, with rotor A-4-81 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 48 × 15 ml / 20 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5810, with rotor S-4-104 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 56 × 15 ml / 28 × 50 ml Centrifuge 5810 R, refrigerated, with rotor S-4-104 incl. adapter for 15 ml/50 ml conical tubes. Max. capacity of conical tubes each rotor: 56 × 15 ml / 28 × 50 ml Order No. 10 69 58041 10 69 58040 10 69 58042 10 69 58043 10 69 58100 10 69 58102 10 69 58101 10 69 58103 10 69 58104 10 69 58105 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 715

717

Separating Systems Centrifugation Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges Benchtop Centrifuges EBA 200 / EBA 200 S, HETTICH The EBA 200 and EBA 200 S are practical laboratory centrifuges for small sample vol- umes. The more powerful EBA 200 S model can deliver platelet poor plasma for clinical analyses in 3 minutes only. As a standard, both models are equipped with an 8-place fixed angle rotor to hold blood and urine tubes of up to 15 ml. Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): 261 × 353 × 228 mm Weight: Power supply: Connected load: Max. speed: Max. RCF: Max. capacity: Emission/ Immunity: ca. 9 kg (EBA 200) ca. 11 kg (EBA 200 S) 200 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 100 VA (EBA 200) 160 VA (EBA 200 S) 6000 min-1 (EBA 200) 8000 min-1 (EBA 200 S) 3461 (EBA 200) 6153 (EBA 200 S) 8 × 15 ml EN/IEC 61326-1, class B 1 Article 1 EBA 200, benchtop centrifuge complete with angle rotor 8 × 15 ml EBA 20 S, benchtop centrifuge complete with angle rotor 8 × 15 ml Order No. 10 56 11800 10 56 11802 Benchtop Centrifuge EBA 270, HETTICH The EBA 270 is a small centrifuge with a swing-out rotor that has been developed specif- ically for use in clinical settings. It can centrifuge commonly used blood tubes and urine tubes up 15 ml in volume at a maximum speed of 4,000 RPM / 2,254 RCF. Its 90° rotor is ideally suited for spinning blood tubes containing a separating gel. Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): 326 × 389 × 239 mm Weight: Power supply: Connected load: Max. speed: Max. RCF: Max. capacity: Emission/ Immunity: approx. 14 kg 200 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 130 VA 4000 min-1 2254 6 × 15 ml EN/IEC 61326-1, class B Article EBA 270, benchtop centrifuge complete with swing-bucket rotor 6 × 15 ml 10 56 12300 Order No. Benchtop Centrifuge ROTOFIX 32 A, HETTICH Benchtop centrifuge ROTOFIX 32 A For decades, the ROTOFIX 32 A has set the standard in daily lab routine thanks to its versatility and solid construction. The benchtop centrifuge spins sample volumes up to 6 × 94 ml, 40 blood collection tubes or 8 × 50 ml conical tubes with a simple user interface. Hettich’s cytology rotors are compatible with the cyto-systems by most competitors and have bio-containment lids. Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): 366 × 430 × 257 mm Weight: Power supply: Connected load: Max. speed: Max. RCF: Max. capacity: Emission/ Immunity: approx. 23 kg 208 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 300 VA 6000 min-1 4226 4 × 100 ml / 6 × 94 ml EN/IEC 61326-1, class B 4 Article 2 ROTOFIX 32 A, benchtop centrifuge without rotor Order No. 10 56 11206 2 3 716

718

Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges Accessories Separating Systems Centrifugation for max. 4 × 100 ml or 4 slide samples, max. RCF 2665 Article 3 Swig-out rotor 1624, without suspension gear Round bucket 1398, alloy, 50 ml, fits in rotor 1324 10 56 11398 Round bucket 1490, alloy, 100 ml, fits in rotor 1324 10 56 11490 Round bucket 1481, alloy, 100 ml, fits in rotor 1624 10 56 11481 Lid for bucket 1481, 1495 and 1490, with biocontainment 10 56 11492 4 Swing-bucket rotor 1324 for max. 4 × 100 ml, without suspension gear 10 56 11324 5 Fixed-angle rotor for max. 6 × 94 ml 10 56 11620 Order No. 55 56 11624 Supplied without the illustrated accessories. More rotors and accessories on request. Benchtop Centrifuges UNIVERSAL 320 / 320 R, HETTICH Benchtop centrifuges UNIVERSAL 320 / 320 R The UNIVERSAL 320 is a compact, versatile and indispensable benchtop centrifuge. Ex- cellent performance and a comprehensive range of accessories enable the UNIVERSAL 320 to carry out virtually any centrifuging tasks including plates, blood tubes, cell culture, microliter and cytology. This unit is available with refrigeration and a temperature range from -20°C to +40°C (UNIVERSAL 320 R). Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Power supply: 401 × 529 × 346 mm (UNIVERSAL 320) 407 × 698 × 346 mm (UNIVERSAL 320 R) ca. 31 kg (UNIVERSAL 320) / 52 kg (UNIVERSAL 320 R) 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz (UNIVERSAL 320) 200 to 240 V, 50 Hz /240 V, 60 Hz (UNIVERSAL 320 R) 400 VA (UNIVERSAL 320) 800 VA (UNIVERSAL 320 R) 16000 min-1 24900 4 × 200 ml EN/IEC 61326-1, class B Connected load: Max. speed: Max. RCF: Max. capacity: Emission/ Immunity: Cooling UNIVERSAL 320 R: adjustable from -20°C to +40°C, with precooling function Article 6 UNIVERSAL 320, benchtop centrifuge without rotor 7 UNIVERSAL 320 R, benchtop refrigerated centrifuge without rotor Order No. 55 56 11401 55 56 11406 Accessories Article Swing-out rotor 1554, without suspension gear 8 Swing-bucket rotor 1324 for max. 4 × 100 ml, without for max. 4 × 200 ml, max. RCF 3328 suspension gear for max. 4 × 100 ml or 4 slide samples, max. RCF 2665 Swig-out rotor 1624, without suspension gear Round bucket 1490, alloy, 100 ml, fits in rotor 1324 Round bucket 1560, alloy, 200 ml, fits in rotor 1554 with one-handed swing stopper Lid for bucket 1560, with bio-containment 9 Swing-out rotor 1494, without suspension gear Round bucket 1481, alloy, 100 ml, fits in rotor 1624 Round bucket 1495, alloy, 100 ml, fits in rotor 1494 Lid for bucket 1481, 1495 and 1490, with biocontainment for max. 4 × 100 ml, max. RCF 4193 Order No. 10 56 11554 10 56 11324 55 56 11624 10 56 11490 10 56 11560 10 56 11561 55 56 11494 10 56 11481 10 56 11495 10 56 11492 5 6 8 7 9 Supplied without the illustrated accessories. More Rotors and accessories on request. We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 717

719

Separating Systems Centrifugation Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges Benchtop Centrifuges ROTINA 380 / 380 R, HETTICH Benchtop centrifuges, ROTINA 380 / 380 R High performance unit supporting a wide array of accessories for multiple applications in just one rotor. Its size and performance makes it the ideal bench top centrifuge for most clinical, reaearch and industrial laboratories. This unit is available with refrigeration and a temperature range from -20°C to +40°C (ROTINA 380 R). Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Power supply: Connected load: Max. speed: Max. RCF: Max. capacity: Emission/ Immunity: Cooling ROTINA 380 R: 457 × 600 × 418 mm (ROTINA 380) 457 × 750 × 418 mm (ROTINA 380 R) approx. 51 kg (ROTINA 380) approx. 81 kg (ROTINA 380 R) 200 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 650 VA (ROTINA 380) 1300 VA (ROTINA 380 R) 15000 min-1 24400 4 × 290 ml EN/IEC 61326-1, class B adjustable from -20°C to +40°C Order No. Article 10 56 11701 1 ROTINA 380, benchtop centrifuge without rotor 2 ROTINA 380 R, benchtop refrigerated centrifuge without rotor 10 56 11706 Accessories Article 3 Swing-bucket rotor 1754 for max. 4 × 290 ml, without suspension gear 10 56 11754 10 56 11752 Round bucket 1752, alloy, 290 ml, fits in rotor 1754 10 56 11751 Lid for bucket 1752, with bio-containment 10 56 11770 4 Swing-out rotor 1770 for 12 microtiter plates, 2-fold, without suspen- Order No. sion gear Suspension gear 4745, fits in rotor 1770 for 6 microtiter plates, 4 culture plates or 1 deepwell plate 5 Fixed-angle rotor 1792 for max. 6 × 94 ml 10 56 14745 55 56 11792 Supplied without the illustrated accessories. More rotors and accessories on request. Benchtop Centrifuges ROTINA 420 / 420 R, HETTICH Benchtop Centrifuges ROTINA 420 / 420 R This compact benchtop centrifuge has been developed for high sample throughput and large sample volumes. It has a maximum capacity of 4 × 600 ml bottles, 140 blood tubes, 16 microtiter plates or 52 × 15 ml conical tubes, all on a single cost-effective rotor. This unit is available with refrigeration and a temperature range from -20°C to +40°C (ROTINA 420 R). 6 Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Power supply: Connected load: max. speed: max. RCF: max. capacity: Emission/ Immunity: Cooling ROTINA 420 R: 506 × 650 × 423 mm (ROTINA 420) 713 × 654 × 423 mm (ROTINA 420 R) approx. 75 kg (ROTINA 420) approx. 108 kg (ROTINA 420 R) 200 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz (ROTINA 420) 200 – 240 V, 50 Hz (ROTINA 420 R) 870 VA (ROTINA 420) 1600 VA (ROTINA 420 R) 15000 min-1 24400 4 × 600 ml EN/IEC 61326-1, class B adjustable from -20°C to +40°C Order No. Article 10 56 14701 6 ROTINA 420, benchtop centrifuge without rotor 7 ROTINA 420 R, benchtop refrigerated centrifuge without rotor 10 56 14706 Accessories Article 8 Swing-bucket rotor 4784-A for max. 4 × 600 ml, without suspension gear 10 56 14784 Round bucket 4780, max. 600 ml, fits in rotor 4784-A 10 56 14780 with one-handed swing stopper Lid for bucket 4780, with bio-containment 8 Suspension gear for plates, fits in rotor 4784-A 10 56 14783 10 56 14782 Order No. Supplied without the illustrated accessories. More rotors and accessories on request. 5 2 4 8 1 3 7 718

720

Separating Systems Centrifugation co d e b e w WWSB5039 Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges Benchtop Centrifuge CD0412-50, Phoenix Instrument Benchtop centrifuge CD0412-50 Doesn’t matter if in a biological, analytical or environmental laboratory – everywhere is the demand to centrifuge samples up to 50ml in a fast and economical way. Phoenix Instru- ment offers with the new CD-0412-50 the ideal instrument. The centrifuge is equipped with a rotor for 6 x 50ml tubes and 6 x 15ml tubes, so the instrument can hereby be used very fl exible and universal either for 15ml tubes or 50ml tubes. The rotor CD-A6-50 is fi x mounted and included in the delivery. • Fix angle rotor (54°) for 6 × 50 ml or 6 × 15 ml • Automatic self-diagnosis to control all functions • Backlit LCD-display for easy-read out of parameter • Such as Speed, RCF and time • Easy, intuitive operation • Timer function 0,5 – 99 minutes • Timer starts after the selected speed is reached • Quick spin function • Lid with electric lock and automatic release function to save processing time and pre- vent sample overheating • Maintenance free brushless motor • 2 years warranty Technical data: Speed: Max. RCF: Time: Dimensions (W×D×H): 30 × 35 × 20 cm Weight: Max. capacity: Noise level: Rotor: Scope of delievry: 300 – 4000 rpm in 100 rpm steps 1800 g 0.5 – 99 minutes, continous 6 kg 6 × 15 ml or 6 × 50 ml plastic tubes < 54 db 54° fix angle inclusive rotor CD-A6-50P Article Benchtop centrifuge CD-0412-50 Accessories Article CD-A6-50P Rotor 6 × 15 ml or 6 × 50 ml plastic tubes CD04-R50G Glass tubes with round bottom, 50 m CD04-R50P Plastic tubes with round bottom, 50 m Order No. 10 13 70413 Order No. 10 13 70650 10 13 70450 10 13 70451 Thermo Scientific™ Multifuge™ X Pro and Megafuge™ ST Plus Universal Centrifuges, Thermo Scientific The new Thermo Scientific™ Multifuge™ X Pro and Megafuge™ ST Plus universal centri- fuges offer improved performance, high reliability, reproducibility, and safety. With a relative centrifugal force (RCF) of more than 25,000 × g with a fixed angle rotor and more than 7,000 x g with a swing-out rotor, even the most complex separations are achieved faster and with better results. The units can accommodate sample volumes of up to 4 litres (4 × 1,000 ml) and are available as air-cooled or cooled versions. 1 • Intuitive touchscreen user interface for fast and easy programming (Pro series) • Auto-Lock™ technology for safe and easy rotor change • Durable Fiberlite™ carbon fibre rotors • Aerosol-tight ClickSeal™ lids which can be opened and closed easily even while wear- ing gloves Technical data: Max. capacity: Max. speed: Max. RZB: Multifuge X4 Pro / X4R Pro 4 × 1,000 ml with swing-out rotor 6 × 250 ml with fixed angle rotor 6,000 rpm (swing-out rotor) 15,200 rpm (fixed angle rotor) 7,164 × g (swing-out rotor) 25,830 × g (fixed angle rotor) Megafuge ST4 Plus / ST4R Plus 4 × 1,000 ml with swing-out rotor 6 × 100 ml with fixed angle rotor 5,300 rpm (swing-out rotor) 15,200 rpm (fixed angle rotor) 5,590 × g (swing-out rotor) 25,830 × g (fixed angle rotor) co d e b e w Model Number of Temp. compatible range rotors °C Multifuge X4 Pro – 17 1 Multifuge X4R Pro -10 – +40 17 2 Megafuge ST4 Plus – 12 Megafuge ST4R Plus -10 – +40 12 Please enter the webcode WW4HV036 to see other centrifuge models as well as an ex- tensive selection of rotors and accessories for a wide range of applications in our online catalogue. 10 79 29900 10 79 29915 10 79 29903 10 79 29918 Dimensions (W×D×H) with the lid closed cm 56.6 × 69.0 × 36.2 74.6 × 69.0 × 36.1 56.6 × 69.0 × 36.2 74.6 × 69.0 × 36.1 Order No. WW4HV036 2 Centrifuge tubes, racks see page 134 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 719

721

KNOWLEDGE FILTRATION The selection of the appropriate filter type for analytic separation depends on many different factors. The chemical and physical properties of the sam- ple you want to filter must be considered, as well as those of the subsequent analysis or further processing of the precipitation or filtrate. The following questions help you to reliably find the filter which best meets your require- ments: Important questions for selecting the appropriate filter type: • Are you looking for a filter for filtration or absorp- tion (impregnation, sampling), blotting or chroma- tography? Select the appropriate product group with the re- spective properties! • Clarification (liquid is used further) or separation filtration (analysis of the separated particles)? In clarification, all particles should be removed. In separation filtration, only the particles of a speci- fied size are to be captured. Choose the appropri- ate retention rate! • What is the size of the particles you wish to capture? Choose a paper type with a matching retention rate! • What does a retention rate of e.g. 12–15 µm signify? This paper retains only some of the particles of size 12 µm but all parti- cles of size 15 µm and up. If you need to capture all 12 µm particles, use a retention rate of e.g. 8-12 µm. • Do you wish to filter air? Often, glass fibre papers are better suited for filtering air because they have a higher permeability but still capture particles down to 1 µm. • How many particles do you wish to capture? Thick paper can carry more particles than thin paper! • Which is the sample volume? Because creped papers have a larger filter surface, they are better suited for large volumes in the laboratory funnel. This applies independent of the filtration time and is due to the particle retention in µm. • What is the pH and the pressure? With high pressure or vacuum and/or extreme pH values, hard filtration papers are more appropriate than the regular wet-strength types. • What is the temperature and viscosity? Highly viscous samples should be warmed to reduce viscosity! • Which is the optimum filter type? The type that ensures complete separation of the target particles at an acceptable filtration rate. The major filter types: Ashless filter papers for quantity analysis are acid-washed and water-neutralized. Free of min- erals and metal ions, they are ideal for the detec- tion of trace elements (mean value 0.004% ash), gravimetric routine tests and for sample prepara- tion for instrumental analysis. For their high purity (mean ash content 0.08%), highly pure filter papers for quality analysis are recommended for precise identification of materi- als and for sample preparation prior to sensitive detection methods. These reliable papers are per- fectly qualified for food control, beverage analysis and environmental monitoring. Glass fibre filters with and without binder are par- ticularly recommended for monitoring air and water pollution. Compared to paper filters, they have a high flow rate and air permeability, extremely low metal content, and good stability at high tempera- tures. Cellulose or glass fibre extraction thimbles allow for reliable, fast analyses in food control and environmental monitoring. Suitable for Soxhlet type, Tecator type or similar devices, to extract certain components out of solid material with an appropriate solvent. The high, even porosity of the sleeves ensures a fast flow. Hint on the ideal filter diameter Diameter of the filter hopper d1 in mm versus recommended diameter d2, filter circles folded double (or diameter of folded filters) d1 mm 35 45 55 70 80 100 120 150 180 200 250 d2 mm 45–55 55–70 70–90 110–125 125–150 150–185 185–240 240–270 270–320 320–385 385–400 720

722

Separating Systems Filtration Filter Papers Ashless Round Filter Papers for Quantitative Analysis, Hahnemühle Ashless filter papers (mean ash content 0.004 %), recommended for quantitative analysis, routine gravimetric tests and sample preparation for instrumental analysis. • Acid-washed and neutralised with water • Free of minerals and metallic ions, ideal for the detection of trace elements • For analytical applications, quantitative analysis and/or routine gravimetric tests • These filter papers are perfectly qualified for food control, beverage analysis and envi- ronmental monitoring co d e b e w WW6PB001 Properties fast Technical specifications: Grade Filtration Herzberg s 50 589/1 - black 589/2 - white medium fast 140 589/4 - yellow medium fast, low in fat 170 450 589/5 - red 900 589/6 - green 7501) 589/3 - blue 1) Measured with 100 mm water column instead of 50 mm 2) Approximate values medium fast slow, thin slow Weight Retention of g/m2 particles µm 12 – 252) 79 4 – 122) 85 81 4 – 7 2 – 42) 84 74 2 <2 84 Thickness mm 0.19 0.18 0,17 0.17 0,16 0.16 Ø mm 12.7 40.5 47 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 589/1 - black Order No. PU pc/Pack 1000 100 100 10 15 91147 100 10 15 91055 100 10 15 91070 100 10 15 91090 100 10 15 91110 100 10 15 91125 100 10 15 91150 100 10 15 91185 100 10 15 91240 589/2 - white Order No. 10 15 90125 10 15 90405 10 15 92055 10 15 92070 10 15 92090 10 15 92110 10 15 92125 10 15 92150 10 15 92185 589/4 - yellow Order No. 10 15 94090 10 15 94110 10 15 94925 10 15 94950 589/5 - red Order No. 10 15 95055 10 15 95090 10 15 95110 10 15 95125 10 15 95150 589/3 - blue Order No. 10 15 93147 10 15 93955 10 15 93070 10 15 93090 10 15 93110 10 15 93125 10 15 93150 10 15 93185 10 15 93240 Other sizes on request. Ashless Round Hardened Filter Papers for Quantitative Analysis, Hahnemühle Ashless hardened filter papers (mean ash content 0.002%), recommended particularly for vacuum and pressure filtration and the filtration of acidic and alkaline solutions. • Acid-washed and neutralised with water • Free of minerals and metallic ions, ideal for the detection of metallic ions • Precipitations can be wiped off or washed off easily and free of fibres • High resistance to aggressive chemical components, like sulphuric and nitric acids (up to 40% at 50° Celsius) and bases (up to 10% at 20° Celsius) co d e b e w WW6PB002 Technical specifications: Grade Properties fast medium fast slow 1505 1506 1507 1) Measured with 150 mm water column instead of 50 mm 2) Approximate values Filtration Herzberg s 50 170 6001) Retention of particles µm 12 – 252) 4 – 122) <22) Weight g/m2 88 90 90 Thickness mm 0.17 0.16 0.14 Ø mm 110 125 150 185 240 PU pc/Pack 1505 Order No. 100 10 15 95210 100 10 15 94185 100 10 15 94150 100 100 Other sizes on request. 1506 Order No. 10 15 98125 10 15 96150 10 15 96240 1507 Order No. 10 15 97125 10 15 97150 10 15 97186 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 721

723

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW6PB003 Filter Papers Clear Filtration Filter Papers, Hahnemühle Recommended for identification of substances, clarification of liquids and for the prepa- ration of samples in a broad range of chemical analyses. • Creped filter papers have a particularly large surface area and correspondingly shorter filtration times • For reliable clarification of viscous liquids • For quick separation of large particles • Sample preparation For clarification of: • Alcohols, essences, vinegar, essential oils, extracts • Galvanic baths, flotation slurries • Gelatine, glycerine, paints, varnishes, hair tonics, perfumes, tinctures • Wort, spirits, syrup • Brines Technical specifications: Grade Surface Filtration 520b creped 520a creped 2772 creped very fast, wet-strengthened very fast, very wet-strengthened very fast, wet-strengthened fast fast 0903 smooth 0905 creped 0858 grained medium fast 0860 smooth medium fast 0859 smooth medium fast 400 smooth medium fast 1) Approximate values Filtration Herzberg s 30 Retention of particles1) µm 16 – 20 Weight g/m² 155 Thickness mm 0.65 35 40 40 40 110 120 150 200 15 – 18 12 – 14 12 – 25 12 – 25 7 – 12 7 – 12 7 – 12 7 – 12 90 65 66 74 75 74 61 61 0.32 0.24 0.25 0.27 0.17 0.17 0.14 0.17 General Use Filter Papers Dimensions mm 580×580 580×580 460×570 Order No. 10 15 90903 10 15 90859 10 15 94000 PU pc/Pack 500 500 100 Grade 0903 0859 400 Folded filters Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 520b 150 10 15 99523 520b 185 10 15 99524 520b 240 10 15 99525 520b 500 10 15 99527 520b 600 10 15 99528 520a 240 10 15 99521 520a 500 10 15 99522 2772 500 10 15 92772 0905 320 10 15 95320 0858 150 10 15 98150 0858 240 10 15 98240 0858 320 10 15 98320 0860 150 10 15 97861 0860 185 10 15 97862 Filter circles Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 400 47 10 15 94015 400 55 10 15 94016 400 70 10 15 94017 400 90 10 15 94018 400 110 10 15 94019 Other sizes on request. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 20 20 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 0860 240 10 15 90240 0860 320 10 15 90320 400 70 10 15 94001 400 90 10 15 94002 400 110 10 15 94003 400 125 10 15 94004 400 130 10 15 94005 400 150 10 15 94006 400 185 10 15 94007 400 200 10 15 94008 400 300 10 15 94010 400 320 10 15 94011 400 400 10 15 94012 400 650 10 15 94014 Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 400 125 10 15 94020 400 150 10 15 94021 400 185 10 15 94022 400 240 10 15 94023 400 500 10 15 94026 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 722

724

Separating Systems Filtration Filter Papers Low Ash Filter Papers for Qualitative Analysis, Hahnemühle Highly pure filter paper (mean ash content approx. 0.08%) recommended for precise identification of materials and for sample preparation prior to sensitive detection meth- ods. Ideal for feed analyses pursuant to LFBG (German Food and Feedstuff Code) § 64 section 1 and 2, drinks analyses, and environmental monitoring. co d e b e w WW6PB004 Technical specifications: Grade Properties Filtration Herzberg s 50 fast 90 medium fast, thick 100 medium fast, thick 155 medium fast medium fast, thin 160 medium fast to slow 450 7502) slow, dense very slow, very dense 15002) Retention of particles1) µm 12 – 25 7 – 12 8 – 10 4 – 7 4 – 7 2 – 5 2 < 2 Weight g/m2 79 161 139 85 68 84 84 84 Thickness mm 0.19 0.35 0.32 0.18 0.15 0.16 0.16 0.15 604 591 598 597 595 593 602h 602eh 1) Approximate values 2) Measured with 100 mm water column instead of 50 mm Sheets Grade Order No. Dimensions mm 460×570 580×580 580×580 598 597 595 Ø mm 90 110 125 150 185 240 270 320 385 500 Ø mm 90 110 125 150 185 240 270 320 385 500 Folded filters PU pc/Pack 604 Order No. 100 10 15 97245 100 10 15 97246 100 10 15 94125 100 10 15 94151 100 10 15 94186 100 10 15 94240 100 100 10 15 97247 100 100 PU pc/Pack 595 Order No. 100 10 15 95096 100 10 15 95111 100 10 15 95126 100 10 15 95151 100 10 15 95186 100 10 15 95240 100 10 15 95270 100 10 15 95321 100 10 15 97230 100 10 15 97231 10 15 97224 10 15 98223 10 15 97222 593 Order No. 10 15 97225 10 15 97226 10 15 97227 10 15 97228 10 15 97229 602h Order No. 10 15 97237 10 15 97238 10 15 92126 10 15 92151 10 15 92186 10 15 92240 10 15 97239 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 598 Order No. 10 15 97233 10 15 97234 10 15 97235 10 15 97236 602eh Order No. 10 15 97251 10 15 97241 10 15 97242 10 15 97243 10 15 97244 597 Order No. 10 15 97248 10 15 97110 10 15 97126 10 15 97151 10 15 97185 10 15 97240 10 15 97270 10 15 97320 10 15 97232 Filter circles Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 604 55 10 15 97154 604 90 10 15 97127 604 110 10 15 99110 604 125 10 15 99125 604 150 10 15 99150 604 185 10 15 99185 598 90 10 15 97120 598 110 10 15 98110 597 47 10 15 97152 597 55 10 15 93055 597 70 10 15 93071 597 90 10 15 93091 597 110 10 15 93111 597 125 10 15 93126 597 150 10 15 93151 597 185 10 15 93186 597 240 10 15 97119 595 47 10 15 97117 595 55 10 15 91056 595 70 10 15 91071 Other sizes on request. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Grade Ø Order No. mm 90 10 15 91091 595 110 10 15 91111 595 125 10 15 91126 595 150 10 15 91151 595 185 10 15 91186 595 240 10 15 97118 595 90 10 15 97111 593 125 10 15 97112 593 150 10 15 97113 593 185 10 15 97114 593 320 10 15 97115 593 602h 70 10 15 97122 602h 90 10 15 96090 602h 110 10 15 96110 602h 125 10 15 96126 602h 150 10 15 96151 602h 240 10 15 97123 602eh 125 10 15 97124 602eh 240 10 15 97153 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 723

725

Separating Systems Filtration Filter Papers Hardened Low Ash Filter Papers for Qualitative Analysis, Hahnemühle Very low mineral content (mean ash content 0.05 %) and extremely high mechanical and chemical stability, recommended particularly for vacuum and pressure filtration and for acidic and alkaline solutions. • Very high wet strength; precipitations can be wiped off or washed off easily and free of fibres • High resistance to aggressive chemical components, like sulphuric and nitric acids (up to 40% at 50° Celsius) and alkalis (up to 10% at 20° Celsius) Technical specifications: Grade Properties Filtration Herzberg s 50 170 6001) Retention of particles2) µm 12 – 25 7 – 12 2 fast medium fast slow 1573 1574 1575 1) Measured with 100 mm water column instead of 50 mm 2) Approximate values Weight g/m2 88 90 92 Thickness mm 0.17 0.16 0.14 Sheets Grade 1574 Folded filters Dimensions mm 460 × 570 Order No. 10 15 97446 PU pc/Pack 100 Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 1573 125 10 15 97394 1573 185 10 15 97395 Filter circles Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 1573 90 10 15 97309 1573 125 10 15 97312 1573 150 10 15 97315 1573 185 10 15 97318 1573 240 10 15 97319 1574 47 10 15 97403 1574 70 10 15 97404 1574 90 10 15 97409 1574 110 10 15 97411 Other sizes on request. PU pc/Pack 100 100 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 1573 240 10 15 97396 1574 240 10 15 94241 Gra- de Ø mm Order No. 1574 150 10 15 97415 1574 240 10 15 97416 1575 55 10 15 97507 1575 70 10 15 97508 1575 110 10 15 97511 1575 125 10 15 97512 1575 150 10 15 97515 1575 240 10 15 97516 PU pc/Pack 100 100 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Cytocentrifuge Papers, Hahnemühle Pure, absorbent papers for centrifugation. The filter papers 2589c and 2589d are available cut to standard format 25 mm × 75 mm, each with two 6 mm holes. Grade 2589c 2589d Dimensions mm 25 × 75 25 × 75 Weight g/m2 400 500 Order No. 10 15 92589 10 15 92590 PU pc/Pack 200 200 Folded Filters, IDL Folded filter for qualitative analyses, made of 100% cellulose, medium-quick filtering. Retention range: Filtering speed acc. to Herzberg: Grammage: Paper thickness: Packaging unit: 5 to 8 µm 50 sec. 87 g/m2 0.16 mm 100 counts in dispensing box Ø Order No. Ø mm 90 110 125 Order No. 10 00 11302 10 00 11303 10 00 11304 mm 150 185 10 00 11305 10 00 11306 co d e b e w WW6PB005 co d e b e w WW6PB020 co d e b e w WW7R3316 724

726

Filter Papers Round Filters, IDL 1 Round filters for qualitative analysis, type Basic Slow filtering. Filtering speed acc. to Herzberg: Grammage: Pore size: Packaging unit: Ø mm 70 90 110 125 Order No. 10 00 24501 10 00 24502 10 00 24503 10 00 24504 130 sec. 75 g/m2 ca. 8 µm 100 Ø mm 150 185 240 2 Round filters for quantitative analysis, type Blue Very slow filtering, for very fine precipitations. Filtering speed acc. to Herzberg: Grammage: Ash content: Pore size: Packaging unit: 180 sec. 80 g/m2 0.007% ca. 2 to 3 µm 100 Ø mm 70 90 110 125 Order No. 10 00 21301 10 00 21302 10 00 21303 10 00 21304 Ø mm 150 185 240 3 Round filters for quantitative analysis, type White Quick filtering, for medium-coarse precipitations. Filtering speed acc. to Herzberg: Grammage: Ash content: Pore size: Packaging unit: 20 sec. 80 g/m2 0.007% ca. 15 µm 100 Ø mm 70 90 110 125 Order No. 10 00 21201 10 00 21202 10 00 21203 10 00 21204 Ø mm 150 185 240 4 Round filters for quantitative analysis, type Black Very quick filtering, for coarse precipitations. Filtering speed acc. to Herzberg: Grammage: Ash content: Pore size: Packaging unit: 10 sec. 80 g/m2 0,007% ca. 20 to 25 µm 100 Ø mm 70 90 110 125 Order No. 10 00 21101 10 00 21102 10 00 21103 10 00 21104 Ø mm 150 185 240 Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW7R3314 Order No. 10 00 24505 10 00 24506 10 00 24507 Order No. 10 00 21305 10 00 21306 10 00 21307 Order No. 10 00 21205 10 00 21206 10 00 21207 Order No. 10 00 21105 10 00 21106 10 00 21107 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 725

727

Separating Systems Filtration Filter Papers Ashless filter papers, MACHEREY-NAGEL 1 MN 640 m - medium speed Ash less filter paper with medium speed and medium retention. Typical applications in- clude gravimetric analysis, quantitative determinations of sediments and high purity clean up procedures. Filtration speed according to DIN 53137: 27 s Thickness: Basis weight: Ash content: 0.2 mm 85 g/m2 < 0.01% 1 2 3 726 Type Round filter MN 640 m Round filter MN 640 m Round filter MN 640 m Round filter MN 640 m Round filter MN 640 m Round filter MN 640 m Round filter MN 640 m Round filter MN 640 m Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 Order No. 10 46 92305 10 46 92307 10 46 92309 10 46 92311 10 46 92312 10 46 92315 10 46 92318 10 46 92324 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 MN 640 w - fast filtration Ash less filter paper for fast filtration of coarse particles and gelatinous precipitates. Filtration speed according to DIN 53137: 9 s Thickness: Basis weight: Ash content: 0.2 mm 85 g/m2 < 0.01% Type Round filter MN 640 w Round filter MN 640 w Round filter MN 640 w Round filter MN 640 w Round filter MN 640 w Round filter MN 640 w Round filter MN 640 w Round filter MN 640 w Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 Order No. 10 46 92205 10 46 92207 10 46 92209 10 46 92211 10 46 92212 10 46 92215 10 46 92218 10 46 92224 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 MN 640 d - slow filtration Ash less filter paper for fitlration of fine precipitates like barium sulfate. Filtration speed according to DIN 53137: 140 s Thickness: Basis weight: Ash content: 0.17 mm 85 g/m2 < 0.01% Type Round filter MN 640 d Round filter MN 640 d Round filter MN 640 d Round filter MN 640 d Round filter MN 640 d Round filter MN 640 d Round filter MN 640 d Round filter MN 640 d Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 Order No. 10 46 92505 10 46 92507 10 46 92509 10 46 92511 10 46 92512 10 46 92515 10 46 92518 10 46 92524 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 General purpose filter papers, MACHEREY-NAGEL 4 MN 615 - General purpose filter paper Most widely used general purpose filter paper with medium retention and flow rate. This paper covers a wide range of laboratory applications and is frequently used for clarifying liquids. Filtration speed according to DIN 53137: 22 s Thickness: Basis weight: 0,16 mm 70 g/m2 Continued on next page

728

Filter Papers Type Round filter MN 615 Round filter MN 615 Round filter MN 615 Round filter MN 615 Round filter MN 615 Round filter MN 615 Round filter MN 615 Round filter MN 615 Folded filter MN 615 ¼ Folded filter MN 615 ¼ Folded filter MN 615 ¼ Folded filter MN 615 ¼ Folded filter MN 615 ¼ Folded filter MN 615 ¼ Folded filter MN 615 ¼ Folded filter MN 615 ¼ Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 Order No. 10 46 94305 10 46 94307 10 46 94309 10 46 94311 10 46 94312 10 46 94315 10 46 94318 10 46 94324 10 46 95305 10 46 95307 10 46 95309 10 46 95311 10 46 95312 10 46 95315 10 46 95318 10 46 95324 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 5 M 617 - Dense filter paper for fine precipitates Fast filter paper with excellent retention of coarse particles and gelatinous precipitates. Used for example for routine clean up of biological or organic solutions. Filtration speed according to DIN 53137: 9 s Thickness: Basis weight: 0,2 mm 85 g/m2 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 6 MN 619 - Dense filter paper for fine precipitates Filter paper with very high retention and slow flow rate. Excellent clarifying filter for cloudy suspensions and for water and soil analysis. Filtration speed according to DIN 53137: 100 s Thickness: Basis weight: 0,17 mm 75 g/m2 Separating Systems Filtration 4 5 6 Type Round filter MN 617 Round filter MN 617 Round filter MN 617 Round filter MN 617 Round filter MN 617 Round filter MN 617 Round filter MN 617 Round filter MN 617 Folded filter MN 617 ¼ Folded filter MN 617 ¼ Folded filter MN 617 ¼ Folded filter MN 617 ¼ Folded filter MN 617 ¼ Folded filter MN 617 ¼ Folded filter MN 617 ¼ Folded filter MN 617 ¼ Type Round filter MN 619 Round filter MN 619 Round filter MN 619 Round filter MN 619 Round filter MN 619 Round filter MN 619 Round filter MN 619 Round filter MN 619 Folded filter MN 619 ¼ Folded filter MN 619 ¼ Folded filter MN 619 ¼ Folded filter MN 619 ¼ Folded filter MN 619 ¼ Folded filter MN 619 ¼ Folded filter MN 619 ¼ Folded filter MN 619 ¼ Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 Order No. 10 46 93405 10 46 93407 10 46 93409 10 46 93411 10 46 93412 10 46 93415 10 46 93418 10 46 93424 10 46 93505 10 46 93507 10 46 93509 10 46 93511 10 46 93512 10 46 93515 10 46 93518 10 46 93524 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 Order No. 10 46 93705 10 46 93707 10 46 93709 10 46 93711 10 46 93712 10 46 93715 10 46 93718 10 46 93724 10 46 93805 10 46 93807 10 46 93809 10 46 93811 10 46 93812 10 46 93815 10 46 93818 10 46 93824 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 727

729

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW6PB014 co d e b e w WW6PB015 co d e b e w WW6PB016 co d e b e w WW6PB017 728 Filter Papers Antibiotica Test Papers, Hahnemühle Recommended for identification of pathogens of infectious diseases by determination of the degree of resistance against antibiotics pursuant to the zone of inhibition test method. • Made from ultrapure raw materials, entirely without additives to ensure that no interfer- ence will occur during the incubation • Consistent thickness and absorption volume per paper Corresponds to the specifications for a substance carrier pursuant to DIN 58940 – 2 Grade 22 22 2668 2668 3324 Ø mm 6 9 6 9 6 Weight g/m2 180 180 320 320 280 Order No. 10 15 92206 10 15 92214 10 15 96802 10 15 96803 10 15 92409 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Kieselguhr Papers, Hahnemühle For separation of ultra-fine semi-colloidal turbidities • Clarification of extracts from soil suspensions, milk serum, starch solutions, and sugary solutions prior to refractometry • For the retention of protein precipitates and slime particles from solutions • Clear filtration of urine Grade Ø mm 125 150 185 240 Other sizes on request. 287 287 287 287 Weight g/m2 154 154 154 154 Order No. 10 15 92871 10 15 92872 10 15 92873 10 15 92874 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 Filter Paper, Low Nitrogen, Hahnemühle Recommended for filtration of fine precipitations prior to Kjeldahl solubilisation. Extremely low nitrogen content, approx. 0.05 mg / 110 mm paper. Grade Ø mm 240 Other sizes on request. 2095 Weight g/m2 85 Order No. 10 15 92095 PU pc/Pack 100 Filter Papers for Sugar Analysis, Hahnemühle Recommended for the clarifying filtration of beet extracts and juices prior to analysis. • High filtration speed combined with high retention of particles • Two surfaces are available: smooth or creped Technical data: Grade Properties 3459 3002 fast, creped medium fast, smooth Filtration Herzberg s 110 150 Thickness mm 0.3 0.14 Grade Ø mm 200 230 Other sizes on request. 3002 3459 Weight g/m2 69 74 Order No. 10 15 93002 10 15 93459 PU pc/Pack 1000 100

730

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW6PB024 Filter Papers Filter Papers for Beer Analysis, Hahnemühle These filter papers are recommended for filtration analysis and determinations in beer brewing based on the specifications by the MEBAK (Middle European Brewery Analysis Commission) • Ideal for sample preparation and clarification • Suitable for removing CO2 and turbidities Grade Form 2555 2555 2555 597 597 folded filter, grained folded filter, grained folded filter, grained filter circles, smooth filter circles, smooth Ø mm 185 240 320 185 320 Weight g/m2 75 75 75 81 81 Order No. 10 15 92555 10 15 92556 10 15 92557 10 15 93186 10 15 97321 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Black Filter Paper, Hahnemühle Recommended for the detection of very fine traces of light particles and precipitates. • The filter paper grade 551 is a technical filter paper made from pure cellulose with the addition of black dye • White and light particles can be detected easily by the strong contrast to the black filter paper co d e b e w WW6PB019 • 95 g/sqm, 0.2 µm thick, 850 s filtration (Herzberg) Gra- Order No. Gra- Ø mm de 551 55 10 15 90551 551 70 10 15 91551 Other sizes on request. PU pc/Pack 100 100 Ø mm de Order No. 551 90 10 15 92551 551 240 10 15 93551 PU pc/Pack 100 100 co d e b e w WW6PB025 Activated Carbon Filter Paper, Hahnemühle Recommended for the adsorption of certain molecules from solutions and gases and for separation of ultra-fine semi-colloidal turbidities. • High-performance adsorption • Minimum 35% activated carbon content • 196 g/sqm, 0.52 µm thick, 360 s filtration (Herzberg) Grade Form 508 filter circles Other sizes on request. Ø mm 110 Weight g/m2 196 Order No. 10 15 95081 PU pc/Pack 100 Seed Testing Papers, Hahnemühle Recommended for reliable seed testing. All papers comply with the ISTA recommenda- tions. All seed testing papers are made of highly pure cellulose and are free of spores, bacteria, and any toxic substances which might affect the germination of the seeds. Article Type 3236, pleated strips, grey Type 3014, pleated strips, white Type 3014, pleated strips, white Type 0858, Wrapping strips for ple- ated strips Type 520b, creped, white Type 5703, absorbent, white Dimensions mm 110 × 20 × 2000, 50 double folds 110 × 20 × 2000, 50 double folds 110 × 20 × 2000, 50 double folds 110 × 580 580 × 580 580 × 580 Order No. 10 15 93762 PU pc/Pack 1008 10 15 93763 1008 10 15 93764 10 15 93761 10 15 92058 10 15 97858 306 500 100 100 co d e b e w WW6PB023 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 729

731

Separating Systems Filtration 1 co d e b e w WW6PB011 2 730 Membrane Filters Membrane Filters, Hahnemühle 1 Cellulose acetate membrane filters Ideal for aqueous samples, biological applications and protein filtration • Resistant to aqueous solutions with a pH value of 4 – 8, to most alcohols, hydrocarbons and oils • Filtration of aqueous solutions for biological and clinical analyses • Sterilisation of biological solutions (CA membranes with a pore size of 0.2 µm are spe- cifically recommended if the extraction of proteins is of particular importance) • Sterilisation of culture media (0.2 µm) • Maximum temperature 180°C mm Ø 25 47 50 Other sizes on request. PU pc/Pack Pore size µm 0.2 Order No. 100 10 15 91025 100 10 15 91047 100 0.45 Order No. 10 15 92025 10 15 92047 10 15 92050 Cellulose nitrate membrane filters Ideal for clarification and sterilisation of aqueous solutions, for microbiological analyses and particle count determination • High non-specific adsorption: 160 µg/cm² for gamma-globulin • Resistant to aqueous solutions with a pH value of 4 – 8, to hydrocarbons and some diluted solvents • Maximum temperature: 130°C • Membranes with grid lines are suitable for microbiological analyses (determination of the bacteria count) of water, drugs, drinks, cosmetics, etc. for evidence of E.coli, coliform bacteria, and other microbes. • Sterilised membranes are packaged individually Pore size µm 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.8 0.2 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 Ø mm 25 47 50 25 47 47 50 47 47 47 47 47 50 Version non sterile, white non sterile, white non sterile, white non sterile, white, gridded non sterile, white, gridded non sterile, white non sterile, white non sterile, white sterile, white, gridded sterile, white, gridded sterile, white sterile, black, gridded sterile, black, gridded Order No. 10 15 93035 10 15 93036 10 15 93039 10 15 93041 10 15 93042 10 15 93043 10 15 93050 10 15 93051 10 15 93046 10 15 93047 10 15 93048 10 15 93049 10 15 93059 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Other sizes on request. 2 Mixed cellulose ester membrane filter Ideal for clarification and sterilisation of aqueous solutions, for microbiological analyses and particle count determination • Well suited for gravimetric analyses, constant weight • Suitable for aqueous solutions (pH value 4 – 8), hydrocarbons and some diluted solvents • High non-specific adsorption, 160 µg/cm² for gamma-globulin (with 0.2 µm pore size, reduction with increasing pore size) • Temperature resistance up to 180°C • Membranes with grid lines are suitable for microbiological analyses (determination of the bacteria count) of water, drugs, drinks, cosmetics, etc. for evidence of E.coli, coliform bacteria, and other microbes; sections with 3.1 x 3.1 mm grid • Sterilised membranes are packaged individually Pore size µm 0.2 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 3 5 8 0.2 Ø mm 50 25 47 47 50 50 47 47 47 47 Version white, non-sterile white, non-sterile white, non-sterile white, non-sterile, gridded white, non-sterile, gridded black, non-sterile, gridded white, non-sterile white, non-sterile white, non-sterile white, sterile, gridded Order No. 10 15 94030 10 15 94031 10 15 94932 10 15 94933 10 15 94941 10 15 94934 10 15 94935 10 15 94936 10 15 94937 10 15 94938 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Continued on next page

732

Separating Systems Filtration Membrane Filters Pore size µm 0.2 0.45 0.45 Ø mm 50 47 50 Version white, sterile, gridded white, sterile, gridded white, sterile, gridded Other sizes on request. 3 Nylon membrane filters Order No. 10 15 94939 10 15 94940 10 15 94029 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 Recommended for filtration, sterilisation and clarification of the mobile phases in HPLC analyses, of aqueous, alkaline, and organic samples. • Made of hydrophilic polyamide • High non-specific adsorption, high mechanical stability • Filtration for removal of particles from water and aqueous solutions, and from solvents for HPLC • Temperature resistance of up to 134°C Pore size µm 0.2 0.45 Other sizes on request. Ø mm 47 47 Order No. 10 15 95051 10 15 95053 PU pc/Pack 100 100 PTFE membrane filters Made of 100% PTFE (polytetrafluorethylene), reinforced with a polypropylene net. • Permanently hydrophobic • Resistant to almost all chemicals, very strong acids, cryoliquids, alkalis, aggressive or- ganic solvents • Prior to the filtration of aqueous samples, moisten the membranes with an organic sol- vent such as ethanol, methanol, or isopropanol • Temperature resistance up to 145°C Pore size µm 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.45 5 5 Ø mm 25 47 25 47 47 90 Other sizes on request. Version Order No. non-sterile, white non-sterile, white non-sterile, white non-sterile, white non-sterile, white non-sterile, white 10 15 94161 10 15 94162 10 15 94163 10 15 94164 10 15 94165 10 15 94166 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 25 3 co d e b e w WW2NY393 qpore Membrane Filters, neoLab® qpore CME membrane filters consist of cellulose acetate and cellulose nitrate. Being bi- ologically inert, they are suitable for a wide range of applications: sterile filtration, bio-as- says, clear filtration, particle analysis in liquids and in air. Sterile, with grid, MCE These CME membrane filter have a high-contrast grid. The grid lines are spaced at 3.1 mm and do not affect colony growth. Sterile, packaged individually. Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.8 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 47 47 47 50 50 Non-sterile, without grid, MCE Pore size µm 0.22 0.22 0.45 0.45 Ø mm 25 47 25 47 Order No. 10 01 60030 10 01 60031 10 01 60032 10 01 60033 10 01 60034 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 Order No. 10 01 60026 10 01 60027 10 01 60028 10 01 60029 PU pc/Pack 200 200 200 200 Non-sterile, CA The hydrophilic qpore membrane filters made of pure cellulose acetate CA belong to the group of filters with very low binding properties. These filters enable high filtration quan- tities and thus reduce the need for filter changes. CA membrane filters are ideally suited for the filtration of proteins and enzymes, sterile filtration of cell culture media and other applications, i.e. wherever the preservation of the original protein composition and con- centration is important. Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 co d e b e w Ø mm 47 47 Order No. 10 01 60082 10 01 60083 PU pc/Pack 200 200 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 731

733

Separating Systems Filtration Membrane Filters Non-sterile, PTFE, hydrophobe The hydrophilic qpore membrane filters made of polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE are ideally suited for the filtration of dipolar media where high chemical resistance is required. PTFE membranes are biologically and chemically inert and have high flow rates. Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 47 47 Order No. 10 01 60084 10 01 60085 PU pc/Pack 200 200 Non-sterile, PTFE, hydrophile The hydrophilic qpore membrane filters made of polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE are ideally suited for the filtration of dipolar media where high chemical resistance is required. PTFE membranes are biologically and chemically inert and have high flow rates. Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 47 47 Order No. 10 01 60086 10 01 60087 PU pc/Pack 200 200 Non-sterile, PVDF, hydrophobe The hydrophobic qpore membrane filters made of polyvenylidene fluoride PVDF bind far less protein than membrane filters made of nylon, PTFE or mixed cellulose ester. They have a very high flow rate compared to other membrane materials. Due to their low protein and active substance binding properties, PVDF membrane filters are ideally suited for filtration in life sciences. These membrane filters are also excellently suited for the filtration of air and other gases. Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 47 47 Order No. 10 01 60088 10 01 60089 PU pc/Pack 200 200 Non-sterile, PVDF, hydrophile The hydrophilic qpore membrane filters made of polyvenylidene fluoride PVDF bind far less protein than membrane filters made of nylon, PTFE or mixed cellulose ester. They have a very high flow rate compared to other membrane materials. Due to their low protein and active substance binding properties, PVDF membrane filters are ideally suited for filtration in life sciences. These membrane filters are also excellently suited for the filtration of air and other gases. Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 47 47 Order No. 10 01 60090 10 01 60091 PU pc/Pack 200 200 Non-sterile, Nylon The hydrophilic qpore pure nylon membrane filters on carrier material are designed to be uniformly wetted and retain their tear strength when used in general filtration or medical examinations, eliminating the need for wetting agents that could be extracted when filter- ing aqueous solutions. Nylon membrane filters are flexible, durable and tear resistant and can be autoclaved at 135°C. The high-quality nylon membrane filters are suitable for filtering aqueous solutions and most organic solvents. Nylon membrane filters are suitable for a variety of biological sam- ples and can be used where other membranes are unsuitable or difficult to use. PU pc/Pack 200 200 10 01 60094 10 01 60095 Ø mm 47 47 Order No. Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 Non-sterile, PES The hydrophilic qpore membrane filters made of pure polyethersulfone PES have the highest flow rate compared to other membrane materials due to their asymmetric pore structure. Due to their low protein binding and drug binding properties, PES membrane filters are ideally suited for filtration in the life science sector. Due to their high thermal stability, PES membrane filters can also be used to filter hot liquids. Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 47 47 Order No. 10 01 60096 10 01 60097 PU pc/Pack 200 200 732

734

Separating Systems Filtration Membrane Filters In-Line Filters, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Polypropylene housing with PTFE membrane with a diameter of 50 mm For cleaning alcohols and organic solutions. For aerating with air and other gases. Non-sterile, autoclavable. co d e b e w WWRJN149 Pore size µm 0.2 0.45 Membrane Ø mm 50 50 Order No. 26 87 22220 26 87 22245 PU pc/Pack 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w WWMUD022 1 Membrane Filters, Berrytec® 1 Membrane Filters Berrytec® • For versatile applications in molecular biology, genetics and microbiology • For filtration, sterilisation and purification • Other formats and pore sizes available on request PTFE membrane hydrophobic: filtration of acids, lyes and solvents, non-polar fluids and gases, almost all chemicals PTFE membrane hydrophilic: see PTFE hydrophobic, additionally filtration of aqueous solutions PVDF membrane hydrophilic: filtration of aqueous and organic samples, resistant to common organic solvents, lyes and alkalines, very low protein adsorption, PH 3-12 Nylon (PA) membrane hydrophilic: Purification and sterile filtration of organic and aque- ous samples, e.g. HPLC, GC, robust membrane, PH 3-14 CA membrane hydrophilic: filtration of aqueous solutions, low protein adsorpion, high stability and flow, purification filtration, PH 4-8 PES membrane hydrophilic: filtation of cell culture and biological fluids, high flow rate, very low protein adsorption, PH 1-13 CMEmembrane hydrophilic: filtration of aqueous solutions, high flow rate, high non-spe- cific adsorption, high stability, PH 4-8 PPmembrane hydrophilic: excellent thermal stability, aqueous and alcoholic solutions and solvents, binds proteins, DNA and RNA applications Ø mm 25 25 47 47 50 50 142 142 Ø mm 25 25 47 47 50 50 142 142 Pore size µm PU pc/Pack Polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) hydrophobic Order No. 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 100 10 63 51121 100 10 63 51122 100 10 63 51105 100 10 63 51106 100 10 63 51660 100 10 63 51254 50 10 63 51661 50 10 63 51258 Pore size µm PU pc/Pack Polyethersulfone (PES) Order No. 100 10 63 51227 100 10 63 51228 100 10 63 51233 100 10 63 51234 100 10 63 51239 100 10 63 51226 25 10 63 51244 25 10 63 58142 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) hydrophilic Order No. 10 63 51537 10 63 51538 10 63 51543 10 63 51544 10 63 51628 10 63 51548 10 63 51662 10 63 51564 Nylon (PA) Order No. 10 63 51119 10 63 51120 10 63 51103 10 63 51104 10 63 51310 10 63 51311 10 63 51440 10 63 51441 PU pc/Pack Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) Order No. 50 10 63 51101 50 10 63 51102 50 10 63 51107 50 10 63 51108 50 10 63 51316 50 10 63 51317 50 10 63 51322 50 10 63 51323 PU pc/Pack Mixed Cellulose Ester (MCE) Order No. 100 10 63 51284 100 10 63 51285 100 10 63 51290 100 10 63 51291 100 10 63 51296 100 10 63 51297 50 10 63 51302 50 10 63 51303 Continued on next page Cellulose acetate (CA) Order No. 10 63 51402 10 63 51403 10 63 51409 10 63 51410 10 63 51415 10 63 51350 10 63 51421 10 63 51422 Polypropylene (PP) Order No. 10 63 51570 10 63 51571 10 63 51577 10 63 51578 10 63 51583 10 63 51584 10 63 51601 10 63 51602 733

735

Separating Systems Filtration 1 2 co d e b e w WWMUD023 734 co d e b e w WWMUD011 Membrane Filters Grid membranes, white, sterile Ø mm 47 47 50 50 47 47 50 50 Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 Accessories Packing type Order No. on band on band on band on band individually packed individually packed individually packed individually packed 10 63 50300 10 63 50010 10 63 53310 10 63 50020 10 63 50030 10 63 50040 10 63 50060 10 63 50070 PU pc/Pack 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 for grid membrane sterile on band Article 1 Membrane dispenser 2 Filter bar made of stainless steel, 3 places Filter bar made of stainless steel, 6 places for 47 – 50 mm filter, with stopcocks and stainless steel support frits for 47 – 50 mm filter, with stopcocks and stainless steel support frits Order No. 10 63 51642 10 63 55030 10 63 51060 Syringe Filters, Filter Holders Syringe Filters Sterile, Berrytec® • For a wide range of applications in molecular biology, genetics, and microbiology • Available with the most commonly used membranes (PVDF, PES, CA) • Special filters with pore size 0.1 µm for the cell culture PVDF membrane, hydrophilic: Filtration of aqueous and organic samples, resistant to commonly used organic solvents, acids and alkalines, very low protein adsorption, PH 3-12 CA membrane, hydrophilic: Filtration of aqueous solutions, low protein adsorption, high stability and flow, clarifying filtration, PH 4-8 PES membrane, hydrophilic: Filtration of cell culture and biological fluids, high flow rate, very low protein adsorption, PH 1-13 Technical data: Membrane Ø: Housing material: Connection input: Connection output: Operating pressure max.: 6 bar Sample volumes: Filter surface: 13 mm polypropylene (PP) polypropylene (PP) polypropylene (PP) female luer-lock male luer-slip female luer-lock male luer-slip 6 bar up to 200 ml approx. 5.00 cm² female luer-lock male luer-slip 6 bar up to 100 ml approx. 3.50 cm² up to 15 ml approx. 1.00 cm² 25 mm 30 mm Ø mm 13 25 25 33 33 Pore size µm 0.1 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 Cellulose acetate (CA) Order No. PU pc/ Pack 50 50 10 63 52601 50 10 63 52504 50 10 63 53100 50 10 63 53150 Polyethersulphone (PES) Order No. 10 63 53304 10 63 52512 10 63 52503 10 63 53000 10 63 53300 Polyvinylidene fluo- ride (PVDF) Order No. 10 63 53301 10 63 52502 10 63 52600 10 63 53200 10 63 53250 Syringe Filters, Berrytec® • For effective sample preparation • Suitable for HPLC, IC, GC, and general particle filtration • 1000 pc. bulk packs available on request PTFE membrane hydrophobic: filtration of acids, lyes and solvents, non-polar fluids and gases, almost all chemicals PTFE membrane hydrophilic: see PTFE hydrophobic, additionally filtration of aqueous solutions PVDF membrane hydrophilic: filtration of aqueous and organic samples, resistant to common organic solvents, lyes and alkalines, very low protein adsorption, PH 3-12 Nylon (PA) membrane hydrophilic: Purification and sterile filtration of organic and aque- ous samples, e.g. HPLC, GC, robust membrane, PH 3-14 CA membrane hydrophilic: filtration of aqueous solutions, low protein adsorption, high stability and flow, purification filtration, PH 4-8 Continued on next page

736

Separating Systems Filtration Syringe Filters, Filter Holders PES membrane hydrophilic: filtration of cell culture and biological fluids, high flow rate, very low protein adsorption, PH 1-13 CME membrane hydrophilic: filtration of aqueous solutions, high flow rate, high non-spe- cific adsorption, high stability, PH 4-8 RC membrane hydrophilic: filtration of aqueous and organic solutions such as HPLC and GC, low protein adsorption, high flow, PH 3-12 GF membrane hydrophilic: fast filtration with very high retention (pre-filtration), resistant to solvents, acids and alkalines PP membrane hydrophobic: turns hydrophilic by moistening with organic solutions (eth- anol), excellent thermal stability, aqueous and alcoholic solutions and solvents, binds proteins, DNA and RNA applications mm Ø Pore size µm 13 0.22 13 0.45 25 0.22 25 0.45 30 0.22 30 0.45 mm Ø Pore size µm 13 0.22 13 0.45 25 0.22 25 0.45 30 0.22 30 0.45 Polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) hydrophobic Order No. PU pc/ Pack 100 10 63 51003 100 10 63 51004 100 10 63 54005 100 10 63 51006 100 10 63 51007 100 10 63 51008 Polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) hydrophilic Order No. 10 63 51011 10 63 51012 10 63 51013 10 63 51014 10 63 51015 10 63 51016 Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) Order No. 10 63 55003 10 63 55004 10 63 55005 10 63 55006 10 63 55007 10 63 55008 Nylon (PA) Order No. 10 63 52003 10 63 52004 10 63 52005 10 63 52006 10 63 52007 10 63 52008 Cellulose acetate (CA) Order No. 10 63 57003 10 63 57004 10 63 57005 10 63 57006 10 63 57007 10 63 57008 Polyethersulfone (PES) Order No. PU pc/ Pack 100 10 63 56003 100 10 63 56004 100 10 63 56005 100 10 63 56006 100 10 63 56007 100 10 63 56008 Mixed cellulose ester (MCE) Order No. 10 63 53003 10 63 53004 10 63 53005 10 63 53006 10 63 53007 10 63 53008 Regenerated cellulose (RC) Order No. 10 63 50190 10 63 50200 10 63 50210 10 63 50220 10 63 50230 10 63 50240 Polypropylene (PP) Order No. 10 63 51607 10 63 51608 10 63 51609 10 63 51610 10 63 51611 10 63 51612 Pore size µm Glas fibre (GF) Order No. 0.7 1.2 0.7 1.2 10 63 52560 10 63 52550 10 63 52580 10 63 52570 co d e b e w WW4T2058 Micropur Syringe Filters, Altmann Analytik These syringe filters are ideal for filtering the sample solution before the injection. Different materials have their own specific properties. For this reason, the selection of the appro- priate filter depends primarily on the filtration solutions used. Regenerated cellulose (RC): • Hydrophilic membrane with very low adsorption • For aqueous and organic/aqueous liquids (polar and medium polar sample solutions) • Binding capacity for proteins 84 µg/filter (with 25 mm filter) • Perfect for biological samples • High chemical resistance • High flow rates Cellulose acetate (CA): • Hydrophilic membrane • Very high shape stability in aqueous solutions • Extremely low binding capacity for proteins 21 µg/filter (with 25mm filter) • Especially suited for filtration of tissue cultures and biological macromolecules Polyamide (PA): • Hydrophilic membrane • For aqueous and organic/aqueous medium polar liquids • Resistant to many organic solvents • Not resistant to acids and base • High retention of proteins Polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE): • Hydrophobic membrane • For non-polar liquids and gases • Very resistant to all kinds of solvents, acids and bases • Flushing with alcohol and water makes the originally hydrophobic membrane water-wet- table • Suitable for degasing of HPLC solvents • Unsuitable for aqueous solutions Pore size µm mm Ø 25 0.2 25 0.45 15 0.2 15 0.45 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 Material RC Order No. 10 32 16011 10 32 16012 10 32 16013 10 32 16014 CA Order No. 10 32 16021 10 32 16022 10 32 16023 10 32 16024 PA Order No. 10 32 16031 10 32 16032 10 32 16033 10 32 16034 PTFE Order No. 10 32 16041 10 32 16042 10 32 16043 10 32 16044 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 735

737

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW6PB012 1 2 3 736 Syringe Filters, Filter Holders Syringe Filters, Hahnemühle Technical data: Membran Ø Housing material: Fitting inlet: Fitting outlet: Filter area: Sample volume: Hold um volume: Max. pressure: 13 mm Polypropylene Female Luer-Lock Male Luer-Slip 1.09 cm2 1 – 10 < 25 µl 6 bar 25 mm Polypropylene Female Luer-Lock Male Luer-Slip 4.08 cm2 10 – 100 ml < 100 µl 6 bar 30 mm Polypropylene Female Luer-Lock Male Luer-Slip 5.39 cm2 > 100 ml < 200 µl 6 bar 1 Cellulose acetate syringe filters Recommended for clarification, purification and sterilisation of aqueous solutions and biological samples. • Cellulose acetate membrane, surfactant-free, hydrophilic • Low non-specific adsorption • Filtration of biological liquids, sera or tissue culture additives in which the sample loss is to be kept to a minimum by means of an extremely low protein binding to the mem- brane • Perfect for aqueous solutions (pH 4 - 8) and most alcohols, hydrocarbons and oils Pore size µm 0.2 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.45 Housing Ø mm 25 25 25 30 30 25 30 25 30 Version Order No. non-sterile non-sterile non-sterile non-sterile non-sterile sterile sterile sterile sterile 10 15 92101 10 15 92103 10 15 92114 10 15 92107 10 15 92108 10 15 92105 10 15 92109 10 15 92106 10 15 92111 PU pc/Pack 100 100 500 100 500 50 50 50 50 2 Regenerated cellulose syringe filters High resistance in filtration and sterilisation of aqueous and organic samples in HPLC and GC applications. • Regenerated cellulose membrane, hydrophilic • Resistant to almost all solvents and aqueous solutions in a pH range of 3-12 • Low protein adsorption • Sterilisation and clarification of cell and protein solutions and biological liquids without protein loss Pore size µm 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.45 0.45 Other sizes on request Housing Ø mm 13 25 13 25 30 Order No. 10 15 92408 10 15 92402 10 15 92413 10 15 92404 10 15 92405 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 3 Nylon syringe filters Recommended for analytical applications, filtration of samples and solvents for HPLC, under non-extreme conditions. • Nylon membrane, hydrophilic • Suitable for diluted organic solvents (e.g. acetone, methylenchloride and acetonitrile) and alkaline solutions • Free of surfactants Pore size µm 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.45 0.45 Housing Ø mm 13 25 25 13 25 25 Order No. 10 15 92308 10 15 92301 10 15 92303 10 15 92307 10 15 92304 10 15 92306 PU pc/Pack 100 100 500 100 100 500 Continued on next page

738

Separating Systems Filtration Syringe Filters, Filter Holders 4 PTFE syringe filters Recommend for HPLC and GC samples, sterilisation and clarification of most solvents and for air sterilisation. • Polytetrafluorethylene (Teflon) membrane, hydrophobic • High chemical resistance to most organic solvents and acids • Free of surfactants • Prior to the filtration of aqueous samples, rinse the membranes with ethanol or isopro- panol as surfactant • Suitable for clarification of most solvents (e.g. acetone, dimethylformamide or DMSO) or highly aggressive liquid solvents or acids Pore size µm 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 Housing Ø mm 13 25 13 25 25 30 Order No. 10 15 92201 10 15 92203 10 15 92204 10 15 92207 10 15 92208 10 15 92209 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 500 100 qpore Syringe Filters and Safety Filters, neoLab® 5 Syringe filters, qpore, CA The qpore® syringe filter made of cellulose acetat CA is ideal for the preparation of sam- ples in the 1.5 to 100 ml volume range. Due to its low protein binding, this syringe filter is recommended for sterile and clear filtration of culture media, buffers etc. and of aqueous solutions in general. Sterile yes yes yes yes no no Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 25 25 30 30 30 30 Order No. 10 01 60012 10 01 60013 10 01 60014 10 01 60015 10 01 60062 10 01 60063 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 4 co d e b e w WW2NY394 6 Syringe filters, qpore, Nylon This non-sterile qpore® syringe filter has a hydrophilic nylon membrane and is ideal for filtration of aqueous solutions and solvents. The clean and pure nylon membrane com- bines the fastest flow rates with a low unspecific binding. Includes pre-filter made of fiberglass. Thus, this syringe filter can be used anywhere where the application or the clear filtration is allowed under unsterile conditions, as usually in the sample preparation before HPLC or GC. Sterile Order No. no no no no no no Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 13 13 17 17 30 30 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 01 60116 10 01 60117 10 01 60016 10 01 60017 10 01 60018 10 01 60019 7 Syringe filters, qpore, PTFE The qpore® syringe filter made of polytetrafluorethylene PTFE are perfectly suited for the fitration of media which require a high chemical resistance. The PTFE membranes are biologically and chemically inert and have high flow rates. The PTFE membrane is availa- ble in a hydrophobic and in a hydrophilic version. 5 6 7 Sterile yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no no no no Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 co d e b e w Ø mm 33 33 25 25 13 13 17 17 30 30 13 13 25 25 Property Order No. hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophilic hydrophilic hydrophilic hydrophilic 10 01 60080 10 01 60081 10 01 60129 10 01 60130 10 01 60112 10 01 60113 10 01 60020 10 01 60021 10 01 60022 10 01 60023 10 01 60133 10 01 60024 10 01 60134 10 01 60025 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 737

739

Separating Systems Filtration Syringe Filters, Filter Holders Syringe filters, qpore, PES This qpore® syringe filter has a hydrophilic membrane from polyether sulfone PES with high mechanical and chemical resilience with minimal protein absorption. Through an excellent flow-through rate it is optimally suited for sterile filtration, clear filtration and cell removal under sterile conditions. Sterile yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no Pore size µm 0.1 0.22 0.45 0.1 0.22 0.45 0.1 0.22 0.45 0.1 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 13 13 13 25 25 25 30 30 30 33 33 33 25 25 Order No. 10 01 60123 10 01 60124 10 01 60125 10 01 60043 10 01 60044 10 01 60045 10 01 60046 10 01 60047 10 01 60048 10 01 60067 10 01 60068 10 01 60069 10 01 60064 10 01 60065 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Syringe filters, qpore, fiberglass The qpore® glass fibre syringe filter with pore size 1 µm are particularly well suited for pre-filtration of heavily contaminated samples. Thanks to the special housing, this syringe filter can be attached to another syringe filter to allow for two-step filtration in one go. The male luer-lock connection at the outlet of the glass fibre syringe filter ensures solid attach- ment to the female luer-lock connection at the inlet of the second syringe filter. PU pc/Pack 100 Pore size µm 1 10 01 60061 Ø mm 33 Order No. Sterile no Syringe filters, qpore, PVDF The qpore® syringe filters made of polyvenylidene fluoride PVDF bind far less protein than syringe attachment filters made of nylon, PTFE or mixed cellulose ester. They have a very high flow rate compared to other membrane materials. Due to their low protein and active substance binding properties, PVDF membrane filters are ideally suited for filtration in the life science sector. The PTFE membrane is available in a hydrophobic and in a hydrophilic version. Sterile Order No. Property yes yes no no no no no no 2 Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 33 33 13 13 30 30 30 30 hydrophilic hydrophilic hydrophobic hydrophobic hydrophilic hydrophilic hydrophobic hydrophobic 10 01 60070 10 01 60071 10 01 60114 10 01 60115 10 01 60072 10 01 60073 10 01 60074 10 01 60075 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Syringe filters, qpore, CME This qpore® syringe filter has a hydrophilic CME membrane with excellent thermal and chemical resistance. Thanks to its premium flow rate, it is perfectly suited for sterile filtra- tion, clarification and cell removal under sterile conditions. Sterile yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no no no no no no no no Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 0.8 1.0 3.0 5.0 8.0 0.22 0.45 0.8 1.0 3.0 5.0 8.0 Ø mm 13 13 30 30 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 Order No. 10 01 60127 10 01 60128 10 01 60076 10 01 60077 10 01 60118 10 01 60119 10 01 60135 10 01 60136 10 01 60137 10 01 60138 10 01 60139 10 01 60078 10 01 60079 10 01 60140 10 01 60141 10 01 60142 10 01 60143 10 01 60144 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Continued on next page 1 738

740

Separating Systems Filtration 1 Syringe Filters, Filter Holders Filter holder This membrane filter holder can be attached to syringes via a luer lock. It matches mem- brane filters of 25 mm diameter. Autoclavable. Article qpore® filter holder, for filter Ø 25 mm Order No. 10 01 60066 PU pc/Pack 10 2 Safety filters, qpore, Noliquids, PTFE qpore Noliquids safety filters prevent the contamination of the ambient air with harmful aerosols and protect vacuum pumps from the entry of liquids. Also suitable for sterile ventilation of bio-reactors. Connection: clip for tubes of 7-11 mm internal diameter. Pore size µm 0.22 Ø mm 50 Order No. 10 01 60035 Pore size µm 0.45 Ø mm 50 Order No. 10 01 60036 Minisart® Syringe Filters with PP-Housing, Sartorius Lab Products and Services Elimination of particles from your samples prior to analysis is essential in order to maxi- mize the its operating life time of your chromatography column. Minisart® syringe filters are optimized for sample preparation and consist of a polypropylene (PP) housing and membrane components featuring maximum chemical compatibility and minimum extract- ables to ensure excellent results. Due to the typical range of volumes from less than 1 ml to 100 ml, these filters are available in three different diameters with an effective filtration area of 0.12 cm², 1.7 cm² and 4.8 cm². Membrane Case RC RC RC RC RC RC RC RC NY NY PTFE PTFE PTFE PTFE PTFE PTFE PTFE PTFE PTFE PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP Ø mm 15 15 15 25 25 25 4 4 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 25 25 25 4 Pore size µm 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.2 0.45 0.45 sterile Order No. yes no no yes no no no no no no no no yes no no yes no no no 10 16 67760 10 16 67761 10 16 67762 10 16 67768 10 16 67764 10 16 67765 10 16 67821 10 16 67822 10 16 67601 10 16 67602 10 16 67558 10 16 67559 10 16 67572 10 16 67573 10 16 67574 10 16 67575 10 16 67578 10 16 67576 10 16 67820 PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Please enter the webcode WWEZ6021 to see the other variants and accessories in our online catalogue. co d e b e w WWEZ6021 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 739

741

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WWEZ6027 Syringe Filters, Filter Holders Microsart® Manifolds made of Stainless Steel, Sartorius Lab Pro- ducts and Services The ability to accurately detect and quantify microorganisms in liquid samples is of prime importance for any quality control laboratory. This is why membrane filtration is the estab- lished method of choice for liquid testing as it provides reliable and reproducible results. Facilitate your daily microbiological testing procedures with the Microsart® Manifold: se- lect the proper manifold for your individual microbiological testing procedure. Decide between different sizes of manifolds and whether you prefer disposable or stainless steel funnels or filter units. Benefits: • 100% stainless steel for minimized cleaning effort: full autoclavability without disassem- bly • Sterile venting in critical applications: reduced risk of secondary contamination • Quick connection adapters: for fast connection of tubing and fast interconnection of 2 manifolds • Low working height: for ergonomic working in laminar flow Model 168M1-MS Type Microsart® 1-branch manifold for Microsart® funnels and filters Order No. 10 16 61680 168M1-BS100 Microsart® 1-branch manifold for Biosart® 100 10 16 61681 monitors 168M1-BS250 Microsart® 1-branch manifold for Biosart® 250 funnels 10 16 61682 168M1-SS100 Microsart® 1-branch manifold for 100 ml stainless 10 16 61611 steel funnels 168M1-SS500 Microsart® 1-branch manifold for 500 ml stainless 10 16 61615 steel funnels Please enter the webcode WWEZ6027 to see the other variants and accessories in our online catalogue. Membrane Filtration Units BOLA Flow Filters, Bohlender BOLA flow filters suitable for overpressure or vacuum, usable for example as added filter or as large-area in-line apparatus in a line system. Suitable for temperatures up to +160°C. The optionally available filtering membranes can be exchanged easily. Tubing can be connected to GL threads by means of the included laboratory screw joints. The filters are produced without plasticisers and have an almost universal chemical resistance. They do not release any trace elements into the filtrate. Due to the non-adhesive surface, they are easy to clean and can be reused. Technical data: Material: Temperature resistance: Chemical resistance: Vacuum: Sterilization: PTFE from -200°C to +160°C +++ universal suitable autoclavable up to 121°C for membrane dia. mm 25 47 90 Filtration surface cm2 3.1 13.8 52.0 Connection thread GL 14 18 25 for tubing outer Ø mm 3.2 + 6.0 6.0 + 8.0 8.0 + 10.0 Order No. 10 17 67008 10 17 67016 10 17 67024 Everything for your laboratory – from one source 740

742

Membrane Filtration Units BOLA Vacuum Filters, Bohlender Separating Systems Filtration Filtration unit made of PTFE Multi-stage hose connector with integrated lock screw for connecting vacuum tubing with I.D. 6 mm or 8 mm, PTFE supporting disc to fit optionally available filtering discs. Collect- ing vessel made of PFA, filling vessel with lid for protection against contaminations also made of PFA. Temperature resistance -200°C to +250°C, universal chemical resistance. Flow rate: Flow capacity for water under vacuum of 100 kPa (1000 mbar) using a PTFE filtering membrane with a thickness of 0.2 mm: For membrane-Ø 47 mm with pore size 1.00 µm: flow 55 ml/min For membrane-Ø 47 mm with pore size 0.45 µm: flow 20 ml/min For membrane-Ø 47 mm with pore size 0.20 µm: flow 11 ml/min For membrane-Ø 90 mm with pore size 1.00 µm: flow 199 ml/min For membrane-Ø 90 mm with pore size 0.45 µm: flow 72 ml/min For membrane-Ø 90 mm with pore size 0.20 µm: flow 42 ml/min for membrane dia. mm 47 47 90 Filtration surface cm2 13.8 13.8 55.4 Cap. of filling vessel ml 240 500 1000 Outer Ø mm 86 100 130 Total height mm 250 290 370 Order No. 10 17 66408 10 17 66516 10 17 66524 co d e b e w WWRJN141 Filter Units with Bottletop Filters with PES Membrane, Thermo Scientific Nalgene, IDL Rapid-Flow filter funnels and bottletop filters with PES membrane 0.1 µm, 0.2 µm and 0.45 µm pore size, gamma sterilized disposable filter, polystyrene housing, non-cytotoxic, non-pyrogenic. Compared to cellulose nitrate, cellulose acetate and nylon membranes, this hydrophilic membrane has very low extractable levels, high flow rates with aqueous solutions and low protein binding. Thermo Scientific offers this system as a complete filter system and as bottle-top filter, fits all 33-mm-Ø and 45-mm-Ø standard bottles with threads. 0.1 µm and 0,2 µm units have an asymmetric (V-shaped) pore structure, now also equipped with an improved RapidFlow membrane support structure for increasing the flow. This results in higher flow rates and improved service life compared to standard PES membranes. 0.1 µm pore size for reduction of mycoplasm. All filter units are individually packaged in sterile packs. Batch number, pore size, and membrane type for easier identification are printed on the filter part, and for filter systems additionally on the filtrate bottle. Bottletop filters with PES membrane Top part with filter, individually packed in a sterile way. Batch number, pore size durability and membrane type are printed on for easier identification. Suitable for the common bottles with 33-mm Ø and 45-mm Ø diameter. Otherwise same as above. Volume ml 150 150 150 150 500 500 500 500 1000 1000 Thread mm 33 33 45 45 33 33 45 45 33 45 Pore size µm 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.45 0.2 0.2 Membrane Ø mm 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 90 90 Order No. 26 87 59633 26 87 96334 26 87 59645 26 87 96454 26 87 59533 26 87 95334 26 87 59545 26 87 95454 26 87 59733 26 87 59745 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 741

743

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW2NY416 1 2 3 742 Membrane Filtration Units qpore® Bottletop Filters, neoLab® qpore® offers an extensive spectrum of bottletop filters from different materials which are particularly suited for the filtration of larger sample amounts. All membranes are produced from best raw materials under highest quality standards. 1 qpore® bottletop filters with polyethersulfone membrane (PES) These sterile qpore® bottletop filters with polyethersulfone membrane (PES) have fastest flow-through rates and have very low protein binding properties, making them optimal for filtration of cell culture media. With a GL 45 screw cap and hose connection these bottle- top filters are suited for negative pressure filtration applications directly in the sterile bottle. Properties: • green color coding • fast connection for hoses with inner Ø 8 – 12 mm • graduated filtration top • sterile, pyrogen-free, free of detergents • the bottletop filters are packaged individually sterile to 24 pieces Application range: • sterile filtration of cell culture media • microbiological media • buffer solutions and other biological solutions Material PES PES PES PES PES PES Pore size µm 0.1 0.22 0.45 0.1 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 50 50 50 90 90 90 Volume ml 250 250 250 500 500 500 Order No. 10 01 60037 10 01 60004 10 01 60005 10 01 60040 10 01 60008 10 01 60009 PU pc/Pack 24 24 24 24 24 24 2 qpore® bottletop filters with cellulose acetate membrane (CA) These sterile qpore® bottletop filters with cellulose acetate membrane (CA) have fast flow- through rates and have very low protein binding properties, making them optimal for fil- tration of cell culture media. With a GL 45 screw cap and hose connection these bottletop filters are suited for negative pressure filtration applications directly in the sterile bottle. Properties: • blue color coding • fast connection for hoses with inner Ø 8 – 12 mm • graduated filtration top • sterile, pyrogen-free, free of detergents • the bottletop filters are packaged individually sterile to 24 pieces Application range: • sterile filtration of cell culture media • microbiological media • buffer solutions and other biological solutions Material CA CA CA CA Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 50 50 90 90 Volume ml 250 250 500 500 Order No. 10 01 60006 10 01 60007 10 01 60010 10 01 60011 PU pc/Pack 24 24 24 24 3 qpore® bottletop filters with hydrophilic polyvenylidene fluoride membrane (PVDF) These sterile qpore® bottletop filters with hydrophilic polyvenylidene fluoride membrane (PVDF) have the fastest flow rates. With a GL 45 screw cap and hose connection, these bottletop filters are suitable for vacuum filtration applications directly into the sterile bottle. Properties: • yellow color coding • quick connector for hoses with inner Ø 8 – 12 mm • graduated filter head • sterile, pyrogen-free, detergent-free • the bottletop filters are individually sterile packed in 24 pieces. • packaging with cut-in tear-off aid; can therefore be opened without further aids Areas of application: • sterile filtration of cell culture media • microbiological media • buffer solutions and other biological solutions Material PVDF PVDF PVDF PVDF Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 50 50 90 90 Volume ml 250 250 500 500 Order No. 10 01 60038 10 01 60039 10 01 60041 10 01 60042 PU pc/Pack 24 24 24 24

744

Separating Systems Filtration Glass Filters Glass Filter Apparatuses, ROBU® Porosity table ISO 4793-80 International standard Designation Pore size µm Typical fields of application Por. 00 P 500 250 – 500 Liquid and gas distribution Por. 0 P 250 160 – 250 Gas distribution in liquids at low pressures, coarse filtration support in flow systems Por. 1 P 160 100 – 160 Coarse filtration and gas distribution, extraction of coarser materials supporting layer for resilient filters Por. 2 P 100 40 – 100 Por. 3 P 40 16 – 40 Por. 4 P 16 10 – 16 Por. F Por. 5 P 1.6 4 – 4.5 1 – 1.6 Preparative fine filtration, mercury filtration, prepara- tive work with coarse crystalline products Analytical work with medium fine precipitates, ana- lytical filtration, fine gas filtration, special filtration of cellulose Analytical fine filtration, analytical and preparative works with finest precipitates, mercury return and stop valves Fine analytical filtration Finest analytical filtration, general bacteria filtration, semi-sterile filtration Filter Discs VitraPOR®, ROBU® Centered, surfaces untreated Poro- sity 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F Order No. Ø mm 10 10 60 65100 10 10 60 65101 10 10 60 65102 10 10 60 65103 10 10 60 65104 10 10 60 61510 20 10 60 65200 20 10 60 65201 20 10 60 65202 20 10 60 65203 20 10 60 65204 20 10 60 61520 25 10 60 65250 25 10 60 65251 25 10 60 65252 25 10 60 65253 25 10 60 65254 25 10 60 61525 30 10 60 65300 30 10 60 65301 30 10 60 65302 30 10 60 65303 30 10 60 65304 30 10 60 61530 40 10 60 65400 40 10 60 65401 40 10 60 65402 40 10 60 65403 40 10 60 65404 40 10 60 61540 50 10 60 65500 50 10 60 65501 50 10 60 65502 50 10 60 65503 50 10 60 65504 50 10 60 61550 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Poro- sity 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F 0 1 2 3 4 F Order No. Ø mm 60 10 60 65600 60 10 60 65601 60 10 60 65602 60 10 60 65603 60 10 60 65604 60 10 60 61560 70 10 60 65700 70 10 60 65701 70 10 60 65702 70 10 60 65703 70 10 60 65704 70 10 60 61570 80 10 60 65800 80 10 60 65801 80 10 60 65802 80 10 60 65803 80 10 60 65804 80 10 60 61580 90 10 60 65900 90 10 60 65901 90 10 60 65902 90 10 60 65903 90 10 60 65904 90 10 60 61590 100 10 60 65110 100 10 60 65111 100 10 60 65112 100 10 60 65113 100 10 60 65114 100 10 60 61511 120 10 60 65120 120 10 60 65121 120 10 60 65122 120 10 60 65123 120 10 60 65124 120 10 60 61512 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Further sizes, poresizes and bi-plane ground availabe on request co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 743

745

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW6PB007 Glass Filters Glass Fibre Filters, Hahnemühle Recommended for environmental analysis and investigation of air and water pollution. • Made of 100% pure borosilicate glass • Chemical stability: It keeps all its properties in contact with acid solutions (except hy- drofluoric acid) and basic solutions at moderate concentrations • Extremely low metal content • High flow speed and high permeability to air • Can be used as prefilter for membranes (GF9) • Deposition of (radioactive) aerosols, monitoring of nuclear power stations • Gravimetric analyses of organic and inorganic contaminations in water and waste water pursuant to DIN 38409 and EN 872 (suspended particles) • Measurement of immissions, dust measurement in the air and in gases, monitoring of filtration and de-dusting efficiency, monitoring of the combustion air of power stations and in the steel and iron industry • Gravimetric measurement of dust release at workplaces and in production processes, breathing air purification • Scintillation measurement Glass fibre with binder, filter cyrcles NEW: Glass fibre filter GF20 with strong hydrophilic binder. Ideal for fast clarification of aqueous solutions and degassing of acidulous solutions (con- taining CO2) Technical specifications: Weight Grade Filtration g/m2 80 75 70 70 86 GF 6 40 GF 8 12 GF 9 27 GF 10 12 GF 20 15 1) Tested with NaCl particles size <1 µm, maximum at 0.3 to 0.5 µm. Retention rate1) % 99.97 99 99.97 99.97 – Thickness mm 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.45 inorg. H 14 inorg. inorg. U 15 H 13 org. org. – Max T a °C 500 500 500 180 180 Binder Filter class Gurley s – Gra- de Ø mm Order No. GF 6 25 10 15 96002 GF 6 47 10 15 96047 GF 6 50 10 15 96005 GF 6 55 10 15 96055 GF 6 70 10 15 96007 GF 6 90 10 15 96009 GF 6 100 10 15 96010 GF 6 125 10 15 96127 GF 6 142 10 15 96142 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Gra- de Ø mm Order No. GF 6 185 10 15 96186 GF 6 293 10 15 96293 GF 9 50 10 15 99050 GF 9 90 10 15 99090 GF 10 47 10 15 91004 GF 10 100 10 15 90100 GF 10 200 10 15 90200 GF 20 150 10 15 90151 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 250 Glass fibre without binder, filter circles Technical specifications: Grade Filtration Gurley s Air permeability1) l/m2s (or resistance2)) mbar 25 11 (54)2) <10 GF 50 19 GF 51 44 GF 52 25 GF 55 67 1) According DIN 53887 2) At 400 cm3/s, A= 10 cm2 3) Tested with NaCl particles size <1 µm, maximum at 0.3 to 0.5 µm Weight gr/m2 56 140 54 75 Thickness mm 0.29 1.00 0.28 0.40 Retention rate3) % 99.97 99.993 99.995 99.999 Max T a °C 500 500 500 500 Binder Filter class free free free free H 14 H 13 U 15 U 15 Grade Ø Order No. mm GF 50 25 10 15 95002 GF 50 37 10 15 95003 GF 50 47 10 15 95004 GF 50 50 10 15 95005 GF 50 70 10 15 95007 GF 50 90 10 15 95009 GF 50 125 10 15 95012 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Glass fibre without binder, sheets Grade Ø Order No. mm GF 51 47 10 15 95147 GF 52 47 10 15 95204 GF 52 50 10 15 95205 GF 52 70 10 15 95207 GF 52 90 10 15 95209 GF 52 110 10 15 95211 GF 55 47 10 15 95504 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Grade GF 50 Dimensions mm 203 × 254 Order No. 10 15 95020 PU pc/Pack 100 Other sizes on request. Notes for handling: Weight consistency: No relevant changes in weight due to variations in the ambient hu- midity. Limited bending resistance. Brushing against other surfaces may cause the loss of fibres (keep the filters in their original box until their use). 744

746

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW6PB008 Glass Filters Quartz Microfibre Filters, Hahnemühle These filters are recommended for atmospheric pollution control and for particles deter- mination at high temperatures. • Made of pure quartz microfibre (SiO2), free of binding elements or additives • Perfect for trace analysis for their extremely low metal content • Determination of suspended particles (SPM and TSP) in the ambient air pursuant to the relevant specifications of the US EPA (Environmental Protection Agency) and EN 23210 • Excellent retention of very fine particles through the adsorption mechanisms of quartz fibres • Chemical stability: excellent stability with hardly any loss of filter-material due to chem- ical reactions under extreme conditions with acid gases (HCl, SO2, SO3, H2SO4, NO and NO3) • Excellent resistance to solvents: bases, acids (except hydrofluoric acid) and alkaline substances • Stability at high temperatures: higher resistance than glass microfiber, up to 1000ºC Technical specifications: Grade Weight g/m² 85 QFH Vers. Filter circles Filter circles Sheets Other sizes on request. Thickness mm 0.45 TSI efficacy % (particles 0.3 µm) 99.999 T Max C° 1000 Dimensions mm Ø 47 Ø 150 203 × 254 Order No. 10 15 90047 10 15 90150 10 15 93254 Binder no PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 Glass fiber filters, MACHEREY-NAGEL 1 MN 85/90 Glass fiber filter Most widely used general purpose glass fiber filter with very good mechanical stability. The filter contains an organic binder. Thickness: Basis weight: max. termperature: 0.40 mm 90 g/m2 200 °C Type Round filter MN 85/90 Round filter MN 85/90 Round filter MN 85/90 Round filter MN 85/90 Round filter MN 85/90 Round filter MN 85/90 Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 Order No. 10 46 94505 10 46 94507 10 46 94509 10 46 94511 10 46 94512 10 46 94515 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 MN 85/90 BF - Binder free glass fiber filter Suitable for difference weight analysis. This paper is especially used in water treatment facilities for example for determination of undisclosed solids. Thickness: Basis weight: max. termperature: 0.40 mm 90 g/m2 500 °C Type Round filter MN 85/90 BF Round filter MN 85/90 BF Round filter MN 85/90 BF Round filter MN 85/90 BF Round filter MN 85/90 BF Round filter MN 85/90 BF Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 Order No. 10 46 94655 10 46 94607 10 46 94609 10 46 94611 10 46 94612 10 46 94615 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 745 Continued on next page

747

Separating Systems Filtration 1 Glass Filters MN GF-1 - Binder free glass fiber filter Binder free paper with fine particle retention and good loading capacity. It is used for high efficiency laboratory filtration as well as air sampling. Thickness: Basis weight: max. termperature: 0.3 mm 55 g/m2 500 °C Type Round filter MN GF-1 Round filter MN GF-1 Round filter MN GF-1 Round filter MN GF-1 Round filter MN GF-1 Round filter MN GF-1 Diameter mm 55 70 90 110 125 150 Order No. 10 46 94105 10 46 94107 10 46 94109 10 46 94111 10 46 94112 10 46 94115 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Filtration Aids Quartz Wool, Schlee Filtration aid for elemental analysis, or for use in chromatography columns. Fine-fibre, approx. 9 µm Article Quartz wool, 50 g in bag Quartz wool, 100 g in bag Quartz wool, 250 g in bag Order No. 10 34 45001 10 34 45002 10 34 45003 Rubber Spacers for Filtering (Guko), Deutsch & Neumann Rubber spacers for filtering O.D. mm 21 21 27 27 33 33 41 41 53 53 68 68 78 78 89 89 B Ø mm 12 12 17 17 21 21 27.5 27.5 33 33 48 48 58 58 66 66 H mm 18 18 20 20 24 24 27 27 34 34 35 35 35 35 40 40 D mm 2.5 2.5 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5.5 5.5 6 6 6.5 6.5 Also available as GuKo sets. Size Colour Order No. 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Gray Red Gray Red Gray Red Gray Red Gray Red Gray Red Gray Red Gray Red 24 34 20011 24 34 20012 24 34 20021 24 34 20022 24 34 20031 24 34 20032 24 34 20041 24 34 20042 24 34 20051 24 34 20052 24 34 20061 24 34 20062 24 34 20071 24 34 20072 24 34 20081 24 34 20082 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 Rubber Spacers for Filtering (Guko), Deutsch & Neumann Complete sets, spacers for filtering made of rubber Size 1-5 1-5 1-7 1-7 1-8 1-8 Version 5-piece 5-piece 7-piece 7-piece 8-piece 8-piece Colour Gray Red Gray Red Gray Red Order No. 24 34 20151 24 34 20152 24 34 20171 24 34 20172 24 34 20181 24 34 20182 1 co d e b e w WWKEF022 746

748

Filtration Aids Guko Seals made of EPDM, DURAN Group / IDL Rubber seals, conical, for filter funnels, sterilizable up to +150°C Order No. Ø at top mm 22 29 36 44 53 63 73 84 O.D. at bottom mm 12 16 22 27 33 43 52 61 I.D. at bottom mm 7 9 15 19 24 33 42 50 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 29 20212 11 29 20217 11 29 20223 11 29 20227 11 29 20232 11 29 20236 11 29 20239 11 29 20243 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Guko set Article Guko set, complete, all 8 sizes from 22 to 84 mm Ø at top Order No. 11 29 20200 Filtration Racks, BÜRKLE-LaboPlast® Funnel stands Flexible, extendable funnel rack with adapters for safe use with funnels of different sizes.. Excellent for use as a filtration rack. • For two or four funnels • For funnels of 40 to 180 mm Ø • PP, chrome-plated steel • Height variable adjustable up to 450 mm with innovative magnet concept • Additional funnel holders available as accessories 1 Article 1 Filtration rack for 2 funnels External dimensions (L×W×H): 340 × 138 × 500 mm 2 Filtration rack for 4 funnels External dimensions (L×W×H): 251 × 251 × 500 mm Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 24 05 13102 24 05 13104 3 Stand for sedimentation funnel Flexible, extendable funnel rack for sedimentation funnels with Ø 90 mm or more. • Special holders for sedimentation funnels • PP, chrome-plated steel • Height variable adjustable up to 450 mm with innovative magnet concept • Additional funnel holders available as accessories Article Stand for 2 sedimentation funnels Outer dimensions (L×W×H): 340 × 138 × 500 mm Supplied without the illustrated accessories Order No. 10 04 53106 Filter Crucibles, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Plate Ø mm 24 24 24 28 28 28 28 36 36 36 36 36 46 46 46 46 46 Order No. 11 25 85102 11 25 85103 11 25 85104 11 25 85111 11 25 85112 11 25 85113 11 25 85114 11 25 85121 11 25 85122 11 25 85123 11 25 85124 11 25 85125 11 25 85131 11 25 85132 11 25 85133 11 25 85134 11 25 85135 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Porosity 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 Volume ml 8 8 8 15 15 15 15 30 30 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 50 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 747 Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WWEQ2078 co d e b e w WWR4Q006 2 3 co d e b e w WWEQ2071

749

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WWQVD159 2 1 co d e b e w WWEQ2075 Filtration Aids Special Filter Crucibles, Rettberg Raw fiber crucible made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Special crucible for Tecator apparatus with specially hardened filter plate. Volume approx. ml 1 30 30 Porosity P1 P2 Order No. 13 41 22316 13 41 22416 2 Cellulase crucibles made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Special crucible with screw thread GL 45 and screw-on cap at top, also screw thread GL 32 and screw-on lid below. (Cap seal suitable for temperatures of up to +200°C) Volume approx. ml 50 50 Porosity P1 P2 Accessories Article Spare screw cap with seal for GL 32 Spare screw cap with seal for GL 45 Order No. 13 41 22617 13 41 22717 Order No. 13 41 22732 13 41 22745 Filter Head with PP-Funnel and 2 FKM Seals, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL DURAN® filter heads with PP funnel and 2 FKM seals Filter disks must always be ordered separately. Important: The filter disk has to be placed between 2 seals. Easy, safe removal of the filtered material. Longer useful life of the filter disk because the filtered material is not scraped off. Accessible from both sides for easy cleaning. 3 5 7oder 4 4 6 Volume ml 30 250 1000 for plate Ø mm 24 50 90 Thread mm 28 54 95 Single parts: DURAN® filter head with thread 3 Volume ml 30 250 1000 Thread mm 28 54 95 mm 28 54 95 748 PP funnel, autoclavable up to +140 °C 6 Thread Stem O.D. mm 10 12 18 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Porosity Order No. Plate Ø Porosity Order No. 4 FKM seals (fluorocaoutchouc) for plate Ø mm 24 50 90 Filter disks with glass rim 5 Plate Ø mm 24 24 24 24 50 50 1 2 3 4 1 2 11 25 20241 11 25 20242 11 25 20243 11 25 20244 11 25 20501 11 25 20502 mm 50 50 90 90 90 90 3 4 1 2 3 4 Order No. 11 24 72024 11 24 72050 11 24 72090 Order No. 11 24 72124 11 24 72150 11 24 72190 Order No. 11 29 22024 11 29 22050 11 29 22090 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 11 25 20503 11 25 20504 11 25 20901 11 25 20902 11 25 20903 11 25 20904 Order No. 11 29 22124 11 29 22150 11 29 22190 Continued on next page

750

Filtration Aids DURAN® slotted filter disk (holder for membrane and paper filters) Fits for order No. 112472050 7 Separating Systems Filtration for plate Ø mm 48 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 11 21 34031 PU pc/Pack 10 Filter Funnels, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Filter funnels are connected to the filtering flask by means of a cone-shaped rubber seal (GUKO). Porosity 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 Vol. ml 50 50 50 50 50 75 75 75 75 75 125 125 125 125 125 500 500 500 500 500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4000 4000 4000 4000 Plate Ø mm 35 35 35 35 35 45 45 45 45 45 60 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95 95 120 120 120 120 120 175 175 175 175 Stem O.D. mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 30 30 30 30 Order No. 11 25 85201 11 25 85202 11 25 85203 11 25 85204 11 25 85205 11 25 85211 11 25 85212 11 25 85213 11 25 85214 11 25 85215 11 25 85221 11 25 85222 11 25 85223 11 25 85224 11 25 85225 11 25 85231 11 25 85232 11 25 85233 11 25 85234 11 25 85235 11 25 85241 11 25 85242 11 25 85243 11 25 85244 11 25 85245 11 25 85261 11 25 85262 11 25 85263 11 25 85264 Buechner Funnels, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Buechner funnels as support for membrane and paper filters. Plate Ø mm 48 60 73 95 120 Vol. ml 70 125 220 500 1000 Stem O.D. mm 10 10 18 22 22 matching round filter Ø mm 45 55 70 90 110 Order No. 11 21 34122 11 21 34128 11 21 34134 11 21 34144 11 21 34154 co d e b e w WWEQ2076 co d e b e w WWEQ2077 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 749

751

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW7R3296 Filtration Aids Filter Funnels, Hard Porcelain, IDL Filter funnels, Büchner type. The nominal size corresponds to the diameter of the match- ing paper filter. Nominal size 18 27 40 45 55 70 90 110 125 150 185 240 270 320 Filter vol. approx. ml 3 10 25 50 75 135 290 580 795 1250 1900 4300 5800 10600 Order No. 10 00 20601 10 00 20602 10 00 20603 21 00 20604 21 00 20605 21 00 20607 21 00 20609 21 00 20611 21 00 20612 21 00 20615 21 00 20618 21 00 20624 21 00 20627 21 00 20632 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Filter funnels see page 751 co d e b e w WWEQ2080 Filtering Flasks Filtering Flasks, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Filtering flasks with removable plastic hose connector (POM), screw (PP), seals (VMQ, EPDM), complete, DIN 12 476, ISO 6556. These filtering flasks fulfil the regulations of the “equipment and product safety regulations”. Heavy walled for vacuum use. 1 Erlenmeyer shape Vol. max. O.D. mm 64 85 105 135 166 ml 100 250 500 1000 2000 Height mm 105 155 185 230 255 Neck I.D. approx. mm 24 34 34 45 60 Order No. 11 21 20424 11 21 20436 11 21 20444 11 21 20454 11 21 20463 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 1 2 Bottle shape Vol. ml 3000 5000 10000 15000 20000 Accessories Article 1 2 3 750 max. O.D. mm 170 185 240 255 290 Height mm 295 360 420 500 535 Neck I.D. approx. mm 70 80 82 84 85 Order No. 11 21 19468 11 21 19473 11 21 19486 11 21 19488 11 21 19491 Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 3 Spare seal for tube connector made of silicone rubber, 11 29 22010 tube made of PP Keck assembly set for filtering flask 11 29 25854 10

752

Separating Systems Filtration Filtering Flasks Filtering Flasks, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Filtering flasks with tubulature, vacuum-proof, DIN 12476, ISO 6556. These filtering flasks fulfil the regulations of the “equipment and product safety regulations”. Heavy walled for vacuum use. These filtering flasks have a ground tubulature 17,5/26 for vacuum hoses from 15 to 18 mm O.D. (e.g. 6 × 5 or 8 × 5, DIN 12865). Filtering flasks with tubulature make it easier to perform many jobs in preparative and analytical laboratories and also help to reduce the risk of accidents. The matching vacuum hose is plugged into the tubulature of the filtering flask until secured by the conical shape of the tubulature. When the hose is connected to a water spray pump, its end is secured even more firmly in the cone, tightly sealing off the tubulature. co d e b e w WWEQ2079 1 Erlenmeyer shape Vol. max. O.D. mm 85 105 135 166 ml 250 500 1000 2000 Height mm 155 185 230 255 Neck I.D. approx. mm 34 34 45 60 Order No. 11 21 18336 11 21 18344 11 21 18354 11 21 18363 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 1 2 Bottle shape Vol. ml 30001) 50001) 100001) 150001) 200001) max. O.D. mm 170 185 240 255 290 1) Non-DIN ISO size. Height mm 295 360 420 500 535 Neck I.D. approx. mm 70 80 82 84 85 Order No. 11 21 19368 11 21 19373 11 21 19386 11 21 19388 11 21 19391 1 2 Filtration Apparatus Filtration Apparatuses, Witt Type, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Filtration apparatuses, with replaceable tubulature lid with standard ground (NS) joint 29/32 and KECK™ assembly set. Height mm 160 200 300 Lid height mm 76 102 126 Socket NS 29/32 29/32 29/32 Inner Ø DN mm 100 150 200 Order No. 12 24 73046 12 24 73057 12 24 73061 co d e b e w WWEQ2151 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 751

753

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW2NY410 1 co d e b e w WW7R3256 Filtration Apparatus qpore® Filtration Unit, neoLab® These sterile polyethersulfone membrane (PES) qpore® filtration units have the fastest flow rates and very low protein binding, making them ideal for filtration of cell culture media. At the end of filtration, the sterile solution in the flask bottle can be stored until ready for use. The scope of delivery of the complete unit includes the filter funnel with PES membrane, a vacuum port, a lid, the filtrate bottle and a cap. Characteristics: • green color coding • quick connection for hoses with inside Ø 8 – 12 mm • graduated filter top • sterile, pyrogen-free, free of detergents • the filtration units are individually sterile packed in 12 pieces • packaging with cut-open aid; thereby to open without further aids Applications: • sterile filtration of cell culture media • microbiological media • buffer solutions and other biological solutions Mat. Pore size µm 1 PES 0.22 PES 0.45 PES 0.1 PES 0.22 PES 0.45 PES 0.22 PES 0.45 PES 0.1 PES 0.22 PES 0.45 Membrane Ø mm 50 50 50 50 50 90 90 90 90 90 Vol. funnel ml 250 250 250 250 250 500 500 500 500 500 Vol. bottle ml 250 250 500 500 500 500 500 1000 1000 1000 Order No. 10 01 60051 10 01 60052 10 01 60053 10 01 60054 10 01 60055 10 01 60056 10 01 60057 10 01 60058 10 01 60059 10 01 60060 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 Filter Funnels (Glass), IDL Glass filter units, complete unit Borosilicate glass 3.3, clamp and bottom part with outlet tube with 15 mm Ø, to fit all membrane filters with a Ø of 47 or 50 mm. Article Glass filter unit with glass filter plate Glass filter unit with plate, PTFE coated Individual parts Article Top for glass filter unit, with flange, 250 ml PTFE support ring with glass filter plate porosity 2 PTFE support ring with perforated plate, PTFE coated Metal clamp Bottom part with flange Suction flask, 1 liter, vacuum-proof Suction flask, 2 liter, vacuum-proof Silicone stopper for 1 liter suction flask 41×49×40 mm with bore, for fitting the filter unit to the 1 liter suction flask Silicone stopper for 2 liter suction flask 56×65×45 mm with bore, for fitting the filter unit to the 2 liter suction flask Lid with hole, silicone rubber, red Order No. 26 00 10000 26 00 10100 Order No. 26 00 10110 26 00 10120 26 00 10130 26 00 10140 26 00 10150 26 00 10160 26 00 10165 26 00 10170 26 00 10190 10 00 10180 More than 20,000 articles in this catalogue – and still more on our website ! 752

754

Filtration Apparatus Filter Funnels (Glass), IDL Glass filter units, complete unit Borosilicate glass 3.3, with adapter, clamp and 1 liter collecting flask, for all membrane filters with a Ø of 47 or 50 mm. Article Glass filter unit with glass filter plate Glass filter unit with perforated plate, PTFE coated Individual parts Article Top for glass filter unit, with flange, 250 ml PTFE support ring with glass filter plate porosity 2 PTFE support ring with perforated plate, PTFE coated Metal clamp Intermediate piece with flange and NS 45 for collecting bottle, with vacuum connection Order No. 26 00 20000 26 00 20100 Order No. 26 00 10110 26 00 10120 26 00 10130 26 00 10140 26 00 20110 Collecting flask, 1 liter, Erlenmeyer form, cone NS, vacuum-proof 26 00 20120 Collecting flask, 2 liter, Erlenmeyer form, cone NS, vacuum-proof 26 00 20121 Media Bottle, BRAND Media bottles Media bottle, 500 ml, boro 3.3, GL 56, screwed cap PP, low bottle height, with scale, vacuum resistant for sterile filtration. Article Media bottle, 500 ml Accessories Article Order No. 10 49 12710 PU pc/Pack 4 Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 1 12 12 Screw caps for media bottle 500 ml, GL 56, PP, white 10 49 12750 Thread adapter, PTFE, for media bottle, GL 56 / GL 10 49 12755 45, autoclavable Vacuum filter funnel for media bottle, 0.2 µm sterile membrane PES, GL 45 Vacuum filter funnel for media bottle, 0.45 µm sterile membrane PES, GL 45 10 49 12760 10 49 12765 Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WW7R3257 co d e b e w WWQED076 co d e b e w WWEQ2218 DURAN® Filter Funnels, DURAN Group / IDL 1 DURAN® Filter Funnels The DURAN® filter funnel is made of premium borosilicate glass. The medium comes into contact only with the glass and with PTFE; thus, the filter funnel can be used more or less universally for all chemicals that you wish to filter. The PTFE plate holder makes sure that not only slotted screen plates can be used but also glass filters of different porosities. Thanks to the porosity range of glass filters (10 µm – 160 µm), not only coarse and fine filtration but also analytical filtrations can be carried out. The DURAN® filter funnel is suitable for filtering and cleaning aqueous and organic solu- tions for particle contamination analysis or for production of HPLC media. Benefits: • The medium only has contact with glass and PTFE • Filter plates are removable for easy cleaning • Slotted screen plate as carrier for filter papers and membrane filters (diameter 47 mm) comprised in the delivery • Feed vessel with scale • Safe plastic clip (matches hoses with ID 8 mm) • All components available as spare part Article DURAN® Filtrer funnel, 1000 / 250 ml complete with PTFE adapter plate and clamp, suction bottle (1000 ml, NS 45/40), feed vessel (250 ml, with scale) DURAN® Filtrer funnel, 2000 / 500 ml complete with PTFE adapter plate and clamp, suction bottle (2000 ml, NS 45/40), feed vessel (500 ml, with scale) Order No. 10 21 15451 10 21 16304 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 753 Continued on next page

755

Separating Systems Filtration co d e b e w WWHXJ027 co d e b e w WW2NY391 754 Filtration Apparatus Spare parts Article PTFE adapter disk Clamp (anodised aluminium) DURAN® funnel, 250 ml DURAN® funnel, 500 ml Extension NS 45/40 DURAN® filtering flask with NS 45/40, 1000 ml DURAN® filtering flask with NS 45/40, 2000 ml Filter disks/DURAN, Ø 50 mm, porosity 2 Article Plastic tubing connector, straight Screw cap, GL 14 Slotted filter disk/DURAN, for disk Ø 48 mm Order No. 10 21 12813 10 21 13609 10 21 13602 10 21 14401 10 21 13203 10 21 15404 10 21 16306 11 25 20502 Order No. 13 29 25506 13 29 22705 11 21 34031 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 Filtration/Degasser Device for Screw Neck Vials GL-45, Landgraf Filtration/Degasser Device for Screw Neck Vials GL-45 Glass filtration device for filtration and degassing of solvents for chromatography. Direct filtration in commercially available HPLC screw neck vials GL-45. Suitable for use with membrane filters 47 and 50 mm. With tap for locking the filtration unit and re-degassifying under vacuum. Vial coated with Duran, vacuum and pressure resistant (max. 1 bar). Scope of delivery: • Filtration attachment with clamp • 1,000 ml bottle, coated Article Filtration/degasser unit complete Accessories Article Stand Order No. 10 67 21000 Order No. 10 67 21001 Magnetic Filter Holder, neoLab® Magnetic filter holder A filter holder for different bottles. The magnetic filter holder matches membrane filters with a diameter of 47 mm. The user-friendly design allows for one-hand operation and prevents potential damage to the membrane. Use the magnetic filter holder with suction bottles or laboratory bottles. Connection to a vacuum is possible at any time thanks to the clip comprised in the delivery. The PES material makes the filter holder autoclavable and is highly resistant to chemicals. The filter lid makes continuous filtration possible. Applications: • Microbiological filtration tests • General filtration of aqueous samples Article Magnetic filter holder, 300 ml, for feeding bottles Magnetic filter holder, 300 ml, for laboratory bottles Magnetic filter holder, 500 ml, for feeding bottles Magnetic filter holder, 500 ml, for laboratory bottles Accessories Article Replacement lid, incl. venting filter and 3 covers Replacement carrier for membrane filter 47 mm Replacement venting filter for magnetic filter holder Silicone plug with bore Adapter for GL45 screw connection Order No. 10 01 83000 10 01 83001 10 01 83002 10 01 83003 Order No. 10 01 83004 10 01 83005 10 01 83006 10 01 83007 10 01 83008 Suitable membrane filters Pore size µm 0.22 0.45 0.8 0.22 0.45 Ø mm 47 47 47 47 47 Material Grid sterile Order No. MCE MCE MCE MCE MCE yes yes yes no no yes yes yes no no 10 01 60030 10 01 60031 10 01 60032 10 01 60027 10 01 60029 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 200 200

756

Separating Systems Sieving / Filtration co d e b e w WWXKS050 Filtration Apparatus Exhaust Unit made of Borosilicate Glass, Behr • 400 ml filter heads, threaded • Polypropylene funnel, threaded • Slit sieve plate with 2 seals • Stainless steel frame • Glass water-jet pump • Suitable for 50 mm filter Article Filtration unit FU 4 with 4 places Filtration unit FU 6 with 6 places Order No. 10 48 41135 10 48 41144 co d e b e w WWMUE008 Vacuum Manifolds, Stainless Steel, ISOLAB Vacuum manifolds allow filtration of multiple samples either at once or independently by controlling the separate branch valves. Suitable to be used with 47/50 mm diameter mem- brane filters. Body and the funnels are manufactured from AISI 304 quality stainless steel to be used at food, beverage, pharmaceutical and water quality laboratories. The main body is featured with handles on both sides for easy hold and carriage. Stainless steel funnels has a volume capacity of 500 ml. They can be used for sample volumes from 50 ml up to 500 ml. Volume graduation inside walls of the funnels offer practical volume indication of the sample. Attachment and removal of the funnels can be easily achieved with the attached closure clamp. Closure clamps under each funnel once closed guarantee perfect and vacuum tight sealing. The stainless steel frit filter support ensures a uniform distribution of the residues. All parts of vacuum filter set are fully autoclavable. They can also flame strilized. Vacuum manifolds are supplied with a cap for each funnel. Article Vacuum manifolds, 1 station Vacuum manifolds, 3 stations Vacuum manifolds, 6 stations Order No. 10 66 40801 10 66 40803 10 66 40806 Sieving Aids Sieves, neoLab® Sieves made of metal mesh, rust-proof. Sturdy handle with plastic inlay and eyelet for hanging. co d e b e w WW2NY174 Article Metal sieve Metal sieve Metal sieve Metal sieve co d e b e w Sieve Ø mm 70 100 160 180 Order No. 39 01 27530 39 01 27531 39 01 27532 39 01 27533 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 755

757

Separating Systems Sieving co d e b e w WWGF3011 1 2 Sieving Machines Vibratory Sieve Shakers ANALYSETTE 3, (2 Models), FRITSCH Vibratory Sieve Shakers ANALYSETTE 3 PRO and SPARTAN For quantitative particle size analysis of dry samples and suspensions of all kind by dry and wet sieving with woven test sieves. FRITSCH Sieve Shakers satisfy all requirements for accurate and reproducible sieving analysis and perform automatic sieve analysis with the control and evaluation software AUTOSIEVE, which is comprised in the delivery free of charge for a 90-days test period. Compared to the ANALYSETTE 3 SPARTAN, the ANALYSETTE 3 PRO is additionally equipped with an automatic amplitude control func- tion and a function for the individual generation of sieving programs; it can interface as a test tool with every quality management system and has an RS232 interface. Technical data ANALYSETTE 3 PRO and SPARTAN: Sieving: Sieve diameters: Maximum number of sieves: 10 × 50 mm or 16 × 25 mm height Sieve type: Measuring range: dry or wet 100 mm, 200 mm or 8 ″ Sample quantity: Sieving time: Supply requirements: Dimensions (W × D × H): Weight net: Woven metallic sieves Dry sieving 20 µm – 63 mm Wet sieving 20 µm – 10 mm Dry sieving up to 2 kg (depending on the sample material and sieve used) Wet sieving 20 – 100 g Dry sieving 3 – 20 min Wet sieving 3 – 10 min 100 – 240 V/1~, 50 – 60 Hz 37 × 40 × 20 cm 21 kg Article 1 Vibratory Sieve Shaker ANALYSETTE 3 PRO 2 Vibratory Sieve Shaker ANALYSETTE 3 SPARTAN Order No. 54 98 03702 54 98 03802 Clamping lid, sieve pan and sieves must be ordered additionally. Further sieve shakers available on request. Accessories for Vibratory Sieve Shakers ANALYSETTE 3 PRO and SPARTAN for test sieves 200 mm/8 ″ Ø for all test sieves up to 200 mm/8 ″ Ø Interposed sieve pan Article Sieve clamping lid made of plexiglas Sieve clamping lid plastic POM (without window) made of stainless steel, 200 mm dia., 50 mm height made of stainless steel, 8 ″ dia., 2 ″ height Sieve pan made of stainless steel, 200 mm Ø, 50 mm height Sieve pan made of stainless steel, 8 ″ Ø, 2 ″ height Interposed sieve pan Order No. 54 98 31202 54 98 31205 10 98 01303 10 98 01302 54 98 31130 54 98 31132 Accessories for wet sieving are also available. Test sieves as well as accessories for micro-precision sieving and for use of the ANALY- SETTE 3 as Micro Mill (for grinding small sample quantities) on request. Sieves, clamping lid and sieve pans with and without outlet are also available in 100 mm Ø, as well as in 200 mm Ø, 25 mm height and in 8 ″ Ø, 1 ″ height. Sieve Shakers, RETSCH Typ AS 200 basic / AS 200 digit cA / AS 200 control / AS 300 control / AS 450 basic / AS 450 control Application: RETSCH analytical sieve shakers are used in research & development, quality control of raw materials, interim and finished products as well as in production monitoring. Features: • Throwing motion with angular momentum • For wet and dry sieving • Short sieving times • Low-noise, maintenance-free AS 200 basic: Basic model with membrane keypad, digital indication of performance and time AS 200 digit cA: Added features model with membrane keypad, digital indication of controlled amplitude and time, interval sieving AS 200 control: like AS 200 digit cA but with freely selectable intervals. Up to 99 programs can be stored. The AS 200 control is calibratable and allows for 100% reproducibility of sieving results Continued on next page 4 5 3 756

758

Sieving Machines all over the world, also when comparing different machines. With integrated USB interface for the evaluation software EasySieve®. Like the other control units, the AS 200 control meets the requirements for test equipment monitoring pursuant to ISO 9000 ff. AS 300 control: like AS 200 control; also suitable for sieves up to 315 mm diameter and for higher loads. AS 450 basic: Basic model, 9 power levels, digital time indication, interval sieving AS 450 control: like AS 200 control; also suitable for sieves up to 400 mm and 450 mm diameter. The optimized electromagnetic drive of the AS 450 in combination with the patented CET technology enable amplitudes of up to 2.2 mm, even with high loads of max. 25 kg sieving material. This eliminates the need for time-consuming re-sieving. Article 3 AS 200 basic 4 AS 200 digit cA 5 AS 200 control AS 300 control AS 450 basic 6 AS 450 control Voltage 230 V, 50 Hz 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz 230 V, 50/60 Hz Order No. 10 29 23030 10 29 23031 10 29 23032 10 29 23033 10 29 23029 10 29 20450 Sieves, collecting pans and clamping device have to be ordered separately. AS 200 basic 20 µm – 25 mm yes / yes 3 kg AS 200 digit cA AS 200 control 20 µm – 25 mm 20 µm – 25 mm yes / yes 3 kg yes / yes 3 kg Separating Systems Sieving 6 AS 300 control 20 µm – 25 mm yes / yes 6 kg AS 450 basic 20 µm – 25 mm yes / yes 15 kg AS 450 control 20 µm – 25 mm yes / yes 25 kg 9 / 17 Technical data: Measuring range: Dry/Wet measurement: Max.batch/ feed capacity: Max. number of fractions (depending on sieve size) Max. mass of sieve stack: Setting of amplitude: Adjustment range of amplitude: 1 – 100 % Sieve acceleration: 1 g = 9.81 m/s2 Time display (min): Interval operation: Programs: Incl. Test certificate/can be cali- brated: Serial USB interface: Sieving motion 4 kg analog – digital 1 – 99 – – – Suitable sieve sizes (mm): Height of sieve stack: Size (W×H×D mm): Weight: 9 / 17 11 / 23 9 / 17 12 / 8 13 / 9 4 kg analog 0.2 – 3 mm – digital 1 – 99 10 s fix – – 6 kg digital 0.2 – 3 mm 1.0 – 15.1 g digital 1 – 99 yes up to 99 yes 10 kg digital 0.2 – 2.2 mm 1.0 – >10 g digital 1 – 99 yes up to 99 yes 50 kg digital 0 – >2 mm – digital 1 – 99 10 s fix 1 – 50 kg digital 0.2 – 2.2 mm 1 – >11 g digital 1 – 99 yes up to 9 yes – Throwing motion with angular mo- mentum 100 / 150 / 200 / 203 up to 510 mm – Throwing motion with angular mo- mentum 100 / 150 / 200 / 203 up to 510 mm yes Throwing motion with angular mo- mentum 100 / 150 / 200 / 203 up to 620 mm yes Throwing motion with angular mo- mentum 100 / 150 / 200 / 203 / 305 / 315 up to 510 mm 417×212×384 approx. 35 kg 417×212×384 approx. 35 kg 417×212×384 approx. 35 kg 417×222×384 approx. 42 kg – Throwing motion with angular mo- mentum 400 / 450 yes Throwing mo- tion with angu- lar momentum 400 / 450 up to approx. 830 mm 680×280×680 approx. 140 kg up to approx. 963 mm 714×435×658 approx. 200 kg Clamping devices AS 200 Article Clamping device “economy” for test sieves Ø 100/150/200/203 mm Clamping device “standard” for test sieves Ø 200/203 mm Clamping device “comfort” for test sieves Ø 200/203 mm Universal clamping device “standard” for test sieves Ø 100/150/200/203 mm Universal clamping device “comfort” for test sieves Ø 100/150/200/203 mm Universal wet sieving clamping device “standard” for test sieves Order No. 10 29 26203 10 29 26202 10 29 26201 10 29 26205 10 29 26204 10 29 26207 Ø 100/150/200/203 mm Clamping devices AS 300 Article Order No. Clamping device “standard” for test sieves Ø 305 mm 10 29 26208 Clamping device “comfort” for test sieves Ø 305 mm 10 29 26209 Wet sieving clamping device “standard” for test sieves Ø 305 mm 10 29 26212 Wet sieving clamping device “comfort” for test sieves Ø 305 mm 10 29 26214 Clamping devices AS 450 basic Article Order No. Clamping device “standard” for test sieves Ø 400/450 mm 10 29 26220 Wet sieving clamping device “standard” for test sieves Ø 400/450 mm 10 29 26233 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 757 Continued on next page

759

Separating Systems Sieving 1 2 3 758 Sieving Machines Clamping devices AS 450 control Article Order No. Clamping device “standard” for test sieves Ø 400/450 mm 10 29 26215 Clamping device “comfort” for test sieves Ø 400/450 mm 10 29 26216 Wet sieving clamping device “standard” for test sieves Ø 400/450 mm 10 29 26217 Wet sieving clamping device “comfort” for test sieves Ø 400/450 mm 10 29 26218 IQ/OQ documents on request Sieve Shakers, RETSCH Type AS 400 control, AS 200 tap and AS 200 jet 1 Application AS 400 control: The AS 400 control is used for dry sieving with analysis sieves of up to 400 mm diameter. Due to the even, horizontally rotating sieving movement, the material to be sieved accu- rately separated. Features: • Sieving with rotating movements according to DIN 53 477 • Digital setting of all sieving parameters (time, speed, interval) • Up to 9 SOPs can be stored • Integrated interface for the evaluation software EasySieve® Article AS 400 control Clamping device “standard” for analytical sieves 400 mm Ø Clamping device “comfort” for analytical sieves 400 mm Ø Please order clamping unit, sieves and bottom separately. The clamping units of AS 200 and AS 300 fit as well Order No. 54 29 22001 10 29 22010 10 29 22011 2 Sieve Shaker AS 200 tap Application AS 200 tap: For defining the grain size of certain poducts, for example activated carbon, abrasives, coal, spices, and diamonds in accordance with the respective standards. Features: • Horizontally rotating movement of the sieving material with vertical knock impulses • Suitable for dry-sieving • Robust, maintenance-free Article AS 200 tap incl. sound enclosure cabinet Sieves and sieve bottom please order separately. Order No. 10 29 25101 3 Sieve Shaker AS 200 jet Application AS 200 jet: The Air Jet Sieve AS 200 jet is particularly suitable for sieve cuts of powdered materials which require efficient dispersion and desagglomeration. Features: • Open Mesh function for reduction of the number of near-mesh particles • For RETSCH sieves 203 mm (8 ″) and 200 mm (with adapter), 25 and 50 mm high • Collection of two fractions possible by use of cyclone (accessory) • Free manual (standard) or automatic (accessory) pressure regulation • High flexibility through adjustable nozzle speed • Memory for up to 9 SOPs, additional Quick Start mode Article Order No. Analytical sieve AS 200 jet 10 29 27001 10 29 28004 Cyclone with holder and collecting receptacle (250 ml and 500 ml sample bottle) 10 29 25008 Automatic vacuum regulation 10 29 21002 Industrial vacuum cleaner, 230 V, 50/60 Hz Sieves and industrial vacuum cleaner please order separately. Technical data: Sieving motion: AS 400 control Horizontal movement Measuring range: Dry/Wet measurement: Max. batch/ feed capacity: Suitable sieve sizes (mm): 100 / 150 / 200 / 45 µm - 63 mm yes / no 5 kg 203 / 305 / 315 / 400 AS 200 tap Horizontal, circular movement with taps 20 µm - 25 mm yes / no 3 kg AS 200 jet Air jet sieving 10 µm - Z4 mm yes / no 0.3 – 100 g 200 / 203 200 / 203 Continued on next page

760

Sieving Machines Separating Systems Sieving Max. numbers of fractions (depending on sieve size): Max. mass of sieve stack: 15 kg Setting of speed: 7 / 9 / 17 Sieve acceleration: Oscillations/ Taps: Time display: Interval operation: Depression indicator: digital, 50–300 min-1 0.04 – 1.51 g – digital, 1–99 min yes – 9 yes Programs: Incl. Test certificate/ can be calibrated: Serial interface: Max. height of sieve stack: 450 mm Dimensions (W×H×D): yes Weight (net): 540×260×507 mm 735×675×530 mm with sound enclo- sure cabinet approx. 92 kg with sound enclo- sure cabinet approx. 70 kg 7 / 13 6 kg – – 280 min-1 / 150 min-1 digital, 1–99 min – – – – yes 350 mm 1 / 2 with cyclone – digital, 5–55 min-1 (jet) – digital, 00:00–99:59 min – 2–9999 Pa / 20–99 mbar / 0.3–1.45 psi 9 yes yes 50 mm 460×288×305 mm approx. 14 kg co d e b e w WWKZV001 Test Sieve Shakers, HAVER & BOECKER HAVER test sieve shakers for dry and wet sieving can classify all types of bulk goods. The HAVER 3D laboratory sieve shakers have a self-readjusting amplitude and an electro-mag- netic drive. • Electro-magnetic drive • 3-dimensional sieving • Measuring range: 20 µm to 125 mm • Memory function for sieving programs • Suitable for dry and wet sieving • Delivery including clamping system and machine cover, sieves and pan not comprised in the delivery HAVER EML 200 Premium (dry sieving) and Premium Remote (wet sieving) Technical data: Sieve diameters: 50 mm – 203 mm Sample weight: approx. 3 kg Weight of seive set: max. 8.7 kg Netzspannung: Amplitude: Sound emission: 110 – 230 V, 50 – 60 Hz freely selectable up to 3 mm P 70 dBA Article HAVER EML 200 Premium (dry sieving) HAVER EML 200 Premium Remote (wet sieving) Order No. 10 16 95099 10 16 95100 At purchase of a new HAVER EML 200, the evaluation software CSA Basic is provided free of charge. HAVER EML 315 digital plus for dry sieving (T) and wet sieving (N) Sieve diameters: Sample weight: Weight of sieve set: max. 21 kg Power supply: Amplitude: Sound emission: 110 – 230 V, 50 – 60 Hz constant, self-readjusting up to max. 2 mm P 70 dBA 200 – 315 mm approx. 6 kg Article EML 315 digital plus T, clamping system TwinNut EML 315 digital plus N, clamping system TwinNut Order No. 10 16 93002 10 16 93004 HAVER EML 450 digital plus for dry sieving (T) and wet sieving (N) Sieve diameters: Sample weight: Weight of sieve set: max. 42 kg Power supply: Amplitude: Sound emission: 110 – 230 V, 50 – 60 Hz freely selectable up to 3 mm P 70 dBA 200 – 450 mm approx. 15 kg Article EML 450 digital plus T, clamping system TwinNut EML 450 digital plus N, clamping system TwinNut Order No. 10 16 94503 10 16 94504 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 759

761

Separating Systems Sieving Sieving Machines Ultrasonic Sieving Support, HAVER & BOECKER • Increase of throughput of biulk materials P 300 µm • Permanent sieve mesh cleaning effect • The sieving of loose adhesive materials is made possible • Multiple test sieves can be excited with a single generator Whole system consisting of: Article Analogue generator AGS35-100-230, 50 W Converter with connecting cable Clamping ring for test sieves Order No. 10 16 99359 10 16 99290 10 16 99358 Test Sieves Test Sieves, Stainless Steel, LINKER 1 Sieves with identification number and works certificate acc. to 2.1 EN 10204 No seam above the sieve bottom, hence no loss of retained material. Material: stainless steel sieve mesh acc. to ISO 3310-1. Versions: 1 = with soft PVC weld, temperature-resistant up to +70°C 2 = with soft solder weld, temperature-resistant up to +170°C Version 1 Sieve Ø 200 mm Inner height 50 mm Order No. 39 73 00111 39 73 00121 39 73 00141 39 73 00151 39 73 00161 39 73 00171 39 73 00181 39 73 00191 39 73 00201 39 73 00211 39 73 00221 39 73 00231 39 73 00241 39 73 00251 39 73 00261 39 73 00271 39 73 00281 39 73 00291 39 73 00301 39 73 00311 39 73 00321 39 73 00331 39 73 00341 39 73 00351 39 73 00361 39 73 00371 39 73 00381 39 73 00391 39 73 00401 39 73 00411 39 73 00421 39 73 00431 39 73 00441 39 73 00451 39 73 00461 39 73 00471 39 73 00481 39 73 00491 Version 2 Sieve Ø 200 mm Inner height 25 mm Order No. 39 73 00114 39 73 00124 39 73 00144 39 73 00154 39 73 00164 39 73 00174 39 73 00184 39 73 00194 39 73 00204 39 73 00214 39 73 00224 39 73 00234 39 73 00244 39 73 00254 39 73 00264 39 73 00274 39 73 00284 39 73 00294 39 73 00304 39 73 00314 39 73 00324 39 73 00334 39 73 00344 39 73 00354 39 73 00364 39 73 00374 39 73 00384 39 73 00394 39 73 00404 39 73 00414 39 73 00424 39 73 00434 39 73 00444 39 73 00454 39 73 00464 39 73 00474 39 73 00484 39 73 00494 Version 2 Sieve Ø 100 mm Inner height 45 mm Order No. 39 73 00115 39 73 00125 39 73 00145 39 73 00155 39 73 00165 39 73 00175 39 73 00185 39 73 00195 39 73 00205 39 73 00215 39 73 00225 39 73 00235 39 73 00245 39 73 00255 39 73 00265 39 73 00275 39 73 00285 39 73 00295 39 73 00305 39 73 00315 39 73 00325 39 73 00335 39 73 00345 39 73 00355 39 73 00365 39 73 00375 39 73 00385 39 73 00395 39 73 00405 39 73 00415 39 73 00425 39 73 00435 39 73 00445 39 73 00455 39 73 00465 39 73 00475 39 73 00485 39 73 00495 Version 2 Sieve Ø 200 mm Inner height 50 mm Order No. 39 73 00113 39 73 00123 39 73 00143 39 73 00153 39 73 00163 39 73 00173 39 73 00183 39 73 00193 39 73 00203 39 73 00213 39 73 00223 39 73 00233 39 73 00243 39 73 00253 39 73 00263 39 73 00273 39 73 00283 39 73 00293 39 73 00303 39 73 00313 39 73 00323 39 73 00333 39 73 00343 39 73 00353 39 73 00363 39 73 00373 39 73 00383 39 73 00393 39 73 00403 39 73 00413 39 73 00423 39 73 00433 39 73 00443 39 73 00453 39 73 00463 39 73 00473 39 73 00483 39 73 00493 Continued on next page co d e b e w co d e b e w WWKZV007 WWJTQ008 1 Mesh width ISO 565 3310-1 20 µm 25 µm 32 µm 36 µm 38 µm 40 µm 45 µm 50 µm 53 µm 56 µm 63 µm 71 µm 75 µm 80 µm 90 µm 100 µm 106 µm 112 µm 125 µm 140 µm 150 µm 160 µm 180 µm 200 µm 212 µm 224 µm 250 µm 280 µm 300 µm 315 µm 355 µm 400 µm 425 µm 450 µm 500 µm 560 µm 600 µm 630 µm 760 Version 1 Sieve Ø 200 mm Inner height 25 mm Order No. 39 73 00112 39 73 00122 39 73 00142 39 73 00152 39 73 00162 39 73 00172 39 73 00182 39 73 00192 39 73 00202 39 73 00212 39 73 00222 39 73 00232 39 73 00242 39 73 00252 39 73 00262 39 73 00272 39 73 00282 39 73 00292 39 73 00302 39 73 00312 39 73 00322 39 73 00332 39 73 00342 39 73 00352 39 73 00362 39 73 00372 39 73 00382 39 73 00392 39 73 00402 39 73 00412 39 73 00422 39 73 00432 39 73 00442 39 73 00452 39 73 00462 39 73 00472 39 73 00482 39 73 00492

762

Separating Systems Sieving Version 2 Sieve Ø 200 mm Inner height 25 mm Order No. 39 73 00504 39 73 00514 39 73 00524 39 73 00534 39 73 00544 39 73 00554 39 73 00564 39 73 00574 39 73 00584 39 73 00594 39 73 00604 39 73 00614 39 73 00624 39 73 00634 39 73 00644 39 73 00654 39 73 00664 39 73 00674 39 73 00684 39 73 00694 39 73 00704 39 73 00714 39 73 00724 39 73 00734 39 73 00744 39 73 00754 39 73 00764 39 73 00774 39 73 00784 39 73 00794 39 73 00804 39 73 00814 39 73 00824 39 73 00834 39 73 00844 39 73 00854 39 73 00864 39 73 00874 39 73 00884 39 73 00894 39 73 00904 39 73 00914 Version 2 Sieve Ø 100 mm Inner height 45 mm Order No. 39 73 00505 39 73 00515 39 73 00525 39 73 00535 39 73 00545 39 73 00555 39 73 00565 39 73 00575 39 73 00585 39 73 00595 39 73 00605 39 73 00615 39 73 00625 39 73 00635 39 73 00645 39 73 00655 39 73 00665 39 73 00675 39 73 00685 39 73 00695 39 73 00705 39 73 00715 39 73 00725 39 73 00735 39 73 00745 39 73 00755 39 73 00765 39 73 00775 39 73 00785 39 73 00795 39 73 00805 39 73 00815 39 73 00825 39 73 00835 39 73 00845 39 73 00855 39 73 00865 39 73 00875 39 73 00885 39 73 00895 39 73 00905 39 73 00915 Version 2 Sieve Ø 200 mm Inner height 50 mm Order No. 39 73 00503 39 73 00513 39 73 00523 39 73 00533 39 73 00543 39 73 00553 39 73 00563 39 73 00573 39 73 00583 39 73 00593 39 73 00603 39 73 00613 39 73 00623 39 73 00633 39 73 00643 39 73 00653 39 73 00663 39 73 00673 39 73 00683 39 73 00693 39 73 00703 39 73 00713 39 73 00723 39 73 00733 39 73 00743 39 73 00753 39 73 00763 39 73 00773 39 73 00783 39 73 00793 39 73 00803 39 73 00813 39 73 00823 39 73 00833 39 73 00843 39 73 00853 39 73 00863 39 73 00873 39 73 00883 39 73 00893 39 73 00903 39 73 00913 Version 1 Sieve Ø 200 mm Inner height 50 mm Order No. 39 73 00501 39 73 00511 39 73 00521 39 73 00531 39 73 00541 39 73 00551 39 73 00561 39 73 00571 39 73 00581 39 73 00591 39 73 00601 39 73 00611 39 73 00621 Test Sieves Mesh Version 1 width Sieve Ø 200 mm ISO 565 Inner height 25 mm 3310-1 Order No. 710 µm 39 73 00502 800 µm 39 73 00512 850 µm 39 73 00522 900 µm 39 73 00532 1.00 mm 39 73 00542 1.12 mm 39 73 00552 1.18 mm 39 73 00562 1.25 mm 39 73 00572 1.40 mm 39 73 00582 1.60 mm 39 73 00592 1.70 mm 39 73 00602 1.80 mm 39 73 00612 2.00 mm 39 73 00622 2.24 mm 2.36 mm 2.50 mm 2.80 mm 3.15 mm 3.35 mm 3.55 mm 4.00 mm 4.50 mm 4.75 mm 5.00 mm 5.60 mm 6.30 mm 6.70 mm 7.10 mm 8.00 mm 9.00 mm 9.50 mm 10.00 mm 11.20 mm 12.50 mm 13.20 mm 14.00 mm 16.00 mm 18.00 mm 19.00 mm 20.00 mm 22.40 mm 25.00 mm Other sieve diameters, version and standards available on request. Stainless steel lid without or with spray attachment Article 2 without spray attachment for sieve Ø 200 mm without spray attachment for sieve Ø 100 mm 3 with spray attachment for sieve Ø 200 mm with spray attachment for sieve Ø 100 mm Order No. 39 73 00950 39 73 00951 39 73 00952 39 73 00953 Stainless steel collection vessels without or with outlet tube Article 4 without outlet tube for sieve Ø 200 mm, inner height. 25 mm without outlet tube for sieve Ø 100 mm, Inner height 30 mm without outlet tube for sieve Ø 200 mm, Inner height 50 mm with outlet tube for sieve Ø 200 mm, inner height 25 mm with outlet tube for sieve Ø 100 mm, Inner height 45 mm with outlet tube for sieve Ø 200 mm, Inner height 50 mm Order No. 39 73 00954 39 73 00955 39 73 00958 39 73 00956 39 73 00957 39 73 00959 Acceptance test certificate Article Acceptance test certificate according to EN 10204 (DIN 50049) 3.1.B 39 73 11000 Certificate for test sieves based on digital image measurement. Fully automatic deter- Order No. mination of the actual average mesh width at 20 µm to 1 mm acc. to ISO 3310-1. Values quoted separately for weft and warp. 2 3 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 761

763

Separating Systems Sieving co d e b e w WWJTQ007 1 2 3 762 Test Sieves Plastic Test Sieves, LINKER Plastic test sieves, available mesh widths Diameter: Inner height: Frame: Material: 200 mm 45 mm POM nylon sieve mesh acc. to DIN 4197 Mesh width Order No. µm 2000 1800 1700 1600 1400 1250 1180 1000 900 850 800 700 630 600 500 450 425 400 355 315 300 280 250 212 39 73 22001 39 73 22004 39 73 22007 39 73 22010 39 73 22013 39 73 22016 39 73 22019 39 73 22025 39 73 22028 39 73 22031 39 73 22034 39 73 22037 39 73 22040 39 73 22043 39 73 22049 39 73 22052 39 73 22055 39 73 22058 39 73 22061 39 73 22064 39 73 22067 39 73 22070 39 73 22076 39 73 22079 Mesh width Order No. µm 200 180 160 150 140 125 112 106 100 90 80 70 63 53 41 36 30 28 25 20 15 11 5 39 73 22082 39 73 22085 39 73 22088 39 73 22091 39 73 22094 39 73 22097 39 73 22100 39 73 22103 39 73 22106 39 73 22109 39 73 22112 39 73 22118 39 73 22121 39 73 22127 39 73 22136 39 73 22139 39 73 22142 39 73 22145 39 73 22148 39 73 22151 39 73 22154 39 73 22157 39 73 22160 Accessories Article 1 Plastic lid, Ø 200 mm 2 Plastic collection vessel, Ø 200 mm, depth 45 mm 3 Plastic intermediary collection vessel (intermediate layer), Ø 200 mm Order No. 39 73 23001 39 73 23004 39 73 23007 Test Sieve/Evaluation Software, RETSCH The unique RETSCH manufacturing process guarantees a previously unattained quality and consistency in sieve production. Convince yourself of the benefits for the quality of your analyses as well as the ease of handling and lifetime of your sieves (available for sieve diameters of 200 and 203 mm). • One-piece sieve frame and fabric-transition without grooves prevent cross contamina- tion (no sample residues etc.). • No hollow spaces which need to be sealed (no epoxy) • High degree of corrosion resistance and easy cleaning thanks to high-alloy stainless steels • Innovative tensioning technology guarantees permanently tight sieve fabric • Excellent product quality due to extensive optical inspection • Maximum stability and optimum sealing when used in sieve stacks thanks to the o-ring which is placed in the recess designed for this purpose • Clear and precise labeling of the sieves with full traceability based on individualized laser engraving • On request, all sieves are optionally available pursuant to ASTM E 11 • Acceptance test certificate and calibration certificate available on request Continued on next page

764

Separating Systems Sieving Outlet – – – – – – – yes yes yes yes yes yes Order No. 10 29 26101 10 29 26103 10 29 26102 10 29 26104 10 29 26105 10 29 26106 10 29 26107 10 29 26111 10 29 26113 10 29 26114 10 29 26115 10 29 26116 10 29 26117 Venting ring for wet sie- ving – – – – – – – yes yes yes yes yes Order No. 10 29 26501 10 29 26502 10 29 26503 10 29 26504 10 29 26505 10 29 26506 10 29 26507 10 29 26512 10 29 26514 10 29 26515 10 29 26516 10 29 26517 Order No. 10 29 26302 10 29 26303 10 29 26304 10 29 26305 10 29 26306 10 29 26307 Order No. 10 29 26401 10 29 26402 10 29 26403 10 29 26404 10 29 26405 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 763 Continued on next page Test Sieves Standard sieve set Article Sieve set for AS 200 consisting of 8 sieves (ISO 3310-1), 200 mm Ø, 50 mm high (45 µm, 63 µm, 125 µm, 250 µm, 500 µm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 4 mm) and collecting pan Sieve set for AS 300 control consisting of 7 sieves (ISO 3310-1), 305 mm Ø, 50 mm high (630 µm, 1.25 mm, 2.50 mm, 5 mm, 10 mm, 20 mm, 31.5 mm) and collecting pan Sieve set for AS 450 control consisting of 10 sieves (ISO 3310-1), 450 mm Ø, 100 mm high (63 µm, 125 µm, 250 µm, 500 µm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 4 mm, 8 mm, 16 mm, 31.5 mm) and collecting pan Order No. 54 29 10099 54 29 80099 54 29 60099 Sieve set for AS 450 control consisting of 7 sieves (ISO 3310-1), 450 mm Ø, 100 mm high 10 29 21099 (63 µm, 125 µm, 250 µm, 500 µm, 1 mm, 2 mm, 4 mm) and collecting pan Collecting pans, stainless steel Diameter × Height mm 100 × 40 200 × 50 200 × 25 203 × 50 (8 ″ × 2 ″) 305 × 40 400 × 65 450 × 50 100 × 40 200 × 50 203 × 50 (8 ″ × 2 ″) 305 × 56 400 × 70 450 × 85 Intermediate rings, stainless steel Diameter × Height mm 100 × 40 200 × 25 200 × 50 203 × 50 (8 ″ × 2 ″) 305 × 40 400 × 65 450 × 100 200 × 25 203 × 25 (8 ″ × 1 ″) 305 × 40 400 × 65 450 × 100 Intermediate pans, stainless steel Diameter × Height mm 200 × 25 200 × 50 203 × 50 (8 ″ × 2 ″) 305 × 40 400 × 65 450 × 100 Sieve covers, stainless steel Diameter mm 100 200 305 400 450 co d e b e w

765

Separating Systems Sieving co d e b e w WWKZV002 Test Sieves Software for grain size analysis EasySieve® Features: • Automatic recording, evaluation and administration of the measurement data • Logical structure, self-explanatory • Measurement log according to standards • Controlling of all RETSCH sieve machines “control” as well as AS 200 tab and AS 200 jet. • Automatic, simultaneous data transfer to LIMS-systems • Now only Windows 10 (no 2000, XP, Vista, 7 and/or 8) • 21 CFR Part 11 compliant version available on request Article EasySieve® with Single User License Order No. 10 29 25031 Test Sieves, Stainless Steel, HAVER & BOECKER HAVER & BOECKER is one of the major international manufacturers of wire mesh. Accord- ingly, HAVER test sieves are characterised by their high precision and stability. Each test sieve is accompanied free of charge by a manufacturer’s certificate 2.1 pursuant to DIN EN 10204. An individual certification or calibration test certificate 3.1 pursuant to DIN EN ISO 10204 is available for each mesh width and diameter. HAVER & BOECKER also offers testing of the sieves pursuant to DIN EN ISO / IEC 17025 in their accredited in-house calibration lab. HAVER test sieves are manufactured in compliance with the applicable standards DIN ISO 3310, ASTM E11, ISO 565, B 410, AFNOR, ISO 5223 etc. Technical data: Diameter (mm): Usable height (mm): 25 25 Mesh sizes: from 5 µm 50 76,2 100 150 200/203 250 300 305 315 350 400 450 70 55 30/60 60 32/50 45 75 50 60 65 Mesh width ISO 565 3310-1 125 mm 112 mm 106 mm 100 mm 90 mm 80 mm 75 mm 71 mm 63 mm 56 mm 53 mm 50 mm 45 mm 40 mm 37.5 mm 35.5 mm 31.5 mm 28 mm 26.5 mm 25 mm 22.4 mm 20 mm 19 mm 18 mm 16 mm 14 mm 13.2 mm 12.5 mm 11.2 mm 10 mm 9.5 mm 9 mm 8 mm 7.1 mm 6.7 mm 6.3 mm 5.6 mm 5 mm 4.75 mm 4.5 mm 4 mm 3.55 mm 764 Size 1 Sieve Ø 200 mm Useful height 50 mm Order No. 10 16 95040 10 16 90259 10 16 95023 10 16 92598 10 16 93212 10 16 91379 10 16 91432 10 16 90246 10 16 91362 10 16 91386 10 16 95016 10 16 91355 10 16 91348 10 16 91331 10 16 91456 10 16 91324 10 16 91317 10 16 91310 10 16 95009 10 16 91292 10 16 91285 10 16 91278 10 16 91463 10 16 91261 10 16 91254 10 16 91247 10 16 93243 10 16 91240 10 16 91223 10 16 91216 10 16 93260 10 16 91209 10 16 91191 10 16 91184 10 16 93236 10 16 91177 10 16 91170 10 16 91153 10 16 93111 10 16 91146 10 16 91139 10 16 91122 Size 2 Sieve Ø 400 mm Useful height 65 mm Order No. 10 16 90594 10 16 90595 10 16 90596 10 16 90597 10 16 90598 10 16 90599 10 16 90600 10 16 90601 10 16 90602 10 16 90603 10 16 90604 10 16 90605 10 16 90606 10 16 90607 10 16 90608 10 16 96731 10 16 90696 10 16 90610 10 16 90611 10 16 90612 10 16 90613 10 16 95992 10 16 90614 10 16 90615 10 16 90571 10 16 90191 10 16 90617 10 16 90184 10 16 90618 10 16 96755 10 16 99366 10 16 90619 10 16 95978 10 16 90177 10 16 90620 10 16 95961 10 16 97391 10 16 97199 10 16 90621 10 16 96003 10 16 95947 10 16 90622 Mesh width ISO 565 3310-1 1.7 mm 1.6 mm 1.4 mm 1.25 mm 1.18 mm 1.12 mm 1 mm 900 µm 850 µm 800 µm 710 µm 630 µm 600 µm 560 µm 500 µm 450 µm 425 µm 400 µm 355 µm 315 µm 300 µm 280 µm 250 µm 224 µm 212 µm 200 µm 180 µm 160 µm 150 µm 140 µm 125 µm 112 µm 106 µm 100 µm 90 µm 80 µm 75 µm 71 µm 63 µm 56 µm 53 µm 50 µm Size 1 Sieve Ø 200 mm Useful height 50 mm Order No. 10 16 93071 10 16 91051 10 16 91045 10 16 91037 10 16 93065 10 16 91020 10 16 91014 10 16 91006 10 16 93057 10 16 90995 10 16 90988 10 16 90971 10 16 93033 10 16 90964 10 16 90958 10 16 90940 10 16 93020 10 16 90933 10 16 90927 10 16 90919 10 16 92303 10 16 90902 10 16 90895 10 16 90887 10 16 92985 10 16 90870 10 16 90864 10 16 90856 10 16 92961 10 16 90849 10 16 90832 10 16 90825 10 16 92947 10 16 90818 10 16 90801 10 16 90793 10 16 92940 10 16 90779 10 16 90762 10 16 90755 10 16 92915 10 16 90748 Size 2 Sieve Ø 400 mm Useful height 65 mm Order No. 10 16 90629 10 16 90631 10 16 92148 10 16 92130 10 16 90632 10 16 90633 10 16 95916 10 16 90634 10 16 90635 10 16 92123 10 16 96273 10 16 90727 10 16 90636 10 16 90637 10 16 95909 10 16 96189 10 16 90638 10 16 96172 10 16 96034 10 16 90639 10 16 90640 10 16 90641 10 16 96267 10 16 90642 10 16 90643 10 16 90644 10 16 96072 10 16 96088 10 16 96142 10 16 90645 10 16 96761 10 16 90646 10 16 96135 10 16 90648 10 16 96259 10 16 90649 10 16 96128 10 16 96855 10 16 96158 10 16 90650 10 16 90651 10 16 90652 Continued on next page

766

Separating Systems Sieving / Evaporation Test Sieves Mesh width ISO 565 3310-1 3.35 mm 3.15 mm 2.8 mm 2.5 mm 2.36 mm 2.24 mm 2 mm 1.8 mm Size 1 Sieve Ø 200 mm Useful height 50 mm Order No. 10 16 93096 10 16 91115 10 16 91108 10 16 91099 10 16 93158 10 16 91082 10 16 91075 10 16 91068 Size 2 Sieve Ø 400 mm Useful height 65 mm Order No. 10 16 90624 10 16 95940 10 16 96801 10 16 90625 10 16 90626 10 16 90627 10 16 96747 10 16 90628 Mesh width ISO 565 3310-1 45 µm 40 µm 38 µm 36 µm 32 µm 25 µm 20 µm Sieve pan Size 1 Sieve Ø 200 mm Useful height 50 mm Order No. 10 16 90731 10 16 90724 10 16 92909 10 16 90717 10 16 90700 10 16 90685 10 16 90661 10 16 90018 Size 2 Sieve Ø 400 mm Useful height 65 mm Order No. 10 16 96110 10 16 90653 10 16 90684 10 16 96956 10 16 90686 10 16 90703 10 16 90001 10 16 90498 Other sieve diameters, types (grain, air jet, wood rim sieves), standards, sieve covers etc. upon request. Evaporators Vacuum Concentrator, CHRIST Rotary vacuum concentrator RVC 2-18 CDplus inclusive vacuum pump For aqueous specimens or specimens which have a low boiling point and contain sol- vents, specimen volume <20 ml per reaction vessel. The RVC 2-18 CDplus is a good choice fast bench top analysis. It is especially suitable for increasing the concentration of DNA/RNA and proteins and for similar preparatory work. A range of rotors is available which extends the specimen capacity, for example 72 × 1.5 ml reaction vessels. The design of the drive subsystem, which has no moving parts outside of the centrifuge chamber, is an outstanding feature of the product. A user-friendly display provides information about the current operating parameters in a format that is easy to understand. Product highlights: • gently increases the concentration of DNA/RNA, proteins, etc. • high specimen capability, e.g. 72 × 1.5 ml reaction vessels • vaporization over large areas for very short drying times • continuous temperature pre-selection (+30°C to +60°C) • timer pre-select - 5 minutes to 12 hours or unlimited • display for simple operation via intuitive menu structure The vacuum concentrator is supplied ready to use with a chemical-resistant membrane pump which delivers a final vacuum of about 10 mbar and has a suction capacity of 2 m3/h. All of the necessary connection fittings are also included. The pump ensures that the process continually runs as liquid vaporization and not as freeze drying, which would be the case with pumps that deliver a lower final vacuum and which would significantly increase processing time. Complete system ready to use, consisting of: • RVC 2-18 CDplus basic unit • vacuum chemical membrane pump 2 m3/h • vacuum pump • electromagnetic shut-off valve Article 1 Rotary vacuum concentrator RVC 2-18 CDplus Order No. 55 86 00220 Please order rotors separately. 1 Rotary vacuum concentrator RVC 2-18 CDplus without vacuum pump Article 2 Rotary vacuum concentrator RVC 2-18 CDplus (without vacuum pump) 55 86 00222 RVC 2-18 CDplus basic unit for connection to existing vacuum system via a standard Order No. DN 16 connecting flange. Please order rotors separately. 2 Rotors for RVC 2-18 CDplus Article Fixed-angle rotor 40 × 0.25/0.5 ml Fixed-angle rotor 30 × 0.5/0.75 ml Fixed-angle rotor 24 × 1.5/2.2 ml Fixed-angle rotor 36 × 1 ml Fixed-angle rotor 24 × 2.5 ml Fixed-angle rotor 12 × 4 ml Fixed-angle rotor 18 × 4/7 ml Fixed-angle rotor 12 × 10/15 ml Fixed-angle rotor 6 × 50 ml Fixed-angle rotor 6 × 50 ml (FALCON) Order No. 55 86 10334 55 86 24505 55 86 24502 55 86 10218 55 86 10327 55 86 10265 55 86 24512 55 86 24516 55 86 10226 55 86 10252 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 765

767

Separating Systems Evaporation co d e b e w WWQJ3070 1 766 Evaporators Vacuum Concentrator, CHRIST Vacuum Concentrator RVC 2-25 CDplus Universal bench top unit for routine work which requires an increase in specimen concen- tration. Can handle large specimen volumes and is suitable for aqueous products and products than contain solvents. Complete system including membrane pump and cold trap (2 liters, condenser temperature -50°C). Large selection of rotors: 108 × 1.5/2.2 ml, 48 × 4 to 7 ml, 24 × 10 to 15 ml, 12 × 30 ml, 8 × 50 ml, 2 × microtitration plates. Other product highlights: • vaporization over large surfaces for very short drying times • continuous temperature pre-selection from +30°C to +80°C • timer pre-select - 5 minutes to 12 hours or unlimited • unit control CDplus with operator-friendly user interface for intuitive control of evapora- tion processes under rotation • innovative drive unit design, no moving parts outside of the centrifuge chamber The vacuum pump is supplied ready to use with a chemical-resistant membrane pump which delivers a final vacuum of about 10 mbar and has a suction capacity of 2 m3/h. All of the necessary connection fittings are also included as well as a cold trap (2 liters, -50°C). The pump ensures that the process continually runs as liquid vaporization and not as freeze drying, which would be the case with pumps that deliver a lower final vacuum and which would significantly increase processing time. Article Rotary vacuum concentrator RVC 2-25 CDplus, without accessories 55 86 00225 Vacuum chemical diaphragm pump 2 m3/h 55 86 25297 Electromagnetic shut-off valve 55 86 25800 Cooling trap CT 02-50 55 86 00502 Glass lid with connecting tubes 55 86 21370 Vacuum sensor VSK 3000 10 86 25474 Rotary vacuum concentrator RVC 2-25 CDplus, complete with accessories 55 86 10225 Order No. Rotors for RVC 2-25 CDplus (essential accessory) Article Fixed-angle rotor 36 × 1.5/2.2 ml Fixed-angle rotor 36 × 2 ml Fixed-angle rotor 30 × 5 ml Fixed-angle rotor 48 × 5/7 ml Fixed-angle rotor 36 × 8/10 ml Fixed-angle rotor 24 × 10/15 ml Fixed-angle rotor 12 × 30 ml Fixed-angle rotor 8 × 50 ml (FALCON) Fixed-angle rotor 8 × 50 ml Fixed-angle rotor 6 × 100 ml Swing-bucket rotor 2 × microtiter plates Order No. 55 86 24552 55 86 10369 55 86 10391 55 86 24562 55 86 24563 55 86 24566 55 86 24575 55 86 24580 55 86 24584 55 86 24595 55 86 24600 Vacuum Concentrator, Eppendorf Concentrator plus The Concentrator plus has a new LCD-display as well as a user-friendly control panel with clear assignment of the function keys to the display. The Concentrator plus is available in two versions: as complete system with integrated, maintenance-free vacuum pump or as Concentrator single device, which can be connected to an existing vacuum pump. Both configurations enable a quick and efficient - and at the same time gentle - vacuum con- centration of the samples (e.g. DNA/RNA, proteins). The complete system contains a condensate separator, which purifies the outgoing air to up to 85% and thus protects from unpleasant odours. At the same time, an automatic condensate evacuation extends the life span of all components, which encounter the vapours. A big selection of fixed-angle rotors, which can be loaded with up to 144 samples by stapling, as well as the micro test plate rotor A-2-VC make it possible to use the Concentrator plus for a wide range of ap- plications in the laboratory. Product features: • Small width of 32 cm saves precious space on the laboratory bench • Chemical-resistant PTFE-membrane pump • Chemical-resistant stainless steel tank • Very quiet operation, even with running pump • Automatic condensate evacuation • Three freely selectable operation programmes (watery, alcoholic or high vapour pres- sure), depending on solvent used f reducing expenditure of time to up to 20 % Continued on next page

768

Separating Systems Evaporation Evaporators • Four heating levels available (room temperature, 30°C, 45°C, 60°C), which enables safe and efficient concentrating of different samples • Centrifugation and desiccator function • Complete system with connection for external devices offers additional flexibility Article 1 Concentrator plus complete system with built-in diaphragm pump and 48 × 1.5/2.0 ml fixed-angle Order No. 10 69 50215 rotor Concentrator plus complete system with built-in diaphragm pump, with junction for external devices (e.g. gel-dryer), without rotor Concentrator plus complete system with built-in diaphragm pump, without rotor Concentrator plus basic device, with 48 × 1.5/2.0 ml fixed-angle rotor 10 69 50614 10 69 50410 10 69 50010 Swing-bucket rotor A-2-VC Max. tube capacity Two buckets for • 0.2 ml PCR tubes • 5-tube or 8-tube strips • PCR plates • Microplates • Cell culture plates • Deepwell plates (max. height = 27 mm) • Slides (with CombiSlide® adapter) Type 2 A-2-VC Tube capacity ml 96 × 0.2 Tube dim. (Ø×L or L×W×H) mm 128 × 86 × 27 26 × 751) 1) with CombiSlide® adapter Tube capacity per rotor Order No. 2 10 69 45009 3 Fixed-angle rotors Type Tube capacity ml F-45-72-8 F-45-70-11 F-45-48-11 F-45-24-12 F-50-8-16 F-50-8-18 F-45-8-17 F-40-36-12 F-45-36-15 F-45-16-20 F-40-18-19 F-45-12-31 F-35-8-24 F-35-6-30 0.5 1.5 2 1.5 2 62) 15 162) 15 1.5 6 6.5 10 10 20 25 50 Tube dim. (Ø×L or L×W×H) mm 8×31 11×41 11×47 11×41 11×47 12×67-100 16×97 18×105-128 17×120 12×32 15×48 20×42 20×55 19×66 31×55 24×86 29.5×116-123 Tube capacity per rotor Order No. 72 70 48 24 8 8 8 36 36 16 18 12 8 6 10 69 34007 10 69 32004 10 69 30001 10 69 36000 10 69 41003 10 69 42000 10 69 38002 10 69 40007 10 69 35003 10 69 43006 10 69 37006 10 69 44002 10 69 39009 10 69 47001 2) Min./max. tube length and max. volume, respectively. Accessories Article Rotor spacer required for stacking rotors F-45-72-8 and F-45-48-11 Adapter for CombiSlide® (set of 2) Adapter For 0.5 ml micro centrifuge tube and 0.6 ml Microtai- ners®, 6 pieces Adapter For 0.2 ml PCR tube, 6 pieces Work trays for 96 x 0.2 ml PCR tubes (set of 10) and plates without frame Frame for work tray (set of 5) Order No. 10 69 16005 10 69 06005 55 69 16001 55 69 15005 10 69 24235 10 69 24243 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 767

769

Separating Systems Evaporation co d e b e w WW4HV029 1 co d e b e w WW4HV030 1 2 768 Evaporators Thermo Scientific™ Savant™ SpeedVac™ SPD1030 und SPD2030 Integrated Vacuum Concentrator Systems, Thermo Scientific The Thermo Scientific™ Savant™ SpeedVac™ SPD1030 and SPD2030 vacuum concen- trator systems combine a concentrator, an oil-free vacuum pump and a cold trap in a single compact unit. They are the ideal solution for drying DNA/RNA precipitates, PCR samples, proteins, enzyme, HPLC fractions in plates or tubes in water/ethanol or isopro- panol and other organic solvents. Both systems fit under a standard lab fume hood. • Plug-and-Play installation - no tubing required • Intuitive control panel with a bright display; three pre-set and three user-defined pro- grammes • Radiant cover for fast evaporation and efficient solvent removal • Vacuum ramping and pressure controls eliminate sample bumping to maintain sample integrity • Two timers for heating time and runtime with acoustic alarm • of Wide variety of rotors to support sample format from micro tubes, vials and mi- croplates to large-volume flasks • Oil-free vacuum membrane pump – no addition of oil, no oil change • PTFE coating protects the chamber from corrosion and makes cleaning easy Technical data: Max. vacuum: Displacement: Chamber temperature: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Power supply: <10 Torr (13 mbar) 30 l/min at 50 Hz 35°C to 80°C 64 × 66 × 41 cm (SPD1030) / 79 × 71 × 53 cm (SPD2030) 69 kg (SPD1030) / 93 kg (SPD2030) 230 V / 50 Hz Article SpeedVac SPD1030 system kit incl. RH40-12 rotor (40 × 1.5 ml), CryoCool heat transfer fluid (1 l) and glass condensation flask 1 SpeedVac SPD2030 system kit incl. RH200-12 rotor (200 × 1.5 ml), CryoCool heat transfer flu- id (1 l) and glass condensation flask To see our large portfolio of models and accessories, please enter webcode WW4HV029 to access our online catalogue. Order No. 10 79 21030 10 79 22030 Thermo Scientific™ Savant™ SpeedVac™ SPD120 vacuum concentrator kits, Thermo Scientific The modular vacuum concentrators Thermo Scientific™ Savant™ SpeedVac™ SPD120 provide flexibility for your benchtop space. They are ideal for evaporation of non-aggres- sive organics. • Radiant glass cover to accelerate evaporation and reduce drying time • 3 preset and 3 user-defined programmes • Safe Soft-Close lid lock protects the user and the sample • Two timers for heating time and runtime, with acoustic alarm • PTFE-coated chamber for high chemical resistance and easy cleaning • Data transfer via USB connection Article 1 SpeedVac SPD120P1 kit for standard evaporation incl. universal vacuum system with oil-free vacuum pump and cold trap (–50°C), tubing kit, 1 l CryoCool heat transfer fluid, glass condensation flask and RH40-11 rotor (40 × 1.5 ml) 2 SpeedVac SPD120P2 kit for lyophilization incl. ultra-low temperature cold trap (-105°C), vacuum pump, digital vacuummeter, RH40-11 rotor (40 × 1.5–2.0 ml), chemi- cal trap with disposable cartridge for neutralisation of acids, 1 l CryoCool heat transfer fluid, glass condensation flask and oil for vacuum pump and universal tubing kit To see our large portfolio of models and accessories, please enter webcode WW4HV030 to access our online catalogue. Order No. 10 79 21201 10 79 21202

770

Rotary Evaporators Rotary Evaporators RC 900 and RC 600, KNF Neuberger RC 900 • Lean design, very small footprint The RC 900 needs little space and offers maximum ease of operation. • Perfectly silent for high operating comfort Lift and rotary system of the RC 900 are as good as noiseless. • Flexible application, easy to use Central remote control for all functions, operation via touch screen and rotary knob. Separating Systems Evaporation co d e b e w WWKVG013 RC 600 • Immediately operative • Perfectly robust Central operation of all functions via membrane keyboard, extremely easy to operate. The structure and all components of the unit are designed to withstand heavy strain. • Compact and safe Cordless heating bath with drain, hose holder attached to the tower, easy piston change – well-conceived solutions eliminate the typical safety hazards. 3 bar -15 to +20°C 1230 cm² Technical data: Heating bath: Heating bath temperature: 20 to 180°C Coolant supply parameters (chilled condenser): Permissible pressure: Permissible temperature: Coolant-coated surface: Parameters of evaporation flask: Size of evaporation flask: Rotational speed: Length of stroke: Lifting speed: Weight: Dimensions W × H × D: without glass: 50 to 3000 ml 25 to 250 1/min 150 mm ca. 38 mm/s 9.1 kg 431 × 464 × 447 mm (RC 900) 431 × 464 × 453 mm (RC 600) 487 × 823 × 447 mm (RC 900) 487 × 823 × 453 mm (RC 600) with glass: Article Rotary evaporator RC 600 Rotary evaporator RC 900 Order No. 10 62 70600 10 62 70900 co d e b e w WWSB5020 Rotary Evaporator, Phoenix Instrument Features at a glance: • Easy to read large digital LCD screen displays heating, temperature, rotation, speed and timing • Speed range from 20 to 280 rpm • Large 5 l water-oil heating bath with heating temperature range of RT to 180°C • Heating bath with precise temperature control and adjustable safety circuit • Designed a detachable operating panel allows remote control • Patented condenser (cooling surface 1,500 cm²) with excellent cooling effect • Motorized lift with quick-action, automatic release evaporating flask to top position in case of power failure • Adjustable final position recognition to protect operator and sample against breakage • Evaporating flask with an ejector, convenient to remove • USB-interface • Timer function • Right/left intermittent run Technical data: 20 to 280 rpm Speed range: LCD Speed display: RT to 180°C Temperature range: ±1°C Temperature accuracy: 1300 W Heating power: Temperature display: LCD 150 mm Lift stroke: yes Timer function: LCD Timer display: 1 to 999 min Time setting range: Dimensions: 600 × 450 × 820 mm 19 kg Weight: 5 to 40°C Ambient temperature: 80% Relative humidity: Safety class: IP20 Article Rotary evaporator RE-100D Order No. 10 13 79100 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 769

771

Separating Systems Evaporation co d e b e w WWQVD053 Rotary Evaporators Rotary Evaporator Flasks, Rettberg 1 Rotary evaporator flasks, pear-shaped centered, with ground socket, borosilicate glass 3.3 Vol. Gr. joint NS Order No. Vol. Gr. joint NS Order No. ml 5 10 25 50 100 50 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 14.5/23 29/32 13 70 00007 13 70 00008 13 70 00014 13 70 00017 13 70 00024 13 70 01005 ml 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 2 Rotary evaporator flasks, round centered, with ground socket, borosilicate glass 3.3 13 70 01010 13 70 01025 13 70 01050 13 70 01100 13 70 01200 13 70 01300 Vol. ml 3000 Gr. joint NS Order No. 29/32 13 70 02300 Vol. ml 4000 Gr. joint NS Order No. 29/32 13 70 02400 3 Collecting flasks for rotary evaporator flasks round, with spherical ground dish, borosilicate glass 3.3 Vol. Gr. joint KS Order No. ml 100 35 250 35 500 35 1000 35 13 70 03010 13 70 03025 13 70 03050 13 70 03100 Vol. Gr. joint KS Order No. ml 2000 35 3000 35 4000 35 13 70 03200 13 70 03300 13 70 03400 Collecting flasks for rotary evaporator flasks, coated round, with spherical ground dish, borosilicate glass 3.3 Vol. Gr. joint KS Order No. ml 250 35 500 35 10 70 00118 10 70 00119 Vol. Gr. joint KS Order No. ml 1000 35 10 70 00120 4 Special flasks for drying powdery substances pear shape, centered, with ground socket, borosilicate glass 3.3 Vol. ml 500 1000 Gr. joint NS Order No. 29/32 29/32 13 70 04050 13 70 04100 Vol. ml 2000 3000 Gr. joint NS Order No. 29/32 29/32 13 70 04200 13 70 04300 Accessories for Condenser, Rettberg WWQVD129 5 Stutzer-type splash heads, straight Borosilicate glass 3.3, standard ground socket 29, centered, for rotary evaporators. Ground cone NS 14.5/23 Order No. 13 40 61714 Ground cone NS 29/32 Order No. 13 40 61729 Inlet stopcock made of borosilicate glass 3.3 with PTFE tube 6 Article Inlet stopcock made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Order No. 13 70 04500 Steam Ducts, Rettberg Article 7 Steam duct Steam duct Vacuum seal KD 22, PTFE Length mm 165 282 Version for setup V and C for setput A improved PTFE Order No. 13 70 04525 13 70 04527 13 70 04529 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w 6 5 co d e b e w 770 WWQVD131 7

772

Separating Systems Evaporation Rotary Evaporators Steam Ducts, Rettberg Article Steam duct, shaft 26 mm Seal, PTFE for 26 mm shaft fits Heidolph Laborota Heidolph Laborota Order No. 13 70 04536 13 70 04538 co d e b e w WWQVD132 Special-Connector for Rotary Evaporators, Rettberg Adapter for Rotary Evaporator for distillation direct from the storage jar without the need to transfer. The unit consists of a central funnel tube NS 29/32 which feeds into the shaft using a double-ended PVDF screw section with an internal FPM O-ring to fit storage jars from 5 to 50 ml. Connector for rotary evaporators co d e b e w WWQVD163 Article Adapter for 5 and 10 ml threaded jars Adapter for 15, 20, 30, 40 and 50 ml- threaded jars Order No. 13 70 04401 13 70 04402 Screw jars for the adapters Article Screw-top jar 5 ml Screw-top jar 10 ml Screw-top jar 15 ml Screw-top jar 20 ml Screw-top jar 30 ml Screw-top jar 50 ml Freeze Drying Freeze Dryer, CHRIST Order No. 13 70 04407 13 70 04408 13 70 04411 13 70 04412 13 70 04416 13 70 04419 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 Alpha 1-2 LDplus Freeze dryer, ice capacity 2 kg, ice condenser temperature -55°C, process B, drying in 8 round flasks and on 3 unheated shelves Ø = 200 mm. Small, powerful benchtop unit for efficient lyophilisation of samples for standard labora- tory tasks. The LDplus user interface makes working extra easy. • Clearly structured graphical display • Indication of key parameters • Wide language selection • Vacuum control for optimization/reduction of process times (electromagnetic pressure control valve available as option) • Conversion of product temperature and vacuum according to the vapour pressure curve above ice • Interface (option) Total capacity 2 kg, ice condenser temperature -55°C, supplied with 8 rubber valves for drying in flasks and 3 unheated shelves for dish drying, system ready to use, includes vacuum pump (2 m3/h suction capacity), air cooled, 230 V supply voltage, dimensions (width×depth×height) 315 × 460 × 345 mm, weight approx. 28 kg, practical accessories available for universal use in nearly all drying applications in round flasks, dishes, am- poules and vials. Article Laboratory freeze dryer Alpha 1-2 LDplus, without accessories Vacuum gauge VCP 63 Vacuum hose Base plate 3 unheated shelves Acrylic drying chamber with 8 connections Rubber valve1) Vacuum pump 2 m3/h Exhaust filter Laboratory freeze dryer Alpha 1-2 LDplus, compl. with accessories Order No. 49 86 01021 49 86 25478 49 86 25702 49 86 20890 49 86 20893 49 86 21455 49 86 21860 49 86 25302 49 86 25501 49 86 11021 1) 8 required. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 771

773

Separating Systems Evaporation 772 Freeze Drying Freeze Dryer, CHRIST Alpha 1-4 LSCbasic freeze dryer, ice capacity 4 kg, ice condenser temperature -55°C, process B, drying in 12 round flasks and on 3 unheated shelves Ø = 265 mm. Universal lab system for routine applications with intuitive LSCbasic system control. • Clearly structured display on 5.7" colour touchscreen • Interactive visualisation of the layout • Wide language selection • Vacuum control for optimization/reduction of process times (electromagnetic pressure control valve available as option) • Conversion of product temperature and vacuum according to the vapour pressure curve above ice • Interface (option) Total capacity 4 kg, ice condenser temperature -55°C, includes 12 rubber valves and 3 unheated shelves for dish drying, system ready to use, includes vacuum pump (suction capacity m3/h), 230 V supply voltage, dimensions (width×depth×height) 390 × 555 × 415 mm, weight approx. 42 kg; modular design, wide range of accessories available for sub- stantial capacity expansion. Article Laboratory freeze dryer Alpha 1-4 LSCbasic, without accessories Vacuum gauge VCP 63 Vacuum hose Base plate 3 unheated shelves Acrylic drying chamber with 12 connections Rubber valve1) Vacuum pump 5 m3/h Exhaust filter Laboratory freeze dryer Alpha 1-4 LSCbasic, compl. with accessories Order No. 10 86 22370 49 86 25478 49 86 25704 49 86 20900 49 86 20903 49 86 21550 49 86 21860 49 86 25312 49 86 25502 10 86 25411 1) 12 required. Freeze Dryer, CHRIST Beta 1-8 LSCbasic freeze dryer, ice capacity 8 kg, ice condenser temperature -55°C, process B, drying in 12 round flasks and on 5 unheated shelves Ø = 265 mm, no vacuum control. Lab system for routine drying of large batches with intuitive LSCbasic system control. • Clearly structured display on 5.7" colour touchscreen • Interactive visualisation of the layout • Wide language selection • Vacuum control for optimization/reduction of process times (electromagnetic pressure control valve available as option) • Conversion of product temperature and vacuum according to the vapour pressure curve above ice • Interface (option) Total ice capacity 8 kg, ice condenser temperature -55°C, includes 12 rubber valves for flasks and 5 unheated shelves Ø = 265 mm for dish drying, includes vacuum pump (suc- tion capacity 5 m3/h), air-cooler, 230 V supply voltage, dimensions (width×depth×height) 780 × 540 × 415 mm, weight approx. 63 kg; practical accessories for universal use in nearly all drying applications in round flasks, dishes, ampoules and injection vials. Article Laboratory freeze dryer Beta 1-8 LSCbasic, without accessories Vacuum gauge VCP 63 Hand shut-off valve Base plate Acrylic drying chamber with 12 connections Rubber valve1) 5 unheated shelves Vacuum hose Vacuum pump 5 m3/h Exhaust filter Laboratory freeze dryer Beta 1-8 LSCbasic, compl. with accessories Order No. 10 86 22420 49 86 25478 49 86 25920 49 86 20900 49 86 21555 49 86 21860 49 86 20902 49 86 25704 49 86 25312 49 86 25502 10 86 25811 1) 12 required.

774

Separating Systems Evaporation Freeze Drying Freeze Dryer, CHRIST Alpha 1-4 LSCplus plus freeze dryer, ice capacity 4 kg, ice condenser temperature -55°C, process B, 5 heated shelves Ø = 200 mm, 12 rubber valves, with vacuum con- trol. Universal freeze drying system with intuitive LSCplus user interface. • Clearly structured display on 5.7" colour touchscreen • Graphic representation of the freeze-drying process • Detailed message texts • Memory for 30 user-defined programmes (optional) • WINDOWS®-based process control and documentation software available Ice capacity 4 kg, ice condenser temperature -55°C, process B: separate freezing e.g. in the freezer and drying outside of the ice condenser chamber, 12 rubber valves for flasks and 5 (heated) shelves Ø = 200 mm for dish drying, vacuum control and shelf heating for accelerated, reproducible processing; ready to use, includes vacuum pump (suction ca- pacity 2 m3/h), air-cooled, 230 V supply voltage, dimensions (width×depth×height) 390 × 555 × 415 mm, weight approx. 48 kg; modular design, a wide range of accessories is available for substantial capacity expansion. Article Laboratory freeze dryer Alpha 1-4 LSCplus, without accessories Extension unit HED-16 LSCplus Electromagnetic pressure control valve WST Base plate Acrylic drying chamber with 12 connections Rubber valve1) Carry-rack for 5 shelves Shelf with WST technology Vacuum hose Vacuum pump 2 m3/h Exhaust filter Laboratory freeze dryer Alpha 1-4 LSCplus, complete with accessories Order No. 49 86 02041 49 86 25040 49 86 25910 10 86 20880 49 86 21550 49 86 21860 10 86 21145 10 86 22576 49 86 25702 49 86 25302 49 86 25501 49 86 12041 Freeze Dryer, CHRIST Alpha 2-4 LSCplus freeze dryer, ice capacity 4 kg, ice condenser temperature -85°C, process A, temperature-controlled shelf Ø = 200 mm with stoppering device, vacuum control. Universal freeze drying system with intuitive LSCplus user interface. • Clearly structured display on 5.7" colour touchscreen • Graphic representation of the freeze-drying process • Detailed message texts • Memory for 30 user-defined programmes (optional) • WINDOWS ®-based process control and documentation software available Total capacity 4 kg, ice condenser temperature -85°C, 1 (heated) shelf Ø = 200 mm. Process A: freezing and drying in vials, temperature range about -35°C to +99°C, stop- pering under vacuum or inert gas, vacuum control and shelf heating for faster, reproduc- ible processing; ready to use, includes vacuum pump (suction capacity 2 m3/h), air cooled, 230 V supply voltage, dimensions (width×depth×height) 390 × 555 × 415 mm, weight approx. 60 kg; modular design, wide range of accessories for substantial capacity expan- sion. Article Freeze dryer Alpha 2-4 LSCplus, without accessories Extension unit HED-16 LSCplus Programmer PGM 30 Electromagnetic pressure control valve Shelf with stoppering device acrylic lid, Ø = 200 mm Vacuum hose Vacuum pump 2 m3/h Exhaust filter Laboratory freeze dryer Alpha 2-4 LSCplus, complete with accessories Order No. 49 86 02042 49 86 25040 49 86 25099 49 86 25910 49 86 21009 49 86 25702 49 86 25302 49 86 25501 49 86 12042 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 773

775

Separating Systems Evaporation / Chromatography Freeze Drying Alpha 3-4 LSCbasic – Special System for Organic Solvents, CHRIST Universal system configuration which meets increased safety requirements. The Alpha 3-4 solvents package allows for safe handling of solvents, many of which are flammable. The unit is equipped with the user-friendly LSCbasic control. Ice capacity 4 kg, ice condenser temperature -105°C, method B, drying in 12 flasks and 3 unheated positions Ø 200 mm. • Drying chamber made of safety glass • Safe: no ignition source such as the commonly used Pirani vacuum sensors • Resistant: high-quality materials such as stainless steel 316 L and solvent-resistant gaskets • Powerful: internal condenser with -105°C • Solvent-resistant hybrid vacuum pump Equipped with capacitive vacuum measuring probe, 12 rubber valves for flask drying and 3 unheated positions for shelf drying, coated mineral glass drying chamber, unit fully operative with vacuum-chemicals-hybrid pump (capacity 6 m3/h), air-cooled unit, electri- cal connection 230 V, dimensions (width × height × depth) 780 × 415 × 540, weight approx. 80 kg, natural cooling agent, practical and universal accessories for almost all drying applications in flasks, shelves available Article Alpha 3-4 LSCbasic solvent packet universal Available as a package only Order No. 10 86 22395 Columns Chromatography Columns, Rettberg co d e b e w WWQVD006 Chromatography columns made of borosilicate glass 3.3 With little dead space, with PTFE stopcock (bore 2.5 mm), with standard ground socket. Version A with fused glass filter plate Por. O Version B with fused glass filter plate Por. O and GL14 (without screw cap and tube) NS Ground socket 14.5/23 14.5/23 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 29/32 45/40 45/40 45/40 45/40 Filling height approx. mm 200 300 200 300 200 300 500 1000 750 750 750 750 Inner Ø ap- prox. mm 10 10 20 20 30 30 30 30 60 70 80 90 Version 1 A Order No. 86 70 00211 86 70 00311 86 70 01211 86 70 01311 86 70 01321 86 70 01331 86 70 01351 86 70 01391 10 70 00283 10 70 00284 10 70 00285 10 70 00286 2 B Order No. 10 70 00233 10 70 00234 10 70 00239 10 70 00240 10 70 00241 10 70 00242 10 70 00287 10 70 00288 10 70 00235 10 70 00236 10 70 00237 10 70 00238 Screwing cap for tube pipe culverts made of PBT with PTFE inner part Inner Ø approx. mm 1.6 3.2 GL 14 GL 14 Thread Order No. 10 70 00221 10 70 00421 3 Solvent reservoir for chromatography columns made of borosilicate glass 3.3 Volume Order No. ml 50 100 250 100 250 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 Ground joint cone and socket NS 14.5 NS 14.5 NS 14.5 NS 29 NS 29 NS 29 NS 29 NS 45/ NS 29 NS 45/ NS 29 NS 45/ NS 29 NS 45/ NS 29 10 70 00313 10 70 00314 10 70 00315 10 70 00316 10 70 00317 10 70 00318 10 70 00319 10 70 00330 10 70 00333 10 70 00331 10 70 00332 1 2 3 774

776

Separating Systems Chromatography Thin Layer Chromatography Devices and Accessories for Thin Layer Chromatography, biostep co d e b e w WWAZJ006 Accessories 1 Application templates for thin layer chromatography • for applying the samples precisely on the DC plates • for plate sizes 50 × 50, 100 × 100, 200 × 100 and 200 × 200 mm • numbered triangular cut-outs provide exact guidance for pipette • non-slip undersurface Article Application template 50 × 50 mm Application template 100 × 100 mm Application template 200 × 100 mm Application template 200 × 200 mm Order No. 10 12 80135 10 12 80134 10 12 80136 10 12 80137 2 Vertical separating chambers for thin layer chromatography • Different chamber types, sizes, and lids for the respective applications, with/without chamber saturation, pre-conditioning etc. • Standard separating chamber for 20 × 20 cm plates • Nano separating chamber for small plates of up to 10 × 10 cm Article Standard separating chamber for plates 200 × 200 mm, GC 10 12 80405 Standard separating chamber for plates 200 × 200 mm, KC 10 12 80160 Nano separating chamber for plates 100 × 100 mm, GC 10 12 80410 Order No. GC = glass cover, KC = knob cover 3 Horizontal separating chambers for thin layer chromatography • inexpensive, fast, cost-efficient • for plate sizes 5 × 5 cm or 10 × 10 cm • good monitoring of the development conditons, either in an atmosphere saturated in 2 solvent vapor or optionally without pre-steaming • clear results are achieved in a short time – perfect for laboratory, drugstore/pharmacy, schools, internship • low contamination of the atmosphere with solvent vapors 1 incl. 1 frit rod and glass lid Article H-separating chamber for 50 × 50 mm plates H-separating chamber for 100 × 100 mm plates Frit rods for H-separating chambers, pack. à 5 pc. Pack. à 5 pc. incl. 2 frit rods and glass lid Order No. 10 12 80150 10 12 80151 10 12 80155 Devices 4 HPTLC applicator AS 30 Accurate sample application, semi-automatic • spray-on-technique by gas stream • accurate application of the samples as dot or as line • samples can be applied on TLC plates, HPTLC plates or foils up to 20 × 20 cm • user-friendly menu, 2 line LCD display • dual syringe system with 10 µl dosing and 25 µl filling syringe • incl. PC-software for MS Windows 10 Article HPTLC applicator AS 30 5 Autosampler BS 35 Order No. 10 12 80500 Sampler specifically modified for HPTLC-Applicator AS 30 • combination AS 30 and BS 35 = fully automated sample application • Y, Y, Z axes mechanism • advantageous for high sample through-put • permanently lubricated pilot bearings • double-needle injection design to prevent clogging with septum particles • sample capacity: 80 samples of 1.5 ml each Article Autosampler BS 35 6 Sprayer SGe1 Order No. 10 12 85101 Even spraying of DC plates • for derivatizing the TLC/HPTLC plates • ultrafine spray mists are generated independent of mains connection • Iicluding rechargeable batteries and a battery-charging station • for fluids up to the viscosity of light oils – particle diameter 5 to 10 µm • ergonomical shape for fatigue-free work Article Sprayer SG e1 co d e b e w 3 4 Order No. 10 12 80605 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 5 6 775

777

Separating Systems Chromatography 1 Thin Layer Chromatography ChromaJet DS 20 Fully-automated reagent spraying device • highest precision when spraying reagents on TLC plates or foils; very high reprodu cibility • great reduction of required reagent quantity, extremly low aerosol formation • 4 spray methods can be created and saved, GxP conform • suitable for routine tasks • intuitive operation, easy sequence of setting options • free selection of X-Y-coordinat direction, spray evenly individual tracks and areas of any size up to 20 × 20 cm • incl. PC-software for MS Windows 10 1 Article ChromaJet DS 20 Order No. 10 12 80700 2 ProViDoc-System DD 70 PC controlled documentation station for producing and documenting DC samples etc. in a visible and UV range of 254/366 nm • with high-resolution reflex camera, 24 Mpixel • CabUVIS dark hood with reflected and transmitted UV light • processing and easy archiving of the images in conformity with G×P • incl. argusX2 control software with user administration and database • extensive post-processing and labeling functions including RF scale • optional 21 CFR Part11 module with complete system audit trails, backup function • compatible with Microsoft Windows 10 Article ProViDoc system DD70 21 CFR Part 11 module incl. reflex camera, CabUVIS and software Order No. 10 12 80061 10 12 80095 3 HPTLC Densitometer CD 60 Compact, intelligent measuring device for quantification • spectral range 190 – 900 nm • remission and transmission • compact intelligent measuring instrument • for reliable results and ease of operation • extinction or fluorescence mode • dual / multi-wavelength measurement, among others • calibration: linear, polynomial or Michaelis-Menten function • including control and analysis software ProQuant for quantitative applications (TLC, HPTLC and electropherogram) with MS windows 10 2 Article HPTLC Densitometer CD 60 Order No. 10 12 81800 Chromatography Paper, Hahnemühle Recommended for chromatographic analysis and preparations. • Made from pure cotton linters with an a-cellulose content > 98 % • High-performance resolution and wet strength • The fibres are oriented in predominantly one direction • Thicker papers allow higher sample volumes • Lower capillary rises offer higher resolutions Properties medium fast medium fast Technical data: Grade Analytical chromatography papers 2043 a 2043 b Preparative chromatography papers 2668 very fast 2727 very fast 1) Measures in 30 min. 2) Measures in 10 min. Weight 90 g/m2 120 g/m2 320 g/m2 700 g/m2 Thickness Capillary rise1) 0.17 mm 0.22 mm 0.90 mm 1.45 mm 105 mm 105 mm 1552) mm 1701) mm Grade 2668 2043A 2043A 2043B 2727 Dimensions mm 580×600 460×570 580×600 460×570 190×190 Order No. 10 15 94370 10 15 94371 10 15 94372 10 15 97373 10 15 90800 PU pc/Pack 50 100 100 100 100 3 co d e b e w WW6PB018 776

779

Biotechnology Molecular Biology CHAPTER OVERVIEW Molecular Biology 778 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778 Electrophoresis 784 Chambers, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784 Blotting Papers, Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Power Supply Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786 UV Illumination Plates/Transilluminators . . . . . 787 Culture Vessels 788 Reaction Vessels, Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788 Plates, Dishes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799 Cryo Articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Culture Vessels, Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821 Bioreactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828 Sample Processing 831 Colony Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831 Sample Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833 Vacuum Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841 co d e b e w WWFH8013 1 1 778 2 Equipment BactoSonic Ultrasonic Special Bath, BANDELIN Ultrasonic special bath for gentle removing of biofilm Fast microbiological diagnostic method for implant-associated infections The successful treatment of implant infections depends on an accurate microbiological diagnosis. Microorganisms form biofilms on implant surfaces, what makes them difficult to detect by conventional methods. BactoSonic®gently removes biofilms from implant surfaces. After sonication the liquid is cultered on agar plates and can be used for further analysis (e.g. microcalorimetry). Fast diagnosis of infections is possible. Principle of BactoSonic® The implants are placed in the air-tight implant boxes and sonicated in the specially de- signed ultrasonic device BactoSonic®. Compared to other ultrasonic baths, BactoSonic® works with a very low ultrasound intensity. The biofilm is removed without killing the bacteria, a quantitative assessment is possible. Assessment of biofilm-forming bacteria on implants by BactoSonic® The sonicated liquid is cultured and the quantity of bacteria can be determined. Compared to standard methods (e.g. biopsies from periprosthetic tissue) up to 10,000 times more bacteria can be detected. Mixed infections and different bacteria morphotypes can better be identified. The sensitivity especially of patients with previous antibiotic therapy is im- proved. BactoSonic 14.2 Ready-to-use set consisting of: • Ultrasonic special bath BS 14.2, with scientifically tested procedure, wire frame for foil test FT 14, TICKOPUR R 33 (contact liquid - concentrate) - 250 ml Implant boxes • IB 5, PP, 0,52 l – 2 pcs, 145 × 110 × 67 • IB 6, PP, 0,6 l – 2 pcs, Ø 142 × 68 • IB 10, PP, 1,0 l – 1 pcs, 278 × 115 × 60 • IB 18, PP, 1,8 l – 1 pcs, 208 × 143 × 94 • IB 20, PP, 2,0 l – 1 pcs, 135 × 102 × 282 Box trays for implant boxes • BT 5, PC, for 2 pcs IB 5 • BT 6, PC, for 2 pcs IB 6 • BT 10, PC, for 1 pcs IB 10 • BT 18, PC, for 1 pcs IB 18 • GH 14, stainless steel, for 3 pcs IB 20 Implant boxes can be ordered seperately. Package quantity 5 pieces. Continued on next page

780

Equipment Biotechnology Molecular Biology 4 5 7 8 AT WW5RD002 Technical Data: Inner tank dimensions, stainless steel: 325 × 300 × 150 mm (l×w×d) Filling volume for operation: Exterior dimensions: Drain: Timer: Power selection switch: Ultrasonic nominal power: Frequency: Current consumption: Mains connection: Weight with accessories: 9.5 liters (contact liquid) 355 × 325 × 305 mm (l×w×h) ball valve G ½, left side 1 – 15 min and T adjustable 20, 40, 60 80 and 100 % max. 200 W 40 kHz 1.0 A 230 V~, (±10%) 50/60 Hz 14.0 kg Article 1 BactoSonic 14.2 Implant boxes for reordering Article Implant box IB 5 2 Implant box IB 6 3 Implant box IB 10 4 Implant box IB 18 5 Implant box IB 20 Box trays for reordering Article 6 Box tray BT 5 7 Box tray BT 6 8 Box tray BT 10 9 Box tray BT 18 AT Box tray GH 14 fits IB 5 IB 6 IB 10 IB 18 IB 20 Order No. 10 07 33290 Pcs/pack Order No. 5 5 5 5 5 10 07 33280 10 07 33281 10 07 33282 10 07 33283 10 07 33284 Order No. 10 07 33296 10 07 33252 10 07 33254 10 07 33263 10 07 30291 PCR Thermocycler RePure Series, JoJo Life Science 3 6 9 co d e b e w The RePure96 Gradient is a state-of-the-art thermocycler both in terms of the operation via the 10.1 inch capacitive touchscreeen and of the temperature control via the eight high-quality Peltier elements. The unit ensures fast and easy working processes with premium results – for more satisfaction and reliable success in your laboratory routines. • Reinforced aluminium module with Eloxal technology guarantees fast heat transfer into the PCR assays. The material is highly resistant to corrosion. • 8 Peltier elements, which have along service life, provide temperature control rates of up to 6°C/sec. • The auto-adjusting pressure heating lid with contact pressure protection allows for clos- ing and tightening of the lid in a single step; it is suitable for PCR tubes and plates of different heights. • The ventilation channel is located at the front and rear of the cycler so that the units can be set up side by side. • The unit has an Android operating system and a capacitive 10.1 inch touchscreen. • The graphic user interface makes the unit extra easy to operate. • 11 integrated standard programming templates for quick and easy generation of individ- ual programmes. • Real-time indication of the running programme and the remaining time so that the file can be edited while the programme is running. • Software update and additional programme storage via USB • Integrated WiFi module; one unit can control several PCR machines via computer or smartphone. Internet connection is required. • Notification via email at completion of the experiment is possible. Article RePure-96 Gradient with 96 × 0.2 ml block, gradient function over 12 rows with 1 to 42°C spread, heating/cooling output: 5°C/sec. / 5°C/sec. RePure-96 Performance with 96 × 0.2 ml block, with 6 temperature zones for targeted temperature differences of max. 5°C from zone to zone, hea- ting/cooling output: 6°C/sec. / 5°C/sec. Order No. 10 56 61073 10 56 61074 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 779

781

Biotechnology Molecular Biology co d e b e w WW5RD004 1 2 3 co d e b e w 780 Equipment PCR Thermocycler Gene Explorer, JoJo Life Science The Gene Explorer Thermocycler systems combine state-of-the-art technology with intu- itive software and premium product quality. All components are high-quality branded products. • All models with gradient function (except model Triple) • Intuitive control via 8 ″ touchscreen • Programme memory for 10,000 programmes • 2 × USB2.0 and 1 × LAN connection • Easy to control via a computer system • Supports E-mail notification function • Optional GLP report and log-in management for user security • One-click incubation function, 11 standard programme templates • Heating lid with contact pressure limiter Model series Gene Explorer Basic • Fixed temperature control block formats: 96 × 0.2 ml, 96 × 0.2 ml + 77 × 0.5 ml, 60 × 0.5 ml or size-384 PCR plate • Max. heating output 5°C/s, max. max. cooling output 4°C/s • Temperature control via 6 high-quality Peltier elements • Block homogeneity P±0.2°C / block temperature accuracy P±0.1°C Model series Gene Explorer Advanced • Exchangeable temperature control block formats: 96 × 0.2 ml, 96 × 0.2 ml + 77 × 0.5 ml, • 60 × 0.5 ml, size 384 PCR plate or double block 2 × 48 × 0.2 ml • Max. heating output 5°C/s, max. max. cooling output 4°C/s • Temperature control via 8 high-quality Peltier elements • Block homogeneity P±0.2°C / block temperature accuracy P±0.1°C Model series Gene Explorer Triple • Fixed three-block system: 3 × 32 × 0.2 ml • Temperature gradient over 8 rows per block (GE Triple Grad.) • Max. heating output 4.5°C/s, max. max. cooling output 4°C/s • Temperature control via 3 high-quality Peltier elements • Block homogeneity P±0.3°C / block temperature accuracy P±0.2°C Article 1 Gene Explorer Basic 96 graded with block 96 × 0.2 ml Gene Explorer Basic 96/77 graded with universal block 96 × 0.2 ml / 77 × 0.5 ml Gene Explorer Basic 384 graded with block 384 PCR plate 2 Gene Explorer Advanced 96 graded with block 96 × 0.2 ml Gene Explorer Advanced 96/77 graded with universal block 96 × 0.2 ml / 77 × 0.5 ml Gene Explorer Advanced 60 graded with block 60 × 0.5 ml Gene Explorer Advanced 384 graded with block 384 PCR plate Gene Explorer Advanced D48 graded with double block 2 × 48 × 0.2 ml 3 Gene Explorer Triple with triple block 3 × 32 × 0.2 ml Gene Explorer Triple graded with triple block 3 × 32 × 0.2 ml, with gradient function Order No. 10 56 60094 10 56 60605 10 56 60607 10 56 60007 10 56 60604 10 56 60493 10 56 60494 10 56 60043 10 56 60044 10 56 60495 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

782

Equipment UV Sterilisation Cabinet for PCR Preperation, JoJo Life Science The UV sterilisation cabinet is a convenient space for setting up PCR reactions in an en- vironment free of nucleic acids for limiting the contamination of PCR reactions. A low-cost alternative to a clean-room, the sterilisation cabinet features powerful UV lamps which denature nucleic acids in 5 to 30 minutes, rendering them unfit for amplifi- cation. White light ensures excellent visibility when working in the cabinets. The UV lamps are time-controlled; the cabinet doors have safety switches which switch the UV lamps off automatically when the doors are opened. Article UV sterilisation cabinet Mini with timer four UV lamps and white light, without collecting tray, 27 × 53 × 32 cm UV sterilisation cabinet Midi with timer four UV lamps and white light, without collecting tray, 42.5 × 53 × 39 cm UV sterilisation cabinet Maxi with timer four UV lamps and white light, without collecting tray, 60 × 53 × 41 cm White collecting tray for liquids 68 × 54 cm Yellow collecting tray for radioactive material 68 × 54 cm Disposable linings for collecting trays 68 × 54 cm, pack = 25 pcs. Order No. 10 56 61058 10 56 61056 10 56 61054 10 56 61101 10 56 61102 10 56 61103 Biotechnology Molecular Biology co d e b e w WW5RD007 Chemiluminescence Documentation Systems, JoJo Life Science Chemiluminescence documentation systems chemiLITE and chemiPRO Accurate Western-Blot and gel data is the precondition for great research. With so many ways to image chemiluminescence, fluorescence, and visible dyes, you need to know which imaging systems capture real results. We offer both an entry-level chemilumines- cence documentation system and complete solutions for chemiluminescence and fluo- rescence western blot images. co d e b e w WW5RD009 Article 1 chemiLITE chemiluminescence imaging system for blots of up to 11 × 8 cm incl. software for imaging and analy- sis 2 chemiPRO chemiluminescence imaging system for blots of up to 30.5 x 22.7 cm incl. software for imaging and analysis. Optional UV transilluminator, blue and white light, RGB and nIR fluorescence applications. 3 chemiPRO-XL chemiluminescence imaging system for blots of up to 34.5 x 27.6 cm incl. software for imaging and analysis. Optional UV transilluminator, blue and white light, RGB and nIR fluorescence applications. 4 chemiPRO-XS chemiluminescence imaging system for blots of up to 15 × 12 cm incl. software for imaging and analy- sis. Optional UV transilluminator, blue and white light, RGB and nIR fluorescence applications. Order No. 10 56 61340 10 56 61373 10 56 61526 10 56 61527 1 2 Please enter webcode WW5RD009 to see more variants in our online catalogue. 3 4 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 781

783

Biotechnology Molecular Biology Equipment Chemilumines-/Fluorescence Documentation Systems, JoJo Life Science JoJo ChemiScope chemilumines/fluorescence documentation systems The ChemiScope series features the latest detection system and an interactive computer program. It provides gel documentation, documentation with visible light, RGB fluores- cence and chemiluminescence imaging applications. With its frozen high-performance camera, the ChemiScope series can detect even weak signals. It offers high sensitivity and a large linear area. Article ChemiScope 6200 System with frozen CCD camera, 6.05 megapixel, 16 bit, QE: p75%, Order No. 10 56 61482 motorised F0.8 lens, image capture and analysis software. PC required! ChemiScope 6200 Touch System with frozen CCD camera, 6.05 megapixel, 16 bit, QE: p75%, motorised F0.8 lens, image capture and analysis software,10- inch-touch industrial PC UVSmart™ UV Transilluminator (302 nm) Super flat blue LED Transilluminator (470 nm) Super flat white LED Transilluminator (470 nm) Filter wheel, 8 slots UV light excitation 365 nm Detection 460 nm / 30 F, detects UV light of excited stains Blue light excitation 470 nm Detection 525 nm / 30 F, detects blue light of excited stains Green light excitation 530 nm Detection 585 nm / 20 F, detects green light of excited stains Red light excitation 630 nm Detection 690 nm / 45 F, detects red light of excited stains Near-IR excitation 660 nm Detection 715 nm / 30 F, detects near-IR light of excited stains Near-IR excitation 770 nm Detection 810 nm / 40 F, co d e b e w WW5RD011 10 56 61484 10 56 61485 10 56 61486 10 56 61487 10 56 61488 10 56 61489 10 56 61490 10 56 61491 10 56 61492 10 56 61493 10 56 61494 detects near-IR light of excited stains Please enter the webcode WW5RD011 to see the other variants in our online catalogue. Gel Documentation Systems, JoJo Life Science Gel documentation systems microDOC, gelLITE, gelONE and gelPRO Gel documentation is a fundamental component of electrophoretic analysis. We offer a range of gel documentation systems suitable for conventional ethidium bromide dyed DNA as well as for state-of-the-art alternatives to ethidium bromide. With 5 model series from the budget microDOC basic to the powerful gelPRO system, we offer the solution for any application and requirement. Article 1 microDOC Basic gel documentation system 2 microDOC gel documentation system with 24.1 Megapixel digital camera incl. 24.1 Megapixel camera and touchscreen control 3 gelLITE gel documentation system gelLITE darkroom, 302 nm UV transilluminator 20 × 20 cm, UV filter, camera and software for imaging and analysis 4 gelONE gel documentation system gelONE darkroom, 302 nm UV transilluminator 20 × 24 cm, UV filter, camera, touchscreen control, software for imaging and analysis 5 gelPRO gel documentation system gelPRO darkroom, 302 nm UV transilluminator 25 × 30 cm, UV Order No. 10 56 60884 10 56 61041 10 56 61525 10 56 61026 10 56 60803 filter, software for imaging and analysis Please enter the webcode WW5RD010 to see the other variants in our online catalogue. WW5RD010 co d e b e w 1 4 782 2 3 5

784

Biotechnology Molecular Biology Equipment Gel Documentation Systems, JoJo Life Science JoJo GenoSens gel documentation systems The gel documentation and analysis system of the GenoSens series is designed for evi- dencing and documenting nucleic acids and proteins. It is equipped with a highly sensitive high-resolution scientific CCD camera which allows the device to register extremely weak signals. The automatic control and intuitive software make the complex process of image capturing easier, which increases the efficiency of the experiments. co d e b e w WW5RD012 Article GenoSens 2200 System Digital camera, 5.2 megapixel, QE: p82%, F1.2 motorised lens, UV Smart™ ultra-flat UV transilluminator (302 nnm), 590 nm filter, image capture and analysis software. PC required! GenoSens 2200 Touch System Digital camera, 5.2 megapixel, QE: p82%, F1.2 motorised lens, UV Smart™ ultra-flat UV transilluminator (302 nnm), 590 nm filter, image capture and analysis software, 10-inch touch industrial PC. Super flat blue LED Transilluminator (470 nm) Super flat white LED Transilluminator (470 nm) Filter wheel, 8 slots UV light excitation 365 nm Detection 460 nm / 30 F, detects UV light of excited stains Blue light excitation 470 nm Detection 525 nm / 30 F, detects blue light of excited stains Green light excitation 530 nm Detection 585 nm / 20 F, detects green light of excited stains Red light excitation 630 nm Detection 690 nm / 45 F, detects red light of excited stains Near-IR excitation 660 nm Detection 715 nm / 30 F, detects near-IR light of excited stains Near-IR excitation 770 nm Detection 810 nm / 40 F, Order No. 10 56 61496 10 56 61498 10 56 61486 10 56 61487 10 56 61488 10 56 61489 10 56 61490 10 56 61491 10 56 61492 10 56 61493 10 56 61494 detects near-IR light of excited stains Please enter the webcode WW5RD012 to see the other variants in our online catalogue. Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 783

785

Biotechnology Electrophoresis co d e b e w WW5RD006 co d e b e w WW5RD005 784 Chambers, Accessories Electrophoresis Chambers OmniPAGE, JoJo Life Science omniPAGE vertical electrophoresis systems The perfect unit for routine vertical electrophoresis with pre-cast or hand-cast gels. • Molded tank for leak-proof running • Simple clamping system for tight seal between the buffer chambers • Exchangeable modules including electro blotting module, high-intensity electroblotting module, and capillary IEF module available • Only one internal module for gel casting and for running – no transfer of glass plates during gel casting Comprised in the scope of delivery: tank with electrodes and safety lid, internal running module, 2 glass plates with 1 mm spacers, 2 slotted glass plates, 2 combs thickness 1 mm, 1 pair of connecting cables Article omniPAGE Mini for gels 10 × 10 cm equipment for 2 gels omniPAGE Mini for gels 10 × 10 cm equipment for 2 gels, with pouring base omniPAGE Mini for gels 10 × 10 cm equipment for 2 gels, with pouring base and additional pouring stand omniPAGE Mini for gels 20 × 10 cm equipment for 2 gels omniPAGE Mini Wide for gels 20 × 10 cm equipment for 2 gels, with pouring base omniPAGE Mini Wide for gels 20 × 10 cm equipment for 2 gels, with pouring base and additional pouring stand omniPAGE WAVE Maxi for gels 20 × 20 cm equipment for 2 gels omniPAGE WAVE Maxi for gels 20 × 20 cm equipment for 2 gels, with pouring base omniPAGE WAVE Maxi for gels 20 × 20 cm equipment for 2 gels, with pouring base and additional pouring stand Order No. 10 56 61518 10 56 60780 10 56 60823 10 56 61530 10 56 61531 10 56 61532 10 56 61529 10 56 60887 10 56 60819 Please enter the webcode WW5RD006 to see the other variants in our online catalogue. Electrophoresis Chambers MultiSUB, JoJo Life Science MultiSUB horizontal gel-electrophoresis systems The MultiSUB series offers the most versatile solution for horizontal DNA and RNA aga- rose gel electrophoresis currently available on the market. • 5 model sizes for more flexibility • Exact matches for the required gel sizes and sample numbers • Low buffer volume and different try sizes per unit • Easy to use, leak-proof “plug and go” gel casting dams Comprised in the scope of delivery: chamber with platinum electrodes and safety lid, UV gel tray, 2 combs thickness 1 mm, 1 pair of gel casting dams, 1 pair of connecting cables Article MultiSUB Mini7 Tray 7 × 7 cm, 8-samples combs MultiSUB Mini10 Tray 7 × 10 cm, 8-samples combs MultiSUB MiniDuo Tray 7 × 7 cm and 7 × 10 cm, 8-samples combs MultiSUB Midi7 Tray 10 × 7 cm, 16-samples combs MultiSUB Midi10 Tray 10 × 10 cm, 16-samples combs MultiSUB MidiDuo Tray 10 × 7 cm and 10 × 10 cm, 16-samples combs MultiSUB Choice7 Tray 15 × 7 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB Choice10 Tray 15 × 10 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB Choice15 Tray 15 × 15 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB ChoiceTrio Tray 15 × 7 cm, 15 × 10 cm and 15 × 15 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB ChoiceStretch20 Tray 15 × 20 cm, 4 × 28-samples combs MultiSUB ChoiceStretch25 Tray 15 × 25 cm, 4 × 28-samples combs MultiSUB Maxi10 Order No. 10 56 60811 10 56 60812 10 56 60017 10 56 61086 10 56 61302 10 56 60779 10 56 60813 10 56 60814 10 56 60815 10 56 60018 10 56 61500 10 56 60896 10 56 61501 Continued on next page

786

Biotechnology Electrophoresis 2 4 co d e b e w WW5RD001 1 3 5 Chambers, Accessories Article Tray 20 × 10 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB Maxi15 Tray 20 × 15 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB Maxi20 Tray 20 × 20 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB Maxi25 Tray 20 × 25 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB MaxiDuo Tray 20 × 10 cm and 20 × 20 cm, 20-samples combs MultiSUB Screen16 Tray 26 × 16 cm, 6 × 28-samples combs and gel pouring stand MultiSUB Screen24 Tray 26 × 24 cm, 6 × 28-samples combs and gel pouring stand MultiSUB Screen32 Tray 26 × 32 cm, 6 × 28-samples combs and gel pouring stand MultiSUB ScreenTrio Tray 26 × 16 cm, 26 × 24 cm and 26 × 32 cm, 6 × 28-samples Order No. 10 56 61502 10 56 61503 10 56 61504 10 56 61505 10 56 61506 10 56 61507 10 56 61115 10 56 60020 combs and gel pouring stand Please enter the webcode WW5RD005 to see the other variants in our online catalogue. Blotting Papers, Equipment Blotting Chambers, JoJo Life Science Electroblotting is a technique for immobilising proteins or for nucleic acid separation on a solid membrane support. The samples are then detected with specific antibodies, ligands or nucleic acid probes that bind individual proteins or nucleic acid sequences. We offer three types of systems: the modular electroblotters, tank transfer systems and semi-dry transfer systems. omniBLOT blotter • Mini-System transfers up to 4 Mini gels, Maxi-System up to 4 Maxi gels, 8 Mini Wide and 16 Mini gels • Complete runtime flexibility from overnight to just a few hours • Cool Pack for low-cost cooling for high-intensity transfer • Compatible with OmniPage systems omniBLOT blotter, high intensity • Ideal for wet electroblotting of proteins - Western Blotting • Platinum plate electrodes for increased transfer speed • Fold-up cassettes for added convenience • Suitable for gel strengths of 0.25 to 3 mm • Compatible with OmniPage systems electroBLOT blotter • Ideal for wet electroblotting of proteins - Western Blotting • Up to five gel-blot cassettes can be used in parallel • Fold-up cassettes for added convenience • Suitable for gel strengths of 0.25 to 3 mm Semi-Dry blotter • Fast transfer times • Western-, Southern- and Northernblots • Economical transfers thanks to very small buffer volumes • Screw-on lid • Gels of a thickness between 0.25 and 10 mm can be blotted • Even heat distribution • Electrodes with a long service life incl. 3 cassettes incl. 4 cassettes incl. 4 cassettes Article 1 OmniBlot Mini, 10 × 10 cm blotting chambers 2 OmniBlot Mini Wide, 20 × 10 cm blotting chambers OmniBlot Maxi, 20 × 20 cm blotting chambers 3 omniPAGE Blot Mini, 10 × 10 cm High intensity system including tank and lid, 2 cassettes, 8 fibre pads, cool pack WAVE Sub Blot, 20 × 20 cm High intensity system 4 Electro Blot Mini, 10 × 10 cm Five Position Electro Blot Maxi, 20 × 20 cm Five Position 5 Semi-Dry Mini, 10 × 10 cm System Semi-Dry Maxi, 20 × 20 cm System including tank and lid, 1 cassette, 6 fibre pads, cooling coil incl. 5 cassettes incl. 5 cassettes Please enter the webcode WW5RD001 to see the other variants in our online catalogue. Order No. 10 56 61519 10 56 61520 10 56 61521 10 56 61523 10 56 61524 10 56 61522 10 56 61091 10 56 61060 10 56 60830 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 785

787

Biotechnology Electrophoresis co d e b e w WW6PB010 co d e b e w WW2NY392 Blotting Papers, Equipment Blotting Papers, Hahnemühle Recommended for blotting techniques with gels, such as southern, northern and western blots and semidry blotting of proteins • Made from ultrapure raw materials, entirely without additives, to ensure that no contam- ination of gels and membranes will occur during the transfer steps • Uniform capillary strength and even transfer of liquids • High wet strength for safe handling. Technical specifications: Grade BP002 BP003 BP005 Grade Surface smooth smooth smooth Properties medium absorbency medium absorbency high absorbency Size mm 460 × 570 580 × 600 580 × 600 580 × 600 BP002 BP002 BP003 BP005 Other sizes on request. qpore Transfer Membranes, neoLab® Thickness Weight 0.35 mm 0.9 mm 1.5 mm 192 g/m2 320 g/m2 570 g/m2 Order No. 10 15 94657 10 15 95860 10 15 95861 10 15 95862 PU Sheet/Pack 100 100 50 25 qpore transfer membrane, NC qpore transfer membranes made of NC are suitable for a large range of applications: western, northern and southern blotting, protein-dotblots and nucleic acid detection. The transfer membranes are very robust and hydrophobic. With low background for increased sensitivity. Pore size Order No. PU Dimensions roll mm 300 × 3000 300 × 3000 Dimensions mm 100 × 100 100 × 100 100 pcs. 100 pcs. 10 01 60000 10 01 60001 10 01 60049 10 01 60050 qpore transfer membrane, PVDF qpore transfer membranes made of PVDF are suitable for a large range of applications: western, northern and southern blotting, protein-dotblots and nucleic acid detection. The transfer membranes are very robust and hydrophobic. With low background for increased sensitivity. Pore size Order No. Dimensions roll mm 300 × 3000 300 × 3000 10 01 60002 10 01 60003 µm 0.20 0.45 0.22 0.45 µm 0.20 0.45 co d e b e w WW5RD003 Power Supply Units Power Supplies, JoJo Life Science Power packs for electrophoresis and blotting Whether you need power supply for routine horizontal DNA agarose gel routing electro- phoresis, or for technically demanding technologies for SSCP analysis within a large-for- mat vertical or first-dimensional IEF with IPG strips: Our extensive portfolio of power packs offers the appropriate unit for your requirements. nanoPAC-Mini power packs The new and improved series of nanoPAC Mini powerpacks comprises ultra-compact, low-cost units ideal for use with DNA/RNA (horizontal) and protein (vertical) electrophore- sis systems. powerPRO 5 output power packs Designed for the supply of horizontal MultiSUB and vertical OmniPAGE electrophoresis tanks, the power packs of the PowerPro series are highly versatile. Each power pack has a 2.4 ″ LCD display. They offer constant voltage, current, and power options as well as pre-programmed or customer-programmed conditions which allow the users to save and repeat their experiments. Thanks to the 5 output pairs, several tanks can be operated in parallel. Article 1 nanoPAC-300P-Mini power supply 300V 400mA 60W - 230V nanoPAC-500-Mini power supply 500V 400mA 120W - 230V 2 powerPRO-300 power supply 300V 700mA 150W - 230V powerPRO-500 power supply 500V 400mA 200W - 230V powerPRO-3AMP power supply 300V 3000mA 300W - 230V Order No. 10 56 60899 10 56 60935 10 56 60781 10 56 60936 10 56 60782 1 2 786

788

UV Illumination Plates/Transilluminators UV Lamps, neoLab® 56 × 150 mm 220 V~, 50 Hz UV lamps Complete with handle, connecting cable and power switch. Outer dimensions (L × W × H): 280 × 86 × 65 mm Filter dimensions: Voltage: Article Type 6 KLU, short and long-wave short and long wave (254 + 366 nm), with switch for selection, rating 6 W Type 12 K, short-wave short wave (254 nm), rating 12 W Type 12 L, long-wave long wave (366 nm), rating 12 W Biotechnology Electrophoresis co d e b e w WW2NY071 Order No. 30 01 25062 30 01 25066 30 01 25067 Accessories Article Table stand, fits type 6 and 12 Order No. 30 01 25063 UV-Transiluminators, JoJo Life Science Our transilluminators are available in the sizes 21 × 21 cm and 21 × 26 cm. The transillu- minators have a large surface which makes them a perfect work station for observing and working with fluorescent dyed protein and nucleic acid gels. As a standard, each transilluminator comprises a high/low intensity safety switch and an efficient start switch for fast and flicker-free activation of each of the six 8-Watt UV tubes; a special filter glass keeps undesirable background light to a minimum. All these features ensure maximum contrast and sensitivity so that you can observe also very weak fluores- cent gels. Two models with two wavelengths offer additional flexibility and convenience. nm Wavelength 254 312 365 254/312 254/365 312/365 Dimensions cm 21 × 21 Order No. 10 56 61508 10 56 60817 10 56 61509 10 56 61510 10 56 61511 10 56 61512 26 × 21 Order No. 10 56 60900 10 56 61513 10 56 61514 10 56 61515 10 56 61516 10 56 61517 Blue-Light-Transilluminators, JoJo Life Science JoJo LED blue light transilluminators Many new stains have been developed to replace the conventional method of nucleic acid detection using toxic EtBr. These new stains can be used with wavelengths in the visible blue colour spectrum. This makes the UV light redundant which damages the nu- cleic acid. The 4 blue light transilluminators from our product range are the optimum tools for achieving perfect results with these new stains. Article 1 runVIEW Mini 11.2 × 7.5 cm viewing range, matches MultiSUB Mini and MultiSUB Midi 2 SafeVIEW Mini 15.3 × 15.3 cm viewing range, incl. orange-coloured filter cover 3 SmartBlue 17 × 12 cm viewing range, incl. orange-coloured filter cover, cut-resistant surface 4 Bluevision 200 LED 17 × 13 cm viewing range, incl. hinged orange-coloured filter cover Order No. 10 56 61528 10 56 60841 10 56 60042 10 56 61499 co d e b e w WW5RD013 1 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. co d e b e w WW5RD008 2 4 787

789

Biotechnology Culture Vessels 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWQED031 co d e b e w WWQED032 5 788 Reaction Vessels, Tubes Microcentrifuge Tubes with Lid, BRAND Microcentrifuge tubes made of PP With frosted marking area, subdivisions for approximate volume determination (without microcentrifuge tubes 1.5 ml). Uniform lid membrane thickness ensures trouble-free pierc- ing. Consistent wall thickness. Tight fitting attached lid provides leak-free seal, yet reo- pens easily (microcentrifuge tube 2: without lid). High clarity. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285. Withstand RCF up to 20 000 g (0.5 ml up to 10000 g) at 20°C. Vol. Colour Packing type Order No. O.D. mm 7.9 Height mm transparent 31.4 transparent 10.75 40.8 transparent 10.75 40.8 transparent 10.75 39.5 10.75 40.8 yellow 10.75 40.8 blue 10.75 40.8 green orange 10.75 40.8 amber 10.75 40.8 transparent 10.7 bag of 1000 pcs bag of 500 pcs 6 bags of 500 pcs bags of 2000 pcs bag of 500 pcs bag of 500 pcs bag of 500 pcs bag of 500 pcs bag of 500 pcs 41.15 bag of 500 pcs PU pc/Pack 1000 500 3000 2000 500 500 500 500 500 500 10 49 80507 29 49 80500 29 49 80502 10 49 78505 29 49 80521 29 49 80522 29 49 80523 29 49 80524 29 49 80525 10 49 80550 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. ml 0.5 1 1.5 1.5 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3 2.0 1.5 ml, lid with lid closure Made of PP. Free of RNase, DNase, DNA and endotoxins. lid closure to achieve especial- ly effective sealing and prevent accidental opening. Frosted marking area, subdivisions for approx. volume determination. RCF max. 30000 (at 20°C, for 20 min), outer-Ø 10.7 mm, height 38.8 mm. 1 bag = pieces. Article 4 1.5 ml, lid with lid closure ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 10 49 80540 PU pc/Pack 1000 Screw Cap Micro Tubes, BRAND Screw cap micro tubes are ideal for storage of serums and blood samples, and for boiling, configuration, etc. Features: • Available in different formats, designs and quality grades. • Micro tubes of PP and screw caps of PE or PP are precisely matched to ensure a secure seal. Available screw caps: with sealing cone, with silicone seal or with tamper-evident screw cap with silicone seal. • Cap inserts for coding, available in a variety of colors. • Fast opening and closing with 1¼ turns of the cap. • Micro tubes with ring stands (self-standing) can be placed in suitable racks without the use of both hands. • Micro tubes without ring stands can be centrifuged at up to an RCF of 17000 at 20°C, for 20 min. 5 • Dimensions: outer dia.11 mm, height 47 mm. Micro tubes (PP), attached lip seal screw cap (PE) with sealing cone Non-sterile, non-graduated. Colored cap inserts for identification (optional). Withstands -90°C to 100°C. Volume Version with stand ring with stand ring without stand ring with stand ring without stand ring Order No. 29 49 80700 29 49 80701 29 49 80702 29 49 80703 29 49 80704 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Continued on next page ml 0.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible.

790

6 Reaction Vessels, Tubes Micro tubes (PP), attached screw cap (PP) with seal (SI) Non-sterile, graduated. With frosted marking area. Cap inserts in different colors for iden- tification (optional). Withstands -196°C to 121°C. Biotechnology Culture Vessels Graduation up to ml - 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 Version Order No. 29 49 80710 with stand ring 29 49 80711 with stand ring without stand ring 29 49 80712 29 49 80713 with stand ring without stand ring 29 49 80714 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) ungraduated Colored cap inserts for micro tubes screw cap 7 Colour Order No. 29 49 80720 29 49 80721 29 49 80722 29 49 80723 29 49 80724 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 6 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 8 Micro tubes (PP), screw cap (PP) with seal (SI) Sterile (SAL 10-6) with cap, graduated. With frosted marking area. Separately available: colored cap inserts (PP) for identification. Withstands -196°C to 121°C. DNA, DNase, and RNase-free, endotoxin-free, non-mutagenic, non-toxic. 7 Graduation up to ml without 1 1 1.2 1.2 Version Order No. 29 49 80750 with stand ring 29 49 80751 with stand ring without stand ring 29 49 80752 29 49 80753 with stand ring without stand ring 29 49 80754 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) non-graduated Micro tubes (PP), without cap Non-sterile, graduated. With frosted marking area. Cap inserts available in different colors (optional) for identification. Withstands -196°C to 121°C. O.D. mm 13 13 13 13 13 Height mm 44 44 44 44 44 Grad. up to ml without 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 Version Order No. with stand ring with stand ring without stand ring with stand ring without stand ring 29 49 80730 29 49 80731 29 49 80732 29 49 80733 29 49 80734 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 8 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) non-graduated Colored screw caps for micro tubes (PP) 9 Colour Volume ml 0.51) 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 white blue red green yellow Volume ml 0,51) 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 Vol. ml RCF max. × g 0.51) 17000 17000 1.5 20000 1.5 17000 2.0 2.0 20000 white blue red green yellow Order No. 29 49 80740 29 49 80741 29 49 80742 29 49 80743 29 49 80744 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 9 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 789 Continued on next page

791

Biotechnology Culture Vessels 1 2 3 Reaction Vessels, Tubes Micro tubes, bulk tamper-evident screw cap (PP), sterile (SAL 10-6) or non-sterile PP, graduated, screw cap PP. Frosted marking area. Operating range: -196°C to +121°C. Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285. Sterile: DNA, DNase and RNase-free, endotoxin-free, non-mutagenic, non-toxic. Available separately: colored tamper-evident screw caps. Vol. RCF max. × g ml 1 0.51) 17000 O.D. Height mm 13 mm 44 Version Grad. up to ml ohne self-standing, sterile 1 1.5 17000 1 1.5 20000 1 2 1 2 17000 20000 2 0.51) 2 1.51) 2 1.51) 2 21) 2 21) 13 13 13 13 44 44 44 44 1) non-graduated 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.2 with screw cap self-standing, sterile with screw cap round bottom, sterile with screw cap self-standing, sterile with screw cap round bottom, sterile with screw cap self-standing, non sterile without screw cap self-standing, non sterile without screw cap round bottom, non steri- le without screw cap self-standing, non sterile without screw cap round bottom, non steri- le without screw cap Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 49 80755 10 49 80756 10 49 80757 10 49 80758 10 49 80759 500 500 500 500 500 10 49 80760 1000 10 49 80761 1000 10 49 80762 1000 10 49 80763 1000 10 49 80764 1000 Lid, non-sterile, tamper-evident screw-cap 3 Colour clear blue green yellow lila red Order No. 10 49 80770 10 49 80771 10 49 80772 10 49 80773 10 49 80774 10 49 80775 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 co d e b e w WWQED026 Microcentrifuge Tubes BIO-CERT®, BRAND 1,5 ml with lid PP. Frosted marking field and gradation for approximate volume reading. Captive lid pro- vides leak-free seal and fits tight, yet is easily re-opened. High transparency. Lid mem- brane dia. 8.5 mm, about 0.3 mm thick. Suitable for centrifuge up to 20,000 RCF at 20°C, 2 bar, acc. DIN EN 285. O.D. × H in mm: 10.75 × 40.8 mm. • Sterile / Free of endotoxins, DNA, RNase, ATP • Produced at the highest purity level to meet the most demanding requirements • All lots tested for sterility and pyrogens (endotoxins) and monitored for DNA-, RNase- and ATP concentration. • Supplied with a Certificate of Analysis Article Microcentrifuge tube BIO-CERT®, 1.5 ml with lid ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Packs of 450 as 30 blisters of 15 Order No. 29 49 80400 PU pc/Pack 450 790

792

1 0.2 ml, single, domed cap 0.2 ml, single, flat cap 0.2 ml, single, flat cap 0.2 ml, single, flat cap 0.2 ml, single, flat cap 0.2 ml, single, flat cap 2 0.5 ml, single, flat cap 0.5 ml, single, flat cap 0.5 ml, single, flat cap 0.5 ml, single, flat cap 0.5 ml, single, flat cap colorless colorless pink yellow green blue colorless pink yellow green blue 29 49 81300 29 49 81305 29 49 81301 29 49 81302 29 49 81303 29 49 81304 29 49 81310 29 49 81311 29 49 81312 29 49 81313 29 49 81314 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Reaction Vessels, Tubes PCR Tubes, BRAND BRAND significantly increased their range of ultra-thin disposable products designed spe- cifically for the high demands of PCR. Polymerase chain reaction (PCR) revolutionized molecular biology and is being used today in many different fields that greatly differ from each other, thus requiring many different formats of disposable PCR products. Features: • Manufactured under the most modern clean room conditions in compliance with ISO 14 644-1 class 5 to 8 • DNase-, DNA- and RNase-free • Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285 • High-quality pure plastics without additives • PP, extra-thin, even wall thickness for optimal thermal transfer and short cycle times • Can be universally used in almost all commercially available thermocyclers • Highly transparent flat caps makes them ideal for qPCR • qPCR: products suitable for Real Time PCR PCR single tubes with attached cap PP. 0.2 ml and 0.5 ml PCR tubes with attached caps are compatible with leading thermal cyclers with heated lids. Unique cap design ensures tight fit and helps reduce sample evaporation. The caps are easy to open and close. The various colors of the PCR tubes allow fast sample classification. Version Colour Order No. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 3 Strip of 8 PCR tubes with attached cap strip PP. 8 tube strips (0.2 ml) with attached cap strips. Domed caps facilitate one-handed operation. Easy to use; positive seal. Version Order No. Colorless (1000 tubes total) 29 49 81330 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Bag 125 4 Strip of 8 PCR tubes with detached cap strip PP. 8 connected 0.2 ml tubes. The detached, domed or flat caps are also available in strips of 8. They are easy to open and close without tools. The tubes have a holding strap at one end, and the cover strips on each cap have a small lip on the side for careful, contamina- tion-free opening. The flat caps are suitable for Real Time PCR (qPCR). Optionally avail- able as a combi pack with 250 strips of 8 tubes and caps each (total of 2,000 tubes and caps). Version Colour Order No. PU pc/Bag Strips of 8 PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, without lid Strips of 8 PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, without lid Strips of 8 PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, without lid Strips of 8 PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, without lid Strips of 8 PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, without lid 5 Strips of 8 PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, without lid Strips of 8 PCR lides, domed Strips of 8 PCR lides, domed Strips of 8 PCR lides, domed Strips of 8 PCR lides, domed Strips of 8 PCR lides, domed Strips of 8 PCR lides, flat, qPCR Package with strips of 8 PCR tubes with cap colorless 29 49 81320 29 49 81321 pink 29 49 81322 yellow 29 49 81323 green 29 49 81324 blue 10 49 81325 white colorless 29 49 81340 29 49 81341 pink 29 49 81342 yellow 29 49 81343 green 29 49 81344 blue colorless 10 49 81334 colorless 10 49 81326 strips, plain, qPCR Package with strips of 8 PCR tubes with cap colorless 10 49 81327 strips, domed ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 250 250 Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWQED033 1 2 3 4 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 791 Continued on next page

793

Biotechnology Culture Vessels 1 Reaction Vessels, Tubes Strip of 8 PCR tubes with separate cap strip PP. 12 connected 0.2 ml tubes. The detached, domed caps are also available in strips of 12. The tight-fitting caps help prevent cross-contamination during the PCR process. Version Strips of 12 PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, without lid Strips of 12 PCR lides, domed ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Colour Order No. PU pc/Bag colorless 10 49 81280 colorless 10 49 81290 125 125 Strip of 8 PCR tubes with attached flat individual caps PP. 8 connected 0.2 ml- or 0.15 ml vessels with attached, flat individual caps - ideal pro- tection against contamination. The highly transparent cap makes them ideal for real-time PCR. Available in standard and low-profile versions. White PCR-Strips also available. They provide considerably better results for qPCR and many manufacturer of thermocyclers recommended them! Volume ml Specification Colour Order No. 2 0.2 3 0.2 4 0.15 0.15 10 49 81332 10 49 81316 10 49 81333 10 49 81317 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Standard Standard Low Profile Low Profile colorless white colorless white PU pc/Bag 120 120 120 120 Tube Racks, BRAND 5 Tubes 1.2 ml, rack packed, for 8×12 configuration PP. Ideal for biological tests, such as PCR, cell uptake studies, RIA, EIA, etc. For storing, freezing down to -80°C and transporting reagents and specimens. Compatible with stand- ard microtiter plates, and suitable for sample transferring with multichannel pipettors. Features • 8 × 12 configuration. • Alphanumeric identification system. • Tubes and rack are autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285. • Dimensions: outer Ø 8.8 mm, height 45 mm. • Suitable for storage to -80°C. • Capacity: 1.2 ml (1.1 ml capped). • Individual or 8 strips configurations. • Caps made of PE are not autoclavable Article Material Order No. Rack with 96 individual tubes, non-sterile PP Rack with 12 strips of 8 tubes, non-sterile PP Tubes, single, non-sterile, loose PP Strips of 8 caps, non-sterile, loose PP Caps, single, non-sterile, loose PE Strips of 8 caps, non-sterile, loose PE Rack with grid, non-sterile, empty PP ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 10 10 960 120 960 120 10 29 49 81500 29 49 81510 29 49 81520 29 49 81525 29 49 81530 29 49 81535 29 49 81540 6 Rack of 96 with 0.65 ml or 1.2 ml tubes (with or without coding) Non-sterile, for use with robots Tubes and rack are autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285. Cover mat / strips (TPE) not autoclavable. Tubes, racks, and lids can withstand temperatures as low as -80°C. The seal of the tubes is pressure-tested. Thanks to the stable connection between the mounting plate and the racks, the stackable ANSI/SLAS racks are especially well-suit- ed for use with robots and other automated dispensing systems. Coded tubes (A1 – H12) and rack sides suitable for barcode labels simplify sample organization (not available in the USA). Article Material Order No. Rack with lid with 96 coded 0.65 ml tu- PP 10 49 81565 PU pc/Pack 50 bes Rack with lid with 96 coded 1.2 ml tu- PP 10 49 81566 50 bes ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 6 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWQED043 5 6 792

794

Reaction Vessels, Tubes Micro Test Standard Eppendorf Tube® 3810X, Eppendorf A tube for all applications in molecular biology, chemistry and biochemistry. Perfect seal- ing qualities, excellent chemical stability and optimal construction materials guarantee even better resistance to centrifugal force. • Flat, frosted lid and writing surface on body of tube offer generous labeling area • Easy to open and close thanks to improved lid geometry • Graduation from 0.1 to 1.5 ml on body of tube • Autoclavable when open (121°C, 20 min) • Can be centrifuged at up to 30,000 × g in fixed-angle rotor • Micropestle-compatible Article 1 colorless blue yellow green PCR clean, colorless red Volume ml 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Order No. 29 69 25150 29 69 25177 29 69 25207 29 69 25185 29 69 25193 29 69 25215 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Biotechnology Culture Vessels 1 co d e b e w WWQJ3048 Micro Test Safe-Lock Eppendorf Tube®, Eppendorf The patented hinged lid on these tubes eliminates any danger of leaks. Safe-Lock micro test tubes guarantee absolute safety during work with expensive or toxic samples, radio- active substances or DNA. The 0.5 ml, 1.5 ml and 2.0 ml test tubes have a graduation scale and a writing surface. The 0.5 ml Safe-Lock micro test tube is ideal for all PCR ex- periments. • A small hook on the patented hinged lid clips around the rim of the test tube • Tubes can be autoclaved when open (121°C, 20 min) • Can be opened easily using one hand • Frosted writing surface • The lid hook prevents the tube from opening accidentally (e.g. during heating) • Excellent mechanical stability during centrifugation • Graduation scale • Autoclavable micropestle enables resuspension of pellets in 1.5 – 2.0 ml test tubes • Safe-Lock micro test tubes are also available in Eppendorf Biopur® and PCR clean co d e b e w WWQJ3045 quality Colour colorless yellow red blue green ambra Version Eppendorf Quality™ Volume 500 pcs 0.5 ml Order No. 29 69 21023 29 69 21112 29 69 21120 29 69 21139 29 69 21147 29 69 21155 29 69 21708 Version Eppendorf Quality™ Volume 1000 pcs 1.5 ml Version Eppendorf Quality™ Volume 1000 pcs 2.0 ml Order No. Order No. 29 69 20086 29 69 20159 29 69 20167 29 69 20175 29 69 20183 29 69 20191 29 69 21694 29 69 20094 29 69 20205 29 69 20213 29 69 20221 29 69 20230 29 69 20248 29 69 21686 (light protection) Color assortment ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Assortment of yellow, red, blue, green and colorless. Micro Test Safe-Lock Eppendorf Tube®, PCR clean, Eppendorf All “PCR clean” products are clean-room manufactured in automatic processes. Only trained staff in special protective suits are allowed to enter this manufacturing area, which is isolated from all other areas. • Free of DNase and RNase • Free of contaminating nuclein acids, primarily human DNA. • Free of PCR inhibitors • Certificate available upon request • Colorless co d e b e w WWQJ3047 Article Safe-Lock Eppendorf tubes, PCR clean, 0.5 ml Safe-Lock Eppendorf tubes, PCR clean, 1.5 ml Safe-Lock Eppendorf tubes, PCR clean, 2.0 ml ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 29 69 23301 29 69 23328 29 69 23344 PU pc/Pack 500 1000 1000 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 793

795

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWQJ3046 co d e b e w WWQJ3059 Reaction Vessels, Tubes Safe-Lock Micro Test Tubes, Biopur®, Eppendorf This highest biological purity category is achieved by a fully automatic production process under clean-room conditions and the subsequent environmentally-friendly b-sterilization. • Sterile • Free of pyrogen, RNase, DNA and ATP • Monitored and certified by and external lab • Colorless Article Biopur® Safe-Lock test tubes, 0.5 ml Biopur® Safe-Lock test tubes, 1.5 ml Biopur® Safe-Lock test tubes, 2.0 ml ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 29 69 21570 29 69 21589 29 69 21597 PU pc/Pack 50 100 100 Micro Test Tubes, PCR clean, Eppendorf The DNA LoBind Tube finally provides the genomics user with the certainty that sample loss of genetic material caused by interaction with the plastic surface of the tube will be insignificant. With the combination of the purest selected types of polypropylene and specially developed production technologies, a tube has been developed that ensures nearly 100% recovery of DNA/RNA. A comparison of the recovery rates of various providers shows that the DNA LoBind Tube has the lowest loss rate. Particularly with high salt concentrations, the difference in com- parison to traditional tubes is great. The tube is predestined for sample preparation in the genomics area without a loss of quality - and that all in PCR clean purity. • Less than 1% loss of DNA/RNA at low concentrations and critical conditions (high salt, short DNA-fragments (<150 bp) • Free of surface coating, e.g. silicone • Free of DNA, DNase, RNase and PCR inhibitors (PCR clean) • Special PP type manufactured under optimized conditions • Available as 0.5 ml, 1.5 ml and 2.0 ml Safe-Lock tubes • High centrifugation transparency • High degree of transparency Article DNA LoBind tubes, 0.5 ml DNA LoBind tubes, 1.5 ml DNA LoBind tubes, 2.0 ml DNA LoBind tubes, 5.0 ml DNA LoBind tubes, 15.0 ml DNA LoBind tubes, 50.0 ml Order No. 29 69 08035 29 69 08051 29 69 08078 10 69 08310 10 69 22208 10 69 22232 PU pc/Pack 250 250 250 200 200 200 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Micro Test Protein LoBind® Tubes, PCR clean, Eppendorf With this recently developed Eppendorf tube type, for the first time Eppendorf offers problem-free handling with the tiniest volumes / concentrations of a variety of proteins. Whereas previously, preliminary handling of tubes by saturation with BSA or siliconization was required in order to guarantee the recovery of the proteins in the plastic tube, the new protein LoBind Tube from Eppendorf offer real advantages. Recovery rates of more than 99% are now achievable . Enzyme-activities, for example, are not reduced by this tube, and denaturing effects caused by interaction with the surface are almost completely ex- cluded. All of these properties are possible without the undesired side-effects of a surface coating. • Minimum protein loss (less than 3%, BSA 1 µg/ml) • Free of surface coating, e.g. silicone • Free of DNA, DNase, RNase and PCR inhibitors (PCR clean)1) • Special polypropylene type manufactured under optimization processing conditions • Available as 0.5 ml, 1.5 ml and 2.0 ml Safe-Lock tubes • High degree of centrifugations durability • High degree of transparency Continued on next page 794

796

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Order No. 29 69 08094 29 69 08116 29 69 08132 10 69 08302 10 69 22216 10 69 02240 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 200 200 co d e b e w WWQJ3052 Reaction Vessels, Tubes Article Protein LoBind tubes, PCR clean, 0.5 ml Protein LoBind tubes, PCR clean, 1.5 ml Protein LoBind tubes, PCR clean, 2.0 ml Protein LoBind tubes, PCR clean, 5.0 ml Protein LoBind tubes, PCR clean, 15.0 ml Protein LoBind tubes, PCR clean, 50.0 ml ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) The term “free of” in connection with the purity levels means that the test proved con- formity within the detection limits (see lot-specific certificate). PCR-Micro Test Tubes, Eppendorf PCR-Micro Test Tubes Original Eppendorf PCR tubes are manufactured to the highest Eppendorf quality stand- ards. These thin-walled polypropylene tubes ensure efficient and homogeneous heat transfer in the sample thanks to the even wall thickness and smooth wall surface. Heat- sealed bags enclosed in boxes sealed with a PCR Clean sticker ensure the highest degree of purity. co d e b e w WWQJ3057 Article PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, colorless Series 8 PCR tubes, 0.2 ml, colorless Row of 120 PCR tubes, 0.5 ml, colorless Thin-walled with hinged lid Order No. 29 69 24332 29 69 24359 10 69 24537 PU pc/Pack 1000 960 500 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PCR tube strips und cap strips • Tubes and strips with 8 micro-seals • Easy, quick sealing of PCR plates and PCR tube strips • Strip can be extended for easy removal • A and H marks at the ends • Autoclavable (121°C, 20 min) • Certified free of human DNA, DNase, RNase, and PCR inhibitors Article 1 Cap Strips, domed, 10 × 12 strips 1 Cap Strips (8-strips), flat, 10 × 12 strips PCR Tube Strips, 0.1 ml, without caps, 10 × 12 strips 2 PCR Tube Strips und Cap Strips, domed, 10 × 12 strips 2 PCR Tube Strips und Cap Strips, flat, 10 × 12 strips Fast PCR Tube Strips, 0.1 ml, without caps, PCR clean, 10 × 12 Order No. 10 69 24839 10 69 24847 10 69 24804 10 69 24812 10 69 24820 10 69 24901 strips Fast PCR Tube Strips und Cap Strips, 0.1 ml, domed, PCR clean, 10 × 12 strips Fast PCR Tube Strips und Cap Strips, 0.1 ml, flat, PCR clean, 10 × 12 strips 10 69 24928 10 69 24910 1 2 Microtubes, Black, neoLab® Black microtubes made of PP for storage of light-sensitive samples and for other appli- cations requiring light-protected storage. The 1.5 ml microtube is graduated at 0.1, 0.5, 1.0 and 1.5 ml. • Conical taper • Temperature-resistant from -80°C to +121°C • Can be centrifuged up to 15,000 × g. Material: PP, autoclavable co d e b e w WW2NY324 Article Microtubes, black Microtubes, black co d e b e w Vol. ml 0.5 1.5 Order No. 10 01 77589 29 01 77590 PU pc/Pack 500 500 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 795

797

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Reaction Vessels, Tubes Microtubes, neoLab® Microtubes with thread, made of natural colored PP for low-wetting surfaces, non-grad- uated. Ideal for nucleic acid or protein work. Dimensions: 44 mm high, 11 mm dia. Temperature-resistant: -196°C to +121°C, autoclavable Max relative centrifugal acceleration: 17.000 g Matching caps: Order No. 29 01 74530 ff or 29 01 74540 ff, see below co d e b e w WW2NY258 co d e b e w WW2NY260 Type Form Order No. Volume ml 0.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 low wetting low wetting low wetting low wetting low wetting ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. self-standing self-standing Bottom conical self-standing Bottom conical 29 01 74712 29 01 74713 29 01 74714 29 01 74715 29 01 74716 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Sealing Caps for Microtubes, neoLab® Screw caps with inner conical seal (LIP SEAL). Material: HDPE Suitable for Order No. 29 01 74590 ff, 29 01 74575 ff, 29 01 74580 ff, 29 01 74700 ff, 29 01 74706 ff, 29 01 74712 ff Article Colour Order No. Sealing cap without hoop Sealing cap without hoop Sealing cap without hoop Sealing cap without hoop Sealing cap without hoop Sealing cap without hoop transparent blue green red yellow white 29 01 74540 29 01 74541 29 01 74542 29 01 74543 29 01 74544 29 01 74545 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w WW4ZG002 Safety-Cap Microcentrifuge Tubes, ratiolab® The new cap sealing of test tubes ensures an extreme tightness which is essential for applications with valuable samples, radioactive materials and DNA. • autoclavable with opened cap at 121°C, 20 min • centrifugable up to 30000 g • free of RNase-, DNase-, DNA-, pyrogens • free of human DNA, endotoxin-free • produced in microbiologically controlled clean room ISO Class 8 146441-1 • optimal tightness due to tight serration at the cap and tight channel at the tube; thereby a low evaporation is guaranteed • secured shut due to form-closed cap lock; accidental opening of the lid during incuba- tion is not possible • high chemical resistance • labeling areas on the cap and tube • graduated for easy determination of the volume • made of Polypropylene (PP) Volume Packing type 4 ml 1 0.5 2 1.5 3 2.0 4 5.0 2 × 500 1 × 1000 2 × 500 1 × 100 Order No. 10 23 05038 10 23 05008 10 23 05108 10 23 05158 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 100 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. co d e co d e b b e e w w 796 123

798

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Reaction Vessels, Tubes Eppendorf Tubes® with Screw- or Snap Cap, Eppendorf High g-safe® stability for fast and safe centrifugation. Ergonomic one-hand operation of the snap cap, excellent closure safety of the screw cap version, large labelling area. co d e b e w WWQJ3073 1 Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml with screw- or snap cap Article Order No. Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml with snap cap in Eppendorf 10 69 19401 Quality™ Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml with screw cap in Eppendorf Quality™ Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml with snap, sterile Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml with screw cap, sterile Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml with snap cap, PCR clean Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml with snap cap, 10 69 22305 10 69 19487 10 69 22321 10 69 19460 10 69 22313 PCR clean Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml, amber (light protection) 10 69 19452 Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml, Biopur (individually wrapped) 10 69 19479 Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml starter pack 10 69 19380 400 tubes (2 packages with 2 bags of 100 each), 2 racks PU pc/Pack 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 50 1 (with 16 locations each), white, 8 universal adapters for ro- tors with bore holes for 15 ml conical tubes, PCR clean, colorless Tube Clip for Eppendorf Tubes® 5.0 ml, Eppendorf Quality™ 10 69 19509 10 1 2 2 Eppendorf Tubes® 25 ml with screw- or snap cap Article Eppendorf Conical Tubes 25 ml with snap cap, Eppendorf Quality 5 bags of 40 tubes each Eppendorf Conical Tubes 25 ml with snap cap, PCR clean 5 bags of 40 tubes each Eppendorf Conical Tubes 25 ml with snap cap, sterile pyrogen-, DNase-, RNase-, and DNA-free, 6 bags of 25 Tubes each Eppendorf Conical Tubes 25 ml with snap cap, Starter Pack PCR clean, 200 tubes, 4 Single Tube Stands, 6 adapters for rotors with bore for 50 ml conical tubes Eppendorf Conical Tubes 25 ml with screw cap, Eppendorf Quality 5 bags of 40 tubes each Eppendorf Conical Tubes 25 ml with screw cap, CR clean 5 bags of 40 tubes each Eppendorf Conical Tubes 25 ml with screw cap, terile pyrogen-, DNase-, RNase-, and DNA-free, 8 bags of 25 tubes each Eppendorf Conical Tubes 25 ml with screw cap, Starter Pack PCR clean, 200 tubes, 4 Single Tube Stands, 6 adapters for rotors with bore for 50 ml conical tubes Accessories Article Tube Rack for 5.0, 15 und 50 ml tubes 12 wells (6 wells for 5.0/15 ml and 6 wells for 50 ml), Order No. 10 69 18405 PU pc/Pack 200 10 69 18413 10 69 18421 10 69 18502 10 69 22410 10 69 22429 10 69 22437 10 69 22500 200 150 1 200 200 200 1 Order No. 10 69 19835 PU pc/Pack 2 10 69 40729 2 4 2 pcs., white, autoclavable Storage Box 3 x 3 for 9 tubes, 2 pcs., height 88.9 mm, 3.5 inch, polypro- pylene, for freezing to -86°C, autoclavable, with lid and alphanumeric code Single Tube Stand for Conical Tubes 25 ml and 50 ml 10 69 19860 white, autoclavable Eppendorf Conical Tubes 15 ml and 50 ml on request co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 797

799

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWZNZ001 Reaction Vessels, Tubes Sterile Centrifuge and Sample Tubes, Greiner Bio-One Sterile centrifuge tubes, PP, conical, graduated, with screw cap Order No. Article Centrifuge tube, 50 ml, 30 × 115 mm with labeling field, 25 packs of 20 Centrifuge tube, 50 ml, 30 × 115 mm with labeling field, with standing ledge, 18 pck. of 25 Centrifuge tube, 15 ml, 17 × 120 mm 10 boxes of 50 Centrifuge tube, 15 ml, 17 × 120 mm 10 boxes of 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 29 47 22726 10 47 60261 29 47 18826 10 47 68271 PU pc/Pack 500 450 500 1000 co d e b e w WW2NY396 neoCulture Cell Culture Centrifuge Tubes, neoLab® Centrifuge tube with white labeling field in excellent transparency and with high chemical resistance of PP. With precise graduation by blue print. • conical 15/50 ml • self-standing 50 ml Article neoCulture centrifuge tubes, PP, 15 ml, conical, sterile neoCulture centrifuge tubes, PP, 50 ml, conical, sterile neoCulture centrifuge tubes, PP, 15 ml, self-standing, sterile Order No. 10 01 08215 10 01 08216 10 01 08217 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 Racks for PCR Tubes, neoLab® Especially designed for 0.2 ml PCR tubes in strips. • for strips with 8 or 12 tubes • for 96 PCR tubes (8 × 12 places) • alphanumeric index • stackable • with transparent and dust-proof lid Material: Polypropylene, autoclavable up to 121°C Article Storage rack with cover Storage rack with cover Storage rack with cover Storage rack with cover Storage rack with cover Colour yellow green orange pink blue Order No. 24 01 22600 24 01 22601 24 01 22602 24 01 22603 24 01 22604 Storage Boxes neoBox-50, neoLab® Stackable storage boxes with 5 × 10 compartments for vessels up to 12 mm in diameter with a maximal height of 46 mm such as HPLC vials, cryo vials, 1.5 and 2 ml test tubes. Tight closing hinged lid. Material: Polypropylene, autoclavable up to 121°C Dimensions: 140 × 86 × 55 mm (W × D × H) Article neoBox-50 neoBox-50 neoBox-50 neoBox-50 neoBox-50 neoBox-50 Storage box with overlap lid for 50 vessels up to 9 mm Ø Colour transparent yellow pink green blue orange transparent Order No. 29 01 21966 29 01 21941 29 01 21942 29 01 21944 29 01 21945 29 01 21946 29 01 21965 co d e b e w WW2NY221 co d e b e w WW2NY225 798

800

Reaction Vessels, Tubes Storage Boxes neoBox-100 made of PP, neoLab® Stackable storage boxes with 10 × 10 compartments for vessels up to 12 mm in diam- eter with a maximal height of 46 mm such as HPLC vials, cryo vials, 1,5 and 2 ml test tubes. • Tight closing hinged lid • Transparent lid, lower parts in various colors Material: Polypropylene, autoclavable up to 121°C Dimensions: 140 × 153 × 55 mm (W × D × H) Article neoBox-100 neoBox-100 neoBox-100 neoBox-100 neoBox-100 neoBox-100 Colour transparent yellow pink green blue orange Order No. 29 01 21967 29 01 21935 29 01 21936 29 01 21937 29 01 21938 29 01 21940 PCR Storage Box, neoLab® Storage rack for PCR tubes and strips 0.2 ml, with transparent lid. What is so special about this box are the 14 rows that enable even strips of 12 to be in- serted and removed easily since the outer row remains free. • For strips with 8 or 12 receptacles • 14 × 14 rows for max. 196 individual receptacles or 12 sets of strips of 8 or 12 • Stackable • Alphanumeric identification on the base Dimensions: 133 × 133 × 30 mm (L × W × H) Material: PP, can be autoclaved up to 121°C Large quantities on request! Article PCR box PCR box PCR box PCR box PCR box PCR box Colour transparent yellow pink green blue orange Order No. 29 01 21910 29 01 21911 29 01 21912 29 01 21913 29 01 21914 29 01 21915 Plates, Dishes BRANDplates® Strip Plates, BRAND With the new strip plates for immunological applications, BRAND extends their product range of BRANDplates® microplates. BRANDplates® 96-well strip plates are very flexible as you use only that number of cavities that you need. Depending on the application, strip plates with and without grid are avail- able. Select from high-binding or medium-binding versions: immunoGrade™ OmmunoGrade™ high binding capacity (high-binding), ideal for IgG and molecules with hydrophobic and hydrophilic regions pureGrade™ pureGrade™ medium binding capacity (medium-binding), somewhat more hydrophobic than immunoGrade™ Strip plates without grid for processing 12 strips of 8 wells each. Individual strip can be removed from the frame and reinserted. The strips are not separable. Strip plates with grid for 12 strips of 8 wells each, F-floor, separable. Individual strips are removable from the plate and can be reinserted. The strips can be divided into 8 individual vessels and can be inserted individually into the frame plate. Type 1 96-well strip plate without grid, transparent, pureGrade™ Bottom sha- pe/Well vol. F/360 µl Order No. 10 49 82300 PU pc/Pack 100 2 96-well strip plate with grid, dividable, F/350 µl 10 49 82301 transparent, pureGrade™ 3 96-well strip plate without grid, transparent, immunoGrade™ F/360 µl 10 49 82305 2 96-well strip plate with grid, dividable, F/350 µl 10 49 82306 100 100 100 transparent, immunoGrade™ PureGrade™ (medium binding) and immunoGrade™ (high binding) standard plates see page 800. Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WW2NY224 co d e b e w WW2NY294 co d e b e w WWQED070 1 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 799

801

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWQED049 1 2 3 4 5 800 Plates, Dishes BRANDplates® microplates, BRAND BRANDplates® – A complete premium-quality line – for every application! Modern research methods require high-quality disposables. BRANDplates® microplates can be used in all important fields of life science. BRANDplates® microplates are available with nine different surfaces. The product line covers a multitude of standard applications (e.g. homogenous assays, screenings) as well as applications in the fields of immunology and cell culture technique. Get yourself familiar with the new range by using the BRAND- plates® selection guide under www.brand.de. BRANDplates® microplates non-treated (sterile or non-sterile) pureGrade™ (medium binding) Non-treated, non-sterile surface. The standard plate for most applications. Particularly applicable for homogenous assays, screening, and in the field of storage. pureGrade™ S Non-treated surface, sterile. Sterilized via ß-radiation. Especially suited for bacteriological assays. Colors, wells and shapes: • 96-, 384- and 1536-well format, transparent, white or black • Standard, UV transparent foil bottom or transparent bottom, Different bottom shapes: • Clearly distinguishable via color code: grey embossed alphanumeric coding for 96-well U-, V-, F-, C-bottom for 96-well format standard plates in white or black • Free from endotoxins (< 0.01 EU/ml), DNase, DNA, RNase, non-cytotoxic (according to • Sterile Products comply with ISO 11137 and AAMI guidelines. A SAL of 10-6 is reached. Supplied individually wrapped with lid. ISO 10993) pureGrade™ Type Order No. Bottom shape/ Well vol. U/330 µl V/360 µl F/350 µl C/350 µl U/330 µl F/350 µl U/330 µl F/350 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/350 µl F/350 µl F/100 µl F/100 µl F/100 µl F/120 µl F/120 µl F/10 µl F/10 µl F/10 µl 1 96-well, transparent 1 96-well, transparent 1 96-well, transparent 1 96-well, transparent 1 96-well, white 1 96-well, white 1 96-well, black 1 96-well, black 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent 3 96-well, transparent, UV-Polymer1) 2 96-well, black/UV-transparent 4 384-well, transparent 4 384-well, white 4 384-well, black 5 384-well, white/transparent 5 384-well, black/transparent 6 1536-well, transparent 6 1536-well, white 6 1536-well, black 10 49 81600 10 49 81601 10 49 81602 10 49 81603 10 49 81604 10 49 81605 10 49 81607 10 49 81608 10 49 81610 10 49 81611 10 49 81614 10 49 81615 10 49 81620 10 49 81621 10 49 81622 10 49 81626 10 49 81627 10 49 81640 10 49 81641 10 49 81642 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) PS with UV-transparent foil bottom, slightly hydrophilized, bottom thickness 25 µm, transmission at 240 nm: 80%. Strip plates with pureGrade™ (medium binding) surface see page 799. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 pureGrade™ S Type 1 96-well, transparent 1 96-well, transparent 1 96-well, transparent 1 96-well, transparent 1 96-well, white 1 96-well, black 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent 4 384-well, transparent 4 384-well, white 4 384-well, black 5 384-well, white/transparent 5 384-well, black/transparent 6 1536-well, transparent 6 1536-well, white 6 1536-well, black Bottom shape/ Well vol. U/330 µl V/360 µl F/350 µl C/350 µl F/350 µl F/350 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/100 µl F/100 µl F/100 µl F/120 µl F/120 µl F/10 µl F/10 µl F/10 µl Order No. 10 49 81660 10 49 81661 10 49 81662 10 49 81663 10 49 81665 10 49 81668 10 49 81670 10 49 81671 10 49 81680 10 49 81681 10 49 81682 10 49 81686 10 49 81687 10 49 81700 10 49 81701 10 49 81702 PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Continued on next page

802

Plates, Dishes BRANDplates® microplates non treated (non sterile) immunoGrade™ (high binding) Optimized for the immobilization of IgG, highest binding capacity for molecules with mixed hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions. The surface of choice for the majority of standard ELISAs. hydroGrade™ Strongly hydrophilic, high affinity to hydrophilic molecules like e.g., glycoproteins and peptides, antibodies with predominantly hydrophilic regions and nucleic acids. lipoGrade™ Strongly hydrophobic (lipophilic), immobilization of biomolecules with predominantly hy- drophobic regions. An alternative to the immunoGrade™ surface for the immobilization of molecules, like e.g. lipoproteins or peptides. Colors, wells and shapes: • 96- and 384-well format, transparent, white or black • Standard, transparent bottom, Different bottom shapes: U-, V-, F-, C-bottom for 96-well • Modification via a physical-chemical process, good shelf life at room temperature • Clearly distinguishable via color code: blue embossed alphanumeric coding for 96-well • Free from endotoxins (< 0.01 EU/ml), DNase, DNA, RNase, non-cytotoxic (according to format standard plates ISO 10993) immunoGrade™ Type Order No. Bottom shape/ Well volume U/330 µl V/360 µl F/350 µl U/330 µl U/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/100 µl F/100 µl F/100 µl 7 96-well, transparent 7 96-well, transparent 7 96-well, transparent 7 96-well, white 7 96-well, black 8 96-well, black/transparent 8 96-well, black/transparent 9 384-well, transparent 9 384-well, white 9 384-well, black 10 49 81720 10 49 81721 10 49 81722 10 49 81724 10 49 81727 10 49 81731 10 49 81732 10 49 81740 10 49 81741 10 49 81742 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Strip plates with immunoGrade™ (high binding) surface see page 799. hydroGrade™ Type Bottom shape/Well vol. Order No. 7 96-well, transparent 7 96-well, transparent U/330 µl F/350 µl 10 49 81780 10 49 81782 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. lipoGrade™ Type Bottom shape/Well vol. Order No. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 5 50 50 50 PU pc/Pack 100 100 PU pc/Pack 100 100 Biotechnology Culture Vessels 6 7 8 9 7 96-well, transparent 7 96-well, transparent U/330 µl F/350 µl 10 49 81840 10 49 81842 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. BRANDplates® for Cell Culture (sterile) cellGrade™ Standard surface for the cultivation of adherent cell cultures. PS-surface with different chemical groups, like e.g. carboxyl and hydroxyl groups, that are freely accessible. Sur- face is hydrophilic compared with non-treated PS. cellGrade™ plus For cultivation of fastidious cell cultures. In addition to carboxyl and hydroxyl chemical groups, free amino groups are present on the surface. The surface has a protein-like composition; cells can directly attach and spread out. Cells adhere faster, better rate of yield. Suited for serum reduced cultivation of cells. cellGrade™ premium Poly-D-Lysine-equivalent surface, with analogous results regarding growth performance and cell morphology. Optimal adhesion of cells to the surface reduces cell damage when washing frequently. Surface suited for serum-free and serum-reduced cultivation of cells. Good shelf life at room temperature. inertGrade™ For cultivation of suspension cells. Especially suited for cell cultures, when adhesion is not desired. Optimized surface characteristics reducing cell adhesion and protein adsorp- tion, enzyme and cellular activation is minimized. Stem cells can be prevented from early differentiation. Sterilization with ethylene oxide. Colors, wells and shapes: • 96-, 384- and 1536-well format, transparent, white or black • Sterile according to Ph.Eur. and USP 29, SAL 10-6 • Standard, transparent bottom, Different bottom shapes: U-, V-, F-, C-bottom for 96-well • Clearly distinguishable via color code: orange embossed alphanumeric coding for • Free from endotoxins (< 0.01 EU/ml), DNase, DNA, RNase, non-cytotoxic (according to format 96-well standard ISO 10993) co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 801 Continued on next page

803

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Plates, Dishes cellGrade™ Type Order No. AT 96-well, transparent AT 96-well, transparent AT 96-well, transparent AT 96-well, transparent AT 96-well, white AT 96-well, black 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent 9 384-well, transparent 9 384-well, white 9 384-well, black 5 384-well, white/transparent 5 384-well, white/transparent 5 384-well, black/transparent 5 384-well, black/transparent 6 1536-well, transparent 6 1536-well, white 6 1536-well, black 10 49 81960 10 49 81961 10 49 81962 10 49 81963 10 49 81965 10 49 81968 10 49 81970 10 49 81974 10 49 81971 10 49 81975 10 49 81980 10 49 81981 10 49 81982 10 49 81986 10 49 81988 10 49 81987 10 49 81989 10 49 82000 10 49 82001 10 49 82002 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Bottom shape/ Well volume U/330 µl V/360 µl F/350 µl C/350 µl F/350 µl F/350 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/100 µl F/100 µl F/100 µl F/120 µl F/120 µl F/120 µl F/120 µl F/10 µl F/10 µl F/10 µl PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 5 50 5 50 50 50 50 5 50 5 50 50 50 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. AT AK AL AM 802 cellGrade™ plus Type AT 96-well, transparent 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent cellGrade™ premium Type AT 96-well, transparent 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent inertGrade™ Type AT 96-well, transparent AT 96-well, transparent 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent 2 96-well, white/transparent 2 96-well, black/transparent Bottom shape/Well vol. F/350 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl Order No. 10 49 82022 10 49 82030 10 49 82034 10 49 82031 10 49 82035 PU pc/Pack 50 50 5 50 5 Bottom shape/Well vol. F/350 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl Order No. 10 49 82082 10 49 82090 10 49 82094 10 49 82091 10 49 82095 PU pc/Pack 50 50 5 50 5 Bottom shape/Well vol. U/330 µl F/350 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl F/330 µl Order No. 10 49 81900 10 49 81902 10 49 81910 10 49 81911 10 49 81912 10 49 81913 PU pc/Pack 40 40 40 40 5 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Lids for BRANDplates® microplates To protect samples, reaction batches or cell cultures from both contamination and evap- oration, compatible lids are available for all BRANDplates® microplates. The lids are made of crystal-clear polystyrene. They are optimally matched to the corresponding BRAND- plates® microplates, so that plates with lids can also be stacked. The cut-corner sets the orientation of the lid. For 96-well standard plates, lids with condensation rings are avail- able. Type Order No. AK Lid for 96-well plates AK Lid for 96-well plates AL Lid for 96-well plates + all 384-well plates AM Lid for 1536-well plates ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Condensation Rings yes no no Height mm 8 8 4.5 10 49 82150 10 49 82151 10 49 82152 PU pc/Pack 100 100 50 no 5.5 10 49 82153 50

804

Plates, Dishes BRANDplates® Insert System, BRAND For manual and automated cell and tissue cultivation The BRAND Insert System, co-developed with the Fraunhofer Society, includes the choice of two specialized cell culture plates (24-well standard plate and 6-well special version) and two types of cell culture inserts (with or without Inlet Opening System*) which can also be used in combination. Typical applications for the standard plates are for example co-culture, secretion studies and chemotaxis assays; the special version plates are designed for automated in-vitro preparation of human tissue (3D tissue culture preparation). BRANDplates® Cell culture plates for Insert Strips 24-well Standard Plate The plate includes 24 individually fillable wells that can be fitted with strips of 4 inserts and/or individual inserts. 6-well Specialized Plate The plate has 4 wells connected as one large, elongated well. This well is fitted with a strip of 4 inserts so that all 4 of the inserts in the strip can be supplied with medium at the same time. Features • Innovative special well design with feeding ports arranged at the sides • Manufactured in compliance with ANSI/SLAS standards 1 and 4 • Sterile pursuant to ISO 11 137 and AAMI directives, SAL 10-6 • Not cytotoxic pursuant to ISO 10 993-5, free of endotoxins (< 0.01 EU/ml), free of DNA, DNase and RNase Order information BRANDplates® 24-well Standard Plates or 6-well plates PS. pureGrade™ S or cellGrade™ plus surface, sterile. Each with lid with condensation rings. Shipping unit = 10 (packed individually, with lid). Article 24-well standard plate 6-well plate 24-well standard plate 6-well plate Surface pureGrade™ S pureGrade™ S cellGrade™ plus cellGrade™ plus Order No. 10 49 82880 10 49 82881 10 49 82890 10 49 82891 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 BRANDplates® insert strips and insert system Inserts for the cell culture plates, smooth-walled inserts or inserts with Inlet Opening System* Smooth-walled inserts With smooth walls, for standard applications such as secretion studies, co-cultivation, migration studies, chemotaxis tests, etc. Cell culture inserts with special Inlet Opening System* Inlet Opening System with special inlet channels, for automated in vitro preparation of human tissues. The Inlet Opening System* enables rapid, consistent changing of media, from submersion culture to air-lift culture. The special inlet channels enable adjustment of the medium level without damage to the tissue model. * Patent pending Features • Track-etched PC and PET membranes • 4 different pore sized • Hanging inserts • With guiding ridges for safe positioning in the plates • Sterile pursuant to ISO 11 137 and AAMI directives, SAL 10-6 • Not cytotoxic pursuant to ISO 10 993-5, free of endotoxins (< 0.01 EU/ml), free of DNA, DNase and RNase Insert Strips and plates packed individually or in a system (6-well plates filled with 6 Insert Strips). BRANDplates® Insert Strips smooth-walled or strips with Inlet Opening System* PS. cellGrade™ plus surface, sterile. Strips of 4 inserts each (separable). Shipping unit = 12 strips, packaged individually. Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWQED073 AN AO Version smooth-walled AN smooth-walled smooth-walled smooth-walled AO Inlet Opening System 0.4 Inlet Opening System 1 Inlet Opening System 3 Inlet Opening System 8 * Patent pending co d e b e w Pore size µm 0.4 1 3 8 PU pc/ Pack Membrane PC membrane Order No. 12 10 49 82800 12 10 49 82820 12 10 49 82840 12 10 49 82860 12 10 49 82801 12 10 49 82821 12 10 49 82841 12 10 49 82861 PET membrane Order No. 10 49 82810 10 49 82870 10 49 82811 10 49 82871 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 803

805

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Plates, Dishes BRANDplates® insert system, 6-well plates filled with 6 insert strips PS. cellGrade™ plus surface, sterile. Insert Strips, smooth-walled or with Inlet Opening System*. Each with lid with condensation rings. Shipping unit = 5 (30 strips). Pore size µm 0.4 1 3 8 Version smooth-walled smooth-walled smooth-walled smooth-walled Inlet Opening System 0.4 Inlet Opening System 1 Inlet Opening System 3 Inlet Opening System 8 * Patent pending PU pc/ Pack Membrane PC membrane Order No. 5 10 49 82802 5 10 49 82822 5 10 49 82842 5 10 49 82862 5 10 49 82803 5 10 49 82823 5 10 49 82843 5 10 49 82863 PET membrane Order No. 10 49 82812 10 49 82872 10 49 82813 10 49 82873 co d e b e w WWQED042 co d e b e w WWQED051 804 Deep Well Plates, BRAND The most important application for deep-well plates is sample storage (e.g., in substance libraries). Deep-well plates are also an important component in numerous other applica- tions, e.g., cultivation of microorganisms, extraction of nucleic acids and proteins, screen- ing studies, etc. Essential features of the 96-well deep-well plates made from PP • Free from DNA, RNases, and DNases • High chemical resistance, e.g., against DMSO • Temperature range -80°C to 121°C • According to ANSI/SLAS 1 and 4 • Stackable • Plates can be sealed with adhesive sealing films or self-adhesive mat covers made of PP or aluminium The 1.2 ml low profile model reduces the space requirements by approx. 30%. Article Order No. 96-well Deep well plate, 0.5 ml, PP, non-sterile, standard 29 49 01346 96-well Deep well plate, 1.1 ml, PP, non-sterile, standard 29 49 01350 96-well Deep well plate, 1.2 ml, PP, non-sterile, Low Profile2) 10 49 01340 96-well Deep well plate, 2.2 ml, PP, non-sterile, standard 29 49 01354 96-well Deep well plate, 1.1 ml, PS, non-sterile, standard1) 29 49 01352 96-well Deep well plate, 1.2 ml, elevated skirt 10 49 01342 384-well Deep well plate, 0.3 ml, PS, non-sterile, standard 10 49 01355 Sealing mat for 0.5 ml plates, 96-well, non-sterile 10 49 01358 Sealing mat for 1.1 ml plates, 96-well, non-sterile 29 49 01360 Sealing mat for 1.2 ml plates, 96-well, non-sterile 10 49 01368 Sealing mat for 2.2 ml plates, 96-well, non-sterile 29 49 01362 Sealing mat for 0.3 ml plates, 384-well, non-sterile 10 49 01357 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) not autoclavable, can be used down to -20°C 2) not tested of free from DNA, RNases, and DNases PU pc/Pack 48 24 50 24 32 32 48 50 24 50 24 50 Microtitration Plate, PP, BRAND PP. Non-sterile. Suitable for up to 300 µl. Can be centrifuged in most commercially avail- able centrifuges for microtitration plates. Features • High chemical resistance (e.g. to phenol, chloroform, DMSO). • Optimal sample mixing and recovery using U-bottom. • Autoclavable at 121°C • Alphanumeric code and cut-away corner simplify sample identification and orientation. • Raised rims of the wells to guard against contamination. • Sealing of plates with self-adhesive, DMSO-resistant covering film. PP or aluminium covering films are also suitable. Article Order No. Microtitration plate, U bottom, volume 300 µl, 10 pcs/bag 29 49 01330 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 100

806

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Plates, Dishes Reagent Reservoirs with Cover, PP, BRAND co d e b e w WWQED094 Article Reagent reservoir with cover, PP, 40 ml, graduated, non-sterile Reagent reservoir with cover, PP, 40 ml, graduated, sterile Order No. 10 49 71460 PU pc/Pack 24 10 49 71462 24 co d e b e w WWQJ3053 Deepwell Plates 96 and 384, Eppendorf Get more with these deepwell plates! Unique efficiency in storage, preparation, transport, and mixing of samples. Eppendorf deepwell plates 96 and 384 are made of ultrapure polypropylene. They are warp-resistant, easy to stack, they close easily and reliably, and are resistant to temperature and chemicals. They comply with the requirements of SBS1). Features: • RecoverMax®design: New well design for enhanced efficiency and sample recovery/ identification rate • OptiTrack® matrix: Colours, legibility, and more • g-Safe®: High centrifugal stability • Four qualities: Standard, sterile, DNA/RNA LoBind, Protein LoBind • Automation: Optimum stability, grip, stacking capability, and compliance with SBS standard • Sealing: Planar plate surface allows for multiple sealing Dimensions (W×H×D): 127,8 × 85,5 × 27,1 mm Article 1 Deepwell plate 96/500 µl, standard, white Deepwell plate 96/500 µl, sterile, white Deepwell plate 96/500 µl, DNA LoBind, white Deepwell plate 96/500 µl, protein LoBind, white Deepwell plate 96/1000 µl, standard, white Deepwell plate 96/1000 µl, sterile, white Deepwell plate 96/1000 µl, DNA LoBind, white Deepwell plate 96/1000 µl, protein LoBind, white Deepwell plate 96/2000 µl, standard, white Deepwell plate 96/2000 µl, sterile, white Deepwell plate 96/2000 µl, protein LoBind, white 2 Deepwell plate 384/200 µl, standard, white Deepwell plate 384/200 µl, sterile, white Deepwell plate 384/200 µl, DNA LoBind, white Deepwell plate 384/200 µl, protein LoBind, white Order No. 10 69 01101 10 69 02108 10 69 03104 10 69 04100 10 69 01209 10 69 02205 10 69 03201 10 69 04208 10 69 01306 10 69 02302 10 69 04305 10 69 21102 10 69 22109 10 69 23105 10 69 24101 PU pc/Pack 40 40 40 40 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 40 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) Society for Biomolecular Screening. Other colors available on request. 1 2 We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 805

807

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWQED092 1 2 3 806 Plates, Dishes Cell Culture Inserts Insert 2in1, BRAND • Use Inserts in a hanging or standing position • For 24-, 12- and 6-well plates or culture dishes • Achieve uniform and controlled cell growth due to surface treatment, without coatings The BRAND Insert 2in1 is a cell culture insert used for skin model production, 3D epithe- lium cultures, chemotaxis analyses, transmigration assays, transport and polarity studies, and more. In many cell culture tasks, or when switching from a standing to a hanging position, you can continue to use your current cell culture plates, saving additional validation steps. Thanks to both supporting feet and hooks, you can position the BRAND Insert 2in1 either way. Via its protein-like structure, the cellGrade™ plus surface provides optimal conditions for growing primary keratinocytes and many other cell types. With the practical multipacks, the right number of inserts is always close at hand. They can be opened row by row, so that the remaining inserts stay sterile. Besides the practical benefits, this also reduces waste. Overview • Use in a hanging or standing position • Works with all common 6-, 12-, or 24-well multi-well plates • Suitable for 2D and 3D cell cultures • Surface: cellGrade™ plus • Sterility Assurance Level (SAL) of 10-6 • PC or PET membrane • Pore size: from 0.4 µm and 8.0 µm • Packaged individually or in practical multi-packs Packing type PU pc/Pack 1 Cell culture inserts BRAND Insert 2in1 for 6-well Pore size µm 0.4 0.4 8 8 24 10 49 82740 24 10 49 82741 24 10 49 82746 24 10 49 82747 Membrane PC Order No. 24 × 1 4 × 6 24 × 1 4 × 6 Packing type PU pc/Pack 2 Cell culture inserts BRAND Insert 2in1 for 12-well Pore size µm 0.4 0.4 8 8 48 10 49 82720 36 10 49 82721 48 10 49 82726 36 10 49 82727 Membrane PC Order No. 48 × 1 4 × 9 48 × 1 4 × 9 Packing type PU pc/Pack 3 Cell culture inserts BRAND Insert 2in1 for 24-well Pore size µm 0.4 0.4 8 8 48 10 49 82700 48 10 49 82701 48 10 49 82706 48 10 49 82707 Membrane PC Order No. 48 × 1 4 × 12 48 × 1 4 × 12 PET Order No. 10 49 82750 10 49 82751 10 49 82756 10 49 82757 PET Order No. 10 49 82730 10 49 82731 10 49 82736 10 49 82737 PET Order No. 10 49 82710 10 49 82711 10 49 82716 10 49 82717 PCR Plates and Sealing Films, BRAND BRAND has significantly expanded its product range of extra-thin-wall disposable prod- ucts, which were specially developed to satisfy the demands of PCR applications. Quality features: • Suitable for use in common thermal cyclers • PP, extra-thin uniform wall thicknesses to provide the optimal thermal transfer and short cycle times • 96-well PCR-plates with alphanumeric coding and marks at the cut corner • DNase-, DNA- and RNase-free • Pure, high quality materials - without additives! • Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285 • qPCR: Suitable for real-time PCR Continued on next page

808

Plates, Dishes 1 24- and 48-well PCR plates, no skirt (qPCR) PP, 0.2 ml wells. This plates reduce material costs and allow work on a compact PCR plate even with small sample throughputs. Suitable for the most customary thermocyclers. Quantity Version Colour Order No. wells 24 24 48 48 Standard profile, elevated rim clear Standard profile, elevated rim white Standard profile, elevated rim clear Standard profile, elevated rim white 10 49 81411 10 49 81412 10 49 81415 10 49 81416 PU pc/Pack 40 40 20 20 96-well PCR plates (qPCR) The ultra thin-walled PCR plate design facilitates constant, rapid and precise heat transfer. The smooth vessel interior minimizes the binding of enzymes and nucleic acid to the walls. Raised rims of wells protect against cross-contamination and provide a tight seal in com- bination with the matching sealing mats. 96-well, no skirt PP. 0.2 ml wells. 96-well PCR plates, without skirt, are suitable for the most customary thermocyclers. Version Colour Cut corner Order No. 2 Low Profile clear Low Profile white 3 Standard profile clear Standard profile white 4 Standard profile, elevated rim clear Standard profile, elevated rim white H12 H12 A12 A12 H12 H12 10 49 81366 10 49 81367 10 49 81368 10 49 81369 29 49 81350 10 49 81354 PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50 50 50 96-well, half skirt PP. 0.2 ml wells. 96-well PCR plates, with half skirt can easily be labelled or provided with a bar-code. Version Colour Cut corner Order No. 5 Low Profile clear Low Profile white 6 Low Profile, elevated skirt clear Low Profile, elevated skirt white 7 Standard profile clear Standard profile white 8 Standard profile, elevated rim clear Standard profile, elevated rim white A12 A12 A1 A1 A12 A12 H12 H12 10 49 81371 10 49 81372 10 49 81373 10 49 81374 10 49 81375 10 49 81376 29 49 81400 10 49 81357 PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 96-well, half skirt Suitable for Roche®LightCycler®480 and more thermocyclers. PP. 0.15 ml PCR plates. With half skirt. Alphanumeric coding, black. Available with or without self-adhesive sealing films (polyester, highly transparent, for qPCR). Version Cut corner Order No. 9 Low Profile Low Profile + 50 foils for qPCR 10 49 81364 10 49 81365 Black alphanumeric coding, no more additional marks at cut corners. Co- lour white H12 white H12 PU pc/Pack 50 50 96-well, full skirt PP. 0.2 ml wells. 96-well PCR plates with full skirt are very rigid and particularly suitable for working with automatic pipetting systems. These plates can also be provided with a barcode. Version Cut corner Order No. Colour AT Low Profile Low Profile clear white H1 H1 10 49 81377 10 49 81378 PU pc/Pack 50 50 Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWQED035 1 2 4 5 7 9 3 6 8 AT 384-well PCR plates (qPCR) 384-well, full skirt PP. The 40 µl wells can hold sample volumes of 2 µl to 30 µl. This helps to reduce reagents costs and shortens cycle times. The plates can be filled using multichannel pipettes or robotic systems. Version Colour Cut corner Order No. clear clear A12, H12 A12 29 49 81345 10 49 81347 PU pc/Pack 50 50 AK AK with full skirt, PP with full skirt, PP co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 807 Continued on next page

809

Biotechnology Culture Vessels 1 2 3 4 5 Plates, Dishes 384-well PCR-plates, full skirt Suitable for Roche®LightCycler®480 and more thermocyclers. PP. For qPCR. 0.03 ml wells. The 40 µl wells can hold sample volumes of 2 µl to 30 µl. This helps to reduce rea- gents costs and shortens cycle times. The plates can be filled using multichannel pipettes or robotic systems. Version 1 full skirt, PP Colour Cut corner Order No. white A12, H12 10 49 81358 PU pc/Pack 50 Sealing films, self-adhesive In case the microplates, PCR plates or Deep-well plates need not only to be covered, but also securely sealed, self-adhesive sealing films are available. These film sheets can be easily applied on the plates and removed also without the use of expensive equipment. Order No. Article 2 Sealing films for ELISA, PCR Transparent PP film allows the visual inspection of the samples. Temperature range 29 49 81390 -40°C to +125°C. Single film. Pack of 100 sheets. Article Order No. Sealing films for ELISA, Real-Time-PCR (qPCR) 10 49 81391 PU pc/Pack 100 PU pc/Pack 100 PU pc/Pack 100 Pressure sensitive and highly transparent film made of polyester allows the visual inspec- tion of the samples. Temperatur range: -40°C to +120°C. Single film. Pack of 100 sheets. Article Order No. Sealing films for storage, ELISA, PCR PP. DMSO resistant. Allows visual inspection. Temperatur range: -80°C to +120°C. Sin- 29 49 01366 gle film. Pack of 100 sheets. Sealing Paddle for Sealing Films To securely and easily apply self-adhesive films. The sealing paddle helps to attach the film to the plate with a uniform pressure. Especially suited for plates with raised rim. Article 3 Sealing paddle for sealing films Order No. 10 49 71381 PU pc/Pack 2 Accessories for BRAND PCR products Article Order No. 4 PCR-Box/Rack (yellow, red, green, violet, blue) 10 49 81362 PU pc/Pack 5 PP. Suitable for sample preparation, for keeping and storing 0.2 ml single vessels, 8-strips and 12-strips, and 96-well PCR plates. These racks can also be stacked with- out lids. Withstands temperatures from -80°C to +12°C. Pack of 5. Article Order No. 5 PCR Mini cooler with transparent lid PP. For protecting samples from warming. The mini PCR cooler keeps samples at 4°C for approx. 3 hours. The insulating gel changes from violet to pink at 7°C. Suitable for 0.2 ml single vessels, 8-strips, 12-strips as well as 96-well PCR plates. Pack of 2. 10 49 81260 PU pc/Pack 2 co d e b e w 808 WWQED091 PCR Cap Strips, BRAND Article PCR cap strips of 8, clear, flat PCR cap strips of 8, clear, domed Order No. 10 49 81413 10 49 81414 PU pc/Pack 300 300

810

Plates, Dishes Sealing Films, Self-adhesive, BRAND All sealing films (with exception of rayon films) are thermostable and pressure resistant and are ideal for use with heated lid thermal cyclers. The sealing films are DNA-, RNase- and DNase-free. ELISA, PCR: The transparent PP film allows the visual inspection of the sam- ples. Temperature range -40°C to +125°C ELISA, Real Time PCR: The highly transparent film made of polyester is highly suitable for real time PCR measurements. Allows the visual inspection. Temperature range -40°C to +120°C Aluminum sealing film (roll and single sheets) can be pierced easily with a pipette tip for sample removal. Temperature range -80°C to +120°C Cold storage: Storage ELISA, PCR: For samples containing DMSO, only the highly resistant film should be used in this area. Temperature range -80°C to +120°C Cell and tissue cuture: Gas-permeable films (sterile and non-sterile) are popular for Automation: Fluorescence measurements: Luminescence measurements: growing cells and microorganisms. Made of rayon Temperature range -20°C to +80°C Top side PE, underside PP with adhesive. Easy to pierce with pipette tips. Inertly, chemically constant. Temperature range: -40°C to +90°C. Vinyl, black. Light-absorbing. Temperature range: -40°C to +80°C. Vinyl, white. Light-reflecting. Temperature range: -40°C to +80°C. Application Version Material Order No. ELISA, PCR Polypropylene 29 49 81390 single film ELISA, Real Time PCR 10 49 81391 Polyester single film Cold storage 10 49 81381 Aluminium single film Storage, ELISA, PCR Polypropylene 29 49 01366 single film Cell and tissue culture 29 49 01364 single film Rayon Cell and tissue culture 10 49 01365 single film, sterile Rayon Automation 10 49 01370 PE/PP single film Fluorescence measurements single film 10 49 01371 Vinyl Luminescence measurements single film 10 49 01372 Vinyl ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 PCR Cap Tool, BRAND Cap Tool for attaching and detaching caps on PCR plates, PA. Article PCR Cap Tool Order No. 10 49 81419 Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWQED065 co d e b e w WWQED090 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 809

811

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWQJ3056 1 2 2 3 810 Plates, Dishes PCR Plates and Polypropylene Microplates, Eppendorf PCR Plates Eppendorf twin.tec® PCR plates 96 and 384 have the benefits of two different materials: The wells are manufactured from production-clean polypropylene, the most typical and most successful material for PCR vessels; surface and skirts of the plates are made from polycarbonate, a particularly rigid material. The Eppendorf certified standard of cleanli- ness – “PCR clean” – ensures that the Eppendorf twin.tec PCR plates are free of human DNA, DNase, RNase, and PCR inhibitors. • Increased co-planarity and excellent rigidity and warp resistance • Extremely thin walls for optimum heat transfer in the sample • Diagonalized corner and alphanumerical orientation system • Raised rims around the individual wells for efficient sealing and reduced cross-contam- ination risk • Autoclavable (121°C, 20 min.) • Certified to be free of human DNA, DNase, RNAse and PCR inhibitor • Available as skirted, semiskirted and unskirted wells twin.tec real-time PCR plates In addition to all the benefits of the regular twin.tec plates, Eppendorf twin.tec real-time PCR plates additionally have the benefits of white wells for your real-time PCR. The white wells of Eppendorf twin.tec real-time PCR plates reflect fluorescence better than transparent or grey wells. NEW: twin.tec PCR plate 96, unskirted, dividable • Can be divided into 4 segments of 24 wells each • Match most established thermocyclers • Available with regular profile (250 µl) or low profile (150 µl) wells twin.tec microbiology PCR plate • Sterile, packed individually • Certified PCR clean • Additionally free of bacterial DNA1) • For all applications requiring absolute purity or provable absence of bacterial DNA Article Order No. twin.tec microbiology PCR plate 96, skirted, colorless twin.tec real-time PCR plate 96, skirted (wells white), white twin.tec real-time PCR plate 96, semi-skirted (wells white), white ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Other colors available on request. 1) The term “free of” in connection with the purity levels means that the test proved con- formity within the detection limits (see lot-specific certificate). 4 Microplates polypropylene The new Eppendorf polypropylene microplates set standards for transparency, cleanness and stability! All Eppendorf microplates are produced under ISO certified cleanroom con- ditions. Available quality standards: PCR clean (free of human DNA, DNase, RNase, and PCR inhibitors)1) or Sterile. Each batch is tested and certified individually pursuant to the high Eppendorf quality standards. • Highest transparency for improved sample visiblity • OptiTrack® matrix for easy and fast well identifcation • g-safe® for high centrifugation and mixing stability • RecoverMax® well design for maximum sample recovery • Flat, planar surface with raised well rims effective sealing • Black and white microtest plates, optimated for improved sensitivity with fluorescence and luminescence assays • Highly resistant to chemicals • Batch testing and certification in PCR clean or Sterile quality Continued on next page twin.tec PCR plate 96 skirted (wells colorless), colorless twin.tec PCR plate 96 skirted (wells black), yellow twin.tec PCR plate 384, (wells colorless), colorless twin.tec PCR plate 384, (wells black), yellow 29 69 28575 29 69 28648 29 69 28656 29 69 28508 10 69 28818 10 69 33374 10 69 33366 twin.tec PCR plate 96, unskirted, 250 µl, colorless twin.tec PCR plate 96, unskirted, low-profile, divisible, 150 µl, colorless 10 69 33358 10 69 33307 10 69 29342 10 69 29326 10 69 29300 10 69 32513 10 69 32548 1 twin.tec PCR plate 96 semi-skirted (wells colorless), colorless 3 twin.tec PCR plate 96, unskirted, divisible, 250 µl, colorless 2 twin.tec PCR plate 96, unskirted, low-profile, 150 µl, colorless twin.tec microbiology PCR plate 384, semi-skirted, colorless 2 twin.tec microbiology PCR plate 96, semi-skirted, colorless PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 25 20 20 20 20 10 10 10 25 25

812

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Plates, Dishes Designation Grade Microplate 96/F-PP PCR clean Microplate 96/F-PP sterile Microplate 96/F-PP PCR clean Microplate 96/U-PP PCR clean Microplate 96/U-PP sterile Microplate 96/U-PP PCR clean Microplate 96/U-PP PCR clean Microplate 96/V-PP PCR clean Microplate 96/V-PP sterile Microplate 96/V-PP PCR clean Microplate 384/V-PP PCR clean Microplate 384/F-PP PCR clean Microplate 384/F-PP sterile Microplate 384/V-PP PCR clean Microplate 384/V-PP sterile Microplate 384/V-PP DNA LoBind, Microplate 384/V-PP Protein LoBind, PCR clean PCR clean Microplate 384/V-PP PCR clean Microplate 384/V-PP PCR clean Well co- lor Border color Order No. clear clear white clear clear white black clear clear white black clear clear clear clear clear white white grey white white grey white white white grey white white white white white white 10 69 01106 10 69 02102 10 69 01475 10 69 01203 10 69 02200 10 69 01572 10 69 01807 10 69 01300 10 69 02307 10 69 01670 10 69 01904 10 69 21107 10 69 22103 10 69 21301 10 69 22308 10 69 23304 clear white 10 69 24300 white black grey white 10 69 21670 10 69 21905 PU pc/ Pack 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 1) The term “free of” in connection with the purity levels means that the test proved con- formity within the detection limits (see lot-specific certificate). 4 co d e b e w WWQMA006 Systec Mediafill, Systec Systec Mediafill is a dispensing and dosing system for automated dosing and filling of microbiological culture media in Petri dishes with a diameter of 35, 60 and 90 mm, and for bi-plates, tri-plates, and automatic dosing of liquid media in test tubes. • 5.7 ″ touch-screen – easy and intuitive operation • One touch dish selection – integrated database for pre-programmed Petri dish sizes • Unattended, fully automatic process – filling and stacking without user intervention • Smooth and silent operation – maximal reduced noise emission • Even aluminum surfaces – easy to clean, no holes or gaps where media can flow into • Three stacker-carousel heights available – for 220, 440 and 660 Petri dishes • EasyStack – stacker-carousel can be fully removed from Mediafill • Integrated peristaltic pump (main pump) – for precise filling of media • Integrated peristaltic pump (additives pump) – for precise adding of additives (optional) • Full control of both, the main and the optional additives pump through the Mediafill touch-screen • Drop-Stop function – prevents spills at the filling nozzle • Shaker function – optimal distribution of media into Petri dishes • UV-Lamp with 2.3 W UVC light emission – reduces the risk of contamination • Manual filling function – either by foot-switch or timed delay • Peltier Cooling – for re-cooling of Petri dishes (optional) • Printer function – printing direct on Petri dishes (optional) Systec Mediafill Convertible for 90 mm, 60 mm and 35 mm petri-dishes. Article Mediafill (base unit) Accessories for Ø 90 mm petri-dishes Article Stacker carousel Stack 220-90 Stacker carousel Stack 440-90 Stacker carousel Stack 660-90 Rotor for 90 mm petri-dishes Accessories for Ø 60 mm petri-dishes Article Stacker carousel Stack 220-60 Stacker carousel Stack 440-60 Stacker carousel Stack 660-60 Rotor for 60 mm petri-dishes co d e b e w Order No. 10 12 91155 Order No. 10 12 91160 10 12 91161 10 12 91162 10 12 91163 Order No. 10 12 91170 10 12 91171 10 12 91172 10 12 91173 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 811

813

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWZNZ006 co d e b e w WW2NY400 co d e b e w WW2NY401 812 Plates, Dishes Accessories for Ø 35 mm petri-dishes Article Stacker carousel Stack 220-35 Stacker carousel Stack 440-35 Stacker carousel Stack 660-35 Rotor for 35 mm petri-dishes Order No. 10 12 91180 10 12 91181 10 12 91182 10 12 91183 Further options e.g. for adding additives during the filling process, for filling of Bi-Plates, Tri-Plates, for printing on Petri-Dishes and for filling of Test-Tubes on request. Disposable Petri Dishes, Greiner Bio-One Petri dishes for bacteriology Article Disposable Petri dishes with edge beads, 10 pcs/bag Disposable Petri dishes with edge beads, 20 pcs/bag Disposable Petri dishes without edge beads, 20 pcs/bag Disposable Petri dishes with edge beads, Height mm Ø mm 35 10 Order No. 29 47 62710 PU pc/Pack 740 60 15 29 47 62810 94 16 29 47 63210 94 16 29 47 63310 600 480 480 20 pcs/bag ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. neoCulture Cell Culture Dishes, neoLab® Cell and Tissue Culture Dishes with treated surface are ideal containers for cell growth of adherent cells and are also useful in sample separation, pre-treatment, storage and so on. The dish surface is smooth and free from striation to maximize usable area for growth. The dishes can be easy stacked. The lids have with several little chimbs to shape vents for very effective gas exchange. • sterilized by gamma irradiation • DNase-/Rnase-free • non-pyrogenic Article Material Ø Order No. neoCulture cell culture dishes D3.5 PS neoCulture cell culture dishes D6.0 PS neoCulture cell culture dishes D7.0 PS neoCulture cell culture dishes D10.0 PS neoCulture cell culture dishes D15.0 PS mm 35 55 70 100 150 10 01 08211 10 01 08218 10 01 08212 10 01 08213 10 01 08214 PU pc/Pack 960 600 600 300 100 neoCulture Cell Culture Plates, neoLab® Cell and Tissue Culture Plates with treated surface are perfect for cell growth of adherent cells on multiple, compare and other analysis.Uniform well volume ensures equal growth surface area. The well surface is smooth and free from striation to maximize usable growth area. To reduce evaporation there are raised rims on each well with the uniform rings on the lid. Single position lid (cut corner) reduces the risks of cross-contamination and the handlingmistakes. Wells are labeled with alphanumeric code for easy identification. The plates are suitable for all common instruments and automation. • sterilized by gamma irradiation • DNase-/Rnase-free • pyrogen-free Quantity wells Form Material Order No. 96 96 48 24 12 6 flat U-shape flat flat flat flat PS PS PS PS PS PS 10 01 08206 10 01 08207 10 01 08219 10 01 08208 10 01 08209 10 01 08210 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100

814

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Plates, Dishes neoCulture Cell Culture Flasks, neoLab® The Cell and Tissue Culture Flasks with treated surface are perfect for cell growth of ad- herent cells. The flask surface is flat and free from striation to maximize usable growth area. The cell culture flasks are available with 2 different closures: standard or gas exchange caps. The closed standard caps are used in an open system, the standard caps are loosely screwed onto the bottles to ensure gas exchange. The gas exchange caps with filter allow cell cultivation with closed cell culture flasks. An innovative angled neck design offers good pipet and cell scraper access in. The flasks can be easy stacked, a special outer area near the neck is for mark writing. On both flask sides there is engraved graduation. • sterilized by gamma irradiation • DNase-/RNase-free • pyrogen-free co d e b e w WW2NY398 Article neoCulture Cell Culture Flasks with Ventilation Cap Vol. ml Order No. PU pc/Pack neoCulture cell culture flasks A25 neoCulture cell culture flasks A75 neoCulture cell culture flasks A180 50 250 600 10 01 08200 10 01 08201 10 01 08202 200 100 40 Growth area cm2 25 75 180 neoCulture Cell Culture Flasks with Gas Exchange Cap Article neoCulture cell culture flasks A25 neoCulture cell culture flasks A75 neoCulture cell culture flasks A180 Growth area cm2 25 75 180 Order No. Vol. ml PU pc/Pack 10 01 08203 50 250 10 01 08204 600 10 01 08205 200 100 40 Cryo Articles Cryo Tubes and Accessories, BRAND Cryo tubes are designed for storage of biological material, such as microorganisms, human and animal cells, etc. in the gaseous phase of liquid nitrogen. Features: • Screw cap with silicone seal or sealing cone ensures safe sealing. • Temperature stability to -196°C, autoclavable at 121 °C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285. • Gamma-ray sterilized, RNase-, DNase-, DNA- and endotoxin-free. • Large frosted marking area and colored cap inserts for easy sample identification. • Cryogenic tubes without ring stands can be centrifuged at up to an RCF of 14000 g. co d e b e w WWQED041 1 Cryo tubes with external thread, screw-on cap with silicone seal PP. Graduated. Packs of 1000 (10 bags of 100). Grad. up to ml 1.0 1.8 1.8 3.0 3.6 4.5 Version O.D. mm with stand ring 12.5 without stand ring 12.5 12.5 with stand ring with stand ring 12.5 12.5 with stand ring with stand ring 12.5 H mm 41 47 49 70 76 90 Order No. 29 49 14830 29 49 14831 29 49 14832 29 49 14833 29 49 14834 29 49 14835 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 2 Cryo tubes with inner thread, screw-on cap with sealing cone PP. Graduated. Packs of 1000 (10 bags of 100). Vol. ml 1.2 2.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 Vol. ml 1.2 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 5.0 1 2 Grad. up to ml 1.0 1.8 1.8 3.6 3.6 4.6 Version O.D. mm 12.5 with stand ring with stand ring 12.5 without stand ring 12.5 without stand ring 12.5 with stand ring 12.5 without stand ring 12.5 H mm 41 49 48 70 71 90 Order No. 29 49 14840 29 49 14841 29 49 14842 29 49 14843 29 49 14844 29 49 14845 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 813

815

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Cryo Articles Cryo rack, PP Blue. For 50 self-standing cryo tubes. 1 Article Cryo rack, PP ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Order No. 29 49 14860 PU pc/Pack 4 WW2NY408 1 2 3 co d e b e w 814 2 Storage boxes, PC PC. For cryo tubes. Operating range -196°C to +121°C (in the gas phase of liquid nitro- gen). Autoclavable at 121°C (2 bar), acc. DIN EN 285. Places 81 100 81 Order No. 29 49 14862 29 49 14866 29 49 14864 PU pc/Pack 4 4 5 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) Inner thread, 2) external thread Order No. PU pc/Bag 29 49 14850 29 49 14851 29 49 14852 29 49 14853 29 49 14854 500 500 500 500 500 Volume ml 1.2 und 2 1.21) and 21) 3, 4 and 52) 3 Cap inserts, PP PP. To fit all sizes. Colour white blue red green yellow ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Cryomaster® Cryotubes, neoLab® Cryomaster® cryotubes, 2.0 ml Cryomaster® cryotubes are made of high quality pure polypropylene. These cryovials are therefore suitable for temperatures from -196°C to +121°C and can be used for freezing samples with liquid nitrogen. They have a stand ring and are available with male or female thread. With a 1D barcode printed on the side of the tube, these cryotubes are suitable for biobanking. The screw cap with external thread does not require an O-ring due to the accuracy of fit, which additionally prevents potential contamination. The tubes are 20 × 25 pieces sterilely packed in bags and DNase-, RNase-, Endotoxin- and DNA-free. red Colour white green blue yellow purple PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 500 external thread Order No. 10 01 46100 10 01 46101 10 01 46102 10 01 46103 10 01 46104 10 01 46105 internal thread Order No. 10 01 46106 10 01 46107 10 01 46108 10 01 46109 10 01 46110 10 01 46111 Cryomaster® vial closure Coloured Cryomaster® lid inserts made of high-quality polypropylene for Cryomaster® cryotubes.The lid inserts can be pressed into the lids from above for colour coding of the tubes. Thus a large selection of different colour combinations can be made. 36 colour combinations with 6 lid colours and 6 insert colours plus the 1D barcode. This enables you to assign samples quickly and unambiguously! Colour red white green blue yellow purple Order No. 10 01 46112 10 01 46114 10 01 46115 10 01 46113 10 01 46116 10 01 46117 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 500

816

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WW2NY263 Cryo Articles Microtubes with Caps, sterile, ungraduated, neoLab® neoScrew microtubes, sterile, ungraduated, cap without hoop Sterile microtubes with thread, made of natural colored PP. With cap, tight closing by means of high-grade O-ring seal. Ideal for cryo work. Ungraduated. Packed to be sterilein 10 bags of 50. Dimensions: 44 mm high, 11 mm dia. temperature resistant from -196°C to +121°C. Max relative centrifugal acceleration: 17000 g Form Order No. Type sterile, non-graduated sterile, non-graduated sterile, non-graduated sterile, non-graduated sterile, non-graduated Volume ml 0.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 self-standing self-standing Bottom conical self-standing Bottom conical 29 01 74575 29 01 74576 29 01 74577 29 01 74578 29 01 74579 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Microtubes with Caps, sterile, graduated, neoLab® Sterile microtubes with thread, made of natural colored PP. Incl. cap with hoop, tight closing by means of high-grade O-ring seal. Ideal for cryo work. Graduated, with white marking area. Dimensions: 44 mm high, 11 mm dia. temperature resistant from -196°C to +121°C Max relative centrifugal acceleration: 17000 g Packed to be sterile in 10 Bags of 50. co d e b e w WW2NY262 Type sterile, graduated sterile, graduated sterile, graduated sterile, graduated sterile, graduated Volume ml 0.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 Form self-standing self-standing Bottom conical self-standing Bottom conical Order No. 29 01 74706 29 01 74707 29 01 74708 29 01 74709 29 01 74710 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Microtubes with Caps, sterile, graduated, neoLab® Sterile microtubes with threads, made of natural color polypropylene. With cap, high-grade O-ring seal, provides tight fit. Ideal for cryo work. Graduated, with white marking field, sterile packaging in 10 pouches of 50 tubes. Dimensions: 44 mm high, 11 mm dia. Temperature-resistant: from -196°C to +121°C Max relative centrifugal acceleration: 17000 g co d e b e w WW2NY264 Type sterile, graduated sterile, graduated sterile, graduated sterile, graduated sterile, graduated Volume ml 0.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 Form self-standing self-standing Bottom conical self-standing Bottom conical Order No. 29 01 74580 29 01 74581 29 01 74582 29 01 74583 29 01 74584 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 500 500 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 815

817

Biotechnology Culture Vessels 1 co d e b e w WW2NY038 co d e b e w WW2NY295 Cryo Articles Cellcamper Mini, Freezing Box for Cells, neoLab® 1 Freezing box for cells The neoLab-freezing box ensures an even, controlled freeze/thaw rate of 1°C per minute in all ULT freezer without the use of alcohol or any fluids. The freezing box can be used with a variety of cell types (primary cells, cell lines, stem cells, yeast, bacteria etc). The technology utilizes a highly-isolative outer material and a thermo-conductive alloy to con- trol the rate of heat removal from the sample. This ensures a standard for reproducible cryopreservation. For vials with a diameter of 12 mm. • for containers with a volume of max. 2 ml and a diameter of max. 12 mm • sturdy design • no pre-cooling is necessary • no need of alcohol, no downstream costs • standard for cryopreservation, freeze rate 1°C/min • excellent cell recovery and viability • when frozen the cap is easily removable • no need for gloves • ready for re-use within 5 minutes Capacity kg 12 30 60 Ø × H cm 12 × 11 16 × 11 L × W × H cm 29 × 16 × 11 Order No. 10 01 23702 10 01 23703 10 01 23704 Storage Box for Centrifuge Tubes 15/50 ml, neoLab® Colored box made from PP for Falcon tubes 15 and 50 ml. Two grids guarantee a safe stand of the tubes in the upper as well as the lower area. • 5 × 5 spaces for 15 ml tubes with max. 17 mm Ø • 3 × 3 spaces for 50 ml tubes with max. 30 mm Ø • With transparent slip lid • Can be autoclaved up to 121°C, resistant to -80°C Dimensions: 137 × 137 × 128 mm Material: PP Colour Places transparent yellow pink green blue orange yellow pink green blue orange transparent 5 × 5 5 × 5 5 × 5 5 × 5 5 × 5 5 × 5 3 × 3 3 × 3 3 × 3 3 × 3 3 × 3 3 × 3 for tubes ml 15 15 15 15 15 15 50 50 50 50 50 50 Order No. 29 01 21917 29 01 21918 29 01 21919 29 01 21920 29 01 21921 29 01 21922 29 01 21923 29 01 21924 29 01 21925 29 01 21907 29 01 21908 29 01 21909 Cryo Storage Boxes, neoLab® co d e b e w WW2NY172 Cryo boxes for grid inserts, 136 × 136 mm Made of cold-resistant cardboard impregnated against the wet, with lid. Boxes and lids are coated on the inside and outside. Very sturdy design. The lid has a distinctive marking area on one end side for labeling the contents. Base area: 136 × 136 mm Matching grid inserts made of cardboard. Article Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Colour white red blue green yellow white white Height mm 50 50 50 50 50 75 100 Order No. 23 01 22700 23 01 22695 23 01 22696 23 01 22697 23 01 22698 23 01 22701 23 01 22702 816 Continued on next page

818

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WW2NY297 Cryo Articles Grid inserts for cryo boxes 136 × 136 mm Article Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Quantity com- partments 16 × 16 13 × 13 12 × 12 10 × 10 9 × 9 8 × 8 7 × 7 5 × 5 for PCR-tubes 0.2 ml Tubes 0.5/0.75 ml for Ø mm 10 12 13 14 16 20 Order No. 10 01 22892 10 01 22893 23 01 22708 23 01 22703 23 01 22706 23 01 22704 23 01 22705 23 01 22707 Cryo boxes for grid inserts, 133 × 133 mm Coloured cryo boxes made of temperature-resistant cardboard with water-repellent standard coating. Complete with pull-over cap. Without labelling field. Dimensions: 133 × 133 × 50 mm (L×W×H) Article Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Cryo box with lid Colour white blue red green yellow Order No. 10 01 22671 10 01 22672 10 01 22673 10 01 22674 10 01 22677 Grid inserts for cryo boxes 133 × 133 mm Article Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Grid insert Quantity com- partments 16 × 16 13 × 13 12 × 12 10 × 10 9 × 9 8 × 8 7 × 7 5 × 5 for Ø mm 6.0 8.0 8.5 10.5 11.5 14.0 16.0 23.0 Height mm 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 Order No. 10 01 22887 10 01 22886 10 01 22885 10 01 22884 10 01 22883 10 01 22882 10 01 22881 10 01 22880 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Cryo Storage Boxes PS, neoLab® Boxes for 10 × 10 cryotubes with 1 to 2 ml content and 12.5 mm Ø. Material: Polystyrene, suitable for temperatures from -80° to +80°C, not autoclavable. Transparent lid with numbered compartments for identification of samples. Dimensions: 133 × 133 × 52 mm high Article Cryo storage box, blue Cryo storage box, green Cryo storage box, pink Cryo storage box, yellow Colour Order No. blue green pink yellow 29 01 78041 29 01 78042 29 01 78043 29 01 78044 PU pc/Pack 4 4 4 4 Cryo Storage Boxes made of PP, neoLab® Cryo storage boxes for grid Transparent box made of PP with slip lid for loading with plastic-coated cardboard grids for receptacles of 12 to 20 mm Ø. Temperature-resistant from -90 to +121°C, can be autoclaved. Dimensions: 135 × 135 × 50 mm (L × W × H) co d e b e w WW2NY296 Article Box empty, for grid Grid inserts Article Grid inserts PP Grid inserts PP Grid inserts PP Grid inserts PP Grid inserts PP co d e b e w Order No. 29 01 21916 Grid 6 × 6 7 × 7 8 × 8 9 × 9 10 × 10 for Ø mm 20.5 17.3 15.8 12.8 11.2 Order No. 10 01 22894 10 01 22895 10 01 22896 10 01 22897 10 01 22898 PU pc/Pack 5 5 5 5 5 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 817

819

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WW2NY271 co d e b e w WW2NY216 2 6 3 1 4 5 7 8 9 AT AK 818 Cryo Articles Cryo Boxes made of Cardboard, neoLab® Cryo boxes made of cardboard With lid for cell cultures 15 and 50 ml, made of cold-resisting cardboard, which is also impregnated against moisture. A low-price and durable alternative to plastic boxes. The lid has a prominent marking area on the front side. Inner dimensions: 122 × 122 mm or 148 × 148 mm Inner height: 128 mm Article Cell box made of carboard size 1 Cell box made of carboard size 2 Outer L × W × H mm 129 × 129 × 130 155 × 155 × 130 Order No. 23 01 27094 23 01 27095 Grid partitions For the cryogenic cell storage box - matching grid partitions for various tubes in various versions. Article Grid insert for box size 1 Grid insert for box size 2 Grid insert for box size 1 Grid insert for box size 2 for Ø mm 20 20 30 30 Places Order No. 5 × 5 6 × 6 3 × 3 4 × 4 23 01 27096 23 01 27097 23 01 27098 23 01 27099 neoBox 81 Cryo-Boxes, neoLab® neoBox 81 Cryo boxes in luminescent colors. • Compartments in 9 rows of 9 = 81 places for tubes up to 12.5 mm dia. • with alphanumeric compartments • Tight-closing, overlapping cover, transparent Material: Temperature resistance: Dimensions (L × W × H): Polypropylene -90°C to +121°C, autoclavable 131 × 131 × 45 mm Colour 1 transparent 2 yellow 3 green 4 pink 5 blue 6 orange Order No. 23 01 22910 23 01 22911 23 01 22912 23 01 22913 23 01 22914 23 01 22915 neoBox 81 plus The neoBox 81 plus is the ideal cryobox for the safe storage and transport of your valua- ble samples. With its fixed 9×9 grid, the neoBox 81 plus offers space for 81 cryovials with a diameter of up to 12.5 mm and a maximum height of 50 mm. Comes with the perforated plate (2-2939) which is inserted into the lower part. In this way, each “sample place” is clearly numbered and assigned. Thus, all 81 positions in the box are unique and mix-up of samples is excluded. Lid and base are designed so that the lid is always placed clearly oriented – Position Lock. The neoBox 81 plus is made of durable polypropylene and is temperature-resistant and autoclavable from -90°C to + 12 °C. Dimensions (L×W×H): 133 × 133 × 53 mm Cryobox including perforated plate Article Order No. 7 neoBox 81 plus, transparent 10 01 22930 8 neoBox 81 plus, yellow 10 01 22931 9 neoBox 81 plus, green 10 01 22932 AT neoBox 81 plus, blue 10 01 22934 AK neoBox 81 plus, red 10 01 22937 neoBox 81 plus, set of 5, transparent, yellow, green, blue, red 10 01 22938 Perforated plate for neoBox 81 plus, transparent, coded, grid 9×9 10 01 22939

820

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWMUE010 Cryo Articles Cryo Tube Boxes, Polycarbonate, ISOLAB Manufactured from polycarbonate with high mechanical strength and high temperature resistance between -196°C to +121°C. Uniquely designed to carry 81 pieces micro or cryo tubes in 9 x 9 array. “Hedgehog” designed tube compartments hold the tube in their po- sition firmly. They fit all steel and polycarbonate freezer racks. Unique design with vent and drainage holes guarantees best, efficient air circulation. Forward slope base ensures quick visual orientation. Easily stackable for reducing storage space. Hinged lid with built-in stop al- lows very easy access to tubes. Clear box lid enables easy identification of box content and protects the tubes from dust, moisture and other enviromental effects. Vent and drainage holes at the lid and the base guarantee the best air circulation. Alphanumerical index both on tube rows and the lid enables easy identification of tube positions. Featured with a frosted write on area at the front side of the lid. Different color options offer visual sorting and organising of different samples. Order No. for tubes ml 2.0 2.0 2.0 5.0 L × W × H mm 133×133×53 133×133×53 133×133×53 133×133×96 10 66 40900 10 66 40901 10 66 40902 10 66 40903 green purple ruby blue Colour Places 9×9 9×9 9×9 9×9 Stainless Steel Racks for Cryoboxes, neoLab® 1 Cryomaster® offers premium-quality stainless steel storage systems – whether in the freezer or refrigeration room, Cryomaster® adapts to your individual requirements! Give us your specifications, and we will supply a Cryomaster® stainless steel rack tailored to your needs. To find the right stainless steel rack for you, please give us the following information: • Which vials do you use? • What is the size of your cryoboxes? • Which freezer model or storage system are you currently using, or intend to purchase/ supplement? See our selection of Cryomaster stainless steel racks for cryoboxes with a base area of 136 × 136 mm. One rack for both base formats: 133 × 133 mm and 136 × 136 mm ( 1 + 2). Other sizes and dimensions are available on request, e.g. a chest rack for vertical storage of blood bags ( 3). Cryomaster® vertical racks for cryoboxes 136×136×53 mm Quantity com- partments 7 10 11 12 13 14 10 11 12 13 14 Basic size mm 141×141 141×141 141×141 141×141 141×141 141×141 141×148 141×148 141×148 141×148 141×148 Height mm 391 556 611 666 721 776 556 611 666 721 776 Version without locking rod without locking rod without locking rod without locking rod without locking rod without locking rod with locking rod with locking rod with locking rod with locking rod with locking rod Cryomaster® cabinet racks for cryoboxes 136×136×53 mm Compartments Basic size mm 139×290 139×430 139×430 139×569 139×569 139×565 139×569 139×569 139×569 139×700 139×700 Height mm 279 169 224 169 224 279 334 389 444 224 279 deep 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 Compartments high 5 3 4 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 5 co d e b e w Order No. 10 01 46242 10 01 46217 10 01 46221 10 01 46222 10 01 46223 10 01 46236 10 01 46224 10 01 46205 10 01 46206 10 01 46225 10 01 46237 Order No. 10 01 46246 10 01 46230 10 01 46231 10 01 46232 10 01 46203 10 01 46204 10 01 46233 10 01 46218 10 01 46243 10 01 46238 10 01 46213 2 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. co d e b e w 3 WW2NY336 819

821

Biotechnology Culture Vessels 1 2 co d e b e w 3 WW2NY337 co d e b e w WW2NY269 820 Cryo Articles Stainless Steel Drawer Racks for Cryoboxes, neoLab® Cryomaster® offers premium-quality stainless steel storage systems – whether in the freezer or refrigeration room, Cryomaster® adapts to your individual requirements! Give us your specifications, and we will supply a Cryomaster® stainless steel rack tailored to your needs. To find the right stainless steel rack for you, please give us the following information: • Which vials do you use? • What is the size of your cryoboxes? • Which freezer model or storage system are you currently using, or intend to purchase/ supplement? See our selection of Cryomaster stainless steel racks for cryoboxes with a base area of 136 × 136 mm. One rack for both base formats: 133 × 133 mm and 136 × 136 mm ( 1 + 2). Cryomaster® Drawer racks for cryoboxes 136×136×53 mm Compart- ments deep 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 Compart- ments high 5 3 4 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 4 4 5 Height Basic size mm mm 140×308 288 140×450 173 140×450 231 140×569 173 140×569 231 140×569 288 140×577 288 140×569 337 140×569 404 140×563 449 140×700 249 140×700 231 140×700 288 Version Order No. 10 01 46245 10 01 46226 10 01 46227 10 01 46228 10 01 46220 short 10 01 46247 short 10 01 46201 10 01 46229 short 10 01 46244 short 10 01 46209 short, flat short, with fold-down handle 10 01 46219 10 01 46202 short short, with fold-down handle 10 01 46212 Other sizes and dimensions on request, e.g. cabinet insert with hoe insert 3. neoStapelRack® System for Cryoboxes, Stackable, neoLab® This is a system of stacking racks for all generally available standard Cryoboxes with heights of 50 to 53 mm, for example: • Cardboard Cryoboxes Order No. 23 01 22700 ff. and 23 01 22900 ff. • neoBox-81 (Cryobox made of PP) Order No. 23 01 22910 ff. • neoBox-100 (Storage box PP) Order No. 23 01 21935 ff. • neoRack® for eppis and Cryo tubes Order No. 23 01 21642 and 23 01 21643 Two versions: 1. Vertical Up to 10 basic elements can be stacked on top of each other to form a tower, with the molded-on hooks lock into each other in the process. The parts can also be disassembled again at any time. This vertical system comes with a lid with a handle which makes it easy to lower into a freezer box. 2. Horizontal This system comes with clamps (1 pair for each) for firmly fastening the basic elements at the side and/or the back. 4 basic elements can therefore be fastened next to each other or at the back and 4 stacked on top of each other. Each basic element can be covered with a lid without a handle (Order No. 23 01 23001). The side panels and floor come with large openings for better transfer of cold or heat. Each basic element has a half-moon shaped recess at the front for easier and convenient removal of the storage boxes. Suitable for storage in deep-freeze storage boxes or cabinets, but also suitable as a mag- azine for the laboratory table. Technical data: External dimensions, basic element: Internal dimensions, basic element: Material: Temperature resistance: 146 × 150 × 58 mm (W × D × H) 140 × 147 × 55 mm (W × D × H) PC, autoclavable From -130°C to +130°C Article neoStapelRack single element Cover with handle Cover without handle neoStapelRack single element Cover with handle Cover without handle Clamp pair for horizontal version Colour white white white blue blue blue blue Order No. 23 01 22999 23 01 22998 23 01 23001 23 01 23002 23 01 23003 23 01 23004 23 01 23000

822

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Culture Vessels, Closures Culture Tubes with Thread and Screw Cap, schuett-biotec 1 Culture tubes with thread and screw cap Soda-lime glass. Sterilizable. For growing cultures and for transporting long-term cul- tures. Complete with aluminium screw cap (autoclavable/sterilizable) or plastic screw cap (steam-autoclavable at 121°C/sterilizable) and rubber seal. Screw cap Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Aluminium Plastic Plastic Plastic Plastic Size mm 35 × 12 50 × 14 1) 45 × 27 50 × 27 75 × 25 50 × 14 1) 45 × 27 50 × 27 75 × 27 Vol. approx. ml 3 5 15 20 30 5 15 20 30 Order No. 12 31 11004 12 31 11002 10 31 81005 10 31 81006 10 31 81007 12 31 11003 12 31 11015 12 31 11020 12 31 11030 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) with frosted labeling space Spare screw caps on request. Storage cases for culture tubes Article Material for Order No. 2 Storage case P Storage case PP1) 3 Storage case H Storage case “Box”1) Polystyrene Polypropylene Wood Polypropylene 50 tubes 35 × 12 mm 12 31 12001 50 tubes 35 × 12 mm 10 31 82003 100 tubes 50 × 14 mm 12 31 12002 49 tubes 50 × 14 mm 10 31 82004 PU pc/Pack 1 1 1 2 black, with slip lid, stackable 1)autoclavable Supplied without the illustrated accessories Culture Tubes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Straight rim for Kapsenberg caps, DIN 38411, Part 6. Vol. ml 20 30 O.D. mm 16 18 Length mm 160 180 Wall thickness mm 1.0 – 1.2 1.0 – 1.2 Order No. 19 26 13221 19 26 13223 PU pc/Pack 100 100 Disposable Culture Tubes, DURAN Group / IDL Disposable culture tubes made of soda-lime glass, straight rim. O.D. mm 9.75 10.00 11.75 11.75 12.25 12.25 11.75 12.25 15.50 15.75 12.25 10.00 15.50 15.50 Length mm 75 75 75 75 75 75 100 100 100 100 120 150 150 160 Vol. ml 4 4 5 6 7 6 8 9 14 15 18 8 19 22 Wall thickness mm 0.80 0.60 0.80 0.55 0.55 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.90 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 Order No. 19 27 72018 19 27 72036 19 27 72058 19 27 72086 19 27 72096 19 27 72099 19 27 72078 19 27 72119 19 27 72148 19 27 72109 19 27 72128 19 27 72188 19 27 72198 19 27 72219 PU pc/Pack 814 250 550 250 500 500 550 500 250 250 250 250 250 250 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWEQ2130 co d e b e w WWEQ2135 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 821

823

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWEQ2134 co d e b e w WWEQ2136 822 Culture Vessels, Closures Culture Tubes, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Culture tubes with DIN thread and screw cap made of PBT with PTFE seal (suitable for food use). Tmax = 180°C. Autoclavable. O.D. mm 12 13 16 16 18 20 Length mm 100 100 150 160 180 150 Vol. ml 6 9 20 20 30 34 Thread GL Order No. 14 14 18 18 18 18 19 26 13611 10 21 13612 10 21 13622 19 26 13621 19 26 13623 10 21 13624 PU pc/Pack 50 50 50 50 50 50 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Disposable Culture Tubes with Thread, DURAN Group / IDL Disposable culture tubes made of soda-lime glass with DIN thread and PP screw cap. With TPE seal. Autoclavable. O.D. mm 12 16 16 18 Length mm 100 100 160 180 Vol. ml 6 12 22 32 Thread GL 14 18 18 18 Wall thickness mm 1 1 1 1 Order No. 19 23 17511 19 23 17514 19 23 17521 19 23 17523 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Test Tubes with Thread and Screw Cap, schuett-biotec Borosilicate glass. Sterilizable. For growing cultures and transporting long-term cul- tures. Walls 1.1 mm thick. Wide neck for easy inoculating and leaning. Complete with aluminium screw cap (autoclavable/sterilizable) or rubber screw cap (steam-autoclavable at 121°C/sterilizable) and rubber seal. Screw cap aluminium aluminium plastic plastic plastic Size mm 98 × 16 150 × 16 98 × 16 150 × 16 150 × 25 Vol. approx. ml 15 20 15 20 50 Order No. 19 31 15000 19 31 15001 19 31 15010 19 31 15011 19 31 53000 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Spare screw caps on request.

824

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWEQ2219 Culture Vessels, Closures DURAN® TILT, DURAN Group / IDL DURAN®TILT was developed specifically for easy and safe working in biosafety benches and clean-air hoods. DURAN®TILT makes it much more convenient to handle objects in the limited space available under these conditions. DURAN® TILT – Cell cultur media bottle DURAN® TILT media bottle • For use in two positions: Upright for filter sterilisation, or in the inclined 45° TILT position for more convenient pipetting. The new, innovative design allows for sterile, easy, and uncomplicated working processes. • For easier pipetting, the surface of the aperture GL 56 is 100% larger than that of the standard aperture GL 45. In this way, you can also use large-volume pipettes (100 ml) without any problems; contaminations are avoided. • With its ergonomic shape, the optimised white screw cap GL 56, made of non-cytotox- ic polypropylene, allows for easy opening and closing. • Being vacuum-fast, the bottle is perfect for safe filter sterilisation of media. • Thanks to its small footprint and stackable design, the bottle is perfectly suited for stor- ing the media in the fridge and heating them in the water bath. • Low bottle height for easy handling in biosafety workbenches and under clean-air hoods. • Scaling on both sides to allow for easy reading of the volume in the bottle – in upright and in tilted position. • Made of DURAN® borosilicate glass 3.3, a time- and field-proven material which is certified as non-cytotoxic (pursuant to ISO 10993-5:2009) and reacts neither with solu- tions nor with solid matters; this means that it will not affect cell culture media. Being reusable, DURAN® borosilicate glass 3.3 reduces the costs in the product lifecycle. • Not sterile on delivery. Article DURAN® TILT Media bottle, clear glass Volume ml 500 Overall height mm 151 Order No. 10 21 14459 PU pc/Pack 4 DURAN® TILT – Accessories and replacement parts DURAN® TILT GL56 Bottle Tags Made of silicone. For individual coloured marking or for fixing the light protection jacket. Available in four colours. Article DURAN® GL 56 Bottle Tags, orange DURAN® GL 56 Bottle Tags, yellow DURAN® GL 56 Bottle Tags, blue DURAN® GL 56 Bottle Tags, purple Order No. 10 21 15626 10 21 15634 10 21 15659 10 21 15667 PU pc/Pack 20 20 20 20 Article DURAN® TILT Light shield Made of white silicone, covers 94% of the bottle surface. Order No. 10 21 15600 PU pc/Pack 4 Protects from UV radiation, protects the glass surface and provides for a good grip. With four coloured GL56 Bottle Tags (orange, yellow, blue, and purple) for colour coding and fixing the light protection jacket. DURAN® TILT GL 56 self-adhesive identification label 10 21 15604 Practical self-adhesive labels for orderly labelling and unique marking of the individual cell culture media bott- les to exclude mix-up, errors, and cross-contamination. Diameter 40 mm. DURAN® TILT GL 56 screw cap With its ergonomic shape, the optimised white screw cap GL 56, made of non-cytotoxic polypropylene, allows for easy opening and closing. DURAN® GL45 thread adaptor for bottle top vacuum filtration unit (GL 45 external, GL 56 internal) Connects the DURAN®TILT bottle with the DURAN® va- cuum filter unit. Made of inert PTFE. Reusable. 10 21 15602 10 21 15601 60 10 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 823 Continued on next page

825

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WWEQ2203 Culture Vessels, Closures DURAN® – Vacuum filtration units Specifically for the sterilisation or clarification of aqueous cell culture media. The filter can be used for the DURAN® TILT bottle (with GL 45 thread adapter) and for conventional GL 45 cell culture media bottles. It is gamma sterilised, available in three different pore sizes, and is made of non-cytotoxic materials of class VI in a cleanroom of class 100,000 – is sterile on delivery. Article DURAN® 500 ml funnel, GL 45 Pore size µm 0.1 Filter Ø mm 90 DURAN® 500 ml funnel, GL 45 0.2 DURAN® 500 ml funnel, GL 45 0.45 90 90 Order No. 10 21 12819 10 21 12827 10 21 12843 PU pc/Pack 12 12 12 DURAN® Baffled Flask, DURAN Group / IDL The baffles in the flask cause strong turbulences when stirring, increasing the gas ex- change area and thus the oxygenation capacity (twice the oxygenation capacity of the standard Erlenmeyer flask). Thanks to the fully automated production, DURAN® baffled flasks have a reproducible geometry. Increased wall thickness for excellent mechanical stability and long service life. Contrary to other seal types, for example sealing with cotton wool, the membrane seal with welded PTFE membrane makes a reproducible gas exchange possible while reduc- ing the risk of contamination. Seal and flask are autoclavable and fit for repeated use. Baffled flask with Retrace Code (Batch Certificate of Performance via Internet). Tempera- ture resistance of membrane seal: +140°C Equipped with 4 baffles in the bottom. Supplied with membrane seal and polypropylene pouring ring Article DURAN® baffled flask, GL 45, 250 ml DURAN® baffled flask, GL 45, 500 ml DURAN® baffled flask, GL 45, 1,000 ml Order No. 10 21 18336 10 21 18344 10 21 15459 PU pc/Pack 4 4 1 Notice: Baffeld flasks also available without membrane screw caps. Matrix Bottles, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Straight neck for metal caps, uniform O.D. neck 38 mm, autoclavable. WWEQ2163 Volume max. O.D. mm 50 70 83 105 H mm 125 170 208 240 Order No. 19 21 77324 19 21 77339 19 21 77344 19 21 77354 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 Matching metal caps see order no. 19 29 01224 and 19 29 01324. ml 100 300 500 1000 co d e b e w co d e b e w WWEQ2164 Culture Flasks, Erlenmeyer Shape, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Straight neck for metal caps, uniform neck O.D. 38 mm. With retrace code (batch cer- tificate via internet). Autoclavable. Volume Order No. ml 100 200 250 300 500 1000 2000 19 21 77124 19 21 77132 19 21 77136 19 21 77139 19 21 77144 19 21 77154 19 21 77163 For matching metal caps, see Order No. 19 29 01224 and 19 29 01324 max. O.D. mm 64 79 85 87 105 131 166 Height mm 114 138 149 161 183 229 302 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 824

826

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Culture Vessels, Closures Metal Caps, DURAN Group / IDL To fit culture bottles 19 21 773.. and culture flasks 19 21 771.., 19 21 77462 with neck O.D. 38 mm. co d e b e w WWEQ2166 Material 1 Stainless steel 2 Aluminium, blue anodized Order No. 19 29 01224 19 29 01324 PU pc/Pack 10 10 Culture Flasks with Baffle, LAT For strong turbulence when stirring in Erlenmeyer flasks. For Kapsenberg caps. Volume ml 100 250 300 500 1000 Baffles 3 3 3 3 3 Order No. 19 20 10024 19 20 10036 19 20 10039 19 20 10044 19 20 10054 Erlenmeyer Flasks with Baffle, LAT For high turbulence when stirring in Erlenmeyer flasks. With beaded rim. Volume ml 100 250 300 500 1000 Baffles 3 3 3 3 3 Order No. 11 20 10024 11 20 10036 11 20 10039 11 20 10044 11 20 10054 1 2 co d e b e w WWW4U034 co d e b e w WWW4U036 ERLENMEYER-CAP Caps, schuett-biotec Aluminium. Anodized in color. Sterilizable. Anodic oxidized. Sterile but non-hermetic closing of vessels. Special caps for culture flasks (without beaded rim) and culture media bottles with straight neck of dia. 38 mm. Springs made of chromium-nickel-steel, with clamp against the outer wall of the vessel. Advantages: stainless, washable/reusable, heat-resistant, sterilizable, fixed locked, air supply guaranteed, different colors for recognition. Colour Order No. silver blue red ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 19 31 89371 19 31 89372 19 31 89373 for jar Ø mm 37/39 37/39 37/39 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 825

827

Biotechnology Culture Vessels Culture Vessels, Closures ALU-STECK Caps, schuett-biotec Pure aluminium. Matt. Sterilizable. Without springs. For the sterile but non-hermetic clos- ing of vessels. For placing loosely on top of glass vessels. Can also be used as open sample containers. Height mm 25 25 25 25 25 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40 40 40 Order No. 38 31 82511 38 31 82512 38 31 82513 38 31 82514 38 31 83015 38 31 83016 38 31 83017 38 31 83018 38 31 83020 38 31 83022 38 31 83028 38 31 83032 38 31 83039 38 31 84044 38 31 84048 38 31 84055 38 31 84060 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10 10 10 10 10 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. LABOCAP Caps, schuett-biotec Aluminium. Anodized in color. Anodic oxidized. Sterilizable. For sterile but non-hermetic closing of vessels. With or without handle. Springs made of chromium-nickel-steel for clamping against the outer wall of the vessel. Advantages: stainless, washable/reusable, heat-resistant, sterilizable, fixed locket, air supply is guaranteed, different colors for recognition. Inner Ø mm 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 22 28 32 39 44 48 55 58 9/10 12/13 14/15 15/16 17/18 19/20 21/23 24/26 28/30 12/13 15/16 17/18 19/20 12/13 15/16 17/18 19/20 1 Without handle, silver, blue, red silver Order No. PU pc/Pack for jar Ø mm 100 19 31 89091 100 19 31 89121 100 19 31 89141 100 19 31 89151 100 19 31 89171 100 19 31 89191 100 19 31 89211 100 19 31 89241 100 19 31 89281 blue Order No. 10 31 89092 19 31 89122 19 31 89142 19 31 89152 19 31 89172 19 31 89192 10 31 89212 10 31 89242 10 31 89282 red Order No. 10 31 89093 19 31 89123 19 31 89143 19 31 89153 19 31 89173 19 31 89193 10 31 89213 10 31 89243 10 31 89283 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Without handle, yellow, green, black for jar Ø mm yellow Order No. PU pc/Pack 100 19 31 24243 100 19 31 24253 100 19 31 24443 100 10 31 84643 green Order No. 19 31 24453 19 31 24473 19 31 24543 10 31 84653 black Order No. 10 31 84273 19 31 24553 10 31 84573 10 31 84673 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Without handle, violet, brown for jar Ø mm PU pc/Pack violet Order No. 100 10 31 84283 100 10 31 84483 100 10 31 84583 100 10 31 84683 brown1) Order No. 10 31 84263 10 31 84563 10 31 84663 Continued on next page ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) After selling off no longer available 1 826

828

Culture Vessels, Closures Biotechnology Culture Vessels 12/131) 15/16 17/18 19/201) 15/16 17/18 2 With handle, silver, blue, red PU pc/Pack for jar Ø mm silver Order No. blue Order No. 100 19 31 88131 100 19 31 88151 100 19 31 88171 100 19 31 88191 19 31 88152 19 31 88172 19 31 88192 red Order No. 19 31 88153 19 31 88173 19 31 88193 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) After selling off no longer available With handle, yellow, green for jar Ø mm yellow Order No. PU pc/Pack green Order No. 100 10 31 83343 100 10 31 83443 10 31 83353 10 31 83453 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. With handle, black, violet, brown for jar Ø mm black Order No. PU pc/Pack violet Order No. brown1) Order No. 15/16 17/18 100 10 31 83373 100 10 31 83473 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) After selling off no longer available 10 31 83383 10 31 83483 10 31 83463 SILICOSEN® Sterile Plugs, Hirschmann SILICOSEN® are specially processed culture plugs in silicone rubber with continuous bubbles for preparation, filling and sterilisation of culture media. Their uniform pore struc- ture and good air permeability make them excellent for the cultivation of aerobic micro-or- ganisms. SILICOSEN® culture stoppers have low water evaporation which makes them particular- ly suitable for long term cultures. The lateral surface is covered with an external skin, air exchange can only can only take place vertically. The stoppers are water repellent, chem- ically resistant and temperature resistant. Dry sterilized (180°C) and high-pressure steam sterilized. Can be hot water or in neutral detergent washed and disinfected. They are re- usable. co d e b e w WW4ZV073 SILICOSEN® type stopper 3 Type NS Order No. To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 827 2 3 4 5 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 37 05510 10 37 05512 10 37 05515 10 37 05517 10 37 05519 10 37 05522 10 37 05524 10 37 05528 10 37 05532 10 37 05538 10 37 05542 10 37 05552 10 37 05566 10 37 05576 10 37 05612 10 37 05617 10 37 05622 Order No. 10 37 05720 10 37 05730 10 37 05740 10 37 05755 10 37 05765 Order No. 10 37 05828 10 37 05835 10 37 05840 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 T10 T12 T15 T17 T19 T22 T24 T28 T32 T38 T42 T52 T66 T76 L12 L17 L22 5 d1 mm 28 35 39 d1 mm 10 12 15 17 19 22 24 28 32 38 42 52 66 76 12 17 22 d2 mm 6 9 11 13 15 18 20 20 22 26 32 42 54 64 9 13 18 l1 mm 13 14 15 10 12 15 21 20 23 30 35 40 40 40 40 30 30 l2 mm 17 17 20 30 30 30 31 35 32 35 50 60 60 60 10 20 30 6/9 9/11 11/14 13/16 15/18 18/21 20/23 20/23 22/30 26/35 30/40 40/50 54/63 64/74 9/11 13/16 18/21 4 d1 mm SILICOSEN® type cap d3 mm 20 30 40 55 65 d2 mm 12 18 27 34 42 16 26 36 50 57 SILICOSEN® type super l1 mm 18 20 20 d2 mm 17 24 28 co d e b e w l1 mm 28 28 28 28 29 l2 mm 27 30 30 Neck O.D. mm 15–20 20–30 30–40 40–55 42–52 Neck I.D. mm 17–26 24–33 28–38

829

Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WW4ZV074 co d e b e w WWSU9042 1 2 Culture Vessels, Closures BIO-SILICO® culture stoppers, Hirschmann BIO-SILICO®are specially processed culture plugs in silicone rubber with continuous bubbles for preparation, filling and sterilisation of culture media. Their uniform pore struc- ture and good air permeability make them excellent for the cultivation of aerobic micro-or- ganisms. BIO-SILICO® culture stoppers have high air permeability, similar to cotton plugs. The stoppers are water repellent, chemically resistant, temperature resistant and reusable. Type N12 N15 N17 N19 N22 N24 N28 N32 N42 N52 d1 mm 13 16 19 21 24 26 30 34 44 54 d2 mm 9 11 13 15 18 20 21 22 30 40 l1 mm 13 14 15 16 18 20 20 24 32 36 l2 mm 17 22 25 28 30 32 34 36 46 50 NS Order No. 9/11 11/14 13/16 15/18 18/21 20/23 21/26 22/30 30/40 40/50 10 37 05912 10 37 05915 10 37 05917 10 37 05919 10 37 05922 10 37 05924 10 37 05928 10 37 05932 10 37 05942 10 37 05952 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Bioreactors Anaerobic Containers, Dinkelberg Analytics Anaerobic Containers For culturing of micro-organisms under anaerobic (free of oxygen) conditions. Containers made of thick-walled clear PVC, very stable design. Easy-to-remove lid with O-ring seal and center closure, without valves and manometer. The connection of nitrogen makes anaerobe bags redundant. Technical data: DIAB10001 Models: Internal dimensions (dia. × H): 148 × 190 mm External dimensions (dia. × H): 160 × 250 mm Weight: Features: 1.5 kg incl. removable stand for 10 Petri dishes with 100 mm dia. or 36 with 60 mm dia. DIAB10003 148 × 290 mm 160 × 350 mm 1.9 kg incl. removable stand for 16 Petri dishes with 10 mm dia. or 54 with 60 mm dia. Article Anaerobic container, small model, type DIAB10001 (The picture shows the basic model without a gas kit) 1 Anaerobic container, large model, type DIAB10003 (The picture shows the basic model with a gas set, which is available as an optional accessory.) 2 Set: Anaerobic container small + gas kit Type DIAB10005 Set: Anaerobic container large + gas kit Type DIAB10006 Order No. 88 32 10001 88 32 10003 10 32 10005 10 32 10006 Accessories Article 3 Gas kit, type DIAB10004 For DIAB10001/DIAB10003. Consisting of 1 manometer and 2 Order No. 88 32 10004 shut-off valves (additional height 20 mm) for filling the anaerobic containers with gas from bottles (hydrogen, carbon dioxide, nit- rogen etc.) Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. 3 co d e b e w 828

830

Bioreactors Culturing Units, Aerne Analytic For growing bacteria or yeast cultures, for example acidification cultures. Equipped with membrane keypad. Material: white PP Type Specification AEA 1-5 AEA 2-5 AEA 4-5 AEA 6-5 AEA 1-10 AEA 2-10 AEA 4-10 AEA 6-10 AEA 1-20 AEA 2-20 AEA 4-20 AEA 6-20 suitable for 1 × container of 5 l suitable for 2 × containers, 5 l each suitable for 4 × containers, 5 l each suitable for 6 × containers, 5 l each suitable for 1 × container of 10 l suitable for 2 × containers, 10 l each suitable for 4 × containers, 10 l each suitable for 6 × containers, 10 l each suitable for 1 × container of 20 l suitable for 2 × containers, 20 l each suitable for 4 × containers, 20 l each suitable for 6 × containers, 20 l each Voltage V 230 400 400 400 230 400 400 400 230 400 400 400 Order No. 10 64 00015 10 64 00025 10 64 00045 10 64 00065 10 64 00110 10 64 00210 10 64 00410 10 64 00610 10 64 00120 10 64 00220 10 64 00420 10 64 00620 Other numbers of tanks or customised versions available on request. Options for culturing units (on request): Addition of 2-6 mother culture flasks, pH-control, touch screen, agitator Accessories for culturing units (on request): Culture tank 5/10/20 l, lid for 5/10/20 l culture tank, agitator for 5, 10 and 20 l culture tank, aseptic silicon plug, mother culture flask 500 ml, control thermometer 0 – 100°C, reducer rings from 20 to 10 l, 20 to 5 l and 10 to 5 l, laboratory roller set Anaerobic Jars, schuett-biotec Anaerobic Jars For the cultivation of anaerobic and microaerophilic microorganisms in a defined, rapidly generated and optimum gas atmosphere. There are two ways to establish the required atmosphere under optimum conditions: Either by chemical GasPack kits (anaerobic systems) or by manual evacuation of the jars via vacuum pump and subsequent gassing (e.g. with nitrogen). No chemical accessories are required in this case (except anaerobic jars “eco” and “crystal eco”). The jars are made of robust stainless steel or transparent PC. The jar lids are made of UV-stable plastic or transparent polycarbonate, equipped with two corner valves incl. tube clips for vacuum hoses (inner diameter 5 mm) as well as manometer for exact control of the vacuum or overpressure (-1 to +0.2 bar) (except anaerobic jars “eco” and “crystal eco”). The option- al stainless steel racks are equipped with holders for comfortable handling of the anaer- obic systems. Anaerobic methods: 3 x evacuation and gassing, uninterrupted gassing for 5 minutes, and chemical gas generation (GasPacks) for anaerobic jars “small”, “standard”, “large” and “crystal”. For anaerobic jars “eco” and “crystal eco”, only uninterrupted gassing for 5 minutes (use of GasPack kits). Special versions: Other equipment available on request. Examples: Specifically produced lids, for example made of special or heat-resistant ma- terials, heat-resistant pressure gauge (max. 100°C), anaerobic jar “large” with stainless steel lid, without cocks/pressure gauges, etc. Biotechnology Culture Vessels co d e b e w WW39Q001 1 2 3 4 5 6 Technical data: Anaerobic jar “large” 6 Liters: Inner Ø mm: 175 Inner height mm:260 Material jar: Stainless steel Material cover: Plastic (black) Configuration: 2 valves 1 manometer Anaerobic jar “small” 2 120 170 Stainless steel Plastic (black) 2 valves 1 manometer Anaerobic jar “standard” 3 120 270 Stainless steel Plastic (black) 2 valves 1 manometer Anaerobic jars for up to 15 Petri dishes Ø 60 – 100 mm (150 mm) Anaerobic jar “eco” 3 120 270 Stainless steel Polycarbonat (transp.) Polycarbonat (transp.) Plastic (black) Ventilation screw Anaerobic jar “crystal” 3 120 270 Polycarbonat (transp.) Polycarbonat (transp.) Anaerobic jar “crystal eco” 3 120 270 Ventilation screw 2 valves 1 manometer Article 3 Anaerobic jar “large” 1 Anaerobic jar “small” 2 Anaerobic jar “standard” 4 Anaerobic jar “eco”1) 5 Anaerobic jar “crystal” 6 Anaerobic jar “crystal eco” (only for GasPack-Kits) Order No. 10 31 83801 10 31 83802 10 31 83803 10 31 83805 10 31 83809 10 31 83810 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 829

831

Biotechnology Culture Vessels 1 2 co d e b e w WWQ7T020 Bioreactors Racks with holder for anaerobic systems Article Rack “small” for up to 10 Petri dishes Ø 60–100 mm suitable for anaerobic jars large, small, standard, eco, crystal 1 Rack “standard” for up to 15 Petri dishes Ø 60–100 mm suitable for anaerobic jars large, standard, eco, crystal Rack “150” for up to 15 Petri dishes Ø 150 mm suitable for anaerobic jars large Rack “3x60” for up to 45 Petri dishes Ø 60 mm suitable for anaerobic jars large Rack “micro” for multiwell plates suitable for anaerobic jars large 2 Rack “Test Tubes” for 9 test tubes Ø 18 mm suitable for anaerobic jars large, small, standard, eco, crystal Order No. 10 31 83851 10 31 83852 10 31 83853 10 31 83854 10 31 83855 10 31 83856 GasPack-Kits “anaerobic”, “CO2”, “microaerophil” available on request. Winpact Fermentation Systems, Zefa Winpact bioreactors offer scaleable solutions for your bioprocesses in volumes from 500 ml to 20 litres. We furthermore provide a scale-up to match your production process for 30, 50 or up to 100 litres. The operator-friendly benchtop systems meet a wide range of applications and application assistants. • Duo heating system, thermostat and dry heating all integrated in one unit • True Parallel system, 1 control regulates 2 vessels • Control of up to 16 systems via a single interface • Intuitive user interface for quick familiarisation • Ethernet communication with Winpact SCADA software and IP addressing FS-06 1 2 1 FS-07 duo heating system 500 ml – 20 litres changeable glass vessels, autoclavable FS-05 Technical data: Heating: Working volume: Vessels: Modell: Number of vessels which can be operated by one controller: Number of vessels which can be operated via remote software: Touch screen: Number of pumps: Number of external pumps: Gas mixing options: Oxygen enrichment: Mass flow controllers: Exhaust gas analysis: ORP probe: Light module: Solid state program: Please enter the webcode WWQ7T020 to see other configurations and vessel models in our online catalogue max. 32 10.4 ″ 8 4 max. yes yes yes yes yes yes yes max. 16 8 ″ 3 1 max. no no no no no no no max. 16 10.4 ″ 4 2 max. yes yes yes yes yes yes yes 3 830 Article 3 FS-05 Basic unit FS-05-220 Fermentation kit for FS-05 with double jacketed 1000 ml vessel FS-06 Winpact complete fermentation system FS-06 with double ja- Order No. 10 83 29174 10 83 29175 10 83 29176 cketed 1000 ml vessel FS-07 Winpact complete fermentation system FS-07 with double ja- 10 83 29177 cketed 1000 ml vessel

832

Biotechnology Sample Processing 1 4 2 5 3 Colony Counters schuett count Colony Counter, schuett-biotec Colony Counter count Designed for reliable and efficient counting of bacterial colonies and bacteriophage plaques growing on nutrient agar or nutrient disks/filter disks in Petri dishes. • For Petri dishes with Ø 90 mm (optional Ø 60 mm or Ø 150 mm) • Individual adjustable light, sensitivity of counting plate, volume of buzzer • Average count calculation, data transfer via USB to customer’s PC. Exported to Excel for further editing, saving, printing. Modern LED lighting technology absolutely glare-free and eye gentle • Three types of illumination: from below, from the side or from the top (optional) • A so far unknown transparency and differentiation (on agar or nutrient disk), even with transparent colonies • Natural colour reproduction and brilliant lighting • No heating of the samples Easy counting by marking the colonies with an ordinary felt-tip marker pen on the Petri dish • Acoustical counting observation (buzzer with adjustable volume) • 4-digit LED-display (0-9999) • Clearly arranged foil keypad for all controls Included in scope of delivery: For Petri dishes with Ø 90 mm: Adapter (transparent) for illumination from below and adapter (black/white) for illumination from the side, contrast disk (black), USB cable, felt- tip marker pen with pen holder. For counting approx. 50 Petri dishes per day, the automatic colony counter schuett colonyQuant is recommended (sample chamber, PC/notebook, software licence). Au- tomatic counting and documentation of Petri dishes or nutrient disks, populated with smallest colonies of <0.05 mm diameter, mixed cultures are possible. Can be optionally connected to an existing LIM system. Petrifilm assessment, test assessment of custom- er-specific plates can be carried out before you decide to purchase. (Further informations on request). Technichal data: Dimensions (W × H × D): Height with gooseneck magnifying glass/lamp: Weight: 260 × 130 × 250 mm approx. 300 mm approx. 1.5 kg Article 1 schuett count colony counter, 100 – 240 V Order No. 10 31 81502 Accessories, matching for schuett count 10 31 81612 Order No. 10 31 81602 Article 1 Magnifying glass1) 3-fold magnification Magnifying glass with Ø 100 mm (whole petri dish) Magnifying glass1) 6 – 8-fold magnification Magnifying glass with Ø 60 mm (parts of petri dishes) 1 LED top light lamp1) 10 31 81702 10 31 81802 2 Adapter for Petri dishes with Ø 50-60 mm 10 31 81812 3 Adapter for Petri dishes with Ø 140-150 mm 10 31 81882 Adapter for Petrifilm 10 31 81902 4 Spiral Plater disk, black/white 10 31 81912 4 Wolffhügel disk, black/white 10 31 81922 5 Counting needle 5 Felt-tip marker pen (water-resistant) 10 31 81932 count Extract!basic software, German language, licence code 10 31 81900 count Extract!basic software, English language, licence code 10 31 81910 1) Gooseneck holder, individually adjustable Adapter for other petri dish sizes available on request. More than 20,000 articles in this catalogue – and still more on our website ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 831

833

Biotechnology Sample Processing co d e b e w WW2NY409 1 Colony Counters Colony Counter, neoLab® Quantica 500™ is an automatic colony counter designed for a variety of microbiological applications. The high-resolution camera, uniquely compact design, adaptable LED illu- mination and powerful yet user-friendly software make this colony counter stand out. The measurement is suitable for different types of Petri dishes with agar and chromogenic culture media. Quantica 500™ automatically counts colonies of microorganisms for quantitative analysis even during microbiological tests. Thanks to an efficient algorithm, even merged colonies are correctly distinguished and counted. • suitable for Petri dishes up to max. 90 mm diameter • automatic separation of merged colonies (in terms of sizes and colours) • adding and removing colonies manually • pre-programmed settings for different media types • possibility to create exclusion zones of any shape and size • ergonomic housing • user-friendly software • three lighting modes (eliminates the influence of external lighting) • image parameters are automatically optimized by the software • setting the counting stage and counting range • automatic recording and printing of data, photos and results In addition, Quantica enables 500+™: • measurement of inhibition zones (according to EUCAST and CLSI) • identification of antimicrobial susceptibility wafers • scanning of barcodes Technical data: Camera: Camera resolution: Power supply: Dimensions: Weight: Minimum size of detected colony: Plate size: Counting speed: Log formats: Software languages: Archiving of photos and results: Barcode reader: USB connection/cabel: Minimum System Requirements: Article 1 Colony counter Quantica 500 Colony counter Quantica 500+ 5 Mpx (CMOS, zoom ×64) 2592 × 1944 px 100–240 V / 50-60 Hz 24 × 20 × 25 cm 2.5 kg 0.05 mm 55 mm, 90 mm < 0.5 sek. .xls, .jpeg, .png, .pdf (optional integration with the client’s internal system) German, English, French, Polish yes yes yes Operating system: Windows 10 CPU: Intel atom CPU clock speed: 1,2 GHz RAM: 4 GB Other requirements: USB 2.0 compatible USB port Display resolution: 1366x768 Order No. 10 01 50000 10 01 50001 Bacteria Counter ColonyStar, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber Bacteria Counter ColonyStar with accessories (magnifying lens 8501, fibre refill 8504, clear glass disc 8505) For the manual counting of colonies, with pressure-sensitive light field 145 mm in diame- ter, with direct and indirect energy-saving LED illumination, with adjustable brightness and colour, with digital display and acoustic counter feedback, height-adjustable housing, black and white Wolffhügel disc with 1 cm2 and 1/9 cm2 graduation. Magnifying lens with flexible arm (Ø 90 mm), 2 x magnification. Petri dishes with a diameter of up to 145 mm can be used; the reducing insert supplied can be used for Petri dishes with a smaller di- ameter. Technical data: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Article ColonyStar, complete 275 × 300 × 80 mm 2 kg Order No. 10 42 08500 832 Continued on next page

834

Biotechnology Sample Processing Colony Counters Accessories Article Magnifying lens with flexible arm Wolffhügel disc Disk white, graduation black Felt-tip marker Wolffhügel disc Disk black, graduation white Order No. 88 42 08501 10 42 08502 10 42 08504 10 42 08505 Sample Application Turntable for Petri Dishes, neoLab® Turntable for uniform seeding of Petri dishes. Turntable on compact base with ball bear- ing, no drive. For Petri dishes up to 100 mm Ø. Article Turntable for Petri dishes Order No. 88 01 31720 co d e b e w WW2NY314 schuett petriturn Turntables for Petri Dishes, schuett-biotec For uniform plating and inoculating of liquids on agar surfaces in petri dishes. Easy to handle, antifatique. Made in Germany. 1 schuett petriturn-M Manual operation, constant rotary motion. Powerful and persistent due to high mass (weight) of turntable. Usable on both sides, that means two work spaces in one device by easiest turn-over. For petri dishes with dia. 90 up to 150 mm. 1 Article schuett petriturn-M, manual Ø × H mm 160 × 45 Order No. 88 31 31001 2 schuett petriturn-E Electrically driven. Constant rotary motion. Simple contactless handling of the turntable, started via IR sensor (operating time adjustable from 3 to 120 sec), permanent running, connection of a foot-switch (optional). Continuously adjustable speed of 10 to 120 rpm. For petri dishes up to dia. 100 mm (dia. 150 mm optional). Compact stainless steel casing. Article Ø × H mm schuett petriturn-E, electrical, 230 V 160 × 70 Foot switch for schuett petriturn-E Turntable-attachment for petri-dishes to Ø 150 mm Instrument tray, stainless steel Turntables for petri dishes of other diameters available on request. Order No. 88 31 31011 88 31 31013 10 31 81015 10 31 88352 Inoculating hooks for plating (Drigalski spatula) Article 3 Inoculating hook, glass 4 Inoculating hook, stainless steel L mm 145 180 W mm 40 58 Order No. 88 31 31014 88 31 31012 2 3 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 833

835

Biotechnology Sample Processing 2 1 3 4 6 5 7 9 834 Sample Application Safety Laboratory Gas Burners, WLD-TEC Laboratory Gas Burners Safety enhanced laboratory gas burner series, suitable for all flame related applications in the laboratory. The low profile body facilitates ergonomic operation, the streamlined de- sign reduces air flow disturbances in a clean room workbench. (approved by DIN-DVGW, NG-2211AS0167). Applicable for natural gas or propane / butane gas connection. Fuego SCS basic / basic RF: Flexible flame operation with button function or foot pedal. The foot pedal regulates the burning time either by continuous foot pressure or by start- stop function. Fuego SCS basic RF: Wireless due to modern radio foot pedal operation. Fuego SCS / pro: With IR-Sensor, button function or optional foot pedal. The DoubleClick IR-Sensor ensures that the burner can only be ignited by activating the IR-Sensor twice. New: Illuminated graphic display: Animated, self-explanatory & language-less. 6 pro- grams with timer 1 s - 2 h, adjustable. New: Comfort functions: Cooling time reminder for loops, temperature regulation for heating media, gas consumption display for cartridge, selecting user account, acoustic signals as operating aids. New: Additional safety assistance: Zero-pressure shut off for a pressureless gas hose at the end of work, graphical installation instructions facilitate the initial start-up. Fuego SCS pro: rechargeable battery operation (9h), fast charge function (3h) and safety tilt sensor. 2 rechargeable batteries, Mignon (AA), 1.2V, NiMH Measurements Fuego SCS series: 103 × 49 × 130 mm (W × H × D) Gasprofi 1 SCS micro: The smallest safety laboratory gas burner worldwide with Dou- bleClick IR-Sensor, button function and foot pedal. Measurements: 85 × 49 × 86 mm (W × H × D) Common Features / Functions: • Made of high-class stainless steel with special glass display • SCS Safety Control System with gas safety cut-off: Ignition and flame control, temper- ature monitor, automatic unit switch off, residual heat display • BHC clogging and assembly monitor of removable stainless steel burner head • Adjustable IR-Sensor reaction distance • Turbo flame, nozzles for natural gas, propane/butane gas • Holding device for 3 inoculation loop holders, tilt mechanism right/left • Push fit and threaded connection, gas filter • Power supply: 100 - 240 V (worldwide use), 2 years warranty Article Order No. 1 Fuego SCS basic, button, stainless steel foot pedal, 3 programs 10 30 78001 Fuego SCS basic RF, button, radio foot pedal (stainless steel), 3 programs 10 30 78300 2 Fuego SCS, graphic display, DoubleClick IR-Sensor, button, 6 programs 10 30 78000 Fuego SCS pro, as Fuego SCS, rechargeable battery operation 10 30 78002 3 Gasprofi 1 SCS micro, DoubleClick IR-Sensor, button, 5 programs 10 30 76400 8 Accessories AT for Fuego SCS/pro Article Stainless steel foot pedal for Fuego SCS/pro 4 Foot pedal Radio-Upgraded package with stainless steel foot pedal 5 Adapter for gas cartridges CV 360 Adapter for gas cartridges C206, with gas tubing1)3) 6 Adapter for gas cartridges CV470/CV300 with gas tubing1)2)3) Adapter for gas cartridges CG1750, with gas tubing1)2)3) Adapter for gas cartridges CP250, with gas tubing1)2) 7 Splash guard made of glass 8 Wind guard made of stainless steel 9 Tray, for right or left side DVGW safety tubing for push-fit connection, 0.5 m DVGW safety tubing for threaded screw connection, 0.5 m AT Stainless steel burner head, double length All adapters include safety pressure reducer. 1) DVGW tubing 0.5 m 2) Stainless steel stand included 3) Shut off valve Order No. 32 30 66402 10 30 78404 10 30 78700 32 30 62080 32 30 63085 32 30 63081 32 30 63082 32 30 64020 10 30 78600 10 30 78340 32 30 67102 32 30 67112 10 30 78191

836

Biotechnology Sample Processing Sample Application AutoloopPRO – Fully Automated Sterilisation for Inoculation Loops, WLD-TEC Suitable for Fuego Series and Gasprofi micro Series The carrousel rotates and controls flaming automatically and detects removed and re- placed inoculation loop. Continuous working during the flaming and the cooling phases of the inoculation loops saves up to 70% time. • Fully graphic display & stable housing • Removal position on both sides for right and left handers • Adjustable flaming and cooling time exact to the second • During the flame sterilizing, the display shows the remaining flaming time • Additional flame sterilisation (e.g. of bottle necks), possible with optional foot pedal • An intelligent sensor monitors the safe sterilization • Display protected by heat resistant glass • 4 inoculation loop holders & pedestal Laboratory gas burner not included. Technical data: Rotation direction: Inoculation loop holder: Time of flame sterilizing: Adjustable sterilization monitor: Safety features: Casing: Measurements: left/right, depends on removed holder 1 – 4, with optical holder detection 1 – 15 s, adjustable 3 setting options / off switch temperature control flame activation warning indicator of remaining cool-down tilt sensor and residual heat display Stand by automatic unit switch off: 1 h stainless steel, aluminum, UV and solvent resistant Height Autoloop Pro 305 mm Article Order No. 1 Autoloop Pro for Fuego series, pedestal 135 × 180 mm 10 30 78038 Autoloop Pro for Gasprofi micro series, pedestal 135 × 135 mm 10 30 78039 Splash guard for Autoloop Pro 32 30 69021 1 schuett phoenix II Safety Bunsen Burner, schuett-biotec 2 schuett phoenix II Safety Bunsen Burner For sterilising, heating, flame sterilising. Modern Bunsen burner with state-of-the-art safety features plus outstanding quality char- acteristics: Operating instructions and safety notes in the form of images and written language (in the colour display) in most international languages. Brilliant colour display. Unique Joy-Stick navigation. Operating modes: by hand or with foot pedal or motion sensor. Designed for use in microbiological safety cabinets. Housing made of stainless steel and safety glass. UV- and solvent resistant. For case of cleaning and flame-sterilising. Suitable for use with natural gas (central gas) or butane/propane gas (gas cartridges). “Push-and-Twist” bayonet fixture for burner head, no tools needed for cleaning. Integrat- ed stand for tilting right or left. Controlled burning time 1 sec. to 120 min. (selectable). Automatic safety switch-of (selectable). Overheat protection / burner control via sensors. flame and ignition monitoring. Safety standard acc. to DIN 30665 part 1, DIN-DVGW Reg. 3 models available: schuett phoenix II eco (with foot-switch and LED indicator light) Start/stop flame by foot-switch or press button by hand (ON/OFF). Best suited for micro- biological safety cabinets. schuett phoenix II standard (colour display, language selection, sensor and foot- switch) Start/Stop flame by activating sensor 1x or 2x, use foot switch or press button by hand. Burn-time displayed. schuett phoenix II accu (colour display, language selection, sensor and built-in high-power battery) Start/stop flame by activating sensor 1x or 2x, use foot-switch or press button by hand (ON/OFF). Burn-time and battery status displayed. Built-in high-power battery for up to 30 hours operating time (high-speed battery charger incl. overcharge protection), ideal for mobile operation. 2 3 128 × 160 × 85 mm 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz approx. 1000 g Dimensions (W×D×H): Power: Weight: Article 2 schuett phoenix II eco 3 schuett phoenix II standard schuett phoenix II accu co d e b e w Order No. 10 31 83542 10 31 83552 10 31 83562 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 835

837

Biotechnology Sample Processing 3 4 2 1 5 6 836 Sample Application Accessories Article 1 Adapter for gas cartridges CV 3601) Adapter for gas cartridges CV 2062) Adapter for gas cartridges CV 300/4702) 2 Adapter for gas cartridges CP 2502) Adapter for gas cartridges CG 17502) Foot-switch, stainless steel, 3.5 m cable 3 Glass spatter guard 4 Flame shield, stainless steel Hot-Tray, stainless steel, 160 × 140 × 160 mm Pressure reduction valve for 5 or 11 kg propane gas bottles Instrument tray, stainless steel 1) incl. pressure reducer 2) incl. pressure reducer and gas-safety hose 0.5 m Suitable cartridges and gas-safety hoses on request. Order No. 10 31 87212 10 31 87232 10 31 87252 10 31 87302 10 31 87322 10 31 88392 10 31 88332 10 31 88342 10 31 88352 10 31 88362 10 31 88302 Flame sterilization carousels semi- and fully automated For precise and time-controlled flaming of different kinds of inoculating loops. Minimiza- tion of gas consumption, the life of the inoculating loops is significantly increased. The inoculating loop is placed into the carousel after use and is sterilized immediately after turning the holder in flaming position. Sterilization time infinitely adjustable. Designed for continuous work-flow with sample series in the Laminar Flow. Semi-automated: schuett easyloop (for 6 Inoculating loop holders) Comfortable manual rotation,fully automated flaming process. For use with Safety Bunsen Burners schuett phoenix II standard and accu. Sterilization time: adjustable from 1 s to 120 min Fully automated: schuett flammy R (for 5 Inoculating loop holders) Fully automated rotation and inoculating. In combination with a standard gas-safety-burn- er (e.g. schuett phoenix II). Sterilization time: 2 to 10 s (selectable) Dimensions (W×H×D): 100 × 160 × 345 mm Power: Weight: Article 5 schuett easyloop schuett flammy R 230 V, 50 Hz or 115 V, 60 Hz approx. 2000 g Order No. 10 31 83202 10 31 83531 6 schuett easyflame flame sterilizer Mobile and handy device for scarfing and flame-sterilising. With piezoelectric-ignition and gas supply control for producing a “soft” or a “sharp” flame. Infinite adjustment of the flame. Highest operational safety. In short-term use, the flame is activated as long as the push button is pressed. For continuous operation with lock key. schuett easyflame for direct connection to propane/butane gas cartridges • Connection of cartridges witih 7/16" screw thread, such as CG 1750, Express 444, AT200 • By means of an adapter (available as an option), CV 360 or CP 250 plug-in gas cartridg- es can be used schuett easyflameplus for connection of natural gas and propane/butane gas by means of gas safety hoses • Natural gas hose for central gas supply; simple plug-on connection at the device • Propane/butane gas hose with screwed connection (¼" left-hand thread) for use of gas cartridge adapters or gas cylinders, see accessories schuett phoenix II Dimensions (W×H×D): 260 × 90 × 60 mm Weight: approx 350 g Article schuett easyflame flame sterilizer to use with propane/butane gas, incl. PVC-holder for cartridges to use with natural gas and propane/butane gas schuett easyflameplus flame sterilizer CV 360 adapter for schuett easyflame for the connection of butane gas cartridges CV 360 (only for 10 31 89102) CP 250 adapter for schuett easyflame for the connection of butane gas cartridges CP 250 (only for 10 31 89102) Adapter for gas cartridges CV 2062) Adapter for gas cartridges CV 300/4702) 2) incl. pressure reducer and gas-safety hose 0.5 m Order No. 10 31 89102 10 31 89112 10 31 89502 10 31 89602 10 31 87232 10 31 87252

838

Biotechnology Sample Processing Sample Application schuett solaris Loop Sterilizer, schuett-biotec Sterilization of inoculating loops, tweezers and small instruments within seconds. It’s magic - Sterilization with light! • Robust and easy to maintain • No gas, no open flame – uses electrical power • Self-explanatory, easy to use • Instant-ready-to-use, no warm-up time, no waiting • Sterilization temperature 900 to 1,300°C • With IR-sensor for a touch-free START, with adjustable timer (5 to 7 seconds) • Suitable for use in safety workbenches The schuett solaris is the perfect solution if an open flame should be avoided, gas car- tridges are difficult to get, or no central gas supply is available. Used with standard electrical power. Reaches the safe working temperature of 900 – 1,300 °C within the split of a second. No warm-up time, no excess heat, no energy con- sumption between work cycles. START is generated by an infra-red sensor, which allows for efficient one-handed operation. Pathogenic material is kept inside the sterilization chamber. No spreading, no sooting. 4-level adjustment of the operating angle for optimum alignment in various working positions. Scope of delivery: schuett solaris inoculating loop sterilizer incl. 2 x quartz glass tube, 1 inoculation loop holder with inoculation loop (sample) 152 × 210 × 195 mm approx. 2500 g Dimensions (W × H × D): Weight: Article schuett solaris loop sterilizer, 230 V schuett solaris loop sterilizer, 115 V Quartz tube with bottom Outer-Ø 17 mm, length 100 mm (qty = 2) Order No. 10 31 89902 10 31 89912 10 31 89952 SteriMax smart / basic – Infrared Loop Sterilizer, WLD-TEC High-Speed Annealing and Sterilizing without flame. Ideally suited for use in any type of lab, anaerobic work environment and Laminar Flow Cabinet. Specifically focused infrared light sterilize your inoculation loop at temperatures from 750 to 1000°C after just 5 to 10 seconds. • Instantly ready to work without any unnecessary warm-up • Annealing tube made of special quartz glass • Very simple cleaning of the device and the annealing tube • Efficient use of power and minimum heat dissipation thanks to the Thermocontol tech- nology • Cool-Touch housing made of stainless steel and safety glass (no risk of combustion) • Tested and certified for photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems according to 1 EN 62471 by BG ETEM - Risk-free for skin and eyes SteriMax smart • Auto-Start through touchless IR-Sensor technology • Adjustable sterilization and cool-down timers for two users by touch operation SteriMax basic • Comfortable touch or foot pedal operation. (foot pedal optional) 2 Article 1 SteriMax smart 2 SteriMax basic Replace annealing tube made of quartz glass Stainless steel foot pedal for Fuego SCS/pro For SteriMax basic Foot pedal Radio-Upgraded package with stainless steel foot pedal 10 30 78404 For SteriMax basic Order No. 10 30 74010 10 30 74110 10 30 74040 32 30 66402 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 837

839

Biotechnology Sample Processing Sample Application STERI Sterilizer, LAT co d e b e w WWW4U043 This instant sterilizer enables small instruments to be disinfected and sterilized within seconds directly where they are used. Especially suitable for laminar flow devices. Bio- logical investigations and tests prove that the constant temperature of 250°C in the glass bead container reliably kills all micro-organisms and spores within a few seconds. That part of the instrument which is immersed in the STERI glass beads is sterilized. The STERI 25, 250 and 350 are three sizes with the same design: a glass bead container made of chrome steel, a powerful heating element for short heating times, a precision thermostat, and a temperature limiter with built-in thermometer. Model Voltage Power rating Heating time to 250°C Glass bead container Dimensions inner container Ø × D STERI glass beads (filling quantity) STERI glass dish STERI unit lid Insulation STERI 25 V 110/120 or 220/240 W 50 min approx. 10 Stahl INOX 3 × 4 mm 40 g not available Stahl INOX Mineral wool asbestos-free Outer dimensions H × W × D cm 10 × 8.5 × 9 Weight Order No. 41 80 50025 g 650 STERI 250 110/120 or 220/240 90 approx. 18 Stahl INOX 4 × 8 STERI 350 110/120 or 220/240 90 approx. 25 Stahl INOX 4 × 14 150 300 included Stahl INOX Mineral wool asbestos-free 14.5 × 12.5 × 14 1400 41 80 50250 not included Stahl INOX Mineral wool asbestos-free 20.5 × 12.5 × 14 1850 41 80 50350 Drigalski Spatula, neoLab® Drigalski spatula made of high-grade steel and glass In the commonest shapes for spreading on plates or for better distribution of media. Length mm 1 165 2 195 3 195 4 165 5 200 Width mm 30 40 40 40 45 Ø mm 2 4 4 4 4 Form Material Order No. Stainless steel flat handle Handle with triangle Stainless steel Stainless steel L-shape L-shape Stainless steel Handle with triangle Glas 33 01 31734 33 01 31732 33 01 31724 33 01 31729 33 01 31721 Disposalbe Drigalski spatula made of ABS-plastic For immediate use. The smooth surface does not destroy agar and does not mix media layers. Delta™ (pict. 8) for especially gentle working. The triangle head distributes the pressure evenly, the handle is flexible and equipped with grip gouges. Sterile single packed. Length mm 6 146 7 172 Width mm 38 37 Ø mm 4 14 Form Order No. L-Form Delta 10 01 31736 10 01 31737 PU pc/Pack 10 10 8 Sterile disposable Drigalski spatula, made of PS Drigalski spatula made from polystyrene. Disposable. Smooth spreading surface reduces the risk of damaging agar surface. Packing type individually packed 10 pc/Pack Colour orange orange sterile Order No. yes yes 10 01 40066 10 01 40067 PU pc/Pack 500 10 4 3 5 co d e b e w WW2NY316 2 1 6 7 8 838

840

Biotechnology Sample Processing co d e b e w WW2NY105 co d e b e w WW2NY341 co d e b e w WW2NY205 Sample Application Platinum/Platinum-Iridium/Silver Wire, neoLab® Platinum/Platinum-Iridium Wire 99.9% pure platinum wire for bending into inoculation loops or electrode wire. The pure platinum wire is soft and pliable, whereas 90/10 platinum-iridium wire is firm and springy. Please quote length in cm. Article Platinum wire Platinum wire Platinum wire Platinum wire Platinum iridium wire Platinum iridium wire Platinum iridium wire Ø mm 0.3 0.4 0.5 1.0 0.3 0.4 0.5 Order No. 33 01 23300 33 01 23301 33 01 23302 33 01 23304 33 01 23305 33 01 23306 33 01 23307 Silver Wire Purity >99,9%, sift and easy to bend, ideal for use in electronics and for electrodes. Avail- able by the centimeter. Article Silver wire Silver wire Silver wire Ø mm 0.3 0.5 1.0 Order No. 33 01 23308 33 01 23309 33 01 23310 Inoculating Loops and Needles, neoLab® Inoculating loops and needles, sterile, PS Sterile disposable PS inoculation loops for inoculating culture media in microbiology. The particularly smooth finish ensures gentle application without damaging the surface of the culture media. The end of the inoculation loops can also be used as a needle. Sterile disposable PS inoculation needles to remove individual colonies. Packaging unit: 500 pc./pack (individually packed in sterile zip bags of 25 pcs. each) Article Size Colour sterile Order No. Inoculating loop Inoculating loop Inoculating needle 1 µl 10 µl blue orange yellow yes yes yes 10 01 40054 10 01 40055 10 01 40056 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 Inoculating Loops, Stands and Holders, neoLab® Inoculating holders Kolle needle holders for inoculation loops, color-coded. Article Colour Inoculating loop holder white Inoculating loop holder blue Inoculating loop holder black Inoculating loop holder red Inoculating loop holder yellow 1 Inoculating stands, rectangular Article Material Overall length approx. mm 245 245 245 245 245 Order No. 33 01 12120 33 01 12121 33 01 12122 33 01 12123 33 01 12124 for qty inoc. loops L × W × H Order No. Inoculating loop stand Aluminium 4 Inoculating loop stand Wood 4 2 Inoculating stands, round Including space for inoculating loop storage tube. Article Material for qty inoc. loops Ø Inoculating stand Aluminium 6 Inoculating stand PP 6 Inoculating loops made of special stainless steel Suitable for repeated annealing. Article Material Inoculating loop Stainless steel Inoculating loop Stainless steel Inoculating loop Stainless steel Ø loop mm 1 3 5 L mm 50 50 50 mm 140 × 40 × 60 33 01 12118 140 × 40 × 60 33 01 12125 1 Height mm mm 100 60 100 60 Order No. 33 01 12119 33 01 12129 Order No. 33 01 12115 33 01 12116 33 01 12117 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 839 Continued on next page

841

Biotechnology Sample Processing 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WW2NY397 840 Sample Application Inoculating loops made of platinum/iridium wire Article Inoculating loop Inoculating loop Inoculating loop Inoculating loop Inoculating loop Material Ø wire mm Platinum iridium 0.6 Platinum iridium 0.6 Platinum iridium 0.6 Platinum iridium 1.0 Platinum iridium 1.0 Ø loop mm 1 3 5 3 5 L mm 50 50 50 50 50 Order No. 33 01 12111 33 01 12112 33 01 12113 33 01 12127 33 01 12128 Inoculating Loops and Loop Holders, schuett-biotec Inoculating loops for repeated annealing. Made of 3 different materials: stainless steel, special stainless steel wire or platinum-iridium wire (90/10). 60 mm long. Wire thickness 0.5 mm. Best results in long-term tests. 1 Inoculating loops Loop Ø Material mm 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 1.5 2.5 4.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 Platinum iridium Platinum iridium Platinum iridium Platinum iridium Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Special Stainless steel Special Stainless steel Special Stainless steel Special Stainless steel Order No. 33 31 00001 33 31 00002 33 31 00003 33 31 00005 10 31 80015 10 31 80025 10 31 80040 33 31 00010 33 31 00020 33 31 00030 33 31 00050 PU pc/Pack 1 1 1 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Platinum-iridium wire (90/10), wire-Ø 0.5 mm, available in cm Article Platinum-iridium wire (90/10), wire-Ø 0.5 mm Order No. 10 31 86050 2 Inoculating loop holders acc. Kolle, for inoculating loops 0.3 to 0.7 wire-Ø Stainless steel, with handle. Permanently fixed with lock nut. Length mm 160 240 Order No. 33 31 86362 33 31 86442 Racks for inoculating-loop holders Solid and stable racks made of plastic material (autoclavable) for 6 inoculating loop holders. Article Dimensions mm 3 Rack for inoculating loop holders R (round) 80 × 50 (Ø × H) 4 Rack for inoculating loop holders L (long) 180 × 50 × 50 (L × B × H) Order No. 33 31 01080 33 31 01180 neoCulture Cell Culture Cell Scraper, neoLab® With these cell scrapers you will have total access to all corners of the tissue flask. The cell scrapers have a free rotating blade to twist to the desired direction. Changes of the blade angle of the cell scraper only require slight pressure on the handle using the forfin- ger, thus pushing the handle downward towards the floor of the container. • material blades: PE • material handle: ABS • individually wrapped • sterilized by gamma irradiation • DNase / RNase-free • pyrogen-free Length mm 230 230 Blade width mm 12.5 19.5 Order No. 10 01 08222 10 01 08223 PU pc/Pack 150 150

842

Vacuum Systems Bottle Top Aspirators QuikSip™ BT-Aspirator, BRAND The bottletop aspirator is designed for safe and fast aspiration of common laboratory liquids. It simplifies removal of supernatants, such as culture media, from dishes, flasks, culture bottles and multiwell plates or from supernatants after precipitation and centrifu- gation of proteins and nucleic acids. A single channel device for removal of liquids out of reaction vessels, tubes, etc. is supplied as standard. Separately available is a 8-channel manifold for removal of liquids from multiwell plates. • Safe removal of supernatants (up to max. 25 ml per plunger stroke) • Works without vacuum pump. • Fingertip vacuum control using the cell-culture™ unit. • For use with disposable pipette tips, micropipettes and glass pasteur pipettes. • Adapter and suction tube of the cell-cultureTM are autoclavable (dispensing cartridge and pump unit are not autoclavable) • Ideal for use with the BRANDplates® Insert System. Order No. 14 49 83150 Article 1 QuikSip™ BT aspirator Items supplied: 1 QuikSip™ BT-Aspirator, 1 cell-culture™ unit incl. suction tube and 3 adapters, 1 spare dispensing cartridge, 2 PP adapters (GL 45/32 and GL 45/S40), ope- rating manual Article 2 8-channel pipette unit PP, autoclavable Order No. 14 49 84526 Vacuum Systems for Cell Culture/Microbiology, neoLab® 3 Vacuum system for Cell culture/microbiology Complete with base plate and bottle holder! For extracting and replacing solutions, consisting of: • Membrane vacuum pump, delivery rate 11 liters/min., vacuum end pressure 133 mbar • Plastic bottle, vacuum-proof, autoclavable, screw cap with 2 tube connectors for tubes with 6 mm I.D. • Safety filter, hydrophobic, for retaining bacteria and oil aerosols • Base plate with handles and bottle holder • 2 m Silicone tubing, 10 × 6 mm I.D., autoclavable Efficiency: >99.97% Biotechnology Sample Processing 1 co d e b e w WWQED025 2 co d e b e w WW2NY277 Article Vacuum pump system with 2 l bottle Vacuum pump system with 4 l bottle Accessories Article Spare bottle, 2 l with screw cap and tube connectors Spare bottle, 4 l with screw cap and tube connectors Foot switch Safety filter Safety trough 23 × 35 × 13 cm (inside) for switching on electric equipment Order No. 29 01 29335 29 01 29336 Order No. 29 01 29337 29 01 29338 29 01 22310 29 01 31905 29 01 29342 3 4 Vacuum system with build-in vacuum pump and bottle The liquid flow into the 4 ltr bottle via hand piece and vacuum hose. A filter between bot- tle and pump will avoid damage and contamination of the vacuum pump. The vacuum is adjustable from approx. 150 to max. 600 mb. Can be used for vacuum filtration. Noiseless pump. Additionally the model ...29330 has an built-in liquid level switch outside of the bottle (no contamination), which will stop the pump when the preset liquid level is reached. • 1 complete with 4000 ml bottle made of PP (autoclavable) • 1 Screw cap for the bottle with two 6 mm olives for fitting the hose • 1 Set of silicon tube for vacuum 2 m • 1 Safety Filter 0.2 µm Por. Technical data: Model ...29330: Model ...29331: Weight: Dimensions (W×D×H): Voltage: Version With liquid level switch Without liquid level switch suction system 4 l, with capacitive liquid level control suction system 4 l, without liquid level control approx. 2.0 kg 22 × 21 × 12 cm (without bottle) 220 Volt, 50/60 Hz with plug in power supply Order No. 10 01 29330 10 01 29331 W × D × H cm Bottle 22×21×12 22×21×12 4000 ml, PP 4000 ml, PP 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 841 Continued on next page

843

Biotechnology Sample Processing 1 2 co d e b e w WW2MB013 3 842 4 Vacuum Systems Accessories Article Spare bottle, 4 l Safety filter Liqui-Stop PP/PTFE Connector, LL female / barbed hose connection 1.6-2.6 mm, PP, 10 pcs./pack Quick-release coupling/PP, male part, for tubing I.D. 6.5 mm Spare lid with quick-release closure Liquid level sensor Order No. 29 01 29338 29 01 31905 10 01 21886 27 01 21871 83 01 29341 10 01 29332 1 neoVAQ vacuum system Portable The neoVAQ vacuum system Portable is characterised by its compact design which makes it easy to carry. It is perfectly suited for tasks in cell culture and microbiology, or for extracting liquid wastes in chemistry – any place where small amounts of liquid need to be disposed of (500 ml waste bottle). Complete with handle, 1-channel and 8-channel tip for pipette tips with ejection function. With stainless steel holder for 50 ml centrifuge tube, with matching slot for the suction cup. Technical data: Weight: Filter: Flow rate: Vacuum: Dimensions (L×W×H): 26.5 × 13 × 21 cm I.D. tubing: Material: 1.3 kg 0.22 µm pore size (polyester) max. 1 l/min up to 670 mbar 5 mm POM Article neoVAQ vacuum system Portable Order No. 10 01 29345 2 neoVAQ-Handoperator set with rack The perfect tool for all extraction problems in the cell culture. Ergonomic handle with pressure-sensitive control button. Handle with quick-coupling for fast and easy adapter change. When it comes to extracting from tubes, plates, petri dishes or cell culture bottles, there is a dedicated adapter for each type of application to ensure controlled and safe extraction of media. The adapters are safely arranged in the rack. The rack is equipped with a liquid collection tray which is easy to remove and to clean. Highlights • Multi-functional • Adapter for different applications • Autoclavable except for the rack • Material: POM and stainless steel (adapter and handle) • Stand made of ABS • Vacuum On/Off switch • Can be connected to different vacuum sources • Designed to match laboratory vessels and cell culture products (e.g. microtiter plates) Complete with: • Handle, light blue • 1-channel tip for pipette tips or serological pipettes • 1-channel tip stainless steel tip length 40 mm • 1-channel tip stainless steel tip length 80 mm • 8-channel tip stainless steel tip length 40 mm • 8-channel tip with ejector for pipette tips • 1-channel tip adapter with ejector • 1-channel tip adapter (150 mm) • Stand (ABS), not autoclavable Article neoVAQ Handoperator set with rack Order No. 10 01 70244 Aspiration Systems, Welch Vacuum Aspiration systems 2511C-75 / Biovac 106 Welch aspiration systems are designed for hazard-free aspiration of liquid residues in all areas of industry and research. Also suitable for aspiration of highly viscous media such as oil. The collection tray is easy to replace. Pipettes and tips can be exchanged for safe aspiration and removal of different types of liquids. Scope of delivery: Vacuum pump, autoclavable collection tray made of plastic, adapter, hoses, inline filter and automatic locking valve. The aspiration system 2511C-75 has a pressure gauge. The Biovac 106 is delivered with hand piece and quick-coupling connectors. Other accessories such as foot rest, spare tray, and hand pieces with pipette sets are available on request. Type Suction rate ml/s 3 2511C-75 15 4 biovac 106 25 Collection con- tainer 2 litres 4 litres Wght W × D × H mm kg 280×210×255 2.6 355×145×277 8.0 Order No. 10 92 42511 10 92 43704

844

Biotechnology Sample Processing co d e b e w WWC5C005 Vacuum Systems Fluid Aspiration Systems, VACUUBRAND Fluid aspiration systems BVC The compact BioChem-VacuuCenter offers the perfect solution for safe, sensitive and efficient aspiration of supernatants in all application areas. The BVC basic is intended for connection to an external vacuum source. The BVC control and the BVC professional are equipped with a high performance, chemically resistant diaphragm pump. BVC basic / BVC basic G for connection to existing vacuum networks (without integrated pump) BVC control / BVC control G The BioChem-VacuuCenter BVC control serves for safe, efficient and convenient aspira- tion of supernatants. The vacuum level – and thus the suction force – is exactly adjustable by the electronic touch panel and allows a sensitive and reproducible operation. The chemically resistant diaphragm vacuum pump is automatically turned on and off as needed. BVC professional / BVC professional G with additional non-contact sensor for liquid level and self-closing quick couplings Technical data: BVC control /G BVC professional /G Touchpanel 1 / 1 Vacuum controller: Number of heads / stages: Max. pumping speed at 50/60 Hz: 0.7 / 0.85 m3/h Max. pumping speed at 50/60 Hz: 0.4 / 0.5 cfm Ultimate vacuum (abs.): Control range: BVC basic Mechanical controller 150 / 112 mbar/torr 150 – 850 mbar (adjustable) 150 – 500 mbar Collection bottle 4 l polypropylene 2 l glass 4 l polypropylene 2 l glass 4 l polypropylene 2 l glass Order No. 10 18 77270 10 18 77271 10 18 77272 10 18 77273 10 18 77274 10 18 77275 Article BVC basic BVC basic G 1 BVC control BVC control G BVC professional BVC professional G G W Glass bottle Accessories Article VHCpro VacuuHandControl The VHCpro is an ergonomic light weight suction handset, fully autoclavable at 121°C. The mechanism of the VHCpro handset is not in contact with contaminated fluids and enables reliable, leak free working. Order No. 10 18 78061 Article 2 VHCpro Table Stand The stainless steel stand for the VHCpro enables to place the tipped suction handset Order No. 10 18 75680 conveniently and stable during work with cell cultures. Article VHCpro tip ejector This adapter is designed for pipette tips 2 – 200 µl and enables to manually remove the Order No. 10 18 75638 used pipette tip. Article BVC shuttle The BVC shuttle is a mobile underframe for all models BVC control and BVC professio- nal. It serves to pull out the BVC easily from under the safety cabinet for cleaning and removal of bottle for change. Order No. 10 18 76880 Article VHCpro 8-channel tip adapter with ejector This adapter allows parallel operation of eight pipette tips (size 2 - 200 µl or 5 - 300 µl). Order No. 10 18 75679 It is designed to match the dimensions of standardized 96-well microplates and has got a tip ejector to remove the used pipette tips. • Suction power is evenly spread across all pipette tips • Completely autoclavable • Stand and disinfectant reservoir inclusive • Low effort for attaching and ejecting the tips 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 843

845

Biotechnology Sample Processing Vacuum Systems EcoVac Safety Vacuum Systems, schuett-biotec For safe and comfortable removal of pathogenic liquid excess in the cell culture. High safety standard, when working with infectious material in a laboratory. Autoclavable. Self-locking fittings in the screw-cap hermetically seal the bottle when the tubing is re- moved for transport and autoclaving. Double-chamber-membrane/Vacuum pump (optional) Low-noise and vibration. With illuminated ON/OFF-switch. Dimensions (W × H × D): 80 × 60 × 160 mm Flow rate: 4 l/min, Vacuum: 300 mbar Foot-switch (optional) Allows to operate the pump, if EcoVac should be used intermittently. 1 2 1 EcoVac system without vacuum pump Article EcoVac-System 1, 1 liter volume Scope of delivery: as EcoVac-system 2, but 1 litre. EcoVac-System 2, 2 liter volume Safety collecting bottle, shatter-proof, chemical resistant (2 litres) with screw cap and 2 quick-action couplings, 2 × 1.5 m silicone tube (autoclavable), safety filter, 2 angled nipples for tube connection, 1 venting insert EcoVac-System 4, 4 liter volume Scope of delivery: as EcoVac-system 2, but 4 litres. EcoVac-System 5, 5 liter volume Scope of delivery: as EcoVac-system 2, but 5 litre. Order No. 10 31 80012 83 31 50022 83 31 50042 10 31 80052 Accessories Article 2 EcoVac vacuum pump, incl. 1 m connecting cable EcoVac foot switch EcoVac safety filter (pack of 2) dia. 62 mm, 0.2 µm cut off, housing made of polypropylene, Order No. 83 31 50102 83 31 50202 83 31 50302 filter made of polytetrafluorethylene EcoVac spare bottle 1* EcoVac spare bottle 2* EcoVac spare bottle 4* EcoVac spare bottle 5* Glass pasteur pipettes, 150 mm long (pack of 1000) Glass pasteur pipettes, 230 mm long (pack of 1000) 10 31 80112 83 31 50122 83 31 50142 10 31 80152 83 31 03000 83 31 03100 * incl. screw-cap and 2 self-locking fittings (without angled nipples) Spare lids and other spare parts on request. Vacuum Aspiration System VAS-10, Phoenix Instrument The new vacuum aspiration system VAS-10 is ideal for aspiration of liquids from all kind of vessels. The 4-liter aspiration bottle is autoclavable and can easily be removed from the system by the quick opening device. The integrated fluid level control prevents the overflow of the bottle. The vacuum pressure is free adjustable up to 600 mbar and adapts the system for many application. co d e b e w WWSB5027 Technical data: Vacuum (adjustable): Aspiration volume air: Aspiration volume fluid Dimensions W×D×H: Weight: Weight: Bottle volume: 0 – 600 mbar 15 l/min 17 ml/s 180 × 240 × 450 mm 3 kg 100-240 VAC – 50/60 Hz 4 liter PE, autoclavable Article Vacuum aspiration system VAS-10 Order No. 10 13 79010 844

846

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems CHAPTER OVERVIEW Humidity Temperature Weighing Systems 845 Precision and Analytical Balances . . . . . . . . . . . . 845 Platform Balances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866 Weighing Dishes and Jars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 870 Moisture Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870 874 Thermo Stripes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874 Laboratory Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 Ground Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 Digital Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 Infrared Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 892 Areometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 Areometer Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894 Pycnometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895 Digital Density Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 899 pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories . . . 899 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments . . 909 pH Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923 Density and Concentration Electrochemistry Climate Viscosity Melting Point Conductivity Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936 Oxygen Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 944 946 Viscosimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946 951 Melting Point Determination Instr . & Accss . . . . 951 952 Room Thermometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952 Other thermometers see Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 880 955 Flow Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955 Gas Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 956 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956 957 Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 957 Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957 Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958 Acoustics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959 Counters Mechanics Gas Time Precision and Analytical Balances CB Compact Balances, AE Adam The CB compact balances are our smallest precision scales. They excel by their optimum price-performance ratio. In spite of their small size, they have a removable stainless steel weighing pan, height-adjustable feet and bubble level, backlight display, and overload protection. The one-piece housing protects the electronic system from dirt and is easy to clean. The balance is powered by rechargeable battery or optionally by AC adapter. When not used, an auto shut-off function switches the balances off to save energy. Features and functions • Large stainless steel weighing pan, easy to clean • A powerful overload protection prevents damage to the weighing mechanism • Sealed keypad protected against dirt and spills • Low-battery indicator alerts users when batteries need replacement • Auto switch-off saves energy • Very light-weight and handy for easy transport • Backlit LCD, easy to read also in bad lighting conditions • Colour-coded keys facilitate quick working • Sturdy ABS housing with overload protection allows for use in demanding environments, from schools to industry • AC operation possible by means of the optional 6 V DC, 200 mA adapter • Height-adjustable feet • 2 years’ warranty Applications • Weighing Technical data: Weighing units: Platform: Power supply: Display: Calibration: Housing: Level indicator and adjustable feet g, lb, oz Ø 130 mm 6 V DC, 200 mA adapter (opt.) / 2 × AA batteries (incl.) LCD, digit height 12 mm external ABS co d e b e w WWDX7012 1 Model CB 501 CB 1001 1 CB 3000 Capacity g 500 1000 3000 Increment g 0.1 0.1 1 Order No. 10 56 52501 10 56 52101 10 56 52300 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 845

847

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems 1 2 co d e b e w WWDX7004 co d e b e w WWDX7003 Precision and Analytical Balances Dune™ Compact Balances, AE Adam Low, user-friendly design, enhanced overload protection, keypad sealed against spray water: The Dune offers reliably results in the lab or office, or in the field. Three keys are provided for easy operation: on/off, Unit, and Tare. Select indication of the weighing re- sults in gram, ounce, or pound. Features and functions • Colour-coded keys facilitate quick working • Sturdy ABS housing with overload protection, robust enough for simple applications in industry • Mains operation with AC adapter (incl.) or battery operation with AA type batteries (not comprised in the delivery) • Large weighing pan, draught shield (model 302 only) • Battery indicator, auto power-off to save energy • Large high-contrast display, easy to read also from a distance • Sealed keypad protected against dirt and spills • 2 years’ warranty Applications • Weighing Technical data: Weighing units: Power supply: Display: Calibration: Housing: g, lb, oz 12 V AC 50/60 Hz, 150 mA adapter (incl.) / 6 × AA batteries (opt.) LCD, digit height 15 mm external ABS plastics Model 1 DCT 302 2 DCT 201 DCT 601 DCT 2001 DCT 2000 DCT 5000 Capacity g 300 200 600 2000 2000 5000 Increment g 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 2 Platform mm Ø 130 145×145 145×145 145×145 145×145 145×145 Order No. 10 56 55302 10 56 55201 10 56 55601 10 56 55202 10 56 55200 10 56 55500 Highland™ Precision Balances, AE Adam Highland precision balances are portable balances suitable for laboratories but also for field research and various applications in industry. They are equipped with the patented Adam internal calibration HandiCal® but can also be calibrated at any time with an exter- nal weight. ShockProtect® offers overload protection. Features and functions • Backlit LCD, easy to read also in bad lighting conditions • Display with capacity indication • Stackable for space-saving storage • RS-232 and USB interface for fast data exchange with printers and computers • Including a removable draught shield • Acoustic overload alarm, internal calibration • Three-point ShockProtect® protects the weighing mechanism from damage even when heavily overloaded • Dual tare keys facilitate operation with either the left or right hand • Security slot for optional lock • Hook for weighing below the balance and AC adapter included • DAkkS calibration certificate available as an option, 2 years’ warranty Applications Weighing, piece countingl, percentage weighing, memory accumulation totals results Technical data: Weighing units: Interfaces: Power supply: Display: Calibration: Housing: Pan size: g, lb, oz, N, GN, ct, dr, dwt, mm, ozt, T, tl.H, tl.S, tl.T 1 × RS-232, 1 × USB 12 V DC 50/60 Hz, 800 mA adapter / internal rechargeable battery backlit LCD, digit height 18 mm external calibration + internal manual calibration ABS plastics Ø 120 mm 846 Continued on next page

848

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Uncalibrated models Model HCB 123 HCB 153 HCB 302 HCB 602 HCB 602H HCB 1002 HCB 1502 HCB 2202 HCB 3001 HCB 6001 Capacity g 120 150 300 600 600 1000 1500 2200 3000 6000 Increment g 0.001 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.01 0.1 0.1 Order No. 10 56 54123 10 56 54153 10 56 54302 10 56 54607 10 56 54606 10 56 54102 10 56 54152 10 56 54222 10 56 54301 10 56 54601 Calibrated models (without internal calibration) Model HCB 602 M HCB 1002 M HCB 5001 M Capacity g 600 1000 5000 Increment g 0.01 0.01 0.1 Calibrated increment g 0.1 0.1 1 Order No. 10 56 54608 10 56 54103 10 56 54501 ATP thermal printer and ATP impact printer see page 848 co d e b e w WWDX7014 Luna Analytical- and Precision Balances, AE Adam The Luna range offers improved performance for faster, more accurate readings. With stylish, modern backlighting, Luna’s impressive display gives an aura of smart sophisti- cation. Developed specifically for demanding laboratory tasks. Features and functions: • Vivid, backlit LCD easily visible in any lighting conditions • Colour-coded keys facilitate faster work • Level indicator and adjustable feet ensure proper balance setup for optimum weighing results • Large stainless steel pan allows easy cleaning • Sealed keypad protects against dirt and spills • USB I/0 and RS-232 interfaces provide speedy communication with computers and printers • Multilingual display allows use in many different countries • Auto power-off to save energy • AC adapter included • 3 years warranty Applications: Weighing, piece counting, percentage weighing, animal weighing / dynamic weighing, density determination, checkweighing, check counting, net total weighing, display hold, peak hold Technical data: Weighing units: mg, g, ct, GN, N, dr, oz, ozt, dwt, mm, tl.T, tl.H, tl.S, T, user-defined unit (lb avaible 2602e/i to 6002i) RS-232, USB 18 VDC, 50/60 Hz, 830 mA adapter Backlit LCD with 24 mm digit height ABS plastic Interface: Power supply: Display: Housing: External calibration Model 1 LAB 84e LAB 124e LAB 214e LAB 254e 2 LPB 223e LPB 423e LPB 623e LPB 823e LTB 2602e LTB 3602e LTB 4602e LTB 6002e LBB 6001e LBB 8001e LBB 12001e LBB 15001e Capacity g 80 120 210 250 220 420 620 820 2600 3600 4600 6000 6000 8000 12000 15000 Increment g 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Platform mm Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 125 Ø 125 Ø 125 Ø 125 185×185 185×185 185×185 185×185 185×185 185×185 185×185 185×185 Order No. 10 56 54084 10 56 54124 10 56 54214 10 56 54254 10 56 54223 10 56 54423 10 56 54623 10 56 54823 10 56 54262 10 56 54362 10 56 54462 10 56 54612 10 56 54611 10 56 54801 10 56 54121 10 56 54151 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 847 Continued on next page

849

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems co d e b e w WWDX7015 Precision and Analytical Balances Internal calibration Capacity g 80 120 210 250 220 420 620 820 2600 3600 4600 6000 Increment g 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Platform mm Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 185×185 185×185 185×185 185×185 Order No. 10 56 55084 10 56 55124 10 56 55214 10 56 55254 10 56 55223 10 56 55423 10 56 55623 10 56 55823 10 56 55262 10 56 55362 10 56 55462 10 56 55602 Model LAB 84i LAB 124i LAB 214i LAB 254i LPB 223i LPB 423i LPB 623i LPB 823i LTB 2602i LTB 3602i 1 LTB 4602i LTB 6002i Accessories Article 2 ATP thermal printer Dimensions 114 × 184 × 90 mm, print size 24 × 24 dot, column size 384 dots per line, 57.5 mm paper width, RS-232 interface ATP impact printer RS-232 interface and USB connection comprised in the delive- ry, column size 384 points/line, paper width 57.5 mm, incl. re- chargeable battery Order No. 10 56 51156 10 56 54641 Equinox Semimicro-, Analytical- and Precision Balances, AE Adam Equinox precision balances deliver remarkable precision to labs that perform highly de- tailed testing. A colour touch screen display provides intuitive operation, with icon-driven menus and readily accessible applications and functions. The five-inch screen is gener- ously sized, offering 800 × 480 pixel resolution for excellent visibility. Features and functions: • Large, responsive 5 ″ 800 × 480 pixel touch-screen display • Level indicator and adjustable feet ensure proper balance setup for optimum weighing results • Large stainless steel pan allows easy cleaning; draft shield comprised in the delivery • RS-232 interface and USB host for use with a thumb drive • Built-in memory for storing products and settings • Security password control prevents unauthorised access • Preset tare function speeds the process of repetitive weighing • Multilingual display allows use in many different countries • AC adapter included Applications: Weighing, piece counting, percentage weighing, checkweighing, animal weighing / dy- namic weighing, density determination, formulating, statistics, textiles, peak hold Technical data: Weighing units: g, mg, lb, oz, ct, GN, dwt, mm, ozt, T, tl.H, tl.S, tl.T, custom unit Interface: Power supply: Display: Housing: RS-232, USB host 9 V or 24 V, 50/60 Hz, 500 mA adapter Touchscreen with 125 mm high digits ABS plastic External calibration Model EAB 124e EAB 224e EAB 314e 3 EPB 363e EPB 723e ETB 3202e 4 ETB 6202e ETB 8202e Capacity g 120 220 310 360 720 3200 6200 8200 Increment g 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 Platform mm Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 110 Ø 110 185×185 185×185 185×185 Order No. 10 56 56124 10 56 56224 10 56 56314 10 56 56363 10 56 56723 10 56 56322 10 56 56622 10 56 56822 Continued on next page 1 2 3 4 5 848

850

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Internal calibration Model 5 EAB 125i EAB 225i 6 EAB 124i EAB 224i EAB 314i EAB 414i EAB 514i EPB 363i EPB 723i EPB 1203i EPB 2103i ETB 3202i ETB 6202i Capacity g 62/120 82/120 120 120 310 410 510 360 720 1200 2100 3200 6200 Increment g 0.01/0.1 mg 0.01/0.1 mg 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 Platform mm Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 110 Ø 110 Ø 110 Ø 110 185×185 185×185 Accessories Article 7 ABI-1 ionizer Neutralization of static electricity, discharge time: 9s/5cm, 13s/10cm, 100s/40cm (with fan switched on), AC adapter in- cluded ATP thermal printer and ATP impact printer see page 848 Order No. 10 56 52125 10 56 52225 10 56 52124 10 56 52224 10 56 52314 10 56 52414 10 56 52514 10 56 52363 10 56 52723 10 56 51203 10 56 52103 10 56 53202 10 56 56202 Order No. 10 56 50410 Laboratory Balances HR-A/AZ Series, A&D Instruments • Metal housing, robust construction • Built-in internal calibration at the touch of a button (HR-AZ) • Shock absorber function • Auto power ON/OFF function • B5 size footprint for use in narrow space • Reverse backlit LCD display for easy to read weighing results • SCF – Statistical calculation function • Standard RS-232C • Fast compact SHS sensor, response time of about 2 seconds • Quick USB interface – no driver installation required (optional) • LAN - Ethernet interface with WinCT-Plus software (optional) • Easily removable large breeze break • Built-in rechargeable NiMH battery pack (optional) Analytical Balances with Internal Calibration Model HR-100AZ HR-150AZ HR-251AZ 8 HR-250AZ Capacity g 102 152 62/252 252 Increment mg 0.1 0.1 0.1/1 0.1 Platform mm Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Analytical Balances with Exernal Calibration Model HR-100A HR-150A HR-251A HR-250A Capacity g 102 152 62/252 252 Increment mg 0.1 0.1 0.1/1 0.1 Platform mm Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Order No. 10 45 70102 10 45 70150 10 45 70251 10 45 70250 Order No. 10 45 70100 10 45 70151 10 45 70253 10 45 70252 Accessories Article FXi-OP-02 USB interface no driver installation necessary FXi-OP-08 LAN Ethernet output FXi-OP-09 NiMH battery pack AX-FX-31i Transparent plastic covers, 5 pcs. AD-1654 Density measurement kit installation required at the factory Order No. 10 45 78001 10 45 78002 10 45 78003 10 45 78008 10 45 71654 6 7 co d e b e w WWEH9002 8 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 849

851

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems co d e b e w WWEH9003 1 850 Precision and Analytical Balances Laboratory Balances GX/GF-A Series, A&D Instruments • Solid metal housing, sturdy design • Internal compressor-controlled calibration at the push of a button (GX-A) • Robust overload protection • Overload detection and indication • Backlit LCD display • Adjustable response characteristics • Automatic calibration in case of temperature change, interval or push of a button • RS-232 and USB interface Standard, optional Ethernet interface • Precision test function with determination of the standard deviation via ECL technology (electronic controlled load) • Minimum weight computation and optical alarm if actual weight is below minimum • Flow rate display (FRD) and flow rate comparator • Two-stage access control and button lock • Up to 10 user profiles • Memory for 200 weighing results, 50 calibration results, 50 unit masses • Tare memory • Several weighing units, g ,oz , lb, lb-oz, zt, ct, mom, dwt, pcs and SG (specific weight) • Statistics and comparator function • Density determination • Animal weighing program • Underfloor weighing • Auto Power ON, Auto Power OFF function • Capacity indication Models with internal calibration Model GX-203A GX-303A GX-403A GX-603A GX-1003A 1 GX-1603A GX-2002A GX-3002A GX-4002A GX-6002A GX-10002A GX-6001A GX-10001A Capacity g 220 320 420 620 1100 1620 2200 3200 4200 6200 10200 6200 10200 Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 Platform mm 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 Models with external calibration Model GF-123A GF-203A GF-303A GF-403A GF-603A GF-1003A GF-1603A GF-1202A GF-2002A GF-3002A GF-4002A GF-6002A GF-10002A GF-6001A GF-10001A Capacity g 120 220 320 420 620 1100 1620 1200 2200 3200 4200 6200 10200 6200 10200 Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.1 0.1 Platform mm 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 128 × 128 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 165 × 165 Order No. 10 45 72030 10 45 73030 10 45 74030 10 45 76030 10 45 71003 10 45 71603 10 45 72002 10 45 73003 10 45 74003 10 45 76002 10 45 71002 10 45 76001 10 45 71001 Order No. 10 45 70123 10 45 70203 10 45 70303 10 45 70403 10 45 70603 10 45 71013 10 45 71604 10 45 71202 10 45 72003 10 45 73002 10 45 74002 10 45 76012 10 45 71012 10 45 76011 10 45 71011 Accessories Article GXA-03 Second RS-232C interface GXA-04 Comparator output/buzzer/external key entry GXA-06 Analogue output FXi-08 Ethernet output Order No. 10 45 73232 10 45 70004 10 45 70006 10 45 70008 Continued on next page

852

Precision and Analytical Balances Article GXA-09 Rechargeable battery pack Installed in the factory/at the dealer‘s GXA-10 Large breeze break, made of glass GXA-12 Animal weighing pan GXA-13 Density measurement kit only for 1 mg models GXA-17 Large breeze break with ionizer GXA-23-PRINT External key entry -PRINT with the AX- for models with capacity 320 g and up SW137-PRINT foot switch GXA-23-REZERO External key entry with the AX- Order No. 10 45 70009 10 45 70010 10 45 70012 10 45 70013 10 45 70017 10 45 72313 10 45 73127 SW137-REZERO foot switch Installed in the factory/at the dealer‘s GXA-23-PLUG External key entry with AX-T-314A-S plug 10 45 72314 GXA-24 USB host interface 10 45 70024 GXA-25 Fanless ionizer Static Eliminator GXA-26 External IR button AX-GXA-31 Display working covers, 5 pcs. AX-SW137-PRINT Foot swich for printing function AX-SW137-REZERO Foot swich for RE-ZERO function 10 45 70026 10 45 73105 10 45 70137 10 45 71137 10 45 70025 Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Electronic Precision Balances, KERN The extensive portfolio of KERN laboratory balances comprises a great variety of devices tailored to the scope of requirements of the respective target group: KERN school balances: entry-level devices covering the basic requirements. Easy to use, optimum price-performance ratio. KERN Basic laboratory balances: precision balances for the most common laboratory applications, equipped with all necessary laboratory functions, with integrated RS-232 data interface as a standard for connection to printers or local PCs. KERN Standard laboratory balances: premium measuring technology, e.g. force com- pensation or tuning fork measuring principle and all important laboratory functions. Fast, highly precise, multiple communication options thanks to various interfaces. KERN Premium laboratory balances: Top range of the precision balances segment. Enormous variety of functions, high-quality materials, robust and stable design, powerful weighing systems, optimised operating processes, extremely fast. Electronic school balance KERN EMB-S • The space miracle – stackable school balance for experiment-based teaching, now also as a high-resolution variant • Simple and convenient 2-button operation • Tare function facilitates formulation work • Particularly flat design • Secure and non-slip positioning with rubber feet • Stackable for space-saving storage • A practical transport safety lock prevents the weighing technology from being overload- ed when stored or during transportation 145 × 205 × 45 mm 2×1.5 V AA, as a standard, operating time up to 35 h, AU- TO-OFF function to save battery power approx. 0.50 kg 5°C – 35°C Technical data: Dimensions (W×D×H): Battery operation possi- ble: Net weight: Permissible ambient tem- perature range: Note: The models with the suffix -S05 are delivered in units of 5, i.e. the price specified in the table is for a scope of delivery of 5 balances. It is not possible to order single units of these types. co d e b e w WW6CF002 1 Model EMB 500-2S 1 EMB 200-1SS05 EMB 500-1SS05 EMB 3000-1S EMB 2000-0SS05 1 EMB 5000-0SS05 1 Increment g 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 Weighing range g 500 200 500 3000 2000 5000 Platform mm Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 Order No. PU pc/Pack 10 58 35502 1 10 58 35153 5 10 58 35504 5 10 58 35506 1 10 58 35507 5 10 58 35508 5 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 851

853

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Electronic school balance KERN EMB Entry-level laboratory scales • Simple and convenient 2-button operation • Tare function facilitates formulation work • Particularly flat design • Ready for use: batteries included, 9 V block or 2×1.5 V AA • Ring-shaped draft shield provided as a standard for models with weighing plate size Ø 82 mm, weighing space Ø×H 96 × 35 mm • Hook for underfloor weighing provided as a standard • Note: Auxiliary set for determining the density of fluids and solids is available for models with weighing plate size Ø 82 mm, ideal for use in schools and universities Technical data: Display: Material Wägeplatte: Net weight: Permissible ambient temperature range: large LCD display, digit height 15 mm Ø 82 mm: plastic, conductive coat Ø p 105 mm: plastic approx. 0.75 kg 5°C – 35°C Model 1 EMB 100-3 EMB 200-3 2 EMB 200-2 EMB 600-2 3 EMB 1000-2 EMB 2000-2 EMB 500-1 4 EMB 500-1BE EMB 1200-1 EMB 3000-1 EMB 6000-1 EMB 2200-0 EMB 5.2K1 EMB 5.2K5 Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 5 Weighing range g 100 200 200 600 1000 2000 500 500 1200 3000 6000 2200 5200 5200 Platform mm Ø 82 Ø 82 Ø 105 Ø 105 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 No USB for printer connection. Order No. 10 58 31013 10 58 32013 64 58 42202 10 58 36002 10 58 31012 10 58 32012 10 58 35001 10 58 35011 10 58 31200 10 58 33001 10 58 36011 64 58 42200 10 58 30521 64 58 42525 1 3 5 Electronic school balance KERN EMB-V School balances with integrated density determination function • Density determination made easy! Thanks to the self-explanatory, graphic-assisted con- trol panel, the density of solids and liquids can be determined in seconds, making the balance ideal for use in schools and universities • Visualised process means that operating errors are avoided • No learning time = reduces costs • Ideal for untrained users • The 4 steps are carried out from left to right: 1. Tare the balance by pressing the [TARE] key 2. Select density determination mode (solids/fluid) 3. Weigh samples/plummets in air 4. Weigh samples/plummets in fluid. The density will be shown on the display immedi- ately • Hook for underfloor weighing provided as a standard • Particularly flat design • Ready for use: battery 9 V Block standard. AUTO-OFF function to preserve the batteries, can be switched off Technical data: Display: Weighing plate material: Dimensions (W×D×H): Net weight: Permissible ambient temperature range: With carat weighing unit: large LCD display, digit height 15 mm Ø 82 mm: plastic, conductive coat Ø 150 mm: plastic 175 × 245 × 54 mm approx. 0.85 kg 5°C – 35°C EMB 200-3V: 1000 ct/0,005 ct EMB 2000-2V: 10000 ct/0,05 ct Model 5 EMB 200-3V 6 EMB 2000-2V 7 Density kit YDB-01 for EMB 200-3V 8 Density kit YDB-02 for Increment g 0.001 0.01 Weighing range g 200 2000 Platform mm Ø 82 Ø 150 Order No. 10 58 36203 10 58 36202 10 58 36101 10 58 36102 8 EMB 2000-2V No USB for printer connection. Continued on next page 2 4 6 7 852

854

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Electronic school balance KERN EHA The compact all-round model with robust stainless steel weighing plate for use in labora- tories, industries and for teaching • Thanks to its compact, robust design, its bright display and high precision, this range is ideal for use in laboratories, quality control, production as well in schools and universi- ties for teaching biology, chemistry and physics, for example • Large, shock-proof weighing plate made from stainless steel, can be removed and therefore is hygienic and easy to clean • Particularly flat design • Ergonomically optimised key pad • Simple and convenient 5-key operation • Large high-contrast display that is easy to read • Secure and non-slip positioning with height-adjustable rubber feet • Level indicator and levelling feet for precise levelling of the scale, fitted as standard, to give the most accurate weighing result • Adjusting program CAL for quick setting of the balance accuracy, external test weights available at a surcharge 9 backlit LCD display, digit height 22 mm 160 × 225 x 50 mm (without draft shield) 2×1.5 V AA, not comprised in the scope of delivery, operating time up to 400 h Technical data: Display: Dimensions (W×D×H): Battery operation possi- ble: External mains adapteras a standard Net weight: Permissible ambient tem- perature range: approx. 0.5 kg 5°C – 40°C Model 9 EHA 500-2 EHA 500-1 EHA 1000-1 AT EHA 3000-1 EHA 3000-0 Increment g 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 Weighing range g 500 500 1000 3000 3000 Platform mm Ø 105 Ø 105 Ø 105 120×120 120×120 Order No. 10 58 35552 10 58 35551 10 58 35553 10 58 35554 10 58 35555 AT Electronic basic laboratory balance KERN PCB The standard in the lab • PRE-TARE function for manual subtraction of a known container weight, useful for checking fill-levels • Freely programmable weighing unit, e.g. display direct in special units such as length of thread g/m, paper weight g/m2, or similar • With the recipe function you can weigh the different ingredients of a mixture. As a check, you can also call up the total weight of all the ingredients • Plus/minus weighing procedures • Ring-shaped draught shield standard, only for models with weighing plate size Ø 81 mm, AK weighing space Ø×H 90×40 mm • Protective working cover included with delivery Technical data: Display: Weighing plate material: Ø 81 mm, plastik, conductive coating backlit LCD display, digit height 15 mm Dimensions (W×D×H): Battery operation possi- ble: Permissible ambient tem- perature range: Ø 105 mm, p 130×130 mm, stainless steel 163 × 245 × 79 mm (without draft shield) 9 V block, not comprised in the scope of delivery, operating time up to 20 h, AUTO-OFF function for battery operation 5°C – 35°C AM Model AK PCB 100-3 PCB 250-3 PCB 350-3 AL PCB 200-2 AM PCB 1000-2 PCB 2500-2 PCB 3500-2 PCB 1000-1 PCB 2000-1 AN PCB 6000-1 PCB 10000-1 PCB 6000-0 Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 Weighing range g 100 250 350 200 1000 2500 3500 1000 2000 6000 10000 6000 Platform mm Ø 81 Ø 81 Ø 81 Ø 105 130×130 130×130 130×130 130×130 130×130 150×170 150×170 150×170 Order No. 10 58 31003 10 58 32503 10 58 33503 10 58 32002 10 58 31002 10 58 32502 10 58 33502 10 58 31001 10 58 32001 10 58 36001 10 58 31004 10 58 36000 AL AN co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 853 Continued on next page

855

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems 1 Precision and Analytical Balances Electronic basic laboratory balance KERN PFB Quick-display precision balance with user-friendly concept of operation - now with larger housing for more secure footing • Concept of easy use: All primary functions have their own key on the keypad • Compact size, practical for small spaces • Capacity display: A bar lights up to show how much of the weighing range is still avail- able • Level indicator and foot screws to level the balance precisely, fitted as standard, to give the most accurate weighing results • Draft shield provided as a standard (for models with weighing plate sizes Ø 80 mm and 120 mm), weighing space (WxDxH) 158 × 143 × 64 mm Technical data: Display: Weighing plate material: stainless steel Dimensions (W×D×H): Net weight: Permissible ambient temperature range: backlit LCD display, digit height 15 mm 210 × 315 × 90 mm (without draft shield) approx. 2.0 kg 15°C – 30°C 2 Model 3 5 4 6 854 Order No. Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 Weighing range g 120 200 300 600 1200 2000 3000 6000 6000 Platform mm Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 155×145 155×145 1 PFB 120-3 PFB 200-3 PFB 300-3 2 PFB 600-2 PFB 1200-2 PFB 2000-2 PFB 3000-2 PFB 6000-2 3 PFB 6000-1 1) For applications that require verification, please order verification at the same time, ini- tial verification at a later date is not possible. Verification at the factory, we need to know the full address of the location of use. DAkkS calibration certificate optional available. 10 58 37123 10 58 37203 10 58 37303 10 58 37304 10 58 37122 10 58 37202 10 58 37302 10 58 37305 10 58 37601 Electronic basic laboratory balance KERN EWJ High-quality precision balance with automatic internal adjustment, also with EC type ap- proval [M] • Easy to use: All primary functions have their own key on the keypad • Automatic internal adjustment time-controlled every 2 hours. Guarantees high degree of accuracy and makes the balance independent of its location • Capacity display: A bar lights up to show how much of the weighing range is still avail- able • KERN EWJ/EWJ-H/EWJ-J-M: USB data interface to transfer to PC, printer, etc. Only in connection with accessories KERN DBS-A • Draft shield standard on models KERN EWJ 300-3, EWJ 600-2SM, EWJ 600-2M, weigh- ing space W×D×H 134 × 128 × 80 mm • KERN EWJ 300-3H: Large glass draft shield with 3 sliding doors for easy access to the items being weighed, weighing space W×D×H 175 × 155 × 217 mm • Adding up of weigh values • Protective working cover included with delivery Technical data: Display: Weighing plate material: Edelstahl Dimensions (W×D×H): large backlit LCD display, digit height 16.5 mm 220 × 315 × 90 mm (without draft shield) 220 × 340 × 321 mm (incl. draft shield) KERN EWJ: 15°C – 35°C KERN EWJ-M: 15°C – 30°C Permissible ambient temperature range: Model EWJ 300-3 4 EWJ 300-3H 5 EWJ 3000-2 EWJ 600-2SM EWJ 600-2M EWJ 6000-1SM 6 EWJ 6000-1M Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 Weighing range g 300 300 3000 600 600 6000 6000 Platform mm Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 135 Ø 135 Ø 135 155×145 155×145 Order No. 10 58 39303 10 58 39306 10 58 39307 10 58 39304 10 58 39602 10 58 39305 10 58 39601 Continued on next page

856

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Electronic standard laboratory balance KERN 572/573 Allrounder e.g. as precision balance in the laboratory or in harsh industrial applications • Thanks to the many typical laboratory functions, such as, for example, recipe function, percentage determination, GLP record keeping, combined with the high level of preci- sion, the KERN 572/573 is a reliable partner for day-to-day work in the laboratory. • The robust design and typical industrial functions, such as piece-counting, vibration-free weighing and the large weighing ranges also make these balances ideal for all industri- al applications where a high level of precision is required • Freely programmable weighing unit, e.g. display direct in special units such as length of thread g/m, grammage g/m2, or similar • The robust die cast aluminium casing provides for secure standing, protects the weigh- ing mechanism, and is resistant in daily use • Ring-shaped draft shield standard for models with weighing plate size Ø 106 mm. Weighing space Ø×H 157 × 43 mm • Models with a resolution > 240,000 points: Level indicator to level the balance precisely • Loop and hook for underfloor weighing standard on all models with readout [d] = 0.001 g • Protective working cover included with delivery Technical data: Display: Weighing plate material: stainless steel Dimensions (W×D×H): Net weight: Permissible ambient temperature range: large backlit LCD display, digit height 18 mm 180 × 310 × 85 mm approx. 2.8 kg 10°C – 40°C Model 7 572-30 572-31 572-32 573-34 8 572-33 572-35 572-37 572-39 572-43 9 572-45 572-49 572-55 573-46 572-57 Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.05 0.1 0.05 0.001 0.1 Weighing range g 240 300 420 650 1600 2400 3000 4200 10000 12000 16000 20000 6500 24000 Platform mm Ø 106 Ø 106 Ø 106 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 160×200 160×200 160×200 160×200 160×200 160×200 Order No. 10 58 37230 10 58 37231 10 58 37232 10 58 37233 64 58 57233 64 58 57235 10 58 37237 10 58 37239 10 58 37243 64 58 57245 64 58 57249 10 58 37255 10 58 37256 64 58 57257 8 Electronic standard laboratory balance KERN PNS/PNJ The new standard in the laboratory with robust tuning fork measuring system • KERN PNJ: Automatic internal adjustment, guarantees high degree of accuracy and makes the balance independent of its location of use. Ideal for mobile applications which require verificati • KERN PNS: Adjusting program CAL for setting of the balance accuracy using an exter- nal test weight • High-quality tuning fork measuring system for quick indication of the weighing result, highly accurate dosing, and high mechanical sturdiness • Capacity display: A bar lights up to show how much of the weighing range is still available • Precise counting: The automatic reference weight optimisation of reference weight grad- ually improves the average piece weight value • Compact size, practical for small spaces • Large, shockproof stainless steel weighing plate • Large glass draft shield with 3 sliding doors for easy access to the items being weighed, for models with weighing plate size Ø 140 mm, weighing space W×D×H 172 × 171 × 160 mm Technical data: Display: Weighing plate material: Dimensions (W×D×H): Net weight: Permissible ambient temperature range: large LCD display, digit height 16.5 mm stainless steel models with weighing plate size Ø 140 mm: 196 × 293 × 266 mm models with weighing plate size (W×D) 190 × 190 mm: 196 × 293 × 89 mm approx. 2.8 kg 5°C – 40°C AT Model AT PNS 600-3 AK PNS 3000-2 PNS 12000-1 PNJ 600-3M PNJ 3000-2M PNJ 12000-1M Increment g 0.001 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.01 0.1 Weighing range g 620 3200 12000 620 3200 12000 Platform mm Ø 140 190×190 190×190 Ø 140 190×190 190×190 Order No. 10 58 37501 10 58 37502 10 58 37503 10 58 37504 10 58 37505 10 58 37506 For applications that require verification, please order verification at the same time, initial verification at a later date is not possible. Verification at the factory, we need to know the full address of the location of use. 7 9 AK co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 855 Continued on next page

857

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Electronic standard laboratory balance KERN W-N/EG-N The classic balance with robust tuning fork measuring system • Capacity display: A bar lights up to show how much of the weighing range is still avail- able • Precise counting: The automatic reference weight optimisation of reference weight grad- ually improves the averag piece weight value • GLP/ISO record keeping of weight values • Percentage determination • Totalising of pieces when counting • Draft shield standard for models with weighing plate size Ø 118 mm. Removable metal cover with pipette opening, weighing space W×D×H 158 × 130 × 78 mm 2 4 co d e b e w WW6CF003 1 3 5 856 Technical data: Display: Weighing plate material: Edelstahl Dimensions (W×D×H) without draft shield: large LCD display, digit height 17 mm models with weighing plate size Ø 118 mm, 170 × 140 mm: 182 × 235 × 75 mm models with weighing plate size 180 × 160 mm: 192 × 275 × 87 mm approx. 1.4 kg 10°C – 30°C Net weight: Permissible ambient temperature range: Model Order No. Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 Weighing range g 220 420 620 820 2200 4200 6200 12000 220 420 620 2200 4200 Platform mm Ø 118 Ø 118 Ø 118 170×142 180×160 180×160 180×160 180×160 Ø 118 Ø 118 Ø 118 180×160 180×160 1 EW 220-3 NM EW 420-3 NM EW 620-3 NM EW 820-2 NM EW 2200-2 NM EW 4200-2 NM EW 6200-2 NM EW 12000-1 NM 2 EG 220-3 NM1) EG 420-3 NM1) EG 620-3 NM1) EG 2200-2 NM1) EG 4200-2 NM1) 1) For applications that require verification, please order verification at the same time, ini- tial verification at a later date is not possible. Verification at the factory, we need to know the full address of the location of use. DAkkS calibration certificate optional available. 64 58 12203 64 58 14203 64 58 16203 64 58 18202 64 58 12202 64 58 14202 64 58 16202 64 58 12000 64 58 22203 64 58 24203 64 58 26203 64 58 22202 64 58 24202 Accessories Article 3 Thermal printer KERN YKB-01N 4 Dot matrix printer KERN YKN-01 5 Statistics printer KERN YKS-01 Label printer KERN YKE-01 Software BalanceConnection SCD-4.0 RS-232 Ethernet adapter KERN YKI-01 RS-232 Bluetooth adapter KERN YKI-02 RS-232 WLAN adapter KERN YKI-01 for direct import of weighing data on the PC Order No. 10 58 35005 10 58 35501 10 58 35004 10 58 35006 10 58 39040 10 58 39501 10 58 39502 10 58 39503 Further details, various accessories and suitable printers are available on request. Electronic Analytical Balances, KERN Electronic analytical balance KERN ADB/ADJ The price leader in analytical balances with external or internal adjustment • KERN ADJ: Automatic internal adjustment with temperature changes p 2°C and time-controlled every 2 h, ensures high accuracy independent of the location of use • KERN ADB: CAL adjustment program for setting the accuracy by means of an external test weight • ADB/ADJ 600-C3: Compact, space-saving carat balance with a readout of 0.001 ct and a weighing range of 600 ct. The high level of accuracy saves hard cash wherever you are weighing valuable precious stones • Level indicator and levelling feet for precise levelling of the scale, fitted as standard, to give the most accurate weighing result • Large glass draught shield with 3 sliding doors for easy access to the items being weighed • Compact size, practical for small spaces • Simple and convenient 6-key operation Continued on next page

858

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Technical data: Display: Weighing plate: Dimensions incl. draft shield (W×D×H): Weighing space (W×D×H): Permissible ambient temperature range: large, backlit LCD display, digit height 16 mm stainless steel, Ø 90 mm KERN ADB/ADJ: 230 × 310 × 330 mm KERN ADB-C/ADJ-C: 205 × 310 × 210 mm KERN ADB/ADJ: 170 × 160 × 205 mm KERN ADB-C/ADJ-C: 170 × 160 × 110 mm 10°C – 30°C Model Increment g 0.1 0.1 Platform mm 1 ADB 100-4 Ø 90 ADB 200-4 Ø 90 2 ADB 600-C3 0.1 mg / 0.001 ct 120 g / 600 ct Ø 90 ADJ 100-4 Ø 90 0.1 ADJ 200-4 0.1 Ø 90 ADJ 600-C3 0.1 mg / 0.001 ct 120 g / 600 ct Ø 90 Weighing range g 120 210 120 210 Order No. 10 58 38104 10 58 36301 10 58 38633 10 58 37104 10 58 37204 10 58 36305 Electronic analytical balance KERN ABS-N/ACS/ABJ-NM/ACJ The bestseller among the analytical balances, with premium single-cell weighing system, also with EC type approval [M] • ABJ-NM: Automatic internal adjustment in the case of a temperature change p 2°C and time-controlled every 4 hours. Ensures high accuracy independent of the location of use • ACJ: Design identical with ABJ-NM but with integrated data interface RS-232 and USB as a standard • ABS-N: Adjusting program CAL for setting the accuracy by means of an external test weight • ACS: Design identical with ABJ-NM but with integrated data interface RS-232 and USB as a standard • Dosage aid: High-stability mode and other filter settings can be selected • Simple recipe weighing and documenting with a combined tare/print function. In addi- tion, the ingredients for the recipe are numbered automatically and printed out with their corresponding number and nominal weight • Automatic data output to the PC/printer each time the balance has obtained a stable weighing result • Balance identification number: 4 digits, printed on calibration protocol, freely program- mable, is printed out in the adjustment log • ABJ-NM, ACJ with OIML certificate Technical data: Display: Weighing plate: Dimensions incl. draft shield (W×D×H): Weighing space (W×D×H): Net weight: Permissible ambient temperature range: large LCD display, digit height 14 mm stainless steel, Ø 91 mm 210 × 340 × 325 mm 174 × 162 × 227 mm approx. 6 kg 10°C – 30°C Model Increment mg 3 ABS 80-4N 0.1 ABS 120-4N 0.1 ABS 220-4N 0.1 ABS 320-4N 0.1 ACS 80-4 0.1 ACS 100-4 0.1 ACS 200-4 0.1 ACS 300-4 0.1 ABJ 80-4NM1) 0.1 ABJ 120-4NM1) 0.1 ABJ 220-4NM1) 0.1 ABJ 320-4NM1) 0.1 ACJ 80-4M1) 0.1 ACJ 100-4M1) 0.1 ACJ 200-4M1) 0.1 ACJ 300-4M1) 0.1 Weighing range g 82 120 220 320 82 120 220 320 82 120 220 320 82 120 220 320 Calibration value mg – – – – – – – – 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Minimum load mg – – – – – – – – 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Order No. 10 58 34080 10 58 34120 10 58 34220 10 58 34321 10 58 34322 10 58 34323 10 58 34324 10 58 34325 10 58 35080 10 58 35120 10 58 35220 10 58 35320 10 58 35321 10 58 35322 10 58 35323 10 58 35324 1) Can be verified: For applications that require verification, please order verification at the same time, initial verification at a later date is not possible. Verification at the factory, we need to know the full address of the location of use. 1 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 857 Continued on next page

859

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems 1 858 Precision and Analytical Balances Electronic analytical balance KERN ABP Premium analytical balance with the latest single-cell generation for extremely rapid, sta- ble weighing results • This new generation of analytical balances combines the highest level of precision with large weighing ranges. Thanks to the new single-cell generation, the weighing result is displayed in a fraction of the time required by comparable models. Together with the intuitively structured menu, this means that you can work efficiently and rapidly • Navigation pad for super quick navigating through the menus • Automatic internal adjustment in the case of a change in temperature p 1°C and time-controlled every 4 hours, guarantees high degree of accuracy and makes the bal- ance independent of its location of use • The minimum weight of sample can be manually stored in the device or automatically calculated. For weighings below this value, the balance issues a warning message • Dosage aid: High-stability mode and other filter settings can be selected • Simple recipe weighing and documenting with a combined tare/print function. In addi- tion, the mixing ingredients for the recipe are numbered automatically and printed out with their corresponding number and weight value • Individual user settings for up to 10 users can be saved: user name/user number (can be printed out or added to the record for each process), password, menu language, user profiles, accessing user settings via barcode, additional guest mode for users who are not logged in, authorisations, e.g. balance adjustment, changing, settings or condi- tioning or modification of a recipe only by the authorized person & performing the for- mulation by the user • U.S. FDA 21 Part 11: assists you in data integrity in accordance with U.S. FDA 21 Part 11 (for example weighing result, sample ID, user name, scales ID, ...) • Menu languages DE, EN • Automatic data output to the PC/printer each time the balance is steady • Large glass draught shield with 3 sliding doors for easy access to the items being weighed • KERN ABP-DM: Multi-function weighing plate included with delivery, minimises the ef- fect of currents of air in the weighing chamber and therefore significantly improves the stabilisation time and repeatability. In addition samples, sample paper, PCR containers, micro centrifuge tubes and many other items which protrude can be easily fixed in place and weighed easily • Bright OLED display with extremely stable viewing angle for optimum readability from different lines of sight or in bad light • RS 232 and USB interfaces for the transfer of weighing data to PCs, tablets, printers as well as for the connection of external devices, such as barcode scanners (optional), numeric keypad (optional), etc. • GLP/ISO record keeping: professional, detailed GLP log, making the balance fully com- pletely compliant with the relevant standard requirements in accordance with ISO, GLP and GMP • Protective working cover included with delivery • Note: Optional draught shield rear wall with integrated ioniser for installation in the ana- lytical balance. Extremely fast ionization process, thanks to the latest generation of KERN ionization technology to neutralise electrostatic charge. Particularly convenient handling as you no longer need a separate device. Simply enable the ioniser fan at the push of a button. Technical data: Display: self-luminous OLED display, digit height 14 mm, bright with strong contrast, for con- venient reading of the weighing value also in bad light stainless steel, Ø 91 mm Weighing plate: 213 × 407 × 344 mm Dimensions incl. draft shield (W×D×H): 166 × 156 × 220 mm Weighing space (W×D×H): Net weight: approx. 8 kg Permissible ambient temperature range: 10°C – 30°C Model Increment mg ABP 100-4M1) 0.1 ABP 200-4M1) 0.1 ABP 300-4M1) 0.1 1 ABP 100-5DM1) 0.01/0.1 ABP 200-5DM1) 0.01/0.1 Weighing range g 120 200 320 52/120 102/220 Calibration value mg 1 1 1 1 1 Minimum load mg 10 10 10 1 1 Order No. 10 58 34410 10 58 34420 10 58 34430 10 58 34510 10 58 34520 1) Can be verified: For applications that require verification, please order verification at the same time, initial verification at a later date is not possible. Verification at the factory, we need to know the full address of the location of use.

860

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems co d e b e w WWEH9001 Precision and Analytical Balances Laboratory Balances FZ/FX-i Series, A&D Instruments • Calibratable (FZ-i & FZ-iWP) • Built-in internal calibration (FZ-i & FZ-iWP) • Shock absorber function • SCF – Statistical Calculation Function • Auto power ON/OFF function • Standard RS-232C interface • Animal weighing program • Counting mode function • Percent mode function • Fast compact SHS sensor, response time only 1 second • B5 size footprint for use in narrow spaces • VFD Display for easy to read weighing results • Quick USB interface – no driver installation required (optional) • LAN – Ethernet interface with WinCT-Plus software (optional) • Large breeze break (optional) • Animal weighing pan (optional) • Transport case (optional) • Carat weighing pan (optional) • Built-in rechargeable NiMH battery pack (optional) IP65 water / dust proof models can be found in our online catalog by entering the webcode WWEH9001. Model Precision balances with internal calibration Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 FZ-120i-EC FZ-200i-EC FZ-300i-EC FZ-500i FZ-1200i-EC FZ-2000i-EC FZ-3000i-EC FZ-5000i Capacity g 122 220 320 520 1220 2200 3200 5200 Platform mm Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Precision balances with external calibration Model FX-120i FX-200i 1 FX-300i FX-500i FX-1200i FX-2000i FX-3000i FX-5000i Accessories Capacity g 122 220 320 520 1220 2200 3200 5200 Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 Platform mm Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 Ø 150 installation required at the factory Article FXi-OP-02 USB interface no driver installation necessary FXi-OP-08 LAN Ethernet output FXi-OP-09 NiMH battery pack FXi-OP-10 Small breeze break all models – except WP FXi-WP-10 Small breeze break (WP models) FXi-OP-11 Large breeze break FXi-WP-11 Large breeze break (WP models) AX-FX-31i Transparent plastic covers, 5 pcs. AX-CARATPAN-WEX Carat weighing pan – silver AX-CARATPAN-BEX Carat weighing pan – black AX-KO2737-500EX Waterproof RS-232C cable (5m) for all capacities – except WP for all capacities for all capacities Order No. 10 45 70120 10 45 70200 10 45 70300 10 45 70500 10 45 71200 10 45 72000 10 45 73000 10 45 75000 Order No. 10 45 70121 10 45 70201 10 45 70301 10 45 70501 10 45 71201 10 45 72001 10 45 73001 10 45 75001 Order No. 10 45 78001 10 45 78002 10 45 78003 10 45 78004 10 45 78005 10 45 78006 10 45 78007 10 45 78008 10 45 78009 10 45 78010 10 45 78011 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 859

861

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems co d e b e w WWEH9004 1 860 Precision and Analytical Balances Laboratory Balances BM Series, A&D Instruments • Easy, fanless elimination of static electricity using a built-in ionizer • Large weighing chamber for improved usability • Built-in temperature, humidity, and atmospheric pressure sensors • Interlockable slide doors allowing efficient operation with both hands • Motorized calibration with an internal mass: automatically triggered based on tempera- ture variation, triggered by operator • Clearly visible, white-backlit LCD • Memory: up to 200 data sets • AD-1688 as standard accessory: dedicated USB key to record weighing data as well as environmental parameters into MS Excel readable files • 12 weighing units: g, mg, oz, ozt, ct, mom, dwt, GN, tael, tola, pcs (counting), %. • Interfaces: RS-232C (standard), quick USB (standard), Ethernet (optional) BM series microbalances • Special pans/holders: Small pans for sampling minute amounts Holders for PM filters Holders for microfuge tubes • Optional pipette accuracy testing kit Model 1 BM-20 BM-22 Capacity g 22 5.1/22 Increment µg 1 1/10 Platform mm Ø 25 50 and 95 mm for filter pans Order No. 10 45 70020 10 45 70022 BM series semi-microbalance Model BM-252 Capacity g 250 Increment mg 0.01 Platform mm Ø 90 Order No. 10 45 70254 BM series analytical balances Model BM-200 BM-300 BM-500 Capacity g 220 320 520 Increment mg 0.1 0.1 0.1 Platform mm Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Order No. 10 45 70202 10 45 70302 10 45 70502 Accessories Article BM-08 Ethernet interface with WinCT-Plus software BM-14 Pipette testing kit only BM-20/22 ADI-MWT Weighing table AD-1653 Density measurement kit BM-252/200/300/500 AD-1671 Tabletop anti-vibration table AD-1672 Table top breeze break AD-1672A able top breeze break with sloping front panel AD-1684 Electrostatic field meter AD-1689 Tweezers for calibration weight AX-BM-031 Display working covers, 5 pcs. AX-BM-032 Centrifuge tube holder AX-BM-033 Dust cover AX-BM-034 Centrifuge tube holder BM-200/300/500/252 AX-BM-NEEDLESET Ioniser electrode needles, 4 pcs. AX-PANS Aluminium analytical pan (0.05 ml, Ø 8 mm), 100 pcs. AX-PANM Aluminium analytical pan (0.3 ml, Ø 12 mm), 100 pcs. AX-PANL Aluminium analytical pan (0.8 ml, Ø 15 mm), 100 pcs. AX-Holder-S Sample vessel holders S, 40×40×32 mm, 2 pcs. AX-Holder-M Sample vessel holders M, 40×40×32 mm, 2 pcs. AX-Holder-L Sample vessel holders L, 40×40×32 mm, 2 pcs. AX-Holder-Set Set with 3 sample vessel holders AX-SW137-PRINT Foot swich for printing function AX-SW137-REZERO Foot swich for RE-ZERO function Order No. 10 45 70808 10 45 70140 10 45 71000 10 45 71653 10 45 71671 10 45 71672 10 45 71673 10 45 71684 10 45 71689 10 45 70031 10 45 70032 10 45 70033 10 45 70034 10 45 74000 10 45 70058 10 45 70312 10 45 70815 10 45 74040 10 45 74041 10 45 74042 10 45 74100 10 45 70137 10 45 71137

862

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Analysis Balances Ohaus Explorer®, METTLER TOLEDO The premium class: efficient, top-quality, can be adjusted to individual require- ments! High-grade modular design: • Robust high-speed weighing cell precision-machined from a solid metal block, metal housing • Detachable terminal, can be set up separately at an adjustable angle • Can be extended with optional communication modules • Glass draftshield (easily-to-detach panes, free access through frameless and folding cover) Features: • High-resolution colour 7 ″ VGA touchscreen, several languages, intuitive operation • Contactless operation with 4 multi-functional sensors: quick, safe and clean • 17 weighing modes/functions, library for personal settings • Full GxP support (user, data, ID management, and SystemLog records, specification of minimum net weight, free data software,…) • Interfaces: 2 × USB, 1 × RS 232, 4. optional port (e.g. Ethernet) • Fully automated internal AutoCal™ adjustment, various adjustment modes • Contactless opening / closing of the door can be set individually (models EX225../AD) • Integrated ioniser for elimination of electrostatics (models EX225../AD) • Optional accessories: density kit, Ethernet connection, protective cover etc. Model Incre- Weighing ment range mg g EX125D 0.01/0.1 5/120 EX125DM1) 0.01/0.1 1 5/120 EX125 0.01 120 EX125M1) 120 0.01 1 EX225D 120/220 0.01/0.1 EX225DM1) 120/220 0.01/0.1 1 EX225D/AD2)3) 120/220 0.01/0.1 EX225DM/AD1)2)3) 120/220 0.01/0.1 1 EX225/AD2)3) EX225M/AD1)2)3) 1 EX124 EX124/AD3) EX224 EX224/AD3) EX224M1) 1 EX224M/AD1)3) 1 EX324 EX324/AD3) EX324M1) 1 EX324M/AD1)3) 1 220 220 120 120 220 220 220 220 320 320 320 320 1) Factory calibration M 2) Ioniser 3) Auto-Door Accessories on request. 0.01 0.01 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 0,1 (e) mg Plat- form mm Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 80 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Adjustment weight g 100, E2 100, E2 100, E2 100, E2 200, E2 200, E2 200, E2 200, E2 200, E2 200, E2 100, E2 100, E2 200, E2 200, E2 200, E2 200, E2 300, E2 300, E2 300, E2 300, E2 Order No. 10 97 01251 10 97 01252 10 97 01253 10 97 01254 10 97 02251 10 97 02252 10 97 02253 10 97 02254 10 97 02255 10 97 02256 10 97 01331 10 97 01242 10 97 01332 10 97 02242 10 97 01333 10 97 02244 10 97 01335 10 97 03242 10 97 01336 10 97 03244 Analysis Balances Ohaus PR, METTLER TOLEDO Easy, safe and low-cost – for smart weighing! • Display shows overload and stability information • Internal calibration, factory-calibrated (for some models) • Easy, intuitive backlit LCD display (adjustable brightness) • Detachable glass draftshield, integrated weigh-below-hook, calibration lock • RS232 interface for printer connection or data transmission • Selectable environment filters, automatic taring function • Project and user IDs • Optional accessories (density kit, USB converter, ioniser, second display, …) Model PR124/E PR1241) PR124M1)2) PR224/E PR2241) PR224M1)2) Weighing range g 120 120 120 220 220 220 Increment mg 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 (e) mg 1 1 Platform mm Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Ø 90 Order No. 10 97 04368 10 97 04367 10 97 04384 10 97 04370 10 97 04369 10 97 04385 1) Internal calibration 2) Factory calibration M co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 861

863

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Precision and Analytical Balances Precision Balance Ohaus Explorer®, METTLER TOLEDO The premium class: efficient, individually adjustable, top-quality! High-grade modular design: • Robust high-speed weighing cell precision-machined from a solid metal block, metal housing • Detachable terminal, can be set up separately at an adjustable angle • Can be extended with optional communication modules • Glass draftshield (easily-to-detach panes, free access through folding cover) Features: • High-resolution colour 7 ″ VGA touchscreen, several languages, intuitive operation • Contactless operation with multi-functional sensors: quick, safe and clean • 17 weighing modes/functions, library for personal settings • Full GxP support (user, data, ID management, and SystemLog records, specification of minimum net weight, free data software,…) • Interfaces: 2 × USB, 1 × RS 232, 4. optional port (e.g. Ethernet) • Fully automated internal AutoCal™ adjustment, various adjustment modes • Optional accessories: density kit, Ethernet connection, protective cover etc. Order No. Platform (e) Model Weighing range g 220 220 420 420 420 620 1100 1100 2200 2200 4200 4200 4200 6200 6200 10200 10200 6200 6200 10200 10300 12000 12000 24000 24000 1) Factory calibration M 2) Internal calibration EX2232) EX223/E EX4232) EX423/E EX423M1)2) EX6232) EX11032) EX1103M1)2) EX22022) EX2202/E EX42022) EX4202/E EX4202M1)2) EX62022) EX6202/E EX102022) EX10202M1)2) EX62012) EX6201/E EX102012) EX10201M1)2) EX120012) EX12001M1)2) EX240012) EX24001M1)2) Incre- ment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 mm mg Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 130 0.01 Ø 130 Ø 130 Ø 130 0.01 Ø 130 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 1 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 190×200 377×311 377×311 377×311 377×311 Adjustment weight kg 0.2, F1 0.2, F1 0.4, F1 0.4, F1 0.4, F1 0.5, F1 1, F1 1, F1 2, F1 2, F1 4, F1 4, F1 4, F1 5, F1 5, F1 10, F1 10, F1 5, F1 5, F1 10, F1 10, F1 10, F1 10, F1 20, F1 20, F1 10 97 01341 10 97 01344 10 97 01342 10 97 01345 10 97 01343 10 97 01348 10 97 01350 10 97 01351 10 97 01356 10 97 01352 10 97 01357 10 97 01353 10 97 01358 10 97 01360 10 97 01364 10 97 01362 10 97 01363 10 97 01361 10 97 01368 10 97 01365 10 97 01366 10 97 01371 10 97 01372 10 97 01373 10 97 01374 Precision Balances Ohaus PR, METTLER TOLEDO Easy, safe and low-cost – for smart weighing! • Display shows overload and stability information • Internal calibration, factory-calibrated (for some models) • Easy, intuitive backlit LCD display (adjustable brightness) • Detachable glass draftshield, integrated weigh-below-hook, calibration lock • RS232 interface for printer connection or data transmission • Selectable environment filters, automatic taring function • Project and user IDs • Optional accessories (density kit, USB converter, ioniser, second display, …) Model PR223/E PR2231) PR223M1)2) PR423/E PR4231) PR423M1)2) PR523/E PR5231) PR523M1)2) PR1602/E PR16021) Weighing range g 220 220 220 420 420 420 520 520 520 1600 1600 Incre- ment g 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 (e) Platform mm mg Ø 120 Ø 120 0.01 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 0.01 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 0.01 Ø 120 Ø 180 Ø 180 Adjustment weight kg 0.2, F1 0.2, F1 0.2, F1 0.2+0.2, F1 0.2+0.2, F1 0.2+0.2, F1 0.5, F1 0.5, F1 0.5, F1 1+0.5, F1 1+0.5, F1 Order No. 10 97 02231 10 97 02232 10 97 02233 10 97 04231 10 97 04232 10 97 04233 10 97 05231 10 97 05232 10 97 05233 10 97 01621 10 97 01622 Continued on next page 862

864

Precision and Analytical Balances Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Model Weighing range g 1600 2200 2200 2200 4200 4200 4200 4200 4200 4200 6200 6200 6200 1) Internal calibration 2) Factory calibration M PR1602M1)2) PR2202/E PR22021) PR2202M1)2) PR4202/E PR42021) PR4202M1)2) PR4201/E PR42011) PR4201M1)2) PR6201/E PR62011) PR6201M1)2) Incre- ment g 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 (e) mg 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 Platform mm Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Ø 180 Adjustment weight kg 1+0.5, F1 2, F1 2, F1 2, F1 2+2, F1 2+2, F1 2+2, F1 2+2, F1 2+2, F1 2+2, F1 5+1, F1 5+1, F1 5+1, F1 Order No. 10 97 01623 10 97 02221 10 97 02222 10 97 02223 10 97 04221 10 97 04222 10 97 04223 10 97 04211 10 97 04212 10 97 04213 10 97 06211 10 97 06212 10 97 06213 Precision Balances Ohaus Scout® STX, METTLER TOLEDO • Perfect for education purposes and straightforward weighing tasks • 9 weighing modes, incl. parts counting, animal weighing, density determination, ... • 4.3" colour touchscreen with 9 system languages for fast data input • Fast stabilisation time, indication of overload, underload, and stability • Optional interfaces: RS-232, USB host/device with memory function, Bluetooth, Ethernet • Operation with power pack (comprised in the scope of delivery) or batteries, automatic switch-off • Stackable housing with weigh-below hook Model Weighing range g STX123 120 STX223 220 STX222 220 STX422 420 STX622 620 STX1202 1200 STX2202 2200 420 STX421 STX621 620 STX2201 2200 STX6201 6200 STX8200 8200 Increment g 0.001 0.001 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 1 Platform mm Ø 93 Ø 93 Ø 120 Ø 120 Ø 120 170×140 170×140 Ø 120 170×140 170×140 170×140 170×140 Accessories on request. Adjustment weight g 100,M1 200,M1 200,M1 200,M1 300,M1 1000,M1 2000,M1 200,M1 300,M1 2000,M1 5000,M1 8000,M1 Order No. 10 97 03058 10 97 03059 10 97 03060 10 97 03061 10 97 03062 10 97 03063 10 97 03064 10 97 03065 10 97 03066 10 97 03067 10 97 03068 10 97 03069 Toploading Balances BTG, Phoenix Instrument The balances of the BTG-series convince with easy handling and great user convenience. The balances come not only with an illuminated display but also with a test weight and an integrated rechargeable battery or mobile applications. A protective hood is available to protect the BTG balances from contaminations. co d e b e w WWSB5024 • large, bright display • large weighing pan • intuitive and easy operation • large glass windscreen provided as a standard for mg balances • counting function, percentage weighing, 21 different units • internal battery comprised in the scope of delivery • test weight included • RS-232 interface • 3 years warranty 1 BTG-303 external 3 sec. Ø 118 mm 292 × 218 × 227 mm 292 × 218 × 80 mm 292 × 218 × 80 mm 188 × 148 mm 188 × 148 mm BTG-2002 BTG-6001 external 3 sec. external 3 sec. 5.1 kg 3.1 kg Increment g 0.001 0.01 0.1 3.1 kg Reproducibility g 0.001 0.01 0.1 Order No. 10 13 70303 10 13 72102 10 13 76001 Technical data: Calibration: Measuring time: Pan size: Dimensions: Weight: Type 1 BTG-303 2 BTG-2002 2 BTG-6001 Weighing range g 300 2000 6000 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 863

865

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems co d e b e w WWEZ6025 co d e b e w WWEZ6026 1 864 Precision and Analytical Balances Entris® II – Essential Line Laboratory Balances, Sartorius Lab Products and Services No matter what you wish to weigh out: the new Entris® II is always the right choice. It is the only analytical balance in its class featuring isoCAL, LED touch technology and 12 built-in applications. Benefits: • Highly accurate results year in, year out – guaranteed via Monolithic weigh cell technol- ogy invented by Sartorius • Fastest stabilization time in its class – using state-of-the-art weighing sensors • High chemical resistance – ensured using parts made from hard-wearing polybutylene terephthalate (PBT), stainless steel and glass Type BCE124i–1S BCE323i – 1S BCE3202i – 1S BCE2201i – 1S BCE6200i – 1S Weighing range g 120 320 3200 2200 6200 Order No. 10 55 50241 10 55 50231 10 55 50021 10 55 50011 10 55 50001 Please enter the webcode WWEZ6025 to see the other variants and accessories in our online catalogue. Cubis® II Laboratory Balances, Sartorius Lab Products and Services The modular weighing system Cubis® II can be configured individually from a series of components. Display unit, weighing module, draft shield, software packages for various applications and functions, and a wide range of accessories ensures that the Cubis® II balance can be individually adapted to all weighing tasks. With a maximum load of 2.1 g to 70 kg and a readability between 0.1 µg and 1 g, the premium laboratory balances of the Cubis® II series offer the perfect match for every application. Benefits: • Monolithic weighing system, integrated thermal sensors, individual sample holders • Error-free operation: individual QApp workflows, motorised automated leveling • Full gap-free data integrity: compliance with US Directive 21 CFR Part 11, integrated audit trail, state-of-the-art user management • Customer service: integrated status centre, integrated service functions, preventive maintenance pursuant to recognised standards Type MCA10.6S-S00-M MCA224S-S00-I MCA6202S-S00-0 MCA225S-S00-I MCA5203S-S00-E MCA36201S-S00-0 Order No. 10 55 50600 10 55 50400 10 55 50200 10 55 50500 10 55 50300 10 55 50100 Please enter the webcode WWEZ6026 to see the other variants and accessories in our online catalogue. Platform Balances Platform Scales, KERN Platform scale KERN EOC Robust and high-resolution platform scale with practical Flip/Flop display device for great- est ease of use • Weighing instead of counting! Because the counting function is so easy to use, you can rapidly record large numbers of small parts – which saves time and money! • Practical Flip/Flop display device: flexible positioning e.g. free-standing or screwed to the wall (optional). By rotating the upper housing shell you can determine the angle of the display as well as the cable outlet. Factory option against surcharge, delivery time + 2 work days, KERN KIB-M01, • see Accessories • High mobility: Thanks to battery operation (optional) and compact, light-weight con- struction, the balance is suitable for use in several locations (laboratory, production, quality control, commissioning etc.) Continued on next page

866

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Platform Balances • Platform: Weighing plate stainless steel, painted steel base, silicone-coated aluminium load cell, protection against dust and water splashes IP65. Level indicator and levelling feet for precise levelling of the balance, fitted as standard, to give the most accurate weighing result • Weighing with tolerance range (checkweighing): a visual and audible signal helps with portioning, dispensing or grading • Hold function: When the weighing conditions are unstable, a stable weight is calculated determining an average value • Benchtop stand incl. wall mount for display device as standard • Protective working cover included in the delivery • Searching and remote control of the balance using external control devices or comput- ers with the KERN Communication Protocol (KCP). KCP is a standardised interface command structure for KERN balances and other instruments which allows you to recall and manage all relevant parameters and device functions. You can therefore simply connect KERN devices with KCP to computers, industrial control systems and other digital systems. The KCP is largely compatible with the MT-SICS protocol. Only possible through data interface RS-232, other interfaces on request 2 Technical data: Display: Dimensions display device (W×D×H): Permissible ambient temperature range: large backlit LCD display, digit height 24 mm 268 × 115 × 80 mm -10°C – 40°C Model EOC 10K-4 EOC 30K-4S EOC 30K-4 EOC 60K-3 EOC 60K-3L EOC 100K-3 EOC 100K-3L EOC 300K-3 1 EOC 6K-3 EOC 10K-3 EOC 30K-3 2 EOC 30K-3L EOC 60K-2 EOC 60K-2L EOC 100K-2 EOC 100K-2L EOC 100K-2XL 3 EOC 100K-2XXL EOC 300K-2 EOC 300K-2L EOC 6K-4A EOC 10K-3A EOC 20K-3A EOC 60K-3A EOC 100K-2A Increment g 0.2/0.5 0.5/1 0.5/1 1/2 1/2 2/5 2/5 5/10 1/2 2/5 5/10 5/10 10/20 10/20 20/50 20/50 20/50 20/50 50/100 50/100 0.5 1 2 5 10 Weighing range kg 6/15 15/35 15/35 30/60 30/60 60/150 60/150 150/300 3/6 6/12 15/35 15/35 30/60 30/60 60/150 60/150 60/150 60/150 150/300 150/300 6 12 24 60 120 Platform mm 300×300 500×400 500×400 300×300 500×400 300×300 500×400 500×400 300×300 300×300 300×300 500×400 300×300 500×400 300×300 500×400 600×500 950×550 500×400 950×550 300×300 300×300 300×300 300×300 500×400 Order No. 10 58 37400 10 58 37401 10 58 37402 10 58 37403 10 58 37404 10 58 37405 10 58 37406 10 58 37407 10 58 37408 10 58 37409 10 58 37410 10 58 37411 10 58 37412 10 58 37413 10 58 37414 10 58 37415 10 58 37416 10 58 37417 10 58 37418 10 58 37419 10 58 37420 10 58 37421 10 58 37422 10 58 37423 10 58 37424 Accessories Article Protective working cover EOC-A01S05, packaging unit 5 pcs. Rechargeable battery pack internal KFB-A01 Operating time up to 43 h without backlight, charging time approx. 3 h to fasten the display device to the platform Stand to elevate display device EOC-A05 height of stand approx. 330 mm Mount EOC-A03 Table stand incl. wall mount EOC-A04 Conversion of the display device KIB-M01 for the display device for cable outlet at the front of the display device, ideally suited e.g. for subsequent wall installation of the display device (standard configuration ex works: outlet at the rear), factory option, delivery time +2 working days 4 Thermal printer KERN YKB-01N 5 Dot matrix printer KERN YKN-01 6 Statistics printer KERN YKS-01 Label printer KERN YKE-01 Order No. 10 58 37425 10 58 37426 10 58 37427 10 58 37428 10 58 37429 10 58 37430 10 58 35005 10 58 35501 10 58 35004 10 58 35006 4 5 3 co d e b e w WW6CF005 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 865

867

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems co d e b e w WW6CF001 Weights Test Weights, KERN KERN precision test weights are important tools for controlling your measuring instru- ments within the scope of ISO 9000ff quality control specifications. The weights also serve to calibrate your balances to the earth’s gravitational pull at the respective location. Test weights • Individual weights (see table below) Additional accuracy classes (E1, M2, M3), alternative materials (stain- less steel, precision turned brass, etc.), case made of wood or plastic for safe storage of the individual weights, weight-specific accessories, DAkkS calibration certificate up- on request. • Weight sets Available in OIML denominations of 1 mg/1 g up to 10 kg (standard), with individually configurable weight sets available upon request. Calibration certificates for test weights DAkkS calibration certificates are evidence of the accuracy of your test weights and serve as a means with which to track your test equipment within the scope of ISO 9000ff qual- ity control specifications. Kern is accredited by the DAkkS accreditation institute as a DAkkS calibration laboratory for balances, test weights, and force gauges. Thus, the sev- en calibration labs equipped with state-of-the-art technology are able to issue internation- ally recognized DAkkS calibration certificates. Furthermore, we will be pleased to follow up the periodical intervals for recalibration of your test weight and balances and to timely perform the regular recalibration of your equipment. E2 class Wght Order No. Wght Order No. Wght Order No. mg 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 64 58 31801 64 58 31802 64 58 31803 64 58 31804 64 58 31805 64 58 31806 64 58 31807 64 58 31808 64 58 31809 F1 class g 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 64 58 31701 64 58 31702 64 58 31703 64 58 31704 64 58 31705 64 58 31706 64 58 31707 64 58 31708 64 58 31709 kg 1 2 5 10 20 50 64 58 31711 64 58 31712 64 58 31713 64 58 31714 64 58 31715 64 58 31716 Wght Order No. Wght Order No. Wght Order No. g 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 64 58 32801 64 58 32802 64 58 32803 64 58 32804 64 58 32805 64 58 32806 64 58 32807 64 58 32808 64 58 32809 F2 class g 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 10 58 32601 10 58 32602 10 58 32603 10 58 32604 10 58 32605 10 58 32606 10 58 32607 10 58 32608 10 58 32609 g 1 2 5 10 20 50 10 58 32611 10 58 32612 10 58 32613 10 58 32614 10 58 32615 10 58 32616 Wght Order No. Wght Order No. Wght Order No. mg 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 64 58 33801 64 58 33802 64 58 33803 64 58 33804 64 58 33805 64 58 33806 64 58 33807 64 58 33808 64 58 33809 M1 class g 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 64 58 33761 64 58 33762 64 58 33763 64 58 33764 64 58 33765 64 58 33766 64 58 33767 64 58 33768 64 58 33769 kg 1 2 5 10 20 50 64 58 33771 64 58 33772 64 58 33773 64 58 33774 64 58 33775 64 58 33776 Wght Order No. Wght Order No. Wght Order No. mg 1 2 50 10 20 50 100 200 500 64 58 34801 64 58 34802 64 58 34803 64 58 34804 64 58 34805 64 58 34806 64 58 34807 64 58 34808 64 58 34809 g 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 64 58 34741 64 58 34742 64 58 34743 64 58 34744 64 58 34745 64 58 34746 64 58 34747 64 58 34748 64 58 34749 kg 1 2 5 10 64 58 34751 64 58 34752 64 58 34753 64 58 34754 866

868

Weighing Dishes and Jars Weighing Brushes, neoLab® Weighing brushes, pointed with fine hairs, from removing dust and powder residues from weighing boats. Total length: approx. 110 mm Article Weighing brush Weighing brush Weighing brush Weighing brushes in a set Ø mm 5 10 15 5, 10, 15 Order No. 37 01 17215 37 01 17216 37 01 17214 10 01 17212 Weighing Cards, neoLab® Weighing cards in packs of 1000 g. With smooth surface. Not to be missed in the labo- ratory for weighing powders, scraping together, etc. Article Weighing cards Order No. 22 01 15210 PU g/Pack 1000 Weighing Papers, neoLab® Top quality, practical format 133 × 100 mm. Stapled in blocks of 250 sheets. Article Weighing papers Order No. 37 01 17217 Weighing Paper, Hahnemühle The smooth surface guarantees the quantitative transfer of the material being weighed without any losses. Can be used instead of a weighing boat. For determination of the total protein content in food and of the nitrogen content in soil analysis. Article Weighing paper, 5 × 5 cm Weighing paper, 10 × 10 cm Weighing paper, 15 × 15 cm Order No. 10 15 93605 10 15 93610 10 15 93615 PU pc/Pack 500 500 500 Measuring Systems Weighing Systems co d e b e w co d e b e w WW2NY155 WW2NY022 co d e b e w WW2NY157 co d e b e w WW6PB022 Weighing Boats, Plastic, LAT Flexible plastic weighing boats, white, for liquids and solids. Can be used for practical- ly all sample materials. Use once only. co d e b e w WWW4U005 W × H × Depth Pcs/pack Order No. cm 40×40×10 80×80×20 140×140×20 100 100 100 22 20 10001 22 20 10002 22 20 10003 PU Pack/ Box 5 5 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 867

869

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems co d e b e w WW2NY023 Weighing Dishes and Jars Disposable Weighing Dishes, neoLab® Flexible plastic weighing dishes made of PS For solids or liquids, temperature resistant up to 93°C, antistatic. Available in 3 sizes: Size I: 44 x 44 x 7 mm, ca. 7 ml Size II: 80 x 80 x 20 mm, ca. 100 ml Size III: 140 x 140 x 22 mm, ca. 250 ml Colour Size white blue white blue white blue I I II II III III Volume ml 7 7 100 100 250 250 Order No. 10 01 11124 22 01 11130 10 01 11125 22 01 11131 10 01 11126 22 01 11132 PU pc/Pack 500 100 500 100 500 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. e co d e co d b b e w e w WW2NY159 Aluminium Slices, neoLab® Aluminium Slices Aluminium foil in ready-cut slices with silk paper inlay. Heavy duty version, 0.03 mm thick. Order No. Article Aluminium slices Aluminium slices Aluminium slices Aluminium slices Aluminium slices Ø mm 80 100 120 130 150 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 38 01 21048 38 01 21050 38 01 21051 38 01 21049 38 01 21052 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Acrylic dispenser with gripping gap Article Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser for Ø mm 100 120 130 Order No. 38 01 21053 38 01 21054 38 01 21056 co d e b e w WW2NY160 Aluminium Dishes with Handle, neoLab® Disposable aluminium dishes, round, with tab for carrying or for numbering samples. Sturdy materials, clean surface, no oil residues. Can also be used as evaporating dishes, weighing dishes, etc. Size Ø at bottom mm 43 55 70 13 Height mm 11.0 14.0 15.0 3.5 I II III IV ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 38 01 21600 38 01 21601 38 01 21602 38 01 21603 Weight g 1.0 1.5 2.0 Order No. PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 WWSU9018 Aluminium Dishes, Dinkelberg Analytics Disposable aluminium dishes for determining dry matter content, completely flat, thin- walled with reinforced rim, made of bright aluminium. Bottom Ø mm 1 78 1 78 2 51 2 51 2 Rim Ø mm 96 96 64 64 Height mm 24 24 13 13 Weight g 3.7 3.7 1.5 1.5 Volume ml 125 125 28 28 Order No. 10 32 11210 10 32 12800 10 32 11211 10 32 16300 PU pc/Pack 100 2800 100 6300 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. co d e b e w 1 868

870

Measuring Systems Weighing Systems Weighing Dishes and Jars Weighing Dishes/IR-samples, Aluminium, schuett-biotec Ideal for moisture determination in infrared ovens. Samples can be well distributed hori- zontally and reflect the heat evenly over the complete dish area. Can also be used as laboratory dishes. Ø mm 100 Height mm 7 Order No. 38 31 10005 PU pc/Pack 80 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Weighing Boats, neoLab® 1 Weighing boats made of borosilicate glass, pointed front with tube-shaped stem Article Weighing boat, 65 mm long Weighing boat, 70 mm long Weighing boat, 80 mm long 2 Weighing boats made of borosilicate glass, round front with tube-shaped stem Article Weighing boat, 82 mm long Weighing boat, 95 mm long Weighing boat, 116 mm long 3 Weighing boats made of borosilicate glass, open spade shape with flat, ground bottom Article Weighing boat, 60 mm long Weighing boat, 80 mm long Weighing boat, 100 mm long Order No. 11 01 17210 11 01 17211 11 01 17213 Order No. 11 01 17150 11 01 17151 11 01 17152 Order No. 11 01 17220 11 01 17221 11 01 17222 1 3 4 Weighing boats made of high-grade steel (4301) For weighing out of powdery materials. Without handle, curved, scoop-shaped for easier pouring out. Article Weighing boat Weighing boat Weighing boat Weighing boat L × W mm 70 × 35 90 × 35 105 × 35 120 × 35 Weight approx. g 15 23 30 35 Order No. 10 01 17146 10 01 17147 10 01 17148 10 01 17149 Weighing Bottles, Rettberg Weighing bottles made of SBW borosilicate glass 6.5, with burnt-in reinforcement and replaceable stopper with standard ground joint. co d e b e w WW2NY003 2 4 co d e b e w WWQVD029 co d e b e w WWEQ2042 Version tall form tall form tall form tall form tall form tall form tall form low form low form low form low form low form Height mm 40 50 50 65 70 80 80 25 30 30 30 30 Ø mm 25 30 40 40 35 40 50 25 35 50 60 80 Volume approx. ml 10 20 40 45 45 70 110 6 15 30 45 80 Order No. 11 42 14025 11 42 15030 11 42 15040 11 42 16540 11 42 17035 11 42 18040 11 42 18050 11 42 22525 11 42 23035 11 42 23050 11 42 23060 11 42 23080 Weighing Bottles, Flat Shape, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Weighing bottles with ground lid. Bottom part height mm 30 30 30 Volume ml 15 30 80 Order No. 11 24 21023 11 24 21032 11 24 21041 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 Bottom part O.D. mm 38 54 85 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 869

871

Measuring Systems Humidity co d e b e w WWEH9005 1 co d e b e w WWDX7016 870 Moisture Analyzers Moisture Analyzers MS/MX/MF/ML, A&D Instruments Moisture analyzers MS/MX/MF/ML • Fast and even heating via halogen lamp • High reproducibility with SHS technology (Super Hybrid Sensor) • Standard WinCT Moisture software (for MS & MX) • Method memory • Five measuring programs (standard, automatic, fast, time, and manual mode) • Selectable heating mode (standard, fast, step-by-step, or linear increase) • Bright, easy-to-read large vacuum fluorescence display • Standard RS232C interface • Calibration of the heating temperature with option MX/MF-OP-43 (for MS & MX) Model MVGS-70 1 MVGX-50 MVGF-50 MVGL-50 Capacity g 71 51 51 51 Increment mg 0.1 1 2 5 Platform mm Ø 85 Ø 85 Ø 85 Ø 85 Order No. 10 45 70070 10 45 70050 10 45 70051 10 45 70052 Accessories Article MX/MF-OP-30 Disposable sample pans, 100 pcs. MX/MF-OP-31 Reusable sample pans, 100 pcs. MX/MF-OP-32-1 Glass fibre filter Ø 70 mm, 100 pcs. MX/MF-OP-32-2 Glass fibre filter Ø 78 mm, 100 pcs. MX/MF-OP-33 Sodium Tartate Dihydrate 30 g, 12 pcs. MX/MF-OP-34-120V Halogen lamp 120 V MX/MF-OP-34-240V Halogen lamp 240 V MX/MF-OP-35 Shell handles, 2 pcs. MX/MF-OP-36 Forceps, 2 pcs. MX/MF-OP-37 Sample spatula, 2 pcs. MX/MF-OP-38 Display covers, 5 pcs. MX/MF-OP-39 Dust cover MX/MF-OP-40 RS-232 cable (9-25 pin) MX/MF-OP-42 WinCT Moisture Software CD MX/MF-OP-43 Temperature calibrator (only MVGS-70 & MVGX-50) OP-43-Cal-Cert Calibration certificate for OP-43 (net) Order No. 10 45 70030 10 45 73100 10 45 70321 10 45 70322 10 45 70330 10 45 73412 10 45 73424 10 45 70035 10 45 70036 10 45 70037 10 45 70038 10 45 70039 10 45 74232 10 45 70042 10 45 70043 10 45 74343 PMB Moisture Analyzers, AE Adam PMB moisture analyzers With simple operation and rapid response time, PMB moisture analyzers offer the top value in their class. Features and functions: • Vivid, backlit LCD (digit height: 24 mm) with capacity indication • Sturdy aluminium casing • By default, RS-232 and USB interface and USB host • Temperature range from 50°C to 160°C, in 1° increments • Three settings for heating the sample: fast ramp-up, stepped temperatures and single temperature • Seven preset drying modes • Calibration of temperature and weight • 3 years warranty Technical data: Weighing units: Platform: Heating unit: Stabilisation time: Internal memory: g, %M, %S, ATRO %M, ATRO %S Ø 100 mm 400 W halogen bulb 50 – 160°C 4 sec. up to 99 test results and 49 programmable user settings Model PMB 53 PMB 163 PMB 202 Capacity g 50 160 200 Increment 0.001 g / 0.01 % 0.001 g / 0.01 % 0.01 g / 0.05 % Order No. 10 56 55300 10 56 51630 10 56 54202 Continued on next page

872

Measuring Systems Humidity co d e b e w WW6CF007 Moisture Analyzers Accessories Article Aluminium sample pans Glass fibre pads Set for temperature calibration Order No. 10 56 54001 10 56 53622 10 56 50636 PU pc/Pack 250 200 1 Moisture Analyzers, KERN Moisture analysing is an integral part of the manufacture respectively processing of many finished and raw products and significantly affects the quality of the product. Moisture analysers are particularly often used in the food industry, water management (sewage plants etc.), plastic industry, agriculture, and energy management (bio-energy plants etc.). You need experience to analyse moisture properly. Different drying processes are used depending on the type of sample and the respective task. KERN focuses on halogen and infrared drying, the most frequently used drying pro- cesses which have a number of advantages: • Even heating of the sample from above without any risk of burning the surface of the sample • Low purchasing prices ensure a fast payback period of the device • Temperature ranges from 35 to 200°C • High measuring accuracy of up to 0.01% • Sufficient capacity reserves, weighing ranges up to 200 g • Various drying programs (gentle drying, standard drying, step drying, fast drying/Boost) A particularly convenient feature is the large number of storage spaces in the KERN mois- ture analysers to which complete drying processes with drying parameters such as dura- tion and temperature of drying, display settings, switch-off criteria etc. can be saved. This helps you to work faster and to achieve reproducible results. Go to the KERN website to download a helpful application manual for each KERN mois- ture analyser with plenty of examples, field reports, settings and tips. Determination of drying parameters Send us a sample of your product for individual testing on our premises. This helps you to find the optimum settings for the parameters of your moisture analyser to achieve re- producible results. KERN 965-243, 95 EUR/hour plus VAT Temperature calibration of KERN moisture analysers (works calibration certificate) To ensure the comparability of the moisture analysis results, the temperature in the heat- ing chamber and thus the sample temperature must be kept accurately. This requires regular temperature calibration, KERN 964-305, 140 EUR plus VAT. 1 Moisture analyzer KERN DAB Moisture analyser which is particularly easy to use - now also as a version with [d] = 10 mg, ideal for recurring rapid tests KERN DAB 200-2: Version with lower resolution which ensures that the switch-off criteri- on is reached faster to save time. Ideally suited for rapid testing and random sampling. Backlit graphic display, digit height 14mm All information visible at a glance from the graphic display: • Drying process active • Active heating profile • Active switch-off criterion • Previous drying time • Current temperature • Current moisture content in % • Halogen quartz glass heater 400 W • Observation window above the sample, useful during initial setting • Internal memory for automatic sequence of 15 complete drying processes and 5 drying processes carried out • The last value measured remains on the display until overwritten by a new measurement • 50 sample plates included • Application handbook: Online you will find a practical application handbook containing many examples, field reports, settings and tips for each KERN moisture analyser Model DAB 100-3 DAB 200-2 Increment g/% 0.001/0.01 0.01/0.05 Weighing range g 110 200 Order No. 10 58 35903 10 58 35902 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 871 Continued on next page

873

Measuring Systems Humidity Moisture Analyzers Aceessories for KERN DAB Article Sample plates aluminium KERN MLB-A01A, Ø 90 mm, Order No. 10 58 37442 packaging unit 80 pcs. Round fiberglass filter KERN RH-A02, packaging unit 100 pcs. 10 58 37443 high mechanical stability, with organic binder Round fiberglass filter KERN YMF-A01, packaging unit 100 pcs. 10 58 37444 medium mechanical stability, without organic binder Temperature calibration set KERN DAB-A01 consists of measuring sensor and display device Temperature range 40°C – 160°C, Factory Option RS-232 Ethernet adapter KERN YKI-01 RS-232 Bluetooth adapter KERN YKI-02 for connection to an IP-based Ethernet network for connection to Bluetooth-capable devices, such as Bluetooth printers, tablets, laptops, smartphones etc. Infra-red glass emitter KERN DAB-A02 10 58 39501 10 58 39502 10 58 37445 10 58 35901 RS-232 WLAN adapter KERN YKI-01 for wireless connection to networks and WLAN-capable devices, such as tablets, laptops, smartphones etc. for visualisation of the drying process Software BalanceConnection SCD-4.0 Thermal printer KERN YKB-01N Matrix needle printer KERN 911-013 for printing out weighing values on standard paper for long-term archiving 10 58 39503 10 58 39040 10 58 35005 10 58 37446 1 Moisture analyzer DBS Moisture analyser with premium single-cell weighing system for excellent stability, relia- bility, and reaction speed • Tip: Suitable for samples with low moisture content, e.g. plastics • Backlit LCD graphic display with digit height 15 mm • All information visible at a glance in the graphic display: • Drying process active • Previous drying time • Current temperature • Unit of the shown result • Current moisture content in % • Active heating profile • Halogen quartz glass heater 400 W • Excellent temperature control thanks to halogen technology, suitable for tempera- ture-sensitive samples • Internal memory for automatic run of 10 drying programs and 100 drying processes already executed • The last value measured remains on the display until overwritten by a new measurement • Password protection to prevent the manipulation of stored settings, data etc. • Sample description for up to 99 samples, 2 digits, freely programmable, printed in the measuring protocol • Date and time display as standard • USB data interface for transfer of weighing data to PC or printer (can be used only in connection with accessory KERN DBS-A02) • 10 sample plates included • Protective working cover included with delivery • Application handbook: Online you will find a practical application handbook containing many examples, field reports, settings and tips for each KERN moisture analyser Model DBS 60-3 Increment g/% 0.001/0.01 Weighing range g 60 Heater Order No. halogen 10 58 35603 Accessories for KERN DBS Article Protective working cover KERN DBS-A03S05, packaging unit 5 pcs. 10 58 37447 Sample plates aluminium KERN MLB-A01A, Ø 90 mm, 10 58 37442 Order No. packaging unit 80 pcs. Round fiberglass filter KERN RH-A02, packaging unit 100 pcs. high mechanical stability, with organic binder Temperature calibration set KERN DBS-A01 consists of measuring sensor and display device USB interface kit KERN DBS-A02 for bidirectional data exchange between balance/moisture analyser and computer. USB cable, driver CD, BalanceConnection software com- prised in the delivery 10 58 37443 10 58 35103 10 58 37448 Continued on next page 1 872

874

Moisture Analyzers Measuring Systems Humidity for visualisation of the drying process Article Software BalanceConnection SCD-4.0 Thermal printer KERN YKB-01N Matrix needle printer KERN 911-013 for printing out weighing values on standard paper for long-term archiving Label printer KERN YKE-01 Order No. 10 58 39040 10 58 35005 10 58 37446 10 58 35006 Moisture Analyzer, Phoenix Instrument Standard moisture analyzers for numerous applications. Moisture analyzer BM60 • New, state of the art moisture analyzer, easy operation • Powerful 400w halogen heater for quick and accurate measurements • Compact design, backlit LCD graphic display • User guidance with pictograms • Windows direct function for easy data transfer • RS 232 and USB interface • Internal memory for 100 data sets and 10 programs incl. sample description • 4 different Measurement modes • 3 years warranty Technical data: Max. Capacity: Readability: Reproducibility: Pan size: Weighing units: Stabilisation time: Internal memory: Calibration: Heating source: Drying programs: Display: Article Moisture analyzer BM-60 60 g 0.001 g / 0.01% 0.002 g / 0.05% 95 mm gramm, % humitity, % solids 2 – 3 sec 10 programs, 100 test results automatic external 400 W halogen heater, 50° – 160°C standard, drying in steps, gentle and fast huge, backlit LCD-display Order No. 10 13 70060 co d e b e w WWSB5008 Moisture Analyzers, Sartorius Lab Products and Services Sartorius moisture analyzers are intended for fast and reliable determination of the mate- rial moisture in liquid, pasty, and solid substances by way the thermogravimetry method. All Sartorius moisture analyzers are serially equipped with the following performance fea- tures: • big digital display • integrated RS232 interface with logging in accordance with ISO / GLP co d e b e w WWEZ6004 Sartorius Moisture Analyser MA35 The MA35 is the basic model for quick and reliable analysis of the material moisture of liquid, pasty and solid substances using the thermogravimetric method. Benefits: • Rugged starter model • Easy operation • Quick measuring results • For uniform measuring tasks Model 1 MA35M-230N MA35M-115N For initial sample weight 1g / 5g ±0.2 / ±0.05 ±0.2 / ±0.05 Operating voltage V 110 230 Order No. 10 55 51031 10 55 51032 1 Please enter the webcode WWEZ6004 to see the other variants and accessories in our online catalogue. co d e To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. b e w 1 873

875

Measuring Systems Temperature co d e b e w WW2NY319 Thermo Stripes Temperature Control Strips, neoLab® Temperature control strips, each with 5 temperature change points on self-adhesive film. Color changes irreversibly from light gray to black if the relevant temperature is reached within 1 second. Size: 18 × 39 mm high Temperature range °C +29 to +40 +37 to +46 +49 to +71 +77 to +99 +104 to +127 +132 to +154 +160 to +182 +188 to +210 +216 to +249 +249 to +290 Order No. 28 01 31910 28 01 31911 28 01 31912 28 01 31913 28 01 31914 28 01 31915 28 01 31916 28 01 31917 28 01 31918 28 01 31919 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Self-adhesive Temperature Foils, Testo / IDL Accuracy: Operating temperature: Storage: from +43°C to +154°C: ±1,5°C from +160°C: ±1% ±1°C of respective temperature reading corresponds to the respective measuring ranges foils up to +65°C: max. 9 months; other measuring ranges: up to 2 years Max. storage temperature: +25°C, storage in a refrigerator is recommended testoterm thermometer strips testoterm thermometer strips are self-adhesive foils with temperature sensitive elements for temperature control and regulation. Used, for example, for measurements on moving parts, for long-term monitoring and measurements on small objects. • Irreversible change in colour within 2 seconds • Practical booklet with 10 thermometer strips • Thermometer strips available on rolls, from 5000 off Temperature range °C +37 to +65 +71 to +110 +116 to +154 +161 to +204 +204 to +260 Order No. 10 09 40108 10 09 40916 10 09 41724 10 09 42532 10 09 43341 PU pc/Booklet 10 10 10 10 10 Single indicators testoterm single indicators are self-adhesive temperature sensitive foils with elements used for control of a given maximum temperature. • Measuring range +65°C to +121°C • Irreversible change in colour within 2 second • Practical single indicator booklet (50 each) • Single indicators available on rolls from 5000 off Temp. Order No. °C +65°C +71°C +77°C 10 09 41065 10 09 41071 10 09 41077 PU pc/Booklet 50 50 50 Temp. Order No. °C +82°C +110°C +121°C 10 09 41082 10 09 41110 10 09 41121 PU pc/Booklet 50 50 50 Testo Saveris wireless data logger Testo Saveris 2-T1 - WiFi data logger with display and integrated NTC temperature probe The WiFi data logger testo Saveris 2-T1 allows you to monitor the temperatures in refrig- erated, work or storage rooms. The temperature values measured with the integrated probe are reliably recorded over long periods, and transmitted directly to the Testo Cloud (online data store) via your wireless LAN. You can access these readings anytime and anywhere, using your web-enabled smartphone, tablet or PC. Testo Saveris 2-T2 -WiFi data logger with display and 2 connections for NTC tem- perature probe The WiFi data logger testo Saveris 2-T2 allows you to monitor the temperatures and door contacts in refrigerated and work or storage rooms. The temperature values and door contacts measured with the connectable probes are reliably recorded over long periods, and transmitted directly to the Testo Cloud (online data store) via your WiFi. You can ac- cess these readings anytime and anywhere, using your web-enabled smartphone, tablet or PC. Continued on next page co d e b e w WWJ9J053 874

876

Measuring Systems Temperature Thermo Stripes Testo Saveris 2-T3 - WiFi data logger with display and 2 connections for TC temper- ature probe The WiFi data logger testo Saveris 2-T3 allows you to monitor the temperatures and door contacts in refrigerated and work or storage rooms. The temperature values measured with the connectable thermocouple probes (TC) are reliably recorded over long periods, and transmitted directly to the Testo Cloud (online data storage) via your WiFi. You can access these readings anytime and anywhere, using your web-enabled smartphone, tab- let or PC. Temperature measurement Sensor type: Measuring range: Precision ±1 Digit: Resolution: Temperature measurement via external sensor Connection external probe sensor – NTC intern -30 – +50°C ±0,5°C 0,1°C NTC -50 – +150°C ±0,3°C external probe sensor testo Saveris 2-T2 testo Saveris 2-T1 testo Saveris 2-T3 TE Typ K -195 – +1350°C ±(0,5 + 0,5 % v. Mw.)°C external probe sensor TE Typ J -100 – +750°C TE Typ T -200 – +400°C Article Testo Saveris 2-T1 Testo Saveris 2-T2 Testo Saveris 2-T3 Testo Saveris wireless data logger probe Order No. 10 09 42031 10 09 42032 10 09 42033 Article Precise immersion/pe- Measuring range Accuracy -35 – +80°C Order No. 10 09 41725 netration probe Further sensors and calibrations are available on request. The basic software is also avail- able for free download on the testo homepage. ±0,2°C (-25 – +74,9°C ±0,4°C (remaining range) Laboratory Thermometers Universal Thermometers, Amarell 1 Enclosed scale type, prismatic capillary, unbacked, special red filling, 7 – 8 mm dia. Meas. range Meas. range Order No. Order No. Increm. °C 1 1 1 °C -30 – +50 -10 – +50 -10 – +100 Art. 161013006 with blue filling L mm 260 16 10 13003 200 16 10 13004 260 16 10 13001 °C -10 – +150 -10 – +200 -10 – +250 Increm. °C 1 1 1 L mm 260 16 10 13002 300 16 10 13005 300 16 10 13006 2 Enclosed scale type, prismatic capillary, unbacked, 7 – 8 mm dia green antitoxic and environment neutral filling, tagged immersion depth at 76 mm Meas. range Increm. °C °C -10/0 – +110 1 -10/0 – +110 0.5 -10/0 – +150 1 Order No. L mm 300 10 10 10348 300 10 10 10352 300 10 10 10356 Meas. range °C -10 – +250 -10 – +360 Increm. °C 2 2 Order No. L mm 300 10 10 10364 300 10 10 10368 3 Solid stem type, white backed, 5,5 – 6,5 mm dia green antitoxic and environment neutral filling, tagged immersion depth at 76 mm Meas. range Increm. °C °C -10/0 – +110 1 -10/0 – +110 0.5 -10/0 – +150 1 Order No. L mm 300 10 10 11388 300 10 10 11392 300 10 10 11396 Meas. range °C -10 – +250 -10 – +360 Increm. °C 2 2 Order No. L mm 300 10 10 11404 300 10 10 11408 General Purpose Thermometer, with Safety Coating, Ludwig Schneider General purpose thermometer “Made in Germany” with environmental safety filling • Stem type, capillary white back, round • With FEP/PTFE safety coating • With individual serial number • With certificate (conformity and precision) Measuring range °C -35 – +50 -20 – +110 -20 – +150 -10 – +210 -10 – +110 -10 – +150 Scale °C 1 1 1 1 1 1 Charge Overall length blue blue blue blue blue blue mm 305 305 305 405 200 200 Immersion depth total total total total total total Order No. 10 16 54291 10 16 54292 10 16 54293 10 16 54294 10 16 54295 10 16 54296 co d e b e w WWERJ002 1 2 3 co d e b e w WWZT7002 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 875

877

Measuring Systems Temperature Laboratory Thermometers Laboratory Thermometers, Amarell 1 Enclosed-scale thermometers Unbacked capillary, red filling, Richter top, 8 to 9.5 mm dia., calibratable. Meas. range Increm. °C °C -50 – +501) 1 -100 – +301) 1 Order No. L mm 300 16 10 19005 300 16 10 19006 Meas. range Increm. °C °C -200 – +302) 1 -50 – +501) 0.5 Order No. L mm 350 16 10 19007 300 16 10 20005 2 Enclosed-scale thermometers Unbacked capillary, special red filling, Richter top, 8 to 9.5 mm dia, calibratable. Meas. range Increm. °C °C -10/0 – +100 1 -10/0 – +150 1 -10/0 – +200 1 -10/0 – +50 0.5 -10/0 – +100 0.5 Order No. L mm 305 10 10 16608 305 10 10 16610 300 10 10 16612 220 10 10 16618 270 10 10 16620 Meas. range Increm. °C °C -5 – +503) 0.2 -5/0 – +1003) 0.2 +506) 0.1 0 – +1003) 0.2 Order No. L mm 350 10 10 16628 420 10 10 16630 420 10 10 16632 550 10 10 16642 1 2 co d e b e w WWERJ003 co d e b e w WWERJ004 3 WWERJ014 co d e b e w 876 Laboratory thermometers AMA-THERM Enclosed-scale, capillary prismatic white backed, with non-wetting blue special liquid filling and inside coated capillary tube, Richter top finish, calibrated for full immersion, calibratable, diameter 8 – 9.5 mm. Meas. range °C 0 – +50 0 – +100 0 – +150 0 – +200 Increm. °C 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Order No. L mm 350 10 10 16800 420 10 10 16810 480 10 10 16820 220 10 10 16830 Other versions available on request. 1) Filled with toluene 2) Filled with pentane 3) Calibratable Meas. range °C 0 – +50 -10 – +50 0 – +100 Increm. °C 0.1 0.1 0.1 Order No. L mm 420 10 10 16840 420 10 10 16842 550 10 10 16850 Laboratory Thermometers, Amarell 3 Enclosed-scale thermometers, calibrated, with official certificate, unbacked capil- lary, Richter top, 8 to 9.5 mm dia. Measuring range °C -50 – +50 -100 – +30 0 – +100 0 – +150 0 – +200 0 – +50 0 – +100 Increment °C 1 1 1 1 1 0.5 0.5 Charge Tol Tol rot rot rot rot rot Length mm 300 300 305 305 300 220 270 Order No. 16 10 25000 10 10 15010 10 10 15301 10 10 15302 10 10 15303 10 10 15401 10 10 15402 Precision Thermometers, Straight Stem, Amarell Precision straight stem thermometers, acc. to DIN 12781 and DIN 12770, translucent glass scale, unbacked capillary, upper section 11 mm dia., lower section 7 to 8 mm dia., top closed all round, calibratable. Measuring range Charge °C -20 – +150 -20 – +150 -20 – +250 -20 – +250 Further models are available on request. red red blue blue Increm. °C 1 1 1 1 Bottom part L mm 100 200 100 200 Top part L mm 275 275 275 275 Order No. 10 10 17012 10 10 17013 10 10 17014 10 10 17015

878

Measuring Systems Temperature co d e b e w WWERJ015 Laboratory Thermometers Industrial Thermometers, Amarell Industrial straight-stem thermometers, translucent glass scale, yellow backed capil- lary, cork fused all round, upper part 235 × 20 mm, lower part 8 mm dia. With red special filling Meas. In- crem. range °C °C -30 – +50 1 -30 – +50 1 0 – +100 1 0 – +100 1 Bottom part L mm 105 213 105 303 Order No. 16 10 35001 16 10 35002 16 10 35004 16 10 35005 Meas. range °C In- crem. °C 0 – +160 1 0 – +160 1 0 – +200 1 0 – +200 1 Bottom part L mm 105 255 105 213 Order No. 16 10 35007 16 10 35008 16 10 35009 16 10 35010 Order No. 10 10 10410 10 10 10414 With green, nontoxic and environment neutral filling Meas. range °C Order No. Meas. range °C In- crem. °C 0 – +300 2 0 – +300 2 Bottom part L mm 105 213 10 10 10390 10 10 10394 Further models are available on request. In- crem. °C 0 – +360 2 0 – +360 2 Bottom part L mm 105 213 Precision Laboratory Thermometers, Ludwig Schneider Precision laboratory thermometers “Made in Germany”, calibrateable • Solid-stem type • Capillary form: yellow back, round • Ø 6 ±1 mm, immersion depth: total • Thermometer with organic, red filling • With individual serial number • Standard calibration (WPS & DAkkS) with 3 test points, additional test points available co d e b e w WWZT7005 on request Measuring Scale range °C -10 – +100 -10 – +150 0 – +50 -10 – +50 -10 – +100 -10 – +150 -10 – +30 -10 – +50 -1 – +101 °C 1 1 0.1 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.1 0.1 0.1 Charge Overall length mm 305 305 420 220 270 350 300 420 610 red red red red red red red red red Immersi- on depth calibrateable version total total total total total total total total total Order No. 10 16 52371 10 16 52372 10 16 52378 10 16 52373 10 16 52374 10 16 52375 10 16 52384 10 16 52379 10 16 52383 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 57103 10 16 57203 10 16 57803 10 16 57303 10 16 57403 10 16 57503 10 16 58403 10 16 57903 10 16 58303 Precision laboratory thermometers “Made in Germany”, calibrateable • Enclosed type • Capillary form: colourless prismatic • Ø 9 ±1 mm, immersion depth: total • Thermometer with organic, red filling • With individual serial number • Standard calibration (WPS & DAkkS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Measuring Scale range °C -10 – +100 -10 – +100 -5 – +100 -10 – +50 0 – +50 -10 – +150 °C 1 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.1 1 Charge Overall length mm 305 270 420 420 420 305 red red red red red red Immersi- on depth calibrateable version total total total total total total Order No. 10 16 52341 10 16 52344 10 16 52347 10 16 52349 10 16 52348 10 16 52342 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 54103 10 16 54403 10 16 54703 10 16 54903 10 16 54803 10 16 54203 with DAkkS calibration certificate Order No. 10 16 57104 10 16 57204 10 16 57804 10 16 57304 10 16 57404 10 16 57504 10 16 58404 10 16 57904 10 16 58304 with DAkkS calibration certificate Order No. 10 16 54104 10 16 54404 10 16 54704 10 16 54904 10 16 54804 10 16 54204 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 877

879

Measuring Systems Temperature Laboratory Thermometers Gallium Filled Thermometer, Amarell 1 Similiar ASTM WWERJ032 Gllium filled thermometer similiar to ASTM, solid stem, white backed, top finish round, durable pigment, suitable for government verification. ASTM number 2 C 3 C 7 C 8 C 10 C 11 C Increm. Meas. range °C °C 1 -5 – +300 1 -5 – +400 1 -2 – +300 -2 – +400 1 +90 – +370 2 -6 – +400 2 Dimensions Immersion depth mm 385–395×6–7 mm 76 410–420×6–7,5 mm 76 380–390×6–8 mm total immersion 380–390×6–8 mm total immersion 285–295×6–7 mm 57 305–315×6–8 mm 25 Order No. 10 10 10030 10 10 10050 10 10 10110 10 10 10130 10 10 10170 10 10 10190 2 Similiar DIN Article Thermometer L25910-GA Precision thermometer, similar DIN, enclosed scale, 0+359:1°C, capillary prismatic colourless, gallium filled, 380 × 8.5 – 9 mm, total immersion, Richter-top finish with button, suitable for government verification Order No. 10 10 15910 ASTM Thermometers, Amarell ASTM precision thermometer, solid stem, white backed, with special inner capillary coat- ing, with blue non-wetting special filling, with factory test certificate (1 test item). ASTM number S5C S5F S12C S12F S15C S15F S18C S18F S22C S22F S56C S56F S58C S58F S59C S59F S62C S62F S63C S63F S64C S64F S65C S65F S66C S66F S67C S67F S91C S116C S117C S120C S130C S130F ASTM designation Cloud and Pour Cloud and Pour Density-Wide Range Density-Wide Range Low Softening Point Low Softening Point Reid Vapor Pressure Reid Vapor Pressure Oxidation Stability Oxidation Stability Bomb Calorimeter Bomb Calorimeter Tank Tank Tank Tank Precision Precision Precision Precision Precision Precision Precision Precision Precision Precision Precision Precision Solidification Point Bomb Calorimeter Bomb Calorimeter Kinematic Viscosity Tank Tank Measuring range °C/°F -38 – +50 -36 – +120 -20 – +102 -5 – +215 -2 – +80 +30 – +180 +34 – +42 +94 – +108 +95 – +103 +204 – +218 +19 – +35 +66 – +95 -34 – +49 -30 – +120 -18 – +82 0 – +180 -38 – +2 -36 – +35 -8 – +32 +18 – +89 +25 – +55 +77 – +131 +50 – +80 +122 – +176 +75 – +105 +167 – +221 +95 – +155 +203 – +311 +20 – +50 +18.9 – +25.1 +23.9 – +30.1 +38.6 – +41.4 -7 – +105 +20 – +220 Graduation °C/°F 1 2 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.5 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.02 0.05 0.5 1 0.5 1 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.5 1 Order No. 10 10 18012 10 10 18014 10 10 18040 10 10 18042 10 10 18050 10 10 18052 10 10 18062 10 10 18064 10 10 10778 10 10 18080 10 10 18164 10 10 18166 10 10 18172 10 10 18174 10 10 18176 10 10 18178 10 10 18188 10 10 18190 10 10 18192 10 10 18194 10 10 18196 10 10 18198 10 10 18200 10 10 18202 10 10 18204 10 10 18206 10 10 18208 10 10 18210 10 10 18286 10 10 18344 10 10 18346 10 10 18356 10 10 18382 10 10 18384 co d e b e w 1 2 co d e b e w WWERJ030 878

880

Measuring Systems Temperature Laboratory Thermometers ASTM Thermometers ACCU-SAFE, Ludwig Schneider • Highly precise lab thermometer “Made in Germany”, solid-stem type, capillary form: white back • With individual serial number • Also available in °F • Standard calibration (WPS and DAkkS) with 3 test points, additional test points available co d e b e w WWZT7004 on request ASTM-Thermometers – ACCU-SAFE – with blue, environmental safety filling, calibrateable ASTM number S5C S12C S15C S18C S22C S56C S58C S59C S62C S63C S64C S65C S66C S67C S91C S116C S117C S120C S130C Measuring range °C -38 – +50 -20 – +102 -2 – +80 +34 – +42 +95 – +103 +19 – +35 -34 – +49 -18 – +82 -38 – +2 -8 – +32 +25 – +55 +50 – +80 +75 – +105 +95 – +155 +20 – +50 +18.9 – +25.1 +23.9 – +30.1 +38.6 – +41.4 -7 – +105 Scale °C 1 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.02 0.5 0.5 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.05 0.5 Overall length mm 260 435 415 300 300 610 300 300 401 401 401 401 401 401 390 615 615 300 300 Immersi- on depth mm 108 total total total total total total total total total total total total total 76 total total total total with certificate of conformity Order No. 10 16 54005 10 16 54012 10 16 54015 10 16 54018 10 16 54022 10 16 54056 10 16 54058 10 16 54059 10 16 54062 10 16 54063 10 16 54064 10 16 54065 10 16 54066 10 16 54067 10 16 54091 10 16 54116 10 16 54117 10 16 54120 10 16 54130 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 53105 10 16 53112 10 16 53115 10 16 53116 10 16 53122 10 16 53156 10 16 53158 10 16 53159 10 16 53162 10 16 53163 10 16 53164 10 16 53165 10 16 53166 10 16 53167 10 16 53191 10 16 53216 10 16 53217 10 16 53220 10 16 53230 with DAkkS calibration certificate Order No. 10 16 53405 10 16 53412 10 16 53415 10 16 53416 10 16 53422 10 16 53456 10 16 53458 10 16 53459 10 16 53462 10 16 53463 10 16 53464 10 16 53465 10 16 53466 10 16 53467 10 16 53491 10 16 53516 10 16 53517 10 16 53520 10 16 53530 Bottle Thermometers, Ludwig Schneider Bottle thermometers are precision test instruments for monitoring cooling and tempera- ture control devices. Bottle thermometer, suitable for calibration, with safety coating • With FEP/PTFE safety coating • With individual serial number • Standard calibration (WPS and DAkkS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Application Scale Meas. range °C °C 1 -90 – +20 0.1 -25 – -5 0.5 -30 – 0 0.1 -2 – +10 0.5 -5 – +15 0.5 -5 – +20 -2 – +10 0.1 +15 – +30 0.1 +18 – +50 0.5 +25 – +45 0.1 +20 – +130 1 +35 – +200 1 +50 – +115 0.5 1) EGWG = Ethylene-Glycol-Mixture Freezer Freezer Freezer Refrigerator Refrigerator Blood bank freezer Blood bank freezer Oven Oven Oven Incubator Incubator Incubator red blue red blue red red blue blue red blue red red blue Charge L Vol. ml filling Mat. Bottle mm 180 60 PETG sand 235 60 PETG EGWG1) 130 30 PETG EGWG1) 230 60 PETG EGWG1) 130 30 PETG EGWG1) 150 250 PETG EGWG1) 230 250 PETG EGWG1) 180 60 PETG EGWG1) 130 30 PETG EGWG1) 190 60 PETG EGWG1) 135 30 PC 180 60 PFA 240 60 PC with certificate of conformity Order No. 10 16 50111 10 16 51111 10 16 50112 10 16 51112 10 16 50114 10 16 50113 10 16 51113 10 16 51114 10 16 50115 10 16 51115 vermiculite 10 16 50116 vermiculite 10 16 50117 vermiculite 10 16 51116 co d e b e w WWZT7008 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 50103 10 16 51103 10 16 50203 10 16 51203 10 16 50403 10 16 50303 10 16 51303 10 16 51403 10 16 50503 10 16 51503 10 16 50603 10 16 50703 10 16 51603 with DAkkS calibration certificate Order No. 10 16 50104 10 16 51104 10 16 50204 10 16 51204 10 16 50404 10 16 50304 10 16 51304 10 16 51404 10 16 50504 10 16 51504 10 16 50604 10 16 50704 10 16 51604 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 879

881

Measuring Systems Temperature co d e b e w WWERJ011 co d e b e w WWERJ008 Laboratory Thermometers Well Scoop Thermometers, suitable for Government Verification, Amarell 1 Well Scoop Thermometers, suitable for Government Verification in special brass enclosure, unbacked capillary, bucket 32 mm dia., 70 mm high. Meas. range °C 0 – +50 -20 – +60 Increm. °C 0.5 0.5 Char- ge red red Order No. Meas. range 16 10 29002 10 10 16138 °C -5 – +20 Increm. °C 0.2 Char- ge red Order No. 16 10 29003 Spare thermometer acc. to DIN 12770 without brass enclosure, approx. 250 mm long Meas. range °C 0 – +50 -20 – +60 Increm. °C 0.5 0.5 Char- ge red red Order No. Meas. range 16 10 29020 10 10 16268 °C -5 – +20 Increm. °C 0.2 Char- ge red Order No. 16 10 29021 Ground Thermometers Thermometers with Ground Joint, Amarell Thermometers with ground joint, standard ground joint 14,5/23, enclosed scale type, capillary unbacked, filled with red/blue/green filling, upper section 11 mm dia., lower section 7 to 8 mm dia., Richter top, verifiable or calibratable. Measuring range Charge Capillary Increm. °C 1 1 1 1 1 °C -10 – +150 -10 – +250 -10 – +3601) -10 – +150 -10 – +250 1) calibratable Installed length = Lower section + Ground joint red blue green red blue Installed L mm unbacked 75 unbacked 75 unbacked 75 unbacked 100 unbacked 100 Top part L mm 250 300 350 250 300 Order No. 16 10 17000 16 10 17001 10 10 17031 16 10 17002 16 10 17003 Digital Thermometers Digital Thermometers, Amarell co d e b e w WWERJ022 Universal thermometers “Maxi-T” and “Maxi-Pen” Water-protected, -50 +200 : 0.1°C, with °F selection function, hold function, Maxi- mum-Minimum memory, 125 × 3.5 mm stainless steel sensor and insertion tip. Complete with battery in a sheath. Special features: water-protected, Maximum-Minimum memory, for general use in the laboratory. Article 1 Universal thermometer “Maxi-T” 2 Universal thermometer “Maxi-Pen” Order No. 68 10 67916 68 10 67918 Precise max./min. thermometer “Speed Lab” Water-proof, IP 67, very fast stainless steel sensor with spike end. Hold function for sav- ing the current display indication. With maxima-minima memory; high accuracy. Technical data: Sensor (L×Ø): Weight: Measuring range: Accuracy: Battery life: 75 × 2,5 mm approx. 70 g -50 to +200°C ±0,5°C (-10 to +100°C) approx. 5700 h Article 3 Max./min. thermometer “Speed Lab” Order No. 10 10 17920 On request, this model is also available for the measuring range of -50 to +300 °C. 2 1 1 3 880

882

Digital Thermometers Digital Pocket Thermometers, Amarell Stainless steel sensor with insertion tip, hold function for saving the current readout, On/Off switch, protective sheath for fastening like a ball point pen. Technical data: Sensor (L × dia.): Weight: Measurement range: Accuracy: Battery life: 125 × 3.5 mm approx. 42 g -50 to +200°C better than ±1°C (-20 to 100°C) approx. 5000 h Article Digital pocket thermometer MULTI Order No. 68 10 00001 Measuring Systems Temperature co d e b e w WWERJ018 Digital Pocket Thermometers VARIO, Amarell Digital pocket thermometer New: with adjustable head, stainless steel sensor with insertion tip and protective sheath for fastening like a ball-point pen, Max/Min memory. Low price. Technical data: Sensor (L × dia.): Weight: Measurement range: Accuracy: Battery life: 125 × 3.5 mm approx. 45 g -50 to 200°C better than ±1°C (-20 to 100°C) approx. 5000 h Article 1 Digital pocket thermometer VARIO Order No. 68 10 43516 Labo Clip - quick-acting holder for all kinds of laboratory equipment (e.g. test tubes, thermometers, pH meters etc.) 5 insertion options with various diameters, all metal parts made of V2A, cellular rubber disk for use from -40 to 120°C, sturdy construction. co d e b e w WWERJ019 2 Article 2 Labo Clip Order No. 68 10 43520 Electronic Digital Thermometers, Amarell ama-digit series of digital thermometers All models are available at a surcharge in a case (see below). Article 3 ama-digit ad 14th Complete with stainless steel sensor Order No. 68 10 41401 External dimensions: 90 × 60 × 25 mm Sensor (L × dia.): Measuring range: Graduation: 100 × 2.5 mm -35 to 500°C 1°C Article ama-digit ad 13th Complete with fast-reacting wire sensor Order No. 68 10 41410 1 3 co d e b e w WWERJ020 Model same as above, except: Measuring range: Graduation: -35 to 300°C 1°C co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 881 Continued on next page

883

Measuring Systems Temperature 1 Digital Thermometers ama-digit ad 15th Complete with stainless steel sensor External dimensions: 90 × 60 × 25 mm Sensor (L × dia.): Measuring range: Graduation: 30 × 2.5 mm -40 to 120°C 0.1°C Article ama-digit ad 15th ama-digit ad 15th ama-digit ad 15th ama-digit ad 15th ama-digit ad 15th Housing color black yellow blue red green 1 2 2 ama-digit ad 20th Without sensor External dimensions: 90 × 60 × 25 mm Measuring range: Resolution: -50 to 300°C 0.1°C from -50 to 180°C and 1°C above +180°C (automat. selection) Order No. 68 10 41501 68 10 41502 68 10 41503 68 10 41504 68 10 41505 Order No. 68 10 42001 Order No. 68 10 42010 68 10 42011 68 10 42012 68 10 42013 co d e b e w WWERJ027 Article ama-digit ad 20th Pt-100 temperature sensors for ama-digit ad 20th With handle, PVC connection cable, stainless steel sensor tube. Cable length: Sensor (L × dia.): approx. 105 × 3.0 mm approx. 100 cm Immersion sensor Insertion sensor Article Air sensor with exposed sensor element Surface sensor Precision Thermometers, Amarell Precision Thermometer Precisa - ad 3000 th Electronic manual thermometer with ultra-fine resolution 0.001°C for highly precise meas- urement tasks, water-protected according to IP 65. Device complete with probe and sta- ble case, with max/min memory. • high accuracy • good long-term stability • favourable price Technical data: Measurement range: -20 – +150oC Resolution: Protection: Temperature sensor: Pt 1000 4-conductor, 150 × 3.0 mm Reproducibility: Cable length: Battery: Housing (W×H×D): ±0.01oC, from 0 – +100oC 1200 mm 9V 6F22 block battery 150 × 80 × 32 mm 0.001oC IP 65 Article Precision thermometer Precisa - ad 3000 th Accessories Article Serial interface RS 232 Software 9V power supply Thermo-Timers, LAT Order No. 10 10 11500 Order No. 10 10 11510 10 10 11520 10 10 11530 Easy to use instrument for taking simultaneous temperature and time measurements. • Alarm sounded when the selected temperature limit is reached • 1 m of heat-resistant cable with encapsulated probe (stainless steel) • Measurement range from -10°C to 200°C • Clock / Timer / Stopwatch • Stand-up display with battery and fastening magnet WWW4U055 Article Thermotimer Order No. 68 73 10200 co d e b e w 882

884

Digital Thermometers Jacket Thermocouples, LAT 1 Jacket Thermocouples Mineral-insulated jacket thermocouples NiCr-NiAl(K), for use up to 1100°C. Jacket material: Inconel, thermal wires embedded in magnesium oxids. With fixed compensation leads, 1 m long (others on request). Max. temperature of cold soldered joints: 80°C. Measuring Systems Temperature co d e b e w WWW4U052 Length mm 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 250 250 Ø mm 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 0.5 1.0 Accessories Order No. 68 73 05151 68 73 05152 68 73 05153 68 73 05154 68 73 05201 68 73 05202 68 73 05203 68 73 05204 68 73 05251 68 73 05252 Length mm 250 250 300 300 300 300 500 500 500 500 Ø mm 1.5 3.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 3.0 Article 2 Thermometer EMT 50 Measuring ran- ges: Input: -100 to 1200°C, 1.0°C -50 to 199.9°C, 0.1°C miniature socket Order No. 68 73 05253 68 73 05254 68 73 05301 68 73 05302 68 73 05353 68 73 05354 68 73 05501 68 73 05502 68 73 05503 68 73 05504 Order No. 68 73 05000 Digital Thermometers, Ludwig Schneider Digital temperature measuring units for process and quality control They are suitable for use in the food industry. Article 3 Digital push-in thermometer type 12050 Case 75 × 20 mm black, measuring range -50 to +150°C, accuracy ± 1°C, temp. sen- sor (downwards) 120 × 3.5 mm made of stainless steel, with push-in tip, with plastic sleeve and clip, max/min memory and automatic deactivation Order No. 10 16 55685 Article 4 Digital push-in thermometer with 90° turnable casing type 12070 10 16 55681 Order No. Measuring range -50 to +300°C, accuracy ±1°C to 150°C, above ±2°C, case 75 × 20 mm black, 90° rotatable, temp. sensor (downwards) 200 × 3.5 mm made of stainless steel, with push-in tip, with plastic sleeve and clip, max/min memory and automatic deacti- vation 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WWZT7010 Article 5 Waterproof digital pocket thermometer type 12090 Size 188 × 24 × 20 mm, waterproof IP 67, measuring range -50 to +150°C/-58 to Order No. 10 16 55686 +302°F, accuracy ±1°C, temp. sensor 85 × 3.5 mm with push-in tip made of stainless steel, with plastic sleeve in white, with °C/°F selection, hold function, automatic deacti- vation Article 6 Digital measuring instrument with temperature probetype 12200 10 16 55684 Case 140 × 75 × 27 mm anthracite, waterproof version IP 67, measuring range -50 to Order No. +300°C/-58 to +572°F, accuracy ±1°C until 150°C above ±2°C, with °C/°F selection min/max memory, high/low alarm, hold function, temp. sensor with 1 m cable and handle 140 × 3.5 mm, with push-in tip made of stainless steel Article 7 Data logger type 15010 Freezer thermometer with min./max. alarm memory, dimensions: 94 × 110 × 25 mm, measuring range external: -50+70°C /-58+158°F, resolution 0.1°, accuracy: ± 0.5°C / 0.9°F, plug-in probe in 5 ml plastic bottle, filled with ethylene glycol mixture, accesso- ries: 1 Mini USB cable 1 m long, 1 power pack 100–240 V, 1 micro SD card / USB ad- apter, one certificate (conformity & accuracy), °C/°F selection, min/max memory, high/ low alarm, date/time display, data logger Order No. 10 16 58260 5 6 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Continued on next page 7 883

885

Measuring Systems Temperature 1 Digital Thermometers Digital min/max-alarm thermometer type 13030 Digital min/max-alarm thermometer, display of 3 temperatures, with memory andtime, case 75 × 124 × 19 mm, measuring range -50 to +70°C /-58 to +158°F, resolution 0.1°, accuracy ±0.3°C/0.5°F, plug-in probe with 3 m cable in 5 ml plastic bottle, filled with ethylene glycol mixture, with °C/°F selection, min/max memory, high/low alarm, date/time display, one certificate (conformity & accuracy) Article Digital thermometer type 13030, calibrateable with certificate (conformity & accuracy) Article Digital thermometer type 13030, with factory test certificate • 2-point calibration Article Digital thermometer type 13030, with DAkkS calibration certificate 10 16 59042 • 2-point calibration Order No. 10 16 55809 Order No. 10 16 59032 Order No. • Traceable to national standard 2 Digital min/max-alarm thermometer type 13000 Digital bottle thermometer for monitoring freezers and refrigerators as well as incubators. • Retraceable to international reference standards • Comes with Certificate of Conformity and Certificate of Accuracy • Optionally available with factory test certificate or DAkkS calibration certificate • °C/°F selection, min/max memory, high/low alarm • Measuring range -50+70°C & -58+158°F, resolution 0.1°C, accuracy: ± 1°C/2°F • Complete with PETG bottle 30 ml with ethylene glycol mix Certif. temp. Application °C -20 0 +4 +37 +21 controlling of freezers ice point refrigerators incubators/water baths climate chambers Order No. 10 16 53891 10 16 53892 10 16 53893 10 16 53894 10 16 53895 co d e b e w WWZT7015 Data Logger, Ludwig Schneider 4-Channel datalogger for temperature type 15210, suitable for thermocouples type K, J, E, T, N, R, S Technical data: Measuring range: Resolution: Accuracy: Memory: Casing: Features:: Display: -200 to +1370°C/-328 to +2498°F (Typ K) 0,1°C/0,1°F; from 600°C 1°C/1°F ±0,1% of measured value +(+0,7°C/+1,4°F) 32000 data logger records each channel 187 × 75 × 29 mm, black, plastic °C/°F selection, min/max/avg-memory 4 Channel simultaneous, backlight, hold, battery indications Data transfer via Bluetooth oder USB Article 3 4-Channel datalogger for temperature type 15210 Scope of supply: 2 temperature probe type K with blade termi- nal (1 m cable length), software, bluetooth adapter, micro-USB cabel, carrier bag Order No. 10 16 50538 Digital measuring device with 2 input channels type 13100, suitable for thermo- couples type K Technical data: Measuring range: Resolution: Accuraca: Casing: Features: -200 to +1370°C/-328 to +2498°F 0.1°C/0.1°F ±0.1% +0.7°C/+1.4°F 184 × 64 × 30 mm, anthracite °C/°F selection, min/max/avg-memory, hold, automatic deactiva- tion, relative function PC interface Article 4 Digital measuring device with 2 input channels type 13100 Scope of supply: bag and 2 temperature sensors type K with Order No. 10 16 55625 blade terminal Continued on next page 1 2 3 884

886

Measuring Systems Temperature 5 Digital Thermometers Thermocouple type K to immerse Mineral-insulated thermocouple 1 × NiCr-Ni type K acc. to DIN EN 60584 Class 1, with miniature plug yellow (THERM 2), sheath made of Inconel, compensating line fix connect- ed through transition casing made of stainless steel, silicon/teflon insulated, cable length 2 m, cable outlet secured by means of heat-shrink tubing. Article Type K thermocouple to immerse (NiCr-Ni) Sheat Ø: Nominal length: Range of application: Nominal length: Range of application: 3 mm 250 mm -100°C to +400°C 3 mm 400 mm -100°C to +800°C Type K thermocouple to immerse (NiCr-Ni) Sheat Ø: Type K thermocouple to immerse (NiCr-Ni) Sheat Ø: Nominal length: Range of application: 1 mm 250 mm -100°C to +400°C Order No. 10 16 57499 10 16 50011 10 16 50014 Further thermocouples type K Article 6 Type K thermocouple to insert (NiCr-Ni), with handle Mineral-insulated thermocouple 1 × NiCr-Ni type K acc. to DIN EN 60584 Class 2, with miniature plug yellow (THERM 2), made of Inco- nel, compensating line fix connected through handle made of plas- tic, silicon/teflon insulated, cable length 2 m, cable outlet secured by means of bend protection. 3 mm 250 mm -100°C to +250°C Nominal length: Range of application: Sheat Ø: 7 Type K thermoelectric lead Thermocouple type K acc. to DIN EN 60584 Class 2, with miniature plug yellow (THERM 2), thermocouple wire Ø 0.5 mm separately and jointly, insulated with glass silk, thermocouple junctions 2 mm free. Length: Range of application: 2000 mm -100°C to +300°C 8 Type K thermocouple for special applications, with handle Surface probe with handle acc. to DIN EN 60584 Class 2, with mini- ature plug yellow (THERM 2), cable length: 2 m. Head Ø: Range of application: Version: 15 mm -50°C to +400°C 90° angled Order No. 10 16 51121 10 16 51125 10 16 55862 4 5 7 6 8 Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 885

887

Measuring Systems Temperature co d e b e w WWZT7014 Digital Thermometers PHYSICS 100-2 – Digital Measuring Device, Ludwig Schneider PHYSICS 100-2 – Digital measuring device for precise measurements For highest precision we provide our PHYSICS measuring device for precise measure- ments in meteorology, chemical, biotechnology, food industries, water analytics, science and research as well as for quality assurance or inspection equipment monitoring in the industrial sector. General technical data: Output: Display: Display illumination: Operating elements: Casing: Degree of protection: Dimensions (L×B×H): Weight: Further general features: Test functions: 2 output channels 2 lines, statically 7/16 segments 2 LEDs, white 7 silicone keys ABS (max. 70 °C), light grey IP54, dust- and splash-proof 127 × 83 × 42 mm 290 g 1 2 Measuring functions: Function menu: Interfaces: Language selection: Technical data: Probes: Measuring input: Galvanic isolation: Channels: AD converter: Probe voltage: Resolution: Probe display: segment monitoring, range monitoring, probe error check, battery check measuring value, zero-setting, max./min. value documen- tation, 2-step adjustment, scaling (optional: multi-point calibration for temperature values) min/max values, average value of time, individual values or measuring points USB, RS232, Ethernet, Bluetooth, analogue German, English, French thermocouples, resistance thermometers, NTC, humidity, pressure and more 2 input channels semiconductor relais (50 V) 4 function channels e.g. for dual probes, 4 internal func- tions (e.g. difference) Delta-Sigma 16 bit, 2.5 or 10 M/s battery operation 9 V, max. 150 mA, mains operation 12 V, max. 150 mA 0.01°C intelligent probe display with probe specific functions (cold-junction compensation etc.) Article 1 Digital measuring device PHYSICS 100-2 Order No. 10 16 53874 Probes Thermocouple to immerse with handle type K (NiCr-Ni) Thermocouple with handle type K (NiCr-Ni), acc. to DIN EN 60584 Class 2, made of In- conel, compensating line fix connected through handle made of plastic, teflon/silicone insulated, cable length: 2 m, cable outlet secured by means of bend protection, plug PHYSICS resolution 0.1°C Technical data: Sheat Ø: Nominal length: Range of application: 3 mm 250 mm -100°C to +400°C Article 2 Thermocouple with handle type K (NiCr-Ni) Order No. 10 16 59962 Pt100 resistance thermometer to immerse Immersion resistance thermometer Pt100, acc. to DIN EN 60751 Class A or AA, 4-wire connection, with sheathed cable made of stainless steel, compensating line fix connected through transition casing made of stainless steel, teflon/silicone insulated, cable length: 2 m, cable outlet secured by means of heat-shrink tubing. Plug PHYSICS resolution 0.01°C (class A) Technical data: Sheat Ø: Nominal length: Range of application: 3 mm 300 mm -90°C to +350°C Article 3 Immersion resistance thermometer Pt100 Order No. 10 16 57136 Continued on next page 3 886

888

Measuring Systems Temperature 4 Digital Thermometers Pt100 resistance thermometer made of glass (N16B) Labor resistance thermometer of glass Pt100, acc. to DIN EN 60751 Class A, 4-wire con- nection, with glass shaft Ø 6 mm, narrowed at sensor to Ø 3 mm, compensating line fix connected through transition casing made of stainless steel, teflon/silicone insulated, cable length: 2 m, cable outlet secured by means of heat-shrink tubing. Plug PHYSICS resolution 0.01°C (class A) Technische Daten: Glass shaft Ø: Nominal length: Range of application: 3/6 mm 200 mm -50°C to +250°C Article 4 Resistance thermometer made of glass Pt100 Order No. 10 16 57152 Pt100 resistance thermometer PTFE coated Cable resistance thermometer Pt100, acc. to DIN EN 60751 Class A, 4-wire connection, compensating line directly connected with protective conduit made of stainless steel, VA-wire netting/teflon insulated, cable length: 2 m, with PTFE coating from measuring tip to +20 mm connection cable. With plug PHYSICS resolution 0.01°C (class A) 5 Technical data: Protective conduit Ø: Nominal length: Range of application: 6 mm 150 mm -50°C to +200°C Article 5 Resistance thermometer Pt100, PTFE coated Order No. 10 16 57178 co d e b e w WWJ9J004 Thermometers, Testo / IDL testo 925 thermometer The one channel temperature measuring instrument for connection to reliable, fast-action thermocouple probes. An additional temperature probe can be displayed in testo 925; data is transmitted by radio, i.e. wirelessly. An audible alarm sounds if limit values are exceeded. Current measurement data such as max/min data can be printed on site on the Testo printer • 1 channel measuring instrument with optional radio probe. • Wide range of probes • Continuous display of max/min values • Hold button to freeze reading • TopSafe, indestructible case, protects from dirt and impact (optional) • Display light Technical data: Probe type: Meas. range: Accuracy: Resolution: Case: Dimensions: Weight: Battery type: Battery life: type K (NiCr-Ni) -50 to +1000°C ±(0.5°C +0.3% v.Mw.) (-40 to +900°C) ±(0.7°C +0.5% v.Mw.) (remaining range) 0.1°C (-50 to +199.9°C) 1°C (remaining range) ABS 182 × 64 × 40 mm 171 g alkaline-manganese 200 h (connected probe, light off) 45 h (radio mode, light off) 68 h (connected probe, light always on) 33 h (radio mode, light always on) Operating temperature: -20 to +50°C Storage temperature: -40 to +70°C 2 years Warranty: 6 Article 6 testo 925 instrument single-Kanal TE thermometer type K, acoustic alarm, connection of one optional radio Order No. 68 09 09250 probe, incl. battery and calibration protocol co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 887 Continued on next page

889

Accuracy: t99: Class 2 3 sec Precise and fast immersion probe, water-proof, TE type K 2 Thermocouple with TE connector, flexible, length 800 mm, glass silk, TE type K Thermocouple with TE connector, flexible, length 1500 mm, glass silk, TE type K Thermocouple with TE connector, flexible, length 1500 mm, teflon, TE type K 3 Water-proof immersion/insertion probe, TE type K 4 Robust air probe, TE type K 5 Waterproof food probe made of stainless steel (IP65), TE type K 6 Fast, water-proof immersion/insertion probe, TE type K 7 Pipe wrap probe with exchangeable measuring head, TE type K 8 Magnetic probe for higher temperatures on metallic surfaces, for tube diameter 5 – 65 mm, measuring range up to +280°C (short-term) TE type K adhesive force approx. 10 N with magnets 9 Immersion tip, flexible, TE Typ K Order No. 68 09 20393 68 09 20593 68 09 20644 68 09 20645 68 09 20646 68 09 21293 68 09 21793 68 09 22292 68 09 22693 68 09 24592 68 09 24892 68 09 25792 Measuring Systems Temperature Digital Thermometers Measuring instument probes Article 1 Surface probe Fast-action, with sprung thermocouple strip, also for uneven surfaces, measurement range short-term to +500°C, TC type K, fixed cable Measuring range: -60 to +300°C 2 5 1 3 4 6 7 9 8 AT 888 Radio Article Radio module for measuring instrument, 869.85 MHz Approval for the countries DE, FR, UK, BE, NL, ES, IT, SE, AT, DK, FI, HU, CZ, PL, GR, CH, PT, SI, MT, CY, SK, LU, EE, LT, IE, LV, NO AT Radio handle for plug-on probe heads, incl. TE adapter Approval for the countries DE, FR, UK, BE, NL, ES, IT, SE, AT, DK, FI, HU, Order No. 68 09 40188 68 09 40189 CZ, PL, GR, CH, PT, SI, MT, CY, SK, LU, EE, LT, IE, LV, NO TE probe head for air/immersion/insertion measurements (TE Typ K) 68 09 20293 can be plugged on the radio handle TE probe head for surface measurement (TE Typ K) attachable to radio handle 68 09 20394 Accessories Article Stand-by case for measuring instrument and probe 9 V rechargeable battery for testo measuring instruments Testo protocol printer with wireless IRDA and infrared interface, 1 roll of thermal paper and Order No. 68 09 60182 68 09 50025 68 09 40547 4 round cell batteries Spare thermal paper for printer (6 rolls) measurement data documentation with reading life of up to 10 years Transport case for measuring instrument, 3 probes and accessories 68 09 60200 TopSafe, protects against impact and dirt 10 09 46221 Extension lead 5 m, for thermoelement probe type K 68 09 40592 68 09 40568 Thermo-hygrometer testo 608 The hygrometer testo 608-H1 is designed for continuous measurement of humidity, tem- perature, and dew point. The large display is highly readable also from a larger distance. With hanger and stand for flexible use as table-top or wall unit. The testo 608 has a max. and min. indication and a battery status indicator. Thanks to the long-term stability of the sensor, you will reliably get correct measuring results, even after several years. As a precise alarm hygrometer, the testo 608-H2 reliably raises alarm if the humidity and temperature values are exceeded, for example in plant nurseries, storage rooms, clean- rooms, museums, laboratories etc. Technical data: Measuring rate: Storage temperature: Battery type: Battery life: Weight: Dimensions: Housing: Display: Warranty: 18 sec. -40 to +70°C 9V block battery approx. 1 year 168 g 111 × 90 × 40 mm ABS LCD 2 lines 2 years Continued on next page

890

Measuring Systems Temperature Testo humidity sensor capacitive +2 to +98%rH ± 2%rH (+2 to +98%rH) 0.1%rH AL Digital Thermometers Technical data: sensor types: testo 608-H1 NTC Measuring range: Accuracy ±1 Digit: Resolution: Operating temp.: 0 to +50°C -20 to +50°Ctd ± 0.5°C (at +25°C) 0.1°C 0 to +50°C Testo humidity sensor capacitive +10 to +95%rH testo 608-H2 NTC -10 to +70°C -40 to +70°Ctd ± 3%rH (+10 to +95%rH) ± 0.5°C (at +25°C) 0.1%rH 0.1°C -10 to +70°C Article Thermo-hygrometer testo 608-H1 Humidity-/dew point-/temperature measurement, incl. battery AK Thermo-hygrometer testo 608-H2 Humidity-/dew point-/temperature measurement with LED alarm, incl. calibration protocol and battery ISO-calibration certificate humidity Calibration points 11.3%rH and 75.3%rH at +25°C/+77°F; each channel/unit Order No. 10 09 46081 10 09 46082 10 09 46076 Penetration thermometer with large measuring range testo 905-T1 The penetration thermometer testo 905-T1 is intended for reliably measuring the temper- ature in liquid, soft or powdered substances as well as the air temperature. The thermom- eter excels by its large measuring range and short reaction time. These benefits are attrib- utable to the premium quality of it thermal element sensor of K type. Technical data: Measuring range: Precision: from -50 to +350°C (temporarily up to +500°C) ±1°C (-50 to +99°C) ±1% v. Mw. (remaining range) 0,1°C t99 = 10 s (in water) Resolution: Response time: Article AL Penetration thermometer with large measuring range testo 905-T1 Order No. 10 09 49055 Accessories: Calibration possible on request. AK Climate meter, Testo / IDL Air conditioning instrument incl. differential manometer testo 440 dP Precise, reliable measurement of all climate parameters with just one measuring instru- ment: The multi-function measuring instrument features an integrated differential pressure sensor and ensures intuitive operation with clearly structured measurement menus. Ad- justing air conditioning and ventilation systems, monitoring air quality or carrying out comfort level measurements – thanks to versatile options for combining with high-quality, digital probes, you are ideally equipped to carry out your measuring task (please order probes separately). Technical data: Temperature - NTC Measuring range: from -40 to +150°C Accuracy: ±0.4°C (-40 to -25.1°C) ±0.3°C (-25 to +74.9°C) ±0.4°C (+75 to +99.9°C) ±0.5% of meas. v. (residu- al measuring range) Temperature - type TC K (NiCr-Ni) froom -200 to +1370°C Differential pressure (integrat- ed sensor) - piezo resistive from -150 to +150 hPa ±(0.3°C + 0.3% of meas. v.) ±0.05 hPa (0 to 1.00 hPa) ±0.2 hPa + 1.5% of meas. v. (1.01 to +150 hPa) Resolution: 0.1°C 0.1°C 0.01 hPa Article AM Climate meter incl. differential pressure manometer testo 440 dP Order No. 10 09 44402 Climate meter testo 440 Precise, reliable measurement of all climate parameters with just one measuring instru- ment: The multi-function measuring instrument ensures intuitive operation with clearly structured measurement menus. Adjusting air conditioning and ventilation systems, mon- itoring air quality or carrying out comfort level measurements – thanks to versatile options for combining with high-quality, digital probes, you are ideally equipped to carry out your measuring task (please order probes separately). Technical data: Measuring range: Accuracy: ±0.4°C (-40 to -25.1°C) ±0.3°C (-25 to +74.9°C) ±0.4°C (+75 to +99.9°C) ±0.5% of meas. v. (residual measuring range) Temperature - TC type K (NiCr-Ni) from -200 to +1370°C Temperature - NTC from -40 to +150°C ±(0.3°C + 0.3% of meas. v.) 0.1°C Order No. 10 09 44401 Continued on next page co d e b e w WWJ9J054 AM AN Resolution: 0.1°C Article AN Climate meter testo 440 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 889

891

Measuring Systems Temperature Digital Thermometers Climate meter probes Technical data: Fume cupboard probe, wired Measuring range from 0 to 5m/s from 0 to +50°C from 700 to 1100 hPa from -50 to +400°C from -80 to +300°C Glass-coated laboratory probe (digital) with Pt100 temperature sensor for measurements in corro- sive media Highly precise digital im- mersion probe with Pt100 temperature sen- sor for measurements in liquids and pastes with an accuracy of up to ±0.05°C Accuracy ±(0.02 m/s + 0.5% of meas. v.) (0 to 5 m/s) ±0.5°C ±3 hPa ±(0.3°C + 0.3% of meas. v.) (-50 to +300°C) ±(0.4°C + 0.6% of meas. v.) (-3001 to +400°C) Resolution 0.01m/s 0.1°C 0.1 hPa 0.01°C 0.001°C ±0.3°C (-80 to 40.001°C) ±(0.1°C + 0.05% of meas. v.) (-40 to 0.001°C) ±0.05°C (0 to +100°C) ±(0.05°C + 0.05% of meas. v.) (+100.001 to +300°C) Article Laboratory fume probe, cable-bounded Glasscoated digital Pt100-laboratory probe High-precision digital Pt100-penetration probe Order No. 10 09 41052 10 09 47272 10 09 47172 Other probes for air speed and relative humidity availabe on request. Soil and Compost Thermometer, WINLAB® Immersion thermometer in sturdy, user-friendly design, suitable for measuring the tem- perature in the soil, in compost, straw, and bulk goods. The waterproof immersion sensor has a stable handle with a non-slip rubber surface for powerful plunging into the soil or compost. Complete with indicator for thermocouple type K (NiCr-Ni). Technical data: Measuring range: Accuracy: Diameter of probe: depending on application -100 to 800°C for soil and compost von 0 to 120°C ±1°C in the range of -20 to +180°C 8 mm Article Soil and compost thermometer, probe length 500 mm Soil and compost thermometer, probe length 1000 mm Soil and compost thermometer, probe length 1500 mm Order No. 10 03 00500 10 03 01000 10 03 01500 BOLA Temperature Probes, Bohlender PTFE Resistance thermometer. Ideal for temperature measurement in aggressive liquids. Platinum temperature sensor at the end of a PTFE-encapsulated stainless steel tube (1.4571). Technical data: Temperature probe Ø 8 mm, collar ring Ø 12 mm 4-wire system. Specification: DIN EN 60751 Typical response times: T 50: 7 – 12 s / T 90: 14 – 16 s Temperature range: from -50°C up to +250°C 1 BOLA temperature probes PT 100 Lemo® Compact 1 × Lemo® socket size 1 (fixed directly at the end of the probe) Usable length mm 100 300 400 500 Overall length approx. mm 170 370 470 570 2 BOLA double temperature probes PT 100 Lemo® Compact 2 × Lemo® socket size 1 (fixed directly at the end of the probe) Independent measuring sensors Usable length mm 300 400 500 Overall length approx. mm 400 500 600 Order No. 10 17 63010 10 17 63020 10 17 63023 10 17 63025 Order No. 10 17 64020 10 17 64023 10 17 64030 Continued on next page co d e b e w WW5PT066 1 2 890

892

Measuring Systems Temperature Digital Thermometers 3 BOLA temperature probes PT 100 Lemo®, cable ends open Cable length 1500 mm Usable length mm 100 200 300 500 Overall length approx. mm 135 240 340 560 Order No. 10 17 65010 10 17 65015 10 17 65020 10 17 65025 4 BOLA temperature probes PT 100 Lemo®, cable with socket size 1 Cable length 1500 mm Usable length mm 100 200 300 500 Overall length approx. mm 135 240 340 560 5 BOLA temperature probes PT 100 Lemo® with plug size 1 Cable length 1500 mm Usable length mm 100 200 300 500 Overall length approx. mm 135 240 340 560 BOLA total immersion probes Technical data: Total immersion probe Ø 4 mm, collar ring Ø 5 mm 4-wire system. Specification: DIN EN 60751 Typical response times: T 50: 4 – 6 s / T 90: 6 – 8 s Temperature range: from -50°C up to +250°C 6 BOLA total immersion probe PT 100 Cable length 4 m Usable length mm 50 Order No. 10 17 67610 10 17 67615 10 17 67620 10 17 67625 Order No. 10 17 66010 10 17 66015 10 17 66020 10 17 66025 Order No. 10 17 67820 7 BOLA total immersion probe PT 100 Lemo®, cable with socket size 1 Cable length 4 m Usable length mm 50 Order No. 10 17 67920 3 4 5 6 7 Infrared Thermometers Infrared Thermometer Mini-Flash, LAT The Mini-Flash determines the exact temperature of an object in an instant, without even touching its surface. Based on the most modern infrared technology, which measures the infrared radiation which every object emits. Functions: • °C/°F selector • Maximum/Minimum memory • Automatic hold function for approx. 15 seconds • Lock function for continuous operation Technical data: Measuring range: Response time: Working temperature: Accuracy: Power supply: Dimensions: Weight: Article Mini-flash thermometer -33°C to +220°C 0.5 sec. 0 to 50°C ±1.5°C from 0 to 50°C, otherwise ±2°C or 2%. 1 × button cell CR2032 plastic 68 × 37 × 18 mm 75 g Order No. 68 73 00220 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. co d e b e w WWW4U064 891

893

Measuring Systems Density and Concentration co d e b e w WWE16001 Areometers Areometers without Thermometer, Gering Overall length approx. 280 mm, scale value 0.002 g/ml (20°C) Range 0.600 – 0.800 0.800 – 1.000 1.000 – 1.200 1.200 – 1.400 Order No. 16 60 32001 16 60 32002 16 60 32003 16 60 32004 Range 1.400 – 1.600 1.600 – 1.800 1.800 – 2.000 Overall length approx. 160 mm, scale value 0.001 g/ml (20°C). Order No. 16 60 32005 16 60 32006 16 60 32007 Number Order No. Number Order No. 1 3 co d e b e w WWZT7006 2 892 Range 0.600 – 0.660 00 0.650 – 0.710 0 0.700 – 0.760 1 0.760 – 0.820 2 0.820 – 0.880 3 0.880 – 0.940 4 0.940 – 1.000 5 1.000 – 1.060 6 1.060 – 1.120 7 1.120 – 1.180 8 1.180 – 1.240 9 1.240 – 1.300 10 16 60 33001 16 60 33002 16 60 33003 16 60 33004 16 60 33005 16 60 33006 16 60 33007 16 60 33008 16 60 33009 16 60 33010 16 60 33011 16 60 33012 Range 1.300 – 1.360 11 1.360 – 1.420 12 1.420 – 1.480 13 1.480 – 1.540 14 1.540 – 1.600 15 1.600 – 1.660 16 1.660 – 1.720 17 1.720 – 1.780 18 1 1.780 – 1.840 19 1.840 – 1.900 20 1.900 – 1.960 21 1.960 – 2.020 22 16 60 33013 16 60 33014 16 60 33015 16 60 33016 16 60 33017 16 60 33018 16 60 33019 16 60 33020 16 60 33021 16 60 33022 16 60 33023 16 60 33024 Complete set with locator in a case Overall length approx. 160 mm Article 2 24 areometers, range: 0.600 to 2.020 and locator Order No. 16 60 33500 Series M 100 Overall length ca. 245 mm, scale value 0.002 g/ml (20°C), calibratable. Range 0.600 – 0.700 0.700 – 0.800 0.800 – 0.900 0.900 – 1.000 3 1.000 – 1.100 1.100 – 1.200 1.200 – 1.300 Order No. 16 60 34001 16 60 34002 16 60 34003 16 60 34004 16 60 34005 16 60 34006 16 60 34007 Range 1.300 – 1.400 1.400 – 1.500 1.500 – 1.600 1.600 – 1.700 1.700 – 1.800 1.800 – 1.900 1.900 – 2.000 Order No. 16 60 34008 16 60 34009 16 60 34010 16 60 34011 16 60 34012 16 60 34013 16 60 34014 Hydrometers, Ludwig Schneider • Precision hydrometer “Made in Germany” for density measurement of liquids • Calibratable • With individual serial number Density hydrometers, range finder Ref. temperature: 20°C Measuring range g/cm3 1.000 – 2.000 1.000 – 1.500 Scale g/cm3 0.01 0.005 Overall length mm 300 300 Order No. 10 16 53011 10 16 53014 Density hydrometers • Reference temperature: 20°C • Available with integrated thermometer (mercury-free) • Further measuring ranges (up to 4,000 g/cm3) available on request • Standard calibration (WPS & DAkkS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Measuring range g/cm3 0.600 – 0.700 0.700 – 0.800 0.800 – 0.900 0.900 – 1.000 1.000 – 1.100 1.100 – 1.200 1.200 – 1.300 1.300 – 1.400 1.400 – 1.500 1.500 – 1.600 Scale g/cm3 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 Overall length mm 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 calibrateable version Order No. 10 16 53021 10 16 51822 10 16 51823 10 16 51824 10 16 51825 10 16 51826 10 16 51827 10 16 51828 10 16 51829 10 16 51830 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 55221 10 16 55222 10 16 55223 10 16 55224 10 16 55225 10 16 55226 10 16 55227 10 16 55228 10 16 55229 10 16 55230 with DAkkS calibration certificate Order No. 10 16 55321 10 16 55322 10 16 55323 10 16 55324 10 16 55325 10 16 55326 10 16 55327 10 16 55328 10 16 55329 10 16 55330 Continued on next page

894

Measuring Systems Density and Concentration Areometers Precision density hydrometers acc. to DIN 12791 – Series L50 • Reference temperature: 20°C • Available with integrated thermometer (mercury-free) • Further measuring ranges available on request • Standard calibration (WPS & DAkkS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Type Scale g/cm3 Measuring range g/cm3 Overall length mm L50-070 0.700 – 0.750 0.0005 335 L50-075 0.750 – 0.800 0.0005 335 L50-080 0.800 – 0.850 0.0005 335 L50-085 0.850 – 0.900 0.0005 335 L50-090 0.900 – 0.950 0.0005 335 L50-095 0.950 – 1.000 0.0005 335 L50-100 1.000 – 1.050 0.0005 335 L50-105 1.050 – 1.100 0.0005 335 calibrateable version Order No. 10 16 51831 10 16 51832 10 16 51833 10 16 51834 10 16 51835 10 16 51836 10 16 51837 10 16 51838 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 55231 10 16 55232 10 16 55233 10 16 55234 10 16 55235 10 16 55236 10 16 55237 10 16 55238 with DAkkS calibration certificate Order No. 10 16 55331 10 16 55332 10 16 55333 10 16 55334 10 16 55335 10 16 55336 10 16 55337 10 16 55338 Precision alcoholmeters • Reference temperature: 20°C • Available with integrated thermometer (mercury-free) • Further measuring ranges available on request • Standard calibration (WPS & DAkkS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Measuring range % vol. 0 – 100 10 – 20 20 – 30 30 – 40 40 – 50 50 – 60 Scale % vol. 1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 Overall length mm 250 320 320 320 320 320 calibrateable version Order No. 10 16 51861 10 16 51862 10 16 51863 10 16 51864 10 16 51865 10 16 51866 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 55261 10 16 55262 10 16 55263 10 16 55264 10 16 55265 10 16 55266 with DAkkS calibration certificate Order No. 10 16 55361 10 16 55362 10 16 55363 10 16 55364 10 16 55365 10 16 55366 Special precision hydrometers • Available with integrated thermometer (mercury-free) • Further versions (°Oechsle, °Plato etc.) available on request • Standard calibration (WPS & DAkkS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Scale Measuring range Ref. tem- perature °C 1.015 – 1.040 g/cm³ 0.0005 g/cm³ 15 0.995 – 1.030 g/cm³ 0.0005 g/cm³ 20 1.000 – 1.035 g/cm³ 0.001 g/cm³ 20 20 0 – 30% mas 15 0 – 27% mas 0 – 40% mas 20 20 45 – 96% mas 0.5% mas 0.5% mas 0.5% mas 0.5% mas Length mm 260 350 160 270 270 270 270 Application calibrateable version Order No. 10 16 53053 Lactometer 10 16 53052 soil acc.to Casagrande 10 16 53054 seawater 10 16 53056 potash lye common salt acc. to Bischoff 10 16 53057 10 16 53058 hydrochloric acid 10 16 53059 natric acid with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 53253 10 16 53252 10 16 53254 10 16 53256 10 16 53257 10 16 53258 10 16 53259 with DAkkS calibration certificate Order No. 10 16 53353 10 16 53352 10 16 53354 10 16 53356 10 16 53357 10 16 53358 10 16 53359 Plastic-hydrometers “Made in Germany” made of high quality polycarbonate • Measuring instrument suitable for food (HACCP proof) • Unbreakable (no glass breakage) • Same transparency as glass • Further versions (°Oechsle, °Brix etc.) available on request • Standard calibration (WPS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Hydrometer for measuring density and specific gravity Length mm Ref. tempe- rature Scale Measuring range 1.000 – 1.220 g/cm3 0.002 g/cm3 20°C 1.200 – 1.420 g/cm3 0.002 g/cm3 20°C 1.400 – 1.620 g/cm3 0.002 g/cm3 20°C 1.000 – 1.220 sp/gr 1.200 – 1.420 sp/gr 1.400 – 1.620 sp/gr 0.002 sp/gr 0.002 sp/gr 0.002 sp/gr 60/60°F 60/60°F 60/60°F 300 300 300 300 300 300 calibrateable version Order No. 10 16 51901 10 16 51902 10 16 51903 10 16 51904 10 16 51905 10 16 51906 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 55401 10 16 55402 10 16 55403 10 16 55404 10 16 55405 10 16 55406 Hydrometers acc. to Baumé • Reference temperature: 15°C • Standard calibration (WPS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Measuring range Scale 0 – 12 Bé 0 – 25 Bé 9 – 21 Bé 19 – 31 Bé 29 – 41 Bé 39 – 51 Bé 49 – 61 Bé 59 – 71 Bé 0,2° Bé 0,2° Bé 0,2° Bé 0,2° Bé 0,2° Bé 0,2° Bé 0,2° Bé 0,2° Bé Length mm 250 300 250 250 250 250 250 300 calibrateable version Order No. 10 16 51922 10 16 51921 10 16 51923 10 16 51924 10 16 51925 10 16 51926 10 16 51927 10 16 51928 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 55422 10 16 55421 10 16 55423 10 16 55424 10 16 55425 10 16 55426 10 16 55427 10 16 55428 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 893

895

Measuring Systems Density and Concentration Areometers Hydrometers for sodium chloride (saline solutions) • Reference temperature: 20°C • Standard calibration (WPS) with 3 test points, additional test points available on request Measuring Scale range 0 – 100 0 – 26 1.000 – 1.040 Length mm calibrateable version Order No. 10 16 55431 10 16 55432 10 16 55433 with factory test certificate Order No. 10 16 55441 10 16 55442 10 16 55443 1° saturation 0.2% mas 0.001 g/cm³ 300 300 250 co d e b e w WWE16009 Areometers for Transparent Mineral Oils, Gering Areometers for Transparent Mineral Oils Areometers with spirit-thermometer, -10 to +60°C in body, overall length, ca. 400 mm, scale value 0,001 g/ml (15°C), auditable. Range 0.610 – 0.700 0.680 – 0.770 0.750 – 0.840 Order No. 16 60 35051 16 60 35052 16 60 35053 Range 1 0.820 – 0.910 0.890 – 0.990 0.980 – 1.100 Order No. 16 60 35054 16 60 35055 16 60 35056 Alcoholometers for volumetric concentration Range 0 – 100: 1 Vol.-% 20 °C 2 0 – 100: 1 Vol.-% 20 °C Order No. Version 16 60 41071 without thermometer with spirit-thermometer 0 – +35 °C 16 60 41072 Precision Density Areometers, Gering Reference temperature 20°C Type 3 L50 L50 4 M50 M50 Range g/cm3 0.60 – 0.65 1.95 – 2.00 0.60 – 0.65 1.25 – 1.30 Scale unit g/cm3 0.0005 0.0005 0.001 0.001 Length mm 335 335 270 270 Order No. 10 60 33071 10 60 33072 10 60 33075 10 60 33076 1 2 co d e b e w WWE16012 3 4 Areometer Cylinders Cylinders, DURAN®, DURAN Group / IDL Upright cylinder with round foot, folded and plane-ground rim, without graduation. Volume approx. ml 130 250 570 700 500 Height mm 100 200 200 250 400 Ø mm 40 40 60 60 40 Order No. 12 21 39907 12 21 39934 12 21 39936 12 21 39946 12 21 39968 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 co d e b e w WWEQ2155 894

896

Measuring Systems Density and Concentration Areometer Cylinders Hydrometer Cylinders, PP, VITLAB Highly transparent, with spout and overflow vessel. For density measurements using a hydrometer. Hydrometer can be read through the overflow vessel with a completely filled cylinder. With a raised scale and ring mark at the primary scale points, calibrated “In”. Class B tolerances according to DIN 12681/ISO 6706. Hexagonal base with bottom studs provides high stability. Thermal stress up to 80ºC does not cause tolerance limits to be permanently exceeded. Volume ml 500 Graduation ml 5 Height mm 351 Ø mm 73 Order No. 23 85 10588 Pycnometers Pycnometers, Hofmann 1 Pycnometers, Gay-Lussac type, exactly calibrated Duran with ground in capillary stopper. Volume Order No. ml 1 2 5 10 14 39 64109 14 39 64111 14 39 64119 14 39 64129 Volume Order No. ml 25 50 100 14 39 64138 14 39 64150 14 39 64161 2 Pycnometers, Gay-Lussac type, with thermometer, exactly calibrated ground joint 10/19, with side capillary, cap with ground joint 7/16. Volume ml 5 10 25 50 100 Graduation °C 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Thermometer °C 0 – +35 0 – +35 0 – +35 0 – +35 0 – +35 3 Pycnometers, Hubbard type, exactly calibrated Volume Order No. Volume ml 25 14 39 64538 ml 50 Pycnometers, Neubert-Glas Order No. 14 39 64319 14 39 64329 14 39 64338 14 39 64350 14 39 64361 Order No. 14 39 64550 Reischauer-type pycnometer, pear-shaped Class A, tared to 3 decimal places; DIN 12801 With ground bed and PE stopper 4 Vol. ml 10 25 NS Order No. 10/19 10/19 10 11 52010 10 11 52025 Vol. ml 50 100 NS Order No. 10/19 10/19 10 11 52050 10 11 52100 5 DAB type With graduation ± 10 mm, class A, balanced to 3 decimal points. Vol. ml 10 25 NS Order No. 10/19 10/19 10 11 56010 10 11 56025 Vol. ml 50 NS Order No. 10/19 10 11 56050 1 2 3 4 5 Cylindrical pycnometers are also available. You can also get Gay-Lussac-type, Lipkin, Hubbard, Boot-type pycnometers, acid cap, etc. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 895

897

Measuring Systems Density and Concentration co d e b e w WWY3J018 896 Digital Density Meters Handheld Digital Density Meters, METTLER TOLEDO Densito / DensitoPro Easy, fast and secure density measurements! • Fits many application in F&B, Chemistry, Pharma, Cosmetics, Galvanic, Petrochemis- try,... • Significantly faster, more secure and accurate than Hydrometers / Pyknometers • High robustness with perfect ergonomics: lightweight, one-handed / one-button oper- ation without strains • Ease of use: sucks sample automatically and shows colour coded value • Self-explanatory, intuitive menu with 13 languages • Precise results within seconds, various measurement scales • Secure data management: GLP consistent storing / transfer, wireless printing • Integrated barcode / RFID scanner (DensitoPro), sample ID with one click! • Selectable automatic temperature compensation • Backlighted, perfect visible measuring cell • External supply for viscous samples like Densito, additional integrated Barcode/RFID-Scanner Article Densito Kit DensitoPro Kit Protective cover Data-Transfer-Software EasyDirect DE/RE (license) Density calibration standard (6 ml), 10 pcs. Charging unit, table or wall mount even for filling with syringe USB-P25 Matrix printer normal paper Order No. 10 50 01857 10 50 01858 10 50 01860 10 50 01861 10 50 01862 10 50 01863 10 50 01864 Density Meters, A. KRÜSS Optronic The DS7700 and DS7800 model variants are offered in 5 different complete sets. Each set contains all necessary accessories from tube sets to nozzles and adapters to a splash guard for the manual sample supply. The devices are suitable for almost all liquids, emul- sions, pastes, etc. thanks to the chemical-resistant sample-contacting parts made of borosilicate glass and PTFE. Depending on the set, samples are fed manually via syringe, semi-automatically via peristaltic pump or fully automatically via autosampler. Set 1: Low sample volume, samples of any degree of viscosity, semi-automatic drying, small Tygon tube set Set 2: Low sample volume, samples of any degree of viscosity, aggressive samples, splash protection for addition of aggressive samples, tube sets suitable for every type of samples, semi-automatic drying, small Tygon and PTFE tube set Set 3: Moderate to high sample volume, low to slightly viscous samples, semi-automatic sample feeding and cleaning, semi-automatic drying, large Tygon tube set Set 4: High sample volume, low-viscous to slightly viscous samples, fully automatic sam- ple supply and cleaning, fully automatic drying (no interchange of tubes required), large Tygon tube set Set 5: High sample volume, low-viscous to slightly viscous samples, tube sets suitable for any kind of sample, fully automatic sample supply and cleaning, fully automatic drying (no interchange of tubes required), large PTFE tube set Scope of delivery: Density meter with drying unit, waste container, operating instructions, test report, set-dependent tube set, set-dependent peripheral devices Technical data: Measurement range: Sample volume with manual injection: Temperature control range: Temp. measurement accuracy: Measurement period: Ambiente temperature: Housing: Control: Interfaces: Operating voltage: Power consumption (operation): Power consumption (max.): Methods: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: 0 – 3 g/m3 0.9 ml 10 – 40°C ±0.02°C typical 1 – 3 minutes inclusive temperature control 10 – 40°C aluminium casting, powder-coated 5.7 ″ TFT touchscreen, 640 × 480 pixels 1× USB, 1× RS-232, 1× Ethernet 100 – 240 V, 47 – 63 Hz 25 W 120 W almost unlimited number of methods adjustable 220 × 220 × 430 mm 5.3 kg Continued on next page

898

Digital Density Meters Measuring Systems Density and Concentration Type Specification Measurement accuracy g/cm3 DS7700-1 For manual sample supply ±0.001 DS7700-2 For manual sample supply ±0.001 DS7700-3 For semi-automatic sample supply ±0.001 DS7700-4 For fully automatic sample supply ±0.001 DS7700-5 For fully automatic sample supply ±0.001 DS7800-1 For manual sample supply ±0.0001 DS7800-2 For manual sample supply ±0.0001 DS7800-3 For semi-automatic sample supply ±0.0001 DS7800-4 For fully automatic sample supply ±0.0001 DS7800-5 For fully automatic sample supply ±0.0001 Order No. 10 61 17701 10 61 17702 10 61 17703 10 61 17704 10 61 17705 10 61 17801 10 61 17802 10 61 17803 10 61 17804 10 61 17805 Portable, Digital Density Meters DMA 35, Anton Paar The digital density meter DMA 35 is a portable entry-level device which takes samples directly from the storage tank using the built-in pump, and then measures them directly on site in a matter of seconds. The results are indicated as density or concentration. Developed for incoming goods inspection or quality checks at the production line, the density meter uses only two millilitres of sample. On request, the density meters can be calibrated before delivery to be retraceable pursuant to ISO/IEC 17025. Technical data: Measuring principle: Sample volume: Measuring range: Accuracy: Repeatability: Protection class: Permitted sample temperature: 0 to 100°C Data memory: Oscillator made of borosilicate glass 2 ml Density from 0 to 3 g/cm³, temperature from 0 to 40°C Density 0.001 g/cm³, temperature 0.2°C Density 0.0005 g/cm³, temperature 0.1°C IP 54 (dust and splash water protected) 1024 measured results DMA 35 Standard The DMA 35 in Standard version is the follow-up model of the DMA 35 Basic. It has a colour display with capacitive keys, communicates with external devices via Bluetooth and can read RFID labels. It is suitable for right- and left-handers. The new patented connection between measuring cell and instrument provides for fast exchange of the flexural resonator in case of a defect. Special functions: • Intelligent connection of the replaceable measuring cell (patents AT516421 (B1), EP3015847 (B1)) • Viscosity correction of the density measuring results • Gesture control for easy measuring with one hand only • Comes in a sturdy plastic case Technical data: Ambient temperature: Power supply: Weight: Dimensions (L×W×H): Measuring units: -10 – +50°C three 1.5 V LR06 AA alkaline batteries 660 g 245 × 103 × 129 mm Density, density @ xx°C, specific gravity SG, alkohol % v/v, al- kohol % w/w, API digit, API SG, API density, °Baumé, °Brix, °Plato, °Oechsle, °KMW, H2SO4 % w/w, H2SO4 @ 20°C, con- centration formula for calcium chloride, hydrochloric acid, hy- drogen peroxide, isopropyl, methanol, nitric acid, sodium hy- droxide, ten programmable custom-specific measuring units co d e b e w WWY9G002 1 Rubber housing for operating panel optionally available Article 1 DMA 35 Standard Rubber housing for operating panel Factory calibration pursuant to ISO 17025 is available for new instruments before delivery only. Order No. 10 63 33504 10 63 33501 10 63 33505 ISO 17025 calibration DMA 35 EX Identical with the standard version, the DMA 35 EX additionally is ATEX approved and thus suitable for measuring combustible chemical agents in potentially explosive environ- ments. Special functions: same as DMA 35 Standard • ATEX approval, EX II 2 G Ex ib IIC T4 • Additional rubber protection for measuring cell Technical data: same as DMA 35 Standard Ambient temperature: -10 – +40°C Article 1 DMA 35 EX Rubber housing for operating panel Factory calibration pursuant to ISO 17025 is available for new instruments before delivery only. Order No. 10 63 33506 10 63 33501 10 63 33505 ISO 17025 calibration co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 897 Continued on next page

899

Measuring Systems Density and Concentration 1 co d e b e w WWY9G003 2 898 Digital Density Meters DMA 35 EX Petrol Identical with the standard version, the DMA 35 EX Petrol additionally is ATEX approved and thus suitable for measuring combustible chemical agents in potentially explosive environments. The chemical resistance of its casing is designed specifically for samples taken in the petrochemical industry. Special functions: same as DMA 35 Standard • ATEX approval, EX II 2 G Ex ib IIC T4 • Casing materials particularly suitable for the petrochemical industry • Additional rubber protection for measuring cell Technical data: same as DMA 35 Standard Ambient temperature: -10 – +40°C Article 1 DMA 35 EX Petrol Rubber housing for operating panel ISO 17025 calibration Order No. 10 63 33507 10 63 33501 10 63 33505 Factory calibration pursuant to ISO 17025 is available for new instruments before delivery only. We grant 3 years’ warranty for these devices. All repairs are free during this period of time. Density Meter DMA 501, Anton Paar The simple and robust DMA 501 is a digital laboratory density meter based on the flexur- al resonator principle. It is accurate to 3 digits and offers a modern, user-friendly interface on a 7 ″ colour display. Featuring the U-View (live camera image from the measuring cell), FillingCheck (automat- ic detection of filling errors) and the full-range viscosity correction, it easily adjusts to any type of sample and to different users. With its U-shaped borosilicate flexural resonator and the new, patented Pulsed Excitation Method, it is perfectly suited for measuring acids and lyes, paints and varnishes, solvents, pharmaceuticals, food and drinks, flavours, as well as petrochemicals. It excels particularly for its ability to measure inhomogeneous and complicated samples such as suspensions, emulsions, highly viscous gels and pastes, and aerosols. Filling options: The digital density meter is filled either by means of a syringe or optionally via a peristaltic pump integrated at the side of the device (normal1) / highly resistant2)); after displacement and cleaning, it is dried with the integrated air pump. Scope of delivery: The DMA 501 is immediately ready for use. It comes in a protective cover. ON request, it will be traceably calibrated pursuant to ISO/IEC 17025 before delivery. Special features: • U-View – live camera picture of the measuring cell which is also saved • FillingCheck: Assessment of the vibration characteristics for filling error detection 1)Hose material: Novoprene 2)Hose material: Norprene A-60-G, Norprene Chemical Technical data: Accuracy: Reproducibility: Measuring range: Output parameters: Internal storage: Dimensions (L×W×H): Weight: Density 0.001 g/cm³, temperature 0.3°C Density 0.0002 g/cm³, temperature 0.1°C Density 0 – 3 g/cm³, temperature 15 – 40°C (Peltier) Density, specific gravity, alkohol / sugar / extrakt / acid / base tables, API functions, custom-specific functions 5000 measured results 375 × 265 × 180 mm 13.5 kg Article 2 DMA 501 with syringe filling Peristaltic pump for DMA 501 Highly resistant peristaltic pump for DMA 501 ISO 17025 calibration We grant 3 years’ warranty for these devices. All repairs are free during this period of time. Order No. 10 63 35010 10 63 35011 10 63 35012 10 63 35013

900

Measuring Systems Density and Concentration / Electrochemistry Digital Density Meters Tap Density Tester, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber The device makes it possible to determine the tamped volume or density of powdery and granular products. The product enables compliance with the following standards: • ISO 8967 (milk powder) • IDF 134 (milk powder) • USP 616 method I (pharmaceutical powder) ISO 8460 (instant coffee) and others • ISO 8460 (instant coffee) and others Technical data: Supply voltage: Strokes per minute: Drop height: Quantity of strokes: Gewicht: Dimensions (W×D×H): from 230 V AC to 240 V AC (50 Hz) possible 275 3 mm adjustable 5 – 9995 6.4 kg 245 × 200 × 160 mm without punch Article Tap Density Tester Order No. 10 42 07700 pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories Thermo Scientific™ Orion™ ROSS™ Sure-Flow™ pH electrode, Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific™ Orion™ 8172BNWP ROSS™ Sure-Flow™ pH electrodes have a free- flow ground-joint diaphragm. They are ideal for measuring the pH value in contaminated and difficult samples such as soil, sludge, colloids, viscous substances, and organic material. Cleaning the diaphragm between measurements is easy: Just press on the cap to have the filler solution flow through the diaphragm to flush out contaminations which may affect the measured values. • Glass body • pH range: 0 to 14 – temperature range: 0 to 100 °C • Accuracy pH value: 0.01 – filling solution: 3M KCl • Internal reference system: ROSS • Diaphragm: Sure-Flow • Dimensions: 120 × 12 mm – cap diameter: 16 mm co d e b e w WW4HV037 Article Orion™ ROSS Sure-Flow pH electrode Order No. 10 79 28172 rechargeable with glass body, incl. 1 m connecting cable with water-tight BNC plug Please enter the webcode WW4HV037 to see more electrodes in our online catalogue. Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 899

901

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WW1WS002 pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories Laboratory Electrodes, SI Analytics Laboratory electrodes Article 1 SI Analytics BlueLine 11 pH pH combination electrode with glass stem and robust conical membrane, reference Order No. 61 27 29114 system: silver/silver chloride, with plug head (please order matching connection cable L1A or L1BNC separately). Applications: for universal applications. -5 to 100°C: Temperature sensor: Length/Ø: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Membrane resistance at 25°C: Refilling opening closed by: 0 to 14pH no 120 mm/12 mm liquid, KCI 3 mol/l platinum 300 M Ω sliding plug Article 2 SI Analytics BlueLine 13 pH for low-ion media pH combination electrode with glass stem, reference system: silver/silver chloride, with Order No. 61 27 29139 plug head (please order matching connection cable L1A or L1BNC separately). Applications: for superior measurement conditions, e.g. low-ion media or emulsions. -5 to 100°C: Temperature sensor: Length/Ø: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Membrane resistance at 25°C: Refilling opening closed by: 0 to 14 pH no 170 mm/12 mm liquid, KCI 3 mol/l ground 400 M Ω sliding plug 1 3 Article 3 SI Analytics BlueLine 14 pH with temperature probe NTC Order No. 61 27 29147 pH combination electrode with glass stem and robust conical membrane, reference 2 system: silver/silver chloride, with fixed cable 1 m, Ø=5 mm, DIN plug and 4 mm bana- na plug Applications: for universal applications. -5 to 100°C: Temperature sensor: Length/Ø: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Membrane resistance at 25°C: Refilling opening closed by: 0 to 14 pH NTC 30 kΩ 120 mm/12 mm liquid, KCI 3 mol/l platinum 300 M Ω sliding plug Article 4 SI Analytics BlueLine 16 pH Micro Micro pH combination electrode with glass stem, reference system: silver/silver chlori- Order No. 61 27 29163 de, with plug head (please order matching connection cable L1A or L1BNC separately). Applications: for universal applications, especially for small sample volumes. -5 to 100°C: Temperature sensor: Length/Ø: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Membrane resistance at 25°C: Refilling opening closed by: 0 to 14 pH no 40/80 mm//12/5 mm liquid, KCI 3 mol/l platinum 450 M Ω sliding plug Article 5 SI Analytics BlueLine 21 pH Insertion pH combination electrode with glass stem and robust spear membrane, reference sys- Order No. 61 27 29217 tem: silver/silver chloride (please order matching connection cable L1A or L1BNC se- parately). Applications: for penetration measurements in semi-hard media. -5 to 80°C: Temperature sensor: Length/Ø: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Membrane resistance at 25°C: Refilling opening closed by: 2 to 13 pH no 65/25 mm//12/5 mm Referid® double hole 400 M Ω no refilling opening Continued on next page 4 5 900

902

pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories Article 6 SI Analytics BlueLine 22 pH with plastic shaft pH combination electrode with plastic stem, reference system: silver/silver chloride and Order No. 61 27 29225 plug head (please order matching connection cable L1A or L1BNC separately). Applications: for universal applications. -5 to 80°C: Temperature probe: Length/dia.: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Membrane resistance at 25°C: 0 to 14 pH no 120 mm/12 mm gel, KCI saturated fibre 400 M Ω Article SI Analytics BlueLine 24 pH with fixed cable and tempera- Order No. 61 27 29241 ture probe NTC pH combination electrode with plastic stem, reference system: silver/silver chloride and fixed cable, 1m, Ø=5 mm, DIN-plug and 4 mm banana plug. Applications: for universal applications. -5 to 80°C: Temperature probe: Length/dia.: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Membrane resistance at 25°C: 0 to 14 pH NTC 30 kΩ 120 mm/12 mm gel, KCI saturated fibre 400 M Ω Order No. 61 27 29274 Article 7 SI Analytics BlueLine 27 pH pH combination electrode with glass stem and flat membrane, reference system: silver/ silver chloride, with plug head (please order matching connection cable L1A or L1BNC separately). Applications: for measurements on surfaces. -5 to 50°C: Temperature probe: Length/dia.: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Membrane resistance at 25°C: 2 to 13 pH no 120 mm/12 mm Referid®, KCI saturated annular gap 400 M Ω Measuring Systems Electrochemistry 6 7 8 Article 8 SI Analytics BlueLine 31 RX Redox combination electrode with glass stem, reference system: silver/silver chloride, Order No. 61 27 29311 with plug head (please order matching connection cable L1A or L1BNC separately). Applications: for universal applications. -5 to 100°C Sensor: Temperature probe: Length/dia.: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: Refilling opening closed by: Pt disk no 120 mm/12 mm liquid, KCI 3 mol/l ceramic sliding plug Accessories Electrolyte solutions, test solutions For topping up or replacing the reference electrolyte. Packed in 250 ml DURAN® bottles. Redox test solutions available on request. Article 2 mol/l KNO3 + 0,001 mol/l KCI 9 3 mol/l KCI Order No. 61 27 38349 61 27 38427 Buffer solutions Sterilized with hot steam. With individual batch number. No conserving additives. Article pH 4.00 250 ml DURAN® bottle pH 7.00 250 ml DURAN® bottle pH 10.01 250 ml DURAN® bottle Order No. 61 27 38032 61 27 38049 61 27 38057 Buffer solution set Calibration set for pH measurements. The set contains 20 ampoules à 20 ml volume ( W 17 ml content) with pH 4.00, 7.00 and 10.01 (at 25°C). Article Buffer set L 4698 Order No. 61 27 38192 Socket cable combinations L1 A und L1BNC For BlueLine pH electrodes. Acc. to DIN 19262. 1 m long, 3 mm in diameter. Order No. 61 27 22653 10 27 12661 Article Cable combination L1A: plug head - DIN Cable combination L1BNC: plug head - BNC 9 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 901

903

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories pH/Redox Electrodes, Meinsberg co d e b e w WW37Z001 pH and redox combination electrodes of standard design (120 mm stem length; stem-Ø 12 mm), Ag/AgCl reference system, lab plug head S7-system or 1 m of fixed cable with DIN plug. Standard pH combination electrodes with glass stem General purpose laboratory use Article 1 EGA151-L: pH 0 – 14; -5 – 80°C Liquid electrolyte 3 mol/l KCI (refillable), lab plug head S7-system EGA151-K010-D: as EGA151-L, but with fixed cable + DIN plug 61 90 71151 2 EGA173-L: pH 0 – 14; -5 – 80°C 61 90 70173 Ring-shaped glass sleeve junction, gel electrolyte (low-mainte- Order No. 61 90 70151 nance), lab plug head S7-system EGA173-K010-D: as EGA173-L, but with fixed cable + DIN plug 61 90 71173 pH combination electrode with glass sleeve junction Specially for suspensions, partially aqueous samples and low-ion media Article 3 EGA161-L: pH 0 – 14; -5 – 80°C Liquid electrolyte 3 mol/l KCI (refillable), lab plug head S7-system EGA161-K010-D: as EGA161-L, but with fixed cable + DIN plug 61 90 71161 Order No. 61 90 70161 pH combination electrode with penetration membrane Specially for penetration measurements in meat, cheese, etc. Article 4 EGA184-L: pH 2 – 11; 0 – 60°C Penetration Ø 12/6 mm, gel electrolyte (low-maintenance), lab plug Order No. 61 90 70184 head S7-system EGA184-K010-D: as EGA184-L, but with fixed cable + DIN plug 61 90 71184 EGA186-L: pH 2 – 11; -5 – 60°C 10 90 70186 Liquid electrolyte 3 mol/l KCI (refillable), stem Ø 12/6 mm, stem 1 2 3 4 length 170 mm, lab plug head S7-system EGA186-K010-D: as EGA186-L, but with fixed cable + DIN plug 10 90 71186 pH combination electrode with plastic stem General purpose use, particularly in the water and waste water sector Article 5 EGA133-L: pH 0 – 14; -5 – 80°C Gel electrolyte (low-maintenance), lab plug head S7-system EGA 133-K010-D: as EGA 133 L, but with fixed cable + DIN plug 61 90 70133 Order No. 10 90 72133 pH combination electrode with temperature probe and glass stem Specially for temp.-compensated measurements with lab pH meters Article Order No. 6 EGAT151-K010-DH-X with Pt 1000, pH 0 – 14, -5 – 80°C 61 90 70141 EGAT151-K010-DH-Z30 with NTC 30 kΩ; pH 0 – 14; -5 – 80°C 61 90 71141 Liquid electrolyte 3 mol/l KCI (refillable), fixed cable + DIN plug and 4 mm banana plug pH combination electrode with temperature sensor and plastic stem Specially for temperature-compensated measurements with hand units Article 7 EGA142-K010-DH-X with Pt 1000: pH 0 – 14; -5 – 80°C EGA142-K010-DH-Z30 with NTC 30 kΩ; pH 0 – 14; -5 – 80°C Gel electrolyte (low-maintenance), fixed cable + DIN plug and Order No. 61 90 70142 61 90 71142 4 mm banana plug 7 8 Micro pH combination electrode with conical membrane Specially for small sample volumes Article 8 EGA801-K010-D: pH 2 – 11; -5 – 60°C Liquid electrolyte 3 mol/l KCI (refillable), stem Ø 8/6 mm, stem Order No. 61 90 70801 length 100 mm, fixed cable + DIN plug Continued on next page 5 6 902

904

pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories Standard redox combination electrodes with glass stem General purpose laboratory use Measuring Systems Electrochemistry Article 9 EMC30-L: platinum tip Ø 5 mm; -5 – 80°C Liquid electrolyte 3 mol/l KCI (refillable), lab plug head S7-system EMC30-K010-D: as EMC30-L, but with fixed cable + DIN plug 61 90 71300 Order No. 61 90 70300 Redox combination electrode with PSU stem General purpose use, particularly in the water and waste water sector Article EMC133-L: platinum tip Ø 5 mm; -5 – 80°C Gel electrolyte (low-maintenance), lab plug head S7-system EMC133-K010-D: as EMC133-L, but with fixed cable + DIN plug 61 90 71133 Order No. 10 90 73133 Connection cable for pH and redox combination electrodes Connection cable (1 m long; Ø 3 mm) for connecting electrodes with a lab plug head S7-system to the measuring instrument Article Coax3: S7/S8 connector/DIN connector; 1 m Coax5: S7/S8 connector/BNC connector; 1 m AT Electrolyte and buffer solutions Article Electrolyte KCL 3 mol/l; 250 ml Storage solution and liquid electrolyte for refilling Maintenance set pH, each 250 ml Cleaning/Regeneration/KCl solution (3 mol/l) pH buffer solution Tripack NBS, 3 × 250 ml acc. to NBS and DIN 19266, pH 4.01; 6.87; 9.18 (25°C) Laboratory buffer solution pH 4,0; 250 ml, red coloured Laboratory buffer solution pH 7,0; 250 ml, green coloured Laboratory buffer solution pH 9,0; 250 ml, blue coloured Laboratory buffer solution pH 10,0; 250 ml Redox buffer solution UH = 427 mV; 250 ml UH = 427 mV (pH 7), UPt-Ag/AgCl = 220 mV Redox buffer solution UH = 675 mV; 250 ml UH = 675 mV (pH 1), UPt-Ag/AgCl = 468 mV AK Handheld meters Article TM40/Set pH / mV / ISE / temperature measuring instrument pH 0 – 14; -1999 – 1999 mV; -10 – 100°C; ISE: 0 – 30000 ppm Housing IP 65; integrated data memory; complete measuring kit with pH combination electrode EGA142/TM40 and accessories: 1 × 50 ml storage solution KCl 3 mol/l 3 × 50 ml buffer solution pH 4.01; 6.87 und 9.18 (25°C) LF40/Set Conductivity meter; 0 – 20 g/l; 0 – 500 g/l; 2 – 200; 0 – 2000 µS/cm; 0 – 20; 0 – 500 mS/cm; 0 – 100°C; TDS: 0 – 200 mg/l; 0 – 2000 mg/l; 0 – 20 g/l; 0 – 500 g/l; salinity: 0 – 70 g/kg; Housing IP 65; integrated data memory; complete measuring kit with measuring cell LTC0.35/LF40 and accessories: 50 ml calib- ration solution 0.1 N KCl (12.9 mS/cm at 25°C) AM40/Set Oxygen meter 0 – 20 mg/l; 0 – 200% saturation; -10 – 100°C Housing IP 65; integrated data memory; complete measuring kit with oxygen sensor MF41N/AM40 and accessories: 2 spare membrane heads, 6 vials of electrolyte Order No. 61 90 70313 61 90 70315 Order No. 61 90 70147 61 90 70148 61 90 70150 10 90 70151 10 90 70152 10 90 70153 10 90 70154 61 90 70427 61 90 70675 Order No. 10 90 74061 10 90 74062 10 90 74063 AT 9 AK Failed to find what you are looking for ? Give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 903

905

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWP1J026 1 2 3 co d e b e w WW5PT054 4 5 6 904 pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories IDS Sensors, WTW® Article 1 IDS sensor SenTix® 940 Low-maintenance gel electrolyte pH electrode with integrated tem- perature sensor, QSC, memory for 10 calibrations, stored serial number, pH 0.000 to 14.000 (±0.004 pH), temperature range 0.0 to 80.0°C ±0.2°C. Also available as plug head sensor. 2 IDS senso SenTix® 950 Combined pH electrode with plastic shaft, electrolyte 3 mol/l KCl, in- tegrated temperature sensor, QSC, memory for 10 calibrations, stored serial number, pH 0.000 to 14.000 (±0.004 pH), temperature range 0.0 to 80.0°C ±0.2°C. Also available as plug head sensor. 3 IDS senso SenTix® 980 Precisely combined pH electrode with glass shaft, electrolyte 3 mol/l KCl, integrated temperature sensor, platinum wire diaphragm, QSC, memory for 10 calibrations, stored serial number, pH 0.000 to 14.000 (±0.004 pH), temperature range 0.0 to 100.0°C ±0.2°C. Also available as plug head sensor. 4 IDS senso TetraCon® 925 Robust, universal 4-pole graphite conductivity measuring cell with integrated temperature sensor, memory for 10 calibrations, stored serial number, measuring range 10 µS/cm to 2000 mS/cm ±0.5% of measuring value, 0.0 to 100.0°C ±0.2°C, cell constant 0.475 cm-1. Also available as plug head sensor. 5 IDS senso LR 925/01 2-pole stainless steel conductivity measuring cell for low conductivi- ties, with integrated temperature sensor, flow-through vessel, me- mory for 10 calibrations, stored serial number, measuring range 0.01 µS/cm to 200 µS/cm ±0.5% of measuring value, 0.0 to 100.0°C ±0.2°C, cell constant 0.1 cm-1. Also available as plug head sensor. 6 IDS senso FDO® 925 Extremely fast (T99<60s) and accurate optical oxygen sensor for field and laboratory use. Light-weight and practical to use, it mat- ches all BSB bottle formats. Watertight for depth measurements of max. 25 m. Beveled, air bubble-repellent membrane. Green light technology for a long useful life. Insensitive to H2S. O2 concentrati- on: 0.00 to 20.00 mg/l, O2 saturation: 0.0 to 200.0%; O2 partial pres- sure: 0.0 to 400 hPa all ±0.5% of measuring value. Also available as plug head sensor. Order No. 10 81 29400 10 81 29500 10 81 29800 10 81 29250 10 81 29251 10 81 29252 Ionselective ISE Combination Electrodes, WinLab®, WINLAB® Robust ISE combination single-bar electrodes for immediate use in the laboratory or the field. No additional reference electrodes! These solid electrodes designed for a variety of ion concentration measurements are ideal for use in the field, because no reference electrode is required, no electrolytic solu- tion is needed and the electrode is suitable for dry storage. The new driTEK Teflon integrated reference system lets you take immersion measure- ments in any environment. Robust design for long service life. Can be used in connection with any ion meter or pH meter with mV range. When ordering, please specify which version you want: • with S7 head or • with 1 m cable incl. BNC plug or • with 1 m cable incl. DIN plug Type Ammonia NH3 Ammonium Barium Lead Bromide Cadmium Calcium Chloride Cyanid Iodide Potassium Copper Sodium Nitrate Fluoride Sulfide Measuring range ppm 0.02 – 17000 0.9 – 9000 1.4 – 13400 0.2 – 20800 0.4 – 81000 0.1 – 11200 0.02 – 4010 1 – 35500 0.03 – 260 0.06 – 127000 0.04 – 39000 0.006 – 64000 0.002 – 69000 0.4 – 62000 0.02 – 1900 0.003 – 32000 Temperature range °C 0 – 50 0 – 50 0 – 50 0 – 50 0 – 50 5 – 50 0 – 50 5 – 50 5 – 50 5 – 50 0 – 50 5 – 50 0 – 50 0 – 50 5 – 50 5 – 50 Order No. 61 03 03302 61 03 03051 61 03 03081 61 03 03231 61 03 03271 61 03 03241 61 03 03041 61 03 03261 61 03 03291 61 03 03281 61 03 03031 61 03 03227 61 03 03301 61 03 03021 61 03 03221 61 03 03225

906

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WW7R3313 pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories Buffer Solution with Measuring Cap, IDL pH-buffer solution, technical according to DIN 19267, traceable to standard reference material from PTB and NIST, in different pH-values, dispensing bottles made of HDPE natural, warranty cap 28 mm, dispensing volume 20 and 25 ml. Article Bottle ml Buffer solution pH 4.01 (25°C) 250 Buffer solution pH 4.01 (25°C) 500 Buffer solution pH 4.01 (25°C) 1000 Buffer solution pH 7.00 (25°C) 250 Buffer solution pH 7.00 (25°C) 500 Buffer solution pH 7.00 (25°C) 1000 Buffer solution pH 10.00 (25°C) 250 Buffer solution pH 10.00 (25°C) 500 Buffer solution pH 10.00 (25°C) 1000 Color code Order No. yellow yellow yellow green green green blue blue blue 10 00 04023 10 00 04024 10 00 04025 10 00 07263 10 00 07264 10 00 07265 10 00 10383 10 00 10384 10 00 10385 Buffer Solutions and Potassium Chlorid Solution, BOESECKE Technical buffer solutions to DIN 19267, traceable to standard reference material from PTB and NIST, potassium chlorid solution for storage of pH-electrode. Article Buffer solution pH-value 4,01 (25°C), PolyCube 10 l Buffer solution pH-value 7,00 (25°C), 10 l PolyCube Potassium chlorid solution 3 mol/l, 1000 ml bottle Potassium chlorid solution 3 mol/l, 10 l PolyCube All 10 l package with attached drain cock Order No. 10 65 14100 10 65 16100 10 65 13010 10 65 13100 co d e b e w WW11M003 Buffer Solutions in the Bag, WINLAB® For easy, safe and clean calibration of your pH electrodes. Using these buffer solutions in the bag is the key to successful calibration because the bag will be opened only immediately before you start to calibrate so that the buffer solu- tions are always fresh and pure. The respective pH and temperature reference values are printed on each bag. Each batch includes a test certificate. 2 bags of purified water are included in the delivery to allow for intermediate rinsing. The cardboard stand ensures the safe stand of the bag during calibration. co d e b e w WW5PT076 Article Buffer solutions in the bag Kit of 20 bags of 25 ml each comprising: 6 × buffer solution pH 7.00 6 × buffer solution pH 4.01 6 × buffer solution pH 10 2 × purified water 1 × cardboard stand, and test certificate for the batch Order No. 10 03 04710 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 905

907

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WW5PT012 pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories Electrode Accessories, WINLAB® Electrode storage bottle The proven solution to the problem of properly storing your pH electrodes. Fill the bottle with 3 moles of KCL solution and insert the electrode through the special seal, so that the electrode is well immersed in the KCL solution. This ensures that the electrode membrane is sealed in an airtight environment surrounded by the correct electrolyte. Article 1 Electrode storage bottle 250 ml Spare KCl solution, 3 mol, 250 ml incl. screw cap, special seal, 250 ml 3 mol KCL solution Order No. 61 03 80136 61 03 80150 Electrode Storage Rack For the storage of pH electrodes. Being able to be brought in up to 5 pH laboratory elec- trodes into the glass vessels provided for it with special seal of PTFE/silicone in this rack. So pH electrodes are always stored correctly uprightly and in the suitable electrolyte. 1 2 3 Article 2 Electrode storage rack Steel wire plastic-coated, 5 storage bottles with screw caps and Order No. 10 03 80200 PTFE/silicone seals, 250 ml 3 mol KCl-solution 3 WinLab® buffer solutions with test certificate acc. to EN 10204-2.3 Article pH value at 20°C Volume ml 500 1000 500 1000 500 1000 500 1000 Order No. 61 03 04044 61 03 04054 61 03 07044 61 03 07054 61 03 09044 61 03 09054 61 03 10044 61 03 10054 Buffer solution Buffer solution Buffer solution Buffer solution Buffer solution Buffer solution Buffer solution Buffer solution 4.00 4.00 7.00 7.00 9.00 9.00 10.00 10.00 4 Technical buffer solutions 4 4 Coloured buffer solutions for simple and better recognition of the different pH-values. In practical work and storage bottle. With this, you can calibrate directly in the integrated small vessel (s.Foto). Article pH value at 25°C Buffer solution Buffer solution Buffer solution 4.01 7.00 10.00 Volume ml 1000 1000 1000 5 Cleaning solutions for pH electrodes Article For removing protein layers1), 250 ml For removing protein layers1), 500 ml Diaphragm cleaner 250 ml Spare KCl solution, 3 mol, 250 ml 1) contains a pepsin/hydrochloric acid mixture Corrosion Measuring Cell, Meinsberg Order No. 10 03 14054 10 03 17054 10 03 19054 Order No. 61 03 98250 61 03 98500 61 03 97250 61 03 80150 Thermostable measuring cell for conducting corrosion and general electrochemical tests in the laboratory, consisting of a double-wall cell vessel (max. capacity 500 ml), installation plate, sample holder (working electrode), platinum backplate electrode, current key and intermediate vessel. Corrosion measuring cell Article 6 KMZ 5 corrosion measuring cell without reference electrode Order No. 61 90 70015 Accessories and spare parts Article KE11NSK7: reference electrode Kalomel SE11NSK7: reference electrode Ag/AgCl Backplate electrode: platinum plate 4 cm2 Haber Lugging capillary for KMZ 3/5; NS 19 Current key: electrolyte bridge for KMZ 3/5 with single way stopcock NS 7 Intermediate vessel for electrolyte bridge Cell vessel KMZ 5: glass vessel with built-in plate Thermometer: 0 – 100°C, ground joint NS 14.5 KPG stirrer: Shaft and socket, ground joint NS 29 Order No. 61 90 70003 61 90 70006 61 90 70001 10 90 70002 61 90 70004 61 90 70005 61 90 70009 61 90 70010 61 90 70011 5 co d e b e w WW37Z003 6 906

908

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories Reference Electrodes, Meinsberg Reference electrodes Ideal for measurements in small volumes and for special applications in laboratory ana- lytics Standard version: 155 mm shaft lenght, Ø 5 mm, ceramic diaphragm, 4 mm banana jack. Article 1 Reference electrode KE11 co d e b e w WW37Z004 -5 – 60°C, Hg/Hg2Cl2 cartridge, fluid electrolyte (saturated, refil- lable) with KCl reserve Reference electrode SE11 -5 – 80°C, Ag/AgCl sintering body, fluid electrolyte (saturated, refillable) with KCl reserve Reference electrode HgE11 -5 – 60°C, Hg/Hg2SO4 cartridge, fluid electrolyte (saturated, re- fillable) with KCl reserve Reference electrode HgO11 -5 – 60°C, Hg/HgO cartridge, fluid electrolyte (saturated, refilla- ble) with KCl reserve Connection cables for reference electrodes Article Koax1 banana plug/stripped end, 1 m MK1 banana plug/stripped end, 1 m MK2 banana plug/banana plug, 1 m Order No. 10 90 71000 10 90 71100 10 90 71110 10 90 71111 Order No. 10 90 71001 10 90 71011 10 90 71021 1 pH-Tester Kit multi, Phoenix Instrument Tester to measure pH/mVcond/TDS/salinity and temperature, with replacable sensor, kit incl. all buffer solution and conductivity standards, batteries. EC-15-multi: • Automatic calibration function with stability indication • IP 67 waterproofed • Replaceable sensor • Battery indicator • Multi-color backlight for status indication co d e b e w WWSB5033 Technical data: pH meas. range: pH resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognition: Electrode condition alarm: mV meas. range: mV resolution: Cond. meas. range: Cond. resolution: Cal. standard recognition: TDS meas. range: TDS rel. accuracy: Temperature range: Resolution: Auto off: Warranty instrument/sensor: Dimension (Ø × L): Weight: -2 to 16 0.01 1 – 3 5 USA buffer yes ± 1000 0.1/1 0 – 200 µs, 0 – 2000 µS, 0 – 20 mS Automatic scale 84.1413 µS, 12.88 mS 0,1 ppm – 10 ppt ± 1% full scale 0 to 50°C 0.1°C after 8 Min. 2 years/6 months 35 × 175 mm 130 g Article Tester kit EC-15-multi Replacement electrode EC-15-multi Order No. 10 13 79015 10 13 79433 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 907

909

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSB5034 1 2 908 pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories Tester-Kit Conductivity/TDS and Temperature, Phoenix Instrument Tester kit EC-10 cond Tester Kit to measure conductivity/TDS and temperature, Kit incl. conductivity standards and batteries. EC-10-cond: • Large LCD display • IP 67 waterproof protection • Buffers used for calibration indication • Measurement stability indicator • Automatic temperature compensation • 4 × 1,5 V AAA batteries for long working time, compatible with rechargeable batteries Technical data: Meas. range cond.: Resolution cond.: Calibration points: Cal. standard recognition: Meas. range TDS: Rel. accuracy TDS: Auto off: Electrode condition alarm Warranty instrument/sensor: Dimension (Ø × L): Weight: Article 1 Tester EC-10-cond 0 – 2000 µS, 0 – 20 mS Automatic scale 1 – 2 1413 µS, 12.88 mS 0.1 ppm – 10 ppt ± 1% full scale after 8 min. yes 1 year/6 months 35 × 175 mm 120 g Order No. 10 13 72110 Tester EC-15-cond Tester to measure conductivity/TDS and temperature, with replacable sensor, kit incl. conductivity standards and batteries. EC-15-cond: • Automatic calibration function with stability indication • IP 67 waterproofed • Replaceable sensor • Battery indicator • Multi-color backlight for status indication Technical data: Meas. range cond.: Resolution cond.: Calibration points: Cal. standard recognition: Meas. range TDS: Relative accuracy TDS: Temperature range: Resolution: Auto off: Warranty instrument/sensor: Dimension (Ø × L): Weight: Article 2 Tester kit EC-15 cond Replacement conductivity cell 0 – 200 µs, 0 – 2000 µS, 0 – 20 mS 1% value reading 1 – 3 84.1413 µS, 12.88 mS 0.1 ppm – 10 ppt ± 1% full scale 0 – 50°C 0.1°C after 8 Min. 2 years/6 months 35 × 175 mm 130 g Order No. 10 13 72115 10 13 72119 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Multi-Parameter Hand-held Meter SD 335 Multi, Lovibond® The high-quality multi-parameter instrument is ideally suited for the precise determination of pH, redox, temperature, conductivity/TDS/salt as well as saturation and concentration of dissolved oxygen (O2). Due to galvanic isolation, up to three parameters can be deter- mined and displayed simultaneously. The combination of user-friendly operation and graphic LCD display makes this portable measuring instrument the ideal companion for the daily use in water analysis. Measurement data including time stamp and measuring point ID can be recorded with the data logger at a fixed time interval or manually at the push of a button. Via the micro-USB interface, the data can be easily transferred to a computer and processed without the need of additional software. The setting of alarm limits for parameter monitoring completes the range of functions. • Intuitive user interface thanks to graphical display • Simultaneous determination of up to three parameters • Selection between multi-parameter display or single value display • Micro-USB port for software-free data transfer and power supply • Robust protective armouring with two electrode holders Continued on next page

910

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSE2016 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments • Automatic recognition of standard solutions • Evaluation of the sensor quality after calibration Rechargeable NiMH batteries Scope of delivery in carrying case: instrument in protective armouring incl. electrode holder, pH/temp.-electrode type 231, pH buffer: 4.01 / 7.00 / 10.01, storage solution for pH/ORP electrodes, 3 × AAA-NiMH rechargeable batteries, user manual, additional ac- cessories depending on the set Technical data: Measuring range: Display: pH: -2.00 – 16.00 pH Redox: ± 2000 mV Conductivity: 0.000 – 500 mS/cm TDS: 0.000 – 500 g/l Salinity: 0.0 – 70.0 PSU (g/kg) O2-concentration: 0.00 – 50.00 mg/l O2-saturation: 0:0 – 500.0% Temperature: -10.0 – 110.0°C Backlit LCD with graphical display Power supply: Data logger (8 GB storage): 3 × AAA NiMH rechargeable batteries, Micro-USB Manual logger by keystroke Automatic logger, cyclic, time interval adjustable Auto-off: yes Auto. temperature compensation:yes Languages: Dimensions: Weight: Protection class: Conformity: German, English, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Chinese 164 × 100 × 37 mm 310 g (incl. batteries and protective armouring) IP 67 CE, RoHS, WEEE Article SD 335 Multi (set 1): pH / Con / Temp. Additional accessories: • Conductivity electrode LC 12 (< 200 mS/cm) • Conductivity solution 1413 µS/cm (NIST) SD 335 Multi (set 2): pH / O2 / Temp. Additional accessories: • Galvanic oxygen sensor, 2 m cable • Refill electrolyte and replaceable membrane heads • Calibration bottle with sponge SD 335 Multi (set 3): pH / Con / O2 / Temp. Additional accessories: • Conductivity electrode LC 12 (< 200 mS/cm) • Conductivity solution 1413 µS/cm (NIST) • Galvanic oxygen sensor, 2 m cable • Refill electrolyte and replaceable membrane heads • Calibration bottle with sponge Order No. 10 77 13351 10 77 13352 10 77 13353 Portable Multiparameter Meters, METTLER TOLEDO Portable pH/conductivity meter SevenGo Duo™– SG23 • 2-channel meter for measuring pH, mV, conductivity, TDS, salinity, and specific resist- ance • Intelligent sensor management (ISM®) for easy and safe operation • Water- and dust-proof (IP67) • Data memory for 99 GLP data records Article SG23-B Meter SG23-ELK Electrode kit with InLab® Expert Pro-ISM and InLab® 738-ISM, Order No. 10 50 02600 10 50 02601 1.8 m cable SG23-FK2 Field kit with InLab® Expert Pro-ISM and InLab® 738-ISM, 1.8 m cable SG23-FK5 Field kit with InLab® Expert Pro-ISM and InLab® 738-ISM, 10 50 02602 10 50 02603 5 m cable More 2-channel-device combinations, accessories, electrodes, calibration solutions etc. on request! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 909

911

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSB5031 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Multiparameter (pH, Conductivity) Measuring Instruments, Phoenix Instrument Innovative measurement technology “Made in Europe” – this is what the new pocket and laboratory measuring instruments of the Phoenix Instrument EC series offer. During the development, the main focus was put on user-friendliness and the technical features of the instruments. The pH electrodes and conductivity cells are produced in Switzerland by experienced specialists. Portable multimeter EC-21-multi/EC-26-multi During the new development of the EC-21/EC-26 series, particular emphasis was placed on easy handling during daily routine. The high-resolution color display guides the user intuitively through the measurement and calibration process. EC-21 multi • High-resolution color display, adjustable brightness • DHS-function, pH electrodes with internal chip • Digital or normal analog pH-electrodes can be used • Display of pH/mV, conductivity/TDS and temperature values • Automatic pH calibration up to 3 points • Automatic LF-calibration up to 5 points • Automatic ORP 1-point calibration • Selectable stability parameter (low-medium-high) • Automatic and manual temperature compensation • Protection class IP 57 • Supplied in a robust carrying case with all accessories ... additionally for the EC-26 multi • GLP-function • Data logger (automatic or manual) 1000 data strings • Connection to PC via micro-USB • Free DATA LINK + • Automatic brightness regulation Technische Daten: pH measuring range: Resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognized: EC-21 multi 0.00 – 14.00 pH 0.1/0.01 pH 1 – 3 USA, NIST and user defined ±1000 mV 1 mV mV measuring range: Resolution: Conductivity measuring range: 0.00 – 200 mS Resolution: Calibration points: Cell constant selectable: Temperature range: Resolution: TDS measuring range: GLP: CALDUE: Memory: Output: IP-class: Dimensions (D×W×H): Warranty instrument: 0.1/1 µS 0.01/0.1 mS 1 – 5 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ 0.0 – 100°C 0.1 / ± 0,5°C 0.1 mg/l – 200 g/l – no – – IP 57 185 × 85 × 45 mm / 400 g 3 years EC-26-multi -2.00 – 16.00 pH 0.1/0.01 pH 1 – 3 USA, NIST and user defined 1000 – 1900 mV 0.1/1 mV 0.00 – 200 mS 0.01/0.1/1 µS 0.01/0.1 mS 1 – 5 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ -10 – 110°C 0.1 / ± 0,5°C 0.1 mg/l – 200 g/l yes yes 1000 data Micro USB IP 57 185 × 85 × 45 mm / 400 g 3 years Article 1 EC-21-multi-0 Kit without pH electrode, included cond. cell 2301 T, temperature probe, cable S7/BNC, calibration standards, carrying case and accessories EC-21-multi-1 Kit include pH electrode 201T and cond. Cell 2301T, calibration stan- dards, carrying case and accessories EC-21-multi-5 Kit include pH electrode 201T DHS and cond. Cell 2301T, calibration standards, carrying case and accessories 2 EC-26 multi-0 Kit without pH electrode, included cond. cell 2301 T, temperature pro- be, cabel S7/BNC calibration standards, carrying case, power supply and accessories, software PC-Link, USB cable EC-26 multi-1 Kit include pH-electrode 201T and cell 2301T, calibration standards, carrying case, power supply and accessories, software PC-Link, USB cable EC-26 multi-5 Kit include pH-electrode 201T DHS and cell 2301T, calibration stan- dards, carrying case, power supply and accessories, software PC-Link, USB cable Order No. 10 13 70210 10 13 70213 10 13 70215 10 13 70260 10 13 70261 10 13 70265 Continued on next page 1 2 910

912

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments 3 Basic Bench top multiparameter EC-31-multi/EC-36-multi During the new development of the EC-21/EC-26 series, particular emphasis was placed on easy handling during daily routine. The high-resolution color display guides the user intuitively through the measurement and calibration process. EC-31 multi • High-resolution color display, adjustable brightness • DHS-function, pH electrodes with internal chip • Digital or normal analog pH-electrodes can be used • Display of pH/mV, conductivity/TDS and temperature values • Automatic pH calibration up to 3 points • Automatic LF-calibration up to 5 points • Automatic ORP 1-point calibration • Selectable stability parameter (low-medium-high) • Automatic and manual temperature compensation • Protection class IP 54 ... additionally for the EC-36 multi • GLP-function • Data logger (automatic or manual) 1000 data strings • Connection to PC via micro-USB • Free DATA LINK + Technical data: pH measuring range: Resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognized: EC-31-multi 0.00 – 14.00 pH 0.1/0.01 pH 1 – 3 USA, NIST and user defined ±1.000 mV 1 mV mV measuring range: Resolution: Conduction measuring range:0.00 – 200 mS Resolution: Calibration points: Cell constant selectable: Temperature range: Resolution: TDS measuring range: GLP: CALDUE: Memory: Output: IP-class: Dimensions: Warranty instrument: 0.1/1 µS 0.01/0.1 mS 1 – 5 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ 0.0 – 100°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C 0.1 mg/l – 200 g/l – no – – IP 54 170 × 145 × 60 mm / 530 g 3 years EC-36-multi -2.00 – 16.00 pH 0.1/0.01 pH 1 – 3 USA, NIST and user defined 1000 – 1900 mV 0.1/1 mV 0.00 – 200 mS 0.01/0.1/1 µS 0.01/0.1 mS 1 – 5 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ -10 – 110°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C 0.1 mg/l – 200 g/l yes yes 1000 data Micro USB IP 54 170 × 145 × 60 mm / 530 g 3 years 3 Article EC-31 multi 0 Kit without pH electrode, included cond. cell 2301 T with ATC, Order No. 10 13 70310 with temperatureprobe NT 55, BNC/S7 1 m cable, pH buffer and conductivity standard, electrode holder. EC-31 multi 1 Kit include pH electrode 201T and cond. Cell 2301T with ATC, pH buffer and conductivity standard, electrode holder. pH buf- fer and conductivity standard, electrode holder. 10 13 70331 EC-31 multi 5 Kit include pH electrode 201T DHS and cond. Cell 2301T with 10 13 70315 ATC, pH buffer and conductivity standard, electrode holder. EC-36 multi 0 Kit without pH electrode, included cond. cell 2301 T with ATC, with temperatureprobe NT 55, BNC/S7 1mt cable, power sup- ply, software PC-Link, pH buffer and conductivity standard, carrying case and accessories. EC-36 multi-1 Kit include pH electrode 201T and cond. Cell 2301T with ATC, pH buffer and conductivity standard, electrode holder, power supply, software PC-Link, USB- cable. 10 13 70360 10 13 70361 EC-36 multi-5 Kit include pH electrode 201T DHS and cond. Cell 2301T with 10 13 70365 ATC, pH buffer and conductivity standard, electrode holder, power supply, software PC-Link, USB- cable. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 911 Continued on next page

913

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry 1 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Professional bench top multiparameter EC-45 multi The large color display easy on to read shows all information necessary information about measurement, calibration,standards, cell condition, GLP. Anyone can use this meter eas- ily with its intuitive menu available in up to 8 languages in the EC-45-Multi. Easy to learn. Up to 5-point pH-calibration and up to 4-point Conductivty calibration with automatic recognition of all standards. Icon support for all calibration functions and advanced elec- trode diagnostics. Easy to calibrate. All functions can be controlled in an intuitive and easy way. Instrument will be delivered with a stirrer. EC-45 multi • Large color display with indication of Calibration Buffers and measurement’s stability • DHS-function, pH electrodes with internal chip • Indication stability of the measurement with icon • IP54 protection • 3 years instrument warranty • Display pH/mV and Temperature, COND/TDS/Salinity/Resistivity and Temperature si- multaneously • Selectable Resolution: 0,1/0,01/0,001 pH; Auto range for COND • GLP and IQ-OQ manual available • Selectable cell constant allows for use with 2 or 4 plate cell • Memory with re-call of last calibration date and time and information of electrode’s life • CAL DUE: set of calibration frequency for high quality of measurements • Stability Parameter (Low-Med-High) for high accuracy measurement • Non-volatile memory holds up to 1000 data points with date and time in automatic (Data logger) or manual • 2 × USB ports to transfer data at PC or printer and for external keyboard • Software PC-Link to download data (included) 1 912 -2 – 20 pH 0.1 / 0.01 / 0.001 pH 1 – 5 USA, NIST, user defined ±2000/ 0.1/1 mV 0.00 – 20.00/200.0/2000 µS / 2.00/20.00/200.0/1000 mS ±1% full scale manual or automatic 1 to 4 Technical data: pH meas. range: Resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognized: mV meas. range/resolution: Cond. measuring range: Accuracy: Temperature compensation: Calibration points cond.: Calibration standards recognized: 84, 1413 µS / 12.88, 111.8 mS, user defined Cell constant selectable: TDS measuring range: TDS factor: Accuracy TDS: Temperature range: Accuracy/resolution temp.: Temperature calibration: GLP: CALDUE: Memory: Interputs: Protection class: Power supply: Dimensions: 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ 0.1 mg/l – 500 g/l 0.40 – 1.00 ±1% full scale -20 – 120°C 0.1/±0.2°C yes yes, with date and time yes yes, 1000 data 2 × USB, RS-232 IP 54 AC/DC adptor 12 V / 1000 mA 165 × 195 × 68 mm, 1050 g without stirrer Article EC-45 multi 2 Kit without electrode and cell, with cable S7/BNC, temp. pro- be NT55, buffer solutions pH 7 and 4, cond. standards 1413 µS and 12,88 mS, electrode holder, power supply and acces- sories, incl. magnetic stirrer EC-45 multi 3 Kit with pH-electrode XS STANDARD S7, cell glass VPT 80/1 with ATC, cable S7/BNC 1 m, buffer solutions pH 7 and pH 4, cond. standards 1413 µS and 12,88 mS, power supply and accessories, incl. magnetic stirrer EC-45-multi-5 Kit with pH-electrode STANDARD T - BNC DHS, cond.-cell glass VPT 80/1 with ATC, pH puffer pH 7 and pH 4, cond.- standards 1413 µS and 12,88 mS, accessories, with magnetic stirrer, DHS-function Order No. 10 13 71452 10 13 71453 10 13 70455 Continued on next page

914

pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments pH electrodes for general applications Measuring Systems Electrochemistry Article 2 pH electrode Gel pH electrode, gel-filled with ceramic diaphragm 3 pH electrode Polymer pH electrode, polymer-filled with open pore diaphragm 4 pH electrode Polymer Tip pH electrode, polymer-filled with double open pore diaphragm 5 pH electrode Standard pH standard electrode with ceramic diaphragm pH electrode Standard HA pH electrode Standard HF pH electrode Standard BNC pH electrode Standard DIN like Standard, with fix cable DIN pH electrode Standard T-BNC pH electrode Standard T DIN pH electrode Polymer Plast pH electrode, polymer-filled with 1 open pore diaphragm and 1 ceramic like Standard, with fix cable BNC and temperature sensor like Standard, with fix cable DIN and temperature sensor like Standard, with fix cable BNC like Standard, minimal Alkali error like Standard, for samples with HF diaphragm like Polymer Plast, with fix cable DIN like Polymer Plast, with fix cable BNC pH electrode Polymer Plast BNC pH electrode Polymer Plast DIN 6 pH electrode 201 T pH electrode with epoxy body, temperature sensor and fix cable BNC pH electrode 201 T DIN pH electrode with epoxy body, temperature sensor and fix cable DIN pH electrode Flat pH electrode for surface measurements, 3-hole diaphragm with Teflon 7 pH electrode Flow pH electrode for viscous samples and low ion media 8 pH electrode Semi-Micro pH electrode for small volume samples pH electrode Micro pH electrode for small volume samples pH electrode Micro P pH electrode for small volume samples with mit protein, electrolyte gly- Order No. 10 13 71204 10 13 71223 10 13 71443 10 13 71363 10 13 71423 10 13 71433 10 13 71263 10 13 71273 10 13 71473 2 3 4 10 13 71463 10 13 71493 10 13 71503 10 13 71513 10 13 71022 10 13 71249 10 13 71413 10 13 71373 10 13 71383 10 13 71213 10 13 71253 5 6 7 8 cerin pH electrode Gel Plast BNC pH electrode with epoxy body, fix BNC-cable and double ceramic dia- 10 13 75223 phragm Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 913

915

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWP1J016 1 2 co d e b e w 914 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Multi-Parameter Portable Meters MultiLine®, WTW® MultiLine® IDS – wireless ready: Multi 3620 IDS and Multi 3630 IDS The new wireless ready MultiLine® IDS handheld devices for intelligent digital IDS sen- sors are state-of-the-art systems for mobile multi-parameter measurement. They stand out among their competitors by the fact that the signal processing is completely located in the sensor. The sensor independently logs on with the unit and transmits clearly iden- tifiable data and the current calibration. This prevents data mix-up. The digital signal transmission allows for long cables for all parameters. The unique QSC function for IDS pH sensors makes it possible to evaluate the current sensor status. CMC function for checking the optimum pH measuring range. Large portfolio of IDS-pH, conductivity, ox- ygen and turbidity sensors for almost all types of applications. Watertight, universal Quick-Lock connectors at the unit protect the sensors from loss. The sturdy, watertight (IP 67) MultiLine® handheld instruments have a high-resolution graphic color display for optimum operation and information. With special silicone mem- brane keypad for excellent operation comfort, and USB interface for data transfer to USB memory sticks or printers. Economical operation thanks to NIMH rechargeable batteries. When IDS plug head sensors and IDS remote modules are used, wireless measuring of up to three parameters is possible, depending on the number of channels. In addition, these devices are able to program and read the OxiTop-IDS heads. Available as portable set complete with sensors and accessories for operation in the field. Multi 3620 IDS: Two measurement channels for simultaneous parallel measurement with two similar or different sensors and parameters. Multi 3630 IDS: Three measurement channels for simultaneous parallel measurement with up to three similar or different sensors and parameters. Also appropriate for MPP IDS depth probes. Specifications MultiLine® IDS multi-parameter instruments Display: Measuring range: depending on the respective IDS sensor Data storage: TFT colour graphics Interface: Power supply: manually or automatical logger, 10,000 records (measuring values, temperature, date, time, ID) USB-A (Stick, selected printer), Mini USB (PC) Power supply with charging function or 4 × 1.2 V NiMH batteries including SenTix® 940, TetraCon® Article 1 Multi 3620 IDS SET C Multi 3620 IDS SET G 2 Multi 3630 IDS SET F including SenTix® 940-3, FDO® 925-3, TetraCon® 925-3 including SenTix® 940, FDO® 925, TetraCon® 925 Matching IDS sensors see page 904. Order No. 10 81 23620 10 81 23621 10 81 23622 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

916

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWP1J027 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Multi-Parameter Portable Meter MultiLine® Multi 3510 IDS, WTW® Multi-parameter portable meter Multi 3510 IDS Using intelligent digital sensors, the new Multi 3510 IDS is a perfect entry-level meter for state-of-the-art measurement of the standard parameters pH, conductivity, dissolved ox- ygen, and turbidity. It has one universal measuring channel for all parameters. The robust, water-tight design makes it a perfect instrument for all portable applications. With com- fortable menu control via a backlit graphic display, it makes working easy also in adverse lighting conditions. Using the keyboard with gloves is no problem. Furthermore, the meter is ready for the application with IDS remote modules. • Automatic log-in of the sensor at the meter for non-interchangeable transmission of characteristics and the current calibration • Confusion-proof thanks to digital signal transmission; long cables possible for all pa- rameters • With QSC function for IDS pH sensors to allow for assessment of the current sensor status • Optimum monitoring of the pH measuring range thanks to CMC function • Ready for remote application for wireless measuring • Available as field case sets with sensors and accessories Technical data: Display: Measuring chann- nels: Memory: Logger: Interface: Power supply: Protection class: LCD graphic, backlit 1 (universal) for IDS pH-electrodes, conductivity cells, optical D.O. sensor FDO® 925, turbidity sensor VisoTurb 900-P manual 200/4500 automatic manual/time-controlled Mini USB-B 4 × 1,5 V AA (supplied) or 4 × 1,2 V NiMH-Akku, via USB IP 67 Article Multi 3510 Single meter in a case including accessories Multi 3510 SET 1 SenTix® 940 Multi 3510 SET 3 TetraCon® 925 Multi 3510 SET 4 FDO® 925-1.5 Multi 3510 SET KS1 Set including accessories and armor SM Pro Order No. 10 81 22350 10 81 22351 10 81 22353 10 81 22354 10 81 22355 IDS-WLM – Wireless modules for IDS sensors Wireless measurement of pH, redox, conductivity and turbidity with IDS plug head sen- sors and remote modules. Plug the remote module on the IDS plug head sensor, actuate the remote connection at the device – and you’re ready to go! Change the sensor whenever you like, or use a spe- cific module for every sensor. No cable, no hassle, full freedom of movement in areas where cable or meter are inconvenient, even under fume cupboards or safety work- benches. Depending on the number of channels available, the module at the IDS instrument can process one, two, or three parameters simultaneously. The following instruments are wire- less-ready: the new MultiLine 3510 IDS, 3620 IDS, 3630 IDS and the inoLab® Multi 9310 IDS, 9620 IDS and 9630 IDS. Technical data: Radio transmission: Range: Power supply: Continuous operating times: Bluetooth LE approx. 10 m Re-chargeable LiPo Akku 230mAh IDS pH electrodes: 60 h IDS ORP electrodes: 60 h IDS Conductivity cells: 30 h (conductivity up to 1S) IDS FDO sensor: 9 h IDS Turbidity sensor: 5 h RGB LED IP43 All WTW® IDS-sensors with plug head Signal: Protection class: Usable sensores: IDS WLM-S wireless module for plug head sensor IDS WLM-S wireless module for IDS meter Article WLM-Charger USB charger DS WLM Kit Kit consisting of wireless module for sensor and meter (one of for wireless modules Order No. 10 81 28141 10 81 28142 10 81 28143 10 81 28144 each), USB charger and universal USB power supply co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 915

917

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWP1J022 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments inoLab® Series, WTW® inoLab® laboratory instruments are perfectly adapted for use in modern laboratories. They have clearly arranged, user-friendly keypads, smooth surfaces that are easy to clean, and self-explanatory user menus. Depending on the model series, they are available with segment (7110) or backlit black-and-white graphic display (7310) and USB interface. All units come with power pack with an all-purpose connector and practical stand with sen- sor holder. For units with integrated interface, data transmission cable and software are comprised in the delivery. On request, inoLab® units are available in application-specific sets with sensors and ac- cessories. All units can be operated either with power pack or with battery. The inoLab® 7310 has an integrated memory and interface as a standard; optionally, it is available with integrated 58 mm thermotransfer printer for direct documentation of results in compliance with GLP. 1 inoLab® pH 7110 A simple pH/mV laboratory measuring instrument for all tasks where the focus is on get- ting reliable measured values fast and without hassle. A large, clearly legible LCD segment display makes it easy to read to data, the clearly arranged keypad ensures smooth oper- ation. The automatic AutoRead function provides for correct, reproducible measuring results. An integrated timer reminds the user when the next calibration is due. Technische Data: pH: all values ±1 digit -2.0 to 20.0 ±0.1 pH -2.00 to 20.00 ±0.01 pH -2.000 to 19.999 ±0.005 pH ± (1200.0 ± 0.3) mV ± (2000 ±1) mV 1-, 2- or 3-point WTW technical buffersr or DIN/NIST -5.0 to 105.0°C ±0.1°C mV: Calibration: Temperature: Article inoLab® pH 7110 inoLab® pH 7110 set 2 Device incl. SenTix® 41 and accessories inoLab® pH 7110 set 4 Device incl. SenTix® 81 and accessories Version Single device incl. accessories Order No. 10 81 27110 10 81 27112 10 81 27114 2 inoLab® pH 7310 pH measurement with documentation in compliance with GLP, on request also with inte- grated printer: This is the inoLab® pH 7310 or inoLab® pH 7310P. With state-of-the-art backlit graphic display with user menus for easy, intuitive operation. The mini USB-B in- terface ensures fast data transfer and is used for firmware updates. The integrated mem- ory can store up to 5000 data records with time of day, date, and ID in compliance with GLP. Housing and keypad surfaces are easy to clean. Technical data: pH: mV: Temperature: Calibration: Calibration storage: Display: Data storage: Interface: all values ±1 digit -2.0 to 20.0 ±0.1 pH -2.00 to 20.00 ±0.01 pH -2.000 to 19.999 ±0.005 pH ±(1200.0 ±0.3) mV ±(2500 ±1) mV -5.0 to 105.0°C ±0,1°C 1-, 2-, 3-, 4-, 5-point WTW technical buffer up to 10 calibrations backlit LCD display manual 500/5000 automatic mini USB-B Article Version Single device incl. accessories inoLab® pH 7310 inoLab® pH 7310 set 2 Device incl. SenTix® 41 and accessories inoLab® pH 7310 Set 4 Device incl. SenTix® 41 and accessories inoLab® pH 7310P Device with integrated printer incl. accessories Order No. 10 81 27310 10 81 27312 10 81 27314 10 81 27316 3 inoLab® Cond 7110 The inoLab® Cond 7110 has all key functions for conductivity measurement, such as adjustable reference temperature and various methods for temperature compensation. A large, clearly legible LCD segment display makes it easy to read to data, the clearly ar- ranged keypad ensures smooth operation. The automatic AutoRead function provides for correct, reproducible measuring results. Technical data: Conductivity: all values ±1 digit 0.00 to 1000 mS/cm ±0.5 % of value 0.00 to 19.99 µS/cm for k= 0,1 cm-1 0.0 to 70.0 (acc. to IOT) -25.0 to 125.0°C ±0.1°C Salinity: Temperature: Continued on next page 1 2 916

918

pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Measuring Systems Electrochemistry Cell constants: 0.450 to 0.500 cm-1 0.09 to 0.110 cm-1 0.800 to 0.880 cm-1 automatic 20°C/25°C AutoRead: Tref: Temperature compensation: nLF, lin 0.000 to 3.000 %, can be switched off Power supply: universal power supply 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 4 × 1,5 V AA or 4 × 1,2 V NiMH rechargeable batteries Article inoLab® Cond 7110 inoLab® Cond 7110 set 1 Device incl. TetraCon® 325 and accessories Version Single device incl. accessories Order No. 10 81 27111 10 81 27113 4 inoLab® Cond 7310 Conductivity measurement with documentation in compliance with GLP, on request also with integrated printer: This is the inoLab® Cond 7310 and the inoLab® Cond 7310P. The inoLab® Cond 7310 can optionally be connected to a wide range of different standard and special conductivity measurement cells and has an automatic and manual temperature compensation function (can also be switched off for measurement pursuant to pharma- copeia) with linear and non-linear function for ultra-pure water and natural water pursuant to EN 27 888. Technical data: Conductivity: additional: all values ±1 digit 0.00 to 1000 mS/cm ±0,5 % from value 0.000 to 1.999 µS/cm, K= 0.01 cm-1 0.00 to 19.99 µS/cm, K= 0.1 cm-1 0.00 to 20 MOhm cm 0.0 to 70.0 (acc. to IOT) 0 to 1999 mg/l, 20 to 199.9 g/l 5.0 to 105.0°C ±0.1°C fix 0,01 cm-1, calibratable 0.450 to 0.500 cm-1 0.800 to 0.880 cm-1, adjustable 0.09 to 0.110 cm-1 0.250 to 25.0 cm-1 1-point 20°C/25°C Calibration: Tref: Temperature compensation: none, nlF, 0.000 to 10.00 %/K Calibration storage: Data storage: Logger: Article up to 10 calibrations manual 500/5000 automatic manual/time-controlled inoLab® Cond 7310 inoLab® Cond 7310 set 2 Device incl. TetraCon® 325 and accessories inoLab® Cond 7310P Order No. 10 81 27311 10 81 27313 Device with integrated printer and accessories 10 81 27317 Version Single device incl. accessories Spezific resistance: Salinity: TDS: Temperature: Cell constants: 3 4 inoLab® Oxi 7310 Dissolved-oxygen measurement with documentation in compliance with GLP, on request also with integrated printer: This is the inoLab® Oxi 7310 and the inoLab® Oxi 7310P. The inoLab® Oxi 7310 works with the time-proven electroplated dissolved-oxygen sensors by WTW, CellOx® 325 and StirrOx® G. A calibration history of up to 10 stored calibration logs provides information on changes in the sensor behavior. Calibration against external standard is possible comprising an automatic compensation of temperature, air pressure, and salinity. Technical data: Dissolved oxygen Concentration: all values ±1 digit 0.00 to 19.99 mg/l ±0.5 % value 0 to 90 mg/l ±0.5 % 0.0 to 199.9 % ±0.5 % from value 0 to 600 % ±0.5 from value 0 to 199.9 hPa, 0 to 1250 hPa -5.0 to 105.0°C ±0.1°C 1-point air calibration or against external standard up to 10 calibrations back-lit LCD manual 500/5000 automatic manual/time-controlled Version Single device incl. accessories Order No. 10 81 27320 10 81 27321 10 81 27324 Device with integrated printer and accessories 10 81 27325 inoLab® Oxi 7310 inoLab® Oxi 7310 set 1 Device incl. CellOx® 325 and accessories inoLab® Oxi 7310 set 4 Device incl. StirrOx® G and accessories inoLab® Oxi 7310P co d e Saturation: Partial pressure: Temperature: Calibration: Calibration storage: Display: Datenspeicher: Logger: Article b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 917

919

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWP1J025 1 2 918 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments inoLab® Multi IDS Series, WTW® The inoLab® Multi IDS series is based on a new concept: The parameter to be measured is not defined by the unit but solely by the respective sensor. Intelligent digital IDS sensors make the inoLab® Multi IDS series perfect all-rounders for every laboratory. With - de- pending on the unit - one to three universal digital inputs, all available WTW® IDS sensors can be linked via a sequential or parallel connection. Whether pH, conductivity, or dis- solved oxygen: Just attach the appropriate sensor to turn your inoLab® Multi into the unit of choice for the respective application. inoLab® Multi 9310 IDS Intelligent digital IDS sensors make the inoLab® Multi 9310 IDS a perfect all-rounder for every laboratory. The universal digital input works with all common laboratory IDS sen- sors. Simply attach the appropriate sensor to turn the inoLab® Multi 9310 into a pH, conductivity, or oxygen measuring instrument. With state-of-the-art backlit graphic dis- play with user menus for easy, intuitive operation. The mini USB-B interface ensures fast data transfer and is used for firmware updates. The integrated memory can store up to 5000 data records with time of day, date, and ID in compliance with GLP. Housing and keypad surfaces are easy to clean. The integrated 58 mm thermotransfer printer available as an option generates durable printouts for direct documentation of the measured data. Use the new wireless modules together with the new IDS plug head sensors. Unit, power pack, data transmission cable, and main connector are comprised in the delivery scope. For technical data and measuring ranges, see the respective IDS sensor. Technical data: Display: Data storage: Logger: Interface: Power supply: back-lit LCD manual 500/5000 automatic manual/time-controlled mini USB-B Universal power supply 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 4 × 1.5 V AA or 4 × 1.2 V NiMH rechargeable batteries Article 1 inoLab® Multi 9310 inoLab® Multi 9310P Version Single device incl. accessories Single device with integrated printer incl. accessories Order No. 10 81 29310 10 81 29311 inoLab® Multi 9310 set 2 Device incl. SenTix® 980 and accessories 10 81 29312 inoLab® Multi 9310 set 3 Device incl. TetraCon® 925 and accessories 10 81 29313 inoLab® Multi 9310 set 4 Device incl. FDO® 925 and accessories 10 81 29314 Seperate IDS sensors see page 904. inoLab® Multi 9620 IDS and inoLab® Multi 9630 IDS Wireless-ready multi-channel meter: • Fail-safe measuring accuracy • Digital sensor identification • Full documentation High-performance technology by WTW® for complex laboratory applications. Two digital inoLab® multi-parameter instruments for IDS sensors for parallel measurement of identical and different parameters. Two (inoLab® Multi 9620 IDS) respectively three sensors (inoLab Multi 9630 IDS) can be connected. A bright colour display protected by a glass plate makes it easy to see the information. The keyboard has an antibacterial coating to help prevent microbial contamination. The instruments stand safely in a zinc die-cast lower housing, optimally shielded against interference. The stop of the high-quality stand can be at the left- or right-hand side, depending on the situation at the individual workplace. Measuring reliability • Wireless-ready for safe data transmission with IDS remote modules • Digital signal transmission eliminates electromagnetic interferences, allocates correct calibration data and provides sensor data • The intelligent sensor rating QSC signals the actual condition of an IDS pH electrode to increase operational reliability • The CMC function for pH visualizes the optimum measuring range and supports correct measurement • Visualization of channels for secure allocation of the sensors and parameters Documentation in compliance with GLP/AQS • Automatic digital recording of sensor data for definite traceability of all values • Optional user administration for access control and documentation • Transfer of all data as .csv format via USB interface to a PC, Excel add-in for formatted pasting into spread sheet (MultiLab Importer, included in delivery or as download) Continued on next page

920

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments • Additionally, output of the stored data in ASCII and *.csv format to USB thumb drive or selected printers Compatible with conventional pH/ORP/ISE measurement • With integratable pH module (accessory) compatible for pH, ISE and redox electrodes with DIN or BNC plug and 4 mm temperature probe Technical data: Unit: Parameters: Measuring ranges: Display: Keypad: Interface: Storage slots: Optional pH module: User administration: Stand: Power supply: inoLab® Multi 9620/9630 IDS 2- or 3-channel pH/ORP/ISE/conductivity/dissolved oxygen/turbidity Defined by the respective IDS electrode Color graphic display with glass shield Antibacterial membrane keypad USB-A (flashdrive, printer), Mini USB-B (PC) Manual 500/automatic 10,000 Yes/yes (in place of a digital input) MultiLab User Stand with left or right-hand side attachment Universal power pack, 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz Article 2 inoLab® Multi 9620 IDS Vers. Single device inoLab® Multi 9620 IDS set C with pH SenTix® 980, conductivity 3 inoLab® Multi 9630 IDS inoLab® Multi 9620 IDS, with sensors TetraCon® 925 Single device with pH SenTix® 980, conductivity TetraCon® 925 FDO® 925 Order No. 10 81 29620 10 81 29621 10 81 29630 10 81 29622 Seperate IDS sensors see page 904. Adapter Article ADA 94pH/IDS DIN conv. pH/Redox/ISE electrodes with DIN for Order No. 10 81 28131 and banana plug ADA 94pH/IDS BNC conv. pH/Redox/ISE electrodes with BNC 10 81 28132 and banana plug Matching sensors see page 904. 3 i Link-1-wire BT, ORI Mobile Bluetooth measuring head with rechargeable battery for measuring and calibrating the ISM/easySense pH and oxygen electrodes. Connect the iLink either wireless via Blue- tooth or with the iLink cable with a computer or a smartphone. Use the “iSense” or “iSense mobil” software (installed on your computer beforehand) to carry out measurements, cali- bration or maintenance tasks. With “iSense mobil”, sensor diagnoses can be sent via email at the push of a button. The software is available free of charge for iOS and Android op- erating systems. Application in the field: When the electrode in its protective tubular is fastened to the ORI sampling stick (see page 1013) and connected via the ISM connection cable to the iLink- 1-wire BT, you can for example use your smartphone to read the pH value and temperature of the riverbank from a distance, and to save or send it. co d e b e w WWBPE013 Article i Link-1-wire BT InPro4260/120/Pt100 pH combination electrode (ExII 1/2G EEx ia IIc T6/T5/T4/T3) InPro 6850i/12/120 ISM oxygen sensor EasySense pH 31 pH electrode EasySense O2 21-Sensor EasySense ORP 41 Redox-Elektrode Order No. 10 22 55211 10 22 55212 10 22 55213 10 22 55214 10 22 55215 10 22 55216 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 919

921

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WW2VA022 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Multi-parameter Handheld Meter, Labor-Pilz/Endress+Hauser 1 Liquiline Mobile Reliable measurement control with Liquiline Mobile CML18 – wherever and whenever you want The Memosens multi-parameter handheld measuring device from Endress + Hauser en- ables simple and safe control of pH, redox, conductivity and dissolved oxygen, including temperature measurement. Thanks to Memosens technology, switching between different sensors is quick and easy. The device immediately recognizes which sensor is connected, automatically loads all saved sensor data and directly displays the correct measured value. Sensor adjustment on site is no longer necessary and instead can be carried out conveniently in the laboratory or in the workshop. Do you want to control your process over a longer period of time? Use Liquiline Mobile as a data logger and save over 10,000 measurements with time and date stamps. Liquiline Mobile CML18 can be easily operated via the intuitive SmartBlue app. In addition, Liquiline Mobile CML18 has an integrated wireless charging function that enables induc- tive charging with a Qi-certified charger. Just as easy as with your smartphone Technical data: Display: Measurement: Data logger: Output: 1,5 ″ OLED dependent on Memosens electrode manuel or time logger for more than 10,000 measurements with date and time stamp Bluetooth with Endress+Hauser SmartBlue App (free of charge) 3 5 6 1 4 920 Article Memosens multi-parameter handheld meter Liquiline Mobile Memosens multi-parameter handheld meter Liquiline Mobile Order No. 10 47 41801 10 47 41802 with wireless charger (induction charging pad) 2 Accessories Article 2 Memosens pH electrode CPL51E with plastic shaft Technical data: Order No. 10 47 40051 Application: Sensor type: Measuring range pH: Measuring range temp.: Length: 120 mm Electrolyte: Diaphragm: universal, water, waste water Memosens 0 up to 14 pH -5 up to 80°C 120 mm gel, KCl saturated annular gap diaphragm SenSensor cable for CPL51E, 1.5 m 3 Sensor cable for CPL51E, 3 m 10 47 42015 10 47 42030 Buffer solutions The high-quality CPY20 buffers guarantee pH calibration to ultimate precision. They are produced and bottled in the permanent calibration laboratory that has successfully passed the tough DAkkS accreditation (German accreditation authority). The buffers are specified with an accuracy rating of +/-0.02 pH. They are traceable to NIST and PTB standard reference material and contain only FDA-listed preservatives. Using CPY20 you will achieve correct values that you can rely on. Article Buffer solution 4, 250 ml Buffer solution 7, 250 ml 4 Buffer solution 9, 250 ml 5 Buffer solution 4, 1000 ml 6 Buffer solution 7, 1000 ml Buffer solution 9, 1000 ml Order No. 10 47 42004 10 47 42007 10 47 42009 10 47 42014 10 47 42017 10 47 42019

922

pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Memosens Analog Converter, Labor-Pilz/Endress+Hauser Memosens analog converter Reliable monitoring of fermentation processes in laboratories The Memosens Analog Converter CYM17 enables the use of digital pH and oxygen sen- sors in laboratory fermenters without any modifications to the hardware or SOP. The sensors offer you the most reliable data transmission, highest measured value availability and greatest ease of use. Digital Memosens sensors with inductive coupling are resistant to moisture which guarantees maximum accuracy. With the CYM17 Memosens Analog Converter you can now benefit from tried and tested Memosens technology on laboratories too. Simply install the Memosens sensors CPS171D (pH) and COS81D (oxygen) in your existing fermenter and connect them to the converter. Different adapter cables are available for easy and fast conversion. The output signal of the converter corresponds to that of a conventional analog pH or oxygen sensor. Technical data: Output pH: mV signal according to the Nernst equation with 0 mV at pH 7 and -59 mV/pH simulated PT1000 0 to 60 nA with 60 nA at 100% oxygen saturation simulates 22 kOhm NTC Temperature pH: Output oxygen: Temperature oxygen: Article 1 Converter for Memosens sensors pH adapter cable M12 to K8S pH adapter cable M12 to VP DO adapter cable T82 to VP Order No. 10 47 41700 10 47 49094 10 47 49202 10 47 49206 Accessories converter / Memosens digital oxygen sensor Hygienic, optical sensor for stable oxygen measurement over multiple sterilization cycles. Technical data: Sensor type: Measuring range DO: Memosens digital oxygen sensor 0.004 – 26 mg/l 0.05 – 285% SAT 0.1 – 600 hPa Measuring range temp.: -10 – + 140°C (general), 0 – 60°C measurement Autoclavability: Length: Sensor shaft: Process seal: Seal/O-rings: yes, max. 140°C (284°F) 120 mm stainless steel 1.4435 FKM (USP <87>,<88> class VI and FDA) EPDM, FFKM (USP <87>, <88> class VI and FDA Article 2 Optical oxygen sensor COS81D, 120 mm Optical oxygen sensor COS81D, 160 mm Optical oxygen sensor COS81D, 220 mm Optical oxygen sensor COS81D, 320 mm Maintenance kit Memosens COV81 1 piece Number of optical caps: C shape stainless steel 1.4435, 316L EPDM FKM Typ Optische Kappe: Sensor cap material: O-ring material: Process sealing material: 3 Zero-point gel COY8 Ready-to-use gel for validation, calibration, and adjustment of Order No. 10 47 48101 10 47 48102 10 47 48103 10 47 48104 10 47 48110 10 47 48120 oxygen and disinfection sensors. The COY8 zero-point gel is available in different bottle sizes. This version is ideally suited for oxygen sensors with a diameter of 12 mm. 4 Accessories converter / Memosens digital ph sensor Digital pH electrodes for bioreactors and biotechnology production processes Technical data: Sensor type: Measurement range pH: Measurement range temp.: 0 – 100°C, 0 – 14 pH (autoclaving resistant up to 140°C) Length: Electrolyte: Diaphragm: 120 mm ion trap, gel electrolyte 3M KCl, pressurized 1 hygienic diaphragm Memosens Digitaler pH 0 – 14 pH Article Digital pH-glass sensor CPS171D, 120 mm Digital pH-glass sensor CPS171D, 225 mm Digital pH-glass sensor CPS171D, 360 mm Order No. 10 47 41711 10 47 41712 10 47 41713 Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WW2VA023 1 2 4 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 921

923

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWBPE016 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments Mlog – Multitool Logger, ORI Mlog – Multitool Logger The Mlog is an economic and robust multi-parameter measuring system for use in ATEX zone 1 (IP67). All measured parameters are logged at freely definable intervals and trans- mitted wirelessly on request. The Mlog is designed for long-term applications in Ex zone 1 and is powered by a type L1X2-2.4V battery. The connected sensors can be placed in the Ex zone 1. The Mlog is the ideal partner for a wide range of applications from long-term monitoring (e.g. indirect dischargers, storm water tank with overflow, ground water wells) to mobile field measurements. Ideal use for decentralized measuring points - even without an on- site power supply – can also be used as portable measurement system in hazardous environments. The Mlog uses time-proven Mettler-Toledo ISM® sensors which are easy to use, reliable and low-maintenance due to the intelligent status code (pH, redox, conductivity, O2, tem- perature). An analog measuring device, e.g. radar, ultrasound, pressure, or flow, can be connected via the 4-20 mA input. Technical data: ATEX class: Overall protection class: Dimensions (Ø×H); weight: 45 × 390 mm (1.8 in × 15.4 ″); 2.1 kg (without sensors) Temperature range: Mlog II 2G Ex d ib IIB T4 Gb IP 67 Humidity: Electrical specification: Operating voltage range: Wireless communication: Internal data memory: Battery operation range: -10°C to +40°C Storage temperature: -20°C to +40°C (without battery) 5 – 95% Battery pack 2.4 V DC, 9 Ah 2.3 V DC – 2.8 V DC Bluetooth specification 2.0 VF-Power 7 dBm GSM/GPRS (with M-GSM as an option) 8 MB Article MLog Set 1 Data logger incl. 9 Ah battery pack, pen, ring key, manager soft- Order No. 10 22 51060 ware (for data parameterization and assessment) in a sturdy case Please order sensors, connection cable and charger separately! Accessories ISM extension cable 3.0 m ISM extension cable 7.0 m Article Battery, 2.4 V / 9 Ah (type L1X2-2.4V) Charger ECH1 Connection cable, Y cable 1.2 m Protective guard for 2 ISM sensors Protective cover for MLog MGSM modem MLog modem cable 30 cm GSM cable antenna ISM electrodes Article InPro4260/120/Pt100 pH combination electrode (ExII 1/2G EEx ia IIc T6/T5/T4/T3) INPro 700i/12/120/4435 LF combination electrode InPro 6850i/12/120 ISM oxygen sensor EasySense pH 31 pH electrode LF sensor easySense Cond 77 EasySense O2 21-Sensor Mobile Bluetooth measuring head with battery for measuring i Link-1-wire BT Order No. 10 22 55030 10 22 55029 10 22 55078 10 22 55037 10 22 55036 10 22 51081 10 22 51102 10 22 51029 10 22 55075 10 22 50102 Order No. 10 22 55212 10 22 53791 10 22 55213 10 22 55214 10 22 53810 10 22 55215 10 22 55211 922 and calibrating the ISM electrodes

924

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments pH-Tester Kit, Phoenix Instrument Tester kit series to measure pH/mV and temperature. 1 Tester kit EC-10 pH co d e b e w WWSB5029 Tester kit to measure pH/mV and temperature. Kit incl. pH-calibration buffer and batteries. EC-10-pH: • Large LCD display • IP 67 waterproof protection • Buffers used for calibration indication • Measurement stability indicator • Automatic temperature compensation • 4 × 1,5 V AAA batteries for long working time, compatible with rechargeable batteries Technical data: pH meas. range: pH resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognition: Electrode condition alarm: Auto off: Warranty instrument/sensor: Dimension (Ø × L): Weight: Article Tester EC-10-pH 0 bis 14 0,1 1 – 3 5 USA buffer yes after 8 Min. 1 year/6 months 35 × 175 mm 120 g Order No. 10 13 72010 2 Tester EC-15-pH Tester to measure pH/mV and temperature, with replacable sensor, kit incl. pH calibration buffer and batteries. EC-15-pH: • Automatic calibration function with stability indication • Insertion probe (suitable for food application) • IP 67 waterproofed • Replaceable sensor • Battery indicator • Multi-color backlight for status indication Technical data: pH meas. range: pH resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognition: Electrode condition alarm: mV meas. range: mV resolution: Temperature range: Resolution: Auto off: Warranty instrument/sensor: Dimension (Ø × L): Weight: Article Tester EC-15-pH/food Replacement pH-electrode Tester EC-15-Food Replacement spear electrode with ATC EC-15-pH / Food -2 to 16 0.01 1 – 3 5 USA buffer yes ± 1000 0.1/1 0 to 50°C 0.1°C after 8 Min. 2 years/6 months 35 × 175 mm / 35 × 210 mm 130 / 140 g Order No. 10 13 72015 10 13 72017 10 13 72016 10 13 72018 1 2 pH Meters Pocket pH Meter, Amarell Budget-price model with interchangeable electrode, complete with calibration set. Measuring range: Resolution: Operating temp.: Accuracy: 0.0 to 14.0 pH 0.1 pH -5 to +40°C ±0.3 pH Article Pocket pH meter ad 110 pH Spare electrode With substances for standard solutions pH 4.0/pH 6.86/pH 9.18. Order No. 61 10 43520 61 10 43521 co d e b e w WWERJ021 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 923

925

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWJ9J015 1 pH Meters pH Measuring Instruments, Testo / IDL pH tester testo 206-pH Automatic detection of a stable measured value simplifies the measuring routine. Sup- plied with “TopSafe” wallet for outdoor duty or use in tough industrial environments. Advantages: • Insensitive to dirt thanks to TopSafe wallet • 2-line display • Automatic full-scale value detection • 1, 2 or 3 point calibration possible testo 206-pH1, compact pH measuring instrument for liquids Compact, universal and precise pH instrument for measuring liquids. Built-in temperature probe for precise temperature compensation. With maintenance-free gel electrode. testo 206-pH2, compact pH measuring instrument for semi-solid substances With penetration tip for taking measurements in semi-solid substances such as jelly, creame, meat, cheese, marmelade and fruit. Unique combination of pH penetration tip and temperature probe for precise temperature compensation. With maintenance-free gel electrode. testo 206-pH3, pH measuring instrument for connecting external probes Equipped with a BNC socket for connecting all pH probes. When using testo pH probes with built-in temperature sensor, the supplied temperature value is evaluated immediate- ly. In the case of probes without a temperature sensor, the temperature can be set by hand. 0°C to +60°C -20°C to +70°C 1 × CR2032 (3 V button cell) 80 h (Auto Off 10 min.) ABS with TopSafe, IP 68 protection 197 × 33 × 20 mm 69 g or 62 g (206-pH2) pH / °C pH electrode / NTC 2 0 to 14 pH 0.01 pH Technical data: Operating temperature: Storage temperature: Battery type: Battery life: Case: Dimensions: Weight: testo 206-pH1 and pH21): Measured variables: Measurement transducer: Channels: Measurement range pH: Resolution for pH: Resolution for temperature: 0.1°C Accuracy for pH: Accuracy for temperature: Temperature compensation: automatic Display: Probe: ± 0.02 pH ± 0.4°C LCD, 2-line, 0 to 70°C screw-type pH / °C probe modules 2 measurements per second 1) For pH3 please see the data sheet of the corresponding probe. Article pH measuring instrument with universal probe, gel storage cap, TopSafe, testo 206-pH1 instrument set Order No. 61 09 32061 wall holder 1 testo 206-pH2 starter set pH measuring instrument with penetration probe, gel storage cap, Top- Safe, wall holder, pH 4 buffer (250 ml), pH 7 buffer (250 ml), in an alumi- nium case testo 206-pH2 instrument set pH measuring instrument with penetration probe, gel storage cap, Top- 2 Safe, wall holder 2 testo 206-pH3 instrument set pH measuring instrument with BNC connecting socket, TopSafe and wall 61 09 32066 61 09 32062 61 09 32063 holder Accessories Article Spare pH probe pH1 for testo 206, incl. gel storage cap Spare pH probe pH2 for testo 206, incl. gel storage cap pH universal plastic electrode without temperature sensor Spare probe type 14 for testo 206-pH3, incl. gel storage cap Storage cap for testo 206, with KCI gel filling pH buffer solution 4.01, dosing bottle 250 ml pH buffer solution 7.00, dosing bottle 250 ml Order No. 61 09 02061 61 09 02062 61 09 02063 61 09 02064 61 09 42067 61 09 42061 61 09 42063 924

926

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSE2015 pH Meters Hand-held Meter SD 305 pH/ORP, Lovibond® The portable SD 305 pH/ORP hand-held meter is the ideal companion for on-site deter- mination of pH or redox in aqueous media. Whether pH electrodes with an integrated temperature probe or the use of an external temperature probe, the automatic temperature compensation always ensures precise measuring results. Functions such as the automat- ic buffer recognition of standard solutions and DIN buffers greatly simplify measurement and calibration procedures. The internal memory allows the recording of 1000 (manual looger) to 10000 data records (auto logger). The alarm function additionally allows the monitoring of safety-relevant limits, e.g. for the correct dosing of the pH in swimming pools or to control the redox value as a quality parameter in various processes. The intel- ligent sensor diagnosis after calibration and the smart calibration reminder complete the range of functions. • Buffer recognition of Lovibond® standards (pH 4.01 / 7.00 / 10.01) and buffers according to DIN 19266 • Choice between 1-, 2- or 3-point calibration • Evaluation of the sensor quality after each calibration • Alarm function with adjustable limits • Automatic temperature compensation • Auto hold function • Battery status indicator • Redox measurement in mV or mVH according to DIN 38404-6 • Data transfer and evaluation via software possible Scope of delivery in carrying case: instrument in protective armouring incl. electrode holder, pH buffer: 4.01 / 7.00 / 10.01 (set 1 / set 2), 470 mV ORP control solution (set 3), storage solution for pH/ORP electrodes, 2 × AAA batteries and user manual Technical data: Measuring principle: Poteniometry Measuring range: pH: -2.000 – 16.000 pH Redox: ± 2000 mV Temperature: -5.0 – 150.0°C Backlit LCD-Display 2 × AAA-batteries, Interface cable with USB connection Manual logger: 1000 data sets (single value by keystroke) Auto. logger: 10000 data sets (cyclic, time interval: 1 – 3600 s) yes 164 × 100 × 37 mm 302 g (incl. batteries and protective armouring) IP 67 CE, RoHS, WEEE Display: Power supply: Data logger: Auto-Off: Dimensions: Weight: Protection class: Conformity: Article SD 305 pH/ORP (set 1) pH/Temp.-electrode type 231 SD 305 pH/ORP (set 2) pH-electrode type 226 & temperature probe Pt1000 SD 305 pH/ORP (set 3) Redox electrode type 242 & temperature probe Pt1000 Order No. 10 77 13051 10 77 13052 10 77 13053 pH-meter, pH4440, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber pH4440 The pH4440 is intended for measuring pH value, conductivity, and redox potential. During measuring and calibrating, the colour display indicates all key information (measured value, temperature, temperature sensor, electrode status, etc.). The intuitive menu with the time-proven 5-button operation provides for easy handling of the device. Electrodes are available as an option. Technical data: Measurement range: Redox potential Temperature ± 2000 mV -40°C – 100°C Pt1000/NTC30K pH -2 – 16 Conductivity 0.01 µS/cm – 1000 mS/cm (sensor dependent) automatic ± 0.5% 1 point DIN 8 way 0.1 mV 0.1 mV 1 point DIN 0.01 pH 0.01 pH 1 – 5 point DIN Resolution: Precision: Calibration: Input: Power supply: Size (W × D × H): 210 × 150 × 80 mm Weight: 1.1 kg 230 V / 115 V (50/60 Hz) 120 VA 0.1°C ± 0.3°C 4 mm Order No. 10 42 04440 Continued on next page Article pH-meter pH4440 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 925

927

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry 1 2 3 926 pH Meters Accessories Article Buffer solution pH 4.01, 250 ml Buffer solution pH 7.00, 250 ml Buffer solution pH 9.21, 250 ml Single rod electrode with integrated temperature sensor Conductivity electrode 1/cm with Pt 1000 Conductivity electrode 0.1/cm with Pt 1000 Order No. 10 42 04460 10 42 04461 10 42 04462 10 42 04457 10 42 04465 10 42 04466 pH Meters, METTLER TOLEDO FiveGo™, portable pH meter Compact Entry-Level handheld meter with outstanding price/performance ratio; for standard pH and mV/redox measurements. Suitable for a wide range of applications. Technical data: pH-range: mV-range: Temperature range °C: Calibration: Data storage: Power supply: 0.00 – 14.00, resolution: 0.01 pH -1999 – 1999, resolution 1 mV 0.0 – 100.0, resolution: 0.1°C max. 3 points, 4 pre-defined buffer groups 200 data records 4 AAA-batteries 1.5 V/ 4 AAA-Accus 1.2 V Article pH meter FiveGo™ F2-Meter pH-device incl. electrode clip, user manual, 4× batteries 1 pH meter FiveGo™ F2-Standard Kit as F2-Meter, plus 3-in-1 electrode LE438 and buffer bag pH meter FiveGo™ F2-Field Kit as F2-Standard-Kit, plus field bag, 4 sample bottles and buffer bag pH meter FiveGo™ Food-Kit as F2-Field Kit, plus pH-spearhead electrode LE427 Order No. 10 50 06946 10 50 06889 10 50 06882 10 50 06881 More accessories, electrodes, buffer solutions available on request! 2 Portable pH/mV and ion meter Seven2Go Pro S8 Professional portable pH/ion meter (IP67) for highest demands in laboratory, production, and out-of-door measurements. • High-resolution multi-functional display with bright backlighting • Selectable acoustic and optical status indication/alarms • Extensive GxP support with ISM®, expert and user mode • Water-tight micro USB connection for easy data transfer • User menu with a selection of 12 languages • Data logger for 2,000 data records • 5-point calibration, automatic buffer detection/8 pre-defined, 1 freely definable buffer group Also refer to Seven2G S2 for more details Technical data: pH-range: mV-range: Ion range: Temperature range °C: -2.000 – 20.000 / resolution: 0.001 pH -2000 – 2000 mV / resolution: 0.1 in %, ppm, mg/l, mm/l 1.00 × 10-9 to 9.99 × 10+9 -5 – 130°C, resolution: 0.1°C Article Seven2Go Pro S8 Measuring device, electrode clip, hand strap, battery, certificate Seven2Go Pro S8 Standard Kit as S8 meter, plus electrode Expert Pro-ISM-IP67, set of calibrati- Order No. 10 50 02941 10 50 02942 on buffers (bags), sample bottles Seven2Go Pro S8 Field Kit as S8-Standard Kit, plus field bag Seven2Go Pro S8 Biotech Kit as S8-Field Kit, plus electrode InLab Solids Pro-IP67 Seven2Go Pro S8 Fluorid Kit as S8-Field Kit, plus electrode perfectION Fluoride 3 Portable pH/mV meter Seven2Go S2 10 50 02943 10 50 02944 10 50 02945 Routine instrument (IP67) with intuitive operation for mobile pH measurement in laborato- ry, production and in the field, with a wide range of functions. • Extra-simple, intuitive operation, robust and ergonomic design • Large multi-function display: all data at a glance • ISM® (Intelligent Sensor Management) • Data logger for 200 data records • 5-point calibration, autom. buffer detection/4 pre-defined buffer groups • Water- and dust-proof (IP67) • Operated with AA or rechargeable batteries Continued on next page

928

pH Meters Technical data: pH-range: mV-range: Temperature range °C: 0.00 – 14.00 / 0.01 -1999 – 1999 mV / 1 -5 – 105°C, resolution 0.1°C Article Seven2Go S2 Measuring device, electrode clip, hand strap, battery, certificate Seven2Go S2 Standard Kit as S2 meter, plus electrode Expert Pro-ISM-IP67, set of calibrati- Order No. 10 50 02951 10 50 02952 on buffers (bags), sample bottles Seven2Go S2 Field Kit as S2-Standard Kit, plus field bag Seven2Go S2 Food Kit as S2-Field Kit, plus electrode InLab Solids Pro-IP67 10 50 02953 10 50 02954 pH-Measuring Instruments, Phoenix Instrument Innovative measurement technology “Made in Europe” – this is what the new pocket and laboratory measuring instruments of the Phoenix Instrument EC series offer. During the development, the main focus was put on user-friendliness and the technical features of the instruments. The pH electrodes and conductivity cells are produced in Switzerland by experienced specialists. Portable pH-meter EC-21-pH/EC-26-pH During the new development of the EC-21/EC-26 series, particular emphasis was placed on easy handling during daily routine. The high-resolution color display guides the user intuitively through the measurement and calibration process. EC-21 pH • High-resolution color display, adjustable brightness • DHS-function, automatic detection of DHS and analog sensors • Display of pH/mV and temperature values • Automatic pH calibration up to 3 points • Automatic ORP 1-point calibration • Selectable stability parameter (low-medium-high) • Automatic and manual temperature compensation • Protection class IP 57 • Supplied in a robust carrying case with all accessories ... additionally for the EC-26 pH • GLP-function • Data logger (automatic or manual) 1000 data strings • Connection to PC via micro-USB • Free DATA LINK + • Automatic brightness regulation Technical data: pH meas. range: Resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognized: USA, NIST and user defined mV meas. range: Resolution: Temperature range: 0.0 – 100°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C Resolution: – GLP: – CALDUE: Memory: – – Output: IP 57 IP-class: Dimensions: 185 × 85 × 45 mm / 400 g Warranty instrument:3 years EC-26-pH -2.00 – 16.00 pH 0.1/0.01 pH 1 – 3 USA, NIST and user defined 1000 – 1900 mV 0.1/1 mV -10 – 110°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C yes yes 1000 data Micro USB IP 57 185 × 85 × 45 mm / 400 g 3 years EC-21-pH 0.00 – 14.00 pH 0.1/0.01 pH 1 – 3 ±1000 mV 1 mV Article 1 EC-21-pH-0 Kit without pH electrode, with temeprature sensor NT 55, BNC/S7 1mt cable, Order No. 10 13 72100 pH buffer, carrying case and accessories EC-21-pH-1 Complete kit include pH electrode 201T, pH buffer, carrying case and accessories EC-21-pH-5 Complete kit include pH electrode 201T DHS, pH buffer, carrying case and accessories 2 EC-26 pH-0 Kit without pH electrode, with temeprature sensor NT 55, BNC/S7 1mt cable, power supply, software PC-Link, pH buffer carrying case and accessories EC-26 pH-1 Complete Kit include pH-electrode 201T, pH buffer, power supply, software PC-Link, USB- cable, carrying case EC-26 pH-5 Complete Kit include pH-electrode 201T DHS, pH buffer, power supply, soft- 10 13 72210 10 13 72150 10 13 72600 10 13 72610 10 13 72650 ware PC-Link, USB- cable, carrying case Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSB5035 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 927 Continued on next page

929

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry 1 2 928 pH Meters Basic laboratory pH-meter EC-31-pH/EC-36-pH During the new development of the EC-31/EC-36 series, particular emphasis was placed on easy handling during daily routine. The high-resolution color display guides the user intuitively through the measurement and calibration process. EC-31 pH • High-resolution color display, adjustable brightness • DHS-function, pH electrodes with internal chip • Display of pH/mV and temperature values • Automatic pH calibration up to 3 points • Automatic ORP 1-point calibration • Selectable stability parameter (low-medium-high) • Automatic and manual temperature compensation • Protection class IP 54 ... additionally for the EC-36 pH • GLP-function • Data logger (automatic or manual) 1000 data strings • Connection to PC via micro-USB • Free DATA LINK + ±1000 mV 1 mV EC-31-pH 0.00 – 14.00 pH 0.1/0.01 pH 1 – 3 Technical data: pH meas. range: Resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognized: USA, NIST and user defined mV meas. range: Resolution: Temperature range: 0.0 – 100°C Resolution: 0.1 / ± 0.5°C – GLP: no CALDUE: – Memory: – Output: IP 54 IP-class: Dimensions: 170 × 145 × 60 mm / 530 g Warranty instrument:3 years EC-36-pH -2.00 – 16.00 pH 0.1/0.01 pH 1 – 3 USA, NIST and user defined 1000 – 1900 mV 0.1/1 mV -10 – 110°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C yes yes 1000 data Micro USB IP 54 170 × 145 × 60 mm / 530 g 3 years Article 1 EC-31 pH 0 Kit without pH electrode, with temeprature sensor NT 55, BNC/ S7 1mt cable, pH buffer, electrode holder and accessories EC-31 pH 1 Complete kit include pH electrode 201T, pH buffer, electrode holder and accessories EC-31 pH 5 Complete kit include pH electrode 201T DHS, pH buffer, elect- rode holder and accessories EC-36 pH 0 Kit without pH electrode, with temeprature sensor NT 55, BNC/ S7 1mt cable, power supply, software PC-Link, pH buffer elect- rode holder and accessories EC-36 pH-1 Complete Kit include pH-electrode 201T, pH buffer, power sup- ply, software PC-Link, USB- cable, electrode holder EC-36 pH-5 Complete Kit include pH-electrode 201T DHS, pH buffer, power supply, software PC-Link, USB- cable. Order No. 10 13 73100 10 13 73110 10 13 73150 10 13 73600 10 13 73610 10 13 73650 2 Professional bench top pH-meter EC-45-pH The large color display easy on to read shows all information necessary information about measurement, calibration,standards, cell condition, GLP. Anyone can use this meter eas- ily with its intuitive menu available in up to 8 languages in the EC-45-Multi. Easy to learn. Up to 5-point pH-calibration and up to 4-point Conductivty calibration with automatic recognition of all standards. Icon support for all calibration functions and advanced elec- trode diagnostics. Easy to calibrate. All functions can be controlled in an intuitive and easy way. Instrument will be delivered with a stirrer. EC-45 pH • Large color display with indication of Calibration Buffers and measurement’s stability • DHS-function, pH electrodes with internal chip • Indication stability of the measurement with icon • IP54 protection • Display pH/mV and Temperature, COND/TDS/Salinity/Resistivity and Temperature si- multaneously • Selectable Resolution: 0.1/0.01/0.001 pH; Auto range for COND • GLP and IQ-OQ manual available • Memory with re-call of last calibration date and time and information of electrode’s life Continued on next page

930

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Meters • CAL DUE: set of calibration frequency for high quality of measurements • Stability Parameter (Low-Med-High) for high accuracy measurement • Non-volatile memory holds up to 1000 data points with date and time in automatic (Data logger) or manual -2 – 20 pH 0.1 / 0.01 / 0.001 pH 1 – 5 USA, NIST, user defined • 2 × USB ports to transfer data at PC or printer and for external keyboard • Software PC-Link to download data (included) Technical data: pH meas. range: Resolution: Calibration points: Buffer recognized: mV meas. range/resolution: ±2000/ 0.1/1 mV Temperature range: -20 – 120°C Accuracy/resolution temp.: 0.1/±0.2°C Temperature calibration: GLP: CALDUE: Memory: Interputs: Protection class: Power supply: Dimensions: yes yes, with date and time yes yes, 1000 data 2 × USB, RS-232 IP 54 AC/DC adptor 12 V / 1000 mA 165 × 195 × 68 mm, 1050 g without stirrer Article EC-45 pH 2 Kit without pH-electrode, with temeprature sensor NT 55, BNC/ Order No. 10 13 74520 S7 1m cable, pH puffer pH 7 and pH 4, tripod, power supply and accessories, with magnetic stirrer, DHS-function EC-45 pH 3 Kit with pH-electrode XS STANDARD S7, 1 m cable S7/BNC, pH puffer pH 7 and pH 4, power supply and accessories, with magnetic stirrer, DHS-function EC-45-pH-5 Kit with pH-electrode STANDARD T - BNC DHS, pH puffer pH 7 10 13 74530 10 13 74550 and pH 4, with magnetic stirrer, DHS-function pH electrodes for general applications like Standard, minimal Alkali error like Standard, for samples with HF like Polymer Plast, with fix cable DIN like Standard, with fix cable BNC like Standard, with fix cable DIN like Standard, with fix cable DIN and temperature sensor like Standard, with fix cable BNC and temperature sensor Article 3 Gel pH electrode, gel-filled with ceramic diaphragm 4 Polymer pH electrode, polymer-filled with open pore diaphragm 5 Polymer Tip pH electrode, polymer-filled with double open pore diaphragm 6 Standard pH standard electrode with ceramic diaphragm Standard HA Standard HF Standard BNC Standard DIN Standard T-BNC Standard T DIN Polymer Plast pH electrode, polymer-filled with 1 open pore diaphragm and 1 ceramic diaphragm Polymer Plast BNC Polymer Plast DIN 7 201 T pH electrode with epoxy body, temperature sensor and fix cable BNC 201 T DIN pH electrode with epoxy body, temperature sensor and fix cable DIN Flat pH electrode for surface measurements, 3-hole diaphragm with Teflon 8 Flow pH electrode for viscous samples and low ion media 9 Semi-Micro pH electrode for small volume samples Micro pH electrode for small volume samples Micro P pH electrode for small volume samples with mit protein, electrolyte glycerin Gel Plast BNC pH electrode with epoxy body, fix BNC-cable and double ceramic diaphragm like Polymer Plast, with fix cable BNC 3 4 5 Order No. 10 13 71204 10 13 71223 10 13 71443 10 13 71363 10 13 71423 10 13 71433 10 13 71263 10 13 71273 10 13 71473 10 13 71463 10 13 71493 10 13 71503 10 13 71513 10 13 71022 10 13 71249 10 13 71413 10 13 71373 10 13 71383 10 13 71213 10 13 71253 10 13 75223 6 7 8 9 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 929 Continued on next page

931

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Meters pH electrodes for food measurement applications like 2 PORE, shaft POM/glass like 2 PORE, with small surface Ø 4,5 mm Article Food pH electrode with glycerin KCI electrolyte and 3 ceramic diaphragm 2 PORE pH electrode with 2 open pore diaphragm 2 PORE Slim 2 PORE F 2 PORE T 2 PORE Steel T 2 PORE K complete 2 PORE K 2 PORE K without knife Knife Replacement knife for 2 PORE K Food Slim pH electrode with glycerin KCI electrolyte and 2 ceramic diaphragm like 2 PORE, with temperature sensor and fix cable BNC like 2 PORE T, with knife like 2 PORE, shaft steel/glass, with temperature sensor and fix cable BNC Order No. 10 13 71393 10 13 71333 10 13 71283 10 13 71293 10 13 71323 10 13 71313 10 13 71303 10 13 71343 10 13 71353 10 13 71248 co d e b e w WW5PT046 WinLab® Excellent Line pH-mV Temperature Measuring Instru- ments, WINLAB® Portable pH meter for laboratory and field use Robust design in water-tight IP 67 casing. The Excellent Line measuring instrument is fit for connecting conventional pH electrodes and digital electrodes. Technical features: • Connection of conventional or digital pH electrodes • Data transmission via USB interface or Bluetooth • Secure thanks to user code • Multi-colour display with clearly understandable, detailed information • Simultaneous indication of measured values, adjustable display brightness • Automatic calibration possible for DIN, NBS or other buffer solutions • 1-point / 2-point / 3-point calibration option • Calibration date with date / validity of calibration / zero-point information / steepness information and status information regarding the pH-electrode • Data logger with up to 5000 data sets with information on date / measurement site / user code / name, measured values pH / redox and/or temperature 1 Technical data: Measuring range: -1.00 to 15.00 pH ±399.9 mV 0.01 pH 0.4 mV + 0.1% 0.2°C Data logger: Calibration data: Temperature: Display: Calibration: -5.0 to +105°C LCD Type TFT/RGB 240 × 320 pixel / brightness adjustable 1, 2, or 3 point calibration acc. DIN or NBS or other buffer solutions, automatic buffer recognition date / validity of the calibration / zero point information ±30 mV / electrode slope 85 to 105%, electrode condition OK or ERROR The latest 250 measuring series will be displayed via “History View” with information about the date, time, user and measuring location (this 250 data records cannot be deleted) Up to 5 users can store 1000 data records each (total 5000 data records) max. 1000 data records / input start and finish-time / measuring frequency, adjustable from 1 minute up to 24 h after 5 minutes inactivity be switched off, after switching on the mode is immediately the same before switched off Date and time / pH elektrodes, analogue or digital Automatic measurements / user code and location / autom. switch-off ON or OFF Buzzer can be switched on and off LCD Display adjustable (minimum/economic/normal/high) Data output adjustable from USB to Bluetooth Laguages adjustable 4 × 1,5 V batteries type AA / Ni-MH Accus, 2500 mA h or via USB interface USB and Bluetooth Outputs: Dimension (W×H×D): 170 × 79 × 39 mm Automatic measurement: Automatic switch-off: Settings: Power supply: 930 Continued on next page

932

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry 2 3 4 pH Meters Article 1 WinLab® excellent line, measuring device WinLab® excellent line in PROFI BOX case with pH/T 30 pH electrode (analogue), 3 buffers and 3mol KCL Order No. 10 03 10001 10 03 10021 solution, case with electrode stand 2 WINLAB desk box for all portable WinLab Data Line measuring instruments in the laboratory, complete with electrode stand, KCL solution and storage aids for temperature sensors and electrodes. 61 03 00065 Accessories Article 3 WinLab® pH/T30 combination electrode With integrated temperature sensor and WinLab connector seal Order No. 61 03 00030 with 1 m cable and BNC plug WinLab® standard combination electrode with plastic body, refillable with 3 mol KCI-solution, with 1 m cable and BNC plug WinLab® combination electrode pH/temperature, glass electrode with integrated temperature sensor, refillable with 3 mol KCI-solution, with 1 m cable and BNC plug with WINLAB connector seal WinLab® pH combination electrode Glass electrode with S7 plug head, adapter cable is also requi- red, refillable with 3 mol KCI-solution WinLab® redox combination electrode Glass electrode, refillable with electrolyt, with S7 plug head (adapter cable Nr. 61 03 00041 is necessary) WinLab® pH combination electrode Glass electrode with S7 plug head, adapter cable is also requi- red, refillable with 3 mol KCI-solution, with ground-joint dia- phragm for ion-weak media (drinking and pure water) WinLab® pH combination electrode Glass electrode with S7 plug head, adapter cable is also requi- red, gel filling for insertion measurements (e.g. meat, cheese or pasty materials), length 120 mm, diameter 6 mm in insertion area WinLab® Digital pH electrode with integrated transmitter for longer transmission distances (up to 100 meters), provides stable measuring signals, with identifi- cation code, records the calibration data WinLab® adapter cable From BNC to S7 screw-and-plug head electrodes, with WinLab connector seal 4 WinLab® Pt-100 temperature probe with handle 160 mm long, 3 mm Ø, with WinLab connector seal 10 03 00029 10 03 00038 10 03 00039 10 03 00040 10 03 00060 10 03 00062 10 03 00095 61 03 00041 61 03 00034 Pocket pH Meters, WTW® Pocket pH meters ProfiLine Field-tested, adapted to the respective applications and the user’s requirements: The ProfiLine single parameter devices and sets by WTW®. The Special silicone keypad with tactile feedback is particularly operator-friendly and can be cleaned easily under running water. Can be used with disposable or rechargeable battery for more flexible and econom- ical operation. With backlit graphic display (model 3310 and up) for easy navigation. Simple and functional: pH 3110 pH 3110: a simple, rugged and waterproof device for portable pH measurement. With built- in calibration timer and 3-point calibration. Large LCD display. Automatic AutoRead function for reproducible measured values. Technical data pH 3110: pH: all values ±1 digit -2.0 to 20.0 ±0.1 pH -2.00 to 20.00 ±0.01 pH -2.000 to 19.999 ±0.005 pH ±(1200.0 ±0.3) mV ±(2000 ±1) mV -5.0 to 105.0°C ±0,1°C mV: Temperature: co d e b e w WWP1J001 Article 5 pH 3110 single device pH 3110 SET 2 in a case with pH electrode SenTix® 41 and accessories Order No. 10 81 23110 10 81 23112 Continued on next page 5 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 931 co d e b e w

933

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Meters pH meter with data logger qualities: pH 3310 Intended for demanding field data collection tasks and recording of extensive arrays. The units have a large memory for 5000 GLP compliant data and an interval-controlled data logger. The plain text menu in four languages provides configuration, operation and cali- bration (1 to 5 points). Up to 10 calibration logs can be called up to follow up the stability of the connected sensor. With state-of-the-art mini USB interface for communication with the PC. One of the highlights is CMC, the continuous measurement control: A graphic scale in the display shows whether you are in the confidence range of the calibration points. Technical data pH 3310: pH: all values ±1 digit -2.0 to 20.0 ±0.1 pH -2.00 to 20.00 ±0.01 pH -2.000 to 19.999 ±0.005 pH ±(1200.0 ±0.3) mV ±(2500 ±1) mV -5.0 to 105.0°C ±0,1°C mV: Temperature: Article 1 pH 3310 single device pH 3310 SET 2 in a case with pH electrode SenTix® 41 and accessories Accessories Article Protective casing SM Pro Shock-absorbent, elastic rubber Order No. 10 81 23310 10 81 23312 Order No. 10 81 22780 Laboratory pH Meters, METTLER TOLEDO 2 FiveEasyTM pH Meter The Entry-Level-device can be used for different applications in many areas, such as in food and beverage industry, in water or environment analysis. The price-performance ratio and a compact design with need for little space characterise these devices. Technical data: pH-range: mV-range: Temperature range °C: Calibration: Display: Power supply: 0.00 to 14.00, resolution: 0.01 pH -2000 to 2000, resolution: 1 mV 0.0 to 100.0, resolution: 0.1°C max. 3 points, 4 pre-defined buffer groups LCD ext. universal power adapter (standard) Article FiveEasy pH F20-Meter Measurement device, electrode holder, user manual, short gui- de, universal power supply FiveEasy F20-Standard Kit same as FE20 meter plus pH electrode LE438, pH calibration Order No. 10 50 06658 10 50 06626 buffer bags pH 4.01, 7.00, 9.21, 10.01 Further accessories, electrodes, calibration solutions, etc. available on request. 3 pH/ion meter SevenCompact™ Powerful device for measuring the pH/mV (S210), pH/mV/ion concentration (S220). New: S213 Duo. 2-channel-device for measuring the pH/mV/conductivity! Technical data for conductivity see S230, page 943. • 4.3 ″ color display with u-Focus™: switchover of the information on the display • PIN-protected routine or expert mode, full GxP support • Full text menu navigation in 10 languages • ID management: user/specimen/sensor ID, intellig. Sensor Managem. (ISM) • Calibration with pre-and user-defined buffer groups, calibration timer • Automatic, manual, or time-controlled limit point detection; limit point criteria are sepa- rately • Measurement of the ion concentration with pre-defined ions (S220) • Internal memory for measured values for 2,000 data records, data export via USB flash drive • 2 USB interfaces for PC, connection of a USB scanners or keyboard • U-Place™: unique electrode holder with absolutely vertical movement • Control function for a stirrer available as an option Technical data: pH-range: mV-range: Ion concentration: Temperature range °C: -2.0 to 20.00, resolution 0.001 / 0.01 / 0.1 -2000 to 2000 mV, resolution 0.1 / 1 0 to 1000% / 0 to 10000 ppm / 1.0 E-9 to 9.99 E+9 mg/l -30.0 to 130.0°C, resolution 0.1 Continued on next page 1 2 3 932

934

pH Meters Article S210-Basic Device, U-Place™ electrode holder, mains adapter, certificate S210-Kit same as S210-Basic plus electrode LE438, calibration buffer S220-Basic Device, U-Place™ electrode holder, mains adapter, certificate S220-Kit same as S220-Basic plus electrode InLab Expert Pro-ISM, cable, calibration buffer S220-Bio same as S220-Basic plus electrode InLab Routine Pro-ISM, cable, calibration buffer S213 meter pH/conductivity Device SevenCompact Duo pH/conductivity, electrode holder, protective cover, operating instructions, user manual, declara- tion of conformity and test certificate S213 standard as 213 meter, but also with InLab Expert Pro-ISM pH sensor and InLab 731 conductivity sensor, guides to pH and conduc- tivity measurements, 2 buffer sachets for pH 4.01, 7.00, 9.21, 10.00, 2 standard sachets for 1433 µS/cm and 12.88 mS/cm S213 water as S213-Standard-Kit but with InLab Pure Pro-ISM for pH and Measuring Systems Electrochemistry Order No. 10 50 09025 10 50 09026 10 50 09028 10 50 09029 10 50 09031 10 50 09958 10 50 09959 10 50 09980 InLab 741-ISM for conductivity Modular multi parameter measuring device SevenExcellence™ Professional modular instrument for pH/redox potential, conductivity/salinity/TDS and ion concentration/dissolved oxygen (DO) measurements. For equipment or subsequent ex- tension with 1, 2, or 3 measuring modules of any type. Properties of the SevenExcellenceTMbasic unit: • Huge 7 high-resolution display and touch screen with clear buttons for easy operation • Modularity and flexibility: expandable up to 3 channels • Universal communication via USB, Ethernet (LAN) and RS-232 • Full text menu guide in 10 languages with Help menu • Unique OneClickTM operation concept (individually configurable functions/processes) • Creation and saving of methods • Utmost safety and GxP support (ID protection, sophisticated user management, limits/ alarms, integrated radio timer) • Intelligent Sensor Management (ISMTM) • Connection of stirrer, automatic sample changer, PC, barcode scanner, keyboard, printer • Can be completely integrated in LAN networks (for example data storage, printing) • Memory for up to 20,000 data records (measured values, calibrations, methods) • U-PlaceTM electrode holder with absolute vertical movement 0.001/0.01/0.1 -1999 to +1999 /0.1 -5.0 to 130.0°C, resolution 0.1 0.01 µS/cm to 1000 mS/cm 0.1 mg/l to 2000 g/l 0.00 to 2000 MOhm × cm 0.00 to 80.00 ppt 9 × 10-9 to 9.99 × 10+7, resolution ±1 Digit 0,000 to 50 mg/l or ppm 0 to 500% 500 to 1100 mbar 0 to 50°C Technical data: pH-measuring range: -2.000 to 19.999 Resolution: mV: Temperature: Conductivity: TDS: Special inhibitors: Salinity: Ion concentration: DO/BOD (O2): Saturation: Air pressure. Temperature: Measuring module pH: • 1- to 9-point calibration with automatic buffer recognition • 8 predefined buffer buffer records, 1 buffer record freely definable • Automatic temperature compensation with Pt1000 sensors or NTC 30 kOhm Measuring module conductivity: • Automatic recognition of calibration status • Description of calculated cell constants/entering of known cell constants • Selectable reference temperature (20 or 25°C) • Linear, non-linear temperature compensation or USP/EP mode Measuring module concentration/pH: • Like pH measuring module plus: • 2- to 9-point calibration for determination of concentration • Storage of calibration data for up to 10 ISE-sensors • Direct measurement, standard or sample addition/subtraction Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 933

935

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry pH Meters Measuring module DO/BOD (dissolved O2/biol. O2 demand): • 2-point calibration, 2 predefined, 1 user-defined standard • Automatic temperature and air pressure compensation • Optical (InLab OptiOx) or polarographic sensors (InLab 605) • Biol. O2 demand: predefined methods according DIN 38409 and EPA Article S400-Basic incl. pH module, 2 × blank modules, electrode arm, EasyDirect software, certificate S400-Kit same as S400 plus electrode InLab Expert Pro ISM, cable, 3 × 2 buffer bags S400-Bio same as S400-Kit, but with glass electrode InLab Routine Pro ISM and cable S700-Kit incl. conductivity module, 2 × blank modules, electrode holder, EasyDirect software, certificate, electrode InLab 731 ISM, 4 bags of calibration standard S470-Kit same as S470 plus pH electrode InLab Expert Pro ISM, Lf electrode InLab 731 ISM, 12 × calibration buffer/standard S470-USP/EP same as S470 plus pH glass electrode InLab Pure Pro ISM, cable, Lf electrode InLab741 ISM, 2 × calibration buffer/stan- dard S500-Basic incl. pH/ion module, 2 × blank modules, electrode arm, LabX direct software, certificate S475-Basic 1 × pH-, 1 × conductivity module, 1 × pH/ion module, electrode arm, LabX direct software, certificate S900-Kit same as S900-Basic plus O2 electrode InLab OptiOx S479-Kit same as S470-Kit plus DO/BOD module and O2 electrode In- Lab OptiOx More versions, electrodes and accessories available on request. Order No. 10 50 06240 10 50 06241 10 50 06242 10 50 06245 10 50 06253 10 50 06254 10 50 06248 10 50 06255 10 50 02986 10 50 02988 co d e b e w WW4HV027 1 934 Thermo Scientific™ Orion™ Star Series A210 Benchtop Meters, Thermo Scientific The reliable, user-friendly benchtop meters of the Thermo Scientific™ Orion™ Star A210 series are the perfect choice for fast, easy routing measuring jobs in the lab. • Intuitive, convenient operation with user interface in several languages and speed but- tons • Easy-to-read graphic display with background lighting • Extended functions such as stability and mean value calculations • Fast and reliable measurements with stability indication on the screen and selectable measuring modes – Auto-Read, time-controlled, and continuous with hold function • Data log comprises up to 2000 measurements with time and date stamp which remain saved to the memory even in case of power failure • Easy data transfer via USB and RS232 interface • With electrode arm and holder for convenient positioning of the measuring probe in the sample • Easy mixing of the sample with the directly controlled Orion Star stirring probe (not comprised in the scope of delivery) • Up to 5 pH calibration points with automatic detection of USA/NIST or DIN buffers • pH fault correction without complete recalibration with calibration editing option • Operated via supplied power pack or 4 AA batteries (not comprised in the scope of delivery) • IP54-rated housing resists splashes and can be wall-mounted • 3 years replacement warranty • CE/TÜV/FCC certified Comprised in the scope for delivery of all models: universal power pack, documenta- tion CD, printed brief instructions, computer interface cable, and test certificate for the meter Continued on next page

936

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry Order No. 10 79 22115 pH Meters Article 1 Orion Star A211 pH meter kit incl. electrode stand, ROSS Ultra Triode refill pH/ATC electrode with glass shaft and ROSS pH buffer and storage solution kit For measuring pH value, mV, relative mV or ORP with temperature Article 2 Orion Star A214 pH/ISE meter kit incl. electrode stand, ROSS Ultra refill pH electrode with glass shaft, Orion ATC tempe- rature probe with stainless steel shafts, Orion Star stirring probe and ROSS pH buffer and bearing solution kit For measuring ion concentration with an ion-selective electrode (ISE), as well as pH value, mV, relative mV or ORP with temperature Order No. 10 79 22145 Article Orion Star A212 conductivity meter kit incl. electrode stand, DuraProbe conductivity probe with 4 cells (K = 0.475) and epoxy resin shaft and Orion 1413 µS conductivty standard, 5 × 60 ml For measuring conductivity, TDS, salinity or specific resistance with temperature Order No. 10 79 22125 Article 3 Orion Star A213 RDO/DO meter kit incl. electrode stand, polarographic probe for dissolved oxygen with calibration sleeve and maintenance kit, BSB adapter, hopper and stirrer For measuring dissolved oxygen as a percent saturation or concentration with tempe- rature by means of optical or polarographic probes for dissolved oxygen Order No. 10 79 22135 Article Orion Star A215 pH/conductivity meter kit incl. electrode stand, ROSS Ultra Triode refill pH/ATC electrode with epoxy resin shaft, DuraProbe conductivity probe with 4 cells (K = 0.475) and epoxy resin shaft, ROSS pH buffer and storage solution kit and Orion 1413 µS conductivity standard, 5 × 60 ml For measuring pH value, mV, relative mV or ORP with temperature on channel one and conductivity, TDS, salinity or specific resistance with temperature on channel two Order No. 10 79 22155 Article Orion Star A216 pH/RDO/DO meter kit incl. electrode stand, ROSS Ultra Triode refill pH/ATC electrode with epoxy resin shaft, polarographic probe for dissolved oxygen with calibration sleeve and maintenance kit, ROSS pH buffer and storage solution kit, BSB adapter, hopper and stirrer For measuring pH value, mV, relative mV or ORP with temperature on channel one and dissolved oxygen as a percent saturation or concentration with temperature on channel two Order No. 10 79 22165 2 3 935 To see other meters and electrodes, please enter webcode WW4HV027 to access our online catalogue. Thermo Scientific™ Orion™ Versa Star™ pH Bench Meter, Thermo Scientific co d e b e w WW4HV028 Combining high measuring accuracy, excellent performance and maximum flexibility, the Thermo Scientific™ Orion™ Versa Star™ benchtop meter with pH module is up to the most challenging pH value, mV, REDOX and temperature measuring tasks. Exchangeable modules allow for individual adjustment of the four measuring channels. • Bright, easy-to-read LCD colour display • Up to six-point pH calibration • Saves up to 2,000 measured values with date and time • Easy data transfer to computer or printer via USB or RS232 interface • Convenient placement of the electrode in the sample by means of the electrode stand comprised in the delivery Article Orion Versa Star pH benchtop meter kit for difficult samples • ROSS Sure-Flow pH electrode with glass shaft Order No. 10 79 20013 - Sure-Flow diaphragm prevents clogging in case of viscous samples - Double reference system for a wide range of applications - Glass shaft for high resistance to chemicals • Orion ATC temperature probe with stainless steel shaft • Orion Star stirrer probe for easy stirring • Orion ROSS All-in-One pH buffer kit • Electrode stand, universal power pack (50-60 Hz, 100-240 V), PC connection cable and test certificates To see other meters and electrodes, please enter webcode WW4HV028 to access our online catalogue. co d e To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. b e w

937

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSE2014 Conductivity Meters Conductivity Meter SD 325 Con, Lovibond® The portable instrument with data logger is ideal for determining electrical conductivity in aqueous media. With a simple keystroke, further parameters such as TDS, salinity or re- sistance can be selected and conveniently read off. With the SD 325 Con, both low (< 200 µS/cm) and very high conductivities (< 1000 mS/cm) can be detected with highest preci- sion, but the choice of the right measuring cell is decisive. The simplified operator guid- ance with all relevant configuration options facilitates the use of the measuring instrument in all areas of water analysis. Measurement data including time stamp and measuring location ID can be recorded conveniently with the data logger function either automatical- ly at a fixed time interval (10000 data sets) or manually at the push of a button (1000 data sets). • Automatic recognition of conductivity standards • Alarm function with adjustable limit values • Auto hold function • Selectable reference temperature (20°C / 25°C) • Automatic temperature compensation • Battery status indicator • Low power consumption = long battery life • Data transfer and evaluation via software possible Scope of delivery in carrying case: instrument in protective armouring, conductivity meas- uring cell, conductivity standards (set 1 / set 2), electrode holder (set 1/ set 3), flow cell for ultrapure water (set 3), 2 × AAA batteries and user manual Technical data: Measuring principle: Conductometry Measuring range (de- pending on conduc- tivity cell): Conductivity: 0.000 – 1000 mS/cm Resistance: 0.000 – 50.0 MΩ*cm TDS: 0.000 – 5000 mg/l Salinity: 0.0 – 70.0 PSU Temperature: -5.0 – 100.0°C Backlit LCD display 2 × AAA-batteries, interface cable with USB connection Manual logger: 1000 data sets (single value by keystroke) Auto. logger: 10000 data sets (cyclic, time interval: 1 – 3600 s) yes 164 × 100 × 37 mm 302 g (incl. batteries and protective armouring) Display: Power supply: Data logger: Auto – OFF: Dimensions: Weight: Protection class: Conformity: IP 67 CE, RoHS, WEEE Article SD 325 Con (set 1) Conductivity electrode LC 12 (4-pole graphite, < 200 mS/cm) Order No. 10 77 13251 multipurpose operation SD 325 Con (set 2) Conductivity electrode LC 16 (4-pole graphite, < 1000 mS/cm) high conductivities SD 325 Con (set 3) Conductivity electrode LC 10 (2-pole stainless steel, < 200 µS/ 10 77 13252 10 77 13253 cm) ultrapure water Portable Hand-held Meter SensoDirect 150, Lovibond® The SD 150 Multi-Parameter handheld instrument is ideal for the sequential determination of pH, Redox/ORP, conductivity, TDS and dissolved oxygen (O2) and combines the appli- cations of several instruments in one portable device. The protective armouring with built- in holder not only provides a secure grip, but also protects both the sensor and the meter from damage caused by falling. Functions such as automatic temperature compensation or automatic recognition of standard solutions greatly simplify measurement and calibra- tion procedures. The large, clearly arranged LCD display shows the measurement param- eter and the temperature simultaneously, thus facilitating temperature-dependent docu- mentation. • All in one • Automatic recognition of standard solutions • Protective armouring with in-built electrode holder • Large LCD-Display • Automatic temperature compensation Scope of delivery in carrying case: instrument in protective armouring incl. electrode holder, pH electrode type 226, temperature sensor Pt1000, pH buffer, operating manual, further sensors according to set Continued on next page 936

938

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSE2018 Conductivity Meters Technical data: Display: Power supply: Large LCD-Display with contrast adjustment 4 × AA-batteries DC 9V adaptor yes Auto-off: Hold-function: yes Auto. temperature compensation: yes Protection class: Dimensions: Weight: Conformity: IP 51 203 × 76 × 38 mm 620 g (incl. batteries and protective armouring) CE pH: Conductivity: TDS: Dissolved O2: Temperature: pH: Conductivity: TDS: Temperature: Measuring range 0 – 14 pH 0 – 200 mS/cm 0 – 132000 ppm 0 – 20 mg/l 0 – 60°C Measuring range 0 – 14 pH 0 – 200 mS/cm 0 – 132000 ppm 0 – 60°C Article SensoDirect 150 (set 1) pH / Con / TDS / Oxi / Temp. TParameter SSensoDirect 150 (set 2) pH / Con / TDS /Temp.. Parameter SensoDirect 150 (set 3) pH / Oxi / Temp. Parameter pH: Dissolved O2: Temperature: Measuring range 0 – 14 pH 0 – 20 mg/l 0 – 60°C SensoDirect 150 (set 4) pH / Redox / Temp. Parameter pH: Redox: Temperature: Measuring range 0 – 14 pH ± 1999 mV 0 – 60°C Order No. 10 77 11501 10 77 11502 10 77 11503 10 77 11504 Portable Conductivity Meters, METTLER TOLEDO FiveGo™ portable conductivity meter Practical laboratory device for measuring conductivity, salinity and TDS at an extremely favorable price/performance ratio. Suitable for a wide range of applications (e.g. training, water and environmental analyses etc.). Technical data: Conductivity range: Temperature range °C: TDS: Salinity: Calibration: Data storage: Display: Power supply: 0.1 µS/cm - 199.9 mS/cm, +/- 0.5% 0.0 – 100.0, resolution: 0.1°C 0.1 mg/L - 199.9 g/L 0.00 - 19.99 psu 1-point 200 data sets LCD 4 AAA-batteries 1.5 V or 1.2 V accus Article FiveGo™ F3-Meter Measurement device incl. electrode clip, hand belt user manual, short guide, 4× batteries Order No. 10 50 06883 1 FiveGo™ F3-Standard Kit as F3, plus conductivity electrode LE703, calibration standards FiveGo™ F3-Field Kit as F3-Kit, plus field case, 4 sample bottles 10 50 06888 10 50 06887 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 937 Continued on next page

939

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry 1 Conductivity Meters Portable conductivity meter Seven2Go Pro™ S7 Powerful professional portable meter (IP67) for precise conductivty measurement in lab- oratory, production, and in the field. • High-resolution multi-functional display with bright backlighting • Selectable acoustic and optical status indication/alarms • Extensive GxP support with ISM®, expert and user mode • Water-tight micro USB connection for easy data transfer • User menu with a selection of 12 languages • Data logger for 2,000 data records • 1-point calibration, automatic standard detection/3 pre-defined, 1 freely definable standards • Automatic, time interval or manual capture of measured values Also refer to Seven2G S3 for more details Technical data: Conductivity range: TDS: Specific resistance: Salinity: Temperature range °C: 0.01 µS/cm to 1000 mS/cm 0.01 mg/l to 600 g/l 0.00 to 100 MOhm × cm 0.00 to 42.00 psu -5 to 105°C/ resolution: 0.1 Article Seven2Go Pro™ S7 meter Measurement device, electrode clip, battery, certificate Seven2Go Pro™ S7 Standard Kit as S7 meter, plus sensor InLab738-ISM, Lf-standards (bags), sample bottles Seven2Go Pro™ S7 Field Kit as S7-Standard Kit, plus field bag Seven2Go Pro™ S7 USP/EP Kit as S7 Standard Kit, plus sensor InLab742-ISM Order No. 10 50 02921 10 50 02922 10 50 02923 10 50 02924 Replacement electrodes and more accessories available on request! 2 Portable conductivity meter Seven2Go™ S3 Routine instrument (IP67) with intuitive operation for mobile conductivity measurement in laboratory, production and in the field, with a wide range of functions. • Extra-simple, intuitive operation, robust and ergonomic design • Large multi-function display: all data at a glance • ISM® (Intelligent Sensor Management) • Data logger for 200 data records • 1-point calibration, autom. standard detection/3 pre-defined, 1 freely definable standard • Automatic, time-controlled or manual capture of measured values • Water- and dust-proof (IP67) • Operated with AA or rechargeable batteries Technical data: Conductivity range: Temperature range °C: TDS: Specific resistance: Salinity: 0.01 µS/cm to 500 mS/cm -5 to 105°C/ 0.1°C 0.01 mg/l bis 300 g/l 0.0 – 100 MOhm × cm 0.00 to 42.00 psu Article Seven2Go™ S3 meter Measurement device, electrode clip, battery, certificate Seven2Go™ S3 Standard Kit as S3 meter, plus sensor InLab738-ISM, Lf-standards (bags), sample bottles Seven2Go™ S3 Field Kit as S3-Standard Kit, plus field bag Order No. 10 50 02931 10 50 02932 10 50 02933 Replacement electrodes and more accessories available on request! Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. 1 2 co d e b e w 938

940

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry Conductivity Meters Conductivity and Temperature Measuring Instrument WINLAB® Excellent Line, WINLAB® With integrated data logger. With USB and WiFi data output. Easy, intuitive operation thanks to clearly structured menu navigation. Robust, water-tight housing (IP 66, IP 67), perfect for measurements on the shop floor and in the field. Technology: • High-resolution colour display (240 × 320 pixel) with adjustable brightness and scratch- proof mineral glass pane • Simultaneous indication of temperature and the parameters conductivity, TDS, salinity. • Automatic sensor detection for temperature sensor Pt 100 (-100°C – 399.9°C), PTC (-50°C – 125°C) and NTC ( -2.5°C – 100°C) at a separate temperature sensor input • Reference temperatures 20°C or 25°C • Cell constant adjustable from 0.050 cm-1 to 4.000 cm-1 • Temperature coefficient adjustable, linear ( 0.000 to 9.999 % / °C) and non-linear acc. to EN 27888 • 6-button keyboard for navigation in measuring and menu mode • Automatic measurements with start and end point and time interval • USB / WiFi connection to the software • Software for measurement data management is comprised in the scope of delivery Data logger: • Specification of 5 users and 5 sites including user codes (PIN) • Indication of date, time, site, user, measured value and temperature for each data record • Review of the last 200 data records, and 1000 data records per user Technical data: Measuring range µs/cm -mS/cm-1 0.10 – 39.9 µS 20 – 399.9 µS 200 – 3999 µS 2 – 39.9 mS 20 – 100 mS 100 – 399.9 mS Resolution µs/cm-1 0.01 µs/cm 0.1 1 0.01 0.01 0.1 0.1 Accuracy % ± µ/m S/cm-1 0.5% ± 0.05 0.5% ± 0.1 0.5% ± 1 0.5% ± 0.01 (2 – 20 mS/cm) 1% ± 0.01 (20 – 39.99 mS/cm) 2% ± 0.1 6% Article 1 WINLAB Excellent Line conductivity meter Without electrode and accessories, incl. USB cable and measurement data manage- Order No. 10 03 20001 ment software Article 2 WINLAB Excellent Line Profi Box In this product version, the instrument comes with practical box for use in the lab or in the field, with integrated stand and folding intermediate lid which can also be used as a tabletop. Made of sturdy, easy-to-clean polypropylene. Comprises: WINLAB Excellent Line conductivity meter, standard LF electrode, set with conductivity test solutions 1413 µS and 12.88 mS, 100 ml each, Profi Box case, and measurement data management software Order No. 10 03 20020 Article WINLAB Excellent Line device set Comprises the conductivity meter, USB cable, standard LF electrode, and measure- Order No. 10 03 20016 ment data management software Article 3 WINLAB desk box Order No. 61 03 00065 for all portable WinLab Data Line measuring instruments in the laboratory, complete with electrode stand, KCL solution and storage aids for temperature sensors and elect- rodes. Article 4 WINLAB Standard conductivity electrode with integrated temperature sensor. Four-ring graphite electrode, length 120 mm, dia- Order No. 10 03 20030 meter 12 mm with 1 m cable and connector 5 WinLab® LF test solutions With test work certificate acc. to EN 10204-2.3. Reference temperature 25°C Article Volume ml Conductivity testing solution 1413 µS 250 Conductivity testing solution 1413 µS 500 Conductivity testing solution 12.88 mS 250 Conductivity testing solution 12.88 mS 500 Conductivity testing solution 111.8 mS 250 Conductivity testing solution 111.8 mS 500 Order No. 61 03 11413 61 03 21413 61 03 11288 61 03 21288 61 03 11118 61 03 21118 5 1 co d e b e w WW5PT050 2 3 4 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 939

941

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWP1J008 Conductivity Meters Handheld Conductivity Meter, WTW® The ProfiLine Cond pocket meters by WTW® Field-tested, adapted to the respective applications and the user’s requirements: The ProfiLine single parameter devices and sets by WTW®. The special silicone keypad with tactile feedback is particularly operator-friendly and can be cleaned easily under running water. Can be used with disposable or rechargeable battery for more flexible and econom- ical operation. With backlit graphic display (model 3310 and up) for easy navigation. Simple and functional: Cond 3110 Intended for users who need to measure conductivity fast, safely, and accurately. Easy operation for reliable results. Clearly understandable display for quick overview. Refer- ence temperature can be selected. Suitable for TetraCon® 325 and KLE 325. Technical data Cond 3110: Conductivity: Salinity: Temperature: AutoRead: Reference temperature: Temperature compensation: all values ±1 digit 0.00 to 1000 mS/cm ±0.5% of value 0.0 to 70.0 (according to IOT) -5.0 to 105.0°C ±0,1°C automatically 20°C / 25°C nlF Article 1 Cond 3110 single device Cond 3110 SET 1 Order No. 10 81 23120 10 81 23123 1 in a case with 4-electrode graphite measuring cell TetraCon® 325 and accessories Conductometer with data logger qualities: Cond 3310 Intended for demanding field data collection tasks and recording of extensive arrays. The plain text menu in four languages provides configuration, operation and parametrisation. The units have a large memory for 5000 GLP compliant data and an interval-controlled data logger. Up to 10 calibration logs can be called up to follow up the stability of the connected sensor. With state-of-the-art mini USB interface for communication with the PC. Technical data Cond 3310: Conductivity: zusätzlich: all values ±1 digit 0.00 to 1000 mS/cm ±0.5% of value 0.000 to 1.999 µS/cm, K = 0.01 cm-1 0.00 to 19.99 µS/cm, K = 0.1 cm-1 0.00 to 20 MOhm cm 0.0 to 70.0 (according to IOT) 0 to 1999 mg/l, 0 to 199.9 g/l -5.0 to 105.0°C ±0,1°C 20°C / 25°C none, nlF, 0.000 to 10.00 %/K Resistivity: Salinity: TDS: Temperature: Reference temperature: Temperature compensation: Article 2 Cond 3310 single device Cond 3310 SET 2 in a case with 4-electrode graphite measuring cell TetraCon® 325 and accessories Order No. 10 81 23320 10 81 23324 Accessories Article Protective casing SM Pro Shock-absorbent, elastic rubber Order No. 10 81 22780 Conductivity Meter, Phoenix Instrument Innovative measurement technology “Made in Europe” – this is what the new pocket and laboratory measuring instruments of the Phoenix Instrument EC series offer. During the development, the main focus was put on user-friendliness and the technical features of the instruments. The pH electrodes and conductivity cells are produced in Switzerland by experienced specialists. Portable conductivity meter EC-21-cond/EC-26-cond During the new development of the EC-21/EC-26 series, particular emphasis was placed on easy handling during daily routine. The high-resolution color display guides the user intuitively through the measurement and calibration process. EC-21 cond • High-resolution color display, adjustable brightness • Display of conductivity/TDS and temperature values • Automatic LF-calibration up to 5 points • Selectable stability parameter (low-medium-high) • Automatic and manual temperature compensation • Protection class IP 57 • Supplied in a robust carrying case with all accessories Continued on next page 2 940

942

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSB5036 1 2 Conductivity Meters ... additionally for the EC-26 cond • GLP-function • Data logger (automatic or manual) 1000 data strings • Connection to PC via micro-USB • Free DATA LINK + • Automatic brightness regulation Technical data: Cond meas. range: Resolution: Calibration points: Cell constant selectable: Temperature range: Resolution: TDS measuring range: GLP: CALDUE: Memory: Output: IP-class: Dimensions: Warranty instrument: EC-21-cond 0.00 – 200 mS 0.1/1 µS 0.01/0.1 mS 1 – 5 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ 0.0 – 100°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C 0.1 mg/l – 200 g/l – no – – IP 57 185 × 85 × 45 mm / 400 g 3 years EC-26-cond 0.00 – 200 mS 0.01/0.1/1 µS 0.01/0.1 mS 1 – 5 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ -10 – 110°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C 0.1 mg/l – 200 g/l yes yes 1000 data Micro USB IP 57 185 × 85 × 45 mm / 400 g 3 years Article 1 EC-21-cond-0 Kit without cond. cell, with conductivity standard, carrying case Order No. 10 13 71210 and accessories EC-21-cond-1 Complete kit include cond. cell 2301T with conductivity stan- 10 13 71211 dard, carrying case and accessories 2 EC-26 cond-0 Kit without cond. cell, with conductivity standard, power supply, 10 13 71260 carrying case and accessories, software PC-Link, USB- cable EC-26 cond-1 Complete kit include cond. cell 2301T with conductivity stan- dard, power supply, carrying case and accessories, software PC-Link, USB- cable 10 13 71261 Basic bench conductivity meter EC-31-cond/EC-36-cond During the new development of the EC-31/EC-36 series, particular emphasis was placed on easy handling during daily routine. The high-resolution color display guides the user intuitively through the measurement and calibration process. EC-31 cond • High-resolution color display, adjustable brightness • Display conductivity/TDS and temperature values • Automatic LF-calibration up to 5 points • Selectable stability parameter (low-medium-high) • Automatic and manual temperature compensation • Protection class IP 54 ... additionally for the EC-36 multi • GLP-function • Data logger (automatic or manual) 1000 data strings • Connection to PC via micro-USB • Free DATA LINK + Technical data: Cond meas. range: Resolution: Calibration points: Cell constant selectable: Temperature range: Resolution: TDS measuring range: GLP: CALDUE: Memory: Output: IP-class: Dimensions: Warranty instrument: EC-31-cond 0.00 – 200 mS 0.1/1 µS 0.01/0.1 mS 1 – 5 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ 0.0 – 100°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C 0.1 mg/l – 200 g/l – no – – IP 54 170 × 145 × 60 mm / 530 g 3 years EC-36-cond 0.00 – 200 mS 0.01/0.1/1 µS 0.01/0.1 mS 1 – 5 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ -10 – 110°C 0.1 / ± 0.5°C 0.1 mg/l – 200 g/l yes yes 1000 data Micro USB IP 54 170 × 145 × 60 mm / 530 g 3 years Article 3 EC-31 cond 0 Kit without cond. cell, with conductivity standard, electrode holder. EC-31 cond 1 Kit include cond. cell 2301T with conductivity standard, electrode holder. EC-36 cond 0 Kit without cond. cell, with conductivity standard, electrode holder, soft- Order No. 10 13 71310 10 13 71311 10 13 71360 ware PC-Link, USB- cable. EC-36 cond-1 Kit include cond. Cell 2301T with conductivity standard, electrode hol- 10 13 71361 3 der, software PC-Link, USB- cable. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 941 Continued on next page

943

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry 1 Conductivity Meters Professional bench top conductivity EC-45 cond The large color display easy on to read shows all information necessary information about measurement, calibration,standards, cell condition, GLP. Anyone can use this meter eas- ily with its intuitive menu available in up to 8 languages in the EC-45-cond Easy to learn. Up to 4-point Conductivty calibration with automatic recognition of all standards. Icon support for all calibration functions and advanced electrode diagnostics. Easy to calibrate. All functions can be controlled in an intuitive and easy way. Instrument will be delivered with a stirrer. EC-45 cond • Large color display with indication of Calibration Buffers and measurement’s stability • Indication stability of the measurement with icon • IP54 protection • 3 years instrument warranty • Display COND/TDS/Salinity/Resistivity and Temperature simultaneously • Selectable Resolution: 0,1/0,01/0,001 pH; Auto range for COND • GLP and IQ-OQ manual available • Selectable cell constant • Memory with re-call of last calibration date and time and information of electrode’s life • CAL DUE: set of calibration frequency for high quality of measurements • Stability Parameter (Low-Med-High) for high accuracy measurement • Non-volatile memory holds up to 1000 data points with date and time in automatic (Data logger) or manual • 2 × USB ports to transfer data at PC or printer and for external keyboard • Software PC-Link to download data (included) 0.00 – 20.00 / 200.0 / 2000 µS 2.00 / 20.00 / 200.0 / 1000 mS ±1% full scale 1 to 4 84, 1413 µS / 12.88, 111.8 mS, custom Technical data: Cond. Measuring range: Accuracy: Temperature compensation: manual oder automatic Calibration points cond.: Calibration standards recog- nized: 0.1 – 1 – 10 cm⁻¹ Cell constant selectable: 0.1 mg/l – 500 g/l TDS measuring range: 0.40 – 1.00 TDS factor: ±1% full scale Accuracy TDS: Temperature range: -20 – 120°C Accuracy/resolution temp.: 0.1/±0.2°C Temperature calibration: GLP: CALDUE: Memory: Interputs: Protection class: Power supply: Dimensions: yes yes, with date and time yes yes, 1000 data 2 × USB, RS-232 IP 54 AC/DC adptor 12 V / 1000 mA 165 × 195 × 68 mm, 1050 g without stirrer Article EC-45 cond 2 Kit without cond.-cell, with cond.-standards 1413 µS and 12.88 Order No. 10 13 70452 mS, asseccories, with magnetic stirrer, EC-45 cond 3 Kit with cond.-cell VPT 80/1, cond.-standards 1413 µS and 10 13 70453 12.88 mS, asseccories, with magnetic stirrer Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical 1 942

944

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry Conductivity Meters Laboratory Conductivity Meters, METTLER TOLEDO FiveEasyTM conductivity, laboratory conductivity meter Compact laboratory device for measuring conductivity, salinity and TDS at an extremely favorable price/performance ratio. Suitable as starter unit for a wide range of applications. Technical data: Conductivity range: Temperature range °C: TDS: Salinity: Display: Power supply: 0.1 µS/cm - 199.9 mS/cm, accuracy ±0.5% 0.0 – 100.0, resolution: 0.1 0,1 mg/L - 199,9 g/L 0.00 – 19.99 psu LCD ext. universal power adapter (standard) Order No. Article FiveEasy™ F30-Meter 10 50 06942 Conductivity meter, electrode holder, user manual, universal power adapter Article 1 FiveEasy™ F30-Standard Kit as F30-Meter, plus electrode LE703 and calibration standards 1413 µS/cm and Order No. 10 50 06943 1 12.88 mS/cm 2 SevenCompactTM conductivity Powerful measuring instrument for routine measurements of conductivity, salinity, TDS, spec. resistance and conductivity ash. Also available the 2-channel-device for measuring pH/mV/conductivity: S213, page 932. • 4.3 ″ color display with u-Focus™ for changing the information shown on the display • PIN-protected routine or expert mode, full GxP support • Plain text menu navigation in 10 languages • ID management: user/sample/sensor ID, Intelligent Sensor Management (ISM) • Calibration with pre- and user-defined buffer groups, input of cell constant, calibration timer • Settings for ultra-pure water, conductivity ash, bio-ethanol, USP/EP available • Automatic, manual or time-controlled limit point detection • Internal measured values memory for 2,000 data records, data export via USB-Stick • 2 USB interfaces for PC, connection of a USB scanner or keyboard • U-Place™: unique electrode holder with absolute vertical movement • Stirrer control available as an option, and many more Technical data: Conductivity: TDS: Resistivity: Salinity: Temperature: Resolution: 0.001 µS/cm to 1000 mS/cm 0.00 mg/l to 1000 g/l 0.00 to 100 MOhm × cm 0 to 80 psu -30.0 to 130.0°C 0,1°C Article SevenCompact™ S230-Basic Device, U-Place™ electrode holder, mains adapter, certificate SevenCompact™ S230-Kit same as S230-Basic plus InLab® 731-ISM, cable, Lf-standards SevenCompact™ S230-USP/EP same as S230-Basic plus InLab® 741-ISM, cable, Lf-standards Order No. 10 50 01933 10 50 01934 10 50 01935 More accessories for SevenCompact see SevenCompact pH, page 932. SevenExcellence conductivity, laboratory conductivity meter Modular conductivity meter - professional performance with the possibility to enhance 1 to 2 measuring channels any time (e.g. pH, ion concentration, O2). For detailed description see page 932 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 943

945

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry co d e b e w WWSE2017 Oxygen Meters Hand-held Meter SD 315 Oxi, Lovibond® The portable hand-held measuring instrument SD 315 Oxi meets the daily requirements for a robust and reliable instrument for the determination of dissolved oxygen in aqueous media. The well-known Clark oxygen sensor with integrated temperature probe enables immediate measurements without time-consuming run-in time (polarization time). The direct and comfortable operator guidance with all relevant configuration options facilitates the use of the measuring instrument in environment and laboratory. The hold function “freezes” stable measuring values on the display which simplifies data reading. The inter- nal memory allows the storage of 1000 (manual logger) to 10000 data sets (auto logger). The data logger allows continuous monitoring of the measured values. In combination with the alarm function data monitoring becomes even more comfortable. The automatic switch-off is individually selectable from 1 to 120 min and increases the operating time of the devices. The waterproof housing according to IP67 and IP 65 with the protective ar- mouring guarantees a safe operation in extreme ambient conditions. The flexible stand at the rear allows the unit to be set up or fastened to a belt. • Auto-hold function • Simple calibration against air or according to DIN EN ISO 5814 • Alarm function with adjustable limits • Automatic pressure and temperature compensation • Sensor status display in % after each calibration • Salinity correction • Battery status indicator • Data transfer and evaluation via software possible Scope of delivery in carrying case: device in protective armouring incl. electrode holder, galvanic oxygen sensor, refill electrolyte, spare membrane, calibration bottle with sponge, 2 × AAA batteries and user manual Technical data: Measuring principle: Galvanic oxygen sensor Measuring range: O2-concentration: 0.0 – 70.0 mg/l O2-saturation: 0.0 – 600.0% Temperature: 0.0 – 50.0°C Display: Power supply: Data logger: Backlit LCD display 2 × AAA-batteries, Interface cable with USB connection Manual logger: 1000 data sets (single value by keystroke) Auto. logger: 10000 data sets (cyclic, time interval: 1 – 3600 s) Auto-Off: Auto. temperature compensation: Dimensions: Weight: Protection class: Conformity: yes yes 164 × 100 × 37 mm 302 g (incl. batteries and protective armouring) IP 67 CE, RoHS, WEEE Article SD 315 Oxi (set 1) Galvanic oxygen sensor, 2 m cable length SD 315 Oxi (set 2) Galvanic oxygen sensor, 10 m cable length SD 315 Oxi (set 3) Galvanic oxygen sensor, 30 m cable length Order No. 10 77 13151 10 77 13152 10 77 13153 Portable Hand-held Meter SD 400 Oxi L with Datalogger, Lovibond® The portable SD 400 Oxi L handheld meter enables the determination of dissolved oxygen based on the highly precise optical luminescence technology. As a true all-rounder, the SD 400 Oxi L is capable of determining oxygen in various types of water. This is possible thanks to functions such as automatic temperature and pressure compensation and sa- linity correction, which allows each measurement to be adjusted to the water sample. The integrated SD card contains the calibration data specific to each sensor as well as soft- ware for monitoring, storage and evaluation of measurement data. The advantages of optical oxygen determination compared to conventional methods are manifold and can be summarized at a glance: • Low-wear and low-maintenance due to the long-life membrane cap • Compliant for the BOD dilution method • Long-stability after the first calibration • Low calibration drift • No warm-up or polarization times necessary and therefore immediately ready for use • No electrolyte required, no additional effort and no hidden costs • No stirring required Continued on next page 944

946

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry Oxygen Meters • No oxygen consumption • No interference from other gases like H2S • No influence by the mounting orientation of the sensor • No influence by electrostatic and mechanical loads Scope of delivery in carrying case: device incl. SD-Card (contains calibration data, soft- ware, user manual), optical oxygen sensor, storage/calibration bottle with sponge, 4 × AAA batteries, quick start guide, lanyard co d e b e w WWSE2013 Technical data: Measuring principle: Optical oxygen sensor Measuring range: O2-concentration: 0.01 – 50.00 mg/l O2-saturation: 0.1 – 500.0% Temperature: -5.0 – 50.0°C Large LCD with graphical display Micro-USB 4 × AA-Batteries, Micro-USB Micro-USB, 4 batteries (AA) Software for monitoring and storage of data yes German, English, Italian, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Dutch, Chinese (simplified) 162 × 98 × 54 mm 330 g (incl. batteries) IP 67 CE, RoHS, WEEE Compatible with Karlsruher BOD bottles NS 19/26 Display: Interface: External memory: Power supply: Data logger: Auto – OFF: Languages: Dimensions: Weight: Protection class: Conformity: Special feature: Article SD 400 Oxi L (set 1) Optical oxygen sensor: 1.5 m cable length SD 400 Oxi L (set 2) Optical oxygen sensor: 3 m cable length SD 400 Oxi L (set 3) Optical oxygen sensor: 10 m cable length Order No. 10 77 14001 10 77 14002 10 77 14003 co d e b e w WWP1J012 Handheld DO-Meter, WTW® The ProfiLine Handheld Dissolved Oxygen meters by WTW® Field-tested, adapted to the respective applications and the user’s requirements: The ProfiLine single parameter devices and sets by WTW®. Special silicone keypad with tactile feedback is particularly operator-friendly and can be cleaned easily under running water. Can be used with disposable or rechargeable battery for more flexible and economical operation. For optical oxygen measurement see WTW® MultiLine® IDS Simple and functional: Oxi 3205 Oxi 3205: Easy, robust, and watertight (IP67) handheld instrument for measuring dis- solved oxygen in the field. With integrated calibration timer for regular calibration. Large, backlit graphic display. Automatic AutoRead function for reproducible measuring results. Available as a ready-to-use portable set complet with electrodes and accessories. 0.00 to 19.99 mg/l ±0.5% of measured value 0 to 90 mg/l ±0.5% 0.0 to 199.9% ±0.5% of measured value 0 to 600% ±0.5% of measured value 0 to 199.9 hPa, 0 to 1250 hPa -5.0 to +105.0°C ±0.1°C Technical data Oxi 3205: Dissolved oxygen: Concentration1): Saturation1): Partial pressure1): Temperature: all values ±1 digit 1) depending on sensor Article 1 Oxi 3205 single device Oxi 3205 SET 1 in a case with galvanic oxygen sensor CellOx® 325 and accessories co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 945 Continued on next page Order No. 10 81 23205 10 81 23206 1

947

Measuring Systems Electrochemistry / Viscosity Oxygen Meters Oxygen meter with data logger qualities: Oxi 3310 Intended for demanding field data collection tasks and recording of extensive arrays. The plain text menu in four languages provides configuration, operation and parametrisation. The units have a large memory for 5000 GLP compliant data and an interval-controlled data logger. Up to 10 calibration logs can be called up to follow up the stability of the connected sensor. With state-of-the-art mini USB interface for communication with the PC. The Oxi 3310 allows calibration against external standards. Technical data Oxi 3310: Dissolved oxygen: Concentration1): 0.00 to 19.99 mg/l ±0.5% of measured value 0 to 90 mg/l ±0.5% 0.0 to 199.9% ±0.5% of measured value 0 to 600% ±0.5% of measured value 0 to 199.9 hPa, 0 to 1250 hPa Saturation1): Partial pressure1): all values ±1 digit Article 1 Oxi 3310 single device Oxi 3310 SET 1 in a case with galvanic oxygen sensor CellOx® 325 and accessories 1 Accessories Article Protective casing SM Pro Shock-absorbent, elastic rubber Order No. 10 81 22780 Order No. 10 81 23330 10 81 23331 co d e b e w WWY9G004 2 3 946 Viscosimeters Rotational Viscometers ViscoQC 100 and 300, Anton Paar Rotational Viscometers ViscoQC 100 and 300 The viscosimeters ViscoQC™ 100 and ViscoQC™ 300 are the perfect tools for ensuring the quality of fluid to semi-solid products and guarantee easy, fast and reproducible vis- cosity measurements. Both units are immediately ready for use after unboxing. The benefits: • The ViscoQC 100 is optimised for one-point measurement. • The ViscoQC 300 has a large display which clearly indicates your measurement data, even with different speeds. • Toolmaster™: Automatic detection of the spindle and transmission of the measuring system factors – to ensure correct measurement at all times! • Magnetic spindle coupling: For easy and fast exchange of measuring systems with one hand only • Peltier temperature control: Optional accessory for precise control of sample tempera- ture with air counter-cooling from 15°C to 80°C • Digital levelling function: Alignment of the device is checked before the measurement • Intuitive user interface: 7" touchscreen (ViscoQC™ 300) with large user interface and pre-defined measuring modes • TruMode: The unique automatc mode TruMode automatically finds the speed required for reaching the optimum torque. This is a great help above all for measuring an unknown sample or an unknown combination of spindle/speed. • Spindles made of chemically resistant stainless steel AISI 316L • Data read-out software V-Collect comprised in the delivery • The optional adaptable measuring cup holder ensures that your sample cup is always properly aligned in the centre • Optional Pharma Qualification Package. Meets the requirements of GMP, GAMP 5. Type 2 ViscoQC 100 - L ViscoQC 100 - R ViscoQC 100 - H 3 ViscoQC 300 - L ViscoQC 300 - R ViscoQC 300 - H Viscosity mPa/s 1 – 6,000,000 10 – 40,000,000 60 – 320,000,000 1 – 6,000,000 10 – 40,000,000 60 – 320,000,000 Speed rpm 0.1 – 200 0.1 – 200 0.1 – 200 0.01 – 250 0.01 – 250 0.01 – 250 Order No. 10 63 31000 10 63 31001 10 63 31002 10 63 30300 10 63 30301 10 63 30302 Continued on next page

948

Viscosimeters Accessories Article Adaptable beaker holder PTD peltier temperature chamber CC 12 measuring cylinder for beaker holder/peltier tempera- ture chamber CC 18 measuring cylinder for beaker holder/peltier tempera- ture chamber CC 26 measuring cylinder for beaker holder/peltier tempera- ture chamber DG 26 double gap measuring system for beaker holder/peltier Order No. 10 63 30304 10 63 30305 10 63 30306 10 63 30307 10 63 30308 10 63 30309 temperature chamber Ubbelohde Viscometers, SI Analytics ISO/DIS 3105, DIN 51562, BS 188, NF T 60-100 1 Capillary viscosimeter, calibrated, for manual measurements Manufacturer’s certificate with constant. Type Capillary No. 50100 50103 50101 50110 50113 50111 50120 50123 50121 50130 50133 50131 50140 50243 50241 50250 0 0c 0a I Ic Ia II IIc IIa III IIIc IIIa IV IVc IVa V Capillary inner Ø mm 0.36 0.47 0.53 0.63 0.84 0.95 1.13 1.50 1.69 2.01 2.65 3.00 3.60 4.70 5.34 6.30 Constant guide value K 0.001 0.003 0.005 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.3 0.5 1 3 5 10 30 50 100 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.3 – 1 0.5 – 3 0.8 – 5 1.2 – 10 3 – 30 5 – 50 10 – 100 30 – 300 50 – 500 100 – 1000 300 – 3000 500 – 5000 1000 -10000 3000 -30000 6000 -30000 over 10000 Order No. 69 27 10001 69 27 10002 69 27 10003 69 27 10004 69 27 10005 69 27 10006 69 27 10007 69 27 10008 69 27 10009 69 27 10010 69 27 10011 69 27 10012 69 27 10013 69 27 00131 69 27 00148 69 27 00156 Capillary viscosimeter, non-calibrated For relative measurements. Type Capillary No. 53003 53001 53010 53013 53020 53023 53030 53033 53040 0c 0a I Ic II IIc III IIIc IV Capillary inner Ø mm 0.47 0.53 0.63 0.84 1.13 1.50 2.01 2.65 3.60 Constant guide value K 0.003 0.005 0.01 0.03 0.1 0.3 1 3 10 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.5 – 3 0.8 – 5 1.2 – 10 3 – 30 10 – 100 30 – 300 100 – 1000 300 – 3000 1000 -10000 Order No. 69 27 10026 69 27 10027 69 27 10028 69 27 10029 69 27 10030 69 27 10031 69 27 10032 69 27 10033 69 27 10034 2 Capillary viscosimeter, calibrated, for automatic measurements Manufacturer’s certificate with constant. Measuring Systems Viscosity co d e b e w WW1WS008 1 2 Type Capillary No. 53200 53203 53201 53210 53213 53211 53220 53223 53221 53230 53233 53231 53240 0 0c 0a I Ic Ia II IIc IIa III IIIc IIIa IV co d e b e w Capillary inner Ø mm 0.36 0.47 0.53 0.63 0.84 0.95 1.13 1.50 1.69 2.01 2.65 3.00 3.60 Constant guide value K 0.001 0.003 0.005 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.3 0.5 1 3 5 10 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.3 – 1 0.5 – 3 0.8 – 5 1.2 – 10 3 – 30 5 – 50 10 – 100 30 – 300 50 – 500 100 – 1000 300 – 3000 500 – 5000 1000 -10000 Order No. 69 27 53200 69 27 53203 69 27 53201 69 27 53210 69 27 53213 69 27 53211 69 27 53220 69 27 53223 69 27 53221 69 27 53230 69 27 53233 69 27 53231 69 27 53240 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 947

949

Measuring Systems Viscosity 2 1 Viscosimeters Stand VA steel. Suitable for all Ubbelohde viscosimeters without TC sensors. For manual and automatic measurements. Ensures that the viscosimeter hangs perpendicular. Deviation <1°. Also helps to protect the viscosimeter from breakage. Article 1 Stand type 05392 Order No. 69 27 05043 2 ViscoClock plus The ViscoClock plus is an electronic timing unit for glass capillary viscometers used to determine kinematic and relative viscosity. Succeeding the well-proven ViscoClock, the new instrument features data storage and simpler handling. The ViscoClock plus is suitable for the following SI Analytics® viscosimeters: Ubbelohde (DIN; ISO; ASTM; Mikro) and Mikro-Ostwald. To determine absolute kinematic viscosities, calibrated viscometers have to be used, such as type no. 532 xx. The ViscoClock plus automatically measures the flow time in the viscometers by means of infrared light barriers: manual flow time measurement with a stopwatch becomes ob- solete. The viscometer including a sample is inserted into the ViscoClock plus and im- mersed into a thermostatic bath for temperature stabilization. After thermostating, the sample is pumped into the measuring bulb, and the flow time is detected automatically. The large display enables easy read-off of flow times and additional information: date, time, sample ID and viscometer ID. The ViscoClock plus can be used in all SI Analytics® transparent thermostats. Technical data: Measuring range: Accuracy of time measurement: ±0,01 s/±1 digit Measuring range viscosity: USB host: Operating temperature: up to 999.99 s / resolution 0.01 s Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: Viscometer types: 0.35 – 10000 mm²/s (cSt) to connect USB flash drive or printer (TZ 3863) stand: -40 to +150°C electronic measuring unit: +10 to +40°C approx. 90 × 30 × 515 mm approx. 450 g (without viscosimeter), power supply unit approx. 220 g Ubbelohde (DIN, ISO, ASTM, Mikro), Mikro-Ostwald Article ViscoClock plus Timing unit for capillary viscometer. Including power supply 100–230 V and hand pump. ViscoClock plus M1, 230 V ViscoClock plus and acrylic glass thermostatic bath CT72/P (230 V) for temperatures +10°C – +60°C. ViscoClock plus M1, 115 V ViscoClock plus and acrylic glass thermostatic bath CT72/P (115 V) for temperatures +10°C – +60°C. ViscoClock plus M2, 230 V ViscoClock plus and glass panelled thermostatic bath CT72/2 (230 V) for temperatures -40°C – +150°C. ViscoClock plus M2, 115 V ViscoClock plus and glass panelled thermostatic bath CT72/2 (115 V) for temperatures -40°C – +150°C. Order No. 10 27 17900 10 27 17910 10 27 17920 10 27 17930 10 27 17940 Viscosimeters, Irmeco 3 Cannon-Fenske Routine Viscometers supplied with works certificate Standards: ASTM D445-446, ASTM D2515, ISO 3104-3105 Constant K at 40ºC and 100ºC Type 25 50 75 100 150 200 300 350 400 450 500 600 Constant guide value K 0.002 0.004 0.008 0.015 0.035 0.1 0.25 0.5 1.2 2.5 8 20 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.5 – 2 0.8 – 4 1.6 – 8 3 – 15 7 – 35 20 – 100 50 – 250 100 – 500 240 – 1200 500 – 2500 1600 – 8000 4000 – 20000 Order No. 10 15 81025 10 15 81050 10 15 81075 10 15 81100 10 15 81150 10 15 81200 10 15 81300 10 15 81350 10 15 81400 10 15 81450 10 15 81500 10 15 81600 Continued on next page 948

950

Measuring Systems Viscosity 4 Viscosimeters Cannon-Fenske Opaque Viscometers supplied with works certificate Standards: ASTM D445-446, ASTM D2515, ISO 3104-3105 Constant K at 40ºC and 100ºC co d e b e w WWR5C003 Type Constant guide value K 25 50 75 100 150 200 300 350 400 450 500 600 0.002 0.004 0.008 0.015 0.035 0.1 0.25 0.5 1.2 2.5 8 20 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.5 – 2 0.8 – 4 1.6 – 8 3 – 15 7 – 35 20 – 100 50 – 250 100 – 500 240 – 1200 500 – 2500 1600 – 8000 4000 – 20000 5 Ubbelohde Viscometer supplied with works certificate Standards: ASTM D445-446, ASTM D2515, ISO 3104-3105 Type Constant guide value K 0 0C 0B 1 1C 1B 2 2C 2B 3 3C 3B 4 4C 4B 5 0.001 0.003 0.005 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.3 0.5 1.0 3.0 5.0 10.0 30.0 50.0 100.0 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.3 – 1 0.6 – 3 1 – 5 2 – 10 6 – 30 10 – 50 20 – 100 60 – 300 100 – 500 200 – 1000 600 – 3000 1000 – 5000 2000 – 10000 6000 – 30000 10000 – 50000 20000 – 100000 Order No. 10 15 82025 10 15 82050 10 15 82075 10 15 82100 10 15 82150 10 15 82200 10 15 82300 10 15 82350 10 15 82400 10 15 82450 10 15 82500 10 15 82600 Order No. 10 15 83100 10 15 83101 10 15 83102 10 15 83110 10 15 83111 10 15 83112 10 15 83120 10 15 83121 10 15 83122 10 15 83130 10 15 83131 10 15 83132 10 15 83140 10 15 83141 10 15 83142 10 15 83150 6 BS/IP/RF U-tube reverse flow Viscometer supplied with works certificate Standards: BS/IP/RF and ASTM D445-446, ISO 3104-3105 Constant K at 40ºC and 100ºC Type Constant guide value K 3 5 4 6 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.6 – 3 2 – 10 6 – 30 20 – 100 60 – 300 200 – 1000 600 – 3000 2000 – 10000 6000 – 30000 20000 – 100000 60000 – 300000 Order No. 10 15 84201 10 15 84202 10 15 84203 10 15 84204 10 15 84205 10 15 84206 10 15 84207 10 15 84208 10 15 84209 10 15 84210 10 15 84211 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0.003 0.01 0.03 0.1 0.3 1.0 3.0 10 30 100 300 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 949 Continued on next page

951

Measuring Systems Viscosity 1 2 co d e b e w WWSU9049 950 1 Viscosimeters BS/U-tube reverse flow viskosimeters supplied with works certificate Standards: BS und ASTM D445-446, ISO 3104-3105 Constant (K) at 40°C and 100°C Type A B C D E F G H Constant guide value K 0.003 0.01 0.03 0.1 0.3 1.0 3.0 10.0 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.9 – 3 cSt 2 – 10 cSt 6 – 30 cSt 20 – 100 cSt 60 – 300 cSt 200 – 1000 cSt 600 – 3000 cSt 2000 – 10000 cSt Order No. 10 15 86110 10 15 86120 10 15 86130 10 15 86140 10 15 86150 10 15 86160 10 15 86170 10 15 86180 2 UBBELOHDE viskosimeters supplied with works certificate Standards: DIN 51562 part 1, ISO 3105 Type 0 0c 0a I Ic Ia II IIc IIa III IIIc IIIa IV IVc IVa Constant guide value K 0.001 0.003 0.005 0.01 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.3 0.5 1 3 5 10 30 50 Measuring range (guide value) mm2/s 0.35 – 1 cSt 0.7 – 3 cSt 1 – 5 cSt 2 – 10 cSt 6 – 30 cSt 10 – 50 cSt 20 – 100 cSt 60 – 300 cSt 100 – 500 cSt 200 – 1000 cSt 600 – 3000 cSt 1000 – 5000 cSt 2000 – 10000 cSt 6000 – 30000 cSt 10000 – 50000 cSt Order No. 10 15 85110 10 15 85111 10 15 85112 10 15 85210 10 15 85211 10 15 85212 10 15 85310 10 15 85311 10 15 85312 10 15 85410 10 15 85411 10 15 85412 10 15 85510 10 15 85511 10 15 85512 Bostwick Consistometer, Dinkelberg Analytics Flow viscosity meter for checking the consistency, viscosity or flow rate of fluid or vis- cous products such as sauces, soups, dressings, marmalade, cosmetics, lacquers, etc. with good reproducibility. Made of stainless steel with level and leveling feet. Trigger mechanism with spring loaded sample chamber latch, engraved gradations on the flow path in 5 mm steps. Technical data: External dimensions (L × W × H): Sample volume: 356 × 76 × 140 mm 75 ml Article Bostwick Consistometer, type BA24-925-000 Replacement level for Bostwick Consistometer Order No. 69 32 24925 10 32 10025 Stalagmometer, Neubert-Glas Traube-type stalagmometer for determination of surface tension Article Stalagmometer, tube A, angled For small quantities of thin liquid, approx. 2.5 ml, 15 – 20 drops Stalagmometer, tube B, angled For large quantities of thin liquid, approx. 6.3 ml, 45 – 55 drops Stalagmometer, tube C, straight For small quantities of viscous liquids, approx. 2.5 ml, 15 – 25 drops More sizes on request. Order No. 15 11 33010 15 11 33020 15 11 33030

952

Melting Point Determination Instruments and Accessories Measuring Systems Melting Point co d e b e w WWY3J013 Melting Point Meters, A. KRÜSS Optronic Melting point meter M5000 The M5000 provides fast, easy and automatic examination of powdery substances with a melting point up to 400°C. Due to the automatic determination of the melting point, an objective measurement result is always guaranteed. The high preheating rate and the in- tegrated fan cooling allow fast and reliable measurements in any temperature range. The display provides a well-arranged readout of all important measuring data. Technical data: Measuring range: Resolution: Accuracy: 25 – 400°C 0.1°C ±0.3°C (25 – 220°C) ±0.5°C (200 – 400°C) IP20 to 300°C approx. 4.0 min to 400°C approx. 7.5 min 1°C min-1 1.4 mm 1 90 – 264 V 220 × 150 × 340 mm 4.1 kg IP Code: Preheating rate: Heating rate: Capillary Ø: Nr. of capillaries: Power supply: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Article 1 Melting point analyzer M5000 1 Order No. 10 61 15001 Melting Point Meter M3000 The M3000 provides fast and easy examination of powdery substances with a melting point up to 360°C. Due to the triple capillary intake, it is possible to analyse three samples within one measurement run. Thanks to the preheating rate and the integrated fan cooling, fast measurements are possible in any temperature range. The display provides a well-ar- ranged readout of all important measuring data. The measurement is carried out semi-automatic my means of 10× magnification optics, the device offers an RS-232 interface for printer CBM910. Technical data: Measuring range: Resolution: Accuracy: 30 – 360°C 0.1°C ±0.3°C (30 – 200°C) ±0.5°C (200 – 360°C) to 300°C approx. 4.0 min to 360°C approx. 7.5 min 1°C min-1 1.4 mm 3 90 – 264 V 210 × 360 × 230 mm 4.3 kg Preheating rate: Heating rate: Capillary Ø: Nr. of capillaries: Power supply: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: Article 2 Melting point meter M3000 Order No. 10 61 13001 2 Kofler Hotbench, Wagner & Munz Incl. set of calibration and test substances, for the determination of melting points and the fast identification of organic substances. Very easy to use. For many different applications in quality assurance and research. Technical data: Temperature range: + 50°C to + 260°C Connected load: 100 W, 230 V, 50-60 Hz Article Kofler hotbench Order No. 69 62 50400 co d e b e w WWZ71003 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 951

953

Measuring Systems Melting Point / Climate co d e b e w 1 2 Melting Point Determination Instruments and Accessories Melting Point Determination Tubs, Hirschmann Melting point determination tubes, pack of 10 lots of 100. Further sizes on request. WW4ZV045 1 One end closed Outer Ø mm 1.0 1.0 1.35 1.35 1.55 1.55 Inner Ø mm 0.8 0.8 0.95 0.95 1.15 1.15 Length approx. mm 80 100 80 100 80 100 Order No. 15 37 81002 15 37 81003 15 37 81005 15 37 81006 15 37 81007 15 37 81008 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 2 Capillary tube, two ends open Outer Ø Inner Ø mm 0.8 0.8 0.95 0.95 1.15 1.15 Length approx. mm 80 100 80 100 80 100 Order No. 15 37 81102 15 37 81103 15 37 81105 15 37 81106 15 37 81107 15 37 81108 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 mm 1.0 1.0 1.35 1.35 1.55 1.55 Room Thermometers Six Thermometers, Amarell co d e b e w WWERJ016 Minimum/maximum thermometers With pushbutton magnet, plastic housing with roof, with red filling. Range: Size: -30 to +50°C 230 × 90 mm Article 3 Minimum/maximum thermometer, with red filling Order No. 16 10 32011 3 4 5 952 In/Out Thermometer, Amarell co d e b e w WWERJ024 Article 4 Dual Thermo Max/Min Electronical thermometer max./min. with temperature alarm, for indoor and outdoor, Order No. 10 10 11680 temperature sensor with 3 meters PVC outdoor cable. Technical data: Measuring range: Resolution: Accuracy: Battery: Live: Measurement: Operating temperature: 0 to +50°C -50 to +70°C 0.1°C ±1°C, -20 to +70°C button cell, 1.5 V LR44/A76 approx. 8000 h 65 × 67 × 23 mm Article 5 Indoor/outdoor thermometer Accurate max./min. thermometer saves extreme values with date and time; optio- nally, delayed temperature indication. With maximum and minimum temperature, alarm and warning light. Ideal for monitoring fridge and freezer temperatures. External sensor with 3 m cable in a screw-connection plastic housing for temperature delay. Measuring range -50 to 70°C, resolution 0.1°C, accuracy ±0.5°C Order No. 10 10 17936

954

Measuring Systems Climate co d e b e w WWMUE007 co d e b e w WWMUE009 Room Thermometers Desktop Thermometer, ISOLAB This desk top electronic thermometer can be also used as wall hanged. With the help of two probes can be used for indoor and out-door temperature measurement simultane- ously. The folding stand at the back housing offers a convenient angle for easy reading of the results. Water resistant sturdy plastic housing with 135 × 75 × 19 mm dimensions offers long life cycle. Offers dual display for humidity and temperature on a large and clear 51 × 41 mm LCD display. Featured with maximum & minimum temperature reading memory with an alarm function and date / time display. Temperature measurement range is -4°F to +122°F (+/- 0,2°F) or -20°C to +50°C (+/- 0,1°C) selectively. °F & °C values are exchangeable by a switch control at the front panel. Article Desktop thermometer Order No. 10 66 40700 Desktop Thermohygrometer, ISOLAB This desk top thermohygrometer can be also used as wall hanged. The folding stand at the back housing offers a convenient angle for easy reading of the results. Water resistant sturdy plastic housing with 109 × 70 × 19 mm dimensions offers long life cycle. Offers dual display for humidity and temperature on a large and clear 40 × 30 mm LCD display. Featured with maximum & minimum temperature reading memory with an alarm function. Humidity measurement range is 10% RH – 99 %RH with ± 1%RH accuracy. Temperature measurement range is -58°F to +158°F (± 0,2°F) or -50°C to +70°C (± 0,1°C) selectively. °F & °C values are exchangeable by a switch control at the front panel. Article Desktop thermohygrometer Order No. 10 66 40850 Electronic Thermometer, LAT Electronic maximum/minimum thermometer with alarm for indoor (-10 to +60°C) and outdoor temperature (-50 to +70°C) selectable °C/°F cable approx. 2 m for hanging or standing incl. battery Dimensions: 110 × 70 × 20 mm Weight: 130g Article Maximum-Minimum thermometer Order No. 68 20 10060 co d e b e w WWW4U040 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 953

955

Measuring Systems Climate e co d e co d b b e w e w WWJ9J045 Room Thermometers testo Mini Data Logger, Testo / IDL testo 174H mini data logger, 2-channel, incl. wall bracket, battery (2 × CR 2032 lithium) and calibration protocol. The mini data logger for temperature and humidity testo 174H is ideal for monitoring temperature and humidity sensitive goods in storage. The testo 174H also monitors building climate, continuously, securely and unobtrusively. The free soft- ware ComSoft testo 174 allows fast programming of the data logger and easy analysis. • Humidity sensor with long-term stability • High data integrity, even with empty battery • Large measurement data memory • Display of the current temperature or humidity value • Large measuring range • Compact and robust • Issue of alarms via display • Data transfer to the PC via USB interface Technical data: Sensor technology: Channels: Measurement unit: Measuring range: Accuracy ± 1 Digit: NTC/capacitive humidity sensor 2 × internal °C, °F, %RH -20 to +70°C internal / 0 to 100% RH ± 0.5°C (-20 to +70°C) ± 3% RH (2% to 98% RH) ±0.03% RH/K 0.1°C / 0.1% RH 60 × 38 × 18.5 mm 1 year (15 min meas. cycle, +25°C) Resolution: Dimensions: Battery life: Operating temperature:-20 to +70°C -40 to +70°C Storage temperature: 2 × CR 2032 Lithium Battery type: IP 20 Protection class: 1 min to 24 h Measuring cycle: Memory capacity: 16,000 readings Article 1 testo 174H mini data logger USB-Interface Set testo 174H mini data logger for programming and reading out the logger incl. USB interface for programming and reading out the logger Order No. 10 09 41741 10 09 41745 10 09 41742 testo 174T mini data logger, 1-channel, incl. wall bracket, battery (2 × CR 2032 lithium) and calibration protocol. The mini data logger for temperature testo 174T is ideal for ac- companying transports. Simply positioned close to the goods, e.g. in containers and re- frigerated rooms, the data logger monitors temperature continuously, securely and unob- trusively. The free software ComSoft Basic allows fast programming of the data logger and easy analysis. • High data integrity, even with empty battery • Large measurement data memory • Watertight in accordance with IP65 • Compact and robust • Conforms to EN12830 • Issue of alarms via display • Data transfer to the PC via USB interface NTC 1 × internal °C -30 to +70°C internal ± 0.5°C (-30 to +70°C) 0.1°C 60 × 38 × 18.5 mm 500 days (15 min meas. cycle, +25°C) Technical data: Sensor technology: Channels: Measurement unit: Measuring range: Accuracy ± 1 Digit: Resolution: Dimensions: Battery life: Operating temperature:-30 to +70°C -40 to +70°C Storage temperature: 2 × CR 2032 Lithium Battery type: IP 65 Protection class: 1 min to 24 h Measuring cycle: Memory capacity: 16,000 readings Article 2 testo 174T mini data logger USB-Interface Set testo 174T mini data logger for programming and reading out the logger incl. USB interface for programming and reading out the logger Order No. 10 09 41746 10 09 41745 10 09 41747 Continued on next page 1 2 954

956

Measuring Systems Climate / Gas Room Thermometers testo 175 T3 Temperature Logger With its two connectors for external thermocouple sensors, the temperature logger testo 175 T3 is the perfect choice if you want to record temperatures in two different places simultaneously, for example to measure the flow and return temperature at radiators. The measured values are safely stored in the temperature logger for subsequent evaluation and documentation of measured data. Temperature - TE Typ K (NiCr-Ni) Measuring range: Accuracy: from -50 to +1000°C ± 0.5°C (-50 to +70°C) ± 1 digit ± 0.7% v. Mw. (+70.1 to 1000°C) ± 1 digit 0.1°C Resolution: Temperature - TE Typ T (Cu-CuNi) Measuring range: Accuracy: from -50 to +400°C ± 0.5°C (-50 to +70°C) ± 1 digit ± 0.7% v. Mw. (+70.1 to 400°C) ± 1 digit 0.1°C Resolution: Article 3 testo 175 T3 Temperature Logger Order No. 10 09 41753 testo 175 T3 Temperature Logger Sensors Article Water-proof immersion/insertion probe Robust immersion/penetration thermometer, tube with metal pro- Order No. 10 09 41292 tection, Tmax +230°C, e.g. for checking the temperature of boi- ling oil, TE of K type; fixed cable, straight Flexible immersion tip, low-mass Ideal for measurements in a small volume, e.g. in a petri dish Other sensors available on request. 10 09 40493 3 Other thermometers see page 880 Flow Meters Flowmeter, LAT Float-type flowmeter Measuring instrument for direct reading of the current flow of gases and low-viscosity fluids. Typical fields of application: laboratories, machine engineering, chemistry, glass industry, furnace construction, pharmacy, and medical engineering. Quality made in Germany! co d e b e w WWW4U105 Flowmeter Uni Possible Media Air, Ar, N2, CO2, CO, H2, O2, He, CH4, C3H8, N:3H, C4H10, Water, low-viscosity liquids Optional accessories Laboratory stand, integrated control valve, limit value alarms, special scales for any media, dual scales, oxygen cleaning Technical data: Material: Borosilicate glass measuring tube with burnt scale, nickel-plated brass, stainless steel -15°C to +120°C up to 16 bar (bumpless) ¼ ″ internal thread connctions Temperature: Pressure levels: Connections: Model Compact Standard Long Flow water 15 cm³/min – 1 l/min 1 cm³/min – 4.4 l/min 2 cm³/min – 4.8 l/min Flow air 20 cm³/min – 25 l/min 5 cm³/min – 100 l/min 0.05 l/min – 115 l/min Order No. 10 20 19000 10 20 19001 10 20 19002 Flowmeter Flux Technical data: Material SH Series: 316SS stainless steel, borosilicate glass measuring tube with fired scale Material OF Series: 316SS stainless steel, acrylic plastic Model SH ½ ″ SH 1 ″ OF ½ ″ OF 1 ″ Flow water ml 0.5 – 12 2 – 40 0.6 – 10 2 – 40 For other media on request Flow air ml 10 – 230 40 – 600 10 – 200 40 – 600 Temperature °C -15 – +120 -15 – +120 0 – +60 0 – +60 Order No. 10 20 19003 10 20 19004 10 20 19005 10 20 19006 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 955

957

Measuring Systems Gas / Time Gas Analysis Rubber Ballons, Deutsch & Neumann Rubber ballons (football bladders) with tube extension made of natural rubber/latex, red, for rotary evaporators. Hose length 14 cm, hose inner dia. 7 mm. Size 5 8 Contents l 1,5 to 2 3,5 to 4 Order No. 27 34 05002 10 34 15003 Rubber Ballons, IDL Article Rubber ballon, transparent co d e b e w WW7R3268 Order No. 27 00 04001 Timers Timer Clock, Amarell Electronic timer clocks With loud alarm signal, 3 functions: Timer up to 24 hours, with memory function, clock, stopclock up to bis 24 hours. With magnet, clip and foot. Dimensions 68 × 53 × 20 mm. co d e b e w WWERJ025 Article Electronic Timer Clock stopwatch Order No. 30 10 67950 Electronic Multifunction Watches, neoLab® Article 1 Timer An electronic multifunctional timer: clock, timer, and stopwatch in one Order No. 30 01 22002 • Timer counts from 0 to 24 hrs with a 1-second resolution. An acoustic alarm sounds for 60 seconds at the end of the pre-set time. WW2NY073 • Quartz watch features a 24 hr display and an accuracy of 0.5 seconds/day. • Stopwatch counts up to 24 hrs; also suitable as additioning stopwatch. Housing made of ABS-plastic, impact-resistant, complete with magnet, spring-clip and stand bar. Dimensions: 65 × 60 × 15 mm Article 2 Up-Down-Timer • Dual function: count down + stop watch Order No. 10 01 21730 • Running time easily adjustable, for max. 99 minutes 59 seconds • Loud signal • Large LCD display (approx. 20 mm) • Magnet attachment (flexible employment) • Tiltable condition foot • Supply inclusive battery button 1.5 V Dimensions: 70 x 45 x 10 mm Stopwatches, IDL Crown and addition stoppers 0 to 30 minutes counter, pin lever movement, 7 jewels, shock protected. Round metal case, 51 mm Ø Article 3 Crown stopper, 1/5 seconds timer Addition stopper, 1/5 seconds timer Crown stopper, 1/10 seconds timer 4 Addition stopper, 1/10 seconds timer Order No. 30 00 10003 30 00 10004 30 00 10001 30 00 10002 co d e b e w 1 2 3 4 WW7R3300 co d e b e w 956

958

Measuring Systems Time / Counters / Mechanics Timers Double Timer with Stopwatch, IDL Memory function, LED warning lamp (changes from green to red after expiry of the set time), magnet, foot and suspension, count down/count up 99 h, 59 min, 59 sec Housing size: 91 × 21 (30) × 76 mm Weight: 86 g Article Double timer with stopwatch Order No. 10 00 05080 Timer Digital, IDL Count down/count up, 99 h, 59 min, 59 sec, 4-timer, clip to mount and hang, magnet. Time specifications in 12/24, alarm function with snooze button. Housing dimensions: 72 × 67 × 14 mm Article 2-channel-timer digital Order No. 10 00 30044 Counters Tally Counters, Hand-Held, neoLab® 1 Tally Counters, Hand-Held co d e b e w WW7R3358 4 figure manual counter for counting pieces from 0-9999. Housing made of chrome-plat- ed metal or yellow plastic. With finger strap for ergonomical operating. Resetting to zero through turning knob. Housing diameter: Weight: Article Hand-held tally counter economy, metal Hand-held tally counter economy, yellow plastic Hand-held tally counter economy, metal with screw plat Order No. 88 01 17510 10 01 17511 10 01 17512 45 mm 66 g 2 Manual Tally Counter Hand-held counter with retaining ring, for counting up 0 to 9999. Mechanical, very reliable counter. White 4-digits numbers on black background. Reset through knurled knob. Housing made of zinc die-cast alloy. Quality made in Germany Temperature: Housing diameter: Weight: Article Hand-held tally counter 0 bis +60°C 47 mm ca. 115 g Order No. 88 01 17509 Length Calipers, BOCHEM Vernier caliper 3 Material Stainless steel, rust-proof 4 Caliper DIGITAL 5-digit LCD Accuracy ± 0.03 mm Reading 0.01, mm/inch selection Material Stainless steel, rust-proof Length mm 150 Length mm 150 Order No. 33 05 12110 Order No. 33 05 12116 1 2 3 4 co d e b e w WW7R3312 co d e b e w WW2NY191 co d e b e w WWQ7J067 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 957

959

Measuring Systems Mechanics co d e b e w WW6CF019 Torque Torque Measurement Device SAUTER, KERN Torque measurement device SAUTER DA Ideal for torque testing of bottles and other packaging with screw tops • Quick pin system: The four bottle mounts (holders) are pushed in, instead of being screwed in, to save time. This allows you to reconfigure quickly for other bottle sizes • Metal housing for durable usage in harsh environmental conditions • Capacity display: A bar lights up to show how much of the measuring range is still avail- able • Back-lit LCD graphic display • Rubber feet with anti-slip feature • Scope of supply: four bottle mounts with rubber coat, sturdy carry case • Internal data memory saves up to 500 measurements. The content of the memory can be transferred to the PC using optional software • USB and RS 232 data interfaces to the PC included • Peak Hold Mode to capture peaks • Can be used in both directions of rotation • Function to set limits: Input of an upper/lower limit value. A visual and acoustic signal supports the measuring operation • AUTO-OFF function Technical data: Selectable units: Measurement accuracy Internal measuring frequency: 1000 Hz Usable measuring range: Overload protection: Battery operation: Nm, lbf-in, kgf-cm, kgf-m, ft-lbf ± 0.5% of [Max] Dimensions (W×D×H): Net weight: 5 – 100% of [Max] 150% of [Max] internal, standard, operating time up to 18 h without backlighting, charging time approx. 14 h 250 × 160 × 100 mm approx. 3 kg Model DA 1-4 DA 5-3 DA 10-3 Measuring range Nm 1 5 10 Increment Nm 0.0002 0.001 0.002 Ø testing object mm 10–165 10–165 10–165 Order No. 10 58 39210 10 58 39211 10 58 39212 Accessories Article Plug-In AFI-1.0 for transferring measuring data from the internal data memory of the measuring instrument to a PC, e.g. in Microsoft Excel® Software AFH FAST High speed data transfer software for force-time-measurements USB/PC cable FL-A01 RS-232/PC cable FL-A04 Order No. 10 58 39213 10 58 39214 10 58 39215 10 58 39216 co d e b e w WW6CF018 1 958 Acoustics Sound Level Meter SAUTER, KERN 1 Sound level meter SAUTER SU Professional sound level meter • Professional sound level meter for measuring noise in areas such as, for example, the environment, mechanical applications, car industry and much more • Measures the sound intensity in the workplace • Helps in differentiating between normal noise influences, and excessive noise, e. g. in a production hall • Data interface RS-232 • Delivered in a hard carrying case Multi measuring functions: • Lp: Standard sound level measuring function • Leq: Energy equivalent sound level measuring mode (type A) • Ln: Shows the deviation from a pre-defined limit in % Selectable methods of evaluation: • A: As sensitive as the human ear • C: Sensitive for noisier environmental conditions, where there are machines, plant, mo- tors etc. • F: For areas where sound intensity does not vary Continued on next page

960

Measuring Systems Mechanics 1 Acoustics Functions: • Function to set limits: Programmable target value for go/no-go test values • TRACK function for continuous recording of variable environmental conditions • Peak Hold Mode to capture peaks • Internal memory for measured values, for 30 measurements. Can be displayed on the PC Technical data: Measurement accuracy: 3% of [Max] Dimensions (W×D×H): Battery operation: Net weight: 236 × 63 × 26 mm batteries as standard 4× 1.5 V AAA approx. 170 g Model SU 130. Type Lp A Lp C Lp F Increment dB 0.1 Order No. 10 58 39200 Accessories Article Data transfer software ATC-01, interface cable incl. Adjustment device ASU-01 Foam draft shield ASU-02 for regular adjustment of the sound level meter Order No. 10 58 39203 10 58 39204 10 58 39205 Sound level meter SAUTER SW Professional sound level meters of class I and class II in premium quality • Data logging function with date and time in the device and data transfer using MicroSD (4 GB) memory card (included with delivery), RS-232 or USB • Different sound pressure levels can be selected, such as, for example, Laeq, LcPeak, LaF, LaFMax, LaFMin, SD, SEL, E • Ideal for measurements for workplaces which are outdoors, e.g. at airports, on building sites, in road construction etc. with broad access to spectrum thanks to the highly-ac- curate 24-Bit A/D converter • Floating point evaluation for higher level of accuracy and better stability • The optimised analogue frontend switch reduces the ambient noise and increases the linear measuring range • A specially-developed algorithm permits a compliant dynamic range of more than 120 dB! (SW 1000: > 123 dB; SW 2000: > 122 dB) • Three profiles and 14 user-defined measurements can be calculated in parallel with different frequency and time weighting • LN statistics and display of the graph showing the progression of time • User-defined integral interval measurement up to a maximum of 24 hours is possible • Frequency weighting (filter) A, B, C, Z • Time interval during measurement: F (fast), S (slow), I (pulse) • Freely-definable limits for the output of an optical alarm signal • Peak Hold Mode to capture peaks • Octavo function for targeted sound analysis • TRACK function with graphic display of a measurement • Calibration mode (with optional calibrator) • Trigger mode: Analogue signal to switch the device on or off with 3.5 mm plug • Automatic measurement for timer function is possible • Measurement value frequency selectable: 10, 5, 2 Hz • Operating languages: german, English, french, Spanish, Portuguese • Delivered in a hard carrying case • Option of fitting a column on the rear of the housing, ¼ ″ thread Technical data: Applicable standards: Microphone: Permissible ambient temperature range: Output (DC or AC voltage): Mains operation: Battery operation: Dimensions (W×D×H): Net weight: IEC61672-1:2014-07, GB/T3785.1–2010, 1/1 octave according to IEC 61260:2014 ½ ″ -10°C – 50°C AC (max. 5 VRMS), DC (10 mV/DB) standard 4× 1.5 V AA, not provided as a standard, operating time up to 10 h 80 × 36 × 300 mm approx. 400 g Model Measuring range dB SW 1000 20–134 SW 2000 25–136 Frequency range kHz 0.003–20 0.02–12.5 Sensitivity V/Pa 50 m 40 m Order No. 10 58 39201 10 58 39202 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 959

961

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology CHAPTER OVERVIEW Microscopy, Histology 960 Dissecting Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960 Microscope Slides, Cover Glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961 Embedding, Coloring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963 Organization Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964 Optical Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965 Cold Light Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965 Microscopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966 Spectroscopy 971 Refractometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971 Polarimeters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . 975 Calibration Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984 Photometric Workplaces see Special Analysis . . . . 1025 Photometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Flame Photometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990 KNOWLEDGE Photometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986 Dissecting Sets Student/Chemist/Biologist Sets, Hammacher / IDL Article 1 Small chemist set, 5-piece 1 micro powder spatula, flexible, 150 mm Order No. 33 51 28010 1 twin spatula, flexible, 150 mm 1 scissors, sharp/sharp, straight, 145 mm 1 spoon spatula, 32×22 mm (SL×SW), 150 mm; 1 anatomy forceps, simple design, 130 mm Article 2 Chemists‘ set, 13 pieces, in a plastic case Article 3 Biologist set, 5-piece 1 delicate dissecting forceps, straight, 130 mm 1 dissecting needle with plastic haft, straight, 140 mm 1 vaccinating eyelet with plastic haft, 200 mm 1 scalpel with wooden handle, blade 30 mm 1 microscope scissors, straight, 105 mm Article 4 Set for students, 7 pieces, in a plastic case Article 5 Spoon and spatula set, 14 pieces, in a plastic case Order No. 10 51 13100 Order No. 33 51 28030 Order No. 10 51 13000 Order No. 10 51 13200 Dissecting Needles, Vaccinating Eyelets and Probes, Hammacher / IDL Dissecting needles Material Form rust-proof steel 6 Wironit with metal haft pointed, straight pointed, straight chromium-plated, with plastic haft pointed, straight 7 rust-proof steel with metal haft pointed, curved chromium-plated, with plastic haft pointed, curved 8 Wironit with metal haft 9 Wironit with metal haft AT Wironit with metal haft AK Wironit with plastic handle AL Wironit with metal haft AM Wironit with metal haft Lancet form Lancet form Lancet form Lancet form, offset Lancet form, offset pointed, straight pointed, straight pointed, offset rust-proof steel rust-proof steel with plastic haft Length mm 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 160 140 Order No. 33 51 19010 33 51 19013 33 51 19019 33 51 19025 33 51 19031 33 51 19034 33 51 19037 33 51 19043 33 51 19049 33 51 19052 33 51 19055 33 51 19058 33 51 19059 Continued on next page 1 3 4 2 5 9 6 7 8 AT AK AL AM AN AO AP 960

962

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology AQ AR AS BT BK BL BM BN BO BP co d e b e w co d e b e w WW7R3202 WW7R3206 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 961 Dissecting Sets Dissecting needle holders Material AN Aluminium haft, acc. to Kolle AO Aluminium top and plastic handle AP Wironit top and plastic handle Length mm 170 240 240 Order No. 33 51 19061 33 51 19064 33 51 19067 Inserts to fit the dissecting needle holders 33 51 19061, 19064 and 19067 Vaccinating eyelets Material AQ Wironit AR Wironit AS Wironit Wironit Wironit Wironit Length mm 50 50 50 60 60 60 Dissecting needles Material Form BT Wironit BK Wironit BL Wironit BM Wironit BN Wironit Lancet form straight curved half lancet spatula form Vaccinating eyelets Material BO Metal with plastic handle Probes Material BP Wironit Wironit Button Ø mm 1.0 1.0 Ø mm 1.5 2.5 4.0 1.5 2.5 4.0 Length mm 50 50 50 50 50 Length mm 200 Length mm 130 145 Order No. 33 51 19069 33 51 19070 33 51 19071 33 51 19072 33 51 19073 33 51 19074 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 Order No. 33 51 19079 33 51 19082 33 51 19085 33 51 19088 33 51 19091 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 Order No. 33 51 19097 Order No. 33 51 19100 33 51 19103 Microscope Slides, Cover Glasses Microscope Slides, IDL Microscope slides made of 3/4 white glass, 26 × 76 × 1,0 mm (acc. to ISO 8037), cleanly washed and polished, in fiber-free collapsible boxes of 50. Version Pcs/pack Order No. Edges cut Edges cut, matte 50 50 19 00 00001 19 00 00004 PU Pack/ Box 100 100 Cover Glasses, IDL Cover glasses made of pure white glass of hydrolytic class 1, cleanly cut, no bubbles and no streaks, ready for use, plastic boxes of 100 in cartons of 1000. Pcs/pack Order No. 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 19 00 01818 19 00 02020 19 00 02222 19 00 02424 19 00 02232 19 00 02240 19 00 02432 19 00 02436 19 00 02440 19 00 02450 19 00 02460 PU Pack/ Box 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Dimensions mm 18 × 18 20 × 20 22 × 22 24 × 24 22 × 32 22 × 40 24 × 32 24 × 36 24 × 40 24 × 50 24 × 60 co d e b e w

963

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology Microscope Slides, Cover Glasses Microscope Slides, Micro Life®, Hecht-ASSISTENT Slides for microscopic observation of long-term cultures of microorganisms. Supplied with a special pipette for flooding particles into the field of observation as well as for filling liquids into the vessel. Reusable after cleaning. Pack contents: 1 Micro Life®, 1 special pipette, 1 operating instructions. Minimum order quantity: 5. Article Microscope slides Micro Life® Order No. 19 18 02426 TOMO Adhesive Microscope Slides, neoLab® These advanced hydrophilic adhesive microscope slides perform excellent even under high temperature and high pH conditions. The hydrophilic surface of the slides, allows to reposition the tissue sections easily in the waterbath, if needed. Fields of Application: • Histology • Pathology • Cell research • Immunostaining Additional Information: • Unilateral marking spot (white) • Size (L×W×H): 75 × 25 × 1 mm • Corners: 45º • ISO 13485 Certified Article Adhesive microscope slides, white 75 × 25 × 1 Length × Width × Height mm Order No. 10 01 16305 PU pc/Pack 100 SuperFrost® Plus Adhesion Microscope Slides, IDL Extra white glass, approx. 25 × 75 × 1.0 mm, edges ground 90°, white marking area, in packs of 72. SuperFrost® microscope slides are manufactured using a new process technology, which positively charges the standard microscope slides permanently. The microscopic slides bind fresh frozen cuts and cytologic preparations by means of electrostatic attractive force. Article Order No. SuperFrost/Plus adhesion microscope slides ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 19 35 15000 Polysine Adhesion Microscope Slides, IDL Extra white glass, approx. 25 × 75 × 1.0 mm, edges ground 90°, white marking area, in packs of 72. The Polysine™ microscope slides are a glass product with permanent adhesive. This gives the microscope slides an excellent cell and tissue adhesion. Article Order No. Polysine adhesion microscope slides ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 19 35 20000 co d e b e w WW2NY363 962

964

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology Microscope Slides, Cover Glasses Micro Slide Dispenser, Hecht-ASSISTENT Micro slide dispenser, plastic accomodates 72 micro slides of the standard size 76 × 26 mm, dust-free storage. Without slides. Article Micro slide dispenser Order No. 29 18 07440 Erythrocytometers, Hecht-ASSISTENT Erythrocytometer with grid for counting blood corpuscles, CE-version. Article 1 Erythrocytometer, Thoma type, double Erythrocytometer, Thoma new type, double Erythrocytometer, Neubauer type, double Erythrocytometer, Neubauer impr. type, double Erythrocytometer, Fuchs-Rosenthal type, double Order No. 19 18 44072 19 18 44772 19 18 44172 19 18 44272 19 18 44972 1 Embedding, Coloring Staining Inserts, Hecht-ASSISTENT Staining inserts made of stainless steel, round, for microscope slides 26 mm wide, complete with glass jar with ground-in cover with knob. The ground-in cover prevents the staining solution from evaporating. Suitable for series staining, and particularly for Papanicolaou staining. for 14 microscope slides 24 microscope slides 42 microscope slides 98 microscope slides Outer Ø glass cylinder approx. mm 100 120 160 220 Order No. 19 18 83014 19 18 83024 19 18 83042 19 18 83098 Staining Racks, Hecht-ASSISTENT PVC staining rack with staining tray Pull-out rack for trays and jars from 38 to 62 cm, can be fixed in tilted position and hori- zontal position, complete with matching PVC staining rack and 2 Plexi clamps. Technical data: Heat resistance: Temperature resistance: Moisture absorption: Density: Dielectric strength: Tensile strength: E-Modul: Elongation at break: Spec. Volume resistance: Dimensions: Article Staining rack made of PVC +72°C / +161.6°F -15 – +60°C / +5 – 140°F 0.2% 1.45 g/cm³ 20 – 40 kV/mm 30 N/mm² 3000 N/mm² 33% > 1015 ca. 38 × 17 × 8 cm Order No. 29 18 21185 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 963

965

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology e co d e co d b b e w e w WW2NY066 1 2 3 co d e b e w WW2NY250 964 Organization Systems Microscope Slide Containers, neoLab® For microsope slides 76 × 26 mm. Stackable. Material: Polystyrol 1 For 25 microsope slides • cork inlay on bottom prevents damage to the slides • with hinged lid • index card inside of lid Dimensions (L × W × H): 141 × 88 × 35 mm Colour green red blue Order No. 29 01 22335 29 01 22336 29 01 22338 2 For 50 microscope slides With tight-closing overlap lid, for storing or mailing, with numbers on the bottom to iden- tify the slides. Fitting at LaboBox®-Magazine Dimensions (L × W × H): 177 × 83 × 32 mm Colour white yellow blue green red 2 For 50 microscope slides, for freezing Same as above but made of PC, -130 to +130°C autoclavable. Colour yellow Order No. 29 01 22315 29 01 22345 29 01 22346 29 01 22347 29 01 22348 Order No. 10 01 22200 LaboBox®-Magazine Slide-in magazine for 50er neoLab microscope slide containers, 2 × 4 slots. Order No. 24 01 22318 Article LaboBox® magazine 3 For 100 microsope slides • cork padding on the bottom prevents damage to slides • with snap closure • index card inside of lid Dimensions (L × W × H): 210 × 179 × 35 mm Colour green yellow blue red Order No. 29 01 22435 29 01 22436 29 01 22437 29 01 22438 Microscope Slide Magazines, neoLab® Stackable magazine with 50 – 100 slots for vertical storage of standard slides 76 × 26 mm, consisting of a box with a transparent hinged lid and removable colored in- serts with 50 – 100 numbered slots. The slots are wide enough to hold two slides, to double the capacity (100 – 200 slides per magazine). Without the insert, the magazine can hold 200 – 400 slides. Not suitable for autoclave. Each magazine supplied with 2 index cards. Dimensions of magazine for 50 – 100 slides: 140 × 82 × 86 (L × W × H) Dimensions of magazine for 100 – 200 slides: 245 × 82 × 86 (L × W × H) Colour Places blue 50-100 green 50-100 pink 50-100 white 50-100 yellow 50-100 Order No. 29 01 77580 29 01 77581 29 01 77582 29 01 77583 29 01 77584 Colour Places blue 100-200 green 100-200 pink 100-200 white 100-200 yellow 100-200 Order No. 29 01 74570 29 01 74571 29 01 74572 29 01 74573 29 01 74574

966

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology Optical Cleaning Lens Cleaning Paper, Hahnemühle Soft and fiber-free paper, recommended for cleaning sensitive optical surfaces • Thin and soft paper • No separation of fibers Dimensions mm 10 × 15 Packing type 6 × 100 Order No. 10 15 91015 PU pc/Pack 600 Dry block, Hahnemühle The strips remove excessive liquid on the specimen slides. They are used for fast, clean and easy drying of dyed samples for microscopy. 1 block = 50 strips Width mm 37 Length mm 100 Order No. 10 15 92750 PU pc/Pack 100 co d e b e w co d e b e w WW6PB021 WW6PB026 co d e b e w WW2NY156 co d e b e w WW2NY332 Lens-Cleaning Wipes, neoLab® For cleaning optical and sensitive surfaces. Ideal for all types of lenses, microscopic slides, cells, cover glasses, etc. Surfaces are not scratched and remain free of dust and fibers. Format 10 × 13 cm. Stapled in blocks of 250 sheets. Article Lens cleaning wipes Order No. 37 01 17218 Cleaning Set for Microscopes, neoLab® Everything you need to gently clean the microscope optic in a practical set! In accordance with the recommendations of leading microscope producers, the set con- sists of: • Lens cleaning paper, non-fuzzing • Cotton, non-fuzzing + bamboo stick • Pull-off stick • Cleaning concentrate, 5 ml • Optic cleaning mix, 100 ml • Dist. water, 100 ml • Brush with bellow Article Cleaning set for microscopes Order No. 10 01 74620 Cold Light Sources Cold Light Sources, A. KRÜSS Optronic A cold light source is external illumination for microscopes or spectroscopes. Due to the greatly reduced infrared content of the light, the sample is hardly heated. This is important for living biological samples that would be killed by the heat of the halogen lighting. In the gemmological field cold light sources are used, because complex shaped objects can be illuminated precisely and without shadows with a twin-arm light conductor. Cold light sources Article 1 Cold light source KL5110 Colour temperature: Order No. 65 61 15110 1 co d e b e w WWY3J017 3050 K halogen lamp 8 V, 20 W 100 – 240 V 170 × 100 × 55 mm 500 g without light conductor Illumination: Power supply: Dimensions: Weight: Equipment: co d e b e w Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 965

967

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology Cold Light Sources Article 1 Cold light source KL5120 Colour temperature: 3050 K Order No. 65 61 19010 Illumination: Power supply: Dimensions: Weight: Equipment: halogen lamp 8 V, 20 W, adjustable 100 – 240 V 200 × 118 × 186 mm 2000 g built-in adapter for spectroscope illumination, without fiber optic light conductor Article 2 Cold light source KL5125 Colour temperature: 3350 K Order No. 65 61 19020 2 Illumination: Power supply: Dimensions: Weight: Equipment: halogen lamp 15 V, 150 W 230 V 245 × 200 × 150 mm 4000 g without fiber optic light conducto co d e b e w WWY3J014 3 Microscopes Microscopes, A. KRÜSS Optronic Transmitted light microscopes MBL2000, binocular High-performance microscope for a wide range of applications. Extensively expandable: e.g. with phase-contrast setting, dark field condenser, micrometre setup, planachromatic lenses and additional eyepieces. Technical data: • 45° angled view, 360° rotatable (with phototube: MBL2000-T and MBL2000-T-LED) • 10× plane eyepieces, focal length 25 mm, field number: 18 • symmetrical eye distance adjustment 51–75 mm • diopter adjustment on both sides with scale • 4-fold revolving nosepiece • lenses: achromatic: 4×/NA 0.10 and 10×/NA 0.25 and 40×/NA 0.65 and 100×/NA 1.25 • double lens Abbe condenser, NA 1.25, with centring, height adjustment and filter holder • illumination with brightness control: Halogen bulb or LED (MBL2000-LED, MBL2000-T-LED) • cross table with memory scale 0.1 mm pitch, movement range left-right 74 mm, for- wards-backwards 30 mm • coaxial coarse/fine knob with a range of 30 mm each with mobility adjustment and quick focusing adjustment • iris diaphragm, pivoting filter holder, height adjustment, glass filters in blue, yellow and green • with external mains adapter 100 – 240 V • dust cover Article 3 MBL2000 transmitted light microscope MBL2000-LED transmitted light microscope with LED MBL2000-T trinocular MBL2000-T-LED trinocular with LED Order No. 65 61 10107 10 61 10108 10 61 10109 10 61 10110 Incident light microscope MBL3300, metallurgical with phototube Particularly suitable for metal structure and surface analysis, for quality assessment, raw material analysis and for expertise after heat treatment. Technical data: • 45° angled view, 360° rotatable with phototube • 10× plane eyepieces incl. eyecups, focal length 25 mm, field number: 18 • symmetrical eye distance adjustment 51–75 mm • diopter adjustment on both sides with scale • 3-fold revolving nosepiece • lenses: planachromatic 5×/NA 0.13 and 10×/NA 0.25 and 50×/NA 0.6 • double lens Abbe condenser, NA 1.25, with centring and height adjustment • cross table: XY-stage, movement range 120x80 mm • illumination: 6 V 30 W, adjustable • iris diaphragm, filter holder, blue filter, green filter (optional) • mains voltage: 90 – 240 V, removable mains cable • dust cover Article 4 MBL3300 metallurgical microscope Order No. 10 61 13300 Continued on next page 1 4 966

968

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology Microscopes Transmitted light inverted microscope MBL3200 with phototube Suitable for the identification and analysis of biological substances and cultures as well as for micromanipulation due to a large distance between preparation and condenser. The lenses have a large working distance, e.g. to allow samples to be seen through the base of Petri dishes and cell culture dishes. Technical data: • angled view with phototube • 10× plane eyepieces, field number: 22 • symmetrical eye distance adjustment 51–75 mm • diopter adjustment with scale • 4-fold revolving nosepiece • lenses: planachromatic 4×/NA 0.10 and 10×/NA 0.25 and 40×/NA 0.65 and PH20×/NA 0.40 • double lens condenser • cross table: XY-stage, movement range 118x80 mm • illumination: 6 V 30 W, adjustable • iris diaphragm, filter holder, blue filter, green filter • mains voltage: 90 – 240 V, removable mains cable • dust cover Article 5 MBL3200 transmitted light inverted microscope Order No. 10 61 13200 5 Transmitted light microscope MML1200 for laboratories, teaching and production Student microscope, laboratory microscope for medical practices, production and quali- ty control. • Technical data: • monocular tube, 45° angled view, 360° rotatable • 10× wide-field plane eyepieces • 3-fold revolving nosepiece • lenses: 4×/NA 0.10, 10×/NA 0.25, 40×/NA 0.65 • object plate with preparation clamps • double lens Abbe condenser NA 1.25, with iris diaphragm and filter holder • illumination: 12 V 10 W halogen with reflector • with external mains adapter 100 – 240 V • dust cover Article 6 MML1200 transmitted light microscope MML 1002 15x micrometre eyepieces MML 1003 stage micrometre Order No. 65 61 11200 10 61 11201 10 61 11202 Stereomicroscopes MSL4000-10/30-IL-TL for hobby and education This microscope allows you to decide freely where you want to work, since the recharge- able battery means it can be used anywhere. A wide range of accessories available. Technical data: • 45° angled view • 10× wide field eyepieces incl. eyecups • symmetrical eye distance adjustment • diopter adjustment • 2-fold revolving nosepiece 1× and 3×, optional 2× and 4× • magnification 10× and 30×, optional 20× and 40× • incident and transmitted light: Halogen bulb or LED • contrast plate glass and black/white, interchangeable • with external mains adapter 100 – 240 V, rechargeable battery • dust cover Article 7 MSL4000-10/30- IL-TL incident and transmitted light microscope 10 61 14130 MSL4332 20× wide field eyepieces 10 61 14132 Order No. 6 Stereomicroscopes MSZ5000-IL-TL for professional applications A high performance stereomicroscope with a large zoom range, perfectly suited for labo- ratory investigations, quality control or assembly work due to its large working distance and high depth of focus. Various eyepieces and auxiliary lenses for adjusting magnifica- tion and working distance are available as accessories. Technical data: • 45° angled view, 360° rotatable (with phototube: MSZ5000-T-IL-TL and MSZ5000-T-IL-T-LED) • 10× wide field eyepieces incl. eyecups, field number: 20 • symmetrical eye distance adjustment 51 – 75 mm • diopter adjustment on both sides • infinitely variable zoom with 7 – 45× magnification, expandable to 14-90× • high depth of focus co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Continued on next page 7 967

969

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology Microscopes • infinitely variable incident and transmitted light: halogen bulb or LED • object field 28.6 – 4.44 mm • working distance: approx. 90 mm • contrast plate glass and black/white, interchangeable • mains adaptor: 230 V, optionally available with 115 V, removable mains cable • dust cover Article 1 MSZ5000-IL-TL-LED incident and transmitted light microscope MSZ5000-T-IL-TL incident and transmitted light microscope with phototube MSZ5000-T-IL-TL-LED incident and transmitted light microscope with phototube and LED MSZ5420-N 20× wide field eyepieces MSZ5418-N auxiliary lens 2× MSZ5405-N auxiliary lens 0.5× Order No. 10 61 15000 10 61 15003 10 61 15004 10 61 15005 10 61 15006 10 61 15007 Microscopes, KERN Transmitted light microscopes KERN OBE-12/13 • The OBE-12/13 range stands out through its exclusive, dynamic device. The storage compartment on the back will enables quick practical storage for your power cable. Thanks to the USB connection technology, it is also possible to supply power using an external powerbank • The infinitely dimmable 3 W LED guarantees bright illumination of your sample • A further highlight is the butterfly lens barrel which is integrated as standard and which enables you to achieve the ideal viewing angle. The height-adjustable and thereby fo- cusable 1.25 Abbe condenser with aperture diaphragm is a further quality feature of the OBE range and guarantees the very best concentration of light • Height adjustment of the fully-equipped mechnical stage is carried out using a coarse and fine focusing knob on both sides. The ergonomically designed coaxial drive enables you to work with the samples and move them rapidly • A large selection of different eyepieces and objectives is also available • A protective dust cover, eye cups, as well as multi-lingual user instructions are included in the scope of the delivery • A C-mount adapter is required to connect a camera to the trinocular version Scope of application Training, haematology, sediment investigation, doctor’s surgeries Applications/Samples Translucent, thin, high-contrast, less complex samples (e.g. plant tissue, coloured cells/ parasites) • Finite optical system (DIN) • 4-fold lens revolving unit • Butterfly 30° • Dioptre compensation (one-sided) (for binocular and trinocular models) • Overall dimensions (W×D×H) 360 × 150 × 320 mm • Net weight approx. 4.488 kg Model 2 OBE 121 Monocular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic Equipment Order No. 10 58 38021 objective, 4×/10×/40×, 3 W LED (transmitting) 3 OBE 122 Binocular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic ob- jective, 4×/10×/40×, 3 W LED (transmitting) 4 OBE 124 Trinocular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic ob- jective, 4×/10×/40×, 3 W LED (transmitting) OBE 131 Monocular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic ob- jective, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 3 W LED (transmitting) OBE 132 Binocular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic ob- jective, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 3 W LED (transmitting) OBE 134 Trinocular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic ob- jective, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 3 W LED (transmitting) 10 58 38022 10 58 38024 10 58 38031 10 58 38033 10 58 38034 Continued on next page 1 co d e b e w WW6CF016 3 2 4 968

970

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology Microscopes Transmitted light microscopes KERN OBL-12/13 • The OBL-1 series stands out through its infinity optical unit and is therefore ideally suit- ed for all transmitted illumination applications for the most demanding users. The robust and ergonomic stand base guarantees safe and comfortable working • Depending on the application, there is a choice of models with strong, continuously dimmable 3 W LED or 20 W halogen illumination (Philips) • The fixed, pre-centred and focusable 1.25 ABBE condenser with aperture diaphragm and field diaphragm gives you a simplified Koehler illumination, without having to move the centre • The large mechanical stage table and its specimen holder holds up to two samples at the same time and is quick and easy to focus using a coaxial coarse and fine focusing knob on both sides • A large selection of eyepieces, objectives and colour filters as well as a darkfield con- denser, a simple polarising unit, different phase contrast kits through to HBO and LED fluorescence units are available to you as accessories • A protective dust cover, eye cups, as well as multi-lingual user instructions are included in the scope of the delivery • A C-mount adapter is required to connect a camera to the trinocular version Scope of application Haematology, urology, gynaecology, dermatology, pathology, microbiology and parasi- tology, immunology, oncology, entomology, vets, sewage treatment plants, water analy- sis, breweries Applications/Samples Translucent, thin, low-contrast, challenging samples (e.g. living mammal cells, bacteria, tissue) • Infinity optical system • 4-fold lens revolving unit • Siedentopf 30° inclined, 360° rotatable • Dioptre compensation one-sided • Overall dimensions (W×D×H) 395 × 200 × 380 mm • Net weight approx. 6.688 kg Model OBL 125 Binocular, eyepiece WF 10×/Ø 20 mm, objective Infinity Equipment Order No. 10 58 34125 E-Plan, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 6 V/20 W Halogen (trans- mitting) OBL 127 Binocular, eyepiece WF 10×/Ø 20 mm, objective Infinity E-Plan, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 3 W LED (transmitting) OBL 135 Trinocular, eyepiece WF 10×/Ø 20 mm, objective Infinity E-Plan, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 6 V/20 W Halogen (transmitting) OBL 137 Trinocular, eyepiece WF 10×/Ø 20 mm, objective Infinity E-Plan, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 3 W LED (transmitting) OBL 145 Binocular, eyepiece WF 10×/Ø 20 mm, objective Infinity Plan, 4×/PH10×/PH40×/100×, 6 V/20 W Halogen (trans- mitting) 5 OBL 155 Trinocular, eyepiece WF 10×/Ø 20 mm, objective Infinity Plan, 4×/PH10×/PH40×/100×, 6 V/20 W Halogen (trans- mitting) 10 58 34127 10 58 34135 10 58 34137 10 58 34145 10 58 34155 5 Accessories Article C-Mount adapter 0.5x OBB-A1515 Order No. 10 58 34156 Transmitted light microscope KERN OBT-1 • The OBT-1 range is a high-quality school microscope, which will impress you with its intuitive control elements, sturdy construction and modern design • The continuous dimmable 1W LED guarantees optimum illumination of the samples and also ensures long service life. Mobile use is also no problem through optional battery operation • The simple 0.65 condenser lens with rotating aperture diaphragm on the OBT 101 en- sures the very best concentration of light and illumination of the sample. The OBT 102 - OBT 106 models have a 1.25 Abbe condenser which is height-adjustable and can therefore be focussed and has an aperture diaphragm, which ensures the very best concentration of light • To focus the object, all models have a coarse and fine focusing knob on both sides. The mechanical angle table enables you to work with the samples and move them rapidly (with model OBT 103 - OBT 106) • A large selection of different eyepieces and objectives is also available • A dust cover as well as user instructions are included with the delivery co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 969 Continued on next page

971

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology Microscopes Scope of application: Primary school, secondary school, training, hobby use Applications/Samples: Translucent, thin, high-contrast, less complex samples (e.g. plant tissue, coloured cells/ parasites) • Finite optical system (DIN) • OBT 101: 3-fold lens revolving unit • OBT 102 - OBT 106: 4-fold lens revolving unit • Lens barrel 45° tilt/360° rotatable • Dioptre compensation one-sided (for binocular models) • Overall dimensions (W×D×H 195 × 147 × 325 mm • Net weight approx. 2,2 kg Model OBT 101 Monokular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic Equipment Order No. 10 58 39101 objective, 4×/10×/40×, 1 W LED (transmitted), table fix 1 OBT 102 Monokular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic 10 58 39102 objective, 4×/10×/40×, 1 W LED (transmitted), table fix OBT 103 Monokular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic 10 58 39113 objective, 4×/10×/40×, 1 W LED (transmitted), mecha- nical table 2 OBT 104 Monokular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic objective, 4×/10×/40×, 1 W LED (transmitted), mecha- nical table OBT 105 Monokular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic objective, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 1 W LED (transmitted), mechanical table OBT 106 Monokular, ocular HWF 10×/Ø 18 mm, achromatic objective, 4×/10×/40×/100×, 1 W LED (transmitted), mechanical table 10 58 39104 10 58 39105 10 58 39106 2 co d e b e w WW6CF010 3 C-mount Microscope Cameras, KERN The specialists in microscopy for measurement, counting, documentation, archiving and image processing • A large selection of microscope cameras is available for your individual applications. • The universal microscope cameras can be used anywhere and can be connected to the microscope as well as to a laptop or PC using the USB cable (USB 2.0 or USB 3.0, see table) • The power supply is through the USB cable, which means that no additional power supply is required. • Your daily work is made significantly easier with the very best synchronisation, a high frame rate as well as stable image performance together with our Microscope VIS soft- ware which we deliver with the product. • For details about our software please refer to the “Software” section in the catalogue (page 97) or see www.kern-sohn.com. • These universal cameras can also be connected to all microscopes available on the market offering the appropriate C-mount adapter for the particular microscope USB eyepiece cameras KERN ODC-87/88 • With the KERN eyepiece cameras, you can convert your standard microscope to a digital microscope by replacing one eyepiece of your non-digital microscope with an eyepiece camera and connect this to your computer via USB. • The universal eyepiece can be connected to the microscope as well as to a laptop or PC using the USB cable (2.0 or 3.0, see table). • The power supply is through the USB cable, which means that no additional power supply is required. • Your daily work is made significantly easier with the very best synchronisation, a high frame rate as well as stable image performance together with our Microscope VIS soft- ware which we deliver with the product. • As well as the camera, the delivery includes a simplified version of our multi-lingual KERN Microscope VIS software, a USB cable (length: 1.5 m) and an object micrometer to calibrate the software 4 970 Model 3 ODC 874 3 MP 4 ODC 881 5 MP Resolution Interface USB 2.0 USB 3.0 Sensor Sensor size Order No. FPS 3 – 7.5 CMOS 1/2.7 ″ 15 – 30 CMOS 1/2.5 ″ 10 58 30874 10 58 30881 Continued on next page 1

972

Optical Investigations Microscopy, Histology / Spectroscopy Microscopes C-mount microscope cameras KERN ODC-82/83 • Through the proven CMOS technology in connection with the USB 2.0 or USB 3.0, the 5 images are shown quickly and clearly. • These cameras are also ideal for more demanding applications, such as, for example, darkfield, phase contrast and for fluorescence applications. • As well as the camera, the delivery includes our multi-lingual KERN Microscope Basic KERN OXM 901 software, a USB cable (length 2 m), various eyepiece adapters and an object micrometer to calibrate the software. • Please order the appropriate C-mount adapter to fit your KERN microscope now Model ODC 824 3.1 MP ODC 825 5.1 MP ODC 831 3.1 MP ODC 832 5.1 MP Resolution Interface USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 3.0 USB 3.0 Sensor Sensor size Order No. CMOS 1/2 ″ CMOS 1/2.5 ″ FPS 11.5 – 45 6.8 – 55 27.3 – 53.3 CMOS 1/3 ″ 14.2 – 101.2 CMOS 1/2.5 ″ 10 58 30824 10 58 30825 10 58 30831 10 58 30832 5 6 C-Mount HDMI mikroscope camera KERN ODC-85 • The ODC 851 HDMI microscope camera has been specially developed for direct HDMI connection to your HDMI compatible display device. The images can be stored directly onto the SD card delivered with the device. As an alternative, a USB 2.0 connection is also still available to connect a laptop or PC • The ODC 852 HDMI autofocus camera offers a perfect and efficient solution for modern microscopy. The autofocus function automatically detects and adjusts the focus level so that you have a perfectly sharp image at any time. Ideal for all applications using a KERN stereo microscope • The HDMI connection can be used to transfer the real-time images from the ODC 852 directly to an HDMI capable rendering device or to save them to the SD card comprised in the delivery. As an alternative, the data can be transmitted via WLAN module (ODC 852) or USB 2.0 cable to a PC or laptop computer in combination with the KERN OXM 902 software comprised in the delivery • Power supply is from an external 12 V power unit • Scope of delivery ODC 851: camera, USB mouse, USB 2.0 cable, HDMI cable, SD card (16 GB) and Microscope VIS Basic KERN OXM 901 camera software • Scope of delivery ODC 852: camera, USB mouse, USB 2.0 cable, HDMI cable, SD card (16 GB), WLAN adapter and Microscope VIS Basic KERN OXM 901 camera software • Please order the appropriate C-mount adapter to fit your KERN microscope now 6 Model ODC 851 2 MP HDMI, USB 2.0, SD 30 – 60 CMOS 1/2.8 ″ 10 58 30851 Resolution Interface FPS Sensor Sensor size Order No. Refractometers Handheld Refractometers, A. KRÜSS Optronic Precision instruments for quick daily use. Various scales and functions ensure there is a suitable refractometer for every field of application. co d e b e w WWY3J009 Type 7 HRB32-T1) HRB90 Measuring range 0–32% Brix 0–90% Brix 8 HRND nD 1.3330–1.5170 9 HRB92-T AT HRB18-T HRB82-T HRKFZ-T HRS10-T HRH30-T 58–92% Brix 38–43° Bé 12–27% water content in honey 0–18% Brix 45–82% Brix -50–0ºC 1.10–1.30 g/cm³ 0–10% 1.000–1.070 12–30% water content in honey Measurement accuracy ±0.2% Brix ±0.2% Brix (with thermometer 6–36°C) nD ±0.0005 (with thermometer 6–36°C) 0.5% Brix ±0.5° Bé ±0.5% water content in honey ±0.1% Brix ±0.2% Brix ±5ºC ±0,01 g/cm³ ±0.1% ±0.001 ±0.1% water content in honey Order No. 10 61 11000 63 61 11001 63 61 11002 10 61 11003 10 61 11004 10 61 11005 10 61 11006 10 61 11007 10 61 11008 1) with automatic temperature compensation 7 9 8 AT co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 971

973

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy co d e b e w WW6CF014 Refractometers Analogue refractometers ORA, KERN Refraction index measurement for laboratories and industry • The models in the KERN ORA-S range are universal, maintenance-free analogue man- ual refractometers • The practical and robust design means that it can be used simply, efficiently and on a permanent basis, day in day out • The manual effort to convert the value is avoided by the use of several selectable scales and thereby eliminates user error • These scales have been specially developed, calculated precisely and checked. Anoth- er key feature is the very thin, clear lines • The optical system and the prism cover are made from special materials, which enable you to measure with low tolerances • All models are fitted with an eyepiece which can be adjusted easily and smoothly to different visual capacities • The models which are marked “ATC” have automatic temperature compensation, which makes it possible to obtain precise measurements at different environmental tempera- tures (10°C to 30°C) • Included in the scope of supply: storage box, calibration solution, calibration block, pi- pette, screw driver, cleaning cloth Technical data: Material: Chrome-plated pressure die casting made of alu- minum-copper alloy Measuring temperature without ATC: 20°C Measuring temperature with ATC: Dimensions box (W×D×H): Length: Net weight: 10° to 30°C 205 × 75 × 55 mm ca. 130 to 200 mm (depending on the model) ca. 135 to 600 g (depending on the model) Model ORA 20BA ORA 32BA ORA 62BA ORA 80BB ORA 1RE Accessories Measuring range % Brix 0 – 20 0 – 32 28 – 62 0 – 80 1.333 – 1.405 nD 1.405 – 1.468 nD 1.468 – 1.517 nD Increment % Brix 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.005 nD 0.005 nD 0.005 nD with ATC ATC ATC — — Order No. 10 58 38020 10 58 38032 10 58 38062 10 58 38080 10 58 38010 Article Prism coverplate with integrated LED-Diode Leather bag Calibration solution distilled water, volume 2.5 ml Calibration solution saturated salt solution, volume 2.5 ml Calibration solution Alpha-Bromonaphthalene, volume 2.5 ml Prism coverplate (spare) Order No. 10 58 38131 10 58 38132 10 58 38137 10 58 38134 10 58 37814 10 58 38136 Abbe-Refractometers, A. KRÜSS Optronic Abbe refractometer AR4 and AR2008 The models AR4 and AR2008 are two classic Abbe refractometers. With the AR2008 the evaluation of the measurement takes place digitally and with the AR4 the measured value is then read via an eyepiece. AR4: The AR4 determines the refractive index and the sugar content of liquid samples. The scales can be adjusted manually using the drive knob. The measured value is then read via an eyepiece. The refractometer can be connected to a thermostat, e.g. the circulation thermostat PT31 in order to maintain the temperature at 20°C or 25°C. The temperature will be measured with the integrated digital thermometer and shown on the LCD display. The measurement of solid samples is also possible. AR2008: The AR2008 measures the refractive index or the sugar content of liquid samples. The output of the measurement results including temperature is performed digitally. A serial interface allows you to directly send the measured values together with the date and time of day to a PC or printed out. The refractometer can be coupled with a thermostat, e.g. the circulation thermostat PT80. In this combination, the device measures the refractive index within the temperature range of 5 – 80°C. An automatic temperature compensation for the Brix scale can be optionally connected. The measurement of solid samples is also possible. Measurement accuracy nD/% Brix ±0.0002/±0.1 Measuring range nD/% Brix 1.3000–1.7200/0–95 Resolution nD/% Brix 0.0005/0.25 Temperature range °C 0 – 99 ±0.0002/±0.1 1.3000–1.7200/0–95 0.0001/0.1 0 – 99 Order No. 63 61 94004 63 61 92008 co d e b e w WWY3J007 1 Type Scales 2 1 AR 4 Refractive index (nD), concentration of sucrose [%Brix] 2 AR2008 Refractive index (nD), concentration of sucrose [%Brix] 972

974

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Refractometers Digital Refractometers ORF-E, KERN Digital refractometers ORF-E Digital refractive index measurement for universal applications • The models in the KERN ORF-E range are accurate, universal and maintenance-free digital manual refractometer • Other key features are the easy handling and sturdiness • The handy and robust design allows the easy, efficient and sustainable use in everyday life • The large, easy-to-read TFT colour display with integrated temperature display supports the user to reliably determine the measurement. • The integrated automatic temperature compensation (ATC) means that you can work easily and quickly, as you do not have to manually convert the measurement • Due to the fact that the refractometer has been calibrated at the factory, this guarantees that it can be used immediately for accurately measuring your sample co d e b e w WW6CF015 Included in the scope of supply: • Calibration solution • Pipette • Storage case • 2 × AAA batteries • Leather case • Screwdriver • Cleaning cloth Technical data: Measuring temperature: Dimensions tot. (W×D×H): Net weight: Power supply: Battery lifetime: ATC: Sample volumes: Automatic energy management: 10° to 40°C 145 × 67 × 40 mm ca. 200 g 2 × AAA (1,5 V) approx. 5,000 measurements automatic temperature compensation, does not apply to the refractive index scale 2 to 3 drops AUTO-OFF after 90 seconds Measuring range nD/% Brix 10 58 34501 0 – 45% 1.3330 – 1.4098 nD ± 0.0003 nD 0.0001 nD 10 58 34502 Increment nD/% Brix 0.10% Accuracy nD/% Brix ± 0.2 % Order No. Model ORF 45BE ORF 45RE Accessories Article Calibration solution distilled water, volume 2.5 ml Calibration solution triethyl citrate, volume 2.5 ml Leather case for digital refractometer (spare part) Order No. 10 58 38137 10 58 38138 10 58 38139 Digital Handheld Refractometers, A. KRÜSS Optronic DR101-60 / DR201-95 / DR-301-95 Digital handheld refractometer with two different scales, Brix, RI. Handling is fast and very easy, distilled water is used for calibration. The waterproof case allows the refractometer DR101-60 to be rinsed under running water. With automatic temperature compensation. DR301-95 offers 2 additional user-defined scales and can be connected to a computer. Specialities: optional temperature compensation feature and upper and lower tolerance alarm. Technical data: DR101-60 Temp. measurement range: 10 – 40°C Temperature accuracy: Temperature compensation: 10 – 40°C IP Code: Dimension (W×H×D): Weight: Operating voltage: IP65 110×62×32 mm 130×80×40 mm 180×100×60 mm 160 g 1.5 V battery DR201-95 10 – 40°C ±0,5°C 10 – 40°C IP64 DR301-95 10 – 40°C ±0,5°C 10 – 40°C IP50 200 g 1.5 V battery ±0,5°C 500 g 9 V battery (power supply incl.) co d e b e w WWY3J008 1 Type Measuring range nD/% Brix Measurement accuracy nD/% Brix 1 DR101-60 1.3330–1.4419/0–60 0.0005/±0.35 2 DR201-95 1.3330–1.5318/0–95 0.0003/±0.2 3 DR301-95 1.3330–1.5318/0–95 0.00015/±0.1 Order No. Resolution nD/% Brix 0.0001/0.1 10 61 11010 0.0001/0.1 10 61 12195 0.0001/0.1 63 61 30195 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 973

975

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy co d e b e w WWY3J003 Refractometers Digital Refractometers Series 6000, A. KRÜSS Optronic The DR6000 refractometers work with hardly any service and are very quiet, good for long-term work in the lab. Very easy to operate due to an intuitive touch screen. Optional connections to printer, PC or network provide highest flexibility. High precision through integrated peltier thermostat (T-model). Flow measurement cells enable continuous meas- uring (TF-model). The devices are used wherever a ubstance in watery solutions has to be measured. Areas of usage: beverage, chemistry, pharma, food, paper, sewerage, textile, petrochemistry, cosmetics. Type Measurement acc. nD/% Brix ±0.0001/±0.1 ±0.0001/±0.1 ±0.0001/±0.1 ±0.0001/±0.1 ±0.0001/±0.1 ±0.0001/±0.1 Measuring range nD/% Brix DR6000 1.3200-1.5800/0-95 DR6000-T 1.3200-1.5800/0-95 DR6000-TF 1.3200-1.5800/0-95 DR6100 1.3200-1.7000/0-95 DR6100-T 1.3200-1.7000/0-95 DR6100-TF 1.3200-1.7000/0-95 DR6200 1.32000-1.58000/0-95 ±0.00002/±0.02 1 DR6200-T 1.32000-1.58000/0-95 ±0.00002/±0.02 DR6200-TF 1.32000-1.58000/0-95 ±0.00002/±0.02 DR6300 1.32000-1.70000/0-95 ±0.00002/±0.02 DR6300-T 1.32000-1.70000/0-95 ±0.00002/±0.02 DR6300-TF 1.32000-1.70000/0-95 ±0.00002/±0.02 Temperature Resolution °C nD/% Brix 10-80 0.0001/0.1 10-80 0.0001/0.1 10-80 0.0001/0.1 10-80 0.0001/0.1 10-80 0.0001/0.1 0.0001/0.1 10-80 0.00001/0.01 10-80 0.00001/0.01 10-80 0.00001/0.01 10-80 0.00001/0.01 10-80 0.00001/0.01 10-80 0.00001/0.01 10-80 Order No. 63 61 16000 63 61 26000 10 61 16002 63 61 36100 63 61 46100 10 61 16102 63 61 56200 63 61 66200 10 61 16202 63 61 76300 63 61 86300 10 61 16302 co d e b e w WWY9G001 T versions are equipped in addition with Peltier element. TF versions with integrated Peltier temperature control and flow measuring cell. Digital Laboratory Refractometers – Abbemat 3X00, Anton Paar The compact Abbemat 3X00 refractometers are characterised by reliability, precision, and convenience: Abbemat refractometers offer a unique combination of technical expertise and user-friendly operation for measuring the refractive index and concentration. Thanks to premium technology and the compact design of the Abbemats 3X00, time-consuming measurements are replaced by highly efficient quality assurance processes. Optionally, a concentration can be output directly simultaneously with measuring the refractive index. In addition to the pre-installed concentration scales (refractive index, Brix, fructose, invert sugar, sucrose), more than 100 additional scales are available on request. Choose from three refractometers developed to match any type of application and any budget. The Abbemat 3000 measures the sample temperature to an accuracy of ±0.05°C and is equipped with an automatic temperature compensation. The Abbemat 3100 and the Abbemat 3200 additionally have an integrated Peltier element for accurate control of the sample temperature. ±0.0001 / 0.01 % Brix ±0.0001 / 0.05 % Brix Technical data: Resolution nD: Accuracy nD1): Temperature probe accuarcy1): ±0.05°C Wetted parts: Light source: Wavelength: Minimum sample volume: Measuring time: Default methods: Sapphire, FFKM, stainless steel LED light source 589 nm approx. 0.2 ml approx. 5 seconds per sample (after temp. equilibration) Refractive Index, Brix, glucose, fructose, invert sugar, sucrose More than 100 scales available on request (e.g. syrup, honey, alcohol, urine, serum, acides, bases) RS-232, 2 USB ports, 1 USB serial, Ethernet Additional methods: Data interface: User interface: Dimensions (W×H×D): Weight: 1) valid at refractometric standard conditions (T = 20°C, l = 589 nm, ambient tempera- ture = 23°C) 5.8 inch touchscreen 228 × 94 × 300 mm < 4.7 kg Type Temperature Order No. Measuring range nD 1.30 – 1.66 1.30 – 1.66 1.30 – 1.72 Abbemat 3000 Abbemat 3100 Abbemat 3200 We grant 3 years’ warranty for these devices. All repairs are free during this period of time. Temperature adjustment 10 63 33000 10 63 33100 20°C and 25°C 10 63 33200 15°C to 60°C 1 974

976

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Refractometers Process Refractometers, A. KRÜSS Optronic 1 Process refractometers PR21S and PR21S-T The inline process refractometers PR21S and PR21S-T are installed in pipelines of pro- duction facilities in order to control and regulate the concentration, mixing and fermenta- tion processes. Technical data: Scales: refractive index (nD) concentration of sucrose, glucose, fructose and invert sugar [%Brix] user-defined co d e b e w WWY3J012 Type Measuring range nD/% Brix PR21S 1.3200– 1.5200/0–95 PR21S-T 1.3200– 1.5200/0–95 Resolution nD/% Brix Measurement accuracy nD/% Brix ±0.0002/±0.2 0.0001/0.1 P 60°C Process temp. °C ±0.0002/±0.2 0.0001/0.1 P 120°C via water cooling Order No. 10 61 12100 10 61 12110 1 2 Process refractometer PRB21S The atline process refractometer PRB21S are installed in tanks or boilers using tube con- nections for the continuous monitoring and control of the concentration of liquids. The sample flows via the bypass into the measurement chamber made of stainless steel. Technical data: Scales: refractive index (nD) concentration of sucrose, glucose, fructose and invert sugar [%Brix] user-defined Type Measuring range nD/% Brix PRB21S 1.3200– Resolution nD/% Brix Measurement accuracy nD/% Brix ±0.0002/±0.2 0.0001/0.1 P 60°C 10 61 12101 Process temp. °C Order No. 2 1.5600/0–95 co d e b e w WWY3J005 Polarimeters Polarimeters, A. KRÜSS Optronic Polarimeter P1000-LED Our polarimeter P1000-LED is used by numerous companies and institutes for basic lab applications and training, for example the experiment on saccharose inversion. The tube chamber is designed for measurement tubes up to 220 mm in length, the high-perfor- mance LED has a service life of up to 100,000 hours. Technical data: Scale: Measurement range: Scale division: Reading accuracy: Light source: Wavelength: Optical rotation (°) 2 graduated circels (0 – 180°) 1° 0.05° (with nonius) 1 LED with filter 589 nm Article 3 Polarimeter P1000-LED Order No. 63 61 40000 3 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 975 co d e b e w

977

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Polarimeters Polarimeter P3000 The polarimeter P3000 is based on the technology of the P8000 series but built for stand- ard applications for which a measurement accuracy of ±0.01° is sufficient and a temper- ature control can be omitted. Typically, the P3000 is used in the quality control of food industry. Like the P8000 models this model performs the record measuring time of approx. 1 second. The P3000 measures up to an optical density of 3.0 OD. Technical data: Scales: Measurement range: Measurement accuracy: Resolution: Measurement period ±90°: Light source: Wavelength: Temperature measurement: Article 1 Polarimeter P3000 Optical rotation [°] Int. sugar scale [°Z] ±90° ±259°Z ±0.01° ±0.01°Z 0.01° 0.01°Z Approx. 1 s 1 LED with filter 589 nm 0 – 99.9°C Order No. 10 61 13000 Digital polarimeter P8000 series The polarimeters of the P8000 series are the fastest polarimeters in the world – thanks to the patented measuring method, which reduces the measuring time to approx. 1 s regard- less of the sample’s angle of rotation. The P8000 instruments measure up to an optical density of 3.0 OD. They are used when particularly high demands are placed on measure- ment accuracy and on continuous data recording and data backup. The instruments have all the functions required in FDA-regulated areas and meet all requirements of GMP/GLP and international standards. Technical data: Scales: Optical rotation [°] Int. sugar scale [°Z] Concentration [g/100 ml] Spec. rotation User-defined ±90° ±259°Z 0.001° 0.01°Z ml approx. 1 s 1 LED with filter 589 nm 0 – 99.9°C Measurement range: Measurement accuracy: Measurement period ± 90°: Light source: Wavelength: Temperature measurement range: Temperature measurement resolution: 0.1°C Temperature measurement accuracy: ±0.2°C P8100 2 P8000-T P8100-T Type P8000 Measurement accuracy ±0.003° ±0.01°Z ±0.002° ±0.01°Z ±0.003° ±0.01°Z ±0.002° ±0.01°Z P8000-TF ±0.003° ±0.01°Z P8100-TF ±0.002° ±0.01°Z ±0.003° ±0.01°Z ±0.002° ±0.01°Z P8000-P P8100-P Equipment Without temperature control Order No. 63 61 80000 Without temperature control 10 61 18102 With circulation thermostat tem- perature control With circulation thermostat tem- perature control With circulation thermostat tem- perature control With circulation thermostat tem- perature control With Peltier temperature control 10 61 18002 10 61 18103 10 61 18003 10 61 18104 10 61 18004 With Peltier temperature control 10 61 18105 T-versions in addition with water specimen temperature control TF-versions in addition with water specimen temperature control and flow function 1 2 976

978

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories Disposable Cuvettes, UV, BRAND Disposable UV cuvettes The disposable UV cuvettes from BRAND enable UV measurements from a wave length from 230 nm to 900 nm. Due to its very high chemical resistance it can be used with most polar solvents, acids and bases (e.g. acetone, butanone, DMF, and concentrated hydro- chloric acid etc.). Unlike conventional quartz cuvettes, there is no cleaning and hence a far lower contamination risk. The micro UV cuvette can be used from sample volume as small as 70 µl and fits - without an adapter - in practically all commercially available photometers/spectral photometers for standard cuvettes. Two different center heights (8.5 and 15 mm) are available. Round caps provide a tight seal and allow storage of samples down to -20°C. The UV disposable cuvettes are ideal for determination of proteins, DNA and RNA. They are supplied assorted by cavity in order to minimize extinction deviations between the individual cuvettes. Technical data: Range of application: Light path: 230 to 900 nm 10 mm Filling volume µl 1.5 – 3.0 ml 2.5 – 4.5 ml Window W mm 4.5 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 Window H mm 23 35 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 Order No. 29 49 59150 29 49 59170 29 49 59200 29 49 59210 10 49 59215 29 49 59220 29 49 59230 10 49 59235 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 500 100 100 500 100 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. 1) single wrapped, free of DNase, DNA and Rnase Type semi-micro macro 1 micro 8.5 mm 70 – 850 1 micro 8.5 mm 70 – 850 1 mikro 8.5 mm1) 70 – 850 1 micro 15 mm 70 – 550 1 micro 15 mm 70 – 550 1 micro 15 mm1) 70 – 550 Lids for micro UV cuvettes Colour Blue Yellow Green Orange Order No. 29 49 59240 29 49 59241 29 49 59242 29 49 59243 PU pc/Pack 100 100 100 100 1 co d e b e w WWQED027 ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Macro Cuvettes, four clear sided, BRAND Macro cuvettes, four clear sided, PS / UV-transparent The new macro cuvettes, four clear sided, are suitable for fluorescence spectroscopy. The UV-transparent cuvette can be used from a wavelength of 230 nm and shows minimal autofluorescence. Quality features • Significantly lower costs for use when compared to quartz glass cuvettes • Clear, clean optical path • Manufactured under controlled room conditions and packaged fully automatically, with- out human contact co d e b e w WWQED075 • Packed grouped by mold cavity number to ensure lowest variation of extinction coefficient • Frosted end for labelling Cuvettes of Polystyrene (PS): Typical range of application: Standard deviation: Light path: Cuvettes UV-transparent: Typical range of application: Standard deviation: 340 – 900 nm 360 nm P ± 0.005 extinction units 10 nm 230 – 900 nm 240 nm P ± 0.007 extinction units 300 nm P ± 0.005 extinction units 10 nm Light path: Filling volume ml 2.5 – 4.5 2.5 – 4.5 2.5 – 4.5 2.5 – 4.5 co d e b e w Window W×H mm 10 × 35 10 × 35 10 × 35 10 × 35 Order No. 10 49 75030 10 49 75035 10 49 75125 10 49 75128 PU pc/Pack 100 500 100 500 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 977

979

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories Cuvettes, Macro and Semi-micro, BRAND Quality features: • Clear, clean optical path with indication of optical path orientation • Manufactured under controlled room conditions and packaged fully automatically, with- out human contact • Packed grouped by mold cavity number to ensure lowest variation of extinction coeffi- Material Minimum filling quantity Order No. ml 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 10 49 59005 10 49 59015 10 49 59105 10 49 59115 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 co d e b e w WWQED084 cient Article Cuvettes, macro PS Cuvettes, semi-micro PS Cuvettes, macro PMMA Cuvettes, semi-micro PMMA co d e b e w WW7R3011 MBT Cuvettes, IDL Light path 10 mm, 12.5 × 12.5 × 45 mm In expanded polystyrene boxes of 100. Product Material Disposable macro cuvettes Disposable semimicro cuvettes Disposable macro cuvettes Disposable semimicro cuvettes Polystyrene Polystyrene Polymethyl methacrylate Polymethyl methacrylate for applica- tions from 340 nm 340 nm 300 nm 300 nm Order No. 29 78 72705 29 78 72710 29 78 72805 29 78 72810 PU Box/Box 10 10 10 10 co d e b e w WW4ZG003 1 2 3 4 978 Cuvets, ratiolab® ratiolab® Q-VETTES The new generation of cuvets with clearly improved photometric properties. The opti- mized form and the small wall thickness of the cuvets provides increased heat transfer resulting in more constant sample temperatures during photometric measurements. • glass-clear polystyrene (PS) • applicable wavelength range 340 to 900 nm • very low variation of extinction values • excellent optical transmission range • cavity-sorted production • path length 10 mm • outer dimensions 12.5 × 12.5 × 45 mm • supplied in practical styrofoam racks: 10 × 100 netidentical cuvets in a styrofoam box with closable lid Article 1 ratiolab® Q-VETTES semi-micro 2 ratiolab® Q-VETTES macro Volume ml 1.6 4.0 Order No. 10 23 02712 10 23 02711 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 ratiolab® CUVETTES For photometric measurements even in the UV range 220 nm. Due to the special plastic material and the excellent manufacturing process the cuvets can also be used in photometric ranges reserved for UV glass cuvets in the past. • applicable wavelength range 220 to 900 nm • very low variation of extinction values • excellent optical transmission range • cavity-sorted production • path length 10 mm • outer dimensions 12.5 × 12.5 × 45 mm • supplied in practical styrofoam racks: 100 netidentical cuvets in a styrofoam box with a resealable cover Article Version 3 ratiolab® CUVETTES semi-micro UV 4 ratiolab® CUVETTES macro UV Volume ml 1.6 4.0 Order No. 10 23 02722 10 23 02721 PU pc/Pack 100 100 Continued on next page

980

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories ratiolab® cuvets of PMMA • cuvets of polymethylmethacrylate (PMMA) • applicable wavelength range 300 to 900 nm • very low variation of extinction values • excellent optical transmission range • path length 10 mm • outer dimensions 12.5 × 12.5 × 45 mm • supplied in practical styrofoam racks: 10 × 100 netidentical cuvets in a styrofoam box with a resealable cover Article 5 ratiolab® semi-micro cuvets 6 ratiolab® macro cuvets Volume ml 1.6 4.0 Order No. 10 23 02810 10 23 02811 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 ratiolab® cuvets, solvent resistant • resistant against polar solvents • applicable wavelength range 220 to 900 nm • very low variation of extinction values • excellent optical transmission range • cavity-sorted production • embossed areas aside the measuring fields reduces the risks of damaging the cuvette by the cuvette holder • path length 10 mm • outer dimensions 12.5 × 12.5 × 45 mm • supplied in practical styrofoam racks: 100 netidentical cuvets in a styrofoam box with a 5 6 resealable cover Article 7 ratiolab® semi-micro cuvets 8 ratiolab® macro cuvets Volume ml 1.6 4.0 Order No. 10 23 02725 10 23 02726 PU pc/Pack 100 100 Stopper for cuvets Polypropylene (PP). • for all ratiolab® cuvets • packed in 1 plastic bag of 1000 pieces • solvent resistant Article Packing type Order No. 9 Stoppers for cuvets bag 1 × 1000 10 23 02812 PU pc/Pack 1000 7 9 8 co d e b e w WWQJ3058 Disposable Cuvette, Eppendorf The UVette® fulfills the highest specifications of modern spectrophotometric analysis in the UV range and can be optimally used for sensitive samples and small volumes. • Suitable for measuring small volumes, > 50 µl • Individually blister-packed for contamination-free work • DNA, RNase and protein-free • Two optical path lengths: 2 mm and 10 mm • UV and VIS transparent between 220 and 1,600 nm • Volume markings for 500 and 1,000 µl • Fully transparent material with outstanding surface properties • Optimal filling guaranteed by tapered cuvette base • Deep-lying optical window prevents scratches • Stable design • Marking possible on frosted grip • Can be used without adapter in the Eppendorf BioPhotometer Eppendorf Vis-Cuvettes are disposable cuvettes made of clear plastic with a light trans- mission of 300 nm to 900 nm. The Vis cuvettes are the perfect tool for applications outside of the UV range, for example, colorimetric protein assays (Bradford, Lowry, etc.), deter- mining of the optical density of bacterial cultures (OD600 methods), and kinetic and fluo- rescence measurements. Available in two cuvette sizes (semi-micro and macro) for differ- ent volumes. Disposable cuvettes and accessories Article AT UVette®, original Eppendorf disposables individually packaged single cuvettes, certified RNase-, DNA -and protein-free, 80 pcs. reclosable box, 200 pcs. UVette® routine pack, Eppendorf quality purity level Starter set 80 UVettes, 1 universal adapter for 15 mm light center height (including GeneQuant), convertible to 8.5 mm Cuvette stand, 2 pieces Order No. 29 69 96300 10 69 16318 29 69 91007 10 69 19851 Continued on next page AT co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 979

981

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories Vis-Cuvettes 1 Article Makro Vis cuvettes 300 nm – 900 nm Plastic cuvettes for measurements in the Vis range, max. filling volume 4500 µl, 10 × 100 pieces Semi micro Vis cuvettes 300 nm – 900 nm Plastic cuvettes for measurements in the Vis range, max. filling volume 3000 µl, 10 × 100 pieces Order No. 10 69 79345 10 69 79353 Eppendorf µCuvette® G1.0 Article Eppendorf µCuvette® G1.0 Microvolume measuring cell for Eppendorf BioPhotometer® and BioSpectrometer® Order No. 10 69 80018 1 2 4 980 co d e b e w WWPEV001 Standard Cells, Hellma® Table of material code OG Optical glass (360 nm - 2500 nm) OS Optical glass (320 nm - 2500 nm) UV HOQ 310H (260 nm - 2500 nm) QS Quartz High Performance (200 nm - 2500 nm) QX Quartz Extended Range (200 nm - 3500 nm) Absorption cells Inside width 9.5 mm, base thickness 1.5 mm Type/material Vol. Cover 100-OS 100-OS 100-OS 100-OS 100-OS 100-OS 100-OS 100-OS 100-QS 100-QS 100-QS 2 100-QS 100-QS 100-QS 100-QS 100-QS 100-QX 110-OS 110-QS 110-QS 110-QS 3 110-QS 110-QS 110-QX 6030-OG 6030-OG 6030-OG 6030-UV 4 117.100-QS1) µl 350 glass lid 700 glass lid 1750 seamed lid 3500 seamed lid 7000 seamed lid 14000 seamed lid 17500 seamed lid 35000 seamed lid 350 glass lid 700 glass lid 1750 seamed lid 3500 seamed lid 7000 seamed lid 14000 seamed lid 17500 seamed lid 35000 seamed lid 3500 seamed lid 3500 PTFE stopper 350 PTFE stopper 700 PTFE stopper 1750 PTFE stopper 3500 PTFE stopper 17500 PTFE stopper 3500 PTFE stopper 7000 seamed lid 14000 seamed lid 17500 seamed lid 3500 seamed lid 3500 screw cap Optical path length mm 1 2 5 10 20 40 50 100 1 2 5 10 20 40 50 100 10 10 1 2 5 10 50 10 20 40 50 10 10 Outer dimensions H × W × D mm 45×12.5×3.5 45×12.5×4.5 45×12.5×7.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×22.5 45×12.5×42.5 45×12.5×52.5 45×12.5×102.5 45×12.5×3.5 45×12.5×4.5 45×12.5×7.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×22.5 45×12.5×42.5 45×12.5×52.5 45×12.5×102.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×3.5 45×12.5×4.5 45×12.5×7.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×52.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×22.5 45×12.5×42.5 45×12.5×52.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 Order No. 19 55 11011 19 55 11021 19 55 11051 19 55 11101 19 55 11201 19 55 11401 19 55 11501 19 55 11601 19 55 11012 19 55 11022 19 55 11052 19 55 11102 19 55 11202 19 55 11402 19 55 11502 19 55 11602 19 55 11104 19 55 12101 19 55 12012 19 55 12022 19 55 12052 19 55 12102 19 55 12502 19 55 12104 19 55 10021 19 55 10031 19 55 10041 19 55 10002 10 55 11172 1) For anaerobic applications, with ISO thread GL 14 and screw cap with silicone rubber seal Continued on next page 3 5

982

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories Semi-micro absorption cells Inside width 4 mm 6 8 AT 7 9 AK Cover Type/material Vol. Optical path length mm µl 10 1400 without lid 10 1400 seamed lid 50 7000 seamed lid 10 1400 seamed lid 50 7000 seamed lid 10 1400 seamed lid 1000 seamed lid 10 1400 PTFE stopper 10 1400 PTFE stopper 10 10 5 6040-UV 104-OS 104-OS 104-QS 104-QS 6 104B-QS2) 108-QS 7 114-QS 114B-QS2) 117.104-QS1) 1400 screw cap Outer dimensions H × W × D mm 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×52.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×52.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 Base thickn. mm 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 9 3.2 3.2 1.25 Order No. 19 55 10010 19 55 13101 19 55 13501 19 55 13102 19 55 13502 19 55 13602 10 55 13702 19 55 14122 19 55 14132 10 55 14142 1) For anaerobic applications, with ISO thread GL 14 and screw cap with silicone rubber seal 2) Black side walls and base Table of material code OG Optical glass (360 nm - 2500 nm) OS Optical glass (320 nm - 2500 nm) UV HOQ 310H (260 nm - 2500 nm) QS Quartz High Performance (200 nm - 2500 nm) QX Quartz Extended Range (200 nm - 3500 nm) Micro absorption cells Optical path length 10 mm, inside width 2 mm Type/material Vol. Cover µl 104.002-OS 700 seamed lid 8 104.002-QS 700 seamed lid 104.002B-QS 700 seamed lid 9 105-QS 300 seamed lid 108.002-QS 500 seamed lid 108.002B-QS 500 seamed lid 115-QS 115B-QS2) 400 PTFE stopper 400 PTFE stopper 2) Black side walls and base Outer dimensions H × W × D mm 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 25×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 40×12.5×12.5 40×12.5×12.5 Base thickness mm 3.2 3.2 3.2 1.5 9 9 1.25 1.25 Order No. 19 55 14161 19 55 14162 19 55 14172 10 55 14182 10 55 14192 10 55 14193 19 55 14192 10 55 14195 Ultra-micro absorption cells with PE stopper Material: Optical path length: Outer dimensions (H×W×D): 45 × 12.5 × 12.5 mm quartz glass High Performance 10 mm Type/material 105.200-QS 105.200-QS AT 105.201-QS 105.201-QS 105.202-QS 105.202-QS Vol. µl 160 160 100 100 50 50 Center height mm 15 8.5 15 8.5 15 8.5 Aperture H × W mm 8 × 2 8 × 2 5 × 2 5 × 2 2.5 × 2 2.5 × 2 Order No. 10 55 12001 10 55 12002 10 55 12011 19 55 10521 10 55 12021 10 55 12022 Semi-micro cells for flow-trough measurements with in/outlet tubes for absorbtion measurements Window material: Aperture (H×W): quartz glass High Performance 11 × 4 mm Vol. µl Type/ material Optical path length mm 176.000-QS 450 10 AK 176.000-QS 2250 50 176.000-QS 2250 50 Center height mm 15 15 8,5 Outer dimensions H × W × D mm 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×52.5 38.5×12.5×52.5 Order No. 19 55 30102 19 55 30502 19 55 30501 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 981

983

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories Compact cells for flow-through measurements with 2 screw connectors M 6 × 1 and FEP tubes (outside Ø 1.9 mm, inside Ø 1.1 mm, 500 mm long) Window material: Outside dim. (H×W×D): 35 × 12.5 × 12.5 mm quartz glass High Performance µl Type/material Vol. Optical path length mm 170.700-QS3) 6.2 0.1 170.700-QS3) 12.4 0.2 170.700-QS3) 31 0.5 1 170.700-QS 62 1 170.700-QS 124 2 176.700-QS 195 5 176.700-QS 195 5 2 176.700-QS 390 10 176.700-QS 390 10 Center height mm all dim. all dim. all dim. all dim. all dim. 15 8.5 15 8.5 Aperture H × W mm 17.5×3.5 17.5×3.5 17.5×3.5 17.5×3.5 17.5×3.5 11×3.5 11×3.5 11×3.5 11×3.5 Order No. 19 55 22202 19 55 22212 19 55 22222 19 55 22252 19 55 22322 10 55 15051 10 55 15052 19 55 15102 19 55 15832 3) with bypass Table of material code OG Optical glass (360 nm - 2500 nm) OS Optical glass (320 nm - 2500 nm) UV HOQ 310H (260 nm - 2500 nm) QS Quartz High Performance (200 nm - 2500 nm) QX Quartz Extended Range (200 nm - 3500 nm) Macro fluorescence cells with PTFE lid or stopper, triangular cell Volume: No. of windows: Optical path length: 10 × 10 mm Inside width: Base thickness: 10 mm 1.25 mm 3500 µl 4 Type Window material 3 101-OS Special optical glass 101-QS Quartz High Performance 111-OS Special optical glass 111-QS Quartz High Performance 4 117.100F-QS1) Quartz High Performance Outer H × W × D mm 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 46×12.5×12.5 46×12.5×12.5 56×12.5×12.5 Order No. 19 55 11511 19 55 11512 19 55 12511 19 55 12512 10 55 13512 1) For anaerobic applications, with ISO thread GL 14 and screw cap with silicone rubber seal 6 982 Semi-micro fluorescence cells Window material: No. of windows: Optical path length: 10 × 4 mm Inside width: 4 mm Quartz High Performance 4 Type Vol. Cover µl 104F-QS 1400 seamed lid 5 114F-QS 1400 PTFE stopper 6 119.004F-QS 1500 PTFE stopper 117.104F-QS1) 1400 screw cap Outer dimensions H × W × D mm 45×12.5×12.5 46×12.5×12.5 49,5×12.5×12.5 56×12.5×12.5 Base thickness mm 1.25 1.25 5 1.25 Order No. 19 55 14112 10 55 15112 10 55 11194 10 55 11174 1) For anaerobic applications, with ISO thread GL 14 and screw cap with silicone rubber seal Micro fluorescence cells Window material: Optical path length: 10 × 2 mm Inside width: 2 mm Quartz High Performance Type Vol. Cover µl 104.002F-QS 700 seamed lid 7 108.002F-QS 500 seamed lid 115F-QS 400 PTFE stopper Outer dimensions H × W × D mm 45×12.5×12.5 45×12.5×12.5 40×12.5×12.5 Order No. Base thickness mm 19 55 14182 1.25 10 55 14183 9 10 55 14184 1.25 Continued on next page 3457821

984

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories Ultra-mikro fluorescence cells with PTFE stopper Window material: No. of windows: Outside dim. (H×B×T): 45 × 12.5 × 12.5 mm Quarzglas High Performance 3 Vol. µl Optical path length mm Type 105.250-QS 100 10 × 2 8 105.250-QS 100 10 × 2 105.251-QS 45 3 × 3 105.251-QS 45 3 × 3 Inner dimensions mm 5 × 2 5 × 2 5 × 3 5 × 3 Center height mm 15 8.5 15 8.5 Order No. 10 55 12501 10 55 12502 10 55 12511 10 55 12512 Cells for light-scattering measurements with PTFE stoppers, window material quartz High Performance Type Vol. µl 2800 2800 14000 4) polished outer cylinder 540.110-QS 540.111-QS4) 9 540.135-QS Outside dim. H × Ø mm 75 × 10 75 × 10 75 × 20 Inner dimensions mm 75 × 8 75 × 8 75 × 18 Order No. 10 55 15400 10 55 15401 10 55 15405 Demountable cells Type AT 106-QS 106-QS 106-QS AK 013.000, holder for cell type 106-QS Optical path length mm Vol. µl 2.6 0.01 ± 0.003 26 52 0.1 ± 0.005 0.2 ± 0.005 Order No. 10 55 11061 10 55 11062 10 55 11063 10 55 11069 9 AT AK 3in1 Allquartz Flowthrough Cell, Hellma® The all-quartz flow-through cuvette with two optical path lengths is used as a high-preci- sion cuvette in spectroscopic analysis. The innovative internal thread in the quartz glass allows for simple and safe attachment of the tubes. The cuvette is suitable for absorption and fluorescence measurement. No leaking of liquid possible because the cell is manufactured from monolithic quartz glass. The cuvette can be used with high and low temperatures, and is autoclavable. co d e b e w WWPEV018 Optical path length mm Type 176.760-QS 5 and 10 176.761-QS 2.5 and 5 176.762-QS 1.5 and 3 176.765-QS 1 and 10 176.766-QS 2 and 10 Outer dimensions mm 35×12.5×12.5 35×12.5×12.5 35×12.5×12.5 35×12.5×12.5 35×12.5×12.5 Volume Aperture H × W µl mm 550 11×6 / 11×5 11×4 / 11×2.5 140 11×2.5 / 11×1.5 50 110 11×6 / 11×1 11×6 / 11×2 220 Center height mm 8.5 Order No. 10 55 17601 10 55 17611 10 55 17621 10 55 17651 10 55 17661 15 Order No. 10 55 17602 10 55 17612 10 55 17622 10 55 17652 10 55 17662 Cleaning Concentrate Hellmanex® III, Hellma® Highly effective alkaline concentrate for cleaning glass and quartz glass cuvettes and other sensitive optical parts. • Significant reduction of surface tension • Excellent rinsing properties • Use of specific tensides without absorption above 288 nm. • Excellent material compatibility, reduces glass corrosion. Comes in a 1.3 kg PE bottle (1.0 l). When applying the recommended concentration of 0.5 to 2 vol %, you will get approx. 50 to 200 l cleaning fluid. Article Hellmanex® III, type 320.003 Order No. 10 55 13203 co d e b e w WWPEV011 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 983

985

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy co d e b e w WWQED019 Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories Cuvette Racks, BRAND Cuvette stands, PP Gray, holds 16 cuvettes, numbered positions. L×W×H: 210 × 70 × 38 mm. Autoclavable (121°C) Article Cuvette rack, PP Order No. 29 49 75950 co d e b e w WWPEV016 Quartz Microplates, Hellma® Quartz glass microplates with 96 wells Outside dimensions 14.5 × 127 × 85.5 mm, bottom synthetic quartz glass 2 mm, well diameter 6.6 mm, well depth 12.5 mm, well volume 300 µl Type 730.009-QG Material Quartz glass Order No. 19 55 22730 co d e b e w WWPEV008 Calibration Standards Secondary Calibration Standards for Spectrophotometers, Hellma® Certified UV/Vis calibration standards for spectrophotometers To supply accurate results over the long run, spectrophotometers need to be calibrated in regular intervals. To this end, the Hellma Analytics calibration lab certified pursuant to DIN EN ISO 17025 offers ready-to-use, DAkkS certified calibration standards. Using UV/ Vis calibration standards from the accredited Hellma calibration lab guarantees that the calibration operations performed are traceable to the NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) primary standards and the standards of the major pharmacopoeias (EP, DAB, USP). The certified Hellma Analytics reference materials provide the user with a clean, easy, and efficient solution for checking the spectrophotometer. Outside dimensions (H×W×D): 48 mm × 12.5 mm × 12.5 mm 1 Glass filters sets for inspection of the spectrophotometers in respect of wavelength accuracy and photo- metrical accuracy Type Complete filter set consisting of Holmium oxide glass filter 666-F1 Neutral density filter 666-F2, 0.25 abs. Neutral density filter 666-F3, 0.5 abs. Neutral density filter 666-F4, 1.0 abs. Filter holder F0, empty as reference Neutral density filter 666-F3, 0.5 abs. Neutral density filter 666-F4, 1.0 abs. Didymium glass fliter 666-F7, 0.5–1.0 abs. 666- S000 666- S001 666- S002 Order No. 10 55 16660 10 55 16663 Wavelength nm 279, 361, 453, 536, 638 440; 465; 546,1; 590; 635 440; 465; 546,1; 590; 635 440; 465; 546,1; 590; 635 440; 465; 546,1; 590; 635 440; 465; 546,1; 590; 635 Wavelength accuracy: 329, 472, 512, 681, 875 Photometrical accuracy: 270, 280, 297, 320, 340 Neutral density filters 666-F2/-F3/-F4 440; 465; 546,1; 590; 635 10 55 16662 Continued on next page 1 984

986

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Calibration Standards 2 Liquid filters sets for inspection of the spectrophotometers in respect of stray light behavior, resolution power, photometrical accuracy and wavelength accuracy pursuant to the European Phar- macopoeia EP 10 Type Use Contents 667S501 667400 Checking photomet- ric accuracy in the UV range Checking the wave- length accuracy Filter set contains 4 vari- ous niacin filters Filter set UV5 holmium in perchloric acid and UV14 perchloric acid 667107 Checking for stray light 667200 Checking the photo- metric accuracy 667EP1002 Checking the spec- trophotometer in the UV/Vis range acc. to Ph. Eur. EP 10 Filter set UV 23 potassi- um iodide in pure water with UV12 reference fil- ter Filter set UV6 toluene in hexane with UV9 refe- rence filter Containing the sets: 667S501, 667400, 667107, 667200 Wave- length nm 213, 261 241, 287, 361, 451, 485, 536, 640 259 Cut-off Scan from 265– 270 Order No. 10 55 17501 10 55 17400 10 55 17107 10 55 16672 10 55 11002 2 co d e b e w WWPEV015 Calibration Standard for Microplate Readers, Hellma® With calibration standards from Hellma Analytics, the photometric and wavelength accu- racy of microplate readers can be checked. They have the same dimensions as a mi- croplate with 96 wells and a diameter of 6.6 mm per window (height 14.5 x width 125 x length 85.5 mm). Type Use Material 666- R013 666- R113 Testing the photo- metric accur acy Testing the photo- metric and the wavelength accu- racy Neutral density glass filter NG11/NG5/NG4 (absorbtion 0.25/0.5/1.0) Neutral density glass filter NG5/NG4/NG3 (absorbtion 0.5/1.0/1.5) Holmium oxide glass filter Order No. 10 55 16013 10 55 16113 Wavelength nm 405, 450, 490, 650 405, 450, 490, 650 279, 361, 453, 536, 638 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 985

987

KNOWLEDGE PHOTOMETERS Type of equipment Filter Units With a filter photometer, the required wavelength is selected by inserting filters. The filters are activated by a mechanical drive in the beam path. Its use is mostly limited to visible wavelengths, and for those filters which are available the band width is rela- tively large. However these units are adequate for many routine quantitative measuring tasks. Spectrophotometers Spectrophotometers select a defined section of the spectrum using a grating. Measurements can be obtained at any wave- length within the measuring range of the instrument. These units are typically used for analysis work. Diode Array Units Diode Array Units use a converse optical system to obtain si- multaneous measurement over the whole of the unit's spectral range. The advantage of very fast non-mechanical spectral measurements has to be weighed against the generally more limited sensitivity. Wavelength Range There are Vis units which measure in visual range only (approx. 330-1000 nm), as opposed to UV-VIS units, which typically cover a wavelength range of 200-1000 nm. When used in the UV range, special lamps (Deuterium or Xenon) are required, making these units significantly more expensive to purchase and operate. Spectral Wavelength The wavelength of the units is an important factor for scanning equipment. The smaller the wavelength, the more precise is the selection of small maxima. Accessories Typical accessories are: tempered sample holder (enzyme kinetics), and automatic sample exchanger or sipper pumps with flow-through cuvettes to draw the sample into the unit. Adding a printer, recorder or pc connection for data processing is also possible. Cuvettes The sample cuvette is an important part of the analysis system. As well as a wide range of hard-wearing cuvettes made from optical glass or quartz glass 1, single-use cuvettes are available which can also be used for UV purposes 2. Devices which can operate without a cuvette of classic design have been developed for use in biotechnology. These devices such as the Nano-Geno- va only require the user to pipette the sample (2 µl) on a surface 3. Besides the quicker sample change, the otherwise necessary thinning process can be omitted. Guidelines for calibration A regular check on the unit's calibration will maintain the ac- curacy of your measurements. It is necessary to use spectro- photometers to check whether the selected wavelength is set correctly. For this, filters are inserted with characteristic peak maxima. Some units are able to carry out automatic wavelength calibration using lamp peaks, when powering on. Size of beam path The normal cuvette with an optical path length of 10 mm and a width of 10 mm should only be used with large sample quan- tities. With only very small sample quantities and tiny sample concentrations, it is important to focus the beam path onto a small point in the cuvette. Thus samples of less than 50 µl can be analyzed, even with layers of 10 mm thickness. Author: Dr. Axel Landgraf Software As well as with the optical features of the units, the data process- ing options differ significantly from product to product. Special units have been developed for various special operations such as quantification in environmental analysis or in life sciences. These include special programs which facilitate the use of test kits or incorporate special analytical methods. Very little intro- duction is needed before essential analysis can be carried out. 986 1 2 3

988

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Photometric workplaces see page 1025 Photometers Micro Volume Analysis, Hellma® Fibre-optical ultra micro measuring cell for sample volumes of 0.7 µl to 10 µl. Flexible and user-friendly solution for the analysis of very small sample volumes as an accessory for almost all standard photometers. Typical applications: • DNA/RNA nucleic acid analysis • Determination of the incorporation frequency of fluorescent dye labels (FOI) • Protein analysis (A280, BCA, Lowry etc.) • All UV/Vis analysis utilizing the wavelength range of 190 to 1100 nm • Optical material: High Performance quartz glass The TrayCell is supplied as standard with caps for both 0.2 mm (factor 50) and 1 mm (factor 10) light path. Additional caps for light path 0.1 mm (factor 100) and 2 mm (factor 5) are available on request. co d e b e w WWPEV012 Type Filling volume µl Optical path length mm 0.2/0.1 0.2/0.1 105.800-UVS 0.7–5 105.810-UVS 0.7–5 Outer dimensions Center height mm 8.5/15/201) 68.5/75/80×12.5×12.5 10 55 11058 8.5/15/201) 53/59.5/64.5×12.5×12.5 10 55 11059 Order No. mm 1) As a standard, the TrayCell is set to a centre height of 8.5 mm. By means of the 2 adapt- ers comprised in the delivery, the centre height can be adjusted to 15 mm and 20 mm. Spectrophotometer, Irmeco 1 Spectrophotometer version HACH, model DR 3900 Powerful, microprocessor-controlled VIS spectrophotometer for reliable measurement results in routine analysis and for your own applications. Applications: • Pre-programmed with all HACH LANGE analysis methods, e.g. for wastewater, potable water and cooling/boiler water analysis • Extinctioni and transmission • Concentration for linear and non-linear calibration curves co d e b e w WWR5C004 Technical data: Display mode: Light source: Optical path: Wave length range: Wave length accuracy: Wavelength reproducibility: Wavelength resolution: Wavelength calibration and selection: Spectral bandwidth: Photometric measuring range: Photometric accuracy: Photometric linearity: Stray light: Display: Data storage: Preprogrammed methods: User programs: Cuvette compatibility: Courtesy of HACH LANGE Transmission (%), extinction and concentration, scan Halogen lamp Reference beam technology, spectral 320 to 1100 nm ± 1.5 nm (wavelength range 340 to 900 nm) ± 0.1 nm 1 nm Automatic 5 nm ± 3.0 E (wavelength range 340 to 900 nm) 5 mAbs at 0.0 to 0.5 Abs, 1% at 0.5 to 2.0 Abs < 0.5% to 2 Abs, 1% at > 2 Abs with neutral glass at 546 nm 0.1% at 340 nm with NaNO2 7 ″ TFT WVGA colour touch screen (800 × 480 Pixel) 2000 measured values (Result, Date, Time, Sample ID, Operator ID) > 220 100 13 mm round cuvette, 1 cm and 5 cm rectangular cuvette, 1 inch round cuvette, 1 inch rectangular cuvette Article Spectrophotometer version HACH DR 3900 (with RFID technology) Spectrophotometer version HACH DR 3900 (without RFID technology) Order No. 10 15 89901 10 15 89801 1 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 987 Continued on next page

989

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy 1 2 co d e b e w WWW4U110 Photometers Cuvette tests LCK series In total, more than 200 different test methods are available. Ready-to-use cuvette tests with pre-dosed reagents for photometric evaluation. Maxi- mum safety and easy handling. Environmentally friendly thanks to minimized volumes of reagent quantities. Approved for self-monitoring. Article 1 LCK514 LCK1414 LCK303 2 LCK341 LCK339 LCK138 LCK386 LCK349 LCK521 LCK329 LCK313 LCK360 Test CSB 100–2000 mg/l O2 CSB 5–60 mg/l O2 ammonium 2.0–47.0 mg/l NH4-N nitrite 0.015–0.6 mg/l NO2-N nitrate 0.23–13.5 mg/l NO3-N Laton total nitrogen 1–16 mg/l TNb TOC (expulsion method) 30–300 mg/l C phosphate (ortho/total) 0.05–1.5 mg/l PO4-P iron, trace 0.01–1.0 mg/l Fe copper 0.1–8.0 mg/l Cu chromium (III and VI) 0.03–1.0 mg/l Cr zinc 0.2–6.0 mg/l Zn Accessories Article Rectangular cell, 1 × 1 inch, 10 ml, glass (2 pcs.) Sample cell, 10 ml (1 inch), round, polystyrene, 2 pcs. Addista - AQA Multi-Standard Cell stand for 16 round or rectangle cells 10 mm Order No. 10 15 80514 10 15 81414 10 15 80303 10 15 80341 10 15 80339 10 15 80138 10 15 80386 10 15 80349 10 15 80521 10 15 80329 10 15 80313 10 15 80360 Order No. 10 15 85402 10 15 84302 10 15 80701 10 15 80915 Spectrophotometer V-11, LAT V-11 Scan is the scan-visible-spectrophotometer customised for superior-level colorimet- ric analyses, quantity detection, and quality assurance in the visible range. • Photometric quantification, spectrum scan • Autocalibration system, calibrates each time the device is switched on • Countdown for preheating • USB flash drive to restore data and methods Technical data: Display: Measuring range: Bandwidth: Interface: Operating system: multilingual Functions: Including 4 optical glass cells, 10 mm 4-cell holder, power cord, dust cover, USB flash drive and calibration report touch screen colour display 320 – 1100 nm 4 nm, single beam flash memory USB port photometric, quantification, spectrum scan Article Spectrophotometer V-11 Order No. 10 20 10511 Thermo Scientific™ Orion™ AquaMate 7100 and 8100 Vis and UV-Vis Spectrophotometers, Thermo Scientific Thermo Scientific™ Orion™ AquaMate Vis and UV-Vis spectrophotometers offer more than 260 pre-programmed methods for all requirements of water and waste water analy- sis; thanks to numerous sophisticated features and functions, they guarantee maximum flexibility. • More than 260 pre-programmed methods for easy and convenient measuring with Ori- on AQUAfast™, Merck™ or CHEMetrics™ chemicals • Pre-programmed methods can be adjusted to new chemicals, or users can generate their own methods and calibration curves • The devices allow for one-point adjustment of any pre-programmed method for correct- ing fluctuations in batch reagents • 7″ touchscreen can be operated when wearing gloves • Wide variety of vials sizes can be used, including 10mm square vials, 20 and 50mm rectangular vials and an adjustable round vial holder that accommodates vials and test tube from 12 to 25 mm diameter • Performance verification tests ensure wavelength accuracy and instrument functionality - each verification report gives the time, date and instrument serial number in accord- ance with GLP and GMP • Built-in test methods for stray light, noise and resolution Continued on next page co d e b e w WW4HV025 3 988

990

Photometers Optical Investigations Spectroscopy AquaMate 7100 double beam Technische Daten: Optical system: Wavelength measuring range: 325 to 1100 nm Spectral bandwidth: Accuracy: Light source: Interface: Dimension (W×D×H): Weight: Power supply: 5.0 nm 0.5 nm Tungsten halogen lamp 3 × USB 385 × 355 × 195 mm 7.5 kg 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz AquaMate 8100 double beam 190 to 1100 nm 2.0 nm 0.5 nm xenon lamp 3 × USB 385 × 355 × 195 mm 7.5 kg 100 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz Article 3 Orion AquaMate 7100 Vis spectrophotometer 4 Orion AquaMate 8100 UV-Vis spectrophotometer Order No. 10 79 27100 10 79 28100 4 Photometers MD 200, Lovibond® • Scroll memory • Automatic switch-off • Real-Time-Clock and date • Calibration mode indicator Versatile, compact and: The benchtop photometer MD 200 combines high-quality inter- ference filters with long-term stable LEDs as light sources in a high-precision optic. The result: precise measurement results at all times – no matter where you use it. The listed photometers represent a selection. Other variants are available. Technical data: Optics: LEDs and photo sensor in transparent sample chamber. De- pending on the version, up to 3 different interference filters are used. Wavelength specifications of interference filters: 430 nm D l = 5 nm 530 nm D l = 5 nm 560 nm D l = 5 nm 610 nm D l = 6 nm Wavelength accuracy: Photometric range: ± 1 nm -2600 – 2600 mAbs Article MD 200 COD, tube tests MD 200 hydrogen peroxide, pH, liquid reagents MD 200 chlorine, pH, cyanuric acid, tablet reagents (OTZ) MD 200 chlorine, pH, cyanuric acid, liquid reagents for chlorine Order No. 10 77 12503 10 77 18102 10 77 10102 10 77 12002 and pH (OTZ) MD 200 chlorine, pH, acid capacity, tablet reagents (OTZ) MD 200 chlorine, pH, cyanuric acid, acid capacity, tablet re- agents (OTZ) MD 200 chlorine, chlorine dioxide, pH, acid capacity, tablet re- agents (OTZ) MD 200 chlorine, pH, cyanuric acid, alkalinity-m, calcium hard- ness, tablet reagents (OTZ) MD 200 chlorine, bromine, pH, cyanuric acid, alkalinity-m, cal- cium hardness, tablet reagents (OTZ) MD 200 ozone, tablet reagents 10 77 19012 10 77 10512 10 77 13802 10 77 11202 10 77 11902 10 77 19802 Photometers MD 110, Lovibond® • Bluetooth®-Interface • Scroll Memory • Automatic switch-off • Calibration mode indicator The MD 110 has several key features that make it a favorite among users. Waterproof Design The IP 68 design of this instrument ensures that the MD 110 remains water tight for up to 1 hour at 0.1 meter. Don’t worry about dropping the instrument into a body of water - it floats! • Accurate, Reproducible Results • The optical system of the MD 110 utilizes LEDs and interference filters which quickly gives you results that you can be confident in. • User Calibration Mode • A one-point calibration is possible. Additionally, all MD 110 instruments have the abili- ty to display readings directly in ABS or %T units. • One-time-Zero Function co d e b e w WWSE2019 co d e b e w WWSE2020 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 989 Continued on next page

991

Optical Investigations Spectroscopy Photometers • Don’t waste time waiting for your instrument to Zero after each test. When testing a new sample, zero the instrument once and all subsequent tests of that sample do not require you to re-zero the instrument. • Automatic Data Storage with Transfer Capabilities • The MD 110 automatically stores the last 16 readings with time and date stamp. These results can be transferred to a spreadsheet using the IRiM accessory. • Ergonomic Design Whether you’re using the MD 110 out in the field or in the lab, the design of the instrument makes it easy to handle and view the display. If you’re using the instrument in the lab, the rubber feet on the bottom of the housing eliminates the need for two hand operation or to chase your instrument around the workbench. The listed photometers represent a selection. Other variants are available. Technical data: Optics: LEDs and photo sensor in transparent sample chamber. Depending on the ver- sion, up to 3 different interference filters are used. Wavelength specifications of interference filters: 430 nm D l = 5 nm 530 nm D l = 5 nm 560 nm D l = 5 nm 580 nm D l = 5 nm 610 nm D l = 6 nm 660 nm D l = 5 nm Article Order No. MD 110 chlorine, pH, cyanuric acid, tablet reagents 10 77 10112 MD 110 chlorine, pH, cyanuric acid, liquid reagents 10 77 10152 MD 110 chlorine, pH cyanuric acid, alkalinity-m, tablet reagents 10 77 10702 MD 110 chlorine, pH, cyanuric acid, alkalinity-m, liquid reagents 10 77 10752 MD 110 chlorine, bromine, pH, cyanuric acid, alkalinity-m, calci- 10 77 10902 um hardness MD 110 COD Flame Photometers Flame Photometer, A. KRÜSS Optronic 10 77 11302 co d e b e w WWY3J019 Flame Photometer FP8000 Series With the flame photometers of the FP8000 series, even the lowest concentrations (Meas- uring range: 10 – 2 to 103 ppm) of alkali and alkaline earth elements in aqueous solutions can be determined particularly cost-effectively and user-friendly. The models of the FP8000 series are worldwide unique for the simultaneous measurement of the elements Na, K, Ca and Li in the laboratory and process analysis1). Thanks to proven measuring methods and modern instrument electronics, the flame photometers achieve precise and reproducible measurement results in a matter of seconds with maximum operational reli- ability. The FP8000 series offers suitable models for individual measurements, fully auto- matic measuring operation, continuous operation and use as a process instrument. 1)Other alkali and alkaline earth elements on request if required Technical data: Calibration: Drift: Reference: Combustion gas: Display: Accessories: Upgradeability: Linear with 2 standards Non-linear with 6-8 standards, cubic approximation 1% in 60 min Lithium guideline with 5 mmol/l Caesium guideline on request Propane: recommended for alkaline elements Butane: possible substitute for propane with integrated 8.4 ″ TFT touchscreen, 800 × 600 pixels 24-character plain paper printer Calibration standards and cleaning solutions Spare parts and accessories directly from the manufacturer Retrofit kits to other models available Measurement range: Sample volume: Interfaces: FP8400 FP8500 FP8600 2.5 ml 2 × USB 1 × Ethernet 1 × RS-232 for printer 0.01 – 4500 ppm für Na/K/Li 0.50 – 4500 ppm für Ca 2.5 ml 2 × USB 1 × Ethernet 1 × RS-232 for printer Upgrade 4-20 mA analogue, passive current interface 2.5 ml 2 × USB 1 × Ethernet 1 × RS-232 for printer FP8700 0,1-45000 ppm für Na/K/Li 5,0-45000 ppm für Ca 0.25 ml 2 × USB 1 × Ethernet 1 × RS-232 for printer Article FP8400 Flame photometer FP8500 Flame photometer FP8600 Flame photometer FP8700 Flame photometer Order No. 10 61 18400 10 61 18500 10 61 18600 10 61 18700 990

992

Control Equipment, Evaluation Equipment Electronic Controllers CHAPTER OVERVIEW Electronic Controllers 991 Electronic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991 Monitoring Instruments 996 Monitoring Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996 Electronic Controllers Timers, messner TEMPORA AV timer Ready-to-use timer, can be used as a count up or count down timer. 5 operator buttons and plain text user interface on LCD dot matrix display with backlighting. When set to count up mode, the timer switches the attached load on after the pre-set time has expired. When used in count down mode, the timer switches the connected load off after the pre- set time has expired. Times can be set between 1 s and 99h, 59 min and 59 s. A 2-pole relay is used to switch the load. An acoustic signal can be turned on when the program has finished. Outer dimensions (L × W × H): 190 × 110 × 70 mm Switching power: Voltage: Article TEMPORA AV timer max. 1880 W, 8 A 220 to 240 V~, 50 Hz Order No. 30 65 13510 1 Microprocessor controlled pulse / interval timer TEMPORA PP Ready-to-use pulse / interval timer featuring a dot matrix LCD display with backlighting. Very simple operation using 5 buttons and plain text user interface on the LCD display. A 2-pole relay is used to switch the load. On and off times can be set independently of each another between 1 s and 99h, 59 min, 59 s. The number of repetitions can be set to 1 to 999 or infinity. An acoustic signal sounds when the program has finished. Outer dimensions (L × W × H):190 × 110 × 70 mm Switching power: Voltage: Options: max. 1880 W, 8 A 220 to 240 V~, 50 Hz Floating changeover contact, input for external Start/Stop signal Article TEMPORA PP pulse/interval timer Order No. 30 65 13610 1 Triac Main Voltage Controllers MES, messner Series MES 1000 and 2000 triac-voltage controllers Electronic AC controller for easy regulation of ohmic and inductive loads such as hot plates, heater bands, soldering irons, incandescent lamps, infrared radiators and trans- formers as well as for speed control of universal motors. Technical data: Standard equipment: Case: Power supply: Electronics: Interference suppression: 2-pole On/Off illuminated rocker switch, overvoltage sup- pressor, insulated fuse holder, rotary potentiometer, earthed socket, power cable polycarbonate plastic 220 to 240, 50/60 Hz phase control acc. to EN standard Article 2 Triac main voltage controller MES 1000 External W × H × D: for ohmic loads, transformers and universal motors. 80 × 55 × 150 mm 0.7 kg 1300 W (6 A) Weight: Rating: Article Triac main voltage controller MES 2000 External W × H × D: for ohmic and inductive loads 110 × 70 × 188 mm 1.2 kg 2300 W (10 A) Weight: rating: Article 3 Triac main voltage controller MES 2000 PSI Same as Type MES 2000 except with additional potentiometer scale lock, electronic tri- Order No. 71 65 52125 ac monitoring, load cut-out if triac defective, alarm light and signal, and reset button. Order No. 71 65 52101 Order No. 71 65 52102 2 3 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 991

993

Control Equipment, Evaluation Equipment Electronic Controllers Electronic Controllers Voltron Power Controllers, messner Power controller with on/off switching using 1-pole potentiometer, standard configuration with insulated fuse holder for fuse replacement from the outside. Use and application as for MES series. Technical data: External W × H × D: Weight: Case: Electronics: Power supply: Operating range: Interference suppression: acc. to EN standard Voltron Power Controllers 80 × 55 × 150 mm 0,7 kg polycarbonate plastic phase control 220 to 240 V~, 50/60 Hz 25 to 215/240 V~ Article Voltron power controller 10 for ohmic and inductive load Rating: 1000 W (5 A), minimum load 40 W Voltron power controller 20 for ohmic and inductive load Rating: 2000 W (10 A), minimum load 60 W Order No. 71 65 52302 71 65 52322 *VOLTRON-PLUS AC power controllers For the infinitely variable and loss-free control of ohmic and inductive consumers. Special features: • Illuminated ON/OFF rocker switch, 2-pole type, 10 A (4) • IC-controlled, hysteresis-free • Smooth starting • Interference suppression acc. to EN standard • Overvoltage suppressor • Fuse holder with touch guard Switching capacity: max. 2000 W Switching current: max. 10 A Operating range: 0 to 235 V~ Article *VOLTRON-PLUS AC power controller *VOLTRON-PLUS with additional function pilot lamp Order No. 71 65 52325 71 65 52330 Temperature Controllers, messner 1 TEMPAT® temperature controller Electronic 2-point controller with fiberglass reinforced plastic housing for controlling heat- ing coils, hot plates, ovens, infrared radiators, water baths, etc. The device has built-in sensor breakdown protection and a switching interval display. The sensor is connected via a tip jack. Technical data: External W × H × D: Weight: Power supply: Rating: 110 × 70 × 188 mm 1 kg 220 to 240 V~, 50/60 Hz 2300 W (10 A) Sensor type Pt 100 Pt 100 Fe-CuNi NiCr-Ni Temperature range °C 0 – 100 0 – 400 0 – 600 0 – 1200 Order No. 71 65 50250 71 65 50251 71 65 50252 71 65 50253 2 TEMPAT®-D temperature controller Same as TEMPAT® except with additional built-in digital display for the actual value and encoder switch for selecting the nominal temperature. Sensor type Pt 100 Fe-CuNi NiCr-Ni Temperature range °C 0 – 400 0 – 600 0 – 1200 Order No. 71 65 50260 71 65 50261 71 65 50262 Continued on next page 1 992

994

Control Equipment, Evaluation Equipment Electronic Controllers Electronic Controllers 3 TEMPAT®-DSI temperature controller Configuration same as TEMPAT®-D, except with additional integrated 2-pole irreversible excess temperature or probe breakdown safety shutoff. Fault lamp and warning signal, re-start button, second sensor input jack, potentiometer for setting the threshold temper- ature and monitoring on LED display. Rating: 1800 W 8 A. Option for all 3 TEMPAT® controllers: recorder output available for 0 – 20 mA, 0 – 1 V or 0 – 10 V. The scope of delivery of TEMPAT® controllers does not include feelers. For temperature feelers that match and are ready for connection, see accessories. If no temperature feeler was ordered, the connection plug suitable for the device is loosely attached. Sensor type Pt 100 Fe-CuNi NiCr-Ni Temperature range °C 0 – 400 0 – 600 0 – 1200 Order No. 71 65 50280 71 65 50281 71 65 50282 4 TEMPAT®-DSI temperature controller Safety temperature switch for monitoring all kinds of temperature control tasks. Ideal for complementing simple temperature controllers. Very suitable for monitoring the tempera- ture of heating tapes, heating mantles, water baths and other heaters which are prone to failure of a switch element and to temperature increases to prohibited high ranges. Simple operation: plug heater which is to be monitored in the output plug of TEMPAT®- Control, place feeler in the spot which is to be monitored. Set desired temperature limit on the scale. The device now monitors the connected heater. If the set temperature limit is exceeded, the device turns off the connected heater. An optical and acoustic alarm is triggered, which continues even if the temperature falls below the set temperature limit. For reconnection, press reset key. Rating: 1800 W 8 A. Sensor type Pt 100 Fe-CuNi NiCr-Ni Temperature range °C 0 – 600 0 – 700 0 – 1300 Order No. 10 65 50290 10 65 50291 10 65 50292 5 Accessories Sensors for TEMPAT®, TEMPAT®-D, TEMPAT®-DSI controllers and TEMPAT®- Control Article Resistance probe Pt 100 4301 stainless steel sensor tube, 3.0 mm dia., 250 mm long, with 2 Order No. 71 65 50121 m cable and connector, 3-wire Resistance probe Pt 100 as above, except 2.0 mm dia., 2-wire Resistance probe Pt 100 as above, except 1.6 mm dia., 2-wire Resistance probe double PT 100 as above, except 3.0 mm dia., 2-wire Glass probe Pt 100 4.3 mm dia., 35 mm long, with 2 m cable and connector, 2-wire Glass probe Pt 100 as above, except 3.0 mm dia., 250 mm long, 2-wire for all tempera- ture controllers TEMPAT/TEMPAT-D/TEMPAT-DSI/TEMPAT-Control Thermocouple Fe-CuNi austenitic stainless steel jacket, 1.5 mm Ø, 250 mm long, with 2 m compensation line and connector Inconel jacket, otherwise as above Thermal sensor NiCr-Ni, Ø 1.5 mm Thermal sensor NiCr-Ni, Ø 1.5 mm 100 mm long, otherwise as above 71 65 50100 71 65 50101 10 65 50161 71 65 50131 10 65 50171 71 65 50141 71 65 50151 10 65 50181 2 3 4 Other diameters and lengths on request. Other self-optimizing temperature controllers with digital display of nominal and actual values: TEMPAT®3000 MCS and MCSI series, and TEMPAT®3000 MPR series program controllers with various options on request. 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 993

995

Control Equipment, Evaluation Equipment Electronic Controllers Electronic Controllers Temperature Controllers and Indicators, Juchheim Laboratory Temperature Controllers LTR 4200 and LTR 4200-B Optimized temperature controller for direct connection of laboratory heaters and resist- ance thermometer or thermocouples. Extremely easy to operate yet offering premium precision with safety switch-off function pursuant to VDE. Actual and nominal values permanently visible, nominal value set via pushbutton. Sturdy aluminium housing with small footprint. Safety line monitoring. Continuous setting of heating output. PID control response. Analog and digital interface available as an option. Technical data: • Microprocessor controller with 2×4-digit, 7-segment display, H=13 mm • Fully parameterisable • PID control response: Xp = 0-9999 symm. to nominal value • Heating power continuously adustable from 1 – 99% • Display and control accuracy: max. ±0.1°C • Self-optimizing temperature control • Measuring and control range: Pt100 -200°C to max. +850.0°C Fe-CuNi (L) -200+900°C, NiCr-Ni (K) -200 + 1200°C, PtRh-Pt (S) 0+1768°C • Overtemperature switch-off function, nominal value + >10K • Non-wearing internal power control valve • 2-pole on-off switch, green, illuminated • Sturdy aluminium housing, powder-coated, front and rear anodized aluminium • Sensor breakage protection • Back-up fuse at Pt100 • Housing dimensions (W×H×D): 125 × 215 × 135 mm • Power supply: 230 V / 50 Hz • Breaking capacity: 10 A/230 V for ohm resistive loads • Sensor connection 2×Pt100 or 2 pc. 1×Pt100, Tuchel 7-pole Article Laboratory temperature controller LTR 4200 Laboratory temperature controller LTR 4200-B Equipment identical with LTR 4200, plus an additional measu- ring point and sensor connection 2×Pt100 or 1×Pt100. The ad- ditional measuring point does not have to be occupied. All units also available for thermocouples! Order No. 10 57 04200 10 57 04201 Options Article Acoustic transmitter with automatic unlocking Higher breaking capacity 16A Analog output 0–20 (4–20) mA Analog input external setting: 0–20 (4–20) mA Order No. 10 57 04301 10 57 04302 10 57 04303 10 57 04304 Accessories For laboratory temperature controllers LTR, with cable 2m long and connector. Article Resistance thermometer 1 × Pt 100 (1/3 DIN), 200 × 8 mm made of V4A, lemo plug Resistance thermometer 2 × Pt 100 (1/3 DIN), 200 × 8 mm made of V4A, tuchel plug Resistance thermometer 1 × Pt 100 (1/3 DIN), 200 × 8 mm made of teflon, lemo plug Resistance thermometer 2 × Pt 100 (1/3 DIN), 200 × 8 mm made of teflon, tuchel plug Other models and sizes are available on request. Order No. 71 57 04103 71 57 04101 10 57 04104 10 57 04102 co d e b e w 994 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

996

Control Equipment, Evaluation Equipment Electronic Controllers Electronic Controllers Temperature Controller and Indicator, Juchheim Laboratory temperature controller LTR 3500 Optimized temperature controller for direct connection of laboratory heaters and resist- ance thermometer or thermocouples. Actual and nominal values permanently visible, nominal value set via pushbutton. Sturdy aluminium housing with stand clamp. Measuring line monitoring. Technical data: • Microprocessor controller with 2×4-digit, 7-segment display, H=13 mm • Fully parameterisable • PID control response: Xp = 0-9999 symm. to nominal value • Measuring and control range: Pt100 -200°C bis +850,0°C Fe-CuNi (L) -200+900°C, NiCr-Ni (K) -200 + 1200°C, PtRh-Pt (S) 0+1768°C • Overtemperature switch-off function, nominal value +>10K • Non-wearing internal power control valve • 2-pole on-off switch, green, illuminated • Sturdy aluminium housing, powder-coated, front and rear anodized aluminium • Sensor breakage protection • Back-up fuse at Pt100 • Housing dimensions (W×H×D): 125 × 177 × 135 mm • Power supply: 230 V / 50 Hz • Breaking capacity: 10 A/230 V for ohm resistive loads • Sensor connection PT100, Lemo 4pol size1 (acc. to laboratory automation) Article LTR 3500 LTR 3500-S Equipment identical with LTR 3500, plus safety temperature delimiter via a separate mi- croprocessor controller and an additional temperature sensor connection. All-pole cutoff upon when the safety temperature is reached. The overtemperature switch-off function, nominal value +>10K is not provided. Breaking capacity: 10 A/230 V for ohm resistive loads. All units optionally available for thermocouples! For accessories, refer to measuring device and controller temperature, resistance thermometer for Juchheim LTR. Order No. 71 57 03500 71 57 03511 Options Article Higher breaking capacity 16A Interface RS 485 Order No. 10 57 04302 71 57 03512 Temperature Controllers, Juchheim Laboratory Temperature Controllers LTR 2500 Optimized temperature controller for direct connection of laboratory heaters and resist- ance thermometers and thermocouples. Actual value permanently visible, nominal value set via pushbutton. Technical data: • Microprocessor controller with 4-digit, 7-segment display, H=10 mm, green • Freely parameterisable • Self-optimizing temperature control • Measuring and control range -200°C to +850.0°C • Non-wearing internal power control valve • 2-pole on-off switch, green, illut • Plastic housing, front and rear anodized aluminium • Sensor breakage protection • Fuse back-up at Pt100 • Housing size (W×H×E): 160 × 82 × 130 mm • Power supply: 230 V / 50 Hz • Breaking capacity: 10 A/230 V for ohm resistive loads • Sensor connection PT100, Lemo 4-pole size 1 (acc. to laboratory automation) • Stand clamp Article Laboratory temperature controller LTR 2500 Laboratory temperature controller LTR 2500-S Same features as the LTR 2500, plus safety temperature delimiter via a separate micro- processor controller and an additional temperature sensor connection. All-pole cutoff upon when the safety temperature is reached. For accessories, refer to measuring device and controller temperature, resistance ther- mometers for Juchheim LTR. Order No. 71 57 12500 71 57 22500 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 995

997

Control Equipment, Evaluation Equipment Monitoring Instruments co d e b e w WWQVD011 Monitoring Instruments Water Detectors, Rettberg Water Detector LWW 20 monitors the cooling water supply (e.g. for a distilling cooler) via a platinum relay switch at the outlet (tube connector 10mm) of the appliance. The switch is connected to a relay via a switchboard cable (5 meters in length). This relay controls the electrical connection for the heater, e.g. for distilling apparatus. When a shortage of cooling water is registered, the relay closes down the heater. At the same time, an acoustic and visual warning signal is emitted. After the cooling water sup- ply has been restored, the Water Detector is reactivated via a disconnection switch. The relay then switches the heater on again. N.B. Only electrically conductive coolant can be used with the Water Detector. Article Water detector LWW 20 with switching relay 230 V, 60 Hz, 16 A, 3200 W (max.) and cooling water sensor made Order No. 13 40 65000 of borosilicate glass 3.3 with platinum double electrode Cooling Water Controller, Juchheim Cooling Water Controller LKR 3000 For monitoring cooling water circuits. Very easy to operate. High switching capacity up to 16A (also suitable for thermostats), reliable sensor. Manual reset after malfunction, with simultaneous acoustic warning signal. Technical data: Plastic case (W×H×D): LED display: Can be set for: Power supply Switching capacity: Double-pole switch off 160 × 82 × 130 mm 10 mm high, green 10 l/h to max. 250 l/h 230 V / 50 Hz 16 A/230 V for consumers, 1 A/230 V for solenoid valve Article Cooling water controller LKR 3000 Accessories Article Flow sensor with 1.5 m connecting cable and plug Water stop valve with 1.5 m connecting cable and plug Order No. 71 57 33000 Order No. 71 57 33010 71 57 33020 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical 996

998

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs CHAPTER OVERVIEW Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs 997 Microbiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Determining of Sulphurous Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Alcohol Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997 Nitrogen Determination acc . to Kjedahl . . . . . . 1000 Milk Investigation, Fat Determination . . . . . . . 1004 Water Content Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009 Ethereal Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Packing Testers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Malt Testing Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 Dry Matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012 Water, Environment 1013 Samplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013 Indicator Cards, Test Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations 1025 Turbidity Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 Sedimenting Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 BOD Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 COD Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041 Residue Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045 Waste Water Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047 Medical Investigations 1052 Blood Investigation, Capillary Pipettes . . . . . . . 1052 KNOWLEDGE Nitrogen Determination acc . to Kjeldahl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000 co d e b e w WWXKS058 Microbiology Dip Slides, Behr Dip slides are immersion sample carriers used for microbial counts of bacteria and fungi. They are intended for internal monitoring of your hygiene status by testing surfaces, liquid media, and powders in foods, liquids, cosmetics etc. One paddle has two separate culti- vation areas. Sampling with two different culture media on one slide allows for double sampling in one single work step. See page 626 for a matching refrigerator. Article TTC/Rose For detection of yeasts, mold, fungal contamination, Order No. 10 48 27802 PU pc/Pack 20 and total viable count ‼ Available only in original packaging units. No fractions possible. Determining of Sulphurous Acid Determination of sulphurous acid (total SO2), Behr Devices for determining sulfurous acid. Devices for releasing and distilling sulfurous acid. 1 or 6 sample places, with magnetic stirrer. Systems available with one or two absorption vessels. Reaction flasks 500 ml. Other sizes available upon request. Article 1 Type KSO 2 N compact system for determining sulfurous acid. For 1 sample, 2 absorption vessels, magnetic stirrer, 230 V Type SO 2-6 system for determining sulfurous acid in up to 6 sample spaces at the same time. 2 absorption vessels, magnetic stirrer Order No. 10 48 80020 10 48 80027 1 co d e b e w WWXKS045 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 997

999

SERVICE If ready-made does not fit … We as your laboratory expert are the right part- ner to contact for tailor-made, special solutions for your special application. Photo: behr Labor-Technik You need equipment According to your own development specifications? According to your own analysis requirements? According to special device descriptions from directives such as DIN, ISO, EN, VDI, DEV, etc.? For you, it's a problem. For us, it's a challenge. Contact your laboratory expert. For you and together with you, we will find the right devices or combination of devices, which are perfect for your requirements: made of glass, metal, plastic, with our without controller. Of course, all these solutions will meet the requirements of the CE-safety guidelines. Continued on next page 998

1000

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs co d e b e w WWXKS048 Alcohol Determination Determination of Alcohol and Volatile Acids, Behr Steam distillers D 1 and D 2 • Alcohol • Organic acids • Fermentation processes in beer • Ammonium chloride in licorice products Units for the determination of alcohol content and the determination of volatile acids in wine and other alcoholic beverages. Complete with glassware, including volumetric flask and pycnometer. The behr D 1 and D 2, based on their speed of operation, are especially suited for applications involving a high sample workload. Technical data: Dimensions (W × H × D): Weight: Nominal voltage: Power input: Cooling water consumption: Storage container: Display: Programs: 410 × 675 × 410 mm 32 kg 230 VAC/115 VAC, 50 Hz/60 Hz 1700 W, 9 A/18 A ca. 5 l/min variably big, recommendation behrotest® canister set LCD 1 Article D 1 distilling system D 2 distilling system for determination of alcohol, distillation in a pyknometer for determination of organic acids, distillation in an erlenmeyer flask 500 ml Order No. 10 48 49010 10 48 49011 Beer Analyzer FermentoFlash, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber For the automatic analysis of beer. Measurement of alcohol content and extract as well as the values derived from them: density, apparent extract, original wort and osmotic pres- sure. Dimensions (W×D×H): 300 × 330 × 240 mm, weight: 5 kg Article FermentoFlash incl. protocol printer Order No. 10 42 03572 Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 999

1001

KNOWLEDGE NITROGEN DITERMINATION ACC. TO KJELDAHL For more than 120 years, nitrogen determination according to Kjeldahl has been an internationally accepted standard. In 1883, the Danish chemist Johan Kjeldahl developed this method for quantitative determination of the nitrogen content. This method is still widely used. It can be used for determining the nitrogen content in many substances, which shows in the wide range of use of the method: n Food industry n Environmental analysis n Pharmaceutical or chemical industry In the food industry, nitrogen determination according to Kjeldahl is used to determine the protein content. behr Labor-Technik The procedure of a Kjeldahl determination is divided into three phases: Digestion of sample Distillation Titration By digestion, the nitrogen com- pounds (proteins, amines and or- ganic compounds) are converted into ammonium sulphate with boiling concentrated sulfuric acid with the addition of suitable catalysts (e.g. selenium reaction mixture). At the end of the digestion, the sam- ples are light-green or clear. In a second step, the ammonium ions are converted into gaseous am- monia (NH3) by adding caustic soda (NaOH) until the reaction becomes basic (colour indicator). By means of steam distillation, the released am- monia is collected in a cooler in the receiver of aqueous boric acid solu- tion (concentration 2 – 4%). Absorb- ing the ammonia results in ammo- nium borate. By means of titration with sulfuric acid 0.05 mol/l and the expulsion of the weaker boric acid by the strong- er sulphuric acid, ammonium borate becomes ammonium sulphate. Af- ter the ammonium borate has been completely converted into ammo- nium sulphate, the excessive acid leads to a change of the colour indi- cator from apple-green to magenta. From the exhausted sulphuric acid, the user calculates the nitrogen content of the sample. Infrared quick digestion system (InKjel 1225 TCP) Steam distiller (S 4) Manual titration station (STI) 1000

1002

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs Nitrogen Determination acc. to Kjedahl Nitrogen determination acc. to Kjedahl, Behr Behrotest® InKjel infrared quick digestion units InKjel quick digestion systems with direct heating of the samples by means of infrared radiators (1500 W). Configurations: • 6 digestion vessels at 250 ml each • 12 digestion vessels at 100 ml each • 12 digestion vessels at 250 ml each • 4 digestion vessels at 500 ml each • 4 digestion vessels at 750 ml each With digestion vessels of 500 ml or 750 ml, the behrotest® InKjel M meets requirements of water and sewage water analytics. The basic unit of the INKjel can take in different application racks and suction systems. Thus, the user nimself can convert the device to different vessel sizes by simply exchang- ing the application rack and the suction system. co d e b e w WWXKS049 Order No. 10 48 49998 InKjel 635 M manually controllable infrared digestion system for 6 glasses at 250 ml each InKjel 1210 M manually controllable infrared digestion system 10 48 49500 for 12 glasses at 100 ml each InKjel 1225 M manually controllable infrared digestion system 10 48 49999 for 12 glasses at 250 ml each InKjel 450 M manually controllable infrared digestion system for 4 glasses at 500 ml each InKjel 475 M manually controllable infrared digestion system for 6 glasses at 250 ml each InKjel 625 P programmable infrared digestion system for 6 glasses at 250 ml each InKjel 1210 P programmable infrared digestion system for 12 glasses at 100 ml each Article 1 InKjel 1225 P programmable infrared digestion system for 12 glasses at 250 ml each InKjel 450 P programmable infrared digestion system for 4 glasses at 500 ml each InKjel 475 P programmable infrared digestion system for 4 glasses at 750 ml each 10 48 50002 10 48 50003 10 48 50004 10 48 49450 10 48 49475 10 48 49501 10 48 50001 1 2 3 Standard Kjeldahl block digestion systems behr K 8, K 12 and K 20 Block digestion systems with high-quality corrosion-resistant block housing made of stainless steel. With 8, 12 or 20 sample spaces for standard Kjeldahl digestion vessels with a volume of 250 ml. High-capacity heating and suction hood with exhaust collector • behr one-button operation for especially simple and quick programming • Menu structure in national language • 25 freely assignable programmes for block temperature and digestion time • Applications can be saved Complete systems with digestion vessels, rack and suction hood. Article K 8 Standard Kjeldahl block digestion system 8 sample spaces, for digestion vessels with a volume of 250 ml K 12 Standard Kjeldahl block digestion system 12 sample spaces, for digestion vessels with a volume of 250 ml 2 K 20 Standard Kjeldahl block digestion system 20 sample spaces, for digestion vessels with a volume of 250 ml Order No. 10 48 49100 10 48 49101 10 48 49102 Micro Kjeldahl block digestion systems behr K 16, K 24 and K 40 Block digestion systems with high-quality block housing made of stainless steel. With 16, 24 or 40 sample spaces for Mikro Kjeldahl digestion vessels with a volume of 100 ml. High-performance heating and suction hood with exhaust collector. • behr one-button operation for especially simple and quick programming • Menu structure in national language • 25 freely assignable programmes for block temperature and digestion time • Applications can be saved Complete systems with digestions vessels, rack and suction hood. Article K 16 Micro Kjeldahl block digestion system 16 sample spaces, for digestion vessels with a volume of 100 ml K 24 Micro Kjeldahl block digestion system 24 sample spaces, for digestion vessels with a volume of 100 ml 3 K 40 Micro Kjeldahl block digestion system 40 sample spaces, for digestion vessels with a volume of 100 ml Order No. 10 48 49150 10 48 49151 10 48 49152 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1001

1003

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs Nitrogen Determination acc. to Kjedahl Macro Kjeldahl block digestion system behr K 8 B Block digestion system with high-quality block housing made of stainless steel. With 8 sample spaces for Macro Kjeldahl digestion vessels with a volume of 500 ml. High-per- formance heating and suction hood with exhaust collector. • behr one-button operation for especially simple and quick programming • Menu structure in national language • 25 freely assignable programmes for block temperature and digestion time • Applications can be saved Complete systems with digestions vessels, rack and suction hood. Article K 8 B Macro Kjeldahl block digestion system 8 sample spaces, for digestion vessels with a volume of 500 ml Order No. 10 48 49110 Accessories for the Kjeldahl digestion 1 2 1002 (5.0 g K2SO4; 0.5 g CuSO4), container with 1000 pieces (5.0 g K2SO4; 0.15 g CuSO4; 0.15 g TiO2), container with 1000 pieces Article KT 1 catalyser tablets 1 KT 2 catalyser tablets KT 3 catalyser tablets KT 4 catalyser tablets AFS anti-foam tablets Boiling stones, content 100 g To prevent boiling retardation. Weighing paper, 100 sheets/Pad (3.5 g K2SO4; 0.4 g CuSO4), container with 1000 pieces (3.5 g K2SO4; 3.5 g Se), container with 1000 pieces Order No. 10 48 40100 10 48 40101 10 48 40103 10 48 49920 10 48 40102 80 48 30700 10 48 41136 behr distilling unit The behr steam distilling devices offer an automatic steam generator, pressure monitoring, automatic monitoring of filling level of storage tank, visibly mounted glass parts for distill- ing behind safe door made of acrylic glass with safety switch (no distilling possible when door is open), automatic time-controlled programme run, error diagnostics with optical and acoustic display, “standby” function for lower consumption of power and cooling water, RS323-interface for data recording and control, user-friendly construction, behr one-button operation, user surface in many languages. behr steam distilling device S 1 Automatic adding of NaOH. The steam capacity is variable between 10% and 100%. behr steam distilling device S 2 Convenient distilling device. Programme control for adding of H2O and NaOH. The steam capacity is variable between 10% and 100%. Information on programme run and error messages by means of LED-display. behr steam distilling device S 3 Convenient distilling device for medium sample volume. Programme control for adding H2O and NaOH as well as extracting distilled sample residue. The steam capacity is var- iable between 10% and 100%. Information on programme run and error messages by means of LED-display. behr steam distilling device S 4 99 programs. Automatic adding of NaOH, H2O and H3BO3. Automatic extraction of dis- tilled sample residue. The steam capacity is variable between 10% and 100%. behr steam distilling device S 5 Steam distilling device for applications involving a high sample workload, with option to connect an external titration unit. The steam capacity is variable between 10% and 100% Article S 1 distilling system, semi-automated S 2 distilling system, semi-automated 2 S 3 distilling system, semi-automated S 4 distilling system, fully automatic S 5 distilling system, fully automatic prepared for external titrator (such as TB 2) KAS 20 canister set for S 1 and S 2 consists of 2 canisters at 20 l each, incl. float switch KAS 30 canister set for S 3 consists of 3 canisters at 20 l each, incl. float switch KAS 40 canister for S 4 and S 5 consists of 4 canisters at 20 l each, incl. float switch Titration modul TB 2 for connection to distilling unit S 5 3 Order No. 10 48 49001 10 48 49002 10 48 49003 10 48 49004 10 48 49005 10 48 49020 10 48 49030 10 48 49040 10 48 49050 Continued on next page

1004

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs Nitrogen Determination acc. to Kjedahl Process suction system behrosog 3 Features: • Infinitely adjustable extraction performance • Transparent safety screen for more user safety • External, easy to access operating elements prevent the user from touching the hot glass elements • Acid-proof diaphragm pump Article 3 behrosog 3 process suction system Scrubber with suction pump (40 l/h), condensation level and Order No. 10 48 40008 neutralisation level ACS additional cooling system for behrosog 3 TS mixed indicator according to Tashiro, 1 l 10 48 40009 10 48 49148 Manual Titration Station STI The manual titration station STI consists of: • a burette with digital display, and • a magnetic stirrer with accurately fitting holder for one Erlenmeyer flask. A screen is used as a neutral background, allowing the user an accurate identification of the color change at the end of titration. Thus, the user carries out all titrations under sim- ilar optical conditions, increasing the accuracy and reproducibility of the results. The exact positioning of the sample vessel in the rack on the top of the magnetic stirrer also contributes to this result. The inclined side panels of the screen provide an addition- al protection from lateral glare. Article 4 Manual titration station STI for nitrogen determination with Kjeldahl method Delivery does not include the illustrated accessories Order No. 10 48 42020 4 Kjeldahl Distillation System, LAT 5 Kjeldahl distillation system VELP UDK 159 Fully automated steam distilling device with integrated titration system. • Housing made of corrosion-resistant polymer • 6 inch color touch screen • Storage capacity: up to 100,000 measurements • Standard burette volume: 25 ml (50 ml optional) • Minimum burette volume 2 µl/step • Programmable timer 0 – 99 min. • Various customizable languages available (GE, UK, ESP, IT, RUS) • Reproducibility ±1% • Recovery ±99.5% between 1 and 200 mg N • Detection limit ±0.1 mg • Interfaces: USB 2, Ethernet, and RS232 • Conformity with all the usual standards (AOAC, EPA, DIN, ISO, GLP) • Power: 2300 Watt • Power supply: 230V 50/60 Hz • Weight 31 Kg • Dimensions: 385 × 780 × 416 mm Features: • Duration of analysis (including titration): 4 min. • Automatic addition of sodium hydroxide, volume 0 – 150 ml • Automatic addition of diluted water, volume 0 – 200 ml • Automatic addition of boric acid, volume 0 – 159ml • Automatic cleaning of titration vessel • Steam flow regulation 10% – 100% • Water consumption 0.5 l/min. at 15 °C to 1 l/min. at 30 °C Contact us for other available systems. co d e b e w WWW4U111 5 Article Kjeldahl distillation system VELP UDK 159 Order No. 10 83 20159 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1003

1005

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs 2 1004 3 4 1 Nitrogen Determination acc. to Kjedahl Fully automatic digestion system VELP DKL With lift for 8, 12 or 20 samples of 250 ml (diameter 42 mm). Features: • Automatic lift • Stainless steel structure with corrosion-resistant coating • Stainless steel sample rack with suction cap • Library of 54 programs with up to 4 ramps each • Temperature range up to 450°C ±0.5°C • Time range: 1 to 999 minutes • Microprocessor with LCD graphic display • Various customizable languages available (GE, UK, ESP, IT, RUS) • Power 1150 – 2300 Watt (DKL 8-20) • Dimensions: DKL8 210 × 690 × 540 mm, DKL12 266 × 690 × 540 mm, DKL20 322 × 690 × 584 mm • Weight: DKL8 20 kg, DKL12 24 kg, DKL20 31 kg • Very low power consumption (up to 35% less than traditional systems) • USB interface Contact us for other available systems and accessories. Article DKL8 digestion system supplied DKL12 digestion system supplied DKL20 digestion system supplied Order No. 10 83 22008 10 83 22012 10 83 22020 Kjedahl UDK-169 Fully automated steam distillation with autosampler for 24 × 25 ml or 21 × 400 ml. For high sample throughput in unsupervised operation. Technical data identical with those of UDK 159, but with additional functions: • Library with 55 programs (31 pre-defined, 24 user-specific) • Program for automated removal of residues from test tubes and titration vessel • Fully automated operation 1 Article 2 Kjedahl UDK-169 Order No. 10 83 22016 Milk Investigation, Fat Determination Milk Analyzers LactoStar and LactoFlash, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber 3 Milk analyzer LactoStar (printer included) For the routine analysis of milk: Fat: 0.00 % to 40.00 % Protein: 0.00 % to 10.00 % Lactose: 0.00 % to 10.00 % SNF: 0.00 % to 15.00 % The density and freezing point are calculated. Technical data: Dimensions (W×D×H): 440 × 440 × 200 mm Weight: Article Milk analyzer LactoStar 15.5 kg 4 Milk analyzer LactoFlash (printer included) Analyser for the rapid and accurate determination of: Fat: 0.00 % to 15,00 % SNF: 0.00 % to 15.00 % The density, protein, lactose and freezing point are calculated. Technical data: Dimensions (W×D×H): 300 × 330 × 240 mm Weight: Article Milk analyzer LactoFlash 5 kg Order No. 88 42 03510 Order No. 10 42 03530 Accessories for LactoStar and LactoFlash Article Thermal printer Thermal paper Cleaning agent 500 ml, PE bottle Funke-Gerber Zero-Diluent 5,000 ml, for daily zero calibration, PE container, sufficient Intensiv cleaning agent 500 ml, PE bottle Order No. 87 42 57151 88 42 07157 10 42 03563 10 42 03564 10 42 03565 for more than 100 calibrations Continued on next page

1006

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs Milk Investigation, Fat Determination Reference materials The exact values depend on the batch. These are included in the delivery. Article Reference milk 1.5% fat Reference milk 3.5% fat Order No. 10 42 03517 10 42 03518 Freezing Point Determination Apparatus, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber CryoStar l and CryoStar automatic freezing point determination apparatus With the CryoStar l and the CryoStar automatic, you can quickly and reliably determine the extraneous water content in milk. You can choose between fixed time measurement, plateau search or maximum search. All key parameters are programmable and are of course logged, so that the units can be set up for all national and international standards (even future requirements). The operation is menu-driven in the language of your choice. Currently, many are availa- ble. Additional languages are continually added. The reliable cooling system quickly brings the unit to operating temperature. Depending on the setting, up to 40 samples per hour can be measured. These can be logged with the printer comprised in the delivery (CryoStar automatic), or with a printer (CryoStar I) which is available as an accessory. Data can also be stored on a PC or USB thumbdrive (CryoStar I). The CryoStar is small, light and easy to use. They give you a direct readout of extraneous water content, and a printout. Calibration is performed automatically. All settings and calibration values are permanently stored in the memory. Technical data: Power supply: Resolution: Reproducibility: Measuring range: Sample throughput: up to 40/h (average 30/h) Sample volume: Interfaces: 230 V / 115 V AC (50 – 60 Hz), 180 VA 0.0001°C (0.1 m°C) ±0.0020°C (±2.0 m°C) 0.0000°C to -1.500°C 2.0 ml to 2.5 ml (average 2.2 ml) CryoStar – serial, USB, Ethernet CryoStar automatic – parallel, serial Both devices have a socket for the thermal printer. Article 1 Freezing point determination apparatus CryoStar I, without printer Dimensions (W × D × H): 340 × 330 × 240 mm Order No. 87 42 07150 2 Freezing point determination apparatus CryoStar automatic, Weight: 8.7 kg with printer Round magazine for twelve samples. Which makes it possible to measu- re twelve samples fully automatically. Dimensions (W × H × D): 430 × 435 × 185 mm, with measurement head 240 mm Weight: 14.6 kg, with measurement head 15.2 kg Accessories 87 42 07160 1 2 for CryoAutomatic Article Thermal printer dimensions (W×D×H): 170 × 170 × 65 mm Thermistor, long version Thermal paper Thermistor, short version Calibration standard A (0.000°C) 250 ml in PE bottle Calibration standard B (-0.557 °C) 250 ml in PE bottle Sample tube with marking at 2.0 ml, 50 pieces for CryoStar I internal diameter: 13.7 mm, external diameter: 15.8 mm Sample stand made of PPH, for 27 sample tubes (art. no. 87 42 47167) dimensions (W×D×H): 224 × 70 × 40 mm Cooling bath liquid 500 ml in PE bottle, for refilling Sampling pipette adjustable from 1.0 ml to 5.0 ml Pipette tips for 87 42 57174, pack of 200 pieces Calibration standard A (-0.408°C) 250 ml in PE bottle Calibration standard B (-0.600°C) 250 ml in PE bottle Test standard C (-0,512°C) 250 ml in PE bottle co d e b e w Order No. 87 42 57151 87 42 17152 88 42 07157 10 42 07172 87 42 37165 87 42 37166 87 42 47167 87 42 67168 87 42 27169 87 42 57174 87 42 57175 87 42 37186 87 42 37187 87 42 37188 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1005

1007

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs co d e b e w WWSU9004 6 4 5 1 2 3 1006 Milk Investigation, Fat Determination Butyrometers for Determination of Fat, Dinkelberg Analytics The following butyrometers for the determination of fat are all delivered with con- formity certificate for: Article Milk 0 – 5% : 0.1 Milk 0 – 6% : 0.1 Milk 0 – 7% : 0.1 1 Milk 0 – 4% : 0.05 Skimmed milk 0 – 1% : 0.01 Dried milk according to Teichert 0 – 35% : 0.5 Dried milk according to Teichert 0 – 70 : 1,0 % Milk according to Gerber 0 – 12 : 0,1 % Cream according to Schulz 0 – 5 – 40 : 0,5 % Cream according to Köhler 0 – 40% : 0.5 Cream according to Köhler 0 – 50% : 1.0 Cream according to Roeder 0 – 5 – 40% : 0.5 Cream according to Roeder 0 – 30 – 55% : 0.5 2 Cheese according to van Gulik 0 – 40% : 0.5 Butyrometer accessories Article 3 Small stopper for 51051 – 51062 Cartridge for 1 Butyrometer Order No. 16 32 51011 16 32 51012 16 32 51013 16 32 51015 16 32 51020 16 32 51030 10 32 11034 10 32 11032 10 32 11033 16 32 51041 16 32 51042 16 32 51051 16 32 51052 16 32 51061 Order No. 16 32 52005 10 32 12008 Special glass equipment for examining milk Article Durham tube 40 × 8 mm, 100 pieces Serum collecting tube, Friese type Complete with 2 stoppers Weighing scoop for milk powder, with 4 feet Glass pestle, 90 mm long Glass pestle, 130 mm long Milk pipette, conformity certified, 10.75 ml Milk pipette 5.05 ml, conformity certified, 5.375 ml 4 Bulb pipette, short form, 25 ml Demeterpipette 1.0 – 2.2 ml, wide outlet Cream pipette, conformity certified, 5.05 ml Bulb pipette for 5 ml water 5 Homogenizing pipette with mark at 5 and 25 ml 6 Demeter dilution pipette With 2 ring marks at 1.0 and 1.1 ml Demeter dilution pipette With 4 ring marks at 1.0, 2.0, 2.1 and 2.2 ml Mojonnier tipping tube For fat determination according to Röse Gottlieb Order No. 16 32 53001 16 32 53005 16 32 53006 16 32 53012 16 32 53013 16 32 53014 10 32 13016 16 32 53015 10 32 13017 16 32 53020 16 32 53021 16 32 53022 16 32 53023 16 32 53024 16 32 53028 Butyrometers, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber All butyrometers come in standard packs of 10. Butyrometers made of glass, weighing method Article Precision butyrometer 0-4%: 0.05 for drinking milk and vat milk, frosted rear scale wall, fault to- lerance: 0.025% Butyrometer for milk 0-5%: 0.1 Butyrometer for milk 0-6%: 0.1 Butyrometer for milk 0-7%: 0.1 Butyrometer for milk 0-8%: 0.1 Butyrometer for milk 0-9%: 0.1 Butyrometer for milk 0-10%: 0.1 Butyrometer for milk 0-12%: 0.1 Butyrometer for milk 0-16%: 0.2 Skimmed milk butyrometer acc. to Sichler 0-1%: 0.01 with open bulb Skimmed milk butyrometer acc. to Sichler 0-1%: 0.01 with closed bulb Skimmed milk butyrometer acc. to Kehe 0-4%: 0.05 Order No. 10 42 01500 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 42 01510 10 42 01520 10 42 01530 10 42 01540 10 42 01550 10 42 01560 10 42 01570 10 42 01580 10 42 01600 10 42 01601 10 42 01610 Continued on next page 10 10

1008

Milk Investigation, Fat Determination Article Order No. Skimmed milk butyrometer acc. to Kehe 0-5%: 0.05 10 42 01620 Skimmed milk butyrometer acc. to Siegfeld 0-0.5%: 0.02 10 42 01640 Powdered milk butyrometer acc. to Teichert 0-35%: 0.5 10 42 01700 Powdered milk butyrometer acc. to Teichert 0-70%: 1.0 10 42 01710 10 42 01800 Ice cream and condensed milk butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-6-12%: 0.1 Ice cream and condensed milk butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-15%: 0.2 Cream butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-5-40%: 0.5 Cream butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-30-55%: 0.5 Cream butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-50-75%: 0.5 Cream butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-5-70%: 1.0 Cream butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-5-50%: 0.5 Cream butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-5-60%: 1.0 Cream butyrometer acc. to Schulz-Kley 0-5-40%: 0.5 Butter butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-70-90%: 0.5 Cheese butyrometer acc. to Van Gulik 0-40%: 0.5 Curd butyrometer, weighing method 0-20%: 0.2 Food butyrometer acc. to Roeder 0-100%: 1.0 Free fat butyrometer For determing free fat content in milk and cream, complete 10 42 01810 10 42 02000 10 42 02010 10 42 02020 10 42 02030 10 42 02040 10 42 02050 10 42 02080 10 42 02200 10 42 02300 10 42 02400 10 42 02500 10 42 03252 Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 with screw cap, scale 0.002 g. Butyrometers made of glass, measuring method Article Cream butyrometer for ice cream, measuring method 0-15%: 0.2 Cream butyrometer for ice cream, measuring method 0-20%: 0.2 Cream butyrometer acc. to Koehler 0-30%: 0.5 Cream butyrometer acc. to Koehler 0-40%: 0.5 Cream butyrometer acc. to Koehler 0-50%: 1.0 Cream butyrometer acc. to Koehler 0-60%: 1.0 Cream butyrometer acc. to Koehler 0-70%: 1.0 Cream butyrometer acc. to Koehler 0-80%: 1.0 Order No. 10 42 01890 10 42 01900 10 42 02090 10 42 02100 10 42 02110 10 42 02120 10 42 02130 10 42 02140 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Accsessories Article FIBU patent closure For all measuring method butyrometers, FIBU without adjustment key. GERBAL patent closure For all measuring method butyrometers. Adjustment key for FIBU patent closure Adjustment key for GERBAL patent closure Rubber stopper, conical For all measuring method butyrometers, 11 × 16 × 43 mm. Rubber stopper For all weighing method butyrometers for sealing the bulb. Rubber stopper with hole For all weighing method butyrometers, 17 × 22 × 30 mm. Rubber stopper without hole For powdered milk butyrometers, also suitable for extraction tube according to Mojonnier (art. no. 3870, 3871). Natural rubber, 17 × 22 × 30 mm. Glass nail For rubber stopper with hole, length: 41.5 mm. Cream beaker without holes For ice cream, condensed milk and cream butyrometers Order No. 10 42 03260 10 42 03261 10 42 03270 10 42 03271 10 42 03280 10 42 03290 10 42 03300 10 42 03310 10 42 03315 10 42 03320 according to Roeder. 3 = 75 mm l2 = 49 mm l1 = 26 mm d2 = 15 mm d1 = 5 mm Cheese beaker with holes For butyrometers according to Van Gulik‘s method. l3 = 75 mm l2 = 49 mm l1 = 26 mm d2 = 15 mm d1 = 5 mm Cheese beaker with holes, short form co d e b e w 10 42 03321 10 42 03311 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1007

1009

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs Milk Investigation, Fat Determination Article For butyrometers according to Van Gulik‘s method. Order No. l3 = 66 mm l2 = 38 mm l1 = 27,8 mm d2 = 15 mm d1 = 5 mm Weighing boats for butter For butyrometer according to Roeder‘s method. l3 = 75 mm l2 = 45 mm l1 = 30 mm d2 = 15 mm d1 = 5 mm l3 = 75 mm l2 = 48 mm l1 = 27 mm d2 = 15 mm d1 = 5 mm Butter beaker with 2 holes Babcock bottle, 0-8% for milk, without stopper Stopper on request. 163 mm length, outer-Ø 35.8 mm. Babcock bottle, 0-20% for cream, without stopper 163 mm length, outer-Ø 36.2 mm Babcock bottle, 0-60% for cream and cheese, without stopper 164 mm length, outer-Ø 35.9 mm Extraction tube with rounded bulb according to Mojonnier, ISO 3889, with cork stopper Extraction tube with flattened bulb according to Mojonnier, with cork stopper Cork stopper for extraction tube according to Mojonnier, ISO 3889 Solubility index tube (ADPI tube) 50 ml, graduated from 0–20 ml and mark at 50 ml. For the centrifuge 10 42 03322 10 42 03323 10 42 03254 10 42 03256 10 42 03258 10 42 03870 10 42 03871 10 42 03872 10 42 03634 SuperVario-N. Special solubility index tube For determining the solubility of milk powder. For the bench centrifu- 10 42 03637 ge NovaSafety. Mojonnier Agitator, Aerne Analytic Used for determining the fat content of milk. Material white PVC, digital display, operated by an induction motor Customised versions (also for other contents / vessels) available on request. Type Specification MSM 4 MSM 6 MSM 8 Mojonnier agitator for 4 Mojonnier tubes Mojonnier agitator for 6 Mojonnier tubes Mojonnier agitator for 8 Mojonnier tubes Power rating W 60 60 60 Order No. 10 64 01040 10 64 01060 10 64 01080 Centrifuges for Determination of Fat, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber Nova Safety Centrifuge Bench centrifuge with angular rotor for butyrometric fat determination according to Dr. N. Gerber, as well as for the determination of the solubility of milk powder with special solu- bility index tubes (art. no.: 3637). Properties: • Automatic interlocking lid • Automatic brake (braking time < 8 s) • Centrifugation timer (digital) • Heater: temperature adjustable in 1°C steps from room temperature up to 65°C (can be switched off) • Capacity: max. 8 butyrometers or max. 8 special solubility index tubes Technical data: RCF: Speed: Effective radius: Weight: Dimensions (W×D×H): Power supply: 350 g ±50 g 1350 rpm 170 mm 13 kg 470 × 380 × 230 mm 230 V / 50 – 60 Hz Article Table centrifuge Nova Safety Replacement tube for butyrometer Order No. 55 42 03670 10 42 03641 co d e b e w WW39Q002 1008

1010

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs Milk Investigation, Fat Determination Multi-purpose centrifuge SuperVario-N, Funke - Dr. N. Gerber SuperVario-N multipurpose centrifuge Centrifuge for fat content determination according to Gerber, Roese-Gottlieb, Babcock and for the determination of the solubility of milk powder (ADPI). Properties: • stainless steel housing • programmable rotor speed from 600 rpm to 1130 rpm in increments of 10 rpm (corre- sponding to a g value of 77 to 372 g, depending on the rotor) • programmable heater up to 68°C in 1°C increments • programmable centrifugation time from 1 to 99 minutes • automatic interlocking safety lid • automatic shut-down in case of unbalance • automatic brake Technical data: Connection values: Weight (empty): Total height with lid: External diameter: Filling height: Speed range: Temperature range: 230 V / 50 – 60 Hz / 1200 VA 26 kg 460 mm 670 mm 370 mm 600 to 1130 rpm ambient temperature up to 68°C Article Multi-purpose centrifuge SuperVario-N Order No. 55 42 03680 Accessories for the determination of fat content according to Gerber Article Head A for a maximum of 36 butyrometer effective radius of the attachment: 260 mm Butyrometer bucket made of aluminium Order No. 55 42 03685 55 42 13631 Accessories for the determination of fat content according to Babcock Order No. 55 42 03685 Article Head A for a maximum of 18 Babcock buckets effective radius of the attachment: 260 mm Babcock bucket 55 42 13632 Accessories for the determination of fat content according to Roese-Gottlieb Article Head B for a maximum of 8 Mojonnier tubes effective radius of the attachment: 190 mm (operation only possible in accordance with the respective safe- ty regulations) Accessories for solubility determination Article Head C for a maximum of 6 buckets for solubility index tubes effective radius of the attachment: 190 mm Solubility index tube (ADPI tube) Bucket for solubility index tubes (ADPI tubes) Order No. 55 42 13686 Order No. 55 42 13687 10 42 03634 55 42 23633 Water Content Determination Compact system for determining water content, Behr Complete, compact system for determination of the water contents my means of azeo- tropic distillation (xylene method). Suitable for inhomogeneous bulky foods as e.g. dried fruit, sauerkraut, etc. With stand, heating module, mount, and glassware. Article behrotest® KWA 500 Complete with stand, glassware, heating block and hose connections Order No. 10 48 00500 co d e b e w WWXKS047 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1009

1011

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs co d e b e w WWFNK006 1 co d e b e w WWFNK005 co d e b e w WWSU9037 2 1010 Water Content Determination Apparatus for Determination of Water Content, Starke Article 1 Apparatus for determination of water content Xylene method DIN 51582, zero point on stopcock, burette with stopcock, 10 ml 1/10, Order No. 14 59 40020 Liebig condenser 400 mm, with 2 ground joints 29, round flask 500 ml Order No. 14 59 40021 Article Apparatus for determination of water content Same as above but calibratable, zero point in cyl. part, same accessories as above Article Middle part Burette with stopcock 10 ml 1/10, zero point on stopcock Article Middle part Same as art. 145940022 but calibratable, zero point in cyl. part Article Middle part Same as art. 145940022 but without stopcock, zero point in the tip Order No. 10 59 40024 Order No. 14 59 40022 Order No. 14 59 40023 Ethereal Oils Apparatus for Determination of Essential Oils in Drugs, Starke Article Apparatus for determining ethereal oils In accordance with DAB, distillation head with ground joint-cone size 29/32, Allihn con- denser, vent plug with ground joint size 7/16, measuring tube 1 ml: 0.01 with 3 ml ball, Czako stopcock, Teflon plug, without piston Order No. 14 59 50129 Article Apparatus for determining ethereal oils Same as above but Czako stop with glass plug Order No. 14 59 50229 On request, measuring pipes are also available with different contents, ball, or measuring pipe. Packing Testers Packing Tester, Dinkelberg Analytics Instrument for testing the tightness of closures and seals on packages, e.g. in the phar- maceutical or food industry. As standard test method the test chamber is filled with water and the package placed under a height-adjustable perforated disk. When vacuum is applied, air bubbles indicate a leaky package. Packing Tester, Standard Model Basic model, for applying a vacuum using an external diaphragm pump (not included). Comprising a PMMA test chamber, incl. push-rod with submersible plate, analog vacuum gauge 0 to 1200 mbar and fine control valve. Type Outer Ø Outer height Useful Ø Useable height max. Weight Order No. 2 DIVT-200/210 mm 210 mm 370 mm 190 mm 210 kg 2.6 57 32 40021 DIVT-200/310 210 470 190 310 3.0 57 32 40031 Continued on next page

1012

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs Packing Testers Digital Packing Tester Extended basic model, easy to use, suitable for routine work as well as for research and development laboratories. Compact design and small space requirement thanks to the integration of the electronic control unit, test chamber (made of PMMA) and a high-per- formance pump in a single unit. Vacuum control system with vacuum sensor and elec- tronic program controller, setpoint selection in 1 mbar increments. Setting range from 0 to -500/-750 mbar (rel.). Test procedure pre-set in 4 vacuum steps with 20 sec. stop time per step. Automatic test start upon reaching the predefined vacuum. The system is then vented automatically. Safety through electronically limited maximum vacuum, plus an additional mechanical pressure limiter. Vacuum pump included. Test chambers are available in customized sizes on request. 3 DIDVTT-200/310 Type Outer dimensions L × W × H mm 440×230×450 Useful Ø Useful height Useable height max. Adjusting range Weight Mains connection Order No. 230 V~/50 Hz 57 32 20031 mm 190 mm 310 mm 310 mbar 0 up to -750 kg 9.7 DIDVTT-300/310 515×350×450 290 310 310 0 up to -500 13.0 230 V~/50 Hz 57 32 30031 Digital Packing Tester, Special Model Large model of the digital packing tester. Differs in having a square test chamber (recom- mended size L 500 × W 400 × H 300 mm, final size according to customer’s specifica- tions). Test chamber with hinged lid and additional vent valve. Submersible grid made of rustproof wire mesh. Separate controller in PP housing with reinforced vacuum pump. Vacuum included in delivery. 4 DIDVTT-Q Type Outer dimensions container L × W × H mm 540 × 440 × 375 Useful dimensions container L × W × H mm 500 × 400 × 300 Useable height max. Adjusting range Weight Mains connection Order No. 230 V~/50 Hz 57 32 50031 mbar 0 up to -500 mm 250 kg 23 3 4 Packing Tester, Aerne Analytic For leakage testing of all types of packaging. The test vessel is filled with water and the packaging to be tested is placed under the height-adjustable immersion plate. Once a vacuum is applied, any leakage is indicated by raising air bubbles. Type Specification VT150 VT250 VT350 VT250D VT350D VT QD Packing tester, analogue Packing tester, analogue Packing tester, analogue Packing tester, digital Packing tester, digital Packing tester, digital Useful dimensions Ø × H cm 19 × 15 19 × 25 29 × 25 19 × 25 29 × 25 L50 × B40 × H25 Order No. 10 64 03150 10 64 04250 10 64 04350 10 64 03250 10 64 03350 10 64 04500 Customised versions (also analog) available on request. Accessories for packing tester (available on request): Spare tanks for VT250D, VT350D and VT QD co d e b e w WW39Q004 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1011

1013

Special Analysis Food, Feedstuffs, Drugs co d e b e w WW11M001 Malt Testing Apparatus TURBOE 4/2 Stirrer, Multi-Point, with Temperature-Controlled Bath, BOESECKE Multi-point stirrer with 4 individual stirring points of 105 W each, incl. 4 paddle stirrers, digital adjustment of speed from 50 to 2.000 rpm, microprocessor control for constant speed • Digital indication of setpoint and actual speed • Continuous adjustment of speed without gear shifting • Slim design • Very quiet operation • Electronic safety circuit • Lockup-protected, overload-proof • Push-through agitator shafts Enhanced safety as a result of smooth start, fastened to the double stand, comprises a bath heat thermostat, working temperature range 30°C to 300°C, 3.5 kW, with solenoid valve and cooling coil, with external temperature sensor, program encoder with 150 tem- perature/time segments, dividable into 5 programs, bath cover with 4 apertures of 100 mm, with covers and height-adjustable raising bottom. W × D × H TURBOE 4/2 stirrer Wght kg 580×590×800 60 mm Connec. Speed rpm P output W Order No. 230 V, 50/60 Hz 50 – 2000 105 10 65 10084 Dry Matter co d e b e w WWSU9060 Sea Sand for Dry Matter Determination, Dinkelberg Analytics This sea sand is washed and meets the requirements of regulation 3.7 of the VDLUFA testing association (Verband Deutscher Landwirtschaftlicher Untersuchungs- und Forschungsanstalten). Grain size 0.1 – 0.3 mm. Article Sea sand for dry matter determination Sea sand for dry matter determination Order No. 10 32 16405 10 32 16425 PU kg/Pack 5 25 co d e b e w 1012 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer.

1014

Samplers Sampling Scoops, Behr behrotest® sampling scoops for collecting surface samples. Clamping device and rod end are made of stainless steel. These scoops come with ves- sels made of borosilicate glass and are in accordance with the high standards of DIN EN 1485/AOX procedure. All scoops have the following features: • Rugged, telescoping rod in three pieces • Length adjustable between 1 m and 3.75 m • Ideal for taking samples from bodies of water that are difficult to reach • Continuously adjustable scoop angle • Vessel holder made of stainless steel Article 1 PB 1000 PF 1000 PP 1000 PT 1000 PV 1000 Rod length cm 300. 3-piece 300. 3-piece 300. 3-piece 300. 3-piece 300. 3-piece Sample jar Special glass Conical shoulder bottle PP beaker PTFE beaker Stainless steel scoop Volume l 1 1 1 1 1 Order No. 39 48 65012 39 48 65014 39 48 65015 39 48 65016 39 48 65017 Sampling Sticks, ORI Sampling sticks for taking samples by hand Made of very light-weight, stable fibre glass, in signal-yellow colour. Resistant to aggres- sive waste waters. Thanks to the practical hinged lock, the multi-part telescopic stick is infinitely adjustable. Maximum length available: 3.20 m. With screws for easy removal of one sampling system from the telescopic stick for re- placement with another. This means that the sampling stick is fit for universal use. For full functionality, you need at least one stick and one sampling system. Article Sampling stick, 2-piece, 2.30 m Sampling stick, 3-piece, 3.20 m 2 Sampling beaker, PE, 600 ml PE beaker with embossed blue scale and spout. With clamp for ex- change of beakers, and joint for universal angle adjustment of 0 – 180°. Sampling beaker, PE, 1000 ml 3 Sampling beaker, stainless steel, 600 ml Same as 2 but stainless steel beaker with spout, intended specifically for taking microplastic and nanoparticle samples Sampling beaker, stainless steel, 1000 ml 4 Sampling beaker, borosilicate glass, 1000 ml Held by a PVC collar, the beaker glass is perfectly protected against glass breakage. Sampling beaker, borosilicate glass, 2000 ml 5 Pendulum beaker, PE, 600 ml The beaker swivels in all directions and is suitable for sampling from deep gulleys and pits. Pendulum beaker, PE, 1000 ml 6 Pendulum beaker, stainless steel, 500 ml Same as 3, beaker made of stainless steel (suitable for flame treatment) Pendulum beaker, stainless steel, 1000 ml 7 Measuring quiver For holding an ISM sensor. By means of the appurtenant electrode in connection with des-Link1) it is possible to measure for example the pH value in larger distances or depth (up to 2.50 m) via smartphone. The stainless steel sieve basket protects the electrode. 1) see page 919 Order No. 10 22 50728 10 22 50729 10 22 51002 10 22 51005 10 22 51008 10 22 51009 10 22 51003 10 22 51004 10 22 50730 10 22 50731 10 22 50732 10 22 50733 10 22 51007 Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWXKS008 1 co d e b e w WWBPE002 2 4 6 3 5 7 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1013

1015

Samplers TeleScoop, BÜRKLE TeleScoop for industry and water treatment Ideal for samples from pools, tanks, pits, open water. The telescope pole can be equipped for different applications by means of the practical snap-connection with different tools. Telescope poles made of aluminum, heavy model, with snap-connection for all scoops. Continuously adjustable from 0.65 m to 6.00 m (see table). Metal cup made of stainless steel, with scraping edge. Ideal for powder, granulates, pastes, sludge. Angular beakers. The inclination of the beaker can be adjusted by 90°. Thus, it can be adjusted to different applications. Pendulum beaker. This beaker automatically swings horizontally independent of the in- clination of the telescope pole. Nothing can be spilled. Thus, it is very suitable for deep and narrow pits (Ø 150 mm). Bottle holder for all bottles up to 88 mm Ø. Plastic, glass or metal bottles can safely be filled. Angle can be adjusted by 90º. Surface catch net for taking solid and organic samples from water courses, PVC/PA blue, L 310 × B 280 mm, mesh width 2 – 5 mm. Depth catch net for taking solid and organic samples from water courses, PP/PA blue, L 190 x B 430 mm, net depth 250 mm, mesh width 2 – 5 mm. 1 Article 1 Telescopic rod Telescopic rod Telescopic rod Telescopic rod Telescopic rod Telescopic rod Telescopic rod 2 Metal beaker stainless steel 3 Angular beaker 90° Angular beaker 90° Angular beaker 90° 4 Pendulum beaker Pendulum beaker Pendulum beaker 5 Pendulum beaker stainl. steel 6 Surface catch net 7 Depth catch net 8 Bottle holder Vers. from 0.65 m to 1.20 m from 0.70 m to 1.80 m from 0.95 m to 2.80 m from 1.25 m to 2.50 m from 1.15 m to 3.00 m from 1.65 m to 4.50 m from 1.75 m to 6.00 m 1000 ml capacity 600 ml capacity 1000 ml capacity 2000 ml capacity 600 ml capacity 1000 ml capacity 2000 ml capacity 1000 ml capacity up to 88 mm Ø Order No. 10 04 55120 10 04 55180 10 04 55280 10 04 55250 10 04 55300 10 04 55450 10 04 55600 10 04 52000 10 04 56050 10 04 56100 10 04 56200 10 04 57050 10 04 57100 10 04 57200 10 04 54300 10 04 54520 10 04 54510 10 04 54100 Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWR4Q047 2 3 5 7 4 6 8 1014

1016

Special Analysis Water, Environment Samplers DispoDipper, BÜRKLE Sampling tube manufactured in a clean room specially designed for disposable use. Due to the blue colour, it is also perfect for use in the food, animal feed and pharmaceutical industries. The scaled sample container can be used for an exact measurement. After sampling, the container can be closed and is leakproof. The closed handle structure en- sures secure handling. The sample container is available with 50 ml, 100 ml or 250 ml content. Depending on the design, container openings can be sampled from a diameter of 52 mm (2 ″ barrel opening), 65 mm or 85 mm. This makes DispoDipper ideal for extracting samples from barrels, canisters and other containers. DispoDipper is completely manufactured in one piece and can be used for sampling and subsequent transport of the sample in one device. In this way, cross-contamination or sample impurities are impossible. • PP, blue transparent • Individually packaged and optionally sterilised by gamma rays • Production and packaging according to clean room class 7 • Complies with EU food requirements and FDA regulations • Scaled sampling tube volume in ml and oz. • Immersion depth 270 mm ml Volume 50 100 250 PU pc/Pack 20 20 20 sterile no Order No. 10 04 53937 10 04 57010 10 04 57020 yes Order No. 10 04 53938 10 04 57011 10 04 57021 Chemistry Scoop, BÜRKLE For aggressive liquids, with stable grab pole, made completely of polypropylene. • Three sizes • Pole length100 cm • Without metal parts The ChemoScoop made of PP can be immersed into aggressive liquids up to 100 cm. Contents ml 250 600 1000 Stem length mm 1000 1000 1000 Stem Ø mm 20 20 20 Order No. 10 04 53250 10 04 53500 10 04 51000 co d e b e w WWR4Q080 co d e b e w WWR4Q051 co d e b e w WWR4Q027 AquaSampler, BÜRKLE For collecting ground water samples from wells, pits and other sources. Designed to fit all standard well shafts down to 2″ diameter, without tilting or getting stuck. Ultra-pure material for greatest possible purity of samples. Easy to clean thanks to round- ed edges and thread. • FEP/PTFE - ultra-pure. anti-adhesive surface • transparent AquaSampler complete without rope Volume ml 350 700 1050 Accessories Overall length approx. mm 400 760 1070 Outer Ø mm 46 46 46 Article Hand rope reel, without rope 10 m lowering rope, made of V4A braid, PTFE-coated 25 m lowering rope, made of V4A braid, PTFE-coated 50 m lowering rope, made of V4A braid, PTFE-coated Order No. 39 04 53835 39 04 53870 39 04 53831 Order No. 39 04 53830 39 04 53810 39 04 53811 39 04 53812 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1015

1017

Special Analysis Water, Environment Samplers Sampler, BÜRKLE co d e b e w WWR4Q021 Dipping bottle, glass Dipping bottle with glass container for sampling in sewage treatment plants, for taking sludge and water samples. For testing substances to explosion groups IIA and IIB. Nick- el-plated brass stand, bottle made of glass. 1000 ml capacity, 148 mm dia., 330 mm high. Without lowering cable. Operation 1. Lower bottle into liquid 2. Pull cable when target depth is reached and open stopper 3. Sample flows in 4. Pull bottle back up and remove sample Article 1 Immersion bottle, glass Volume ml 1000 Order No. 39 04 73654 1 3 5 7 1016 6 Dipping bottle Ex Dipping bottle for testing mineral oil products group A, explosion groups IIA, IIB and IIC, raw oils, liquid mineral oil products, fuels, special and test gasolene, heating oils, petroli- um, and liquid lubricants. Made of non-spark-producing brass, nickel-plated. 89 mm dia., 443 mm high. Without lowering cable. Operation 1. Lower bottle into liquid 2. Pull the cable when the target sot has been reached and the stopper opens 3. Sample flows in 4. Pull up dipping bottle and remove sample Volume ml 1000 39 04 73653 Order No. 2 Immersion bottle Ex Article 2 Sampler For target spot and bottom samples of mineral oil products, insulation oils, special and test gasoline, petroleum, heating oils, etc. of explosion groups IIA, IIB and IIC The immersion cylinder is lowered in the tank using the manually operated reel. To fill the sample in the cylinder a valve is opened at the target spot using a separate traction cable. • Nickel-plate brass • Heavy, sturdy design • Without lowering cable • 75 mm dia. Article Material 3 Immersion cylinder sampler Brass, nickel-plated Volume ml 1000 Order No. 39 04 70500 Dipping vessel Dipping vessel for withdrawing liquids from tanks, tanker lorries, etc. Made of chrome-plat- ed brass or stainless steel 304. 1 l capacity, 82 mm dia., 427 mm high. Without lowering cable. Operation Lower dipping vessel into liquid. Bottom and cap valves open automatically. Liquid follows through the vessel. The valves close when the vessel is pulled back, and the desired sample can be collected. 4 Article 4 Dipping vessel Dipping vessel Material Brass, chromium-plated Stainless steel V2A Order No. 39 04 73651 39 04 73652 Accessories Article Ø mm 5 Manually-operated reel PP 6 Manually-operated reel PA electrically-conductive 7 Manually-operated reel Ex with grounding cable Stainless steel lowering cable 1.25 Stainless steel lowering cable 1.25 Stainless steel lowering cable 1.25 Lowering cable made of PP cord 2 Lowering cable made of PP cord 2 Lowering cable made of PP cord 2 Copper lowering cable EX with loops 4.5 Copper lowering cable EX with loops 4.5 Copper lowering cable EX with loops 4.5 Length m 10 25 50 10 25 50 10 25 50 Order No. 39 04 53830 39 04 53820 10 04 53840 39 04 76910 10 04 50302 10 04 50305 10 04 50201 10 04 50202 10 04 50205 10 04 50410 10 04 50425 10 04 50450

1018

Samplers Sampling Module, ORI Special Analysis Water, Environment Small, handy hose pump for taking aqueous samples (also available as a version for use in a potentially explosive environment). The module is started up either via a potential-free contact (such as a pushbutton), an RS485 interface or the multiparameter data logger Mlog which is connected to the device. When started via pushbutton, you can select either a random sample or a sample se- quence (e.g. the qualified sample). With start-up via data logger, the duration of filling is determined by the Mlog. Technical data: ATEX motor: Standards: Protection class: Electrical specification: Dimensions: Weight: II 2G Ex db [ib] IIB T4 Gb EN IEC 60079-0:2018 Overall, IP 65 Li-ions, 14.8 V DC / 3.4 Ah / 50.32 non-Ex (Ø L x H) 270 x 550 mm with 15 litres HDPE barrel 4.9 kg without battery and glass bottle 5.2 kg with Li-ion battery non-Ex 15 litres HDPE barrel, 2 litres borosilicate glass Pump runs while the Start button is pressed Sample vessels: Sampling, module “random sample” Sampling, module “qualified sampling” Sampling, module “Start via multi-parameter data logger Mlog”: Pump starts qualified sampling at the push of the button (5 random samples every 2 minutes) Pump starts up when limit value is exceeded Article Sampling module, with ATEX marking Sampling module, non ATEX Rechargeable battery Li-ion battery 14.4 V, 3400 mA in compact casing Battery charger for Li-ion battery 14.4 V – 14.8 V Order No. 10 22 52365 10 22 59365 10 22 57354 10 22 53541 Each sampling module comes with 6 m suction hose incl. V2A weight element and 15 litre collecting barrel. Please order battery and charger separately! co d e b e w WWBPE015 co d e b e w WWBPE014 Stationary Sampling Device, ORI Time-proven automatic sampling device with cooling and heating function. Provides time, volume, flow and event proportional sampling of individual and pooled samples of waste water and water-based media. A special ventilation system provides for uniform cooling to 4°C. By default, sampling is done using a pressure/vacuum pump (optionally with hose pump dosing slider or water scoop). The sampling device is equipped with a direct distribution system with clogging protection. On request, explosion-protected devices for Ex zone 1 and Ex zone 2 are available. Article BASIC V solid, stationary sampling device (vacuum pump) with direct distribution system BASIC V solid, stationary sampling device (peristaltic pump) with direct distribution system Stainless steel insert and transport basket for 12 × 1.8 l PE bottles Stainless steel insert and transport basket for 12 × 2.5 l PE bottles Stainless steel insert and transport basket for 12 × 1.0 l glass bottles Sample bottles 12 × 1.8 l, PE Sample bottles 12 × 2.5 l, PE Sample bottles 12 × 1.0 l, glass Water identification for BASIC solid Stainless steel extraction for bottle insert Order No. 10 22 58221 10 22 58222 10 22 58225 10 22 58226 10 22 58227 10 22 58231 10 22 58232 10 22 58233 10 22 58235 10 22 58236 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1017

1019

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWXKS037 co d e b e w WW5PT004 Samplers Flow-Through Units, AQUABOX, Behr The flow-through AQUABOX enables the determination of on-site parameters (temp., pH, conductivity, O2) under conditions of homogeneous representative sampling of ground- water and waster water. The unit permits the simultaneous determination of electrical, chemical and physical parameters under optimal and reproducible flow conditions. The AQUABOX is constructed of transparent shock-resistant PETG, a thermoplastic co- polyester. Transparency enables visual identification of problems at all times during oper- ation (e.g. sand or sediment contamination). All components which come in contact with water are constructed either of PETG (lid and flow chamber) or PP (in-flow and out-flow pipes), without use of adhesives. Therefore the water being sampled is not affected by any release of contaminants from the materials constituting the AQUABOX. The lid of the AQUABOX shields against spray/splashes and is easily opened and closed by means of quick-release fasteners. The lid has six variable-diameter splash-resistant ports for insert- ing sensors/electrodes of up to 25 mm diameter. Ports of larger diameter are available on special order. • Inside the inner container, the water spirals upward around the circularly positioned measurement sensors and exits via a splash-protective outer annular housing. • The water flow rate can be controlled by a valve. • Withdrawal of water for sample collection is performed by opening a bypass valve in- stalled in the water inflow line. • Dismantling for cleaning is performed easily and quickly by hand with the central thread- ed fastener. Advantages: • For laboratory and on-site use • For permanent installation or transportable use Article Flow-through unit AQUABOX WinLab® Testing System, WINLAB® Order No. 80 48 65056 Easy-to-handle sample taking system for manual sample taking. General purpose thanks to • easy exchange of the sample taking equipment – simple spring mechanism • four different fibre glass telescopic poles of up to 6.00 m in length • extremely strong fibre glass telescopic poles, corrosion-free • for up to 20 different sample taking devices The basic version is comprised of a telescopic pole and a sample taker. 1 Telescopic rods INGENIOUS made of fiber glass, for heavy-duty application, corrosion-free, agreeable to the touch also at lower temperatures, simple to extend and to ajust. With easy to operate spring mechanism for fast and simple replacement of sample takers. Article Length adjustable from 1.50 to 2.80 m, adjustable by quarter-ro- INGENIOUS, type standard tation with Quick Lock function INGENIOUS, type XL Length adjustable from 1.50 to 3.85 m, adjustable by folding me- chanism INGENIOUS, type XXL Length adjustable from 1.60 to 5.00 m, adjustable by folding me- chanism INGENIOUS, type super long Length adjustable from 1.70 to 6.00 m, adjustable by folding me- chanism Order No. 39 43 02005 39 43 02055 10 03 02015 10 03 02025 3 5 8 2 4 6 1018 Sampler for use with telescopic rods INGENIOUS Article 2 Sample scoop For taking scoop samples from the water surface. Graduated PE Order No. 39 43 02027 cup with spout holds 1000 ml (cup is exchangeable). The cup holder (stainless steel spring strip) is designed to let you twist the cup in order adjust the pouring direction and fix the scoop angle from 0 to 180°. 3 Sample scoop made of stainless steel Specially designed for taking mud samples. Stainless steel sampling vessel shaped like a cup with flanged edge. With lo- cking mechanism for setting the cup angle from 0 to 180°. Di- mensions of the stainless steel cup: 100 mm Ø, 130 mm height, approx. 1000 ml capacity. 39 43 02004 Continued on next page

1020

Samplers Article 4 Universal clamp made of stainless steel Accepts all sample bottles with neck sizes from 10 to 80 mm. Also gives you great flexibility when you want to use bottles of different sizes up to 1000 ml. With locking mechanism for set- ting your sampling vessel to different immersion angles from 0 to 180°. New-type stainless steel clamp. 5 Swiveling cup Swiveling cup with very robust, stainless steel clip holder for 1000 ml polypropylene cups. Specially for taking samples from canals (rain water canals) in horizontal direction with the current. Practical for taking samples in rain water canals and narrow shafts. 6 Swiveling cup with beaker made of stainless steel Extremely sturdy design, like 3943 02029, cup made of thick- walled stainless steel, capacity 1000 ml, Ø 100 ml, height 130 mm 7 WinLab®- Gripper for sediments Use it in combination with the very practical WinLab telescopic rod to take sediment samples. It is extremely user-friendly. Open the gripper and move it to the position where you wish to take the sample. To take the sample, bring the gripper down on- to the soil; the sediment sample is caught in the two half-shells. Ideal for sampling sediments: Used together with the long tele- scopic rod, you can also take samples from a greater depth. The sediment gripper is made of stainless steel. Volume of the sample shells: approx. 260 ml. Order No. 39 43 02028 39 43 02029 10 03 02030 10 03 02066 Sampler for taking biological samples - for telescopic rods INGENIOUS Order No. 39 43 02002 Article 8 Water insect net Robust non-rotting nylon net, 0.8 mm mesh width. Ideal for cat- ching flies, bugs, wazer insects and floating particles. Strong gal- vanized ring with Ø 200 mm. Double sewn seam. 9 Wire mesh net Extremely robust, practical design with additional metal ring for greater reinforcement around the rim. This even lets you „trawl“ the river or stream bed. Small organisms are better collected di- rectly from the river bed and river bank. Ø 200 mm, mesh width 1.5 mm. AT Rectangle net For sampling and collection of solid matter and organism from water bodies. Net depth 250 mm, size of net opening W 400 mm × L 200 mm, mesh width approx. 3 mm AK Surface net For sampling and collection of solid matter and organism from water bodies. Net convex when tightened. Size of net opening 320 mm × 200 mm, mesh width approx. 3 mm AL Post scraper Sturdy, sharpened edge of stainless steel for scraping and coll- ecting small organisms and vegetation underwater from posts, jetties, boat hulls etc. The collection net has a mesh width of 0.8 mm and is made of non-rotting nylon. Width of scraping edge 140 mm, length 150 mm, height of net approx. 250 mm. 10 03 02013 10 03 02023 10 03 02022 39 43 02010 AM Plankton nets for telescopic rods INGENIOUS Rugged version with strong galvanised ring with a diameter of 200 mm. The ring is covered with green linen fabric with a double seam to protect the silk gauze, the fine plankton net material, from ripping. Supplied with a 100 ml PE sampling flask (100 ml Kautex flask). Article Plankton net with mesh width 65 µm Plankton net with mesh width 105 µm Order No. 39 43 02006 39 43 02007 AN Plankton casting net in professional design AK For professional applications. Rugged version. In this model, for example, the silk gauze is covered by a linen cover to protect it from damage. The top ring comes with an ex- tra-strong aluminium part. This version is used mainly as a casting or drag net and there- fore comes with a tear-proof 10 m corded nylon line and a spring hook. Diameter of the top ring: 250 mm. Height of the plankton net: Approx. 480 mm. Article Plankton net with 25 µm gauze Plankton net with 65 µm gauze Order No. 39 43 28019 39 43 28020 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Special Analysis Water, Environment 1 7 7 9 AT AL AM AN 1019

1021

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WW5PT005 co d e b e w WW5PT006 1 2 Samplers Water Sampler, WINLAB® Professional model for taking exact water samples from a desired depth. Functional principle: Lower the specimen sampler to the desired depth. Water flows through both spherical valves. When the correct depth is reached, jerk he sampler upwards two or three times to let in the water you want and then pull the sampler up. Spherical valve technology ensures that no foreign water can enter the sampler. To fill Winkler oxygen bottles, a ball value is mounted on the unit which enables you to fill the water into the bottles using he tube (included) without intrusion of foreign oxygen. Outer dimensions (Ø × H): Sample quantity: Length of lowering line: 115 × 370 mm approx. 1200 ml 20 m Article Water sampler Order No. 39 43 28022 Water Samplers, Ruttner Type, WINLAB® For taking water samples at the desired depth With precision sealing technology. Operation as follows: lower the open sampler to the desired depth (fig.1). Use the rope to lower the weight (fig.3). When the weight contacts the sprint-loaded part, the locking mechanism is activated and the container is sealed (fig.2).This allows you to take an accurate sample at the depth you want. Very sturdy, long service life, three models. Article 1000 ml water sampler (not illustrated) With acrylic glass sampling tube, outer Ø 85 mm, height 260 mm, height of total samp- Order No. 10 03 28080 ler 560 mm, thermometer 0 to +50°C, deadweight 1.35 kg, weight of the weight ele- ment (for triggering the locking mechanism) 200 g. Article 1.7 l water sampler Very sturdy design with stainless steel rod and metal/plastic cap. Acrylic glass tube ou- Order No. 39 43 28100 ter Ø 135 mm and height 150 mm. Height of the total sampler 630 mm. Thermometer -10 to +60°C. Deadweight 5 kg. Article 3 l water sampler Very sturdy design same as the 1.7 l water sampler. Acrylic glass tube outer Ø 135 mm Order No. 39 43 28135 3 4 6 co d e b e w WW5PT044 5 1020 and height 250 mm. Height of the total sampler 720 mm. Thermometer -10 to +60°C. Deadweight 6 kg. Accessories Article Small lowering line On cable reel for 1000 ml water sampler, 20 m long, 2 mm Ø, with metric scale. Order No. 39 43 28150 Article Large lowering line On winch 25 m long, with meter markings, polyester rope of 5 mm Ø for EKMAN and van Order No. 39 43 28160 VEEN sampler. Secchi Disk, WINLAB® For determining the depth of visibility and light permeability of water. This new sturdy design is made of strong, hard-wearing plastic and has a lead weight for better low- ering. The approx. 15 cm high rod is fitted with an eyelet for fastening the lowering engine. The lowering line is marked at intervals of 50 cm for better reading of the depth of visibil- ity while the disk is being lowered. Article 4 Secchi disk With eyelet, without towing line. 250 mm Ø. 5 Secchi disk, divided Secchi disk, divided in four segments, two of those black, diam. 250 mm 6 Lowering line made of nylon 10 m long with markings in intervals of 50 cm, full meters marked with Order No. 39 43 28009 10 03 28010 39 43 28001 numbers.

1022

Special Analysis Water, Environment Indicator Cards, Test Kits Universal Indicator Paper, IDL Universal indicator paper with color scale and rotating plastic box. Length 5 m, width 10 mm. Article Universal indicator paper, pH 1 – 11 Refill pack of universal indicator paper with 3 rolls of 5 m Order No. 24 00 40010 24 00 40011 co d e b e w WW7R3310 pH Indicator Strips Universal pH 0 to pH 14, WINLAB® Non-bleeding indicator strips for reliable determination of pH value in the range of pH 0 to 14. Ideal for aqueous solutions. No pollution of the sample by the indicator sub- stance. Size of pH strip 85 × 6 mm, with comparison scale printed on both sides of the plastic box for reliable pH determination. co d e b e w WW5PT071 Article pH indicator strips universal Order No. 10 03 21101 PU pc/Pack 100 pH Indicator Cards, Sticks and Solutions, MACHEREY-NAGEL 1 Universal and special indicator papers with color scale Article Universal pH 1 – 11 Universal pH 1 – 11 Universal pH 1 – 14 Special pH 0.5 – 5.5 Special pH 3.8 – 5.8 Special pH 4.0 – 7.0 Special pH 5.4 – 7.0 Special pH 5.5 – 9.0 Special pH 6.4 – 8.0 Special pH 7.2 – 9.7 Special pH 8.0 – 10.0 Special pH 9.0 – 13.0 Special pH 12.0 – 14.0 PU Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Pad of 100 strips 10 × 70 mm Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 7 mm wide 2 DUOTEST indicator papers Article pH 1 – 12 pH 1.0 – 4.3 pH 3.5 – 6.8 pH 5.0 – 8.0 pH 7.0 – 10.0 pH 9.5 – 14.0 PU Reel 5 m long and 10 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 10 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 10 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 10 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 10 mm wide Reel 5 m long and 10 mm wide 3 TRITEST® indicator papers Article PU pH 1 – 11 Reel 5 m long and 10 mm wide TRITEST pH 1 – 11 with Reel 6 m long and 14 mm wide 2 hydrophobic zones Order No. 24 46 90201 24 46 90203 24 46 90204 24 46 90205 24 46 90206 24 46 90207 24 46 90208 24 46 90209 24 46 90210 24 46 90211 24 46 90212 24 46 90213 24 46 90214 Order No. 24 46 90301 24 46 90302 24 46 90303 24 46 90304 24 46 90305 24 46 90306 Order No. 24 46 90501 24 46 90510 1 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Continued on next page 3 1021

1023

Special Analysis Water, Environment 1 2 3 4 1022 Indicator Cards, Test Kits PEHANON® zones indicator papers 1 Article pH 1 – 12 pH 0 – 1.8 pH 1.0 – 2.8 pH 1.8 – 3.8 pH 2.8 – 4.6 pH 3.8 – 5.5 pH 4.0 – 9.0 pH 5.2 – 6.8 pH 6.0 – 8.1 pH 7.2 – 8.8 pH 8.0 – 9.7 pH 9.5 – 12.0 pH 10.5 – 13.0 pH 12.0 – 14.0 PU Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Bpx of 200 strips 11 × 100 Order No. 24 46 90401 24 46 90411 24 46 90412 24 46 90413 24 46 90414 24 46 90415 24 46 90424 24 46 90416 24 46 90417 24 46 90419 24 46 90420 24 46 90421 24 46 90422 24 46 90423 Minimum order quantity 2 boxes! UNISOL indicator solutions 2 Article pH 4 – 10 pH 1 – 13 Plastic cuvettes MN 13/72 Pack of 5 rectangular cuvettes PU 1 bottle of 100 ml, color scale + cuvette 24 46 91002 1 bottle of 100 ml, color scale + cuvette 24 46 91031 24 46 91039 Order No. pH-Fix indicator sticks, non-bleeding 3 Article pH 0 – 14 pH 0.0 – 6.0 pH 2.0 – 9.0 CE pH 4.0 – 7.0 pH 4.5 – 10.0 CE pH 6.0 – 10.0 pH 7.0 – 14.0 pH 0.3 – 2.3 pH 1.7 – 3.8 pH 3.1 – 8.3 CE pH 3.6 – 6.1 CE pH 5.1 – 7.2 pH 6.0 – 7.7 pH 7.5 – 9.5 pH 7.9 – 9.8 PU Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Pack of 100 sticks 6 × 85 mm Order No. 24 46 92110 24 46 92115 24 46 92118 10 46 92137 24 46 92120 24 46 92122 24 46 92125 24 46 92180 24 46 92190 10 46 92135 24 46 92130 24 46 92140 24 46 92150 24 46 92160 24 46 92170 Qualitative and Semi-quantitative Testing Cards/Sticks, MACHEREY-NAGEL 4 QUANTOFIX® testing sticks for semi-quantitative determinations Form of delivery: tube of 100 testing sticks 6 × 95 mm. Article Determination of Active oxygen1) Aluminium1) Ammonium1) Arsenic 101) Arsenic 501) Arsenic Sensitive1) KMPS AI3+ NH4+ As3+/5+ As3+/5+ As3+/5+ Ascorbic acid Vitamin C Calcium1)2) Ca2+ Carbonate hardness HCO3-, CO32- Chlorine1) Cl2 Chlorine Sensitive CE Cl2 Chloride Cl- Chromate1) CrO42- Cyanide1) CN- EDTA EDTA Formaldehyde1) HCHO Total iron 1000 Fe2+/Fe3+ Total iron 100 Fe2+/Fe3+ citric acid fructose/glucose Glucose Glucose total acid total sugar Scale graduation mg/l 0– 4– 8– 15– 25 0– 5– 20– 50– 200– 500 0– 10– 25– 50– 100– 200– 400 0– 0.01– 0.025– 0.05– 0.1– 0.5 0– 0.05– 0.1– 0.5– 1.0– 1.7– 3.0 0- 0.005- 0.01- 0.025- 0.05- 0.1- 0.25- 0.5 0– 50– 100– 200– 300– 500– 1000– 2000 0– 10– 25– 50– 100 0– 3– 6– 10– 15– 20 °d 0– 1– 3– 10– 30– 100 0– 0.1– 0.5– 1– 3– 10 0– 500– 1000– 1500– 2000– p3000 0– 3– 10– 30– 100 0– 1– 3– 10– 30 0– 100– 200– 300– 400 0– 10– 20– 40– 60– 100– 200 0– 5– 20– 50– 100– 250– 500– 1000 0– 2– 5– 10– 25– 50– 100 0– 2– 2.5– 3.0– 4.0– 5.0 g/l 0– 55– 100– 250– 400– 600– 800 0- 50- 100- 250- 500- 1000- 2000 Order No. 10 46 91349 24 46 91307 24 46 91315 24 46 91334 10 46 91332 10 46 91345 24 46 91314 24 46 91324 24 46 91323 24 46 91317 10 46 91339 24 46 91321 24 46 91301 24 46 91318 24 46 91335 24 46 91328 10 46 91330 10 46 91344 10 46 91353 10 46 91352 10 46 91348 Continued on next page

1024

Indicator Cards, Test Kits Special Analysis Water, Environment Article Determination of % Glutaraldehyde 0– 0.5– 1– 1.5– 2– 2.5 K+ Co2+ Cu+, Cu2+ KOH Mo6+ Ni2+ NO3-/ NO2- Glutaraldehyde Potassium1) Cobalt Copper LubriCheck Molybdenum1) Nickel nitrate 100 5 Nitrate/Nitrite Nitrite Nitrite 3000 Nitrite / pH NO3- NO2- NO2- NO2- NO2- Peracetic acid 50 CE Peracetic acid 500 CE Peracetic acid 2000 CE Peroxide 1000 Peroxide 100 CE Peroxide 25 Phosphate1) Sulfate Sulfite Zinc1) Tin QUAT silver H2O2 H2O2 H2O2 PO43- Ag+ SO42- SO32- Zn2+ Sn2+ mg/l Benzalkoni- um chloride Scale graduation mg/l Order No. 24 46 91313 10 46 91343 24 46 91316 0– 200– 400– 700– 1000– 1500 0– 10– 25– 50– 100– 250– 500– 1000 24 46 91303 24 46 91304 0– 10– 30– 100– 300 10 46 91336 0– 15– 50– 75– 130– 200 24 46 91325 0– 5– 20– 50– 100– 250 0– 10– 25– 50– 100– 250– 500– 1000 24 46 91305 10 46 91351 Nitrat: 0– 5– 10– 25– 50– 75– 100 Nitrit: 0– 0.5– 2– 5– 10– 25– 50 0– 10– 25– 50– 100– 250– 500 0– 1– 5– 10– 20– 40– 80 0– 1– 5– 10– 20– 40– 80 0– 0.1– 0.3– 0.6– 1– 2– 3 g/l Nitrite: 0– 1– 5– 10– 20– 40– 80 pH: 6.0– 6.4– 6.7– 7.0– 7.3– 7.6– 7.9– 8.2– 8.4– 8.6– 8.8– 9.0– 9.3– 9.5 10 46 91340 0– 5– 10– 20– 30– 50 10 46 91341 0– 50– 100– 200– 300– 400– 500 10 46 91342 0– 500– 1000– 1500– 2000 24 46 91333 0– 50– 150– 300– 500– 800– 1000 24 46 91312 0– 1– 3– 10– 30– 100 24 46 91319 0– 0,5– 2– 5– 10– 25 24 46 91320 0– 3– 10– 25– 50– 100 10 46 91350 0– 1– 2– 3– 5– 7– 10 <200–>400–>800–>800–>1200–>1600 24 46 91329 0– 10– 25– 50– 100– 250– 500– 1000 24 46 91306 24 46 91310 0– 2– 5– 10– 25– 50– 100 24 46 91309 0– 10– 25– 50– 100– 250– 500 0– 10– 25– 50– 100– 250– 500– 1000 10 46 91337 24 46 91311 24 46 91322 10 46 91338 1) These tests are supplied complete with all the reagents needed for the determination. 2) Form of delivery: tube of 60 testing sticks and reagents AQUADUR® testing sticks for determination of water hardness 6 Graduation °dH PU <3>4>8.4>14 Box of 100 testing sticks 6 × 95 mm <3>5>10>15>20>25 Box of 100 testing sticks 6 × 95 mm <3>4>7>14>21 Box of 100 testing sticks 6 × 95 mm <3>5>10>15>20>25 Pack of 5000 testing sticks <3>4>7>14>21 Pack of 5000 testing sticks <3>5>10>15>20>25 1000 testng sticks, individually sealed <3>4>7>14>21 1000 testng sticks, individually sealed <3>5>10>15>20>25 Envelope of 3 individually sealed AQUADUR® testing sticks, pack of 50 envelopes Order No. 10 46 91239 24 46 91201 24 46 91220 24 46 91221 24 46 91222 24 46 91223 24 46 91224 24 46 91290 5 6 Test Kits, MACHEREY-NAGEL VISOCOLOR® test kits quick analytical testing. Enables the non-specialist to conduct fast, uncomplicated, reliable water analysis. Each VISOCOLOR® test kit is a handy mini-labo- ratory in a sturdy plastic box, which contains all the items (reagents and equipment) re- quired to conduct analyses. No additional lab equipment and no connections are required. VISOCOLOR®HE, high-sensitivity test kits Iron 7 Test Ammonium Chlorine, free and total Cyanid Copper Manganese Nitrite pH 4.0 – 10.0 Phosphate (DEV) Phosphate Silica co d e b e w 7 Measuring range 0.02 – 0,50 mg/l NH4+ 0.02 – 0.60 mg/l Cl2 0.002 – 0,040 mg/l CN- 0.01 – 0.20 mg/l Fe 0.04 – 0.50 mg/l Cu 0.03 – 0.50 mg/l Mn 0.005 – 0.10 mg/l NO2- pH 4.0 – 10.0 0.01 – 0.25 mg/l P 0.05 – 1.0 mg/l P 0.01 – 0.30 mg/l Si Order No. 80 46 20006 80 46 20015 80 46 20028 80 46 20040 80 46 20050 80 46 20055 80 46 20063 80 46 20074 80 46 20080 80 46 20082 80 46 20087 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1023

1025

Special Analysis Water, Environment 1 2 3 1024 Indicator Cards, Test Kits VISOCOLOR® alpha test kits Very easy to use, no hazardous materials 1 Test Ammonium Carbonate hardness Chlorine free Total hardness Nitrate Nitrite pH 5 – 9 Phosphate Residual hardness Kits qty 50 100 150 100 100 200 200 70 200 Measuring range 0.2 – 3 mg/l NH4+ 1 drop W 1°d 0.25 – 2.0 mg/l Cl2 1 drop W 1°d 2 – 50 mg/l NO3- 0.05 – 1.0 mg/l NO2- pH 5.0 – 9.0 2 – 20 mg/l PO443- 0.04 – 0.30 °d Order No. 80 46 35012 80 46 35016 80 46 35019 80 46 35042 80 46 35065 80 46 35066 80 46 35075 80 46 35079 80 46 35080 2 VISOCOLOR®ECO test kits High-performance test kits, easy to use, with exact measurement levels Iron Test Kits qty Alkalinity TA2) 100 Aluminium 50 Ammonium 3 50 Ammonium 15 50 Calcium 100 Carbonate hardness 100 Chlorine 1, free and total 150 Chlorine 2 free and total1) 150 Free chlorine 2 150 Chloride 90 Chrome (VI) 140 Cyanid 100 Cyanuric acid 100 DEHA 125 100 Fluoride 150 Total hardness 110 Potassium 60 Silicic acid 80 Silica HR 2003) 100 Copper 100 Manganese 70 Nickel 150 Nitrate 110 Nitrite 120 pH 4.0 – 9.0 450 Phosphate 80 Oxygen 50 swimming-pool 150 150 100 90 60 120 Sulfate Sulfide Sulfite Zinc Measuring range 5 – 250 mg/l CaCO3 0,10 – 0,50 mg/l Al3+ 0.2 – 3 mg/l NH4+ 0.5 – 15 mg/l NH4+ 1 drop W 5 mg/l Ca2+ 1 drop W 1°d 0.1 – 2.0 mg/l Cl2 0.1 – 2.0 mg/l Cl2 0.1 – 2.0 mg/l Cl2 1 – 60 mg/l Cl- 0.02 – 0.50 mg/l Cr(VI) 0.01 – 0.20 mg/l CN- 10 – 100 mg/l Cya 0.01 – 0.30 mg/l DEHA 0.04 – 1.0 mg/l Fe 0.1 – 2.0 mg/l F- 1 drop W 1°d 2 – 15 mg/l K+ 0.2 – 3.0 mg/l SiO2 10 – 200 mg/l SiO2 0.1 – 1.5 mg/l Cu2+ 0.1 – 1.5 mg/l Mn 0.1 – 1.5 mg/l Ni2+ 1 – 120 mg/l NO3- 0.02 – 0.5 mg/l NO2- pH 4.0 – 9.0 0.2 – 5 mg/l PO4-P 1 – 10 mg/l O2 0.1 – 2.0 mg/l Cl2 pH 6.9 – 8.2 25 – 200 mg/l SO42- 0.1 – 0.8 mg/l S2- 1 drop W 1 mg/l SO32- 0.5 – 3 mg/l Zn2+ Order No. 10 46 91204 10 46 91006 80 46 31008 80 46 31010 80 46 31012 80 46 31014 10 46 91035 10 46 91015 10 46 91016 80 46 31018 80 46 31020 80 46 31022 80 46 31023 80 46 31024 80 46 31026 80 46 31227 80 46 31029 80 46 31032 80 46 31033 10 46 91234 80 46 31037 80 46 31038 80 46 31040 80 46 31041 80 46 31044 80 46 31066 80 46 31084 80 46 31088 80 46 31090 10 46 94235 80 46 31094 80 46 31095 10 46 91098 1) Chlorine + pH quod vide swimming-pool 2) Photometric evaluation only 3) Photometric evaluation only. A special filter (450 nm) is required for evaluation on the PF-12Plus Test Kits, MACHEREY-NAGEL Photometric test tools that combine extra-easy reagent dosing with photometric preci- sion. Test Measuring range Order No. Free Chlorine Free Chlorine Total Chlorine Total Chlorine Silica LR1) Silica HR1) 3 Nitrate1) pH Sulphate1) 10 46 96220 10 46 96230 10 46 96221 10 46 96231 10 46 96224 10 46 96225 10 46 96226 10 46 96222 10 46 96223 1) Photometric evaluation possible only with the PF-12Plus and PF-3. 0.03 – 6.00 mg/l Cl2 0.03 – 6.00 mg/l Cl2 0.03 – 6.00 mg/l Cl2 0.03 – 6.00 mg/l Cl2 0.02 – 2.10 mg/l SiO2 2 – 210 mg/l SiO2 1.0 – 50.0 mg/l NO₃-N 6.2 – 8.2 15 – 200 mg/l SO42– PU pc/Pack 100 1000 100 1000 100 100 100 100 100

1026

Special Analysis Water, Environment Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations UV-VIS and VIS Spectral Photometer, Lovibond® UV-VIS spectral photometer XD 7500 and VIS spectral photometer XD 7000 • Premium optical system with reference beam • Automatic test recognition with internal barcode reader • Automatic cuvette type detection • Support of analytical quality assurance • More than 140 analytical methods implemented • Additional multi step and single or multi wavelength measuring procedures programma- ble co d e b e w WWSE2009 • Spectra and kinetic measurements possible - brilliant colour display • Ethernet, USB A und USB B Port Technical data: Wavelength range: Light source: 320 – 1100 nm (scan range) Tungsten-halogen-lamp XD 7000 XD 7500 190 – 1100 nm (scan range) Xenon flash lamp Optical system: Measurement: Supported cuvette types: Automatic cuvette recog- nition: Test recognition: Dimensions (W × H × D): Weight: Power supply: Display: Protection class: Keyboard: Interfaces: Spectral bandwidth: Wavelength accuracy: Wavelength reproduca- bility: Photometrical range: Photometrical resolution: Photometrical accuracy: Photometrical reproduca- bility: Photometrical linearity: Drift: Subject to change (500 millionen flashes possible) Grid monochromator with reference beam and beam splitter after exit slit Concentration, single and multi-wavelength measurement of absorbance and % transmission, kinetics, spectra Round: 13, 16 und 24 mm Rectangular: 10, 20 und 50 mm Round cuvettes, 10, 20, 50 mm rectangular cuvettes are de- tected via internal barcode reader 422 × 195 × 323 mm 4.5 kg 100 – 240V, 50/60 Hz 7 ″ high contrast colour graphic-dislay IP30 Membrane keyboard Ethernet, USB B, USB A for external memory, keyboard, mouse, barcode-scanner and PCL compatible printer 4 nm ±1 nm on all Holmium peaks better than 0.5 nm -3.3 to +3.3 Abs Absorption: 0.001 Transmission: 0.1% 0.003 Abs below 0.6 Abs 0.5% from 0.6 to 2.0 Abs 0.003 Abs below 0.6 Abs 0.5% from 0.6 to 2.0 Abs <1% up to 2.0 Abs between 340 to 900 nm <0.005 Abs per hour after 15 minutes heat up time Article VIS spectral photometer XD 7000 UV-VIS spectral photometer XD 7500 Order No. 10 77 17000 10 77 17500 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1025

1027

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWSE2010 Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations Photometers MD 600 and MD 610, Lovibond® Photometers MD 600 and MD 610 The MD 600 and MD 610 give you mobile devices in a modern design with the analytical features of laboratory photometers. All important water analysis parameters from A(luminium) to Z(inc) are covered by these two devices. Reagent tablets, powder reagents, liquid reagents, or cuvette tests (16 mm/13 mm) are used depending on the method. The AquaLX® app, available free of charge, offers the possibility of transferring measure- ments to smart phones or tablets via Bluetooth® (MD 610). The proven MD 600 photom- eter uses the classic infrared interface with which data can be transferred by means of the IRiM module to the PC or laptop. • Highest reproducible precision with interference filter • Display with background lighting • More than 120 pre-programmed methods • Automatic selection of wavelength • User guidance in German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese (BR), Polish, and Indonesian • Buffer for 1000 (MD 600) or 500 data records (MD 610) • More than 35 user-specific methods possible • Bluetooth® interface for connection to smart phones and tablets (only with MD 610) • iOS® and AndroidTM app for data management and email delivery (only with MD 610) • Infrared interface (only with MD 600) • Waterproof housing (as defined in IP 68, 1 hour at 0.1 meter) • Handheld format, portable Delivery Content: The instrument is supplied complete and ready-to-use incl. 4 batteries, 3 vials Ø 24 mm, 3 vials Ø 16 mm, 1 adapter each for 16 mm and 13 mm vials, stirring rod 13 cm, brush 11 cm, screw driver, guarantee sheet, certificate of compliance, instruction manual, carrying case with water resistance foam, but without reagents. Technical data: Display: Interfaces: Optics: Graphic-display Infrared1) (MD 600), Bluetooth® 4.0 (MD 610) RJ45 socket for Internet updates2) LEDs, interference filters (IF) and photo sensor in transparent sample chamber Wavelength range: 1 = 530 nm IF D l = 5 nm 2 = 560 nm IF D l = 5 nm 3 = 610 nm IF D l = 6 nm 4 = 430 nm IF D l = 5 nm 5 = 580 nm IF D l = 5 nm 6 = 660 nm IF D l = 5 nm IF = interference filter ± 1 nm 2% FS (T = 20°C – 25°C) tested with standard solutions Acid and solvent resistant, touch-sensitive keypad with audi- ble feedback via integrated beeper 4 batteries (Mignon AA/LR6); Operation time approx. 26 h con- tinuous operation or 3500 tests approx. 20 minutes after last keypress with audible signal approx. 210 × 95 × 45 mm (unit) approx. 395 × 295 × 106 mm (case) approx. 450 g 5 to 40°C at max. 30 to 90% rel. humidity (non condensing) German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Pol- ish,Indonesian; additional languages via Internet update approx. 1000 data sets (MD 600) / 500 data sets (MD 610) CE Wavelength accuracy: Photometric accuracy: Photometric resolution: 0.005 A Operation: Power supply: Auto-Off: Dimensions: Weight (unit): Ambient conditions: Language selection: Memory capacity: Approval: 1) optional available: IRiM (Infrarot Interface Modul) 2) optional available: connection cable with integrated electronics (RS 232/RJ-45-socket) Article Photometer MD 600 Photometer MD 610 Accessories Order No. 10 77 10600 10 77 10610 Article Set of 12 round vials with lid, Height 48 mm, Ø 24 mm Set of 10 round vials with lid, Height 90 mm, Ø 16 mm Verification Standard Kit Cable for update for connection to a PC Manufacturer certificate 11 Order No. 10 77 17620 10 77 17665 10 77 15640 10 77 14030 10 77 19770 1026

1028

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWSE2012 Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations Spectrophotometric Colorimeters PFXi Series, Lovibond® The PFXi series of spectrophotometric colorimeters features the unique RCMSi technol- ogy (Remote Calibration & Maintenance Service via Internet). The user benefits from re- mote calibration and remote maintenance via Internet, which keeps the time and costs for maintenance and for ensuring compliance with the standards to a minimum. The portfolio of the PFXi series comprises a wide range of colour scales for specific markets, e.g. for mineral oil, food oils, pharmaceutical products, brewery products, and honey. The units can be equipped with additional scales at any time via remote service. Each PFXi comes with a colour control software for data analysis (incl. LAN and USB cable), cuvettes made of optical glass, a certified glass calibration filter, a spare lamp, and an operating manual. Note: When handling materials such as greases and waxes whose temperatures must be kept constantly at +10°C above the turbidity point, series PFXi-880, -950 and -995 are particularly advisable. For these, an integrated heating is available as an option. For compliance testing, glass reference standards and liquid reference standards are available for the major colour scales. Technical data: Measuring principle: Spectral response: Bandwidth: Repeatability: Chromaticity: ∆E: Measurement time: Light source: Illuminants: Observer: Path length: Interfaces: Data storage: Input voltage: Compliance: Languages: Heating: PFXi 195 PFXi 880/950/995 9 interference filters 16 interference filters 420 to 710 nm 10 nm on measurements of de-ionised water ±0.0004 ±0.0002 0.04 0.02 less than 20 seconds 5 Volt, 10 Watt Tungsten Halogen CIE Illuminant, A, B, C, D65 2°, 10° 0.1 to 50 mm 0.1 to 153 mm (.004 ″ to 6 ″) USB, LAN, RS232 100,000+ measurements Universal (90 – 240 Vac), via external power supply CE, RoHs, WEEE en, fr, de, it, pt, ru, es, ja, zh — optionally, environment up to 95°C Type PFXi-195/1 PFXi-195/2 PFXi-195/3 PFXi-195/4 Application Liquid chemicals and industrial oils Petroleum oils and fuels Dark oils and fats Beers, malts and caramels PFXi-195/5 Pharmaceutical solutions PFXi-195/6 Industrial oils and surfactants PFXi-195/7 Sugar solutions, syrups and honey PFXi-195/8 Water and waste waters PFXi-195/9 Transparent samples PFXi-880/L Oils, fats, waxes a. transparent liquids PFXi-880/AT Oils, fats, waxes a. transparent liquids PFXi-880/IP17 Petroleum oils and fuels PFXi-880/P Mineral oils, waxes and petrochemicals PFXi-880/S PFXi-880/CIE Transparent samples (basic unit) PFXi-950 Oils, chemicals and derivatives Sugar solutions, syrups and honey PFXi-950/P Mineral oils, waxes and petrochemicals PFXi-995 Oils, chemicals and derivatives PFXi-995/P Mineral oils, waxes and petrochemicals Order No. Standard Colour Scales 10 77 11951 Pt-Co/Hazen/APHA; Gardner; Iod; CIE values; Spectral data Saybolt; ASTM color; Pt-Co/Hazen/APHA; CIE values; Spectral data 10 77 11952 10 77 11953 FAC; Gardner; CIE values; Spectral data 10 77 11954 EBC (CIE and 430 nm); ASBC (CIE and 430 nm); Series 52 (Brown); CIE values; Spectral data European/US-Pharmacopoeia; Pt-Co/Hazen/ APHA; CIE values; Spectral data Klett Colour (blue filter KS-42); Pt-Co/Hazen/APHA; Hess-Ives-Colour units; CIE values, Spectral data ICUMSA Colour (420, 560, 710 nm); Honey Colour (Pfund Equiva- lents); Series 52 (Brown); CIE values; Spectral data ADMI (Spectral & Tristimulus filter methods); Pt-Co/Hazen/APHA; CIE values; Spectral data CIE values (Standard); L*C*h Colour Space; Hunter Lab Colour Space; Spectral data Lovibond®RYBN; CIE values; Spectral data AOCS-Tintometer®; CIE values; Spectral data IP units; Lovibond®RYBN; CIE values; Spectral data Saybolt; ASTM color; CIE values; Spectral data ICUMSA Colour Index; Lovibond®RYBN; CIE values; Spectral data Acid Wash Test; CIE values; Spectral data AOCS-Tintometer®; Gardner; Lovibond®RYBN; CIE values, Spectral data Saybolt; ASTM Color; Pt-Co/Hazen/APHA; CIE values; Spectral data 10 77 19502 AOCS-Tintometer®; Gardner; Kreis; Hunter Lab; Iodine Colour; 10 77 19951 Pt-Co/Hazen/APHA; Lovibond®RYBN; Chlorophyll A; FAC; beta-Carotin; CIE values; Spectral data Saybolt; IP units; ASTM Color; Pt-Co/Hazen/APHA; CIE values; Lovibond®RYBN; Gardner; Spectral data 10 77 18801 10 77 18802 10 77 18804 10 77 18803 10 77 18805 10 77 18806 10 77 19501 10 77 11959 10 77 11957 10 77 11958 10 77 11955 10 77 11956 10 77 19952 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1027

1029

Special Analysis Water, Environment 1 2 3 4 5 6 1028 Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations Test Kits for Rapid Analysis, VISOCOLOR®, MACHEREY-NAGEL 1 VISOCOLOR® enviroment case with photometer PF-12Plus With photometer PF-12Plus for the determination of ammonium, carbonate hardness, iron, total hardness, nitrate, nitrite, pH 4.0 – 9.0 and phosphate. Article VISOCOLOR® environment case with photometer PF-12Plus Order No. 10 46 94353 2 VISOCOLOR® ECO analysis case For the colorimetric determination of ammonium, carbonate hardness, total hardness, nitrate, nitrite, pH 4.0 – 9.0 and phosphate. Article VISOCOLOR® ECO analysis case Order No. 80 46 31001 3 VISOCOLOR® analysis case The VISOCOLOR® reagent case contains the following test kits: Alkalinity AL 7 (total): Ammonium 3: Total hardness H 20 F: Nitrite: pH 4.0 – 9.0: Phosphate: Oxygen SA 10: Temperature: Additionally the case can hold additional VISOCOLOR® test kits. Shelf life of reagents at least 18 months. accuracy 0.2 mmol/l or 0.5 °d 0.2 – 3 mg/l NH4+ accuracy 0.1 mmol/l or 0.5 °d 0.02 – 0.50 mg/l NO2- pH 4.0 – 9.0 0.2 – 5 mg/l P accuracy 0.2 mg/l O2 (oxygen deficit) -10 to +60 °C Article VISOCOLOR® analysis case Order No. 80 46 31302 As refills for this VISOCOLOR® reagent case you can use the following test kits: Alkalinity AL 7, ammonium 3, total hardness H 20 F, nitrite, pH 4.0 to 9.0, phosphate, oxygen SA 10 4 VISOCOLOR® analysis case without test kits The VISOCOLOR® reagent case without test kits allows the individual combination of test kits from the complete range of VISOCOLOR® programme and pH indicator papers, pH- Fix test strips, qualitative test papers and semi-quantitative QUANTOFIX® test strips, e.g. for applications in: boiler water conditioning, cooling water conditioning, water treatment, irrigation, beverage industries, breweries, printing industries, education, corrosion prevention, surface finish- ing, construction industry, aquaculture and others. Article VISOCOLOR® analysis case without test kits Order No. 80 46 31307 Soil case The reagent case for soil analysis comes complete with a comprehensive handbook for the determination of: soil structure, pH, nitrate, ammonium, phosphate and potassium. Disposables and replacement parts can be purchased separately. VISOCOLOR® soil cas- es are perfect tools for economical, fast and low-cost soil analysis in the lab and also directly in the field. Choose between a version with and without the compact photometer PF-3 Soil which was developed specifically for soil analysis. Both case versions comprise analysis instruments such as scales, sieve etc., as well as pre-dosed solutions for manu- facturing the required soil extracts. Article 5 VISOCOLOR® soil case 6 VISOCOLOR® soil case with PF-3 Soil Order No. 10 46 91601 10 46 94220 7 Compact photometer PF-12Plus • Easy handling for accurate results • Sturdy and water-tight • Nephelometric turbidity measurement and NTU check The compact photometer PF-12Plus is tailored to the requirements of mobile water analy- sis. The icon-based menu navigation and clearly structured task bar make the PF-12Plus an easy-to-use photometer for all applications water and waste water testing – no time-consuming training required. Supplied in a sturdy case filled with practical accesso- ries, this compact photometer is a particularly well suited for water testing directly at the sampling site. Continued on next page

1030

Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations Special Analysis Water, Environment Type: Optics: Wavelengths: Filter photometer with microprocessor control, self-test and auto-calibration Automatic filter wheel with 7 interference filters, insensitive to exter- nal light – no light shield required 345 nm / 436 nm / 470 nm / 540 nm / 585 nm / 620 nm / 690 nm plus one compartment for storing one additional filter; 860 n m LED for NTU measurement Measuring modes: Over 100 pre-programmed tests and special methods, extinction, Data memory: Display: Power supply: transmission, factor, standard, nephelometric turbidity measure- ment; 50 freely programmable methods 1000 results, GLP conform Backlit graphic display, 128 × 64 pixels, all key data at a glance Result in respective unit, date, time, sample number, sample loca- tion, dilution, measuring range bar Via USB power supply, standard or rechargeable batteries or re- chargeable power pack 215 × 100 × 65 mm 0.7 kg Dimensions: Weight: Article Compact photometer PF-12Plus USB power supply Charger Accu pack incl. software DVD, Quick Start Guide, magazine of test instructions “VISOCOLOR® ECO Testanleitungen für Kompaktphotometer PF-12Plus”, 4 batteries, 4 empty test tubes, funnel, beak, syringe, USB cabel, calib- ration cuvette, certificate and cleaning cloth in rugged case Order No. 10 46 99250 10 46 99220 10 46 99221 10 46 99201 8 8 Reagent case VISOCOLOR® School The VISOCOLOR® School reagent case is especially designed for schools and caters to the needs of both students and teachers. All reagents are approved to be used in schools in Germany (GUV-SR 2004 directive) and can be disposed of easily just down the drain without any harm to the environment. Article Reagent case VISOCOLOR® School 9 Reagent case VISOCOLOR® Fish Order No. 10 46 93100 The VISOCOLOR® Fish reagent case was designed specifically for the requirements in connection with testing fishing waters. The practical, sturdy case is particularly well suited for mobile analysis directly on the water sampling site. In addition to the accessories needed for analysis, the reagent case VISOCOLOR® Fish holds 6 tests for colorimetric and titrimetric determination of the major water parameters ammonium, nitrate, nitrite, phosphate, pH, and total hardness. Article Reagent case VISOCOLOR® Fish Order No. 10 46 93101 Photometers, WTW® photoLab® series Precise thanks to the high-quality lens system and fast thanks to barcode test recognition with automatic cuvette detection system. These instruments require little maintenance thanks to their exceptional photometric stability and wear-free design. Extensive on-board AQS/IQK guarantees reliable results during measurement and docu- mentation. Values can be read off as concentration, extinction or transmission. More than 200 programmed methods with all essential settings for test sets are available for downloading and updating at any time from the Internet. The methods include all common parameters for analysis of sewage and drinking water, also for sea water and for pisciculture and fish farming, for food and beverage industries. Users are thus provided with both a high-quality and economical solution for everything from routine measure- ments to laboratory analysis. All photometers feature date and time and come with an RS 232 interface. 2 years warranty. co d e b e w WWP1J019 7 9 Applications Wavelengths Own methods Cuvettes photoLab® S6 Routine measurements in waste and drinking water, battery version optional 6 wavelengths: 340, 445, 525, 550, 605, 690 nm no Round 16 mm Extinction range Measured value memory 500 0.3 to 3.2 photoLab® S12 Routine measurements in waste and drinking water, comprehensive laboratory tests, battery version optional 12 wavelengths: 340, 410, 445, 500, 525, 550, 565, 605, 620, 665, 690, 820 nm 50 Round 16 mm; rectangular 10, 20, 50 mm 0.3 to 3.2 500 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1029

1031

Special Analysis Water, Environment Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations for routine measurements with the convenient cuvette tests Article 1 Photometer photoLab S 6 Article 2 Photometer photoLab S12 • round and rectangular cuvettes for measuring also low concentrations and for using Order No. 80 81 32013 Order No. 80 81 32024 the more economical reagent tests with automatic cuvette and measuring range switchover • 50 own method places for convenient measuring of own analyses • kinetics function • economical allround photometer in each laboratory through 12 wavelengths Spectrophotometers photoLab® 7000 series photoLab® 7100 VIS und photoLab® 7600 UV-VIS for combined routine and spectral analysis including pioneering reagent-free optical COD, nitrate and nitrite measure - ment (UV): • Proven and fast: Routine analysis like waste and drinking water, aquaculture, food & beverage, environmental monitoring and production • Pioneering + cost saving: reagent-free OptRF measurement for COD, nitrate and nitrite in sewage plant outlets and some surface waters • Universal for industrial, research and educational use • User-friendly structured menus and clear guidance on brilliant display • Lab quality in the field: 4.5 kg light weight, with car battery and field case option Routine Analysis • More than 250 programs for commercial test kits, standard parameters, direct readings of coloration, SAK, etc. • Barcode recognition for tests in vials and rectangular cells • Automatic cell recognition for 16, 10, 20 und 50 mm without adapter, automatic meas- urement range selection • User-defined programs being easy to program and fast selected • Up to three parallel timers Spectral and universal analysis from 190 to 1100 nm • Scans in various nm-steps, 700 – 2000 nm/min • Kinetics and multi-wavelength readings including special methods and ADMI color measurement • User profiles and calculation programs storable • Extensive programming tools for multistep functions with user guidance, e.g. enzymat- ic testing • photoLab® color: Optional PC-Software for color measurement from CIE to Yellowness AQA • Multi-level user-friendly AQA functions with administration tools and comprehensive checking aids for meter and reagents. Data Management • Measurement data, PDF documents, spectra and kinetics data, with data filter for pre-selected data management • photoLab® Data spectral: PC-Software for data management • External barcode reading option for uncoded test kits and sample ID Wavelength range: Optics: Lamp: Bandwidth: Wavelength accuracy/ reproduceability: Photometric accuracy/ reproduceability: Interface/Update: Temperature range: Weight: Dimensions W×H×D: photoLab® 7100 VIS photoLab® 7600 UV-VIS 320 – 1100 nm 190 – 1100 nm Monochromator with grating and step motor / refer- Wolfram-Halogen Xenon flashlamp ence beam 4 nm ± 1 nm / < 0.5 nm - 0.003 E for E < 0.600; 0.5% of values for 0.600 < E < 2.000 1 USB-A, 1 USB-B, 1 Ethernet / Update via Internet and USB-Stick operation: +10°C to +35°C, storage: -25°C to +65°C approx. 4.5 kg 404 × 197 × 314 Article photoLab® 7100 VIS, 320 – 1100 nm 3 photoLab® 7600 UV-VIS, 190 – 1100 nm 4 photoLab® color + Data spectral PC-Software for photoLab® 7000 series Order No. 10 81 22523 10 81 22524 10 81 22563 1 2 3 4 1030

1032

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWP1J028 Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations Mobile Colorimeters, WTW® 1 Mobile colorimeters: the pHotoFlex® series The photometers / colorimeters of this series convince by their sophisticated technology for use on site, comprising an optional LabStation for easy evaluation and execution of laboratory tasks. A large illuminated graphic display guides the user through all functions. A laboratory station with battery and charging function is available as an accessory for the the basic battery-operated model (4 AA batteries). Routine data measurement and evalu- ation can then be performed even more conveniently with an external scanner and evaula- tion software. pHotoflex®STD For all those who only need photometry functions: more than 150 methods. pHotoflex®pH Photometers / colorimeter with electrochemical pH and redox measurement. Additional methods for ammonia and carbon dioxide. pHotoFlex®Turb Same as pHotoFlex pH, plus turbidity measurement from 0 to 1100 NTU / FNU. Photometer functions • 6 wavelengths: 436, 517, 557, 594, 610, 690 nm, LEDs with filter, accuracy < 2 nm • Extinction range: 0 – 2 E • 2 cuvette sizes for a large range of concentration: 28 mm, 16 mm; variable cuvette height from 91 to 104 mm for the 16 mm cuvette • Up to 200 method-related data for a large number of test sets, update over the Internet possible • Data memory for 1000 measurements • 100 own methods • Coloring measurement according to EN ISO 7887 (exactly 436 nm, 517 nm, 610 nm) pH functions • pH meter with temperature compensation and 3-point calibration • pH -2.00 to 16.00 (+/- 0.01), temperature: -5.0 to 100.0 °C • Automatic buffer recognition: TEC / NIST Turbidity functions • IR LED according to DIN 27027/ISO 7027 • Measuring range: 0-1100 NTU / FNU • Resolution: 0-9.99 NTU: 0.01; 10-99 NTU: 0.1; 100-1100 NT: 1.0 • 3-point calibration with standards (0.02 – 10 – 1000 NTU) 1 Article pHotoFlex STD, incl. batteries (4 AA) pHotoFlex pH pocket photometer, incl. batteries (4 AA) pHotoFlex Turb pocket photometer, incl. batteries (4 AA) Order No. 10 81 21105 80 81 51100 80 81 51110 Accessories Article pHotoFlex rechargeable battery Rechargeable battery + mains plug for all pHotoFlex models LabStation Laboratory station with pHotoFlex software for all pHotoFlex models, incl. rechargeable battery and mains cable, laboratory interface cable (9-pole) • simplified operation for routine measurements • more functionality (barcode support) • easy input and output of data through pHotoFlex software Interface cable AK540/B Unit/PC (6-pole) via RS232 Order No. 80 81 51300 80 81 51301 80 81 52842 Accessories pH Article pH combination electrode SenTix 41 pH combination electrode SenTix 41-3 pH buffer TPL4 pH buffer TPL7 Order No. 61 81 21635 61 81 21636 61 81 21800 61 81 28802 Failed to find what you are looking for ? Give us a call ! Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1031 co d e b e w

1033

Special Analysis Water, Environment Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations Reagents for photoLab® and photoflex® series Model Measuring range Order No. 1 Article Al aluminium RT1) NH4 ammonium RT1) NH4 ammonium KT Pb lead RT1) Cadmium RT1) Cadmium KT Chlorine KT free Chlorine KT free + total Chlorine dioxide RT1) Chromate KT Cyanide KT Cyanide RT1)2) COD KT COD KT Iron RT1) Iron RT1) Fluoride RT1)2) Total hardness KT Copper RT1) Magnesium KT Manganese KT Manganese RT1) N total KT Nitrate KT Nitrate KT2) Nitrate RT1)2) Nitrite RT1) Nitrite RT1) Nitrite KT Ozone RT1) Ozone RT1) Phosphate RT1) Phosphate KT (Ptotal) 80 81 25425 14825 0.020-1.20 mg/l Al 0.010-3.00 mg/l NH4-N 80 81 25426 14752 0.20-8.00 mg/l NH4-N 10 81 25072 A6/25 80 81 25034 09717 0.010-5.00 mg/l Pb 80 81 25051 01745 0.002-0.500 mg/l Cd 80 81 25314 14834 0.025-1.000 mg/l Cd 80 81 25419 00595 0.03-6.00 mg/l Cl2 80 81 25420 00597 0.03-6.00 mg/l Cl2 80 81 25017 00608 0.020-10.00 mg/l ClO2 80 81 25341 14552 0.05-2.00 mg/l Cr 80 81 25344 14561 0.010-0.500 mg/l CN 80 81 25492 09701 0.002-0.500 mg/l CN 10 81 25070 C3/25 10-150 mg/l CSB 10 81 25071 C4/25 25-1500 mg/l CSB 80 81 25435 14761/1 0.005-5.00 mg/l Fe 80 81 25439 14761/2 0.005-5.00 mg/l Fe 80 81 25048 14598 80 81 25039 00961 80 81 25441 14767 80 81 25043 00815 80 81 25035 00816 80 81 25442 14770/1 0.10-10.00 mg/l Mn 80 81 25358 0.5-15.0 mg/l Ntotal 14537 80 81 25410 14542 0.5-18.0 mg/l NO3-N 10 81 25073 0,5-25 mg/l NO2-N N2/25 80 81 25444 14773 0.2-20.0 mg/l NO3-N 14776/1 0.005-1.000 mg/l NO2-N 80 81 25445 14776/2 0.005-1.000 mg/l NO2-N 80 81 25440 10 81 25074 N5/25 80 81 25016 00607/1 0.010-4.00 mg/l O3 80 81 25054 00607/2 0.010-4.00 mg/l O3 80 81 25447 14842/1 0.5-30,0 mg/l PO4-P 10 81 25075 P6/25 0.10-20.0 mg/l F 0.7-30.1 °d 0.02-6.00 mg/l Cu 5.0-75.0 mg/l Mg 0.01-5.0 mg/l Mn 0,01-0,7 mg/l NO2-N PU pc/Pack 300 500 25 50 55 25 200 200 200 25 25 100 25 25 1000 250 100 25 250 25 25 500 25 25 25 100 1000 335 25 200 1200 400 25 1 1032 Phosphate KT Sulfate KT Zinc RT1)2) P7/25 14548 14832 0,05-5,00 mg/l PO4-P 0,05-1,50 mg/l Pges 0.3-15.0 mg/l PO4-P 0.3-15.0 mg/l Pges 5,0-250 mg/l SO4 0.05-2.50 mg/l Zn 10 81 25076 80 81 25414 80 81 25451 25 25 90 co d e b e w WWSE2006 Other tests on request, method data can be updated from the Internet. 1) not for photoLab S6 2) not for photoFlex® Turbidity Measurement Turbidity Meter TB 211-IR, Lovibond® The compact Lovibond® infrared turbidity meter TB 211-IR is designed to allow fast, precise on-site testing. The unit measures the scattered light at an angle of 90°, as stipu- lated in EN ISO 7027. The wide measuring range from 0.01-1100 NTU (=TE/F; = FNU) makes the instrument suitable for various applications, ranging from drinking water to waste water. As infrared light is used for measurement, the instrument can be used to test both coloured and colourless liquids. Calibration standards are also supplied. An alternative adjustment mode allows entry of user-defined turbidity standards. Delivery content: TB 211-IR turbidity meter as described above, complete with 4 turbid- ity standards (<0,1, 20, 200 und 800 NTU), battery and test vials, in case. Technical data: Display: Optics: Keypad: Power supply: Auto-OFF: Interface: Storage: Measuring range: Accuracy: Test fluid appropri- ateness: Backlit LCD (on keypress) Temperature-compensated LED ( l=860nm) Conditional acid and solvent resistant polycarbonate membrane 9 V power pack battery automatic switch off after 10 min. Micro USB Internal ring memory for 16 data sets 0.01 – 1100 NTU (Auto-range) ±2,5% of reading or ±0.01 NTU (0-500 NTU) ±5% (500–1100 NTU) Software based user calibration using the T-CAL standards Article Lovibond® Turbidity Meter TB 211-IR Order No. 10 77 10211

1034

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWP1J029 Turbidity Measurement Turb® 750 Series, WTW® Turbidimeter up to 1100 FNU/NTU for lab and industrial applications to detect turbidity as indicator parameter for quality control of drinking and waste water, beverages, pharma- ceutical, R&D, chemicals, fuels, ... The Intelligent Reproducibility and Plausibility Check (IRPC) result in reliable findings also in the lowest range. IRPC computes a multiple measurement by evaluation and elimination of outliners. The alignment of marked vials (free of silicon oil) avoid disturbing glass inho- mogenities. IRPC supports the measurement of rapid settling samples. The supplied PC software Turb® Data allows GLP-compliant data management with AQA, calibration protocol and filtered or complete data sets: transfer in CSV format, import in Excel, export to LIMS. • Proven WTW® optics with light trap • Determination in drinking water acc. to DIN EN / US EPA • Menu-guided 3-point standard calibration, 2-5 point user-defined calibration • QuickCAL: 1-point-calibration at 10 NTU • Bench-saving despite comprehensive functionality • AQA, calibration interval and records with PC-documentation Technical data: Measurement mode: Measurement range: Display: Resolution: Repeatability: AQA-Support: Data storage: PC Software: Sample Identification: Interface: Power supply: Certificate: Nephelometric (scattering 90°) 0 – 1100 FNU/NTU Backlit graphics display 160 × 104 0.01 for 0.00 – 9.99, 0.1 for 10 – 99.90, 1 for 100 – 1100 < 0.5% of finding Calibration protocol and interval setting, AQA flag, Cal flag 2500 data records with calibration protocol, AQA identification GLP-compliant data management with LIMS connection Alphanumeric (…999) RS 232, USB, printer via PC or RS232 Wide range power supply CE 1 Turb® 750 IR The Turb® 750 IR fulfills the guidelines for drinking water analysis according to DIN EN ISO 7027-1. Technical data: Model: Light source: Units: Accuracy: Turb 750 IR LED 0-1100 (ISO) LED 830-890 nm fulfills DIN EN ISO 7027-1 FNU/NTU 0.01 NTU/FNU or ± 2% of finding Article Turb® 750 IR Order No. 14 89 63 Turb® 750 T The Turb® 750 T fulfills the guidelines for drinking water analysis according to US EPA 180.1. Technical data: Model: Light source: Units: Accuracy: Turb 750 T (EPA) Tungsten White Light acc. US EPA 180.1 NTU 0.01 NTU or ± 2% of finding Article 1 Turb® 750 T Order No. 14 89 64 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1033

1035

Special Analysis Water, Environment Sedimenting Vessels co d e b e w Water Analysis Apparatuses, Starke WWFNK004 Water Analysis Apparatuses 1 2 3 Article Oxygen bottle according to Winkler To determine the oxygen dissolved in water, complete with stopper and matte-finish Order No. 14 59 40010 marking area, capacity exactly calibrated. Capacity: 100 to 150 ml Article 1 Oxygen bottle according to Winkle Same as above. Capacity: 250 to 300 ml Article 2 Sedimenting vessel, Imhoff type Without stopcock, cap. 1000 ml, graduated: 0 to 2 ml in 0.1 ml; 2 to 10 ml in 0.5 ml; Order No. 14 59 40013 Order No. 14 59 40011 10 to 40 ml in 1 ml; 40 to 100 ml in 2 ml, with mark at 1000 ml Article Sedimenting vessel, Imhoff type With stopcock with ground joint and solid glass plug, with threaded stopcock lock, Order No. 14 59 40014 cap. 1000 ml, graduated: 0 to 2 ml in 0.1 ml; 2 to 10 ml in 0.5 ml; 10 to 40 ml in 1 ml; 40 to 100 ml in 2 ml, with mark at 1000 ml Article 3 Sedimenting vessel, Imhoff type Without stopcock, cap. 1000 ml, graduated: 0 to 2 ml in 0.1 ml; 2 to 10 ml in 0.5 ml; Order No. 14 59 40015 10 to 40 ml in 1 ml; 40 to 100 ml in 2 ml; 100 to 1000 ml in 100 ml Article Sedimenting vessel, Imhoff type With stopcock with ground joint and solid glass plug, with threaded stopcock lock, Order No. 14 59 40016 cap. 1000 ml, graduated: 0 to 2 ml in 0.1 ml; 2 to 10 ml in 0.5 ml; 10 to 40 ml in 1 ml; 40 to 100 ml in 2 ml; 100 to 1000 ml in 50 ml Article 4 BOD flask Stopper with ground joint 18.8, capacity with stopper inserted: 100 ml Order No. 14 59 40018 4 5 Overflow graduated flask cut off a capacity mark, plane-ground. Volume Order No. ml 21.7 22.7 43.5 56 94 97 100 150 157 10 59 40025 14 59 40027 10 59 40043 14 59 40056 14 59 40094 14 59 40097 14 59 40100 14 59 40150 14 59 40157 Volume Order No. ml 164 200 250 300 360 365 428 432 14 59 40164 14 59 40200 14 59 40250 14 59 40300 14 59 40360 14 59 40365 14 59 40428 14 59 40432 5 co d e b e w WWQED018 Imhoff Sedimentation Cones, BRAND SAN, transparent DIN 12 672. Transparent. Graduated up to 1000 ml. Screw cap allows drainage. With- stands temperatures up to 85°C. Article 6 Imhoff sedimentation cone, SAN Order No. 23 49 38800 Graduation in ml 0 – 2 >2 – 10 >10 – 40 >40 – 100 >100 – 1000 Increments in ml 0,1 0,5 1 2 50 Error limit ± ml 0.1 0.5 1 2 10 Rack for plastic sedimentation cones Holds 2 Imhoff sedimentation cones. Made of PMMA/PP. Compact design and easy to carry, even with cones filled. L × W × H in mm: 300 × 130 × 315. Article 7 Rack for plastic sedimentation cones, Imhoff type Order No. 23 49 38805 6 1034 7

1036

Sedimenting Vessels behroplast® Racks for Sedimentation Vessels, Behr behroplast® racks for Imhoff sedimentation vessels, made of solid PVC, gray, sturdy design. Article Rack for 2 Imhoff funnel without stopcock Rack for 2 Imhoff funnel with stopcock Rack for 4 Imhoff funnel without stopcock Rack for 4 Imhoff funnel with stopcock Order No. 23 48 17002 23 48 17012 23 48 17004 23 48 17014 Supplied without the illustrated accessories Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWXKS004 BOD Determination BOD Accessories, Behr behrotest® BOD sample dilution units behrotest® BOD sample dilution units are reliable and easy to use. Use the matching accessories - from the dilution water tank with cooling coil over thermostat-circulation pump to the allylthiourea fine dosing function - to design entire workstations. Define BOD5 pursuant to ISO 5815-1, DIN EN 1899-1 (=DEV H 51) to achieve a significant reduction of personnel expenditure and costs. Article BOD sample dilution unit behrotest® BOD 2-N 1 graduated mixing cylinder of 1 liter volume, built-in continuously adjustable magnetic Order No. 10 48 01002 co d e b e w WWXKS012 stirrer, self-priming peristaltic pump with pressures shut-off, 3-way PTFE stopcock, which permits delivery of dilution water from lower-lying container without air bubbles. Article BOD sample dilution unit behrotest® BOD 4A Same as BSB 2 except semiautomatic, with fill-level sensor for dilution water and rinse Order No. 80 48 01003 capability. Article 1 BOD sample dilution unit behrotest® BOD 31-2 Similar to BSB 4A, but with 3 graduated mixing cylinders of 1 l volume, each with mag- Order No. 10 48 01004 netic stirrer. Permanently mounted peristaltic pump for increased flow rate. 1 behrotest® BOD bottles (Karlsruhe type) with stoppers The special extension of the bottle-neck retains the water displaced by the insertion of the stopper or the oxygen electrode. This design guarantees neat working processes and ensures that no oxygen can get into the samples and corrupt the measurement results. Finger grip length Order No. mm 2 30 60 30 60 Volume ml 250 250 100 100 80 48 02030 80 48 02060 80 48 02130 80 48 02160 BOD bottle with stopper Article BOD bottle, 100 ml, NS 19, with glass and plastic stopper Order No. 80 48 02200 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1035 Continued on next page 2

1037

Special Analysis Water, Environment BOD Determination behrotest® BOD dilution water containers With aeration system, level indicator and outlet spigot. Colored opaque container for protection against light. Wide lid for easy cleaning. Without cooling/warming coil Volume l 30 60 120 Ø cm 35 40 50 Height cm 50 60 79 Order No. 80 48 03030 80 48 03060 80 48 03120 1 With cooling/warming coil (stainless steel) and connection socket for one cooling thermostat Volume l 30 60 120 Ø cm 39 40 50 Height cm 50 65 80 Order No. 80 48 04030 80 48 04060 80 48 04120 behrotest® thermostat-circulation pumps for controlling the temperature of the BOD dilution water Thermostat-circulation pump with both heating and cooling function for maintaining the BOD dilution water at 20°C. May be also used with an external temperature sensor. Article behrotest® thermostat-circulation pump Order No. 80 48 40202 Thermostatically Controlled Incubators, Lovibond® The thermostatically controlled incubators from Lovibond® are designed to ensure con- tinuous temperature control in a temperature range of 2 to 40°C. These cabinets are suitable for a large variety of different applications in industrial and research laboratories. Ideal for the temperature-controlled storage of samples and BOD determination for waste water analysis. All temperatures can be selected in steps of 0.1°C. A digital LCD simulta- neously indicates the target and actual value in the incubator. Advantages • Control range from 2°C to 40°C • BOD determination • Temperature-controlled storage of samples • Double protection against overheating Technical Data: Design: Models with glass door: Operation: Fully insulated cabinet with universal temperature control unit. Insulating glass door in an aluminium frame. Water-proof film front, 2 buttons with tactile feedback +2°C to +40°C, steps of 0,1°C Control range: Temperature tolerance: ± 0.5°C, specified for BOD sample temperature, volume: Display: Fan: Approval: Type Mains con- nection V/Hz TC135 S 230 / 50 TC255 S 230 / 50 TC445 S 230 / 50 TC140 G 230 / 50 TC256 G 230 / 50 500 ml, 20°C, otherwise ±1°C set-point value: 2 digits, actual value: 3 digits, resolution: 0.1°C axial, output 320 m3/h CE Useful capacity l 135 255 445 140 255 Version Outer dimensions H × W × D mm Order No. Standard door 850×600×600 Standard door 1640×600×610 Standard door 1640×750×730 Glass door Glass door 850×600×600 1640×600×610 80 77 28200 80 77 28230 80 77 28240 80 77 28210 80 77 28235 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger selection of products from a specific manufacturer. 1 co d e b e w WWSE2001 co d e b e w 1036

1038

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWBPE011 BOD Determination BOD Thermostatic Chambers with microprocessor control, ORI Technical data: Power consumption: Ambient temperature: Capacity: Temperature regulation: Sockets inside: Cooling liquid: Outer dimensions (H×W×D): Inner dimensions (H×W×D): Connected load: Weight: Small model Controller 80 W Refrigeration 120 W Heating 40 W 10 – 32°C adjustable 180 l 20°C, ±0.5°C 4 R 600a 850 × 600 × 600 mm 702 × 513 × 441 mm 230 V / 50 Hz 38 kg Large model Controller 80 W Refrigeration 150 W Heating 40 W 10 – 32°C adjustable 352 l 20°C, ±0.5°C 4 R 600a 1800 × 600 × 610 mm 1612 × 470 × 440 mm 230 V / 50 Hz 74 kg Article Thermostatically controlled cabinet, small model 1 Thermostatically controlled cabinet, large model Order No. 80 22 14185 80 22 14370 BOD Thermostatic Cabinets TS, WTW® The cabinets for operation at 230 V/ 50 Hz are freely adjustable from 10°C to 40°C in order to incubate samples at constant temperatures. Depending on the model, 2 or 4 connec- tors are available inside for stirring systems from all Oxitop® systems, and 2 to 4 systems can be loaded depending on the model. The ambient temperature should lie between 10°C and 32°C. Typical applications: BOD (20°C), biogas (35°C to 37°C). CE. 1 year war- ranty. Technical data: Temperature control range: Setting interval: Temperature stability: Ambient temperature for operation: +10°C to +32°C (climate class SN) Coolant: Storage: +10°C to +40°C ±1 K 1 K ±0.5 K R600a -25°C to +65°C 1 2 Inner dimensions H×W×D 2 TS 608/2i l 180 TS 608-G/2i 180 TS 608/4i 360 Model Volume Outer dimensions H×W×D mm 850×600×600 850×600×600 1640×600×610 1640×600×610 1640×750×730 mm 702×513×441 702×513×441 1452×513×441 1452×513×441 1452×600×560 Net weight Max. power consumption Coolant Order No. 43 320 2 35 10 81 28452 53 380 4 52 10 81 28454 69 380 4 52 10 81 28456 69 380 4 58 10 81 28458 kg 34 W 160 2 g 35 TS 608-G/4i 360 TS 1008i 500 Internal sockets 10 81 28450 co d e b e w WWP1J024 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1037

1039

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWQ34001 BOD Determination STL Thermostatic Boxes and Chambers, SHL Due to your isolated production, all equipment variants can be produced individually. Our thermostatic devices are completely operated from the outside, so that the door does not have to be opened during operation in order to change the programmes if necessary. This ensures great accuracy regarding the results. The micro-processor control permits 3 different user programmes with 6 segments of temperature-time profiles with or without start delay. Each STL-thermostatic chamber has an RS232 and USB interface, which displays and processes the temperature values dur- ing operation by means of optionally available software on every MS-WINDOWS comput- er. The average, minimum and maximum temperature are recorded per segment. Our devices can be ordered with normal, closed door, glass door or double door. • CE certified, EN ISO 9001 and N 18001 certified • LED-interior illumination • Temperature range +3°C to +40°C • Lockable front door • Access Port for external temperature monitoring • Test certificate at 37°C • 24 months warranty Further optional equipment features: • Door alarm when door is open • Mobile version • Internal illumination in different colours • Connecting cable for PC/Printer • Software programmes • Thermal printer for direct memory print-outs • Internal power sockets • 9-point certificate available for additional charge Areas of application: • Storing samples • BSB-determination at +20°C • Micro-biological tests • Enzyme activity at +25°C • Bacterial count determination at +37°C • Plant growth and much more Available as desk-top model with content of 63 l up to double chamber with content of 1143 l 1 1038 Type 1 ST1 A 40 ST1 A 70 ST1 B 40 ST1 B 70 ST2 A 40 ST2 A 70 ST2 B 40 ST2 B 70 ST3 A 40 ST3 A 70 ST3 B 40 ST3 B 70 ST3 C 60 ST4 A 70 ST4 B 40 ST4 B 70 ST5 A 40 ST5 A 70 ST5 B 40 ST5 B 70 STL thermostatic boxes and chambers Vol. l 68 68 68 68 150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Vers. Glass door Glass door Standard door Standard door Glass door Glass door Standard door Standard door Glass door Glass door Standard door Standard door Glass door Glass door Standard door Standard door Glass door Glass door Standard door Standard door Temp. range °C +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 +3 – +40 W × H × D mm 570×600×670 570×600×670 570×600×670 570×600×670 620×860×640 620×860×640 620×860×640 620×860×640 620×1060×640 620×1060×640 620×1060×640 620×1060×640 620×1260×640 620×1260×640 620×1260×640 620×1260×640 620×1460×640 620×1460×640 620×1460×640 620×1460×640 Optional accessories Inside light (2016 series) Article Sockets, max. 3 pcs. Door lock (not with model A) (2016 series) Shelf ST2, ST2/2 Shelf ST3, ST3/3 Access port (2016 series) Door alert Connection cable for PC Thermal printer “Kafka” EasyLab® T-Software (currently only available in English) Temp. ran- ge adj. in 0.1°C yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Order No. 10 14 81040 10 14 81070 10 14 81140 10 14 81170 10 14 82040 10 14 82070 10 14 82140 10 14 82170 10 14 83040 10 14 83070 10 14 83140 10 14 83170 10 14 84040 10 14 84070 10 14 84140 10 14 84170 10 14 85040 10 14 85070 10 14 85140 10 14 85170 Order No. 10 14 88011 10 14 88012 10 14 88013 10 14 88014 10 14 88015 10 14 88016 10 14 88017 10 14 88018 10 14 88019 10 14 88020

1040

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWP1J020 1 2 BOD Determination BOD Measurement, WTW® OxiTop® OxiTop® packages are manometric measuring systems for respirometric biological deg- radation tests. The principle is very easy: By measuring differential pressure in a closed sample system with electronic measuring heads parameters like BOD (Biochemical Oxy- gen Demand), soil respiration, anaerobic digestion (biogas) and much more can be deter- mined. OxiTop® exists in two new lines: OxiTop®-i for BOD measurement in waste water with direct display of the BOD value in mg/l available in ready to measure sets for immediate use. OxiTop®-IDS for BOD measurement and demanding respirometric applications including data transfer to PC and laptop. Technical data OxiTop®-i / OxiTop®-IDS / OxiTop®-IDS/B: 500 to 1250 hPa bzw. 500 to1500 hPa Pressure range: BOD measuring range: 0 to 4000 mg/l (with Multi 36x0 to 400,000 mg/l) Selectable measuring period: 1 to 7 days (with Multi 36x0: 0.5 h to 180 days) Selectable sample volume: 22.7 ; 43.5 ; 97.0 ; 164 ; 250 ; 365 ; 432 ml (freely selecta- ble with Multi 36x0 IDS) LCD, backlit, menu controlled RGB 1 × CR 2450 Display: Signal LED: Battery: 1 OxiTop®-i New: OxiTop®-i for “BOD Self Check” according to DIN EN 1899-2 (H55) It is suited for BOD routine measurement from 1 to 7 days including automatic storing of measured values, selection of sample volume, measuring period, and output in mg/l and curve display. Manual recall intermediate values possible. All measurement parameters will be maintained, no new programming for the next measurement. Easy allocation of inlet and outlet measurement by grey and blue heads and programmable ID number. Standard accessories: Brown sample bottles, stirring bars, stirring bar remover, NaOH plate, rubber tube, 1 overflow graduated flask each 164 ml and 432 ml, nitrification inhibitor, stirring platform Article BOD self-check measurement system OxiTop®-i IS 6 Inductive stirring system with 6 OxiTop®-i measurement sys- tems including standard accessories BOD self-check measurement system OxiTop®-i IS 12 Inductive stirring system with 12 OxiTop®-i measurement sys- tems including standard accessories Order No. 10 81 28260 10 81 28262 2 OxiTop®-IDS OxiTop®-IDS with Bluetooth® Data Transfer for “BOD-Self Check Method” acc. DIN EN 1899-2 (H55) and for Special Applications OxiTop®-IDS Measurement Systems for measuring 100 heads in up to 12 measurement sets with up to 12 samples including up to 12 measuring heads. OxiTop®-IDS is a new member of WTW IDS family, supporting up to now electrochemical and optical parameters. Using a Multi 3620 or 3630 IDS in combination with IDS WLM-M module allows programming and data transfer from the OxiTop®-IDS heads. The meters are not a part of the delivery, please order separately. Support of automatic set and sam- ple ID, also user-definable. Data and curves can be displayed, measured data can be transferred via a USB on a memory stick in a csv format into Excel®. The CO2 absorber NHP 600 must be ordered separately for all complete sets including bottles and stirring platform. These routines are available with Multi 3620 IDS/Multi 3630 IDS: • BOD-Standard: including sample averaging up to 4000 mg/l • BSB-Special including freely selectable sample volume, vessel volume, temperature and dilution factors up to 400.000 mg/l • Pressure mode 500 to 1250 hPa (1500 hPa with OxiTop®-IDS/B heads) for soil respira- tion, anaerobic digestion (biogas) and more • The measuring period can be adjusted between 0.5 h to 180 days Article OxiTop®-IDS Set 6 Set incl. 6 measuring units, stirring platform IS 6, accessories OxiTop®-IDS Set 12 Set incl. 12 measuring units, stirring platform IS 12, accessories Multi 3620 IDS Set WL meter set including IDS WLM-M module Multi 3630 IDS Set WL meter set including IDS WLM-M module OxiTop®-IDS standard measuring head OxiTop®-IDS/B measuring head for biogas application Order No. 10 81 29710 10 81 29712 10 81 22560 10 81 22570 10 81 29700 10 81 29701 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1039

1041

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWSE2003 BOD Determination BOD-Measurement System, Lovibond® Respirometric BOD measurement with BD 600/BD 606 The sensor system BD 600/BD 606 allows precise measurements of BOD based on the manometric principle. Manometric respirometers relate oxygen uptake to the change in pressure caused by oxygen consumption while maintaining a constant volume. Due to the modern integral pressure sensors, it is not necessary to use mercury for the measure- ments. Benefits: • User friendly • Large, illuminated and brilliant graphic display • Graphical representation of measured values • USB and SD Card data transfer • Mercury-free, environmentally-friendly • Remote control • User-selectable time span from 1 to 28 days • Free individual programming of each of the six samples • Inductive stirring system, 100–240 V / 50–60 Hz Scope of delivery: • BD 600, complete unit with 6 sensor heads and control unit with batteries BD 606, complete unit with 12 sensor heads and 2 control units with batteries • Power supply unit incl. Y-cable for common power supply of BD 600 and stirring unit • 1 USB-cable (BD 600), 2 USB-cables (BD 606) • 1 remote control • Inductive stirring unit • BD 600: 6 sample bottles, 6 rubber gaskets, 6 stirring rods BD 606: 12 sample bottles, 12 rubber gaskets, 12 stirring rods • 1 overflow flask, 157 ml • 1 overflow flask, 428 ml • 1 bottle, 50 ml potassium hydroxide solution • 1 bottle, 50 ml nitrification inhibitor solution • 1 instruction Technical data: Meas. principle: Ranges (mg/l O2): Applications: Display: Measurement period: Auto result storage: Storage interval: Manometric; mercury-free; electronic pressure sensor 0 – 40, 0 – 80, 0 – 200, 0 – 400, 0 – 800, 0 – 2000, 0 – 4000 mg/l BOD5, BOD7, OECD 301F 128 × 240 pixel, 45 × 84 mm backlit User-selectable, between 1 and 28 days up to 372 (BD 600) or 744 (BD 606) results hourly on the first day every 2 hours on the second day once a day from the third day following Automatic start funciton: After temperature equalisation of samples; Power supply: Interface: Clock: Protection class: Dimensions L×W×H: Weight: Housing: Approval: Can be switched off 3 alkaline-manganese batteries (“Baby” cells/size “C”) or via power supply unit using y-cable togehter with stirring unit USB host port (USB stick) USB device port (computer) SD card Real-time clock IP 54 (sensor head) 375 × 181 × 230 mm including stirring unit 4100 g, unit with bottles and batteries 5775 g, complete with stirring unit ABS CE Article BOD-measurement system BD 600 BOD-measurement system BD 606 Accessories Order No. 10 77 14460 10 77 14465 Article Order No. BOD sample bottle, brown glass, 500 ml 10 77 18644 BOD sample bottle, brown glass, 500 ml, set of 6 bottles 10 77 18645 Stirring rod 10 77 18637 Stirring rod remover 10 77 18638 Rubber gasket 10 77 18636 Potassium hydroxide solution 45%, 50 ml 10 77 18634 Nitrification inhibitor, 50 ml 10 77 18642 Complete set Overflow flasks 10 77 18654 System check 10 77 18328 System check set, BOD CM test tablets, box with 10 tablets 1040

1042

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWSE2021 BOD Determination BOD measuring device BD 600 GLP, Lovibond® • Good Laboratory Practice compliant • For OECD 301F and BOD testing • Protected life time data memory (1 GB) • Extended measurement duration up to 90 days possible The BD 600 is a respirometric system for the determination of Biochemical Oxygen De- mand (BOD). Save time, reduce the potential for errors and easily interpret data to help make process control decisions for your plant. Technical data: large, backlit graphic display Display: Interface: USB External memory: USB Internal memory: Power supply: 1 GB or up to 50,000 measuring/adjustment data 100 – 240 V / 50 – 60 Hz 3 alkali-manganese batteries (Baby cells/ size C) no Auto – OFF: Measuring principle: manometric; mercury-free; electronic pressure sensor Measuring range: Clock: Measurement time: user-selectable, between 1 and 28 days Portability: Autostart: Compliance: 0–40, 0–80, 0–200, 0–400, 0-800, 0–2000, 0–4000 mg/l real time clock and date benchtop false CE EMC according to DIN EN 61326 IP 53 181 × 230 × 375 mm approx. 4100 g (unit with bottles & batteries 5775 g, complete with stirring unit) Protection class: Dimensions: Weight: Article BOD measuring device BD 600 GLP Order No. 10 77 14461 COD Determination COD Workstations, Behr Model PA-CSB COD sample digestor systems Equipment configuration for simultaneous digestion of up to 6 or 12 COD samples ac- cording to EN/DEV and ISO 6060. Systems consist of the following components: • Microprocessor-controlled TRS 300 time/temperature regulator with COD program • Precision heating block CSB/E for RG2 vessels • Holding frame E/B for RG2 sample vessels • Cooling bath KW/N with mounting for E/B frame • Sample vessels RG 2 • Air-cooled condensers LK 1 • Condenser stand LS for LK condensers Article PA-CSB 6 COD digestor system for up to 6 simultaneous samples 1 PA-CSB 12 COD digestor system for up to 12 simultaneous samples Order No. 80 48 80000 80 48 80001 co d e b e w WWXKS013 1 Model PB-CSB/M for complete COD analysis Complete workstations for simultaneous determination of up to 6 or 12 COD samples according to EN/DEV and ISO 6060. Manual reagent addition and titration. A workstation consists of the following: • Microprocessor-controlled TRS 300 time/temperature regulator with COD program • Precision heating block CSB/E for RG 2 vessels • Holding frame E/B for RG 2 sample vessels • Cooling bath KW/N with mounting for E/B frame • Multi-position magnetic stirrer SM 12/N to fit vessel frame E 12/B (only with PB-CSB 12/M) • Sample vessels RG 2 • Set of 12 magnetic stirrer bars MRST 2 • Boiling chips SIST 100, 100 g • COD air-cooled condenser LK 1 • Condenser stand LS for LK condensers • Set of 12 PTFE std. taper joint sleeves PTFE 29 • Transport carrier TS CSB for vessel frame E/B • Manual titration station HT 1 Article PB-CSB 6/M Complete COD workstation for up to 6 simultaneous samples 2 PB-CSB 12/M Complete COD workstation for up to 12 simultaneous samples Order No. 80 48 80002 80 48 80003 2 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1041

1043

Special Analysis Water, Environment COD Determination COD heating blocks only in conjunction with controller TRS 300 Precision heating blocks for 6, 12, or 24 samples. Surface heating for particularly even temperature distribution over all sample positions. Enclosure made of powder-coated steel and stainless steel. Non-hazardous temperatures of the enclosure surface thanks to the sophisticated insulation of the heating block. Continuous grooves in the floors of the bores simplify sample handling and increase user safety: • The grooves provide pressure compensation when the sample vessels are inserted. Thus, even precisely fitting vessels are easy to insert in the bores for user-friendly han- dling of the vessel frame. • Traces of fluids on the outer walls of the sample vessels evaporate instantly when the samples are inserted into the heated block. The grooves discharge the steam and pre- vent glass breakage as a consequence of cracked vessels. • In case of vessel overflow, the sample will flow off through the grooves, reducing the risk of acid damaging the heating block. Technical data: Sample positions: Maximum temperature: Power consumption: CSB 6/E 6 299°C 800 W CSB 12/E 12 299°C 1500 W CSB 24/E 24 299°C 2000 W Article CSB 6/E COD acc. to ISO Precision heating block thermostat for 6 test Order No. 10 48 21006 tubes RG, 20 – 300°C 1 CSB 12/E COD acc. to ISO Precision heating block thermostat for 12 test tubes RG, 20 – 300°C CSB 24/E COD acc. to ISO Precision heating block thermostat for 24 test 10 48 21012 10 48 21024 tubes RG, 20 – 300°C Programmable Temperature and Time Controller TRS 300 Programmable controller for behrotest® digestion blocks behr single-button operation for particularly fast and easy programming. Menu in local language. 10 freely configurable programs for block temperature and digestion time. The TRS 300 has a special, factory preset CSB program (chemical oxygen demand of water/ COD). In CSB/COD mode, it heats to a temperature 20°C above the specified setpoint temperature. After sample insertion, the setpoint temperate increased by 20°C is retained for another 6 minutes. This procedure ensures compliance with the ISO specification of heating to 148°C within 10 minutes, and simultaneously provides for an extremely con- stant temperature during the subsequent reaction process. With the Windows software comprised in the delivery, the user can transmit application-specific time/temperature profiles through the RS232 interface bi-directionally between one or several units (TRS 300) and one PC. Furthermore, the RS232 interface allows for transmission of temperature data from the unit to the PC while the unit is operating. If required, the data may be saved and printed out in form of a diagram. In case of short-circuits or temperature sensor failure, the connected units will be switched off by means of the integrated safety functions. Article 2 TRS 300 Temperature and time controller, microprocessor-controlled Order No. 10 48 20300 unit, up to 10 temperature-and-time combinations can be pro- grammed behrotest® Manual Titration Station HTI 1 The manual titration station HT1 consists of • a burette with digital display, and • a magnetic stirrer with accurately frame for COD sample vessels. A screen is used as a neutral background, allowing the user an accurate identification of the color change at the end of titration. Thus, the user carries out all titrations under sim- ilar optical conditions, increasing the accuracy and reproducibility of the results. The exact positioning of the sample vessel in the rack on the top of the magnetic stirrer also con- tributes to this result. The inclined side panels of the screen provide an additional protec- tion from lateral glare. COD pursuant to ISO, EN, and DEV. Technical data: Voltage: Frequency: Weight: Dimensions in cm (W × D × H): 230 V AC/115 V AC 50/60 Hz approx. 3.5 kg approx. 33 × 20 × 60 Article 3 HTI 1 Manual titration station, with digital burette and magnetic stirrer Order No. 10 48 30300 Continued on next page 3 1 2 1042

1044

Special Analysis Water, Environment COD Determination Boiling Stones behrotest® boiling stones are made from a ceramic material. Compared to conventional boiling stones made of glass, they provide optimum protection against defervescence due to their porosity and their shape, even with badly blended samples. behrotest® boiling stones are chemically pure and guarantee unadulterated results when determining the COD. Article 4 Boiling stones, content 100 g Order No. 80 48 30700 Automatic COD Metering Unit DS 20 Metering unit to automate and accelerate the metering of potassium chromate solution and sulphuric acid when preparing COD samples. Metering in a maximum of 12 samples simultaneously. Integrated series magnetic stirrer with 12 sample places. • Metering in optimal time intervals: The metering of sulphuric acid is carried out in sev- eral processes, the samples are thus constantly cooled and stirred. This method accel- erates the preparation of samples and at the same time prevents non-standard over- heating of the samples during addition • Safety for the user: Due to the automatic addition of reagent there is no risk at any time of coming into contact with chemicals • Practice-oriented and user friendly software: The complete programming of the behr DS 20 is very easy to use and user-friendly with the Windows user interface Article 5 DS 20 for up to 12 samples simultaneously, incl. burettes and cooling trough Order No. 10 48 24402 Fully automatic metering unit/titrator DT 20 Dosing: Time-optimized COD interval dosing. The metering of sulphuric acid is carried out in several processes, the samples are thus constantly cooled and stirred. This method pro- vides for faster sample preparation while preventing a non-standard overheating of sam- ples during addition. Titration: Freely programmable “methods”, f.e. end point titrations, equivalence point titrations, lin- ear, dynamic, and quasi-dynamic titrations. Different, password-protected user levels. Graphic printout with 1st and 2nd derivative. Freely selectable printout of sample data. Compliance with all national COD standards is possible with the “methods”. Instead of the commonly known over-titration, the behr-specific dynamic titration guarantees the exact end-point recognition, even in the case of the typical COD edge steepness, and thus particularly accurate test results. Safety for the user: Due to the automatic addition of reagent there is no risk at any time of coming into contact with chemicals. • Practice-oriented and user friendly software: The complete programming of the behr DS 20 is very easy to use and user-friendly with the Windows user interface. Order No. 10 48 24420 Article 6 DT 20 Fully automated dispensing and titration for COD specification pursuant to ISO. Simultaneous dispensing and titration in maxi- mum 12 samples. Automatic extraction of the titrated samples. Particularly easy and user-friendly operation with Microsoft Win- dows user interface with Access database for further processing of sample data. COD cooling trough The cooling trough prevents the overheating of the COD samples during the critical addi- tion of sulphuric acid. In addition, it is used to cool the samples after the heating phase. COD acc. to ISO, EN and DEV. Article Cooling trough for E 6/B insert frame Cooling trough for E 12/B insert frame Cooling trough for 2 E 12/BV insert frames Stands for 6 COD air coolers LS 6 Stands for 12 COD air coolers LS 12 Order No. 10 48 30042 10 48 30043 10 48 30044 10 48 30001 Insert frame for 6 vessels E 6/B 10 48 30002 Insert frame for 6 vessels E 12/B Insert frame for COD 24/E and autom. COD dosing/titrator unit E 12/BV 10 48 30003 10 48 30051 10 48 30052 Series magnetic stirrer for COD cooling trough The continuously adjustable COD series magnetic stirrer with 12 stirring points is used to mix the samples during the metering process. Due to its watertight casing and also its external power supply and control, it is suitable for use under water. 4 5 6 Article Series magnetic stirrer for E 12/B insert frame Order No. 80 48 30048 Continued on next page co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1043

1045

Special Analysis Water, Environment 2 1 co d e b e w WWSE2004 3 4 5 6 7 1044 COD Determination COD metering funnel The COD dosing funnel is placed on top of the COD reaction vessels. It simplifies the si- multaneous addition of sulphuric acid to several samples. Combined with a cooling trough and a serial magnetic stirrer, it greatly improves safety and reliability and significantly eases the user’s workload. Article 1 Metering funnel, 30 ml, for sulphuric acid HCI-absorber To expel chloride, e.g. when determining the COD of sea water. Article 2 HCL absorber to expel chloride above 1000 mg/ltr. (without stopper) Order No. 80 48 30200 Order No. 80 48 30071 MD 200 COD Vario Setup, Lovibond® Lovibond® MD 200 COD Vario Setup With the COD setup by Lovibond® , the meaningful waste water parameter COD (chemical oxygen demand) can be accurately and quickly determined in compliance with ISO 15705. Because the setup is so easy to operate, also new users will be able to carry out the low- cost analysis of the COD value. The setup comprises the photometer, 25 cuvette tests each of the two lower measuring ranges (0 to 150 mg/l and 0 to 1,500 mg/l), the thermo- reactor RD 125, and a cuvette rack. Technical data of MD 200: Meas. cycle: Display: Optics: Power supply: approx. 3 seconds LCD display Highly precise interference filter 4 AA batteries, up to 53 hrs. operation or 15,000 measure- ments in continuous operation with display illumination off 16 data records IR interface for transmission of measured data Memory: Interface: Article COD measuring station AMD 200 COD Vario 3 MD 200 COD, tube tests Order No. 10 77 12603 10 77 12503 Cell Tests • Performing highly sensitive tests • Optimized test safety • Fast and easy • Special optical glass Lovibond® tube tests enable the user to easily perform highly sensitive and precise water testing. When using tube tests measurement is considerably faster and easier, particularly in the case of standard and serial tests. The tube tests contain a precisely measured amount of reagent, thereby avoiding the presence of superfluous chemicals and optimising test safety. Article 4 COD cuvette test 0 to 150mg/l O2 5 COD cuvette test 0 to 1500mg/l O2 6 COD cuvette test 0 to 15000mg/l O2 7 CSB cuvette test VARIO LMR 15 to 300 mg/l Pack of 25 vials Order No. 80 77 20720 80 77 20721 80 77 20722 10 77 13120 PU pc/Pack 25 25 25 25 Lovibond® Ther more ac tor RD 125 Thermoreactor for the chemical digestion of cuvette samples (COD, total chromium, total phosphate, total nitrogen, and TOC). Temperature settings and selection of reaction time via membrane keyboard. The reactor has three temperature ranges (100 / 120 / 150°C) and three pre-programmed reaction times (30 / 60 / 120 min). After completion of the di- gestion, the reactor switches off automatically, indicated by an LED plus an acoustic signal. The thermoreactor RD 125 is fitted with 24 holes for 16 mm diameter vials. Article Thermo reactor RD 125 Order No. 10 77 10125

1046

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWSE2023 co d e b e w WWSE2024 Residue Analysis Dipslides, Lovibond® • Determine aerobic and anaerobic bacteria levels • Early indication of bacteria proliferation • Results in 48 hours • Inexpensive Guidelines to advise on the correct practices to control legionella bacteria in water sys- tems exist worldwide. Suppressing bacteria levels does substantially reduce the possibil- ity of an outbreak of this often fatal disease. Guidelines recommend introducing a moni- toring and control program. This program includes the testing of cooling tower waters with dipslides on a regular basis. A full range of dipslides is available for semiquantitative determination of aerobic and anaerobic bacteria populations in industrial and recreational waters. Dipslide accuracy is limited due to the small sample size, but if used correctly and incubated at a constant temperature using the Lovibond® dipslide incubator, they are excellent for trend analysis and can give an early indication of bacteria proliferation. Article D001 TTC/TTC Dipslides D002 TTC/MALT Dipslides D003 TTC/RBS Dipslides (Rose Bengal) D004 TTC/MAC Dipslides (Macconkey) D005 TTC/Chromogenic Dipslides D006 Pseudomonas (PDM)/MAC Dipslides D007 Pseudomonas (PDM)/TTC Dipslides D008 SRB Tube Test D009 NRB Tube Test D011 R2A/R2A Dipslides Order No. 10 77 10110 10 77 10210 10 77 10310 10 77 10410 10 77 10510 10 77 10611 10 77 10710 10 77 10810 10 77 10910 10 77 11110 PU pc/Pack 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 DI 10 Dipslide Incubator, Lovibond® • Robust design • Holds up to 12 dipslides or 10 quanti-discs • Excellent temperature stability • In-car operation The Lovibond® DI 10 Incubator is designed for the reliable incubation of bacteriological slides, on-site, in a laboratory or even while mobile in a car or van. National and European guidelines give practical advice on how to monitor, clean, test and ultimately control harmful legionella bacteria in water systems. Dipslides provide a crucial part in the testing program, but must be used correctly and regularly as part of a planned regime, week on week to be of any meaningful value. The incubation period and the incubation temperature should be the same each time the test is performed so that bacteria growth is controlled and consistent each time the test is performed. This allows for week by week comparisons to be made and high counts easier to identify. Dipslides are usually incubated at 30˚C for 48 hours, but this can vary depending upon the specific application. The Lovibond® DI 10 Incubator, when used in conjunction with dipslides, enables effective microbiological monitoring of cooling water in accordance with the many European guide- lines. The DI 10 Incubator is also part of the Lovibond® Marine Test Kit for the monitoring of other potable water contaminants, such as pseudomonas, streptococci coliforms & E.coli, see page 24 for more information. Technical data: Display: Power supply: Dimensions: Weight: Article DI 10 Dipslide incubator 1 × 16 bit backlit LCD 12 V / 110 V / 240 V 246 × 215 × 162 mm 1.7 kg Order No. 10 77 10701 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1045

1047

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWSE2025 1 co d e b e w WWXKS034 2 1046 Residue Analysis ValidChecks, Lovibond® • Ready-to-use solutions • Exactly adjusted concentrations • Adapted to special applications • Multistandards with top-up solution The quality assurance of analytical procedures is a prerequisite for reliable water analysis. With the new ValidCheck Standard solutions, the user has ready-to-use solutions for this task. The exactly adjusted concentrations are adapted to the respective application. The dilution is omitted. With the ValidCheck Multistandards, the user can immediately check all the important analytical methods of an application with one product: anions and metals in the drinking water analysis or the analysis of the wastewater treatment and process. In addition, the multistandards contain a top-up solution with which the influences of the sample matrix on the analysis result can be reliably determined. Article ValidCheck ammonium 0.1 mg/l, 250 ml ValidCheck ammonium 0.5 mg/l, 250 ml ValidCheck ammonium 2 mg/l, 250 ml ValidCheck ammonium 20 mg/l, 250 ml ValidCheck aluminium 0.05 mg/l, 250 ml ValidCheck aluminium 0.2 mg/l, 250 ml ValidCheck boron 0.5 mg/l, 250 ml ValidCheck boron 1.5 mg/l, 250 ml Column Elution Units, Behr Order No. 10 77 11125 10 77 11225 10 77 11425 10 77 11725 10 77 13125 10 77 13325 10 77 16325 10 77 16425 behrotest® column elution unit for the elution of soil samples Column elution unit in acc. with the LUA recommendation with 4-channel hose pump with controllable speed. The unit consists of : • Assembly stand for the system • Controllable 4-channel hose pump with adjustable speed • Storage vessel, 20 l • 4 elution columns, internal diameter 6 cm, 32 cm long, with 2 screwed joints (GL 45, with Teflon inserts) for simple filling of the columns • 4 collection bottles for the column eluate, 2 l, with screwed joint (GL 45) and deaeration • Supply tube made of TYGON and PVC, with non-return valve in the supply to the column • Teflon tubes between columns and collection vessels • Flow rate 0.003 to 35 ml/min • Range of speed 2 to 100 min-1 • Simultaneous control of all 4 channels Article 1 Column elution unit SEB 32 R Order No. 80 48 86100 behrotest® compact equipment for elution of solid matters Percolation equipment to jointly examine the elution behaviour of inorganic and organic substances in solid matters. Including hose pump with 2 channels and 2 different pump tubes for a flow rate of 0.25 – 12 ml/min. and 0.66 – 33 ml/min. (Other pump tubes upon request). Complete equipment, consisting of • Percolation column with pre-filters on sturdy stands • Storage bottle with cap and tube • Tube • Eluate lead made of PTFE • Storage vessel made of glass, cap with ventilation tube Article Complete equipment type KEB for elution of solid matters for one sample with GS 950 glass co- lumn, incl. two-channel hose pump and 2 tubes for different flow rates Add-on unit type KEBE for elution of solid matters for one sample with GS 950 glass co- lumn, without hose pump, incl. 2 pump tubes for different flow rates 2 Complete equipment type KEB 101 for elution of solid matters for one sample with GS 101 large glass column, incl. hose pump and 2 tubes for different flow rates Add-on unit type KEBE 101 for elution of solid matters for one sample with GS 101 large glass column, without hose pump, incl. 2 tubes for different flow rates Glass column GS 950, 60 × 320 mm Order No. 10 48 86020 10 48 86016 10 48 86021 10 48 86022 10 48 86002 Continued on next page

1048

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWXKS023 Residue Analysis Article Glass column GS 101, 90 × 500 × 5 mm, thread GL 100 Tube set SRR, 4 pump tubes made of Tygon Flow rate of 0.25 – 12 ml/min Tube set SVV, 4 pump tubes made of Tygon Flow rate of 0,66 – 33 ml/min Order No. 10 48 86019 10 48 86017 10 48 86018 Waste Water Analysis Distilling Systems, behrotest®, Behr behrotest® distilling apparatuses for determination of the phenol index by the DIN/ DEV 38409-H16-2 method DIN/DEV requires the distillation of a large amount of liquid within a short time for the determination of the phenol index. The behrotest® WE 5 five-output steam generator can supply a maximum of 5 samples simultaneous for fast and gentle distillation. Steam input into the samples guarantees uniform distillation and high reproducibility of retrieval rates over the entire range. The five-output linear steam generator with central water supply and level control was specially developed for this application. Article Complete distilling apparatus for the determination of phenols 5 place Order No. 10 48 91229 Supplied without the illustrated accessories Mud Analyzers, Behr Laboratory treatment systems to the determination of biodegradability, Behr for example for the coupled units test acc. to OECD 303 A, complete Optional: De-nitrification stage with pumps and stirrers Oxygen regulator, consisting of • oxygen measurement unit for pre-treatment with voltage output to turn the supply of air on and off • behrotest GWS 200 limit switch. Operating range 0 – 200%, corresponds to 0 – 19.9 mg/l. O D E C B E W WWXKS019 Article KA 1 Laboratory treatment system made of 3.3 borosilicate glass, complete apparatus Article KLD 4 Laboratory treatment system with de-nitrification stage, vessels made of 3.3 borosilica- Order No. 80 48 62003 Order No. 80 48 62001 te glass, complete apparatus Article 1 KA 1/SR Laboratory treatment system vessels made of 3.3 borosilicate glass, with oxygen sup- Order No. 80 48 62005 ply regulation, vessels made of 3.3 borosilicate glass, complete apparatus Article 2 KLD 4/SR Laboratory treatment system with de-nitrification stage and oxygen supply regulation, Order No. 80 48 62006 vessels made of 3.3 borosilicate glass, complete apparatus Article KLD 4N Laboratory treatment system with de-nitrification stage and continuous mud return as Order No. 80 48 62007 1 defined in DIN 38412-L 41 (proposal), vessels made of 3.3 borosilicate glass, complete apparatus Article KLD 4N/SR Laboratory treatment system with de-nitrification stage, continuous mud return as defi- Order No. 80 48 62008 2 ned in DIN 38412-L 41 (proposal) and oxygen supply regulation as defined in DIN 38412-L 41 (proposal), vessels made of 3.3 borosilicate glass, complete apparatus Other versions upon request. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1047

1049

Special Analysis Water, Environment 1 co d e b e w WWXKS011 co d e b e w WWXKS020 2 3 4 1048 Waste Water Analysis Waste Water Mixer, Behr behrotest® homogenizers Homogenizers behrotest® With transportable sample vessels. Homogenizers for pretreatment, sample splitting and homogenization of heterogeneous water samples in accordance with German waste-water quality control standards. The sample vessels are protected against damage by the homogenizer frame, which has two handles for easy carrying. A flattened inlet facilitates on-site filling. Sample vessel volumes from 5 to 25 l permit multiple sample collection (mixed samples). A graduated scale is provided for easy measurement of sample volume. Later in the laboratory or sampling vehicle the transport frame is simply placed on the magnetic stirrer for the homogenizer to be ready for instant use. The speed of the mag- netic stirrer is adjustable. This ensures that the user complies with the specified speed at all times. Oxygen input into the samples is thus prevented. Withdrawal of the desired volume of homogenized sample is assured by a PTFE stopcock. Article QMR 5 1 QMR 15 QMR 20 QMR 25 Capacity l 5 15 20 25 * with adapter for mains connection Voltage V 12* 12* 12* 12* Order No. 80 48 65000 80 48 65001 80 48 65002 80 48 65010 Apparatus for Waste Water Analysis, Behr Tenside blowoff device for determination of methylene blue and bismuth active substances A complete device consists of stand, transverse supports, mountings, gas washing bot- tles, volumetric flow meters and tenside blowoff columns. Article Complete apparatus with 3 tenside blow-out columns Holding 1 liter, plus accessories Tenside blowoff column, 1 l Order No. 80 48 00103 80 48 00111 behrotest® distillation apparatus for determination of inorganic total combined flouride As defined in DIN 38405-D4-2. The complete apparatus is mounted on a stable laborato- ry stand. A contact thermometer and relay heating control makes the unit suitable for large analysis series. The apparatus is made up of the following: • distillation device made of borosilicate glass for water vapor - acid • NS 14/23 standard ground contact thermometer • heating hood for distilling flask • round flask, nominal volume 1000 ml • volumetric flask, nominal volume 500 ml Article 2 behrotest® distillation apparatus Order No. 10 48 00320 Compact distillation apparatus for cyanide determination Complete compact systems for cyanide determination. With base frame, heater, flow meter(s), tubing and glass apparatus. Article 3 Distillation apparatus KCM 1 Complete decomposition and separation apparatus with mag- Order No. 10 48 00525 netic stirrer for cyanide determination behrotest® CN 6 complete decomposition and separation apparatus for determi- ning total cyanide Decomposition and separation apparatus for determining total cyanide in a maximum of 6 rounded or flat bottom vessels simultaneously. Simultaneous heating and stirring using an integrated magnetic stirrer with adjustable 4-speed RPM setting. Article 4 behrotest® CN 6 Infrared rapid digression system CN4-IR Order No. 10 48 40000 80 48 50000 Apparatus for determination of organic content water Article Separator for separating organic extract according to Order No. 80 48 00201 DIN 38406 Continued on next page

1050

Special Analysis Water, Environment Waste Water Analysis Microseparators for determining Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbon in drinking water Article According to DIN 38409 H 13-2, standard joint NS 14 According to DIN 38409 H 13-3, standard joint NS 29 Reducing flask, 100 ml With cylindrical neck, for determination of Polycyclic Aromatic Order No. 80 48 00220 80 48 00225 10 48 00221 Hydrocarbons Microseparator for determining slightly volatile halogen hydrocarbons Order No. 80 48 00230 Article According to DIN 38407 F 4, standard joint NS 19 Article 5 behrotest® funnel separator MSE 29 For isolation of lipophilic substances from water using liquid phase extraction. Com- Order No. 80 48 00380 bines the advantages of a microseparator and a separating funnel. The design of the behrotest® funnel separator facilitates simple, clean separation of the phases or the emulsion. The entire organic phase can easily be transferred in the remo- vable separator funnel top for further processing. 5 6 behrotest® sample preparation devices used during determination of the hydro- carbon index According to ISO 9377-4 (also DEV H 53 in Germany). behrotest® PFL sampling bottles are ideal for direct extraction as defined in the stand- ard. The bottles with glass stoppers offer advantages in terms of handling and safety. The behrotest® funnel separator facilitates separation of the organic phase. The various functional groups of the system can be separated. This allows the user to simply and quickly transfer the organic phase in one step to a clean-up column. It also makes it easy to clean the individual functional groups. Article 6 EX 1000 Extraction units including a 1000 ml sampling bottle, solid glass topper, 60 ml funnel se- Order No. 80 48 00202 parator. The behrotest® clean-up column with glass frit fully conforms to the requirements of the new ISO 9377-4 standard. The practical dual stand provides firm support for two complete clean-up units with dropping funnel, clean-up column and Kuderna-Danish flask. The unit lets you perform the complete clean-up step on two samples simultaneously without interruption caused by time-consuming maniupulation of equipment or samples. Article 7 CUS 2 Station for simultaneous clean-up of 2 samples, consisting of a stand, 2 graduated 100 Order No. 80 48 00203 ml evaporation flasks, 2 clean-up columns, pore diameter 2. On the behrotest® nitrogen station, a manifold guides the nitrogen stream via two indi- vidually adjustable flow regulators into the Kuderna-Danish flask. Thus, two samples can be evaporated simultaneously using the ISO 9377-4 method. Article 8 KOSTA Determination of the hydrocarbon index as defined in ISO 9377-4 or DIN/DEV 38409 - H 53: Nitrogen station for simultaneous evaporative concentration of 2 samples. The nitro- gen flow can be individually adjusted for each sample. Order No. 80 48 00204 8 7 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1049

1051

Special Analysis Water, Environment co d e b e w WWSE2026 co d e b e w WWQVD156 Waste Water Analysis Waste Water Set-Up MD 610, Lovibond® • Mobile photometer MD 610 • Memory space for 500 measuring results • Data transfer via Bluetooth® and App AquaLX® • Thermal reactor RD 125 with holes for 24 cuvettes Your daily routine monitoring requires you to be able to react fast 24/7, no matter where you are? With the mobile photometer MD 610, you can call up, evaluate and share with your team the results of your waste water measurements on your smartphone or tablet. The interference filters ensure better reproducibility of the results. 120 pre-programmed methods and memory space for approx. 500 measured values give you added flexibility for your routine tasks. As a one-top complete waste water setup, the thermal reactor RD 125 with 24 holes for 16-mm cuvettes complete with suitable reagents for CSB measure- ment and matching accessories helps you to save time and money. Technical data: Auto – OFF Portability Compliance Yes Benchtop CE Article Waste water set-up MD 610 Order No. 10 77 14110 Eudiometer, Rettberg Eudiometer for monitoring of the fermentation process of slurries, DIN 38414, and of biodegradability at constant temperatures under anaerobic conditions. Article Eudiometer, complete unit Complete unit with 6 measuring units made of borosilicate glass 3.3. High gas imper- meability. With septa for taking gas samples. Stainless steel rack for accommodating the measuring units and the maintenance-free stirring drive. Telemodule control for the stirring points. Immersion thermostat for temperature control of the water bath, with di- gital temperature display. Bath made of plexiglas. Order No. 13 70 11006 Technical data: Measuring points: Eudiometer tube: Storage vessel: Level vessel: Power supply: Dimensions (L × W × H): Weight: Temperature range: 6 0 to 150 ml in 1 ml increments 250 ml approx. 350 ml 230 V, 50-60 Hz approx. 650×340×600 mm approx. 24 kg up to +50°C (up to +95°C on request) Article Eudiometer unit according to DIN 38414 - Part 8 made of borosilicate glass 3.3, without stirring unit, temperature control, rack and bath Technical data: Order No. 13 70 11008 1 × eudiometer tube: 1 × storage vessel: 1 × level vessel: 0 to 400 ml in 5 ml increments 500 ml 1000 ml Without the pictured accessories. 1050

1052

Special Analysis Water, Environment Waste Water Analysis Calcimeter according to Scheibler Method, Behr For the determination of the calcium carbonate content according to ISO 10963, e.g. in farmland. in viniculture, in pomiculture, etc. Article Calcimeter, 1 sample place Calcimeter, 5 sample places Series magnetic stirrer, for calcimeter with 5 sample places Order No. 10 48 07682 10 48 06545 10 48 06546 co d e b e w WWXKS052 Flocculators, LAT Flocculation tests have been developed for a series of applications, such as testing the efficiency of flocculation or precipitation agents. The portable unit is intended for mobile operation with battery or 12 V power supply. The units of the JLT and FC series offer re- producible results for four or six parallel samples over a wide speed range. 1 Portable flocculator FP4 Technical data: No. of stirring places: 4 Speed: Lighting: Dimensions: Weight: Power consumption: 6 W 20-40-50-100-200 rpm central 250 × 320 × 250 mm 4.8 kg Article Portable flocculator FP4 JLT 4 Flocculators JLT series Technical data: No. of stirring places: 4 10–300 rpm Speed: 0–999 min/0–99 h Timer: background Lighting: 645 × 347 × 260 mm Dimensions: Weight: 13 kg Power consumption: 11 W Article Flocculator JLT4 Flocculator JLT6 Order No. 10 20 16004 JLT 6 6 10–300 rpm 0–999 min/0–99 h background 935 × 347 × 260 mm 17 kg 19 W Order No. 10 20 16104 10 20 16106 2 Flocculators with independent positions – FCS series co d e b e w WWW4U080 1 2 FC6S 6 independent positions 10-15-30-45-60-90-120- 150-200 rpm continuously background 935 × 347 × 260 mm 18 kg 23 W Order No. 10 20 16204 10 20 16206 Technical data: No. of stirring places: 4 independent positions Speed: FC4S 10-15-30-45-60-90-120- 150-200 rpm continuously background 645 × 347 × 260 mm 12.5 kg Timer: Lighting: Dimensions: Weight: Power consumption: 18 W Article Flocculator FC4S Flocculator FC6S co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1051

1053

Special Analysis Medical Investigations Blood Investigation, Capillary Pipettes Devices for Blood Sedimentation Tests, Hecht-ASSISTENT Blood sedimentation devices made of stainless steel, MAKRO With tilting device for rapid sedimentation Complete with: • blood sedimentation pipettes • pipette protection caps • blood mixing vessels with rubber plugs • special rubber caps • operating instructions in the individual box Pipettes with fused graduation “ASSISTENT-PERMANENT”. Article Blood sedimentation device with 3 pipettes Blood sedimentation device with 5 pipettes Blood sedimentation device with 10 pipettes Order No. 19 18 34703 19 18 34705 19 18 34710 Hemoglobin pipette, Hecht-ASSISTENT CE Hemoglobin pipettes, Sahli type, 20 µl Conformity certified, CE White back, fused amber graduation ASSISTENT-PERMANENT, calibrated to contain = In, (hemoglobin pipettes). Available with individual certificate on request. Tolerance: Packaging: Length: Volume 0.4 µl 10 pieces/box approx. 12.5 cm calibrated to Order No. µl 20 IN Length mm 125 19 18 38412 1 2 Blood Diluting Pipettes, Hecht-ASSISTENT Blood diluting pipettes, Thoma type, CE version. Graduation 1 0.5 : 1 : 11 2 0.5 : 1 : 101 Increments List of contents 3 3 1 : 10 1 : 100 for Leukocytes Erythrocytes Order No. 19 18 35870 19 18 35670 co d e b e w WW4ZV052 minicaps - Disposable Micro Pipettes DURAN, Hirschmann Minicaps are disposable capillary pipettes with the end-to-end system. They fill up automatically end-to-end by capillary action. This generally rules out individual setting errors. Minicaps are made in Germany from calibrated precision tubes using perfected cutting technology. Major advantages: • Correct filling • User-friendly, color-coded vial cap • With declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, ISO 7550, CE acc. IVD 98/79 EG • Not heparinized 100 minicaps are packed in one dispenser, 10 dispensers plus one pipetting aid are packed in a stable carton box. Vol. Variation coeff. % µl 1.0 0.5 1.0 1 1.0 2 3 1.0 3.33 1.0 1.0 4 5 1.0 6.66 1.0 1.0 10 20 1.0 1.0 25 1.0 30 1.0 40 1.0 50 100 1.0 Accuracy % 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Order No. Dispenser in color code black blue red yellow yellow green white transparent orange black white yellow red green transparent 100 Length mm 30 – 32 19 37 10100 30 – 32 19 37 10101 30 – 32 19 37 10102 30 – 32 19 37 10103 19 37 10133 36 30 – 32 19 37 10104 30 – 32 19 37 10105 19 37 10166 72 30 – 32 19 37 10110 30 ±0.5 19 37 10120 30 – 32 19 37 10125 30 – 32 19 37 10130 30 ±0.5 19 37 10140 30 ±0.5 19 37 10150 19 37 10199 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1052

1054

Special Analysis Medical Investigations Blood Investigation, Capillary Pipettes ringcaps® - Disposable Micro-Pipettes, Hirschmann ringcaps® disposable capillary pipettes with an exact ring mark For the precise determination of volume. A broad color code enables fast, error free use even when things get hectic. At a glance. Major advantages: • No risk of cross-contamination • No cleaning costs • DURAN ® glass • Handy length of 125 mm • With declaration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, with batch number on packaging, acc. to IVD regulations and ISO 7550. 250 ringcaps in a practical round box with optimized removal arrangement. Ring mark at µl 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 5 + 10 1 10 20 25 20 + 40 50 + 100 100 100 + 200 Na-hep 44.7 40 44.7 50 Accuracy % 0.30 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 Variation coeff. % 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 Order No. 19 37 00101 19 37 00102 19 37 00103 19 37 00104 19 37 00105 19 37 00106 19 37 00107 19 37 00108 19 37 00109 19 37 00110 19 37 00111 19 37 00112 19 37 00113 PU pc/Box 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 100 250 Accessories Useful accessories for efficient working with ringcaps®: Article 2 micropipetter Pipetting aid for ringcaps®, complete with 2 adapters, for holding and emptying the ringcaps®, CE acc. to IVD 98/79 EC. Holder Simple bench-top holder for the micropipetter Order No. 19 37 00121 19 37 00123 1 2 co d e b e w WW4ZV053 Delbrück Capillaries end-to-end DURAN, Hirschmann End-to-end capillaries according to the Prof. Delbrück method, Na-heparinized, with dec- laration of conformity acc. to DIN 12600, with batch number on packaging, with CE mark, acc. to IVD regulations and ISO 7550. Unit pack 10 × 100 pieces. co d e b e w Volume µl 20 40 50 Variation coefficient % 1.0 1.0 1.0 Accuracy % 0.5 0.5 0.5 Length mm 30 30 30 Order No. PU pc/Pack 19 37 20301 19 37 20302 19 37 20303 1000 1000 1000 WW4ZV051 Disposable Hematocrit Tubes, Hirschmann Disposable hematocrit tubes for centrifuges, length 75 mm, wall thickness approx. 0.2 mm, with CE mark, acc. to IVD regulations and DIN EN ISO 12772, 100 packed in a clear-glass vial. Hematocrit tubes for single use, not heparinized, color-code blue, DIN EN ISO 12772, CE acc. IVD 98/79 EG 3 Outer Ø mm 1.3 – 1.4 1.42 – 1.68 Inner Ø mm 0.9 – 1.0 1.07 – 1.23 Nominal volume approx. µl 60 75 Order No. 19 37 30160 19 37 30175 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 Hematocrit tubes for single use, NA-heparinized, color-code red, DIN EN ISO 12772, CE acc. IVD 98/79 EG Outer Ø mm 1.3 – 1.4 1.42 – 1.68 Inner Ø mm 0.9 – 1.0 1.07 – 1.23 Nominal volume approx. µl 60 75 Order No. 19 37 30260 19 37 30275 PU pc/Pack 1000 1000 3 co d e b e w WW4ZV049 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1053

1055

Laboratory Facilities Work Aids CHAPTER OVERVIEW Work Aids 1054 Carts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054 Steps, Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057 Cleanroom Systems 1080 PCR-Werkbänke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080 Safety Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 Furniture 1057 Work Benches, Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057 Weighing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 Chairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064 Water Treatment 1081 Ion Exchanger Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081 Reverse Osmosis Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086 Ultrapure Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088 Protective Equipment 1066 Fume Hoods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066 Table and Filter Fume Extractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068 Safety Work Benches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070 Insulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072 Safety Cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076 Gas Supply 1095 Gas Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095 KNOWLEDGE Secure Storage in the Laboratory . . . . . . 1075 co d e b e w WW5PT070 2 1 3 1054 Carts Laboratory Cart, WINLAB® Extremely sturdy, versatile laboratory carts made of aluminum profile. High carrying capacity and sturdy design thanks to the highly stable aluminum profile with 40 mm high edges. The castor sets - two castors per cart can be locked - are likewise dimensioned for heavy loads (max. 125 kg per castor). The universal cart and the cart with PP top have a handle on the side for easy guiding. Custom-made carts with the dimensions of your choice are available! Select from the following variants: • Equipment and laboratory carts with polypropylene tops (PP) • Equipment and laboratory carts with melamine tops • Universal carts (replaceable baskets and/or transport tubs) 1 Equipment and laboratory transport carts with shelves made of polypropylene (PP) As PP is highly resistant to chemicals, this tabletop variant is particularly well suited for transporting laboratory materials. The tabletops are recessed in the frame so that an all- round border prevents the transported material from falling off. Carrying capacity of the cart: approx. 250 to 300 kg Overall height cm 75 75 90 Useful area width cm 65 75 95 Useful area depth cm 45 55 60 Order No. 10 03 10201 10 03 10202 10 03 10203 2 Equipment and laboratory transport carts with shelves made of melamine This variant can be used in many laboratories for transporting equipment and lab materi- als as the tops are highly resistant to chemicals, comparable to the tops of laboratory furniture. Carrying capacity of the cart: approx. 250 to 300 kg Overall height cm 75 90 Useful area width cm 90 (1. shelf) 75 (2. shelf) 120 (1. shelf) 100 (2. shelf) Useful area depth cm 75 (1. shelf) 60 (2. shelf) 75 (1. shelf) 60 (2. shelf) Order No. 10 03 10221 10 03 10222 3 Universal cart For transport baskets made of coated wire and/or synthetic transport tubs (60 × 40 cm). Overall height Order No. 10 03 10231 Continued on next page cm 85 Useful area width cm 70 (outer) Useful area depth cm 50 (outer)

1056

Laboratory Facilities Work Aids Carts Baskets and tubs for universal cart Wire baskets with white synthetic coating, mesh width 8 mm, wire thickness 1 mm, basket size 60 × 40 cm, ideal for transporting laboratory glassware. Synthetic transport tubs (PP) with integrated handles, 60 x 40 cm. Article Wire basket Wire basket Tub Tub Tub Height cm 26 11 20 25 40 Volume approx. l 38 48 80 Order No. 10 03 10241 10 03 10242 10 03 10238 10 03 10248 10 03 10280 Wire Basket Cart, neoLab® Sturdy trolley made of plastic-coated steel tube, with two baskets. 4 casters with 10 cm Ø. Volume: Basket sizes (L × W): Load capacity per basket: 30 kg Upper basket 65 l Lower basket 24 l 60 × 40 cm Article Wire basket cart Length × Width × Height cm 73 × 41 × 85 (without handle) Weight kg 13.5 Order No. 38 01 27083 Laboratory carts, BOCHEM 1 Laboratory carts made of chromium-nickel steel Material No. 4301, fine ground surface, with 4 steering wheels, incl. 2 with locks, 40 kg max./plate Article Qty shelves Dimensions Cart Cart 2 3 mm 800 × 500 × 950 800 × 500 × 950 Load cap. max. kg 80 120 Order No. 38 05 11410 38 05 11411 Laboratory carts 3, demountable 2 steering wheels, with lock, Plate 800 × 500 mm, workload max. 25 kg per plate • Type 1: 2 plates • Type 2: 3plates Material Length Width Height 2 18/10 stainless steel 3 18/10 stainless steel mm 900 900 mm 600 600 mm 940 940 Workload max. per plate kg 25 25 Type Order No. 1 2 10 05 11430 10 05 11431 Laboratory carts 4 • Surface matt finish • Robust pushing handle • 2 guide and 2 fixed rolls • Type 1: collapsible • Type 2: fix Material Length Width Height 4 18/10 stainless steel 5 18/10 stainless steel mm 785 1000 mm 450 650 mm 850 850 Load capacity max. kg 300 300 Type Order No. 1 2 10 05 11417 10 05 11418 co d e b e w WW2NY323 co d e b e w WWQ7J061 1 2 3 Customized versions: The height of the various shelves can be manufactured to the customer’s instructions. 4 5 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1055

1057

Laboratory Facilities Work Aids Carts Transport Carts, Stainless Steel, neoLab® co d e b e w 1 Stainless steel transport carts with 2 to 4 shelves, easy to move on 4 rollers. Easy to clean. Also available on request in sterilizable version, including the rollers. Shelf dimensions (W × D): Load capacity: 800 × 500 mm 130 kg WW2NY163 Article 1 Stainless steel transport cart, 2 shelves Stainless steel transport cart, 3 shelves Stainless steel transport cart, 4 shelves Order No. 38 01 27075 38 01 27074 38 01 27073 Folding Carts, neoLab® The cart can quickly be opened or folded up be pressing a button on the handle. The two support shelves will hold quite a lot of weight. Hinged boxes can be transported on the top level. Integrated securing belts hold down the hinged boxes. The upper hinged shelf can be removed to transport large devices or glassware. Convenient rubber wheels and moveable rollers make the cart easy to push. Amazing maneuverability. The handle can be placed in the vertical position so that the cart will fit into very small elevators. Parking rake on the rear wheels. Sturdy construction featuring aluminum braces and high-grade plastics for long service life. Supplied with a hinged box. Technical data: Maximal load capacity Upper shelf: Lower shelf: Weight: 20 kg 40 kg 6,9 kg co d e b e w WW2NY251 Article Folding cart Folding box 46 l Width × Depth × Height cm 53 × 37 × 27 Order No. 38 01 27050 38 01 27051 co d e b e w WWXKS057 Laboratory Cart made from Stainless Steel, Behr behrotest® stainless steel laboratory cart with integrated transport and collection tray and 2 additional shelves. Article LW 3 behrotest® laboratory cart Order No. 10 48 13445 Laboratory Carts, LAT Strong frame made of stove-enameled profiled tube (95 cm total height, approx. 60 × 100 cm shelf area); robust, lockable castors; 2 or 3 shelves with raised edges. Optionally available with electrical connection, 3 socket-outlets with earthing contacts and 5 m cable. On request also available without raised edges - please specify in your order. Color: light gray, RAL 4035. WWW4U038 Article Laboratory cart VWL 30 with 2 shelves Laboratory cart VWL 40 with 3 shelves Order No. 38 20 14030 38 20 14040 co d e b e w 1056

1058

Laboratory Facilities Work Aids / Furniture co d e b e w WW2NY150 1 2 Steps, Ladders Safety Stepladder, neoLab® Safety stepladder made of aluminium, TÜV-certified. Extra wide steps (36 x 23 cm) with rounded edges. A nonslip synthetic material coating guarantees a safe standing. The plastic feets have a large seating. Model with 4 and 5 steps have a folding safety gripper. The stepladders getting extremely small when folded. Measures in the list referring to the stowing away measurements. Version 2 steps 3 steps 4 steps, safety strap 5 steps, safety strap stand height m 0.46 0.69 0.92 1.15 H × W × D cm 54,5 × 48,5 × 8 112 × 55 × 7 143 × 57 × 12 174 × 57 × 12 Order No. 36 01 26622 36 01 26620 36 01 26621 36 01 26623 Work Benches, Cabinets Laboratory Benches/Tables, Köttermann Tables with rollers • Width 900 mm to 1800 mm • Depth 600 mm and 750 mm • Work heights of 750 mm (sitting workstation) and 900 mm (standing workstation) • Carrying capacity 100 kg per table • Tabletop: TopResist® and laboratory-grade HPL • 1 shelf W mm Order No. D mm H mm 1 900 600 750 10 12 00141 1200 600 750 10 12 00142 1500 600 750 10 12 00143 900 600 900 10 12 00144 1200 600 900 10 12 00145 1500 600 900 10 12 00146 H mm D mm Order No. W mm 900 750 750 10 12 00147 2 1200 750 750 10 12 00148 1500 750 750 10 12 00149 900 750 900 10 12 00150 1200 750 900 10 12 00151 1500 750 900 10 12 00152 Laboratory Benches, Köttermann Heavy duty tables with TopResist® table top With 1 shelf, rollable Maximum load 400 kg each table Article Heavy duty table Heavy duty table Heavy duty table Heavy duty table Heavy duty table Heavy duty table Heavy duty table Heavy duty table Heavy duty table Heavy duty table W × H × D mm 1200×750×6001) 1500×750×6001) 1200×750×7501) 1500×750×7501) 1800×750×7501) 1200×900×6002) 1500×900×6002) 1200×900×7502) 1500×900×7502) 1800×900×7502) Order No. 10 12 05709 10 12 05710 10 12 05711 10 12 05712 10 12 05713 10 12 05719 10 12 05720 10 12 05721 10 12 05722 10 12 05723 1) Working height, seating position 750 mm 2) Working height, standing position 900 mm Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1057

1059

Laboratory Facilities Furniture co d e b e w WWGZA025 co d e b e w WW2VA013 1 2 1058 Work Benches, Cabinets FLEX-Tower Shelving System, Dewert Labortechnik FLEX-Tower Small-footprint shelving system for installation of HPLC, GC, and other analysis systems. Our FLEX-Tower also accommodates the peripheral equipment of modern analysis sys- tems, using up only a small area of the benchtop. • Solid-core material • Material: HPL 13 mm white • Large reach-through openings for maintenance and operation • Heavy-load castors with locking brakes • Highly resistant to chemicals • 2 fixed shelves, 2 shelves adjustable to heights of 50 mm or more above the fixed shelf • Shelves with 40x250mm reach-through openings at the side and rear • Rear wall only for bottom shelf • Collection tray for reagents • Optional integrated gas supply (zero-air, N2, H2) via gas generators Other versions available on request, fig. contains special equipment. Article HPLC-Rack Typ 626 HPLC-Rack Typ 826 Optional accessories Width × Depth × Height mm 626 × 800 × 1950 826 × 800 × 1950 Order No. 10 08 80626 10 08 80826 Article Dimensions (W×D×H): 400 × 550 × 426 mm Insert element type 400/2 2 drawers H200 with full pull-out rail and soft-close pull-in mechanism Material: HPL 13 mm white PC holder type PC200 Dimensions (W×D×H): 226 × 463 × 300 mm Folder holder type OR126 Dimensions (W×D×H): 126 × 303 × 320 mm PP tub for B600 with slide-in element Dimensions (W×D×H): 220 × 787 × 100 mm PP tub for B800 with slide-in element Dimensions (W×D×H): 420 × 787 × 100 mm Electrical terminal block with 8 Schuko sockets (4 each white/black), 2 inputs 230V (1 each white/black), 2 Netline connection cables with Schuko angle plugs (1 each white/black), 2 RJ45, 3.5 m connecting cable Order No. 10 08 84002 10 08 80200 10 08 80126 10 08 80600 10 08 80800 10 08 81002 Laboratory Standing Work Tables with a C-Leg Frame, Labor-Pilz/Talassi 1 Laboratory standing work tables Dimension: 900 × 900 mm (D×H) Supporting metal structure: • Made of steel profile section, C-shape painted with epoxy powders • Colour: blue (similar to RAL 5014) • Designated installation area for implementation of untertop cabling and services • Furniture delivered with adjustable feet • Worktop without raised edges mm Length 600 900 1200 1500 1800 Worktop HPL coated Order No. 10 47 46400 10 47 49400 10 47 42400 10 47 41540 10 47 41840 solid core Order No. 10 47 46401 10 47 49401 10 47 42401 10 47 41541 10 47 41841 stoneware Order No. 10 47 46405 10 47 49405 10 47 41245 10 47 41545 10 47 41845 2 Laboratory standing work tables incl. wall panel Dimension: 900 × 2020 mm (D×H) Supporting metal structure: • Made of steel profile section, C-shape painted with epoxy powders • Colour: blue (similar to RAL 5014) • Designated installation area for implementation of untertop cabling and services • Furniture delivered with adjustable feet • Worktop without raised edges Wall panel: • Closed up to 1500 mm height • 1× adjustable shelf with upstand • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035) Continued on next page

1060

Laboratory Facilities Furniture Work Benches, Cabinets mm Length 600 900 1200 1500 1800 Worktop HPL coated Order No. 10 47 46300 10 47 49300 10 47 41230 10 47 41530 10 47 41830 solid core Order No. 10 47 46301 10 47 49301 10 47 41231 10 47 45301 10 47 41831 stoneware Order No. 10 47 46305 10 47 49305 10 47 41235 10 47 41535 10 47 41835 3 Laboratory standing work tables incl. wall panel with wall cupboard Dimension: 900 × 2020 mm (D×H) Supporting metal structure: • Made of steel profile section, C-shape painted with epoxy powders • Colour: blue (similar to RAL 5014) • Designated installation area for implementation of untertop cabling and services • Furniture delivered with adjustable feet • Worktop without raised edges Wall panel: • Closed up to 1500 mm height • 1 wall cupboard with two sliding glass doors and 1 adjustable shelf • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035) mm Length 600 900 1200 1500 1800 Worktop HPL coated Order No. 10 47 46500 10 47 49500 10 47 41250 10 47 41550 10 47 41850 solid core Order No. 10 47 46501 10 47 49501 10 47 41251 10 47 41551 10 47 41851 stoneware Order No. 10 47 46505 10 47 49505 10 47 41255 10 47 45505 10 47 41855 Laboratory Standing Work Tables, Labor-Pilz Laboratory standing working tables 600 × 900 mm (D×H) Worktops also available on request with 750 mm or 900 mm depth, and without raised edges • Body melamine/stainless steel, worktop with raised edges • Furniture delivered with skirting and adjustable feet • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035) / stainless steel 1.430 Length Model Corpus Worktop 3 4 5 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. Continued on next page melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel HPL coated polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel HPL coated polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel HPL coated polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel HPL coated polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel Order No. 10 47 45012 10 47 45013 10 47 45014 10 47 45015 10 47 45016 10 47 45017 10 47 45001 10 47 45022 10 47 45023 10 47 45024 10 47 45025 10 47 45026 10 47 45027 10 47 45002 10 47 45062 10 47 45063 10 47 45064 10 47 45065 10 47 45066 10 47 45067 10 47 45006 10 47 41121 10 47 45113 10 47 45114 10 47 45115 10 47 45116 10 47 45117 10 47 45211 mm 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 6 1800 6 1800 6 1800 6 1800 6 1800 6 1800 6 1800 door hinge left door hinge left door hinge left door hinge left door hinge left door hinge left door hinge left door hinge right door hinge right door hinge right door hinge right door hinge right door hinge right door hinge right 2 doors 2 doors 2 doors 2 doors 2 doors 2 doors 2 doors 3 doors 3 doors 3 doors 3 doors 3 doors 3 doors 3 doors co d e b e w co d e b e w WW2VA004 6 1059

1061

Laboratory Facilities Furniture Work Benches, Cabinets Laboratory standing work tables with drawer 600 × 900 mm (D×H) As an alternative, also available with benchtop depth 750 and 900 mm and without raised edge • Cabinet melamine/stainless steel, benchtop with raised edge • Drawers: dampened, drawer heights 300 mm with rails, carrying capacity max. 30 kg • Height-adjustable bases – to compensate for slightly uneven floors • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035), or stainless steel 1.430 Length Model Corpus Worktop mm 1 640 1 640 1 640 1 640 1 640 1 640 1 640 2 1200 2 1200 2 1200 2 1200 2 1200 2 1200 2 1200 3 1800 3 1800 3 1800 3 1800 3 1800 3 1800 3 1800 melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel 4 full extensions 4 full extensions 4 full extensions 4 full extensions 4 full extensions 4 full extensions 4 full extensions 2×4 full extensions melamine 2×4 full extensions melamine 2×4 full extensions melamine 2×4 full extensions melamine 2×4 full extensions melamine 2×4 full extensions melamine 2×4 full extensions 3×4 full extensions melamine 3×4 full extensions melamine 3×4 full extensions melamine 3×4 full extensions melamine 3×4 full extensions melamine 3×4 full extensions melamine 3×4 full extensions stainless steel stainless steel HPL coated polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel HPL coated polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel HPL coated polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel Order No. 10 47 45032 10 47 45033 10 47 45034 10 47 45035 10 47 45036 10 47 45037 10 47 45003 10 47 45072 10 47 45073 10 47 45074 10 47 45075 10 47 45076 10 47 45077 10 47 45007 10 47 45122 10 47 45123 10 47 45124 10 47 45125 10 47 45126 10 47 45127 10 47 45212 Laboratory standing work tables with door & drawer 600 × 900 mm (D×H) Worktops also available on request with 750 mm or 900 mm depth, and without raised edge • Cabinet melamine/stainless steel, benchtop with raised edges • Drawers: dampened, drawer heights 300 mm with rails, carrying capacity max. 30 kg • Furniture delivered with skirting and adjustable feet • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035) / stainless steel 1.430 Worktop Order No. Corpus Model Length 45 mm 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 4 640 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 5 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 6 1200 7 1800 7 1800 7 1800 7 1800 7 1800 7 1800 7 1800 stainless steel stainless steel door hinge left, 1 full extension melamine door hinge left, 1 full extension melamine door hinge left, 1 full extension melamine door hinge left, 1 full extension melamine door hinge left, 1 full extension melamine door hinge left, 1 full extension melamine door hinge left, 1 full extension door hinge right, 1 full extension melamine door hinge right, 1 full extension melamine door hinge right, 1 full extension melamine door hinge right, 1 full extension melamine door hinge right, 1 full extension melamine door hinge right, 1 full extension melamine door hinge right, 1 full extension stainless steel stainless steel 2 doors, 2 full extensions 2 doors, 2 full extensions 2 doors, 2 full extensions 2 doors, 2 full extensions 2 doors, 2 full extensions 2 doors, 2 full extensions 2 doors, 2 full extensions door left, 4 full extensions door left, 4 full extensions door left, 4 full extensions door left, 4 full extensions door left, 4 full extensions door left, 4 full extensions door left, 4 full extensions door right, 4 full extensions door right, 4 full extensions door right, 4 full extensions door right, 4 full extensions door right, 4 full extensions door right, 4 full extensions door right, 4 full extensions 3 doors, 3 full extensions 3 doors, 3 full extensions 3 doors, 3 full extensions 3 doors, 3 full extensions 3 doors, 3 full extensions 3 doors, 3 full extensions 3 doors, 3 full extensions melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel stainless steel melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel stainless steel melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel stainless steel melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel stainless steel 10 47 45042 HPL coated 10 47 45043 polypropylene 10 47 45044 solid core ceramic composites 10 47 40454 10 47 45046 stainless steel 10 47 45047 stoneware 10 47 45004 10 47 45052 HPL coated 10 47 45053 polypropylene 10 47 45054 solid core ceramic composites 10 47 45055 10 47 45056 stainless steel 10 47 45057 stoneware 10 47 45005 10 47 45082 HPL coated 10 47 45083 polypropylene 10 47 45084 solid core ceramic composites 10 47 45085 10 47 45086 stainless steel 10 47 45087 stoneware 10 47 45008 10 47 45092 HPL coated 10 47 45093 polypropylene 10 47 45094 solid core ceramic composites 10 47 45095 10 47 45096 stainless steel 10 47 45097 stoneware 10 47 45009 10 47 45102 HPL coated 10 47 45103 polypropylene 10 47 45104 solid core ceramic composites 10 47 45105 10 47 45106 stainless steel 10 47 45107 stoneware 10 47 45010 10 47 45142 HPL coated 10 47 45143 polypropylene 10 47 45144 solid core ceramic composites 10 47 45145 10 47 45146 stainless steel 10 47 45147 stoneware 10 47 45214 Continued on next page 1 2 3 6 7 1060

1062

Work Benches, Cabinets Length Model Corpus Worktop Order No. Laboratory Facilities Furniture 8 co d e b e w WW2VA017 co d e b e w WW2VA003 mm 8 1800 8 1800 8 1800 8 1800 8 1800 8 1800 8 1800 2 doors, 4 full extensions right melamine 2 doors, 4 full extensions right melamine 2 doors, 4 full extensions right melamine 2 doors, 4 full extensions right melamine 2 doors, 4 full extensions right melamine 2 doors, 4 full extensions right melamine 2 doors, 4 full extensions right 10 47 45132 HPL coated 10 47 45133 polypropylene 10 47 45134 solid core ceramic composites 10 47 45135 10 47 45136 stainless steel 10 47 45137 stoneware 10 47 45213 stainless steel stainless steel Laboratory Sitting Benches, Labor-Pilz Dimension: 1500 × 600 × 750 mm (W×T×H) • Powder-coated C-frame, firmly welded, laboratory bench for sitting • Furniture delivered with skirting and adjustable feet • Colour: worktopg light grey (similar to RAL 7035) / frame stainless steel 1.430 • Max. load 150 kg (evenly loaded) Available on request: • Laboratory bench 900 mm height • Worktop depth 750 mm or 900 mm • Worktop length 1000/1200/1500/1800 mm • With raised edges Worktop Order No. melamine 10 47 48031 HPL coated 10 47 48032 polypropylene 10 47 48033 solid core 10 47 48034 Worktop composite ceramics 10 47 48035 stainless steel 10 47 48036 stoneware 10 47 48037 Order No. Laboratory Sink, Labor-Pilz Dimensions: 1200 × 600 × 900 mm (W×D×H) worktops also available on request with 750 mm or 900 mm depth • Body melamine/stainless steel, worktop with raised edge • Cabinet with partition panel, two doors (left- and right-hinged) • 1 adjustable shelf, installation area without back panel, • 1× mixer tab, 1× eye shower with shower head, surface drain board next to sink • Furniture delivered with skirting and adjustable feet • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035) / stainless steel 1.430 Sink left left left left left left right right right right right right Corpus melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel melamine melamine melamine melamine melamine stainless steel Worktop polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel polypropylene solid core ceramic composites stainless steel stoneware stainless steel Order No. 10 47 45511 10 47 45512 10 47 45513 10 47 45514 10 47 45535 10 47 45501 10 47 45521 10 47 45522 10 47 45523 10 47 45524 10 47 45545 10 47 45502 Laboratory Sink with Wall Panel, Labor-Pilz/Talassi Dimension: 1200 × 900 × 2020 mm (W×D×H) Body melamine, worktop with raised edges Supporting metal structure: • Made of steel profile section, C-shape painted with epoxy powders • Colour: blue (similar to RAL 5014) • Designated installation area for implementation of untertop cabling and services • Furniture delivered with adjustable feet • Wall panel with 1 mixer and 1 draining rack • Working top with sink left and draining board right (opposite orientation available on request) Undertop cabinet: • 1 mobile cabinet with two doors (right- and left-hinged) • Without back panel • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035) Worktop polypropylene Order No. 10 47 45420 Worktop stoneware Order No. 10 47 45421 co d e b e w WW2VA021 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1061

1063

Laboratory Facilities Furniture co d e b e w WW2VA002 Work Benches, Cabinets Sludge Trap / Sedimentation Tank, Labor-Pilz Polypropylene sludge trap/sedimentation tank for retention of heavy suspended parti- cles in waste water. Ideal for waste water pre-treatment by gravitation for application in building material test labs, ceramics labs, metallurgical labs, and other test laboratories producing waste water with a high sediment load which requires pre-treatment before it can be fed into the mu- nicipal sewage system. • Lid with sealing gasket and clip closure • Inner basket with two-chamber system (removable) • With wheels Technical data: Outer diameter with lid: Height tank: Height including wheels and lid: Volume inner tank: Volume outer tank: Connections: Colour: Article Sludge trap 4711-SF4020 Sludge trap 4711-SF4040 4711-SF4020 335 mm 300 mm 400 mm 14 l 21 l G 1 1/2 ″ Tank RAL 7032, lid RAL 7011 420 mm 400 mm 500 mm 18 l 25 l G 1 1/2 ″ Order No. 10 47 41241 10 47 41240 co d e b e w WW2VA020 1 2 3 4 7 8 5 6 9 AT Base Cabinets on Casters, Labor-Pilz/Talassi Dimension: 445 × 795 mm (D×H) Cabinet: • Made of melamine • Available in different types with doors or damped drawers • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035) • Metal frame blue (similar to RAL 5014) with wheels Full metal cabinets are available on request. Length Version mm 1 567 2 567 3 567 4 567 5 567 6 567 7 835 8 1136 9 1136 AT 1136 1 door, hung on the right 1 full extension, 1 door 4 full extensions 3 full extensions 2 full extensions 2 full extensions of different heights 2 wing doors 2 wing doors 2 full extensions, 2 wing doors 4 full extensions Order No. 10 47 49557 10 47 49558 10 47 49559 10 47 49560 10 47 49561 10 47 49562 10 47 49584 10 47 49514 10 47 49515 10 47 49516 Wall Cupboards, Labor-Pilz Dimension: 320 × 700 mm (T×H) • With one adjustable shelf • Made of melamine • Colour: light grey (similar to RAL 7035) AK AL Length mm AK 600 AL 600 AM 1200 Version 1 door, hung on the left 1 door, hung on the right 2 doors, hung on the left and right Order No. 10 47 47001 10 47 47002 10 47 47003 co d e b e w WW2VA018 AM 1062

1064

Laboratory Facilities Furniture co d e b e w WWQ7J062 Work Benches, Cabinets Laboratory Benches and Cupboards, BOCHEM 18/10 steel laboratory benches: made of chromium-nickel steel, material No. 4301/5, with finely ground surface • sturdy, welded frame made of square section tube • noise-insulated bench top and shelves • drawers with telescopic guides • adjustable feet • height adjustable shelves • double walled sliding door, with ball-bearing guide • drawers on right or left • G.N. 1/1-100 and G.N. 1/1-200 drawers • sitting-height laboratory benches, 75 cm high Laboratory benches without base panel Order No. 91 05 11500 91 05 11501 91 05 11502 H cm 75 75 L cm 250 300 W cm 75 75 Order No. 91 05 11503 91 05 11504 H cm 75 75 L cm 250 300 W cm 75 75 Order No. 91 05 11513 91 05 11514 H cm 1 75 75 75 L cm 100 150 200 W cm 75 75 75 Laboratory benches with base panel H cm 2 75 75 75 L cm 100 150 200 W cm 75 75 75 Order No. 91 05 11510 91 05 11511 91 05 11512 Laboratory benches with drawers at both ends H cm 3 75 75 L cm 200 250 W cm 75 75 Order No. 91 05 11532 91 05 11533 H cm 75 L cm 300 W cm 75 Order No. 91 05 11534 Laboratory benches with base panel, shelf and sliding doors H cm 4 75 75 75 L cm 100 160 210 W cm 75 75 75 Order No. 91 05 11580 91 05 11581 91 05 11582 H cm 75 75 L cm 250 300 W cm 75 75 Order No. 91 05 11583 91 05 11584 Laboratory benches with base panel, shelf, sliding doors and drawers on the right H cm 5 75 75 L cm 160 210 W cm 75 75 Order No. 91 05 11591 91 05 11592 H cm 75 75 L cm 250 300 W cm 75 75 Order No. 91 05 11593 91 05 11594 1 2 3 4 5 Your specialized laboratory dealer – fast, competent and economical co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1063

1065

Laboratory Facilities Furniture co d e b e w WWGZA021 1 Weighing Tables Weighing Benches, Dewert Labortechnik Weighing Benches • Made of ground granite • Vibration-free construction with more leg room • Stainless steel strut and vibration dampers • Color variations are possible • Special sizes on request • Dimensions (W×D×H): 900 × 600 × 750 mm • Weight: approx. 210 kg • Delivery free buyer’s address in Germany (except islands) Article 1 Weighing bench Order No. 91 08 81000 Anti-vibration table – weighing table on stainless steel base • Granite workbench 900 × 600, polished, easy to clean • Vibration-free stainless steel frame with vibration dampers, height adjustable • Designed for use also in S2 laboratories • Workbenches made from other materials available on request • Colour may differ from photo • Stainless steel 1.4301 as a standard • Special dimensions available on request • Dimensions (W×D×H) 900 × 600 × 750 mm • Weight: approx. 100 kg • Delivery free buyer’s address in Germany (except islands) 2 Article 2 Anti-vibration table Order No. 10 08 81001 Anti-vibration Table, AE Adam • Large working area: 400 mm × 450 mm • Two-table construction keeps the granite block in the middle and reduces interference • Sturdy design • Comes in a small package; easy to assembly • Height-adjustable feet • High-quality lightweight aluminium frame • Scratch-resistance working area • Polished finish co d e b e w WWDX7007 Article Anti-vibration table Order No. 10 56 58036 Chairs Laboratory Chairs, neoLab® Ideal for Class S1 and S2 cleanrooms, easy top decontaminate. Tested and approved by German chemical association and biotech inspectorate. • hard-wearing and functional • pneumatic seat height adjustment • for ergonomic sitting in the laboratory and workshop • with twin castors and sliding feet for hard floors Swivel chairs with mechanical adjustment of backrest height and tilt Features: Seat and backrest made of black PU foam or natural beechwood Version Equipment 3 PU foam, black 3 PU foam, black 3 PU foam, black 3 PU foam, black 4 PU foam, black 4 PU foam, black 4 PU foam, black 5 Natural beechwood 5 Natural beechwood with castors with sliding feet with castors with sliding feet with castors+foot ring with sliding feet+foot ring with sliding feet+foot ring with castors with castors Seat height adjustment approx. cm 42 – 54 42 – 54 47 – 64 47 – 64 47 – 64 47 – 64 56 – 82 42 – 54 47 – 64 Order No. 10 01 11062 10 01 11063 10 01 11064 10 01 11065 10 01 11066 10 01 11067 10 01 11068 91 01 11169 91 01 11201 Continued on next page 4 co d e b e w WW2NY013 3 1064

1066

Chairs Swivel stool for relaxed working, with rigid seat Features: PU foam round seat, natural beechwood round seat or upholstered round seat covered in black artificial leather, black aluminium base Version Equipment Seat height adjustment approx. cm 6 PU foam, black with castors 42 – 54 6 PU foam, black with castors 47 – 64 7 Natural beechwood with castors 42 – 54 7 Natural beechwood with castors 47 – 64 8 upholstered artificial leather black with castors 42 – 54 8 upholstered artificial leather black with castors 47 – 64 Order No. Ø cm 35 91 01 11203 35 91 01 11204 35 91 01 11205 35 91 01 11206 38 91 01 11207 38 91 01 11208 Swivel high-stool with tilting seat, base on sliding feet, black frame Standing aid with saddle seat made of black PU foam, with carrying handle. • With seat tilt • Turnable, height adjustable with the gas lift • Black aluminium five foot base with sliding feet • Especially suitable for cleanrooms S1 and S2, easy to decontaminate • Recommended for the biotechnology Version Equipment 9 PU foam with sliding feet Seat height adjustment approx. cm 56 – 88 Order No. 91 01 11209 Laboratory Chairs, LAT AT High-stool • seat made of black PU foam • adjustable height by means of safe gas lift, 55 – 80 cm • rocking technology • x-base, black • sliding feet or stopper castors Article High-stool with stopper High-stool with castors AK Swivel stool • seat made of black PU foam • adjustable height bye means of safe gas lift, 46 – 66 cm • ring trigger • castors stopped depending on load Article Swivel stool Order No. 10 20 10101 10 20 10102 Order No. 10 20 10105 AL Swivel stool • seat made of black PU foam • saddle seat • Adjustable seat tilt • adjustable height bye means of safe gas lift, approx. 46 – 66 cm • ring trigger • castors stopped depending on load for hard floors Laboratory Facilities Furniture 8 7 5 6 9 AT AL co d e b e w WWW4U029 AK AM Article Swivel stool with saddle seat AM Laboratory chair • mould seat and back rest made of PU foam • adjustable height, 46 – 66 cm • height of back rest adjustable • tilt of seat and back adjustable • castors for hard floors Article Laboratory chair co d e b e w Order No. 10 20 10106 Order No. 10 20 10108 Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1065

1067

Laboratory Facilities Furniture / Protective Equipment 1 Chairs Laboratory chair • mould seat and back rest made of PU foam • adjustable height by means of safe gas lift • height of back rest adjustable, swinging • adjustable seat depth Article Laboratory chair, castors with load-dependent braking Height-adjustable: approx. 46 – 66 cm Laboratory chair with foot-ring and sleeding feet Height-adjustable: approx. 55 – 80 cm Order No. 10 20 10110 10 20 10111 2 Laboratory chair • imitation leather black, seamless and tightly upholstered • ergonomically shaped • height adjustable by means of safe gas lift, ca. 46 – 66 cm • height of back rest adjustable, swinging • synchronous technology • castors stopped depending on load Article Laboratory chair made of artificial leather Order No. 10 20 10115 3 Laboratory chair • Leatherette, ESD conductive, tear-proof, non-skid, black • Height adjustable by means of safe gas lift, black, approx. 44 cm to 59 cm • Height of backrest adjustable • Comfortable backrest for permanent contact • x-base, black • Conductive castors for hard floors Article Laboratory chair made of artificial leather, ESD Order No. 10 20 10116 Fume Hoods Tabletop Fume Hoods / Pharmacy Hoods, Köttermann Tabletop fume hoods Tabletop fume hoods extract less critical hazardous substances released for example during refilling processes. Enclosed on three sides, they have fairly good extraction ca- pacities. Tabletop fume hoods are no replacement for laboratory fume hoods as they have no certified ventilation technology. • Color: arctic white; NCS S 0505 R 80 B • For setting up on a table at a height for working while sitting or standing • Self-carrying housing made of galvanized and epoxy-coated steel • Front sliding screen made of polyacrylics • Exhaust connection: DN 110 • Illuminated workspace • Available with and without fan W × H × D mm 800×1350×640 4 800×1350×640 Equipment with fan without fan Order No. 10 12 04516 10 12 04517 5 Pharmacy hoods Pharmacy hoods are small hoods designed specifically for handling hazardous materials in pharmacies. The pharmacy hood is a hood pursuant to DIN 12924-4 designed for gen- eral use in laboratories pursuant to laboratory regulations. • Colour: Arctic White; NCS S 0505 R 80 B • For tabletop installation at sitting or standing working height • Polyacrylic front pane • Exhaust connection: DN 110 • Illuminated working space • Available with and without media Version Order No. Width × Depth × Height mm 900 × 1350 × 640 900 × 1350 × 640 900 × 1350 × 640 900 × 1350 × 640 with media, with fan with media, without fan without media, with fan without media, without fan 10 12 04512 10 12 04513 10 12 04514 10 12 04515 2 1 3 4 5 1066

1068

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment co d e b e w WWR5C002 co d e b e w WW2VA019 Fume Hoods High Performance Fume Cupboards, Irmeco External walls of strong steel construction covered with epoxy paint, internal lining (cham- ber material) of stainless steel covered with chemically resistant epoxy paint, lateral pan- els with aerodynamic profile; equipped with over pressure protection system; moveable sash window (optional: Auto Protect system), countertop made of monolith technical ce- ramic, anti-acid, thickness 30 mm, with glazed surface and over-raised edge, for prevent- ing the linking; under-bench storing cabinets made of steel covered with epoxy paint, for short term acids/bases storing; control panel for control of the unit; for connection to available venting system; certified according to EN 14175. Standard equipment: • Integrated lighting • 2 × plugs 230 V (16A) sockets, splash proof IP 44 version • 1 × cold water inlet valve with spout • 1 × gas • Sink made of solid homogenous ceramics, dimensions 280 × 80 mm • Color of fittings in grey RAL 7035 • Touch screen controller, for complete control of the unit with alarm function Article Fume cupboard, 1192×912×2462 mm Fume cupboard, 1492×912×2462 mm Fume cupboard, 1792×912×2462 mm Order No. 10 15 80120 10 15 80150 10 15 80180 Individual requests about a different configurations are welcome. Customized solutions available on request. Fume Hood for General Use, Labor-Pilz/Talassi Standard equipment: • Sash sliding vertically with protective safety glass sliding horizontally • Electronic control MA95FLOW with display and visual and sonorous alarm • Multilingual software • Door locking device at 50 cm opening • SAFETY-BLOCK device in case of ropes breaking • Internal HPL with worktop in monolithic GRES with retaining edges • Saving energy Led lamp IP65 for indoor lighting > 400 lux • IP55 220 V electrical outlets protected by circuit breaker Accessories and / or customizations: • Box with combined charcoal and absolute filters for cabinets for acids and bases or flammables • Stainless steel frameworks for glassware • Airflowcontrol • Internal coatings (high-resistance polypropylene, PVC, stainless steel, stoneware) • Technical gases taps and pressure regulators Further models of fume cupboards are available on request: • Fume hood with weighing device • Fume hood for powders • Fume hood for aggressive acids • Fume hood with low-level working top • Walk-in fume hood Image with optional details Inner dimensions W×T mm 900 × 750 1200 × 750 1500 × 750 Outer dimensions W×D×H mm 1045 × 830 × 2355 1345 × 830 × 2355 1645 × 830 × 2355 Outer height max. mm 2750 2750 2750 Order No. 10 47 45603 10 47 45605 10 47 45606 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1067

1069

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment co d e b e w WWW4U101 1068 Table and Filter Fume Extractors Fume Cupboards, CARLO ERBA Reagents Recirculated-air fume cupboards with state-of-the-art molecular filtration technology The ChemFAST Elite fume cupboard is in compliance with standard EN ISO 14175-3 and offers maximum protection from hazardous gases, vapours, aerosols etc. A blower sys- tem with a matching filter extracts the particles from the air, reliably protecting the opera- tor from any hazardous substances. ChemFAST Elite: The fume cupboard can either be connected to the exhaust air system or run in recircu- lation mode. • Lowest energy consumption <57 dB(A) at 0.9m • Operating hours indication • Filter saturation indication • Selection of 9 different filters, also available in combinations of two • Fold-up front pane for optimum cleaning • Side windows made of laminated safety glass • Chemical-resistant worktop • Selection of chemicals filters for different applications • Multi-function display with PLC control • Non-dazzle LED work lights • Workspace can be removed for easy cleaning Possible filter types: • HEPA filter (e.g. powder, particle) • A/C filter (e.g. solvent) • ACR filter (e.g. radioactivity) • FORM filter (e.g. formaldehyde) • SULF filter (e.g. acids, sulphides RH >85%) • UR filter (e.g. acids, sulphide RH <85%) • CYAN filter (e.g. hydrocyanic acid) • MER filter (e.g. mercury) • AM filter (e.g. ammonia) Type Outer dimensions W×H×D 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 mm 595×1120×760 885×1120×760 1185×1120×760 1500×1120×760 1800×1120×760 Prices without filters Working range W×H×D mm 553×660×600 823×660×600 1185×660×600 1438×660×600 1738×660×600 Order No. 10 35 30183 10 35 30184 10 35 30185 10 35 30186 10 35 30187 Mobile Gas Flue ECO², LAT Mobile gas flue ECO² Gas flue / gas filter cabinet without vent pipe For handling reagents or chemical compounds at room temperature or medium tempera- tures in all kinds of laboratories. • Filter change system USB • Mechanical anemometer • Constant suction speed • Control for filter regulation • LED light • 2 years’ warranty Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): Internal dimensions (W×D×H): Average treated air volume: Cabinet air renewals: Total power consumption: Noise level: Weight: No. filter: 778 × 569 × 760 mm 798 × 600 × 1012 mm 160 m3/h 9 renewals/min 47 W 50 dB 65 kg 1 to 2 Article Mobile gas flue with filter, type ECO2 G Order No. 10 20 12001 Please order the suitable filter for your application as well as the floor unit on castors separately! Continued on next page

1070

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment Table and Filter Fume Extractors Accessories Article Movilair, mobile rack Transparent back wall Fluid retention tray HEPA filter activated carbon Article Type AD (organic vapors) Type BED (inorganic acids) Type FD (aldehydes and organic compounds) Type KD (NH3, amines) Type ABEKD (composite filter) Type MGD (mercury) Order No. 10 20 12135 10 20 12138 10 20 12134 Order No. 10 20 12140 10 20 12141 10 20 12142 10 20 12143 10 20 12144 10 20 12145 Ductless Filtering Fume Enclosure acc. to EN14175-3 and EN14175-6, Weidner Ductless Filtering Fume Enclosure • Outside dimensions (L×D×H) 1000 × 750 × 1500 mm • Inside dimensions (L×D×H) 940 × 590 × 750 mm • Opening height 80 – 380 (service up to 650 mm) • Opening width 780 mm • Incl. fan with 230 V Schuko plug • Illumination • Front sliding sash and side walls made from safety glass • Structure of the benchtop fume hood made of powder-coated steel, rear wall of fume hood coated with HPL • Working bench stainless steel (also available with other laboratory working benches made of polypropylene, vitrified clay, solid phenol resin) Automatic adjustment of the fan power when opening the sliding sash. Visual alarm in case of insufficient air flow and if maintenance is required. The molecular air filtration process is carried out via an adsorption process in an activated carbon filter. Pre-filtration to remove ambient dust is carried out with a high-throughput electrostatic pre-filter. 95% efficiency with particles of 0.5 µm (class M6). Article Ductless filtering fume enclosure Accessories Article Activated carbon filter set for solvents Activated carbon filter set for acids Order No. 83 58 02040 Order No. 83 58 02041 83 58 02042 Have any questions ? Just give us a call ! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1069

1071

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment co d e b e w WWPKJ008 Safety Work Benches Microbiological Safety Cabinet, Class II, HMC Safeguard-Pro safety cabinets – customised solutions for microbiological tasks Premium product and user protection combined with easy handling and cleaning of the units. The Safeguard Pro 600 is not wider than a commercially available laboratory dish- washer! This small footprint gives you extra space. Features at a glance: • Biological safety cabinets, class II • Highest personal, product and carry-over protection • Negative pressure system • Available in different sizes: HMC Safeguard Pro 600 with a width of only 600 mm (external and internal dimen- sions) HMC Safeguard Pro 1200 with a width of 1300 mm (external dimensions) / 1200 mm (internal dimensions) • Remarkably low noise level: <47 d(BA) at 0.5 m/s inflow and 0.35 m/s downflow • Remarkably low power consumption: The safety cabinet can run at half speed all the time and therefore reaches operativeness fast. In addition, it keeps the working space free from aerosol from the surrounding air. You will save time and money because the low power consumption can pay off the purchase costs in little time. • Highly visible and audible alarm signals in case of malfunction ensure premium product and user protection • Frameless side windows for easy cleaning and a divided stainless steel working surface which is particularly simple to handle and to clean. • Relief for tired eyes: A dimmable LED-light is a standard feature for the working space; maximum 2000 lux. • UV light as an option • Wide range of optional accessories • Latest technology (e.g. optional remote control) • Made in Sweden • Functional and modern design 2 1070 1 Technical data: Front window opening: Work height, standard support stand: Weight: Downflow: Inflow: Deviation ±: Noise level ISO 3744: Down flow rate: Exhaust flow rate: Downflowfilter, Exhaustfilter: Lighting of the working surface (LED): Voltage frequency: Power consumption min.: Article 1 HMC Safeguard Pro 600 2 HMC Safeguard Pro 1200 HMC Safeguard Pro 1200 200 (adjustable 180 – 330) mm 700 – 1050 mm 220 kg HMC Safeguard Pro 600 200 (adjustable 180 – 330) mm 700 – 1050 mm 145 kg 0.28 m/s (adjustable 0.25 – 0.53 m/s) 0.28 m/s (adjustable 0.25 – 0.53 m/s) 0.45 m/s (adjustable 0.45 – 0.55 m/s) 0.45 m/s (adjustable 0.45 – 0.55 m/s) < 8% 46 dB(A) 340 m3/h 180 m3/h HEPA H14 EN 1822 99.999% at 0,3 µm particle size 0 – 2000, dimmbar 220–240 V/50–60 Hz or 110–120 V/50–60 Hz 60 W < 8% 46 dB(A) 680 m3/h 390 m3/h HEPA H14 EN 1822 99.999% at 0,3 µm particle size 0 – 2000, dimmbar 220–240 V/50–60 Hz or 110–120 V/50–60 Hz 100 W Outer dimensions W × D × H mm 600 × 730 × 1953 (1978) 540 (597) × 530 (640) × 700 Carriage on request Working range W × D × H mm 1303 × 799 × 1953 (1978) 1200 × 520 (625) × 700 Order No. 10 60 58000 10 60 58001 Microbiological Safety Cabinets, CARLO ERBA Reagents Safety cabinets class II pursuant to DIN EN 12469:2000 The microbiological safety cabinets by FASTER are manufactured in compliance with the standards EN 12469:2000 and NSF/ANSI 49. They are designed for work in the field of genetic engineering and microbiology or for handling cell cultures and ensure the safety of the staff, the products, and the environment. We offer the matching unit to suit your requirements. SafeFAST Premium: • < 85 Watt at 1.2m • < 42.5 dB(A) • Energy save Mode • Double fan • Motorised, fold-up front pane • Electronic fan control (automatic readjustment with increased filter contamination) • Stainless steel interior, worktop: 1.4404, rear wall 1.4301 Continued on next page

1072

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment Safety Work Benches • Side windows made of laminated safety glass • Operating hours counter, fan power, etc. • Non-dazzle LED work lights • Digital airflow speed indication inflow / downflow • Waste air and circulated air monitoring with optical and acoustic alarm, as well as all control functions required acc. to DIN 12469:2000 • Display with user interface • Pressure-reduced heavy-duty suspended particles filter class H14 acc. to DIN EN 1822 • DEHS connectors for filter qualification Optional accessories: • UV lamp • Electrically adjustable or height-adjustable base frame • Prefilter G4 • Activated carbon filter • Additional sockets • Floating contact • Various connection cocks (vacuum, compressed air, nitrogen, gas, water) • Various connections (RS 232, RS 485, RJ 45, USB) • Draft-free waste air connection Type 0.9m 1.2m 1.5m 1.8m Outer dimensions W×H×D mm 1045×2350×860 1350×2350×860 1655×2350×860 1960×2350×860 Working range W × H × D mm 887×740×580 1192×740×580 1497×740×580 1802×740×580 Order No. 10 35 32490 10 35 32520 10 35 32550 10 35 32580 Safety Cabinet BIO 1, LAT Safety cabinet BIO; microbiological safety and environmental compatibility are certified by TÜV Nord according to EN 12469:2000. Safety cabinet of CLASS II TYPE A2 equipped with standard UV light, developed to protect the personnel and the environment from the material handled in it while at the same time preventing any external contamination of this material, which is of risk groups 1, 2, and 3. • Handling of micro-organisms, bacteria, fungi, viruses, and parasites of risk groups 1 and 2, and isolation and sample culture • Quantification methods • Microscopy techniques and sample preparation, identification and typing of micro-or- ganisms • Genetic engineering Standard equipment • Counter • Service socket • Fuel gas line • Compressed gas or vacuum supply tap • UV light • HEPA activated carbon filter Optional accessories • Additional taps for gaseous liquids • Passive suction kit for external discharge • Formalin evaporator and corresponding accessories for carrying out the semi-automat- ic decontamination cycle • Sockets for various connections to devices placed in the cabinet • Motorized suction kit for external discharge • Motorized suction kit with remote-controlled fan motor for external exhaust • Additional activated carbon or HEPA filters when discharging • Tubular support table • Movilair, base with castors Technical data: External dimensions (W×D×H): Internal dimensions (W×D×H): Average treated air volume: Cabinet air renewals: Total power consumption: Noise level: Weight: No. filter: Article Safety cabinet BIO 1 1074 × 840 × 1450 mm 924 × 600 × 700 mm ±350 m3/h 0,50 m/s 260 W <49 dB 227 kg 1 to 2 Order No. 10 20 12150 co d e b e w WWW4U102 Additional equipment available on request, please contact us. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1071

1073

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment co d e b e w WW4HV035 Safety Work Benches Thermo Scientific™ Herasafe™ 2030i Class II Biological Safety Cabinets, Thermo Scientific For demanding cell culture applications and other sensitive tasks where the safety of the product, the staff, and the environment must be ensured. • Graphic user interface with touchscreen • Stainless steel interior with LED lighting • 200-mm front pane and UV-C cross-beams in the side walls • Patented SmartFlow Plus system provides for automatic regulation of the air speed and of the efficient dual DC fan motors • Digital airflow monitoring system DAVe Plus with independent pressure sensors for op- timum protection of user and sample • Start/stop function at the push of a button • Cross-beam UV in the side walls • Front pane folds up for easy cleaning and disinfection of the interior • Inclined front pane, electronically adjustable, for fatigue-free working position • Cushioned arm rests, ergonomically adjustable (optional) • 2 Smart Ports for leading through vacuum tubes and cables • USB connection, cloud-capable for data transmission via WLAN • Adapts to the individual requirements thanks to the wide range of options and accessories • EN 12469 Model Order No. W work space m 0.9 1.2 1.5 1.8 Outer W × D × H mm 1000×800×1536 1300×800×1536 1600×800×1536 1900×800×1536 Herasafe 2030i 1 Herasafe 2030i Herasafe 2030i Herasafe 2030i To see other cabinet models and accessories, please enter webcode WW4HV035 to ac- cess our online catalogue. 10 79 22328 10 79 22329 10 79 22330 10 79 22331 Insulators SICCO Glove Box with Transfer Chamber, Bohlender Made of acrylic panels, PE base panel in the work space, aluminium frame, 4 quick cou- plings, 2 hoses, natural rubber gloves size 9, 2 lead-ins for cables on the backside (upper left and upper right). • Low cost compared to conventional steel glove boxes • Light weight combined with robust construction • Easy to move and install • Superb all-round visibility • Absolutely tight • Clever solution for efficient work • Large front opening Optional types: • Light protected or antistatic • Box modularly expandable • Openings for connections to a fume hood • Additional pair of gloves at the back side Technical data: Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: Use: Stand: Maximum all-over load Box: Maximum all-over load transfer chamber: Usable volume Box: clear PMMA from -20°C to +70°C normal pressure rubber feet 40 kg 3 kg 260 l Outer dimensions W × H × D Wght mm kg 1210×780×600 20 Usable interior space box W × H × D mm 850×500×540 220×275×320 850×425 10 17 68208 Usable interior transfer chamber W × H × D mm Hinged lid opening W × H mm Order No. 1 1072

1074

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment Insulators SICCO Glove Box for Exhaustion, Bohlender Aluminium frame with panels made of acrylic glass. Base panel, integrated connector for exhaust system and closing lid made of polyethylene. Iris-Ports and cable lead-ins made of polyethylene and silicone. Two lead-ins for cable on the back side (upper left and upper right). Two crosswise slotted silicone discs each in the openings and cable lead-ins. They are staggered mounted so that the overlapping segments at the same time allow easy access to the interior space and close the openings at non-use. The Iris-ports ensure pressure compensation through air streaming when the exhaust system is switched on. Connection to exhaust system through an integrated connector on the top panel. This connector is graded for tubes with inner diameters 100, 120, 160 and 180 mm. When working without exhaust system the opening can be closed with a lid. Technical data: Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: Use: Stand: Maximum all-over load Box: 40 kg Usable volume Box: 290 l clear PMMA from -20°C to +70°C normal pressure rubber feet Outer Weight kg 890×700×600 16 dimensions W × H × D mm Usable interior space W × H × D mm 850×650×540 Hinged lid opening W × H mm 850×425 Order No. 10 17 69888 SICCO Glove Box with Transfer Chamber Antistatic, Bohlender Aluminium frame with static dissipative panels made of polycarbonate, base panel made of static dissipative polyethylene. Front panel with two glove ports and one pair of static dissipative EPDM gloves size 9,75, two lead-ins for cables on the back side (upper left and upper right). Transfer chamber with two doors, external door with latch to prevent accidental opening, the tray extends into the workspace with opening of the internal door for easy removal of inserted products. Work space and transfer chamber each including two hose connectors for gas-filling and aeration and appropriate tubing (2x 5 m tubing for gas-filling made of PVC and 2x 5 m aeration tubing made of PE). All materials used can discharge electrostatic charging by means of a grounding cable which can be connected on the back side (connecting thread M6). Technical data: Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: Use: Stand: Maximum all-over load Box:40 kg 290 l Usable volume Box: bluish PC-ESD from -20°C to +70°C normal pressure rubber feet Outer Wght kg 1210×700×600 20 dimensions W × H × D mm Usable interior space W × H × D mm 850×650×540 220×275×320 850×425 10 17 69208 Usable interior transfer chamber W × H × D mm Hinged lid opening W × H mm Order No. Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1073

1075

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment Insulators SICCO Glove Box Vitrum with Transfer Chamber, Bohlender Aluminium frame with panels made of borosilicate glass, front panel with two glove ports, right side panel and bottom side base panel made of aluminium, top side of base panel made of stainless steel. Including one pair of natural rubber gloves size 9, two lead-ins for cable on the back side (upper left and upper right). Transfer chamber with two doors, external door with latch to prevent accidental opening, the tray extends into the workspace with opening of the internal door for easy removal of inserted products. Work space and transfer chamber each including two hose connectors for gas-filling and aeration and appropriate tubing (2x 5 m tubing for gas-filling made of PVC and 2x 5 m aeration tubing made of PE). Technical data: Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: Use: Stand: Maximum all-over load Box: 40 kg Usable volume Box: 290 l clear borosilicate 3.3 from -20°C to +120°C normal pressure rubber feet Outer Wght dimensions W × H × D mm kg 1210×700×600 36 Usable interior space W × H × D mm 850×650×540 220×275×320 850×425 10 17 68608 Usable interior transfer chamber W × H × D mm Hinged lid opening W × H mm Order No. SICCO Glove Box Air Stream with Transfer Chamber, Bohlender Aluminium frame with panels made of acrylic glass, base panel made of polyethylene. Front panel with two glove ports and one pair of natural rubber gloves size 9, two lead-ins for cables on the back side (upper left and upper right). Transfer chamber with two doors on the right, external door with latch to prevent accidental opening, the tray extends into the workspace with opening of the internal door for easy removal of inserted products. Integrated HEPA filtering unit in the top side for a high-purity atmosphere in the work- space. Manometer to display the degree of filter saturation. Pipe sockets made of PE are included in delivery for converting to the different operating modes: internal air circulation, fresh air supply and exhaust. The conversion can be made without any tooling. Exchange- able filter cartridge. Maintenance-free and trouble-free motor. Electrical power connection 230 V / 50 Hz is required. Technical data: Panels: Material: Temperature resistance: Use: Stand: Maximum all-over load Box: 40 kg Usable volume Box: 290 l clear PE from -20°C to +70°C normal pressure rubber feet Outer dimensions W × H × D Wght mm kg 1210×1015×660 42 Usable interior space W × H × D mm 850×650×540 220×275×320 850×425 10 17 64508 Usable interior transfer chamber W × H × D mm Hinged lid opening W × H mm Order No. More than 20,000 articles in this catalogue – and still more on our website ! 1074

1076

KNOWLEDGE SAFE AND SECURE STORAGE IN THE LABORATORY For today's laboratories, a flexible spatial concept is extremely important. As lab processes are subject to constant change, it is advisable to think about a sustainable storage concept for hazardous materials already in the planning phase. Central flame-resistant storage rooms are no longer the state-of-the-art in laboratory architecture. Today, labs rely primarily on flame-resistant safety storage cabinets: They ensure a high degree of safety while keeping the costs for future refurbishments to a reasonable limit. The legal basis for handling hazardous materials is defined by a number of global regulations (such as the GHS), the Ordinance on Hazardous Substances, technical regulations on handling hazardous substances, and other laws and directives. Flame-resistant safety cabinets pursuant to DIN EN 14470-1 Modern laboratories are equipped with these cabinets which, in accordance with their certified fire resistance, ensure close-by, risk-minimized storage of toxic, flammable, potentially explosive substances and substances which combine these hazardous properties. In case of fire, a potential risk from the substances stored in the cabinet is almost non-existent for the duration of the certified fire resistance time of the cabinet. If flammable liquids are stored properly in the cabinet, firefighters and rescuers can concentrate on controlling the fire and saving injured persons instead of hav- ing to deal first with these hazardous substances. The safety cabinets are subject to the test criteria of DIN EN 14470-1 which regulate the design and test requirements. There are 4 fire resistance classes (type 15, 30, 60, and 90). The figure stands for the minimum number of minutes for which the safety cabinets are able to resist the fire (type 90). Today, 90 minutes fire resistance is considered the state of the art for laboratory safety cabinets. Fire resistant storage cabinets for com- pressed gas cylinders pursuant to DIN EN 14470-2 In many cases, the local storage and withdrawal of compressed gases is the less expensive solution because the prices for the long pipeline required with central storage are very high, particu- lar with corrosive gases. With local storage, the length of the pipelines is reduced to a minimum, which also lowers the consumption of rinse gases etc. If flexible local storage of compressed gases is required, type G90 safety cabinets are the better choice. Before making the decision for a central or local gas supply, you should by all means consider the latest technical developments. Compressed gas cylinder cabinets certified to EN 14470-2 to- day offer the same safety level as type 90 safety cabinets for storage of flammable fluids: 90 minutes fire resistance. requirements to be met by the storage cabinets are based on various laws. • Equipped with sumps to prevent leaking. They must be able to retain 10 % of the stored amount or at least the contents of the largest tank. • The cabinet must be resistant to corrosion and compatible with the stored acids and alkalis. • The cabinet must be connected to an exhaust air blower which continuously discharges the escaping vapors to the open air. • Strong acids and alkalis must be stored and extracted in separate sections of the cabinet (separate from each other) because their vapors/mists may react and generate heat. CONCLUSION Acid and alkali cabinets Acids and alkalis can give off aggressive vapors, mists, or smoke. Therefore, these substances must be stored in such a way that neither people nor the environment are in danger. Acids and alkalis can be stored directly at the workplace – sep- arately if possible – in special so-called "acid/alkali cabinets" made of mostly corrosion-resistant material. However, there is no German DIN or EN standard for these storage cabinets. The A modern laboratory without hazardous substances is incon- ceivable – just as these chemicals, compressed gases, acids, or alkalis are inconceivable without their immanent risks. However, you can reduce the risks associated with the stor- age of these hazardous substances to a minimum with safety storage cabinets designed and fire chamber-tested in accord- ance with European standards EN 14470 Part 1 and Part 2, and adequate cabinets for storage of aggressive but not flammable hazardous substances! co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1075

1077

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment Safety Cabinets Safety Cabinets, asecos Safety cabinets with folding doors and interior equipment Safety cabinets for proper storage of hazardous substances in work areas, complies with TRGS 510 (Appendix 3). Type-tested to withstand fire for 90 minutes as defined in EN 14470-1 (Type 90) and DIN 12925-1 (FWF90). GS tested, CE compliant. Expansion joints provide protection in case of fire. Fine steel outer shell with plastic coat- ing, light gray (RAL 7035 ), plastic coating with good chemical, impact and scratch resist- ance characteristics applied to inner surface. Edge protection on insulation material. Ex- ternal ground connection. Model S90.196.120.FDAC with AGT and automatic door-closing Open two doors with one hand (AGT). Integrated door-closing automatic releases the locked doors after ca. 60 seconds. Visual and acoustic alarm before door is closed. Smooth door locking process with air suspension. Complete locking mechanism outside of the storage room, increased corrosion protection of modules which are relevant regard- ing safety. Safety in case of fire, doors close automatically due to integrated thermal re- lease. Serial equipment: • 2 folding doors • AGT (Asynchron gekoppelter Türantrieb = asynchronously linked door drive) • TSA (Tür-Schließ-Automatik = automatic door-lock) • Door-catching device • Profile cylinder lock (chamber can be integrated in available locking systems) • Adjustment aids to balance floor bumps • Integrated air ducts ready for connection (NW 75) to a technical exhaust system • Earth connection • Outer dimensions (W × D × H): ca. 1196 × 616 × 1968 mm Interior dimensions (W × D × H) Shelf: 1040 × 432 × 30 mm Perforated plate insert: 1017 × 482 × 66 mm Bottom collecting pan: 1024 × 489 × 86 mm Drawer: 844 × 488 × 90 mm Article 1 Safety cabinet S90.196.120.FDAC (without interior) Order No. 10 13 13119 Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Interior equipment packages model S90.196.120.FDAC (powder-coated steel plate): • height-adjustable shelves • drawers Recommended configuration: 3 shelves, perforated plate insert and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR or 6 drawers and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Article 2 3 Shelves, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 4 Shelves, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 4 drawers and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 5 drawers and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 6 drawers and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Order No. 10 13 13127 10 13 13128 10 13 13147 10 13 13148 10 13 13149 Modell S90.196.060.FDAC with automatic door-closing Integrated door-closing automatic releases the locked door after ca. 60 seconds. Visual and acoustic alarm before door is closed. Smooth door locking process with air suspen- sion. Complete locking mechanism outside of the storage room, increased corrosion pro- tection of modules which are relevant regarding safety. Safety in case of fire, door closes automatically due to integrated thermal release. Serial equipment: • 1 folding door (door hinge left) • TSA (Tür-Schließ-Automatik = automatic door lock) • Door-catching device • Profile cylinder lock (chamber can be integrated in available locking systems) • Adjustment aids to balance bumps • Integrated air ducts ready for connection (NW 75) to a technical exhaust system • Earth connection • Outer dimensions (W × D × H): ca. 596 × 616 × 1968 mm Interior dimensions (W × D × H) Shelf: Perforated plate insert: 409 × 474 × 107 mm Bottom collecting pan: 417 × 482 × 127 mm Drawer: Article 3 Safety cabinet S90.196.060.FDAC (without interior) Order No. 10 13 13235 440 × 432 × 30 mm 345 × 500 × 50 mm Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Continued on next page 21 3 4 1076

1078

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment Safety Cabinets Interior equipment packages model S90.196.060.FDAC (powder-coated steel plate): • height-adjustable shelves • drawers Recommended configuration: 3 shelfes, perforated plate insert and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR or 6 drawers and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Article 3 Shelves, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 4 Shelves, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 4 drawers and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 5 drawers and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 4 6 drawers and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Order No. 10 13 13249 10 13 13250 10 13 13267 10 13 13268 10 13 13269 Safety Cabinets, asecos Safety cabinets with wing doors and interior equipment Safety cabinets for proper storage of hazardous substances in work areas, complies with TRGS 510 (Appendix 3). Type-tested to withstand fire for 90 minutes as defined in EN 14470-1 (Type 90) and DIN 12925-1 (FWF90). GS tested, CE compliant. Expansion joints provide protection in case of fire. Fine steel outer shell with plastic coat- ing, light gray (RAL 7035 ), plastic coating with good chemical, impact and scratch resist- ance characteristics applied to inner surface. Edge protection on insulation material. Ex- ternal ground connection. Modell S90.196.120.WDAS with door-catching device Soft, air-sprung closing behavior of the doors. The entire closing mechanism is outside of the storage space for increased corrosion protection of safety-relevant components. The door-catching device locks the doors for safe transfer in and removal from the cabinet. Safety in case of fire: doors close automatically thanks to the integrated temperature-con- trolled tripping function. Serial equipment: • 2 folding doors • Door-catching device • Profile cylinder lock (chamber can be integrated in available locking systems) • Adjustment aids to balance floor bumps • Integrated air ducts ready for connection (NW 75) to a technical exhaust system • Earth connection • Outer dimensions (W × D × H): ca. 1196 × 616 × 1968 mm Interior dimensions (W × D × H) Shelf: 1040 × 432 × 30 mm Perforated plate insert: 1017 × 482 × 66 mm Bottom collecting pan: 1024 × 489 × 86 mm Article 5 Safety cabinet S90.196.120.WDAS (without interior) Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Order No. 10 13 13116 Interior equipment packages model S90.196.120.WDAS (powder-coated steel plate): • height-adjustable shelfs Recommended configuration: 3 shelfs, perforated plate insert and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Article 6 3 Shelves, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 4 Shelves, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Order No. 10 13 13127 10 13 13128 5 6 We are also glad to help you in person. Give us a call ! Continued on next page To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1077 co d e b e w

1079

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment 1 2 3 5 1078 Safety Cabinets Model S90.196.060.WDAS with door-catching device Soft, air-sprung closing behavior of the doors. The entire closing mechanism is outside of the storage space for increased corrosion protection of safety-relevant components. The door-catching device locks the doors for safe transfer in and removal from the cabinet. Safety in case of fire: doors close automatically thanks to the integrated temperature-con- trolled tripping function. Serial equipment: • 1 folding door (door hinge left) • Door-catching device • Profile cylinder lock (chamber can be integrated in available locking system) • Adjustment aids to balance floor bumps • Integrated air ducts ready for connection (NW 75) to a technical exhaust system • Earth connection • Outer dimensions (W × D × H): ca. 596 × 616 × 1968 mm Interior dimensions (W × D × H) Shelf: Perforated plate insert: 409 × 474 × 107 mm Bottom collecting pan: 417 × 482 × 127 mm 440 × 432 × 30 mm Article 1 Safety cabinet S90.196.060.WDAS (without interior) Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Order No. 10 13 13228 Interior equipment packages model S90.196.060.WDAS (powder-coated steel plate): • height-adjustable shelfs Recommended configuration: 3 shelfs, perforated plate insert and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Article 2 3 Shelves, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 4 Shelves, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Order No. 10 13 13249 10 13 13250 Safety Cabinets, asecos Acid and alkali cabinets with interior fittings Safe and proper storage of aggressive hazardous material. GS-approved, laboratory fur- niture standard EN 14727. Body made of epoxy resin-coated steel sheet RAL 7035 (light grey), interior made of highly resistant melamine resin-coated special material plates. Circumferential synthetic lip seals prevent noxious fumes from escaping. Two hermetical- ly separated storage compartments, vented separately. Door opening angle more than 90°. Corrosion-resistant, metal-free air channels. Interior largely freely of metal. Shelves: with removable, liquid-proof and highly resistant plastic trays with general build- ings supervisory approval (DlBt). Model SL.196.120.MV • 2 folding doors (vertical partition) • Outside dimensions (W × D × H) mm: ca. 1197 × 603 × 1965 Article 3 Model SL.196.120.MV (without interior) Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Model SL.196.060.MH • 2 folding doors (horizontal partition) • Outside dimensions (W × D × H) mm: ca. 597 × 603 × 1965 Article 4 Model SL.196.060.MH (without interior) Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Order No. 10 13 19120 Order No. 10 13 19060 Interior equipment packages Recommended configuration: 12 tray pull-outs (SL.196.120.MV), 6 tray pull-outs (SL.196.060.MH) Article 8 tray pull-outs 5 12 tray pull-outs 4 tray pull-outs 6 6 tray pull-outs Width model mm 1200 1200 600 600 Width × Depth × Height mm 407 × 468 × 80 (each drawer) 407 × 468 × 80 (each drawer) 407 × 468 × 80 (each drawer) 407 × 468 × 80 (each drawer) Order No. 10 13 13607 10 13 13608 10 13 13614 10 13 13615 Typ 90 fire resistant gas cylinder cabinet Gas cylinder cabinets for proper storage, provision, and removal of gas cylinders in work rooms pursuant to TRGS 510 and TRBS 3145. Type-tested fire resistance for a period of 90 minutes pursuant to DIN EN 14470-2 (G90), GS approved. Fire protection insulation with intumescent joint seals. Body made of plas- tic-coated sheet steel in RAL 7035 (light grey), interior surfaces coated with impact- and scratch-proof synthetics highly resistant to chemicals. Continued on next page

1080

Laboratory Facilities Protective Equipment 4 6 Safety Cabinets Serial equipment: • 2 folding doors • Door opening angle max. 180° • Profile cylinder lock (chamber can be integrated in available locking systems) • Adjustment aids to balance floor bumps • Earth connection • Integrated air ducts ready for connection (NW 75) to a technical exhaust system • Options for pipeline ducts through the cabinet ceiling. Article 7 G90.205.120 (without interior) Storage capacity gas cylinders 4 × 50 l Order No. 10 13 15120 Compressed gas cylinder cabinet also available in widths of 600 mm, 900 mm and 1400 mm. Delivery costs depending on place of delivery. Interior equipment version model G90.205.120 Interior fitting consists of: • Roll-in flap • Cylinder holder with 4 tension belts • Mounting rails Article 8 Interior equipment Order No. 10 13 13775 Safety Underbench Cabinets, asecos Suitable for placement under fume hoods. Proper storage of hazardous substances in work areas in compliance with TRGS 510 (Appendix 3). Type-tested to withstand fire for 90 minutes as defined in EN 14470-1 (Type 90). GS-approved, in conformity with CE. Expansion joints provide protection in case of fire. Fine sheet steel outer shell with plastic coating, light gray (RAL 7035). Plastic coating with good chemical, impact and scratch resistance characteristics applied to inner surface. Edge protection on insulation material. External ground connection. 7 8 Model UB90.060.110.S • one drawer, can be locked in any position • useable internal height (without perforated insert): 465 mm Standard equipment: • integrated collecting pan acc. to StawaR • open drawer closes in case of fire (thermal activation) • Ground cable with clamp in the drawer. Technical data: External dimensions (W × D × H): Collecting pan (W × D × H): Drawer load capacity (distributed load): 50 kg approx. 1102 × 574 × 600 mm approx. 930 × 440 × 85 mm Article 9 Safety cabinet UB90.060.110.S with collecting pan Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Interior equipment versions model VBF.60.110-S AT Article Perforated plate insert (stainless steel 1.4301) 2nd drawer level (powder-coated steel plate) Order No. 91 13 56011 Order No. 10 13 13424 91 13 18053 Model UB90.060.110.2S • with two drawers • useable internal height per drawer (without perforated insert): 465 mm Standard equipment: • integrated collecting pan acc. to. StawaR in each drawer • open drawer closes in case of fire (thermal activation) • ground cable with clamp in the drawer. Technical data: External dimensions (W × D × H): Collecting pan (W × D × H): Drawer load capacity (distributed load): 50 kg approx. 1102 × 574 × 600 mm approx. 425 × 440 × 85 mm Article AK Safety cabinet UB90.060.110.2S with collecting pans Order No. 10 13 13427 Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Interior equipment versions model UB90.060.110.2S AL Article Perforated plate insert (stainless steel 1.4301), left or right drawer 2nd drawer level (powder-coated steel plate), left or right drawer Order No. 10 13 19975 10 13 13407 9 AT AK AL co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1079 Continued on next page

1081

Laboratory Facilities / Hand O2 Protective Equipment / Cleanroom Systems Safety Cabinets Model UB90.060.110.2T • with double wing doors • usable inner height (collection tray with perforated metal insert): 400 mm Standard equipment: • Doors close automatically in case of fire (thermal activation) Technical data: External dimensions (W × D × H): Interior equipment (W × D × H) Tray: Perforated plate insert: Bottom collecting pan: approx. 1102 × 574 × 600 mm 969 × 416 × 20 mm 955 × 425 × 60 mm 959 × 426 × 75 mm Article 1 Safety cabinet UB90.060.110.2T without interior equipment Order No. 10 13 13443 Delivery costs depending on place of delivery Interior equipment packages model UB90.060.110.2T (powder-coated steel plate) Recommended configuration: perforated plate insert and bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR Article Order No. 2 Perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 10 13 13447 Tray, perforated plate insert, bottom collecting pan acc. to StawaR 10 13 13453 PCR Workbenches PCR Cabinet, LAT Total sterilisation The new CRUMA PCR cabin was developed specifically for DNA-carry-over-blocking under application of PCR technology (Polymerase Chain Reaction). The three UV tubes and the timer provide for total sterilisation of the material inside the chamber and on the entire working surface, preventing a potential cross-contamination of DNA and ARN samples which may result in false-positive test results. The 4 mm thick hardened glass acts as a filter for the UV radiation and protects the oper- ator as well as the environment. If the front door is opened accidentally, the UV lamps are switched off automatically to ensure complete protection for the operator. PCR 62 W 230 V / 50 Hz 235 mm Technical data: Technique: Power: Voltage: Front opening height: Internal dimensions (W×D×H): 50 × 565 × 605 mm Outer dimensions (W×D×H): 60 × 600 × 775 mm 40.2 kg Weight: DNA/RNA extraction Class: without Filter: UV light sources: 3 Article PCR cabinet Comes fully assembled. Order No. 10 20 10114 Laminar Flow Cabinets Laminar Flow Cabinet, Vertical, Cruma FL, LAT The Cruma FL-2, an innovative workbench for the cleanroom, offers the following features: digital control screen, filter change warning, programmable timer, large front plate, varia- ble number of sockets. In the FL, modern design is complemented by state-of-the-art technology. Easy operation – Plug and Play. In the FL models, the air flow passes through a HEPA H-14 filter (made pursuant to EN- 1822) at constant speed, travelling vertically through the cabinet in a laminar flow and producing a Class 100 sterile area (in accordance with AF standards209E, corresponding to ISO class 5) to protect the sample from external contamination. Cross contamination between the samples is prevented as well. The filter system has an efficiency of at least 99.995% for particles from 0.3 µm, as well an extraction rate of 100%. Application: • Manipulations which require sample protection to avoid contamination Continued on next page 1 2 co d e b e w WWW4U100 co d e b e w WWW4U099 3 1080

1082

Laboratory Facilities Cleanroom Systems / Water Treatment Laminar Flow Cabinets Users: • Food industry labs in general • Transfer of drugs in pharmaceutical departments • Haematology and clinical analysis Technical data: Power: Delivery: Class: Filter: Vertikal stream UV 225 W fully-assembled 100/ISO 5 HEPA H-14 Type 3 Cruma FL 1 4 Cruma FL 2 5 years’ warranty Inner dimensions mm 575 × 565 × 605 1100 × 540 × 610 Outer dimensions mm 800 × 600 × 775 1200 × 600 × 1140 Order No. 10 20 10121 10 20 10122 4 Ion Exchanger Cartridges Service regeneration of demineraliser cartridges, Service Refilling of VE-reusable cartridges with regenerated, batch-monitored blending bed ion-exchanger resins. For reliable operation of ion-exchangers. Only for drinking water! Nominal size 425 800 1500 2000 2800 4000 6000 7000 11000 15000 Capacity at 10° GSG Deviating sizes and regeneration service manuals upon request! Order No. 10 99 50425 10 99 50800 10 99 51500 10 99 52000 10 99 52800 10 99 54000 10 99 56000 10 99 57000 10 99 51100 10 99 51501 Demineralizers, behropur®, Behr behropur® mixed bed ion exchangers supply fully demineralized water in compliance with the following specifications: • Quality 3 in the sense of the classification pursuant to DIN ISO 3696:1987 – Water for analytical purposes 5 • Pharmaceutical specification pursuant to VDI guideline VDI 2083 – Cleanroom technol- ogy. quality, generation, and distribution of ultrapure water • European and German Pharmacopoeia (Deutsches Arzneimittelbuch, DAB) • behropur® mixed bed ion exchangers contain resins of tested quality. Absolutely even distribution of water within the unit ensures optimum utilization of the exchanger capacities for water with a very low conductivity over the whole capacity of the demineralizer. behropur® demineralizers with unpressurized gravity-flow output Practical mixed bed (anionic & cationic) ion exchanger in an especially thick-walled, robust blue polyethylene container with gravity-fed unpressurized output to a reservoir. It is also ideal for second stage deionization of output from reverse osmosis units and for use in aquaria containing particularly sensitive fish species. • Can be connected directly to the water line and is immediately ready for operation. • Since the water enters at the bottom of the canister, air is automatically displaced. • The polyethylene slit-jet does not provide breeding ground for bacteria. • The slit-jet unit is robust and easily cleaned. It is impervious to damage resulting from mechanical stress or water pressure. • The slit-jet unit is sealed into the canister base by means of a special Behr thermal fusion process. A secure and leak-proof bond results. • Conductance meter is mounted directly on canister. • The B 5 and B 10 canisters may be wall-mounted using the provided mounting brackets. • Automatic shutoff at preselectable limits and levels. • Conductance is monitored by meter mounted directly an resin canister. Also available with remote-location meter. 5 co d e b e w WWXKS021 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1081 Continued on next page

1083

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment Ion Exchanger Cartridges Performance data Model Capacity at 10°dH 500 l 1000 l B5 B10 Max. flow rate l/h 50 100 Dia. cm 16 21 Height cm 53 63 Type Version B5 complete with conductivity meter B10 complete with conductivity meter B5Z Second cartridge B10Z Second cartridge B5A with conductivity meter, limit switch and solenoid valve B10A with conductivity meter, limit switch and solenoid valve Order No. 93 48 20005 93 48 20010 93 48 20050 93 48 20110 93 48 50005 93 48 50010 Capacity: cut-off at 20 µS 1 behropur® demineralizers with nylon resin canisters - operating pressures up to 8 bar User-friendly and reliable mixed bed ion exchanger for low to medium volume high purity water requirements. Optimal for glassware washers, general laboratory use and for small- er industrial applications. Suitable for second stage purification in conjunction with re- verse osmosis units. • Optimal exploitation of the full ion exchange capacity by means of absolutely uniform water distribution through the resin bed. • May be connected directly to water supply without a pressure reducer. • Resistant to load cycles. • Conductance is monitored by meter mounted directly on resin canister; also available with remote-location meter. 1 B10dN B22dN B45dN • Optional automatic shutdown at preselectable limits and levels. Performance data Model Capacity at 10°dH 1200 l 2400 l 5500 l Max. flow rate l/h 300 500 800 Dia. cm 21 21 26 Height w. CM cm 68 112 125 Height canister cm 55 98 110 Version Type B10dN complete with conductivity meter B22dN complete with conductivity meter B45dN complete with conductivity meter B10dNZ Second cartridge B22dNZ Second cartridge B45dNZ Second cartridge B10dNA with conductivity meter, limit switch and solenoid valve B22dNA with conductivity meter, limit switch and solenoid valve B45dNA with conductivity meter, limit switch and solenoid valve Capacity: cut-off at 20 µS Order No. 93 48 30011 93 48 30023 93 48 30046 93 48 30111 93 48 30123 93 48 30146 93 48 50112 93 48 50123 93 48 50146 2 behropur® mixed bed stainless steel ion exchange units - operating pressures up to 10 bar Standard canister made of V4A stainless steel with widespread applicability. Useful for water supply of lab glassware washers, general laboratory pure water supply and low-de- mand industrial applications. Also suitable as a second stage purification following re- verse osmosis units. • Optimal exploitation of the full ion exchange capacity by means of absolutely uniform water distribution through the resin bed. • Throughput rates up to 700 l/h. • May be connected directly to water supply without a pressure reducer. • Resistant to damage from water pressure peaks and variation. • Hard rubber collars vulcanized onto the base and top of the canister provide effective protection. • Convenient carrying handles molded into the upper protective collar. • Conductance monitor with meter mounted directly on resin canister. Also available with remote-location meter. • Automatic shutdown at preselectable limits and levels. Performance data Model Capacity at 10°dH 2800 l 4000 l Max. flow rate l/h 500 700 Dia. cm 24 24 Height w. CM cm 74 84 Height canister cm 60 70 Version complete with conductivity meter complete with conductivity meter E28d E40d Type E28d E40d E28dZ Second cartridge E40dZ Second cartridge E28dA with conductivity meter, limit switch and solenoid valve E40dA with conductivity meter, limit switch and solenoid valve Capacity: cut-off at 20 µS Order No. 93 48 40028 93 48 40040 93 48 40128 93 48 40140 93 48 50128 93 48 50140 Continued on next page 2 3 1082

1084

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment Ion Exchanger Cartridges behrotest® float level switch for guide value meter Article 3 behrotest® float level switch SW2 Order No. 10 48 50700 Particle-free water: behropur® filter FG 130 Working downstream of the ion exchanger, the filter fully retains even the finest particles to protect your valuable equipment. The transparent enclosure of the FG 130 allows you to check the condition of the filter cartridge at one glance. Depending on the requirements, use a universal filter (5 µ) or an activated carbon filter (20 µ). Downstream filters must only be used with pressure-resistant behropur® ion ex- changers. Unpressurized exchangers would be destroyed by the counterpressure. Risk of expensive consequential damages! Article 4 FG 130 Filter enclosure for filter partridges of a length of 5 ″. Transparent polypropylene enclosure. Connections 3/4 ″, maximum opera- ting pressure 8 bar, max. temperature 50°C FE 130 Filter cartridge, polypropylene, 5 µ, length 5 ″, max. pressure 6 bar, max. temperature 80°C AF 130 Filter cartridge, activated carbon, 20 µ, length 5 ″, max. pressure 6 bar, max. temperature 50°C Order No. 10 48 60260 10 48 60261 10 48 60262 Accessories Article 5 Quick-acting coupling for demineralizer, pressure-tight Order No. 10 48 60271 4 5 Ion Exchange Systems, ELGA LabWater / Veolia Water Technolo- gies Deutschland GmbH 6 6 7 Type SD ion exchangers made of stainless steel Stainless steel cartridges for producing fully deionized water by means of blending-bed ion exchange resin. Connections for water inlet and water outlet 3/4 ″ external thread. The cartridges are designed for operating pressures of up to 10 bar. A hose kit is required for the operation of an SD cartridge. Different measurement devices are available to deter- mine the con-ductivity. Flow rate l/h 300 950 1000 1000 1800 1800 Capacity at 10° TDS l 2000 2800 4000 6000 8400 14000 93 14 11121 93 14 11141 93 14 11161 93 14 11181 10 14 70840 10 14 71400 SD 2000 SD 2800 SD 4000 SD 6000 SD 8400 SD 14000 mm 490 600 700 1155 750 1150 Order No. Ø mm 240 240 240 240 363 363 Height Conductivity meters to determine the water quality from the ion exchanger and accessories Article Conductivity meter LFM AC 1 7 Conductivity meter LFM 11) Conductivity meter LFM 31) Conductivity meter LFM 51) T-piece as spare part (Veolia cell constant and jack plug) Order No. 10 14 71000 10 14 71001 10 14 71002 10 14 71003 10 14 71950 A measuring cell, e.g. the above-named T-piece, is required for operating conductivity meter LFM 1, 3, 5 Other accessories Article Tube set SD, ¾ ″ Hose set for series connection Transition pieces from R 3/4 ″ to quick release Quick release only male (1 pair) Quick release only female (1 pair) Order No. 10 14 71590 10 14 71948 10 14 74098 10 14 71943 10 14 71944 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1083

1085

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment 1 6 2 5 Ion Exchanger Cartridges AQUADEM® Ion Exchanger Systems, Werner Desalting using ion exchange cartridges by Werner. Economical water desalting for the individual lab’s requirements, using the correct cartridge size: • Plastic or stainless steel unpressurized or pressure resistant cartridges • Quick-connect couplings make them very easy to use • Filled with quality controlled, mixed bed ion exchangers that can be regenerated on a continuous basis; practical disposable resins are available on request • Established brand product • Wide range of accessories to met the individual requirements AQUADEM® DL ion exchanger system • Unpressurized water desalting cartridges in plastic case filled with mixed bed resin that can be regenerated Type • Ready-to-use, economical compact solution for low-volume applications • Comfortable generation of pure water at the laboratory table • Practical and simple to use Flow rate l/h 50 100 Dimensions with conduc- tivity meter Ø × H mm 160 × 480 210 × 560 Capacity at 10° dGS 500 1000 Order No. 93 02 41006 93 02 41011 1 5 DL 2 10 DL Accessories DL Article Connection set SL3 for models DL Inlet and outlet tube, flow-through electrode, riser pipe SL3 conductometer analog with LED display green/red Connection set GS3 for models DF Inlet and outlet tube, flow-through electrode, riser pipe GS3 conductometer digital with limit value contact Order No. 10 14 04018 93 02 43219 AQUADEM® DF-N ion exchanger system • Plastic pressure-resistant pure water cartridges filled with mixed bed resin that can be regenerated – the 1:1 successor product for the DF series • Patented connection head with integrated conductivity measuring cell • Optionally available with calibration certificate • 4 different sizes available to meet all requirements • Ideal for integration into a cabinet 3 4 Type Capacity at 10° dGS 3 8 DF-N 1000 4 12 DF-N 1500 5 22 DF-N 2750 6 42 DF-N 5000 Accessories DF Flow rate l/h 500 600 800 1000 Dimensions with con- ductivity meter Ø × H mm 160 × 620 180 × 770 200 × 920 250 × 1050 Order No. 93 02 42009 93 02 42013 93 02 42023 93 02 42043 Article Connection set SL3 for models DF Inlet and outlet tube, adapter, SL3 conductometer with LED dis- play green/red Connection set S3 for models DF Inlet and outlet tube, adapter, S3 conductometer with digital display Connection set GS3 for models DF Inlet and outlet tube, adapter, GS3 conductometer with limit va- lue contact, digital display Order No. 10 14 04022 93 02 43209 10 14 04005 AQUADEM® SDF ion exchanger system • Pressure resistant stainless steel water desalting cartridge, filled with mixed bed resin that can be regenerated • AQUADEM® SDF 20 l - classic standard equipment for laboratory glassware washers • Long-lifetime and rugged enough for transport, suitable for very heavy work loads Type Capacity at 10° dGS 7 13 SDF 1400 8 20 SDF 2500 9 42 SDF 5000 Flow rate l/h 200 600 800 Dimensions with con- ductivity meter Ø × H mm 237 × 405 237 × 555 237 × 1180 Order No. 93 02 43014 93 02 43021 93 02 43043 Continued on next page 8 9 7 1084

1086

Ion Exchanger Cartridges Accessories SDF Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment Article Connection set SL3 for models SDF Inlet and outlet tube, flow-through electrode, SL3 conductome- ter LED display green/red Connection set S3 for models SDF Inlet and outlet tube, flow-through electrode, S3 conductometer with digital display Connection set GS3 for models SDF Inlet and outlet tube, flow-through electrode, GS3 conductome- ter with limit value contact, digital display Order No. 10 14 04023 10 14 04007 10 14 04008 Sample order for all models: Please order a cartridge and a matching connector kit from the range of accessories. Replacement cartridges are ordered without connector kit. AQUADEM® conductivity meter Conductivity meter SL 3 Battery-operated micro conductivity meter for clipping on to an AQUADEM measuring cell. The information is indication by means of a green and a red LED. Flashing frequency automatically every 4 seconds. • Indication 0 to 10 µS/cm: 1 × LED green • Indication > 10 µS/cm: 1 × LED red (flashing) • Battery lifetime: approx. 4 years Conductivity meter S 3 Conductivity meter S 3 (digital) with separate power adapter and adjustable switching points without switching contact. • Measuring range: 0 – 199.9 µS/cm • Power adapter voltage: 100 – 240 V AC • Measuring cell factor: C = 0.1 • Switching points: 0.5/1.3/2.0/2.4/4.3/7.5/10/15/20/30/50 µS/cm, adjustable via rotary coding switch; switching point indication via LED Conductivity meter GS 3 Conductivity meter GS 3 (digital) with separate power adapter and adjustable switching points with switching contact. • Measuring range: 0 – 199,9 µS/cm • Power adapter voltage: 100 – 240 V AC • Measuring cell factor: C = 0.1 • Switching points: 0.5/1.3/2.0/2.4/4.3/7.5/10/15/20/30/50 µS/cm, adjustable via rotary coding switch; switching point indication via LED • Switching contact: Changeover contact, floating, 250 V / 2 A Article AT Conductivity meter SL 3 AK Conductivity meter S 3 AL Conductivity meter GS 3 Order No. 10 14 01248 10 14 01246 10 14 01247 Stainless steel Ion-exchange Systems, LAT Premium pressure-resistant ion exchanger cartridges for cost-efficient production of DI water for a wide range of applications: warewashers, autoclaves, high-purity water sys- tems, and general laboratory applications. The cartridges come with R3/4″ threaded con- nections but can be changed to quick-lock coupling without any problems. The compres- sive strength is 10 bar. The optional conductivity meter determines the water quality and signals when the resins should be regenerated. Type LAT1500 LAT2000 LAT2800 LAT4000 LAT6000 Capacity at 10° TDS l 1500 2000 2800 4000 6000 Flow rate l/h 300 300 950 1000 1000 Ø H Wght Order No. mm 240 240 240 240 240 mm 410 490 570 700 1155 kg 14 18 24 27 45 10 20 11500 10 20 12000 10 20 12800 10 20 14000 10 20 16000 AT AK AL co d e b e w WWW4U087 Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1085

1087

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment Ion Exchanger Cartridges Ion-exchange System DS 450, LAT Unpressurized synthetic cartridge made of blue polyethylene, filled with mixed-bed resins. For treatment of small amounts of water in medical practices, small labs, or for production of battery water. An analog conductivity meter, a wall bracket, and 2 × 1.5 m tubing are comprised in the delivery. • Pure water quality 0.1 – 20 µS/cm • Tubing connection R3/4 ″ AG Type Capacity at 10° TDS l DS 450 disposable resin 425 DS 450 replacement cartridge 425 Flow rate l/h 50 50 Ø Height Weight Order No. mm mm 100 600 100 600 kg 3 3 10 20 19450 10 20 19451 co d e b e w WWW4U091 1 Conductometers, LAT Digital conductometer for conductivity and temperature control of high-purity and ultrapure water. The display shows µs/cm and temperature in °C at the same time. When a setpoint value is exceeded, the conductometer issues an optical and acoustic alarm. Automatic temper- ature compensation, RS232 and USB connection. Wall-mounted. Also available as an analog unit for cartridge mounting. Technical data: Conductivity measuring range: 0.055 – 199.9 µs/cm Temperature measuring range: 0.1 – 99.9°C Limit value setting: Electrical connection: Thread: 0.055 – 30 µs/cm infinitely variable 230 V/50–60 Hz R3/4″ incl. raw and pure water hose, length 1.5 m each co d e b e w WWW4U086 2 Article 1 Digital Conductometer LAT 2 Analog Conductometer LAT Hose set with hose connection R3/4 ″, 2 × 1,5 m Conversion set from R3/4 ″ to quick connect Hose set with hose connect quick connect to cartridge quick Order No. 10 20 15910 10 20 15920 10 20 15931 10 20 15932 10 20 15933 connect Reverse Osmosis Systems Ultra Pure Water Systems Series Ultra Clear™ TP (Touch Panel), Evoqua 3 Ultra Clear™ TP With its wide choice of versions, the user-friendly Ultra Clear TM TP series is sure to offer the right system for your applications. The units are equipped with a fixed dispenser. The Ultra Clear TM TP can optionally be mounted to the wall without any extra accesso- ries. It provides a water quality which, depending on the version, far exceeds all requirements for AAS, HPLC, IC, ICP/MS, cell cultures, microbiology, TOC analysis etc. Technical data: Type I water Ultrapure water output: Resistivity at 25°C: Conductivity at 25°C: TOC: Bacteria: Particles > 0.2 µm: Endotoxins: DNase, RNase, DNS: up to 1.8 l/min 18.2 MΩ-cm 0.055 µS/cm < 1–3 ppb < 0.1 cfu/ml < 1 (per ml) in UF version: < 0.001 EU/ml — — in UF version: free Article Ultra Clear TP UV TM (with TOC monitoring) Ultra Clear TP UV UF TM (with TOC monitoring) Order No. 10 89 03631 10 89 03632 Continued on next page 3 1086

1088

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment 4 co d e b e w WWCGJ001 Reverse Osmosis Systems Ultra Clear™ TP TWF and Ultra Clear™ TP TWF EDI ultra pure water system Technical data: Type II water Flow rate pure water: up to 10 l/h Flow rate pure water with EDI: up to 20 l/h up to 99% Salt rejection: Type I water up to 1.8 l/min Output: Conductivity at 25°C: 0.055 µS/cm < 1–3 ppb TOC: < 0.1 cfu/ml Bacteria: < 1 (per ml) Particles > 0.2 µm: in UF option: < 0.001 EU/ml — Endotoxins: DNase, RNase, DNS: — in UF option: free Ultra Clear™ TP TWF 4 Article Ultra Clear TP 10 TWF 30 UV TM (with TOC monitoring) Ultra Clear TP 10 TWF 30 UV UF TM (with TOC monitoring) Ultra Clear TP 10 TWF 60 UV TM (with TOC monitoring) Ultra Clear TP 10 TWF 60 UV UF TM (with TOC monitoring) Order No. 10 89 03641 10 89 03643 10 89 03651 10 89 03653 Ultra Clear™ TP TWF EDI Article Ultra Clear TP 20 TWF EDI 30 UV TM (with TOC monitoring) Ultra Clear TP 20 TWF EDI 30 UV UF TM (with TOC monitoring) Ultra Clear TP 20 TWF EDI 60 UV TM (with TOC monitoring) Ultra Clear TP 20 TWF EDI 60 UV UF TM (with TOC monitoring) Order No. 10 89 03648 10 89 03649 10 89 03658 10 89 03659 Reverse Osmosis Systems, RO 10-40, Werner A basic solution to meet pure water requirements of 50 to 1,000 liters/day. Can be used as a central or decentralized solution. As a single system that can be expanded to suit your needs, the Reverse Osmosis system by Werner can be upgraded at any time to cope with increased water requirements, for example from 100 liters to 1,000 liters/day. • Pure water treatment for all common laboratory applications: laboratory washers, pre- treatment for ultra-pure water systems, autoclaves, climatic chambers, and all simple analytical processes • Direct connection to tap water supply without any pretreatment • Extra low maintenance • Very low operating costs thanks to durable RO modules > 5 years • Standard delivery comprises the integrated pre-filter, automatic rinsing system, and high-grade stainless steel pressure tubes • 2 integrated conductometers • Conductivity < 0.1 to 199 MS • Programmable limit values (visual alarm) • Calibration certificate for system control as a service option • Optional: 35/60/95/100/200/300/500 liters storage tanks • Optional: post-treatment demineralization module (ion exchange or electrode deioni- zation) • Optional: pressure boost module, UV decontamination, membrane filtration • Available complete as a turnkey unit in a stainless steel frame with all accessories, e.g. tank, pump, post-deionization cartridge Technical data: Supply water: Dimensions W x H x D: Mounting: Weight: Electric supply: Retention rate of salt: Conductivity: Retention rate of bacteria: >99.5% drinking water pursuant to Drinking Water Ordinance, min. 2 bar 600 × 500 × 295 mm wall unit 30 kg (RO 10, 20), 32 kg (RO30, 40) 230 V / 50 Hz > 99% 0.1* – 10 µS / cm (*in combination RO-DI) Type Werner RO 10 Werner RO 20 Werner RO 30 Werner RO 40 co d e b e w Pure water at 15 °C l/h 15 30 45 60 Order No. 93 02 50160 93 02 50170 93 02 50175 93 02 50180 To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1087

1089

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment 2 1 1088 Ultrapure Water Systems Ultrapure Water System, ELGA LabWater / Veolia Water Technologies Deutschland GmbH PURELAB flex ultrapure water system The award-winning PURELAB flex system uniquely combines ease of use with the accu- rate delivery of ultrapure water. The flexible and modular system can be configured to deliver the exact quality of water you need for your applications. PURELAB flex – Key benefits at a glance • Delivers ultrapure water with Type I quality from pretreated or drinking water • Intuitive to use multifunction dispense handset with a large easy-to-read display • Enables recording of relevant operational data on a USB flash drive • Precise fingertip control for drop by drop dispensing or auto-volume dispensing up to 60 l • Dispense rate up to 2 l/min • Flexible and continuously height adjustable dispense handset • Highly efficient purification pack for minimal running costs in the long term • Real-time TOC monitoring to control organic purity • Very simple and easy to set up and maintain • Flexible mounting on wall or bench PURELAB flex – Ultrapure water quality through various treatment technologies: • Reverse osmosis (only PURELAB flex 3) • Ion exchange • UV disinfection (185 nm / 254 nm) • Recirculation • Optional: Point of use filter or bio filter for removal of RNase, DNase and endotoxins Dimensions • PURELAB flex 2: H × W × D = 900 to 1020 × 236 × 374 mm • PURELAB flex 3: H × W × D = 900 to 1020 × 236 × 470 mm Article 1 PURELAB flex pretreated feed water <1 µS/cm, incl. UV, purification pack and TOC monitor 2 PURELAB flex 3 drinking water feed, incl. reverse osmosis, UV, purification Order No. 10 14 75578 10 14 75287 pack and TOC monitor Accessories Article Purification cartridge PURELAB flex 2 Purification cartridge PURELAB flex 2 Point of use filter 0.2 µm Bio filter Wall mounting kit Order No. 10 14 75579 10 14 75286 10 14 73862 10 14 72163 10 14 75587 Pure Water System, ELGA LabWater / Veolia Water Technologies Deutschland GmbH PURELAB Chorus 2 pure water system The PURELAB Chorus 2 produces up to 480 liter of Type II purity water for general labo- ratory applications and can be used as stills replacement. The system minimizes the use of consumables thus enabling permanently low operational costs. The corresponding range of storage reservoirs are designed to maintain optimum purity of stored purified water and provide effective protection against airborne contaminants. These reservoirs can be supplied as stand-alone units or can be positioned on top as well as beneath the PURELAB Chorus 2 to save valuable laboratory space. PURELAB Chorus 2 (RO/DI) – Key benefits at a glance • Optimized resin mixes to maximize consumables capacity • Quick and easy automated sanitization to minimize downtime • Maintains purity of water through auto rinse • Simple to install, operate and maintain • Storage reservoirs with LED level indicator and dispense tap with choice of 2 positioning options • Flexible installation (undertable, bench or wall) Continued on next page

1090

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment Ultrapure Water Systems PURELAB Chorus 2 (RO/DI) – treatment technologies: • Pre-treatment • Reverse osmosis • Purification pack • Optional: Degassing module for CO2 removal, water recovery kit Dimensions: H × W × D = 435 × 375 × 340 mm Article PURELAB Chorus 2 RO/DI 10 l/h, Boost Pump PURELAB Chorus 2 (RO/DI) 10 l/h PURELAB Chorus 2 (RO/DI) 20 l/h, Boost Pump PURELAB Chorus 2 (RO/DI) 20 l/h 15 liter storage reservoir 30 liter storage reservoir 60 liter storage reservoir 100 liter storage reservoir Accessories Article Degassing module Pretreatment cartridge PURELAB Chorus RO module 10 l/h PURELAB Chorus Treatment cartridge PURELAB Chorus 2 Order No. 10 14 76635 10 14 76636 10 14 76637 10 14 76638 10 14 72141 10 14 72142 10 14 72143 10 14 72144 Order No. 10 14 79939 10 14 70737 10 14 70735 10 14 74727 Pure Water System, ELGA LabWater / Veolia Water Technologies Deutschland GmbH PURELAB Chorus pure water system The compact system produces up to 20 l/h (withdrawal >1 l/min) type 2+ ultrapure water from potable tap water. To ensure constant water quality and low operating costs with high requirements, the treated water recirculates from the reservoir to the outlet via the patented electro-deionization module (EDI) and the UV lamp. The colour display shows water parameters, status messages, and the reservoir level at a glance. Alarm values for permeate quality, product water quality and temperature can be set individually. Option- ally, the system can be combined with max. three Halo Dispensers for withdrawal of ul- trapure water, and with end filters. Article PURELAB Chorus 2+ (RO / EDI / UV) 10 l/h, Boostcamp PURELAB Chorus 2+ (RO / EDI / UV) 10 l/h PURELAB Chorus 2+ (RO / EDI / UV) 20 l/h, Boost Pump PURELAB Chorus 2+ (RO / EDI / UV) 20 l/h 15 liter storage reservoir 30 liter storage reservoir 60 liter storage reservoir 100 liter storage reservoir Consumables Article Pretreatment cartridge PURELAB Chorus RO module 10 l/h PURELAB Chorus Treatment cartridge PURELAB Chorus 2 UV lamp POU micro filter Bio filter Degassing module Order No. 10 14 73902 10 14 73903 10 14 73904 10 14 73905 10 14 72141 10 14 72142 10 14 72143 10 14 72144 Order No. 10 14 70737 10 14 70735 10 14 74727 10 14 73932 10 14 70145 10 14 72163 10 14 79939 Accessories Article Wall mount Chorus RO degassing set PURELAB Chorus Order No. 10 14 73997 10 14 70738 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1089

1091

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment co d e b e w WW6X9001 Ultrapure Water Systems Ultrapure Water System OmniaTap, stakpure The Allrounder. For H2O pure types I + II. OmniaTap is the ideal system when both pure water and ultrapure water are required, but in relatively small amounts. The ability to provide both types from a single system results from the combination of ultramodern purification technologies. These also make it possi- ble to connect the system directly to a drinking water tap. A touch on the flexible dispens- er button activates dispensing of ultrapure water type I via the digital dispenser control. The recirculation of the pure water held in the installed 10 litre tank keeps it permanently at type II quality. The pure water tank has a second outlet for feeding downstream end users. Single-handed operation Adapts to working surface Space-saving wall mount OmniaTap 0.055 18.2 5 – 10 up to 2 — < 1 Specifications Type II Pure water performance l/h at 15°C: 6 or 12 0.067 – 0.1 Conductivity µS/cm: Resistance MΩ×cm: 15 – 10 Pure water tank pressurized outlet: optional Type I Conductivity µS/cm: Resistance MΩ×cm: TOC-value1) ppb: Dispensing performance l/min: Endotoxins1) EU/ml: Particles /ml (with sterilizing filter 0.2 µm): Bacteria CFU/ml (with sterilizing filter 0.2 µm): Technical data Operating pressure bar: Supply voltage Volt/Hz: Connected load kW: Connector size: Ambient temperature °C: Dimensions W × H × D mm: Weight kg: 1) in dependence on the feed-water quality < 0.1 2 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.1 ¾ ″ +2 to +35 390×7202)×615 22 OmniaTap UV OmniaTap UV/UF 6 or 12 0.067 – 0.1 15 – 10 optional 0.055 18.2 1 – 5 up to 2 — < 1 6 or 12 0.067 – 0.1 15 – 10 optional 0.055 18.2 1 – 5 up to 1.6 0.001 < 1 < 0.1 < 0.1 2 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.1 ¾ ″ +2 to +35 2 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.1 ¾ ″ +2 to +35 390×7202)×615 390×7202)×615 23 2) with OptiFill Dispenser 23 Ultrapure water systems OmniaTap Type Application OmniaTap 6 AAS, IC, ICP, buffers and media preparation OmniaTap 12 AAS, IC, ICP, buffers and media preparation OmniaTap 6 UV Ultra-trace analysis, ICP-MS, HPLC, TOC OmniaTap 12 UV Ultra-trace analysis, ICP-MS, HPLC, TOC OmniaTap 6 UV/UF Life science and microbiology, cell culture media OmniaTap 12 UV/UF Life science and microbiology, cell culture media Order No. 10 45 48251 10 45 48211 10 45 48252 10 45 48212 10 45 48253 10 45 48213 RO cartridge, ultrapure water cartridge, sterile filter capsule 0.2 µm, sterile overflow and sterile vent filter included. Consumable material Article RO cartridge OmniaTap 6 Pre-treatment cartridge OmniaTap 12 Ultrapure water cartridge Omnia 055 Sterile filter capsule 0.2 µm Bio filter capsule Sterile vent filter Replacement UV-lamp for TOC reduction – Omnia 185 UF-ultrafiltration BIG Accessories Article Wall mount Omnia Disinfection kit Omnia Disinfectant Omnia, 3 Pc./Pack. Pre-treatment unit OmniaTap/Lab 10 ″ Order No. 10 45 49205 10 45 49210 10 45 49203 10 45 49130 10 45 49121 10 45 40400 10 45 40185 10 45 40050 Order No. 10 45 49230 10 45 49256 10 45 49257 10 45 49221 1090

1092

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment Ultrapure Water Systems Ultrapure Water System OmniaPure, stakpure The specialist. For H2O pure type ASTM I. When your need is for highest quality pure water that fulfils the demands of analytical and life science laboratory requirements, then one of these OmniaPure systems type will be right for you. You can configurate it. Flexible in function, economical in operation. The incorporated pre-treatment constantly ensures the reliability of your experimental results and reduces running costs. As free laboratory space is mostly limited, three possibilities for system placement are given: wall-mount, bench-top or, to save bench space, in a base cabinet. The standard OptiFill dispenser and monitoring unit enables convenient and pre- cise filling into laboratory vessels. co d e b e w WW6X9002 Single-handed operation Adapts to working surface Space-saving wall mount OmniaPure 0.055 18.2 5 – 10 — Specifications Type I Conductivity µS/cm: Resistance MΩ×cm: TOC-value1) ppb: TOC monitor: Dispensing performance l/min: up to 2 Endotoxins1) EU/ml: RNase1) ng/ml: DNase1) pg/ml: Particles /ml (with sterilizing fil- ter 0.2 µm): Bacteria CFU/ml (with steriliz- ing filter 0.2 µm): Technical data Operating pressure bar: Supply voltage V/Hz: Connected load kW: Connector size mm: Ambient temperature °C: Dimensions W×H×D mm: Weight kg: 1) in dependence on the feed-water quality 0.5 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.1 3/4 ″ +2 to +35 390×7202)×525 19 — — — < 1 < 0.1 OmniaPure UV OmniaPure UV/UF / UV-TOC 0.055 18.2 1 – 5 — / yes up to 2 — — — < 1 / UV-TOC/UF 0.055 18.2 1 – 5 — / yes up to 1.6 0.001 < 0.01 < 4 < 1 < 0.1 < 0.1 0.5 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.1 3/4 ″ +2 to +35 390×7202)×525 20 2) with OptiFill Dispenser 0.5 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.1 3/4 ″ +2 to +35 390×7202)×525 20 Ultrapure water systems OmniaPure Type OmniaPure OmniaPure UV OmniaPure UV/UF OmniaPure UV-TOC OmniaPure UV-TOC/UF Application AAS, IC, ICP, buffers and media preparation Ultra-trace analysis, ICP-MS, HPLC, TOC-analysis Life science and microbiology, cell culture media Ultra-trace analysis, ICP-MS, HPLC, TOC-analysis Life science and microbiology, cell culture media Order No. 10 45 41821 10 45 41822 10 45 41823 10 45 40004 10 45 40005 Filter cartridges and sterile filter capsule 0.2 µm included. Consumable material Article Pre-treatment cartridge OmniaPure Ultrapure water cartridge Omnia 055 Sterile filter capsule 0.2 µm Bio filter capsule Replacement UV-lamp for TOC reduction – Omnia 185 UF-ultrafiltration BIG Accessories Article Wall mount Omnia Disinfection kit Omnia Disinfectant Omnia, 3 Pc./Pack. Order No. 10 45 49202 10 45 49203 10 45 49130 10 45 49121 10 45 40185 10 45 40050 Order No. 10 45 49230 10 45 49256 10 45 49257 co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1091

1093

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment co d e b e w WW6X9003 Ultrapure Water Systems Ultrapure Water System OmniaLabED+, stakpure The big one. For H2O pure types I + II. OmniaLabED+ is the system of choice when the complete laboratory pure water and ul- tra-pure water requirements are to be fulfilled. The system complies with international water standards such as ASTM, ISO 3696 and CLSI. The economy of it is maximized by the inclusion of a continuously self-regenerating electrodeionizer, without having to give any demanding analytical applications a pass. Further to this, each OmniaLabED+-system holds 100 litres of pure water type II ready for withdrawal in a storage tank that is equipped with quality recirculation. The flexible positioning of the purification modules enables Om- niaLabED+ to be supplied as a tower-unit (mobile on castors) or, to save space, for fitting in a base cabinet. OmniaLabED+ is exactly right as pure water supplier to autoclaves and laboratory washing machines as well as for the withdrawal of type I ultra-pure water for analytics and bioscience applications. Electrodeionization Single-handed operation Space saver: tank in base cabinet OmniaLabED+20 OmniaLabED+40 OmniaLabED+70 40 0.067 – 1 15 – 1 99.9 up to 2 optional < 1 70 0.067 – 1 15 – 1 99.9 up to 2 optional < 1 < 0.1 < 0.1 < 1 < 0.1 Specifications Type II Pure water performance l/h at 15°C: 20 0.067 – 1 Conductivity µS/cm: 15 – 1 Resistance MΩ×cm: Silicate removal1) %: 99.9 Dispensing performance l/min: up to 2 Pure water tank pressurized outlet: optional Particles /ml (with sterilizing filter 0.2 µm): Bacteria CFU/ml (with sterilizing fil- ter 0.2 µm): Typ I Conductivity µS/cm: Resistance MΩ×cm: TOC-value1) ppb (with UV-unit): Technical data Operating pressure bar: Supply voltage V/Hz: Connected load kW: Connector size mm: Ambient temperature °C: Dimensions tower W×H×D mm: Dimensions base cabinet tank mm: 511×800×575 Weight kg: 1) in dependence on the feed-water quality 0.055 18.2 1 – 5 2 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.25 ¾ ″ +2 to +35 511×15202)×575 511×15202)×575 511×15202)×575 0.055 18.2 1 – 5 2 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.25 ¾ ″ +2 to +35 0.055 18.2 1 – 5 2 – 6 90–240/50–60 0.25 ¾ ″ +2 to +35 60 511×800×575 65 2) with OptiFill Dispenser 511×800×575 65 Ultrapure water systems OmniaLabED+ Typical applications: Feedwater for autoclaves and laboratory washers, as well as for analytics and bioscience applications. Article Ultrapure water system OmniaLabED+20 Ultrapure water system OmniaLabED+40 Ultrapure water system OmniaLabED+70 Order No. 10 45 41872 10 45 41874 10 45 41877 RO cartridge, ultrapure water cartridge, sterile filter capsule 0.2 µm, sterile overflow and sterile vent filter + CO2 absorber included. 1092 Continued on next page

1094

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment co d e b e w WWMUD016 Ultrapure Water Systems Accessories/Consumable material Article Pre-treatment unit OmniaLab 10 ″ Spare pre-filter cartridge 10 ″ – 1 µm RO cartridge, set of 2 – Omnia 20 RO cartridge – Omnia 40 RO cartridge, set of 2 – Omnia 70 Ultrapure water cartridge Omnia 055 Sterile filter capsule 0.2 µm UV Tank disinfecting unit UV Flow through disinfection 254 UV Unit for TOC reduction 185 Replacement UV-lamp for TOC reduction – Omnia 185 CO2-Adsorber + sterile vent filter Sterile vent filter Order No. 10 45 49220 10 45 40100 10 45 40011 10 45 40012 10 45 40080 10 45 49203 10 45 49130 10 45 49250 10 45 49251 10 45 49252 10 45 40185 10 45 40200 10 45 40300 Ultrapure Water System, Berrytec® Berrypure® Mini • Ultrapure water system for water quality ASTM I • Fully automated control board with all information • Display 7 inch touch panel (as a standard), with recirculation and flushing • Languages English, German, flow rate 1.6 litres/min for a recommended withdrawal rate of 20 litres/hour/day • Flexible dispenser arm, external, ABS housing • Dimensions Berrypure® Mini (L×W×H) 180 × 350 × 420 mm (without arm, with the RO module 100 mm higher) • Dimensions RO module (L×W×H) 180 × 440 × 550 mm (for feed water generation > 5 µS from tap water) • Models with UV lamp or ultrafiltration filter available as an option • For use with tap water, install our RO module upstream Article Osmosis pack Berrypure® Mini series Osmosis unit 8 l/h, tank 7 l with sterile tank ventilation filter and cleaning cartridge. Generates ultrapure water ASTM type III better than 0.25 µS/cm. Berrypure® Mini UP 18.2 MΩ, e.g. AS, IC, ICP Berrypure® Mini UPUV 18.2 MΩ and UV lamp e.g. HPLC, ICP-MS, TOC analysis, MC Berrypure® Mini UPUVUF 8.2 MΩ, UV lamp and UF module, covers all combinations Berrypure® Mini UPUF 8.2 MΩ and UF module, e.g. PCR, DNS, cell culture TOC real-time measurement for all miniUP Flex systems Sterile final filter 0.22 µm Filter cartridge Berrytec DuoUP Pak Basic Filter cartridge Berrytec DuoUP Pak TOC Filter cartridge errytec DuoUP Pak ION UV lamp Spare UV lamp for mini and Plus series Cleaning cartridge osmosis pack Pretreatment pack osmosis pack for optimisation of the TOC value Order No. 10 63 51065 10 63 52120 10 63 52130 10 63 52140 10 63 52150 10 63 52100 10 83 22300 10 63 52400 10 83 22402 10 63 52404 10 83 22410 10 63 51392 10 63 51393 Berrypure® Ultra Article Berrypure® IR-Control with protective gas atmosphere (Argon) Order No. 10 63 53015 Other system versions such as osmoses, EDI, and ultrapure water for requirements of more than 20 litres/day available on request. co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1093

1095

Laboratory Facilities Water Treatment co d e b e w WWEZ6017 1094 Ultrapure Water Systems arium® mini Compact Lab Water System, Sartorius Lab Products and Services The arium® mini is a compact ultrapure water system that is specially designed for ul- trapure water requirements of less than 10 liters per day. With the capacity to deliver ul- trapure water at a rate of 1 L/min. and a width of only 28 cm, this space-saving unit eas- ily integrates into nearly any lab environment. For analytical and especially critical appli- cations, such as HPLC/UHPLC, arium® mini can be equipped with an optional integrated UV lamp (185/254 nm). This ensures reliable production of ultrapure water that is virtually free of organic components The system is available in two versions: The arium® mini plus is directly connected to a feed water tap. In this system, feed water is treated first by a pre-treatment cartridge, which consists of a combination of activated carbon and a reverse osmosis module. The standard version of arium® mini is independent of a permanently installed water tap. Pretreated feed water is provided in a container. Feed water needed to produce ultrapure water is supplied by the unique 5-liter bag integrated on the side of the system. Uncom- plicated exchange of the bag also facilitates upkeep of the system and considerably re- duces maintenance time compared with conventional tank systems. Features: • Easy bag exchange in less than 5 minutes • No cleaning agents required • Closed system for optimised cleanliness, prevents biofilm formation • Intuitive menu navigation via high-quality touch display, developed on the basis of pro- found customer study & feedback • Small footprint: width 28 cm only • Withdrawal of volumes of 50 ml and up Applications: • GC-MS • ELISA • Reagents preparation • IC • HPLC/UHPLC • Preparation of buffers and media • AAS • Histology • Photometry • SPE • ICP-MS arium® mini plus The compact ultrapure water system was developed for the supply of ASTM type 1 and ASTM type 3 water. The system is suitable for general and analytical applications with a daily requirement of < 10 liters. Technical data: Feed: Maximum flow rate: Voltage: Product water resistivity (at 25°C): Product water type: Drinking water 1 l/min (ASTM Type 1)/ 8 l/h (Type 3) 100 – 240 V 18.2 MΩ × cm & < 20 µS/cm Ultrapure Water (Type 1), Reverse Osmosis Water (Type 3) Article arium® mini plus arium® mini plus with integrated UV lamp For critical analyses, the integrated UV lamp can reduce orga- Order No. 10 55 57301 10 55 57302 nic substances to max. < 5 ppb TOC*. arium® mini The compact ultra-pure water system was designed to supply ASTM type 1 water. The H20-MM-T system is suitable for general as well as analytic applications with a daily re- quirement of < 10 liters. Technical data: Feed: Maximum flow rate: Voltage: Product water resistivity (at 25°C): Product water type: Manual feed with pre-treated water 1 l/min (ASTM Type 1) 100 – 240 V 18.2 MΩ × cm & < 20 µS/cm Ultrapure Water (Type 1) Article arium® mini arium® mini inklusive UV lamp For critical analyses, the integrated UV lamp can reduce orga- Order No. 10 55 57304 10 55 57305 nic substances to max. < 5 ppb TOC*. Please enter the webcode WWEZ6017 to see the other variants and accessories in our online catalogue.

1096

Laboratory Facilities Gas Supply co d e b e w WWQ7T014 Gas Generators Gas Generators CINEL®, Zefa 1 Hydrogen generators • New hydrogen generator for generation of ultrapure hydrogen (99.99999%) • Ideal for laboratory use • Eliminates risks involved in the use of conventional gas cylinders • Based on the new, patented electrolysis cell with patented arrangement of electrodes (best possible insulation between the electrodes) • Maintenance-free cell • Low energy consumption – smaller loss of electrical energy • More efficient electrolysis – higher efficiency • Less electrode wear Applications: FID / GC-MS / ICP-MS Model H2 AD - 180 H2 AD - 500 H2 AD - 800 Flow rate 180 ml/min hydrogen (purity > 99.9999% at a pressure of 10.7 bar) 500 ml/min hydrogen (purity > 99.9999% at a pressure of 10.7 bar) 800 ml/min hydrogen (purity > 99.9999% at a pressure of 10.7 bar) Order No. 10 83 24934 10 83 24935 10 83 20568 2 Nitrogen generators • Nitrogen generators ensure constant and reliable supply of ultrapure nitrogen to LC-MS systems • Utilization of PSA technology • ZEFIRO Zero – without compressor • Low-noise < 50 dB • Little maintenance required – NEW: double interval - now only every 8,000 h • Extensive portfolio of models matching all commonly used LC-MS systems Application: LC-MS / GC-ICP Please enter the webcode WWQ7T014 to see the other models in our online catalogue. Order No. 10 83 24937 Model Zefiro 35 LC-MS Zefiro 5 HP Flow rate 35 l/min nitrogen (purity 99.0% at a pressure of 8 bar) 5 l/min nitrogen (purity 99.999% at a pressure of 5 bar) 1 2 10 83 24938 10 83 25031 Zefiro z 40 LC-MS 40 l/min nitrogen (purity 98.5% at a pressure of 7 bar) 3 Zero air generator • Zero air generators produce laboratory grade purified and hydrocarbon free air from an existing in house oil free compressed air supply. Zero Air Generators remove HC pollut- ants to less than 0.1 ppm, CO to less than 0.1 ppm and all kinds of particles. • Increase of analysis accuracy • Elimination of the need for inconvenient high-pressure gas cylinders, and the accom- panying risks • Ready to use – easy to install – minimum maintenance in yearly intervals • Low-noise (< 50 dB) • Payback period typically < 1 year Application: GC-FID, GC-FPD, GC-NPD Model ZA - 3000 ZA - 6000 Flow rate 3,000 ml/min (contamination HC < 0.1 ppm, CO < 0.1 ppm, particle-free) 6,000 ml/min (contamination HC < 0.1 ppm, CO < 0.1 ppm, particle-free) Order No. 10 83 24936 10 83 29291 Compressor Type CZA Flow rate 15 l/min dried air, max. pressure 7 bar Order No. 10 83 28269 3 Everything for your laboratory – from one source co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1095

1097

Laboratory Facilities Gas Supply co d e b e w WWGZA026 Gas Generators Lab Gas Generators, Dewert Labortechnik 1 Labgas type MA hydrogen generators: electrolysis technology Ensuring reliable and low-cost generation of a continuous volume flow of pure hydrogen, these hydrogen generators make high-pressure steel hydrogen cylinders completely re- dundant in the lab. Consuming low levels of electricty, the generators produce hydrogen from deionised wa- ter at low pressure, and only when required. Choose from various series: Hydrogen generator type MA-N purity 6.0 (99.9999%) The generators of the MA-N series are ideally suited for supplying fuel gas to all detectors routinely used in gas chromatography. Technical data: Outlet pressure: Power supply: Interfaces: Dimensions (WxDxH): 245 × 460 x 500 mm Weight: 3.5 ″ colour display Remote functions 8 bar 110 – 240 V RS 485, Ethernet 23 kg 1 2 Model MA-150N MA-250N MA-400N Flow rate ml/min 150 250 400 Order No. 10 08 00150 10 08 00250 10 08 00400 Hydrogen generator type MA-D purity 7.0 (99.9999%) The generators of series MA-D provide higher-purity hydrogen and are perfect suppliers of carrier gas for the applications GC and GC/MS, as well as of ICP-MS reaction gas. Technical data: Outlet pressure: Power supply: Interface: Dimensions (W×D×H): Weight: 3.5 ″ colour display Remote functions 10 bar, optionally 12 bar 110 – 240 V RS 485, Ethernet 245 × 460 × 500 mm 25 to 28 kg depending on the model Model MA-150D MA-250D MA-400D MA-600D MA-800D MA-1000D MA-1200D Flow rate ml/min 150 250 400 600 800 1000 1200 Order No. 10 08 01150 10 08 01250 10 08 00401 10 08 00601 10 08 00801 10 08 11000 10 08 12000 2 Labgas type GA nitrogen generators: technology PSA pressure swing adsorption Nitrogen generators are suitable for supplying nitrogen to a wide range of laboratory ap- plications. All generators use the time-proven pressure swing adsorption technology (PSA). It uses activated carbon molecular sieves to remove oxygen, hydrocarbons, carbon diox- ide and moisture from compressed air, producing ultrapure nitrogen fit for use in the laboratory. Depending on the model, all generators produce nitrogen with purities ranging from 98% to 99.999% (or better). Technical data: Output pressure: Power supply: Interface: Dimensions (W×D×H): 440 × 855 × 760 mm External, oil-free compressed air required 3.5 ″ colour display Remote functions 6 – 8 bar(g) standard 110 – 240 V RS 485, Ethernet Model GA-T2 GA-T4 GA-T6 GA-T8 GA-T10 Flow rate ml/min 15.5 – 1.9 @ 98 – 99.9999% 31.0 – 3.8 @ 98 – 99.9999% 46.5 – 5.7 @ 98 – 99.9999% 62.0 – 7.6 @ 98 – 99.9999% 77.0 – 9.5 @ 98 – 99.9999% Order No. 10 08 00002 10 08 00004 10 08 00006 10 08 00008 10 08 00010 Continued on next page 1096

1098

Gas Generators 3 Labgas zero air generators type OR: technology catalytic combustion Laboratory Facilities Gas Supply Zero air generators produce a continuous volume flow of clean and dry air with a particu- larly low residual methane content of under 0.1 ppm from an external compressed air source. The compressed air passes through a hot catalytic unit in which all hydrocarbons are oxidised to water and carbon dioxide. This ensures the desired ultra-efficient removal of all hydrocarbons. Choose from various series. Technical data: Output pressure: Dimensions ^(W×D×H): 400 × 550 × 134 mm Power supply: Weight: External, oil-free compressed air required 9 bar(g) max. 230 V 10 kg Model Flow rate Order No. ml/min OR-Z01 4 OR-Z02 8 10 08 00011 10 08 00020 Model Flow rate Order No. ml/min OR-Z03 16 OR-Z04 32 10 08 00030 10 08 00040 3 2 Labgas oxygen generators type GE: technology PSA pressure swing adsorption Using PSA technology, oxygen generators produce a continuous oxygen flow with purities from 90 to 95% from compressed air. Oxygen generators make high-pressure steel oxy- gen cylinders completely redundant in the laboratory. Technical data: Output pressure: Power supply: Interfaces: Dimensions (W×D×H): 440 × 855 × 760 mm External, oil-free compressed air required 3.5 ″ colour display Remote functions 6 bar(g) Standard 110 – 240 V RS 485, Ethernet Model GE-T2 GE-T4 GE-T6 GE-T8 GE-T10 Flow rate l/min 3.2 – 2.7 @ 90 – 95% 6.4 – 5.4 @ 90 – 95% 9.6 – 8.1 @ 90 – 95% 12.8 – 10.8 @ 90 – 95% 16.0 – 13.5 @ 90 – 95% Order No. 10 08 00202 10 08 00404 10 08 00606 10 08 00808 10 08 01010 Further models on request, please contact us. Use the webcode on our website to see a larger b selection of products from a specific manufacturer. w e co d e co d e b e w To see other variants and accessories, please enter the webcode on our website. 1097

1099

INDEX A 972, 974 Abbe Refractometers 259 Absorbents 965 Absorbing Paper Accessories for Desiccators 124 Accessories for Heating Mantles 582, 584 Accessories for Laboratory Glassware Cleaners Accessories for Reaction Vessels Accessories for TitroLine Accessories for TITRONIC Accessories for Ultrasonic 278 331 444 443 Cleaning Units 267 392 accu-jet-Pipette Controller 580 Acid Evaporators, Quartz Acidresistant Infra-Red Heater, Quartz 580 959 Acoustics 128 Acryl-Desiccators 138 Acrylic Glass Racks Acrylic Racks 144 330 Adapters 321 Adapters for Ground Joints 312 Adapters, Receiver Adapters, Reduction 321 324, 325 Adapters, Vacuum 211 Adhesive Acrylic Tapes 279 Adhesive Indicator Tapes Adhesive Microscope Slides 962 210 Adhesive Tapes 210 Adhesive Warning Tapes 1039 Aerobic Degradation Agate Mortars 495 587 Agitated Water Baths 671 Agitators 188 Air Shutter Alarm Clock 956 999 Alcohol Determination 999 Alcohol Determination System 894 Alcoholometers Allihn Condensers, DURAN Glass 310 826 ALU-STECK-Caps 869 Alumimium Dishes 96 Aluminium Baskets Aluminium Blocks 138, 643 Aluminium Bottles 73 Aluminium Caps 33-35, 37, 38, 825, 826 280 Aluminium Containers 868 Aluminium Dishes Aluminium Foils 192 643 Aluminium Racks 868 Aluminium Slices, Round 63, 65 Amber Bottles Anaerobic Containers 828 829 Anaerobic Jars ANALYSETTE 756 847-849, Analytical Balances 851, 857, 860, 861 1098 Analytical Sieves Analyzers, Water Anareobic Degradation Angular Beakers Anti-vibration Tables Apparatus for Determination of Essential Oils in Drugs 764 1048 1039 1014 1064 Aprons Aqua-Sampler Aquarium Areometer Cylinders Areometers Areometers Aspiration Aspiration Systems Aspirator Aspirator Bottles ASTM Centrifuge Tubes ASTM Thermometers ATEX Atomizer Bulb Atomizer, Pressure Autoclavable Carboys Autoclavable Containers Autoclaves 1010 223 1015 124 894 892 892, 894, 897, 999 465, 468 843, 844 841 83 134 878, 879 467 437 79 82 280 283, 286, 287, 292, 294, 295, 297, 298 Automated Sterilisation System for Inoculation Loops Automatic Burettes Automatic Sieve Evaluation Autosampler Vials Autosampler Vials, 835 435-437 756 32-35, 37-39 Amber Glass 33-35, 37, 38 Autosampler Vials, Conical 33-35, 37, 38 Autosampler Vials, Micro 33-35, 37, 38 B Bacterial Counting Device Baffled Flask Bags Bags Bags for Autoclaves Bags, LDPE Bags, Sterile Balances Ball Grinders Ball Mills Ballon, Rubber Barrel Pumps Barrels Barrels, Safety Barrels, Wide Neck Barrels, Wide Neck, 831 824 194 194, 259 260 195 194 845-851, 857, 859-864, 873 507 507, 508 956 449-453 89 90, 172 90 with Welded-in Stopcock 90 Barrier Cream Base Cabinets Basins, Catch Basins, Transport Baskets Baskets Baskets, Transport Baskets, Wire Bath Circulators Bath Thermostats Baths Beaker Brushes Beaker Tongs Beaker, heated Beakerliner Beakers Beakers Beakers, Flat Flange Beer Analyzer Belt Clamps Benches Benches, Safety Work Benchtop Autoclaves Benchtop Centrifuges 240 1062 122 97 95 95, 96 96 95, 96 600, 602, 606, 607 598, 599, 605, 606 564, 587, 588, 592 262 167 103 646 101 101-104, 106, 108, 1014 326 999 187 1057, 1061, 1063 1072 283 707, 712, 714, 716, 719 643 313 259 1039 1039 260 Benchtop Coolers Bends Binding agents Biochemical Oxygen Demand Biogas Determination Biohazard Bags Biological Water Testing Equipment Biologist Sets Bioreactors Blade Mills Blades Block Heater Block Thermostats Blood Bank Refrigerators Blood Diluting Pipettes Blood Investigation, Capillary Pipettes 1018 960 828 520 167 579 579 631 1052 Blotting Devices Blotting Papers Blotting Papers, Equipment Blue-Light Transilluminators BOD Accessories BOD Analyzers BOD Determination BOD Flasks BOD Measurement BOD Thermostatic Chambers Boiling Aids Boiling Rods, DURAN Glass Boiling Stones BOLA Desiccator CABINET 1052 785 786 785 787 1035 1039 1035 1034 1037, 1041 1037 212 212 212 128

1100

INDEX BOLA Multiple Distributor for Bottles Bottle-Top Filters Bottles Bottles Bottles Borer Sets, Cork Bosshead Bottle Brushes Bottle Carrier Bottle Holder Bottle Racks Bottle Screw-Caps Bottle Systems Bottle Thermometers Bottle Top Dispensers Bottle-Top Aspirators Bottle-Top Dispensers 49, 51 217 199 262 99 1014 138 56 42 879 425, 428 841 415, 416, 418, 429, 430 741 42 308 31, 32, 40, 43, 44, 47, 52, 53, 55, 56, 58, 59, 61-65, 69, 71, 73, 74, 80, 81, 89 78 309 824 1034 79 81 74 869 308 742 463, 464 106, 113, 123 816 84, 146, 799, 816, 817 816 799 816-819 281 598 261 261, 262, 867 338 172 92-94 92 93 902, 905 386 386, 387 437, 438, 956 390 437, 438 437 482, 487 526, 527, 835 201-203 Bottles with Sprayer Bottles, Gas Washing Bottles, Matrix Bottles, Oxygen Bottles, Spray Bottles, Storage Bottles, Washing Bottles, Weighing Bottles, Woulfe Type Bottletop Filters Bottling Bowls Box for Centrifuge Tubes Boxes Boxes for Deep Freezers Boxes for PCR Tubes Boxes, Cryo- Boxes, Pipette Bridge thermostats Brushes Brushes Bubble Counters Buchner Funnels Buckets Buckets, Cans, Kettles Buckets, Stainless Steel Buffer Solutions Bulb Pipettes Bulb Pipettes Bulbs Bulbs, Pipette Bulbs, Pressure Bulbs, Single Bulk Good Sampler Bunsen Burners Burette Clamps Burettes Burettes, Titrators, Accessories Burners Burners, Blowers Butyrometers Butyrometers Support 430, 431, 433-438, 440-443 430 526, 528, 570, 834, 835 526 1006 1006 C Cabinets, Safety Calcimeter Calibration Standards Calibration Standards Calipers Canister Pumps Canisters Canisters Canisters, Safety Cans Cans, Safety Cap Strips, PCR Cap Tool Capillaries Caps Caps for Culture Flasks Caps for Matrix Bottles Caps for Microtubes Caps with DIN-Threads, Plastic Caps, Aluminium Caps, Crucible Caps, Screw Carboy Accessoires Carboys Carboys, Rectangular Carboys Carton Boxes Carts Carts Carts, Stainless Steel Cases for Instruments, Steel Casingtubes Casseroles Casseroles Catch Basins Cell Culture Bottles Cell Culture Cell Scrapers Cell Culture Centrifuge Tubes Cell Culture Dishes Cell Culture Flasks Cell Culture Inserts Cell Culture Plates Cell Culture Tubes Cell Scrapers Centrifugal Concentrators Centrifugal Mills Centrifuge Bottles Centrifuge Tube Box 1076-1079 1051 984 984, 985 957 453 86 87, 88, 90 90 85, 94 90 808 809 1053 32-35, 37, 38, 796, 825, 826 825 825 796 319 33-35, 37, 38 118 32, 46, 47, 56, 319, 320 82 82, 89 81 818 1054 1054-1056, 1230 1056 279 310 116 116 122 813, 823 840 798 812 813 806 803, 812 798 840 467-469 514 134 816 Centrifuge Tube Racks Centrifuge Tubes Centrifuge Tubes, Racks Centrifuges 135 134, 135, 798 134 703-707, 709-712, 714, 716-719 Centrifuges stems for Determination of Fat Chairs Chairs Chambers, Accessories Chemical Binders Chemical Protective Gloves Chemically Resistant Pumps 1008, 1009 1064 1065 784 258 237 464, 465, 467-469, 474, 478 Chemiluminescence Documentation Sy- 781, 782 960 Chemist Sets 469 Chemistry Diaphragm Pumps Chemistry Scoop 1015 Chest Freezers, Upright Freezers 632 622-625 Chillers 774 Chromatography Columns Chromatography Papers 776 33-35, 37, 38 Chromatography Tubes 33-35, 37, 38 Chromatography Vials Circulation Chillers 626 Circulation Thermostats 598, 605, 617 Circulation Thermostats, thermoelectric Circulator Baths Circulator Baths Circulators Circulators, Heating Circulators, Refrigerated Clamp Holders Clamps Clamps for Flat Flange Vessels, 617 602 620 600, 602, 606, 621 598, 602 621 198-200 186, 187, 200-203, 318 331 Quick Release 317, 318 Clamps for Joints 203 Clamps, Burette 198, 200 Clamps, Frame 317, 318 Clamps, Ground Joint 317 Clamps, Joint 186, 187 Clamps, Tubing 186 Clamps, Wilo 529 Clay Squares 258 Clean-Room Mats 278 Cleaners Accessories 278 Cleaners, Laboratory Glassware 272 Cleaners, Pipette 267 Cleaners, Ultrasonic Cleaning Agents 252, 253 Cleaning Agents for Ultrasonic Baths 247 Cleaning Agents, Disinfecting Agents Cleaning Concentrates Cleaning Lotions 247 248, 983 242 1099

1101

INDEX Cleaning Solutions Cleaning Sticks Cleaning Tissues Cleaning Wipes Cleansing Brushes Cleansing Papers f 275 246 245, 246 246 261, 262 or Glass Surfaces 965 Climatic Chambers 551-554, 556 Climatic Chambers, Test Chambers 551 555 Climatic Test Chambers Clips, Ground Joint 318 486 Close it 331 Closures for Reaction Vessels 545 CO2 Incubators CO2 Shaker 679 545-548 CO2-Incubators 224 Coats 1030 COD Analyzers 1041 COD Determination COD Photometers 1030 1041 COD Workstations 1044 COD-Measurement 642 Cold Boxes Cold Light Sources 965 473 Cold Traps 146 Collection Containers 107 Collectors Colony Counters 831 Colony Counters 831, 832 1027, 1031 Colorimeter 1027 Colour Measurement Coloured Wash Bottles 74 1046 Column Elution Unit 311 Column Packings 311 Columns Columns 774 137 Combi Racks 143 Combi Vial Racks 477 Combination Pump Systems Combustion Boats, Quartz Glass 121 Combustion Tubes, Combustion Boats Combustion Tubes, Quartz Glass Compact Balances Compact Canisters Compact Shakers Compact Soxhlet Extraction Unit Compact Titrators Compatible Control 120 120 845, 846 88 683 522 431, 444 Bath Thermostats 598, 599 Compressed Air Laboratory Stirrers Compressed Air Sprays Compressed Air Stirrers Compressors Concentration Determination Condenser Clamps 668, 669 213 668, 669, 671 468 974 201, 202 1100 Instruments Conductometers Conductivity Meters Conductivity Meters 310 Condensers 310, 313, 314 Condensers 937, 941 Conductivity Conductivity and Temperature Measuring 939 936 909, 935-937, 941, 943 914, 916, 940, 943, 1086 521 Cone Sample Dividers 321 Cones, DURAN Glass 316 Cones, Quartz Glass 59 Conical Shoulder Bottles 332 Connection Components 48, 49 Connection System 179, 181 Connectors 179 Connectors, Clips 950 Consistometers 552, 553 Constant Climatic Chambers 98 Container Carts 453, 454 Container Pumps 94, 146, 280, 281 Containers 828 Containers, Anaerobic 641 Containers, Insulting 636 Containers, Liquid Nitrogen 90 Containers, Safety 636 Containers, Shipping 94 Containers, Steel 486 Control Seals 874 Control Strips, Temperature 476, 584, 991, 992 Controllers 568, 992 Controllers, Temperature 643 Cool Packs 540-542 Cooled Incubators 643 Coolers Cooling Boxes 642, 644 Cooling Boxes, Chests, Ice Baths 642 644 Cooling Containers Cooling Liquids 216 Cooling Spray 213 Cooling Thermostats 603, 605, 618 Cooling Thermostats and Condensers Cooling Traps Cooling Units Cooling Water Controllers Cooling-Heating Thermostats CoolingThermostats Cork Rings Cork Stoppers Corrosion Measuring Cell Cotton Plug Pipettes Cotton Sticks count Colony Counter Counters Counters 622 313-315, 473 643 996 606 619 146 190 902, 906 382 246 831 957 957, 1030 338 Counters, Gas Bubble 956 Counters, Seconds and Minutes 865 Counting Scales 181 Couplings 337 Couplings, Magnetic Stirrer 161 Cover Glass Forceps 161, 961 Cover Glasses 224 Coveralls 257 Covering Films 414 Cream Syringes 241 Creams Skinguard 118 Crucible Caps, Quartz Glass 117 Crucible Lids 204 Crucible Retort Rings 166 Crucible Tongs 117-119 Crucibles 117 Crucibles, Crucible Lids 747 Crucibles, Filter 813 Cryo Articles 816, 818, 819 Cryo Boxes 643, 820 Cryo Racks 817 Cryo Storage Boxes 814 Cryo Tubes 813 Cryo Tubes and Accessories 814 Cryovials Crystallizing Dishes 114 Crystallizing Dishes, Petri Dishes 114 Culture Flasks 824, 825 825 Culture Flasks Caps 299 Culture Media Preparation 827, 828 Culture Stoppers Culture Tubes 821, 822 821 Culture Tubes with Thread 821 Culture Vessels, Closures 829 Culturing Units Cupboards, First Aid 220 90, 193 Cutters 216 Cutting Boards Cutting Mills 518, 519 Cuvette and Small Vessels Rinser VAKUWASCH 265 983 Cuvette Cleaning Concentrate 984 Cuvette Racks Cuvettes 265, 977-980, 983 Cuvettes, NMR Tubes, Accessories 975 405-408, 410, 894 Cylinders Cytocentrifuge Papers 724 D Dairy Lab Danger Labels Data Logger Deep Freezers Deep well Plates Degasser 414, 1012 208, 226 884, 922 632 804, 805 467, 468, 754

1102

INDEX Delbrück Capillaries Demineralizers Demineralizers, Water Demonstration Aids Density Determination Balances Density Meters Desiccant Desiccator Accessories Desiccator Lids Desiccator Plates Desiccators Desiccators, Accessories Desktop Racks for Waste Bags Detergents Determination of Essential Oils 1053 1082 1087 218 851 896-898 214 124 124 127 124, 128-132, 465 124 260 248, 251, 254 in Drugs, Apparatus for Determination of Nitrogen Determination of SO2 Determination of Water Content Determining of Sulphurous Acid Dewar Containers Dewar Dish-shaped Dewar Flasks Dewar Vessels Dewar Vessels Diaphragm and Piston Pumps Diaphragm Compressors Diaphragm Dosing Pumps Diaphragm Liquid Pumps Diaphragm Pumps 1010 1001 997 1009 997 641 640 639 638 314, 315, 473, 640-642 465 465 464 463 463-465, 467-470, 474, 476, 478 Diaphragm Vacuum Pumps 467-469, 474 Diffuser 78 Digestion Apparatuses, Microwave 535 438-441 Digital Burettes Digital Density Meters 896 416 Digital Dispensers 886 Digital Measuring Devices 973, 974 Digital Refractometers Digital Stopwatches 957 Digital Thermometers 880 Digital Thermometers 883, 884, 890, 953 438 Digital Titrators 1010 Digitally Controlled Dip Sampler 489 1015 Dippers 1015 Dipping Vessels 1045 Dipslide Incubators Dipslides 997, 1045 245 Dish Cloths Dish Tongs 167 Dish-Washer Detergent, LABOSOL 254 Dishes 111-115, 117, 123, 279, 868 279 Dishes for Instruments, Steel 869 Dishes for Samples 121 Dishes, Bowls, Trays Disinfectant Sprays 248 Disinfectant Tissues Disinfectants Disk-Mixers Dispenser Caps Dispenser for Glove Boxes Dispenser Tips Dispensers Dispensers 248 248, 254-256, 272 700 66 235 362, 363 415 361, 362, 389, 415, 416, 418, 421-426, 428-430 427 192, 193 416 80 427 427, 811 497 497, 500 868 821, 822 977, 979 868 236 163 234, 235 1053 413 839 229 1052, 1053 378 812 377 377 234 132 168 413 101 868 92 960 960 311 467-469, 474-476 311 311 311 312 313 312 312, 313 1047 51, 341 50 50 339 521 Dispensers, Automatic Dispensers, Parafilm Dispensette Dispensing Bottles Dispensing Stations Dispensing Systems Dispersers Dispersing Systems Disposable Aluminium Dishes Disposable Culture Tubes Disposable Cuvettes Disposable Dishes, Aluminium Disposable Examination Gloves Disposable Forceps Disposable Gloves Disposable Hematocrit Tubes Disposable Hypodermic Needles Disposable Inoculation Loops Disposable Masks Disposable Micro Pipettes Disposable Pasteur Pipettes Disposable Petri Dishes Disposable Pipettes Disposable Pipettes Disposable Protective Gloves Disposable Sample Containers Disposable Scalpels Disposable Syringes Disposable Test Tubes Disposable Weighing Dishes Disposal Cans Dissecting Needles Dissecting Sets Distillation Components Distilling Distilling Apparatuses Distilling Column Packings Distilling Columns Distilling Controller Distilling Heads, DURAN Glass Distilling Links Distilling Receivers Distilling Systems Distributors Distributors for Bottles Distributors for Bottles, HPLC- Distributors, Nitrogen Dividing DO-Meters Documentation Systems, 914, 916, 945 Chemiluminescence 781, 782 464 Dosage 148, 176 Dosing Spatulas for Powder 155 Dosing Spoons 155 Dosing Spoons, Sterile 263 Draining Racks 263, 264 Draining Racks 85 Dressing Jar with Lid 833 Drigalski Hooks 153, 838 Drigalski Spatulas 987 Drop analysis 80 Dropping Bottles 65, 80, 81 Dropping Bottles 66 Dropping Closures 464 Dropping Funnel Replacement Dropping Funnels 307 Dropping Funnels, Cosing Funnels 307 Drum Pumps 453 Drum Pumps, Dispensing Pumps 449 579 Dry Bath, digital 633 Dry Ice Maschine Dry Matter 1012 1012 Dry Matter Determination 756 Dry Sieving 265 Dryers for Glassware Dryers, Hot-Air 529 535 Dryers, Microwave Drying 467 213, 214 Drying Beads Drying Cabinets 532, 535 530, 536 Drying Chambers 537, 548 Drying Ovens 965 Drying paper Drying Tubes 428 1069 Ductless Filtering 867 Dust Brushes Dust Masks 229 E EcoVac Safety Vacuum Systems Electrode Bottles Electrode Clamps Electrode Wires Electrodes Electrodes, pH, Redox Electronic Controllers Electronic Thermometers Electrophoresis Chambers Embedding, Coloring Emergency Kits Emergency Showers, Eye Baths Engraving Machines Environmental Sample Bottles 844 906 201, 202 839 904 900 991 953 784 963 219 220 207 60 1101

1103

INDEX EPPENDORF Reaction Vessels EPPI Pestles EPRACKS Equipment Equipments for Milk 496 496 816 779 Filters Filters, Flow Filters, Screw Filtration 724, 733, 739 740 748 465, 467, 468, 726, 727, 745, 755 746 751 751 755 746 747 752, 754 Filtration Aids Filtration Apparatus Filtration Apparatuses Filtration Equipment Filtration Flask Gaskets Filtration Racks Filtration Units Filtration Units for Pure Water Systems 1088 Finishing Treatment Systems for Pure Water First Aid First Aid Cupboards First Aid Kits FischMAG Fittings, PTFE Flame Photometers Flame Sterilizer Flanged Tubing Flanging Tongs Flask Brushes Flask Clamps Flask Heaters Flask Tongs Flasks 1088 219 220 219 648 185 990 835 178 40 261 201, 202 560 167 110, 111, 301-304, 395-402, 770, 825 402, 403 1034 824 108, 109, 302, 824 750, 751 Flasks, Filtering 326 Flasks, Flat Flange 770 Flasks, Rotary Evaporator 110 Flat Bottom Flasks Flat Flange Beakers 326 Flat Flange Flasks, DURAN® Glass 326 Flat Flange Reaction Vessels, Flasks Volumetric Flasks, BOD Flasks, Culture Flasks, Erlenmeyer Type DURAN® Glass 326, 327 Flat Flange Vessel Clamps, Quick Release 331 Flat Flange Vessel Seals 330 Flat Flange Vessels, Accessories 325 Flocculators 1051 117 Flour Incineration Dish 740 Flow Filters 179 Flow Indicators Flow Meters 955 1018 Flow Through Unit Flowmeters 955 Flues 1068 Fluid Aspiration Systems 467, 468, 843 and Food Analysis Erlenmeyer Flasks Erlenmeyer Flasks ERLENMEYER-CAP-Caps Erythrocytometers ESD Swabs Ethereal Oils Eudiometer Evaporating Bowls Evaporating Dishes Evaporating Dishes Evaporators Evaporators Evaporators, Microwave Evaporators, Surface, Quartz Ex EX proofed Examination Gloves Explosion Proofness Tubing Extraction Thimbles Extractors Eye Wash Bottles Eye Wash Station Eyelets 1006 108 108-110, 302, 825 825 963 247 1010 1050 113 111 111, 112, 114, 868 765 474 535 580 467 467 236 177 524, 525 522 220, 221 220-222 840 F °F + °C Thermo-Hygrometer °F + °C Thermometers 4-Feet Stands Face Shields Feeders Fermenters Fermenting Tubes Fiber Optic Microliter Cell Filter Cones Filter Crucibles Filter Discs Filter Funnels Filter Holders Filter Masks Filter Papers Filter Papers 953 953 204 225, 638 521 830 338 987 746 747, 748 743 747, 749, 750, 752, 753 754 229 721 721-729, 744, 745, 798, 799 366 741 750 750, 751 103 747 1069 Filter Tips Filter Units Filtering Flasks Filtering Flasks Filtering Jars, with Spout Filtering Stand Filtering Systems 1102 Foam boxes Foam Stoppers Foil Knives Foil Tubing, Polyethylen Foil Welders Foils Foils Foils, Aluminium Folded Filters Folding Carts Food Analysis Support Foot Pumps Forceps Forceps, Disposable Forceps, Plastic Forceps, Steel Forceps, Sterile Frame Clamps Frame Foots Frame Rods for Standbases Freeze Dryers Freeze Drying Freezer Boxes Freezers Freezing Point Determination 816 191 168 196 196 192 869 192 724 1056 1006 449, 450 158, 160-163, 186 163 163 161 163 198, 200 197 198 771-774 771 816 629, 630, 632 Apparatus 1005 230 Full Face Masks 228 Full Sight Glasses 1067, 1068 Fume Cupboards 1069 Fume Cupboards Ductless 1066 Fume Hoods 1066-1068 Fume Hoods 747 Funnel Racks 169 Funnels 169-173 Funnels 170 Funnels, Analytical 749 Funnels, Buechner Type 307 Funnels, Dropping 749 Funnels, Filter 171 Funnels, Powder 305, 306 Funnels, Separatory 173 Funnels, Steel 556 Furnaces Furnaces 556-559 Furniture 1057-1059, 1061, 1062, 1067 G Galvano Heaters, Quartz Gas Analysis Gas Bubble Counters Gas Burners Gas Cartridges Gas Cylinder Holder Gas Detection Systems Gas Detectors 580 956 338 526-528, 834 527 187 233 233

1104

INDEX Glass Fibre Heating Tapes Gas Distributors Gas Flues Gas Generators Gas Generators Gas Hose for Gas Burners Gas Masks Gas Safety Burner phoenix Gas Tubing Gas Washing Bottles Gaskets for Filter Funnels, EPDM GC-Tower Gel Documentation Systems Gel Dryer General Purpose Thermometers Genius GL 45 Connection System Glass Cleansing Papers Glass Fiber Filters Glass Fiber Papers Glass Fibre Heating Leads 339 1068 1095 1095, 1096 179 232 835 178 309, 338 747 1058 782, 783 467, 468 875 428 49 965 744, 745 745 561, 564, 566, 568 561, 564, 566, 568 743 743 749 60, 192 414 339 216 821, 822 278 278 265 1072-1074 234 234, 235, 237-240, 638 239 237, 638 228 225-228, 243 225, 243 225 225, 243 225, 243 225, 243 243 106 104-108 94 405 405-410 395 380 380, 383-385 Glass Filter Apparatuses Glass Filters Glass Funnels Glass Stoppers Glass Syringes Glass Tubing Glass Tubing Cutter Glasses Glassware Cleaners Glassware Cleaners Accessories Glassware Dryers Glove Boxes Gloves Gloves Gloves and Aprons Gloves, Protective Goggle Box Goggles Goggles, Acid Goggles, Eye Protection Goggles, Full Vision Goggles, Gas Goggles, Smoke Googles, Dust Graduated Beakers Graduated Beakers Graduated Cans, Steel Graduated Cylinders Graduated Cylinders Graduated Flasks Graduated Pipettes Graduated Pipettes Graduated Test Tubes, DURAN Glass 101 Grease for Joints Grinding Balls Grinding Bowls Grinding Media Grinding Vessels Ground Flasks Ground Joint Adapters Ground Joint Clamps Ground Joint Funnels Ground Joint Sleeves, PTFE Ground Joints Ground Thermometers 214 507, 508 507, 508 507, 508 516 301 321 317, 318 172 317 315, 316 880 H Half Masks Half Round Funnels, PP Hammer Blow Mills Hand Creams Hand Held Dispensers Hand Held Meters Hand Pumps Hand Refractometers Hard Porcelain HDPE Jars Heat and Cold Protective Gloves Heat Protective Gloves Heat Transfer Fluids Heaters Heaters, Ceran Heaters, DIGI-Block Heaters, Immersion, Quartz Heaters, Microwave Heaters, Quick Heaters, Tandem Heating and Refrigerated 230, 231 172 520 240 361 361 449-453 971 116, 117, 127 84 239 238, 239 215 560, 566, 570 566 579 580 535 570 561 Circulators Heating Bank Units Heating Bath Fluids Heating Bath Liquids Heating Baths Heating Baths for Paraffine Cuts Heating Blocks Heating Cabinets Heating Cabinets, Drying Cabinets, 609, 611 584 215 216 562-564, 587, 588 590 579 532, 535, 536 Sterilizers, Microwaves 530 581 Heating Cables 530 Heating Chambers Heating Cooling Thermostats 603, 604 Heating Immersion Circulators 609, 615 561, 564, Heating Leads, Glass Fibre 566, 568 581 Heating Mantles Heating Mantles 581-584 Heating Mantles, Accessories 582, 584 Heating Mantles, Metal Cased 583 Heating Plates 561, 564-566, 568-570 Heating Plates, Multipurpose Baths 560 Heating Tapes 581 Heating Tapes 581 618, 619 Heating Thermostats 581 Heating Tubes Heavy Duty Bottles 64 1057 Heavy Duty Tables 1053 Hematocrit Tubes, Disposable Hemometer Pipettes 1052 High Dynamic Temperature Circulators 612 High Tack Mats 258 High Temperature Heating Mantles 582 Highpower Homogenizers 502 187 Holders for Gas Cylinders Homogenizers 496 496, 504 Homogenizers 185 Hose Connectors with Sleeve Nut Hoses for Gas Burners 178 529 Hot Air Blower 951 Hot Bench, Kofler Type 522 Hot Extraction Hot Hand® 240 561, 564-568, 570 Hot Plates 569 Hot Zone Howorka Ball® 390 HPLC Bottles 47 HPLC-Distributors for Bottles 50 1058 HPLC-Tower 552 Humidity chambers Humidity Logger 954 551 Humidity Test Chambers Hybridisation Flasks 697 1096 Hydrogen Generators Hydrometer Cylinders 895 897 Hydrometers Hypodermic Needles, Disposable 413 I Ice Baths Ice Flake Machines Ice Flake Machines Ice Flakers Ice Machines Ice Storages Identification Labels IDS Sensors Imhoff Cone Racks Immersion Circulators Immersion Cylinders Immersion Heaters, Quartz Immersion Thermostats Immersion Thermostats, 644 633 633, 635 633, 634 633 633 207 904 1034 599 1016 580 598, 618, 619 Bath Circulators 597 1103

1105

INDEX Impact rotors Incinerating Dishes Incineration Boxes, Quartz Glass Incineration Dishes Incinerators Incinerators Incinerators, Multiple Incinerators, Rapid Incinerators, Single Incubation Shakers Incubator Shakers Incubators 513 112, 113 119 118 559 560 560 560 560 680, 694 683, 689, 695 538-540, 542-546, 548, 570, 829 537 1045 1036 1021 279 1021 92 865 570 558 Incubators, Cooled Incubators Incubators, Dipslide Incubators, Thermostatically Indicator Cards, Test Kits Indicator Tapes Indicators, pH Industrial Buckets Industrial Counting Scales Infrared Burners Infrared Furnaces Infrared Radiators for Evaporation, Quartz Infrared Thermometers Infrared Thermometers Injection Syringes Injection Vials, Glass Inline Heating Baths Inline Oil Baths Inline Sand Baths Inline Water Baths Inoculating Eyelets Inoculating Holder Racks Inoculating Hooks Inoculating Loop Carrousels Inoculating Loops Inoculating Stands and Holders Inserts Inspection Glasses Instrument Cases, Steel Instrument Trays Insulate Containers Insulating Vessels Insulators Insulting Containers Insulting Vessels Insulting Vessels, Spherical Ion Exchanger Cartridges Ion Exchangers IR-Samples 580 891 891 414 39 562 562 562 562 840 840 833 835 839, 840 840 803 136 279 121, 123 280 640, 641 1072 641 640 641 1081 1082-1086 869 1104 J Jacket Thermocouples Jacks Jars Jars Jars, Specimen Jerrycan Range Joint Adapters Joint Clamps Joint Cones, DURAN Glass Joint Cones, Spherical Joint Greases Joint Seals, PTFE Joint Sleeves Joint Sockets Jugs with Handle 883 205, 206 83 84, 86 136 86 321 317, 318 315, 316, 321 316 214, 215 317 317 315, 316 106 K Karl-Fischer-Titrator Kettles, Steel Kjeldahl Distillation Systems KNF Lab Tower Knife Mills Knives Kofler Hotbench 446 95 1003 751 516, 517 168, 516 951 L 207 Lab Markers Lab Pens 207 Lab Scale Sewage Treatment Plant 1047 Lab Washers 278 635 lab-ice machine 212 Label Eliminator 208 Label Markers Labelling Tape 211 207, 208, 211, 486 Labels 138 LaboBox System 826 LABOCAP-Caps 358 labopettor Laboratory Apron 222 283, 286, Laboratory Autoclaves 287, 295, 297, 298 Laboratory Balances 849-851, 860, 864 Laboratory Benches, Steel 1063 261 Laboratory Brushes Laboratory Burners 835 1055, 1056, 1230 Laboratory Carts Laboratory Chairs 1064, 1065 223, 224 Laboratory Coats 122 Laboratory Dishes Laboratory Freezers 627 1066 Laboratory Fume Hoods Laboratory Furniture Laboratory Gas Burners Laboratory Glassware Cleaners Laboratory Glassware Cleaners/ 1057, 1066 528, 834 278 Disinfectors Laboratory Heating Baths Laboratory Mats Laboratory Microscopes Laboratory Mixers Laboratory Mortar Grindes Laboratory Refrigerators Laboratory Sample Divider Laboratory Sinks Laboratory Spoons Laboratory Stirrers Laboratory Thermometers Laboratory Thermometers Laboratory Trays Laboratory Vacuum Systems Laboratory-pH-Meter LABORETTE Ladders, Safety Laminar Flow Cabinets Large Shakers LDPE Bags Lead Rings Lead Rings, Cork Rings Length Lens Cleaning Wipes Lids Lifting Platforms Lifts Liquid Handling Liquid Nitrogen Liquid Nitrogen Containers Liquid Nitrogen Dewars Liquid Pumps Liquid Samplers Liquid Transfer Pumps Lones, Spherical Loop Sterilizer Loops Lowering Cables 277 564 257 966, 968 516 506 627, 684 522 1061 148 668, 669 875 877 121 477 932 521 1057 1081 690 195 145 145 957 965 93, 107, 328 205 206 844 636 636 636 450 488 449 316 837 840 1016 M Macro Pipette Controller 391 Magnesia Grooves 120 Magnesia Grooves, Magnesia Sticks 120 120 Magnesia Sticks 333, 337 Magnetic Stirrer Couplings Magnetic Stirrer for Cell Cultures 655 333 Magnetic Stirrer Heads 658 Magnetic Stirrer, High Volume 646, 649, Magnetic Stirrers 650, 654-664

1106

INDEX Magnetic Stirrers with Heater 658 Magnetic Stirrers without Heater 649 Magnetic Stirrers, Heatable 658, 659 Magnetic Stirrers, Infrared 664 Magnetic Stirring Bar Retriever 647, 648 647 Magnetic Stirring Bar Set Magnetic Stirring Bars 645-647 Magnetic Stirring Bars, Remover 645 212 Maintenance Oils 1012 Malt Testing Apparatus Manifolds 740 1039 Manometric BOD 1016 Manually Operated Reels 207 Markers Masks 229-231 229 Masks, Dust 229 Masks, Filter 232 Masks, Gas 866 Masses Matrix Bottles Caps 825 Matrix Bottles, DURAN® Glass 824 257 Mats, Laboratory 1040 Measurement Systems Measuring cell 987 886 Measuring Devices, Digital 156 Measuring Scoops 155 Measuring Spoons Measuring Spoons, Sterile 155 753 Media Bottle 299 Media Preparators 811 Mediafills Medication Refrigerators 629 119 Melting Crucibles Melting Point Apparatures 951 Melting Point Determination Instruments and Accessories Melting Point Determination Tubes Melting Point Meters Membrane Filters Membrane Filters Membrane Filtration Units Mercury collector Metal Baths Metal Block Thermostats Metal Block Thermostats Metering Meters, Conductivity Meters, pH Meters, Temperature Micro Balances Micro Bottles, Glass Micro Burettes 951 952 951 730 730, 731, 733, 739 740 258 562 570 572 464 935 935 883 860 31, 32 with Straight Stopcock Micro Burettes, Bang Type Micro Centrifuges Micro Centrifuges Micro Inserts 434 434 703 703-707, 710, 711 33-35, 37, 38 507, 508 Micro Mills 496 Micro Pestle 391 Micro Pipette Controllers 358, 1052, 1053 Micro Pipettes 392 Micro Pipetting Aid 146, 149 Micro Spatulas 146 Micro Spoons 793-795 Micro Test Tubes 795 Micro Tubes 33-35, 37, 38 Micro Vials, Glass 539, 542 Microbiological Incubators 1071 Microbiological Safety Cabinets 997 Microbiology Microcentrifuge Tube, Racks 140 Microcentrifuge Tubes 788, 790, 796, 906 Microliter Pipettes 343 344, 346, 352-355, Microliter Pipettes 358, 364 411, 412 Microliter Syringes 411 Microliter Tips 810 Microplates, PP 968 Microscope 970 Microscope Cameras 963 Microscope Dispensers 964 Microscope Slide Containers 964 Microscope Slide Magazins Microscope Slides 961, 962 Microscope Slides, Cover Glasses 961 Microscopes 966 799, 800, 804 Microtitration Plates Microtube Racks 137-139 788, 795, 796, 815 Microtubes 535 Microwave Equipment 536 Microwave Laboratory Systems 1006 Milk Analysis Support Milk Analyzer 1004 Milk Investigation, Fat Determination 1004 495 Milk Sample 414 Milk Syringes 506-509, 511, 513, 514, 517-519 Mills 1052 Mini Caps 707 Mini Centrifuges 626 Mini Fridges 172 Mini Funnels Mini Sampler 489, 494 Minimum/Maximum Thermometers 952 956 Minutes Counter Miscellaneous Components 338 Mixer Mills 511 515, 516, 672, 696, 697 Mixers 1068 Mobile Gas Flues Moisture Analyzers 870 Moisture Analyzers 870, 871, 873 Moisture Determination Balances 851, 873 1008 Mojonnier Agitators Monitor Detergents 255 Monitoring Instruments Mortar Grinders Mortar Spatulas Mortars Mounting Baths for Paraffine Cuts Mouth Protection Mouth Protection, Respiratory Protection Mud Analyzers Multi Axle Rotating Mixers Multi Measuring Instruments Multi Parameter Measuring 996 506 146 495 590 229 229 1047 696 914 Instruments 909, 920, 922, 937 Multi Parameter Measuring Systems Multi Racks Multi Timers Multichannel Micropipettes Multichannel Pipettes 915, 918 145 957 344 345, 350, 352, 355-357 145 Multifunctional Racks 233 Multigas Monitor 593 Multiple Channel Stirrers 51 Multiple Distributors for Barrels Multiple Distributors for Bottles 50 Multiple Magnetic Stirrers 665, 666, 731 665 Multiple Stirrers Multipurpuse Tongs 167 N Nano grinding Narrow Mouth Bottles Narrow Neck Bottles Needles, Disposable Hypodermic neoBlock Heater Neoprene-Stoppers neoRack® Nitril Gloves Nitrogen Determination 508 61, 62, 64 67 413 579 191 139 237 acc. to Kjedahl 1000 Nitrogen Distributors, DURAN Glass 339 Nitrogen Flasks, DURAN Glass 304 1096 Nitrogen Generators Nitrogen Stores, Nitrogen Freezing Containers 635 304 340 339 189 Nitrogen Tubes, DURAN Glass Nitrogen Vacuum Workplace Non Return Value Non Return Valve O O-Rings for Flat Flange Vessels Oil and Chemical Binder 330 259 1105

1107

INDEX Oil Baths Oil Pen Ointment Jars Opening Tongs Operating Resources, Aids Optical Cleaning Orbital Shakers Order Labels Organization Systems Orsat Bulbs OTAL-Pumps Ovens Overhead Mixers Overhead Shakers Oxygen Bottles Oxygen Demand Analyzers, BOD Oxygen Measurement Oxygen Meters Oxygen Meters 562 212 85 40 212 965 679-681 209 964 956 449, 452 532, 534 698 701 1034 1039 919 944 944, 945 P Packaging Buckets Packing Tester Packing Testers Palette Knife Spatulas Panorama Goggles Para-Stoppers Parafilm Dispensers Particle Analysis Pasteur Pipettes Pasteur Type PCR Cabinets PCR Cap Strips PCR Cap Tool PCR Plates PCR Products PCR Storage Boxes PCR Thermocyclers PCR Tubes PCR Tubes Rack PCR Vessels PCR Workbenches PD-Tips Peleus Pipettefiller Pellet Titrators Peltier Thermostats Peltier-Cooling Pendulum Beakers Pens, Labeling Systems Perbunan Stoppers Peristaltic Pumps Peristaltic Pumps Pestles Pestles, Mortars 1106 92 1010, 1011 1010 150 227 191 192, 193 759 378 377 1080 808 809 807, 810 807 799 779, 780 795 798 791, 795 1080 362 390 437 617 542 1014 207 191 455 455, 457, 458, 461-463 495, 496 495 280 Petri Dish Boxes 829 Petri Dish Racks 115, 116, 812 Petri Dishes 833 Petri Dishes Turntable Petri Dishes, Sterilizing Boxes for 280 petriturn Turntables for Petri Dishes 833 pH Buffers 905, 906 pH Electrodes 899, 900, 902 pH Electrodes, Buffer Solutions, Accessories pH Indicator Sticks pH Indicators pH Measurement pH Meter pH Meter/mV Temperature Measuring Instruments 899 1021 1021 919 910 pH Meters pH Meters 931 923 909, 914-916, 923-926, 932, 935 pH Multi-Parameter Measuring Instruments pH-Meters pH-Tester Kit pH/mV Meters Pharmacist Spatulas Phenol Distillation phoenix Gas-Safety Burner Photographic Dishes Photometers Photometers 909 925, 927 907, 908, 923 931 148 1047 835 122, 123 987 987, 989, 990, 1025, 1026, 1030, 1031, 1044 1025, 1030 Photometers, Spectro Photometric Workplaces, Field Investigations Pincettes Pipette Accessories Pipette Boxes Pipette Boxes, 1025 158 364 280, 281 Sterilization Containers Pipette Brushes Pipette Cleaners, Ultrasonic Pipette Container Racks Pipette Containers Pipette Controllers Pipette Filler Pipette Kits Pipette Leak Testing Units Pipette Racks Pipette Racks Pipette Stands Pipette Tips Pipette Tips Racks Pipette Tips, Accessories Pipettes 279 262 272 281 281 391, 392, 394 390, 394 354 376 389 355, 389 353, 389 364, 366, 369, 371-375 280 366 348, 353-361, 378-380, 383-389 1006 1006 Pipettes, Cream Pipettes, Dilution Pipettes, Disposable Micro Pipettes, Homogenisation Pipettes, Milk Pipettes, Repetitive- Pipettes, Weighing Pipetting Aids Pipetting Aids Pipetting Devices Pipettors pipetus PiPump Piston Burettes Piston Pipettes Piston Pumps Planetary Mills Plankton Nets Plastic Bags Plastic Caps with DIN-Threads Plastic Cleaning Liquide Plastic Screw Caps Plastic Test Sieves Plate Centrifuges Plates Plates, Dishes Platform Balances Plating Platinum Crucibles Platinum Dishes Platinum Wire Platinum/Iridium Wire PLR Compressed Air Laboratory Stirrers 1052, 1053 1006 1006 420 1006 390 390, 391 390 390-395 391, 394 390 443 359 466 507-509 1018 195, 259, 260 319 255 319, 320 762 711 807 799 865 833 119 113 839 839 668, 669 376 PLT Units 124 Pneumatic Tanks 124 Pneumatic Vessels 851 Pocket Balances 940 Pocket Conductometers Pocket Lamps 217 Pocket pH Meters, Microprocessor 931 Polarimeters 975 975 Polarimeters 148, 154 Poly Spoons Polyethylene Bottles 66 Polysine Adhesive Microscope Slides 962 Porcelain Evaporating Dishes 112 112 Porcelain Incinerating Dishes 926 Portable pH Meters 155 Portioning Ladles Positive Displacement Pipettes 360 905 Potassium Chlorid Solution 47, 55 Pouring Rings 867 Powder Brushes Powder Funnels 171 146 Powder Spatulas Power Controllers 992 POWER Cutting Mill PULVERISETTE 518 Power Regulator 584

1108

INDEX Power Supplies for Electrophoresis/ R Blotting 786 786 Power Supply Units 452 PP Barrel Pumps 409 PP Cylinders Pre-Treatment Systems 1089 Precision and Analytical Balances 845 847, 848, Precision Balances 851, 859, 862, 863 1048 538, 540 882 45 508 46 79 437, 438 189 886, 960 975 568 209 224 258 529 529 239 222 236-240, 638 229 213 507, 508, 516, 518 458 472 458, 462 453 449-454, 458, 462, 463, 466, 468, 473, 844 450 1082, 1083, 1086, 1089 895 Precision Heater System Precision Incubators Precision Thermometers Premium Bottles premium line Premium Screw Caps Pressure Atomizer Pressure Bulbs Pressure Relief Valves Probes Process Refractometers Programmer Prohibition Labels Protection Coveralls Protection Paper Protection Plates Protection Plates Holders Protective Protective Clothing Protective Gloves Protective Masks PTFE Spray PULVERISETTE Pump Heads Pump Stands Pump Tubing Pump-it Pumps Pumps, Disposable Pure Water Systems Pycnometers Q qPCR Quadrupods Quality Assurances Quartz Heaters Quartz Microfibre Filters Quartz Microplates Quick Grip Chuck Quick Picker 807 529 383 580 745 984 496 482 525 Rack for Extraction Thimbles 145, 798, 829 Racks 135 Racks for Centrifuge Tubes 120 Racks for Crucibles 816, 819, 820 Racks for Cryo Boxes 984 Racks for Cuvettes Racks for Inoculating-Loop Holders 840 140 Racks for Microcentrifuge Tubes 137-139 Racks for Microtubes Racks for PCR Tubes 798 Racks for Pipette Container GESTICON Racks for Reaction Vessels Racks for Sedimentation Vessels Racks for Test Tubes Racks, Draining Racks, Filtration Racks, Funnel Racks, Stackable Racks, Test Tube Randall Rapid Disinfectants Razor Blades Reaction Cuvettes 281 140 1035 140, 143, 144 264 747 747 820 144 522 256 168 for Water Testing 1030 331 Reaction Vessel Accessories 331 Reaction Vessel Closures 332 Reaction Vessel Holders 328 Reaction Vessel Lids 138, 140 Reaction Vessel Racks 331 Reaction Vessel Seals Reaction Vessels 325-328, 788, 790, 906 Reaction Vessels, Tubes 788 43, 44, 58-60, Reagent Bottles 62, 64, 67, 68 805 1030 807 312 463 624 624 312 313 69 84 902 1016 907 971 971-975 621 542 621, 629-631, 635-637 629 626 Reagent Reservoirs Reagent Sets for Water Testing Real Time PCR Receiver Adapters, DURAN Glass Recirculate Recirculating Chillers Recirculating Coolers Recovery Bends, DURAN Glass Recovery Heads Rectangular Bottles Rectangular Boxes Redox Electrodes Reels, Manually Operated Reference Electrodes Refractometers Refractometers Refrigerated Circulators Refrigerated Incubators Refrigerators Refrigerators, Medication Refrigerators, Upright Freezers Regulators Regulators, Temperature Repeater Pipettes Repetitive Pipettes Residue Analysis Resistance Thermometers Respirometry Resuspend/Pellet Reverse Osmosis Systems Reverse Osmosis Systems Ringcaps Rinsing Agent, LABOSOL Rinsing Brushes Rinsing Equipment, Drying Equipment Rods, Glass Roller Incubators Roller Mixers Room Thermometers Rotar Vane Vacuum Pumps Rotary Cone Sample Divider 584 584 361 361, 420 1045 886 1039 496 1086 1087 1053 254 261 265 666 697 696 952 471 LABORETTE Rotary Evaporator Flasks Rotary Evaporators Rotary Evaporators 521 770 769 467-469, 474-476, 625, 769 771 Rotary Evaporators Accessories 471 Rotary Vane Pumps 472 Rotary Vane Vacuum Pumps 696, 697 Rotating Mixers 698 Rotating Shakers 521 Rotation Sample Reducer 946 Rotation Viscometers 698-700 Rotators 718 ROTINA 716 ROTOFIX 513 Rotor Mills Round Bottom Flask Brushes 261 Round Bottom Flasks 111, 301, 303, 304 Round Bottom Flasks, Flat Bottom Flasks Round Boxes Round Filters Round Flasks, PFA Rubber Ballon Rubber Bulb Set Rubber Bulbs Rubber Spacers Rubber Tubing, Vacuum Rubber Wipers S Safety Barrels Safety Bottle Carriers Safety Burners 110 84 725 302 956 438 390 746 173, 174 169 90 98, 99 835 1107

1109

INDEX Safety Cabinets 1076 Safety Cabinets 1070, 1071, 1076-1079 Safety Canisters 90, 92 90, 92 Safety Cans 87 Safety Carboys 90 Safety Containers Safety Drying Ovens 536 226, 227 Safety Goggles Safety Labels 208 Safety Laboratory Gas Burners 528, 834 Safety Mixers 515 73 Safety Nets Safety Pipette Filler 390 Safety Transportation Containers 90, 92 Safety Vacuum Drying Ovens 548 844 Safety Vacuum Systems EcoVac 76, 78 Safety Wash Bottles 261 Safety Waste Bins Safety Work Benches 1070 Safety Workbenches 1070, 1072, 1081 833 Sample Application Sample Carriers 98 132, 133, 1015 Sample Containers Sample Dividers 521, 522 136 Sample Glasses 521 Sample Splitters 521 Sample Splitting Sample Transport, Thermo Boxes 97 798, 1015 Sample Tubes 133 Sample Tubes, PFA Sample Vials 132 31, 32, 132, 133 Sample Vials 482, 487 Sampler for Bulk Goods 39 Sampler Vials, Glass 482 Samplers Samplers 1013 482-485, 489, Samplers 491, 493, 494, 1015, 1017 1015 488 490 1013, 1017, 1020 194 56, 57, 60, 72 72 389 494 1013 1013 1012 562, 563 845-848, 865 193 168 167 956 41 Samplers, Disposable Samplers, Liquid Samplers, UniSampler Samplers, Water Sampling Bags Sampling Bottles Sampling Bottles, PP Sampling Pipettes Sampling Pumps Sampling Scoops Sampling Sticks, Water Sand Sand Baths Scales Scalpel Blade Remover Scalpels Scalpels, Knives Scheibler Bulbs Scintillation Tube Rack 1108 40 Scintillation Vials 40, 41 Scintillation Vials 163 Scissors 163, 164 Scissors 157, 158, 494 Scoops 149, 495 Scoops, Steel 32, 65 Screw Cap Bottles 821 Screw Cap Culture Tubes 84 Screw Cap Jars 49, 319 Screw Cap System 822 Screw Cap Test Tubes 46-49, 55, 56, 319, 320 Screw Caps 748 Screw Filters, DURAN Glass 183 Screw Joints 321 Screw Thread Adapter 48 Screw-Caps 796 Sealing Caps for Microtubes 193, 809 Sealing Films 825, 826 Sealing Material 320 Sealing Rings for Srew Caps Seals 90 Seals for Cones and Sockets, PTFE 317 330 Seals for Flat Flange Vessels Seals for Penetration 320 331 Seals for Reaction Vessels 486 Seals, Control 320 Seals, Silicone Seals, Silicone Rubber Rings 320 1020 Secchi Disk 984 Secondary Spectrophotometric 956 Seconds Counter Security Gas Burners 834 Security Seals 90 1034 Sedimentation Cone Imhoff 1034 Sedimenting Vessels Seed Testing Papers 729 860 Semi Balances 977 Semi Micro Cuvettes 921 Sensors Separation 755 313 Separators, Cooling Traps Separatory Funnels 305 305, 306 Separatory Funnels 32, 320 Septa Serial Bank Units 584 1012 Serial Stirrers 418 seripettor Serological Pipettes 379 343, 1081 Service Shaker 679 677, 679-685, Shakers 689-691, 697, 698 587 1008 587, 677 679 681 Shakers for Water Baths Shakers Mojonnier Shakers, Incubator Shakers, Incubators Shakers, Orbital Shakers, Thermo Shakers, Universal Shaking Incubators Shaking Mixers Shaking Water Baths Shaking Water Baths Sheet Welders Shelving Systems Shields, Face Shinguard Creams Shipping Containers Shovels Shovels Sieve Analyses Sieve Analysis Sieve Rings Sieve Shakers Sieves Sieves, Test Sieving Aids Sieving Machines SILICON Silicone Inserts Silicone Foam Stoppers Silicone Grease, BAYER Silicone Heater Mats Silicone Heating Tapes Silicone Rubber Seals Silicone Stoppers Silicone Tubing Silo Samplers Silver Wire Simplex Single Channel Pipettes Single Point Stirrer Single-Use Grinding Vessels Sinks Siphons Sitting Work Benches Skin Creams Skin Protection Skinguard Creams Sleeve Protectors Sludge Traps Small Shakers Snap-Cap Vials Sockets Soil and Compost Thermometer Solar Burettes solarus® Solid Phase Extraction Solvent Container Solvent Extractors Solvent Pumps Sound Level Meters Spatula Set Spatulas 587 689 587, 692 688 595 591, 595, 596 196 1058 225 241 97, 636 156 157, 158, 182 756 756, 759, 764 513 756-759 755 760, 762 755 756 281 191 215 191 191 320 191 174, 175 486 839 428 344, 345, 355-357 649, 652-654 516 1061 449 1061 240 240 241 224 1062 679 34, 40 316 890 440 440 465, 468 90 524 452 959 149 146

1110

INDEX Spatulas 146, 148-150, 153, 176, 483, 484 838 Spatulas, Drigalski 148, 149, 154 Spatulas, Spoons 150, 483 Spatulas, Steel 246 Spatulas, Wood 465, 467, 468 SPE 136 Specimen Jars 960 Specimen Loops 341 Specimen Preparing Methods 1025 Spectrometers 987-989, 1030 Spectrophotometers 321 Spherical Ground Joint Sleeves Spigots 89 Splash Heads for Rotary Evaporators 770 149 Spoon Spatulas Spoons 153 148, 149, 153-155 Spoons 155 Spoons, Dosing Spoons, Measuring 155 148 Spoons, Spatula 79 Spray Bottles 78 Sprayer Sprays 212, 213 69 Square Bottles 57, 58 Square Bottles, Screw Thread 551 Stability Test Chambers Stabilizing Ring 145 963 Staining Inserts 963 Staining Racks 90 Stainless Steel Canisters Stainless Steel Condensers 310 173 Stainless Steel Funnels 819, 820 Stainless Steel Racks 1057 Stairs, Safety Stalagmometers 950 Stand Components 197 Standard Ground Components, Threaded Components Standard Heating Mantles Standbases Standing Working Tables Stands Stands 315 581, 582 197 1058, 1059 198 Stands, Filtering Stands, Large Stands, Movable Star Desiccators Steam Ducts Steam Generators Steam Sterilizers Steam Sterilizers for Blood Sedimentation Tests 1052 747 198 1055, 1230 129 770, 771 1047 283 288, 290-292, 294, 295, 297, 298 364 1057 781 Steppers Steps, Ladders Sterilisation Cabinets, UV Sterilisation Containers Sterilization Indicators Sterilization System 280 279 for Inoculation Loops Sterilizers Sterilizing Boxes Steriplan Petri Dishes Stick Proof Stillheads, DURAN Glass Stirrer Bearings Stirrer Couplings Stirrer Seals, Stirrer Shafts Stirrer Shafts Stirrer Shafts, Propeller Stirrer Shafts, U-Shaped Stirrers Stirrers 837 283, 286, 287, 532, 838 280 115 482, 483 313 333, 334 337, 338 333 333, 336 336 336 667 649, 650, 652-655, 664, 665, 667-671, 1012 668, 669 645 583 666 667, 965 667 667 670 334 646 670 587, 588 187 89, 188, 189, 322, 324 214 322 186 190 190-192 956, 957 97 81 146 84, 798, 799, 816, 817 821 821 146, 637 83 799 341 305 584 203, 204, 582 Stirrers, Compressed Air Stirring Bars, Magnetic Stirring Heating Mantles Stirring Rods Stirring Rods Stirring Rods, Glass Stirring Rods, Wood Stirring Rotors Stirring Shafts, PTFE Coated Steel Stirring Sticks Stirring Systems Stirring Water Baths stop-it Stopcocks Stopcocks Grease Stopcocks, Valves Stopcocks, Valves, Clamps Stoppers Stoppers Stopwatches Storage and Shipping Containers Storage Bottles Storage Boxes Storage Boxes Storage Cases Storage Cases for Culture Tubes Storage Containers Straight Side Wide Mouth Jars Strip Plates Sublimation Apparatus, Vacuum Sulphuration Flasks Support Clamps Support Rings Supporting Construction for Reaction Vessels Supporting Devices for Reaction Vessels Surface Evaporators, Quartz Surface Force Measurement 333 332 580 950 Swabs Synthesizer Bottom Flask Syphons Syringe Filters Syringe Filters, Filter Holders Syringe Prefilters Syringe Pumps Syringes Syringes, Hypodermic Needles 247 341 454 734-737 734 734, 735 465 412-414 413 T T-Type Tubing Connectors, Miniature 181 Table and Filter Fume Extractors 1068 Table Centrifuges, Universal Centrifuges 712 187 Table Clamps 283, 295 Table Top Autoclaves 1055-1057, 1230 Tables, Movable 957, 1030 Tally Counters 47 Tamper Evident Screw Cap 561 Tandem Heaters 589 Tandem Water Baths 271 Tank and HF Generator 124 Tanks, Pneumatic 899 Tap Density Tester 211 Tapes, Adhesive 279 Tapes, Indicator 905 Technical Buffer Solutions 526, 527 Teclu Burners 64 Teflon Bottles Temperature Control Strips 874 Temperature Controllers 568, 572, 584, 887, 992, 995 Temperature Controllers 994, 995 and Indicators 874 Temperature Foils Temperature Logger 884, 954 Temperature Measuring Instruments 889 886, 890 Temperature Probes 585 Temperature Sensors Temperature Test Chambers 551 907, 908, 923, Test Kits 1023, 1024, 1028 Test Kits for Water Analysis Test Sieves Test Sieves Test Tube Brushes Test Tube Caps Test Tube Clamps Test Tube Racks Test Tube Racks, Wire Test Tube Rotators Test Tubes Test Tubes Test Tubes 1024 760 760, 763, 764 262 826 165 140-145 143 700 99 140 99-101, 795, 797, 875 1109

1111

INDEX Test Tubes with Screw Caps Test Tubes, Durham Test Tubes, Fermentation Test Tubes, Reductase Test Vials Testing Cabinets Testing Cards Testing Sticks Thermal Mixers Thermal Mixers Thermal Shakers Thermo Hygrometers Thermo Hygrometers, Digital Thermo Logger Thermo Stripes Thermo Timers Thermoblocks Thermocouples Thermocouples, Jacket Thermocyclers Thermometer-Loggers Thermometer, Gallium Filled Thermometers 822 1006 1006 1006 137 532 1022 1022 675 675, 676, 678 678, 680 953 953 884 874 882 571, 678 884, 886 883 779, 780 884 878 875-877, 879-883, 887, 891, 952, 953 953 886 571, 675-678 587, 677, 678 1037, 1038 1037 Thermometers, Desk Top Thermometers, Resistance Thermomixers Thermoshakers Thermostatic Chambers Thermostatic Chambers, BOD Thermostatically Controlled Incubators Thermostats 1036 598-600, 602-604, 617, 621 572 775 188 188 956 956, 957, 991 436 202 431, 435-438, 444-446, 448 438 444, 445 242 167 165 216 139 863 958 958 242, 246 528 210 463 Thermostats, Metal Block Thin Layer Chromatography Three Way Stopcocks Three Way Valves Timers Timers Titration Apparatuses Titration Racks Titrators Titrette TitroLine Toilet Tissues Tongs Tongs, Holders Tools Top Rack for Microtubes Toploading Balances Torque Torque Measurement Devices Towels, Disposable Traingles Trainingmaterial Transfer Liquid 1110 Transfer Membranes Transferpette Transferpettor Transilluminators Transilluminators, Blue-Light Transilluminators, UV Transport Basins Transport Carts Transport Carts, Stainless Steel Transport Containers, Safety Trays and Bowls for Tools Trays, Laboratory Trays, Photographic Tripods Tube Adapters for Joint Sockets Tube Clamps Tube Cutter Tube Fittings Tube Furnaces Tube Rollers Tubes Tubes, Heating Tubes, Rack Packed Tubing Tubing Tubing AR Glass Tubing Brushes Tubing Clamps Tubing Connectors Tubing Couplings Tubing Foils, Polyethylen Tubing, Explosion Proofness Tubing, Gas Tubing, PTFE Tubing, PVC Tubing, Vacuum Tubing, Viton Turbidity Measurement Turbidity Meters TURBULA Shaking Mixer Turntables for Petri Dishes Tweezers Tweezers Set Tweezers, Disposable Tweezers, Plastic Tweezers, Sterile Twisselmann Two Way Valves 786 345 360 787 787 787 97 1054, 1056 1056 92 121 122 122 204, 582 321 185, 186 173 184 558 696, 697 821, 822 581 792 173 173-179 339 262 185-187 179-181, 319 181 196 177 178 176 175, 176 174, 175 178 1032 1032, 1033 688 833 149, 161, 163 161 163 163 163 522 188 U Ultra Centrifugal Mills Ultra Low Refrigerated Circulators Ultra Pure Water Ultra Pure Water Systems Ultra-Low Temperature Freezers 513, 514 614 1090-1092 1093 632 Ultrapure Water Systems Ultrapure Water Systems 1088 1086, 1088, 1090-1092, 1094 452 Ultrapure, Pumps 502 Ultrasonic 267 Ultrasonic Accessories 247 Ultrasonic Bath Agents 273, 274 Ultrasonic Baths Ultrasonic Baths, flat 273 Ultrasonic Cleaner Detergents 254, 275 Ultrasonic Cleaning 265 267, 271 Ultrasonic Cleaning 267, 275 Ultrasonic Cleaning Units 501 Ultrasonic Homogenizers Ultrasonic Homogenizers 505 272 Ultrasonic Pipette Cleaners 505 Ultrasonic Processors 760 Ultrasonic Screening System Ultrasonic Special Devices 779 Ultrasonic Units 267, 274, 275, 502, 505 267 Ultrasonic Water Baths 622-624 Unichiller 490 UniSampler Universal Centrifuges 719 Universal Containers UNICON 280 Universal Cutting Mills PULVERISETTE Universal Drying/Heating Ovens Universal Grinders, Analytical Grinders, Cutting Mills Universal Indicator Papers Universal Shakers Universal Water Baths Urbanti Funnels TOPAS USP Bulb Pipettes USP Flasks USP Graduated Pipettes UV Cuvettes UV Goggles UV Illumination Plates/ Transilluminators UV Lamps, Pocket UV Sterilisation Cabinets UV Transilluminators 518 530 513 1021 689 585 170 386 386 380 977 227 787 787 781 787 V 839 Vaccinating Eyelet Wire 960 Vaccinating Eyelets Vacuum Adapters 324, 325 Vacuum and Pessure Resistant Bottles 45 Vacuum Aspiration Systems 842 548 Vacuum Cabinets 468, 765-768 Vacuum Concentrators Vacuum Connections 770 475, 476, 479 Vacuum Controllers

1112

INDEX Vacuum Desiccators Vacuum Drying Ovens Vacuum Filter Funnels Vacuum Filters Vacuum Filtration Vacuum Gauges Vacuum Manifolds Vacuum Measurement Vacuum Oils for Pumps Vacuum Ovens Vacuum Pump System Vacuum Pumps 476-478, 844 126, 127 548 755 741, 755 465 479, 481 755 479 471 467, 469, 550 476, 841 465, 467-474, Vacuum Pumps, Oilfree Vacuum Systems Vacuum Systems Vacuum Systems, Multi-User Vacuum Tester Vacuum Tubing Vacuum Valves Vacuum Workplaces ValidChecks Value, Non Return Valves Valves for Nitrogen Distribution Valves in Tandem Arrangement Valves, Vacuum Vaporization Water Baths Variable Microliter Pipettes Variable Pipettes Variable Speed Rotor Mill 466, 477 841 465, 474, 475, 844 475, 476 1010, 1011 174, 175 323 340 1046 339 189, 322-324 339 339 322, 323 589 350 393 PULVERISETTE VARICON Variable Pipette 513 Containers Vario Shakers Vaseline Vat Brushes VENT-CAP Vertical Autoclaves Vessels Vessels, Flat Flange Reaction Vessels, Sedimentation Vial Racks Vials Vials Vials, Amber Glass Vials, Conic Vials, Conical Vials, Micro Vibratory Feeders Vibratory Shakers Vibratory Sieve Shaker Visco Samplers Viscometers Viscosimeters Viton Tubing Voltage Controllers, Triac 281 684 215 262 76 283 807 326, 327 1034 143 31 31-33, 35, 37-40 33-35, 37, 38 33 33-35, 37, 38 33-35, 37, 38 521 672 756 488 946-948 946 178 991 Volumetric Flasks Volumetric Flasks, Overflow Volumetric Pipettes Vortex Mixers Vortexer 395-404 1034 358, 386-388 672-674, 699, 711 673-675 W 1062 Wall Cabinets 264 Wall, Draining Racks 592 Warming Baths 532 Warming Cabinets 210 Warning Labels 210 Warning Tapes 73, 74, 76, 78 Wash Bottles 73 Wash Bottles, Spray Bottles 242 Wash Lotions 74, 75 Washing Bottles 309 Washing Bottles, Gas 242 Washing Room Products 260, 261 Waste Bag Holder 260, 261 Waste Bags 259, 261 Waste Bins 259 Waste Collection 261 Waste Disposal 1047 Waste Water Analysis 1048 Waste Water Analyzers 1048 Waste Water Mixers 1050 Waste Water Set-Ups 116 Watch Glass Dishes 116, 117 Watch Glass Dishes 956 Watches 1010 Water Analysis Apparatuses Water Analyzers 1048 Water Bath Additives, BAD-STABIL 216 Water Bath Shakers 587 562, 585-592, 594 Water Baths 590 Water Baths for Paraffine Cuts Water Baths, Oil Baths 585 267 Water Baths, Ultrasonic Water Content Determination 1009 Water Demineralizers 1082, 1083, 1087 1084 Water Desalination Cartridges Water Desalting Plants 1083 996 Water Detector Water Pre-Treatment Systems 1089 Water Purification Systems Water Samplers Water Sampling Bottles, PP Water Sampling Sticks Water Test Kits Water Testing Equipment Waterjet Replacements Weighing Benches Weighing Boats 1082, 1083, 1087 1017, 1020 72 1013 1028 1018 468 1064 867, 869 Weighing Bottles Weighing Brushes Weighing Cards Weighing Dishes Weighing Dishes and Jars Weighing Forceps Weighing Gloves Weighing Papers Weighing Shovels Weighing Spatulas Weighing Tables Weights Wet Sieving Wide Mouth Bottles Wide Mouth Bottles, Baffled Wide Mouth Canisters Wide Mouth Wash Bottles Wide Neck Barrels Wide Neck Barrels, 869 867 867 868, 869 867 161 238 867 157 148, 176 1064 866 756 62, 63, 65 54 87 74 90 with Welded-in Stopcock Wide Neck Bottles Wide Neck Containers Wide Neck Square Containers Wide Necked Dispenser Bottles Wilo Clamps Wipers Wipes Dispenser Systems Wipes, Cleaning Cloths Wire Basket Carts Wire Baskets Wire Baskets, Transport Wire Racks for Centrifuge Tubes Wire, Electrode Wire, Platinum Wire, Platinum-Iridium Wire, Silver Wire, Vaccinating Eyelet Withdrawal Systems Work Benches Work Benches, Cabinets Working Tables Woulfe Bottles 90 52, 54, 67, 68 89 71 67 186 169 256 242 1055 95, 96 96 135 839 839 839 839 839 418 1061, 1063 1057 1058, 1059, 1064 308 Z Zero Air Gas Generators 1096 1111

1113

Stichwortverzeichnis Die Seitenangaben beziehen sich jeweils auf den Textanfang (deutsch/englische Überschrift) Allgasbrenner Allgebrauchsthermometer Allihn-Kühler, DURAN-Glas Allzweckflaschen ALU-STECK-Kappen Alublöcke Aludosen Aluminium-Dosen Aluminium-Flaschen Aluminium-Folien Aluminium-Kappen A Abbe-Refraktometer Abdampfen mit IR-Strahlung Abdampfschalen Abdampfschalen Abdampfwasserbäder Abfalleimer Abfallsäcke Abfallsammler Abfallsammlung Abflammpistole Abfüllaufgaben Abfüllhilfen Abfüllsystem Abklärflaschen Ablagekästen Ablagekästen für Präparategläser Ablasshähne Absauganlagen Absaugaufgaben Absauggeräte Absaugleisten Absaugpapier Absaugsysteme Absaugsysteme Absaugung Absaugvorrichtung f. Zellkultur Abscheider, Kühlfallen Absorptionsmittel Abstrichösen Abstrichösenhalter Abtropfbretter Abtropfgestelle Abtropfgestelle Abwasser-Analysenapparaturen Abwasser-Mischgeräte Abwasser-Untersuchungs- 972, 974 580 111 111-114, 868 589 261 260, 261 259, 261 259 835 463, 464 454 811 82 146 821 89 1069 468 841 740 965 841 842-844 465, 468 841 313 259 960 960 263, 264 263 264 1048 1048 Photometer Abwasseranalytik Abwassermessplätze Abzüge Abzüge Abzughauben Abzugsschrank Abzugwasserbäder accu-jet-Pipettierhelfer Achat-Mörser Achat-Reibschalen Acryl-Exsikkatoren Acryl-Glasgestelle Acryl-Klebebänder Adapter Adapter, Vakuum- Adhäsionsobjektträger Aerober Abbau Akustik Alkoholbestimmung Alkoholbestimmung, 1030 1047 1050 1066 1066-1068 1066, 1067 1067 589 392 495 495 128, 129 138, 144 211 330 324, 325 962 1039 959 999 Destillationsapparatur für die Alkoholbestimmungsapparatur Alkoholmeter Allesschneider 999 999 894 163 1112 526 875 310 43, 44, 64 826 643 280 73 73 192 33-35, 37, 38, 825, 826 281 869 868 868 868 826 643 138 96 643 39 828 828 1039 828, 829 1048 1048 1048 763, 764 762 170 847-849, 851, 857, 860, 861 756 48, 49 1064 167 148 150 Aluminium-Pipettenbüchsen Aluminium-Probenschalen Aluminium-Rundscheiben Aluminium-Schalen Aluminium-Schalen, Einmal- Aluminium-Steckkappen Aluminiumblöcke Aluminiumblöcke für Röhrchen Aluminiumkörbe Aluminiumracks Ampullen, Glas Anaeroben-Behälter Anaerobentopf, Begasungs-Set Anaerober Abbau Anaerobiergefäße Analysatoren, Abwasser- Analysatoren, PAK- Analysatoren, Wasser- Analysensiebe Analysensiebe, Kunststoff Analysentrichter Analysenwaagen ANALYSETTE Anschluss-System Anti-Vibrationstisch APOLLO-Klingen Apotheker-Spatel Apothekerspachtel Apparat zur Bestimmung ätherischer Öle Applikationsspatel Aqua-Sampler Aquabox Aquarellpinsel Aquarienkästen AR-Glasröhren Aräometer Aräometer Aräometer-Zylinder aus PP Aräometerzylinder Arbeitsdrehstühle Arbeitsplatz für die Bestimmung der 1010 150 1015 1018 262 124 339 892 892, 894, 897, 999 895 894 1064 leicht freisetzbaren Cyanide 1048 Arbeitsplatz für die Bestimmung von Gesamtcyanid Arbeitsschutzhandschuhe Arbeitsschutzschürzen Arbeitstische 1048 239 239 1058, 1059, 1061, 1063, 1064 1057 Arbeitstische, -schränke Armstulpen f. d. Reinraumbereich Arterienklemmen ASTM-Thermometer ASTM-Zentrifugengläser Atemschutzfilter Atemschutzhalbmasken Atemschutzmasken Atex Ätherische Öle ätherischer Öle, 224 186 878, 879 134 230 231, 232 230 467 1010 Apparat zur Bestimmung Aufbewahrung Aufbewahrungsbeutel Aufbewahrungsboxen Aufbewahrungsdosen Aufbewahrungsflasche für Elektroden Aufbewahrungskartons für Tiefkühltruhen 1010 821 195 228, 798, 799, 816-818 84 906 Aufbewahrungskästen Auffangwannen Aufsaugmittel Aufschlussgeräte, Mikrowellen- Auftaugeräte, Mikrowellen- Augen-Notfallstation Augenduschen Augenspülflaschen Augenspülflaschen, EKASTU Augenwaschflaschen Ausblas-Messpipetten, AR-Glas Ausgießringe Ausglühsystem für Impfösen Auslegefolien Ausplattieren Ausstellungs-Schaugläser Autoklaven 816 146 122 259 535 535 221 220-222 220 220 220 384 47, 55 835, 837 257 833 136 283, 286, 287, 292, 294, 295, 297, 298 260 280 756 39 32, 34, 35, 37 138 Autoklaviersäcke Autoklavierwannen Automatische Siebauswertung Autosampler-Flaschen Autosampler-Vials Autosampler-Vials-Gestelle B Badthermostate 598-600, 602, 605-607 831 Bakterienzählgeräte 101 Bakteriologie-Röhrchen 82 Ballonflaschen Ballonflaschen-Zubehör 82 82 Ballonkanister-Zubehör 82 Ballons 81 Ballons, Abklärflaschen Baumwollhandschuhe 238 646 Beakerliner Becher 101 101, 102, 104-108 Becher 103 Becher, Filtrier- Becher, Pendel- 1014

1114

STICHWORT Becher, Planflansch- Becher, temperiert Becher, Winkel- Becherglasbürsten Bechergläser Becherzangen Behälter, Anaeroben- Behälter, Flüssigstickstoff- Behälter, Sicherheits- Behälter, Stahl Behälter, Transport- Behälterpumpen Beistelltische, fahrbare Belebtschlammanlagen Berufsmäntel Beschriftbares Klebeband Beschriftungsetiketten Beschriftungsklebebänder Beschwerungs-, Korkringe Beschwerungsringe Bestecke Bestimmung 326 103 1014 262 101-103 167 828 636 90 94 94 449, 453 1056 1047 224 211 207 211 145 145 960 der Schwefligen Säure 997 1009 Bestimmung des Wassergehalts Bestimmung von Alkohol 999 Bestimmung von schwefliger Säure 997 Betriebs-, Hilfsmittel 212 194 Beutel 259 Beutel für Abfallsammler 259 Beutel, Entsorgungs- Beutel, Kunststoff-, LDPE 195 194 Beutel, steril 907 Bezugselektroden 999 Bieranalysegerät 255 Bildschirm-Reiniger Bindemittel 259 966 Binokularmikroskope 790 BIO-CERT Reaktionsgefäße 1039 Biochemischer Sauerstoffbedarf Biogasbestimmung 1039 260 Biohazard 210 Biohazard-Warnklebebänder 960 Biologen-Bestecke 828 Bioreaktoren Blankoetiketten 208 338 Blasenzähler 787 Blaulicht-Transilluminatoren 570 Blitz-Kochplatten Blockthermostat, digital 579 579 Blockthermostate 785 Blotting Papiere, Geräte 785 Blotting-Geräte 786 Blottingpapiere Blut Bank Kühlschränke 631 1052 Blutmischpipetten Blutsenkungsständer 1052 Blutuntersuchung, Kapillarpipetten 1052 Boden- und Kompostthermometer 890 1039 Bodenatmung 1028 Bodenkoffer Bodenstative 669 33-35, 37, 38 Bördelkappen 33-35, 37, 38 Bördelverschlüsse 40 Bördelzangen 262 Borstenpinsel 262 Bottich-Reinigungsbürsten 741, 742 Bottletop-Filter 146, 799, 816, 817 Boxen 798, 799 Boxen für PCR 816 Boxen für Zellkulturröhrchen 816-819 Boxen, Kryo- BOY-Laborständer 205 Braunglas-Flaschen mit Gewinde 44, 62 53 Braunglas-Flaschen, Weithals- Braunglas-Messkolben 397 Braunglas-Titrierapparate 436 Braunglas-Tropfflaschen 65, 80, 81 526-528, 570, 834, 835 Brenner Brenner, Gebläse 526 Brillen 226-228 633, 635 Brucheismaschinen Brücken-Thermostate 598 538-540, 542, 545, Brutschränke 546, 1036 Brutschränke, Kühlbrutschränke 537 1035 BSB Bestimmung BSB-Arbeitsplätze 1035 1035, 1036 BSB-Bestimmungen BSB-Flaschen 1035 1034 BSB-Kolben BSB-Mess-System 1040 1039, 1041 BSB-Messgeräte BSB-Messung 1037, 1040 1035 BSB-Mischapparaturen BSB-Thermostatenschränke 1037 BSB-Verdünnungswasserbehälter, temperierbar Büchner-Trichter Büchse mit Deckel Bunsenbrenner Büretten Büretten-Hähne, DURAN-Glas Büretten-Klemmen Büretten-Ventile Büretten, Titratoren, Zubehör Bürettenhalter Bürsten Bürsten, Pinsel Butyl-Handschuhe Butyrometer Butyrometer-Schüttler 1035 172, 749, 750 85 526, 527, 835 430, 431, 433-443 322 201-203 323 430 202, 203 261, 262 261 240 1006 für Wasserbäder 587 Chemiefeste Pumpen Chemikalien-Binder Chemikalien-Enghalsflaschen Chemikalien-Schaufeln Chemikalien-Schutzhandschuhe Chemikalien-Weithalsflaschen Chemikalienbindung Chemikalienhandschuhe Chemikalienlöffel Chemiker-Bestecke Chemilumineszenz- 465, 467-469, 474, 478 259 67 157 237 68 258 238 154 960 Dokumentationssysteme 781, 782 1015 ChemoSchöpfer 774 Chromatographie-Säulen 776 Chromatographiepapiere 33-35, 37, 38 Chromatographievials Chromatograpiefläschchen 33-35, 37, 38 312 Claisen-Brücken, DURAN-Glas CO2 Inkubatoren 545 545, 546 CO2-Brutschränke CO2-Inkubatoren 545, 547, 548 CO2-Schüttler 679 Code Erklärungen Mikroliterspritzen 411 1006 Coli-Glöckchen 137 Combi-Racks Combi-Röhrchengestell-System 143 Compatible Control Badthermostate Consistometer Container Controller Cool-Packs count Kolonienzählgerät Cremes, Hautschutz- Cryo Racks Cryobehälter CryoStar CSB Bestimmung CSB-Arbeitsplätze CSB-Dosierer CSB-Küvettentest CSB-Messplätze CSB-Photometer CSB-Reaktionsgefäße CSB-Titratoren Cutter 598, 599 950 94, 280 476 643 831 241 643 640, 641 1005 1041 1041 1041 1044 1030, 1044 1030 1041 1041 90, 193 C °C + °F Thermo-Hygrometer °C + °F Thermometer Calcimeter Cap Tool Ceran-Glaskeramikkochfläche Ceran-Heizplatten Chargenzertifikat Chemie-Membranpumpen D Dampfdurchführungsrohre 770, 771 Dampfsterilisatoren 283 Dampfsterilisatoren 288, 290-292, 294, 953 953 1051 809 569 569 383 469, 477 295, 297, 298 Datenlogger DC-Sprayer Deckel Deckel für Reaktionsgefäße Deckel, Flansch- Deckel, Tiegel- Deckeleinsätze 884, 922 78 93, 107 328 328 118 813 1113

1115

STICHWORT Deckelstreifen, PCR Deckgläser Deckglaspinzetten Deep well-Platten Delbrück-Kapillaren Demeter-Verdünnungspipetten Demonstrationsmittel Densitometer Desinfektionskonzentrate Desinfektionsmittel Desinfektionsreiniger Desinfektionssprays Desinfektionstücher Destillation Bauteile Destillationsanlagen Destillationsapparaturen 808 161, 961 161 804, 805 1053 1006 218 897, 898 251 248, 254, 255, 272 248, 256 248, 255 248 311 467, 468 311, 469, 474-476, 625, 1047 Destillationsapparaturen für die Phenol- Bestimmung 1047 312 Destillationsrücklaufteiler 313 Destillieraufsätze, DURAN-Glas 312 Destillierbrücken 311 Destillierkolonnen 1047 Destilliersysteme 313 Destilliervorlagen 312 Destilliervorstöße, DURAN-Glas 638 Dewar Gefäße 314, 315, 473, 639-642 Dewar-Gefäße 641 Dewar-Großgefäße 641 Dewar-Kannen 641 Dewar-Transportgefäße 892, 894, 999 Dichte-Aräometer 851 Dichtebestimmungswaagen 896-898 Dichtemessgeräte Dichtungen für Filternutschen 747 Dichtungen für Normschliffe, PTFE 317 748 Dichtungen für Schraubfilter 320 Dichtungen zum Durchstechen Dichtungen, Reaktionsgefäß- 331 Dichtungsringe Kappen für Planflansch-Gefäße 330 Dichtungsringe für Schraubverbindungs- 320 438-441 416 973 974 957 883, 884, 953 438 1010, 1011 896 886 973 880 1045 997, 1045 360 700 415 361, 362, 415, 416, 418, 421, 422, 424-426, 428-430 362, 363 Digital-Büretten Digital-Dispenser Digital-Handrefraktometer Digital-Refraktometer Digital-Stoppuhren Digital-Thermometer Digital-Titriergeräte Digital-Verpackungstester Digitaldensitometer Digitale Messgeräte Digitales Refraktometer Digitalthermometer Dipslide Inkubatoren Dipslides Direktverdrängungs-Pipetten Diskmischer Dispenser Dispenser Dispenser Tips 1114 Dispenser, Mehrfach- Dispensette DIspensier- und Dosiersystem Dispergierer Dispergiersysteme Dokumentationssysteme, 420 416 811 497 497, 500 Chemilumineszenz- 781, 782 Dokumentationssysteme, Gel- 782, 783 438 Doppelgebläse 338 Doppelkammer-Glasblasenzähler 569 Doppelkochzone Doppelkreuzmuffen 200 198, 199 Doppelmuffen 146 Doppelspatel Dosen 83 73, 83-86, 132, 133 Dosen Dosierbehälter 90 Dosierbüretten 443 361, 362, Dosiergeräte 421-423, 425, 426 322 Dosierhähne, DURAN-Glas 155 Dosierkellen 155 Dosierlöffel, Einweg- 155 Dosierlöffel, Sterile 454, 464 Dosierpumpen 148, 176 Dosierspatel 412 Dosierspritzen 427 Dosierstationen 427 Dosiersysteme 427 Dosiersysteme, elektronische 464 Dosierung 839 Draht 528 Drahtdreiecke Drahtgestelle, Reagenzglas- 143 Drahtgestelle, Zentrifugenröhrchen 135 Drahtkörbe 95, 96 Drahtkörbe, Edelstahl 96 1055 Drahtkorbwagen 1018 Drahtsiebkescher Drehhocker 1064 958 Drehmoment Drehmomentmessgeräte 958 Drehschieber-Vakuumpumpen 471, 472 Drehschieberpumpen 471 1064 Drehstühle Drehtische für Petrischalen 833 Dreifachhalter für Reaktionsgefäße 332 204, 582 Dreifüße Dreihalskolben, NS- 304 188, 322, 324 Dreiwege-Hähne Dreiwege-Ventile 188 153, 833, 838 Drigalski-Spatel Drigalski-Stäbe 965 437, 438 Druckbälle 187 Druckgasflaschen-Halterung 189 Druckhalteventil Druckluft-Laborrührer, Zubehör 669 Druckluft-Laborrührwerke 668, 669, 671 668, 669, 671 Druckluft-Rührer 213 Druckluftsprays 79 Drucksprüher 160 DUMONT-Pinzetten Dünnschicht-Chromatographie 775 Dünnschicht-Chromatographie Durchflussküvetten Durchflussmesser Durchflusswächter Durchgangsventile Durham-Röhrchen DUROPLAN-Petrischalen 775 983 955 996 323 1006 115 E Eckenventil-Einwegsverbindungs- hähne, DURAN-Glas 322 323 587 Eckventile ECOTHERM-Bäder EcoVac Sicherheits- Absaugsysteme 844 Edelstahl-Dewargefäß 640 Edelstahl-Einschübe für Kryo-Boxen 820 204 Edelstahl-Füße Edelstahl-Kanister 90 310 Edelstahl-Kühler 96 Edelstahl-Lochblechkörbe 1063 Edelstahl-Möbel 116 Edelstahl-Petrischalen Edelstahl-Prüfsiebe 760 279 Edelstahl-Schalen 819 Edelstahlgestelle 1014 Edelstahlschöpfer Edelstahltrichter 173 55 EHV-Flaschen 92-94 Eimer 261 Eimer, Abfall- 93 Eimer, Edelstahl Eimer, Kannen, Kessel 92 261 Eimer, Sicherheits- 344, 345 Ein- und Mehrkanalpipetten 565 Einbau-Heizplatten Einbettung, Färbung 963 535 Eindampfgeräte, Mikrowellen- Einhänge-, Badthermostate 597 Einhängethermostate 598, 599, 618, 619 344, 350, 355-357 Einkanalpipetten Einlagen für Pipettencontainer 281 60 Einmal-Flaschen 234, 235 Einmal-Handschuhe 242 Einmal-Handtücher Einmal-Impfösen 839 413 Einmal-Kanülen 1053 Einmal-Kapillaren, Haematokrit- 821, 822 Einmal-Kulturröhrchen 977, 978 Einmal-Küvetten Einmal-Mundschutz 229 235 Einmal-OP-Handschuhe 812 Einmal-Petrischalen 163 Einmal-Pinzetten Einmal-Pipetten 377-379 132 Einmal-Probebecher 99, 101 Einmal-Reagenzgläser 868 Einmal-Schalen, Aluminium 168 Einmal-Skalpelle Einmal-Spritzen 413

1116

STICHWORT Einmal-Untersuchungs- handschuhe Einmal-Wägeschalen Einmalpipetten Einsatzgestelle Einscheiben-Schutzbrillen Einscheiben-Überbrillen Einschweißgeräte für Folien Einstabmessketten Einstechfühler Einstellen-Rührer Einstichsonden Eintauchfühler Eintauchheizer, Stabform Eintauchprobenträger Einweg-DispoSampler Einweg-Kegel-Hähne, Quarzglas Einweg-Nitril-Handschuhe Einweg-Pinzetten Einwegküvetten Einwegsverbindungshähne, 235, 236 868 377 829 227 228 196 900, 904 887 649, 652-654 924 886 580 997 491 324 237 163 979 DURAN-Glas 322 157 Einwiegeschaufeln 560 Einzelverascher 644 Eisbäder 633 Eisbereiter 633 Eismaschinen 633, 635 Eismaschinen 877 Eispunktthermometer 633 Eisspeicher 569 Elektro-Doppelkochzonen 785 Elektroblotting Elektroden 900, 907 Elektroden-Aufbewahrungsflasche 906 839 Elektroden-Draht Elektroden-Klemmen 201, 202 906 Elektroden-Pflegeset 906 Elektroden-Reinigung 900, 902 Elektrolytlösungen Elektronische Regelgeräte 991 953 Elektronische Thermometer Elektrophorese-Systeme 784 Enghals-Standflaschen, DURAN®-Glas 58 Enghals-Steilbrustflaschen 59 Enghals-Verpackungsflaschen, Glas 55 61, 62, 64, 66, 67, 71 Enghalsflaschen Entgasung 465 467, 468, 754 Entgasungsgerät Entnahmestöcke zur Wasserprobenentnahme Entnahmesysteme Entsalzungsanlagen Entsalzungspatronen Entsorgung Entsorgungsbeutel Entsorgungsbeutel-Ständer Entsorgungskannen Entsorgungsständer Eppendorf-Pipetten EPPENDORF-Reaktionsgefäße EPPI-Pistill EPRACKS 1013 418 1082, 1083 1084 195, 260 195, 259, 260 259 92 261 350 496 496 816 Erdgasbrenner ERLENMEYER-CAP-Kappen Erlenmeyer-Kolben Erlenmeyerkolben Erste Hilfe Erste-Hilfe-Koffer Erste-Hilfe-Schränke Erythrozyten-Pipetten ESD Reinigungsstäbchen Etiketten Etikettenlöser Eudiometer Evaporatoren Ex Ex-Schutz-Schläuche Exsikkator-Deckel Exsikkator-Hähne Exsikkator-Platten Exsikkator-Zubehör Exsikkatoren Exsikkatoren, Zubehör Extraktionshülsen Extraktionssysteme Extraktoren 526 825 108-110, 302, 825 108 219 219 220 1052 247 207, 208, 486 212 1050 765 467 177 124, 126 126 127 124 124, 126, 128-132, 465 124 524, 525 522, 524 522 F 4-Füße Fachbücher Faltenfilter Fangnetze Färbebrücke Färbeeinsätze Farbmesssystem Farbmessung Faseroptische Ultra-Mikro- Messzelle Faserschreiber Fass-, Entnahmepumpen Fass-Handpumpen Fass-Mehrfachverteiler Fass-Pumpen Fass-Trichter Fässer Fässer, Weithals- Fässer, Weithals-, mit Hahn Fasspumpen Feinstaubfiltermasken Feinzerstäuber Fermenter FermentoStar Festphasenextraktion Fette, Schliff- Feuchtebestimmer Feuchtebestimmer Feuchtebestimmer, Halogen- Feuchtekammern Feuchtigkeitsbestimmungs- waagen Feuchtigkeitslogger Filter 204 218 724 1018 963 963 1027 1027 987 208 449 450 51 449-454 172 89 90 90 453 229 78 830 999 465, 468 214, 215 870 870, 871 873 551, 552 851, 873 954 724, 739 Filter, Labor- Filterabzüge Filterhalter Filtermasken Filtermasken, Feinstaub- Filtermasken, Geruchsschutz- Filternutschen Filternutschen-Dichtungen, EPDM Filterpapiere Filterpapiere Filterplatten Filterspitzen Filtertiegel Filtration 1069 1068, 1069 754 229 229 229 749, 750 747 721 721-724, 728, 729, 798 743 366 747, 748 465, 467, 468, 726, 727, 745, 755 751 752 Filtrationsapparate Filtrationseinheiten Filtrationseinheiten für Reinstwasser Filtrationsgerät Filtrationsgeräte Filtrationsgeräte, Durchfluss Filtrationshilfsmittel Filtrierapparate Filtrieraufsätze mit Gewinde Filtrierbecher Filtriergeräte Filtriergestelle Filtrierhilfen Filtrierpapiere 1088 754 733, 741, 752, 753 740 746 751, 755 748 103 751, 753 747 746 721-727, 744, 745, 798, 799 207 Filzschreiber 648 FischMAG 185 Fittings, PTFE 348 Fixvolumenpipetten 990 Flammenphotometer 990 Flammenphotometer 330 Flanschadapter Flanschbecher, DURAN®-Glas 326 Flanschdeckel für Reaktionsgefäße 328 331 Flanschdichtungen Flanschgefäße, DURAN®-Glas 327 Flanschklemmen 331 Flanschrundkolben, DURAN®-Glas 326 Flanschverbinder 332 331 Flanschverschlüsse 32 Fläschchen mit Schraubkappe 31 Fläschchen, Vials Flaschen 42 Flaschen 308 Flaschen 39, 43, 44, 47, 53, 55, 56, 58, 59, 61-65, 69, 71, 73, 78-81, 89 138 49-51 98 309 824 60 308 841 415, 416, 418, 425, 428-430 50 Flaschen-Gestelle Flaschen-Mehrfachverteiler Flaschen-Tragegestelle Flaschen, Gaswasch- Flaschen, Nährboden- Flaschen, Probenahme- Flaschen, Woulfe Flaschenaufsatz-Absaugegeräte Flaschenaufsatz-Dispenser Flaschenaufsatz-Verteiler 1115

1117

STICHWORT Flaschenbürsten Flaschendispenser Flaschendosierer Flaschenhals-Dispenser Flaschenhalter Flaschenhalterung, Druckgas- Flaschensysteme Flaschenthermometer Flaschenträger Flaschentransportbehälter Flaschenverschlüsse Flaschenverteiler, HPLC- Flex-Schläuche Fliehkraftkugelmühlen Fließkontrolle FLIP-Pipettierball Flockeneis-Automaten Flockeneis-Speicher Flockeneisbereiter Flockeneismaschine Flokkulatoren Flowmeter Fluorkautschuk-Schläuche Flüssigkeits-Absaugsysteme Flüssigkeits-Sammler Flüssigkeitspumpen Flüssigstickstoff-Behälter Flüssigstickstoff-Versandbehälter Folien Folien Folien für Einschweißgeräte Folien, Aluminium Folien, Schlauch- Folien, Verschluss- Folienmesser Folienschweißgeräte Fön Fördern Fotoschalen Fuchs/Rosenthal-Zählkammern Füllkörper für Destillierkolonnen Fußballblase Fußbodenmatten, abziehbar Fußpumpen 262 422 421 425 1014 187 42 879 99 92 46, 56 50 177 509 179 390 633 633 634 635 1051 955 178 467, 468, 843 488 450, 463 636 636 192 869 196 192 196 809 168 196 529 463 122, 123 963 311 956 258 449, 450 G Gabelklemmen für Kegelschliffe Gärröhrchen Gas Verteilerrechen Gas-Sicherheitsbrenner phoenix Gasanalytik Gasblasenzähler Gasbrenner Gasfilter Gasflaschen-Halterung Gasgeneratoren Gasgeneratoren Gaskartuschen Gasmasken 317 338 339 835 956 338 526-528, 834 1068 187 1095 1095, 1096 527 231, 232 1116 Gasmaskenfilter Gasschläuche Gasschutzbrillen Gasschutzhalbmasken Gassicherheits-Schläuche Gaswarngeräte Gaswaschflaschen Gaswaschsäulen GC-Tower Gebläsebälle Gebotszeichen Gefahrensymbole Gefahrgutkanister Gefahrstofftafeln Gefäße Gefäßklemmen Gefrier-Brütschränke Gefrierbehälter Gefrierpunkt-Bestimmmer Gefriertrockner Gefriertrocknung Gehäuseheizhauben Gel-Dokumentation Gelenkgläserbürsten Geltrockner Genius Geräte Geruchsschutzfiltermasken Gesamtcyanid, Arbeitsplätze für 232 178, 179 225, 243 232 178 233 309, 338 309 1058 437, 438 209 208, 226 87 210 807 186 542 635-637 1005 771-774 771 583 782, 783 261 467, 468 428 779 229 die Bestimmung von Gesichtsmasken Gesichtsschutzschirme Gestelle für Abfallbeutel Gestelle für Imhoff-Trichter Gestelle für Pipettencontainer 1048 229, 230 225, 638 259 1035 GESTICON 281 Gestelle für Reagenzgläser 140, 143, 144 Gestelle für Reaktionsgefäße 137, 139, 140 1035 Gestelle für Sedimentiergefäße 747 Gestelle für Trichter 264 Gestelle, Abtropf- 747 Gestelle, Filtrier- 120 Gestelle, Tiegel 135 Gestelle, Zentrifugenröhrchen 176 Gewebe-Schläuche 866 Gewichte 321 Gewinde-Adapter 821 Gewinde-Präparategläser 822 Gewinde-Reagenzgläser 32 Gewinde-Schraubgläser 56-58, 65 Gewindeflaschen 49 GL 45 Anschluss-System 49 GL45-Schraubverschluss-Verteiler Glas-Filterplatten für Schraubfilter 748 Glas-Schlitzsiebplatte f. Schraubfilter 748 326 Glasbecher, Planflansch- Glasbürsten 262 Glasdosen 86 821, 822 Gläser 136 Gläser, Präparate- 869 Gläser, Wäge- Gläser, Weithals- 56 Glasfaserfilter Glasfaserpapier Glasfilter Glasfiltergeräte Glasfiltertiegel Glasfiltrationsgeräte Glasfläschchen Glasflaschen 744, 745 745 743 743 747 753 31, 32 39, 43, 44, 52, 53, 55, 56, 58, 59, 62, 64 824 Glasflaschen, Nährboden- 265 Glasgefäße-Trockner 1006 Glasgeräte, milchwirtschaftliche 1053 Glaskapillaren 569 Glaskeramik-Kochfläche 529 Glaskeramikplatten 304 Glaskolben 395-398 Glasmesskolben 405, 406 Glasmesszylinder 410 Glasmischzylinder 749 Glasnutschen 961 Glasobjektträger 311 Glasperlen für Destillierkolonnen 278 Glasreinigungsautomaten 965 Glasreinigungspapier 339 Glasröhren 216 Glasrohrschneider 114 Glasschalen 414 Glasspritzen 60 Glasstopfen, massiv 169-171 Glastrichter 240 Glove Box Handschuhe 112, 113, 118 Glühschälchen 207 Graviermesser, elektrisches 104, 105 Griffinbecher 517 Grindomix 229 Grobstaubmasken 690 Großschüttler Großstative 198 Grote-Krekeler Verbrennungsrohre 120 Gukos 746, 747 Gummiblase 956 Gummidichtungen für Filternutschen 747 390 Gummihütchen 173 Gummischläuche Gummistopfen 191 169 Gummiwischer Gurtklemmen 187 H Haematokrit-Einmalkapillaren Haemometerpipetten Haftmatten Hähne Hähne, Ventile Hähne, Ventile, Klemmen Hakendoppelmuffen Hakenmuffen Halbgebläse Halbmasken, Gasschutz- Halbmikro-Küvetten 1053 1052 258 189, 321, 322, 324 322 186 198 198 437 232 977, 978

1118

STICHWORT Halter für Müllsäcke Haltevorrichtungen 261 für Reaktionsgefäße 332 411, 412 Hamilton-Spritzen 520 Hammerschlagmühlen 279 Hand-Abroller 841 Handabsaugvorrichtung 361 Handdispenser 254, 272 Händedesinfektionsmittel 926 Handmessgeräte, pH 449-453 Handpumpen 971, 973 Handrefraktometer 1072-1074 Handschuhboxen 235 Handschuhboxenhalter 234 Handschuhe 234, 235, 237-240, 638 Handschuhe 237 Handschuhe, Schutz- 240 Handschutzmittel 1016 Handseilspulen 242, 246 Handtücher, Einmal- 241 Handwaschmittel 361 HandyStep 957, 1030 Handzähler 1062 Hängeschränke 116, 127 Hartporzellan 117 Hartporzellan-Deckel 117 Hartporzellan-Tiegel 240 Hautschutz 240, 241 Hautschutzmittel 84 HDPE-Runddosen 38 Headspace-Fläschchen 38 Headspace-Vials 205 Hebebühnen 205, 206 Hebebühnen 449 Heber 522 Heißextraktion 279 Heißluft-Indikatorband 529 Heißluftgebläse 216 Heizbad-Flüssigkeiten 562-564, 587-589, 592 Heizbäder 590 Heizbäder, Paraffin-Streck- 581 Heizbänder 951 Heizbänke 579 Heizblock-Thermostate 579 Heizblöcke 562 Heizer 566 Heizfolien 561, 566, 570 Heizgeräte 570 Heizgeräte, Labor- 535 Heizgeräte, Mikrowellen- 581 Heizhauben 581-584 Heizhauben 582, 584 Heizhauben, Zubehör 581 Heizleitungen Heizmantel 103 Heizplatten 560, 561, 564-566, 568-570 560 Heizplatten, Mehrzweckbäder Heizschränke 532 580 Heizstäbe, Quarzglas 311 Hempel-Kolonnen, DURAN-Glas 238 Hitze-/Kälteschutzhandschuhe 238-240 Hitzeschutzhandschuhe Hochleistungs-Heizplatten 565, 567 502 Hochleistungs-Ultraschall 556 Hochtemperatur-Öfen Hochtemperaturheizhauben 582 Hochvakuum-Hähne, DURAN-Glas 322 323 Hochvakuum-Ventile 246 Holzspatel Homogenisatoren 496 496, 502, 504 Homogenisatoren 1006 Homogenisierpipetten Howorka-Ball® 390 47 HPLC-Flaschen 50 HPLC-Flaschenverteiler HPLC-Tower 1058 315 Hülsenschliffe, DURAN-Glas 697 Hybridisierungsflaschen Hydrometer 897 I 904 IDS-Sensoren 1034 Imhoff-Stative 833 Impfhaken 839, 840, 960 Impfösen 839 Impfösen-Draht 839, 840, 960 Impfösen-Halter 835 Impfösen-Karussell 839, 840 Impfösen-Ständer 837 Impfösen-Sterilisator 279 Indikator-Klebebänder 1021 Indikatoren, pH- 1021 Indikatorpapiere, Testbestecke 92 Industrie-Eimer 877 Industrie-Stockthermometer 865 Industrie-Zählwaagen 891 Infarotthermometer 558 Infrarot-Ofen 891 Infrarot-Thermometer 873 Infrarot-Trockenwaagen 570 Infrarotbrenner 39 Injektions-Vials, Glas 413 Injektionskanülen Injektionsspritzen 414 Inkubationsschüttler 683, 689, 694, 695 538, 540, Inkubatoren 542-546, 548, 587, 829 1045 680 803 121, 123, 279 467 1082-1086 1081 Inkubatoren, Dipslide Inkubatorschüttler Inserts Instrumentenschalen Interner Ex-Schutz Ionenaustauscher Ionenaustauscher Patronen IR-Strahler zum Verdampfen von Flüssigkeiten, Säuren und Chemikalien 580 ISO-Gewindeflaschen, DURAN®-Glas 43 Isolatoren 1072 280, 816 Isolierbehälter Isoliergefäße 640, 641 K Kabelfühler Kalibrierstandards Kalklöser Kälte-/Hitzeschutzhandschuhe Kälte-Wärme-Thermostate Kältespray Kältethermostate 884 984 251 238 606 213 603, 605, 609, 611, 618, 619, 621 Kaltlichtquellen Kammern, Zubehör Kanister Kanister Kanister, Sicherheits- Kanisterpumpen Kannen Kannen, Sicherheits- Kanülen Kanülensammler Kapillar-Viskosimeter Kapillaren, Delbrück- Kapillaren, Haematokrit-Einmal- Kapillarpipetten Kapillarröhrchen Kappen Kappen mit DIN-Gewinde, 965 784 86 86-89 90 449, 453 94 90 413 259 947 1053 1053 1052, 1053 952 33-35, 37, 38, 796, 825, 826 Kunststoff- Kappen, Schraubverbindungs- Kappen, Schraubverschluss- Kappen, Schraubverschluss- 319 319 46 +180 °C Karl-Fischer-Titratoren Karlsruher Flaschen Kartons für Tiefkälte-Lasertruhen Kasserollen KCI-Lösung Kegel-Probenteiler Kegelhähne, DURAN-Glas Kegelschliff-Klammern Kegelschliff-Klemmen, Stahl Keimprüfpapiere Keimzähler Keramik-Kochfläche Kernschliffe, DURAN-Glas Kescher Kessel, Stahl Kettenklemmen Kielpinsel Kieselgel Kimwipes Kippautomaten Kittel Kjeldahl-Aufschlussapparate Kjeldahl-Destillationssystem Kjeldahl-Destillierapparate Klammern, Normschliff- Klappwagen Kläranlage z. Best. d. Abbaub. org. Verb. 320 446 1035 816 116 905 521 322 317, 318 317 729 832 569 315 1018 95 202 262 214 245 389 224 1001 1003 1001 317 1056 Klebebänder Klebebänder Klebebänder, Indikator 1047 210 210, 211 279 1117

1119

STICHWORT Kleinflasch-Verbindungssystem Kleinschüttler Klemmen Klemmen für Kegelschliffe Klemmen für Kugelschliffe Klemmen, Reaktionsgefäß- Klimaprüfschränke Klimaschränke Klimaschränke, Testkammern Klingen mit Griffleiste KNF Lab Tower Knopfsonden Knorpelmesser Kochplatten Kofler-Heizbank Kohlrauschkolben Kolben 332 679 186, 187, 200-203, 318 317 318 331 555 551-554, 556 551 167 751 960 168 569, 570 951 398 108-111, 301-304, 326, 824, 825 1034 1034 395, 397-402 770 443 261 359 358 201, 202 414 466 146 167 831 831, 832 311 1027 477 683, 685 431, 444, 446 845, 846 178 468 916, 940, 943 553 552, 553 486 Kolben, BSB- Kolben, Imhoff-Trichter- Kolben, Mess- Kolben, Rotationsverdampfer- Kolbenbüretten Kolbenbürsten Kolbenhubpipetten Kolbenhubpipetten, labopettor Kolbenklemmen Kolbenprober Kolbenpumpen Kolbenringe Kolbenzangen Kolonienzählgeräte Kolonienzählgeräte Kolonnen Kolorimeter Kombi-Pumpstände Kompaktschüttler Kompakttitratoren Kompaktwaagen Komplett-Schläuche Kompressoren Konduktometer Konstantklima-Kammern Konstantklimaschränke Kontroll-Verschlusssiegel Kontrollmesskolben, 398 konformitätsbescheinigte 974 Konzentrationsbestimmung 95 Körbe 96 Körbe, autoklavierbar 95 Körbe, Draht 96 Körbe, Transport- 1055 Korbwagen, Draht- 217 Korkbohrer-Sätze 146 Korkringe 190 Korkstopfen 902, 906 Korrosionsmesszelle KPG-Lagerhülsen, DURAN® Glas 333 KPG-Rührwellen, DURAN® Glas 333 Kraft-Schneidmühlen PULVERISETTE 518 679 Kreisschüttelgeräte 198 Kreuzdoppelmuffen Kristallisierschalen 114 1118 Kristallisierschalen, Petrischalen 114 313 Krümmer, DURAN-Glas Kryo-Artikel 638 817-819 Kryo-Aufbewahrungsboxen Kryo-Aufbewahrungskartons 816 816, 817, 819 Kryo-Boxen 813, 819, 820 Kryo-Gestelle Kryo-Racks 643, 820 813, 814 Kryo-Röhrchen 139 Kryo-Röhrchen-Gestelle 814 Kryo-Vials 818 Kryo-Zellboxen Kryoartikel 813 318 KS-Klemmen, Stahl 316 KS-Verbindungen, DURAN-Glas 310 Kugelkühler, DURAN-Glas Kugelmühlen 507 507, 508 Kugelmühlen 321 Kugelschliff-Griffbund-Dichtungen 318 Kugelschliff-Klammern Kugelschliffe, Quarzglas 316 Kugelschliffverbindungen, DURAN-Glas Kühl-, Gefrierschränke Kühl-Inkubatoren Kühlakkus Kühlbehälter Kühlboxen Kühlboxen, Truhen, Eisbäder Kühlbrutschränke Kühleinheiten Kühler Kühler Kühler nach Allihn Kühler, Kugel- Kühlerklemmen Kühlfallen Kühlgeräte, Medikamenten- Kühlmedium Kühlpackungen Kühlracks Kühlschränke Kühlschränke, Mini- Kühlthermostate und Kühler Kühltransportboxen Kühlwasserrelais Kükenhähne Kulturenwasserbäder Kulturenzuchtgeräte Kulturgefäße, Verschlüsse Kulturkolben Kulturkolben-Verschlüsse Kulturröhrchen Kunststoff-Analysensiebe Kunststoff-Becher Kunststoff-Beutel Kunststoff-Boxen Kunststoff-Dewargefäße Kunststoff-Dosen Kunststoff-Erlenmeyerkolben Kunststoff-Etiketten Kunststoff-Flaschen Kunststoff-Gestelle für Trichter 316 626 542 643 644 642, 644 642 540, 541 643 310 625 310 310 201, 202 313-315, 473 629 216 643 643 629-632, 1036 626 622 642 996 188 588 829 821 824, 825 825 101, 821, 822 762 104 195, 260 146 639 84 110 208 60 747 Kunststoff-Heizbäder 587 Kunststoff-Kappen mit DIN-Gewinde 319 Kunststoff-Kappen, Schraubverbindungs- 319 Kunststoff-Kappen, Schraubverschluss +180 °C 320 106 Kunststoff-Messbecher 403, 404 Kunststoff-Messkolben 409, 410 Kunststoff-Messzylinder 319 Kunststoff-Oliven 377 Kunststoff-Pasteurpipetten 812 Kunststoff-Petrischalen 161, 163 Kunststoff-Pinzetten 798 Kunststoff-Probenröhrchen 255 Kunststoff-Reiniger 157 Kunststoff-Schaufeln 187 Kunststoff-Schlauchklemmen 74 Kunststoff-Spritzflaschen 171 Kunststoff-Trichter 587 Kunststoff-Wasserbäder 798 Kunststoff-Zentrifugenröhrchen 181 Kupplungen 337 Kupplungen, Magnetrührer- 956 Kurzzeitmesser 977-980, 983 Küvetten 983 Küvetten-Reinigungskonzentrat 265 Küvetten-Spüler Küvetten-Ständer 984 Küvetten, NMR-Röhrchen, Zubehör 975 L LaboBox-System LABOCAP-Kappen Laboderm Labogazbrenner Labopettor Labor-Eis Maschine Labor-Hebebühnen Labor-pH-Meter Labor-Sicherheitsflaschen Labor-Vakuum-Systeme Laborabzüge Laborautoklaven 138 826 240 527 358 635 206 932 78 477 1068 283, 286, 287, 295, 297, 298 835 Laborbrenner 261 Laborbürsten LABORETTE 521 Laborflaschen 43, 44, 52, 53, 62, 64, 65 Laborfotoschalen 122 526, 528, 834 Laborgasbrenner Laborgefrierschränke 627, 629, 630 Laborgefriertrockner 771-774 Laborglas-Reinigungsautomat/ Desinfektoren Laborglas-Reinigungsautomaten Laborglas-Reinigungsautomaten- 277 278 Zubehör Laborglas-Reinigungsgeräte Laborglas-Spülmaschinen Laborhebebühnen 278 267, 278 278 205, 206

1120

STICHWORT 564 570 224 Luft-Sand-Ölbäder Luftregler 562 188 Membran-Vakuumpumpen Membranfilter Membranfilter Membranflüssigkeitspumpen Membranpumpen 465, 467-469, 474 730 730, 731, 733, 739 463 463-465, 467-470, 474, 476, 478 478 Membranpumpstände 994 Mess- u. Regelgeräte-Temperatur 106 Messbecher 104, 106-108 Messbecher 168, 516 Messer 516, 517 Messermühle 915 Messgeräte 1030 Messgeräte, CSB- 886 Messgeräte, digital 915, 935 Messgeräte, Leitfähigkeits- 915, 935 Messgeräte, pH- 931 Messgeräte, pH/mV-Temperatur- 915 Messgeräte, Sauerstoff- 883 Messgeräte, Temperatur- 915 Messgeräte, Trübungspunkt- 94 Messkannen 904 Messketten 395 Messkolben 395-404 Messkolben 1034 Messkolben, Überlauf- 155 Messlöffel, Einweg- 155 Messlöffel, Sterile 380 Messpipetten 380, 383-385 Messpipetten 156 Messschaufeln 874 Messstreifen, Temperatur- 987 Messzelle 405 Messzylinder 405-410 Messzylinder 900 Metall-Einstabmessketten 562 Metallbäder 108 Metallbecher 94, 280 Metallbehälter 572, 579 Metallblock-Thermostate 570 Metallblockthermostate 280 Metallbüchsen 93, 94 Metalleimer 94 Metallkannen Metallkappen für Kulturkolben 825 Metallkappen für Nährbodenflaschen 825 Metallkessel 95 113, 123, 279 Metallschalen 123 Metallschüsseln 755 Metallsiebe 119 Metalltiegel 172 Metalltrichter micro-Pipettierhelfer 391 795 Micro-Tubes 796 Micro-Tubes mit Gewinde Mikro-Beobachtung 962 1052, 1053 Mikro-Einmalpipetten 31 Mikro-Fläschchen 146 Mikro-Flaschenkasten 338 Mikro-Gaswaschflaschen Mikro-Löffel 146 507, 508 Mikro-Mühlen 1119 Laborheizbäder Laborheizgeräte Laborkittel Laborkläranlage z. Best. d. Abbaub. org. Verb. 1047 224 Laborkleidung 627, 629-631, 684 Laborkühlschränke 149 Laborlöffel 223, 224 Labormäntel 207 Labormarker 966, 968 Labormikroskope 516 Labormixer 1057, 1066 Labormöbel 557, 558 Laboröfen 463 Laborpumpen 145 Laborring 668, 669 Laborrührer 668, 669 Laborrührwerke 458, 462, 463 Laborschlauchpumpen 222, 223 Laborschürzen 211 Laborsignierband 252, 256 Laborspülautomatenreiniger 1061 Laborspülen 278 Laborspüler 205, 206 Laborständer 207 Laborstifte 1064 Laborstühle 121 Labortablett 875 Laborthermometer 877 Laborthermometer 1057 Labortische, fahrbare 1056 Labortransportwagen 257 Laborunterlagen 849-851, 860, 864 Laborwaagen 1054-1056, 1230 Laborwagen 167 Laborzangen 557, 559 Labotherm-Öfen 97, 637 Lagerbehälter 333 Lagerhülsen 816 Lagerkartons für Tiefkühltruhen 146 Lagerkästen 820 Lagerracks 217, 787 Lampen 957 Länge 207 Laserdruckeretiketten 240 Latex-Handschuhe 584, 992 Leistungssteller 1057 Leitern, Sicherheits- 937, 941 Leitfähigkeit 909 Leitfähigkeits-/pH-Tester Leitfähigkeitsmessgeräte 936 Leitfähigkeitsmessgeräte 909, 914, 932, 935-937, 939, 941, 943, 1086 965 488 844 96 153 146, 148, 149, 153-155 148, 149 148, 149, 154 73 90 Linsenreinigungspapiere Liqui-Sampler Liquid Handling Lochblechkörbe, Edelstahl Löffel Löffel Löffel, Stahl Löffelspatel Lösemittel-Flaschen, Aluminium Lösemittelbehälter M 391 macro Pipettierhelfer 964 Magazin 120 Magnesia-Rinnen 120 Magnesia-Rinnen, -Stäbchen 120 Magnesia-Stäbchen 588 Magnetrühr-Heizbäder 587, 588 Magnetrühr-Wasserbäder 649, 650, 654-664 Magnetrührer 655 Magnetrührer für Zellkulturen 658, 659 Magnetrührer, Heiz- 658 Magnetrührer, Hochvolumen 664 Magnetrührer, Infrarot Magnetrührgeräte mit Heizung 658 Magnetrührgeräte ohne Heizung 649 Magnetrührköpfe 333 333, 337 Magnetrührkupplungen 647, 648 Magnetrührstab-Entferner 647 Magnetrührstäbchen-Set 645-647 Magnetrührstäbe Magnetrührstäbe, Entferner 645 Magnetrührverschlüsse 333 660, 661 Magnetrührwerke 507-509 Mahlbecher Mahlbehälter 516 507, 508 Mahlgarnituren 507-509 Mahlkugeln Maischbäder 1012 977, 978 Makro-Küvetten Manometrischer BSB 1039 224 Mäntel 883 Mantel-Thermoelemente 310 Mantelrohre für Kühler Masken 230 257 Matten, Silikon 811 Mediafills 753 Medienflasche 299 Medienpräparatoren Medikamentenkühlgeräte 629 117 Mehlveraschungsschalen 420 Mehrfachdispenser Mehrkanal-Pipetten 357 344, 352 Mehrkanalpipette 345, 348, Mehrkanalpipetten 350, 355, 356 Mehrparameter Messgeräte 914, 922 Mehrstellen-Magnetrührer 665, 666, 731 Mehrstellenrührer 593 665 Mehrstellenrührgeräte 562 Mehrzweck-Heizbäder 1009 Mehrzweck-Zentrifugen Melamin-Instrumentenschalen 121 465 Membran-, Kolbenpumpen 464 Membran-Dosierpumpen 740 Membran-Filtrationseinheiten 463 Membran-Flüssigkeitspumpen Membran-Kompressoren 465

1121

STICHWORT 392 Mikro-Pipettierhelfer 146 Mikro-Schaufeln 146, 149 Mikro-Spatel 704, 705 Mikro-Zentrifugen Mikrobiologie 997 Mikrobiologische Brutschränke 539, 542 Mikrobiologische Sicherheitswerk- bänke Mikrobüretten Mikroeinsätze Mikroliter-Pipetten Mikroliterpipetten Mikroliterspritzen Mikroliterspritzen Mikropistill Mikroplatten, PP Mikroskope Mikroskope Mikroskopier-Deckgläser Mikroskopier-Objektträger Mikroskopkameras Mikrotestplatten Mikrotiterplatten Mikrowaagen Mikrowellen-Laborsysteme Mikrowellengeräte Mikrozentrifugen Mikrozentrifugen 1071 434 33-35, 37, 38 344, 346, 348, 352-355, 358, 364 343 411 411, 412 496 810 966 966, 968 961 961 970 984 799, 800, 804 860 536 535 703 703, 706, 707, 710, 711 1004 Milchanalysegerät 1006 Milchpipetten 495 Milchprobe Milchspritzen 414 Milchuntersuchung 414, 1005, 1008, 1009 Milchuntersuchung, Fettbestimmung Milchwirtschaftliche Glasgeräte Mineralölprobennehmer Mini- und Küvettenspüler 1004 1006 1016 VAKUWASCH 265 626 Mini-Kühlschränke 707 Mini-Zentrifugen 180 Miniatur-Spezialverbinder 181 Miniatur-T-Stücke 952 Minimum/Maximum-Thermometer 489, 494 MiniSampler 172 Minitrichter 956 Minutenzähler 696, 697 Mischer 1048 Mischgerät für Abwasser Mischzylinder 410 Mittelhalsrundkolben, DURAN-Glas 301 Mixer 515, 516, 672, 699 1057-1059, 1061, 1062, 1067 Möbel 221 Mobile Augenduschen 1006 Mojonnier-Kipprohre Montage-Schläuche 178 495 Mörser 495 Mörser-Porzellan 495 Mörser, Pistillen 506 Mörsermühlen Mörserspatel 146 1120 Notfallstation, Augen- 221 NS-Aufsätze, Destillier- 313 NS-Destillierbrücken 312 NS-Dichtungen, PTFE 317 NS-Erlenmeyerkolben, DURAN-Glas 302 316 NS-Hülsen, Quarzglas 316 NS-Kerne, Quarzglas NS-Klammern, Federstahl 317 317 NS-Klemmen, Stahl 304 NS-Kolben 770 NS-Kolben, Rotationsverdampfer- 313 NS-Krümmer, DURAN-Glas NS-Rührverschlüsse 334 301, 303, 304 NS-Rundkolben 304 NS-Schlenkrohre 190, 192 NS-Stopfen NS-Übergangsstücke 321 315 NS-Verbindungen 312 NS-Vorstöße, DURAN-Glas 1096 Nullluftgeneratoren 749 Nutschen Nutschentrichter 746 O O-Ringe für Planflansch-Gefäße Oberflächen-Verdampfer Oberflächenspannung-Messgerät Objektträger Objektträger-Färbebrücke Objektträger-Färbeeinsatz Objektträger-Kästen Objektträger-Magazin Objektträger-Spender Objektträger, Deckgläser Öfen Öfen Öffnungszangen Öl- und Chemikalienbinder Öl-Luft-Sandbäder Ölbäder Ölbäder, Stativ-Gerät Oliven, Polypropylen Ölstift OP-Handschuhe Optik-Reinigungsset Optische Reinigung Orbital Schüttler Ordnungssysteme Originalitätsverschluss Orsatblasen Ösen Ösenständer OTAL Abfüllpumpen Overalls 330 580 950 961, 962 963 963 964 964 963 961 556 556-559 40 259 562 562 562 319 212 235 965 965 680, 681 964 47 956 840 840 449, 452 224 Motorkolbenbüretten 443 Muffelöfen 557, 558 Muffen 198, 200 Mühlen 506-509, 511, 513, 518, 519 Müllsäcke 260 Müllsackständer 261 Multi-Rack 145 Multi-Timer 957 Multifunktionsracks 145 Multifunktionsuhren, elektronisch 956 Multifunktionszangen 167 Multigaswarngerät 233 MULTIHITZ-Heizbäder 562 Multiparameter-Messgeräte 909, 920, 937 Multiparameter-Messsystem 918 1026 Multiparameter-Photometer MULTIPETTE, Handdispenser 362 558 Multitherm-Öfen 229 Mundschutz, Atemschutz Mundschutzmasken 229 N Nachbehandlungs-Systeme für Reinstwasser 1088 Nährbodenflaschen-Verschlüsse 825 Nährbodenflaschen, DURAN®-Glas 824 115 Nährbodenschalen Nährmedienaufbereiter 299 508 Nanomahlung Nass-Siebung 756 173, 174 Naturkautschuk-Schläuche 579 neoBlock-Heizer Neopren-Handschuhe 240 191 Neoprene-Stopfen neoRack® 144 1032 Nephelometer Netzgeräte 786 Netzgeräte für Elektrophorese/ Blotting Netzspannungssteller, Triac- Neubauer-Zählkammern Nickeltiegel Normalschliff-Übergangsstücke Normalschliff-Verbindungen Normschliff-, Gewindebauteile Normschliff-Aufsätze Normschliff-Dichtungen, PTFE Normschliff-Erlenmeyerkolben Normschliff-Kerne Normschliff-Klammern Normschliff-Krümmer Normschliff-Manschetten, PTFE Normschliff-Rührverschlüsse Normschliff-Rundkolben Normschliff-Schlenkkolben Normschliff-Trichter, PP Normschliffe, Quarzglas Not-, Augenduschen Notbrausen für Augen Notfall-Koffer 786 991 963 119 321 315 315 313 317 302 321 318 313 317 334 304 304 172 316 220 222 219

1122

STICHWORT P Panorama Schutzbrillen 227 Para-Stopfen 191 Paraffin-Streckbäder 590 Parafilm Spender 192, 193 Parafilm-Dispenser 193 Partikelanalyse 759 Pasteurpipetten 377, 378 Patenthähne, DURAN-Glas 322 PCR Cap Tool 809 PCR Deckelstreifen 808 PCR Produkte 807 PCR-Aufbewahrungsboxen 799 PCR-Gefäße 791, 795 PCR-Kabinen 1080 PCR-Platten 807, 810 PCR-Rack 798 PCR-Thermocycler 779, 780 PCR-Werkbänke 1080 PD-Tips 362 PE-Schaufeln 157 PE-Spritzflaschen, farbig 74 Peleus-Ball 390 Pellet-Büretten 436, 437 Peltier-Thermostate 617 Peltierkühlung 542 Pendelbecher 1014 Perbunan-Stopfen 191 Peristalikpumpen 461 Perlonhandschuhe 238 PET-Flaschen 71 Petrischalen 115, 812 Petrischalen mit Deckel 116 Petrischalen-Anaerobiergefäß 828 Petrischalen-Einsatzgestelle 829 Petrischalen-Sterilisierbehälter, Stahl 280 115 Petrischalen, DUROPLAN 812 Petrischalen, Einmal- Petrischalen, Kunststoff- 812 115 Petrischalen, Quarzglas 833 Petrischalendrehtische 833 petriturn Petrischalen-Drehtische 1018 Pfahlkratzer Pfeifenreiniger 262 212 Pflege-Öle 900, 902 pH-Einstabmessketten 924 pH-Einstichsonden pH-Elektroden 899 pH-Elektroden, Pufferlösungen, Zubehör pH-Handmessgeräte pH-Indikatoren pH-Indikatorstäbchen pH-Mehrparameter Messgeräte pH-Messgeräte pH-Messgeräte pH-Messung, Elektrochemie pH-Meter 899 925, 926 1021 1021 909 923 916, 927, 935 919 910, 914, 923-925, 927, 931, 932 pH-Meter/mV-Temperaturmessgeräte 931 905 pH-Puffer pH-Pufferlösungen 906 pH-Tester Kit Pharmazie Kühlschränke Phenol-Bestimmung, 907, 908, 923 630 Destillationsapparatur für die phoenix Gas-Sicherheitsbrenner Photometer Photometer 1047 835 987 987, 989, 990, 1025, 1026, 1030, 1031, 1044 Photometrische Arbeitsplätze, Felduntersuchung Pinsel Pinzetten Pinzetten Pinzetten-Set Pinzetten, Einweg- Pinzetten, Stahl- Pinzetten, Sterile Pipetten 1025 262, 867 158 149, 158, 160-163 161 163 161 163 348, 350, 353-361, 378-380, 383-389, 1052 1006 280, 281 281 281 376 1052 354 272 390 389 1006 1052 Pipetten für Milchwirtschaft Pipetten-Büchsen Pipetten-Container Pipetten-Container-Gestelle Pipetten-Dichtheitsprüfgeräte Pipetten-Haemometer Pipetten-Kit Pipetten-Reiniger, Ultraschall- Pipetten-Sauger Pipetten-Ständer Pipetten, Demeter-Verdünnungs- Pipetten, Mikro-Einmal- Pipettenbüchsen, Sterilisationsbehälter 279 Pipettenflaschen 81 Pipettengestelle 389 Pipettenkarussell 353, 355, 364 Pipettenspitzen 364, 366, 369, 371-375 280 Pipettenspitzen-Einsatzgestelle 366 Pipettenspitzen, Zubehör Pipettenzubehör 364 Pipettierball 390 390-393, 395 Pipettiergeräte 390-395 Pipettierhelfer Pipettierhilfen 390 391-395, 1053 Pipettierhilfen 391, 394 pipetus PiPump 390 495, 496 Pistille Planeten-Mühlen 507-509 Planflansch-Becher, DURAN®-Glas 326 Planflansch-Dichtungsringe, Silicon 330 Planflansch-Reaktionsgefäße, DURAN®-Glas 326, 327 Planflansch-Rundkolben, DURAN®-Glas Planflansch-Verschlüsse Planktonnetze Planschliffgefäße, Zubehör Plastikbeutel Platin-Draht Platin-Iridium-Draht Platin-Iridiumösen Platinelektroden 326 331 1018 325 195 839 839 839 900 113 Platinschalen 119 Platintiegel 807 Platten 799 Platten, Schalen 529 Plattenhalter, Chromnickelstahl 711 Plattenzentrifugen 865 Plattformwaagen 144 Plexiglasgestelle Plomben 90 PLR Druckluft-Laborrührwerke 668, 669 376 PLT Units 124 Pneumatische Gefäße Pneumatische Wannen 124 975 Polarimeter 148 Poly-Löffel 962 Polysine-Objektträger Porzellan-Abdampfschalen 112 Porzellan-Exsikkatorplatten 127 Porzellan-Glühschälchen 112, 113, 118 116 Porzellan-Kasserollen 495 Porzellan-Mörser Porzellan-Reibschalen 495 117 Porzellan-Tiegel Präparategläser 136 136, 821 Präparategläser 341 Präparative Verfahren Präpariernadelhalter 960 Präpariernadeln 960 Präzisions- und Analysenwaagen 845 Präzisions-Brutschränke 538, 540 Präzisions-Glasspritzen, FORTUNA 414 1048 Präzisions-Heizblocksystem 566, 567 Präzisions-Heizplatten Präzisionsthermometer 882 847, 848, Präzisionswaagen 851, 859, 862, 863 508 45 46 132 833 98 1017 1017, 1020 389 1015 84 premium line Premiumflaschen Premiumverschluss Probebecher Proben Applikation Proben-Transportbehälter, isoliert Probenahme-Geräte, Wasser- Probenahmegeräte Probenahmepipetten Probenahmeschöpfer Probenaufbewahrungsdosen Probenaufschlussgeräte, Mikrowellen- Probenbehälter Probenbeutel, steril Probendosen Probenehmer Probenehmer Probenetiketten Probenfläschchen Probenfläschchen, Braunglas Probenfläschchen, konisch 535 132, 133 194 84, 133, 1015 482 1013 486 31-35, 37-39 33-35, 37, 38 33-35, 37, 38 60, 72 72 132 1121 Probenflaschen Probenflaschen, PP Probengefäße

1123

STICHWORT Probennahme-Pumpen Probennahmeflaschen Probennehmer 494 56, 57, 60 482-487, 489, 494, 1013, 1014, 1017, 1018 1016 Probennehmer für Mineralöle 494 Probennehmer, MiniSampler 482 Probennehmer, Schüttgut 490 Probennehmer, Vakuum- 1013 Probennehmer, Wasser- 133, 798 Probenröhrchen 483, 488, 491, 493 Probensammler 869 Probenschalen aus Aluminium 521, 522 Probenteiler 521 Probenteilung 97 Probentransport, Thermoboxen 1081 Produktschutzbänke 568 Programmregler 526 Propangasbrenner Prozess-Refraktometer 975 Prüfgeräte für Verpackungen 1010, 1011 Prüflösungen für Leitfähigkeitsmessgeräte 939 532 Prüfschränke 760 Prüfsiebe Prüfsiebe 760, 764 PTFE-Dichtungen für Normschliffe 317 PTFE-Hähne 324 317 PTFE-Rillenmanschetten 176 PTFE-Schläuche 317 PTFE-Schliffmanschetten PTFE-Spray 213 PTFE-Ventile 323 900, 902, 905 Pufferlösungen 507, 508, 516, 518 PULVERISETTE 867 Pulverpinsel Pulverprobennehmer 482 146 Pulverspatel 171 Pulvertrichter Pump-it 453 449-454, 458, 462, 463, Pumpen 466, 468, 469, 473, 474, 844 450 458 458 472 469 78 245, 246 895 Pumpen, Einweg- Pumpenköpfe Pumpenschläuche Pumpenstände Pumpstände Pumpzerstäuber Putztücher Pyknometer Q 807 qPCR 980, 983 Qualitäts-Küvetten 383 Qualitätszertifikat 112 Quarzglas-Abdampfschalen Quarzglas-Bechergläser 103 Quarzglas-Erlenmeyerkolben mit NS 302 324 Quarzglas-Hähne 316 Quarzglas-Hülsen Quarzglas-Kerne 316 1122 114 Quarzglas-Kristallisierschalen 316 Quarzglas-Kugelschliffe 980, 983 Quarzglas-Küvetten 402 Quarzglas-Messkolben 316 Quarzglas-Normschliffe 115 Quarzglas-Petrischalen 101 Quarzglas-Reagenzgläser 111 Quarzglas-Rundkolben 301 Quarzglas-Rundkolben mit Schliff 580 Quarzglas-Tauchheizer 118 Quarzglas-Tiegel 118 Quarzglas-Tiegeldeckel 171 Quarzglas-Trichter 117 Quarzglas-Uhrglasschalen 119 Quarzglas-Veraschungskästchen Quarzglas-Verbrennungsrohre 120 Quarzglas-Verbrennungsschiffchen 121 118 Quarzglas-Verkorkungstiegel 580 Quarzheizer 745 Quarzmikrofaser-Filtrierpapiere 258 Quecksilber-Aufsammler Quick Picker 482 R 210 R+S Sätze Tafel 135 Rack für Zentrifugenröhrchen 145, 798, 820 Racks 820 Racks für Kryoboxen, Stapelbar 144 Racks für Reagenzgläser 138 Racks für Reaktionsgefäße 210 Radioaktivitätsklebebänder 1006 Rahmpipetten 414 Rahmspritzen Randall 522 Raschigringe für Destillierkolonnen 311 167, 168 Rasierklingen Rauchschutzbrillen 225, 243 88 Raumsparkanister 952 Raumthermometer REA-Reinigungskonzentrate 251 44, 62 Reagentienflaschen, Braunglas Reagenzglasbürsten 262 143 Reagenzglasdrahtgestelle 99 Reagenzgläser Reagenzgläser 140 99-101 Reagenzgläser Reagenzgläser mit Gewinde 822 140-145 Reagenzglasgestelle 165 Reagenzglashalter 826 Reagenzglaskappen Reagenzglasrotatoren 700 Reagenzglasschüttler 587 Reagenzienflaschen 43, 44, 58, 59, 64 Reagenziensätze für die Wasseranalytik 1030 805 Reagenzreservoirs 799 Reaktionsgefäß-Boxen 328 Reaktionsgefäß-Deckel Reaktionsgefäß-Dichtungen 331 Reaktionsgefäß-Gestelle 138, 139, 333 332 Reaktionsgefäß-Halterungen Reaktionsgefäß-Klemmen 331 Reaktionsgefäß-Ständer 137, 139, 140 Reaktionsgefäß-Verschlüsse 331, 796 331 Reaktionsgefäß-Zubehör Reaktionsgefäße 137 325-328, 788, 790, Reaktionsgefäße 793-797, 815, 875, 906, 1041 788 Reaktionsgefäße, Röhrchen Reaktionsküvetten für die Wasseranalytik Reaktoren Real Time PCR Rechteckdosen Redox-Einstabmessketten Referenz-Elektroden Referenzplatten Refraktometer Refraktometer Regalsysteme Regelgeräte, 1030 464, 1030 807 84 900, 902 907 985 971 971-975 1058 Temperatur- 568, 584, 992, 994 495 Reibschalen 562 Reihen-Heizbäder 560 Reihen-Heizbänke 522, 584 Reihen-Heizgeräte 562 Reihen-Ölbäder 1012 Reihen-Rührwerke 562 Reihen-Sandbäder 562, 589 Reihen-Wasserbäder 584 Reihenheizbank 584 Reihenheizgerät Reiniger 248, 256 Reinigungs-, Desinfektionsmittel 247 278 Reinigungsautomaten Reinigungsbürsten 261, 262 247 Reinigungschemikalien Reinigungsgeräte 267, 272 Reinigungskonzentrate 248, 251-254, 983 Reinigungslösungen 275 241, 248, 251, 254 Reinigungsmittel 965 Reinigungspapiere 247 Reinigungsstäbchen 246 Reinigungsstäbe Reinigungstücher 245 258 Reinraum-Matten 1081 Reinraum-Werkbänke 1090-1092 Reinstwasser Reinstwasser-Systeme 1093, 1094 1088 Reinstwasseranlagen 1082, 1086 Reinstwasseranlagen 1083, 1088, Reinstwassersysteme 1090-1092 1086, 1089 1089 996 361 580 1040 1039 496 1086 1087 Reinwasseranlagen Reinwassersysteme Relais Repetierpipetten Resistente Tauchheizer Respirometer Respirometrie Resuspendieren/Pellet Reverse Osmose Anlagen Reverse-Osmose-Anlagen

1124

STICHWORT 521 Riffelteiler 317 Rillenmanschetten 146 Ringe aus Kork 262 Rohrbürsten 792 Röhrchen, palettiert 146 Röhrchenbehälter 143, 144 Röhrchengestelle 558 Rohröfen 559 Rohröfen 192 Rollenhalter 696 Rollenmischer 696, 697 Rollenmischer 697 Rollerinkubatoren 94 Rollo, Transport- Rollrand-Schnappgläser 40 Rollrandflaschen, Braunglas 33-35, 37, 38 Rollrandflaschen, Glas 33-35, 37-39 1056 Rollwagen Rollwagen Behälter 98 Rotations-Kegelprobenteiler, LABORETTE 521 Rotations-Vakuumkonzentratoren 765-767 521 Rotationsprobenteiler 769 Rotationsverdampfer Rotationsverdampfer 467-469, 474-476, 625, 769 Rotationsverdampfer-Kolben 770 Rotationsverdampfer-Kolbenvorlage 770 771 Rotationsverdampferzubehör 946 Rotationsviskosimeter Rotatoren 698-700 718 ROTINA ROTOFIX 716 Rotor-Schnellmühle PULVERISETTE 513 712 Rotore für Tischzentrifuge Rotormühlen 513 588 ROTOTHERM-Wasserbäder 189, 339 Rückschlagventile Rückstandsanalytik 1045 649, 650, 652-655, Rührer 664, 665, 670, 671 648 645 588 583 337, 338 666 645, 646, 666, 667, 965 667 667 670 333, 334 333 587, 588 333, 334, 336 Rührfisch-Entferner Rührfische Rührheizbäder Rührheizhauben Rührkupplungen Rührstäbe Rührstäbe Rührstäbe, Glas Rührstäbe, Holz Rührsysteme Rührverschlüsse Rührverschlüsse, Rührwellen Rührwasserbäder Rührwellen Rührwellen-Lagerhülsen, DURAN® Glas Rührwellen, Anker- Rührwellen, Propeller- Rührwerke Rührwerke Rührwerkzeuge Rund-, Stehkolben 333 336 336 667 667-669, 671, 1012 670 110 84 Runddosen 725 Rundfilter 201 Rundklemmen 111, 301-304, 326 Rundkolben 261 Rundkolben-Reinigungsbürsten Rundkolben, Mehrhals- 303 Rundkolben, Rotationsverdampfer- 770 Rundscheiben, Aluminium 868 1020 Ruttner-Wasserprobennehmer S 85 Salbenkruken 107 Sammelgefäße 488 Sammler, Flüssigkeits- 1012 Sand Sandbäder 562, 563 Sauerstoff-Flaschen nach Winkler 1034 Sauerstoffmessgeräte 944 Sauerstoffmessgeräte 914, 916, 944, 945 Sauerstoffmessung 919 Sauerstoffmessung, Elektrochemie 919 753 Saugfiltrationsgeräte Saugflaschen 750 750, 751 Saugflaschen 746 Saugflaschen-Manschetten Saugheber 454 Saugkolben-Messpipetten, AR-Glas 385 Saugkolben-Vollpipetten, AR-Glas 388 774 Säulen Säulenelutionseinheiten 1046 225, 243 Säureschutzbrillen 1069 Schadstoffabzüge Schälchen, Aluminium 868 111-115, 122, Schalen 123, 279, 868, 869 279 121 116 117 167 959 959 156 146, 157, 158 158, 182 136 956 305 305, 306 163 163, 164 957 824, 825 513 1062 1047 173 262 173-179 178 Schalen, Instrumenten- Schalen, Schüssel, Tabletts Schalen, Uhrglas- Schalen, Uhrglas-, Quarzglas Schalenzangen Schallpegelmesser Schallpegelmessgeräte Schaufeln Schaufeln Schaufeln, Stahl Schaugläser Scheiblerblase Scheidetrichter Scheidetrichter Scheren Scheren Schieblehren Schikanenkolben Schlagrotoren Schlammfänger Schlammuntersuchungsgeräte Schlauch Schlauchbürsten Schläuche Schläuche für Gasbrenner Schläuche, Komplett- Schläuche, Montage- Schlauchfolien, Polyethylen Schlauchklemmen Schlauchkupplungen Schlaucholiven Schlauchpumpen Schlauchpumpen 178 178 196 186, 187 179, 181 319 455 455, 457, 458, 461-463 185 173 179, 181 304 304 1018 214 214, 215 136 316 318 316, 321 317 318 301 317 318 192 880 172 315, 316 749 Schlauchschellen Schlauchschneider Schlauchverbinder Schlenkkolben, DURAN-Glas Schlenkrohre, DURAN-Glas Schleppnetze für Plankton Schliff-, Hahn- und Gerätefett Schliff-Fette Schliffgläser, Präparate- Schliffhülsen, Quarzglas Schliffkammern Schliffkerne Schliffklammern, Federstahl Schliffklemmen Schliffkolben Schliffmanschetten, PTFE Schliffsicherungen Schliffstopfen Schliffthermometer Schlifftrichter Schliffverbindungen Schlitzsiebnutschen Schmelzpunkt Bestimmungs- geräte und Zubehör Schmelzpunkt-Bestimmungs- röhrchen Schmelzpunktbestimmungs- apparate Schmelzpunktmessgeräte Schmelztiegel Schmierfett Schnappgläser Schneckengewindeschellen Schneidebretter Schneidmühlen Schnellbetriebs-Büretten nach Dr. Schilling Schnellbinder Schnelldesinfektionsmittel Schnellheizplatten Schnellkupplungen Schnellreiniger Schnelltests Schnellverascher Schnellverschlüsse f. Reaktionsgefäße 951 952 951 951 119 214 40 185 216 518-520 435 259 256 566, 570 181 251 1028 560 331 Schnellverschlüsse für Planflansch- Gefäße Schnellwechselfutter Schnittfänger Schöpfdosen Schöpfer mit Teleskopstange Schöpfer, Chemie Schöpfer, Einweg- 331 496 150 1015 1015 1015 1015 1123

1125

STICHWORT Schöpfer, Industrie 1014 Schöpfer, Probenahme- 494, 495, 1015 Schöpfkellen 158, 495 Schränke, Erste-Hilfe- 220 Schränke, Sicherheits- 220, 1076-1079 220 Schränke, Verband- 820 Schrankeinschübe Schrankgestelle 819 185 Schraub-Oliven 84 Schraubdeckeldosen Schraubfilter, DURAN-Glas 748 31, 33-35, 37, 38 Schraubfläschchen Schraubgewinde-Verschlüsse 33, 35, 37, 38, 56 32 32-35, 37, 38, 47, 48, 50 37, 185 Schraubgläser, Gewinde- Schraubkappen Schraubverbindungs-Kappen Schraubverbindungs-Kappen mit Bohrung Schraubverbindungs-System Schraubverschluss-Kappen 319 319 33-35, 37, 38, 46, 47 Schraubverschluss-Kappen +180 °C 320 Schraubverschluss-Verteiler 49-51 33-35, 37, Schraubverschlüsse 38, 47-49, 55 Schraubverschlüsse f. Reaktionsgefäße Schraubverschlüsse, PP Schraubverschlüsse, TpCh260 Schulungsmaterial Schürzen Schüsseln Schüttelapparate Schüttelgeräte Schüttelgeräte 796 55 46 210, 218 223, 638 106, 123 685 587 für Wassereinsatzgestelle 587 Schüttelgeräte Mojonnier 1008 Schüttelgeräte zur Fettbestimmung 1008 679 Schüttelgeräte, Inkubatoren 587, 692 Schüttelinkubatoren 688 Schüttelmischer Schüttelwasserbäder 595 Schüttelwasserbäder 587, 591, 595, 596 Schüttgutprobennehmer 482 672, 677, 679-685, Schüttler 689-691, 697, 698 681 222 225-227, 243 225 240 234, 236-239, 638 237 224 229-231 232 224 258 529 Schüttler, Orbital Schutzbekleidung Schutzbrillen Schutzbrillen, Augenschutz Schutzcreme Schutzhandschuhe Schutzhandschuhe, Chemikalien- Schutzkleidung Schutzmasken Schutzmasken, Gas Schutzoveralls Schutzpapier Schutzplatten Schutzplattenhalter, Chromnickelstahl 529 1124 225 Schutzschirme, Gesichts- 222, 223 Schutzschürzen 191 Schwammstopfen 1057 Schwerlasttische 511 Schwingmühlen 1020 Secchi-Scheibe 192 Sechskanthohlstopfen 1034 Sedimentiergefäße 1034 Sedimentiergefäße 984 Sekundär-Standards 860 Semiwaagen 1020 Senkleinen 1016 Senkseile 921 Sensoren 755 Separation 32, 320 Septen 562 Serien-Heizbäder 562 Serien-Heizer 561 Serien-Heizgeräte 561 Serien-Heizplatten 560 Serien-Verascher 418 seripettor 379 Serologische Pipetten 1006 Serumgewinnungsrohre 343, 1081 Service 168 Seziermesser 681 Shaker Sicherheits-Abfalleimer 261 Sicherheits-Absaugsysteme EcoVac 844 90, 92 Sicherheits-Behälter Sicherheits-Brillen 227 Sicherheits-Dosierbehälter 90 528, 834 Sicherheits-Gasbrenner 90 Sicherheits-Kanister 90 Sicherheits-Kannen Sicherheits-Pipettierhelfer 390 76, 78 Sicherheits-Spritzflaschen Sicherheits-Tragebehälter 98 Sicherheits-Transportbehälter 90, 92, 99 Sicherheits-Trockenschränke 536 Sicherheits-Vakuumtrockenschränke 548 1070 Sicherheits-Werkbank 1071, 1072 Sicherheits-Werkbänke 1070 Sicherheits-Werkbänke, Klasse II Sicherheits-Zapfkanister 90 90 Sicherheitsbehälter 835 Sicherheitsbrenner 208 Sicherheitsetiketten Sicherheitsmixer 515 73 Sicherheitsnetze 90 Sicherheitsplomben Sicherheitsschränke 1076 1076-1079 Sicherheitsschränke Sicherheitswerkbänke 1070 1020 Sichtscheiben 756, 759 Siebanalyse Siebbürsten 262 755, 760 Siebe 755 Siebhilfen Siebmaschinen 756 756-759 Siebmaschinen 513 Siebringe Siebunterstützung 760 Siedehilfen Siedepunktthermometer Siedestäbe Siedesteinchen Siegel, Verschluss- Silber-Draht Silber-Einstabmessketten SILICON Silikoneinlagen Silikatgel Silikon-Dichtungen 212 877 212 212 486 839 900 281 213 320 zum Durchstechen 320 Silikon-Dichtungsringe 320 Silikon-Kautschuk-Dichtung Silikon-Öl 215 Silikon-Ringe für Planflansch-Gefäße 330 174 Silikon-Schläuche Silikon-Schwammstopfen 191 320 Silikon-Septen 191 Silikon-Stopfen 175 Silikon-Vakuum-Schläuche 257 Silikonunterlagen SiloBohrer 486 428 Simplex 516 Single-Use-Mahlbehälter 1061 Sitzarbeitstische 168 Skalpelle Skalpelle, Messer 167 193 Skalpellklingen-Abnehmer 440 Solar-Büretten solarus® 440 SONOREX-Geräte 267 338 Sonstige Bauelemente 146 Sortimentskasten 150 Spachtel, Edelstahl Spannungssteller, Triac- 991 Spatel 146 Spatel 146, 148-150, 153, 176, 483, 484 838 Spatel, Drigalski- 483 Spatel, Stahl Spatelset 149 Spatelsortiment 149 465, 467, 468 SPE 984, 987, Spektralphotometer 1025, 1030 988, 989 963 192, 193 201, 202 867 135 78 212, 213 73 413, 414 413 412 734-737 734 465 734, 735 734, 735 73-76, 78 66, 74 Spektrophotometer Spender für Objektträger Spender für Parafilm Spezial-Klemmen Spielkarten-Wäge Spitzbodengläser Sprayer Sprays Spritz-, Sprühflaschen Spritzen Spritzen, Kanülen Spritzen, Mikroliter- Spritzenfilter Spritzenfilter, Filterhalter Spritzenpumpen Spritzenvorfilter Spritzenvorsätze Spritzflaschen Spritzverschlüsse

1126

STICHWORT Sprüher, Druck- Sprühflaschen Sprühlanzen Spül-, Trockengeräte Spülbürsten Spulen Spülen Spülmaschinen Spülmaschinen-Zubehör Spülmaschinenmittel, LABOSOL Spülmittel Spültische Stabilitätskammern Stahlmöbel Stahlschöpfer Stalagmometer Stampfvolumeter Standard-Heizhauben Standard-Küvetten Ständer für Blue Max Ständer für Entsorgungsbeutel Ständer für Extraktionshülsen Ständer für Küvetten Ständer für Ösen Ständer 79 78, 79 79 265 261, 262 1016 1061 278 278 254 254 1063 551 1063 1014 950 899 581, 582 977 135 259 525 984 840 für Reaktionsgefäße Standflaschen Standgefäße, Sicherheits- Stapelbehälter, Lager-/Transport- Stapelracks Star-Exsikkatoren Stativ-Dreifüße Stativbauteile Stative Stativfüße Stativheizplatten Stativklemmen Stativmaterial Stativmuffen Stativplatten Stativringe Stativstäbe Staubmasken Staubmasken, Grob- Staubpinsel Staubschutzbrillen Stechheber für Flüssigkeiten Stechlanzen Steharbeitstische Stehhilfen Stehkolben, DURAN®-Glas Steilbrustflaschen, Enghals- Stepper Steriklav-Indikatorbänder Sterilfiltrationsgeräte Sterilisationsboxen, UV- Sterilisationsindikatoren Sterilisationsschränke Sterilisatoren Sterilisierbehälter Sterilpipetten Sterilstopfen Steriplan-Petrischalen, Schott 137, 139, 140 58-60 90 97 820 129 204 197 198, 669 197 568 201, 202, 584 200 198 197 203, 204 198 229 229 867 225, 243 489 482 1058, 1059 1064, 1065 110 59 364 279 741 781 279 532 283, 286, 287, 838 280 379 827, 828 115 Steuer- und Regelgeräte Steuergeräte 584 für Destillationsapparaturen 311 StickProof 483 Stickstoff Lager-, Gefrierbehälter 635 Stickstoff-Bestimmungsapparate nach Kjeldahl Stickstoff-Rundkolben, DURAN-Glas Stickstoff-Vakuum-Arbeitsplatz Stickstoff-Verteilerrechen, DURAN-Glas Stickstoff-Vorlagen, DURAN-Glas Stickstoffbestimmung 1001 304 340 339 304 nach Kjeldahl Stickstoffgeneratoren Stifte, Beschriftungssysteme Stockthermometer stop-it Stopfen Stopfen Stopfen für Butyrometer Stopfen, Glas- Stoppuhren Streckbäder für Paraffin-Schnitte Streifenplatten Strömungsanzeiger Strömungsmesser Stromversorgung für 1000 1096 207 876, 877 187 190 190-192 1006 60 956, 957 590 799 179 955 Elektrophorese/Blotting Stückzähler Stühle Stühle Stutzenflaschen Styroporboxen Sublimationsapparatur, Vakuum- Sulfierkolben Super Frost/Plus Supertherm-Hochtemperaturöfen Szintillations-Fläschchen Szintillationsfläschchen Szintillationsgefäßgestell 786 957, 1030 1064 1064, 1065 83 816 341 305 962 556 40, 41 40 41 T 181 T-Stücke 121, 1057 Tabletts Taschen-Konduktometer 940 Taschen-pH-Meter, Mikroprozessor- 931 945 Taschen-Sauerstoffmessgeräte 217 Taschenlampen Taschenwaagen 851 1016 Tauchbomben 580 Tauchheizer 389 Tauchpipetten zur Probenahme Tauchsieder, Quarzglas 580 697 Taumel-Rollenmischer Taumelmischer 696 526, 527 Teclubrenner 64 Teflon-Flaschen Teflon-Rundkolben 302 Teilung TeleSchöpfer TeleScoop Teleskopprobennehmer Teleskopschöpfer Teleskopstange Temperatur-Folien Temperatur-Mess- und 521 1014 1014 1013, 1014 1014 1014, 1018 874 Regelgeräte 994, 995 585, 886 Temperaturfühler 551 Temperaturkammern Temperaturlogger 884, 954 Temperaturmessgeräte 883, 887, 889, 939 874 Temperaturmessstreifen Temperaturmessung 882 Temperaturregler 568, 572, 584, 992, 995 Temperaturwächter 882 Temperierbad für Reihenrührwerk 1012 103 Temperierbecher 138 Temperierblöcke für Röhrchen Temperiersysteme 612 1048 Tensid-Ausblasapparaturen Testbestecke 1023, 1024, 1028 Testbestecke für die Wasseranalytik 1024 Testbestecke für die Wasseruntersuchung 1024 Testgeräte für Verpackungen 1010, 1011 728, 1022 Testpapiere 1022 Teststäbchen 238 Textilhandschuhe Thermo-Hygrometer, Digital 953 Thermoblock-Heizgeräte 571 570, 678 Thermoblöcke 779, 780 Thermocycler Thermoelemente, Mantel- 883 886, 890, 992 Thermofühler 953 Thermohygrometer Thermologger 884 875-877, 879-883, Thermometer 887, 891, 952, 953 878 881 884 953 203 677 675 571, 675-678 587, 677, 678, 680 587 572, 598-600, 602-604, 617, 621 1036-1038 Thermostatenschränke 874 Thermostreifen 874 Thermostreifen 1052 Thoma-Blutmischpipetten Thoma-Zählkammern 963 TICKOPUR, Reinigungschemikalien 247 614 Tiefkältethermostate 632 Tiefkühlschränke Tiefkühltruhen, -schränke 632 117-119 Tiegel Tiegel-Stativringe 204 Thermometer mit Galliumfüllung Thermometer-Halterung Thermometer-Logger Thermometer, Tisch- Thermometerklemmen Thermomischer Thermomixer Thermomixer Thermoschüttler Thermoshake Thermostate 1125

1127

STICHWORT Trockenperlen Trockenrohr Trockenschalen, Aluminium Trockenschränke 117 Tiegel, -Deckel 747 Tiegel, Filter- 117, 118 Tiegeldeckel 166 Tiegelzangen 882, 956, 957, 991 Timer 1068 Tisch-, Filterabzüge 712 Tisch-, Universalzentrifugen 283, 286, 295 Tischautoklaven 1055-1057, 1063, 1230 Tische 187 Tischklemmen Tischschüttelmaschinen 689 Tischständer für Vernichtungsbeutel 260 Tischwaagen 851 707, 709, 712, Tischzentrifugen 714, 716-719 446 202 431, 444-446, 448 1041 438 435-437 438 444, 445 242 529 139 95 210 582 786 345 360 787 787 787 90, 92, 94, 99, 637 92 195 642 641 Titrations-Automaten Titrationsgestelle Titratoren Titratoren, CSB- Titrette Titrierapparate Titriergeräte, Digital- TitroLine Toilettenpapiere Tonquadrate Top Racks für Reaktionsgefäße Töpfe Toxic-Warnklebebänder Tragring Transfermembranen Transferpette Transferpettor Transilluminatoren Transilluminatoren, Blaulicht- Transilluminatoren, UV- Transportbehälter Transportbehälter, Sicherheits- Transportbeutel Transportboxen Transportgefäße, Dewar Transportkannen für flüssigen Stickstoff 641 Transportkörbe 96 Transportrollo für Kannen 94 Transportwagen 1054 Transportwagen 1054-1056 Transportwagen, Edelstahl 1056 Transportwannen 97 Treppen, Sicherheits- 1057 Triac-Netzspannungssteller 991 Trichter 169 Trichter 169-173, 305, 306 Trichter, Stahl 173 Trichtergestelle 747 Trinkwasser-Analysenapparaturen 1048 1057 Tritte, Leitern 530 Trocken-/Wärmeschränke Trockeneisgerät 633 Trockenkolben, Rotationsverdampfer- Trockenmasse Trockenmassebestimmung Trockenpapier 770 1012 1012 965 1126 U Ubbelohde-Viskosimeter Überbrillen Überdruckregler für Inertgasatmosphäre Überdruckventile Überkopfmischer Überkopfschüttler Überlaufmesskolben Überlaufschutz für 947 228 338 339 698 698, 701 1034 Rotationsverdampferkolben Überwachungsgeräte Uhren Uhrglasschalen Uhrglasschalen Uhrmanometer Ultra-Tiefkühlschränke Ultra-Zentrifugalmühlen Ultrarein, Pumpen Ultraschall Reinigung Ultraschall Siebsystem Ultraschall-Bäder Ultraschall-Bäder, flach Ultraschall-Geräte Ultraschall-Homogenisator Ultraschall-Pipettenreiniger Ultraschall-Prozessoren Ultraschall-Reinigungs- 770 996 882, 956 116 116, 117 481 632 513, 514 452 265 760 267, 273, 274 273 267, 274, 275, 505 505 272 505 geräte Ultraschall-Siebunterstützung Ultraschall-Spezialgeräte 267, 271, 275 760 779 213, 214 428 868 467, 469, 530, 534-536 548 756 871, 873 265 529 535 469 214 307 987 770 80 65, 80, 81 379 307 464 66 1032, 1033 1032 819 413 688 522 Trockenschränke, Vakuum- Trockensiebung Trockenwaagen Trockner für Glasgefäße Trockner, Heißluft- Trockner, Mikrowellen- Trocknung Trocknungsmittel Tropf-, Dosiertrichter Tropfenanalyse Tropfenfänger nach Stutzer Tropfflaschen Tropfflaschen Tropfpipetten Tropftrichter Tropftrichter Ersatz Tropfverschlüsse Trübungsmessgeräte Trübungsmessung Truhengestelle Tuberkulin-Spritzen TURBULA-Schüttelmischer Twisselmann Ultraschallbad-R einigungschemikalien 247, 275 Ultraschallbad-Reinigungs- konzentrate 254 Ultraschallgeräte-Zubehör 267 Ultraschallhomogenisatoren 501 Umkehr-Osmose-Anlagen 1087 Umlaufapparaturen 341 Umlaufkühler 624, 626 Umlaufthermostate 1035 Umpumpen 463 Umwälzkühler 622-624 Umwälzthermostate 602 Umwälzthermostate 598, 602, 605, 606, 609, 611, 614, 615, 617, 620, 1035 Umwälzthermostate, thermoelektrisch 617 598, 602 Umwälzthermostate, Wärme 67 UN-Chemikalien-Enghalsflaschen 622-624 Unichiller UniSampler 490 Universal Trocken-/Wärmeschränke 530 Universal Wasserbäder 585 Universal-, Analyse-, Schneidmühlen 513 280 Universal-Container UNICON 425 Universal-Dispenser 587 Universal-Heizbäder 1021 Universal-Indikatorpapiere 201, 202 Universal-Klemmen 200 Universal-Muffen Universal-Refraktometer 971, 972, 974 Universal-Schneidmühlen PULVERISETTE Universal-Wärmeschränke Universal-Wasserbäder Universal-Zentrifugen Universalscheren Universalschüttler Unterlagen, Labor- Unterschränke Untersetzer für Kolben Untersuchungshandschuhe Unterwasser-Schütteleinsatz für Heizbäder Unterziehhandschuhe Urbanti Trichter TOPAS USP Messpipetten UV-Beleuchtungsplatten/ Transilluminatoren UV-Handlampen UV-Küvetten UV-Lampen UV-Schutzbrillen UV-Sterilisationsboxen UV-Transilluminatoren 518 532 587 719 163 689 257 1062 146 235, 236 587 238 170 380 787 787 977 787 226, 227 781 787

1128

STICHWORT V Vakuum Controller Vakuum- und druckfeste 475, 476, 479 Laborflaschen Vakuum-Adapter Vakuum-Anschlüsse Vakuum-Arbeitsplatz Vakuum-Exsikkatoren Vakuum-Filterstationen Vakuum-Filtertrichter Vakuum-Filtrationsgeräte Vakuum-Hähne, DURAN-Glas Vakuum-Messgeräte Vakuum-Probennehmer Vakuum-Pumpen Vakuum-Schläuche Vakuum-Sublimationsapparaturen Vakuum-Verteilerrechen, 45 324, 325 770 340 126, 127 755 755 465 322 479 490 467 174, 175 341 DURAN-Glas 339 Vakuumkonzentratoren 467-469, 765-768 Vakuummessung 479 469 Vakuumofen 467 Vakuumöfen Vakuumöle für Pumpen 471 465, 467-472, Vakuumpumpen 474, 476-478, 841, 844 466, 477 Vakuumpumpen, ölfrei 473, 478 Vakuumpumpstände 476 Vakuumpumpsystem 548 Vakuumschränke 550 Vakuumschränke 465, 474-476 Vakuumsysteme 1010, 1011 Vakuumtester 469, 548 Vakuumtrockenschränke 475, 476 Vakuumversorgung, zentrale 312 Vakuumvorstöße, DURAN-Glas 1046 ValidChecks Variable Mikroliterpipetten 350 VARICON Variable Pipettencontainer 281 684 Varioschüttler 215 Vaseline 76 VENT-CAP 189, 323 Ventile Ventile in Reihenanordnung 339 189, 339 Ventile, Rückschlag- 339 Ventile, Überdruck- 559 Verascher Verascher 179, 560 119 Veraschungskästchen, Quarzglas 219 Verbandkästen Verbandschränke 220 180, 181, 184 Verbinder Verbinder, Schellen 179 Verbindungsstücke 184 Verbindungssysteme, Kleinflansch- 332 Verbotszeichen 209 Verbrennungs-Rohre, -Schiffchen 120 Verbrennungsrohre, Quarzglas 120 Verbrennungsschiffchen, Quarzglas 121 580 Verdampfer, Oberflächen- Verdampferschalen, Quarzglas 112 Verkorkungstiegel nach Dr. Rademacher Vernichtungsbeutel Verpackungseimer Verpackungsflaschen Verpackungstester Verpackungstester Versandbehälter, Flüssigstickstoff Verschluss-Stopfen Verschlüsse Verschlüsse für Planflansch-Gefäße, 118 260 92 55, 66 1010 1010, 1011 636 190 33-35, 37, 38, 46 Schnell- 331 331 Verschlüsse, Reaktionsgefäß- 56 Verschlüsse, Schraubgewinde- 193, 809 Verschlussfolien Verschlusskappen 47 Verschlusskappen für Kulturkolben 825 Verschlusskappen für Nährbodenflaschen Verschlussmaterial Verschlusssiegel Verschraubungen Verteilerrechen Vertikalautoklaven Vials Vials-Gestelle Vibrations-Siebmaschine Vibrations-Zuteilrinne Vibrationsschüttler Vierfach-Rührwerke Vierfüße Vierfüße, Chromnickelstahl Vierkant-Schraubflaschen Vierkant-Weithalsbehälter Vierkantflaschen Visco-Sampler Viskosimeter Viskosimeter Viton-Schläuche Vliestuchspendersysteme Vollpipetten Vollpipetten Vollsicht-Schutzbrillen Volumetric Flasks, PP Vorbehandlungssystem, Wasser- Vorlagen, Stickstoff- Vorratsflaschen Vortex-Mixer Vortexer 825 825, 826 486 183 339, 341 283 32, 35, 37-39 138 756 521 672 1012 204 529 57, 58 71 69 488 946 946-948, 950 178 256 386 386-388, 1006 225, 228, 243 403 1089 304 81 672-674, 711 673-675 W Waagen Waagen, Präzisions- Waagen, Tisch- Wägegläser Wägehandschuhe Wägekarten Wagen Wagen, Transport- Wägepapier 845-851, 857, 860-865, 873 847, 851, 859 851 869 238 867 1055, 1056, 1230 1056 867 Wägepinsel Wägepinzetten Wägeschalen Wägeschalen und -Gläser Wägeschiffchen Wägespatel Wägetische Wandabtropfgestelle Wandarbeitstische Wandbox Wandhalterung Wannen Wannen, Transport- Wärme-, Trockenschränke, Sterili- 867 161 868, 869 867 867, 869 148, 176 1064 263, 264 1057 220 220 122, 124 97 satoren, Mikrowellengeräte Wärme-/Kälteschutzhandschuhe Wärme-Kälte-Thermostate Wärmeschränke Wärmethermostate Wärmeträgerflüssigkeiten Wärmeübertragungsflüssigkeiten Warn-Klebebänder Warnhinweise Warnschilder Waschflaschen Waschlotionen Waschraum-Produkte Wasser-, Ölbäder Wasser-Analysenapparaturen Wasseranalysenkoffer Wasseranalysetestbestecke Wasseranalytik Wasseraufbereitungsanlagen Wasserbad-Zusätze, BAD-STABIL Wasserbäder Wasserbäder, Paraffin-Streck- Wasserbadschutzmittel Wasserbestimmungsapparate Wasserdampferzeuger Wasserdurchfluss-Messzelle Wasserentsalzungsanlagen Wasserentsalzungspatronen Wasserfeste Etiketten Wassergehalt, 530 239 603, 604 530, 532, 535-537 618, 619 215 215 210 210 210 309, 338 242 242 585 1048 1028 1023 1024 1087 216 562, 585-592, 594, 1012 590 589 1010 1047 1018 1087 1084 207 Apparatur zur Bestimmung des 1010 1009 Wassergehaltbestimmung 1018 Wasserkescher 1013 Wasserproben-Entnahmestöcke 1020 Wasserprobenahmegeräte 72 Wasserprobenflaschen, PP 1096 Wasserstoffgeneratoren 1082 Wasservollentsalzer 1083 Wasservollentsalzungsanlagen 1089 Wasservorbehandlungssystem 996 Wasserwächter Wattestäbchen 246, 247 Wattestopf-Messpipetten, AR-Glas 382 Wattestopfpipetten 382 956 Wecker Wegwerf-Handschuhe 235 Wegwerf-Kulturröhrchen, AR-Glas- Wegwerf-OP-Handschuhe 821, 822 235 1127

1129

STICHWORT Zerstäuberflaschen Zertifikate Zonensammler Zubehör für Büretten Zubehör für Druckluft-Laborrührer Zubehör für Exsikkatoren Zubehör für Heizhauben Zubehör für Laborglas- 78, 79 383 487 442 669 124 582, 584 Reinigungsautomaten Zubehör für Mörsermühlen Zubehör für Reaktionsgefäße Zubehör für Schneidmühlen Zubehör für Schwingmühlen Zubehör für TitroLine Zubehör für TITRONIC Zubehör für Ultraschall- Reinigungsgeräte Zubehör für Zentrifugalmühlen Zuckeruntersuchung, Kolben Zuteilrinnen Zweihalskolben, NS- Zweikreis-Kochzone Zweiwege-Hähne Zweiwege-Ventile Zylinder Zylinder mit Fuß Zytozentrifugenpapiere 278 506 331 519 511 444 443 267 514 398 521 303 569 322, 324 188 407, 408 894 724 Wegwerf-Untersuchungshandschuhe 235 74, 78 Weithals-Spritzflaschen 59, 60 Weithals-Standflaschen Weithalsfässer 89, 90 Weithalsfässer mit Hahn 90 52, 54, 62, Weithalsflaschen 63, 65, 67, 68, 71 87 54 771 1070 1072 216 886, 992 186 1014 1034 242 169 245, 246 308 1018 Weithalskanister Weithalsschikaneflaschen Wellendichtung Werkbänke Werkbänke für Mikrobiologie Werkzeug Widerstandsfühler Wilo-Klemmen Winkelbecher Winkler-Flaschen Wisch-, Reinigungstücher Wischer Wischtücher Woulfe-Flaschen Wurfnetze für Plankton Z Zähler Zählgeräte Zählkammern Zählwaagen Zangen Zangen, Halter Zapfkanister Zeitmesser Zeitmesser, Kurz- Zeitschaltuhren Zellboxen, Kryo- Zellkultur Zellkultur-Boxen Zellkultur-Einsätze Zellkulturflaschen Zellkulturplatten Zellkulturröhrchen Zellkulturschaber Zellkulturschalen Zellkulturzentrifugenröhrchen Zellschaber Zellstofftücher Zentrifugalmühlen Zentrifugen 957, 1030 957 963 865 167 165 90 956 956 991 818 805 816 806 813, 823 803, 812 798 840 812 798 840 245 514 703-707, 709-712, 714, 716-719 Zentrifugen zur Fettbestimmung 1008, 1009 Zentrifugenflaschen aus Kunststoff 134 134 Zentrifugengefäße, Gestelle 135 Zentrifugenglas-Ständer, Draht Zentrifugengläser 134, 135 Zentrifugengläser mit Gewinde + Kappe Zentrifugenglasgestelle Zentrifugenröhrchen Zerstäuber 135 135 798 78 1128